Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Folks, this fanfic is going old school. This book is inspired by the later nineteen nineties FFML, Fanfiction Mailing List, Revenge Fanfics. AKA, Revengefics. Where the characters come after the fanfiction writers that screwed with their lives. With the characters having their revenge on these writers.
Only, this story takes the concept and dials it all the way to eleven.
While, I may have gone insane. There is method to my madness.
But, you, and the writer in the story, are going to have the figure that out.
This maybe the worst cast of a story getting away from someone, ever.
And the writer in this situation can only be one thing, if he wants to survive his extended ordeal. That being, The Gambling Man.
Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
A person is about to have a very bad day.
Within the same hour of finding out he has six months to live, he learns that a small army of badasses want vengeance against him.
And the only chance he has of surviving his problems, is he has to flee to the east coast of Mexico. To the mysterious city of De La Plata Podrido.
Where he has has to go shark fishing for badasses, while using himself as live bait.
Can the person whom brought together the Badasses Of the Multiverse, outwit them, and pull off the con-job of a lifetime? Or, will he be caught by them, and do the cha-cha in hell?
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 01: “Falling Hammers.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
A few lyrics of “The Gambler” song, from 1978. “The Gambler” song is owned by United Artists, writing by Don Schlitz, sung by Kenny Rogers.
“You got to know when to hold them.”
“Know when to fold'em.”
“Know when to walk away.”
“Know when to run.”
Truer words were never spoken.
(_)
Reality, An Alternate Earth. Date, early twenty-first century, early autumn. Place, Southeastern United States. Time, in the afternoon.
Inside a doctor's office, a neither young, nor old, tall, fair skin man was sitting in chair, waiting for the results of his medical tests. Among other things, he had on a t-shirt, jeans, a leather belt, and tennis shoes.
He had been waiting in the office for over twenty minutes, according to the digital watch, on his wrist.
Just then, the doctor walked into the office, and shut the door behind him. The doctor then sat down, in his desk chair, in front of the man. With nothing between them.
The doctor has a closed manila folder in his right hand, as he looked at the man.
The man looked back at the doctor, as the man asked, “So, what are the results for my sudden weight loss?” He mentally added, 'I know this is going to be bad news. I never get good news in my life.'
The doctor answered, “You have cancer.” The doctor then pulled out a small piece of paper and pen. He used the outside of the manila folder as backing, to write down something, as he stated, “The name for the cancer is quite long. But, it basically means with treatment, you can live up to two or three more years. Though, given how early we caught this, five years would not be impossible to reach for you.”
When the doctor finished writing one the piece of paper, he put up his pen. He then handed the piece of paper to the man.
The man took the piece of paper, and looked at the name. After which, he pocketed the piece of paper.
The man thought, 'I will look up the name one the internet, for later research. Though, that does not mean much, since I am next to broke. So, let's see how bad this news really is.'
The man said, “Thank you. Still, I don't have the money for treatments. So, how long do I got without medical intervention?”
The doctor stated, “Six months. Maybe less.”
The man inquired, “What should I expect?”
The doctor explained, “The good news is you have time. You have around six months to left. It is good that you were bit overweight before this. And you noticed your sudden weight loss of the course of a few weeks. We caught this early. But, without treatments, you have about six months to live. Basically, you will slowly lose weight, and waste away, until the you die.”
The man commented, “So, towards the end, I will become a living skeleton? I have seen that first hand. It is not pretty.”
The doctor stated, “No. It isn't. And that is what is going to happen to you.”
The man asked, “Anything else?”
The doctor said, “Yes. Towards the end, you energy will drop out, and you will find yourself tired all the time. To the point that you will be unable to leave you bed, and someone will have to take care of you.”
The man stood up from chair. He looked down at the doctor, whom was still sitting in his chair. The man said, in a calm tone of voice that set the doctor on edge, “Fine. There are worse ways to go.”
The doctor offered, “Given the seriousness of the diagnosis. I would understand if you wanted a second opinion. I could recommend some doctors to refer you too. Or, I would refer you to a specific doctor you might want to see.”
The man responded, “No. That will not be necessary. You have been a family friend, for years. I believe you.”
The man thought, 'Given the sudden weight lose, it can only be cancer, or something worse. Like my digestive track is shutting down. Which is not treatable, and it would kill me even sooner. No. I will just deal with the cancer.'
The doctor inquired, “What are you going to do, now?”
The man flatly answered, “I will settle my bill at receptionist desk, leave the building, and use what time I have left to the best of my abilities.”
He then turned to the door. He opened the door, and left office. With him leaving the door open behind him.
Ten minutes later, after the man paid cash for the doctors visit, he exited the building, got into his vehicle, and drove home.
Within five minutes, the man reached his family home. He drove into the driveway of the home, and parked his vehicle. He got out, locked his vehicle, and walked around his family house, to reach the post box by the street.
The mail did not usually come for a few more hours, but the man needed to do something to take his mind off of his problems. And doing such a small chore was like a few drops of water to a parched man, in need to something to drink.
The man soon reached the mailbox. As he opened the mailbox, he saw only a large, sealed envelope inside.
The man pulled out the envelope, and looked at it. He noted that the envelope had his name on it, in print. But, the envelope did not have any address, nor stamp on it.
He thought, 'Someone must have just dropped this directly into my mailbox. Not a wise idea. But, I got nothing better than to see what it inside. What is the worst that can happen? I am poisoned, and die a much quicker, merciful death that what I am already facing.'
He held the envelop his left hand, as he walked to the front door. When he reached the front door, he pulled out his keys, with his right hand, and he selected the key, from his key chain in his right hand, that he needed to unlocked the front door.
After unlocking the front door to his home. He opened it, walked inside, and shut the door behind him. As he pocketed his keys, he soon realized that he was the only one in the house.
He kept the envelope in his left hand, as he walked into the family living room, and sat down in a cushioned chair, behind the family coffee table. Behind the coffee table, on the opposite side the cushioned chair, was the family's large, wall mounted, flat screen TV. And to the sides of the coffee table, were couches, and small tables with lamps on them.
As he leaned back in the chair, he put the envelope in his lap.
The man thought, 'Given the circumstances of my life, I have tried to be as honest, and responsible as I can. I kept my nose clean. Never got in trouble with the law. I don't even have so much as a parking ticket. Never did any illegal drugs. Never smoked a day in my life. I rarely, ever touched alcohol. I have even started avoiding the fired foods and soda. And as I am now dying, what do I have to show for my life?'
'No friends. No girlfriend. No children. No job. No life. No money. No future. Living with my parents... I am a total loser.'
'At least I wrote that story. Which I finished posting a few months ago. To a website I enjoyed visiting. I possibly mildly entertained a few people. So, my life wasn't a total waste.'
He then leaned up, picked up the envelope. He opened it, as he continued his thoughts, 'And writing that series, Badasses Of the Multiverse, was pretty fun. I got a lot of laughs, and enjoyment, in doing so.'
He then dumped the contents of the envelope onto the coffee table in front of him.
What he saw inside surprised him.
There were three items that spilled onto the coffee table.
The man then looked into the envelope, and he found nothing else inside. He crush the envelope and threw it in a small trash can, which was by the chair he was sitting in, to the man's left side.
The man then looked at the three items on the table.
The first thing he looked at was a small business card.
As he picked it up, he saw that the text on the front of the card was in both spanish, and english.
The man did not know spanish, but he knew english, very well.
The english part read, 'Devil's Hotel and Resort.' Along with the hotel's address and phone number.
He mentally asked, 'Who would go to a hotel name, the Devil's Hotel?'
He set the card back down, and he picked up the second item. It was a folded piece of paper. He unfolded the paper to see that it was a flier for a the reopening of a bar.
Like the business card, the flier was in both spanish and englist text. The bar was called, The Rats Nest. And it listed the bar's address and phone number.
The man then noticed that both the card and flier addresses were located in the same city, in Mexico.
The man folded the flier back up, and he set it by the business card.
The man also check the business card, flier, and envelop itself, again. He then thought, with mild curiosity, 'There are no dates on any of these items... Interesting... Now, what is this, that came with these items?'
He then looked at the third and most mysterious item, as he picked it up, to get a close little at it.
It was a small gold ring, with small jewels lining the outside of it. The ring was too tiny for his fingers.
He thought, 'This ring is even too small for an adult's finger. It looks like it was made for a small child's finger. How odd. Still, I wonder if this is a joke. If not, I will have to look into more information on these items, later. I think it best I keep them close to me, as well.”
He then collected all three items, put them together, and into his left front pants pocket.
He thought, in a melancholy mood, 'Not that it really matters. I am dying. Though, drying is a wonderful excuse to go on my very first pub crawl. And a lot of other experiences I always want to do, but was worried I might die, or worse, if I did. Now, what is the worst that can happen. I die. I am dying already. So, why not? I think I will.'
Next, he picked up the remote off the coffee table, as he thought, 'But, that is for later. In a few hours. Right now, I need to decompress on what I have just found out. So, let's see what is on TV.'
He then turned on the TV, and set the TV to a news station.
Suddenly he saw the last person he ever expected to see on TV. Or, anywhere in reality, in live action, or any visual format, outside of text.
He quickly switched through the channels, as he thought, with worry, 'This has got to be some sort of sick, twisted joke.'
As he flipped through the channels, he saw the same person on all the channels, doing the same thing, at the same time. With the video feeds all clearly links to one broadcast.
He thought, 'No. It cannot be a joke. No one personally knows I wrote those stories. And someone had to have hacked the satellite communications systems, in real time. Only, a person with resources could do this. Oh man. No matter how this works out. This going to turn up a hornets nest, leading right to my doorstep.'
'And I thought finding out I was dying of cancer was the worst news I would get today. It is looking like I won't have to worry about the cancer killing me, because this could blow up in my face.'
On the screen was a young, fair skinned woman, with short white hair. That was not the giveaway.
The giveaway was the background, and the woman's outfit.
The first was the background was a red tarp with a symbol on it. It looked like the Soviet, Beat the Whites with the Red Wedge, symbol.
The man thought in denial, 'No. No. No. No. This is not happening.'
The second was the woman's outfit. It was very familiar black armor, fitted to her slender form, while having nothing mask above the woman's neckline, reveal her pretty face and short white head of hair.
Also, the woman had been speaking chinese and then she switch to french. Unfortunately, the man did not know either language.
The man thought in disbelief, “That is Scorpius. And not just any Scorpius, the one I wrote about. The one I changed into a healthy Sebacean woman. The one I put in change of her realities Peacekeepers Forces. And in book four, I gave her multiversal hyperspace gate technology... I think I just inadvertently fucked over my own planet.'
'But, that is not possible... Though, I guess it could be possible, considering I played with almost every imaginable twist and turn one can do with multiverse traveling, and technology for such traveling.'
'I have always been slightly precognitive. But, to think that my imagination may have cracked reality is both a wild, and very, very scary thought. So, what am I going to do now?'
'Too bad I don't know what she is saying. And I don't have time for her to get to english. I have to get out of here, now.'
'I have got to go, while I still can. Because eventually, all the major players are going to figure out what is going on.'
'To paraphrase Thompson. My only chance is that the very idea of the situation is so excessive that those in authority could not possibly believe it. And it will take time for those in authority to admit the truth, to even get the ball rolling on dropping the hammer on me.'
'Fictional characters, that are from multiple fictional realities, coming into real life is going to take a little bit of getting use to, before they even try to track down the writer of this insanity. Me.'
'Fortunately, in dealing with my stories, I always used a VPN, an alias e-mail address, and I never used my real name, nor did I state any background information about myself. So, it will take a little time, for them to connect the dots to me. But, not much. Once the authorities put the pieces together, it will on be a matter of hours until they get me.'
'So, I have no time. I need to get what I here. While leaving a note with my family. Then, I have to leave.'
'What I need to get is my savings. My money. Fortunately, I never trusted banks, and except for a little bit for my debit account, I keep the rest in cash on hand. In hidden locations in my home.'
'It is not a lot. Nowhere near enough to treat my cancer. But, it will get me what I am going, with a little extra, to buy me time, until I figure out what to do.'
'Still, where do I go?... Of course. Mexico. The package I got it tied to this. And even if it is a trap. It is my only real option. And my only real lead to this mess. Canada is too far. And I have clues with the business card and flier...'
The man then realized, as he mentally reflected, with concern, and a bit of dread, 'Somebody already found me. But, instead of capturing me, they left me clues. And a direction to go. They are clearly trying to help me. Like in the movie, Total Recall. Only, they did not give me any money. Then again, money is traceable.'
'And now that I think about it. That is a bad example. Considering Hauser betrayed Quaid and Melina. Yet, I am not looking a gift horse in the mouth. These are the only leads I got. And I will keep these three items with me, until I figure out what is going on.'
'Luckily, my passport is currently valid. And it is here in my home. I also have enough money to live on, in Mexico, for a few months. Which gives me time to come up with a better plan.'
'What else am I going to need? Some pairs of clothing. A razor. A cloth. A comb. That should be it. Also, I should leave my cellphone here. That is a real quick way of getting traced. Fortunately, my vehicle does not have a GPS system on it.'
'And I should not bring any weapons with me. Not even my pocket knife. Even though it is a dangerous place, having those items will only get me into legal troubles...'
'Besides, being shot dead in a mugging is a lot better death than from the cancer that is slowly eating away at me. Or, being caught by those after me.'
'Though, I am keeping my nail clippers, and disposable lighter.'
'Still, how will I get across the border without them taking too close a look at me?... That's it. But, that plan will only work if I am traveling light.'
'Having to buy some supplies, soon after crossing the border, will eat some of my savings. But, it will be worth it, if I can get across the border without a problem. And if I am right, no one will expect I am trying to escape to Mexico. As long as I give that excuse. The only question is, can I make it to be border, before the hammer finally drops on me. And I am reported to the border patrol.'
He turned off the tv with the remote in his hand. He then tossed the remote onto the coffee table.
He got out from his seat, as he thought, 'Now, I just need to get my items, and get that note written. It will have to be a short note, and then I need to leave. Though, I wonder what this city, De La Plata Podrido, is like. I don't even know what that spanish name means.'
The man then went to retrieve the items in his home, that he needed.
Twenty minutes later, he had a couple of changes of clothing, and a few other items, for his trip. He had his money, in his now thick wallet, in his right side pocket. Though, his wallet was still thin enough to fold.
And had his passport beside his wallet, in his right side pocket.
He thought, 'If they do search me. The last place they would look for money on me, would be my wallet. And it is the obvious place one would put it.'
'And my wallet is a nice mix of ones, fives, tens, twenties, and hundreds. If I had all hundreds, and I was searched. Questions would be asked.'
'And I can also use the excuse that I was just planning to go shopping while down there. Such as something nice for me family.'
'In such a position, I will even ask what the duties fees for items such as clothing, and jewelry are. To make everything appear legitimate.'
'Now, to leave the note, I wrote.'
The man then headed picked up the piece of paper he wrote the note on. He headed to the kitchen table. He set the note on the table, and place both the salt and pepper shakers on top of it, so it would not move. He then finished getting ready to leave.
The note read.
Hello family,
I cannot explain what is going on. All I can say is that I have recently realized that the reason crazy and badass are associated with each other is that no one sane messes with members of either group. Now, I have learned that I have inadvertently angered people that would fall in both categories. I have to leave, before they find me.
Do not call the police about me. It will only make things worse for everyone involved. And if strange women, or men, ever come to you, asking about me. Or, looking for me. Be completely honest with them. And cooperate with them, to your fullest. With you answering any question they have about me.
I hope you all lead good lives.
Goodbye.
At the bottom was the man's signature, in his real name.
Two minutes later, after a quick bathroom break, they man retrieve a bottle of water, collected his belongings, and left for his vehicle. With him locking the door he used to exit the home, behind him.
A minute later, he was in the vehicle, with his items. Half a minute later, he was on the road, with his seatbelt on.
Five minutes later, of driving. He reached a gas station on his way out of town, towards the west. He filled up his vehicle's gas tank, walked into the store, paid for the gas in cash, along with an interstate map, and he then left the store.
He then got back into his vehicle.
Next, he put on his seatbelt.
As he started his vehicle, he thought, 'Now, it is a race to see if I can get out of the county, before the hammer comes down on me. And using a vehicle is the safest method. Bus, plane, and boat are heavily monitored by the state. And they all were too isolated. If things immediately went south... This is going to be a long few days.'
He then drove out of town, at the speed limit. So, he would not be stopped by any of the police.
(_)
Later on, as he drove his car onto the interstate, in the direction of the border, the man mentally reflected, 'On this trip, it has occurred to me, that I need to take a few more precautions. I need a disguise, and an alias.'
'I have a few simple ideas on the disguise. All it is will be a few minor changes. Now, the alias. What should I got by? It has to be a broad name. Something that came be used both as a first, middle, and last name. A gender neutral name. But, one that I can live with. It also can be used by different races, including my own. And it is tied to my heritage... I know. Lee. Ya, Lee will do. How about, J.D. Lee. As in John Doe Lee.'
Lee cracked a grin, as he continued his thoughts, 'Yea. J.D. Lee also goes along with my sense of humor. And I will just tell people my name is, Lee.'
'Now, to see what is on the radio. I hope it is not a report of an alien invasion. But, I would like to know more about the details of that message.'
Lee continued down the road, as he turned on his radio, and set the tuner to a talk radio station.
(_)
Over the next two and a half days, Lee travel around fifteen hundred miles. He took three, four hour long naps in the front, drivers seat. With Lee using the alarm function on his digital clock to wake up.
He took these naps, so he would not fall asleep at the wheel. He also had several cups of coffee on the road, a few gasoline refuels, a few meals to go, and some restroom trips. He was currently in south Texas, on a sunny fall morning, as he headed on the interstate, for the south tip of the state, and its border with Mexico.
Lee was currently driving through Brownsville, Texas, on the interstate. Which was almost to the very south tip of Texas.
During those few days of travel, Lee kept the radio on the talk radio channels, for the most part. It seemed that that the broadcast was a simple, one sentence recording, which was looped for about six hours on all TV channels, and most radios stations.
The message was, in english, with Scorpius stating, “We want the writer.” And the message repeated that request in several languages, before repeating the loop, by stating the same message in english.
And there were no reports of planetary invasion by an alien military.
While Lee drove down the interstate, he thought, 'Given both internal, and foreign, issues, currently happening. It seems the various governments did not mind the media talking about this. Mainly because it was not their fault, and it distracted the people from other matters. The government here is even spinning the communications breech as justification for more spending on intelligent agencies... The figures.'
'Also, the message is a simple, as it is brilliant. That message was solely intended for me. To flush me out. And it worked, and got me running.'
'If Scorpius has been any more detailed, the local authorities would likely already figured out it was me, and caught me. So, the message had to be direct, but vague, and mysterious.'
'The person, outfit, background, and message, was enough to let me know they were after me. That was the entire point. I doubt even my readers would fully believe what happened. And I don't dare check the message boards I use, because everything is monitored, and recorded.'
'That being said. It is not surprising there are no reports of an alien invasion. Scorpius realizes that if she launched a planetary invasion, I might get killed in the crossfire. Given Scorpius' nature, I would guess Scorpius is not going to send any of her agents after me. Because, I pretty much gave her everything she ever wanted. Health, power, respect, at a level she was unable to accomplish on her own.'
'No. It is the other women in my series that want my head. Such as Violin, Aeryn, the Lagoon women. The list goes on, and on.'
'And by women, I mean those that were originally women, and the gender bent men I messed with, in my stories. And there are a lot of them. And they are all dangerous. And I am an idiot for messing with them like that.'
'In addition, that is not counting the none gender bent men, whom would likely want my hide, as well. Though, that is a much shorter list, and they do not usually run with the group connected to Scorpius. So, that means the women will like be after me, for now.'
'And Scorpius did the broadcast, and hacking of the communications systems, as a favor to Violin.'
'Besides, coming after me would get a lot of her forces needlessly killed. Plus, she doesn't want to rule this planet of lunatics and dreamers. And destroying any Earth would annoy Violin, and the other women she is doing this favor for.'
'Taking all this into consideration, I am guessing the women want to do this discreetly. Which is good for everyone involved. Though, that still means some of the most dangerous women in the multiverse coming after me. This is serious. But, it is a lot better than a planetary invasion on my account.'
'If there was a planetary invasion, I would surrender myself, immediately. I could write that off as a heroes sacrifice, and make sure they are able to torture me, before I die. To make sure they sated their vengeance on me, and not my homeworld.'
'Though, after everything I have given Scorpius, I don't think I will have to worry about her. The others, yes. But, not her.'
'Still, them finding me is going to be difficult. I used aliases, and VPNs, when I used the internet. That is probably why they cannot use their reality devices to just show up on my door step. They don't know who I am, what I look like, nor where I am from. As far as a reality device is concerned, my alias is more connect to the proxy servers I use, than myself.'
'And since most computers, on the planet, have firewalls and anti-virus programs of different types. Even if they hacked the internet, looking for me, it would take time to put the pieces together.'
'Though, since they are clearly doing this in secret, they know that doing such hacking would attract the wrong kind of attention from the local authorities. So, they won't try to hack the internet for the information. Except may simple IP tracing directly from the website servers I posted on. But, the VPN would cause problems with that. Still, I can use that in my advantage, when I get ready for them.'
'Also, they might look in the U.S. midwest, where I set Bob's origins at. When, I am from the southeastern U.S. Making it so that Bob was from the midwest was an intelligent move on my part.'
'Still, someone is going to get me if I don't get out of the country, right now.'
Lee then saw the sign that said the mexican border was a few miles ahead.
He thought, 'Good. I am almost to the border. Time to park and change clothes, one more time.'
He pulled off the interstate, and to a small outlet mall.
Lee parked away from the other cars, in the middle of the parking lot. He turned off his vehicle, and he left the keys in the ignition.
He then pulled out a set of fresh clothing.
He thought, 'Last pair of clean clothing I brought with me. Too bad I cannot take my clothing with me. But, with my plan, doing so would raise suspicions if I did. And this clean clothing will help hide my body oder. Still, I am also going to have to shave before I leave the parking lot. And fortunately, I have a fresh, unopened bottle of water. Which I bought, to wet my face with.'
'And I don't have any bathroom issues. I took a pee break half an hour ago. And other issues were taking care of earlier today.'
Lee then moved to the front passenger side of the vehicle, for more room.
Lee then quickly changed his clothing. Fresh underwear, socks, t-shirt, and pants. Next, he looped his belt through his clean pair of pants, put back on his shoes, and tied them. Afterward, he pulled out his items that were in his old pants, and put them into his new pants. These items including a handkerchief, nail clippers, disposable lighter, passport, a little loose change, and his wallet.
He had put the Devil's Hotel business card, and the folded Rats Nest flier into his wallet, with his money.
Also, during his traveling, he bought a string, and looped his mysterious ring, into a necklace, which was hidden under his shirt.
He then pulled out his razor, comb, a clean cloth, and a few, unopened bottle of water.
Lee thought, 'Too bad it is too much trouble to use shave cream in here. Nor, do I have access to warm water. I just have to be careful not to get any serious nicks.'
Lee then used the water to wet his face, and he moved over to the passenger side of the front seat to use the vanity mirror to shave. A couple of minutes later, he finished shaving. He dampened his clean cloth with the water, and wipes his face. He found that he has no serious nicks on his face. He then used the bottle from the water to wet his hair, so he could comb and set it.
When he was finished, he capped the bottle and put it away. Tossed the razor, and cloth into the backseat of the vehicle. And he put his comb into his pocket.
Finally, Lee moved back over to the driver's side of his vehicle.
He started the vehicle, drove out of the parking lot, and back onto the interstate, as he headed for the U.S. border with Mexico.
When Lee reached the border, he parked his vehicle in nearby parking lot.
After he turned off the vehicle. He just sat there, staring into space for a minute, as he realized he was about to do something both necessary, and incredibly stupid.
Lee thought, 'The sad fact is that no one can help me with this. I have to do this myself. And this is very risky. I will likely end up dead, or worse. But sometimes, a person just has to roll the dice, and see what happens.'
He then got out of his vehicle. He left the keys in the glove box, and the vehicle unlocked.
Lee thought, 'It is not like I am going to need the keys. And if someone takes the vehicle, they might throw the authorities off my scent, for a little while. Buying me more time, as I escape.'
Lee then headed towards the pedestrian line for the border check point.
It took him about five minutes to reach the pedestrian line for the border check point.
Given it was the mid-morning, on a weekday, the line was not very long.
Half an hour later, he made it to the U.S. border checkpoint.
As he presented the U.S. border agent his passport, the agent asked, “So, what is your business in Mexico?”
Lee calmly answered, so his lie was more believable, “I am visiting relatives in Brownsville, and I decided to take a day trip.”
As the agent looked at Lee's passport, he casually said, “Well, have fun, and be careful.”
Lee honestly replied, “Thank you. I will. And I hope you have a good day too.”
The agent stamped Lee's passport, and closed it.
As the agent handed Lee back his passport, he smiled, while he said, “I appreciate that. You can go on through.”
Lee gently took his passport, and slid it into his pocket. He then walked into the border zone between the U.S. and Mexico. With him getting into the pedestrian line for the Mexican border checkpoint
Half an hour later, Lee made it through the Mexican border checkpoint, and he was currently in Matamoros, Tamaulipas.
Lee then went into a nearby tourist section, and bought an english map of Mexico. Which folded, and put into a pocket.
He then found a restroom, to pee.
As Lee walked out of the restroom, he began to walk through the crowd of people. And as he look out, among the crowds, for a split second, he thought he caught sight of a fair skinned woman, with long red hair, in the distance.
Lee forced himself to remain calm has he turned away from that direction. He continued to casually walking, as he thought, 'Oh hell!... Could it be one of them?... I hope not. And just to make sure, I better get out of here.'
Soon after, he was able to find a mexican taxi driver that spoke english.
As he got into the back of the taxi, the driver asked, “So, where to?”
Lee answered, “I am not sure where it is exactly. If it is too far, let me know how far you can take me in the direction I want to go.”
The driver replied, “Okay. So, again, where to?”
Lee said, “I am trying to get to the Devil's Hotel, in De La Plata Podrido.”
The driver laughed, for a few seconds.
Lee inquired, “Dare I ask why you are laughing?”
As the driver calmed down, the driver answered, in an amused tone of voice, “This one wants to go hell, and he doesn't even know it. Still, you want to go there?”
Lee thought, 'More like hell is ten steps behind me.' He said, “Yes. Can you get me there? If so, how long will it take you?”
The driver stated, “I can get you there in three hours. ”
Lee questioned, “Good. So, how much?”
The driver stated, “Two hundred, U.S.”
Lee pulled out his wallet, and pulled a fifty from it. He handed it to the driver, as he said, “Fifty now. The rest, when get me there.”
As the driver took the fifty, he replied, “Fair enough.” The driver then turned to face in front of him, as he put his taxi in gear.
Lee inquired, “So, what is the city we are heading to like?”
The driver answered, “It is an island city, with a very colorful history. And we got plenty of time to talk about. Now, buckle up. The roads and drivers in my county can be dangerous. And the police can be worse. I know how to avoid all those problems. And I have yet to lose a customer, while in my cab.”
Lee buckled his belt, as he replied, “Glad to hear it.”
While the taxi driver kept his eyes on the road, he asked, “Since we are going be together for a while, what is your name?”
Lee answered, “Lee. Yours?”
The driver answered, “Vincent.”
(_)
Two and a half hours later, a fax came into the U.S. border checkpoint between Brownsville, Texas to Matamoros, Tamaulipas.
The fax had a picture of Lee's face, and it stated that he was wanted for questioning as a material witness, for various crimes.
Though, by then, Lee was long gone, and far into Mexico.
(_)
About that time, during the sunny day, Lee was still inside the backseat of the taxi. And he saw that he and the taxi driver, were driving on the highway paralleling the coastline.
Lee and Vincent has been talking over casual stuff for the last couple of hours. And Lee has been able to keep himself awake for the time being.
Presently, Lee had the mexican map he bought open, as he was trying to locate the city, De La Plata Podrido.
After ten minutes of not finding it, he folded his map back up, and put it into one of his pants pockets.
Lee asked, “By the way, why cannot I find De La Plata Podrido on the map?”
Vincent was in the front driver's seat. He kept his eyes on the road, as he drove, while he replied, “That is become it is not on any map. That is part of the colorful history of Plata Podrido.”
Lee requested, “You might as well tell me. We got nothing better to do.”
Vincent admitted, “You are correct about that. Well, the name of the city, in english means, Of The Rotten Silver.”
Lee thought, 'This is not good.'
Vincent continued, “Plata Podrido was originally a landfill on a sandbar. The landfill was began in nineteen o three, by the nearby coastal cities of Tamailipas. Over time it became an island. And by the nineteen sixties, it was a large island. At that time, the island was over ten miles wide, from east to west. And was over twenty miles long, from north to south. Of course, the island has likely increased in size, since then.”
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Great. I am going to city literally build on a garbage dump. If I didn't have cancer, I would be worried about my long term health.'
Vincent continued, “In the early nineteen sixties, someone got the idea to try to development the unnamed island. The person spent a large fortune dumping ten feet of top soil over the entire island. This took years. He also added plants on top. And while the development plans fell through, the plants, bushes, and trees, did somehow survive and thrive.”
Lee mentally admitted, 'Okay. This sounds better than I thought. In many cases, ten feet of soil is a good barrier.”
Vincent continued, “Along with this. Over the years, the constant tides, currents, and storms, have added quiet a nice beach around the island. And the locals try hard to keep their beach clean. Also, the underground garbage piles only start several feet passed the dirt. Long after you pass the beach. And the garage is several feet underground. So, you would have to dig down to find it.”
Lee thought, 'So, they have a beach there, that is natural and clean. Even though it is not beach season here, it is nice to know that there are some naturally clean places on that island, to spend time at.'
Vincent continued, “With soil, trees, and plants there, by the early nineteen seventies, some of the poor, from parts of the region, started moving there to live. Then, the drug trade took off in the late seventies and early eighties. And the island became a natural staging point, for smuggling, between latin america and the U.S.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Why do illegal drugs always seem to come into play in these situations?'
Vincent continued, “At the same time, the cold war went into high gear in latin america. Such wars had few winners, and mostly losers. Those that lost, and were hunted, followed the drug trade to the island, where found the place to be a safe haven.”
“Everyone from business owners that lost everything, due to either war, or political upheaval. To soldiers and rebels that either lost their wars, or got tired of fighting. All types have fled, and come to call the island their new home.”
Lee thought, 'Meaning that for over the last three decades, Plata Podrido has attracted badasses, from all over the world, whom are looking for a more quiet life. If I want to continue breathing, I am going to have to be very polite to those that live in that city. Still, that also means that the violent crime is not insanely high there, because a thief might get their neck broke if they try to mug the wrong person.'
'And those after me will have to be on their toes as well. Unless than want to attract attention that even they might not be able to handle.'
Vincent continued, “During the mid nineteen eighties, due to the population growth, the local state of Tamaulipas put in place semi-legitimate government and services. Water pipes, power-lines, sewer lines, waste treatment plants, phone lines, a hospital, a fire department, a school were put in place by the government. The water for the city from a desalination plant, pulled directly from the sea. And it safe to drink. Even for those outside of the county. And the waste treatment plant is on the opposite side of the island, from the desalination plant.”
Lee thought, 'Those are major pluses. And I was worried about the water ice. I am still not going to drink from the tap. Though, that is now a minor issue.'
Vincent continued, “The reason the state officials did this was simple. They were getting good bribe money from the drug trade, and they did not want to ruin their gravy train. Also, the island was isolated, and what went through there, did not go through other cities. Which brought in tourist revenue was up in those cities, due to less crime. Though, the Plata Podrio gets some tourism. Such as yourself.”
Lee thought, 'I am less of a tourist, and more of a person on the run.'
Vincent continued, “At the national level, officially, the Mexican government, considers the island to be no mans land. For them it is an environmental and political embarrassment. That is why it is not on any map.”
Lee thought, 'That makes sense on a few levels. If the island does not technically exist on a map, then it also offers plausible deniability for the Mexican government.'
Vincent continued, “As long as things stay quiet, and the bribes flow to the national officials, the Mexican government will not send in the military in to destroy the city.”
Lee mentally worried, 'I might be the proverbial match stick, to the powder keg that is Plata Podrido. I hope not. I have nothing against the people there.'
Vincent continued, “Given the no mans land status of the island, the city on the island is one of the few places where the Mexican government looks the other way, and ignores their ultra strict immigration laws. Thus, allowing foreigners to live their with little worries from the law, as long as they behave.”
Lee thought, 'So, that is one of the major reasons the badasses that came to the city would stay there. And with so many foreigners, it will make it easier for me to hide there.'
Vincent continued, “The police are more lazy than corrupt. They only enforce the law when someone makes a mess of things.”
Lee thought, 'This is very good. Such police are usually lazy until the shit hits the fan. I am the type of person that does not have to worry about such police, because I am polite, and I keep my nose out of trouble. On the other hand, most of those after me are troublemakers. And if I play my cards right, I might be able to use a situation that could develop from such circumstances to my advantage.'
Vincent continued, “Rumor has it. There are many armed people in the city.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'That is would be obvious. Given everything else you just told me about the city.'
Vincent continued, “And most people there speak both spanish and english. And some even speak other languages. So, the language barrier there, for you, should not be too bad.”
Lee spoke up, “That is great to hear.” He mentally considered, 'After hearing all that, I think I might enjoy the time I am planning to spend in Plata Podrido.'
Vincent asked, “So, what do you think?”
Lee replied, “I think it is an interesting tale. And you are a good storyteller.”
Vincent said, “Thank you.”
(_)
A minute later, their taxi came to a fork in the highway.
Lee saw that the fork to their left, lead to a bridge, and an island in the distance.
Vincent then turned the taxi onto the bridge, as he stated, “We are now on the bridge to the island of De La Plata Podrido. We should be at the hotel in ten minutes.”
Lee complimented, “Sounds great. And you have been a wonderful driver, and company.”
Vincent kept his eyes on the road, as he smiled. He responded, “I appreciate that. I do enjoy it when I have polite customers.”
As they cross bridge, they got both got a close look at it.
The bridge they were crossing over was a highway, concrete bridge. The bridge was two standard lanes wide, and was two hundred yards long, and was set about twenty feet above the sea level. And Lee guessed, from the mud he saw at the bottom, it was low tide.
As the exited the bridge and into the city of De La Plata Podrido, Lee thought, 'I think I just stepped into the Twilight Zone.'
(_)
Just under ten minutes later, They drove into the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel.
There was a large sign by the street, which stated, “Devil's Hotel and Resort”, in english.
Less than a minute later, Vincent stopped them in front of the front lobby doors of the hotel, with Lee's side being the facing the sidewalk running along the outside the hotel.
Vincent turned around to face Lee, as he said, “Here we are.”
Lee pulled out his wallet, and gave Vincent the hundred and fifty U.S. dollars they agreed to.
Vincent turned and collected the cash. He said, “Pleasure doing business with you.”
Lee pocketed his wallet, as he stated, “You got me here safe and sound. You did a good job.”
Vincent replied, “It is what I do. Good Luck, Lee. You are going to need it in this town.”
Lee responded, “You to, Vincent.”
Lee then got out of the taxi.
As soon as Lee closed the taxi door behind him, with him standing on the sidewalk, Vincent drove his taxi away. Though, Vincent was polite, and he did not floor his gas pedal. Instead, it was a gradual build to speed.
Lee watched Vincent head back the way he came.
Lee thought, 'I guess he doesn't want to stay here. Though, he was polite enough not to floor the gas pedal. Oh well. Now, let's find out where, here, is.'
Lee looked around himself.
He saw that the hotel was set from the road by a large parking lot, which was about a quarter full.
Lee thought, 'Judging from the number of cars, this is not bad for an off season. This place must be good, in some ways.'
Between the windowed walls of the front of the building and the sidewalk, there were a row of bushes running across the hotel, except for the windowed double doors in front of him, which he guessed lead to the lobby, and two other smaller doors on opposite ends of the side of the building, which Lee guessed were there as fire escapes.
The sidewalk in the front of the hotel was eight feet wide, except for the parts of the sidewalk that let to the doors on the side, which were twelve feet wide.
In front of the double-doors was an awning which stretched eight feet out, to protect the doors from rain.
The building itself, was rectangular, and looked to be around two hundred yards long, with the lobby doors in the center. And Lee counted that the hotel was thirty stories high. He could not tell what the depth of the hotel was. But, he guessed that it was just as long in depth, as length.
There were balconies lining all floors above ground level. Lee guessed that this was the case on the other sides of the hotel.
Lee saw that all the windows were tinted, but he could see into the lobby itself.
And Lee could hear the breaking of wave coming from behind the hotel.
He thought, 'I would guess this place is set by the beach, which is in back of the hotel. Though, it is a little cool to be going to the beach right now. Still, it is a peaceful sound. I wonder what the inside of this place looks like'
Lee then turned, and walked inside. As he entered the double doors, he found himself in an entryway between the first set of double doors, then the second set of double doors that let to the lobby.
As he entered the lobby, the first thing he noticed a was the tinted windows allow for plenty of light into the lobby, with the lobby itself being fairly large. Though, the tinted windows prevented the lobby from being too bright.
There were cushioned chairs and couches every where.
The couches were situated so that each of the three cushioned couches were set as a square, around a small coffee table.
There were four such square sets of couch furniture in the lobby. Two set by the windows, on each side of the lobby doors. And two behind the first two sets of couches.
There were also cushioned chairs set around the room, with two chairs with a small coffee table between them.
Lee saw that there were a few people of various walks of life sitting in these chairs and couches, around the lobby.
To Lee's left, he saw there was a hallway, with a sign in both spanish and english that read, “Devil's Hotel Restaurant and Bar”. Under that line, it read in both spanish, then english, “Breakfast buffet in the mornings”.
To Lee's right there was a hallway that looked to lead to a bank of elevators.
And there were two hallways leading straight back from the sides of the lobby, and deeper into the hotel.
Lee also saw that the check in desk, which was set across the room from the double-doors
It was then that Lee noticed that the music has suddenly changed, as he walked inside. It only took a few seconds for him to realize it, as he looked around.
Then, he recognized the song that was playing.
Lee thought, 'That song is, Hotel California. This is not a good sign. Still, I might as well face the music, so to speak, and check in.'
Lee calmly turned and walked over to the check in desk. Where he saw two clerks.
When Lee reached the check in desk, the hotel clerk in front of him, looked up at Lee.
Lee saw that the other clerk behind the desk, was doing some paperwork. He also noticed they were where hotel uniforms. Which were dark blue, button up, short sleeve shirt. And dark violet pants.
Lee said, “I would like to rent a room.”
The clerk replied, in english, “That will be fine.”
Lee though, 'Good. He is speaks english. Now, to get down to business.' He pulled out his wallet, and he showed the clerk the business card he had of the Devil's Hotel. He stated, “Someone gave me this.”
The clerk smiled, as he stated, “That is good. Because we offer a ten percent discount to those that present one of our business cards when they check in. We like repeat business.”
The clerks comment made Lee happy, as he thought, 'If I ever find out who sent me that business card, I am going to have to thank him, or her.' Lee replied, “As do I. So, what are the weekly and monthly rates for the hotel?”
The clerk told Lee the rates. And what rates were for what rooms, on what floors.
Lee thought, 'Those are very cheap rates, when compared hotels in the U.S. The high floors and those facing the ocean are more expensive. But, I should be able to afford a few months, with money to spare for clothing, other items. Including food. If I get one of the lower floor rooms, not facing the ocean.'
Lee said, “Those are good rates. I think I will take a suite on the lower floor. A one bedroom suites, not facing the ocean. Though, not on the ground floor.”
Lee thought, 'The ground floor is the busiest floor of the hotel. I do not want to sleep on the busiest floor here, for several reasons.'
'Among those reasons, are when those are me, come here. One of them will likely check who is staying on the ground floor. With their reasoning that I would stay on the ground floor, because it would be easier to escape from. As such, staying on the ground floor will only make me appear more suspicious.'
'I also cannot get rope, or rope ladder, for a balcony escape, on a higher floor. They would be to hard to hide. And they searched my room, that would give me away. And I cannot jump down from a second story balcony, or higher, without breaking my leg, or even my name.'
'So, a balcony escape is out. I will just have to figure out other possible escape routes. Before I set my trap.'
The clerk compliment, “A wise choice. Do you have any other questions?”
Lee stated, “Yes. I have a few. I hope you don't mind.”
The clerk replied, “Not at all.”
Lee asked, “Can I pay in U.S. cash?”
The clerk answered, “Yes. You will find most shops, businesses, and restaurants, in this city accept U.S. Also, this hotel offers a fair exchange rate between the U.S. dollar and the Mexican peso. Along with a few other currencies.”
Lee inquired, “That is nice to know. Do you need my ID to check in?”
The clerk said, “No. This is a, no questions asked, hotel.”
Lee questioned, “Do I need to make a security deposit with the hotel?”
The clerk stated, “No. But, if you damage your hotel suite, without reason, and should you refuse to pay for repairs, we will hurt you.”
Lee agreed, “That is fair. What about TV, phone, and internet?”
The clerk said, “We get our TV off of a satellite dish. We have a nice selection of channels to choose from. This includes a number of english channels, many are also seen in the U.S. Our phone and internet come from a dedicated fiber optic cable, that goes straight to a highspeed server on the mainland.”
“Our phone system is voice over IP, and we we offer wireless highspeed internet. When you get to you room, you will find a paper by your phone that lists both that suites hotel number, the check in desk number, and the wireless password for the hotel. If that paper is not there, place inform us and we will give you the information.”
Lee inquired, “Do you monitor you internet and phone service? And if so, will I be billed for my use of those services?”
The clerk explained, “We charge you extra for usage, and how much you download, after a daily hundred gigabyte cap, that begins at midnight. We only monitor usage. Not content. Such as being a bandwidth hog. Meaning don't upload stuff. And don't download at more than five megabytes a second. Also, we will question you if you start making several long distance phone calls. And we will charge you for those phone calls.”
Lee replied, “That is reasonable.” Lee then noticed one of the cameras high on the wall, near the ceiling of the room, to his right side. He looked at the camera, as he thought, 'I need to ask another question.'
Lee turned back to the clerk, as he inquired, “Is your security system tied to the internet? Such as your camera system?”
The clerk answered, “No. Our camera system is not tied to the internet. The cameras are on a standalone system. A lot of people come here for vice. And we respect their privacy. And your privacy. As long as no one is hurt, we don't care what you do. And neither do the local police.”
Lee thought, 'That answers that question.' He commented, “I find that comforting. Though, I am not into such vices.”
The clerk smirked, as he replied, “That is your choice.”
Lee requested, “So, let's start the ball rolling. I would like to check in for a month. And as I said, on lower floor. Though, not on the ground floor. And a suite not facing the ocean, so I can get a better rate.”
The clerk said, “That will be fine. We prefer frugal customers. Such customers usually return year after year.”
Lee thought, 'That is interesting.' He inquired, “So, you are not trying to get me to rent a suite, but the next three suites, in my possible future visits?”
The clerk replied, “Exactly.”
Lee honestly commented, “I am glad at least somewhere on this planet, such wise business sense still exists.”
The clerk said, “Then, I think you will like your stay here.”
Lee replied, “I think I will agree with you.”
The clerk asked, “So, would you like to pay up front in cash.”
Lee answered, “Yes. As soon as the paperwork is done.”
The clerk said, “That will be fine.”
Ten minutes later, the clerk printed off the paperwork, and Lee used his alias to sign the paperwork, J.D. Lee. Though, Lee did read the paperwork first. It was just a couple of sheets of paper. They were liability forms, and there was no fine print. Just standard stuff, and given the name of the hotel, he did check to make sure he was not signing away his soul. Which the clerk assured him was not the case. And all that was required on the paperwork, was his signature, or in this case, he alias. The forms did not even require him to date his signature.
Lee figured the clerks would date the forms, after he handed them back. Likely with a rubber stamp, with ink.
After Lee finished with the paperwork, and handed it back to the clerk, with his left hand. Lee then pulled out his wallet, and the money he needed to pay for the room, for a month. Next, he put his wallet back into his pocket, with his right hand, while he used his left hand to pay the clerk.
The clerk took the money and counted it. He saw that the payment was all there.
The clerk then went and retrieved a keyring from the board, behind the check in desk. Along with the clerk presenting Lee with his receipt.
After the clerk came back, he handed the keyring, and receipt, to Lee. He stated, “This key is to a room on the third floor. When you get to the third floor, take a right, and keep going. Then, take a left, you will find this room to your right. It has a balcony that faces the pool. Which is the south end of the building. You can even see the ocean to your left, from the balcony. Also, we have an excellent cleaning staff. If the room is not spotless, with the sheets clean. Contact us.”
“If you find any bedbugs, or other pests, contact us immediately. We will find you an other room for free, for a week. Fortunately, we are always on top of such problems. When we have a bedbug problem in a room, we replace the carpet, and mattresses. We are very serious about quality, and cleanliness here, at the Devil's Hotel.”
Lee took the keyring, and receipt. After pulled out his wallet, sticking the receipt into his wallet, and putting his wallet back into a pants pocket, he looked at the keyring. He saw that there was a key on it, and not an electronic keycard, but an actual key to his room. There was also a plastic tag on the key ring with listed his room number.
Lee pocket the keyring, as he looked up at the clerk. He said, “That all sounds great.”
The clerk commented, “While you ask about your soul, with the contracts you signed. I am surprised you did not ask about the Hotel's name.”
Lee responded, “I just figured there was no point in asking. I am sure the owner of the hotel had his, or her, reasons for the name, and I prefer not to be judgmental.”
The clerk replied, “That is what I figured, as well.”
Lee inquired, “So, you don't know the answer, either?
The clerk admitted, “Nope. And I am not going to ask. This job pays too well for me to screw up.”
Lee complimented, “Well, don't worry. You are doing a great job so far.”
The clerk replied, “I appreciate that.”
Lee mentioned, “I have had a long day. I am going to turn in for right now.”
The clerk said, “If you have any problem with the room, or the services we provide, just call the check in desk number, any time, day or night, and we will be more than happy to help. All the clerks here are very polite. Just dial the pound symbol on the phone to reach us.”
Lee replied, “If I need anything, I will. And thanks.”
Lee then turned to his right, and he walked towards the elevator bay.
(_)
A few minutes later, after taking an elevator, Lee was on the third floor of the hotel. He took the clerk's directions, and he soon found his the hallway door to his suite.
He use the key unlock and open the door.
After he walked in, turned on the ceiling light, with a wall switch.
He then closed the door behind him, and he locked the deadbolt, on top of the knob on the door. With the knob set to automatically lock, after it was released from being turned open.
Lee found that the suite had two rooms. One was the bedroom, with a one bed, table, a couple of cushioned chairs by the table. There was nightstand, to the left of the bed, between the bed and the wall. On the nightstand was a small lamp on it, a phone, a digital alarm clock, a TV remote, and a paper with information by the phone.
There was a nice sized, flat screen TV mounted to the wall across from the bed.
Under the TV was a chest of drawers. By the TV, on the check of draws was a microwave. By the chest of drawers, on the ground, facing the door, was a small refrigerator and freezer.
By the refrigerator was a small, steel trash can.
Lee noticed that there was a small wall safe near the door to the hallway. Lee looked at the safe for a few seconds, as he thought, 'I need to get the combination to that safe some time, from the check in desk clerks. But, that is a small matter.'
Lee then walked to the sliding glass door, which was across the room from the door to the interior of the hotel. He saw heave curtains. He pulled back on of the curtains, to see a nice balcony outside.
Next, he looked by the wall, beside the sliding glass door to see the heater and air conditioner machine. He walked over and turned on the heater slightly. He found that the digital temperature gauge on the machine listed both Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Lee set it to seventy-five degrees Fahrenheit.
Lee then walked over to the door to the other room in the suite. The bathroom.
He opened the door and turned on the lights to see that the bathroom was very clean. There was complimentary bar soup, shampoo, toilet paper, and various towels in the bathroom. The bathroom was fairly large for its type. Lee felt that he was not to small for the room.
The bathroom had tiled floor and walls. The bathroom had a tub in it, with a shower nozzle. It has a western style, old style, three gallon toilet. And there was a vanity sink, with a large mirror above the sink.
Lee turned off the bathroom lights, and he re-entered the bedroom area.
He walked over to the bed and opened up the folder sheets to find that everything appeared to be fresh and clean.
The sheets even felt clean to Lee's sense of touch.
He then bent down and look at the carpet.
The carpet appeared to have been recently shampooed and vacuum.
He thought, 'They were not joking about cleanness. This place is cleaner than my bedroom, back home. Which is fairly clean. I think I am going to like this room. Now, to get some rest.
He then walked over to the wall, by the door, and he turned off the light.
The only light in the room was the outline from the heavy, closed curtains that were around glass doors.
Lee then went to his new bed, and kicked off his shoes.
Finally, he opened the sheets on his bed, and crashed on top of the sheets, to get some much needed rest.
Lee fell asleep only seconds after his head hit one of the two, large, comfortable pillows, on his twin sized bed.
(_)
Several hours later, Lee was laying on his back, with his head on a pillow, as he opened his eyes, and he yawned.
For a few seconds, he thought he was back home, in his bed, and this has been a dream. Then, he realized he was wearing his pants and socks. The previous three days of events came back to him.
He immediately turned his head to his left, to look at the digital clock on the nightstand.
The clock stated, six thirty-two AM.
Lee knew the sun had already rose form the ocean, due to the light coming for the outline of the curtains on the sliding glass door.
Lee thought, 'I slept for over eighteen hours... Still, that was a good sleep. This is a good bed... I might as well get up and face the day. I need to get cleaned up, and get a shower.'
'Though, I don't have shaving cream, razor, deodorant, toothbrush, toothpaste, nor spare change of clothing. Oh well, that was the price of escape. At least I have a comb for my hair. And I have the money to replace those items. So, those shortages will change very soon. And a shower will help... And I am hungry. I hope that breakfast buffet is open right now.'
Lee then got up from his bed. The light from outside provided enough indirect light for him to see his way to the bathroom.
When he got into the bathroom, he turned on a lights inside. He then took off his clothing, and wrist watch. Next, he got cleaned up, showered. Fortunately, along with toilet paper and towels. The hotel provided complimentary small bars of soap, and a small bottle of shampoo.
After Lee showered, he dried off with the soft hotel towels, combed his hair, and he put back on his clothing, and watch.
He left his comb by the sink, in his bathroom.
As Lee put on his shoes, in his new bedroom, he saw on the clock that it was now six fifty AM.
He then checked himself in the bedroom mirror. And he looked alright.
He then looked at his watch, and a thought occurred to him.
Lee turned to the clock in the room, as he thought, 'I better adjust my watch to this time zone. I am a few hours off.'
Lee then adjusted his digital watch to the clock in his room.
Next, he made sure he had the key to the his suite, on the keyring. After he did so, he walked to the door to the hallway.
He unlocked the top deadbolt lock, he then turned the knob. After which, he walked into the hallway, and he gently shut the door behind him.
When Lee released the knob it automatically locked, just before it shut.
After which, Lee headed for the elevators, to get something to eat at the hotel bar and restaurant.
(_)
Three minutes later, Lee walked across the front, ground lobby, from the elevator banks on the right side of the lobby, to the hallway with the sign for the restaurant, on the left side of the lobby.
When he entered that left hallway, he turned to his left, and he saw the entrance to the restaurant was about thirty feet in front of him.
The entrance to the restaurant was a set of paned double-doors, which were currently open.
As he approached the doors, he saw no sign by the door, which stated the restaurant's business hours.
Lee thought, 'I will just ask an employee when this place opens and closes.'
It took only a few seconds for Lee to reach the restaurant. As he entered the establishment, he looked around the restaurant and bar.
In the center of the room were several round, wooden tables, in the tiled floor, with cushioned, armless, wooden chairs set around them, in grouped of four to six chair per table.
The room looked like it could seat over a hundred people.
Across the room, from the door was a small stage, set up from the floor. On Lee's right side, he sat on that side of the stage, against the wall, was some speakers, with four wireless microphones on top of the speakers. By the speakers were two flat screens mounted to the wall. One screen was angled towards the stage, the other screen was angled for the audience. All wires for the screens and speakers went into a large box that was set against the far corner of the wall, on the stage.
There was a sign by the stage, which said, in both spanish, and english, “Karaoke machine used night. All are welcome to give it a try. Wide music selection.”
Lee thought, 'Nice. I have never tried karaoke before. And I am more than willing to give it a go. I got nothing better to do in the evenings. When I am not working on my plans. I guess the screens must show the lyrics, both for the singer, and the audience. And the screen also probably is used to select the music. Given hard drive space for computers today, and the selection of music on this karaoke machine has is probably quite wide. Especially, considering this island is not an a map, and the management of this hotel likely doesn't have to worry about lawsuits.'
Lee then looked and saw that the bar counter was to his left, a few feet into the restaurant
Between the bar counter and the doors was a hallway for the kitchen area, and restrooms of the restaurant.
The bar counter itself was shaped like an upside down, uppercase, L, shape, with the counter running along parallel with the other side of the room, and then turning to face the stage. The entrance to the counter being beside the hallway, towards the front of the room.
Lee saw that the cash register was on the side of the bar counter, near the hallway, at the front of the restaurant.
Lee saw that the person manning the cash register was a woman, in a hotel clerk's uniform.
To Lee's right, he saw the breakfast buffet, with foot, and drinks, lining the far right side of the wall.
Lee looked at the people on the room, as he thought, “I would estimate that the room was about twenty percent full at the moment. Which, given the time of day, is pretty good. I think I got here before the breakfast crowd came. Now, got get something to eat.' He then turned to look at the cashier, as he continued his thought, 'I might as well pay the woman first. And maybe get some questions answered about this restaurant and bar.'
Lee then walked over to the cashier. He found that there was presently no line in front of the cashier.
As he stopped in front for the cashier, across the bar counter from her. The woman looked to be middle-aged, she was of average height, and physically fit, though, she had a little meet on her bones. And from her skin tone and facial features, she looked to be from India.
She looked up at Lee, as she said something in spanish.
Lee politely said, “Good morning. I apologize, but I do not know spanish.”
The woman replied, in english, with an indian accent, “That is quite alright. And good morning to you too. I am Emily. What would you like for breakfast.”
Lee answered, “Well Emily, how much is the buffet in U.S. cash?”
Emily told him.
Lee thought, 'That is very cheap. I hope the food, and drinks, are good.' Lee said, “I think I will order a buffet.”
After Emily rung him up on the cash register, he pulled out the cash for the buffet, and he got the receipt and change.
As Lee pocketed the receipt and change, he inquired, “Is it okay if I ask you a few questions?”
Emily replied, “Sure. We are not busy, yet. So, ask away.”
Lee asked, “I did not see a sign outside, in the hallway, by the restaurant, which stated its business hours. So, when does this restaurant open, and close? When do you serve alcohol? When do you serve off a menu? And when do you serve a buffet during the day?”
Emily casually commented, “That is okay. Those are all good questions. We do not have a sign there, because that sign keeps disappearing. We don't know why.”
“The restaurant opens at five thirty AM, and closes at midnight, or a little later. That depends on the bartender, whom gets in around ten thirty AM. He is a nice guy. The staff and customers like him.”
“For the most part, we do not serve alcohol in the morning, until the bartender gets in. We can get you a bottle of beer, but that is extra, to the cost of the buffet, since we already provide drinks for buffet. We only serve the breakfast buffet, everyday, from five thirty AM, to ten thirty AM. Also, it is all you can eat. We also have a breakfast menu during those hours.”
“For the rest of the day, we accept orders from our lunch and dinner menu, all the way, till about eleven thirty PM at night. That is when we start cleaning the kitchen. Though, we close the bar between eleven thirty to midnight. Depending on how busy we are. It is the bartender's call on that. Though, if we are not that busy, the bartender can sometimes call as early as ten thirty PM.”
“Still, you will find our menu selections nice. Also, there are some restaurants around town that are good, as well. The restaurants in this town cater to a number of different styles of food. We get a lot of foreigners coming to town and staying. And a few of us have opened up restaurants that serve food from our homelands. Most of us are pretty good a fixing food.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms Emily is from out of town. Now, for a few other questions I have.' He asked, “That is nice to know. What else do this hotel provide?”
Emily answered, “We have a laundry mat just up the hallway from here. We have indoor hot tubs, on the right side of the building, with sliding glass doors facing the fully sized, outdoor pool. With the other, direct entrance to the pool being down in the hallway, behind the desk, to our right. Once you enter that hallways, just immediately take another right, and keep going to the pool. You cannot miss the pool.”
“We have a full workout gym that overlooks the beach. A game room, with pool tables, and video games. And we have a small theater room in the hotel, on the ground floor that plays requested videos. Any videos, as long as it is not outright pornography. Movies, TV shows, animations, music videos. Whatever you want.”
“Though, this service is first come, first serve, on request. With then taking a few minutes to find the request, and waiting for what is playing to finish. But, it is free for customers of the hotel, to listen and watch. And we don't usually get a lot of requests on the off season. Most of the time, it is just families, and large group wanting to watch a movie somewhere, besides their hotel rooms.”
“Though, the theater cannot be closed for a private party. It is open to all customers, as long as those customer behave and are not disruptive.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. You had been very helpful, Emily.”
Emily replied, “You're welcome. And enjoy your meal.”
Lee inquired, “I plan to. Still, I have one more question for you.”
Emily said, “Sure. What is it?”
Lee asked, “I don't mean to pry, but how did someone from India end up here, in Mexico?”
Emily stated, “It is okay. When we were young and stupid, once. My younger, Grace, and I joined a group to try to end the hidden apartheid of India. We lost, but the two of us got away. And now we are here.”
Lee thought, 'So, they were revolutionaries. Interesting. Not surprising. But, interesting. Also, Emily and Grace are obviously aliases for these two sisters. So, they are not worried if people know those aliases, because they cannot be traced back to their past in India. And with over a billion people in that nation, it is hard to backtrack two of them. Now, to be polite.'
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Emily replied, “No problem.”
Lee then turned, and headed to the buffet, which was across the room. As he did so, he thought, 'What what Emily told me about herself, this place is getting more mysterious, by the day.'
Lee soon found that the buffet had mostly mexican breakfast food, and american breakfast food. Which was not surprising, given what both culture ate very practical types of food items for breakfast.
Still, Lee could not stomach the mexican food, even though he loved the taste of it. The food did not agree with him. But, there was plenty of other food to choose from.
Also, the drink selection was fair. There was bottled water, orange juice, apple juice, milk, and coffee, to choose from.
Lee soon had a plate of american food, including scrambled eggs, hash-browns, and french toast, in his right hand. He had a glass of an orange juice in his left hand. And he had his napkin and utensils, held between the glass and his left fingers
He soon found an empty table that he sat, as he began to eat his breakfast.
As he ate, he found that the food, and orange juice, were good.
(_)
When Lee finished his breakfast, he looked at his digital wrist watch, and he saw that it was seven thirty-four AM
He picked up his plate and glass, and walked over to the area where he saw people dumping their dirty dishes at.
As he turned and walked towards the hallway exit of the restaurant, he turned to Emily. As he passed by her, he politely said, “Please let cooks know they did a wonderful job with breakfast.”
Emily turned to Lee, as she smiled. She happily responded, “I will. And have a pleasant morning.”
Lee replied, “You to.” He then turned turned the doors of the restaurant, and a few seconds later, he walked out of the establishment.
As Lee turned to his right, and walked down the hallway, towards the lobby, he thought, 'I am going to need find out where some places are. I think it might be best if I ask the clerks up front.'
'The one yesterday was very nice. And so was Emily, here. Still, I need to also find out where the places I need. And when they are open.'
'Also, I need to know which ones have the best prices. And how to find these places on foot. I am going to have to walk where I need to get, to save money. But, I can use the exercise. Though, I am dying, if I start exercising now, and regularly, from here on in. I might buy myself an extra week of life.'
Lee then reached the exit to the front lobby. He turned for the check in desk.
When Lee reached the desk, and he asked the clerks on duty, the questions he needed. He found that the clerks at the check in desk were very helpful with his questions. They told him the places that were best for what he needed to get. Which had the best prices. How to get to those places on foot. And when they opened. Which, Lee found out that most of the places opened between eight and nine AM. Which meant they would open just as he reached them.
When Lee was finished with his questions, he thanked the clerks on duty, and walked out the lobby, and into the conformable sunny day, out onto the parking lot.
Lee soon walked out of the parking lot, and towards the make business district of the town, which was only a few blocks away from him.
As Lee headed to the places he needed to go, he kept an eye out for danger. But, he found that everyone was just going about their business, and they left him alone. Which, given the circumstances, was fine with Lee.
Because it was a weekday, there were no problems with any of the shops not being open that day.
The first place Lee went to, which he reached right after eight AM, when they opened, was a hair salon, that had a men's barber section.
The wait was short, and Lee soon was in the chair of the barber. First, Lee had a professional shave of his face. He found the barber did a wonderful job, with no nicks, nor cuts. Next, he got his hair cut into a masculine, short style. But, not a crew cut. Finally, he got his hair dyed, from his natural color, to black.
This was all part of Lee's plan. And he was happy with the salon's results. After he paid them for their services, he left the salon.
The next place Lee went to a small grocery store. There he got soap, shampoo, shaving cream, disposable razors, deodorant, toothbrush, toothpaste, dental tape, toothpicks, six bottles of water, and a small bag of candy. He also bought a deck of playing cards for his suite. So, he would have something to do during the times he was in his suite. All of these items fit in a small plastic bag.
And last, but not least, Lee went to a decently priced clothing store, where he bought several pairs of underwear, socks, pants, and shirts. He also bought a gym bag, a blue cloth jacket, a blue baseball cap, some nice looking sunglasses, and some large, fake glasses, with just clear plastic lens.
This all fit into two large clothing bags. One was a full bag. The other bag was half full. Lee stuck his grocery bag into the half filled bag.
And after all this, Lee found he still had plenty of money for food for the next few weeks.
Fortunately, the two bags were now that heavy. So, Lee was able carry them back to the hotel. Which was not to difficult. Though, Lee kept a more careful eye out for trouble, as he headed for the Devil's Hotel. But, luckily he had not problems.
It was ten thirty by the time Lee returned to the hotel.
After dropped some of the items off in his suite, on the third floor, he went back to the ground level, with his clothes, and gym bag, to wash them at hotel laundry mat.
Two hours later, Lee finished cleaning, and drying his clothing. He then stuffed his clothing into his gym bag, and he headed up to his suite on the third floor.
When he got his room, he pulled out his clothing, and folded all of it. He then put away all of his clothing, except a clean set of underwear, socks, t-shirt, and pants, the chest of drawers. Along with this, he left out his jacket, baseball cap. He even folded his gym bag up, and put it into the chest of drawers.
Afterward, placed his two sets of glasses, his bag of candy, and his deck of cards, by the TV. He then put his bottles of water into the refrigerator, except for one he took into the bathroom with him.
He then brushed his teeth with his new toothbrush and toothpaste. He used the bottle of water he had to rinse his mouth out.
Next, he took a shower, using the shampoo and soap he bought. After he was rinsed off, he used a towel to dry. When he was dry, he used his deodorant, and he put on his fresh clothing.
Lee also transferred the belongs in his old pants into the pockets of his new set of pants, along with him looping his belt through his new pants.
Once his belt was buckled, he tucked in his shirt.
After Lee put on, and tied his shoes, he then walked over and put on his large glasses, his blue baseball cap, and his blue cloth jacket.
The temperature outside was just cool enough to warrant wearing a jacket, without anyone being suspicious about it.
Lee then walked into the bathroom, and looking at himself in the mirror.
With his the new black hair style, glasses, and baseball cap, Lee could barely recognized himself.
He said out loud, “This will do.” He then mentally added, 'Now, to get some lunch. The way Emily spoke of the bartender here. He sounds like he could be useful to me, in a number of ways.'
Lee turned off the lights, and shut the locked door to his suite behind him. He then headed down the hallway, to the elevator bay, and the ground floor, to go to the hotel restaurant and bar.
As Lee walked though the lobby, out of the corner of his eyes, he noticed a security camera.
He continued walking, as he thought, 'It is too bad that I was to tired to get my disguise before I got here. And a few of the cameras got a good look of my face, yesterday and this morning. Still, if I don't say anything about it, and wait a week, or two, it is likely that people will forget what I originally looked like, and the cameras footage will be deleted, so that hard drive space will be reused for new footage.'
'That just means that either way, my time table will be at least a few weeks, until I move forwards. Which is fine, because I am going to need that time to plan and prepare, for what I have in mind.'
Around a minute later, Lee walked into the restaurant, as he glanced at his watch to see that it was one o two PM. He then looked around the room to see that it was establishment was not busy.
Lee saw a few waitresses around the room. They were in hotel uniforms, and they were waiting the tables, but Lee felt like going to the bar.
Lee walked up to the bar counter, facing the left side of the room. And he sat in the stool. From behind the bar, an older man walked up to Lee.
The man had fair skin, and he looked to be in his early sixties. But, he was still in good physical shape. Though, his body build was a little on the lean side. He had clearly shaved the hair on his head, as he was bald. Also, he had a dyed blond goatee, mustache, and eyebrows.
The man wore a white t-shirt, under a green sweater, with brown pants, and black dress shoes. He also wore a red newsboy cap on his head. But, around the cap, Lee could clearly see the man had shaved his head bald.
Lee thought, 'Given this guy's clear age, why would he dye his facial hair, yet shave his hair. Unless, he is in hiding. From what, I don't know, nor do I care. Still, I wonder if this is the guy that Emily was talking about?'
The man said, in crystal clear english, “Hello. What can I get for you, today?”
Lee requested, “A menu. Also, this morning, Emily said that bartender. I guess you. Were a decent guy. So, I thought I would meet you.”
The old man smile, as he replied, “Emily is such a sweet dear”
Lee agreed, “From what little I know of her, I would agree. My name is, Lee. What is yours?”
The man answered, “I am, Melvin. Nice to meet you, Lee.” He then extended his right hand.
Lee shook the Melvin's hand, with his own right hand. As Lee did so, Lee noted that Melvin's handshake was firm, but not tight. Just like Lee's own grip. which Melvin noticed, as well.
Lee thought, 'A firm handshake is a good sign of character.' He said, “And it is nice to meet you, Melvin.”
A second later, they broke their handshake.
Melvin then pulled out a menu from under the counter. He set it in front of Lee, on the counter, as he said, “The menu is in spanish, and english. I have other customers. I will be back in a minute, for you to tell me what you want.”
While Lee picked up the menu, and looked at it, he replied, “That will be fine, Melvin.”
(_)
Lee ordered a club sandwich, with chips, and a soda. He found that the meal was tasty, good, and at a decent price.
After he finished his meal, he paid for it, left Melvin a fair tip, and politely requested that Melvin let the cooks know they did a good job.
Melvin happily said he would.
Lee use the restaurant men's restroom, and he then left for the hotel lobby.
When he reached the lobby, he looked at his watch to see that it was one forty PM.
Lee looked up, at the check in desk, as he thought, 'I guess it is time to find the Rats Nest bar.' He then headed to the check in desk.
(_)
Fortunately, after Lee got directions to the Rats Nest bar, it only took him only forty minutes to walk to the bar, at a reasonable walking pace.
The outside of the bar was wooden, and brown colored, for the most part. There was a parking lot the left side of the bar, when coming into the building.
The front of the bar was line with large, paneled windows, except for a door in the center.
On the top front of the building, there was a sign, which looked like it could be lit during the night, in large letters, in english, “Rats Nest.”
At Lee looked at the front of the Rats Nest, he thought, 'When I looked at the front of this bar, and inside, through the front windows, why does Rock quote, at the first episode of Black Lagoon come to mind? The so called bar at the end of the world you see in westerns, quote.'
'The clerks at the Devil's Hotel did warn me that the Rat Nest was a tough place. But, I still have to come here.'
'Though, I did one time look into dangers bar on the internet. And I found that there are actual bars in real life that are dangerous as the Yellowflag in Black Lagoon. Or, in some cases, even more dangerous. And I don't have a gun.'
'Oh well. I have to check out this lead. I have no choice. And I am facing worse, so there is not much to worry about... So, I might as well walk in.'
Lee then walked up to the front door, open it, walked inside, and gently close it behind him.
As he stood, with his back to the closed door, he looked inside the bar, and he saw that it was not very large room.
The bar had brown wooden floor, bar counter, stools, tables, and chairs, giving the bar an old western motif. He also saw that the left side of the room was line with large, paneled windows, like the front of the bar.
When Lee turned to his left side, he could see that parking lot to the bar through the windows on the left side of the room.
To Lee's right there was a bar counter, in a right side up, L, shape that faced the side of the bar, and the front of the bar, with cushioned stools along the counter.
Across from the bar were several round tables, with cushioned, wooden armless chairs.
Lee estimated that the room could fit around a fifty people in all.
On the back wall, near the middle of the room, there were doors for the restroom, beside each other. With the doors being directly in line with the front door. The door to Lee's left side had a, men, label on the door. And the other door, to Lee's right side, had a, woman, label on the door.
The door to the other parts of the building, was behind the bar counter, on the right wall, by the back, right back corner of the room.
Also, the bar counter entrance was right beside the door corner door, in right back part of the bar.
On the far end of the bar counter, near the door to the back part of building, was a cash register.
Lee also noticed there were not that many people there. Most of them were sitting at a table, in the back left corner of the bar, playing poker, with money.
And the bartender to the Rats Nest appeared to be a very beautiful, young woman, in pants and a shirt. She had a slender build. And she had her hair in a short, feminine hair style, that was very professional looking.
Lee thought, 'I might as well be polite, and order a beer.'
Lee walked up to the bar counter, and sat to where his back was to the windows showing in the parking lot.
This also allowed him to see the front door.
Lee thought, 'It is always wise to keep an eye towards the front door in places like this. Never turn you back to the front door.'
From behind the bar counter, the beautiful woman walked up to Lee.
Lee looked at her in her eyes, not her chest, as he thought, 'In situations like this. First impressions are very important. I need to look at her face, not her breasts.'
The woman noticed this. Still, she said, in a slight hard, no nonsense, tone of voice, in fluent english, “What do you want?”
Lee continued to look at her face, as he thought, 'She can probably tell I am from the U.S., so she just started with english. Now, to make my order.' He answered, “A bottle of beer. Something cheap, tasty, and cold.”
The woman cracked a grin, as she said, “Sure. Two U.S. dollars.”
Lee pulled out two dollars from his wallet and handed it to her, with his left hand, while he pocketed his wallet with his right hand.
The woman took the money. The then woman pulled a cold beer from a refrigerator under the table, and set it in front of Lee.
After which, the woman went to check on her other customers.
Lee looked at the bottle of beer, as he gripped it with his right hand. It was cold to the touch, and it was a cheap, though tasty American brand.
Lee used his left hand to open the cap of the bottle, without a problem. He then took a drink from the beer, as he thought, 'I will give her this. She will give you what you ask for.'
Over the course of the next ten minutes, Lee just sipped his beer, as he starred in front of him, at the mirror over the shelf of bottles, across the bar counter. He thought, 'What am I suppose to do now? I am at the rough bar. Clearly not going to cause trouble. But, the flier lead me here. So, what am I suppose to do now. Maybe I just need to think on my plans. I got nothing better to do.'
From the corner of his eye, Lee noticed the bartender glancing over at him. He thought, 'That is the third time she has done that in the last few minutes. But, I don't liked it.”
The woman then walked over to him. She casually said, “You look like a man with a lot on his mind. And I am a woman that is just bored enough to ask. I have noticed that you didn't look at my breasts when you first came in. And instead, you consciously looked at my face. That earned you points in my book.”
Lee looked at her, in the face, as he replied, “Thank you. And the name is, Lee.”
The woman replied, “Lee? That is an asian name?”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. She did not tell me her name. Not that it matters. I am in hiding. And asking such questions will get me noticed. Though, I do need to make one thing clear about my alias.'
Lee corrected, “Actually, Lee is both an asian name, and a name for caucasians from the southeastern United States. And the name, Lee, means two different things, depending on if it is the asian meaning, or the american meaning.”
The woman responded, with slight curiosity in her voice, “Interesting. And Lee, you have an odd look about you. You look like a man who is both running from trouble, and running towards trouble. So, what got you to come all the way out here?”
Lee shrugged, “You could say that I was channeling so serious mojo, and I got out before I was burned.”
The bartender smirked, as she commented, “Let me guess. A woman?”
Lee coyly replied, “Something like that.”
The bartender said, “You know there is nothing worse in hell's fury than a woman scorned.”
Lee corrected, “You are wrong about that. There is nothing worse in hell's fury than women scorned. Plural.”
The bartender let out a laugh. She stated, “Whatever you are, Lee, you are in clearly trouble. My kind of trouble. So, good luck with that.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
The bartender cracked a grin, as she looked at Lee. She then turned, and went to see to her other customers.
Meanwhile, Lee turned to look around the bar, as he sipped his beer, which was now almost empty.
Lee thought, 'Let's admit it. I'm screwed. From the broadcast, the women are looking for me. Or, should I saw, whom they call, the writer.'
'The only plan that I can come up with is that I use myself as bait, by posting something on the internet, and let them trace it to this town. The hotel to be exact. Any wider an area, and things become too difficult for me manage. I need them close for this plan to work.'
'But, by doing so, I am literally dancing with tigers. In an insane, high stakes, cat and mouse game. Hoping they won't eat me, while I quietly steal one of their bells, or reality devices, in this case, without them knowing it, until I am gone.'
'The only good news is I used aliases and a VPN, along with the police state of the internet, with firewalls on top of firewalls, they don't know my real name and likeness. And the disguise and alias I have now will help myself even further.'
'Also, the plan is workable. Though, it will be a few weeks before I do this. I do not want to pulled the trigger on this just yet. Not until I have a good lay of the land around here. After I have fun the proper planning and preparation.'
'When I am ready, I will post something on the internet, that they can trace here from the IP address record. While, I make sure I am not recorded in doing so. The hotel does have wireless internet access.'
'The reason I don't get a computer myself is to fold. I cannot afford the money, and I would be tempted to use it often, and I am sure, if I did, I would get caught by someone tracing me. So, I have to use someone else's computer.'
'Though, all I need to do is pay someone that is going to leave, in a day, or two, to allow me use their computer for five minutes. Not hard, I just have to be careful. A hundred bucks, and a kind word will probably let me use someone's computer. I say I just need to check my e-mail real quick. And leave message. Then, I put the message, and delete my tracks on the computer. Hell, the person can watch, he or she won't notice anything wrong.'
'The message I am planning on posting is. Sorry for everything.'
'Then, I hope the women take the bait, and send a few in their group after me.'
'I am looking at one to three women, at most. This is a manageable number. They will not be watching each others backs all the time. I just wait for my opportunity. Next, it is a matter of drugging them, and stealing one of their reality devices. Not impossible. I just have to be on my toes. Once I have the reality device. I can escape into the multiverse, and seek treatment for my medical problems. Among other things. And it will be simple as that...'
Lee inwardly groaned, as he mentally admitted, 'Ah, let's be honest. I am dealing with Murphy's Law here. It will not be that simple. But, it is a workable plan.'
Lee then saw man with a well groomed, full beard, and long hair cropped in a ponytail by a scrunchy, sitting in the corner table. The man had clean out the other five men sitting at the table, by playing various hands of poker.
For a second, Lee eyes and the man's eyes locked.
Lee thought, 'Damn it. I got someone's attention. This is bad. I just have to be polite, and I can probably get out of this. But, not knowing spanish is going to likely get me hurt here. Still, there is nothing I can do about that.'
As the others at the corner table got up and left the bar, the man also got up, collected his money, pocketed his cash, and calmly walked over to Lee.
The man was had fair skin, and he wore a dark plaid button up, long sleeved shirt, brown pants, brown leather belt, and black cowboy boots.
When the man reached Lee, he sat in a stool beside Lee, at the bar counter.
The man turned to face Lee, and the front of the bar behind Lee, as he calmly said, in english, “Hello.”
Lee replied, “Hello.”
The man said, “I am, Sam. What is your name?”
Lee answered, “Lee.”
Sam smiled, as he stated, “Nice to meet you, Lee. You look a like a man without friend in this town.”
Lee mentally thought, 'More like this planet. Hell, more like this multiverse.' He admitted, “You could say that, Sam”
Sam offered, “Want to join me for a round of poker?”
Lee thought, 'I just watched you hammer those people. Still, I wonder exactly what type of game you are playing?' He inquired, “What type?'
Sam said, “Casual five card draw poker. Nothing special. Five card draw. Up to three cards replaced. Betting, bluffing, and calling. Betting starts at one dollar, U.S.”
Lee stated, “It has been a while since I played some poker. And if you are looking for an easy mark, you are going to have try a better pitch. I just saw you clean out those five men at the table.”
Sam chuckled. He then complimented, “You may not have a friend, but you clearly have some common sense. I like that. And I am also bored out of my mind. I have plenty of money, but not one here, save for the bartender, whom a sense of humor that I appreciate. Except perhaps for you.”
At the moment, the bartender was collecting glasses from across the room, at the table Sam had been sitting at it. Though, the bartender left Sam's drink alone, along with the deck of cards that was on the table.
The bartender had clearly overheard them, as she commented, “Thank you, Sam.”
Sam looked over at bartender, as he said, “You're welcome.” He then turned back to Lee, as he commented, “Anyway, you look like someone who really has nothing left to, except some cash. On the other hand, I have plenty cash. And I am doing this more as a hobby, than anything else. So, why not?”
Lee mentally admitted, 'Sam, you are right about me having nothing really left to lose. And I could use this to both practice my precognition, and my poker face. I won't get anywhere in my plan if I cannot hide my emotions better. So...' He replied, “Oh hell. I might, as well.”
Sam smiled at Lee, as he stated, “Good. Come with me to the corner table.” He stood up, and walked to the back left corner table.
Lee finished his bottle of beer and left it on the bar counter. He then got up and followed Sam to the table.
Meanwhile, the bartender walked back over to behind the bar counter.
Sam sat with his back to the corner, while Lee sat a little to Sam's left, across the table from him. This allowed Lee to still see the entrance to the bar with the corner of his left eye.
Sam pulled out some of his money, and placed it on the table.
Lee did the same.
Sam then picked up the deck of cards from the table, and he began shuffling them.
Sam soon finished shuffling. He then started to deal the cards, as he stated, “Don't worry. I will go easy on you. I have a feeling you have potential. And I do enjoying watching someone's potential come to the forefront.”
Lee replied, “I appreciate that. By the way, do you know the bartender's name? I have a feeling she would not answer that question, if I asked her.”
Sam grinned mischievously, as he said, “You would be right. No one knows, and that is the way she likes.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Works for me.”
After the five cards were dealt for each of them, both men picked up their cards and looked at them.
Lee causal his body language, and facial expression relaxed, as he thought, 'Since I am playing for money, I have to have a poker face. And I have to prevent myself from showing any tails. If I get this down, I might start experimenting with my precognitive abilities. I have some ideas, but I will need someone's help. And Sam seems to be the kind of guy that might help.'
'And at least, this will help stop him from being bored. Which my earn me a friend here. Or, a quicker death, If it is playing. Either way, I don't have a bad hand. So, let's see how this plays out.'
Sam put down a U.S. dollar in the center of the table, as he stated, “I will start the betting pool with one dollar.”
Lee matched the U.S. dollar, and put down another dollar, as he said, “I will see that dollar. And raise you a dollar.”
Lee soon one the first hand. And they played around hand. And another hand.
The next few hours went by quickly for both men.
Lee lost some hands and won some hands. But, he won way more than he lost. The only time they stopped was to get a few beers, and for bathroom breaks.
As Lee held his cards, in the middle of the hand they were in, he knew he had a bad hand, as he said, “I fold.”
He then put his cards down, with Sam winning around twenty dollars from that hand.
As Sam collected the cards, and the pot, Lee looked at his watch, and he saw that it was five thirty PM.
Lee mentally realized, 'It is a forty minute walk to the Devil's Hotel. And it will be dark soon. I need to get back. Still, I think I got won quite a bit of money here. I would say around four hundred dollars. Though, he may have let me when. But, why?... Probably to someone around, to keep him entertained. He did say this was more of a hobby for him.'
'Still, four hundred dollars is four hundred dollars. If I am frugal. This will keep me fed for at least a month and a half, without me going into my savings.'
Lee stated, “I apologize, Sam. But, I don't have a car, and I have to walk back to where I am staying.”
Sam suggested, “Why not call a taxi?”
Lee stated, “I need the exercise, and I am trying to save money.”
Sam requested, “That is understandable. My I join you in your walk?”
Lee shrugged, as he said, “Sure.”
Both men then collected this money, and Sam also collected the cards. With Sam putting his cards back into the cardboard box for his playing cards. The men then pocketed their items.
The two men then got up from the table, and heading for the front door.
On their way out out of the bar, Lee dropped a ten dollar tip on the counter for the bartender.
At that moment, the bartender had been standing behind the bar counter. She saw the tip that Lee had laid.
As the bartender collected the ten dollar bills, she said, “Thanks.”
Lee turned his head, as he said, “You're welcome.” He then looked to his front, as he opened the door for Sam. Next, Lee followed behind Sam, with Lee closing the door behind him.
When the reached outside, the turned and walked down the right side of the sidewalk, when exiting the bar.
Sam slowed down enough, for Lee to catch up. He then walked at a cause pace, beside Lee, to Lee's right side.
As they walked down the sidewalk, Sam asked, “So, where are you staying?”
Lee answered, “The Devil's Hotel.”
Sam commented, “So, am I.”
Lee responded, “That is not surprising. I have been here for just over twenty-four hours. And except for the name, the place is nice. My suite is good. The employees are polite. The food and drinks are nice. And the prices on everything are great deals.”
Sam agreed, “Exactly. That is why I checked in there. I did some research first, and I found the place had the best bang for my buck, and it came highly recommended by those that have stayed there.”
Lee said, “Yes. They did say they like repeat business. That seems to be a rarity nowadays. Most businesses are just trying to make a quick buck, as their customers expensive.”
Sam replied, “I know. And I don't get that.”
Lee stated, “It is short sightedness. That is all.”
Sam said, “I guess that is true.”
The two continued talking, as they walked towards the hotel they were both staying at.
Lee found that Sam was a good conversationalist, and that he was very knowledgeable. But, Lee was careful not to give away who he really ways, and why he was in De La Plata Podrido.
After around forty minutes of walking, they made it to the front lobby doors of the Devil's Hotel.
Lee thought, 'Looks like we are becoming fast friends. I have never had a friend before. I won't mind having at least one in my lifetime.'
As they entered the hotel lobby, they both noticed the music in the lobby change to a song that Lee recognized the new song. It was, Deranged, by Coheed and Cambria.
Sam stated, “I do not know this song.”
Lee said, “It is a new song, with a catchy tune.” He mentally add, 'I will refrain from telling him that the song is from a Batman video game, and what the lyrics to the song mean.'
Sam inquired, “So, are you hungry?”
Lee said, “I could use some supper.”
Sam commented, “So, can I.”
Lee suggested, “Hotel bar then?”
Sam agreed, “Why not? I also hear they have karaoke every night.”
Lee replied, “I am game if you are. But, I have never done karaoke before.”
Sam said, in a supportive, positive tone of voice, “Don't worry. It's fun, and easy to learn. Now, let's head there.”
The two men then turned to their left, in the hotel lobby, as they headed for the hotel restaurant and bar.
When they got there, they found people were already starting to use the karaoke machine to sing, which started as six PM. Most of them did okay. And in such singing, it was the effort that counted. With the audience cheering the good performances, but not booing the less than good performances.
The two men sat at the bar counter, with them facing the left wall of the room. The entrance to the restaurant was to their left side, and the stage was to their right side.
Sam saw to Lee's left side.
The two men then ordered their meals, and a couple of bottles of beer to drink.
As they ate, they continued talking between bites, and drinks.
After the finished eating supper, they stayed in the bar, as they each had a bottle of beer almost every hour, while they watched the karaoke performances.
Over the next few hours, Lee and Sam also took a few opportunities to sing some songs. As the people who wanted to sing kept rotating, after singing one song.
Both of them sang badly, with two exceptions.
Sam did a marvelous job of singing karaoke for the Randy Travis song, Highway Junkie.
Sam got a standing ovation at the end of his performance.
Lee turn was next. He sang Kenny Rogers version of, The Gambler song, which everyone clapped when he finished.
Sam and Lee even sang a few songs together, in a duet.
It was a great night for Lee. Probably one of the best nights of his life.
Around ten PM, they called it a night. They paid Melvin for their meals, and drinks. Along with each of them giving him a nice tip.
(_)
Both of Sam and Lee soon made it to the elevator bay together. They saw there was no one else around them.
Sam pushed one of the up button on the panel, between two of elevators, on the side of the room.
Sam then turned to Lee, as he suggested, “Would you like to meet again, tomorrow morning?”
Lee replied, “Sure. When, and where?”
Sam answered, “Let's say eight thirty tomorrow in the morning. We can play poker and talk in the lobby in the morning. And head to the Rats Nest in the afternoon.”
Lee said, “Okay. But, we can alternate playing games, besides poker.”
One of the elevators opened. The two men saw the elevator was empty. They both stepped inside, and turned around to face the open elevator doorway.
As doors closed, Lee selective the third floor, while Sam selected the tenth floor.
Sam replied, “Sure.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to ask for his help, for my precognitive abilities, without getting to detailed.'
Lee requested, “And when we play poker, there like you help with something.”
Sam inquired, “What you have in mind.”
Lee stated, “There is a trick I would like to teach myself, that I think playing poker with you, could help with.”
Sam inquired, “Sounds interesting. What is it.”
Lee thought, 'If I don't tell him, I could blow this friendship, before it even develops. So, why not?' He explained, “Well, believe it or not, I am precognitive. I can sense the future. But, I am not very good at it. And I was wondering if I could try to develop that skill when it comes to playing poker.”
Sam raised an eyebrow, as he stated, “Now, that sounds interesting. I would love to help you.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, “Thank you. We will do it for a little bit, tomorrow morning. But, when we do, no money until I get the hang of of this trick.”
Sam agreed, “Sure. I can understand. And when you do master that trick, you will be one formidable poker player. If not a fighter.”
Lee pointed out, “I am not a fighter. I am just a fool in a bad spot of luck.”
Sam chuckled, as he shook his head. He said, “That is pretty much what they all say, in the beginning.”
Lee replied, “We'll see.”
The elevator door opened to the third floor, as stated by the digital readout, above the floor selection panel, in the elevator.
Lee commented, “This is my floor.”
Lee walked out of the elevator, and turned to face Sam, as he said, “See you tomorrow morning, Sam.”
Sam smiled, as he replied, “See you to, Lee.”
The elevators doors then closed.
Lee turned and headed down the hallway, his room.
When Lee reached his room, unlocked the door, and turned on the ceiling light. He then walked over to the lamp light by his bed, turned it on, and then switched off the ceiling light.
As he headed for the bed, he grabbed the TV remote, on top of the chest of drawers.
He was intent on watching some TV, for a few minutes. Then, something occurred to him, as he thought, 'This hotel offers both TV and internet. That reminds me. I need to do something, before I forget too.”
Lee set the TV remote back on top of the chest of drawers. He then walked over to the steel trash can, and picked it up, with his left hand. He saw that the trash can was empty. Next, he walked over the heavy curtains that were in front of the sliding glass window.
He used his right hand to opened the have curtains, by the draw string, to his right, by the corner of the sliding glass door, as he thought, 'I hope this does not damage the trash can. If there is a problem, I will pay for a new trash can. Still, I have to do this. If I have any hope of getting through this alive, I have to live completely off the grid.'
Lee then unlocked the latch to the sliding glass door, at the top of the door, to his right side. He then pushed, by its handle, to his left side, to open it.
He then walked into his suite's balcony, which had a steal, guardrail.
Even though it was night, Lee's lamp light provided all the light he needed to see with, to do this.
Also, it was fortunate that it was not too windy.
Lee pulled out his passport, his wallet, and his lighter.
From his wallet, he pulled out his ID cards. He then put his wallet back into a pants pocket.
After which, he used his lighter to set each of his pieces of ID to burn. As they caught fire, he dropped them into the steel trash can, and he watched them melt and turn to ashes.
He burned all his ID cards. He started with his passport. Soon, among other IDs, he had destroyed his driver's license, bank cards, concealed weapons license.
When Lee finished, he thought, 'No turning back, now. But, this had to be done. These IDs could be used to find me. Someone could steal my wallet. Or, if I hid the IDs here, they could pick the lock to my room, and find my IDs in here. Either way would likely lead for it to be game over for me. Now, to clean up.'
After Lee made sure there was nothing but ashes, he got a bottle of water, and pour a little bit of water into the trash can, to stop the smoldering. When he was sure it was no longer hot. He took the trash can into the hotel bedroom.
Lee closed the sliding glass door, and the curtains, behind himself.
He then found the plastic groceries bag he had brought with him, earlier that day.
He took the trash can, and the plastic bag, into the bathroom.
Lee turned on the bathroom light, and used some toilet paper to clean out the ashes from the bottom of the trash can. He put the toilet paper, and the ashes, into the plastic bag. When he was finished, he saw that the bottom of the steel trash can was fine.
He tied up the plastic bag, and he set the trash can back by the refrigerator, on the floor, with the closed plastic bag place by the trash can.
As he when back to wash his hands, he thought, 'I will dump that plastic bag into another trash can, elsewhere in the hotel, tomorrow. And I think I will just head to sleep now.'
Lee then got ready for bed, turned off the lights in his suite, headed for his bed and he went to sleep.
(_)
The next few weeks were filled with interesting misadventures for Lee. Many of those adventures involved Sam.
Lee had found that he had developed a wonderful friendship with Sam.
They played poker a lot, sometimes including other people. Lee found he tended to win more than he lost. And not just from Sam. Lee won money from others, at playing poker. Lee found that was he really developing his poker face skills very well. With him being able to remain calm on command, at a moments notice.
Also, the two men being together, others tended to back off, and leave them alone.
Lee found it odd that while Sam usually shuffled and dealt their cards, Lee won more often, than not, against him. Still, when one lost money to the other, they didn't seem to mind. And Lee made sure not to lose too much during an unlucky streak, which was rare for him.
Also, when it was just Lee and Sam, Sam let Lee experiment with his precognition and playing poker. And the results were interesting, as Lee was slowly able to develop his precognitive abilities further than they naturally were. Lee's psychic ability seemed to amaze Sam. As Sam found that this added ability made playing Lee even more unpredictable.
In addition, they played other games with each other. At the hotel, they played pool. Though, that ended quickly, when Sam showed how good a pool shark he was. When he broke the pool balls, and ran the table, in one turn.
Fortunately, Lee had not been betting money at the time. And Sam just wanted to show how good he was at other games.
Lee complimented Sam on his skills. Though, after such a demonstration, Lee fell back to playing Sam at poker, where he felt that he would have better chances with Sam. And Same did not mind, Lee's reaction to his skills.
During this time, when Lee was not with Sam, Lee worked on his plan, while learning more about the city of Plata Podrido. This included him mapping out, in his head, where the elevator bays and staircases were, in the Devil's Hotel. So, he could come up with several escape routes, if need be.
Among other things and places Lee learned about, he found two other places that he liked to eat at.
One place Lee ate at, from time to time, depending on his mood, was a american style, greasy spoon diner, which served breakfast, lunch, and supper, any time they were open.
The diner was open from six AM, to midnight. And Lee came in there regularly, at different times, to have breakfast, lunch, or dinner.
The diner was called, the Last Resort Diner.
The diner was the only place in town which Lee found to serve good sweet iced tea, and grits.
And while there were occasional workers doing their shifts, three of the workers stood out to Lee.
Those three were two of the waitresses, and one of the cooks.
The two waitresses were a black haired fair skin woman, and redheaded fair skin woman. Both women were slender, young, and pretty. The redhead had short hair, while the black haired woman long hair that hung loosely, down to her shoulders blades.
The black haired woman was named, Lori. The redhead was named, Mary.
There cook was a muscular black haired man with tanned skin. His name was George.
Though, Lee found George to be a good cook, half the time. The other half... Well, the food was edible.
Lee was always polite to all three of them, and they turned the favor.
When the food was good, he complimented them. When it was not, he said nothing. He also made sure to tip those whom serve his food.
And those three seemed to be coming into work every day, pulling eighteen hour shifts. Lee did not know how they did it, and he knew it was rude to ask. Thus, he did not bring up the subject. Though, he admired their work ethic.
The other place Lee found, that he liked to it at, was a food truck that was manned by two slender, young, fair skinned, pretty blond women. One had short blond hair, and the other had long blond hair. Though, they were clearly not sisters.
The two women were based on a street, on the eastern beach of the island.
The two women served sandwiches, including hamburgers, and french fries. Also, they served bottles of water and various sodas.
Lee preferred to go there for lunch. And he also complimented them on their food, and tipped them well.
They appreciated Lee's manners, and his money.
Though, Lee never did get the names of the two women.
(_)
Over three weeks into Lee's stay at the Devil's Hotel, one night, Lee was in the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
Sam had already turned in for the evening. After he paid his tab, he left.
Meanwhile, Lee was drinking the last of his bottle of beer, at the bar counter, with the counter in front of him, as he faced the left side of the room.
Lee found that according to his wrist watch, it was midnight. And as he looked around, he saw only him, and Melvin, the bartender, were in the room.
Lee could sense that he was slightly buzzed from the beers he had been drinking that night. Though, he was feeling more relax, than anything else.
Lee still had a little bit of beer in his bottle, as he set it on the counter in front of him.
Lee thought, 'I am not completely drunk. So, much as just buzz. I am more relaxed, than happy, sad, or angry. This is just the way I like to feel.'
'And as long as I don't drive, I should be fine. And I am going to sleep, in my room, after this. So, that will not be a problem. Still, this is a good opportunity to learn some things about, Melvin.'
Lee saw that Melvin was near him, behind the bar counter, and he was drying some been mugs by hand, with a dish rag.
Lee said, “Hey Melvin. You want to talk about anything? It is just you and me right now. And I am in a good mood to talk.”
Melvin set down his glass and rag, on the shelf on the wall, behind the bar. He then looked over at Lee. He smiled, as he turned, and walked took a few steps closer to Lee.
Melvin came to a stop, as he stood across the counter from Lee. While looking at Lee, he responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Sure. What you do want to talk about?”
Lee replied, “That depends. What do you want to talk about, Melvin?”
Melvin asked, “Well Lee, I was wondering. Where are you from?”
Lee returned Melvin's smile, as he said, “I am from the southeastern United States. I am what you would call a redneck. You?”
Melvin answered, “Russia.”
Lee complimented, “Now, that I think about it, I can barely tell the hint of an accent in your voice.”
Melvin replied, “Thank you. I have a lot of experience with speaking english. So, why are you here?”
Lee thought, 'I will keep it vague. But, might as well be honest. If I am going to learning in front him, I have to give a little to receive a little.' He answered, “Trouble with the law. How about yourself?”
Melvin said, “About the same. Only a lot more complicated for myself.”
Lee offered, “I am all ears.”
Melvin countered, “Isn't that my job?”
Both men chuckled at Melvin's joke.
As they calmed down, Melvin took a deep breath. He then slowly let out that breath.
Melvin the looked back at Lee's eyes, and he saw that Lee's eyes were warm, with a sense of compassion.
Lee saw Melvin's eyes, and he that Melvin's eyes showed a very tired person. And not just physically. But, emotionally, as well.
Melvin stated, “Given my life. I consider myself a very lucky man to get out of my troubles in one piece. It started when I was young, and I was drafted into the Russia military. One thing lead to another, and I ended up a paratrooper.”
“This was during a time, that I sent into the middle of a very horrible war. After my comrades and I got out of that hellhole, in one piece, we discharged from the Russian military. And my military company decided to go freelance.”
“I should have quit right then. But, at the time, I was still young and stupid. Though, the city we moved to wasn't that bad. It was summer all year around. And except for the occasional crazy, everyone knew to leave us alone. Our captain took care of us. She cared out all of us.”
“Then, things got weird. Really weird.”
“But, eventually, things started calm down, but our sergeant resigned.”
“Last I heard, he hooked up with two kids, he is on an endless vacation. Lucky bastard.”
“It was calm for a while under our captain's command. We had many adventures. The captain even got a brown haired girlfriend along the way named, B. I guess time can wear down many people's resolve. Not that we minded. We always figured she swung that way. It explained a lot.”
Lee did not miss the pronoun drops. And while he did not show his reaction on the outside, he thought with wonder, 'Holy crap. Melvin was a member of Hotel Moscow. And with the mention of, B, he has to be from the Hotel Moscow I wrote about. This is the first time I have met a reality traveler, face to face.'
'And this is a good, casual meeting. It could not be a better meeting between the two of us. Though, I am not telling him, who I really am. Also, he is clearly not after me. I think he is hiding from them, like I am. And Melvin is clearly an alias. I have to find out more. For any other reason than I kind of left the Hotel Moscow plot lines open ended. I wonder how things played out?'
Lee asked, “So, what happened next?”
Melvin coyly answered, “Let's just say, that except for the captain, we got older. And many of us had too many regrets. The captain decided to offer us all eternal youth, for a price. Everyone else still alive, took up the captain's offer, but me. I didn't realize at the time that her offer was more of an order, than an offer.”
“I ran. I grabbed my... traveling equipment, but the equipment was shot during my escape. It was totaled, but the equipment still got me here. And I have been making the most out of being here, for the last five years.”
Lee thought, 'Meaning, except for this guy, the rest of the surviving members of Hotel Moscow had the vat process done to them. They have undergone a gender change to a woman, and youth restoration with that super-soldier serum.'
'On the other hand, Melvin wanted to remain a man. He ran, got a reality device, it was shot, and the damage to the device created a blind jump to this reality, for Melvin.'
'Maybe, this incident, of Melvin coming here, five years ago, was even the original crack to this reality. I don't know. But, it was five years ago, for him, and he has been hiding out here since then. Just like I am doing now. And being a bartender is wise job for the situation. It lets him keep an ear to the ground, without people asking him to many questions.'
'Also, this means Balalaika could still has her crew. And they are stronger, faster, and more powerful than ever. That could cause me problems, later on. Though, given the personalities of those after me, I doubt they will send Hotel Moscow to hunt me down. They want to personally deal with me.'
'And I admire Melvin for being this honest and open with me. I respect Melvin's wishes. And I will help him if he needs it.'
Melvin continued, “I have not seen any of them, or whom I think they would look like. So, I feel that I am in the clear. And this is a good life. This job pays okay. And clientele is always interesting. And the local people, the beaches, and weather, most of the time, are nice...”
From the expression of Melvin's face and eyes, Lee saw something occur to Melvin.
Melvin commented, in a sober tone of voice, “Oh god. As far as I know, I am literally the last man standing, from that town.” His tone of voice then began to contain a bit of mirth, as he continued, “You could say I traded one hotel for another hotel.”
Lee thought, 'That would be an understatement. And the first reality traveler I meet, is literally the last man standing from the situation. Now, that is ironic.'
'Still, it is good that he has not seen any of them since then. And unless Balalaika, or B, comes, I doubt anyone else would recognize you, Melvin. I know that Hotel Moscow members did not associate closely with those outside your group. That means I can still bait the others, without risk of you getting caught in the proverbial net they will try to use to catch me. Though...'
Lee suggested, “It sounds like you need a drink.”
Melvin chuckled.
Melvin pulled out a cold bottle of beer, from a fridge, under the counter, by them.
Melvin opened it.
Lee used his right hand to pick up his bottle of beer, from the counter. He toasted, “Live free. Die free.” He then drank the rest of his beer, and set the empty bottle on the counter.
Melvin accepted the toast, as he replied, “I hear that. So, what song did the lobby of the Devil's Hotel play for you, when you entered the hotel, for the first time?”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. I need to learn more about this matter.' He commented, “So, that wasn't my imagination. How does that work?”
Melvin stated, “I am not sure, myself. And I am not sure I want to know. But, the song that plays when you first enter, is the theme you are likely to live by while here.”
“Sometimes, it will also play a song when you walk in to a lobby with someone, or a group, with the song being the theme for you and those with you. You can always tell that it is for you, if you just walk in, and the music playing on the lobby the speakers suddenly changes, and starts playing another song.”
“That new song is your theme, during your stay here And it is a good way to be forewarned about what is coming your way. Though, the lobby ever plays a second song, later in your visit. Just for yourself. Unless it has been a while sense you have been to the Devil's Hotel.”
“So, I ask again. What song did you hear when you walked into the lobby, for the first time?”
Lee thought, 'I wonder why the lobby of this hotel played, Deranged, for Sam and I?... Though, I guess I might as well answer him. I will mention the song that the front lobby played for me. And I will not talk about the song that played for both Sam and I.'
Lee responded, “To answer your question, the lobby played, Hotel California.”
Melvin said, “Ouch. It looks like you are going to be stuck here for a while.”
Lee thought, 'Actually, given I am dying of cancer. That might be a hopeful song, in that I may have more time than I realize. Though, I long since decided, soon after I got here, that it is best not to time of my cancer. It just detract what I need to do. Still, I wonder.'
Lee shrugged, as inquired, “It could be worse. How about you? What song did lobby play for you?”
Melvin answered, “Welcome to the Jungle. And my life here has lived up to that theme. And what my life was like, before I came here, that is saying something.”
Lee agreed, in thought, 'It sure is.'
Lee then heard Melvin mutter under his breath, “It is not fun lacking back up. But then, you do what you got to do.”
Lee thought, 'Though, I am sure it is nothing that a former member of Hotel Moscow cannot handle.'
Lee suggested, “How about we change the subject? What movies do you like?”
Melvin said, “Well, my tastes have a wide range, when it comes to entertainment. But, I have found that I am a fan of Vin Diesel, along his action and sci-fi movies.”
Lee complimented, “Nice choice. Mister Diesel makes good movies. He is one of those few actors that appreciates, and understands, the genres of the roles of the movies he plays in.”
Melvin smiled, as he replied, “I know. I am especially drawn to the Riddick character he plays. I like the way he uses those knives. Riddick reminds me of myself, when I was young and stupid.”
Lee thought, 'Really?...' He said, “That is all very interesting. And Riddick is an interesting character. Not a hero. Not really a villain. He is just a guy that wants to be left alone.”
Melvin agreed, “Exactly.”
Lee mentioned, “And I must say, that Riddick game, Escape from Butchers Bay, is one of my all time favor first person shooter video games.”
Melvin agreed, “Yea. I played that on my laptop computer. It is a good game. Very stealth based, with good shadows and nightvision mechanics. Well, it is getting late, and I need to close.”
Lee got out of his stool. As he stood up, he pulled out his wallet. He said, “No problem. I was planning on heading to bed anyway. Good night, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “Good night, Lee. And I enjoyed this conversation.” He headed for the cash register
Lee also walked over to the cashier register, as he stated, “Same here, Melvin.”
Lee then paid his bar tab, with Melvin. After which, he left the bar, for his room, to get some sleep.
(_)
A week later, after Lee got his hair dyed black, again, and he had used some of the money had had won from Sam, and a few others, to pay the front desk to extend his stay at the Devil's Hotel. He had paid for two more months to stay at the hotel.
Now, Lee was ready to leave the bait. He guessed that the security recordings of him entering the Devil's Hotel the first day he came to the hotel, had already been deleted. Because, there was no reason to keep them.
Lee had done nothing, and as far as he knew, there had been no disturbances during his stay at the Devil's Hotel. Though, he knew that was about to change.
Lee was careful, not to be recorded. Over the last few weeks, Lee had casually been taking his time, walking around the hotel. And he mentally noted where the security cameras were, from the corners of his eyes. He also noted the angles, and he did see a few blind spots.
One such blind spot, he noted, was on the outside concrete patio, leading to the beach. The patio was fairly long, and large. And there were outdoor tables. With each table surrounded by four outdoor cushions chairs. With large, open umbrellas sticking up from the tables, shading the chairs, and those sitting in the chairs.
The exact blind spot was a set of chairs, on the corner of the patio, against the building.
As Lee was about side, on the beach side patio, he looked around that morning, he saw his mark.
Lee saw tanned skinned man, with brown hair, whom was wearing in pants, and a loose t-shirt. The man was sitting at a table, in the blind spot. He was working on a laptop computer, on the table, with a computer mouse placed on the bottom of the laptop, below the built in keyboard. And the man had a frustrated look on his face.
Lee thought, 'This is my chance. There is a blind spot there. Plus, the open umbrellas. I just need to play my cards right. I can do this.'
Lee walked up to man. As he came to a stop under the umbrella the man was under, he asked, in a polite tone of voice, “Good morning, sir. Are you having computer problems?” He thought, 'If I am under the umbrella, and the blond spot, no one can read my lips from the recordings.'
The man looked up at Lee, with a pleading look in his eyes. He answered, in english, with a spanish accent, “Yes. My sons last night played some video games. Now the icons are too small, and the screen is too bright, and hurts my eyes to look at. And I am trying to figure out how to fix it, because I have some work I need to do on it. While, my wife plays on the beach with our sons.”
Lee glanced at the beach, where he saw a woman playing with two young boys. Due to the slightly cooler weather, they were in pants, shirt, and shoes. And they were not going swimming. But, they were clearly having fun.
Lee then looked back at the man, as he thought, 'This guy, and likely his family, is spanish. Not mexican, but actual spanish, from Spain. The accents between the two are easy to tell, if one knows what to hear for. I have been here long enough to know the difference.'
'I would guess this family is vacationing here, at this time, to save money, due to it being in the off season. That being said, I think I know what his boys did to his computer.'
'If they were playing games, they would likely set the laptop to high resolution. That would make the icons smaller. And the difficulty in seeing is due to the boys raising the gamma setting on the screen, so they could see the game they were playing better. And like small children, they forgot to return what they played with back to the way it was. Still, this is a wonderful opportunity.'
Lee offered, “I think I know what is wrong with your computer. And it is an easy fix. It will take me about a minute.”
The man replied, “Have at it. It is useless to me as it is.”
Lee sat down down in a chair, beside the man, at the table. He pulled the laptop to him. He looked at the screen. Even though the text was in spanish, which Lee did not know, the icons, symbols, and numerical symbols were the same as his computer, back home.
Lee quickly use the mouse to lower the screen resolution, and lower the gamma setting down, to where it did not hurt one's eyes to look at the screen.
Less than a minute after Lee has started working on the laptop computer, he was finished.
Lee turned the laptop screen in the direction of the man, as he inquired, “How is this?”
The man looked at it, and he smiled. He said, “Perfect. Thank you very much. Is there anything I can do for you?”
Lee thought, 'Now, is my chance.' He politely requested, “Just two items of note. First, could I use your computer to leave a message on a forum, real quick. It is nothing special. Just one sentence.”
The man said, “Okay. And the other favor?”
Lee replied, “Spend some time with your family. You are clearly on vacation, you might as well enjoy it.” He thought, 'These are the special moments in one's life. And he should not be wasting them working. When he should be spending time with his wife and kids.'
The man's smile widened, as he responded, “A wise suggestion. And here.” The man then turned the laptop in Lee's direction.
Lee quickly found the icon to the same web browser he used. Even in spanish, he know where all the setting and icons in the browser would do.
He quickly typed in english website forum he address, in the address bar. He then pressed, the enter key, on the laptop keyboard.
After the website came up in english, he found the login section.
As he type in his name and password, he thought, 'This is one of the website forums, I used a lot, to talk about my stories. I am glad I remember the account name and password. Also, I am sure it is being monitored the women, and maybe the authorities. And while there is risk this my backfire one me, very badly. This is still the best location on the internet, for me to place my bait. Because, it is tied to the stories I posted. And it uses the same account name, as the pseudonym I used for my stories.'
'In addition to this, I will need to cover my tracks.'
After Lee logged in, Lee went to the thread about his stories. He posted a one sentence message, with him creating a new thread in the forum, to do so.
The title of the topic of the thread, and the message in the body of the thread was the same. The message being, “Sorry about everything.”
Lee then closed out the tab to the website, and he pulled up the default homepage for the man's browser. He then type in the address to a news site. And then delete that tab page as well. So, if the man pulled up what page Lee has pulled up last, it would not be the forum website.
Next, Lee went into the browser settings, and he deleted the history of going to that specific website, and he also deleted the login, and tracking cookies, from that website. But, Lee left everything else on the man's computer alone.
Lee then closed the web browser, and turned the laptop screen towards the direction of the man, as he stated, “Here you go. And think you for letting me use it.”
The man moved his computer mouse off the laptop keyboard. He then closed the screen over the keyboard. Next, the man looked over at Lee, as he responded, “No problem. And have a great day.”
Lee got up from his seat. He looked at the man, as he thought, 'Now, one more question for this family man.' Lee inquired, in a casual tone of voice, “You too. And by the way, how long as you staying at the hotel?”
The man answered, “We are leaving in a few days.”
Lee said, “Okay. Have a great time.” He mentally added, 'With luck, he will be gone before the women get here. And my tracks will be completely covered.' He then turned, and walked away from the man, and back towards the beach entrance door to the hotel.
As Lee opened the door, from the reflection in the glass of the door, Lee saw that the man had joined his wife, and kids, in playing on the beach with them.
Lee smiled at the sight, for a few seconds. He then entered the hotel, and shut the door behind him.
(_)
A few days later, after the spanish man, and his family, that Lee had helped, left. It was the middle of the afternoon. But, the sky was covered in dark, ominous clouds, that blotted out the sun.
It had not yet started raining, but their was lightning and thunder outside.
Inside the Devil's Hotel, there were several people in the front lobby, sitting down in the various chairs and couches of the room. They listening to the music playing in the lobby, as they waited for the storm to clear, and they could to about their day.
Among these people, included Sam and Lee. They were sitting in cushioned armchairs, across from each other, as they place poker. Between them was a small coffee table, they used to place their money on, and for the pot, in the center of the table.
Lee was facing lobby entrance doors, and Sam was facing the check in desk.
Sam had won the last hand. But, Lee didn't mind.
As Sam dealt out another hand of cards, Lee thought, 'Sam and I both decided we did not want to risk getting soaked, if the bottom fell out on the storm, while we were on our way to the Rats Nest. So, we plan to stay here all day. Though, we haven't played poker all day. We got some lunch together, and we played a few rounds of pool in the game room.'
'And I am glad I didn't bet money on those pool games, because Sam is one hell of a pool shark. The man can play at a professional level.'
'He can do angles with the stick and cue ball that I had never thought possible in real life. I didn't even mind being beaten so thoroughly at pool, because just watching him play pool was entertainment in of itself. I saw same use the cue ball, and other balls, to sink five of his balls, in order, with one hit of his stick. I would not have believed it, if I had not seen it.'
'And that was just today. I remember when he ran the table on me, the first time we played. Just to show me he could. I am glad I don't bet money with him, at playing pool.'
'Also, it is nice that the hotel staff does not mind us playing cards here. Though, Melvin stated we could not play cards in the bar. He just has an issue with it. He said he did not want his bar to end up like a dive in a town he once lived in. I would bet money he was talking about the Yellowflag. And that is understandable. Anyway, Sam and I respected his wishes.'
Just then, the song changed to the opening beats to, Ballroom Blitz, by The Sweet.
While Lee did not show it on the outside, inwardly worried, as he thought, 'Oh no. What kind of walking storm could warrant that song to start playing?'
Lee looked at the front doors, and who he saw nearly cause him to drop his poker face.
Fortunately, after weeks of practice, Lee had taught himself how to remain calm in the face of immediate danger.
And danger just walked in though the front door. And she bought lots of her friends.
Up front were Revy, and Rock, as women. Both of them were wearing their usual clothing, with Rock wearing the long sleeved blouse and pants that Lee wrote her wear in her stories. Revy had on her crop top, and her blue denim cut-offs shorts.
Lee also saw that Revy did not have on her dual shoulder holsters, nor her semi-automatic nine millimeter ninety-two FS Inox pistols, in those holsters. In addition, on the ends of the grips of the pistols, where the magazines where exposed, showed the loaded magazines in the weapons were also the same stainless steel finish as the pistols were.
Behind her was Shenhua, Sawyer, and a small white haired, in a white maids dress, whom Lee guessed was Lotton. Shenhua and Sawyer where wearing their usual clothing. Shenhua was in her red, flowery qipao and white coat with yellow trimmings. And Sawyer in her usual purple and black goth clothing.
The next set was Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. All of them were women. And unlike the Lagoon members of the group, the three of them wore casual clothing and not their usual outfits.
The next two people were Aeryn Sun Crichton, and a younger, dark blue haired woman, whom Lee guessed was Violin.
The next set of people were a mix of eight, older teenage girls, whom from their hair colors and skin tones, were all three of the trio sisters, Mikoto, Nodoka, and Yurika, and the Lagoon sisters, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio. All of the teenagers were carrying luggage in their hands, and in some cases bags, with the straps on the bag, on their shoulders.
Lee saw that none of them had their weapons on their person. Or, that they were so hidden, that he could not tell.
Lee was able to maintain his poker face, as he thought, with concern, and disbelief, 'Oh, no, no, no. This is bad. Very, very bad. And the only good news is that none of them appeared to be armed, with their weapon on their bodies. Though, I am sure a few are concealing weapons, in their clothing... And the rest of their weapons are in their luggage.'
'Also, I need to get Sam to pay attention to the women, just in case they cause in trouble inside the lobby.'
Lee tapped Sam on his right foot. Sam looked at Lee in his eyes, as Lee looked into Sam's eyes.
So, as to not attract attention, in stead of speaking, or pointing with his fingers, Lee slightly tilted his head slightly to his right side, towards the women.
Sam understood what Lee was asking him to do, as he turned, and looked at the women, with Lee, for a few seconds, as the women walked towards the check in desk.
For a second, Lee's eyes and Rock's eyes met.
A few seconds later, both Lee and Sam went back to looking at their cards, but Lee continued to use the corner of his right eye to look at the women.
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he mentally lamented, 'I cannot believe I just looked Rock in her eyes. That is amazing.'
'And now that I think about it. Because they have their weapons in their luggage, instead of on their person, as they check in, means they are not looking for an immediate fight.'
'Also, I don't see any telepaths, nor empaths, that I recognize. I am thankful for such small mercies. If a psychic was here right now, they would likely find me on the spot, and it would be all over for myself. I still have a chance now. Though, a small one.'
'I am also thankful not see the Lovelace maids, with them.'
'But, this is still not good. There are too many of them here for my plan to work. And it was such a simple plan.'
Just then, the bottom fell out of the storm, and outside, the rain began pour.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 02: “Getting to Know Your Matchsticks.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was a dark, cloudy, Autumn day, outside the front doors to the Devil's Hotel, as the group of women had made it to the front doors of the building.
Less than an hour ago, the badass group of women had teleported to a deserted part of the island they were on, in their four vehicles, loaded with people, and luggage. They had just made it to the hotel parking, with their luggage pulled out, and stacked behind them
They were happy they made it, before it had started to rain.
Before they went inside the Devil's Hotel, they stood together, right outside the front doors, with all of them complete under the awning.
They had set their luggage behind them, by the curb.
Their two leaders, Rock, and Revy, talked to them.
Rock and Revy stood, facing the rest of their group, with their backs right next to the front door. The rest of the group were looking at Rock and Revy.
Revy stated, in english, “Okay. We traced the fucker here. Let's find him, capture him, head home, and start taking our vengeance out on him. Though, Rock here has something to say first, before we go in.”
Rock commented, in english, “Before we go in there, I am setting some ground rules for us. I admit, as tempting as it is. If we go in their guns blazing, we are either going to scare the writer into running, before we can find him. Or worse, accidently kill the writer. So, we have to approach this in a more subtle manner.”
Molly asked, in english, “So, how do we approach this?”
Revy smirked, as she commented, “Simple. Our looks, and charms”
Shenhua teased, in english, “Revy, you are one to talk?”
While Revy frowned, the rest of the group laughed, for a few seconds.
As the group calmed down, Violin spoke up, in english, “Revy, you got the looks. But, you lack the personality and grace for charming someone.”
Revy dropped her frown, as she replied, “Okay. You have a point there.”
Akira pointed out, in english, “Guys. I do see a problem with our plan. The writer will recognize us on sight. We should have sent two or three people in disguise. Our daughters for example. We just have them dye their hair, and send them in with aliases. The writer won't recognize them, because he wrote them, not drew them.”
Yurika said, “We would have been open to doing that.”
Revy commented, “Nice idea. But, we are already here. And we are not leaving without him.”
Rock said, “Besides, the writer would likely recognized, at least, some us, even with such disguises. Even your daughters. And it would only make things confusing for us, in remembering everyone's aliases.”
Akira replied, “Okay.”
Natsuru mentioned, in english, “Speak of which. I checked. This place has all of our series, on various formats, and the writer's stories are online for anyone to read. It is possible that we might run across some people that recognize us. But, that does not mean they are the writer. So, if you are recognized, it would be best to play dumb, and talk to the rest of us, before doing anything about that person.”
Sawyer stated, in english, “Good point. If we get the wrong person, it will raise questions. And it will likely cause the right person to run.”
Aeryn said, in english, “Also, such actions could attract the authorities of this world. We need to avoid that at all cost, for various reasons. They could kill us, or at the very least, find the writer first.”
Kristina agreed, in english, “Yes. And I think that video by Scorpius likely already set everyone on edge.”
Rebecca stated, in english, “I still don't understand why Scorpius doesn't just send her secret agents in. They could probably find the writer in a day.”
Rock explained, “The same reason we don't bring in Hotel Moscow, nor the maids. We don't to start world war three. Besides, Scorpy refuses to help us with our search. I think she likes what the writer did for her. And she only did that broadcast as a favor to Violin.”
Nodoka looked at Violin, as she teased, in english, “Are you out of the dog house, yet?”
Violin looked at Aeryn, whom frowned. Violin answered, “Not yet. But, I'm getting there.”
Mikoto stated, in english, “I can understand not telling the maids. Roberta would tear this city apart looking for the writer. And Fabiola and Garcia are too close to Roberta. They would spill the beans to her. But, why are Balalaika and B not here? They are both sharp, and very skilled, in so many ways. We could use their skills here.”
Rock answered, “While Revy told both Balalaika and B. And I later talked to them about it. Both of those women understand the subtle nature of the situation. They say if the guy gets away, to contact them, and the two of them will personally help us hunt the writer down.”
“And for your next question. They told Revy and I, that they don't plan to involved the rest of the members of Hotel Moscow, because they didn't fully inform them of the situation. And they don't want to waste time just looking. They do have an organization to run for the writer. When he might not still even be here.”
“We have the time to look. And even with reality traveling technology, they don't.”
Mikoto inquired, “Good point. By the way, why doesn't Annie want to come? I know for a fact that our parents invited her.”
Akira answered, “Annie admitted that she did want to see the writer harmed. She refused to help us.”
Violin commented, “Given what the writer did for her, I can understand.”
Sawyer suggested, “What about Arcee?”
Revy pointed out, “She is too close to Chang. They are still good friends. And we don't even want to risk Megatron learning of the stories. Even that thought scares me. Considering what the writer almost did to him. He would literally tear apart this section of the multiverse looking for the writer.”
Rock agreed, “Yes. And that is why we have not mentioned the stories, to other victims of the second book. Some of them might not care how many civilians they have to kill to find the writer.”
Violin mentioned, “When you think about it, this writer literally pissed off all the wrong people in the multiverse. From a third person point of view. And literary standpoint. I can understand the sheer insanity he was going for. But, he went way too far. Especially in that second book. He likely wronged, and pissed off, almost every major human badass imaginable. I think, deadman walking, would fit his situation well.”
Rock stated, “That would be the understatement of the century.”
Molly asked, in english, “Speaking of Chang. What about the others? Chang? The Serenity Crew? The Lowe family? And where are they right now?”
Revy answered, “We don't know. We are fairly sure they are all in the Cowboy Bebop reality. But, we are not completely sure. If we just pop up and say hi, questions will be asked. We don't think they know what is going on. But, if River reads our minds, then, they will come running.”
Rock said, “Revy makes a good point there. Likely, Mal, and Spike, would have both their sets of friends here, hunting down the writer. The maids would tear this city apart to find the writer. And the others, I am not so sure. I know most of the women in their group are not upset with the writer, for various reasons. And I don't want to any fight them, if they were the first to catch the writer.”
Molly agreed, “That would cause problems.”
Ranma spoke up, in english, “By the way, why are Benny, Janet, and Dutch, not here?”
Revy answered, “Actually, they are in this reality. They are in the British Bahamas.”
Lotton sarcastically remarked, in english, “Lucky them.”
Natsuru inquired, “What are they doing there?”
Revy sarcastically answered, “Besides enjoying their time on the beach, they are studying the stories, and doing web searches. They are trying to build a profile on the writer. Rock and I figured those three were the best to do the job.”
Natsuru replied, “I agree.”
Sarah questioned, in english, “So, has mom, dad, and aunt Dutch, had any luck on a profile of the writer?”
Revy replied, “No. Not so far. But, we have the phone number to their room. And they plan to come over in a month, or so, if we have not had any luck in catching the writer, by then.”
Aeryn asked, “Is there anyone else here, that we know of, in this city?”
Rock smiled, as she answered, “Yes. Eda and Yolanda are here. They are working a different angle. We will tell you, later.”
Aeryn replied, “Interesting.”
Shenhua asked, “Are there any clues as to what the writer looks like?”
Revy said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Nope. We don't know what the writer's looks like, nor even the writer's gender. Though, we are guessing the writer is male.”
Sarah inquired, “So, how do we search for the writer?”
Yukio suggested, in english, “Why don't we just go into the future and find out who the writer is, from our future selves?”
Molly stated, “Because we do not want to risk creating a paradox.”
Rebecca conceded, “Good point.”
Rock stated, “I think Revy has the right idea. We use our charms. We ask around. And we subtly test people. With luck, the writer will eventually give himself away. Or, we will at least start to build a list of those we think are the writer, whom we will check on later, with more thorough background checks.”
Lotton commented, “That is a nice idea. Also, the writer might be staying on the ground floor. If he need to got out of the hotel quickly, will allow him to escape more easily.”
Rock said, “That is an excellent point. We need to find out who is staying on the ground floor. That might narrow down our list of suspects.”
Natsuru stated, “I doubt that someone will try to escape by a second story balcony, or higher. That is a quick way for a normal person to break a leg. And rope, or rope ladder would be to hard to hide, if we started secretly searching rooms.”
Rock commented, “Those are also good points. But, we won't start searching rooms, until we have exhausted our other avenues of finding the writer. If we are caught in someone else's hotel suite, we could get thrown out of the hotel. Or, the local police might get in involved.”
Natsuru said, “I agree. Those are good point.”
Violin looked at the Lagoon daughters for a few seconds. She then turned to Rock, as she asked, “On another matter. What happens if we have any problems between each other?”
Rock firmly stated, “All internal disputes will be handled between Revy and I. We are in charge. If you mess up, and harm the wrong person, you go home. Understood?”
Except for Rock and Revy, some of the women said, “Yes.” Or, “Yea.” The other women nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Rock said, “Also, when you do think you have a lead, let Revy and I know. We will inform the others, and decide what to do. Now teenagers, handle the luggage. Be careful. Our weapons are in some of the suitcases. And it should be noted. We do not know the cops here. And Mexico has strict gun control and immigration laws. But from what I understand, this town is very lax on such matters. So, just don't cause too many problems.”
Ranma suggested, “And it would not be wise to come into this hotel like an armed military.”
Rock agreed, “Exactly. That is why I made sure no one was armed right now, as we walked inside the hotel. If we were, the hotel staff might turn us away.”
Rock then continued, in a serious tone of voice, “Also, don't lose your reality devices. We do not want them falling into the wrong hands. Especially, the writer's hands. He clearly knows enough about reality travel, that if he gets his hands on one of our reality devices, and we might never get this close to finding him, again.”
Revy stated, “Yes. We have to be careful about that. Okay girls. Let's go in there, and find this fucker. With luck, he will give himself away within the first ten minutes.”
As the teenagers picked up the luggage for everyone, Rebecca asked, “How will we know it is him, mom?”
Revy smile wickedly, as she said, “Because, my daughter, he will be pissing his pants, in fear, at the mere sight of us.”
The other laughed at Revy's joke, for a few seconds
As they calmed down, Yukio requested, “Is it okay if us teenagers, get rooms near each other, but away from the rest of you?”
Rock, Revy, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru looked at each other. They all nodded. Rock then turned to Yukio, as she answered, “I don't see why not, daughter.”
Yukio replied, “Thanks, mom.”
Rock and Revy then turned around, and took the lead, as they entered the entryway, and then into the hotel lobby.
Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton were right behind them. Then Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru. Violin and Aeryn follow them. With the teenage daughters following behind them.
Rock noted that the music in the lobby suddenly changed to Ballroom Blitz, by The Sweet. She thought, 'I wonder why the music changed. And why it is that song, of all the songs, is the one playing. Still, it fits the mood.'
Rock saw people from all groups of life in the lobby. And almost all of the people there, turned and looked a the newcomers for a few seconds, before going back to the business.
Among the groups of people, there were a couple of families, with their children. Sports players. Some men in businesses suits. And two men, to Rock's right side, whom were sitting chairs, across from each other, at a small table, as they played poker for money.
Rock thought, with amusement, 'Some things never change, no matter where I go. The location can change, but there are almost always some pair of men, that are just, those two guys, doing their own thing.'
The black haired man with the blue baseball cap, large glasses, and blue cloth jacket, noticed them, as they walked to the check in desk, across the room.
The black haired tapped his friend, a man with a full beard and ponytail, on the right foot, with his own foot to get his attention. He titled his head towards Rock's group. Both of them looked at the woman for a few seconds.
Rock even locked eyes with the black haired man, for a few seconds, before Rock saw that both men had turned their heads towards each other. And they went back to their poker game.
The women soon made it to the check in desk. As the two clerks at the desk looked at the sixteen women, without even blinking in surprise, Rock stated, “We would like to rent some rooms here.”
The two clerks looked at each other. They then turned back to face Rock, and the other women, as one of the clerks asked, in english, “Short? Or, long term?”
Rock answered, “Likely long term?”
The clerks smile, as the same clerk that spoke to Rock, inquired, “How will you be paying?”
Rock asked, “Do you accept gold as payment?”
The smile from clerk whom spoke to Rock widened even further, as she replied, “By the troy ounce. And we even offer to buy gold at ten percent less than the current market rate, in either U.S. cash, or Mexican pesos. At long as the gold is pure.”
Rock pulled out a small bar of gold from her pocket, and set it on the top of the check in desk. She smirked, as she stated, “Test it all you want. You will find our gold is pure enough for you. And I will like to have some pesos and dollars out of the change.”
The clerk, whom Rock was talking to, pulled out a small instrument, and set it on the long end of the gold bar. She said, “Ma'am. This will only take a few seconds.”
A few seconds later, the woman looked at the results, as she continued smiling. She in the instrument behind the desk. She then pulled out a small set of electronic weight scales. She set the bar on the scales, as she stated, “Your bar is almost pure gold. We will accept this as payment.” She then pulled out a small calculator.
Rock replied, “Good. Now, I maybe right, but I am not foolish. I want some decent hotel rooms, that are fairly inexpensive.”
The clerk responded, “You will find we appreciate frugal customers. Because they are usually returning customers.”
Rock thought, 'Now, that is a change, from the usual people I use to deal with. And a good change at that.' She her smirk turned into a warmer smile, as she stated, “Then, I think we will have a wonderful business relationship.”
The clerk returned Rock's smile, as she said, “I agree. Also, some of us would prefer one bedroom suites, but with large bed.”
The clerk stated, “That will not be a problem.”
Rock replied, “Good.”
The clerk inquired, “Now, who will I make the bills for these rooms out too? And who will be staying in this room?”
Rock answered, “You can start with my room. Which will be a single bed suite, with a large bed. I am Rock. And the person will me, is Revy. We will be covering the bills for our entire group. And we will get to everyone, in a few minutes. Also, some of us would like rooms away from the rest of our group.”
The clerk replied, “That will be fine.”
Rock and the clerk then went about checking her family, her friends, and herself, into the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Nearby, in his chair, Lee looked at his cards, as he used the corner of his eye to watch the women walk to the check desk.
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he mentally lamented, 'I cannot believe I just looked Rock in her eyes. That is amazing.'
'And now that I think about it. Because they have their weapons in their luggage, instead of on their person, as they check in, means they are not looking for an immediate fight.'
'Also, I don't see any telepaths, nor empaths, that I recognize. I am thankful for such small mercies. If a psychic was here right now, they would likely find me on the spot, and it would be all over for myself. I still have a chance now. Though, a small one.'
'I am also thankful not see the Lovelace maids, with them.'
'But, this is still not good. There are too many of them here for my plan to work. And it was such a simple plan.'
Just then, the bottom fell out of the storm, and outside, the rain began pour.
Lee mentally continued, 'Now, the timing of this rain is poetic. Still, my plan just blew up in my face. I thought this bait would attract a couple of fish, not a pod of killer whales. I dare not try to drug any of them now. They are going to be watching each other too closely. Plus, two of them are aliens, some of them have super-soldier abilities, and the others likely have fast metabolisms. I don't think knockout drugs would really work on any of them.'
'Though, my plan is salvageable. The more marks here, means more reality devices floating around. I just have to approach this from a different angle. Though, I know it is going to be hard as hell to get one of those devices, from the start. More of them, just increases the danger. Also, I have to figure out how to approach them. Also, I have to figure out when to approach them.'
'From a neutral, third party point of view, I am literally a middle-aged man, trying to approach a group of younger, pretty women. That looks wrong, no matter how I try to do it. So, I have to have a damn good reason just to approach them. Let alone speak to them. And if I do this wrong, or too early, I tip my hand that I am the writer, and it will be all over.'
'Yet. They don't know I am the writer. And there is no rush. It is best to wait a couple of days. If I wait long enough, since they are looking for the writer, they might eventually approach Sam and I. As they are looking for me. When that happens, all I got to do is play my cards right. So, for right now, as I think about this problem, I should just relax, and play poker with Sam.'
Lee then went back to focusing on playing his poker game with Sam, as the badass group of women, nearby, checked into the hotel. After they were checked in, and each group had been given their keys, they turned to their right, and walked towards the elevator bay, by the lobby, with their luggage, as they headed towards their suites.
(_)
Later that evening, as it continued to rain, thunder, and lightning, outside, Sam and Lee were eating at a table, in the hotel restaurant and bar. They were sitting in the corner table, to the right of the entrance to the restaurant. Both of them were sitting beside each other, with their backs to the corner, as they ate and talked to each other. With Lee sitting to Sam's right side.
Given the rain had disrupted the plans of most of the guests of the hotel, the hotel restaurant was nearly full.
Sam and Lee were almost finished with their dinners, as they saw the badass group of women walk into the restaurant. And this time, some of them appeared armed.
Revy and Molly had their semi-automatic pistols holsters in their shoulder holsters. Lee could tell that Shenhua had her knives hidden in her clothing. Rebecca had her long knives sheathed in their scabbards on her back. Kristina has her two gantlets hooked together, on the right side of her belt. Sarah had her katana sheathed in its scabbard, which was hooked to the left side of her belt.
Yukio did not have her machine gun, and Sawyer did not have her chainsaw.
Ranma had on her golden wrist braces, which stick out from under her long sleeved blouse.
Akira had her long knives sheathed on her back, and revolvers holstered on her hips, over her causal clothing.
Natsuru, Nodoka, Mikoto, Yurika, Aeryn, Violin, and Lotton appeared to be unarmed.
Lee thought, 'I guess they when up to their room, unpacked and put on their weapons.' Lee mentally lamented, as he continued his thoughts, 'And this was turning into such a pleasant evening. I wonder how Melvin is doing?' Lee then looked Melvin, whom was standing behind the bar counter.
Lee saw Melvin looked up at the women, and from the look in Melvin's eyes, Lee guessed that he recognized a few of them.
But, Melvin was able to keep his composure, and he only showed fear in his eyes, and only for a split second.
Lee thought, with admiration, 'Good job, Melvin. I doubt any of them noticed your reaction. If you just remain calm, you should get out of this alive, and in one piece.'
Lee then looked back at the group of women, he noticed Revy pulled out a cigarette and a lighter.
Lee thought, 'So, Revy went back to smoking. Why am I not surprised? I just hope that Melvin has enough sense to not tell her not to smoke. I don't want him to die, even if he was once a member of Hotel Moscow. He seems like such a nice guy.'
Lee then saw that Revy's lighter wouldn't work
Revy asked, in a loud tone of voice, “Does anyone have a light?”
Lee saw Mikoto take a step towards Revy, before she suddenly stop.
Lee thought, 'Intelligent move, not showing your fire abilities in front of witnesses. Also, since she is asking strangers for a lite, that means that none of the rest of the group smokes, or they quit smoking, depending on the person. And given she has her weapons with her, I don't think anyone is in a rush to give her a light. But, if none one does, that is going to put her in a bad mood. Which, no who knows her, wants to happen. So, I have no choice.'
'Besides, this is my chance to at least get a close look at Revy, without anyone else being the wiser.'
Lee quickly used his right hand to reach into his right, side pants pockets, and he pulled out his disposable lighter.
Lee held up his lighter and lit it.
Revy noticed Lee and his lighter. She turned and walked over to him.
Lee extinguished his lighter.
A few seconds later, when Revy reached Lee, he handed her his lighter, by the bottom, cool end.
As Revy used the lighters to light her cigarette, Lee got a chance to get a close look at her.
Lee thought, 'To the untrained eye, this much smaller, slender women would appear helpless. I know better. And I have no intentions of getting on her bad side, or the bad sides of her friends. Even though they are all out for my blood.'
While Revy took a poof of smoke from her cigarette, with her right hand, as she handed Lee back his lighter, with her left hand.
Lee took the lighter, and put it his pants pocket.
Revy casually said, “Thanks.” She then used her left hand to pulled out her open pack of cigarettes, as she offered, “Want one?”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'Why not?'
Lee replied, “Sure.” Lee took one of the cigarette. He put the cigarette into the inside pocket of his blue cloth jacket, as he thought, 'I think I will keep this one for a special occasion. And I will be careful not to wash it with my clothing.'
Revy then turned around, and walked over to rejoin her group.
Sam looked at Lee, as he asked, “What was that about?”
Lee continued looking at the women, as he answered, “When an armed woman wants a light for her cigarette, you make sure she gets the light.”
Sam agreed, “Wise words. And they seem like a rough crowd.”
Lee continued looking in front of them, as he said, “That is kind of obvious. I think we might want to walk out of here, in a minute. After we finish our meals. How about we continue our game of poker in the lobby?”
Sam replied, “Sounds great.”
Lee offered, “And when we finish, you can head on out, while I pay for both our meals.”
Sam said, in an appreciative and happy tone of voice, “Thanks.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He thought, 'Sam, you don't have a clue who those women are. And until I have a chance to tell you, in private, without spilling the beans to you. I need to keep you as far away from these women, as possible.'
As the two men finished eating, Lee kept an eye on the group of women. He saw that they seat themselves at some tables, near the stage, in the back of the room. Lee finally stopped looking at them, when a waitress came over to them, to take their orders.
Lee thought, 'That waitress is braver than most people. But then, I have found that people find bravery and courage, when they need it.'
Lee also noticed that other customers were getting up, paying for their meals, and leaving the room, with Melvin manning the cash register.
Lee thought, 'It is nice that a number of people here are intelligent enough to see trouble coming a mile away. And it is unfortunate that the employees still have to play nice, and be careful. But, that goes with the dangers of their jobs. Still, I wish them the best.'
Lee had the last bite of his meal, and drank the last bit of his beer. He looked over and saw that Sam was finished with his meal, as well.
Lee turned to Sam, as he inquired, “Are you ready to go?”
Sam looked over at Lee, as answered, “Yes. I will see you in the lobby.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Both men then got up. Lee left a fair tip on the table, as Sam headed for the exit to the restaurant. Lee then headed to the cash register, on the bar counter, near the front of the room.
Lee saw there was Melvin as still being hand the cash register, as he was taking care of the last person waiting to pay their bill and left.
Lee then saw Melvin get the customer his change, and a receipt. As the customer turned and left the room, for the hotel hallway, Lee saw noticed him.
Lee thought, 'It would be nice to talk to him about this. But, it is too risky, in so many ways. First, I cannot outright tell Melvin what I know of these women, because he will ask how I know it. That would expose each of our secrets to the other. Also, some of the women have super-hearing, from the super-soldier serum they were exposed to. But, given the distance from the cash register and the tables by the stage, along with the background noise, from the talking, as long as we whisper, we should be okay.'
When Lee reached the cash register, the two men looked at each other, from across the cash register on the end of the bar counter. Melvin then quietly said, “How are you doing, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'Good. He knows about the super-hearing, as well. Probably Balalaika mentioned her abilities to her men, at some point.' Lee softly answered, “Fine. And Melvin, from the way you were looking at those women, I can tell you know them.”
Melvin quietly warned, “I know some of them. And they are all crazy dangerous. Don't mess with them. And don't give one of them a light, again.”
Lee whispered, “Don't worry, I won't. I just wanted to prevent a situation.”
Melvin softly replied, “Okay. That was a good call. Just don't do it, again.”
Lee quietly complimented, “Of course. And you clearly are intelligent enough not to stop them from smoking.”
Melvin softly mentioned, “Hey. I want to continue living. And them smoking is the least of my worries about them. Still, my situation reminds me of a quote from the Godfather movies.”
Lee quietly said, “Let me guess. When I thought I was out, they pull me back in.”
Melvin whispered, “That's the one.”
Lee softly responded, “Don't worry, your secret is safe with me. And good luck.”
Melvin quietly replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then stated, in a normal tone of voice, “By the way, I am paying for Sam's meal, as well.”
Melvin complimented, “That is nice of you.”
Melvin then rang Lee up for both his meal and drink, and Sam's meal and drink.
Lee paid the bill with his cash money. He then got his change and receipt. After which, he left the restaurant, for the hotel lobby, to meet up with Sam, to continue their ongoing poker game.
(_)
Hours later, inside the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar, the only ones let in the room, were Melvin, and the group of badass women, whom some were starting to get drunk.
Even the waitresses, and kitchen staff had decided to clean up, and call it an early night. And Melvin didn't blame them for doing so. And he even gave them permission to leave for the night, when they had requested to leave the madness currently happening in the restaurant.
Still, someone had to stay behind to manage the chaos, and as the bartender for the restaurant, that person was, Melvin.
Also, the group of women had migrated from the tables near the stage, to closer to the bar counter. With some of the women now sitting in stools, at the bar counter.
And the women had starting taking turns, using the karaoke machine, to sing some songs for each other.
As Melvin served the women at the bar counter, some refills on their mixed drinks, he thought, 'I don't know which is the more wilder storm. The one that is slacking off outside, or the one here, inside... Likely the one right here, in front of me... Still, at least this isn't all bad. They clearly don't remember me. Boy am I happy about that. And some of them can even carry a tune.'
From Melvin's left to right, Rock, Revy, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were sitting on the stools, along the long end of the bar counter, with Natsuru being the closest woman to the cash register by the front end of the bar counter.
Just then, Rebecca walked up to the bar counter. Melvin saw here, as she looked at him. She requested, “Hey barterer. I need another bottle of beer.”
Melvin reached under the counter, pulled out a cold bottle of beer from the fridge, and handed it to Rebecca.
Rebecca took the bottle of beer, and walked way.
Melvin thought, 'Well, with the legal drinking age in Mexico being eighteen, there is not much I can do about these teenagers drinking. But, at least with them here, I can cut them off, before they get to drunk, and things get out of hand.
Melvin then glanced at Revy, and he noted that she was starting to look a little tipsy. He mentally added, 'While some of the people here are already at their limit. The question is how to cut them off without starting a gunfight?'
Ranma asked, “So, bartender. What is your name?”
Melvin looked over at the redhead, as he thought, 'I have seen her before. But, I just cannot place her.' He answered, “My name is Melvin. What is yours?”
Ranma answered, “Ranma.”
Melvin suddenly remember, as he mentally reflected, 'Ranma?.... She has to be. The martial artists that changes genders based off of water temperatures. I remember seeing the Ranma Half series, that Pedro showed me from his anime collection. That reminds me. Should, I call Pedro, and let him know what is going on here, at the hotel, with these women?... Best not too. He would likely not believe me. And he will learn about it, soon enough, on his own.'
'Still, I think it best I avoid hot water near Ranma. Or, I will end up in hot water, if she changes into a he, in front of me. But, what is Ranma doing here with Akira, Revy, and Rock. Also, she appears to be older, in her late twenties. And who is the blue haired woman, and the others here that I don't recognize?'
'It might be best to just try to ask. At least that way, if I slip up and say one of their names, in front of them, I have an excuse of them introducing themselves to me.'
Melvin looked over at the other women at the bar counter, as he asked, “And who are rest of you?”
Akira answered, “I am Akira.”
Melvin thought, 'Yea. Akira. I remember you from Roanapur. If I remember, you change gender with a sneeze. Best to keep the pepper away from you.'
Akira went onto say, “The blue haired woman by me is, Natsuru.”
Melvin mentally realized, “Natsuru from the Kampfer anime series. Another gender bender. Also, she looks as old as Akira does, and not the teenager that she, or rather, he was in that series.'
'Though, I do recognize Rock as woman. I long since heard about the Lagoon members gender bending.... And then there are my former comrades... I don't like the pattern I am seeing here...'
'That being said, I wonder why they are here? They are clearly not after me. If someone was here, after me, it would be the members of Hotel Moscow. Not them. Unfortunately, I cannot just ask them out right, without revealing who I am. So, I will just have to play along.'
Natsuru said, “Nice to meet you.”
Melvin replied, “Nice to meet all three of you.”
Akira stated, “The other redhead and the black haired women by us, at the bar, are Revy and Rock. Revy is the redhead. Rock is the black hair woman. Rock is fine. But, it might be best to leave Revy alone.”
Revy just laughed at Akira's comment.
Melvin mentally agreed, 'Very wise words.' He calmly replied, “I will keep that in mind. By the way, your group is driving away my best customers. And best tippers. Even my staff called it an early night, because of your group.”
Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, looked around, and behind them, at how rowdy their friends, and daughters, were being.
They then looked back at Melvin. Akira sadly said, “Sorry about that. We will try to reign in the others. So, this won't happen again.”
Melvin thought, as he inwardly laughed, that did not show only the outside, 'Good luck with that. I remember hearing what Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer did to you, that night at Rowan's Jackpot.'
'Still, I might as well be positive about it. Akira, you do have back up this time. Ranma and Natsuru might actually be more dangerous than Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer. It is just that these two are more polite.'
Melvin sarcastically remarked, “I can clearly see that you are going to have your work cut out for you. Still, good luck in reigning in you your friends' wildness.”
Revy overheard Melvin comments. She stood up from her stool, as she loudly stated, “Wildness! You want wildness! I will give you wildness!” She then pulled out her pistols from her shoulder holsters.
Rock, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, and Melvin all saw what she was going to do, as she pulled back the slides to her pistols, inserting rounds into her weapons' chambers, from the weapons' ammo clips.
Ranma stated, “Oh hell!”
Akira yelled, “Everyone! Duck and cover!”
Meanwhile, Melvin just ducked under the bar counter.
The rest of those in the room looked over at Akira, they then saw Revy just as she started to shoot up the empty bottle shelves, on the wall, behind the bar counter, in front of her.
Everyone else dropped down. In some cases, some of them even got under their tables.
Revy then began shooting up the restaurant and bar, with recklessness, though she did not aim at anyone. She was just going for the walls and furniture.
While Rock bent down, she thought, 'Damn it! It has been years since Revy has pulled this stunt. I am going to have to talk to her about this later. She is set a bad example as one of the leaders, in this mission, especially in front of our children.'
As Melvin ducked under this bar counter, he looked at his post-nineteen forty-seven TT thirty-three Tokarev semi-automatic pistol, which was hostler under right under the bar. The pistol used seven point sixty-two by twenty millimeter bullets. The magazine of Melvin's pistol held the maximum it could, which was eight rounds. And there was one round in the chamber of the pistol.
The only safety feature on the pistol was the hammer could be set to half cock, with the pistol not firing unless it was fully cocked back. This was dangerous, but Melvin was an expert with his pistol, and he knew he might someday need to use his pistol quickly, without much time to react.
Melvin also felt the sheath of his combat knife, against his lower back, where he hid his knife under this clothes.
Melvin thought, 'I wonder how many times Bao had to handle this? Still, how do I handle this? If I pulled my knife, or pistol, she will either kill me, or the others will. Still, I am backed into a corner. I hope she calms down. I really don't want to get into a fight with her... Still, this is Revy. The likely reason she is nicknamed, Revy, is that after she has revved up, she only rarely ever backs down.'
After Revy finished shooting, everyone got up from where they were hiding, and stood up.
Rock looked over at her friends and family, as she yelled, “Anyone hurt?”
Everyone shook their heads. And Rock accounted from everyone.
As Melvin stood up from the bar counter, he noticed that Revy was pointed her pistols at him. And given the slides were not locked in the pulled back positions, they were still loaded.
Revy demanded, in a slurred tone of voice, “Bartender, how about some more rum?”
Melvin scowled. But, he then noticed that Revy had here index fingers were resting against trigger guard, and not the triggers.
Melvin thought, 'I got one shot at this. And if I do this right. None of them will pull this stunt ever again one me.'
Melvin quickly used both handed to grab Revy's cutlasses, by the barrels, and from Revy's hands, without the weapons going off.
Everyone was shocked that someone had actually been able to do that.
Revy demanded, “Give me back my cutlasses!”
Melvin put the weapons under his bar counter. He then turned to Revy, as he flatly stated, with anger in his tone of voice, “No. You can have them back, in the morning. When you are sober. And after you pay for damages. You are lucky the walls, ceiling, and the bar counter, of this restaurant here, have an inch of steel under their covering. But even so, I know the police chief of this town, personally. A stray bullet hitting someone would land you in jail, or worse. And finally, it goes without saying, you are cut off for tonight.”
Revy sneered, “If you are not going to give me back my cutlasses, I am going to have to hurt you with my fists.” She then jumped over the counter. Her back was to the short end of the bar counter, with Melvin facing her front side.
Just as her feet hit the floor, she threw a punch at Melvin, with her right fist.
Melvin's reflexes kicked in.
Melvin sidestepped the blow, putting his front side to Revy's left side.
He then swung his right foot at an inward angle, against the back of Revy's lower legs.
While he was sure Revy's was off balance, he move his right foot back in an a right, outward, angle, until he planted it firmly on the floor. At the same time, he used his left hand to grab Revy by the front of her throat.
While, he used his right hand, to pulled out his combat knife, hiding in the back of his clothing.
As he used his left hand to haul Revy up, and towards other part of the counter, everyone one saw as he spun his combat knife in his right hand, until it stopped spinning, and he held it in downward angle.
As Revy upper back and head hit the top of the bar counter, with Melvin's left hand firmly hold her down by her throat, he brought down his knife until the tip was less than a centimeter above her left iris.
Revy immediately stopped struggling, as she realized how close to death she was.
While Revy was staring at the knife set right above her left eye, everyone else noticed that Melvin's eyes had lost all warmth in them, as he expression turned completely neutral.
Everyone in the bar went dead silent, as they saw some nobody literally holding Revy's life in his hands.
As Melvin looked down at Revy's face, he coldly said, “Listen carefully, little girl. No one shoots up my bar, and threatens the lives of my customers. No one. And if do this again, I will kill you.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “You have no idea the trouble you are getting into. Now, let me go!”
Melvin flatly responded, with force in his tone of voice, “You are in no position to negotiate!... You think you are a real badass! How many people have you killed?!”
Revy continued smiling, as she answered, “Several.”
Melvin coldly inquired, “And how many children have you killed?”
Revy dropped her smirk, as she went quiet.
Melvin calmly, yet coldly stated, “Little girl, I have been in war. In order to survive, I have both seen and done a lot of horrible things, that you probably couldn't imagine. I have killed children without a second thought. Children, whom I knew beforehand, were kidnapped from their home, doped up, tied to bomb vests, and were sent out against us. And I still killed them without hesitation. All the while, I knew that they were in no way at fault for being in their situation. That they were already dead. And if I did not kill them, they would take me with them. Now, you can either die, or walk away. Which will it be?”
Revy thought, 'Shit! This guy is for real. And I thought there were no badasses in this world that could put me into this position.' She answered, “I will walk away.”
Melvin removed his knife from Revy's face, as he left go of the redhead's throat. He then took several steps be away from Revy.
Everyone saw the warmth return to Melvin's eyes. Though, he kept his neutral facial expression, as he said, “Good. As I said before. You will get your pistols, in the morning. After you sober up.”
Revy leaned up, and jumped over the bar. As she turned back to face Melvin, she warned him, “My cutlasses better be okay when I get them back tomorrow.”
While Melvin sheathed his knives behind his back, he smirked towards Revy. He stated, “Little girl. Given the way you act, I am surprised either of them are in one piece.”
Melvin's commented caused everyone else to laugh, but Revy, and Melvin himself.
A few seconds later, as the crowd calmed down, and started to relax, Ranma turned to Melvin, as she asked, “Where did you learn to fight like that?”
Though, on the outside, Melvin remained calm, as he turned to face the women looking at him. Inwardly, he mentally screamed, 'Oh hell! I tipped my hand a bit too much. I have to make this sound just right, or I just gave myself away to them. They will contact Balalaika, and it will be over for me... Still, this should shut them up. As they say, the most believable lie, is a lie hidden in a truth.'
Melvin flatly answered, “Afghanistan.”
The women gave him blank looks.
Melvin explained, as he planted the lie in the truth, “In late two thousand one, the U.S. invaded Afghanistan. And the got ugly, over there, after that. And I was on of the fools that did a tour in Afghanistan.”
The women looked at each other, and Rock said, “He is right. I checked it out. It is very ugly story involving a lot of death. Going from the east coast of the U.S., to the middle east.”
Melvin thought, 'I better change the subject, now.' Melvin stated, with a tone of authority, “Now, ladies. I am going to say this just once. If any of you try what you friend just did, I will have you all thrown out of this hotel. Do you all understand?”
The women just nodded, in response.
Melvin said, “Good. Now, this bar is officially closed for tonight. I will settle up your tabs tomorrow. I will be here at around ten thirty in the morning. Now, please leave.”
As Melvin watched all the women file out of his bar, he thought, 'No wonder Bao got so stressed out with this crowd. How the hell did he handle this almost every night? They are all insane!' He then looked at the mess left by Revy, as he mentally added, 'And messy!'
Melvin then went to get a broom, and dustpan, to start to clean up Revy's destruction. It took him and hour to clean up the bar. He then started to close up for the evening.
Soon after he finished closing up the bar, he unloaded Revy's pistols. Put them the ammo in one back, and the pistols, with the magazines in them, in another bag. Next, he collected his Tokarev pistol and headed for the hallway door. After he left the room, he locked the hallway doors to the hotel restaurant and bar behind him, as he headed to his hotel suite, to get some sleep for the night.
(_)
An hour later, after Melvin closed up the hotel bar, on the third floor of the Devil's Hotel, inside Lee's hotel suite, Lee was in bed, trying to get some sleep, when he heard a woman scream.
His eyes immediately snapped open, in the darkness of his room, as here heard sounds coming from the wall across the room, from his bed. The wall that the TV in the room was mounted to, and the chest of drawers were set against.
Lee sat up, as he tried to figure out what is going.
Lee thought, “If someone is being harmed next door, I am going to have to call the front desk to handle this. Because a domestic disturbance is less likely to have the police question me, as the neighbor, and a witness. Than, later questioning of someone possibly being hospitalized, or killed, if I do not act.'
He looked at the LED digital clock on the nightstand, by his bed. He saw that it was ten forty-five PM.
It was then, from the other side of the wall, from the TV and chest of drawers in Lee's suite, that Lee heard a female voice clearly scream,, “Ranma!”
He then started hearing other female voices, whom were moaning.
Lee swiftly put the pieces together, as he thought, 'Oh no. Please don't tell me I am sharing a wall with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. When I wrote them to be intimate lovers with each other, I did not think that one day I would be the poor fool on the other side of the wall, whom had to hear their sounds of ecstasy. And there is nothing I can do about it, right now.'
'It is not like I can just knock on their door, and ask them to be quiet. That would make for a horrible first impression. And I don't dare try to change to another room. With my luck, they will stick me by one of the other members of the crew. At least with these three, they value the lives of others, and they don't like to kill. The same cannot be said for most of the others in their group, except their daughters, and Violin. So, I will just have to live with this situation, for now. And at least there bed, or beds, are clearly not set against my wall, or I would also hear knocking as well.'
Lee then laid back down in his bed, and he tried to get to sleep.
But, the three neighbors were too loud. And thirty minutes later, he noted that he starting hearing male voices, mixed in with the female voices.
Lee thought, 'I guess they are swapping genders as they make love. It is unfortunate that I cannot understand what they are saying. Because, when they talk to each other, they are doing so in japanese. Oh well. At least I know that no one on the other side of the wall is getting hurt. It is just that they are not very private about their love.'
Fortunately, according to Lee's hotel clock, Lee noticed that they three others, on the other side of the wall went silent around midnight.
Lee was then able to get back to sleep, a few minutes later.
(_)
During next morning, it was nine thirty AM in the morning before Revy was able to even crawl out of bed.
During the previous night, after all the women left the hotel bar, Revy and Rock made it back to the suite they shared, Rock had read Revy the riot act. About how stupid her actions had been. That such a stunt could have caused the writer to run. That they got lucky that only Melvin was the witness, and that he was likely not to say a thing about it. Because doing so would be bad for his business.
Revy had to admit that her lover was right.
The two of them then went to sleep in the large bed they shared in their suite.
After Revy woke up, she notice that Rock was already gone.
Revy thought, 'Rock has always been a much more early riser than me. I will meet up with her, later. Right now, I have other things I need to do.'
She then went to exercise with a gym bar she had set up in the room the previous night. While she had the super-soldier serum, she liked to try to push her physical shape a little bit.
Though, Rock from Revy exercising to be humorous, considering she went back to smoking. Revy reminder her that she doesn't smoke that often now. Maybe a cigarette, every few days, to a week. With the super-soldier serum keeping her from being to addicted to her smoke, drinking, or drug habits, like all of those that had been exposed to the super-soldier serum.
When she finished her excising, she took a shower, dried off her hair, and body. She then got dressed.
By then, according to the hotel clock in her nightstand, by her bed, it was ten thirty AM.
She then looked over at her empty shoulder hostlers, that were on top of her chest of drawers.
She thought, 'Shit. From what the bartender told me, I guess it is time go down there, and get my cutlasses back. And I will have to pay for repairs. I got to admit, that... Melvin. I think that is his name. Has balls to take my cutlasses from me. He showed me that he might be able to take me in a fight. And he is even able to make me pay for damages, by holding my cutlasses hostage.'
'This Melvin is a lot more gutsy than Bao ever was. Case in point, Melvin is making me pay for my damages. Something Bao could never directly able to get me to do. Fortunately, I can pay for the damages. And I guess it is time to face the music.'
Revy then put on the empty shoulder holsters. After which, she left her hotel room, as she headed for the nearby elevator bay, to get to the ground floor of the hotel.
(_)
A few minutes later, Revy walk through the lobby. As she did so, she noticed the guy in the baseball cap, that gave her a light last night for her cigarette, and his bearded, ponytail friend walk out of lobby front doors. They were obviously heading for somewhere else.
Though, Revy paid them no mind, as she turned her had back towards her front, as she made her way to the hotel restaurant and bar.
A minute later, Revy walked to the entrance of the hotel restaurant. She saw the door to the paned double-doors were open. In addition, she saw that the doors were undamaged.
There was also a standalone sign by the left side of the door, that stated spanish, and below the spanish, in english, “Closed until 4:30 PM Today. For repairs.”
Revy walked passed the sign, as she entered the restaurant.
She looked around and saw her handiwork with more sober eyes.
While there were some bullet holes in the walls. Most of the damage was some shelves behind the bar counter, and some of the furniture on the far end of the bar, which was away from everyone else the previous night.
Revy then noticed by the bar counter, Melvin standing in the middle of the room, as he talked to a few men, in what sounds like spanish, which Revy did not know. The men had carpenters tools with them. She guess they were repair men.
A minute later, Revy watched the men walk away from Melvin. She thought, 'I might as well get this over with.'
Revy walked up to Melvin.
Melvin turned, and saw her coming.
As Revy came to a stop a few feet in front of him, she said, “I am hear to pay for repairs, and to pay for everyone's tab for last night.”
Melvin looked at Revy, as he thought, 'Well, from her demeanor, I would guess that she remembers last night's event. I best just not push the issue. I need to get this done, and out of the way.' He said, in english, “Good. How would you be paying?”
Revy reached into one of her shorts pockets, and she pulled out four small gold bars, as she answered, “I believe this gold will pay for everything.” She then handed the four bars to Melvin.
As Melvin looked at the gold bars in his right hand, he requested, “Come over to the counter, and let me test and weigh these bars first.” He turned and walled over to the bar counter.
Revy then followed Melvin.
Melvin walked behind the bar counter, by the cash register, while Revy walked in front of the bar counter. Where both of them were standing across from each other.
Revy watched as Melvin pulled out a small instrument with two wires, a calculator, and a small set of electronic weight scales.
Revy inquired, “Do all the hotel staff have this equipment?”
While Melvin tested the gold bars for their purity, he found all four of them to be pure. He answered, “No. Only the check in staff, and this restaurant. Though, in my time here, I have found that it pays to be prepared in this town.”
Revy asked, “How long has that been?”
Melvin then used the scales to weight each gold bar. He coyly answered, “A while.” He then finished doing some calculations with his calculator, on the weight to the current market value of the gold, which he checked a few days ago.
Melvin picked up one of the gold bar. He looked over at Revy, as he handed the gold bar back to her. He stated, “Three bars will be enough to pay for the bill and damages.”
Revy took the gold bar, pocketed the gold bar, as she thought, 'So, he is not going to cheat me. That is nice. Now, to get my cutlasses back.' She requested, “Thank you. Now, can I have my cutlasses back?”
Melvin said, “Yes.” He then pulled out both semi-automatic pistols, and a small plastic bag. He set all three items gently onto the bar counter, between them.
Melvin then stated, “The bag has your ammo in it. The clips are in the pistol. I must say, those are to very nice pistols. Are they modified nine millimeter Berettas?”
Melvin mentally added, 'It was interesting to have a good close look at Revy's weapons last night. It made what happen beforehand, almost worth it. Almost.'
Revy checked both pistols, to see they were empty. She then holstered both her weapons. As she picked up the bag of ammo, she thought, 'It would be rude, even for me, to try to load my weapons, right now. I will head back to my room, and check my pistols out before I load them. Though, I doubt he did anything to them, except disarm them. And given my actions last night, in his position, I would not hand myself a loaded weapon. Also, he probably knows about weapons from his time in the military.'
'Yet. I doubt he is the writer. He is too old. Clearly to badass. And the writer would know enough about us to never try that stunt on me. The only men that I can think of, that know us, whom would be crazy enough to try that with me, would be members of Hotel Moscow. He certainly could not be one of them. That is to crazy, even for me. What would a member of Hotel Moscow be doing here, as a bartender?'
'Still, I might as well be nice. He did compliment my weapons.”
Revy answered, “Yes. You have a nice eye for details.”
Melvin complimented, “And you have nice taste in weaponry.”
Revy replied, “Thank you. And you definitely laid down the law last night.”
Melvin thought, 'Now, I need to explain the situation her.' He calmly stated, “Revy, I don't lay down the law. I just don't take shit in my bar.”
Revy commented, “That's obvious. Also, how did you know my name, Melvin?”
Melvin though, 'Oh hell. I slipped up again. Wait a minute. I remember now. I have a perfect excuse. Though, it will not work for the rest of those from Roanapur.' He stated, “Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru introduced themselves to me. And the told me your name, and the woman you were with. I think her name was Rock.”
Revy replied, “That is correct.”
Melvin thought, 'I need an excuse to know the names of the others.' He said, “Though, I don't know the others with you.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Don't worry. I will have my crew introduce themselves to you, later. Considering last night, and the fact we will likely be staying here for a while, it is the least we can do.”
Melvin went onto say, “Thank you. I looked forward to it. I prefer to know my customers names. Still... Listen Revy, I don't mind your friends, and yourself, being in my bar. But, you have to behave yourselves. I don't care what you do outside of this hotel. Though, even before you shot up the place, you drove away my customers and staff. I cannot allow that to continue. It is bad for business.”
Revy conceded, “Okay. Okay. I admit it. You have a point there. It is my fault for mistaking this city, for another city I know.”
Melvin thought, 'That would be a major mistake. This town is a lot more peaceful, and nicer than Roanapur. And this city can also be a lot more vicious, than Roanapur, when provoked.'
'For example, I know an auto mechanic, that lives in this city, whom could give the Bloodhound a run for her money. And I don't want to see you, or the others, killed, Revy. And not just because your death would likely send Hotel Moscow here, in force, to this town.'
'Though, I wonder if you have the guts to say the name of the city, Roanapur to me.' He inquired, “And where city would that be?”
Revy slyly answered, “Just a place in Thailand.”
Melvin thought, 'So, Rock has you women being secretive. That is understandable. And it is clear that Rock is the leader of your group. Considering, you would only do what Rock or Dutch would tell you. And I don't see Dutch here, in either gender. Still, it is best just be straight forward with you on how to act in this city.' He said, “Revy, if you and the others just behave, you will likely be fine in this city.”
Revy responded, “We will behave. Still, is there some place in this city that a person can cut loose at without worrying?”
Melvin flatly requested, “Define, cut loose?”
Revy casually stated, “Get drunk and wild.”
Melvin thought, 'It is tempting to tell Revy about the Rats Nest. But, I like the hot female bartender there too much to do that to her.'
Melvin said, “There are a number of other bars around here. Some very wild and dangerous. I am sure you will find one that you will like. Just keep in mind that I have found the police here are not the cliché corrupt cops. They are more lazy, than corrupt. And the police chief absolutely loathes bribery.”
Revy inquired, “Interesting. So, how does one keep off of this police chief's shit list?”
Melvin answered, “Don't make a mess in public. Don't kill people, unless they start the trouble first. Self-defense is fine. Do not harass the tourists. The police chief here has to do a balancing act. The two major incomes for this city are drug smuggling, and tourism. The drug smugglers understand that along as they don't start a war, and leave the locals and tourists alone, everything is fine. And the locals make sure to inform the tourists, to leave the drug smugglers along.”
“It has all work out so far, over the years, with only a few problems, now and then.”
“Still, in many cases, the police chief lets the locals have weapons. Such, as for their businesses. Because he knows that if the locals businesses are armed, there is less likely a chance for trouble. Or, if there is trouble, the business owners and employees can take care of the problem. With the local police getting rid of the bodies, and not worrying about the paperwork.”
Revy smiled, as she said, “I think I could get to like this town.”
Melvin mentally lamented, 'Oh brother. Revy thinking about moving here. That is a scary thought. Though...' He commented, “As I said. As long as you behave, you should be fine. But, if you are looking for trouble here, I can assure you this place can be dangerous.”
Revy said, “I will keep that in mind. And just to check, since you know the local police chief, are there going to be problems with me carrying my cutlasses in board daylight?”
Melvin cautioned, “Just don't flaunt your weapons, and walk with them on, everywhere, in public.”
Revy stated, “I have car, to take me where I want to go.”
Melvin thought, 'That is not surprising.' He said, “Then, there should not be a problem. Though, if there is a problem, and not violence involved. The police will likely give you a warning, they will let you keep your weapons.”
Revy responded, “That is great to hear. Thanks.”
Melvin replied, “You're welcome.”
Revy said, “See you, later.”
Revy then turned around, and briskly walked out of the restaurant, with her bag of a bullets in her right hand, as she headed for her hotel suite.
Meanwhile, Melvin watched Revy leave. As soon as Revy exited the room, turned the to her right, down the hallway, and out of sight, Melvin turned his attention to the items on the bar counter, in front of him. He placed the gold bars under the counter, to take to the hotel safe, in a few minutes.
After Melvin put up his instruments, he thought, 'It is nice to make a good, meaningful impression. Especially, with Revy. I don't think I have to worry about Revy, nor her crew, acting out of line here, again, anytime soon.'
For the rest of the day, Melvin noticed that none of the other badass women showed up in his restaurant, until closing that night, at midnight.
At midnight, that night, while Melvin closed his bar, he smiled, as he mentally realized, 'I am so happy that I was able to have a peaceful day, while having some of the most wild women in the multiverse staying in the hotel I work, and lived in... Well, stranger things have happened. It is too bad that there is no way I can think of to figure out why they are here. But, at least they not are here for me.'
Melvin then soon closed up the restaurant completely, he collected his Tokarev from its holster under the bar counter, and he headed to his hotel suite, to get some sleep.
(_)
The next few days went by peacefully, for the most part, for Lee. Lee noted that the women were approaching people, and talking to them. Lee guessed that they were using more subtle means to look for the writer.
Meanwhile, Lee just kept his distance, as he continued to try to figure a way to approach them. As none of them had approached him.
Lee mostly avoiding the hotel restaurant and bar, for his own safety. He just got breakfast, lunch, and dinner, elsewhere. Such as the Last Resort Diner, and the burger food truck.
In the meantime, he continued with business as usual. Which, for the most part, was him playing poker with Sam, or with Sam and others, at the Rats Nest. And he tended to win more money than he lost.
The only problem Lee had was at night. Every single night. From ten thirty PM, to midnight, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, would loudly make love to each other.
Their passionate actions prevented Lee from getting to sleep early.
But, there was nothing he could do about them, for the moment. Though, waiting to go to sleep until midnight was not that bad.
Though, Lee wished he knew what the three lovers were saying, in japanese, as they made love with each other. But, Lee realized that real life did not come with subtitles.
(_)
On the third night after the badass women had come to town, it was just after dark, as Sam and Lee decided to stay a little later at the Rats Nest. It was not the first time they had done so. And they found that as long as they were together, they did not have to worry about being attacked while they walk back to the hotel, at night.
Sam and Lee were playing poker in their usual corner table. Sam had his back to the corner, with Lee back to the right wall of the bar. This allowed Lee to see the front of the bar from the corner of his left eye.
The last time Lee looked towards the front of the room, there was about twenty men, and no women, except the bartender.
Lee turned his attention back to the poker game he was having with Sam, as he thought, 'It is not odd to have an off night, with no women customers. And I have seen the bartender be able to take care of herself. I have watched her outfight two men twice her size, with her bare hands. Also, she keeps a semi-automatic pistol under her bar counter, for emergencies.'
'All those that come to the Rats Nest, knows two things about the bartender. One, don't piss off the bartender. And two, if you are nice to her, she may take you home with her, for a night of pleasure.'
'That has not happened to myself. But, I have watched her take a few men home with her. And a couple of women, as well. She does seem to swing both was. That being said, she is clearly a badass, and she not to be messed with.'
'I am happy that she likes me, due to my manners, always paying my bills, and good tipping.'
'Yet. As I play poker, with Sam, here. I cannot seem to figure out why I am presently sensing of danger around me. Having developed my precognitive abilities has been interesting. And I can sense danger. But, it has to be direct. And it is not foolproof. I did not sense Rock, Revy, and their crew come into the hotel. The likely reason was that I was not in any immediate danger.'
'Though, I am sure if I keep an ear out, as I play, I should be okay.'
Lee then turned his attention back to the playing cards in his hand.
Less than a minute later, as Lee kept an ear towards the door. He overheard a man said, in english, with a heavy mexican accent, “Hey babes. Want to have some fun?”
Another man said, in english, also in a heavy mexican accent, “Come on. You know you all want to.”
Lee then heard a gunshot being fired.
Lee used the corner of his left eye to look at the front entrance, what he saw shocked him, but did not really surprise him.
There was a body of a man, laying one back, around his friends.
In front of the men, by the door, Lee saw that Revy and the Lagoon sisters. He did not see any of the other women. And the five sisters had their weapons in their hands.
Oddly enough, Revy just stood back, near the entrance, with her arms crossed, and weapons holstered.
Meanwhile, Molly had out her semi-automatic pistols, Sarah unsheathed her katana, Yukio held her machine gun up with both her hands, Rebecca had her long knives unsheathed, and Kristina had on her gantlets, as the men attacked the teenage girls for killing their friend.
It was not even a contest, as the girls, in their late teens, tore into the men.
Lee also noticed that the bartender could not be seen, meaning she was likely ducking under the bar counter.
Molly and Yukio used their weapons to quickly kill any of the men that pulled out weapons, or tried to escape out the back.
Though a couple of shots were fired by the men, but Lee could see from the corner of his eye that Sarah cut through the bullets, before they hit any of her family, or herself.
At the same time Sarah and Rebecca swiftly killing any men that approach the girls.
Kristina stood back, beside Molly and Yukio. Her flamethrowers were to dangerous in the enclosed space, so she was offering hand to hand protection for Molly and Yukio.
Lee felt more concern for his safety, than fear, as he thought, 'I would guess one of the men tried to get to close to them. And he got killed. Molly probably took the first shot. And they are really killing off the men in the front of the bar.'
'I don't know where the bartender is. I cannot see under the bar counter from this angle. But, I would guess the bartender is under her bar. That is a wise move on her part.'
'Yet. I wonder how Sam and I are going to handle this situation. We have no means of escape. We get up, we become targets. If we even look in their direction, we become targets. We crawl under our table, once they are finished killing these fools, they will come of and steal everything we have. Because they will see us as weak. Right now they likely don't know what to make of us. With them waiting until they finish with the others, to come and deal with us.'
'And even if we stay were we are, they still might kill us. Also, the bartender cannot help us in this situation. And I don't blame her for not getting involved.'
'The only chance we have is to do the most insane thing one can do in the middle of a gunfire fight. Ignore the gunfight. If they girls take notice, they will also wonder if we are insane. Which means, since we are not presenting a threat to them, they might leave us alone. And also they will not walk all over us. Still, I am just going to have to play this by ear, and hope Sam has enough sense to play along.'
'And all the while, we will have to hope not stray bullets hit us.'
Lee then intentionally ignored the gunfight, as he looked at his playing cards.
Sam looked at the playing cards in his right hand, as he calmly asked, “Think we should leave?”
Lee answered, “No. If we get up, we die. Let's just continue playing.”
Sam said, “That works for me.”
They continued this poker game, with Sam winning the hand.
Half a minute later, the sounds of violence stopped.
As they were in the middle of another hand of cards, Lee heard several sets of footsteps coming toward Sam and himself.
A few seconds later, Lee saw a feminine, tanned skinned right hand reach for their pot of money on the middle of the table.
Without looking up at them, Lee gently held his cards in his right hand, as he used his left hand grabbed the feminine right wrist. He firmly stated, “You are welcome to join us for a few hands of cards. But, you are not allowed to just take the pot, and leave.”
Lee let go of the right hand, as he turned to his left, to face the teenage girls.
To Lee's credit, he maintained his poker face, as he did not show any outward emotion at what he just saw right in front of him.
Less than six feet in front of him, were all five of the teenager Lagoon daughters.
From Lee's left to right, were Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio.
All of them were pointed their weapons at him, some only inches from his face. And none of them looked happy.
Yukio was pointed her automatic Browning M1918A2 machine gun at him. The browning automatic rifle had a modified 1918A3 SLR stock, and used a modified hundred round, double drum, Beta C-mag magazine. Also, Yukio did not have the shoulder stack on her body. She was holding the weapon steady, solely with her hands, while not showing any signs of trouble in doing so.
Rebecca was pointing the tips of her two Russian model eighteen twenty-seven pioneer long knives at him.
Kristina was pointed her flame throwing gauntlets at him.
Sarah was pointed the edge of her katana at him.
And Molly was pointing her two semi-automatic, stainless steel, M Nine Beretta pistols at him.
From behind them, Lee saw Revy at the bar, drinking a glass of what he guess was rum, which had just been served by the bartender, whom had already gotten up from behind the bar counter.
By the look on the face of the bartender, Lee could tell that she was not happy with the situation, they were all in.
Meanwhile, from the corner of Lee's right eye, he saw Sam was chuckling at his situation.
Kristina looked at the two men, as she inquired, “Do you think either of these two men could be the person we are looking for?”
Lee continued to maintain his poker face, as he mentally berated himself, 'This is like that Black Lagoon art picture, with Balalaika, Eda, Revy, Shenhua, and Roberta, holding their weapons, and pointing them towards the viewer. Only, in this situation, I am the intended target.'
'And what the hell is Sam laughing about. Maybe I misjudged him. Or, maybe he would just prefer laugh, than cry. I can under either possibility. Still, it does not matter. He is my own real friend here. I do not need to make an issue of his chuckling.'
Lee turned his attention back to the Lagoon five Lagoon daughter, whom were pointing their weapons, mere feet from him.
Lee remained calmed on the outside, as he mentally lamented, 'Besides, I would verbally curse in several languages, including a few fictional ones, but it would likely tip them off as to who I am...'
'Why did I have to play around with reincarnation? Why did I bring the badasses that died in the Black Lagoon series back to being among the living? Why did I make them a badass crew that were born and raised by badasses? Because I am an idiot. That is why!'
'I have to play this just right, or I am dead. Or worse... My best chance is to deflect, and humor them.'
Lee smiled at the women, as he said, “Hello ladies. This gentleman with me is Sam.” He mentally added, 'And there is the deflection.'
By then, Sam had stopped chuckling. He turned turned the five teenage women, as he calmly said, “Nice to meet you, ladies. We don't have any interest in the recent actions of have taken place here. Quite the contrary. Me and my friend here have been playing cards at this bar, for the last several months. So, we can all just walk away.”
The teenage women looked at each other for a moment.
They turned back to Lee and Sam, as Molly said, “If that is the case, then neither of these is the one we are looking for.”
Kristina stated, “I will let the others know.”
Lee thought, 'I am not going to look a gift horse in the mouth. But, thanks to Sam, for the alibi, I now get to implement my plan fully into action.'
From the corner of Lee's right eye, Lee saw Sam turned to look at him, as he asked, “Need any help with them?”
Lee did not take his eyes off the women, he then toss his cards over to Sam, as he answered, “I think I got this. Just keep dealing the deck. We will just use the current pot for the next hand.”
Sam replied, “Okay.” He then collected the cards. After which, he quickly shuffled and dealt five card to Lee, and five cards to himself. With the cards facing down.
Sam picked up his cards, and he looked at them.
Without looking at the cards, which were laying face down on the table, nor the pot, Lee played his bet, while he the push out two cards from his hand, and Sam replaced the cards.
Kristina then realized something about what Lee had said. She pointed out, “Okay. You introduced you friend, but not yourself.”
Lee continued to look at the five armed teenage women in front of him, as he introduced himself, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, I am J. D. Lee. The gambling man.” He thought, 'And here comes the build up for the humor.'
Lee then three three cards towards Sam.
Sam exchanged three cards for Lee, and to for himself.
The five older teenage girls and Revy started to laugh, as they lowered their weapons.
While the six women laughed, Lee did not look at his cards, as he and Sam placed their bets.
As the six women calmed down, without looking at his cards, Lee said, to Sam, “Call.”
Lee turned over his cards onto the table, without looking, as Sam looked at the cards and he realized he had lost.
Sam pushed the pot to Lee, as he collected the cards. He then started shuffling the cards again.
Meanwhile, the five sisters continued to focus on Lee, as Kristina commented, “Lee is a asian name. You are a white man.”
Lee looked at the five sisters, he calmly countered, “I will have you know that Lee is a southern name.”
By then, Lee had replaced his cards again, and placed his bets, all without looking. Lee said, “Fold.”
Sam collected his pot and redid the cards.
Both Revy and Molly noticed what was happening at the poker game, in front of them, with interest.
Kristina said, “As a black woman, I find such a name for you to be offensive.”
Lee continued to not look at the table, as he placed his bets and pulled out three cards for Sam to replace.
Lee thought, 'That is kind of hypocritical Kristina, considering you were a white man in your previous life. That you still remembers. Still, I am not going to dare risk saying a word about that. Now. Let us take this up a notch.'
Lee responded, while letting his southeastern U.S. accent become a bit heavier, “And as a southern gentleman, I find your ignorance and lack of tact to be annoying.”
This caused the four of the five sisters to roar with laughter. And thought Kristina did not laugh, she did maintain her compose.
Lee maintained his poker face, as he thought, 'Good. Kristina is not going to harm me for that veiled insult. And the comment made the others laugh. Just as I had hoped would happen.'
Lee did not look at the table, as he said to Sam, “Call.” Lee turned over his cards without looking and Sam realized he lost again.
Sam pushed the pot to Lee. He then collected the cards, and reshuffled the deck.
As four of the sisters calmed down, Yukio smirked, as she stated, “You are no gentlemen. A gentlemen does not in the clothes that you are wearing.”
Lee thought, 'Now, for the delivery.'
Lee casually joked, “Only fool would wear a suit and tie in a town like this. Doing so would just be asking for trouble.”
It took a second for the joke to register, with all teenage five of the girls, and Revy, started laugh at Lee's joke.
Lee thought, 'And that is the humor.'
Rebecca turned to Revy, as she stated, “Mom, is that why... err, Rokuro use to get into so much trouble?”
Revy's laughter soon turned to giggles, as she replied, “Very likely.”
Rebecca turned to her attention back towards Lee.
It was then that Molly decided to change the subject. She pointedly asked Lee, “How are you doing that?”
Lee thought, 'No point in trying to hide what she is talking about.'
Lee answered, “The card trick? It is pure instinct. I have been practicing it for a while, with Sam's help.”
Sam continued to looked at his cards, as he commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, “It is fun playing with a someone that can beat you without looking at the cards, or even the table.”
Molly inquired, “But, how exactly are doing you do that?”
Revy answered, “He's a pre-cog. He can sense the future.”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he smiled. He replied, “You got it in one, Miss Red. And thanks for the cigarette, a few nights ago.”
Revy replied, “You're welcome. And the name is, Revy. I have a friend that can do something similar.”
Lee remained calm out the outside, as he thought, with relief, 'Yea, Annie. AKA gender bent Darth Vader. Thank god, she is not here in town, or at the very least not in the hotel. Or, this would hunt would have ended very quickly, with me being caught.'
Lee said, to Revy, while pulling back on his southern accent, along with not showing a hint of sarcasm in his tone of voice, “Nice to meet you, Revy. And who are these fine ladies with you?”
Revy grinned, as she answered, “Well, the redhead with the machine gun is Yukio. The redhead with the blades is Rebecca. They are both mine. The girl with the brown dreadlocks is Kristina. The blond with the guns is Molly. And the blond with the sword is Sarah.”
Lee politely responded, “Nice to meet you, all.”
Sarah stated, “It is nice to meet you.” She then turned to the girls, as she pulled out a rage.
Sarah began cleaning off her katana with a rag she pulled from one of her pockets. A few seconds later, she sheathed her weapon into the scabbard attached to the left side of her belt. As she did so, she said, “It might be best if we let them be. It is not right to destroy those with gifts, and those that are willing to protect their own.”
Kristina replied, “I agree.”
Lee thought, 'It is good that I remember that in the reincarnation situation, I dropped their negative personality traits, while maintaining their positive personality traits. Sarah's sense of honor and valuing of skill is playing for me, and Sam.'
Lee said, “I think it is time for Sam and I to leave. Good night, ladies.”
Sam nodded once, in agreement.
Lee turned towards the table, as he and Sam quickly collected their money. Sam also collected his cards.
They didn't even count their money. They got up from their chairs, and stuffed the cash into their pants pockets.
They then calmed walked passed the teenage women.
The five teenage sisters turned to continue to look at them, as the two men walked away.
Sam and Lee then walked by the bar counter. They both stopped about five feet from where the bartender and Revy were.
Lee pulled out out some money. Counter it, to where it should cover Sam and his bar tab for that night, plus a little more for the bartender.
Lee set the money on the counter, as he stated, “This should cover our tab. And keep the change.”
The bartender collect the money, as she said, “Thanks.”
Lee asked, “Are you going to be open tomorrow. I kind of like this place.”
The female bartender turned to Lee, as she replied, “Come back late tomorrow afternoon.”
Lee nodded, as he said, “Okay. And have a pleasant night.” He then turned to Revy, while he nodded, as he stated, “And good night to you as well, Revy.”
Revy just smiled towards Lee.
Lee and Sam then walked passed Revy, and they soon exited the Rats Nest bar.
Right after they exited the bar, Lee saw two glints of metal shining on the sidewalk.
Lee bent down and saw that it was a bullet that had been split in half, in mid-flight.
Lee pocket the items, as he silently realized thought, 'This is likely Sarah's handiwork. Now, to get back to the hotel.'
Lee stood back up straight. Sam and him then turned and walking towards the Devil's Hotel.
While the two men walked side by side, with Sam being to Lee's right side, Lee turned to Sam, as he asked, “So, are the police going to look into the mess those girls just made?”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he answered, “I doubt it. The police here are not very corrupt, but at the same time, they have long since wrote off the Rats Nest as a place where bad people are going to die. As far as they are concerned, it saves them on paperwork and headaches.”
Lee said, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “That is nice of you to tell me after the fact.”
Sam countered, “At least we don't have to clean up the bodies. Though, it must be rough for a bartender to have to deal with that on a regular basis.”
Lee agreed, “You got that right. There is only one bartender I know of, than the woman in there, that had worse luck at their job.” Lee thought, 'Bao.' Lee then warned, “And keep in mind that the older redhead in there. Ah, Revy. Was the main headache for that guy. So, it is only going to get worse for that female bartender in there.”
Sam inquired, “So, you know her?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. I just backed myself into a corner without realizing it. Such a mistake could get me caught. Fortunately, it is just Sam who is with me. Still, I might as well be honest. While being vague, as I tried to salvage the situation.'
'Lee honestly answered, in a serious tone of voice, “I only know of her and her friends, through third party sources. And I don't want Revy and her friends to know that I know of them, nor where they are from.”
Sam stated, “My lips are sealed.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'Okay. One crisis averted. Now, to help keep my friend here, from accidentally getting himself killed.'
Lee said, in a sober tone of voice, “Still Sam, I know you like to take risks. I have seen you hit on girls who were standing right beside their boyfriends. But, I need you to listen to me. Words fail to describe how dangerous Revy and her friends are. If you value your life. If you wish to continue breathing. Then, leave those women alone. Do not hit on them.”
Sam replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
Lee asked, “Good. So, what are you planning to do for tonight?”
Sam stated, “I plan to go back to my hotel room, reflect on the fact we didn't get killed, and then get some sleep.”
Lee complimented, “Sounds like a good plan.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Too bad I am going to have to wait a few hours to get some sleep, with the lovebirds in the room beside me. At least I can get buy a few beers from Melvin, and go into the hotel lobby to relax, and look at my prizes.'
'I have found that the hotel lobby music, during the night, is usually playing soft, relaxing music, unless someone walks in for the first time, and the speakers start playing that person's theme song. And that has happened a few times. Though, it is a rare occurrence at this time of night.'
The two men then continued walking towards the Devils' Hotel.
(_)
Two hours later, back at the hotel, Lee sat in a cushioned armchair, alone in the hotel lobby. The chair was on the right side of the lobby, near the elevators, and the chair itself face the lobby's front doors.
Sam had already head for his suite, to get some sleep.
Meanwhile, Lee went to the hotel restaurant, bought a few bottles of beer, and took them to the front lobby, to slowly drink them.
Presently, Lee was having a nice buzz from the alcohol he drank. But, he was nowhere near completely drunk. And he still his sense of self-control.
As Lee was enjoying his alcohol buzz, he was pondering his current situation.
In his right hand were the two evenly split bullet fragments.
Lee looked down at the impossibility rolling around in his very fingers.
Doing so seemed to make the entire situation that his life had become seem more real to him.
He began to lightly tossing the pieces a few inches into the air, with the bullets landing back into the palm of his right hand.
Lee then heard some people to his side enter from the lobby entrance. He ignored them.
A few seconds later, he heard masculine voice, beside him, ask, “Where did you get those bullet pieces from?”
Lee stopped tossing the bullet pieces, letting them land in his right hand, as he turned his head to see four men he immediately recognized.
The four men were dressed in masculine clothing. It was Rock, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, as men. Lee also noted that Rock had his black long hair in ponytail.
Even buzzed, Lee did not allow any outward emotional expression to his situation.
Lee thought, 'If I am slow to react, I will appear to be more drunk than I am. Now, to figure out this situation in front of me.'
'First question. How are they male? Three have the simple answer of them being able to control what genders they want to be. For Rock, I am guessing he used a packet of instant spring of drowned man. Still, the change left Rock with long hair in both forms. Unless she cuts it, then she had short hair in both gender forms.'
'This also means, at the very least, Rock and Revy have packets of that in their hotel suite. And likely others in their group do, as well. And I really, really don't want to know the details how they use those said packets. Though, I fear my imagination already filled in most of those gaps in, a while ago.'
'Second question. Why are they guys? I am guessing they are coming back from literally having a guys night out. This makes sense. They are all good friends, and the three lovers probably invited Rock with them on their guys night out. That is why Revy was by herself, as she chaperoned her five teenagers children. And I don't have a clue where the trio sisters, and the others are. Though, none of them are likely getting into anywhere the trouble that the Lagoon sisters did at the Rats Nest.'
'Third question. Why are they talking to me? They saw the bullet fragments, and Rock recognized the type of cut that was required to do it. Considering he helped raise Sarah, that is not surprising.'
'Fourth question. Who is who? Three of the four of them have black hair. And all four of them are japanese.'
This is not hard to guess. Rock looks similar in both gender forms. As either a guy, or girl. And Rock is the same mid-twenties age in both his gender forms.'
'Natsuru's blue hair is a dead give away. And boy, is he ripped with nice abs.'
'Ranma also did have a unique taste in clothing. He always wear red.'
'So, the black haired japanese man, with the short hair cut, I guess is Akira. I have to factor in his age difference between now, and the manga. Along with manga pictures being somewhat different that what real life looks like.'
'Ranma still looks to be in his twenties from the youth restoration. And Rock's age mirrors the same youthful age as his female form, due to the super-soldier serum. But, Akira and Natsuru, as men, look to be in their forties. But, they still look great.'
'Under different circumstances, as in my hide not being on the line, I would love for the opportunity to just sit down and chat with these four people, for hours on end. Still, all four of these people are very sharp. I better watch what I say...Wait a minute, what time is it?'
Lee quickly glanced at his wrist watch, and saw he what time it was, as he continued he thought, ' Oh yea. I could make this work for me, in several ways.'
Lee then turned his attention back to the four standing men, whom were looking at him, from ten feet away.
Lee intentionally, though slightly, slurred his speech, as he inquired, “Elsewhere... Would you like to look at them?”
Rock replied, “Sure.” He then walked over to Lee.
Rock came around to a stop, beside Lee, to Lee's front right side.
Lee then stayed in his seat, as he held up the bullet pieces towards Rock.
Lee said, “Here... Have a look for yourself.”
Lee then handed the bullet fragments to Rock, as Rock took them in his left hand.
As Rock looked at the bullet pieces, Lee stated, “A couple of hours ago, a friend and I were at the Rats Nest. A local bar. A group of five teenage girls and a woman a few years older than them, came into the bar and decide to clean house, by killing a number of men there. The only ones left alive were me, my friend, and the bartender.”
By then, the four standing men had walked around to face Lee.
Rock gulped. He asked, “Could you please describe these women?”
Lee answered, “Sure. There were three redheads. Two blonds. And one with brown dreadlocks.”
Rock muttered under his breath, “I am going to have a long talk with Revy, and the girls. And after that stunt she pulled at the hotel bar.”
Lee thought, 'So, that is why the bar was closed for the morning after they got here. Revy likely got drunk and shot it up. I hope that does not happen again.'
Suddenly, the digital watch started beeping. Lee quickly stopped the beeping.
Akira asked, “Why is your watch beeping?”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'I am so going to love this.'
Lee answered, “Because it is twelve o'clock midnight, and this is when the trio of lovebirds, that have a room by mine, finally start wrapping up on their nightly lovemaking sessions. And they are loud. When they are making love, they are usually speaking, or should I say, passionately screaming in a foreign language. I would almost kill for a good night's sleep, before midnight.”
Akira asked, with discomfort evident in his tone of voice, “What do these people look like?”
Lee continued to inwardly smile, as he could tell that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru already knew the answer, considering they were blushing.
Lee stated, “Three women. Clearly lesbians. I am not judging. I am just stating a fact. There was a blond. A redhead. And a girl that dyes her hair blue.” Lee looked over, as Natsuru, as he continued, “Actually, her hair is the same shade of blue as yours.”
The four men suddenly because visibly unconformable,
Natsuru quickly responded, by lying, “She is my sister.”
Lee honestly replied, “I can see the family resemblance.”
Ranma asked, “So, why didn't you ask them to keep it down?”
Lee answered, “Because, I don't even know their names. And it would have been rude to knock on their door. Speaking of which, I don't even know your names.”
Rock spoke up, “My name is Rokuro Okajima.”
Lee did not show it on the outside, but he was mildly impressed, as he thought, 'Good move. This allows you to still use you name as, Rock, when you are female. And Rokuro as male. Like Ranma use to do with the Ranko angle.'
Lee stood up, and turned to face Rock. He extended his right hand, as he said, “It is a pleasure to meet you, Mister Okajima.”
Rock shook Lee's hand. Both men could tell that the other had a firm, but not tight handshake.
Lee thought, 'The firmness of his grip means he is taking the situation seriously. Which is good. And the firmness of my grip shows him that I am serious. Because, it is always customary for to opponents to handshake, before the battle. It is just that Rock and the others here don't realize I am the one they are after, in this insane cat and mouse game. Now, to introduce myself to them.'
The two men left go. Lee then introduced himself, “I am J. D. Lee. And yes, Lee is a caucasian family name where I come from.”
Akira asked, “And where is that?”
Lee turned to Akira, as he answered, “The southeast U.S.”
Akira wondered, as he inquired, “Like Robert E. Lee?”
Lee thought, 'It figures Akira would make the connection. Given his time in college, in Atlanta, Georgia. Still, no harm, no foul.'
Lee responded, with a slightly forced slurred tone of voice, “Yes.” He then looked around the group, as he continued, in a slightly slurred speed tone, “Now gentlemen. If you don't mind. I intended to get some sleep. Have a pleasant night, yourselves.”
Lee the turned around, and walked for the elevators. So, he could get to his room and go to sleep. Though, as Lee made his way to the elevator bar, he made himself stagger a little bit, to maintain the illusion that he was drunk.
Fortunately, the other four men believed Lee's act, and Lee made it to the elevator bay. He soon made his way up to the third floor, and to his hotel suite, where he could get ready for bed, and get some much needed sleep.
(_)
That night, as Lee slept, he had strange dreams.
Lee was standing outside, during the day. Lee stood in the sunlight, as he looked in front of him, at a large, tall multistory building.
In front of the building was a redheaded woman, and a black haired man, with light skin complexions.
Lee then turned to his right and saw a white haired man, with a full, long, groomed beard, in a purple robe, holding a staff.
The white haired man struck the bottom of his staff onto the ground.
Suddenly, the shadow of the building in front of him cast over Lee.
Lee fell through the dark tunnel for several seconds, until he saw a light at the end.
When he broke through the end of the tunnel, he found himself in a huge, domed city, that was dimming list, like it was as dusk. He look up to see the he exited a dark interior side of the dome itself.
Instead of the feeling of falling, it felt like he was flying, only Lee has no control over it.
He fell down until he was flying above a six lane road, with a median and divider between the middle of the road.
He could see vehicles going one direction on half the road, the other direction on the other half of the road.
He continued flying at high speed, at he watched himself approach a large fortress, with a concrete fence, with pillars, and a gate that was opening in front of him.
As he got closer to the gate, he noticed the two outer lanes on each side of the road split and veered around the fortress, as the two middle lanes merged into one two lane road.
It was then that Lee noticed that there was a bright light on the other side of the gate entrance.
As he got closed to the gate, the light became blinding.
A second after he past thought the gate, and the light, he found the light was gone, and he was flying over a mountain range, during the day, in the early morning.
He was high enough that he was by the clouds.
He then looked down at a valley before him, which was covered in mist.
Suddenly, he trajectory changed, and started going straight down in the valley.
He passed though the mists, and felt himself hitting water.
He kept going deeper, until he emerge from the surface of the water on the other side.
As he began getting height, he found that he was not water, and that he was coming out of a lake, in a less mountainous, more hilly terrain.
It was the middle the day.
Lee then noticed that he had flight path in the sky had curved, with him heading to what look like a asian style, stone built, feudal palace.
As he got closer, he could see that the palace was populated. With the clothing of the men and women there, dating back to the feudal period in Asia.
While Lee passed over the front gates, he noticed that the guards standing there did not noticed him. Nor, did anyone else, as he flew above them.
The flight path changed again, as he slowed down, while change direction, to specific part of the palace.
A few seconds later, Lee found himself landing on his feet in a small, outdoor garden.
Lee looked around, and a few people walking about, but they ignored, as they continued about their business.
Lee thought, 'I am like a ghost to them. Which makes sense, in this insanity. And I feel draw towards someone, or something, inside the building in front of me. I have come this far. I might as well see who, or what it is.'
Lee noticed the doors to the building, in the direction he was draw to, were open.
Lee walked inside.
He was careful no to run enough anyone, as he continued walking. This whatever pull had on him, directed him through the hallways, until he saw a sliding door in the hallway, that opened to a room.
Lee felt he needed to walk inside.
After Lee walked in, he could see the room was someone personal bedchambers, but the room was far more modern than must of the palace.
There were electric, modern furniture, bedding, drawers, and even a coffee maker, with accessories, on a table across the room.
He then heard a feminine voice, from the other side of the room, calmly greet him, “Hello Lee.”
Lee turned to see a woman, with her back turned to him.
Even with her back turned to him, Lee could see that the woman was slender in build, had long black hair, and fair skin. She was also wearing a very fine silk robe.
She had a mirror in one hand, and brush in her other hand, as she combed her hair.
With her back turned to Lee, the woman casually said, “Lee? Do you not have people to meet? Somewhere to be?”
Before Lee could response, he eyes snapped open, and he realized he was laying on his pillow, in his bed, on his stomach, in his hotel suite, in the Devil's Hotel.
Lee rolled over, onto his back, and leaned up.
Lee looked around, and he could see from the illuminated outline of the heavy curtains, in front of the sliding glass door, that it was morning.
As he turned on the lamp beside his bed, he look at the digital clock by the lamp.
The clock read in red LED letters, seven thirty-five AM.
Lee rubbed his face, as he thought, with annoyance, 'I hate visions. I loath visions. They never make sense until the start to happen. And I tend to forget most of the details before they start to happen. Unfortunately, they are part of the package in being a pre-cog.'
'Thought, visions are completely unlike straight precognition, when I literally experience a part of my future life experiences. In those cases, there is usually a stretch of memory of a few seconds, to a few minutes, where I literally know what is going to happen for that short time frame, when it begins to happen. This is because I first live it in my sleep. Though, I don't fully recall it when I wake up. It does stay with me, and I usually have total recall of the events, beginning to end, once they start to happen.'
'And I like when my precognition does that. But, still I cannot make head or tails of the visions I sometimes have. They are like glimpses of several time periods. Like flipping through the pages of a book, without really looking at any page in particular... Well, I might as well get up and face the day.'
Lee then woke himself up, completely. He got up from his bed, shaved, cleaned up, showered, dried, and dressed for the day.
Roughly half an hour after he finished getting dress, around eight thirty AM, Lee was sitting on his bed watching an english channel on TV, while trying to decide what he wanted to do for breakfast.
Lee suddenly heard a knock on his door. Use then TV remote to turn off the TV. And he tossed the remote on top of his bed, to his right side.
Next, Lee got up, and he slowly when to the door. When he reached the door, look into the peephole.
Lee did a double-take.
Outside his door were Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, all women at the time. And they were dressed in nice women's clothing. And they were clearly ready to face the day, as well.
Lee thought, 'I better say hi. After last night, they probably want to apologize to me. And this is a perfect opportunity for an official first impression with them.'
Lee quickly walked over to his chest of drawers, where he retrieved, and put on his blue baseball cap, large glasses, and blue cloth jacket. He then softly rushed back over to the door.
Lee opened the door. He then kindly greeted them, “Good morning, ladies. What can I do for you?”
Natsuru was the one to speak, as she greeted Lee, “Good morning. My brother informed me, a few minutes ago, that our nightly activities were disturbing you. We apologize for your discomfort.”
Akira continued for her blue haired lover, “We were not aware we were being so loud.”
Ranma finished for her two lovers, “Sorry about that. We will try to be more quieter in the future.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “Thank you. And I hope you have a nice day.”
Just as Lee was about to close the door, Akira held it open with her right shoe in the doorway.
Lee let go of the door, with him letting the door stay open.
Akira, stated, “It has also come to our attention that we have been poor neighbors. So, we plan to take the time to introduce ourselves to everyone in the hotel, starting with you. My name is Akira. The blue haired girl is Natsuru. And the redhead here is Ranma.”
Lee replied, “Nice to meet all of you. I am J.D. Lee.”
Natsuru explained, “Still, when we said all of us. It did not just mean the three of us.”
Lee maintained an outward calmness, as he thought, 'Oh crap. They are not going too...'
Ranma said, in a manner that lead to no room for discussion, “We all are going down to the restaurant, so you can meet our friends.”
Akira then turned, and headed down the hallway, towards the elevator bay.
Ranma continued, “Akira is going ahead, to organization the introductions.”
Lee thought, 'There is no point in arguing with them. They are stronger, and better, than me, in every category. At least I have my wallet and keys already in my pants pocket. And my shoes are on.'
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee walked out of the door to his hotel suite, locking and shutting the door behind him.
Lee then walked beside Ranma and Natsuru, down the hallway, towards the elevators.
(_)
A few minutes later, Ranma, Natsuru, and Lee entered the hotel restaurant, Lee followed Ranma, with Natsuru behind him.
Lee saw that the badass crew were sitting in chairs, at set of tables, near the stage, in the back of the room.
Though, they were not the only customers in the room. But, the other customers were sitting away form the badass crew, in either in chairs, at tables near the entrance to the restaurant, or by the bar counter, in stool.
Lee did his best to remain calm, and composed, with his poker face on, as he thought, 'I miss not coming here for breakfast, but now I avoid it like the plague, because this is where these badasses come, first thing in the morning, for breakfast. And it is very unwise to deal with trained killers, when they are not fully awake, and hungry for food and drink.'
As they continued walking towards the badass crew, Lee saw that Akira was giving a speech to her friends. She was standing in the middle of the tables, where her friends were sitting, and eating their breakfast.
Lee overheard Akira say, in english, “Now, we have been here for a few days, and we have been very reclusive to the rest of the staff and guests of this hotel. And while we have talked to a few of them. To be honest, some of them are likely getting suspicious of us. So, Ranma, Natsuru, and I decided we would introduce all of us to each person in the hotel, starting with this fellow right here.”
Akira then gestured towards Lee.
The dark haired woman, that looked like Birdy Cephon, whom sat across from Aeryn at a table, said, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “That poor guy.”
Lee thought, 'And that would be, Violin.'
As soon as Ranma, Natsuru, and Lee approached the tables, Akira saw them, as she stated, “Let us get started. This is J. D. Lee. Now, before you ask, as someone with experience with both Chinese and American cultures, Lee, is a name used by both asians, and some caucasian Americans. Though, the name between the two peoples have completely different roots. Now, let us start our introductions.”
When they reached the center of the tables the groups were at, Lee stopped walking, while Ranma and Natsuru walked up to stand beside Akira, while facing Lee.
Lee made sure he appeared to be paying attention to every word that Akira spoke.
Akira pointed at a table where Shenhua and Sawyer, drinking cups of coffee. The coffee was being poured by Lotton.
Akira stated, “The chinese woman is Shenhua. The smaller woman is Sawyer. The woman pouring the coffee is Lotton.”
While doing his best to maintain his poker face, Lee was starting showing some nervousness on the outside. Though, Lee also felt some mild amusement, as he though, 'I find it interesting that Lotton is as hot as the rest of these women.'
Akira then pointed to Aeryn and Violin, as she stated, “This is Aeryn, and her spouse, Violin.”
Violin just lightly waved at Lee.
Akira then pointed at a table, where her, Ranma, and Natsuru's daughters were sitting at.
Akira pointed at the green haired girl first, “The green haired one is mine. Her name is Yurika. The blue haired girl with black highlights is Natsuru's child. She is named Mikoto. The purple haired girl is Ranma's daughter, and her named Nodoka.”
Akira then pointed at a table belonging to the five lagoon daughters.
Lee interrupted, “I have already met these five ladies.”
Akira started, “Oh, so these are the girls you... grunt.”
Lee noticed that Ranma gently elbows Akira in her ribs.
Lee thought, 'It makes sense that Ranma elbowed her lover, to keep her from revealing their true nature to me, because they would have to explain how they knew what happened last night. Still, I am nervous, and I cannot help it.'
Akira said, “Moving on, we now introduce you to our two leaders, Revy and Rock. The redhead is Revy. And the raven haired woman is Rock.”
Akira pointed at the table in front of him, in which Revy, and Rock, whom was now back to being a girl, were sitting at.
Lee mentally noted, 'Rock is back to being girl. No surprise there.'
Lee also noticed that Revy was smirking at him.
Lee thought, 'Revy is likely planning to tell them I am a pre-cog. Nothing I can do about that. Still, I better be polite.' Lee looked around at the group, as he said, “It is nice to meet you all.”
Meanwhile, Ranma, Akira, Natsuru went to join their daughters at the table they were sitting at.
This left Lee alone, in the center of the tables where the women were sitting at.
Lee thought, 'This is like being surround by pride of lions. Hungry lions at that. And I getting more nervous by the second.'
For all his poker skills, he could not hide the fact that he was startled by being surrounded by these badass women. All of whom wanted a piece of his hide, they just didn't know it was him they were looking for.
Lee silently realized in thought, 'I got to say something quick, or they are going start asking me questions. And I know what to do, to get out of this situation.'
Lee quickly said, “I freely admit, I am intimidated by being surrounded by so many beautiful women.”
The women around him laughed at his comment.
Lee thought, 'I will take the laughs over the pain, any day of the week.'
Aeryn commented, “You are an intelligent man.”
Lee turned to Aeryn, as he said, “Thank you.” He then looked around the group, as he continued, “Anyway, as I said before, it is nice meeting you. But, I have an errands to run. So, have a great morning.”
Lee then turned towards the front of the room, and walked away from their tables, towards the exit to the hallway. But, Lee did so at a calm, causal pace.
And by taking his time, this allowed him to overhear some of their conversations.
Lee thought, 'If I run, doing so will arouse their suspicions about me. And if I overhear something important from them, I cannot stop, nor change pace without alerting them. I must maintain this pace all the way to the outside of the restaurant.'
(_)
Nearby, Nodoka leaned towards the table with the lagoon daughters, as she asked, “Is that the gambler from last night? Whom you told us about?”
Molly turned to Nodoka, as she answered, “Yes”
Nodoka stated, “He doesn't look like much.”
Yukio snorted, “That guy was able to keep it together while we had our weapons draw on him, mere feet away from his body. And he was still able to play hands of poker with his friend at the same time, and win a few of those hands. Without looking at the cards. Don't underestimate him.”
(_)
While the conversation with the teenage girls went on, Rock overheard their conversation. She turned to Revy, as she asked, “So, you met him last night?”
Revy turned to Rock, as she stated, “Yep. He is a latent pre-cog. What he does at playing poker is amazing. Not as amazing as you, honey. But then, who is?”
Rock smiled at her lover's compliment, as she said, “Well, I met him last night, as well. And he had enough sense to pick up two pieces of a bullet that Sarah has sliced in half. Is he the one we're after?”
Revy answered, “Nah. The bearded guy with him said he has been here for several months. This doesn't fit the time frame, as we know of it.” Revy then spoke a little loud, towards her groups, as she inquired, “So, what is going on with our betting pool, on whom is most likely to catch this writer?”
Akira answered, “As usual, Rock is in first place. Given she is the most clever of all of us.”
Violin coughed.
Akira conceded, “Okay, she is second most clever of all of us.”
Revy admitted, “We'll give you that one, Violin. So, I guess I am third.”
Akira stated, “No. Natsuru is.”
Revy whined, “Why her?”
Akira answered, “Natsuru was trained, and worked, as a cop, for around two years.”
Revy asked, “By the way, what is up with that?”
Natsuru answered, “I needed a job at the time.”
Revy replied, “Fine. So, who is fourth?”
Akira said, “Aeryn.”
Aeryn pointed out, “I was trained in capture and retrieval.”
Revy inquired, “Dare I ask who is the fifth person?”
Akira replied, “Eda.”
Revy said, “Okay. I guess she can count in this betting pool. And she does have the skills to find the writer. Still, we haven't even spoken to her, since we came to this town. Though, we probably need do so.”
Sawyer stated, with her own repaired voice, which was lovely to hear, “Yes. We need to call her. I am sure Rock has her phone number.”
Rock commented, “I do. Actually, I did I talked with her, by phone, this morning, before Revy woke up. She and Yolanda are trying a different tactic to catch this person. They are trying to find him through his stomach.”
Ranma complimented, “Smart move.”
Revy asked, “So, who is number six?”
Akira stated, “You.”
Revy exclaimed, “Finally!”
Lee heard all this. A second later, he finally exited the bar, through the hallway entrance.
(_)
Half an hour later, after a brisk walk to the Last Resort Diner, Lee sat in a back corner of the restaurant, in a cushioned booth, with his back to back wall, of the far right corner of the room, allowing him to see the windows and front door, in the front side of the diner.
Lee's nerves has been frayed over the course of the last twenty hours, and after the events of the morning, what has happened finally mentally hit him. And all Lee was presently trying to do was to mentally collect himself, so he could continue on with the day, and his plans.
The black haired, fair skinned waitress, Lori, walked over to Lee's booth, and served him a cup of coffee.
Lee looked up at the woman, as he said, “Thanks, Lori.”
The woman just smiled, and went back to check on the other customers in the diner.
Given his frayed nerves, Lee could not help having his right hand shake, as he held the coffee cup by the handle, while he took a sip of moderately hot liquid.
After the small swallow of coffee, Lee thought, 'Three major close calls within twelve hours. On the bright side, now I officially know their names. So, there will be no questions on the matter, if I accidentally use their names. Except for Eda and Yolanda. But, I will get to them, later.'
'Also, I now know the hiding in plain sight routine works. And that they are concerned on keeping their secrets. I can use all this to my advantage. It means they will not do anything to flamboyant in public. Though, some of them just don't care. Like I saw last night, at the Rats Nest.'
'Still, I have to be careful to not reveal any personal information about myself, nor them. If they ask, I have to say I only like action movies. I have never heard of anime. And I don't care about using computers. And I don't dare tell any injokes. That will give me away immediately, given how genre savvy I made all of these women.'
'Speaking of which. Why the hell did I have to give them access to Tvtropes website? And make them so dangerously genre savvy? Because, I am an idiot. That is why!'
'And damn. I miss my collections of music, to anime, to movies, to TV shows. I miss having access to the internet.'
'Still, back to the matters at hand. I may have to come up with a cover story. Hiding out due to tax problems is likely the most believable cover story I can come up with, that has the least complications. It is such a boring crime, those not involved don't ask too many questions. And it is so common that it is hard to backtrack.'
'So, where will I say I am from? How about Nashville, Tennessee? I have been there a few times in my life? And I know enough about the place to convince someone that I have lived there, unless they have lived there, themselves. Which is not the case for these women.'
'All in all, I am still on the same plan as before. I just have to slightly modify my plan. That plan being to steal one of their reality devices, escape, and get cured of my cancer, along with other things. The introduction today was just one step towards to that goal. But, I have a bad feeling they will guard those devices as closely as they do their own virtue. For lack of a better term.'
'Also, they mentioned Eda and Yolanda are in town, and those two are trying to rope me through use of food. Now, the question is how?... Of course, they are the blonds from the burger van. Eda is the cashier, and Yolanda is the cook.'
'I forgot, that in the Black Lagoon omakes, how hot Yolanda looked as a young woman. And I did have her deaged and I had her lost right eye restored with a cybernetic eye that is just as good as her left eye. And with the artificial eye matching her right eye.'
'Honestly. Taking into account what I gave her. I don't think I have to much to worry about Yolanda. She will not stop the others from harming me. But, she will likely not take part in what they do to me. If they catch me.'
'Also, Eda honestly threw me because she was not wearing her shades, and she was not wearing a nuns outfit, nor trampy clothing. I did not do much to Eda. So, I am not sure how much she wants to capture me.'
'The two of them could be just in it for the challenge. Also, I cannot just stop eating there, without arousing their suspicions.'
'But, they cook good food, at a good price. Plus, I am now one of their regular customers. And I am always polite to them, compliment their cooking, and service, along with leaving nice tips. Doing all this can only help me in my situation. Still, I just have to be more careful, now that I know there are more of them here and after me, than just in Revy's group.'
Lee then noticed Lori walking by him, as he mentally added, 'Now, let's get some breakfast. And I will meet with Sam in the hotel lobby in an hour or so, to pick up on our continuous poker game. And I seem to be making good money at it.'
Lee turned to look up at Lori, as he stated, “Lori, I am ready to order.”
Lori turned her head towards him. She then walked over to him, as she asked, “What can I get for you, Lee?”
Lee then gave her, his order.
Ten minutes later, his breakfast was ready. He the ate his meal. When he finished, he got up from the booth he was sitting him, he paid for his meal, he thanked George for his good cooking, he tipped Lori some money. He then left to head back to the hotel, to meet with Sam.
(_)
The next few days were uneventful for anyone at the hotel. And Lee found that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were more quiet with their loving making, allowing Lee to get to sleep earlier.
Lee was grateful for this, and he turned off the alarm to his wrist watch.
Also, the afternoon, after the Rats Nest massacre, Lee and Sam found that the bartender had her bar already completely cleaned up, repaired, and she back in business, in record time.
When Sam and Lee asked about how she was able to do all this so quickly, she coyly stated was that she had a lot of experience in doing so.
Lee and Sam knew better than to ask her for the details.
(_)
Then, one night, over a week and a half after Rock, Revy, and their crew, had come to De La Plata Podrido. A few days after Lee was formally introduced to the badass women. On highways of the island, there was car chase between a red 1965 Pontiac GTO, and two much newer cars.
At the wheel of the GTO was Lee, whom was wondering, at the moment, whom posed the most danger to him right now. His passengers, or those chasing them.
Lee though for the sixth time that night, 'How do I get myself into these situations? Oh, that is right. Because, I am an idiot. That is why!'
(_)
Around six hours, and ten minutes earlier, it was late afternoon. In the lobby of the Devil's Hotel, Lee and Sam were playing cards at their usual table.
It had rained earlier that morning, and the two friends decided to stay at the hotel, for the day. Instead of heading for the Rats Nest, and risk getting rained on. Though, by the late afternoon, the sky had completely clear.
Lee and Sam were presently enjoying the soft rock music playing in the front lobby speaker, as they played cards, when Revy and Rock walked up to them.
Revy asked, “Hi guys. I have a question.”
Lee and Sam set down their cards, face down, as they looked up at the two women.
Sam offered, “Go ahead.”
Revy stated, “We are looking for a designated driver for tonight.”
Sam replied, “Well, I don't know how to drive a car. But, Lee does.”
Lee just glared at Sam. He then turned to Revy as he inquired, “Why don't you ask one of your other friends to take you?”
Revy answered, “Two reasons. One, they know better. Two, we want to go the Rats Nest. It is the only decent dive we could find in town. And they don't feel like coming with us.”
Lee said, “I am surprised the bartender let you back in there, after that night you had with those teenage girls.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Well, I have found gold has a way of making people very forgiving.”
Lee commented, “That must have been a lot of gold you paid that woman.”
Revy said, “It was. And we still have to pay for drinks. As you can guess, she is still a bit upset about that incident. But, I don't mind. The Rats Nest kinda reminds me of the Yellowflag.”
Lee played dumb, as he asked, “The what?”
Revy replied, “Never mind about that. Anyway, from asking around, we learned that you two are regulars at that place. And the bartender there likes you two. So, we figured the bartender will be a little nicer to us if one of you is there with us. So, are you going to take us?”
Rock said, in a comforting tone, “Don't worry, we are not that bad when we are drunk.”
Lee thought, 'If I turn them down, it will only end in pain for me. And whomever else they rope into going in my place.' Lee stated, “One condition. None of you take any weapons. I do not want a repeat of that night.”
Revy commented, “Works for me. Meet us out front in half an hour.”
As Revy and Rock walked away, Lee turned to Sam, as he casually inquired, “Do you want to come with me, and chaperone a bunch of violently psychotic women, whom are intent on getting drunk?”
Sam turned to Lee, and he just glared at Lee for a few seconds. He then began laughing very hard for several seconds. As he slowly stopped laughing, he answered, “Hell no. I have enough problems with such matters in my day.”
Lee said, “I don't want to know.”
Sam was still chuckling, as he complimented, “Good answer.”
Lee offered, “Still, would you like to get something to eat, right now, at the hotel restaurant? I got a feeling I am not going to be able to eat much to tonight.”
Sam said, “Sure. With those women tagging along, you will be to busy watching your back. I will even pay for it. Considering, I got you into this mess.”
Lee sarcastically replied, “Gee, thanks.” He continued, in a more normal tone of voice, “Still, we can probably get Melvin to do a rush order on orders, because I am in a hurry.” He mentally added, 'And Melvin knows how unwise it is to keep those women waiting.'
Both men then got up, and headed for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
Half an hour later, it was close to sunset, as Lee walked outside the front entrance of the hotel lobby, and onto the sidewalk, under the awning.
Melvin had fortunately been able to do a rush order on Lee's meal, and Lee finished his dinner with just enough time to stop by the men's restroom in the front lobby, before he headed outside.
Five minutes later, he was met by four women. Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, whom had just walked outside, to join him.
Lee noted that having a close look at Lotton and Sawyer, standing next to each other, that Lotton was almost a short and petite as Sawyer.
Lee thought, 'What is Lotton doing here? I thought she didn't drink... Oh, that is right, I fixed it so she could drink alcohol with a problem in book three. And she did enjoy the occasional drink, then.'
Lotton was in a similar outfit that she wore as a man. Which was, among other things, a black long coat, shirt, and pants. Only, her clothing was cut much smaller to fit her smaller physical frame.
The other three women wore their usual clothing.
The women then looked over at Lee.
Lee noticed this, as he thought, 'I might as well say something polite.' He greeted them, “Hello ladies. I will be designated driver for the evening.”
The girls just looked at him with wicked grins on their lips.
Lee silently realized, as he inwardly groaned, in thought, 'This is going to be a long night.'
Just then, Rock pulled up, on the parking lot, along side the sidewalk, by Lee and the women, in a red, two door, 1965 Pontiac GTO, with the right passenger side facing them.
Lee thought, 'From the color, this might be the same car as from the series. And the one I slightly damaged in book three. Though, I left it those damages were repaired. And they were repaired, because later, they used it an early part of book two to escape Chang's forces, to the Lagoon PT boat, during that typhoon.'
Lee walked over to the passenger seat door, and opened it. He the reached in and used the latch by the front passenger seat, to lower front seat forward, so the others could enter the backseat. He then stood back up, stepped out of the way, while he used his left hand to motion to the women to get in.
After the four women squeezed into the back seat, with looked difficulty, Lee go raised the passenger seat, and got in the front. He then buckled up.
Lee stayed quiet, as Rock set the car into gear, and drove towards the closest exit, from the parking, to the road.
Lee looked over at the manual shift, as he thought, 'Great. They didn't tell me the car I would be driving is a manual shift, with a foot clutch. I know how to drive a manual, but I am just not that great at it. Still, I is best to stay quiet. I might hear something important said by the girls.'
Lee found that he was correct. The quiet did afford him the opportunity to listen to the girls in the backseat.
Lee overheard Lotton say, “It is nice that I no longer have problems drinking alcohol.”
Lee thought, 'That just confirms what I already knew.'
As Rock kept her eyes in front of her, on the road, she noticed that Lee was quiet. She commented, “You seem awfully quiet.”
Lee plainly stated, “After that night at the Rats Nest, I know better than to ask you to stay out of trouble. So, I am just going to stay quiet.”
Lee's comment got a few chuckles from the backseat.
Rock responded, “Fair enough.” She then continued driving them to the Rats Nest.
(_)
Five minutes later, they reached the Rats Nest, and parked on the side parking lot, to the left of the building.
Rock and Lee both helped those in the backseat get out, from both doors.
After locking and closing the car doors, Lee then walked over to the door to the Rats Nest entrance, and held it for the women.
Revy, Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton walked into the bar, without paying Lee any mind.
Though, when Rock passed by Lee, she handed him the keys to the car, as she said, “Thank you.”
Lee took the keys, on the keyring, and he put them into a pants pocket, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then walked into the bar, closing the door behind him.
As Lee walked inside, he noticed that the late crowd had yet to show up.
The only ones there, besides Lee, and the five women, were the bartender, and a few others.
The bartender looked up, from behind the bar counter. She frowned at what she saw, as she stated, “I am surprised to see you again, Revy.”
Revy smirked, “What can I say? This place reminds me of home.”
The bartender joked, “Where is that? Hell?”
Revy and the women by her, just laughed. While, Lee remained quiet.
As soon as they stopped laughing, Lee leaned towards Rock, as he said, “Rock, I will be by the bar counter.”
Rock turned to Lee, as she replied, “Okay.”
Lee then walked to the bar counter. As he did so, he noticed Rock, Revy, Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton walking to the left, back corner table that Sam and him usually used.
Lee then sat on a stool, on the long end of the bar counter, with his back to the windows on the left side of the bar.
The bartender walked up from behind the bar counter, to where she was facing Lee.
Lee turned towards the bartender, to look at her face.
The bartender inquired, “So, how were you roped into this madness?”
Lee looked up at her, as he answered, “At the Devil's Hotel, while Sam and I were sitting in the lobby, Sam mentioned I could drive a car. Though, I don't remember telling him. Still, I owe him, so I am let the matter slide.”
“Anyway, the girls noticed that Sam and I come here a lot. And that you appreciate our business. They thought if one of us was here with them it would earn brownie points with you. And so, they asked me... For lack of a better term. To be their designated driver.”
“And Sam showed some sanity, and he refused to join me in this disaster waiting to happen.'
The bartender gave Lee a sympathetic looked, as she stated, “Well, you have my sympathies. I respect you. You and Sam are polite. You always pay your bills. And you tip well. If things go down, I will try to help you get out of this mess alive.”
Lee smiled, as he said, “I appreciate that.”
The bartender commented, “And you are not the first man I have seen roped in by crazy women, against his will. I have seen a few. But, I think you are clearly the most savvy of them.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
The bartender asked, “So, what do you want?”
Lee requested, “A cold bottle of cola. And please keep a separate tab between me and them. I don't want to owe them anything. I will pay for my drinks. They can pay for theirs.”
The bartender complimented, “A wise idea.”
Lee said, “And if things go down. I will settled up with you tomorrow.”
The bartender replied, “That will be fine.” She then pulled out a set a cold bottle of cola on the top of the counter, as she said, “And this one is on the house, over the hell we both know you have just been forced into.”
Lee grinned again, towards the bartender, as he replied, “Thanks.”
The bartender returned Lee's smile, as she stated, “You're welcome.” She then went over to Rock, and the other women at the left, back corner table, to get their drink orders.
(_)
Around five and a half hours later, Lee sat at his stool, at the bar counter, sipping at his current, cold bottle of cola, as he kept an eye on the girls at the left, back corner table, where he and Sam usually sat at.
Lee thought, 'From the way those five girls look. I would say they are clearly drunk. And it took a lot of hard alcohol to get them at way. That is likely due to the super-soldier serum. Still, Rock looks only slightly drunk, while the other four are just about wasted.'
'But, they are not leaving, until they want to. Even the bartender knows better than to cut them off. At worst, we will carry them out to the car, when they pass out. And I will get their friends, back at the hotel, to get them out of the car, and take care of them.'
Lee then looked around him, to see that within the time they had been there, the bar had been packed with people. The room was practically standing room only.
Lee thought, 'Though, to make matters worse, the bar is packed with other men and women. Many of them look fairly rough. I have to stay on my toes. This could go very bad, very quickly. I just hope that even drunk, Rock and Lotton can keep the other three from starting a fight.'
Meanwhile, the beautiful bartender woman of the Rats Nest walked up to Lee, from behind the bar counter, as she inquired, “How are you holding up, Lee?”
Lee looked over at bartender, as he replied, “Good. How about you?”
The bartender answered, “Fine. As long as those five don't start a fight.”
Lee agreed, “My thoughts, exactly.”
Suddenly, a mexican man, whom Lee could smell alcohol his breath from the distance he was already out, approached Lee.
Lee looked over at the man, coming towards them.
Lee thought, 'This guy screams trouble.'
Lee stood up from his stool, as he turned to face the man, just as the man stopped about four feet from him. With both of them standing less than a foot from the bar counter. With the counter to Lee's left side, and the counter to the mexican man's right side.
The man asked, in english, “Do you know those hot women?” He then pointed at the girls, with his right hand.
Lee thought, 'Oh hell no! I can see this coming a mile away. And it will end in a bloodbath. Likely my blood. I have to play along in the hopes of saving everyone from their stupidity and horniness.'
Lee answered, by embellishing the truth a bit, “Yes. And sir. I completely agree with you. Those five are all smoking hot women. But, I do know enough about them to say that you want nothing to do with them. They are lesbians. Crazy. And drunk. But, if we are lucky, we might soon see them start to make out.”
Across the bar counter from Lee, the bartender had been paying attention to Lee's conversation. She giggled at Lee's comment.
The drunk man replied, “All women are crazy. Drunk just makes them easier to get to bed. And being lesbians means they haven't met a real man, yet.”
Lee mentally screamed, 'You have got to be kidding me! Who is he? The wittiest drunk in the west? I am going to have to play along.'
Lee looked over at the bartender, and she gave him a sympathetic look.
Lee looked back over at the man as he stated, “You are probably right. But, these are also very violent women. And between you and me, I find the redhead to be more masculine, in personality, than I could ever hope to be.”
The bartender snorted, while holding back her laughter.
The man suggested, “Then, how about I show them how much I am a man, by using your hide?”
He then used his right hand to pull out a small revolver from his a back pants pocket, and started to point it at Lee.
Lee didn't even blink and eye, as he quickly used his right foot to kick the man in the balls, forcing him to drop his gun. A second later, after both of Lee foot was back on the floor, next to his left foot, Lee followed up the kick, by used his right hand to swiftly grip the left side of the man's head, and slam it onto the top of the bar counter. Lee then held the man's head on the counter.
The bartender's jaw dropped at seeing this.
And a few others around Lee also noticed what had just happened.
(_)
From across the room, Lotton was the only one of the five women paying attention to what Lee had just done.
Watching Lee take down that guy reminded her of another event she said, first hand, several years ago. But, she was too drunk to remember, nor even care, what the event was.
(_)
As Lee held the man down, with his right hand, he looked at the man's head. He calmly stated, “I know you are angry with me, right now. And you have every right to be. But, you need to understand, that by doing this, I am saving your life.”
The bartender agreed, “He is right. He just saved your life. Those women are dangerous. You do not want to mess with them.”
Lee said, “Like the nice lady behind the counter is saying. If you knew all the facts of the situation, you would be thanking me, right now. Unfortunately, there are too many people around for me to tell you.”
Lee then used his left hand to pull out a fifty dollar bill from one of his pockets. He set the fifty dollar bill in front of the man, as he continued, “So, please treat yourself, and your friends, to some drinks on me. And I hope there are no hard feelings.”
Lee then let go of the man's head.
Suddenly, from the corner of his right eye, Lee could see a number of men, and a few women get up from their seats. They started walking towards him.
Lee mentally grumbled, 'It was worth a try.'
Then, from beside him, to his left, Lee saw the bartender swiftly pulled a semi-automatic pistol from under the bar counter. She quickly pulled back the slide, loading a round in the chamber, and cocking the hammer, as she pointed her weapon over the mexican man, whose head was on the table, and over towards the approaching adults.
The bartender firmly stated, “Hold it right there.” She then said to Lee, “I know you tried to avoid this. Get the girls out of here. Both you, and them, can settle your tabs later.”
Lee looked over at the bartender, he replied, “Thanks.” He then towards the left, back corner table, as yelled towards Revy, and the other women at the corner table, “Girls, time to leave!”
The women heard him. They took a look around, and realized what was going on. They got up from their seats, and headed for the front door.
As Lee watched them reached the front door, he swiftly took off for the front door, as well.
After Lee exit the bar, he met up with the girls, as he stated, in a commanding tone of voice, “Everyone, please get in the car.”
Rock was sober enough to ask, “What happened?”
Lee swiftly answered, “Too many drinks, too many guns, and too little common sense.”
Rock replied, “Ah. Been there. Done that.”
Lee responded, “Rock, that bartender is not going to be able to hold that crowd back for long. Help me get your friends to the car now. So, we can get out of here.”
Rock said, “Gotcha.”
Lee and Rock spent the next several awkward seconds herding four other much more drunk women into the car.
Sense Rock was not as drunk as the others, Lee had her sit in the front passenger seat, while the other women were in the backseat. Lee was in the driver's seat, as he started the car, turned on the front headlights, and he quickly got them onto the road.
As Lee saw that the fuel tank was nearly full, he thought, 'I am so happy that Rock knows to be prepare, beforehand, for unforeseen situations like this.'
(_)
A minute later, as they drove down a four lane highway, on the island, Rock noticed they were not heading in the direction of the hotel. She asked, “Why aren't we going to the hotel?”
Lee answered, “I got a bad feeling that I just pissed off the wrong people.” He mentally added, 'For a second time in my life. And my precognition is warning me of danger.' He continued, “And I don't want to lead them to our home, just yet.”
Suddenly, while driving on a four lane highway, divided by a low lying dirt median, with planted palm trees, Lee saw in the car's rear-view mirrors two modern cars gaining on them, at high speed.
Lee said, “I hate being right... Hold on girls. This is going to get rough.”
Sawyer quipped, “We like it rough.” The other girls in back just giggled.
Lee then pressed down on the accelerator of the car with his right foot. As he did so, he used his left hand on the steering wheel, his right hand to work the gear stick, and his left foot to work the clutch, as he shifted gears, while speaking up.
Right after Lee shifted gears, without a problem, he used his right hand to turn on the radio, on the center panel of the dashboard. He then fiddled with the frequency dial.
Rock commented, “We don't have time for music.”
Lee quipped, “There is always time for music. And it helps me relax.” He mentally added, 'And I have never been in a high speed chase before. I just read about them, saw videos of them, wrote about a few of them. And I could use something help me focus on the matter at hand.'
Suddenly, he hit on a song perfect for the occasional, as he heard the first cords to the english song, Radar Love, by Golden Earring.
Lee said, “Now, that is some chase music.”
Lotton commented, “I got to admit, he has taste. Now, that is good chase music.”
The other girls in back laughed.
Lee saw they were heading for the sea, with the road soon diverging splitting in a, T, shape, to both the left and the right.
He manually rolled down his window.
Lee stated, “You know, the one thing I love about these old style cars is, that you cannot do this with a newer model car.”
Suddenly, when the street diverged, used both his feet to full engaged the clutch pedal, while pressing partly on the brakes, and maintaining gas on the pedal. All the while he shifted through several gears, as he did a high speed whip-it u-turn back down the opposing lanes of the highway, passing by the two cars chasing them. And he then shifted back up the gears, while careful with the clutch, so the car would not stall.
After getting the car straighten out down the road, Lee pulled out his left arm out, while extending his middle finger to the people in the other two cars.
Revy blurted out, “Did he just give them the bird?”
Shenhua chirped, “He sure did.”
The girls in back laughed again.
The other cars had to slow down to do a u-turn, due to their anti-lock breaks preventing them from doing a whip-it, as well. Thus giving Lee and the girls more distance between them.
Lee pulled his arm back into the car, and rolled up his window, he also turned down on a two lane road.
As Lee did so, Revy asked, “So Lee, are you a Steve McQueen fan?”
Lee kept his eyes on the road, as he answered, “Nope. I am more of a Burt Reynolds fan. Smokey and the Bandit. That sort of thing. Though, I find the film Hooper to be highly underrated.” He mentally, 'And the Cannonball films, which I mentioned in book three of my stories. But, what I can I say, I am a fan, as the Archer series put it, of the man from Jupiter, Florida.'
Meanwhile, Rock could not believe what she saw. She turned to Lee, as she asked him, in a serious tone of voice, “Are you crazy? I know crazy. I love crazy. I am crazy. But, I did not think you were crazy.”
Lee soberly stated, “Nope. Not crazy. Just desperate. We are unarmed. You are all are drunk. I am not a fighter. If those guys catch us, if we are lucky, they will kill me, rape you girls, and then kill you. That is if we are lucky. We have to make them realize that we are too crazy to mess with.”
Rock conceded, “Good point. Just one problem. I have been down this street a few times. We are going to run out of road real soon.”
Lee stated, “Given what I have in mind, that will be fine. Still, the one thing I like about this city. The bartender at the Rats Nest told me that at night the cops don't give a damn about car chases, as long as there is no gunplay, nor people being run over.”
Rock agreed, “That's nice.”
A minute later, they reached the end of a deserted road, which was without street lights for the last mile they drove through. Lee down shifted, as he turned the car around, and came to a stop, while facing the car in the direction they came from.
They all saw the headlights of the two cars coming towards them, in the distance, by at least two miles away from them.
Lee began peeling out the back tires of the car. Smoke from the back tires and breaks could be seen from the back taillights of the vehicle.
Rock immediately realized what Lee had planned, as she thought, 'He is going to play chicken with them!'
Rock pleaded, “Lee, please don't do this. We can find another way.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as he raised an eyebrow. He countered, “Rock, I am in a car full of five hot women. If I wimped out now, I would have to turn in my man card.” He then turned back to face the front of the road.
Revy stated, “He's got you there, Rock!” She and the other three in back started laughing again.
Rock then noticed a dangerous smile start to curl on Lee's lips.
Lee smirked, as he asked, “Anyway, Rock. Do you know what the three scariest words you can hear from a redneck, whom is right beside you?”
Rock replied, “No.”
Rock saw Lee's smile turn feral, as he casually answered, “Hey. Watch this.”
Lee suddenly let go of the brake with his left foot, as the car accelerated forwards.
Lee then engaged the clutch with his left foot, while keeping his left foot on the accelerator, as he started shifting gears, launching the car forward, towards the two incoming cars.
The people in the other two cars coming towards them, saw this and accelerated their speed towards the Pontiac GTO, due to the GTO's front headlights.
Meanwhile, the women in back heard Lee and Rock's conversation, and they were all now laughing like hyenas.
Lee drove down the middle of the two lane road at high speed, as he stated, “I was taught not to be a road-hog, but I believe this in this case, I should make an exception to that rule.”
Lee thought, 'Given I am dying of cancer, dying in a crash like would be awesome, and great way to go. And the super-soldier serum the girls have in them should allow them to survive, and fully recover from any wreck like this. Meanwhile, the others in those cars are screwed.'
As they got closed two other cars, with a mile not between the two groups, Rock inquired, “You really think this will work?”
Lee admitted, “You're right. I am going to have to make this interesting.”
Lee then turned off the front headlights, and shift gears, while he floored the gas pedal.
Lee grinned wildly, as he said, “Now, it is interesting.”
Rock was starting to get scared, while the drunken girls in the backseat were just laughing even harder at what was unfolding around them.
When they were less than five hundred feet from the other two cars, Lee turned on the inside ceiling light of the car, so the drivers in the other two cars could see how crazy Lee and the women were in their car.
The drivers in the other two cars saw a man with a wicked grin on his face, a dark haired girl in the front passenger seat whom was slightly scared, and four women in back laughing their asses off.
Right before the three vehicles were about to hit, the two other cars veered off the road, allowing Lee and the girls to make a high speed escape.
Lee immediately turned on the front headlights, while turning off the car's ceiling light.
Without turned his eyes away from the road, he said, “And that is how you play the game of chicken.”
By then, the girls in back had calmed down enough to speak. Revy stated, “I give you an eight, Lee. Not bad for an amateur.”
Sawyer stated, in her beautiful tone of voice, “I would give him a six. His acceleration, and steering, needs a little work.”
Shenhua said, “I agree.”
Lotton stated, “If he was fully aware of all the facts of this situation, I would give him a ten for remaining so cool under pressure. But, as it stands, I give him a seven.”
Lee inwardly smiled at Lotton's compliment.
Lee asked, “And you, Rock?”
Rock had calm down, as she requested, in a tired tone of voice, “Just take us back to the hotel.”
Lee stated, “You got it.”
As Lee returned back into the city, he returned the car back to a sane speed, while he drove down the roads, towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lee had parked the car at the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and all of them out of the vehicle, with them standing behind the car, in a parking lane.
The five women were facing Lee.
Lee then handed Rock the keys to the car, as he said to them, “I hope I wasn't too bad of a driver tonight.”
Revy stated, “You were fine. Maybe we will do this again sometime.”
Rock groaned, “Let's hope not.”
Lee responded, “Well, have a good night, ladies. I am gone to the hotel bar, to get a drink. I could use one after a night like this.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from them. He headed toward the hotel lobby entrance, to get a drink from Melvin, at the hotel restaurant and bar.
Hold Them.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 03: “City of the Savvy.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Inside, Lee suite, in the Devil's Hotel.
It was the morning after car chase in the GTO, and Lee felt relaxed, and more alive, than he had felt in his life.
After Lee got up from his bed, around seven thirty AM in the morning, he stood up and stretched, as he thought, 'I guess it is true what they say. That a life of adventure and excitement does make one feel more alive. Not that I plan to repeat last night's escapades.'
'Still, I am glad that Melvin called in a favor, and he had one of his cooks, fix for me meal, when we got back to the hotel restaurant.'
'That meal, and a few beers, were good. And he got a good laugh at what I told him. I will have to tell Sam what happened to me last night, when I see him later today.'
Among other things, Lee then got cleaned up, shaved, showered, dried off, and dressed.
After Lee put on his baseball cap, glasses, and jacket, he looked down at himself, as he thought, 'Barring, Rock, Revy, and their crew showing up in mass. These last few weeks have been good to me, in other ways. Such as my winnings at poker.'
'Now, that I have some cash. I plan to buy some nicer clothing, in a few days. Given my situation, I might need some nicer clothing than just causal wear. Still, I could use some breakfast at the Last Resort. I may have gotten on Revy and others good sides, but I am still not taking any chances with them.'
Lee then looked up, as he turned, and left the hotel room, for the hallway, to the elevator bay.
A few minutes later, as Lee walked through the front lobby, towards the front doors, he noticed Revy, Akira, and Violin approach him. Revy was wearing her usual clothing, with Akira and Violin wearing pants, shirts, and shoes, which looked nice on them.
Lee stopped and turned to face them, as he thought, 'I would guess that Revy decided to tell the others about last night's car chase. Well, on the bright side, her doing so does offer two advantages for me. It increases my street cred with them. With me now having a little street cred with them. And after last night's stunts, they are less likely to believe I am the writer.'
As the three women came to a stop in front of Lee, Lee greeted, “Good morning, ladies.”
Violin said, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee thought, 'I am so glad that Violin retained John's southern manners.'
Akira mentioned, “Revy tells me that you drove one hell of a car chase last night.”
Lee casually replied, “You do what you got to do.”
Akira said, “True. From what Revy said, the chase sounded incredible. I didn't know you could do that.”
Lee honestly admitted, “Neither did I, until I did it.”
Revy inquired, “Really?”
Lee turned to Revy, as he answered, “Yes. I usually try to avoid car chases.”
Violin joked, “That is a wise thing to do, Lee. Still, it sounds like you rode that car hard, and put it away wet.”
Revy looked confused, Akira noticed Revy's expression. Akira explained, “It is a horse term.”
Revy looked over at Akira, then back to Lee. She stated, “Anyway Lee, I was too drunk to say this last night, but you did a good job driving last night.”
Lee commented, “You gave me an eight. I take that as a compliment. Thank you.”
Revy smiled, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
Akira said, “Still, that must have been a fun chase for you, Lee.”
Lee replied, “It depends on how you define fun. Lives were on the line. And I was more concerned with that, then having fun.”
Violin agreed, “That is the right approach to take in such a situation.”
Lee turned to Revy, as he asked, “By the way. Is that car okay? I did go a little rough with it last night.”
Revy answered, “I think so. But, Rock wants it checked out by a professional.”
Lee commented, “I hope you don't expect me to pay for repairs.”
Revy replied, “Nah. After the fun from last night, I will let this one slide.”
Lee said, “Thanks.”
Just then, Lee noticed two mexican men, in nice business suits walk into the hotel lobby, from the front entrance. Also, through the windows, Lee noticed a black, four door car parked right outside the front doors to the hotel. Lee then saw them look around, and they focused on him.
Lee thought, 'Oh no. This can only mean trouble.'
The two man in businesses suits, walked up to Lee, Revy, Akira, and Violin. One of the men asked, in english, with a spanish accented, “Are you the one known as, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'I cannot lie with Revy, Akira, and Violin, beside me.' He said, “Yes?”
The man stated, “We would like you to come with us. Our employer would like to meet you, over the matter of you attacking one of our friends.”
Lee did not show it on the outside, but on the inside he was worried, as he mentally realized, in thought, 'Oh crap. These guys are part of a mexican mafia. And so was the guy I hit last night. This is very bad.'
Revy asked, “What is going on here?”
Lee continued to look at the two men, as he answered, “This is about that guy I hit last night. Considering these men are here because of him, I am guessing they are part of the same... Organization.”
Revy thought, 'Meaning the local mafia.'
The other women around Lee also realized the subtext of Lee's comment.
Lee noticed both the three women and two men around him tensed up.
Lee thought, 'Crap. If I don't defuse the situation, this is going to go straight to hell for everyone.' He said, “I will come with you.” He then turned to the women, as he continued, “If I don't return by this evening. Then, I am dead. Tell Sam he can have the stuff in my room, and to have a nice life.”
Next, Lee turned and walked with the two men, until they were outside.
The three women then watched as Lee, and the other two men got into the black car outside, and drove away.
Violin said, “Whoa. Not many people would go to their deaths so calmly.”
Akira commented, “As far as he knows, he didn't have a choice. If he fought, they would have pulled their guns, and killed him, along with us.”
Revy pointed out, “But, we can defend ourselves. Lee knows that. He was there went my children tore through the Rats Nest.”
Akira explained, “Yes. I know. Still, there is something you may not realize, Revy. When I was in college in Atlanta, I talking to some people that had run-ins with the mexican mafia. If their counterparts here are any thing like in my reality, and yours, then they are very dangerous. Lee likely knew there would be further reprisals, if he resisted.”
Violin asked, “Do you want to rescue him, Revy?”
Revy answered, “No. After last night, I think Lee could probably get himself out of this trouble. And I have no desire to draw the attention of the local mafias.”
Violin conceded, “I see your point.”
Akira admitted, “As do I.”
Revy then said, “Okay. Let's go get some breakfast at the buffet table.”
Akira replied, “Sounds good to me.”
Violin commented, “I could use some scrambled eggs.”
The three women they headed for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
In the hotel restaurant that morning, Rock was already seated at a table, eating her the plate she made from the buffet table.
Rock was wearing her usual clothing. a white blouse, and light brown skirt.
She was almost through with both her plate, and her glass of milk, when she saw Melvin walk into the restaurant.
Rock mentally wondered, 'What is he doing here so early? Melvin doesn't usually come in until around ten thirty.'
She then watched at Melvin paid for his meal, walked over to the buffet. He then prepared a plate and drink for himself.
Rock thought, 'Oh, he is getting some breakfast for himself. Still, this is a perfect opportunity to talk to him about the GTO.'
A minute later, Rock watched as Melvin sat down at the bar counter, with him setting his plate and drink in front of him, on the counter. He then began to eat his breakfast.
Rock got up, and walked over to the bar counter. She then sat beside Melvin, to Melvin's right side. She said, “Good morning, Melvin.”
Melvin took a drink from his orange juice, to wash down his food. He then turned to Rock. He greeted her, “Good morning, Rock.”
Rock commented, “You are here earlier than normal, this morning.”
Melvin replied, “Yes. I got up earlier than usual this morning, and I didn't feel like doing my morning exercises. So, I came down here for some breakfast.”
Rock admitted, “I have had those days. I have a question for you.”
Melvin thought, 'I hope it is not something serious. From what Lee told me last night, they had one hell of a ride.' He said, “Sure. What do you need?”
Rock stated, “I need an auto mechanic to look at my car.”
Melvin replied, “I heard about that chase.”
Rock commented, “Word travels fast.” She thought, 'I wonder if Lee told him. That is very likely. Not that I will hold doing so against each of them.'
Melvin agreed, “Yes. It does. Though, this is a moderately large, populated city, it still has that small town mentality, where everyone knows everyone else. Or, they knew friend of someone else. Anyway, I do I know a good mechanic that will check your car out, for a decent price. He is a good friend, of mine. He will accept U.S., or Mexican currency.”
Rock replied, “That is good. What can you tell me about this man?”
Melvin held in a smirk, as he thought, 'Oh Rock. It would be so tempting tell you what I really know about my friend. But, I respect the privacy of my friends, and I will just vaguely warn you about him.'
Melvin said, “The man you want to speak to is named, Hernan Pena. He knows english, though he native language is spanish. He is a really great guy. And he has a nice family.” Melvin then looked Rock directly into her eyes, he firmly warned, “And I will say this only once. Do not. I repeat, do not threaten Hernan, nor his family. Do you understand?”
Rock saw the seriousness in Melvin's eyes. She thought, 'This guy is nice, but can be dangerous. That should not be a problem. I have dealt with worse.' She nodded once, as she replied, “Yes. I understand.”
Melvin responded, “Good. Now, here is how to get to Hernan's auto-shop, from here.” Melvin then gave Rock directions to Hernan's place of business. When Melvin finished with the directions, he said, “And, since this is a weekday, he should be open by now.”
Rock said, “I will looked into seeing him, after breakfast.”
Melvin replied, “Good luck. Though, it should not be a problem. As I said, Hernan is a great guy. As long as he, nor his family, are not threatened.... Though, if you are going to take Revy with you. I highly suggest you convince her to be polite, and go unarmed.”
Rock stated, “Oh, I will.”
Rock then noticed, Revy, Akira, and Violin walk into the restaurant, and they headed to the cashier, to pay for their breakfasts.
Rock said to Melvin, “Talk to you later.”
Melvin replied, “Have a good day, Rock.
Rock then walked over to where Revy, Akira, and Violin, whom were standing by the cashier.
They turned to looked at Rock.
Akira said, “Hi Rock.”
Violin stated, “Good to see you, Rock.”
Revy smirked, “Hi lover.”
Rock replied, “Hi girls.” She turned to Revy, as she stated, “I got some good news. Melvin told me about a good mechanic in town, whom he knew, that can check out the car.”
Revy casually said, “That sounds great.”
Rock stated, “We can head over their today, after breakfast.”
Revy shrugged, as she commented, “There is no rush. I got some plans for today, and tomorrow, for us. And I am not talking about just looking for the writer.” She then lean over and whispered into Rock's right ear.
Rock immediately blushed.
Revy leaned back straight, as Rock said, “Okay. The mechanic can wait. Still, while you are eating, I will give the details on this mechanic.”
Revy replied, “Sure.”
Rock then gave her long time lover the details over what she found out, from Melvin, along with Melvin's warning about not threatening the mechanic, nor his family.
(_)
Elsewhere on the island of De La Plata Podrido, Lee was inside the black car, as they road down a two lane road, along the beach, on of the more deserted section island, in the sunny day.
As Lee road in the car, he was in the back seat of the black, four door car, behind an empty passenger seat, on the right side of the car, with one of the men beside him, and the other man driving, in the left driver's side seat.
Lee calmly stated, “I want you to know. I have not interest in resisting you.”
The man beside Lee, to his left side, replied, in english, “Good. That means we won't have to hurt you until after the boss has his answers.”
Lee said, “I will answer his questions to the best of my abilities.”
The man driving commented, in english, “If you do so, you will likely have a quick death.”
Lee asked, “Were either of you in the cars chasing us last night?”
The man beside him stated, “No.”
Lee inquired, “Would it help my case if I mention that the man I hit, was drunk, and I tried to talk my way out of the situation. And I only hit after he pulled a gun on me.”
The man beside him admitted, “That might help you.”
The driver mentioned, “That sounds like something our friend would do. You might get out of this with say, a broken arm.”
Lee commented, “Then, my day is improving. Will I be meeting the person I hit last night?”
The man beside him answered, “No. The boss does not want violence, unless it is necessary. That is why you are still breathing. And from what we understand, our friend decided to let the boss handle you. And he left it at that.”
Lee just nodded, as he said, “Okay. That is one thing I don't have to worry about.”
The other two men just chuckled, at Lee's comment.
Lee looked outside the windows, as they drover down the road. They had stayed on the island, but they are nowhere near any of the locations that Lee knew about. Actually, they were heading towards a remote location of the island.
A minute later, Lee saw them drive up to an area, by the beach, which was walled-in, from the street, and sides, by a ten foot high concrete fence. Though, Lee saw the fence ended at the beach line.
When they came up to the steel metal gates to the driveway into the area, their car came to a stop.
Lee noticed the driver pulled out a remote, and press it. The gates suddenly opened, inwardly, and they drove into the area. With the gates closing behind them, a few seconds later.
As they passed the gates, Lee saw they were coming towards a large, one story, beach house.
The driver soon stopped the car beside the home.
Lee saw men with sub-machine guns near standing near the car.
The man beside him said, “Don't worry. Nothing is going to happen to you, until after you meet our employer. Now, please get out.”
Lee slowly opened the door. And stepped out.
The man that was beside him in the car, walked around the car, and face him. He said, “I am going to have to pad you down.”
Lee held up his arms, as he stated, “Go ahead. I am not armed.”
The man then swiftly padded Lee down. When he was done, he looked at the guards, and waved them off. He then looked over towards Lee, as he stated, “This way.” He turned, and began walking towards the home.
Lee followed the man in inside, as the driver stayed by the car.
After Lee was escorted through a few rooms and hallways, he found himself inside a large office.
The back end of the office, where Lee entered, was empty, except for some potted plants.
The walls and ceiling were gray, and the floor was black, office carpet.
On the far end of the room, was a large, black wooden desk. With a laptop computer on it.
To the left and right sides of the desk were shelves of DVDs, Blu-Rays, CD cases, and books.
Behind the desk, were large windows, that looked out into the beach, and ocean. Between the desk and the windows, was a large, black swivel chair, which was turned around to face the beach. There no chairs in the room, besides the swivel chair.
Lee guess, 'I would say their employer is sitting behind the chair. And I am about to meet a mob boss for the first time. I have to play this right, or it would be debatable which group would do worse to me. The girls, or this group.'
Lee then followed the man to the other side of the office, to where they were standing in front of the desk.
The man then walked to Lee's right, as he went around the desk, and spoke to the unseen man.
The man said, in english, “Lee is here, for you to talk, too. He gave us no trouble in bringing him here. And he stated he is willing to cooperate fully with our inquires.”
Lee thought, 'He is likely speaking in english for my benefit. I guess I may a good impression with him.'
The sitting man stated, in english, “Good. You may leave.”
The man then turned, and left the room. He shut the door behind him.
The man sitting behind the desk coldly stated, “Mister Lee, you have done something wrong last night. Do you know what that is?”
Lee calmly said, “I am willing to explain my actions. But, to whom I addressing?”
The man laughed, for a few seconds. Not menacing laugh, but a regular, sane laugh.
The mans swiveled his chair around, for Lee to see him.
Sitting in the chair, Lee saw a black haired mexican man, in his early forties, in good physical shape. The man wore a nice gray business suit.
The man calmly stated, “I am Paciano Del Soto. And I control this city. And before I kill you, I want to know why you hurt one of my men last night?”
Lee responded, “Mister Del Soto, I was saving his life. And the lives of his friends, that were there. Did you hear about the massacre at the Rats Nest a few nights ago?”
Paciano answered, “Yes.”
Lee explained, “Those were the same women that did that. And if I had not done what I did, you man would be dead, right now. Instead, he just has some mild bruises, but he will be fine. And no one was hurt in that chase. If I had taken those women to the hotel, where they are staying. Instead of given your men that chase, they would have been killed when they got there. Because those women also have friends, and a lot of firepower.”
Lee could clearly see from the look on Paciano's face, that he was thinking over what Lee had stated.
Paciano stated, “You are making some good points. I may not kill you. If you are correct. I may even let you go, unharmed.”
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he happily thought, 'Excellent.'
Paciano pulled out his cellphone, from an interior coat pocket. He dialed a number. He then spoke to someone on the other end in spanish.
Lee remained silent, and still, as the conversation took place.
A minute later, he hung up.
Paciano put his cellphone back into the same interior coat pocket that it had been in. He then turned to look at Lee.
Paciano stated, “I just called the Rats Nest bartender, at her home. She just confirmed what you said. You did save the life of my men. I appreciate that. But, before I let you go. I have two questions. First, why were you there with those women in the first place?”
Lee thought, 'I am glad the bartender is alive. And given she answered Mister Del Soto's questions, I am guessing she is alright. If she wasn't, she would not be so forthcoming.'
'Though, why would he have the home number to the bartender? Unless... She slept with him. I will say the man is not that bad looking, and he is in good shape. So, I can understand why she did it. Still, I need to answer his questions.'
Lee said, “They heard I was a regular at the Rats Nest, and I was staying at the hotel they were. And well... It is best to humor the crazies.”
Paciano nodded once, as he agreed, “That is true. My other question is, who are these women? They are clearly dangerous, and they are in my town.”
Lee thought, 'This is bad. How the hell do I explain the situation to him, without sounding like a lunatic? Even worse, if he believes me, what is to stop him from turning me over to them, to placate them. I have to be very careful in how I answer this question.'
Lee then noticed the set of english translated manga volumes, beside some anime blue-rays boxes, on the bookshelf to the his right of the desk.
The titles for manga and anime were, Black Lagoon.
Lee thought, 'You have got to be kidding me. Okay. I can make this work for me. If I do this right, I should be fine.'
Lee commented, “So, you are a Black Lagoon fan, Mister Del Soto?”
Paciano answered, “Yes. So, you know the series, as well.”
Lee casually responded, “Yes. I do. In more ways than I can state, right now. It is a series that has it all. Action. Guns. Hot babes that can kick some serious ass.”
Paciano cracked a grin, as he said, “You got that right. Me and my brother even sometimes joke that De La Plata Podrido is like Roanapur, only a lot nicer, with us in charge.”
Lee thought, 'It is not wise to tempt fate like that. Though, I wonder who your brother is? Still, I am in too deep already to ask about him. And I need to deal with the matter at hand.'
Lee stated, “Well, since you know that series. The good news is that I think I can answer your question. The problem is how to prove it without getting us both killed. Because, I cannot just tell you. You won't believe me. You will have to come with me to the hotel, be quiet, and watch. So, you can see the women, yourself. You will understand when you see them with your own eyes.”
Paciano said, “Your request is intriguing. But, just to let you know, I can handle myself in a fight.”
Lee replied, “That is good. You made need those skills, if those women catch wind of why we are there.”
Paciano realized, as he commented, “They don't realize how much you know about them.”
Lee admitted, “Exactly. And that very fact is the reason I am still breathing.”
Paciano inquired, “So, you are playing an angle with them?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Paciano said, “And you know them, but you won't tell me their names. And what does this have to do with the Black Lagoon series?”
Lee cryptically responded, “Let's just say that the women in the hotel, that I am talking about, or of the same type as the women at the Black Lagoon series.” He mentally added, 'Quiet literally.' He then continued, “If you come with me, you will soon understand the situation.”
Paciano questioned, “And how do I know this is not a trap?”
Lee stated, “Simple. I am putting my ass on the line just by telling you what I already have. And these women are extremely sharp when it comes to their wits. If they realize what I know, while you were with me, we will be both be dead. That is why, not matter what happens, you cannot tell them what we know.”
Paciano commented, “I don't know anything about them.”
Lee coyly replied, “You know more about them, than you realize.”
Paciano warned, “This better not be a waste of my time.”
Lee countered, “It won't. It will likely be the most significant event of your life.”
Paciano said, “Okay. I want to know what you know. You and I will head over there, just the two of us. I don't want to put my men in harms way.”
Lee complimented, “That is wise. And I respect your concern for you men. Also, just the two of us will likely not attract attention.”
Paciano agreed, “Correct.”
Lee pointed out, “Also, they don't know who you are. So, if they ask, I will just say you are a friend I met.”
Paciano replied, “That will work.”
Lee thought, 'I also need to know another thing, before we leave.' Lee inquired, “By the way, are you a fan of any other anime, or sci-fi series?”
Paciano answered, “Actually, I am a fan of quite a few series. The collection in here, are just my favorites, that I keep, so I can watch. If I get bored in my office, doing paperwork. That being said, my brother and I have a wide range of tastes. Including some weird tastes in fiction on the web.”
Lee thought, 'Oh, he could not mean?... Could he? I dare not ask.'
Paciano stood up from his chair.
As Lee looked at Paciano, he could not tell if the mexican was armed, or not, under his clothing.
Lee thought, 'I don't see any weapons on him, but that does not mean he isn't armed. I just hope he is not trigger happy.'
Paciano said, “Follow me. We will take one of my more common cars, back to the Devil's Hotel.
Paciano then lead Lee out of his office, and to his garage.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee was in the passenger side of Paciano, brown colored, mid-level car, with Paciano in the driver's seat, driving down the road, back to the Devil's Hotel.
Paciano asked, “So, when we get to the hotel, what do you want me to do.”
Lee answer, “We will sit on the couch by the right front corner of the lobby. That will allow us to see those that walk into the hotel, along with those coming and going to the front elevators. We will just sit there and wait. Eventually, the girls will start to walk by. And if we are quiet, they will pass by without noticing us.”
Paciano complimented, “That is actually a very intelligent plan. I get to see the women, and what they look like, without interacting with them, and with less chance of them seeing me. I like it.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. Still, this plan hinges on silence. If you freakout, we are dead. Also, these women have very sharp hearing.”
Paciano stated, “I understand. And I doubt I will freakout at just looking as a bunch of girls.”
Lee mentally lamented, 'You might, when you realize who they really are.'
The two men then road the rest of the way to the Devil's Hotel in silence.
(_)
Several minutes later, they reached the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel.
Paciano parked his car at the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and they walked inside the front entrance, and into the lobby.
As they did so, the lobby music changed to a different song that both men knew.
Paciano said, “I know that song?”
Lee replied, “So, do I. Renegade, by Styx.”
Paciano said, “This is bad. They say this hotel is strange in that the song it plays for individuals, and groups, has something to do with their fate, while in the city.”
Lee agreed, “Yea. That is not a good song for men in our position. But, let's sit down, before we draw attention to ourselves.”
Paciano replied, “Agreed. I have a feeling that you were right to convince me to come here.”
Lee quietly reminded the mob boss, “Just remember. Whatever happens, we have to remain quiet, and appear to remain calm.”
Paciano softly replied, “I understand.”
Lee and Paciano then walked through the lobby, to the empty, front, right corner couch in the lobby. As both men sat across from each other on the couch, with their backs to the windows. They sat next to each other, Paciano sitting to Lee's left side.
The two men sat their for ten minutes, watching people come in an out, but nothing was happening.
Paciano thought, 'I wonder what Lee wants me to look for. He said I wonder understand, when I saw the women. But, I don't know what the women look like. And if this is a trick, why hasn't Lee run off? Nothing about this adds up.'
Suddenly, Paciano watched as two women, in their twenties casually walking together from the hotel elevator lobby, to his right, across the lobby, heading towards the hotel restaurant and bar, to his left. The two women had yet walk passed the two men.
This gave Paciano a clear look at their front sides, including their faces and eyes. Though, they could not clearly see the right sides of the two women.
As Paciano looked at them, as he thought, 'They looked familiar. But, I cannot place them.'
Both women were slender, pretty, and young. They looked to be in their mid-twenties.
The first woman has fair skinned asian, with long black hair, that was allow to drop loose behind her neck. She wore a long sleeved, white blouse, black pants, and black flat sole slippers.
The second woman was a asian with tanned skinned, and an odd shade of long red hair. Her hair was was tied back into pony tail, with a red scrunchy, except for the long bangs on the sides of her forehead.
She wore a black crop top shirt, blue denim cut-offs shorts, green boots, and she had two pistols, under her armpits, in shoulder holsters.
Paciano focused on the redheaded woman, as he thought, 'No. It couldn't be...'
Paciano then took a closer looked at the tanned skinned asain, and he saw she had yellow irises. And she turn slightly, as she walked away from them, and the different angle allowed Paciano to see the back side of the tribal tattoo on Revy's right shoulder, and upper right arm.
Paciano thought, in disbelief, 'No way. It could not be. It is impossible. Though, Lee stated that I already knew about them.'
Paciano looked over a Lee. He saw Lee looking back at him. He saw Lee simply nod once to his unspoken question. Lee then turned back to look in front of himself.
Paciano did the same, as they watched the two women leave the lobby, for the hotel restaurant.
Paciano continued his thoughts, 'Oh my lord. I understand what Lee meant now. That was Revy. As in Black Lagoon, Revy. Crazy, two-hands, Revy.'
'But, she is just a work of fiction from an anime and manga series. She shouldn't exist. But, she does.'
'And what about the other woman? Where did a see her from?. She looked like Rock from the Boys and Girls omake. Hell, she probably is Rock! But, how?!... Unless... From those writings... And they had multiverse reality traveling technology... Oh no... No. No. No...'
Suddenly, Paciano felt Lee lightly tap his right foot, with Lee's left foot.
Paciano looked over at Lee, to see Lee looking back at him.
Lee shook his head once, to tell him to calm down.
Paciano realized he was starting to become visibly upset. He forced himself to calm down. He thought, 'No wonder Lee told me not to freakout. And Lee knew what my reaction was going to be, and he warned me ahead of time. That was good thinking on his part.'
'Still, this is bad. No. Not bad. Bad would be the authorities invading the island. This is on a completely different level of bad from that. This is gates of Hell opening up, bad...'
'Of course, something like this would happen at a place called, The Devil's Hotel. The situation writes itself.'
'My brother and I should have never joked, and compared our home town to Roanapur... Still, I got to get a grip. This may not be that bad. If it is just those two, it is not the end of the world. This situation can be handled. That is, if it is just those two?”
Paciano and Lee then turned back to look in front of him.
A few minutes later, the two men watched as three women walk passing them, from the back hallway in front of them, and towards hotel restaurant, to Paciano and Lee's left.
Paciano immediately recognized two of the three women.
The one of the women in front was Shenhua, in her red, flowery, qipao, and white jacket. Paciano could make out where she was hiding her long knives and throwing knives. Beside her was Sawyer, in her purple and black goth clothing. Paciano notice there there were no scars on Sawyer's wrists, nor throat, along with her throat no longer having that hole below her chin.
And there was a small, young, white haired woman, walking a couple of steps behind Shenhua, and Sawyer, whom was wearing a white maids outfit.
Paciano thought, 'White hair?... Lotton. And Sawyer had no scars... In the stories, she had her wrists and throat repaired. She can now also speak normally... Oh hell, we're screwed! Oh god. I am in the Twilight Zone.'
'I always knew that heading up a mafia organization would get me in trouble, but not this type of trouble.'
(_)
As the minutes passed by, Lee noticed that Paciano was becoming increasingly nervous.
Lee thought, 'I was afraid this would happen. I need get him out of here, as quickly, and quietly, as possible. And to someplace more private. And I know just where to talk him.'
Just then, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira entered the hotel lobby from the front doors, and as they headed for the elevators, Akira stopped and looked towards them.
Lee overheard her say something japanese, with Ranma and Natsuru also stopping and turning to look at Lee and Paciano.
The three women then started walking towards the two men on the couch, by the windows.
As the women approached them, Lee mentally cursed, 'Oh crap. Murphy's Law just struck. I have to find an excuse for Mister Del Soto's behavior... That will work.'
As the three women stopped in front of them, from the corner of his eye, Lee could tell that Paciano was doing everything in his power not to freakout.
Lee thought, 'I would guess he knows who these ladies are. I need to defuse the situation now.' He greeted them, “Hi ladies.”
Ranma asked, in english, with concern in her voice, “Hi Lee. Is your friend alright?”
Lee lied, “Actually no, Ranma, he is not. He is coming down from some acid, and I am sitting with him. He is actually through the worst of it. About another hour, he should be fine.”
Ranma responded, “Okay. Let us know if you need any help.”
Lee faked a smile, as he replied, “I will. And thank you.”
The three women then turned, and walked towards the front elevator bay.
As the women left their sight, Paciano thought, with worry, 'I cannot believe what just happened. I personally met, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira. And given they are together, and all adults, they have to be from those writings.'
'It is the only time those three were together, and adults, in anything. I need somewhere in private, where I can collect myself, before I go nuts at the insanity in front of me. Where?... The men's restroom. That is the most obvious place to go to get away from women.'
Paciano got up and headed for the men's restroom.
Lee quietly followed Paciano, as he realized where Paciano was heading.
Lee thought, 'Good. He has got the right idea. Still, we need to be careful, even in there.'
A few seconds later, they entered the men's restroom.
As the door closed behind them, Paciano turned around to face Lee.
Lee could see that Paciano was about to freakout.
Lee quickly cupped his right hand of Paciano's mouth, as he firmly said, in a quiet tone of voice, “I need you to keep yourself together for a few more seconds.”
Right after Lee let go of Paciano's mouth, the mob boss just nodded a few times in response.
Paciano then watched Lee walk further into the restroom.
Lee checked the stalls. He found them all empty. Until he came to the last one. The handicap accessible one. And the largest stall in the room.
Without even looking under it, Paciano watched as Lee knocked on the door, as Lee said, “Okay ladies. You can take this elsewhere. Some of us have business to conduct in here.”
Lee walked back over to Paciano, and stood beside him, both men looked towards the back of the restroom.
A few seconds later, two women came of the men's stall. And while their clothing were wrinkled, Paciano recognized them as, Aeryn and Violin. He thought, 'This just confirms what I suspected. That is Aeryn and Violin. Also, this has obviously happened before to Lee. And I clearly don't want to know the details.'
As Aeryn and Violin walked up to them, Lee commended, “If you two want to do this, why not do it in the women's restroom. You can get into trouble doing that in here.”
Aeryn gave Lee a mischievous smile, as she said, “Because it is not as kinky that way.”
Violin causally stated, “Don't worry. We will be more careful.”
Lee and Paciano stood out of the way, as the two women exited the room.
As the door closed, Lee turned to the mob boss, as he quietly said, “You could say that I am properly paranoid. And yes. I got that term from the TVtropes website. Also, keep in mind that these women have sharp hearing. So, try to calm down, and speak softly. But, you can ask your questions, now. I will answer you questions to the best of my ability.”
Paciano forced himself to calm down, as he softly mentioned, “This is like that screwy story I read off the web. It is the only time all those characters were in one place. And they all looked like the way those characters were in those stories. The only way this insanity fits is if they are from that story.”
Lee whispered, “Badasses Of the Multiverse?”
Paciano realized, as he quietly replied, “Yes... Oh my god. That strange message from a month ago. That was Scorpius... Damn, Scorpius is hot as a chick.”
Lee calmly answered, in a soft tone of voice, “Yes. On both counts. And that was her. Though, I don't think we are going to have to worry about her. I think she was just did that message as a favor to Violin. And we should count our blessing on that.” He mentally added, 'I guess he is a fan of my works.'
Paciano quietly stated, “Scorpius stated they wanted the writer. They probably meant the writer of those stories. But, who?...” Realization dawned in his eyes, as he looked directly at Lee, while accusing, in a quiet tone of voice, “You're the writer?”
Lee silently nodded once in confirmation.
Paciano softly asked, “How the hell did this happen?”
Lee quietly answered, “I guess world as myth theory is real. And I channeled too much genre savvy, too much badass, and too much multiverse technology, into one story, and it cracked reality itself. I wanted to push the limits of my imagination, while taking fanfiction format to the extreme, and I went too far.”
Paciano softly commented, “Well, you did the impossible. And you do realize this madness is only going to spread outwardly?”
Lee quietly admitted, “Yea. I know that. But, there is nothing either of us can do about it. Even if I turned myself in to them, it won't stop.”
Paciano softly agreed, “You are right. So, let's do with what we can. And let's start with the most important question. Are the Lovelace maids here?”
Lee whispered, “No. And neither are the others outside of Rock and Revy's small group. Annie is not here. Neither is Chang, the Serenity crew, nor any of Hotel Moscow.” He mental added, 'Except Melvin, but he is in hiding from Hotel Moscow, and there is no need to worry you further.'
Paciano let out a sigh of relief. He quietly commented, “I maybe a fan of the Bloodhound. But, I know better than to want to meet her in real life.”
Lee nodded, as he softly agreed, “You and me both.”
Paciano quietly inquired, “So, besides who I saw in the lobby, who else is here?”
Lee softly mentioned, “Eda and Yolanda are the blonds at that burger food truck.”
Paciano quietly commented, “I thought they looked familiar. Though, they cook good food.”
Lee softly replied, “Yes. They do. I am one of their regulars. Also, the teenagers are here.”
Paciano quietly questioned, “Which ones? I know better than to hope it is the Lowe siblings.”
Lee shrugged, as he softly responded, “Yea. Those two were nice to write about. Ah brotherly love. Anyway, I am talking about the Lagoon daughters, and the trio sisters being here. Not the Lowe brothers.”
Paciano quietly commented, “The trio sisters are not that bad, but the Lagoon daughters could be a problem.”
Lee nodded, as he softly responded, “I agree on both counts. Actually, it was Revy, with the Lagoon daughters that tore through the Rats Nest, a few nights ago.”
Paciano whispered, “I believe you. And I am glad you warned me. You steered us away from a minefield.”
Lee quietly said, “You're welcome.”
Paciano softly asked, “So, how screwed are we?”
Lee quietly answered, “Pretty screwed. As you know, your island is not on a map. Well, someone left me a business card for the Devil's Hotel, on the same day of the broadcast. He mentally added, 'I will leave out the Rats Nest flier and ring.'
Lee took a deep breath, and let out a breath. He then continued, in a soft tone of voice, “Someone lured me here. A reality traveler knows who I am. Knew where I lived. And their timing, for leaving their package in my mailbox, before I got home, on the day, was not coincidental. Though, I am guessing that the person who did this not one of those in the hotel.”
Paciano quietly inquired, “If you knew this was a trap. Why the hell did you come to this town, in the first place?
Lee softly stated, “Because, I had no other leads. And the fact of the matter was if I had stayed, the authorities of my country would have disappeared me.”
Paciano quietly said, “That would have likely happened to you.” He thought, 'Oh hell. There is a bigger game at foot here than I thought. And I am going to get caught up in it, if I don't do something soon. If I kill Lee, the women might go after me. If I try to turn over Lee, the women might still go after me. That is because these women are literally insane. I have only one other alternative.'
Lee softly commented, “I was able to get out of the country right before the hammer fell. And I would rather follow up on my only lead, and live off the grid, than get caught.”
Paciano whispered, “I can see your point of view. So, what is your angle? You don't act crazy enough to just want to be near those women. You clearly want something from them.”
Lee sadly said, in a quiet tone of voice, “I am trying to steal one of their reality devices, because I am dying. I got cancer. I am dead in less six months. We are talking full wasting away to living skeleton death. I have lost a lot of weight since I got here. And I got nothing to lose by trying to steal a device from them.”
Paciano softly said, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “Sorry to hear that.”
Lee quietly commented, “If I can get one of those devices. I can find a cure for myself, and escape them, at the same. I already have a few ideas on where to look for a cure for my cancer.”
Paciano softly replied, “I bet you do.”
Paciano thought, 'Though, your character, Bob, did not have much luck in finding a cure to Boris' cancer. And I doubt you want to use the vat process, which will also turn you into a woman. Though, that is not even mentioning, that you likely don't trust anyone with access to that technology. Because, they could use the vat process to brainwash you into their servant.'
'Still, I want to know how he plans to achieve his goals.'
Paciano quietly questioned, “Though, how do you plan to pull this off?”
Lee softly inquired, “Are you familiar with the Tvtropes website?”
Paciano quietly answered, “Yes. Your stories also covered that website. And I took a look at that website.”
Lee softly said, “Good. I am glad you remember that. It makes it more simpler to explain the situation to you.”
“Well, I met this guy when I first got here. Nice guy, and we are genuinely friends. But, I have been using him as a cover for the, those two guys, trope. And it has worked so far with the girls, because they are looking for one person. In the meantime, my overarching plan is a Kansas City Shuffle. But, I am still ironing out the details.”
Paciano quietly mentioned, “You need at least three person team to make that plan work right. The face. The one behind the scenes. And the distraction.”
Lee softly agreed, “Yes. But, only one of them has to know all the details. My friend and I are keep swapping roles between the face and the distraction, depending on the situation. He just doesn't know it. And it has fooled the girls, so far.”
“And I am working on finding the third person. The one that works behind the scenes. Want to be the volunteer for the guy behind the scenes?”
Paciano flatly, but quietly, replied, “No. I want to get through this alive. And I think it best if I go home, now.” He pulled out his keys, and handed them to Lee, as he requested, in a soft tone of voice, “Could you please drive me home. My nerves are shot.”
Lee took the keys in his right hand, as he smiled. He said, in a sincere, but quiet tone of voice, “I would be more than happy too. Though, I am sure you have a quicker way back to your home than the way you had me taken, both there, and back here. You took took a different routes to return here, to confuse me. And it worked.”
Paciano softly admitted, “You are correct. And I will show you the right way to get back to my home.”
Lee quietly replied, “Good. Now, let's get you home.”
Both men then calmly exited the men's restroom walked, out of the hotel lobby and into the parking lot, where they got into Paciano car. And Lee drove away from the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and down to road, to Paciano's home. With Paciano providing directions, as he sat in the front passenger seat of his car.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Lee had returned Paciano back to his home, and given the mob boss back his keys.
Currently, Lee and Paciano stood outside of the mob boss's home, in the driveway, within the concrete fence.
Paciano had called in his men, that were within his residence, to meet and group together in the driveway, so he could speak to them, at once.
Paciano stood in front of his men, as he faced them on the driveway, with Lee quietly standing behind him.
Paciano stated, in a firm tone of voice, in english, for Lee's benefit, “I cannot give you the details just yet. I will do so tonight, when the rest of our group is here. But, I want you all to know, that this man.” He used his right thumb to point over his right should towards Lee, as he continued, “Just saved all of our lives. And we owe him much in doing so.”
Paciano then dropped his right hand back to his side.
Paciano went onto say, “Let it be known to all my subordinates, right here, and elsewhere. I have two orders. One, anything that happened last night, is to be let go. Lee, here is not to be harmed. And the women with him, from Devil Hotel's are to be left alone. And two, we will be meeting here, tonight. At seven PM. I will explain further, then. Now, I need someone to take Lee here, back to the Devil's Hotel.”
One of the men in the group took a step forward.
Paciano said, “Good.” He then turned around to looked at Lee, as he held out his right hand, towards Lee.
Paciano commented, “Good luck, Lee. And try not to get the world destroyed.”
Lee shook Paciano's hand, as he replied, “I will try my best to prevent that, Mister Del Soto. And good luck to you to.”
Both men shook hands, in a firm, though not tight, manner.
Lee thought, 'This firm handshake is a good sign that he is serious about leaving me alone.'
After they broke their handshake, Lee followed the man that stepped forward towards a black car in the driveway.
Less than a minute later, Lee was on the road back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around fifteen minutes later, Lee was dropped off at the Devil's Hotel, at the front entrance.
As Lee walked into the lobby, he saw Sam sitting in a nearby chair that was facing him.
Lee looked around, to see who else was in the room. He thought, 'I don't see any of the girls here.' He then turned his attention towards Sam, as he continued his thoughts, 'Just Sam. That is good. Now, I need speak to Sam.'
Lee walked over to his friend. As he did so, Sam looked up at Lee. He asked, “Where have you been?”
While Lee came to stop in front of Sam, Lee stated, “It is a long story. From last night, to right now. Let's get an early lunch at the hotel restaurant, I will tell you all about it.”
Sam stood up from chair, as he responded, “Sound good to me.”
Lee and Sam then walked towards the hotel restaurant, to get some lunch.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee and Sam sat in stools, at the bar counter to get some some lunch. Since, it was early for lunch, none of the girls were there. Lee told Sam, and Melvin. Whom was had decided to start his shift early, because he had nothing better to do. With the bartender taking Lee and Sam's lunch orders.
And while Melvin had heard of last night's events from Lee, but not the mornings events, of what happened.
Lee stated that he had only talked to the mob boss, and brought him here, for him to see how dangerous the women were. He omitted the mob boss' name, and the conversation he had with Paciano in the men's restroom. Lee just stated that the mob boss saw reason and he went back to his home to talk to him some more. And then the mod boss had Lee returned back to the hotel.
By then, Melvin had served Lee and Sam their sandwich orders, with sodas. With Melvin standing behind the bar counter, across from the two sitting men, as he joined in on the conversation.
As they ate their lunch, Sam stated, “That was one hell of a tale, Lee. But, I don't see how the mob boss would just see reason from looking at Revy and the others.”
Lee thought, 'No. I can see your reasoning. But, I have a good statement prepared for that.' Lee played dumb, as he shrugged. He said, “He is a mob boss. He clearly had connections to other criminal organizations. Maybe he recognized them from somewhere. Let's be honest. Considering some of those women are very violent, someone has to have heard of them from somewhere.”
Melvin snorted, and then began laughing, as he thought, 'Or, maybe the guy was a Black Lagoon fan, and he realized who he was dealing. Now, that would be crazy. But, who am I to talk about that. My situation is even crazier. I lived the Black Lagoon anime series, and beyond. Then, when I got here, I actually saw the series a few times.'
As Melvin began to calm down, he mentally reflected, 'But, I better back Lee on this. Because the other, more likely explanation, is to hard to believe.'
Melvin stated, “That could be the case.”
Sam conceded, “Perhaps. But, let us all be happy that we got out of this one with our hides intact.”
Lee replied, “You got that right.”
Melvin said, “I fully agree.”
Sam and Lee then soon finished their meals, tipped Melvin, paid for their meals, and left to continue their ongoing poker game, at the Rats Nest, for the rest of the day.
And the rest of the day was uneventful for Lee, Sam, and Melvin.
(_)
The next morning, it was late in the morning as Lee and Sam were both dressed and ready to face they day. With both of them having gotten some breakfast at different locations. For Lee, it was the Last Resort Diner, and Lee did not know where Sam ate his breakfast at.
Currently, they met back inside the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, in the mid-morning to start their daily poker game, as they waited for the Rats Nest to open at eleven AM.
They were sitting in two of the cushioned lobby chairs, in the hotel lobby, using the small table between them to hold their gambling pot, and the cash they had pulled out, to place bets.
Lee was facing the front entrance, and Sam was facing the check in desk.
Lee was not really paying attention to what was going on around him, but as the two men concluded another hand, which Lee won, Lee saw a mexican man, in a business suit walk into the hotel lobby, from the entrance, take a look around, and focus on Lee.
As the man walk towards Lee, Lee noticed him. Lee thought, 'Now, what does Mister Del Soto want with me? Though, it is best that I be polite. Being polite got me out of trouble yesterday. I am sure being polite will get me out of trouble today'
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “Collect the cards, and your cash. We will have to table to the game for later.” Lee then picked up and pocketed his cash that he had on the table.
Sam quickly did the same. As he pocketed his cash and his cards, he looked over his left shoulder, at where Lee was looking, and the bearded man understood what was going on.
Lee and Sam both stood up, and turned to face the man in the business suit, as the third man came to a stop in front of him.
Lee stated, “Is there something I can do for you?”
Man politely said, in english, “Actually, there is something I can do for you. Please, come this way, outside.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee then walked beside the man, towards the front doors.
Sam decided to stay a few feet behind Lee and the third man, so he could quietly listen to their conversation.
After all three men entered the entryway, with the doors closing, they realized they had some privacy. And Sam realized that Lee and the other man in front of him has slowed their walking pay towards the outside door. Sam did the same.
Lee warned, “Be mindful that the people here have very sharp hearing.”
The man in the business suit cryptically said, in a soft tone of voice, “Thank you for the tip. My boss has decided to make a career change. And after last night, when he explained things to us. So, have we.”
Lee commented, “That is completely understandable. And given the circumstances, that is likely a wise thing to do.”
The man stated, “Still, the boss is very grateful for what you did, and he has a gift for you.”
The man reached into his pocket, as he pulled out something. The man then requested, “Please hold out you hand, Lee.”
As they continued walking, Lee held out his right, with the palm facing upwards. The man dropped something into Lee open palm of his right hand.
Lee looked at the object in his hand and saw it was a keyring with two keys on it.
The man then opened the right front door to the hotel for Lee, and Sam. With both Lee and Sam walking outside, and seeing what was in parked in front of the hotel, across the sidewalk, from the lobby entrance, by the curb.
Lee and Sam came to a stop outside, under the awning, of the sunny, cool day. They stood beside each other, in silence, with Lee to Sam's left side, as they looked at what was in front of them.
The man lead the right front door automatically close, as he walked up to join them.
The man said, “The gas tank is full. Oil was recently replaced. And she is in mint condition. And she is all yours, Lee.”
Sam's jaw dropped, due to looking at Lee's unexpected gift.
As Lee looked at his gift, his entire body shook with excitement. All that came from his mouth was, “Ahh. Aaaah. Ahhahaha...”
In front of them was a pink, two door, 1951 Cadillac Series 62 convertible, in perfect condition.
The car was cleaned and waxed to the point that paint job acted as a pink mirror. The hooded top and windows were rolled down, allowing Lee to see the white leather seats, of the car, in pristine condition.
The steering wheel was on the left side of the front seat and the car was facing with the right side seat beside the sidewalk curb.
Sam was the first one able to speak. He looked at the car, as he said, “Lee, have I mentioned to you that I swing both ways?”
Lee continued starting at his new car, as he stated, “No.”
Sam admitted, “I hope you are not offended, but... Well, cool, rare, beautiful things are a turn on for me. And sleeping with someone in the back seat, of a classic, american convertible car, is on a list of things I would like to do in my life. Man, or woman. I don't care. And I was just making the offer to you first. I promise to give you the time of your life.”
Lee looked at the car, as he answered, “I am not offended. But, I don't swing that way. Still, I don't plan on being here for long. I am more than happy to leave this car to you. And you can find someone else to have your fantasy with. I don't mind.”
Sam smiled, as he happily replied, “Thanks, Lee. You're the best.”
(_)
At that moment, inside the lobby, Rock and Revy were walking out of the hotel restaurant and through the lobby, when they came to a stop, at what they saw through the front doors, Lee, Sam, and a man, standing by a pink convertible, with the top and windows down.
Both of them were in this usual clothing, with Revy having her pistols in her shoulder holsters.
Rock asked, “Is that Sam, and Lee?”
Revy answered, “Yea. And they are right by a very nice car. Let's go see what it going on.”
Rock replied, “Good idea.”
Both of them then headed for the front doors.
(_)
Meanwhile, outside, Lee was slowly walking around the car, counterclockwise, as he gripped the keys to it in his right hand. He ran his left hand right over the car as he slowly walked around it. He was tempted touch the paint job, but did not want to smug the wax coating.
As Lee walked around, he noticed, from the location of the gear being by the steering wheel, on the steering column, that the car had automatic transmission,.
The only real difference Lee noticed, between this Cadillac and the original version of this Cadillac, was this one had seat belts. Four, three point seat belts, installed in the four outer cushioned seats of the car. Two for the front seat, and two for the back seats. And two, two point seat belts for the front and back, center seats.
Lee thought, 'I will give Mister Del Soto credit for having sense to add some safety options to this car. And this is one hell of a gift. If I ever see him again, I will have to thank him for this gift.'
When he reached the back, he noticed the license plate on the back stated, BCKLAGN.
Lee thought, 'Damn. Mister Del Soto may be a bigger Black Lagoon fan than me. Still, this is not a legal license plate. They don't have vanity plates here. I checked. Though, he is a mob boss, so why would he care about the law. And there is nothing I can do about it. I hope the others don't notice.'
Lee continued walked around the car, looked at his vehicle, he had just made it to the back right side of the vehicle, with him walking onto the sidewalk, when he heard, towards the hotel entrance, Revy's voice say, “Whoa. Now, that is a classic.”
Lee stopped, as he looked up, and turned towards the hotel entrance, to see Revy and Rock standing by Sam and the mexican man in the business suit.
From Lee's left to right, stood Rock, Revy, Sam, and the mexican man.
Lee turned to Rock and Revy, as he stated, “That is an understatement. This car is over half a century old, and it looks brand new.”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'It is true. Cool cars do attract hot women. Not that I want to do anything with, Revy. Though she is hot, she is also crazy. And crazy is a turn off for me, because I would like to remain breathing, with all my parts intact, when I wake up the next morning. As far as I am concerned, Rock can have her. And though Rock is now a hot woman as well, though she's also crazy.'
Revy said, “No kidding, Though Lee, I really don't see how a man could be happy with having a pink car.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “Revy, there are three things in life that a man can have in pink. Cars, shirts, and women. And this is a cool, classic, pink Cadillac. Elvis drove cars like this. Rock songs are written about cars like this, as if they were women. This car. No, this Cadillac is the embodiment of a manly, american car.”
Revy conceded, “You got me there.” She then joked, “So, are you going to take her on a date.”
Lee retorted, “No. I was thinking of taking her for a spin. This is a high maintenance chick. And gasoline is not cheap. So, I will not be able to take her out often.”
Sam commented, “Mores the pity.”
Lee then realized, as he stated, “Oh no. Where am I going to park this. It will get stolen the moment I turn my head away from it.”
The man in the business suit stated, “Don't worry. The locals here know better than to steal from the tourists. That includes the car thieves. It hurts long term business here, and my boss has been know to hurt them for hurting business.”
Rock over heard the man's comment, as she asked, “What boss?”
Lee turned to her, as he thought, 'Oh crap. How do I explain what I did? Oh, I know.' He answered, “Rock, the people we were chased by, two nights ago, belonged to an organization that wanted to talk to me, yesterday morning. I thought Revy would tell you.”
Rock's eyes went wide, as she understood what type of organization Lee was talking about. She then turned to look at Revy.
Revy looked at Rock. She shrugged, as she replied, “It slipped my mind.”
Rock then turned to Lee, as she asked, “Should we be worried.”
Lee stated, “Relax. It's taken care of. I explained to him the situation. That being, I saw Revy and some of the others, commit the Rats Nest massacre. And the boss' drunk employees were about to get themselves killed by approaching you women, while everyone was drunk.”
The mexican man by them backed Lee up, as he said, “Exactly. We do appreciate when people save our lives. And Lee here did save the lives of some of my friends.”
Revy commented, “Whoa. I have spoken mob bosses before. But, I never got a car out of the deal.”
Lee lied, “Well, I don't know about them. But, I have found the people here to be very reasonable, when one is polite, and knows their manners.”
Rock said, “I have said that manners do matter, Revy.”
Revy snorted, as she replied, “Fine, Rock. After this, I see your point.”
Lee held back a laugh. Lee turned to the mexican man, as he stated, “By the way. Tell your employer, thank you for the gift. I am very grateful to him, for such a gift.”
The man said, “I will. And I have to go, now. My organization is leaving.” He then held up his right. A few seconds later, a four door, black car, with tinted windows, then pulled up to a stop beside the pink Cadillac, and the man got into front passenger side of the black car, which was facing the sidewalk.
The car moved to where the passenger side was clear of the Cadillac, the car stopped, and the man rolled down his electric car door, tinted window. He looked over at Sam, Rock, Revy, and Lee, as he said, in english, “I hope you don't take this the wrong way. But, I hope I never see you again, Two-hands.”
The car stayed parked just long enough to for the man to see the shocked expressions on both Revy and Rock's faces, before the driver floored the car, and it sped away from them, out of the parking lot, and down the road.
A second later, Revy started laughing.
Rock joined her lover in laughing, as she thought, 'The local mob recognized us, and they ran. I find that both flattering, and humorous. And from the reaction Revy is having, so does she.'
Meanwhile, Lee forced himself to keep his emotions in check, as he thought, 'Crap! I just thanked him. And he had to drop Revy's nickname like grenade right into my lap. I have to think fast. And if I look at Revy, or Rock, when I ask, I will give myself away.'
As Rock and Revy quieted down, Lee asked, while he was looking at his car, “What did he mean by, Two-hands?”
Revy answered, “You wouldn't know. But, it is a nickname I have because I use my two cutlasses at once when I fight.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to further the con.' Lee turned to face Sam, Rock, and Revy, as he asked, “Like Antonio Banderas in the movie, Desperado?”
Revy smirked, as she answered, “Yea. Exactly. I even know someone who can do that pop up pistol trick with mini-shotguns.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. I know. Fabiola.' He said, “I get the feeling I don't want to know.”
Rock commented, “No. You don't.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Okay. That helps. But, I got to get them to think about something else, before it occurs to them, to ask if the Mister Del Soto talked to me about what he knew... That should work.' He offered, “So, do you guys want to take ride in this beauty?”
Sam answered, “Of course.”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “I though you would never ask.”
Lee commented, “If you don't mind. I will drive. Sam will sit beside me. And you two can be in back.”
Revy said, “I don't mind.”
Rock responded, “I am fine, as long as you don't drive like a maniac.”
Revy snorted at Rock's comment.
Lee said, “I don't plan too. Though, I would like everyone to wear their seat belts while in this car. And Revy, if you don't mind, I plan to have the top down, as I drive. So, could you please leave your pistols here, at the hotel.”
Revy replied, “I understand. I will be right back.” She turned to Rock, as she said, “I will leave my cutlasses in our room. And I will leave a message at the front desk, with our girls.”
Rock commented, “I think they are in the hotel gym.”
Revy replied, “Thanks.” She then rushed back into the hotel.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, Lee was driving his new convertible Cadillac, with the hood top and windows down. Lee was driving. Sam sat beside him in the right front passenger seat. Rock sat behind Lee, and Revy sat behind Sam. With all of them wearing their three point seat belts.
Lee had just been driving them around the highways of the island, for around the last twenty-five minutes. According to his wrist watch. And he was heading nowhere in particular. As he did so, he had the radio on, and set to an American eighties rock and roll station, which no one seems to mind listening to.
Fortunately, the roads they had driven through, had been empty, for the most part. And Lee had found that the roads on the island, were in good condition, with only a few cracks and potholes.
As Lee drove, everyone was having a good time, just enjoying the ride.
Suddenly, Lee saw, in the rearview mirrors, a police car pull up behind them, very close. The police car had not did have its lights turned on yet, but he could tell that it was about to.
Lee turned off the radio, as he stated, “Looks like the party is over.” He mentally added, 'And I don't have my license. Oh well. Let's see if I can talk my way out of trouble.'
Lee drove the car to the right side of the road, and onto the grass. The police car parked behind him.
Lee put the car in park, and turned off the engine. Though, he left his keys in the ignition.
Lee stated, “Let me do the talking. Worst case, they arrest me. But, you should be fine.”
Revy stated, “I can take them, even without my cutlasses.”
Lee pointed out, “But, can you take care of their friends, as well? Let's see if we can do this civilly.”
Revy replied, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Fine.” She thought, 'Lee is almost as bad as Rock use to be.'
Rock stated, “Good luck, Lee.”
Sam said, “Yea. Good luck.”
Lee then watched from the rearview mirrors, as the police officer got out of his car.
The police office wore his police uniform. He was an average height mexican man.
A few seconds later, the man walked up to beside the left driver's side door of the car. He looked down at Lee, as he asked, in english, “Are you the man known, Lee?”
Lee looked up at the man, as he answered, “Yes, officer. Is there something that I can do for you?”
The officer calmly inquired, “Yes. First, why are you driving Mister Del Soto's car?”
Lee pulled out the key from the ignition, as he stated, “He gave it to me.”
The officer stated, “We heard about that. We just wanted to confirm that.”
Lee thought, 'I guess word travels fast in this city.'
The officer then requested, “The chief of police would like to speak with you, Lee. Do you know where the police station is?”
Lee thought, 'I found out where the police station was by the end of the first week I was here.'
Lee answered, “Yes. I do. And I would be more than happy to meet with the police chief, right after I drop my passengers off at the hotel they are staying. If that is alright with you?”
The police officer replied, “You are not under arrest. So, I see no reason to prevent you from doing so. And thank you, for your time.”
The officer then turned around, and walked back to his car. He soon drove off, passed them, down the highway.”
Revy mentioned, “Melvin mentioned that the cops here were reasonable. I didn't really believe him, until now.”
Lee turned his head to look at Revy, as he stated, “Let's count our blessings, and be happy none of us are under arrest.”
Revy replied, “You are preaching to the choir.” She thought, 'Now, I am glad I left my cutlasses at home. That could have gotten us all in trouble with that officer.'
Lee then turned back around to face the front of the car. He inserted the key, and started the ignition.
Lee then politely requested, “Could you guys please roll up your windows. I am going to put the hood up.”
Sam said, “Sure.”
Revy replied, “Okay.”
Rock responded, “No problem”
The four adults then rolled up the manual car door windows, as Lee also set the car to bring up the top up.
As soon as the windows were rolled up, and the top was up, as well, Lee put the car in drive, and checked to make sure he was clear.
When he was sure he was clear, he pressed the gas pedal, and re-entered the highway.
He soon turned onto another road, towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee stopped in front of the Devil's Hotel lobby entrance.
Lee put the car in park, as he let it idle, he turned to his passengers, as he said, “I hope you guys had fun.”
Sam stated, “I had fun.”
Rock replied, “It was interesting.”
Revy said, “It is always nice to ride in a classic.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “I am glad you feel that way.” He then looked over at Sam, as he stated, “I will see you later tonight, for dinner, Sam. Say around six, I will meet you in the lobby?”
Sam teased, “It's a date.”
Lee chuckled. He then watched as his three passengers get out. Sam pulled down his front seat for the two women. With Revy and Rock exiting the back, from the passenger side door. Sam then pulled up the sit, and shut the door. The three adults then walked into the hotel lobby.
After they entered the lobby, Lee turned to look in front of him, as he put the car in drive, and drove towards the De La Plata Podrido police station.
(_)
Twenty-five minutes later, Lee made it to the police station. He parked his car in a parking lot across the two lane street from the front of the police station.
After Lee made sure both doors of his car were locked, he left it, and headed inside the police station.
When he walked inside, he saw that it was an average looking police station. With officers coming and going. And a few other people were there, as well. There was a check in desk about twenty feet in front of him, from the front doors.
Lee noticed that the walls of the building were concrete block, with likely steel rod, reinforcement. A cheap, but effective style of construction.
Lee height allowed him to looked over the partitioned panel walls to see that he was in a large room, and that passed the check in desk were several desks for the police officers.
The flooring used off-white linoleum tiles.
The ceiling was a drop down ceiling, with ceiling tiles. And the ceiling was eight feet above the floor.
The lighting was done by soft florescent ceiling lights.
Lee also saw security cameras, placed at various places, on the high parts of the walls. With the cameras being pointed at different angles, looking into the room.
Lee was careful not to look directly at any of the cameras he saw.
Lee then noticed that the officer standing behind check in desk was not busy. He walked up to the officer, and came to a stop in front of the officer.
Lee stated, “Hello. My name is, Lee. I was told to come here, to meet with the police chief.”
The officer looked at Lee, as he replied, in english, “Ah yes. Please have a seat, the chief will see you in a little bit.”
Lee turned around and walked to where there were few empty seats, set against the outer wall, to the right of the front door.
Lee then sat down, and quietly waited to be called back to see the police chief.
Around ten minutes later, another officer escorted Lee through the station, to the police chief's office.
As Lee walked into the office, the officer walked away.
Lee stood just inside the door way to the office, as he looked around the room.
It was a small office, about twenty feet in depth, by twenty feet wide, by eight in height. There were no windows in the room, so Lee was not sure if one of the office walls was an outside wall of the building.
The walls were a light brown, painted color, over concrete. With linoleum tiles being the same off-white tiles as what he had seen in the rest of the station. Along with the ceiling be a drop down ceiling.
And the lighting was done by the same type of soft florescent ceiling lights, as outside the police chief's office.
Lee also saw not security cameras in the room.
Lee thought, 'I guess I am not being recorded in this room, and it is okay to talk in here. That makes sense, considering this is the police chief's office.'
Lee noted that door to the office swung from the inside, to his right.
To his left was a coat hook on the wall, with brown long coat handing on it.
To Lee's left, there was a wooden baseball bat leaning against the corner of the wall with the door, and the wall with the coat hook on it.
In front of Lee were two wooden armchairs, with cushioned seats. In front of the chairs was a brown, wooden desk of moderate size.
On the desk, to Lee's right was a computer set up, with a tower computer on the end of the side of the desk. Beside the tower was thing screen monitor, and a portable phone, hooked its base. The tower, the monitor, and phone, faced away from Lee. Behind the monitor was a keyboard, and computer mouse. Lee could see from the back of the tower, that it was a wireless network adapter plugged into the computer. Which meant that it was likely hooked up to the internet through a wireless hub router.
Behind the desk, to Lee's right, against the far right corner, was a set of shelves that went up near the height of the ceiling. The shelves were three feet wide, and a foot in depth. The shelves were facing Lee's left.
There were books, video boxes, and even a few comics on the shelves.
Lee thought, 'So, the chief has hobbies. Good.'
To Lee's left, in the far left corner, was a sit of filing cabinets. The doors to the cabinets faced Lee.
Beside the deck itself was nice wooden arm chair, with cushioned seat and back. And there was a man sitting behind the desk.
That man was looking at Lee, with a pleasant look on his face.
Lee saw that the man looked to be mexican in origin. He was in his forties. He was clean shaven, with short black hair. And he looked to be in good physical shape for his age.
Lee thought, 'So, this is the police chief. And he clearly is not of the donut eating variety of police officers.'
Lee continued to look at the police chief. He saw that the man wore a white long sleeve buttoned up shirt, over what Lee guessed was a bulletproof vest. The police chief had on a brown tie.
Lee also noticed the police chief had on a shoulder holster, with a pistol under his left armpit. Meaning the chief was likely right handed.
The butt of the pistol showed that it was an ammo clip, meaning the pistol in the holster was a semi-automatic of some kind.
And though Lee could not see what was below the man's wrist, but he saw a brown long coat hanging on a hook on the wall, so he guessed the man wore brown pants, and with his job, he likely wore nice dress shoes.
The police chief said, in english, “You must be, Lee.”
Lee remained calm, as he answered, “Yes. I am, Lee.”
The police chief requested, “Please, shut the door, and sit down, Lee. We have much to discuss.”
Lee gently shut the brown wooden door. He then walked over, and sat in the left chair, in front of the desk, so he could more easily see the police chief.
The police chief stated, “I heard from my brother that he gave you a gift.”
Lee realized, as he asked, “You are Mister Del Soto's brother?”
The police chief answered, “Yes. I am the older brother. By a few years. My name is, Pedro Del Soto.”
Lee thought, 'Oh man. Now, this is interesting. One brother controls the crooks, the other brother controls the cops. And they are clearly friends. No wonder Mister Paniano Del Soto said they joked about their city here, De La Plata Podrido, was like Roanapur, only nicer, with them both in charge.... Oh boy did I screw things up for this town. I just hope Chief Del Soto doesn't blame me.'
Lee said, “It is nice to meet you, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro stated, “Yesterday, my brother called me to inform me that he was leaving town on short notice. Though, he did not give me many details. And he left town, before I could ask him questions on the matter. So instead, I have questions for you.”
Lee requested, “I will tell you what I can, Chief Del Soto. Perhaps you should start from the beginning, so I don't have to waste your time, retreading what you already know.”
Pedro thought, 'Hey. That is my line. This guy smooth. But, he is clearly willing to give me answers. And I need answers.'
Pedro responded, “I want to know why, late last night, my brother called me, at my home, in my bed. He told me that this morning he would be leaving town, and joining the priesthood. Also, he was in the process of giving almost all his wealth to charity.”
“He even gave me his beach home. And I don't need that home. I have my own home. Places like that only attract trouble.”
“The only clue to his mysterious actions is that he mentioned your name, Lee. That he gave you one of his favorite cars. He told me which car, and I was sure you would be taking it for a drive today. So, having my boys track you down was not so hard.”
“Still, he stated that you saved his life, so that is why I didn't have you arrested on the spot. But, he refused to tell me how you saved his life. All he said if he answered my question, that I would either think he was insane, or get myself killed. That the situation was just too much badass for either of us to handle. Care to explain?”
Lee thought, with amazement, 'Wow. I must have made a real impression on Mister Del Soto, for him to join the priesthood on short notice. And from what that mexican man said this morning. I think Mister Del Soto also closed down his organization. That is understandable, given the situation.'
'And I guess I screwed up things more than I thought. I just know that Paciano Del Soto leaving is going to leave a power vacuum in this city. And I am not sure who is going to fill power vacuum. But, none of the options are good. And I am sure his brother here also realizes this fact... Still, I need something to use, to help me with the situation.'
Lee took a look around, and he then on as set of shelves, near the top of the shelving unit, by the desk, the stack of the Black Lagoon Blue-Ray boxes, and the Black Lagoon manga volumes, stacked beside each other, on their bottom sides.
Lee thought, 'I can use his hobbies to my advantage, like I did his brother.'
Lee turned back to look at Police Chief Del Soto, as he admitted, “Chief Del Soto, this is going to take some explaining. And we are going to have to do the same things. As what I did with your brother. You need to come to the Devil's Hotel, and see the answers for yourself.”
Pedro asked, “What is at the Devil's Hotel that I need to see?”
Lee answered, “Women. Dangerous women. And when we do this, we have to keep quiet, and make sure they do not know that we know about them, or we are both dead. Or worse.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “What dangerous game are you playing at, Mister Lee?”
Lee answered, “A game of shadows. Where the stakes are life and death. But, I do have a question for you. I see that you are a fan of the Black Lagoon series.”
Pedro answered, “Yes. I even find it funny that my name, Pedro, translates to, Rock. My full name translates to, rock of the grove. While Paciano translates to, peace. As in, peace of the grove.”
Lee said, “That is interesting. And I was wondering, what other series are you a fan of?”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “You name it, I have probably seen, or read, it. Except for the pornographic stuff. I do not need porn. I can get plenty of tail, if I want it. So, there is no problem there. And, as it is, it can get boring here, and I have to do something to kill time.”
Lee thought, 'Well, your boredom is about to end. And I think I just found my person behind the scenes. You just don't know it, yet.'
Lee commented, “I can see your point. Still, given the situation we are all in, I want to be on the best foot with you, from the beginning. All I ask is that you please don't betray my trust in you.”
Pedro flatly replied, “I won't.”
Lee mentioned, “Good. Your brother mentioned that he had strange tastes in fiction on the web. Have you heard of the series, Badasses Of the Multiverse?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. It is a really twisted story. Though, I found it very funny, with a lot of good action it in.”
Lee could not help but smirk, as he said, “Thank you. That is what I was going for.”
Pedro inquired, “You wrote it?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Pedro commented, “You are one sick man.”
Lee admitted, “I know. And because I wrote that story, you could say that I am the Keyser Soze of this situation. It is just that, while those after me, don't know they are after me. I am being honest with you about being Soze.”
Pedro wondered, as he asked, “How does that work? Keyser Soze was a brilliant liar in the movie, The Usual Suspects.”
Lee agreed, “I know. Kevin Spacey should have earned an Oscar for that performance. And the movie had a great ending.”
Pedro questioned, “No arguments there. So, how is knowing about, the Badasses Of the Multiverse story, important?”
Lee thought, 'Now, to see if he can pass my test. I need someone with courage, and who understands the depths of the situation.'
Lee commented, “Oh it is. It will all make sense, soon enough. I showed your brother yesterday, and in response, he immediately folded his organization, and ran out of town, less than a day later. I am hoping you are made of sterner stuff.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Are you quoting Optimus Prime?”
Lee thought, 'Oh my. He did get the reference. He passed my test.' He answered, “Yes. And as I told your brother, Mister Del Soto, there are three things you need to do, when we arrive at the hotel. And it will have to be just the to of us.”
Pedro cautioned, “If to get me alone, to lay a trap. I warn you, I have faced worse than you, and lived.”
Lee responded, “I am sure. And your brother wondered if this is a trap. Which it is not.”
“Anyway, first, when we get over there, you have stay quiet. You cannot talk. The women have ultra sharp hearing. If the women get wind we know anything. Then, we will both be killed, or worse. Second, we will only be spending a few minutes, until we see some of the women there. I nearly made the mistake of staying too long with your brother, and the situation almost blew up in our faces. Third, you cannot freakout. Your brother almost did. That would have screwed both of us.”
Pedro said, in a skeptical tone of voice, “I find that hard to believe. My brother is one of the bravest men I know. For him to be scared, states something bad happened. Very bad. Possible world ending bad. Because, he one time told me that he would only leave this town, permanently, if the nukes started flying. And I believe him.”
Lee conceded, “It is not that bad. But, it could get that bad, if we are not careful.”
Pedro said, “Interesting. And who are these women? I don't know any women on this planet that could scare Paciano like that.”
Lee though, 'Emphasis on, this planet.' He stated, “Like I said to your brother. You will know them, when you see them. Now, if they do talk to us, let me do the talking. Once you see them, you will understand that your authority means nothing to them. To be honest, it might make you a target.”
Pedro responded, in a more serious tone of voice, “Okay, Lee. You have me concerned, now. I will play your game. Just don't waste my time.”
Lee replied, “I promise, I won't. And after this, I will even treat you to some lunch, at the Last Resort Diner. So, either way, you are looking at a free lunch.”
Pedro commented, “There is no such thing as a free lunch.”
Lee smirked, as he responded, “Exactly. Now, let's head over there. And we can take my car. I will be driving.”
Pedro said, “Okay.” Both men stood up. Pedro got his coat, while Lee opened the door.
Both men then walked out of Pedro's office.
A minute later, they were out of the station, and sitting in Lee's new car.
Lee was behind the wheel, with Pedro beside him. And both of them had their seat belts on.
Lee then started the car, and took Pedro to the Devil's Hotel, to sitting him down in the hotel lobby, to watch for the people there.
(_)
Around twenty-five minutes later, they came to the Devil's Hotel parking lot, out front.
Lee parked his car in the middle of the parking lot. He made sure that the sight of his new pink car was blocked by the other cars, from the windows looking in the hotel lobby, and from the road.
As Lee turned off the ignition, with both him and Pedro undoing their seat belts, Lee thought, 'I am taking a big risk doing this twice. Two days in a row. But, I got no choice. Though, I will do this in the left, front corner lobby couch this time.
Lee looked over at Pedro, as he stated, “The plan is this. You follow me. We walk into the front lobby, and sit down in the left, front corner couch. If it is empty. If not, I will find another place for us to sit. Once we sit down, we will just silently watch people walk by. And whatever you do, you must remain silent, unless I ask you something. And you must not freakout. You freakout and we both die.”
Pedro looked at Lee, as he calmly replied, “I understand.”
Lee thought, 'No, you don't. But, you soon will.'
Both men then got up, opened their doors, stepped out of the car, and locked the car doors behind them.
A few minutes later, they made into the hotel lobby, and Lee lead Pedro to the couch against the window to the left side of the lobby. This was opposite to the location he took Paciano yesterday morning.
As they entered the front lobby, the speakers changed music, to the nineteen seventies song, Straight On, by the band, Heart.
Though, both men were so focused on the situation, they did not pay much to the song playing.
Lee found that the couches to the left side of the lobby were empty, and he and Pedro sat in the left, front couch, set against the window. With Lee sitting to Pedro's left side.
They then silently watched the people walk by, in the front lobby.
As luck would have it, the two men only had to sit there for a few minutes, until Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer walked by, in their usual clothing, as they were heading from the hotel bar, to the elevator bay.
As soon as the three women were out of sight, Lee turned to Pedro, and from the look at Pedro face, Lee thought, 'I guess he recognized them. Good.'
Lee whispered, “Now, do you understand?”
Pedro turned to Lee, as his face paled. He quietly requested, “Oh god, yes. Get us out of here.”
Lee softly replied, “With pleasure.” He mentally added, 'And none to soon. The sooner we are out of here, the better for both of us.'
Both men then stood up, and walked out of the hotel lobby through the front doors.
Four minutes later, they were both in Lee's in the car, with Pedro in the front passenger seat, as Lee was driving down the road, towards the Last Resort Diner, which was only a few minutes away by car.”
While Lee drove, the two men road in silence, all the way to the diner.
(_)
Three minutes later, Lee already parked his car out from of the Last Resort Diner, with him and Pedro then walking into the diner.
Presently, the two men were seated in the back, right corner booth, of the Last Resort Diner.
Lee was facing the front of the diner, so he could see the entrance. Pedro did not mind, because Lee was paying for lunch.
Both of them had already given Mary, their young redheaded waitress, both their drink and lunch orders.
Mary had just set down their two cups of coffee, and two bottles of chilled water, on the table between the two men. She then went to take care of her other customers, which were not near the booth that Lee and Pedro were sitting in.
While Lee took a sip of coffee form his own cup of coffee, he could see that Pedro's nerves were shot for the moment, as the cup in Pedro's hands were slightly shaking, as he sipped his office.
Lee sat down his cup on the table between him, and looked at Pedro, as he thought, 'This is a normal reaction for the given situation. But, I need to let him talk, first. For him to have the reactions I want him to have, towards me. Still, I will watch what I say. I will omit that I have cancer, and that my plans are a Kansas City Shuffle, that he will unknowingly be a part of.'
Lee stayed quiet, as Pedro slowly collected himself.
A minute later, after Pedro took another sip of coffee, he set down his cup of coffee, on the table, between them.
Pedro then looked Lee, in Lee's face, as the first words from Pedro's mouth were, “I have a request.”
Lee inquired, “What is it?”
Pedro stated, “You know how I said that Pedro translated to meaning, Rock. Please... Please, keep that to yourself. And don't let those women at the hotel know.”
Lee replied, “My lips are sealed.”
Pedro said, “Thank you. And I know this is impossible. But, you some how cracked reality, with what I guess is your imagination. No wonder my brother skipped town at the first opportunity, after learning of them. He was right. They are too badass for us. And considering that you mentioned your story, I can guess that these women are not just from their own various series, but from your stories, as well.”
“And they found out about your stories. And how your stories effected their lives. And now they want your ass for what you did to him.”
Lee thought, 'It is so nice to be able to casually talk to someone that can keep up with my line of reasoning.' He responded, “Yes. That sums up the situation. And I see why you are the police chief.”
Pedro replied, “Thank you. I had to earn my job.”
Lee thought, 'I bet you did. Still, I need to know what your plans are.' He asked, “So, what are you going to do, now? Skip town, like your brother?”
Pedro answered, in a firm tone of voice, “No. Unlike my brother, Paciano, I cannot just leave. I am the guy that keeps this city in one piece. There are no elected officials here. No mayor. No councilmen. Nothing. I am it. Except for the firefighters at the island's fire department, and the doctors and nurses at the local hospital. But, those are whole other issues.”
“Still, because of this, I have to set an example. And I cannot leave without a damn good reason. And even those women at the Devil's Hotel, is not a good enough reason to leave. Even though they scare me.”
Lee said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't feel bad. That is the natural reaction by anyone who knows what these women are capable of. The fear will pass, for the most part, in a few hours.”
Pedro took a deep breath, he then slowly let it out. After which, he inquired, “I know. I have been in bad situations before. I should get a mental handle on this, by the time we finish lunch. So, how did you come to this city in the first place?”
Lee answered, “I was lured here. Someone dropped off a business card to the Devil's Hotel, in my mailbox, on the same day as Scorpius' broadcast.” He thought, 'I think it is best if I don't mention the Rats Nest flyer, or the small ring. That would bring to much attention to the bartender there, and I already owe her my life, for stopping that group, a few nights ago. And the ring is not important to our current situation.'
Pedro said, “So, that is who that was. The message makes sense now. And dare I ask who else, is here, in town? Besides, Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer.”
Lee stated, “Rock and Lotton. Both as a women. The five Lagoon daughters, as older teenagers. Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, and their three older teenage daughters. Aeryn and Violin. Also, even though they are not with the group, Eda and Yolanda are here, as well. They are the blond babes that run that burger food truck, by the beach.”
Pedro commented, “So, that is where I saw those two women from. There are so many business that keep popping up here, it is hard to keep track of who is here just to live their life, and who is here for other reasons.”
“Still, Yolanda looks as hot as she did in that the youth omake. I am so glad I ripped those fansubs off the web, of those omakes, and watched them with my friends.”
Pedro thought, 'And I don't dig to deep, because I don't have time to track down every person that comes to town. Besides, more business usually brings more money. And I have been slacking on paying attention to the north quarter of the island, including the Devil's Hotel.
'I haven't be out this way in a year. And places like this just seem to pop up over night. Or, in the case of this diner. It just changes hands every few years. Though, it seems the people that own it now, seemed to do a good job remodeling. And I like they new name. Their name likely means they have a wicked sense of humor.'
'But, those are matters for later. Right now, I need to keep this conversation moving forwards, so I can figure out what I can do about this immediate crisis.'
'I wonder if Lee gets the joke. I doubt it, with everything else on his mind. Still, it is best not to distraction, considering he is giving me a lot of good information that I need to deal with this situation.'
Meanwhile, Lee thought, 'So, others know about the Black Lagoon series here. That is not surprising. That former mob member already dropped, the Two-hands, comment towards Revy.'
'Though, I do not have Police Chief Del Soto's trust, yet. So, I cannot ask who they are, just yet.'
Lee commented, “Yes. I made Yolanda younger and hotter due the super-soldier serum. I also replaced her lost right eye with a cybernetic eye that looks just like her left eye, and works just as well as her left eye. So, I think Yolanda is one of the few of those badass women that we don't have to worry about. Eda... I am not so sure.”
Pedro said, “While I agree with you that Yolanda is probably not pissed off at you, along with a few others. That doesn't made that they won't turn you over to their friends that do want your ass.”
Lee admitted, “You have a point there.”
Pedro begged, “And please, don't remind me about that damn super-soldier serum. You actually upgraded their badass abilities. Which is even more bad news for us.”
Lee replied, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Pedro looked down, as he quietly said, “I cannot believe my brother and I was so stupid tempt fate by joking that our home town was like Roanapur. We should have known better. Now, those women are here. And they brought their friends.”
Lee asked, “I feel for you. And I take it you are also well versed with Tvtropes website?”
Pedro looked up at Lee, as he answered, “Yes. And I guess we are going need that knowledge to survive this storm.”
Lee thought, 'Now, he is ready for my pitch.'
Lee stated, “I would think so. Now, I have plan. And I need your help. I am not asking that you put yourself, nor your men, in harms way. All you have to do is three things. Give me information, in exchange I will give you information. Keep the cops, and the crooks, away from these women. And I might need an alibi from time to time.
Pedro agreed, “Yes. Of course. I will order my boys to leave those women alone, and you alone. I don't want them to die. And I will have my boys impressed upon on the crooks to stay away, that it is in their best interest to stay away from those women and the Devil's Hotel.”
“Honesty, we may joke about it, but this town is not like Roanapur. It is not corrupt to the core. It use to be, until my brother and I cleaned it up from both sides of the law. But, it is not anymore. And the crooks that survive here know when to back off and not make waves.”
Lee said, “Good. That will solve a lot of problems. And prevent a number other problems for us.” He thought, 'Okay. He is on board. Though, it just occurred to me. It is so easy to use tropes for evil. I wonder if tropes are the dark side of genre savvy. I hope not.'
Pedro commented, “Also, a high body count might cause outside authorities to take notice of the situation. That is not something any of us one want happen.”
Lee replied, “You got that right.”
Pedro stated, “On information. Let's meet here at night, say around seven PM, every night, where we compare notes. It is clear enough to the Devil's Hotel, that you can drive here, without being suspicious. And those women don't know about me, yet. So, I am in the clear, at the moment.”
Lee said, “That is fine. If there is a problem. One of use will call the other ahead of time. You can leave a message at the front desk. Just use your first name, Pedro. I will call you from the police station, and talk to you. Or, leave a message with your men.”
Pedro responded, “That will work. The only problem I see with us meeting is if the women there come here.”
Lee commented, “Relax. I have not seen any of the women come in here to eat. They probably think this place is to low class, now that they have been rich for decades.”
Pedro chuckled. He then said, “Probably. And you made them rich, and they are still after your ass.”
Lee commented, “Yea. I know. They are being ungrateful bitches, on the matter. And even my friend, Sam, who doesn't know what is going on, prefers not to come here. He says the people that work here rub him the wrong way.”
Pedro said, “That works for both of us. The less people that know we are working together, the better.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. You got that right.”
Pedro inquired, “So, what does Sam look like?”
Lee stated, “He is the guy with the full groomed beard and ponytail, that is around me a lot.”
Pedro said, “Okay. I will also have my boys leave him alone, as well. Though, where do you two usually go during the day?
Lee answered, “Most of the time, either the Devil's Hotel, or the Rats Nest. Though, I come here, and the burger food truck, to eat.”
Pedro stated, “We will leave these places alone.”
Lee asked, “Good. By the way, what do you know about the Rats Nest bartender?”
Pedro admitted, “Not much, besides she hot, and she keeps to herself. She had been cooperative with me in a number of ways... And yes, she is great in bed.”
“The only thing she won't tell me, is her name. And I don't mind. The city is full of secrets. What is one more? Also, I allow her a lot of leeway at her bar, because some of the more foolish criminals in the city get themselves killed there. And it is not because of any assassinations. They just pissed off the wrong people. And the bartender cleans up the mess. Unless it is a large mess, then she calls us to help dispose of the body.”
Lee thought, 'So, he slept with the bartender. I don't blame her. And bartender is very clever. She used her her body to seduce both Del Soto brothers into leaving her alone. That is sharp. I will have to be more mindful of my actions, when I am around her. But, she likes me, and she already used a gun to defend me, so I am not worried that much about her.'
'Also, the cops are the body disposal service in this town. Who needs cleaners like Sawyer, when the cops are more than willing to do it for you, without arresting you. This city clearly works on the blue and orange morality scale. Still...'
Lee said, “I have seen that stupidity first hand, when some of the men at the bar got fresh with these women. Only, Sam, the bartender, and I were the only ones to walk away alive from the wrath of these women.”
Pedro inquired, “I heard a rumor that you were there, at the Rats Nest, during the massacre. What were the details of that massacre? The bartender did not give many details, herself, except that it was some women that did it. And she was clearly afraid of those women. And I have only seen that women afraid, a few times. And I am guessing that it was the women from the hotel that did the killing.”
Lee answered, “You are correct. The short answer is that Revy decided to take the five Lagoon daughters on a girls night out, and it got messy.”
Pedro nodded once, as he replied, “I bet. And why did you reincarnate Ginji, Yukio, Torch, and the vampire twins into a badass family, with Revy, Rock, Benny, Dutch, and Janet? That is insane.”
Lee shrugged, as he commented, “Come on. From an entertainment standpoint, it is cool idea.”
Pedro conceded, “Okay. You are right about that. Also, I will also keep an ear out anyone else that comes.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That is a good idea. And that means I won't have to worry about that.”
Pedro pointed out, “Now, onto one of the more important matters of this situation. We both know, once the doors to the multiverse are opened. They cannot be closed.”
Lee commented, “That is true. In a general sense. There is not much we can do about that, now. This genie is not going back into her bottle.”
Pedro said, “You are probably right. Also, if you have problems, and you need an alibi. Me giving you an alibi would not be a problem. Just give me about two hours notice, and let me know when and where you want the alibi to be. And what you want the people near there to say you were at.”
Lee replied, “Thanks. I am happy with just about any alibi. Just as long as it is not arresting me.”
Pedro pointed out, “I wouldn't do that to you. You are too fucking hot at target. You are practically radioactive. If I arrested you, it would be a great set up for a massive jail break in, by the women, to get to you. With them killing my boys and me.”
Lee complimented, “You are clearly a very savvy man.”
Pedro responded, “Thank you. That is why I am still alive. Speaking of which. How the hell are you still alive? Those are insanely violent women. And you have been around them for weeks. It is like living beside tigers and lions.”
Lee inquired, “That is true, Chief Del Soto. And I will freely admit that I harbor no illusions about how dangerous these women are. Yet, have you seen the nineteen ninety-six action film, The Rock?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. Why?”
Lee explained, “The key to my continued survival is found in what the character, Stanley Goodspeed, said in that film about nerve gas. His comment can be applied to these women, as well.”
“The second you don't respect these women, they'll kill you. If you remember that, and follow that one rule, you will stay alive. Keep in mind. Yes. These women are dangerous, and crazy. But, none of them are wildly destructive without reason. As long as they are not paid to kill you, you don't get in their way, nor piss them off, you will be fine.”
Pedro complimented, “You make several good points.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Though, a problem you briefly mentioned, that we need to keep in mind. If we are not careful, I could doom the planet.”
Pedro asked, “How so?”
Lee answered, “If I die before these women get their chance at vengeance, they might call in their friends to glass the planet. They do have friends with access to Star Destroyers and Command Carriers.” He mentally added, 'And with the cancer alone, that might happen.'
Pedro slightly paled, as he admitted, “You do have a point there. I will keep you being here a secret. I won't even tell my superiors on the mainland.”
Lee continued, “Good. Because, it gets worse. If the authorities get wind I am here, they will try to kidnap me. Learn everything they can from me. And then try to use me as a bargaining chip for reality traveling technology. And except for Rock, Violin, and a couple of others, these are not the type of women that negotiate. And they have the leverage to get their way.”
“If that happens, not only will I be screwed, but this could escalate to the point where the entire planet would be screwed.”
Pedro reign in his emotions, as he thought, 'I have learned a lot about you, Lee. But, I need to find out exactly what you are after.' He flatly inquired, “What is your end game?”
Lee answered, “Get a reality device and escape. If we play our cards right, in getting me a reality device, we will not only save this city, but our world. Because, if I leave. You can clandestinely leak to them, that I am the writer. And they will head into the multiverse, to follow me.”
Pedro pointed out, “That is not a bad idea. And good luck with that. But, I read your stories. Running rarely worked. You made those women very skilled trackers... Well, more so than they already were. And running didn't work for a number of people you wrote about. Such as Bao.”
“The only person I can think of that running did work for was Shane Caxton. And if they know about you, they probably read your stories, to learn exactly what you did to them, after the fact.”
“And they would also know about Shane, now.”
“Fortunately, I think Shane is fine because of the way the Black Lagoon anime ended, he was helping the Lovelace family. So, the he and Lovelace family worked out their differences, and the others could care less about him.”
Lee responded, “I agree. Shane and his family should be fine. I also understand that running will be a challenge. But, I got a very wicked plan to lose them. And it is still the best option we have. If I escape, they will likely follow me, with none of us likely ever coming back to this reality.”
“Let's be honest, the only thing that interests them about this reality is me. If I am gone, logic dictates that those women will follow me.”
Pedro flatly commented, “As I said, your plan is not a bad idea. But, experience has taught me that women and logic rarely mix.”
Lee questioned, in an annoyed tone of voice, “You got a better idea?”
Pedro admitted, “No.”
Lee stated, “Then, we will work with my plan. And plans, my friend, are something I have come to realize, that I am very good at.”
Pedro though, 'The way Lee is talking, concerns me. He voice and mannerisms have a hint of recklessness about him. But, he reasoning is sound. I agree with him assessment. We have to get him to another reality, for this storm to pass.' He responded, “Okay. Still, it is like we stuck in the Neverending Story from hell.”
Lee sarcastically replied, “Well, Bastian. We are not completely screwed to the wall, yet. But, we are close to it. Like I said. We have to be careful.”
Pedro agreed, “That is true. And are you doing a Neverending Story injoke with me?”
Lee complimented, “Yes. That was a good movie. And book. Your excellent taste in fiction continues to surprise me.”
Pedro said, “Thank you.”
Lee said, “I have a minor request.”
Pedro asked, “What is it?”
Lee stated, “That car your brother gave me is not exactly legal. It has only a vanity plate, and no any tags that I know of. I don't want to get into any trouble for driving it. That car is my only means of transportation on the island.”
Pedro said, “Don't worry about it. My brother gave it to you, so I am going to let you use it. I will speak to my officers, and they will leave you be, as long as you obey that normal traffic laws. You should be fine on the island. If you have any problems. Let me know.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. And I will. So, are there any really good men's clothing shops in town. I am talking for reasonably price nice men's clothing, and shoes.”
Pedro answered, “Sure. I know a few shops like that.” Pedro then told Lee about some men's clothing and shoe shops in town, and where they were located.
(_)
A few minutes later, Mary brought Lee and Pedro their lunches, and the two men ate, as they talked about more lighthearted matters. Like their tastes in fiction. And other interests.
By the time they finished their meals, they were quickly becoming friends.
They then got up, and Lee went to pay for their meals, and to tip Mary. Afterward, Lee used his car to take Pedro back to the Police Station.
When they got there, they headed into Pedro's office without a problem.
They then exchanged phone numbers and addresses. Lee gave Pedro his hotel room number, and phone number to the Devil's Hotel. And Pedro gave Lee the station's personal phone number, that he could be reached at, or Lee could leave a message from, if Lee needed to get in touch with him. With Pedro likely getting the message, as long as Lee called before six-thirty at night, when he left work for the day.
Though, if that was the case, they would likely see each other at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM, for their meeting.
After Pedro and Lee were finished with their meeting, Lee left the police station, and got into his Cadillac.
Lee then drove his pink car back to the Devil's Hotel. After he parked his car, he walked into the hotel, and headed to his suite. Lee planned to spend the next few hours in his suite, resting, as he watched some TV. While he thought about how he could use Pedro in his plans. Also, Lee planned on checking out the clothing shops Pedro told him about.
When it reached six PM, he left his suite, and went down to the lobby, where he met Sam.
The two them went to the hotel restaurant to get some dinner. After everything Lee had been through, in the last few days, he was no longer that worried about the women, and he felt he could eat in the same room, as they were in, without them killing him by accident.
Sam and Lee then had a pleasant dinner at the bar counter. Though, Lee refused to tell Sam, nor anyone else what he had to talk to the police chief about. All he said, was it was a matter of formality on some questions concerning what happened on the night of the car chase he was in.
Fortunately, Sam, nor anyone else that asked, press the matter.
Lee and Sam then spent the rest of the evening watching several of the customers, including some of the badass women, do some karaoke, until it got late. Both of them then paid their bills, left some tips, and headed out of the hotel restaurant, and to their suites, to turn in for the night.
(_)
The next morning, after Lee met with Pedro, it was around ten AM, on a partly cloudy, cool day.
Along one of the interior roads of the island of De La Plata Podrido, a red, 1965 Pontiac GTO drove up into the parking lot of a local auto-repair shop in Plata Podrido. The windows of the car were rolled down, so the two women inside could enjoy the nice cool, autumn weather, as they had drove. Now, that they were where they wanted to be, the driver stopped the car, turned off the ignition, with each woman opening a car door, on opposite sides of the vehicle, with them both getting out of the car.
Rock got out of the driver's side, while Revy got out of the passenger side. Fortunately, Rock talked her lover out of bringing her pistols.
Revy was wearing her usual clothing, without her shoulder holsters and weapons. While Rock felt like doing something different. Rock was wearing a white blouse, and a light brown skirt.
After both women shut their car doors, Revy turned to looked at Rock from across the hood of the car, as she said, “I still don't see why we have to do this. The car runs fine. And you got to admit that chase a few nights ago was fun.”
Rock looked over at Revy, from across the car, as pockets her keys in a hidden pocket, in the folds of the left side of her skirt.
Rock then admitted, “Yes. It was. But, I don't want Benny, nor Dutch finding out about what happened. They both like working on this car. You do remember the bad moods that both Dutch and Benny were in right after Bob wrecked this car into the Yellowflag, all the way until it was fully repaired, a week later?”
Revy replied, “Yea. That was when, one of the few times in my life, Dutch gave me a look that honestly scared me.”
Rock responded, “Exactly. And that is why we need to make sure the car is fine. Melvin at the hotel said this guy is a good mechanic, and his rates are fair. Melvin also strongly warned us not to threaten him, nor his family.”
Revy promised, “I will be on my best behavior. So, what is this guy's name?”
Rock answered, “Hernan Pena. Now, let's get this over with.”
The two women then looked at the repair shop in front of them. They saw that the two door garage was completely open. There was also an interior section of the building attached to the left side of the left bay of the garage. There was even a door going into the interior part of the building.
The right bay was empty, while the left bay had a vehicle in it. The front of the car faced the two women. The hood of the car was up, with the engine showing.
They women sat that there was a man working on the engine, from the top of the engine.
The two women only saw the back of the man. But, they noted that the man was wearing blue coveralls. They did not see anyone else around.
Rock reached into her car and hocked the horn once, to get the man's attention.
Revy saw and heard this. And she giggled a little at her lover action.
In response, the man still had his back turned, as he said, in spanish, “Solo un minunte.”
Revy turned to Rock. Rock noticed this, she turned turned to look at Revy.
Rock answered Revy's unspoken question, “He said. In a minute.”
Revy replied, “Oh...”
Both women then turned to look back at the mechanic.
A few seconds later, the man leaned up, and used a rag by him to wipe his hands. He then grabbed some sunglasses, set in front him, on the left side of the car, and he put them on.
Finally, the man turned around, and faced the two women.
Rock and Revy could see he was a black haired hispanic man, with a full head of black hair that was cut short, but not too short. He was in his forties, and he was in good physical shape. He was average height for a man of his ethnicity, and he had a full, well groomed black beard, which was cut short.
He looked at the two women, then at the GTO between the women, then he focus back at the women.
The man looked upwards, and said in spanish, “Gracias.”
The man then looked back at Rock and Revy.
Rock politely requested, in english, “Excuse me, but do you speak english.” He thought, Melvin said this man spoke english, so that should not be a problem.”
The mechanic happily answered, in english, “Yes. It is practically a second language here in Plata Podrido. So, what can I do for you two fine ladies, on this lovely morning?”
Rock stated, “We are hear to discuss business.”
The man replied, “Of course.”
Revy bluntly asked, “Are you, Hernan Pena?”
The man kindly answered, “Yes. My name is Hernan Pena. It is nice to meet you both. If you would please follow me to my office. We can discuss business, there.”
Hernan turned, and walked into the interior section building, on the left side of the left open garage. Rock and Revy followed him into the building.
As Rock and Revy entered the building, through an open door, from the garage bay, they saw a hallway in front of them. The hallway run from their left to their right. They also noticed that the door to the outside, behind to their left, and on the other side of the hallway, was entrance to Hernan's office. Which had the door open.
Though, before entering the office, the two women looked to their right, and they saw down the hallway, there were closed door leading to other rooms. Including a door, on the left side of the hallway, that had a unisex restroom side on it, meaning it was the restroom. And all the down the right side of the hallway, was another door, that left to the back exit of the building.
The two women then walked into Hernan's office.
After they did so, they saw that Hernan was sitting behind his desk, in his black leather, cushioned, swivel armchair.
Meanwhile, even though there were two simpler, plastic chairs, with steel frames and without armrests, in front of the desk, Revy and Rock chose instead to remain standing. With Rock standing to Revy's right side.
Rock looked around Hernan's office.
The walls were painted white, the ceiling used a dropped down white tiles, and the floor was light brown tile linoleum.
To Rocks left side was a wall with a window, with the metal blinds closed, and a small table under the window. The wall, behind her had a closed window on the top part of the wall. The window was three feet by three feet, with the closed metal blinds, blocking the sunlight from getting into the room.
Though, the ambient sunlight that did make it through the blinds of the window provided enough light to see with.
The other three walls in front, and behind her, were just flat, plain white painted walls.
The desk was just a simple wooden top with metal legs and shelves. There was a wireless phone, on its base. And a computer, with monitor, keyboard and computer mouse, on top of the desk. There were wires going down into holes in the desk, where Rock guessed the computer tower was located.
There was also a bundle of cables, coming out the bottom side of the desk, to Rock's right side, with the cables going into in a set of wall sockets on the wall to her left. There were phone, power, and ethernet cables.
On the wall to Rock's right, there was a set of filing cabinet by the desk, set against the right wall, that faced the desk, which was right behind the cords that went into the wall sockets.
Though, what drew Rock's attention, about the room, was the table, under the window facing the outside wall, to Rock's left side. Rock noticed three pictures on the table.
The smallest picture showed Hernan, without his sunglasses. Along with this, the picture showed him standing, with him with the same groomed beard he had now, but the picture also showed that he had blue eyes. Beside Hernan, in the picture, sitting in a chair, was a pretty, much younger woman, whom was standing by Hernan. There were three small children, two boys and a girl in front of the two adults.
Rock thought, 'This must be his family.'
Rock took a closer look at Hernan's wife. She was beautiful, and slender. She had fair skin, long blond hair that loose, and went down to her waistline, brown eyes, and she looked to be at least fifteen years younger than Hernan was in the picture, with the woman appearing to be in her late twenties to early thirties.
Something in the back of Rock's mind was screaming to her, but she could not recall what it was. So, she moved onto the next picture.
The next larger picture looked like a cookout with Hernan's family, and other families. There were also some police offices, in uniform, in the picture. Everyone in the picture looked like they were having a great time.
The last picture, and largest picture, troubled her. It was a picture of several men, and a few women, all in combat fatigues, in two rows, in a jungle backdrop. One row as crouching down, the other was standing behind the first row.
The picture was faded with age. And it was clear that at one point, the picture had been folded up to be small enough to likely had once been kept in someone's pocket.
Rock did not see Hernan in the picture, as she thought, 'I cannot tell which of the men in the photo is Hernan, due to his full beard.'
She then noticed that all of those in the picture were wearing then yellow, blue, and red stripped armbands on their left upper arms.
Rock thought, with worry, 'Only one group wears armbands like that.'
Rock turned to Hernan, as she accused, “You are not mexican? Are you?”
Hernan had noticed Rock looking at the pictures. He looked her in her eyes, as he casually admitted, “No. I am from Venezuela. I have a somewhat checkered past.”
Revy picked up on the man's comment, as she asked, “What do you mean?”
Hernan calmly stated, “I was a former FARC member.”
Rock visibly tensed, as she thought, 'The only FARC member I have know is Roberta. This guy could be trouble. No wonder Melvin warned us about him.'
Rock to a quick glance at her lover, to see that Revy immediately look like she was getting ready for a fight. Rock then turned back to Hernan.
Hernan noticed the changes in demeanor in the women. He said, “Relax. I ditched that organization over two decades ago.”
Hernan saw both women begin to relax.
Rock asked, “Are you a communist?”
Hernan answered, “Not really. When I was a young man, in Venezuela, my friends and I were tired of getting nothing for our work, and our families work. While, the government and their rich allies got wealthier off of our hard labor. So, we joined FARC. What can I say? We were young, stupid, and foolish.”
Revy requested, with slight bluntness in her told of voice, “Care to explain how you ended up here?”
Hernan responded, “Not much to tell. In the late 1980's, my friends and I, were either fighting, or mostly just living in the jungle. During that time, we learned that our superiors were getting more and more deeply in bed with the drug cartels. The same drug cartels that were also making live harder for our families, through both FARC and their corrupt officials in governments of the region.”
“Then, one day, in the early 1990's, we learned we were being assigned to guard coca fields. And that was the final straw. We joined FARC to make a better lives for our families and ourselves. Not, to make things worse for our families.”
Rock thought, 'That is basically the same reason that Roberta quit FARC.'
Hernan looked upwards, with him not wanting to look them in their eyes as he recalled his past, “Given we were just grunts, our superiors were not that motivated to catch us. Though, if they did get us, they would have executed us for desertion.”
“Once we made it to Panama, we were in the clear. We split up from there, and I made my way here. And I have lived here ever since. I am now happily married to a wonderful woman named Maria, whom gave me three wonderful children.”
Hernan then looked directing at Rock and Revy, as he flatly finished his tale, “Still, I won't lie to you about the fact that during my time in the FARC, we did horrible things. But, we got out before things got a whole worse for that organization.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “I have heard worse.” She looked over to Rock, whom looked at her, and nodded once in agreement.
Revy and Rock then turned back to Hernan.
Rock thought, 'There is one question I still need to ask.'
Rock questioned, “Do the police know about your past? I do not want the police to impound you business, while our car is here.”
Hernan stated, “That is completely understandable. Yes. They know. Actually, I do much of the maintenance on their vehicles. I have a nice contract with the police. I am even friends with the police chief.”
“He and his brother even got me out of rough spot once, a number of years ago. I owe them big.”
“The police chief even invites me to his movie nights. Depending on what he shows, I sometimes get a little ribbing.”
“Anyway, if you stay here long enough, you find a lot people here have similar pasts. We have people from all around the world taking refuge here. We even have a former Somalian pirate turned priest, at a local church.”
Hernan overheard Revy mutter under her breath, “I am liking this town, more and more, by the minute.”
Rock stated, “That is all nice to know. Now to business at hand. We need you to just do a check on the engine, and maybe realign the tires and steering, if the car needs it. We treated the car kind of rough a few days ago, and we want to make sure it was okay.”
Hernan opened a drawer, in the middle of his desk. He pulled out a calculator, pen and paper. He then closed the drawer, and he started doing the figures.
Hernan worked on the what the cost would be for working on Rock and Revy's GTO, he said, “No problem. Let me guess, you are the ones that got into that chase, a few nights ago?”
Revy replied, “You heard about that.”
Hernan continued looked working on the figures, as he stated, “Of course. This is a small town. Word travels fast.”
Rock thought, 'I got to keep that mind. I need to tell the girls that we need to be more careful, or we could expose ourselves to more unwanted attention.'
Rock inquired, “So, do you accept U.S. cash?”
Hernan wrote something on a small piece of paper, and he hand it to Rock. He said, “Sure. I figure this is how much it will cost. And it should take a few days, to maybe a week. Leave me a phone number and contact information, and I will get back to you, when your car is ready.”
Rock looked that price. She then stated, “This seems fair.” She the pocketed the piece of paper, in the hidden pocket, in the folds of the right side of her skirt.
Rock then pulled out a pen and paper, from a hidden pocket in the folds of the left side of her skirt. The she wrote down the Devil's Hotel phone number, and their room. Next, she put away her pen, back into that pocket.
Rock pulled the keys to the GTO, from the pocket in hidden on the folds of the left side of her skirt. She then set both items on Hernan's desk, as she said, “We are staying at the Devil's Hotel. This is our hotel's phone number, and room number. Just leave message with the front desk, and they contact us.”
Hernan picked up the paper and read it. The text was in english. He then set the piece of paper back down on his desk. He look at the keys. Next, he turned to look at Rock, as he requested, “Thanks. By the way, I never got your names.”
Rock stated, “I am Rock. The women next to me, is Revy.”
Hernan leaned back in his chair, as he commented, “Rock, and Revy... Such odd names...”
For second Rock and Revy thought they had been found out, until Hernan continued, “To be honest with names like yours, it sound like a science experiment dealing with potential energy and kinetic energy.”
Rock thought over Hernan's comment, 'Of course. Our names now make complete sense to me. I am the Rock, the potential energy waiting to be released, by Revy, the kinetic energy. It is like I said to Revy years ago. I am the bullet. She is the gun. I will have to explain this to Revy, later.'
Rock smiled, as she commented, “Yea. You're right. I never thought about it that way. Thanks.”
Hernan replied, “You are welcome. Still, those are odd names for such two beautiful women.”
Revy scoffed, as she said, “I thought you were married.”
Hernan smirked, as he commented, “I am happily married. It just don't mean I cannot look. Just as long I don't touch.”
Revy replied, “Humph.”
Rock requested, “Can we use your phone to call for a ride?”
Hernan replied, “Sure.” He pulled the wireless phone off its base, and handed it to Rock.
Rock took the phone and dialed a number. As soon as the other end of the line picked up, she said, “Yea. We are finish here. We need to be picked up... Yes. It is where I told you it would me... Thanks. See you in a few minutes.”
Rock hung up the phone, and she handed it to Hernan.
Hernan put the phone back on its base, to recharge.
Revy commented, “Come on, Rock. Let's wait outside.”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
Hernan then silently watched the the two women in front of him, walked out of his office, through the hallway, into the garage bay, where they turned to their right, to head outside, and onto the parking lot.
(_)
Five minute later, Rock and Revy were standing outside in the parking lot, as they faced the road.
From his office, Hernan stood by his office window, that faced outside, as he crack open the metal blinds. He used his right index finger to opened one of the metal pieces of the blinds just wide enough to see out of them, without them seeing him.
Hernan watched as a blue seventies model, four door car, pick the two women up.
As Rock and Revy got into the backseat, Hernan saw a black haired asian woman in the front passenger seat. In the driver's seat was a smaller white haired fair skin woman. And in the back, by Revy and Rock, was a petite black haired fair skin woman.
After the women drove away, down the road, Hernan let go of the metal blinds. He looked back at his office, as he though about the women he had just met, and those he had just seen.
He then said to himself, “Nah.”
A second later, another thought occurred to him. He turned back to the window, and he cracked open the blinds, to look the red GTO sitting in his parking lot.
He said to himself, “Maybe.”
He went to his desk, sat down in his chair. Next, he picked up his phone.
He dialed a number. A few seconds later, the other end of the line picked up.
Hernan said into the phone, in spanish, “This is Hernan. I need to speak to Chief Del Soto... Good morning Pedro. It is Hernan. How are you this morning?... Good. Do you have a minute?...”
“Good. I had a couple of strange customers come into this shop this morning. They just left. It was a black haired, fair skinned japanese woman, and a tanned skin, asian redhead... Yea. Well, they dropped off their red 1965 Pontiac GTO, for some basic maintenance...”
“Yes. I am going to work on their car. Their money is as good as anyone else. Anyway, they said their names were Rock and Revy... Yea, from the number they gave me, they are staying at the Devil's Hotel, which is kinda fitting if they are who I think they are...”
“Yes, Revy looks exactly like the Revy from the series you showed us. Now, that was a cool series. Only her voice was different. And Rock looked like the Rock from the omake you showed us. And that omake was funny. Really funny to watch while slightly buzzed from the good beer you provided. Anyway, I just wanted to ask if you knew anything about these two women?...”
“So, they really are them. I don't see how that is possible... Yea. I read those strange stories on the web, you told me about. The wife looked funny at me when I mentioned those stories to her. Still, they were funny. But, why are they here?... So, he is in town, and they are after them. Better him, than us...”
“We better hope the maids don't show up. If that purple haired maid, Roberta, shows up, and she is anything like those I met in the intelligence units, we could be in some real trouble... Yes. I will keep quiet about this...”
“So, are we still on for movie night at you house tomorrow night?... Good. I'll see you there. And good luck.”
Hernan hung up the phone connection, and he placed the wireless phone back on its base.
Hernan leaned back as he though, 'This place is about to get a lot more exciting. I better tell Maria to keep a closer eye on our kids, and for her to be more careful when she is out, running errands.'
(_)
Less than a week later, Hernan, while working on other vehicles, found the time to finish his work on the GTO. He called up the Devil's Hotel, and he left a message at the front desk for Rock and Revy.
A few hours later, Rock and Revy showed up at Hernan's garage. They got the keys for the GTO from Hernan. They told him they were happy with his work. They paid him. And they left his auto-repair shop, in the GTO, without any trouble for anyone involved.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 04: “Cooking With Insanity.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was eleven ten AM, during a cool sunny morning, on a weekday, just after the Rats Nest has opened for the day. It has been a few days after Rock and Revy had picked up their GTO, from Hernan's garage.
It was a sunny day, which could be seen from the large windows of the Rats Nest.
It was late morning, as Sam and Lee were playing cards at their usual left, back corner table inside the Rats Nest. With them sitting in chairs, in their usual places. With Sam sitting with his back to the left, back, corner, and Lee sitting on the right side of the table, as they faced each other.
Lee and Sam were both dressed in their variations of their usual casual, masculine clothing. With Sam in his black cowboy boots. And Lee in his blue cloth jacket, glasses, and blue baseball cap.
Besides the two men, the only other person in the bar at that time of day was the beautiful bartender of the Rats Nests.
The bartender was standing behind the bar counter. She was wearing, among other things, a blue short sleeved shirt, red pants, blue plastic belt around the waistline of her pants, white socks, and blue tennis shoes. And while the clothing did not really do the bartender's figure, justice. The simple clothing did look nice on her.
The current card hand, between Lee and Sam, had been going on for the last ten minutes, because the conversation they were having, had become too interesting for each other, for them to continue the game, for the moment.
Their usual discussion during their games widely varied. From topics of politics, religion, and history. To fiction and non-fiction related subjects. Though, Lee was very careful not to let slip that he was a anime and sci-fi fan. As far as everyone knew, he stuck to action movies.
Presently, Sam had brought up the topic of piracy on the high seas, centuries ago.
Sam stated, “What I don't understand most of all is how women back then could become pirates?”
Lee thought, 'This is a very dangerous topic to talk about, considering who we are living with at the hotel. I have to kill the discussion in a rational manner, by leading it to its logical conclusion.'
Lee explained, “Well, I can understand why women back then found an appeal to be pirates. Back then, there are not many opportunities for women outside of the home. And the thrill of being an outlaw probably appealed to them.”
“Human nature has not changed much in the last millennium, and some people, of any gender, have a rebellious streak. And historically, those women that were not sold into slavery, or rape and killed, that were able to make it as pirates, were usually more dangerous than the men.”
“To top even that, pirate women that were caught by the English common law found a loophole that bought them time to escape the hangman's noose.”
Sam asked, with interested in his tone of voice, “What was the loophole?”
Lee answered, “Well, at the time, English common law was based on Christianity. And the laws at the time forbid executing women that have become pregnant, until they gave birth. Though, it usually didn't save these women for long.”
Sam chuckled. He then inquired, “Well score one for pro-life. What are the details?”
Lee stated, “The technical term is called, pleading the belly. Not joking here. That is what it is called. To most famous examples of this defense were the pirate women, Anne Bonny, and Mary Read. And while this only delayed their execution, it bought them time.”
“Anne was able to escape, with her father's help. Though, Mary later died after giving birth to her child.”
“It should be noted that those two women were good friends of Jack Rackham, as in Calico Jack. And that it is likely their children were Jack's. And for Anne, this would have been Anne's second child with Jack. Their first was named, Cunningham, which she gave birth to in Cuba.”
Sam said, “I knew about Calico Jack. But, I didn't know all the details, as you mentioned them. I got to give Calico credit. He could not save himself from hanging, but he made damn sure to do his best to see his girlfriends escape the hangman's noose.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It gets better. Anne ended up in Charleston, South Carolina, where she gave birth to hers and Jack's second child. She then married another man, and gave birth to another ten children. Anne even live to be eighty years old. And that was over two and a half centuries ago. So, on top of everything else, many of the people in the deep south of Dixie, have some badass pirate blood flowing in their veins.”
Sam replied, “That is interesting. You know a lot about the southeastern United States of America?”
Lee admitted, “Of course. It is my homeland.” He placed some money in the pot, as he stated, “Call.”
Both men showed their cards, and Lee lost.
Sam collected the pot and cards, as he asked, “So, there is pirate history in the U.S.?”
Lee thought, 'It won't hurt to answer this question. And Sam has earned my trust... To a degree.'
As Lee handed his cards over to Sam, he answered, “Yes. During the colonial period, there were pirate hangouts all along the golden isles and other island chains along the southeastern coast of what is now the U.S.”
“A couple of these pirate hangouts still exist. Such as the Pirates House in Savannah, Georgia. It is still a bar and restaurant. They even have a trapdoor, that centuries ago, pirates use to get their victims drunk and shanghaied them, as a tourist attraction.”
“Though, that trapdoor is not used anymore. And they make a good key lime pie, there.”
Sam collected the cards and he started shuffling, as he questioned, “Interesting. So, you have been there.”
Lee stated, “Yes. And Savannah is an interesting city to visit. The people there are nice. Though, a bit... Off.” Lee then mentally reflected, in sadness, 'Except I will likely never see that place, any other other part of my homeland, again.'
Just then, one of the cards Sam was shuffling slipped out, glided slightly in the air, under the table, to land by Lee right foot.
Lee said, “I got it.”
Sam replied, “Thank you.”
Lee reached down, and he picked the card up off the floor.
When Lee came up, he handed the card to Sam.
Sam quickly finished shuffling, and dealt each of them five cards.
Lee picked up his cards to see what he had. He thought, 'This is a pretty good hand.'
As Sam picked up his five cards, he noticed something around Lee's neck.
Sam asked, “What is that?” Sam the put his cards in his left hand, as he used his right index finger to point at the middle of Lee's chest.
Lee looked down, and he saw that the mysterious small ring, that had come with the Devil's Hotel business card, and Rats Nest flier. He had put the ring on a string to make into a necklace, which had come out from under his shirt.
Lee stated, “I got this ring a while back. I don't know much about it. It is a total mystery.”
Sam held out his right hand, as he requested, “Can I see it?”
Lee thought, 'There is no harm in doing so. And he might know the ring's origins.' He replied, “Sure.”
Lee took off the ring necklace, and handed it to Sam.
Sam set his cards face down. He took the necklace from across the table.
Lee was silent, as Sam looked at the ring in his hand for the next several seconds.
Sam then handed the ring necklace back to Lee.
Lee took the ring back. He put the string back around his neck, with the ring on his front side, as he asked, “You wouldn't happen to know the origin of that ring?”
Sam answered, “It is chinese in origin. There are four symbols lightly engraved on the inside of the ring. The four symbols translate to four things. Which is fitness, health, longevity, and lock. And I think the ring was meant as a good luck charm for a child. Because only a child could wear that ring. Still, the ring is real. That is real gold, and those jewels are real. Be careful, someone might try to steal it from you.”
Lee dropped the ring necklace back under his shirt, he thought, 'Pay dirt. Now, to just figure out how that fits into this situation. And Sam knows chinese. Interesting.' He said, “Thanks for the warning. And I did not realize you knew chinese?”
Lee could see that his question caught Sam off guard, as Sam quickly picked up his hand of cards.
Sam shuffled his cards, in his hands. He then looked at Lee, as he stated, “Yes. I know some chinese. And, by the way, I overheard yesterday that those crazy women were planning on leaving the island.”
Sam's commented got Lee's attention, as he thought, 'Now, that is a skillful way to change the subject. And it shows that Sam knows I am interested in the women, he probably just doesn't know why. Also, the matter of their leaving is more important, than learning how and why Sam knows chinese.'
'Sam just played me. And we both know it. If I try to ask any more about him knowing chinese, he is going to ask me while I am interested in the women, I warned him to stay away from. That would blow up in my face, and likely ruin the one genuine friendship I have ever had in my life. So, I will just let the matter drop, and move onto the more important matter.'
Lee inquired, “Why?”
Sam looked at his cards, as he answered, “It seems they are unable to find the person they are after, and they are starting to think he may have left town.”
Lee thought, 'Oh no. Keeping those women here is very important to my plans. I am screwed if they leave. I got to do something quickly to keep them in town, but what?... If I do anything direct, I will likely give myself away to them, as they writer.'
'So, I have to do something indirect. It has to be simple message that proves I am here, but untraceable to me... That is so crazy, it might just work. The question is, will she go for it?'
Lee put his cards face down, as he turned to Sam. He asked, “Sam, where is the nearest location of a person that sells burner phones?”
Sam looked up at Lee. He set his cards down. Next, he used his right hand to pull out a cellphone from his pocket. He stated, “No need. I have one right here. I have yet to use it. And you can keep it. They are fairly cheap. If you know where to get them from.”
Sam handed the phone to Lee. As Lee took the phone, he replied, “Thank you. Also, I will be one moment.”
Lee held the cellphone in his left hand, as he used his right hand to pull out a fifty dollar bill from his money, on the table.
Lee got up, with the untraceable, and fifty dollar bill, in his hands.
Lee turned around, and walked over bartender, whom was near the back end of the bar counter.
As the bartender turned to face him, Lee smiled at her. He held up the fifty dollar bill, while he offered, “Would you like to make a quick fifty dollars, and get a small measure of revenge on the women that wrecked your bar, a while ago?”
The woman cracked a grin, as she answered, “Sure. What do you have in mind?”
Lee started, “Okay. Here is what I need you to do, after I dial the number for you.”
Five minutes later, the woman held the cellphone in her right hand, against the right side of her face. She finished her conversation, “Yes. That is the word. And it is spelled exactly like that. And give that message to Rock and Revy. Thank you.”
After the woman hung up the cellphone, Lee handed her the fifty dollars, which she took in her left hand. Lee smiled at the bartender, as he complimented her, “Beautiful, my dear. Absolutely beautiful. Now, I need the cellphone back.”
The woman handed Lee the cellphone, as she stated, “A pleasure doing business with you.”
Right after Lee had the cellphone in his hand, he quickly took out the sim card in the phone. He broke it in half. He then threw both the phone and the sim card pieces into a nearby trash can, by the back end of the bar counter.
Lee then walked back over to the bartender. He stood across the counter from her, as he said, “My dear, it is unfortunate that I cannot give you the punch line to this joke. But, I assure you that we just rolled those women hard.”
The woman pocketed the cash, as she replied, “It can live with that. And with this.”
The woman lightly put her hands in Lee's cheeks. She leaned over the bar counter, and quickly kissed him on the lips.
As second later, after she broke the kiss, Lee was slightly shocked by what just happened to him.
All Lee could find the words to say was, “Thank you.”
The woman pulled out a cold beer bottled, from a small refrigerator below the counter. She set the bottle on the bar table, as she smiled at Lee. She replied, “No problem. And here is a free bottle of beer.”
Lee returned her smile, as he took the bottle back with him.
Lee then turned around, and returned to the table he was shared with Sam.
As Lee approached the table, he saw Sam chuckling.
After Lee sat down, at his usual chair, he said, “Laugh it up. I just got a free bottle of beer, and kiss from a pretty girl. I think my day is looking up.”
By then, Sam had calmed down. Sam commented, “That is not what I am laughing about. I know you just did something stupid in dealing with the very that women you warned me about.”
Lee picked up his cards, as he smirked. He stated, “It is all in what you know, and how you play your hand.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And boy did I just lay down a major bet in the pot, of the proverbial poker game I am playing with those women. Still, it might be best if I think about something else. How about I think about what I will get for lunch? And when? I believe I will go to the burger food truck in an hour? Or so? I feel like I could eat a hamburger and some fries.'
The two friends then continued their poker game, with Lee winning the current hand.
(_)
An hour later, at the Devil's Hotel front lobby, Rock and Revy had returned to the hotel lobby, from an errand they had just ran.
As they passed by the check in desk, one of the clerks on duty said, in english, “Madams, you have a message.”
The clerk's comment caught Rock and Revy's attention, as they stopped, and turned towards the check in desk. They then walked to the check in desk.
As the two women stood side by side, in front of the check in desk, with Rock to Revy's left side, they looked at the female clerk that spoke to them.
Rock asked, “What was the message? And by who?”
The female clerk pulled out folded piece of paper, as she stated, “A woman called an hour ago. And the message she gave for you both is written here.”
She handed Rock the envelope.
And Rock opened the piece of paper, and read it.
Revy asked, “What is it?”
Rock looked at the paper, as she answered, “One word.”
Revy requested, “Let me see.”
Rock turned to Revy, as she handed Revy the paper.
Revy took the paper and read it. She then turned to looked at Rock, as she asked, “Huh?”
Rock shrugged, as she responded, “You got me. I will go upstairs, get on the internet, from our laptop, and find out the meaning to this word. I will join you in a little while, at the hotel bar, for some lunch.”
Revy replied, “Okay. Here is the piece of paper back.” She handed the piece of paper back.
Rock took the piece of paper, as she said, “Thanks.”
Revy responded, “See you at lunch.” She then walked passed Rock, and towards the left side of the lobby, which let to the hallway, where the entrance to the hotel restaurant and bar was located at.
Meanwhile, Rock held the piece of paper in her hand. She she then headed for the elevator bay, on the right side of the hotel lobby.
Three minutes later, Rock was in the hotel room she shared with Revy.
Rock was sitting at the table in their room, with her laptop booted up. The piece of paper was sitting on the table, to her right side, by the laptop.
A minute later, Rock logged onto her account, and then onto the internet. She then began her search.
Most of the results were on food.
Rock muttered to herself, “I know I am not looking for food. So, what else is that name attached to?”
It was then that Rock stumbled upon a website with several pictures on it.
Her jaw dropped at what she saw.
But, as she continued looking, she began to like what she saw.
Rock made a lecherous smile, as she said to herself, “You know what. These pictures are not half bad.”
(_)
Meanwhile, at the hotel restaurant and bar, Revy walked up the bar counter to get some rum, when she passed by Akira and Natsuru.
Akira and Natsuru were sitting in chairs, beside each other, while having a quiet meal and drink at the bar counter, as well. With Akira sitting to Natsuru's right side, as the two faced the counter.
Revy also noticed that Melvin was on the far side of the bar counter, taking another customer's order.
Natsuru and Akira turned to Revy, as Natsuru greeted her, “Hi Revy. How are you doing today?”
Revy turned to the two women, as she said, “Fine. How are you two?”
Natsuru answerer, “We are doing well.”
Revy asked, “Where is Ranma? You three are almost never separated.”
Akira stated, “We're not that bad. Though, she and Shenhua wanted to spar a little, right now. And we wanted some lunch.”
Revy commented, “Well, that figures.”
Akira asked, “Any leads on the target?”
Revy answered, “Unfortunately, no. Rock, I, and a few others, are thinking that if no leads turn up, it might be best if we leave in a few days.”
Akira shrugged, as she halfheartedly responded, “Oh well. It was a long shot, anyway. The target likely just sent the message, and then ran, in an attempt to send us on a wild goose chase.”
Revy admitted, “That is possible. Still, I wonder what the message we got a few minutes means?”
Akira inquired, “What message?”
Revy said, “A woman called the front desk, and she left a one word message that means nothing to me, and Rock. Rock went to our room to look it up on the internet. The word is, Tex-Mex.”
Akira and Natsuru's eyes bulged at the word.
Revy noticed this, as she asked, “What is it?”
Akira answered, “It's your lead. We have to get to Rock, and talk to you both about this.”
(_)
Four minutes, after paying for their meals, and leaving a tip, they headed for the elevators, and arrived at the floor of the suite that Revy and Rock were staying at, the three women reached Revy and Rock's room.
Revy used her key to unlock the door. Akira then quietly opened the door, as Revy pocketed her key.
As they entered the suite, they found the lights were off. The curtains were drawn, leaving the main room of the suite almost completely dark, except for the lights coming from the hallway.
They then noticed the one light was coming from on top of the table across the room. The light was from Rock and Revy's laptop, with Rock's silhouette right in front of the laptop monitor.
Akira quickly shut the door to the hallway, as they slowing made their way further into the suite.
As they approached the source of the light, the three women heard Rock make slight moaning sounds.
Due to the light from the laptop, and the angle she was at to them, the three women could see that her right hand was on the mouse attached to the laptop, while her left hand was buried deep between her legs, inside the top, middle part of her pants.
Revy shouted, “Rock!” She continued his a more normal tone of voice, “I thought we agreed we would only do that together.”
Rock immediately froze.
Akira then walked over, by the hallway door, and flipped on the ceiling lights, as Revy approached her lover.
Rock quickly pulled her left hand out of her pants, and began wiping it on the cloth of her left pants legging.
Revy looked down at Rock, as Rock turned to her right, to look at Revy's face.
Revy noted that Rock's face was beat red.
The smell alone told Revy what Rock had been doing.
Revy stated, “Go get yourself cleaned up. We will talk about this, later.”
Just as Rock was about to get up, Revy saw what was on the computer scene, and her eyes widened at the manga style picture she saw. She asked, “Is that me? I have never done that before, but I am now tempted to try.”
Akira walked up beside Revy. She looked down at Rock, as she commented, “Don't feel bad about it. We have all done it before.”
Natsuru was right behind her. She looked at the computer screen, as she complimented, “Nice find Rock. That is one of his better pieces of art.”
Rock turned to Akira and Natsuru, as she inquired, with surprised in her tone of voice, “You two know about this?”
Akira answered, “Yes.”
Natsuru explained, “Actually, this situation is kinda twisted on several levels. Tex-Mex is an alias by the same person that created the Black Lagoon series. As Tex-Mex, he produced pornographic manga. Including, porn about some of the people from the Black Lagoon realities. Especially the babes. As Revy is finding out now. In other words, you have been pleasuring yourself to pictures drawn by your very own creator about your lover, and your friends.”
Rock looked away from the other three adults, and the laptop screen, as she said, with embarrassment, “I think I will take that shower, now.”
Revy looked over at Rock, as she stated, “While you do that, I am calling the girls. This is just too insane not to share.”
Rock begged, “Revy, please leave my indiscretion out of it.”
Revy smiled, as she replied,“Don't worry. I will.”
Revy then looked back at the computer screen. She walked closer to the laptop, as she used the laptop mouse, to look through some of the pictures, and other information that Rock had pulled up, on various windows, on the computer screen.
As Rock headed for the bathroom to take a shower, she overheard Revy state, “Wait a minute. Here is a list of those with breast sizes dealing with me, and the other original girls. And it is translated into english.”
“Okay, I will give Janet her due. She does have a nice pair of breasts. I have seen them first hand, in the nude... Hold on. Eda has bigger breasts than me? By two cup sizes?! Come on! Even Tex-Mex admits right here in the list that I would be pissed when I found that out. So, why did he give me a smaller breast size than her, in the first place?”
Revy thought, 'Well, to be honest, one cup size. The pregnancy did up my cup sizes, on both breasts by one. But, this is still annoying.'
Rock inwardly chuckled at Revy's comment. As she entered the bathroom, and turned on the bathroom lighting, she thought, 'And who says that God does not have a sense of humor. At least now I know my creator does. I found that list a minute ago. I was going to tell Revy about it. But, her finding out this way is much more fun.'
'Still, the one thing I have wisely never talked to Revy about my breasts being larger than hers. They still are, even after I had the breast reduction surgery. This is because I know better than to remind Revy about such things.'
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Rock had finished her shower, and she was wearing a bathrobe, as she sat in a chair, in the bedroom of her suite, as Revy helped her blow dry her hair.
Natsuru was on the phone, talking to those at the check in desk, on information about the phone number used to call in the message.
Meanwhile, they had rounded up the heads of their group to come to their room, and look at what they found.
Those that had arrived were Ranma, Violin, Aeryn, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton.
As each of them looked at the pictures, they had a different response to viewing the pictures.
Ranma flatly commented, “I have seen better drawn nude porn of myself in both forms.”
Shenhua said, “Oh my. Even I didn't know that position was humanly possible. And to see my counterpart do that is a real treat.”
Sawyer blushed, as she said, “I wish I had such good taste in clothing as my counterpart does.”
Lotton asked, “Can I have copies?”
In response to Lotton's comment, Sawyer lightly elbowed Lotton in the left side of her chest.
Violin admitted, “I think I may have seen some of these.”
Aeryn, Violin's wife, warned, “I hope not.”
Violin apologized, “Sorry honey. It was before I remembered who I was. At the time, I was a really horny, teenage fangirl with access to the internet. Though, to be honest, these pictures are tame compared to some of the pictures I have seen when I was a teenager, both times.”
Aeryn said, in a firm tone of voice, “Then, we have much to discuss, later this evening.”
Violin winched, as she replied, “Yes, dear.” Violin then turned to address the group, “Well, it looks like our target is here. Only, I am surprised that our target would yank our chains like this.”
Natsuru said, “We really need to take this guy down.”
Rock questioned, “Are we sure it is a guy? The front desk said it was a woman's voice on the other end of the phone. Could the writer be a woman?”
Revy said, “That is doubtful. No woman is that twisted.” She then noticed the rest of the group was looking at her. Revy quickly added, “At creating fiction.”
Ranma pointed out, “Don't be so sure. Keep in mind that it was a woman that created my series.”
Akira said, “I have been affected longest by our target. My gut says the writer is a guy, not a girl.”
Rock noticed that Natsuru had just gotten off the phone. She asked the blue haired woman, “Any luck on the phone number?”
All eyes turned Natsuru, as Natsuru looked back at the others. Natsuru responded, “The phone number is no good. The number was a cellphone. And from what those at the front desk told me, the caller ID on it meant that it was unregistered.”
Lotton commented, “Untraceable number, and a third party voice. This guy is smooth. If I was back in my old life. And we were not after him. I would consider hiring him.”
The other women frowned at her.
Lotton defended herself, “Think about this, ladies. He originally baited us to come here in the first place. And the moment we talk about pulling up stakes, he baits us, again. For some reason, he wants us close to him. And he wants us to knows that we know he is still here.”
Aeryn said, “But, how did he know we are planning on leaving? From what I understand, we only talked about leaving in the privacy of our room.”
Shenhua agreed, “That is a good point, Aeryn.”
Sawyer suggested, “Could our target be a telepath?”
Violin answered, “No. Trust me on this.”
Inside Violin's soul, Harvey said her, 'That is correct, Violin. I have sense no one trying to deeply scan our mind since we arrived here. And might I add what you and Aeryn did last night was fantastic.'
Violin mentally asked, 'Harvey, cut the small talk for right now. We will discuss such subjects after this meeting is over. So, what about surface scans?'
Harvey mentally stated, 'Well Violin, it is possible for me to not detect a surface scan. But, they would have to be a profession for me to not notice. And our target has no access to such training. So, I can assure you that there are no telepaths after us. It is likely someone overheard us the old fashioned way. Through gossip.'
Violin questioned, towards the group, “Is it possible for one of us to have mentioned to the kids that we were planning on leaving soon? Let's be honest, teenagers are not known to keep secrets. They could have just mentioned it in the bar, and someone overheard them.”
Revy cursed, “Damn. I did say something to our kids that they might think about getting packed. Someone could have put the pieces together from them talking about that in the open.”
Akira commented, “It was an innocent mistake. Anyone could make it. We just have to be more careful.”
Natsuru said, “Girls, look on the bight side. Our target is here. Our target wants us to know he is here. If we are patient, our target might slip up, and reveal himself. Until then, we will continue the search for him.”
Rock complimented, “Good plan.”
The rest of the women just nodded in agreement.
(_)
At that moment across town, Lee was walking down the sidewalk, towards the burger food truck, that Eda and Yolanda ran.
The two blond women had set up the food truck to catch Lee. Though, the two women did not know that Lee was on to them. And instead, he was able to keep his identity secret to them, while enjoying their good cooking.
About fifteen minutes ago, at the Rats Nest, when Lee invited Sam to come eat with him, Sam had decline. Sam told Lee that he did not go with Lee to the burger truck, because he was in the mood for some Italian food.
Though, Sam did wish Lee a good lunch. And Lee did the same.
Though, Sam had gone to the burger food truck with Lee a few times. But, Sam stated that fried american food was not his thing. Lee respected his wishes. With the two men agreeing to meet back up at the Rats Nest in an hour.
Lee turned the corner, on the sidewalk, and was now on the beach sidewalk, right in front of the burger fan.
The food truck itself was standard food truck one would find in a large city. The type of food that parked near construction sight.
In this case, the truck was parked across the street, from the beach. With the truck order window facing the sidewalk, which was twenty feet in depth, before the sidewalk ended in front of store shops and a few homes. The wide sidewalk ran for several blocks along side the two lane beach road, with the only gaps being for the roads that connective to the beach road.
The food truck had an awning that was raised up, over the sidewalk in front of it. The awning revealed the side order window of the truck, and to provide shade for the customers.
There were metal tables, metal chairs. With large umbrellas set up over the tables, to provide shade for those that set in the chairs, at the tables.
The two blond women parked their food truck in same place every day.
They parked there around ten AM and left around six PM.
Lee did not know where Eda and Yolanda took their food truck during the night, nor did he know where they were staying. All Lee was sure about was they were not staying at the Devil's Hotel, with the other women.
And its location was not very far from the Rats Nest, nor Devil's Hotel.
The food truck served a variety of bottled sodas, bottled water, french fries, various potato chips, along with hamburgers and sandwiches of different types.
As Lee approach the food truck, he saw that there was a small line in front of the order window, which Eda was manning the window. With the two blonds taking turns manning the window and cooking the food.
Lee thought, 'Given it is lunch time, I am surprised the line is this short. Not that I am complaining. Still, I have found that Eda and Yolanda's food truck was fairly popular. And no one had gotten sick from eating their food.'
'I know for a fact that the Eda and Yolanda run a first rate operation here. If they ran the Ripoff Church in Roanapur with the level of professionalism, no wonder they were a major players in that badass city.'
'Their food is good, their prices are fair, the service is decent, and they keep their food truck clean on the inside, and outside. They followed very strict hygiene standards in preparing their food. And all it all these things keep me coming back for more of their food. Even though they set this food truck up as a trap to catch me.'
'Still, I am honestly surprised that I have never seen any of Revy's group there... Of course, Revy and Eda's two operations are working in tandem with each other. If Revy's group shows up here, they think they may blow both their cover, and Eda and Yolanda's cover. Oh the irony. They already blew their cover. Not that I care. I am still going to eat here when I feel like it. I will just be careful in what I say to them, when I eat here.'
'On that thought, I have to remember that I don't officially know the names of these two women. Though, I never gave them my name. So, I just have to be careful on that point. If I am not, I will give myself away.'
Lee then quietly stood in the back of the short line, as he waited his turn to make his meal order.
(_)
Meanwhile, on the inside of the order window, Eda manned the cash register at the order window, where she took the orders, and Yolanda did the cooking.
They were both dressed in light brown long skirts, light brown long sleeve button up blouses, and black, flat sole slippers. Also, did not have her shades on. Without her shades on, her customers saw her blue eyes, which gave them a more personal feeling when meeting her, and thus improving their business.
Yolanda had a similar effect on customers, with her blue eyes, when she manned the order window.
While this was not the flashiest clothing there was, neither woman minded the clothing they decided on, because their clothing looked a lot better on them than a nun's habit. And their clothing looked casual enough, that they did not have to immediately change clothes after work. While their clothing still retained enough of a professional look, to work as a restaurant uniform.
With the heater in the van, they were warm. And the long sleeves protected Yolanda's arms as she cooked.
Yolanda wore a hairnet of her should blond hair, when she was cooking. And Eda did the same, over her long blond hair, when she did the cooking, on the few times that Yolanda felt like swapping places.
And both women were fluent in spanish. They both spoke it almost as well as they did english.
Still, Eda was dealing with a problem that day, which was, for lack of a better term, being that she was horny.
As Eda took her current order, in spanish, from the mexican man she was look at, she thought, with annoyance, 'I would kill to a find a decent man in this town that I like. My tastes in latin american, in that way, died a long time ago, after an operation that turn rotten for me.'
'And though I am bi, I am more of the bi, in the way that women are okay women being with other women, but I still prefer to be with a man.'
'And even if I wanted to sleep with someone, it would not be anyone latin american. Neither male, nor female.'
'And it would not be Revy, nor none of her group at the hotel. For a few very important reasons. Including, the fact I actually once did a threesome with Revy and Rock, a few years ago. Never again. I though I was wild in bed. I am not.'
'On the other, Revy is a tigress in bed. And Rock is a close second. Throw in that instant man powder, and given the things we did, it is was a minor miracle that none of us got pregnant from that night. And none of them involved sleep. That night I realized they were too crazy for me, and the rest of their group are crazier than they are.'
'Though, I will never tell her to her face. And even with Yolanda young again, with her right eye restored. When I look at her, I see the old hag she was when I first worked with her. And she told me she doesn't find me that attractive either. She knows me too well.'
'Also, given we are both young, slender, fair skinned, blond babes, some of the fools here have actually mistaken Yolanda and I for sisters. Yolanda find its funny. I find it annoying.'
'Still, I have got to find a man, before I get too desperate. I would settle for a half decent piece of male ass, right now.'
Eda then noticed Lee in line, as she mentally continued, 'There is that guy again.'
Eda took a good hard look at Lee. She licked her lips, as she thought, 'He has a lean body. And he seems to be losing weight. He is decent looking. He is always clean. He has always has been polite to me, and Yolanda. And he tips well. He'll do.'
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee reached the front of the line.
As Lee came to a stop in front of the order window, he looked act Eda. He calmly said, “Good afternoon.”
Eda responded, “Good afternoon to you.”
Lee gave his order, as he stated, “I will have hamburger, french fries, and a bottle of cola”
Eda inquired, “Your usual then?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Eda quickly rang him up, on the cash register. She then looked at him in his eyes, as she asked, “I was wondering. Are you a busy man?”
Lee thought, 'I wonder what she is getting at? Still, I might as well be honest on this one point.' He answered, “Not really. I am more of a laid back person. I try not to stress out from my problems.'” He mentally added, 'That is probably the only reason I am not completely insane, right now.'
While slightly smiling, Eda asked, “Ah, good. I was wondering. If you are not busy, I would to spend some time with you, after I get off work at six?”
Lee mentally realized, 'Is Eda asking me out on a date? I think she is asking me out on a date. Sure, she is almost crazy as the rest, and she is after me. But, she is hot, she is showing interest in me, and I am dying. So, why not? But, I need to get one thing out of the way first.'
Lee stated, “Well, I would love too. But, first I need to know your name?”
Eda replied, “Oh. Well, I am Eda. And my friend in back is, Yolanda.”
Lee complimented, “Those are lovely names. By the way, I am, Lee.”
Eda interrupted him, “Lee? As in the Lee in that car chase a few nights ago?”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. Revy, or one of the others at the hotel must have told her about that. I can use this to my advantage.' He inquired, “Do you know the women at the hotel? I don't see how else you would know my name, in relation to that incident.”
Eda thought, 'Crap. I just gave myself away. Still, there is no point in denying it.' She answered, “Revy was the one that told me. She has a big mouth on such matters.” She mentally added, 'Which is true. Still, anyone crazy enough to drive like that must be at least decent in the sack. I think I will sleep with him.'
Lee thought, 'Good. Now, if I slip in mentioning Revy and the others to her, she will think that she slipped up. Now, for the date offer.' He replied, “Okay. Anyway, I know a good american steak house, nearby.”
Eda thought, 'I have eaten at the place he is talking about. It is good place to go in this town. But, I don't want him to know how much I like that place.' She casually answered, “That will do. Now, what about transportation?”
Lee answered, “I have car.”
Eda responded, “Nice.”
Lee inquired, “So, what time can I pick you up, Eda? I know you are getting off a six. But, I am sure you need a little time to get ready.”
Eda thought, 'And he is patient. Nice.' She said, “You are correct. Meet me here at six thirty.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee then paid for his meal, got his order ticket, he walked over to a nearby empty table, and he waited for his order.
Five minutes later, Eda called, Lee got his meal. He retrieved his meal, thanked Eda, and he walked back to his table, where he ate his lunch.
After Lee finished his lunch, he threw away his bag and trash, in the trash can near the burger van. Lee then walked over to Eda, just as she finished taking the last person's order that was currently in line.
Lee said, “Eda, please let Yolanda know that was a wonder burger and fries.”
Eda turned her head to the back of the food truck, as she stated, “Yo, Yolanda, a man here stated you fixed a good hamburger and fries.”
Lee overheard Yolanda said, in a very unique tone of voice, “Such a polite man.”
If Eda as been looking at Lee, at that moment, she would have noticed him tense up for a split second from Yolanda tone of voice being the same tone as she said, when complimenting someone she had an interest in, from a business sense.
But, Eda did not notice this. And Lee forced himself to relax a second later.
Lee thought, 'That was too close.'
Eda then turned back to Lee, as she said, “See you tonight.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “I won't miss it for the world.”
Lee then turned, and walked away.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Lee made it back to the Rats Nest.
As Lee walked inside, he saw that there were only other two people in the bar.
There was Sam, and the beautiful bartender of the Rats Nest.
Sam was sitting on the long end of the bar counter, that was across from the left side windows.
The bartender was standing behind the bar counter across from Sam. The bartender was drinking a glass of water. There was a half full, bottle of water, that was capped, sitting on the bar counter, which Lee guessed was were she got the water from, for her glass.
As Lee approached them, the two other adults in the room turned to look at him.
Lee continued walking at a casual pace, as he he asked, “So, how were your lunches?”
The bartender answered, “Fine.”
Sam said, “Good.”
Lee came to a stop in front of them, as he thought, 'I might as well give them the good news.'
Lee stated, “Well Sam, I have to apologize to you. At lunch, I just got a date with a hot woman tonight. And I have to get ready for it. And I better start now. So, I am going to have to cancel our usual plans.”
Sam smiled, as he responded, “No problem. Still, please let me know how it goes.”
Lee replied, “I will.”
The bartender took a drink from her glass. She then asked, “So, who do you got a date with, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. Why not I just tell them? It is not like they know who I am talking about.' He answered, “The hot woman with the long blond hair, not the one with the short blond hair, at the american food truck by the beach. She was interested in me. Her name is, Eda.”
The bartender immediately dropped her glass onto the bar counter. The glass did not break, but the water did spill on the counter.
The bartender stated, “A woman that hot is way out of your league.”
Lee could see Sam holding back a snicker.
Lee agreed, “No arguments about that. But, I am still going to give it the good old fashioned college try.”
Sam said, “Good luck.”
The bartender grabbed a rage from under the bar counter. She then began to clean up the water off the counter, as she commented, “For women like that, you are going to need it.”
Lee said, “I know. See you two, later. I have a lot to do to prepare for this date. And not a lot of time to do it in.”
Lee then turned around. He then calmly walked out of the bar, and towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Forty-three minutes later, Lee made it to his hotel suite, in the Devil's Hotel.
Lee shut the door behind him, as he turned on the ceiling light, and headed for the phone, on the nightstand, by the bed. He thought, 'I have a lot to do to get ready tonight, and I have little time to do it in.
When Lee reached the phone, he picked it up, and dialed the number that Pedro had given him.
Three seconds after he dialed the number, the phone rang once, and then someone on the other hand picked up the phone on their end. Lee said, “Hello.”
The man voice on the other end replied in spanish.
Lee responded, “I apologize. I do not speak spanish. I had a poor education as a child. Still, can you please transfer me to Cheif Del Soto's office. Tell him, Lee is calling.”
A few seconds later, Lee heard a, click, on the line, which signaled he was being transferred to Pedro's office.
A second later, Pedro picked up on his end, and Lee recognized Pedro's voice, even though he said something in spanish.
Lee thought, 'It must be a greeting. I hope.' He said, “Hello Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro responded, in english, “Hi Lee. What can I do for you, Lee?”
Lee stated, “I cannot go into the details, yet. But, I will not make are nightly meeting tonight. It is nothing serious. Quite the opposite, in fact. I will swing by your office in the morning, to tell you. So, you don't hear it from someone else.”
Pedro replied, “Sounds interesting. I look forward to finding out what it is, tomorrow. See you then.”
Lee said, “You too.”
Both men then hung up their phones.
Lee then headed back out of his hotel suite, and down to the front parking lot of the hotel.
(_)
Two minutes later, Lee was in the front hotel parking lot.
Less than a minute later, Lee was in his car, and driving out of the parking lot.
The first place Lee went to was a nice men's clothing store that Pedro had told him about.
When Lee got there, he bought some ties, and two nice, but reasonable priced men's business suits, that fit him. The suits came complete with matching short brimmed, fedora hats, with gutter-dent, and side-dented crow, which also fit him.
One suit as gray, the other suit was black.
Lee also bought a nice black leather belt, and couple of sets of socks. Each set of socks was either a solid gray, or a solid black color, that matched the colors of the suits he bought. Along with this, he bought some simple white t-shirts, to go under his white, long sleeved, button up shirts, that came with his new suits.
Unfortunately, it took an hour to find suits that would fit him, He one concern was that he was losing more weight, from the cancer, faster than he had expected. He almost had no stomach, and his rib bones were staring to slightly show.
Also, the suits, and other clothing, together in price, set him back a few hundred dollars. But, Lee felt it was worth it. Lee had been doing well at the poker games, so he had enough money to afford the clothing, without it cutting into his live expenses.
The next place Lee went to was a men's shoe store that Pedro told him about.
There, Lee found some nice black dress shoes that fit him. He bought them for just over half the amount of the cost one of the suits that he had bought. He also brought a rag, big and small shoe brushes, and black shoe polish cream for his shoes. To keep them nice, and prevent the leather of his new shoes from cracking.
Lee then went to was a local grocery store, where he had previous bought snacks and bottles of water and cola at, for his hotel room. When Lee got there, he bought a small box of regular sized condoms.
After Lee got back into his car, Lee put on a few of the condoms into his wallet. As he did so, he thought, 'It never hurts to be prepared.'
Lee then drove his car back to the salon that he went to before, and got the same type of hair cut before, along with them dying his hair black again, to make his hair roots disappear.
Also, he had the barber also do a professional shave of his face. Which gave him a slightly smoother face than when he used his disposable razor.
After which, Lee stopped by a car wash, where he got his new car washed, and polished with wax.
When Lee was finished, he drove back to the hotel.
Lee walked into the lobby, with this large clothing bag in his right hand. He had put everything he had bought into that bag.
As Lee was crossing through the lobby, he ran across Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto, whom were heading for another part of the hotel.
The three sisters stopped and turned to Lee.
Nodoka asked, “What is in the bag, Lee?”
Lee heard Nodoka question. He stopped and turned to the three sisters, as he thought, 'A straight answer, without staying why, might be the best solution to this situation.'
Lee held up the bag in his right hand, as he answered, “Clothing. I was shopping for clothes. Even guys have to do it.” He then dropped the bag back to his side.
Nodoka agreed, “True.”
Lee said, “Have a nice day, ladies.”
Nodoka replied, “You too.”
Lee then walked by the sisters, and to the elevator bay.
Lee soon reached his hotel suite, and he dropped his clothing in his room. He set the suits on hangers, on his room's coat rod. He then put on the ties into his left side jacked pocket, as he thought, 'I hate to ask this, but I need to talk to someone about it. And he is the only person I am sure of that knows how, that I can ask on short notice. Though, it is embarrassing to so.'
Lee left his hotel room.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant. He saw Melvin was behind the bar counter. The other people Lee saw were some customers whom were already eating their meals, at the various tables in the room, away from the bar counter.
Lee thought, 'I don't see any of the girls. And not one is near, Melvin. So, I have some privacy. Though, I better get this out of the way, before of the girls show up.'
Lee walked over to Melvin, as he came to a stop, across the bar counter from Melvin.
Melvin looked over at Lee, from across the bar counter, as he greeted him, “Hi Lee.”
Lee replied, “Hi Melvin. I have a small favor to ask. And since you are not busy. I was wondering if you could help me with something.”
Melvin asked, “What is it?”
Lee said, “Long story short. I have a date tonight.”
Melvin said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Not with one of the women here, I hope.”
Lee quickly responded, “Oh no. No. No. No.” He mentally added, 'Well, yes.' He continued, “A woman I met in town. And as embarrassing as it is to say, I don't know how to tie a tie. And I need someone to show me how.”
Melvin shrugged, as he replied, “Don't feel bad at about it. I will show you how.”
Lee smiled, as he said, “Thanks.”
Melvin inquired, “Do you have a tie on you?”
Lee answered, “Yes. It is in a pocket.”
Melvin replied, “Good. Just follow me into the men's restroom, and I will show you how, using the mirror in there.”
Melvin then turned to his right, and walked towards the front of the bar counter, were the exit to the back side of the counter was. Lee turned to his left, and followed him, from the other side of the bar counter.
When the reached the end of the bar counter, which was open, they then turned to their right, and into the hallway where the restaurant restrooms were located.
They soon entered the men's restroom together.
Ten minutes later, both men exit the men's restroom.
Lee's tie was back in his jacket pocket. He turned to Melvin, as he said, “Thanks.”
Melvin replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee said, “Have a great day.”
Melvin responded, “You too.”
Melvin then headed back to the bar counter, as Lee went in the opposite direction, for the exit to the hotel restaurant, as he headed for the elevator bay across the hotel, and to his hotel room.
A few minutes later, when Lee reached his hotel room. He closed the hallway door to his suite behind him. He then turned on the lights in his suite, and he cleaned up his room, just in case. Next, he took a shower, and got ready for his date that evening.
(_)
An hour later, it was six thirty PM, Eda and Yolanda had already closed up their food truck, and cleaned it up for the night.
Yolanda sat in the driver's seat of the food truck, watching, as Eda stood, as her blond friend stood across the street, waiting for Lee to show up.
Yolanda thought, 'I hope this young man shows up. Because, if he stands up Eda, he is literally going to suffer for it.'
(_)
Across the street, from the food truck, Eda stood in her work clothes, as she waited for Lee to show up.
Eda looked at her wrist watch, and she saw that it was six-thirty PM.
Eda thought, 'Lee has better not have stood me up. Or, he will know the meaning of pain.'
A second later, Eda watched as a car turned onto the beach road, to her left side.
As the car got closed, Eda could see, in the daylight, that it was a pristine classic, pink convertible, with the top down, and side windows lowered.
The car then drove up to a stop, by the curb, beside her, with the passenger side facing her.
Eda looked at the driver, who did not wear a seatbelt, she saw that the driver was man whom clean was shaved. He wore a nice gray business suit, a white button up shirt under his open gray coat, with a brown and black stripped tie, along with a nice gray, short brimmed fedora hat. He even had on some nice shades over his eyes.
It took Eda a few seconds until she realized who it was, as she asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Lee?”
Lee smiled, as he looked up at her. He inquired, in a smooth tone of voice, “Going my way?”
Eda had a dumbfounded look on her face, as she clearly did not expect Lee to return like this, in a car like that.
Eda simply said, “Yea.”
Eda thought, in astonishment, 'I will give Lee credit. He is going all out for me. I love it when a man does that for me. What a minute...'
Eda questioned, “I thought you said you had limited funds. Where did you get the car from?”
Lee answered, “It was a gift. Long story. Don't want to talk about. And your door is unlocked.”
Eda shrugged, as she replied, “I have quite a few of those stories myself.”
Eda opened her door, got in front passenger seat, and shut the door behind her.
Lee looked over at Eda, as she stated, “We should be at the restaurant in a few minutes.”
Eda turned to Lee, as she replied, “Good. I am the mood a streak.” She licked her lips, as she continued to look at Lee, while she thought, 'Among other things.'
Lee saw Eda lick her lips, he smiled, as he turned to look in front of them.
Lee then drove off, with Eda towards the american steak house restaurant
(_)
Yolanda watched all this, as she thought, 'And here I thought that Lee would just show up in a rental car, wearing some casual clothing. Instead, this Lee shows up as a gentleman should for his date. Thoroughness like this needs to be commended. And I honestly thought such manners had become a lost art in the more recent generations. I am happy to see I have been proven wrong.'
'And I will have to ask Eda how her date went, later. Now, to get home, and have a nice, deserved soak in the tub.'
Yolanda then started up her food truck, and headed for the nice home that she and Eda shared.
(_)
When Eda and LEe reached the steak house restaurant, Lee let Eda out at the front of the restaurant. With her side of the car facing the doors.
Eda got out, closed her door, and stood by the front entrance, while Lee parked his car.
As Lee then walked towards Eda, she could see he also had nice gray pants, black leather belt, and nice black dress shoes.
When Lee reached Eda, he asked, “So, where do you want to sit. A booth, or a table?”
Eda answered, “Booth.” She mentally added, 'Because it is more conformable.'
They then walked to the entrance, with Lee holding the right door open for Eda.
Two two adults soon were seated at a booth table, by the wall, with a window.
They sat across from each other, as the waiter brought them there menus.
Lee's right side to the window, while Eda's left side was to the window.
After the waiter left, to give the two adults some time to think about their drink and meal orders, Lee suggested, “Why not you ordered for the both of us. Though please, nothing spicy for me.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she commented, “You really are going all the way on this date, Lee.”
Lee calmly answered, “It is was a gentleman does.”
Eda complimented, “Yes. It is. And I like it. So, where are you from?”
Lee broadly answered, “The southeastern United States. You?”
Eda coyly answered, “Around?”
Lee casually commented, “I guess neither of us are going to answer that question.”
Eda responded, “No. Still, why are you here?”
Lee lied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “The short answer is that I got screwed on my taxes, and I had to get out of the county fast.”
Eda said, “Ouch.”
Lee deadpanned, “Yea. So, why are you here?”
Eda lied, “I always wanted to see if I could run a food operation. I have done just about everything, else.”
Lee complimented, “Well, you are doing a good job of it.”
Eda inquired, “Thank you. Do two nine ounce sirloin cuts, medium cooked, with baked potatoes, sound find with you?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Eda said, “And I think I might have a glass of wine.”
Lee commented, “I think I will have a soda. I am driving after all.”
Eda agreed, “That is a good idea.”
While the two adults continued their conversation, the waiter soon returned, and Eda gave the waiter their drinks and meals orders, for the both of them.
As the waiter left, the two adults continued their discussion.
Their conversation dealt with just casual things, such as the nice weather, and some of the more interesting places they found in De La Plata Podrido.
All the while, both were careful not to reveal their secrets to the other.
When their drinks were served, but before meals were served, their conversation veered towards religion. Which both of them felt was a save topic to discuss.
Lee took a sip of his cold, iced soda, in it's glass. Next, he set his glass gently on the table. He then said, “I only remember a few things of church, as a child. Such as I remember a verse from the bible that went something like that a person had to become like a child to enter heaven.”
Eda asked, “Do you remember anything else about your time in church?”
Lee answered, “I remember, when I was a four year old child, being slashed the back, by another child, with a razor, in church pre-school.”
Lee grimly thought, 'I was effectively stabbed in the back, between my shoulder blades, when I was four years old. The boy did it out of sadist fun. And he was not punished. And the adults assigned to look after us covered up my attack. They got me a new shirt, to match the one I had on, which was cut, and had blood on it.'
'And when I told others about it. I was the one that was punished for being the victim. Because no one believed me. And they accused me of lying about the boy that attacked me.'
Lee forced himself to quickly calm down, as he continued his thoughts, 'But, I better not told about this. Because, I do not want to ruin this date.'
Lee continued, “But, I prefer to talk about more positive things, than my life.”
Eda thought, 'So, he has a few issues with his past, as well. But, he is being polite. So, I will keep this conversation moving forward. And I think I know the verse he is talking about.'
Eda inquired, “I understand. About that bible verse. Do you mean Matthew, eighteen, three? And said. Truly, I say to you, unless you turn and become like children, you will never enter the kingdom of heaven.”
Lee answered, “That is the passage I am talking about. I mean think about it. You have to become like a child to enter heaven. If that is true then heaven is a G rated place. With most fun found while being adults. What a ripoff.”
Eda giggled, as she thought, 'I will give Lee that one. It is a good point.' She stated, “I can see your point.” She mentally added, 'This guy is going all the way with me. And he is polite and intelligent. I had almost forgotten what it was like to have a date with a genuinely nice guy, that treated me like a person, and not just someone they wanted to fuck. I think I will reward him.'
Eda requested, “After we finish here, I wonder if I could join you at your place?”
Lee held back a smile, as he thought, 'She is making her move. Yes!' He calmly answered, “Sure. I am staying at the Devil's Hotel. Third floor. Not much of a view, but the room is clean, and the bed is conformable.”
Eda thought, 'That is all I need. What a minute, Revy and the girls are staying there. If they see us, they will ruin this night for me. Fortunately, I can ask Lee about Revy, because I told him that we know each other.'
Eda inquired, “Lee, isn't the Revy, and her group, staying at the Devil's Hotel, as well. I think it might be best if we avoid them, as we head for your room.”
Lee though, 'Yes. I bet that you, Eda, are thinking the same thing as I. That Revy and her friends would ruin this for the both of us. But, not to worry. I have a plan.'
Lee stated, “Not a problem. By the time we get finished with our meal, and back there, they will all likely be in the Hotel restaurant, usually singing karaoke, getting drunk, until late at night.”
Eda suppressed a laugh, as she said, “That I would like to see... Though, that is for another time.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. It is something else to watch. Especially, after they have had a few drinks. I and a friend, watch them perform as our evenings entertainment.”
Eda wondered, as she inquired, “Do they get violent?”
Lee answered, “No. From what I understand, the bartender there got things under control with them on their first night here.”
Lee thought, 'I got a laugh out of that, when Melvin told me about that night, in private, when it was just the two of us in the bar, at midnight. Though, he did leave out where Revy, her friends, and himself, were from. Not that I minded. Since, I already knew that.'
Eda thought, 'I will have to ask Revy about that.' She commented, with admiration in her tone of voice, “Some bartender.”
Lee replied, “Yea. And he is a nice guy, as well.” He mentally added, 'And you would probably fall over laughing if you knew Melvin was former Hotel Moscow. But, if I did that, I would out myself, and Melvin. Besides, he is in hiding too. And he is a nice guy. So nice, that he taught me how to tie a tie.'
Eda said, “It is good having nice people around. I sometimes forget such people even exist.”
Lee though, 'You are not the only one.' He agreed, “Yes. It is nice.”
The waiter then served their cooked steaks, and baked potatoes, with condiments before both.
Eda and Lee both found their food to be well prepared, and tasty.
Lee and Eda then continued their conversation as they ate. With their conversation remaining casual and pleasant during dinner.
Eda only drank two glasses of wine during the dinner. And with her enhanced metabolism, she was still sober.
When they were finished, Lee paid for the meal, tipped the waiter, asked the waiter to compliment the cook, and he then drove Eda back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
By the time they reached the Devil's Hotel, it was dark.
After parking the car, Eda and Lee made it to the front entrance of the Devil's Hotel.
Lee held the door for Eda twice, an outside door, and then the interior door between the entryway, and the lobby.
As they entered the lobby, both of them saw that there was no one in the lobby.
It was then, that both adults noticed that the music for the lobby had changed.
Both adult immediately recognized the song.
Lee thought, 'I have to admit, this lobby has great taste in music. I could not think of a more fitting song for a situation like this.'
Eda asked, “What is with the music?”
Lee answered, “I am not sure myself. Let's just enjoy the song.”
Eda replied, “Okay.”
Lee said, “This way to the elevators.”
Lee lead Eda to elevators, as the lobby continued playing the song, She's A Lady, sung by Tom Jones.
(_)
A minute later, they were on the third floor.
As they made it to the door to Lee's suite, Lee pulled out his keys, unlocked the door, and opened it for Eda.
Eda stepped into the darken room. Though, the light from the hallway provided enough illumination to see the room.
Lee then step into the room, and turned on the ceiling light.
Eda saw that while the hotel suite was small, it was clean, with the heavy curtains on the other side of the bedroom, being closed. There was also a pair of tennis shoes place against the curtains.
Eda thought, 'Lee kept his word on this place being clean.' She came to a stop, by the chest of drawers.
Lee walked passed Eda and turned on the lamp light. He then walked back over to Eda, and he closed the door, as he turned off the ceiling light.
After making sure the door's deadbolt was locked. he then walked over to Eda, him being in arms reach of the chest of drawers, which was to his right side.
Eda and Lee stood a few feet, with Eda turning around to face Lee.
Due to their height differences, Eda had to look up, and Lee had to look down, for them to look at each other's face.
Lee casually said, “It is not much, but it is home for me.”
Eda smiled. She took a step closer to the taller man, as she said, “This will do.”
Their faces were inches apart, as Lee kept a calm expression, while he casually asked, “So, how do you want to do this?
Eda replied, “Let's keep it simple?”
Lee grinned, as he said, “That works for me. Mind if I use a condom?”
Eda answered, “I would prefer if you did.”
Lee requested, “And I would like to keep my shirt on.” He mentally, 'Because I don't want you to see how skinny I have become. Which would cause you to ask questions.'
Eda stated, “I don't care. It is what below the waist that I am interested in.” She then gently used her right hand to cup Lee's crotch.
Lee smile got slightly wider, while he thought, 'This is going to be so much fun.'
As Lee continued to look Eda in her eyes, he used his right hand to open the top chest of drawers by him. He then pulled out a single condom. Next, he used the back of his left hand to push the drawer closed. After which, he tossed condom onto the bed, without even looking.
Both adults then began slowly dressing each other.
Eda began by taking off Lee's hat, glasses, and tie, and tossing them to the floor, away from them, and towards the back of the bedroom.
Meanwhile, Lee carefully undid Eda's skirt.
A few minutes later, they were down to their their underwear, with Eda still having her bra on, and Lee having his white t-shirt on.
Lee tried to undo the back hooks to Eda's bra, without looking luck. After a few seconds of trying, he softly said, “I apologize, but I cannot unhook your bra.”
Eda responded, “It is okay.” She then reached behind her back with her right hand and unhooked her own bra.
Eda then took off her bra, let it drop to the floor, allowing Lee to see Eda breasts.
Lee just quietly stared at Eda's breasts for a few seconds.
Eda casually joke, “Never scene breasts before?”
Lee complimented, “Nah. I'm just admiring the fine pair you have.”
Eda giggled, as she thought, 'Now, that is a comeback.' She then said, “Now, let's get this party started.” She then took off her panties.
Lee agreed, “Yes. Let's.” He then took of his underwear.
The two adults then walked over, and fell over, onto their sides, on top of the bed.
Lee was on the right side of the bed. With Eda on the left side.
Lee then leaned on his back, as used his left hand to feel, and find the condom he had tossed onto the bed, as he used his right hand to reach over and turned off the lamp light, causing the room to be shrouded in darkness.
Lee then had one of the best nights of his life.
(_)
The next morning, Lee was the first to wake up, as he made gently made his way off his bed, without waking Eda. He saw that from the digital LED clock on the nightstand, that it was nine AM.
Lee also saw that there was enough ambient sunlight coming from around the heavy curtains, that he clearly see his way around his bedroom.
Lee then softly walked over to his chest of drawers, and he quietly slid open the drawers to pull together a set of clothes. Once he had what he needed, along with his blue cloth jacket, large glasses, and blue baseball cap, and tennis shoes, from the floor, he checked the bed to find that Eda was still asleep. He then quietly closed the drawers, and walked to his bathroom, with his clothes in hand, to get cleaned up, shave, and take a shower.
When he got into the bathroom, he gently shut the door, while twisting the knob, and slowly releasing the knob after he closed the door, so closing the door would not make a sound. He then switched on a light, locked the door, and did a little dance. Though, Lee danced softly on his feet.
Lee danced, as he wildly smiled. He thought, 'I just slept with a hot blond. That is a feather in any man's cap. Even though it is Eda. But, who cares? Still, if she finds out the truth about me, she is going to kill me. And after last night, likely, she will do so in painfully manner. Still, there is no identification in my room. So, if she does search it, she will find nothing. Now, to get a cleaned up and dressed.'
Half and hour later, after Lee, among other things, shaved, shower, dried off, comb his hair, and dressed, he exited the bathroom.
When he quietly opened the bathroom door, and walked into the bedroom of the suite, he found the lamp light was on.
Lee walked futher into the room, where he could fully see the bed. He came to a stop, and he turned to see that Eda was awake, and she was sitting up in bed, while not doing anything to cover her upper body from Lee's view.
Lee said, in a polite tone of voice, “Good morning.”
Eda stretched her arms, as she replied, “Morning.” She then turned to look at Lee.
Lee said, “I hope you had as good time last night as I did.”
Eda started to let him down easily, “It was okay, but...”
Lee interrupted her, “But, this is a one night stand, and you are not looking for a long term relationship. That is okay. I am not looking for a long term commitment, either. But, I would like to remain your friend.”
Eda smiled, as she commented, “Sure. And I am glad we are on the same page.”
Lee suggested, “Yes. That is nice. Now, you don't have to join me, but I am going to head to the Last Resort Diner for some breakfast. I would be more than happy for you to join me. But, as a friend. And not as a date.”
Eda look at the clock on the nightstand, by the bed. She turned back to Lee, as she stated, “Tempting. But, I don't have time. I have to be at work in an hour. Yolanda can be a real slave driver.”
Lee offered, “I can drive you.”
Eda replied, “Nah. I will just call Yolanda to come pick me up.”
Lee said, “Okay, Eda. I am heading downstairs. Get what you need done, and I will see you, later.”
Eda replied, “You too, Lee.”
Lee then walked to the door to the hallway. He undid the deadbolt, opened the door the hotel hallway, from the his suite, and exited his room, with him gently closing the door behind him.
(_)
A minute and a half later, Lee exited an elevator into the lobby, he found, from the reflection on the polish metal control panel on the elevator, that he had a smirk on his face that, no matter how good his poker face skills, he was currently unable to remove.
Lee thought, 'I guess that cliche is true. I cannot hide what I did. Still, either way, this is going to be a fun day.'
Lee continued smiling, as he walked into the lobby. He looked around, and he saw Sam sitting in a chair.
Lee thought, 'It is a bit early for me to meet him. On most morning, I am usually the first one here, and him coming to meet me here. But, I did say I would talk to him about the date.'
Lee then walked over to Sam, and sat in the chair, across a small table, from where Sam was sitting at.
Lee said to the bearded man with a ponytail, “Good morning.”
Sam looked up at Lee, as he responded, “Morning.” He then noticed Lee's smile. He accused, “You slept with someone? Didn't you? It was her? Wasn't it?”
Lee smile became a little wider, as he happily commented, “And it was good.”
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he replied, “Nice.”
Meanwhile, Revy and Rock were walking by and over heard Sam's accusation, and Lee admission.
The two women came to a stop, with the to men noticing them. With the four adults turning to look at each other.
Before Lee could respond, Revy turned to Lee. She grinned wickedly, as she requested, “So Lee, who is the lucky girl?”
While still smiling, Lee looked up at Revy, as he calmly stated, “A gentleman does not talk about such indiscretions.”
Just then Eda was trying to walk by them, while being unnoticed. She was wearing her clothing from last night, which was a bit wrinkled.
Lee noticed her, as he thought, 'Damn. She can get ready real fast. It must be her military training.'
Rock noticed Eda. She turned her head in the direction of the long haired blond, as she asked, “Eda, what are you doing here?”
Suddenly, all eyes among the four other adults turned to look at Eda.
Revy looked as her, then back at Lee, whose smile had gotten wider, then back at her, as she exclaimed, while pointed with her right hand, at Lee, “Him?!”
At the same time, Sam used his right hand to point at Eda, while inquiring, “Her?! You got good taste, man.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he replied, “Thanks.”
Rock just said, “Huh?” That the sheer improbability of those two very different adults hooking up was too much for her to imagine.
Lee thought, with mischievous, 'Now to stir the pot. And I cannot help myself, in this situation. It is just too tempting. Among other things, I used writing to keep my mischievous side under control. Without writing, I have to find a different outlet. Also, this will allow me get them to admit some more information on themselves, out into the open.'
Revy said, to Eda, “How could you, with him?”
Lee turned to Eda and Revy, as he innocently asked, “Eda, Revy, how well do you know each other?”
Eda turned to Lee, as she stated, “Very well.”
Eda thought, 'At this point, there is no point in denying it.' Eda turned to Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I am going to have to do some damage control.'
Eda said, “Revy, this was just a one night stand. Nothing more.”
Revy said, “Okay. Still, this is just too juicy to keep to ourselves.”
Eda warned, “You wouldn't dare.”
Revy teased, “Try me.”
Their conversation quickly devolved into an argument.
As Rock, Lee, and Sam watched Revy and Eda argue, Lee suggested, “It looks like those two are going to be... talking for a while. I am heading to the Last Resort Diner. I don't want to be here when Revy tells the others about Eda and my fun last night.”
Sam agreed, “That is a wise idea.”
Rock said, “I agree. I am going to the breakfast buffet.”
Sam replied, “Same here.” He turned to Lee, as he continued, “See you later, Lee”
Lee turned to Sam, as he responded, “See you two later, as well. And have a nice breakfast.”
Rock looked over at Lee, as she replied, “You too.”
Sam and Lee got up from their chairs. Sam went with Rock to the hotel restaurant, while Lee walked towards the front entrance of the lobby, to the parking lot, and his car.
(_)
After Lee got into his car, he drove to the Last Resort Diner for some breakfast.
As soon as Lee entered the diner, Lori, Mary, and George, all asked him why he was still grinning. Lee refused to answer. He only said that it was a personal matter.
Lee then spent half an hour, getting some breakfast, at the Last Resort Diner. When Lee was done, he thanked the cook, paid the bill, and left a tip. After which, Lee heading outside of the diner, and get into his car.
Next, Lee drove to the Police Station of De La Plata Podrido. He parked his car in a parking lot, across the from the front of the police station. He then raised the top of the vehicle, raised the windows, and locked the car.
By then, Lee noticed in the mirrors of the car, that he finally dropped his grinning.
After looking both ways on the two lane street, Lee walked across the street, and into the police station.
A few minutes later, Lee was inside the police station, and being escorted, by an officer, into Chief Del Soto's office.
As Lee entered the Pedro's office, Pedro looked up at Lee, while sitting in his office chair, behind his desk. He greeted, Lee, in english, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee responded, “Good morning, Chief Del Soto.”
The officer then left.
As soon as the officer was out of earshot, Pedro inquired, “So, are you going to tell me what happened yesterday?”
Lee gently shut the door to Pedro's office.
Pedro saw a grin curl on Lee's lips, as he walked over and sat down on the chair to Pedro's right.
After Lee sat down, Pedro guessed, “You had a date last night?”
Lee got comfortable in the chair. He then turned to Pedro, as he answered, “Yes. I had a date last night.”
Pedro asked, “With who?” He mentally added, 'He could be crazy enough to have dated one of those girls.'
Lee stated, “Eda. Yes. That Eda. And after dinner, we went back to my place, and slept together.”
Pedro thought, with a mild of shock and amusement, 'Lee is that crazy.' He asked, “What happened? And I am not talking after you turned off the lights.”
Lee said, “Yesterday, I went to the food truck, and out of the blue Eda asked me out on a date. I guess she was horny, and she didn't feel like sleeping with a hispanic person. No offense.”
Pedro replied, “None taken. Please, continue.”
Lee went onto say, “And after our dinner date, ended up in my hotel suite, having a one night stand. And the girls found out this morning.”
Pedro stated, “It is tempting to berate you for doing this. But, I am not going to. Eda is hot, and she is one of the saner women of that group. Though, she is just as dangerous as the rest. But, she is mostly sane.”
Lee commented, “I know. And I wasn't going to complain about her asking me out. Not to sound cliche, but the look she was giving me when she asked, she was clearly in need of a man. She clearly wasn't interested in latin american men. And though she is bi, she wasn't in the mood for a woman. If she had been, she would have likely contacted one of her friends at the hotel.”
“Also, let's be honest. How do you say, no, to a hot, physically young, long haired, blond woman who asked you out on a date, without raising suspicion from someone? Especially, given it was the woman whom requested the date in the first place?”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he inquired, “Point taken. So, how good was it?”
Lee answered, “Sorry to say. But, I don't have enough experience in that area to truly rate the experience. But, it was good.”
Pedro asked, “Anything weird?”
Lee replied, “Besides having sex with a hot blond woman from a fictional reality? Nope. Just straight heterosexual intercourse, and kissing. And I did use a condom.”
Pedro complimented, “It was smart thinking one using a condom. You don't know where she has been.”
Lee said, “I agree. She is hot, but I know she has been around.”
Pedro commented, “And it is interesting that she just wanted straight forward sex with you. I always thought she might have been one of the more kinkier ones.”
Lee explained, “I doubt that she is that kinky. Think about it. Most of the time, in the series, she was undercover. Yet. Sometimes she took off that nuns habit, to blow off stream, and act immature. And when she did so, she was always straight forward.”
“She teased Revy and Rock, but she did so directly. And when Eda was like that, it was a case of, what you see it what you get. I honestly think, when she was in her street clothing, that personality is her real personality. You can see this went things start to not go her way. She starts acting more immature. That is a sign of her mask starting to slip. Though, she can be deadly professional when she wants to.”
Pedro replied, “I see where you are going.”
Pedro thought, 'And I am thinking you might be the same way as Eda. I am starting to wonder which one of you two morally screwed the other last night. Eda may have wanted it, but clearly so did you.'
'And Eda was from a point of view that she was undercover and having a cheap thrill. You on the other hand were of the point of view that, you were hiding and one of those hunting you, whom did not know you were the one she was hunting, showed interest in you.'
'And you must have got a thrill from screwing one of the women that were hunting you. I need more details.'
Pedro inquired, “So, what are the details of the date itself?”
Lee thought, 'I will leave out a few of the details. But, the rest of the details are fine.'
Lee answered, “Well yesterday afternoon, after Eda and I settled on the details of our date, I went to some of the places you recommended. I bought some nice clothing, a suit, hat, and shoes. I went to the salon, which had a barber, where I got a haircut and professional shave.”
Pedro complimented, “Nice touch with the shave. Some men forget that detail. And it pays to do some things done, beforehand. Also, let me guess. You picked her up in my brother's pink Cadillac?”
Lee happily answered, “Yes. I could not think of a more fitting situation in using that car.”
Pedro smiled, as he replied, “Oh, I fully agree. So, what happened next?”
Lee stated, “I took her to an american steak house on the island. We talked. Casual stuff. Then, after dinner, I took her to the Devil's Hotel.”
Pedro asked, “Did any of the other women see you last night?”
Lee stated, “No. By about six twenty PM they all head for the hotel bar for supper, and entertainment, in the form of drinking and karaoke. They also did not see me leave in my nice suit, nor coming back with Eda.”
Pedro inquired, “So, how did they find out? You said they found out earlier this morning.”
Lee said, “Even with my poker face, I could not hide my smirk, this morning. I get to the hotel lobby, and Sam realized I slept with someone. Rock and Revy were walking by, and they overheard him. Then, Eda comes down to the hotel lobby, and walks by us, with the three of them putting two and two together.”
Pedro commented, “Don't feel bad. You would have to be without emotion to not have a smile after something like that happening to you. So, do you plan to do this again?”
Lee answered, “Nope. I know how thinking below the waist can get a person in trouble. I have seen it happen first hand, to both men and women, whom I personally know.”
Pedro responded, “Good. That will save us both a lot of grieve. And if you get lonely, I know some decent whorehouses in town. Where the women there are regularly tested for STDs and their prices are decent. And they have a policy of using condoms, and not just for the male customers, but female customers as well. Those women are really on top of things, in so many ways.”
Lee said, “Coming from the Chief of Police, that is a high compliment.” He thought, 'I must really be in the Twilight Zone, when the police chief is recommending whore houses to me.'
Pedro grinned wickedly, as he stated, “I know.”
Lee commented, “You know. This is wonderful alibi for me not being the writer. Because, no one would think that someone would sleep with such a woman as Eda, while knowing who she is, and how dangerous she is, beforehand. Let alone the person that said woman and her friends are hunting. They would think no one would be that crazy.”
Pedro stated, “More like you being crazy as a fox. And you are probably right about that being crazy enough to work. Speaking of which. You know. Even though that was a one night stand. A man would have to be crazy to want to date a violent, crazy chick.”
Lee agreed, “True. Among said men, I wonder who would be the craziest in that category?”
Both men were silent for a few seconds. They then looked at each other. Each of them saw realization dawn in the others eyes. They both grinned wickedly, as they stated, in unison, “Garcia.”
Pedro said, “Yea. Garcia saw Roberta at her worst, most insane, and he still went for the kiss.”
Lee pointed out, “Well, it worked. And he snapped her out of her madness.”
Pedro agreed, “True. And for a series like that, that was real gamble. She could have just as well as killed him. She had just shot him.”
Lee said, “Yea. And I made sure in my stories, Garcia fully recovered for those wounds. Still, even after being shot, he went for the kiss. That takes guts, and courage.”
Pedro commented, “I agree. I hope that you making sure Garcia recovered, in your stories, helps keep you off of the maids shit list.”
Lee stated, “I do too. And it is a good sign that they are no here. And long before they came after me. This was one of the reasons I both like writing about those characters, and I was so careful in doing so. They don't play by the, good versus evil, rule book. They play by their own rules.”
Pedro replied, “Exactly. And that is something we should never forget.”
Lee inquired, “Quite right. So, I take it we won't be meeting tonight?”
Pedro answered, “No. This, meeting, this morning, will count for that. We will start back on our usual schedule tomorrow night, at seven PM, at the Last Resort Diner.”
Lee replied, “That works for me.”
Lee and Pedro then continued talking about a few subjects for the next ten minutes. When they were finished, Lee left Pedro's office, exited the police station, and walked across the street to the parking lot that had his car in it.
When Lee got to the parking lot, he got into his car, and drove back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Ten minutes later, at the Devil's Hotel, it was ten twenty AM.
Inside their one bed suite, in the Devil's Hotel, Violin and Aeryn were talking about what they had learned that morning.
Violin sat on their large bed, facing her wife.
Aeryn sat in a chair, by the table in the room, as she faced her spouse.
Aeryn said, with disbelief in her tone of voice, “I cannot believe Eda would sleep with Lee.”
Violin casually commented, “As they say. Any port in the storm. I guess with this event, we can eliminate Lee being the writer. The writer would never sleep with one of us. Especially, with the writer knowing we are after him. No one is that crazy. No even me.”
Aeryn shrugged, as she responded, with a bit of skepticism in her tone of voice, “Perhaps. But, I am still pissed off at the writer for killing you in the first place, and then reincarnating you in a girl that looks half my age.”
Violin quipped, “At least I look old enough to drink. And I am still the same person, upstairs.”
Aeryn stated, “Which is the only reason I am doing this Rock's way, and not mine.”
Violin inquired, “Honey, I am glad you listened to reason. Still, did you ever finish reading the epilogue of that forth story?”
Aeryn answered, “Yes. Barely. It was painful reading the fourth part of that story.”
Violin said, “Think about it from my point of view. I lived it, and then I read it. Granted. I can see the logic the writer pointed out at the end of the story. The scary thing is I am sure that Scorpy was probably already cooking up a plan to extended my lifespan in some way, long before the writer wrote that story. Because, the reasons the writer gave for keeping me alive by killing me, as crazy as that sounds, is clearly right up Scorpy's alley.”
Aeryn conceded, “You are right about that. Still, that does not excuse the writer from causing you and Scorpius to have sex together. Be happy that I am chalking that up to mind control of both you, and Scorpius. But, what really upset me is that you did not tell me of that event. And I found out from someone else.”
Violin admitted, “Okay. I should have told you. But, I couldn't figure out how to. Though, as a woman, Scorpy is hot. But, not as hot as you, Aeryn.”
Aeryn cracked a smile, at her lover's compliment. She teased, “How would you rate yourself to her?...” Aeryn's smile turned positively wicked, as she continued, “And to me?”
Violin flatly replied, “Not going there. Those types of questions never lead to good things.” She then continued, in a warmer tone of voice, “And I will still say you are me beautiful than me.”
Aeryn smiled turned warm, as she happily replied, “Thank you.”
Violin mentioned, “Still, the sex with Scorpy was that good. She is a genius in all areas.”
Aeryn responded, “And that is what scares me about her. The writer removed Scorpius' limitations. And that worries me greatly.”
Violin counter, “But, Scorpy is in a better mood. The writer seemed to tone down her anger. And she hasn't come after us.”
Aeryn pointed out, “Yes. But, we have to had to have a long talk to her about that hyperspace gate technology she tricked us into thinking was destroyed. And to convince her we knew what she did, we had to show her the stories.”
Violin said, “You got to admit, she took the news well. Actually, I think she is happy how she turned out. She is healthy, free of her Scarran heritage, and leader of the Peacekeepers. Hell, I think she would thank the writer for all he has done for her.”
Aeryn stated, with concern in her tone of voice, “While, I agree with you. She is probably happy about what happened. When she did learn about the stories, she laughed like a lunatic for a solid minute.”
Violin explained, “That is only because she saw the humor of the situation. She covered every base imaginable. She planned for every single contingency. She is dangerously genre savvy. And still, she had no way to prevent us from learning of her plans that way. Though, let's be happy she scaled back that technology research for the time being.”
Aeryn admitted, “Yes. For the moment. Though, I find it hilarious what happened to Braca, or should I say Meka.”
Violin responded, “Yes. And that rescue mission was an epic failure. I think the writer was trying to see how many ways a rescue mission could be screwed up without actually anyone being killed.”
Aeryn replied, “I think so. Though, on another note, are you really that tempted, concerning Dargo's tongue?”
Violin accused, “Like you haven't thought about it.”
Aeryn shrugged, as she admitted, “True.”
Violin pointed out, “Still, I saved the galaxy by doing what I did. As Dargo once said, I had to take one for the team. And that wasn't the first time that happened to me.”
Aeryn flatly replied, “I know.”
Violin said, “And look on the bright side. Our son still loves, and accepts me. My lifespan has increased incredibly. And you no longer had to worry about breaking me in bed.”
Aeryn conceded, “True. Still, the fact he gave you back Harvey, I find annoying.”
Violin commented, “This Harvey has changed. He has shown me a lot about my pass lives. I have learned a lot. Such as what I did with you last night. I have never heard you scream that passionately before.”
Aeryn blushed, as she looked away from Violin, with a slight smile on her lips. She then dropped her smiled, as she turned back to Violin. She decided to change the subject, as she stated, “Now, we can still make sure that Lee is not the writer, by testing him with the plan we came up with to flush the writer out.”
Violin said, “Okay. I could use some entertainment. Now, let's get downstairs. Any minute now, Lee will come back here to meet with Sam. We can probably still catch them, before they leave for the morning.”
The married spouses then stood up, briskly exited their hotel suite, and they headed for the elevator bay, down the hallway of their floor.
(_)
At that moment, after Lee parked his car in the hotel parking lot, he walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, from the outside entrance.
Lee came to a stop, and looked around the lobby, for Sam, he thought, 'That meeting with Chief Del Soto went well. And I don't have to talk to him, until tomorrow night. Now, to find out how much damage control, from the girls finding out that I slept with Eda, that I have to do. Along with finding out where Sam is the key to getting these answers. He did go to breakfast in the hotel restaurant, at the same time Rock did. So, he likely overheard some of what the women said on the matter. Now, where is, Sam?'
Lee look around, and he soon saw Sam sitting in a chair to his right side, waiting for him. Lee saw that Sam was facing towards him, as Sam look at him.
Lee thought, 'There he is.' He then walked up to Sam
As Sam saw him Lee approach him, he stood up. Next, he turned to face Lee.
As Lee came to a stop, a six feet in front of Sam, Lee asked, “So, how did they react?”
Sam answered, “Mostly surprise. Some of them were indifferent. I think you are in the clear.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That should save me a lot of trouble for today.' He said, “That is a relief. Did Eda make it out of here, fine?”
Sam stated, “Yea. I overheard Revy tell Rock that Eda's friend, Yolanda, picked her up from the front entrance, in a car, a few minutes after you left.”
Lee thought, 'So, she called Yolanda from my room. And the two of them also have other transportation, besides that food van. That makes sense.'
Lee inquired, “So, I take it that Revy was the one to tell everyone here?
Sam lightly chuckled. He smiled, as he commented, “Yes. While she was inside the hotel bar, she said what happened, quite loudly. And I might add, while you are in clear, I can say that you are likely going to be the talk of the hotel for a next few days.”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, “I have handled worse gossip before. Let's head for the Rats Nest and tell the bartender there, before word gets to her.”
Sam replied, “Okay.”
(_)
Nearby, Aeryn and Violin had exited the elevator bay, and into the lobby.
Violin saw the Sam and Lee, first.
Violin used her right hand to point at the two men, as she said, “There they are.” She then dropped her right hand to her side.
Aeryn turned in the directions of the front doors to the lobby, to see that Lee and Sam were just started walking towards the lobby exit. She stated, “Good. Let's go get them.”
(_)
As Lee and Sam came within a few steps of the front doors, they heard a woman's voice, from behind, and to their left, say, “Lee, Sam, hold up a minute.”
Both men stopped, as they turned around, to their left, to see Violin and Aeryn walking towards them.
Lee thought, 'Now, what?'
After the two women stopped in front of the two men, Lee smiled, as he politely said, “Good morning, ladies. What can I do for you?”
Violin stated, “Well, we wanted to invite you two to watch some videos we were going to have shown the hotel theater play. We specifically would like you to come with us, Lee. But, we wouldn't mind you coming as well, Sam.”
Violin thought, 'To birds with one stone approach is not a bad idea. If Lee is not the writer. Sam might be. Either way, with both of them there, it will help cut down the time in finding out if either of them is the writer, or not.'
Lee mentally wondered, 'Which videos?' Lee inquired, “Okay. When? And which videos?”
Violin commented, “Right now. And I would like you to watch three anime OVAs. The first three episodes of a OVA anime series titled, Bubblegum Crisis.”
Lee did not show any outward expression, as he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. They are testing me. I wrote about the Bubblegum Crisis reality. And given what I did to the characters in that series, I hope they never find out about my stories. Because what they would do to me, if they caught me, might be worse than what these women would do to me, if they catch me.'
'And I guess my plan I came up with this morning, dealing with sleeping with Eda, has backfired. I am crazy as a fox. Such as, crazy as a fox, caught in the hen house.'
'Given the situation, I cannot say, no, to them, without causing more problems for me. Also, I can make this work for me. I just have to play along, and be careful. Though, Aeryn is good at spotting liars. I just have to not actually lie to her. That is not hard to do. One just has to be a little tricky in how one speaks.'
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Aeryn stated, with a hint of force in her tone of voice, “Good. As Violin said. We would like you to come with us.”
Lee thought, 'I see that Aeryn is still suspicious of me. She always has been a good judge of character. But, given Violin demeanor, she is probably borderline. John never could keep up a good poker face, for long. And it appears that neither can Violin. As long as I convince one of them, the other will go along with their spouse. But, I could use some back up.'
Lee turned to Sam, as he requested, “Sam? You want to come with us?”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he responded, “No. I am not interested. Anyway, I got some things I would like to do today, that I need to do alone. So, I will see you tomorrow morning, Lee. Here, in the hotel lobby, at the usual time.”
Violin thought, 'Oh well. Lee was the primary target, anyway. We will check on Sam, later.'
Lee thought, 'Damn. But, there is nothing I can do about this, now.' He said, “Okay. See you later, Sam.”
Sam replied, “You to Lee.”
Lee then turned back to face the women, as he requested, “Lead the way, ladies.”
Sam then headed in one direction of the three adults, as he watched Lee, Aeryn, and Violin headed in another direction, further into the hotel.
When the three adults entered a hallway, on the left side of the lobby, and they walked out of sight, Sam turned around, and exited the front doors of the hotel lobby, and into the hotel parking lot.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee, Violin, and Aeryn made it to the Devil's Hotel theater room.
While Lee had been in the theater a few times. This was the first time he went into the theater, with someone besides Sam.
Lee even requested a few movies to watch. Though, even before Revy and her group had come to Devil's Hotel, Lee was careful only to ask for action movies, in case there was a record of requests. With those after him possibly looking into those records, for hints on who the writer was.
After Aeryn, Violin, and then Lee walked inside the room, Lee saw that the theater room inside the Devil's Hotel was fairly small. The door to the room was located in the middle of the back wall. It was a simple, wooden door that swung inwardly.
There were canned ceiling lights that illuminated the room.
There was an electric clock, mounted on the back wall, to the right of the door, when looking at the door, from inside of the room.
The theater was a classic, movie theater projection system, with the projector at a second story, above and behind the seating area.
There were speakers on the top of the walls, in the corners. There was also a speaker on each of the side walls, in the top middle of the side walls. With the room having six speakers in all.
The seating room sloped down, at a forty degree angle. There were fifty seat in all.
These seat were divided into five, ten seat, rows, going down.
Each seats was a simple, slightly large, cushioned, slightly reclined, straight back chairs, that did not slope with the room, but was parallel with the floors outside the room.
There was plenty of leg room between the rows of seats.
There were three pathway down to the rows of seating. Two of the sides of the room, and the middle, device the each ten row seats into five row seats.
Lee noted that there were only three people in the room. Violin, Aeryn, and himself.
As Lee sat down, he found himself seated on the four to back row, in the middle of right side set of seats. The women sat beside him. To his right side was Aeryn. And Violin was to his left side.
Lee thought, 'They really are going to try to flush me out, not just by my words, but by watching my facial reactions. Two, or in this case, three can play at this game.'
Lee asked, “So, when will these videos start?”
Violin answered, “According to the clock on the wall, any minute now. So Lee, what do you know of anime?”
Lee thought, 'Talk about hitting the ground running.' He lied, “Not much. So, what can I expect from this this series?”
Violin answered, “Babes in powerarmor fighting killing machines.”
Lee thought, 'Now, let us see if we can get your fangirl side to distract you and your wife.' Lee commented, “So, basically a female ironman group, versus terminators?”
Violin answered, “Something like that. So, you are a comic book and sci-fi fan?”
Lee lied again, “More of action movie fan. I must say the Ironman movies, and the Avenger movie, starting Robert Downey Junior, are very good action movies.”
Violin inquired, while barely hiding her excitement in her voice, “They made a live action Ironman movie, and an Avengers movie?”
Lee thought, 'And there we have Violin's fangirl side show. I don't want to come out to much. Just enough to distract her.' He stated, “Yes. Three Ironman movies so far, and an Avenger movie. Another other Marvel movie tie ins. With the Avengers movie between Ironman movie two and three. All of the movies are good.”
By then, Violin realized how excited she had become, and forced herself to calm down. She said, with interesting still in he tone of voice, “I am so going to have to see them.”
Lee honestly said, “You will likely enjoy them.” He then thought, 'Now, to catch them off guard.' He inquired, “So, what movies do you two enjoy?”
Violin quickly answered, “Just about everything.”
Aeryn turned to look at Lee's face, as she admitted, “Romantic comedies.”
As Lee continued looking at the blank screen, from the corner of his right eye, he saw Aeryn turned to face him. Lee showed no facial reaction to Aeryn's comment, as he thought, 'Smooth, Aeryn. Real smooth. If I show a reaction, you would have nailed me right there. Still, it makes sense. You have lead a life of action. Watching a romantic comedy would just be a form of mindless, lighthearted fun for you'
Lee turned to Aeryn, as he said, “There are some decent romantic comedies out there.”
Just then, the lights in the theater dimmed, and the first episode, Tinsel City, of the Bubblegum Crisis OVA started.
All three adults turned to watch the film, in silence.
Lee just gave a casual expression, of mild interest, while watching the intro, showing Genom Tower, and the panning shots of MegaTokyo. That was the type of expression one would have for something they are okay with watching for the first time, but not really interested in it.
As Priss on screen began singing the song, Kon'ya Wa Hurricane, in english, Lee noticed that the episode did not have subtitles, and it used the U.S. english dub track, which he was fine with.
Lee thought, 'Violin must think that I won't be interested in the anime episodes if they used the japanese dialogue track, with english subtitles. I was never a traditionalist anime fan. I prefer the english dubs.'
Later, the first episode ended and when to credit, with the song Mister Dandy playing, and the credits showing a slow, map style, single panning shot of Megatokyo, from above, ending with a sideways shot of Genom Tower in the distances.
As the episode ended, Lee thought, 'So, this place has the remaster copy versions of the BGC OVA series, with the episode one ending titles panning shot. Still, I have to react in some way. So, why not this way?'
Lee looked at the screen, as he calmly said, “Interesting episode. I will have to say those boomers are like terminators, with the action being good, and the music being nice.”
Violin looked over towards Lee, as she agreed, “Yes. It is a good episode for its time.”
While only showing any reaction from his emotional mask, on the outside, Lee thought, with inward annoyance, 'No. It is a anime classic, that has aged well. And I would love to say that. But, if I did, it would give me away.'
Aeryn flatly said, “It is watchable.”
Lee then realized, as he thought, 'Oh. They might be trying to bait me.'
The second episode, Mad Machine, started playing, with the intro of the episode playing the song, Mad Machine.
Lee thought, 'Ah. The Mad Machine song. One of my all time favorite anime songs. In both english, and japanese. Still, I am going to have to show reaction to two key scenes. One in this episode. And another in the next episode. Or, these two women will suspect something with me.'
Towards the end of the episode, when Irene was stabbed by the assassin boomer, died, Lee faked a visible winch of his face. From the corner of his eyes, even in the dim light from the screen, Lee noted that both women saw his facial expression.
After the credits, Lee lied, “I was not expecting that woman to die.”
Violin commented, “That is the fun thing about anime like this. It does the unexpected.”
Lee thought, 'And that is exactly why I like the anime format.'
After the credits to the second OVA ending, the third episode, Blow Up, began.
Near the beginning of the episode, Lee winched his face again, as he watch an unnamed AD Police Officer being literally shredded by gunfire from that battle boomer.
Right after that gruesome scene, Lee stated, “That poor officer.”
Violin said, “That is not a pretty way to go.”
Aeryn agreed, “No. It isn't.”
Twenty five minutes later, the credits for episode three ended, and the ceiling lights came on.
Without looking at the clock on the back of the wall, Lee knew around an hour and forty-five minutes had passed. Because the first episode was forty-six minutes long. And the second and third episodes just under thirty minutes each.
Lee suggested, “Let's talk in the hallway. This place is a little cramped.”
Aeryn agreed, “Good idea.”
All three adults stood up, and made their way to the door.
As they entered the hotel hallway, outside the theater room, the three adults stood, in a circle facing each other. With Aeryn and Violins standing near each other, and Lee facing them, about six feet away.
There was no one else around them, in the hallway.
Lee thought, 'This is such a nice theater. I enjoy going there. I will have to come back her, sometime.' He looked at Aeryn and Violin, with Aeryn to his left, and Violin to his right, as he continued his thoughts, 'Now, to navigate the after viewing minefield.'
Violin asked, “So, what do you think of anime, now?”
Lee thought, 'I am going to have to outright lie about her question.' He lied, “I didn't know that anime was this good. I always thought that it was just foreign kids cartoons. I might have to look into this format some more.” He mentally added, 'Now, to bait them.' He questioned, “I was wondered if you could give me some suggestions?”
Violin responded, “Sure. What do you like?”
Lee did not show his emotions outwardly, as he thought, with amusement, 'Now, for the fun part.' He answered, “As I stated. I like actions movies. To be honest, I like lots of action, gunplay, hot women, and for the story to be a little dark, but not too dark. As you said. Something unexpected.”
Violin began, “Well, I would suggest, Black...” She immediately stopped herself, from saying Black Lagoon.
Lee maintained his calm facade, but he was laughing on the inside, at Violin almost spilling the beans, as it were.
Violin then began again, “Well, I think the anime series, Cowboy Bebop, would be up your alley. It even has a good english dub track.”
Lee thought, “I know this reply is risky, but I have to have seen something in my youth. Revy's group was never close to the Bebop Crew. They were not even at the bikini parties. Well, except for Ed. But, she was with Lori, and later her entire family, after her children had their gender bending genes activated. So, this is a very small risk. And if I pull this off, by mentioning it, this will decrease their belief that I am the writer.'
Lee stated, “Cowboy Bebop? That cartoon from the Adult Swim line up, on Cartoon Network?”
Aeryn raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “You know the series?”
Lee said, “If it is the ones about that space bounty hunters. The characters name are Spike, Jet, Faye, Ed, and the dog Ein. Then, yes. I have seen it.”
Violin commented, “That is the one. Where did you see if from? You mentioned a TV channel?”
Lee lied, “Well, I thought that series was a cartoon.” He then continued, with him mixing lies with the truth, “Anyway, it first came on a TV channel, Cartoon Network, at twelve, over a decade ago. I watched some of it, while I was at college. It was only twenty-six episodes, and an animated movie. But, it was so good, that Cartoon Network has aired the series, off and on, over the years. Though, it is sad what happened to Spike at the end. But, that, bang, at the end was a nice touch.”
Violin nodded once, as she agreed, “No argument there.”
Lee thought, 'Now, for the icing on the cake.' He cracked a grin, as he commented, “Also, I have to say that character, Faye Valentine is hot. But, not as hot as you two are.”
The two women smiled at Lee.
Aeryn said, “Thank you.”
Violin replied, “Thanks.”
Lee said, “You're both welcome.”
Violin inquired, “Given you stated that you were in college a decade ago, I take it you are in your thirties?”
Lee answered, “Yep.”
Violin further asked, “So, you must have been a child in the nineteen eighties? That time was when some interesting fiction and music come out.”
Lee thought, 'Violin is too sharp to lie to about this. I may as well just tell her.' Lee admitted, “Yep. I am a child of the nineteen eighties. And grown up in the era had its moments. Such, as Reagan’s, 'Tear down this wall', speech. That was a greatest speech by a politician, held directly against the tyranny next door.”
Violin agreed, “Very true.”
Lee went onto say, “I also saw the usual american cartoons that came on at that time. Transformers, GI Joe, He-man, Go-bots, both Ghostbuster cartoons... And Jem.”
Violin giggled at little. She then joked, “Truly outrageous.”
Lee and Violin then laughed at Violin's joke, for a few seconds.
Aeryn remained slight, as she did not get the joke.
As the two adults calmed down, Lee thought, 'You want to have fun with me, Violin. Let's have fun with you.'
Lee casually said, “Violin, you don't look old enough to get that joke.”
Violin swiftly lied, “I raided my parents video disc collection when I was younger.”
Lee complimented, in thought, 'That is a nice lie. Most people would believe it, if they didn't know the truth about you. Let's up the stakes.'
Lee commented, “And I cannot place your accent.”
Violin honestly stated, “I was raised for part of my childhood in Brevard County, Florida. And the other part in Tokyo, Japan.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. You had two childhoods. And oh, the fun I am about to have with your comment.'
Lee said, “So, you are an asian redneck. You guys are crazier than white rednecks. I should know. I am a white redneck.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Actually Violin, you are is part alien. So, you are technically, an alien redneck. Now, that is a scary thought. And I think you may be the first genuine alien redneck with culture roots from the Deep South.'
Violin smiled wickedly, as she responded, “Yep. And proud of it. And I heard about your chase. Rock did state you called yourself a redneck. Nice to have a fellow redneck here.”
Lee returned Violin's smile, as he genuinely replied, “I agree.”
Aeryn inquired, “What is a redneck?”
Lee looked at Violin, and then over at Aeryn. Lee thought, 'I cannot believe that after all this time, Violin, as either John, or Violin, never explained to Aeryn what a redneck is. I guess I am going to have to just answer Aeryn's question, myself. Still, that does not mean I cannot have a little fun. As long as I am careful.'
Lee stated, “You two are together, and Violin did not tell know what a redneck is? Well Aeryn, a redneck is a term that can be both considered an insult, and a compliment. The modern term for redneck, is a redneck is both stupid and brilliant at the same time, while always hilarious. You see, a redneck is the type of person that would create a homemade engine that runs on alcohol. There is the brilliant part. Then, that person will test that engine, personally, with that engine likely exploding. There is the stupid part. And the funny part is all of it.”
“A word of advice. When a redneck says, 'hey, watch this', or something to that effect, run away, as fast as you can. Because that redneck is about to do something incredibly stupid, and likely very destructive.'
Aeryn looked over at Violin, with a slight look of annoyance, as she stated, “I wish I had known that years ago. It would saved us a whole lot of trouble.”
Both Violin and Lee laughed at her reaction, while Aeryn's look of annoyance turned into a smile at their jovial response.
Aeryn then turned back to Lee, as she stated, “Still, thank you for explaining that, Lee. It answers a lot of questions that I still have for, Violin. For quite some time.”
Lee replied, “No problem.” He mentally added, 'Now, is a good opportunity to excuse myself, before I slip up.' He said, “Well, ladies. It was fun. But, I am going to get some lunch. So, see you later.”
Lee then turned, and walked down the hallway, towards the hotel restaurant.
As Lee walked towards the hotel restaurant, he thought, 'That was close. I had to give them something. But, if they find out that Black Lagoon had been coming on Adult Swim's version of Toonami, more recently than Cowboy Bebop, then I am had.'
'It is a risk. But, then gamblers are suppose to deal with each. And I will just have to way and hope my minor gambit pays off.'
'Though, with Aeryn and Violin, I am not that worried. They are not the type to run background checks on information given to them. If they did that, then they would have avoided about a quarter of the problems they had in the Farscape series.'
'Like finding a third party to vouch for a would be passenger on Moya. Or, learning the local customs, and government, before kissing the locals. And especially, knowing who the local leaders are, before kissing said people. Such as a princess. Still, the Farscape, Look at the Princess, trilogy was a good set of episode.'
'That being said, when the folks that run Toonami announced they were going to air Black Lagoon, on the animation block, the news honestly caught me off guard. But, it was a pleasant surprise. And I do have the boxsets, so it was more of a novelty thing to watch that series on that channel. But, my copies are back home, for so many reasons... Oh well...'
'Also, with Sam busy today, it is likely going to be a boring day for me, until tonight. Not, that I am complaining. Boring means I am likely going to live to see another day.'
'I wonder if Bret, from the Maverick movie had a similar point of view on life and boredom. Not that it really matters.'
'Now, I need to get some lunch, and something to drink.'
Lee then continued walking down the hallway, towards the hotel restaurant, and something to eat and drink, for lunch.
(_)
Meanwhile, Aeryn and Violin watched Lee walk away.
As soon as Lee was out of earshot, Violin commented, “Lee is either one hell of an actor. Or, he is not the guy we are looking for.”
Aeryn conceded, “I am not sure, myself. I am usually good at spotting lies. But, with him, I get the sense he was slight lying. But, I am not sure what part of our conversations he was lying about.”
Violin stated, “The best type of liar, is a liar that hides a lie in a truth.”
Aeryn lamented, “Exactly. If only we had a empath, or a telepath, to help us. Then, this search would likely be over by now. But, Annie refused to help. And we could not find River, to ask her in private, to help us.”
Violin commented, “Yea. We did not mention to Rock and the others, that we did go look for River. Because, we did not want to cause problems with Rock. Though, I was hoping to find River, because she can keep a secret. And she would likely help us, by used her abilities to find the writer, and then informing us the two of us who the writer is. Then, we will take things from there.”
Aeryn stated, “Yes. I am not sure the others would overreact at finding the writer. And the two of us can handle matter more discreetly.”
Violin inquired, “Exactly. Still, we will just have to make due without them. On other topic. I think Lee had the right idea. What do you want to do now, for lunch?”
Aeryn suggested, “Fortunately, I have come to enjoy Earth food. How about we take our car, and go get some pizza at that nice pizza restaurant, we found in town.”
Violin replied, “That works for me.”
The two lovers the walked down the hallway, towards the front lobby, and to the outside parking lot, where their car was parked. So, they could take their car, to get some pizza, at a nearby restaurant.
(_)
A few hours later, in the hotel lobby, Lee sat in chair, on the right side of the lobby, facing the front doors of the lobby.
Lee has his personal deck of playing cards with him. And he was using the small table in front of him to play a came of solitary, as he listened to the pleasant rock music in the background, that was playing from lobby speakers.
(_)
Across the room, two women were watching him, from a couch, on the left side of the lobby, with their backs facing the windows on the left front side of the lobby.
It was then that Lotton returned, while wearing her white maid's uniform, with three bottles of beer.
Sawyer and Shenhua looked over at Lotton.
Lotton handed Sawyer and Shenhua, each a bottle. She opened the third, as she sat down between them. With Sawyer to her left side, and Shenhua to her right side.
Lotton then took the open the cap of her bottle, and places it on the large, low laying, square table, that was in front of the couch. With an empty couch on the other three sides of the table.
Lotton then took a drink of her bottle of beer.
Sawyer turned to Lotton, as she said, “Thank you.”
Lotton looked over at Sawyer, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
Meanwhile, Shenhua continued to look at Lee, from across the room, as she stated, “I cannot believe that Lee actually convinced Eda to sleep with him.”
In response, Sawyer and Lotton looked over at Lee.
Lotton said, “I ended up with you two, so I am not going to say another word about it.”
Sawyer commented, “How do we know that it was Lee that did the convincing. When Eda wants a man, she is going to find one.”
Shenhua said, “Well, either way. I am not sure what to think. We still haven't eliminated half the men in this hotel from being the writer. Lee, included.”
Sawyer stated, “True. But, if he was the writer, would he really be that crazy to sleep with Eda, while knowing her background, and that she was after him.”
Lotton commented, “It would be the perfect cover.”
Sawyer said, “It would also mean he is a lot more intelligent than we gave him credit for.”
Shenhua stated, “After that Tex-Mex incident, I would have to say that the writer at least has some intelligence. Still, the most direct way is the best. I say we take Lee out back, and beat him up until he confesses, or we are sure he isn't the writer.”
Lotton pointed out, “That would be counterproductive. Remember girls, we are not in Roanapur anymore. The cops here are not in our pockets. Except for the writer, no one knows about us. And we want to keep it that way.”
“If we start trouble, it will likely backfire in a several ways. First being, if Lee is not the writer, the real writer will hear about what happened to Lee, and likely run. For right now, at least we know he is in the hotel. So, he is nearby. We just haven't figured out who he is, just yet.”
Sawyer said, “I see your pointed.”
Shenhua frowned, as she conceded, “So, do I.” She then opened her bottle, and took a sip of her beer.
Lotton commented, “But, there may be another way. Let me see if I can appeal to his intellectual side. The writer likes to write, if Lee is writer, I wonder what his favorite author is.”
Lotton set down her beer bottle on the table in front of her, and got up from the couch.
Shenhua and Sawyer turned to watch as Lotton walked over to Lee.
The two women saw Lee stop playing his card game, set his cards onto the small table I front of him, and turn to his right, to look up at Lotton, as the white haired woman came to a stop, beside Lee.
Lotton and Lee then talked for a couple of minutes.
The two women noticed Lotton's face becoming paler as the conversation went on.
Soon after, Lotton walked back to join Sawyer and Shenhua. She sat back down between them.
The women could tell that Lotton was scared for some reason.
Lotton flatly stated, “Lee is not the writer. He is a fan of Lovecraft.”
Sawyer replied, “So, he is a little kinky. That would explain a lot of his writings. Not that I am complaining. He preferred to be vague with those scenes, allowing us to do what we wanted. And those were some fun times.”
Shenhua leered at Sawyer and Lotton, as she stated, “And we have had such wonderful times together.”
Lotton looked in front of her, as she quietly pointed out, “Not that kind of lovecraft. I am talking about H.P. Lovecraft. I even quizzed Lee about some of the stories, plots, and characters, by that author. He knows Mister Lovecraft's works well.”
Shenhua inquired, “Who is that?”
Lotton kept her eyes forward, as she explained, “H.P. Lovecraft is the grandfather of modern horror fiction. He is the guy that came up with the really weird, scary stuff. I highly suggest you just take my word on this. I don't want you to read his stories, because then you would realize that such horrors exist in the multiverse, and it might be years until you have another pleasant night's sleep.”
Shenhua asked, “How scary are we talking about?
Lotton swallowed, as she continued to look in front of her. She then answered, in a sober tone of voice, “We are talking horrors beyond human perception. The type of things that would scare Roberta to her core. Honestly, now that I think about, I realize how lucky we really are. Sure, I got turned into a chick, and my mind is enslaved to you two. But, you two have been good to me. You even have shared your bed with me. But, we are all happy, healthy, and actually a bit saner for what the writer did to us. The writer even fixed your scars, and restored you voice, Sawyer. And you have such a lovely voice.”
Sawyer smiled at Lotton, as she said, “Thank you, Lotton.”
Lotton looked in front of herself, as she went onto say, in a calm, though shaky tone of voice, “If those creatures in Mister Lovecraft's works had been introduced into our lives, things would have been far, far worse for all us. Likely including the writer, himself.”
Shenhua conceded, “You have a point there.”
Sawyer gently put her right hand on Lotton's shoulder right, as she said to her other lover, “As a way to cheer you up, how about tonight you decide which positions, and roles we take first take in bed.”
Lotton over at Shenhua, the chinese women replied, “That is fine with me.”
Lotton looked back at Sawyer, as she responded, with a slight smile on her lips, “Thanks, you two.
(_)
Across the room, Lee was watching the three women with the corner of his right eye.
While not showing it on the outside, Lee thought, with amusement, 'Nice try, Lotton. And honestly, H.P. Lovecraft is one of my favorite authors. Though, I am so happy I did not include anything from his writings. The thought of being confronted by those beings is terrifying. By not including them in my stories, I didn't dodge a bullet. I dodged a nuke!'
'I would be dancing in the street right now, happy that Lotton reminded me of that, if it would not cause people to ask questions about me. I guess the rule, out of mind, out of sight, applies here. And I am very happy about that.'
'Now, I just need to figure out what I am going to do for the rest of the day. Because this game of solitary was boring to begin with. And it is boring now. I think I will play a game of pool, by myself.
Lee then collected his card, put them into the small box they were in, and he pocketed them. Next, Lee got up, and headed for the hotel game room, to shoot a few rounds of pool, by himself.
(_)
A few hours later, is six twenty PM.
In the hotel restaurant, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were sitting that their usual table, near the stage, in the back right corner of the room.
The three women were wearing casual clothing.
Their three teenage daughters has already left with the Lagoon teenagers, to find some entertainment, elsewhere in town. Though, Rock and Revy had volunteered to be their chaperons for the night.
The three lovers were wearing casual clothing.
Aeryn, Violin, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton were eat their dinner together, at another table.
The three women had overheard them talking about maybe catching a movie later that night, with Yolanda and Eda.
Currently, the three lovers had finished eating their dinner, and they currently watching Lee eating at the bar counter, with his back turned to them, as he faced the left wall of the room.
While Lee sat in his stool, at the bar counter, the three women saw that he had not noticed them staring at him.
Natsuru stated, “I cannot believe he slept with Eda.”
Akira admitted, “I am kinda of jealous.” Akira noticed her two lovers turned to look at her. She added, “Come on. Like you haven't thought about it. Being a hot blond is one thing. Sleeping with a hot blond is another.”
Both her lover shrugged, in response.
Ranma said, “But, why would Eda sleep with Lee? I can understand from Lee's point of view. But, not Eda's.”
Natsuru commented, “For her, it was likely just a cheap thrill. A one night stand. That was all. Have personally met Eda, from the bikini parties, she always struck me as someone not looking for a long term relationship.”
Natsuru thought, 'I wonder what our friends in the other table might find out, if they go to the movies with Yolanda and Eda, tonight. I will have to ask them later about that. Maybe tomorrow afternoon.'
Ranma stated, “Very possible. And given the way Lee has not reacted about it. Such as not acting all day, like he is on cloud nine, I would guess that he understands that it was just a one night stand.”
Akira said, “That is likely. Though, I would like to know how his mind ticks.”
Natsuru agreed, “So, would I.”
Ranma smirked, as she said, “I know a way to do that. All we have to do is apply our feminine charms.”
Akira and Natsuru looked over at Ranma, and Ranma looked back at them.
Akira asked, “What do you have in mind?
Ranma stated her plan
After Ranma finished, Natsuru said, “That might work. Of course, that could blow up in our faces, if he becomes violent.”
Ranma commented, “I am not worried about that. Any one of us can handle, Lee. By the way he walks, he clearly has not been trained to fight.”
Natsuru pointed out, “True. But, after that chase, I am concerned that he might be crazy. Rock stated that Lee showed no fear in that game of chicken. And we know first hand out unpredictable crazy people can be.”
Akira stated, “Perhaps. But, Ranma's right. He might even cry for his mother by the end of the night. Yet. If things go sour on us, we will be gentle with him.”
Ranma said, “That is my thought, exactly.”
Natsuru pointed out, “Still, he thinks we are just lesbians. He will be suspicious of us.”
Ranma replied, “So? Some men find that to be a turn on.”
Natsuru conceded, “True. And he has been nothing but polite to us. So, either way, he will give us the time we ask for.”
Akira said, “Yes. Well, no time like the present. Let's go ask him.”
Natsuru and Ranma nodded, in agreement.
All three women got up from their seats and walked over to where Lee was eating at the bar counter.
(_)
Less than a minute later, at the bar counter.
With Sam absent, Lee was quietly eating his meal alone, at the bar counter.
Lee then heard a voice, to his left, back side, say, “Lee. Could we have a word with you?”
Lee turned to his left, to see Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, standing nearing him, while facing him.
The fact that all three women were grinning at him, in an innocent girl type smile, set him on edge. Though, he did not show his reaction on the outside.
Lee thought, 'I wonder what they want? Still, these three gender benders are likely the sanest, and nicest among their group. So, I will be as polite as possible.' He inquired, “Good evening, ladies. What can I do for you?”
Natsuru requested, in a slightly sweet, polite tone of voice, “Would you like to join us for drinks, here in the bar, tonight, after everyone leaves?”
Lee thought, 'Talk about such an outright trap. Three hot babes trying to get me drunk. But, if I saw, no, they will question my response. But, if I say, yes. All I got to do is watch the amount of I drink, compared to them. Two of the three of them will eventually get drunk before me, by the very fact I outweigh them, and they don't have the super-soldier serum serums there veins.'
'I know for a fact that Ranma is a light weight, in her female form. when it comes to alcohol. In the Romeo and Juliet play adventure she had in her series, she got real drunk from some sake, real quickly. She probably has not built up that much more of a tolerance to alcohol in her adulthood. Though, it was later showed that Ranma sobered up quickly, after she changed into her male form.'
'Perhaps changing genders broke down the alcohol in Ranma's body, and sobered Ranma up. Though, that is something to look into, at another time. Maybe it works the same way with poisons. It is worth checking out, later.'
'Still, back to the matter at hand. I never made Ranma a drinker in my stories. Akira has had a few beers and some rum, but she was never shown drinking in her original series. And she did not drink that much in my series.'
'Though, while Natsuru is not a drink either, her kampfer form likely makes her tolerate alcohol than even I can. I just won't get suckered into a drinking contest. And I should be fine.'
'Though, this plan will not work if I am drinking beer. They will see through that. I will just have something stronger that I like. Such as vodka.'
'And while Natsuru enhanced abilities will probably protects her from getting drunk as a woman. I can patiently wait for Ranma and Akira to get drunk, and wasted. As I just sip my drink. Then, Natsuru will excuse all three of them, and I am in the clear.'
Lee answered, “Sure. What time?”
Natsuru answered, “Eleven tonight, Sound fine.?
Lee thought, 'Best to get this out of the way, as soon as possible.' He replied, “Yea. That is good for me.”
Natsuru said, “See you then.”
After three women then turned, and walked away from the bar counter.
Meanwhile, Melvin had been behind the bar counter, and he had overheard the conversation. He walked up to Lee, from behind the bar counter. He stated, “You know they are just looking for trouble.”
Lee turned to face Melvin, as he responded, “I know. But, what else could I have done?”
Melvin conceded, “You have a point there.”
Lee pointed out, “Also, you will be here. And from what I heard, you already reigned them once. I am sure you can do so again.” He mentally added, 'I never would I have thought that someday I might be happy to have a member of Hotel Moscow near by.'
Melvin smirked, “You got that right.”
Lee commented, in a soft voice, so only Melvin heard, “Though, I do have a request. At eleven, when I return here. I will order some vodka. Give me a lower proof than normal.”
Melvin quietly responded, “I get where you are going. Turn the tables on them. But, that could also get you in trouble.”
Lee stated, in a soft tone of voice, “Only if I take them to bed with me. When they are drunk, I am leaving this bar, by myself.”
Melvin replied, “That will be fine.” He then walked away, to check on his other customers at the bar counter, as the waitresses handled those at the tables.
Lee then went back to eating his meal. As Lee took a drink from his soda, he thought, 'I don't think I will go out of my way for the meeting with those women. This isn't a romantic meeting. It is a duel of wits. So, I will go casual.'
When Lee was finished his dinner, he paid for his meal, tipped Melvin for the meal, and left for his suite, to watch some TV, before meeting with three loves later, for drinks.
(_)
At Eleven PM, Lee walked back into the hotel restaurant. He hadn't done anything special for meeting the women.
As Lee walked into the restaurant, he took a look around. He noted the room was clear, except for Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira, at their usual table, near the stage in back. In the same clothing they had on earlier that evening.
And across the room, Melvin was behind the bar counter, doing early clean up on some glasses and the bar counter itself.
Lee thought, 'I don't see anyone else here, besides the girls, and Melvin. I wonder if they cleared out the room. Probably not. These three are fairly nice. And this place pretty much clears itself out around this time of night.'
While Lee walked over to the table, where the girls were at, he saw that the table had four chairs around, for the moment. With three of the chairs occupied.
In the chairs, from left to right, was Natsuru, Akira, and Ranma. With Natsuru and Ranma facing each other. And Akira facing the empty chair for Lee.
Ranma was the first to noticed Lee, as she kindly said to him, “Hi Lee. Come on over. We have been waiting for you.”
Akira and Natsuru then looked up at Lee.
Natsuru looked at her wrist watch, and then back up at Lee. She complimented, “You punctuality is commendable.”
Akira offered, “Have a seat.”
As Lee came nearer to them, he said, “Sure. Let me get my drink.”
Before Lee turned towards the bar counter, he noted what all three women were drinking. And while Lee started to make his way to the bar counter, he thought, 'Well, at least the girls are serious about drinking. They each have a bottle, and are drinking from a glass. And what they are drinking makes sense.'
'Akira is drinking rum. She got a taste for rum from Revy. I know, because I wrote her that way. Ranma is drinking sake. She probably got a taste for it from her father. And Natsuru is drinking some red wine. For her, I guess it is a case of personal taste.'
'Still, rum and sake are fairly alcoholic. The rum might actually have more alcohol then the vodka I am going to get. Given I already requested Melvin to not give me something with a lot of alcohol in it. So, if I drink slowly, Akira and Ranma will likely get drunk faster than me.'
When Lee reached the bar counter, Melvin looked up at him.
Lee quietly ordered, “Melvin. I would like a bottle of Vodka. Moderate alcohol content. With a glass.”
Melvin said, “Coming right up.”
Melvin the turned around and pulled out a bottle Vodka, from the shelves set on the wall, behind the bar counter, and he set the bottle in front of Lee. He then pulled out a clean glass for Lee.
Melvin then looked at Lee, as he softly stated, “I know these women have something planned for you. And you asking for a lower proof earlier shows you suspect something as well. Anyway, this is seventy proof.”
Lee thought, 'Thirty five percent alcohol.'
Melvin quickly continued, “With your size, if you drink it slowly, you will out last them. I have watch the redhead and blond get drunk a few times. Though, both of them are nice drunks. Still, the blue one does not get drunk.'
Lee thought, 'That is what I suspected.'
Melvin went onto say, in a soft tone of voice, “Anyway, if you are careful, you will be fine.”
Lee looked Melvin in Melvin's eyes, as he said, “Thanks man.”
Melvin just smiled.
Less than a minute later, Lee paid for the bottle. He then carried the bottle and glass, back with him, to the table with the three hot women.
When he reached their table, he sat the bottle and the glass in front of where he was going to see down.
As Lee sat down, he saw that he was in front of Akira. Ranma was to his right. And Natsuru was to his left. With him in the chair facing the right wall, near the empty buffet cart on the wall.
Lee then opened the bottle of Vodka. He pour a little bit into his glass, set the bottle gently down on the table, and he then took a sip of the vodka. And he found the taste to his likely.
Lee thought, 'It has been while since I was introduced to drink vodka. But, I found it to be okay. And that is a story for another time.'
When Lee finished his sip, he set the glass back down, as he asked, “So, what do you ladies want to talk about first?”
Ranma asked, “How much do you know about martial arts?”
Lee lied, “Only what I have seen in actions movies.” He mentally added, 'I have also read about on the fighting arts. Now Ranma, how much are you willing to admit to know? Given your pride. Probably everything short of your name, and gender bending abilities.' He inquired, “How about you?”
Ranma smirked, as she commented, “Oh. So. So much more.”
The four adults then began their cat and mouse game of conversation, which both sides being careful with their answers and questions. While everyone at the table also attempted to keep the conversation casual.
(_)
After thirty minutes of casual talking, evading, and deflection, without the girls showing any notice of Lee's conversational tactics. And them masterfully avoid Lee's questions as well. Lee noticed that his bladder was full.
Lee finished off what was left of the little bit of Vodka in his glass. He then said, “If you will excuse me, ladies. I will be right back.”
Lee then got up, and walked across the room, over to the hallway, by the bar counter, near the entrance, where the restrooms were located.
Ranma also noticed that Melvin had also turn his back on them.
Ranma quietly said, “Okay. We are good. Akira keep and eye out for Lee. Natsuru, keep you eyes on Melvin. If either of them sees this, and the jig is up.”
Her to lovers did as instructed.
Ranma then reached into one of her pants pockets and pulled out a small vial of liquid.
Natsuru saw the vial, from the corner of left her eye, as she softly asked, “What is that?”
Ranma quietly answered, “It is a Mickey Finn. This will simulate the effects of being drunk. I made sure that the chemicals I am using won't hurt him. It will just get us the drunk effect we want for him. And he should be fine tomorrow morning.”
Natsuru softly inquired, “Well he taste it?”
Ranma popped off the cap to the vial, and set it down on the table, as she quickly reached over and picket up the open bottle Vodka.
Lee's bottle of Vodka was about ninety percent still full.
While she poured the liquid in the vial, into the bottle, she quietly answered, “Not if I put it bottle. This chemicals in the vial are to strong to put directly into his glass. And the vodka smell will also hide any scent it has.”
Ranma then put her right thumb on the top of the Vodka bottle, as she shook it gentle, to mix the chemicals into the bottle. She then set the bottle back where it was. Picked up the cap for the vial. Placed the cap back on the empty vial, and she put the vial back into the pants pocket she originally had it in.
Akira kept her eyes on the hallway that left to the restrooms, as she softly asked, “How long till the stuff kicks in?”
Ranma quietly stated, “Ten to fifteen minutes. Though, it depends on how much he consumes, to his body mass. But, at the rate he has been drinks. That is how long I think it will take.”
Akira softly said, “I wonder if he will start sobbing like a child.”
Natsuru kept his eye on Melvin, as she quietly commented, “I wonder what he will be like to.”
Akira continued to look at the hotel restaurant hallway, on the left side of the room, leading to the restrooms, she saw Lee start to walk out.
Akira said, “Well, we are about to find out, because here he comes.”
Ranma inquired, “Did Melvin see anything?”
Natsuru replied, “No. He had his back turned the whole time.”
Ranma said, “Good.”
The three women then watched Lee walked across the room, towards them.
When Lee reach the three women, he then sat back down in his chair.
Lee look at the three lovers, as he calmly asked, “Did I miss anything?”
Akira casually lied, “No. Nothing.”
Lee then picked up the Vodka bottle, and pour himself another drink into his glass.
(_)
Twelve minutes later, the three women could tell the spiked drink was starting to kick in.
Lee was slurring his speech a little, and it took him several seconds to pour himself another glass of vodka from his bottle on the table.
And like any person with no experience at being drunk, Lee did not realize he was drunk.
Akira thought, 'Now, let us see what makes you really tick. And I think the most direct approach, is the best approach with a drunk. Drunks have no sense of subtlety. I learned that from going out drinking with Revy.' She asked, “I was wondering, Lee. What are you really like?”
Lee set his bottle of vodka back on the table, in a slightly harder manner than usual.
Lee looked over at Akira, as he swayed his head side to side. He then stopped moving his head. He slightly slurred his speech, as he replied, “What am I really like? What are any of us really like in this epically screwed up world?”
Ranma commented, “This world doesn't seem that bad.”
Lee chuckled. He then said, in a less slurred, more direct tone of voice, “I guess is wouldn't if you don't look too closely. Oh and how closely can you look? Such into the eyes of children, and into the reflections of their screwed up childhoods.”
Natsuru asked, “You think children are screwed up?”
Lee responded, “Ha! Oh yea. There is not one person that I personally know of that didn't have a screwed up childhood.”
Ranma smirked, as she teased, “Yourself include? Were you beaten as a children?”
Lee answered, “No. I wasn't beaten. But, I can see why you would think that. Everyone focuses on the classical abuses. The simple stuff. The straight forward events, where there is still calm between the events. The ones where there is a monster that can easily be pointed to. Let's see...”
Lee looked at his right hand for a second. He then used his left hand to roll up the blue cloth jacket sleeve on his right forearm, up to the elbow.
Lee then got out of his chair.
Without warning, he tipped over a table nearby them, to Lee's right side, as he yelled, “The beatings!”
Lee then used his right hand to pick up the back of a chair, by the tipped over table, and throw a chair, across the room, between the stage and the bar counter, in the left, back corner of the room, as he screamed, “The whippings!”
Lee then walked back over to his chair and picked up his bottle off the table with his left hand, by the neck of the bottle.
He took a swallow from the bottle.
Lee then reversed the way he was holding the bottle by the neck. Vodka began to pour out of the bottle, as Lee quickly slammed the bottle onto their table, as he yelled, “The rapes!”
The bottle shattered, spilling glass and vodka onto the table top and floor, though, not on Lee's chair. All that was left of the bottle in his hand was the neck of the bottle attached to some rough, sharp glass edges.
Lee looked at the sharp edges of the broken bottle, as he started laughing.
The three women near him were becoming very worried if Lee was a having a bad reaction to the drug.
Meanwhile, Melvin had begun to noticed what was happening. Though, he just silently watched things play out, as he stood behind the bar counter.
Over the next few seconds, Lee slowly stopped laughing, until he was quiet again.
Lee then looked down at his chair. He saw no glass in it. Next, he sat back down in his chair, as he firmly held broken bottle by its neck with his left hand.
Lee looked towards the right wall, away from everyone, with a far off look in his eyes, behind his glasses, as he said, in a voice that was far to calm for the situation, “No one ever thinks about the tough abuses. The ones with no clear monsters. The death by a thousand paper cuts.” He continued, in a slightly lower, sadder tone of voice, “The types of abuses that leave the victim a damned, hated monster, bound for Hell.”
While careful to avoid the broken glass on the table, Lee held out his right arm onto the table, with the palm of his right hand flat onto the table, with the outside of his right forearm facing up.
He reversed his hold of the bottle neck with in left hand to where the sharp edges were pointed downwards.
Lee then looked in front of him, towards Akira. He looked into Akira's eyes, as he used the longest sharp pointed in end of his broken bottle, which his left hand, to cut a shallow cut across on the outer side of his right forearm, right below the elbow. He coldly stated, with venom in his tone of voice, “The distrust from others. And disagreements for the sake of disagreeing.”
Without looking, while always keeping his eyes on Akira's eyes, he then make another shallow cut right below the first cut, going towards his right wrist, as he stated in the same cold, venomous tone of voice, “The disrespect by others. And denial of rightful recognition of one achievements.”
Lee make another shallow cut below the first two cuts, as he stated, “The deceit and lies from others.”
And shallow cut below the previous three cuts, while in a similar tone, “The looks of disgust, scorn, and hatred.”
And another shallow cut, “Never being given the benefit of the doubt.”
And another shallow cut, “The disappointment over actions and events beyond the child's control.”
And another shallow cut, “The insults.”
And another shallow cut, “The rumors.”
And another shallow cut, “The hypocrisy set against the child.”
And another shallow cut, “The strikes from behind.”
And another shallow cut, “The denied opportunities.”
And another shallow cut, “The discouragement to have opinions, show emotions, set and achieve goals in life.”
And another shallow cut, “Being punished by authorities, based on lies, and false accusations, from nameless, faceless cowards.”
And another shallow cut, “The complete negligence, and absence of empathy from others.”
And another shallow cut, “Get a bruise. Just ignore it.”
And another shallow cut, “Get a cut. Let it bleed.”
And another shallow cut, “Get a sprain. Walk it off.”
And another shallow cut, “Just ignore the pain because acknowledging that the child is in pain would be the same as acknowledging the child is a human being.”
By then, Lee has reached the top of his right wrist, with shallow cuts becoming red, with some of the cuts slightly bleeding.
Though, as Lee did this, his eyes never left Akira's eyes.
But, Akira's eyes did sometimes move to the look at the cuts on Lee's arm, and then back at Lee's eyes.
Akira saw the cuts were shallow. And just deep enough to draw blood, and be painful, but the woulds would likely leave no lasting scars.
Akira could clearly see, passed the large glasses on Lee's face, that Lee's eyes never registered the pain of those cuts.
Akira thought, with worry, 'Lee is either in a lot of pain, and that pain is masking the pain of those cuts, or he has gone completely dead inside. I have seen people in both situations, first hand. I don't know which would be worse for him.'
Yet, Akira saw that Lee eyes were empty eyes. Eyes she had only seen from Revy, and a few others, when they got a too drunk, and became very unpredictable.
The worst part was that Akira could guess what was going through Lee's mind. In Lee's mind he was not cutting on his right arm, he was cutting on her.
Akira thought, with even more worry, and some slight fear for everyone involved, 'Oh crap. We have awaken a beast, and I am not sure what to do.'
Akira risked a glance, to her sides, towards Ranma and then Natsuru. She could see both from the expressions on her lovers' faces, that they shared her worries. Akira then looked back into Lee's cold, dead like eyes.
Lee stopped cutting on himself, as he coldly stated, with malice in his voice, “I guess the line forms to the left, for him. And because it is only a cut here, and an insult there. No one person has done anything to warrant punishment. But, unlike those that have been beaten, assaulted, or raped, he doesn't get to point out those that harm him for just vengeance, because it was everyone that had harmed him. And if he attempts to seek justice, it is he who is punished. For unlike those others, he are not allowed his REVENGE!”
Akira then saw fury ignite in Lee's eyes, as he used his right hand on the table, for leverage, as he bolt over the table at her, while slamming the edges of the broken bottle in his left hand, into the table right in front of Akira.
As Lee came to a sudden stop, he used his right hand, and arm. to steady himself, while blood dripped from his right arm, and onto the table.
At the same time, Akira was now face to face with Lee, with mere inches between them, as Lee was giving her a slasher smile that would make Roberta proud.
To Akira's credit, she did not show any fear. Similar experiences with Revy, and the others, had taught her to not show fear in such situations.
Though, Lee's abrupt action did not go unnoticed by Natsuru and Ranma.
Natsuru immediately grabbed Lee by his left wrist and arm, while Ranma jump on top of Lee, and put him in a headlock.
Ranma warned, with worry in her tone of voice, “Lee, get a hold of yourself.”
Lee began to wickedly laugh, as he let go of the broke bottle, while he dropped his crazed smile.
Lee's laughter slowly died down. But, while he still giggling, he said, “You're right, Ranma.”
Everyone relaxed. Natsuru let go of Lee, while Ranma released Lee from her headlock. She moved back to her chair, as Lee moved back to his.
Lee was quiet again for a few seconds.
The girls remained silent at, as well. Because they did not want to set him off again, and risk seriously harming him, to prevent him from doing harm to them. Given, they were the ones that put him in this crazed stated of mind in the first place, they did not want to see Lee harmed.
Lee and Akira were still looked at each other in their eyes, and Akira saw Lee's eyes turn sad.
Lee stated, with neither warmth, nor coldness in his voice, “This is no justice in this world, or the next. God is an evil fuck, just like the rest.”
“In this world, there is no good. There is only evil. People who hurt other people are rewarded. And people that are hurt by other people are punished. Because this is a Hell masquerading as Earth.”
Akira then saw Lee's eyes water, as he shed a few tears, while he went onto say, with venom, and sadness in his tone of voice, “And you know what. I hate beautiful people like you. So damn healthy. So damn many opportunities. So damn happy. So surrounded by those whom are supportive, and care for you. You get to do anything you want. While I am not allow to do anything, but suffer.”
Akira mentally realized, 'He is not dead inside. He is just in a whole lot of pain. The healthy remark probably means it is more than just emotional pain. There is some physical pain attached to it, as well. At least, he is not dead inside.'
Lee then looked over at his glass of vodka. He picked it up, and made a motion like he was about to drink it. But, before the glass rim reached his lips, he said, “When I am buzzed, I am happy. But, clearly when I am drunk, I tap into my dark side. I don't like being like this. I think I will sleep this off... Oh, and you wanted to know the real me. Well, it looks like you got your answer.”
Instead of finishing the vodka, he poured it on the cuts of his right arm, to sterilize the injuries, and prevent infection.
Lee hissed in pain from the alcohol stinging wounds, as he used his left hand to rub the vodka into his cuts. Next, he rolled down the right sleeve of his jacket, down his right arm, to hid the cuts on his right forearm.
Lee then silently got up. He stumbled out of the hotel bar, into the hallway, towards the elevators, and his hotel room.
After Lee left the room, the three women looked at the entrance to the hotel hallway, that Lee exited into, as Natsuru asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “Is Lee going to remember any of this?”
Ranma answered, in a sober tone of voice, “Likely not. Though, he will likely wonder where those cuts on his arm came from. But, they look shallow enough to heal quickly, and leave no lasting scars. And I am regretting what we did to him. I just wanted to get some insight into his mind. I didn't realized he was that screwed up.”
Akira stated, with worry in her tone of voice, “Yea. And I thought Revy was messed up. And some of the others are not that far behind her. But, this guy brings an entirely different point of view to being messed up. Unlike Revy, and the others, when they are like this, they get violent. Lee was holding back, not for his sake, but ours. He is in a lot of pain, but he doesn't want to take it out on anyone. I admire that about him.”
Natsuru commented, “So, do I. And Lee called the time of his messed up childhood, a death by a thousand paper cuts. Like the old chinese torture. I do not want to know what this guy has been through. But, it was clearly not pleasant, and it went off continuously, for a very long time.”
Akira stated, “That healthy comment also makes me think he is in some physical pain. I saw his eyes when he was cutting himself. He was not registering the pain. You don't do that unless you are already hurting a lot on the inside. Or, dead inside. And I am leaning towards him hurting on the inside. He is too nice to be dead on the inside.”
Ranma said, “And so, that is what he is really like. Yet. He is so nice to everyone. And Akira, you are right about him willfully holding back. I don't want to think about how much self-control that man has built up over the years.”
Natsuru suggested, “Well, let us be nicer to him from now on. He tries to be nice to us. And I don't think it is just because he finds us hot.”
Akira replied, “Agreed. Let's be nicer to him.”
Ranma said, “That is a good idea, Natsuru.”
Natsuru asked, “Should we make sure he gets to his room okay?”
Akira responded, “We will do so in a few minutes. Our room is right beside his. It is best if he is in his room, when we return to ours. If we have to help him, it could cause problems for all of us. But, even if that is the case, we will still help him, because we put him in this situation, in the first place.”
Natsuru and Ranma nodded in agreement.
The women then heard Melvin say, from across the room, behind the bar counter, “Ladies.”
The women turned to look at Melvin, as they realized that Melvin has seen the entire event, and he had overheard the conversation they just had.
Melvin cautioned, with slight anger evident in his tone of voice, “Whatever you guys slipped, Lee. Do not do that again to him.”
Ranma said, “Don't worry. We won't do that again.”
Melvin replied, “Good. Because that man is one of my nicest customers I have. And I don't want to lose him. Now, I am going to close this place early, in a few minutes. So, finish what you are drinking, and please leave, for the night.”
Akira stated, “We will. Do you wish for us to pay for repairs?”
Melvin answered, “No. I don't see anything too serious. And I will keep this between us.”
Natsuru said, “Thank you. We will remember that.”
A few minutes later, the girls finished their drinks, paid their bill, left a nice tip for Melvin, and left for their hotel suite.
When the three lovers reached the hallway door to their hotel suite, they did not see Lee anywhere on the path they took, from the front lobby, to the front elevator bay, to in the hallway, on the third floor.
The three women then used a key to open their door, and they quietly closed the door behind them. After which, instead of making love to each other, then decided, for Lee's sake, since it was later than usual, when they turned. And after what they did to Lee, they would not do anything to disturb his rest for that night.
So instead, the three women quietly got ready for bed, and they went to sleep on the large bed they shared in their hotel bedroom.
(_)
The next morning, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, saw the hotel restaurant was back to the way it normally was, and Lee, was at his usual placed, at the bar counter, eating breakfast, from the buffet, with Sam, as if nothing had happened the previous night.
During the rest of the day, Lee had not approach Akira, Ranma, nor Natsuru. And Melvin had kept his mouth shut about the events of the previous night.
And even though, the three women did decide, when they did have a chance to talk to Lee, they would be nicer to him. While, Lee would likely have no clue as to why the three of them were being nicer to him. As far as the three lovers were concerned, they were in the clear.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 05: “Day of the Dead: Part One: Day of the Little Angels.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Around a week later, after Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru has drugged Lee, it was November first. On that day, was the Latin American holiday, Day of the Little Angels.
This was the second day, of a three day holiday. The first part was All Hallows Eve, or Halloween. The second part, which was currently happening, was Day of the Little Angels. The third part of the holiday was, the Day of the Dead, on November second.
It was the late morning, in De La Plata Podrido. It was a sunny, cool day.
Given that city of De La Plata Podrido was a tourist city, the city's citizens held a festival in the heart of the city, for the three day holiday.
There were trinket booths, game booths, and other types of booths, various types of food vendors scattered throughout the festival.
On that day, the festival was fairly crowded, with families and tourists, just wanting to having some harmless fun.
Rock and Revy were enjoying festival, together.
Both of them were wearing their usual clothing. And Revy had on her cutlasses, which were holstered under her armpits. Though, given Pedro orders for his men, the police left Revy, Rock, and their friends alone, as long as they did not cause trouble.
As Revy and Rock walked side by side, thought the festival, Revy looked around at the skulls and death motif the booths of festival had. Revy said, “So, this is the festival that Fabiola mentioned.”
Rock looked around, as she stated, “Yes. Yesterday was All Hallows Eve, or Halloween. This is the Day of the Little Angels. Tomorrow is the day of the dead.”
Revy commented, “Interesting. A day for purgatory. A day for heaven. And a day for hell. I like it.”
Rock thought, 'Not exactly. But, it is best not to ruin her mood.' She said, “Something like that.”
Revy responded, “And as small town festivals go, this is not bad.”
Revy then spotted a booth with an older mexican woman, wearing casual clothing, sitting in a comfortable chair, under a large umbrella. The upright sign by the woman, on the ground, to the woman's right side, stated something in spanish, along with listing the price in pesos. And below the spanish text, was english, stating, “Fortunetelling. Five U.S. dollars.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she commented, “Want to get our fortunes read? The sign is in english, as well. So, she likely knows english.”
Rock casually said, “If you want to. I mean looked at our lives. Someone reading the future is kind of tame by comparison.”
Revy agreed, “True. If she is legit. But, I am willing to risk five dollars to find out.”
Rock replied, “Alright. Let's do this.”
The two women then walked over to fortuneteller.
When they reached the fortuneteller, Revy stood to Rock's right side, as the seated woman looked up at the two women. She calmly said, in english, “First, five U.S. dollars, please.”
Revy pulled out some cash, from one of the pockets of her cut-off shorts, and she handed the woman the U.S. five dollars.
After the woman pocketed the money, she requested, “One of you hands, please.”
Revy inquired, “So, you're a palm reader?”
The woman flatly replied, “No. I have to have something to feel for this to work. And I don't do feet. Too smelly. Also, I don't do faces. I cannot stand bad breath.”
The woman's comment, caught Rock by surprised. She thought, 'Now, that is an odd reply. If she was a fake, she would have just said, yes.'
The woman said, “From your weapons, and the demeanor, that you, and your lover, beside you, have, I can tell you both have lead interesting lives. So, let us dispense with that old cliche and move forward. I can guess you want to know about your future?”
Rock asked, “How did you know I was her lover?”
The woman coyly answered, “I am not paid to say how I know what I know. I am paid to tell what I know.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “You got me interested, lady. Let's see what you can do.” Revy held out her right hand. Her hand was open, with her palm facing downward.
The woman used both hands to gently grip Revy's right hand.
The woman then closed her eyes, as she began to gently rub Revy's right hand.
A few seconds later, the woman calmly said, “You are foreigners. More foreign than must would perceive. And you are here for someone. You looking for that someone, because he has wronged you.”
Revy thought, 'Oh, this woman is the read deal. With her help, we might be able to find the writer today. Though, I have to keep my questions vague with her.' She asked, “What can you tell me of the one we are after?”
The fortuneteller kept her eyes closed, as she answered, in a direct tone of voice, “Who you are after, is connected to your near future, and your distant past. You are the broken sparrow that hunts the dead man, whom walks among the living. You hunt a ghost. A shadow of someone whom never was. And as a strong sparrow, you will someday realize that your broken wings will not break your spirit. And should your wings ever fully mend, you will leave the nest, and lose all you have.”
Revy thought, 'Talk about a twisted reading... Oh. Ask a vague question. Get a vague answered.' She inquired, “What does that mean?”
The woman opened her eyes, and looked into Revy's eyes. She let got of Revy's right hand, with Revy letting her right hand drop to her side.
The woman smirked, as she flatly stated, “You know as little about yourself, as you do about the one you hunt. In other words, do some soul searching. When you do, you will soon find the one you hunt.”
Revy thought, 'Now, that is a much better, and more easily understood answer.'
Revy replied, “I just might do that.” She turned to Rock, as she asked, “You want her to read you next?”
Rock thought, 'I think this woman is for real shock. Such as... On second thought, I better not have her do this.' She responded, “Nah. I don't want her to lose her mind.”
The woman said, “That is alright. I appreciated your concern. May you both have a wonderful day.”
Revy said, “You too.”
Rock replied, “Thank you.”
The two loves then walked away from the fortuneteller.
(_)
Elsewhere, at that moment, in another park of the town Plata Podrido, Lee and Sam were walking on the sidewalk, along side of the road, on the sidewalk, with the road to their left side, with Sam to Lee's left side.
The two men were heading from the Devil's Hotel, to the Rats Nest, which was due to open in a little while. They had just entered the outskirts of the town of Plata Podrido, itself. With the Rats Nest bar still a ways off by foot.
While they walked, Lee thought, 'I am glad those cuts on my right forearm have fully healed. There are not even any scabs left. I don't know where those cut came from. Maybe I scratched my arm really bad. But, since I am have no been captured by anyone, I am just chalking up to one more mystery about my life. While, I am thankful I am okay.'
'Still, it is unfortunate that some of the places I usually eat are going to be closed for the next two days, due to the local, Latin American holidays.'
'Lori told me that the Last Resort would be closed for next two days for the holiday. Also, did Eda told me the same thing. That she and Yolanda were going to take a few days off to enjoy the festival.'
'Though, they did say open for October thirty-first, All Hallows Eve. And I am sure both businesses raked in some cash, before they went on break, to enjoy the holidays themselves. So, they will be fine.'
'And I will admit that all of them could use a break. At least Eda and Yolanda will not be looking for me, if they are enjoying the festival.'
'Though, I am happy that the Rats Nest, and Devil's Hotel Restaurant will still be open for the next two days.'
'Speaking of which. The look on the Rats Nest bartender's face, when I told her I had slept with Eda was priceless. She laughed for a solid minute. She then gave Sam and I, each a cold bottle of beer on the house.'
'Also, Chief Del Soto told me last night, that I did not have to meet with him for the next two days, which was fine with, me. Fortunately, it had been a quite week.'
'Yet. I am still trying to still figure out how to approach the girls in a manner that I could steal one of their reality devices. I am continue draw a blank. Every plan I come up with ends up with me dead, or worse.'
'I might as well think about something else. Like Sam's plans for the next two days. And I would like to go to that festival. While it was Halloween yesterday, that was more of a children's holiday. And I just did my usual schedule yesterday. From what I read, today and tomorrow being more adult oriented holidays.'
'I am glad I researched these holidays on the web, after I read in the Black Lagoon mange, of Fabiola mentioned the Festival of the Dead. And I learned saw her mention the same festival in the Black Lagoon anime, at the beginning of episode twenty-nine, Codename Paradise, Status MIA.'
'And speaking of the festival. I would like to go to the one in town, today. Now, to ask if Sam wants to join me.'
The two men continued walking, side by side. Lee turned to Sam, as he casually asked, “Sam, do you feel like going to the festival, today?
Sam turned to Lee, as he answered, “Unfortunately, I cannot. And I have plans for both today, and tomorrow.”
Lee inquired, “Really?”
Sam responded, “Yea. Sorry to bring this up on you, on short notice. But today, my girlfriend came to town. And I am going to visit her for a few hours, after lunch. And tomorrow, I am spending the day with her. I will be with you for breakfast. Then, you are on you own for that day.”
Lee replied, “That is alright. I hope you have fun.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Sam, and I have come to an understanding. I don't dig into his life. He doesn't dig into mine. And by not doing so, Sam unknowingly offers me an alibi, and cover from the women after me. And I enjoy his company. But, if he wants some private time with his girlfriend. That is find with me. I will not even ask to meet his girlfriend, because I respect his privacy. Like he does mine.'
Sam said, “Thank you. I hope you have fun today, and tomorrow, as well.”
Lee and Sam then saw two people turned the corner of a building, to their right side, and start walking down the sidewalk they were on, towards them.
At the moment, the two people were six feet away from Lee and Sam.
As the two other people got closer, Lee and Sam saw that the two people were two younger girls. One was a hispanic girl in her late teens, whom had fair skin and short blond hair. The other person was a six year old caucasian girl with short brown hair. The brown haired girl was slightly staggering, as she and the blond haired girl were walking together, side by side. The brown haired girl was to blond haired girl's left side, with the street to blond haired girl's right side.
The teenage girl was to the six year old girl's right side.
When the two girls came within thirty feet from the two men, both men overheard the conversation between the two girls, which was in english.
The blond girl said, “Listen. you're drunk. Let us go back to our hotel room, so you can work this out of your system.”
The younger girl slurred her speak, as she stated, “Nah. I am fine. Besides, what does it matter. I cannot go home like this.”
The blond tried to comfort her friend, as she commented, “Trust me. We will figure something out. But first, we need to get you sober.”
As the two groups got within got within twenty feet of each other, the young girl's eyes and Lee's eyes met. The girl immediately went berserk, as she scream, “It's you!”
Before Lee could react, the girl suddenly charged at Lee. With the girl bridging the gap between them with frightening speed. When she reached Lee, she punched him in the groin. Next, she did a spinning kick to the back of his knees, dropping him to the concrete sidewalk. Finally, she did a single stomp on his stomach before Sam could grab her from behind, around her waist, and lift her away from Lee.
Lee was in so much pain that his vision was fading in and out, but he could still hear what was going on, and he could still reason and think fine.
Lee heard Sam strongly stated, in a firm, even tone of voice, “That is enough.”
The younger girl screamed, “Let me go! Let me go!”
By then, Lee could not clearly see with his eye, his vision had returned to the point he could see, and make out shapes, and colors.
Lee saw that Sam had picked up the girl by her waist, and held her in the air.
As Lee's vision when started to fade for a few seconds, he saw, whom he guessed was the teenage blond girl, who was just a yellow blur to his eyes at the moment, approach Sam, and the younger girl. Both of whom were also blurs to him.
Lee's vision came back a little, with things being blurry, but he could make out shapes again, He saw that Sam let the girl down on the ground, as the blond girl immediately grabbed the young girl's right wrist, with her left hand and the teenager dragged the girl away from Sam, and himself.
When the blond teenage was ten feet away, with the younger girl, she stopped walking. She turned and looked down at the to the younger girl. She sternly said, like a mother speaking to her child, “Stop this right now. Given our situation, do you really want to get the police's attention?”
The younger girl immediately stopped struggling, as she weakly said, “No.”
The blond replied, “Good.”
The blond girl turned to Sam and Lee, as she apologized, “I am apologize about all this. Usually, she is very nice. But, she misread a bottle of alcohol, we bought, thinking it was fruit juice. And she drank some of it. To be fair, the drink did taste like fruit juice. And given her size, she became easily drunk.”
Sam said, “Things like this happen. Just, please get her out of here.”
The blond girl quickly lead the younger girl away from the men, by the younger girl's wrist. With the two girls soon turned back around the corner, they had came from.
By then, Lee's vision had almost fully returned, but he was still in a lot of pain.
Lee sat up, as he groaned, “Did I just get my ass kicked by a drunk, six year old girl?”
Sam held back a snicker, as he answered, “It appears so.”
Lee commented, “The hard part about this to admit that she looked so cute when she did it.”
Sam could no longer hold in his mirth any longer, as he laughed.
Lee requested, “Sam, please help me up, and me back to the hotel.”
Sam made himself stop laughing, as he replied, “Sure.”
Sam then helped Lee stand up. Then, as they stood side by side, with Lee to Sam's right side, Sam put his right arm under Lee's right armpit, as he helped him up. Next, Lee put his left arm over Sam's left shoulder to steady himself.
Lee all but begged, in a pleading tone of voice, “And Sam, please don't tell the girls about this. If they learn about this, I would never live it down.”
Sam replied, “Don't worry, buddy. I won't.”
Lee thought, with joy, 'He called me buddy. He really does consider me his friend.'
As the men began their walk to the Devil's Hotel, Lee commented, in a slight groan, due to the physical pain he was still feeling, “My instincts tell me that I probably deserved that. But, I cannot place who they are, or why they would be upset with me. It is really sad when a person has done so many horrible things that they have forgotten a number of them. Even if that person didn't realize they were horrible when he committed them.”
Sam responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “You are not a horrible person, Lee. Just a person that has clearly made a few mistakes.”
Lee replied, “Thanks for the vote of confidence.”
Sam commented, “Look on the bright side. We are still not that far from the Devil Hotel. We will be there, before you know it. Then, you can rest.”
Lee joked, “That is why I am not asking you to carry me.”
Sam chuckled a little at Lee's joke, as he continued to help his friend to the hotel they were staying at.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Sam and Lee reached the Devil's Hotel.
As they entered the hotel, from the front entrance, with Lee hobbling through the front lobby, heading for the elevators. They passed by Aeryn and Violin. With Aeryn heading for the game room of the hotel. While, Violin was heading to do their laundry.
Both women were wearing casual clothing.
As the two women stopped to look at the two men, Violin commented, “Damn, boy. What happened to you?”
Sam and Lee stopped in their tracks, as they looked at the two women.
Lee omitted the age, and the gender, of his attacker, as he honestly answered, “I got jumped by an angry drunk that likes to fight dirty. But, I will be fine.”
Sam and Lee then turned and walked toward away from Aeryn and Violin, and towards the front elevator bays, to the right side of the front lobby.
Meanwhile, Aeryn and Violin turned, and continued on their way.
The two men soon made it to the elevator bay. Three minutes afterward that, they made it to Lee's hotel suite, on the third floor.
Lee unlocked the door, and Sam helped Lee to his bed.
As Lee laid down on his bed, on his back, in the darkness, with the only lighting coming from the ambient daylight light from another the curtains of the room. Sam looked down at him.
Sam asked, “Are you going to be alright?”
Lee groaned, “Now, that I am in my room. I will be fine. I should be up, and moving around, in a few hours.”
Sam stated, “Good. I got other things I can do today. I will see you around, Lee.”
Lee said, “You to, Sam. And thanks for the help.”
Sam commented, “That is what friends are for.”
Lee stated, “Yea. And you would the first I had ever had.”
Sam was quiet for a few seconds, before he responded, “Well, I am honored to be your first then.”
Lee said, “I appreciate that. And see you.”
Sam replied, “You as well.”
Sam then turned around and left Lee's room. He shut the door behind him. With the knob lock on the door automatically locking behind Sam.
Meanwhile, Lee just laid in bed, as he rested and recovered from his attack.
(_)
An hour and a half later, in one of the ground floor hallways, in the back of the hotel, nearby the beach, on the restaurant side of the hotel, Violin was walking towards the hotel restaurant. The location was by the auxiliary elevator bay, in the left, back corner of the hotel.
Aeryn and Violin's hotel room, was on that side of the building, facing the beach, with them on the tenth floor. Though, they used the lobby elevators more often than the auxiliary elevators.
Violin had just come from that elevator bay, as she headed down the hallway, towards the hotel restaurant.
This week, it was Violin's turn to do the laundry for Aeryn, and herself. After breakfast, and a little fun, Violin headed to do the get their dirty clothes from their suite, while Aeryn entertainment herself.
Violin then took their clothes, in a small basket, to the hotel laundromat. When Violin was finished, she took back up to their suite, separated them, folded them, and put away their clothing in their suites chest of drawer.
When Violin had finished, she saw on digital clock, by their bed, that it was about time to meet Aeryn for lunch at the hotel restaurant.
Violin had decided to take the back way to the hotel restaurant, and she rode an elevator from the auxiliary elevator down to the ground floor.
Violin was wearing casual clothing, which consisted of pants, a shirt, tennis shoes, among other things.
When Violin came within sight of the door the hotel restaurant, she saw that the five Lagoon sisters, and the three trio sisters were approaching her, from the direction of the restaurant entrance.
The eight women did not have their weapons on them, and they were dressed in their casual clothing.
Violin also noted there was no one else around.
Violin grimly thought, 'This cannot be good.'
Violin and eight teenage women, came to a stop ten feet from each other.
Violin then took a good hard look at them. The Lagoon sisters were standing to her left, with the trio sisters to her right.
Violin remained silent, as she thought, 'From their body language and facial expressions, they are clearly spoiling for a fight. They might take offense at anything I say. So, I will remain silent. Yet. They know how powerful I am. I could take them all on, and likely win. Not that I want to fight them, to begin with.'
As the teenage girls look at Violin, Rebecca stated, in an immature tone of voice, “Well, what do we have here?”
Kristina said, in an insincere tone of voice, “Looks like a, little girl lost, situation, to me.”
Violin thought, 'Just as I thought. They are baiting me. Let's get this over with.' She said, in a firm tone of voice, “I am not in the mood for this, girls.”
Molly flatly stated, “Well, tough. Because we are going to have a talk with you, about a few things.”
Violin inquired, “About what?”
Mikoto answered, for their group, “Well, our main problem is that you think your old enough to sit with the adults, at the big table.”
Violin thought, 'This is not good. They are likely trying to goad me into a fight, to have Aeryn, and I thrown out of our team. But, this won't work. Still, I have to try to defuse this situation.' She commented, “Given what most of us have been through. I think age is a subjective term.”
Sarah calmly said, “No. It isn't. There is a pecking order in such matters. And you broke through the line, and cut your way to the front.”
Violin thought, 'Oh. I know, now. They're jealous of me. I don't believe this. And not just the Lagoon sisters.'
Violin turned to the trio sisters, as she stated, “I could expect from the Lagoon sisters, but Mikoto, I thought you, Nodoka, and Yurika had more self-respect than to try something like this.”
Nodoka commented, “Maybe you do not know us as well as you think.”
Violin admitted, “Probably. So, what is the problem?”
Yukio said, “The problem is the way you act?”
Violin inquired, “How so?”
Yurika stated, “You act like an adult. And they treat you like an adult.”
Violin pointed out, “That is because I am an adult. And so are you. You are all at least eighteen, and adults, as well.”
Kristina said, “That is now what we are talking about. Somehow you have gained the respect of our parents. That we find annoying.”
Violin stated, “That is because I am not their kid. I am able to prove my worth to them, And I remember the experiences of my previous life.”
Molly replied, “My sisters, and I, are also reincarnated.”
Violin flatly responded, “I have not forgotten that fact.”
Molly commented, “Even so, we also remember our previous lives... Well, except for Yukio and Rebecca, for understandable reasons.”
Violin thought, 'I am not going to touch those two previous lives with a ten foot pole. Though, the others are fair game.' She said, “Yes. I realize this, as well.”
Nodoka whisper to her two sisters, “I am so happy we don't have to remember, and deal with previous lives.”
Mikoto and Yurika nodded in agreement.
A second later, while not looking in trio sisters direction, Violin said, “We heard that.”
Molly commented, “Yes. We heard that.”
This caused Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika to tense up for a few seconds.
Violin thought, 'I think we made our point. And I need to keep this conversation moving.' She turned to the Lagoon sisters, as she stated, “I know about your previous lives. And if you want to play this game. Fine. I was never a lunatic killer.”
Molly retorted, “No. Instead, you threatened to destroy an entire reality, over the welfare of your wife and child, whom you loved. When it comes to crime, we are amateurs compared to you, John.”
Violin casually admitted, “You have me there. Still, it is nice that we are not held responsible for the actions of our previous lives.”
The Lagoon girls nodded in agreement.
Molly agreed, “True.”
Sarah stated, “But, you went back to your old life, Violin.”
Violin said, “Yes. I did.”
Kristina asked, “Why?”
Violin answered, “Because, I had the opportunity to continue that life, which I happened to enjoy. And I did not want to tell you guys this, but I guess I am going to have to. While it was only several months for you Lagoon girls, living in another reality...”
Violin then turned to the trio, as she continued, “And only a few months for you three, as you travel the realities with your parents. Since you all chased Stan and Lewis across the multiverse.”
Violin looked back at the Lagoon sisters, as she went onto say, “It has been a lot longer for some of me, and both my families. I only look a few years older. But in truth, it has been twenty-two years since the last time you saw me. And it is my Ixioran Altairian alien heritage that has kept me young. Aeryn does not show that much age either, because she is Sebacean, and they age very slowly, as well.”
“I was with Aeryn, as we helped raise our son, Little D, to adulthood. I also helped my mother and step-father raise my half-brother, Yuuichi, to adulthood, as well. Both my son and brother are good friends, and they have started a thriving business together. We are all very proud of both of them. So, I am adult, many years older than any of you, in anyway you can think of.”
“As such, I deserve to have a seat at the big table.”
Violin turned her voice chilly, as she warned, “And I do not think you want to become violent with me. You know how powerful my mother, Birdy is. Well, I am almost as strong, as fast, as tough, and enduring in stamina, as my mother is. And if even you beat me. You will have to face my wife. And that is not counting the rest of my family. And I can assure you, when Aeryn is on the warpath, she makes Roberta look tame in comparison.”
“So, if you don't like me. Fine. This is not a teenage drama. We can simply agree not to have anything to do with each other. Like adults should do. Now, I am going to meet my wife for lunch. Good day, ladies.”
Violin's speech stunned the teenagers.
Violin used the opportunity to walk passed them, and down the hallway.
The teenagers turn to looked at Violin. They soon as the dark blue haired woman walk into the hotel restaurant, to join her wife for something to eat.
The teenagers then looked back at each other.
Sarah asked, “So, what do we do now?”
Molly inquired, “I was wondering. Do any of you feel like baking?”
Nodoka asked, “What do you mean?”
Molly used her right hand to pull out a clear plastic bag from her right side pants pocket. The bag was full of weed. She stated, “Pot brownies. I got the weed from a quality supplier I personally know in another reality, where it is legal.”
Yukio questioned, “What is the occasion?”
Molly smirked, as she answered, “Didn't you hear? It is a holiday, today. So, you guys want to help?
The other six teenage girl nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Rebecca suggested, “And we can share them with the others in the hotel bar.”
Molly complimented, “Great idea.”
Kristina inquired, “But, should we tell the others what we are serving them?”
The other seven teenagers look at each other. Then, the other seven said, almost in unison, “Nah.”
Sarah asked, “Now, where do we find a place to bake this stuff?”
With her left hand, Molly pulled out her reality device from her left side pants pocket. She stated, “We will cook these things back home. We will head over there, about an hour after we first left the island, to come to this reality. It will take about an hour and a half to prepare and bake the brownies. And another hour and a half for the brownies to properly cool. But, for those here, we will only be gone for a few minutes.”
Kristina said, “Sounds. I like great idea. And we will make sure we leave everything turned off when we are done. Now, let's find a quiet place to travel back home, in private.”
Yurika suggested, “How about we head up to one of our suites, and jump there?”
Molly complimented, “Intelligent thinking, Yurika. Now, let's go have some fun.”
The eight girls smiled, as they headed for the auxiliary elevator bays, and up a few floors, to where their rooms were located beside each other.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, the eight teenager girls, walked into the Devil's Hotel restaurant. Molly and Sarah were each holding up to silver platter, with a silver, dome shaped lids on top of their platters.
The teenagers looked around, and saw that their parents, and friends, were sitting in two, six chair tables, in the back right side of the room, in front of the stage.
There were other customers near the front of the bar, and at the bar counter.
At one table sat, Rock, Revy, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. In the other table sat, Violin, Aeryn, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua.
The two tables were beside each other, and from the direction of those in the chairs the women were sitting in, the teenagers could tell that all ten adult women were talking to each other.
And from their empty plates and nearly empty glasses, and bottles, by the women, they could women had just finished their lunches.
Molly thought, 'Perfect. They have finished lunch. And they are ready for our desert. We will even let Violin and Aeryn have some, as a peace offering. After thinking about what Violin said. She is right. This is not a teenage drama. We are all adults. And we should let bygones be bygones.'
Molly said, “Let Sarah, and I take lead.”
The other girls did as requested.
Molly and Sarah took lead, as the eight teenagers walked across the room, to meet with their friends and family.
While the teenagers were walking towards the group, the overhead Revy say, “That festival they have here was okay. With some interesting people manning the booths...”
As they reached the ten sitting women, the women stopped talking, and turned to look at the teenagers gathered in front of them, opposite to the stage, on the other side of their tables.
Rock asked, “What do you have there, girls?”
Molly said, “We thought you might care for some desert.”
Molly set her platter in the center of the table where Rock, Revy, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were seated at. Sarah placed her platter in the center of the table where Violin, Aeryn, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua were sitting at.
Molly and Sarah both lifted the silver, dome shaped, lids from their platter to reveal that each of the platters had pre-cut, square brownies, stacked on top of each other, like a pyramid. Each brownie was square shaped, and was two inches wide and long, and an inch thick.
Molly and Sarah then set the silver lids onto a nearby, empty table.
Revy was the first to pick up one of the brownies. She took a small bite, to taste it. After she chewed, and swallowed her bite, she smiled. She looked up at Molly and the other teenagers, as she asked, “Hmm. This is good. It's Dutch's recipe. So, I take it there is weed in this?”
Molly didn't even bother denying that fact, as she answered, “Yes. After eating a few of these, you will be stoned in a little while.”
Revy continued to smile, as she said, “I could use some relaxation.” She then took another larger bite of her brownies, and swallowed it.
Over on the other table, Lotton took one of the brownies, as she said, “I actually remember eating some of these brownies at a bikini party. They were good. And the after effects were good, as well.”
Sawyer took one as well, while she agreed, “You are right about that.”
Shenhua grabbed one, as she said, “When I get stoned, I think of Leigharch.”
Lotton commented, “Yea. We never did find out what happened to him. He just disappeared, after he escaped from that insane asylum. If we had found him, he, or she, might be with us, right now.”
Shenhua replied, “True. But, at least we know he came back from Mars.” She then giggled a little.
Sawyer took her first bite, and swallowed. She then theorized, “May he hooked up with someone, and is jumping realities. And we might someday run into him.” Lotton and Shenhua looked over at her. She shrugged, as she replied, “We can always hope.”
At the other table, Ranma then picked up a brownie, as she stated, “I could use a laugh.”
Akira did so as well, while she commented, “So, could I.”
Natsuru grabbed a brownie, as she joked, “Well here is to peer pressure.”
Nearby, Violin and Aeryn did not touch the brownies, as they turned to look at the teenage girls. Violin commented, “I don't see you girls grabbing any of them.”
Molly leaned over and picked on up, at the table Rock and Revy were at. She then took a bite up it, chewed it, and swallow it. She said, “See... And sorry about earlier. Think of this as a peace offering.”
Violin cracked a grin, as she replied, “Apology accepted.”
Aeryn just shrugged.
Both women then turned their attention back to the brownies on the table.
Meanwhile, Rock thought, 'What a minute, Aeryn is an alien, and Violin is part alien.' Rock turned to the other table, as she inquired, “Aeryn, Violin, is it safe for you two to eat this food, given your... Unique physiology?”
Aeryn and Violin turned to look at Rock. Aeryn answered, “Yes. I have had these... Chemicals before. They effect me in the same way as they do you.”
Violin commented, “Same here. We will be fine.”
The spouses then turned to the brownies at their table, and they each grabbed a brownie.
As Revy reached for her second brownie, she noticed that her children, and their friends were just standing there. She turned to the teenager adults, as she said, “Well girls, get yourselves a couple of these sweets. You made them. You should have some of them.”
Rebecca said, “Thanks mom.”
Except for Molly, whom had a browning, the other seven teenagers each got a brownie. After which, they sat down in a couple of tables nearby where the other women were sitting. With them turning their chairs to face the ten other women.
After the teenagers sat down, Revy turned back to the others, as her table, as she continued what she was saying, before the girls came into the room. She stated, “Alright. At I was saying. The festival in town was not that bad. Rock and I have been to better, but it okay.”
Rock agreed, “Revy is right about that.”
Revy commented, “Now, I will tell you about this interesting, no nonsense fortuneteller, we met at the festival. And I think she was legit...”
Revy then continued her story about the prophesy that the fortuneteller gave her.
(_)
At the bar counter, one of the waitresses walked up to Melvin, whom was standing behind the counter. She was the to ask Melvin about the women by the stage.
The waitress saw that Melvin was looking at the women by the stage. She asked, “Do you want us to do something about this? They are bringing in food, and I think they are pot brownies.”
Melvin continued to look at the group of women by the stated, as he answered, in a serious tone of voice, “No. That group is just walking trouble. And it is a holiday, yesterday, today, and tomorrow, which is an excuse to make trouble. If they want to get stoned. Let them. I will keep them out of trouble, and they will likely order more food from us. And I will take the heat if there is a problem.”
The waitress said, “I will let the other waitresses know.”
Melvin turned to the waitress, as he replied, “Thank you.”
The waitress walked turned and walked away, to deal with her more same customers, whom were closer to the entrance of the hotel restaurant, and away from the women having the open pot brownie party.
Meanwhile, when back to serving his customers at the bar counter, while he kept an occasionally eye on what Revy, Rock, and their group were doing.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant.
Lee was walking normally, as he made his way to the bar counter. He thought, 'Well, I seem to have mostly recovered from that pint-sized pounding. I am a little sore, but I will be fine in a few hours. I don't even have any bruising. I will just count myself lucky. Now, to get some lunch.'
While he continued towards the bar counter, he saw that the Revy and Rock's crew were all assembled in the back of the restaurant, having some sort of party.
Lee thought, 'It makes sense, considering it is a holiday, after all. I hope they have fun. Because, I am not in the mood to play mind games, right now.'
Lee then made it to the bar counter, near the entrance to the hotel restaurant.
As Lee sat down in a stool, Melvin walked over to him.
Lee looked up at the bartender, as he said, “Give me a few minutes to think about what I want.”
Melvin replied, “Okay.” He then went to check on his other customers.
(_)
Across the room by the stage, Violin was the first to notice that Lee, had walked into the restaurant and sat at the bar counter. She said, “Lee is back on his feet.”
Aeryn looked over at Lee, as she commented, “That was quick.”
Rock asked, “What happened?”
Aeryn stated, “He was attacked by a drunk. Sam had to help him back to the hotel.”
Revy commented, “That is always a risk when you got to a bar.”
Molly thought, 'Ever sense that night at the Rats Nest, Lee has shown to have some intelligence. And the fact that he slept with Eda shows he has a cunning side. In getting a beautiful woman like that to sleep with him. So, I want to see what he is like, when he is relaxed.'
Molly then got up from her seat.
Kristina turned to Molly, as she asked, “Where are you going?”
Molly turned to her sister, as she answered, “I am going to walk over to Lee, and invite him over. And offer him some of my brownies. Is that okay with you?”
Kristina replied, “Sure.”
Molly looked over at her parents, and their friends, as she inquired, “Are you okay with this?”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “That is fine with me.”
Rock stated, “Lee knows his manners.”
Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer nodded in agreement.
Sawyer said, “The last time we got involved with him was very entertaining. So, sure. Bring him over.”
Aeryn stated, “I see no problem with that.”
Violin commented, “As long as he behaves, I could care less, either way.”
Molly noticed that Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru was suspiciously quiet, as they looked at her.
Ranma asked, “But, should we let him eat some of the brownies?”
Molly thought, 'I wonder why you are asking? Still, I have a nice reply for you.' Molly pointed out, “If we don't, he would ask questions. He would likely be offended. And he has been polite to us. Besides, he is so uptight, that he needs to relax some.”
She mentally reflected, 'Try to beat that, Ranma.'
Ranma thought, 'After Lee's psychotic break last week, I am not sure it is wise to get him stoned. Still, he has had a rough day. And he is so uptight, that mellowing him out would be a good thing. And we can restraint him, if need be.'
Ranma conceded, “True. We will just have to watch him. In case he has a bad reaction.”
Natsuru commented, “We will just have to be watchful of the situation.” She thought, 'If we have a repeat situation with Lee. We will just keep him from harming himself, or others.'
Akira said, “Yes. We will just have to be careful.” She mentally added, 'With Lee.'
Ranma stated, “And if Lee has a bad reaction, we will just restrain him. But, not harm him. And we won't hold what he does while stoned, against him.”
Molly agreed, “That is fine with me. And let's not tell Lee what is in the brownies. Is will be more fun when he finds out on his own.”
Ranma shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'If he did know they are pot brownies, he will likely not eat them. And Molly is right. He does need to relax some.'
Most of the other women nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Molly then turned, and walked over to the bar counter.
(_)
A few seconds later, at the bar counter, Lee was about to give his Melvin his lunch order, from across the bar counter, when he heard a women's voice say, “Hello Lee.”
Melvin looked over Lee's shoulder, from where the voice came from. As Lee turned towards the female voice, as well.
Lee and Melvin saw that it was Molly.
Molly said, “We are having a party, and we would like to invite you to come over and join us.”
Lee thought, 'Oh great. I got no choice but to say, yes. Saying, no, to that many pretty women, especially dangerous, crazy women, is too risky. Tragically, this is the first time a girl has ever invited me to a party. I would have come with her, anyway. But, Melvin has been here the entire time. I want to see what he has to say before I go over there.'
Lee looked over at Melvin, while raising an eyebrow.
Melvin noticed Lee looking at him. Melvin thought, 'If I warn him about the pot brownies, it will pissed off the girls. But, as it is. He always is on his toes. So, he should be fine.”
Melvin cryptically said, “Go over there. They are not in any mood to harm anyone.”
Lee nodded. He then turned around to face Molly, as he answered, “Sure.”
Molly thought, 'Lee is more intelligent than I gave him credit for. He looked over at Melvin first, whom has been here, to gauge the situation. Then, he answered me. Very shrewd.'
Lee then got up from his seat, and walk with Molly, over towards the stage, and where the girls were sitting down.
After they approached the women, Molly sat down in her seat.
Lee noticed Akira offer a seat between her and Revy.
Lee thought, 'The pride wants to be playful. I might as well play. Upsetting them would be the last thing I want.'
Lee then sat down between Akira and Revy.
Violin turned to Lee, as she asked, “So, how are you doing?”
Lee turned to Violin and Aery, as he answered, “Better than I was earlier.”
Aeryn commented, “You were definitely not feeling well, earlier.”
Lee replied, “And I recovered.”
Revy asked, “Where is Sam?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as she stated, “He said he had errands to run. And I didn't ask any questions.”
Revy complimented, “Smart man.”
Molly suggested, “Have a brownie, Lee. They are homemade.”
Lee saw that all of the women were eating the brownies. He mentally guessed, 'Well, the girls are eating them. So, I guess they are safe.'
Lee then reached over and picked up one of the brownies in the silver platter in the middle of the table he was sitting at, and he picked up brownie in his right hand.
The women then watched take a small bite, chews and taste the brownie for a few seconds. He then swollowed a the piece of brownie in his mouth.
The woman all knew better than to react to Lee eating the brownie, and instead they acted casually.
Lee thought, 'These are pretty good. I have never had brownies that tasted like this before. I think after I finish this one, I will have more. I better compliment them.'
Lee said, “This are pretty good brownies.”
Molly happily replied, “Thank you.”
The women then continued their party, with Lee in attendance.
(_)
Across the room, Melvin watched Lee eat one of the brownies. He thought, 'Chances are Lee probably has never had pot before. And he does know how to recognize it. Well, what is done, is done. I just have to hope he doesn't get himself killed. Though, given it is a pot parties, in a little a while, none of them will be in the mood for violence. So, Lee should be fine.'
Melvin then went back to serving his customers, at the bar counter, and fixing mixed drinks, for the customers in the room.
(_)
Two hours later, Sam had finished visiting his girlfriend, and he felt he needed to go check on Lee. And he guessed that Lee was still at the hotel, recovering from his earlier attack.
Sam hadn't had lunch yet, so he felt going back to the Devil's Hotel was a good excuse to do both.
As Sam walked into the Devil's Hotel Restaurant, he saw something that he thought he would never see in his entire life.
Lee was sitting at a table, in the back of the room, facing the front wall of the restaurant, with his feet propped up on the table, giggling. He did this while sitting beside, Revy and Akira, in the middle of the other women around him. And all of them were happy for some reason.
Sam thought, with concern, 'Did hell freeze over while I was gone? Because there is something is seriously wrong with this situation.'
Sam looked over at Melvin, whom was looking at Sam.
Melvin just shrugged his shoulders.
Sam turned back to the group, as he thought, 'I see that Melvin is not going to be any help in this situation. Not that I blame him. He is sane. He knows better than to create problems with those women.'
Then, Sam heard what Lee was saying something, which was part of conversation that he had just walked into.
Lee explained, “Girls, it is like what is stated in the ancient writings found in sanskrit. The word, I, denotes just the soul. While the word, me, denotes the mind, body, and soul, as one unit. That is the difference.”
“Then, there is Plato's Parable of the Cave. Truly groundbreaking in its concept. Next, there is Zhuang's concept of the man and the butterfly. With him using dreams as a medium in the concept of transformation. It was brilliant. Finally, Archimedes stated that with a large enough fulcrum, he could move the world. And what greater fulcrum is there than one's imagination.”
Sam's jaw dropped, as he thought, 'I didn't know that Lee was a philosopher. But, the question is why is he acting this way? I need to find out. And I need to do so, now.'
Sam collective himself, as he walked over to the women.
When Sam reached Lee and the women, he was standing by the table Lee was sitting him. All four of the tables other women stopped their conversations, as they turned to look at Sam.
Lee then looked up at Sam. Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Hi Sam. I hope you had fun on your... Ah... Errands.”
Sam maintained a relaxed stance, as he looked at Lee. He said, in a calm tone of voice, “As much as could be expected. So, what is going on here?” He mentally added, 'Thank you, Lee. For still having enough sense to not mention I have a girlfriend, in front of these lunatics.'
Lee replied, while grinning ear to ear, “Just having some fun with some pretty women.”
The women all laughed at Lee's commented.
As the laughter died down, Sam saw Sarah stand up from her chair, by her sisters. She then walked over to the table that Lee was sitting at. She leaned over, and picked one of a handful of brownies still left on that platter.
Sarah then walked over to Sam with the brownies.
While smiling, Sarah said, in sickeningly sweet tone of voice, that did not fool Sam in the least, “Here. Have one.”
Sam took the brownie in his right hand. After which, Sarah walked back over to the chair she had been sitting in. She then sat back down into that chair.
Sam looked at the brownie in his right hand, for a few seconds. He then pinched off a bit of the browning with his left thumb and index finger, and put that small piece in his mouth.
Sam then tasted the brownie for a few seconds.
Sam immediately realized, as he thought, 'Weed... these are pot brownies.'
Sam spit out the piece of brownie that was in his mouth, and onto the floor, while he set the rest of the brownie on the table that Lee was at.
Sam then took a hard look at Lee, and the twenty-one women he was with.
Sam mentally realized, 'They are all stoned. I need to get Lee out of here, before he gets himself into trouble. The women are just too dangerous and unpredictable to leave Lee alone with.'
Sam turned to Lee, as he firmly ordered, “Lee, we are getting out of here.”
Revy said, “Ah, come on, Sam. Stay, and join the party.”
Sam looked over at Revy, as he said, “I have been to parties like this. They never go anywhere. Just a lot of laughter, but nothing else. It is a pure tease.”
Rock looked over at Revy, as she said, “He has got you there, Revy.”
Fortunately, Revy was not in the mood to get upset. She looked over at Rock, and she just shrugged her shoulders.
Lee looked up at Sam, while he smile. He flatly asked, “Why should I leave, when I am having so much fun?”
Sam thought, 'I need to see how much he knows about pot.' He inquired, “Lee, have you ever done weed before? Pot before?”
Lee answered, “No. Why?”
Sam responded, “Because, you just did. You are stoned, Lee. Very stoned.”
Lee replied, with denial in his tone of voice, “I am not stoned.”
The women laughed, for a few seconds. Ranma then turned to Lee, as she stated, “Yes, Lee. You are stoned. We are all stoned.”
Everyone then went quiet for a few seconds. As they waited to see how Lee would react.
Lee look then look at those around him, as he said, “I should be angry for all of you drugging me. But, I am just to damn happy to be angry. Cheech and Chong were right. I can see that being stoned truly is a way of life.”
In response to Lee's comment, the women laughed again, for a few seconds.
As everyone settled back down, Sam said, to Lee, “Come on, Lee. I will take you to your suite, and stay with you. This stuff should wear off in a few hours. Until then, we will watch some TV.”
Lee quietly said, “Okay.”
Lee set his feet off the table, and onto the floor. He then got up from the chair he was sitting in. And he walked behind Akira, and around the table, over to Sam, with Sam to Lee's right side.
Sam did not say anything to the women, as he put his left arm over Lee's right shoulder.
Sam then turned Lee around, to where Lee was facing the entrance of the room, with Lee's back to the women. While Sam was to Lee's left side. After which, Sam escorted his stoned friend out of the hotel restaurant, and to Lee's suite.
(_)
Around four hours later, in Lee's suite, the bedroom lamp on the nightstand by the bed, and TV, were on, with the curtains closed, as Sam sat with Lee, while the pot slowly worked out of Lee's system.
Lee has been sitting on his bed, as Sam had quietly sat in a chair at the table in Lee's room, as they watched TV.
While Lee was not completely sober, yet. He was sober enough to be lucid and realize what had happened.
And Lee was pissed off.
Lee sat on the bed, looking at the TV, which he really wasn't paying any attention to, as he thought, in anger more at himself, than the women whom tricked him, 'Damn it! I missed such a wonderful opportunity. If I had known they were pot brownies, I would have eaten very little. Also, I might have gotten one of them alone, and stolen their reality device. And I would be gone by now.”
“And the worst thing is I cannot do a damn thing about this situation of them tricking me. I don't dare think of getting back at them. Because all those women are badasses. Even though I am bigger and taller than them, I am sure any one of them could break me as easy as they could look at me. I am literally going to have to let this go.'
'Instead, I need to focus on my goals, and look at the bigger picture of not getting caught. And to happy that I was not caught in a such compromising position, while I figure out how to get one of their reality devices.'
Sam looked over at Lee, as he sat on his bed. Sam could tell from Lee's facial expressions, that he was not happy. Sam asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “Are you going to be okay, Lee?”
Lee looked over at Sam. Sam's concern caused Lee to immediately calm down. Lee thought, 'At least, I remember what happened. And Sam saved me. I owe him big for this. He is my one and only true friend. And I will some day make this up to him. It just won't be today. Though, I can still thank him.'
Lee answered, in a calm, though tired tone of voice, “Yea, Sam. I should be fine. And thanks for saving me.”
Sam smiled, as he replied, “This is what friends do.”
Lee commented, “I know. And I appreciate that. Still, the worst part of this whole situation, is that I never got any lunch. And I am starving.”
“I would like to get something to eat. But, I am still too stoned to leave the hotel. And I don't dare show my face today in the hotel restaurant. I don't even want to leave this room for the rest of the day, because I am so embarrassed with myself.”
Sam said, in a comforting tone of voice, “There is nothing to be embarrassed about, Lee. You did not do anything wrong. You just got played. It happens. Now, you just have to swallow your pride and move on.”
Lee admitted, “You're right. That is what I am trying to do, right now.”
Sam suggested, “Good. Sill, we can dine in and order room service to bring up something up to eat from the hotel restaurant, to this suite. I will even eat with you. Hell, I will pay for our meals.”
Lee smiled at Sam, as he complimented, “Thanks, Sam. I would like that. You are a true friend.”
While still slightly grinning, Sam calmly responded, “That is what I try to be.”
Sam and Lee then ordered some meals, and cold bottled sodas, from the hotel restaurant. Half an hour later, they were delivered to Lee's room.
After Lee and Sam finished eating. They played cards for a while, as they sat in chairs, across the table from each other, in Lee's suite. Only this time, they did not bet any money. They were just playing for fun.
Sam considered it wrong to bet money with Lee, given Lee was still slightly stoned. And Lee appreciated his friend's concern for his welfare.
A few hours later, Sam left for the night. And even though it was early in the evening, Lee decided it was time to get some rest, and sleep off the rest of the effects of the pot. Lee got ready for bed. After which, Lee turned off the TV, lamp light, and he went to bed early, to get some sleep.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 06: “Day of the Dead: Part Two: The First Few Times Around.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Lee's Reality. Location, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Date, November Second, Day of the Dead holiday. Place, Devil's Hotel and Resort. Time, Five AM.
Inside Lee's third story hotel suite, Lee opened his eyes to the darkness around him.
Lee felt as if he slept a good, sound sleep.
Lee thought, 'I guess that pot also helps with sleep. I feel good. Well rested. And I feel sober.'
Lee then turned to look at the digital clock in his bed room nightstand, by his bed, read in red LED numbers, Five AM sharp.
Lee laid back on his pillow, as he thought, 'Ah hell. It is only Five AM. Not even the hotel restaurant is open yet for breakfast. I think I will get a few more hours sleep.'
Lee then turned over and went back to sleep.
(_)
Three and a half hours later, Lee woke up again. He turned to see the clock state it was Eight thirty AM sharp.
The only light in the room was find the outside daylight coming in from around the curtains.
Lee thought, 'This is more like it. Time to get out of bed, get ready for the day, and then get something to eat. It is November second after all. The Day of the Dead. And I am likely soon to join the dead. So, I might as well enjoy today.'
Lee got up from his bed, he turned on his lamp light, as he began to face the day.
Soon after, Lee finished getting cleaned up, shaved, showered, dried, and dressed.
He then left his room for the elevator.
When Lee reached the ground floor, he exited the elevator, and walked towards the lobby.
A few seconds later, an elevator on the opposite side of the bay opened, with Rock and Revy on it. Whom were wearing casual clothing.
Revy and Rock briskly walked out of the elevator. With Revy to Lee's right side, and Rock to Lee's left side.
As the two women passed by Lee, Revy shoved Lee out of the way, as she harshly stated, “Out of my way.”
Revy's push did not knock Lee down, but he did wonder what was going on, as he looked at the two women.
Rock continued walking, as turned around, to walk backwards, so she could looked at Lee.
Lee then saw Rock rolled her eyes. She then looked back at Lee, turned back around, and walked away with Revy, away from Lee.
Lee thought, 'I don't want to know. Though, I would think after yesterday, Revy would be in a good mood. Now, let's meet Sam, and get some breakfast.'
As Lee walked into to the front lobby, from the elevator bay, he quickly saw where Sam was sitting in a chair, facing the entrance to the elevator bay, waiting for him.
Lee walked over to Sam, and he saw Sam turn in his direction to see him.
Lee then approached Sam. When he reached Sam, he smiled, as he looked down at Sam, in his chair. Lee asked, “Do you feel like getting some breakfast?”
Sam returned Lee smiled, as he replied, “Sure. Where too?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. Why not?' He said, “How about the hotel buffet. After girls actions yesterday, I doubt they will do anything to us today.”
Sam replied, “I agree.”
Sam then stood up, and both men headed for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Sam and Lee were sitting down at the bar counter, to the left middle side of the room. They sat in stools, side by side, with Lee to Sam's right side, as they each ate their meals, and drank their drinks, from the restaurant breakfast buffet. Each man had already paid for their own meal.
Meanwhile, Revy, Rock, and their crew were eating breakfast at the tables near the stage in back, right side of the hotel restaurant.
Both of Sam and Lee's meals, were half eaten, as they continued their conversation.
Lee asked, “I forget to ask. How was you time with you girlfriend, yesterday?”
Sam said, “Our meeting when fine. Though, she did talk about a few things which I was not expecting from her.'
Lee thought, 'She was probably asking Sam about more commitment to their relationship. Well, he has been here with me for the last few months. She is likely just pulled in her lease. And I am not jealous over the matter. Still, I do have to ask something, that I remember from yesterday. You never know. His plans may have changed for the better for me.
Lee inquired, “So, you said yesterday that were were going to see your girlfriend both that day, and today?”
Sam replied, “Yes.”
Lee thought, with slight disappointment, 'No dice. Though, I wonder.' Lee questioned, “While I respect your privacy. And I am not asking to meet her. I was wondering. Is she staying at this hotel?”
Sam stated, “I appreciate you respecting my privacy. And no. She is staying at a hotel across town. I told she wanted to avoid this hotel. And she listened to me. Though, I didn't tell her why.”
Lee complimented, “That is wise move on several levels. You don't want your loved ones near Revy and her lunatic band. Also, it is wise not to mention Revy, and the others, given they are hot women, your girlfriend may become jealous.”
Sam turned to look over at Revy's group. He then looked back at Lee, as he chuckled a little, for a few seconds.
As Sam calmed down, he responded, “Trust me. I have nothing to worry about, when it comes to my girlfriend being jealous of Revy and those with her. Still, you make some good points. Anyway, I might as well tell you want is going on. My girlfriend got in yesterday. And I saw her for a little while.”
“She has some good news. Her, and our friends, had a big payday at work. And I told her where I was, and she came her to celebrate. I am going to meet her in town, and we are going to spend the day enjoying the festival... And each other.”
Lee offered, “I know you don't drive. So, I can offer you a ride. It would save you cab fare.”
Sam teased. “Actually, I think I will just call a cab. I feel that it is safe.”
Lee realized that Sam was joking, as he mocked offense, as he stated, “Come on. You have ridden in my car with me, before, with me driving. I am a fairly safe driver.”
Sam playfully replied, “Not according to Rock.”
Lee halfheartedly commented, “You get into one game of chicken, and you never live it down.”
Sam cracked a grin, as he said, “That is the way things work”
Lee responded, “Anyway, I hope your girlfriend is nice.”
Lee saw Sam's slight grin turn into a full smile, as Sam stated, “She is. And she is a lot more well mannered than some of the women we know.”
Both men lightly chuckled, for a few seconds.
As both men calmed down, Sam continued,, “Also, she has a great sense of humor. And she can be surprisingly unpredictable. But, she is extremely sharp, and skilled at what she does.”
Lee said, “Let me guess. Asking what she does is one of those questions that you would have to kill me, if you told me the answer.”
Sam smirked, “Yes. Exactly.”
Lee replied, “No problem. And have fun.”
Sam said, “You too.”
Sam and Lee then continued their conversation on more casual matters.
Around ten minutes later, both men finished their meals, left their tips, and said goodbye to each other for the day.
After Lee and Sam left the hotel restaurant, Lee slowed down his pace, as he hung back in the hallway, while he watched Sam walked away, towards the lobby.
Lee thought, 'I really do hope that Sam has a great time with his girlfriend. Well, I might as well figure out what I am going to do today. I think I will go to the festival. Yesterday, gave me some weird detours. Even for this situation. But, there is no time like the present to head over that.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch. He then continued his thoughts, 'And given it is around nine thirty, the booths are already open. And I think I will take my Cadillac.'
Lee then walked down the hallway, through the front lobby, and out the front entrance.
As Lee walled outside, he saw that it was a sunny, comfortable day.
Lee soon made it to his pink car, and drove away to the festival.
For Lee, the rest of the day was interesting and fun, as he attended the festival. He even watched a street performance of a mariachi band. He put some money in a hat in front of them, when they were finished. And they were grateful.
By the time Lee returned to the hotel, it was already around seven thirty PM, and night had almost taken complete hold on the island.
Lee had already gotten supper at the festival.
As Lee walked into the lobby, he saw Lotton and Ranma walking together across the lobby, towards the hotel restaurant. They were both wearing nice dresses that flattered their figures.
Lee walked over to them, as he asked, “What is going?”
The two women stopped walking and turned towards him.
Lotton inquired, “You didn't hear, Lee?”
Lee answered, “No.”
Lotton stated, “The hotel staff this afternoon converted the hotel bar into a dance hall, for a dance party. Though, it was kind of short notice. So, it is understandable that you did not hear about it.”
Lee immediately smiled, as he said, with excitement in his tone of voice, “Cool.”
Ranma stated, in a sad tone of voice, “Unfortunately, it is couples only. The hotel even has a bouncer at the bar entrance, whom is enforcing that rule.”
Lotton commented, “Shenhua already entered with Sawyer. And Akira already went in with Natsuru. Me and Ranma are pairing up to get in, as well.”
Lee swiftly dropped his smile, as Ranma and Lotton gave him sympathizing looks on their faces.
Lee stated, in a more sedate tone of voice, “Well, have fun ladies. And see you later.”
Ranma said, in a comforting tone of voice, “We will. And don't worry, Lee. We have been there. I promise you, you will get your chance someday.”
Lee replied, “Thanks, Ranma.”
Ranma nodded once in response.
Both women then turned, and walked away from Lee. As soon as Ranma and Lotton turned down the hallway to the hotel restaurant, Lee walked over to the hallway leading to the hotel restaurant, as well.
Lee looked around the corner to see that Lotton and Ranma reach open door to the bar. Lee could hear the rock music coming from door. They were met by a large man, in a business suit, beside the door, whom Lee guessed was the bouncer. Lee then saw the two women enter.
Lee sadly thought, 'What a rotten way to end a nice day. Still, it is not the first party I didn't learn about until it started. And not the first party I was not able to go to. Honesty, I have never been to any dance parties... Oh well. It is not important. I will be dead soon enough... I might as well turn in early.'
Lee then turned around, and walked towards the elevator bay, to go to his suite, and get some sleep.
Thirty minutes later, Lee was ready for bed, and he went to sleep.
(_)
Inside Lee's suite, Lee opened his eyes in the darkness.
He felt rested, as he turned over to see that the clock by his stated, five AM sharp.
Lee thought, 'Five AM, again. I might as well just get some more sleep.'
Lee then went back to sleep.
The next time Lee open his eyes, he could see from the daylight peeking out in the morning, he turned over to see that it was eight thirty AM, sharp.
Lee thought, 'Eight thirty on the dot, again? Okay, this is odd. But, nothing to strange. I just need to get up, and get something to eat.'
Lee then got up, and he got ready for the day. He even dressed in the same clothing as he did the previous day. Including, what he always kept on. His glasses, baseball cap, and blue cloth jacket.
A little while later, he reaches the ground floor.
As soon as he exited elevator, he thought, 'I wonder.' He then decided to hang back in the elevator bay. With his back was less than a foot from the elevator doors that he had just walked through, as that elevator doors behind him harmlessly closed.
A few seconds later, Lee watched another elevator in front of him open, with Revy and Rock walking out. With Revy to Lee's right side, and Rock to Lee's left side. In the same casual clothing as the previous day.
The two women then briskly walked out of the elevator.
Revy looked over at him, and she gave him a scowl, but she then turned and walked away from him, and towards the lobby.
At the same time, Lee also saw Rock look over at him. She shrugged her shoulders, turned, and continued walking beside her lover, into the lobby.
Lee continued looking at them, as he thought, with interest, 'Okay. This is getting weird. Even for my situation. Except for their reaction, they look exactly as they did, yesterday. On November second... I need to check what the date is today. And the clerks here would be more than happy to tell me.'
Lee then walked passed Sam in the lobby, as he went straight to the check in desk.
One of the clerks on duty looked up at him, as he stated, in english, “Good morning. How may we be of help, sir?”
Lee calmly asked, “What is the date today?”
The clerk answered, “It is November second.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee turned away from the clerk. He thought, with wonder, 'Being a pro-cog, I have previously experienced, several times, in having knowledge of the future. And remembering the future events in sections of a few seconds, to a few minutes, in advance, once the events start. Usually, my precognition gives me only a few seconds of insight. Not that I am complaining. The right few seconds can mean a matter of life, or death.'
'Though, I have had an experience that let me remember up to five minutes into the future, before.'
'But, never this long. Maybe my precognition is on the fritz. Still, that just means I can enjoy this nice day again. Who am I to complain? It is a rare treat to relive a nice day over again. And the first time was pretty good, except for the last part, which is easily avoidable. Now, to talk to Sam, and have breakfast with him.'
Lee turned to Sam, and walked over to Sam. Lee then did the same thing he did with Sam the previous day, as they had their breakfast. Though, the conversation dealt with slightly different topics. But, the meal ended the same pleasant way it did yesterday, with both of them leaving to do their own things for the day.
When Lee exited the hotel, he saw the weather was the same as the previous day.
Lee then got into his car and went to the festival. This time, he explored part of the festival he like the first time around, and a few of the areas he didn't have time to check out the first time.
Lee even came back around the same time, to the hotel, to see Lotton and Ranma walking by him, in the front lobby.
As Lee passed by the two, well dressed women, he turn to them. He complimented, “Looking good. Have a great time at the party.”
Both women turned, and smiled at Lee, as they passed by him.
Ranma said, “Thanks.”
Lotton commented, “We appreciate that.”
Lee continued to walk, as he faced them. He replied, “You're welcome.” He then turned back around, as he made his way to the front elevator bay.
Lee then went to his hotel suite, and he went to bed.
(_)
Lee woke up, feeling rested.
He turned over to see the clock stated, Five AM, exactly.
Lee immediately sat up, as he said out loud, “You have got to be kidding me.” He mentally added, 'It could not be the same day again. Could it? If so, it is time to do something different.'
Lee turn on the lamp light, and got ready for the day, at Five AM.
Given how early it was, Lee took his time getting ready. He took a long hot shower, which he found was nice. And he did everything else he needed to do to face the day. From shaving to drying, to getting dressed.
Though, he got dressed in some different clothing. But, he kept on his glasses, baseball hat, and blue cloth jacket.
According to Lee's wrist watch, it was around five thirty-five AM when he took an elevator down to the ground floor.
Lee then exited the elevator and walked into the lobby, and up to the check in desk.
As Lee did so, Lee saw that there was no one else around, except for him, and the two clerks at the desk.
As he reached the check in desk, Lee saw that the clerks on duty was a different clerks than the one Lee had met in the previous to time.
Lee thought, 'That can just mean there is a shift change between now and nine in the morning.'
One of the clerks, a woman, looked up Lee, as she asked, in english, “Good morning. How may I be of help, sir?”
Lee thought, 'The same response as the other clerk. That is likely just a line they are trained to ask. Though, it is a polite question to make. And in response, I might as well, be polite.'
Lee politely requested, “Excuse me, ma'am. But, could you tell me the date?”
The woman said, “Sure. It is November Second. The Day of the Dead.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then turned around and walked to one of the nearby cushioned chairs, on the right side of the lobby, with the chair he picked out, facing the front doors to the entrance.
After Lee sat down down in the chair. He got comfortable, as he collected his thought.
Lee calmly thought, 'The strangeness level of my life just went up a few notches. I am in a time loop. But, this could be good, or bad, depending on the rules of the loop. Though, before I do anything to off the wall. I need to know if this loop resets at sleep, or at a given time. In the meantime, I can have another nice day.”
Lee got up from the chair he was sitting in, and he headed back to his room. While inside his suite, Lee watched some TV, until it was the exact time he had left to meet Sam for breakfast, for the previous the last two times.
Lee was careful to avoid Revy and Rock.
Lee then met with Sam in the lobby, and he did the same things he had done in the previous two days. Given him another nice day. Though, there was one major difference, with this repeat, then the last to days, concerning what Lee did when he returned to the hotel, at nightfall.
Lee went to his suite, but he did not go to bed. He just went to his suite, turned on his lamp light, and his TV.
Lee then turned one of the chairs, by the table, in his room, towards the TV. He then grabbed the TV remote, and sat in the chair he had turned to face the TV.
Lee then used the remote to find something to watch on TV, on one of the english channels, that kept his interested.
He spent the next few hours just watching TV, and occasionally using his personal deck of playing cards to play solitaire.
Suddenly, he precognitive sense told him to look at his digital wrist watch, right then.
Lee saw his wrist watch state.
11:59:57 PM
11:59:58 PM
11:59:59 PM
12:00:00 AM
The next thing Lee knew, everything went dark, and he open his eyes were suddenly closed.
As Lee opened his eyes, he still saw darkness, but his sense of touch told him what was going on around himself.
He was laying in his bed, wearing his sleeping clothes.
He turned to look at the clock, and it stated, five AM sharp.
Lee reached over and turned on the lamp light, by his bed.
Lee then sat up in his bed. As he looked around his room, he thought, 'So, this time loop does reset right at twelve midnight, local time. I am glad I kept my wrist watch properly set. So, I don't have to readjust it every time I do this reset. And I am glad that I cleaned my clothes the Halloween, the day before I was jumped, and then tricked into getting stoned. So, I don't have any immediate chores to think about.'
'Still, I don't know what I am going to do now.'
'I am caught in a time loop. I do not know how? Why? Nor, for how long? And it looks like the Ground Hogs day rules apply. Except for the loop resetting itself at midnight, local time. Also, no one remembers the time loop, except for myself. Or, else they would have reacted differently. Though, the only different reactions from people in these time loops so far, has been due my different actions, with their reactions responding in kind.'
Lee then cracked a grin, as a thought occurred to him. He mentally reflected, 'This means, if I get the timing right, I am pull some really insane shit, right before midnight, by mere seconds, and get away with it.'
'Speaking of which. This also means I have no worries about the consequences. Even if the time loop stops, except for that day. Though, I do not want to test to see if dying will not break the loop. And though the cancer has eaten some of my weight, I am still in fairly good shape, and healthy.'
'And all this together means that it looks like I am going to live for the foreseeable future. Along with that, I have plenty of money to burn. So, money is not issue for the moment.'
'So, what am I going to do first, to have some fun. I will not be evil. That is too cliche. But, I can be mischievous. My writings prove that. And I have always wanted to pull some pranks on people. But, I could never get away with it.'
'And the girls did trick me into getting stoned, yesterday. Or, three days ago. Depending on how one wants to look at it. And if I time these loops right, and I am careful, I don't have to worry payback from any of them.'
'Still, I won't intentionally do anything horrible to them. And best of all, I now have all the time in the world to master pranking, and everything else I am interested in.'
Lee slight grin turned into a full blow smile, as he continued his thoughts, 'So much to do. So much more time to do it in.'
'So, what prank will I do first?... Of course, that one. A good opening prank, where no one gets hurt. And it will let me cut my teeth on the concept of pranking. Besides, it is a classic.'
'Though, right now, I think I will just watch some TV, and try to figure out, when, and where, I am going to pull that prank off.'
(_)
Later, during the early afternoon of that day, Lee returned to the hotel lobby.
As Lee walked through to lobby, he saw, from the corner of his eye, to his left, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, and Lotton sitting in a couch.
While Lee passed by, he overheard Lotton say, “Did you hear? There is going to be a dance in the hotel bar, tonight.”
Ranma stated, “Yea. But, it is couples only. And we have been trying to decide which of us is going to miss the party.”
Lotton said, “No problem. I will go with one of you. And that way, all four of us, plus Shenhua and Sawyer, can go.”
Ranma complimented, “Great idea. Now, we just need something to wear.”
Lotton said, “I am willing to help.”
Lee thought, 'So, this is when, and where, they got the idea to go together, to that party. I will have to make a mental note of looking further into this dance party. Because, no other types of notes are going to stick in this time loop.'
Lee focus on what was in front of him, as he continued his thoughts, 'But first, I have some other fun to do.'
Lee soon approached the restroom doors for the hotel lobby, on the left side of the check in desk area.
The men's and women's restrooms were side by side. With the men's door on the right side, and the women's door on the left side.
Lee then entered the men's restroom.
When he got inside, he checked to make sure that there was no one else there. He even checked the stalls.
After Lee found himself alone, he pulled out two things from his pickets.
In his left hand was his disposable lighter. In his right hand was a cherry bomb.
Lee had bought the cherry bomb from a vendor at the festival, whom he ran across, that was selling fireworks.
Lee thought, 'I told the vendor what I wanted to do. And the vendor promised that this cherry bomb would do the trick.'
'And I am not worried about the vendor call Pedro and the police on me. Because by midnight to night, there will be another repeat, and no one will not I even did this. Nor, will there be any damage to prove that something happen.'
'I think I am coming to love temporal loops. Now, to have some fun.'
Lee then walked over to handicap stall, at the very end of the room.
He opened the door, and walked in the stall.
As he stood over the western style toilet, with the seat down, he said, out loud, “I freely admit this is extremely childish. But, it is a classic. I always want to do this. And it is a great way to start this adventure.”
Lee then lit the wick of the cherry bomb. As he pocketed the lighter with his left hand, he dropped the cherry bomb into the toilet bowl with his right hand.
Lee then flushed the toilet. Next, he back away, out of the stall, and against the far wall.
A few seconds later, Lee watched as all the toilets in the room erupted with water.
Lee thought, with amusement, and childish glee, 'That was so cool. Maybe, I will do that again.'
Suddenly, from the other side of the wall in front of him, Lee heard a woman scream.
Lee said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Ah oh.”
Lee mentally lamented, 'On second thought, maybe not. Of course. Now that I think about it. The plumping is tied together with the women's restroom next door. And one of the women was sitting down on the toilet, when it erupted. I have to get out of here, because chances are, it is one of the girls. And I am in for a literal world of hurt if they find me here.'
Lee turned and started walking towards the exit, to the restroom, but by the time he reached the sinks in the room, a woman walked in, and shut the door behind her, with Lee cut off for escaping. And Lee immediately recognized who the woman was.
Lee gulped, as he saw that Shenhua, in her white robes, was soaking wet. And she was holding both her kukri long knives in her hands.
Also, from the look on Shenhua's face promised murder in the bloodiest fashion possible.
As the two adults looked at each other, Lee commented, with concern in his tone of voice, “This is going to hurt? Isn't it?”
Shenhua grinned a slasher smile, as she answered, “Oh yes.”
Shenhua then charged at Lee, with her long knives.
The next thing Lee knew, he bolted up from his bed, in the darkness, as he said, “Ouch.”
A second later, he snickered a little bit. He then smirked, as he said out loud, “Still worth it.”
Then, a thought occurred to Lee, as he mentally wondered, 'Am I hurt? Or, was that just a reflex action from such a horrible death?'
Lee turned to the nightstand. As he saw the time was five AM sharp on the clock, he reached over and turned on the lamp light.
As soon as the light came on, Lee quickly check himself for injuries. A minute later, he found no signs of harm on his body. Also, as before, he was wearing his sleeping clothing, not the clothing he had on when he went out in public.
Lee then turned off the lamp light, as he laid back onto his pillow.
Lee happily thought, 'Good. It was just a reflex action. Though, her slices did hurt for a few seconds before I was killed. I was dead soon after. I wasn't really in pain when I woke up. I was just slightly confused. And I guess I no longer worry about accidentally dying. This does open up new territory for me.'
'Still, I need to keep my pranks simple, and work my way up. Also, I need to be more careful. And plan around where people might be. And how the plumbing in connected.'
'Though, I think I will first rest for a little while. As I collect my thoughts, and make my plans.'
While Lee did not go back to sleep, he laid in his bed, in the darkness, as he planned out the coming day for himself.
An hour and ten minutes later, Lee looked at the clock on his nightstand. It stated it was six ten AM.
Lee thought, 'I might as well get up. I have a some ideas for today. And I need to start early to do them. And if I pull this prank off just right, it will be hilarious to watch.'
Lee then sat up, turned on the lamp light, and get ready to face the day. Though, Lee took his time in doing so.
Lee was dress and ready by six fifty-fifty AM. He then headed down stairs, and to his car.
He then drove to a local a grocery store that opened at seven AM. He reached the store, just after it open. He then did some shopping, for a few items that he needed, to pull off his next prank.'
After which, he returned to the Devil's Hotel, to implement his plan.
During his stay at the Devil's Hotel. Lee occasionally gotten up earlier than normal for him, and he had learned the usual morning routines for the various members of Revy and Rock's group. Though, he did not know their full daily routines. This was because, Lee could sit in a chair, in the lobby, and watch them come down in the morning. And Lee found that the women did not usual vary their morning routines.
So, Lee had a good grip on who would came down for breakfast and when.
A little over an hour later, Lee then came into the breakfast buffet five minutes before Akira, and her family was be coming down. He paid for his meal, and got himself a plate and drink.
As Lee made his plate, and when he noticed no one was looking, Lee pulled out a small jar, from his right outside jacket pocket. Lee then spiked the re-fried beans portion of the breakfast buffet with a small jar of ferment soybeans. After which, he used the large spoon for the re-fried beans to stir the ferment soybeans.
After which, pocketed the empty jar, and Lee got finished his plate, got a glass of orange juice. He then saw in the front right corner table, that he and Sam occasionally sat in for dinner.
Lee then sat in a chair, with his back to the front right corner, which could get him a front row seat to what was about to happen next, without anyone noticing that Lee was looking at them.
A few minutes later, Akira and her family came down for breakfast. And Akira at some of the spike re-fried beans. Akira and her family then sat in their usual seats, on the back right corner of the room. Far away from Lee.
For Akira, twenty minutes later, in the restaurant, that morning, she had a case of blazing saddles, with a side order of pheromones.
Lee was careful to prevent himself from laughing, or showing any outward expression, as he quietly watched, from the bar counter, as many of the men, and some women, keep coming on to Akira, at the table she and her family were sitting at.
No one got hurt, but it was an embarrassing situation for everyone involved, except for Lee, himself.
Also, Lee was far enough away for Akira to not be affected by her pheromones.
Meanwhile, as the prank progressed, it took almost all of Lee's willpower not to burst out laughing at the scene in front of him.
Lee thought, 'Unfortunately, Mikoto and Yurika will only be effected by this in their male forms, which I have not seen them in. Still. All in all. This was a successful prank. Now, what shall I pull on them, next? And who will I pulled it on?'
'Though, it would be wise to learn more about what they do during the day, before I get to crazy with them. I don't want to make the same mistake as I did with Shenhua. That was literally a painful lesson to learn.'
A few minutes later, Akira got upset at the situation, and stormed out of the room, with the rest of her family following behind her, to comfort her. And even thought some of those in the room were still influenced by the pheromones, everyone knew better than to follow her.
(_)
Lee spent the next few hours just walking around the hotel, starting to learn where the women prefer to be, when they were in the hotel. Though, by lunch he decided to call it quits for the day, get something to eat, and have some fun.
That night, Lee was laying on his bed, wide awake. The lamp light as on, as he looked over at his clock to see that it was eleven fifty-seven PM.
Lee thought, 'As fun as these pranks are, I need to think about other things to keep me busy, or I will start getting temporal cabin fever crazy. Like Mister Murray in Groundhogs Day film, when his character slowly gets so depressed, that he suffers a suicide death montage. As he just wants to end it.'
'And things have finally started to get so interesting in my life, that suicide is the last thought on my mine. And that is the way I want things to stay. At least, for a while.'
'Well, one of the first things I can do is buy a laptop computer. I have the money, and this hotel does have free high-speed internet access for their customers.'
'Since there is the reset, I don't have to worry to much about being traced. This means I don't have to worry about what I download, or if the girls catch me doing so. I can download and watch movies to my heart's content. I already know all the free places and programs I need to do so.'
'Though, I might bribe the projector operator, whom is controlling the hotel theater, to play a few movies that I like. The type of movies that are better seen on the big screen. I might even call my family to talk to them.'
'It will be annoying always have to buy that laptop every morning, and loading the programs I need to do what I want to do. But, that cannot be helped. And it will likely only take an hour to do all that, leaving the rest of the day for me to have fun on the internet. I might even play a few computer games.'
'Though, I cannot do crap on an MMO, given that it takes days to level a character to where the game starts to get really interesting. But, I do know some old first person shooting games that are fairly fun, and I know the cheat codes to jump ahead to the fun parts. I can download those games from the internet.'
'Still, now that I think about the Groundhogs Day film, there is something important that I need call Pedro about, before the reset.'
Lee shifted his body around on his bed, so he could pick up the phone receiver on his nightstand, with his right hand.
Lee dialed Pedro's home phone number, he thought, 'I am glad that Pedro eventually gave me his home phone number, in case of an emergencies, after he got off of work. Still, he is going to be pissed I called him this late. Though, this is the best time to call him on this matter.'
After two rings, Pedro picked up the phone from his end. He answered, in english, “This better be important, Lee. You just woke me up.”
Lee thought, 'He must have caller ID.' He inquired, “Yes, Pedro. This is Lee. And I have an important question for you. Were there any reports of serious injuries, or deaths, on the island today?”
Pedro flatly answered, “No. It has actually been very quiet today. I even checked with them, half an hour ago, right before I went to bed.”
Lee said, “That is good to hear.”
Pedro commented, “Let me guess. We are trapped in a time loop, and you are the only one that remembers?
Lee asked, with surprise evident in his tone of voice, “How did you know? Do you remember the loops?
Pedro answered, “No. I don't. Still, being stuck in a time loop would be the only reason you would ask me this question, at this time of night. I would guess the reset is at twelve?... In a few minutes?”
Lee said, “Yes.”
Pedro requested, “Well, don't do anything too crazy.”
Lee replied, “I won't. And I don't plan to do.”
Pedro responded, “Good. If you need someone to talk to about this. Look me up. I don't want you going crazy. Considering what you have done while sober, I don't want to find out what you are capable of, when you become mentally unstable... Well, more so, than you already are.”
Lee replied, “You and me both.”
Pedro stated, “I am glad we both agree. Anyway, I know plenty of things to do on this island, and plenty of place to go, to keep you from going insane, for years on end. And have a great time.”
Lee said, “I will. Thank you. And see you later.”
Pedro replied, “Good night.” Pedro then hung up his end of line.
As Lee hung up his phone, he thought, 'At least this means I don't have to worry about rescuing anyone. This also means that I can just focus on having fun. And for once, living.'
Lee then looked at the clock, just as he watched the clock strike twelve midnight, and the reset happened.
The next thing Lee knew, he was laying in his bed, in darkness.
Lee opened his eyes, and turned to see that that the clock stated that it was five AM sharp.
Lee cracked a grin, as he asked himself, while he thought, 'Now, what am I going to do today?... I know.' He grin turned mischievous, as he continued his thoughts, 'Have fun.'
(_)
Over the course of the next two weeks, Lee kept upping the ante, with third party pranks on the girls, where Lee was not present went the pranks happen. He only set the trap, and watched the after effects, elsewhere, or from a distance.
Still, Lee did nothing horrible, only a little of this and that.
Though, Lee wisely did some reconnaissance before he got to serious with his pranking. He spent a few days learning the girls daily routines. So, he knew were everyone was, and he couple plan his pranks around them.
Afterward, he used their routines against them.
For example, Lee found out that most of them learned of the dance party at lunch. And during the afternoon, most of them washed the dresses they were planning to wear to the dance.
At noon, while everyone was at lunch, Lee spiked the liquid detergent everyone in the hotel used to clean their clothing at the laundry with some dye.
Lee had already also used the resets to learn more about the town, as well. With his car, he was no longer bound to learn about the town on foot. Like he was, when he first can to the island. And he learned where to get things, even on a holiday.
Getting the dye was not difficult for him.
And Lee picked out a dye that did not go well with any of the girl's hairs color, gray.
That night, Lee sat on a couch, that was set against the left, front side of the lobby windows.
As the women walked by, in pairs, and groups, Lee note that some of the women, as they passed by, were wearing casual clothing.
Lee thought, 'I guess they only brought one dress with them. Or, bought one dress. And with me ruining their dresses, they are going to have to go casual tonight.'
As soon as the last of the women Lee knew were heading to the party, were at the party, and there was no one else in the front lobby, but the two clerks at the check in desk, across the room. With the two clerks attention to some paperwork. Lee chuckled at his latest prank, which he got away with.
Speaking of the dance party in the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar. Given Lee did not know how to dance, he was not that crazy about going to that party. That, and the fact of trying to finding a date was difficult for him.
Lee found the trick that Bill Murray played in Groundhogs day film, learning about a woman's likes, and past, in one reset, and then using that information in the next reset, to try to score a date with that woman, did not work in real life. It just made women suspicious of him. And after attempting this on three different single women that he know of. With none of the said women belonging to Revy and Rock's crew. Lee gave up attempting getting a date that way.
So, Lee instead focused on his pranking.
Though, through all this, Lee was careful never to laugh in the presence of those he pranked. He even sometimes feign sympathy for his victims, while being in their presence.
And due to Lee's cautiousness, and careful planning, except for the cherry bomb indecent, Lee was never caught.
(_)
After a couple of weeks more of pranking, during one night, Lee was in his hotel suite, sitting on his bed, as he thought about what he was doing to do next.
Lee thought, 'I have not used the timing issues of these resets in my pranks, yet. Still, how should I go about it... Oh, that might work... It is very risky. It could get me into a whole lot of pain... But, the pay off would be work the risk.'
'Still, I am going to have to measure this by seconds... Now first, I need to find out how long, in seconds, that scene is. And what I want to show of that scene. And the exact number of seconds from the section I am showing. After that, it is simple bribery. And timing. I will also make sure the watch the person I am bribing is sync to mine.'
'And it will take around a week to figure out the logistics of this prank. But, it will be worth it.'
(_)
A week of resets later, it was nearly midnight, as Lee quietly entered in the Devil's Hotel theater.
Lee then quietly sat down, in the chair, behind where Revy and Rock were sitting, as they watched the movie on the screen. With Rock to Lee's left side, and Revy to Lee's right side.
Lee thought, 'The one thing I found interesting about Rock and Revy, is that their routines occasionally change. At first I thought they remembered, then I realized that it was a case of my actions causing a rippling effect in their actions.”
“I am not sure how that works, with them, because I have had nothing to do wit them. But, it is not serious. And what I do know is they don't stay all night at the party. They go to a movie. Then, they go to the dance party. Then, they decide to watch a movie until midnight, when everything resets.'
'On that note, the movies always seem to be changing, as well, in the hotel theater. Not, that I am complaining.'
'Still, I can use all this in my prank. And this is going to be a good one. Now, what time exactly is it. Timing has to be perfect for this to work.'
Lee then checked his digital watch. His watch stated it was exactly one minute to midnight, and the temporal reset.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Yes. As I thought. I got exactly one minute until reset. It took me almost a week to work out the details to this prank. But, now I am ready to pull the trigger on it. The first two parts were easy enough. I just borrowed a copy of the episode from the Chief Del Soto had. And bribing the projector operator was just a matter of handing him the cash for this loop. I will get that money back when the reset occurs.'
'Also, I made sure the projector's watch was sync to my own watch. So, he does exactly what I want to happen, when I want it to happen, without any mistakes.'
'This is all due to that fact that timing is everything on this prank. Too early invites painful reprisal. Too late prevents delivery. At exactly thirty seconds till reset, the trigger will be pulled.'
At exactly thirty seconds to midnight, the movie suddenly stopped, and immediately switch to a scene, from the Black Lagoon anime, episode seven, Calm Down Two Men, where Balalaika was editing porn, with Revy and Rock behind her, on screen.
Revy on the screen asked, “Hold on a sec. Is she taking it up the ass?”
Balalaika on the screen replied, “Sure is.”
Lee thought, 'Good, This is a exact scene, and second on the episode, I wanted to appear. Now, for the reaction.'
20 seconds.
In the seat, right in front of Lee, Revy yelled, in surprise, “What the hell?!”
15 seconds.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Now, for the joke.'
Lee calmly spoke up, “Revy, Rock, I have a question I always wanted to ask you two lovebirds.”
Revy and Rock swiftly turned around to face him.
10 seconds
The two women could see that Lee had a wicked grin on his lips, and a purely lecherous look to his face.
Lee casually asked, “Revy, how many times have you used packets of instant spring of drown man to plow Rock in the ass?”
5 seconds.
The priceless looks on both Revy and Rock's faces showed that the answer to Lee's question was, a lot.
3, 2, 1...
Reset.
Inside Lee's hotel room, at five AM sharp, Lee bolted up right, in the darkness, as he laughed himself silly over the looks on Revy and Rock's faces.
After a couple of minutes of laughing, Lee began to calm down enough to stated, out loud, “The looks on their faces were priceless. I think I will do that again tonight. And maybe a few nights after that.” Lee's lip curled into a mischievous grin, as he continued, “But, what will I do in the meantime?”
(_)
Around a week later, just after a reset, in bed, at five AM, Lee thought, 'Okay. That joke is getting old. Now, what am I going to do?'
A few seconds later, Lee mentally realized, 'Well, with this time issue working, I can do all sort so fun. And I have always wanted to kiss pretty women. And here is my chance. I think I will start with the crazy ones first. I will kiss the craziest one first. And the craziest one is not Revy, it is Rock. Those that would say that Revy is the craziest don't understand the concept of crazy. Being crazy is one thing. Chasing after crazy is a whole other level of crazy.'
'And I don't care if Rock was once a man, she is a hot woman, now.'
(_)
That night, by his wrist watch, it was less than a minute before midnight, from the hallway, near the entrance to the theater.
Lee had bribed the projectionist to stop the movie, a few minutes before midnight. Forcing everyone to leave the theater, in search of something else to do.
Lee watched the people of the theater finally walk out.
Lee thought, 'Damn, I bribe the projection operator to stop the movie over a minute ago. I am surprised it took this long for the people start to leave. Now, where are they?'
Lee then spotted Revy and Rock walking out. He thought, 'There they are. Still, I wonder why Revy has been in such a bad mood in these loops. Not that it really matters to me. Now, to do this, before I run out of time.'
Lee then walked up to Rock and Revy.
As Lee approach them, Rock and Revy looked over at Lee.
Lee then walked up close to Rock. To close for either Rock, nor Revy's comfort.
Rock looked up at Lee, as she asked, “Is there something I can do for you, Lee?”
Lee smirked, as he answered, “Yes. There is?”
With only five seconds on the clock, Lee swiftly dipped her back with his arms, while planting a kiss on Rock's lips.
Rock was too stunned to react. While from the corner of his eye, Lee could see Revy's eyes went while with surprise.
A second later, the reset happened, and Lee found himself in the darkness of his room, in his bed.
Lee just laid in his bed, with his eyes opening in the darkness. He thought, “That went better than I expected. Now, for Revy. And then, the others.'
(_)
That night, less than a minute before midnight, Lee did the same thing he did the previous night, in bribing the projection operator.
Lee stood in hallway, outside of the hotel theater.
Lee watched at Rock and Revy exited the theater.
This time, Lee approached Revy.
Revy looked up at Lee, as she growled, “What do you want?”
Lee swiftly used his arms to dip Revy, as he kissed her.
From the corner of his eye, he saw Rock's jaw drop in surprise.
Revy had just enough time to place both of her hands on the sides of Lee's face.
Then, the reset happened.
In his bed, in the darkness of his suite, Lee thought, “Revy was probably going to snap my neck. Still, it doesn't matter. Now, that I have kissed those two. Who will be next?... How about Violin and Aeryn?... Fortunately, I can arrange for the others to leave the party. By having the front desk call them out. So, that will not be a problem.”
(_)
Violin was not hard. Lee just dipped her, and kissed her.
Aeryn was a little more trickery. Being a train soldier, trying the simple dip her would only get his arms broken. So, instead Lee just distracted her, with the, oh my god, what is that?, distraction. With Lee pointing behind them.
This made both Aeryn and Violin look away. When the two women looked back at Lee, Lee just pecked Aeryn on her lips, two seconds before the reset.
Aeryn did not have time to react, before the reset.
After those two time loops, it was early morning, as Lee laid in his bed.
Lee thought, 'Okay. Let's kiss Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira today, and the next two loops. Though, kissing them will take a little preparation. But, not too much. On second thought, this will probably take a few loops to test out my plans. But, that will not be a problem.'
Near midnight, on the current loop, and for the next two loops, Lee set his sights on Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira. In that order.
Along with their skills and unpredictability, these women were experienced in dealing with awkward situations.
Lee knew beforehand, given their history, these women would not have a, deer caught in headlights situation, like the others. Given they had all been unexpectedly kissed before.
So, as to not have the other two lovers attack him, while he kissed the third lover on her lips, Lee made sure to give an excuse to separate the women in the trio that he was after.
Lee then lead that woman to the game room of the hotel, where there was no one else that night, and he kiss that woman there right before midnight.
The excuse was simple. He said he knew someone that was a master pool shark, in the game room, that would like to meet the specific woman Lee was targeting. With the game room usually being empty at that time of night, during the time loops.
Which was only half a lie. Lee did know a real master at pool, Sam. But, Sam was not currently in the game room.
Over the next three nights of resets, Lee testing this excuse on each of the three lovers. He found that he was able to separate the one he was interested in, and get them to the game room. And he timed things so they would get to the game room just as the reset hit.
With that part of his plan confirmed, Lee adjusted his plan by about a minute, to get the kiss he wanted before the reset.
Lee was able to do the dip and kiss trick on Natsuru, without a problem.
Lee knew better than to try that with Ranma. But, Lee came up with a much simpler approach to getting a kiss from Ranma.
(_)
In the game room, a minute before midnight, Ranma and Lee were standing a few feet apart, as they faced each other.
Ranma asked, “I don't see any pool shark here. What is going on here?”
Lee stated, “I am sorry. There is no pool shark here.”
Lee lied, “Instead, Sam dared me, if I could kiss a pretty woman before midnight. It is a few minutes to midnight. And I am getting kind of desperate. And I did not want to ask this in front of your two lovers. But, Ranma. You are not only a smoking hot redhead, you are the most laid back, practical woman I know of. So, can I please just get a perk on your lips to win this bet?”
Ranma giggled for a few seconds. She then shrugged, as she said, “Sure. Because you asked so nicely. Now, come here.”
Lee walked up to Ranma, and he lead down.
Ranma then lifted her feet onto her tip toes, to reach Lee's face, as she peck Lee on the lips, with own her lips.
As Ranma lowered herself back down, Lee leaned up, and took a few steps back.
Lee said, “Thank you.
Ranma smiled, as she said, “You're welcome.”
Then, the reset hit.
(_)
The next was Akira. As Lee kissed Akira, Lee could tell that Akira was into it.
After the reset, in his bed, Lee thought, 'I wonder... I think I will kiss Akira again.'
(_)
Close to midnight, that night, Lee allotted a full minute more, in the game room.
This time, as he kissed Akira, he noted that Akira wanted to do some tongue, and Lee obliged.
With mere seconds before the reset, Lee broke their kiss.
Lee back away far enough to see Akira's face.
Lee saw Akira was smirking.
While Akira smirked, she complimented, “Nice kiss. Though, the tongue needs work.”
Lee replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
The reset then occurred.
(_)
As Lee kissed other women, one night after another, to his surprise, he found that Sawyer was into kissing him, as well.
And Lee kissed Sawyer a few times, during the next few time loops.
Lee found that getting a kiss from Shenhua was surprisingly easy.
Lotton took work. She saw the trick a mile away. Making Lee wonder if she had done this trick before, herself.
After a few attempts, Lee just did the simple thing. He paid her thousand dollars for a simple kiss, right before midnight. And Lotton was more than happy to give that kiss, for a grand.
Kissing the eight teenager women, of Rock and Revy's crew, was a real challenge. Dealing with timing, guile, and skill. And in some cases, it required a few time loops to kiss one of the teenagers.
But, after almost two weeks of attempts, Lee was able to say that he has kissed all of the teenager women on their lips.
(_)
During the morning, a few minutes after the reset, of the last kiss Lee did towards a woman, Lee was in his suite, sitting in his bed, in the darkness, as he thought, 'Well, that's it. With all twenty-one girls women kiss, now what? I could try to kiss the Rats Nest bartender, or Yolanda. Already kissed Eda when we slept together. But, I won't. They had nothing to do with getting me stoned. And it would be wrong for me to do so.'
'Still, the question remains. What am I going to do now? I am not going to take Pedro up on his offer for his list of entertainment places and events, until I start to run out of ideas. Which is going to be a while. If ever.'
'Though, I should start to figure out how I should end these pranks. I do need to start to wind them down, and move on.'
'Well, I think I might go to the roof, in a few hours, and take a look around town, in the morning sunlight. That may clear my head, and give me ideas on what I am going to do next.'
(_)
It was around eight thirty AM, as Lee made it up to the top of the stairwell, and to the door to the roof. He found that the door unlocked.
Lee opened the door, and walked outside, onto the large flat concrete roof, surrounded by a meter high concrete brick parapet along the outer walls. There were metal grates place throughout the floor of the roof to collect and transfer water through pipes down the building and into the sewers beneath the hotel building and nearby parking lot.
Lee came to a stop just outside the roof doorway, with the roof door still open. What Lee saw happening on the roof surprised him.
As the sun showed down in the cool, sunny morning day, Lee saw Melvin in t-shirt, sweat pants, and shoe. Melvin was holding a combat knife in his right hand, while doing exercises.
Melvin was about thirty feet from Lee, closer to the middle of the roof. And Melvin had his back turned to Lee.
As such, Lee quickly realized that Melvin did not yet see him.
Lee spent the next few minutes watching Melvin practice what were clearly hand to hand, and melee combat techniques, that Melvin had learned, and mastered, for years.
While the exercises were slightly ridged, with minor jerks, due to the age of Melvin's muscles and joints. Lee could tell the fluidity and precision that Melvin had in his exercisers.
Lee thought, 'Any doubts that Melvin is a badass has finally been put to risk. It takes years of training and experience, to do exercise like that, so well. I am so happy I can call him a friend. Because, I would not want him as an enemy.'
Suddenly, Melvin turned and he saw Lee. He immediately stopped what he was doing. He calmly asked, “Lee, what are you doing here?”
Lee honestly answered, “I came up here to clear my head, as I looked out on the cityscape of the island.”
Melvin responded, “Those are good reasons. I come up here to do the same thing.”
Lee inquired, “So Melvin, what are you doing up here?”
Melvin stated, “I come here to exercise, almost every morning.”
Lee complimented, “And it shows.”
Melvin cracked a grin, as he said, “Thank you.”
Lee asked, “You're welcome. So, what is with the knife?”
Melvin sheathed his blade, in the sheath hidden under his shirt, attached to a strap around his waist, behind his lower back. He then stated, “Long story. But, let's just say that my former captain nicknamed me, The Blade. And with good reason.”
Lee smiled, as he said, in a casual tone of voice, “Did Balalaika give you that name, while you were in Hotel Moscow? Or, did that happen all the way back in Afghanistan?”
Melvin eyes went wide, as he inquired, “How did you know?”
Lee flatly answered, “I have seen the Black Lagoon series. And the Black Lagoon omakes. After seeing Revy and Rock show up. It was not hard to realize what your, trading hotel for another hotel, comment meant.”
Melvin complimented, “That is very insightful of you. And I was given that title, by Balalaika, while serving in Afghanistan.”
Lee replied, “Interesting. Well, I am in hiding, as well. So, I can sympathize with your situation.”
Melvin said, “I appreciate that.”
Lee mentioned, “Also, cracking jokes while in hiding is not a wise idea. Leaving clues for someone, about one's life, is a very bad idea.”
Melvin conceded, “You are correct. And please keep this to yourself.”
Lee replied, “I will.” He mentally added, 'And you won't remember this after the time loop resets.'
Melvin said, “It is nice to have someone to finally talk to about this. Come by the bar in a few of hours, after Revy and her crew leave. And we will talk.
Lee smiled, as he replied, “Sure. And I will be there.” He then turned around, and walked back inside, as Melvin went back to his exercises.
(_)
Two hours later, Lee came by the hotel restaurant, and sat in a stool, at the bar counter. He looked around, and he saw that there was no one else there, except for him and Melvin. Given it was an off hour, the lack of customers and staff was not surprising.
Melvin then walked up to Lee, from across the bar counter, and they had a nice conversation. With Melvin telling Lee some of about his past. And Lee happily listened to Melvin talk for the next hour. Until people started coming in for lunch.
At the end of the conversation, Lee stated, “Well Melvin, thank you for telling me your life's story.”
Melvin happily responded, “No problem. Maybe someday, you will tell me some of your life.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “Maybe.” Lee then got off his bar stool, and exited the restaurant.
(_)
That night, in his suited, Lee was watching TV, as he sat at a chair, at his table. He was also playing solitary with his playing cards.
Lee thought, 'It is interesting that I did not create Melvin, but he has lead such an interesting life story. He even told me some of what happened while Hotel Moscow worked Roanapur, then with Hotel Moscow work for Chang, at her tower, and what Hotel Moscow did after Chang's Tower fell.'
'And if it won't get me in trouble, and he would remember it. I would gladly tell Melvin my life's story. But, I don't like to repeat myself. Which is ironic, considering we are all stuck in a time loop, that only I remember.'
'Though, if this time loop ever does end, maybe I will tell him who I am. But, that is for later.'
Now, I need to probably start wrapping up these pranks and move on to maybe focusing on learning some things.'
'The questions are. How do I wrap up these pranks? Answer. One awesome prank.'
'Then, what do I do? Start learning things from people. It is time I stop having some much children fun. And for me to finally fully grow up and start working towards making myself a better person.'
'And how do I learn convince people to teach me what I want to learn? Simple. I appeal to their greed. And it will be so simple to do. I will use money, and an excuse, in the same way Mister Murray's character, Phil Connors, did it in the Groundhogs Day film. Which I have enjoyed occasionally watching, in the hotel theater.'
'I even made a drinking game out of watching that film. Given the similarities I have with Phil, right now. I was just never a jackass, like Phil use to be, before his time loop experiences.'
'Though, back on track. When it comes to learning these skilled, I will just learn a few hours every day. I do not want to burn myself out. And I have all the time I could ever need. And eventually, I will master what I am learning. And move on to learning something else.'
'Also, given I have enough money to do so. I can learn multiple things during the same day. Without stealing the cash I need. And when I am not taking instructions from someone, I can read.'
'I know this town has a library. I just hope they have english books. At least until I learn to speak, read, and write, spanish. On that note, I need to find someone that knows spanish, whom can teach me. Not, Pedro, nor Melvin, nor the Rats Nest bartender. All three of them are busy.'
'Perhaps, Sam knows spanish. I think I have heard him speak spanish a few times, while I was around him. When I reach the point where I need to learn spanish, I will just ask him. If he does. I will ask him to teach me. Or, even pay him to do so. Even with him girlfriend in town. I can probably convince him to do so. And if he does not know spanish, I will find someone else to learn from. Even if I have to pay them.'
'And paying people really doesn't matter, because after the reset, I get my money back. So, that is a small matter.'
'Though, that will come later. First, I want to learn how to fight some. I have a badass crew in this hotel that could, in theory, teach me a lot. Even though they are after me. Though, they don't know it is me they are after. It is just a matter figuring exactly how to convince them to teach me, without them learning who I am, during one of these time loops.'
'And what I want to learn first.'
Lee then looked down at the cards he is using to play solitary, as he decided what he wanted to learn first. He thought, 'Given the anti-weapons laws in this nation. And with people after me. I need a weapon. And I know just what to make into my weapon. It will will even fit my gambler motif, that I have going.'
' But first, I need to deal with ending this pranking, on a good note, for me. And I know how to end this, on a strong note. Plus, I will meaning to test out a very wild theory I have on the theories of the multiverse.'
(_)
The next morning, Lee got up, got ready, and waited until his usual time to get some breakfast at the hotel breakfast buffet, with Sam.
And even though it was a time loop, and Sam did not remember a thing after each reset, Lee did enjoy spending time with Sam.
After Lee got finished with breakfast with Sam, Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “Sam, good luck with girlfriend today?”
Sam turned to Lee, as he asked, “Thanks. So, what are you doing today?”
Lee honest answered, “I think I will stick around the hotel today.”
Sam replied, “Okay. See you.”
Sam left a small tip on the table. He then got out of his stool, and left for the exit to the hotel hallway.
After Lee saw Sam exit the room, he turned towards where the women were sitting at, in the back right part of the restaurant.
Lee saw that Rock, Revy and the others were at their tables, by the stage.
Lee thought, 'Now, to implement my plan.'
Lee got up from the bar counter, and walked over to women.
As Lee did so, he thought, 'This will also be a good test case for my future plans. And the girls would never think the writer would be crazy enough to hire them to do this. But, I got to maintain my poker face, as I do this. Still, this is going to be the ultimate prank, on so many levels, and it is hard to keep a straight face when I think about. Though, I will have to strive to do so.'
'And if I am right. I already know which one of them is going to take the bait.'
Lee maintained his calm poker mask, as he approached the women.
When he came within ten feet of Revy and Rock's group, the women looked up at him.
As Lee came to a stop, six feet from the nearest table of women, he looked over at them. Though, Lee was careful not to look at Rock, as he asked, “Good morning ladies. I was wondering. Are any of you good with english. Text wise that is?”
Rock spoke up, “I am.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as he thought, 'Just as I guess. Rock would be the volunteer for this prank. As I had hoped she would be.'
Lee used his left hand to pull a roll of hundred dollars bills from his left pants pocket. He held the roll of money in his left hand, as he stated, “I need someone to proofread something. I should be finished with it by tonight. And I am willing to pay for a quick job of looking at what I am working on. I need you to read it, then proof it. The payment is two grand. Half now. Half after the person has looked at my work.”
Revy inquired, “And what are you working on?”
Lee turned to Revy, as he calmly answered, “Just a short story that has been rattling around in my head for a while.”
Suddenly, all the women tensed up.
Lee casually inquired, in an innocent tone of voice, “What is something I said?”
Rock lied, “No. But, I can look at your writings, if you want?”
Lee walked over to the table that Rock and Revy were at. He placed the money on the table. He looked at Rock, as he stated, “I will see you in the lobby, tonight around eleven forty PM. Please, do not be late.”
Lee thought, 'If my timing is correct. Then, this is just enough time to pull this prank, without any chance for them to respond.'
Rock said, “I will be there.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Rock.”
Lee then turned and walked away. He headed towards the exit to the hotel restaurant.
Meanwhile, Akira spoke up, “Okay. I am going to say what everyone here is thinking. Could Lee actually be the writer? And, if so, he has been under our nose the entire time.”
Revy admitted, “It is possible.”
Ranma pointed out, “But, would the writer be crazy enough to ask us, whom he knows is hunting him, to proofread his own work?”
Natsuru said, “Ranma, does have a point. That would be whole new level of insanity.”
Lotton commented, “Natsuru and Ranma both make good point. Either Lee is not the writer, or he is vastly more insane, and intelligent, than we thought. Because only a lunatic would attempt this. And only a genius would get away with it. That would make Lee, literally a mad genius.”
Aeryn joked, “Or, a redneck.”
Violin just looked over at her wife, and she playfully stuck out her tongue, at Aeryn.
In response, Aeryn gave Violin a casual glance towards her.
Rock stated, “Ranma is right. The writer would never do this. He is not that stupid. Let alone that crazy. And it is a good way for me to make a quick buck.”
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee soon exited the hotel restaurant. He head for the lobby, and the front parking lot.
He then got into his pink car, and drove off to an electronics store that he knew was open.
At the electronics store, Lee bought a laptop computer, computer mouse, and an ergonomic keyboard.
Lee soon brought these items, in a large bag, to his suite.
When he got to his bedroom, Lee closed and locked the deadbolt to door, behind him.
Lee then pulled out the boxes the items were in, from the bag, and he put them on his bed.
After he opened all the items, he set them on the table in his room.
Next, Lee opened the laptop computer. And he hooked the keyboard and mouse to it. Finally, he booted up the laptop, and logged onto the premade account on the laptop.
It took Lee only a couple of minutes to both boot up the computer, and access the internet.
Given, during the time loops, Lee had bought a laptop computer and hooked it to the hotel internet before, this did not take him long to do.
It was another half hour before he downloaded and loaded the web browser, video-audio codec player, torrent program, and the word processing program, he enjoyed using.
Once he was done getting everything ready. He loaded up the word processor, while downloading some music he liked.
He created a file name for what he was about to work on.
While Lee continued his work, he thought, “Fortunately, I have all day, so I have plenty of time to do this. Unfortunately, it will be erased in the next reset. So, I think will limit how much I type on this story. Ten pages should be enough. Though, this story does deserve more like twenty pages. But, I just don't have the time, and I cannot save my work in the next loop.'
'Anyway, the music I like to play, in a single track loop, will be fully downloaded in a few minutes. I will then start playing the music, and I get a bottle of water, from my fridge. After which, I will start my typing magic. And in doing so, test out a theory, as well.'
Outside of getting something to eat, and bathroom breaks, Lee spent the day doing the one things he loved to do most in the world, writing stories.
(_)
It was eleven forty at night, as Lee sat at in cushioned chair, in the hotel lobby. The chair face the check in desk, allowing him to see the hallways of the hotel. In front of the chair was a low laying square table. And directly in front of Lee, across the table, was another cushioned chair that was facing him.
Lee had his laptop computer set on the low table in front of him. The laptop was open, with the story ready to be read from the top of the screen, downward.
Lee thought, 'My one regret is I cannot save this story for the next loop. Now, the question is, will Rock show up. If she doesn't, I am going to be upset, with all this hard work being wasted.'
A few seconds later, Lee saw Rock walked into the lobby with Revy.
Lee thought, 'Good. She came. And she brought Revy with her. Not that is matters.'
As they came closer, Lee waved at them, with his right hand, as he said, “Over here.”
The two women looked over at him.
Revy turned to Rock, as she said, “I am heading to bed.”
Rock looked over at her love, as she replied, “Good night.”
Revy smiled at her love, and then headed for the elevators.
Lee thought, 'This is even better. Which Revy not here, and so close. I decrease my chances of being hurt. Though, there is still a chance of me being hurt. Given, who is here.'
Lee then looked around the lobby, to see some of the rest of Rock and Revy's group sitting in various chairs and couches, in their dresses. As they had just come from the party. And they were not resting, before they headed to bed.
Meanwhile, Rock walked over to Lee, and she sat down in the cushioned chair sitting across the table from the chair Lee was sitting in.
Rock got comfortable in her chair, as she said, “Now, let's see what you have been up to, Lee.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as he honestly stated, “I consider this my finest work in the last few months.” He then leaned forward, used his hands to turn the open laptop around, and push it to the other side of table, so Rock could looked a the story.
Lee then leaned back in his chair, as he added, “Just press the down arrow key to keep reading. It is around ten pages long.
Rock replied, “Okay.” She then began reading the story.
As Rock began reading the story, her jaw dropped at what it was about.
Though, Rock could not stop herself from paging down, as she slowly read the entire story. She read slowly, because she wanted to read every single detail of the story. Because, she felt that she should dare not skim any of the story.
And the story was shocking for her on several levels.
The story was about the first time that Stan and Lewis Lowe went to one of the Lagoon bikini party. How, a few days of staying girls had caused them two go a little crazy, and they tried turned the Lagoon PT boat into a giant, walking robot.
The sisters were caught before they could accomplish their goal. Included, in the story, was the aftermath of the Lowe siblings being caught. Of how no one was harmed, but it was mildly funny. And it came out that if those two stayed girls for three, or more days, they become mad geniuses, like their mother use to be. Instead of them just being sane geniuses in their male forms.
With that being why the Lowe siblings were not punished by Dutch, nor anyone else, for messing with the Lagoon.
Stan and Lowe even helped fix what they did to the Lagoon, and soon the PT boat was back to the way it was.
Also, the brothers, and the parents agreed they would look into medication for this temporary insanity, if it became a problem.
For Rock, as she read the story, the most insane part of the situation was that these events, detailed in the story, actually happened to her, and her friends.
And on a brief mention of those events at the very end of Badasses Of the Multiverse Book Four. With those statements being nowhere near as detailed as this story.
It is eleven fifty-eight PM, when Rock finished reading the story.
As Rock finished reading the story, she looked up to see Lee looking back at her, with a smirk on his face.
While smiling, Lee casually asked, “So, what do you think?”
Rock thought with both fear and fascination of the situation before her, 'Lee is the writer! And he is that insane! Still, how did he know what happened to us, after the fact!? In this situation, the most important question isn't that he is the writer. That is a forgone conclusion. The question is, how he knew all of this after the fact? So, I first have to ask...
Rock demanded, “How did you know that all happened so precisely?”
Lee intentionally stuttered, “D... D... Delirious.”
Rock got the John Candy movie reference. Her eyes widened, as she thought, 'He wrote it. And he likely did so, today, right now, in the present. Not in the past, before we came to this reality. And by doing so, he made it happen. Oh god! The implications of this!' She then accused, “You wrote this story! And by doing so, you made it happen in the past! And you wrote it right now, in the present! You're the writer!”
Lee grin became a little wider, as he responded, “Guilty as charged.”
Rock looked around and she saw a few of her friends walking through the lobby. She turned to them, as she yelled, “Girls! It's him! Lee's the writer! Get him!”
The women looked over at Rock, and then at Lee.
A second later, the women charged at Lee. Though, Rock remained her seat, as she was still to stunned by what she had just experience, to physically confront the writer.
As Lee watched as the girls charge at him, he risked a glance at his wrist watch.
Just as the women were about to reach him, Lee continued to look at his watch, as he said out loud, “Three. Two. One.”
Suddenly, Lee woke up in his bed again, in the darkness of his room.
Lee opens his eyes, as he chuckled. He happily thought, 'Now, that is how you do a prank. Looks like my theory was correct. A person can effect another reality, by writing about it in a separate reality. Even if it deals with the past, present, or future, part of that reality, and it does not effect what is current happening in one's own reality. Or, what is already written about of that reality.'
'I wonder if conflicting writings about one reality is one of the ways a reality branches out into parallel realities. It would explain how such conflicting writing do not create a paradox. And I was careful about that short story I wrote. To make sure it fit with the rest of the stories I wrote about Rock, Revy, and their family and friends.'
'Though, all of this is actually very scary when I think about it. Still, I need one more day. I want to test out if this reality bending with writing works in this reality. Though, I doubt it.'
Later that morning, after Lee got ready for the day, and then got some breakfast with Sam. After he and Sam parted ways for the day, Lee took his car, and he bought a computer, along with a few items for the computer. He brought the items to his room. Next, Lee set up everything on his table, as he did the day before. He booted up the laptop computer, loaded the programs, and he tested the theory, by writing that it would lightly rain in the middle of that afternoon.
Instead, that afternoon, the weather was sunny, and cool, like it was during every time loop on the island.
Though, Lee did hope out a little hope, as he patiently waited for it to rain. Or, at least sprinkle a little.
That night, right after sunset, Lee realized it was not going to rain, as he sat in one of his chairs, at the table in the room, as he faced the glass door to his suite's balcony. With the curtains open.
Lee thought, 'I guess a person can only use their imagination and creative abilities, such as writing, to bend other realities. Not their own reality that person is currently existing in. Though, I can see the reasons for preventing this. If one could been their own realities with their imagination and creative abilities, reality would likely collapse from everyone doing so.'
'Still, this is a major revelation, that could be seriously abuse, on levels never conceived before.'
And as such, this will be one secret that I will need to take to my grave.'
'Now, I need to move onto doing other more productive matters. Starting tomorrow morning. Or, today, after the reset. I still don't know the proper terminology for this situation.'
Lee chuckled a little, as he continued his thoughts, 'But, that is for later. I think I will turn in early. Maybe catch a dream or two, before the rest. I really do miss dreaming a lot. Due to these reset. Still, that cannot be helped. And it a small price for everything I can do, without worry. And there is so much that I can now do, that I don't know when I am going to stop. Or, if I am ever going to stop.'
Lee then got up from the chair he was sitting in. Next, he closed the curtains and got ready for bed.
Soon, Lee turned off the lights and TV in his room, and he went to sleep on his bed. With him having a few dreams, before the reset took effect.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 07: “Day of the Dead: Part Three: Learning The Ropes.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
At the Devil's Hotel, November second, the Day of the Dead, during the next morning of the time loop, after Lee's failed attempt to change his home reality by writing about his home reality, inside Lee's suite, Lee woke up at five AM, and his first thought were. 'Now, onto my lessons.'
Lee then got up, and got dressed to face the day.
Around nine AM, Lee finished his breakfast at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, and Sam had left to be with his girlfriend.
As Lee sat at his usual place at the bar counter of the Devil's Hotel restaurant, he occasionally looked over his right shoulder to see Revy, Rock, and their group, sitting in their usual places in the back of the room.
When Lee saw all of them sitting down, he waited a few minutes.
Lee then got up, and he calmly walked over to the group of twenty-one women.
The women were having their breakfast and talking to each other. Though, some of them had already come in earlier and eaten, with those women just staying to talk to their friends and family.
As Lee approached the group of badass women, he thought, 'I just have to remember that they don't recall a thing from these loops. So, for them, this would be the first time I approach them. And I can pull a variation of that trick I did with Rock, on most of them, that I did to Rock two loops ago. Though, I am sure one or two of them could wise up to where I am doing during a single loop. So, I will still have to be careful.'
'Also, I have to remain calm to sell this trick.'
When Lee reached the tables that the women were sitting at, he came to a stop, a few feet from the tables.
In response, the women looked up at him.
Ranma was the first to speak to Lee, “Morning Lee. What can we do for you?”
Lee was careful not to look at Shenhua, as he calmly requested, “I saw something on TV list night, that I want to approach you ladies about. This person on TV was throwing knives. And I was wondering... Given your group's... Diverse range of skills, if there are any knife throwers in your group… And I am willing to pay for a two hour lesson today.”
Shenhua asked, “I am skilled with knives. How much money are we talking about?”
Lee pulled out a roll of hundred dollar bills in his right hand, from his front left pants pocket. He offered, “Shenhua, I will pay you two grand for two hours of your life. With you teaching me the basics of knife throwing. Half now. Have at the completion of your lessons.”
Shenhua stated, “You have a deal, Lee.”
Lee inquired, “Now, when, and where do you want to meet?”
Shenhua turned to Akira, as she asked, “Is there a dart board in the game room?”
Akira turned to Shenhua, as she answered, “Yes.”
Shenhua turn to Lee, as she said, “Meet me in the game room in one hour.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch, to check the time. It was nine five AM.
Lee turned to look at Shenhua, as he said, “I will see you in the game room at ten o'clock.”
Shenhua replied, “That will be fine.”
Lee said, “And here is the first thousand.” He thought, 'While the the game room will likely be empty then. If someone is there. I will just slip them a fifty dollar bill to leave. That will not cause any problems.'
Lee walked over to the table Shenhua was at. He set the rolled of hundred dollar bills in front of Shenhua. Lee then took a few steps back, as he continued to look at Shenhua.
Shenhua picked up the roll of money, and opened it. She quickly counter ten hundred dollar bills. As she pocketed the money, she looked up at Lee, and gave him a sweet, innocent smile. She said, “Pleasure doing business with you, Lee.”
Lee simply nodded, turned around, and began to walking towards the exit to the hotel restaurant.
With his back turned to the women, Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'That was too easy. Just rinse, and repeat. And I can do this for as long as the time loops continue. I got plenty of money to do a few lessons each day with the girls. But, I am going to start with one lesson a day, and see how that goes.'
Meanwhile, at the tables in the back of the restaurant, where the women were sitting, Sawyer asked, “Are you really going to teach him, Shenhua?”
Shenhua shrugged, “Sure. He is polite, and he is willing to pay good money for a lesson. I will just let him practice with my kunai on the dart board in the game room. I am not exerting myself, and I get to show off my own skills to someone else that shows interest in them. It is a win, win for me.”
Sawyer agreed, “I can see point on that.”
The women then went back to having their breakfast, and talking to each other.
(_)
An hour later, Lee was in the hotel game room in the back left side of the hotel building, as Shenhua walked inside the room.
Lee heard her foot steps, and he turned to face her. Lee thought, 'There were two people in the room, when I got here a few minutes ago. And I had to slip them each fifty dollars each. Both fortunately, both were more than happy to leave, after I paid them the money to do so.'
Meanwhile, Shenhua saw that Lee was the only other person in the room.
As Shenhua approached Lee, she complimented, “I do admire punctuality.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Shenhua.”
When Shenhua can to a stop in front of Lee, and a few feet away from him, she looked over to her left side, and she saw they were roughly thirty feet from the dart board by the nearby wall. With nothing between her and the dart board.
Lee noticed this, as he commented, “Is thirty feet fine? Or, do you want to be further away? Or, closer?”
Shenhua thought, 'He is thinking ahead. Nice.' She continued to look at the dart board, with her also being able to see Lee, in the right side of her peripheral vision, as she said, “This will be fine.”
Shenhua then used her right hand, as she reached down to his right upper thigh, to pulled out one of her small kunai throwing knives from her right garter belt. Shenhua skillful used her right index finger and middle finger to pulled out the knife, without harming herself.
Lee wisely kept his eyes above Shenhua's neckline. This did not go unnoticed by Shenhua, as she cracked a grin.
Shenhua then held up her right hand, as she held her small throwing knife between her right index and middle fingers, with the blade pointing outward from her hand, for Lee to see, in front of him.
Shenhua continued to look at the dart board, as she held the throwing knife in place. stated, “This is a kunai. A japanese throwing knife. Note how I am holding it.”
Shenhua noticed the Lee was looked very intensely at her right hand, as he studied the position and angle at in how she was holding her knife.
Shenhua added, “Now, watch as I throw this.”
Lee then watched as Shenhua threw her knife at the dart board.
The tip of the blade hit the dead center of the dart board, in the bull's eye.
Shenhua then pulled out another throwing knife, between her fingers.
Though, this time, Lee noted that the angle of how she held the kunai was opposite to how it was before. With her holding the pointed end, with the end of the hilt facing him.
Shenhua turned around to face Lee, as she held the knife blade between her fingers. She said, “Here. You try.”
Lee thought, 'If I accidentally cut her, she will probably kill me. Though, she using proper knife safety. If one hands someone a open bladed knife, they are to have the bottom of the hilt pointed towards the person that he or she is giving the knife to.'
Lee gently gripped small hilt of the blade between his right index and thumb. He did not pulled on the throwing knife. Instead, he waited for Shenhua to let go of the knife.
As Shenhua let go of the knife, she thought, 'Good. As I hoped. Lee knows basic knife safety. That saves me from explaining that to him. And hurting him, if he accidentally cut me.'
Lee carefully used both of his hands to positioned the blade between his right index and middle fingers on the small hilt, using the same the angle the blade, as when the previous knife was in Shenhua's right hand.
Lee then attempted to imitate Shenhua's throw, and he hit the outer edge of the dart board, but the knife bounced off, and landed on the floor.
Shenhua complimented, “Not bad for the first time. Though, I noticed that you were holding the knife at a slightly wrong angle, you let go a bit to soon, and you did not apply enough force.”
She then pulled out another knife, and handed it to him.
Lee was just as careful with retrieving the second knife he was given, as he did with the first knife he had been given.
After Lee positioned the knife between his right fingers, he held his right hand help to Shenhua, as he asked, “Is this the proper position, and angle?
Shenhua looked at Lee's hand, she answered, “Push the blade slightly further away from you.”
Lee used his left fingers to do as he was instructed, in changing the angle of the blade between his right fingers.
Shenhua looked at his hand again, as she said, “That is fine. Now, remember what I said. Let go a split second longer than last time, and use a little more force in your thrown. But not too much force.”
Lee looked over at the dart board, and he did at Shenhua told him to, as took aim, and he threw the throwing knife.
This time, the blade of the knife embedded itself in the wall, right beside the left part of the dart board.
Shenhua stated, “Well, that is an improvement. Now, we just have to work on your aim.”
Shenhua then spent the next two hours introducing Lee on how to throw knives. With Lee carefully collecting the blades, now and then.
Shenhua found Lee to be a good student, whom was polite, and open to what she had to tell him.
And at the end of the first lesson, both of them had told the other that they had a good time with the lessons. Lee then paid Shenhua the other thousand dollars, in ten hundred dollars bills, and the two adults then peacefully parted ways for the rest of the day.
On the next day of the time loop, Lee repeated what he did the first day, with getting Shenhua to teach him how to throw knives.
And Lee continued to do this, day after day.
As Lee improved in his skill, his changed his excuse to that he use to knife thrower when he was younger, and he would like to have someone help him brush up on his skills.
(_)
Three months of time loops later, it was the middle of the afternoon, in the hotel lobby, as Lee has set up two dart boards on the left, lower wall of the lobby, near the windows.
Lee stood thirty feet away from the dart boards, which was about halfway between the entryway side windows, and the wall with the dart boards.
Lee has two small pedestal tables to both his sides, at waist level. He has a stack of a hundred and eight playing cards on each pedestal table.
And Lee was literally using each of his hands to swipe a card from the top of each deck on the two pedestal tables, with out disturbing the cards below the top cards he pulled from the decks.
He then had a card in the index and middle fingers of both his hands, as he throw a card at each of the dart boards, at the same time.
Both cards embedded themselves in the bull of each dart board.
A second later, Lee repeated the process, with the two new cards into the bulls of the board, slicing throw the two cards that had previously been there.
Lee then did it again, over and over, as he was dual wielding his playing cards, by throwing them at the same time.
Lee showed flawless skill in his throwing, as almost all the cards hit the bulls of the board, and either cut into the previous cards, or bounced off, onto the floor.
Though, Lee was also using his precognition to help make sure the cards hit their targets.
Due to all this, Lee was able to mix it to where he could swap out his targets, so instead of throwing the cards in his left hand at the left board, and the cards in his right hand, at the right board, he switched. And Lee started throwing the right cards at the left dart board, and the left cards at the right dart board.
As Lee did this, Lee was still able to constantly hit both bulls at once, with the cards either slicing through the previous cards, and embedding into the dart boards, or bouncing off.
Lee could also throw cards while moving around, with him being able to hit moving targets, as he moved around.
Though, the card throwing form that Lee found was easiest for him, was for him to use his left hand hold the deck of cards, with his left thumb on top sliding the top card, to be pulled next, while throwing one card at a time, with his right index, and middle fingers.
Most of the people in the front lobby silently watched as Lee did this. The other people in the lobby briskly left to get their friends, and bring them back to the front lobby to see the spectacle that Lee was put on.
By the time Lee finished, he looked to his right, to see the room was crowded. With almost all the crowd looking at him, with happy expressions on their faces.
As the people realized that Lee had run out of cards, and was finished with his trick, they all started clapping in applause for the skills Lee had just demonstrated.
While Lee looked around, he thought, with amazement, 'Wow. I can really put on a show. And I do enjoy the applause.'
'Also, a card thrower is sometimes call a death dealer. Pun intended. I have literally become a dual wielding death dealer. Cool. The only down side to throwing with playing cards is that I can only throw one card at a time, per hand. This is because the angle has to be perfect with the throw, or the card will go sideways and fall harmlessly onto the ground, or it would just bounce off what it hit.'
'Though, Shenhua did teach me how to properly throw multiple knives at one, in one hand. And I can do it with both hands at the same time.'
'Still, a deck of cards will make a nice, hidden weapon to have. And it will not run afoul of this nations anti-weapons laws.'
Lee then noticed Revy, Rock, Shenhua, and their group, including the teenagers, standing together, as they watching.
From the looks on their faces, and from the other faces, he saw they were all truly impressed with his skills.
Shenhua asked, “Who taught you how to throw cards like that?”
Lee did not show any outward emotion, as he laughed on the inside. Lee casually stated, “Just an asian lady I know.”
Shenhua replied, “Okay.”
Ranma complimented, “Nice circus trick.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Not bad.”
Lee replied, “Thank you for the compliment.” Lee thought, 'Given her attitude, that is probably the best I am going to get out of her. But, it is clear everyone else is impressed. Now, I wonder how easily it will be to get Shenhua to teach me to fight with long knives.'
(_)
A few time loops later, it was morning, as Lee was having breakfast with Sam, at the bar counter, in the hotel restaurant. In their usual seats, side by side, with Lee to Sam's right side.
As Lee ate his meal, he was thinking about his current problems. Lee thought, 'Since I have having such a wonderful time learning Shenhua, on how to throw knives, I did not realize I would have problems learning from her, on how to fight with long knives.'
'Unfortunately, every time I convinced her to teach me, she became suspicious. So, learning from her, on that, is out. Still, I feel I will still be able to likely convince her to teach me how to read, writer, and speak, chinese, at some point in these time loops.'
'Still, I need to find someone to teach me at least the basics in how to fight.'
Lee then looked over, to his left side, at Sam, as he continued his thoughts, 'I have seen Sam in a few fights with drunks at the Rats Nests. He can hold his own in a fight. And I can at least learn the basics from him. Now, if I could just convince him to help me.'
Lee said, “Sam?”
Sam looked over at Lee.
Lee calmly said, “Sam, I know you are busy with your girlfriend, today. But, I have a favor to ask of you.”
Sam inquired, “What is it, Lee?”
Lee let out a breath. He then requested, in a polite tone of voice, “I know you know how to fight. I was wondering if you could give me a few lessons, before you join with your girlfriend, today.”
Sam asked, “How much you willing to pay?”
Lee wondered, 'How did he know I was going to offer money for these lessons?... Wait a minute. He might be guessing, or joking. Either way, he is clearly interested.'
Lee answered, “Two grand, U.S. cash.”
Sam took a very hard look into Lee's eyes for a few seconds. Sam then relaxed his expression, as he kindly offered, “I will do it for free.”
Lee happily replied, “Thank you, Sam.”
Sam stated, “Still, I got to call my girlfriend about not meeting her. But, I think she will understand my reasons.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. So, when, and where, do you want to do this?”
Sam calmly answered, “There are some mats in the hotel gym. We will do start about thirty minutes after breakfast. I have found it is best to let one's food settle, before sparing. And what you have on will be fine to be trained in. Though, I suggest losing the hat, glasses, and jacket.”
Lee thought, 'Sam, you are not going to remember this after the reset, so this will not be a problem.' He said, “That is fine with me.”
Sam replied, “Good.”
The two men then went back to eating their breakfast.
(_)
An hour later, in the hotel gym, there were only a few people in he gym at the time.
On the matted floor, Lee found himself thrown on his back, by Sam, for a third time.
Sam looked down at Lee, as he offered Lee a hand up, with his right hand, for a third time.
Lee took Sam's right hand, for a third time, as he said, “Thanks.”
While Lee stood up, Sam stated, “I take it no one ever taught you how to defend yourself.”
As Lee found his footing, he let go of Sam's right hand. He admitted, “No one has ever trusted me enough to do so.”
Sam had a sorrowful look in his eyes, as he stated, in a sad tone of voice, “That is unfortunate. But, if you are willing to learn, I will teach you. No matter how long it takes.”
Lee replied, “I am willing to learn.”
Sam stated, “Good. But, I am going to need commitment from you.”
Lee promised, “You will have it.”
Sam commented, “Also, given you are not in great shape, you will have to overcome that limitation.”
Lee responded, “I seem to thrive on adversity.”
Sam smiled, as he said, “Good. Very good. Now, let me show you how to properly throw a punch.”
(_)
Two months of time loops later, in the hotel gym, for the first time in his life, Lee had learned enough, that he was able to thrown Sam onto his back. Lee didn't even use his precognitive abilities. It was purely because he had become so skilled, that he was able to do that move against Sam.
Lee offer Sam a hand up, with his right hand, as he gave Sam a warm smile.
Lee thought, 'Now, this is a nice turned around, to the usual time of Sam offering me a hand up.'
Sam returned Lee's warm smile, as he took Lee's right hand.
As Sam stood up, he stated, “Well, after this first sparing match, I can say that you clearly have some skill. But, I think I can teach you to improve on what you know.” Sam then found his footing, and he let go of Lee's right hand.
Lee grinned, as he replied, “That is why I am learning from you.”
(_)
Months of loops later, Lee was able to fight Sam to a standstill.
And after a few hours of sparing, two men quit their sparring session for the day.
Lee and Sam stood on the mats, as looked at each other, while they let their bodies calm down from the physical exertion they just put on their bodies.
Sam commented, “I honestly don't think there is anything I can teach you, that you don't already know.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “Good. That just means this match was a good way to gauge my abilities. Now, how about I also treat you to lunch in a little while.”
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he replied, “Sounds great.”
As both men walked out of the gym, Lee asked, “Sam. Do you know spanish, as well?”
Sam answered, “Yes. I can speak, read, and write, it.”
Lee politely requested, “Could you please teach me some spanish?”
Sam stated, “Sure. We will start this afternoon, after lunch. I will call my girlfriend, to let her know I got held up. We will just have to settle for supper, and an evening together, for today.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Sam.” He mentally added, 'Okay. I am good with one lesson. Let's see if I can do more than one lesson, during each reset. And if I budget my time, and money, wisely, I can afford a few lessons at the same time, every day. This will cut down the time I will need to learn everything I am interested in learning.'
Lee then had a pleasant lunch with Sam, and an enjoy introductory lesson from Sam, on learning the spanish language.
(_)
A few years of time loops later, it was eleven fifty-three PM, in the Devil's Hotel. Violin and Aeryn decided to leave the dance party and head for their rooms.
As they walked through the front lobby, Violin noticed someone doing something she thought was off.
Violin turned to her spouse, as she said, “I will join you up in the suite in a minute.”
Aeryn replied, “Okay.” Aeryn turned and walked to the elevators.
Meanwhile, Violin walked over to who she saw.
Violin soon came to a stop in front of the person she watched to confront.
Violin stood in front of Lee, as she looked down at what Lee was doing. She saw that Lee was sitting down a lobby chair, in front of a table. On the table, he had a laptop computer he was looking at, while he used earphones to listen to what was on the computer.
Violin saw that Lee was watching a live action TV show.
Lee noticed Violin standing over him. He took off the earphones, as he looked up at her.
Violin inquired, “I thought you didn't like computers?”
Lee smirked, as he casually admitted, “I lied.”
Violin inquired, “What are you watching?”
Lee answered, “Well for today, I decided to take a day off. I have been downloading, and watching the Babylon 5 series, from the beginnings, with the pilot episode. I am over half way through season one. You are the first person to call me on this lie I made.”
“It is not surprising, given everyone is busy today with their own fun, they would not noticed me doing a few things off.'
'Though, given my situation, I do find it ironic that I am currently watching the episode, Babylon Squared. Not one of my favorite episodes. But, it has a nice tie in with the entire series, two seasons later, with the two part episode, War Without End.”
Violin though, 'This episodes dealt with time travel. I don't like where the conversation is going. I need to find out more.' She asked, “What situation?”
Lee casual said, “This time loop situation.”
Violin asked, “You are in a time loop?”
Lee corrected, “No. We are in a time loop. For your next question, as far as I can guess it is a real time loop, and reset. Not alternate reality traveling, with everyone else branching out along the multiverse.”
Violin thought, 'Oh hell. He is talking very casually about the multiverse. Like he has been at this for a while.”
Violin questioned, “How long has we been stuck in the time loop?”
Lee answered, “I lost track of time a while back. Given there is no way to for me to mark time in this temporal loop, I would guess a number of years.”
Violin inquired, “How does this time loop work? What are the rules?”
Lee stated, “When it comes to rules. The best I can figure, the rules of this time loops are a cross between Groundhog's Day rules, and Stargate SG1 Window of Opportunity rules. If nothing happens, everything resets at twelve midnight. Which is...”
Lee checked his wrist watch. He looked back up at Violin, as he continued, “Five and a half minutes, with change. If I die, or someone leaves this reality, it resets. And when it resets, I wake up, unharmed, and well rested, before dawn. And everything, and everyone, is back they way they were this morning. With no memory of the previous events.”
Violin responded, “We have less than six minutes before the time loop resets?... Wait a minute, you know about reality travel?”
Lee smirked, “That's right, Johnny-girl. At least this time loop is a lot better than when you got stuck in that crappy temporal loop, over that singularity on Moya. Before the rest of the crew were your friends.”
Violin asked, with worry in her tone of voice, “How do you know who I really am?... You're the writer?”
Lee continued smiling, as he said, “Yep. It is so refreshing to not have to hide, or lie, at the moment. I loath doing, either. And there no point in you hurting me. I am answering all your questions. And you are not going to recall this in less than five and a half minutes. Along with everyone else, but me. Though, I think somewhere, deep down in yourself, you will remember these answers. So, let's keep this civil.”
Violin inquired, “Okay. Let's get the rest of the important questions out of the way. Did you cause this time loop?”
Lee answered, “No. Also, do not I know how it started. Nor, do I know who, or what started it.”
Violin questioned, “Are you planning to stop it?”
Lee replied, “Sorry, Violin. But no. I have no plans to stop the time loops for many reasons. One of the main reason is that I am dying of cancer. This is probably my last chance to live a little, before I finally die. One way, or another.”
“And look at the situation I am in. We are in a city of adventure. Living in a hotel resort, by the beach. Okay, it is too cold to go swimming. But, everything else is cool about this place, and situation. I am surround by badass babes. This loop is happening during a day when the entire city is throwing a festival. And there are no consequences for my actions.”
Violin blurted out, “Good lord. This must be like heaven for you.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “I figure this is about as close as I am every going to get to heaven.” He then smirked, happily commented, “My own personal Valhalla.”
Violin realized, as she responded, “Hold on. No consequences? What have you already done to us?”
Lee answered, “Nothing to bad. I pulled a couple of wicked pranks with you and your friends, for getting me stoned. But, for the most part, all I have done is steal a few kisses from you women. And I don't plan on doing anything horrible. If you noticed, I never went that route with my writings.”
Violin let out a sigh of relief. She agreed, “No. You didn't.”
Lee commented, “Besides. You shouldn't be complaining. From what I understand, during the time loop, every day you are having four hours of good loving with your wife.”
Violin conceded, “That is true. So, what are you currently up to in these loops?”
Lee stated, “Well, except for the occasional off day, like today, I keep myself pretty busy. If I am going to be stuck in a time loop, I am going to learn some things. And my current schedule is this. In late the morning, I spend two hours learning how to formally dance, from Sawyer.”
Violin commented, “Yea. She is a pretty good dancer.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I overheard that in one of these loops, from Lotton talking to Ranma, that Sawyer is not only now a skilled singer, but she is an excellent formal dancer. And she is. I am glad Sawyer is learning, and improving herself, beyond violent means.”
Violin agreed, “So, am I. It shows there is an actual human being under that chainsaw wielding maniac.”
Lee commented, “I already know that, from her interactions with Lotton and Shenhua. And when I am finished learning dancing from her, I plan for her to teach me how to sing.”
Violin inquired, “So, are you going to learn singing from Sawyer? Or Ranma? Or both?”
Lee complimented, “You are a sharp as ever. I am going from Sawyer. From the karaoke nights, I have heard both of them singing plenty of times. And I feel that Sawyer has a firmer grasp of the mechanics and fluidity of singing, than Ranma.”
“Ranma is more of the hard rocking singer, while Sawyer has slightly better understanding of pitch control. And that is why I choose Sawyer, over Ranma, on the issue of singing, as my teacher.”
“Though, Ranma has some real skills at singing, as well. So, after I finish learning to sing from Sawyer, I may take a few rock and roll singing lessons from Ranma.”
Violin inquired, “Okay. That is the morning. What about the afternoon?”
Lee answered, “Well, after lunch, I spent two hours learning how to speak, read, and write chinese, from Shenhua. I figure if I am going to learn a language, I should learn it from someone whose native in that language, from one who knows my native language.”
Violin said, “I am surprised you did not learn about knives from her.”
Lee stated, “Actually, I did. I learned how to throw knives from her. And I am so good, I am not only deathly with throwing knives, but playing cards, as well. But, she kept becoming to suspicious of me when I tried to learn how to fight with long knives. So, I dropped that line of approach.”
Violin asked, “That is understandable. So, where do you go next, during your schedule?”
Lee responded, “I spend an hour learning to play the piano, from a skilled piano teacher I found in town. Then, I have the rest of the day and night free. I am doing well with all three of these lessons. And when I am finished learning the piano, I plan to move to learn the saxophone, and a few other instruments. Though, I am not sure what I am going to get you girls to teach me next.”
Violin said, “It sounds like you are getting the college experience.”
Lee said, “I really wouldn't know. I didn't really go to college. But, I guess this could be viewed as the case. And at least I don't have homework, nor tests to do.”
Violin let out a smile giggle. She then inquired, “True. Well, as John, I did go to college. And it sounds like that is the case. So, how much are you paying for these lessons? I know the girls don't work on the cheap.”
Lee stated, “You are right about that. The standard rate for any of your girls is two thousand, U.S. for two hours of your time. Half before the lesson begins and half after the lesson is concluded.”
Violin asked, “How much do you have on hand?”
Lee answered, “Before the time loop started, I had amassed just over seven grand. Which I have on hand. I have become very good at the poker. My poker face, and skills at reading people's faces have become incredible, even before the time loop start.”
“I don't even need my precognitive abilities to clean someone out. Though, such abilities can help in doing so.”
“I spent two for a lesson with Sawyer, two for a lesson with Shenhua. I spent on grand for the piano lessons. And I spent five hundred for the laptop and equipment. Also, I hold back fifteen hundred, in case the loop stops. That way I will still be okay, money wise.”
Violin responded, “That is a wise precaution.”
Lee replied, “I know. And thank you.”
Violin replied, “You're welcome.” She then realized something, as she stated, “Hold up. With the time loop, the money goes back into your pocket, and they never actually get paid. Like Phil in Groundhogs Day.”
Lee's smiled, as he responded, “Exactly. It is the perfect con. I appeal to your greed, and none of you realized, until now, that you never actually get paid. Though, I would like your opinion, on that matter.”
“Which do you think would hurt the women more, in their pride, more? Realizing that I, the person they hunted, cheated them out of their money? Or, realizing that I tricked them into teaching me how to do a number of things? Including, them helping me take a few levels in badass. Though, only a few, not a lot.”
Violin pointed out, “Hard call. But, I can tell you this. While I am not that upset, if the others learn how you have been conning them, they are literally going to tear you apart, limb from limb.”
Lee continued to smile, as he casually said, “Oh. I know. Though, I doubt you are going to mention this to them, even if you remember it, because you are such a nice person.”
Violin conceded, “True. I don't think you deserve that type of fate.”
Lee said, “I am glad you feel that way. Still, I do have back up plans if the reset does not happen, and unexpectedly stops. I will still have enough money to live on for the foreseeable future, and any lessons I was taught, for the previous day, could be excused for just a personal, one time interest, in brushing up my skills. With me being coy about my abilities, out of pretending to be humble.”
Violin admitted, “That is smooth. I am surprised that you never conned me into teaching you physics.”
Lee shamelessly replied, “I did con you. You taught me for six months, from basic algebra and physics, and you taught me another six month, up to advanced astrophysics. I know know the basics to understanding wormholes, and reality travel formulas.”
“Also, during that time, I learned to play the guitar and read sheet music. And Sam taught me how to speak, read, and write spanish. I am now fluent in that language. Earlier than that, Sam also taught how to fight. I could now probably fight Akira to a standstill, in a hand to hand fight. Though, I could not hold a candle to you, Revy, Aeryn, Shenhua, Natsuru, and Ranma.”
Violin commented, “I am glad you realize that.”
Lee stated, “Of course. Speaking of which, I eventually plan to start convincing Akira and Natsuru to teach me how improve my firearm skills. Revy is just too much of a handful to approach, when is comes to loaded weapons.”
Violin shook her head for a couple of seconds, as she commented, “You got that right. And I shouldn't be surprised that you conned me, or Aeryn, as well. Though, I am surprised that you didn't trick me into teaching you engineering.”
Lee shrugged, “I discounted Aeryn because she is not familiar with Earth weaponry. And when it comes to you. Well, I would have had you teach me engineering, but I never could figure out how to get the equipment for it here, on short notice. Still, I did also spent another month of you teaching me how to take care, take apart, and properly put back together, my pink Cadillac.”
Violin cracked a smile, as she said, “Let me guess, I showed off my super-strength by picking up the engine block?”
Lee let out a laugh. He commented, “Yes. And you even picked up the car a few times. I have found that you really like to show off when you want too, and when you can get away with it.”
Violin replied, “Yep”
Lee commented, “I am probably one of the few people whom realize how powerful you truly are. If you were properly trained, and kept the fighting on the ground, you could probably take down Ironman, and hold your own against Thor.”
Violin smiled, as she teased, “And I am such a nice girl, too.”
Lee said, “Yes. You are. I made sure of that. Including giving you a good second childhood. But, I really didn't change your personality too much. I just kept the same basic personality you had as John, only as a girl.”
Violin conceded, “I will give you that one. But, what is with the fangirl mode? I admit it is fun to experience. But, it is also embarrassing.”
Lee pointed out, “Let's be honest, Violin. When you were John, you were a diehard fanboy. The only reason you survived in the Uncharted Territories for those first few months was due to your genre savviness from being a fanboy.”
Violin admitted, “You got me there. But, you still turned me into my own biggest fan. Do you have any idea of the type of sexual fantasies I had as Violin, about my time at John, before I remembered I was John?”
Lee surmised, “I would guess, several. That is why I even wrote the personality merger in a sexual way. And given the twisted nature of the Farscape series itself, I could not think of a more twisted, yet unique way, to bring you back from the dead. You have already come back in almost all the other ways there are.”
Violin responded, “You are right about that.”
Lee said, “Any other way would have left the read rolling their eyes in such cliches. And I loath cliches.”
Violin stated, “So, do I. And honestly, that death you gave me what not the worst. And you did give me a good second childhood.”
Lee said, “I know. And I always respected you, Violin.”
Violin replied, “Thank you, Lee.”
Lee commented, “You're welcome. You know, Violin. You are also probably the multiverse's first redneck, alien asian.”
Violin let out a laugh. She then stated, “You know what? I probably am. I seem to be a first for a number of things.”
Lee inquired, “True. By the way, how are Dargo, Chiana, Little D, Pilot, and Moya?”
Violin answered, “All are fine. With Dargo and Chiana enjoying their marriage.”
Lee replied, “Good. Also, about that joke I left open with you, and their wedding. Were you the best man? Or, the bridesmaid?”
Violin smiled, as she stated, “I used a reality device to be both. First, I wore a tux that fit my new form, and I was Dargo's bestman. After the wedding itself, I went back in time, and wore a gown, to be a bridesmaid for Chiana, with my wife. Then, Aeryn and I danced in our gowns at the after party.”
Lee responded, “Nice. With the imagination and inventiveness I would expect from you.”
Violin continued to smile, as she happily replied, “Thanks.”
Lee inquired, “Though, now that I think about it. I wonder, does Harvey remember the time loops? When I brought him back, I gave him a pretty strong memory.”
Inside Violin's mind, Harvey mentally said, 'I remember.'
Violin realized the implications of Harvey keeping this secret from her, as she growled, more towards Harvey, than Lee, “He does.”
Lee cursed, “Damn. That could cause problem... Wait. Harvey, I will make a deal with you. You have obviously been quiet about these time loops, so far. And since we are both in really good situations that we both like, I will be nice to Violin and Aeryn, in exchange for your continued silence.”
Harvey mentally responded, 'Deal.'
Violin frowned.
Lee commented, “From your face expression, Violin, I am going to take it that Harvey said, yes.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'That is another bullet I dodged. Also, with a second person remembering the time loops, this proves this is a temporal reset, instead of me creating an alternate reality every time there is a reset.'
Meanwhile, inside Violin's mind, Violin mentally yelled, 'Harvey?! Why didn't you tell me?!'
Harvey mentally explained, in a calm manner, 'Because the sex during with Aeryn, during these time loops, have been awesome. Hell, the entire day has been awesome. Having a wonderful day on the town. Come home, have four hours of great sex. Then, cap off the evening with dancing, and partying.'
Harvey then continued, with a sense of wildness in his tone of voice, 'I say, let the good times roll!'
Violin realized, in thought, 'That is why you have been suggesting a few things during the day, and while we were in bed?'
Harvey mentally replied, 'Yes. That is why I did so. I did want to keep things from being boring. By the way, you might one to ask him how long we have left until the reset.'
Violin asked, “How long do we have?”
Lee looked at his watched, as stated, “Less than ten seconds. 7... 6... 5... 4...” He looked up at Violin, as he added, in a happy tone of voice, “By the way, have a great time, Harvey.”
While Lee could not hear Harvey's response.
Inside Violin's mind, Harvey smiled, as he mentally said, 'Thank you.'
The next thing Lee knew, he was back in his bed, in the darkness of the early morning.
Lee smiled, as he thought, 'That was an interesting time loop. I need to remember that Harvey remembers, as well. Still, as long as he is happy with Violin's situation, and by extension, Aeryn's situation, I have nothing to worry about from Harvey, Violin, nor Aeryn.'
'And as long as I leave Violin and Aeryn alone, for the most part. I might even want to talk to Harvey, through Violin, if I one day get desperate enough to talk to someone that remembers. Though, I doubt that will happen. I have always been a bit of a loner. Yet, most times, it was not by choice.'
Lee the got up to face the same day, that offered him different challenges, that he chose.
(_)
A year of time loops later, Lee got around to learning more about using, and firing, firearms.
When it came to firearm experts, among Revy and Rock's group, there were four women present that were masters in such crafts. They were, Aeryn, Revy, Akira, and Natsuru.
While it was tempting to have Aeryn teach him, Lee knew beforehand that the alien woman was way to strict a teacher. And as Lee had once told Violin, Aeryn was not familiar with Earth base weaponry. Which was the only type of weaponry that Lee had access too.
And while Revy was a firearms expert, Lee discounted Revy due to her constant bad mood.
So, that left Akira, and Natsuru. Lee paid both of them a thousand a piece for their time. And they were more than happy to teach Lee, together, to use firearms.
They even let Lee practice with their own weapons and ammo. Which consisted mostly of Akira's pistols and ammo.
Along with this, there were a number of times, in which Lee was able to talk Pedro into loaning him a few rifles, semi-automatic pistols, sub-machine guns, machine guns and the ammo for those weapons.
It was not hard to convince Pedro to loan Lee said equipment, once Pedro swiftly realized that they are in a time loop, and Pedro would get these items back in the next reset.
Pedro even told Lee, that Pedro justified giving Lee access to these weapons, because if Lee became a badass, himself, it would increase Lee's chances of stealing one of the reality devices that belonged to Rock and Revy's group. With Lee then escaping into the multiverse, and those badass women following Lee, and leaving Plata Podrido for good.
After Lee had the weapons and ammo packed in the trunk of his car, he then went back to the Devil's hotel to pick Akira and Natsuru up, and to head off to where they would teach Lee to use firearms.
The place they went to a secluded part of the island, by the beach, where Lee practiced in front of the sand berms in that location, while using soap boxes to set cans, tree limbs, and other items, to shoot at from a distance.
Akira focused on teaching Lee how to use pistols. And Natsuru taught Lee how to use rifles, sub-machine guns, and machine guns.
Also, the two women were nice enough to teach Lee gun safety, how to take proper care, and how to clean firearms. They also taught him how take apart and put back together the firearms they taught him to use.
They even taught Lee how to safely spin pistols around in his fingers, by the pistol guards, without shooting himself. Though, Lee had yet to shot himself in a time loop. And he had not intention of finding out what that felt like.
While Lee never got the hang of dual wielding pistols, he was now dangerous with a single pistol in his right hand. And he was a fair shot with his left hand. He was just not that good, when he had to divide his attention between to weapon. Except when he used his precognitive. But, he considered using his precognitive abilities to be unreliable in combat situations, unless it was an absolute emergency.
Lee even found Akira and Natsuru to be as nice as he expected them to be. And he did enjoy their company, as they taught him. Along with Ranma coming along, to keep her two lovers company, on the few times Lee asked that their lover, Ranma could come with them. And during those times, Akira and Ranma even gave Lee some basic lessons on how to fight with long knives, and how to fight, in hand to hand combat, against someone with long knife, other melee weapons, or when the opponent was using two melee weapons at once.
Lee even paid Ranma for a few of these lessons.
Also, Lee was also polite. And at the end of each lesson, as he paid them, he thanked Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, for the lessons they gave him.
Eventually, there reached a point that Akira and Natsuru told Lee that there was nothing left they could teach him. And soon after, Lee felt he was skilled enough to try to make a bet with Revy, that he had wanted to do for years, while in the time loop.
(_)
A few time loops later, after Akira and Natsuru concluded their lessons with Lee, it was morning, as Lee approached Revy and Rock's group, again, in the hotel restaurant, at the tables, by the stage, where the group of women were having their breakfast.
As Lee approached the women's tables, he thought, 'This is the third time I have tried this. Even with my precognition, it is difficult to do this. But, I really want to know that answer to that question. And given Revy's mood, this is the only way I can get a straight answer from her, without getting hurt.'
When Lee came to a stop, in front of their tables, the women turned to look at Lee.
Lee said, “Good morning, ladies. Revy, I was wondering, when you are finished with breakfast, if you would be willing to wager a little, harmless bet?”
And for the third time, Revy said the same exact sentence, “Depends on what it is.”
Lee pulled out the cash, as he said, “The bet is five hundred american dollars that I can use one of your pistols to shoot a can three times, in the air, before it hits the ground. If I lose, you get the money. If I win, you answer a question for me. And it is not an embarrassing question. You game?”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Sure. I have never seen you shoot a gun while here. This will be the quickest five hundred I have made in a while.”
Lee said, “I will see you in an hour, in the lobby.”
Revy replied, “Fine with me.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from the group of women.
(_)
An hour later, Lee met with Revy in the hotel lobby.
Both adults then exited the building for the parking lot.
So, Lee was driving Revy down the road, in his pink Cadillac, with the top and windows of the car being down.
A few minutes later, Lee drove them to a deserted part of the beach. The same part of the beach that Akira and Natsuru had train Lee in the use of firearms.
They got out, and Lee pulled out a can of cola that he had previously finished, and he had put in the care, earlier that day.
As Revy got out of the car, Lee walked over to a nearby rock, and placed the can on top of the rock.
The rock was about twenty feet from the car.
Lee then walked back to the car, and towards Revy.
When Lee reached Revy, the redheaded woman pulled out one of her semi-automatic pistols, and handed it to Lee.
Revy then stood back, and quietly watched.
Lee checked to make sure the safety to the gun was turned off. He then pulled back the slide, to seat the first bullet in the chamber. Because he knew, as a rule, from watching the Black Lagoon anime, as a precaution, Revy preferred to keep the chambers of her pistols empty, when she was not using her weapons.
Next, Lee turned towards the empty can. He pointed the gun at the can, he took aim, and he fired at an angle that sent the can spinning upward. He then shot it again, keeping it in the air, and going up.
The next shot started to send the can going away from them, but Lee quickly, shot and hit the can, one last time, before it hit the ground.
Lee thought, 'That last shot just kept giving me trouble.'
Lee put the safety back on the pistol, as he turned around. He checked the grip he had on the pistol. After which, he handed pistol back to Revy, by the barrel, so she could grab the grip.
Revy took the pistol, and holstered it. She said, “Not bad. So, what is your question?”
Lee asked, “Is that red hair your natural hair color?”
Revy cracked a grin, as she answered, “Sure is.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. So, is there anywhere I can drop you off? Or, do you want to go back to the hotel?”
Revy continued to smile, as she responded, “Back to the hotel is fine.”
Both of them got back into the car, with Lee in the driver's seat, and Revy in the front passenger’s seat.
As Lee started the car, he mentally reflected, 'Just as I thought. Even with a bad mood. Winning money, or seeing something that interests her, will put Revy in a good mood for a while. Now, with the firearms taken care of, I want to see if I can learn japanese.'
'I found spanish and chinese were not that hard to learn. So, I doubt japanese will be that difficult for me. The only question is if I can fool my teachers, long enough to learn it.'
'Even towards the end, with both Sam, on learning spanish, and Shenhua, on learning chinese, they were getting suspicious on my language skills. But, I am now fluent in those languages, and that it what matters.'
'Still, I need to work on a plan to deal with these language issues, if it suddenly becomes a problem, should these time loops end.'
Lee then drove Revy back to the hotel.
(_)
During the next few months of time loops, Lee found it difficult to learn japanese. But, not due to the language itself, but from those that could teach him it.
Being practical, Lee first approach Rock on learning japanese. Lee figures, since Rock at one point worked as a translator, between japanese and english speakers, that she would be the best choice to learn to speak, read, and write, japanese from.
Lee made the same basic money offer and basic pitch line, to Rock, that he had used countless times before on the members of her various group.
And the money offer and the line worked. Unfortunately, after a month, Rock became suspicious of Lee sudden development in learning japanese.
Due to this, Lee went with plan, B, on the issue. And he was able to convince, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, to teach him japanese, for a fee.
Unfortunately, they soon became suspicious as well, of Lee knowledge of the japanese language.
So, since Lee didn't know anyone else on the island, that knew japanese, Lee had to table learning japanese for the moment.
Though, Lee did promise himself, that he would find someone on the island, to learn japanese from, sometime during these time loops.
Still, at the same time, Lee was learning other skills, as well.
One such skill came from Melvin.
It was no secret that Melvin had military experience, and Lee used that general knowledge, to his advantage.
After finding someone in the island with the equipment Lee was looking for, Lee met with Melvin one afternoon.
Lee made the same deal with Melvin, in cash, as he did the women. And it worked.
And so, that afternoon, Melvin taught Lee how to rappel down down a building. In this case, the thirty story Devil's Hotel building, with the rappelling gear Lee bought. With Lee and Melvin having a great time doing so.
And over the course of the loops, through the years, Lee learned many more things, from many people.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 08: “Day of the Dead: Part Four: Party Until The End.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Lee's home reality, Earth, Mexico, De La Plata Podrido. During November second, the Day of the Dead.
Over the years of time loops, Lee watched a lot of sunrises on the beach, and sunsets over the land. He even painted a few of them, after he learned how to draw.
Lee had learned that sometimes, the small things can make life worth living.
During this time, Lee became a person of many talents. He even learned how to read lips. Though, it was only for reading the lips of those speaking english.
But, that did not mean that Lee didn't have fun, now and again. And harmless fun at that.
One time, Lee piped into the speakers of the Devil's Hotel front lobby, some wonderful music that he was sure no one there, let alone Revy and Rock's crew, had likely ever heard of, nor listen to.
And for that day, the front lobby speakers played some of Lee's favorite musical tracks by the group know as, Two Steps From Hell. And it seems that most of the people that listened to those music pieces, enjoyed them.
In Lee's journey through the near endless loops, Lee strived to become a renaissance man.
Lee found that with his writing skills, he was also a natural poet. And he did write a few short stories, as well. Even though, the time loops erased his works.
Lee even became a skilled painter.
On two separate occasions, Lee had draw picture of groups of nude women. One time was Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, in the nude, as women. The other time, was Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, in the nude, as women.
Both sets of women were pleased with Lee's work, in both detail and the colors he used on his canvas.
Lee deeply regretted that he could not have save his works art, due to the resets.
And he did not have to pay the women for their time. All he did was in the morning of the time loop in questions, Lee went into the hotel restaurant, at breakfast, with a pencil and paper, on a clipboard.
Then, as the women sat at the table, he drew them. And before they left, he walked over to them, and showed them his skill. They were impressed with his work, and they asked for paintings to be done of them. And Lee was more than happy to oblige them.
Lee also became a skilled cook, and a fairly good caterer. And though he could not stomach mexican food, he did enjoy the taste of it, and a number of other types of food.
So, Lee timed it, where that he would eat mexican food, or other types of food he liked, but his stomach did not, at fifteen minutes before midnight, so that he could enjoy the meal, without having later stomach problems.
Also, Lee learned how to carve wood with a chainsaw, into wonderful sculptures. Lee learned this skill from Sawyer. Whom Lee was not surprised to find that the petite black haired woman was an artist with her chainsaw.
Lee found Sawyer was not only a wonderful singing and dance instructor, but she was a wonderful teacher to learn from in the art of the chainsaw. Though, they only chainsawed wooden objects.
Lee finally did find someone in town to teach him how to speak, read, and write, japanese.
Lee was tempted to con Melvin into teaching him how to speak and read russian, but considering how nice Melvin had been to him, Lee decided not to. And as such, Lee could not find anyone else he knew of that could teach him russian. But, that was minor problem.
Lee read almost every non-fiction book in the local library. And not just the english and spanish books. But, books in there that were of other languages.
Also, the local library had a music room, with a piano, and other instruments, which he knew how to play, allowing for Lee to practice his musical skills in private, when he wished to do so.
Lee even tried his hand at composing music. But, he found he lacked the talent for it. Which was okay with him. He was happy with being able to write and paint.
Lee learned some medical knowledge, from diseases, and basic surgery. His interest was started what he wanted to learn more about his cancer. And he did. And the treatments were not good. Still, from there, he learned some in that field. But, Lee never pretended to be a doctor, nor nurse. Nor, did he do attempt surgery on a living being. He did not want to risk intentionally harming someone.
And through his journey, Lee found a great way to blow off steam, he would take his pink Cadillac, with a full tank, at night, after ten PM, and drive high speed through the streets of town.
Lee was careful only to drive on the deserted streets of the city, at that time of night. And he never hit anyone once during those times.
Though, Lee did get into a few car chases with the police over those high speed burns, but they never caught him before midnight. And Lee found that he had become quite skilled in driving in car chases, at highspeed.
Lee would have taken the time to learn how to fly a helicopter and plane. But, he didn't anyone on the island with access to either a plane, or helicopter. Still, Lee did learn how to drive a motorcycle, and a semi-tractor trailer truck. Along with how to maintain and repair those vehicles.
In addition, Lee brushed up on his skills in general, concerning driving vehicles with manual transmissions.
Lee also learned how to drive, and maintain highspeed boats. He even took trips to Texas, and from there he found out the temporal resets effected the entire planet.
Somehow, finding that out, made Lee feel special. That except for Harvey. He was the only person he knew of on the planet that remember the time loops. But, he was careful to prevent that thought from going to his head.
Still, finding out the entire planet was effected by the time loops also gave Lee the opportunity to call his family and talk to them, without worrying that he would be traced back, nor having the years pass for his family, while Lee was stuck in the time loop.
Knowing that his family was okay, and unchanged due to the time loop put Lee's mind at ease towards his family.
And Lee got to talk to his family, with Lee enjoying hearing from them. Though, it was unfortunate that only he would remember their conversations.
Lee even found that he enjoyed performing in front of people.
For Lee, stage fright and shyness went out them window, when he realized that no one would remember his actions the next day.
When he felt like singing in front of people, Lee went to the hotel restaurant at lunch, and convinced Melvin to let him used the karaoke equipment to sing for everyone at lunch, on the stage in the room.
This was not hard. All Lee did was simply ask Melvin for permission to do so, and Melvin easily gave Lee permission to do so. At which point, Lee realized that asking permission was basically only being a formality to Lee, for performing on the restaurant stage.
Lee sang songs that worked for his masculine voice. He was partial to singing songs by Meatloaf, Elton John, and few songs by Nightwish. Though, he did sing other songs, depending on his mood.
Lee has become such a good singer, that depending on the song, and how well he sang said song, he got clapping from the crowd, to sometimes he even achieved standing ovations from those present in the restaurant.
And these acknowledgments of his skills helped Lee feel better, when he needed to something to boost his self-esteem.
As the years passed, while Lee was able to stave off full blown depression, he did sometimes feel melancholy. But, he found that by focusing on a slight interest, and or creating a humor situation, he was able to beat back his sadness.
It reached a point in the time loops, where during the morning of the time loops, Lee usually dressed in socks, underwear, white t-shirt, blue jeans, tennis shoes, black leather belt, his ring necklace, blue cloth jacket, and blue baseball cap.
The only difference was that he would be wearing his sunglasses, instead of his large glasses.
Then, after breakfast, he would leave the hotel, and head out in his car.
He then went to a couple of stores, where he bought a plain, light brown, sombrero, and a guitar.
Next, Lee went to the festival. He look off his baseball cap and cloth jacket in his car. He then put on the sombrero.
Fortunately, even though it was cool outside, as long as Lee walked around, even with the sea breeze, it was warm enough to walk around without a jacket.
Lee then just walked around the festival a few hours, playing relaxing pieces of music, with his guitar.
The one piece of music, which he found humorous, but was fun to play and made him, along with those around him, feel more comfortable was a piece of music from the Black Lagoon sound track. The piece of music was El Sol se Recuesta. Which translated to, Lay Down in the Sun, and the track was Roberta's Theme, from the Black Lagoon anime.
Lee could play that piece of music, while walking around, without missing a note. Lee also found that, El Sol se Recuesta, was the perfect piece of music to work through one's melancholy.
And not once did anyone call him on playing that tune.
As Lee played the El Sol se Recuesta, he passed by a family of five. A man, a younger woman, and three young children.
The hispanic man looked to be in his forties. He had a well groom black beard, with a full hard of hair, that was trimmed short. He wore sunglasses over his eyes.
The woman looked to be around fifteen years younger than her husband, and she appeared to be in her early thirties. She had fair skin, long blond hair, with brown eyes.
Their the young children looked to be a mix of their parents appearances.
Something in the back of Lee's head told them that they look familiar, but since they paying him no mind, he returned the favor.
(_)
After the Pena family passed by man with guitar, wearing a simple, sombrero hat, it took a few seconds for Hernan to recognize the tone the man was playing.
Hernan stopped in his tracks, and a second later, so did his family.
Hernan looked at the man with the guitar, whom has back turned to him. He though, 'Nah. He could not be playing that. Then, again.... With those women here...'
Hernan's wife, Maria noticed that her husband was looking behind them, at the man playing the guitar. She inquired, in spanish, “What is it, honey?”
Hernan heard his wife, as he thought, 'It is best that I leave this be. Nothing good can come of me, nor my family, by getting involved in such madness.' He then looked over, to his wife, as he replied, in spanish, “Nothing dear.”
Maria commented, “Still, that piece of music that man is playing is very relaxing.”
Hernan said, “Yes. It is a very relaxing piece music.” He mentally added, 'That is very paradoxical to whom the piece of music is a theme for. Best to get Maria to drop the subject.' He then suggested, “Though, perhaps it is best we leave that man be.”
Maria responded, “I agree. If we disturb him, he might quit playing such a lovely tone, for everyone to hear.”
Hernan replied, “Of course.”
Maria stated, “Good. Now, let us continue our fun for today.”
Hernan happily said, “I fully agree, my rebel flower. My Maria Flores.”
Maria giggled, as she and her husband, Hernan, directed their three children towards some of the booths of the festival.
The Pena family then went back to having fun at the festival.
(_)
A few months later of time loops, it was evening, as Lee finally worked up the nerve to start searching the rooms of Revy and Rock's group.
Currently, Lee was using his lock picking tools, he had bought earlier that day, to get into the suite, next to his. The suite belonging to Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru.
Lee was kneeling down, at the lock, while he work on it.
While Lee picked the lock, he thought, 'When these time loops end, I will have to get a set of these tools for person. And I have to thank Ranma for teaching me how to pick a lock.'
'Also, it is only fitting, that since Ranma taught me this usual skill set, that I break into her suite next. And since I know where everyone is, I do not have to worry about them walking in one me. That and the face that their suite is right next to my. To the right of the door to my suite.'
'So, if some sees me standing in the hallway. As long as I don't have my lock picking tools out, they will think I am just heading to my own suite. And think nothing else on the matter. This made their room the perfect test case for me breaking into the suites of those after me.'
'And after I am done with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru's suite, I will break into another one of the girl's suites, on the next time loop.'
'On that matter, I think I will break into Revy and Rock's suite, last. I will go through the other suites of their members, first.'
Lee then felt the lock release, and he let go of the backwards tension on the lock, with his tools.
Lee thought, 'There. I am so happy this hotel uses older locks.'
As Lee stood up, he pocketed his tools, and he then opened the door, and walked inside.
Lee turned on the light, as he thought, 'I need to be subtle, but quick, in my search.'
Lee shut the door behind him, as he looked at the state of the room.
He then saw the bedroom was a mess.
As he stepped carefully through the mess, he thought, 'I guess some traits don't improve with a change of gender. But, then again, I know Revy, and a few of the others born as women, are just as messy as these three are. So, having a messy room, is kind of a gender neutral issue. And if this is their bedroom, I am not stepping into their bathroom.'
'Also, while it is tempting to look for their reality device, I know that a reality device is not going to work in this time loop.'
'I already lucked out in finding one in a previous loop. But, when I used it, I just had a reset the time loop, back to me in my bedroom at five AM, this morning.'
'Besides, I know they keep their reality devices on their person. So, searching for one of those devices here, is useless. But, I am sure this room, belonging to those adventurers, has other interesting items to look at, to help me deal with my boredom.'
'Still, when I am done, I will leave this room as I found it. Minus the item, or two, I take back to my own room.'
Lee then searched the room. He found three groups of items of note. The first two were not interesting to Lee.
Those items were Ranma's magical golden bracers, and a few sex toys the trio had.
But, the third item interested Lee greatly It was the book that Lee has wrote about Natsuru writing about. It was Natsuru's book on gender bending. It was titled, “The Gender Bender's Guide to Relationships And Life. By Natsuru Senou.”
Lee immediately picked up the book, and found that it was the english version of the book
Lee paged through it, and found the binder was wore.
Lee though, 'I just as I thought, this book was probably lent to most of their group here. And given most of their group here doesn't know japanese, they would bring the english version of their book. This just means that the book will be more easier for me to read.'
'I don't think they will miss the book for a few hours. And I always wondered what was in it. Now, I am about to find out. Still, I need to cover my tracks, and get out of here. I don't think they show up here for another hour. But, I don't want to take any chances.'
Lee swiftly, for lack of a better term, clean up after himself, and left their suite, for his suite, next door.
Lee turned off the room light, then closed his neighbors' suite door behind him.
Next, he quickly walked over to his door, which was only a few feet away. He pulled out his keys and unlocked the door to his suite. He then walked inside, shutting and locking the door behind him.
Lee walked in the dark, to his bed, and turned on the lamp light on the nightstand, by his bed.
Lee then walked over to the table in the room, and sat in one of the chairs at the table.
He sat the book on the table, and opened it to the first page.
While, looking down at the book, Lee thought, 'When I wrote my stories, I created this book, in passing. I only simply mentioned the book was created. I did not give details. But, that was enough to create this book in full. And now I get to read it.'
Lee then started reading the gender bending guide.
It took Lee three hours to completely read the title, 'The Gender Bender's Guide to Relationships And Life. By Natsuru Senou'.
As Lee read the book, he found the guide was a well made book, along with being a fascinating, and fantastic, read, on several levels.
The content itself was very clean, but dealt with almost all the issues of gender bending, one could think of. The guide answered questions from both male, and female, perspectives.
Among other things, the book was filled with information, text, diagrams, pictures, and source references, on the subject of gender bending.
The first part explained the difference between gender benders, intersex people, transgendered, and transsexuals.
The male anatomy and the female anatomy. And what the basic differences are. What hat one person from one gender should expect in the other gender, after they change.
The next section dealt with tips on how to help a person that just gained gender bending abilities can deal with the change.
Such as finding out what type of gender bender the person is. What their triggers are. What they should expect now that they can change. Being forewarned of the hazards in finding a cure to one's condition.
Tips on how to hide one's gender bending abilities from others.
How an inexperienced gender bender should be careful on how much time should be spent in their new gender. And the dangers of their gender bending being made public.
What personality traits will likely change, given person will be able to play both sides of the gender fence.
Tips on how the person can tell friends, family, and perspective partners, that that he or she is a gender bender. And when to tell.
There was even a section on how to handle the situation, if the change happens in the middle of a romantic situation. In such a case, the gender bending change happens out of the blue, with no expectation for it, the person should immediately tell their partner what happened, instead of hide it. Especially, if the change was not by their choice.
There was a section on situations of the gender bending ability being inherited, but dormant in childhood, or dormant for the most part. And how a parent should approach a child on the issue.
There was another section on how to help a child that is born with gender bending abilities.
The book even dealt with a gender bender's biological needs and care.
How to deal if the gender change also effects age, size, or radical differences of appearance between gender forms.
What can be done if the gender change becomes painful. Or, if the change became too pleasurable.
Options for locking one's gender in either gender form.
Sensitive parts of the male anatomy, and sedative parts of the female anatomy.
How to sit as a man, and other tricks to avoid harming male genitalia when moving around.
How to measure one's breasts and chest for a bra in their female form. How to put on, and take off a bra. For both the wearer, and someone helping the wearer.
Basic information on clothing, clothing styles, and clothing terms, for both genders.
How to prevent harming one's female breasts.
Proper hygiene for both genders.
How to pee as a male for the first time. Basic hygiene for men.
How to pee as a female for the first time. Basic hygiene for women.
How breast implants, and other implants, do not disappeared when changing from female to male, and the surgical options, and time for recovery, in getting them removed.
How breast reduction surgery on female breasts do not effect the male chest. Along, with the surgical options, and time for recovery, for such surgeries.
How to prevent, avoid, tell, and if need be, treat infections concerning female genitalia.
That was even a notation on the dangers of male circumcision on the equivalent female genitalia, and in general. And what the surgical options were for repair of the genitalia, in both genders. And how that repair effects the equivalent genitalia in the other gender form.
There was a note that transsexuals, whom had already had sexual reassignment surgery, in either gender, and how they will likely, with a magical gender bending change, have a full set of reproductive organs, and genitalia, of the gender they were trying to become beforehand.
The next part of that section of the book dealt with how to tell if the gender bender has to worry about female monthly menstrual periods.
And if so, what to expect, and how to deal with a monthly period for the first time. Including, diagrams and descriptions of a woman's month hormonal cycle. With what emotional and physical changes to expect during each part of their monthly cycle. And how a gender benders change between female to male, and back to female, can effect the timing of their month cycles.
The same section of the book also gave detail explanations on how to mentally, and physically, handle pregnancy, birth, and motherhood from someone that was originally born male.
There were notes on dealing with a pregnant partner, while being the father.
Also, how to deal with, and what to expect, if both the person and their partner get pregnant at the same time.
The next section of the book dealt with sex.
Masturbation as a female, and masturbation as a male.
What not to do, and what will cause harm, in the person's sexual experimentation in dealing with their body.
How to achieve an orgasm in either gender.
What to expect with sexual intercourse.
What level of pain to expect in having a hymen broken.
The dangers of sexual transmitted diseases, knowledge and use of birth control. Included, was a note that birth control pills do not work for gender benders, and it is unwise to use a diaphragm, and creams inside the vaginal cavity, due to the risk that the diaphragm may became stuck in the body, if there is a sudden change. And the risk of having the chemicals suddenly dump into the bloodstream, due to a sudden change.
The section noted that the safest birth control for a gender bender was a condom. Because if the change was from male to female, the condom would fall off. And the change was from female to male, the condom would be pushed out with the penis.
The section also noted the dangers of sexual intercourse, from both a male, and a female perspective, if the partner change gender during sex.
This including a list of dangers in using bondage equipment for a gender bender.
The next part was the section concerning sex for gender benders, and dealing with sexual positions between partners, whom could change gender.
There were pictures and descriptions of sexual positions for every gender combination. From male and female, female and female, male and male. And even a number pages on gender benders have more than one partner. Suggestions on how roles could be determined. And what positions that all those involved might enjoy trying.
There was section on what intersex people can expect went using these temporary gender bending options. With a note that the best options for the intersexed are the magical products that will either specifically change the person to female, or male.
The last section of the book deal with temporary gender bending options for the gender bender's partner, or partners, and how to help these parnters enjoy their temporary change.
On the final page of the book was a list of aliases by those that helped Natsuru create the book.
While the names were aliases, from the alias names, and his own knowledge of Natsuru's friends, Lee could guess who the aliases were of.
As Lee closed the book, he thought, 'This is a book that I will remember for a very long time. Or, at least as long as I live. And I got to give Natsuru credit for having the courage to put her real name on her book. I did not mention that in my story. And that was her choice. Now, I think I will look into Aeryn and Violin's room tomorrow night.'
(_)
During the evening of the next loop, Lee broke into Aeryn and Violin's room. The room was nice and neat.
Of the things Lee found there, was a small version of a pulse rifle in the bottom drawer, of the chest of drawers, in their bedroom. There were also some sex toys. A family photo album, that Lee did not open, out of, paradoxically, his respect for their privacy.
For Lee, searching the room was fine, but he was not going to dig into their personal history. And there was nothing else of note in their room.
(_)
The next evening, Lee broke into Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton's suite.
Lee was honestly shocked at how mundane the room that Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton shared, was. There was no bondage equipment. No sex toys. No weird magazines, nor strange items. And minimum lingerie.
There was nothing of note in their room, that would draw his interest, except for six items. A box of ammo, for what Lee guessed was for Lotton's pistols, Sawyer's chainsaw, a tool kit for what Lee guessed was for Sawyer's chainsaw, a gun cleaning kit for Lotton's pistols, and a knife polishing kit, including a sharpening stone, for Shenhua's knives.
After Lee finished searching their room, Lee wondered if, as paradoxical as it could be, considering what Lee had seen in the Black Lagoon series, and what he wrote, that Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton might be the most sane members of Rock and Revy's group.
To that end, Lee wondered if there was a concept of, being in the closet to hide one's sanity.
Before Lee left the suite, Lee quickly cleaned up and put everything back the way it was before he entered the room. He then swiftly made his way out of the suite, while gently shutting the hallway door behind him. Next, he headed fro the elevator bays, so he could go back to his bedroom, to get some sleep.
(_)
During the next few time loops, Lee was careful in searching the four rooms the eight teenage girls shared. And it took him four time loops to do so. But, he was not caught, in any of those loops.
The only things of interest that Lee found in the four rooms that the teenagers shared, Lee could not mention in polite company.
(_)
Then, came the night of the time loops, when Lee broken into Rock and Revy's room.
After Lee used his lock picking tools to unlock the door. He opened the door, and walked into the bedroom of Rock and Revy's suite. He turned on the light, locked and closed the door behind him.
Lee saw that the room was very clean, and tidy.
Lee thought, “I guess Rock's cleanliness overruled Revy's messiness. Now, to search the room.'
As Lee searched the room, the only things of note in the room he had found, so far, were some sex toys, along with boxes of ammo, and a gun cleaning kit, for Revy's pistols.
Lee looked over at the laptop computer on their table, as he thought, 'It seems that all of the group has are laptop computers. I have seen a few of them in their room. And it makes sense for those that are traveling light. Though, not as light as me.'
Lee then turned to the bottom chest of drawers, which he had not yet opened. He thought, 'Now, what is in this drawer?'
Lee bent down, and pulled it open. What he saw in the drawer made him think, 'Jackpot.'
In the bottom drawer, beside the large box of condoms, were two separate piles of small packets.
One pile had dozens of packets, the other, smaller, pile had only five packets.
Lee immediately recognized them. The packets were from Jusenkyo.
Lee read the chinese on the packets.
The large pile were packets of instant spring of drown man. The small pile of packets were instant spring of drowned girl.
Lee thought, 'Okay. I can understand them have dozens of packets of the spring of drowned man. Revy and Rock have a very active sex life. But, I don't know why they would have a few packets of spring of drowned girl... Unless, Revy is planning to get an early start on her revenge against me. Should they catch me. Honestly, I don't want to know.'
'Still, this is too great an opportunity to pass up. And my curiosity is just killing me on the inside. Though, if I am going to get the most of of these instant girl packets, I need to steal them in the morning. Not at night. Fortunately, I know exactly when they leave for breakfast in the morning. I will just wait until then. And I will take all the instant girl packets, in case I want to change back and forth, between genders.'
Lee then closed the bottom drawer, cleaned up after himself, and left Revy and Rock's room the same way, as before he had entered it. With him closing the door behind him.
During the morning of the next time loop, Lee was in the lobby, until he watched Rock and Revy pass by. He then took the elevator to the floor their room was one, approached the door to their suite.
As Lee stood in front of Revy and Rock's suite, Lee pulled out the lock picking tools he had bought earlier that morning.
Within one minute, Lee had picked the lock, very quickly, opened the door, turned on the light, went to the bottom drawer, got the five packets of instant girl, stuffed the packets into the outside pockets his cloth jacket, closed the drawer, turned off the light, locked the door, and closed the door.
Lee then swiftly made it to the elevator bay, and used an elevator to make it back to the third floor.
A minute later, Lee was inside his own suite.
He switched on the top light of his bedroom, as he shut the door, and locked the deadbolt to the door, behind him.
Lee then walked over to the able, across the room. Next, he pulled out the five packets from the pocket he had them in, and he put them on the table, in his room.
Lee then picked up a single packet from the table, and he looked at it. He thought, 'So close, yet so far. I wrote about gender bending, but to actually experiment with it, in person, is a completely different concept. I need to know something about this. It might be an option, for another problem I have. But, there is one thing I need to do first.'
Lee set the packet down, and walked over to his phone, on his nightstand. He then dialed the check in desk.
After the other end of the line picked up, with the clerk answering, in spanish, “Good morning. This is the front desk. How may we be of help with you?”
Lee stated, in english, “Hello. Good morning. This is J.D. Lee. I will be dining in today with a female friend I plan to have over. So, if you get a call, or have the door answered by a woman, that will just be my friend, ordering for the both of us. Thank you for being so understanding.'
The clerk responded, in english, “We will keep that in mind, Mister Lee.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.” He then hung up the phone.
Lee swiftly stripped down down nothing, allowing his clothing to fall to the floor. When he took off his ring necklace, he set it on his bed.
He picked up one of the packets. And as he walked towards the bathroom, he picked up a coffee cup he had.
As he entered the bathroom, he turned on the light.
He then looked at his nude self in the mirror above the sink.
Next, he set the cup and the packet onto the bathroom sink.
Lee pulled out a towel, unfolded it, and laid it on the floor, in front of the sink.
Lee thought, 'I don't want to slip and fall.'
He then stood in front of the mirror, over the towel. He filled the cup with cold water, and opened the packet of instant spring of drowned girl. He put the powder into the cup of water, and discarded the empty packet in the trash can in the bathroom.
Lee held the cup in his right hand, as he looked at it.
Lee thought, 'Well, here it goes.' Lee then looked at the mirror of himself, as he poured the magical water over his head.
While Lee did not feeling anything, Lee watched an as his body changed from male to female.
As Lee looked at her female form, for several seconds, in silence, she was shocked at many of changed, besides the obvious ones.
First, she looked like her own much younger sister.
Her hair was black, both on the top of her head, and on the patch between her legs. The hair on her head as also a little longer. Also, she had deaged to around eighteen years of age. And most importantly of all, her body seemed much, much more healthier.
Her skin tone was more healthier. She did not look like a skeleton, as she was starting to in her male from. And she felt so much physically better, and more energetic.
Her face was much more feminine. She was also a little shorter in height, then in her male form, and her physical figure was slender. Her breasts were a respectable size, but not too large. Also, her muscle tone was incredible, and her figure was sexy. She had no body hair, the only hair she had was on her head, and on her groin.
As she looked at herself further in the mirror, she used her hands to touch her face first, as her first thoughts as a woman were mixed with bittersweet feelings, 'I am healthy. Really healthy... At least for the moment... Still, I can enjoy the moment...'
'I wonder why my hair is black, and is a little longer. That is probably because magic is involved. And the deaging is simple, this is instant spring of drowned girl. Not, spring of drowned woman. This could be a problem, if the main girl spring is like this, but more potent.'
'Still, once I get out of the time loop, and a reality device, I could use the real spring of drowned girl as an option for a cure to my cancer. Then, I would just have to find a way to lock myself in my female form. Which given there are options in doing so, would not a problem.'
'Now, about a more immediate problem. I still look to much like my male self. Given their experience with gender bending, if I walk of of this room, Revy, Rock, and the others, will know it is me, even with the gender change.'
'And they will ask questions, in very painful ways... And there is nowhere I can really safely change genders and clothing, outside the room, away from the hotel... I think I might look into that problem, later.'
'Though, I can have a lot of fun in this room. Given the time loops, there is no rush. Also, I wonder about something else. Fortunately, I am not that wet on my head, and shoulders, and it won't take me long to dry.'
Lee then grabbed another nearby towel, and dried herself. She then walked out of the bathroom, as she headed over to her bed.
When Lee reached her bed, she held picked up the ring. Next, she swiftly broke the string, and took the string off her small ring.
She then head the ring in her left index and left thumb, by outside itself sides, as she looked the interior of the loop, and the chinese symbols on interior sides of the ring.
Lee thought, 'One of the symbols on the inside of this ring is, lock. I wonder if that means gender lock. If it does, then I might have just solved finding a way to lock this female form.
She then tried to slide the ring on her right fourth finger, but she found that the ring was too small, even for her pinky fingers.
Lee looked at the ring, as she thought, 'I guess this really is a child's ring.' She then set the ring on the table, near the other packets of instant spring of drowned girl.
Next, Lee walked over to her bed, and sat down, as she thought, 'Now, what am I going to do first?'
Her stomach then growled. She mentally reflected, 'Food it is.'
Lee then moved her position on her bed, over to the nightstand, where the phone was.
She picked up the phone, and dialed the front desk.
After the other end of the line picked up, she stated, in her female voice, in english, “This Mister Lee's suite. I would like to order some breakfast for my boyfriend, Lee, and myself.” She then gave her breakfast order, as she happily thought, 'Damn. This form has a nice, smooth, feminine voice. I like it.'
As she hung up the phone, she asked, out loud, in her new female voice, “Now, what to do, while I wait for breakfast?”
She then look down at her nude self.
She used her right hand to cup her left breast, as she used her left hand to reach down, to play with her genitalia between her, and inside her body.
Lee involuntarily giggled from the pleasant sensations she was feeling from her new female form.
Lee thought, with excitement, 'It looks like I am going to make good use of what I learned from Natsuru' book. Now, I just got to figure out how to get myself wet down there, so I can have some fun. I will probably have to break my new hymen to really get going. But, a small amount of pain is worth a whole lot of pleasure.'
Lee then began have some naughty fun.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, in the third floor hallway, the young, male bellhop, in his uniform, was pushing his cart up to the door, that belong to Mister Lee. The bellhop had been informed that Mister Lee spoke english, not spanish. And he was entertaining a lady friend. This was not the first time the bellhop had done this, in such situations.
As the bellhop reached the door to Mister Lee's suite, he overheard loud feminine moaning, and then a female scream. But, the bellhop had enough experience to know a scream could mean many things. Some of them being good.
The bellhop patiently waited several seconds, until the sounds quieted down. He then knocked on the door, as he stated, in english, “Room service.”
A few seconds later, a female voice loudly said, from the other side of the door, in english, “One minute, please.”
Half a minute later, the bellhop heard the deadbolt of the door in front of him being unlocked. Then, a young, attractive, black haired, fair skinned woman, answered the door. She wore an oversized shirt and pants, while barefoot. And she smelled of sex.
The bellhop looked down at the woman's chest, as he asked, “Where is Mister Lee?”
Lee notice where the bellhop was looking, as she thought, 'I honestly find it flattering that the first person I just met in this female form, is looking at my breasts, and he finds me attractive. Still, I need to come up with an excuse for my supposed absence. I will just keep it simple.'
She lied, “He went out to get some ice.”
The bellhop replied, “Okay.”
Lee opened the door all the way, and stepped to the side, as the bellhop walked into the room, while wheeling in a cart with a covered platter and a large glass of orange, cloth napkins, and utensils on top of it.
When the bellhop made it completely into the room, he reached over and removed the cover to the platter of breakfasts. He set the cover on a lower tier of the cart.
He asked, “Is this the meal you ordered?”
Lee looked over at the breakfast on the top of the cart.
She thought, 'This is exactly what I ordered.'
On top of the cart were three scrambled eggs, crispy bacon, toast, hash-browns, and a large glass of orange juice.
Lee looked over at the bellhop. She answered, “Yes. It is. And here is something for your trouble.” Lee then pulled out her male wallet, from her pants, and she pulled out a fifty dollar bill.
As she put away the wallet, with her right hand, she handed the fifty dollar bill to the bellhop, as a tip, with her left hand.
The bellhop gripped the fifty dollar bill. As he put it away in his pocket, he smiled. He looked Lee in her face, as he said, “Thank you, ma'ma. And let us know when you are finished, and we will come to pick up the cart and dishes.”
Lee looked the bellhop in his eyes, as she calmly said, “I will. Also, Mister Lee, and I, will be ordering lunch, dinner, and likely snacks, as well. But, we do value our privacy.”
He said, “I understand.” He then turned and walked out of the room, and into the hallway.
Lee then walked over. She then shut, and locked the deadbolt to her door to the hallway.
Next, Lee turned around and looked at the food on top of the cart.
She thought, 'Given my female body is much healthier, I can probably eat mexican food, and other types of spicy food, and not have an upset stomach, as a woman.'
Suddenly, Lee felt pressure coming from her bladder.
She thought, 'I got to take a piss. I guess it is a good time, as any, to find out what it is like to pee as a woman.'
She stripped back down to nothing, and went into the bathroom. A minute, and a half later, she exited the bathroom, just after washing and drying her hands.
She then are her breakfast.
After breakfast, she resumed her sexual experimentation, and other forms of fun, with her new, healthy, younger, female form.
Lee found that she did not tire easily, and that she enjoyed the benefits of having multiple female orgasms. And with the resets, Lee did not have to worry about anyone finding out what she was doing in the privacy of her own hotel suite.
(_)
Lee then spent the next solid week of time loops, breaking into Revy and Rock's suite in the morning, after they left for breakfast, and enjoyed the day, have find with her new female form, all the way until midnight, and the reset.
Lee also found out that in her female form, she could eat all the spicy food she liked, without a problem.
But, like all things, Lee eventually had to move on, and go about doing something else, to keep his, or her, interest in life, and in living.
(_)
After a few more loops, during a lunch, in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee was on stage, with the karaoke machine, Lee was finishing singing an Elton John song. He did such a fine performance, that when he finished, the lunch crowd gave him a standing ovation.
In response, Lee took a bow, before the crowd.
Lee then put down the microphone, and walked off stage, down the steps on the open side of the stage, to the crowd's left.
When Lee reached the floor, he turned to his left and started walking towards the bar counter. He thought, 'Standing ovations never get old. And I think I could use a beer to celebrate.'
When Lee reached the bar counter, he sat down, and waiting for Melvin to come over, to take his order.
When Melvin stopped in front of him, across the bar counter, Lee casually ordered, “Just please get me a decent, cold bottle of beer to drink.”
After Melvin walk over and pulled a bottle of beer from a nearby cooler under the bar, he walked back over and set the bottle of beer by Lee.
As Lee opened up the beer bottle, and took a drink, Melvin commented, “You know you are pretty good.”
Lee set the bottle of beer on the counter. He smirked, as he said, “I am a man of many talents.”
Melvin inquired, “Where did you learn to sing like that?”
Lee replied, “You wouldn't believe me.”
Melvin responded, “Even so. How would you like to sing for a dance party tonight?”
Lee immediately tensed up, as he took a good hard look at Melvin. As second later, he forced himself to relax, as he thought, 'This is the first time, in any time loop, that Melvin has asked me to sing for the dance party that happens later tonight, in this room.'
'Though, I long since learned that Melvin was the person put in charge of catering the dance party.'
'I even got the chance to go to the party, a few times. By asking out a few single women, in town, whom felt like going. But, just dancing the night away with someone you are not interested in gets old. Though, I seem to have come to enjoy performing, and I have yet to perform during a dance. So...'
Lee stated, “Sure. Why not? So, you are the guy in charge of the party tonight?”
Melvin said, “Yes. The manager put me in charge.”
Lee commented, “Interesting. Still, just to let you know. I am skilled at singing. But, I don't have the strength in my vocal cords to sing all night.” He thought, 'I tried to sing for four hours straight. And after those four hours, I soon lost my voice for the rest of the day of that time loop. Fortunately, like everything else, my voice returned to normal, after the reset.'
Melvin stated, “No problem. After you finish your set, you can join the party.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that is an incentive. I don't have to look for a date, and I can still enjoy the party. But, there is one matter, if I am going to sing for an official event.'
Lee commented, “Thanks. Still, I don't think that a karaoke machine is going to cut it.”
Melvin agreed, “Neither do I. We were just going to play recorded music for the dance. But, with your singing skills, I am rethinking that.”
Lee said, “I appreciate that.”
Melvin asked, “Can you play instruments, as well?”
Lee cracked a grin, as he answered, “Yea. I can play the piano, guitar, saxophone, and a number of other instruments. Not only that, I can play, and sing songs from memory, while not missing a beat.”
Melvin commented, “We have a piano, and other instruments in back. And they are tuned. And I can get some people to move them here, on stage, for us. So, that will be a problem. But, I need to know what songs are you good at playing and singing?”
Lee stated, “I can play and sing a number of musical pieces. But, given my voice, I lean mostly towards Meatloaf and Elton John.” He mentally added, 'Melvin likely does not know who the Nightwish band is. But, I am sure he knows about Meatloaf and Elton John. They are classic rock legends.'
Melvin complimented, “Good taste, Lee.”
Lee thought, 'I wonder. I never did get around to asking this question.' He asked, “Thank you. And Melvin, since you are in charge in this party. What is with that, only couples, rule for the party?”
Melvin inquired, “How did you know about that rule?”
Lee lied, “I have my ear to the ground. And I hear things.” He mentally added, 'It is sad that I have gotten so good at lying, and keeping track of my lies.'
Melvin replied, “Good ear, then. Though, the manager wanted that rule. Not me. And he didn't tell me why.”
Lee thought, 'That answers an old question for me. And I have never been able to find the manager of the this hotel, nor his office, when I looked for him. Also, given all the strangeness in my life, even before the time loop, and the name of this hotel, the Devil's Hotel and Resort, I did not want to push my luck. Still, that is a small matter, for another time.'
'Now, onto the logistics of this performance.'
Lee inquired, “Okay. When do you think you will have the piano set up on stage?”
Melvin answered, “A couple of hours.”
Lee stated, “I will be back, by then. We will check to see if it is tuned. Then, I will play a few songs, and see if you like my performance. If you approve of my skills. We will talk about what songs that I know, that you would like me to play. And in what order.”
Melvin said, “Works for me, Lee.” He then extended his hand.
Lee shook Melvin's hand, as he said, “To a good a good business relationship.”
Melvin responded, “Yes. To a good business relationship.”
They then broke then handshake, with Lee going back to drinking his beer, and Melvin went back to attending to his other customers.
A few hours later, the piano was put on stage, and Lee met with Melvin at the stage.
Lee found that the piano was properly tuned. And Melvin was impressed that Lee knew how to do that.
Lee then started playing some rock songs on the piano, as he sang the songs.
After playing the piano, and singing a few songs, Melvin approved of Lee's skill. They the worked out what songs Lee would sing, and in what order.
That night, Lee performed for the dance party, and he did a great job of it.
And Lee found that enjoyed performing at the dance so well, that he arranged the same situation again, and again, to happen at lunch. He did this for each time loop. All so he could perform for the dance, over and over again.
Though, Lee varied his musical selection. But, the dances and party goers always seemed to enjoy his performances.
And as time passed by for Lee, even in the time loop, Lee found himself taking over the dance party, little, by little. To where he was eventually in control of setting up of the hotel dance party. And Lee enjoying every minute of it.
(_)
Several years of time loops later, it was evening as Rock and Revy walked out of the hotel theater.
They were already wearing dresses for the dance, and they decided to watch a movie, first.
The movie that was playing, which Rock suspected no one in the audience had ask for, was the classing time looping comedy, Groundhog's Days.
As Rock and Revy made their to the hotel restaurant entrance, and the dance, Rock thought, 'Somehow, I feel I could sympathize with Phil, in that is seems like this day does not want to end.'
As they approach the door to the hotel restaurant, they noticed the door was open, there was no one beside it, and they could here classic rock music coming from inside.
When they walked inside the room, they came to a stop just inside the entrance. They looked around, and they noticed a room was lit by disco balls hanging from the middle of the ceiling. And nearly everyone inside was dancing to the rock music, while having a good time.
Even Melvin was dancing with a woman, on the dance floor.
Revy whistled in astonishment. She then looked over at her lover, as she commented, “Somebody knows how to throw party.”
Rock continued looking at the party in front of them, as she agreed, “You're right, Revy. I am glad we came.”
Revy looked back at the party, as she replied, “I am to.” She then noticed the back of the room, and the person on stage, playing the piano. She stated, “Whoa. Check out the piano player on stage.”
Rock looked across the room, to see the piano player, whom was sitting at a bench, in front of the piano keys. He was playing the piano, as he was singing into the microphone set onto top of the piano, in front of him. And he was doing both very well.
But, what surprised Rock the most was what the piano player was wearing. The piano player was a man whom was flamboyantly dressed. He wore a pink tuxedo, pink feather boa around his neck, pink sunglasses, a pink top hat on his head, and black dress shoes.
Rock said, “Even as a woman, I would not wear something that flamboyant.”
Revy commented, “And I have better standards.”
Rock looked at her lover. She then just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, at the irony of Revy's statement.
Rock then turned back to look at the crowd.
Rock then spotted someone she wanted to talk too. To their right side, by the entrance wall, Rock saw someone she wanted to talk to. She heard saw the person look at her, as the person said, “Hey guys.”
Rock kept looking at the person, as she requested, “Revy. Please, follow me.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she replied, “Okay.:
Rock then turned to her right, and started walking, with Revy following right behind her.
(_)
Among those not dancing, was Akira, whom was wearing a nice, yellow gown that matched her hair, while she leaned her back against the entrance wall, near the right corner of the wall.
Akira was waiting her turn to dance with Natsuru, or Ranma, depending on which one of them of them wanted to sit the next song out. The trio has been trading of with each other, after each song, considering it was difficult to dance closely as a trio. And doing had not been a problem for them, so far.
Akira turned her left and she saw Rock and Revy had just entered the room, as the two women were standing by the entrance.
Akira leaned up from the wall, as she thought, 'So, those to finally showed up. I might as well go over, and talk to them.'
Akira walked over to the two women, as she said, “Hey guys.”
The two women had heard her, as they also walked over to meet her.
As Akira came a stop, six feet from Rock and Revy, all three women looked at each other.
Rock replied, “Hi Akira.”
Revy complimented, “Looking good, Akira.”
Akira said, “Thanks. So, who knew that Lee could play like that?”
Revy pointed at the piano performer on stage, with her right hand, as she asked, “That is Lee?” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Akira answered, with excitement in her voice, “Yes. You weren't here earlier. He practically rocked the house. He started on the dance floor, playing a great rendition of, The Devil Came Down To Georgia. His skills with a fiddle, and singing are incredible. Then, he played some rock music with a saxophone, while dancing with a couple of women. Next, he moved to the piano on the stage, and we have since been rocking on.”
Rock inquired, “Where did Lee learn to play, and sing, like that?”
Akira said, “I don't know, but he is great at it. He seems to be instantly great at everything.”
Rock asked, “What do you mean?”
Akira stated, “Well this morning, after breakfast, I watched him have a large log, of a tree truck, brought right outside the hotel parking lot. Then we, Ranma, Natsuru, Shenhua, Lotton, Sawyer, and I, watched as Lee used a chainsaw to sculpt a life sized statue of Sawyer. And the statue was a pretty good imitation of Sawyer. Even Sawyer was impressed.”
“Then, after lunch, Lee somehow convinced Melvin to let him take over the catering for the party, so Melvin could enjoy the party himself.”
“At supper, after you left, Lee spent a few minutes showing his skills with both the flute and trumpet. Then, Ranma, Natsuru, and I got to talking to Lee. And we found out he is the one managing the hotel employees to set up for the party.”
“And the way he managed it was incredible. He clearly knew what he was doing. He was telling people to do, like it was second nature to him. We even listened, as he warned the employees of possible problems, as they set up the food, and other items.”
“Also, Lee told us he changed a few things, from the original plan. He arranged for the wife of Jeff, the bouncer, to come to the dance, and for them to have some fun, as well. Lee told me that he said to Jeff that he would take the heat, if something went wrong. And Lee then got rid the, only couples, rule for the dance.”
“Honestly, it is like Lee knows all the right things to say, all the right things to do, at all the right times, to get what he wants done.”
Akira commented hit Rock mentally like a ton of bricks. Rock thought, 'We are stuck in a time loop, and Lee clearly remembers what is happened from time loop to time loop. He is at the center of the time loop. Like Phil in Groundhog's Day film. I need to talk to him. I need to know how long we have been stuck here. But, before I do so, I need to learn more about the situation. And learning what songs he is singing will offer me insight into what he is thinking.'
'Also, this is why it feels like this day has not ended. And it feels like we are repeating events. That is because we are repeating events.'
'Still, there is no immediate rush. If there is a time loop, Lee will not allow for the time loop to end in the middle of his performance. He put to much work in this party. So, I will just wait for him to finish his set. Then, I will confront him. In the meantime, I will just enjoy the party.'
Rock looked over at Revy, as she invited, “Care to dance?”
Revy looked over her lover, as she said, in a demure tone of voice, “I though you would never ask.”
The two lovers than walked out onto the dance floor, and began to dance together.
As they danced, Rock occasionally took a glance at Lee on stage. And she paid attention to the songs and lyrics that Lee was sing.
Lee had just wrapped up, Elton John's Saturday Night's Alright For Fight, and he moved on to a piano rendition of Meatloaf's The Monster Is Loose. When he finished that song, without missing a beat, Lee starting playing Elton John's All the Girls Love Alice.
While Rock, danced with Revy, she thought, 'I have to admit that Lee has not missed a beat on his piano playing, and he can really sing these songs. And I don't want to know how many times of practice he had to do to get this good at rocking.'
The next song Lee played was Elton John's Goodbye Yellow Brick Road.
Rock thought, 'If ever there was a song for being trapped in a time loop. That is the one.'
Then, it was the two songs that let Rock put the final pieces together. The first, of the last two songs was David Bowie's Life on Mars, then Lee concluded his set with Elton John's I've Seen That Movie Too.
Both were slow dance songs. And like everyone else on the dance floor Rock, and Revy, slowed down their dancing to the beat of the music.
Rock listened to the lyric of the song Lee was currently singing. Which was Elton John's I've Seen That Movie Too. She realized, as she thought, 'Oh crap. Lee is not only the center of this time loop, he is also the writer. And worst of all, I won't remember this after the reset. Though, even if I don't remember this day, and that Lee is the writer, I still have to try to convince him to stop these time loops.'
'Yet, if I tell Revy, she will go berserk, and ruin the party for everyone. Besides, we are still in the time loop, when things reset, only Lee will remember, and he will be less willing to talk to me, after I had sicced Revy on him.'
'Still, he is clearly finished, I will just approach him, and we will talk. Since I won't remember this, as long as I am nice, he will probably be open to talking to me.
As Lee stopped playing, everyone stopped dancing, and looked up on stage at him.
Everyone was silent, as they saw Lee take off his hat, his feather boa, and finally his sunglasses, all of which he placed on top of the piano.
Next, they watched as Lee took few deep breaths, while pinching the bridge of his nose with his right index finger and thumb, for a few seconds.
Lee then get go of his nose, and he put the pink sunglasses back on. Next, he stood up from the bench. And he turned to face the crowd.
Most of those in the crowd starting clapping, including Revy and Rock.
Lee bowed.
Lee reached over picked up on the microphone on top of the piano. As he looked over the crowd, he waited for the clapping to end.
A few seconds later, as the clapping ended, Lee calmly spoke into microphone, “Thank you everyone for the applause. I am setting the speaker system to play some more music. But, I just don't have any more energy in me to keep doing this tonight. Though, it was fun. Anyway, everyone have a great night.”
The crowd gave Lee another applause, as Lee set down the microphone, back onto the piano.
He then walked over to the karaoke machine, and he set it to start playing some music, he had preset it to, earlier that day.
As soon as the music started, the dancers started dancing to the beat of the music, except for Rock, and Revy.
Revy noticed Rock body language was off, as her lover was looking at Lee. Revy asked, “What is it, Rock?”
Rock continued to watch Lee leave the stage, by walking down the side steps of the stage, and head for back side the bar counter, near the back of the room. Rock turned to Revy, as she stated, “I need to speak to Lee for a few minutes, alone.”
Revy could tell Rock was serious. And she trusted her lover enough to not ask Rock any questions. She replied, “Okay. I will be by the door, when you are finished.”
Rock said, “Thank you.” She then turned and started walking over to Lee, by the bar counter. While, Revy headed to stand by the door, to the hallway entrance to the room.
It took Rock several seconds to walk around the dancing couples, but she finally made it to standing beside where Lee was standing at the bar counter.
As Rock approached Lee, she saw that Lee had noticed her coming towards him. When she reached him, she was standing to Lee's right side, with her back to the crowd.
Rock saw that Lee turn to face her, while he was smiling ear to ear.
Lee literally looked down at Rock, due to their height differences, while he said, in a happy tone of voice, “Hi Rock. I saw you and Revy on the dance floor, a few minutes ago. I hope you enjoyed the performance?”
Lee thought, 'A rare treat, but not unheard of for them to show up at the dance parties, while I am performing.'
Rock honestly replied, “I did. And I need to speak to you about something.”
Lee inquired, “Sure. What can I do for you Rock?”
Rock thought, 'Let's start this with a simple question.' She asked, “What are you planning on do now, Lee?”
Lee glanced as his wrist watch. It was ten fifty-five PM. Lee then looked back at Rock. He then used his right hand to pointed over, behind Rock. He said, “Do you see those two hot women on the other end of the bar?” A few seconds later, he dropped right hand back to his side.
Rock turned around and she saw two young, identical twin women, whom were slender mexicans, with tanned skin and long black hair. They were standing together, on the other end of the bar. They were dressed in matching dresses, and both were looking at Lee with interest in their eyes.
Rock looked back at Lee, to see the man was looking back at her, and not the twins.
Lee stated, “Well, I am going to walk over to those two identical sisters, and within fifteen minutes, or so, we will be back in my hotel suite, where I will be screwing both of them silly, for a fourth night in a row.”
Rock thought, 'I would dare to call Lee a lucky bastard over bedding those twins. But, then when I think about how long it takes to learn all the skills Akira stated he does so well. It probably took him a while to figure out how to convince those women to sleep with him. And he has only been doing it for three nights, so far. So, he has probably only got little on the investment of his time and efforts... Now, to drop the bombshell.'
Rock inquired, 'So, after doing all this, what you plan to do next in this time loop?'
Lee immediately dropped his grin, as he said, in a stern tone of voice, “I guess those twins will have to wait. So Rock, how did you figure it out?”
Lee thought, 'This is not the first time someone figured out the time loops. But, I still need to hear her out, so I know how to avoid this conversation for the next time loop.'
Rock admitted, “Because, even though I don't remember these time loops, on a conscious level, it literally feels like I have repeated this day over and over again. It is like I can sense what events that are going to happen. I do not think the others realize this, but I am sure they will soon...”
Rock thought, 'I wonder.' She inquired, “Lee, is this what it is like to be precognitive?”
Lee answered, “Yes.” He mentally added, 'This is bad, on so many levels. Looks I cannot just let the time loops repeat, and just forget about this meeting.'
Rock responded, “Cool. I can see how this ability can be useful. Still, you have to find a way to stop these time loops. We cannot keep reliving this day over and over again, forever.”
Lee thought, with sadness, 'Looks like the party is over, and I now have to figure out how to stop the time loops, before everyone here starts to remember the times loops at a conscious level.'
Lee responded, “I agree. I will find a way to end these loops, and get the space-time continuum back on track. Damn. I never thought I would ever state that in real life, and mean it.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'I was only letting this loop continue because of my cancer, and I was the only one remembering. But, people starting to remember the time loops changes everything.'
'I guess the music has to stop some time. With you, Rock, starting to remember, at an instinctual level, that means you and others will start to remember more and more. Eventually, I will be found out, unless I end the time loop, after this next reset, or so.'
Rock said, “I know what you mean. So, how long has the loops been going on?”
Lee casually admitted, “Well, there is no way I can mark time in these loops. So, I am not sure myself. I would guess, from the number of skills I have learned, several years. At least a decade, or so.”
Rock thought, in shock, 'Really?!' Rock blurted out, “You're saying that I have be having my period continuously, for over a decade?”
Rock openness caught Lee flatfooted, as she saw his expression change to mild shock.
Though, Lee quickly collected himself, as he responded, “Oh... I honestly did not know that.”
Lee thought, 'Given the closeness Rock has with Revy, it is likely that Revy has been having her period all this time, in the time loops as well. And that would goes a long way towards explaining her attitude. Also, that would explain how they haven't been doing the same exact things in every loop. Their irritability makes them a little more random in their actions, and decisions. As sick as the concept is. I think this is the first time that a person's menstrual cycle has directly bent the laws of reality.'
Rock stated, “I understand. There was no way you could have known. I will admit that Revy can be... a pain. And I am try not to act that way during this time of the month. And you are too polite to ask about it.”
Lee replied, “You are correct on all three points. And if I had known, I would have likely found a way to stop these time loops sooner.”
Rock asked, “I think you would have. So, how do you plan stop the time loop?”
Lee answered, “I honestly don't know how it began in the first place. But, I will start looking into it. If I cannot find at least the cause of the time loop within a month, I will start looking for help. I know Police Chief Del Soto personally. And whenever I talk to him, he soon realizes we are in a time loop. That means I have access to the entire police force of this city, to help search the island for the cause.”
“Also, Violin and Aeryn have experience with time loops, and other temporal effects. If nothing else, those two could work out the math to the situation. With me carrying the information from reset to reset, until we all figure out what is going on.”
Rock complimented, “That is a good start. And good luck. Still, how long until the reset?”
Lee questioned, “That reset is always at twelve, unless I am killed, or someone reality jumps. You got just over an hour. Why do you ask, since you are not going to remember this, after the reset?”
Rock stated, “Because I have likely not made love to Revy in years. And I am going to have sex with my lover, even if we are having our periods. And an hour is plenty of time to have some fun, as long as we do not take things too slowly.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that confirms that issue in dealing with Revy having her period. Still, on that matter, I wonder... This is the perfect opportunity to ask that question.'
Lee requested, “Okay. But, before you leave, could I ask a personal question?”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
Lee inquired, “The fun thing about these temporal loops is since no one remembers after the reset, except me. I can ask some pretty embarrassing questions without worrying. So, I do have one such question for you. I read about sex does help the cramping for that time of the month. Is that true?”
Rock shook her head, as she answered, “Yes. Why do you ask?”
Lee replied, “It is one of those questions a guy cannot ask. But, it is also one of those pieces of information that could come in handy if said guy ever had a girlfriend.”
Rock realized where Lee was coming from, as she happily agreed, “That is very true. I did not even know that was the case until after you turned me into a woman. I wish I did. It would have made my relationship with Revy go a lot more smoothly.”
Lee responded, “Yea. I know... Well, have fun, Rock?”
Rock replied, “Thank you. You too, Lee.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he commented, “Hey. If I am going to be stuck in a time loop, I am going to have the time of my life.”
Rock returned Lee's smile, as she complimented, “That is a good outlook to have.”
Lee replied, “I know.” Suddenly, Lee dropped his smile, as he looked behind Rock, and across the room.
Rock noticed change in Lee demeanor. She dropped her own smile, as she asked, “What is it?”
While still looking across the room, Lee answered, “Someone is looking at us. Someone, I do not recognize. And I have had the chance to learn who everyone in this room is.”
Rock immediately realized that importance of Lee comment, as she looked behind her. She looked at the crowd, and across the room, for someone she didn't recognize, as well.
And Rock eyes veered towards an older man in a business suit.
A man that Rock felt was looking at her, also, as the older man suddenly, wave his right hand, towards Lee and herself.
Rock looked back at Lee, as she inquired, “Who is that?”
Lee turned to Rock, as he answered, “I think that is the manager of this hotel.”
Rock questioned, “How do you know?”
Lee cryptically answered, “As cliche as it sounds. I just know. And I think I need to speak to the man in charge.”
Rock said, “Good luck.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. And I suggest you hurry. I have a feeling that the reset may happen sooner this time.”
Rock replied, “Thanks for the warning, Lee.”
Both adults walked away from the bar counter, heading in two different directions.
Rock soon joined back up with Revy, with both of them soon heading out the door, and to their suite, where they planned to have some intimate fun.
Meanwhile, as Lee passed by many dancers, and other people, towards the older man, he thought, 'I have heard the concept that there are just some things a person automatically knows. I have never believed that concept was real until this moment. That man is the manager of this hotel and resort. I know almost every employee, and resident, in this hotel by first name. That is quiet a feat, considering I am bad with names.'
'Still, after so many time loops, I recognize, and know, every person in this room, except that man. And in all my years of doing time loops, this is the first time I have ever seen that man. And I have never met the manager of this hotel. Nor, do I even know his name.'
'On and off again, during the time loops, I have looked for the manager, and his office, with no success.'
'And right now, my instincts tell me that I probably do not want to know the answers to those questions.'
'I guess, while I never found the manager, it looks like the manager finally found me.'
'And I think it is best, I take off my glasses, when I meet this man.'
Lee then took off his glasses, and put them in one of his coat pockets, as he continued to approach the older man.
When Lee reached the man, he stood five feet from the older man.
At the moment, from the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Rock and Revy leave the room, through the exit, and towards the hallway.
Lee thought, 'I hope those two have some fun before the reset.' He then turned his full attention towards the man whom stood in front of him, as he mentally added, 'Now, to turn my full attention to the matter at hand.'
Both men took a look at the other man, while getting the full measure of the other man.
As their eyes met, the older man kindly said, “Hello Mister Lee. I am the manager of this hotel. I believe we need to talk.”
Lee calmly responded, “I fully agree.”
The manager requested, “If you will come this way, we will talk in my office.”
Lee replied, “I would prefer that, as well.”
Lee then followed the manager of the hotel out of the hotel restaurant, and towards the manager's office.
A few minutes later, they reach a door in one of the hallways of the ground floor, of the Devil's Hotel and Resort.
The manager used a key to unlock the door.
As the manager opened the door, he said, “This is my office. Please, come inside.”
The manager then walked in first, into his office, and straight in front of him was his desk. He then walked around his desk, and he said in the chair behind his desk.
The manager then faced Lee, as the younger man walked inside.
As Lee walked into the office, he saw that the only light in the room was a lamp light on the manager's desk.
The manager said, “Please, shut the door, and have a seat, Mister Lee. I think there is still time for us to have a conversation with each other.”
Lee gently shut the door, and walked to the chair in front of the desk. He then sat down in the chair.
Meanwhile, the manager pulled out a bottle of brandy, and small glass, from a drawer, in the desk, to his right side. He poured himself a drink. Next, he set the open bottle on his desk. And he took a sip of his glass. He then said, “So, what do you think of my office? Please. Be honest.”
Lee looked around, and what he saw on the side walls shocked him to his core.
On the wall to his left was the nude portrait he had done Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton.
On the wall to his right was the nude portrait he had done of Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru.
When Lee looked back at the manager, he saw that the manager was mischievously smiling at him.
The manager continued to smile, as he casually said, “Mister Lee, you do not think I was not going to get something out of all this work. I have to say Mister Lee, that you are quite the talented person. And I have saved a number of your works. Such as you poetry and paintings. I even had a copy of that story you wrote, about the Lowe siblings at Lagoon island. It was a short, though entertaining story. And that was a brilliant joke you pulled on Rock.”
Lee thought, 'He is the one behind the time loops.'
The manager calmly stated, “Yes. I am.”
Lee said, “You are reading my mind.”
The manager stated, “Of course. Along with the others. I can even read emotions. And I must say you have brought some of the most interesting people I had ever personally met, to my fine hotel. That is a rare feat indeed. One that should be rewarded.”
Lee did not bother to think, considering he knew his mind was being read. Instead, he played it by ear. He said, “I am glad to have entertained you. I seem to enjoy entertaining people. I take it that you own this hotel?”
The manager coyly answered, “In a manner of speaking.”
Lee inquired, “So, what was the reason for these time loops?”
The manager took a sip of his brandy. He then calmly answered, “Actually, there were two reasons.”
“One reason is that I know you are dying, Mister Lee. I will give you credit that you got some good plans on how to save yourself. Still, given the time limits on your cancer killing you, you would likely not be here for much longer. And it has been so much fun watching you and those women play against each other. So, I made it so that you would, for a while, not have to worry about those time limits.”
“I wanted to see what you could do with a clean canvas, and no consequences. And you did not disappoint me. You even proven that some people. When given the chance for hedonism, or self-improvement. That they would choose self-improvement. And I admire that about you.”
“The second reason is that you have had a really rotten life, and you have been preparing for death with such dignity. Most people in your position would be violent, insane, or both. But, not you. You are willing to face the bullet with more calmness, and reservation, than one in your position should have.”
“Given you have had such a less than pleasant life, you had instead prepared for death. With you seeing death as a beginning, and not an ending. I found that understandable, but unjust. Everyone should have a chance to learn to appreciate life. And so, I cut you a break, so you could learn to enjoy life.”
Lee said, “Well, your plan worked. I no longer want to die. The problem is that the cancer is not going to give me much choice in the matter.”
The manager cryptically responded, “Mister Lee, you need to learn, there are many ways to live. There are even ways to live, in death. It is all a matter of frame of mind, and perspective.”
Lee replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
The manager said, “As you should. Also, I feel that with these time loops, we have both sowed the seeds for much more excitement on this island. And unlike others, I do enjoy competition, in so many ways. I would not be playing this game if I did not. And before you came, this island was starting to get a little boring.”
Lee stated, “Your comment does not bring me much comfort.”
The manager cracked a grin, as he responded, “It should. Mister Lee, you will likely reap many rewards from the events, and actions, you have taken in this repeating day. But, be warned, your life is about to become like a roulette wheel. Do not focus on the numbers. Focus on the colors. Red and black are your colors of interest. But, of interest, at first. Not of trust. But, not the red and black of my hotel, but of outside of my hotel.”
Lee conceded, “Maybe the gambler motif was not the wisest of masks to wear.”
The manager commented, “No. Your mask has served you well. And speaking of masks, besides the ownership question, I am surprised you have not ask me any questions about myself, nor this hotel.”
Lee honestly said, “I respect your privacy. I am sure you have reasons for why this hotel is named the way it is, and why it is run the way it is run.”
The manager complimented, “The is very wise of you. Also, in the future, if you need to speak to someone, I am hear to talk to you.”
Lee replied, “Thank you for the offer. But, if I can, I try to avoid the major players. And you clearly are playing a much larger game than even I.”
The manager responded, “That is the type of wisdom that will keep you alive.”
Lee said, “And I will keep what you have said to me, tonight, a secret.”
The manager took another sip of his drink. He then smiled, as he stated, “I know you will, Mister Lee. You are good at keeping secrets. Though, others around you are as good at keeping secrets, as well. And of your personal secrets, I am likely only one of two people that truly know the real you.”
Lee eyes widened for a few seconds. Lee then forced himself to calm down, as his eyes returned to normal.
The manager commented, “Ah, you have such potential, Mister Lee. And so much of it was willfully denied to you, by others. I am glad you came here, and allowed me to help you bring your potential to bloom.”
Lee said, “I appropriate that. Though, I do have one more question for you. How long has this time loop being going on?”
The manager conceded, “A fair question. This time loop has been going on for just over twenty Earth years.”
Lee responded, “Then, thank you for giving me another twenty years of life.”
The manager replied, “You are welcome.”
Lee said, “Now, to the heart of the discussion. Rock is starting to remember.”
The manager agreed, “Yes. Rock, and number of the others, are starting to sense the repeat. And so, we need to decide how to end this loop. Since, you are the lead in this adventure. How would you like to end this chapter?”
Lee suggested, “Let us keep it simple. One more reset. With tomorrow being the last day of time loop. With the next day after being tomorrow, November third, and not part of the time loop. With time then continuing forward, as it was, before the time loop.”
“I will have a casual day. Still, I will not be able to get a date, so I cannot go to the dance that night. Because, as I am sure you know, even though I got a few women to go with me, on a date to the dance, it was more luck, than anything else. And I had to impress them with my skills, to do so.”
“And the only real way I was able to get in there, was to become the life of the party. And I cannot do that, if people remember my actions, later. If I do so, the women will realize who I am. And they will capture me.”
The manager stated, “That is quite true. Still, your suggestion works on several levels. Also, I think you have earned a genuine date, with a woman. And I know of someone that would be willing to go out on a date with you. There is a woman you know, whom has worked through all these time loops. She could use a day off, and you are the perfect person to take a day off with.”
Lee thought about who the manager was talking about. As he recalled who it would be, he saw the manager's smile widened.
Lee said, “Thank you.”
The manager finished the rest of his drink. He then set the glass down on his desk. He commented, “Now, there is no time like the present to get the ball rolling, for this final reset.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch and saw that it was only eleven twenty-one PM. He then looked back up at the manager, as he said, “But, it is not twelve o'clock, yet.”
The manager joked, “It is. As the old saying goes. If it is always five o'clock somewhere, it is midnight somewhere, as well. Now, see you later, Cinderella.”
The next thing Lee knew, he awoke in his bed, in his hotel suite, in the darkness of the earlier morning.
Lee opened his eyes, and looked over at his clock. He saw that it was five AM sharp, again.
He then leaned back in his bed, as he thought, 'One more time. And this time, there are consequences. So, what I plan for today must be tame. Still, it will be nice to move on with life. And the manager of this place pointed me in the right direction to getting a date, tonight, for the dance. And the way he phrased his comments, made me think, I could turn this into a date for all day. I believe he is right. And I will do that.'
'Also, over the course of the next week, I will discreetly purchase a few tools in town, that I have become good at, which I can keep on my person. Such as some simple lock picking tools. I know where to buy them, without anyone asking any questions. The type of people whom accept cash, and prefer to keep their mouths shut over such matters.'
'Also, I think I will by a few more decks of cards later. I will keep them in the hotel suite. It is known I am a gambler. Have a few decks of cards, will not raise any suspicions, and having them on hand will be useful, after I escape... If I am able to escape. Though, that is looking more possible by the day.'
'I have long since learn the tales, and how to manipulate all the women currently in this town, whom are after me. Now, I just need to wait for the proper opportunity to occur.'
'On another matter, now that I think about it. I vaguely recall meeting with Pedro, everyday. As we discussed, with each other, the days events, including what is going on with the Revy, Rock, and their crew.'
'Though, it has been so many years, for me. That I don't really recall the time and place.'
'Well, that problem is easily solved. Before I leave the hotel this morning. I will call Pedro and ask.'
'Given this is the last day of the time loop, it is better I call him today. If I call tomorrow is might raise suspicions. Now, to get up and face the coming day.'
Lee then got ready to face the day
(_)
Around nine thirty AM that morning, after Lee and Sam had breakfast at the hotel buffet. With the two friends then parting ways. Lee headed back up this his suite.
When Lee reached his suite, he went over to the phone and dialed a number.
As Lee held the receiver to his left ear. As he heard the phone ring, he thought, 'I have to keep reminding myself, that I am no longer in the time loop. And while I know spanish, and a lot of other things, I do not want other people to know that I know these things. Because, in doing so, I have a huge advantage, in a number of ways.'
The other end of the line soon picked up. The person on the other end of the line said, in spanish, “Good morning. De La Plata Podrido Police Department. How may we help you?”
Lee stated, in english, “This is Lee. Please, transfer me to Pedro's office.”
The police offer replied, “One moment.”
Lee then heard the click, that signaled the transfer of the communications connection over the phone.
As Lee waiting for Pedro to pick up, he thought, 'Maybe I was starting to call to often, before the time loop. If the officers are this willing to immediately transfer me to Pedro's office. Or, Pedro ordered them to do so. I honestly don't remember.'
'Though either way, if I want to avoid the talk of the police station, which can be a rumor mill itself. With those rumors of me and Pedro knowing each other, reaching Revy and the girls. I probably need to lay off of calling him, unless I need too.'
A second later, the phone rung once, and then Pedro picked it up. Pedro stated, in english, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Good morning, Pedro.”
Pedro inquired, “So, what can I do for you, Lee.”
Lee honestly responded, “It has been long holiday for me. And I was wondering. Are we meeting tomorrow, like usual?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. Tomorrow, we are meeting at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM, like usual. Though, we are not meeting today. Honestly, I have enough to worry about today, with it being a holiday.”
Lee thought, 'Good. With that simple, subtle question, you told me the time and place of our meeting, without my directing asking you for that information.'
Lee said, “Thank you. And I understand. I was just checking.”
Pedro replied, “No problem.”
Lee stated, “See you there.” He then hung up the phone.
Lee then turned and looking around his room, which had enough light coming from around the curtains to see. As he he did, he thought, 'Okay. One problem down. Now, to wait until I can talk to the woman that the manager told me would go out on a date with me.'
Lee cracked a grin, as he continued his thought, 'And I know the who, the time, and the place, to do it.'
(_)
Later that morning, the owner and operate of the Rats Nest, got out of her car, which was part in her bar's parking lot. She then walked to the back entrance of the Rats Nest.
Besides her sock, and undergarments, the woman work a shirt, pants, belt, and comfortable shoes. As she held the key to open the back door of the bar, in her hand, and reached for the lock, she heard a male voice behind her casually say, “Do you know what I admire most about you?”
The Rats Nest bartender look behind her to see Lee, dressed in his usual attire.
Lee continued his compliment, “Your diligence. You are the type of person that would likely weather a hurricane without breaking a sweat.”
The woman turned her fully body to face Lee, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “That being said. I think you deserve a day off. And I can assure you that this is a wonderful day to take off. The weather is perfect. It is a holiday. And there is a festival going on downtown. I have my car parked in the parking lot, across the street. That is why you did not see it. All you have to do is say, yes. And I promise you a wonderful day.”
The bartender complimented, “That is the best pick up line I have heard in months. Are you trying to get into my pants?”
Lee honesty stated, “No. I just want to take you to dance party at the Devil's Hotel, later this evening. And before then, I wish to treat you to a day at the festival. I have been there, yesterday. And I know all the great places to go. Including, the best places for food, and music. I will pay for everything. My treat.”
The woman said, “Tempting. But, neither of us are dressed for a formal dance.”
Lee responded, “Before the dance, we will swing by your place, so you can change into something more formal. While I change, as well.' He mentally added, 'I have my nice gray suit, polish black dress shoes, nice gray hat, black and brown striped tie, and cool shades, neatly placed in the car's trunk.'
Lee requested, “So, would you like to come?”
The bartender said, “If it wasn't for the fact that I know you are such a polite man, I would not believe you were so sincere in your offer. But, you are being sincere. So, yes. I will go with you. And I now realize why Eda slept with you. But, I just have one question. Do you know how to dance?”
Lee replied, “Yes. Now, I have a question for you. Do you know how to tango?”
The woman smirked, as she playfully turned Lee's question on him, “Argentine? Or, ballroom?”
Lee returned the bartender's smile, as he responded, “That is up to you, because by the end of tonight, I want those troublesome girls, back at the Devil's Hotel, to envy you, on the dance floor.”
The women's smile became even wider, as she said, with glee, “Now, that I would like to see. So, what is your plan?”
Lee answered, “We walk in like a storm, and leave them speechless, in style, before they can react.”
The woman commented, “I like it on so many levels, that I am literally wet with anticipation. I will take my car back to my home, you can follow me in your car. Then, you can take me on a date, out on the town.”
Lee replied, “That is fine with me.”
(_)
The bartender then closed up her bar, and drove her car back to her home, with Lee following her in his car. When they reached her open, she locked her car, and get into the front passenger seat in Lee's pink Cadillac.
Lee then drove them to the festival in downtown Plata Podrido, where they wonderful time at the festival, both Lee, and the bartender.
After they finished at the festival, they went to the salon Lee used. The bartender got her hair formally washed by a stylist, and then she had her hair lightly trimmed, to remove any split ends. Meanwhile, Lee has the barter give him a professional shave of his face.
When the two were done, they had some supper, paid for by Lee, and then the two of them headed back to the bartender's home, to get rest, before the dance. And to change clothing. The bartender when to her bedroom, to find a dress in her closet, change clothes, and get ready.
Lee took his clothing from the trunk of his car. And he used the bartenders spare bedroom to change his clothing, and get ready. Lee then put the clothing that he took off, in the trunk of his car.
Lee also raised the hood and windows of his car, to offer them both privacy, when he later drove them to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
It was seven thirty PM, at the Devil's Hotel, as Lee and the bartender, walked pass Jeff, the bouncer, and into the hotel restaurant, turned dance room.
The bartender wore a black and white silk, ao dai, dress. With the outer layer of the gown being black, but the interior layer, and the pants underneath, being white. Along with this, she wore white, flat sole slippers.
Lee wore his gray suit, with gray hat, black and brown stripped tie, his cool sunglasses, and his black dress shoes.
As the two adults made their way towards the dance floor, from the looks people were giving them, it was clear that no one recognized.
Lee thought, 'This is good. Now, I just hope Melvin come through on his end.'
Just as the two of them made it to the middle of the dance floor, the rock song ending, and the next musical piece was a tango piece of music. Lee took lead, with the bartender following in lock step.
Lee thought, with amusement, 'I still got it. That is perfect timing. And getting Melvin to play a few tracks of tango music, at the proper time, was not hard. I just called him up, while my date was in the women's restroom, right after I treated her to tasty lunch, at a nice restaurant downtown, while we were at the festival.'
'I politely asked him to do so. I even told him, that I had a date. And given the party was a couples party, he saw not problem in doing what I request, so he could help me with my date...'
'And Melvin is such a good friend. He was even nice enough to set the timing the way I wanted. With him changing the type of tango music, a few minutes after we have arrived at seven thirty. And different tango music piece should keep playing for half an hour, with the last music piece, which I requested, at the end, being a slow dance music that I like.'
'And I am so happy that I found out, in the time loops, that my dress shoes are so comfortable, that they are great for dancing.'
'Now, to show the everyone here how to really dance.'
Without saying a word, Lee and the bartender started to dance the tango.
The crowd of dancers quickly moved out of the way, Lee and the bartender monopolized the dance floor, with their tango.
Though, Lee was careful to keep his hat and glass on, as he dance. But, for a man of his talents, that was not a problem.
Everyone then watched Lee and the bartender showed how expertly both were skilled at the tango. With Lee and the bartender skillfully swapping the tango styles, they danced to, in parallel, every few tango music tracks.
(_)
Nearby, among their group, both Revy, and Rock were watching the two adults dance the tango. They had been planed to see a movie soon, and then come back to the party, but this was more interesting to watch.
Rock said, “I did not know the bartender could dance that well?”
Revy replied, “Neither did I. They don't teach people to dance like that anymore.”
Rock agreed, “I know. To see such a performance, in person, is a rare treat.”
Revy inquired, “So, who do you think this mister dance is, with the bartender? Because, I don't recognize him.”
Rock answered, “I don't either. But, they are both are good at doing the tango.”
Revy said, “That's for sure. Want to learn to do the tango some time?”
Rock stated, “I wouldn't mind. But, which one of us would you like to lead?
Revy offered, “We will flip a coin before every tango.”
Rock shrugged, as she replied, “That works for me.”
Revy commented, “It is to bad that Eda and Yolanda are not here. Though, it will be fun telling them about seeing these two dancing.”
Rock said, “I agree. Anyway, they said they had other plans. I am sure they are having plenty of fun elsewhere. And they said that they felt it would be to embarrassing to go to this dance as a couple.”
Revy agreed, “Yea. The jokes just write themselves on that issue. Still, let's see how long these two can last.”
Revy and Rock then turned their attention to the two adults dancing the tango.
(_)
For the next half hour, the music tracks switch from one piece of tango music, to another, as the bartender, and Lee, showed no signs of slowing down.
Then, as the music switched to a slow dance song, Lee and the bartender slowed down dancing, until they came to a stop. With the slow dancing allow their bodies to slow down, making it easier for them to do with the exertion of such physical activities, instead of coming to a sudden stop.
As the two adult stopped dancing, they were breathing heavily, while they saw those around them clap in response to the skill they had just demonstrated.
Lee thought, 'Now, to get out of here, before questions are asked.'
Lee and the bartender smiled at the crowd, as they then briskly walked of the room, through the hallway, out of the front lobby, and back to the parking lot.
When the reached Lee's car, they got into vehicle. With Lee in the driver's seat, and the bartender sitting in the right passenger seat. Lee then drove them back to the bartender's home.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee parked his car on the side of road, by the bartender's home, with the passenger door facing the bartender's home.
Lee set the car to park, as he let the engine idle.
Both adults took at their seat belts, as they turned to look at each other.
The bartender smirked, as she asked, “Did you see the look on their faces? Especially, Revy and Rock's faces?”
Lee returned the bartender's smile, as he answered, “Yes. It seems my plan worked.”
The bartender agreed, “Yes. It did. And that was masterfully done.”
Lee responded, “I could not have done it without you. And I hope you had a good time.”
The bartender said, “I had a great time, today.”
Both adults leaned towards each other, as they kissed each other deeply on the lips, for several seconds.
They eventually broke their passionate kiss, and leaned back up. Then, the bartender stated, “Still, through all this. I have yet to give you my name.”
Lee commented, “You don't have to. Actually, I would prefer if you not tell me your name. I would like you to keep your name a secret. I like a little mystery in my life.”
The woman replied, “And that is why I like you, Lee. Your mix of manners and coyness are truly endearing. And it is clear that the others did not recognize you. So, I won't tell them it was you, just to annoy them.”
Lee smirked, as he replied, “That's my girl.”
The woman laughed for a few seconds.
As the woman calmed down, the woman said, “See you tomorrow, at the bar.”
Lee replied, “I hope so. And sleep well.”
The woman stated, “I will. It is tempting to offer to sleep with you, but I have a feeling that doing so would just complicate things between us.”
Lee said, “I agree. And as I stated this morning. I was not after getting into your pants. I just wanted a date with you. And enjoy your company for today.”
The woman complimented, “You are a man of your word, Lee. That is rare trait. I hope you some day find that special woman in your life.”
Lee sadly said, “I don't think that woman exists in this world.”
The coyly woman replied, “Then, I hope you find her, wherever she is from. Good night.”
The woman got out of the car. She shut the passenger door behind her.
Lee silently watched her, until he saw her unlock her front door, and enter her home.
Lee then looked in front of the car, as put his car in drive, and drove back to the hotel.
When Lee got back to the hotel, he carried his spare clothing, that he had changed out of earlier, with him, as he entered the lobby of the hotel.
Except for the two clerks, at the check in desk, whom paid him no mind, Lee found that everyone was still in the hotel restaurant, at the dance, and they missed him, as Lee quickly made it way to the elevator bay, to the third floor, and finally to his suite.
Lee closed and locked the door of his suite behind him. Then, in the darkness of his bedroom, he slowly let out a breath, that he did not realize he had been hold in.
Lee thought, 'Now, that was a date.' He then yawned, as he continued his thoughts, “It is still over three hours until twelve, and after that fun filled day with the bartender, and that dance, I am to tired to stay up. I will just have to hope the reset does not happen. At least, if it does, I know where to go to speak to the manager of this place. On the matter. So, I still have a plan B, before people do start to remember.'
'But, for one. I am going to hope for the best. And I will not worry about such things, for tonight, as I get ready and go to bed.
Lee then walking in the darkness of his room, to where his lamp was, on the nightstand, by his bed. He turned it on.
He then place his clothing that was in his hands, including his blue cloth jacket, blue baseball cap, and large glasses, on the table, by his bed.
Next, Lee took off his cool shades, and he placed his sunglasses on the table, as well.
After which, became to disrobe, as he got ready for bed.
Ten minutes later, Lee was ready for bed, wearing different sleeping clothing that he did that morning, and the previous twenty years of loops.
Lee laid down in his bed. He then reached over and turned off his lamp light. The room then shrouded itself in darkness, while Lee put his head on his pillow, and he quickly drifted to sleep.
(_)
The next morning, Lee woke up.
The first thing was open his eyes, he did was sit up, and look at his clock. What he saw brought a smile to his face.
The clock stated it was seven thirty-three AM. And Lee could see daylight peeking around the curtains of his room.
He then turned on the lamp light, and he looked down at himself, to see that the sleeping clothing he wore was the same he had wore last night, and not the clothing he kept waking up in the time loop.
Lee also turned to the table, and he sat the clothing he left on the table, last night. With the clothing not where it always was, during the time loop.
Lee thought, 'Let's do one more test.'
Lee quickly got out of bed, and he walked to the slide door window that opened up to his balcony. He pulled the curtains open, and he could see that it was somewhere cloudy that morning. Meaning that it is a new day. That is it November third.
As Lee looked outside his window, he thought, 'I have never been so happy to see such a gloomy sky. I am free of that time loop. The world is free of that time loop. Finally. Though, this means I am now back on my march to death. But, it also means that I can continue on with my life. And no one is suck in the time loop anymore.'
'Though, I have to now remember to be careful in my secrets. And my life. No reset button anymore, if I die. But, that will not be too hard. If I want to, I can now pull the strings of the girls. And if things go sideways, I have a whole badass skill set to fall back on, that no one knows about, but I. No even those that taught me.'
'Now, to get ready to face this new day.'
Lee closed the curtains, and he walked towards his suite's bathroom, to get cleaned up, ready, and dressed, in his usual clothing, to face the day,
(_)
A few hours later, in the hotel restaurant bar, Revy and Rock's group had gathered at their usual tables for breakfast, and they were all talking about the dance party last night.
Include in their conversation, what they were asking each other who they thought the mysterious mister dance was, whom was with the Rats Nest bartender, last night, at the hotel dance party. And how was able to do the tango so well with the Rats Nest bartender.
Sawyer stated, “Well, whom ever this mister dance is, he is skilled.”
Aeryn spoke up, “And so was the bartender.”
Sawyer agreed, “True.”
Revy inquired, “But, who is he?”
Lotton suggested, “We could just ask the Rats Nest bartender.”
Rock commented, “I doubt that will work. She strikes me as the type of woman who likes to keep her secrets.”
Molly sarcastically replied, “I think the fact that she refuses to tell anyone her real name make that an obvious fact.”
Natsuru said, “Could it be someone we know.”
Yurika looked over at the bar counter, where Lee and Sam were having their breakfast, at their usual places at the bar counter. With Lee sitting to Sam's right side.
Yurika inquired, “Could it be, Lee?”
The group of women suddenly stopped talking between each other, as they all looked over at Lee and Sam, whom both had their backs turned to the women.
A few seconds later, the group of badass women looked back towards each other. They said, in unison, “Nah.”
Revy commented, “Well, it is not Sam either. Because, this guy did not have a beard.”
Violin stated, “This will get us nowhere. Instead, let's focus on finding the writer.”
Kristina agreed, “That is a great idea.”
Rock said, “I agree, as well. Besides, someone that flamboyant will turn up eventually.”
(_)
At that moment, across the room, at the bar counter, Lee and Sam were just finishing up their breakfast.
They faced each other, as they talked.
Lee inquired, “So Sam, how was your day with your girlfriend?”
Sam stated, “It went great. It could not have been better. How was your day, yesterday?”
Lee coyly smiled, as he replied, “For me, it was a long day. But, a good day.”
Sam suggested, “So, are you on for our usual game of poker, at the Rats Nest?”
Lee continued smiling, as he honestly replied, “Buddy, I wouldn't miss it for the world.”
The two friends then got up, and headed to the lobby, to play a few hands of cards, until the Rats Nest opened up for the day. Then, Lee would drive them, in his pink Cadillac, to the bar, where they could continue their ongoing game of poker.
Fold'em.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 09: “As Time Moves Forward, The Past Is Not Left Behind.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
In De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, Lee found the next few days, after the time loop ended, to be very pleasant, as he got use to time moving forward, as usual, and he got back into his previous routine, before time started resetting.
This routine was mainly keeping his identity a secret, while trying to figure out how to get a reality device. And all the while, Lee would have his continuous poker game with Sam, in the morning at the hotel lobby, then in late morning at the Rats Nest. Then, they break for lunch. After which, they continue in the Rats Nest, from the afternoon, until it was close to five fifty PM, which was when they would leave the Rats Nest, and head back to the hotel restaurant.
When they reached the hotel restaurant, they would have dinner, and enjoy watching some karaoke performances, from six-thirty, when the karaoke opened for the night, to six-fifty PM, when Lee would excuse himself from Sam, for about half an hour, and he left the hotel restaurant, for his car, in the parking lot.
Lee then drove to the Last Resort Diner, to meet with Pedro, and talk to him, for their day update with each other, one what was going on, while trying to figure out how to steal one of the reality devices that those after Lee, had on them.
The two of them were both mature enough adults to admit they had reached a brick wall with that plan.
Their meetings usually lasted between twenty to thirty minutes.
After that, Lee and Pedro parted ways for the night, and Lee returned to the hotel restaurant, to meet back with Sam, as they watched the women in Revy's group, take turns sings karaoke, while slowly getting drunk from their drinks.
Lee and Sam found that fun to watch, as they slowly drank beers.
While in the hotel restaurant, other customers, including Lee and Sam, sometimes also went on the karaoke stage. Though, Lee had to remember to pretend that he wasn't that good a singer, when he was on stage. Or, questions would be asked, given the women had heard him sing before the time loop, and at that time, he wasn't that good at singing.
Along with this, Lee and Sam were careful not to get drunk. Though, they sometimes got buzzed by the time they left the hotel restaurant and bar, to get some sleep for the night.
Though, Lee did do one thing different, than from before the time loops, he convinced Sam to change where they sat during dinner and karaoke. He moved them both over to the right back corner table, where the wall right wall, meet the front entrance wall.
They had already occasionally sat there, from time to time. So, Sam did not think much of Lee's request on changing where they sat when they were together, in the hotel restaurant.
Lee and Sam were the only ones that sat in that table, and they sat beside each other, in the corner. With Lee sitting to Sam's right side.
The main reasons Lee had them change their seating location was that it offer Lee a vantage point to see from the entrance, to the back tables, by the stage, where the girls sat, to the stage itself, without most people looking in Lee and Sam's directions.
And even though Lee was no closer to escaping his home reality, and those after him, he was still have a great time with the only good friend he had ever had, whom he considered his best friend, Sam.
On the matter of the time loops, Lee decide to omit the whole time loop incident. He kept what happened secret. He did not tell anyone because he really didn't want to complicate matters with anyone. He did not even tell Pedro, nor Sam. And he decided it was best to hide his the well practice abilities, which he learned in the time loop.
Still, this morning was slightly different that Lee's usual day. During the previous evening, at dinner, Sam had told Lee that he would be spending later night with his girlfriend, on the hotel she was staying at, on the other side of the island. And Sam said that he would meet with Lee late tomorrow morning at the Rats Nest.
Lee's responded, by telling Sam fine with the situation, and he wished Sam a good time with his girlfriend. Though, Lee wisely did not ask any questions on the matter.
So, after dinner, Lee said good night to Sam. He then headed to the Last Resort Diner, where he met with Pedro. After which, he returned to the hotel, and to his suite, where he retired early, for the night.
(_)
The next morning was a cool, slightly windy, partly cloudy day.
Around eleven thirty AM, the next morning, Lee's pink car was parked in the parking lot of the Rats Nest, to the left of the building.
While inside the Rats Nest, Lee sat in a stool, at the bar counter, with his back to the far left windows of the bar, as he patiently waited for Sam.
Lee was dressed in his usual t-shirt, pants, leather belt, socks, underwear, tennis shoes, blue cloth jacket, blue baseball cap, and large glasses.
The bartender was dressed in her casual wear, as well.
Besides the bartender, Lee was the only other person in the room.
As Lee sipped on his bottle of beer, the bartender walked up to Lee, from the other side of the bar counter.
While the bartender stood across the bar counter from Lee, she asked, “So, where is your friend, Sam?”
Lee set his half over full bottle of beer on the table. He looked up at the bartender, as he answered, “He spent the night with his girlfriend. He said that he was going to meet with me here, this morning.”
The bartender replied, “I did not know he had a girlfriend. What is she like?”
Lee honestly admitted, “I don't know. I have never met the woman. Me and Sam have an arrangement. I don't ask questions about his personal life. He doesn't ask questions about my personal life.”
Lee thought, 'Speaking of which. I am happy you have kept your mouth shut about our date. Even to me, for the most part. Unless we are alone, like now. Though, you do smile towards me more, so I know you enjoyed our date and the dance. And I return the smile.'
The bartender replied, without even a hint of sarcasm, “Nice arrangement. I think I would find such an arrangement interesting. Though, speaking of question. The girls are still bugging me about that dance.”
Lee cracked a smile, as he said, “I told you we would bring down that house. And they would be envious of you.
The bartender returned Lee smile, as she responded, “I know. And we accomplished both feats, very well. Also, I love the feeling I get when I refuse to tell them who I danced with that night.”
Lee commented, “I am glad you are having fun with that information.”
The bartender admitted, “Yea. I am. And your secret is safe with me. Also, Let me know where you need another beer. Or, when Sam gets here, so I can get him one.”
Lee replied, “I will.”
The bartender then walked to another part of the bar counter. From the corner of Lee's left eye, he saw her use a white rag, as she picked up on bottle of alcohol from under the bar counter, and wipe it down with the rag, then she move on to the next bottle.
Lee then looked at himself in the mirror, on the right wall, directly behind the bar counter from him, for a few seconds. He then looked down at his bottle of beer sitting in front of him, as he thought, 'I find it deeply ironic that, even after twenty years worth of time loops, countless skills learned, numerous schemes successfully pulled off, I have yet to create a workable plan to steal one of the reality devices from Rock and Revy's group.'
'And even with my skills, it would be suicide to directly try steal on from them. Besides, I know that not all of them have reality devices, and they alternate who has the reality device, among their sub-groups.'
'So, it is a gamble as to which one has reality device. With it literally depending on the day. And if I pick the wrong person, it is game over. And even if I do get the right one, any of those girls alone would be a handful for me in a fight. Even one on one, the odds of my success are not good. And none of them travel around alone.'
Lee groaned, as he continued his thoughts, in annoyance, 'Damn. Looking at this from an outside point of view, someone might assume I am a creepy stalked interested in these women's bodies. I don't give a damn about their bodies. All I want is one of their reality devices'.
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he went onto think, in a more neutral state of mind, 'I am starting to think, I may have to play this by ear. Or, do I ask for help? Though, the question is, who I can ask? Pedro and his men wisely won't come within literally a mile of those women, unless they needs too. And Sam doesn't know what is going on.'
'And after so many months with him, outside the time loop, if I fess up to him now, I am practically flushing the only good friendship I have had in my entire life.'
Lee looked up, at the brown wooding paneling ceiling, with the ventilation ducts, and the ceiling lights, with fans attached to them, set through the ceiling.
While the fan lights were off, with the windows providing plenty of light for the room. The fans were left turned on, so the fans could circulate the air in the room.
Lee continued to look at the ceiling, as he let out of a deep breath. He thought, 'At this point, I just don't know what to do.'
Suddenly, to Lee's right side, he heard the entrance door the bar open.
Lee thought, 'I hope that is Sam. I could really use his company, right now.' He then turned towards the entrance. And while he did not show it out the outside, he was surprised at him he saw.
The person was Bob, in his later twenties, in his badass cowboy outfit, brown long coat, and cowboy hat. Given he was in the process of growing his bushy beard, and he wore a satchel over his left shoulder, that sat against his right hip, Bob was from the time when he was searching for a cure for Boris' cancer, in book three of Badasses Of the Multiverse.
Lee quickly looked back down at his beer.
Bob calmly walked up to the bar counter, and he sat down in a stool, right beside Lee, to Lee's left.
Lee did not dare look in Bob's direction, nor into the mirror. Still, Lee felt both surprise, and wonder, as he thought, 'And I thought the time loop was screwy. I am literally sitting beside someone that was created from my very imagination. That is mind blowing. I would be tempted to talk to him, if I didn't know that it would likely create a paradox.'
'Still, with Revy and the others here, it is not surprising that Bob would show up, at this point in his life. I wrote with broad strokes, as I had him travel the multiverse. So, why not ironically sit down beside his creator. Without him realizing whom I am. It is tempting to think about that from a religious standpoint, but I am not that arrogant.'
'Also, on a side note, I am regretting making it so hard to find a cure for cancer in my stories, because I am now in the same boat, and my own actions have limited my options. Talk about biting oneself in the ass. I think Bob, and even Boris, or now B, would find my situation funny.'
'Still, Bob likes to keep to himself, when his travels alone. So, this should not be a problem. He will come in, have a beer, pay for it, exit the bar, find an alleyway, and leave this reality. So, this should not be a problem. I just got to wait out the situation. And if there is a problem, I will handle things for him. With me playing the charitable stranger. I will even pay for his beer, if I have too.'
Bob pulled out a small bar of gold, and placed it on the table of the bar counter. He then spoke, with a firm tone of voiced, in english, “Bartender, a cold bottle of beer, please.”
From the corner of Lee's left eye, he saw the bartender looked up at the man. She set down her white rag, and bottle, back where they went. She then quietly looked over at Bob.
The bartender remained quiet for a few seconds. She then walked over to Bob, and she looked down at the gold bar.
She picked up the bar, and studied the bar for a seconds. After which, she pocketed the gold bar, as she leaned down, and pulled out a cold bottle of beer for Bob, from a nearby fridge.
As she placed the cold bottle of beer in front of Bob, Lee saw, from the corner of his left eye, that it was a high price, very tasty brand of beer, that Lee only sampled a few times, when it was a special occasion.
Lee thought, “I am happy she knows how valuable gold is. Still, she is awfully quiet. I have never seen her this quiet. And this is from a woman, whom I one time watched back talk Revy, a week after the Rats Nest massacre. Though, considering my quietness. I am ironically, not one to talk on such manners.'
'Also, I am glad when I sit at bar counter, I intentionally sit right here. Because, this seat is right in front of the fridge. And it makes the bartender’s job easier for her, when she is dealing with me.
A few seconds later, the three adults heard the bar door open again.
They turned to look at who it was.
Lee remained calm, as he saw a much more sickly, paled skinned, male, Rock, with short black hair, walk into the room. He was dressed in a black business suit, and he was using a cane in his right hand, though he did not really put any weight onto the cane.
Given Lee was in front of both Bob and the bartender, Lee missed Bob and the bartender doing a double-take at looking at this Rock of the past.
Also, given Bob and the bartender were beside each other, they missed seeing the other do a double-take.
All three adults then quickly turned back to what they were doing. Lee and Bob turned, and looked down at their beer bottles. The bartender looked down at the bar counter, as well.
Lee thought, with worry, 'Okay. This is getting bad on several levels. Though, the situation is not that bad, yet. From what I see, Rock is not leaning too heavily on that cane. So, he is not very ill, just yet. And from that, and the way he is dressed, this Rock is from book two timeline, before Rock reunited with Akira, and he met Ranma and Natsuru.'
'And given he is here and not in the U.S., he likely just wants a beer, and he not yet looking to meet with government officials of various realities. This is good for all of us, on so many levels.'
'Also, the only reality travel option Rock had at the time was... Oh crap. That means Rock's crew is in town. Fabiola, Annie, and... Megatron. If Megatron stays in this reality for long, he will search the internet and find my stories. And then I, along with this planet, are royally screwed!'
'I need to calm down. It is not that bad... Yet.”
'Fortunately, I remember what I wrote, and Megatron showed absolutely no hint of knowing about my stories. If he did, this planet would already be an ash heap.'
'My best bet, to keep everything together, is to just make sure nothing goes wrong... Ha! Good luck with that... I need to remember that for Bob, this is before he learned how dangerous paradoxes are. But, he should already be genre savvy enough to realize that this is Rock of the past, and he should keep his mouth shut.'
'The bartender does not know a damn thing, and she likes me, so I can probably keep it all together. And if there is a conversation, I just need to keep steering it in sane, constructive directions.'
A few seconds later, Past Rock up to the bar counter, and he sat down in a stool, beside Lee, to Lee's right side.
Rock set his cane beside him, to his right side. He then pulled out five dollar bill in U.S. currency, and he set it on the bar counter in front of him. He looked over, towards the bartender, as he requested, in english, “A shot of rum, please.”
The bartender looked over at Rock. She quietly pulled out a small glass, and a bottle of rum. She then set the bottle and the glass beside Rock. Next, she pocketed the five dollar bill, and headed for the cash register, at the back of the room, to ring up her sale.
Lee thought, 'Now, here comes the fun parts.'
Rock pour himself a shot of rum, as Bob opened his bottle of beer.
The three men then quietly drank their alcoholic beverages for the next couple of minutes, in silence. All four adults in the room were silent, as they all deeply thought on the matters they faced in their lives.
Lee then mentally realized, 'If these two men beside me get to introspective, they might spill the beans and create a reality breaking paradox. So, I guess I am going to have to get the ball rolling.'
Lee continued to look down at his nearly finished bottle of beer, as he quietly commented, “So, let me guess. Problems with women?”
The other two men looked down at their drinks.
Bob said, in in a halfhearted tone of voice, in english, “You have no idea.”
Rock stated, in a tired tone of voice, in english, “That things I could tell you.”
Lee thought, 'On the contrary. I likely know more about your situations, than you do. Still, let us keep this conversation moving.' He inquired, “So, are we talking women in general? Or, a specific woman? I can sympathize either way.”
Bob answered, “Just three women. Well four, but that one is not around.”
Rock replied, “Four women. You have the same number of problematic women as I do.”
Lee asked, “So, what do these women looked like?”
Bob answered, “Well their leader is the worst. A very violent, redheaded asian chick.”
Rock chuckled, as he said, “Sounds like my girlfriend.”
Lee heard Revy's voice outside, and she sounded like she was talking to herself.
Lee turned around, behind the other two men, and he saw from the windows to the far left, front corner of the building, two Revys talking to each other, from across the the street. One was dressed as usual, the other was in a red leather outfit.
Lee thought, 'Oh crap. Both of these two past Revys are right outside. And even if they have not found these two. They will likely plan to come to their bar, and have a drink.'
Lee continued to look at the two women, and he noticed, as he thought, 'Though, they haven't looked into the bar windows yet. There is still time to avert a catastrophe.'
Lee kept his eyes on the women, as he quickly told them, “I think I see a couple of redheaded asians across the street. I suggest hiding behind the bar counter. I will take care of this. Because it looked like they are about to come with way.”
Neither of the men had no time to argue, as Rock grabbed his cane, while he and Bob, both climbed over the bar, to hide.
Lee then saw the two women turned, and walked towards the entrance. Lee thought, 'I hate it went I am right. And I have to play this just right, or we are all screwed to the wall.'
Lee turned around, and looked at the bartender. He requested, “Please, play it cool.”
The woman looked out the windows, and sat the two Revys coming their way. She then turned to Lee, as she replied, “Trust me. After some of the nights I have had, I have no love for them.”
Next, the bartender quickly grabbed Bob's bottle of beer, Rock's glass, and the closed bottle of rum. She tossed the bottle in the trash, until the counter, put the bottle up, and carried the glass over to the sink, under the bar counter.
Though, she was careful to walk around where Bob and Rock were hiding. The two men were quietly sitting on the floor, with their back to the bar counter. The two men sat beside each other. With Bob to Rock's left side. Bob was sitting with his back to the fridge, while Rock was sitting with his back to a set of shelves.
Lee went back to looking down at his beer bottle, as the bartender began washing the glass, with both of them pretending as if nothing had happened.
Several seconds later, Lee and the bartender heard the door open, with the two Revys came walking inside. Lee and the bartender then heard the door shut.
Lee and the bartender casually turned, and looked towards the two redheaded women.
One Revy was wearing her usual clothing, while the other Revy was wearing a red leather outfit, with her jacket unzipped to show a white t-shirt underneath.
Lee and the bartender could see that both Revys had their weapons in their shoulder holsters.
Both Revys turned to look at Lee and the bartender.
The Revy in red leather outfit calmly asked, “Have you seen a couple of men we are looking for?”
Lee thought, with annoyance, 'Great. The brainwashed and crazy one is doing the talking... Well, brainwashed anyway. She was always crazy.'
Lee requested, “Please, explain whom these men look like, so we may be better help you.”
As the Revy's did so, from behind the bar, Bob realized he was next to Rock of his past. But, he kept himself calm, realizing he did not want alert Rock.
Back on the other side of the bar counter, the Revy in the red leather stated, “I am after a japanese man, in a black business suit, whom walks with a cane.”
The Revy in her usual clothing said, “I am after a caucasian man, in a cowboy outfit. Have you seen either of them?”
Lee calmly stated, without a hint of fear in his tone of voice, “Yes. I saw both of them a few minutes ago. They just left out the back door. If you leave now, you might be able to catch them.”
The two Revys did not verbally respond. Instead, the Revys started towards the back of the bar.
As they did so, Lee continued to turn in his stool, as he did not take his eyes off of them.
The soon reached the back of the room, with Lee have his back to the front door.
Suddenly, Lee heard the front door open again, as he heard a very familiar voice say from behind him, and the two Revys, from the front of the bar, “Barkeep, I need a drink. The hotel bar is out of rum. So, I came here.”
Lee silently prayed, 'God, I know I am on your shit list. But, please don't let that be who I think it is.'
The two Revys suddenly stopped in their tracks, as they and Lee turned around to see third Revy walked into the bar, whom was in her usual clothing, looking back at them.
The third Revy had her weapon her shoulder holsters. And Lee just instinctively knew this was the present Revy.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Thank you, God, for the constant reminders that what I think of you is true.” Lee then reigned in his emotions, as he mentally realized, 'We are on the threshold of a multiversal paradox collapse. And there is only one way to defuse the situation. With a simple question.'
Lee turned to the present Revy, whom he knew, as he asked, while faking excitement in his tone of voice, “Revy, why didn't you tell me you had two identical sisters?”
Not wanting to let a stranger know their secrets, all three Revys realized this was their out, and they went it.
The Revy in red leather asked, “Yea... Revy... who is your friend?”
The Revy in the present answered, “Just some fool that lives here. Pay him no mind.”
The Revy after Bob asked, “You won't happened to remember where the people we are after are.”
Revy from the present answered, “I wish. You know my memory isn't that good. I remember where they will be, someday. But, not when you are looking for them. And the rules stated I cannot tell you.”
The Revy in red leather replied, “Yes. I have seen enough sci-fi movies to guess why. Well, girls it looks like we will just have to leave on our own ways.”
The other two Revys nodded in agreement.
Lee thought, 'Given the Revy in red leather, is after the Rock of the far distance past, before the, Those You Meet Along The Way, chapters. And those were really complicated chapters to make. Still, it is likely this Revy so far back in the past that she has not seen a near paradox before. But, she still understands the concept. And she is willing to accept the situation.'
Lee then quickly realized, as he thought, 'Though, that is not the main problem here. Revy from the present will certainly say something about this to Rock and the girls later.'
'If I didn't mention meeting the Revys to the them, likely before Revy does, it will raise suspicious from them, towards me. But, how can I do that without it seemingly awkward on my part? Or, making them suspicious in me in another way?...'
'What a minute. It is certainly ballsy enough to try. The question is can I get the three Revys to do it. Though, they are vain enough to say, yes, to my request.'
Lee looked around the room, at all three Revys, as he requested, “Girls. If I could have one moment of your time.”
The three Revys turned to Lee, as they asked, in annoyed tone of voice, in unison, “What?”
Lee calmly continued with his request, “I just wanted to take a picture of you three together. So, people would believe me when I tell them about you three. I mean, it is a very rare treat when a man gets to meet three identical hot redheaded women at the same time.”
The two past Revy's said, in unison, “Sure.”
Present Revy said, “I don't see a problem with doing so.”
Lee mentally realized, 'Just as I thought. I am appealing to their egos, and they said, yes. Oh the fun I am going to have with this picture.'
Lee turned to the bartender, as he simply requested, “Camera.”
The bartender replied, “Coming right up.” She then rush into the back of the building.
Ten seconds later, the bartender came back with a polaroid camera. Meanwhile, the three Revys walked up close to each other, near the middle of the room.
She walked up to Lee, and handed it to him. She said, “It has plenty of film in it.” She then took a few steps back from Lee.
Lee looked at the polariod camera, as he thought, 'I have not handled one of these types of cameras in over a decade. Talk about old fashioned. Still, it will work.' He looked up at the three Revys, as he requested, “Now, ladies, for symmetry, could the one with in the red leather be in the center, and we will get started.”
The three Revys grouped up, with the Revy in red leather being in the center of the group.
Lee opened up the lens and flash section of the polariod camera. He looked through the eyepiece, as he requested, “Now, smile ladies.”
The three Revy's smiled, as Lee swiftly took eight photos. One for each Revy. One for the bartender. And three for himself.
Lee looked behind him, at the bartender, and then back at the three Revys, as he complimented all four women, “Thanks girls.”
Lee then handed a photo to each of them, and he pocketed four of the other photos. And when he got to the bartender, he also returned her camera to her, and one of the photos.
Revy after the Bob said, “Thanks for the photo.”
The Revy in red leather stated, “See you guys later.”
The two Revys from the past walk from through the front entrance, and down the road.
Lee noticed this, as he thought, 'They must have realized that the trail at gone cold now. Good.'
The bartender swiftly walked around the bar counter, and with her free hand, pulled out a bottle of rum, from under the counter, right beside Bob and Rock, to Rock's right side, on a shelve, by him.
She leaned up, and placed the bottle of rum top of the counter, as she said, “Here is you bottle of rum, Revy. You can have it for free, if you just drink it somewhere else.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Sure.”
Revy walked over to the bar counter, grabbed the neck of the bottle with her left hand. She then left out the front door to the bar. As soon as Lee and the bartender saw Revy leave sight of the front windows, Lee said, “The coast is clear.”
Both men from behind the bar stood up, and walked out from behind it.
As they approached Lee, Bob said, “Thanks.”
Rock complimented, “Not bad. And your timing was good.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.” He thought, “I might as well ask them. And I am guess I am that arrogant to.” Lee requested, “Before you two leave, I would like to take some photos of us together. With us signing our names on the back. I would like to remember the guys that brought such an interesting set of beauties to my eyes.”
Rock said, “No problem.”
Bob replied, “If that is what you want.” He thought, 'That is a small price to pay for saving our butts.'
Lee turned to the bartender, as he requested, “Could you please take four photos of us.”
The barkeep held up her camera, as she answered, “Sure.”
The bartender took a four photos of Rock, Lee, and Bob.
Rock was on the right of the picture. Lee was in the middle. And Bob on the left.
All three were smiling, as Lee held up a two finger victory symbol with his right hand, in front of his chest, with his palm facing outward.
The bartender then pulled out a pen from under the counter, and she handed it to them.
All three men signed their first names on the back of the four copies. With their names right behind their image in the pictures.
After each adult received a picture of the three men, Lee pocketed the picture. Then, from another pocket, Lee pulled out two more photos. He said, “Here.”
Lee then handed Rock and Bob each a photo.
Bob said, “Thanks.” He then pocketed his to new pictures.
Rock commented, “I appreciate this.” He put his two new pictures in one of his pockets.
Meanwhile, the bartender set her pictures of the men, beside the photos of Revy, and the polaroid camera, on the bar counter, to be put up later.
Rock said, “I guess I should leave. Before more trouble comes for my friends, and I.”
Bob stated, “Same here. I feel I have stayed too long, as well.”
Lee and the bartender then watched as Bob and Rock left the bar through the front entrance. Bob turned to Lee's right, after exiting the bar, as Rock turned to Lee's left, after exiting the bar.
Lee thought, 'Now, to get out of here, and back to the hotel, before Revy does. While I am sure Revy took on of the cars her group has. Knowing her, she will likely run a few errands first, and then come back to the hotel. So, I have time. I will just take my time, and beat her there.'
'Still, I did enjoy that photo of use being taken. And the way I did the two finger victory sign in front of my chest was exactly as imagined Guy doing it. When Guy, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, Birdy, and Futaba, took the photo of them together, with all of them in their male from, in beach wear, on the beach, at the end of the first book of my Badasses Of the Multiverse stories.'
'Though, given how Rock is good friends with Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, she may have seen those photos before. But, likely only in passing. And she would not remember it. So, it is a small risk.'
Suddenly, the bartender faked a cough to get Lee's attention.
Lee turned to the bartender.
The bartender calmly said, “I don't know what your game is, Lee. I am not sure I want to know. But, I know that you are playing a very dangerous game, and you play it like pro.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'That was not meant as a compliment. Still, I have to ask her a question.' He inquired, “Will that effect our friendship?”
The bartender responded, “No. But, just be careful.”
Lee stated, “I always am. Also, if Sam comes by, please tell that I had to take care of things, and I will meets him later, at the usual time, as the hotel restaurant for dinner.”
The bartender said, “I will.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee then turned, and briskly walked out the front door of the bar. He then headed to his car.
Within less than a minute, Lee was on the road, driving to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee has parked his car, in the Devil's Hotel parking lot. He then casually walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel.
Lee thought, 'I have to remain calm to begin with. Then, act excited. If I do not, I will not be able to pull this off. Now, to find Rock.'
Lee turned to his left to see that sitting on a set of encircled couches was, clockwise Rock, Violin, Aeryn. The next couch had Natsuru, Akira, and Ranma. The next couch, facing Rock's couch, sat Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton. And on the couch facing Natsuru's couch, was Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka.
Revy, nor the Lagoon sisters, were anywhere to be seen.
Lee thought, 'That was simple. And it looked like Revy is not here yet. Now, let's get this over well.'
Lee casually approach the woman. He walked up to where the corner entrance to the couches, between Rock's couch, and Natsuru's couch.
The women turned to look up at Lee, as Violin said, “Hi Lee.”
Lee casually replied,, “Hello ladies.” Lee then turned to Rock, as he asked, while feigning a little bit of excitement in his voice, “Rock, why didn't you tell me that Revy had two identical twin sisters?”
The women all just laughed.
Rock smiled, as she said, “What makes you think that? Revy does not have any sisters that I know of.”
Lee was careful to pick the right pocket, as he pulled out one of his copies of three Revys, while being careful not to pull out the other two. He handed the picture over to to Rock, as he said, “I beg to differ.”
Rock looked at the picture, and her eyes widened in surprised. She then passed the picture over to Violin, whom just let out a laugh.
Violin then passed the picture to Aeryn.
As the women passed the picture around, and Lee inwardly smiled, as he watched most of the women's eyes widen. He thought, 'I will let them keep that copy. I still have the other one.'
Lee explained, “These two walked in to the Rats Nest today. Then, Revy showed up.”
Lee could tell the women were becoming even more surprised.
Lee could tell that Rock was forcing herself to remain calm down, as she hesitantly asked, “Did anyone else show up at the bar before them?”
Lee answered, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Now, that you mention it. Yea. Two men. First, was this bearded man in a cowboy outfit. The second man was sickly fellow in a black suit, using a cane to walk. Though, they left before the girls arrived.”
Lee noticed that his comment made all the women visibly tense up.
All the women had similar trains of thought, as Rock did.
Rock thought, 'Oh lord, Lee just had a multiversal temporal event involving my past self. Bob's past self. And three Revys. Although, he doesn't seem realize it. And we cannot tell him without also having to answer several, much more difficult, questions. That fool has a real knack from getting into these situations.'
Lee calmly inquired, while faking obliviousness, “What is the matter?”
The women immediately calm down, as a number of them quickly said, in unison, “Nothing.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Okay. Keep the photo. And have a nice day.” He mentally added, 'And I still have one to spare.'
Lee then headed turned around, and headed for the elevator bay, to take him to his suite on the third floor.
A few minutes later, when Lee reached the privacy of his suite, he laughed his ass off, while he thought, 'I just pulled off another impossible prank, and I did not even need the time loop to do it. Damn, I am good... And I think I will get some lunch, in a little while. After everything cools down with the girls, downstairs.'
As Lee calmed down, he took his two pictures out of his pockets, and put both photos in a safe place, in his bedroom. So, he would not lose them, nor would they be discovered by the others. He then relaxed on his bed, as he watched some TV.
(_)
Meanwhile, a few minutes after Lee left the lobby, Rock the suddenly remembered something. She looked around, at her friends, as she said, “I will be back later.”
Rock then got up, and she headed for the elevator bay. She took a separate elevator to her the floor where her suite was located.
When she entered her suite, she quickly walked over to her suit case, by the wall, and opened it.
She then unzipped a hidden lining in the suit case top, and pulled out a photo album that she and Revy had.
After a few seconds of paging through the photo album, she found the pictures she was looking for.
There were two photos. Both photos was faded from years of age. The first photo was of the three Revys. But, the second photo was of herself, as a man, Bob, as a man, and Lee.
She took the second picture out of the album. She flipped the photo flipped, and she saw the back had their names on it.
She flipped it back to the picture side, as she thought, 'Damn, it was so long ago, I barely remember it. And I had completely forget about the names, and Lee himself.'
'Still, my gut tells me that Lee's story does not add up. I look like my own sister. My male self looks like me enough, that he should have asked me why my male side used the name, Rock, just as I do. Also, he met my male self once. I am not sure he remembers, because he was drunk at the time.'
'In addition, that victory symbol looks familiar, but I cannot place it. It is not from any series I have seen. I just cannot remember where recall it right now.'
'Though, this all means there is more to Lee than I realized. I will have to watch him more closely.'
'Also, there is no point in asking Revy about these photos. She told me ones, she did not even remember when the photo of the three versions of her, together, was taken. And she had already done that twice. Though, she will likely talk about it today. Still, I doubt I will get much from the conversation.'
'But, for right now. I will just head back downstairs to join my friends. And while we relax, and have fun, as we look for the writer.'
Rock then put the photo back into her album, with the picture facing upwards. Next, she put the album back into her the hidden section of the lining. After which, she zipped up the lining, closed her suit case, and set the suitcase back by the wall, where it had been.
Rock then stood up and headed for the exit to her suite.
A few seconds later, Rock locked and closed the door to her suite behind her.
While she walked down the hallway, towards the elevator bay, and back to her friends in the lobby, she thought, 'I am sure when Revy shows up, she will mention what happened to her at the Rats Nest. The problem is, I doubt she will have any answers to my questions about Lee. And she is to blunt to mention the photo of me, Lee, and Bob too. She would just match into Lee's suite, and demand an answer. And this situation, calls for much more subtlety.'
Rock soon reached elevator bay, and a few minutes later, she rejoined her friends on the couches the front lobby, as they talked about various things. Including, the photo of the three Revys, that Lee has given them.
A little while later, Revy returned to the Devil's hotel. She came into the front lobby, and she her friends, and lover, what happened at the Rats Nest. And while she was a little annoyed that Lee has spilled the beans. She still told them was happened.
And Rock found that she was correct. Revy had nothing to really add on the matter, that Lee had not already informed them of.
(_)
It was one thirty PM in the afternoon in the hotel restaurant, as Lee has finally came down for lunch.
Except for Melvin, Lee was the only one there.
Lee had decided to have lunch at the bar that day. He had a bottle of beer with a club sandwich, along with nachos and cheese.
Lee had already drank most of his bottle of beer, and ate his sandwich, and half of his small plate of nachos and cheese. And he was beginning to get full.
Given the those after him, rarely came to the hotel bar between one to three PM, this was one of the rare times that Lee had allowed himself to relax, and get caught up in his own little world for a long while.
Currently, he was watching the TV, located on the far wall, behind side of the bar, near the back of the room.
Melvin even allowed Lee to select what channel to watch.
Given Revy, Rock and the others in the hotel, Lee felt that he needed to pick a channel that if they caught him watching, they would not suspicious.
So, Lee picked the Travel Channel, which was currently airing a repeat of the show, Bizarre Foods, which was in english.
As Lee set down his bottle on the bar counter, after taking a swallow of beer, he heard a sweet, feminine voice, to his left side, whom Lee did feel like recalling who it was, say, “What are you watching?”
Lee don't bother to look over his left shoulder at the person, as he answered, “I am watching the Travel Channel. They are showing a repeat of Bizarre Foods featuring Thailand. Did you know they eat boiled, and fried, silkworm grubs, there?”
The woman casually answered, “No, I did not. And considering I spent a number of years there, I am mildly surprised that I did not know that.”
The comment caught Lee's attention, as he slowly turned to his left, to looked over at the woman. Lee turned his head slowly, as to not raise in suspicions.
Lee showed no outward expression that would give away he knew who she was, as he looked at the small, petite body of Sawyer, whom was wearing a light pink blouse, red long skirt, with some red tennis shoes.
Sawyer continued, “I use to have a very messy job there. I am happy I am not longer doing that.”
Lee thought, 'Frederica Sawyer, the former cleaner of Roanapur. Calling her previous job, messy, would be an understatement.'
'She maybe only a hundred pounds when wet, but she is a dangerous as any of the other women in her group. Honestly, in some ways she is likely more dangerous than Revy normally is. This woman literally knows the human anatomy inside and out. Revy does not. Sawyer could being the pain, if she really wanted to.'
'Still, is she after my head?... Maybe not. Though, I had her brainwashed, I did do a lot of good things for her. The super-soldier serum she has keeps her healthy and young. I helped her gain a nice set of close friends. I had Lotton treat her like a lady. And I later restored her voice, and fixed her scars.'
'She is now an unquestionable beautiful woman, that gives off no creepy vibes when looking at her, except when she wears her goth clothing. But, that is her choice.'
'Though, she is not wearing goth clothing, right now. And she is actually quite cute. I guess she decided to do something different today.'
'And I honestly didn't pay attention to her just now. That could have been a fatal mistake. But, I am still in the clear. Given even my precognition is not giving me any warning sensations. Though, I guess I need to be on my toes.'
Sawyer commented, “Learn something new every day.”
Lee agreed, “Always nice to broaden one's horizons. Would you like some nachos and cheese? I have only eaten half of it. And I am not very hungry.”
Sawyer gave Lee a genuine smile, as she replied, “Sure.”
Lee handed her his half full plate of nachos and cheese.
Meanwhile, Melvin watched all this, as he thought, 'I wonder how nice Lee would be if he knew who Sawyer really was.'
Sawyer took the plate. She turned to Melvin, as she stated, “Beer please. I will pay you after I eat.”
Melvin replied, “That will be fine.” He then leaned down, and pulled a nice decent, cold bottle of beer from the fridge.
Melvin then handed the bottle of Sawyer.
As Sawyer took the bottle in her left hand, she held the plate of nachos and cheese in her right hand.
Sawyer turned to Lee, as she commented, “By the way. That photo this morning was interesting.”
Lee looked at Sawyer, as he replied, “Yes, it was.”
Sawyer then turned and walked away, and towards a table near the stage, across the room. She sat down in a chair. She open her bottle of beer. And she drank her beer, as she to ate the food that Lee had given her.
Melvin overheard Sawyer comment. He walked towards Lee, from behind the bar counter, as he asked, “What photo?”
Lee turned around to face Melvin. He pulled out another copy of the three Revys. And he handed it to Melvin.
Lee watched as Melvin looked at it, with Melvin's eyes going wide.
Lee held back a laugh.
Melvin forced himself to calm down, as he handed Lee back the photo.
Lee gently took the photo, and he pocketed the picture.
Melvin continued to collect himself, has he thought, 'It is possible that is Revy, from three different timelines, or realities. I doubt that is Revy from multiple realities. Still, I have to ask.' He inquired, “What sick reality would create three versions of that lunatic?”
Lee casually replied, “I guess this one.”
Both men then overheard Sawyer suddenly laugh for a few seconds.
Melvin questioned, “Did she just hear us from all the way over there?”
Lee coyly replied, “That appears to be the case.”
Melvin mentally realized, 'The super-soldier serum. I heard that it enhanced senses, and she was exposed it. I got to watch what I say. I almost let the cat out of the bag.'
Melvin inquired, “Care to tell me the back story on that picture?”
Lee answered, “No. Dealing with one Revy is enough. Three is not something I want to even think about.”
Both men overheard Sawyer laugh again, for a few seconds, from across the room.
Melvin then stated, “I fully understand.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. You do. On other note, I need to go do some laundry.'
Lee pulled out some money, as he said, “This should cover the meal, with a little extra for the tip.”
Melvin picked up the money, as he stated, “Thanks.”
Lee stood up, as he said, “See you later, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “You to, Lee.”
Lee then turned, and walked out of restaurant.
Melvin then watched as Lee left the room.
Melvin then turned his attention to Sawyer, whom was still sitting across the room, as he thought, 'I wonder how good the hearing is with those whom had the super-soldier serum. Let's test that.' He turned in Sawyer's direction, as he asked, in a soft tone of voice, “Do you want another cold bottle of beer, Sawyer? It is on the house.”
From across the room, Sawyer turned to Melvin. She smirked, as she loudly stated, “Sure.”
Melvin thought, 'That answers my question. And it was worth a bottle of beer to learn.' He then walked pulled out an unopened, cold bottle of beer from under the bar counter, and walked towards Sawyer, to get it to her.
Soon after Sawyer finished her snack, and the first bottle of beer. She then took the unopened bottle of beer with her, as she went to the bar counter, paid Melvin for the first bottle of beer, and left a tip. She then carried free the bottle of beer with her, in her right hand, as she headed out of the room, to find something else to do, to entertain herself.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lee had collected his dirty clothes into his gym bag. He then took the bag of dirty clothes to the laundromat, on the ground floor of the hotel.
Lee had the strap of his gym back slung over his right shoulder, as he entered the laundry mat. When he was inside the room, saw Akira sitting on a bench, against the wall, reading a book, as one of the washers by her was operating.
Also, Lee noticed that except for himself, Akira was the only person in the room.
Lee thought, 'I guess it is her turn to wash hers, Natsuru's, and Ranma's clothing. Also, even though Akira is sharp and savvy, she is also very nice. I don't mind spending time with her. In the time loops, she was one of the few women in Revy's group that I could talk to as a person, without worrying about saying the wrong thing and being hurt. Except for being the writer.'
Akira then looked up and saw Lee. She greeted him, 'Hi Lee. That was a nice photo you did today. Revy came by and confirmed what happened. That must have been a shocking experience for you.”
Lee walked over to Akira, with his gym bag.
Lee turned to Akira, as he joked, “It was easy enough on my eyes, that I should recover.”
Akira giggled. She then said, “Yea. I have to agree with you on that. Revy is nice to look at.”
Lee walked over to an unused washing machine, by the one Akira was using. He unzipped his gym back.
As Lee put his dirty clothing into the machine, he agreed, “Yep. And a tornado is nice to look at, but that doesn't mean you want to get close to it.”
Akira then let out laugh. She then stated, “Exactly. That is what I miss most about you southerners. You are both polite, and have a nice sense of humor.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Akira offered, “You're welcome. And you can sit down beside me.”
Lee replied, “I think I will.”
Lee reached down, on the open detergent box, and picked up a scoop of hotel detergent. He put the detergent in machine. He then set the scoop back in the open detergent box, on the floor. After which he close the lid to the machine, set the machine to wash, and turned it on.
Lee thought, 'I am glad the hotel has complimentary washing machines and detergent, that we guests don't have to pay for.' He turned to Akira, as he continued his thoughts, 'Now, I think I will join Akira, for a nice conversation.'
While Lee walked over to the bench, he a thought occurred to him, 'I wonder how much of the culture of the southeastern United States she remembers, from book one. I was kind of broad in my description of her time in Atlanta. While she was in college.'
Lee then sat down on beside Akira, to Akira's left, on the bench. But, as an act of tact, he spaced himself three feet from her.
Lee then turned his head to face Akira, to his right.
Meanwhile, Akira shift her entire body to face Lee. With her left foot on the bench between them, and her right foot on the floor. She placed her book in her lap.
While already knowing the answer, Lee inquired, “So, you have been to the southeastern United States, Akira.”
Akira answered, “Yea. Atlanta to be exact.”
Lee responded, “Interesting. Atlanta is kind of a basket case. The center is not that nice. But, outside the center of downtown is pretty nice.”
Akira replied, “I agree. So, you have been there?”
Lee thought, 'Oh crap. I have said too much. But, then again, I can still pass this off.' He answered, “A couple of times. Have you been by the Coca-Cola museum?”
Akira let out a laugh. She said, “Yes. That was an interesting tour. Have you been by the Georgia Aquarium?”
Lee said, “Sadly. No.”
Akira commented, “You missed out a lot not going there. And I did find some my time in Atlanta to be wonderful, for most part. And your nation had one thing that my homeland of Japan did not.”
Lee inquired, “And that would be?”
Akira answered, “While, my homeland of Japan has stuff like that. The one thing I found that you culture had over my culture was your culture appreciation for guns.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. My people's fascination of firearm borders on religious fervor. So, what got you original interested in guns?” He mentally added, 'I honestly wonder that. I know I made you a Black Lagoon fan. But, I have a feeling the answer was deeper and more distant in you past, than that. And except for being a Black Lagoon fan, I never really did give a reason for your interest in guns. So, I would like that answer to that question.'
Akira stated, “Well, when I was a young child, I saw the original Star Wars films. And well, some people are a Luke fan. Some are a Vader fan. And even some are a Leia fan. But, I was a fan of Han Solo. I even later bought a costume of that character.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. I remember reading that in your Gacha Gacha Secret manga. You did it to impress your love interest at the time, Yurika, whom one of your daughters is named after. And it backfired wildly on you. That was a funny scene, and an epic failure on your part. Still, I admire your attempt.'
Akira continued, “But, given Japanese strict anti-gun laws, I could do nothing about my interest. Though, I could still watch action movies, and anime about gunplay.”
Lee thought, 'So, that is what first drew you to watching the Black Lagoon series. That is interesting.'
Akira went onto say, “Then, soon after I came to America to study, I checked into my interest on firearms, and I found that I could practice with a pistol if I wanted to. And with my green card, and no criminal record, I could even own a shotgun there.”
Lee confirmed, “Yes. You could own a long gun there. Unlike what some people believe, we are very supportive and welcoming of legal immigrates. It is just those that break the law that we don't care for.”
Akira said, “Yes. I can understand that. Also, most of your people were very nice to me. Anyway, when I was not studying, or working, I went to a local gun range, and I learned how to shot skeet. I got so good at it, that the owners allowed me to practice shooting with two pistols at once. I got the idea from an anime.”
Lee thought, 'Yep. From Black Lagoon.'
Akira commented, “Anyway, I got so good that even Revy admires my skill. That is no small feat.”
Lee replied, “Given that she carries those pistols around with her. I guess she knows how to use them.”
Akira commented, “Oh yes. She does. She is expect in several types of firearms. Such as she has a marksmen level, or higher, when it comes to using a rifle.”
Lee said, “I will keep that in mind.” He thought, 'And it is a good reminder. Even though I already knew that.'
There was an awkward silence for a few seconds. Akira then said, “Well, it looks like we are going to be here for a while. Do you want to talk about something?”
Lee thought, 'As long as I avoid the dangerous subject. Such as my taste in fiction, my knowledge of computers, and the internet, along with me being the writer, I should be fine.' He answered, “Sure. Want to talk about the good restaurants in this town?”
Akira complimented, “Now, that is a good topic to have. And there happens to be a few in this town.”
Lee replied, “I know. What are your favorites?”
Akira answered, “Well, there is this nice Italian restaurant downtown. And I swear, I think the people whom run it may have use to be part of the mafia. I would know, I have met a few of them.”
Lee thought, 'Pedro did mention at one of our meetings that this island attracts badasses whom are looking for a quiet life. Also, I think I know which restaurant she is talking about. And they do fix good Italian food. And not just spaghetti. And their wine select is great, at a good price.'
Lee said, “They could be. But, that is not important. What is important is the customers service, and how good the food is.”
Akira agreed, “You got that right. And the people restaurant had both in excess. My family cannot get enough of the place.”
Lee stated, “It is always nice to find a good place to eat.”
Akira inquired, “Yes. So, where do you go to eat?”
Lee thought, 'I will omit the Last Resort, because I meet with Pedro there, were we talk shop, about them. As I don't any of them to start going there. And I really don't have any other regular places, except the Hotel Restaurant and the...' He answered, “Well, either here, at the hotel, or the burger food truck.”
Akira snorted. She replied, “Well, that figures.”
Lee conceded, “Okay. I slept with Eda. But, it was a one night stand. And the reason I go there is they fix good American style burgers and fries. It helps me with my homesickness.” Lee sadly thought, 'Which is true.'
Akira asked, “So, why are you here in the first place, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well use the cover story, I came up for this question. Or, at least a part of it.' Lee lied, “Long story shot. I had to flee the country over a matter of taxes.”
Akira inquire, “You cheated on your taxes?”
Lee continued his lie, “More like I got cheated, and me left holding the bag. You probably noticed that I am not much of a spender. If I had embezzled money, I would likely be somewhere else, with better clothing, in a warmer climate. Still, I had to flee on a budget. And I ended up here. I am not hurting for money at the moment. But, I am not making any long term plans either.”
Akira replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. You will. And it looks like you believe me. So, you will likely tell the others, and that simple cover story will help prevent your group from finding out I am the writer.'
Lee and Akira then continued their pleasant conversation. Their conversation continued for around an hour and forty five minutes, and it ended after Akira finished with washing, drying, and folding her clothing. Soon after, Lee finished cleaning and drying his clothing. He folded his clothing, put the items in his gym bag, and he took his clothing back to his suite, on the third floor of the hotel.
(_)
A few minutes later, it was around three fifty PM, when Lee came back down to the hotel lobby.
As Lee walked through the lobby, he saw Violin and Aeryn approaching him.
Lee thought, 'I wonder what they want?'
A few seconds later, the couple can to a stop in front of Lee.
Lee asked, “Hello ladies. Is there something I can do for you?”
Violin commented, “Nothing really. And this is not about that photo from earlier?”
Lee inquired, “Okay. Then, what do you want to talk about?”
Aeryn said, “We would like to talk to you about some movies.”
Lee thought, 'This is going to be an interesting conversation to navigate.' He requested, “What do you two want to know?”
Violin asked, “Lee, I was wondering, what new sci-fi movies, in the last few years, have you seen, that are worth watching?”
Lee lied, “Well, as you know, I prefer action movies, but there are two sci-fi movies that might be worth watching. The first the two thousand nine remake of original Star Trek cast, and the sequel.”
Violin replied, “Really?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Good movies. Good music scores. Good scripts. Good casting, and directing, with skilled actors. If you are a sci-fi fan, it is worth a watch. The first movie even shows how Kirk beat the Kobayashi Maru. And yes, he is as much of a ham about it as someone would expect him to be. The sequel is also good. Though, I will not spoil that movie.'
Violin said, “I will have to request those movie for the hotel theater, later. Any the other movie?”
Lee stated, “Tron Legacy. A sequel to the original Tron movie.”
Violin quickly asked, with anxiousness in her voice, “They made another Tron movie?”
Lee calmly said, “Yes. A sequel. It is also pretty good. Start to finish, with a good soundtrack by Daft Punk.” He mentally added, 'I even use the soundtrack to that movie, the original movie, and the animated series, as part of the musical inspirational material when I wrote my stories. For example, I wrote most of the first chase scene in book two while listening to the Tron Uprising track, Lightbike Battle.'
Lee could tell that Violin was becoming visibly excited, as she inquired, “The harder, better, faster, stronger crew?”
Lee replied, “Yep.”
Violin stated, with glee evident in her voice, “Oh god, I cannot wait. I got to see this now. And so do the other girls.”
Lee thought with horror, 'Oh crap, I just set her off into fangirl mode.'
Lee noticed Aeryn simply rolling her eyes, for a few seconds, at her spouses sudden change in mood. She then looked back at Violin.
Lee mentally added, 'I feel for you, Aeryn. Still, I am getting out of the room, before it is too late.'
Lee immediately try to turn and walk away, but Violin quickly gripped him by his left forearm, with her right hand.
The grip was firm, but not painful. Still, given Violin's alien side, her grip was far too strong for Lee to break.
Lee grimly thought, 'Too late. Oh well. At least Violin is nice. And her fan girl most is just energetic, not violent. So, I don't have to much to worry about.'
Violin stated, “You're coming with me, as I tell the girls.”
Violin dragged him off with her, toward the part of the lobby, where Lee saw the other members of Rock, and Revy's group were sitting. Aeryn quietly followed behind.
As Lee was forced to walk with the two women, he thought, 'At least it is a few hours till I meet with same, for dinner, a the hotel restaurant, around six o'clock. So, I have time.'
Lee stated, “I take it that you want to watch the movie, after you talk to them.?”
While continuing to walk, Violin did not look Lee, as she answered, “Yes. And I plan to invite the others to watch, as well.”
Lee thought, with worry, 'That could be a problem.'
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee, Revy, Rock, Violin, Aeryn, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, their three daughters, the Lagoon daughters, Lotton, Sawyer, Shenhua, and a few others, were sitting in the hotel theater, waiting for the movie to start.
Fortunately, the theater was empty at the time, so requesting a movie, and having the room to themselves, was not a problem.
The Lagoon sisters and the trio sisters sat in the right half section of the seats.
The other sat in the left half section. Lee was told to sit in the center of the left half section of the seats. The third row, on the third seat in.
And he was surrounded. On the third row, to Lee's left was Violin, then Aeryn. To Lee's right, on the third row, was Revy, and then Rock.
In the second row, in the middle third seat, was Lotton. To Lotton's left was Shenhua, and to Lotton's right was Sawyer.
Behind Lee, in the forth row, in the middle third seat, was Akira. To Akira's left was Ranma, and to Akira's right was Natsuru.
And as they had entered the theater, Lee saw that Revy, and Shenhua, a had their weapons on their person.
Even with his built up experience with the time loop, Lee poker face skills were strained to the maximum of his abilities. And the woman could tell he was nervous.
Lee prayed, in thought, 'Please lord. I know you hate me. But, if they figure out that I am the writer from watching this movie, let me die quick. I know you are planning to send me to Hell, no matter what. But, I think that would be more merciful that what they have in mind to do to me.'
Lee then stopped praying, as he continued his thoughts, 'Still, I am glad this theater was empty we we got here. And I am not sure how Violin convinced the theater projectionist to work on starting this movie so quickly. Even with bribery in the time loops, I has to give advanced notice.'
'Though, I am happy that Violin let me stop by the men's restroom. This is a two hour long movie. And I don't now want to have to risk disturbing any of these women during the movie.'
Violin noticed the sober looked on Lee's face. She turned to him, as she said, “Come on, Lee. It is not going to be that bad.”
Lee continued looking forward at the blank movie scene, as he replied, “I have a feeling that most of you women do not prefer sci-fi movies. And I have seen what some of you women can do, first hand, when you are upset in any way, shape, or form.”
Revy turned to Lee, as she warned, “You got that right, Lee. If this movie is a disappointment, you are going to find out exactly how upset I can be.”
Lee heard Revy's comment, as he thought, 'Okay. That is just salt in the wound.' He turned to Revy, as he said, “Actually Revy, most of the action on the good guys side, of this movie, is done by a woman. And she lives through the movie.”
Revy replied, with interest in her tone of voice, “Really? Then, I think you won't have much to worry about.”
Lee let himself relax a little, after hearing Revy's comment.
Suddenly, the lights dimmed, and the movie started.
Lee thought, 'This may mark down the most insane situation in my life. I am in my home reality, surrounded by fictional characters. Whom are after me, for writing about them, but they do not know it is me they are after. And we watching a movie, about a guy getting sucked into a reality, with a world and characters that were created from his own home reality. And the women are likely about to MST this movie. The surrealism of it all is beyond contemplation.'
'And I just realized something else. Violin was a big sci-fi fan in as both John and Violin. If she has not heard of Tron Legacy. The movie may not exist in any of their realities. Because Violin would seek out such movies from other realities. And I did not mention the Tron Legacy movie, directly. Or, the movie might not have come out in those realities, during the times Violin visited.'
'This movie has been out a few years. But, it has not been that long.'
'Though, this means this situation is going to be more interesting for everyone involved, than I first realized.'
The movie then started the titles, and Kevin Flynn began his speed on, the grid.
Towards the end of the speech, just before the scene cut to Kevin Flynn and young Sam Flynn, in Sam's bedroom, Violin said, “I think Kevin Flynn could understand us.”
Aeryn immediately used her right arm to elbow Violin lightly in the left side of her chest.
Violin turned to Aeryn to see her wife frowning at her. She sheepishly said, “Oh... Right..”
Lee kept his eyes on the screen, as he heard Violin's comment. Lee thought, 'I have a feeling these women are going to talk all through the movie. I just hope they don't spill any secrets in front of me. That could turn this situation very ugly for me. Even if they don't realize I am the writer, by the end of the movie.'
Soon after, the scenes changed to a much older Sam Flynn, getting into a motorcycle chase with a cop, and losing the cop.
Revy commented, “The scene that shows the main character is a rebel.”
Then, the film moved to Sam breaking to the ENCOM building, and hacking into ENCOM's computers.
Rock said, “And the breaking in and hacking shows how intelligent and resourceful he is.”
Then, there was the chase to the roof top. Sam then did base jumped, and parachuted to the street, when his parachute got hung up into a poll. As Sam released his straps, he found himself car surfing, with Sam having a good time doing so.
Ranma said, “And that shows he is a thrill seeking junkie.”
Revy casually stated, “All the traits show that he is a capable adventurer. Now, let's get to the meat of the movie.”
Next, the scene showed Sam getting arrested.
The scene then showed Sam getting arrested, as a police helicopter light is showing down on him, from above.
But, the next scene showed Sam walking out of jail.
Shenhua asked, “Why isn't that man still in jail?”
Aeryn commented, “Because, he probably owns the company. That is clearly the child, all grown up. And he stated as such to the security guard. He just doesn't feel like running it. Which I find is childish of him.”
Violin said, “I think that is the point.”
The scene showed Sam walking around the street to the impound lot. Where is talk to the impound officer.
On scene, Sam said, “Hey Karl.”
On scene, Karl replied, “Hey Sam. How are you doing?”
Revy stated, with surprised, “Sam and the impound officer even know each other by first name?”
Lee could not help himself, as he replied, “That is what you get for repeat business.”
The women erupted in laughter.
As they calmed down, and as the scene show Sam driving onto a dirt road, Lotton explained, “For those of you whom didn't see the first movie. Kevin Flynn ended up owning ENCOM at then end of the first movie. It stands to reason that his son would inherit his father's wealth. Users are humans that are from the real world, for lack of a better term. And programs are the people inside the computers.”
The movie then showed the garage that Sam lived in, as Lotton stated, “Or, at least the control in the company that his father had.”
Then, came the scene of Alan talking to Sam, with Alan giving Sam the keys to Flynn's arcade.
The scene cut to Sam walked into Flynn's arcade.
As Sam turned on the power, the song, Separate Ways, by Journey, began playing.
Revy commented, “Now, that is a meaningful song for the situation.”
Then, as Sam left the room, and headed down into the tunnel he found, the music switched to, Sweet Dreams Are Made Of This, by the Eurythmics.
Revy said, “And that one is meaningful song, as well.”
Soon, they came to the scene where Sam was suddenly transferred to the grid.
Lotton commented, “Well, that was a lot more seamless, than the cubit system in the first movie.”
Violin agreed, “You got that right.”
Then, Sam walked outside, only for him to see a spotlight shine down on him.
Lotton quietly commented, “That is no helicopter spotlight.”
Then, the recognizer, a flying ship, landed behind Sam, and he turned around to face the programs in armor that were a few feet from him.
The programs then arrested Sam, and he was taken up into the air, bye the recognizer.
Then, there was the scene of Sam being flew over the cityscape of the grid, and he was enjoying the view, with a wonderful piece of music playing during that scene.
Violin stated, “Now, that is how one does a panning shot of a cityscape. And the music does a very good job of setting the mood.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad you think so, Violin.'
After Sam landed, the programs selected Sam and others for the games.
Revy asked, “What is so bad about games?”
Lee answered, “They are gladiatorial games. As in those whom are made to fight, keep fighting until they are killed. Or, in this case, derezzed.”
Revy replied, “Oh.”
Sam was then taken to get suited up, and an identity disc.
Then game the fight scenes, without the clear boxes.
During the fight scene, as Sam used his identity disc to cut into the floor, Lee overheard Sawyer say, “I wish my chainsaw cut as well as his disc.”
The scene also show a masked man, sitting down, in a room, nearby, watching the games.
Next, Sam faced Rinzler in the large clear box, with Rinzler was wielding two identity discs.
Akira sarcastically commented, “Is it me? Or, does it seem everyone is dual wielding nowadays?”
The other women laugh at Akira's joke, for a few seconds.
Lee stated quiet, as he used his left hand to brush against his lower, left jacket pocket, where he kept his cardboard box of playing cards.
From the corner of his eye, Lee could see that across the room, from the light of the screen, that the eight teenage girls were being just as rowdy as the group he was in the middle of.
Lee then turned his attention back towards the movie screen.
Soon, Sam was defeated and brought to Clu.
As Clu showed his face, Ranma asked, “Is that Sam's father.”
Akira stated, “No. That is not Flynn. The face is to... clean.”
Lotton said, “Uncanny valley.”
Akira replied, “Exactly.”
The Clu scene Sam to the games, in the coliseum field.
And Sam was handed a stick for a lightcycle, by Jarvis, and Sam mistook the stick for a lightsaber.
On screen, Sam held the stick like it was a lightsaber, as he asked, “What's this? What do I do with this?
On screen, Jarvis sarcastically joked, “I'll give you a hint. Not that.”
All the women in the room erupted with laughter, for a few seconds.
Even Lee could not help but join in a chuckle a little at the scene. Even though he had seen the movie a few times.
Then, came the lightcycle battle, with the light walls.
In the end, Sam was the only one left alive, and without a lightcycle.
Then the four wheel vehicle literally drove into the arena.
Revy commented, “That is one way to make an entrance.”
The vehicle then picked up Sam, and the mask driver then escaped, using missiles two to blow a hole into the stadium all.
Natsuru complimented, “Now, that is how one makes an exit.”
The driver had her vehicle jumped off a cliff. In mid-flight, before landing, the driver converts the vehicle to four wheel drive mode.
Shenhua commented, “What is with americans, and four wheel drive mode vehicles?”
Lee was the first to answer, as he stated, “We like to be prepared to go anywhere, at any time.”
Violin, Revy, Sawyer giggled at Lee's answer.
The next scene show Quorra collapsing her helmet, showing her face, and introducing herself.
Revy inquired, “So, that is the female lead on the good guys side?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he answered, “Yep. She is the driver of the group. And she is one hell of a driver. But, she is also a far better pilot. You'll see.”
Lee saw Revy shrug. He then turned back to watch the movie.
Soon after there was the touching union between Flynn and Sam.
Violin commented, “Nice reunion.”
Next, Quorra show Sam the book collection that Flynn had, and that she has read. She then told Sam that her favorite author was Jules Verne.
Natsuru commented, “Is it possible for a character to become a fangirl towards the real world?”
Violin stated, “That would be an interesting flip. Usually, it is the people of the real world that become fans of the characters. Not the other way around.”
Akira said, with glee, “I am liking this girl already.”
Then, came the scene were Sam took off in Flynn's white lightcycle.
Sam was met by Siren.
Siren took Sam to Castor's nightclub, The End of Line Club.
As they walked into the night club, Violin noticed the DJ's they passed by. She asked, “Lee, is that Daft Punk.”
Lee continued to watched the movie, as he replied, “Yep. They is their cameo in the movie.”
Violin commented, “The scary part is they look like they belong on the grid.”
Lee replied, “Perhaps.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Wait a minute... What if they really are Daft Punk? They were first inside the Tron Legacy movie realities, they later traveled to this reality, to place themselves in the Tron Legacy movie. And they really are reality travelers?... French reality travelers.'
'In fiction, it is not unheard of for aliens, time travelers, and reality travelers, to pass off their personality oddities by claiming to be french... It would explain so much about them. I mean, they never show their faces in public. They only show their helmets. Always their helmets.'
'Also, there music is very unique and diverse. Each album is different from each other. And the Interstella 5555 musical film animation had an interesting plot of an alien rescuing other aliens from people on Earth.'
'And during the rare times they do take their helmets off, those could be hired stand-ins.'
'Oh my, it is probably true.'
'Still, I got to calm down, before the others notice me.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as turned his attention back to the movie screen.
Lee, along with the women, then saw Castor make his entrance. And what an entrance.
Aeryn stated, “My, he is hammier than you, honey.”
Violin agreed, “I know. He could give Captain Kirk lessons on being a ham.”
Rock, Akira, Natsuru, Lotton, and even Lee lightly laughed at Violin's comment.
Violin added, “The ham is strong with this one.”
Lee forced himself not to tense up at Violin's comment, as he did not react anyway to what Violin had said.
Lee thought, 'Given in Book Two, Chapter Seven, I had you think that line, as John, when thinking towards Chang of the past. And if I had reacted any way to your comment, I would have likely given myself away as the writer. Still, I think that was a very funny line.'
Then, came the bar fight at the nightclub.
Revy complimented, “Quorra, does know how to fight.”
The Flynn stepped onto the scene.
Rock stated, “Now, that is how you make an entrance.”
Then, there was the escape, and the solar sailer.
Violin commented, “That solar sailer looks a lot cooler than than it did in the original movie.”
Eventually, they came to the scene where Clu was amassing his army. And the movie answered where he is getting his army from.
Rock thought, 'So, Clu is kidnapping, and brainwashing programs, to be turned into soldiers. Did Chang get his idea from this movie? Or, did the writer come up with that idea by watching this movie? I have not heard of this movie in my home reality. But, then, this movie might not have come out there, yet. Though, brainwashing people to become servants and soldiers is an old idea, so it could be consequence.'
On screen, came Quorra's capture, and Clu big speech.
Violin commented, “So, Clu's master plan is to invade the real world, and take it over.” Lee then heard Violin said, under her breath, “That is little to close to home.”
Lee thought, 'You and me both.'
Then, came the scene came Sam's rescue of Quorra and Flynn's disc. As this happened, the scene cut to Flynn steal a lightjet in a very funny way, which caused the entire audience, including Lee, to lightly laugh.
The scene then went back to Sam and Quorra.
Soon after, came the lightjet battle.
Violin commented, “The lightcycle battle was cool, but this is better. Lightwalls on a three dimensional format is so much cooler.”
Revy said, “Yea. Quorra is one hell of a pilot.”
Then came the end of the lightjet battle, where Rinzler's identity was revealed.
Lotton said, “So, Tron was Rinzler.”
Lee thought, 'Or Beck is, from the Tron Uprising animated series. Though, that depends on whom you ask.'
Then, came the bittersweet, but uplifting ending.
As the credits started, with the music taking a more upbeat tempo, everyone began to get up from their seats.
Revy turned to Lee, as she said, “I liked the movie, Lee. And you were right about Quorra.”
While Rock stood, she leaned to the side of Revy, so Lee could see her, as she stated, “Lee, I found the movie engrossing. And well worth my time.”
Lee turned his head towards Rock and Revy. He then nodded once, an acknowledgment towards Rock and Revy, so they knew he had heard both of them.
Next, Lee looked around, and he saw that from the faces of the women, they had all enjoyed the movie.
Lee thought, with relief, 'Looks like I dodged another bullet.'
Revy then exited the third row, after Rock moved out of the way.
Violin said, “Lee.” Lee turned to face her, as she continued, “Thanks for recommending the movie.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Violin inquired, “Any other movies you would like to recommend?”
Lee turned to Violin. He shrugged, as he replied, “Not today.” He thought, 'My first mistake was recommending any movie to ya'll in the first place.'
Violin giggled. She then replied, “I fully understand.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch. He saw that it was five fifty-five PM. He turned to Violin, as he commented, “Besides, I have to meet Sam, right now, for dinner.”
Lee then saw Aeryn turned towards Violin. She lightly placed her right hand on Violin's left shoulder, to get her spouse attention. As Violin turned to look at her wife, Aeryn stated, “Lee has the right idea. Let us get some dinner.”
As Aeryn and Violin exited the third row, in the forth row, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma overheard the conversation. Akira looked over at Lee, as she said, “Lee.”
Lee turned to face Akira.
Akira inquired, “Though, I am not one to judge, but you and Sam seem together, all the time. Are you two dating? I mean, except for that one time with Eda, you have not shown any real romantic interest in any of us. And we are hot women.”
Lee calmly responded, “Sam and I are not dating. Still...” He then motioned with his right hand for Akira to step close to him. Akira did so, and Lee lean down to Akira's head, as he whispered into her right ear, “It is just that I find sanity to be attractive in women.”
As Lee leaned back up, Akira burst out laughing.
Natsuru inquired, “What is it, Akira?”
Ranma requested, “Yea. Don't keep us in suspense.”
Akira laughter became a light giggle, as she said, “I will tell you guys, later.”
A minute later, Lee got in line with the women women, and he soon made it through way through the door as well.
Lee then headed for the hotel restaurant, as did a number of the women. But, not all of them.
(_)
While the theater crowd let out, the eight teenage girls stayed behind, as they talked.
Sarah mentioned, “Did anyone else notice that Lee barely laughed at all?”
Molly replied, “I did.”
Kristina commented, “But, Violin stated that he was the one that made the recommendation. He has probably seen that move at least a dozen times.”
Nodoka stated, “I could see him doing that.”
Yurika agreed, “Yes. It is a good movie.”
Yukio commented, “It is possible he was intimidated by being surrounded by our parents and friends.”
Rebecca responded, “Possible. He could have been scared of us.”
Mikoto questioned, “What sane man isn't scared of our little group?”
Rebecca conceded, “Point taken.”
Molly said, “Well, it really don't matter either way. Let's go get something to eat. Any ideas?”
Kristina suggested, “Pizza.”
Molly saw Sarah and Yukio shrugged. Rebecca and Nodoka nodded. Mikoto rolled her eyes, meaning she really didn't want to go, but she would eat there.
Mikoto then looked back at the group.
Rebecca noticed the reactions of her sisters, and friends. She stated, “Works for me.”
Molly said, “The, pizza it is. We will go to the pizza joint we like to eat at. They have a good buffet that is reasonably priced.”
Kristina commented, “That works for me. And I will drive.” She then pulled out the keys to her car,
A moment later, Yurika also pulled out the keys to her car, as she stated, “I will drive, as well.”
The eight teenage women then headed out of the theater, and towards the hotel parking lot, to get into their cars.
A few minutes later, they reached their cars. There were four teenager in each car, with them head to a local pizza place they like.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant, and he saw Sam sitting at their corner table, in the front right corner of the room. And given that the table was empty, Lee could see that Sam had not even ordered his drink yet.
As Lee approached Sam, the bearded man, with a ponytail, turned, and saw Lee.
Sam said, “Hi Lee.”
While walking towards Sam, Lee replied, “Hi Sam.”
A few seconds later, Lee reach the corner table. He walked around the table, to his left side. With him sitting down in a chair, by Sam, to Sam's right side, with his back to the corner.
This allowed Lee to see around the room.
Both men turned to look at each other.
Sam was the first to speak, as he asked, “So, how was your day, Lee?”
Lee coyly answered, “Busy. You?”
Sam stated, in a slightly depressed tone of voice, “I found out my girlfriend plans to move here. To the island. She liked her visit to this town, and she decided she wanted to stay. And I spent the afternoon trying to talk her out of doing so.”
Lee said, “Then, I look forward to meeting her.”
Sam retorted, “No, you won't.”
Lee guessed, “Is she a real hell raiser?”
Sam replied, “That would be an understatement. She can be as bad as Revy.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Then, why are you with her?”
Sam stated, “That sex is awesome, and she is great to be with, when she is not on a rampage. And she rarely goes on a rampage.”
Lee shrugged, as he said, “Well, I will take your word on that.”
The two men then had a more casual conversation. With a waitress soon coming by to take their orders.
Several minutes later, they had their drinks and their meals, as they ate dinner together.
Though, both men did notice that the other man had avoided telling the other what they had been doing that day.
Still, they were having so much fun talking to each other, that they did not care.
And around six fifty PM, Lee excused himself, for around half an hour, so he could head out. As he secretly headed to the Last Resort Diner, to have his daily meeting with Police Chief Pedro Del Soto.
(_)
Lee drove to the Last Resort Diner, to meet with Pedro, with him arriving at the diner at Seven PM.
After walking into the restaurant, Lee saw Pedro sitting at their usual corner booth, to his right side. But, Lee noticed that Pedro was sitting with his back to the wall, looking towards the entrance to the restaurant.
Lee also noticed that besides the two waitresses and the cook, there were a few customers in the room, as well. Though, they were mostly on the left side of the restaurant. And none of the customers were near where Pedro was sitting.
Lee saw that Pedro noticed him, by the mexican police chief turned towards Lee, and nodding once in his direction.
As Lee walked towards him, he thought, 'The one problem with us both being so genre savvy, is with don't like to have our backs to the entrance. So, we take turns. Also, I see the customers in the diner right now, are regulars. They know who Pedro is, and they knew to avoid him, and to keep their mouths shut about anything we talk about here.'
Pedro waited for Lee to sit down the booth, across the table from him, before he spoke.
As Lee seated himself, Pedro inquired, in english, “How was your day?”
Lee answered, “You are not going to believe the day I have had. But, before I tell you about the day I had, how was yours?”
Pedro casually replied, “Just another day at the office.”
Lee thought, 'I think I will omit my run in with Sawyer at lunch, and my conversation with Akira, at the laundry mat. The rest is too juicy not to talk about.'
Lee explained, “Well, it all began late this morning. I was in the Rats Nest waiting for Sam, when two men came into the bar. About a minute apart. And I am not kidding when I saw this. The first man was Bob, from book three, during his time looking for Boris' cure. And the next one is Rock, from book two, between the events of book one and two, before he reunited with Akira. He is using the cane, but not much. Also, Bob clearly knew to keep his mouth shut.”
Pedro stated, “But, then one of the Revys looking for them showed up?”
Lee stated, “Actually, both of them showed up at the same time. It looks like they met each across the street from the bar. Revy in red leather, and Revy in her usual outfit.”
“Fortunately, when I saw them coming towards us, I am able to get Bob and Rock to dive behind the counter, and the bartender was cool with backing me up.”
Pedro commented, “Yes. She is quick on the uptake.”
Lee responded, “I agree. And we lucked out. I got those two men out of side, before the two redheads saw them through the windows of the bar.”
Pedro replied, “Good. What happened next?”
Lee inquired, “The two Revys walk in, and I just convinced them that both their targets had left through the backdoor, when guess who walked through the front door?
Pedro answered, “Our Revy.”
Lee said, “Exactly. Our present Revy came in for a bottle of rum. And here I was. Facing a completely FUBAR paradox. And how do I get out of this jam? Which a single question, directed at present Revy. That question be, Revy, why didn't you tell me you had two identical sisters?”
Pedro began laughing.
Lee went onto say, “Anyway, considering all three Revys want to keep their secret, they went with my question. But, I was in another jam. We both know Revy has a big mouth went is comes to stroking her ego. And she would tell Rock about her meeting herself, eventually. And that I was there. The other women would find it suspicious, if I did not mention the meeting to them, first.”
By then, Pedro has calmed down, as he asked, “How did you handle that?”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I used her own ego against her. And I convinced them to let me take pictures of the three of them together. Fortunately, the bartender has an old polariod camera with her. Afterward, as each of them had a photo, the two past Revys left through the backdoor, and present Revy left through the front door, after the bartender gave Revy a Revy a bottle of rum for free.”
Lee thought, 'I think I will omit the photos I had taken of me, Rock, and Bob. Pedro would probably be upset with me about that.'
Pedro commented, “That bartender knows when to cut her losses.”
Lee said, “Yes. She does. After the three Revys left, I informed Bob and Rock, that all is clear, and they leave. Then, I immediately took my car back to the Devil's Hotel, to tell the girls. Because, if Revy would likely tell her friends what happened. And if I did not tell them first, and control the situation, they might wonder more about me. With them beginning to take a closer look at me.”
Pedro questioned, True. How do you handle that?”
Lee stated, “I show the women the picture, as innocently asked why they did not tell me that Revy had two sisters. And I could see the discomfort they had on their faces, as they could not tell me the trust. Then, I told them, they could keep the photo. Next, I hurry to my suite, and in the privacy of my suite, I laughed my ass off.”
Pedro requested, “I bet. So, do you still have one of these pictures?”
Lee answered, “Yes. But, not on me. And so does the bartender. You can ask her to show you her copy, after I leave town.”
Pedro stated, “Okay. I can wait. So, what happened next?”
Lee said, “Later that afternoon, I was approached by Aeryn and Violin. And I got into a conversation with them. They wanted to know if I knew of any new sci-fi movies that were worth watching, that had coming out in the last few years.”
Pedro commented, “Now, that is a dangerous subject.”
Lee agreed, “I know. But, I had to give them something. So, I listed a few movies. And when I mentioned the Tron Legacy movie, I accidentally triggered Violin's fangirl mode.”
Pedro smirked, “That must have been an interesting experience.”
Lee replied, with sarcasm in his tone of voice, “Yea.” Lee then continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “That nearly got me caught, because Violin decided she wanted to watched that movie, right then, and there, in the hotel theater. And she not only wanted to watch is with Aeryn, and I. She convinced her friends to join us. The entire gang came into the theater. Including the teenagers. And we went got to the theater, we were the only ones in there. The teenagers are in the right side of the seats. And I am stuck literally in the middle of the adults, on the left side of the seats.”
“I then spent the next two hours, surrounded by them, as I had a front row seat to them MTSing the Tron Legacy movie. The interesting part is, they did a good job MSTing that movie. And it is a good move.”
Pedro inquired, “Yes. It is a good move. So, do you mean, Mystery Science Theater, MSTing?”
Lee replied, “Yep.
Pedro let out a laugh. He then said, “Damn. That is old school.”
Lee commented, “Yea. It is. And I was right there in the middle of things.”
Pedro accused, “Like usual. And it is not like you didn't thrown in a comment, or two, as well.”
Lee admitted, “Okay. I did thrown in a my two cents, now and again. Still, I am just damn lucky that they liked the movie, or we would likely not be talking right now. When the movie was done, I met up with Sam, to have some dinner. And here I am.”
Pedro commented, “Well, of all the movies to be forced to watch with the them. It had to be that one.” He then started chuckling.
Lee replied, “Yes. I know. Also, it seems that none of them had seen that movies before.”
Pedro stopped chuckling. He then sarcastically stated, “Oh that is just create. Like they are not dangerous enough. Let's give them more ideas.”
Lee flatly said, “Yes. I get it.”
Pedro requested, “Good. No more movie recommendations for them, from you.”
Lee stated, “I will try not too.”
Pedro thought, 'I guess I will have to settle for that.'
Pedro replied, “Okay.”
Lee commented, “Though, in some ways, we are the what if to that movie.”
Pedro asked, “What do you mean?”
Lee stated, “Thought, we are not facing a military invasion, like in that movie. We are pretty much users, and they are the programs that have found a way into our world.”
Pedro commented, “Then, let's just hope they are visiting, and they will follow your ass out of this reality, when you finally find a way to escape this reality.”
Lee replied, “Agreed.”
Pedro inquired, “Any luck on that?”
Lee admitted, “Nope.”
Pedro complimented, “Well, you are definitely clever enough. I just guess the opportunity has yet to present itself.”
Lee inquired, “Exactly. So Pedro, what do you do, when you are not busy?”
Lee thought, 'While, I already know the answer, from talking to Pedro in the time loops. It is best that I just ask the question and get it out of the way. So, if I mention that I know what he does on his off hours, it will not raise any suspicions with me.'
Pedro thought, 'It is interesting, that Lee not longer calls me Chief Del Soto, and instead he calls me Pedro. Not that I am going to say anything about it. There is to much on the line to wreck the partnership. Besides, that is a question for a later date. Now, to answer his current question. Which, while is a personal question. It is no secret I do on my off time.'
Pedro answered, “Well, on my off time, I have my friends over to my home, in the evening, and we have some beers, as we watch some of my video collection. Anything from Black Lagoon, to the Star Wars movies.”
Lee said, with envy evident in his tone of voice, “That is nice. What else?”
Pedro stated, “I practice my firearm skills, and spar, on gym mats, with a few other my officers. To be far, they sometimes beat me. And if they do so, in a fair, honorable way, I give them a day off, with pay, later that week.”
Lee complimented, “Now, that is the type of leadership I admire.”
Pedro replied, “Thank you. Anyway, I even sometimes go to the older gunsmith I know, and we chat about things. The guy is a real gun-nut. But, he is a first rate gunsmith, whom works on the force's weapons, and he does a great job in doing so.”
“He is also a crack shot with just about any firearm you can name. And I let him keep his firearm collection, and have a small firearm business on the side, because I have the feeling that I might someday need more backup than my force can handle.”
Pedro mentally added, 'And I keep a few players hidden in town, just for that occasional. And with those women here, I feel my concerns are definitely warranted.'
Lee thought, 'That I did not know. I want to know more about this gunsmith.' He asked, “No arguments there. And it is nice to be prepared. So, what is this guy's name?”
Pedro said, “I only know this guy's first name. Which is, Burt. Still, he is great guy, and I helped teach him spanish, when he first showed up, five years ago.”
Lee thought, 'That is around the same time that Melvin stated when he came here. Wait a minute... Burt?... Could he be?...' He inquired, “This Burt, is he a caucasian american, gray hair, claims to be from Nevada, and he sometimes wears a white, Atlanta Hawks baseball cap?”
Pedro questioned, “Yes. How did you know?”
Lee casually commented, “That is Burt Gummer, from the Tremors movies.”
Pedro replied, in a skeptical tone of voice, “Nah. He could not be.”
Lee stated, “He is. Remember, in my stories, he retrieved a reality device. He then eventually wound up in Roanapur, in the past, because the respected gunsmith for both Hotel Moscow, and Triad. Remember, he even made Akira's and Bob's custom six round, three fifty seven magnum, double-action, top-break, Peacemaker revolvers.”
“And Burt has enough sense to know when to leave a place before things go to hell. He just probably ended up here, liked the town, and stayed.”
Pedro just look down at the table, as he quietly asked, “How many reality travelers do I know, that I don't know are reality travelers?”
Lee stated, “Likely too many to be healthy.”
Pedro continued to look at the table, as he softly commented, “Sometimes I think one, is one too many.”
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “I disagree. There are some really nice reality travelers in this town.”
Pedro looked up at Lee, as he realized, while he inquired, “You know other reality traveler, besides the girls, in this town, and you didn't tell me?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Because I have their trust. Think about it. If I betrayed their trust, you could not trust me.”
Pedro conceded, “You have a point there.”
Lee stated, “Anyway. The one reality traveler I know of is on the run from Hotel Moscow.”
Pedro winched, a he replied, “Ouch.”
Lee said, “I know.”
Pedro thought about Lee's clue for a few seconds. He then guessed, “It's Melvin? Isn't it?”
Lee inquired, “How did you know?”
Pedro answered, “He always had problems watching the scenes where Hotel Moscow members got hurt. Now, I understand why.”
Lee commented, “That makes sense... So, you showed him the Black Lagoon series?”
Pedro stated, “Yes. He has been my friend for the last five years. I helped him get that job as the hotel bartender. Now, I know where he came from.”
Lee said, “I take it that you are not going to tell him that you know about him.”
Pedro shook his head once. He then stated, “Nah. If Hotel Moscow comes after him, there is nothing I can do to protect him. And telling him would only cause him more pressure.”
Lee complimented, “That is kind of you.” He thought, 'You likely feel the same way towards me. You will only provide help, when your ass, and those of your men, are not directly in line of fire. Though, given who were are facing. I am not going to hold that against you.'
Pedro replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “And look on the bright side, in dealing with Burt. You likely have one of the best gunsmiths in the multiverse working for you.”
Pedro stated, “You got that right. Speaking of Burt. I don't remember it being stated in the Tremors' franchise that Burt is a gunsmith.”
Lee pointed out, “Think about it. At the beginning of the first Tremors movie, Burt, and his wife, Heather, were preparing for world war three. If the civilization collapsed, a person will need those skills to be able to do such things on their own.”
“As such, he is already shown to be both a master survivalist, and an explosives expert. He also is an expert in all thing dealing with firearms. And his gun safety skills are top notch. Also, considering he is an expert in just about every other skill dealing with firearms, that it would make absolute sense that he not only knows how to built, customize, and repair firearms, but he is an expert at such skills.”
Pedro smiled at Lee, as he agreed, “I guess you are right. That does make sense. And so Burt Gummer is the Hattori Hanzo of firearms. Cool.”
Lee returned his friend's smile, as he stated, “Yes. That is cool. Also, that is a high, and worthy, compliment of Burt's skills.”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “I know.”
The two men then continued their conversation for a few more minutes, before Lee and Pedro got up, pays their bills, left a tip, and parts ways.
Lee then drove back to the Devil's Hotel, so he could rejoin Sam, to watch karaoke back in the hotel restaurant.
A few hours later, Lee and Sam called it a night, and they headed to their hotel rooms to get some sleep.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 10: “The Trucker And The Blade.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
A few days later, after the day that Lee met three Revys at once, it was late morning as Lee was walking back to the Devil's Hotel. Lee had decided he needed some exercise, and so he walked to the Rats Nest, that day. With him planning to walk back to the Devil's Hotel, later that afternoon.
Earlier that morning, Lee had missed Sam at the hotel lobby that morning, and he thought that Sam had gone ahead of him, to the Rats Nest. But, when Lee got to the bar, he found out, from the bartender, that Sam had left a message.
The message being that something had come up, and he would be busy for that day. So, as hot as the Rats Nest bartender was, there was real no point in staying at the Rats Nest. And Lee started walking back to the Rats Nest, so he could get to his car, and look for something else to do for that day.
As Lee walked down the sidewalk, with the two lane road to his right side, he grimly thought, 'This is becoming a bad habit with, Sam. And Sam never struck me as the type of guy that would let a woman pussy-whip him. I guess I was wrong... I may have to adjust my plans for a possible situation of Sam no longer providing me cover... Though, I have to admit the, those two guys, shtick is starting to wear thin on everyone, including myself.'
While Lee continued walking, a large semi-tractor trailer truck, carrying a cargo trailer behind it, pulled up beside him, against the curb, with the left driver's side of the truck by Lee.
Lee stopped walking at he turned to the truck. He thought, 'This truck parked on the wrong side of the road, by me. The driver must want something from me. And I am just bored enough to find out what that is.'
Lee then heard a woman's voice say from above him, and to his right side, in english, “Hey you! I am looking for directions!”
Lee looked up, and he saw that it was middle-aged, fair skinned woman, with short blond hair. He inquired, “Okay. Where do you need to go?”
The woman answered, “The Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Lee thought, 'I believe I have had enough exercise for today. I did not plan on walking so much, this morning. But instead, walk them morning and then later this afternoon. Maybe, I can get her to give me a lift, in exchange for direction.'
Lee offered, “I am heading there myself. Give me a lift, and I will show you where to go.”
The woman replied, “Sure.”
After Lee walked around to the passenger side. He opened the passenger side door, and climb into the passenger side. He then sat down in the seat, and closed the door. After which, Lee turned to his left to what woman trucker looked like.
Lee saw that the woman was a strong woman, in her mid-thirties. Though, strong in the muscular, heavy set way. Lee did not see any fat on her, at all.
The woman wore a red jacket over a green bodice. Under the bodice was black shirt, blue pants, and brown boots. Over the bodice, but under the jacket, she wore a black belt around her waist, and a black coat with red trimmings.
The woman also wore a black newsboy cap on the top of her head, and a necklace, with a small purple pendent around her throat.
Lee thought, 'She looks familiar, but I cannot place her.'
Lee introduced himself, “Hello. I am J.D. Lee.”
The woman replied, “Name's V.T.”
Though he did not show any reaction outward, as he screamed in his mind, 'V.T. As in Victoria Terpsichore. As in Cowboy Bebop V.T.?! How?! Oh yea. Reality Express at the beginning of book three of my stories.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he mentally reflected, 'If I remember correctly, I left it to where she would join that organization of reality traveling freight service, that was started by Little Dargo Crichton and Yuuichi Shinmyou, after the two of them reached adulthood.'
'At least V.T. is sane. And I have a woman to talk to that will not bite my head off, unless I deserve it. Also, she does not look that much older. She likely only has been working at her new job for a few years after what I wrote of her, in book three of my stories. Unlike most of those that are after me, whom don't look it. And in many cases don't act like it. But, whom are decades older than V.T.'
'Though, if I was counting time loop, I am kind of getting up there in years myself. And I don't exactly act, or look like a many in my fifties.'
Lee then realized something, as he continued his thoughts, 'Wait a minute, how and why is the hotel getting reality delivery service? Maybe the hotel really is the Devil's Hotel. And that manager might be...'
Lee then realized what he was thinking, as he caught himself in thought, 'Best not to think in that direction, especially since the manager can read thoughts and emotions. And he has at least some control of time, space, and reality.'
'And speaking of directions. I need to give V.T. some.'
Lee turned in front of him. He quickly got his bearings, as he stated, “To get to the hotel, you need to take this road for another block, then take a left. Then, there are a few more turns, then, you meet one of the main north-south roads of the island. All in all, it is a few miles from here. We should be there in a few minutes.”
V.T. replied, “Thanks.” She then started up her rig, and drove down the street, with her immediately directing her truck back onto the right side of the road.
Meanwhile, Lee took another look at V.T. as he thought, 'To be honest, V.T. is gruff around the edges, but she is nice, as long as one is nice to her. So, it could not hurt to ask.'
Lee offered, “Say, V.T. Have you been to the island before?”
V.T. kept her eyes on the road, as she answered, “No.”
Lee stated, “Well, the restaurant in the hotel we are heading to makes a good lunch. And I was would you like some lunch. My treat.”
At the moment, they came to a stop sign, as V.T. brought her truck to a halt, she looked over at Lee, and sized him up.
As she looked back at the road in front of her, and started her truck back up into gear. She cracked a smile, as she said, “Sure. I could use some lunch. After I get my cargo unloaded.”
Lee looked at the road in front of them, as he replied, “I can wait.”
V.T. happily complimented, “I admire a patient men, J.D.”
Lee kindly said, “Thank you, V.T. And I prefer to go by Lee.”
V.T. responded, “Well, you're welcome, Lee.”
They then continued down the road.
(_)
Forty minutes later, it was not yet noon, as V.T. finished delivering her cargo. Lee even had the opportunity to see the back rooms of the hotel, as V.T. did so. Though, these were parts of the hotel that Lee did explored during the time loop, because he could access them easily, without any lock picking. But, it was still an interesting experience, as he watched a professional trucker driver deliver her cargo, and learned how she did so.
When they were finished, V.T and Lee got back into V.T.'s truck, and she drove them to another area of the outer parking lot.
After parking, V.T. left the truck to idle, and Lee lead them into the front door to the lobby.
As they passed through the lobby, Lee noted that Revy, Rock, and the others were nowhere in sight.
Lee thought, 'Good. They are not here. Maybe they are watching a movie. Or, even screwing each other. I don't care at the moment. Also, it is to early for them to be going to lunch. So, I should not have much to worry about them showing up.'
Lee turned to V.T., as he stated, “This way to the restaurant hotel.”
Less than a minute later, Lee lead V.T. into the hotel restaurant. Given it was not yet lunch rush, Lee saw that, along with V.T. and himself, the only people in the room were Melvin, two waitresses, and a few other customers.
Lee then lead V.T. table, in the center of the room, to a small, round, four chair table, which was away from the rest of the customers.
A few seconds, after they sat down in chairs, across from each other, at the small table, Melvin personal came to take their orders.
The two sitting adults looked up at Melvin. V.T. faced the entrance doors, with Melvin to her right side. While Lee's back was to the entrance doors, with Melvin to his left side.
Lee said, “Hi Melvin.
Melvin replied, “Hi Lee.”
Lee stated, “This lady beside me is, V.T.”
Melvin turned to V.T., as he said, “Nice to meet you, V.T.”
V.T. replied, “Likewise, Melvin.”
Melvin then handed them their menus. Lee and V.T. took their menus.
Melvin then inquired, “So, what can I get you two to eat for lunch?”
Lee stayed quiet, as he held his menu closed. He was silent for several seconds, as V.T. opened her menu and looked threw it.
V.T. then looked up at Melvin, as she ordered, “I will take a glass of lemonade, and a club sandwich, with chips.”
Lee stated, “I will take a cold bottle of beer, and a house salad, with ranch dressing.”
Melvin wrote down their orders, on a pad of paper and pen, in his hands. The two sitting adults then handed Melvin back the two menus, and Melvin then turned and walked away, towards the kitchen, to deliver their orders.
As Melvin walked away, V.T. and Lee turned to each other.
V.T. commented, “So Melvin, knows your name.”
Lee stated, “I believe in complimenting the help, when they deserve it. And the service at this hotel has been top notch. In exchange, they are nice to me.”
V.T. commented, “That good to know. So many people forget to treat the help with respect.”
Lee agreed, “It is sad that many people are not taught basics of manners, and civility.”
V.T. replied, “I hear that. You strike me was a man who has lived in this town for a while.”
Lee thought, 'Counting the time loop, that is an understatement.' He admitted, “Yes. I have been here a while. And you strike me as a woman that can take care of herself. And you have obviously done well for yourself.”
V.T. grinned, as she responded, “Thank you. And you are correct. Also, while you obviously know that this is not going anywhere, you are still polite and cordial.”
Lee calmly said, “Yes. I understand that. Though, I am spending lunch with a beautiful lady. And that brightens my day.”
V.T. retorted, “I am not that pretty.”
Lee stated, “I completely disagree. I admit that neither of us are spring chickens. But, beauty can also age gracefully. And you have done so, V.T.”
“Beauty comes in many forms. It is how one carries oneself. How one presents one's own positive traits. Just because you are not young and skinny, doesn't mean you are not beautiful, V.T. Personally, I like a woman with a little meat on her bones.”
“Though, what most people of my generation, and young generations, were not taught, but I learned on my own, was that the final determining factor is personality.”
“You have to be able to live with, and get along with the person you are with. And there are some women in this very hotel, that I am on a first name basis, that are hot, young women. But, I would not date them, even if you put a gun to my head. Because, they are insane and violent.”
“While you, V.T., carry yourself as a lady. Not just a woman. But, a lady whom has far greater inner strength than your outer strength. And you look very physically strong.”
V.T. smile widened, as she responded, with happiness in her tone of voice, “That is the nicest compliment I have heard about my looks, and my strength, all year.”
Lee returned V.T. smile, as he responded, “You're welcome, V.T.”
V.T. commented, “Well Lee, I think when you find that special woman, she is going to want to keep you.”
Lee joked, “I got to find her first.”
V.T. chuckled, for a few seconds.
As V.T. calmed down, Melvin returned to their drinks.
A glass of lemonade for V.T. and a cold bottle of beer for Lee.
V.T. took a sip of her drink, as Lee opened the cap from his bottle of beer, and took a sip of his own drink, as well.
A second later, both adults set their drinks down on the table.
Lee then noticed V.T.'s expression change to to slight sadness, as she let out a sigh, while she looked down at her drink, on the table.
Lee asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What is the matter, V.T.?”
V.T. looked up at Lee. She answered, “It is my workload. It is due to both my bosses going into trouble with their families. And I am doing backlog. But, if gives double pay. In gold and riches. So, I don't really mind. Anyway, long story short, it involves something they did in their youth, involving bikini beach parties.”
Lee thought, 'She must be talking about Little D and Yuuichi. What a minute. Oh my, she is talking about when they were teenagers and snuck into the bikini beach parties. I only mentioned that at the beginning of book three...'
'Of course. The girls would learn this if they read my story. Also, it sounds like this happened recently. It is possible, she is from the past, when compared to Revy and her group, whom are here, on the island. Still, I need to know what happened to them.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Dare I ask what happened to them?”
V.T. stated, “I didn't get the full story. But, my bosses caught wind that their family and friends had learned what they did. So first, their family and friends had to catch them. Which was no easy feat.”
“And when they did finally catch them, their punishment was something about packets of something girl, and bikinis. And they were told that if they did, whatever they did, again, the family and friends said they would use the real stuff on them. Whatever that is. I have have feeling that I don't want to know.”
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he mentally translated, as he inwardly winched, 'No. You don't want to know. They used instant packets of spring of drowned girl to temporally turn the two men into women, and they then them made dress up in bikinis. Finally, they warned them if they ever did something like that again, they would use the real water from the spring of drowned girl to permanently curse them to turn into girls with cold water.'
'And if this is what they do to their own family, and friends, as revenge, I don't even want to think about what they have planned for me.'
Lee agreed, “I think you are right. I don't want to know, either.”
Just then, Melvin delivered their meals. Melvin also set down some metal utensils, wrapped in paper napkins, on the table, for them.
Lee looked up at Melvin, as he said, “Thanks, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “No problem, Lee.” He then turned, and walked away, to attend to his other customers.
Lee looked over at V.T., as he thought, 'I have a question, on what her opinion is, on a matter dealing with her current job.' He asked, “So, why did you take this job?”
V.T. wall looking at her club sandwich and chips. Which she liked. Though, she heard what Lee had asked her. V.T. turned to Lee, as she answered, “The pay and benefits are good. The scenery changes. And my employers respect my tastes in music.”
Lee chuckled, as he nodded. He then replied, “Those are some good reasons to stay on.”
V.T. smiled, as she replied, “You got that right.”
Lee inquired, “By the way, what were you delivering?”
V.T. flatly answered, “Food.” She then picked up her club sandwich, and she took a bite of it.
Lee silently looked down at his food, as he thought, 'I am dying of cancer, anyway. There is no point in worrying.'
Lee pulled unrolled his paper napkin, to separate his metal utensils. He then picked up his fork from the top of the table, and he began eating his salad.
The two adults them continued their conversation, as they ate, and drank their drinks.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, as Lee and V.T. were finishing their lunches, Rock walked into the restaurant, as she thought, 'I might as well make sure our tables are clear, before the rest of the crew gets here in about five to ten minutes.'
Rock took came to a stop, near he front of the room, as she then saw Lee eating lunch with V.T. She could not believe her eyes, as she thought, 'That is V.T. Why the hell is she here?... Oh yea. She works for Reality Express. But, then who is she here for?... Of course, this hotel. And I have a feeling I do not want to know, why or how this hotel is ordering goods from across the multiverse.'
'Still, why is Lee with her?... Well, he is polite. Though, I will question him on the matter, in a minute, after V.T. leaves. Also, I have not met V.T. in person. So, I have no idea if she has heard of me. It is best to play it safe, and wait till she has left, before confronting Lee.'
Rock then turned to her left, and walked over to the hallway, that lead to the restaurant restrooms, where she hid, with her back to the hallway opposite to the outer all. She then focus on Lee's voice, as she used her enhanced hearing to recognize V.T. voice, while she listen in on their discussion.
(_)
At that moment, in the middle of the restaurant, at the table, where V.T. and Lee were sitting, both adults had finished their meals.
They looked up at each other, as V.T. stated, “Well, it looks like we are done.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It does. It was nice meeting you, V.T. I hope you have a pleasant day.”
V.T. smiled, as she said, “You too, Lee. I wish all my meetings with men were as pleasant as this. If I come back here, I might look you up.”
Lee stated, “Well, if I am still around, I would be more than happy to have another meal with you, again.”
Lee saw V.T.'s smile widen a little bit, as she got up from their table. She then walked passed Lee, to his left side, as she calming walked towards the exit of the restaurant.
Lee turned his head and body, in his chair, as he silently watched V.T. leave the restaurant.
Lee thought, 'That was probably most pleasant, mature, adult meeting I have had with a woman... Ever... Now, I guess it is time to pay the bill.'
Lee got up, and walked over the bar counter.
Melvin saw him coming, as waited for him, from behind the bar counter.
When Lee got to the bar counter, across from Melvin, he pulled out a U.S. twenty dollar bill. He handed the money to Melvin, as he stated, “I think this should cover the lunch, plus the tip.”
Melvin took the money and looked at the twenty dollar bill in his right hand. He then looked up at Lee, as he said, “Yes. This should cover everything.” Melvin then walked over to the cash register, to ring up the sale.
As Lee turned to his left, to walk out of the restaurant himself, he saw Rock approaching him from the front of the room.
Lee thought, with annoyance, 'What does she want? Still, if she is here, Revy, and the others are not far behind. I think I will go to my suite, and watch some TV.'
When Rock reached Lee, both of them came to a stop, four feet from each other. Given their height difference, Rock looked up at Lee's face, while Lee looked down at Rock's face.
Rock could see that Lee's face was unreadable, as he remained silent.
Rock demanded, in a stern tone of voice, “What were you doing with woman just now?”
Lee did not show his anger on the outside, but he was furious on the inside, as he thought, 'I am not going to let anyone question my character of a such pleasant experience, as I just had. Now, even Rock, Revy, or anyone else.'
Rock noticed that Lee's body language has suddenly changed. Instead of Lee being relaxed, his body became imposing, as he looked down at her.
Lee spoke in, a polite tone of voice, which had a subtle hint of malice in his tone of voice, that Rock picked up on, “Rock, if you are wondering, I find strong, independent, sane, heterosexual women to be attractive. And V.T. is even in my age bracket. Nothing happened. I just met her coming back here to hotel. And she gave me a ride back to the hotel, in exchange for directions here. During our brief trip here, we introduced ourselves to each other, and I was able to convince her to have a nice lunch with me.”
Lee continued, with more anger evident in his tone of voice, “Is there a problem with that?”
Rock thought, 'I must have hit a nerve. And he clearly knows nothing.'
Rock stated, “No. I actually respect your tastes in women.”
Lee visibly relaxed, as Rock saw the man force himself to calm down.
Lee then replied, in a more relaxed tone of voice, “Good.”
Lee then walked passed Rock, to Rock's right side, with Lee soon exiting out of the hotel restaurant. He then headed for the front elevators bays. A few seconds later, the elevator opened.
Just as his elevator closed on the ground floor, across from the elevator he was in, two other elevators opened on the ground floor, to reveal Revy and the rest of her group exiting the elevators, as they walked toward the restaurant, to get some lunch.
Meanwhile, Lee soon made it to his suite, and watched TV for the rest of the day, as he tried to continue to come up with a plan to steal one of the small reality traveling devices from some of the more badass women in the multiverse, without getting caught.
At dinner, Lee found Sam was no where at sight, in the hotel restaurant. So, Lee ate alone, at the front right corner table of the restaurant. Soon after, it was time to meet Pedro at the Last Resort Diner.
Lee paid the bill, left a tip and headed outside to his pink car, to drive to the diner.
When Lee reached the diner and he met with Pedro, Lee did not tell Pedro anything about his meeting with V.T.
Given neither man has much to talk to about anything that happened that day. Their meeting was brief and they soon parted ways for the evening.
Lee then returned to the Devil's Hotel, headed to his suite, and turned in early, to get some good sleep.
(_)
The next morning, Lee was having breakfast alone in the hotel restaurant, at the bar counter, when he and Sam sometimes ate their meals.
While Lee now preferred to sit at the front, right corner table, he sometimes still went back to the bar counter, to set in the stool, where he sometimes sat at, as a way to break the monotony of his situation.
Unfortunately, Sam had not showed up that morning. And Sam has not given him any messages at the front desk.
Lee held his glass of orange juice in his right hand, as he took a swallow of orange juice, to wash down the food he ate from the restaurant, breakfast buffet.
Lee thought, with concern, and a bit of sadness, 'I am beginning to think that I may have to write Sam off. To think, at one point, I considered Sam a friend. A friend leaves a message. A friend gives an explanation before leaving. I should stop being so foolish. I long since learned that God made sure I would never have any friends...'
Lee then gently set his glass down on the counter, in front of him, to the right side of his plate, as he continued his thoughts, with more calmness than before, 'Still, I will do the one thing for Sam, that those in my homeland never did for me. I will give him the benefit of the doubt.'
As Lee got finished with his breakfast, from the corner of his eye, he saw Ranma, Rock, and Revy, walk by him. While they did passed by him, he overheard the part of their conversation, as Revy stated, “Take Lee for example. He is a schmuck.”
With his back turned to them, Lee lost control of his poker face, as he scowled for a full second, before he regained control of his emotions, and his face turned to a more relaxed expression.
Still, Lee's thoughts were full of anger, as he thought, 'That tears it. I know Revy is stating that insult out of ignorance. And it would be worth being shoot by her, to inform her over the truth.'
Fortunately, Lee had already paid for his buffet, and since it was self-serve, there was no point in leaving a tip for the meal.
Lee then stood up, as he turned around to face them.
Lee was less than six feet away from the badass women. And Lee could see that Revy had her cutlasses in their shoulder holsters.
The three women noticed this action by Lee, as they stopped walking. They went silent, as they turned to face Lee.
Lee inquired, in a calm, though firm tone of voice, “Revy. Do you know the real meaning to the word, schmuck?”
Revy replied, “It means, idiot. Which is what you are, sometimes.”
Lee shook his head one, as he responded, “No. The origins of the word, schmuck, is yiddish. Meaning jewish. A schmuck is the discarded penile foreskin that is removed during male jewish circumcision. To call a man, a schmuck, is a major insult to that man.”
“That insult is considered to mean, to be regarded as so vulgar as to be taboo. That is why a few, certainly not most, jewish men call non-jewish men schmucks. As a way to insult them in a major way, without the non-jewish men realizing it, since most non-jews don't know what the insult means.”
“The closest female comparison I can think of for the insult, schmuck, is the insult is the male equivalent to the female insult, cunt.”
Revy replied, with interest in her voice, “Really?”
Lee said, “Yes.”
Revy smiled, as she stated, “That is nice to nice to know. Now, I can really use that insult the way it is intended. Thanks.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
As Rock and Ranma heard Revy and Lee's conversation, Rock thought, 'I wonder.' She inquired, “Lee, how did you find that out? I am fairly sure you are not jewish.”
Lee responded, “No. I am not jewish. But, I am a fan of jewish comedians. I am a Mel Brooks fan. And I still am. Anyway, he used that insult in some of his movies, and I wanted to know what the insult meant. I looked it up, and I surprised that Mister Books has such a filthy mouth. The man is the master, comedic, bullshit artist of his generation.”
Rock agreed, “Very true.”
Revy inquired, “Well, Lee. Since you are so knowledgeable about insults. I was wondering. What is the male equivalent to, bitch?”
Lee thought, with amusement, and a bit of arrogance, 'Oh well. I might as well play this game.' He casually answered, “The accepted male insult is, bastard.”
Revy, “What about, cougar?”
Lee, “That would be, sugar-daddy.”
Revy, “Babe.”
Lee, “That's an easy one. Dude.”
Revy, “Gold-digger?”
Lee, “Gigolo.”
Revy, “Slut?”
Lee, “Dickhead.”
Revy, “Dyke?”
Lee, “Fairy.”
Revy, “Motherfucker?”
Lee responded, “That insult is unisex. Think about it.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then agreed, “You're right. How do you know all this?”
Lee answered, “Among the lessons I was taught by my mother and father, to become a southern gentleman, I was taught to know insults. So, I knew when I was insulted. Though, I prefer not to use insults. Except for occasionally calling yankees, damn yankees. But, that is a culture thing. And yankees sometimes call southerners, hicks. So, it is a give and take situation.”
Lee thought, 'And that cover story, and the face did not use insults in my stories, should keep them from suspecting I am the writer. Even after this conversation.'
Revy replied, “Yep. You are right about that. Thanks again for the information. It is always fun learn how to insult people in new, and interesting, ways.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I better excuse myself, before I get myself into some trouble.' He calmly said, “Again, you are welcome. See you later, ladies.”
Lee then turned around, to face the front of the room. He then walked away from them, and towards the exit of the restaurant.
As the three women watched Lee walk though the exit, Ranma thought, 'That man just got into a conversation with Revy, on insults, and he walked away unharmed. He is no idiot. Though, this might mean.'
Ranma turned to Revy and Rock, as she questioned, “Given we just learned Lee's knowledge of insults, does this mean he might be the writer?”
Revy and Rock thought over Ranma's question for a few seconds.
Revy was the first to answer, as she stated, “No. Lee is not the writer. I know insults. And of the literal thousands of pages that the writer wrote about us, the writer only use insults a handful of times in his stories. Also, Lee gave a good reason why he knows the insults.”
Revy thought, 'I would have known something was up, when during that time, I didn't insult people that much with curse word. But, oh well. Cleaning my vocabulary, was probably one of the nicer things he did for me.'
Rock heard what Revy had said. She thought, with pride and love, towards her lover, 'That is one of the many reasons I love you, Revy. When you actually stop and think for a moment, you show how intelligent you really are. And I agree with you assessment of the situation.'
Rock stated, “I agree with Revy on this.'
Ranma thought about what Revy and Rock said, 'They are likely right. I have seen Lee curse in real life before, a few times. Including, right now. And even when we gave him that Mickey Finn. And all three of us regret doing that to him.'
'Still, the writer would likely not have such a dirty mouth, as Lee's in real life. Though, speaking of which. We really need do to start looking more intensely for the writer. I am sure the writer is still around. With him likely being somewhere in the hotel. We just need to find him. I will talk to Natsuru and Akira, about this, later, in private.'
Ranma replied, “Okay”
Revy looked over at Rock and Ranma, as she asked, “So, what are you guys planning to do today?”
Rock stated, “I was going to go meet with Eda and Yolanda, to see if they have gotten any leads on the writer.”
Revy looked over at Rock, as she complimented, “Good idea. I think I will join you.” She turned to Ranma, as she asked, “What about you, Ranma?”
Ranma stated, “This afternoon, I am planning to go with my lovers, and our daughters, to do some window shop around the better parts of this town.”
Revy said, “Have fun.”
Ranma replied, “Thank you.”
The three women then turned and headed for the breakfast buffet, to get something to eat and drink. Given, they had already paid for their meals, before the met Lee that morning.
(_)
At the moment, on the roof of the Devil's Hotel, Melvin was in his sweatsuit, and white tennis shoes, as he exercised, using combat techniques he had learned decades beforehand, with his combat knife firmly gripped in his right hand.
Melvin was enjoying the cool sea breeze, and the partly cloudy sky, as he exercised.
While Melvin did so, he thought back on his past. About how he wound up here, in this reality, as a bartender.
And Melvin's real adventure started, on a very interesting night, decades ago, in another reality, on a long forgotten battlefield.
(_)
In the Black Lagoon reality, during early nineteen eighties, in a mountainous region in Afghanistan, during the Soviet-Afghanistan war.
At the time, Melvin. Or more aptly, Yurick. With Yurick being his real family name. Was a Russian paratrooper, and a member of the special forces of the vozdushno-desantnye voyska.
At age twenty-two, private Yurick was one of the younger members of his military company, but he had earn his position in the special forces.
Even though Yurick had been drafted into the Soviet military, at age eighteen, he soon displayed in his natural skills and potential, in his basic training. Skills and potential, that his military superiors took notice of.
Yurick's skills were impressive. In basic training, he showed he had a natural gift for firearms, both pistol and long guns. He potential in hand to hand combat, and combat with a knife was nothing short, but incredible.
And his instructors realized that he had no fear of heights, after his first time learning how to repelled down with a rope.
During his first tour in war as a grunt, in Afghanistan, he had achieved over forty-two confirmed kills of enemy combatants. While he show unquestionable duty to his squad, and his superior officers.
Yet. Yurick showed no bloodthirsty traits. To him, it was a job, and only a job. He was just really good at killing.
The one draw back was that he was clearly a follower, in most cases. He would take orders, but he was not a natural leader.
Still, he superiors felt that he would be wasted as just grunt. And given he had no fear of heights, he was transferred from infantry to airborne.
Such transfers were rare, but not unheard of.
And after he finished his advanced training, he was reassigned to the vozdushno-desantnye voyska company, under the command of the captain, whom her men had nickname, Balalaika, for her skills as a sharpshooter, with the Dragunov snipe rifle.
As the Dragunov sniper rifle was sometimes being called, Balalaika.
Currently, it was a clear night, during a hunter moons. And almost everything that could go wrong, for their company, did go wrong that night.
First, they were ordered to parachute in during a clear night when it was a full moon. Next, they were all suppose to land in an elevated rise, near the bottom of the valley. But, the constantly shifting winds of the mountains and valleys behind them, caused their company to be scattered, and land across the mountains and valley near their landing location.
Also, the intelligence they were given was bad. They parachuted around a large group of Afgan rebels, whom were on the move, using the night as cover for themselves.
And, worst of all, given the hunters moon, for the most part, allowed everyone to see each other, with the Afgan rebels having the high ground, part way up a large hill, behind some large rocks.
The Afgan rebels had pinned down most of the Russian paratrooper, whom were trapped on the valley floor, with no way to getting at the rebels.
Given the Russians had yet to get a good look at the terrain, they could not simply use mortars to get at the rebels, because there was a very real chance of an explosion creating a rock slide that would bury them in dirt and rubble.
And their Captain, whom was on the valley floor, with most of her men, preferred dealing with incoming gunfire, than having her men, and herself, buried alive.
Meanwhile, Yurick was on of the few fortunate paratroopers to get blow up the mountain the rebels were on, with him being higher than than the rebels.
After removing his parachute, Yurick was quietly making his way down the mountain, when he saw most of his company had landed, when he saw the muzzle flashes, and heard the gunfire erupting from both the side of the mountain and the valley.
From his hand held radio, strapped to his belt, he heard what was going on, and he realized that he was right above, and behind the main rebel position.
Yurick knew it was up to him to save his comrades. He turned off his radio, and quietly made his way down the mountain to where he was behind the rebels.
As Yurick crept along the mountain, towards the rebels, he saw that he standing beside outcropping of the mountain, that offered cover from above, for the Afgan rebels. While there were rocks, and a natural, small dirt berm overlooking the valley, right below the edge of the outcropping above the berm. This offered the rebels a natural pill box to shoot down at his comrades on the valley floor.
But, Yurick was standing in the back entrance of the outcropping, on the right side of the rebels. And the rebels had not seen him, as they were clearly all focused on firing at the valley below, while no guarding their flanks.
Yurick counted sixteen rebels. And he was ten feet from the closest rebels. With the rebels tightly closed together.
Yurick given the closeness of the situations, he would need to move in quick, and skillfully.
Still, as much as he wanted to, he could not just toss in a few grenades, and then move in for the kill. Much like his captain realized, he knew he could not risk using grenades, because the explosions could cause a landslide, that could bury his comrades.
He set the selector switch to his AK seventy-four to full automatic.
He also made sure this his sheathed combat knife and, holstered TT thirty-three Tokarev semi-automatic pistol, were ready for when he needed them.
Yurick the took a deep breath and let it out. Right after which, he rushed in, he was about to killed eight of the rebels, with his spray bullets from his AK seventy-four automatic rifle.
Fortunately for Yurick, the gunfire created by the rebels masked the sounds of his own gunfire, with many of the surviving rebels not realizing they were under attack, nor so close to their attacker. This allowed Yurick a few precious seconds to press his attack.
As Yurick rushed at them, he dropped his rifle, and he swiftly pulled out his pistol, in his right hand, and combat knife in his left hand.
By then, some of the rebels saw him. But, as they turned to fire one him, it was too late, as he was within melee range, as he used a combination of small arms fire, and hand to hand combat knife techniques to swiftly kill six of the eight men.
When he ran out of bullets for his pistol, he discards it. He then swapped hands with his combat knife, with his knife in his right hand, as he made short work of the last two men.
Less than a minute later, after Yurick made sure that all the rebels were dead, and there was no one else hiding. He sheathed his knife, and unhooked his radio. He then turned on his hand held radio.
Yurick stated, into his radio, in russian, “Captain Balalaika. This private Yurick. The main group of hostiles pinning you down has been dealt with.”
The Captain radioed back, “Good work, private. Hold your position. We will meet up with you after we had dealt with the rest of them.”
Yurick replied, “Yes, sir.”
Yurick them clipped his radio back to his belt. After which, he collected his pistol and rifle. Which he found were in good condition. He reloaded both weapons, holstered his pistol, and held his rifle at the ready.
An hour later, after the rest of rebels had been dealt with, Captain Balalaika, her second in command, a lieutenant, and a handful of company members escorting the both of them, entered the pill box, and the saw what private Yurick had done.
As Yurick saw his blond captain approach him, to survey the carnage, he clicked on the safety of his weapon, and held the barrel pointed upwards, in his left hand, as he stood at attention, while he saluted her with his right hand.
Balalaika came to a stop ten feet from Yurick. She smirked at the scene before her. Of a lone private, standing at attention, while be surrounded by the corpses he had just killed.
Balalaika stated, “At ease private.”
Yurick relaxed.
Balalaika calmly asked, “Private Yurick, did you did all this?”
Yurick answered, “Yes, captain.”
Balalaika complimented, “Well, it looks like we have a real blade on our hands. Good work.”
In response, Yurick just smiled.
Later, after a head count, they found that they lost three men of their company that night. But, it could have been far worse, if not for Yurick's heroic actions. And from then on, his comrades sometimes referred to private Yurick as, Yurick the Blade.
(_)
In the present, in Lee's reality, on the roof of the Devil's Hotel, Melvin stopped practicing his exercises, and he sheathed his blade, in the scabbard he kept unhidden in the back of his pants, under his shirt. He then walked back inside, to get to his suite, clean up, and professionally dress for his current, more peaceful profession. So, he could continue his bartender job later that morning.
(_)
Five minutes later, outside the entrance to the lobby of the Devil's Hotel, three fair skinned, beautiful, young women, in their mid-twenties, walked under the awning, and stood there. They looked at each other, as they talked.
All three women were slender in build, and average height for women of their ethnicity. Two of then had black hair, the other had brown hair.
One of the black haired woman wore a women's gray pantsuit, with black dress shoes. The other black haired woman wore white t-shirt, blue jeans, black leather belt, and white tennis shoes.
The brown haired woman wore a tanned colored, short sleeved blouse, with a long brown skirt, and black flat soled slippers.
The woman in the long skirt had long hair to her shoulders, while the other two women had short, feminine style hair cuts.
The woman in the blue jeans turned to the woman in the pantsuit, as she asked, in russian, “Grisha, I still don't see why I am here?”
Grisha turned to the woman in the blue jeans, as she responded, in russian, “Because, Timur, you were the one that shot the reality device in Yurick's hands, causing him to disappear into the multiverse. And the way he did so prevented us from tracking him. We are just fortunate that it took us only a year to narrow the search down to this reality, location, and time. The captain does not like it when her men... Err, soldiers go awol.”
The woman in the long skirt commented, “I don't understand is why he didn't join us. I mean we got a lot out of this.”
Grisha turned the brown haired woman, as she stated, “The reason is simple, Desya. Outside of taking orders, Yurick has always been stubborn. I guess when it came down to himself, or orders, he chose himself. Still, I don't know why you are wearing that.” She then used her right hand to put at Desya's clothing for a few seconds. She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Desya shrugged, as she responded, “Hey, I am just enjoying the opportunity to wear a skirt. You should give it a try. It is quite comfortable to wear. My legs don't feel so constrained and overheated like one sometimes feels when wearing pants.”
Grisha replied, “I will take your word for that.”
Timur mentioned, “I heard from Lotton that she, along with Revy, Rock, Shenhua, Sawyer, and a number of the others in their group, are staying in this hotel.”
Desya said, “I am surprised you are still talking to Lotton, after the events of the tower.”
Timur turned to Desya, as she explained, “Well, back at the tower, Lotton hosted some of the best party nights I know of. Full of games, music, and fun. Lotton was always been respectful towards us. And given her gender change, and the fact she was forced to play maid, for years, towards that knife nut and the cleaner, I am going to cut her some slack.”
Grisha lightly chuckled, for a few seconds. She then agreed, “True. So, why are they here?”
Timur stated, “Lotton said they were after someone. I am sure it is not, Yurick. But, someone else. Though, she did not say, who, or why. Though, she did say this town was entertaining for those that enjoyed living Roanapur. That this town was like Roanapur, only if Roanapur had cleaned up years ago. And the badasses that live here, prefer to live quiet lives.”
Grisha responded, “Good job, Timur. That means we won't start any trouble, and we won't have to worry about those lunatics, either.”
Desya inquired, “Should we ask Two-hands, Rock, or Lotton, for help?”
Grisha stated, “No. While the captain and sergeant trust them. I do not trust those lunatics. And I will be honest. Before we all had our young restored, at the price of being turned into women, I use to think, baring a few exceptions, like the captain, that almost all women were born insane. Since being becoming a woman, I have come to realize that is not the case. And their insanity is a learned trait on their part.”
Timur and Desya chuckled at Grisha's comment.
Grisha continued, “Also, if we introduce ourselves to them, it will raise questions. I do not think the captain informed them of what is going on, concerning the changes to us. And it could cause trouble for the captain and the sergeant. By the way, does Lotton know about our gender changes?”
Timur answered, “No. We just electronically text messages to each other, using dummy accounts, in our home reality. We both check it within days of each other, local time. And they do not know about Yurick.”
Timur went onto state, in annoyed tone of voice, “Still, I don't like the fact that we are going to just have to walk around, asking people, if they have seen a man named Yurick. While showing them the only photo have of him. The only photo of Yurick we could find. And an old photo at that.”
Grisha responded, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “I know it is tedious, but there is no other alternative. We are just going to have to do this the hard way. Still, them not knowing will make things easier for us. Just a case of two ships sailing pass each other, at night. We mind our business, and they mind theirs.”
Timur said, “My thoughts, as well.” Timur grumbled, “Though, I wish we could have at least brought out guns with us.”
Grisha pointed out, “If we had taken our firearms with us, it would have likely caused questions to be ask. We are not in Roanapur. The cops are not bought off. Anyway, we can still handle ourselves in a fight, more than ever. And we each have a reality device, in case we need to make a quick escape.”
Desya stated, “Grisha is right. This is covert. We go in guns blazing, we will not find Yurick. We have to do this subtly. And he might not recognize us.”
Timur commented, “Oh. Yurick will still recognize us. He has always been sharp like that. And we look like our own younger sisters.”
Desya conceded, “I guess you might be right about that.”
Grisha stated, “Alright. Let us play this cool. We have all seen the Black Lagoon series. The captain, and the sergeant showed us the series soon after we got out of those vats. And we all found the situation quite funny. We already were traveling for years, across fictional realities. So, it only made sense that our reality was a work of fiction, as well.”
“Anyway, we are going to use that information to our advantage and prevent this from becoming a tragedy. Yurick already has a scary nickname, the Blade. And Yurick ran for us for logical reasons. And this entire situation is running way is too close in parallel with origins of the Bloodhound for me to be conformable with.”
“We do not want to create another Bloodhound. So, should we confront Yurick. We need to explain to Yurick, that yes we are capturing him. Yes. We are going to turn him a woman. But, we are not going to torture him, nor make him a slave, nor kill him. And in the end, after all is said and done, she will likely thank us for all we did for her.”
Desya said, “They say hindsight is twenty-twenty. And, if things to go to hell, at least we tried to prevent the worst case scenario.”
Grisha replied, “Exactly.”
Timur stated, “And that is why the captain put you in charge of this operation, Grisha. She understood that you are levelheaded, and you have the savviness to handle situation, while preventing things from getting worse.”
Grisha smiled, as she replied, “I know. And then there is the fact we are all VDV members, and with the super-soldier serum, we can take Yurick in a fight, without seriously harming ourselves, nor him. Now, let us go do our job. And remember, we have to speak english. Most people here do not speak russian. We do not speak spanish, which is the primary language here. And Lotton mentioned most of the people here also speak english, So, english seems it should work in this situation.”
Timur and Desya nodded in acknowledgment. Then, all three women entered the entryway into the lobby.
(_)
Meanwhile, at the moment, inside the lobby, Lee was sitting down in a couch, behind himself. The couch was against the right wall of the lobby, by the entrance to the elevator bay. This allowed him to see those coming into the hotel from the outside, and those coming into the lobby from the hotel restaurant.
Lee leaned his back again the cushions, as he thought, 'What should I do for today? With Sam nowhere to be seen, my schedule is pretty much open. If this was the time loop, I might be tempted to mindscrew Revy and the girls. But, given there are no more resets, that is not an option.'
Lee then noticed three young, beautiful, slender, fair skinned women walk into the lobby, from the entrance.
Suddenly, the music in the lobby changed. And after a few notes, Lee immediately recognized the music, as he thought, 'That is, the Hymn To Red October. From the movie, The Hunt for Red October. A very cold war movie. And a good movie. Though, I found the book to be too detailed for my reading tastes. And from the timing, the song change is dealing with those three women. Still, why would that song be playing? The song is pretty much the theme for the Soviets in that movie...'
Lee then realized, as he continued his thought, 'No. It could not be. I need to be sure that they are not whom I think that they are.'
Lee then quietly watched at the three women walked up to the front desk. The one in the pantsuit pulled out a small photo. They presented the photo to the two clerks at the desk.
Though, Lee's hearing was not that great, he could read lips, a skill he learned in the time loop. Though, he could only read lips well, when those in question were speaking english. Which, Lee found was fortunately the case.
The black hair woman in the pantsuit was speaking english. And she was asking if they had seen an older man named, Yurick.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'Yep. Those women are from Hotel Moscow. They are after Melvin, whose real name is Yurick. And I have to give this hotel lobby credit. It has taste in playing the right music, for the right situation.'
Lee then saw the clerks answer, no, in english. As they shook their heads. The women then turned to their left, walk away from the check in desk, and towards the left side of the room.
As Lee continued watching the three russian women, he noticed that the women intentionally walked around Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, whom were sitting beside each other, on a couch, on the other side of the room.
Though, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton paid them no mind, as the three russian women then asked a few people sitting in a nearby couch, while showing them the photo.
Lee thought, 'Okay. There is some good news. The members of Hotel Moscow know about Shenhua, Sawyer, and likely Lotton. But, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton do not know those three are members of Hotel Moscow. Balalaika and B likely never told Revy, Rock, and the others, that they gave their soldiers the gender bending, super-soldier, vat treatment.'
'Though, I can understand Balalaika's logic. She has a badass commander, whose loyal subordinates were growing old. She wanted to keep her army together. So, she took drastic action. Still, as juicy as this information is, I would never, ever consider using that as blackmail material, against anyone involved in this mess. They are all far to dangerous to do so.'
'But, I can use this information in other ways. First, these Hotel Moscow members are being low key. They are taking a simple, and effective approach. I admire that. And they do not want Rock and the others to learn it is them. Nor, do they want to learn whom they are after. Because, doing so would raise questions that would let the cat about of the back, about Hotel Moscow change of gender ratio, concerning their membership.'
'Also, the russians did not check into the Devil's Hotel. That means, they will likely ask a lot of people, and if they do not find Melvin, they will simply leave, by the end of the day'
'If they do find Melvin... Well, I don't want to be there, if it happens. As much as I respect Melvin. I will take a page from Pedro, and not get involed. I do not want to get caught in a two, or three way battle, between Melvin, Hotel Moscow, and maybe Revy's crew. Melvin will just have to worry about this, on his own.'
'So now, what should I do? I have enough problems, as is. I do not want to get this tragedy waiting to happen. So, I should be trying to avoid the entire situation, and not get caught up in it. In which case, my hotel suite would be the safest place to be. I will just go up there, lock the deadbolt behind me, watch TV, and dine in for today. This should blow over, one way, or another, by tomorrow morning.'
A second later, Lee quietly got up from his seat, walked a few feet to his right, into the elevator bay, and he swiftly got into an elevator, as he head for the third floor, and his suite.
A few minutes later, Lee locked himself into the safety of his bedroom suite. And he soon sat on his bed, as he used his remote to watch some TV, while he patiently waited for this current storm to pass.
(_)
Half an hour later, on the second floor, Melvin walked out of his hotel suite. His the door automatically locked behind him. And he used his key to lock the deadbolt about above the knob.
Melvin was dressed in his usual clothing, newsboy cap, and black dress shoes. He combat knife was in its sheath, and it was hidden under the back of his green sweater, by his Tokarev pistol.
While Melvin walked down the hallway, he walked by one of the chambermaids he knew, pushing her cleaning cart.
The chambermaid stopped walking, as she turned to Melvin. She said, in spanish, “Good morning, Melvin.”
Melvin stopped. He then turned around to face the woman, as he replied, in spanish, “Good morning, Melissa.”
Melissa inquired, “Did you here about those women this morning?”
Melvin asked, “Which women?” He mentally added, 'I hope Revy, nor the others in her group, have trashed the restaurant before I even start work today. If so, I am getting help to clean it up. And they will be barred from the restaurant, until they pay for the clean up and any damages.'
Melissa said, “Three russian women. You can tell from their accents. Though, they spoke good english.”
Melissa's comment caught Melvin completely off guard. Melvin asked, “What do they want?”
Melissa answered, “They are looking for someone named, Yurick.”
Melvin responded, “Thank you, Melissa.”
Melvin then continued passed Melissa, as he walked towards the elevator bay.
While Melvin walked, he thought, with worry, 'They have finally found me... Well, not found me, found me. But, they know I am in the hotel. What do I do? I cannot run. That will tip them off as to who I am. I could play it cool. But, I need help. I need advice, and there is only one person I know that seems to have a handle on such situations.'
'I am so happy I looked up which floor, and room number, he is staying in.'
'And while he may not know what is going on. He has enough sense, that if he realizes there is danger. And if he is as good as I suspect. Which given his experience with Revy and the others, is very likely. When he learned of these new mysterious women showing up, he will have already headed back in his hotel suite, to wait out the situation.'
Melvin soon reach the elevators, and he swiftly made his way to the third floor.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee was inside the bedroom of his suite, watching TV, while sitting on his bed.
There was a knock on Lee's door. Lee used the TV remote to turn off the TV. He then stood up on the floor, and tossed the remote onto his bed, as he made his way to the door.
Lee walked over to the door, and looked through the peephole.
He saw Melvin standing outside his door.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'I honestly forgot the call knows where I live.' He mentally added, while in a more serious mood, 'If do not answer the door, and he walks away, I will be pretty much burning my bridges with him. Which is something I do not want to do. So, I might as well face the music, play dumb, and help him where I can.'
Lee unlocked the deadbolt. He then twisted the knob to opened the door.
As the door opened, Melvin made his way into the room, forcing the door to move, and Lee to step to the side.
As soon as Melvin was all the way inside, Lee shut the door, as he sarcastically stated, “Make yourself at home, Melvin.”
Melvin turned to Lee, as he apologized, in a sincere tone of voice, in english, “I am sorry, Lee, for literally barging in here. But, this is too important to discuss in the hallway.”
Lee asked, “Okay, what is it?” He mentally added, 'And I can already guess what it is.'
Melvin stated, “They are after me.”
Lee thought, 'The problem with both of us in hiding, is I cannot reveal to Melvin, what I know, without revealing myself to him. And he cannot tell me the truth about himself, without revealing himself to me. Though, I already know who his is. So, I have to play this carefully.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Okay. Who is after you?”
Melvin thought, 'Let us keep this simple. I can state the truth, without revealing too much of the truth.' He stated, “From what I understand, three women from the organization that I escaped from, have tracked me to this hotel.”
Lee thought, 'Even though I already knew that. Now, that you told me, maybe we can do something about covering your ass, without exposing mine. Because if these Hotel Moscow members learn about me, and my stories, then the entire Hotel Moscow organization would likely set up shop in this hotel by nightfall.'
'And given how Revy, Rock, and their crew seem to love mess with me, if I suddenly leave, right after Hotel Moscow shows up, I will give myself away as the writer. That is, if I had a place to run too. Which I don't.'
'Though, if I stay, with that many more people looking for me, in such a confined place as this hotel, they will find me, soon enough.'
'In such a case, I might as well surrender. Though, I might convince Pedro to deliver a message that I am willing to surrender... Who am I kidding. Barring the maids, if Hotel Moscow showed up, Pedro would likely flee the island, within the hour of those badass russians arriving here.'
'The irony is, except for B, I had nothing to do with their gender change. That was their choice. Still, they would be after my head. Also, unlike Revy, Rock, and the others of their crew, those of Hotel Moscow are professionals. And I do not think I could fool Balalaika, B, nor their subordinates, for long.'
'As such, I have to get them out of here as quickly as possible. And I have an idea on how to do so. But, that will have to wait for a few more questions and answers, before I tell Melvin my plan of action.'
Lee questioned, “Who are these women? What do they look like?”
Melvin answered, “They are russian. I honestly don't know what they look like, considering I have been avoiding them.”
Lee thought, 'That is the truth. They were changed into women after you left. Now, they next question.' He inquired, 'Do they know it is you they are are after? Do they know what you look like, right now? Or, the name you use? If you are on the run, you are likely using an alias.” Lee mentally added, 'Like me.'
Melvin stated, “I agree. And no, on both counts. They clearly don't know what I look like. Nor, my name. They just know that I am in the hotel.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to allay his fears.'
Lee grinned, as he pointed out, “Good. That works for us. Keep in mind, you don't really have an accent. Meaning, if you remain calm, you will likely be fine. Still, how are they searching the building for you?”
Melvin said, “From what I understand, they are asking people about me.”
Lee grin widened a bit, as he thought, 'And here is my solution.' He stated, “That is even better. Eventually, they will run out of people to ask. Or, if they approach you, after we convince them that you are no the one they are after. As one of the hotel employees, you can tell them to stop harassing the hotel patrons. Or, you will call the police on them. That will likely get them to leave.”
Melvin complimented, “That is brilliant. I am glad I came to you for help.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Melvin commented, “It is very clear you are hiding from someone, or something. But, the way you handle Revy and the others is nothing short of genius. You are skilled at manipulating people. But, you do so in very subtle ways.”
“Though, you only do so to deflect attention from you. You don't take advantage of people, just to sleep with them. You only do so out of survival. I admire that about you. And I know enough about Eda to state that she was likely was the aggressor in your little one night stand.”
Lee stated, “Actually, Eda was quite pleasant in bed.”
Melvin snorted, “Really? I, and the others, always thought she was more of a hellcat in bed.”
Lee replied, “No. She was not rough. But, she preferred to be on top. Not that I was going to argue with her.”
Melvin smirked, “Wise decision... Hey, wait a minute, why are you not surprised that I know Eda?”
Lee thought, 'Now, to play one of my cards.' He casually answered, “You stated that you know Revy. Eda told me that she and Revy know each other. I had a front row seat of a meeting between the two of them. They clearly have known each other for a while. It is an academic guess that you knew Eda, in some way. Though, I am not asking for details.”
Melvin nodded once, as he stated, “And this is why I like having someone like you on my side. You know exactly how to push the situation to your advantage.”
Lee thought, 'Oh boy. He can tell that about me. Not surprising, considering he is a professional. But, if the girls figure this out, that will blow my cover right there.'
Lee requested, “Okay. But, please keep that to yourself”
Melvin stated, “I will.”
Lee commented, “Now, we need to make things appear as normal as possible. Are you considered late for work, yet?”
Melvin answered, “No. I usually come into work around ten minutes early.”
Lee explained, “Good. Now, here is what we are going to do. You will go down to the restaurant, right now. I will join you in a few minutes. If we walk together, doing so will draw suspicion. And I will stick around the bar counter. All day, if need be. If they approached us, I will help give you cover. Just follow my lead.”
Melvin replied, “Okay. I will. Also, good plan. And thank you.”
Lee pointed out, “Do not thank me just yet. If this goes south. I will be the first one out the door, saving my own ass.”
Melvin agreed, “Given whom we are facing. If things start to go back. I recommend you do just that.”
Lee responded, “I appreciate that. On another note, if they approached you at the bar counter. Do not. I repeat, do not place one of you hands under the bar, in preparation to draw your pistol. And your long knife. Yes. I know about that pistol. That will tip them off immediately that it is you.”
Melvin realized, as he thought, 'He is right. And if he has the eye for detail, that I guess he has. I am not surprised he knows I am armed.'
Melvin said, “Thanks for the warning. See you downstairs in a few minutes.” He then turned around, opened the door. And after he exited the room, into the hallway, he gently closed the door behind him.
After the door completely shut, Lee calmly walked to his bed, and he sat down, at the foot of the bed, with him letting his feet touch the floor.
Lee then let out a deep sigh, as he thought, 'How do I get myself into these situations?'
Lee then spent the next few minutes, in his room, enjoying the silent peace that he had come to enjoy from his room. He then got up from his bed, turned off the lamp light, walked to his door, open it, walked into the hallway, locked the knob, gently shut the door, and he made his way to the elevator bay, to head to the ground floor.
(_)
Meanwhile, Melvin reached the hotel restaurant. As he walked behind the bar counter. And as he saw not one was looking at him, he pulled out his got to the bar counter, he placed his Tokarev, hidden under the back of his sweater, and he placed it in the hostler under the bar counter.
(_)
A few minutes later, after Lee left his hotel room, Lee made it to the ground floor, elevator bay. As he walked into front hotel lobby, he saw Revy approaching him. And she was armed with her semi-automatic pistols in her holsters.
Lee took a quick look around the lobby, as Revy got closer.
Lee thought, 'I don't see any other members of her crew in the lobby. Nor, do I see those three russian woman. Still, I might as well be polite to her.'
When Revy came to a stop, a few feet from Lee, Lee politely greeted her, “Hello Revy. How are you?”
Revy grinned, as she said, “I am fine. Anyway, I enjoyed our conversation this morning. And as a reward, I am going to give you a close up looked at my cutlasses.”
Lee thought, 'Nice.'
Revy pulled out her custom semi-automatic pistols, from her shoulder holsters. She held them, in an open palm manner, before Lee. In a manner in which the barrels were pointed to the sides, away from Lee, Revy, and anyone else that was present.
Lee looked down at the pistols for a few seconds, as he though, 'Now, this is a reward. And it is a rarity for a fan to see such famous weapons personally, in such a direct, yet nonthreatening manner. Also, even thought, I have personally fired her pistols in the time loop, it is always nice to look at such fine, and dangerous works of art.'
Lee then looked back at Revy's face.
Revy continued grinning, as she questioned, “Have you ever seen such nice firearms in you life? Let alone held, and fired something as powerful as these beauties?”
Lee thought about his past, as a child. One of his better childhood memories.
(_)
Decade ago, somewhere in the southeastern United States, it was a sunny day, on an outdoor shooting range, an eight year old Lee was being instructed on firearms, under his father's parental supervision
Lee held in his hands, and fired his father's fully legal, fully automatic, with suppressor attachment, with the collapsible stock extended, forty-five caliber, Mac ten, with a thirty-round ammo clip attached to the weapon.
Lee was aiming at the human paper target, set in front of a large, high, dirt berm, which was thirty feet away.
Lee had his right hand on the weapon's grip, and his left hand on the soft foam suppressor barrel. At the same time, he had the stock placed against the front of his right shoulder, as he used the Mac ten iron sights to fire at the target.
Lee was practicing accurate firing with the Mac ten in single shot mode, full auto, and how to tap the trigger in full auto, to fire a few rounds each time. And in all three ways, he kept hitting the paper target dead center in the chest more often than not.
Even though the weapon had a kick, Lee enjoyed how quiet the weapon was.
Along with this, his father taught him proper firearm safety.
That day Lee learned something, and no one was hurt.
All in all, it was pleasant day for Lee. A rarity in Lee's life. And a day that Lee smiled, when he recalled the memory of that event.
(_)
Back in the present, Lee grinned, as he lied, “No. I have not. And they are very nice pistols. And thank you for showing them to me.”
Revy said, “No problem.” She then holstered her pistols, and walked away.
Meanwhile, Lee headed to the hotel restaurant, in the hopes of helping Melvin out of his own mess.
(_)
A minute later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant. As he walked towards the bar counter, to his usual seat, he looked around the room. He saw a Melvin behind the bar counter, and Melvin was looking back at him, with a smile on his face.
Lee also saw that besides Melvin, there was no one else at the bar counter.
Lee thought, 'I am glad he is happy.' He then look around some more, he saw a few customers, and a waitress. But, considering it was not yet noon, there was not many people yet there for lunch.
But, Lee did see Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, were having an early lunch, at one of the tables, in the back of the room, by the stage. Though, Lee did not see their daughters, nor did he see any of the others among Revy's group.
And Lee did not see any of the russian women, he saw earlier that day, in the hotel lobby.
Lee turned back to the bar counter, as he thought about Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, 'Those three probably are planning to do something later, and they are getting something to eat while they can.'
Lee then made it to the bar, and he sat down on his usual cushioned stool, as he faced the bar counter, and the left wall of the room.
As he did so, Melvin walked up to him.
Lee looked around the bar counter, to the russian, as he inquired, “Have they shown up, yet?”
Melvin said, “No.”
Lee commented, “Well, give Murphy's Law, they will. And likely soon. Just stay calm, act like you usually do, and this will all soon be over, with you not being caught.”
Melvin nodded, as he replied, “Okay. Here. This for you advice.” He pulled out a cold beer, and set it in front of Lee.
Lee said, “Thanks.” He then opened the beer, and sipped it.
Melvin then walked around to exit the bar counter, as he when check on his other customer, whom were located through out the room.
(_)
A minute later, Lee saw from the corner of his left eye, as the three russian women walked into the room.
Lee thought, 'Sometimes, I hate being right.'
Lee then noticed the three women had stopped near the entrance to the restaurant, as they began talking to one another.
Lee thought, 'They are speaking russian, so I cannot read their lips. But, I always wondered, in those bar scenes, in movies, and such, when the main characters walked just inside the bar and talked. I wondered if others noticed their odd behavior? I guess now that the is clearly a, yes, to that question. Others did notice them.'
Lee then saw that Melvin had returned to behind the bar counter, and he was standing near him.
Lee thought, 'I guess, from a few days ago, with Sawyer, I believe Melvin put together that the super-soldier serum gives them enhanced hearing. So, we both know we cannot talk to each other, without them risking overhearing us. We just go to hope we know each other enough, to play off of each other by ear. Fortunately, I think we do know each other about each other to pull it off.'
Melvin and Lee then quietly waited for the three russian women to enviably come to them.
(_)
At that moment, across the room, near the entrance to the room, the three russian women had just walked into the restaurant.
They turned to look at one another, as Desya asked, in russian, “I wonder what was with that music in the hotel lobby?”
Timur stated, in russian, “Lotton stated, from what she learned, by talking to some of the hotel employees, there was something magical about this hotel. And inside the front lobby, of this hotel, the music changes themes based on those whom just entered the hotel for the first time. Or, the person enters with a group for the first time. And the music that starts playing given clues to what one's fate will be while on the island.”
Grisha commended, in russian, “Interesting. Still, it is best not to ask questions towards answers you don't want to know.”
Desya replied, “I agree. Though, I am worried that the lobby music, which was clearly meant for us, may have tipped off Yurick to our presence.”
Grisha stated, “I doubt it. He clearly wasn't in the lobby when it first played. So, that that is a small risk... Now, who should we talk to first?”
Desya looked around the room, and she saw Akira sitting at a table, in the back of the room, by a stage. She was sitting with a redhead and a blue haired women. All three of them were having their lunch.
Desya asked, “Is that Akira?”
The other two women looked in the direction that Desya was looking. And they saw Akira, as well. With Akira being with two other women.
Timur answered, “Likely so. Now, that I think about it, Lotton mentioned that Akira has two lovers, a redheaded woman and a blue haired woman, whom could change their genders, as well. Like Akira can. Those two women are probably them.”
Deysa suggested, “I know you don't want us anywhere near Rock and Revy. And their family. But, Akira was always a straight shooter in a number of ways. Including, her being very sharp about her surroundings. And she won't recognize us. So, why not ask her, and her two friends.”
Grisha asked, “Timur. Before I answer that question. I have to ask. Is there anyone else here that could be with Revy's group?”
Timur looked around. She then answered, “No. I don't see anyone. And it is nice to not have to use glasses anymore, due to us getting older. With us now being younger.”
Grisha stated, “I agree, Timur. And I think it is worth the risk to ask Akira. For us to input from their group, from a source we know, but we are sure won't recognized us.” She mentally added, 'Given Akira's personality, mentioning, Yurick's nickname might help her memory.'
The other two women nodded in agreement.
Then, the three women turned towards the back of the room, as they began walking over to the back of the room, where Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were sitting.
(_)
Meanwhile, about a minute before the russians came into the restaurant, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were sitting in chairs, at their table, as they ate lunch. They faced each other, around their table.
Akira complimented, in japanese, “Thank you, Ranma for suggesting we get lunch early. Considering we might have a busy day today, with our children.”
Ranma replied, in japanese, “No problem. I figured we might want to get something to eat before we met with our kids. With us all going shopping around town.”
Natsuru commented, in japanese, “Yes. And it is good we did so. Still, speaking of our daughters, I am kind of worried about the influence those Lagoon sisters have on our daughters.”
Ranma stated, “You are not the only one.”
Akira said, “We all agree with you, Natsuru. Sadly, those Lagoon sisters are one of the few people they can relate to.”
Natsuru pointed out, “What about the Lowe siblings? They have always been nice enough.”
Akira stated, “Well, all things considered, they are on good terms with each other. But, they different interests are just too great.”
Ranma said, “You got that right. Still, it is not so much influence that worries me, as much as how... Loose the Lagoon sisters are.”
Akira countered, “But, what can we do? If we try to get involved, it will likely backfire. We of all people know how badly relationships can go.”
Akira saw Natsuru nodding, while Ranma shrugged, in agreement.
Natsuru commented, “Well, the important part is we need to make sure they don't get pregnant, nor get someone pregnant, before everyone involved is ready for such responsibilities.”
Akira replied, “Agreed.”
Ranma responded, “Yea. That is something we need to help them avoid, until they are ready.”
Akira mentioned, “I am glad we waited.”
Natsuru agreed, “Yes.”
Ranma said, “Same here.”
There was an awkward silence for a few seconds.
Akira then asked, “So, any leads on the writer?”
Ranma answered, “None.”
Natsuru commented, “I might have one.”
Ranma and Akira turned their attention towards Natsuru.
Natsuru noticed this, as she explained, “I haven't said anything, because I want to first make sure. You know how Revy and the others can be. The slightest hint of something, and they will jump first without looking. And if I am wrong, then an innocent man could get hurt, or killed.”
Akira said, “I understand. So, who do you think the writer is?”
Natsuru answered, “Melvin.”
Ranma responded, “Melvin. I highly doubt that. He is a retired soldier. Also, he was crazy enough to snatch Revy's pistols from her hands. He is not the writer.”
Natsuru explained, “I to thought that, at first. Then, I got to thinking about him, and what we know about him. Something about him rubs me the wrong way. And that story he gave us does not add up. Don't get me wrong. He is a badass. And if I say something to the others, it is likely someone would be killed in the ensuing fight. Including, our friends, and maybe even our children.”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. We need to be careful whom we talk to about him. We don't want anyone hurt, whom does not deserve it.”
Akira pointed out, “I agree. Though, I asked around. The man has been here for years.”
Natsuru stated, “Yes. But, he could have wrote the story while here. Also, this is the perfect cover. Being a bartender gives him an open ear on the situation. And with us here much of the time, he can keep an eye on us. If he suspects we know, he can bolt before we can act.”
Akira conceded, “I have to admit that your logic does have so merit.”
Natsuru smiled, as she said, “That is one of the perks to all that police training I did.”
Ranma pointed out, “True. And to be honest. I am not that upset with the writer. That is one of the things he gave us. And we owe him a lot.”
Akira shrugged, “There are a couple of things I want to have a word with him about. But, all in all, yes. I can agree with you, Ranma.”
Natsuru agreed, “Yes. Because of him, we all met each other. And my life wasn't that pleasant before I met you two. And my life has been great since being with the two you, and the others.”
Ranma responded, “Same here. And he was not the person that made us gender benders, in the first place. He just pointed out that we are not alone.”
Natsuru replied, “Exactly. And I am thankful for him doing so.”
Akira said, “I guess I make three on this matter.”
Natsuru commented, “And I don't mind living as a woman most of the time. Before I even met you, I was already doing that.”
Ranma said, “And I have had points in my life, in my original series, where I lived as a girl for extended amounts of time. And it was not much different than living as a guy, in most respects.”
Akira stated, “I also reached a point a few times in my double-life, as a teenage gender bender, where I was no longer sure if I was still a boy that could change into a girl. Or, a girl that could change into a boy.”
Natsuru said, “We have all been there.”
Ranma stated, “You're right about that.”
Akira commented, “Also, I can overlook the pain of childbirth. To be honest, our three pregnancies, at the same time, was an interesting shared experience for the three of us. And our children turned out great. And we love them. And they love us.”
Natsuru said, “Yes.”
Ranma asked, “Absolutely. And since this is the case, we have no real ill will towards the writer. So, what are we going to do, when we find the writer?”
Natsuru admitted, “Good question. We, and our daughters, just came along for the ride, to make sure Revy and the others do not go on a rampage.”
Akira suggested, “Exactly. I say when we catch the writer, we let the others have their revenge, but we prevent them from going too far. Perhaps, have the writer suffer some. But, with him not being killed, nor severely crippled. And he will just be able to recover from his wounds.”
Ranma replied, “Agreed.”
Natsuru said, “I can live with that.”
Ranma suggested, “Also, we can learn the truth one way, or another, later this evening. After we getting finish with are day trip with our girls, we will come, have a quick dinner. Then, while everyone else is still at supper, we will break into his room, and search it.”
Natsuru said, “Fine. I even know where his room is. It is on the second floor.”
Akira commented, “Good. But, we need to do it subtly. We search it, but we don't tear the place apart. And we then put everything back the way it was when we are finished. So, that he never knows that we were there.”
Natsuru said, “That would be for the best.”
Ranma replied, “Exactly.”
Just then, the three lovers noticed three young, fair skinned women, walking up to their table.
As the three women came to a stop in front of the table with the three lovers, the three women sitting the table, turned to look at the three women standing before them.
The three lovers say that one of the black haired woman was wearing a gray pantsuit. The other black haired woman was wearing a t-shirt and jeans. The third woman had brown hair, and she was wearing a blouse and long skirt.
The two groups of three women looked at each other for a few seconds.
Then, the woman in the pantsuit asked, in english, with a russian accent, “Hello. I was wondering if you might give us a moment of your time?”
Natsuru replied, in english, “Sure.”
The woman in the pantsuit pulled out a small picture from one of her pants pocket and she handed the photo to Natsuru.
After Natsuru took the photo, she looked at it.
Natsuru then passed the picture around to Akira, and Akira to Ranma.
While the three lovers passed the photo around, the woman in the gray pantsuit said, “We are looking for this man. His name is, Yurick. He is nicknamed, The Blade. Have you seen this man?”
Ranma handed Natsuru back the picture. Natsuru then turned to the woman in the gray pantsuit, as she gave the picture back to the black haired woman in question.
Natsuru answered, “Nope. I have never seen him.”
Akira responded, in english, “He looks vaguely familiar. Like I met him once, a long time ago. But, I cannot place him.”
Ranma replied, in english, “Sorry. Never met the dude.”
The woman in the gray pantsuits pocket the picture, as she said, “Thank you for your time.”
The three women then turned to their left side, and left the table where Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, were sitting.
Natsuru asked, in japanese, “I wonder what is up with them?”
Ranma stated, in japapese, “I do not know. Still, it doesn't matter. We have other matters to take care of today.”
Akira agreed, in japanese, “Yes. We do.”
Just then, their waitress came by, to give them the check for their lunch. They then gave the waitress her the money for the bill, and her tip. And they waited for their receipt, so they could leave.
(_)
Meanwhile, as the three russian woman walked away from the three japanese lovers, Desya said, in russian, “I think Akira remembers Yurick, from a long time ago.”
Timur replied, in russian, “Even so, that doesn't help us now. But, it is clear she didn't recognize us. So, no harm, no fowl.”
Desya pointed out, “Still, we are running out of people to ask in this hotel.”
Grisha looked to her right side, and she sat a black haired, fair skin man sitting at the bar counter, with the older, blond, male fair skin bartender standing right beside him, from across the bar.
Grisha suggested, in russian, “True. Now, let us talk to the bartender, and the man beside him, before we leave this room.”
The other two russians just followed their leader, as they turned, and headed for the bar counter.
(_)
As the three russian woman approached the bar counter, Lee turned around in his stool, as he and Melvin watched the three russian women approach them.
Lee continued to look at the women, as he thought, 'I hope Melvin can keep it together.'
Melvin looked at the women, as he thought, while maintaining a mask of calmness, 'Grisha, Timur, and Desya. And they look like their own younger sisters. Balalaika must really want my head to send three of my former friends after me.'
As the women came to a stop in front, three from Lee, and six feet from Melvin, Grisha said, in english, “Hello. I was wondering if you two could help us.”
Grisha pulled out a picture, and she handed it to Lee, as she asked, “We are looking for a man named, Yurick. Have you seen him?”
It took almost all of Melvin's willpower not to respond to his real name, but he was able to will himself not to react.
Lee looked at the picture. It was a picture of a young Melvin, in his mid-thirties, with short brown hair. And he looked nothing like he did presently.
While not showing his reaction on the outside, Lee was impressed, as he thought, 'Damn. This is an old picture. And Melvin really knows how to put on a disguise. I knew he bleached his hair blond. I could take notes from this man. Still, I need to get Melvin out of this mess. And I know just the right words to do so.'
Lee handed the picture to Melvin.
Melvin looked at the photo for a few seconds. He did not show any reaction on the outside, as he thought, 'This is the only picture they could find of me? Somehow, I find that insulting. I know I took my personal collection of pictures with me. But, I would think they one of them would have another picture besides this. Or, I still had some friends in the organization, that still believe I should have a choice. And they did not give Balalaika some of my more recent pictures. Which I know were taken from.'
'I hope I still do have friends there. It will offer me other options, in case I am discovered. But, that is a worst case scenario. I need to focus on the matter at hand, to prevent that from happening. And I hope Lee's plan works. I think I will let him speak first, and follow his lead.'
Melvin then handed the picture back to Lee, whom handed the picture to Grisha.
After Lee watched Grisha pocket the picture, he casually stated, “I think I met this Yurick before. I saw him here a month ago. But, he soon disappeared. I haven't see him since then.” He mentally added, 'Sam did something similar for me. I see no reason why this type of alibi will not work for Melvin.'
Then, Lee saw Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru walked by, and behind the russian women. They saw nothing, as they continued towards the exit. Though, he kept his focus on the three russians.
Lee did not show any reaction on the outside, as he thought, with relief, 'That was close.'
Grisha thought, 'This could be a lead. But, something does not feel right about these two. Something tells me to dig a bit deeper with these two.'
The russians and Lee continued their discussion, as Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru exited the room.
(_)
When the lovers reached the hallway, outside the restaurant, Akira inquired, “Did you two hear what Lee just said?”
Ranma said, “Yea. I don't remember seeing Lee talking to any russians in the hotel. Let alone someone that looks like this Yurick.”
Natsuru asked, “True. We have not seen anyone that looks like that Yurick, in the photo, at the hotel. Let alone someone that Lee has associated with. So, why would Lee lie liked that? ”
Akira stated, “Good question.”
Ranma commented, “Who knows. I am sure Lee has his reasons for doing so.”
Akira said, “Well, either way, we have other things to focus on. Like meeting our daughters, and then later, finding out more about Melvin, this evening.”
The three lovers then heads to their suite, to get ready for the afternoon shopping, with their adult daughters.
(_)
A few seconds ago, back at the bar counter, Grisha thought, 'This could be a lead. But, something does not feel right about these two. Something tells me to dig a bit deeper with these two.'
Grisha asked, “By the way, what are your names?”
Lee thought, 'If we don't answer her question, it will raise their suspicions.' He answered, “Lee.”
Melvin replied, “Melvin.”
Grisha inquired, “So, you are Melvin?”
Melvin thought, 'Where did she learn my alias from?' He calmly said, “Yes. Have you heard of me?”
Grisha commented, “Those women at the table, near the stage, were just talking about you.” She mentally added, 'Though, we only heard your name. Considering, we don't know japanese... Oh well.'
Lee jumped into the conversation, “What customer does not talk about their bartender?”
Grisha looked over at Lee, and grimaced. Lee notice her reaction, they he did not even flinch.
Grisha thought, 'This guy is either a fool, or he is covering for Melvin. I am not sure which. But, frowning will not help matters.' She then relaxed her facial expression.
Lee inquired, “Anyway, is there something else we can do for you ladies?”
Grisha stated, “Not really.”
Melvin thought, 'Now, to put Lee's plan into action.'
Melvin gave the three women a stern look on his face, as he firmly stated, “Then, perhaps it is time for you to leave. I have been talking to the staff. You have been harassing them, and the tenants, of this hotel. If you do not leave the hotel, I will call the police, and I have you escorted off the premise.”
Melvin maintained his stern expression, as he mentally lamented, 'Too bad I cannot tell them that I personally know Pedro. But, I don't want Lee to know that. Given his manipulative nature, I want to have at least one card to play against him, if I need too.'
Grisha looked at the stern look on Melvin's face. She realized, as she thought, 'He is not bluffing. And it not worth getting into a fight over this. It is clear we are not going to fight with them. Especially, with Revy's group being here. We do not need their attention directed towards us.'
Grisha calmly stated, “You are correct. We have overstayed our welcome. We will leave. Good day.”
The three russians then turned to their left, and walked out of the restaurant for the hallway.
Melvin, nor Lee, took their eyes off the women, until they had left the room, and were in the hallway.
(_)
In the hallway, outside the restaurant, as the three russian women walked towards the front doors to the lobby, so they could leave.
While they walked, Timur said, in russian, “I guess this is a bust.”
Desya agreed, in russian, “Yes. Talk about a waste time.”
Grisha stated, in russian, “Not really. We can confirm that Yurick was here. But, he is gone.”
Timur suggested, “Do you want go to back in time and get him, then?”
Grisha firmly answered, “No. I don't want to play time games. That can lead to paradoxes. Which none of us want. We need to continue moving forward. I am sure we will eventually catch up with Yurick. And at least we have good news to report to the captain, and the sergeant.”
The women the soon made it out of the lobby, and to the outside. They then found a small corner of the building, where Grisha used her reality device to return to the proper reality, place, and time, that the current headquarters of Hotel Moscow were located, in the multiverse. Where they soon reported back to Balalaika, and B, on what they had found out.
(_)
Meanwhile, back in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Melvin and Lee looked at each, in silence.
They had remain silent for a full minute, before Melvin was finally sure his former comrades were gone.
Still, so as to not take any chance, Melvin leaned over the counter, and whispered into Lee's ear, “Thank you, Lee. I think we pulled it off, with your help.”
As Melvin leaned back up straight, Lee replied, “You're welcome. I am glad to be of help.”
Melvin stated, “You got that right. And to show my appreciation, lunch is on me.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “Thank you, Melvin. And I accept your offer. Though, I promise not to order anything expensive.”
Melvin returned the smile, as he replied, “I know you won't, Lee. You clearly know better than to abuse such privileges.”
Lee commented, “And I already know what I want for lunch.”
Melvin replied, “Good.”
Melvin then took Lee's lunch order. And it was not an expensive order.
A few minutes later, Lee had lunch, and drink, on the house.
(_)
Later that afternoon, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, joined their daughters, Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika. Where they took two cars, to do for some window shopping, in the various shopping outlets in the city.
The six women had a great time together. They returned to the hotel later that evening, to have some dinner.
The three lovers finished their meals early, and level the hotel restaurant, while everyone else was at dinner. They then headed the second floor of the Devil's Hotel, where they learned Melvin's suite was.
Akira and Natsuru stood behind Ranma, as Ranma used her lock picking tools to break into Melvin's suite. With Akira and Natsuru also providing look out for their redheaded lover.
Fortunately, given it was dinner time, no one had come back, to catch them at what they were doing.
Presently, Ranma had already picked the knob, only to find the deadbolt, above the knob was locked. So, she had to unlock the deadbolt, as well.
The three lovers guess that given Melvin was a member of the staff, that lived in the hotel, the hotel staff provided him with keys to both his knob lock and his deadlock.
Ranma was standing, as she worked on the deadbolt lock.
Suddenly, Ranma felt the release of the deadbolt lock. She then turned the knob, and gently pushed open the door.
Ranma then pocketed her lock pick tools, and walked into the suite, with Natsuru, and then Akira following behind.
As soon as all three of them were in side, Ranma, locked and shut the door. She then turned on the ceiling light, from the switch, on the wall, by the door.
After the ceiling light came on, the three women saw that the bedroom was very neatly kept. There was no dust on anything. And the bed sheets even made, military style.
Natsuru commented, in japanese, “For a bachelor, Melvin sure like to keep things clean.”
Akira admitted, in japanese, “Honestly. I am envious of his tidiness.”
Ranma walked further into the suite, as she said, in japanese, “So do I. Now, come on ladies. Let's find what we are looking for.”
As the three lovers walked further into the room, Akira used her right hand to point at the table, on the other side of the room, by the closed sliding glass door, that lead to the balcony. With the curtains on the sliding glass door being closed.
Akira stated, “At least he has access to the internet, and word processor programs.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Ranma and Natsuru looked at the table and they saw a close laptop computer, with a computer mouse attached to the computer.
Natsuru commented, “That means nothing. Many people have computers in this technological era. Though, let us see what else we can find about, Melvin.”
At they looked around, Ranma turned to her left side, and she noticed that Melvin's room had a armoire set against the wall, on the bedroom side, beside the bed, of the wall bordering the bedroom with the bathroom.
Ranma looked into it, as Natsuru searched the chest of drawers. Meanwhile, Akira just looked around the room, for anything that was in plain sight.
As Ranma searched the armoire, he found a hung up pair of combat fatigues, some nice suits, and then, in a back corner, she found something that surprised her.
Ranma quietly said, “What the hell?”
Ranma carefully pulled out the item, by the middle of its barrel, with her right hand.
Ranma held the firearm, with the end of the barrel pointed upwards, as she stated, “Hey, guys. Take a look at this.”
Natsuru turned, around, while having a piece of paper in her right hand, that she found in the chest of drawers.
As Akira turned around, she immediately recognized firearm. She stated, “That is an AK seventy-four. It is soviet military rifle.”
Ranma continued to hold the weapon in place, as she stated, “I think it is safe to say that Melvin is not just a bartender. And how the hell did he get this weapon?”
Meanwhile, Natsuru was taking a clear look at the picture had found, which was currently in her right hand. She said, “You two think that is something, you need to check this out.”
Akira walked over to Natsuru.
Ranma set the automatic rifle back into armoire, where she had found. And in the way she had found it. Next, she gently shut the doors to the armoire. After which, she walked over to join her two lovers.
The three women stood side by side, with Ranma to Natsuru's right side, and Akira to Natsuru's left side.
The three women look at the picture in Natsuru's right hand. The photo was old, faded, and it had crease lines from being folded, but they still could see what was on the photo.
It was a picture of a large group of soldiers, in their combat uniforms, grouped together for the picture. Some where standing, some were kneeling in front of those whom were standing.
But, in the center of the picture, standing, with no one in front of the person, was a very familiar, female face, surrounded by men. A face that was very heard to forget. Though, she lacked any scars, and her blond hair was cut short.
Akira stated, “That is Balalaika, when she was younger. Before she left her hair grow out. And from the lack of scars, this photograph was probably taken either before, or during the Soviet-Afghanistan war.”
Ranma asked, “What is Melvin doing with a picture of Balalaika, and members of Hotel Moscow?”
Natsuru thought, 'Oh crap.' She stated, “Guys. We got it all wrong. Melvin isn't the writer. He is a member of Hotel Moscow.”
The three women kept looking at the picture, as Ranma inquired, “If so, then how did he end up here. And years before we came here? He might have come here years before the stories were even created here.”
Natsuru agreed, “That is a good point, Ranma. Still, I do not recognize Melvin from any of the faces here.”
Akira noticed to other people in the picture, standing near each other. She stated, “Melvin is Yurick, the Blade. See the man that is by Boris, on the left side of the picture. That looks like Yurick.”
“So, those women were working for Hotel Moscow, to find Yurick. Whom they tracked to this hotel. And since I do not see anyone that looks like Melvin. And with this equipment here, Melvin is clearly a member, or former member of Hotel Moscow. It makes since that Melvin is Yurick.”
Natsuru said, “Akira, you may have a point there. Also, looking at this picture, I sometimes forget how much of a hunk Boris is as a guy.”
Ranma commented, “Natsuru, try to keep you head in the game. Still, Melvin's story now makes sense. He is an Afghanistan veteran. Just a Russian one, instead of an American one. He hid the lie within the truth. And we all saw a taste of why he is called, the Blade, when he confronted Revy, during the first night we came here. Damn. This city is just full of secrets.”
Natsuru questioned, “Yes. But, who were those women after them? As Akira here pointed out. If they were after him, they must be connected to Hotel Moscow in some way. And they working for Hotel Moscow.”
Ranma realized something else, as she stated, “Also, Lee lied to those women for Melvin. How is he connected to this mystery?”
Akira said, “Well, we know someone who has many of the answers we are looking for. Let us go talk to Melvin.”
Ranma stated, “Good idea. But, let's do it at closing. When we can confront him alone. That way, if things go bad, we will not have to worry about others getting hurt.”
Natsuru agreed, “I agree.”
Akira stated, “So do I. We will have a word with Melvin, later tonight. Now, let's put everything back the way we found it, and leave. We should go downstairs to rejoin our daughters, and the rest of the gang.”
Ranma replied, “That sounds like a great idea.”
Natsuru said, “I agree. Also, karaoke is always fun both to perform and to watch.”
Ranma commented, “Also, since we are confronting Melvin, there is no point in locking the top lock.”
Ranma thought, 'I would either have to pick it from the outside. If, I locked it on the inside, and jumped from the balcony. Given the way the lock on the sliding glass door is made, I cannot close the lock to sliding glass door from the outside. And someone outside my see me jump down to the ground. And they would raise to many questions for all of us.'
Akira said, “Okay”
Natsuru commented, “That will be fine.”
Natsuru then put the picture back where she had found it in the chest of drawers, before closing the drawers.
Meanwhile, Ranma went back to the armoire, and she made sure that the AK-74 was back the way she had found it, with the hung suits were also back the way they originally were.
At the same time, Akira took a look around, to make sure nothing was amiss.
A few minutes later, all three women each confirmed that the room was back to the way they had found it.
As they walked out into the hallways, Akira was the last one out. She turned off the ceiling light, and she gently shut the door, to the hallway, behind her. The knob automatically locked behind her.
Then, the three lovers headed down stairs to spend some time with their family, and friends. As they patiently waited for the proper time to confront Melvin about the questions they had for him.
(_)
Later that night, at midnight, from behind the bar counter, Melvin watched as one of his customers left for the night.
As he looked around, all he saw was Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, sitting at their usual table by the stage.
A few seconds later, Melvin noticed the three women get up, and walked towards him.
Melvin mentally wondered, with concern, 'Why do I have a bad feeling about this?'
When the three women stopped in front of the bar counter, across from Melvin, he asked, “Is there something I can do for you ladies? I hope the drinks, food, and service, has been good for you, tonight.”
Akira stated, “It has all been fine. Actually, we wanted to talk to you, personally, Melvin. And we waited until the room cleared, before we had this private conversation.”
Melvin thought, 'Like Lee told me. I just have to play it cool, and I should be fine. Just like this morning.'
Melvin casually responded, “Okay. I appreciate that. So, what do you want to talk to me about?”
Ranma stated, “It is about your past, Melvin. Or, should we say, Yurick, the Blade?”
The trio then watch as Melvin did the last thing they expected. He sighed.
Melvin look at the three women, as he asked, “So, how did you find out? I have gone to a lot of trouble in hiding out here.” He mentally added, 'The only good news is that Akira and Balalaika were never on social terms. So, I might be able to salvage this situation.'
Ranma casually admitted, “We searched your room. And we found that picture of your group, with Balalaika. That, the fact we saw, from that picture those women had, of Yurick, was in the picture. But, you were not the photo. Along with the AK seventy-four rifle in your closet. It was not hard to piece together that you are Yurick.”
Melvin responded, with slight hardness his tone of voice, “I see you have no respect for privacy.”
Melvin thought, 'I underestimated these women, and it cost me. I am starting to understand why Lee is so secretly manipulative towards these women. He clearly understands what these women are capable of. I heard about the Rats Nest massacre. With him and Sam being present for that bloodbath. Because of this, Lee wisely plays it close to his chest with these women.'
Natsuru commented, “It depends on the situation. We thought you were someone else we are after. We were wrong. Though, we left you room the way we found it. And I wish our room was that neat.”
Melvin accepted Natsuru's compliment. He calmed down, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Akira requested, “Still, we would like an explanation of why a member of Hotel Moscow is hiding out in another reality, as a bartender, for an island resort hotel.”
Melvin said, “Where to begin? Well Akira. And yes. I remember seeing you around town, back then, in Roanapur. Though, at the time, we of Hotel Moscow just thought the gender bending abilities you had were rumors. We don't realize the truth until a few days before the Tower fell. When we found out what Chang was doing.”
Akira thought, 'So, just like in book two, they really didn't know what Chang was doing. And when they did, they turned on Chang.'
Akira asked, “That answers a few questions, for us. So, what are you doing here?”
Melvin smiled, as he casually replied, “Enjoying life.”
Natsuru inquired, “What she means is, why are you not still with Hotel Moscow?”
Melvin said, “I got old. And let us just say the captain's personal tastes finally got the better of her.”
Melvin saw confused looked on the three women's faces.
Melvin rolled his eyes, as he sighed, for a few seconds. He then looked back at the women. He said, “For people with your abilities, you can be slow on the uptake. Do you remember the three women that came in this morning, and talked to you three?”
The three replied, in unison, “Uh huh.”
Natsuru was the first to understand, as she stated, “Oh my. They were russian...”
Akira picked up on where Natsuru was going with her logic, as she began to inquire, “Are you saying?...”
Melvin dropped his smile, as he stated, “Yes. Balalaika turned them all into women. Except for me. And I owe Lee big for helping me today.”
Ranma asked, “Does he know who you are?”
Melvin answered, “No. He is just a great guy who clearly saw I was in trouble, and he helped me out, due the kindness of his heart.” He thought, 'That is close enough to the truth, for these women. Lee covered for me. So, I am going to cover for him.'
Ranma asked, “So, why did the men of Hotel Moscow decide to become women? That is not exactly a choice most men would make.”
Melvin responded, “The answer is simple. We got older. The rest of my comrades wanted more life, and Balalaika made us all an offer. An offer that I soon realized was more like an order. So, I escaped, because I preferred to age gracefully, and remain a man. I was more than willing to give my life as a soldier. But, my manhood is a completely other matter.”
In response to Melvin's comment, Ranma remembered something in her distant past. Soon after she was first cursed to turn into female version of herself. She then started laughing, for a few seconds.
The others adults around Ranma remained silent, as she laughed.
As Ranma calmed down, she said, “I completely understand.”
Melvin smiled, as he said, “I am glad to hear you say that.” He thought, 'It looks like I might be able to salvage this situation.'
Akira thought, 'As crazy as it sounds, I am not surprised that Balalaika pulled that stunt. But, I need to know what we are facing.' She asked, “What exactly was the offer?”
Melvin answered, “It was for that vat process, complete with the gender change, youth restoration, and the super-soldier serum. So, Balalaika now, not only has a badass army. She as a super-soldier badass army.”
Melvin watched as the trio's eyes go wide.
Melvin thought, 'At least they understand the seriousness of the situation.'
While the women forced themselves to calm down, Ranma thought, 'So, Hotel Moscow is now full of super-soldiers. With their skills, equipment, experience, and enhanced physical abilities, they would be a handful for even us.'
'I should know. I sparred with Balalaika a few times, during those bikini parties at Lagoon island. She can hold her own against me, due to her training and the super-soldier serum. Which, is honestly, scary, given the kind of woman she is, and how dangerous she is, before she got the super-soldier serum.'
Ranma said, “So, you have been in hiding from them since you escaped, because you do not want to be killed? Nor, captured, and turned into a woman?”
Melvin answered, “Yes. And I know that all three of you have gender changing abilities. We learned some things about you three, soon after the fall of the Tower. And given the fact that you three can change genders, I still hope you can understand why I wish to remain a man.”
Natsuru stated, “We respect your choice. We do not believe that someone should be forced to live as one gender, nor the other.”
Melvin thought, 'I have a feeling that they are not so much against me being changed into a woman, as they are against someone being forced to be one gender, or the other. But, I will take what I can get. Now, to ask them for this silence.'
Melvin calmly requested, “If you do not mind, I would prefer you to keep these secret from your, friends. Especially Balalaika and Hotel Moscow. I am sure that two-hands and Balalaika still talk with each.”
Akira confirmed, as she stated, “Oh they do regularly talk to each other. So, your concerns are warranted.”
Melvin stated, “As I thought. So, please keep in mind that if word got out among to the rest of your friends of who really am, word will get back to Balalaika, and my former military company members. They will come back for me. And as you already guessed, this will either end with me dead, or captured, brainwashed, to make sure I stay with them. Along with them turning me into a woman.”
Melvin could see that the three women had a sympathetic look towards him.
Akira thought, 'While he likely doesn't know that Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto are our daughters. I will speak to Ranma and Natsuru, in our suite, in a little while. And ask them to keep this from our daughters, as well. I believe that will not be an unreasonable request. And they should go for it.'
'Still, we need to smooth things over with Melvin, before we leave here, tonight.'
Akira said, “It would be tempting to give the excuse that being a woman is not that bad. Which it isn't. But, relax Melvin, we will keep your secret.”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. We will.”
Natsuru stated, “You're secret is safe with us.”
The could see Melvin's body language relax a little, as Akira complimented, “Besides, you are a good bartender. And I admire you, in that you don't take crap from anyone. Not even from Revy. Much like Bao use to be.”
Melvin smiled, as he said, “Thank you.” He raised an eyebrow, as he asked, “By the way, whatever happened to Bao?”
Akira answered, “None of us have a clue.”
Melvin stated, “Well, I am starting to understand why Bao was the way he was. How he stayed sane with Revy as a regular customer, I do not know.”
The women giggled, for a few seconds, in response to Melvin's comment.
As the women stopped giggling, Ranma asked, “Anyway, how did you get the nickname, the Blade? I mean you did show some skill against Revy, on our first night here. But, I was wondering about the back story of your abilities.”
Melvin answered, “When I was much younger, and more idiotic, I was with with the Captain... I mean Balalaika, during the Russian-Afghanistan war. And I had to kill sixteen rebels on my own. I killed eight of them with my pistol and combat knife.”
Ranma commented, “Not bad.”
Akira inquired, “As Ranma pointed out. We already saw a sample of why are you called, the Blade. When you dealt with Revy. But, how good are you with a knife? Are we talking Shenhua level good?”
Melvin stated, “Yes. In my prime, which left me long ago. Have you ever seen the Vin Diesal, Riddick movies?”
The three women said, in unison, “Yes.”
Melvin smile turned into a smirk, as he stated, “I was that good in my prime. Now, about you women. I got to ask. Why did you bring this smile army here with you? This clearly isn't a vacation for any of you. Though, this island is a nice place for a vacation. But, you are definitely after someone. Someone you mistook me for. And whomever it is must have done something really bad to tick you women off.”
Akira though, 'We might as well tell him the truth.' She said, “We are after the writer. Someone whom literally wrote some stories about us. We plan to catch him, and have our revenge on him.”
Melvin was confused, as he questioned, “So, he wrote some stories about you. What of it?”
Natsuru explained, “When we said he wrote some stories. We mean that literally. In the sense that the stories he wrote really happened to us. Including you. And a lot of it was not pleasant. Though, us three are not that really that angry. He was nice towards us. But, he did pulled some serious stuff with those from Black Lagoon reality. Do you know what the Black Lagoon series?”
Melvin commented, “Yes. I have seen my home reality's series.”
Melvin thought, 'I will leave out that it was my friend, the police chief of this island, Pedro Del Soto, whom showed me that series. Also, by now, I am sure he knows these women are here at the hotel. And I am sure he has a plan, in case he needs to handle them. Though, I am also sure he does not want these women to know that he knows he they are.'
Natsuru responded, “Okay. That makes our explanation much simpler. Anyway those effected by the writer, from the Black Lagoon reality, are furious with him.”
“Still, it would be easier, if tonight, after you get off, for you to go to your room, and log onto the internet with the laptop we saw in your room. Look up the stories titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse, and start reading. You will soon understand why we are after him.”
Natsuru's voice gained a more serious tone, as she continued, “Be warned. It is a long read. So, it will likely take you a few days to read it. But afterward, I highly suggest that you keep what you learned to yourself. Though, I am sure you are going to chuckle and smile when you see the girls, after reading those stories. But, if you value your life, you will not let them catch you doing so.”
Melvin thought, 'Now, that is a wild concept. I will have to check out that story in a little while. Still, their discretion needs to be rewarded.' He replied, “I will keep that mind. And here.”
Melvin pulled out three bottles of decent, cold beer, and set them on the bar counter, in front of the women.
Each woman took a cold bottle of a good tasting brand of beer.
After all three women had a beer in one of their hands, Ranma looked at Melvin, as she happily stated, “Thanks.”
Melvin turned to Ranma, as he said, “No problem. Now, I am going to close up. So, take the bottles with you. And have good night.”
Natsuru said, “Good night to you to, Melvin.”
Ranma commented, “See you tomorrow.”
Akira said, “Have a pleasant night.”
Melvin then watched the three women turned, and leave the restaurant.
As soon as they were gone from his sight, Melvin then let out a deep breath.
Melvin thought, in relief, 'Now, that is how to dodge a bullet. They know, but they will keep it quiet about my secret. So, I am fine for right now. As Lee stated, I need to play it cool. Though, now I am starting to wonder what is cooking under that mask of coolness that Lee puts on. Also, I need to check out those stories, as soon as possible.'
Melvin then began closing up the restaurant.
(_)
A few minutes later, after Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, made it to their suites. Akira closed the hallway door, and turned on the lights.
The three women had the bottles of beers in their hands, as Akira looked at Ranma and Natsuru.
Akira said, in japapnese, “Guys. I have a request for you.”
Natsuru and Ranma turned to face Akira.
Natsuru inquired, “Sure. What is it?
Akira stated, “I don't like asking this. But, given how close our daughters our with the Lagoon sisters. We need to keep Melvin's identity a secret from our daughters.”
Natsuru said, in japanese, “I agree. I don't like it. But, experience has taught me that teenage girls are gossips. And while I am sure that our children would not intentionally tell the Lagoon sisters. But, they might. Then, Melvin will be had.”
Ranma commented, in japanese, “I don't like it as well. But, we made a promise. And I see the logic in what you are saying. So, I will keep quiet, as well.”
Akira smiled at her two lovers, as she responded, “Thank you. Now, since it is to late to have some fun tonight. Let's get ready for bed, and get some sleep.” Her smile turned mischievous, as she continued, “Though, we can have fun tomorrow morning.”
Ranma stated, “That sounds like a good idea.”
Natsuru replied, “I like it. We will do something tomorrow morning.”
Akira said, “Good. We then have much to look forward too, when we wake up.”
The three lovers then put there unopened bottles of beer in the fridge, in their suite. They then got ready for bed. After which, they went to sleep on the large bed the three of them shared.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, in the hotel restaurant, Melvin had finished closing up for the night. He then pulled out his pistol from under the bar counter, and tucked it in the back of his pants, under his sweater, by his sheathed combat knife.
He then turned off the lights to the restaurant.
After Melvin walked into the hallway, he turned and used his keys to lock the main hallway doors to the restaurant, behind him. Next, he head to the elevator bay across the lobby.
While Melvin made his way to the elevator bay, he thought, 'Now, to find out what this story is about. With a title of, Badasses Of the Multiverse, this better be interesting.'
(_)
A few minutes later, Melvin made it to his hotel suite.
After entered his bedroom, he turned on a lamp light. He then did a quick check to find that nothing in his room was missing. And that the three women had left his room the way they had found it.
Melvin then sat down in a chair by the table, near the closed curtains, as he opened up his laptop computer, and booted it up.
After Melvin had logged onto his computer account, and typed in his password, he then quickly accessed the hotel wireless internet system.
Next, Melvin used his computer mouse to select his internet browser of choice, to access a search engine. Next, he did search for the story, with him using the laptop's keyboard to type in the phrased, “badasses of the multiverse”.
Melvin soon found the stories. And he began reading the first chapter of book one.
As Melvin did so, he thought, 'So, this story is about Akira. And Akira was inspired to learn to dual wield pistols from watching Revy in the Black Lagoon anime. That makes so much since that is it funny.'
'Also, from what Natsuru said, this actually happened to them. Honestly, this is just one more level of strangeness, to an already crazy life. It is like that old Ricky Martin song, Livin the Crazy Life. Still, this story is kind of funny. Actually, it seems to be very funny.'
Melvin began chuckling, that soon became full laughter, as he nearly laughed his ass off, as he continued reading the stories for the next few hours. Any questions for series that he did not know about, were quickly answered by quick internet searches, and reading the fan sites for those series.
Though, Melvin soon had to go to bed, so he could get up, and resume his daily schedule, and bartending job.
Because of Melvin’s job, it took him five day to finish reading the stories. Off an on, when he was not at work. During his breaks, and when he closed up at night. Though, given those nights were not busy. So, he closed up early those nights. Giving him a few extra hours to read the stories.
But, Melvin only read the stories in the privacy of his own suite. And he logged out of those stories, and shut down his computer, when he left his suite. In case one of the other women of Revy's crew broken in. He did not want them to find out that he knew about the stories.
And while Melvin was still about to make himself keep calm, as Melvin read more and more of the stories, he found it more difficult keeping a straight face in the presence of Revy's crew. Until finally, when he had finished reading all four books, he had to force himself not to laugh out loud, nor smile like a madman, when he saw one, or more of the members of Revy's crew.
But, the stories put Melvin in a good mood. Especially, when he found out that B was Boris.
Presently, it was during the second morning, after Melvin finished reading the Badasses Of the Multiverse stories, it was a sunny morning, as Melvin got finished with his exercises, and he left the roof, to head to his suite.
While Melvin walked down the stairs, in the stairwell, to the top interior floor entrance, he thought, 'After reading those book. I guess it is true. Nobody truly leaves. It is like the song Hotel California. You can check out any time you like. But, you cannot never leave. Though, I guess you can run, like I did. Bwahahahaha!...'
'Still, Boris really does make a hot chick. I never put two and two together, with the Black Lagoon omakes that Pedro showed me. And damn they were all funny. But, it makes so much sense that B and Boris are the same personal. Also, that other omakes, The Melancholy, and Ghost Story, really had me laughing whenever I see them. Watching Balalaika like that is just so funny.'
'No wonder Balalaika ordered us not to watch the Black Lagoon series and omakes. Or, anything related to Black Lagoon. We would have found out that she dating our former sergeant. I may have not put two and two together, but one of us would have.'
'It would have embarrassed her. But, I guess, with the rest of them now women, Balalaika and B already told them who B was. They had probably even seen the series now. Though, I doubt they had seen the omakes.'
'Still, there were other things from the Black Lagoon series that I did not know when they actually happened to us.'
Melvin then made his way out of the stairwell, and through an entrance to hallway of the top floor. He had to use a key to enter the hallway. But, he had one.
As Melvin headed for nearest the elevator bay, he continued his thoughts, 'And at the time, we all thought Balalaika got a temp to do the editing for the porn Hotel Moscow produced. Not that we would have really cared one way, or the other, on the matter. Balalaika is a badass, and a good leader to us. As such, we all respected her. Even if she is a lesbian.'
'Still, it would have been nice to know that B was Boris at the time, so we could have talked to her about past missions and adventures. And about what the hell she was up to while she was gone. Even these stories gloss over a lot of her life, while she was gone.'
'Also, except for Boris, the writer made no indication of taking the manhoods of Hotel Moscow. That is clearly Balalaika's responsibility.'
'And the most important part that everyone seems to be missing is the path we were all on before the stories of these four books started.'
'I will admit, the path we were on in Roanapur would have likely ended badly for most, if not all of us. No matter what. At least this way, my friends and I are still alive.'
'And I have to thank the writer for that.'
'Though, the women, and men to turned women, really don't get it. Sure, the writer put them through hell, but he also gave them a lot back in return for their troubles.'
'And because of all this, I wonder who the writer is? I wonder if I know him? Maybe someday I will find out.'
Melvin then made it to the elevators bay on the top floor, and he hit the down arrow, to take an elevator to the second floor, and his suite, so he could get cleaned up, and dressed, to face the day.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 11: “The Sharp, The Deadly, And The Beautiful.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was a late, sunny, cool morning, three days after Melvin has finished reading the stories, three nights ago. As Melvin finally made it to work in the hotel restaurant, outside, a large passenger bus drove up to the far right side of the Devil's hotel building, with the passenger side by the sidewalk. Though, the bus parked away from the lobby windows, so they were not seen.
Inside the bus were twelve heavily armed, mexican men, including the driver. Their ages ranged from eighteen to thirty-five. They were all dressed in casual clothing for their gender and culture.
One of the men walked up to the driver, as he asked, in spanish, “Is everything set?”
The driver put the vehicle into park, as he let it idle, with the keys in the ignition. He go up from his seat, and turned to man standing by him. He answered, in spanish, “Yes. We have covers all our bases.”
The other man inquired, “Are you sure? Do we have enough plastic handcuffs?”
The driver replied, “Plenty.”
The man questioned, “What about the local cartel?”
The driver said, “No problem there. Weeks ago, they left the island one night, with no reason given. Best I can guess, someone, or something spooked them.”
The man asked, “What about about the police?”
The driver responded, “We are fine there, as well. We cased this place for the last week. For some reason, the police do not come around here.”
The man inquired, “And how many women are we taking? And for how much for each one?”
The driver answered, “Twenty-one women in all. And if they are as hot, young, and exotic, as what has been reported, we could get as much as twenty-five grand apiece, U.S. cash. After expenses, that is over forty-three thousand apiece.”
The man agreed, “I know. Not bad for four hours of work, at most. An hour and a half to get here. Twenty minutes to get them into the buses. And then two hours to get them to buyers. After which, we are paid, and we celebrate.”
The driver said, “You got that right.”
The man commented, “Though, I wonder if any of these women will give us trouble.”
The driver stated, “Well then, these bitches should be made to know their place.”
The man joked, “Which is the missionary position?”
The driver agreed, “Exactly.”
Both men then laughed for a few seconds.
After they finished laughing, the driver picked up his assault rifle. He turned to his men, as he ordered, “Okay, guys. We are heading in there, in two minutes.”
(_)
Two minutes later, Rock, Revy, and the rest of their twenty-one women group, were sitting around the front lobby couches and chairs.
The other tenants seem to avoid the lobby when the women groups together like that. Though, the clerks knew better than to say anything on the matter, towards the women in question.
Shenhua, Revy, Lotton, Aeryn, Violin, and a few others, had their weapons on them. Though, they were hidden in their clothing, except for Revy, whom did not feel the need to high her cutlasses from the work.
Revy turned to Rock, as she asked, “So, what do you want to do today?”
Rock answered, “Not a clue. We could search for the writer, but all we can be sure of is that he is here, and he is nearby.”
Revy stated, with annoyance in her voice, “All this cloak and dagger bullshit is boring the hell out of me. I would literally kill for some action.”
Suddenly, twenty armed mexican gang members stormed into the lobby, from the outside.
As they pointed their weapons in all directions, the two clerks at the check in desk, ducked down under their desks.
A second later, one of the men barked, in english, in a heavy spanish accent, “Alright bitches! Hands up! You are coming with us! And into the back of our bus! Anyone who does not comply, is going to die!”
The women just looked at each other for a seconds, they then looked back at the mexican gang with feral grins that set the all twelve armed men on edge.
Through her feral grin, Revy stated, in an excited tone of voice, “Ask, and ye shall receive!”
The women pounced on the men before they knew what happened.
(_)
A minute beforehand, in the hotel bar restaurant, Lee and Sam decided to stay at the hotel, for the morning, and get an early lunch, as they had a heart to heart conversation about their friendship.
The reason they had not yet gone to the Rats Nest bar, was that Lee felt that even with Revy and her crew in the hotel, that hotel offered a better atmosphere, than going to the Rats Nest.
This was the first day, in the last few days that Sam had finally showed up with Lee. And Lee was making the most of his time with Sam.
Though, Lee was also working up the nerve to ask the most important question towards Sam. What was going on with Sam?
At the moment, Lee and Sam were having an earlier lunch, while sitting at their usual places at the bar counter.
Meanwhile, Melvin was nearby, standing behind the bar counter, while taking care of a few things.
Lunch rush had yet to happen for the day, with only Melvin, Lee, and Sam, being the only ones presently in the room.
As they waited for their meal, Lee finally worked up the nerve to ask the important question, that had been on his mind. He turned to Sam, as he stated, “Sam, what is with you lately? You have gone for the last few days, without tell me what is going on.”
Sam turned to Lee, while he stated, in a sad tone of voice, “I am sorry, Lee, for not telling you my plans up front. It is my girlfriend. She is taking all my time...”
Lee spoke up, with a hint of sarcasm in his voice, “I hope your next words are not, with sex.”
Sam flatly answered, “No... Well, most of the time, no... As I told you, around a week ago. I am helping her move into town. She just seems to like it here. And since I could not talk her out of moving, I am helping her. As a way to direct her how she is moving here. So as to mitigate the situation. She is even on working on getting a place for herself.”
Lee conceded, “That is understandable. Just please, let me know ahead of time, if you are going to be busy for the next few days. I don't want to have to drive, or worse, walk to the Rats Nest, only to find you are not there.” He mentally added, 'Though, I did get to meet V.T. out of that incident. So, I am not to upset about it.'
Sam responded. “Don't worry. I will try to let you know ahead of time. But right now, everything is up in the air for me. Also, if you don't meet me in the hotel in the morning, always drive to the Rats Nest. So, you don't have to walk back to the hotel, if I am not that.”
Lee said, “I will admit that walking, without you present, was an oversight on my part.”
Sam mentioned, “Good. Anyway, I am free today.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, “I am glad to hear that.”
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he offered, “Let's go to the Rats Nest like we usually do.”
Lee responded, “As soon as we have lunch, we will do that. But, we will take my car. I will just order soda, instead of beer, when we go to the Rats Nest.”
Sam replied, “That is fine.”
Suddenly, the three men heard popping noises coming from outside the room.
All three men looked at each other.
Lee asked, in a serious tone of voice, “Are those gunshots?”
Sam and Melvin stated, in unison, “Yes.”
Melvin walked up to the bar counter, right across from them. He looked at Sam and Lee, as he calming stated, “Boys, if things go to hell. Just stay where you are, and stay calm. I will handle the problem.”
Lee replied, “I trust you, Melvin.”
Sam said, “Same here.”
Melvin responded, “Thank you.”
The three men turned to looked at the entrance to the restaurant, as they heard footsteps, coming closer, from outside.
A few seconds later, the four surviving members of mexican gang rushed into the restaurant, from the hallway entrance.
Each man was carrying automatic rifles, and their clothing was covered in the blood of their fallen comrades.
The men rushed into the middle of the room, in a single file line, with them facing Sam, Melvin and Lee.
The three men by the bar counter could see that the four other men had expressions of fear on their faces from what they had just seen.
All three men at the bar counter remained calm, as Lee thought, 'I could probably guess what just happened to those men. It is as I said to Pedro. The second you lose respect for these women, you die.'
Melvin moved to where he stood between Sam and Lee, while all three were looking at the four men.
Melvin calmly whispered, in english, so only his two friends could hear him, “Lee, Sam, don't move.” He then swiftly used his right hand to reach under the bar counter, right by them, and he pulled out his, Tokarev semi-automatic pistol, from the holster under the bar.
Melvin already had one of the rounds, from the eight round clip in the pistol, in the chamber.
While Melvin quickly pulled out his pistol, with his right hand, he used his left hand to pulled the hammer of the weapon back to full, before moving his left hand completely out of the way, as he took aim, before he pulled the trigger. A second later, with his left hand out of the way, Melvin fired shot all four gang members between the eyes, in a matter of three seconds.
The four men were dead before they even hit the ground.
As Melvin slid the pistol back into its holster, that was under the counter, as he said, “Gentlemen. As you can see, pressing matters have to come up. Though, I will check on your orders, in a minute.”
Lee and Sam turned to face Melvin, as Sam said, “No. We are fine. First, do what you need to do.”
Lee stated, “Take your time. And that was good shooing. Though, my ears are going to ring for a little while. But, I can live with that.”
Sam complimented, “Yes. That was good job.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Very quick and smooth.” He mentally added, 'Everything I would expect from former member of Hotel Moscow.”
Melvin smiled at Sam and Lee, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Just then, several of the women in Rock and Revy's crew, including Rock and Revy as well, rushed into the room. The women had their weapons in their hands, but their weapons were not pointed at anyone.
Melvin noticed that he did not see Ranma, Akira, nor Natsuru. He thought, 'I hope they are alright.'
The women then looked over and then saw the dead gang members on the floor.
Meanwhile, Lee and Sam turned around to face the women, just as Revy asked, “What happened?”
Lee joked, “They caught a bad case of lead fever.”
It took a few seconds, to get Lee's joke. Though, as they did, everyone started laughing in response to Lee jokes, including Lee.
A few seconds later, as they calmed down, Revy complimented, “That is a good. I will have to remember that one.”
Sam inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “Was anyone hurt?”
Rock answered, “No. Except for the attackers, whom are all dead. We got them, before they could even react.”
Sam replied, “That is good.”
Melvin mentally agreed, 'Yea. I am glad only these idiot scum bags are dead. And I can guess what they were planning to do to you women. And I am glad this is how the situation turned out.'
Rock inquired, “Melvin, you know this town the most. Do we have to worry about the police?”
Melvin answered, “No. This is likely a clear case of self-defense. The police have no respect for idiots that get themselves killed like this. They will sweep it under the rug. They will likely just come here, collect the bodies, and their weapons, but not your weapons, and then leave.”
Revy thought, 'I am just likely this city more and more.' She joked, “Now, that is what I call serving the people.”
Everyone lightly laughed at her comment.
Revy mentally wondered, 'Still, we need to know what those men had in mind. I think I know what it is. And I am sure that Rock does not want to bring up the subject. But, someone has to ask. And I don't fully trust, Melvin. I need to ask someone else here that might know what is going on. That will at least be the level with me, concerned this subject.'
Revy asked, “By the way, who the hell are they? And why did they come here in the first place.” She then turned to Lee, as she added, “Lee?”
Lee thought, 'Why am I not surprised she would ask me? I just need to be careful how I answer this, so I don't upset her, or the other women.' He calmly answered, “I may not be from mexico, but I do pay attention to things. I have questions, before I can answer your question. Did they come after you women first? And how many were there?”
Revy answered, “Yes. They were twelve of them in all. And they came specifically for us. One of them even addressed us as such. Is this what I think it is?”
Lee responded, “Very likely. And well, not to upset you, anymore than normal, but I would guess that these are mexican gang members that were planning on kidnapping you women, and selling you to into sex slave trade. It exists in this nation. And sadly in other parts of the world, including parts of the U.S. Though, it is just not talked about much.”
Lee then lied, “Though, I don't like computers, I suggest you go on the internet and check out the mexican gangs, and kidnappings by gangs. But, I do not think you are going to like what you find.”
Rock stated, “That is a good idea.”
Melvin thought, 'It might be best to do something to calm their nerves.' He offered, “Ladies, if you want, how about I give you all, and your friends outside, each a free bottle of cold beer.”
Revy turned to Melvin. She smirked, as she stated, in a happy tone of voice, “A bit of Action and cold, free beer. I am falling in love with this town.”
While Melvin did not show it on the outside. He thought, with concern 'Oh my. What have I done? Still, there is another matter to deal with.'
Melvin said, “I will get you a beer, in a minute, Revy. But, I have to first call the police. And everyone, it might be best if you stick around until after the police leave. In case they do ask questions.”
Revy replied, “I fully understand.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad I am not in any rush to leave. And though Melvin does not know it. I am ecstatic that both Melvin and I are friends with Pedro. I hope Pedro is intelligent enough to send police officers that don't know what is going on. That way, they will not act, or say something stupid about the Black Lagoon series, or other fictional series, in front of the women, which could get us all into trouble.'
Melvin then went over to the wireless phone behind the bar counter.
Melvin then picked up the phone from its base, and he dialed the number for the De La Plata Podrido police station.
(_)
An hour later, the police came and went. Pedro did not show up. They did not ask any questions. They just collected the gang members bodies, their weapons, and impounded the gang members' bus. With one of the officers driving the bus away.
After finishing their lunch, and the police leaving the hotel, Sam and Lee were finally able to head for the parking lot.
When the walked through the front lobby, they saw that the staff had already cleaned up any mess that had happened in the room. With the room appearing to be clean and undamaged, as usual.
But, as Sam and Lee were about to leave through the lobby exit, Rock and Revy walked up to the two men.
As the two women stopped in front of the two men, the two pairs of adults faced each other.
Rock requested, “Sam, could we speak to Lee alone, for a moment.”
Lee thought, 'This has to be important, for them to want some privacy.'
Sam said, “Sure.” He turned to Lee, as he stated, “I will wait right outside the front entrance.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “I will likely only be a minute, or two.”
As Sam walked away, and into the lobby entryway, heading outside, Lee turned to face Revy and Rock. He stated, “Okay. Even thought I don't know what this is, I can tell this is important to you. So, how can I help you?”
Revy said, “Yes. It is important, Lee. First, I take it that you have lived in North America for your entire life?”
Lee embellished, “Yes. Except for the last several months, I have only lived in the southeastern U.S.. What do you want to know?”
Revy stated, “After this morning, We got to talking with each other. And we need to know about some of the mafias in this town, and nation.”
Rock picked up for her lover, as she said, “We are not from around here.”
Lee maintained a mask of calmness, as he sarcastically thought, 'That is the understatement of the week.'
Rock continued, “And as Revy said, we would like to know some information on so of the local mafias in this country. You are the only person we know that we can ask without drawing suspicion. Will you help us?”
Lee thought, 'If I don't help them, it could cause problems for all of us. So, I might as well.'
Lee responded, in a concerned tone of voice, “Okay, Revy and Rock, I will help you. I do not know much about the local mafias in mexico, but I do know some information. But, I am going to tell you right now. Don't mess with them. They will kill you, without hesitation, if you are lucky. Some of the worse ones, if you cross them, they will rape, torture, and then enslave you into the sex trade.”
“Also, do not expect any help from the cops down here. Barring a few exceptions, the cops down here are scared of the cartels. There is a saying down here that translates to, silver or lead. Meaning, the cops either accept the cartels' bribes, or the cartels will kill the cops. The mexican mafia's are not bluffing on this threat.”
Lee continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Do we understand each other?”
Rock replied, “Yes.”
Revy said, “I understand.”
Lee stated, “Good. For simplicity sake, we will just talk about one of the most dangerous cartels that operated on the eastern half of this country. And they are one of the most dangerous criminal organizations in North America. They are called the Zetas.”
Revy inquired, “The who?”
Lee mentally realized, 'I should not be surprised they have do not know about them, given Black Lagoon was set in the mid-nineteen nineties, in their timeline. And the Zetas did not hit the scene until a few years later.'
Lee stated, “The Zetas. The U.S. government publicly considers the Zetas to be the most technologically advanced, sophisticated, and dangerous cartel operating in Mexico. And Uncle Sam only has itself to blame for their creation.”
Revy commented, “I bet this story is juicy.”
Lee said, “It is. In dealings between the Mexican and U.S. governments, the Zetas are one of the more embarrassing mistakes by Uncle Sam. Now, let us set the way back machine to the late nineteen nineties. At the time, Uncle Sam came up with the plan for the Mexican government to use mexican soldiers to directly confront and battle the drug mafias of Mexico. The Zetas were their solution. The Zetas were originally mexican special forces. Their training was paid for by Uncle Sam, with U.S. instructors sent down here to personally train the Zetas. So, you can imagine that the Zetas are all hardcore badasses.”
“But, after they were trained, and sent into the field, the members of the Zetas soon realized they could make more money with the drug trade, instead of fighting the black market. After the Zetas went AWOL, they took over a good chuck of the Mexican drug trade.”
“Also, to make matters worse, other dangerous groups have been created from The Zetas members whom have left the organization.”
Lee’s voice turned deadly serious, as he finished, “If you cross them, they will kill you, your family, your friends, and even your pets. They take everything from you, and burn down what they cannot take from you. When they are finished with you, you will not even be a memory. The cops will not find your corpses. At best, they will find pieces of you that are no even enough to identify you with. That is if you are lucky. Do. Not. Mess. With. Them.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from Rock and Revy, as he headed towards the lobby entryway.
As Lee walked away from the women, he overheard Rock stated, “It sounds like the Zetas are this reality's equivalent to Hotel Moscow.”
Revy said, “That is possible. We have what we wanted to know. I will warn the girls to steer clear of them.”
Rock agreed, “Good idea.”
By then, Lee had entered the entryway, by opening the left side door.
Lee let the door close on its own, as he continued walking towards the outside lobby exit to the hotel.
While Lee did so, he realized in thought, 'Hmm. Now, that I think about it, I guess Rock is right about the Zetas being this reality's version of Hotel Moscow. I guess that maybe this reality is but a work of fiction for another reality...'
'It would make sense on so many levels. And I am not just talking about my personal life with these girls. I am talking about the overall world politics, the names of the major players, and the general dark comedy mood of this reality...'
'If so, that is all the more reason to escape this reality before the girls catch me, or my cancer kills me.'
A second later, Lee reached the outside door. He opened the right door, and walk through it.
Lee then let the right door close behind him, as he saw Sam, met up with he met up with his bearded friend.
Within a minute later, Lee was driving Sam, in his pink convertible, to the Rats Nest.
(_)
Later that afternoon, at five thirty PM, three young women, appearing to be in their mid-twenties, in age, walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, from the outside doors, though the entryway, into the lobby itself.
Two of the women were in front, while the third carried their language, which was two suitcases, and a handbag, with the strap of handbag hung on the woman's right shoulder.
As they made their way into the lobby, they looked around, and all three smiled as they saw whom, that they were looking for.
Just then, the lobby started playing the song, People are People, by the band, Depeche Mode.
(_)
Meanwhile, on the left side of the lobby, Rock and Revy, were sitting on a couch, facing the windows, while their five daughters were also sitting on the three other encircled couches.
The other members of their group has plans for the days, and they were elsewhere.
Revy noticed the music has suddenly changed, and she looked to her left, and whom she saw made her grin from ear to ear. She stated, “Hey girls. Guess who just showed up?
Rock and the sisters turned to see who they were, and they all happily smiled, as well.
All seven women got up from the couches, and they walked towards the three people.
They saw the three women had stopped, while they were looking back at them, with smiles on their faces.
As they walked towards the three women, Kristina yelled, in excitement, “Mom! Aunts!”
The three women were Dutch, Janet, and Benny.
The tallest of the group was the dark skinned, brown haired, Dutch. Whom was a slender, yet muscular woman of average height.
Dutch was wearing pretty much the same outfit she wore when a man, excluding her sun glass. Her clothing included her green pants, shirt, flack jacket, and black boots, all made to fit her. With her hair in short brown dreadlocks.
The second to tallest women was tan skinned, blond, Janet, whom had was slender, but athletic physical build. She also had the largest breasts of the group.
Janet wore a red short sleeved blouse, a yellow long skirt, and black slippers. Her blond hair was cut short.
The shortest of the group was fair skinned, blond, Benny. Whom had a slender, but athletic physical build. Though, she was physical smaller than Janet.
Benny wore a white t-shirt, blue jeans, and white tennis shoes. Her blond hair was reached down to her shoulder-blades, and she tied her hair in a pony tail, with a scrunchy.
With Benny was being the person among them, carrying their luggage.
As the seven women approach, Dutch, Janet, and Benny, Dutch said, “Hi Kristina. Hi girls.”
Revy said, “Hi guys.”
As the seven women came to a stop, in front of the three newcomers to the hotel, the ten women stood around each other.
Molly was the first to speak, as she asked, “Why didn't you tell us you were coming?”
Janet said, “Daughter, if we did, then it would not have been a surprise.”
Molly complimented, “It is a good surprise, mom.”
Janet replied, “Thank you, sweetie.”
As the other women chatted, Rock looked over at Benny, and stopped herself from laughing.
Given Benny's smaller, more slender form, which was almost as short and petite as Lotton and Sawyer, it was hilarious how Benny was barely able to carry both suitcases, and the handbag.
Rock inquired, “Do you need a hand?”
Benny just rolled her eyes for a couple of seconds, before looking back at Rock. She answered, “Sure. These things are not heavy, just cumbersome.”
Benny then handed the suitcase, in her right hand, by the handled, to Rock.
Rock took the suitcase in her left hand.
Benny then stated, with mild annoyance in her voice, “You would think me being the smallest one, would let me out of carrying the luggage. But, no dice.”
Rock commented, “Yea. Some things never change.”
Benny mentioned, “At least, those two don't make me carry all the shopping bags, when we go shopping.”
Rock inquired, “True. So, how was the vacation in the Bahamas?”
Benny answered, “It was fun... Well, when we are not searching the internet for the writer.”
Rock inquired, “Any leads?”
Benny stated, “None.”
By then, the others had begun to overhear their conversation, and they realized the importance of the discussion. The other eight women turned their attention towards Benny and Rock.
Janet had been paying attention to the entire conversation. She stated, “We first tried the simple approach. The same as you. Use the writer's alias to track him with our reality devices. That did not work.”
Rock responded, “Yes. That interesting. We just ended up being sent to where the proxy internet servers he used for his VPN service It seems his alias is more tied to those servers, than his actual address.”
Benny stated, “And the man used proxy servers from all over the world.”
Dutch shrugged, “At least, we went to some interesting places during that wild goose chase.”
Janet agreed, “True. And then, when we decided take a more subtle approach, and we tried to trace the writer through the internet, we ran into some other problems...”
Benny continued for her wife, as she stated, “Rock, this reality has some insane levels of firewalls, anti-viruses, proxy servers, and spyware. I have never seen anything like it. Layer after layer of all four. We spend most of the time being careful not to let out efforts be traced back to us. Finally we got bored with it. And that is why we came over here. To get back into the action.”
Rock agreed, “Yea. This reality can be... paranoid... But, this town down not appear to be that dangerous.”
Benny questioned, “Really. Revy mentioned, in a message to us, that this place was full of badasses.”
Rock conceded, “True. But, this is the kind of place badasses go to live a quiet life.”
Benny snorted, as she inquired, “Isn't that a change. So, how has things been here? Revy sent a message to Janet that you actually had contact with the writer.”
Rock blushed slightly, as she coyly answered, “I would not call it contact. But, we know he is on this island. He may even be staying in this hotel.”
Rock thought, with concern, and mild embarrassment, 'I need to change the subject, before the children learn about my indiscretion. As embarrassing as it would be for Benny, Dutch, and Janet, to learn what happen. I might never live it down if our daughters learned what happen.'
Rock suggested, “Let us get you guys checked in. We will see if they have a room available near Revy and I.
Benny agreed, “That sounds like a great idea.”
Rock commented, “By the way, this hotel takes gold as payment. They even have an exchange system for gold and currencies.”
Benny smiled, as she responded, “Cool. And after that, we can talk about what has been going on, in our new room.”
Rock replied, “Okay. We will do that in a little while.”
The two women then headed for the check in desk, as the other women went back to talking to each other.
(_)
A few minutes later, as the Lagoon family reunited, outside Lee and Sam had just gotten back from the Rats Nest, with Lee parking his car in the Devil's Hotel parking lot.
As the two men approached the lobby, from the windows, Lee could see that Rock, Revy, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio were talking to three other youthful women.
And from the physical builds, clothing, hair color, hair styles, and a skin tones, of the three new women, Lee could guess whom they were.
Lee stopped in his tracks. Though, he did his best to hide his fear from showing on his face, thus alerting Sam that something was wrong, as he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. Dutch, Benny, and Janet are here... I am not dare going to come near those three, without a solid plan of action. Those three are some of the sharpest, most savvy, and intelligent people, I know of, in the multiverse. My usual tricks will not work on them. I need to get back to my suite, and think of a plan. I can just go around the building, can come in the hotel, from the back, and use the back elevator bay.'
'Also, I feel bad for Melvin. I just hope he can continue to play it cool. And I will have to tell Pedro what is going on, tomorrow night. I am not going to be able to make our meeting, given I am not going to risk accidentally bumping into those three.'
'I will call Pedro tomorrow, to tell him that something came up. And that I will meet with him, tomorrow evening, on schedule. We already planned for this situation. If one of us is delayed for twenty minutes. The one at the diner just leaves, and waits until tomorrow, to get some answers as to why the other person did not show up.'
Meanwhile, Sam had noticed that Lee stopped. He stopped a second after Lee stop. He then turned and look at Lee, as he wondered what was wrong.
A few seconds later, Sam asked, “What is it?”
Lee turned to Sam, as he thought, 'I also need to keep Sam out of the line of fire. At least for tonight. Until, I can come up with a plan in the morning. And I just know how to convince him to avoid the trouble in front of us.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he suggested, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Sam, let's go around back, take the back elevators to my suite, and spend the rest of the evening playing poker and watching TV in my room. We will even dine in. My treat.”
Sam firmly inquired, “Lee, what are you not telling me?”
Lee thought, 'Damn. Sam just had to ask me a question like that. Though, I can handle this.'
Lee turned to look at the hotel windows of the front lobby, as he calmly asked, “See Revy, Rock, and their... friends, with those three new women?”
Sam looked over at them, on the other side of the lobby windows, as he answered, “Yes.”
Lee stated, “They clearly know each other. And given Revy and those girls temperaments, do you really want to interrupt their happy reunion?”
Sam realized where Lee was coming from, as Sam calmly responded, “No. Not at all. I see your point. I believe I will take you up on your offer.”
Lee said, “Good. Now, let's go this way.”
Lee then lead the way Sam around the left side of the building, to one of the back entrances to the Devil's Hotel.
It took the two men a few minutes to walk to the left of the building, around back, to the door near the game room, and to back elevator bay.
Around four minutes later, that, they made it to the safety of Lee's hotel suite, on the third floor.
(_)
An hour later, as the sisters went to dinner in the hotel restaurant, the Lagoon parents retired to Dutch, Benny, and Janet's new hotel suite, to talk to each other in private, and catch up with one another.
The suite was a two bed suite, with a balcony, wa a few rooms down from Rock and Revy's suite.
With the hallway door close, and ceiling light of the bedroom of the suite turned on, Dutch and Revy sat in chairs, by the table, near curtains, and sliding glass door of the suite.
Rock sat on the bed near the table, close to the headboard, while she faced the other bed.
Janet and Benny sat together on the other bed, while they faced the other three women.
The headboards of the beds were places to the left side of the room, from the hallway entrance. Across from the beds were the chest of drawers, TV remote on top of the chest, wall mounted flat widescreen TV, and other furnishings.
Currently, the five women were just catching up with each other, as they talking about what they had seen in the current reality they were in.
Benny said, with mild surprise in her voice, “So, the police came to the hotel, collected the bodies and weapons, they left without asking you questions, and swept the whole under the rug?”
Revy smiled, as she stated, “Yes. This town is great. The police even look the other way about us having our weapons, without up bribing them. As long as we don't attack the locals, nor tourists. And there are things to do here. Besides the karaoke nights here, we have to take you to a local dive in town, that we found. The bar is called the Rats Nest. Think of it as being like the Yellowflag, only a hot babe runs it, and there is no whorehouse above the bar.”
Benny commented, “Sounds interesting.”
Dutch inquired, “Yes. It does. Now, how has your end of the investigation, on finding the writer, turned out, so far?”
Rock said, “We have had some suspects on who is the writer. But, they came up to being dead ends.”
Revy stated, “To be honest, I thought it might be Melvin. But, when we talked about it, yesterday, in private, with the other girls, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, swore up and down to us that it was not Melvin. Though, they refused to say why they don't think it is him.”
“Still, I trust them, so, I did not push the matter with them. Also, neither Sam, nor Lee. These two guys, whom stay at the hotel, that play poker all the time with each other. Are not the writer.”
Dutch inquired, “What about this Sam and Lee?”
Revy stated, “Sam stated that Lee has been with him for months.”
Janet pointed out, “But, we have only Sam's word on that.”
Revy shrugged, as she conceded, “You may have a point about that?”
Benny suggested, “What if there are two writers, with Sam and Lee being the writers?”
Rock stated, “I doubt it. Sam has disappeared a few times, and from the way Lee acted during those times, Lee clearly did not know where Sam went. And Lee is nothing but polite to us, while this writer has pulled a few stunts on us.”
Janet asked, “Like what?”
Revy let out a small chuckle. She then said, “We will tell you, later.”
Rock thought, 'This is a conversation for another time.' She commented, “Moving on. We still might want to do a background check on their names. I only have Sam's first name. But, I do have an idea of Lee's full name. Lee introduced himself to us as, J.D. Lee.”
Benny stated, “The names, Sam and Lee, are too broad to do a search. Even with Lee's initials.”
Rock said, “I can understand why you would have trouble with just looking into a man whom we only know as, Sam. But, we have an idea of Lee's full name. So, what is the problem?”
Benny commented, “That is if that name if Lee is his real name. Which I highly doubt. But, that is not all. There is something else you need to know, about the name, Lee.”
Rock asked, “And that would be?” She thought, 'I have a bad feeling about the answer to my question.'
Benny responded, “Rock, I am from Florida. Which is part of the southeastern United States. And I am sure it is the same here, as back in our home reality. So, I mean it, when I say you have no idea how many Lees there are in the southeast United States. It is a common name there for both caucasians, and asians.”
“Also, Lee, in the southeast U.S. is used as a given name, a middle name, and a family name. The name is used by both men and women. There are less Smiths there, than Lees. If that is his alias, he picked a good one.”
“Backtracking him will be next to impossible. Also, the name Lee has a hidden meaning in english. Lee, in old english, means, sheltered from the storm.”
Rock thought, 'Okay. That is some alias to use. With a poetic meaning, as well. But, that does not mean that Lee is the writer. And I don't want to accidentally condemn and innocent man, just by accusation.'
Rock replied, with interest in her voice, “Really. That is an interesting hidden meaning.”
Benny added, “Yes. And if this Lee is the one we are looking for, I want a word with him about messing with our lives.”
Dutch agreed, “So do I.” She chuckled a little, as she continued, “I guess for the writer, the line would form to the left.”
Janet pointed out, “I think you all are missing the bigger picture. Why, is just as important as, who. Why did our target want to bait us to come here? Why does he, or she, want to be near us? Logically, he, or she, would know better, and probably try to hide as far away as possible from us. Instead, this person baited us. There is something else going on here. An unknown factor that is not being accounted for, that we have no way of finding out about, right now.”
Revy complimented, “That is a good point, Janet.”
Benny suggested, “How about Janet, Dutch, and I, meet this guy?”
Dutch seconded Benny's idea, as she commented, “Great idea. The question is when, and where. I suggest we do so, when he is alone. I am sure that if that Sam fellow, whomever he is, is present, when we are, he will run interference for Lee. Like he may have already done, by giving Lee that alibi. So, we need to get Lee alone.”
Benny agreed, “I like that plan.”
Janet said, “Also, let us not just meet him. Let us do so while nicely dressed in some of our sexier clothing. If he is the writer, that will throw him off his game.”
Benny smirked, as she commented, “Even if he isn't the writer, seeing three sexy women, in sexy clothing, speaking to him, will thrown him off his game.”
Rock stated, “Well, if you want to confront Lee, I know where he will likely go for lunch. And from what I am told, Sam does not care for this place. As such, Lee will likely be alone.”
Rock then explained where and when would likely be best to confront Lee, when Lee was alone.
The Lagoon parents then formed their plans for the next day.
(_)
The next day, it was noon, on a sunny day, as Lee finished his lunch, as he sat in a chair, under a shaded, outdoor table by the burger van. The table had four chairs, with being the only one sitting in a chair, at the table.
Also, there was no one at the tables around Lee.
Lee was in a good mood that day. He had Sam met Sam for breakfast that morning, at the hotel restaurant, at the bar counter. And it was Lee's request they sat there.
Still, Lee was a little concerned that he did not see Revy, Rock, Benny, Janet, nor Dutch, in the hotel restaurant. The rest of Rock and Revy's family and friends were there. But, not them. Though, Lee was not going to complain about the matter.
After they finished breakfast, while they were still at the bar counter, Lee excused himself. Lee then headed to his suite. When he reached his suite, he dialed the number for the Plata Podrido police department.
Lee spoke only english during his conversation on the phone. And soon got in touch with Pedro. With the two of them both speaking english to each other.
While, Lee did not go into detail, because he was concerned that the phone lines might be table by someone after him. And Pedro and Lee had talked about this very possibility, a few times, at the Last Resort Diner. With them agreeing to keep their conversation vague, while talking over the phone.
Lee did not mention any names, places, times, nor appointments. Even the places they met at. Though, Lee did state he had good reasons for not talking to him, yesterday. But, he would talk to Pedro, later.
Pedro said that he was okay with the situation. He understood. And he looked forward to his explanation later. Meaning, when they met at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM that evening. As usual.
Both men said their goodbyes, and Lee hung up the phone.
Lee then headed back downstairs, and rejoined Sam in the hotel restaurant. They then left for their usual chairs, across from each other, at a small table, on the right side of the front hotel lobby. They then played poker there, until it was time for the Rats Nest bar to open.
When it was time for the Rats Nest bar to open, Lee drove Sam and himself to the Rats Nest, in his pink car. When they reached the bar, they sat in their usual places, at the back left corner table, as they played poker for a little while. During this time, Sam had a beer, while Lee had a bottle of lemonade.
When it was lunch time, Sam felt like having some Italian food, while Lee felt a craving for a hamburger.
So, Lee drove same to a good, nearby Italian restaurant, where he dropped off Sam. Lee then drove to a parking lot near Eda and Yolanda's burger van. After Lee parked his car, he went to the food truck to have some lunch.
Presently, as Lee sat in his chair, at the table he had been at, he had just eaten his hamburger and french fries, while sipping through a straw, from his large styrofoam cup of soda.
Lee thought, 'These fountain drinks that Eda and Yolanda have are as good as the bottle stuff, and the two women offer free refills.'
Lee heard a woman's voice, a few feet behind him, calmly ask, “Hello. Are you, Lee?”
To Lee's credit, when he turned around to face the three, young women, he did not do a double-take. Instead, he maintained his calm poker face, as he looked at the three women.
Though, Lee instantly recognize the three women.
Janet was wearing a bikini top and skirt.
Dutch was wearing a bikini top and some black pants.
Benny was in a crop top shirt, and some shorts.
Lee maintained his calm facade, as inside his mind, Lee was screamed, 'Oh crap! It is those three! Dutch, Janet, and Benny! And the only reason they would pull a stunt like this, in those outfits, is they already suspect me as the writer.'
'I have been dreading meeting since these three since last night. Except for Rock and Violin, these three are part of top five sharpest people I know among their group. So, how did they know I was here?... Of course, Rock and Revy. Revy and Eda talk to each other, and it is no secret that I sometimes come here for lunch around noon.'
'Still, at least they let me finish my lunch, first. That was nice of them.'
'And Janet really does have a nice set of breasts. And so does Dutch, as a chick. Benny, not so much. But, that is Tex-Mex's fault...'
Lee was able to keep his emotional mask up, as he mentally caught himself, 'Oh lord, I have to stop thinking this way! The worst part about those three is that I know they are my type. Like V.T., they are intelligent, independent, nice women, that are easy on the eyes, and most importantly, they are sane.'
'If they figure this out, I will be eating out of their hands, and my cover will be blown, within minutes.'
'I have to remain strong, and not show any outward emotion, except indifference.'
Lee calmly said, to the three women, “Yes, I am Lee. How may I help you ladies?”
Janet smiled, as she continued her inquiry, “We were wondering if we could talk to you?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Sure. Have a seat.”
The three women quickly seated themselves at the three other seats at Lee's table.
Dutch sat in across from Lee. Benny sat to Lee's left side. And Janet sat to Lee's right side.
Lee asked, “So, how do you know about me?”
Dutch answered, for the group, “Revy and Rock told us about you.” She thought, 'There is no point in denying that we know Revy and Rock. We did talk for a while in the hotel lobby last evening. He might have seen us there. Even though, I did not see him there.'
Lee rolled his eyes for a moment. He then looked back as them, as he responded, “A person can meet the most interesting of people in this town. So, you know my name. What are your names?”
Benny thought, 'If this guy is the writer, he playing the dumb act to the hilt. By asking us to introduce ourselves, there is no risk of later slipping up on how he would know our names. Still, we have to give him our names, to keep this conversation rolling.'
Benny answered, “Well, I am Benny. And these are my two girlfriends. The blond is Janet. And the sassy black woman is Dutch.”
Benny thought, 'Saying that Janet is really my wife would cause too many questions. And Janet and I have discussed. With us agreeing that saying in public, that she is my girlfriend would best. And Dutch really is our girlfriend.'
Benny continued her thoughts, with amusement, 'Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, are not the only ones that enjoy being a threesome.'
Lee held back laugh, as he thought, 'Well that answers that group dynamic. I only teased at that in my stories, from comments. Though, to see it first hand. And to have it directly confirmed is a little awkward for me. Also, Benny called Dutch a sassy black woman. Honestly, I can see that.'
Lee commented, “Benny... Such an odd name for such a cute woman?”
Benny flatly replied, “It's a long story.”
Lee shook his head once, as he requested, “I do not want to know.”
Janet mentally wondered, 'The question is did you know the answer, beforehand? If you are the writer, you would know that you would not want to know, because the masquerade would be over.'
'If you were not the writer, you would not want to know, because you know asking questions from friends of Revy is dangerous. With you considering us to be as dangerous as her. And I cannot tell which is the case. Still, let us dig a little deeper.'
Janet requested, “So, tell us about yourself, Lee. How long have you been here? Where are you from?”
Lee thought, 'When three beautiful, sexy women, ask a man to talk about himself, that man has to answer their questions. If I don't, it will alert them to something being off about me. Now, let us see how good my cover story is. I only hinted at it before with Rock and Revy. I think I will start off with an honest statement. I will drop a hint about the time loop, that they will even realize. But, it will also help with my cover story.'
With a slight smile on his lips, Lee honestly answered, “It feels like I have been here for several years. And I have enjoyed much of the time I have spent here.”
Lee then preceded to lie his ass off, in a very casual, laid back manner.
Lee began his lie with, “Anyway, I am from, and grew up in Nashville, Tennessee.”
Dutch thought, 'Now, to trip him up.' She asked, “What high school did you attend?”
Lee thought, 'Nice try. But, I have a counter for that question.'
Lee answered, “None. I was home schooled. After that, I passed the test for a GED, I went to college, took a placement test, and I went on to study a trade skill. Carpentry, to be exact.”
Dutch thought, 'Nice way of dodging the question.'
Meanwhile, Janet thought, 'Let's see how much you know about that city.' She inquired, “Why don't you tell us about Nashville? I may want to visit there.”
Lee genuinely thought, 'This is going to be fun.' He responded, “Sure. It is an interesting place. But, it has gone down hill for the last few decades. It started going down hill when they torn down the local theme part, Opryland, and build a gaudy mall in its place. Of all the rides there, I miss the Old Mill Scream the most. It is like that line in song Big Yellow Taxi. They paved over paradise, and put up a parking lot. And in this case, they literally did that.”
“Of course, the flood did not help matters. But, there are still some nice places to visit there. Such as the Parthenon. A full scale replica of the Parthenon in Greece. It is a wonder to see. Then, there is the Grand Ole Opry music stage. Along with dozens of nice bars and restaurants, featuring a wide variety of live musical performances. Outside of the city is Rock City, Ruby Falls, Dollywood, and of course, the more romantic part of Tennessee. The majestic smokey mountains, themselves.”
Benny though, 'If this is a cover story. It is a good one. I know most of those places. And he has at least clearly spent some time in Nashville, and other parts of Tennessee. But, I won't want him to know how impressed I am with his answers.'
Benny halfheartedly commented, “Sounds like fun.”
Lee then turned the conversation back on them, as he casually requested, “So, please tell me about yourselves?”
Benny thought, 'Touche. But, I got this covered.' She answered, “While my two girlfriends prefer their privacy, I will answer your question. I am originally from Florida. I went to college at SCAA for a while, before I transferred back to a college in Florida.”
Benny thought, 'Given how young I look, I can leave my past at that. With me pretending to be a college student. Which I once was, so I know how to fake it.'
'And this makes for good bait. Only the writer would likely know I am older than I look. Along, with him knowing about the hacking incident with the mafia and FBI in Florida, and why I originally went on the run, in the first place.'
Lee thought, 'Unfortunately for you, Benny, I am not taking this obvious bait. Instead, I intend to go in a different direction with this conversation.'
Lee inquired, “So, you have been Savannah, Georgia. I heard good things about Savannah College of Art and Design. Though, I hear there are a lot of strange people in Savannah. But overall, I am told by others that it is a nice town.”
Janet silently realized, 'We are losing control of the conversation. I need to get us back on track.'
Janet commented, “So, the important question. Our friends mentioned that you are on the run. How did you end up here?”
Lee lied, in a sober tone of voice, “It is a sad tale of foolishness on my part. I didn't read the fine print of some contracts I signed. You know. I used to think fleeing to Mexico was cliché, but now I understand why it is not. Being a carpenter, I got into the house market, where I fell into some unsavory fellows. At the time, I thought I was signing into an LLC corporate partnership. Instead, it was a Sub-chapter S corporate partnership.
Dutch asked, “What is the difference between the two?”
Lee answered, “The different between the two are when profits are divided, and how taxes are paid. In an LLC, the profits are divided between the partners, and the partners directly pay the taxes. In a Sub-chapter S, the taxes are paid by the corporation, and then the profits are divided up. I am sure you are starting to see the big different between the two.”
From look of comprehension in their eyes, Lee could see he was correct. He continued, “Anyway, the company I joined turned out to just be a money laundering shell company. One night the other partners vanished, taking all the money in the company with them. Money that taxes were owed on. And they left me holding the bag. Filing for bankruptcy was not an option for me. And with me being the only partner the government could find, and the fact I did not have the money to pay for those taxes, the government started the process to charging me with tax evasion. When my lawyer told me I was screwed, I immediately ran for the border, and I eventually found myself here.”
Benny asked, “So, are you going to try to pay the money back?”
Lee stated, “Even though I am the victim, and should I was able to pay what is owed, the government still demands that I spend at least ten years in prison. So, no. As far as I am concerned, when it comes to me, they can try to squeeze water from a rock. I am just going to stay on the run until a better option comes along...”
Lee thought, 'Now, to pull an unexpected comment, that will allow me to gain control of the situation.'
Lee said, “Still... About this town, I will level with you ladies. It does not take a genius to figure out we in the twilight zone.”
Benny thought, 'That is an understate. But, where are you going with this, Lee?'
Lee continued, “And I know, that I am the poor fool on the run that gets it in the end, in most twilight zone episodes, during the plot twist. I am trying very hard to avoid that twist at the end.”
Dutch smiled, as she said, “Boy, you don't have a clue.”
Lee thought, 'Actually I do.' He begged, as he faked desperation, “Don't tell me. I don't want to know.”
Benny thought, 'That is a wonderful excuse for wanting to remain ignorant. Admit to the strangeness, but beg not to be a part of it. He is either putting up a wonderful act as the writer, or he is just some poor guy who fell into this situation, and he is trying to figure a way out, without the strangeness consuming him.'
Lee picked up his cup, and he took a sip of his sweet tea. Lee noticed that it was nearly empty. A thought occurred to him, as he mentally reflected, 'I may just have found a way to buy some time.'
Lee said, “Excuse me. I will be right back. I just need to get a refill.”
Lee stood up. After which, he balled up his trash. He picked up the trash in his left hand, and his drink in his right hand. He then started walking towards the food truck, as he dumped the trash in a trash can he passed.
Lee's intend was to a free refill of his drink from the burger van, while he bought time. That would allow him to think and implement a plan that get him out of his current mess.
(_)
As Lee walked away, Dutch asked, “Benny, you are the expert on the southeastern U.S. culture. Does he check out?”
Benny answered, “So far he does. Everything he has said seems to be on the level. Either that, or he is a very good liar.”
Janet commented, “His story is so mundane that it is believable.”
(_)
While Lee walked to the window counter, under the awning of the food truck, where Eda was, he saw that there was no out else at the window.
Lee walked, as he thought, 'I have got to get them off their A game, or they are soon going to find out about me. I need a plan... That might work... And all I need to do is smile.'
When Lee approached Eda, at the window, he smiled, as he looked at her.
When Eda turned her attention to him, Lee requested, “I need a refill.”
Eda took the drink and refilled it. As she handed it back to him, she noticed Lee's smile. She asked, “What are you smiling about?”
As Lee continued smiling, Lee shrugged. He said, in a relax, slightly flighty, tone of voice, “Well, I have three young, sexy women showing an interest in me by them deciding to sit with me at my table.”
Eda leaned out the window. She turned to head to her right, and whom she saw, over at the table that Lee usual saw at, cause her jaw dropped.
Lee continued to smile, as he forced himself not to laugh at Eda's reaction.
Eda leaned up, as she collected herself. She then turned her head towards the back of the vehicle, as she stated, “Yolanda, I will be a minute. I am going to say hi to Dutch, Benny, and Janet.”
From inside the vehicle, Lee could hear Yolanda calmly reply, in english, “Give them my best.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to get back to the table, before Eda reaches.'
Lee quickly turned, and returned to his seat at the table, where Benny, Dutch, and Janet, were sitting.
Less than five seconds after Lee sat down in his chair, at the table, Lee saw Eda, in her waitress uniform, walk up to the group of adults he was with.
As the three women noticed, and turned to look at her, Benny asked, “Eda, what are you doing here?”
Lee also turned to look at Eda, with a special type of smile on his face.
Eda came to a stop, to Lee's right side, and Janet's left side, as she looked down at the group, sitting before her. She retorted, “I could ask you three the same question.”
Meanwhile, Dutch noticed the way Lee was looking at Eda. With a slight lecherous smile on his face.
Dutch realized what Lee's smile could mean. She turned to Eda, as she questioned, with concern in her tone of voice, “Eda, did you sleep with this man?”
Eda just blushed, and Lee's smile became slightly widened. These two reactions answered Dutch question, with a confirmed, yes.
Lee thought, 'Now, to make my exit, while they are shocked at that revelation.'
Lee continued to smile, as he turned to look at the women sitting at the table with him. He said, “Well ladies, it has been fun. But, I have places to be. Nice meeting you, and have a great day.”
Lee then got up from the table, grabbed his drink, and walked away. He headed towards where he parked his pink car beside the room. So, he could head to an Italian restaurant that he dropped Sam off at, for his lunch, and then the two of them to go back to the Rats Nest, to play some more poker, together.
While the four women watched Lee walk away from them, Benny said, “No one who has seen our series would knowingly sleep with Eda. Unless he is crazy. And Lee does not look crazy to me.” She turned to Eda, as she continued, “No offense, Eda.”
Eda continued to look to Lee, as she casually replied, “None taken. I can be real dangerous. But, I am going to tell you. Lee is not our target. When we went out on a date one evening, and we later had sex that night. It was okay. Also, when we did it, I sensed no fear from him. Unless he has no fear of death, he is not the writer.”
Janet commented, “Still, if Lee is the writer, he might be trying to throw us off his scent.”
Dutch weighed both her lovers' positions. She said, “Either way is possible. But, we need more information about Lee, before we move forward.”
Eda then turned to look at the three women, as she thought, 'Now, to earn some pointed with these three.' She offered, “So, are you guys hungry? My treat.”
Benny and Janet said, in unison, “Sure.”
Dutch shrugged, as she stated, “I could use a burger.”
Eda then took their orders, and she went to get her friends something to eat, from her food truck.
(_)
Later, that evening, after Sam and Lee spent the afternoon at the Rats Nest, they returned to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
Given how suspicious Janet, Dutch, and Benny, had been to him at lunch. Lee decided it was better for him and Sam, to eat at their usual place at the bar counter, instead of the right front corner table.
Lee did this because, given how sharp the three new women in his life were, if Lee sat their, on the first night, they would further suspect him as the writer. Because, he could sit with his back to the corner, and he would have a good view of the entire room. Which was exactly when Lee preferred to see at that table.
But, Lee realized, if he sat at the bar counter, with him facing the left wall of the room, and his back being to the women after him, including Dutch, Benny, and Janet, it would further allay suspicions towards him, as being the writer.
Convincing Sam to change where they were going to sit was not difficult.
So, the two men, had dinner, as they sat at the bar counter, at their usual places.
Also, Melvin was behind the bar counter, and he was more than happy to take the meal orders from his two friends. And there was no one else around the three men, at the bar counter.
Though, during Lee and Sam's meals, and after they finished eating, Lee had a feeling that he was being watched.
Actually, Lee was sure he was being watched.
And Lee could guess whom was watching him.
A few minutes after Lee finished his meal, Lee took a drink from his glass of iced lemonade.
Lee then sat down the glass, onto the bar counter, as he thought, 'As I developed my precognitive abilities. Especially, during the time loop. I have gained the ability to not only tell when I am being watch, but in what direction.'
'And the direction is behind me, and to my right side. That is the direction from where Revy's crew is sitting. And I can guess whom among them are occasionally looking at me.'
The women being, Dutch, Janet, Benny, and probably a few others. They are occasionally looking at me, as they talk about me. If I turn my head towards them, that will only draw more interest from them, towards myself. And I don't want that.'
'It looks like my little act at lunch didn't even buy me a full day, without their attention. But, it at least bought me a little time. And in this game, one can still win by inches.'
(_)
Meanwhile, at the tables by the stage, in the back of the room, Rock and Revy's group had to take up four tables, instead of their usual three, to make room for their additional company.
After everyone in their group had said, hello, to Dutch, Benny, and Janet. And visa versa. The three women sat with Revy and Rock.
Meanwhile, Yukio, Rebecca, Kristina, Sarah, and Molly sat at a table.
Also, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Aeryn, and Violin sat at a table.
And at the fourth table, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto sat together.
At Lagoon parents table, the five women were alternating between looking over at each other, and looking Lee, whom sitting at the bar counter, with his back turned, while he and Sam were finishing their dinner.
And their conversation, as they ate their own dinner, and drank their beers, was about, Lee.
Rock looked over at the other women at the table, as she inquired, “So, at lunch, Lee said he was here over tax evasion charges, due to being conned?”
Janet turned to Rock, as she answered, “Yes.”
Rock said, “I can actually see that.”
Revy shrugged, as she looked at Rock. She commented, “Well, not everyone on the run has a flashy back story. Most times it is simple, mundane reasons, for how they found themselves on the run. And I could see Lee being in that sort of trouble. It would explain why he likes to keep to himself, except for being with Sam.”
Rock said, “Yes. He is living off the grid.”
Benny turned to Rock, as she pointed out, “But, it does make for a likely cover story.”
Revy agreed, “True. Still, that means nothing.”
Janet inquired, “Are there any notable abilities that Lee has, that you have not yet told us.”
Revy stated, “He is a pre-cog.”
Dutch looked over at Revy, as she asked, “So, Lee is precognitive? Interesting. How good is he?”
Revy turned to Dutch, as she stated, “When we first got here, I personally watched him win at poker without looking at his cards.”
Dutch commented, “Now, that is a trick.”
Janet looked at Revy, as she questioned, “Do you think Lee could be using his pre-cog abilities to keep suspicion off of himself?”
Revy answered, “No. I don't think his abilities work that way. His abilities don't give him that much detail on the situation. He said his precognition worked on pure instinct. And I believe him. We have surprised him a number of times.”
Rock agreed, “Revy is right. I do not think he relies on that ability too much. I even talked to the Rats Nest bartender, she stated that Lee told her he does not even rely much on his precognition, when playing poker. He only does that trick when he and Sam are playing alone.”
Revy said, “Still, that is a nice trick to have. And I can think of a few ways we could profit from that trick. Along with his poker face.”
Janet asked, “He has a poker face?”
Revy stated, “Yes. It is a very good one. When he did that card trick, the girls had their weapons draw on him at point blank range. And this was after they massacred most of those in room, whom attacked us. Still, he didn't show any signs of stress.”
Benny whistled for a second. She then commented, “Now, that is a poker face. Writer, or not, those are nice skills to have.”
Dutch said, “The first rule of hiding is. Don't rock the boat. Don't draw attention to oneself. He clearly knows this. Being polite, and remaining calm, are good ways not to rock the boat. And to not draw attention to oneself.”
Rock mentioned, “Yes. And the only time I think I saw the real Lee, under his mask, was during a chase we were all part of, with him being the driver. Beforehand, we made the mistake of thinking that he was sane.”
The other four women at the table, looked over at Rock.
Dutch asked, “What do you mean, making the mistake he was sane? What happened?”
Rock explained, “One evening, we needed a designated driver. So, Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, and I could get drunk at a bar. None of the other girls would help us. So, when we learned that Lee knew how to drive, we forced him to do so for us. Though, he had one condition. We could not bring our weapons.”
Dutch commented, “That sounds like a sane request to me. The only reason I never made that request for Revy, when we went to the Yellowflag, was most of the time, when there was shoot out, Revy was needed to finish it, before it got so out of hand, that we got injured, or killed.”
Revy turned to Dutch, as she sarcastically replied, “Hardy, har, har.”
Rock went onto say, “Yes. And that was sane request from Lee. But, later that night, there was a fight at the bar, and we had to quickly leave. We ended up in a car chase, with Lee driving. He knows how to drive. And he found an interesting way to end it. He decided to play chicken, with two cars, on a dark street, with the headlights off, while flooring the gas pedal.”
Dutch said, “Okay. That is not so sane.”
Dutch thought, 'And maybe Lee is the writer, and he was crazy enough to sleep with Eda, without any fear of death. To play chicken like that, one has to have no fear of death. But, the question then becomes why he has no fear of death?'
'And if this is the case, that would make him very unpredictable, and dangerous. If we find out he is the writer, we will have to be careful in how we approach him, when we do capture him. Though afterward, we would punish him for what he has done to us.'
Revy grinned, as she pointed out, "Well, he won that game.”
Rock said, “True. But, he had an insane grin while he was being playing chicken. That worried me.”
Revy stated, “Oh, come on. I was proud he could make that grin. Lee is fun when he actually loosens up.”
Benny asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “And whose car was he driving during this chase?”
Revy turned to Benny, as she sheepishly said, “Ours. But afterward, we found a local guy to check the car out. And the car is fine.”
Revy thought, 'If we had damaged our car. That might have really upset Benny. And the one time I have ever seen Benny furious with me, to the point I was actually scared, was back in Roanapur, when I accidentally shot his computer. Dutch had to hold him in place, for five minutes, until he calmed down.'
'Also, I had to pay for his next computer. With the super-soldier serum, and the fact we all trained each other some in our fields. If I ever piss her off, she might be able to put up a fight with me. And I really don't want that.'
Benny stated, “Good. So, Lee might be crazy enough to knowingly sleep with Eda.”
Dutch looked at Benny, as she thought, 'Good. I am glad that Benny has picked up on this.' She then looked at the other faces at the table, as she continued her thoughts, 'And from the looks on Janet and Rock. I believe they also realize that Lee is perhaps crazier than we all previous thought.'
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Maybe.”
Rock pointed out, “But, that doesn't make him the writer. Actually, a number of us had tested him to see if he was the writer. Lotton said he wasn't the writer. Aeryn and Violin stated he is not the writer. And one time, we got him stoned, and even then he didn't show any evidence of being the writer.”
Benny inquired, “Let me guess pot brownies, and he didn't realize what was in the brownies?”
Revy replied, “Yep.”
Benny commented, “Nice trick.”
Revy commented, “You can thank Molly and the girls for that one.”
Benny said, “I think I will. And this means we won't have to try that trick on him.”
Revy agreed, “True.”
Rock thought, 'After thinking about that incident. I believe that was a mistake to trick Lee into getting stoned. I believe he did not deserve that. Though, I am not going to say a word about it to the others. Also, I need to get this conversation back on track.'
Rock pointed out, “Be that, as it may. So far, we have not had to resort to violence, except for self-defense. And I would like it to stay that way.”
Rock mentally reflected, 'I am going to give Revy and our daughters the benefit of the doubt, on the Rats Nest massacre. That could have been self-defense.'
Dutch said, “Really. With this crew, that is a feat. Still, without resorting to violence, Lee is going to be a touch nut to crack. And if we want to make sure he is the writer, or not, we will have to crack him.
Janet stated, “Well, I have an idea.”
The other four women turned to Janet.
Revy asked, “What is it?”
Janet smirked, as she questioned, “What is the one thing, besides monthly periods, that a man never wants to hear women talk about?”
Revy replied, “What?”
Janet answered, “Women asking a man to compare them to each other, and other women. I say, right now, the five of us should just get up, walk over to him, and ask him who he thinks is the hottest among us.”
Benny looked over at Janet, as she said, “Honey, that is just plain evil... I like it. Let's do it.”
Janet turned to Benny, as she continued smile. She said, “I thought you would like it, sweetie.”
Dutch conceded, “It could work. It could crack him. And it would be a really quick way to do it, without things becoming messy.”
Rock said, “I think I will come along to make sure this doesn't get out of hand.”
Revy commented, “I am going to come, so I can watch.”
The five women then got up from their table, and walked towards Lee, at the bar counter.
(_)
A few seconds later, across the room, at the bar counter, Lee precognition began warning him of immense danger approaching him. He thought, 'My abilities only trigger like this when my life is in immediate danger. And my precognition does not always work to warn me of danger. But, it is doing so, right now.'
Lee heard Revy, say, from right behind him, “Hey Lee. Could we speak to you for a minute?”
Lee and Sam turned around to see the five Lagoon parents standing by them.
Melvin was across the bar counter, as he looked at the five women, as well. He thought, 'I am willing to guess, from their clothing and looks, along with what I read in those screwy stories, seeing the Black Lagoon series, and what I personally learned in the aftermath of the fall of Chang's Tower. That is Dutch, Benny, and of course Janet, with Rock and Revy. I should be fine, as long as I hang back. But, if I walk away, I could draw attention to myself.'
Meanwhile, Lee thought, 'If I remain calm, I should be fine.' He calmly asked, “Yes. What would you like to talk about, Revy?”
Janet jumped into the conversation, as she inquired, “We wanted to know which one of us you find to be the sexiest?”
Sam and Melvin's eyes went wide at Janet's request, while Lee remained calm.
Lee thought, from a logical standpoint, 'No good can come from answering a question like that. That is plain cruel question to ask a man. And it is clearly an attempt to get reaction from me. But, I have a plan for such an occasion.'
Lee said, “I find sexiness to be a factor in personality, as well as physical attributes. And I do not know any of you well enough to make such a determination. Also, this is not a judgment that should be made from just one man.”
Janet thought, with a mix of annoyance and amusement, 'Oh, he is good at this.'
Revy thought, 'That gives me an idea.' She said, “You know? You are right, Lee. We should have a contest on the matter?”
The women saw Lee's poker face slip for just a second.
Janet though, 'He clearly did not expect that comment from Revy.” She turned to Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I didn't either. But, I want to know what Revy has in mind.'
By then, the others around Revy, had turned to look at her.
Dutch asked, “Contest with who, Revy?”
Revy looked over at Dutch, as she answered, “We have a contest among our crew. Us, our family, our friends. I will even call Eda, and Yolanda, as well. They are too hot not to get in on this action.”
Lee was barely able to maintain his poker face, as he thought, with concern and worry, 'Oh no. What I have I inspired here? I have got to try to stop this, now!' He quickly said, “That is not what I meant.”
Benny looked over at Lee, as she stated, “It doesn't matter. Once Revy is like this, well... There is a reason she is called, Revy. All we can do is hang on for the ride.”
A thought occurred to Lee, as he mentally reflected, 'On second thought. After thinking about it, for a few seconds. I do think that while Revy's idea will create problems, this might be a good chance to throw them off my scent. And I have one question that will allow me to take control of the situation. I just have to set the question up, just right.'
Lee said, “I have a question... Err. Benny, is it?”
Benny replied, “Yes. What is it?”
Lee asked, “How bad a loser can Revy and the others be?”
Benny thought, 'The writer would not ask that question. Or, would he? Lee is so hard to read. But, it is a fair question.' She answered, “Petty bad. Depending on what she loses.”
Lee said, “Then, I suggest you make the prize be very small.”
Rock overheard Benny and Lee's comments, as she stated, “That is a good point.”
As Melvin watched this madness unfold in front of him, he thought, 'This could go very badly if someone does not reign them in. And Lee has no way to do so. But, I do.'
Melvin said, “I will offer a six pack of a good brand of beer, as the first place prize. If that is okay?”
Revy said, “That works for me. And we will also do this for bragging rights.”
Janet replied, “I agree.”
Dutch commented, “Beer is an excellent choice, with this crowd.”
Benny said, “I am with Dutch on this one.”
Rock shrugged, as she said, “Who am I to argue with such logic?”
Melvin offered, “Also, this bar would be the perfect place to host your contest.”
Melvin thought, 'This is the only place in town, that I know of, for sure, that the walls, ceiling and bar counter, is armored. If things go bad, this room might be able to contain their choas, and decrease the chance of other people getting hurt.'
'Also, a battle in here likely will not destroy the rest of the hotel.'
'And if this place is wrecked, and I survive, I have been meaning to talk to the manager about some minor remodeling of this place. And that is a perfect excuse. While also having these women run out of town, as well. With me back to my peaceful life.'
Revy agreed, “Yea. You're right.”
Lee thought, 'I see Melvin is also helping me. Though, let us check to see if the others would want to do this. We might also be able to contain this contest to a small number of people. That will still allow me to thrown them off my scent, while decreasing the chance of a big battle erupting in the hotel.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Are you even sure your friends would want to have such a contest?”
Janet questioned, “Why do you ask?”
Lee stated, “I like this restaurant. I would like it to remain in one piece.”
Janet just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, while Rock, Dutch, and Benny chuckled.
Lee thought, 'Now, to cover why I believe all of their group is dangerous. I don't know if Rock and Revy told the other three about the Rats Nest massacre, and how Sam and I were there. But, I can use the event from this morning to give the excuse of how I know they are all dangerous.'
Lee commented, “And after yesterday morning, it does not take genius to figure out that you are all very dangerous.”
Janet immediately looked at Lee, as Dutch, Benny, and Rock, stopped laugh.
Dutch asked, in a serious tone of voice, “What are you talking about?”
Rock thought, 'Oh no. We get so caught up with our plans, we forgot to tell them what happen yesterday morning.” Rock turned to Dutch, as she said, “We will tell you the full details, later. But, there was a battle in the front lobby of this hotel. None of us were hurt. But, let's just say, that it is no longer a secret that all of us our badasses.”
Dutch replied, “Okay.”
Dutch thought, 'Though, I did not notice any damage in the front lobby. And Benny, Janet, and I, will find out later. Though, this means we cannot use the fact we are badasses as bait for the writer. Because everyone here already knows that. Still, that is a small matter.'
Dutch turned to Lee, as she continued her thoughts, 'Besides, we are already in the middle of laying a trap, right now.'
Though, before Dutch could comment. Revy stated, “Anyway. Back to the matter of the contest. That is a good question, Lee. We do need to ask them.”
Revy turned towards tables, by the stage, where the rest of her crew was sitting at. She yelled, “Hey girls! How would you like to do a talent contest?!”
Of the next few seconds, the other women at their tables, yelled back, either, “Yes!”, “Yea!”, “Sure!”, “Why not?”, and “Of course.”
As the other women finished answering, Revy turned back to face Lee. She said, “See, they want in on this, as well.”
Lee noticed all this, as he thought, with disappointment, 'It was worth a try. We will just have to arrange for this contest to have some rules to prevent fights from breaking out.'
Meanwhile, Janet thought, 'Now, to bait, Lee.' She said, “How about a bikini contest?”
Lee turned to Janet, as he thought, 'Nice try, Janet.' He casually said, “A bikini contest would be so cliché. Besides, it's not the proper season.”
Janet thought, 'Nice come back.'
Revy teased, “He has got you there, Janet.”
Rock inquired, “Still, what should the rules be for this contest?”
Janet said, 'There is one thing a contest needs. And with it, Lee is not slipping through our fingers.' She said, “There is one thing a contest is going to need, and that a judge. I think Lee here would make a good judge.”
Lee was looking at Janet, as she had made her suggestion.
Lee maintained his poker mask, as he sarcastically stated, “You really do want that answer? Don't you?”
Lee continued to remain calm, as he thought, 'Damn. She roped me into having a front row seat. I cannot say, no, to her suggestion, without risk of blowing my cover in front of everyone. And this will make maintaining my cover, very difficult for me. And I will have to be careful about my judging of each of them. Or, they might take violent offense, later on, with the scores I give them.'
'Also, I need to work out how we will score them exactly. I am not just going to score them evenly between hotness and talent. That would be unfair to some of them. But, I will figure those details, later tonight, and tomorrow.'
'I still have to survive this conversation, before I even have to worry about those minor issues.'
Janet smirked towards Lee, as she replied, “Yep.”
Meanwhile, Sam and Melvin were just laughing at Lee's predicament.
Melvin thought, with amusement, 'Oh my. This could turn into another Roanapur Bad Girl Bikini Contest. That was riot to watch. And the event was hilarious to read. I have to admit that the punch line at the end, dealing with Akira winning was solid comedy gold. And I am going to have a front row see to this mad capped contest.'
As Lee turned, in his stool, towards Sam and Melvin, as he saw them chuckling, at his misfortune.
Lee finally dropped his poker face, as he openly scowled.
The women noticed this.
Janet thought, 'So, Lee does have a few weak points in the mask he puts up in front of us. It is obvious these two men are his friends. And when one of his friends acts negatively towards him, his lets his mask slip.'
'While I do not know enough about these two men, to use this against Lee. This is nice to know, for future use, later.'
'And from what I am guess, based one what Rock and Revy told us today, and last night, these two men are Sam and Melvin. Sam is the bearded man sitting by Lee. And the bartender, whom is standing across the counter from us.'
Meanwhile, Lee was still scowling, as he bitterly thought, 'After everything I have done for you. And this is they want to react to my current predicament. Still, while I consider you both my friends. If this is the way you are both going to treat this situation. And since I cannot talk my way out of this one. I am going to take the approach, that if I am going down. I taking you two with me.'
Lee continued to look at Sam and Melvin, suggested, “How about we have three judges? Sam can be a judge, and so can Melvin.”
Revy smiled, as she said, “That will work.”
Sam and Melvin immediately stopped laughing, while they turned to look at Lee.
And Lee could not help but drop his scowl, as he crack a grin at Sam and Melvin's reaction to his suggestion.
Lee thought, with amusement, 'Now, the shoe is on the other foot.'
Though, to everyone's surprised, Sam calmly said, “Okay. I willing to be judge.”
Melvin thought, 'Okay. I admit it. I should not have laughed at Lee's unfortunate situation. Still, I am not going to score these lunatics in any way. But, I cannot turn Lee down... Ah, that should work.'
Melvin looked around the group of adults near him, as he stated, “I won't be a judge. But, I am more then willing to be the announcer. That way, if there is a problem with the sound system, on stage, I am nearby to fix it.”
Rock complimented, “Good idea.”
Lee thought, 'Okay. You have a point there, Melvin. Though, we need a third judge. That is just the classic dynamic to these types of contest. So, they question becomes. Who is crazy enough to judge these lunatics? The Rats Nest bartender knows better... But, how about?... Yea, he might do it, just to stroke his ego, in saying, after the fact, that he did it.'
Lee turned to the five women standing on front of Melvin, Sam, and himself, as he stated, “I believe I know where I can find a third judge. Because, we are going to need three judges, to help prevent a tie.”
Revy said, “Then, I will leave that to you.”
Rock stated, “Now, to the important parts. The rules, and how the contest will be structured.”
Revy looked at her family, as she said, “I am open to suggestions. Do any of you, have any ideas on the rules?”
Benny replied, “Good question.”
Dutch said, “I am not sure myself.”
Janet commented, “Now, that I think about it. Neither do I.”
By then, Lee was able to take back hold of his poker face. Though, on the inside, Lee thought, with mild sarcasm, mixed with seriousness, 'Great. They want a contest between violent, lunatic women, and they don't even have an idea on how to go about it. If I say something, I tip my hand slightly to being the writer. But, if I say nothing. I will be leaving them to set up the rules. And if they are playing by their rules, this hotel might not survive this contest. Let alone the people inside it. Including, myself, Sam, and Melvin.'
Lee mentally grumbled, 'The things I do for people.'
Lee faked a cough.
The women, along with Sam and Melvin turned to him.
Lee said, “I have some suggestions. If you are open to them?”
Revy replied, “Sure.”
Lee explained, “It would likely be best to keep this simple. A one time walk onto the stage for each woman. Also, there is the karaoke machine on the stage. The women can choose between a performing a talent, or just singing a song.”
“At the same time, the women can wear something nice. It does not have to be a fancy dress. Just something that looks nice. Especially, given it is likely a few of you know acrobatics and dancing. And a skirt does not really work that well for acrobatics. Also, there should be two rules while performing. No weapons. And no violence.”
Revy commented, “That sounds reasonable.”
Janet thought, 'That sounds like something similar to what the writer wrote for the bikini contest. Though, that contest was fun to both be in and read. Still, Revy is right. Those are reasonable suggestions.'
Revy said, “Now, we just need to figure out the time.”
Melvin thought, 'Lee needs back up on this.' He turned to the five women, as he said, “How about tomorrow evening, at seven? That will give you plenty of time to prepare.”
Revy stated, “Yes. That is a good time.”
Lee thought, 'Now, for the icing on the cake. To prevent future repercussions from this contest.'
Lee mentioned, “And remember, ladies. This is all for fun. So, no hard feelings, after the contest is over.”
Rock thought, 'Lee, I see you are also covering your ass. And protecting your friends, as well. That is a nice move on your part.'
Rock said, “I will make sure the others get the message. And we will have no problems on that end.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “I can live with that.” She thought, 'After all. We are only paying for some beer, and bragging rights.'
Lee warned, “Good. And if any of you try to approach us before, or during the contest, to alter your scores, or someone else's score, you will be disqualified.”
Benny said, “That is fully understandable.”
Lee stated, “Good. Now, I need to talk to the judges, in private. See you tomorrow night.”
Rock said, “See you there.”
Then, four of Lagoon parents turned to walk away, and return to their tables, so they could begin their plans for tomorrow evening. Though, Dutch stayed behind, as she took a hard look at Melvin.
Melvin noticed Dutch looking at him. He remained cool, as he thought, 'Damn. I think Dutch may remember me. Why did those three have to show up?'
Dutch asked, “Have we met before?”
Melvin lied, “No ma'am. I believe I would remember meeting you.”
Dutch just shrugged. She then turned around, and headed back to join her family.
The three men then turned to look at each other.
Given both Lee and Melvin knew of the sharp hearing of many of the women, Sam was the first to speak, “So, what do we do?”
Lee answered, “Simple. We do this fairly. We judge fairly. And we keep things calm.”
Melvin said, “That is a good plan.”
Sam stated, “I agree. So, who do you have in mind for the third judge?”
Lee grinned, as he said, “I would prefer that to remain a surprise.” He mentally added, 'Because I am not yet sure that he is going to say, yes.'
(_)
Nearby, as Dutch had overheard what Lee had said, when she left the three men. Dutch then made it back to her table. She sat back down in the chairs, at the table that she, Benny, Janet, Revy, and Rock had previously occupied, before they went to talk to Lee. With the four other women already sitting in their seats.
Dutch looked over at the four other adults, as she smiled. She thought, 'Lee still wants to do this fair. That is nice of him, considering the grief we put him through today. Maybe he is not the writer.'
Dutch continued to look around the table, as she asked, “Did any of you just overhear what Lee said?”
Revy said, “Yea.”
Rock said, “Yes.”
Benny commented, “That is nice of him to still want to do things fair.”
Janet stated, “Perhaps we misjudged him.”
Dutch replied, “Perhaps we did.”
The five adults talked to each other, and their family and friends nearby. With them enjoying some karaoke, as well. While they informed the others of the details to the contest.
(_)
A little while later, it was just after seven PM, that evening, Lee had finally made it to the Last Resort Diner. Given the interest that the Lagoon family had suddenly taken in him, Lee took a long way around to get to the diner, to make sure he was not followed. Which he wasn't.
Given Lee's experiences in the time loop. He had long sent learned how to spot someone tailing him. And he had used some skills, when he felt he needed too.
After Lee parked his pink car, he walked inside, and he saw Pedro also sitting at their booth in the back right of the diner. Pedro was facing in the entrance to the diner. He was having a glass of ice and water.
Lee also noticed that Pedro was calmly looking at him. Though, Lee did not visually response to Pedro's calm gaze.
As Lee passed by Mary. He came to a stop, as turned to the women. He requested, “Hi Mary. I will just have a sweet tea tonight.”
Mary stopped, as she looked over at Lee. She said, “Coming right up, Lee.” She then turned, and went to get Lee a glass of iced sweet tea.
As this went on, Lee turned to Pedro, and he started back to walking towards the police chief of the city.
After Lee sat down in the booth, across from Pedro, he calmly said, “I sincerely apologize for standing you up last night. But, there was no choose. I had to hide in my room, and Sam was with me, so I could not call you, without him knowing we were working together.”
Pedro asked, whom spoke in a tone of voice that was more out of curiosity, than annoyance, “Considering the people you deal with on a daily basis, what could make you run and hide for the night?”
Lee answered, “Dutch, Benny, and Janet showed up, yesterday evening. In the front lobby, just as Sam and I had returned from the Rats Nest, with my car.”
Pedro agreed, in a straightforward tone of voice, “That is a good reason.”
Lee stated, “Luckily, while Sam and I were still in the parking lot, I saw them through the windows, as they had their reunion with their family. And they did not see me, nor Sam. I then convinces Sam to change our plans for the evening. And he then followed me around back of the hotel. We took the back elevators to my suite. And we ate in my room. With Sam then soon retiring to his own room for the night.”
Pedro said, “Okay. That wasn't too bad.”
Lee responded, “I know. Unfortunately, given my luck. Things got worse today. The three of them confronted me at lunch. They already suspect I was the writer. But, I was able to throw them off my scent... For now.”
Pedro inquired, “That is good. But, I have a feeling that is more to your story?”
Lee mentioned, “Yes. There is. At supper, less than an hour ago, I got suckered into judging a talent contest, with their whole crew being the contestants.”
Pedro sternly stated, “If it is a bikini contest, and you are trying recreate your own rendition of what you wrote in book one, I am turning you over to those women, myself.”
Lee swiftly said, “First, it was Revy's idea. Second, I talked them out of having a bikini contest. It is now a talent and singing contest, with no weapons, and no violence.”
Pedro considered what Lee said for a few seconds. He then agreed, “That could work.”
Lee mentioned, “Still, I am knowingly crossing the line twice on this matter. And we need a third judge. Sam is the second judge. And Melvin wisely talked himself out of being a judge, and he is instead the announcer. So, for the third judge, I was thinking of you.”
Pedro sarcastically asked, “And why would I willingly want to put my hand in such a meat grinder?”
Lee explained, “Because, this is the perfect opportunity to introduce yourself to them. I will say, I called the police chief, you, to come judge, because you, as far as they know, are impartial. And it is a good way to prevent things from getting out of hand.”
“If there is a battle, at the contest. We have no way of knowing how things might settle out. They might wreck hotel, but still stay in town. With them scattering, as they find new lodgings around town. At least, at the moment. Except for Eda and Yolanda. We have them all staying in one place. That hotel.”
Pedro replied, “You have a point there. Please, go on.”
Lee thought, 'With pleasure.' Lee went onto say, “For you. The situation will give you a good excuse to get a good, close up, look at these women, and take a measure of each of them, on their character... And body. Without them suspecting a thing. While, at the same time, you can give them good scores, and work on getting into their good graces.”
Pedro conceded, “Hmm... I can see the logic in your madness. Still, if I go, it is likely we are all going to end up dead, by the end of the contest.”
Lee smiled, as he commented, “We are being asked to judge one of the most badass, and sexiest, collections of women in the multiverse. If things go bad, can you think of a more awesome way to go?”
Pedro could not hide his smirk, as he admitted, “No.”
Lee said, “The contest is at seven PM, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar. I will meet you outside the front of the entrance to the Devil's Hotel lobby, at six forty-five PM. If you can make that.”
Pedro replied, “I can make that.”
Lee inquired, “Good. So, how was your day?”
Pedro answered, “Fine for the most part. Though, I am getting rumblings that some group has come into town, whom could cause trouble. Though, I got nothing concrete yet, on who that are.”
Lee politely requested, “That troubles me. Could you please keep me in the loop.”
Pedro asked, “I will. Also, I was wondering. While, I know Janet is hot. I want to know how hot Benny and Dutch are as women?”
Lee stated, “Pretty hot. Like in the Boys and Girls omake, but better. Dutch pulls off her hotness quiet well. And even Benny is sexy. She is not as flat chested as I thought she would be. I think her pregnancy may have added a cup size to each of her breasts. Though, you will find out all this tomorrow.”
Pedro smiled, as he said, “I look forward to it.”
By then, Mary had come to give Lee his glass of sweet, iced tea. She then walked away, to serve her other customers.
Lee and Pedro then continued to have a casual conversation for the next half hour, before they said their goodbyes, paid for their drinks, including their tips, and then left for the evening.
Though, there was a little twilight left in the day, before dark.
(_)
As Lee and Pedro exited the Last Resort Diner, and they entered the parking lot of the diner, they split up, with both of them walking to their cars, and getting into their vehicles.
Pedro then started his car, exited the parking lot. Next, he drove away, down the road, as he headed for him home.
Meanwhile, Lee got into his car and started the engine, he sat there for a few minutes, while he thought about someone. He then said, out loud, “As a courtesy, I have to ask her.”
He then put the car in reverse, to get out of his parking space. He then put the vehicle in drive, and he drove his car to exit the parking lot, as he headed down the road, to his next location.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee parked his car in the Rats Nest parking lot, and he walked into the front entrance of the Rats Nest bar. It was busy at that time of night, but Lee was able to make it to the bar counter, without any serious problems.
As Lee did so, the bartender noticed him. She walked up to him, from behind the counter, as she asked, “What are you doing here so late?”
Lee stated, “At the moment, I am not here to buy anything. There is something you need to know. Revy and the girls decided to have a talent contest tomorrow evening, around seven. And since you are a beautiful woman, well...”
The bartender took the hint, as she said, “No. I am not going. I have no interest in competing with those lunatics. But, thank you for asking.”
Lee responded, “Okay. I just had to inform you. I did not want you to be insulted.”
The bartender commented, “I appreciate your concern for my feelings. I might have been insulted, if you did not at least offered me the invitation. But still, I wish you good luck in how you are caught up in this. Knowing your luck, I am sure they roped you into being one of the judges.”
Lee said, “You know me way too well.”
The bartender let out a laugh. She then stated, “See you later, Lee.”
Lee replied, “You too.”
Lee then headed out of the bar, and for his car. He then noticed that the sun had finally fallen passed the western horizon, and it was dark.
When Lee reached his car, he got into it, and he drove back to the hotel. So, he could go to bed early. Though, he would have go find Sam, and take him to a private location in the hotel, to let Sam know that that he was just too emotionally drained to watch karaoke, or to play poker tonight.
(_)
The next evening, directly outside of the Devil's Hotel.
It was six forty-five PM, and Lee was standing, alone, outside the front entrance to the hotel lobby, under the large awning. There was no one else outside, in the general vicinity with Lee.
Lee was in his usual clothing, blue cloth jacket, baseball cap, and glasses.
Lee looked at his watch. He then look at the road across the parking lot from him, and he saw a car pulled into the parking lot.
Lee immediately recognized it as Pedro personal car.
As Lee continued to watch Pedro drive his car further into the parking lot, as a reasonable speed, Lee thought, with a bit of amusement, 'Good. He is right on time.'
Lee soon saw Pedro had parked his car.
Pedro got out of his car, shut the drive side door, and was walking towards Lee.
As Pedro came closer, Lee saw Pedro looking back at him.
Lee thought, 'You likely saw me when you turned into the parking lot.'
Lee then took a closer look at what Pedro was wearing his white button up shirt, brown tie, brown pants, brown leather belt, black boots, and his brown long coat. Though, he not wearing his hat, nor sunglasses.
Lee thought, 'So, Pedro. You want to humanize your first impression with the women here. That is an intelligent move on your part.'
When Pedro reach him, under the awning, Pedro came to a stop, six feet from Lee.
Lee stated, “Good to have you come.”
Pedro said, in english, “I am glad to be here. As I was coming here, I got to thinking. And I have a question you might be able to answer. Why do all hot women seem to be so damn crazy?”
Lee responded, “I figured it is some sort of cosmic balance thing. Where if the hot women were not crazy, they would be ruling the world. Now, don't get me wrong, some of the crazy one's might try to take over the world. But, there is a big difference between taking over the world, and ruling it.”
Pedro replied, “I guess that makes sense.”
Lee said, “Come on. Let's go inside. We both admit they are crazy. And it is not a good idea to keep crazy people waiting you.”
Pedro stated, “Good point.”
Lee commented, “Anyway, everything has been set up. The girls are in their outfits, in the hotel restaurant, by the stage. Melvin is by the stage, and Sam is sitting at our table.”
Lee thought, 'I even already figured out how I would score them. And I think I struck a good balance, between natural beauty, appearance of clothing, and talent, that the girls will like.'
Pedro replied, “Okay. How are we going to judge this?”
Lee stated, “Score, one through ten. Ten being the best. There is a pen and paper for you to write down your scores. We have the names already printed on sheet of paper. Also, there are laminated boards, with erasable black markers to hold us. The rag by the board is used to wipe off the previous score.”
Lee thought, 'I am so happy that this afternoon, Sam and I checked with Melvin, on this matter. And Melvin handled the supplies for us.'
Pedro inquired, “I understand. So, how did these women decide what order to go in?”
Lee answered, “From what I was told by Violin, they drew random lots from a hat.” He thought, 'And Violin was helpful in information us of their performance order, at lunch, here at the hotel restaurant. From what I understand. The women decided the order from pulling lots from a hat. A bit cliché. But, it works.'
Pedro replied, “Okay. And how many are we judging?”
Lee answered, “Counting Dutch, Benny, Janet, Eda, and Yolanda. Along with the rest of them. The number is twenty-three women.”
Pedro commented, “That is quite a lot of chances for trouble.”
Lee replied, “I agree.”
Pedro asked, “Did anyone else get asked to come to this little insanity waiting to happen?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell him.' He said, “Yes. Given I know her. I did ask the bartender at the Rats Nest, to join the contest. Though, from her response, she clearly knew better, and declined.”
Pedro commented, “Of all the hot women I know, she is probably one of the sanest.”
Lee replied, “That we agree on.”
Pedro said, “I even heard about that dance routine she pulled with some guy in a gray suit, at the hotel here, during the Day of the Dead dance party. I wonder which guy was lucky enough to get her into a dress and go dancing?”
Lee could not help but smirk, in response to Pedro's comment.
Pedro noticed Lee's smirk. He put two and two together, as he accused, “It was you.”
Lee continued to smile, as he said, “Yea. And she is a great woman. Though, we did not sleep together. We did have a great time together that day. Also, except for the bartender, no one else knows that it was me at that dance. So, keep that under your hat.”
Pedro stated, “I will do so.”
Lee dropped his smile, as he mentioned, “Thank you. Also, a reminder. Most of these women have enhance hearing. And not just the ones with the super-soldier serum.”
“Remember, Aeryn is an alien with enhanced senses. And Violin is half alien. And I am sure she has good hearing, as well.
“Also, these women are sharp in many ways. So, do not say any injokes. Say nothing that they might pick up on. On that matter, do not. I repeat, do not state their names. Since you have no been formally introduced to them, you should not know their names. To do so would immediately give us both always. Then, it would be all over.”
Pedro responded, “Those are good points.” He mentally added, 'Damn. When Lee is on the ball. He is on the ball.'
Lee commented, “Though, once this contest is over, you will officially know there names. So, there will be no problem on that matter, after tonight.”
Pedro said, “That is a good point, as well.”
Lee stated, “I know. Also, I almost forget. I know Melvin is your friend. But, along with everyone else, no one knows that we talk to each other a lot. So, pretend that I just asked you at the police station to come.”
Pedro stated, “I see where you are coming from. I remember what you said last night, on the matter. And I will keep that in mind.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
A thought them occurred to Pedro, as he asked, “On a related matter. As crazy as it sounds. Does this situation, we have found ourselves in, for the last few months, feel like a twisted spy thriller to you?”
Lee flatly said, “All the damn time.”
Lee thought, 'Though, with the time loop, it has been more like decades to me.'
Lee commented, “Now, let's get inside.”
Both men then entered the entryway of the lobby. With Lee opening the left door to them, for Pedro.
Pedro stated, “Thanks.”
Pedro then walked into the entryway, with Lee following behind him, while Lee let the door he had open close behind him, by itself.
When Pedro reached the doors from the entryway, to the front lobby, Pedro held the right door open for Lee.
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Lee then walked into the front lobby. Pedro walked into the front lobby, behind Lee, with him letting the door close on its own.
As the entered the lobby together, the lobby speakers changed to the nineteen eighty-six rock song, Tonight, Tonight, Tonight, by Genesis.
But, given the both men were in a hurry. They did not pay attention to the musical change.
Instead, both men turned to their left, as they continued talking towards the hotel restaurant.
(_)
A minute later, both men walked into the hotel restaurant. Lee walked beside Pedro, to Pedro's left side.
As the two men casually walked further into the room, Lee looked around, and he saw a number of things.
First, he saw Revy, Rock, and their crew, wearing nice clothing. The group of contestants, were sitting in the chairs, at the tables, on the other side of the bar, to the left of the stage,. Some of them even had a few instruments, and other things, with them. Either by their side, or on various tables beside him.
Though, Lee saw that none of the women had weapons on them.
Lee thought, 'Good. They took the no weapons rule seriously. That is a good sign for this contests.'
Lee then turned to look at the how the lighting had been set up around the stage. Which was slightly brighter than the rest of the room, but not to bright. Also, the rest of the room lights had dimmed a bit for the contest.
Lee realized, 'The lights must be on dimmer switches. I did not know that. I guess there are some things I missed in the time loop. And I guess the lighting outside of the stage, is twenty-five percent less than normal. Still, plenty of light to see with, but dim enough to get the lighting effect for performances on stage.'
Next, Lee looked in front of the stage, to see a small rectangular table, parallel with the stage. The table was set ten feet back from the stage, with nothing between the stage and the table. There where three cushioned, armless chairs, set in a row, at the table, with the chairs facing the stage, from across the table.
Lee was what was on the table.
Lee thought, 'This is the table for the three judges. Sam, Pedro, and I. With the pens, markers, papers, cloth rags for the marker boards, and other items, we need for the contest. There is even a pitcher of ice water, and four glasses sit out for us. Sam, Pedro, Melvin, and myself. I am sure that Melvin will get thirsty, as he acts at the announcer... Or, more aptly, ring master to this full blown circus.'
Lee then focused on Sam, whom was already seated at the table, to the far left. And even from behind, Lee could see that Sam was wearing his usual clothing.
Behind the judges table, opposite to the stage, was where the rest of the tables and chairs were place at, for the audience. And there was a mix of other customers, whom heard about the contest, and had already arrive, and sat at the tables, while they patiently waited for the contest to begin.
Lee thought, 'From what I heard on the grapevine, from Melvin. Is that the rest of the customers just consider this talent contest to be just a form of dinner entertainment, on a special occasion, to watch. They don't realize how dangerous this situation could be come.'
'And as much as I want to warn them, I cannot. If, or Melvin, warned them, either one of us, would likely ruin the night for the girls, and blow are cover towards them.'
'As such, I hope things turn out alright. Because, if things head south, I am get out of the hotel, as quickly as possible. Until things calm down, by tomorrow morning.'
Lee then noticed, that even though the bar was closed, there were waitresses taking orders from the customers.
Lee thought, 'Given the hotel is hosting them. I cannot hold it against them to make a buck off of this contest.'
Lee then saw Melvin, in a nice tuxedo, approaching them.
Lee thought, while being impressed, 'Damn. Melvin looks good. To bad I cannot break out one of my suits. But, then the girls would recognize me, as they put it, mister dance. And doing so, would raise too many question for me, from them.'
When Melvin reached Lee and Pedro. The three men stopped walking, as they faced each other.
Melvin look over at Lee, then Pedro, then back Lee. He stated, “So, this is the third judge. Nice choice.”
Pedro said, “Hi Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “Hi Pedro.” He then turned to Lee, as he questioned, “Lee, I didn't know you knew Pedro?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. My secretive nature has finally come back to potentially bite me in the ass.'
'I forget to tell Pedro a few things about this situation. Such as, that while I know Pedro and Melvin are friends. And that Pedro knows Melvin was in the Black Lagoon series. I forgot to remind Pedro that Melvin does not know that he knows this.'
'Also, Melvin doesn't know that I know about the Black Lagoon series. And we are surrounded by the girls, with a number of them having enhanced hearing.'
'And while, I do not mind Melvin knowing my connection to Pedro. I don't want the girls to know this. As such, this is a dangerous conversation, no matter how someone looks at it. I have got to change the subject, fast.'
Lee said, “Gentlemen, this is a discussion for another time. And it would be unwise to keep these women waiting.”
Pedro thought, 'Because you know the girls will overhear us. Good thinking, Lee.' Pedro looked at both Lee and Melvin, as he agreed, “Quite right.”
Melvin thought, 'Good point, Lee. The women can overhear us.'
Melvin said, “If you both will come this way, your seats and table are already prepared.”
Melvin then turned around, as the three men headed to the judges table, and the stage.
Half a minute later, Lee sat down in the middle chair of the judged table, with Pedro sitting down in the chair to his right side, and Sam was in the chair to his left side.
Melvin stood on the floor, between the stage, and the judges table, with a wireless microphone in his right hand.
All four glasses at the table, were filled. With one set in front of each of the judges. And the last glass sit on the other side, near Melvin.
Also, the judges had their pens, paper, marker, small marker board, and rags, ready for the contest.
Lee thought, 'Melvin is smart to not to want to share a stage with them. In his place, as the announcer, I would not want be on that stage, either.'
(_)
Nearby, on the left, back side of the room, at their tables, many of the women sitting at the tables, had noticed Pedro. Including, Revy. With Revy being the first to ask, “Who is the new guy with Lee, Sam, and Melvin?”
Yolanda answered, “I do not know.”
Eda said, “Me neither. Though, he has come to the food truck, on occasion. And he was nice to us, and we were nice to him.”
Rock suggested, “Perhaps we should find out, before the contest beginnings.”
Revy said, “Good idea.” She then stood up. She turn towards the direction of the judges table, as she yelled, “Hey! Who is the new guy?!”
Rock groaned, as she quietly said, “In a more dignified fashion.”
There were snickers among their group, from those that heard Rock's comment.
(_)
Meanwhile, across the room, the four men near the stage, overheard Revy's comment. And they turned their attention towards the group of women.
Pedro thought, 'I might as well get this over with.' He got up from his chair and turned to face the ladies.
Pedro firmly stated, in a calm manner, in english, with enough strength in his voice to carry over the room, but not enough to be a yell, “I am Pedro Del Soto, the chief of police for the city of De La Plata Podrido.”
Pedro turned to Lee. He then turned back to look at the women, as he lied, “Lee here, came to me, at the police station, and he asked if I was willing to be the judge for the contest, and to help keep things peaceful. I said, yes. And I consider it an honor to asked to be a judge for this contest.”
Rock thought, with concern, 'He is the police chief of the city.'
Eda muttered, “I am glad I was nice to him.”
Dutch mentioned, “So, Lee knows the police chief.”
Lotton stated, “Also, the first night we were here, Melvin mentioned knowing the police chief, as well. That was after he took Revy's pistols away from her hands, pinned her to the bar counter, and held a combat knife to her left eye, while threatening her life.”
Dutch, Benny, and Janet all looked over at Lotton, with surprised expressions on their faces.
Dutch forced herself to calm down, as she looked back at Rock and Revy, whom were looking at Lotton. She thought, 'I see those two have not told use everything that has gone on, during their stay on this island. I will have to ask them about that, later.' She turned to Lotton, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I would like to heard what Lotton has to say on this matter.
Janet made herself calm down, as she questioned, “And he is still breathing?”
Lotton turned to Janet, as she said, “I will tell you, later. But, the short answer is that there are a lot of badasses in this city, whom would just prefer not to fight.”
Dutch said, “We heard.”
By then, Benny had calmed down, as she commented, “Rock and Revy said the same thing. But, we will get the full story on Melvin, later.”
Lotton replied, “I look forward to telling you.”
Meanwhile, Revy was still standing. The redhead turned to look at Lee, whom was sitting across the room, as he was looking at her.
Revy stated, “Lee, you brought cops here.”
This caused all the women to turn their attention back towards the judges.
Lee continued to look in Revy's direction, as he casually shrugged. He replied, “Just one. To keep things honest.”
Everyone else laughed, as Revy rolled her eyes for a few seconds.
Revy then sat back down in her chair, as she stared at the judges, in silence.
Across the room, Pedro sat back in his chair, as well.
Everyone then turned their attention to Melvin. With them waiting for him to announce the start of the contest.
Just then, a waitress walked up to the judges table, to take their drink order.
With Melvin standing nearby, the waitress asked, “What will you four men have to drink?”
Lee thought, 'They water must be just in case we don't want anything else to drink. And I do need to remind these men of something.'
Lee suggested, “I suggest we stay sober gentlemen, so our judgments are not question.”
Sam said, “I agree.”
Pedro thought, 'Good idea. Also, I don't want to be drunk if things go to hell.' He said, “Good idea, Lee.”
Melvin overheard the three men next to him. Move his microphone away from his face, as he turned to look at the judges. He stated, “The last things we need to do is get drunk in this situation. So, I will take a glass of lemonade.”
Lee said, “I will also have a glass of lemonade.”
Pedro ordered, “Coffee for myself.”
Sam requested, “I will just have the water I already have.”
As the waitress left, Lee then looked at his digital wrist watch, it was seven PM on the dot.
Lee looked over at Melvin, whom was staring back at him.
Lee whispered, “It's time.”
Melvin nodded once in acknowledge to Lee's comment.
Melvin then held the microphone in his right hand, to his mouth, as he tested his microphone. He said, in english, “Testing. Testing.” And he heard the speakers work.
Just then, Pedro realized, in thought, 'Oh hell. Lee never stated how we will score the women. This is a talent show, not a straight out talent contest.'
Pedro turned to Lee, as he whispered, “How are we going to score these contestants?”
Lee thought, with mild annoyance, 'I knew I forget to do something.' He turned to Pedro, as he said, “Don't worry. I have an idea.”
Lee turned to Melvin, as he requested, “Can I borrow you microphone for a few seconds.”
Melvin replied, “Sure.”
Melvin handed Lee his microphone.
With the microphone in his left hand, Lee looked over at the women. He stated, into the microphone, “Okay ladies. Here is how the scoring is going to work. One time walk in, you perform your talent, whatever. Talent counts for fifty percent. Dress is thirty percent. Looks count for twenty percent. Does that work for everyone?”
Lee thought, 'That should keep the less sexy, though no less beautiful women, in the contest, happy. And it keeps things fair.'
Lee looked around him, he saw the ladies all nodding, along with Sam, Pedro, and Melvin.
Lee continued his thoughts, 'I see I was correct.'
(_)
At the table, left of the stage, Sawyer thought, 'Now, that is a fair judgment. That gives those of us, like myself, whom are not the most stacked, a good chance at winning.'
Nearby, Benny and Lotton were sitting near each other. Lotton commented, “Looks like we got a chance in this contest, Benny.”
Benny smiled, as she happily replied, “I agree.”
(_)
Lee then realized something. He looked behind him, and at the crowd. He suspicions were confirmed. He turned back to the women, across the room, to his left, as he stated, into the microphone, “Also ladies, there are a few children in this crowd. So, let us keep this clean.”
Lee could see some mild disappointment in a few of their faces, but they seem to react with understanding.
Lee thought, “Good. They realize what I am asking of them is reasonable. Now, to give this microphone back to Melvin. And we can finally start this circus of insanity.'
Lee then handed the microphone back to Melvin.
Just after Melvin received the microphone in his right hand, the waitress, whom took their orders, came back. She used a tray to bring them their drinks. She then set the drinks on the table, for those whom orders them.
A few seconds later, as the waitress left, Melvin took a sip of his lemonade, with his left hand. As he held his microphone with his right hand. He then sat it down at the corner of the table, across from Pedro.
Melvin then pulled out a small sheet, from his left outside coat side pocket, with his left hand.
He then looked at it. Next, he turned to this audience, as he said, in english, into the microphone, “Ladies and Gentlemen, I present to you tonight's entertainment. Which will be a talent contest between these gorgeous women to my right. I hope you enjoy it. And our first contestant is, Dutch.”
Dutch got up from her seat, as she carried a musical instrument with her.
When Dutch got to the stage, those in front of the stage, including Melvin, the judges, and the crowd, saw she wore a green bikini top, green light cloth, drawstring pants, and green flat sole slippers. Also, she was carrying a guitar.
As Pedro looked at the young, sexy, black women, he thought, 'So, this is Dutch. As a women. She does look nice. And with short brown dreadlocks, and the clothing she has on, that is a simple but nice look for her.
(_)
On stage, Dutch carried her guitar in her right hand, as she walked over to the corner of the stage, by the karaoke machine. She picked up a wireless microphone on it, on top the karaoke machine, and a stand for the microphone, that was by the corner of the stage.
As Dutch walked back to the center of the stage, she thought, 'It is surprising the things one will learn, when rich, to solve one's boredom. Not that I am complaining. I am glad I learned to play the guitar. And I have always liked this song. It somehow speaks to me.'
Dutch set the stand in the front, middle of the stage. She then inserted the microphone in the holder, at the top of the stand. With the microphone facing her.
Dutch then stood, as she got her guitar in position. When she was ready, she stated, “I am not going to use the karaoke machine. Instead, I am just going to play this song completely by myself.”
Dutch stood in place, as she started playing a guitar rendition of the song, Ghost Riders in the Sky, she soon began singing the lyrics, with her feminine voice.
And she sang the, Ghost Riders in the Sky, song, well, on key, and in tune.
After Dutch finished her song, the crowd applauded her. And she smiled in response.
As the applause ended, Dutch looked down at the score boards the judges held up for her. They judges turned the boards around so the audience, could see the scores as well.
Sam used his pen to write the score he made for Dutch, on his piece of paper. He then used his marker on his marker board. He then held up marker board for Dutch to see. He then turned around board around for the audience to see.
Meanwhile, Lee and Pedro used their pens to write down on their papers, Sam's score for Dutch.
Sam gave Dutch a seven.
Sam then lowed his board.
Sam turned to Dutch, as he commented, “Nice song.”
Sam then use his rag to wipe it off.
Pedro wrote down his score on his piece of paper. He then wrote down his score on the marker board. He held up the board, first for Dutch to see. Then, he turned the board, for the audience to see.
Lee and Sam used their pieces of paper to write down Pedro's score.
Pedro also gave Dutch a seven.
Pedro lowered his board. He turned to Dutch, as he said, “I believe you did a good job. Though, not a great job.”
Pedro then used the rag to erase his score form his board.
Lee wrote down the score he would give Dutch. He then wrote down the same score on his marker board. He held up the board. First, for Dutch to see. Then, he turned it around for the audience to see.
Sam and Pedro wrote down Lee's score for Dutch, on their pieces of paper.
Lee gave Dutch an eight.
Lee set his marker board down.
Lee turned to Dutch, as he stated, “You did a fine performance. And set a good standard for the rest of the contest.
Lee then used his rag to wipe off his marker board.
Dutch thought, 'That is a fair, respectable score.' She said, “Thank you.”
She returned the stand where it was, in the corner, with the microphone she had use, still being in the stand. She then left, with the guitar in her right hand.
Melvin looked at the list in his left hand. He then turned to the audience, as he stated, in his microphone, as he said, “Let us thank Dutch for that wonderful performance. A great way to kick off this contest. Our next contestant is Ranma.”
Lee looked over at the tables that we left of the stage, he saw not only Ranma stand up, but also Akira and Natsuru stand up.
Lee thought, 'What is going on?'
Ranma asked, “I was wondering. Since it is not against the rules, could I, along with Akira, and Natsuru, perform together for the same score for each of us, at the same time?”
Lee thought, 'Damn. I did not include a, only one person at a time, in the rules. Let's see what the others think.'
Lee looked at Sam, whom just shrugged.
Lee looked at Pedro, whom said, “It's okay with me.”
Lee then looked at Melvin, whom, “Whatever you want to do?”
Lee turned to Ranma, as he said, “Okay. You are allowed to perform, together. But, you will all get the same score. If you three get the winning score, it will be a tie, and you will just to share the prize. We will not be having any run off contests.” He thought, 'With this crew, that is just asking for trouble.'
Ranma cracked a smile, as she replied, “We can live with that.”
Melvin overheard, as he stated, “The judges have decided to let Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira will perform together, at one time. The redhead is Ranma. The blond is Akira. And the blue haired woman is Natsuru.”
Melvin turned to look at Pedro, whom was looking at the women. Melvin thought, 'Just so you know which one is which, Pedro.'
As the three women walked up on stage, those of the crowd saw that all three women were each wearing sundresses and flat slippers that match their hair colors.
All three walked to over to the karaoke machine. Each picked up a wireless microphone. Natsuru then set the karaoke machine, with all three women swiftly, though gracefully walked together, to the front, middle of the stage.
Ranma was in the center, with Akira to her right, and Natsuru to her left.
The karaoke version of the Fire Incorporated version of the rock song, Nowhere Fast, with Ranma as the main vocal singer. And Akira and Natsuru where the back up vocals.
The three women sang in key, in sync, and in tune with each other, and the music.
Pedro and Lee looked at each other. Pedro silently mouthed, “Streets of Fire movie?”
Lee just shrugged both his shoulders, in an, I don't know, position.
Both men then turned back to watching the trio continued singing.
While everyone in the room watched the performance, Lee thought, 'It figures that Ranma would take lead, considering she has singing skills. The Christmas party OVA, along the endings and openings to the OVAs proved that. In my writings, I just took the next logical step in her skills. Also, Akira, and Natsuru are doing pretty good, as well.'
The three women continued to do a wonderful job of singing the song, Nowhere Fast.
When the three lovers finished singing. The crowd applauded them.
Pedro gave them all an eight. He complimented, “I can tell that you guys worked hard on this. And I admire that.”
Lee gave them all a seven. He said, “Good form and talent. But, I was expecting more from you.”
Sam gave them all a five, as he calmly said, “Sorry. I just was not feeling song. But, when it came to teamwork, all three of you did do a good job.”
The trio silently bowed, returned their microphones where they found them. They then left the stage, so they could go sit back down in their seats.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Okay. That was a fine performance by Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira. Next up is Shenhua.”
Shenhua calming got up, and walked up onto the stage.
Shenhua wore an embroidered, white qipao, which was more elegantly than the red qipao she usually wears. Along with this, she wore flat white slippers, instead of her usual high-heels.
Shenhua looked down at the judges, as she stated, “I am going to perform a Taiwanese folk dance.”
Shenhua then walked over and set the karaoke machine to place some relaxing, Chinese style music.
Shenhua made it back to the center of the stage, and as the music started. She then began dancing.
Her dance was gracefully and fluid.
Her dance lasted close to five minutes. As the music came to an end, she stopped dancing.
She turned to the crowded, and did a simple bow.
The audience clapped at her performance, for a few seconds.
As the applause ended, Shenhua looked at the judges to see their scores.
Pedro silently gave her an eight, as he thought, 'I have no interest on getting on this woman's bad side. Nor, the rest of them for that matter.'
Lee gave her a seven, as he stated, “That was flawless, and graceful, as what I would expect from a lady such as yourself. But, I have seen you when drunk, and you performance just now lacked the passion that I was expecting from you.”
Sam gave her a six, as he said, “Lee is right. You could have done better.”
Shenhua just shrugged. She then turned to her right side, and walked back off stage.
Melvin stated into his microphone, “And our next contestant is, Benny.”
Benny got up, and she walked onto the stage, and over to the karaoke machine.
Everyone saw that Benny was wearing black balloon pants, yellow tennis shoes, and a yellow crop top, with a yellow sports bra underneath. She had her head in her usual ponytail
Lee thought, 'I guess she is going for more talent, than looks. Not that I mind. I wonder what she is about to do.'
A second later, some funk music began, and Benny starting break dancing.
Lee held back a laugh, as he mentally reflected, in thought, 'This I was not expecting. But, I like it.'
Benny then did a number of head spins, flips, and other movements, with flawless ability.
Lee thought, 'I am glad to see Benny make used of her enhanced physical abilities, from that super-soldier serum I gave her.'
When the music came to a stop, she immediately jumped back to her feet, with her facing the judges, and the crowd.
Benny smiled, as the crowd applauded her.
Lee gave her an eight. He stated, “Good job.”
Sam gave her a six. He said, “You movements are flawless. But, it is clear that you have no done them in a while. Also, you needed to better organize your movements.
Pedro gave her a six, as well. He commented, “Sam is right. You got the skills. You just need more practice.”
Benny did not respond. Instead, she turned and walked off stage.
(_)
When Benny got back to her seat, she sat down in his chair.
Nearby, Violin turned to Benny, as she asked, “Where did you learn to do that?”
Benny looked over at Violin, as she answered, “I was in college during the eighties. I did some break dancing, as a hobby with my friends. And Sam and the Police Chief, are right. I should have practiced and organized my moves better.”
Violin said, “Well, that just means there is room for improvement.”
Benny replied, “Thank you.”
(_)
Meanwhile, in front of the stage, Melvin stated, “Next up is Kristina.”
Kristina got up from her chair, and walked up onto stage.
In her right hand Kristina was holding a harmonic.
While Kristina went to get the stand with the microphone, the judges saw she was wearing a tanned long skirt, with a tanned long sleeved blouse, with tanned slippers. The clothing looked like a woman's style from the seventies. The tanned color clothing was lighter than her skin tone, but darker than her brown dreadlocks, which were pulled back into a ponytail. With the tanned color going well with both her skin tone and hair color.
Lee thought, 'Most people don't realize that, in this day and age, beauty does not have to show off a lot of skin. One can present oneself as beautiful, while maintaining modesty. I guess this modest trait is a carryover from when she was Claude, in her previous life.'
As soon as Kristina brought the stand to the middle, front of the stage, she starting playing her harmonic. While she stood in place, she played a piece of blues music. It was sad, but beautiful.
When Kristina was finished, the audience clapped.
Kristina looking down at the judges.
Sam gave her an eight. He complimented, “That music has soul to it.”
Pedro gave her a second. He stated, “I could feel the music.”
Lee gave her a six. Lee said, “You have skill. I hope to listen to your music sometime in the future. But, you need just stood there. Sam is right. You have soul in that music. And Pedro is right. I could feel the music. But, the blues is also about body, as well as soul. And you lacked movement. That cost you points.”
Kristina was silent for a few seconds. She then shrugged, as she agreed, “You right. I was so focused on playing that I forget to move with the beat.”
Kristina then picked up the stand, one handed, returned it to its place, and walked off the stage.
Melvin looked at his sheet of paper. He then stated, “Well, ladies and gentlemen, next up is Nodoka.”
Nodoka stood up from her seat. She turned to the judges, as she stated, “I have a request. I talked it over with my friends here. And we would like it if I, and my two sisters, can go one after another. Our talents would be best showed back to back.”
Lee stated, “Since you girls picked the order, that will be fine with us. But, this performance will not scored differently. You will each be judged solely by your own performance.”
Nodoka said, “Thank you. That will be fine. I will go first. The Mikoto, then Yurika.” She then walked up stage, and picked up a microphone.
Everyone saw that Nodoka was dressed in denim shorts, t-shirts, with a sports bra underneath, and tennis shoes. All of her clothing matched her purple hair.
Meanwhile, Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Well, it looks like there will be a slight schedule change. We are going to have three sisters coming onto the stage. One after another. First, Nodoka. Then, Mikoto. And finally, Yurika.”
Melvin then set his microphone on the table. Next, he pulled out a pin, and marked off Mikoto and Yurika from the list. So, he would not accidentally call their names later. After which, Melvin put away his pen, and picked up his microphone with his right hand.
(_)
After Nodoka walked back to the center of the stage to with the microphone, she stated, “My sisters and I have decided to show off some of our martial arts abilities, as our talent. And to keep things from becoming boring. Each of us will show a different style of martial arts. Though, we are masters of all three styles that are about to be shown to you. Please enjoy.”
Nodoka walked over and returned to microphone back by the kerokeo machine. Nodoka then walked to the back to the end of the stage, by the wall, in the middle of the stage, with her facing the audience.
Nodoka took a few deep breaths, and then let them out. One after another. She then started her kata. Which consisted of doing lots of acrobatics, flips, mid-air kicks, and butterfly kicks. And she always either landed on her feet, or her hands, while displaying much grace and skill in her performance.
After a few minutes she stopped her kata, and turned to face the crowd.
The crowd applauded her.
Nodoka then looked down at the judges, for her score.
Sam gave her a nine.
Pedro gave her a seven.
Lee gave her an eight. He said, “That was petty good. I looking forward to seeing what your sisters can do.”
Nodoka smiled. She then left the stage.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Next up is, Mikoto.”
Mikoto same on stage, she wore the same clothing at her sister, Nodoka, wore. Except her clothing was blue, with a few black stripes mixed in, to match her mixed hair color.
Mikoto perform a slow, graceful kata, that was mixed with swift, fluid movements, as she moved across the stage.
When Mikoto finished a few minutes after she began, the audience clapped for a few seconds.
Afterward, Mikoto look down at the judges.
Pedro gave her an eight. He stated, “It is nice when someone respects the basics.”
Lee gave an eight as well. He said, “I am sure that took as much practice to master, as the acrobatics your sister just pulled off. You earned this eight.”
Sam gave her a six. He commented, “I apologize. But, I honestly found the performance to tame for my tastes.”
Mikoto did not respond, as she turned and walked off stage.
Melvin then announced, into his microphone, “Next up, we have Yurika.”
Yurika then walked on stage. Those watching saw that she wore the same style of clothing as her two sisters, except her clothing was green, to match her hair color.
When she made it to the center of the stage, Yurika began her kata. Everyone could see that Yurika's kata was much more aggressive than the katas her two sisters had just performed.
While Nodoka's kata was aerial in nature. And Mikoto's kata was direct in nature. Yurika's kata was focused on lower level combat, as moving around.
Lee could see that Yurika's kata was likely of the same family of the fighting arts as capoeira. With her use of handstands, while kicks, while at the same time focusing on low sweeping kicks, somersaults, flips, side roles and a few cartwheels. This was mixed with leg sweeps, hand strikes. With most of these attacks designed to hit below the waist, and mostly attack the legs.
Lee thought, 'This looks like it is inspired by capoeira. I wonder if Fabiola had a hand in teaching these sisters some of the moves they just displayed for us. Especially, the moves I am seeing Yurika is performing, now. And she is good at it.'
As Yurika continued her kata, everyone could see that her movements were far better organized, and choreographed than Benny's break dancing.
Also, Yurika never lost her balance, nor fell on the floor.
A few minutes later, Yurika came to a slow stop, with her ending with standing on her feet, while she faced the audience.
The audience applauded her for a few more seconds than either of her two sisters got.
As the crowd quieted down, Yurika looked at the judges.
Pedro gave her a seven. He stated, “You, and your two sisters, performed marvelously. And Nodoka was right. It was better for you three to perform, back to back, in that order.”
Yurika responded, “Thank you for letting us do so.”
Pedro replied, “Thank, Lee.”
Yurika turned to Lee, and she saw that he had give her a seven. He said, “Pedro is correct. You three did a great job. And you're welcome.”
Yurika looked over to see Sam gave her a nine. Sam stated, “Your performance proves how proper organization of movements can bring out a good performance. Good job.”
Yurika smiled at all three judges. She then turned and left the stage.
Melvin said, into his microphone, “Our next performer is, Rock.”
Rock walked up on stage, picked up microphone, set the karaoke machine, and walked to the center of the stage.
As the music started, and Rock starting singing the lyrics.
Lee recognized the song as the karaoke version of David Bowie's China Girl.
But, instead of Rock facing the judges and the crowd, shed face her friends. And she was doing a great job of singing the song.
Revy could see that Rock was looking directly at her.
Revy just giggled, at Rock's romantic gesture.
Revy thought, 'It is not every day that someone blows a performance for me. I will have to thank Rock for doing this for me. Tonight, when we got to bed. And I just know how to do it.'
Meanwhile, on stage, as Rock sang, she thought, 'There is no way I am winning this contest. So, I am just going use this opportunity to win points in bed tonight with Revy.'
As the music ended, and Rock finished the song, she turned to the judges, and the crowd.
The crowd clapped, for a few seconds.
Lee gave Rock a six. He firmly said, “We both know who that was for. And I am giving this score for doing such a marvelous job. If you had been singing for us and the crowd, it would have been higher score.”
Pedro also gave Rock a seven. He thought, 'So, this is Rock. The breast reduction in book three did help her over all figure. And she is hot. Still, she was not performing to win, but for romance towards Revy. Too bad I don't officially know they are a couple. Or, I would compliment Rock for her romantic gesture. Still, it is a kind gesture.'
Pedro said, “Good performance. I feel whomever you directed that too will be very happy tonight.”
Rock responded, “That is what I am hoping for.”
Sam gave Rock an eight. He said, “I am a sucker for romantics.”
Rock smiled at the judges, as she thought, 'I got a better score than I was expecting. And I wasn't even trying to win. Nice.'
Rock then turned and walked off stage.
When Rock reached her table, and sat down in her chair, by Revy, Revy turned to her, as she said, “Nice performance. And I promise to give you a performance in bed to night.”
Rock turned to her lover, as she replied, “Thanks, Revy.”
In front of the stage, while facing the judges, and the crowd, Melvin stated, “Our next contestant is, Yolanda.” He mentally added, 'I wonder what we will see her do. That woman was always cagey in Roanapur. Even Balalaika could not figure her out.'
Yolanda got up from her seat, and she walked on stage, to the microphone and karaoke machine.
As Yolanda walked across the stage, everyone saw that Yolanda wore a flattering black dress that looking more like it fit in the nineteen forties. But, she pulled it off well.
After Yolanda walked back to the front of the stage, while facing the crowd, she calmly said, into her microphone, “They say guilt pleasures come in many ways. But, I found this song actually speaks to me.”
The music then start. And Yolanda started singing in spanish, to the lyrics.
Lee recognized the song as being the spanish version of the Ricky Martin song, Livin' the Crazy Life, which was Livin' la Vida Loca.
Lee thought, 'Okay. Her song selection is a bit of a surprise. Though, Yolanda is doing a great job. And given her life, I can see why she feels that particular song speaks to her.'
'And given her skills, and that she had the latin American, Rico, working for her, it is no surprise that she knows spanish, very well. It is too bad I cannot compliment her for her spanish language skills. Given I don't want anyone to know that I can speak spanish.'
Yolanda swayed her body back at forth, with the music as she did a great job singing the song she had chosen to perform.
When Yolanda finished the song, the crowd applauded.
Yolanda still turned to the judges.
Pedro gave her an eight. He complimented, “Your spanish is flawless. And we like to see the use of multiple talents at once. And you did that by using your talents in both your language skills, and singing skills. Also, you swayed with the beat.”
Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “This is what we are looking for. Passion, and talent, in a performance.”
Sam gave her an eight. He commented, “I am with them on this. You did a good job.”
Yolanda smiled at them, as she said, in english, “Thank you.” She then turned to her side, and returned the microphone to it's place.
Yolanda walked off the stage, as she happily thought, 'I still got it.'
Melvin announced, into his microphone, “Next is, Sarah.
Sarah came on stage. Everyone saw that she wore a simple yellow kimono, which matched her blond hair. The kimono, she wore a black sash, and wooden saddles,
Sarah then began silently performing the internal chinese martial art of Qigong
As Lee looked at this, with mild amusement, he thought, 'A modern samurai, reincarnate as the child of a hindi Indian and caucasian American jew, practicing the chinese martial art of Qigong.'
'I can understand why she would know this style. This martial art is all about learning to master ones attention, and personal energy, in direct, fluidic ways. Which is probably very useful in learning how to safely cut bullets in half, in mid-flight, with her katana.'
A few minutes later, Sarah finished her performance.
There were a few claps from the crowd, but not many.
Sarah turned to the judges.
Lee gave her a seven. He said, “That was... Interesting. And I feel you did a good job.”
Sam gave Sarah a seven as well, while he remained silent.
Pedro gave her a six. He commented, “I wanted to like your performance. I really did. But, I just could not bring myself to do so.”
Sarah just shrugged. She then walked off stage.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “The next contestant is, Yukio.'
Yukio were a yellow long skirt, a yellow midriff shirt, with yellow flat soled slippers.
Yukio retrieved a microphone, set the karaoke machine, and walked to the center of the stage.
As the music started playing, she singing the karaoke version of the song, Why can't we be friends, by the band, War.
And she did a find job doing so, as she swayed with the beat.
After the song ended, there was a moderate amount clapping from the crowd.
As the clapping ended, Yukio turned to the judges.
Lee asked, “Did you do this song on a dare?”
Yukio sheepishly admitted, “Yea.” She mentally added, 'At least I got five dollars out of this, from the bet I made with Rebecca.'
Lee said, “Well, you did a good job.” He then held up his score card, which had a seven on it.
Yukio smiled, as she replied, “Thank you.”
She looked over at Sam and Pedro's score cards. Both silently held up a seven score on their marker boards.
Yukio returned the microphone to where she found it. She then left the stage.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Next up, is Molly.”
As Molly walked on stage, everyone saw she wore a short black shirt, a yellow short sleeved button up blouse, and black flat soled slippers. The outfit went well with her blond hair.
After retrieving a wireless microphone, setting the karaoke machine, and walk back to the stage, Molly look out among the crowd, as she thought, 'While stroking one's ego is fun. At least one of us should still be focusing on catching the writer. This might actually flush him out.'
Molly stated, into the microphone, “I found out about this song, from reading a story. It is one of my favorite song. And I hope you enjoy it.”
As the first few cords started playing, Lee realized what Molly meant, and what she was trying to do. He maintain a calm expression, as he thought, 'Now, that is nice try to flush me out, Molly. But, it won't work.'
To Lee's right, Pedro remained calm as well, as he thought, 'So, this is Molly. She is clearly very intelligent, by trying to use this song to flush
Molly then started singing the lyrics to karaoke version of the song, Bad Company, by the band, using the version performed by Five Finger Death Punch.
Molly sung the song well, and as she did so, she looked around the crowd, and the judges for any signs that one among them was the writer. But, no one was taking the bait.
As finished the song, with the music ending, she thought, 'Oh well. It was worth a try. I wonder what my scores will be.'
The audience clapped for a few seconds.
Molly looked at the judges, to see their scores.
Lee gave her a seven. He casually commented, “Nice song.” He thought, 'And nice try, baiting me. But, something that simple is not going to work on me.'
Pedro gave her eight. He complimented, “You nailed the song.”
Sam silently gave her a seven.
Molly then returned her microphone to the corner, and she then left the stage.
As Molly exited the stage, and returned to her friends, Molly saw her mother, Janet looking at her, while smiling. With Molly walked close to her mother, Janet complimented her, “Nice try, honey.”
Molly just smiled towards Janet, as she returned to her chair.
Melvin said, into his microphone, “The next contestant is, Violin.”
While Violin walked onto the stage, the crowd saw that she was carrying a flute in her right hand.
Violin wore a dark blue long skirt, which matched her hair color. She also wore a white, short sleeved blouse, and white flat soled slippers.
She walked over, and picked up the stand from the corner, with the microphone attached to it. She then head to the center of the stage.
After placing the stand in front of her, she held the flute to her mouth. She pleasantly thought, 'I am so happy that my parents, in my second childhood, had me take music lessons. And since I remember my past life, I now understand why I like this song so much. Besides, I am sure Lee will appreciate it.'
Violin then began playing a song by flute, while occasionally marching in place.
Lee muttered, “I don't believe she is playing that.”
Pedro just snorted, as he held back a chuckle. He thought, 'Not bad, Violin.'
Sam turned to Lee, as he softly asked, “What is she playing?”
Lees turned to Sam, as he whispered one word, “Dixie.”
Lee and Sam then turned back to the stage, to watch Violin's performance.
Violin rendition of Dixie by flute, was flawless. She did not miss a note, nor beat, in neither her flute performance, nor steps.
A few minutes later, a Violin was finished playing, Dixie, the crowd clapped for a several seconds.
Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “You know me to well, Violin.”
Lee thought, 'But, only Harvey knows I am the writer. And he clearly has not told you. Because, I am still feel. And this ten will help continue his silence on my behalf. Because, you earned this nine.'
Lee continued, “And that was an excellent rendition of Dixie. You earned this ten.”
Pedro continued looking at Violin, as he thought, 'Lee is probably joking. I hope.'
In response, Violin smiled. But, inside her head, Harvey was laughing.
Violin mentally asked, in a calm manner, 'What is so funny?'
Harvey mentally responded, 'I was just thinking about Lee's comment, and your cultural connections with him.'
Violin mentally conceded, 'Yes. We got a few.'
Pedro gave her a seven, as he said, “You're flute work was good. And your steps were good. But, I feel you could have done better.”
Sam gave Violin a six, as he stated, “Pedro is correct. While you flute skills are flawless, I am sure you could have done better.”
Violin conceded, “You both might be right.” She then returned the stand where she found it, and left the stage.
Melvin stated, “Next up is Revy.”
Revy came onto the stage. As she walked to to the karaoke machine, everyone saw that she was walking barefoot, while wearing a red bikini bottom, with a matching red tank top, with a red sports bra underneath. All the red clothing matched her dark red hair.
While Pedro looked at Revy, he thought, 'So, this is Revy. Given she much smaller than me, I might actually underestimate her, if I did not know better. But, I do know better. And like the rest of the women in this contest, I do not want to get on her bad side. And from the looking of her clothing, it appears that she is going to do something athletic. I look forward to finding out what it is.'
A few seconds after Revy made it back to the center stage, some pleasant techno music that had a fast beat to it, but light on the bass, began playing.
Revy displayed her gymnastics skills, with several flips, back flips, cartwheels, and somersaults. All the while, she never lost her footing, as she showed intense passion in her actions.
As the music stopped, Revy finished her routine by landing on her feet, while facing the audience. The audience applauded her for several seconds.
As the audience quieted down, Revy looked down at the judges.
Lee gave Revy a nine. He stated, “Revy, I feel that you put your all into that. You earned this nine.”
Revy smile at Lee's comment, and the score he gave her. She thought, 'I appreciate that he realizes the effort that went into that.'
Revy then saw that Sam gave her a seven. He said, “I disagree with my friend, Lee here. Like Benny, you have the talent, but you did not coordinate your moves in the proper order. You could have done better.”
Revy did not respond to Sam's comments.
Revy turned to Pedro, to see that he gave her an eight. He commented, “I was happy with what I saw.”
Pedro thought, 'And it is a fair score, like all the others I have given. I am not going to get on their sides, by either giving them a low score, or giving them to high a score, that will upset the other women in the contest.'
Revy thought, 'Oh well. All in all, this is a fair score.'
Revy turned to her right, and walked off stage.
A moment later, Melvin announced, “Our next contestant is, Aeryn.”
Aeryn walked on stage, while displaying graced in her stride. Everyone saw that she was wearing a black evening gown, with black soled slippers.
She retrieved a microphone, set the karaoke machine, and walked to the center stage.
But, as the music started, just like Rock, Aeryn faced her friends. She looked over at Violin, as she began singing the Pet Shop Boys version of David Bowie's song, Hallo Spaceboy.
Violin looked back at Aeryn, as she looked back at her wife.
Violin giggled at Aeryn's romantic gesture.
Aeryn did a good job, but it was not a great performance.
As the music ended, there was clapping from the crowd for a few seconds, then silence.
Aeryn looked over at the judges.
Lee gave her a seven. He stated, “Like Rock, you have interesting flirting skills.”
Aeryn giggled in response.
Pedro gave her a seven as well, while he remained silent.
Sam gave Aeryn a six. He said, “I am sorely disappointed in you, Aeryn. I was expecting so much more.”
Aeryn remained silent, as she returned the microphone from where she found it, and the walked off stage.
Aeryn soon reached her table, where Violin was sitting by her open chair.
After she sat down, she turned to Violin, as she smile wickedly. She said, “I believe that Rock has the right idea. And I expect to have a return tonight for that performance.”
Violin was looking back at Aeryn, as she returned her wife's smile. She replied, “Oh, you shall have that Aeryn. That and more.”
Aeryn giggled, as she continued to smile wickedly.
Melvin then announced, “Next up is, Sawyer.”
As Sawyer walked on stage everyone saw that she was wearing a white evening gown, and a pair of white, flat soled slippers. Which was in stark contrast to her usual purple and black goth clothing.
Lee thought, 'Sawyer wearing that is a statement in of itself. What is she planning to do?'
Sawyer walked over the karaoke machine, and set the song she wanted to sing. She then walked back to the center of the stage, with a microphone in her hands.
A few seconds later, the music started, and Frederica Sawyer. began singing, the classic version of Amazing Grace. And she was doing a near perfect rendition of the song, as she displayed her restored voice, and the voice talents she learned. She also swayed her body to the beat of the music.
Lee thought, 'She is good. I am so happy I fixed her voice, and gave her singing skills. Having done so might someday save my hide from the business end of her chainsaw.'
Meanwhile, Pedro thought, 'How the hell can the career woman of chainsaw wielding maniacs have the voice of an angel?... Oh yea. Lee, and his clear insanity. Still, it is wrong on so many levels. Though, I am not here to judge the morality of her previous actions. But instead, I am judging her current talents. And her singing is incredible.'
Sam was moved to tears, as he watched Sawyer's performance.
As the song ended, the audience gave her a standing ovation for several seconds.
While the audience calmed down, Sawyer looked at the judges.
Lee held up a nine, as he stated, “Flawless. Absolutely, flawless.”
Pedro held up a nine. He said, “If you ever want to sing professionally, please let me know. I will buy a ticket to see you perform.”
Sam held up a nine. He commented, “I feel that if you swayed a little more with the song, you would have likely gotten tens from all of us. Other than that, your preference was perfect.'
Sawyer grinned ear to ear, with a genuine, none sadist, happy smile. She walked over to returned her microphone, at where she found it.
As Sawyer left the stage, she thought, 'I have to thank the writer for this wonderful voice, and singing talent. On another matter, I will be nice to Lee, because the way Lee figured up the scoring has given me a real chance to win this contest. That score is going to be hard to beat. I will either be in first place, or a very close second.'
A few seconds later, Sawyer turned to her seat, at a table, by her friends.
Meanwhile, Melvin looked at his list of contestants in his left hand.
Melvin thought, 'There is not many contestants left. We might still get out of this mess, alive, and intact. Though, could use a bit of refreshment.'
Melvin pocket the piece of paper with the list on it. Next, he walked to the table by the judges. He used his left hand to pick up his glass of lemonade. He took a sip of it, to wet his throat. After which, he e gently set his glass back down on the table.
With Melvin's throat now back to no longer being dry, Melvin turned to the audience, as he stated, into the microphone in his right hand, “Our next contestant is, Lotton.”
Lotton got up from her seat, and walked on stage, and everyone saw that she were a white sundress, and white flat soled slippers, both of which matched her white hair color.
After retrieving a microphone, she walked to the center of the stage.
Lotton stated, “For my talent, I am going to recite a poem from memory. The poem is Edgar Allan Poe's, A Dream Within A Dream.”
Lotton then recited the entire poem.
Lee thought, 'I remember reading this poem in the time loop. Though, I don't remember all of it. Still, she is doing a good job of speaking it.'
Lotton finished reciting the poem in just under two minutes.
After Lotton finished, there was a few claps, but not many. She thought, 'Tough crowd.'
Lotton then looked down at judged.
Lee held up a seven. He said, “That was different. But good. And the fact you did this from memory shows you have talent.”
Pedro held up a seven as well. He said, “It is sometimes good to do something different. It changes up things.”
Sam then held up a nine. He commented, “You spoke the stanza and quatrain well.
The meter of your wording was properly time. And you did all this from memory. Though, you did not move around, I think you deserve this nine.”
After Lee wrote down Sam's score on his piece of paper, Lee turned to Sam. He thought, 'So, Sam knows poetry. Interesting. But, that is a question for another time.'
Lee then turned back to look at the stage, as he wait for the next contestant to be announced.
Lotton smiled, as she thought, 'Tough crowd, but nice judges.' She then returned the microphone from where she found it. Next, she calmly walked off stage.
A few seconds later, Lotton reached the table she share with Sawyer, and Shenhua.
As she sat down, Shenhua said, “Given what I know of you, I really shouldn't be surprised by your poetry skills. And it was interesting to listen to.”
Sawyer commented, “Good job.”
Lotton turned to her two lovers, as she said, “Thanks, to the both of you.”
Shenhua and Sawyer smiled, in response to Lotton's comment.
(_)
At that moment, in the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, two individuals walked inside. As they did so, the music in the lobby changed to the song, Don't Let Me Be Misunderstood, played by Santa Esmeralda, from the soundtrack of the Kill Bill Volume One movie.
The two individuals walked up to the front desk.
One of them asked the clerks, in english, “Which way to the hotel restaurant?”
One of the clerk answered, in english, “Go to the left hallway. The door to the restaurant is just inside the hallway, to you right, on the far wall. You cannot miss it.”
The person, whom asked the question, replied, “Thank you.”
The two individuals then turned to their left, as they headed for the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar.
(_)
Meanwhile, inside the restaurant, on stage, Melvin announced, “Next up, is Janet.”
Janet walked out onto the stage, wearing a nice yellow short skirt, and midriff shirt. As she did so, everyone saw that she carried a clipboard, with a few pieces of paper, and a pencil on it.
When she got to the center stage, she looking down at the judges. She said, “For my talent, I would like to draw you three. It will only take a few minutes. Though, I do need to not move for a few minutes.”
Pedro replied, “Okay.”
Lee said, with honest curiosity, “I would like to see what you can do.”
Sam stated, “Let us see what you can do.”
The three judges then relaxed, as they remained still, for the artist in front of them.
Janet pulled out the pencil from the clip board, and she swiftly began to draw.
Roughly three minutes later, she finished her drawing, as she placed her pencil back on her clip board.
Janet stated, “I am done.”
While there was no real applause, that didn't matter to Janet. It was the judges scores that mattered to her.
Meanwhile, the three judges relaxed, and stretched a little bit, while still in their seats.
Janet requested, “Melvin, could you pass this to the judges.” She then lean over and handed Melvin the clipboard.
Melvin took the clipboard in his left hand. He then handed the clipboard to Pedro.
The judges passed the clipboard around, as they saw the picture Janet drew of the three of them.
The picture was a good, hand drawn, lifelike representation of the three of them.
Sam then handed the clipboard back to Melvin, whom handed the clipboard back to Janet.
After Janet took the clipboard, she leaned back up, while she still looked back down at the judges.
A few seconds later, Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “Your speed and skill are impressive.” He thought, with mild delight, 'From counterfeiter to artist. That is a nice change of hobbies.'
Pedro gave her an eight. He said, “I am with Lee on this. Your skills with a piece of paper are impressive.”
Lee continued looking at Janet, while having a pleasant expression on his face. But, inwardly he frowned, a he thought, 'Pedro. I hope you did not just drop an injoke over Janet's counterfeiting skills. Still, if I look at Pedro, or change my expression, that will tip Janet off that I am the writer.'
Janet look at Pedro for a few seconds. She thought, 'Did he just make a subtle comment on my counterfeiting skills?... Nah.'
Sam gave then Janet an eight. He commented, “I am with these two, on this. You have real skill as an artist. I hope to see some more of your artistic works in the future.”
Janet grinned, as she said, “Thank you. All of you.”
While Janet walked off stage, with her items in her hands, she thought, 'I may not win. But, that was an impressive score.'
Just as Melvin was about to announce the next contestant, everyone heard a female voice yell, in english, from the entrance of the hotel restaurant, opposite to the stage, “Is this contest open to all hot women?!”
All eyes turned to look at where the voice came from.
As Melvin, Lee, and Pedro, turned to look at who it was, they remained calm, while they recognized not one, but two women they knew of.
Standing at the entrance was River and beside her, to her right side, leaning against the door frame, was Daiyu. Chang in her female form.
They saw that River had dyed her long, natural brown hair, back to red. With her hair draped loose, down her back. River was wearing red pants, red belt, a white t-shirt, over a red leather jacket, with red cowgirl boots. The boots zipper up from the interior sides of the boots. Also, her clothing match the same color as her long red hair.
Daiyu wore a black cloth pants, black belt, a white short sleeved blouse, and black flat soled slippers. Daiyu's black hair when down to her neck line.
In response to seeing, and recognizing, River, the super-genius telepath, Melvin, Lee, and Pedro, immediately cleared their minds. The three men each knew that to even worry about River being there, would get her attention. So all three kept their minds clear, and they played the situation by ear.
Meanwhile, Sam frowned, as he looked at the two women. A second later, he relaxed his expression.
Sam said, “If you two want to join. That is fine. Just state your names, and if you are going to do a talent, or a song. Then, join with the other women of the group. We will just put you two at the last of the group.”
Daiyu leaned up off the door frame, as she said, in english, “I am Daiyu. I will be singing a song.”
River stated, in english, “I am River. I am doing a talent. And I will be going after Daiyu.”
Sam stated, “Fine. Daiyu will go second to last. And you, River, will go last.”
(_)
Across the room, at the doorway, Daiyu thought, 'What is his problem? Still...' She said, “That works for me.”
River looked at Sam, as she cracked a grin. She stated, “That will be fine.”
Both women then walked across the room, as they joined with the other contestants.
As River and Daiyu made their way over to Revy and Rock's group, Daiyu thought, 'I am happy you suggested we wear these outfits today.'
River quietly said, “You're welcome.”
(_)
Meanwhile, across the room, to the left of the stage, Eda then stood up. She turned to the judges, as she requested, “If you judges don't mind. I would like to remain last in this contest. I want to see what they do, first.”
The three judges, along with the announcer, turned to Eda.
Lee replied, “I think I speak for all the judges, when we say, that is fine with us.”
Eda saw Sam, Pedro, and Melvin all nodded in agree.
Eda said, “Thank you.” She then sat down.
(_)
At the judges table, Sam looked back at Melvin as he stated, “All right. Let's continued this, shall we.”
Melvin nodded, as he stated, into his microphone, “Okay, everyone. Our next contestant is, Rebecca.”
Rebecca then walked on stage.
Everyone saw she wore tasteful red denim shorts, and a red crop top, with a red sports bra underneath. The red clothing matched her hair color. Also, she was barefoot, like Revy had been on stage.
Rebecca then began to show off her natural acrobatic skills, which she inherited from Revy, and whom Revy taught her how to refine her ability and skill.
Though, unlike Revy, Rebecca clearly had a choreographed routine, with flips, back-flips, cartwheels, and somersaults.
Meanwhile, from the corner of his left eye, Lee saw that the women made room for Daiyu and River, by Rock and Revy.
Though, given that River was a telepath, Lee knew he had to keep his mind clear. So, he turned his attention back on the Rebecca, whom was on still performing on stage.
(_)
A few seconds later, the two newcomers sat down in chairs, at a table, left of the stage.
Daiyu and River sat down between Rock and Revy. With Daiyu to Revy's left side. River was to Daiyu's left side. And Rock was to River's left side.
Rock turned to the Daiyu and River, as she softly demanded, “What are you two doing here?”
Daiyu turned to Rock, as she smirked. She said, “Rock, you should know by now that you cannot keep secrets from us.”
Revy turned to Diayu and River. She realized, as she guessed, “We told, Sis. And Balalaika told you about the stories, and our hunt for the writer?”
Daiyu looked over at Revy, as she answered, in a casual tone of voice, “Yes, Revy. The conversation came up while we were having a party at the Lowe family's house. Just her, me, River, B, the Serenity crew, the Lowe family, and the Bebop crew. And girl, we were all interested when we found out about the stories. We just had to do something, so I offered up a plan, and here we are. To see how your search is going, while we look into our own plans.”
Rock asked, “Who else knows? Do the maids, or Garcia, know?”
Daiyu turned to Rock, as she stated, “We have not told them. And given this city is still standing, I am guessing the maids do not know. We do not want to start a war, which is what would happen if the maid knew.”
Rock inquired, “So, what are you planning? You don't sound like you are after the writer.”
Daiyu said, “That is because we are not after the writer. We have other plans for this city. Plans I am more than happy to include you in. Plans that even Balalaika, and everyone else, I have included, have liked. But, that is a conversation for another time, in private.”
Revy stated, “Well, we are more than happy to hear you out, but first we need to find the writer.” She then turned to River, as she continued,“And River here can make the search go real quick. If you tell us who the writer is, River. I am sure he is in this room. The writer could not help himself, but to watch this contest. And once we have him, then we can move onto Chang's plan.”
River looked at Revy, as she smirked. She casually said, “Where is the fun in that, Revy?”
Daiyu stated, “Revy, don't bother trying to get the information from her. When she is like this, it is impossible to get anything from her.”
Revy thought, 'River is one of the few people that can take me in a fight.'
River complimented, “Thank you for your vote of confidence, Revy.”
Revy thought, 'Stop reading my mind, bitch.'
River giggled a little, from Revy's thoughts towards her.
Rock asked, “So, are you staying here, in the hotel?”
Daiyu answered, “No. We are staying at the hotel, on the other side of the island. It is all part of my plans.”
Rock said, “I look forward to hearing your plans, later.”
The women then heard clapping from the crowd, across the room from them.
The women turned their attention back to the stage, to see that Rebecca had finished her performance.
Rock sarcastically thought, with annoyance, 'Great. I missed my daughter's performance, because of these two.'
River said, “Sorry, about that.”
Rock just rolled her eyes, in annoyance, for a few seconds. She then, turned her attention to the judges, as they scored one of her daughters.
(_)
On staged, as Rebecca looked down at the judges, she saw that Lee has given her an eight. He stated, “That was good. And well put together.”
Sam gave her a nine. He said, “I could tell that your moves were properly choreographed. Well done.”
Pedro gave her an eight. He stated, “You have talent. And you earned this eight.”
Rebecca smiled, as she turned, and left the stage.
Melvin pulled out his list, from a coat pocket, with his left hand. He looked at his piece of paper. He saw Eda was the next, and last contestant. But, he then remembered Daiyu and River, and what order all three of them wanted to to in.
Melvin pocketed the piece of paper, as he stated, into his microphone, which was in his right hand, “Next up is, Daiyu.”
Daiyu calmly walked on stage with the commanding presence that those whom know her had come to respect.
After retrieving a microphone, and setting the karaoke machine, she returned to the center of the stage.
As the music started, Daiyu began singing to the karaoke version of Billy Joel's song, We Didn't Start The Fire. And she was doing a great job of it. Along, with this, Daiyu swayed her body with the beat.
To many in at the judges table, along Melvin, Chang ability to not miss, nor mispronounce, a lyric, while keeping in sync with the music, was impressive.
A little over four and a half minutes later, the song ending, and the audience applauded for several seconds.
As the clapping died down, Daiyu looked own at the judges, for their scores.
Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “That song if very difficult to sing. And you sung it well. You impressed me. You deserve this nine.”
Pedro gave her a nine. He commented, “I agree.”
Then, she looked to see that Sam gave her a six, while remaining silent.
Pedro, Lee, and Melvin did not react, nor even think about Sam's score, given the telepath, River, was nearby.
Daiyu's face remained unreadable to the judges, as she turned, and left the stage.
While Daiyu walked off stage, she calmly thought, 'Two out of three is not bad. But, I wonder what it is with that bearded judge, with the ponytail. I guess he just don't like latecomers. I can appreciate that. At least, he did not give me a one.'
After Daiyu left the stage, Melvin did not wait for her to return to her table. He wanted this contest over, as quickly as possible, for very good reasons. So instead, Melvin turned to the audience, as he announced, into his microphone, “And next up is, River.”
River got up from her table, walked to the stage. She passed by Daiyu, with the black haired woman sitting back into her seat, as River made it to the stage.
As River walked onto the stage, everyone saw that she was carrying two batons, together, in her right hand.
Given the situation, the judges, nor Melvin even thought about where she had them on her body.
When River reached the center stage, she came to a stop. She turned to the judges, as she asked, in a casual, relax tone of voice, “It is all right if my talent was fire dancing?”
As the judges looked up at her, Sam raised an eyebrow. Sam stated, “There is a no weapons rule in this contest.”
River just looked at Sam, as she raised an eyebrow, as well. A few seconds later, she replied, “But, these are not weapons.”
Sam calmly pointed out, “Though, they are dangerous. I will have to ask the other judges, and the bartender, of this restaurant. If they will allow the use of them.” He then turned to the other judges, and Melvin.
Sam saw that the three other men looking back at Sam.
Lee turned to Melvin, as he stated, “Melvin, this is your bar. This is not my call. Though, I will support your decision.”
Pedro and Sam also turned to Melvin, as Pedro said, “As long as we are careful. I don't mind.”
Melvin looked over at River. He then turned to look at the three judges.
Melvin commented, “We can allow this. But, as Pedro said, we have to be careful. First, the fire might set off the sprinkler system. I can shut off this section of the sprinkler system, for this room, from behind the bar counter. I will just turned it back on, later. Though, I need to get a couple of fire extinguishers, from the kitchen. Just in case.”
Pedro responded, “Good idea.”
Melvin looked at the audience, as he said, into his microphone, “Ladies and gentlemen, we will only need a minute of you time, to prepare for the next performance.”
(_)
A minutes later, the sprinkler system to the room was shut off. There was a large, portable fire extinguisher set by Sam's seat, on the outside of the table.
Melvin had another large, portable fire extinguisher in his left hand, as he held his microphone in his right hand.
Melvin turned to the audience, as he said, into his microphone, “Okay, ladies and gentlemen. We are ready to continue the show.”
Melvin then set his microphone down on the judges' table, as he held up the nozzle of the large, portable fire extinguisher in his right hand. He aimed the nozzle at the stage, towards River. Just in case he had to act in an instant, if things went wrong.
With the batons still in her right hand, River then walked over to the karaoke machine and set the machine to the song she wanted.
Next, River walked walked back to the center of the stage, as she faced the judges, and crowd.
After which, River used her left hand to pull out a nice lighter from one of her left side pants pocket. As she held both batons by the middle, with her right hand, she lit one end of both of the batons.
River swiftly pocketed her lighter, where she had it before, and separate the batons, so one was held in the middle, by each of her hands.
River used the lit ends of her batons to light the other ends of her batons.
River finished her preparations, just as the song began to play.
The song was not a karaoke version, but an actual song with lyrics. The song was the theme song from the nineteen eighty-five, american movie, Berry Gordy's The Last Dragon.
River then began her dance routine, while twirling around her fire sticks.
Lee thought, 'Interesting musical selection.' He then realized he was thinking. And he cleared his mind.
As the song began to quicken its pace, River began to be more aggressive in her dance routine.
While River used her twirled her batons, without harming herself, she began flipping, and back-flipping, as she danced with the music. Yet, she also landed solidly on her feet, without losing control of her baton.
At the same time, River was able continue dancing with the beat of the song.
As this went on, nearly everyone, including the judges, and Melvin, could tell that her moves were very well organization and choreographed.
River continued this dance for the full seven minutes and twenty six seconds of the song.
Just as the song was about to end, River did a flip forward, and landed facing the judges, and audience. As she landed, she bowed to them, just as the song ended, with her arms extended away from her, to prevent from burning herself on her two fire-sticks.
The audience went wild, as they gave her a standing ovation, for several seconds.
River walked over close to the edge of the stage, to where Melvin was standing at. She held out her hands, with the fire batons away from her, and over the edge of the stage, for Melvin to deal with.
Melvin used two quick bursts from his fire extinguisher, to put out all four ends of River's batons that were on fire.
River turned to Melvin, as she said, “Thanks.”
Melvin looked back at her, as he replied, “You're welcome.” He then set his fire extinguisher onto the floor, by the stage wall.
River then put back batons back into her right hand, as she turned to look at how the judges scored her performance.
As the crowd slowly died down, she saw that Lee had given her a nine.
Lee stated, “That was a great performance. I never thought I would even get to see that in person, in my life. I am glad I did.”
Pedro gave her a nine, as well. He said, “I agree. This was expertly achieved.”
River looked over at Sam, to see the bearded man had given her a six. Though, Sam did not say a work to her, as he just looked at her.
River frowned at Sam, but Sam does not even flinch.
Just as with Daiyu's performance, Lee, Pedro, and Melvin ignored Sam's score, given they were in the presence of a telepath.
As second later, River turned to her right, and walked off stage, with her batons in her right hand.
A few seconds later, River returned to the table she shared with Daiyu, Rock, and Revy.
After River sat down in her chair, at a nearby table, Dutch turned to look at River. She complimented, “You never fell to impress, River.”
River looked over at Dutch, as she replied, “Thank you, Dutch.”
(_)
Meanwhile, between the front of the stage, and the judge's table, Melvin picked up his microphone, with his right hand, off the judges' table.
Melvin then walked over to behind the bar counter. Next, he turned the fire sprinklers back on, while he announced, into his wireless microphone, “And here is our last contestant, Eda.”
Eda got up from the chair she was sitting at, around her friends. She then walked towards the stage.
As Eda walked towards the stage, Melvin returned to the front of the stage, between the stage, and the judges' table.
After Eda made her way on stage, everyone saw she was wearing a white, flowing evening gown, that was had only shoulder straps, and slits on the sides of her skirt to allow her movement. The gown showed off her shoulders, and the blue encircled cross tattoo on her right forearm. She also wore white slippers.
Eda left her long blond hair loose, to fall down her back.
As Eda walked across the stage, she thought, 'Given what I am wearing, plus what I am going to do, I should win this. I am wearing a nice strapless white bra, with Yolanda helping me with my hair. I am going to take these judges for all their wore.'
'And this will not be a repeat of the bikini contest. This is the reason I am after the writer in the first place. And I do have one other thing going for me. I did sleep with one of the judges. Though, I am not sure if Lee will give me points for just that. He seems to have a bit of integrity, and we both agreed it was one night stand.'
After she walked karaoke machine, she picked up one of the wireless microphone, while she found the karaoke version of the song she wanted to sing.
As she set it, she use the ten seconds, before the song started, to walk with graced across the stage, to the center of the stage, as she face the judges.
Eda happily thought, 'I must have song this sing in the shower countless times. And I know it by heart.'
Then, the karaoke version of Bonnie Tyler's song, Holding Out For A Hero, began playing.
And without missing a beat, Eda starting sing the lyrics on time, and in tune with the song.
As Eda did so, she moved around, by slightly dancing, and displaying her abilities as a former cheerleader, with her foot movements always in step with the beat of the song.
Within a minute of the song everyone was entranced by Eda's performance.
And while the judges were able to maintain neutral expressions, to her right, at the tables to the left of the stage, the other women in her group were left speechless at her performance.
Some of the women even had their jaws hanging in awe. Such as Sawyer.
(_)
At the tables to the back left side of the room, Sawyer watched Eda, as she thought, 'Damn. I did not know that Eda was this good at singing and dancing. I might want to ask her if she is interested in doing a few trio songs with Ranma and I. We could do sing some great songs, together. As we danced.'
(_)
Meanwhile, at the judges table, Pedro was so charmed about Eda's performance. That he forgot about River, as he thought, 'Eda is good. Also, it is strange that the first time I walked into the Devil's Hotel lobby, it was the Holding Out For A Hero song that started playing for me. Also, I will say that Eda's customers service at that food truck is a lot better than she was the Ripoff Church. And Lee was correct, in that customer service does matter.'
Pedro then remembered who was else in the room, as he immediately cleared his mind.
When the song reached it's climax, Eda skillfully knelt down on her left leg, as both her movements and voice did not miss a beat.
Eda then seamlessly jumped back up to her feet, while remaining in tune with the song.
As her feet hit the stage floor, the music made its famous clash sound.
Eda then continued to perfectly perform the rest of the song.
As the song ended, Eda only gave an innocent smile, outwardly, while she inward smirked, as she thought, 'Always play to the judges, and the crowd. That is how one wins.'
The crowd, including her friends, gave Eda a standing ovation, for several seconds. Only the judges did not stand up to applauded Eda.
As the crowd calmed down and sat back down, Eda looking down at the judges.
Eda was still smiling, as she watched while Sam held up his score board, that stated, ten.
A second later, she saw Pedro also hold his score board, which stated ten.
Then, Lee held up his score board, and there was a nine on it.
Eda continued to smile. Though, she did look at Lee, which an unspoken question.
Lee could guess the question, as he calmly stated, “I slept with you, Eda. I could not give you a perfect score. Other people might questioned that score. But, you nailed the performance, perfectly. I can already tell you. Congratulations, Eda. You won this talent contest.”
Eda's grin became even wider, as she said, “Thanks.”
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “You heard it right here folks! The winner of the contest is, Eda!”
The crowd gave Eda another applause, as she walked off the stage, and back to her friend.
When Eda reached her friends, Rock was the first to speak, as she complimented, “You did good, Eda.”
Revy agreed, “Yea. You were great.”
Sawyer complimented, “Now, that is how to end a talent contest.”
There were other compliments from the women sitting at the tables, nearby.
When the women were finished complimenting her, Eda though, 'Given their kindness, it is best not to rub this win in their faces. It would just ruin the mood.'
Eda looked around at her friends, as she said, “Thank you, guys.”
Eda then looked over at River, whom she saw was smiling towards her.
River complimented, “Good move.”
Eda nodded once towards River, as she thought, 'Thank you.'
In response, River simply returned Eda's nod.
Eda thought, 'I will collect my beer, later. I just feel to good about winning to go ask for it now.'
The women then began talking amongst themselves, with the audience already getting up, and leaving the room.
For while the audience enjoyed the show, they all knew how dangerous those women were. Especially, when the women in question celebrated. And none of the audience wanted to be around them, given the women presently had plenty of reasons now to celebrate.
(_)
Meanwhile, across the room, at the judges' table, the judges had just got up from their seats.
Lee looked around, he saw that the audience was leaving. He thought, 'they got the right idea.'
Lee turned to Sam, Melvin, and Pedro, as he softly recommended, “Gentlemen, I suggest we take our leave, while we still can. And talk in the front lobby.”
Pedro, Sam, and Melvin, turned to look at Lee.
Pedro said, “Agreed.”
Sam snorted, as he replied, “Why not?”
Melvin commented, “Best statement I have heard all night.”
Melvin then set his microphone onto the judges table. He thought, 'I will clean up after the girls leave. I will just be happy to be breathing, as I leave this room for now. And I can give Eda her reward, later, as well.'
The four men then joined the audience, as they started walking towards the double doors that lead to the hotel hallway, and away from the contestants of the contest.
(_)
Nearby, at the tables to the back left side of the room, near the stage, Daiyu was sitting her in chair, as she watched as Melvin, Lee, Sam, and Pedro get up, and calming walk out of the hotel restaurant, and into the hallway, with the audience.
Daiyu thought, 'I guess my friends have been here long enough, that everyone knows to avoid them. Still, I wonder why the announcer and three judges seem to be in more of a rush to leave, then the rest of the people here?'
River was sitting next to Daiyu. River leaned over, and softly whispered into Chang's ear, “Those four are more intelligent than they appear.” She then leaned back up in her chair.
Daiyu continued to look at the four men, from across the room, as they finally exited out the door. She thought, 'Then, we will have to watch them, closely.'
River quietly said, “Exactly.”
(_)
After the four men made it to the middle area of the front lobby, they came to a stop, as they looked at each other.
Melvin turned to the three other men, while he said, “Good night. I am going to go to my room, and stay there for the rest of the night. I suggest you three do the same.”
Lee said, “Oh. I agree. I have the same idea. And no one say anything to jinx our getting out of that situation with our skins intact.”
Sam responded, “I would not be one to do so.”
Melvin did not respond, as he turned, and walked towards the elevator bay, as he headed for his suite, for the night.
Pedro turned to Sam, as he requested, “Can I speak to Lee for a moment, in private?”
Sam said, “Sure.” Sam then walked away, close to the check in desk.
Pedro watched Sam walk away. When Sam out of earshot, Pedro turned to Lee, as he whispered, “Given River and Chang are here, in the building with us, how screwed are we?”
Lee quietly responded, “It depends. Did you clear you mind the moment you saw River?”
Pedro softly replied, “Of course.”
Lee whispered, “I did the same. Melvin and Sam do not know enough to get us into trouble. So, as I say, we are fine, for at the moment.”
Pedro quietly pointed out, “But, what if those two decide to check into the hotel. You cannot keep a clear head all the time. You have to think to continue this act you have going.”
Lee softly admitted, “I know. But, I don't think I have to worry. Because, I believe that is not the case. Chang always. Always. Kept Revy and the others at a distance from himself. Well, herself, at the moment. And since River is a telepath, she would keep her distance for the other women, as well. Yes. She is crazy. But, she does not like reading the minds of other crazy people.”
“And both of them like playing head games with people. With luck, they probably just stopped by to say hi to Revy Rock, and the others. Have some fun. Like what we saw on stage, a few minutes ago. With the two of them being gone by morning. If not. They are likely going to stay at the other nice hotel in town, on the other side of the city. So, we are good, either way.”
Pedro whispered, “I would not say our situation is good. But, our odds do increase, as long as we are away from those two.”
Lee quietly responded, “Trust me. I know better than to be anywhere near those two. Though, if they do stay at the hotel, I will leave a message with you, at the police station, saying, a river runs through it. Just like the title of that film.”
“That means they are staying at the hotel. And I am gone right after I leave the message. If I do not leave you a message, then everything is fine, or they have already caught me. Either way, it is no longer your concern.”
Pedro softly inquired, “Okay. Also, what is up with River's red hair color? Her natural color is brown.”
Lee quietly said, “I gave her the option of dyeing her hair red in the stories. I had her go back to brown. With her occasionally alternating. This was to show she was changing for the better.”
Pedro softly commented, “Oh yea. I remember now. This was done to show she is not a crazy as she once was.”
Lee softly stated, “Exactly. At this point, decades later, she is likely saner than Revy, and more of her crew. Though, her red hair further confirms this is the River that I wrote about. And we know that this is River, and by extension, Chang, from after book four.”
“Because, they regularly talked to the others. They would not keep my stories, secret for long. So, they likely only recently heard about it. And after all the time, River might be actually saner than even I may suspect.”
Pedro quietly replied, “Now, that I think about that. I find that actually comforting. It means she is likely not after you blood.”
Lee softly commented, “I hope she is not after me. It is all over if she is. Though, I doubt it. If she was. Even with keeping our minds clear. Thoughts slip out, and she likely had me. And I would be likely captured, right now.”
“So, I am thinking that, given she and Chang both are a bit mischievous. They are here just have some fun with their friends. They are likely not our enemies, at the moment. They are just here to stir the pot a little. And have a little fun. For them, catching me would only be a bonus.”
Pedro quietly agreed, “I can see that. But, why does River have her hair dyed right now, instead of having it the nature brown?”
Lee softly stated, “As to why her hair is red now, is anyone's guess. It is likely just her preference, right now. It is not like either of us can just go up to her, and ask her why she decided to dye her hair, before she came here.”
Pedro quietly responded, “Good point. Also, I will start asking around for information on Chang, the alias Daiyu, and River.”
Lee softly disagreed, “No. Do not do that, just yet. Those names are too uncommon here. If you do that, it might tip your hand, to them, that you know who they are.”
Pedro quietly agreed, “That is an excellent point. Damn, you really do think several moves ahead.”
Lee whispered, “It is the only reason I am still breathing. Anyway, go home, Pedro. Get some sleep. With luck, tomorrow will be a better day.”
Pedro said, “You too. Sleep well.” He then walked towards the front doors of the lobby. A few seconds later, he was outside, heading for his car.
As Pedro made it outside, he allowed himself to think. He mentally reflected, 'That was an interesting experience. Though, I was most in impressed with Daiyu... Well, Chang. And she is hot as a woman. Still, that Billy Joel's song, We Didn't Start The Fire, is a hard song to sing correctly. I have tried. It is especially hard for those whom are not native in speaking the english language.'
'Of course, with not only Dutch, Benny, and Janet, coming to talk. But, also Chang and River. They are going to bring a whole new level of insanity to my city. I better be ready for them. But, that is for tomorrow. I am to tired to deal with this now. Instead, I am just going to go home, and give some much needed sleep.'
Pedro soon made it to his car, and he drove himself to his home.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the front lobby of the hotel, Lee watched Pedro walk out of the building, and towards his car in the parking lot. Lee then turned to face Sam, whom he saw was standing by the check out desk, looking back at him.
Lee thought, 'Now, to talk to Sam. walked up by Sam, and continued walking towards the elevator bay.
Sam walked with Lee, as he asked, “So, what was that about?”
Lee honestly answered, “It is personal.”
Sam replied, “Okay.”
They then made it to the elevator bay. Lee walked over to one of the panels, between two of the elevators. He then pushed the up arrow, to summon one of the elevators to come pick up Sam and himself.
They stood side by side, with Sam to Lee's right side. They patiently waited for an elevator to come down, and open its doors for them.
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “I hope you have a pleasant night, Sam.”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he stated, “Thank you. But, I am not going to bed, just yet. I got some things I need to do first.”
Lee asked, “No problem. So, did you have a good time?”
Sam stated, “A great time. You?”
Suddenly the elevator to Lee's right side, dinged, and its doors opened.
Lee walked in to the elevator. Lee turned around, to face Sam. He punched the button on the panel, by the door, for the third floor.
Lee looked up at Sam, as he sadly smiled. Lee said, “I have a great time, as well. This was likely one of the best nights of my life. And when I lay dying on my deathbed, in a few months, I will look back on this night, and smile.”
Lee's comment caught Sam flatfooted, as he inquired, “What do you mean, your deathbed?”
As the doors began to close, Lee looked Sam in his eyes, as he stated, “I am dying of cancer.”
Before Sam could respond, the doors fully closed, leaving the bearded, ponytail man speechless at finding out his friend was dying of cancer. And that his friend would be dead sooner, rather than later.
Sam then turned, towards the exit of the elevator bay. As he was about to walk back towards the lobby, he saw the long red haired, fair skinned woman, know as River, looking back at him, from across the lobby.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 12: “Black Jade And The Rotten Silver.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
The next morning, after the talent contest, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, because Lee went to bed early, he woke up early.
When Lee woke up, he looked at the clock on the nightstand beside him, and he saw that a six ten AM in the morning.
While it was still dark outside, he turned on the lamp light on his nightstand. And he quickly got ready to face the day. He then headed to the lobby, before anyone else was up, and he spoke to the clerks at the check in desk.
Given the clerks had heard about the contest last night. And they knew Lee, they were more than willing to answer Lee's question, concerning the contest and the contestants. They even pulled a checked a few records for him.
The discussion was in english, considering Lee did not want anyone to know that he knew spanish.
Lee was relieved to learn that the restaurant was still in one piece. Though, it was being cleaned up that morning. With the restaurant, with breakfast buffet being open at seven AM. Which was an hour and half later than when it usually open at Five thirty AM.
Not that Lee was complaining. He was not planning to eat breakfast, yet.
Also, while Lee did not show any reaction on the outside, he was happy to learn that neither no one, fitting the names, nor descriptions, of River, Chang, or Daiyu, had checked into the Devil's Hotel, previous night.
In addition, the clerks were more than happy to accept Lee's request, on keeping quiet about his inquires.
Lee thanked the two clerk. And he then when back to this hotel room, to watch TV.
(_)
At eight thirty AM, Lee received a phone call. Lee used his TV remote to turn off his TV.
Lee then tossed his remote onto his bed, as he walked over to the phone on his nightstand.
As he picked up receiver, he thought, 'Only Pedro and Sam have this number. And the girls would just knock at my door if they wanted to speak to me.'
Lee held the receiver to the right side of his face, as he said, in english, “Hello.”
Pedro responded, from the other end of the line, in english, “Hey.”
Lee recognized Pedro's voice, as he replied, “Hi. What do you need?”
Pedro stated, “First, did those two actually check into the hotel?”
Lee thought, 'He must be talking about Chang and River.' He answered, “Not as far as I know. I check with the front desk, this morning. And they said, no. I think we are in the clear, for the moment.”
Pedro said, “That's good.”
Lee pointed out, “Still, you should not called me this early in the morning for something like.”
Pedro admitted, “You are right. I called to ask favor from you.”
Lee thought, 'Whatever it is, it might be worth doing to stay on Pedro's good side.' He inquired, “Sure, what do you need?”
Pedro stated, “The real state agent I am using to sell my brother's beach house, called me this morning. About ten minutes ago. He found a buyer for the house. The guy wants to pay all of it up front, in pesos. Ten percent above the asking price. If this sale clears, my retirement savings is secure. And with what is going on, I do not have to worry about that.”
Lee questioned, “I fully understand. So, how do I fit into this?”
Pedro requested, “I was thinking, if I was chauffeured in a cool car, it might make a good impression with the buyer. With that cool car being the pink convertible my brother gave you. With you driving me. It is probably be an hour of your life. What to help?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. Why not? It is something I might do in his situation. And it will likely put him in good mood for the rest of the day. Especially, after what happened last night, at the end of the talent contest. When River and Chang showed up.'
Lee responded, “Sure. Where do you want me to pick you up? And at what time?”
Pedro answered, “The meeting is at ten thirty, so pick me up at the police station at ten AM. Being early would make a good impression, as well.
Lee agreed, “Yes. It would. I will see you there.” He then hung up the phone.
Lee thought, 'This is a win-win situation. I help Pedro, he becomes more loyal to me. And after last night's party crashers, I need to shore up that loyalty. Also, as far as he is concerned, he will owe me a favor.'
'Now, on the matter of Sam. As much as I want to spend time with this. Helping Pedro with this, is more important to my continued survival. So, in a little while, I will go downstairs, meet with Sam. We will have breakfast at the buffet, where I will tell him I have some errands to run. Without give details. So, the girls don't overhear us. Then, I will satisfaction that I will meet him, here, in the lobby. Where I will pick up up, and we will then head the Rats Nest later this morning.'
'Though, I will have to navigate around the issue of my telling him that I am dying of cancer. But, I was just so tired, and in such a good mood, that I decided to tell him, as a friend. And I cannot let the girls learn I am dying of cancer. Still, that should not be a problem.'
'Also, I doubt the girls will say anything to us about talent contest last night. They all got good scores from us. And they are not the type to talk about such things outside their own group.'
'So, all in all, my day is likely looking up.'
(_)
Half hour later, Lee came down into the lobby, and he met with Sam, whom looked well, given the news he had received from Lee, the previous night, about Lee dying of cancer.
Sam was sitting in one of the chairs on the right side of the lobby, facing the check in desk, near the elevator bay.
Lee also saw that none of Revy and Rock's group were there.
As both men saw each other, Sam got up, and walked over to him. He said, “Good morning, Lee. I hope you rested well.”
Lee answered, “I did. How was your night?”
Sam coyly responded, “Longer than I hoped it would be. But, I did get some good rest... About what you told me last night that you have...”
Lee interrupted, “Don't worry about it. Nothing either of us can do about it. All I am going to do is enjoy the time I have left.” He mentally added, 'And if Revy and the others learn I have cancer, it will blow my cover. Because they will realize that I am the writer, and the reason I am close to them is to steal one of their reality device, to save my own life.'
Sam replied, “Okay.”
Lee mentioned, “Also, after breakfast, I have an errand to run, for an hour, or so. If it is okay with you. I will meet back up with you here, and we will head to Rats Nest afterward. So, we can continue are day as normal. If not, I can dropped you off somewhere, before I go on my errand.”
Sam stated, “That is fine. I will wait for you here. Then, we will got to the Rats Nest later this morning.”
Lee said, “Glad to hear it. Now, let's get get some breakfast.”
Both men then exited the lobby, as they headed for the hotel restaurant, to get some breakfast from the buffet.
(_)
Lee found that he was correct about breakfast. As Lee and Sam ate their breakfast at the bar counter, with Revy and her group leaving them alone. With the women talking amongst themselves, as usual, as had they had their own breakfast.
After finishing their meals, Lee and Sam parted ways for the next hour, or so.
(_)
Nearby, at the tables in front stage, Revy watched Sam and Lee leave the room. She then turned back to her group, as she continued their conversation.
Revy, like many of the women at the table she was at, and the tables around her, had finished their breakfast, and they were just enjoying the discussion they were having with each other.
Revy was sitting at the table with Rock, Dutch, Janet, and Benny, as she commented, “Too bad Chang would not let us know in what his plan is, last night.”
Benny said, “That is completely understandable. The writer might have been in that crowd, and overheard our conversation.”
Revy conceded, “True. And I think that is the reason he and River are staying at the hotel across the island. The writer knows River is a telepath. If they stay here, they will drive away the writer. So, they are staying in a hotel, on the other side of the island. On the bright side, we can visit them, and find out their plans, then. Also, it is going to be a lot more fun with them here.”
From the table that Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, Mikoto, shared, Mikoto commented, “Still, I wonder why the judges, and Melvin got out of here so quickly after the contest? They practically out paced the audience in leaving.”
Lotton commented, “Mikoto, if you were put into a position of judging very violent, questionably sane women, would you stick around afterward, and risk one of them being upset with the scores you gave them?”
Mikoto answered, “No.”
Dutch stated, “Been there. Done that. I didn't stick around for the aftermath, myself. So, I can understand why they ran right after the contest was over.”
Some of the women, including Dutch, started lightly laughing, for a few seconds, from her comment.
As the women calmed down, Rock said, “You know. That talent contest was similar to that bikini contest at Roanapur. But, that was likely because many of the contestants that were in the bikini contest, were in this talent contest.”
Benny remarked, “Yes. But, there were some differences. Like better taste in clothing in last night's contest.”
Akira stated, “Yea. And less bloodlust towards the winner, this time.”
Revy commented, “I hate to admit it, but Eda did earn her victory.”
From a nearby table, that she shared with her sisters, Kristina, Sarah, Yukio and Rebecca, Molly commented, “Yes. Who knew she was that good at singing and dancing?”
At a table, Sawyer said, “She never showed that type of skill at the bikini parties.”
Rock pointed out, “All of us have talents that we keep to ourselves.”
At another table, Violin stated, “True.” She turned to Dutch, as she complimented, “By the way, Dutch. That was a nice performance of, Ghost Riders in the Sky.”
Dutch turned to Violin, as she replied, “Thanks. You're flukes skill are pretty good. Though, I didn't care for the song you picked.”
Violin said, “It was a matter of personal tastes.”
At the same table that Violin was sitting at, Aeryn turned to the table that had Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer shared, as she asked, “Are we still on for today?”
Shenhua answered, “Yes. We are.”
Ranma turned to Shenhua and Aeryn, as she asked, “What are you guys up to, today?”
Aeryn answered, “Violin is going to be busy showing.... Someone around town today. While, she is doing so, I will be spending the day with Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, training, and shopping.”
Ranma looked around the table, at their faces. All of them had the same unspoken question. Ranma asked, “Can we come with you?”
Aeryn shrugged, as she replied, “Sure.”
Revy turned to Violin, as she inquired, “And who is this mysterious person, Violin?”
Violin looked at Revy, as she coyly said, “Someone from out of town that I still talk to, on occasion. She is interested in this reality, and I am going to meet her in an hour, to show her around this town. Still, Aeryn can barely tolerate her.”
Revy realized who Violin was talking about. She replied, “Ah. That person.”
Violin responded, “Yes. And thank you for not mentioning her name. Her name might spook the writer into running. But, she is only going to be here for the day.”
Rock said, “It is always nice to have another set of eyes on the problem.” She mentally added, 'Especially a set that can read heat, and tell if someone is lying.'
Violin replied, “I agree”
Molly requested, “Violin. Aunt Rock, and I have something planned for today. If your friend is here, I would like to include you two also in our plan.”
Violin responded, “Sure. What do you have in mind?”
Molly told Violin her plan.
Violin stated, “I like this plan. It will put to rest if Lee, or Sam, is the writer, once and for all.”
Molly said, “Exactly.” She thought, 'And if Violin's friend is who I think she is. Then, even the writer will not be able to fool her.'
Then, women then continued their conversation for some time after they finished their breakfasts. They then separated, to go about their day.
(_)
It was ten fifteen AM, as Lee was driving, down the road, with Pedro, to Pedro's brother's Paciano's beach house, in his pink convertible. The top of the hood and side windows were down, as both men enjoy the fresh air of the sunny, cool morning.
Pedro was sitting beside Lee, in the front passenger seat, on the right side of the car, with both of them having their seat belts on.
Presently, Lee was driving at the speed limit, down the right lane, of the deserted, though will maintain, two lane, paved road. With the road running along the beach, with the beach to their left side.
As Lee drove, Pedro requested, “If you don't mind, I would like you to stay with the car.”
Lee kept his eyes on the road in front of him, as he replied, “Sure.” he Then sarcastically remarked, “Do you want me to open your door as well?”
Pedro let out a laugh. He then said, in a jovial tone of voice, “Nah. I have to draw the line somewhere.”
Lee grinned at Pedro's humor, as he stated, “That works of me.”
Lee then continued to drive them down the road.
(_)
Lee and Pedro made it to Paciano's beach house at ten twenty-five AM.
Lee drove his pink Cadillac on the drive, through the open steel gate, and passed the concrete walls on that inland side of the home.
Lee turned his car around in the driveway. He parked his car about twenty feet from the drive entrance door to the house, on the left side of the driveway. With his car facing the facing the open gate. In case he had to make a quick getaway.
After Lee put the car in park, and turned on the ignition. Lee pulled out the key, and pocketed the keys in his pants pocket. Next, Pedro and Lee took off their seatbelts.
Both men got of the car, with Lee leaning his back against his left side of his car, on his car door, while he watched Pedro walk to the entrance door.
Just as Pedro about about to open the door, the door opened up, with Pedro stepping out of the way.
Pedro and Lee then watched as a real estate agent walked outside, from the open door.
Lee saw the agent was a middle-aged hispanic man with full brown hair, and clean shaved face. He was of average height, with a slightly heavy build, but not fat. He worse a business suit, and black dress shoes. Also, he carried a closed briefcase in his left hand.
As the two men shook hands, the agent said, in spanish, “Good morning, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro said, in spanish, “Good morning, Sans. How is the real estate business going with you and Isandro?”
Meanwhile, As Lee leaned against his left car door, he thought, 'Fortunately, I am close enough to hear them. And this is why I don't want anyone to know that I learned spanish. For conversations like this. Where others speak spanish, while thinking I am an ignorant american, whom does not know the local language.'
Meanwhile, at the doorstep, the door remained open. Sans walked a few feet away from the door. He then turned to face Pedro, as he answered Pedro's question, “Great actually. Isandro is handling another, bigger sell by this same guy. With the combined commission, we are thinking about taking a vacation for a few weeks and going shark fishing with Emily and Grace.”
Pedro replied, “Sound great. Tell them all I said, hi.”
Sans said, “I will.”
Pedro thought, 'Emily and Grace are sisters. Emily the eldest sister, by a few of years. Sans married Emily. Emily works as a cashier at the Devil's Hotel. And Grace works as a waitress at a good Italian restaurant in town. And Grace is married Isandro. Neither couple has any kids. Though, they are great people. Still, I need to find out who this buyer is, before I do anything else.'
Pedro asked, “So, when we will I be meeting this buyer.”
Sans answered, “The buyer is here. He is right behind me.”
A second later, second man exited the home, while closing the door behind him.
All three men looked him.
The man in question was a black hair chinese man in his mid-twenties. His hair went down to his neck line. He was in great physical shape.
The black haired, chinese man wore a black long coat, over a nice business suit. The black long coat ended half way down his shins. The suit consisted a white t-shirt, under a white buttons up shirt, with a dark blue tie. There was a pair of black men's formal dress pants. Over the shirt and tie was a black, closed waistcoat vest, that when down far enough to completely cover his black leather belt, which was around his waist.
There was a long white scarf, that went around the under side of the turtle neck of the man's open coat, with the white scarf being draped down the front sides of his coat, to just below where his waistcoat vest ended, around his waist. Also, on his feet, he wore a light shade of black side-gusset dress shoe loafers, over light black socks. And he wore browline sunglasses over his eyes.
Lee and Pedro both remained calm, as they immediately recognized the man as Chang, in his male form.
Though, in the inside, Lee thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. Chang isn't just visiting this city. He is planning to move here. I am starting to regret dragging Pedro into this. He doesn't deserve this type of mess.'
Meanwhile, Pedro thought, 'Of all the people to buy my home, it has to be this Chang. The sad part is he will likely give me the best offer. If I turn down his offer, I will definitely make him an enemy. I don't want to be in his sights just yet. Since it is a legal transactions, that is nothing wrong with accepting his money for this. It is not a bribe. Also, I have no interest in this home. So, I have no problems selling it.'
'And I am so happy that I have already removed the records, and other things in this home, that could tip off Chang about me, and my brother.'
'This includes my brothers anime and other fictional collections. And any weapons I could find. And boy did has have a number of weapons. Not counting what I kept myself. The department weapons locker got a minor upgrade in weapons, ammo, and equipment, from what I found here.'
'Finally, I met him last night, in his female form, as Daiyu. So, he probably knows who I am from the other women. Though, neither of us cannot reveal that to the other, without tipping our hand...'
While Pedro did not show it on the outside, on the inside, he continued his thoughts, with annoyance, 'Damn it. This must be how Lee thinks all the time.'
Pedro forced himself to calm down, as he mentally reflect, with mild amusement, 'Still, this cloak and dagger stuff can be fun.'
'I would not even be surprised if Chang didn't have replacement pistols, of those he had in the Black Lagoon series, that he lost at the end of book two of Lee's stories. With thise replacement pistols coming complete with the chinese dragons and heavily dragon chinese symbols engraved in his grips, in his duel holsters, behind his lower back, strapped to his belt, in dual hostlers'
Chang walked over to Pedro and Sans. He came to a stop, to where San's was to his left front side, and Pedro was to his right front side.
As Change looked around, and he recognized Lee and Pedro. He thought, 'Now, this is in an interesting turn of events. So, the judge Del Soto, no Police Chief Del Soto, is the owner of this home. Still, he does not recognize me from last night, because I was in my female form, last night.'
'So, I am going to have to get him to reintroduce himself, or it could cause problems, if I accidentally mention his name, without first officially knowing his name. Still, if that happens, I can just say that I have heard of him. And he should let it slide.'
'Also, the person by the car, is another judge from last night. From what the girls told me, last night, I believe his name is, Lee. Curiouser and curiouser. That those two would be here, together.'
Chang turned his attention back to San and Pedro, as he mentally replied, 'Though, back to the matter at hand. I am not fully fluent in spanish, yet. But, River is giving me lessons. So, I am going to have to speak english for right now.'
Chang turned to Pedro. He played dump, as he stated, in english, “Hello. I am Bai Ji-Shin Chang.” He then offered Pedro a handshake with his right hand.
Pedro thought, 'I might as well shake his hand. This is how some of the most dangerous conflicts start. And if I refuse, he will take it as an insult. So, it will be worse.”
Pedro shook Chang's hand, with his right hand. Both men noted the other man's grip was firm, but not tight.
Pedro thought, 'Well, with a handshake like that, I guess Chang is a better man then I thought.'
As they continued, to shake hands, Pedro stated, in english, “Nice to meet you, Mister Chang. I am Police Chief Pedro Del Soto of the city De La Plata Podrido.”
Chang thought, 'Well, unlike Chief Watsup, this Chief Del Soto's handshake is firm and not limpwristed. This is good.'
They then broke the handshake.
Chang turned to look at the home behind him. He then turned back to Pedro, as he complimented, “You have a nice home here, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro thought, 'I do not know how much he knows about me. So, I might as well be honest.'
Pedro said, “It is actually my brother's home. He gave it to me. And I have no need for it. And I must say, the price you are welling to pay for this home is very generous.”
Pedro mentally added, 'I am sure you want to keep in the good graces of the local law here. That is why you are paying slightly more than the asking price. Not enough to raise any eyebrows, but enough to get my attention. And this is technically not a bribe. So, I am going to let it slide.'
Chang thought, 'The amount I am paying is nothing compare to the wealth I have access to. Still, if paying for this home, at the amount I offered, makes the local Police Chief happy, then it is money will spent.'
'Besides, I like this home. It is a really nice home. And after taking a tour of the inside, I found that his place comes almost completely furnished. I get the feeling his brother left here in a hurry. I will have to find out why, later.'
Chang said, “Thank you.”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to get some information. I need to know if he is still just visiting. Or, if he is planning on staying. Given the reality technology he has. He could literally do both. By him using time dilation. With him going on vacation here, but for us, he is here all the time. As such, when he left this reality, or even time, for business, or pleasure. He would only be going for a few minutes, for those of us in this reality.'
Pedro inquired, “Mister Chang. I was wondering. Are you planning on using this as a vacation home, or are you planning on moving to the island?”
Chang though, 'Given he is the police chief of this island city, it is only natural for him to ask these questions. So, there is not reason to lie.'
Chang stated, “Actually, I will have another place on the island. I plan use this home as a retreat and for formal parties. Though, I will keep up the place. So, the building and property does not deprecate in value.”
Pedro remained calm on the outside, as he inwardly winched. He thought, 'I was afraid of this. I wonder where the other place is. Still, I need to get out of here, and talk with Lee, on what our next move will be.'
Pedro said, “It sounds like you will make good use out of this place. And you will maintain it. Which is fine, with me. Anyway, I have to leave in a minute. I have city run.”
Chang grinned, as he said, “I can sympathize.”
Pedro thought, 'I bet you can. Now, to arrange for me to close this deal.'
Pedro turned to Sans, as he request, “Get the paperwork ready. I will meet you in your office, later this afternoon, to sign everything.”
Sans answered, in english, for the benefit of Chang, “That will be fine.”
Pedro turned back to Chang, as he stated, “Mister Chang, if you have any problems in the city, give me a call at the police department, and ask for me. They should transfer you to me.”
Pedro thought, 'I am heading off a whole host of problems by letting Chang know that he has the option of contacting me. I don't know what I would do, if I did meet him in an official capacity. But, by him calling me, I can make sure he comes into the station, alone. With River not being with him.'
Chang thought, 'I think that might be an olive branch.' He replied, “We'll see.”
Pedro looked at both of men, as he stated, “Okay. And good day, gentlemen.”
Pedro then turned around, and walked back to the pink convertible.
Lee saw him coming. Lee got into the driver's side of the car. A few seconds later, Pedro got into the front passenger side of the car.
Less than a minute later, Chang and Sans watched, as Lee and Pedro slowly drove away, and out the gate.
Chang mentally noted, 'Neither of them actually looked at me. They didn't even raise an eyebrow at the way I looked, nor that I was a foreigner. Interesting. I will have to dig a little deeper on finding out more about them both. Also, I have plans, later today, on learning more about Lee and the other poker player, Sam. Among other people.'
(_)
Meanwhile, in the pink Cadillac, after Lee turned onto the road, and he was about fifty yards from the beach home, he inquired, “Where to?”
Pedro answered, “The Last Resort.”
Lee joked, “You're getting an early start.”
Pedro flatly stated, “Can the injokes.”
Lee lightly chuckled, as he said, “Come on. In these situations, it is better to laugh, than to cry.”
Pedro questioned, “Perhaps. So, how much of the conversation did you hear?”
Lee thought, 'All of it. But, I don't want you to know that.' He coyly answered, “Enough.”
Pedro said, “Well, we will talk about this over coffee, at the Last Resort.”
Lee agreed, “Good idea.” He thought, 'Once Chang showed up, as the buyer. I figured you would want to immediately talk to me, about this. And the Last Resort is a good place to do so. Especially, at this time in the morning. Where there is no crowd. And few, if any customers.'
Lee then headed for the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Twenty minutes minutes later, both men were sitting at their usual booth, at the back right corner table, inside the Last Resort Diner.
Given the situation, and how Lee wanted to keep Pedro in his good graces. Lee did not disagree having Pedro sitting with his back to the wall, while Pedro faced the entrance.
Fortunately, it was late morning, and lunch rush had not hit the restaurant rate. So, except for Lee and Pedro. The only other people in the dining room and cook area, were the staff of the diner. The two waitresses, Lori, and Mary. And the cook, George.
And the three employees knew to give Lee and Pedro their privacy. So presently, Lee and Pedro were not that worried about being overheard.
By then, Lori had already served them each a cup of coffee. And the danger they were in, from having both Chang and River in town, was finally starting hit them, as they were having problems keeping their cups of coffee from shaking in their hands.
As both men set their cups of coffee back down on the table between them, Lee quietly said, “Oh my, what have we done?”
Pedro heard what Lee said. He looked up at Lee, as he retorted, “Who's we, Tonto? You wrote that damn story. You lead them here. Now, a interdimensional warlord is here, in my city.”
Lee turned to Pedro, as he stated, “Chang is bad, but not that bad.”
Pedro flatly responded, “Okay. Instead of a interdimensional warlord. We have to deal with a reality traveling, dangerously genre savvy, gender bending, magnificent bastard slash bitch, of a criminal boss, whom has decided to move to my city.” He sarcastically added, “Sound better?”
Lee said, in an embarrassing tone of voice, “No.”
Pedro went onto say, “My point, exactly. As I was saying, Chang is here now. For some reason De La Plata Podrido has caught his eye. And I don't think the only reason he is here is for you.”
Lee pointed out, “Well, you and your brother, should have never compared Plata Podrido with Roanapur.”
Pedro admitted, with a hint of anger in his voice, which was more towards himself, than Lee, “I realize that, now. And by buying my brother's beach house, Chang is clearly planning on staying here a while. He even said he is planning to live elsewhere, on the island. My brother's beach house is just for business functions. And I did not ask where he was living, because I had no excuse to do so. Still, it does not take a genius to figure out that he is likely going to set up shop here, somewhere, on my island.”
Pedro thought, 'Somewhere I need to find out as quickly as possible. From back channels, that cannot immediately be traced back to him. I will look into that, when I get back to the station.'
Lee inquired, “But how? In my stories, I left Chang as a deck hand, on his, or her, way to being a hired gun, for Mal, on the Serenity. Chang didn't have any wealth to put back together an operation like that. Along those lines, I am still trying to figure out how Chang came up with the money to afford your brother's beach house. I doubt the Serenity crew loaned the money. Beside which, Chang never struck me as someone whom allow himself to intentionally get into debt with someone else.'
Pedro agreed, “That is a good question.”
Both men thought over Lee's question, for a few seconds.
A thought then occurred to Pedro, as he inquired, “Whatever happened to the gold that Chang took with him, or her, at the time, at the end of book two?”
Lee answered, “I already thought of that. River made Chang donate that gold to charity.”
Pedro said, “And trying to hack the banks for money would not work here. Too many eyes watching too closely. Chang could have created hidden caches of treasure and technology in other realities, before his organization was destroyed in book two?”
Lee thought about Pedro's comment for a few seconds. Lee then looked up at Pedro, with a shock expression on his face. He admitted, “I don't know. I didn't realize that. That was something I overlooked.”
Pedro sarcastically replied, “Just great.”
Lee slightly whined, “One plot hole.” He held up his right index finger in front of himself, as he continued, “Just one.” He dropped his right hand back to his side, as he went onto say, “And it comes back to bite my home planet in the ass.”
Pedro responded, “Yes. When you screw up, your screw ups are epic in their ramifications. Plus, the Serenity crew are very reasonable in such matters. So, they will probably now be working for Chang as his, men... women... err, whatever.... Damn it. Now, you got me doing that.”
Lee could not help chuckled, for a few seconds, from Pedro's reaction.
As Lee calmed down, he said, with a bit of humor in his tone of voice, “I wrote that running gag because I kept doing it myself, as I wrote my stories.” Lee continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Anyway, I have a full plate of villains to deal with. Chang can be your arch-nemesis.”
Pedro calmly replied, “That is not funny.”
Lee flatly said, “It was not intended to be. If you think about, you are like Chang's shadow archetype.”
Pedro inquired, “What do you mean?” He thought, 'I would like to see Lee's logic on this.'
Lee answered, “I have been here long enough to learn the back story of this city. And your personal history, as well. Where Chang allowed the corruption around him to consume him, you rose above the corruption you dealt with. I admire that about you.”
“You worked your way up from rookie police officer, to being promoted to chief of police in this city. And then, with the help of your brother, you cleaned up this city to where the crime was directed, controlled, and at a manageable level. Where people could live in peace. That is why you hate bribery. Because you know once you start down that path, you may end up like Chang. Or worse.”
Pedro responded, “I see your point. And yes. That is why I loath bribery. And that is why I do not do drugs. Though, I have to allow there to be a market in town, given the smuggling is one of the sources of money for this community. Still, I only allow it within reason.”
Pedro mentally reflected, 'And with my brother gone, I have to remind those drug sellers what, within reason, is, on a nearly weekly basis. I miss you, Paciano. Without you helping me, everything has gotten a lot tougher for me here. On top of these violent lunatics, from other realities, coming to town.'
Lee requested, in a slightly comforting tone of voice, “Listen Pedro. We can still savage the situation. All you have to do is keep your ear to the ground about Chang. We know who he is. We know what he is. We know what he is capable of. He does not know we know this. That gives us an edge. We need to use that edge for as long as possible.”
Pedro replied, “I agree.”
Lee stated, “Still, keep in mind that Chang is one smooth customer. He is a ruthless as they come. But, he is also very practical. He prefers not to have a war, because it is bad for business. And he is not going to start a war here, with anyone, because it would attract unwanted attention, from outside the island.”
“Now Pedro, if you are as half as good, and as savvy, as I think you are. I think you can handle Chang, and his crew, in savvy ways. Though, Chang likely hired others to work for him. So, be ready for some wildcards to show up, and for some wild times.”
“Though, do not approach Chang. Have him come to you. That way you can limit the meetings to just you and him. If you go to him, there is a risk that River will be nearby, and if she reads your mind, then the game is over for both us.”
Pedro stated, “I already realized that last part.” He thought, 'Though, you make a lot of other good points that I should consider.'
Lee said, “Good. And if worse comes to worse, negotiate with him. You might be able to work something out with him.”
Pedro responded, “Just thinking about the option turns my stomach. I only dealt with my brother because I knew him very well, and since childhood. He is a decent guy. The same cannot be said of Chang. But, I will keep in mind what you have said.”
Lee replied, “That is all I ask. And, by the way, since we are meeting, right now. Let us skip tonight's meeting.”
Pedro said, “Agreed.”
The two men then continued their conversation for a while, then Lee drove Pedro back to the police station.
After Lee dropped off Pedro, head headed to the Devil's Hotel, where he met with Sam. Lee then drove Sam and himself, to the Rats Nest, for their usual poker game.
(_)
A few hours later, it was the early afternoon, as Sam and Lee returned to the Rats Nest, after having lunch together, at a good cuban restaurant, nearby the Rats Nest, in Plata Podrido.
Besides Sam and Lee, the only other person in the bar at that time of the day was the bartender.
They were sitting at their usual places at the back left corner table, as they bet against each other with their money, in their friendly, ongoing game. Sam had his back to the corner. And Lee was facing the windows to the left side of the room, with his back to the bar counter. This allow Lee to see the entrance to the Rats Nest bar, with the corner of his right eye.
Sam was currently having a beer, while Lee was having a bottle of lemonade.
While Sam looked at the cards in his hand, he said, with a bit of relief in his tone of voice, “I am so happy to get back into the groove of doing these.”
Lee looked at his cards, as he agreed, “Me too.”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he commented, “I will be honest. I look forward to when I play poker with you, Lee. It is honest. It is pleasant. And it is sane.”
Lee turned towards Sam, as he joked, “Like fishing. Only you don't get sea sick.”
In response, to Lee's comment, Sam chuckled, for a few seconds. Sam then stated, “Exactly.”
Meanwhile, Lee thought, 'I guess with a hellcat for a girlfriend, you would need a port in the storm of her insanity. But, hey. A long as she does not effect my personal life. I could care less what type of girlfriend you have.'
Sam commented, “Okay. Let's continue this poker game.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Let's do that.”
The two men played out their hand, with Sam winning the pot for that round.
Sam collected all the cards from that hand, along with the pot.
As Sam was about the shuffle the cards, both men heard the front door to the bar open. And they soon heard the door close.
From their table, Sam and Lee looked at the newcomers, as did the bartender, from her location, behind the bar counter, across the room.
The three adults looked over to see Rock, in his male form, wearing his old business man's suit, and black tennis shoes. He had his long black hair in a ponytail, with a black scrunchy.
With Rock was Molly. She had her blond hair left loose, as her hair drapped down her back, to her shoulder blades. Molly wore a white blouse, a green long skirt, and green tennis shoes. She did not have her two semi-automatic pistols, nor shoulder holsters, with her.
Lee noted both newcomers were walking towards his and Sam's table.
Lee thought, 'Rock must be using a packet of instant spring of drown man. This could cause problems for everyone, if someone spills hot water on Rock, and Rock changes back into a woman in front of us.'
As Rock and Molly approached Sam and Lee's corner table, Lee calmly greeted them, “Hello Molly. Hello Mister Okajima. It has been a while.”
Rock replied, “Yes. It has.” He thought, 'Considering he met my past self, and my male form, when we first got here. I wonder.' He asked, “So, you remember out previous meeting?”
Lee said, “Vaguely.”
Lee thought, 'The only two times I met you Rock, as a guy, was a few nights after you first came. Then, I met your much earlier past self, right after the time loop. Though, the only official meeting with your male self, was when I was pretending to be drunk, when your crew first came here. So, the, vaguely, answer would likely work.'
Rock thought, 'Well, he was drunk at the time, as I introduced myself to him, as a guy. And I don't remember enough when I met him, decades ago my time, when I accidentally came here. So, I will have to let this line of inquiry go.'
Lee notice Rock had not said anything more, as he thought, 'Good. I believe he is going to drop the matter. Now, I need to know why they are here?' He asked, “So, what brings you down here this afternoon?”
Molly answered, “We wanted to get to the know two of the judges from last night's contest.”
Rock stated, “What my niece is trying to say is we would like to play a few rounds of poker with you.”
Sam commented, “As long as you got money, go ahead.”
Lee thought, 'If I say, no. I will only raise questions for myself. So, I might as well say...' Lee said, “I agreed with, Sam. Just give me a moment to move around, so you can sit down.” He mentally added, 'Also, I best not ask about the niece comment. That sounds like he is still baiting me. Or, us.'
Rock thought, 'Okay. They are not take the bait on the niece comment. Oh well.'
Lee moved a few chairs closer to Sam's left side, with Rock sitting next to Lee's left side. Molly sat by Rock's left side.
Rock pulled out some U.S. dollar bills for the both himself, and his niece.
After a few hands of poker, Rock won one hand, Molly won another hand, and Lee won a hand.
Meanwhile, across the room, the bartender looked over at the table, as she thought, 'Sam and Lee are usually quiet. Though, given who is with them, I am not surprised. I should watch my mouth, as well, in this situation.'
A few seconds later, everyone heard the front door open, and moments later, again.
All five adults looked to see that it that another woman had walked though the door.
While Lee did not show any outward reaction, inwardly he was not happy at who is was.
It was Chang in his female form, Daiyu. She wore a long black skirt, over some black women's boxer shorts.
Also, she wore a sport bra, under a white t-shirt. Over the white t-shirt she wore her a shoulder holsters, with a semi-automatic pistol under each of her armpits.
The pistols were replicas of her original pistols, with chinese dragon engraved grips.
Over her weapons and shirt, she wore a feminine styled, black cloth jacket, which was left open.
She also wore a pair white shocks, and black tennis shoes.
Daiyu also had on her browline sunglasses. Besides her weapons, this was the only article of clothing she had on, which she on during her earlier meeting, with Pedro, at the breach house, while she was in her male form.
Lee thought, 'What is Chang doing here? Probably checking out Sam and I. The girls probably told her we usually come here. And they gave her direction. Still, there not much I can do about this situation. Though, I thought she would be enjoying her new beach house, today. I guess I underestimated Chang's scheduling abilities.'
Meanwhile, Daiyu walked up to the table, where Sam, Lee, Molly, and Rock, were sitting at. When she reached the table, she came to a stop, as she just stood there, as she silently stared at both Lee and Sam for a few seconds.
Lee noticed Daiyu's staring. Lee remained calm, as he thought, 'Has Chang figured out I am the writer? No, she has not been here that long. And I was careful last night, in my thoughts, when River showed up. Along with Pedro. So, I should be fine for the moment, on that front. Though, this current front is a completely different matter.'
Daiyu then politely said, in the most innocent tone of voice she could muster, in english, “Hello. My name if Daiyu. I was in the talent contest, last night. I was wondering if I could join you four, for a few hands of poker.”
Lee could see Rock and Molly were trying to keep themselves from bursting out laughing.
Lee kept his poker face on, as he thought, with amusement, 'Oh, playing the innocent girl routine. I can see why those two are trying hard not to laugh. Well, nice try Chang. But, I know better. And I am sure Sam does, as well. Or, at the very least, I know that Sam has a girlfriend, so he will not fall for your tricks. Though, I still have to play along.”
Lee said, “Sure. Sit down. Your money is good here.”
Daiyu walked over to sit in a chair, between Lee left side, and Molly's right side. She then pulled out some U.S. cash, for her to bet with.
Lee made no attempt to stop her.
There were few more hands of cards, with Daiyu and Sam winning the hands.
Sam and Lee continued to remain silent, as the other three players talked with each other, while being careful not to give away their secrets to the two men, they were sitting by.
A few minutes later, everyone heard the front door open for a third time. And then close, a few seconds later.
The adults in the room turned to the front door. They saw Violin walk in. She wore brown pants, a black t-shirt, with dark blue tennis shoes. With her was a fair skinned woman, with short white hair, that Lee felt he had seen before, but he could not place her face.
The white haired woman was in her mid-twenties, and she wore a black short sleeved blouse, black pants, and black cowgirl boots.
Both women then walked to Lee and Sam's table.
A few seconds later, it was the woman's choose clothing, along with being with Violin, that tipped Lee off as to who the white haired woman was.
It took all of Lee's will power not to show any outward emotion, as he mentally screamed, 'Oh crap! That is Scorpius, with Violin! And I now remember, she was on TV, with that, we want the writer, broadcast, on all the TV stations. What is she doing here?!'
As the two women came to a stop, as the corner table, where the five adults were sitting, Violin and Scorpius turned to them.
Violin said, “Hi everyone. My friend here came to visit, from out of town. Her name is... Halley.”
Lee saw Scorpius take a quick look at Violin, before turning back to look towards everyone at the table.
Violin then started pointing out the people at the table, with her right hand, as she continued, “Now, clockwise. This is Molly, R... Rokuro Okajima, Sam, Lee, and Daiyu.
Scorpius calmly stated, “Yes. I am Halley. It is so good to meet all of you.”
Sam replied, “Likewise.”
Lee just simply nodded, as he kept himself from chuckling. He silently realized, in thought, 'Violin must have come up with name on the spot. But why Halley... Of course, Harvey and Halley. And Violin would introduce Scorpius to everyone, so that she would not slip up and state one of our names, without us knowing how she learned about us. I have wrote about that trick. I have personally pulled that trick. And I know how to recognize that trick.'
But, Lee's thoughts turned more grim, as he continued his mental reflection, 'Still, what is this?! A convention?! Oh no! If they are are working together, then the net is closing. They likely know who I am, they are playing with me, and I am fucked!... Calm down. Get a grip. If I freak out, and they don't know, they will figure out I am the writer. I have to remain calm.'
'The good news is none of them are mind readers. The bad news is Scorpius is the next best thing. She can read heat signatures with her eyes. She can tell if I lie. It is a good guess she already knows I am lying. Though, that cannot be helped.'
'Also, if this Scorpius is as devious as her comic counterpart. Which she is. From the TV series and mini-series, she is one hell of a bluffer. Her counterpart, in the comic series timeline, once convinced an entire galactic empire to surrender to him, on a bluff. And he was the best bluffer in the multiverse. She is likely on par with him.'
'The worst news is that all five of these people are incredibly sharp. Rock and Chang probably know every angle there is to play. For Rock at least, my only advantage is he thinks I am ignorant of the situation around me. Molly, whom is the reincarnation of Yukio, from Black Lagoon, is almost as sharp as these two. Violin, AKA reincarnated John Crichton, is extremely genre savvy. I crack an injoke with her, and she will nail me to the wall. And Scorpius could give Sherlock Holmes lessons on having an eye for the details.'
'Whether Sam is more intelligent than me is irrelevant. The only hope I have of getting out of this situation, with my hide intact, is to play this from the angle that I am the dumbest, ignorant person here, at this table. Though, like Mister Downey said in the movie, Tropic Thunder. Never go full retard.'
'My only lucky break is that half of them don't like the other half that well. And they officially are not suppose to know each other, in front of Sam and I. But, if a fight breaks out. At their level. I could still end up dead. I am going to have to play this real smooth.'
Violin requested, “We would like to play some poker with you?”
Sam sarcastically said, “Why not? As long as you have money, we're good.”
Violin moved to set beside Rock, to Rock's left side. With Scorpius sitting beside Violin, to her left side, and by Sam, to his right side.
As second later, Violin pulled out some cash, and handed some of it to Scorpius.
As Sam shuffled the cards, he asked, “Before I start. Halley, do you know how to play poker?”
Lee thought, 'Why are you asking that question, Sam? And why only, Scorpius? And not also Violin?'
Sam continued, “While I have seen Violin, and Molly play poker. It is logical guess that Molly's uncle knew how to play power. As well as Daiyu, since she is clearly a friend of Molly and Violin. But Halley, I do not know if you know how to play poker?'
Lee thought, 'Sam either a lot sharper than I thought. Or, he is playing his own game. Either way is not good me. Still, he is my only real friend here. So, I will not push the matter with him.'
Scorpius answered, “I have played this game a few times. A friend of mine, where I live, taught me. She learned to enjoy the game during her time in America.”
Lee thought, 'So, Meka taught Scorpius how to play poker. That does not surprise me.'
Sam said, “Good. Now, lets play a few hands.”
Sam then dealt the cards.
(_)
Across the room the bartender could see what was going on. She thought, 'Okay. This is getting interesting. And I think Sam and Lee could use a little help.'
The bartender than walked out, from behind the bar counter.
As the bartender walked over to the group, at the corner table, in back, across from the bar counter, she was that Violin won the hand.
When the bartender made it to the table, all eyes turned to her.
The bartender pulled out a small note pad and pent, as she inquired, “So, what does everyone want to drink?”
Sam and Lee said, in unison, “Coffee!”
Both men did not expect the other to say the same thing, a the same time, as they look at each other, then their eyes turned back to the group in front of them.
Rock stated, “I will have a bottle of chilled water, and a glass for it.”
Lee theorized, in thought, 'Rock is planning ahead. He probably has a packer of spring of drowned man on him, just in case hot water hit hims. He can run to the men's restroom, with the cup, while Molly provides cover. Where Rock would use the packet, with cold water, to change back into a man.'
Daiyu stated, “I am fine.”
Halley commented, “As am I.”
Violin said, “I could use a cold bottle of beer.”
Molly stated, “I will have a bottle of lemonade.”
The bartender wrote down the orders. She then put away her pen, as she turned and left to retrieve their drink orders.
Halley turned to Lee, as she stated, “Lee, I am surprised that you are losing so often.” She turned to Violin. She then looked back at Lee, as she continued, “Violin here stated that you have precognitive abilities.”
From the corner of his left eye, Lee noticed that this caused Chang to raise an eyebrow.
Lee sadly thought, 'Well, there are now two more bad guys, whom now have an interest in me. And there is no point in denying my ability. Since, Scorpius can catch me in a light. So, as the old rule applies. If you cannot deflect your quarry. Then, dazzle them with bullshit.'
Lee turned to Violin, as he continued his thoughts, 'I still need to know how much Violin knows. So, I know how much Scorpius knows.'
Lee calmly asked, “And where did you hear that from, Violin?”
Violin nodded once towards Molly. She turned to Lee, as she stated, “The teenagers in Rock and Revy's group.” She thought, 'It is best I not mention the parent and children relations. Given how young the parents look. That will cause questions to be raised.'
Lee continued to look at Violin, as he thought, 'So, Violin knows just about everything the girls know about my precognitive skills.' He turned to Scorpius, as he continued his thoughts, 'And likely Scorpius knows most of this, as well. So, I might as well be completely open about this.'
Lee said, “Yes. I am precognitive. I just do not use that ability often.” He looked around the table, as he continued, “And I have not used it with all of you, because I don't like cheating at cards.”
Scorpius complimented, “That is admirable.”
Lee turned Scorpius, as he thought, 'Now, to arrange the opportunity to dazzle them.'
Lee offered, “Still, I will even show you a trick after this hand.”
Sam then dealt the cards, with Molly winning the hand.
By then, the bartender returned with a tray for all their drinks. After setting the drinks in the right places, in front of the right people, she left with her empty tray.
As Sam collected the cards, Lee took a sip of his coffee, as he turned to Sam. He set his cup back on the table. Lee requested, “Sam shuffle the deck, and then hand me the cards.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he replied, “Sure.”
Lee then looked around the room, as Sam shuffled the deck.
Everyone noticed that Lee did not looked at the cards, as Sam shuffled them in his hands.
When Sam finished shuffling, he set the deck of cards, on the table, in front of Lee.
Lee looked down at the card. Next, he closed his eyes, as he concentrated. He then said, “Three of clubs.”
Without looking, he used his right hand to pull off the top card, and flip it onto the table, in front of the desk it had belong too.
Everyone saw that it was the three of clubs.
Lee said, “Two of diamonds.”
The next card was the two of diamonds.
Lee said, “Jack of spades.”
The next card was the jack of spades.
Lee said, “Ten of hearts.”
The next card was the ten of hearts.
Jack continued to call out the cards, right before he turned them over.
Out of the fifty-two card, he only missed four times.
When Lee was finished, he opened his eyes, to see looks of astonishment from the crowd around him.
Daiyu complimented, “Now, that is some trick.”
Scorpius agreed, “Quite right. Lee, have you thought about the applications of such an ability?”
Lee calmly answered, “Yes. And I have even thought of the consequences. And possible reprisals of using such an ability.”
Scorpius conceded, “Point taken.”
Lee stated, “While I try not to use this ability when I play other people. I realize that I can never walked into a casino, again. Nor, can I play professional gambling games. Because the moment I was found out, I would be killed. This is why I just usually play with Sam, here.”
Daiyu shrugged, as she replied, “Maybe. It would depend on the situation.”
Lee thought, 'I don't want to know what you are thinking, Chang.' He said, “By the way, Sam was the one that helped me with this ability. His patience in letting me play non-money poker with him, while I figured out how to work my abilities to where I could do this, was invaluable.” He turned to Sam, as he commented, “Thank you, Sam.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he replied, “You're welcome, Lee.”
Molly joked, “You two need to get a room.”
Sam and Lee ignored Molly's comment, as they turned back to looked at the rest of the group at the table.
Sam then collected the cards, and he began to shuffle them.
Lee thought, 'Now, my turn.' Lee asked, “So, what brings all of you to this bar? It cannot just be for a few hands of cards, with us.”
While Scorpius and Daiyu remained calm, Lee could see that the question caught Molly, Rock, and Violin off guard.
Violin lied, “I heard from Revy and Rock that this was a great place to get a drink. So, I brought Halley with me, to check this bar out. Before I brought Aeryn here.” She thought, 'I hope Scorpius is not too annoyed with this alias, I had to come up with, on the spot.'
Meanwhile, inside Violin's mind, Harvey was laughing.
Violin mentally admitted, 'Yes. I named her after you. Harvey and Halley.'
Harvey stopped laughing, as he mentally said, 'I know. That is what makes it so funny.'
Meanwhile, at the poker table, Scorpius snorted at the alias Violin had just given her. But, she did not reply.
Molly commented, “My reasons are about the same, as Violin. That is why I brought my uncle here.”
Rock said, “Yes. And I have found this to be a nice bar.”
Sam requested, “Then, be sure to leave a tip. This bartender here works hard at her job.”
Rock turned to Sam, as he replied, “We will.”
Then, it was Daiyu's turned. Daiyu was completely honest, as she answered, “Since you two judged the talent contest last night, I just wanted to check you two out. The girls told me where to find you.”
Lee thought, 'Nice way to answer, Chang. Straightforward honesty can be used as the perfect cover. Because it offers not questions in polite conversation, to dig deeper, for more information. And it confirms my suspicions.'
Lee around the table, as he said, “Thank you for the information. Now, let us go back to playing cards.”
Scorpius replied, “Of course.”
Daiyu commented, “Yes. I could use some more money.”
Rock said, “So can I.”
Sam then collected the cards from Lee. He put them back into one deck. Shuffled the cards. And he dealt out their next hand.
(_)
As the seven adults continued playing hand after hand of cards, they struck up a casual conversation, with all of them being careful not to tip their hands to the others.
Money moved back and forth from all seven of them.
An hour later, of playing, the stress of the situation was starting to get to Lee, and he poker face was starting to slightly slip.
Lee noticed the reactions from the other places, towards himself. He mentally realized, 'I am starting to get anxious, and they came tell. I have to come up with an excuse. And it is only a half-truth, and not full lie. So, it might not tip Scorpius off.'
Sam noticed Lee state, as well. He turned to Lee, as he asked, “Lee, are you okay?”
Lee turned to Sam, as he thought, 'Damn. He tips my hand. I will just has to use the excuse now.' Lee looked around the table, as he stated, “I sometimes had a problem being around so many sexy women at once.”
The rest the group just laughed, for a few seconds.
As the other adults at the table calm down, Molly commented, “That is very true.” She thought, 'He did something similar, when Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, introduced him to us. And I believe him.'
Rock thought, 'Now, that Lee is slightly off his game. I can ask him some questions.' Rock turned to Lee, as he asked, “So Lee, why are you in Mexico?”
Lee thought, 'I cannot lie with Scorpius here. So, I just won't tell the whole truth. And then I will change the subject... That would work.' He honestly answered, “Because I am a wanted man back in the states.” He then turned to Scorpius, as he inquired, “So, Halley, are you related to Lotton?”
Lee could see that Violin, Chang, Rock, and Molly were trying to keep themselves from laughing.
Halley stated, “No. Though, I have met Lotton, and given we share the same rare hair color, and similar skin tone, I can see how the mistake could be made.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Rock thought, 'Damn. I see this is not going to work. And the longer I stay here, the greater chance of me being exposed to those whom are not the writer.' He looked over at Violin and Scorpius, as he continued his thoughts, 'Also, I will check with Violin, on if Scorpius has anything to say, later.'
Rock looked around the table, as he stated, “Well, to be honest, I think it is time for Molly and I to go.”
Molly turned to Rock, as she looked at Rock's expression. Molly saw that Rock was serious. She continued to look at Rock, as responded, “Yes. I believe I have to meet with my parents soon, anyway.”
Violin realized what was going. She cover Rock and Molly, as she lied, “Yes. And I think Aeryn is expecting me back soon.”
Lee could tell that Scorpius was failing at hiding her smirk, as the three adult make such obvious lies.
Daiyu commented, “And I have things to do today, as well.”
Lee smiled inwardly, as he thought, 'Chang is likely be honest. And it look like they are finally cutting their loses, and calling it a day for this attempt at catching me. And none too soon.'
Though, Lee did not let his guard down, as he watched the Rock, Violin, and Daiyu, collect their money.
Rock, Molly, Scorpius, Violin, and Daiyu, got up from their chairs. They walked over to the bar counter, to pay their tabs, while left their tips for bartender.
Lee watched all five adults leave out the front door, with the door closing behind them.
Lee then watched them, through the windows of the bar, walk to the left side of the building.
When the adults were out of side, at the left front corner of the building, Lee did not show it on the outside. But, he thought, with relief, 'That was too close. But, while I lost a little money. I manage to keep most of what I had on the table. From the look of cash by Sam, he did about the same. Also, my hide is intact.' He then felt that his bladder was full. He mentally added, 'Now, to take a piss.'
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “I will be right back.”
Sam replied, “No problem.”
Lee then got up, to go to the men's restroom, as the bartender headed to the table, to clean up, for Sam and Lee.
(_)
Outside, near the parking lot of the Rats Nest bar, the five adults came to a stop, at the front left corner of the building, so those inside could not see them, through the windows of the building.
The five adults turned to look at each other.
Violin turned to Scorpius, as she asked, “Did either of those two men lie to us?”
Scorpius answered, “Not once.”
Violin replied, “Thank you, for doing this, Scorpy.”
Scorpius responded, “No problem, John. I am interested in meeting this writer, as well.”
Molly said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Well, this was a bust.”
Rock commented, “Well, if that is the case, then neither of them are the writer. And that eliminates those two from the suspect list.”
Molly conceded, “Perhaps.”
Rock offered, “Do any of you need transportation to the hotel? Molly would be more than happy drive you there, with us.”
Violin shrugged, as she answered, “Sure.”
Molly commented, “It is parked across the street.”
Violin replied, “Okay.”
Daiyu said, “Well, I really do have errands to run. Though, I plan to swing by there later, this afternoon.”
Scorpius stated, “I have my own way home.” She turned to Violin, as she commented, “Thank you for the tour, John. It was fun.”
Violin turned to Scorpius, as she responded, “You're welcome. And see you later.”
Scorpius replied, “You, as well, John.”
The group then broke up. Violin, walked with Rock and Molly, across the street, to nearby the parking lot, and to Molly's car. Molly car was not the red GTO, but a more modern four door car.
Daiyu walked in a similar direction away from the bar. And Scorpius walked to the left side of the building, and towards the back of the bar, where she planned to use her reality jumping device.
(_)
Through the window, Lee saw the five adults come back in sight, though the windows.
A minute later, the five adults disappeared from his sight.
Lee then thought, 'Now, to deal with something I been wanting to do for almost and hour.' He turned to Sam, as he said, “I will be aback in a minute. To continue our game.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he responded, “Take your time. I am in no rush.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee then got up from his chair, and he headed for the door to the men's restroom, near his and Sam's table, close to the middle of the back wall of the room.
(_)
A minute later, Lee was inside the Rats Nest men's restroom.
After Lee relieved himself in one of the urinals, and zipped the fly on his pants back up, he walked over one of the restroom sinks.
While he washed his hands from lukewarm water from the sink, and liquid soap, from a soap dispenser mounted on wall above the sink, he thought, 'The bartender really keeps these restrooms clean. Even the stalls have plenty of toilet paper. Though, I have only been in the men's restroom, I am sure she keeps the women's restroom just as clean, or cleaner.'
Lee finished washing his hands, turned off sink and shook the water off his hands. With him planning to use the blow-drier mounted on the wall, by the sink, in a few seconds. Though, there was a mounted roll of paper talks by the wall, above the trash can. With both those items being on the other side of the blow-drier, from the sink.
As Lee shook his hands, he heard a familiar feminine voice come from one of the stalls behind him, say, “You know. The interesting trick with these reality devices is that such a device will take a person anywhere, or at any time, across the multiverse, itself. Or, just to a nearby men's restroom stall, to wait for a stressed out fool to show up.”
Lee looked into the mirror above the sink to see the reflection of Scorpius standing in the open stall behind him.
Lee quickly turned around to face the alien woman, as Scorpius walked out of the stall.
Scorpius came to a stop, as she stood less than took feet in front of Lee. With Lee's back to the sink.
Scorpius complimented, “You gave quite the performance, at the poker game, Lee. Or should I say, Paul?”
Lee thought, 'Oh crap. My luck just ran out. She will know if I lie to her. So, I might as well play this straight, and out in the open.'
Lee soberly asked, “What tipped you off?”
Scorpius smirked, as she said, “You only lied to me once. And it was that one lie that tipped me off to your identity. You claimed that you were anxious because of sexual attraction, but your sex organ, below you waist never enlarged once. You clearly knew about my heat sense, and the only person from this reality who would recognized me as a woman, on the spot, would be the so-called writer.”
Lee asked, “Now what? Are you going to tell the others?”
Scorpius got closer to Lee, as she stated, “No. I won't tell the others. You see, Lee. You gave me everything I could possibly want, and more. Now, it is my turn to give you something in return.”
Without warning she suddenly kissed him on the lips.
Lee did not dare stop her, as he thought, 'I know where this is going. I am not going to be able to stop this. I might as well do my best to mitigate the situation.'
A few seconds later, as Scorpius broke the kiss, Lee requested, “Before we go any further, please let me pull out of a condom from my pocket.”
Scorpius complimented, “Intelligent thinking. Which is something that I like in any person I am with.”
(_)
Ten minutes later, Sam and the female bartender watched as men's restroom door opened, and Scorpius exited the men's restroom. Her clothes neat and mostly unwrinkled. She had a smile of satisfaction on her lips, as she elegantly walked by the two adults, and towards the front door. She soon exited the Rats Nest, through the front door, without looking back.
A minute later, the men's restroom door opened, and Lee stumbled out of the men's restroom. The front, left side of his shirt was partly untucked. He was missing his hat and glasses. And his hair was a mess.
Lee's look caused both Sam and the bartender to chuckle a little.
Lee walked over the bar counter, to where the bartender was right across the counter.
Lee put his right elbow onto the counter, as he laid the right side of his face, onto the open palm of his right hand. While having his face in his right hand, he turned to the bartender, as he ordered, “A bottle of decent liquor, and a normal glass.”
The bartender retrieved the two items for Lee request, from under the bar counter. She set the glass and sealed liquid bottle on the counter, in front of Lee. She then looked at Lee, as she inquired, “Did you and her?”
With the bottle and glass on the table in front of him, Lee sat up, as he took his right elbow of the table. Lee opened up the liquor and pour some into the glass.
After taking a swallow of the alcoholic drink, he set down the glass. He then looked at the bartender, as he answered, “This is a case where the sex was really good, though quick, with someone I really did not want to do it with. But, it could have been far, far worse. So, I am not going to complain. At least, I had the sense to use a condom.”
The bartender complimented, “Smart thinking. You don't want to get some crazy woman pregnant.”
Lee agreed, “Amen to that. You are preaching to the choir.” He then took another swallow of liquor. After which, he requested, “And could we keep this indiscretion quiet from the others?”
The bartender replied, “Of course.”
At their usual table, Sam overheard the conversation. He stated, with Lee's back to him, “Sure. And if you get drunk. I will even help you get back to the hotel. I am still fairly sober. And I will be fine to drive in about an hour.”
Lee looked at the bartender. He then turned to Sam, as he said, “Thanks guys.” He looked back to the counter, as he drank some more liquor. He thought, 'I am not going to get drunk. I am just going to drink enough take the edge off of the increasing insanity in my life. I am not even going to get buzzed. And I should be fine to drive in a few hours.'
A few minutes later, after Lee was able to collect himself, he returned to the men's restroom to collect his hat and glasses. He then put them on, returned to the main room. He then took the glass, bottle, and cap to the bottle, with him to the table Sam and him had been seated at. A few minutes later, he continued his poker game with Sam.
Though, Lee took his time in drinking. And he did not even get buzzed, as he drank his liquor. After he felt a little better, he capped the bottle of liquor. Which he was planning to pay for. And he then ordered some more lemonade to drink.
(_)
A few hours, after Rock, Molly, Violin, Scorpius, and Daiyu left the Rats Nest bar, around four PM, Chang, was in her female form, as Daiyu, as she walked into the Devil's Hotel restaurant, while wearing the same clothing she had on in the Rats Nest bar.
As Daiyu came to a stop right inside entrance of the restaurant, she looked around the room, and she saw that only other person in the room was the bartender.
The bartender, Melvin, was standing behind the bar counter, on the far side of the bar counter. Where the counter turned to faced the front of the room, with sitting in a stool, on that part of the counter.
With Melvin on the interior side of the counter, he was facing the back of the room, as he used a rag to wipe down the top of the counter.
Daiyu thought, 'Perfect. Last night, River stated these men are smarter than the look. So, I am checking them out. And after meeting Sam and Lee, there clearly is more to these men, than meets the eyes.'
'For example. All my research about this town states two interesting facts about Pedro. First, he is a serious badass. And second, Pedro has a brother that used to run the mafia of this island. And the two of them worked together. If my dates are correct, Pedro brother, Paciano left down a little while after Revy and the others showed up.'
'It is possible Pedro's brother realized whom Revy and the others were, and he ran. Which would be very intelligent of him.'
'Also, none of the cops here have come near this hotel, since Revy and the others came here. Except for collecting the corpses of some fools that underestimated my friends. And with Pedro coming to the talent contest. That could mean that Pedro knows who we are, as well. Which might mean he recognized me, and River, as well. That could cause problems. I will just have to keep an eye on him.”
“Lee and Sam are playing some type of game. I am not sure what. But, they are using poker as a cover. I cannot find anything on either of them. But, that only makes me more interested in them.'
'And now to find out about Melvin. All my research on him states that he has been here for five years. And that everyone seems to like him. But, before five years back, he is a ghost. No records. Nothing.'
'And when I saw his face last night, something in the back of memory makes me think I have met him before. But, that should not be possible... Unless, he is who I think he is. In which case, this city has become even more interesting. Still, he had no accent when speaking english last night. Though, being able to do that might be a sign that he is in hiding.'
'As such, I need to find out if he is who I believe him to be.'
'Now, I just have to play this right, to get what I want from him. While also confirming his identity.'
Then, Daiyu walked over to the bar counter. As she approached Melvin, she saw that Melvin continued to have his back turned to her.
After she sat down in a stool, near the front part of the bar counter, which was facing the left side of the room. She turned to her right side, in her stool, as she looked across the bar, to Melvin. She ordered, in english, “Bartender. I will have a Jack and Cola, with some ice in a glass.”
The bartender let go of his rag, as he leaned up. He then turned to look over at her for a few seconds, before he replied, in english, “Just a minute.”
As Melvin went over to fix Daiyu her drink, he thought, 'Oh crap. Chang is here. And no one else is. This is not good. This is a perfect time to ambush me. Though, if I play this cool, I should be fine. If not. I am going to have to shoot my way out of here. And I have to be honest with myself. My chances are not good.'
'Though, I am happy that she is sitting where Lee and Sam usual sit. Right in front of my Tokarev.'
Melvin first cleaned his hands in a sink, under the bar counter. He then dried his hands on a clean rag. Next, he got a clean glass. He poured a shot of Jack Daniel's whiskey into the glass. He opened a can of Coca Cola, and poured some cola into the glass. Finally, he dropped a couple of pieces of ice into the glass, without allowing the drink to fizz over the glass.
When the drink was finished, Melvin brought the drink over, and set it down, on the counter, in front of Daiyu.
Daiyu picked up the drink, took a sip. She swallowed, and set the drink back down on the counter. She looked up at Melvin, as she complimented, “Good job with the drink. It is just the right mix.”
Melvin flatly said, “I am glad you like it.”
Just as Melvin was about to turn to his left, and walked away, Daiyu requested, in an innocent tone of voice, that didn't fool Melvin for one moment, “Please stay. I like to talk to people as I drink.”
Melvin thought, 'I have no choice, but to play along. Still, it is best to be prepared. Fortunately, Change sat down in the middle of the long end of the counter, where I keep my pistol.'
Melvin turned back to look at Daiyu, as he walked up closer to the bar counter.
Melvin kept his right hand below the bar, right on the grip of the holstered TT thirty-three Tokarev pistol under the counter, in its holster. Though, his pistol had a bullet in the chamber, it was half-cocked, so the trigger could not be accidentally pulled, with the gun firing.
Melvin then slowly pulled his pistol out of its holster, though he kept his pistol below the bar counter, as he pointed it at Daiyu.
As the went on, Melvin maintained a calm mask, as he looked at Daiyu's face. Which him being careful not to look below Daiyu's neckline, and at her breasts.
Meanwhile, Daiyu looked at Melvin's face, as she thought, 'Hmm. Good drink. Now, to get to the heart of the matter.'
Daiyu inquired, “I have a question for you. Have you even been to Thailand?”
Melvin maintained his mask of calmness, as he thought, 'She recognizes me. And she is trying to bait me. Still, Chang is too good for me to try to directly lie to her. I am going to have to play this the long way around.' He coyly said, “Thailand is a long way from Mexico.”
Daiyu hid her smile, as she thought, 'Nice deflection. And that was not a, no. Now, to turned up the heat.' She stated, “I would like to tell you a story.”
Melvin thought, 'I would bet money that Chang's story is about me and her, with it leading up to her knowing who I am. But, I cannot stop the situation.' He said, “Sure.”
Daiyu commented, “A long, long time ago, when I was Thailand, I knew a woman there. She had bodyguards with her. Not that she needed them. And some of those bodyguards were one known as members of the VDV. Or, Vozdushno-Desantnye Vojska...”
Suddenly, Daiyu heard a click, and she immediately went silent. She realized that Melvin's right hand was likely holding a pistol, aimed at her, from under the bar counter, with him using his right thumb to fully cock back the hammer of the weapon. When the pistol hammer was fully cocked back. He removed his thumb to the side of the grip, away from the slide. And he placed his right index finger lightly on the trigger, with him ready to use his weapon at a moments notice.
Melvin thought, 'Screw this. We both know she knows who I am. And I am not good enough to convince her otherwise. I might as well make the first move.'
Melvin looked directly into Daiyu's glasses, as he calmly stated, “Fair warning, Chang. I am a, Han shot first, type of hero.”
Daiyu thought, 'Oh hell. He is Yuirck. And he had read the stories. Still, I can probably dodge the bullet. If I have to. But, I want to know more about him. This is starting to get interesting.' She smirked, as she looked Melvin his eyes. She asked, “So, you have read the stories?”
Melvin thought, 'No point in denying anything, now.' He flatly answered, “Yes. And I have seen the Black Lagoon series. It is interesting to see things through the other side of the looking glass.”
Chang responded, “That is very true. Let me guess. You are using a TT thirty-three Tokarev semi-automatic pistol? By the way, is your pistol a pre-nineteen forty-seven model? Or, a post-nineteen forty-seven model?”
Melvin complimented, “My pistol is a post-nineteen forty-seven model. And you were always sharp, Chang. I admired that about you. Even when we are were on opposing sides, in Roanapur.”
Chang pointed out, “Thanks. And you know you cannot take me. And I came here to chat. Not to fight. And I have no intentions turn you in, for Balalaika...” She then stated, in a more firmer tone of voice, “So, take you hand off your gun, before things turn ugly for you.”
Melvin thought, 'When Chang is in a playful mood, he, or in this case, she, tends to benefit everyone around her.'
Below the counter, Melvin pointed the pistol away from anyone, while he kept his right finger on the trigger guard. He then removed the magazine of his pistol. He set the magazine on a shelf below, and behind the counter. He then used his left hand to pulled back the slide and catch the bullet ejecting from the chamber. After which he dry fired it away from him and Daiyu.
Melvin then loaded the round into the magazine, put the magazine back into the pistol. And with the chamber of the weapon empty, he placed the pistol in the holster, under the bar counter.
Melvin turned to look at Daiyu, and Daiyu looked back at him.
Daiyu complimented, “Now, that is a good boy. So, you are Yurick, the Blade?”
Melvin answered, “Yes.”
Daiyu thought, 'Of all the places for him to end up, it had to be the same place as where Revy and the others think the writer is. I don't think this is completely consequential. But, I have no proof to back that up. Still...' Daiyu said, “Well Yurick, Balalaika has been trying to find you for over a year. She does not like it when one of her men, or except for you, now women, go off the reservation.”
Melvin deadpanned, “I am aware of that. And it has been five year for me. Also, I would prefer that you call me by my alias, Melvin?”
Daiyu commented, “Okay Melvin. And time dilation does have its benefits. You have enjoyed five years of peace, to Balalaika's one year of searching for you. By the way, did I hear correctly, from the girls last night? Did you really take away Revy's pistols from her, and put a knife close to her eyes?”
Melvin cracked a grin, as he responded, “Above her left eye. And yes.”
Daiyu complimented, “That is pure badass. I wish I could have seen it.”
Melvin offered, “Actually, this room has security cameras, and I kept a video copy of me doing that. I can get you a copy of that, if you want?” He thought, 'This might help get me out of this mess.'
Daiyu's smile turned more sincere, as she questioned, “Thank you. So, do you know who the writer is?”
Melvin answered, “I do not know who the writer is. But, it seems that Revy, and most of her crew have gone all, Ahab, on him.”
Daiyu stated, “I know. I almost pity that fool... Almost.”
Melvin countered, “Well, after reading the stories, I found that... Except for the gender bending, and associated problems, he didn't really do anything that horrible to any of you.”
Melvin thought, 'The others, in the vats, in book two, are a different matter. But, I am going to give the writer the benefit of the doubt on that, at the time he wrote book two, he likely didn't realize that was happening to real people, in another part of the multiverse.'
Daiyu replied, “Well, between you and me. I agree with you. I owe him a lot. And I have no intention of looking for him.”
Melvin said, “It is nice that some of you are seeing reason. Though, I fear for this city, if the maids ever found out about those stories.”
Daiyu agreed, “No arguments there. One of them is a handful. Both of them on the warpath, working together, terrifies even me... So, who told you about the stories?”
Melvin answered, “Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru told me.”
Daiyu thought, 'Those three told him. Interesting.' She questioned, “So, they know who you are?”
Melvin answered, “Only those three. And I wish to keep it that way. Anyway, they found out, by searching my room. But, they understood my reasons for hiding. And they agreed to keep my identity a secret to everyone else. Still, they would not have suspected anything, if not for the fact some of my old war buddies had come looking for me.”
Daiyu thought, 'I heard about that.' She complimented, “Outside of the Bloodhound, your group has some of the best trackers I know of.”
Melvin replied, “Yes. And not to brag, but I was a pretty good tracker myself, in my youth.”
Daiyu offered, “I could arrange for you to be young again. If you want.”
Melvin stated, “Oh, I know how you would accomplish that. And if I wanted to be young again, for the price of my manhood, I would have taken Balalaika up on her offer. Also, I know the only reason you gained the ability to change genders back and forth, is that the writer has a wicked sense of humor. And he wanted to see how the Serenity crew would act in such as situation. And you just got lucky that you were a member of the Serenity crew, at the time.”
Daiyu thought, 'He did not skim the stories. He actually did read all of those stories.” Daiyu said, “That is true. And boy was Mal pissed when he found out about the stories.”
Melvin inquired, “Speaking of which. How did you find out about the stories?”
Daiyu thought, 'I might as well tell him. He might even get a kick out of it.' She explained, “All of us were on Mars, having a cookout. The cookout was hosted by the Lowe family. That family knows how to cook some really good American food.”
“Anyway, since B is good friends with the Lowe family, and Jayne is good friends with Bob, I and the rest of the Serenity crew, along with Balalaika, but not her women, were there. Bob had even invited Annie. And I contacted Arcee to join us.”
Melvin stated, “Well, you did give Arcee everything she ever wanted in her revenge. I am not surprised you are still good friends.”
Daiyu responded, “Yes. She is a good friend. And she is one of the few people I trust enough that I don't have to worry, should I turn my back on her. Anyway, Ed also invited friends from the Bebop showed up. I have to say, Julia is really growing up. Such a cute girl. She is ten years old, now.”
Melvin thought, 'So, it has been a few years since the stories ended.'
Daiyu smirked, “I know what you are thinking. It has been a few years, for us, in the Cowboy Bebop reality, since the stories ended. And you are right.”
Melvin thought, 'Damn. She is good.'
Daiyu lips curled into a wicked grin, as she commented, “Yes. I am that good.”
Melvin inquired, “Did River turn you into a telepath?”
Daiyu answered, “No. I am just really good at figuring out what a person are thinking. So, as I was saying, we were at the cookout, talking about a number of things, then, for I guess, shits and giggles, Balalaika drops a few bombshells. And she tells us what she learned from Revy. About a four part stories series, titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse.”
“She told us that the stories were about us. And they actually directly effect us. She even gave us data CD copies of the stories for us to read later.”
Melvin sarcastically stated, “I bet that went over well.”
Daiyu said, “Actually, we took the news quite well. With it coming from Balalaika. Whom is not known for playing jokes. We took her claims at face value.”
“Of course, with her being a fan of the one-two punch, she then dropped her other bombshell. That Revy, and her group were in this reality, on this island, looking for the writer of these stories. So, they could have their revenge on him.”
“Balalaika even offered to set up a betting pool on the writer.”
Melvin asked, “What are the odds of the writer getting away?”
Daiyu stated, “Balalaika set the odds to be fifty to one against the writer in escaping this reality. But, given the army of badasses the writer is facing, I think those odds are very generous.”
Melvin replied, “I agree.”
Daiyu thought, 'I am not surprised you would agree.' She mentioned, “And it goes without saying that all of us agreed not to tell Garcia, nor the maids.”
Melvin responded, “Of course. Nobody wants to start a world war over one man. It has been done before. It did not end well for anyone.”
Daiyu stated, “Exactly. And the more time I spend in this reality. On this island. The more I like it. This town is similar Roanapur. Only this place is a lot more orderly.”
Melvin conceded, “Yes. It is. By the way, did that cookout include the Caxton family?
Daiyu answered, “No. Shane, whom is still alive, male, and in good health, along with his family, wisely avoids us. Except for the Lowe family, when we are not visiting. He really does not know what is going on. As far as I know, he still has that high school american football coaching job, on Mars. Well, that Mars.”
“Thought, I guess the Lowe family could have told him. Still, with the stories came to light, the Lowe family, and Bebop crew, politely asked us, including Revy's group, to leave the Caxton family alone, and we all agreed to respect their wishes.”
Melvin stated, “That is comforting to know. I was wondering about Shane and his family. After seeing the whole Blood Trail arc, from the anime point of view, I gained a measure of respect for that man. Not many people would literally put their lives into the hands of their victims. And at the end, he continued to make amends to the Lovelace family.”
Daiyu replied, “You got that right. Though, not the brightest of ideas. I do admire his guts for doing that. Before I knew of Shane. I did not even believe such men existed. Not even Rock, at his best, was that honorable.”
Melvin inquired, “I agree. Now, to the matter at hand. Let me guess. Eventually, you found out that Balalaika lost me here. And with Revy, and her group here, you decided to check things out.”
Daiyu complimented, “You are pretty sharp, yourself Melvin. A week later, after we had the chance to all thoroughly read the stories. And that was a long read. I learned directly from Balalaika, that she also traced you here, to the same hotel that Revy was in.”
“I know that Balalaika was baiting me. That she wanted me to check out this place, time, and reality for her. But, the bait was too tempting, so I came here anyway. When I learned about the talent contest, I decided to make my entrance then, with River by my side.”
Melvin thought, 'Okay. So, you already knew about this place, during that cookout, which happened a week before you heard Balalaika lost me here. Not good. Still, I need to find out how many I of your group, that I have to worry about coming here, to make a mess, while looking for the writer.'
Melvin inquired, “You always were one to make a dramatic entrance. So, how many of you, in your group, are after the writer's throat?”
Daiyu answered, “Not many. And before you ask, most of us could either care less, or want to thank the writer for various things. For example, River likes the writer for helping her become saner. Of those among us, just Mal and Spike want to make the writer suffer. Though, I feel that Balalaika wants to have a word with him, as well. But, even I admit that your former captain can be hard to read.”
Melvin replied, “Yes. She has always been like that. Though, I am surprise that Boris isn't pissed off at the writer.”
Daiyu commented, “Surprisingly, B is not upset. Because the writer gave B the time of both his, and her, life.”
Melvin responded, “From what I read, I do not disagree with your assessment. So, what do you want? You didn't just come here to talk, and out me, as a former Hotel Moscow member. You always have an ulterior motive to your actions.”
Daiyu said, “You are quite correct. I need eyes and ear here, on Revy, and her friends. In exchange, I will keep your secret.”
Melvin flatly stated, “I am not spying on them. Because anything you can do, they will do worse. I would rather turned myself over to Balalaika, than piss those women off.”
Daiyu thought, 'That does make sense. And he has given me a lot of information. So, I got something out this conversation. As such, I will cut him some slack.' She conceded, “You have a point there. And since you have been such a good host, I will keep your secret, for free.”
Melvin responded, “Thank you for seeing reason, Chang. And be warned. If you plan to move to this city, there are things you need to know.”
Daiyu asked, “Such as?”
Melvin answered, “I have been in this city for years. I know the people here. And I know how this town is run. In a lot of ways, this city is more dangerous than Roanapur. There probably more badasses per capita here, than in Roanapur.”
“The only difference is, unlike the rebellious attitudes of those badasses in Roanapur, the badasses of De La Plata Podrido have nothing to prove. They know they are badasses. They come here to live quiet lives, and raise families.”
“If you value your life, do not disrupt their lives. And do not harm them, nor their families.”
“And a number of these badasses are my friends. And a few of them could probably hold their own against the Bloodhound, after her upgrades.”
“In other words, do not cause too much trouble. I have seen what happens when trouble comes to this town. When fools come to this island to make trouble for the locals here. The reprisals are on par with just about anything we dished out, back in Roanapur.”
Daiyu said, “I will keep that in mind.”
Melvin mentioned, “By the way, the drink is on the house. And you can keep the glass.”
Daiyu thought, 'He is subtly telling me to leave. And I admire the way he is doing so. Given he has already told me what I wanted to know, I will respect his wishes, and leave.'
Daiyu said, “Thank you. And have a pleasant day.”
Melvin did not respond, as he watch the women pick up her glass, stand up from her seat, turn towards the front of the room, and calmly walk out the open double-door entrance.
Daiyu exited the room, and turning right, down the hallway, towards the front lobby, and parking lot, where she had her car parked.
When Daiyu was out of Melvin's sight, Melvin carefully pulled out his pistol. He pulled back the slide, to chamber a round, and cock the hammer. He then used both hands to very carefully set his pistol hammer back to being half cocked.
With that done, he placed his pistol back in its holster, under the bar counter.
Melvin then thought, with worry, 'I am so screwed. And there is likely nothing I can do about it.'
Melvin then reflected on his situation for a little while, before some more normal customers came into the bar, and Melvin went back to his job, as the bartender for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
Later that night, Lee was walking down a sidewalks, by a street in the city, to where he had parked his car.
After the long day Lee had, Sam respected his wishes that he wanted some time to himself. So, he skipped supper at the Devil's Hotel. He had not even gotten buzzed that afternoon from the liquor he had. He had not even been drink. With him only drinking for half an hour.
Lee then just had some iced lemonade for the next number of hours, that Sam, and himself, played poker, at the Rats Nest.
As such, Lee had sobered up, by the time he and Sam had to leave. They pay for bills, and left their tips. After which, with Lee sober, he drove Sam to the Devil's hotel, where he dropped Sam, at the entrance to the front lobby of the hotel.
After Lee dropped Sam off at the Devil's Hotel, he went to deserted part of the beach to watch the sunset, and think about his life. Both the recent events in his life, and the much older events in his life.
It was thirty minutes after dark, with Lee look at the waves crashing on the beach, from his car, as he sat on the front hood, when he finally decided to get some super.
Lee then got into his car, started the car, with the headlights on. He then decided where he wanted to go for a late dinner.
Lee wanted to take his mind off his problems, and felt like getting something to eat for dinner at the American Steakhouse he took Eda to, a while ago, would help.
And the meal there did help him. Also, the steak he had was tasty, and tender.
Presently, Lee parked he car, a block from the restaurant. The reason for this was that he didn't want chance any of the women in Revy's crew, nor Chang, or River, learning that he was eating dinner there.
Even Lee realized his pink Cadillac stuck out like a sore thump.
Lee did all this so that he could relax and let his guard down a bit. And it worked.
After paying for the dinner, and leaving a tip, he left the restaurant, to walk to his car.
As he passed by an alleyway, suddenly, several arms grab him from behind, and dragged him into a dimly lit alleyway.
His attackers placed his back against the wall, and he was who is was.
Lee said three girls, in their late teens. They wear all slender and athletic in build. One was a redhead. Another was a pink haired girl. And the third had black hair.
Lee also noted the black haired girl had a ring on her right fourth finger.
Still, Lee was not upset at the situation he was in, considering he know exactly how to handle this. He smirked, as he said in chinese, “From the look of your clothing and weapons. I am guessing that you are chinese amazons. First, I have no interest in fighting you, what so ever. That would be a no win situation for me, from either being engaged to one of you, or being killed. Though, it might not be a good idea to take me away, right now.”
From the shadows in front of Lee, a woman stepped out that Lee recognized.
It was River. She said, in chinese, “He is right. I told you girls this would not be easy. And you cannot take him from his past.”
Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Hi River. I believe this is the first time we have formally met, outside of that talent contest.”
River replied, “Given this is time travel. It depends on your point of view.”
Lee agreed, “Very true, River. And I want you to know. I am a big fan of yours. And it is not just because of your body. It is your intelligence and skills. I am so happy you were able get your head mostly back on straight, by the end of that movie.”
River smiled, as she commented, “Sanity does have its advantages. And you helped me out some more, in that department. Thank you.”
Lee stated, “You're welcome. Too bad about Wash and Book, though. But, I am sure they are in a better place.”
River replied, “I plan on looking into their situations, after this whole mess with you is resolved.”
Lee said, “Well, good luck. I am guessing this is Ranma's bright idea. And I admit, it is a good one. Given the tracking skills Shampoo displayed at the beginning of the Ranma Half series, it would be logical to send them after me. Care to introduce me to these women?”
River responded, “Sure. The redhead is named, Rose. The pink haired girl is, Violet. The raven haired girl is named, Dongmei.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “Better than being named after haircare products.”
River grin got slightly wider, as she replied, “I fully agree.”
Lee casually joked, “River, and her pretty flowers.”
River giggled. She then asked, “Are you flirting with me?”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “River, you are one of the most badass individuals in existence. I would rather make you happy, than sad, or angry.”
River complimented, “Then, this is a good approach.”
Dongmei spoke up, “Why is this fool not worried about us?”
Rose stated, “Dongmei is right. You don't look so surprised to see us.”
Lee explained, “Well, I already had a groundhogs time loop in the present. Along with visitors from the past. So, I am due for a visit from the future. You all being here means I escaped, and they had to use other alternative means to catch me. Besides, take a look upwards.”
All five of them looked up, and it looked like small energy fractures were forming in the night sky.
Violet said, “Oh my.”
Lee said, “River, I would thought you would have explained the rules to them, by now. I guess I will explain them to you. Girls, that is a paradox forming. If you take me from this timeline right now, or blow my cover, reality itself may collapse. Even I didn't dare fully imagine how bad that would be for reality, itself.”
Everyone looked back at each other.
Rose asked, “How do you know the rules?”
Lee smirked, as he replied, “Honey, I literally wrote these rules.”
River said, “Girls, we have to leave him here.”
Lee said, “It is okay. Given how skilled you are, I am sure you will meet me, again. Anyway, have a nice day.”
Lee then walked back to the street, leaving the girls to their own devices, as he headed for his car.
Look took quick look up at the sky, and he saw that the night sky had returning to normal.
Lee dropped his grin, as he let out a breath, in relief. He then thought, 'That was a close one.'
Lee then began thinking of what those chinese amazons looked like.
He thought, 'They were pretty...' He eyes widened, as he remember a few things about one of the girls in that group.
Lee mentally realized, 'What a minute. That ring the black haired girl had on her right forth finger... Though the ring seemed bigger... And her name...'
Lee then recalled one of the more interesting weeks of his time loop, as he immediately reached under his shirt, from his neckline, for the necklace he wore.
While still walking towards his car, Lee pulled it out his ring, and he looked the ring he had looped the string thought.
Lee then tucked his ring necklace back under his shirt. He thought, with mild amusement, 'Ah hell. You got to be kidding me... Well, on the bright side, my cancer will be gone. But, why didn't she recognize me... Of course the amazon brainwashing shampoo. At least she is healthy, and from the look in her eyes, she is sane, and probably happy. And like before, magic explains the black hair.'
Lee continued walking, as he smiled, as he started laughing for several seconds. He continued his thoughts, 'I take this hiding in plain sight to the extreme.'
Lee soon reached his car, and he then headed back to the Devil's Hotel to get some rest.
(_)
The next day, was an average day for Lee and Sam. With things settling down for them, after the talent contest. Except for one difference for Lee.
Someone, driving a modern, black, four door sedan tried to follow him to his meeting with Pedro. Though, he lost the one following him. Lee did this, by doing a low speed chase, and use his extensive knowledge of the roads on the island of De La Plata Podrido.
It was seven ten PM, when Lee reached the Last Resort Diner. Lee saw that Pedro was not that.
As Lee walked to the back right corner booth, which he saw was empty, he thought, 'Before I got here, tonight, I had to lose a tail. And I need to talk to Pedro about who I think it is. I don't see Pedro here. I guess Pedro had similar trouble.'
Lee then sat in their usual booth, in the back right corner of the Last Resort Diner. It was his turn to set with his back to the wall, which allow him to look around the room, and entrance to the dinner.
By then, Mary, the waitress walked up to Lee's booth.
Mary asked, in english, “What can I get for you, Lee?”
Lee looked up at Mary, as he answered, “Nothing at the moment. But, maybe later.”
Mary replied, “Okay.” She then went to serve her other customers, whom were not near the booth Lee was sitting in.
Lee then patiently waited for Pedro do show up.
A few minutes later, Lee saw Pedro walked into the diner.
Pedro turned to his right. Lee and Pedro then looked at each other. After which, Pedro walked over to their booth. sat down, across from him, in their booth.
As Pedro got comfortable in his seat, he looked at Lee. He said, in english, “Sorry, I'm late. But, I had to lose a tail.”
Lee thought, 'I guess I was right? And I wonder if it was the same type of car. If so, it would confirm that the same group was following us. And we can guess who.'
Lee inquired, “Was it a modern, black, four door sedan?”
Pedro immediately picked up on the underlying meaning of Lee's question. Pedro asked, “Did someone follow you in a the same type of car, as the one that followed me, until I lost it?”
Lee stated, “Yes. And we both know who organized those tails for us.”
They said, in unison, “Chang.”
Pedro commented, “I was afraid of this.”
Lee stated, “I would not worry, too much. This is only a logical step he would take, if he plans to set up shop here. He likely doesn't know anything. He is just putting out feelers, considering he saw us judging that talent contest.”
Pedro agreed, “That is likely true. Do you still want to have these meetings?”
Lee answered, “Yes. We will both just have to be more careful in getting here. And leave a little earlier.”
Pedro stated, “Agreed. Speaking of setting up shop, on top of my brother's home, my contacts informed me that Chang bought the other large hotel in town. On the opposite side of the island, from the Devil's Hotel.”
Lee asked, “The hotel on the south end of the island?”
Pedro responded, “Yes. So, with Revy and her crew, in the Devil's Hotel, on the north end of the island. And Chang and his crew in the hotel on the south in the island. I am basically facing problems from both the north and the south.”
Lee thought, 'There is a War Between The States joke in there. But, I don't feel like telling it. So, instead...' Lee sarcastically inquired, “That is just great. Any idea what he plans to do?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. I was talking with another set of contacts on the mainland, this afternoon, and Chang has clearly been here a while. He has already made some very expensive bribes to some powerful players in the government, to look the other way.”
“If what I am hearing in town as well, is true. I think he is going to remodel the hotel as casino, with him setting up his criminal organization here. In your stories, you should have never made his front organization be a casino, with him the casino owner.”
Lee shrugged, as he commented, in a casual tone of voice, “He had the flair for it. But, are least we know where he is, that still gives us an edge.”
Pedro said, “Perhaps. Also, I won't have to worry about him for a while. It will take several months to renovate that hotel.”
Lee sighed. He then stated, “I would not be too sure about that. The man has resources. He will probably have that done within a week.”
Pedro muttered, “That figures.” He then looked at Lee, as he inquired, in a normal tone of voice, “Who should we expect to be with him?”
Lee answered, “Likely, some of his previous subordinates. Also, the Serenity crew, and maybe the Bebop crew. Though, I doubt Ed, nor Ein will be with them, for obvious reasons. Though, Spike will likely bring Julia with her.”
Pedro replied, “That makes sense.”
Pedro thought, 'Though, I will not do anything on Chang's personal, one way of the other, until I can confirm who is with him. Though, there is the elephant in the room, that needs to be asked.
Pedro inquired, “What about Balalaika, B, and Hotel Moscow?”
Pedro mentally reflected, 'If they show up in a big way. I might at least tip Melvin off to them. And help him get off the island. I have a few favors I can call if I want to help someone like that. Or, if I want to disappear, myself. Before, I am disappeared by someone else.'
Lee said, “I doubt Balalaika, B, and Hotel Moscow will come on board. At least not immediately. Balalaika likes to see how a situation turns out, before she walks onto the scene. So, we have some breathing space, on this front. But, not much.”
Pedro thought, 'Okay. Melvin still has a little time to figure out what he wants to do. And so do I. Still...' Pedro stated, “The worst part is that I cannot call for help. They would either not believe me, and perhaps have me committed to a lunatic asylum. With them, at the very least stripping me of my authority. Or, if they did believe me, they will more likely level the city with aerial bombardment, just to make sure they killed these badasses. With the reprisal, from the friends of these badasses, possibly destroying this planet.”
Pedro went onto say, with a sharper, more serious tone of voice, “And I don't think that Chang is going to follow you, once you escape.”
Lee pointed out, “If I can get Revy and her group to follow me, that just leaves Chang and his crew. They are dangerous, but you could probably handle them. You stated you have some badasses in reserve, if you needed them. You might have to call in those markers.”
Lee thought, 'I don't remember if Pedro told me about his reserves in the time loop, or before the time loop. It was just so long ago, that I don't clearly remember.'
'Though, given the seriousness of the situation, I am sure that either way, Pedro will let my comment slide. Still, I need to be careful about slipping like this, again.'
Pedro mentally wondered, 'How do he know about my reserves?... No that it really matters. I may have told him and forgotten.'
Pedro said, “You are right. I just might have to call them in.”
Lee then remember something, as he thought, 'I am going to have to tell Pedro about this yesterday afternoon. If he finds out on his own. Which he might, then he will be upset with me. But, I will give him the edited version of what happened.'
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “Oh. Onto a few other matters. I have some interesting news. I met Scorpius, yesterday. Yes. The female version from my stories. Post book four. Violin brought her by the Rats Nest bar for a visit with Sam and I.”
Pedro replied, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh crap.”
Lee stated, “Calm down. It was not a bad meeting. Violin was there. And Violin gave her the alias, Halley.”
Pedro could not help, as snicker a little at the alias that Violin gave Scorpius. He then said, “Oh yea. Harvey and Halley. I get the joke.”
Lee grinned, as he responded, “I know. So do I. Anyway, she was in town, only for yesterday. So, she was not here to stay. The bad news is she realized who I was. The good news is she said she will keep my identity a secret from the others. And given I am still free, over twenty-four hours after she said she would, I believe what she said.”
Pedro pointed out, “Well, you did give Scorpius a healthy body, and an Empire to run. One of the positive traits that Scorpius has, is that he, or in this case, she knows when to be grateful to someone.”
Lee replied, “Very true. And I think she is very happy with what I gave her. So, I am fine there.”
Pedro noticed something was off about Lee. He took a close looked at Lee's face, as he realized, 'Is he using poker face, right now?... He is... Though, why would he?...' Pedro inquired, in a serious tone of voice, “There is more to this story? Isn't there?”
Lee began, “Well...”
Pedro said, “Come on. Spit it out. It is not like you had sex with the woman...”
Pedro then noticed Lee's expression slightly change to embarrassment, as he his cheeks blushed, at the mention of the word, sex.
Pedro guessed, “You did have sex with her? Didn't you? How could you? Eda, I could understand. But, Scorpius. Dear lord, I thought you had standards.”
Lee verbally defended himself, “First, as a woman, Scorpius is hot.” His lips curled into a mischievous grin, as he continued, “Damn, I do good work in the category.”
Pedro snorted, as he stated, “Yes. We learned that at the nights talent show, two nights ago. Even Chang was hot in her female form.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I know. Anyway. Second, she ambushed me in the men's restroom of the Rats Nest. And with her super-strength, I did not have much choice in the matter. But, I did use a condom.”
Pedro commented, “That was a smart move. Likely, the only smart move, for you, in that entire situation. Though, still a smart move. So, how was it?”
Lee answered, “Quick, but good.”
Pedro said, “Okay. Still, that was a close call.”
Lee deflated, “I know.”
Lee thought, 'I better tell him about the amazons. It is not really bad news after all. Though, will be selective of what I tell him.'
Lee said, in a more calm tone of voice, “Well, I do have other good news. Last night, I was ambushed by some chinese amazons from the same reality, as I guess that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru are from. And River, from the future, was there, leading them.”
Pedro pointed out, with concern in his tone of voice, “That does not sound like good news.”
Lee grinned, as he responded, “It does when I get to the good parts. The second the amazons tried to kidnap me, the night sky started to tear from the paradox. But, the sky returned to normal, the moment River stepped in, and made the three chinese amazon leave this reality, with her. That means we are working under the same time rules as I made in my stories.”
“And this also means that I will eventually escape this reality. And Revy and the others will at least follow me. So, all I have to do is be careful, and figure how to escape this reality.”
Lee thought, 'I will leave the other details of that meeting alone. It is best not even to think about those details, with River in town. She might read my thoughts, and then I am screwed.'
Pedro said, “Well then, good luck, Lee. Though, the fact that River from the future aided you might mean you did not get on her bad side. And you are probably on her good side.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I consider that a plus.”
Pedro inquired, “So, any serious problem today, beside someone trying to tail us both, just now?”
Lee responded, “No. How about you?”
Pedro casually said, “No. Just another day at the office, for me.”
The two men then continued their conversation, with more casual subject, for another ten minutes.
When they concluded their discussion, they left the diner, and headed to their homes, to get some much deserved sleep.
(_)
A week later, Lee and Pedro found out that they were both correct.
That Chang did buy the large hotel on the island. It was located on the opposite side of the island from the Devil's hotel. With Chang's new hotel also being by the beach.
During the renovation of the hotel, Lee took an opportunity one day to drive by building, with his pink car. He saw that it was around the same size as the Devil's Hotel. Even during the time loop, he had not paid much attention to the building, so he was not sure.
Also, it only took Chang, with his interdimensional resources, a little over a week to completely remodel, and have the hotel ready to be opened. This included him bringing in his own people to be the employees for the new casino.
With the employees housing being located in the lower levels of the casino. Except for Chang and River, whom lived in an apartment, on the penthouse level of the building.
Pedro heard about much of them, except for the interdimensional information. He then informed Lee during a nightly meeting. With the two of them putting together the pieces and filling in the blanks for each other.
Also, they were occasionally tailed by other cars, during the day and evening. But, given the skills and knowledge both Lee and Pedro had of the roads of Plata Podrido, they had no problems losing those following them. Before they met each other, in the evening, at the Last Resort Diner.
Fortunately, during this time, nothing serious had happened to neither Lee, nor Pedro. With Lee spending his time with Sam. Though, Sam disappeared on occasion. But, Sam did leave a message at the Devil's Hotel check in desk. So, Lee would know how long Sam would be gone.
Though, Pedro know there was nothing he could do to stop the casino from opening. And he knew better than to try to oppose Chang so directly.
The day after Chang had finished with his casino, had held a grand opening, with him christening his new casino, Daiyu Palace Casino.
Both Pedro and Lee found Chang naming the casino after his female side to be arrogant, and in line with Chang's personality.
And while Lee and Pedro avoided the grand opening, for obvious reasons, such as avoiding River, Revy and the other women, whom went to the opening.
Though, it was reported that the people whom attended the grand opening, had a great time.
(_)
The next morning, after the grand opening of Daiyu Palace Casino, during breakfast at the hotel restaurant, Revy walked over to Lee and Sam, at the bar counter, just as the two men had finished their breakfast.
Revy bragged about how great the opening to the Casino was.
While Lee sat beside Sam, at the bar counter, at their usual place, they had both turned around in their stools, with their backs to the bar counter, so they could both facing Revy.
Eventually, Revy got to the point of why she had wanted to talk to them.
Revy stated, “Given you two are gamblers, I am surprised that I did not see you to at that grand opening of the casino.”
Lee commented, “Given I am precognitive, I am not going anywhere near a casino. If I can help it. They would likely accuse me of cheating. And I like my legs and arms to remain intact.”
Sam said, “I know better than to play professional sharks at poker.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “That is understandable.”
Lee thought, 'This would be a great opportunity to ask a simple introduction question. So, I don't later slip up with the information that I already know. And the information that Pedro is secretly giving me.'
Lee asked, “So, who is the owner of that place?”
Revy answered, “A man named, Chang. I have known him, off and on, for years. He is a nice guy. Just don't get on his bad side.”
Lee replied, “Okay. Thanks for the warning.”
Revy said, “No problem.”
Sam asked, “So, any problems with your group? Given what some of your group has done, during your stay here. And that we all currently live in the same hotel. I would like to know, for my continued well being.” He turned to Lee, as he continued, “Among other people.” He then looked back at Revy.
Lee continued to look at Revy, as he heard Sam's question. He also noticed that Sam had looked at him. He thought, 'Nice Sam. Real nice. Now, that is a fishing question, even I am leery on asking, for a number of reasons. Still, I would like that answer, as well. I can only be helpful to me. And since you, Sam, asked that question. Such inquiry cannot blow back on me.'
Revy answered, “Not really. Though, I am a bit annoyed, right now, with Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Janet. All of them of them wouldn't let me, nor the girls place any of the bets. Though, none of the others placed any bets, either.”
Sam stated, “Revy, consider that a good thing. If you gamble like you drink, you would likely be broke within an hour.”
Lee remained calm, as he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. I hope Sam did not just piss off, Revy. Even after all the training in the time loop, I am not sure I can take her.' He looked over at the tables by the stage, where Revy's family and friends were. He continued his thought, 'Let alone her nearby friends.'
Lee looked back at Revy, as he forced himself to remain calm.
Revy was silent for a few seconds. She then said, in a calm tone of voice, “Perhaps you are right. I use to lose a lot of money to Eda, when we drank together, and played cards.”
Lee did not show it in the outside. But inwardly, he felt relief, as he thought, 'Good. She took the comment well. Though, I do have question for her.'
Lee inquired, “So, I take it that none of you will be moving to that new casino?”
Revy replied, “Nope. We are perfectly happy here.” She mentally added, 'Where we can be closer to finding the writer. It does not take a genius, that with River publicly showing that she is still with Chang. As they showed at the talent contest. That the writer will avoid the casino like the plague.'
'Still, these two fools also have good reasons to avoid the casino. And Violin confirmed, from Scorpius, that neither of them are the writer. So, I don't need to worry about them.'
'Though, Molly is not completely sure. But, we will allow her to continue her inquire, if she wishes to do so. But, that is another matter.'
Lee thought, 'I wonder...' He questioned, “By the way, speaking of Eda, what drinks did you two mostly have, when you played cards?”
Revy commented, “Rum and whiskey. Why do you ask?”
Lee kept his poker face up, as he thought, with amusement, 'Oh. This is going to be so much fun to ask.'
Lee inquired, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, some types of rum and whiskey look like apple juice. So, are you sure she was drinking alcohol, at the same time you were?”
Revy eyes went wide, as she flatly stated, with anger evident in her voice, “That bitch!” She then turned around, and marched back towards her friends, at the tables near the stage.
Lee forced himself to hold back his laughter, Lee and Sam turned back, in their stools, to face the bar counter.
Lee inwardly smirked, as he thought, with delight, 'That will get her off my back for a day. And I doubt she will hurt Eda. I just hope that Eda does not find out that I mentioned this to Revy. I do not her to be upset with me.'
Lee and Sam then went back to enjoying their day, together.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 13: “Patrol Of The Grove.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
On the island city of, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. A few days after Daiyu Palace Casino's grand opening. It was an early morning, right before sunrise. Though, from the twilight of the sun already peeking out, from the eastern horizon, and from the lack of cloud cover, the day was looking to be very sunny.
In the home of Police Chief Pedro Del Soto, in Pedro's bedroom, the first thing he became aware of, as he woke up in his bed, in his moderately sized, and very nice home, was the sound of music playing, at a conformable volume, from the jazz radio station that he set his alarm clock to.
While laying on his back, Pedro leaned up from his bed, as he turned to the nightstand, to his right side, where his clock and lamp were located. He turned on the lamp light on the nightstand, by his bed, as he looked at his alarm clock.
His alarm clock stated it was six thirty AM.
Pedro turned turned off his alarm clock, as he thought, 'At least I did not sleep late... Now, to face the insanity that has become my life. Always work of a hero. This city is not going to save itself. And it is work on a daily basis.'
Pedro then got out of bed, to get ready for the day. With him him quickly making, his bed, before head headed to his nearby bathroom.
Pedro was wearing only a t-shirt and a pair of boxer shorts. And though he was in his forties, he was still in great physical shape.
After a quick trip to his bathroom, for a piss, he walked into his kitchen.
He pulled out a cup, and a jar of instant coffee mix. He used the cup of water to fell the coffeemaker. He then scooped some instant coffee grounds, from a jar he opened, into the coffeemaker, over the filter. After he closed the jar with the coffee grounds, set his cup under the coffeemaker, for some coffee.
A few minutes later, he saw at his kitchen table, as he sipped his coffee, and ate some non-sugary cereal, with milk.
When he was finished, he used the faucet in the kitchen sink, to rinse off his cup bowl, and spoon. He set the dishes into the sink, for him to later put in his dishwasher.
Next, he headed for his bathroom, again.
Once in the bathroom, he shaved his face, and took a shower, among other things.
When he was through with his shower, he dried off with a towel, and he combed his short black hair. He then reentered his bedroom.
After he entered his bedroom, he retrieved the items he needed to put on. He laid the items on top of his bed.
Next, he replaced his boxer shorts and white t-shirt, he put on his socks. He then put on his brown pants, and leather belt.
Among other things, Pedro's pants already had his wallet, police ID, and badge in the side pockets his pants.
He put on his black boots. Next, he laced and tired his boot laces.
After that, Pedro put on his bulletproof vest, which made him look like he was thirty pounds heavier. He then put on his white, long sleeve, button up shirt.
He grabbed the tie he is selected to wear that day. The tie was dark blue. And he walked to the wall mirror in his bedroom. Which was right above his chest of drawers.
After he finished tying his tie, and putting it under the folded turtle neck of his shirt, he walked back over to his bed.
He then put on his shoulder holster. His semi-automatic pistol was already in its holster. With the weapon load, and ready to be used. His semi-automatic pistol was located under his left armpit, there were two full ammo clips, in pooches, in the shoulder holster, under his right arm pit.
He then grabbed his ankle holster, with his loaded, five shot, snub-nosed revolver holstered in it.
Next, Pedro leaned down.
After which, Pedro used his free hand to pulled up the right legging of his pants. He strapped on the ankle holster, around his right boot, with the holster on the outer side of the boot. He then lowered his pants legging.
The pistol the ankle holster held within it was a loaded Smith & Wesson Model thirty-six Chief's Special revolver. The revolver held five, thirty-eight special caliber rounds.
Pedro also already had a knife, a few speedloaders for his chief's special, his wallet, and a few other items in his side pants pockets.
After he leaned back up, he reached for his brown long coat. After that was one. He put on his horn rimmed sunglasses, and finally his dark brown, cowboy hat.
Pedro turned to the mirror to looked at himself. He said, out loud, “Looking good.”
He then turned off the lamp light in his bedroom. Next, he he turned out all the lights that were still on in his home, then he head for his car.
To exit his home, Pedro passed through his living room, which he had his entertainment systems, including both a blu-ray player, computer tower, with internet connection, hooked up to the thin, large, widescreen TV, mounted to the wall on a pivoting arm, across from his coach. With a coffee table between his coach an TV.
There were a few cushioned arm chairs surrounding the couch, in a semi-circle, facing the TV. On the table, there were remotes, wireless keyboard and mouse for his computer.
Instead of going through the front door, he turned and went into the laundry room. From there, he walked into his closed garage, where he had his car parked.
Pedro them walked to the garage door, and unlocked the deadbolt lock he installed on the inside of the garage.
He then walked over and got into this car.
Though, his car was clean on the inside and out, the black four door sedan that had seen better days.
He used the remote in his car to open his garage door. He then started his car as the garage door rolled up.
When he was clear, he back his car out into his driveway. After his car was completely outside, he used the remote to shut his garage back closed.
Pedro then check both ways of the to lane street he was on, then back up into the street.
He then drove forward, to the police station.
(_)
Around ten minutes later, it was seven forty-five AM, as Pedro walked into the Police Station, through the front entrance. A few seconds later, he clocked in, his time card.
After which, Pedro immediately retrieved the folder with reports from last night's events, which was left in the drop box, on the outside wall, to the right of his office door.
Pedro saw that fortunately, the folder was very thin, with likely only a few reports in it.
Pedro then headed for the meeting room of the station, for their daily meeting in the morning, at eight AM, with those officers coming on duty, for their shift. So, everyone was on the same page as to what their job would be for that day.
When Pedro reached the meeting room, he turned on the light. The room had a long rectangular table, with chairs. He sat down at the head of the table, and began looking at the reports, while he waiting for his officers to arrive.
By eight AM sharp, all of Pedro officers, for the day shift, had arrived. Along with a few officers about to get off their shift, but whom wanted to personally report their findings, and actions, before they left to get some sleep in their homes. The officers either sat down at the table, with Pedro, or stood by the back wall, as they faced Pedro.
The officers were mostly men, with a few women. All of whom, Pedro had hand picked for their job. A job Pedro knew they could handle well, and they did, without becoming corrupted by their job. Which none of them did.
Pedro stated, in spanish, “Good morning ladies, and gentlemen. Let us begin.”
Pedro began paging through the folder, looking at the reports inside it. He came to a stop, at one of the pages, as he asked, “It says here that we found a few floaters later night, in the marsh?”
The investigating officer, whom was sitting at the table, answered, in spanish, “Yes. Two bodies. Both male. In their twenties. Both known scumbags. We have suspects. What do you want done with them? Do we bring them in, or make them disappear?”
Pedro looked up from the folder, towards the office, as he asked, “Did the corpses show any signs of torture?”
The officer replied, “No.”
Pedro ordered, “Then, bring them in. If they cannot clean up after themselves, we don't need them here.”
Pedro thought, 'I am very happy that the only person I know of in the city that could do a thorough job of corpse disposal is Sawyer, the former cleaner of Roanapur. And she hated her job, and she likely has no plans to take back up her former profession. It is not the corruption that I worry most about in destroying this city. It is the foolish corruption. I cannot allow killer fools in this town. The military will step in if things here get to out of hand.'
Pedro then looked back into the folder in his hand, as he paged through, and found another report that interested him. He looked up at his officers, as he inquired, “Also, there are reports of a new gang moving into the city, from the mainland?”
Another officer answered, inquired, in spanish, “Yes. And this gang is already trying to extortion the local shops in the east district. We think it is a new group. Maybe twenty members, at most. We have a few leads, but nothing concrete on who they are, and where they are at based at.”
Pedro thought, with disgust, 'I hate extortionists. They are nothing but parasites. They use bullying tactics to take hard earned money from local businesses. At least the drugs dealers and whores bring money into this city.'
Pedro continued to look at his officers, as he ordered, “I want the usual crew to be ready to bust some heads by ten this morning. I am going to take care of this, personally.”
Pedro saw his police officers smile, in response to his comment.
Pedro looked back at his folder. He then found another report that he wished to learn more about. He continued to read the report, as he questioned, “I also see a notation some chinese individuals selling drugs in the open? But, the types of drugs are not list?” He mentally added, 'Please, don't be who I think it is.'
A third police officer, one of the women in the group, said, in spanish, “Yes. Young chinese women, yes women, in black suits were spotted drug dealing to the local pushers on the west area. The reason this has caught our eye was they were doing this pretty much out in the open. No subtlety, whatsoever. And the reason we did not list the drugs names because we wanted to not have an office report on them, until we were sure it should be a matter of record. Some of the drugs have some strange names on their packaging, like dust and spice.”
Pedro looked up at his officers. He did not show it outwardly, but he inwardly cursed, 'Damn! Chang is starting to make his move. And he is adding fictional drugs to the mix, in this city. If the rest of the world gets wind of this stuff, it will cause the army to invade my town, to figure out what is going on.'
'I wish my brother was still in charge of the local cartel. He kept things calm and smooth. But, he got smart, ran, and joined the priesthood. On the other hand, I got handed the crap he left behind as his organization folded up and every god damn crooked fool in a hundred kilometers thinks they can come in a replace him. With Chang being the most dangerous. And I am going to have to eventually confront that super-human, gender bending, dimensional, badass warlord sometime... I just don't want too.'
'He could take on my entire police force by himself and win. I know that. And I do not have any real options to stop him. The only advantage is he does not know I am on to him. At the same time, I have to avoid River, or that telepath will blow everything out of the water for Melvin, Lee, and myself.'
'My only lucky break has been the politics up north has made the land border so open that most smugglers prefer to go over land, instead of sea. This is kept the major players on the mainland from taking a serious interest here.'
Pedro complimented, “Wise thinking our your part. Do not list the names of the drugs on the records. Also, pick those sellers up. But, do so politely. Anyone this brazen, and wearing such fine suits, is either crazy, or well connected. We need to find out which. And keep the drugs for future research, and matching purposed So, we have a sample of them to compare later, if they crop up again, and they hit our streets again.”
“And no sampling. These drugs are new. We do not know how dangerous they are, or the effects they have on people. If any of you do so, I will have your ass, and likely your job. These could be extremely addictive, on part heroin, or worse. Where it is not easy to kick. And with such a limited subjecting yourself to hell, when you are forced to endure withdraw, from their being no more of those drugs.”
“Also, since these drugs are new, we need to keep this quiet, for several reasons. Along with not listing them in the official records. Do not talk about them outside of the station. Because, no matter how you look at it. These drugs are trouble. And we do not need trouble.”
Pedro thought, 'Especially since we have our hands full. And these new drugs showing up, is bad news for everyone. Chang just does not realize that yet. But, if I do this right, I will be able to inform him later today.'
Pedro looked back down at the open folder. The officers stated quiet, as he finished paging through folder, half a minute later. He did not see anything else that caught his interest.
Pedro closed the folder and held it in his right hand. He looked up at his officers, as he asked, “So, is there anything not in this report?”
A fourth officer spoke up, in spanish, “Yes. This morning, my partner and I found out, from our sources, that someone is trying to set up a new whorehouse.”
Pedro turned to the officer that spoke up. He commented, “Unless it is part of the slave trade, I do not see the problem with that.”
The fourth officer stated, “No slaves involved. As far as we know. But, they are selling kiddie porn, and snuff films.”
In response, Pedro grimaced, as he inquired, “That is a problem. Who is this fool with a death wish?”
The officer stated, “The person goes by the name, Rowan Pigeon. I guess that person has a sense of humor, and an anime fan.”
Pedro thought, 'Yes. I showed a number of your, the Black Lagoon anime, which is one of the reasons I am ordering you to stay away from the Devil's Hotel, and this new Daiyu Palace Casino. I do so, for you continued protection.'
'But, there is another possibility. The person really is Rowan Pigeon, owner of the Jackpot, in Roanapur. Likely the scummiest person to come from Roanapur. I thought Lee would have killed him off. But, the writer just refuses to kill the characters he plays with.'
'Lee even brings some of them back from the dead, through reincarnation. Just another mess caused by Lee that I have to clean up, without alerting Revy's group, nor Chang's groups.'
'Some days I am tempted to throw Lee to those wolves, whom are after him. But then, I would have no one to act as a buffer between me and the insanity he brought my city.'
Pedro ordered, “Go pick him up. I will deal with him this the afternoon.”
The fourth officer corrected Pedro, as he said, “Her, sir. Not a him. The suspect is a woman.”
Pedro grimly thought, 'That likely Rowan has undergone the vat process as well. And she is likely a super-human, as well. I am going to have to call, Lee. Again. I do not like calling that man for advice. But, his advice is almost always solid. And this cannot wait for our meeting, tonight.'
'Still, back to the matter at hand. Fighter, or no fighter, I have to have my officers use kid gloves on those that have super-human abilities. Or, my officers might be seriously injured, or killed.'
'What was that term that Superman used in Justice League Unlimited finale? Ah yes, the world of cardboard speech. To that end, inexperienced super-humans may no know their own strength. And if they panic, they might kill someone, before they realize it.'
Pedro ordered, “Pick her up, and bring her here. But, treat her gently.'
The fourth officer nodded once, as he replied, “Yes, sir.”
Pedro state, “Okay. I believe we have covered everything. Anything else, anyone want to say?”
Pedro waited for a few seconds. But, no one replied.
Pedro then said, “Okay. This meeting is over. If you need anything, I will be in my office.”
Those officers, including Pedro, that were sitting, got up from their chairs, and all the officers left the meeting room.
Pedro was the last one out. He turned out the lights, and shut the door to the room, behind himself.
(_)
An hour later, Pedro was sitting behind his desk, in his office. He had already booted up his computer, and logged on top his account.
He had spent the last hour reading online forums, and news websites. This including checking on the local news in his home nation, Mexico.
Fortunately, the reality traveling madness that had come to De La Plata Podrido, had yet to be picked up by anyone. No even the conspiracy websites.
But, Pedro knew that it was likely only a matter of time. And then the real insanity would begin.
He also checked his e-mail on daily police reports, sent to him from the mainland, on gang reports and movements.
Pedro looked over at the clock on the computer monitor.
He thought, 'Nine ten AM. Lee should be having breakfast, right now.'
Pedro picked up his wireless phone, from its base, on his desk. He dialed the phone number for the Devil's Hotel Restaurant, and Bar.
When the phone was answered, Pedro heard a woman say, on the other end of the line, in spanish, “Devil's Hotel. What can we do for you?”
Pedro instantly recognized the voice has he requested, in spanish, “Hello Emily. I thought you, and your family, would be shark fishing by now?”
Emily stated, “Hi Pedro. And no. Not yet. We are going on vacation, next week. But, thanks for asking.”
Pedro thought, 'It is nice that the management for Emily and Grace are flexible on given them time off. Though, it is without pay. But, if they, Sans, or Isandro, have any problems. They can call me, and I will help fix those problems.'
Pedro commented, “Be careful, and I hope you have fun. Now, can you please get Lee, for me? I need to speak to him.”
Emily said, “No problem. I see him nearby, with his friend.”
Pedro thought, 'Yes. Sam. Those two are clearly good friends.' He replied, “No problems.”
A few seconds later, over the phone, Pedro heard Lee voice say, in english, “Hello.”
Pedro inquired, in english, “Hey Lee. It is Pedro. I have an important question for you. Did you give Rowan the vat process?”
Pedro thought, 'I am sure that Lee will recognize my voice. And we have to be careful, in case the phone lines are tap. Though, given I had to get Emily, to bring the phone to Lee. With Emily mentioning my name. There is nothing we can do about it, with the call. We will just have to be more careful, when we contact each other.'
(_)
At that moment, in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, at the bar counter, Lee had stopped eating his breakfast, to answer the wireless phone in his right hand. Sam was to his left, beside him at the counter, eating his own breakfast. And Emily stood across from him, behind the bar, with a patient look on her face.
The problem was that Sawyer, Lotton, and Shenhua, wanted to do something different that day. Instead of eating with their friends, at the tables, near the stage, they decided to eat at the bar, by Sam and Lee.
To Lee's right, in the stool next to his, as Sawyer. On Sawyer's right, sat Lotton. And to Lotton's right was Shenhua. All three women were having their breakfasts.
And taking into account the close proximity to three people after him, and with their enhanced hearing, When Lee received the phone, he had pressed the earpiece of the phone against his right ear, so the women did not over hear what the person on the other end was saying.
Also, he had seen from the corner of his right eye, that the women by him had not paid much attention to Lee conversation. Though, he did not turn his head in the women's direction, for concern of catching their attention.
Lee looked ahead of him, at the shelves on the wall, across from the bar counter, as he maintained his poker mask. He thought, 'I am glad I took the precaution of pressing the phone to my ear, or Pedro my have accidentally blown my cover. And, from the corner of my right eye, they do not seem interested in my conversation. So, I caught a lucky break here. Though, I do not dare look at them, for they might then start paying attention to my phone call.'
'Also, I am glad Emily did not mention who it was in front of the girl. I do not think they noticed when Emily picked up the phone. And she was speaking in spanish. But, I noticed. And from their conversation, I can tell that Pedro is good friends with Emily. Though, that is a matter for another time.'
'Now, given how close the girls are, I am going to have to reply, to Pedro, in code. Though, this is not the first time I had to do so. And Pedro is quick enough on the uptake, to understand, and keep up with me.'
Lee continued to look in front of him, as he cryptically said, “Man, it is to early for jokes And you know I cannot say that in polite company. But, in all honestly, I found ignoring a problem is sometimes best recourse.” Lee then hung up the phone, and handed it back to Emily.
As Emily took the phone, she asked, “What was that about?”
Lee replied, with his face in his hands, “You don't want to know, Emily. Just someone with poor taste. And poor timing.” He thought, 'Which is mostly true. Those Pedro is polite to me, most of the time.'
Emily merely shrugged her right shoulder, in response to Lee's comment. She then turned and walked over to place the phone back one its base, before heading back to the cash register, at the end of the bar counter, near the entrance to the restaurant.
Meanwhile, Sam turned to Lee, as he said, “By the way, I am going to be busy today. So, you will be on your own.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he stated, “That is okay. I have other things I can do. Though, thank you for letting me know in advance.”
Sam replied, “No problem.”
Meanwhile, Sawyer, Lotton, and Shenhua did not pay attention towards Sam and Lee, as they continued eating their meal.
With, Sam and Lee also going back to finishing their breakfast, as well.
(_)
At that moment, in the Plata Podrido Police Station, inside Pedro's office, across town, the line went dead.
Pedro calmly placed the phone back on its base.
Pedro was not angry with Lee suddenly hanging up the phone on his end. Because, Pedro understood what Lee was trying to cryptically tell him.
Pedro calmly thought, “We played this game before. What he said, between the lines, was that the girls were nearby, and that he ignored Rowan in his writes. Which, from what I remember reading of his stories, is correct... And now that I think about it. I continue to feel like we are in a really intense spy thriller. Still, I will find out this afternoon. Right now, I have to prepare to kick ass, and take names, at ten, this morning.'
Pedro then when back to checking the internet, for any useful information, as hew patiently waited until it was time for him to leave, in the morning.
(_)
Forty-five minutes later, it was nine fifty-eight, Pedro set his computer to a password protected screensaver. He then got ready to head out.
Soon after, Pedro walked out his office, with his coat, hat, and sunglasses on. Also, his police radio clipped to the left side of his belt.
He sat that his personal crew of five plain clothes officers were ready.
Pedro smiled, as he said, in spanish, “Let me get mister justice, and I will be ready to go.”
Pedro walked back into his office, turn to his left, and retrieved his wooden baseball bat from the corner.
As he walked back out of his office, he shut the door behind him. He looked at his men, as he stated, “Alright boys. I am ready to go.”
One of the officers asked, “Where are we going?”
Pedro answered, “Delgado's.”
He then starting walking towards the back exit of the police station, and to the parking lot. With his five men behind him.
(_)
Ten minutes later, three, four door, black sedan cars parked in front of Delgado's. A local pool hall.
As Pedro got out of his car, with one of his officers, Pedro noticed that it has becoming a beautiful, cool, sunny morning, with a light sea breeze.
Meanwhile two officers got out of each of the other two cars.
Pedro had his bat in his right, hand as he ordered, “Gentlemen, follow me.”
Pedro walked into the pool hall first, with his five men right behind him.
Pedro looked around to see about eight men there, but not the man he wanted to see.
Most of the men were playing pool at some of the table, as they held their cue sticks.
Still, all eyes turned to look at Pedro and the newcomers.
Pedro held his bat behind his neck, with both his hands, as he loudly warned, in spanish, “Listen up boys. Behave, and things will not get ugly.”
Pedro then dropped his bat to his side, as he thought, he thought, 'Well, since I have no real leads, I will go to the one person still in town that could give me answers. The one guy in my brother's group that did not immediately run. A local bookie, money launder, and owner of this pool hall, whom knows his time here is limited.'
Pedro looked around the room, as removed his bat from his neck, as he held it downward, to his right side, by the handle, with his right hand. He firmly stated, “Novio Delgado. I know you are here. So, come on out. I am not here to arrest you.”
A few seconds later, a skinny, gray haired, hispanic man, whom looked like he was in his early fifties, stood up from his hiding place, behind one of the pool table, in the back of the room. The man's gray hair was short, and he wore a brown leisure suit, with a light brown tie, and black dress shoes.
As Pedro calmly walked over to the skinny man, he thought, 'Ah, Novio Delgago. A mobster of a previous age. And age that understood discretion was the better part of valor. That a mafia organization did not have to have a small army to function, and make a profit. Paciano was smart to hire him, years ago, after most of his previous group got busted, except for him, and a few others.'
'Also, I know for a fact that my brother showed him that Black Lagoon series. So, Novio at least has a clue about what is going on right now. And he knows better than to outright state who has come to town.'
When Pedro reached Novio, both men looked at each other.
Novio said, in spanish, “Hi Pedro.”
Pedro responded, “Hi Novio. Look... We both know who has come to town. With them setting up shop here. And we both know that you are desperate to raise enough money, to leave the city permanently, before they get around to coming after you.”
Novio stated, “That is an understatement. I will be honest, I really didn't believe your brother, that night our group left town. That is why I stayed in town. Then, I did some digging. And Mister Del Soto. And more are coming here. They even opened up that casino. He opened up that casino. We both know that behind that smile of his, he is a ruthless as they come.”
Pedro said, “I know.” He thought, 'Oh boy, do I know.'
Novio commented, “It is like the gates of hell just opened. And I just want get out of here. But, I am a man of specialize skills, and I don't know anyone outside of this city that would hire me. And I don't have enough money yet to leave town for good. To make matters worse, everyone in this business, that has a brain, is also jumping ship. Business has been on the decline.”
Pedro offered, “I know how you feel. You know I can help you get out of here. You help me. I help you. I am looking for some fools from the mainland that are trying to extort people here.”
Pedro saw Novio's eyes look into his, then shift to Novio's right side, near some thugs, playing pool, at the nearby tables. And finally, Novio's eyes shifted back at Pedro's own eyes. Novio stated, “Pedro. You know I cannot say anything to you.”
Pedro thought, 'Ah. But, you already did.'
Though, just as Pedro was about to turn to confront the men nearby, from the corner of his left eye, he saw one of the men rush at him, using a cue stick as a club against him.
Pedro immediately brought up his wooden bat, and he swung it at the cue stick.
The cue stick shattered the moment it made contact.
With Pedro's next swing, he knock the thug down onto a pool table.
Pedro lips curled into a feral, toothy grin, with a wild expression on his face, for only a second, as he used his wooden baseball bat to brain the man to death, against the pool table. Pedro's then caught himself, as he forced himself back to having a calm expression on his face.
At the same time, the other seven thugs charged at the Pedro's men. His men quickly pulled out their pistols and killed them where the stood. Though, his men angle their shots away from Pedro and Novio.
As the situation calmed down, Pedro turned to Novio, as he said, “Sorry for the mess.”
Novio stated, “No problem. Before you came in, those fools just kept bragging about how big and bad they were. And how they were going to clean out this town. All the while, they threatened me. If I did not help them, they would kill me. Fools. All of them. They just did not want to take the time to learn how crime was conducted in this town. Because of all that, I was planning to call you about them, later today.”
Pedro thought, 'Yes. Real posers.' He said, “I appreciate that. I will have some people come by later to take care of the bodies.”
Novio responded, “Thank you. And I do have the information you may want. I know where they are based all. I shit you not. They are hiding in the large abandoned warehouse, by the marsh side, north of the bridge to the mainland.”
Pedro thought, 'Interesting.' He asked, “I know which building you are talking about. How many are there?”
Novio answered, “Eight more. I think.”
Pedro stated, “Thank you. I will not forget your help, Novio.” He then turned to his men, as he said, “Come on boys. Let's go kick some ass.”
Pedro held his baseball bat, towards the ground, with his right hand, as he, and his men walked out of the pool hall, and to their cars.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Pedro, and his men, parked their cars behind building, near the warehouse, where they were told the gang was in.
The six men stood beside their cars. All the men all had bulletproof vests on.
Pedro and his men had their weapons in hand. His men each had automatic rifle. Pedro held his his semi-automatic pistol in his right hand, with him already loading a round in the chamber. So, the weapon was ready to fire.
Pedro thought, 'My men are trained and experienced in this form of combat. If we rush them, and we are careful, we will be fine. Still, why did this gang use a warehouse as a base of operations. It is so cliche.
'Though, these fools using this warehouse, as a hideout, does make it easy for me, and my boys. I know this warehouse. There are three exits. Also, there are no windows. This is going to be a turkey shoot.'
'Also, since I have been to this warehouse a few time. And I know the owners. I believe they broke into this one. I will have one of my boys check with the owners this warehouse, later today. To make sure they are okay.'
'Though, since the owners just store stuff here, for long term storage. I am sure they are fine. And they are just not aware of the break in.'
Pedro walked over to the side of the building, to get a clear look at the warehouse entrance, no more than fifty feet from him. He saw the front entrance was cracked open, and there were no guards around.
Pedro thought, 'These idiots do not even know to lock the door, and guard the place. They are posers. And they are about to be dead posers.'
Pedro turned his men, as he used his empty left hand to point at three of his men, He quietly ordered, in spanish, “You three are team one. You will stay here, and go in the front.”
Pedro then used his left hand to point at two of his other men, as he quietly stated, “You two are team two. Circle around this building, and you will find there is side entrance nearby. I want you to go in there. Also, before you break in the door, first check the door to see if it is unlocked. These fools left the front door open. Also, I will win around to the back entrance and handle the stragglers.”
“Keep your radios handy, I will give the signal to break in. Also, keep in mind that Novio said there was around eight people in there. Not, exactly eight people. So, be ready, in case there are more people.”
“Also, while we are not taking prisoners, among the gang. Though, if you find any children in there, don't kill them, unless you have to. Also, they may have hostages. Given we are dealing with violent idiots, you never tell. So, don't shoot everyone you see, until you are sure they are a gang member.”
“Also, stay quite. Surprise is our best weapon here. Next to guns.”
“Am I clear?”
His men softly answered, in unison, in spanish, “Yes, Chief.”
Pedro quietly said, “Good. Let's go.”
Pedro and the two men he had assigned to break in from the side door, began walking briskly around the back of the building they were behind, so as to avoid any risk of anyone in the warehouse, walking outside, and seeing them.
(_)
A few minutes later, Pedro hand right hand gripped the semi-automatic pistol, as he stood beside the back door of the warehouse.
With his left hand, he tested the door knob, and he found that it was indeed, unlocked.
As he then used his left hand to reach for his radio, he thought, 'What idiots.'
Pedro set the radio volume to low. Pedro then quietly stated into his radio, “This is the Chief. I just checked the back door, it is unlocked. Are you all ready to go.”
Over the radio, one group said, “Team one, ready.”
The other group said, through the radio, “Team two, ready.”
Pedro stated, “Go.” He then clipped his radio back onto the left side of his belt.
After which, Pedro used his left hand to reach for the knob. He slowly turned the knob, and opened the door.
As Pedro walked inside, he gently closed the door behind him, so as to not alert the gang members.
Fortunately, Pedro found that the skylight windows provided plenty of illumination into the warehouse, to see with.
As Pedro looked around, he saw there were crates and junk around the warehouse.
Pedro thought, 'Not my first time doing this. But, all this stuff blocking my view is going to make this a bit dangerous for me and my boys.'
Pedro then slowly made his way to the far corner of the warehouse, opposite to the side and front entrances. He then slowly made his way further into the warehouse, as he checked row after row of crates.
After Pedro cleared the first two back rows of crates, he started hearing gunshots coming for the front half of the warehouse.
Suddenly, as just as he was able to check the next to row, two gang members ran around the corner, and ambushed him at point blank range.
Pedro had time to get off one shot, a head shot to one of the members, killing him instantly.
But, the other man, got a solid punch to Pedro's stomach, knocking him back to the ground, with him dropping his pistol, away from his hands.
As Pedro looked up at the gang member, he saw that the gang member had pulled out a metal rod, from a nearby pile of junk, which he planned to use as a club.
While the gang member approached Pedro, the police chief did even flinch, as he quickly pulled up his right pants legging. He then swiftly used his right hand to draw his revolver from his ankle holster, on the outside of his right leg. After which, Pedro took quick aim, and he fired one shot between the gang member's eyes.
The gang member dropped his metal rod, and collapsed, with him dead before he even hit the ground.
Next, Pedro holstered his revolver, and lowered his right pants legging. After which, Pedro stood up, and walked over to retrieve his semi-automatic pistol. As he did so, Pedro noticed that the gunfire stopped.
After he had his main weapon in his right hand, he leaned back up, while use his right thumb to turn on the hammer safety of the pistol.
Pedro then used his left hand to unclasp radio from his belt.
Pedro asked, into his radio, “Is everything clear on your ends? Any injures our our side?”
There was a reply through the radio, “Team one clear. No injuries for us.”
A couple of seconds later, there was another reply through the radio, “Team two clear. No injuries for us.”
Pedro stated, “I took care of two of them. How was it on your end?”
There was an answered, “Team Two. We took care of three.”
A second later, another reply stated, “Team One. We also dealt with three.”
Pedro thought, 'That makes eight of them, in all.' He inquired, “Anyone else here?”
There was a reply, “Team one. We found no one else.”
A second later, there was another reply, “Yes. We found three hostages. Warehouse worker. Other than being tied up. They appear fine. It seems that they came in this morning to work, and they were captured. From what they are saying, the gang was planning on ransoming them. We have already untied them.”
Pedro complimented, “Good work, team two. I want you two to make sure the hostages are fine, have transportation home, and they are told to keep their months shut about this. Team one, I will meet up at the front entrance. And as we move around. Be careful not to shot each other, and me.”
Pedro then put away his radio, and he started careful making his way to the front entrance.
(_)
A few minutes later, Pedro noticed there were no more gunshots, since he radioed his men.
By then, he met with team one at the front of the warehouse. After Pedro saw his men, had check the safety of his gun, to make sure it was one. He then holstered his semi-automatic pistol back into his shoulder holster.
When Pedro reached his men, he came to a stop, as he stood ten feet in front of them, Pedro asked, “Anything else to report?”
One of the officer stated, in spanish, “No sir.”
Pedro stated, “Good. Have a clean up crew come deal with the bodies. Check to make sure the property owners are fine, and let them know about the break in. Also, tell them to let us know if there are any damage claims that need to be attended to. I want a full report on my desk by five o'clock.”
The officer whom replied before, said, “Yes sir.”
Pedro replied, “Good. I leave this to you. See you back at the station, in an hour, or so.”
Pedro then walked passed his men, and out the front door.
As he headed for his car, he thought, 'Even though it is still early. I could use some lunch. And I am in the mood for cuban. And I think I will take my time in doing so. As I am not really looking forward to those I am going to have to meet this afternoon.'
Pedro was soon got into his car, and drove to a good cuban restaurant that he occasionally like to go to. So, he could have an early lunch.
(_)
Around an hour later, at the Devil's hotel theater room, with Sam busy that day, Lee had just finished an early lunch, by himself, at the hotel restaurant.
Lee had bribed the projectionist, with a hundred dollar bill, to show a Robert Downey Junior movie marathon of, Tropic Thunder, Sherlock Holmes two thousand nine movie, and Sherlock Holmes Game of Shadows.
Lee was sitting in the four row, to the left, on the seat nearest to the middle walking lane.
Lee was the only person in the theater.
Just as Lee was settling into his seat, in the theater, with lights dimming, meaning there was less than a minute before the first movie started, Lee heard the door open, from behind him.
Lee turned around in his seat, to his right, to see Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru walk in. The three women were wearing their casual clothing.
Lee thought, 'I might as well find out why they are here.' He asked, “Hello ladies. What are you doing here?”
The three women came to a stop, as they looked at Lee.
Akira answered, “We saw you head the theater, and we were wondering what you are going to watch?” She thought, 'And our children are with the Lagoon sisters. So, we have nothing better to do.'
Lee maintain a mask of calmness, as he thought, 'This should not be a problem. These three are the nicest of Revy's group. And except for them wanting my hide for being the writer, these three are nice to be around. So, as long as they don't know I am the writer, I should be fine. And these three movies will not tip them off. They are just good movies. So, I might as well answer them.'
Lee answered, “I am about to watch a movie Robert Downey Junior movie marathon. A comedy and two mysteries. Some of Mister Downey's most recent works. And they are good movies. And I never got a chance to see them on the big screen. So, I am going to take the opportunity now.”
Lee thought, 'Though, that is not completely true. I did watch them, and a number of movies, in their theater, during the time loops. But, if I mentioned that. You might ask around, and with no one remembering that. It would raise questions against me.
Natsuru inquired, “Which movies?”
Lee stated, “The first one is a comedy titled, Tropic Thunder. The second two movies a remake of Sherlock Holmes, and the sequel to that movie, which was release in two thousand eleven.”
Ranma asked, “Sounds interesting. While we have an idea about Sherlock Holmes is about. What is Tropic Thunder about?”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'This is going to be fun.' He stared, “As crazy as it sounds, it is about a bunch of actors filming a Vietnam war movie, starting in Vietnam. Without them realizing they made their way into the Gold Triangle of IndoChina, where they have run in with drug lords. With Mister Downey playing while in a black-face. And in characters. Extremely in character.”
Akira deadpanned, “You're kidding?”
Lee replied, “Nope. And he got an oscar nomination for his performance in this film.”
Ranma stated, “Okay. You got our interest.”
Akira said, “Mine too.”
Natsuru commented, “Same here.”
Lee offered, “You can sit by me if you want. I enjoyed our time watching that Tron movie.” He thought, 'Which is true. Though, it was a strange, and somewhat stress experience for me.'
Natsuru said, “Yes. That was fun.”
Akira replied, “That was a good movie.”
Ranma shrugged, as she commented, “It was okay.”
A few seconds later, all three women sat beside Lee, on the forth row. With Lee turned back around in his seat, to sit comfortably facing the screen.
Akira was to Lee's left. To Akira's left was Natsuru. And to Natsuru's left sat Ranma.
The movie then began playing.
At the beginning of the movie, the film showed the fake previews of fake movies, which confused the three women.
Ranma asked, “What movies are these previews of? This theater does not play previews.”
Lee answered, “You're right, Ranma. The previews are part of the joke of the movie. The movie is about actors making a movie. And this is a sample of some of the works those character actors did, in the setting of this movie.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Though, given world as myth theory is real, I am watching a movie with three fictional characters, from three different series, from the same reality. Which is a different reality than this one. It is safe to say that a Tropic Thunder reality exists. That means the movies for these previews exist, in that reality. Along with the those movies existing, as real, in other realities.'
'Talk about a mind screw.'
'Still, if I get one of their reality devices, I might go to a reality where these previews exist in movie formats. And if I get the chance, I believe I will check out the Scorcher movies, the Satan's Alley movie, and the Tropic Blunder movie, within this movie.'
'It would be insane, if I ever had the chance to rebuild my video collect, and I placed a copy of Tropic Thunder, with the movies that were shown in the Tropic Thunder movie, that I had to go to two separate realities to get. One for the Tropic Thunder movie, the other reality, within the Tropic Thunder movie, for those movies.'
'Though, now that I think about. I better stop thinking about things from this point of view. This is starting to turn into a mind screw orgy.'
Meanwhile, as all four adults in the room, continued to watch the previews, the three women had heard Lee's comments.
Akira continued to watch the movie, as she stated, “That is so twisted, that makes sense.” She thought, 'Especially given our lives.'
They continued watching, to when the film reached the movie itself, with a the catchy theme song, Ball of Confusion.
A few minutes later, as the jungle was accidentally exploded, without the cameras, in the movie rolling, all four of them laughed at the comedic scene.
As they all calmed down, Natsuru stated, “Blowing up a jungle without getting it on tape. Now, that is an epic fail.”
They continued watching the film, as they got a few more chuckles.
Then, it reached the scene where the director is blow up by a land mine.
And the resulting situation, of the Speedman character playing with the directors head, while at the same time, the drug lord's patrol, hiding in the bushes, which Speedman's insanity unfold.
All four adult were laughing at the twist scene before them.
Between laughs, Akira stated, “That is the most sicked thing I have ever scene in a movie. And it so damn funny.”
Natsuru was chuckling, as she commented, “Thought, I find it interesting that the local drug cartel member think the actors are legit soldiers.”
Ranma was giggling, as she questioned, “How would they know any different?”
By then, they had all calmed down, as Lee stated, “That is true. And they are actors. They are very good at their craft.”
All four of them then when back to laughing even harder.
Eventually, the movie reached the point of the Speedman character meeting the local drug lord.
Ranma flatly inquired, “So, the local drug lord is a boy?”
Akira shrugged, as replied “We have seen far stranger.”
Natsuru commented, “There is some true to that.”
Lee was paying attention to their comments, as he thought, 'And I have heard of stranger things, than in this movie, in real life. And I am not talking about you three, and your family and friends.'
Then, came the Jeff's detox scene, of being tied to a tree, at night. With his comment on giving someone a blow job to get free of his bindings.
Everyone laughed at the joke.
Lee thought to himself, at watching the blow job proposition, 'Jack Black really delivers that line. This scene is the only time I have been tantalized by a statement of one man offering to do a blow job for another man.”
Soon after came the Lazarus character's awesome scene, of him saying, “Here's my motherfucking farm.” With Lazarus them firing his two rifles at the enemies, even though the weapons were armed with blanks. Then, when he finished firing his rifles, with his friends, and forcing the enemies to the ground. Lazarus knelt down, and pulled is rifles sideways, in a crisscross patter across his chest, as he stated, “I'm a lead farmer, motherfucker.”
Natsuru said, “Guys. We are going to have to tell the others about this film. It is great.”
Akira agreed, “You got that right.”
Ranma stated, “Yes. It is very funny. The characters in this characters in this movie are really shaping up to be awesome.”
Lee thought, 'You probably don't realize by how much. The hero characters in this movie are also probably as insane and badass you are women are. Because, their weapons were using blanks, and they were playing a magnificent bluff on a small army. And their plan worked.'
The movie soon showed the Four Leaf character using the flamethrower. The scene caused everyone in audience to lightly laugh.
Then, came the Lazarus character's famous statement, “I'm the dude, playing the dude. disguised as another dude.”
From the corner of his left eye, Lee saw the trio started to laugh very hard.
As they calmed down, Ranma said, “I have been there.”
Natsuru, stated, “We have all be there.”
Akira agreed, “You are right about that.”
A couple of minutes later, the movie showed the scene of the drug lord boy coming out of the fiery building, unharmed, while carrying shoulder mounted rocket launcher, as long as he is tall, and fired is at the truck the heroes are escaping in. Hitting the truck.
Ranma stated, “Okay. That is badass.”
Then, the Cody character made his statement, “Oh my god. I am moving to catering, after this.”
Ranma flatly commented, “He clearly does not know the dangers of catering.”
All four adults laughed, for a few seconds.
Lee thought, 'You would know, Ranma. You would know. Considering your series pioneered martial arts and crafts. With you being at the forefront of that insanity.'
Soon, the movie ended, and went to credits.
The three women turned to Lee.
Akira stated, “That was a great movie, Lee. It was true comedic gold. Thanks for convincing us to watch it with you.”
Ranma stated, “Yea. That movie had some good surprises in it. A real gem. I can see how Mister Downey got his oscar nomination from his role in that movie.”
Natsuru said, “It was fun to watch.”
Lee turned to the three women, as he politely commented, “You're welcome. And yea. That is a good movie. I even found it to be funnier the second I watched it.”
The three women giggled, in response to Lee's comment.
As the three women calmed down, Natsuru inquired, “So, how good are these Sherlock Holmes movies, that you have scheduled to show next?”
Lee answered, “Both movies have analytical ass kicking mixed with some great acting, good directing, wonderful plots, and good mysteries.
Natsuru grinned, as she said, “I think we will stay and watch.”
Ranma said, “I am up for a few more movies.”
Akira stated, in a happy, eager tone of voice, “Yes. We will most certainly have to watch those movies.”
Lee replied, “Good. Because, I believe you will enjoy them, immensely.”
And so, except for a few breaks, the four adults enjoyed the afternoon watching movies together, in the hotel theater. And Lee was proven right. As the three gender bender loves, did enjoy Lee's movie selection. And after the movies were finished, they thanks Lee for the opportunity to experience such entertainment.
(_)
Around the time the Tropic Thunder film ended for Lee, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, in the Devil's Hotel theater, Pedro returned to the police station, after he took his time in having a good lunch, from a nearby cuban restaurant.
It was around one thirty PM, as Pedro walked through the station, and towards his office.
As Pedro made his way down the hallways, and section off aisles of the building, to his office, he thought, 'Now, that was a good lunch. That cuban place really does have good cooking talent. Still, I stayed a little too long there. But, some things cannot be helped.' And I did need a chance to collect my thoughts, before my meetings this afternoon.'
'I wonder if Lee occasionally has problems like this? Where he has to collect his thoughts, in dealing with his problems... That is likely the case.'
While Pedro continued walking down the aisle, beside the rows of desks, to Pedro's right side, one of the officers stopped in front of him.
Pedro came to a stop, as he turned to look at the office. He calmly inquired, in spanish, “What is it?”
The officer answered, in spanish, “We checked on the owners of that warehouse, they doing fine. And we have informed them of the break in.”
Pedro thought, 'Good. That is a relief.' responded, “Good. Anything else?”
The officer mentioned, “Yes, We also have both that Rowan woman and those three chinese women in lockup. What do you want done with them?”
Pedro asked, “Are they together?”
The officer replied, “Yes. You did not say not to keep them separated.”
Pedro thought, with anger towards himself, 'Damn!... Well, the situation cannot be helped, now. Chang will eventually learn that Rowan is here, in town. Still, I have to gamble at how good of a badass cop I can be. Besides, I think it is time to flush Chang out. And bring him out of that fortress, which he calls a casino.'
Pedro forced himself to calm down. He then said, “You are right. My mistake. Still, bring Ms Pigeon to my office, in five minutes. And let the chinese women use the phone.”
The officer responded, “Yes sir.” He turned, and went to do as he was instructed.
Pedro then continued towards his office.
When he reached his office, he left the door open. As he walked into the room, he flipped on the ceiling lights of the room, from a light switch, on the interior side of the room, on the wall, between the windows, and right side of the door, when facing the inside of the room.
Though, when the blinds were open, Pedro could set at his desk, and look into the main room of the police station, and to the far right wall of the main room.
In his office, Pedro came to a stop, as the coat rack, on the interior side of the door. He took off his sunglasses, and put them in a coat pocket. He then put away his hat and coat, onto the coat rack, in his office. Finally, he sat down on his nice, comfortable, cushion chair behind his desk.
Pedro quickly logged back into this computer, from the password protect screensaver, he set the computer to, before he left to deal with the new gang members at Delgado's.
Next, Pedro propped his legs onto the left side of his desk, opposite side from where is phone and computer were. Pedro turned to his left, as he saw what was on the shelves of that side of the room.
Pedro thought, 'This is going to be so much fun.'
Pedro then turned back to look at the open door to his office, as he patiently waited for Rowan to be escorted into his office.
A few minutes later, Pedro watched, with an amused look on his face, as he saw one of his female officers escort a dark skinned woman with a black a afro walked in. The woman's body was slender, and she was young.
Pedro thought, I had to even think it. But, in the right clothing, or lack there of, she is admittedly attractive.'
Pedro took a closer look at the woman. He saw that the woman had a slender body, and was in her mid-twenties. She wore yellow leisure suit, with run sunglasses over her eyes. While the style of clothing looked like it was made for a pimp, but was fitted for her female physical frame.
Pedro thought, 'I am surprised to see that she had her sunglasses on. Then again, I did tell my boys to treat her gently. So, they likely let her keep her shades. Still, she is a walking oxymoron. Still, Lee does good work. Even when he does not even realize it.'
Pedro looked at the officer, as he stated, in spanish, “Shut the door behind you.”
The officer gently shut the door behind her, as she left the office.
Pedro turned to look at the dark skinned woman. He calmly said, in english, “Please. Sit down.”
Pedro watched as she sat down in the chair to his right, in front of his desk.
After Rowan was seated, she looked at him, in his face. With Pedro look back at her face.
Pedro flatly stated, with a bit of sarcasm in his tone of voice, “I am Police Chief Pedro Del Soto of De La Plata Podrido. You must be Rowan Pigeon. I hope you are enjoying your stay in my city.”
Rowan replied, in a casual tone of voice, in english, “Yea. It isn't a bad place. But, I would like to know why you had me picked up?”
Pedro answered, in a tone of voice that was dry as a desert, “We feel that you are attracting the wrong clientele to this city.”
Rowan smirked, as she said, “We both know how this is going to play out. You are the corrupt police chief, in a sewer of a town.”
Pedro dropped his feet back to the floor, behind his desk, as he sternly stated, “I will have you know that in the last ten years, since becoming police chief, I have cleaned up this town.”
“In this city, there are no more daily drive by shootings. No extortionists. No sex slavery. No more turf wars. I taught through hard knocks, sometimes very hard knocks, the criminal element of this town, that discretion and subtlety are the better parts of valor. I even cleaned out the station personnel that could not get with the program.”
“That program being keeping this city together, in one piece, from a very horrible world that wants to tear it apart, was our main priority. And as long as you do not pissed off the wrong person in this city, this town is now a very nice, pleasant place to live.”
Rowan quipped, “Yea right. Here is your bribe. And I will be going.” She then pulled out something from a coat pocket, and threw it onto the desk.
Pedro saw that it was a roll of U.S hundred dollar bills.
Rowan then began to get up, when Pedro sternly ordered, “Sit back down!”
Rowan did so, as she turned to look at him.
Pedro demanded, “Who do you think you are?”
Rowan's lips curled into a very wicked grin, as she said, “A women with powerful friends.”
Pedro called her bluff, as he inquired, “Really? Like who?”
Rowan looked around the room, as she tried to think up a passable lie.
It was then that she spotted on the shelf, in the corner of the room, to her right, the Black Lagoon blu-ray anime boxes, and collection of manga volumes.
When she looked back at Pedro, she saw him smiling a mischievous grin towards her.
Pedro stated, “You could also say I have strange taste in online fiction.”
Rowan accused, “You know who I am. You're the writer of those stories. I must say, you made my life more interesting.”
Pedro casually countered, “No. I am not the writer of those stories. I am just good that at my job. I put two and two together. And I know that among those from the city you came from, pretty much no one really liked you.”
Pedro used his right hand to picked up the roll of hundreds dollar bills. He then tossed the roll of money back into Rowan's lap
Rowan quickly picked up the cash, from her lap, and pocketed it. She then looked back up at Pedro's face, and from the serious expression on the Police Chief's face, she could tell that he meant business.
Pedro coldly stated, “I am not Watsup. I do not play golf. And I hate bribes. I am a wicked man in a crooked town. And you do not know who my friends are. So listen here, you sick excuse of a pimp. It is not the drugs and the whoring that bothers me. It is profiting off the suffering. And I hate that! Especially, when the content deals with CHILDREN!”
“I know your type. You do not start the fire, but you profit from adding fuel to that fire. You stir the pot, and attract the worst sort of people, making things worse for everyone involved. You bring out the worst in everyone. I was born here. I have lived here all my life. I will not let you turn my home town into ANOTHER ROANAPUR!”
“We already know about the kiddie porn and the snuff films you are selling here, in MY CITY! It stops now. I would think after the fiasco with the vampire twins, you would know better than to deal in that shit. But, I guess that is not the case. So, I am going to warn you right now to keep your filth out of my town.”
“And if you continue to try to attract the worst sort of people to this town, I will use my connections in the cartels, and you will personally find out what is it like to be in sex trade from the other side.”
Pedro then punctuated every syllable, as he continued, “Do. I. Make. My. Self. Clear?”
Rowan gulped. She then replied, in a weak, fearful tone of voice, that Pedro could barely hear, “Yes.”
Pedro smiled wickedly, as he said, “Good. Now, you can enjoy the city all you like. There is much this town has to offer. But, you will not set up shop here.”
Rowan pointed out, “I have noticed you have not done anything about Chang's operation, nor Revy's group.”
Pedro stated, “Actually, I am starting to focus on Chang. Still, Chang has style. Also, I admit that I find his female side hot. And I had an up close, and personal look of that body, when I was a judge at a recent talent contest, at the hotel Revy, and her group are staying at.”
Pedro saw Rowan's eyes widen, from his comment.
Pedro thought, with amusement, 'So, you did not know about that event. Good.'
Pedro went onto say, “On the other hand, I realize that Revy and her group, are like a hurricane. They are clearly not planning to plant roots here. So, I just have to do my best to help my city weather them, like a powerful storm, until they leave. Then, we will rebuild, and become stronger for the experience.”
“Now, that we have that clear, I ask you to keep what was I said here to yourself.”
Rowan swiftly replied, in a no nonsense tone of voice, “No problem.”
Pedro stated, “Good.”
Pedro then picked up his phone, and dial an extension within his police station. He said into the phone, in spanish, “Please, send an officer in here.” He then hung up his phone.
A minute later, and officer reached his door, knocked on the door. Rowan turned in her seat, to look at the door.
From inside the office, at his desk, Pedro stated, in spanish, “Come in.”
The officer opened the door, and walked into Pedro's office.
The female police officer then came to a stop, behind Rowan, while she faced Pedro.
Pedro looked at the officer, as he calmly instructed, in english, for Rowan's benefit, “Please escort Ms Pigeon out of the building.”
The officer nodded once, as she replied, “Yes, sir.”
Rowan silently got up. With the female officer escorting Rowan out of Pedro's office.
Rowan was soon lead out of the front doors of the building, where she was let go, to go about her day.
(_)
A few seconds after Rowan was out of sight, Pedro breathed a sigh of relief. He thought, 'I lucked out. She clearly does not have a clue of what she is capable of. Now, to do paperwork, as I wait for the other inevitable hammer to fall in front of me, this afternoon.'
Pedro them opened a drawer in his desk, and he pulled out some reports he had to do, along with a pen.
Pedro then spend the next hour doing paper work.
After he finished, Pedro surfed the internet on his computer until he got a phone call.
Pedro answered the phone, and he immediately recognized the voice on the other end.
Pedro thought, with annoyance, 'Ah. The daily bitchfest, from my mainland superiors. The only reason they don't fire me is they cannot find anyone else who cares enough, or stupid enough, to willingly replace me as police chief of this garbage heap.'
'Still, I have to downplay what I tell him.
Pedro responded to the other end of the phone, with a mix of downplaying and lies.
Pedro said, in spanish, “Yea, it's me... I don't think you would believe me if I told you... No. I have not seen that man since the talent contest... I don't care if D.C. is interested in him, I have my hands full, as is... You come down here if you want. I warn you though, you will not like what you find here... I am not joking... Go ahead. Send the army in. You will likely lose.”
The other end hung up.
Pedro hung up the phone, and he just sat there for a few minutes in silence, while he contemplated his life, and how he ended up where he was, in his life.
A few minutes later, Pedro pulled out his semi-automatic pistol, from his shoulder holster. He ejected the clip, and unloaded it.
He set it on his desk.
He then pulled out his revolver, from his ankle holster, on the outside side of his right leg. He leaned up, and unloaded the weapon on his desk. After which, he set the firearm on his desk, next to his semi-automatic weapon.
With his weapons unloaded, Pedro pulled out his gun cleaning kit from a desk drawer. He then closed the drawer, and opened the cleaning kit.
Pedro took his time, as he took apart both his guns.
Pedro then slowly cleaned the parts of his guns one at a time.
Pedro cleaned his revolver first, due to the revolver having fewer parts, and being easier to clean. And within a few minutes, he was finished with it. He loaded his revolver, and stuck it back into his ankle holster.
Fifteen minutes later, as he was finished putting back together his semi-automatic pistol, with the loaded, polished magazine for the weapon, set beside it.
Pedro has already put his cleaning kit up. And he was about to load his weapon with his magazine, and holster his weapon, when his phone rang.
Pedro answered into it, in spanish, “What is it?”
The police officer on the other end stated, in spanish, “Sir, there is a Mister Chang here, who wants to speak with you.”
Pedro said, “Do not search him. And send him into my office in one minute.” He then hung up the phone. He thought, 'I guess his women called him. And he finally got around to coming here. If I had him frisked, it would leave a bad first impression with him, on his first time to my police station.'
'Though, he is likely armed. He is not going to do something foolish in my station, unless I give him an excuse to do so. And I have intention of giving him an excuse to do so. Though, I won't let him walk all over me, nor my boys, either.'
Pedro then looked up at the Black Lagoon collection on his shelve, as he mentally added, 'I better do something about those.'
Pedro opened one of his large desk drawers. He then got up and dumped his Black Lagoon anime and manga into the drawer.
He quickly sat down, as he closed the drawer.
While Pedro got comfortable, he noticed he left his gun on the desk, unloaded, with the slide closed, and its loaded magazine beside it, just as the door to his office was opened.
Pedro looked up from his desk, and he saw that Chang was the one to open it. With one of Pedro's police officers right behind him.
Pedro thought, 'Damn. Chang really does want to see me. I cannot do anything about my gun right now.' He then looked up at Chang.'
Pedro looked over at the officer behind him, as he stated, in english, for Chang's benefit, “Officer. You can leave now. I will handle this.” He turned to Chang, as he requested, “And you. Please shut the door. And come over here.”
Chang did not verbally respond, as he looked at Pedro. Instead, Chang walked further inside the room, with him gently shutting the door behind him.
Chang walked further into Pedro's office, Pedro saw that Chang was dress exactly like he did in the Black Lagoon anime. Complete with black long coat and cool shades over his eyes.
Pedro thought, 'Chang looks pretty much the same way as when I met him at my brother's beach house... Well, his beach how now. And I did get quite a bit of money from that sale. With most of it being in a few safe places. And none of them being banks... Now, let us see how good I can play this situation. If Lee can do this, so can I.'
As Chang came to a stop, in front of Pedro's desk, between the two guest chair, Pedro stood up and offer his right hand out to Chang, as he said, in english, “Hello Mister Chang. It is not everyday someone as wealthy as you comes to visit my poor little police station. It is nice to meet you, again.”
Chang used his right hand to shake Pedro's right hand. Both men noticed the other man had a firm, but not tight grip to their handshake.
A few seconds later, they broke their handshake.
Chang said, in english “It is nice to see you, again, as well, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro offered, while feigning sincerity in his tone of voice, “Please, sit down. And tell me what I can do for you.”
Chang sat down in the chair to Pedro's right side.
As soon as Chang sat down in the chair to Pedro's right, Pedro sat down in his chair, behind his desk.
Chang calmly said, “Chief Del Soto. I believe that you have mistakenly arrested a few of my employees.”
Pedro calmly stated, “Your employees are suspected of drug dealing, which I admit, that in this town it is not uncommon. But, it is the brazenness of how they did so, with them being out in the open that caught our eye.”
Chang thought, 'I loath it when I have to break in a corrupt cop. Though, from what I know of this man, he may present an entertaining challenge, from that front.'
Chang flatly asked, “How much?”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to see if I can deliver this punch line.'
Pedro casually explained, “It is not a matter of how much. It is a matter of attention. On top of the brazenness, your people are also selling drugs with names I have never heard of before. I cannot tolerate new drugs being allow into this city.”
“This city is a smuggling hub between latin and south america, and the U.S. and Canada. Any drugs here will filter outwards. New drugs always attract the wrong kind of attention, from both governments, and the suppliers of older drugs. They do not like it when their markets are tampered with.”
“But, you have brought a lot of business to the community. And while you are not hiring locally, your employees are spending locally. And spending a lot with the local businesses and services here. So, I am feeling generous, and I will let your employees go, if we have an understanding concerning this matter.”
Chang thought, 'So, he isn't so much corrupt. Or, at least intelligent enough not to be greedy about this. As he is concerned with attracting attention from more powerful players outside this island. I can understand his point of view.'
Chang replied, “I believe we understand each other.”
While not showing it outwardly, inwardly, Pedro mentally cheered, 'Yes!'
Pedro grinned, as he picked up his phone, and he dial the extension to another part of the building. He then ordered, in english, for Chang's benefit, “This is the Chief. Cut the chinese women loose.”
Pedro them hung up his phone, and put down the phone back on its base.
Meanwhile, Chang has watched this. He thought, 'This man is clearly not what I suspected I would find, in a position such as his. I need to know more about him. And the quickest way to do that, is to find out his personal tastes.'
Chang complimented, “Thank you. You are clearly not a by the book cop. I was wondering, what is you favorite fictional character?”
Pedro smirked, as he answered, “Gene Hunt. Police Chief of Purgatory.”
Chang agreed, “That is a good one... Well, I believe I am finished here. It was nice meeting you, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro requested, “One moment, Mister Chang. I have a minor bit of information for you.”
Chang grinned, as he thought, 'I always welcome free information.' He replied, “Yes.”
Pedro stated, “We both know that you are setting up your organization, here in town. And in such situations, finding contacts and getting the logistics up and running can be difficult. There is a pool hall in town, called Delgado's. The owner is named, Novio. A man in his fifties. On top of being the owner of that pool hall, he is both a local bookie and money launderer. That being said, he is also on the level.”
“Novio is looking to retire. But, he does not have the money yet to do so. I am sure that if you make him a fair offer for his pool hall, along with his contacts, both on the island, and on the mainland. He would take it. And you would never see him again. Though, if I find his body floating in the marsh, or I cannot contact him, I will be upset with you.”
“Also, if you try to extort the people here. There will be war. Do you understand?”
Pedro thought, 'I hate doing this. Because I am helping Chang. But, I promised to help Novio. I made a promise. And I keep my word. I honor my bargains. With this being the best idea I can come up with.'
Chang thought, 'Interesting, Chief Del Soto is telling me that a member of the local competition wants out of the game. And the man in question would likely be willing to sell the information he has, so the he can retire, and I will have a contact list to help me set up my operations here.'
'If this, Novio, wants to retire, I will give him enough money to retire like a king. That way I can use him for a reference, should his contacts ask for Novio to vouch for me.'
'Also, the Police Chief is warning me not to extort the people here. Fine. There are a dozen ways I can make a fortune. Besides, I am already rich and near immortal. Besides, I am doing this more as a hobby, because I am bored. I will leave the local people, and businesses, alone.'
'Still, the fact that the Police Chief is so against extortion opens an insight into Chief Del Soto's mind. And from that, and the contact offer, I think I am starting to understand how he thinks.'
Chang replied, “I understand.”
Pedro said, “Good.”
Chang stood up from the chair he had been sitting in.
Pedro stated, “It was nice meeting you. Have a nice day.”
Right before Chang turned to leave, his eye caught the black colored, semi-automatic pistol on top of Pedro's desk.
Chang asked, “If you don't mind, what model pistol is that?”
Pedro looked down at his semi-automatic pistol. He looked up at Chang, as he thought, 'I might as well answer him. If I do not, it could cause problems for both of us, stiming from a simple misunderstanding.'
Pedro answered, “It is a slightly modified Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt. It fires forty-five ACP rounds. The pistol parts have been blued to where they are black, to prevent rust, and damage.”
“My pistol has custom front and back sights. With the back sights being adjustable. Also, there is a guide rod installed in the spring system. Along, with a custom trigger that goes a little further out than the original nineteen eleven trigger. There is a metal beaver tail added above the back grip safety, to prevent the pistol from biting into the webbing of the user's hand, when firing.”
“And I like this pistol because, not only does it have stopping power, but like most pistol models based off of the Colt nineteen eleven, it has both a grip safety system, and a slide safety, for when the hammer is cocked back.”
“Also, I find the model's slide safety lever on this type of model easier to adjust with my right thumb, than the safety level on the Beretta F series pistols. So, when I have a bullet in the chamber, I can just turned off the safety at a moment's notice, with ease, and be ready to fire my gun. Though, unlike the safety on this weapon, the Beretta F series safety lever also doubles as a decocking lever. But, that is a small price to pay for ease of use.”
Chang looked at the pistol, then back to Pedro. He inquired, “Yes. That is a nice gun. And those are good safety measures. So, where did you get your pistol from?”
Pedro thought, 'I might as well tell him this, as well.' He said, “I was a gift from my brother. Though, I had it customized by a gunsmith I know.' He mentally added, 'Burt. But, I don't want you to know that he is in town, as well. At least not until I have spoken to him, on the matter.'
Chang smiled slightly, as he commented, “Interesting. Well, I will be seeing you around Chief Del Soto. And thank you for be so understanding. That is so rare trait these days.”
Pedro responded, “Yes, it is. And as long as there is no trouble, I do not see any problems between us.”
Chang smile widened ever so slight, as he said, “Then, I believe things will continue to be fine between us.”
Chang turned, and walked to the door to the office. He opened the door, and left the door open, as he turned to his right, and headed for the front doors to the police station.
After Chang left the office, and his sight, Pedro thought, 'Chang was way too interested in my pistol. I only answered his questions because I could not figure out a decent excuse not to answer them. But, let us find out why he is so interested in my pistol.'
Pedro did a quick web search cross-referencing the pistol model of his semi-automatic pistol, the Black Lagoon series.
Pedro soon found that Roberta, the Bloodhound, also used the same model semi-automatic pistol in the Black Lagoon series.
Pedro inwardly cursed, in thought, 'Damn you, bro!' He forced himself to calm down, as he thought, 'Though, there is nothing I can do about this, now.'
Pedro picked up the pistol in his right hand, and the loaded magazine in his left hand. He then inserted the magazine into the bottle of pistol grip. Finally, he put his pistol into his shoulder holster, under his left armpit.
Just then, there was a knock at his open door.
Pedro looked up, and saw he that it was one of his officers.
Pedro asked, in a kind tone of voice, in spanish, “What is it?”
The officer inquired, in delicate tone of voice, in spanish, “Well sir. I am not sure how to put this. I did not want to say anything while he was here. But, Mister Chang... The way he looked... The way he dressed... And his name... Do not get me wrong, we love our weekly movie nights at your home. Even when you pull out your anime collection, and it is in english.”
Pedro thought, 'He is being careful with his words. And given the situation. I do not blame him for doing so.'
The officer continued, “And though, we are not sure where you find some of your stuff, like that series where the teenage boy turned into a girl with cold water. What you show up is mostly funny. But, sometimes strange. Or, intense.”
“Though, I was partial to the series set in the future with the purple haired cybernetic babe working as an intelligence cop with her team. But, still Chang looked so much like Chang from the Black Lagoon series to warrant the question being asked about him. It is just it would be impossible. And we are all scared of the answer.”
Pedro flatly answered, “He is him.”
The officer slowly pointed out, “Okay... Though, as I said, it is impossible.”
Pedro inquired, “Were you one of those that helped clean up that mess at the Devil's Hotel, around two weeks ago?”
The officer answered, “Yes.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he casually questioned, “Did the girls from the hotel look familiar to you?”
The officer admitted, “Yes... Oh lord. What have we gotten ourselves into?”
Pedro stated, “Just keep this to yourself. I am already working towards a solution.”
The officer muttered, “I think we might, I repeat might, be able to take one of them down, but the rest would kick our asses.”
Pedro warned, “More so than you realize.”
The officer asked, “What do you mean?”
Pedro said, “Come here.”
The officer then walked up to stand in front of Pedro's desk, between the two guest chairs.
Pedro pulled out, from the middle draw of his desk, a piece of paper, and a pen. He closed the drawer. And he wrote down a weblink to Lee's stories, that he had memorized.
Pedro set down the pent, as he looked up at the office. He stated, “They have had... Enchantments since the series ended. Here, go online, and read this story. Because we are living its sequel.”
Pedro sudden realized, in thought, with worry, 'Oh lord. We probably really are... Though, it might be best not to say this to anyone else. Especially, Lee, Revy, Chang, nor the others. And I hope River does not read my mind about this. Still, there is nothing I can do but ride the situation like a wave, and hope the undertow of the wave does not drown me, nor those of my island.'
Pedro held up the piece of paper to the officer.
The officer gently took the piece of paper and look at it. He then folded it, and put it into his pocket.
The officer then looked at Pedro. He saw from the expression on Pedro's face, that the Police Chief was deadly serious, as Pedro stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Do not lose that piece of paper. And do not let that piece of paper leave your sight. If the wrong type of people find that, it is all over for us.”
“You need to understand that the only real ammunition we have against them is they do not know that we know about them. Inform those in the know to stay quiet about this. And share that weblink with them. I want you all to know what is on it, by the end of next week. It is a long read. It going to take you a while to go over the material. Read it from the beginnings. And do not skim these stories. Also, do websearchs, for stuff you don't understand.”
“We will have to let rest of those in the station, whom do not know what is going on, remain ignorant, for the time being. Still, the most important thing is that we cannot allow them to know that we know about them.”
The officer replied, “Yes sir. I will quietly inform the others. And share this weblink with them.” He though, 'I am glad I know english. And most of my fellow officers do, as well.'
Pedro said, “You are dismissed.”
The officer then turned and walked out of the office, to resume his assigned duties, until he had a chance to share the information he had received from Pedro, with the others, in more private, and quieter, surroundings.
Pedro leaned back in his chair, as he thought, 'If my boys have figured out what is going on. Then, it is likely obvious to anyone that is intelligent, on what his happening around them, on this island. This mess just keeps getting bigger and bigger. And I honestly have no idea how I am going to stop this mess from from spreading. Let alone, reverse this mess.'
(_)
Outside the front of the police station, Chang walked up to his limo, that was waiting for him, beside the curb, with the right passenger side of the vehicle facing him.
When those in the vehicle saw Chang, one of his chinese women, in a black suit, got out of the car, from the front passenger seat. She then opened the door to the back of the limo, for Chang.
After Chang entered the limo, the woman shut the door behind him. She then walked to the front passenger door to get in, so the driver could head back to Daiyu Palace Casino.
As the back passenger door closed behind Chang, the chinese man seated himself, in the seat facing the front of the limo.
Chang then pulled out where he had kept his to semi-automatic pistols, from a hidden compartment, by him, to his left side, in his limo. He then holstered the weapons in the dual holsters, on the back of his belt.
By then, Chang felt the limo had started moving, with the vehicle taking him back to his casino.
While Chang leaned back in his cushioned seat, he thought, 'Even though they did not pat me down, it would have been rude to walk in armed into a police station, without a damn good reason for doing so... Now, to deal with the matter at hand.'
Chang towards the front of the vehicle, and to Rowan, whom was sitting in the cushioned across from him. With Rowan having her back to the closed window, that connected the back passenger section, to the driver section of the vehicle.
Chang continued to look at Rowan, as Rowan silently look at him. He said to her, in english, “Rowan. I am glad you were willing to have this meeting on such short notice. I was not aware you were in the city, until my subordinates informed me just now. That is why I arranged us to have this little meeting.”
Rowan smiled, as she commented, “It is a pleasure, as always, to talk to you, Chang.”
Chang returned Rowan's smile, as he inquired, “Good. Now, do you know of anyone else that is here?”
Rowan answered, “Except for your group, and Revy's group, I heard a rumor that one of Hotel Moscow's members went awol, and ended up here. That is why I came to check out this place. But, I have no clue who he is, and where he is.”
Rowan thought, 'I don't think I will also mention that I know about the stories. And that I have read them. I trust my source too much, to risk being forced to divulged the identity of that person. Besides, that person only told me after a few drinks, and some fun. And it is so rare to meet a person that can keep up with me, in such matters.'
Chang stated, “It does not matter.” He mentally reflected, 'Let Balalaika deal with her own personnel matter. Besides, Melvin too much of a character, to just tell Balalaika whom he is. I want to see how that plays out on its own. Along if Revy, Rock, and their group, actually do find the writer. Both will be mildly entertaining, as I got my organization up and running here. With the casino being the first part, of my front operations here.'
Rowan asked, “So, what are we going to do about this police chief? He wouldn't take a bribe.”
Chang responded, “I learned that, as well. Still, we will do nothing about him. The more I think about it, the more I actually agree with him, on what he told me. I should not have introduced drugs from the multiverse here. It would attract the wrong kind of attention towards us. And from what you tell me, all he wants you to do is not sell kiddie porn and snuff films. Both of which, I find detestable, anyway. So, you will not do that.”
Rowan replied, “Yes sir.” She thought, 'I may not like it. But, if I do as requested, I will have less trouble to deal with.'
Chang stated, “Good. Also, I have been looking into that man's past. If what I have learned is true. He has been the only thing keeping this city, together, in one piece, for the last decade. His skills in combat, and leadership, are impressive. I honestly think, if we had met him in Roanapur, before the projects I started, he could have held his own against any one of us. He would have been on par with the badasses there, at the time. Even me, at that time.”
Rowan remarked, “That is a high opinion to have of someone, Chang.”
Chang grinned, as he responded, “I know. Yet, he clearly knows he cannot do that now. Also, I find his tastes in fiction interesting. But, best of all. He thinks I am not onto him. That gives me an even greater advantage.”
Rowan pointed out, “He knows you can change into a girl. He even said he found your female form to be hot.”
Chang lips curled into a smirk, as he thought, 'That just won him points with me.'
Chang stated, “It just shows he has good taste. After all, he is basically a Mexican Gene Hunt, with the pop culture and genre savviness of Michael Garibaldi. Which is kind of a cool combination. I am going to have so much fun figuring out how to fit him into my plans.”
Rowan commented, “Still, I do not understand his madness. From what I learned of him. Before, he had me arrested. He does not like bribes, sex slavery, nor extortion. But, he loves the drug trade and prostitution, being in his town.”
Chang said, “That is simple. He supports anything that could bring money into his community, unless it causes too much trouble. Or, the profession, or product, is against his moral code. While, at the same time, he is against crimes that take money out of his community. It is simple logic. And it works so well. I kind of admire him for that. If I was in his position, I might have set down the same ground rules.”
Rowan requested, “Even so. What about my business? Tail pays well, but even I need something to sell on the off seasons, to make ends meet.”
Chang inquired, “Well, we will just have to be more subtle. I have some ideas about the new S&M brothel you are working on. You might find it interesting that I have finally achieved getting a steady supply of two interesting packets of magic power. Do you know of the series, Ranma Half?”
Rowan answered, “Of course. I sold you a copy of that series back in Roanapur.”
Chang smiled, as he inquired, “Then, you know what the instant packets of spring of drowned man and spring of drowned girl are?”
Rowan responded, with a bit of eagerness in her voice, “Yes. And I think I know where you are going with this.” She thought, 'If this is what I think it is. This type of operation could both set me for life, while provide me with plenty of entertainment.'
Chang thought, 'I don't doubt that. Or, I would have not come to you, with this offer.'
Chang stated, “I can provide you enough for both personal use, for free. I am sure you would like to have some fun as a guy, again. But, I will also sell you the packets for you to use in your business.”
“Now, imagine the type of S&M brothel you could have when the client can choose what gender they are, as they take part in your business' services. And think of the possibilities of role playing when your employees will be able to swap genders throughout their sessions with your clients.”
“Imagine how much money people would pay for that kind of service. And all I ask is for a thirty percent cut off the top of the gross. With monthly payments. I will provide the supply. You will provide the services. You will be wealthy, and I will be even richer.”
Rowan smirked, as she thought, 'It is just as I thought. And if this works out, I will consider turning me into a woman to be water under the bridge.' She happily complimented, “You know what Chang? I love the way your mind works.”
Chang returned Rowan's smile, as he said, “We will work out the details in a few minutes. Once we get back to my office, at my new casino. But, I think we can do business.”
Rowan replied, “I fully agree.”
Chang's limo then continued driving them back to Daiyu Palace Casino. And towards a bright, more profitable future, for both adults, in the back of the limo.
(_)
Around six PM, Pedro just finished backing up his computer files, which he kept a backup on a USB memory stick he had on his key ring. He pocketed the key ring in his pants. And he then turned off his computer, his computer monitor, and his computer speakers.
Just as Pedro was about to get up from his desk, to punch out his time card for the day, and leave, the phone on his desk began to ring.
Pedro picked up his phone, as he said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Pedro heard Novio voice on the other end say, in spanish, in an obviously happy tone of voice, “Hello Pedro. I take back everything I ever said about you know who. He offered me a great deal for everything I had, and I took the deal. And I am gone. But, I am sure you were involved in someway, so I am just calling to say, thank you.”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he thought, 'I guess Chang kept his word. That is good.'
Pedro said, “Glad to hear it. And I hope you have great life.”
Novio said, “You to, Pedro.” Novio then hung up his phone.
After Pedro put his phone back on its mount, he stood up from his office chair.
He walked over the coat rack, and he put on his long coat, and hat. He then turned off the lights to his office, from a wall switch. Next, he locked and shut the door to his office behind him. He then headed to punch out his time card, head to his car, and get something to eat, before he met with Lee, at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM.
Though, Pedro did not want to go to the Last Resort Diner first, because he did not feel like eating U.S. style food that night.
(_)
Around seven PM, after Pedro lost his daily tail, he met with Lee at the Last Resort Diner, to get the daily report on any trouble from Revy's group. With Lee sitting in their booth, with his back to the back wall.
Pedro sat down at the table, across from Lee. Lori soon took their drink orders. Several seconds later, she pour them both cups of coffee, and brought coffee mugs for both men.
After Lori walked away from the two men, Lee and Pedro look at each other.
Lee commented, in english, “I lost another tail, coming here, this evening.”
Pedro said, in english, “Same here.”
Lee stated, “Well, it cannot be helped.”
Pedro replied, “I agree.”
Lee asked, “So, how was your day?”
Pedro smiled, as he casually answered, “Same old. Same old. Just another day at the office. Now, how was your day?”
Lee said, “I spent the day watching a few movies with Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. None that would tip them off as to whom I am. But, it was fun for all those involved.”
Pedro inquired, “That's nice. So, which movies did you watch?”
Lee answered, “Tropic Thunder. And both Robert Downey Junior Sherlock Holmes movies.”
Pedro grinned, as he complimented, “Nice selection.”
Lee agreed, “Thank you.”
Pedro grin got slightly wider, as he requested, “So please. Tell me what their reactions were to seeing those movies?”
Lee returned Pedro's grin, as he replied, “With pleasure.”
As Pedro listened to Lee's story, he picked up his cup, and sip his coffee, while he began to relax for the evening.
Eventually, the two men called their meeting over for the night. The paid for their bills, and left their tips.
They then exited the diner, and headed for their cars, in parking lot of the diner.
After they got into their vehicles, and started the ignitions to their cars, Lee headed to the Devil's Hotel, to watch a little karaoke in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, and then Lee planed to go to his suite, to get some sleep, in his bed.
Meanwhile Pedro headed back home, to get some much deserved sleep, for the night. Until Pedro would have to wake up, the next morning, and protect his city, from the same threatening insanity, one more time. As any hero should do, and would do.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 14: “Gambling With Insanity: Part One: A Stacked Deck.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
During the sunny, cool morning, after Pedro met with Chang, in the De La Plata Podrido police station, inside the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee was having breakfast, alone, at the bar counter, at the usual stool in sat in. Though, he missed not spending breakfast, beside his friend, Sam.
Though, during the previous evening, after Lee returned to the Devil's Hotel restaurant, to watch karaoke. He has the pleasant surprise of meeting Sam. Whom had told Lee that he would be busy that day.
Sam and Lee sat at a right front corner table, by the entrance, so they could talk, without anyone paying attention to them, they watched the women sing karaoke. The two men found that most of the women were actually very good singers. The rest were tolerable.
As the two men watched the performances, Sam had told Lee that he would be gone for today, and likely, tomorrow, as well.
Lee did not protest, and he commented that he hope to see Sam again, soon.
Sam was happy with Lee's response. And around nine thirty PM that evening, they said goodnight to each other, as they left the restaurant. They then parted ways, as Lee went to his suite, to get some sleep.
Presently, it was around nine thirty AM, and Lee was eating breakfast, at his usual place, at the bar counter, when his precognitive abilities alerted him with a sense of danger.
While Lee continued eat, and he did not show any outward signs of being in danger, he thought, 'I wonder why I am sensing danger right now. Ever since I used the time loop to develop my precognitive abilities, I know can now sense danger. Though, I am not always warned of danger by those abilities. That is why I am still on my guard most of the time. Though, the level of danger I sense right now is not serious... It is more of a, could be bad, if I am not careful, level.'
Just then, he heard a Revy's voice, from right behind him, say, “Lee, could we speak to you for a moment?”
Lee put down his fork, on his plate. He then quickly took a drink from his glass of orange juice, to wash down his food.
He set the glass down on the counter, and he turned around in his stool, to see that Revy and Rock were standing in front of him. With Revy to Lee's right side, and Rock to Lee's left side.
While they were dressed in their normal clothing, Lee noted that Revy did not have on her cutlasses, nor shoulder holsters.
Lee calmly said, “Sure Revy. What do you need?”
Revy said, “I have an idea for some quick cash. And I would like your help. Rock approved of the idea, so we wanted to talk to you about it.”
Lee maintained his poker mask of calmness, as he grimly thought, 'This is trouble. Revy's idea of quick cash, usually involves violence. Lots and lots of violence. Let's see if I can back out of this, before I learn enough to be considered an accomplice.'
Lee casually inquired, “And Revy, what can I do that you cannot?” He mentally lamented, 'And with a package of spring of drown man, you can even pee standing up, and have sex as a man. Likely better than I can, and with more stamina than I have. Not that I am going to tell you that.'
Rock stated, “Molly told us about the card trick you did around two weeks ago...”
Lee thought, 'Damn. You have a point, Rock. Actually, you saw it first hand. But, you cannot say that to me, because you were in your male form. And if you did mention you saw that, without tipping your hand to me.'
Rock continued, “And given that you have developed your precognitive abilities to that point, we think you are ready to play at a professional level.”
Lee thought, 'Oh no. I see the train wreck a mile away. And I have no way of avoid it. So, I might as well ask the big questions.' He asked, “What do you mean? Where would I play at?”
Revy answered, “Chang's casino. I want to make some money. And this is a wonderful way to do it. With you playing, it will be a sure bet.”
Lee's poker face broke as his eyes went wide.
Lee looked at both of them. They could see that Lee was clearly rattled at Revy's comment.
Lee flatly said, “No. And I mean, no. I have seen documentaries on those that cheat at casinos. It never ends well for them. I actually enjoy breathing, without broken hands, arms, and legs.”
Revy smirked, while speaking in sickeningly sweet tone of voice, “And if you wish to remain breathing, with none of your bones broken, you will come with us, to Chang's casino, after breakfast.”
By then, Lee was starting to regain his poker face. While he continued to look at Revy and Rock, Lee used his peripheral vision to see the women of Revy and Rock's group, sitting at the tables by the stage, laughing their asses off, at the situation Revy and Rock was putting Lee in.
Lee thought, 'With their enhancements in their senses, including hearing, over half of them likely overheard every word of this conversation.' He mentally grumbled, 'Damn them all.'
Rock stated, “Listen. We still have to run this by Chang. And there is a real chance he will say, no.”
Lee thought, 'No, Chang won't say, no. Chang loves playing games, and toying with people. And Chang saw that poker trick I did over a week ago, at the Rats Nest. This will be too tempting an opportunity to pass up. Also, this means I run a real chance of meeting River, in a more direct way, than at that talent show. When she was likely distracted. And Pedro, Melvin, and I, lucked out in that situation, by not getting caught by her.'
'And there is no way I can talk about such a poker game, if River will be there, without giving myself away to her, that I am the writer.'
'Still, I have no choice in the matter. These two women will make me do this. One way. Or, another. At least, this way, I will be doing it under my own power.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he let out a breath. He said, “Fine. I will come with you.”
Revy said, “Good. We will wait for you to finish your breakfast, and then we will head over there.”
Revy and Rock turned around, and walked over to rejoin their friends.
Meanwhile, Lee turned back in his stool, to face the bar counter. As he went back to finish his breakfast, he felt like a condemned man eating his last meal.'
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Rock was driving down the road, on the streets of the city of Plata Podrido, in her family's red GTO. Revy sat in the front right passenger side. And Lee was in the back seat, on the left side of the GTO, behind Rock.
Lee asked, “So, where are we meeting, Chang?”
Without turning around, Revy answered, “We will be meeting him in his office, on the top floor, of his casino, by his penthouse apartment.”
While keeping her eyes on the road in front of her, Rock said, “We already scheduled a meeting with him, in ten minutes. So, we will not be barging into him, while he is conducting business.”
Revy admitted, “Yea. He hates it when we do that.”
Lee thought, 'Who doesn't hate that? Still, we are going to the top floor, and into the office, by the place he lives. He probably shares his apartment with River. So, the chances of meeting River just keep increasing. Though, if I do meet her, I will just have to clear my mind, and hope I can pull off the situation, by playing by ear...'
'Though, I think at this point, Chang does not mind being a guy, or a girl. So, I might walk into Chang's office while Chang is a woman. That could cause problems, on so many levels, for me.'
'Though, I have officially seen Chang introduced as Daiyu, at the talent contest. So, I could play off the situation, by asking is Chang in her female form, is the Chang, in his male forms, sister.'
'Though, it is extremely risky for me to do that. Because, I already played the sisters question act, with Revy, when her two past counterparts shoes up. And Revy will likely remember me asking her that question. And she is sharp enough to realize I might be playing an angle, and realize that I know Daiyu is really Chang.'
'At which point, my cover will all but be blown. With my cover being blown, when they go get River to confirm that I am the writer.'
'As such, it is best to ask if Chang knows I am coming. So, Chang will more likely be in his male form.'
Lee inquired, “Revy, it is pretty clear that you are friends with this Chang. But, does he know I am coming with you two, to meet with him?”
Revy answered, “Yes. He doesn't know why we are having this meeting. But, he did state that he wanted to meet with you, in person.”
Lee thought, 'What it comes to Chang, that is never a good thing.'
Though, Lee could only simply reply, “Okay.”
(_)
Five minutes later, Rock parked her car in the parking lot in front, right side of Daiyu Palace Casino. The three adults then got out. After Rock got out, she pulled her chair forward, to let Lee out of the backseat.
Meanwhile, Revy opened her passenger door, got out, and shut the door behind her.
When Lee was out of the car, Rock leaned the seat back up, locked the door, and shut her driver's side door.
Lee then followed Rock and Revy towards the front entrance of the Casino.
As they walked to the front entrance doors to the casino, the sunny day allowed Lee to get a better look at the casino's exterior.
The casino was very tall and wide. With the casino being at least thirty stories high. Likely higher.
The entrance had a two way, two lane carport, for car to drive up to, and let people out, directly into the a casino, without the weather bothering them.
The entrance doors were tinted windows. The there two sets of double doors to the casino. The awning of the carport extended several feet in both direction, away from the entrance.
Opposite to the building, there were three large, round, concrete pillars, set in a row, as support for the large awning. There were steel supports inside the concrete pillars. And the pillars were set in a small, curved, rectangular concrete median. The pillars were far enough apart, for a full grown adults to walk between, without a problem. And the surfaces of the pillars were painted to match the outside wall of the casino building.
Metal benches were placed on each side of the entrance, covered by the awning, for those waiting for their group to arrive, or for those waiting to be picked up.
Right above the carport, on the building, was a large neon sign, stating, “Daiyu Palace Casino.”
Lee thought, 'Daiyu Palace Casino. As in Black Jade Palace Casino. Cool chinese name for a female villain, and a casino. That is why I gave Chang's female form the alias, Daiyu.'
As they came to the entrance, there were chinese female valets, in uniform, on the sidewalk, near the interior curb of the driveway, under the awning. The uniforms they wore were very conservative. With shoes, pants, shirt, and sleeveless vests.
As Revy, Rock, and Lee approached the front doors, one of the valet walked over to the doors, and she the door to the far right, for the three of the adults.
Revy went in first. Then Rock. And finally Lee.
As they walked inside, the valet closed the door behind them. She then went back to the curb, with the other valets.
Meanwhile, Lee continued to follow Revy and Rock, further into the casino.
While Lee did so, Lee looked around, and he saw, right inside the doors, the restrooms to his right, beside the restrooms was a check in desk, with two clerks on duty. And there were three teller booths to his left, where people exchanged money for playing chips, and vise versa.
As they walked through the casino, Lee saw a lot of young women employees, of different raced, in business suits, or other types of uniforms.
Lee thought, 'I do not recognize any of these women. Given most of the badasses Chang worked with are late sleepers, none of them are probably up right now. I may luck out, River might be among them.'
'Also, Pedro mentioned that Chang did not hire anyone locally. So, these people mostly Chang's men, turned women, and others. And it is likely that several of them are armed.'
Lee looked in front of them, to see the elevator bays about fifty yards away from them.
As they passed into the gaming floor, Lee noticed that the gaming floor extended to both sides of them.
Lee saw rows of slot machines, and tables for dealers of different card games
There were some tables for dice games. And even a few tables with roulette wheels on them.
Also, across the gaming floor, to Lee's right side, was the hotel restaurant. And to his left side, beside the elevator bay, was a large hotel hallway, that went deeper into the hotel building.
Lee also noticed that there were several customers gambling on the game floor.
Lee also noticed that dealers and staff also wear casino uniforms, which were shoes, pants, shirt, and sleeveless vests. And the uniforms where gender neutral, and looked okay on both women and men.
Lee thought, 'Well, at least Chang has enough respect for his help, not to make them wear something skimpy. I will give him that. And I should not be surprised with the number of people here. Chang always did have a flair for getting people to do what he wants. In such a case, advertisement is child's play to him.'
Lee then noticed what song was playing in the background of the room.
Revy commented, “Nice song.”
Rock said, “I agree.”
Lee remained silent, as he thought, 'Yes. It is a nice song.. The song is titled, Sound of Madness, by the band known as Shinedown. The lyrics really speak to me, in the situation that I am in.'
Less than a minute later, they made it to the elevator bays.
Unlike the elevator bays in the Devil's Hotel, which had only four elevators, two on each side, this bay had five elevators. Two chrome elevators on each side, and a gold plated elevators in front of them.
The gold plated elevator had two chinese women, in black business suits, guarding it.
Even the button for the elevator required a key to use.
Lee thought, 'That is probably the express elevator to the penthouse.'
As they reached the two women, Revy stated, “Don't worry. He is with us.”
One of the women looked over at Lee, as she stated, in english, “Sir, if you wish to proceed, we will first have to pat you down.”
Lee thought, 'This is likely why Revy did not bring her weapons with her. And they know, Rock and Revy. Which is why I am the only one being patted down.'
Lee held up his arms, upwards, with his hands right above the sides of his head, as he stated, “Go ahead.”
Both women walked over to Lee.
One of them patted Lee down, as the other stood there. The woman patting Lee down did a gentle, through thorough job. She started from the top, and worked her way down. As she found something, she handed it to the other woman.
The woman patting down Lee first found a deck of cards. Then, a lighter. Next, the woman found three different folds of cash.
Revy and Rock just watched, as this went on.
Revy commented, “Damn Lee. I didn't know you carried that much cash on you.”
Lee looked ahead of him, at the gold plated elevator doors, as he tried to ignore the sense of violation he was feeling, from being patted down. He flatly said, “I don't trust banks.”
Lee's comment got a few giggles out of all four women, whom were present.
A few seconds later, the woman patting him down, stood back up, she said, in english, “He is clean.”
Lee turned to the woman holding his belongings, as he politely requested, “Can I please have my items back.”
The other woman answered, in english, “Sure.”
The woman then handed Lee back his belongings, and folds of cash.
As Lee put his items back on his personal, as he originally had done, the woman that had patted him down, walked over to the gold plated elevator, she pulled out a key, and used it to summon the elevator to come down to the ground floor.
Less than a minute later, the gold plated elevator doors opened, with Revy, Rock, and Lee walking into the elevator. Lee walked between Rock and Revy. So, when they around, Lee was in back, with Rock and Revy in front of him.
Which out punching any of the buttons on the panel, the doors automatically closed, and the elevator automatically starting going up to the top floor.
Several seconds later, the elevator doors opened, with Revy and Rock getting out first, with Lee following behind them.
Lee silently followed Revy and Rock down the hallway. And after a few turns, Rock and Revy came to a stop, with a closed door to their right side.
Lee immediately stopped behind Rock and Revy.
Rock and Revy turned to the closed door. Then, Lee turned to the door as well.
Lee thought, 'This must be the door to Chang's office... I hope.'
Revy knocked on the door, from inside, a male voice stated, in english, “Who is it?”
Revy stated, “Chang, it's us.”
Chang stated, through the door, “Come in.”
Revy opened the door inwardly, as she walked inside. Rock followed inside. Then, Lee walked into the room, as he gently closed the door behind him.
All three adults came to a stop, just inside the room.
Lee looked in front of him. He saw that Chang kept a very nice office. With Chang sitting in a nice, plush, black leather, cushioned office armchair, behind his black wooden desk.
Chang was in his usual black suit clothing, with his browline sunglasses on, to hide his eyes, from other people.
There was a large closed curtain window behind Chang. With white curtains that let sunlight in, allowed everyone to clearly see the inside of the room, while also offered privacy for those within the room, from the outside.
Lee thought, 'From the light coming in, that is likely one single, large window. And with Chang's resources, that window is likely bulletproof, if not rocket proof.'
Lee then saw noticed were two smaller cushioned armchairs in front of Chang's desk.
Lee thought, 'I will be the odd man out in this sitting arrangement. It is polite, and I am sure that Chang will notice. And I had best keep on his good side. Also, I do not see River here, so I should be fine.'
Chang smiled, as he looked at the three adults. He offered, in a kind tone of voice, “Come sit down. Ah, Revy, Rock... And I believe, Lee. Come sit down. So, we can talk.”
Lee thought, 'Chang's tone of voice is so smooth that I not tell if he was being sincere, or insincere. Though, I will just follow Rock and Revy, and see what happens.'
Revy and Rock walked forward, with Lee a few steps behind them.
Revy took the chair to Lee's left. And Rock too the chair to Lee's right. With Lee silently remained standing, behind, and between, the two of women.
Lee thought, 'Looks like we are playing the same game with each other.' He looked at Chang, as Chang looked back at him.
Lee calmly stated, “That is correct. You must be, Chang.”
Chang said, “Yes. I believe we have met before.”
While showing no outward reaction, Lee mentally cursed, 'Damn you, Chang.'
Rock turned around in her seat, to her right, and Revy turned to her left, turned around to look at Lee.
Lee looked at Rock and Revy, and the unspoken question on their faces.
Lee thought, 'Fortunately, I have already come up with just the excuse for this situation.'
Lee looked at all three adults in front of him, as he partly lied, “As a favor to Chief Del Soto, for judging the talent contest, I had to chauffeur him to his beach house, in my Cadillac, a few times.”
“One of those times, he wanted to head his beach house in style, because he was selling the place. And he wanted to make a good first impression. I believe Chang here was the one that bought the beach house. Since he was the one I saw Pedro shake hands with.”
Rock and Revy both giggled. Both women then turned back in their seats, to look at Chang.
Chang complimented, “Yes. And you both did an admirable job. I am quite pleased with my new beach home. Please, let the Police Chief Del Soto know that.”
Lee lied, “I will try to do so. Unfortunately, I am only an acquaintance of Chief Del Soto. But, if I do see him, I will let him know.”
Chang asked, “That will be fine.” He then turned to Revy, as he inquired, “So Revy, why did you want to arrange this meeting?”
Revy smiled, as she said, “I want to arrange a high stakes poker game with you.”
Chang stated, “I am listening.”
Rock took over where her lover left off, as she commented, “Standard five card draw poker.”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'Thank you, Rock. For paying attention to the type of poker game I am good at.'
Chang responded, “Okay. But, I pick the dealer.”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he thought, with trepidation, 'I hope Chang picks and honest dealer from his employee pool. Though, I doubt he will.'
Revy replied, “Of course.”
Chang inquired, “So, how much is the bet?
Revy stated, “A million, U.S. cash in cash, in this poker game. Winner take all.”
Lee thought, 'That is a lot of money. Well, at least to me.'
Chang said, “Fine. Minimum bid is ten thousand.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Works for me.”
Chang guessed, “And you plan to have Lee here, to play for you?”
Revy replied, “Of course. He is our proxy.”
Lee stated, “I want you to know this is not my idea. I did not want to come here.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he casually said, “I don't doubt that.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to see if I can still back out, by being honest.' He pointed out, “If you have asked around town, about me. It is known I have precognitive abilities. And, as such, I really do not feel that it is a good idea for me to gamble in your establishment.”
Chang crack a grin, as he commented, “Actually, I like the idea of pre-cog playing a high stakes poker game.'
Outwardly, Lee appeared calm, as he mentally cursed, 'I made this big to do about not wanting to cheat at cards, with Rock and Chang present. And because Rock was a guy at the time, and Chang a woman. With their genders reversed, right now. I cannot mention it to them! Damn! Damn! Damn!'
For a brief few seconds, Lee thought he could hear a woman laughing, coming through the wall, from a room nearby, to his right side. Though, given the situation, he ignored the possible sounds of laughter, as he focused on the three adults in front of him.
Lee looked at Chang, as he stated, “Listen, I prefer to be honest. And I don't like using my precognitive abilities in poker. Especially, in a professional environment such at this.”
Chang smirked, as he questioned, “You're afraid that I am going to break your legs?”
Lee thought, 'You one time had a man castrated. Though, you did give him a warning, beforehand.' He said, “If I am lucky.”
Chang, Revy, and Rock, lightly laughed, at Lee's serious comment, for a few seconds.
As the three adults calmed down, Chang admitted, “Well Lee, I won't lie to you. You do have some reason to worry. Still, I want you to play.” His voice turned a bit ominous, as he continued, “And if you do not play, I will be upset with you.”
Lee thought, 'There is no way I am getting out of this situation. I might as well just go with it.' He said, “Okay. But, it is your million to lose. When do you want to play me?”
Chang continued to smirk, as he stated, “Well, once I heard that you were coming with Rock and Revy. I knew this was going to be about a possible poker game. With bets between myself, and Rock and Revy. I just was not sure of the amounts.”
Lee thought, 'I see you are as sharp as ever.'
Chang smirk curled into a wicked grin, as he commented, “Also, I will not be the one playing you?”
Lee maintained his mask of calmness, as he thought, 'Who would Chang have me play?... Oh no... No. No. No.'
At that moment, Lee heard the door to the office opened behind him.
Lee turned to around, to his right. Rock and Revy turned around in their Chairs, and Chang just looked forward, in his seat, as he continued to wickedly grin.
Lee, Revy, Rock, and Chang all looked towards the door to see who was standing at the threshold of the door, facing them. They saw the person was River.
River was dressing in a blue jeans, and a red t-shirt, and red tennis shoes. Her long red hair was loose, as it fell down her back.
Upon seeing River, Lee immediately cleared his mind.
While Lee has his back turned to Chang, Chang casually said, “You will be playing my girlfriend, River.”
Revy and Rock both burst out laughing.
Lee forced himself not to react, nor think, at what was going on around him, as he kept his mind clear.
As the two women calmed down, Revy stated, “Now, this is going to be a game to remember.”
Lee turned back around to face Chang, Rock, and Revy. While, Lee did not want to think about the situation in front of the telepathic River, Lee flatly inquired, “Fine. Where?”
Chang stated, “In a room, here on the penthouse floor.”
Lee directly asked, “When?”
Chang questioned, “Tomorrow at ten AM, okay with you?”
By then, Rock and Revy, turned back around in their seats, to look at Chang.
Rock commented, “That is plenty of time to get some breakfast, and get ready. And I am sure the girls will love to attend this game, in the casino.”
Revy responded, “I agree. I cannot wait to tell everyone at the hotel. Tomorrow is going to be so much fun.”
Lee calmly said, “Yes. I will be there.” He turned to look at Rock and Revy, whom had their backs turned to him. He flatly stated, “Rock, Revy, I will meet you out front, under the awning.”
Lee then turned, as he calmly walked passed River, to River's right side, and out the door, towards the elevator bay.
After Lee walked out of the room, there was silence in the room for a few seconds.
Chang then looked over at River, as he asked, “What is he thinking about?”
River turned to focus on Chang, as she calmly answered, with only a hint of annoyance in her tone of voice, “He is wondering how his life has taken such strange turns.”
The Revy, Rock, and Chang, just laughed, while River frowned.
As they stopped laughing, River stated, “While you three catch up, I'll be in the penthouse living room.”
River mentally reflected, 'Wondering how good a precognitive Lee really is. And if he knows better than to knowingly try to use such abilities on a telepath? Or, not? Probably the former...'
'Though, there is a question I have for them. But, from reading Chang's mind, he will likely answer the question soon. And with me not here, Revy and Rock will likely be more open with their answers.'
While River turned around, and she stated walked down the hallway, towards the door to the apartment living room. She left Chang's office door open. And as she walked away, she overheard Chang asked, “So, how goes your search for the writer?”
River smiled, as she mentally reflected, 'Good. He already asked the question, before I was fully out of earshot.'
Revy answered, “The search has gone nowhere for the moment. But, I am sure that we will catch him, eventually.”
River continued walking, as she rolled her eyes for a few seconds. She thought, 'Revy can be so foolish, sometimes.'
River then looked in front of her, as she continued towards the penthouse apartment she shared with Chang.
Chang inquired, “So, how savvy is this guy?”
Revy stated, “Not much. Aeryn and Violin said that he did not even know about anime.”
Chang replied, “Mores the pity.”
By then, River was no longer within earshot of the three adults. A few seconds later, she found the door to the living room. Which she left unlocked. She then opened the door, and walked inside.
Meanwhile, inside Chang's office, Chang, Revy, and Rock, continued their conversation for some time.
(_)
A minute later, Lee made his way to an elevator. Unlike the bottom floor button, this one did not require a key. And there was only one button. A down arrow, that lead to the ground floor.
Lee pushed the button, and the elevator doors immediately opened.
Lee thought, 'These elevators must default to stay at the penthouse level. As both a security measure, and for safety reasons. In case someone needed to quickly escape the top floor.'
Lee walked into the elevator. He turned around, to face the entrance, just as the doors closed. Less than a minute later, the elevator opened on the ground floor, and he exited the door.
With River on the top floor of the very, thirty plus story building, and Lee being on the ground floor, Lee finally allowed himself to think.
Lee walked out of the elevator, and came to a stop, in the elevator bay, as he thought, 'If this is not far enough to avoid River's telepath. Then, I have already screwed myself at the talent contest. When Pedro, Melvin, Sam, and I, were in the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, right after the contest, with River in the Devil's Hotel restaurant.'
'As such, I might as well hope this is far enough to avoid her telepathy, and not worry about it.'
'Now, onto other related matters. With such foolishness by Revy. I am starting to wonder if actually has now really lost her mind. And no matter what happens, there will be fallout for me, in the aftermath of this poker game. I am going to have to think on this for a little while, before I will be able to formulate a plan for me to get out of this mess.'
The elevator doors closed behind Lee, as he walked out of the elevator bay.
As Lee exited the alcove, he noticed that he was about teen feet into a large rectangular hallway, that was perpendicular to the entrance to the elevator bay, and he was not on gaming floor.
The lighting from the hallway were soft florescent ceiling lights, that provided plenty of light for Lee to see with.
Lee then turned around and he noticed there were no guards by the entrance to the express elevator. He thought, 'Maybe the guards are partly for show. Most people would not take the back way. Though, I am sure there are cameras monitoring almost every inch of this ground floor.'
'But, since I was leaving Chang's office and penthouse, with me already being invited there. As long as I stay in the open, non-secure areas, security could careless what I do. Besides, I really just want to exit the front of this casino. As I wait for Revy and Rock.'
'Along those thoughts. I guess I was so mentally wrapped up in clearing my mind around River, that it did not occur to me that there were at least two express elevators leading down from the top floor, to the ground. Though, from safety and security standpoints, it makes sense for them to have at least two ways off of top floor. That is not any emergency reality devices they have on hand, on the top floor.'
'But, given who is in the casino, with River and Chang being at the top of the list. Even I am not crazy enough to try to get up to the penthouse, and look for those reality devices.'
Still, I might as well look around, as I get my bearings.'
Lee stood in place, as he looked back around to see a large, clear plastic wall in front of him. Behind the wall was what looked to be a large garden. Nearby, there was an open door, nearby that lead into the room.
Lee thought, 'Yes. I must have gotten turned around. Now, that I think about it. I believe I may have turned the wrong direction, when I came out of Chang's office. Still, this is no problem. If I cannot find my way, I can ask for directions. The employees are likely more than happy to point me in the direction of the gaming area. That is where their customers foolishly gamble what they have, away to the casino.'
Lee was then heard a loud cat growl to his left side.
Lee turned to see some people transporting a tiger in a cage. He could see that the tiger was not happy.
Lee thought, 'I see Chang is taking a page from Scarface. It just shows that he has taste. I guess he truly believes to push it to the limit. Not that I blame him. If I was in his, or her, position, in creating this casino, I would likely do the same as he, or she, has done.'
A second later, one of the wheels to the cage snapped, causing the cage to tip over, and the latch to the cage came undone, allowing the tiger to jump free of her cage.
As Lee watched as the tiger approach him, he thought, 'And this day just keep on getting more interesting. Let's see. If I want survive this, I must remember to have no fear. Show no fear. Have no fear.'
'Also, from what I have learned, tigers do not like to strike their prey directly, when they are looking at the faces of their prey. They like to pounce from behind. That is why some tiger hunters in India, wearing human looking face masks, on the back of their heads, when they hunt tigers. As such, I must move very slowly, as needed, while I do not take my eyes off this tiger.'
'Though, there is a chance, as a big predator, the tiger might take me looking it in the eyes, as a challenge, and it will still attack me. Though, I have nothing else to use on it. So, this is the only thing I got.'
Meanwhile, the workers transporting the tiger, ran down the hallway.
Lee did not both to look at the workers, as he forced himself to be calm, and have no fear, while looking the tiger directly in her eyes.
Because of Lee doing this, the tiger became slightly confuse. Instead of just pouncing on Lee, the tiger slowly circled around Lee, in a clockwise direction.
Lee slowly turned to his right, with the tiger. As Lee did so, he never took his eyes off of the tiger's eyes.
After several seconds, the tiger came to a stop, and they just looked at each other, for several more seconds.
By then, the tiger's head was two feet from Lee' stomach.
Lee then cocked his head slightly, and the tiger imitated him.
Lee very slowly reached up with his right hand, and he scratched the back of the tiger's left ear.
After a few seconds, the tiger back to purr. After a few more seconds, Lee stopped scratching the tiger's ear, and instead likely ran his right hand down the back of the tigers neck a few times.
The tiger continued to purr.
A second later, Lee stopped brushing the tiger's hair on her back, and slowly move his hand away from her head.
Lee then calmly, yet slowly, turned, and walked towards the door to the enclosure.
The tiger followed right behind him.
When Lee reached the door, Lee stood near it. He slowly turned around, and he slowly lifted his right hand, for the tiger to see, as he motioned with it for the tiger to go through the door.
A second later, the tiger went through the door.
Lee then slowly closed the door behind her, and locked the lock on the outside of the door, that faced the hallway.
Just then, Lee saw Zoe, and a couple of asian women in black business suits, run up the hallway, with the clear enclosure wall being to the group's right side. All of them were carrying guns.
When they stopped near Lee, they turned, and saw, the tiger was already in the enclosure.
None of the women were pointing their weapons at Lee, as Zoe turned to Lee. She asked, in english, “What happened?”
Lee thought, 'It figures that all of Chang's badass friends, that Zoe would be up at this time in the morning. Still, given the situation, I think it is best if I be honest.' He answered, in english, “She is just tired and alone. Feed her and she will feel better.”
Zoe inquired, “How did you know the tiger is a she? I doubt you got a good look on that end of her.”
Lee explained, “Male tigers smell of urine, because they are constantly marking their territory. I smelled no urine from her.”
Zoe replied, “Okay.”
One of the asian women flatly inquired, “Now, why are you not dead?”
Lee thought, 'Because predators prefer not to eat the sick, and the dying. Along with that, dogs and cats can tell when someone has cancer, by their sense of smell. Though, it is best I do not mention this... Especially, since it is none of their business...'
'And to be honest, it is best, for everyone here, that this entire incident was swept under the rug. Besides, I cannot tell the truth about how I did this, without mentioning that I am dying.'
Lee responded, “I have experience with cats. This entire indecent is an embarrassment for everyone involved. If you are willing to pretend this never happened. I will do the same.”
Zoe replied, “Agreed.”
Lee said, “Thank you. Now, which way is it to the gaming floor?”
Zoe stated, “Just turn around, and in the opposite direction from which we came from.”
Lee replied, “I appreciate that. And thank you, again.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from them, with the intent on exiting the casino, and finding a place to comfortably wait for Rock and Revy to get finished with their meeting with Chang.
While Zoe watched the man walk away, she thought, 'I wonder what his story is?' She then turned to her women, as she stated, “Okay. Someone get a clean up crew to get rid of this cage. And make sure this door to the pen is secure. I do not want that cat to get loose, again.”
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee walked from the large hallway. After a few turns, he made his way into the back section of gaming floor, he saw the elevator bay to his left side. And he immediately knew where he was.
While Lee passed through the gaming floor, he noticed the music playing was another song he know. The song that was playing was, Been To Hell, by Hollywood Undead.
Lee recognized the song, as he thought, 'Talk about a meaningful title and song for my situation. I wonder if this speaker system here is just as strange as the one in the Devil's Hotel... I doubt it. Someone just has interesting taste in music.'
Lee soon made it out the front doors. He used the door to his far left, to exit out of the building. After he was outside, and under the awning, he sat by a bench, that was right outside the door he use, to his left.
As Lee sat on the bench, he patiently waited for Rock and Revy to get through with the meeting with Chang.
(_)
An hour later, according to Lee's digital wrist watch, that he had been sitting on the bench, outside of the casino.
A few seconds later, Lee watched as Rock and Revy exited the front entrance of the casino.
Lee stood up, as he turned to the two women. He said, “Over here, Revy and Rock.”
Both women looked over at him. Then, they turn back to looking in front, as they walked to their car.
Lee thought, 'At least they turned to look at me. To acknowledge my presence. Now, to figure out how to subtly get some answers from these two, without them realizing it.'
Lee silently followed the two women, a few steps behind them.
As they reached the red GTO car, with neither woman speaking to Lee, Lee thought, 'It is clear that they did not hear about the tiger getting loose. Or, they would have said something. Good. I caught a break on that.'
When the three adults got to the car, Lee followed Rock to the driver's side of the car.
Without saying a word, Rock pulled out her keys, and unlocked the driver's side door. She then opened the door, unlocked the other door for Revy, with the electronic door lock switch in the driver's side door. She then lower the driver's seat forward, so Lee could get into the backseat, behind Rock.
While Lee got into the backseat, Revy open the passenger door, and got into the front passenger seat.
As soon as Lee was inside the backseat, Rock raised the driver's seat, and got into the driver's side of the car. She shut the door behind her. She the used her car key to start the ignition to the car.
A few seconds later, Rock pulled out of her parking place, and heading onto the main road, back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
A few minutes later, as Rock was driving down the road, back to the Devil's Hotel, something occurred to her. She thought, 'Why was Lee slightly upset, and quiet, at meeting River?... Could he know who she is?' While continuing to look forward, she asked, “Hey, Lee. Why did you go quiet when River showed up?”
Revy did not look behind her, to her left, between the seats, at Lee, as she complimented, “Good question.”
Lee maintained his mask of calmness, as he thought, 'Damn. I forgot to give a reason for my actions. The problem was with River there, if I tried to think of a plan, she would have read my mind, and the game would have been over right then and there, for me. Still, I have two good excuses to use.”
Lee flatly answered, “Because the one thing worse than cheating a casino owner, is cheating the casino owner’s girlfriend. And I did not want to dig myself into a deeper hole. Especially, if it is my possible grave. So, I left.”
Lee saw Revy just shrug her left shoulder, in response to his comment.
Rock agreed, “That is a good reason.” She mentally added, 'That is a very good reason for shutting up. Lee already knows how dangerous we are. He knows from Revy that Chang and River are our friends. He saw River do that fire dance, and he can only guess how dangerous Chang is. Lee is not an idiot. He knows when to keep his mouth shut.'
Lee thought, 'Good. They bought my excuse. Now, for the joke.' Lee joked, “I take that back. There is one worse thing. Cheating with the casino owner's girlfriend.”
Rock and Revy laughed, for a few seconds.
Rock thought, 'Still, he also knows how to tell a joke.'
Revy said, “You would have to have a death wish to do that. Especially, to Chang, with River.”
Lee agreed, “No arguments there.”
Revy stated, “Still, I would be more worried that River does try to cheat at cards with you.”
Lee thought, 'Thank you, Revy. For bringing up the perfect excuse to ask about River's abilities.” Lee casually inquired, “What do you mean, Revy?”
Revy and Rock then started laughing again, without answering Lee's question.
Lee outwardly remained calm, as he inwardly grimace, while he thought, 'It figures that I going to have to find another way to officially find out about River's genius and telepathy. But, that should not be too difficult a problem. I just need to think about how to do this.'
'Though, once this problem is solved, I will start getting ready for the game tomorrow, and then meet with Pedro, tonight.'
'I am already coming up with a plan to beat River. And it might work. The question is, do I have the talent and skills to pull this off.'
Meanwhile, Rock continued driving them down the road, towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, the three adults returned to the Devil's Hotel.
Rock parked the car near the front section of the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel, close to the front door.
Then, with all three of the adults inside, got out. Then, locked and shut the doors behind them.
When the three adults reached the lobby entryway doors, Lee opened the door for Rock and Revy, as he said, “See you at the game tomorrow.”
As the two women walked inside, passed Lee, Revy came to a stop, in front of Lee. With Rock stopping behind her.
Revy turned to Lee, as she warned, “Don't miss this game, or I will come for you.”
Rock turned to Lee, as she said, “Good luck.”
Both women then turned and walked inside the entryway.
Lee then followed behind them.
When the reached the doors to the lobby, they opened the doors, and they walked through the threshold, into the lobby.
Once, they were in the lobby, they split up, Lee walked to his right, to sit in a lobby chair and think, while Revy and Rock headed for the hotel restaurant.
The lobby was half full of various people. Including, two clerks, in hotel uniform, standing behind the check in desk, which was across the room from the outside entrance door.
As Lee sat in the white cushioned armchair, which faced the front doors to the hotel lobby, he looked at his digital watch. It stated, eleven two AM.
Lee looked around himself, without straining his neck, as he thought, 'Given it is around eleven AM, Melvin now on duty at the bar. And Revy and Rock are headed for the hotel restaurant, to each get a beer, before they had lunch with their friends and family in the restaurant.'
'Still, that doesn't held me one bit, with my current problems, which Revy, Rock, and Chang, have gotten me into.'
Lee looked in front of himself, as he maintained his poker mask. Though, he continued his thoughts, with worry, 'What am I going to do now? I am thoroughly screwed to the wall. There is no way I can get out of this situation. I am going to have to confront River, a telepath, in a poker game, that will likely be several hours long.'
'Being that long in close quarters with a telepath, the question is not if she will learn I am the writer? But, what she is going to do when she does learn that truth about me?.'
'And that is a big fucking question mark.'
'That is on top of River being a top level genius, and a badass nearly on par with Roberta. After Roberta's upgrades.'
'Though, between what happened in the Serenity movie, and what I wrote, at least River is somewhat sane. So, the situation is still somewhat manageable. She has always been playful, and she likes keeping secrets.'
'River prefers not to be mean, or violent, unless she has to. Someone sent a subliminal command to her. Or, her mental illness got the better of her.'
'And given River is saner, and no one here knows those commands. And I have no intention of provoking her. I do not have to worry about her being violent with me.'
'Unless, she is pissed off at me, for being the writer. Though, I doubt that for several reasons. And I cannot control that. One way, or the other . So, I might as well not worry about that.'
'And taking all this into account. As long as I stay in her good graces, she will likely not immediately spill the beans on my identity. That will give me a little breathing room, even after this casino poker game is over. But, not much. So, after this, things are going to have to start moving forward more quickly. And I have to be ready for that.'
'Though, I first have to make it through the game with my hide intact, and my cover not being blown. So, I will worry about the aftermath, until after the game.'
'Now, the problem is how do I stay in her good graces, and Revy's good graces, at the same time? If I don't win that game for Revy, even if she doesn't even learn I am the writer, Revy is literally going to skin me alive. But, if I beat River, that may upset River... Unless, I defeat her in a manner where she had a good time... That might work. And doing so falls in with the plan I am working on.'
'Yet. If I implement this plan, there is an off chance the girls might kill me after this. Still, it is my only shot.'
'Either way, I still need to review the rules in dealing with a telepath. Never deal with telepaths, if you have secret you need to hide, because they will eventually find out those secrets. Usually sooner, rather than later.'
'Never lie to a telepath, because the can tell when someone is lying.'
'And never cheat a telepath, because they can tell when you are cheating them.'
'And Revy still thinks I can win by cheating with my precognition. She actually hasn't figured out that I cannot win that way, even if I wanted to, because River will immediately know I am using my precognition on her.'
'On the other hand, Chang is likely laughing his ass off at the easy million he is about win, with my ass being the one that is kicked by Revy, when she loses her million dollars.
'The only good news out of this situation is that I set up Revy's family to be very rich. A million will not break the bank, for them. Especially, given the inflation the U.S. dollar is suffering against the value of gold in this world.'
'Still, the first step out of this mess, is for me to figure out how to get one of these badass women to tell me straight out that River is a telepathic genius. So, I can then explain to Revy and Rock why I cannot beat River in this upcoming poker game, tomorrow.'
Lee then noticed Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, walked by him, from his back left side, with them having exited the elevator bay, from Lee's back right side.
Lee saw the three women heading for the front door.
Lee thought, 'Of all of Revy and Rock's group, those three are my best chance to pull this off. But, I have to play this angle just right,'
Lee got up from his seat, and briskly walked towards the three gender bending women.
As Lee approached them, the three women noticed him. They stopped walking and turned to towards his directly.
When Lee came to a stop a six feet from the three women, Ranma asked, “What is it Lee?”
Lee inquired, “Hi ladies. I have had an interesting morning.”
Akira snorted. She said, “I bet. We heard about the plan Revy has roped you into. So, how was your, Revy, and Rock's meeting with Chang?”
Lee honestly answered, “Interesting. That is the reason I want to talk to you three. You three seem to be the most... Reasonable of Revy and Rock's group.”
Ranma commented, “You got that right.”
Natsuru said, “I appreciate the compliment.”
Akira replied, “Thank you.”
Lee went onto say, “Well, I have a small request for you three. What can you tell me about Chang's girlfriend, River?”
Natsuru questioned, “Why do you ask?” Her facial expression turned grim, as she said, “Oh no... That is who Chang is having you play?”
Lee saw Ranma and Akira's expressions also darkened a little.
Lee stated, in a very casual tone of voice, “Yes. Is there something about River that I need to know?”
Akira answered, “A lot actually. But, we can only give you the cliff notes.”
Lee requested, “Such as?”
Natsuru flatly answered, “She is a telepath.”
Lee said, “That could be a problem.”
Akira then realized, as she inquired, “Why are you taking our claim that River is a telepath at face value?”
Lee answered, “I am a precognitive. A telepath is not that far fetched from my own abilities.”
Akira conceded, “True. And that is a good point. Also, she is a genius. Still, we need to talk to Revy and Rock about this. And Lee, you had better come with us?”
Ranma inquired, “Where is Rock and Revy?”
Lee answered, “I think they are in the hotel restaurant.”
Akira stated, “Then, let's go talk to them.”
All four of them then turned, and headed for the indoor hotel restaurant.
(_)
A minute later, in the hotel restaurant, behind the bar counter, Melvin watched at Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, and Lee walk into the room.
And while Lee appeared calm, the three women with him appeared unhappy.
Melvin saw them heading for Rock and Revy, whom were sitting at their usual table.
Melvin thought, 'From the look on their faces. This could get ugly. I am glad I am the only one here, besides Revy and Rock. Still, I don't want to know. I don't need to know. I know better than to need to know.'
He then grabbed a white rag from under the counter. Next, he turned his back to them, as he began wiping down the dust on the alcoholic bottles in the shelves, on the wall, behind the bar counter.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the back of the room, Rock and Revy were sitting beside each other, at that usual table, by the stage. Their backs were to the stage, with them facing the front of the room, as they quiet enjoyed each others company, while each had a bottle of beer to drink.
Rock look up to see who was approaching them.
Across the table, several feet away, was Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, walking towards them, with Lee following a few feet behind them.
And as Rock saw the unhappy looks on the three women's faces, Rock said, “Trouble.”
Revy looked up to see the four adults approaching them. She agreed, “Yep. And they do not look happy.”
When the four adults reached Revy and Rock's table, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma stood across the table, from Revy and Rock. With Lee standing to the left side of the three member group of women.
Akira looked down at Rock and Revy, with a stern expression on her face. She stated, with slight anger evident in her tone of voice, “Revy, Rock, are you two, idiots? Having Lee here face River in a poker game is like sending a lamb to slaughter.”
Revy and Rock looked over at Lee.
Lee answered their unspoken question, in an innocent tone of voice, “All I did was ask about River. With such high stakes in this game, I prefer to know who I am going play.”
Rock thought, 'I need to know how much of Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru have told Lee, about River, before I comment further. I do not want native in this reality to know about reality travel. All that does is bring trouble... We should know. We are that trouble.'
Rock asked, “What did they tell you, Lee?”
Lee responded, “These three ladies told me that River is both a telepath, and a genius. And from that fire dance, I can guess she is as dangerous as any in your group.”
Rock thought, 'Okay. I can work with that.' She commented, “That about sums it up.”
Revy casually admitted, “Okay. Perhaps we should have told you about River, on the way back here.”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'Good. Now, I officially know what River is capable of. Stage one, complete. Now, onto stage two.'
Lee pointed out, “River's abilities could present real problems in this poker game.”
Revy inquired, “How so? All you got to do is use your pre-cog abilities, and you will win me some money.”
Ranma jumped into the conversation, by saying, “You still haven't figured it out, Revy.”
Natsuru finished for her redheaded lover, “Since River is a telepath, Lee cannot use his precognitive abilities, without River calling him on it. He will be accused of cheating. And I don't want to think about what Chang and his friends at the casino will do to them.”
Revy replied, “Okay. At least River won't be able to use here telepathy either.”
Lee explained, “Don't be so sure. As the old saying goes. The house makes the rules. River will likely be able to use her telepathy, and genius. But, I will not be able to use my abilities to counter her. I am at a distinct disadvantage here. Besides not wanting to be accused of cheating, another reason I don't like gambling professionally is because the house always rigs to rules so they will ultimately win.”
“It is just a matter of percentages and time, as to how long it takes the house to win.”
Ranma commented, “What Lee is politely trying to tell you two is that you just made sucker's bet with Chang.”
It took a few seconds for what Ranma to mentally sink in for Rock and Revy.
When the information did, Rock remained calm, while Revy's eyes went wide at the screw up they just did.
Revy put her right palm in her face, as she looked upwards. She said, in a clearly upset state of mind, “I cannot back out on a bet with Chang. And Dutch, Benny, Janet, and the others are never going to let me live this down.” She then dropped her right hand down, as she tilted her head to look at Lee, while she stated, “You should have said something, Lee.”
Lee looked at Revy, with an innocent expression on his face. His expression then suddenly changed into a grimace, as he responded, in a forceful, though even tone of voice, “Me?... I should have said something? Even before I knew what River was capable of, I kept trying to back out of this mess... Face it, sweetie. This is your rodeo. And you roped me into this. Not the other way around.”
Ranma came to Lee's defense, by stating, “Lee is right. This is not his fault. This is your fault, Revy. Your greed has finally come back to bite you in the ass.”
Revy was silent for a few seconds. She then frowned, as she admitted defeat on the issue of blame, “Okay. I screwed up.”
Akira inquired, “So, how much did you bet?”
Rock viably winched, as she answered for her lover, “A million, U.S. cash'
Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru all winced, as Akira said, “Ouch.”
Rock thought, 'I have to attempt to salvage the situation, before Revy loses her temper. Though, given we met with Chang. And we have not yet been to our suite. At least, she doesn't have her weapons on her.'
Rock looked over at Lee, as she inquired, in a polite tone of voice, “Lee, even with what you now know, is there still a chance you can beat River?”
Lee thought, 'I am honestly not sure. But, I do realize there is a possibility. And I guess I need to explain how I still have this chance.'
Lee calmly answered, “That is depends on how honest she is. Also, dealing with a mind reader is not that much different than dealing with normal poker players. It just that people playing poker can read a person's face for their tails. If she has a lousy poker face, I could possibly beat her. Also, I am pretty good at play poker, in general. But, even without the telepathy, if River is a genius, and she starts counting cards, just holding my own against her could a problem.”
“Though, if she does not count cards. I have a chance. Due to her telepathy, I will not be able to bluff, I will have trust the skills I have learned, and not think to much about the cards. Also, I will have to rely more on the raw luck of the card draws, and beat her the long way. In theory, it is doable. Though, this way is a lot harder to do so.”
Revy rolled her eyes, as she questioned, “So, we are not completely screwed?” She then looked back at Lee.
Lee replied, “No. There is still a real chance I could win. But, it is a small chance.”
Revy continued to look at Lee, as she sternly warned, “Then, you will still play. And you had better win.”
Lee forced himself to remain calm, as he said, “I will try. But remember, you were the one that dragged me into this. Now, I have to know, for the poker game. How patient is River?”
Lee mentally wondered, 'I honestly do not know the answer to that question. I never wrote it in my story, and the Firefly series and movie was never that straightforward with River's personality. And I do need that question answered.'
Rock answered, “She is very patient.”
Lee stated, “Good. That means she will be less likely to cheat. Even though I will be forced draw out the game with her.”
Rock inquired, “How long are you looking at playing her?”
Lee answered, “At least all day. I doubt she has experience in playing poker all day long. While, I do. I have spent many times playing poker with Sam, all day long.”
Ranma questioned, “Speaking of Sam. Where is he? Sometimes I think you two are tied at the hip.”
Lee turned to Ranma, as he thought, 'I have no clue. But, I am not going to tell you that.' He answered, “He has personal business to attend too.”
Ranma shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.”
Revy thought, 'So, he can read a person's face. That is a nice trick... Hold it...' She looked at Lee, as she inquired, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Wait a minute. Have you been using your poker skills on us?”
Lee looked directly at Revy, as he thought, 'No point in denying that now. And it is one more card I can no longer play against them.' Lee smirked, as he admitted, in a casual manner, “Of course, I have, Revy. It is how I stay on your good side.”
While Revy slightly frowned, Rock, Ranma. Natsuru, and Akira burst out laughing, for a few seconds.
Lee continued to look at Revy, as he thought, 'Good. At least four of them took my comment the way I was hoping they would. If they laugh over the matter, they will not think to much of the negative sides of what I just admitted to doing to them.'
As the four laughing women calmed down, Lee continued to look at Revy. He stated, “Look Revy. Please, don't get upset. Reading someones face is just learning their general mood at the moment. Which comes down to whether it is safe to talk to someone, or not. And given I have personally seen how violent some of those in your group can be, first hand. I am justified in using my facial reading skills to keep from getting hurt, and starting trouble, with any of you.”
Revy was silent for a few seconds, as she thought about Lee's commented. She then shrugged, as she conceded, “You're right about that, Lee. And since you haven't used your skills to take advantage of us...”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'As far as you know.'
Revy went onto say, “I am going to let this slide.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That is the response that I was hoping to get from you.'
Lee said, “Thank you, Revy. Anyway, have a good lunch. I have things I have to do to prepare for the game, tomorrow.”
Lee turned around, and he began to walked out of the room
As Lee made his way near the exit to the room, he overheard Akira state, “Well guys. We do have something to cheer you up. There were some movies we recently saw, that were pretty good. The movies star the actor, Robert Downey Junior...”
Lee did not bother hearing the rest, as he quickly exited the room, turned to his right, and headed down the hallway, for the front lobby.
Lee walked, as he thought, 'It is best I not stay for the conversation, because I am sure those three with mention that it was me that showed them those movies. And it will just get me sucked into another risky conversation with them. Besides, I have really do have things to do today, and talking about movies is not one of them.'
When Lee reached the front lobby, he soon exited out the front doors, and into the parking lot.
A minute later, he was in his pink car, as he began to run a few errands, and then get some lunch.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee drove his car down one of the side roads of De La Plata Podrido, towards his first destination.
Lee had the roof and windows up on his convertible.
As Lee safely drove, he thought, 'If I am going to do this. I will have to present myself in as professional manner as possible. Right now, everyone sees me as just some slacker, nobody, with a talent for playing cards. And that is the way I want everyone to see me. But, if I walk into the casino tomorrow, presenting myself as a professional gentleman gambler, it might throw all of them both off their game. Including, River and Chang.'
'I have done it before, at the dance, at the Devil's Hotel, during the last day of the time loop, that happened on the Day of the Dead. And no one recognized me, as whom they called, mister dance. And the Rats Nest bartender has since graciously kept quiet on my identity. Especially, from Revy, Rock, and their group. Much to their continued annoyance.'
'And this is mainly because the bartender had a great time on our date that day, and the dance that evening...'
'Though, back to the matter at hand. The problem is, that the women will realize I was the one at the dance, and that will cause them to eventually ask questions about that event. But, I don't have a choice. I have to give up something, so I have the tools to not just play this coming game, but win it.'
Lee looked at his fuel gauge to see that his car tank was half full. He thought, 'Good. That means I don't have to refill it. If Chang's women see me at a gas station, they might get the wrong idea that I am planning to skip to town, and that will only cause more problems for myself. Though, Chang probably has the bridge out of town staked out, as well. That is what I would do in his position.'
Half a minute later, Lee reached his first destination, a local car washing business that the clerks a the check in desk stated was very well liked, and did a good job, at a good price.
Lee thought, 'Here we are.'
Lee found that there was no line near the group of employees near the building.
Lee soon turned in.
As he came to a stop near the men in uniform.
A few seconds later, one of the employees walked over to Lee driver's side window.
Lee rolled down his window, as he stated, in spanish, “I would like my car washed, and have a good waxing.” He then pulled out a hundred dollar bill, and handed it to the employee, while he said, “This should cover the charge, plus a tip for all over you.”
Lee thought, 'That hundred is around ten time the combined total, for a car wash, waxing, and tip. So, they should do a good job.'
The employee looked at the hundred dollar bill, as he smiled. He turned to Lee, as he happily responded, in spanish, “When we are finished, you will be able to see your reflection in the paint job.”
Lee returned the employee’s smile, as he said, “That is what I wanted to hear you say.”
Lee rolled up his window, as the men at the car wash began to wash, and then wax his car.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, the car wash employees finished washing and waxing the outside of Lee's car, by hand.
Lee said, in spanish, “Thank you.”
Lee then turned on his car, and drove away.
As Lee entered the nearby street, he thought, 'I need to get some lunch now. I don't want to go get a burger from Eda and Yolanda. They are likely going to find out about the game. And them talking to me about the game will only complicate the matters for myself.'
'So, I think I will either get cuban, or italian... I could still use a sandwich. So, I will go cuban. Then, I will go to the beach and think.'
(_)
An hour later, Lee had finished his lunch, paid the bill, left the tip, and used the restroom, in the restaurant. Lee then drove his car to a secluded part of the beach on the eastern island, facing the sea.
Lee parked his car facing the beach, by about seventy feet away from the shore. He then lowered his car roof and windows, so he could enjoy the breeze, on the presently partly cloudy, cool day.
Lee came there to think, plan, and reflect on his life. With the only sound being the crashing of the waves.
And a nobody knew where he was.
After ten minutes of thinking, Lee noticed a gray, four door car drive by him, and park parallel to Lee's own pink car, to the left driver's side of Lee's own car, about thirty feet away from him.
Like Lee's car, this gray car was a left side driver car, like most cars in Mexico.
Lee watched as the man got out of, from the opposite side of car, that Lee was facing. As the man stood up, Lee saw over the hood of the gray car, to see that it was Sam. Whom looked over at Lee, while he shut his car door.
As the two men looked at each other, Sam walked around the front of his car, and over to Lee.
Lee saw that Sam was wearing his usual style of casual clothing, and his black cowboy boots.
Lee smiled, as he he said, “Hi Sam. You are quite probably the only person on the planet right now that I would be happy to see. Please, come sit down in my car, so we can talk.” He then used the electronic door lock on the driver's side door to unlock the both his door, and the passenger door to his car.
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he responded, “I would be more than happy to.”
A few seconds later, Sam opened the passenger door, got into the passenger side of the car, and shut the door.
Sam then settled into the white leather seating, by Lee, to Lee's right side.
Lee turned to Sam, as he inquired, “How did you find me? Let alone. I thought you didn't know how to drive? Let alone have a car?”
Sam turned to Lee, as he answered, in a sober tone of voice, “I called in a favor for use of the car, for today. And I lied about not being about to not knowing how to drive. I just did not want to chaperon those crazy women. And someone had too. And I thought you could handled the job.”
Lee did not even think, as he calmly responded, “I forgive you. I don't even blame you. I fully understand. You have been too good a friend to get upset over something so trivia.” He thought, 'Especially, compared to whom I am about to face.'
Sam stated, “Thank you... So... I heard about the poker game.”
Lee groaned, “You heard about that game?”
Sam answered, “I would guess that half the island would have heard by now. I believe the man's name is, Chang. Who has been putting out the word of a big poker million dollar poker game, and he is taking bets on who will win. It is his girlfriend, versus an anonymous player. I also learned from a friend that Revy forced you into this poker game. So, I am guessing that anonymous player is you?”
Lee sadly commented, “Yes. That about sums it up. That game is just going to be trouble, in so many ways.”
Sam joked, “Sometimes, I think you are the most troublesome person in that hotel.”
Lee could not help but smile. He let out a brief chuckled, as he admitted, “You might be right. Still, I don't want to talk about it... Though, I would like to now what my current odds are, for the game?”
Sam replied, “Two to one against.”
Lee honestly said, “That is very generous of, Chang.”
Sam commented, “Given how successful his casino has become, within a few weeks, that man clearly knows how to work a crowd.”
Lee requested, “That is likely very true. So, you want to join me tomorrow? I could use the back up.”
Sam answered, in a disappointed tone of voice, “I would love, too. But, I am likely going to be busy tomorrow. Though, I will try to drop by, sometime during the day, to watch some of your poker game, at the casino.”
Lee out a deep breath, that he had not realized that he was holding in. Lee then replied, “Thanks. Also, watch yourself at that casino. They are Revy's friends. So, you can guess they are likely as dangerous as her group”
Sam agreed, “I would not be surprised. But, I promise I will be careful.”
Lee inquired, “So, how did you find me here?”
Sam answered, “I was driving around myself, thinking about a few things, and I saw your car parked here.”
Lee requested, in a tone of voice that was barely above begging, “So, can you stay with me, for right now?”
Sam stated, “Sure. I can stay for the afternoon.”
Lee quietly said, “Thank you. I just want some company, as we enjoy the quiet peacefulness of our surroundings.”
Sam softly agreed, “I sometimes feel that exact same way.”
Both men then turned to look in front of them, as they leaned back in their conformable seat. While they did so, they silently watched the waves crash against the shore, as they just quietly enjoyed the company of the other. With both of them contemplating their own thoughts.
(_)
Several hours later, it was around six o'clock PM, and the sun was beginning to set, when Sam turned to Lee. Sam broke the silence, as he stated, “Well partner, I have to go.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “Thanks for the company. I really needed it.”
Sam commented, “I know. Everybody needs to know that at least one person cares for them. And you really needed the company, and I was happy to provide it.”
Lee agreed, “You are so right, Sam. And I hope you have a pleasant night.”
Sam said, “You too, Lee.”
Sam then got out of Lee's car, closed the door behind him, walked around Lee's pink car, and to his own car.
Lee then watched as Sam got into the gray car, started the ignition, and drove away.
Lee pulled out his keys for his car, and he started the ignition.
Lee back up, to where he where he was facing the road.
As Lee put his car in drive, he thought, 'I think I will go to the Last Resort Diner early, and get some supper there, as I wait for Pedro to show up. This will give me time to check to see if I need to lose a tail. Though, I have no seen one since I left the city itself, for this beach. Also, when I get to the diner, I will roll up my windows, and pull up the roof of my car.'
Lee then drove back onto the road, away from the beach, and towards the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
It was seven PM sharp, as Lee watched Pedro enter the Last Resort Diner, from the corner, back booth the two men sat at, when they met at the diner.
And given the situation Lee was in, Lee ignored that it was Pedro turn that night to have his back to the wall. And instead, Lee sat with his back to the wall, as he faced the front of the diner.
Lee had already finished his supper, and paid for it, while tipping the redheaded waitress, Mary, for her service. And now, he was just sipping his cup of coffee. While he also had a glass of ice water by him.
As Pedro sat across from Lee, Mary walked by.
Pedro turned to her, as he ordered, in english, “Mary, I will have my usual cup of coffee.”
Mary replied, “Coming right up, Pedro.” She then turned, and went to get Pedro a cup of coffee.
Pedro then turned to Lee. Pedro calmly said, “I had an interesting day, today. The most interesting part being that word reached me that tomorrow morning, Chang is having his girlfriend, River, play some nobody, with the stakes being a million U.S. dollars…” Pedro continued, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “You won't happen to know the identity of the person that River is playing?”
Lee looked away from Pedro.
Pedro flatly accused, “As I thought. You are the one that Chang is shooting his mouth off, whom is playing his telepathic girlfriend?”
Just then, Mary came by with Pedro's cup of coffee. She set the cup of coffee in front of Pedro, then she left, to see to her other customers.
Lee looked back at Pedro, as he calmly admitted, “Yes. I am.”
Pedro picked up his cup of coffee. He took a sip, and then set the cup back down on the table, between them.
Pedro inquired, with more curiosity, than annoyance, in his tone of voice, “How did you get into this mess? I would think being in that casino, playing a poker game, against her, of all people, would be that last thing you would want to do?”
Lee agreed, “You are completely right. Still, this little piece of insanity was started by Revy. Whom thought she could make a quick buck with my precognitive abilities.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “You're a pre-cog?”
Lee thought, 'Ah crap. I never told Pedro I was a pre-cog. Well, too late now.' He replied, “Yes.”
Pedro inquired, with a hint of sternness in his tone of voice, “And why did you not tell me, until now?”
Lee gave the weak excuse, as he said, “Because, the subject never came up.”
Pedro stated, “Or, you just wanted to hold that card, in case I ever turned on you. You would at least have some early warning of me doing so.”
Lee flatly admitted, “Yes. Alright. I was intentionally holding that back from you. This is because it is one of the few abilities that gives me a slight edge in a given situation. The problem is Revy already learned of my abilities, when she first came here, during the Rats Nest massacre.”
Lee went onto say, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “You remember that little slice of fun? Don't you?”
Lee saw recognition show on Pedro's face.
Lee continued, in a direct tone of voice, “Well, me showing my abilities, and impressing her and her daughters, was the only reason Sam and I got out of that bar alive, that night. Also, Revy told her family and friends. So, they all know I am precognitive.”
“Unfortunately, Revy did not realize that Chang would have River play, and River's telepathy would tell her when I used my precognition. And she was not happy when I arranged for some of her slightly saner friends to explain the situation to her.”
“So, as you can see. I am screwed. Revy is screwed. And the whole fucking situation is screwed.”
Pedro thought, 'Okay. You usually remain calm in a given situation. But, you are clearly stressed out about what you have been forced into doing, tomorrow. And you have every reason to be stress. So, I might as well not add to that.'
Pedro said, “Okay. You made your point. And I am not going to hold that secret against you. You have a full plate, as is. On top of this poker game.”
“Still, on the matter of the upcoming game. Revy's greed has been known to make her shortsighted before. So, what are you going to do? I doubt running is going to help. And River is going to find out you are the writer. If you win, River will likely tell Chang about you, as a way to placate him, for her loss. And if you lose, Revy is going to kill you. I agree, you are screwed.”
Lee shrugged, as he countered, “Well, not necessarily...”
Pedro thought, 'Good. He has a plan. Like always. That means he has a chance for him to come up with a way to get himself out of this mess, without me stepping in. And risking my neck.'
Lee continued, “River likes to keep secrets The simple reason is if she didn't, people would not trust her with their secrets. She would alienate herself from those that know her. So, she won't immediately tell anyone that I am the writer, as long as I keep her happy.”
Pedro thought, 'That is not really a plan. But, it is a good approach, to start a plan from.' He asked, “So, how are you going to keep River happy, while winning a million dollars in chips from her?”
Lee flatly answered, “I have a plan.”
Pedro thought, 'And I wonder how crazy your plan is. Considering, you basically gambling with insanity, in several ways.' He inquired, “How insane is this plan going to be? From a, one, being your standard Indy ploy. To a, ten, being crazy awesome. Emphasis on the, crazy, part. How would you rank your plan for tomorrow?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Hmm... I would say a six. Maybe a seven. Depending on how you look at it.”
Pedro thought, 'That is the high level crazy for a plan. But, he is likely going to need to be that insane to pull it off. And I can guess that I will fit into his plan... Oh well. That talent contest was fun, and no one got hurt. So, I will trust him one more time, concerning his plans.'
Pedro guessed, “And this plan involves me, in some way?”
Lee responded, “Yes. But, I am not sure how. I will call you in the morning, for the details. That game is at ten, so I will try to call between eight thirty to nine thirty.”
Pedro said, “Okay. I will look for your phone call in the morning. But, if you leave me holding the bag, I will be very upset with you.”
Lee calmly stated, “Pedro, I promise, should I find a way to escape, I will notify you before I leave. Thus, giving you time to implement your escape plan, as well. Which I am sure you already have on hand. Ready to use.”
Pedro said, “Thank you. And I do have such a plan.”
Lee replied, “Good. And you are welcome.”
The two men then continued talking about a few things, for about half an hour. After which, they decided it was time to leave.
They paid for their cups of coffee, and left tips for Mary, right before they left the diner, for their cars.
(_)
When Lee got back to the Devil Hotel, he immediately went when from the lobby, to the front elevator back. And when he reached the third floor of the hotel, he went to his hotel suite.
Fortunately, at that time of night, Revy's group was in the hotel restaurant, enjoying drinks, and karaoke.
Lee soon unlocked the door to his room. He removed the key, pocketed it, and shut the door behind him. He then locked the deadbolt lock of the door, above the knob lock.
Next, Lee turned around. And in the dark, he walked over and turned on the lamp light by his bed.
He walked over to his chest of drawers and he pulled out his black dress shoes, a white rag, brush, and some black shoe polish.
Lee spent the next twenty minutes polishing his black dress shoes.
When he was finished with his shoes. He discarded his rag and he put away his polish, brush, and dress shoes.
Lee then set his alarm clock for six AM.
With Lee finished with what he had planned to do that evening, he got ready for bed, early, for that night. And when he was ready for bed, he laid on his bed, and he reached over to turn off the lamp light.
And in the darkness, Lee went fast to sleep.
(_)
The first thing that Lee became aware of, as he woke up, on his bed, in the darkness, before sunrise, was the song, Blaze of Glory, by Jon Bon Jovi, playing on his alarm clock, at a conformable volume.
Lee opened eyes, and reached over to turn off the clock, which stated it was six AM.
A few seconds later, as Lee fully woke up, and his memories fully returned to him, he thought, with mild amusement, 'What a meaningful song to wake up too. Given the situation I am. And not just today. But, every day of my life, now, it seems.'
Lee then leaned up, and turned on the lamp light, on the nightstand, by the alarm clock.
After doing so, he stretch his arms, as he mentally reflected, 'Well, today is going to be interesting... To make it through today, I am going to have to beat a badass, genius telepath in a poker game, and then escape the casino before her boyfriend, the casino owner, and likely owner, decides that I don't deserve to win. With him taking me out back, away from the attention and cameras, to do horrible things to me.'
'At the same time, I will not be able to hide my identity for long from a telepath. Especially, a super-genius like River. So instead, I have to both be careful not to reveal that I am the writer to anyone else, while keeping the telepath happy, as I win the poker game. So, she does not tell anyone that I am the writer...'
'And given the showman that Chang likes to be. And he was already like that, before I wrote about him. As all this goes on, the cameras will rolling, and the microphone will open, for the rest of the casino to watch and listen to us. So, I have to keep from slipping up, to directly reveal I am the writer. Or, I am screwed, anyway.'
'And the worst part is I cannot think of anyone I know in fiction that was able to handle a situation like this, and successfully get out of it, alive, and in one piece.'
'I am walking a tight rope without a net... Well, if worse comes to worse, at least I know I tried. Now, I had better get ready to face the day.'
Lee the got up from his bed, as he headed for his bathroom, to get a cleaned up, shower, dried, dressed, and a few other things, so he could face the morning.
Lee then got dressed in his usual clothing, as he thought, 'I will come back before nine to get dressed for the poker game. I have other things I need to do first. Given I don't want to rest seeing one of the girls this morning. And that the diner is open, right now. I will get something to eat there, instead of the hotel restaurant.'
Lee turned off the lights in his suite. He unlocked the deadbolt. He opened his door to the hallway. He walk into the hallway. And he gently shut the door to his suite, behind him.
After which, Lee walked down the hallway, to the elevator bay.
A couple of minutes later, Lee walked out of an elevator, onto the ground floor.
As Lee passed through the lobby, he saw a two young men behind the check in desk. There was no one else in the lobby.
Lee then noticed the song that was playing was, Dangerous, by Roxette.
While continuing to walk through the lobby, Lee wondered, in thought, 'Maybe the reality itself is trying to tell me that this situation is not that bad. That song is about a woman that is slightly dangerous, but not too dangerous. That kind of describes River, to a 't'.'
Lee then made his way to outside of the hotel. As he looked around, he saw that it was around less than an hour before dawn fully came. Twilight already showed from the eastern side of the hotel.
Though, Lee used the lamp lights in the parking lot to see, as he soon found his car. He got into his car, started it up, and drove away from the Devil's Hotel, towards the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Seven minutes later, Lee walked into the Last Resort Diner.
Lee looked around, and he saw that breakfast rush has not hit yet. Also, all of the other customers were already served their meals, and drinks.
Lee decided to sit at a booth by the door, with his front facing the entrance, and the window to the front facing his left side.
At the cash register, on the left side of the counter, when facing the back wall of the room, with the counter being in the center of the diner, Lori had just finished ringing up a customer.
Lee was wearing her waitress uniform, as she heard the door open. She looked up, at the front door, and she saw Lee enter the diner.
As Lori watched Lee sit down in a booth, near the entrance, that was not his usual place to sit, at a time he rarely came in at, she thought, 'What is Lee doing here so earlier? That that is not usually where he sits.'
Lori could tell that Lee's body language was off.
She thought, with worry, 'From the way he looks, I can tell that something is wrong.'
Lori walked over to Lee.
As Lori reached his table, Lee looked up at Lori, as he said, “Good morning, Lori.”
Lori replied, “Morning, Lee. You are up early. And not in your usual place.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Just one of those days.”
Lori thought, 'There is more to this, than that.'
Lori sat down across in the seat, across the table, from the seat Lee was in.
Lori looked Lee in the eyes, as she directly asked him, “What's wrong?”
Lee deflated, as he admitted, “I have one hell of a day ahead of me. And I felt some food close to my native country might help me think.”
Lori inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “How bad is it?”
Lee answered, “You know that poker game that starts at ten AM, today?”
Lori replied, “Yes.”
Lee stated, “I am the one playing the woman, over a bet of a million dollars in poker chips.”
Lori was silent for a few seconds. She then said, “How come I have the feeling that you are not the one betting the million dollars?”
Lee stated, “If I had a million dollars, I would likely not be in this town. No. The money belongs to some crazy redhead whom goes by the name of, Revy. She roped me into this mess.”
Lori commented, “Redheads can be dangerous if you are not nice to them.”
Lee agreed, “Oh. I have been nothing but nice to this woman. It is just that she really is crazy.”
Lori giggled for a few seconds. She then said, “That maybe true.” She then got up from the booth, as she continued, “Well Lee, good luck with your game. We, here at the diner, will be praying for you.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lori inquired, “So, what can I get you for breakfast?”
Lee ordered, “I will have two scrambled eggs, toast and grits, with glass of orange juice to drink.”
Lori pulled out her pen and notepad. She wrote the order down. She commented, “Coming right up.”
Lori then turned, and walked over to give Lee's order to George, the cook.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee had his drink and meal brought to him.
Lee then spent over an hour an a half, slowly eating his meal, while he worked out the final parts of his plan, for what he had to do that day.
By the time he was finished with his breakfast, the local barber he went to was open. After paying for his meal, leaving a nice tip for Lori, and thanking Lori for showing her concern towards him, he left the diner. He then got into his car, and drove to the local barber he used.
While Lee drove to the salon, where the barber was located, he noticed that he had a tail, in the rearview mirrors. He thought, 'I guess Chang thinks I might skip town. Well, I am not going to. If I am going down. I am going down like, the James Cagney character, in the film, White Heat. Top of the World!'
When Lee got there barber, he had the barber give him a professional shave on his face. Lee did not need his hair died, because he had his hair cut, and dyed black, at the same time, several days ago. During a day Lee was sure the Revy, Rock, and their crew, were busy that day. When the women went to the grand opening of the Daiyu Palace casino. And his hair roots were not yet showing.
The barber was so good, that while it was a very close shave, Lee did not have one nick on his face. He then pained for the shave. And he tipped the barber well, for doing a good job.
After Lee was finished with the barber, he saw on his watch, that it was eight thirty-two AM.
Lee then headed back to the Devil's Hotel, in his clean, nicely wax, pink Cadillac. While Lee drove north, on the main north-south highway of the island, he passed by a red GTO, and four other cars, by the median, on his left side. With the vehicles heading south. Lee saw that the GTO was driven by Rock, with Revy in the front passenger seat. The other cars had women from Revy and Rock's group, as well.
Lee thought, 'I guess, after they had some breakfast, they are heading over to the casino early. That works for me. It means I will not bump into them, as I go to get ready. Nor, when I head back out.'
Lee soon made it to the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel. After parking his car, he walked briskly into the hotel, passed through the hotel lobby, and to the front elevator bay.
A few minutes later, on the third floor, as Lee entered his suite, he switched on the ceiling light.
He looked over at the clock to see that it was Eight forty-three AM.
Lee thought, 'Good. I still have plenty of time.'
Lee then stripped down to his underwear, ring necklace, the digital wrist watch, on his right wrist. He then when to his chest of draws, he pulled out a white t-shirt, and put it on, which his ring necklace, under his shirt. Next, Lee walked into the bathroom, and he used some styling gel, and a comb to do a thorough job on pairing his hair. After he made sure a hair was not out of place on his head, he returned to his bedroom.
Lee then walked over to his chest of drawers and he pulled out a few items. Next, he went to his metal coat rod to the right of the chest of drawers, beside the hallway door.
From the metal rod, Lee pulled out his gray suit, which was hanging on a hanger, by his black suit.
Lee then gently laid the suit on his bed.
First, Lee put on his gray socks. Next, he put on his white, long sleeved button up shirt, and his gray pants. He then looped his black leather belt, around the waist loops of his gray pants, and he buckled his black leather belt.
Afterward, Lee put on his polished, black dress shoes.
Next, he when to the bedroom mirror, and he tied a teal tie around his neck, before folding down the collar of his shirt, over the tie.
After which, he put on his gray coat, his cool shades, and his gray hat over his head.
And Lee pulled out his money and other items, from the clothing he had taken off, and he put the money and other items into his gray pants and interior coat pockets. Among other things, these items included the keys to his car, the keys to his hotel suite, nailed clippers, a folded handkerchief, and one of his deck of cards, in its box.
Lee thought, 'I did notice the style of cards the use at the casino. And this is a different background pattern. So, there is no problem with me having these cards on me. Besides, these are my weapons of choice, if I get into trouble. It is just that no one else knows that... Except, well likely River, after this game. But, there is nothing I can do about that. So, I might as well see what I look like, in the bathroom mirror, where the lighting is best in my room.'
Lee walked into the bathroom to check himself over in the mirror. Because the bathroom offered better lighting than his bedroom, and the mirror in his bedroom.
As Lee looked at himself in the mirror, he thought, 'I look good. Now that I look the part. It is time to head for battle. But, first I need to call, Pedro.'
Lee walked back into the bedroom. He saw that it was nine twenty-one AM. He headed for the phone, and dialed the number for the local police station.
As soon as the other end picked up, Lee stated, in english, “This is Lee. I need to speak to Chief Del Soto. He should be expecting my call.”
A second later, the phone click, as it was switched to Pedro's extension. After a single ring, Pedro picked the phone, as he said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Lee stated, “Pedro. It is me, Lee.”
Pedro said, in english, “Hey Lee. Well, today is the big day. I take it you finalized your plans?”
Lee answered, “Yes. I figured out my plans for you. I think you are going to love this.”
Lee then stated his plans.
When Lee finished, Pedro responded, “You are right. You plan is brash, ballsy, and stylish. I do love it. I will be there, with company. At the time you are requesting.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. Timing is key for my plan to work. Timing for several things. And not just what I have planned for you, and your subordinates, Pedro.'
Lee said, “Glad to hear it. Also, if asked, I heard that River is a genius telepath from Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. And that is the truth. So, use that as your cover.”
Pedro replied, “I will. And good luck.”
Lee said, “Thanks. You too.”
Lee hung up the phone, as he thought, 'That when as well as I could have hoped. Now, I had better get to the casino, as soon as possible. I do not want to be late.'
Lee turned off all the lights in his suite, and he exited his suite, with the door automatically locking, behind him. He then headed for the elevator bay.
A few minutes later, Lee was on the road, in his pink Cadallic, as he headed for Daiyu Palace Casino.
Lee had the roof of his car up, along with his windows up, as he drove towards his destination.
(_)
Several minutes later, as Lee drove up, by the front doors of Daiyu Palace Casino, under the car port part of the large casino awning. Lee came to a stop, by the curb, with his right passenger side facing the front door to the casino.
Lee put his car in park. He then checked his digital wrist watch.
His watch stated it was exactly nine forty-five AM, sharp.
Lee thought, 'I am taking not chances at being late. I best head for the elevator bays. I am sure the guards there will inform me of where I need to go. Still, I need to make this look good.'
Lee turned off the ignition to his car. He then got out of his car. He closed the driver's side door, but he did not lock the door. After which, he walked around the front of his car, and onto the sidewalk, where he was met by a female valet, in a casino uniform.
Lee silently handed her his keys to his car, to the valet, which was not attached to his key to his hotel. In return, the valet gave him a ticket stub for his car. Lee silently pocketed the stub, as he headed for front doors.
When Lee approached the front doors, another valet opened one of the doors for him, near the middle section of the doors.
As Lee walked inside the casino, he thought, 'I did not get this treatment, yesterday. I guess with this suit and car, they think I am a high roller... Well, actually I am. So, I guess I am going to get some special treatment. Though, it would be best not to let this go to my head. Still, I need to make this look good.'
Lee then walked though the casino, towards the gaming area, and the elevators, like he owned the place.
When Lee entered the casino gaming floor, he noted that the song playing from the speakers changed. With the new song begin to play being, Separate Ways, by the band, Journey.
Lee thought, 'What an interesting song for this situation.”
Lee soon made it to the front elevator bay. The two guards on duty took one looked at him. And they used their express elevator key to let Lee use the express elevator to the penthouse.
(_)
Meanwhile, one minute before Lee walked into the front casino elevator bay, inside the Daiyu Palace Casino restaurant and bar, to Lee's right, of the gaming area, a group of women sat in two table booths.
The booths, with tables, were set against the clear windows overlooking gaming floor. Two women sat beside each other, in each of the four cushioned couches, of the two booths. At one booth, on the left side, when facing the front of the restaurant, sat Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, and Dutch. With Janet, Benny, Yolanda, and Eda, sitting in the booth beside the other four women, with their booth being closer to the entrance, located in the center of the restaurant.
Lotton was by Dutch. Shenhua was by Sawyer. Eda was by Yolanda. And Janet was by Benny.
They were all wearing casual clothing. Even Lotton was not in her maid outfit, and she wore casual women's pants, shirt, and shoes, among other clothing items.
And with their enhanced hearing, the women in both booths could hold a conversation with each other, without speaking loudly.
The floor of the restaurant itself was set about three feet above the gaming floor, with steps, and gold plated side railings, leading up to the entrance to the restaurant. With the entrance being two open, windowed, double-doors.
On the other side of the restaurant, was the bar counter. Above the bar counter were thin, widescreen TVs mounted from the ceiling, and pointed towards the bar counter, and booth tables.
Usually, the TVs showed sports and horse racing. Though, today, the TVs and speakers in the restaurant, except for the speakers playing the music on the game floor, were tied to the game room several floors above, for River and Lee's million dollar poker game.
Currently, the video just showed an empty room, with a poker table set, with poker chips already divided and place beside the cushioned, armless chairs. With the third chair set opposite to the large window in the room, by the take.
Given how early in the day it was, the group was having either coffee, or juice to drink.
Eda inquired, “So, where is Rock and Revy?”
Benny answered, “Right now, I think they wanted to talk to Chang upstairs. And they will be back down in a little while. Still, they wanted to watch elsewhere... Basically, given how greedy Revy can be, we finally let her play the quarter slot machines, if she wanted too. Rock is making sure she doesn't do anything it more stupid. Than, blowing the million she already did.”
Janet commented, “Yes. Not that I will say it to Revy's face, but that million dollar sucker's bet is very stupid on her part.”
Dutch said, “Honestly. Given this was Chang, whom she was dealing with, we should have seen this coming.”
Benny stated, “Well, Rock did say that Lee has a chance. Which is better than nothing.”
Janet said, “Well, Lee better win, for his own sake.”
Dutch joked, “Nothing will light a fire under a man's ass quicker than a pissed of woman after him.”
The other women laughed at Dutch's joke, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lotton inquired, “So, where is everyone else at?”
Benny answered, “The kids, both ours, and Akira's, are on their own today. They want just do not have the patience to enjoy a good poker game. As for Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, Violin, and Annie, they are somewhere around here, talking with Annie. Also, Akira mentioned they are planning something, if Lee loses. Considering they don't want Revy to kill Lee. Nor, let her seriously harm him. Since it is not his fault that he is in this mess.'
Dutch said, “Considering Lee did not have a choice in the matter, even I will say that Revy has no right to him. Let alone kill him. Even if he loses. And ultimately, it is our gold she bet in this mess.”
Janet replied, “True.”
Shenhua commented, “Yes. I agree. Lee has always been respectful towards us. I just wish more men were like that.”
Benny said, “Yea. Lee is getting raw deal from this. If he wins, he gets nothing, but being spared Revy wrath, at the risk of invoking Chang's wrath.”
Lotton stated, “Nah. Chang loves good sportsmanship. As long as Lee is on the level, and does not cheat. Lee will be fine. Even if he wins. Actually, if, by some miracle, Lee wins, Chang might make more money, from those betting out here. Those bets will more than recoup the cost of losing his million.”
Dutch commented, “That is a good point.”
Benny mentioned, “On the matter of Lee, Revy claimed that Lee said he was southern gentleman. And though he does not dress like it. He does ask like it.”
Eda stated, “Actually, Lee can be a gentleman when he wants too. And he can look the part.”
Janet rolled her eyes for a few seconds, as she commented, “You would know.” She then looked back at the table she was sitting at.
Sawyer changed the topic, as she inquired, “So, Annie is here? Considering, Annie hates Chang, that is interesting to hear.”
Lotton explained, “Actually, I talked to Chang about her. Chang stated that he is paying Annie quiet a bit of gold, and other types of treasure, to work for him.”
Shenhua commented, “I guess everyone needs to eat. Though, I am surprised that Annie is not on the warpath for the writer.”
Lotton stated, “Actually, from what I understand, Annie does not hate the writer, just Chang.”
Shenhua said, “That does not make sense.”
Dutch stated, “Actually, it does. Someone people just rub a person that wrong way.”
Janet commented, “Well, either way. Do not her tell I said this, but this would not be the first time that Annie worked for someone she hated.”
The other women got a good laugh at Janet;s comment.
As the women calmed down, Benny said, “Annie is never going to escape those jokes. Is she? And it is not really the writer's. Even I will admit the jokes write themselves.”
Dutch agreed, “Yep. Some things are fated.”
Shenhua inquired, “So, who else is here?”
Lotton answered, “Arcee is also here. Somewhere.”
Shenhua replied, “It would be nice to talk to her.”
Lotton agreed, “Yes. And Arcee and Chang are still on great terms. I think Arcee took your old job, Shenhua.”
Shenhua shrugged, as she said, “She can have it.”
Lotton said, “Also, the Serenity crew is here, working here as security. And the Bebop Crew is here... Well, except for Ed and Ein. For obvious reasons.”
Janet asked, “So, is Julia around here?”
Lotton answered, “Yes. Somewhere around here. I think that the Bebop crew is taking turns looking after her.”
Yolanda inquired, “So, what are the Spike, Jet, and Faye's jobs here?”
Lotton stated, “I am not sure. But, from what I understand, Spike and Jet are taking turns being the pit bosses for the gaming floor. With a few others Chang trusts, subbing on the shifts that those two are not doing.”
Yolanda complimented, “That is a good idea. Both of them are fairly honest, and have a sharp eye.”
Benny commented, “And the pay is probably good too.”
Eda pointed out, “With everyone here, I am surprised that the Lowe family has not turned up.”
Sawyer said, “I did not know you knew them... Well, outside of the writer's stories.”
Eda stated, “Anyone that can get Revy's goat like that on a regular basis is a friend in my book. And surprisingly, Bob and Ed are great conversationalists.”
Janet agreed, “That is true.”
Eda mentioned, “Plus, I will give the writer credit. He was able to point out, with Ed, that a woman could be a crazy redheaded chick, without being bitch. That must have really pissed Revy off.”
Dutch flatly said, “You have no idea.”
It was at that moment that Lotton took a look out the window, by her, and towards the gaming floor. She noticed someone in the distance, walking across from the them, through the center of the gaming floor, towards the front elevator bay. And she recognized that gray suit, and hat.
Lotton said, “Mister Dance is here, strutting across the game floor.”
Dutch asked, “Who is Mister Dance?”
Sawyer answered, “It was night before you arrived. During night of the Latin American holiday, Day of the Dead. The Devil's Hotel had a dance party that evening in the hotel restaurant. During the party this guy in a gray suit, came in with the bartender from the Rats Nest, and they immediately monopolized the dance floor for around a half an hour, as they did the nearly nonstop tango. Without missing a beat, nor a step.”
Benny said, “That must have been some tango.”
Sawyer said, “It was like something out of the movie. Only longer and better. And both of them were good at dancing.”
Shenhua stated, “Anyway, at the end of their dance, they left. We never did figure out who mister dance was. And the bartender refused to tell us. And it wasn't worth threatening her, given we like to go to her, bar sometimes. When we feel like getting more wild, than Melvin will allow at the hotel bar.”
Janet turned her head, and looked across the gaming floor, as she used her enhanced sight to look at the man in the gray suit. Janet then used her critical eye for detail, that had long since been developed, from years of experience in counterfeiting, took a good look at the man. She immediately realized who it was, as she flatly stated, “That man is, Lee.”
Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer, said, in unison, “What?”
Eda looked more closely at the man, across the room. She stated, “Yea. That is Lee. He wore the same outfit for our date.”
Yolanda looked out the window as well, to see Lee. She calmly complimented, “Yes. That man does know how to dress for the occasion.”
Benny looked more closely at Lee as well, as she commented, “Now, that is how a southern gentleman dresses.” She turned to Eda, as she asked, “Why didn't you say anything about Lee's dancing at that party, Eda?”
Eda turned to Benny, as she said, “I wasn't at the party. I didn't see him. And Revy never did give a description of the male dancer, when I talked to her about it. All she said was that the man was good dancer.”
By then, the rest of the women in their group were looking at Lee, across the room.
Sawyer commented, “So, Lee knows how do dance. And dance well. I may have to dance with him sometime.”
Dutch turned to look at those around her table, as she stated, “I get the feeling that Lee knows a lot more than that... Or else, this is going to be a very short game.”
Lee then left their sight, as he made it to the other side of the gaming floor, where the elevator bay was located. And the women started to turn and look back at each other.
Lotton inquired, “Anyone placed any bets?”
Eda said, “I am placing a hundred on Lee.”
Yolanda stated, “I have placed the same bet for Lee. Eda is right. He is a gentleman. And it would be nice to give him our support.”
Sawyer said, “I agree. I place two hundred for Lee. From what I have seen, and heard, the man can clearly keep cool in the most insane of situations. And, from what I understand, yesterday, Akira and the others told Lee that River is a genius telepath, and from the fire dance, he knows she is a badass, and he still showed up for the game. That takes courage.”
Shenhua mentioned, “I put down fifty for Lee for those same reasons. Lee knows we are dangerous, and yet he has been able to remain calm around us. He has the same type of reserved courage that Garcia has. If he can keep it together, this should be an entertaining game.”
Janet stated, “Or, he is just foolhardy. I put a hundred for River. No one can beat a telepathic genius.”
Benny pointed out, “While I also bet a hundred for River. I will admit there is always the chances she may play fair.”
Dutch commented, “I have always believed that it is wise to bet with the house. So, I placed a hundred on River.” She turned to Lotton, as she inquired, “How about yourself, Lotton?”
Lotton turned to Dutch, as she said, “Nah. I am not betting. I have come to realize that River is still too unpredictable. And Lee is like that quiet one that goes crazy when you least expect it. This could end up a draw. Still, I did talk to Chang, and he said he will give us a fifty percent discount on food and drink here, during the game.”
Dutch complimented, “That is what I like about you Lotton. You always plan ahead.”
Lotton smiled, as she replied, “Thanks.”
(_)
A minute later, on the top floor of the casino, Lee exited the gold plated express elevator at the top floor, he thought, 'At least the guards didn't pat me down this time. Also, they gave me directions to the room where the poker game is being held at. It should not be that hard find that room.'
After Lee exit the elevator, he took a left, as he was instructed to do. He soon turned the corner and he saw Revy and Rock walking towards him. Both women were wearing their usual clothing, those Revy did not have her weapons on her.
Lee thought, 'This would be a very bad time for them to talk to me about the dance...' He then continued his thoughts, in mild amusements, 'Let's see if they recognize, as I pulled off the stern gentleman, to the hilt. And I loved this, when I did it during the time loops. Though, it is best that I not think about that part of my life, while I am playing a telepath, in a few minutes.'
Lee changed his facial expression, and body language a little. As he made his way down the hallway, he stood his back a little ridged, but not too much, for it to him to move his back occasionally, like more body language allows for. Lee also walked more confidently, and he expression looked like it was chiseled in stone.
As Lee walked up to Revy and Rock, the two women stood in his way, as all three of them came to a stop, with Lee three feet from them.
Revy asked, “Who are you?”
Lee ignored her question, as he looked down at Revy and Rock, without showing any signs that he recognized them. He spoke in in a stern, direct manner, without a hint of his southern accent, “Please, move out of the way. I have business to attend to.”
Rock then realized where she has seen this man before. She asked, “Are you the one that danced at the Devil's Hotel party?”
Lee sternly said, “I am a man that has much to do, and little time to do it. Now, please move out of the way.”
Revy thought, 'Whomever this guy is, he means business. And I do not want to cause problems for Chang. Especially, right before the fun is about to start.' She said, “Rock. Let him pass.”
Rock replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'Still, this man look familiar. Though, I cannot place him.'
Revy and Rock, moved out of the way, allowing Lee to pass between them.
As Lee continued walking away from them, he overheard them.
Revy asked, “Still, I wonder what is his problem is?”
Rock calmly said, “Not a clue. But, let's get back down to the gaming floor, before the game starts... Though, given we haven't seen Lee. This game might not happen.”
Revy snorted, as she stated, “Oh. It will happen. Or, I will skin Lee alive.”
While Lee continued down the hallway, Rock and Revy started walking in the opposite direction from Lee, as the two women headed for the elevator.
A few seconds later, Rock and Revy turned a corner, away from Lee's presence.
As Lee walked away further away from the two women, he thought, 'You got to catch me, first. Now, to find the poker room, before it is too late. Still, I should have over ten minutes early. That is enough time to find my way around. Even if I had to knock every door in this hallway. Though, I believe I know which door to go too. So, I am good.'
Lee then relaxed his body, and face, as he made his way down the hallway.
A few seconds later, Lee came up to a door that he noted the door that was slightly open. He thought, 'That should be the door. But, I best to play it safe.'
Lee approached the door. As Lee came to a stop, in front of the door, he used his right hand to he gently knock twice on it. He then lowered his right hand back to his side.
From inside the room, Lee heard a male voice said, “Yes.”
Lee stated, in his normal tone of voice, “It is Lee. I am here for the poker game.”
A few seconds later, the door fully open, from the inside. And Lee saw that it was Chang whom opened the door for him. With the door staying open, without Chang holding it.
Lee noticed that Chang was male, and he wearing his usual black suit, with black long coat, complete with his sunglasses wore over his eyes.
Chang was smiling, as he looked at Lee. Chang said, “Good to see you, Lee. Come in.” He then looked at Lee, up a down, as he complimented, “And I must say. I admire that you dressed for the part.”
Lee looked at Chang's face, as he replied, “Thank you. You look good, as well.” He thought, 'Now, let's see what type of character, you truly are.'
Lee then offered his right hand in a handshake.
Chang shook his hand, with both mean having a firm, but not tight, grip in their hold.
Lee thought, 'Well, at least Chang has a firm handshake. That is something.'
Chang thought, 'A good way to tell whether someone is showing foolish bravado, or courage, is by their handshake. And with a handshake like this, Lee is clearly not intimidated by me. That is interesting. I will have to watch him even more closely that I planned to.'
A second later, both men broken their handshake, and Lee walked inside the poker room.
As Lee took a looked around the room, he found that unlike the gaming floor, this room was eerily silent.
Lee saw that the poker room was around fifty feet wide, thirty feet deep, and eight feet high. The room had carpet and panel walls of the room were the same color of red. With the ceiling painted white. The wall facing the outside, across from the hallway door, was just several large paned, tinted windows.
The door was to the far left of the room, when coming in from the hallway.
Given they were around thirty stories up, and the direction of the windows, which faced that side of the building, allowed for those in the room to look out into the cityscape of the island.
Also, there were red curtains, on the sides of the window, that were pulled back to the corners of the outer sides of the wall.
The only lights in the room were a yellow lighting from the ceiling. Though, those lights were turned off. And there was plenty of light coming from the tinted windows.
Just as on the gaming floor, Lee did not see any clocks.
Lee thought, 'I am glad have my wrist watch. Though, I will only look at it sparingly. Doing so is unprofessional.'
Lee noted that there were professional video cameras and microphones set around the walls corners, and centers, of the walls, close the ceiling. All of the cameras and microphone were barely noticeable.
Lee thought, 'There must be a video tech crew manning the audio and video, in a control room, somewhere else in the building.'
Lee then looked at the table set near the window. On the other side of the room, from the door.
The table was a round table, with a diameter of six feet. The table had four legs. And given the legs were black stained wood, Lee guessed the table top was stained black wood, as well. Lee was not sure, given the table was draped with a red cloth that match the carpet and walls.
Lee then turned to looked at were three chairs at the table. They were black stained, wooden chairs. The chairs were cushioned, and had armrests. There were cushions on the seats, and arm rests. With the cushioning being covered by red leather.
Two of the chairs face each other, and were parallel with the windows. The third chair faced the windows.
There two to sets of poker chips on the table. The two sets of chips were in front of the two chairs which faced each other. There was a single deck of cards, on the table, in front of the third chair, which faced the window.
And sitting in the chair, on the far side of table, to Lee's right side, was River. She was wearing a red evening gown that matched her dyed red long hair. River had her hair loose, and draped down her back. Lee saw that she was looking out the window, at the cityscape of the island below.
Lee looked out, passed the windows, as well, at the cityscape, in the partly cloudy morning daylight, which was blunted from the tint on the windows. He thought, 'I am glad I got over my fear of heights.'
From the corner of his eye, Lee noticed River crack a smile.
Lee mentally added, 'This is going to be a long day.' He then saw River's smile widen ever slightly.
Lee turned to look at River.
Lee saw River turned to him. Lee then saw the woman let out a laugh.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'A red room. A red table. Red chairs. Playing against a redhead. Nice motif Chang is going for here.'
Lee mentally reflected, 'I must be mindful, of my mind.'
River giggled, as she continued to smile.
Chang walked a few feet to his right, further into the room. He then came to a stop, as he looked over at Lee. He said, “I am glad you did not get cold feet, Lee.” He mentally added, 'And that you came early. I do admire punctuality.'
Lee thought, 'More like I didn't want to deal with hot lead.' Lee saw River's smile become even wider. He turned back to face Chang, as he inquired, “How will this game be conducted? We will be able to have something to drink while doing this game? And will there breaks be?”
Lee thought, 'This is not a movie. Nor, tv series. People do need to occasionally use the restroom. It is just a biological necessity of life.'
Lee heard River giggle, a little.
Chang stated, “Every hour and a half, we will have a ten minute break, for restroom visits, and to stretch one's legs. In a few hours, we will have a break for a half hour, for lunch. And you will be able to order drinks in a minute.”
Lee stated, “That is fine with me. I will have a lemonade.”
River turned to Chang, as she said, in english, “So will I.”
Chang stated, “I will see to it, immediately.” He then pulled out a cellphone, and dial a number.
Meanwhile, Lee turned and walked over to his seat. He then pulled out his chair, sat down. And moved his seat to be comfortably closer to the table, as got comfortable in his seat.
Lee was seated with his left side facing the window, and Chang to his right side, across the room from River, and himself. With the door being to Lee's back right side.
Lee looked down, and stared at the chips in front of him. There were ten stacks of green poker chips. Each stack at had ten chips. Lee picked up one of the chips, and he looked at both sides of it.
The chip was green. And in the center, of both sides, the chip had the stamp of, '10K'. Around the, '10K', was the name in a circle, 'Daiyu Palace Casino', in small lettering.
Lee then set chip back down on the stack it has been on.
Lee thought, 'Okay, the minimum bid is ten thousand. So, hundred times twenty is a thousand. So, these chips represent a total of a million U.S. dollars... A million...'
River looked over at Lee, as she asked, “What are you looking at?”
Lee looked up at River, as he honestly answered, “It is surprising how small a number of chips can present such a large amount of money. And these chips represent more money than I have ever personally seen in my entire life. And with the minimum bid being ten thousand, each bet I am placing will be more money than most people, back where I live, make in six months.”
From the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Chang crack a grin, while on he was on his cellphone.
Lee thought, 'Chang must have overheard me.'
River shrugged, as she stated, “Then, I suggest you bid wisely.”
Lee complimented, “That is a good idea. So, any idea when the dealer is going to show up?”
River said, “She will likely be here in a few minutes.”
The two players then waited for their dealer to appear.
A couple of minutes later, a waitress, in a hotel uniform, walked into the room, and delivered Lee and River each a glass lemonade, in front of them, by their poker chips.
The waitress then turned and left the room.
(_)
About a minute later, Lee heard a female voice say, from behind him, near the door said, in english, “I hope I am not late.”
Lee then heard Chang state, “No, my dear. You are right on time.”
Lee turned to his right, looked at who is was. And while Lee was still able to maintain his poker face, his mental train of thought came to a halt, as he immediately recognized her.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'This is our dealer?' He then immediately cleared his mind, so as to not reveal to River how much he knew of the situation.
Walking toward them, with Chang beside her, was Faye Valentine, of the Cowboy Bebop reality. And given she looked to be in her mid-twenties, with her as youthful and slender as ever, Lee could guess that she undergone the vat process. Including, the super-soldier serum treatment.
Lee saw that Faye was wearing a black evening gown, with her short purple hair in a black headband. But otherwise, Faye had the same hair style she usually had her hair in.
Lee never took his eyes off Faye, as she walked up to the table.
Chang pulled back the dealer's chair between River and Lee. And Faye sat down in the chair Chang was holding for her.
Chang the help Faye push her chair a little closer to the table, as she got comfortable in her seat.
After which, Chang move around to stand to Faye's left side, right behind the purple haired woman. With Chang now literally standing over Lee. And Lee noticed this, but he did not say anything.
Lee thought, 'I got a feeling our dealer is the type of woman whom just loves to upstage everyone else.'
From the corner of his left eye, he saw River just nodded once in agreement.
Faye looked up at Chang, as she asked, “Which camera do you want me to look into?”
Chang looked down at the purple haired woman, as he answered, “None. Just talk normally, and focus on your job.”
Faye smiled, as she replied, “No problem.” She then looked over at River and Lee.
Chang then stated, to someone outside the room, “Okay guys. Switch over. The game is about to start.”
(_)
At that moment, the people in the control room, elsewhere in the building, immediately switched all the TV monitors on the gaming floor, and nearby indoor casino restaurant, to the poker room, with the volume of the music in the gaming floor decrease, so people could hear the discussion on the poker room.
(_)
Inside the poker room, Faye looked at Lee and River, as she calmly stated, “For those joining in. The players are the redheaded genius, River, and the mysterious, Lee. I am Faye Valentine. I will be your dealer for this game. This game will be for a million dollars in chips. And this game will not end until one player, or the other, has busted. Each chip is worth ten thousand dollars. And the minimum bet is ten ten thousand dollars.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Rock and Revy had just made it down, and were waking for the a TV screen mounted on the ceiling, hanging down against the wall.
They heard Faye introduce the players. Revy then stated, with surprise in her tone of voice, “So, mister dance is, Lee? And I did not even recognize him, while we were upstairs.”
Rock responded, “Neither did I.” She mentally added, 'And that worries me'
It was at that moment that they heard several food steps coming their way, from behind them, and across the room, from the main entrance of the casino.
Both women, along with several other, people, turned to see Chief Del Soto, with twenty of his police officers, marching into the gaming room, from the front doors.
Chief Del Soto wore his white button up shirt, brown pants, brown leather belt, black boots, and his brown long coat. But, Pedro was not wearing his hat, nor sunglasses.
On the other hand, Pedro's police officers were all in uniform. Most of them were men, but there were a few women mixed in the group, as well.
Revy smirked, as she commented, “This day is just just keeps getting more interesting by the minute.”
(_)
At the moment, on the top floor, in the poker room, from the corner of his eye, Lee saw Chang pulled out his cellphone and answer it.
Lee thought, 'His cellphone didn't ring, so it likely set to vibrate. That is very professional of him. And I think I know what that call is about.
Lee overheard Chang say, in chinese, “I will be there in a minute.” He then hung up his phone, and put it away.
Chang then looked down at Lee, and as he frowned towards Lee.
From his seat, Lee was looked up at Chang. He grinned, as he casually said, in english, “My. My. Here come the fuzz.”
Chang stated, in english, “I know that line.”
Lee's smile turned into a smirk, as he said, “The line is from a great movie. A modern comedic classic.”
Chang realized, as he thought, 'As I expected.' He accused Lee, “You called them here.”
Lee continued smiling, as he motioned with his right index and middle fingers, for Chang to lean over, towards Lee's head.
Chang did so. Lee then whispered, “Given the party your throwing, Chang. I would consider it an insult not to invite my friend, Pedro, and he employees. And allow them to get in on the action, and have some fun, as we play.”
Chang leaned up.
Lee then saw Chang let out a laugh. Which made Lee to feel relief, even though Lee did not show it on the outside.
Meanwhile, the two women by the two men watched what had just taken place. With Faye wondering what was going on. And River trying her best not to laugh.
While not outwardly expressing his feelings, Chang happily thought, 'Oh. This guy is smooth. I like it when someone knows how to pull something with style. And Lee knows with cameras here, if I hurt him, Chief Del Soto will not be happy.'
'Lee just took this poker game to a whole new level of entertainment for me. Well, I guess I have to deal with Chief Del Soto, now. And here I thought, I had Lee over a barrel. It seems that he has a few cards up his sleeve that I didn't know about... It is days like this, that make life worth living.'
Chang just turned and walked out the room, through the open door.
As Chang entered, and turned to his right, down the hallway, he left the door to the room open.
After Chang exited the room, Faye turned to Lee, as she pointed out, “You just pissed him off.”
Lee looked over at Faye, as he said, in a casual tone of voice, “Not really. His is the type of person that clearly likes it when things are done with style.”
River could not help but giggle a little at Lee's comment.
Lee continued, “Still, if he is focused elsewhere, he is not focused here.”
Faye agreed, “I see your point. Though, it is not wise to anger that man.”
Lee flatly quipped, “What part of this god damned situation is wise? Now, deal the cards, lady. The only lady I feel that I will have any chance with today is lady luck.”
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 15: “Gambling with Insanity: Part Two: All In The Cards.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was at ten AM, on the island city of De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. And the sun hid in the clouds, of the partly cloudy sky. The temperature was cool, but not cold, with a light breeze from the sea.
Inside Daiyu Palace Casino, on the main gaming floor, near the back of the room, Revy and Rock had just watched a good portion of the De La Plata Podrido police force walked right into the gaming area, with Chief Del Soto right up front.
Revy smiled wickedly, as she continued looking at the police force, while she commented, with a bit of excitement in her tone of voice, “Now, the cops have shown up. This is turning into a three ring circus, and we got front row seats.”
Rock shared her lovers smile, as she looked on at the police officers, while she agreed, “I know. And from what Lee just stated, I think he called them here.”
Revy stated, “Of course. You are not going to have a game like this, with the stakes like this, with the betting pools like this, without the cops showing up for their cut.”
Rock pointed out, “From what I understand, Chief Del Soto hate bribes.”
Revy shrugged, as she said, “That is a good point. Now, that I think about it, I do remember Melvin mentioning that to. In which case, Chang is going to have some serious explaining to do to them. Which make it all the more fun for us watch as this game unfolds.”
Rock suggested, “Speaking of which. Let's continue watching the game. I think this is just getting started, in so many ways.”
Revy replied, “I agree.”
Both women then turned around, to continue to watch the TV near them, as they listened to the conversation, in the poker room, that was broadcast to through the speakers, to the gaming floor, and casino restaurant.
(_)
Across the room, inside the restaurant, in the two window booths, the Dutch, Lotton, Benny, Janet, Eda, Yolanda, Sawyer, and Shenhua were dividing their attention between the screen in the poker room upstairs, and towards watching the cops walking onto the gaming floor.
Benny complained, “Who called the cops? This was just getting interesting. And now the cops are going to break it up.”
Yolanda stated, “I doubt that is the case. Look at the cops. They are not arresting anyone. They do not having their pistols out. I think they came here to bet on the game.”
Shenhua said, “I agree.”
Eda pointed out, “I see Chief Del Soto with them. He is right up front.”
Janet commented, “Then, that might be the case. We hope. But, still, who called them?”
Dutch calmly stated, “Lee called them.”
Janet inquired, “He did?”
Dutch pointed out, “Fuzz, is older english term for police. And given that word was in the quote Lee just mentioned, it is a good guess he called them.”
Benny stated, “And what was up with that quote. I have heard it before, but I cannot place it.”
Lotton commented, “It is from a British comedy action cop movie titled, Hot Fuzz. And Lee's right. It is a good movie too. The film is about a super-cop from London that does such a wonderful job, he makes the other police in London look bad. So, his superiors promote him, and use that promotion as justification to transfer him to a small town, in the middle of nowhere. The movie has good action, good mystery, great laughs, and one hell of a shootout towards the end of the film.”
Benny, replied, “Oh yea. I remember seeing it, now. I laughed my ass off watching it.”
Janet turned to Benny, as she stated, “You will have to show that movie to me, some time.”
Benny turned to Janet, as she said, “I will. And you will enjoy it. It is a good popcorn movie.”
Janet smiled, as she replied, “Then, I look forward to seeing it.” She thought, 'Though, after this poker game.'
Benny returned her wife's smile.
Lotton mentioned, “Still, it is interesting that Lee was quoting one of the head villains in that movie.”
Sawyer said, “I remember you showing Shenhua and I the movie, years ago. And it is a good movie. And Lee using that quote just shows that he has great taste in movie quotes.”
Shenhua commented, “I have to agree on this matter. Also, it is clear that Chief Del Soto, and Lee, are pulling something. But, we do not know what.”
Yolanda said, “Given Lee whispered something into Chang's ear, on the video-audio feed, I would guess that this was all part of Lee's plan to get Chang out of that room he and River are playing in.”
Eda pointed out, “But, that would mean that Lee was expecting Chang to be there in the first place.”
Dutch stated, “A professional gambler always thinks a few steps ahead. And that is what Lee is doing. He guessed Chang would be looking over his shoulder. That plus River, would be to much for him. So, he had the Police Chief act as a distraction, to lure Chang downstairs, and way from him.”
Yolanda agreed, “That is what I would do in Lee's position.”
Janet said, “This also proves that Chief Del Soto and Lee know each. And they would have to be friends for the chief of police to bring his officers with him, as he crashes this party.”
Dutch stated, “True. And we will have to find how those two men are connected. But, that will come later. When Lee, nor Chief Del Soto realize what is going on. But, for now, let's see how this poker game unfolds.”
Dutch, and many of those at their two booths, turned to look at the video screens, mounted on the back wall of the restaurant, behind the bar counter, as she listened in on what the TVs were saying.
(_)
At that moment, over thirty floors up, on the penthouse floor, at the top of the casino, in the poker room, at the table, Faye picked up the deck of cards in front of her, on the table. While River sat at the table, to her right side. And Lee sat at the table, to her left side. With the large tinted windows overlooking the city, behind in front of her.
As Faye began to shuffle the cards, she stated, “The rules are simple. This will be standard five card draw poker. No cards are wild. Three cards can be replace per hand. Each bet has to be at least ten thousand dollars in chips. And River will be receiving the first card. And she will be placing the first bet.”
River commented, “I am fine with that.”
Lee asked, “I agree. Ladies first. So, we are only playing with one deck of cards?”
Faye continued shuffling, as she answered, “Yes.”
Lee thought, 'That figures. It is easy for a genius to card count one deck of cards. I hope the cards are not marked, as well.'
River flatly stated, “They are not.”
Lee took River at her word, as he cleared his mind.
Faye then continued shuffling the cards, as she made sure the card were very well randomized on the first hand she dealt. Neither River, nor Lee, were able to complain about Faye's extended shuffling. For it gain them more time to get ready for the actual game itself.
(_)
Meanwhile, Chang had just reached the ground floor. As he exited his express elevator, into the elevator bay facing the gaming area, Chang saw Del Soto on the other side of the gaming floor, with his police officers.
Pedro was in his usual clothing, with his brown long coat. But, he was not wearing his sunglasses, nor hat. Many of his police officers were standing around Pedro. His officers were in armed and in their uniforms. Meaning Pedro was likely armed, as well.
In additional, while most of the police officers were men, there were a few within the group, whom were women.
Chang started walking towards Pedro, at a normal pace, as he thought, 'I need to talk to Chief Del Soto, and defuse the situation, before there is one. After the talent contest, I should have realized that Lee and Chief Del Soto are friends. The problem here is that Chief Del Soto does not like bribery, and he is badass. So, the standard bribery and intimidation tactics are not going to work on him.'
As Chang came closer to Pedro, Chang then noticed Pedro looking at him.
Chang continued his thoughts, 'Okay. He sees me. Now, to talk to him.' He then started walking towards Pedro.
(_)
At that moment, across the room, Pedro stood in place, as his police officers where standing around him.
Pedro has just seen Chang come out of the elevator bay. Pedro noticed Chang looked at him, as the casino owner started walking towards him.
Pedro thought, with mild astonishment, 'Damn. Lee's plan worked. When Lee is on the ball. He is on the ball. Now, to have some fun.' Pedro turned around to his subordinates, as he ordered, in spansih, “Boys, behave. I am will be right back, after I make arrangements for our entertainment.”
Pedro could see some of his personnel smile at his comment.
Pedro then turned back to look, as Chang approached him. He thought, 'As they say. Sometimes you have to meet people half way.' He then started walking towards Chang.
Several seconds later, the two man stopped and face each other, in the middle of the gaming floor. They were six feet apart from each other.
Chang inquired, in english, “So, Chief Del Soto, what brings you to my fine establishment?”
Pedro casually answered, in english, “We heard about the poker game with two million dollars on the line. That amount of money tends to attract the wrong kind of attention. I am surprised you did not call us, concerning this event, beforehand”
Chang responded, “I assured you that my security hand any problems that come up.”
Pedro thought, 'That would be an understatement. You likely have enough badasses and firepower to take on everything, short of a full on military assault.'
Pedro agreed, “I am sure they can. Still, my boys and I would like in on this action.”
Chang questioned, “And I thought you were against bribery?”
Pedro explained, “I am against, bribery, yes. Gambling, no. I view gambling like I do drinking alcohol. If you gamble responsibility, I have no problems. If not, you become my problem.”
Pedro continued, in a slightly sterner tone of voice, “And no one wants to become my problems.”
Pedro went onto say, in a calm tone of voice, “Over the years, I have had to deal with a number of loan sharks and gambling addicts in this town. Both are bad for this town.”
Chang thought, 'I wonder what you mean by deal? Though, you are subtly warning me not to be a loan shark. That is fine.'
Chang said, “I can admire that point of view. The more I learn from you Chief Del Soto, the more I realize that you are a very flexible man.”
Pedro stated, “You have to be in this world.”
Chang replied, “I do not doubt that. So, you, and your subordinates, wish to place bets on this game?”
Pedro answered, “Of course.”
Chang stated, “Then, I suggest you bet on the player known as River. I assure you she is better at this than Lee. And my money is literally riding on her.” He mentally added, 'Given River will likely win, I do not want these cops upset for losing, by betting on Lee.'
Pedro chuckled. He then said, “Nah. My boys can decide for themselves. But, I think I will bet on Lee. I prefer to bet on the underdogs, and wildcards. And Lee is both, in so many ways.”
Chang thought, 'The way he is acting. This is more than just a visit. Lee wanted him here. And I need to know what is going on. Even if I have to tip my hand.' He stated, “Let's cut the bullshit. I know, you know.”
Pedro thought, 'With the music and the game as a distraction, I doubt anyone, let alone the girls, will overheard our conversation. So, I can talk freely.' He said, “Yes. I know from the anime series, to those strange stories. And now I know, that you know, that I know...” He softly added, while he smirked, “Babe.”
Chang took a few quick steps closer to Pedro, to where they were nose to nose, with less than an inch between them, as he sternly stated, in a hushed tone of voice, which only Pedro could hear, “If we were not in a room full of people, including half your force, I would kill you where you stand for calling me that name.”
Pedro did not show any reaction to Chang's movement, nor threat, as he continued to smirk, while calmly pointed out, “You could try. Though, I know what you are capable of. While, you do not know what I am capable of.”
Pedro's smirk turned feral, as he continued, with a bit of eagerness in his tone of voice, “Either way, it would be one hell of a fight.”
Pedro then suddenly dropped his smile, as he went onto say, “By the way, lose the glasses. No one really does the glasses inside the building anymore. Unless it is for a special occasion. If you are going to live here, you need to get up to date with what is cool, and what is not.”
Chang was mildly surprised that he did not even get a reaction from Pedro, with this threat. He calmly thought, 'I guess intimidation really will not work on him. Though, I just confirmed that he knows who I, and the others are. Including, from the anime, to the stories. And he has a point about my sunglasses.”
Chang took a few steps back from Pedro. He then, took off his glasses, and put them in his coat pocket. Chang conceded, “Alright. And from what I have heard about you. You might be right. You would have to at least be a badass to clean up this city, and keep it together. And you are intelligent enough to avoid Revy, the others, and even this casino.”
Pedro commented, “As long as I can account for what River is. And avoid her. I do not mind coming here.”
Chang grinned. He was impressed with Pedro, as he thought, 'So, he really does know what is going on. Nice. I haven't has a challenge like this, since Balalaika and Hotel Moscow first came to Roanapur, all those years ago. Now, to dig for some more information.'
Chang commented, “You have a point there. Still, given what Lee said, and you being here, you seem to be friends with Lee.”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to get Chang off topic.' He said, “I make it a habit to get to know those that live in my fair city.”
Chang snorted, as he stated, “Fair city. That is a laugh.”
Pedro responded, “This city is a lot fairer than most.” He then lied, “Lee does not know what is going on. Though, with a million dollars, of a crazy woman's money, on the line, he did ask about River. He found out from Akira, and her two lovers, that River is a telepath and a genius. He then wisely called me for help, and I decided to come to his aid.”
Chang thought, 'A likely excuse. But, I do not believe that is even close to what really happened between you two. Though, this does confirm that Lee knows that River is a telepath and a genius. Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, would at least tell Lee that. Out of simple human decency.'
'Though, given Lee knew this ahead of time. This shoes that Lee has more courage to show up here, this morning, than I gave him credit for. Still, I wonder...'
Chang inquired, “And what do you get out of all this?”
Pedro continued the lie he had come up with, in case he was confronted with this very situation. He stated, “Lee keeps tabs on Revy's group. After my brother left town, I did some digging, and I found out what was going on, with Revy's group being here. I also found out about Lee, at the same time. In exchange for me shielding him from the law. He is a wanted man in the states. He spies for me. It is a wonderful arrangement.”
Chang thought, 'Pedro pulled off getting a spy close to Revy, and the others, while I failed to do so... Not bad... And he provides for Lee, by being here, is to get me down here, away from him. I wonder who's plan all this is? Lee's? or Pedro's?.. I will find out later... For now...' He stated, “You are just a distraction for me.”
Pedro causally admitted, “Yes. I am. And with good reason.” He then continued, in a more direct tone of voice, “Chang, you have already stacked the deck against Lee. You and Revy forced him into a game, he told me, that he didn't want to play in the first place. You have him playing a telepathic genius. On top of this, you have Faye as a crooked dealer. Though, I doubt Revy and the others realize how crooked Faye can get with gambling games. Still, with all that set against him, you leaning over his shoulder is just overkill.”
Chang thought, 'He does have a point there. If I did stick around that game, and Lee loses, Revy might call me on all these actions.' He admitted, “You might be right.”
Pedro stated, “I know I am right. Also, I know your kind. You are likely making millions from those betting today. Both ways. I learned what the odds are, that you set up for this poker game. And the way you set up the odds, if you win in the game, you will break even. Or, you may even make a slight profit. But, if you lose your million in the game, you will likely come out more ahead, than River winning this game.”
Chang smirked, as he complimented, “It is so rare to meet someone with such a devious mind as I.”
Chang thought, with amusement, 'Chief Del Soto is right. If I lose, I will actually win more money, then if River wins. But, this is about more than just money. This is about the enjoyment of watching how a well laid out game can play out. If Lee is able to win, it will be very entertaining to see how he pulls it off. I will make a few extra million. And I will likely get to enjoy make up sex with River tonight, for her losing my million today.'
'Though, I will not be angry with her. But, I will enjoy the sex with her. Both ways.'
'And if River wins. It will still be a fun game to watch. I get a little profit out of this. I will likely enjoy seeing Revy pitch a tantrum like a little child. And I will still likely have sex with River tonight, with her having sex with me, as part of our celebration of her winning a million dollars.'
'Either way, I cannot lose. This is the embodiment of a Xanatos Gambit. And I am loving every minute of this.'
Meanwhile, Pedro could tell from Chang's body language and facial expression, that he was thinking about something.
Pedro thought, 'It is clear Chang is likely thinking how great he is, in that he planned and arranged this so he cannot lose today. Still, we need to get this conversation moving forwards.'
Pedro suggested, “I will take that as a compliment. Now, why don't you have a drink with your friends? I suggest you keep Rock and Revy company.” Pedro then used his right hand pointed at Rock, and Revy, whom were standing twenty feet away from them, watching the poker game about to start, on a nearby TV monitor.
Also, Pedro noticed there was no one around the two women.
Pedro saw Chang look in the direction he was pointed out.
Chang turned back to Pedro, as he commented, “That is not a bad idea.”
Pedro thought, 'It pays to keep an eye on one's surroundings.' He then dropped his right hand back to his side.
Pedro turned back to Chang, as he went onto say, “You three seem to have a platonic chemistry going on. When it comes to action, you are one of the few people that Revy respects, whom she immediately does not want to fight to the death. And when it comes to scheming, you and Rock seem to work on the same wavelength.”
Chang agreed, “You are right on all those points.”
Pedro requested, “Well, now to place bets for myself, and my friends. So, where do I go to do that?”
Chang admitted, “Honestly. I am not sure myself. I let my pit bosses, Spike, and Jet, handle where bets are placed, on this game floor.” He the used his right hand to point across the room, to a young, slender, green haired woman, in a blue leisure suit.
Chang then dropped his right hand back to his side, as he said, “There is Spike, right now. Just go over to her, and ask her where the bets for the poker game are being place? We are still holding them open for the next thirty minutes, or so.
Pedro responded, “That is a good selection on pit bosses. And thank you. Now, my boys, and I, will be placing our bets.”
Chang replied, “Have fun.”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to play this the same game Lee has been playing. On officially being known to know stuff.' He asked, “Does Spike have a clue on what's going on?
Chang answered, “Not really. All she knows is about our series, the stories that effect all of us, and that the writer is in town. You do know who we are talking about?”
Pedro commented, “It is my job to know such things.” He then lied, “Though, I do know not who exactly this person is.” He thought, 'That is a good excuse. And I stated I do not know who the writer is. Now, to screw with him.'
Pedro said, “So, that is why you are in town? You think the writer of those stories is here? Interesting. That does explained Revy, and the others, being here, as well.” He mentally added, 'By stating that, Chang will not think that I know the writer. And by extension, he will not think that Lee is the writer.'
Chang thought, 'Damn. I just let that out of the bag. Nothing I can do about it now.' He asked, “What are you going to do with that information?”
Pedro answered, “Nothing. All I ask is if you hunt and catch this person, you will do so discreetly.”
Chang thought, 'Interesting. He is giving us permission to go after the writer. But, he does not want trouble. That is nice balancing act he is maintaining. And he claims not to know who the writer is. Though, I do not know for sure if he is telling the truth, or lying. And going after a man in his position would be too risky. So, even if I want to find out who the writer is. Which I could honestly care less about. One will have to find the writer some other way, than to confront the police chief, here.'
Chang said, “I would hope that would be what happens, if he is caught.”
Pedro commented, “It sounds like you are not after this person?” He thought, 'I need to know this. One way, or another.'
Chang grinned, as he stated, “I have no intention of going after the man responsible for giving everything I ever wanted, and more. Though, Revy, and the others, have a different opinion on the matter.”
Pedro said, “I am glad one of you realizes this. By the way, as the police chief of this city, I have to know. Do the maids know about the stories, and the writer. I feel that my city would not survive if they found out.”
Chang stated, “No. They do not. We all agreed not to tell the Lovelace family.”
Pedro thought, with relief, 'Oh, thank you. That is a major relief. Sure, you, and your friends, are trouble, Chang. But, the maids are just too dangerous. Even for this city.'
Pedro commented, “Thank you for informing me. By the way, at the talent contest, due to the secrecy, I could not tell you then. But, you did a masterful job on that song. That is a hard song to sing, even if one's native language is english.”
Chang responded, “Yes. Billy Joel's song, We Didn't Start The Fire, is very difficult to sing correctly. And thank you for your compliment. Most people do not appreciate talent in other ways, besides destruction. But, I see you do, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro said, “I like to look on the brighter side of life. Besides, if we are going to get to know each other this well, you might as well call me, Pedro.”
Chang replied, “Okay Pedro. And I do not mind you calling me, Chang. Everyone else seems to do so. Also, yours, and Lee's distraction were well played. Very well played.”
Pedro complimented, “What can I say? I was inspired by the presence of a master.”
Chang grinned, as he responded, “And don't you forget it.”
Pedro replied, “I won't.”
Chang said, “Have a pleasant time. If you need anything. Let me know.”
Pedro stated, “Perhaps, I will.”
Both men then walked away from each other.
As Chang walked towards Rock and Revy, he thought, 'I still haven't figured out how to fit Chief Del Soto... No, Pedro, into my plans. But, after this conversation, I just had with him, I am going to have too. The man is just too valuable not to do something with. Though, I will have to make sure none of the others accidentally kill him. We need him more than some would realize. Considering he is the one keeping this town in one piece.'
'Along that line of thought. I always wondered what Roanapur would have been like if a badass was in charge of the police force, instead of that lard ass, Watsup. Now, I think I have my answer, in the form of De La Plata Podrido, and Police Chief Pedro Del Soto.'
When Chang reached Rock and Revy, both women turned to him. Revy greeted, “Hi Chang. What are you doing down here?”
Chang lied, “I decided that it would be best if I keep you guys company.”
Rock said, “We are most than happy to watch the game with you.”
Revy commented, “Yea. You are always fun to have around.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Chang then stood beside Revy, to Revy's left side. With Rock standing to Revy's right side. As the three adults turned their attention to the TV in front of them.
(_)
Meanwhile, as Pedro walked towards Spike, he got a closer look at the woman.
Pedro saw that Spike still had the same dark green hair afro as she had as a man.
Pedro thought, 'I will just play this cool, and I will be fine. There is no reason that Spike will not help me with finding out where to place the bets at, for the poker game upstairs.'
'Though, I just need to remember not to say her name to her. Still, I think I will place a thousand U.S. dollars on Lee. I can afford to lose that. And I will keep my boys from betting to heavily, as well. Though, I will let them bet on either player. Still, that way, there should be no serious hard feelings towards either player, if any of my boys lose their money in their bet.'
As Pedro reached Spike, he came to a stop, six feet from the women. There was no one else around them, dark green haired, asian woman turned to him.
Spike politely inquired, in english, “Can I help you, sir?”
Pedro said, “Yes. Where do I got to place my bet for the poker game upstairs?”
Spike answered, “Over there.” She then used her left hand to point at a nearby small table, with a woman in a card dealer's uniform in a chair, behind the table. There was an open lock on the table, in front of her. The woman also had a pen and paper, on the table in front of her.
Pedro looked in the direction Spike has pointed to, then back towards Spike. He said, “Thank you.”
Spike dropped her left hand back to her side, as she turned to Pedro. She calmly said, “You're welcome.”
Pedro then turned, and he headed in a different direction, than the small betting table. He walked towards the area of the gaming room, where his men and women were, so he could round them up, to place their bets, all at once. Before it was too late to do so.
(_)
On the penthouse level, in the poker room, Faye had just finished shuffling the cards, and she started handing out the cards, with River getting the first card.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'That took long enough.'
River snorted.
When Faye was finished, dealing five cards to each player, River picked up her five cards, and looked at them, in her hands. As she held her cards close to her body.
Meanwhile, Lee had yet to looked at his five cards.
Lee thought, as he looked over at River, 'Great. I got to deal with both a telepath, and a crooked dealer... Yea, I know you are reading my mind, River.'
River just smiled at him.
Lee turned Faye, as he thought, 'Faye said she is only using one deck of cards. Most casinos use multiple decks of cards, per table. Switching between them, after every hand, to help prevent card counting. But, Chang probably just wants to give you the option to card count, if your wanted to. On the other hand, I could never get the hang of card counting.'
Lee looked over at River, whom just shrugged towards him.
Lee then looked at his cards. Lee has a pair of eights. Which was worth betting on. While changing out the other three cards he had.
Faye stated, “As a reminder. River will place the first bet.”
River placed a single ten thousand dollar chip into the pot.
Lee matched the bet.
Both of the players then discarded a few of their cards. River discarded two. Lee discarded threes.
Faye replaced their cards.
As Lee and River looked at their new cards, Lee did not outwardly show it, but he now had three eights. Though, he tried to keep himself from focusing on his card hand, too much.
Lee thought, 'Now, for my plan.' He temporally broke his poker mask, and he smirked towards River.
(_)
On the gaming floor, Rock, Revy, and Chang were standing together, while watching the TV.
They continued to watch the game on the TV, as Revy inquired, “Why does that smile look so familiar?”
Chang answered, “Because you have probably seen Rock use that same type of smirk a dozen times over, when she has come up with an awesome plan.”
Rock questioned, “Really?”
Chang replied, “Yes.”
Revy stated, “I hope he lives up to the smirk, then.”
(_)
On the penthouse level, in the poker room, Lee continued to smirk, as he causally said, “River, since you are Chang's girlfriend, I have a question for you. Given the way Chang likes to act and walk around, he must be hung like an elephant, downstairs.”
Lee could barely as keep himself from laughing, as he saw both River and Faye look at him, with shocked expressions, while they went slack jawed over his comment.
Faye thought, 'This man has a death wish.'
(_)
On the casino floor, Chang jaw dropped, as everyone else laughed.
Rock and Revy were beside Chang, as they laughed.
Between laughs, Revy commented, “Lee has a death wish.”
As Rock forced herself to breath, between laughs, she countered, “No. He is just playing the only angle he can. Humor. And it is an awesome plan. He might still win this game.”
(_)
Nearby, Pedro had just finished making his bet for Lee. With his men and women still placing their bets.
Presently, Pedro was still trying to find a seat, as he saw and heard the spectacle on the very TVs around the casino. Pedro chuckled, as he thought, 'Oh my god. Lee, you were right. Your plan is a six, or seven, on the crazy meter. At least.'
(_)
In the poker room, River and Faye has finally composed themselves.
River regained her own poker face, as she calmly stated, “That would be a matter of opinion. I will raise you thirty thousand.”
River placed three more chips into the pot. She then inquired, “Also, what about Revy, in that outfit she likes to wear?”
Lee thought, 'Oh. You want to play this game, too. Nice.'
River smiled towards Lee.
Lee then could not help answered River's bait, “To be honest. And I know she is kill me after I say this. Yet, it might still be worth saying this. With those blue denim cut-offs and crop top, she looks like Daisy Dukes's asian cousin, from Dukes of Hazard.”
Lee thought, 'That is even what those style of shorts are sometimes called.'
River replied, “Interesting.”
(_)
On the casino floor, laughter erupted again.
Chang and Rock laughed, as Revy barely contained her anger.
Chang said, “Looks like the shoe is on the other foot, Revy.”
Revy grumbled, “He is right. I am going to kill him.”
Rock replied, “No, you won't.”
Chang stated, “Besides, I am sure that you already knew that those cut-offs, that you wear, are occasionally called, Daisy Dukes.”
Revy looked down, at the floor, as she forced herself to calm down. She quietly conceded, “Yea. I did.” She then look back at the TV near them.
(_)
Back in the poker room, Lee threw out three chips, as he stated, “Call.”
Both played showed their hands. River has a pair of jacks. Lee's three eights beat her two pair.
Lee collected his forty thousand in winnings, as Faye collected the cards, and began to reshuffle the cards.
A Faye shuffled the cards, River asked, “So, what about Revy's girlfriend, Rock?”
Lee shrugged, as he casually replied, “I don't want to know what it is about her, but her body language screams, office girl.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, the punchline of the third joke, roars of laughter erupted again.
It was Chang and Revy's turn to laugh.
Chang then stated, “Rock, it is looks like you have been demoted from salary man to office girl.”
Rock replied, with slight annoyance to her voice, “I will give him that one. And I think he is just getting started.”
Chang thought, 'Rock was right. Lee just used humor to when the first hand. And he just won forty thousand. Not bad. Not bad at all.'
(_)
In the poker room, This time, it only took Faye around thirty seconds to shuffle the cards, before she handed out another five cards.
Lee thought, 'Well, at least she was quicker, with shuffling the cards, this time.'
River let out a little giggle escape her lips.
Both Lee and River then looked at their cards. Lee saw he had nothing. Still, it was his turn to bet, and he felt a strong start was good for a hand where he had nothing.
Lee remembered what Sam had taught him that.
Though, while in the presence, of the telepathic River, Lee kept himself from thinking to much about his poker lessons from Sam.
Lee held his cards in his right hand, as he used his left hand to toss two chips into the center of the table. He stated, “I will start with twenty thousand.”
River toss two chips, as she asked, “I will see that. And what about Aeryn?”
Both players replaced three of their cards.
Lee answered, “When I looked into her eyes, I see a very sane individual, whom could easily snap me like a twig, if she wanted to.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Aeryn, Violin, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, and Annie stood together, as they were still finding a place to sit down, to watch the poker game from.
Aeryn was beside her spouse, as she complimented, “He is a very perceptive man.”
(_)
In the poker room, Lee looked at his cards. He still had nothing. He said, “I fold.”
Both players turned their cards over to Faye.
As Faye reshuffled, River collected her winnings, with her becoming twenty thousand dollars richer.
River inquired, “And what about Violin?”
Lee happily commented, “She is such an asian redneck that I would be tempted to breakout the Jeff Foxworthy jokes, for her. But, this is just not the time, nor place for such humor. No matter how tempting it is.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Violin and Akira snickered for a few seconds.
Violin then said, “He's got me there.”
Akira replied, “I know.”
(_)
In the poker room, Faye handed out another five cards to each player.
Lee looked at his cards, he had three of a kind of sixes.
River threw five chips into the pot, as she stated, “I will start with fifty thousand.”
Lee tossed in five chips, as he stated, “I will see that fifty thousand.”
Lee discards two cards, while River discarded three cards.
River commented, “Still... About the asian redneck comment? Isn't that an oxymoron?”
Lee said, “Nope. There are asian rednecks. And I know a few of them, personally. They are crazier than the white rednecks.”
River inquired, “Interesting. And what about Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru?”
Lee commented, “Except for the threesome angle, they seem to be the most normal, sane, and well adjusted members of their group.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, in one group, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, Annie, Aeryn, and Violin almost doubled over laughing.
(_)
Not far from the group of women, a woman, whom worked for the casino, saw them. She wore black jeans, a white t-shirt, a red leather jacket, and black leather boots.
The women recognized the five women, as she turned, and walked up to them.
_)
Nearby, the group of five women, it took all of Pedro's will power not to burst out laughing, as well.
Pedro thought, 'If I laugh. I risk blowing my cover, on how much I know about them.'
(_)
Elsewhere, on the gaming floor, Rock, Revy, and Chang were sharing a good laugh.
While Chang laughed, he thought, with delight, 'When this is over. I might hire Lee as a comedic stand up act. The guy has talent in delivering jokes.'
(_)
In the casino restaurant, while sitting at their booths, Yolanda, Eda, Janet, Benny, Lotton, Dutch, Sawyer, and Shenhua were all laughing at Lee's latest joke.
Benny commented, “This guy would be great at a roast.”
Eda pointed out, “If you haven't figured it out by now, both of them are roasting us. And doing a marvelous job at it.”
Janet commented, “And the fact that River is the straight man, in this two person act, just makes it even more funny.”
Dutch said, “Yea. The irony does make it funnier.”
The eight women then laughed even harder.
(_)
In the game room, Lee looked at his two new cards, and he found that he had a full house, of three sixes and two twos.
River looked at her cards. She tossed in six chips, as she stated, “I will raise you sixty thousand.”
Lee tossed in six chips, as he said, “I call.”
River had nothing, and Lee won the hand.
Faye collected the cards, and she reshuffled the deck.
As Lee collected his winnings, he thought, 'A hundred and ten thousand is not bad for one hand.'
River calmly asked, “Now, what about Eda?”
Lee's poker face dropped, for a second, has he looked up at River. He calmly stated, “I have nothing to say, but that she is a wonderful woman?” He mentally added, 'Eda, is a topic that we will not be discussing.'
River simply nodded once, as she agreed, “I can see why you would say that.”
By then, Faye finished shuffling, and dealt the two players their next hand.
(_)
In the hotel restaurant, Janet looked over at Eda, as she said, “I think he still has the hots for you.”
Eda looked at Janet, as she replied, “Nah. He is just being a gentleman.”
(_)
In the poker room, as the next few hands played out, River won two hands, and Lee won one hand.
None of the hands were big bets, and they pretty much were breaking even after every other hand.
With the next hand, both players looked at their cards.
Lee saw that he had a straight, of a seven, eight nine, ten, and jack.
And it was River's turn to place the first bet.
River placed three chips, as she said, “I will start with thirty thousand.”
Lee threw five chips into the pot, as he stated, “I will see that. And raise you twenty thousand.”
River then discards one card, she commented, “For a very nice suit, you picked a lousy tie to wear with it.”
Lee smirked, as he joked, “It is called power clashing. They teach such lessons at technical colleges, during the business courses. Where wearing a professional business suit to class is requirement.”
River giggled at his joke. She then looked at the card Faye had given her, to replace the card she discarded.
(_)
On the casino gaming floor, Chang looked around, as he noticed there were a few snickers, and some light laughs, except for Pedro. Pedro was laughing very hard.
Chang thought, 'I think the only person in this room whom got Lee's joke was Pedro. That figures. Still, even though I know about you, Pedro. None of the others do. And that is clearly the way you want to keep it. I will respect that. But Pedro, if you keep reacting to Lee's comment like this, my friends will notice you.'
Chang then turned his attention back to the TV near him, Revy, and Rock.
Chang then noticed his two friends were staring intensely at the TV. He thought, 'Something is going on here. But, I am not sure what.'
Rock wondered out loud, “Why does that tie look familiar?”
Chang looked at the camera showing the front of Lee's clothing. He realized, as he answer her question, “Because you use to wear a teal tie as well, with your old suit.”
Revy spoke up, “Probably coincidence.”
Chang thought, 'Maybe... Maybe not...'
(_)
As Pedro Del Soto sat at a non-gambling table, with a few of his subordinates, as they watch the game upstairs from a nearby TV, with the speakers allowing them to listen to the conversation upstairs, over the music playing in the room.
At the moment, Pedro was laughed hard at Lee's latest joke.
As Pedro started to calm down, he thought, 'Only you, Lee, you would make a Thirty Rock, Jack joke, at a time like this?... Wait a minute, that tie... Teal... Lee you are absolutely insane to wear a tie like that to a place like this. Around these people. If you get caught, you are on your own... Wait a minute. A Thirty Rock verbal joke, dealing with a visible joke about Rock, whom use to wear a teal tie, like that... A double Rock joke... Oh, I get it... A joke on the Rocks...'
Pedro chuckled a little more, as he continued his thoughts, 'Lee, you're not just insane. You might be the craziest person in the building... And that is saying something.'
'Either way, you still are the most imaginative. You still got that creative talent for humor. You are definitely showing it with your jokes. And it appears you plan to keep River happy is working. Because she is clearly getting in on the jokes.'
'Lee, you might actually pull your plan off.'
Pedro took a moment to look around the room. As he did so, one of the young women in the gaming room caught his eye.
The woman was standing with Aeryn, Violin, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. All of them were talking to each other, as they occasionally turned their head to watch the TV monitor near them, of the poker game.
The women was a pretty fair skin woman with long brown hair, that went down to hair shoulder-blades. Her hair was held in a ponytail, that was tied back with a brown scrunchy. She has an athletic physical build, and she was slightly over average height for a woman of her ethnicity.
The brown haired woman wore black jeans, a white t-shirt, a red leather jacket, and black leather boots. But, it was the metal cylinder strapped to the right side of her belt that tipped Pedro off to who she was.
Pedro kept himself from showing any outward expression, as he mentally screamed in terror, 'Oh crap. That is Annie. AKA, gender bent Anakin Skywalker. AKA gender bent Darth Vader. What is she doing here!? Last I read, she hates Chang! I mean, sure dealing with villains like Chang and Revy are one thing. For them. Being evil is a career option. But, for a Sith Lord, being evil is a religious experience.'
'Why did Lee have to write about, Annie? Because he is a fool. And why am I helping Lee? Because I am a fool, as well. Indeed. Who is more the foolish? The fool, or the fool who follows him?... Oh man, I am doing the Star Wars jokes, now. And the situation fits that joke, so well.'
'The only good news is that last time I read about Annie, she was a gray force user, and she really wasn't evil anymore.'
'Yet. In baseball terms, she is in a badass league beyond anything I could hope to counter. I am talking galactic scale. Meanwhile, Chang and Revy are more like in the majors. With myself being in the minors.'
'When it comes to Chang, Revy, and the other badasses at their level, if my back was to the wall, I could probably bridge the gap, and hold my own against them.'
'On the other hand, Annie is like River, she is to powerful for me.'
'With Annie around, this situation is getting a little too hot for me.'
'I came here today was as a favor for Lee. But, if he gets caught, he will likely talk, to try to save his own skin. That is just his nature. And I don't blame him for it. Still, if he talks, we both will be screwed. I hope River didn't read to much of his mind. Speaking of River, the only reason I would set foot in this casino was that I knew River would be too busy today to meet with me. She is like Annie. She is to much for me to handle. How Chang is still breathing, I don't know.'
'Though, either way, I have to stick around, to make sure Lee either makes it out of this casino on his own. Or, if he is caught, I will have about a window of a minute or two, to figure out if I want to dry to have my boys and I, make a run for it. Or, I would cut a deal with Chang.'
'In such a situation, I am not sure which option I would take.'
Pedro then realized, as he continued his thoughts, 'Oh crap! Force users can sense when someone nearby is expressing strong emotions about them. And if Annie catches me, then Lee and I are still both screwed to the wall. Fortunately, it can take the a few minutes to localized the person. And she has not moved her head yet, in my direction. I need to immediately calm down, and put my focus back on the poker game.'
Pedro forced himself to calm down, as he turned his head back to the nearby TV monitor showing the poker game between Lee and River. With Pedro making himself think solely about the poker game.
(_)
Nearby, Annie has been talking to Violin, Aeryn, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. As they caught up, would sometimes see what was going on with the poker game, between River, and Lee, in the penthouse level.
Annie then felt someone focus on her. She turned her head to look around the room.
'I just sensed someone feel intense fear towards me. Someone here, local, recognizes me. But, the fear was immediately cut off before I even realized what I was sensing. It has been a while sense I felt fear towards myself. Which is good.'
'Still, I checked. Star Wars exists in this reality as a fictional series. If the person recognized me, then he, or she, likely also has a basic understanding of how force senses work. And that person immediately reigned in their emotions, and focused on something else, before I could find that person... I am not likely going to spot this person. I might as well go back to talking with my friends. While occasionally watching River beat this humorous fool.'
Natsuru noticed Annie looking around. She asked, “What is it?”
Annie turned to face Natsuru, as she answered, “It is nothing.”
Ranma said, “I find it hard to believe that Lee was mister dance...” She turned to Annie, as she continued, “Annie, just so you know, Lee is the one playing River.”
Annie turned to Ranma, as she replied, “Okay. And who is this, Lee?”
Natsuru commented, “He is just a guy we know, at the Devil's Hotel. Though, the man clearly likes to hide things. And his jokes have been amazing. But, given who we are, we should not be ones to judge.”
Ranma agreed, “You got that right. And the man just wants to have a good time with a beautiful woman. And he likely doesn't want us to bother him about it, afterward. Though, I am starting to understand why Eda slept with him.”
Annie inquired, “Eda, slept with that guy?”
Akira answered, “Yea. From what we understand, Eda was the one that asked him out. And he went all out on their date. And they had a one night stand that night.”
Annie said, “Lucky guy.” She mentally added, 'Some people realize an opportunity when they see it. And it sounds like this, Lee, is one such person.'
While watching the monitor, Violin inquired, “Annie, I have a question.”
Annie asked, “Sure. What is it?”
Violin continued to look at the TV, as she stated, “I know you can force grip through line of sight, even via a teleconference. But, can you tell one's emotional state that way, as well? Like Deanna Troi from Star Trek? I mean, the jokes are funny. But, I want to know what is ticking inside River and Lee's minds.”
Annie answered, “Yes. I can do that. But, I considered it rude to do so.”
Aeryn commented, “Still, it would be wise to know what their emotional state is. Just in case we need to stop something from happen, and help, Lee.”
Aeryn thought, 'Anyone that would publicly compliment me. And also help me understand by husband, in a way no one has tried to, does not deserve to be seriously hurt, or die, because someone forced them into a situation. John and I have been in those situations. So, we can sympathize with Lee, on this matter.'
Akira said, “Thank you, Aeryn.” She thought, 'Maybe she is warming up to Lee.'
Aeryn turned to Akira, as she calmly replied, “You're welcome.”
Annie conceded, “Alright, you made your point. I will do it.”
Annie turned her attention back to the TV monitor near her, as she used the force to sense the emotion states of River and Lee.
A few seconds later, while staring at the monitor, Annie stated, “Well, River is annoyed at being put into the situation she finds herself in.”
Aeryn commented, “So, she does not want to play this game. Intriguing.”
Annie responded, “I would guess that would be the case. Or, she is just annoyed by the entire situation, for some reason.”
Akira asked, “What about, Lee?”
Annie stated, “Well... Lee, is just concerned at the situation he is in.”
Violin said, “That is completely reasonable.”
Suddenly, both River and Lee turned to stare at the camera that was piping the feed into the TVs on the gaming floor.
Akira immediately quit sensing the two people, upstairs, as she commented, “I think they both just sensed you.”
Annie replied, “I agree.”
With Annie no long trying to sense River and Lee, a few seconds later, both players turned back to look at their cards.
Annie stated, “I can understand River sensing me. But, how could a normal person like Lee, sense me?”
Natsuru explained, “Lee is not normal... Well, he is more normal than us. But, he has precognitive abilities. Very sharp precognitive abilities.”
Annie turned to Natsuru, as she inquired, “How sharp?”
Natsuru answered, “From what Rock and Revy tell me, he is as good with his precognitive abilities, in dealing with cards, as you are with your lightsaber.”
Annie smiled, as she said, “That is sharp. This should be an interesting game.”
Ranma pointed out, “Nah. Lee knows that River is a telepath and a genius. We personally told him that. And he believed us. Lee will not use his precognition on her.”
Annie complimented, “Smart man.”
Ranma agreed, “Quite.”
Violin said, “Well ladies, let's see what happens next.”
The women turned back to look at the nearby TV, showing the poker game.
(_)
Nearby, as Chang, Revy, and Rock, started at the TV, they had seen River and Lee look into the camera.
While none of them commented on it. Chang thought, 'I wonder why River and Lee stared into the camera at the same time?... Well, it doesn't matter.'
(_)
At the moment, in game room, both River and Lee look back at their cards.
Faye noticed that both her players had suddenly turned to look at the same camera, at the same time. With them turning back to their cards, at the same time.
Faye asked, “What was with the staring at the camera?”
River did not look up from her cards, as she said, “Someone was sensing us.”
Lee looked at his cards, as he inquired, “Ever heard the concept of knowing when someone is staring at you?”
With River present, Lee forced himself to not think about who it could be.
Faye replied, “Yes.”
Lee said, “Same concept.”
Faye commented, “Oh. Well, let us continued with this game. Shall we?”
River saw Lee's five chip raise, as she placed eight chips. She said, “I will see your raise, and raise you thirty thousand.”
Lee tossed eight chips, as he said, “Call.”
River and Lee showed their cards.
And River beat Lee's straight, with her flush of hearts, which was five cards of all the same type.
Faye collected the cards, as River collected her winnings.
Lee thought, 'Ouch. By losing a hundred and thirty thousand in that hand, I just lost all my gains, and went into the hole. Still, this is a good time to talk to, River.'
As Faye shuffled the cards, Lee looked over at River. A second later, their eyes met.
Lee thought, 'River. I know you are a telepath. And I know you are reading my mind. So, I figured, let's talk in private, for a minute. Given everyone is watching, and listening, to this is a poker game, if we make any body movements, facial expressions, or even blinking, about this situation, it will cause those viewing us to wonder what is going on. But, I figure eye movement will not be noticed. So, I need to ask you some questions. If you want, please use your eyes to answer yes or no. Does this work for you?'
River moved her eyes up and down in a, yes, answer.
Lee thought, 'Good. First, thank you for clearly not using her telepathic abilities to cheat. And you have a good poker face.'
River smiled.
Lee thought, 'I will take that smile as meaning, both you're welcome. And thank you. Now, my first question is, did you want to play me in this poker game?'
River moved her eyes side to side, in a, no, answer.
Lee thought, 'So, Chang put you up to this?'
River used her eyes to move up and down, in a, yes, answer.
Lee thought, 'Well, I am in a similar boat. Revy, and Chang, both put me up to this, as well.'
River rolled her eyes. She then looked back at Lee.
Lee thought, 'Yea. Exactly. And to think we do not even get anything from this, while everyone else profits from our efforts. Even if it is just for entertainment. Though, I would guess a lot of people are betting on us, downstairs.'
River raised her eyes, up and down, in a, yes, nod.
Lee thought, 'River, I have an offer for you. You likely already have found out I am precognitive. Though, I am trying not to use my abilities in this game. And you are telepath. How about we both do our best not use our abilities for the rest of the game? And no card counting. Because I really want to see how good a poker player you really are. Sound fair to you?'
River grinned.
Lee returned River's smile, as he thought, 'I will take that as a, yes. May the best person win.'
Lee saw that River's smile widened ever so slightly, by his polite gesture.
By then, Faye has started handing them their cards.
A few minutes later, Lee won the current hand of cards.
(_)
For the next two hours, River and Lee played cards. With both of them matching each other in wins, and losses.
Both of them kept their promises, not to use their more interesting abilities in their poker game against each other.
Though, neither were betting large amounts of chips in their game. With only a few raises in the betting pool. Both players knew better than than to risk more than they had to. And they realized it was a game of patience.
Fortunately, during those few hours, Lee was able to win back the chips he had lost, and both of them were pretty even in chips, by the time lunch rolled around, at twelve noon.
Around fifteen minutes earlier, at eleven forty-five AM, according to Lee's digital wrist watch, both of them, along with Faye, gave their meal orders, from a waitress that came by,
While both players continued to drink lemonade, River ordered grilled chicken alfredo pasta, and Lee had a chicken caesar salad.
Lee found the salad was good, but not great.
On the other hand, Faye had a glass of soda, with a hamburger and fries.
After the three adults finished eating, they continued their game, at exactly twelve thirty PM.
And as the hours passed, the two players continued their game. Their fortunes went up and down, with the chips going back and forth between each other. With neither player giving any headway to the other.
(_)
During the second ten minute break, after lunch, Lee went in the large men's restroom in the floor. And he was the only one in the room.
Lee looked at his wrist watch, which he rarely did during the game.
Lee thought, 'It is three forty-seven PM.'
After using one of the urinals to relieve himself. He zipped up his pants. He then washed hands in a sink, using some liquid soap, from a nearby liquid soap dispenser, on the wall. Next, he dried his hands with some paper towels, from a paper towel dispenser on the wall, near the door to the room.
When Lee's hands were dry, he wadded up the paper towels in his hands, and he dropped them into an open waste paper trash can, with plastic bag liner. The trash can was on the floor, right below the paper towel dispenser.
Lee walked back to the sink. He stood in front of the sink he was used, as he stared at his own face, with his hat and shades on, in the large wall mirror above the sinks.
He was deep in thought at how he got into this situation.
Lee though, 'I am breaking even at the moment. But, for how long? I am an amateur playing a professional game with a genius, and a dealer with a questionable background. Still, when it comes to using psychic abilities, and card counting, River had clearly kept her end of the deal. And so have I. Though, I have got to also keep an eye on Faye, while not appearing to be card counting.'
'Even though I do not know how to card count. In a situation such as this, the appearance of impropriety can be as risky as committing the very impropriety one is accused of committing.'
Suddenly the door open to the restroom opens, and he heard a vaguely familiar voice say, in english, “Two minutes till the game restarts.”
Lee turned to his left, to look over at saw that two men had entered the washroom. The two men were Malcolm Reynolds and Jayne Cobb. Both men were wearing black business suits. And Lee could tell that they also had pistols in shoulder holsters.
Lee did not even bad an eye, as he looked back at the mirror.
Mal noticed this, as he asked, in english, “Is there are problem?”
Lee continued to look at his reflected in the mirror, as he coyly answered, “I am just asking myself how I got here.”
Mal commented, “I ask myself that question everyday, and the answer is never good.”
Lee thought, 'Mal, as the writer, I am sure you probably blame me for a number of your problems. And you would be right. Still, I gave you, and your friends, a complete fresh start in another reality, after every place you knew was literally destroyed in your reality.'
'Why do I have to deal with so many ungrateful bastards and bitches?... Well, that is not fair to them. I did toy with there lives And there is that whole gender bending, and longevity, issues. Still, it is best that I talk to them. Before they grow concerned with me.'
Lee looked over at them, as he said, “You are not the only one that asks that question every day. And I didn't want to be here, in the first place.”
Jayne commented, in english, “If you did not, then why are you here?”
Lee stated, “I got dragged into this by a crazy redhead, and if you work here, your boss.”
Mal smiled, as he commented, “Been there. Done that. I can sympathize.”
Lee guessed, “Let me guess. The redhead I am playing against?”
Mal said, “Yep. Though, she had brown hair, to being with.”
Lee thought, 'Thanks Mal, for telling me that. Now, I don't have to worry about slipping up on that. But, let us confirm the dye job.' He asked, “Let me guess. She dyes it?”
Mal answered, “Yes.”
Lee replied, “That figures.”
Mal commented, “No kidding.”
Jayne smirked, as he stated, “You know? You are lucky you are doing this well, so far.”
Lee inquired, “Why is that? I have held my own, so far.”
Jayne said, “If she wasn't playing with you, it would be over, by now?”
Lee thought, 'I hate to admit it. But, Jayne is right. And both Mal and Jayne are very sharp. It is best I do not say things as hard facts.' He inquired, “Are you talking about the rumor that the girls at the other hotel told me? That River was a genius and a telepath?”
Jayne chuckled. He said, “That is no rumor. It is a fact. And that is the least interesting thing about her.”
Lee commented, “Well, I don't doubt she is a genius. And I am open to the possibility of telepathy existing.”
Mal said, “I am sure. I heard you are precognitive.”
Lee defended himself, “Yes. And before you ask. I would never cheat with the stakes so high. Especially, given that you say she is a telepath. I have been playing it straight because I believe in winning honestly.”
Mel responded, “That is respectable.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Jayne commented, “Still, when River starts getting serious, you are screwed.”
Lee realized, as he replied, “Yea. If what you are saying is true, then I am probably screwed.”
Lee started chuckling, as he started to realize something, while he thought, 'I am screwed. It doesn't matter if they learn I am the writer, or not. I am likely not going to walk out of the casino alive.'
Jayne said, with concern in his tone of voice, “You sound like a man laughing at his own execution. That is not a good sign for you continued sanity.”
Lee explained, “That is because I am. The money I am gambling with is this crazy redhead's money. Her name is Revy. If I lose, she is going to kill me. If I win, Chang, on principle, is going to kill me. That is not counting the others that may lose money, depending on if I win, or lose. Including the police. No matter if I win or lose, I am not walking out of this casino alive.”
Jayne pointed out, “I heard you were the one to called in the police?”
Lee admitted, “It seemed like a good idea at the time.”
Mal stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Mister Lee. I am the chief of security here. If you play the rest of this game honestly, I promise that you will make it out of this building alive. Though, beyond this building is not my concern.”
Lee inwardly smiled, as Mal and Jayne continued talking to him.
Though, Lee was to caught in his own thoughts, to listen to them. As Lee just stared blankly towards the two men, Lee thought, 'Malcolm only promises something when he means it. And having them be security makes sense in how Chang fit the Mal and his friends fit into the employment chain here. Well, at least Mal, Jayne, and Zoe. I am sure Zoe is also a lieutenant in Mal's security force. Chang probably placed the others in jobs they would be fine with.'
'It is academic to guess that Simon is the casino's doctor. His set up here is likely better than at the local hospital.'
'Kaylee likely is the person responsible for maintenance on the local automobiles, electrical and computer systems in this building. She probably enjoys working on classic cars and such. That engineering woman also did appreciate the classics of anything mechanical in nature. From starships to intimate equipment. I cannot say that about many people.'
'And I checked with the girls. This place has a spa area. It is likely that Inara is the manager of the spa area. And she is also probably the chief masseuse for the casino. That would be good use of her companion skills, in profession that Inara, Mal, Chang could agree would be fine with all of them.'
'On a similar matter. When it comes to call girls, I would not be surprised, with Rowan being here. I am not sure either way. But, if Rowan is here, Chang would have Rowan handle that end of the equation.'
'And with if Chang was to create a whorehouse, it would be elsewhere on the island, away from the casino, and unwanted attention. Though, with Chang's creativeness, he is probably going to supply instant packets from Jusenkyo, for clients and employees to choose genders, per job, at their whorehouse.'
'With Chang, and perhaps Rowan. If Rowan is here. Likely charging a small fortune for their customers. Thus bringing very interesting, rich, and risk taking people to this island. The type of people that casinos make their fortunes from. So, once they are through at the whorehouse, the call girls will entice their customers to check out Chang's casino.'
'Oh my, Chang is as much a genius, in his own way, as River. They make a better couple than I realized. And I wrote them to be a couple.'
'And speaking of River. I don't know how she fits into the casino. Though, I doubt she works in the criminal area of Chang's employment. She never wanted to be an assassin. She just likes to do her own thing. And occasionally she is brought in when they need to know if someone is telling the truth.'
'On that thought. If Faye is here. It is a good bet that Spike and Jet are here. And I am sure that Faye is likely dealer on the game floor.'
'Though, I wonder how Spike and Jet fit in this place. They are likely the pit bosses for this casino. Or, at least two of them. And I am sure Julia is around here, somewhere. Also, there could be others here. So, this place is likely just full of surprises. Surprises that it would be best for myself to leave alone.'
Lee's attention was brought back to reality, as Jayne mentioned, “And you do have a car. We will even help give you a five minute head start.”
Lee thought, 'They must be talking about a possible escape plan, from the casino. If I need it. Even though I did not hear most of it. I should thank them, anyway.'
Lee smiled, as he extended his right hand towards the two men.
Mal took a few steps forward, closer to Lee. While Jayne stayed where he was.
Lee noticed this. He looked Mal in his eyes, as he said, “Thank you. I appreciate it.”
Mal shook Lee's hand with his own right hand.
Both men had a firm grip in their handshake.
Lee thought, 'This is a good sign. And it means he is serious.'
At the same time, Mal thought, 'This man has a good handshake. He is on the level... Though, something is not right with his hand...' Mal looked closer at Lee's face, as he continued his thoughts, 'And his face...'
A second later, Mal lightly gripped Lee's right wrist with his left hand.
Lee did not show it on the outside, though he thought, with concern, 'What the?...'
A few seconds later, Mal let go of Lee's right wrist, and right hand.
Lee though, with relief, 'He let go. So, it does not matter. Now, for me to officially get to know them.' He said, “I think we haven't been formally introduced. I am J. D. Lee.”
Mal answered, “I am Security Chief Malcolm Reynolds, and this is one of my lieutenants, Jayne Cobb.”
Lee thought, 'So, Jayne is not at the bottom of the food chain in the security of this casino. I am glad to hear that.' He greeted them, “It is nice to meet you, Mister Reynolds, and Mister Cobb.”
Jayne joked, “What does J.D. stand for? John Doe?”
Lee did not even react, as he lied, “Actually, my full name is Jefferson Davis Lee.” The two gave him confused looked. Lee continued, “Trust me. It is better if I just use my last name, Lee. Anyway, thank you for clearing up a few things.” He mentally added, 'Jayne, you really are sharper than most people give you credit for. I am glad I noticed that when I wrote about all of you.'
Mal responded, “You are welcome. And for the record, from the way River has been looking at you. I think she likes you.”
Lee lightly chuckled. He then stated, “Honestly. I saw River at that talent contest, at the Devil's Hotel. She did a wonderful fire dance, and in doing so, showed she was dangerous. And on a daily basis, I have to deal with too many dangerous women as is. I have no interest in adding a redhead, who happens to be the local casino owner's girlfriend, to that list.”
Mal let out a small laugh. He smiled, as he said, “I fully believe you.”
Jayne commented, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to exit the conversation.' He commented, “Thanks for the talk, but I better get back to the game.”
Lee left the room.
After the door closed behind Lee, Jayne turned to Mal, as he stated, “He doesn't look like much, captain. Or, should I start calling you, chief?”
Mal turned to Jayne, as he explained, “Either way is fine. Though, the reason Lee doesn't look like much is because Lee is physically ill. When I gripped his hand, and arm, just now, there was less tissue than should have been there. Also, his cheek bones are slightly more exposed on his face than they should be. Also, the way his clothes hang off of him shows that his pelvic bones are slightly exposed. He is very sick. He maybe dying. And I think he knows it.”
Jayne commented, “It sounds like Lee has no luck at all.”
Mal said, “I agree.”
The two men then turned around, left the men's restroom, and head down the hallway, to carry out their duties, as members of the security team for the casino.
(_)
A minute later, Lee returned to the game room, and sat down in his chair.
River and Faye were already there, in their seats. Lee noticed that someone had already refilled their glasses. With River and his lemonade, and Faye's soda.
For the next half an hour, three adults only focused on the game, with Lee gaining about a hundred thousand in chips, putting him currently at a million, seventy thousand.
Lee had just won the last hand.
Then, as Faye shuffled the deck of cards, to give River and Lee their next hand, River spoke in chinese, “I have a question for you, Lee.”
Lee thought, 'Oh damn. River has just changed the game. And I am going to have to play along, and reveal my talents, to keep her happy.” He then saw River grin. Lee mentally added, 'Yea. River, I know you are reading my thoughts.'
Lee calmly inquired, in chinese. “What is your question?”
River answered, “I was wondering what your opinion was of the communist, Mao Tse-tung, was?”
Lee stated, “He was a brutal tyrant. Why do you ask?”
River commented, “Interesting. I was taught that Mao brought meaningful reforms to China that made it an economic power in the world.”
Lee explained, “Actually, it is more of the reverse. Mao only allowed those chinese, whom were totally loyal to him, to have food, and eat. He is responsible for overseeing the deaths of tens of millions of people. The reforms you are talking about happened after his death.”
“These reforms including instituting the concept of the, iron rice bowl. Cradle to grave policies on jobs and services. This was later changed in the mid to late nineteen nineties.'
“These reforms ran counter to Mao's personal beliefs. Though, as those reforms bore fruit, given the cult of personality the party leaders surrounded Mao with, the party leaders created propaganda that falsely claimed that the reforms were from Mao's teachings.”
River responded, “Thank you. That also answers some other questions I have.”
Lee stated, in english, “You're welcome. Though, Mao was correct in one statement. All power does flow through the barrel of a gun.”
River shrugged, as she replied, “Perhaps.”
(_)
In the casino restaurant, among the customers, eight women in the two window booths were watching as the poker game, as it took a strange turn.
Shenhua was translating for them.
Benny asked, “Where did Lee learn Chinese?”
Janet commented, “I don't know. But, at this point, I think there is obvious that there is more to him, than he lets on. He may not be the writer. But, he is not the idiot that he pretends to me.”
Eda said, “Yea. He would make one hell of a spy.”
Yolanda stated, “Yes. He does know how to keep a secret.” She thought, 'Or, secrets.'
Dutch said, “Given all that has happened today, I am not surprised that he knows chinese.” She mentally added, 'And Lee has a firm grasp of Mao.'
Shenhua complimented, “And his grasp of my native language is pretty good.”
Dutch thought, 'Yes. And for once, I am glad you are here, Shenhua. I know Chinese, but I would rather those outside my family did not know that. It would raise too many questions.'
Janet suggested, “It would be a wise idea to find out where he learned to speak that language, and what other secrets he has.”
Shenhua agreed, “Yes. It would be a good idea to learn where he gained such a wonderful skill.” She thought, 'And I want to know why he is speaking my own Taiwanese dialectic of my own language. Also, he seems to share my people's dislike for communism.'
Lotton commented, “That is easier said, than done. If he loses, Revy might kill him. Either he will disappear, or be in traction. If he wins, it would be belligerent for us to ask him questions, given he just won a million dollars for our friends, in a game he did not want to play in the first place.”
Sawyer cracked a grin, as she said, “Well... When you put it that way. We will be gentle.”
All eight women then began laughing, for a few seconds.
(_)
In the gaming floor, Revy, Rock, and Chang were sitting at a table, on the gaming floor, as they watch poker game.
The three adults sat beside each other. Rock sat in the middle. Chang sat to Rock's left side. And Revy sat to Rock's right side.
Each of them had a bottle of beer sitting in front of them, at their table.
Chang was translating what River and Lee were saying.
While Chang did so, he thought, 'Lee's dialect is very similar to Shenhua's. I need to find out why this is the case. Later on. When the game is over. And I have more time to look into Lee's background, and history. Also, it would likely help to review his time in my casinos. And not just at this poker game. I have a feeling he has more important secrets, than humor and language skills.'
As Chang took a quick break in his translation, Revy commented, “Thank you, Chang. And Lee is right. All power does flow through the barrel of a gun.”
Rock said, “That depends on how you define what power is.”
Revy replied, “It figures you would say that.”
Chang grin, as watching to two loves debate with each other. But, Chang did not feel like an argument. So, Chang commented, “You are both right. And let us leave it at that.”
Rock replied, “I agree.”
Revy said, “I can go along with that.”
(_)
Nearby, at the penny slot machines, another group of women were having fun. Aeryn, Violin, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were sitting at individual slot machines, playing them, as they drink bottles of beer.
Meanwhile Annie was on duty, so she just stood by them, instead of joining on her friends' fun.
Though, all six women were having a great time as they also watch the poker game, thanks to the translator microbes in her brain, Aeryn translated what the two players said, into english. A language that Aeryn learned the old fashioned way, decades ago.
Ranma commented, “Lee is full of surprises...” Ranma then realized what she said. She turned to Annie, as she commented, “Sorry, Annie. I am not trying to make a joke.”
Annie turned to Ranma, as she shrugged. She responded, “I know. And you are right. Lee is clearly more the foolhardy, than the fool... I might want to meet him, sometime. But, not today. Playing River, at such high stakes against him, is more than enough stress for anyone.”
Ranma said, “I fully agree.”
(_)
In the poker room, River said, in spanish, “I have another question?
Lee said, in spanish, “And what are you interested in, this time?”
River inquired, “What is you opinion of Che Guevara?”
Lee answered, “I do not have much to say about him, other than, unlike others, it is report that he faced death with courage and humility, that was lacking in many of his contemporaries. In the end, he stated that those whom were about to kill him, that they were only killing a man.”
River commented, “That is an interesting statement to make when one faces death.”
Lee agreed, “That it is.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Chang and Rock both used their limited knowledge of spanish to partly translate what the two are talking about, for each other, and Revy.
Nearby, at the penny slot machines, Aeryn translates for her group.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the restaurant, Sawyer and Dutch translated the spanish, into english, for their group.
Benny asked, “Where did you two learn spanish from?”
Dutch answered, “I took a course, while back on her island. I figured it won't hurt.”
Sawyer stated, “I grew up in Texas. And a mexican family I know, that I was friends with, taught me.”
Benny commented, “Learn something new, every day.”
(_)
Back in the poker room, River said, in japanese, “I also would like to talk to you about Japan.”
Lee complained, in english, “This game is getting old. And we should to go back to playing poker.” He mentally added, 'I have a good idea that you will want to talk about communism dealing with Japan, in japanese. And we are not going to talk about that group, and that old enemy of the state man, in public, with an audience.'
River shrugged, as she said, in english, “I see your point.”
Lee and River then picked up their cards, and looked at them.
Lee saw that he had a pair of fives.
Since Lee won the last hand, he place the first bet, for the current hand. He threw in two chips, as he stated, in english, “Let's start simple. With twenty thousand.”
River tossed in two chips, as she said, “I will see you bet.”
The two then continued their game.
In the end, Lee won that hand. But, River won the next two hands.
(_)
In the restaurant, Benny and Janet translated the japanese to english.
Yolanda inquired, “Where did you to learn japanese?”
Benny answered, “Rock taught us.”
Janet finished for her spouse, “We need something to pass the time, on our island. Also, Rock taught Dutch, Revy, and the girls how to speak, read, and write japanese.”
Yolanda verbally mused, “Interesting.” Yolanda then thought about the implications of Benny, Janet, and Dutch's comments. And on the possibilities of what else they and their family learned while on their tropical island.
(_)
Near the slot machines, on the gaming floor, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, and Violin, all knew japanese. Aeryn's translator microbes translated for her. And Annie had to force to use to understand what River was asking.
Violin said, “I guess Lee got tired of this game.”
Aeryn stated, “Yes. He clearly wants to focus on the game instead.”
Akira pointed out, “The only likely reason Lee would play this language game was to keep River happy.”
Natsuru commented, “That is a good reason to play along.”
Ranma said, “Though, I think it is a good guess that River knew Lee's language skills from reading his mind. Though, she is clearly not taking advantage of using her telepathy to win the game. I do not know how she can be so selective in what she reads in a persons mind.
Annie explained, “For telepaths, being in a room with people, it like listening to conversations in the background. A telepath can tune out most of it. But, not all of it. And these thoughts are usually only surface thoughts. Still, it is clear that River is not using her abilities to cheat at play cards. I admired her for developing a sense of honor and fair play.”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. She is clearly being honorable in the game.”
Aeryn stated, “That is a good trait to have.”
Akira commented, “And given what we told Lee, I am sure he realizes that River is playing fair.”
Natsuru agreed, “True. And Lee always preferred to play fair, as well.”
Violin commented, “Then, this game is more interesting than we thought it would be.”
(_)
At their table, Chang was pleasantly surprised that, instead of Rock, Revy was the one translating the japanese for him.
As soon as Revy finished, Chang complimented, “Nice job, Revy. I take it that Rock taught you.”
Revy smiled, as she said, “Yea. Rock is a good teacher.”
Rock grinned as well, while she shrugged. She turned to Revy, as she commented, “You were a surprisingly patient student.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she happily replied, “Thank you, Rock.”
Chang commented, “Yes. I have found Revy here to be an excellent student. I learned this when I taught her how to fight with two pistols.” He mentally added, 'Revy can be very patient when she wants to be. Like, when she wanted me to teach her the proper ways to use guns, and fight. She just prefers to be impatient in her day to day life.'
Revy stated, “I have always found that it easy to learn, when I am interesting in something. It is unfortunate, that those around me, when I was kid, thought it would be better, if I suffered.”
Chang said, “Mores the pity.”
(_)
Elsewhere, on the game floor, Pedro was sitting at his table, with some of his officers, as he had heard the entire multilingual conversation. He grimly thought, 'I may not know chinese. But, I do know spanish. And I know a little japanese. Now, why would Lee hide the fact that he knows spanish from me, and other people?...'
'Of course. Because everyone when everyone here meets him. They would just assume he is a dumb american. Though, I have long since learned that he is anything but that. And those people would speak spanish in front of him, thinking he would not understand them. And in doing so, that would give him an edge.'
'I might have done the same thing in his position. Still, where did he learn those languages from? And so quickly? I am fairly sure he did not know those languages when he first got here. So, where, and when, did he learn them? And how did he do it so quickly? To be that fluent in in each of those languages requires several months, to years, of learning and experience. Where did he find the time to do all this?'
'I will have to find out the answers to my questions, at our next evening meeting. And I get a feeling that he will have one hell of answer.'
(_)
Over the next forty five minutes, in the penthouse poker room, River and Lee played normally, at their game of poker room.
Currently, there was already fifty thousand in the pot, from Lee's chips. And another fifty thousand, from River's chips.
River then pushed over half her chips, as she stated, “I will raise you five hundred thousand.”
Without batting an eye, Lee lowered his cards onto the table, face down, as he calmly stated, “I fold.”
Lee's actions took River by surprise. River asked, in a slightly stunned tone of voice, “Huh?”
Lee looked at River, as he explained, “River, this isn't a movie. If you want your want this money, you are going to have to work at it.”
From the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Faye snicker.
Lee thought, 'Yea, Faye. You would find this funny. Considering you understand the gambling mentality. Still, it is better to lose fifty thousand in one hand, than risk losing five hundred thousand. I can regain that in the next half hour, without a problem.'
River shrugged, as she casually replied, “Fine.” She handed Faye her cards. After which, she collected her winnings.
Faye also picked up Lee's cards, as she then began to reshuffle the deck, for the next hand.
(_)
In the casino restaurant, Dutch stated, “That man is no fool.”
The other seven women, with her, nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
(_)
At the slot machines, the six women group all snickered.
Akira complimented, “I will say this. Lee knows better than to be cliche.”
Annie said, “And River should know better than to take such a stupid risk.”
Aeryn pointed out, “It is only a risk, if she was bluffing.”
Natsuru agreed, “That is a good point.”
(_)
At a nearby table, Pedro was impressed with Lee folding his hand, as such a large bet. Though, Pedro thought, with concern, 'Smart play, Lee. River is too intelligent to call that large a bluff. Because, she might not be bluffing. And that would be a major hit to you reserves. We both know the stakes are to high for you, to roll the dice on you life, like that. If River loses, she has nothing really to fear. But, if you lose, you likely lose your life. If you are lucky.'
(_)
At another table, Chang commented, “Lee is smarter than he looks.”
Revy stated, “I don't understand this. All Lee has been doing is placing small bets. He hasn't gone for the big bets. The fun bets.”
Chang explained, “The reason being, Revy, is that Lee probably feels your proverbial vices, that you call your hands, around his balls. And he knows if he screws up, you are going to squeeze, hard”
Revy conceded, “You have a point there.”
Rock said, “Lee is clearly playing the long game. He knows what he is doing. He plans to win his victory by inches. Instead of risking a jump, and falling on his face. Considering it is our money he is gambling with, we should be happy he is winning this way.”
Revy agreed, “You are right about that. Though, I thought Lee would be a bit more of a risk taker.”
Chang smirked, “Well, let us be honest. He was pressed into playing a poker game by a violent woman, and a casino owner. Us. Against someone he knows is a telepathic genius, with money that is not his own. A lot of money. He knows he is already being forced to take a big risk, he is not going to push his luck.”
Rock asked, “Perhaps. Still, I was wondering. How experienced is River with poker?”
Chang answered, “Not as much as I apparently thought she was. I admit this was an oversight on my part. Though, now that I think about it, not many people would play poker with her. Except for Annie, Arcee, Ed, and myself.”
Rock replied, “That must have made for an interesting game.”
Chang stated, “Oh yea. Especially, when they cheated. Three of them can count cards for up to eight decks at once. And Annie used the force. I just shuffled, and dealt the cards, while having a front row seat to the entertainment.”
Rock requested, “You will have to tell us about it sometime.”
Revy commented, with interest in her tone of voice, “Oh yes. I would like to hear about that, as well.”
Chang said, “I will. But, not today.”
Revy inquired, “Okay. So, is that how you got Annie to work for you?”
Chang explained, “Partly. After those bikini parties, and what happened in that final story, Annie, River, and Ed, became good friends. And all three have a decent relationship with Arcee. It is more of a technological genius club for those four. So, having River help with convincing Annie to take my job offer got my foot in the door. The rest is the sizable, monthly salary I am paying her. And it is in gold and treasure. She insisted on it not being cash.”
Rock complimented, “Annie was also smart.”
Revy said, “I agree.”
Chang stated, “I know. And I don't blame her either for that.” He thought, 'Considering that I pay my staff in similar ways, either once, or twice, a month. Though, not at the amounts I am paying Annie, every month.'
Revy commented, “Still, those must be sizable payments.”
Chang answered, “They are. But, they are worth it.” He smirked, towards Rock and Revy, as he continued, “How many people in the multiverse can claim to have gray force using master on retainer?”
Revy let out a small chuckle. She then stated, “Good point. Still, if River was using her telepathy, this game would be over.”
Chang mentioned, “River like challenges. She may not be using her telepathy because she honestly wants to know which one of them is the better player... And there is also the fact that she did not want to play this game in the first place.”
Rock inquired, with interest in her tone of voice, “That is interesting. So, how did you get her to do it?”
Chang stated, “I told her that either she, or Annie, would be playing, Lee.”
Revy commented, “Siccing Vader on Lee. Even I'd say that would be mean.”
Rock said, “You know. If it was Annie, and Lee found out that she was once Vader. And he was being forced to face her, for an extended period of time. He might try to make a run for it.”
Revy said, “It that case. I wouldn't hold it against him. In his place, I would likely do that say.”
Chang conceded, “Neither would I. Though, I would have him brought back to play. I would like to see what two precognitive psychics, playing against each, other would be like.”
Rock commented, “Actually, that might backfire. It would get to the point that both players would start folding before the first bet is even placed.”
Chang thought about what Rock said for a few seconds. He then agreed, “That is a good point.”
All three of them then turned back to watching the nearby TV, in front of them, that showed the video and audio feeds of the poker game.
(_)
The poker game continued normally, for a few more hours, until it was six PM, and time for dinner.
By then, River was up by a hundred of fifty thousand, making her total being on million, one hundred and ten thousand in chips.
Just like before, a waitress came and took their orders, fifteen minutes beforehand, a
While Lee and River continued to have some lemonade, Faye drank her soda.
River had a cobb salad, with ranch dressing.
Faye had a steak and potato.
Lee had a club sandwich and potato chips, which he found to be tasty.
When dinner came, by a food car, pushed by a female bellhop, in uniform. Some of Chang's security members. Women in black suits. Came into the poker room.
They turned on the yellow ceiling lights. And they set the lighting to a comfortable setting.
Also, the women pulls the rope, from the sides of the outer wall of windows, to pull the red velvet curtains, from both sides of the room, closed. To where the curtains met each other, in the center of the outer wall, with them overlapping by around six inches, to prevent any gaps through the curtains.
By closing the curtains, this allowed the occupants in the room to have some privacy, from the outside, before night fully overtook the island.
When the black suited women was finished, they left the room, just as the female bellhop served River, Faye, and Lee, their plates of food, and drinks.
The bellhop then joined the other women, as she turned around, and pushed her cart out of the room, and down the hallway, to the back elevator.
After River, Faye, and Lee, finished their dinner, another bellhop with a cart, collected their plates, and left. With the three occupants resuming their poker game, at six thirty PM.
Though, things started to take a turn for the worse for Lee, as he kept losing hand after hand.
While Lee kept the bets small. They slowly added up over time.
An hour and a half after dinner was over, at Eight PM, the first ten minute break was called, by a black suited security guard stopping by to inform them. With all three adults heading out of the room.
Lee headed for the men's restroom.
(_)
Five minutes later, at eight five PM, Lee finished in using the restroom, and he had just washed and dried his hands.
He then look at himself, again, in the large men's restroom mirror, above the sinks.
Lee held his hands on the top sides of the sink he was standing over, as he leaned towards the mirror. Though, he did not touch the mirror.
Lee thought, 'The cards just have no been with me, for the last few hours. I am down to just over two hundred thousand, and I do not know why? I have been doing everything right. But, something is off.'
'Is Faye helping River. Possible, but I am not seeing anything. Though, I have no been looking that closely at Faye's hands.'
'Also, why did River choose to talk to me in those three other languages?... Does she know about the time loop?... That could cause me trouble for me down the line. But, there is nothing I can do about it.'
'Still, I did have to cut her off, when she started using japanese. If Revy and the other women knew that I am fluent in japanese, they would quickly put two and two together, that I am the writer.'
'Yet. How could River know this? I believe her telepathy is passive, and deals with mostly surface scans. I know I have not thought about my language skills, nor the time loop, even once in her presence... Wait a minute... The woman's laugh behind the wall of Chang's office, yesterday. River was reading my mind... Is that possible... Yes. She powers work on proximity, not line of sight.'
'What was I think about, then?... Damn my memory is not perfect... That is why I write stuff down!... Though, I cannot risk doing that in this situation I am in, since coming to the island. Someone could my break into my room, search my stuff, and find anything that I may have written down.'
'Though, not that I think about what I was doing and thinking yesterday, in Chang's office. River likely knows that I know that Rock use to be a man. And that Chang can turn into a woman.'
'But, I did not think about the time loop, nor my language skills, nor that I am the writer that everyone is looking for. Though, she probably knows about all three, by now. Yet, I already planned for that. I just keep her happy, and there should not be any problems with her.'
'She likes to keep secrets, there is no reason she will not keep my secrets as long as I amuse her. Which, is what I have been doing. And my plan seems to be working.'
'Still, that does not answer the question of how she learned all this in the first place? Has she been able to become a skilled deep level telepath, to the point I could not tell her looking into my mind?... No... Everything I read about telepathy states that a deep level scan, like that, would be felt by the person having their mind scanned.'
'It is possible she could have been tailing me yesterday. Still, I did not think about my language skills, then.... Something here does not add up... But, given this is River I am thinking about, that is par for course with her...'
'Though, none of this matters, right now. What matters is winning the game, while keeping River happy. I have to clear my mind of all other things, or River will likely learn about those things, as well.'
'And I have to take a deep breath, let it out, and get back to the poker room, before I am late.'
Lee took a slow deep breath. He then slowly let it out, as he cleared his mind. After which, Lee leaned back up straight, and let go of the sink, with both his hands. He then turned, to his left, from the mirror, and exited the restroom, thought the hallway door.
As Lee made it into the hallway, he turned, and started walking down the hallway, towards the poker. Though, a few seconds later, Lee saw one of the asian female women, in a black business suit approach him, from in front of him, down the hallway.
The woman was holding out a cellphone.
As the woman came to within ten feet of Lee. Lee came to a stop. With the women stopping a few feet from him.
The two adults then looked at each other, as the woman calmly said, in english, “You have a phone call.” She then held out her right hand, she has been holding an open cellphone with.
Lee took the cellphone, while being careful not to close, it nor, press any of the button on it. When he has the cellphone in his right hand, he looked up at the women. He politely replied, “Thank you.”
The woman did not response. She just turned walked away.
While Lee watched the woman walk away, and turned the corner, he thought, T'hat was rude. Though, I do not have time to worry about the small stuff. Though, I must remember that this woman, and the other chinese women here, have been given the vat process, and the super-soldier serum. And they have enhanced senses, such as hearing, like Revy, and her group has. So, I must watch was I say.'
Lee then placed the phone to his ear, as he greeted, “Hello.”
Lee then heard a familiar male voice, on the other end of the wireless communications, say said, “Hey buddy. Long time, no see.”
Lee inquired, “Where have you been, Sam?”
Sam answered, “Busy. But, I got back just in time to watch you in your million dollar poker game.”
Lee questioned, “Good. So, how did you get them to contact me?”
Sam commented, “Cash goes a long way.”
Lee replied, “True. Where are you now, Sam?”
Sam stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Downstairs, at the bar, having a drink, while I watch you make a fool of yourself.”
Lee defended himself, “I think I have shown myself well in this game.”
Sam responded, with concern in his tone of voice, “For anyone else. Sure. But, from playing you for so long, I can tell that you are scared out your mind. What is it about that redheaded woman that terrifies you?”
Lee answered, “Too long a list to get into. But, the short version is that she is smarter, crazier, and more dangerous than Revy.”
Sam admitted, “Okay. That is scary. But, ask yourself this question. Right after the talent contest, you told me that you were dying of cancer. What could this woman do to you that is a worse death than that?”
Lee thought about Sam's comments for a few seconds. He then conceded, “You may have a point there.”
Sam stated, “Exactly. Show some courage. You have nothing to lose by doing so. And good luck man. Also, I don't think anyone else had caught on yet, but take a closer look at the way the dealer is dealing the cards. If you do, you will see what I mean.”
Lee replied, “Thanks. And I will.”
Lee closed the cellphone, and he set cellphone on a nearby table in the hallway, as he walked towards the game room.
(_)
Five minutes later, all three adults had returned to the poker room. After they sat at their places, Faye shuffled the deck, and dealt a new hand of cards, as Lee and River resumed their game.
When Faye finished dealing the cards, both players looked at their cards.
Lee maintained his poker mask, as he saw that again, he had nothing.
Since River won the last round, before they took their break, it was River's turn to place the bet.
River threw in one chip, as she said, “I will start the ten thousand.”
Lee threw a chip in, as he replied, “I will see that ten thousand.”
Both players traded in three cards.
Lee watched as Faye handed him his three cards first, from the top of the deck. Lee quickly looked at them, as he saw that he still had nothing.
Lee then looked back down, to his right side, as he watched Faye dealt out River's next three cards. And he saw Faye pull the first card, from the bottom of the deck.
Lee thought, 'Damn! Sam was right. Faye is cheating! Considering that was a casino phone, with the line likely being monitored, he could not tell me outright. But, his warning was close enough.'
Lee then became very angry, with him barely able to maintain his poker face, as he continued his thoughts, 'That bitch! How does she toy with my life with so little disregard to my safety. Even Revy, and Chang were discreet in their threats against me. On the other hand, this woman is doing this on camera, and in public.'
(_)
As Faye tossed River her third card, suddenly, the card was nailed to the table by another card, which was standing on its edge. The top card had been embedded into both the red cloth, and the wooden table, under the other card.
From the angle of the card, to Faye's position at the table, Faye saw that the card that was standing on its side was the Jack of Diamonds.
Faye looked over at Lee, and she saw he had only four cards in his hand, where five cards should be.
Faye thought, 'Lee actually threw his card line a knife, into the table. I thought that card tricks like that were a myth.'
(_)
On the gaming floor, everyone was surprised and shocked at what Lee had just done.
Revy and Rock watched in disbelief, at what they had just seen on the video screen.
Meanwhile, Chang was impressed with what Lee has just done with his card. He grinned, as he thought, 'Now, that takes talent.'
Revy turned to Rock, as she asked, in slight disbelief, “Rock, when did Lee become a badass?”
Rock looked at Revy, as she responded, “I don't know. But, where the hell did Lee learn to do that?”
Chang complimented, “Well, wherever he learned to do that, it is one hell of card trick.” He mentally added, 'Yesterday, after Lee was patted down. After he, Revy and Rock, were in the elevator. The guards there called me. They informed me that Lee had a deck of cards with him. A deck he had when I met him. No wonder he didn't complain about the pat down. He knew that my guards would not think of a deck of cards as a weapon. I will have to inform them otherwise, later.'
(_)
At that moment, in the poker room, Faye continued to look at Lee. She then noticed Lee lips had curled into a feral, unhinged smile.
And at the distance Faye was at, with her enhanced sight, she could see Lee's eyes, though his shade. And those eyes promised murder for her.
Then, for a couple of seconds, Lee let out a very audible growl, that while the microphones in the room did not pick up, Faye's enhanced hearing did.
Faye thought, 'Oh crap. He caught me cheating, and he is pissed.'
Lee demanded, in a dangerous, low tone of voice, “I want a new dealer, and a new deck of cards. And I want it, now.”
River turned to Faye, as she stated, “I agree with Lee. We need a new deck, and a new dealer.”
Lee looked over at River, as he realized she had just read his mind. Lee also realized, that given the situation he was in, he was more upset, than he could afford himself to be. So, he immediately forced himself to come down.
(_)
On the gaming floor, Chang had heard both Lee and River's requests. He pulled out his cellphone, and he dialed a number. A second later, after the other end picked up, he said, to his subordinate on the other end, “Make it happen. Give them a new dealer, and a new deck. And kill the video-audio feed, until the change over happens.'
Chang then hung up. As he put away his cellphone, he thought, 'We need to keep this game moving. Before this delay causing problems on the gaming floor. Though, I am lucky that both Lee and River are professional enough to not openly accused Faye of cheating. Which I had Faye do. If they did, I would have to deal with a lot of angry customers.'
Chang turned to look at Revy, whom was still looking at the TV, with Rock. Chang continued his thoughts, 'With Revy in the front of the line. And even without her cutlasses, she can still be a very dangerous would to deal with.'
A few seconds later, the video and audio feed going from the TVs in the casino gaming floor, were cut off. With the TVs left on, showing silent, blank screens.
(_)
Inside the poker room, Lee heard a female voice from behind him, near the door, say, in english, “The cameras, and microphones, are turned off for the moment. And Chang stated that he wanted you, and the card deck, replaced.”
Faye looked over at the woman by the door, as she nodded. She then turned to the two players, as she said, “Well, see you two, later.” She the got up want walked towards the door.
Lee turned to looked at Faye, and the chinese woman in a business suit, as he barked, “No. This is not just going to be a trade out, without so much as an apology. This is low. Having a crooked dealer. It is not like I have enough problems to deal with. If I go down because of this dealer, I will not go down alone. I will make damn sure that Revy knows why, and who to blame. Remember, this is her money. Not mine.”
Faye turned to looked at Lee, as she thought, 'Oh crap. He is right.'
Lee continued, “You would have to be borderline suicidal to want do so open a con like that, against a violent lunatic, like Revy.”
Meanwhile, River had been paying attention to the conversation. She turned to Faye, as she stated, “Lee is right. It was unwise.”
Lee turned to River, as he stated, “How could you not say anything?”
River looked over at Lee, as she answered, “How would I do so without risking a riot downstairs?”
Lee was silent for a few seconds. He then conceded, “Good point. You are right. You are just lucky that my friend caught this on camera.”
River smiled, “I agree. It is fortunate for all of us.”
Lee then turned back around to see the other two women were gone. He mentally cursed, 'Cowards.'
River firmly stated, “That, they might be. But, I am not. Do you want divide up our chips, back to even numbers?”
Lee turned to face River. He sighed. He then firmly answered, “No. It will cause too many questions to be asked. And don't you dare let me win. That would be even worse. We will just play as is.”
River complimented, “You are better person than you admit to yourself.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
A minute later, Lee heard a female voice, from behind him say, in english, “I hope I did not take too long. Getting up here, from the gaming floor, takes a few minutes.”
Lee turned around, to see a pretty, athletic, twenty something, pale skinned woman, with a full head of black hair, which was cut short, close to the neckline. She wore a sharp, black business suit, and black dress shoes.
As the woman walked towards them, Lee saw she was also slightly above average height for a woman.
Lee kept his eyes on her the entire time, as she walked up to the table, and she sat down in Faye chair.
The woman requested, “Can I please have your cards?”
River and Lee handed the woman their cards.
The woman said, “Thank you.”
The woman then neatly stacked the cards together, and set the stack of cards, to her far right side, on the table.
Next, she pulled out a deck of cards from an interior coat pocket. She opened the cardboard box the cards were in, and she set that deck onto the table, face down. With her pocketing the box, back where she has been carrying her cards, in interior coat pocket.
Lee saw that the back of the cards were a different pattern than the cards Faye had.
Lee thought, 'Good. There is no chance the two stacks of cards can be mixed up.'
River commented, “I agree.”
The looked between Lee and River. The woman said, in a kind tone of voice, “I am, Jetta Black. And I will be your dealer now. The cameras with be back on, any second.”
Lee did not even blink an eye in response. Though, inwardly, he was shocked, as he thought, 'Jet?! As in Faye friend? The big guy? When did this happen?!... I guess he took Spike up on her offer.'
Lee then noticed that Jetta was completely human, as he continued his thoughts, 'She no longer has her cybernetic left arm, nor implant under her right eye.'
Lee turned to River. River was looking at him. She said, “Long story.”
Lee thought, 'Then, it is a question for another time.'
River just nodded once in agreement.
As Jetta began to shuffle her deck of cards, she stated, “Since the last hand was interrupted. And with only two chips on the table. We will just divided those to chips, and carry on as if the previous hand never happened.”
Lee and River both took a chip from the pot.
Jetta then finished shuffling her cards.
While dealing five cards to each player, Jetta asked, “Now, which one of you will place the first bet.”
Lee looked over at River, as he stated, “Ladies first.”
River smiled at Lee, in response.
Jetta said, “Then, River it is. And I so do admire keeping company with a gentleman.”
Lee turned to Jetta, as he responded, “Thank you.”
Jetta slightly nodded, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then turned to his cards, as he picked them up. He saw that he has the beginnings of a straight.
Lee thought, 'This is not much. But, I can work with it.'
River looked at her cards. She bet three chips.
Lee quickly matched River's three chips.
(_)
On the gaming floor, at their table, Change, Rock, and Revy watched the TV and speakers come back, to show the poker room, on the penthouse level, just before Jetta introduced herself.
Revy asked, “What just happened?”
Chang stated, “One of my employees became a little too ambitious, in her attempts to impress me.” He mentally added, 'I will leave out the fact that I will not punishe her. She was only following my orders. And instead, I will reward her loyalty.'
Revy turned to Chang, as she accused, “She helped River win all those chips. How dare you, Chang?”
Chang looked over at Revy and Rock, as he thought, 'Oh well. It looks like Revy caught me. Though, there is not much she can do at this point.' He shrugged, as he said, “I could not help myself.”
By then, Rock had turned to look at Chang, as well. Though, Rock did not say anything.
Revy stated, “Just be happy that even I can tell this game is not over. Or, I would be very unhappy with you, right now.”
Rock said, “Yes. The game is not over, yet. But, no more tricks, Chang.”
Chang replied, “There won't be.”
Revy said, “Good.”
(_)
In the poker room, with Lee no longer having to deal with crooked dealer, he started slowing gaining back his holdings.
Out of the next twenty hands, over the next hour, he won fifteen of those hands.
They were all small bets, of less than a hundred thousand. But, he was back up to nine hundred thousand, in no time.
Over the next two and a half hours, Lee's fortunes took a turned for the better, as he continued to climb in his winning.
And it was not because of any large bets. Lee was just playing the hands he was dealt better than River was doing.
As time went on, while Lee was just slowly gaining in chips, Lee noticed a flaw in River playing style. A flaw he was able to clear his mind about, while still using the flaw to his advantage.
That flaw being, when River folded, she usually did so, after the cards were replaced, with some of her money already in the pot. Meanwhile, Lee usually folded, at the beginning of the hand, before he putting money into the pot.
Due to this glaring error, and Lee's frugal nature in betting, Lee was inching his way to victory.
Until finally, River was left with only four chips.
Jetta reshuffled the cards, and dealt both of them their hands.
Since Lee won the last hand, it was his turned. He looked at River, as he thought, 'River, I know you are reading my mind. I could out bid you in the betting pool, and finally beat you that way. But, I want to win this in a fair, polite manner. So, let us play this hand out.'
Lee saw River just nod her eyes, in response.
Both player looked at their cards.
Lee saw he had three aces. He tossed one chip in, as he said, “I will start this hand with ten thousand.”
River tossed in her fourth to last chip, as she replied, “I will see that ten thousand.”
River discarded three cards, Lee discarded two cards.
After Jetta replaced all discards cards, Lee looked at his two knew cards. He saw that he now had four aces.
Lee tossed in three chips, as he stated, “I raise you thirty thousand.”
River tossed in her last three remaining chips, as she said, “I call.”
Both player revealed their cards.
River had a full house, of two queens, and three kings. But, Lee's four aces beat River's full house.
Jetta looked between at the two sets of cards, on the table. She turned turned to Lee, as she casually stated, “And with that, Lee is the winner.”
Lee did not reach for the chips in the pot. Instead, he slumped in his chair, as he let out a deep breath in relief. He thought, with relief, 'I am going to live.'
River giggled at little, from Lee's thoughts.
Lee looked over at River, as he reached into one of his pants pockets. He pulled out a single U.S. one dollar bill, and placed the dollar passed the betting pot, and on River's side of the table.
Lee stated, “I was taught to never leave a person completely busted at the poker table.”
River looked at Lee, as she smiled at him. She took the dollar, and pocketed. She then got up, and walked to her right, around the table, opposite to Jetta.
River came to a stop beside Lee, to Lee's left side. She leaned down, and whispered into Lee's left ear, “Thank you. And I will be seeing you later, Paul.”
Lee forced himself to not show any reaction to that name.
Lee then looked up, as he watched River leaned back up, casually walk behind him, and out of the room.
After River was gone, Jetta inquired, “What was that all about?”
Lee turned to the black haired woman, as he thought, 'Good. Jetta did not hear us.' He answered, “That girl loves her secrets.”
Jetta agreed, “Isn't that the truth.”
Lee inquired, “Do you have a cellphone on you?”
Jetta answered, “Yes.”
Lee requested, “Please, inform the valet service downstairs, to have my pink Cadillac ready at the front entrance. I will be down there in a minute.”
Jetta replied, “Sure.”
Lee complimented, “Thank you. I will see you, later. Also, you are a good dealer. I appreciate honesty, Jetta.”
Jetta replied, “Thank you. And have a pleasant night, Lee.”
Lee said, “You too.” He mentally added, 'I best get out of here, while the getting is good.'
Lee then got up. And he he briskly walked out of the room.
At the same time, Jetta pulled out her cellphone, as she dial the building extension number to the valet service.
As Lee entered the hallway, he did not see River anywhere.
Lee then realized, as he thought, 'Of course. Chang's apartment is up here. And she likely lives here. She probably ducked in home, because she did not want to have to deal with Revy's gloat. And I want to get out of here, for the same reasons.'
Lee then turned, and he started swiftly walking towards the door. As Lee walked, he glanced as his watch, to see that it was eleven forty seven PM.
Lee looked in front of him, while continuing to walk, as he thought, 'Nearly fourteen hours since this game started. And I am starting to feel it. I best get back to the Devil's Hotel, and get some sleep, before I am too tired to drive. I will celebrate tomorrow. Because, right now, I am to tired to celebrate my survival today.'
Just then, in front of him, Lee came up to a corner, and he watched as Revy and Rock turned the corner, and head right for him.
Lee did not react to them, as he continued walking toward them, and the nearby express elevator to the gaming floor.
Meanwhile, Revy was so ecstatic, and she ignored Lee, as she headed for passed him, towards the poker room. Rock followed behind.
As Lee passed by Rock, with neither of them stopping, Rock said, “Good job.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome. Enjoy your winnings.”
Lee then turned the corner, and he was out of sight of the two women.
A few seconds later, Lee made it to the elevator. He pressed the down arrow button. The doors opened. He walked inside. And the doors close. With the express elevator then heading down to the ground floor.
(_)
While Lee rode the elevator down, Revy, walked into the poker game room, with Rock right behind her.
Rock then watched as Revy rushes to the table. When she reached the table, she leaned over the table, and she hugged her chips. With a few chips splatting around her, along the table, and to the floor.
By then, Jetta had gotten up from her seat. She and Rock silently watched this happen.
(_)
Meanwhile, as Lee rode down the elevator, Lee realized he had never felt more satisfied in his life, than this very moment.
He came. He saw. He conquered the impossible. Now, it was time to leave.
As the doors to the elevator open to the ground floor, he walked passed the two guards, without even given them a glance.
When Lee came to the threshold between the elevator bay, and the gaming floor, he stopped and took stop of the situation in front of him.
Lee saw people going about their business gambling and having fun.
Lee then noticed the music that had just started playing, and he recognized the song as one of his all time favorite anime songs.
Due to his mental weariness, Lee let slip one word from his lips, in a soft tone of voice, “Velveteen.”
Lee then started walking through the gaming floor, towards the front entrance, with confidence in his steps.
No one bothered him, nor approach him, as he continued walking.
As Lee did so, Lee found that he felt as if he was in a movie. After a major success, and he was taking victory lap, in front of the crowd.
Lee then heard his name loudly chanted, over an over again, to his left side, “Lee! Lee! Lee!”
Lee continued walking, as he turned head, to his left. Lee saw it was a group of police officers, whom were chanting his name.
As Lee continued walking, he waved at them with his right hand.
In response, the officers cheered even louder.
Lee smirked, as he thought, 'Given the good will I have obviously built up right now, with the police here. I could probably kill someone and get away with it. Not that I am going to. Still, those happy cops are likely the only reason Chang does not approach me right now. Because, if he did, it would piss them off. So, my plan to call Pedro worked for both the front end of the situation, and the bad end... Nice... Now, to make my fashionable exit.'
Lee continued walking, as he dropped his right arm back to his side, while he turned his had back to face his front.
Lee soon made it to the front doors. When he noticed one of the female valets open the door for him, which he was heading for.
As Lee passed through the door, he saw that his pink car was waiting there for him, under the carport, with the car roof and windows up. Just like he had left his car.
The female valet by the car even had the driver's side door facing him, as the woman held it open for him.
As Lee walked up to the valet holding the door for him, he pulled out his ticket stub, and he handed it to the valet.
The valet looked at the stub, and then handed him the keys to his car.
Lee then got into the driver's side of his car, with the valet shutting the door behind him.
Next, Lee inserted the car key into the ignition, and started the car. After which, Lee set the car into drive. And finally, he drove out from under the large awning, away from the casino, and into the night, towards his home, at the Devil's Hotel. The rest he had so richly earned on his bed, in his suite.
Walk away.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 16: “The Toast To The Hangover.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was the next morning, after the poker game, between Lee and River, at Daiyu Palace Casino.
The time was around nine AM, as Lee came down the elevator, and into the Devil's Hotel lobby.
Lee had already gotten up, got ready, shaved, took a shower, and dressed, to face the day.
In addition, Lee felt well rested, from the sleep he had, on his bed, in his suite, from the night before. But, Lee was still coming down from the stress events of the previous day. And he was in no mood to talk to anyone that day, whom was not a friendly face to him.
Lee wore his causal clothing, including pants, shirt, tennis shoes, his blue cloth jacket, his blue baseball cap, and his large glasses.
As Lee entered the front lobby, from the elevator bay, he came to a stop. he looked around for Sam, but he did not see Sam anywhere in the room.
Lee thought, 'Damn it. Where are you, Sam?'
Lee then noticed the twenty-one women, in Revy and Rock's group, sitting across the room, in their usual seats at those rings of couches.
The only two women Lee did not see from their group was Eda and Yolanda.
Lee thought, 'Eda and Yolanda are likely already getting set up for their burger van, right now. Though, I think I will avoid them today. I really do not want to talk to anyone right now, except for, Sam, whom is not here.'
Lee then saw the women from across the room, turn their heads, as they noticed him.
A second later, they all got up from their seats, and they started walking towards him.
While Lee did not show it on the outside, he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. They were waiting for me. To confront me about what I did yesterday. And if I run, it will only make things worse. It looks like I am going to have to face the music alone. And I am in no mood to do so.'
All twenty-one women approached him at once, with Revy in front.
And as all of them came to a stop, ten feet in front of him, they all of them began demanding questions, from Lee, at the same time.
“How did you do that card throwing trick?”
“What is with the gray suit?”
“Why didn't you tell us that you are mister dance?”
“Are you and the Rats Nest bartender dating?”
“Where did you learn those languages from?”
“What is your connection to Chief Del Soto?”
There were other questions, as well.
Then, Revy continued look at Lee, as she held up her right hand, causing all the other women to be silent.
Revy lowed her right hand. She focused on Lee's eyes, as she calmly ordered, “Answer us, Lee.”
For Lee, given his current mood, which was a mix of mental tiredness, and borderline stress endued emotional burnout, the women had hit a raw nerve with their ungratefulness towards him.
Lee looked down at Revy. Their eyes met, and Revy saw a hardness, that she had never seen, in Lee's eyes before. He firmly, yet honestly stated, in an even tone of voice, “Revy, yesterday, you put me in one of the most stressful and dangerous situations of my entire life.”
“Yet. Not once did I truly complain. Not once did I truly try to run from the mess you put me into.”
“I did what you asked me to do. And against near impossible odds, I still won that million dollars for you, Revy. Though, instead of something as little as a, thank you, I got nothing. And the only rewards you think I should have for my hard work is you all badgering me with questions.”
“Given your ungratefulness toward my help in aiding you, as of right now, as far as I am concerned, you can go to hell.”
Lee then looked around, at the women by Revy, as he added, “You can all go to hell.”
Lee then turned, and stormed away from them, as he headed towards the hotel restaurant.
The women were so stunned by Lee forwardness towards them, that they did not replace. They just watch, as Lee walked a cross the room, and turned the corner, into the hallway that lead to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
As Lee disappeared from side, the women turned to look at each other.
Lotton said, “I told you this was a bad idea.”
Benny suggested, “Should we follow him, and make him talk?”
Revy stated, “No. We can talk to him, later. After he calms down. And he is right. He won the million for me, and that is the important part.”
Rock said, “Still, someone show apologize to him. He does at least deserve that. And I will handle this. Considering I am the best at this.” She then walked toward the hotel restaurant, alone.
As Rock walked away, Janet stated, “Still, we can find out about Lee connection with Chief Del Soto, from the police department.”
Benny said, “True. But, that can wait a few days. After things cool down. Right now, if there is a connection between the Police Chief, and Lee. After what happened yesterday. The Police Chief will be on his guard. We need to wait a few days. And then look into this. After the Police Chief has lowered his guard, some.”
Dutch agreed, “That is a good point, Benny.”
Janet thought about her husband's suggested for a few seconds. She then replied, “I agreement.”
Benny mentioned, “Good. And to pass the time, until then, I was looking into tours around here, and they have a nice mainland tour that you all might be interested in.”
Janet replied, “Sounds like fun.”
Sawyer commented, “I have always been open to learning about new cultures.”
Dutch said, “So have I.” She thought, 'That is one of the reasons that brought me to Roanapur, Thailand, in the first place.'
Revy stated, “Well guys, have fun with that.” She thought, 'Tours have never been my things.'
Molly asked, “What type of tours are you talking about?”
Benny stated, “Ruins. That sort of thing. I can charter a bus for us in a couple of days.”
Molly said, “Sounds interesting.”
As the women had a conversation about the tour, Benny realized that most of the women present were interested taking the tour, with her. Except for Revy.
(_)
A minute later, Lee did not even buy breakfast, as he walked over, and he sat at his usual play at the bar counter. While he got comfortable in his seat, he forced himself to calm down.
Lee thought, with concern, and mild surprise, towards himself, 'Did I just tell Revy, and the others, to go to hell?... Oh... Just great... I just made things worse for myself.' He then lowered his head onto the counter.
A few seconds later, Lee heard Rock's female voice, right beside him, to his left, say, “Lee?”
Lee did not raise his head, as he asked, with defeat evident in his tone of voice, “Have you girls decided to kill me, now?”
Rock answered, “No. You are right. What we did was uncalled for. And thank you for winning that million.”
Lee raised his head. He turned to look at Rock, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Rock admitted, “We should not have asked you those questions. You have secrets. Everyone does. And in that poker game, you were forced to reveal some of those secrets. Though, I must say you are a very talented man.”
Lee responded, “I am happy you appreciate that. And thank you.”
Rock inquired, “Are we good?”
Lee conceded, “We will be in an hour, or two. I just need some time to cool down.”
Rock replied, “That is perfectly understandable. Have a good breakfast.”
Lee stated, “You to, Rock.”
Rock then turned and left the room, as she went back to the lobby, to let her friends know that everything was all right.
Meanwhile, Lee got up from his seat, and walked to Emily, whom was manning the cash register, so he could pay for a breakfast buffet, and have a meal, with something to drink.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee was sitting at his usual place at the bar counter, eating his meal, and drinking a glass of orange juice.
A few minutes ago, Lee has seen Rock's group come into the room and pay for their meals. They had left him alone, as they went to the buffet, and then to their usual tables by the stage.
Just then, Lee noticed Emily walked up to him, from behind the bar counter. She was holding the wireless phone to the bar, in her right hand.
While, Emily came to a stop across from Lee, she offer him the phone, she said, in english, “Lee. It's Sam.”
At the mentioned of Sam's name, Lee immediately perked up. Lee quickly, through gentle took the phone. After which, he said, “Thank you, Emily.”
Emily replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then held the phone to his right ear. He said, “Hi Sam. Where have you been? I missed you at breakfast.”
On the other end of the phone, Sam responded, “Sorry. I have just been busy. How about you?”
Lee coyly answered, “Oh this, and that.”
Sam said, “Anyway. Congratulations on winning that poker game. I will see you around eleven at the Rats Nest. I can play with you for the afternoon, but I have business this evening, and tonight.”
Lee replied, “Okay. See you there.” He mentally added, 'I would rather have him for the afternoon, than not at all. Though, I would like to know what his business is? Still, given our arrangement. We both realize that it is best neither us digs to deep into the background of the other.'
Lee pressed the end button to hang up. He then handed Emily the phone, as he said, “Thank you, again, Emily.”
Emily gently took the phone. After which, she replied, “You're welcome.” She then walked away from Lee, and back to the cash register, where a few customers were waiting for her.
(_)
Two hours later, Lee sat in the lobby waiting for eleven AM to roll by. That was when the Rats Nest would opened for the day, he would drive over to the bar, and meet with Sam, to enjoy the late morning and afternoon with his best friend.
Currently, Lee saws sitting in a chair, facing the lobby entrance, on the right side of the lobby, as he was playing a game of solitary, with his deck of cards.
Lee glance over at the women of Rock and Revy's group.
They were all in their circle of couches, on the left side of the lobby, across the room from where he was.
Lee thought, 'They haven't bother me once, since before breakfast. I appreciate what every Rock said to me. And it is clear they had a talk about me. And decided to leave me alone, for now.'
'Still, they look like they have nothing to do right now, as well... As such, it looks like this day is going to calm down. Which is good, because yesterday's poker game likely attracted the wrong kind of attention towards me, from all the wrong people. And I need to start planning for those eventualities...'
'My time is growing short, and I may have to come up with a plan b, because it looks like I am not going to be able to come up with a way to steal one of the girls' reality devices.'
'Still, I can enjoy the day. For right now.'
It was then that, Lee looked over at the lobby entrance to see River walk in the room, from the outside.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Thought to soon. Still, what is she doing here? Though, at least she was a polite loser last night. And I admire her for that.'
River was wearing a nice red short sleeved blouse, a long black skirt, and red tennis shoes. Her long red hair was pulled back in a ponytail, by a red scrunchy.
And Lee notice that River was carrying a small, rectangular, brown, wooden box, on with a yellow ribbon running down the front of the box.
While Lee looked over at River, River turned to look back at him. She did not miss a step, as she turned to walk towards him.
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. She has could to see me.'
In response to Lee's thoughts, River just cracked a smiled towards Lee.
From the corner of his eye, Lee saw that Revy and the others had taken notice of River's presence, but they stayed in their seats.
As River walked over where Lee was seating, Lee swiftly gathered his playing cards, and put them in their cardboard box. He then pocketed the box of playing cards.
A few seconds later, River reached Lee.
As River stood there, a few feet from Lee, she looked down at Lee, whom was sitting in his chair, looking back up at her.
Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Good morning, River.”
River returned Lee's grin, as she replied, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee inquired, “So, what brings you here this morning? I hope Chang was not too upset with you losing a million dollars last night.”
River said, with a straight face, and in an innocent tone of voice, “No. He wasn't. That is what makeup sex is for.”
Lee heard the girls laughing at River's jokes, all away across the room.
Even Lee's poker face cracked, as he lightly chuckled, for a few seconds.
As Lee calmed down, River stated, “Anyway, given you did not get any reward yesterday, and you were one dollar poorer for you victory. I brought this here for you...” She handed him wooden box, as she said, “For your troubles, yesterday.”
Lee stood up. He then reached over, and took the box from River's hands. He responded, “Thank you, River.”
River replied, “You're welcome, Lee.” She then turned, and left back through the lobby entrance, from which she had just come from.
Lee watched through the windows, as River exited the entryway, and to the outside. She then turned and waved her right hand at him, before snipping back around and walking up to a black car waiting for her, by the curb to the hotel parking lot. River then got into the back seat, and the car drove way.
With River gone, Lee turned his eyes downward, at the brown, wooden, rectangular box in his hand. The lid was on the long ways face of the box.
Lee gently opened the lid of the brown, wooden box, to see a green bottle of alcohol inside. The label both the box, and the bottle, was easy to read.
Lee immediately knew what brand of alcohol is was, but he showed no outward sign that he did. He thought, 'This is one hell of a gift from River. Though, I need say something, or the curiosity of girls here will get the better of them.'
Lee openly stated, as he lied, “Ardbeg Providence? Never heard of this label before.”
As Lee expected, across the room, the girls immediately overheard what Lee had said.
Revy's eyes went wide, as she quickly jumped out of her seat by Rock, and she headed towards Lee.
As Revy approached Lee, she stated, “River must have raided Chang's liquor cabinet for that bottle.”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he inquired, “So, you have heard of this brand? Is it a black label?” He mentally added, 'I always wondered that.'
Revy stated, “Yep. One of the blackest. Dutch loves the stuff. It is a nice brand where we come from?” By then, Revy came to a stop, a few feet in front of Lee.
Lee looked over Revy's shoulder, to see Dutch sitting in her seat, as she smiled towards both Revy and himself.
Lee turned back to Revy, as he thought, 'Let's have some fun. You want to ask awkward questions. I can play that game too.' He casually asked, “And where is that?”
Revy immediately became real quiet.
Lee then closed the lid to the box, as he looked over at clock above the check in desk. The arms of analog clock stated it was ten fifty-five AM.
Lee thought, 'Close enough.'
Lee then walking around Revy, and towards the front doors, with the brown, wooden box tucked under his right arm.
Revy asked, “Where are you going?”
Lee then turned to face Revy, as he answered, “To find Sam, and have a must needed drink.”
Lee then turned around, and he walked out of the lobby, and into the parking lot, with his prize in his hands. He soon reached his car, and headed for the Rats Nest.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee made it to the Rats Nest, just as the bartender put the open side up on the window, to the left side of the front door.
After Lee parked his car, he walked inside the bar with his brown, wooden box.
As he looked around, he only saw the bartender sitting at a table, near the front of the room.
Lee thought, 'I guess Sam got caught up in traffic, or something. I am sure he will be here in a few minutes.”
The bartender looked up at Lee, as she said, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Good morning.”
The bartender asked, “So, what is in the box?”
Lee answered, “I gift I wish to share with friends. Including yourself.”
The bartender responded, “Thank you. By the way, I heard about last night. Congratulations on winning that poker game. Did Revy share any of the winning with you.”
Lee replied, “Nope. She kept it all for herself.”
The bartender commented, “Yea. It is apparent that Revy can be a greedy bitch, sometimes.”
Lee said, “You're preaching to the choir. By the way, can I borrow your phone?”
The bartender replied, “Sure.”
The bartender got up, and headed for the bar counter.
Lee followed her.
The bartender walked around the bar counter, and picked up a wireless phone from its base, and walked over to Lee, from behind the counter.
Lee gently set his box down. He then took the phone from the woman's hands.
Lee then dialed a number.
A minute later, Lee stated, in english, “This is Lee. Please, transfer me to Chief Del Soto office.”
A few seconds later, Lee heard the line click, and the pick up again.
On the other end, Pedro said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Lee stated, “Pedro. It's Lee. Come to the Rats Nest, right now. Don't ask questions. I got a gift that I want to share with you, and you are going to love it.”
Pedro replied, in english, “Knowing you, I am sure I will. I will be there in ten minutes.”
Lee said, “That will be fine. See you, then.” He then hung up the phone, and handed it to the bartender.
Lee then sat in a stool, by the bar counter, as he wait for Pedro and Sam to show up.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Pedro walked through the front door of the bar. After he had parked his own car in the Rats Nest parking lot.
Pedro saw that Lee was sitting by the bar counter, and the bartender was nearby, on the other side of the counter.
As Pedro walked toward them, he said, “Hello you two. And Lee, congrats on the win last night.” He thought, 'Since Lee invited me here. I think I will take the questions I have for him, until this evening.'
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
As Pedro came to a stop by the bar counter, next to Lee. He commented, “Most of my boys bet on you, and won big. The others are not sore about losing their money.” He thought, 'And I make sure of that. Both during the game. And afterward.'
Lee stated, “I am glad someone made money from my actions. Though, I did not get a dime from it.”
Pedro replied, “That figures. So, what did you call me for?”
Lee answered, “I was going to wait for Sam. But, I guess he is not going to show up, for a while. I would like to wait a few more minutes for him. But, I can still show you what I have with me.”
Lee then turned to the brown, wooden box on the counter. He open the lip to the box, and pulled out the green bottle of Ardbeg Providence. And he then gently set both the box, and the bottle, onto the bar counter.
Pedro immediately recognized the bottle for what it was.
Pedro took a few steps closer to Lee, as he whispered, “Is that what I think it is?”
Pedro thought, with amazement, 'Forget the questions for this morning. They will come this evening. Besides, it would ruin the mood. And Lee is giving me a once in a lifetime opportunity, to try a drink I always about, for yes. But, did not exist in this reality. Next to Romulan Ale, Ardbeg Providence is on my personal list of drinks I would like to try, that do not exist in this reality.'
Lee softly replied, “Yea. River gave it to me at the hotel, less than an hour ago. I figured you, Sam, the bartender, and I, would like to have a taste of it.”
Pedro quietly responded, “You got that right. But, are you sure it is not poisoned?”
Lee whispered, “Absolutely. It is not River's style to do such a thing.”
Pedro quietly said, “Okay. By the way, I saw Annie at the casino.”
Lee whispered, “Damn. Thanks for the warning.”
Lee thought, 'I lucked out not meeting her, during my trips to the casino. But, that is just another reason to altogether avoid the casino.'
'Though, given what I have done for Annie. I doubt Annie is after me. Still, if Annie wanted too, she could probably immediately find me with the force. It is likely that Chang asked her not too. Or, she is just wanting to see how those already after me, handle the situation.'
Pedro thought, 'Though, I better at least tell him, that I have questions for him tonight. So, he knows I am not blindsiding him.' He softly said, “You're welcome. And there other things we need to talk about tonight.”
Lee quietly replied, “Okay. I understand.” He thought, 'I am not surprised you would have questions for me, Pedro. And given what I have put you through. You deserve answers. But, not right now. Now, it is time for me to celebrate my victory, with my friends. With some priceless hootch.'
Pedro thought, 'Good. He understands. And realizes the importance of my statement.'
Just then, Sam walked through the door. After parking his gray, four door car, in the Rats Nest parking lot, by Lee's pink Cadillac, and away from Pedro's car.
The three adults turned to the newcomer.
Lee asked, “What kept you?”
Sam walked towards them, as he answered, “Errands.” When he reached them, he came to a stop, as he used his right hand to point at the bottle. He asked, “What is that?” He then dropped his right hand to his side.
Lee stated, “I am told that it is fine bottle of hootch. And we are about to find out.” He turned to the bartender, as he requested, “Please get us four glasses. Three for us, and one for you.”
The bartender reached under the counter, and pulled out three glasses, and a bottled opener. As she set them on the counter, she replied, “I appreciate you including me, on the fine endeavor.”
Lee smiled, as he commented, “As I said earlier. I wish to share this with my friends. You included. And you don't think I was going to leave out a beautiful woman, from a once in a lifetime toast.”
The bartender smiled at Lee.
Lee continued, “And the only reason I did not invite Melvin was that he is currently at work, at the hotel. Now, let's enjoy this.” He picked up the bottle open, and unsealed the bottle. He set the bottle opener, with the cock attached to its screw, on the counter.
After Lee opened the bottle and poured some of the contents into each of the four glasses, he raised his glass.
The others raised their glasses, as well.
Lee toasted, “To life.” He then took a sip of the Ardbeg Providence.
The other three replied, in unison, “To life.” And they sips from their glasses, as well.
Lee had to admitted, after sipping it, “Now, that is some smooth alcohol. Let us not waste it.”
The others nodded in agreement.
Soon after, they had polished off the entire bottle.
Lee put the cap back on the empty, green bottle. Then, he put the bottle back into the box. After he closed the box, he picked it up.
Lee then turned Pedro, as he stated, “You helped me yesterday, Pedro. And for that, I am very grateful. So, here...” He held out the box for Pedro, as he stated, “Keep this a souvenir of that day. I have no place to put it. And I am sure it is a rare brand. So, I want someone who appreciates it, to have it.”
Pedro took the box, as he responded, “Thank you, Lee. I will take it home, and put it somewhere safe.” He mentally added, 'Now, this is a gift to hold on to.'
Pedro stated, “Well, I have to get back to work. Thanks for the drink, the box, and the bottle. I am just glad that it was not that strong an alcoholic drink, or I would have to call a cab. See, you all later.”
Sam said, “Have fun.”
The bartender commented, “Glad you came by, Pedro.”
Lee said, “See you, later.”
Pedro then turned, and left the bar. He was soon in his car, as he left to return back to work, at the local police station.
The bartender turned to Lee, as she stated, “That was a nice gesture you did, with both the drinks, and giving the bottle away.”
Lee looked at her, as he smiled. He replied, “I know.” He then turned to Sam, as he asked, “So, are you interest in continuing our poker game?”
Sam smiled, as he pulled out his deck of cards. He stated, “Sure. I even brought my best deck with me.”
Lee said, “Good.”
Sam turned to the bartender, as he stated, “Since we are both driving. I think we will each have a glass of lemonade.”
The bartender replied, “Coming right up.”
Sam replied, “Thank you.”
Lee complimented, “Good choice.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he smiled. He said, “What can I say? I know you well.”
Lee thought, 'Not that well. But, that was still a nice gesture on your part.' Lee said, “That you do.”
Both men then turned, and walked over to their usual corner table, on the for left side of the room. They then sat down, at their usual places. And they soon began ongoing poker game. With the bartender bringing them each a glass of iced lemonade, a few minutes after Sam ordered their drinks.
(_)
Sam and Lee continued playing poker until lunch time. Lee then drove Sam and himself to an Italian restaurant, to eat. When they are finished, they returned to the Rats Nest to continue playing their game of poker.
While both players remained even in the overall money they bet that day, they did not care, as continued playing, and chatting, the day away.
(_)
Finally, at five thirty PM, after they finished their latest hand of cards, Sam looked at the clock on the back wall of the bar. He then put away his cards, and his money, as he stated, “Well, I need to get going.”
Lee said, “I am glad I was able to have your company, for at least most of the day. Especially this afternoon.”
Sam agreed, “So am I.” He continued, in a sadder tone of voice, “I don't know if I am going to be around, for the next couple of days. But, I will try to spent some time with you.”
Lee stated, in a supportive tone of voice, “Do what you can? I will be here for a long as I can. But, we both know, it will not be forever.” He thought, 'Though, if I was able to cure my cancer, and solve my other problems, I wouldn't mind spending as much time with you, as you wanted.'
Sam nodded once, as he said, “I understand.”
Sam then got up from the table. Sam walked out from around the corner, passed Lee, and by the bar counter, near the bartender, where he left some money for his tab, and a tip.
After Sam set the money on the counter, he turned towards the front door. He kept walking, as he said, “Good the change.”
Next, Sam walked out of the bar, and to his car, to leave.
Lee then collected his money, and put it into one of his pockets.
Lee then got up, and walked over to the bar counter, where the bartender was standing across from him.
As Lee pulled out a few dollars to pay his bar tab and tip, the bartender asked, “What did you mean, when you said you would not be here forever.”
Lee answered, “Please, don't take this the wrong way. But, it is personal.” He then placed the money on the counter.
The bartender replied, “Okay.”
Lee said, “Have a pleasant evening.”
The bartender commented, “I hope so. And you to.”
Lee then turned and walked towards the front door.
A few seconds after Lee exited the bar, he thought, 'I could use some dinner from the Last Resort Diner.”
As Lee faced the street in front of him, he then turned to his right, as he walked along concrete sidewalk in front of the bar, to the parking lot on the left side of the Rats Nest bar, where his pink car was parked. Several seconds later, Lee made it to his car. After which, he got into his vehicle, started the engine, and drove away, down the street.
(_)
Six minutes later, Lee parked his car in the parking lot, by the diner. He then walked into the Last Resort Diner.
Lee saw that there were a few customers there, but not many.
Lee thought, 'It looks like I made it before dinner rush.'
As Lee walked in, George, the cook, was busy washing dishing, in the sink, under the counter in front of the front doors. When George saw Lee, from across the counter, he stated, “Hi Lee. We heard about the poker game. Great job.”
Nearby, Mary and Lori heard what George said. They turned to see Lee had walked into the diner. Mary said, “Yes. It is always impressive when someone wins a million dollars.”
Lori was beside Mary. Lori inquired, “I am glad you won, as well. But, how much of it were you allowed to keep?”
After heading the comments, by the staff, Lee came to a stop, just inside the dinner. He looked around at the three diner employees, as he answered, “None of it. Though, thank you for your comments.”
Lori said, “Then, consider a meal, and drink, tonight, to be on the house.”
Lee grinned, as he responded, “Thank you. I was planning on eating here. That is why I am early. And it is customer service like that, which keeps me coming back here.”
Lori returned Lee's smile, as she replied, “I know.”
Mary and George went back to their jobs, as Lori follow Lee to the usual back, right, corner booth that he and Pedro shared almost every night.
Lee sat down, while facing the entrance to the restaurant. He then looked up at Lori, as he ordered, “I think I will have a club sandwich, with potato chips, and a coke cola.”
Lori pulled out her pen and notepad. As she wrote down the door, for the cook, she stated, “Coming right up.” She then turned, and walked towards George.
A minute later, Lori brought out Lee's glass of cola.
And ten minutes later, Lori brought Lee's meal, which had just been freshly prepared by George.
Lee then enjoyed his meal, as he watched for Pedro to show up, sometime around seven PM that evening.
(_)
At the moment that Lee was served his dinner for that day, at the Last Resort Diner, across town, in his penthouse office, at the top floor of Daiyu Palace Casino, Chang sat in his chair, behind his desk. With his door to his office being closed, but not locked.
Chang was wearing his business suit, but not his shades, nor black long coat.
Chang had his laptop computer open on the top of his desk, as he used it to help him review on what he knew about Lee. The laptop had a computer mouse hooked to it, and its wireless network card was connected to both the building's computer network, and the internet of the planet he was on.
The building's network, and computers, had some of the best firewalls money could buy, in the multiverse. Firewalls that were designed, and installed, by Ed Lowe.
As Chang leaned back in his cushioned, armchair, he thought, 'The sex River gave me last night, did a lot to calm me down, after losing a million to an absolute nobody...”
Chang smiled, as he continued his thoughts, in amusement, “Oh. Who am I kidding? I made more money from the bets on the game floor, with Lee winning, than River winning.'
'River already realized this. She told me so, in bed. Pedro told me he realized this, at the beginning of the game. I am sure that Rock realizes this. With her telling Revy, after the game. And if Lee is as good as I suspect he is. He likely realized this, as well.'
'So instead, River and I had sex to celebrate my brilliant planning. And while more people bet on River, than Lee. Once they realize that River was my girlfriend. The casino owner's girlfriend. I am surprised that so many people bet for Lee... Maybe there are just a lot of people that like betting on the underdog. Like Pedro.'
'And while I had already started to grow interested in Lee. After Lee's display at the game yesterday, and his win. I am now very interest in him. Besides, the principle of the matter demands I investigate Lee.'
'And the more I dig, the more questions I get about Lee, than answers. He has only been on this island for a few months. Yet, he has already either had a brush with, or become allies, with all the major players that are on the island.'
'Lee has clearly be able to deflect attention from himself. While, at least gaining a bit of respect from both Revy and her group, and me and my group. At the same time, Lee and Pedro seem to be working together. Though, I doubt Pedro's claim that Lee is his informant. I get the feeling Pedro is not in charge of Lee. Lee might even me the one in charge of Pedro... And giving how badass Pedro is. That is a worrisome thought.'
'Now, to start with. River reminded me that Lee did not have a choice in playing the game. It seems she has developed a soft spot for him. I guess when you read a person's mind, you learn their nature. And River has always been a good judge of character. Which means that Lee is on the level, and he did not cheat. So, taking all that into account, I not going to hold winning that game against him.'
'Still, for River to lose like that to Lee concerns me. Because, the means that whether Lee knows it or not, he has become a player in this game, we are all caught up in. It means that he is good enough, at what he does, that he could either be an asset, or a threat to me. And I need to which he is.'
'As such, I need to know what makes Lee tick. Because, given all the things he did in that game, and outside that game, he clearly is a man of many talents. One of those talents being intelligent enough know to hide his talents from everyone else.'
'It is clear that something is not right with Lee. He is playing some game in this town. And it involves Pedro. That means it could effect this city's future, and by extension, my business in this town. So, what is Lee's real reasons for being in town? And what is his game?'
'Also, after yesterday, it is obvious that Lee can keep his cool even in a prolonged, stressful situation. Pedro stated that Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru told Lee that River is a telepathic genius. So, he knew River was a telepath, before the game started. Yet, he still showed up, and played one hell of a game, without cracking. That is a very good trait to have. Even River agreed with me, on this.'
'Also, last night, during one of our breaks, between lovemaking, I commented that Lee had to have some stones to remain calm playing her. River mentioned that Lee could face a tiger without breaking into a sweat.'
'Speaking of tigers. I need to look into what happened with my tigress, two mornings ago. Zoe never did give me a straight answer on my tiger made it, unharmed, from its broken cage, to her enclosure, which was several feet away from said broken cage. And this game distracted me from looking into it.'
Chang leaned up, as he looked over at this laptop monitor. He pulled up the security camera for the hallway by the enclosure for that morning. Though, there was no audio on the building security camera, so even if the cameras were tapped into by an outside source, they could not be used to listen in on those in the casino.
Chang has other ways to find out what people were speaking on silent audio, if he wish to learn what they were saying. And he was a fairly good lip reader, himself. In both chinese, and english. Though, he preferred other people not know he had such skills.
Chang fast-forwarded the video, until he stopped it, when he saw Lee walked out of the back elevator bay.
Chang thought, 'Lee must have gotten lost.'
Chang then watched as the wheels on the tiger cage broke, the tiger got loose, the workers ran, with the tiger heading for Lee.
What happened next surprised Chang.
Lee did not run, nor show any fear.
And due to this, the tiger became interested in him.
As the large cat walked around Lee, Lee kept slowly turning to face the cat.
When the tiger came to a stop, both the tiger and Lee just stood there, until Lee did another expected thing. He reached up and lightly scratched the tiger behind her ear.
Soon after, Lee was able to convince the tiger to follow him to the enclosure door, with the tiger entering it.
Lee then shut the door, and locked it. A few seconds later, Zoe, with a few other security members, arrive on the scene.
Zoe and Lee talked, and from what Chang could read from their lips, both agreed to pretend this never happened. Then, Lee walked away, towards the gaming floor, as Zoe arranged for clean up of the broken cage.
Lee actions interested Chang, greatly.
Chang select the computer, using the time stamps of the videos, to select through the video feeds of Lee, from one camera to another, all the way to where Lee walked outside, and he sat on one of the outside benches, while he waited for Rock and Revy to show up, around an hour later.
As Lee followed Rock and Revy, out into the parking lot, to the Lagoon family's GTO, Chang paused the video.
Chang thought, 'Interesting. I will have to talk to Zoe about keeping things from me. But, I won't go hard on her. She has enough problems, as is. That woman has not had any real luck since Wash died. She has had a string of failed relationships, with nothing to show for them... Oh well. That is a matter for another time. And River briefly mentioned that she was looking into that problem. So, I will leave it to her.'
'Though, the fact Lee wanted to keep this secret shows intelligence on his part. I would have likely done things differently, if I had known in advance that Lee was this strong willed. And Lee showed how strong willed he was in the poker game.'
'I guess River was not joking. And dealing with Revy and the others, on a daily basis is either going to steel one's nerves, or break them. From what I heard, Revy's daughters pretty much gave Lee a front row seat to their brand of violence, and Lee didn't even crack in front of them. And compared to them, that tiger is a playful kitten.'
'Also, Lee is so skinny that it is unhealthy. Anyone with a sharp eye could tell that by way Lee's suit, and other clothing, hangs off of his body. Though, he likely bought his clothing when he weighted more, and the clothing fit him.'
'I have looked over a few older photos I had taken of him. From around month ago. Right after the talent show. He was skinny then, but not this skinny. And he would have no reason to willfully lose all that weight.'
'So, he wasn't that skinny a few months ago. So, why is he losing weight?... He has cancer... He's dying. And he knows it. With Revy and the girls do not realize this because the change is so gradual. I have heard cases where some people did not notice such things, from their friends and family members, because the person in question was with them so often, that as they got worse, slowly over time, it was not noticeable to them.'
'There is not much I can do for Lee, right now. But, this does allow me to have a card to have over him. But later. When he starts to become desperate, then I will make him my offer.'
'Now, to review the video feeds of when Lee came in yesterday, and came out.'
As Chang watched Lee strut into the casino, from yesterdays morning video feeds, he chuckled. He thought, 'Lee clearly knows how to be a showman.'
Chang then watched the feed videos from last night. He watched as Lee passed by Revy and Rock. He then took the elevator to the gaming floor.
And as Lee walked out to the threshold from the elevator bay and gaming floor, Chang read one word from Lee's lips. “Velveteen.”
Lee then started walking towards the front doors.
Chang thought, 'Velveteen... Where have I heard the word before... It is a music track... I wonder?...'
Chang pulled up another window beside the video on his screen, the window listed the music tracks that played in the casino gaming floor.
The music list time stamp match the video time stamp, of the song being played being, Velveteen, from the Ghost in the Shell, Stand Alone Complex, soundtrack.
Chang thought, 'Hold on... Revy says that he did not know about anime. But, only an anime fan would would know that song by name. Something is wrong with this situation.'
Chang then pulled up the video window, and he expanded it to the entire screen.
Next, Chang watched Lee exits the casino, with a valet opening the door to his pink car.
The video even continued playing, as the pink Cadillac began to drive off. Chang's eyes caught a glimpse of the back license plate of the convertible.
Chang immediately paused the video, and as he looked more closely at the back license plate of the pink car.
The license vanity plate stated, BCKLAGN.
Chang immediately realized what the license vanity plate stood for, as he thought, with disbelief, 'Black Lagoon. You got to be kidding. Wait, that isn't Lee's gag. From what I learned from Revy and the others, someone gave him that car. And if my sources, whom dug into the past of this city, are correct, that person was Police Chief Pedro Del Soto's brother, Paciano Del Soto. Whom also gave Pedro that Sistema Colt pistol. From what I managed to gather, both the Del Soto brothers are big Black Lagoon fans.'
'But, the young brother was a mob boss that learned that Revy and her crew were in town, and he wisely ran... I admire such common sense. I think I will leave him, and the former members of his group, alone.'
'Still, something does not add up. Lee met both Del Soto brothers. He should know at least something about what is going on. But, he doesn't do anything. He is intentionally playing dumb. Why? And that quote his made towards me, right before the game started. That was from the movie, Hot Fuzz... What a minute. Hot Fuzz. That movie parodies several genres at once.'
'And Lee also said that he was not Pedro's friend. Yet. He clearly was Pedro's friend. Even to the point that Pedro brought the force with him to the casino. And Pedro is clearly in on whatever Lee was doing... And Pedro knows all about us...'
'So, Lee lied to me, the day before the poker game with River, about him only being an acquaintance to Chief Del Soto. Though, he had no problem with me knowing. Yet, at the game, he whispered to me that he was Pedro's friend... He was not lying to try to fool me... And the only other people that he could be lying, to try to fool, are Revy and Rock.... But, why?... Ah. Ho. Ho. Ho...'
Chang then began laughing at what he realized about Lee. And whom Lee really was.
Several seconds later, as Chang stopped laughing, he picked up his cellphone. He then dial a number on his phone, as he though, with mirth, and amusement, 'Lee is as smooth as silk. But, he hasn't fool me. No wonder River did not want to spoil things.'
'This is just so much fun... And Lee is also crazy. As in, crazy as a fox. Such as that teal tie he wore to the game. He was literally flaunting the fact he is hiding in plain sight. Now, that takes balls to do. Especially, in front of the badasses he has seriously pissed off. Still, I'll decide what to do about Lee, tomorrow. But for now, I think I will have my personal duo keep tabs on him, starting in the morning.'
As the other end picked up, the female voice calmly said, in chinese, “What do you need, Chang?”
Chang ordered, in a casual tone of voice, in chinese, “I need you and Annie to tail Lee tomorrow. If he gets into trouble. Help him. Then, contact me. And immediately bring him to me, unharmed. If nothing happens, just leave him alone.”
The voice on the other end of the line replied, in chinese, “Understood. And no problem.”
Chang said, “Thank you.” He then closed his cellphone, and put it in his pocket.
Just then, there was a knock on Chang's door.
Chang said, “It is open.”
As the door opened, he saw River, wearing a red evening gown, like she had on the previous night, along with red slippers. River red clothing and slippers, matched the red color of her dyed hair. Also, she had her hair pulled back in a ponytail.
Chang smiled as the sight before him, as he inquired, in chinese, “River. My dear. What is the occasion?”
River returned Chang's smile, as she answered, in fluent chinese, “I thought you might want to have a nice dinner, with some pleasant company.”
Chang complimented, “What a marvelous idea. And it is nearly time for dinner. Is the restaurant downstairs okay with you.”
River answered, “Yes. That will be fine.”
Chang closed his laptop computer. He then stood up from his desk chair. He walked around his desk, and over to River.
As both of them walked out of the room, and into the hallway, Chang gently shut the door, to his office, behind him.
The romantic couple then headed for the front express elevator, to take them downstairs, to get some dinner, at their private room, inside the casino restaurant.
(_)
Later that evening, just after seven PM, while sitting at his corner booth, at the Last Resort Diner, Lee watched at Pedro finally entered the Last Resort Diner.
The dinner crowd had already left.
Pedro approached Lee, as Lee thought, 'Well, I knew this was coming, this morning. When Pedro told me to expect this. And I don't blame him for the questions he is about to ask. So, I guess I have some explaining to do to Pedro. And unlike the girls, I cannot just tell him to go to hell. And storm off, away from him.'
Pedro walked towards Lee, he saw that Lori was nearby. He turned to Lori, as he said, in english, “Lori, I will have some coffee.”
Lori turned to him, as she replied, “Coming right now.”
Pedro then made his to the right, back, corner booth, that he and Lee shares.
While Pedro sat down, Lori was right behind him, with his usual cup of coffee.
Meanwhile, Lee was still drinking his second refill of his glass of iced cola.
As the steam rose from Pedro's cup of coffee, which was between Lee and Pedro, Pedro just silently stared at Lee for the next few seconds.
Lee sighed, as he said, “Alright. Ask your questions.”
Pedro calmly asked, in an even tone of voice, “How?”
Lee calmly requested, “Not to sound like an ass. But, could you please be more specific in your application of the word, how?”
Pedro broke out laughing, as he thought, 'Only a writer would make such a comment.'
As Pedro calmed down, he responded, “Fair enough. So, how? Where? And when did you learn all those skills you that showed yesterday, at the poker game.”
Lee answered, “The poker skills are obvious. I spent months playing Sam, and a few others. I became skilled at playing that game, from experience. And a few pointers from Sam. The others skills... Well...”
Pedro stated, “Spit it out. I want to know where you learned to throw a card like that. To the point it was able to embed itself into a table. And where did you learned to speak those languages from. I suspect something happened in this city, that I don't know about, and I want to know what happened, right now.”
Lee was silent for a few seconds, as he thought, 'I am going to have to tell, Pedro. I got no choice.'
Lee said, “During the Day of the Dead, we all got stuck in a time loop that only I remember.” He mentally added, 'Except Harvey. But, we have an agreement, so there is no need to worry Pedro about him.' He continued, “The time lopped worked like a Groundhogs Day time loop, only it resets at midnight, back to five AM. And we were stuck in those loops for over twenty years.”
Pedro thought, 'I was right. This is one hell of an answer.' He commented, “So, that is why that day felt like it would never end?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Pedro inquired, “So, how did you use your time in the time loop?”
Lee answered, “For the most part, I spent my time well in that time loop. I learned a lot. And learned everything from throwing knives and cards, to learning to speak, read, and write, a number of languages. I am quite the artist now, too. And that is only the tip of the iceberg, of the skill sets I now possess.”
Pedro commented, “Sounds like the time loop was fun for you.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “It was.” He thought, 'I got to live twenty more years, or so, than I otherwise would have not. For that, I am grateful.'
Pedro picked up his cup. He took a sip of his coffee. He then set down his cup, back on the table, as he inquired, “You didn't do anything stupid while in that temporal loop?”
Lee thought, 'I am glad he did not ask me who I learned those skills from. He might have a different, more disappointing opinion of me. But, I have to admit to something. And I know just what to admit too.'
Lee admitted, “I played a few pranks on the girls. But, since they don't remember, we are fine.”
Pedro agreed, “Okay. And I have a feeling that the less I know about it, the safer, and saner, I will continue to be.”
Lee said, “That is because you are probably right.”
Pedro asked, “So, what are you going to do now that you have revealed your hidden talents to the girls?”
Lee responded, “I admit that I have pretty much blown most of my hidden advantages in that game. And I am starting to think about alternatives, to my current long term plans.”
Pedro thought, with concern, 'He is screwed, and he knows it. Still, he is taking it a lot better than I would, in his position.'
Pedro said, “That is wise. And the very fact you realize this is one of two reasons I am still going to help you. The other reason is you really have a talent for this cloak and dagger shit. Revy and Chang put you in a no win situation, and you still came out of it in one piece.”
Lee stated, “Well, River now knows about me. So, we should also be thankful that the playful, telepathic genius wants to play along.”
Pedro said, “Yes. We should. But, still you are a talented man.”
Lee replied, “I know... So, you said this morning, that Annie is at the casino?”
Pedro stated, “Yes. Though, I am not sure why she is working for a man she hates?”
Lee said, “Knowing Chang, he likely offered Annie a lot of money, and a lot of freedom, at whatever job he has for her.”
Pedro commented, “I pray that she is not one of Chang's assassins. If that is the case, we might as well just surrender, right now. Because I am not going to start a damn war with Darth Vader!”
Lee snapped, in a firm, even tone of voice, “Calm down. There are other people in this room.”
Pedro forced himself to calm down, as he conceded, in a normal tone of voice, “You're right.”
Lee stated, “Listen, Pedro. I doubt Annie would allow herself to become an assassin. She might be one of Chang's enforcers, but not his assassin. And if Annie is an enforcer, she would like use force mind tricks, and a telekinesis to keep from harming her targets. She has a lot of abilities she can use, to get what she wants, without being violent.'
Pedro said, “That is nice to hear. Still, her being in the city is scary enough, as is.”
Lee responded, “Not really. If you think about. Annie is no longer the self-loathing monster that Darth Vader was. Nor, is she the immature Anakin Skywalker. When I wrote about her, I put a lot of work into her character development. She has emotionally matured into a sane, well adjusted adult. Sure, she is more powerful than ever in the force. But, she now as a firm sense of right and wrong, along a sense of responsibility, behind that power.”
“Also, barring the gender change, and the associated problems with being a woman, she is likely very happy with her situation. She now has a completely healthy, youthful, adult body. She is out of that black suit. Also, she has friends, and a good life.”
“And given how I showed her what her life would have been like, if I had not had her captured by the Hell Sabers, I do not think she is unhappy with me. As such, I do not think she is after me. And I am so glad I wrote her that way. Though, her literally living in the same city we are in, does concern me. But, only for obvious reasons.”
Pedro replied, “I can see your point on this.”
Lee took a swallow of his glass of cola. He then set the glass down. He inquired, “So, anything else you would like to talk to me about?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. A few things. For example, the pit bosses for Chang's casino are Spike and Jet... Well, Jetta. I honestly did think that Jet would be turned into a woman, as well.”
Lee admitted, “That completely took me by surprise, as well. I set it up so that Jet would have the option to use the rejuvenation therapy that Ed used. No gender bending involved.”
Pedro responded, “I know. I guess something happened.”
Lee agreed, “Probably. Jet has always had good reasons for all his, or her, actions. As she is the most levelheaded of the entire Bebop group.”
Pedro stated, “Agreed. And I also agree with Chang's choice of making them the pit bosses.”
Lee said, “Yea. They are pretty sharp, and fairly honest move on Chang's part. And Jetta will likely keep the body count and violence low, on the gaming floor. Jetta has never been cold blooded.”
Pedro stated, “Yes. And that thought helps calm my nerves, given the situation at hand.”
Lee commented, “At least with Chang, the serenity crew, and the bebop crew, they will not play games. If they are going to hurt, or kill someone, they are going to be straightforward about it. And they will usually warn that person, first.”
Pedro said, “I know. I don't have to worry about being poisoned by them.”
Lee replied, “Yes. That is a good example of what I am talking about.”
(_)
Lee and Pedro then talked for another ten minutes, on a few other issues. Such, as what was going on in other parts of the island, that both men thought the other made need to be aware of.
At the end of their conversation, Lee stated, “Well, I guess I had better head out. I have some serious thinking to do about my future.”
Pedro requested, “Yes. You do. But, before you leave, I want to see how good you are at throwing. And not just at cards.”
Lee stated, “I am not throwing knives. I have found that things can break real easily.”
Pedro said, “Fair enough. How about a coin?”
Lee inquired, “How about a U.S. quarter?”
Pedro stated, “That will work.”
Lee mentioned, “And I will be using my precognition.”
Pedro replied, “That is fine, as well.”
Lee said, “Now to find something to use as a target.”
Lee and Pedro got up and walked out of the corner of the booth, and into the restaurant proper.
Lee noticed that there were no other customers in the room. Only Mary, Lori, and George. Mary and Lori had sat down, in stools, at the counter. George was talking to them, as he stood across the counter.
Lee thought, 'Good. There will be no witnesses, except Lori, George, and Mary. And they clearly know to keep quiet on what Pedro and I discuss here. Or, I would have been captured, a long time ago. Now, how am I going to do this.'
As the two man looked around, Lee saw a vase, with a pink flower in it, the other side of the counter. Though, the vase was near the three employees of the diner.
Lee thought, 'That will do. Though, the vase is near those three. So, I better talk to them, before I do this. Also, I probably need to move the vase. And I know just where to put it.'
As Pedro stood were he was, Lee walked over to the three adults. Lee said, “Hello guys. I was wondering. Would you like to see a trick?”
The three adult employees stopped walking, as they turned to Lee.
Lori asked, “What kind of trick?”
Lee said, “If you are willing to part with that flower. I was planning to do a throw trick.”
Lori looked back at Mary and George. Both of them each nodded once. Lori then turned back to Lee, as she said, “Sure.”
Lee walked over and picked up the vase with the flower in it.
Lee then turned around, and walked back to the side of the room, where he and Pedro had been setting, away from everyone else in the diner.
Meanwhile, Pedro walked over to stand beside Mary, Lori.
Lee then set the vase on the table right in front of the side window, where the diner turned towards the corner.
Next, Lee walked back to where he was about thirty feet away from the vase, and about ten feet from the four other adults.
Lee looked over at them, as he said, “Pay attention.”
Lee turned around to face the vase, as he reached into his right pants pocket and pulled out a U.S. quarter.
Lee used his hands to set the quarter on his right thumb.
Lee then flipped the coin a foot into the air.
A second later, after the spinning coin reached its apex, and started falling, in the blink of an eye, Lee caught the coin between his right index and middle finger. He then swiftly flicked his right fingers and hand towards the vase, while he let go of the coin.
A split second later, the coin sliced through the flower, where the bloom met the stem.
As the bloom fell to the table, the coin bounced off the wall, and hit the floor.
Lee turned around, as Pedro, Lori, Mary, and George clapped for him performing his trick, for a few seconds.
As the four adults finished clapping, Pedro complimented, “That was very good.”
George said, “Nice trick.”
Mary commented, “That must have taken a lot of practice to learn.”
Lori stated, “I have seen better. But, not by much.”
Lee joked, “Thank you. And you can keep the change.”
This caused the other four other adults to laugh, for a few seconds.
As the laughter died down, Pedro said, “Well, it looks like it is time to hit the road.”
Lee replied, “I agree. And I hope everyone has a pleasant night.”
Lori said, “You to, Lee.”
Lee then realized something, as he thought, 'I better tell Pedro something about my bill, or he will wonder why I am not going to pay it. And I don't want him to know my meal and drink were on the house. Still, I know just what to say.'
Lee turned to Pedro, as he commented, “I already handled the bill for my order, tonight.”
Lori snickered a little from Lee's comment.
Pedro ignored Lori, as he turned to Lee. He replied, “Okay.”
Given Lee's meal and drink were on the house. He did not pay for them. Though, he did leave a tip for the employees. Which they were grateful for.
Meanwhile, Pedro paid his bill, and he tipped Lori.
After which, Pedro and Lee left the diner, one right after the other, though the front doors.
As Lee and Pedro walked outside, with them heading for their own cars, Lee thought, 'That was fun. Still, I really do have some thinking I need to do. And I know a good place to do it, at this time in the evening.”
Less than a minute later, Lee made it to his car, and he was soon on the road back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Eight minutes later, Lee had already parked his car, and walked into the hotel lobby. He soon made it into the hotel restaurant.
As he looked around, he saw Revy, and her group at the tables, by the stage, as they took turns singing karaoke. Though, the women did let others, in the room, whom were outside of their group, have turns at singing karaoke.
Right now, Dutch was doing a good job of singing a country western song.
As Lee turned and started walking towards the bar counter, he saw that Melvin was standing behind the counter.
Melvin was talking to man, from across the ground, whom had his back turned to Lee. With the other person was sitting on a stool, with an open bottle of beer in front of him. Also, there was no one else around the two men.
Lee thought, 'From the way the situation looks, I think this is one of Melvin's friends. It will be interesting to meet him.
As Lee walked towards them, he saw, that even from behind, that the man was a fair skin. He wore a green long sleeve shirt, brown pants, a black leather belt, black boots, and a white baseball cap.
From the man's skin complexion, on the exposed skin on the man's neck, along with the nearly white head of hair, that the man was likely in his mid-sixties.
Lee thought, 'It would make sense for Melvin to have friends his own age.'
Lee walked up to the two men, with Lee stating by the bar counter, to the left side of the man sitting in the stool.
Melvin turned to Lee, as he stated, “Hi Lee. I did not see you, nor Sam at dinner.”
Lee honestly answered, “Sam has been busy all week. And I decided to eat somewhere else. I just needed a break from a few things.” He the used his eyes to glance in the direction of Revy and the others in her group, by the stage.
Melvin understood what Lee meant, as he grinned. He said, “Got you.”
Lee turned back to the two men, as he inquired, “So, who is your friend?”
Melvin happily responded, “One of the most interesting people, I have ever met.”
Lee thought, 'Coming for you. That is saying a lot.'
The man sitting in the stool turned to face Lee, as Melvin introduced the two of them to each other, “Well, this is a good friend of mine, from way back. His name is, Burt. And Burt, this is Lee, one of my best, nicest, and most polite customers.”
As Lee looked at Burt's face, he instantly recognized him. It took every once of Lee's willed power not to show his fanboy side in front of Burt. And though he remained calm on the outside, he mentally squealed in joy, 'Holy shit! It is Burt Gummer. I am in the presence of a one of the greatest gun-nuts in the multiverse. A monster hunter extraordinaire. A survivalist with no peer. And while he can be rough around the edges. He is also a decent guy, once you get to know him. He practices gun safety. And he is one hell badass.'
'Rambo wishes he was this guy. I am so happy I wrote about him, so I would have a chance to meet him. And the best part is, I didn't really do anything to him, except give him the proverbial swift kick in the ass he needed to move on with his life, after his wife left him, and he blew up his home. To be honest, getting him out of Nevada was likely the best thing that ever happened to him.”
'And with the reality device he gained, he likely lead an even more colorful life than he already had. As hard as that is to believe.'
'Also, from Pedro, I already knew Burt was here. But, it is great to meet him in person. I would ask for his autograph, if I didn't know it would cause problems. And it makes sense that Burt would be Melvin's friend, since both of them are friends with Pedro.'
'And Melvin said, friends from way back. So, Burt and Melvin having been friends since they were in both Roanapur. With Burt knowing Melvin is Yurick, and he in hiding. And Burt likely knows while. And Burt keeps this quiet to protect his from, Melvin.'
'While, I am sure Burt knows about the Black Lagoon series. I know. I hinted at that, in my stories. I wonder if Melvin knows that Burt is a fictional character from the Tremors franchise? Not that it really matters. And asking that question would blow what little I have left of my cover.'
'In addition, even though I am sure Burt likely has a working reality device, somewhere on this island. Likely on his person, or in his own. I am not even going to try to even look for his reality device. Because I respect that man. And I do not want to drag him into my mess.'
Meanwhile, Burt extended his right hand towards Lee, as he said, “Nice to meet you, Lee.” He shrugged, to his right side, towards Melvin, as he continued, “And this Melvin here is a lot nicer guy than another Melvin I knew back home.”
Lee firmly gripped Burt's hand, with his own right hand. As Lee shook the badass' hand, he thought, 'I know who you are talking about, Burt. And no arguments there. And your handshake has the firm sincerity that I would come to expect from a honorable man such are yourself.' Lee said, “It is a nice to meet you, Burt.”
Both men noticed that the other man had a firm, but not tight handshake.
As they broke their handshake, Melvin stated, “I knew Burt from the town we both use to live in. He had the brains to leave long before things go out of hand. When the first signs started appearing.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that confirms that.'
Burt commented, “A long time ago, I learned to watch for the warning signs of trouble.”
Lee thought, 'That is an understatement, in so many ways.'
Melvin went onto say, “Anyway, Burt came to this town five years ago, and he set up shop here, on the island.”
Lee thought, 'That is around the same time you showed up, Melvin. That has to be more than consequence. But, I do not have the time, nor justification, to look into that little mystery.'
Melvin stated, “Burt, here, is likely the best gunsmith you will ever meet. If you ever need a gun repaired, let me know, and I will contact Burt here, for you.”
Burt smiled, as he said, “Lee, I would be more than happy to have your business. And I will do so at a reasonable price.”
Lee returned Burt's smile, as he replied, “Thank you for the offer.” He thought, 'Now to confirm something that Pedro said.' He inquired, “I take it the police know about you?”
Burt smile curled into a smirk, as he answered, “Of course. Their police chief took one look at my work and hired me, on the spot, to repair, customize, and help procure, their firearms. At a very good price rate, I might at. I got a wonderful contact with them. And the police let me get some good range time in with my weapons, on an outdoor field. Unlike the previous town I lived in.”
From the corner of his left eye, Lee saw Melvin roll he eyes for a few seconds. Lee then saw Melvin look back at Burt, and himself.
Lee then focused on Burt, as he replied, “I am glad to hear that.”
Melvin stated, “By the way, Lee. I heard about you win last night, at the casino. Congratulates.”
Burt inquired, “So, you are the person that won that million dollars in chips?”
Lee turned to look at both Burt and Melvin, as he commented, “Yes. But, it was someone else's money. I didn't even see a dime of it.
Melvin commented, “Well that sucks.”
Lee deadpanned, “No kidding.” He then continued, in a more normal tone of voice, “But, at least I still have bragging rights.”
Melvin smiled, as he agreed, “That you do.”
Burt complimented, “That is a good way to looked at it. And now you know you can handle playing high stakes poker.”
Lee thought, with amusements, 'On levels you don't even realize.'
Burt continued, 'And there is always, better luck next time.”
Lee agreed, “True.” He mentally added, 'That is what I like about you, Burt. You look the brighter side of things.'
Melvin asked, “So, what can I do for you, Lee?”
Lee answered, “I just came here for a cold bottle of beer.”
Melvin said, “Okay. One second.” He then leaned down, and pulled out a cold bottle of beer, from a decent brand.
Melvin set the bottle on the bar counter, between him and Lee.
Lee reached into one of his pockets, and pulled out a few one dollar bills. He checked what he had, to make sure he didn't accidentally give Melvin a couple of hundred dollar bills by mistake.
After Lee had the right cash in his hands, he pocketed the rest of the money. He then set the few dollars onto the counter, as he said, “This should cover it.”
Melvin collected the money, as he replied, “Thank you.”
As Lee picked up the cold bottle of beer, he said to Melvin, “Good night, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “Sleep well, Lee.”
Lee turned to Burt, as he stated, “It was nice meeting you, Burt. I hope to meet you again, sometime.” He bitterly thought, 'If I live that long. Which is looking more like that won't be the case.'
Burt happily said, “You as well, Lee.”
Lee turned around, and started walking toward the exit of the hotel restaurant, as he thought, 'Now, to got to a quiet place to think. Somewhere I can walk around. Which means the tightness of my suite is out. And I have know just the place to go, on the ground floor, where no one will likely bother me, during this time of the year.'
A few seconds later, Lee was out the open double-doors to the restaurant, as he headed for his destination, in another part of the hotel.
(_)
A few minutes before Lee left the restaurant, near the Devil's Hotel restaurant stage, Natsuru was sitting with her two lovers, and their three daughters. She turned her attention to the door, as she noticed Lee walk in.
Natsuru thought, 'I am glad that Lee finally showed up. Given what happened this morning, I would not be surprised if he did decide to leave town.'
Natsuru then watched as Lee walked up to the bar with Melvin and another man. She mentally reflected, 'I wonder who that is?'
Natsuru watched the three of them talk for a minute, then Lee bought a bottle of beer, and left.
Natsuru thought, 'I think someone needs to talk to him.' She turned to her family, as she said, “Girls, I will be back in a little while.”
Akira looked over at Natsuru, as she commented, “Okay. Have fun.” She then turned back to watching Dutch doing a good job of singing a western song on stage.
Natsuru then got up from her seat, and she started walking towards the exit of the restaurant. As she do so, she turned her head to looked at Melvin and the other man.
While her angle to them changed, she eventually got a good look at the other man's face. And she immediately realized who it was.
Natsuru thought, in surprise, 'My god! It is Burt Gummer from Tremors films and TV series... Oh yea... In the stories, Burt set up shop in Roanapur for a while. He even made Akira and Bob's revolvers. Also, he had a good business relationship with Hotel Moscow, and the Triad, in the city. So, it would make sense that Melvin would know him. And from the look of it, Melvin and Burt are friends.'
'Since this is a city of badasses. Just badasses that like to live a quiet life. It fits that Burt would end up here, as well. Also, that it might be the reason Burt showed up. He likely used the reality device to think of a town, at a specific time, that he could enjoy living in. And this town, at this time, fits the profile.'
'Though, I better not mention Burt to the others. Violin will got into full on fangirl mode, and risk exposing our presence to the public, here. Yet, I think it would be best if I leave Melvin alone about this. The more we leave each other alone, the less chance of Revy and the others learn who Melvin really is. And from them, Balalaika learning who he is, and coming after him.'
'Besides, both those men have been through enough, already.'
'Now, to go talk to, Lee.'
Natsuru then turned her attention back to the exit, as she continued following Lee, at a comfortable distance, to wherever Lee was headed.
(_)
At that moment, back at the bar counter, Burt turned to the stage, as he looked at Revy's group. He commented, “I see the girls finally showed up. With company.”
Melvin leaned over, as quietly said to Burt, “Please, keep voice down. Some of them have some very sharp hearing.”
Burt turned back to Melvin, as he leaned closer to friend. He softly responded, “I take, they don't know who you are?”
Melvin whispered, “Nope. And I would like to keep it that way.”
Burt leaned up, as he said, “I understand. We will talk about it, later. In more private surrounds.”
Melvin leaned back up, as he replied, “That will be fine with me.”
Burt got up from his stool. He picked up his beer and finished the last swallow. Next, he gently set the empty bottle back down on the counter, as he commented, “Well, I better head out.” He then pulled out a five dollar U.S. bill. He continued, “This could cover the drink and tip.”
Melvin picked up the bill, and looked at it. He turned to Bert, as he responded, “It will.”
Burt stated, “See you, later.”
Melvin said, “You too.”
Melvin then went to the front cash resigster, to ring up the sale, and collect his tip from the change.
While this went on, Burt turned and walked out of the restaurant. He soon reached his pickup truck, in the parking lot. After which, he got into his pickup truck, started it, and headed back to his home for the night.
(_)
Meanwhile, as Lee walked outside, by the Devil Hotel's outdoor pool, by the front left corner of the hotel. With the privacy finished on the front side of the pool area, being floor with the front outer wall of the hotel.
Given it was late autumn, with the constant cool weather, no one was around pool, at that time of the year.
The pool was a very large, rectangular shaped pool. That was a hundred yards long, and fifty yards wide. With the pool facing long ways, away from the left side of the Devil's Hotel building.
The shallow end was six feet deep, with the shallow end being about a twenty percent of the pool floor, was on one long end of the pool, deep. With the shallow end dropping off, with the rest of the pool being thirty feet feet deep. The far deep end of the pulled had three different diving boards, at different heights, from three different parts of the side of the far deep end of the pool.
There were ladders at several points, along the sides of the pool, to allow people to get out. And the two far shallow end corners had small steps leading into the pool, with a stainless steel guard rail leading down the center each of the steps.
There was a concrete deck around the pool, that stretched almost to the buildings. The concrete was mixed with very small seashells. With the floor of the desk sanded, to be flat, and not have the seashells sharp edged cut the bare feet of the swims.
Except for the walked ways leading to the hotel and fence doors, there some dirt areas lining the pool area, around the privacy fence and building. With large bushes planted in the dirt areas.
On the outer hotel walls, there were black painted lamps. And along the fence, there were black painted lamps, of the same style, as those on the outer walls.
The pool itself was lined with padding, with a blue and white pattern. With the pooled itself using a saltwater regulation system, instead of chemicals, to keep things from growing in water of the pool.
Even in the autumn, as it was not, the hotel staff maintained the pool, and kept it clean. So, that even though, it was to cold to swim. Those customers that did check out the pool, would see it was well maintained. Allowing the hotel staff, to entice the customers to return to the hotel, during a warmer season of the year.
As Lee casually walked further outside, he saw that it had finally gotten dark. Though, the lamps on the outside walls, and fence, of the hotel, provided plenty of light to see with.
And Lee found the area to have the perfect eerie, yet comfortable, environment he needed to do some serious, deep thinking about his life.
Lee then opened his cold bottle of beer, in his left hand, and tossed the cap into a nearby trash can. Lee then began drinking from a bottle of beer, as he slowly walked around the outdoor pool at the Devil's hotel, in a clockwise rotation.
There was no one else there, and the solitude that Lee felt, let him relax enough think about how screwed up his life had become, compared to his already screwed up life.
Suddenly, Lee heard a female voice said, from behind him, “You look like a guy with a lot on his mind.”
Lee came to a stop. He calmly turned around, and he saw Natsuru, as a woman, wearing a simple blue pants, a white blouse, and blue tennis shoes, standing six feet from him.
Lee took another drink from his beer bottle. He then honestly answered, “You don't know the half of it.”
Natsuru offered, in a supportive tone of voice, “I am willing to listen. And I hope that by me doing so, it will help make up for our actions this morning.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And I have to be careful about what I say to you. Still, you are trying to help. So, I will let you.'
Lee stated, “I am already over that... And alright, I will be honest with you. I am pretty much screwed. The hammer is falling down on me, and I cannot stop it.”
Natsuru asked, “How so?”
Lee replied, “I am a wanted man, back in the states. It doesn't matter if I did the crime, or not. The government wants my ass.”
Natsuru questioned, “What about the courts, and due process?”
Lee snorted, as he thought, 'Given I wrote it that you spent a few years as a cop, it is not surprising that you would bring up those details. Still...” Lee answered, in a sober tone of voice, “It seems due process, and justice, no longer exist in this world. Maybe such concepts never did, to begin with. But now, such concepts are like fairy tails. They don't exist here.”
Natsuru pointed out, “Are you so sure? We know you are friends with the local police chief.”
Lee inquired, “You heard about that?”
Natsuru commented, “After what you pulled in the casino, with that quote you made, at the moment the police showed up, everyone figured it out.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Damn. I was worried that would happen. I knew if I ever quoted anything, or make any injokes, that it would get me in trouble. And I guess I am right. Also, Pedro was my ace in the hole, and I was forced to play that card in that game. Pun intended.'
Lee sighed. He then stated, “Ah, the casino game. I guess that was to be expected. Was Revy always this greedy?”
Natsuru replied, “She use to be a lot worse.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. Looting from the dead is about as greedy as one can get. Fortunately, she seems to have gotten much better, even before I wrote about her. She may have been a questionable influence on Rock. But, Rock was a good influence on her. That is why, even after everything I put them through, I made sure they stated together.'
Lee said, “I will take your word for that.”
Natsuru asked, “So, what is your relationship with Pedro? And why can he not help you with this?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well give her an answer. Ironically. Given our situations. It will be a fairly honest answer.'
Lee explained, “Well, to answer your questions. It is both a, yes and no, situation. It is more of a situation where we found ourselves in a mess, and we both are helping each other, as we try to work our way out of our mess. And I don't think he can help me with this. Before the talent contest, no one knew I was here. And the police chief could keep the heat off of me.”
“But, after the talent contest, and yesterday's poker game, there is not much he can do. While rumors of the talent contest only mentioned my presence in passing. After that poker game. Even if it is not directly hitting the media circuits. When a person wins a million dollars at the gaming tables. Even though I didn't get to keep any of the winnings. It is going to draw worldwide attention.”
“Everyone knows I am here. The problem is how they are going to come after me. And the police chief cannot protect me from that kind of heat.”
Natsuru suggested, “Then run, Lee”
Lee stated, with defeat, and tiredness, in his tone of voice, “Where? If you haven't noticed, I am don't have a lot of money. Plus, my options are extremely limited. I burned my passport, and other IDs, when I first got here, so no one could learn who I really am. So, I cannot leave this country. And I lucked out that the local government here ignores the strict Mexican immigration and foreigner laws. But, for me, there is nowhere left that I can run too.”
Natsuru began, “Well, I...”
From Natsuru's facial expressions and body language, Lee could tell she was mentally struggling with something important.
Lee mentally guessed, 'Yea. I know what you want to offer me the option of reality travel. But, Rock probably forbid you to mention that technology to outsiders. I am starting to regret making Rock so strict on that issue. Still, let us settle this before you say something you may regret later.'
Lee said, “Don't worry about it. I will deal with it myself.”
Lee saw Natsuru stopped mentally struggling with herself, as he body language and facial expression relaxed.
Natsuru inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Are you sure?”
Lee honestly replied, “No. But, I don't want to drag you into my mess.”
Natsuru grinned, as she said, “I appreciate that. Have a good night, Lee.”
Lee responded, “You too, Natsuru.”
Lee watched Natsuru turn around, and walk back inside the hotel.
Once Natsuru was out of sight, from the window paned double-hinged double-doors, that lead from the hotel interior, to the pool area, he turned around and started back to slowly walking around the pool, in a clockwise rotation.
And as Lee walked, he was careful not to get so caught up in his thoughts, that he accidentally fell into the pool.
While Lee slowly continued to walk around the pool, he though, with concern, and tiredness, 'I probably need to start trying to decide who to surrender too. I am not going to surrender to any government, over this. They will disappear me to some place where I would wish I was dead. I will kill myself first, before I willing go with them. Which, unfortunately, is an option.'
'If Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira were in charge of this hunt, I would likely have already surrendered to them. They are twisted, but I would likely weather the revenge they would have on me. And I would still be in one piece, afterward. They would likely also cure my cancer.'
'But, Rock and Revy are in charge. With Rock having one of the most creative, and devious minds, in the multiverse. And Revy. Well, I can name actual demons, across the multiverse, that are genuinely nicer than her, on some of her good days. Though, I have to admit, Revy has gotten a lot better, in her temperament, than she use to be.'
'Then, there is Eda and Yolanda. I haven't spoken much to Yolanda. But, all things considered. Given I restored her youth, and replaced her lost eye, I would guess I am in good standing with her. And I have no illusions about Eda. That was a one night stand, which meant nothing lasting between us. And we both slept with each other under false pretenses.'
'She pretending to be just a girl working a hamburger food truck, and I did not let her know that I was the writer she was hunting. People tend to become very unpredictable, and hypocritical, in such situations. And Eda can be just as dangerous, and scary, as Revy, when she wants to be. That is one coin toss I want to avoid flipping, unless I have no choice.'
'My instincts tell me not to discount Chang, as an option. The problem is I have no idea where I stand with him. I put that man through the ringer. I took him to the top of the world, in every possible way, and then I tore him down. Now, he is back on his way to the top, on my home Earth. Which honestly scares me on a few levels.'
'Still, River is clearly keeping my identity a secret, or I would be dead, or worse, right now. So that, and the gift she gave me this morning, are positive signs towards Chang's group.'
'Though, if I go to Chang, I need to take into account those under him, or nearby. Annie is likely on the fence. As long as I am nice to her, I probably have little to worry about from her.'
'Spike and Mal probably want my blood. And I am sure that many of the rank and file of Chang's employment, whom are mostly women, were under Chang's employment in Roanapur. And it is likely a number of the women I saw working at the casino, were originally men, that I had turned into women, and I had brainwashed. So, they are a question mark.'
'Though, given I have not seen any of the rank and file staff, looking around town for me. I can guess that Chang, and the others, have no informed them of my stories. And that more for me, in a number of ways, than against me.'
'Still, at worst, if the rank and file found out who I was, and what I did to them, they would likely just shoot me dead. Not a bad way to go, considering my other options. But, I doubt they would risk Chang's wrath.'
'Jet, Faye, River, and the rest of the Serenity crew could probably care less about me. Except, Jayne. Though, I gave him a good friend and drinking buddy, in the form of Bob. So, I think Jayne would probably just punch me in the jaw, or gut, and walk away.'
'I could confess to Sam. He seems like a nice guy. We agree we are good friends. If not best friends. And I know he has friends of questionable morality, whom probably have the resources, to at least help me escape this country, if I wanted too.'
'But, even if Sam believed me, it is toss up if he would help me. And I risk flushing my friendship with him down the toilet for keeping these major, life changing secrets, from him, for so long.'
'And now that I think about it, Pedro might be able to get me out of the county. But, like I said to Natsuru, there is nowhere for me to go. And the cancer is going kill me in a few months, anyway.'
'My situation is becoming a question of how, and where, I want to die?...'
'Though, whatever I decide, I am going to have to decide soon. If I don't, someone else, or the cancer, will decide for me.'
'But, for now, I need to get some sleep.'
Lee then finished his bottle of beer. After which, he began to head back inside the hotel.
Lee tossed his empty bottle of beer into the trash can, which he passed by, as he headed for the hotel doors.
Once Lee was inside the hotel, he headed for the hotel lobby, and the front elevator bay.
Soon after, Lee was on the third floor.
A minute later, he made it into his suite, where he would get some sleep, for the night.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 17: “Crashing Down.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Two days after the poker game between Lee and River, it was one five PM, on a cool, mostly cloudy day, with a light breeze.
Lee was coming back, in his pink Cadillac, to the Rats Nest, from having nice lunch at a wonderful cuban restaurant.
Presently, the windows and roof of Lee's Cadillac were raised.
When Lee reached the Rats Nest parking lot, to the left of the Rats Nest building, he parked his car near the back of the parking lot. So, it would not attract to much attention.
Lee got out, as he planned to head back into the bar, and wait for Sam to show up, to continue their poker game.
Lee and Sam had met that morning, at the Rats Nest. After Sam left a message at the Devil's Hotel check in desk, for Lee, to meet him at the Rats Nest bar, later that morning, right are the bar opened.
Later that morning, both Lee and Sam meet each other, in the Rats Nest parking lot. When they both parked their cars. Lee with his pink Cadillac. And Sam with his four door gray car.
They then both headed inside, and played poker, at their usual table, for over an hour. Then, when it was a quarter passed noon, they decided that it was time to get some lunch.
Though, the two men decided to get lunch at to different places. And with both of them having a car, this was not an inconvenience for either of them.
Now, at one five PM, Lee just had to wait for Sam to show back up, before they could continue to enjoy the afternoon together.
While Lee locked, and shut his car door, he heard thunder. He looked up at the ever darkening storm clouds.
Lee thought, 'This storm has been building all day. Except for that, this has been a good day weather wise. A nice pleasant breeze from the gulf, with cool temperatures. But, not cold. Still, I do not mind getting a little wet.'
'And I am glad that my car windows and roof are raised. So, I don't have to go to the trouble to do so, now.'
'Now, to get inside, before it starts to rain.'
Lee then walked around his car. As Lee walked to the side of the building, towards the front side of the Rats Nest bar, he noticed three men in casual clothing, consisting of pants and shirts. The three men were walking towards him, from across the street, from the Rats Nest bar parking lot.
What concerned Lee was that not only were the three men were approaching him, but they were doing so at a brisk pace.
Suddenly, Lee's precognition screamed danger.
Lee thought, with worry, 'If those men are who I think they are, I am screwed. And there is not time to get back into my car, or make it into the bar. I am going to have to run for it. Fortunately, passed the low hanging concrete wall behind the bar, there is an alleyway that leads into the heart of the city. And I know this town well enough, that if I can get there, I can lose them.'
Lee immediately turned around, and ran for the concrete wall.
As Lee started running, the three men behind him, gave chase.
It only took Lee two seconds to turned to his left side, as he leaned over, and rolled off the four foot tall the concrete wall behind the parking lot to the Rats Nest, with him landing on his feet. It was a trick that Sam had taught him in the time loop.
Once Lee was in the paved alleyway, on the other side of the wall, Lee started running down left of the Rats Nest bar building, away from the building and his car, as he headed towards the exit of the alleyway he wanted to go to.
With that exit to the alleyway, leading to two lane street, being sixty feet from where Lee entered the alleyway.
As Lee was running down the alleyway, Lee could hear the men chasing him, land onto the pavement of the alleyway. Their booted footsteps were loud enough that Lee could tell that they were only thirty feet away, and closing in on him.
Lee could see he was getting closer to the exit of the alleyway, as he thought, 'I just got to get to the exit, then I can lose them. After that, I will figure out what to do. I might have to surrender to someone. I am just not sure who.'
As Lee made it to twenty feet from the exit of the alleyway, a black van drove up in front of the exit, blocking the way.
Lee saw the right side of the van facing him. And through the windows, Lee noticed the driver sitting on the left side of the front seats of the van. On the right side of the van, directly facing Lee, was a large sliding door, that was currently closed.
A few seconds after Lee saw his exit had been cut off, he immediately came to a stop. He thought, 'If I believe what is about to happen, happens, I might as well take care of my hat and glasses, while I still have time.
Lee immediately took off his hat and glasses. He swiftly put his glasses in his left interior coat pockets. And he tucked his hat in the back of his pants, under his jacket.
Suddenly, Lee saw, in front of him, the sliding door to the van opened up, to reveal two men, in casual clothing, each with a sub-machine guns pointed at him.
One of the men yelled, in english, “Freeze.”
Lee thought, 'I have no other choice.' Lee immediately stopped moving, as he held up his hands.
Lee heard the three men from behind him finally catch up to him, and stop right behind him.
Lee remains expressionless, as he kept his hands in the air. He did not dare look behind him, nor make any sudden movements.
Though, Lee mentally screamed, 'Shit! What am I going to do now? None of my options are good. If someone is tailing me, these men are likely dead. But, if they are not, I am likely worse off.'
Lee felt one of the men, behind him, grip his right wrist, and hold it, behind Lee's lower back, with the man's on right hand. The man then reached up and gripped his left wrist, with the man's own left wrist, bringing it down, to Lee's lower back.
Lee then felt them slip on, and tighten plastic cuffs around his wrists, behind him lower back.
Lee thought, 'At least they are not too tight, and not blocking the blood circulation to my hands.'
From behind, another man swiftly slipped a black hood over Lee's head, blocking his sight.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Just great. This is so cliche. Still, it is clear whomever is interested in me back home, does not want my capture to be on any official record. If that was not the case, they would have sent a Mexican state police officer to serve me an arrest warrant, back at the Devil's Hotel.'
Lee then felt sets of hands, on both side of his, grip his elbows, and force him to swiftly walk towards the van.
As they walked, in a hurried manner, Lee heard one of the men behind him say, “We have you now, scumbag.”
Lee did not respond.
A few seconds later, Lee felt himself being pushed into the van.
A couple of seconds afterward, Lee heard the others getting into the van, with the sliding door of the van being closed behind them.
(_)
At that moment, on the street, the van was park on, a hundred feet behind the back of the van, a pink motorcycle with a driver had just drove up onto the street, from around the corner, where the Rats Nest was.
The driver was dressed in white t-shirt, brown pants, brown belt, white tennis shoes, and a brown robes.
The driver also wore a brown helmet, with tinted visor, that completely covered their face and head. Along with that, there was a metal cylinder strapped to the right side of the person's belt.
As the black van drove off, the motorcycle and driver followed.
(_)
Inside the van, Lee felt the van begin to move. From the sound of the motor, revving up, their speed was picking very quickly.
Lee thought, 'They probably want to get out off this island, before anyone realizes I am missing.'
Just then, someone ordered, “Sitting on your knees, and bend downward.'
Lee complied.
Lee moved from his sitting position, to kneeling on both knees, on the vans bar metal floor, with him bending his upper body in a downward angle, towards the floor of the van.
Lee thought, 'This position is quite uncomfortable, and likely intentionally so. But, along with my cuffed hands, this position also prevents me from making any movements. Still, my conscience demands that I at least warn them about what is going on. Even if they won't listen to me.'
Through the hood cover his face, Lee stated, in a calm, yet clear, and strong tone of voice, in english, “I don't know what you have been told. But, you need to let me go, before the others after me, find us, and kill you all.”
Lee heard someone yell, “Shut up, traitor!”
Lee sadly thought, 'So, whatever lies they were told about me, involved false accusations of treason. That means I can never go home, again. Still, I have to try one more time.'
While making sure he did not sound desperate, Lee calmly stated, in a louder tone of voice, “I am not saying this for my benefit, but for yours! You have no idea what is really going on! And I am trying to save your lives!”
Lee suddenly felt a someone pull the back of his hood to were he leaned up.
Lee then felt the barrel of a gun press against his right temple, as he heard a male voice say, in english, “Shut up, or we will kill you! Understand?!”
Lee silently nodded.
Lee felt the barrel of the gun removed from his temple, as the same male voice said, “Good.”
Lee then was pushed back down into the crouching position
Lee thought, with annoyance, 'What idiots. And the worst part is they likely don't realize they are being used.'
(_)
At that moment, the captain of the black ops team that had just capture Lee, was sitting in the front passenger seat of the van, as one of his subordinates drove them as quickly out of town as possible.
Like the rest of his team, the captain was dressed in casual clothing. And they were all armed with pistols. A few of them even had a sub-machine guns, as well.
The captain had just listened to what their target has just said, as he thought, with concern, 'Even though we have the target, and we are heading out of this town, something does not feel right about the situation. This was suppose to be a simple snatch and grab operation. I was told this guy we got is a nobody whom got a hold of top secret information, and he fled to mexico to sell that information to the drug cartels. And by doing so, he is both a traitor, and a terrorist, to his country.'
'Yet, the way he was screaming at us, right now. It clear he is more concerned with our lives, than his own. A traitor and a terrorist would not be concerned for our lives. They would try to be cutting a deal, or something. This man is not.'
'Something odd is going on here.'
'This is further proven by the last few days we have been secretly following him on foot, and with this black van. The only ones he has talked to are some clearly insane women, a cute bartender, and bearded man.'
'And that poker game he was in, was just plain nuts.'
'He was clearly on the receiving end of that game, and was no friend to that casino owner. And what is with that owner and her girlfriend? Chang and River. They look like the characters with those same names, from those respective series. Except River dyed her hair red... But, that would be impossible...'
The captain then continued his thoughts, with even more concern, ''Though, now that I think about it. Those other girls the target was with looked familiar too... I think we may have stepped into something bigger, that our superiors didn't want us to learn about.'
Just as the captain was about to order the hood taken off Lee, to question him, his van came under attack.
Everyone in the van felt as the vehicle was turned on its left side, and slide to a stop, on the room. With the right side of the van, with the sliding door, facing upwards.
(_)
As Lee was left laying on the inside of the van, he heard the driver turned off the motor to the van.
A second later, a man asked, in english, “Is anyone hurt?”
Lee remained silent, as he heard other voices say, “No.”
The man then stated, “Alright. Get out. But, leave the target in the van.”
Lee thought, 'This is good. It means I have time to come up with a plan of escape. But, for now. I will listen, and hear how the situation plays out.'
(_)
The other men in the vehicle quickly opened the passenger and sliding doors, to get out.
As they swiftly got out, with them helped each other out of the van, and onto the ground, they noticed that the sky had gotten darker, with the clouds now blocking out most of the light. There was lightning a few miles away, that illuminated the area with flashes of lightning, accompanied with cracks of thunder.
When the men were all out of the van, and on the road, they had pulled out their weapons, as they looked around them.
Including the captain, there were seven men in total, in the group.
All of them had their weapons at the ready, as they looked around. Two of the men had sub-machine guns, while the others had their pistols drawn.
They all noticed there were no any vehicles pass by them, on the road, from either direction.
The captain looked around, as he thought, 'What tipped us over? I don't see anything. But, it had to be something. Still, we had just exited the town, with the buildings about a two hundred yards away from us. With the bridge right in front of us. And there was not on around, except for us. Not even any cars. Something is very wrong here.'
'Perhaps the target is telling the trouble. My orders, are orders. And I cannot just cut him loose, without a damn good reason.'
The captain then turned around, and he saw behind the van, about fifty feet from them, a woman in a brown robe, wearing a brown helmet over her face and head. She was standing beside a pink motorcycle, on the right side of the road. With both the woman and the motorcycle facing them.
The motorcycle was to the woman's left side.
The captain stated, “Six o'clock boys.”
All his men turned around, to see the woman and the motorcycle.
They watched as the woman the unstrapped a metal cylinder from her belt, and she held the item with both of her hands.
Suddenly, they watched as a red energy blade extended from the cylinder, upward, and away from the woman. With blade being around three feet long.
The captains eyes went wide, as he thought, 'Is that?... It is. And it is red!'
Then, the men watched as the pink motorcycle transformed into a tall, pink robot, whom was holding a flaming sword, in each of her two hands.
The captain thought, 'Oh shit. The target was right. We didn't know what is going on. And if that robot is who I think it, we are not getting out of this alive. But, we still have to try.'
The captain ordered, “Fire men! Fire!”
As the men started firing their weapons, the woman used her lightsaber to deflected the bullets that approached her, while the bullets bounced off the pink robot. With both the woman and the robot charging at the men.
Within a few seconds, the woman and the robot bridged the gap between them and the men.
As the two reached the men, they started using their energy weapons to literally slice through the men, with the men dying before their body parts hit the ground.
The captain was the last one remaining alive, as the woman and robot approach him.
A second before the two reached the captain, the captain ran out of ammo, as he thought, 'A Sith, and IDW Arcee. At least I am going to be killed by the best.'
A split second later, the woman used her lightsaber to decapitate him, killing him instantly.
(_)
Meanwhile, several seconds later, inside the back of the van, during on its left side, Lee was still laying on his side, on the interior left wall of the van.
Lee thought, 'Well, the gunfire stopped. So, whatever happened outside is over. The question is what is going to happen now? With the van tipped over, if these men won, they might just cut their losses, kill me, and escape the island on foot.'
'If someone else won, and left on their own, without checking the van. I may have to spend the next little while getting loose from my bindings. But, I know I can do it. It will just take time.'
Suddenly, Lee feel large metallic hands gently left him out of the van and set him on the onto the pavement, in a sitting position.
Then, some mysterious force remove his hood from his head, and snapped his plastic cuffs to pieces.
Lee quickly brought his hands around to his front, as he used his hands to rub his wrists, while he looked up to see his rescuers, standing ten feet in front of him.
While there was still enough light coming through the clouds to see whom his rescues were, it did begin to lightly rain.
And he forced him to remain calm, as he immediately recognized his two rescuers.
In front of him, to his left, stood Annie, whom had her lightsaber deactivated, and hooked to the right side of her belt. In addition, she tucked her helmet under her right arm.
To Lee's right side, standing to Annie's left side, was Arcee, in robot mode, with her swords sheathed.
He thought, 'It might be best to remain calm. And not just for the fact that Annie would immediately pick up something if I wasn't calm. But, these two are likely the two most dangerous women in the city. And given the women I deal with, everyday, in this city. That is saying a lot.'
Lee then looked around and he saw the sliced remains of the men that had kidnapped him.
Lee swiftly pulled out and pulled out his hat and glasses, as he grimly thought, 'Looks like I was wrong about Annie preferring to take the non-violent approach.'
Annie asked, in english, “Lee, are you unharmed?”
Lee looked over at her, as he thought, 'Given the poker game. It is no surprise that both of them know my name.' He answered, “I will be fine.”
Annie then walked over to Lee, and offered him a hand up.
Lee accepted Annie's right hand, with his own right hand.
As Lee stood up, Annie continued to hold his hand, as she stated, “You are ill, Lee. Very ill.”
Lee looked into Annie's eyes, as he gently used his left hand to grip Annie's right hand. He quietly said, “I know.”
Lee and Annie then let go of each other, and they both dropped their hands to their sides.
Arcee stated, in english, “Lee is dying. I believe the illness is called, cancer. And the cancer has riddled his body. The illness appears terminal.”
Lee turned to look at both women at the same time, as he admitted, “I am aware of this.”
Arcee commented, “That actually explains a lot.”
Lee inquired, “What do you mean?”
Lee then noticed that the lips of both women curled into smirks, towards him.
Lee realized, as he thought, with more out of concern, than worry, 'Oh crap. They know. But, how?' He said, “You both know? Don't you?”
Arcee continued to smirk at Lee, as she said, “Yes.”
Annie smirked, as well. She replied, “Anyone else would be presently freaking out by seeing Arcee in robot mode, me with my lightsaber, and this carnage around us.”
Lee thought, 'My poker face finally came back to bite me. Still, it is best to be polite.' He complimented, “Well, you two do excel in the carnage department.”
Both women giggled, for a few seconds, at Lee's comment.
Lee thought, 'Good. I made them happy. And while I am not happy that lives were lost, today. Given they had kidnapped me, and what was likely going to happen to me, if they had accomplished their mission, I feel nothing towards these men's deaths.'
As the two women calmed down, Arcee guessed, “So, you are trying to steal one of the reality devices, from Revy and her friends, in the hopes of not only escaping from them, into the multiverse? But, to also find a cure for your cancer?”
Lee stated, “Yes. To both questions.”
Annie pointed out, “I am sure you are aware that Bob was not able to find a cure for B's cancer? Except for the vat treatment.”
Lee flatly admitted, “Yes. I am aware of that, given I wrote the story in question. And I realize that story has now come back to bite me in the ass, big time.”
The two women erupted into full blown laughter, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lee said, “Still, I have to try.”
Arcee stated, “Good luck.”
Annie then did a Yoda interpretation, as she said, “Do. Or, do not. There is no try.” She then added, in her normal voice, “That is for making me the butt of all those Star Wars jokes.”
Lee could not help both laugh with the two women.
As all three calmed down, Lee commented, “I am not going to apologize for the jokes. It felt like they wrote themselves. But, I did make the jokes clean, and they are not insulting. Just slightly annoying.”
Annie conceded, “True. Which is why I have not force choked you a little, over the matter.”
Lee asked, “And I appreciate that. Onto a more immediate concern. You two are not going to harm, or kill me, for what I did to you.”
Arcee replied, “Nah. Why would I? You gave me some greats friends, some good times, and a nice moonlighting job, with an employer I respect.”
Annie admitted, “Though, I am a little miffed with you, concerning a few things. You did get me out of that black suit, and made my body healthy again. So, no. I am not going to do anything to you.”
Lee breathed a sigh of relief. He then inquired, “Thank you. Now, one more question. You are not going to tell the others, are you? If so, please let me get to my car, and give me a day's head start.”
Annie said, “No. I do not plan too.”
Arcee smiled wickedly, as she replied, “There would be no fun in telling others. Not even Chang.”
Annie said, “Still, Chang wants to see you. And given this kidnapping attempt. I think it might be best if you come with us.” She mentally added, 'And since Chang asked us to follow you, I think he already figured out, who you are, Lee. Or, River told him. Though, knowing River, it is more likely Chang just figured out your identity, on his own.'
Lee stated, “I think you are right. I would prefer to see Chang, over what those guys likely had planned for me.”
Annie replied, “I agree.”
Arcee commented, “I will be ready in a second.”
The two humans then turned to look at Arcee. A second later, the two humans watched as Arcee transformed into motorcycle mode.
Lee thought, with astonishment, 'That is impressive. Though, I wonder...' He questioned, “I take it seeing that transformation, in person, never gets old?”
Annie cracked a grin, as she happily stated, “Nope. It never does.”
Annie then put up her brown helmet back on. Next, she got onto the motorcycle, with Lee getting on the bike, behind her.
As Lee got comfortable on the seat, he adjusted his blue baseball cap backwards, so the wind would not knock it off his head. He then said, “Just so you know. Given the way motorcycle safety is. I have to put my arms around your waist, while we ride. I do not mean to offend you.”
Arcee commented, from the speakers of her motorcycle mode, “He is correct.”
Annie said, “Okay. You may do so.”
Lee carefully put he arms around Annie's lower waist, while being extra careful not to accidentally brush against Annie's breasts.
Annie then started the motorcycle, and they roared down the down the road.
Fortunately, Lee's glasses and cap did much to protect his eyes and the top of his head. But, the rain drops still slightly stunt on the exposed parts of his face and hands, as they rode down the street.
A few minutes later, they reached the casino, and entered the back garage, through on of the back bays, that Arcee used a frequency signal to open.
After they rolled to a stop, inside an open area of the garage, Arcee then sent a signal for the garage door she used, to start to close.
The door closed, as both Lee and Annie got off the bike.
Lee then turned his baseball cap, around, clockwise, so the cap faced the right way. Fortunately, Lee's hair was so short, shift his cap like that did not bother him.
As soon as they got off of Arcee, the autobot transformed into robot mode. Fortunately, the garage was tall enough for Arcee to fully stand inside of.
Annie took off her helmet, and set it on a near by table.
Meanwhile, Lee looked around. Fortunately, the yellow ceiling lights in the room, provided plenty of illumination.
Lee saw that part of the garage was like an auto mechanic pit, while the other parts were parking spaces for Chang's fleet of cars and limo. Along with a few trucks.
Suddenly, Lee heard a female voice, to his right side, say, in english, “Hi guys.”
Lee turned to see Kaylee, wearing pink shirt, under green coveralls and black boots. The green coveralls were only zipped up to Kaylee's stomach, to show her pink shirt underneath.
Kaylee was about twenty feet from the three other individuals in the large room.
Annie and Arcee also turned to Kaylee.
Annie said, “Hi Kaylee.”
Arcee asked, “Hello Kaylee. How is the job going?”
Kaylee answered, “Great. It is always fun working on classic machines. Still, I think you are the most classiest.”
Arcee grinned towards Kaylee, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Lee thought, 'Well, I guess I was right about Kaylee job, and her mood at her new job. Damn. I am good at this.'
Kaylee then turned to Lee, as she asked, “Who is this?”
Annie introduced, “This is Lee. Chang wants to have a talk with him.”
Kaylee inquired, “So, you are the guy that beat, River?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Kaylee commented, “You don't look like much.”
Lee could here Arcee and Annie snickering beside him.
Lee thought, 'Compared to the men you work with, probably not. Still, it is best I don't stay here too long.' He said, “Perhaps. Well anyway, I don't want to keep Chang waiting.”
Kaylee said, “It would be unwise to keep him waiting. Anyway, nice to meet you.”
Lee replied, “Same here.”
Annie turned to Arcee, as she said, “I will see you later, Arcee.”
Arcee looked over and down, at Annie, as she commented, “I look forward to it.”
Lee turned to Arcee, as he said, “It was nice to meet you are Arcee.”
Arcee turned to Lee, as she replied, “Same here, Lee.”
Annie looked over at Lee, as she stated, “This way, Lee.”
Lee then followed Annie deeper into the hotel, and to a nearby door, to one of the back hotel hallways.
As soon as Annie and Lee were out of earshot, Kaylee turned to Arcee, as she commented, “Given how backwater this planet is, Lee sure is handling meeting a large talking robot, such as yourself, very well.”
Arcee turned to look at Kaylee. She thought, 'It might be best not to tell her. Still, I have to give her some excuse... Ah, that will work.' She said, “From what I have been informed, he has been living around Revy and the others for months, at the other hotel, on the north end this island. At this point, I doubt anything surprises him anymore.”
Kaylee giggled for a few seconds. She then responded, “Yea. Being around those lunatics for an extended among of time, would harden just about anyone to surprises. That is probably only of the reasons he was able to beat River.”
Arcee honestly asked, “I guess so. Did you lose any money on that game?”
Kaylee answered, “A little. But, just a little. You?”
Arcee stated, “Actually, I made a little money. I bet on Lee.”
Kaylee inquired, “Not complaining. But, why did you bet on Lee?”
Arcee smirked, “Because, by nature, I am a risk taker. And I figured that River was such a sure bet, that I would take a risk and bet on Lee. And I am glad I did... He has definitely been very rewarding to me.” She mentally added, 'In ways I cannot tell your right now, without giving away Lee's identity.'
Kaylee laughed for several seconds. She then stated, “Only you, Arcee. Only you.”
In response, Arcee smiled towards Kaylee.
The two friends then continued their conversation, for a little while. Before they went back to their duties.
(_)
Meanwhile, Annie silently escorted Lee to the back elevator bay.
They walked side by side. With Annie to Lee's left side.
As they passed by the enclosure, Lee saw the tiger inside, playing with a large ball.
While they walked, Lee asked, “So, how is the tiger?”
Annie answered, “She is doing fine. Why do you ask?”
Lee coyly said, “Just wondering.”
Annie stated, “Well, I did hear a rumor that the tiger to loose, and mauled some poor guy.”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, “Actually, the tiger didn't maul me. She even let me pet her. And I was able to get her into the enclosure before one of us was hurt.”
Annie turned to Lee, as she inquired, with a bit of surprise in her tone of voice, “That was you?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Annie asked, “How did you keep that tiger calm?”
Lee answered, “Most animals, such as cats and dogs, even large cats and dogs, can sense a person's inner emotions. I just kept calm, and I used my experience with pet cats to help keep the tiger from harming me, and convincing her to walk into the enclosure.”
Annie complimented, “Nice work.”
Lee mentioned, “Well, that, and the fact that I am so use to having to deal with Revy and her group, on a daily basis, that a tiger is tame in comparison.”
Annie laughed, for a few seconds. She then said, “No arguments there.”
They then reached the back elevator bay, and turned enter inside.
Several seconds later, Annie used a key that she had, on the panel back, by the doors to the express elevator. She then called down the express elevator, and put away her key.
A few seconds later, the doors to the elevator opened, and they both road up to the elevator to the penthouse floor.
(_)
Two minutes later, Annie and Lee mean it to the penthouse floor, and the exit the elevator. With the elevator doors closing behind them.
Annie then lead Lee down the hallways, to Chang's office.
When they reached the door to Chang's office, Annie came to a stop, with Lee standing beside her.
While the door was closed, and Annie just opened the door, without announcing herself.
As she did so, Lee saw Chang was male, and that he sitting in his chair, behind his desk. He had on his black suit, black long, and sunglasses.
Annie stated, “I have brought Lee here, unharmed.”
Chang looked up at the two of them. He said, in english, “Thank you, Annie. I can take it from here.”
Annie turned Lee, as she said, “Good luck.”
Lee looked over at Annie, as he sincerely replied, “Thank you.”
Annie then turned, and walked away from Lee, and down the hallway.
Lee turned back to Chang, to see the man looking back at him.
Chang said, “Please, come in. And close the door behind you.”
Lee thought, 'It might be best to keep the door open. But, he clearly does not want that.'
Lee then walked into the office, while leaving gently closed the door behind him.
As Lee came with ten feet of Chang's desk, he saw Chang get up from his seat, and walked around his desk, to standing right in front of his desk, between the two chairs in front of his desk.
Lee immediately came to a stop. Though, he took no other actions, as he did his best to remain calm, and maintain his poker face.
Both men were standing about set feet front each other.
Chang commented, “I see you made a good impression with, Annie.”
Lee honestly replied, “Yes. I feel that it is always best to be polite.”
Chang thought, 'You really are a gentleman, Lee.' He said, “I do not disagree.”
Lee calmly inquired, “So, what do you want to talk about?” He thought, 'Depending on his this goes. I might be able to walk out of here, within ten minutes, without giving away too many more of my secrets to him. Especially, the secret that I am the, writer, whom every seems to be looking for.'
'Still, with that attempt kidnapping. It might be wise to see what Chang has to say. I might be able to get something out of him, with little risk to myself.'
Chang said, “Well, it is not often that someone can fool me. But, you are a rare exception.”
Lee thought about his options, 'Okay. This is not good. He knows I have lied to him. The question is which lie is he referring to? I might be able to salvage this situation.'
Lee admitted, “In order to survive, I have told many lies. As paradoxical as it is, in all honesty, I don't know which lie you are referring to.”
Chang smirked, as he coyly said, “Paradoxical... Not many people use that word, while talking to other people. It is kind of rare word to use in a conversation. Those that do so have a better command of the english language than most people. Such as poets, singers, and writers.”
Lee did not show outward reaction to Chang's comment, as he mentally screamed, 'He knows!'
Chang continued grinning, as he complimented, “You have developed one hell of a poker face not to show any outward sign that I have figured out that you are the writer, that so many people are looking for.”
Lee looked away from Chang, way showing a scowl on his face. He thought, 'It seems this poker face is starting to backfire on me, more often. That is not good. But, that is a concern for another time... If there is another time.'
Lee then dropped his scowl, as he let out a deep breath. He turned to look at Chang's face, as he continued his thoughts, 'Well, there nothing I can presently do about that. Right now, I should focus on damage control.'
Lee continued to look at Chang's face, as he conceded, “Alright. Did River tell you?”
Chang stated, “No.”
Lee asked, “So, what gave me away?”
Chang held up his right hand, with four right fingers being pointed upward, and away from each other, while his right thumb was tucked into his palm, as it faced Lee.
Chang answered, “Four things.” He then dropped his right hand back to his side.
Chang continued, “Revy said you do not know anything about anime. Yet, right after the casino game, you verbally recognized the music song, Velveteen, from the Ghost in the Shell anime. Next, is that quote you made from the movie, Hot Fuzz. A favorite of mine, as well. That movie is practically soft core porn for the genre savvy. Then, there was that little tiger incident a few days ago. You are hiding your badass traits very well.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad you think that, Chang.'
Chang continued, “Also, I realized who you were hiding these traits from. Rock and Revy. You revealed that, when you whispered to me that Pedro was your friend. You are clearly playing a con on someone. That I had guessed after doing research on you and Sam.”
At the mention of Sam's name, Lee remained calm on the outside, as he thought, with concern, 'It is best I don't mention Sam's name. His thoughts and comments might gloss over Sam. And thus, he will think about something else. Which will help to protect Sam. While if I mention Sam's name, that will cause Chang to be more focused on Sam, and put Sam's life in danger.'
Chang went onto say, “And given you did not want Rock and Revy to know, they, and their friends, are the ones you are playing your con against. Given how open that group of women is with being violent, only the writer of those stories would risk trying to con anything out of them.”
Lee thought, 'You are right about that. And I am just desperate enough to commit to such a con.'
Chang stated, “From there it was a simple matter of backtracking your actions, while being in this town. And my, you have had quite the secret adventure.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he responded, “You don't know the half of it. Still, it is always the little details. Isn't it? So, what now?”
Chang explained, “Now, we talk. Then, I decide what to do with you. Maybe I will let you go. Maybe I will turn you over to Revy and the others. Be happy, that I have no intentions of turning you over to the Lovelace maids.”
Lee poker mask shattered, as he slightly paled, at the mention of the Lovelace maid. Lee quickly stated, “Thank you. Thank you, very much.”
Chang chuckled, as he thought, 'So, you can keep cool in front of Revy, River, or me. But, you crack at the mere possibility of facing the Lovelace maids. At least you understand how dangerous Roberta and Fabiola are.'
As Chang slowly stopped chuckling, he replied, “You're welcome.”
By then, Lee was able to emotionally collect himself. He asked, “Well... So, how do you want to have this conversation? This is the first time I have actually talked to someone, of whom I wrote about, in an open and honest way. This is kind of a strange situation for me.”
Chang let out a small laugh. He then said, “I guess it would be for you. Well, you can relax. As long as you keep me happy, and humored, you will be fine.”
Lee said, “Humor is one of my more enjoyable talents.”
Chang replied, “Oh yes. I still haven't forgotten that joke during the beginning of your poker game with River?”
Lee mentally lamented, 'Ah yes. He must be referring to the, hung like and elephant joke.' He verbally defended, “Think of it as a compliment. And there was no other way I could think of to distract River, in a manner that would keep her happy.”
Chang admitted, “You accomplished that quite well. She has even shown concern for you.”
Lee responded, “That is nice to know. Now, while I am sure that Rock was willing to let go of the, office girl, joke. How upset was Revy with the, Daisy Dukes, joke?”
Chang asked, “She was very upset. But, we were able to get her to calm down. So, where did you learn Chinese, and the other languages from. You speak the same dialect as Shenhua?”
Lee admitted, “I was afraid someone was going to notice that. It figures that it would be you. Well, right before you showed up, on November Second, the Day of the Dead, everyone on this planet got caught up in a time loop.”
Chang responded, with interest in his tone of voice, “Really? And let me guess. You are the only one that remembers?”
Lee answered, “Yes. It was a time loop that only I remember.”
Lee thought, 'Except Harvey, in Violin's mind. But, I am not going to mention that to you.'
Lee went onto say, “It was like a groundhog's day time loop rules. Only, if I didn't die, nor try to leave this reality, everything reset at midnight, to five in the morning.”
Chang said, “That must have been an interesting experience.”
Lee smiled, as he stated, “It was. And after I worked some pranks out of my system, I used my time wisely. I learned a lot. Including several languages. How I learned chinese was I conned Shenhua into teaching me.”
Chang requested, with eagerness evident in his tone of voice, “Please, tell me more.”
Lee thought, 'Well, I think I will leave out a lot of the more interesting talents I learned. And some of the more personal things I have done, including that story I typed. Along with some embarrassing personal details I learned about others. Also, I will not mention who is behind the time loop. Still, there is still plenty of things I can tell Chang, to humor him with.'
Lee smirked, as he began, “With pleasure...”
(_)
Over the next, ten minutes, Lee gave an abbreviated version of his time in the time loop. From some of the pranks he pulled. To some of the music, artistic, and language talents he learned. And how he had a fun time enjoying the time loop.
There was a lot of laughter from both of men.
Lee concluded his story, “I eventually reached the point where I was the life of the party, every night. Where I dressed in a black dress shoes, a pink tuxedo, with a pink top hat, pink sunglasses, and a feather boa.”
Chang snickered, as he happily admitted, “I am having trouble imagining you wearing that. That is really flamboyant. I am talking rock star flamboyant.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I know. But, remember the, no consequences, part of the time loop. I never abused it. But, I did use it. I did am amazingly embarrassing things. But, considering I was the only one that would remember my actions, it got to the point where doing such things didn't bother me that much.”
Chang replied, “I see your point.”
Lee went onto say, “Anyway, after playing one hell of a set on stage. And sometimes the dance floor. I started meeting the two hot, hispanic, identical, twin babes, every night. And we had sex until midnight. And I got to do it all over again.”
Chang was unable to remove the grin from his face, as he thought, 'Now, this guy had truly lived in that time loop. And I got a feeling some fun stuff happened, then. That he has not mentioned.'
'I think I will table to cancer discussion with him, for later. Perhaps for another day. Mentioned that would ruin the mood, and likely cause him to stop answering my questions.'
'Now, about the time loop. I wonder...'
Chang complimented, “Now, that is smooth, like glass. So, how did you get out of the time loop?”
Lee flatly stated, “I am not allowed to tell you. And please do not ask me that question, again. There are those I fear upsetting more than you.”
Chang thought, 'Someone was behind the time loops. Someone intentionally created the time loops. Lee knows who, but he knows better to say who it is. And I have no interest in upsetting someone that can bend reality. So, I will let the matter drop.'
Chang inquired, “Okay. Let's get back to these pranks. So, you made fun of female Rock taking it up the ass by a male Revy, and you got away with it?” Chang could not help but start laughing some more, as he thought about that prank which Lee pulled.
Lee also chuckled, as he replied, “Yep.”
A few seconds later, both men calmed down.
Chang wiped a laughter induced tear from his eye, under his shades, as he commented, “I got the feeling you did that more than once.”
Lee smiled wickedly. He casually said, “I did it seven times.” He shrugged, as he continued, “But, whose counting?”
Chang could not help himself, as he laughed some more.
As Chang laughed, Lee thought, 'Good. I got him happy. Real happy. Now, to add to his mirth.'
Lee mentioned, “Now, not all my pranks were intentional. Some, were accidental. Such as what happened with Shenhua, that indirectly involved a cherry bomb.”
By then, Chang had been able to make himself calm down. Chang then accused, “You didn't.”
Lee responded, “I did. I flushed a lit cherry bomb down a toilet, in the men's restroom, in the Devil's Hotel lobby. How was I suppose to know that the plumbing was directly linked to the women's restroom on the other side of the wall? And that Shenhua was sitting on the toilet at the time, in the women's restroom, next door?”
Chang started laughing again, to the point he had to place a hand on his desk, to steady himself, and prevent himself from falling on the floor laughing.
As Chang laughed, he thought, 'Lee really would do good as a stand up comedian.'
After Chang calmed down a little, just enough to speak, he stated, “Shenhua killed you for doing that? Didn't she?”
Lee said, “Yes. I don't blame her for doing so. And she was so quick that I was back in my bed, in the next reset before I knew what had happened.” Lee smiled, as he continued, “But, it was still worth it.”
Chang asked, “So, how did you con the girls into teaching you these lessons? I take it that Shenhua taught you to throw knives? And that is where you learned to throw playing cards?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Shenhua was the one to teach me that skill. And conning them to teach me lessons for free was real easy. I just appealed to their greed. I offered them two grand a day, for two hour daily lessons. Hit reset, and repeat. And they never actually got to keep the money.”
Chang thought, with amusement, 'This is beyond having a death wish. This is flat out insanity. And he actually pulled it off.' Chang commented, “Now, that is mean. And you better pray that those women never remember what you have done to them, during these time loops. I know they already have some painful plans for you. But, if they did ever remember what you did to them, what they will do to you will make hell itself recoil in horror.”
Lee calmly agreed, with a straight face, with no sign of fear of the consequences of his actions, “You are probably right.”
Chang inquired, “Besides the time loop, any other interesting things happen to you?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well partly tell him.' He stated, “Well, after the time loop ended, I met some amazons, from the future, that tried to come after me, for being the writer.”
Chang guessed, “Well, if this reality works on the rules you in the stories. Chances are that you finally found a way to escape this reality.”
Lee agreed, “That is what I am thinking.”
Chang casually asked, “So, what type of amazons were they? Space amazons? Chinese amazons? Greek amazons? Which amazons?”
Lee realized the oxymoron of the situation, of both the absurdity and seriousness of Chang's questions. Lee slowly said, “We have definitely lead interesting lives.”
Chang smirked, as he stated, “You got that right.”
Lee commented, “To answer your question. Chinese amazons. And I know better than to try to fight them.”
Chang agreed, “Given their dating and killing rules. Fighting those girls is a catch twenty-two.”
Lee replied, “Exactly.”
Chang inquired, “So, what happened?”
Lee coyly responded, “Once they realized that taking me with them, would cause a reality breaking paradox. Including the sky technicolor. They left me alone, and left this reality.”
Chang commented, “Good. Still, given the way you act, I don't think you have a clue of whom you are dealing with?”
Lee inquired, “Are you referring to the girls? Or, yourself.”
Chang answered, “Both.”
Lee stated, “I must know a few things, considering I am still breathing.”
Chang conceded, “True. I will give you that one.”
Lee said, “Let us take you for example. You are more loyal to others, than you let on.”
Chang thought, 'Lee, I would like to see where you go with this.' Chang stated, “You seem to think that I am some one that is loyal to others.”
Lee responded, “Yes. And I do know of the story that your subordinates, in the triad, were told, of how you joined their ranks.”
Chang smirked, as he requested, “Refresh my memory.”
Lee stated, “They were told that you killed your Hong Kong Police partners for the Dia Lo of the Triad, for money, and likely a position within the Triad.”
Chang sarcastically interrupted, “And you think I did it for my dear old mother?”
Lee flatly replied, “No.”
Lee's simple reply, which was the opposite to what Chang was expecting, caught Chang off guard.
Lee explained, in a calm tone of voice, “You are a very complex person, Chang. Anyone who took the time to study you would realize that. You do not do things for simple reasons. You think of life as a game. And you are correct. Life is a game. And everyone is a chess piece. There are only three other people I can think of that came play this game, at your level. Scorpius, David Xanatos, and Fox Xanatos.”
Chang thought, 'Now, that is a high compliment.' He said, “Thank you.”
Lee went onto say, “You're welcome. That being said. I honestly don't think you would kill a bunch of people that you worked with, just for money, and an entry level position, as a crook for the mafia. Even a low level cop would have more power than that position. If that cop played their situation well enough. Even from a corrupt standpoint.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'He is correct about that.'
Lee stated, “No. It had to be something else. Maybe they did something you disagreed with. Maybe you found out one of them had committed a horrible crime, under the guise of their authority, as a cop, with the rest of the police force covering up the crime. Such as one of the cops you knew may have falsely arrested a teenage girl, and then later raped her in a jail cell. It was not be the first time that has happened.”
Chang grimly thought, 'Like what happened to Revy.'
Lee said, “Learning such a crime, and cover up... From those you previously trusted... That would make a person become disgusted with the authority of the law. And make him start to feel like he is wading through a giant sea of shit.”
Chang sadly thought, 'My own words come back to haunt me.'
Lee stated, “Yet. It might have been something more simple. Maybe they pissed on your shoes one too many times. Maybe they did not respect you at all, and treated you like shit. And all the Triad did was make you a better offer. Or, maybe you have been a long term spy for the Hong Kong police, and you eventually realized you had a better deal where you were at, in the mafia. Or, your superiors cut you loose, leaving you in a situation that you could not get out of. So, you made the best of your situation.”
“I don't know... But, I do know this, you are a far more a loyal person than you give yourself credit for. For example, so far, I have never seen you waste resources. You don't waste lives. You don't torture, or kill, without reason. Take for example when those muslim terrorists, whom attacked Lagoon Company's apartment, with the RPG attack. Then, trying to storm the apartment complex, with armed personnel. At the beginnings of that Basilan island incident.”
Chang thought, 'I remember that first hand. Along with watching it from the point of view of both the anime, and reading the manga version.'
Lee said, “You knew how dangerous the situation was. But, instead of sending your men out, into the hallway, first, to deal with the situation. You, and Revy, went out first. If you were not a loyal person, you would have sent your subordinates out first, and likely to their deaths.”
“I think when it is all said and done. You are just a man whom thinks he lived in a fucked up world, and you are just trying to make the best of your situation. I can honestly sympathize with you.”
Lee saw that Chang's face was unreadable.
Chang sternly thought, 'While he is polite. He is also arrogant. I need to bring him down a notch.'
Chang then used his right hand to reach in his coat, behind his lower back, to pulled out one of his semi-automatic pistols. As soon as he pistol was out in the open, he used his left hand to pull back the slide, sending a round into the chamber, and cocking the hammer. He then pointed the end of gun barrel at Lee's head. Right between Lee's eyes.
Chang noticed that Lee did not reaction to the threat, and instead just continued looking at him, towards his sunglasses.
Chang thought, 'I should not be surprised. He has been living around Revy, Shenhua, and the others for a long time. Having a gun pointed to his head is likely one of the least threatening things he has had happen to him, while on this island. I am going to have to back up my action, with words.'
Chang coldly stated, “You think you know me. You think you can get inside my head. You think this world can handle badasses like me, and my associates.”
A few seconds later, Lee began to genuinely laugh at Chang, as Chang continued to point his gun at Lee's head.
Chang thought, with concern, 'You really are crazy.'
Lee smirked, as he said, “You think you can mind screw with me, by simply pointing a gun to my head. Counting the time loop, I have been constantly dealing with Revy and her lunatic fringe for way longer than you have. And I have been doing it up close and personal. While, you always, wisely kept your distance. You see, I am not the one getting their minds screwed with. When someone is getting their mind screwed, I am the one holding the screwdriver!”
While Lee's smile did not disappear, Chang saw that Lee's eyes hardened. Lee stated, “We both know, that until you get your answers from me. Which I am more than happy to freely give. You are not going to kill me. If you do kill me, we both know that word will get back to the girls, likely along with the fact that I am the writer. And neither of us want to risk the wrath of Revy, and her friends. That is why I am in hiding, and you basically set up shop on the other side of this island, from where they are staying.”
“And if you just try to hurt me, I will show you what I really can do. And while you will likely taken me down, eventually, I promise you are going to feel what I do to you, tomorrow morning. And it will not be a pleasant experience.”
Lee continued, in a direct, dangerous tone of voice, “Now, put away away your gun, and act like the magnificent bastard, we both know you are, and whom I have come to admire and respects.”
Lee could see from the look in Chang's eyes that was thinking about what he had said.
Chang mentally grumbled, 'At least he admires and respects me. And he does have a point. I guess this attempt to bring him down a notch, backfired. And he called my bluff. Which for a poker player of his skill, is par for course.'
Chang set the safety to his weapon. Next, he reached underneath his coat, and behind his lower back to holster his weapon, by his other semi-automatic.
Chang then let both his hands drop to his side, as he said, “Alright. You called my bluff. And I do have questions for you. And since you are willing to answer my questions. I will not threaten you any more. Now, my first question is why do you think this world can handle badasses like me, and my friends?”
Lee continued grinning. He was still slightly laughing, as he answered, “Simple. You actually think you know this world. You think this world is less badass than the home realities of your and your friends. It isn't. It is even more badass than you home realities. Where do you think our inspiration came from? And this world is far more messed up than yours ever could be. And a hell of a lot more dangerous.”
“Let us start with a straight out, badass example. Audie Murphy, the most decorated U.S. soldier in World War II. There was nothing really special about Audie background before the war. He was from Texas. And yes. We of the South breed badasses. He even had the usual screwed up childhood that he was able to get over. Unlike others, such as Revy.”
“Audie was just an average guy showing how badass awesome an average guy could be. Audie was so average was the first time he tried to join the U.S. military, all four branches. Army, Airforce, Marines, and the Navy. All four rejected him for being too average. Finally, the military accepted Audie, and Audie proved himself so badass that God had to give him malaria for the duration of the war, so he won't win the war all by himself.”
“For lack of a better term. When is comes to average people you know. The closest person you personally know, that could be compared to Audie, in your reality is, Benny. Not Rock. Benny. I have no doubt in my mind that Audie, in his prime, could have taken down, Roberta. Yes, even with Roberta's badassness, super-soldier serum, and cybernetics, Audie was so badass in his prime that he could have taken her down. Maybe the Audie of your world was reincarnated as Roberta. It would explain why she is such a badass.”
“Trust me. DNA and training can only go so far. The rest is just pure, raw human spirit.”
“Sometimes, I wonder if Balalaika is a reincarnation of Patton. It would make so much sense. Both were badass leaders that lead from the front. The comparisons even go right down to both of them being screwed over by their superiors over a single event. With a single incident severely injuring them.”
“Only, Patton died of his injures. While Balalaika survived her injures, with her baring the scars of what happened to her.”
“That is just a few examples. Let us look at the past of this world. Humanity of this reality have been badass for a very long time. Most of us just don't realize it. I am sure you have seen the movie, Three Hundred. Or, read the comic. Well, the Battle of Thermopylae happened here, in this reality. And though it was a very long time ago, we still remember it. It was that awesome, and legendary.”
“Hell, the badass undercurrent of the whole of Western Civilization. Of being willing to fight against insane odds. Can be traced back to that Battle of Thermopylae. King Leonidas put it best into two words. 'Molon labe'. Which translates to, come and take.”
“And people rarely talk about the following battle that happen several months later, after Thermopylae. The Battle of Plataea. The one where the Greek Alliance faced off against the Persian army. That battle was just too unbelievable, and badass, to be believed. This time there were no tricks. No choke points. It was the Greek Alliance versus the full might of the Persian army. Still, the Greek Alliance was only outnumber a paltry three to one. And the Greek Alliance kicked ass and won.”
“Also, don't even think that trying to make examples of those we care about will make us cower before you. For example, a long time ago, there was this man of peace from Bethlehem that was crucified, along with a number of his followers, later on. That did not make my people cower before our enemies. It just inspire us to be more badass. Even in mostly peaceful ways.”
Lee laughter than turned outright maniacal, which caused a shiver to run down Chang spine.
Chang thought, with slight worry, 'Only the crazy ones laugh like that.'
Lee slowly stopped laughing, while his smile turned feral, and his eyes became dangerous, as he continued, “And that is not all. The environmental, and political, dangers of this planet have been dialed to eleven, when compared to the home realities and you and your friends.”
Lee reached out, to his sides, with both his arms, as he stated, with crazed excitement in his tone of voice, “Welcome to the reality known as Death World Earth. The D.W.E. Reality.”
Lee then dropped his hands back to his sides, as he continued, “And that is not even counting the usual wildlife, plants, and diseases that can kill us, sometimes very painfully and slow. The general rule is the cuter something is the more dangerous that thing is.”
“That is likely where to the rule of how the hotter a babe is in Roanapur is, the more dangerous that babe is, originated.”
“And since we live with these dangers all the time, we hardly bat an eye to them. Though, we are aware of them, and avoid them when we can. We are desensitized badasses, not stupid badasses.”
“Every corner of this world is standing on the edge of oblivion. We have a super-rich class hell bent on driving the sum total of human civilization into the dark ages.”
“At the same time, corrupt governments of the western nations, from America, Australia, to Europe, have leveraged so much debt that collapse of those nation's currencies and economies are imminent, while at the same time those governments are turning into police states. Along with this, we Americans had a major oil spill back in April twenty, two thousand ten, in the Gulf of Mexico, around the coastal areas of the southern U.S. states there. On top of that, those in D.C. dragged their feet on sealing the broken oil pipe. While, in the name of stopping the oil spill, they poisoned the gulf, with other chemicals, contaminating the fish, beaches, and water, in, and around, the coastline on of the Gulf, in the U.S.”
“And to add to the fact that misery loves company, China and India are polluting themselves into an early grave. That is a third of the human species right there on this planet. Mexico and other latin america nations are dealing with narco-based civil wars, and other problems. Africa and the middle east have always basket cases, with the rest of the world going to war over them. Russia is slowing sliding back into a quasi-soviet dictatorship.”
“The islands of the Indian Ocean are still picking up the pieces of the two thousand four Boxing Day Earthquake, and resulting tsunami, that killed at least two hundred and fifty thousand people still missing. Countless dead. The quake leveled and flooded parts of northern Sumatra, Indonesia. And most of whose killed were just laying on the beach, when the water suddenly came in and pulled them back into the sea. Now, that is the stuff of nightmares.”
“And that is not even counting mother nature’s ticking time bombs. Such as the Yellowstone Caldera that is sixty thousand years overdue for a major, global nuclear winter creating, eruption.”
“And Japan... Sweet Jesus, Japan... What is happening there just breaks my heart to watch. On march March eleventh two thousand eleven there was the Tohoku earthquake and tsunami. It caused around sixteen thousand deaths, caused a the four reactors in a nuclear plant on the coast to go into meltdown. Now, the politicians say that every thing is fine. But, anyone with a brain can see Japan, as a whole, is slowly turning into a deadly radiation zone. With the politicians and companies assigned to the clean up of those reactors still arguing about what to do. If we, and I mean we as the human species on this Earth, are lucky, those reactors will only contaminate Japan, and the northern half of the pacific ocean. Which will poison a good chuck of the food supply we all get from the ocean.”
“That is, if we are lucky. And my life experiences have taught me, that we are probably not that lucky.”
“One of the reasons I want to jump realities is because this world will likely soon, finally destroys itself. I can feel it coming. And I am not just talking about my precognitive abilities.”
“And still, I think about the more personal levels. Governments and corporations have so brainwashed and corrupted the minds of most of the younger generations that our coping and relationship skills are nonexistent. These are governments that promote sadism being taught in public schools. There is virtually no one that I know of, that is my age, or younger, that is in a steady, healthy loving relationship.”
“The best relationships I have seen between two young adults have been closer to the relationship between Rock and Revy, before I got my hands on them. That is how intentionally screwed up my generation and the younger generations have been made.”
Lee suddenly dropped his smile. He face turned grim, as he spoke in a calm, deadly tone of voice, “But, that doesn't mean we don't know how to fight, and be badasses. That does not mean we do not know how to kill.”
“Still, being a badass will get you nothing in this world. Because we are all just so badass without realizing it. Actually, openly being a badass will usually get you disrespect, because people will rightly think the badass is being reckless, and dangerous.”
“Badasses are even disrespected by those in power in America. Even to this day, I wonder if any bloodhounds have been created from within the U.S. military personnel, as their jobs are relegated from protecting Uncle Sam, and apple pie, to guarding flowers in Afghanistan.”
Lee then caught the sight of what he wanted from Chang. For a very brief moment, he saw fear flicker in Chang's eyes.
Lee face relaxed, while he voice returned to normal, as he finished, “As I continue my own agenda, it is not just that I have been trying to keep the people here from being killed by Revy and her crew, but to keep Revy and her crew from being killed by some of the more dangerous people here.”
“Good look up information on the Zetas, sometime. They are as dangerous as Hotel Moscow can be. FARC here is far more dangerous in this world than the FARC in your reality. And none of you seem to realize any of this.”
“And while the mafia are scary in this world, the street level gangs are even worse. There are gangs in this very country, that kidnap kids and turn them into child assassins, like Hansel and Gretel, before they were killed.”
“What these gangs do is they kidnap these kids, they torture them for a little while. Break them down some, mentally and physically. Then, the gang in question tells the kidnapped child that if the child doesn't murder for the gang, the gang will murder the child's family. This is not a bluff. Next, the gang gives the child a gun, and tell the child who murder.”
“Sometimes the children can be twelve, ten, and even as young as eight years old, when they are kidnapped and forced to become hitmen. We know this for a fact because some of the child hitmen have crossed the border into the U.S. and turned themselves over to the U.S. border patrol, as a way to seek asylum from those that made them murderers before their voices even cracked.”
“So, while in your reality, the vampire twins were a fluke. In this reality, there are entire industries dedicated to turning children into cold blooded killers.”
Lee watched Chang swallow hard at what he had just said to him.
Lee calmly continued, “The dangers even extend from governments as well, in ways you don't realize. The U.S. government here, in this reality, conducts, on a regular basis, spying and assassinations by remote flying drones the size of model airplanes. These drones have missiles and guns. And this drones are deadly miles away from their target.”
“You will not see them coming. Which is one of the reasons I am living off the grid. It is a fact that they monitor almost all internet and financial transactions. I took a real roll of the dice with my bait to lure Revy, and the others, here. Them just coming in as group was one of the better possibles. There was a real chance that my homeland's government would invaded this island, on the pretenses of stopping drug traffic, to look for me, over the bait I left on the internet.”
“Still, it looks like they found me. Given that they just tried to kidnap me, with Annie and Arcee rescuing me. I am going to have to start making some sort of plans to leave town. That is, if you decide to let me leave this building alive.”
Chang thought, 'I need some time to think on these matters. But, if it comes down to it. And those outside the island, try to take you again. I will have you rescued. I have the best trackers in existence. I can find you. And help you.'
'Then, I will have you taken to a secret location in the multiverse. Where you will stay, until I figure out how to save you from everyone after you. From Revy, to the cancer slowly eating you alive.'
'But, I am not going to tell you this, until I have a working plan ready for you.'
'Also, you have pointed out some dangers, that I did not fully appreciate.'
Lee commented, “It is clear the government of my nation wants me over this shit, because they know something is up. But, they clearly cannot figure what is going on. Consider yourselves lucky they have not pieced it all together. Nor, that we are not politically important enough to them, to warrant their attention. Or, they would have bombed Plata Podrido, by now.”
Chang thought, 'That is a very good point.'
Lee went onto say, “Now, as upset as Eda made you in the Blood Trail arc, with her threat. There is some very real truth in her warning. And the worst part is my homeland's government is nothing more than mercenaries for foreigners, whom are hidden in the shadows. Anyone who follows the money can see that.”
“So, to prevent this from going bad for everyone, all of us have to tread very lightly. And most of you don't know how to do that.”
Chang thought about what Lee had just said, for a few seconds. He then soberly responded, “I admit you have a point. Actually, you have made several points. I didn't realize how different your Earth was from mine.”
Lee said, in a calmer, more normal tone of voice, “Now, you know better.”
Chang commented, “There are other things I would like to know.”
Lee replied, “Go ahead. Ask away.”
Chang inquired, “About that alias you picked out for me. Daiyu. For my female alias. We both know that it means black jade, but why did you choose that name?”
Lee warmly smiled, as he answered, “I originally wanted to use the name, Jade. But, that has been done so much, that it is practically cliche. So, using Daiyu made sense. As in black jade. You not only have dark hair, but your personality is somewhat dark to black. And jade is a precious stone that is a symbol of leadership.”
Chang nodded, while he agreed, “I can go along with that.”
Lee complimented, “By the way, I like the name of this casino. Daiyu Palace Casino. It works for you. This place really is your palace.”
Chang commented, “Thanks. And it seems there is more to you, than meets the eye.”
Lee let out a chuckle.
Chang realized his comment, as he continued, “Yea. Transformers. And from what I have learned about you, you refuse to be violent, but at same time, you show no fear.”
Lee stated, “It is not hard to understand if you think about it. I found the flaw. The weakness you all have. Except for Rock. Rock got really good at exploiting this weakness.”
Chang thought, 'Now, this I want to hear.'
Lee continued, “You all make assumptions, and react to those assumptions without thinking. And when the person does do as you expect, you have no problems dealing with that person. Such as, if a person is violent, you just kill that person without a second thought. If a person shows cowardice, you kill that person without a second thought.”
“But, if a person does something you don't expect, such as not being violent, but showing no fear to you, it draws your interest enough not to immediately kill that person. By doing so, you have time to think, and you likely decide to let that person live. And that is what makes both Rock, and I, so dangerous. That is why none of you were able to fully deal with Rock. He, and now she, doesn't fit into any of the tiny little boxes you categorize people for. That is also why Rock is able to drive Revy crazy, without being killed by Revy.”
Chang thought, 'That makes so much sense that it is scary.'
Chang asked, “So, how did you figure that out?”
Lee casually answered, “I am a writer. Understanding plots, settings, character developments, and motivations, all come with the territory of writing. But, do not feel bad. It took me years to figure out this secret. And you were busy at the time. So, it is completely understandable that you would miss such details.”
Chang stated, “You are right. It is the little details. And you make it sound like you had to work at your creating your stories.”
Lee said, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Of course, I did. Do you honestly think I just watched these series and then wrote my stories? Nope. I first had to do my homework. I had to rewatch several series, a number of times. Not single episodes. But, entire series, multiple times.”
“In cases where there were multiple formats for a series. Such as anime, manga, etc. I had to go back, and look at them all. I also checked out official character profiles. Source books. Internet fan theories. All of this was done in a successful attempt to gain subtle information on what made you all tick.”
“How each of you spoke? And what syntax each of you used? What style of comments you prefer to make, when you talk? What clothing you preferred to wear? What weapons do you like to use? What food you preferred to eat? What beliefs you had? What are your own likely tastes in fiction?”
“All of this was done to figure out how to put you into my story. Where all the pieces fit together, like a well run clock. Such as, who does what? Who believes what? And why?”
“I am sure that you understand that learning what motivates a person is the key to understanding that person. And that once you have that piece of knowledge, you can control someone without that person realizing it.”
“And that is not including supplement information and research subjects, on places, things, cultures, peoples, languages, weapons, etc... To make for a more structured and enjoyable story. People enjoy reading stories by writers that know what they are talking about.”
“I also did this to make sure to know how far to take a character, without going too far out of character for each individual. If original characters are needed, I made sure to include them, without them overshadowing the rest of the characters? And given the number of people I was dealing with, this was one hell of a juggling act.”
“To give you an idea of how much background work I did. On average, when I write a story, a third of all the work I do on that story is just notes, and outline material.”
“Taking all this into account, when writing, and doing research, one learns a lot about their subject material. No matter if that subject material is an object, or a person.”
Chang thought, with concern, 'This man is not to be underestimated. He is thorough. And he puts a lot of effort into his works and actions. And the way he thinks, if he wanted to, he could be very dangerous towards his enemies. No wonder River has an interest in him.'
'I am starting to wonder if River was not so much trying to protect Lee from me. But, protect myself, from Lee. Or, maybe she was trying to protect both Lee and myself, from each other.'
Lee continued, “And I know what your next question will be. How did it all start? I'll tell you. I originally wanted do a crossover with several gender bending characters, from several series. But, that original idea was difficult to do. All those characters were very different, with very different backgrounds.”
“It took me six months of just thinking how I was going to fit it together, without the plot collapsing in on itself. Then, I realized that only way it would work was to use Akira as the main character, from his, at the time, point of view. I even played him as a parody of an audience segregate.”
“And that story grew into what I finally wrote. Honestly, one of the most difficult parts was figuring out how to fit Futaba into the story. The ending to the Futaba series was so hamfisted in its delivery that I had to literally surgically cut it apart, taking what I needed to make my story work. While discarding the rest. Though, I hate ignoring series canon. What we fan call facts within a given series. But, some things had to be done to make the story work.”
Chang inquired, “Interesting. Also, I was wondering, why did you add Janet to the main Lagoon Company cast?”
Lee stated, “Unlike other fans, I admire Janet for her personality. She is a breath of fresh air. She brings a whole different angle to the character dynamics of Roanapur. She is intelligent, funny, skilled, has good personality, she is nice to look at, and most importantly, she is sane. Unlike the other women in your series, Janet showed a level of sanity, and down to earth quarks, that I could respect. It was a wonderful contrast to the personalities of the bad girls of Roanapur.”
Chang jumped in, “I can see where you are going. And I have to agree with your point of view.”
Lee chuckled a little. He then said, “I thought you would. Also, she and Benny already had a relationship, and given her skill set, this would have allowed her to join Lagoon Company to be completely workable. She is not just a pretty face. She can pull her own weight at her job.”
Chang said, “You are right about that.”
Lee commented, “I know. And if you are wondering, Janet's nymphomania, along with Revy's bi-sexuality, are series canon. They came from the Black Lagoon manga story arc after manga version of the Blood Trail, El Baile de la muerte. The title is Wired Red Wild Card. You can find an english translation online, in this reality. If you want to read it.”
Chang stated, “I plan to.” He thought, 'And you never mentioned that storyline in your stories. You held back this information. That is interesting.'
Lee responded, “Good. Now, among the reasons I did not use that story arc in my story was that it is unfinished. And the creator took so long on the storyline.”
“Having a three year break between chapters is a bit much. And from a plot standpoint, it is risky working with an incomplete story.”
“But, that story did give a lot of good character nuggets of information on some of the cast. Take Janet for example. Chang, I kid you not, Janet outright stated, in dialogue, to the Lagoon crew, that one was of her sexual fantasies is to be gang raped.”
Chang raised an eyebrow, as he commented, “Maybe she is not as sane as you think.”
Lee shrugged, as he stated, “I am willing to cut people slack on their sexual fantasies, and what they do in bed. I am not one to judge. What is important is what they do outside their bedrooms, in their day to day lives. And Janet has shown remarkable restraint, and sanity, in her day to day life. She also has shown to have the brains and skills that I respect.”
“Janet is devious. She will not resort to direct violence. She prefers to arrange for a person to be killed from a distance. In that storyline, she pulls off a brilliant gambit, in which she entraps, and arranges, a chinese spy, sent to learn about her, to be killed by the spy's own superiors. Now, that is brilliant.”
Chang agreed, with interest in his tone of voice, “That is brilliant.” He thought, 'I believe I may have underestimated Janet's abilities.'
Lee mentioned, in a cautioned tone of voice, “On the matter of Revy. In those same chapters, Revy's bi-sexuality is confirmed. She stated that during her time in prison, she had a number of sexual encounters with other women inmates. And it was she whom took the role of the man in those encounters. She even claimed that the women she was with could not satisfy themselves, alone, afterward.”
“To underscore the seriousness of what I am saying. This is the only time in either the anime, or the manga, of the Black Lagoon series, where Revy directly talks about her sexuality, and past sexual exploits.”
“And given the type of woman Revy is, I do not think that was a baseless boast. It should also be noted that in the same scene that revealed Janet's sexual kinks, Revy was revealed to be extremely possessive of Rock. Which further proves that Revy cares very deeply for Rock. To the point the loves Rock. But, be aware that I did not change that part of Revy's personality in my stories.”
“Also, in the storyline I am talking about, Janet made a pass on Rock, and Revy warned Janet that she would rape her if Janet went any further with Rock. I do not believe that Revy was bluffing. Fortunately, Janet backed off, and Revy let the matter drop.”
Chang sadly commented, “The abused can sometimes become the abusers.”
Lee agreed, “True. That is why I added in that scene between Revy and Rico in book two, where Revy mentions seeing her rape scene at the end of the last episode of the Blood Trail story arc, in the anime. And by her doing so, she was able to work the trauma out of her system and become more sane. By the way, I apologize for the forty-eight hour whitman fever freakout that I caused Revy to experience in your Tower.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And a sign that Revy is about to go whitman fever is when she lets her hair down. So, I always paid attention if Revy had her hair in a ponytail, or not. Which she has kept the ponytail, so far, in public. Because, if she ever removes her small, red scrunchie, that she uses to tie her hair back, and she lets all her hair hang loose, it is time to run like hell away from her. Or, more aptly, it is time to get into one's car and get the hell out of town.'
Chang shrugged, as he said, “It is understandable. You had to figure some way, how to handle Revy learning that horrible event in her life, was in the series, and was public knowledge. And Revy became a lot more easier to deal without after that. Sanity does have its advantages.”
Lee replied, “Very true.” Lee's lips curled into a mischievous grin, as he inquired, “Also, I was wondering. Revy's back story with Rowan was never revealed. I figured, as her teacher, one of the major leaders of Roanapur, and someone Revy trusts, you would know that story.”
Chang snorted, as he replied, “Trust me. You don't want to know. It could give what you had Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, do to Akira, a run for its money.”
Lee commented, “I believe you. Though, I never actually wrote that scene. I wrote the lead in, and gave some details afterward. But, I never wrote the actual scene... Wait a minute, you sound like you saw that event. Have you have seen incident?”
Chang lips curled into a wicked smile.
Lee stated, in a surprised tone of voice, “Rowan filmed it?! I had Revy warn him not to. And I thought Rowan wasn't that crazy to do so.”
Chang responded, “Apparently, Rowan is that crazy. The video shows multiple angles at once, with good quality video pictures for each of those angles. Also, the audio of that event is decent. And as porn, it makes for some great viewing, for the first few hours. Then, it gets really strange.”
Lee asked, “Well, given those three's personalities, it must have made for interesting viewing. You wouldn't happen to have a copy of that on hand?”
Chang answered, “Yes. I do. Actually, I have multiple copies. Six full copies, and six copies that Balalaika edited herself, for her own personal use, that she gave me a copy of. That I made more copies of myself. And digital transfers allowed for quality to be maintained, from copy to copy.”
“Though, most of the copies are hidden, and protected, in various storage places, to make sure this one of a kind event is not lost to time. And I am sure Balalaika has done the same with multiple copies and the original, and the her edited version, of that night, in Jackpot.”
“By the way, Balalaika really is good at editing porn. Though, why did you make Balalaika into a lesbian?”
Lee said, “Pure logic. She spent years sharing a building with a literal army of badass, physically fit men, whom were completely devoted to her. But, her attitude clearly showed that she was not getting laid.”
Chang started laughing. Between laughs, Chang conceded, “Point taken. And what about turning Boris into a woman?”
Lee responded, “Boris was originally shown to be a petty boy in one of the omakes. And I think the Black Lagoon series creator slipped that joke into the Viva Youth omake, because he forgot to include Boris in the Boys and Girls omake.”
Chang laughed even harder.
A few seconds later, after Chang made himself calm down, he offered, “You can watch the copies I have of that the night at the Jackpot. You of all people have a right to look at them. But, given who is with you, in that hotel. If they learn I have a copy, and I told you, they will slit both our throats. If we are lucky.”
Lee agreed, “You got that right.”
Chang offered, “Well, come by sometime, and I will let you watch them. Though, these videos are very long.”
Lee replied, “I may take you up on your offer.”
Chang thought, 'Good. That is one enticement to get him to come back, later. When we will discuss his cancer and my offer. Once I figure out what that offer is going to me. And I will try to offer him other enticements, as well. To come back.'
Lee thought, 'Oh. He is baiting me. But, I cannot help but at least be polite about his offer. Besides, I do want to see those videos. Now, onto another matter. Pedro mentioned Rowan by name, when he called me a few days before my poker game with River. I wonder...'
Lee inquired, “By the way, whatever happened to Rowan?”
Chang stated, “Rowan was our first test subject with the gender bending process, and super-solider serum. And she was a complete success. We of the family heads figured it was fitting that Rowan would be the first to undergo the process. And if something happened to Rowan, it was no great loss. Anyway, Rowan ended up as a part of the janitorial staff at the tower. And last I heard, she was back to trying to get her old business started in another city.”
Chang mentally added, 'I just won't mention she is setting up shop, in is this city. And I am helping her.'
Lee responded, “Thanks for the information.” He thought, 'Chances are, given Pedro mentioned Rowan, and what you just said, Chang. Rowan is setting up shop in this town. And since you know that Rowan is setting up shop. It is likely you are helping her. Though, the only reason you would help Rowan is if you had a plan to make a whole lot of money. And the only way I can think to do that with a whorehouse, would be if you supplied Rowan with instant man, and instant woman, packages. Which would make sense. Though, I will not mention this to you, Chang.'
Chang commented, “You are welcome.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to ask about, Jet.' He asked, “By the way, why is Jet a woman? I would think Jet would have taken the same rejuvenation therapy, as Ed did. That is what I set the situation up for Jet to do.”
Chang explained, “Jet did have that rejuvenation therapy. Though, he had a bad reaction to the first formula in their therapy. We were informed this is not the first time something like that has happened. It was just a bad drug reaction. And it was not a quick reaction. Jet was given a few hours to decide on if he wanted the process, or not. He choose to do go through with it. So, we got him into a vat, and processed him into her, to save her life.”
Lee thought, with concern, 'That is sad to here.'
Chang went onto say, “We flushed the drugs from his system, then used the first gender changing, and regeneration formula. Next, the super-soldier serum, which restored her youth. On the bright side, she now has a human left arm again. Though, we had to pause the process, at different stages, to remove Jet's cybernetic implants. For the record, Jet... Well Jetta now, is not upset with you. She understands that you were not at fault. And things like this happen.”
Lee sadly responded, “That is unfortunately true. I guess one cannot foresee some outcomes. Even if that person is writing the story.”
Chang said, “That is correct. And speaking of characters. And being one. I find it discomforting that someone imagined my wants... My needs... My views... My very personality.”
Lee countered, “That is actually incorrect. As I wrote, I came to realize that writing about someone, is not the same as completely creating that person. Yes. Someone imagined you. But, they only imagined the basics. You filled in the rest. As a writer, I will tell you, there is a vast amount of events and life experiences of a character, which is not written about. And that I did not write as much about the pasts of the characters I worked on, as you would think. And I include you, among these characters.”
Chang thought, 'That is interesting.'
Lee continued, “Think of the stories as set points, from a to b. I wrote about a, and, b. But, how you traveled from a to b was your own doing. Your own choices. Your own life experiences.”
Chang thought, 'Now, that is deep.'
Lee commented, “I long since realized that writing is like in the Matrix movie trilogy. While your creator may have created you, the creator could not define you as a person. Writing is partly an instinctual talent, from the imagination. We writers are not fully in control of what we write. Through our imaginations, we are pulling the information, and forming that information from someone else. And not just the inspirations in our lives.”
“There is another component there. A very important, and influential component, that is not in our control.”
“And I am not talking about the sex scenes. I am talking about the character development scenes, and plot.”
“Some of the stuff I wrote, I wrote because it felt right. Though, I can sometimes consciously tell when doing so feels right. It is like my precognition. It just feels right at that deep, mysterious level.”
“And the realization that I was not even close to fully in control of the content I wrote scares the hell out of me.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'And here I thought that he already deep before. This man is like sinking into an abyss... I must heed the warning not to let such an abyss stare back at me.'
Lee went onto say, “Though, I guess in Matrix terms. I would be like Agent Smith, after he went rogue. While you would be, Morpheus.”
Chang joked, “Morpheus? Wouldn't I want to be Neo?”
Lee deadpanned, “Would you rather be the cool, badass leader? Or, the guy that got superpowers, but he could never get his shit together?”
Chang grinned, as he replied, “Point taken.” He mentally added, 'Lee is clearly thinking at a deeper level than I expected. I need to get further into his head. And I know just the question to ask, to start digging deep into his mind.'
Chang asked, “Now, why did you take up the gambler persona?”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I know what you are are thinking. You are asking a seemingly simple question to get inside my head.”
Chang thought, 'He is good. Though...' He pointed out, “You did say you would answer my questions.”
Lee responded, “Yes. I did. And I will. But, just to let you know, counting the time loops, I have been using that trick, countless times, on countless people, for several years.”
Chang replied, “I am sure you have.”
Lee said, “Now, to answer your question. The reason I used that persona is because none of you have dealt with a true gambler archetype before. Such as a Hawkes, or Maverick. Sure, you have dealt with the desperate, and the greedy, that love gambling. But, not one of you has experience with a true gambler. The type of person that does not gamble out of greed, nor desperation. They gamble because they love how the dice tumbles, as it rolls. No matter the outcome. They love the bluffs and calls of the card games more than actually winning.”
“The true gamblers are the ones that play the long hand of cards. Yet, they are the ones that occasionally take the insane risk, with the huge payoffs. And they do not take those large bets because they expect to win. No. They do so because they love the game.”
“And this entire setup by me is just one long hand of cards. And I have played it well. Except for River, whom is a telepath. Along with, Annie, and Arcee. Yes. They figured out who I was. And they agreed to keep quiet. for now.”
Lee thought, 'I will leave out that Scorpius and Harvey also know. Because that is none of your concern, Chang.'
Chang thought, 'It is obvious that River already knew. And I am not surprised those two figured it out. And I am glad they decided to keep quiet. Though, I will talk to them, later, about you, Lee. To see if they have any input they would like to add, concerning you.'
Lee continued, “Then, there is you. And you four are the only ones in this whole city, whom are from another reality, that knows the truth about me. And we both know that none you are going to tell the others.”
Chang baited Lee, “And why is that?”
Lee answered, with a wicked grin on his lips, and a crazed look to his eyes, “Because, babe, none of you want to spoil the climax. You want to see the train wreck, not be the cause of this train wreck. We both know this is only going to end in one of two ways for me. More than likely, it will all blow up in my face, in which case I will either suffer death, or worse. Or, I might, by some miracle, be able to pull an ace from my sleeve, and win by getting what I want from them.”
Chang stated, “You want a reality device, to escape with. Either from Revy and her group. Or, one of our reality devices.”
Lee replied, “Of course. But, I know better than to ask for one of yours.”
Chang complimented, “Smart man. Also, given the way you stated that, I am going to let that, babe, comment, slide.”
Lee continued smiling, as he responded, “Thank you. And either way, it is all on my head. For you, this is guilt free entertainment of the most extreme variety. And you are still asking why I did all this? Why am I here, instead of under a rock somewhere? And why do I want from them?”
Chang inquired, “Good questions. Care to answer them?” He thought, 'I wonder if he will admit to having cancer.'
Lee smile turned mischievous, as he teased, “And ruin the surprise. I think not. Chang, just sit back, and enjoy the show. I have a feeling this is going to wrap up and head to the next stage, one way or another, within less than a week.”
Chang thought, 'So, you are not going to admit that you are dying. But, that is an issue for another time. And one that is sooner rather than later.' He commented, “After doing all this, and writing those stories, you are likely more insane than any of the girls. Even River, and Revy.”
Lee grin became slightly manic, as he replied, “Yea. And none of them have figured out my lone sane man act, that I have been pretending to be, is completely fake.”
Chang let out a laugh. He then responded, “If Rock, Revy, and the others weren't after you, I would offer you a job. You have shown some skill, being able to play head games with them for months on end, without getting caught.”
Lee lips curled into a smirk, as he commented, “You of all people know what a person is capable of when they have to do something.... Extreme.”
Chang agreed, “Very true. And you know, you have been acting like an a villain explaining his evil plan.”
Lee conceded, “True. I admit, monologuing is fun. You have done this before, yourself.”
Chang replied, “True. It can be addictive.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Besides, I rarely get a chance to talk about shop in my life. And this is too great an opportunity to pass up.”
Chang responded, “No arguments there.”
Chang saw Lee begin to calm down.
Lee inquired, “I was wondering. I hinted at it. Because the series itself hinted at it, But, did you actually realize you were in a fictional series, during the events in the Black Lagoon series?”
Chang shrugged, as he replied, “It became kind of obvious during the first time Roberta came to town.”
Lee agreed, “True. Onto another matter. I know you guys didn't tell Megatron about me, and my stories. Because if you did, he and his followers would be literally tearing this planet apart to find me, right now.”
Chang admitted, “You got that right. And don't worry. None of us have anything to do with him.”
Lee replied, “Good.”
Chang added, “Except, Annie. And that is your fault.”
Lee conceded, “True. But, that could be a good thing. I made it so that Annie and Megatron were friends. If things did get out of hand, Annie could handled the situation, without situation becoming a full scale war.”
Chang admitted, “That is a good point.” He thought, 'Damn. It is as I spectected. Lee has plans within plans. And as such, I might as well ask him about politics.'
Chang asked, “I have an another question for you, Lee, on politics.”
Lee questioned, “What is it?”
Chang inquired, “What is your opinion of the concept of democracy?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well be honest. He might be one of the few people in existence that would appreciate what I have to say.'
Lee calmly answered, “Democracies. Republics. Anything with a ballot system is just a lie. A lie to keep the people under the illusion they have some control of their lives, when in truth, a ballot system is just another way to enslave the people, by those pulling their strings.”
“Taxation with representation is complete bullshit. Every government is a tyranny, that hypocritically masquerades as being civil. This is no such thing as due process. In this world, a person is either a tyrant, or a slave. There is no in-between. Just because you don't see the shackles on your body, does not mean they are not there.”
“In this world, free thinking individuality is punished, and unquestioned subservience is rewarded. The subservience is especially rewarded when the sycophants are sadistic in the manner they carry out their orders, as a way to harm the people, and keep them oppressed.”
“And we have the worst sort of tyrants in this world. Instead of honest tyrants, such as Genghis Khan and Vlad the Impaler. Whom were open and honest with their brutality. We have the kind of tyrants that claim to have civility. We have Robespierres, and Stalins. Those that pretend to be civil, but whom will commit the most hideous of crimes. Those that would hide their crimes from public view, while piling the body counts to the point no single person could count them all.”
“These are the type of tyrants that would punish those that called them on their brutality, by seizing that person's family's wealth and property. Sending that person off to a gulag to be tortured, and worked to death. Executing the person's parents. Turning the person's wife into a concubine, to be raped and tortured by the tyrant and his friends. And selling the person's children into sex slavery.”
“That is the type of evil we have in this world. Mostly outside of heavily armed populations, such as in the U.S. And these tyrannical, sadistic tactics are a cottage industry, that is standard practice across the world. And the tyrants' servants in the press do all they can to hide such crimes from the public.”
“And these hypocritical tyrants are not even the masters of this world. They serve even greater evils, that hide in the shadows.”
“In such situations, I believe the best, pure, and only true form of government is an open, brutal dictatorship. Because, said dictatorships are honest, open about their oppression and brutality. Because, at the heart, that is what all governments and religions are about. Brutality, and control.”
“Constitutional republics, democracies, and other forms of representative governments are like marxism. They look good on paper, but they never actually exist in reality. No matter how much tyrants, behind the scenes, call the countries they control, democracies, or republics. And these shadowy tyrants do so as way to mentally shackle the people into thinking they are free and have rights, when in actuality, they are just well fed, and entertained, slaves.”
Chang noticed Lee voice slowly become more erratic, as he continued his speech, “There is not such thing as human rights. There is no such thing as constitutional rights. Such things are lies designed to enslave the people even further.”
“I remember as a child, as people from all walks of life abused me, they gave their justification for hurting me as being that it was their constitutional right to do so.”
“While, I had no rights, because I was born a white male, from the southeastern United States. As such, to everyone else, it is my fault I was born a dumb, mentally retarded, racist, sexist, bigoted, inbred, uncivilized, intolerant, willfully ignorant, hick, whom deserves TO KNOW ONLY SUFFERING IN LIFE!”
Lee realized he has become too angry to continue speaking. He stopped talking for a few seconds, as he forced himself to calm down.
Meanwhile, Chang was quiet, as he thought, with concern, 'It is best I remain silent, for now. Lee is pretty much showing me exactly who he is. And what he has been through. Which is clearly a lot. He is the embodiment of the tortured writer.'
'Also, from what I have known of him, both in person, and what I have heard from my friends. Lee is manipulative. Though, otherwise he has been civilized, polite, tolerate, and even caring, for other people. He is also extremely intelligent, and imaginative. He could not play at our level, if he was stupid. I believe many of his actions are genuine. In that, I heard he helped Melvin, when he did not have too. He even helped Revy and the girls, now and then.'
'And River would have blown Lee's cover, at their poker game, if he was not a genuinely nice, and truly polite, man. Even thought he has a bit of a mouth on him.'
'In addition, Lee's writings reflect a measure of fairness, and equality, in all areas, that I rarely see in real life.'
'It is clear that Lee has been the victim of everyone else's bigotry towards him, for a very long time. And he has had to swallow that pain and abuse, towards him, for years. Given his age. Likely decades. With all that repression inside Lee, even with my resources, I do not want to see what Lee can really do to someone when he really gets angry.'
By then, Lee felt he was calm enough to continue. He stated, in a calmer tone of voice, “I find documents that state such lies, that the people have rights and freedoms, are worth less than the toilet paper people use to wipe their asses with.”
“As such, I would take one honest tyrant over a thousand politicians, sucking up to their masters, while stabbing the people in the back. I am talking about the type of tyrant that is completely open with their brutality. Whom takes someone calling them on their brutality to be a compliment.”
“And in all this, I have found the most honest government in this world is the Iranian government, and their masters, the mujtahids. They do not pretend the people have a voice is how their politicians are picked. No fixed primaries. They openly select who is in government. There is no argument that the people have any voice in government. Which the people do not.”
“Still, they are just as bad at having mock elections. They openly select two people for the people to choose in the two card monte game we call a ballot system. Which makes them just as bad as everyone else.”
“And through all this, in this world, with an evil God overlooking its sadistic handiwork, this is how it has always been, and always will be, forever.”
“To that end. I don't care if they are ignorant of such evil, or not. Either way, I have no stomach, nor tolerance towards those people that worship, and preach lies, in the name of such evil. Especially, those who are willfully ignorant, and refuse to accept the truth, concerning such evil, when it is staring at them, in their faces.”
Chang mentally reflected, in surprise, 'And I thought Revy and Balalaika had negative outlooks on life. This guy has definitely been through some shit.'
'No wonder he writes. Writing is probably the only outlet he had to work through his pain, and make himself feel better. And considering what he is telling me, I surprised he is this sane. And that his writing did not reflect a more sadistic nature. Unless, he worked that out in previous writings that we were not part of. If so, I am not going to touch that subject with a ten foot pole.'
'Also, it is very clear he is knowledgeable about many things, and not just those he writes about. I am not talking to someone, whom speaks out of ignorance. And I need to remember that about him.'
Lee continued, “That is why I admire you, Chang. Your rule has always shown a measure of restraint, and reasonableness. Traits are are lacking in the leaders of this world. When it comes to violence, you tend to give people warnings when they cross you. It is their fault they don't listen to you. And while you are polite and nice, when you are called on your brutality, you freely admit to it. You are honest and open about it. You don't hide it. And you usually don't kill the person who does call you on your less savory actions, unless they are rude about it.”
Lee compliments caught Chang off guard.
Chang thought, 'After everything he said. I believe he just complimented me.' He replied, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He shrugged, as he casually said, “Oh well. Fuck it all. Let the world burn. I intend to move on in life, or death. Whatever comes. Let them torture, and kill, each other. I just refuse to be a part of it. I won't sink to their level. Even if it costs my life, and my soul is sent to Hell forever, for refusing to be a part of God's sadistic, twisted game.”
Chang thought, 'Okay. So, you want to move on from this shithole that is life in this reality. And considering you think God is evil. Not that I disagree. I guess you would have to come to terms that, should you die in this reality, you would likely go to hell, no matter what you do in your life. Good. Bad. It doesn't matter. You believe you are eternally damned either way.'
'Including Balalaika, and a few others, Lee, you seem to be one of the rare people I know that looks forward to going to hell. That is a scary thought. Because compared to making peace with the possibility of facing eternal suffering after death, nothing scares them in their life...'
'So, that is the great secret to your poker face, Lee. That acceptance of such an unfair, and horrible fate, for you to personally suffer, is what allows you to remain calm.'
'I think I just figured you out, Lee.'
Lee said, in a kind tone of voice, “I hope you did not take offense to my comments.”
Chang responded, “No. I take what you have to say as a high compliment. Honesty is the last refuge a person can take in this sea of shit.”
Lee stated, “I agree. I just wish I could be more honest. But, given my situation, I cannot. Between you and me. I hate lying. I loath lying. And I have been having to do it all my life, just to survive.”
Chang thought, 'I would call you a hypocritical. But considering who is after you. I won't.' He said, “I am sure you will reach a point where you will be able to be honest, one way, or another.”
Lee replied, “Yes. I do look forward to that. Even if this winds up being my last days being alive.”
Chang thought, 'While I still have you here, I wonder what your opinion of Pedro is?' He asked, “What is your opinion of Pedro's moral flexibility? He is clearly not a by the book cop.”
Lee answered, “When compared to myself. Pedro is on the orange end of the morality scale, while I am on the blue end.”
Chang raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Tvtropes?”
Lee replied, “Of course. A few of the things I put you guys through, came from that website.”
Chang questioned, “Such as?”
Lee answered, “Like having Akira leave the toilet seat up, and Shenhua falling in.”
Chang chuckled for a few seconds. As Chang calmed down, he said, “I would guess that is why she is in on this hunt for you.'
Lee agreed, “I would guess so, as well. Now, I do have a couple of other questions of my own.”
Chang thought, 'Fair is fair. And he has answered most of my questions. So, why not?' He inquired, “What are they?”
Lee sighed. He then asked, “I used very broad strokes on those you kidnapped, and used, for you breeding projects. Do the victims know about me, or my stories? I have nightmares about some of those victims, and their children, coming for me.”
Chang thought, 'I regret that part of my life, and I rightly blame you for it. But, not enough to hurt you over those events. And I really don't want to know where you got the idea to write that from. Still...' He firmly stated, “As you should. You should feel fortunate that they do not know that you, and the stories, even exist.”
Lee inquired, “Thank you for that little piece of information. Anyway, did you ever go after pilots of the super-robot genre? And not just the anime characters, but others, such at Coop, Kiva, and Jamie, from the Megas XLR series?”
Chang answered, “No. I did not, for a number of reasons. First, you had that, no younger than eighteen, rule. Good rule, by the way. On those pilots that are older than eighteen, none of them I really needed. And only a handful stood out. And on the subject of Coop, Kiva, and Jamie. I left them alone.”
“On Kiva. I already redheaded asian badass. I did not need two of them. Jamie was useless to me. And Coop. Well, the only skills Coop has are piloting, and working on, the super-robot, Megas. And even I was not crazy enough to put a brainwashed pilot in charge of a weapon, with buttons that state such things as, smite the world.”
“The same goes for their alternate reality counterparts. Besides, I am not even sure we could even fit Coop into one of those vats.”
Lee chuckled, as he thought, 'That is probably true. Plus, if something happened to Coop, Kiva, and Jamie, it would likely piss off Ranma.' He then said, “I can see your point.”
Chang mentioned, “And to be honest, I was too uncomfortable with the concept of super-robots to mess with that genre. That is just more firepower than I am comfortable with. With no upper limit to their firepower. Like Lovecraftian beings. I did not want to get the attention of individuals with that kind of firepower, and other equally dangerous abilities.”
Lee complimented, “That is very wise of you.”
Chang asked, “Thank you. Anything else, you want to talk about?”
Lee replied, “Not really. You?”
Chang answered, “No. And I will call you a car to take you back to the hotel.”
Chang pulled his cellphone. He then dialed a number on it.
A few seconds later, Chang stated into the cellphone, “Yes. Please, come to my office to escort my guest out of here. Also, have a car waiting to take him, to take him back to the Devil's Hotel.”
Chang hung up and put his cellphone back into his pocket.
Lee focus on Chang, as he stated, “Thank you.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee mentioned, “As a suggestion, you might want to switch to hardlines. The governments of this world tap into all cellphone communications, all the time, and they record that information. Also, they can even track people with them, even if the cellphone is turned off.”
Chang agreed, “That is a good point. But, all my cellphones are designed and encrypted to only work from a celltower in this very building, with a firewall created by Ed Lowe. The connection then moves through that firewall, and a few others defenses, before it connects to the local phone lines, and other hardlines, from a fiberoptic line we had installed, that leads into the mainland.”
Lee complimented, “Smart move.”
Chang smirked, as he replied, “I know.”
Chang then walked back around his desk, as sat back in his seat, behind his desk, as he look at Lee. He offered, “Sit down. It might be a few minutes before Annie gets here.”
Lee said, “Thank you.” He then sat in the chair, in front of Chang's desk, to Chang right.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee heard the door to the office, open behind him. Lee turned around, to his left, to see Annie, standing at the threshold of the office door.
Annie looked over at two men, as she calmly stated, “There are a car waiting out front. It is ready, when you are.”
Lee said, “Thank you.” He then stood up, and turned back to Chang.
Lee extended his right hand, as he honestly said, “I enjoyed the chat.”
Chang looked up as Lee, as he used his right hand to shake Lee's right hand. He replied, “Same here.”
Both men noted the firm, but not tight, grip, the other hand in this handshake.
A couple of seconds later, they broke their handshake.
Lee turned and walked to Annie.
When Lee reached the exit out of the office, and to the hallway, he continued walking, Annie left Chang's office door open, as she walked beside him, to Lee's left side, down the hallway, towards the front express elevator that would take them to the gaming floor.
As they made their way down the hallway, Annie inquired, “I take it that your meeting went well?”
Lee continued looking forwards, as he answered, “Well, considering I am still breathing, and walking out of here under my own power, I would say, yes.”
Annie commented, “You do look on the brighter side of things.”
Lee commented, “It is the only way to stay sane in the situation I find myself in.”
Annie shrugged, she replied, “True.”
Annie and Lee walked to the express elevator, they turned the corner in the hallway, and they were met by River.
Annie, Lee, and River, came to a stop, as they looked at each other.
River was wearing a long skirt, t-shirt, and cowgirl boots, as she said, with concern in her tone of voice, in english, “Lee, I heard you were kidnapped? Are you alright?”
Lee turned to Annie, and then back to River. He answered, “Yes. I will be fine.”
River gave Lee a warm smile, as she replied, “Good. See you around, Lee.”
Lee said, “You as well, River.”
River then walked passed them, as Lee and Annie continued walking for the front express elevator.
As the two adults walked beside each other, Annie commented, “You to seem to be on very friendly terms with River?”
Lee commented, “I long since learned that being polite has its advantages.”
Annie responded, “I will admit that it does. And I am guessing that is why you were so nice to her at the poker game?”
Lee admitted, “Absolutely. Any other way, and I would have lost. And I am not just talking about the poker game itself. I was nice, friendly, played fairly, and that is why she kept my secret.”
Annie shrugged, as she responded, “I can see your point there. Do you think she is going to be in trouble with Chang for keeping your identity a secret?”
They then made it to the elevator, with Annie pushing the button for the elevator. The elevator immediately opened.
As they walked into the elevator, Lee answered, “Of course not. If River could not be trusted to keep a secret, any secret, she would have long since been dead.”
Annie thought over Lee's comment for a few seconds, as they turned around in the elevator, to face the door.
As the doors automatically closed behind them, Annie realized, as she admitted, “That is true.”
(_)
Meanwhile, River walked into Chang's office. She knocked on his open door, to get Chang's attention, as she continued walking inside.
Chang looked up at her, from behind his desk, as he replied, “I wondered when you would show up?”
River came to a stop, a few feet in front of Chang's desk, answered, “I was busy today.”
Chang inquired, “We both know why you are here. I am not upset that you kept Lee's identity a secret. I just want to know why you kept it a secret from everyone?”
River said, “As I have read his mind, I found that Lee is really a nice person, very down on his luck. So, he wrote those stories. But, he honestly did not realize what he was doing at the time. And he was writing to maintain his sanity. That man has issues. He does not deserve what Revy, and the others, have planned for him.”
Chang responded, “After the conversation I just had with Lee, I agree with you.”
River smiled at Chang, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Chang asked, “You're welcome. So, why is Lee staying around Revy, and the others, in the first place? It does not make sense?” He thought, 'Unless he has cancer. Like I suspect.'
River answered, “It is as you suspect. Lee is dying of cancer. He is gambling that he can steal one of their reality devices, so he can have a future of some kind.”
Given Chang was speaking to a telepath, he stated what he was thinking, as he replied, “That explains a lot. That is why he did not tell me the reasons he wanted to get his hands on a reality device. And after comparing current and older pictures of him, I already realized he had cancer.”
“And while my letting him know that he is the writer limits his options. Him knowing that I know he is dying, would further weaken his bargaining position. And while I could use that as a way to control him. But, I don't want to. Beside, he does not want to owe me a favor. Which is a good reason for both of us keeping what we know, on that matter, a secret, from the other.”
“Though, in all honesty, I would be tempted to give Lee one of my reality device, right now, if doing so wouldn't piss off Revy, and her amazon brigade.”
River complimented, “That is a good point.”
Chang questioned, “How long does he have?”
River answered, “Around two months.”
Chang said, “Okay. We still have time to work this out. Lee has shown some talent, with a number of abilities. He could be useful to us. The trick is how to convince everyone else after his hide, to back off. I am guessing that even with your super-genius, you don't have an answer? Yet?”
River admitted, “Speaking for personal experience, on the other side of the equation, it is hard to negotiate with violent lunatics.”
Chang commented, “You would know. Though, you are a lot saner than you use to be. And at least the maids have yet to come to town.”
River replied, “Let us count our fortunes on that one.”
Chang said, “Agreed.”
The two them talked for a little while on the matter. Though, neither was able to come up with a workable solution. And they agreed to think on it, over the day. To see if one of them came up with an idea to save Lee, while getting his enemies, off his back.
(_)
Meanwhile, a few minutes ago, just after Lee and Annie left River, and walked into the express elevator. The elevator doors had just closed, with the elevator beginning to take Annie and Lee down to the gaming floor.
As the elevator moved downward, the two adults sitting next to each other, with Lee to Annie's left side, as they faced the elevator door.
Annie turned to Lee, as she requested, “Lee... Can I call you, Lee?”
Lee turned to Annie, as he replied, “Sure. What can I call you?”
Annie answered, “Annie is fine. Well Lee, I am surprised you are not scared out of your mind to see me. Let alone meet, and talk with me. You know who, and what, I am. You are also partly responsible for who, and what, I currently am. Though, I will give you credit that most of what you have done to me, has benefited me.”
Lee said, “I am glad you think that. And that you are grateful.” He thought, 'I wish Revy, Rock, and the others after my hide, were as grateful, as you.'
Annie pointed out, “Yes. I appreciate what you have done for me. But, I am not sensing any fear from you towards me. All I sense is indifference to your situation.”
Lee stated, “Annie. Even though you are very powerful. At the end of the day, you are sane. You are very sane. Even when you were in the black suit, you were sane. You just had a bad temper. And I have been dealing with insane, violent women for a while, now. Compared to dealing with them, this is a very pleasant experience.”
Annie agreed, “I can see why you would think that. I sense you have another questions for me?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Though, I do have a few questions for you. Though, they are questions I have no right to ask.”
Annie stated, “Go ahead, and ask the questions, anyway. I am not going to hurt you over asking your questions.”
Lee asked, “Why are you working for, Chang? I thought you hated him. Hell, I know you hated him. I wrote you that way.”
Annie responded, “Thanks to you, I have learned to be a more forgiving person. Still, I am charging Chang a fortune for my services. In gold and jewels. We have a good arrangement. Besides the money being good. I get to keep my own hours. And the spa perks here are amazing. Given Inara is in charge of the spa, that is not surprising. The things she can do as a masseuse, even without getting sexual, would blow your mind.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms that. Now, for my next question.'
Lee inquired, “I don't doubt that. And how can you be partnered up with Arcee?”
Annie answered, “I can sense that Arcee needs some emotional help. So I am helping her deal with some of her personal issues. I have helped others in the same way. And since I am not going to harm you over your hand in my current situation, that is no point in harming them, either.”
Lee replied, “Fair enough.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to have some fun. By asking one of those questions, one always wants to ask Annie, but was afraid to ask. And I wasn't sure how she would react to the question. Let alone what her answer would be.'
Lee casually questioned, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Anyway. In all sincerity. What is your opinion of the movie, Spaceballs?”
Annie giggled, for a few seconds. She continued giggling a little, with a wicked grin on her lips, as she answered, “Funniest movie ever conceived by man. I wish I had thought of Dark Helmet's idea for keeping his men in line. Sure, going for the throat, and killing subordinates is one thing. But, going for the balls is just plain mean. And his attrition rate must have been very low. And the idea made me ask myself, why didn't I think of that first?”
Lee thought, 'So, Annie finds a parody film about herself fun. That is good. Like River, keeping Annie happy is always good.'
'And Annie agrees with what some of her parody counterpart, Dark Helmet, did in that film. I guess that makes sense. I agree that some of the ideas that Dark Helmet employed were intelligent. And Dark Helmet and Mel Brooks, did come up with the, good is dumb, comment. So, while Dark Helmet was a parody of Darth Vader, he was an intelligent parody.'
'And Annie always did have a wicked sense of humor. Even as Anakin, and later on as Vader. I am glad has her keep that sense of humor, in my stories, as well.'
Lee agreed, “Yea. Dark Helmet had the best of both worlds on that one. It was too bad that he was surrounded by Assholes.”
Annie grinned widened at Lee's joke, as she giggled a little more. She happily responded, “Yes. And I have had those moments before, myself. Where I had to restrain myself from not just killing all the officers under my command, but everyone under my command, for their collective stupidity. And it wasn't mostly the clones that were at fault. It was the sycophants that made it up the ranks, that were the problem for me.”
Lee commented, “Now, that I think about. I can see that you must have killed a number of your subordinates, because they were sucking up to you. And through the force, you knew they were lying, and you just had to wait for an official excuse to kill them.”
By then, Annie had calmed down. She still slightly grinned, as she stated, “Exactly. And most of them were sycophants. And even at my worst, I respected honesty, as long as the person was not being a jerk about it.”
Lee commented, “That is nice to know.” He thought, 'Also, it just occurred to me. On a related matter. Annie might not like some of Monty Python. Such as the movie, the Quest For the Holy Grail, and the black knight skit. That might hit too close to home for her. Though, now that I am having a nice conversation with her. There are other topics I wish to speak to Annie about.'
By then, the elevator door stopped, and opened on the ground floor.
Lee sadly thought, 'Too late. I just hope we get to continue this conversation, later.'
Both of them stepped out, into the elevator bay, and passed the two female guards, standing at the sides of the express elevator, as Lee said, “We will have to continued this conversation for another time.”
Annie agreed, “Yes. We will. And thank you for not saying any Star Wars injokes.”
Lee stated, “I think we both agree that I already worked those injokes out of my system.”
Annie said, “True. Well, see you later.”
Lee replied, “You too.”
As the two adults continued walking into the gaming floor, Annie slowed down, so she could turned towards her left, behind Lee, as she towards the restaurant, to get some lunch.
Meanwhile, Lee continued heading straight, towards the front entrance doors.
When Lee reached to the front doors, he pushed opened one of the doors, and walked through, to the outside, with the door automatically closing behind him.
As Lee continued walking, on the concrete sidewalk, under the large awning of the hotel, he saw in front of him, there was a black, four door sedan, under the carport that was attached to the awning. With the right passenger side of the car facing Lee, by the curb.
A young, slender, chinese woman, in a black business suit, held the passenger back door, on the driver's side of the car open, as she looked over at Lee.
The woman said, in english, with a slight chinese accent, “Mister Lee. If you would come with me.”
Lee continued walking towards the black car, as he turned his head towards the woman. He stated, “Yes. I have a minor request. Instead of taking me to the Devil's Hotel. Could you please take me to the Rats Nest, so I could pick my car.”
The woman replied, “Most certainly.”
With his request confirmed, Lee silently walked over, and got into the right side back seat of the car. The woman closed the back door, and then walked to the driver's door, open it, got in, closer the driver's door, used the key to start the engine, she drove the car out of the casino parking lot, and onto the road.
Lee was silent, during the entire drive to the Rats Nest, as he thought about what had happened today.
Lee thought, 'Well, I can now add at least three more people that know who I am. Chang, Annie, and Arcee. And unlike River, those three are both dangerous, and they can be mean. Even when she was insane, River always tried to be nice, unless something triggered her to be violent, sometimes against her will. The same cannot be said for the other three.'
'Still, they all agreed to keep my secret. For now. But, I do not know how long their lips will stay sealed.'
'Adding to that, my government has finally found me. Though, I doubt they will do anything for a few days. Given the embarrassment for them of what just happened. Also, they won't make another move until they figure out what exactly is happening on this island, to this subordinates. That could be a while, given the answer to the truth would probably not be accepted by the bureaucrats that will be likely assigned to work on the case. The truth is just to insane to accept.'
'So, either way, I have time. But, either way. In the long run, I am screwed.'
Lee continued to thinking about his situation, as he was being driven to the Rats Nest bar.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, the chinese driver dropped Lee off at the front entrance of the Rats Nest.
After Lee exited the car, and gently closed the door to the car, driver drove off.
Lee wasted no time checking on the Rats Nest bartender. Instead, Lee ran to the parking lot, where he found his car, where he left it. He used his keys to get into the driver's side of the car.
A few seconds after Lee sat down in the driver's seat of his car, he used his car key to start the ignition, and drove to the Devil's Hotel. Though, he did go at the speed limit. So, as to not attract any more unwanted attention, than he already had to deal with that day.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee parked in the middle part of the parking lot, in front of the Devil's Hotel entrance.
After Lee got out of his car out, he locked and shut his car door. Lee then swiftly made it across the parking lot, and into the hotel, from the front lobby entrance.
Once Lee was through the entryway, and inside the front lobby, quietly, through quickly, walked his way to the elevator bay.
Lee soon made it to the third floor, and into the bedroom, of his suite.
Lee shut the door, as he pocketed his key to the hallway door to his suite. He then locked the deadbolt to the lock. After which, he turned on the ceiling light, as he turned around to face his bedroom, as he leaned against the back of his hallway door.
Lee took off his baseball cap and glasses. He tossed them both onto his bed, to his left side, across the room. Both items landed on the bed, without a problem.
By then, the anxiety of situation was starting to take its toll on Lee. With Lee starting to take slower, more deeper, stronger breaths, with each breath, as he replayed the scenes of the day, over and over, in his mind.
Lee rubbed his face, to try to help himself calm down, but it doing so did no good for him.
All Lee's careful planning was falling apart. He has been found out by multiple people. The authorities knew where he was. Chang knew who he was. It was only a matter of time before his plans fully collapsed, and the girls in the hotel, he was in, learned the truth about him
Then, there was the cancer that was slowly killing him. The cancer that was making him thinner and thinner, until he was a living skeleton. Then, he would die.
Along with all those facts, people were now dead because of him. And not just today. But, from his writings. Real people. Not just sentences on a word processor he was typing. But, real people. People he saw first hand, that were dead because of his existence.
And it all hit him at once, as something broke inside of him. With the tight control over his emotions finally slipping away, allowing the leash on the darkness behind his mask to show on the outside, allowing his repressed, insane rage to come out to play.
Lee needed to damage something, or he knew he was going to hurt someone. And damaging a thing was a lot easier to deal with, in the aftermath, than physically hurting someone. He could just simply pay for damages to something. The same could not be said for hurting a person.
Lee looked over at the steel coat rod beside him, to his left, that was attached to the wall.
Lee swiftly ripped the coat rod off its attachments, allowing the suits he had hanged on the rod, to fall to the floor.
He then use the rod as a baseball back to beat against the bedroom side of the wall that divided his bedroom with his bathroom.
He beat on the wall for two straight minutes, creating holes and gashes, to work out his anger.
Finally, he just dropped the rob, as he collapsed to the floor. He began to cry at how much hell his life had been since he was born. And no matter how much effort he put into trying to improve his life, God just pulled strings on people, and events, to make his life even worse, and more painful.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, after Lee has finally be able to collect himself, to where he would not break out into tears at the pain hell his life had been for as long as he could remember, he stood up. He then went to his bed to collect his baseball cap and large glasses.
Lee put on his baseball cap, and large glasses. And he head back to the hallway door.
When he reached the door, turned off the ceiling light, from the light switch by the door.
Lee undid the deadbolt to his door, opened his door, and he exited into the hallway. He pulled the door closed behind him, with the knob lock to the door to his suite locking behind, as he headed for the elevator bay, and to the lobby.
When Lee entered the lobby, from the elevator bay, he walk over to the check in desk.
As he walked, Lee looked around and he did not see any Revy's crew present in the room.
Lee thought, with a bit of gallows humor, 'At least I don't have to worry about them bothering me. Given the state of my mind, right now, I would be tempted to start a fight with one of them, just so I could die in battle. All my other options such when compared to that.'
When Lee reach the check in desk, he came to a stop, as he turned to face the counter, with the two clerks on duty, standing behind the counter.
One of the clerks on duty look across the counter at Lee. The clerk, in question, asked, in english, “Is there something I can do for you, sir?”
Lee answered, “Yes.” He then pulled out a rolled of money, and he set it on the counter, as he stated, “I had an accident in my room, just now. This is three thousand U.S. dollars. This should pay for the damages to the room, and then some.”
Lee did not even both to maintain his poker face, as he grimly thought, 'There goes over a third of my money. Well, I wasn't planning to live to spend it, anyway. And if I had decided to escape. That would have probably only bought me a few weeks, anyway. Compared to the month or so, the cancer is going to take to kill me. And I am not going to go, dying on the street, alone in the middle of a foreign city. I have more self-respect than that.'
The clerk picked up the roll of money. He undid the roll. As he counted the hundred dollar bills, he commented, “It must have been one of those kinds of accidents.”
Lee admitted, “Yes.”
By then the clerk finished counting, and he found that it was indeed three thousand U.S. dollars.
The clerk set the money under the counter. He looked at Lee, in his eyes. Lee could see there was no anger in the clerk's eyes. Just a calm state of professionalism. The clerk stated, “We appreciate you telling us up front, about what happened. And you have also immediately paid for damages. So, there will be no problems from us, towards you, for your actions.”
Lee said, “I glad to hear that.” He thought, 'I have enough problems, as is.'
The clerk inquired, “So am I. I will make you a receipt. Do you wish to be relocated to another room?”
Lee answered, “No. The damage is not serious. So, you can repair them, later. Besides, I have a feeling I am not going to be here for much longer.”
The clerk said, “We are sorry to hear that. We hope you have enjoyed your stay.”
Lee sorrowfully stated, “The sad fact is that the time I have spent here has been some of the best parts of my life.” He thought, 'And given most of my time here has been intensely stressful on me, that is not saying much.'
The clerk calmly replied, “We appreciate that.”
The clerk then made Lee a receipt, and handed it to him.
Lee pocketed the receipt. He then turned to his right, and headed back towards the elevator bay.
While Lee walked, he grimly thought, with anger and disappointment lacing his thoughts, 'Forget Sam. He seems to disappear without notice. Well it is my turn. Forget Pedro. The man has barely been any help to me, at all. Forget everything. I am going back to my suite, and I am going to stay there for tonight, and tomorrow. So, I can relax, and figure out what I am going to do next. I will dine in tonight, and tomorrow. Hopefully, by this time tomorrow, I will have figured out what I can do to salvage my situation.'
'And I have already figured out what to do, for my worst case scenario. That being I may have to bolt from this town at a moments notice.'
'I still have close to five grand, U.S., in my pockets. That is enough for food and lodgings, for the immediate future. So, I am not hurting for money. For at least a few weeks. In which case, I will let the cancer take me.'
'And if I run out of money, I will just end my life by my own hand.'
'Same difference. It is only a matter of how long the span of time that I remain breathing. And such a short different in lengths of time is insignificant to the eternity of pain and suffering, that I have to look forward to, in Hell, no matter what I do.'
'Besides, my alternatives seem to be far worse.'
Lee then made it to the elevator bay. He soon took an elevator to the third floor, and after he unlocked his door, he walked back into his suite.
Once he got to his suite, he shut, and locked, the door behind him. He walked over to the lamp light, and turned it on.
Lee then spent the next five minutes repairing the steel coat rod, the best he could. He got it to where he hung on the wall, and he could set his suits to hang from it.
After which, Lee turned off the lamp light, with the curtains blocking the outside light, he was sitting in a mostly dark room, safe for the light coming from around the curtains of the room, which provide just enough light to navigate around his room.
Lee walked over to his bed, he grabbed the remote, as he sat down on his end of his bed, with his feet on the floor, in front of the bed.
Next, Lee used his remote to turn on the TV, and find something watch. Anything to watch. To take his mind off his own horrific problems. In his past, present, and future.
(_)
Around an hour later, in his suite, Lee was sitting on his bed, in the dark, from the turned off lights, and shut curtains. He was still watching TV, which did little to take his mind off of his problems.
He then started hearing the phone on his nightstand, on the left side of his bed, begin to ring.
Lee used his remote to turn off the TV. He toss the remote on his bed, as he moved around his bed, to reach the phone.
When Lee reached the phone, he picked up the receiver to his phone.
Lee was sitting up, as he held the receiver to his right ear. He said, “Hello.”
A familiar voice said, in english, “Hello Lee. It's Sam.”
Lee replied, in a tired tone of voice, “Hey Sam.”
Sam asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What happened? We were suppose to meet back at after lunch, but you never showed up?”
Lee thought, 'I believe it will be best not to tell him that I was kidnapped, then rescued by a Transformer, and the woman whom was formally Darth Vader. Though, that would likely give him a good laugh. Instead, I will just keep this simple.'
Lee answered, “Sorry. Something came up at the last moment. And I think I am going to need some time alone for today, and tomorrow. I will see you the day after tomorrow. And thanks for calling.” He mentally added, 'At least someone gives a damn about me.'
Sam responded, “No problem. Take the time you need. I will be here, when you need me. I will see you the morning after tomorrow, at the Rats Nest.”
Lee said, “Thanks Sam. I will see you, then.”
Lee then hung up the phone. A few seconds later, something occurred to Lee, as he thought, 'I might as well call Pedro. It is better, for myself, if I tell him what happened, than for him to learn what happened from someone else.'
Lee then picked up the receiver, and dialed another number.
That was just enough ambient light coming from the outside, around the curtains, to see the outline of the phone key pad, for Lee to dial a number.
As the phone picked up on the other end of the line, Lee did not wait for the other person to say, hello. Instead, Lee stated, in english, “It's Lee. Please, transfer me to Chief Del Soto. It is important.”
A few seconds later, the call was transferred, and Pedro picked up the other end of the line. Pedro said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Lee stated, “Hi Pedro. There are some things, today, that happened me. That I need to tell you about, right now. It cannot wait for this evening.”
Pedro replied, in english, “I can guess. My boys had to clean up some bodies on the highway leading to the bridge, out of town. From the hardware, I am guessing a hit squad, from your homeland, was sent after you, and bring you back to them.”
Lee thought, 'Keeping it vague is a smart move, Pedro. We do not know if this call is being monitored.' He said, “Yea. What you likely guessed what happened, likely happened.”
Pedro commented, “I found some cauterized wounds on the bodies. Are those injuries from who I think they are from?”
Lee said, “Yes. She helped me, along with her large, pink friend.”
There was a few seconds of silence. Pedro then replied, “So, she is here, as well?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Do we have to worry about reprisals?”
Pedro stated, “I doubt it. I bumped this up to my superiors on the mainland. This is not the first time you homeland's government tried something like this, on my island. And this is not the first time they did not return.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That is the answer I was hoping to here. Though, do need to know what the local authorities are going to do, in response to this. I need to know if the mainland authorities might send someone to investigate the matter, and arrest me.'
Lee inquired, “So, what is going to happen behind the scene.”
Pedro answered, “Well, behind closed doors, away from the press, my country's government will complain. Your country's government will deny everything. The entire incident will be swept under the rug. And nothing will come of it. I will probably have to get rid of the bodies. I think I will have them buried, in unmarked graves, with a priest preforming last rites.”
Lee thought, 'Good. Nothing is going to immediately come out of this mess. Meaning, I still have some time to figure out what to do. But, right now, that is looking like a matter of days. A week at most. But, that is still a little time. And I have worked with less time before, while being successful in my goals. Now, to compliment Pedro. To help keep him happy with me.'
Lee complimented, “That is kind of you.”
Pedro questioned, “Thank you. So, what happened next?”
Lee thought, 'Given that he has been covering for me, all this time. I am going to have to tell him. Though, I will keep my story vague. And I am sure he will be able to read the lines. This is not the first time we have done this. And he has not complained once about our speaking in code.'
Lee stated, “They took me to see their boss. And I had a long talk with him. They know about me. But, they are not going to do anything to me, for right now.”
Pedro commented, “Okay. Still, it looks like your con is collapsing in around you.”
Lee grimly thought, 'Even you can see the obvious, Pedro. And it is bad, if you are willing to openly tell me this. And as such, I need to get you out of the line of fire, that I am sure is to come. With what happened today only being a taste of that.'
Lee suggested, “As sad as it is for me to admit, you are likely correct. Also, for your sake, I believe we need to stop meeting each other.”
Pedro replied, “I agree.”
Lee said, in a sincere tone of voice, “And listen. If this is the last time we talk, I thank you for your help. You have saved my life a few times. And I appreciate that.”
Pedro responded, in a firm, thought supportive tone of voice, “You too. You saved my brother's life. And kept me and my boys out of trouble. I thank you for that. And good luck.”
Lee said, “Good luck to you, as well.”
Lee then hung up the phone, as he sat on his bed, in the darkness of his suite.
Lee said, out loud, in a sad, disappointed tone of voice, “Back to fucking square one.”
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 18: “Sealed Can Of Savvy Awesome.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
During the morning after the chat between Lee and Chang, around ten thirty AM, Melvin walked into the Devil's Hotel restaurant. He was ready to face the day, and begin his shift, as the bartender for the hotel restaurant.
As Melvin entered the room, he noticed Revy sitting, alone, at the bar counter, on the side facing the left wall of the room. And she had her guns with her.
Also, Melvin noticed that Revy was the only other person in the room.
The morning staff had already cleaned up, and taken down the breakfast buffet for the day, and left to resume their other duties at the hotel. The other customers, besides Revy, had finished their breakfast and left to have some fun for the day.
Melvin grimly thought, 'This is not good. Revy, by herself, in a bar, is never a good thing. It usually leads to trouble. Plus, she is armed. Still, I better find out what is going on, so, I can mitigate the situation.'
Revy heard Melvin’s foot steps, as she turned to her left, in her stood, to to face him. She stated, “Hey Melvin. I have been waiting for you to show up, so we can get this party started. I would like to start off with a beer.”
Meanwhile, so not to keep Revy waiting too long. Melvin briskly walked through the front entrance to the bar counter, and around back for of the counter. He came to a stop where he was standing across the counter from Revy, as he asked, “What is going on Revy? And where is everyone else?”
Revy said, “Well, Benny convinced them all to take a bus tour of some ruins on the mainland. I didn't feel like going.... I have seen plenty of collapsed buildings, in my life. I don't need to see any ancient ones.”
Melvin mentally reflected, 'This is worse than thought. Revy left alone is like leaving a bored, armed, teenager alone. She will just get into trouble, unless I do something... I could get Lee. But, I think that game with River, that Revy and Chang forced him into, which he won, burned him out a bit. I know he ordered into his suite, yesterday evening, so I can guess he just wants to be left alone. So, I will only contact him, if it is an emergency.'
'Still, I need to find out how long until the others get back.'
Melvin inquired, “So, when will the others been back?”
Revy answered, “They left around nine this morning, and the tour was suppose to end around three this afternoon. So, I would say, they will all get back, in around four and a half hours.”
Melvin thought, with relief, 'That is not too long. Now, to get down to basics of why I am not going to let you get drunk, Revy.'
Melvin pointed you, “Revy, you should remember that I still have the rule where I am not going to let you get drunk while armed.”
Revy shrugged, as she said, “Okay. Fair enough. I will just few beers, until the Rats Nest opens up in half an hour, and then I will head over there.”
Melvin deadpanned, “I hope by taxi.”
Revy replied, “Of course.”
Melvin commented, “Though, I doubt you will get much service from the bartender over there, at this time of day. Especially, while armed.” He thought, 'Beside, I like that woman. And I don't want her getting mixed up with you, Revy.'
Revy's lips curled into smirk, as she stated, “I promise to be nice, and tip well.”
It took all of Melvin's willpower not to laugh at Revy's comment. Melvin thought, 'I highly doubt you will. Still, I don't want to serve you any alcohol this early in the morning. But, I have to keep you attention busy someway, for at least half an hour. And I don't think you are going to settle for a few movie suggestions... But, I have something else in mind. Something I learned while here in Plata Podrido, as a hobby.'
Melvin then noticed from Revy's facial expression, that she was growing impatient. Revy asked, “So, are you going to get me that beer? Or not?”
Melvin inquired, “Well, first Revy. I was wondering if you would like to play a little game?”
Revy stated, “It depends on the game. This better on be a ploy to get me to have sex with you. It will not work on me. And it will likely upset me.”
Melvin scoffed, “Please, Revy. I am at work. And I don't date crazy women. You included.”
Revy let out a laugh. She conceded, “You got me there. So, what do you have in mind?”
Melvin asked, “Revy, have you ever heard of past life regression?”
Revy smiled at Melvin, as she answered, “Yes. Sounds interesting.”
Melvin suggested, “Would you like to know to know about your past lives?”
Revy thought, 'That is not a bad idea. My kids are reincarnation of people I know it my current life. And I do wonder who I was in a passed life. And it might actually be fun.'
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Sure. You are not going to pulled out a pocket watch, are you.”
Melvin pulled out his pen. He held it up, in front of Revy, as he said, “No. I learned to do it with a pen, or a pencil. Now, I just need focus on the pen, and relax your mind.”
Revy did as she was requested to do.
(_)
Half an hour later, Lee was making the most of his morning, in his suite.
It has been a few hours since he had awoke. He had long since gotten ready to face the day. Among other things, he had brushed his teeth, flossed, shaved his face, gotten a shower, and gotten dress.
He was dressed in his casual clothing, such as t-shirt, pants, leather belt, tennis shoes, and wrist watch.
Also, while he had on this blue cloth jacket, he did not have on his baseball cap and large glasses. His cap and glasses were on his nightstand, by the left side of his bed.
Lee has already ordered breakfast in earlier that morning. With the bellhop returning for the tray and cart, half an hour ago.
Lee made sure to tip the bellhop with a ten dollar bill.
Currently, Lee was sitting on his bed, watching TV.
The curtains to the outside were drawn open, with the sliding door to the balcony open, to let in some fresh, cool air, from the sunny day outside.
The light from the outside provided plenty of illumination for his room.
As Lee watched TV, he thought about his life, 'Well, all things being equal. Which they are clearly not. This morning has been pretty normal, considering how my life has become a carnival for the violently insane. That I have some of the most dangerous, badass women in the multiverse after my hide, for screwing them over, from a literary standpoint... Well, literary for me. Given what I wrote actually happened to them, in other realities.'
'In addition, besides Pedro. The other four people in town, whom know I am the writer, is gender bending, former dimensional warlord, mafia boss, turned back to casino owner. Along with his telepathic genius girlfriend. And their two main enforcers. A borderline insane autobot, and a former sith lord turned gray force using master. And they all are good friends with the women whom after me.'
'The only thing going for me in that situation, is that all four seem to like me, and they agreed to keep my secret, for the moment. Though, I have no idea how long said moment is going to last.'
'On top of all this, yesterday, one of the most powerful governments on this Earth tried to kidnap me off the street.'
'And if none of these people are able to get me, the cancer that is slowly killing me, will.'
'I have a few months until the cancer will kill me. But, first I have to steal one of the reality devices from the women after me, and use it to escape. That is the main problem. Fortunately, I had a few ideas on how to cure my cancer, once I am gone. Though, I first have to escape these women, which even I will admit is not going to be an easy task.'
'And the only four real friends I have here is a shady drifter, who is good at playing poker, and great at playing pool. A corrupt cowboy cop. A bartender, who is former military, and ex-mafia member, who is in hiding from his comrades. And another bartender, whose name, and past, I have no clue about.'
'Of those four, only the cowboy cop knows the truth about me. And as of yesterday, me and him decided it would be best for him to put some distance between us... Yep. I am screwed. I am so screwed to the wall, that I am likely now part of the wall.'
'So, I am just going to spend today in my suite, and shut out the insanity, for one god damned day. So, I can think, and plan my next moves, in this constantly shifting playing board which I call my life.'
'Still, at this point, the only question now is when the grim reaper will show up?'
Suddenly, there was a knock at his hallway door.
Lee turned to his right, in the direction of the door, as he sarcastically thought, 'That might be her, right now. Best get ready, and face whomever it is. Upset badasses make for poor company.'
Lee quickly used his remote to turn off the TV. After he set the remote on the bed, he got up, and reached on the nightstand to put on his large glasses, and blue baseball cap.
While he did so, he saw that the clock on the nightstand stated that it was eleven two AM.
As Lee walked around his bed the right side of his bed, he stopped at his sliding door, just long enough to shut and lock it.
He then turned and walked to the door to the hallway.
As Lee looked into the peephole, he saw that it was Melvin, and he breathed a sigh of relief.
Lee thought, 'Even if Melvin knew the truth about me. I doubt he would hurt me... Besides he owes me, for saving him from his former friends, whom came looking for him. In all honestly, he is in a similar situation as me. So, I sympathize with his problems.'
'And I didn't really do anything to bad to the member of Hotel Moscow. Barring Balalaika and B. I was not the one responsible for turning Hotel Moscow into an Amazon Brigade. That is on Balalaika's head. And I didn't do anything to serious to Hotel Moscow.'
'Still, from the way he vaguely talked about his past, I get the feeling his reality device is broke. So, I might as well not brother him with telling him the truth. Still, I will see what he wants. He would only come to me if the situation was serious... It also might give me a good laugh. And I could use a good laugh, right now.'
Lee opened the door, as he greeted, “Good morning Melvin?”
Lee then noticed Melvin had a worried look on his face.
Lee expression turned grim, as he thought, 'Melvin being worried is a very back thing. And the last time he came to my door, a few member of his old military group, hotel Moscow, has come to town to look for him. And we barely got out of that mess in one piece.'
Lee asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What is the matter, Melvin?”
Melvin said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Lee, and I am in big fucking trouble here. Probably more trouble, than the last time I came to your suite, looking for help. And you are the only one I can turn to for help. Please, help me.”
Lee thought, with concern, bordering on worry, 'Oh this is bad. If this retired Hotel Moscow badass says he is in trouble, that is saying something. I might as well help him. I cannot save myself, but at least I can save him.'
Lee calmed himself, as he put himself into his poker face frame of mind. He then inquired, in a calm, reassuring tone of voice, “First, tell me what is going on?”
Melvin stated, “Well, this morning, the girls decided to take a bus tour to the mainland, to see some ruins. Revy stayed behind. She was in the bar, getting an early start at drinking, and I didn't want problems. So, I suggested we play a game.”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he jump in, in a firm, borderline threatening tone of voice, “If this game involved sex, or violence, in any way, shape, or form, you are on your own. And my next action, after shutting the door, will be to call Pedro.”
Melvin shook his head, as he explained, “It was nothing like that. First, I want you to know we have roughly four hours to fix this. So, there is time. And well... You see, I have been here for a few years, and in that time I have studied a few hobbies. One of them is hypnotism.”
Lee entire demeanor completely changed to happiness, as he realized the possibilities of Melvin's comment.
Lee was barely able to contain his laughter, as he smiled. He said, with a bit of excitement in his voice, “If she is acting like a kid... Well, more than normal. Or, a chicken. I want to see this with my own eyes.”
Melvin calmly said, “It is not that type of hypnotism. Though, that might be tempting to do to here. I wish I had thought about doing that, earlier. But, no. What I am talking about, is that I studied past life regression, through hypnotism. And I got it worked with Revy. And it was not trick on her. She even liked the idea of learning about her past lives. The problem is I cannot turn it off.”
While, Lee began to realize what Melvin meant, his laughter died in his throat, as he dropped his grin.
Lee grimly thought, 'Oh no. Revy is literally not in her right mind. And Melvin wants me to return Revy to normal... Or, more aptly, what passed for normal, for her.'
'Also, with Revy having the personality of one of her previously lives. Knowing her. And my rotten luck. Chances are the older personality is more violent, and ill tempered than Revy usually is. Well, let's find out, what is going on.'
Lee responded, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh no... No. No. No. You should have known better with that crew. That is like playing with fire, Melvin... Have you ever seen the Hellraiser movies?”
Melvin questioned, “Yes. Why?”
Lee answered, “Because if we don't fix this, they are going to skin you alive, and then really show you what true suffering is like...” Lee then stood a few deep breathes. He then inquired, “Okay... How bad is it? What person was Revy in her past life?”
Lee saw Melvin's body squirm, as Melvin coyly said, “Well, it is not really that bad... Well, it is. You can see for yourself. She is right here.”
Lee walked out of his room, and into the hallway, as Melvin moved out of the way, and to Lee's left side. Lee came to a stop, just inside the hallway, with the door to his room still open.
Lee then saw Revy with her pistols holstered, in her usual clothing, about ten feet away from both him, and Melvin, to Lee's right side. Lee also saw Revy quietly looking at them.
But, by the way Revy positioned her body, as she stood in place, along with the playful look in her eyes, Lee could see that something was off about her general demeanor.
Such as her eyes, and facial expression, were more relaxed than normal.
Revy then walked up a few feet towards him. As Revy walked, Lee noticed Revy's mannerisms were completely different, yet eerily familiar. As if her body language belonged to someone else he knew of.
Then, Revy came to a stop, in the middle of the hallway, about six feet from Lee and Melvin.
Revy then held her hands up in from of her, She made hand gestures, as she spoke, in a very calm tone of voice, in english, with the accent she used tipping Lee off as to who she was in so many ways, “Hello. I am told that you, my dear follow, could be of some use to myself... It seems I have found myself in a strange situation... Well, stranger than my usual affairs... Still, it all comes down to what you can do for me... A question... A parley... A twist of style... A twist of fate... All to answer the question, are you...” She cocked her head to her right side, as she continued, “Savvy?”
Revy then dropped her hands back to her sides, and straighten her head upwards, as she maintained a slight smirk on her lips.
As Lee continued to look at Revy, Lee stayed mostly calm on the outside, as he barely maintained his poker face. But on the inside, Lee was a tempest of worry and concern, as he thought, 'No. No. No. Revy cannot possibly be the reincarnation that person. Of all people... Dear god, I know you are cruel. But, not this cruel... No!...'
Lee calmly asked, “And to whom am I speaking to?”
Revy leaned down in masculine bow, as she answered, in the same accent she had previously used, “Captain Jack Sparrow, at your service.” She then leaned back up straight.
Lee was barely able to maintain his mask of calmness, as he mentally screamed, 'Oh god NOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!....' Lee then forced himself to calm down, as he continued his thoughts, 'I have to calm down. I have to focus. I have to save the world for the most dangerous pirate in the multiverse. A pirate that is now even more dangerous...'
'And while the, how could Revy be Jack's reincarnation, is a big question. This still does explain a few things about Revy's personality. Such as Revy's bad karma in her rotten childhood. Also, there are parallels between Revy and Jack. Both like rum. Both are manipulative. Jack is just a whole lot better at it, given he was taught manners. Both are genre savvy. It is just that Jack dials it up to eleven.... Which could be a problem for myself.'
'Both are selfish, greedy, arrogant, amoral, bi-sexual pirates. It is just that Jack prefers to be nice about it. Also, Revy prefers to be honest with those around her, while Jack prefers to lie to others.'
'And Jack was enslaved at one point, and escaped. Revy was imprisoned, and raped, but she later escaped. Both have problems with their love life. I just fixed hers. The only real difference between the two, besides their genders, is that Jack has positive outlook on life. And Revy has a negative outlook on life.'
'That, and the fact that Revy is monogamous, while Jack is promiscuous.'
'And both of them stand by their friends, even when it is against their better judgment.'
'If it wasn't for the fact that Jack just being here is a danger to the world. Along with screwing over Revy's personal life. I would leave Revy like this. Unfortunately, I have to put this genie back into the bottle. And I think I know how. With Revy now being a sealed can of awesome. That is, savvy awesome.'
'The problem is that Jack Sparrow is so awesome, and savvy, that you only open that can when you are ready to end the world... Or, you just need someone to throw a really good party.'
'Still, I might as well deal with this situation, because this is way out of Melvin's field of expertise.'
Lee turned to Melvin. He stated, with annoyance in his tone of voice, “Melvin, when you fuck up, you really go for the gold.”
Melvin turned to Lee. He could not help but smirk, as he inquired, “It is a gift. So, are you still going to help me?”
Lee said, “Yes. You go back to the bar. I am taking Revy out on an... errand.” He turned to Revy, as he continued, “If Revy's friends show up early, tell them that Revy did have a few drinks. And with her already having some alcohol. She talked me into taking her to the casino, to have some fun.”
Melvin thought, 'That might work.'
Melvin replied, “Alright.” He turned to Revy, as he said, “It was a pleasure meeting you, Jack.”
Revy looked over at Melvin, as she commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “You to, as well, Melvin.”
Melvin then turned around and walked down the hallway, towards the front elevator bay.
Meanwhile, Revy turned to Lee, as she asked, “So, what makes you so special for Melvin to ask you to help in this situation?”
Lee looked at Revy, in her eyes, as he flatly answered, “I am the only person crazy enough to take the job, with the limited time we have, while remaining calm enough to pull off this job.”
Revy cracked a grin, as she said, “Now, that is an answer. So few people appreciate the advantages to being both crazy and calm at the same time.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Being crazy calm does have its perks.”
Revy commented, “And you seem to know me.”
Lee retorted, “Who has not heard of the great Captain Jack Sparrow? Or, for that matter, the great Revy?”
Revy's grin got wider, as she replied, “Touche.”
Lee requested, “Now Jack. If you would please follow me to my car. We need to head to a few places? If that is alright with you?”
Revy said, “Absolutely. I want to see where this situation goes. And you do have a nice pink Cadillac.”
Lee thought, 'So, Jack has Revy's memories. That just means I will have to be even more careful. I will ask her about this, after we get into the car.' He joked, “Then, right this way, my lady.” He then turned and started walking towards the front elevator bay that went to the hotel lobby.
Revy let out a laugh. Though, Lee noted her laugh was more like one of Jack's laughs, and not Revy's laughs. Revy then turned, and caught up with Lee, to walk beside him, to Lee's right side, as the two of them headed for the front elevator bay.
Unfortunately, they missed Melvin, at the elevator bay, but they were about to get another elevator, within a few seconds.
(_)
It was a nice, sunny, cool day outside, as few minutes later, they were both in the front seat of Lee's pink Cadillac.
Lee was driving, with Revy beside him.
Lee had put the hood and windows down, so they could enjoy the nice day.
As Lee drove them to their first destination, he continued to watch the road in front of them, while he though, 'We will soon be to the first place we need to go, in a few minutes. Also, I will put the top, and windows, back up when we return to the hotel. For now, I need to keep Jack happy, while I work out my plan for this immediate situation. Speaking of which, this is a good time to ask about how much of Revy's memory, that Jack has access too.'
Lee commented, “I noticed that you are not surprised by the technology of this age.”
Revy turned to look at Lee. Revy stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “That is because I have all of Revy's memories. Just not her personality. I believe this is due to my having my own memories, as well. And mine are a whole lot more fun that hers... Well, most of them... Still Lee, my boy, while I review Revy's memories of you, it is clear you more than you appear.”
While looking at the road in front of them, Lee commented, “That is true for everyone.”
Revy complimented, in Jack's accented, “Correct. And by the way, that is a nice dodge. You have been dodging every question I have made towards you, as Revy, since Revy has met you. That is very savvy of you. More savvy than, the fool, that Revy thinks you are. But, I know better. There are two types of fools. The foolish, and those who fool others. And you, my dear sir, are the latter.”
Lee thought, 'With someone as savvy as Jack. There is no point in denying that. She will spot a lie a mile away. And right now, I am on her good side. And I want to continue to be on her good side.' He admitted, “Okay. You got me there.”
Revy went onto say, “Quite right. It is quiet foolhardy, but commendable that you, the writer, would be able to hide so closely to your pursuers. Only the crazy of the crazy would suspect. I guess that fortuneteller was right. I would find you soon after doing some soul searching. Oh, the irony.”
In response, Lee immediately slowed down. He then parked on the side of the road, and put the car in park, with the engine idling. With the car no longer in motion, Lee turned to Revy. He stated, “You're right. Now, what?”
Revy looked over at Lee, as she smirked. She said, “Well, if I was Revy, I would be beating you to a pulp. But currently, I am not. I admire you, Lee. If for any other reason than the courage it takes to do all this. But, the question becomes, why?”
Lee answered, “I am dying of cancer.”
Revy stated, “That does explain a lot. And with that answer, it is obvious you plan to steal a reality device, and use it to find a cure in the multiverse.”
Lee stated, “Either that, or find a decent reality to die in, so I can be reincarnated. You, and your children, are breathing proof that reincarnation is possible.”
Revy said, “That is not a bad plan. And you have a nice fall back plan, as well. And for you playing this game so well. If I had the device that Rock and I use, I would give it to you. Unfortunately, Rock keeps it on her person.”
Lee thought, 'And you realized, that given you are not in your right mind, right now, you know you won't get into that much trouble. Melvin, on the other hand, will. So, I would still have had to save him. But, that is another matter. Also, I now know that Rock keeps a reality device on her person. This is the major break that I needed. Though, I cannot use that information right now. Though, this does open a chance, for a later opportunity. But, first I have to save Melvin, myself, and even Revy, from Jack's mischievous personality.'
Lee responded, “Thank you for the information. That is still helpful. By the way, I do not know how you, as Revy, could be the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow. Honestly, that comes completely from left field for me.”
Revy commented, “I know. As Revy, I read your stories. You mention me, as Jack, a few times. But, you clearly had nothing to do with this.” She used her hands to point at her chest, as she continued, “I guess it is just one of those things that came out of the blue.” She then dropped her hands to her lap.
Lee replied, “I guess so.”
Revy stated, “By the way. I know what you are thinking. I promise not to tell the others that you are the writer.”
Lee thought, 'You may promise that. But, given both you natures, as Jack and Revy. I doubt you can keep your promise. Still...' He replied, “Thank you.”
Revy said, “You're welcome.” She continued, in a demure tone of voice, “Still, even though you are dying. That does not mean we cannot have a little fun.” Her lips curled into a lecherous grin, as she continued, with a bit of eagerness in her tone of voice, “I swing both ways, mehearty.”
Lee commented, in a calm tone of voice, “Jack, I admit that it is tempting. But, we cannot. We have to get you back to sleep, and Revy's personality back in control. And we are on a tight schedule to do so.”
Revy dropped her grin, as she asked, in an annoyed tone of voice that was closer to Revy's voice, than Jack's voice, “Why should I go back to being that stick in the mud?” Her lips curled into a grin, as she said, in a more chipper tone of voice, with Jack's accent, “You got to admit that I much funner to be around. And I like being me, right now.”
Lee caught the accent slip, as he thought, 'Good. Revy is still in there. Though, I believe this is clearly not a case of one consciousness taking over another consciousness. So much, that Revy remembers being Jack. And she liked Jack's memories so much, she has become Jack.'
'Though, she is Jack. There is just not two personalities in her mind. Just one personality, that prefers to be the Jack persona, instead of the Revy persona.'
'Not that I blame Revy for this. For the short time I have knowing Jack, he is clearly a fun person to be around. And Jack is likely a very fun person to be.'
'But, if stress is applied, Revy's personality starts to come to the forefront.'
'This is very good. It means sealing Jack personality will not be hard. Because there are not two personalities trying to fight for dominance, inside Revy's soul. It is just a case of one personality preferring to use one set of memories, over the another set of memories.'
'Meaning all we have to do is seal Jack's memories. And the memories Revy has for today, to prevent her from realizing I am the writer. And I know just the two people whom could probably do it. And since they are both my friends. And Revy's friends. They would likely be more than happy to make the attempt.'
'Revy, Jack, or whomever she think she currently is, clearly does not realize this. This works for me. Though, if my plan A fails. I will just have to point this out to her, and hope that myself, and those I plan to seek help from, can encourage the Revy persona to come to the forefront. With myself then dealing with the fallout of her knowing that I am the writer, afterward.'
'Though, if we had the time. I am sure Revy's persona would eventually come back, in part, or in full. With Revy growing tired of the Jack persona, like a child growing tired of the new toy she has.'
'Unfortunately, by that time. Jack's persona would have wrecked havoc with Revy's personal live. Especially, Revy's love life with Rock. And I put much work, and effort, into helping Revy and Rock's relationship, to have a past life, of one of them, ruin it.'
'Besides, in the meantime, Revy would blow both my cover, and Melvin's cover. And the sad part is she would likely not intentionally do so. The information would just slip out of her mouth.'
'During my time around these lunatic women has taught me many lessons. Among those lessons, is that you can turn you back on a promise. But, you cannot turn your back on a lunatic.'
'No. I got to get this genie back into her bottle. This Jack has got to go back into his box.'
'Now, to convince Jack to want to do this. And I know just how to do it. I will use Revy's memories against Jack. If there is only personality in there. Deep down they will want the same exact thing. It is just that the two personae would prefer to go about getting the same thing they want, in two different ways.'
'And I know what they really want. The one thing that Jack likely never had in his previous life.'
Lee stated, “That maybe true. But, I want you to answer two questions, for both myself, and yourself. First, in your entire life as Jack, were you ever able to find true love, like Revy has with Rock? And do you still love Rock?”
Revy stopped smiling, as she when silent for a few seconds, as she thought over Lee's questions. She then replied, in a sober tone of voice, “I see your point. Perhaps I should go back to the way I was. The question is, how?”
This time, it was Lee's turn to smirk, as he stated, “Leave that to me. Still, I take it you would like to get changed into something more conformable.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then said, in Jack's accent, “Yes. I would. And I would guess your plan involves, Chang, somehow. He is the only one with the resources in town to help you with this. And that means, if you are going to Chang, for help, that Chang knows who you are.”
Lee stated, “Yes. Chang knows. And so does Annie, Arcee, and of course, River. But, none of the others know. So, when we go to the casino, please keep what is going on to yourself?”
Revy responded, “I will. And I would guess your plan for me to change into some clothing that is closer to my old style of clothing, to make it easier to convince Chang of the situation.”
Lee replied, “Of course.” He thought, with mild admiration, 'Jack, you are as good at this game, as I expect you to be.'
Revy smiled. She giggled, as she said, “Oh my student, the things I could teach you, if we only had more time.”
Lee flatly commented, “Mores the pity. Now, before we head out. I do have an important question for you. How did your pirate life end for you, Jack?”
Revy soberly answered, in Jack's accent, “A hangman's noose, in Caracas, Venezuela.”
Lee wondered in thought, 'Interesting. Now, that I think about it, there are a lot of Latin American connections in the Black Lagoon series. Specifically, Caracas, Venezuela. But, I just don't have the time to think about that mystery, right now.'
Lee politely requested, “Please, go on. I am sure there is more to your story than that.”
Revy gave Lee a weak smile, as she stated, in Jack's accent, “Oh, there is. I had gained the eternal youth I had sought for so long. But, I found that though I did not age, it did not make me immortal. It did not give me eternal health. Decades later, I started to get sick. Year passed, and I got worse. Though, I sought a cure, I did not find one. And so, before I got to weak to walk, I sought to go out a death that would be proper for a pirate of my pedigree.”
Lee held back a snort, when Revy mentioned the word, pedigree. He thought, 'Jack. You may have grown up around pirates. But, you did not become one, until you were forced to do so.'
Revy went onto say, in Jack's accent, “I decided to attempt the near impossible. My crew, and I, tried to raid Caracas, which was protected by coastal mountains. I failed.”
“We were ambushed in the pass we used to get into the city. Half my men were killed in battle, while the other half ran to my ship, and left with it, again. Without me. Though, I expected that, considering was part of my plan, to have a proper.'
Lee thought, with concern, 'Just like the situation I presently find myself in. No wonder you complimented my plans. You were in a similar situation. And since you could not find a cure. You went with your plan B.'
'Even if you could not directly confirm reincarnation. After all our adventured, you knew there was life after death. You have been dead before, yourself.
'So, you rightly viewed that dying in the manner you sought was not the end for you.'
'And here you are, to prove that you were correct.'
Revy continued, in Jack's accented, “At the end of the battle, I was surprised to find that I was mostly unharmed. So, instead of dying in battle. As I expected would happen. I was instead, captured. But, I soon found out, in person, that the man in charge of Caracas, at that time, the Governor of Caracas, was a big fan of my exploits.”
“And I have nothing but good things to say about my host, the Governor of Caracas.”
“While we both knew he had to hang me, and I had no plans to stop him. He treated me well. We had a wonderful conversation, which he provided a scribe write down what we talked about. I may have to look at up those records some time. I am sure they are still around.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That would be interesting.”
Revy smiled, as she said, in Jack's accent, “That it would. And I am glad you agree. Also, the Governor of Caracas then offered me a priest to confess my sins to. Then, a good dinner with fine rum. And finally, he provide a beautiful woman for a last evening of pleasure.”
“Later that night, after the woman of the evening had left my cell, under escort of a guard. With no one else around, Calypso visited me, while I was alone. And we had an interesting chat. She told me that I did not have much to worry about. That I had done such a marvelous performance that I was going to be allowed to be a pirate in my next life, as well. I was very happy to hear that. She even added that in my next life, I would be just as wild, but in a different way.”
“She then told me that given the way I treated women, I would end of being born a woman. I found to be surprising, but not that disheartening. All the women pirates I knew were tougher, and meaner, than most of the men. She promised that I would not be the exception to that rule. And I see now that she was correct.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Revy truly is a cut above the rest.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then stated, in Jack's accent, “Very true. Anyway, the next morning, at six thirty AM sharp, I was lead to the gallows, by wagon, at the crest of one of the mountains overlooking the ocean. As I was read the my charges, the angle of the gallows allowed me to see the ocean one last time, during a beautiful sunrise.”
“It was a glorious sight, indeed.”
“After the charges were read, I politely thanks my executioners for their generous hospitality. Then, they put the black hood over my head, and a noose round my neck. And promptly at seven AM that day, I felt a quick dropped, and a sharp snap of my neck. I then remember nothing, until I was reborn as Revy.”
Lee complimented, “I must say, Jack. You went out with as much style as you lived.”
Revy smile got wider towards Lee, as she replied, “Thank you, Lee.”
Lee turned to face the road. He checked to make sure he was clear, as he put the car in driver, and he he drove back onto the road.
When Lee was back on the road, he said, “Now, let's get you some clothes with a little more style to them.”
Revy laughed, in Jack's style of laughter, for a few seconds, at Lee's comment, as they drove down the road.
(_)
Around five minutes later, Lee drove into the parking lot of a local costume shop.
Lee came to a stop, by the curl, to a sidewalk, in front of the doors to the customer shop, with Revy side facing the doors. Lee put the car in park. He then looked at Revy, as he stated, “This is the best costume shop in town.”
Revy looked at Lee, as she raised an eyebrow. She inquired, in Jack's accent, “And how would you know?”
Lee thought, 'This is where I got some of my more flamboyant clothing during the time loop. And I am glad it was open during the Day of the Dead. Though, that three day holiday, of All Hallows Eve, Day of Little Angels, and Day of the Dead, are likely some of their best sales day for the year. Now, I better be honest with Revy. Though, vague.'
Lee honestly answered, “It is a long story, that we do not have time to get into, now. So, do you need money for clothing.”
Revy giggled. She said, “We are rich, thanks to you. And I have money on me.”
Lee sadly thought, 'Damn it. Now, she is grateful for what I have done for her? I hate myself, that I am going to have to get the old Revy back for all our sake. Jack really is just so much fun to be around.'
Lee calmly said, “You're welcome. Also, I suggest you keep your old clothing, for when you regain Revy's personality.”
Revy replied, “Of course. Though, Revy has such simple tastes in styles. While, I am much more flamboyant in my choices of clothing.”
Lee agreed, “That you are.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then stated, “The things I could do with this body. And I am not just talking about sex and violence. There are dozens of clothing styles that would look great on this body. And those are just off the top of my head.”
Lee commented, “We do not have time for you to spend all day picking out a new wardrobe.”
Revy responded, “I understand. I will just get something quick. That I think we agree will be... Me.”
Lee replied, “That sounds good.”
Revy offered, “So, would you like to come in with me?”
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “No thank you. I know your mischievous side. I wrote part of it. We do not have time to play dress up, for either of us.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “A girl can at least try. I should be out in half an hour.”
Lee stated, “Good. I will park nearby, and watch for you walk out. When you are ready, I will pick you up, here, by the curb.”
Revy said, “That will be fine.” She then got out of the car, and shut the passenger car door behind her.
While Revy walked inside the costume shop, Lee looked in front of the car, as he put the car in driver. He then drove his car around, in the parking lot, until he found a nearby parking place that faced the entrance to the costume shop.
(_)
Around half an hour later, from the driver's seat of his car, Lee saw Revy walk out of the customer shop.
Lee's only thought was, 'Wow. She pulls that off well.'
Revy wore old style pirates clothing, and a tricorne hat, that looked almost exactly like the clothing Jack Sparrow use to wear. The only two differences were that the clothing Revy wore fit her female frame. And where Jack Sparrow kept his muskets by his belt, Revy kept her semi-automatic cutlasses on her belt.
She also held her bag, filled with her old clothing, in her right hand, by the bag's top straps.
Lee noticed that the bag had a logo of costume shop, on the two large sides of the bag.
Lee started his car, put it in drive, and drove up to the front door, beside her, by the curb, with the front passenger side facing her, and the doors unlocked. He then put the car in park.
Revy walked up to the curb, where the car was able. She turned to Lee, as she said, in Jack's accent, “Thank you.”
With the roof and windows down, Revy tossed her bag in the back car seat, open the front passenger door, and got in.
After Revy sat down, she leaned back in her cushioned seat, she looked over at Lee. She asked, “Well, how do I look?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he honestly admitted, “I wish I had a camera. It is so hard to pull off the same look as both a man and a woman, but you pull it off nicely.”
Revy warmly smiled towards Lee, as she responded, “Thank you. If nothing else, when this is over, Revy will finally have a set of stylish clothing to go into her closet.”
Lee laughed for a few seconds, at Revy's comment.
As Lee calmed down, he then looked in front of the car. He put the car in drive, and drove them both out of the parking lot, and onto the road. After which, Lee headed for the Daiyu Palace Casino, on the south end of the island.
While the drove, Revy commented, “Speaking of clothing. I may have Revy's memories, but even I don't understand some of the choices she made in her life.” She looked over on her cover right shoulder and upper arm. Which her clothing covered her tribal tattoo. She continued, “Such as the tattoo on my upper right arm and shoulder.” She then turned back to look at Lee, to her left.
Lee paid attention to every word Revy said, as he continued to look in front of him. He said, “Let me guess. She thought it would look cool on her?”
Revy responded, “Yes. I know you are very knowledgeable, about a lot of things. You stories reflect that knowledge. So, I have to humbly request. And please be honest. What is the current attitude about tattoos, like I have.”
Lee answered, “I won't lie to you. Tribal tattoos went out of style over a decade ago. It was a big thing for the nineteen nineties, which is when the Black Lagoon series was set. Though, you have such a hot body, most people could care less about the tattoo.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “Well, for myself, Revy is not hard to understand.”
In response to Lee's comment. Revy laughed, for a few second. Though, it was more like Jack's laugh, than Revy's laugh.
As Revy calmed down, she said, in Jack's accent, “You are not the first man to mistakenly believe they understand women.”
Lee continued to look ahead of himself, as he countered, “Not women. Just Revy. I understand some of what makes Revy tick. Let me guess, Obviously, due to your lifetime's worth of memories, and experiences, plus Revy's one lifetime, the crap that happened Revy, when she was youngr, including her rape, does not effect you as much? The greater depth of wisdom from having practically doubled the lifetime's worth of memories, blunts Revy's early childhood traumas. Though, it still does effect you. Just not as much.”
Revy admitted, “That is correct.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms the one personality, two personae theory, I have for you. Which is good for everyone involved.'
Lee said, “As I thought. Unlike most people, I understand that the rape itself was not what caused Revy to finally snap. The rape was just the final straw of a long list of acts of abuse and neglect, from those around Revy, when she was a child.”
“The final moment that caused Revy's mental breakdown, with the resulting, and justified bloodshed she caused afterward, was soon after Revy being raped by that cop. After she her father hit her with a bottle. I can guess, when she got out of jail, she went to her abusive father over the matter of the false arrest and rape, and her father, whom likely either ignored her, or abused her some more, instead of aiding her.”
“It was then that she realized that everyone she knew around her wanted her to be in hell. And she decided to send them to hell, instead. She then got a gun, practiced with it. And when she felt she was good enough, she used her gun to kill people. Starting with her father.”
Lee's comment caught Jack off guard, as she leaned up from her seat, to looked at Lee most closely. She stated, “You do understand, Revy. And I am slightly afraid to ask what happened in your own life that allowed you to reach that understanding, yourself.”
As Lee continued driving them towards Daiyu's Palace Casino, he said, “Though, I was not raped, you really don't want to know what it took for me to gain such wisdom through pain.”
Revy replied, “I will take your word on that.”
The two then sat in silence, as Lee continued to drive them to the Daiyu Palace Casino.
(_)
Minutes later, Lee and Revy reached Daiyu Palace Casino.
Lee parked the car, about a hundred feet from the front entrance to the casino, which was covered by a large awning.
After Lee parked in a parking space, he put the car into park, turned off the ignition, pulled out the key to the car, and pocketed it.
Revy turned to Lee, as she asked, in Jack's accent, “So, how are we going to get into a meeting with Chang, on short noticed?”
Lee looked over at Revy, and smile. He answered, “Simple. The guards at the express elevator know you. If you haven't figured it out, they were likely some of the guys in Chang's Triad at Roanapur. Them seeing you in that dress will be all the proof they need to let us by, to see Chang.”
Revy pointed at her pistols, as she commented, “But, they won't let me take my weapons with me.”
Lee pointed out, “Put your weapons in the bag. They likely won't search us, if they don't see any weapons on us. And I mean this as a compliment, when I say that they know better than to pat down a lunatic like you.”
Revy giggled. She complimented, in Jack's accent, “Good point. And it is always nice to talk to someone who appreciates proper deviousness.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. And I take it there are no bullets in the chambers of your weapons?”
Revy said, “That is very perceptive of you.”
Lee shrugged, as he stated, “I watched your series. And I liked other subtle gun safety practices that you, Chang, and others, did in that series. Such as placing your trigger fingers against the trigger guard of your weapons, and not the triggers.”
Revy replied, “Yes. Chang was a good teacher. And it is clear you know how to use a gun.”
Lee said, “I am from the southeastern U.S., we are taught to use guns as children.”
Revy smiled, as she commented, “It must be a fun place.”
Lee commented, “It has its moments. I honestly think that if Revy had been born in the southeastern United States, instead of that toilet, New York City, she might have had a great time.”
Revy said, “Looking through Revy's memories, of her fascination with guns. And your people's love of guns. You might be right.”
Lee inquired, “Glad you agree. Also, don't take this the wrong way. I know Revy has an ass fetish, but I was on the fence on if she had a gun fetish.”
Revy stated, in Jack's accent, “Yes. I do have an ass fetish. Or, at least Revy does. It comes from after she was raped. She fantasized of revenge, by raping the man that did that raped her. And since men only have that one hole, that is where she fetish for the ass come from.”
Lee hesitantly commented, with concern in his tone of voice, “That... Does make sense.”
Revy responded, in a sober tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “Sadly. Yes. And you are correct on the other part of your comment. Revy's obsession with guns is more of a borderline fetish. It depends on the weapon. And yes, in the Black Lagoon series, when Revy talked to Shenhua about nukes, she was getting wet, down there, thinking about using a nuke, herself.”
Revy's tone of voice turned more warm, towards Lee, as she continued, “By the way, thank you for everything you have given me, as Revy, and for my family. I know as Revy, I am not grateful to you. And neither is the rest of my family. But, I am grateful to you, now.”
“I am even grateful for the nuke the Lagoon family has. Just having that weapon brought Revy a lot of pleasure, in a lot of ways.”
“And when I got back to be Revy, I wish I could continue to be grateful to you. Though, I doubt that. Because, we both know for your plan to work. I cannot remember any of this. Including, myself realizing you are the writer.”
Lee sadly said, “I know. And you're welcome.” He went onto say, in a more sober, than sad, tone of voice, “And at least are grateful to me, now. And I know at least a part of Revy will be grateful for what I have done for all of you.” He sorrowfully thought, 'That that will likely only be a small part.'
Revy understood the subtext of Lee's comment. She stated, in a sad tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “Yes. It is tragic.”
Revy then continued, in a curious tone of voice, “Still. The one thing I don't understand is how did you pulled off that ass joke, in the hotel theater, with Rock and Revy, seven times, without Revy killing you over doing that even once?... Actually, now that I think about it. Those memories are kind of jumbled. It was like Revy repeated the same day, over and over again.”
Lee thought, 'Jack is going to figure it out, eventually. So, I might as well, just tell her, now.' He admitted, “That is because, that is what happened. We were stuck in a time loop that only I remember.”
Revy guessed, “And it is a the long story?”
Lee smiled wickedly, as he replied, “To say the least.”
Revy commented, “That is intriguing. It is unfortunate that we do not have the time for you to tell me that story.”
Lee thought, 'Given how Jack is so happy with me right now. This might be my only chance to apologize about something, with Revy killing me over it. And it would make for a bit of closure on my part.'
Lee apologized, “I want you to know, that I apologize about something, during the time loop. If I had know that you and Rock were having your periods during that time, I would have tried to stop that loop sooner. And I did find a way to stop that loop, soon after I learned that was the case, with both of you.”
Revy inquired, “I believe you. But, how did you find that out?”
Lee answered, “Rock blurted that it was that time of the month for her. And I guessed from Revy's attitude, and closeness to Rock, that it was the same case for Revy.”
Revy said, “Good guess.”
Lee suggested, “Now, let's go see Chang.”
Revy offered, “Yes. I will like to see his face when he seems me like this. Want to bet that Chang will demand what is going on?”
Lee replied, “Nope. I am not taking a suckers bet. And if Revy had listened to me, she would not have taken that suckers bet, with Chang, in the first place.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then commented, “But, you did win me that million.”
Lee grumbled, “And you didn't let me keep a dime of it?”
Revy apologized, “Sorry about that. And thank you for winning me that money. And I am sure that was not easy for you.”
Lee replied, “To say the least. And I appreciate the thank you.”
Revy offered, “Unfortunately, I don't keep that much money on me. And I blew most of what I have on me, on the clothing I am presently wearing. But, would you take a check?”
Lee looked at Revy, in disbelief, as he flatly pointed out, “From a pirate, literally twice over?”
Revy realized what she had said. She sheepishly agreed, in Jack's accent, “Oh... Good point, love.”
Lee visibly deflated, as he suggested, in a slightly tied tone of voice, “Let's go see Chang, before we get on each other's nerves.”
Revy replied, “I agree.”
Both of them then got out of Lee pink Cadillac. With them shutting the doors behind them. Given the top and side windows were down, Lee did not bother to lock the vehicle.
Revy reached into the backseat, behind her, and opened the top of her bag. She then dropped her pistols into the bag. Next, she took off her hat, and dropped her pirate hat into the bag, over her pistols. After which, she picked up, and carried the bag with her, by its top straps, in her right hand.
Lee and Revy then walked side by side, with Revy to Lee's right side, as they headed for the front entrance.
As Lee walked away from the car, he thought, 'No one is going to steal my car. It stands out too much. And Pedro will have their hide, if someone tried to do so.'
A minute later, they made it to the front doors.
As the did so, Lee open one of the doors for Revy.
While Revy walked inside, she said, in a polite, cheerful tone of voice, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He then follow her inside, with the door closing behind him.
Lee then caught up to walk beside Revy, to Revy's left side.
As they walked, Lee thought, 'The one thing I like about Jack, above all else, when compared to Revy, is that Jack knows her manners.'
While the two adults walked through the front lobby, they passed the front check in desk, and the casino tellers, to their left side. With the couched, seats, and small tables, lining the walls of the lobby, to their right side.
The two adults soon made it to the gaming floor. With the rock music that being played, by the speakers around the game floor, being, Bring Me To Life, by Evanescence.
Lee thought, 'What a proper song, for this situation. And it proves that Chang, and his staff, have good taste in music.'
Lee and Revy continued walking to the elevator bay, right in front of them, on the other side of the gaming floor, from the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Jetta, walking around the tables.
Jetta was wearing a black pants suit, ad she looked as if she was looking at the gaming playing around her, with a critical eye for detail.
Lee guessed, 'Well, Jetta does make a good pit boss. And she, Spike, and likely a few others, probably take turns, so the others can have a break. Spike is probably also watching Julia, with Faye and Jetta's help. And Faye is probably one of the dealers.'
'Though, after that game I had with River. Chang will probably give her the week off. To let the heat die down. And have the customer turn offer. So, no one, but the staff with recognize her, when she goes back to the gaming floor. And with Spike and Jetta present, they will keep her on her job, and from gambling away her money.'
'I am so glad I wrote it, so that I dealt with Faye's gambling addition, and I got her debt problems straighten out. That, with she and Jetta becoming rich, will probably keep them from killing me, if they found out who I was. Spike though, it is not going to so easy to appease...'
'Oh well, I better focus on the matter at hand, and fix Revy's mind, before Rock and the others get back from their tour. Or, my other worries will be insignificant, compared to what they will do to Melvin, and myself.'
'Also. Now, that I think about it. We need to take the front elevator, instead of going around back, because it lessens the chance of bumping into someone that would ask Revy questions. The less people that know the truth, the easier it will be the pass the lie off, later.'
The two adults remained silent, as they continued to walk towards the front elevator bay.
Several seconds later, they made it to the front elevator bay.
The two adults came to a stop in front of the two chinese female guards, in black suits and black dress shoes, whom were guarding the express elevator.
Lee thought, 'Given the other express elevator, around back, is not guarded, I am starting to think these guards are only here not to keep the drunks and gamblers from wondering into the wrong elevator. While also keeping a couple of arm guards on hand, near the gaming floor, if they are needed. If that is the case, then it is not a bad idea on Chang and Mal's part.'
'Though, now I need to convince them to let us pass. Which, given the situation, should not be too hard.'
Lee looked at the two guards, as he calmly stated, “Ladies, I know this is on short notice. But, please let us through. This is important.” He turned to Revy, to his right side. He then turned back to look at the guards, as he continued, with concern in his tone of voice, “As you can see, Revy is not in her right mind. I need Chang's help to fix this, before Rock and the others come looking for her. So, please let us through.”
Both women looked at each other. Then, they turned back to Lee and Revy. One of the women stated, in english, “You are right. This is important.”
Revy requested, in Jack's accent, “And I humbling request, that you two, please do not alert Chang that we are coming. I want to see the look on his face, when I show up in this.”
Revy different accent, and polite manners, set off all kinds of warming bells, in the minds of the two other women in the elevator bay.
The woman calmly said, “Whatever you say.”
The other women turned, pulled out a key from one of her pockets, and used it to summon the express elevator.
Several seconds later, the elevator doors open, Lee and Revy walked inside, without being searched.
Lee and Revy then turned around in the elevator, to face the doors, with Lee now to Revy's right side. A few seconds later, the elevator doors closed, and began to quickly take them up to the penthouse floor.
After the doors closed, the guards turned to face forward, towards the gaming floor. As they stood to the sides of the express elevator doors.
One of the guards asked the other guard, with concern in her tone of voice, in chinese, “Do you think we should contact Chang, that Revy and Lee are coming up to see him?”
The other guard faced forward, as she calmly answered, in chinese, “And risk pissing off Revy. On a good day, she is crazy. And this is clearly not one of her good days.”
The first guard responded, “I agree. And at least she is polite, right now. Though, I still agree. We should not chance it. And Chang has always respected intelligent decisions. And he can take care of himself. Or, herself.”
The other guard replied, “Yes. And sometime, I am going to find out how he can switch back and forth between genders.”
The first guard said, “Actually, I talked to Chang about that. He did not go into detail, but he said he was willing to offer us, his employees, some packets of powder, for free, that will temporally turn us back into men, if we wanted the packets.”
The other guard smiled, as she said, with interest in her tone of voice, “Sounds like fun.”
The first guard returned the smile, as she happily replied, “Exactly.”
The two guards then resumed their duties, in silent, for their current shift.
(_)
A minute later, the elevator doors to the penthouse opened, and Lee and Revy stepped out of the elevator, and came to a stop, in the hallway, with Revy being to Lee's left side.
The elevator doors then closed, though the elevator remained in place, in its shaft.
Revy turned to Lee, as she asked, in Jack's accent, “Do you remember the way to the office?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he calmly answered, “Yes. One does not forget such details when dealing with powerful people.”
Revy commented, “Yes. It makes it easier to escape when you know the layout of the floor.”
Lee replied, “Exactly.”
Revy said, “That is precisely what I wanted to hear from you, my student. Now, let us go see Chang.”
Lee stated, “With pleasure.”
Both of them turned to their left, and they started walking down the hallway, towards Chang's office.
Less than two minutes later, after turning a corner, they made it to the shut door to Chang's office.
They came to a stop, in front of the door.
Lee then gently knocked on the door.
From inside, Chang asked, through the door, in chinese, “Who is it?”
Lee answered, in english, “It is, Lee. And I am not here for myself. It is, Revy. And it is very important. You got to see this to believe it.”
Chang stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, in english, “Then, come in.”
Lee gently opened the door inwards. After which, Lee let Revy walked in first, with Lee following right behind her.
Revy came to a stop, in ten feet from Chang's desk.
Lee left the door open, as he walked up beside Revy, to Revy's left side.
Lee saw that Chang was sitting in his chair, behind his. He was wearing his black business suit, but not his long coat, nor glasses. Lee then noticed a coat rack to his far right, in the corner, with Chang's coat hanging it.
Also, there was a pen and some papers on the desk, showing that chinese man was doing some paperwork.
Lee thought, 'I guess no one can look cool all the time. Occasionally, one has to take off the extra items, and relax, as they do some work. His sunglasses are likely in his coat. And he is just doing some managerial paperwork. That is just the price of running a business. Any business.'
Lee remained calm on the inside, as he continued his thoughts, with amusement, 'Now, to see what his reaction to this version of Revy, will be.'
As Chang looked up at the two of them, Le saw that as Chang looked at Revy, he did a double-take.
Lee and Revy both held back a laugh, at Chang's reaction.
Though, Revy smiled, while Lee maintained a neutral expression.
Chang flatly questioned, “Is this a joke? Because, if it is, it's a good one. But, one not worth wasting my time over.”
Lee commented, in a calm tone of voice, “I do not think Revy could pull off a joke this elaborate. It is just not her style.”
Chang replied, “I agree.”
Revy commented, in a polite tone of voice, with Jack's accent, “A pleasure to meet you, Chang. Lee, here, tells me that you can help myself. And I do look forward to your aid.”
Revy's mannerisms and polite tone of voice, set Chang on each.
Chang thought, with concern, 'Revy has never been this polite to me before.'
Chang turned to Lee, as he asked, “Is that really, Revy?”
Lee coyly answered, “It depends on your point of view.”
Chang demanded, “What have you done to Revy?”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, “Actually, it was Melvin who did this?”
Chang all but commanded, as he said, “This I have to hear.”
Lee explained, “First, we got a few hours to fix this. Rock and the girls when out of town, on a tour, on the mainland. Revy stayed behind. She was in the hotel bar, and Melvin, not wanting her to get drunk so early, suggested a game.”
Chang commented, “I do not fault that man for preventing Revy from getting drunk. I have done that before, myself.”
Revy calmly said, in Jack's accented,, “I hold nothing against that man, either.”
Chang thought, with concern, 'As much as I am enjoying a more polite Revy, I need to know what happened. If it is reversible. And if it is controllable. Because, occasionally I would like her to be this polite. And even my brainwashing techniques could not help to make such a radical change of personality, on someone, as what I am seeing presently with Revy. Also, that clothing and her accent seem familiar. But, I cannot place them. And they do not remind me in a good way.'
Chang inquired, “So, what happen?”
Lee stated, “Short answer. Past life regression, on Melvin. And Melvin could not figure how to turn it off. So, he came to me.”
Chang thought, 'I doubt Melvin knows that Lee is the writer. Still, Lee likely figured out Melvin's past, and he is helping Melvin, due to Melvin being a nice guy. I will be honest. I feel for Melvin's situation, as well. Still, I have to know whom I am talking to. And I have a bad feeling I already know. If I am right, it can only mean trouble. And Lee was wise to come to me about this situation.'
Chang looked over at Revy, and he took a hard look at her. He questioned, “Are you whom I think you are?”
Revy looked at Chang, as she smirked. She commented, in Jack's accent, “Chang, if you are as sharp as Revy's memories indicate, I think the costume and accent pretty much states the obvious of who I am.”
Chang realized, as he thought, with concern, 'Oh no. Now I remember. It could only be that one person. And not that I think about it, the similarities between him and Revy are downright eerie.' He guessed, “Captain Jack Sparrow?”
Revy bowed, as she said, “At your service.” She then leaned back up.
Chang just silently looked at Revy for a couple of seconds. He then pulled out his cellphone, as he quickly dialed a number. As soon as the other end picked up, Chang calmly stated, “Annie, find River, and get up here, to my office, as quickly as possible.”
Chang then closed his cellphone, and put it away.
Chang offered, “Please, sit down. While we wait for River, and Annie, to come here?” He thought, with worry, 'And I pray that Lee and I have the savviness to keep Jack under control, until they get here.'
Revy and Lee walked up to the two chairs in front of Chang's desk. Lee sat in the chair to Chang's right, while Revy sat down in the chair to Chang's left. With Revy setting down her bag, beside her, to her right.
Revy requested, “So Chang, is there anything you want to talk about, besides the obvious?”
Chang sighed, as he replied, “Not really.”
Revy said, “Don't be that way, Chang. Think of how cool... How suave this is.”
Chang responded, “I am thinking about this. And it scares me on several levels.”
Chang mentally reflect, with concern, 'The fact that you, as Jack, have a very devious mind, and Revy had some of the best gun fighting skills out there. I know. I taught her. Makes you very dangerous. And that is not even counting the super-soldier serum in your body.'
'You clearly remember being Revy. That is how you recognized me. And Even thought, I also have the super-soldier serum in me. With you combined skills, as both Jack and Revy. I am not sure I could take you in a fight. Even on a good day.'
Chang looked over at Lee, as he continued his thoughts, 'And give how intelligent and savvy you are, Lee. I am sure you have already realized all this.'
Revy inquired, “And why is that, love?”
Chang turned to Revy. He raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Are you coming on to me?”
Revy gave Chang a lecherous smile, as she casually answered, “Of course.”
Lee commented, “Don't feel bad, she offered herself to me on the way over here.”
Chang inquired, “You didn't take her up on that offer?”
Lee replied, “Of course not. I do not sleep with crazy.”
Chang pointed out, “You slept with, Eda.”
Lee questioned, “You heard about that?”
Chang answered, “Of course. She must have been desperate if she had to go to you for sex.”
Lee defended, “I am not that bad at catch.”
Revy stated, “Lee's right. He's got a charm to himself. At least, he knows his manners. When Eda talked to Revy, Eda mentioned that she was impressed with Lee's manners on their date. And that the sex with him was okay.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Revy replied, “You are welcome.”
Lee commented, “Besides, where do you think all those manners that Bob had came from.”
Chang conceded, “Point taken. Still, you slept with, Eda.”
Lee responded, “Actually, Eda is much like yourself. Eda is very sane. She can be mean. She can be vicious. She can be immature. But, she is not insane.”
Chang replied, “Now that I think about it, you are right.”
Revy stated, “Still, if either of you are interested, I am open to a threesome between the two of you. And since Chang here can change back and forth, it can be two male, one female. Or, one male, and two female. Hell, let's invite River. And Rock is always fun to be around. Though, I am not sure Annie is open to do this kind of fun.”
Lee thought, with concern, 'Pansexual insanity. The one type of sexual grouping of adults, that I did not deal with, in the romantic and lemon parts of my stories. Sure, in my stories, I did some threesomes. And the occasional foursome. But, no more than that. And I do not believe in having orgies. I just do not care for that.'
Lee turned to Revy, as he commented, in a calm tone of voice, “I believe Annie would decline your offer. Besides, I doubt Rock would be open to a five way.”
Revy looked over at Lee, with a lecherous smile. She stated, “Actually, Rock, Benny, Janet, Dutch, and I have done it, together, a few times.”
Lee said, “I honestly do not want to know.”
Revy teased, “Lee, you are such a prude.”
Chang could not help but to started chuckling, at the banter between Lee and Revy's persona of Jack Sparrow.
Meanwhile, Revy playfully suggested, “Along with some packet of spring of drowned man, we brought some packets of spring of drowned girl. Come on, you will enjoyed sex as a woman.”
Lee blushed.
By then, Chang started to calm down, as he commented, “She is right about that. Sex as a woman is pretty good.”
Lee turned to looked down, in front of him, as he quietly said, “I am quite sure.”
Revy stated, “Now, that I think about it, there were a few times, in the time loops, where those packets of spring of drowned girl went missing.”
Lee swiftly turned to look over at Revy, as his blush got a little redder.
Chang noticed Lee's blush getting brighter, as he accused, “You didn't?”
Lee turned to face Chang, and both Chang and Revy could see that Lee's face was now turning a very bright shade of red.
Chang flatly stated, “You did.”
Lee remained silent.
Revy giggled, as she playfully teased, “I take it back. You are not a prude. You are a closet case.”
Revy and Chang then burst out laughing.
Lee stayed silent, as the other two adults laughed for several seconds.
While Chang and Revy began to calm down, both of them turned to look at Lee.
Revy inquired, “So Lee, what female position is your favorite? And did you prefer to be with a man, or a woman, as female?”
Chang stated, “I doubt Lee got to that point. Lee likely stayed in her suite, and used the powder to play with herself.”
Revy asked, “Why do you think that?”
Chang explained, “Simple. Lee would probably looks like his younger sister, and you all would have recognized Lee, even with the gender change. If he, or in this case, she, left her hotel suite, one of you would have likely caught her, and asked her very tough questions, in a harsh manner. So, Lee here stayed in her room. Now, I would like to know, Lee. How young did that powder make you?”
Lee thought, 'That is no point in denying I did. If I do not answer them, they will only drag the situation out, for my own suffering, and embarrassment.'
Lee turned to Chang, as he quietly answered, “Around eighteen years old.”
Chang and Revy snickered even more.
Meanwhile, something occurred to Lee, as he suddenly all but begged, “Can we please think about something else, before the telepath, and the empath, get here?”
Less than a second later, Lee heard Annie voice behind him, say, in english, “Think about what?”
Chang and Revy saw Lee's eyes grow wide, causing the two of them break out into further laughter.
A few seconds later, Chang calmed down, as he looked pass Revy and Lee, over at River and Annie, by the door, on the other side of the room. Meanwhile Lee turned to his right, to look between the back of the guest chairs, to see the two newcomers. And Revy's laughs had become giggled, as she turned to her left, to look between the back of the two guest seats, to see River and Annie.
Just inside the doorway stood Annie and River. The two women were standing beside each other, with River to Annie's left side.
Annie turned to River, as she inquired, “What is going?” She mentally added, 'I sense much embarrassment from, Lee. And much humor and amusement from Chang, and Revy.'
River continued to look at the three sitting adults, before them, as she giggled. She coyly answered, in english, “Where to start? Where to start?”
Annie turned to look at Chang, Revy, and Lee, as she stated, “Simple answers work for me.”
River turned to look at Annie, as she said, “It involved temporal events, reincarnation, and gender bending.”
Annie looked over at River. She shrugged, as she questioned, in a casual tone of voice, “So, a standard day at the office?”
River said, “Pretty much.”
Annie requested, “Please, give me the details.” She mentally added, 'Just the facts, ma'am.'
River giggled, as she commented, “We should have not invited you to that nineteen eighties comedy movie marathon. You have been cracking jokes from those movies ever since then.”
Annie said, “Well now, the shoe is on the other foot. I found the Dragnet movie to be a truly underrated movie. And very funny. Still, what is going on?”
River stated, “Well, it seems that Revy is the reincarnation of the pirate Jack Sparrow, and the Jack persona is the one in the pilot's seat. I am guessing that Lee brought Revy here because of that.”
Annie commented, “Revy as Jack's reincarnation makes some twisted sense. And I could see why Lee would bring her here. Along with why Chang would call both of us two up here, as quickly as possible. We are the only two people that could possibly fix this problem.”
River stated, “My thoughts, exactly. And we have a time limit. Rock, their family, and friends have gone on a tour, out of town. They will be back in a few hours.”
Annie said, “That figures. Still, we should be able to handle that problem in that amount of time. If Jack is willing.” She mentally reflected, with amusement, 'And I hope Jack is willing in more ways than one. Jack Sparrow, in Revy's body, gives me so many ideas.'
River giggled, as she requested, “Mind on your work.”
Annie deadpanned, “Okay. What else?”
River mentioned, “It seems before you got here, Lee, Revy, and the others, were suck in a time loop. During this time loop, Lee raided Revy and Rock's stash of magic powders. Specifically, the spring of drowned girl powders.”
Annie giggled, as she commented, “That really doesn't surprise me. I guess the temptation would be too much for anyone.”
River turned to look over at Lee, with Lee looking back at her, with a mix of annoyance and embarrassment. Though, River sensed Lee's emotions were more towards himself, than anyone else.
River commented, “Well, to be honest, if what I read from Lee's mind is correct. It was several years into the time loop, before temptation got the better of Lee. And she had some fun in her room. For a week during the time loop.”
Annie caught the female pronouns that River was using in regards to Lee. Annie complimented, “Then, Lee here is a better person than most.” She turned to look at Lee, as she continued, “But, given what he wrote, and did to us, I am just surprised it took that long for Lee to decide to pull something off like that. Or, in this a case of putting something inside?”
In response to Annie's joke, Annie and River giggled, a little.
Across the room, as Chang, Lee, and River, watched and listened to Annie and River.
Chang thought, with amusement, 'They are like a couple of giggling school girls. And that thought is wrong on so many levels. Not that I blame them for their reactions to finding out what is going on.'
Meanwhile, across the room, in front of the doorway, Annie giggled, while she said, “Still, I am surprised that you learned about this, now.”
River giggled, as she joked, “Actually, Lee's memories of those events slipped out during the poker game. I wasn't going to say anything, because I doubt anyone would believe me. Even in this group.”
Both women then giggled some more.
Having heard the entire verbal part of their conversation, Lee continued to face Annie, and River, as he complained, “Come on. Is everyone going to be a hypocrite on this?”
In response, the other four adults laughed even harder at Lee's comment about his secrets being revealed.
A minute later, as everyone calmed down, Chang requested, “River, Annie, please come over here.”
As River and Annie walked closer to the three other adults in the room, they left the door to Chang's office open.
Meanwhile, both Revy and Lee were turned around in their chairs, to face Chang, at River and Annie approached them, from behind.
As the two women came to a stop, River stood by Lee, to Lee's left side. While, Annie stood by Revy, to Revy's right side, with Revy's bag on the floor, between the two women.
Chang looked around the group, as he calmly stated, “Before we continue. I request that you keep what you have learned of Lee's... indiscretions, to yourselves.”
River said, “Of course.”
Annie commented, “I make it a policy not to judge such personal actions by others.”
Revy replied, “I will try.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Lee turned to look at River, as he thought, 'By the way, River. This pass life regression was done with simply hypnosis. And I believe this is not a case of two personalities in Revy's soul, vying for dominance. Just two personae. With Revy choosing to be the Jack personae, like a child playing her new toy. Though, telling Revy this might make things more difficult, in putting Jack back in his box.'
By then, River was looking down at Lee, as she read his thoughts. She commented, “I will keep that in mind.”
River and Lee then turned back to look at Chang.
River thought, 'I will inform Annie, about this. And if this is the case, then, it will be easier to seal Jack's memories, than I originally thought. But, if we do tell Revy this. Jack may just decided to stay Jack, under the justification, she will eventually turn back into Revy, for the most part, later on.'
River's lips curled into a slight grin, as she continued her thoughts, 'And Lee, you really are a genius. And I should know. I am one.'
Meanwhile, Chang stated, “Good. Now, to the heart of the matter. I need you to bring Revy back. As fun as Jack is. We need to seal Jack's memories, and get the old Revy back, before Rock and the others return from their trip to the mainland. I feel I do not need to explain why?”
Revy turned to Annie. She then looked at River, as she inquired, in Jack's accented, “So, you two want my memories sealed, as well?”
River looked over at Revy, as she said, with sympathy in her voice, “I wish there as another way, but Chang is right. Still, it is your choice.”
Annie turned to Revy, as she stated, “River is correct. Jack, it is your choice. But, while I would prefer you to stay in the Jack persona for a little while longer. I can see the reasons why that would be a bad thing. Still, the question comes down to, do you want to go back to being Revy?”
Revy turned to Annie, as she calmly responded, in Jack's accent, “I need some time to think about this.”
Lee turned to Revy, as he thought, 'She is stalling. This is a classic Sparrow trick.'
River turned to Lee, as she complimented, “That is a good assumption, Lee.” She looked over at Revy, as she continued, in a calm tone of voice, “Still, Revy here does need to think on this matter. Before she makes her choice.”
Revy looked over at River, as she said, “Thank you, River.”
River gave Revy a weak smile, as she replied, “It's okay.”
Chang commented, “That is fine.” All eyes turned back to him, as he continued, “I agree that an important discussion such as this, first needs to be thought over. So, take Revy, or in this case, Jack, to the spare office, down the hallway, while I talk to Lee.”
River replied, “Sure thing.”
Annie looked over at Revy, as she requested, “Come on, Jack. I would love to have a chance to talk to you.”
Revy got up, and picked up her bag, by its top straps, with her right hand. She walked around her chair, to her left. She came to a stop, between the two guest chairs, as she turned to Annie. She smiled, as she stated, “And I would love to talk to you as well, Annie.”
The three women then turned, and walked out of the room. Lee turned his head to look at then, as Chang and himself, watched the three women leave.
When they exited into the hallway, and turned left, with them out of sight, Lee turned back to Chang, to see that Chang was looking back at him.
Chang lips curled into the slightest of grins, as he commented, with only mild amusement, “I must say. You continue to surprise, Lee. I did not know you had the guts to experiment like that. You, of all people, should know that once you play around the gender bending, going back is next to impossible.”
Lee calmly responded, “A person can only imagine so much, before that person wants to try out what he, or she, imagines, in real life.”
Chang agreed, “True.”
Lee said, “As far as I know, it is a once in a lifetime opportunity. So, I was not going to waste it.”
Chang responded, “That is completely reasonable. Now, let us get this ball rolling. What is your plan to solve this mess with Revy and Jack? I know you have a plan. You always have a plan.”
Lee said, “Yes. I do. The question is can those two women fix Revy's problem, and bail our asses out of the fire.”
Chang asked, “If the women cannot fix this, how screwed are we?”
Lee answered, in a firm tone of voice, “To the wall, if we don't fix this.”
Chang inquired, “Any good news?”
Lee commented, “Well, I did not want to tell Revy this. Because it would complicated matters with her. But, I let River read my mind over the matter. I expect this is not the case of two personalities vying for dominance. But, one personality, with two sets of memories and personae. With Revy deciding to try out of the Jack persona like a child getting a new toy she is interested in. Though, I suspect that Revy does not realize this.”
“During our car ride over here. We talked, and at one point, Revy did become annoyed, and she slipped back into Revy's accent and mannerisms, for only a second. Before Jack's accent and mannerisms, reasserted themselves. But, I did notice this. So, I believe that even if we are unable to fix this, the Revy personae may eventually come out on her own.”
Chang felt mild relief, as he replied, “Okay. That is good news. And that does not sound so bad.”
Lee pointed out, “The problem is. That could be a while. We both know how Revy is. Once she is interested in something. It becomes an obsession for her, until she can work it out of her system. Which can take a while to happen."
Chang begrudgingly agreed, “True.”
Lee commented, “If River and Annie are unable to find a way to seal Jack's persona, and memories away. I will tell Revy the truth. That she is still Revy, whom is mostly acting like when she was Jack Sparrow, in her previous life. But, she is still Revy. And I believe, within the next few hours, we can encourage the Revy persona to come to the forefront. With her only retaining a few of Jack's mannerisms.”
Chang inquired, “Yes. I believe we can still accomplish that, with the limited amount of time we have. And her still retaining some of Jack's manners, would be a bonus. Though, what problems do you foresee for us?"
Lee thought, 'Besides the fact Revy, as Jack, currently knows I am the writer. Several problems.' Lee said, “A number of problems. The top of the list being that Jack has a wonderful talent for screwing over other people's plans when they least expect it.”
Chang stated, “You got that right.”
Lee mentioned, “But, given you called the two women here, whom I am hoping can fix Revy, without me first suggesting to do so. Which I was going to. With you already seeking to fix this before her family gets back to town. I believe we are thinking along the same lines.”
“But, this still comes down to River and Annie's abilities. And in that respect, given you have known them for years, you likely have a more detailed understanding of their abilities, than I do. So, how good are they? Can they fix Revy? Or, do I need to make other plans?”
Chang thought, 'Now, is probably the best opportunity I am going to get to play my hand. And use what I know about him, to get him to accept what I am offering. I am glad River and I were able to finally come up with a workable plan for Lee, this morning. But, I will have to do so, slowly. So, he does not realize what I am doing.'
Chang inquired, in a calm tone of voice, “What other plans are you thinking about doing? I know you have cancer. It is kind of obvious, given how skinny are you.”
Lee commented, “I am not surprised you figured that out. Though, I am not dead yet. And I am nowhere near to the point of being bedridden. I still have some fight left in me. Though, I admit, Jack already figured out who I am. And given Jack's talkative nature, if she stays this way, she will tell Rock and the others about me. Even though she promised not to do so.”
Chang hid his emotions, as he thought, with amusement, 'Oh Revy. As Jack, knowing that Lee is the writer, puts me in an even better position. And with me already helping him on that matter, only strengthens my hand with Lee. Now, for my offer.'
Chang calmly offered, “Yes. That could be a problem. But, what if I could remedy the situation for you?”
Lee inquired, “How so?” He thought, with mild interest, 'I might as well hear him out. Given my lack of options. If it is a good enough pitch, I might even accept his offer.'
Chang did not show it outwardly. Though, he thought, with amusement, 'Good. He is interested enough in at least listening to my offer.'
Chang said, “You could surrender to me. I won't lie. They will have a measure of revenge on you. But, I will insure that in the end, you will survive, you will recover, and you will still be passably sane.”
Lee chuckled, a little. He then smiled, as he said, “Passably sane. That is a new one. I will have to remember that one. So, what would be the price?”
Chang answered, “You come work for me. I will set you up with a decent place to live, here at the casino. Good hours, good pay, and I will even cure your cancer for you.”
Lee guessed, “The vat process.”
Chang replied, “Of course. You have shown that you do not mind being female. And the brainwashing will only be minimum. Same Boris, Rock, and I, had. You will be comfortable in your new gender, and bi-sexual.”
Lee admitted, “Tempting. Though, that is neither here, nor there. The question is can you handle the heat it would take to protect me. I am sure you can convince Revy and Rock's group. Along with keeping your employees in line. Though, let's be honest. I only have to worry about Mal and Spike. The rest either don't know, or they don't care.”
Chang complimented, “That is very astute of you.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. But, there are others you will have to worry about, in protecting me. Given how many already know about my stories, from your little group. I am sure that Balalaika and B knows about the stories, as well. I heard, from a friend, what Balalaika did to her men, now women. Hotel Moscow was already a badass army. Now, they are a super-soldier amazon brigade. I even met a few of those women, as they stopped by looking for someone.”
Chang stated, “I already know Melvin was a former member of Hotel Moscow, and Balalaika is after him. I am guessing that it was Melvin whom told you about what happened at Hotel Moscow.”
Lee inquired, “Correct. How did you know it was Melvin they were after?”
Chang answered, “I recognized him, from our days in Roanapur. We even talked about the matter. And I agreed to keep his secret from the others.”
Lee said, “Thank you. Melvin is a friend. And I appreciate you remaining quiet on that matter. And fortunately, I was able to help get those women off of Melvin's trail.”
Chang thought, 'So, Lee does know about Melvin's past. And he is still helping Melvin. Both then and now. And the fact that Lee is helping Melvin, even it if is to hide Melvin from Balalaika, may help me convince Balalaika and B to back off on Lee. Balalaika does care about her subordinates. Even her wayward ones. Lee helping Melvin will only help my case in convincing her to not come after Lee. Because, she will admire such friendship towards those she cares for.'
Chang stated, “That is kind of you. Though, Balalaika is more amendable to comprise than you may believe. Remember, I had to deal with that women on a near daily basis, for years. She likes to bark a lot. But, she only bites when provoked.”
Lee said, “I hope you are right. Still, both of us realize that eventually, word of my existence, and the stories existence, will reach the Lovelace household. With Roberta and Fabiola coming after me. Those two together are a force that few people would want to tangle will. Especially, those that know what each of them are capable of.”
Chang begrudgingly thought, 'That is a good point.'
Lee went onto say, “Then, there are others. When it comes to revenge, the line forms to the left for me. I literally made a lot of badasses across multiverse my enemy, by writing those stories. Especially, book two, and parts of book three. Any of them that learns of my existence is going to come after me.”
“I have no illusions of my situation. All I am doing is trying to delay a horrible fate. Yet, all my selections are increasingly more horrible fates.”
Chang thought, 'Damn. I really did think about Lee's situation that way.' He admitted, “Okay. I will admit that I am not sure I could handle that much heat. And you clearly understand your situation better than I. So, let me look into this, for later?”
Lee replied, “Agreed. And for the record, from what I know of you, you are a good boss to your subordinates.”
Chang cracked a smile, as he thought, 'That is not exactly a, yes. But, he is clearly leaning towards accepting my offer. The only reason he is declining right now is due to what he pointed out. And I free admit, that I did not fully taking into account all the dynamics of the situation. But, he did accept the olive branch, and that is the important part.'
Chang said, “Thank you.”
Lee suggested, “Now, let's get back to what we were talking about. Can those two girls fix Revy?”
Chang pointed out, “This could still be difficult. River's telepathy is passive. She cannot really connect to another mind, bar a few exceptions. And Annie was not really that well trained in the mental aspects of using the force.”
Lee answered, “Yes. I know. But, it is all we got. And I think this can work. As long as Jack is willing to allow it to happen, I think that River and Annie can reseal Jack's memories and persona, without harming Revy's memories and persona. Annie can use the force to establish a mental link between her, River, and Revy. Then, Annie can check the emotional state, and River can work on Jack's memories.”
“Remember, this was done with simple hypnosis. So, undoing this might not be that hard, as long as all parties are willing. And with River's genius to guide them, I think they can pull this off.”
Chang agreed, “While I said it could be difficult. I agree with you. And as much as I like to have Jack around. I am not going to screw over Revy, Rock, and their family to do it.”
Lee complimented, “That is kind of you.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Lee stated, “I even have a cover story, for after we have Revy's mind repaired.”
Chang inquired, with interest in his tone of voice, “Which is?”
Lee stated, “We first need to make sure that Revy does not remember anything from today. When Revy wakes up, in the guest office, nearby, with not memory of today. You can tell her that she took a cab to the casino, for some early drinking, while talking to a few of her friends, over here, such as yourself. She got a hold of some bad hooch that threw her for a loop.”
“Fortunately, you guys realized what was about to happen, and you stopped Revy before she made an ass out of herself. With no one getting hurt.”
“You brought her upstairs, to the penthouse, to keep and eye on her, and keep her away from everyone else. She then found a pirate costume, in a storage area, on the floor. A costume which you bought for yourself, from a local costume shop. You like pirates. Along with your female form and Revy's female form being close in body measurements.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Lee said, “You're welcome. And the bag she is carrying has the logo of that costumer shop. So, it will check out. Even if she kept the receipt. She walked out of the costume shop wearing that clothing, so the receipt would be in the pockets of that clothing, or in the bag. Either can be explained away, as you bought it, and put it there yourself.”
“Moving on. You then, went to check on her, and you found her with the costume, and her clothing and weapons in the bag. You took her to the office. Which she will wake up from. To sleep off the bad alcohol. When Revy wakes up, you can say that the bad reaction caused her memory loss.”
“Since no one was hurt. Revy will not dig too deeply into the situation. Also, you can tell Revy to keep the costume, as a gift, to further smooth over the situation. And Revy will likely be waking up in a good mood. Being Jack Sparrow for a day would put anyone in a good mood. Even if she does not remember why she is in a good mood.”
“As for myself. By then, I will be long gone. If this plan works, you can leave a message with the check in desk, at the Devil's Hotel, to get in touch with Rock and the others. And they will come pick her up.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “And if this all goes off without a hitch. All in all. Everything will go back to, for lack of a better word, normal, and we all move on with our schemes, plans, and general deviousness.”
Chang returned Lee's smile, as he happily complimented, “Brilliant. Absolutely, brilliant.”
Lee continued smiling, as he asked, “Thank you. The only minor problem is that you will need to speak to the two guards, at the elevator bay in front.”
Chang said, “That will not be a problem. They know to keep their mouths shut.”
Lee responded, “Good... Now, onto a related matter. How is this even possible? I mentioned that Rock knew of Jack Sparrow in book two. With the Pirates of the Caribbean films existing in your reality. So, how can a character be reincarnated from one reality to another. That is not easy. For example, look how much effort it took for me to get John to become Violin. That was an epic odyssey that span the entirety of my four books.”
Chang explained, “Jack Sparrow was a historical figure in my reality. Though, the Johnny Depp movies were pretty good. And from what I understand, they truly captured Jack Sparrow's character, and the history of his life. I take it that this is not the case in your reality?”
Lee sighed, as he though, 'The simple answers are usually the most obvious.' He looked over at Chang, as he responded, “Nope. For us, the Pirates of the Caribbean were just total works of fiction. And when it came to Jack Sparrow, it was just Johnny Depp, being Johnny Deep, while channeling Keith Richards. And to remind you. Revy being Jack, is still a very big problem for both of us.”
Chang said, “True. But, even if our plan does not work. It is not the end of the world. I can see the problems. But, at least, this way, Revy is a lot more positive, well mannered, and fun to be around.”
Lee pointed out, “That is the problem, Chang. She is likeable as she is now. Very likable. But, even beforehand, next to you, and the maids, Revy is likely one of the best dual wielding gunslingers in the multiverse. She is also a hardcore badass. Just this makes her extremely dangerous. But, having Jack at the wheel dials the danger level to eleven for her abilities.”
“You think you, and I, are good at manipulating people? That we are magnificent bastards? We are amateurs when compared to Jack Sparrow. She is more genre savvy than you, Rock, Violin, Deadpool, and me, put together. She is fast on the uptake. She figured I was the writer within five minutes of me meeting her like this. Either we fix this, or I am in real trouble.”
“Also, if we let her remain this way. Even if Revy's persona comes back, for the most part. She will still have access to Jack's memories and persona. And Jack clearly has an addictive personality. In the most literal sense possible. Revy probably had one brush with Jack's persona. And now, Revy likes being Jack, so much, that she is literally addicted to being Jack.”
“As such, what every she calls herself. Revy, or Jack. It does not matter. She will be ruling this city within the year.”
“Keep in mind. As impossible as it sounds. One time, Jack literally walked away with a fleet of ships, in a burlap sack. And he even got someone else to tote the sack for him.”
“Think about of the tools she now has at her disposal. She now has Jack Sparrow's seductive abilities, savviness, and intelligence, Revy's sexy body, Revy's street smarts, and Revy's fighting skills. And Jack was no slouch in the fighting skills department, either. And that is not counting her youth, health, and other abilities, she has, due to the super-soldier serum running in her veins.”
“Give her long enough, and you, River, and everyone else, will be eating out of her hands. So, you can see the problems of her remaining the way she is.”
Chang thought about what Lee said for a few seconds. He then stated, “Okay. You have a point there. Still, as I have been thinking about it. As we talked. I can come to be on fence with Annie, on this matter. We can have some fun here, with Jack, for a few hours.”
Lee flatly commented, “That would be a very bad idea. Along with their taste for rum, Revy and Jack are both escape experts. Jack knows he, or in this case, she is great at parties. Jack will use this, and her body, to lull you all into dropping your guard, and escape. And we do not want that to happen. If that does happen, I will not be the one that is going to explain to Rock, their family, and friends, about what happened to Revy.”
Chang realized what Lee was saying. He said, “Yes. You are right.”
Lee stated, “As savvy awesome as Jack is, we have to put Jack back into his box.”
Then, over the course of a few seconds, both of them then realized the pun that Lee said.
They started chuckling, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lee admitted, “Yes. That was bad pun. Though, it was still funny.” He thought, 'And the second time I thought of it. I just did not have time to appreciate it, last time.'
Chang complimented, “You really have a gift for humor.”
Lee agreed, “I know. One of the reasons I am in this mess is my wicked sense of humor. I got a real mischievous side.”
Chang suggested, “Have you ever considered stand up comedy?”
Lee joked, “Nah. The audience would kill me for my jokes, while laughing.”
Chang snickered a little. He then said, “Okay. Let us settle this matter with, Jack, before something does happen.”
Both men then stood up. Chang walked around his desk, to his left side. As Lee turned around, and walked around to his right, of the chair he had been sitting in.
When Chang walked passed the guest chairs, Lee followed behind Chang, as both men continued to walked towards the door to the office.
After the exited the room, Chang turned left, down the hallway. With Lee following Chang, down the hallway, to the nearby guest office.
(_)
Meanwhile, three minutes ago, in the guest office, down the hallway. With the office door being to their left.
River opened the door. She then let Annie and Revy go into the room. River followed behind them, as she left the door open.
As the three women walked into the room, Revy took a look around the room. She saw the room was just a standard office, and the room was less plush than Chang's office.
There was a curtained window, with white drapes, on the far, exterior wall, which let enough sunlight in the room, to see with. So, the women did not have to turn the lights on to see with.
The window three feet by three feet. It was placed in the middle, top half, of the far wall.
There was a desk directly in front of the door to the hallway, several feet away from the door, on the other side of the room. Below, and in front of the white curtained window. The desk was sit about eight feet away from the far wall, with the desk facing the door.
There was a chair behind the desk, and two chairs front of the desk. With a large couch set against the left wall of the room, when walking into the guest office.
As the women came to a stop in the room. They stood there, for a few seconds.
Annie then took a few steps away from Revy and River, as she turned and looked at Revy. Revy turned to Annie.
Even without the force, Annie could tell that the woman was looking her up and down, as Revy was mentally undressing her.
Revy turned to River, and from the blush River had, Revy could tell that River was reading Annie's mind.
Revy turned to Annie, as she joked, in Jack's accent, “You know the one problem with this situation. Since there is no mirror in the room. I am unable to mentally undress myself.”
The other two women laughed, for a few seconds.
As Annie and River calmed down, Annie teased, “That can be easily solved. Still, I must say, Jack. You are well dressed.”
River commented, “I agree.”
Revy said, “Thank you. And you are both look lovely.”
In response, the other two women smiled towards Revy.
Annie inquired, “Where did you find a costume that looks like your old pirate outfit?”
Revy answered, in Jack's accent, “Lee knows of a local costume shop in town. And it is a very nice shop. I found the store to be well stocked, with helpful employees, and good prices. And I have a feeling that Lee shopped their during that time loop. I seem to remember seeing Lee at parties, wearing a pink tuxedo, pin feather boa, black dress shoes, sunglasses, and pink top hat.” She shook her head, as she continued, “That boy really is a closet case.”
The other two women giggled, a little.
Annie turned to River, as she asked, “Did Lee really wear that, during the time loop?”
River answered, “Yes. Lee did wear that. Complete with a pink feather boa.”
Annie giggled a little, as she commented, “I guess Lee is a closet case.”
Revy complimented, in Jack's accent, “Perhaps. But, that boy has real talents in knowing where to go, and how to get someone to do what he wants.”
River stated, “Well, he has a lot of experience in doing that.”
Revy said, “Considering the time loop, he has likely reached the level needed to be a master manipulator.”
Annie stated, “But, he is probably nowhere near your skill level, Jack.”
Revy inquired, “Not yet. But, if Lee lives long enough, he might reach me level. So, why did Chang want to talk to Lee alone?”
River answered, “Both of them are very good at coming up with ideas and plans. And they know you are just as good. And from what I read of their minds, they were both planning on how to handled the situation, once we restore you personality back to the way it was.”
Revy turned to River, as she pointed out, “That is if I want to do it.”
River said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't worry. We are not going to force you. Besides, I am not sure we could do this, unless you were willing.”
Revy questioned, “So, how would you do it?”
Annie stated, “I would link both you minds, with my own. And River and I would then see what we can do. The force does allow for suppressing memories. And River's genius and telepathy would help. Though, I will be honest, we have no real training in this.”
Revy turned to Annie, as she flatly said, “I do not want to have a split personality. That would be worse. Imagine having this body and soul with two crazy personality running in tandem. That would be very bad for everyone involved. I can live with be either Jack. Or, Revy. With me preferring to be Jack. But, I cannot live with being Jack and Revy at the same time.”
Annie responded, “We agree. Beside the ethical reasons. You being willing to do this, will decrease that chance. Though, your memory might eventually return.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “I guessed as much. You cannot keep this much awesome buried forever.”
River said, “True.”
Revy inquired, in Jack accent, in a demure tone of voice, “So Annie. I noticed the way you were looking at me. What would you liked do, while we wait? I have a few ideas.”
Annie looked at Revy, as she grinned. She said, in a sultry tone of voice, “So do I. And it involves uses of the couch by us.”
Revy returned Annie's grin, as she said, “That would be a good start.”
River just smiled mischievously, as she said, “I will be elsewhere.” She mentally added, 'In a nearby room, as you to woo each other.' She then turned around and walked out of the room. She gently closed the door behind her.
Revy set her bag near the desk. Then, she and Annie, walked over the couch, and sat down, while facing each other. Revy sat on the left side of the couch. While Annie sat on the right side of the couch.
Revy requested, in Jack's accented, “So, love. What do you want to first?”
Annie lecherously smiled, as she responded, “Anything you want.”
The two women then began to have some fun.
(_)
A minute later, Lee followed Chang the hallway, in the penthouse.
Lee then saw Chang stop by a closed door, to their left side, with Lee standing a few feet behind him, to Chang's left side.
Chang said, “I hear River giggling.”
Lee commented, “I bet those heightened senses come in handy in a lot of other ways.”
Chang looked over at Lee, as he smirked. He admitted, “Yes. And they work in both genders. I am happy that you made it so the super-soldier serum benefits carried over not only with gender bending, but with children, as well.”
Lee stated, “It solved a lot of other problems. Also, for those with the serum to safely bend their gender, and have healthy sons. Instead, of just healthy daughters.”
Chang replied, “True.”
Lee said, “Also, while you are still with River. I see neither of you are clearly parents. So, you are planning to have any children in the future? Are you just going to keep being a childless couple. Not that I am judging, either way.”
Chang stated, “Yes. We talked about it. We do plan to have children, eventually.” He then cautioned, “And don't you dare crack any jokes of which of us would be the father, or the mother, to any of those future children.”
Lee confessed, in a casual tone of voice, “I admit. I did have a few jokes on mind.”
Chang replied, “At least you are being honest about it.”
Lee countered, “No. Just being polite. So, this is door to the office.”
Chang answered, “No. This is not the office door. The office is a few doors down.
Lee stated, “So, River giggling by herself. That is never a good thing.”
Chang deadpanned, “I know.”
Chang then turned back to the door. He then casually opened the door, in a slightly slow manner, without allowing it hit the wall, inside the room.
As the door opened, Lee saw that it was a standard office break room.
There was a small refrigerate on the floor. Nearby, on the wall, was a snack table, with a turned off coffee pot, styrofoam cups, plastic utensils, paper plates, and items to make coffee.
There was a rectangular table in the center of the room. The table had six chairs, two on each of the long sides, and one on each of the short sides.
And they saw that River was sitting in a foldout chair, on the long way side of the rectangular table that was facing them.
River continued giggling, as she looked up Chang and Lee. She happily greeted then, “Hi guys.”
Chang sternly inquired, “Dare we ask, why you are giggling?”
River happily answered, “You are going to love what is going on in the nearby office.”
Lee stated, “That can only mean one thing.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he deadpanned, “I know. So, want to guess which one is on top?”
Lee replied, “I decline to answer, on the grounds I prefer to continue breathing.”
Chang looked over at River, as he pointed out, “Remember, we have a telepath here. I can ask her to answer for you.”
River just giggled more loudly, as she looked at the two men in front of her.
Chang looked over at Lee.
Lee turned to Chang, as he responded, “Damn, you are good, Chang. Well, whether Revy, or Jack. Both of have dominate personae. They never settle for being second best at what they do. Annie on the other hand has some dominance issues. As a child, Annie was a slave, with a rebellious strike. After he was freed from being a slave. He became a servant of the Jedi Order. As such, he was eventually taught to obey with out question. First, as a padawan, in the Jedi Order. Then, as a Sith. And as a Sith Lord, Annie was always the apprentice, never the master.”
“This lead to a lot of issues to Anakin, and later on, Vader, dealing with indecision, emotional immaturity, and extreme anger issues, that I worked hard to fix in my stories, when I turned Vader into Annie.”
Chang said, “And I am glad you did so. Annie may hate me. But, I am happy that she is the way she is. Instead, of the way she was.”
Lee continued, “Yea. As Annie, she makes for a more stable employee. Though, even without the brainwashing. Which she eventually overcame. Annie likely is still a bit submissive, at the subconscious level. A level that Jack excels at exploiting.”
Chang replied, “Too true.” He mentally added, 'And it is insights like this, which make me want to hire you, Lee. I just have to figure out how to do it without getting us both killed. Though, I still want to have a little more fun with you'
Chang asked, “And who do you think is the dominant one in the relationship between River and I?”
Lee looked over at River for a few seconds. He then turned back to Chang. He flatly answered, “At this point, I am not sure myself.”
River stated, “He is telling the truth. He honestly does not know.”
Lee said, “And for the record, Chang. I sincerely apologize for making you, River's bitch.”
River commented, “He is honestly sorry about that.”
Chang responded, “Well, considering the sex was good, and how it turned out, to this point. I forgive you, Lee.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Now, let's go stop those two, before one of them winds up pregnant by the other.”
Chang asked, “They are both women at the moment. How would that even be possible?”
Lee shrugged, as he halfheartedly joked, “With those two, you never know.”
River laughed, in response to Lee's joke. While Chang did not even so much as chuckled.
Chang agreed, in a serious tone of voice, “True.”
Chang then turned and walked down the hallway, with Lee following Chang.
River quickly getting up from her chair. She briskly walked around the table, to her left side. As River came to the door, she turned off the light to the room, and she gently closed the door, behind herself.
After which, she quickly caught up with Chang and Lee.
(_)
A few doors down, to the left, the three adults came to a stop, and even Lee could hear the moaning coming from the other side of the wall.
Chang was in front, with Lee, behind him, and River being Lee.
They all turned to the door, to their left.
Chang gently opened the door, and all three of the adults walked inside.
What they saw was interesting, to say the least.
On the couch was Annie and Revy.
Annie was sitting on the right side of the couch, with the clothing above her waist discard to the floor.
Revy was leaning over Annie, as they were passionately kissing on their lips, while Revy used her right hand to gently massage Annie's left breast.
And both of them were clearly completely oblivious to the presence of the other three adults intruding into the room.
Chang thought, 'I see Lee was correct, on which one would be on top. Damn. I have to save that man's life. If for any other reason than the fact he is so polite, while still being able to play at my level. Now, to get their attention.' He stated, in a strong, even tone of voice, “Ladies.”
Both of women suddenly stopped kissing, as they turned to the two men, and one woman, looking at down at them.
The three adults saw embarrassment showing on Annie and Revy's faces.
River smiled mischievously, as she giggled at the sight before her.
Lee thought, 'At least they have the decency to show embarrassment with their situation. Still...' He said, “Annie, I wrote you to have better standards than this.”
River laughed for a few seconds, at Lee's comment.
Meanwhile, Annie defended, “It is Jack Sparrow, Lee. Who would turn down Jack Sparrow, the rock star of piracy? Sure, it is Revy's body, but it is Jack's soul.”
Lee conceded, “You have a point there.”
By then, Revy had leaned up off of Annie, and back on the left side of the couch.
And Annie quickly used the force to pulled her white bra, shirt to her. She then swiftly put on her white bra, shirt. After which, she pulled up her robe, which was laying under her.
Just as Annie finished dressing herself, she got up from the couch, as she looked over at Chang, River, and Lee. She requested, “Just please don't tell Arcee about this.”
Lee said, “Don't worry, I am not going to say anything, to anyone, about this. You keep my secrets. I keep yours.”
Annie smiled towards Lee, as she replied, “Agreed.”
Lee turned to Revy, whose facial expressions had gone from embarrassment, to confusion.
Lee thought, 'Now that you have had a few seconds to think about your actions. I bet you are realizing what you were about to do. With Revy and Jack's natures conflicting with each other.'
Lee said, in a firm tone of voice, “Jack, this is why we have to reverse was was done to you. Revy, for all her faults, is a very monogamous woman. On the other hand, you are not. If you are allowed to stay the way you are, your promiscuity will destroy your relationships with not only Rock, but the rest of your family, as well.”
Revy was silent for a few seconds, as she let what Lee said, sink in. She then looked over at Lee. She agreed, in Jack's accent, with the hint of disappointment, “You're right, Lee. I love, Rock, and my family. We need to do this. But first, do you have a plan for when I wake up?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Revy asked, “So, what is your plan?”
Lee turned to Chang, as he requested, “Chang, please explain.”
Chang looked over at Lee, as he stated, “Thank you, Lee.” He turned to Revy, as he continued, “Yes. We have a plan. Lee came up with it. And it is workable. But, it requires that you have no memory of this entire day.”
Revy said, “I can live with that. Will the lie be embarrassing for me?”
Chang answered, “Quite the opposite. The story is that you got drunk, from bad batch of alcohol, and you found that pirate costume, and put it on. You honestly look great in your pirate outfit.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Chang went onto say, “But, we stopped you from doing anything embarrassing, nor harming anyone. And you slept off the alcohol, with no memory of the events of the morning.”
Revy stated, “That will work.”
Chang said, “Glad you agree.” He looked around, as he asked, “Everyone okay with this plan?”
Annie said, “I can see the logic in it.”
River commented, “It works, without upsetting anyone. I think we can pull it off.”
Revy looked over at Annie, as she requested, “So, what do you want me to do first, to go back to being sleeping beauty.”
Annie gave Revy a sad smile. She said, “Just lay back on the couch. Then, River and I will get to work.”
Lee and Chang then watched a Revy shifted her position to where she was laying on the couch, on her back, with her head resting on a vanity pillow, against the interior side of the right armrest.
While River walked up to Annie and Revy, Lee turned to Chang, as he said, “We need to go. Distractions will only cause problems.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he responded, “I agree. Let us wait in my office.”
Lee agreed, “That will work.”
The two men then walked out of the room, and towards Chang's office. As they left the room, with Lee being the second man out the door. Lee gently closed the door behind him. With him turning the knob, so that it did not click as it closed. And he slowly turned the knob back, so as to not make a sound, and disturb the three women inside the guest office.
(_)
Half an hour later, Lee and Chang were in Chang's office. Chang was sitting in his chair, behind his desk, while Lee was sitting in the chair in front Chang's desk, to Chang's right.
They left the office door open.
Currently, they were talking about very fictional series. And they were having a great time within their casual conversation.
Chang inquired, with relaxed interest in his tone of voice, “So, they actually continued that series, after thirty years?”
Lee answered, in a casual tone of voice, “Yes. I know, it also surprised me when I first heard about it. From what I understand, the series picks up from where the first series left off. And to be honest, the first series was pretty good. It has aged well. And soundtrack is still amazing to listen too.”
Chang agreed, “Yes. It is. That soundtrack has an eerie vibe to it, that was still pleasant and relaxing to listen to. And the series was not that bad a watch. It was different. In a good way.”
Lee pointed out, “It was one of the first TV series of its time to have a completely laid out, over arcing plot, for the entire series. And it predated the Babylon Five series, by a decade.”
Chang asked, “True. By the way, why did you not have us mess with the Babylon Five reality?”
Lee answered, “I could never figured out how to fit the B Five reality into the stories. When I create a story, there is a reason for everything I put into that story.”
Chang commented, “I can see your line of reasoning.”
Lee stated, “Speaking of which. Since you know that series, did you ever steal that mechanical, golden, flying condor? On the cool meter, that is one of the coolest flying machines in the multiverse.”
Chang responded, “I know. And while were are not interested in the group that flew the machine. The problem was we needed that medallion to get the machine to work. And those that flew that machine that medallion. Even with that darkness weakness for the machine itself. We could never catch them. Those three kids really are sneaky. Very sneaky. And damn, does that spaniard knows how to fight dirty. Real dirty. And those two cowards know when to run. After my forces failed on the third attempt, I decided to leave them alone.”
Lee chuckled a little, as he thought, 'I am not really surprised that group could best Chang's forces. They are crafty enough. And they have plenty of experience with escaping. And I am happy they got away, with their giant, golden condor.'
Lee complimented, “Deciding to leave them alone, and let them keep that flying machine, was an intelligent move on your part. And in that reality there are still six cities of gold left to be found. Those cities might be worth checking into.”
Chang said, “Perhaps. But, I would have to watch the new series, first. It might be best to see how that series plays out.”
Lee replied, “I agree. As I stated. It is not wise to mess with a series that is not complete.”
Chang asked, “Then, why did you have Annie kidnapped in the middle of her series?”
Lee stated, “I had my reasons. Mostly for an interesting plot. I wanted a younger Vader, whom had not lived the events of the original trilogy. So, I could have Vader, as Annie, watch the entire series and see where her life went wrong, and how it would have gotten worse.”
Chang inquired, “Sort of a, this is what would have happened, scene?”
Lee replied, “Exactly. And in doing so, I made Annie a better person.”
Chang inquired, “Yes. You did. So, are there any other series of that vein, as The Mysterious Cities of Gold?”
Lee stated, “Actually, yes. There is a series titled, Da Vinci's Demons. Very adult. But, very good. It is about Leonardo Da Vinci's as a young adult, trying to solve ancient mysteries, while deal with the cutthroat politics of Europe at the time. Leonardo is portrayed as a crazy awesome, genius, badass, artist and inventor... Well, more so than he was in real life. Good acting. Good plot. Good direction. Well thought out characters.”
Chang said, “Sounds interesting. I will have to look into that series.”
Just then, they heard a knock at the open door to Chang's office.
Chang looked behind Lee, as Lee turned around to see River, and Annie, walking into the room.
As the two women came to a stop, about six feet from the two sitting men, River stated, “The operation was a success. Revy is now asleep. She should sleep for the next few hours, then wake up with no memory of today, nor Jack's memories.”
Chang inquired, “Good. I hope Revy did not suffer any during this.”
Annie said, “No. There was no pain involved. Jack was very willing to do this. And because of that, the entire operation went like clockwork.”
Lee said, “That is nice to hear.”
Chang requested, “Ladies, if you do not mind. I would like you to stick around the penthouse, and monitor Revy for a little while. Just in case there are any unforeseen problems.”
“You can order lunch in, if you want. But, I want you to keep your senses tuned to Revy. Monitor her, as she sleeps. And when she wakes up, I want you to immediately contact me, and the three of us to check on her, at the same time. And I will be the one that tells the cover story.”
Annie said, “No problem.”
River stated, “Works for me.” She then turned to Lee, as she smiled. She offered, “Lee, would you like to join us for lunch.”
Lee honestly answered, “I would love to. Though, my plan requires me to be far away from Revy, before she wakes up.”
Annie and River giggled.
Annie complimented, “A wise idea.”
River turned to Annie, as she suggested, “Want to watch a movie in the penthouse living room? The large widescreen TV, mounted to the wall, along with the sound system, makes it feel like it is a theater experience.”
Annie looked over at River, as she happily replied, “That sounds like a great idea. Though, I would prefer it not to be a pirate film, nor a sci-fi film.”
River cracked a grin, as she said, “I fully understand. How about a romantic comedy?”
Annie responded, “At long as it is not to sappy one. Though, I am a woman, that does not mean I like chick flicks.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Given how badass this group is, I wonder who among this group actually likes sappy chick films?'
River turned to Lee, as she answered, “Inara... And Faye, after a few beers.”
Annie inquired, “River, what did Lee just mentally wonder about?”
River looked at Annie, as she stated, “Lee, was just wondering who among us like sappy chick films.”
Chang said, “I always wondered about that, as well.”
Lee commented, “It was a fair question. And now we know.”
Lee turned to River, as he thought, 'River, on the matter of your film selection, I suggest the movie, America's Sweethearts. It is a funny parody of romantic comedy that is not to sappy, but very hilarious, with a well rounded plot.'
While River continued look at Annie, Lee saw River smile. River suggested, “How about the movie, America's Sweethearts?”
Annie answered, “I have seen that movie before. It is very funny.”
River said, “Then, we will watch it.”
Annie shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.”
Lee stated, “Before you ladies go. I want to thank you for your help.”
Annie turned to Lee, as she said, “No problem, Lee. The laughs we have had about you today, are more than enough payment.”
River looked over at Lee, as she calmly stated, “You're welcome, Lee. And I don't mind. You are a nice person, Lee. And Revy did need the help.”
Lee replied, “Have fun ladies.”
River said, “We will.”
Both of the women then turned around, and walked out of the office, and turned down the hallway, towards the living quarters of the penthouse level.
When they were gone, Chang inquired, “You recommended that movie? Didn't you? You told River telepathically about that movie, and she went with it.”
Lee looked over at Chang. He cracked a smile, as he said, “You, of all people, know that telepathy does have its advantages.”
Chang thought, 'What a minute, the poker game.' He accused, “River's eye rolling at the poker game. That was, yes and no. You to were telepathically talking to each other during the game?”
Lee admitted, “Of course. And with only stating yes and no, and a mix of facial expressions, she is a wonderful conservationist. And remember, I wrote those telepathic conversations you had with River.”
Chang thought, 'Lee is a genius, to not only be about to do that on the fly, but in front of everyone, without getting caught. In the next few days, I am going to have to look into finding a way to get everyone to back off on their vendettas with the writer. So, Lee can come work for me.'
Lee then got up. He stood up straight. He looked down at Chang, as Chang looked up at him, from the chair Chang was sitting in, across the desk, between them.
Lee said, “Well. I better get out of here, and work on an alibi. Before Revy wakes up.”
Chang commented, “Good idea. And as soon as Revy waits up, and I am sure she is back to her usual, bitchy self. I will leave a message at the Devil's Hotel front desk, for Rock to come to get her. If something goes wrong, I will instead, leave a message with you, at the front desk of that hotel.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Chang inquired, “What are you plans, if something does go wrong?”
Lee admitted, “If something does go wrong. I don't know what I am going to do. But, I will think very hard on your offer.”
Chang requested, “Please do.”
Lee turned turned, and walked out of the room.
As Lee walked down the hallway, towards the front express elevator that would take him down the to gaming floor, and eventually to his parked car, outside, he thought, 'I think I will get some lunch at the Last Resort Diner, and stick around there for a little while.'
'And while I am there, I will call Melvin at the hotel bar. I will let him know that everything should be fine, and for him to play it cool, and pretend that Revy never showed up this morning, when Rock and the others get back from their tour.'
'Then, I will head to the local library, to unwind in the music room. It has been a while since I have practiced on a few instruments, and this would be a good excuse to do so.'
Five minutes later, Lee had made it down to the ground floor, out of the building, and into the parking lot of the casino.
Lee soon reached his car. He got into his vehicle, he started the engine, and he drove to the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, it was around one PM, as Lee walk inside the Last Resort Diner, after parking his car in the diner's parking lot.
The diner was quite full that time of day, with the lunch crowd. And Lee directly walked to the counter, and sat on one of the cushioned stools, at the counter, across from the cooking area, with his back to the front doors.
A few seconds later, Mary walked by. She came to a stop, by Lee, as she asked, “What can I get for you, Lee?”
Lee turned to Mary, as he said, “Hi Mary. I will order in a minute. But, could I borrow you diner's phone. I promise it will be a local call.”
Mary replied, “Okay.” She then turned and walked around the counter. She picked up the wirerless phone, off its mounted base, on the back wall.
Next, she turned around, and walked to the counter, across from Lee, and handed him the phone.
Lee gently took the phone, as he said, “Thank you.”
Mary stated, “No problem.” She just stood there and watch.
Lee thought, “Mary being here, listening in, will not cause a problem. Because, she will not know what I am talking about. And she is a dear to get the phone for me. Also, I will order in a minute. This phone call is more important.'
Lee then dialed number to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
Lee held the phone up to his right ear, with his right hand. He heard the phone ring a few time. Then, the other end pick up.
Melvin said, in in spanish, “Hello. Devil's Hotel and Resort. How may we be of service?”
Lee stated, in english, “It is me, Lee.”
Melvin said, in english, “Oh. Hi Lee. So, did you fix our problem.”
Lee answered, “Yes. Everything should be fine, Melvin. Just keep quiet on your end, and things will likely work themselves out.”
Melvin replied, “Can do. And thanks man. I owe you.”
Lee responded, “Don't worry about it. Your reasons were justified. But, if there is a next time, just make some movie suggestions, and arrange for the hotel projectionist to immediately play them.”
Melvin agreed, “Good idea. So, how did you pull it off?”
Lee replied, “You don't want to know.”
Melvin said, “Okay. You're probably right. Well, see you, later.”
Lee commented, “You too.”
Melvin then hung up his phone, and Lee did the same.
Lee then looked across the counter at Mary. He handed her the phone, as he said, “Here is your phone back.”
Mary took the phone with her left hand, she replied, “Thank you.” She then turned and walked back to the wall, to hang of the phone.
A few seconds later, Mary returned to stand across the counter from Lee. She looked at Lee, as she pulled out her pen and notepad. She asked, “So, what can I get for you?”
Lee stated, “I will have a cola, hamburger, and fries.”
Mary smiled, as she replied, “Coming right up.” She then wrote down Lee's order. Next, she headed towards George, the cook, to give him Lee's order.
As Lee watched this, he thought, 'After I eat. And wait a little while. I think I will got to the library after this. Still, that will have to wait a few hours. I first need to stick around the here for a little while, as an alibi.'
By then, Mary had brought Lee his glass of iced cola.
Lee did not use a straw. He instead sipped his cola, as he quietly waited for the rest of his order to be filled, and he could eat lunch he ordered.
(_)
Two hours later, it around three PM. In the spare office, at the penthouse level of Daiyu Palace Casino, Revy woke up on her back, laying on a couch, her head resting on a vanity pillow.
Revy sat up, with her feet on the carpet of the room, as she thought, 'Where am I?'
She then looked down at herself, and saw she was wearing some strange, pirate clothing.
Revy pulled at her coat, as she thought, 'What the hell is going on here? This better not be a joke.' She then looked over at the office window, and she saw daylight.
She mentally reflected, 'That last thing I remember was going to bed with Rock. I hope nothing kinky happened to me while I was out.'
She then heard the door to the office open.
When Revy saw who walked into the room, she relaxed.
Revy saw that it was Chang, Annie, and River, standing ten feet from her, looking down at her. Chang was in the middle. River was to Chang's left side. And Annie was to Chang's right side.
Chang said, “Ah. You're up. You had us worried.”
Revy looked up at them, as she inquired, “What happened?
Chang lied. “Well. It began this morning, when you took a taxi to the casino. You said that Rock and the others went on a tour, and you were planning to start drinking early.”
Revy admitted, “That sounds like me. So, what happened next?”
Chang thought, 'Good. It is Revy. And she does not remember a thing. I thank you, River. And I will thank Annie, later. For doing such a good job.'
Chang saw, from the corner of his left eye, River smile at him.
Chang stated, “You drank a bad batch of some strong alcohol, before you realized it, and it threw you for a loop. You started acting a little crazy, well crazier than you usually were. But, you were not violent. No one was hurt.”
“Though, were able to get to the penthouse, where you found one of my female pirate costumes, in a storage room. And you put it on. Fortunately, River and Annie here were able to get to you, before you did anything embarrassing. And they brought you here to sleep it off.”
Revy commented, “Well, it appears to have worked. I feel fine. Though, I guess that is why I don't remember anything. Still, I feel fine. Actually, I great. And I am happy for some reason.”
Chang thought, 'So, Lee was also right about Revy's mood, after she woke up. That man seems to be batting a thousand. But, in this game, all it takes is one strike, and the game is over, in defeat.'
River smiled, as she commented, “Consider it a good aftereffect of the alcohol.”
Revy replied, “I will. I hope I wasn't too much of a bitch, when you got me up here.”
Annie cracked a grin, as she answered, “No. You were a perfect lady.”
Revy giggled. She then responded, “Yea. Right. So, what time is it?”
Chang said, “Around three PM. And before you ask, I already called the hotel, a few minutes ago.” He mentally added, 'After River and Annie sensed you were starting to come to.' He continued, “I got in touch with Rock. She said they got back early. She said she is coming in the GTO, and she will be here in about twenty minutes.”
Revy stated, “That is great to hear. So, where are my clothes?”
Chang answered, “In that bag, over by the desk. Your cutlasses are also in there. And you look so good in that outfit that I would prefer you to keep the pirate clothing.”
Revy replied, “Thanks.” She looked down at herself, as she said, “I kind of like it. I always liked pirates, even before coming one. And this costume fits me well.”
Revy then looked back up at her three friends, as she requested, “Now, shoo. So, I get dressed.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he replied, “No problem.
The three adults left the room, with River gently closing the door behind them.
(_)
A few seconds later, as River, Chang, and Annie, walked beside each other, down the hallway, towards the living quarters of the penthouse, Chang whispered, “Just to make sure. Did it work? Completely?”
River quietly answered, “Yea. It worked. Completely. And from you thoughts. You're welcome.”
Chang whispered, “Well, again. For Annie's sake. Good job. And thank you.”
Annie softly replied, “I appreciate it.”
(_)
Five minute later, inside the spare office, Revy had gotten dressed in her usual clothing, with his pistols in their shoulder holsters, under her armpits.
She then opened the door to the office, to help her listen out for Rock.
Next, she sat on the couch, with her bag of pirate clothing, including the pirate hat, and pirate boots, on the floor beside her. With Revy wearing her usual green boots, that were tied at the top of the laces.
Twenty minutes later, Revy started hearing the footsteps. She recognized them as the footsteps of her lover walking down the hallway, towards her.
Revy yelled, “Rock, over here!”
A few seconds later, Rock walked into the room, and she came to a stop, a few feet from Revy, with the redhead still sitting on the couch, looking up at her.
Rock turned and look at Revy, as she commented, “It figures you would get into trouble while I was gone.”
Revy replied, “Actually, I wasn't that bad.”
Rock stated, “Yes. Chang told me Annie and River got to you before things got out of hand.”
Revy conceded, “Yea... So, how was the tour?”
Rock answered, “It was okay. But, I felt it could have been better.”
Revy then grabbed her bag with her pirate clothing in it, with her right hand, as she stood up.
Revy said, “Well, you can tell me all about it in the car.”
Rock replied, “Fine with me. So, where to first?”
Revy requested, “If you don't mind, Rock. I would like to head back to the hotel, and drop this bag of clothing off.”
Rock inquired, “Sure. What is in the bag?”
Revy answered, “A pirate costume that Chang gave me. I will show you what I look like in this pirate costume tonight, right before we go to bed. It might give you ideas for some fun we can have, while in bed.”
Rock gave Revy a lecherous smiled, as she replied, “Nice.”
Revy suggested, “Also tonight. Before we do that. I would like go to the Rats Nest, with the girls, and get some drinks. I am not talking about heavy drinking. Just a few beers. I don't feel like going to the hotel bar tonight.
Rock responded, “That is fine. I will even be designated driver. So, who do you want to bring along?”
Revy stated, “Well, the girls can take care of themselves. So, I guess, Benny, Dutch, Janet, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton... Wow that is a lot of people. We are going to need two cars, and a second designated driver. I think Lotton would be open to being a designated driver.”
Rock replied, “I guess so. We can always ask.”
Revy agreed, “That true. Now, let's get out of here.”
The two women left the office door open, as they walked into the hallway, towards the front express elevator, to the ground floor, to the parking lot, and to their car.
When the got into their red GTO, Rock drove them back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around that time that Revy and Rock left the Daiyu Palace Casino, to head for the Devil's Hotel, across town, Molly was in the local library. She was dressed in casual clothing, without her weapons on her person.
Molly walked into the library about fifteen minutes ago. After she took a taxi from the Devil's Hotel, to the building.
Presently, she was sitting at a table, in the main room, across the room from the library entrance. She was reading a spanish book. The book was about the Mexican-American war, told from the Mexican point of view.
Molly thought, 'This is an interesting read, from a historical standpoint. And I am glad my parents and I politely convinced Fabiola to teach me spanish, years ago. Knowing spanish is now coming in handy, during our stay on this island.'
She then heard the front door to the library open up.
She looked up to see Lee walking into the library.
Molly thought, “What is he doing here?”
She then saw Lee turned to his right, and walked into the music room.
Molly thought, 'Lee is going to play some music. This I got to see.'
Molly set her book down, as she got up, and headed for the music room, to spy on, Lee.
(_)
After Lee walked the musical room, he shut the door behind himself.
He then walked over to the piano, that was across the room, and sat down at the piano bench.
Given the position of the piano, Lee was facing away from the door.
Lee then began spending the next several minutes playing the entire Moonlight Sonata from memory, without him missing a single key.
When Lee finished, he moved on to play a much shorter, more modern, and rarer piece of music, by piano, that took him two minutes to play.
As he concluded his playing. He heard clapping coming from behind him.
Lee turned around, to his right, to see Molly standing several feel behind him, clapping. The door to the music room was also open.
While Lee did not show any negative reaction to Molly's presence, he grimly thought, 'Damn. I cannot even let my guard down for one second. Oh well, I will take the complimented for what it is.'
A few seconds later, Molly stopped clapping.
Lee said, “Thank you for the applause.”
Molly complimented, “You are welcome. You have a real talent.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I do. But, I do not like to boast about my talents.”
Molly commented, “I can appreciate that. Anyway, I recognized the Moonlight Sonata. But, I do not recognize the other piece of music you played, afterward.”
Lee thought, 'That is because the last piece is rare, and if I told you what it was, it would likely get me found out as the writer.' He lied, “It is just a piece of music I learned years ago. It is not important.”
Molly replied, “Okay.”
Lee got up from the piano bench. He turned to face Molly. He hid his annoyance, as he calmly stated, “Well, I just wanted to play for a little while. To get it out of my system. And I have done that. I will be going now.”
Lee continued to use his poker face, as he thought, with annoyance, 'Actually, I wanted play the music instruments in this room, for the next few hours. As a way to unwind. But, I cannot do that with you in the his building.'
'Doing so would reason to many questions with you, your family, and friends. And I lucked out over the questions you had for me, the morning after that poker game I had with River. I do not think I will be able to be that lucky again.'
Molly said, “Have a nice day.”
Lee replied, “You as well.”
Lee then walked passed Molly, as he exited the room, heading for the library exit.
As Molly turned around, and watched Lee walked away, she thought, 'Oh well. At least I got to to listen to a good performance, without paying for it. Now, to go back to reading that book.'
Molly then walked out of the music room, as she head back to the table, across the room, where she left the book she was reading, so she could continue to enjoy learning from it.
(_)
A minute later, as Lee walked through the parking lot, he sternly thought, 'I have to be more careful. Still, this con is starting to collapse. But, I still have a little time to figure out what to do next. I think I will spent the rest of the day in my hotel suite, trying to figure out what to do next. And I will order in tonight.'
'Still, this has been a productive day. Chang made me a good offer. If I can buy some time, he might solve some of the problems with his offer. If he does, I think I will take him up on his offer.'
'And if anything else, at least I can look forward to playing some poker with Sam, at the Rats Nest, tomorrow morning.'
A few seconds later, Lee reached his car. Before he left the diner, he had already pulled the windows and hood up.
Lee got into his car, started the ignition, and drove himself back to the Devil's Hotel, to spend the rest of the day in his suite.
(_)
Around seven PM that evening, inside the Rats Nest.
Behind the bar counter, the bartender noticed that her place was not even half full that evening.
She thought, 'Given it is the middle of the week, this is not a bad turnout. And most of those here are regulars that leave good tips.'
She then heard the front door open. She turned toward the door, to see who was walking in.
She thought, with annoyance, 'Why did those bitches have to show up?'
The bartender watched as the eight women, in casual clothing, walked into her bar.
Bringing up the front was Revy, in her usual clothing, completely with her two semi-automatic pistols in her shoulder holsters.
The other women were Rock, Lotton, Janet, Dutch, Benny, Shenhua, and Sawyer. Though, the bartender did not see any weapons on the other seven women.
The bartender turned away from them. She overheard their conversation, as the women shut the front door behind them, and made their way further into her bar.
Lotton said, “Look. I do not mind being designated driver. As long as I am not the one who is going to clean up any vomit in the two cars we took to get here.”
Rock stated, “As the other designated driver, I am with you on this.”
Janet commented, “I don't drink that much.”
Benny replied, “Neither do I.”
Revy said, “I will try not to.”
Dutch commented, “Being around Revy, I know better.”
Revy replied, “Hey.”
Shenhua stated, “A lady does not do such things.”
The other women snickered a bit. But, Shenhua ignored them, and she did not reply.
Sawyer said, “I know my limit.”
Revy suggested, “Well, if you guys do not want to be designated drivers, we could always ask Lee, to substitute for either of you.”
Rock flatly said, “No.”
Revy stated, “You are still upset about that chase Lee took us on.”
Rock commented, “Anyone who plays chicken like that is not completely sane. And I am not putting my life in the hands of a lunatic, whom I do not completely know.”
Revy agreed, “Fair enough.”
The bartender then turned back to the eight women, as she watched as them walk to the large table, that Lee and Sam usually sat in, located in the far back left corner of the room.
The eight women then sat down at that table, with one of them using a spare chair from another table, to sit down.
After they were all seated, they talked for several seconds.
A minute after they sat down, the bartender watched Revy get up, and walk over to her.
The bartender thought, with dispassionate annoyance, 'It figures that Revy would be the one to come place their orders.'
When Revy reached the bar counter, across from the bartender, the bartender looked over at Revy, as she stated, “Hey Revy. I hope you don't plan to get drunk while having those on.” She used her right hand point at Revy's pistols. She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Don't worry. I only plan to have a few beers.”
The bartender responded, “Good. So, what can I get for you all?”
Revy answered, “I want a cold bottle of beer for myself. Rock wants a bottle of coke cola. Lotton wants a bottle of seven up. As for the rest. One bottle of rum. And a bottle of whiskey. With five small glasses.
The bartender said, “I will your order ready for you in a minute.” Then, something occurred to the bartender, as she thought, 'This might be a good chance to ask Revy a question I have been wanting to ask her, since they all got here.'
The bartender inquired, “By the way, I have a question for you.”
Revy cracked a smile, as she said, “Shoot.”
The bartender commented, “For a while, I have been watching you guys come and go in this town. And from what I hear, it is clear that you, and those women with you, are not here on vacation. You are clearly after someone.”
Revy thought, 'There is not reason not to tell her. We have no really made it a secret that we are after someone in this town.' She admitted, “You're right.”
The bartender asked, with more concern, than curiosity, “What the hell did the person, you are all after, do to get on your bad sides?”
Revy smirked, as she coyly answered, “The guy we are after scorned a whole lot of women. Us included. And we are going to find him, and burn him for messing with some major mojo..”
Bartender suddenly remembered a conversation she had with one of her customers, months ago.
The bartender thought, with disbelief, 'Nah... They couldn't be after him?... Could they?... And if so, I need to know why. If for any other reason, than to know if I need to leave town, before he is caught. Still, it is best I thank Revy for answering my questions.'
The bartender said, “Okay. Thanks for the information.”
Revy replied, “No problem.”
The bartender then watched as Revy turn around and start walking back to the corner table, where her friends were sitting.
As the bartender began to round up the drinks for Revy and the other women, with her, the bartender thought, 'Now, to figure how to confront Lee tomorrow, so I can find out what is going on.'
A few seconds later, as the bartender puts the bottles and glasses on a tray, she came up with a workable plan, as she thought, 'That should work. And even with his precognitive abilities, he will not see it coming. Now, to see Revy and the others, before they cause any more problems.'
Soon after, the bartender delivered Revy's order to corner table, where the women were at.
Fortunately, she had a pleasant night. Though, she doubted that the next day would be as pleasant for her, and those she knew.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 19: “One Day Too Late.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
In De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, it was the next morning, after Lee learned about Revy's previous life, and he secretly help Revy return to normal. It was eleven two AM as Lee walked thought the front door to the Rats Nest.
The outside weather was clear, slightly cool in temperature, with a nice, pleasant sea breeze.
That morning, it took Lee a few extra minutes to get to the Rats Nest bar, considering he parked his car a few blocks away, to help prevent him from being ambushed, again.
Lee was dressed in his usual, casual clothing, including his blue cloth jacket, large glasses, and blue baseball cap.
As Lee came into the bar, he gently shut the front door behind himself. As he stood right inside the room, he looked around. He saw no one, but the bartender, standing next to the outer side of the bar counter.
Lee saw that the beautiful, slender bartender, was wearing a black t-shirt, blue jeans, with a black leather belt, black socked, and black tennis shoes. From the outline of her t-shirt, Lee guessed that she was wearing a regular black cotton bra, to support her decently sized breasts. Lee knew that the bra was black, because white would show through the black t-shirt.
Lee saw the woman looking at him, and he decided to approach her.
While Lee walked to bar counter, he thought, 'It will be nice to see, Sam, this morning. He is suppose to meet me here in a little while.'
Lee then continued his thoughts with concern, and slight worry, 'Though, my main concern is, why I cannot shake this growing sense of doom, that I feeling, since I woke up this morning.'
'My precognition has been screaming at me this morning. Like a doom meter that is slowly becoming more serious as the day has gone on. And I do not even know why. Everything was fine at breakfast. Even Revy appeared to be normal... Well, as normal as she usually is. And those brief moments I risk a glance at Revy and the girls, a the restaurant, this morning. Revy showed no signs of being under any influence from her previous life's persona, Jack Sparrow.'
'And I believe that River and Annie were able to seal Jack Sparrow memories and persona, yesterday.'
'Because, Chang has not since left a message for me, with check in desk, here, on the matter. Like he said he would, if there were problems. So, everything is fine, on that end.'
'Still, I feel if I just let this day play out as normal, I should be fine.'
When Lee reached the bar counter, he came to a stop, as he turned to the beautiful bartender. With the woman being six feet from him.
The bartender continued to look at Lee, as she calmly said, in english, “Good morning, Lee.”
The bartender thought, 'Just as I thought would happen. Lee was the first one here. Like usual. I pulled out my some of my good clothing. And I stand on the outer side of the counter, so he can see me. Now to implement my plan to get some answers from him.'
Lee replied, in english, “Good morning.”
The bartender requested, “Lee. I could use your help. If you don't mind.”
Lee shrugged, as he inquired, “What do you need?”
The bartender said, “I got a little behind this morning, in my stocking of items. And I had to open up the bar on schedule. I could use your help stocking a few items from some boxes that are still out. With us working together, it should take about ten minutes. Maybe less.”
Lee thought, 'There is no reason not to help her. It would be good karma. And I could use all the good karma I can get. Especially, now that my con is starting to fall apart around me. Though, I just need to buy a little time for Chang to get his ducks in a row. When he is ready. I will take his offer, and in the end, I should be fine.'
Lee said, “Okay. I will help you.”
The bartender grinned, as she responded, “Thank you. You go first. I need to get the inventory list, I left out here.”
Lee said, “Sure.”
Lee walked passed the bartender, and to the end of the bar counter. He then turned to his right, and walked to the door set against the right wall of the room.
Lee pulled the door open, and he walked inside. Though, he left the door open for the bartender.
As the bartender followed him, she took a moment to quickly walked behind the backof the bar counter. She quietly pull something from under the counter, with her right hand. Next, she turned around and she swiftly heading for the back storage room, with Lee.
After she passed through the door to the storage room, she gently shut the door behind them.
Meanwhile, Lee heard the door shut behind him, as he walked further into the storage room. He soon came to a stop in the center of the room. He then looked around himself.
The yellow ceiling light was on, so Lee could see around the room.
There were several shelves lining the walls, with boxes of items on them. Also, there was a large freeze nearby. Along, with the back exit to the building.
And there were two plastic chairs, in an open area of the back room. The chairs were set six feet apart, and facing each other.
Still, there were no boxes that appeared to be in need of being stocked.
Lee heard the bartender's foot steps come to a stop, ten feet behind him.
Without turning around to face the women, Lee began, “I do not see any boxes that need putting up...”
Lee then realized what was going. He thought, with annoyance, 'Ah hell. And I was going to do this out of the kindness of my heart.' He deadpanned, “This is a trap, and you are pointing your pistol at me.”
The bartender complimented, “You have always been very perceptive.”
Lee turned around from his left, to see that the bartender was holding her black semi-automatic pistol in her right hand. The hammer of the weapon was cocked back, meaning there was a bullet in the chamber. And the weapon was ready to show.
And while she had her right index finger resting on the trigger guard, she was pointing her semi-automatic pistol on him.
Lee then noticed that the bartender's facial expression was unreadable.
Lee maintained his own poker face, as he thought, 'She is showing a mask of calmness, almost as good as my poker face. Though, give her job. I am not surprised she can do so.'
The bartender order, “Go sit down in the far chair.”
Lee turned back around, and calming walked over to the far chair, and sat down in it.
Lee then turned back to looked at the bartender.
He saw that as soon as she saw him seating, she walked over to the other chair, and sat down, as well.
Lee took a hard look at the woman, and her weapon, as he assessed the situation. Lee though, 'With my precognition to both help and guide me. I could probably take her in a fight, without getting shot. But, I need to know what is going on first. Though, I doubt she is the danger my precognitive abilities are warning me about. '
Lee looked the bartender in her eyes, with the bartender looking back into Lee's eyes.
Lee asked, in a firm, though polite tone of voice, “Okay. I have one question. Why? I have always been nice to you. I paid my tab. I tipped you well. And I always treated you like the lady you are.”
The bartender laughed, for a few seconds. As she calmed down, she said, “Well, my main issue is that you brought trouble to my bar. I do not like that one bit. Other than that, you have been a great customer. Which is why I am giving you a change to explain yourself, before I decided what to do with you.”
Lee continued not no show outward reaction, as he thought, with concern, 'She figured out out something about me. The what and how are the important questions. Though, she is giving me a chance to explain myself. Which is a good sign for me. But, I will have to be careful what I tell her. And I better not directly lie to her. So, I need to start off with asking...'
Lee inquired, “What do you mean?”
The bartender stated, in a direct, yet even tone of voice, “What I mean is that Revy, and her friends, came here last night. And don't worry. This is one of the times they did not cause any trouble. Hell, Revy didn't even try to get drunk.”
Lee thought, 'Actually. After getting to know these women. None of them, including Revy, try to get drunk every night. They only occasionally try to do so.'
The bartender went onto say, “Anyway, Revy and I got into a discussion. Soon after they got here, months ago. I could already tell that they were after someone. And I finally got around to asking Revy on the matter. While Revy was vague, she did mention that the one she, and her friends, were after had scorned them. Then, I remembered that conversation we had the first day I met you. And I agree with you. There is nothing worse than scorning women. As in plural. Not singular.”
Lee immediately recalled their conversation. He lowered his head, as he groaned. He said, “I should have never joked like that.” He mentally berated himself, 'I am such an idiot. Though, it was my first day here. Well, second day. Considering, when I first got here, I checked into the Devil's Hotel, headed to my new suite, and slept for several hours. Still, that day can count as my first full day here.'
Lee then looked back up at the bartender's face. Lee saw the bartender still had a calm expression on her face.
Lee also swiftly resumed his calm poker face.
The bartender commented, “Perhaps. Still, this conversation might be beneficial to both of us. But first, I need to know.”
The bartender demanded, in a stern tone of voice, “What the hell did you do to piss those women off? Given the time you have spent here has shown me that you would never knowingly anger such women. You have always treated them with cautious respect. Which I admire. But, now that I think about it, this also shows that you know them. And while they are after you. They clearly do not know you are the one they are after. Or, they would have already captured you.”
The bartender flatly inquired, “What is going on?”
Lee did not show any reaction on the outside, as he mentally cursed, 'Damn! Damn! Damn! She was able to put many of the pieces she had together. And I was right. All it takes, is one slip up, and it is over. I should never said that, women scorned, joke, to her. Now, it has come back to bite me in my ass.”
Lee then forced himself to calm down, as he continued his thoughts, 'I need to calm down. And at this point, while my con is collapsing. With my cover being all but blown. I do not need this woman as an enemy.'
'She still might consider me her friend. She is just currently upset with me.'
'She already pulled a gun once to protect me. If I stay in her good graces, she might do so again. So perhaps, it might be best to admit everything, and hope for the best. That is if she wants to hear my explanation.'
Lee admitted, calm tone of voice, “You are right. But, I do not think that you would believe my explanation.”
The bartender smiled, as she dared, “Try me?”
Lee thought, 'Alright. If that is the way you want it.' Lee calmly began, “Before I came here. And the reason everyone is after me. Is because I wrote a series of stories. Books. All together, the stories were a few thousand pages long. This is why they refer to me as, the writer.”
The bartender stated, “I heard the them talk about a writer, now and again. But, I did not realize the connection between that was the same person they were looking for. Let alone, that it was you. All I figured out was Revy and the others were the ones after you.”
Lee said, “Well, now connection is made. And there is more.”
The bartender inquired, “I am sure. Though, I am a bit confused about this. How would writing stories piss these women off?”
Lee stated, “I am getting to that part. And this is the really far fetched part. But first, how much do you know about multiverse theory?”
The bartender coyly replied, “A little.”
Lee went onto say, “Well, it is not a theory. The multiverse is very real, and it seems that all realities, even fictions ones, exist. And those women are from fictional realities.”
The bartender raised her right eyebrow in interest, as she requested, “Do tell.”
Lee explained, “Due to these women coming to this reality, after my hide, and the way they present themselves, I have come to realize that it is possible to write something in one reality, and have those writings effect the people, things, and events, within one or more realities.”
“And I wrote stories about those that are after me. Very strange and twisted stories, that actually happened to this set of people, or characters, along this branch of the multiverse.”
“To add to that, my stories were works of fanfiction, and not parts of the canonical stories. Which is another reason they are after me. I did not create them. I am just an absolute nobody whom toyed with their lives in an extreme manner.”
The bartender asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “How extreme?”
Lee let his poker mask drop. He gained an embarrassed expression on his face, as he answered, “Well, long story short. Most of the women that are with Revy, use to be men, before I got my hands on them. And they learned about the stories I wrote. And they tracked me down to this reality. My home reality. Now, with their presence, I am on the run from everyone. From the government of my home nation, to these women. It is just that they don't know who I really am.”
Lee emotionally deflated. He slumped in shoulder down, as he looked down at the floor between them. He continued, in a sad tone of voice, “As such, everybody wants a piece of my ass. And not in a good way.”
Lee then slowly looked back up at the bartender, and what he saw pleasantly surprised him.
Lee watched at the bartender used her right thumb to turn on the safety to her pistol. She then tucked her pistol into the back of her pants. Next, she began laughing for several seconds.
Lee thought, 'Her putting the gun away is a good sign. The laughter... Not so much.'
After, the bartender stopped laughing, she looked at Lee. Lee saw the woman's eyes hardened, as she casually stated, “Well, it is nice to be wanted... Still, this explains a lot. And you know you are truly screwed to the wall?”
Lee calmly said, “That is an understatement.”
Lee saw the woman's eyes relax, while she giggled for a few seconds.
The bartender commented, “Well, I have another question for you.”
Lee questioned, “Sure. What is it?”
The bartender mischievously smiled, as she playfully asked, “Who do you think I am?”
Lee thought, with concern, 'That is never a good question. Especially, coming from a mysterious woman, whom I do not know the name of.' He inquired, “What do you mean?”
The bartender grinned wickedly, as she stated, “You haven't figured it out? Have you? None of you have. And I like it this way, because I prefer my anonymity. I like not being known. As such, I never did tell any you my name. It is not hard to lie when you do not tell the answer in the first place. Still, given the situation, and who you are, I will give you a clue. The bar I was most well known for was the one I managed in Thailand.”
Lee thought, 'She is right. It is hard to catch someone in a lie if they don't tell the lie in the first place. Still, who could see be? She is a no nonsense, badass bartender... And the bar she is most known for operating was in Thailand.... No... She could not be... The dress!... It is an ao dai. A Vietnamese dress... She is!...'
Lee's eyes slightly widened, as he stated, “Bao?!”
Bao continued smiling, as she said, “Got it in one.” She the started laughing for several seconds.
Lee remained silent, as he let Bao continued laughing.
And Bao's laughter gave Lee time to collect himself, as he made his eyes returned to normal.
Bao some calmed down.
Lee said, “Oh hell. That dress you wore at the dance. It was a vietnamese ao dai, and I completely missed it.”
Bao responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't feel bad. Very few non-vietnamese whom would recognize that style of dress. And I do not mind wearing it because the style uses pants, and it also looks good on me.”
Lee commented, in an honest manner, “Listen Bao. I am sincerely apologize for the gender bending. I did that just as joke scene. At the time, I didn't realize it was really happening in another reality...” Lee then realized something, as he contineud, with worry, and concern, in his tone of voice, “Oh no. You weren't forced into Chang's breed projects?”
Bao answered, “Fortunately, no. They really did want a good bartender.” While still in her seat, she used her hand to gesture down the front of the sides of her body. From her shoulders, to her stomach, as she continued, “And I am not sore about being this smoking hot woman you see before you. So, there is nothing to apologize over this.” She then put her hands in her lap.
Lee let out a breath in relief. He said, “I am happy to hear that.”
Bao stated, “That I am sure of. And I mean you gave me so much in return. I am now younger, healthier, and I age very slowly. I am stronger and physically tougher than almost anyone I know around here. Except for those after you. That saves me on having to hire bouncers.”
“Monthly periods are annoying. But, I am so sexy that can I get laid every night I want, by almost any man, or woman, I approach. I just have to be careful not to get pregnant. Condoms help with that.”
Boa smiled wickedly, as she continued, “And the best part is that redheaded demon bitch, and her friends, don't have a clue it is me. I can finally enjoy some peace and quiet.”
Lee commented, “Given you are a veteran of the army of the republic of Vietnam, I have a feeling that what I know about the Yellowflag, and yourself, in Roanapur, is only the tip of the iceberg for your past.” He mentally added, 'That is why made it so you and Shane Caxton knew each other from the U.S.-Vietnam war.'
Bao stated, “You are probably right. Back in Roanapur, I had to deal with psychotic customers. Corrupt cops. Greedy mafias. And a whore house above me.”
“Though, here. I presently run my own business. And I have this bar insured at a cheap rate. I now have the power to control who my customers are. And thanks to me being friends with Pedro, I don't have to worry about extortionists. One phone call and they are taken care up before the next day is over.”
Lee thought, “That is true. And there is also the fact you separately slept with both Pedro, the police chief of the city, and his brother Paciano, the former mafia boss of this town. Whom left immediately after learning what was going on. Though, I think both of them would get a kick out of finding out who you really are. Even after you slept with them.”
Bao went onto say, “The only reason I did not throw Revy and her friends out is because I know better. They pay well, and I do not want to piss them off. And I realized they would likely move on.”
Lee complimented, “That is very wise of you.”
Bao responded, “Thank you. Anyway, the police, and crooks, here, leave me alone. Should this place gets destroyed one too many times. I just pull up stakes, and move to the next place, I find interesting.”
Lee said, “I am glad you're happy.”
Bao agreed, “So am I.”
Lee inquired, “Now, how did you leave your home reality for a second time?” He thought, 'I wonder that. Considering I did not write about it. I was not even sure it happened. Until you confirmed who you are, Bao.'
Bao answered, “I used my bartending skills to get a few of the techs, working on reality devices, drunk, From there, I learned what those reality device are, and how they worked. Then, I waited. When the time was right, I stole one of those small reality devices. That time being during the chaos in Rock's attack of the Tower.”
Lee complimented, “That is some intelligent thinking.”
Bao replied, “I know.”
Lee thought, 'I might as well ask.' He requested, “You wouldn't happen to have that reality device, on you, that I could borrow?”
Bao flatly said, “It is not on me. And I am not giving you, mine. Still, do not worry. I am not going to turn you over to them. You are such a good friend and customer. I have no intention on telling them who you are.'
Lee replied, “Thank you. And it was worth asking about.”
Lee happily thought, 'Well, Bao. I am glad you still consider me your friend. And oh well. Back to my original plan.'
Bao agreed, “You are right. In your situation, I can understand you asking about such a device. Also, thanks for including me in that toast with the Ardbeg Providence.”
Lee replied, “No problem. You are nice to me. So, I am nice to you.”
Bao agreed, “Yes. It pays to be nice to each other. Though, I do have another question. What was with that Tex-Mex joke?”
Lee answered, “Tex-Mex is an alias of the creator of the Black Lagoon series, the series you, and the others from Roanapur, are from. That series being in both anime and manga formats. You are from the anime timeline. Anyway, he uses the Tex-Mex handle when he draws pornographic manga. Included in these manga he uses the babes from the Black Lagoon series.”
Bao laughed for several seconds. As she calmed down, she still giggled a little, as she stated, “That is evil. Just pure evil.”
Lee mischievously smiled, as he said, “I know. But, I had to come up with a way to keep them here. To let them know I was here. While not blowing my cover. And my plan worked.”
Bao commented, “True. But, you did make mistakes. I did recognized that attack you did, during the time you disarmed the man in the bar. It was like something Akira did, the night he first came into my old bar.”
Lee stated, “You are right. And I did write that scene. And come to think of it, it is similar. Only, I had to deal with one idiot, instead of two idiots.”
Bao said, “I am surprised none of the girls recognized what you did then.”
Lee responded, “By then, they were too drunk to care. And they likely do not remember much of that night. Also, the guy in question, pulled a gun on me. So, it was worth the gamble.”
Bao nodded once, as she replied, “You got that right. I would hate to lose you as a customer. You are so polite, and a nice tipper.”
Lee stated, “Thank you. I long since learned to treat the help with respect.”
Bao pointed out, “And your manners may save your life in this messed up situation you are in.”
Lee agreed, “You are right. And it cannot hurt. Since I am nice to Revy, and the others, if they catch me, they may just put a couple of bullets in my skull, instead of torturing me for ten days straight, then killing me.”
Bao replied, “Exactly.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I have been, petting the dogs. And it has been worth doing so. Being polite to all the women after me, plus everyone else I could, since I came here. Though, I for that matter, I have been polite most of my life. And that will likely help me a lot. Still, there is another question I want to ask Bao about.'
Lee inquired, “Though, I do have a question. Where did you come up with name, the Rats Nest, for this bar?”
Bao answered, “Believe it, or not. The younger maid one time called the Yellowflag, a rats nest. After I got to thinking about it, I realized that insult, would make a nice bar name. So, given the name, Yellowflag, was too well known with reality travelers. When I had a chance to open my own place. This place. I named this bar, the Rats Nest.”
Lee began, “But, when did Fabiola called the Yellowflag...” Lee immediately stopped talking, as his jaw dropped, while he remembered something he should have known in the first place.
Bao giggled at the expression on Lee's face.
As Lee collected himself, he stated, “Of course. Fabiola called the Yellowflag a Rats Nest after she shot up the bar, in the american english dub, at the end of episode twenty-five, Collateral Massacre, of the anime.”
Bao commented, “And I found that to be hypocritical of her. How dare she criticize my bar after she wrecked it.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. You are right about that. Also, you didn't own that bar, in the U.S. midwest, when you had that beard, while you were hiding out?”
Bao answered, “No. I just ran it. The owner called the bar, the Western.”
Lee sarcastically said, “How original.”
Bao responded, “Well, at least he had it insured for arson, so he is probably okay. And considering you wrote about that bar, how could you not know that?”
Lee admitted, “I kind of used broad strokes with that bar. I stated what the bar looked like on the inside, and outside, along with music playing in it. And you being the bartender. I did not give it a name. Nor did I state what you had been up to while in that reality. I guess it makes sense that reality would fill in the blanks.”
Bao inquired, “So, you didn't write about my dates with several beautiful woman while in that town?”
Lee answered, “No.”
Bao said, “Interesting.”
Lee agreed, “Very.”
Bao commented, “And to think, during that time, I had some really good sex, with some of those women.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “I hope you used a condom.”
Bao requested, “Of course. By the way, I might want to see that Black Lagoon series sometime.”
Lee mentioned, “Pedro has a copy of the series, and he knows where to find my stories on the internet. My stories are titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse, books one through four.”
Bao commented, “Now that is an ambitious title.”
Lee pointed out, “I know. But, look what I had to work with.”
Bao complimented, “Good point. I would say you lived up to that title.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Anyway, I am sure if you ask Pedro, he would be more than happy to loan his copies of the Black Lagoon series, to you. Along with showing you a copy of those stories. And don't worry, that anime has a really good english dubbing. And you would probably enjoy both the Black Lagoon series, and my stories. Or at least, you would get a good laugh at Revy's misfortunes in both series. Barring one scene, in the last episode of the Blood Trail arc, at the end of the Black Lagoon series.”
Bao inquired, “Which scene is that?”
Lee quietly said, “The scene that showed Revy as a teenager. A cop falsely arrested her, and then he raped her in a jail cell, while she was laying on her back, on the floor, with her hands cuffed behind her back.”
Bao softly replied, “Oh... Well, that does explain some things about Revy's personality. Still, to get back on track. It might be best, when I talk to Pedro, that I don't tell him who I really am. Considering, that I slept with both him, and his brother, separately, on two occasions.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms that. Though...' Lee mentioned, “Actually, I think you could bring up the subject, if you delicately handle the matter. Pedro might take it the news quite well. For example, we both agreed a number of the men turn women here, from your reality, and a few others, are hot. Such as Chang's female form.”
Bao asked, “Chang's a woman, now? I know, with the casino, that Chang is in town. But, I didn't know Chang was a woman now, as well.”
Lee explained, “Yes. Well, it is more of part time situation for Chang. You know that black hair chinese woman that came here that day you saw Rock, as a guy, and the others, whom played Sam and I at cards?”
Bao cracked a grin, as she said, “Yes. I remember that day. And how you had sex with that woman in the men's restroom, right after.”
Lee winched, as he responded, “Don't remind me... Anyway, that was Chang's female form. And Chang's female form's alias is, Daiyu. Which means, black jade, in chinese. And I found it kind of narcissistic to name his casino after himself, or in this case, herself. Though, I will admit that it a good name for a casino.
Bao agreed, “Yea. Chang can sometimes be full of himself.”
Lee replied, “No kidding.”
Bao asked, “So, what gave you the idea to turn us into women?”
Lee admitted, “Honestly. It was not originally my idea. Your creator came up with the idea to gender bend a number of the other people of the Black Lagoon reality. To be specific, the idea was shown in both the manga, and anime, in omake comedy short stories. There are seven Black Lagoon omakes in all. There is also an eighth omake in the manga series, that was not animated. It is about the Lovelace family.”
Bao inquired, “What happened in that one?”
Lee stated, “Roberta went crazy, again. This time protecting Garcia. With her planning to go after women with a-cup breasts. Which, at the time, included, Fabiola. Though, after Garcia calmed things down, it was Fabiola who snapped. Due to Garcia being unable to do calm Roberta down so quickly, when they searched for Roberta, in Roanapur. Fabiola reaction was so intense that she even scared both Roberta and Garcia. With her chasing them.”
Bao chuckled a little.
Lee continued, “Given I was using the anime timeline. And how Roberta was maimed and crippled, at the end of anime timeline. I felt mentioning that omake was in poor taste.”
By then, Bao calmed down. She said, in a calm tone of voice, “I heard what happened to Roberta. Both her injuries in the jungle, and Chang's repairs. And at least you have a sense of decency not to mention something like that in poor taste.”
“Though, I am not surprised, that Roberta could go overboard like that. Or, Fabiola could respond with just as much insanity. Though, I did see the younger maid once, after that fracas in Roanapur. And the younger maid, Fabiola, has definitely blossomed since then.”
Lee thought, 'You must be talking about that screwy, three chapters, that happened around the same time, when you were captured by the Hell Sabers. Still, I do agree with you.'
Lee commented, “Though, I have no seen pictures of Fabiola, since the end of the Black Lagoon series. Given, what I wrote, I would have to agree with you. Also, in a fan magazine Tex-Mex made about Black Lagoon, Tex-Mex hinted out working on a ninth omake, dealing with Revy as a dominatrix, call Queen Revy.”
Bao stated, “Been there. Done that. I have seen her like that one time, during one of her more crazier periods. Long before she ever met Rock, and she started to calm down.”
Lee thought, 'Bao's comment can be taken in so many ways, that I do not want to know the details. My life is insane enough, as is.' Lee replied, “I don't want to know.”
Bao complimented, “That is a wise a reply to make, on that matter. Now, which omake are you talking about, with the gender bending?”
Lee responded, “To be specific, the gender bending idea came from the fourth omake, the Boys and Girls omake. Still, all the omakes are hilarious. You were not in it. That is probably why no one has recognized you, while you have been here.”
Bao agreed, “That is very likely.”
Lee went onto say, “But, you could probably already guess who was. You might get a kick out of watching the anime versions of the omakes. You can find english fansubs of them, and the manga versions, online.”
Bao commented, “I will have to check those videos, and manga, out sometime.” She inquired, with curiosity in her tone of voice, “Now. Given I am stuck as a woman. Though, at hot, strong, sexy woman at that. But, still a woman. I have to ask. How can Chang and Rock change genders back and forth? Is it like Akira's sneezing ability?
Lee answered, “For Chang, yes. Rock uses a magical powder, with water, that works once per dose, with cold water. And hot water reverses the effect?”
Bao asked, “From the Ranma Half series?”
Lee guessed, “Pedro showed you his anime collection?”
Bao stated, “Yes. Some of it. We just never got around to the Black Lagoon And let me guess. That redhead with Akira is Ranma. And the blue haired woman with them is Natsuru, from the Kampfer.”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Bao questioned, “I thought so. Are given the physical similarities, are the three teenagers sometimes with them, their children. I believe their names are Nodoka, Mikoto and Yurika.”
Lee answered, “Correct. Those are their names. And they are Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru's children.”
Bao asked, “I suspected as much. Which one is the mother and father to each one?”
Lee answered, “Ranma, Akira, and Nodoka, each gave birth to one of them. Ranma is Nodoka mother. Natsuru is Nodoka's father. Natsuru is Mikoto's mother. Akira is Mikoto's father. Akira is Yurika's mother. And Natsuru is Yurika's father.”
Bao inquired, “You came up with those three daughters in your stories? Didn't you?”
Lee admitted, “Yes.”
Bao commented, “You have a sick mind.”
Lee causally responded, “That goes without saying. Along with me being an idiot. But, those three teenagers are good people.”
Bao agreed, “Yes. From what I have seen of those three teenagers. They seem to be good kids. And can they gender bender like their parents?”
Lee stated, “All three can change at will. And Mikoto and Yurika can change with a sneeze.”
Bao said, “That is interesting. And it does not take a genius to figure out who those five other teenagers are the children to.”
Lee replied, “Yes. They are.”
Bao commented, “I will find out the details, later.”
Lee mentioned, “Just ask Pedro. He will help fill in the blanks.”
Bao replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'So, Pedro knows what is going on. In part. Or, in full. That was not hard to guess, after overhearing Lee and Pedro, talking about that bottle of Ardbeg Providence that Lee brought into the bar. And I will find out the details in a minute.'
A thought occurred to Lee, as he asked, “Now, that I think about it. I find it hard to believe that Pedro would show you the Kampfer and the Ranma series. But, not a series that showed strong adult women. Such as the Black Lagoon series.”
Bao admitted, “During our time together, I did mention to Pedro that I was interested in the gender bending genre. And yes. He gave me a strange look, due to my request. But, given I am such a hot woman, he let the matter drop.”
Lee said, “Okay. And it too bad I cannot get you some of those packets without revealing to them who I am.”
Bao responded, “True. And I cannot approach them, about that without risking them finding out who I am.”
Lee said, “Yea. It is kind of a catch twenty-two for both of us.”
Bao shrugged, as she stated, “Oh well. It is the thought that counts. Sex is still enjoyable as a woman. So, I am not going to complain. And Pedro, and Paciano, were both good in bed.”
Lee replied, “I will take your word on that.”
Bao let out a laugh. She then thought, 'Now, to find out more how much Pedro knows. And what happened to Paciano.'
Bao inquired, “By the way, what happened to Paciano? And how much does Pedro know? I could not help but overhear your conversation with Pedro, when you brought that bottle of Ardbeg Providence by, three days ago. You both clearly knew that bottle originated from my home reality.”
Lee commented, “Given your enhanced senses, that is understandable. Okay. The Del Soto brothers are big Black Lagoon fans. Paciano found out that Revy and the others being here, at the Devil's Hotel. And that they were from the stories I wrote about, as well. Just like you. And from what Pedro told me, Paciano gave away nearly everything he had, left town, and joined the priesthood.”
Bao giggled. She then commented, “I can actually see that happening. Most of the mafia members I knew of back in my reality were stupid enough to try to insult Revy, and the others like her. But, the people of this world seem to have a savviness that is lacking in my reality. And Paciano realized it might be best to get right with God, than face Revy. Honestly, I think he made the right choice.”
Lee replied, “No kidding.”
Bao inquired, “And Pedro?”
Lee stated, “Pedro knows what is going on. Revy, Chang, the others, and the stories. But, unlike his brother, he stuck around. We have been working together to figure a way to steal a reality device, so I can escape to the multiverse, with the others following me.”
Bao commented, “Nice plan. And I think Revy, and her group, would follow you. But, I don't think Chang, and his group will. It looks like Chang is putting down stakes here.”
Lee responded, “Pedro and I both realize that, as well. But, if we can get Revy and her group to follow me, at least Pedro, and this town, have a chance.”
Bao agreed, “True. And I hope your plan works.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Bao asked, “By the way, I noticed you are getting thinner. And with that, not going to be here forever, comment you made a few days ago... What is going on?”
Lee admitted, “I am dying of cancer. I got a few months to live, unless I can find a cure in the multiverse.”
Bao stated, “Ouch. And good luck. On second thought, in that case, if I wasn't afraid of reprisal from Revy, and the others, I would loan you my reality device.”
Lee responded, “I fully understand. And I would have returned it, when I was finished.”
Bao agreed, “I am sure you would have.”
Lee commented, “Well, I am glad we had this conversation. I can now have a casual conversation, about this, with someone who is sane, and who does not have a personal agenda, besides just living their life.”
Bao stated, “I guess you would consider that refreshing. And like any good bartender, I am more than willing to listen, and offer advice.”
Lee chuckled a little. He then said, “Thank you.”
Bao inquired, “By the way, who else knows who you really are?”
Lee grimly stated, “The number seems to be dreadfully climbing by the day. Besides yourself, those in town, that know I am the writer, are Pedro, Chang, River, Arcee, and Annie. At the moment, all of them have agreed to keep my secret. But, I don't know for how long.”
Bao commented, “Be happy that Chang loves playing his games. So, you have a little time.”
Lee replied, “True.”
Bao questioned, “So, Sam does not know who you really are?”
Lee responded, “Nope. He is a genuine friend to me. And I do not want to get him dragged into my mess.”
Bao complimented, “That is kind of you”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Bao inquired, “So, I know about Chang, and Pedro. But, who are the others. I know you played River in that poker tournament. Though, all I know about her is her name, and that she is Chang's girlfriend. What is so special about her?”
Lee asked, “Have you ever seen the Firefly sci-fi series, and Serenity movie?”
Bao answered, “Yes.”
Lee flatly commented, “Same River. Though, she doesn't look it. She is several years older. And she is saner. Also, she likes to occasional dye her natural brown hair red.”
Bao's jaw dropped. A few seconds later, as she collected herself, she stated, “I take it back. I have seen that series, and movie. You winning that poker game against her is balls to the wall awesome.”
Lee could not help but smile at Bao's compliment. He said, “Thank you.”
Bao realized, as she inquired, “Wait a minute, River still looks young. How is that possible? Did she have the vat process?”
Lee explained, “No. When I wrote my stories, I created a gender bending virus that Chang, River, and the rest of the Serenity crew head. Do not worry, the virus is not contagious after it ran its course, over the first few weeks of infection. With the infected being confined to the Serenity, for those weeks. With no physical contact to the outside. So, they are the only ones that were affected by that virus. That gender bending virus gave them the same gender bending sneezing ability that Akira has.”
“At the time, Chang was a woman, like you with the super-soldier serum in her veins. The virus allow her to change back into a man, at the same youthful age has her female form. In addition to Chang still have the physical enhancements the super-soldier serum gave him as a woman.”
“Along with the gender bending, this virus also slowed down their aging to a very slow crawl. And that added longevity, has a multiplier effect to other forms of longevity. Such as those of the Verse's natural longevity, compared to people, here on Earth. And the longevity from the super-soldier serum that you and Chang have.
Bao commented, “No wonder Chang is not pissed off at you. And River did not turn you in. You gave them both so much. And their love life must be interesting.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Given Chang's creativity, and River's genius, I would guess so.”
Bao giggled. She then questioned, “So, who is Arcee?”
Lee answered, “Arcee is a autobot. As in a transformer?”
Bao questioned, “From that old cartoon series?”
Lee pointed out, “Actually, Arcee is from a newer comic series, inspired by that old cartoon. The comic series is from the Transformers. IDW comic series. She goes from pink robot, into a pink motorcycle, and then back again. And she is as crazy, if not crazier than Revy.”
Bao inquired, “Is she the pink robot I heard that worked with Revy and the others, at the Tower.”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Bao commented, “That figures. And dare I ask who Annie is?”
Lee admitted, “You are not going to like the answer. But, here is a clue. What Stars War badass was nicknamed, Annie, as a boy.”
Bao began, “There is only one character, a male one, that I can think of, who was nicknamed Annie, as a boy, was...” Her eyes went wide, as she stated, “No?!”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Bao said, “No.”
Lee stated, “Yes. Annie is, or actually was, Darth Vader.”
Bao exclaimed, “Oh god! That rumor from the Tower was true?! You are crazy to rob Vader of his manhood! That is insane!” She forced herself to calm down, as she continued, “Doing that is crazier than Roberta on a bad day.”
Lee soberly admitted, “I know.”
Bao pointed out, “I see you are right, concerning what you said, early, about yourself. You would have to be an idiot to do that.”
Lee quietly repeated, “I know.”
Bao inquired, “After she learned who you are, why has she not force chocked you to death, yet?”
Lee answered, “Annie is out of the black suit, and in healthy body, with restored limbs. Because of this, she is happy with her current situation, for the most part.”
Bao conceded, “I can see how that would help your case with her.”
Lee went on to say, “Plus, I did a whole lot of character development for her. She was kidnapped between the prequel and the original trilogies. And I had her watch all six movies.”
Bao commented, “That is mean.”
Lee countered, “But necessary. She saw how her life would have ended up. And she rejected that path, and became a better person. You could consider her a good guy, or in this case, good gal. But, she is no saint. And she is more than willing to kill those whom threaten her.”
Bao stated, “I am glad you convinced her to be good. Vader as a bad girl, with her force powers, and the super-soldier serum, would be scarier than the Bloodhound.”
Lee agreed, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Bao asked, “So, what does Annie look like?”
Lee answered, “Annie is the one with the brown hair, in the brown robe, with the lightsaber clipped to her belt, at Chang's casino.”
Bao said, “I will be sure to avoid her.”
Lee pointed out, “No need. She is likely one of the nicer people you will meet at the casino. Just don't crack any Star Wars jokes in her presence.”
Bao cracked a grin, as she inquired, “So, how many of those Star Wars jokes did you crack at her expense, in your stories?”
Lee admitted, “More than was healthy.”
Bao let out a laugh. She then said, “I will keep that in mind. Now, that I think about it. I do have another question. I heard about Melvin putting Revy in her place. I would pay money to see what happened.”
Lee agreed, “So would I.”
Bao commented, “Anyway, I have met Melvin a few times, and I just get the feeling I have seen him somewhere else, before.”
Lee stated, “It is not my secret to tell.”
Bao inquired, “Okay. But, how big a secret is it?”
Lee answered, “Melvin is in hiding from badasses that are more dangerous than those after me.”
Bao stated, “The only badasses I know of, that are more dangerous than Revy and the others, are Balalaika and Hotel Moscow... Of course. Now, I remember. He is a member of Hotel Moscow.”
Lee softly replied, “Damn.”
Bao snorted.
Lee said, “Well, since you figured that out, you need to know that Melvin is actually on the run from Hotel Moscow.”
Bao pointed out, “Why is he on the run from them? He does not seem like he would willfully cross Balalaika. And the only good thing that everyone can agree about her is that she takes care of her troops.”
Lee explained, “First, I didn't write this. I just pieced it together from some sources. And this is all on Balalaika's head. After the fall of the Chang's Tower, Hotel Moscow continued with business a usual, only at different locations. And as the years passed, Balalaika stayed young, while her subordinates did not. Eventually, it reached a point that she made them an offer, the vat process, to make them young. At the price being they would be women. Only Melvin objected. It was then that Melvin learned that Balalaika's offer was more of an order, than an offer, and so he ran.”
Bao asked, in a firm tone of voice, “Are you saying that Hotel Moscow is now composed of young, badass super-soldier women?”
Lee replied, “Yes. And that isn't my fault.”
Bao said, “I believe you. And here I thought the members of Hotel Moscow were dangerous before.”
Lee responded, “Yes. I am just happy that Balalaika does not know who I am.”
Bao said, “If she did you would be better off with surrendering to Revy and her group.”
Lee agreed, “I know.”
Bao commented, “Well, we better head back out before more customers show up.”
Lee replied, “Agreed.”
Bao stood up from her chair, as she said, “Anyway. I wish you luck, and I am rooting for you.”
Lee stood up from his chair, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Both of them turned, and walked towards the door, leading to the dining area of the building.
Lee walked passed Bao. And he pushed opened the door for Bao, and let her walk through first.
As Bao passed by Lee, she said, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then followed behind, with him gently closing the door after he was through it.
Lee then walked around the bar counter, and sat at one of the stools, in the middle of the bar counter, with him facing the right wall of the room.
Lee then patiently watched for his good friend, Sam, to show up.
Meanwhile, Bao walked behind the bar counter, and placed her pistol in its holster, under the bar. She then turned to Lee, as she asked, “Can I get you anything?”
Lee turned to Bao, as he answered, “Not yet. And your secret identity is safe with me.”
Bao grinned, as she replied, “Thank you.” She then pulled out a bottle of water, from refrigerator, under the counter, to drink.
Lee turned turned looked down at the bar counter, as he continued to wait for Sam to show up.
A few minutes later, Lee was still sitting in his stool with Bao behind the bar counter, as both of them heard the front door to the bar open.
They both turned their heads to see Sam walk through the front door.
Lee stood up from the stool he was sitting in, as he turned to Sam. He said, with joy evident in his tone of voice, “Good morning, Sam.”
As Sam reached Lee. Sam came to a stop, in front of his good friend, as he happily replied, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee inquired, “So, back to the usual poker game?”
Sam replied, “Yea.”
Lee asked, “How long can you stay?”
Sam smiled, as he answered, “All afternoon.”
Lee returned his friend's smile, as he happily responded, “Good.”
Lee turned to Bao, as he ordered, “We will have two glasses of lemonade.”
Bao continued to look at the two men, as she said, “Coming right up.”
Sam grinned, as he said, “You know me so well.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he warmly said, in a happy tone of voice, “What are friends for.”
Both men then turned and walked to their usual corner table, in the left back corner of the room, to continued their ongoing poker game.
(_)
Later on, it was the late of the afternoon, near sunset, inside the Rats Nest, Lee and Sam were at this usually table, playing poker against each other, at their corner table.
Lee had treated Sam to a nice lunch at the local American steakhouse that he had previously taken Eda to. He drove Sam to the restaurant, in his pink Cadillac. Where Sam and Lee both enjoyed the meals that Lee paid for. Lee then left a tip, And Lee returned this to the Rats Nest.
We then returned to the Rats Nest to continued their poker game, at their corner table. With Bao giving them both fresh glasses of lemonade.
Currently, Bao, Sam, and Lee, were only three people inside the bar.
As Sam and Lee saw in chairs at the large table, in the back left corner of the room.
Sam had his back to the back right corner of the room. Lee sat with his back to the right wall of the room. Which allowed Lee to see the front door, with the corner of his left eye.
And while Lee was enjoying his time with Sam. He was still dealing with a minor personal concern.
Throughout the afternoon, Lee was unable to shake off the growing sense of impending doom he had been feeling all day, since he woke up.
Lee looked at his poker cards, in his hands. It was a good hand. Though, Lee was just more interested in continuing the current hand, just for fun. The pot for the hand was only a few dollars, with him and Sam just presently playing for the fun it. As the two friends sent time with each other.
While Lee continued to look at his poker hand, Lee thought, with concern, as he fought off the creeping dread he was feeling, 'I don't get this feeling. It is like my precognition is redlining. This is way worse, than when I sense an actual possible threat from Revy. That is just a minor annoyance, compared to the down right, apocalyptic sense of danger I am feeling right now. And I cannot figure out why.'
'If they girls finally figured out who I was, they would have dragged me off at breakfast, or come after me by now. It has got to be something else. Maybe the authorities of my homeland are going to take another shot at me... Nah. Pedro said they wouldn't... At least not this soon.'
'It cannot be Chang. He already knows who I am, and he let me go. He even made me a nice offer, that I am willing to accept, as soon as he works out the kinks in his plan. And I told him as such.'
'Annie, River, and Arcee know who I am, and they clearly don't care. The rest are in the dark. And I am still in Pedro's good graces. So, that cannot be it. So, what is it?'
Suddenly, to his left side, he heard the front door to the bar open, with footsteps of people walking in.
Lee did not paid any mind to whomever walked into the bar, as he looked at the cards in his hand.
Lee had a pretty good hand. A full house of three queens, and two aces.
A few seconds later, Lee heard a bottle dropped on the floor, from behind the bar counter. Though, from the sound, the bottle did not shatter, when it hit the floor.
Lee thought, 'Well, let's see if Bao needs some help cleaning that up. The bottle may be intact, but it likely that it was full, and the liquid inside spilled its alcohol onto the floor. Anyway, I owed Bao, for what I did to her, and for keeping my secret. Helping her clean up a mess is the least I can do.'
But, when Lee turned to his left side, to look at the bar counter, whom he saw, standing in front of the bar counter, nearly caused him to have heartattack in fear.
As Lee's cards fell on the table, with the cards facing upwards, he felt intense fear at the two individuals he saw, He immediately understood what his precognition had been trying to tell him all day long.
It took all the will power Lee had not to break his calm poker mask. Still, it was extremely difficult to prevent himself from immediately freaking out, jumping out of his chair, and running for the front door. But, he knew if he did, it would give him away as the writer.
For whom he saw were two women. One woman had long purple hair, that went below her waistline. The other woman had long green hair that went below her waistline. Both had their hair in ponytails, tied back at multiple points. The purple woman's hair was so long that her hair was tied every two feet, and was tied three times in all. And the woman with the purple hair was closest to him.
Though their clothing, Lee could tell that the purple haired woman appeared to be in her mid-twenties. While the green haired woman appeared to be in her late-twenties.
Both had very athletic physical builds. And while the green hair woman had a respected set of breasts on her chest. The purple haired woman had a large set of breasts on her chest.
From the angle they were standing at, he could see that neither of them were wearing glasses, nor bonnets.
Yet, both were wearing classic, black and white, long skirt, long sleeved, and white gloved, maids outfits.
The two women could only be two people.
Aside from the fear, Lee was beyond happy that both of the women were turned towards the bar counter, with neither of them looking at him. Though, the purple haired woman, the more dangerous of the two women, was the one being the closer to Lee, as she stood to the left of the green haired woman.
Still, Lee mentally screamed, 'It is Roberta! And Fabiola! The Lovelace maids! They can only be those two. No one else would wear those outfits, and have those hair colors, at those hair lengths, in those ponytails. And the only reason they would be here would be to look for me.'
'Chang told me that all those after me agreed not to tell the maids about the stories, and about my anonymous alias, as the writer. So, who the hell among the Rock and Revy's crew called them in?! No one in Chang's group could be that stupid, because they know Chang would have their hides for ruining his fun.'
'Though, the answer to that question really does not matter at the moment. These two badasses will literally tear this town apart looking for me. I have got to get out of here. Out of the city. They will eventually chase me. Though, my running will get everyone else out of the line of fire. But, how? I go for either the front, or back door, I am had.'
'And they are literally way too close for my comfort. Roberta is less than ten feet from me. I would guess the Bloodhound is eight feet, nine inches, and three quarter inches from me. To be exact. I am literally two steps from an absolutely, horrible, horrible fate. I just pray that I can get Bao to stall them, while I figure out a plan that can save all our asses.'
'Fortunately, Bao knows the situation, and she has no love for the maids. So, we still might be able to pull off a miracle. And I have an idea to buy time. The question is, can Bao pull it off, on the fly.'
(_)
Meanwhile, Bao was standing, behind her bar counter, and in front of one of her worst nightmares, come to life.
Bao had dropped the bottle out of fear, when she looked up, and saw Roberta and Fabiola standing right in front of her.
Only after years of experience in dealing with Revy, and other lunatic women, kept Bao from showing any outward fear towards the women.
Though, Bao thought, with intense fear, and worry, 'Oh fuck! Lee is fucked! And maybe I am too!' She then risked a glance of at Lee, and their eyes met each other, before she looked back at the faces of the maids. She continued her thought, “And from the look in his eyes, he knows he is fucked!'
'At least the these two women don't look pissed off at the moment. Given the situation, that could be worse. And I see that Roberta replaced her cybernetic parts, with more human looking ones.'
'The only thing I have going for me is they clearly don't know who I am, nor do they know that Lee here is the writer.'
'I need to play up the babe angle, until Lee figures out a plan. At least, I learned spanish when I first came to this town. So, that may help put them at ease, while in my presence.'
Bao kindly said, in spanish, “I apologize for my clumsiness.”
Fabiola said, in spanish, “That is quite alright. We all make mistakes, sometimes.'
Bao thought, 'It is tragic that you are likely not going to apply that rule to Lee.'
Roberta spoke in a calm, polite tone of voice, in spanish, “Yes. We all do. Now, excuse me, ma'am. We are looking for the Devil's Hotel and Resort? Could you provide us with directions?”
From over Roberta's left shoulder, Bao saw Lee still looking at her.
Lee silently mouthed the words, in english, “Stall them.”
Bao thought, 'I think I can do that.' She offered, “Well ladies. If you give me a minute to get a pen and paper, from in back, I can draw some directions for you. And if you can wait a few more minutes than that, I can call you a taxi.”
Roberta responded, with a cute, innocent smile, “That would be nice.”
Bao thought, 'If I did not know better, I would have fallen for that smile.'
Bao asked, “Can I get anything for you, before I head to the back?”
Bao thought, 'If it is milk, we may make it out of this alive. If it is hard alcohol, we are screwed.'
Roberta answered, “We will each have a bottle of beer.”
Fabiola commented, “Something nice, and cold.”
Bao thought, 'I am confused now. I cannot read their answer.'
Bao quickly pulled out two cold bottles of expensive beer, from a small refrigerator, from below the bar counter. She swiftly set the cold bottles on the counter, in front of the maids.
Bao then turned, and walked to back of the room, where she opened the storage room, and ended the storage area of the building.
Meanwhile, both maids opened their bottles, and they each of them took a drink their cold bottles of beer.
(_)
As Sam saw Bao leave for the back area of her bar, he could tell that she was scared for some reason. Also, he saw a bit the fear Lee's eyes, as well.
And all of the fear, from both adults, were directed towards the two women that had just walked into the bar.
Yet, for Lee, Sam could see the fear had lessened considerably within the last few seconds.
Though, Sam wisely decided to be remain silent, as he watched the situation play out.
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee saw what Bao had done.
As the Bao left the room, and maids drank their bottles of beer.
Lee turned back to face Sam, lest the maids notice that he was staring at them, and wonder why he was doing so.
Lee thought, 'Okay, Bao. Good job. You bought me time. Not much, but some. I may have seconds to a few minutes. But, I can work with this.'
'Though, when I first saw the maids, just now, I was so scared, I almost pissed my pants. Sill, I need to figure a way out of here... Wait... Could my escape be that simple?... It is worth a try. I just have to calmly get up, and walk casually. As if nothing is wrong.'
Lee slowly stood, and he calmly turned and walked to the men's restroom.
(_)
Though, at the same time as Lee did heading for the men's restroom, from the bar counter, Fabiola had decided to take a look around the room. And she noticed Lee walking to the men's restroom door, open it, and walked inside, with him closing the door behind himself.
Fabiola set down her beer bottle on the counter, as she thought, 'I wonder.'
She walked over to the men's restroom, and opened the door to it.
She saw Lee next to, and facing, one of the restroom urinals.
Lee turned to Fabiola. He inquired, with annoyance in his tone of voice, as he spoke in spanish, “Do you mind?”
Fabiola blushed, as she said, in spanish, “Sorry.”
She then stepped back into the dining are of the bar, as she closed the door behind her. She then turned, and walked back to her place at the bar counter, by her teacher, and long time friend, Roberta.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the men's restroom. Right after the door shut, as Fabiola exit the room, Lee let out a deep breath, in relief. Lee thought, 'And she was modest enough to not even check to see my fly was zipped up. And she would likely not expect the writer to know spanish.'
(_)
As this went on, in the main room, Fabiola walked away from the restroom door, and back towards the counter.
Sam watched this. He then set down his cards, got up, and passed by her, as he entered the men's restroom.
After Sam entered the restroom, he let the door close behind him. He turned, as he saw Lee standing by a urinal, a few feet from him. Sam began to ask, in english, “What...”
Lee quickly rushed up to Sam, and cupped Sam's mouth, with the open palm of his right hand.
Sam could see that Lee has a serious expression on his face. Lee whispered, in a serious tone of voice, in english, “Speak only in whisper. The purple haired woman has sharp hearing. And do not use my name, nor your name. Do you understand?”
Sam silently nodded.
Lee the removed his right hand from Sam's mouth.
Sam softly inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “What is going on? You are acting like Santa Muerte just walked into the bar.”
Lee quietly responded, “That would be pretty close to the truth. We have to get out of here. The window in here is our best bet. We are lucky it is big enough, and it is not painted shut. And we have to do this quietly. Also, forget the money on the table. It is not worthy our lives.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'I am glad I still have most of my money on me. And I can live without that five hundred dollars, and change, I left on the table. Plus, the maids will not suspect us of leaving without first collecting the money off our table. So, we got that going for us. Now, to get out of here.'
Lee softly turned around, and walked to the window.
The window, as three feet wide, and six feet high.
The window was set three feet above the tiled floor, in the middle of the back exterior wall of the building, with the window reaching the ceiling. There was a simply turn lock on the center of the window.
The window faced a concrete block wall, six feet from the back of the building.
So, privacy was not an issue. Though, the height of the concrete block wall dropped down to four feet, when it was no longer parallel with the building.
The window was clear, and provided light for the large, restroom. There were ceiling lights, and a suction fan in the ceiling that could be turned on, but both machines were currently turned off.
The window was a standard tile and slide window, and pushed upwards from the bottom to open the lower half.
Lee careful, undid the lock in the middle. He then slow, and quietly, pushed the window up to where it was open enough to get out of.
Meanwhile Sam quietly walked across the room, to where Lee was. And he stood a few feet behind Lee.
As this point, Lee had opened half of the window, all the way up. Lee then checked, and found, that the window stayed in place. After which, he let go of the window.
Lee was the first to walk outside through the window. He was soon followed by Sam.
When both men were standing outside, Lee whispered, “Just follow me. We will talk, when we are about a city block from here.”
Sam softly replied, “Okay.”
Lee then turned, and started walking to the along the back side of the building, towards the right side of the building, which had not windows on that side of the building, that could be seen from the middle part of the bar counter, where the maids had been quietly drinking their bottles of beer.
Lee did this, so Sam and himself would not risk being seen by maids as they left the area.
As Lee walked, Sam followed right behind Lee.
Soon the two men would be the concrete sidewalk, where Lee would then take them to a nearby intersession, and he will turn right, to go up another road, that did not face those outside of the Rats Nest Bar.
And while Lee was taking a different route to where he parked his car. He knew the road so of Plata Podrido, well. And he was still heading to where he parked his car, a few blocks away from the Rats Nest Bar. He did this so that he would not have to double back, and risk accidentally running into maid.
A minute later, Lee lead Sam to an intersession, where they cross the empty street, to their right. And they walked down another sidewalk, with the road to their left.
Both men were silent, as Lee briskly walked, with Sam following right behind him.
Though, Lee did plan to make a quick stop, on their way to his car.
(_)
At the moment, inside the Rats Nest bar itself, Bao had just re-entered the dining area, form the storage room. She walked around the back of the bar counter, with a pen and paper in hand.
As Bao walked, she noticed that Lee and Sam were gone, but the maids were still there, calming drink their beer.
Bao thought, 'Good. Lee figured a way out. And he was able to get Sam to go with him. That means no one is likely going to die right now. I helped give Lee a head start. He is now on his own.'
A second later, Bao came to a stop, to the left of the maids. Though, not right in front of them. She looked at the two maids, whom had been silent, and losing in front of themselves.
Suddenly, a group of eight men walked into the bar. The men were in their late teens, to early twenties. And they were all in casual clothing. Such as shirt, pants, and shoes. A few of the men were holding wooden baseball bats. But, none of them had any other signs of weapons on them.
Bao thought, 'From their clothing, and ages, they are likely another mexican gang. These guys seem to come here every other week to cause trouble. As least with Revy and the girls coming by regularly, most of them got the clue to stay away.'
'And Pedro, and his men, usually handle the rest of these fools.'
'If the maids were not here, I would pull my gun, and they would leave. And some of them also have yet to learn, the hard way, that I was physically stronger, quicker, tougher, and a better fighter than them. But, if I do that, with the maids here, it is going to result in a bloodbath. With maybe my own blood being shed as well.'
The leader of the gang said, in spanish, “Hello senoritas. We are looking for Lee? Where is he?”
The maids left their nearly empty bottles of beer on the counter, as they turned to look at the newcomers.
Roberta asked, in a sickeningly sweet tone of voice, in spanish, “Who is Lee?”
Bao mentally whined, 'These idiots are not only going to get themselves killed, but lead the maids right to Lee. Sure the boy did some questionable things, but he doesn't deserve the fate these two will dish out on him.'
Bao turned to Roberta, as she spoke up, in spanish, “Just a guy in town.” She turned to the gang, as she inquired, “So, what do you want with this, Lee?”
The man answered, “We heard he recently came into some money from that big poker game, at the casino in town. We know he stays at the hotel with those crazy women. But, that he also comes here. So, we figured it was safer to confront him here.”
Bao thought, 'You fools picked the wrong place, at the wrong time, on the wrong people, to pull this stunt on.'
Bao stated, “Nice plan. But, I hate break it to you. But, Lee is almost broke. It was Revy's money, not his. Revy took all the winnings with her. With Lee not seeing a peso of that money. He did not even want to play that woman, in the first place. Revy made him enter that game.”
The man replied, “Really? How sad. Our fallback plan was to kidnap him, and hold him hostage.”
Bao responded, “Good luck with that. No one here would pay any ransom for him. Especially, not those women at the hotel.”
Fabiola question, in spanish, “What money? What poker game? What woman are you talking about?” She thought, 'Though, with Revy involved. And it has to be our Revy. No one else is called, Revy. This is getting more interesting by the second.'
The man answered, “A few days ago, Lee played a poker game against this woman at the local casino. It was a million U.S. dollars, bet against a million U.S. dollars. Lee won the game.”
Roberta requested, “Describe this woman?”
The man said, “Some redheaded chick named, River”
Fabiola raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “River? As in Chang's girlfriend?”
The man answered, “I guess so. I believe that the guy who runs the casino is named, Chang.”
Roberta thought, 'This Lee beat a telepathic genius in a poker game.' She stated, “I would like to meet this man. What does he look like?”
The man smirked, as he said, “What does it matter? You are never going to see him. We came here to make money today. And if we cannot make it off of his ass, then we can make it off of yours. And we can have some fun in doing so.”
Bao watched the two other women, beside her, as it was like a mental switch have been flipped for both maids. Bao saw their body language go ridged, as both of them grimace, and growl, in unison.
Bao thought, with disgust, 'I have seen this dance before. First hand. Twice. By these very two women. I know what is happening next. Screw it. I am out of here.'
Bao turned to the maids, as she flatly stated, “The beers are on the house. The place is insured. And the bar counter walls are armored. Have fun girls. I am gone.”
Bao swiftly walked over to a nearby section of the back of the bar counter, where she pulled her gun from the holster under the counter. She then turned around and ran out of the room, to the back of the store, and out the back door, while not looking back.
A few seconds later, Bao was in her car, driving away, down the street, from the violent insanity that was about to unfold. With Bao planning to call the fire department, when she was over two blocks away.
(_)
Back inside the bar room, by the counter, the maids had kept their eyes on the men, by the front door. Though, the maids had heard what the bartender had said. They saw from the corner of their eyes, as she pulled out a gun. And they heard as she ran out of the dining area, through a door in the back of the room.
As the maids and the men continued to silently look at each other, Fabiola thought, 'So, the bartender was armed, and she did not pull her pistol on us. Nor, these scumbags. Something is not right here.' Fabiola said, “If I didn't know better. I would think she knew us.”
Roberta turned to Fabiola, as she responded, “She might. From what I understand, our series exists here. And is fairly well known for those that have heard about it. With Revy, and her friends, around, it is possible for some people, in the local area, to put two and two together.”
Fabiola turned around, to face Roberta, as she agreed, “True. And that would explain why she ran, while letting us know the building is insured, and the bar counter is armored.”
The leader of the gang stated, “Hey senoritas. We are right here.”
The two women ignore the men.
Roberta said, “Yes. So, we don't have to worry about the destruction.”
Fabiola commented, “That actually makes me feel better about this.”
Roberta suggested, “Curtsey?”
Fabiola agreed, “Curtsey.”
Both women turned to the gang of men. A second later, both women curtseyed, and dozens of grenades, with their pinned pulled, fell out from under their skirts, and onto the floor.
A second later, both maids, jumped over the bar counter for cover, seconds before the grenades went off, and destroyed the room, while taking the gang members with it.
A few seconds later, both maid jumped back over the bar counter, and they calmed walked around small few fires in the room. When the reach the blown out, from door, the two women walked around the slightly burnt corpses of the gang members, as they calmly exited the building.
As soon as they stood right outside the entrance, under the awning, they looked at each other, to see they were both unharmed.
Meanwhile, a few cars passing by them, on the street.
Fabiola said, “Well, it looks like we will have to find someone else to give directions to the Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Roberta agreed, “Yes. It looks that way. And with our luck, it will likely take a while.”
Fabiola stated, “I am in no rush. How about you?”
Roberta shrugged, “Not really. We will capture the writer, eventually. And if it gets to the point we become hungry this evening. We will stop for dinner, and then resume our hunt.”
Fabiola complimented, “Good plan.”
Roberta suggested, “Since we already learned, from a few other locals, this is an island, that borders the Gulf of Mexico. With those same locals suggesting we check out this bar for questions. With them giving us the direction to get here. I suggest we head to our left, and head for the eastern beach area. I am sure someone there will be willing to give us direction.”
Fabiola replied, “I agree.”
Both women then turned and walked side by side, down the left side of the building. With Fabiola walking to Roberta's right side.
Less than a minute later, the two women had passed by the Rats Nest parking lot, on the sidewalk, as they headed to the eastern beach of the island.
(_)
One minute ago, a block away, and half way to where Lee had parked his car, from the Rats Nest, to prevent from being ambushed again at the Rats Nest. Or, at least for Lee to spot those that would ambush him, before they spotted him.
At the moment, Lee and Sam had stop by a payphone.
There was no one else around them, on the street, in the area they were in, at that time of day.
Lee picked up the receiver, put in the needed amount of coins, and he dialed a number. He then used his right hand to hold the receiver to his right ear.
Sam saw the number that Lee dialed. He knew the number was for the local police station.
As the other end of the line picked up, Sam overheard Lee say, in spanish, “This is Lee. Please give a message to Chief Del Soto. Tell him that maids are in town. He will understand.”
A few seconds later, Lee said, “Thank you.”
Sam guessed that the person on the other end of the line had replied to Lee first comment, on the phone.
Lee hung up the phone, by putting the received back on the hook.
Lee then turned and start walking about from Sam, in the direction of his car. With the road to Lee's left side, and the buildings to his right side.
Sam decided to silently walk right behind Lee.
Suddenly, they heard an explosion come from the Rats Nest, a block behind them.
Sam stopped, and turned around, to look at the smoke rising from the explosion.
Meanwhile, Lee just kept walking, without looking back.
Sam turned back to Lee, as he started walking behind him. With Sam catching up to Lee, to follow Lee, by a few feet behind Lee.
As they walked, Sam commented, in english, “I hope the bartender is okay.”
Lee kept this back turned to Sam, as he stated, in english, “Trust me. That bartender has been through worse. She will be alright.”
Sam asked, “Okay. But, what is going on, Lee? You are not acting normally. You are acting scared. Really scared.”
Lee kept his back to Sam, as they two men walked. Lee said, “That is because I am scared, for very good reasons. Listen Sam, you have got to get away from me. It is not safe to be near me, right now.”
Sam offered, “Just tell me what is going on. Maybe I can help.”
Lee shook his head, as he responded, “The heat is just too much on this. The short answer is the Lovelace hammer of righteousness is about to hit me, and I am not sure why...”
“Anyway, you cannot help me on this. If you try, you will just get yourself killed. Like I said. You need to get away from me. A five hundred mile radius should be good start. But, I recommend getting to the other side of the planet, as quickly as possible. Besides, you won't believe me, if I told you the full truth.”
Sam looked at the back of Lee's head, as he suggested, “Try me. I can believe a lot.”
Lee kept his back to Sam, as they walked. Lee stated, “Not like this. I know how this is likely going to play out. I tell you the truth. You don't believe me. You stick around, get yourself kill, and likely me captured. So, cut the bullshit. You are one of the few friends I have in this life. And a good friend at that. I don't want to see you get hurt. Let alone killed, due to my own stupidity. You said you have friends and a girlfriend. Go to them, and use their help to get the hell away from me.”
Sam said, with warmth in his tone of voice, “Lee, I am truly touched by your sentiments, concerning my welfare. And I think this is the best time to show you something about me.”
Lee continued to have his back turned to Sam, as he asked, “What?”
Then, Lee heard Sam sneeze, from behind him.
Lee immediately stopped walking, as he thought, with concern that swiftly turned to worry, 'A sneeze?... Oh no... Which one?...'
Lee slow turned around, clockwise, and he saw, the young woman, River, looking up at him.
Lee was in so much emotional shock, that he did not react. Even his face was stuck in a, huh, expression. He was like a deer caught in the headlights, as he continued to look at River.
River had on a full red fake, fully groomed beard, like Sam's full groomed beard. Her hair tied back in a ponytail, the same way Sam tied his hair back. Her hair was dyed the same shade of red as Sam's hair. River was wearing Sam's clothing, which was several times bigger in size that her current physical body needed.
While still in emotional shock, Lee thought, 'Sam is River Tam. And all this time, she had gender bended into her male form, and used a fake beard. Such an obvious trick, and I missed it. They even had the same shade of dyed hair. And I didn't seen. I have been played since before I even got to this town. And I didn't even realize it.'
Lee then began to laugh, because he did not really feel like crying.
River did not say a word, as she let her friend laugh for several seconds.
While Lee began to calm down, as he stopped laughing, he said, “Sam. Tam. I should have seen that coming.”
River shrugged, as she replied, in a comforting tone of voice, “Lee, don't feel bad. I can be a very good actor.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. You clearly can.” He then teased, “You know. That fake beard looks so funny on you, when you are a woman.”
River giggled, as she answered, “I know.”
Lee commented, “And I see you went back to dying your hair red. I have been meaning to ask you about that. But, doing so, in front of the others, would have blown my cover.”
River said, “Yes. Asking me about my hair would have likely alerted the others. Still, the red hair helps people not recognize me. By the way. Thank you for showing me that option.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee thought, 'First, Bao. Then, the maids. And now this... The whams just keep on coming. And I guess I do not know you that well, after all.'
River took off her fake beard, and put it into one of her right side pants pocket. Next, she tighten her belt a few notches. After which, given their height differences, River looked up at Lee, as she commented, “It is not that bad. And you do know me a lot better than you think. You just did not know Sam was me.”
Lee took a few deep breaths. With him slowly letting out each breath. He then said, “Okay... Sorry, about that. I got lost in the moment. And I honestly forgot you could read minds.”
River said, “It is okay. It happens more often then most people think.”
Lee asked, “So, do I call you, River, from now on? Or, can I call you, Sam?”
River commented, “Either is fine.”
Lee replied, “Alright, Sam.”
River smiled, in response to Lee's comment.
Lee commented, “I take it that Chang, nor anyone else, knows about you befriending me?”
River said, “No. They do not. So, how do you feel?”
By then, the shock of the situation had begun to feel wear off for Lee. And Lee was beginning to feel better and calmer, as he thought about the upsides of his situation. He said, “Well, I honestly feel a lot better, now. My chances for survival have just dramatically gone up.”
River happily agreed, “That is true.”
Lee inquired, “I hope you don't take offense to this question. But, about your sanity? Because, as Sam, you acted like a pillar of sanity. You were practically the straight man of our two person act.”
River grinned, as she stated, “I know. I am much saner than I use to be. I got a lot of help. You even hinted at a few of the things that helped me, in your stories.”
Lee replied, “That is nice.”
River said, “By the way, thanks for that. I enjoy having my sanity back.”
Lee asked, “You're welcome. So, about the poker game? You did call me, as Sam, to cheer me up. And you tipped me off to Faye's cheating.”
River stated, “You won that game fairly. I tipped you to Faye, because she was cheating on my behalf. If I had said something, it would have raised questions. And you really needed to be cheered up. Sorry about scaring you like that. I know I have a bit of reputation.”
Lee said, “Now, that I think about, as River, you were always nice to me. And I just did not realize it was you. Looking back on what really happened, it is okay.”
River stated, “Glad to hear it.”
Lee commented, “I think it is academic that your girlfriend is, Chang.”
River joked, “Well, half the time.”
Both friends laughed, for a few seconds, at River's joke.
As they calmed down, Lee commented, “Given you read my mind, and you already know about the time loop, from our conversation with Chang and Annie. You must know some of the things I did there, besides what was discussed.”
River's lips curled into a mischievous smile, as she complimented, with mirth in her tone of voice, “Oh yes. And you are absolutely insane to pull some of the stunts you did during that time.”
Lee returned River's smile, as he joked, “It is only insane if I am caught.”
River let out a laugh. She then agreed, “True. And that ass joke you pulled on Revy and Rock was brilliant, and hilarious. I had to keep myself from laughing in your presence, the first time I read your mind, while you were thinking about that.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. I try. Anyway, I know you don't have a clear memory of that day, during the loop. But, what were you and Chang up to then. Or, more aptly. What were you planning to do, they day before? That you hinted with me, while you were Sam.”
River commented, “From what we planned, and what I pulled from your memory, we just spent a good time together, that day. By the way, not to sound like a hypocrite, but I admire that you respected my privacy.”
Lee replied, “It is okay. I know the telepathy you have has no real, off, switch.”
River said, “I am glad you realize that. Anyway, from what I can vaguely recall. And what I have pieced together, from reading your mind. Except for the time I was teaching you. Chang and I spent those days making love to each other every way possible, that two gender benders could.”
Lee admitted, with warmth in his tone of voice, “I envy you.”
River replied, “I know. And if we get out of this mess, Chang and I are always open to invitations.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he said, “I just may take you up on your offer.”
River giggled a little. She then asked, “So, since you are the idea man... Person... How do we deal with the maids?”
Lee answered, “My main plan, right now, is to run.”
River said, “That is not a plan. You even literally wrote entire books on the subject, that running is not a plan.”
Lee commented, “I know. Those books are the reason I am in this mess. And well, hiding does not work on the Bloodhound. And all the other plans would mean confronting her, and her student. And that would be suicide, or worse. So, my options are sort of a process of elimination, here.”
River replied, “You may have a point there. I have never seen you this scared over Revy, nor the others. You were not even this scared when confronting me, as River.”
Lee stated, “That is because you are only dangerous when provoked. And I can probably come up with a plan to handle the rest of them, if I had to. But, not the maids. Nor you, for that matter.”
River calmly said, “I am glad you realize that.”
Lee stated, “Still, what I don't get is why they are here for me... Well, I can understand Fabiola being upset with me. I did some things to her. But, those things weren't that bad. And I made sure the situation turned out well for her. It is Roberta, I don't understand. I repaired her body completely, and helped her regain her sanity. Much like I did for you. Also, I made sure Garcia fully recovered from his wounds that he sustained at the end of the Blood Trail arc. So, why is Roberta after me?”
River thought, with concerned, 'Besides my identity, this is one, of two, big issues, I am not sure how Lee is going to react too. I do not think Lee realizes what Lee did, and whom Lee did it too. But, since Lee is asking, I might as well answer the question.'
River calmly said, “I read some of their thoughts, while we were all in the bar. They are angry with you about what you did to their master. While you did help Garcia recover. You also did something horrible to him. Or, should I say, her?”
It took about a minute for Lee to think over his long story, on what he could have done to Garcia. Then, it hit him, as he face-palmed himself with his right hand, as he looked down between at the concrete side walk, between River and himself.
Lee blurted out, as River watched Lee emotionally go to pieces, and she telepathically sensed him go to mental pieces as well, at the same time, as Lee realized the depths of his stupidity, “Oh no... The throw away line at the end book three. I just did that as a gag. It was just a case of, why the hell not. And I threw it in. No wonder they are pissed off at me. I turned Garcia into a girl, with a spring of drowned girl curse.”
“Shit. I am dead. I am deader than dead. I am dead, ten times over. I am so dead, I might as well lay down in my own grave, and let you throw dirt on top of me. I am that dead.”
“Nobody hurts Garcia and lives... Well, except for Roberta. But, that a special case. And even she regrets shooting him... Still, those two badass woman will literally track me across existence itself, to exact their revenge on me.”
“It is just a matter of time.”
“Damn. Even death may not be an escape. I am sure Roberta would find a way to follow me, and bring me back, just so she could bring on the pain, and kill me again. Over and over again. And likely multiple times after that...”
He finished in a deflated, desperate tone of voice, “I am so screwed.”
Lee removed his right hand from his face, as a thought occurred to him. He turned to looked at River in her face. He asked, “You won't happen to have a reality device on you?”
River looked at Lee, in his eyes, as she stated, with a bit of sadness in her tone of voice, from seeing her good friend like this, “No. After Chang had his casino up and running, he even made me give him the one I originally used to get here. And Chang keeps a tight lease on those devices. They are in the casino.”
Lee cursed, “Damn. That would be the easiest way to escape the Bloodhound, for the time being. Though, I can see why. It would be disastrous if that technology got into the hands of some of the more savvier people, or organizations, on this planet.”
River stated, “I agree. And you do not need to run. I can take Roberta in a fight.”
Lee flatly countered, “No. I do not think you can. Now, that I think about it, you likely never saw the Black Lagoon series.”
River admitted, “I didn't have time. I was the one piloting the Serenity, while that series was an inflight movie run. The rest of the crew loved the series. When they found out that the Chang from the series was my girlfriend, I think they envied me. Hell, I know they envied me. And Mal didn't dare throw her off the ship, considering my relationship with her helped me with my sanity.”
Lee suggested, “Well, I apologize for depriving you of the opportunity of seeing that series. But, you really need to see that series. After you see that series, you will begin to understand how screwed I truly am. But, I need to inform you of who you would be facing. To give you the cliff notes, of whom you would be facing.”
River stated, “You do know what I am capable of.”
Lee realized, as he thought, 'I know your comment was meant as a statement, and not a question.'
River replied, “Yes. It is.”
Lee said, “Well, yes. I have a good idea of what you are capable of. So, keep in mind, that even before the upgrades I gave Roberta, she could take you in a fight. When it came to being a badass, the Bloodhound was already in a league of her own, even before I got my hands on her.”
River was taking their situation seriously, as she requested, “Please, explain.”
Lee responded, “Sure. No problem. Black Lagoon was filled with several badasses, but when those badasses talked about Roberta, her name was the one mentioned in hushed tones, behind closed doors. She was their dreaded monster under the bed. The scary thing in their closet. That one person they compared to everyone else, when it came to the last person you would want to meet, alone, in a dark alleyway.”
“When Balalaika confronted her, she brought her army with her. When Revy went after her, a second time, she literally called for help. This is the only time in the entire series that Revy openly asked for help about anything. And when Roberta was in the city, for a second time, Chang spent most of his time, surrounded by his bodyguards, while pulling everyone's strings to get her out of his city.”
“That is how dangerous Roberta is. And Fabiola, Roberta's student, whom you know is now an adult, is almost as dangerous as Roberta, herself. So, you would not be fighting just one badass, that could take you in a fight, you be fighting two of them, at once.”
“Still, how about an easier way to explain things to you? I am going to pull up everything I know about the maids, to the surface of my mind, and you just read my thoughts.”
River did as Lee suggested, and Lee watched as River's face paled in fright at what Lee was facing.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'It is really says something to watch, as a telepathic, super-genius, badass assassin goes sheet white in fear, from learning about who is after me.'
River began, “I had no idea...” Her voice then trailed off at realizing how dangerous the people she was planning to face were.
Lee said, “Now, you do. And you are wiser for the knowledge.”
River commented, with concern in her tone of voice, “Still, you don't have to run, Lee. I know how your mind works. I know what you are likely planning. And you have long been forced into the habit of planning to face your problems alone. Well, you do not have to do this alone. You are no longer alone. I am with you.”
Lee politely disagreed, in a sober tone of voice, “River, you are a telepath, but you clearly only read my surface thoughts. There is a lot of stuff you don't know about me, that I intentionally don't think about. And I am sure this is the case for other people, you know, as well. Still, as Sam, you were my friend. My good friend. And you still are my friend. Aren't you?”
River answered, “Yes. We are still friends.”
Lee said, in a somewhat quiet, sober, serious tone of voice, “Good. Though, I am a bit annoyed with this revelation, that you and Sam are the same person. I can move passed that. I am already working towards that, as we speak. Still, it is looking more likely, no matter the case, that I am not going to live very long. And I do not want you to get hurt. Let alone, killed. Go back to Chang, and screw each other anyway you want. I will deal with my own problems.”
Lee then offered, in a halfhearted tone of voice, “And when you two decide to have kids. You can name one of your kids after me. My real name. Which I am sure you know. Or, my alias, Lee. Either way. I would find it flattering.”
River was deeply touched by Lee's offer. She held back tears, as she stated, with concern in her tone of voice, “Lee, I am not just going to leave you to die.”
Lee admitted, “River, there is not much you can do. I am have several crazy chicks after my hide. You just happen to be one of the nicer ones. Hell, I am basically dealing with crazy chicks all the time. And this is not counting the cancer that is slowly eating me alive. The fact I am still breathing is a minor miracle.”
River thought, 'Now, to deal with the one other bombshell issue, am I sure that Lee does not want to talk about. But, we need to discuss, between someone catches. This is likely the only catch with have. With no one, I sense, around, to over hear us.' River calmly asked, “Does you include yourself?”
Lee stayed silent, as he looked away from River.
River said, “I read your mind regularly. I know what you are thinking upstairs. And that is why you like writing about gender bending. And it explains why you used those magic packets, that Revy has, in the time loops.”
Lee turned to look at River. He frowned, as he flatly stated “That is a low blow... Okay, I admit I do not like my body. I hate my body. I loath my body. I used writing to work through many issues I have. And not just that one. That is why I am precognitive. Because, I would rather be anywhere, than here.”
Lee then both his hands, with his right and left index finished, to point at his chest.
River remained silent, as she was not sure how best to reply to Lee open admission.
A few seconds later, Lee dropped his hands back to his side.
Lee looked at River, as he continued, in a sad tone of voice, “And I never had the money, nor the opportunity to do anything about this. Let alone afford to treat the cancer that is slowly killing me.”
Lee then took a deep breath, and he slowly let it out. After which, Lee went onto say, in an even sadder tone, than before, with pain lacing his voice, “Though, through all the hell I have been through, the one thought that has kept me sane, in this waking nightmare, that has been my existence. And I am not talking about these last few months. But, my entire life. Was one thought. That no matter how much suffering and pain I endured, there was a finite end to it. That I will die. That I will eventually my soul would be free to move on from this living hell.”
“Those three words. I will die. Kept me from going insane. And the reason I did not kill myself, was that was in no rush to go to hell. Which I figure, is where I am going, no matter what I do. For me, I was just playing out a screwy, bad hand of cards, that I was dealt by a crooked dealer called fate. Along with this, curiosity kept me going, to see what will happen next.”
“When I learned that I was going to die of cancer, my first thoughts were that this nightmare, that is my life, would finally be over in a matter of months. That my issues would soon resolve themselves, even if it was in death. And I would deal with my problems in hell, when I got there.”
“I was even planning on how to make the most of my last days in my current life.”
“Then, this mess started. If the others had been as low key as you were, then likely nothing would have happened to me. Cancer is one of the worst ways to die. Most of those after me would have likely been satisfied to have me die by my body literally eating itself alive. And I would have died a quiet death at home.”
River could no longer hold back her tears. She shed a few, as she sorrowfully commented, “That is a very sad way to look at life.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, though his voice held no passion to its tone, “Well, I have since come to realize that I want to live. But, wanting to live, and living, are two different things, and my time is quickly running out.”
River used her right hand to wipe away the tears from her eyes. She then lowered her right hand back to her side. She looked back up at Lee, in his eyes. She suggested, “We could always talk Chang about this. I know you are open to taking his offer. Which I helped talk to him about. And I read from you mind, that you are open to taking you. And I would give you my word. He would help you, if you asked him too. I would make sure of that.”
Lee responded, “I respect you, River. I even care about you. But, I am not so sure about Chang. Though, he made me a nice offer.”
River said, “Yes. He did. It is a good offer. And Chang would keep up his end of the bargain, and so would you.”
Lee inquired, “And you read my mind, about why I did not immediately take his offer?”
River sadly admitted, “Yes.”
Lee pointed out, “So, you realize that Chang knows better than to cross Roberta?”
River conceded, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Yes.”
Lee sighed, as he asked, “You know the worst part about all this?”
River sadly commented, “Yes. I am reading your mind. But, say it out loud. It will make you feel better.”
Lee calmly stated, “Thank you, River. And the worst part is the hypocrisy. If all those after me were not so hypocritical, in this situation, I would not be so against them having their revenge against me. Even Revy's, or Roberta's, revenge. Unfortunately, they are damn hypocrites on this matter, and they don't even realize their true hypocrisy on these issues.”
River said, “But, I do. And it is only human nature.”
Lee agreed, with a mix of frustration and bitterness mixed into his emotional state, and tone of voice, “Exactly. I am being judge by human nature that I, nor them, can help doing. You cannot stop people from having an imagination. From dreaming and creating stories. It is part of our nature. And it is a great part. And those are me are hypocrites because of that. When I was with them, watching the Tron Legacy movie together, in the theater, at the Devil's Hotel. I saw their faces as the characters on screen suffered through their trials, and achieved their goals.”
“They enjoyed watching that movie more than I did. It is all entertainment for us, and thought we all knew better, we could help ourselves. And we all know those characters are just as real as you, me, and everyone else, they are just located in another reality, in the multiverse.”
Lee tone of voice then became very firm, thought a bit shaking, on the verge of breaking, as he continued, “In my heart, I am not a sadist. I like happy endings. But, for the main characters to achieve their goals, they had to suffer through their journeys. That is just the way it is. That is how life here, is, in this reality. And there is no way I can explain that to the those after me. They just would not want understand those facts.”
River felt intense sadness, as she empathized with her friend's plight. She responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “I understand. And I can vouch that they are not willfully blind on the issue. They just do not understand that situation, like you and I do.”
Lee signed, as he said, in a sad tone of voice, “Yes. Mores the pity.”
Lee looked away from River, as he took a few deep breaths.
River could see that Lee's poker mask was completely shattered, and the look on Lee's face showed he did not know what he was going to do.
Lee turned back to River, as he said, “River, I want you to know, that whatever happens, I thank you for your friend with me. Still, I have to head back to the hotel, to collect my belongings, and get something to eat. Before the maids get there. Once I do that, I am not sure what I am going to do. I am overwhelmed. It is just too much for me, right now. And if I think about it too hard, I feel like I am going to crack.”
River stated, “I understand. I will see you back at the hotel, in little while. Likely, half an hour, or so. I need to do some thinking about this, as well. Besides, my car is parked by what is left of the Rats Nest.”
“If you are back at the hotel, when I get there, we will see what we can do, before the maids get there. If you are not there, when I arrive, I will try to help you on my end. Chang has an interest in you. In a good way. So, that is a good sign. And I have his ear, so all is not lost.”
Lee said, “Thank you, River. You have been a true friend.”
River smiled at Lee, as she responded, in slightly quiet tone of voice, “I know. And you really do deserve more than one. Good luck.”
Lee returned River's smile, as he replied, “You as well, River.”
The two friends then parted ways, as they headed for their vehicles.
As River walked out of sight, Lee turned around, and continued to walk to where he parked his car.
While Lee walked, he thought, 'I need to get to the hotel, pack up, check out. I will decided what to do after I am ready to go, and I have something to eat at the hotel restaurant. I am glad I filled up the tank to my car, this morning, before I came to the Rats Nest.”
“Now, it is forty-five minute walk to the hotel, from the bar. Even if they knew where the hotel was. Which they don't.'
'And these two are known to walk, and take their time. I am guessing that I have at least an hour, if not more time, before they show up. So, I need to take the opportunity to eat, before I start running. Because, I will likely never stop running... At least until the cancer kills me.'
'But, to be honest, dying of cancer is a far better death, than allowing those two to get their hands on me... On that thought, turning myself over to Revy and Rock would be a far better fate than letting the maids have me... I have much too think about. Still, if I am lucky, River might come up with something, when she meets me back at the hotel.'
Lee turned a corner, on the sidewalk. A few minutes later, he reached his pink Cadillac, with the roof and windows being down.
A minute afterward, Lee was inside his car, driving his vehicle, down the road, to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
At that moment, inside the De La Plata Podrido Police Department, in the open lobby cubical area of the police department, Police Chief Pedro Del Soto had just gotten a cup of coffee in his mug, in his right hand, as he was walking back to his office, on of his officer walked up to him.
The officer said, in spanish, “Chief, I have a message from, Lee.”
Pedro requested, in spanish, “What is it?”
The officer stated, “The maids are in town. He said that you would understand.”
At first, Pedro did not register what Lee's words had meant. But, as he was about to take a sip of his coffee, he immediately realized what Lee meant with his message.
Pedro's eyes went wide, as he face paled, while he dropped his mug to the floor.
The mug shattered on impact with the floor, spilling coffee and pieces of porcelain, on the linoleum tiled ground.
The officer noticed this. He turned to look at Pedro's face, as he asked, with concern in his voice, “What is it, sir? What did Lee mean by, the maids?”
Pedro calmed himself, as he thought, 'I have to remain calm while in front of my subordinates. Though, I am freaking out on the inside. I knew there was a chance that the Lovelace maids would come for Lee. And Lee said, maids, not maid. Meaning both of them. Roberta and Fabiola are in town, together, looking for Lee. This situation is too hot for me... For my boys... Lee is on his own. But, I have to say something to my subordinates, whom have a clue as to what is going on. Or, they could end up in danger, even if I skip town, on my own.'
Pedro said, “Lee meant those maids.”
The officer inquired, “What maids?”
Pedro questioned, “You know who is staying at the Devil's Hotel?”
The officer answered, “Yes sir. That is why we avoid that hotel, and the casino... Oh crap! Those maids! Rober...”
Pedro immediately put a right hand over the officer's mouth, as he quietly warned, “Do not say those names out loud. Do not speak of the devil, for that bitch, and her student, may suddenly appear.” He then removed his right hand from the officer's mouth.
The officer asked, with worry, and concern, in his tone of voice, “What do we do?”
Pedro answered, in a firm tone of voice, “Simple. We get out of town before the fireworks start. It is no secret that Lee has ties to us. Ties to me. The maids will eventually come here looking for answers. We do not want to be present when they arrive here.”
“I am taking an immediate, long term leave. Quietly tell those that know what is going on, that the maids are in town. We have to keep a few people here, for appearances. I hate doing that, but it must be done. For those who know, they can take a long term leave, as well.”
The officer nodded once, as he responded, “Yes sir.”
Pedro commented, “And get someone to clean up this mess.” He then rushed to his office, to get a few things, before he left town, in his car.
(_)
Five minutes later, Pedro was in his car, heading out of town.
As Pedro drove his car, he thought, 'I am not even stopping by my home. I am out of here, right now. I have an escape plan, and I am using that plan, right now. Besides, I am sure I left everything turned off in my home, with the doors locked. So, it will be find in my absence.”
Meanwhile, several other civilian cars, pickup trucks, and mini-vans, from the police station, filled with staff, were following him out of town.
Pedro noticed the other vehicles in his rearview mirror, as he thought, with concern, 'I hope they have their escape plans. Because mine is a one person deal.'
A seconds after Pedro turned a corner on the street, and he drove down one of the roads that would lead him to the only bridge to the mainland, he noticed, from the right side of the road, two women, standing beside each other, on the nearby sidewalk.
While Pedro passed by the women, he saw the two of them were dress in black and white maids outfits. One had long purple hair. The other had long green hair.
It took all his willing not to floor the gas pedal, as he thought, with fear, 'Oh crap! That is them. They are real, and Lee saw them already.'
'Though, I do not think they saw me. But, they are real. And they are here, in town. I have to get out of town, now! But, if I floor the gas pedal, it might attract their attention. Though, I believe, that once my boys, and I, reach the bridge off the island, and into the mainland, we will be fine.'
'And when I get to my safe-house, I will say a prayer for, Lee. Because, with those two after him, he is going to need it. And there is nothing else I can do to help him.'
Pedro kept driving. He soon made it to the bridge, and onto the mainland, along with a number of his other officers. As he crossed the bridge, he noticed that the sun was starting to set, in front of him, towards the west.
Pedro thought, 'Talk about a metaphoric symbol for the end of this part of my life.'
Pedro then soon made it to the mainland. At the intersection, across the bridge, from the mainland, Pedro came to a stop at the stop sign. He then turned to drive south, down the coastal road, as he headed for where he planned to hide for the next several months of his life. Until the heat died down, for him. Or, he came up with another plan of his own.
(_)
Meanwhile, As Roberta and Fabiola stood on the sidewalk, watching the convoy of cars pass by them, Fabiola commented, “Do you get the feeling that something is going on, that we are not aware of?”
Roberta flatly answered, “Yes. Now, let us find directions to the Devil's Hotel.”
(_)
As Pedro, and half his police force were leaving De La Plata Podrido, on the north part of the island, Lee had already parked his car at the hotel parking lot. He then made his way through the front lobby, up one of the elevators, to the third floor, and he swiftly used his hotel key to enter his hotel suite.
After entering his suite, he turned on the ceiling light, as he shut door, and locked deadbolt to the door, behind.
Lee quickly went over, and knelt down under his bed. He pulled out two items, which he set onto the bed.
Lee stood up, and looked at the two large items on his bed.
Lee checked the digital clock on the nightstand. With the clock stating it was six twenty-five PM.
Lee turned back to the two large items on his bed. One was his large gym bag, the other was a slightly smaller suitcase, than his gym bag, that he had bought, a few weeks ago.
Lee had bought the small suitcase as part of an escape plan, that he was now starting to implement.
Lee thought, 'I am glad I did not buy many clothes. Because, for part of my plan, I need to put everything I have into my suit case. Also, I need to get a few plastic bags, I have, for my toothbrush, shaving items, and a few other items. Though, since all my clothes are folded, or hung to where I could fold them, this should not take long.'
Lee went to work, as he opened the suitcase. He pulled out his clothes that were in the chest of drawers, and set them in the suitcase, in a specific order. So, he could get to what he needed, without digging to much into his suitcase.
Next, Lee retrieved his suits from the hanging rod. He removed the hangers, and he neatly placed his suits in his suitcase.
Then, he pulled out some small, plastic bags, and collective his toiletries in this. Such as his toothbrush, comb, toothpaste.
After that, he collected a few other items, such as his dress shoes. He then place the plastic bags, and other items around the interior sides of the suitcase, so, he could get to them, should he need too, without messing up his clothing.
Lee checked to make sure everything was out of chest of drawers. Once that was done. He closed the chest of drawers.
Then, Lee turned back to his bed, and finished packing.
When, Lee was finished packing, he was lucky that all his stuff barely fit into the suitcase. But, all his clothing and other items were able to did fit in the suitcase.
Lee made sure the latches on the suitcase were secure, and would not allow the suitcase to burst open.
He then grabbed his gym bag and unzipped it.
He put the suitcase inside the bag, with it was sitting up on it's bottom side, with the top of the suitcase set against the opening of the gym bag. And he set his black fedora hat, and gray fedora hat, near the front of the gym bag, while placing his dress shoes in the back of the gym bag. Lee then zipped closed his gym bag.
Lee thought, 'Fortunately. As I planned, when I bought the suitcase. This gym bag is big enough that unless a person looks closely, they will not notice the suitcase inside it. Now, to deal with some personal business, before cleaning up, and heading downstairs to check out.'
Lee then walked into his bathroom, to relieve himself.
A few minutes later, as he walked back into the bedroom area of his suite, he pulled out a spare trash bag he had, and he collected the bottles of water, food. Including the food in his small refrigerator and freezer. Along a few other items that needed to be junked. He put these items into this garbage bag, and tired up the bag.
He set the bag down, as he walked back to his bed.
He collected his second hotel key from the drawer in the nightstand, and placed the TV remote on the nightstand. He also picked up his cool looking sunglasses from the nightstand, and he put them inside his left jacket pocket.
Along with this, Lee looked over at the clock on the nightstand. It was six thirty-five PM.
Lee thought, 'It only took me ten minutes to do all that. That is great. I am making good time. Now, to check out of here.'
Lee then collected his gym bag.
He carried his gym bag by it's strap, on his right shoulder. He then was over, and picked up his trash bag, which he put in his right hand.
When he reached the door, used his right hand to unlock the deadbolt. After which, Lee turned around, and looked at the room that he had called home for so long, for about a minute.
Lee thought, 'This was a good place to sleep, and think. I am going to miss it.'
Lee then turned back around.
As Lee opened door, as he turned off the light switch, to the ceiling light.
He walked out into the hallway, shutting the door behind him.
Lee then made his way to the elevator bay to the lobby. By the entrance to the front elevator bay, there was a large trash can. Lee dumped his trash back into the bag in the large can.
With that done, Lee made his way to the elevators, and took one downstairs to the front lobby, so he could check out of the hotel.
(_)
A couple of minutes later, Lee walked up to the check in desk, he looked around the room, and saw that none of Revy's crew were in the lobby.
Lee thought, 'At this time of the evening, they are all usually in the hotel restaurant, having dinner, anyway. Which I am going to do, very soon, before I make the most important decision of my life. How I want to go out.'
Lee saw there were no other customers at the desk, as he reach the check in desk.
As Lee came to a stop in front of the counter of the check in desk, with the strap of his gym bag slung over his right shoulder, he looked at the two clerks, in uniforms, whom were on duty, across the counter from himself.
A second later, one of the two clerk on duty, looked up at him, as the man asked, in english, “Can I help you sir?”
Lee calmly stated, in english, “Yes. My name is, J.D. Lee. I would like to check out.”
The clerk said, “I am sorry to hear that you are leaving. But, we hope you had a pleasant stay here at the Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he stated, “I won't say it was pleasant, but it was enjoyable.”
The clerk replied, “Good. And we hope you may return sometime.”
Lee responded, “If I am able too do so. I just might. And I will be recommending this hotel to others, for it quality rooms and services.”
The clerk smiled, as he said, “We are happy to hear that.”
Lee pulled out, from a pocket, and turned in his two keys to his hotel room. He then set them down on the counter between him, and the clerk, as he inquired, “Here are the keys to my hotel room. Is there anything that you need me to sign?”
The clerk looked at the keys, sitting on the counter, and the room number on each of the keys. He then looked back at Lee, as he answered, “No. This will be all.”
Lee requested, “Before I leave. Can you watch my gym bag, while I go get something to eat at the hotel restaurant?”
The clerk replied, “Sure.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
The clerk responded, “You're welcome.”
Lee then handed the clerk his gym bag, and the clerk set the bag on the other side of the desk.
After which, Lee turned to his left, and he walked towards the hallway that lead to the hotel restaurant.
A minute later, as he entered the hotel restaurant and bar, he looked around.
He did not see River, anywhere, in neither of her gender forms. Though, he did see Revy, Rock, and their entire group, at their usual tables, by the stage. And Revy did not have her pistols with her.
Lee then walked over to his usual place at the bar counter, and sat down.
From behind the bar counter, Melvin noticed Lee, as he walked up to stand across the counter from Lee.
Melvin faced Lee, as he said, “Hi Lee.”
Lee turned to Melvin, as he thought, 'Best not to mention that I am leaving, or the girls might overhear me.' He replied, “Hey Melvin. I will have club sandwich, with potato chips, and glass of lemonade.”
Melvin responded, “Sure. No problem.”
Melvin turned, and went to fill Lee's order.
As Lee watched Melvin walk away, he thought, 'I am going to miss Melvin. He is living proof that that there were some actually sane, reasonable people in the badass mafias of Roanapur. And I wish that I could wish him luck in his continued hiding from Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow. But, stating that, here, might blow both our covers.'
'Still, I hope River shows up soon. I could use the company. As I think about some very important decisions, that I now have to make, about my personal life, very, very soon.'
Lee then stared across the counter, at the bottles on the shelves, on the left wall of the room, as he quietly waited for both his meal, and River to come. As Lee did so, he deeply thought about what he was going to do next.
(_)
Half an hour later, across the road from the eastern beach of the island, as the twilight of the day completely faded, Eda and Yolanda were in the back of their burger van, as they were cleaning up, and closing for the night.
They then heard the window bell ring.
Eda said, in spanish, “Coming!” She thought, 'I told Yolanda we should not have extended our business hours to six-thirty PM. But, at the time, she did make a convincing argument, in that it would attract more of the supper crowd. And while we have not caught the writer. We have make a nice bit of change from this burger van. So, this trip has not been a total waste.'
As Eda walked up to the order window, on the upper right side of the van, by the sidewalk curb, she commented, “We are starting to close, but we will see if you can still fill your order.”
When Eda reached the window, and she saw who is was, she did a double-take. It was the two Lovelace maids. She snapped, in english, “What are you two doing here?!”
As the maids stood on the sidewalk, in front of the order window of the food truck. They calmly looked up at Eda.
Fabiola calmly greeted, in english, “Hello Eda. I take it that Yolanda is in back.”
From the back of the truck, Yolanda asked, in english, “Who is it?”
Eda turned to her, as she answered, “The maids. Roberta, and Fabiola. Both of whom are dressed to kick some serious ass.”
The maids giggled a little from Eda's commented.
Yolanda calmly replied, “Really? I will close up. You handle them.”
Eda thought, 'It is so nice to have competent, sane friends.' She turned back to the two maids, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, to handle these two lunatics.'
Eda inquired, in a more calmer tone of voice, than before, “So, what are you two doing here?”
Roberta calmly said, with a hint of aggression in her voice, in english, “We are after the writer of those stories that affected us, and the master?”
Eda mentally grumbled, 'What idiot told them about the stories and the writer? Yolanda and I, will find out later. And we will have their ass. But, for now, we have to keep these two from destroying the town, as they look for the writer. Though, I make as well ask the question. It might save me some time finding the idiot that did tell them. And I would like to know why they would be after the writer, in the first place.'
Eda questioned, “Who told you about the writer, and the stories? We all agreed to keep that a secret from you, because we didn't you to destroy this city, looking for him? And what did he do to you, to have you come all this way, after him?”
Fabiola commented, “It does not matter how we know. Just that we know someone harmed Garcia.”
Eda thought, 'So, they are hear over Garcia. That is not a surprised. Though, what did the writer do to Garcia.' She then thought about the story. A few seconds later, Eda mentally realized, 'The gender bending curse. No wonder they are pissed. Still, I need to try to defuse the situation.'
Eda inquired, in the most sincere tone of voice she could muster, for the given situation, “Roberta, given how wrecked your body, and mind, were at the end of the Grey Fox incident. Could you just consider what happened to Garcia to be a trade off for what was personally given to you? And let bygones, be bygones? With you two going back home?”
Fabiola snorted, as she said, “Nice try, Eda. But, no.”
Roberta flatly answered, “Like Fabiola, my answer is, no, as well. Though, I will take what he has done for me, personally, into account, when we have our revenge on him.”
Eda sternly cautioned, “Fine. But, we did not want to create an interdimensional incident. The series, and the stories, obviously exist here. Our bare asses are hanging on in the wind here. If we are not careful, we could attract the wrong kind of attention, towards us.”
Roberta smirked, as she stated, with a touch of venom in her tone of voice, “What is the matter, Eda? Are you afraid to face your red, white, and blue hydra?”
Eda flatly said, “Yes. If they are anything like back home, they could be very, very dangerous. And that is just one government, of many, here.”
Fabiola thought, 'A fight between us will get us nowhere.'
To keep a fight from happening, Fabiola spoke up, in a neutral tone of voice, “Be that as it may. What matters now is that we know about the stories, and the writer. And we intend to find him, and have our revenge.”
Eda deadpanned, “That line forms to the left. And from what I understand, Revy called first dips on the writer's ass.”
While continuing to give Eda a dangerous smile, Roberta commented, in a calm, even tone of voice, “I believe the line will part for me. And so will, Revy. But first, we heard about a man in town that I would like to meet. His name is, Lee. I would like to know more about this man. I even want meet him.”
Eda thought, with worry, 'Dead lord, why would these two walking death machines be after, Lee?'
Eda requested, “May I ask, what you want to know about, Lee?”
Roberta questioned, “So, you know, Lee?”
Eda answered, “Yes. He is a regular customer here for lunch. He is always polite, and a good tipper.” She mentally added, 'And he was not that bad in bed. But, I am not going to let you two know that.'
Roberta responded, “Interesting. The reason I am interested in him was that I heard that he beat River in a million dollar poker game. Someone beating a telepathic genius, such as River, catches my interest. So, what can you tell me about him?”
Eda mentally cursed, 'Damn you, Revy and Chang, for getting Lee into this mess.”
Eda stated, “Well, first of all, Lee is just a nice guy, whom is down on his luck. From what I understand, he is wanted by the law up north, over a construction deal gone bad, and owed taxes. Still, he is very clever. Most of us figured that out, after he beat River at the poker game. Though, the one thing that can be said about, Lee, is that underneath his slightly rough edges, he is a true U.S. southern gentleman. He can even dress, and act the part. When he needs too. We found that out, as well, as a few other things, at his poker game with River.”
Eda thought, 'Actually, I found out that during our date. But, I kept it to myself. Except for talking to Yolanda about our date. And I believe she saw Lee, as he picked me up, for our date. Though, the morning, after my date, Yolanda and I both decided not to mention that side of Lee, to the others. Until much later. During his poker game, with River.'
Roberta asked, “What does Lee look like?”
Eda thought, 'I might as well tell them. They will find out, anyway.' Eda answered, “Lee has short, black hair. He is caucasian america. While his clothing varies, he always wears a blue cloth jacket, a blue baseball cap, and large glasses.”
Eda watched as Roberta dropped her grin.
Both maids looked at each other, and then they turned their heads back to face Eda.
Eda thought, with worry, 'This is not good...'
Fabiola quickly questioned, “Does Lee have a bearded, male, redheaded friend, with a ponytail?”
Eda thought, 'Oh crap. They already met them both. And they did not realize that it was Lee, at the time. But, why didn't Lee just introduce himself to them? They are not that dangerous, except for those they target.'
Eda replied, “Yes. His name is Sam. They are good friends with each other. They are thick as thieves.”
Fabiola responded, with disbelief in her voice, “Lee was right by us, the entire time... Wait a minute, Lee and Sam never came out of the men's restroom.”
Roberta growled, “Lee played us... Even the bartender was in on it.”
Eda inquired, “Are you talking about the Rats Nest?”
Fabiola smirked, as she said, “Yes... What is left of it.”
Eda warned, “You better not have killed any of them.”
Fabiola spat out, “Well, they ran, while we dealt with some idiot gang members.”
Eda replied, “That is fine. As long as those three are okay.” She mentally added, 'Sam and Lee are nice. And the few times I have been to the Rats Nest, the bartender was nice to me. And good bartenders, whom can handle us, are a rare kind. And this town has at least two good bartenders. The one at the Rats Nest, and Melvin at the Devil's Hotel bar.'
Roberta forcefully, though not loudly, stated, “Lee knows we are here. He is going to be running. We have lost the element of surprise.”
Eda mentally wondered, 'Why would Lee immediately run front them, when he first saw them?... Unless, he knew who they were, beforehand... He may have known who I was, beforehand... Lee is the writer. I was not fucking him. He was fucking me... And skull fucking all of us.'
'And he did such a damn good job of it, that nobody around him realized it... Still, to be fair, it was I who asked him out on our date. And he was a perfect gentleman for the entire time. Even in bed. I would have asked questions if he turned me down. And he likely realized that. Besides, a guy like that would be crazy to turn down a hot blond with my reputation.'
'And while, he probably deserves some punishment for his actions. After getting to know Lee. I feel he does not deserve what these two have in mind for him.'
'So, I need to try to save him, or buy him time to escape, from these two bitches. While giving myself the chance to find him first, and talk to him, before any of the others reach him.'
Roberta requested, in a low, dangerous voice, “Now Eda, where is the location of the Devil's Hotel?”
Eda said, “I will tell you. The hotel is the south part of the island.”
Eda then gave them directions. She then maids turned and walked away from the food truck.
When the two women were out of earshot of Roberta's enhanced hearing, Eda quickly shut the window teller window to the food truck. She then turned to the back of the inside of the truck, as she look at Yolanda.
Yolanda noticed Eda looking at her. Yolanda calmly said, “I guess the meeting went well, considering we are still alive.”
Eda thought, 'I guess she did not pay much attention to the conversation.' She responded, “Yes. But, both I and the maids, at the same time, realized that Lee is the writer. And we have to go to the Devil's Hotel, and get to Lee first. So, we can help him.”
Yolanda casually stated, “I can see Lee being the writer. Yet. I do not understand why you are helping him? He literally screwed you.”
Eda smirked, as she said, “I know. But, he was such a complete gentleman about it.”
Yolanda laughed, for a few seconds, at her friend's comment.
Eda went onto say, “Anyway, I gave the maids directions to Chang's casino, instead of the Devil's Hotel. We need to get to the Devil's Hotel and find, Lee. Maybe we can save Lee from them, and Revy's group.”
“That being said. I have a general idea of what Revy, and the others, have planned for Lee. He would likely survive the experience, with most of his sanity intact. But, if the maids get their hands on him, there is likely not going to be enough of him left to bury in cigar box.”
By then, Yolanda has calmed down. Yolanda then turned off the electricity to the fryers, as she replied, “I see your point. Personally, I am more than happy to help you, and Lee. I like what Lee did for me. I got my lost eye, and my youth back. He can have my help, and me, if he wants, anytime.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she asked, “That is what I thought. If I see him, I will be sure to tell him. So, how long on the fryer?”
Yolanda answered, “Ten minutes until I can get grease cooled, and everything locked down.”
Eda thought, 'Ten minutes to finish. And five minutes to get there. That is plenty of time. And work will go faster if I assist.' She offered, “I will help. Then, we are heading for the Devil's Hotel. And I hope that we get there in time to help, Lee.”
The two women then prepped their food truck for travel.
(_)
At that moment, across town, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee had finished his dinner, and he was still trying to figure out what he was going to do about the situation he was in.
He held his glass of lemonade, with his left hand. He swallowed some lemonade from his glass. He then set his lemonade back down on the counter, in front of himself.
Lee thought, 'I am running out of time. The maids will likely be here in less than an hour. And River has yet to show up here. Also, the more I think about it, using my car to run will likely not work for long. The Lovelace maids have reality devices. And I don't... I am not going to be able to out run them.'
Lee turned around, in his stool, to look at the stage, he then saw that most of Revy and Rock's group had finished their meals, and left the room for the evening. The only left, that Lee saw, was Rock and Revy at one table. Along with Ranma, Akira and Natsuru at another table.
Lee mentally wondered, as he began to formulate a very insane plan, 'Hmm... The only women of Revy and Rock's group, that are still here, are Revy and Rock, themselves, along with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru... They would be far more merciful than the maids. And those five together, out of their group, is the best combination I am going to get, with turning myself in to them. Rock, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru are levelheaded, generally good natured, and kind. Revy is the only hothead of the five. So, that will help my chances of survival a lot.'
'I would prefer to go with Chang's offer. But, as I told River, Chang is not going to cross the maids. But, with them fighting over me, it would by time to give River and Chang time to figure something out. Thought, it would be a coin toss if my plan work.'
Lee cracked a grin, as he mentally reflected, 'Though, taking chances is the whole point of being a gambler... Still, I am starting to get tired of taking chances...'
'So, how do I turned myself in to them? I could just walk up to them, and confess. It would be that easy. But, doing so would completely lack any class, nor tact. And they would feel cheated in their hunt, and thus likely put them in a bad mood. And that is the last thing I want to do...'
'I have to make them work for it, but my effort be easy enough for them to figure out on their own...”
Lee then noticed, the karaoke singing, which had been hearing during dinner. That he had long since gotten use to, as background noise, in the restaurant, at present time in the evening.
Lee looked beyond Revy, Rock, Ranma, Akira, and Nataru, as he focused on the stage, behind them. He saw a male customer on stage, doing a decent job singing a rock song. And he noticed there was no line by the steps, on the left side of the stage.
Lee continued his thoughts, 'That might work. And I know just the song to sing. If I am going down, I am going down in style.'
Lee turned to Melvin, as he said, “Hey Melvin.”
Melvin turned to Lee, as he replied, “Yes”
Lee requested, “Is there a list tonight, for the karaoke machine?”
Melvin replied, “No. You can go ahead.”
Lee said, “Thanks.”
Lee got out of his stool, and walked onto the stage, from the side steps. He made his way steps on the left side of the stage. There was no still no line there.
By the time, Lee reached the steps, the customers whom had been sining his song, had finished, he put away his microphone, back where he had found it, and he was heading off stage.
As soon as the man was off stage, Lee walked up the steps, and across the stage, to the karaoke machine.
When Lee reached the karaoke machine, he selected the rock song he wanted to sing. The version of the song he picked was the full seven minute, fifty second version. Which he long since master in singing, during his time in the time loop. Due to the face the song was one of his favorites, with the music and lyrics speaking to him.
Next, Lee picked up a wireless microphone.
Lee then walked onto the center of the stage. He turned to face audience, with his microphone in his right hand, being held near his mouth, while the ceiling stage lights facing him.
As the music started, Lee watched for the proper time. Given he had memorized the lyrics to the song, Lee did not even use the video screens, showing the when to sing the lyrics, as without missing a beat, Lee began singing, and dancing to the song, Twilight Zone, by Golden Earring.
The entire audience soon became shocked at how well Lee was singing, and dancing to the song.
And Lee let his body flow with the music, as he sang the lyrics, on time, and in key.
(_)
At that moment, across town, three women, wearing their usual, casual clothing, had finally gotten around to checking out a lead they had been meaning to follow up on.
They had parked their car nearby their destination, and walked inside the building they were intent on finding answers from.
As they open the doors to the front entrance of the De La Plata Podrido Police Department, and walked inside, Jenny commented, “I am glad we are finally doing this.”
Dutch said, “We would have done it sooner, if Benny had not be so slow in eating, at the hotel bar.”
Benny defended, “I like to enjoy my meal, and at least we are finally here.”
Janet turned to Benny, as she said, “I know honey. And I like how you take your time in other activities, as well.”
Benny teased, “We will work on those activities, later.”
Dutch chuckled at Janet and Benny's comments, for the next few seconds. She then softly commented, at a tone of voice, only the three of them would hear, “Still, remember the plan, and our cover story.”
Janet and Benny nodded in agreement.
Benny softly mentioned, “One thing about change that I am happy about, is Janet taught us how to get most, unsuspecting men, to eat out of our hands, by turned on some feminine charm.”
Janet quietly complimented, “You were both such good students.”
Benny softly replied, “Thank you.”
Dutch commented, “I appreciate that.”
As all three women made it to the front desk of the police station, the tall, male police officer, acting as receptionist, for that shift, silently looked down at them.
Janet calmly lied, in english, “Hello. We are detectives from America. We could use you assistance.”
The police officer thought, 'Why not? At least I know english. And it is always nice to help some hot women.' He said, in a calm tone of voice, “Sure. What can I help you with? We are kind of short staffed, right now. So, please bear with us.”
Janet answered, “We are investigating a J. D. Lee for possible criminal actions in the U.S., and we learned that he has a connection to your Police Chief. Please, understand we have no interest in embarrassing your Chief. Nor, your department. We are just looking into Lee's past.”
The police officer replied, “We appreciate the discretion on your part. Since that is your approach, what do you want to know?”
Janet asked, “How did Lee meet your Chief of Police?”
The police officer answered, “It all started with the Chief's brother. This is not widely known, and given that it has changed, I guess it is okay to tell you. The Chief's brother use to run the local mafia here. And even though they were on two sides of the law, they still kept in contact. From what I hear, they even shared the same tastes in anime, and crazy fiction on the web. The mob boss even sometimes joked this island city was like a Thailand island city from one of their favorite anime series.”
That caused all three women to raise an eyebrow in interest.
The police officer continued, “Then, one afternoon, for some reason the Chief's brother had Lee brought to him. Something about a wild chase the night before. Lee convinced him to the Devil's Hotel.”
“Something happen there. I do not know what. Maybe he met the devil. I don't know. The next day the Chief's brother dissolves his organization, gives away most of his wealth, leaves the island, and joins the priesthood. And most of his men left the island, as well. His brother even gave the Chief his beach house. And he gave his pink convertible to Lee.”
“The Chief wanted to know what happened to his brother, so he had Lee come in the next day. To be fair, Lee did willing come to the station, of his own free will.”
“They talked in private, in the Chief's office. Later that day, they went to the hotel he was staying at. When the Chief got back, he started acting very strangely. All he would say is that demons now lived in the Devil's Hotel. And that he, and Lee, were trying to keep the city in one piece. And the Chief gave us all order than under no circumstances were we to approach the women staying at that hotel, unless given direct orders by himself.”
Janet requested, “Can we speak to the Police Chief Del Soto?
The police officer answered, “I apologize. But, he is not here right now. And he likely won't returned for some time. He received a message from Lee. And he then suddenly left.”
Janet asked, “What was the message? And how did he react to it?”
The officer replied, “Lee's message was simple. Even I heard about it. Though, I don't understand what it meant. That message being, the maids are in town. When the Chief heard this, his face paled. He suddenly declared he was taking an immediate, long term leave, and he disappeared, along with half the police force.”
The three women looked at each other. Janet quickly looked back at the man, as she inquired, “What was the title of the anime series that Chief Del Soto, and his brother, liked so much, that they compared this city to it.”
The police officer responded, “Give me a moment to remember... It something, Lagoon. Ah yes, Black Lagoon. I have never seen it, but those two loved the series. The Chief said the mix of babes, and gun play, that series had, would have to be seen to be believed.”
Janet said, “Thank you for your time, officer.”
The officer replied, “You are welcome.”
The three women then turned, and briskly walked out of the station, the same way they had entered it.
(_)
A few minutes later, the three Lagoon members got into their car, with Benny sitting at the driver's seat, with Dutch on the front passengers side, and Janet sitting behind Dutch.
Benny compliment, “So, Lee is the writer. Good job, honey.”
Janet smiled, as she happily replied, “Thank you, dear.”
Dutch stated, “Hiding in plain sight. One of the oldest tricks in the book. And I got to give him credit. Given what he knows, what he has done, it take guts to be around Revy and the others, day in and day out. Especially, considering they are out for his blood. He is either crazy, or he wants something from us. Perhaps both.”
Janet requested, “Before we kill him, I want to know why he baited us all, and he didn't just run?”
As Benny drove their car out of the parking lot, and she headed for the hotel, Dutch coldly stated, “Oh. We are not going to just kill him. Death is too quick, and merciful, for that son of a bitch. And we will get our answers from him.”
The trio rode in their car, as they continued down the street, on their way back towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around that time, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, River walked into the room. River was in his male form, wearing the same clothing that he had been wearing for most of the day. He did not have on his fake beard, which was in his right side pants pocket. But, he did have his long red hair in a ponytail.
River stood just inside the double-door entrance to the restaurant, as he looked around. He saw Revy, Rock, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, were sitting at their usual tables, by the stage. Though, none of the rest of their family and friends, were present.
Then, River noticed, Lee was on stage, and he was singing and dancing to a song.
River knew that song from reading Lee's mind.
And River understood the subtext of the lyrics.
River thought, with surprise, and concern, for his friend, 'Is Lee trying to confess to the girls in the room, that he is the writer? With that song, I would say that answer is a, yes.'
'Though, he is so focused on the song, right now, I cannot read his mind for an answer.'
'Lee must be more desperate, or insane, than I thought, to pull a stunt like this. Still, I will wait for him to finish singing, and see how the women in the room, that are after him, react, before I talk to him.'
'Though, from the thoughts of Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Rock, and Revy. None of them have figured out what Lee has been doing on stage. Which gives me time to figure a way to help Lee. And I wish I already had an answer for him. But, I don't. At least not, yet.'
River then noticed that Lee saw him.
River smiled back at him, as he thought, 'Good. He saw me. That means he will come talk to me, after he finishs his song. Which from the lyrics, will be within a minute. Now, to sit down in a usual place, that offers some privacy, where I can enjoy the rest of the performance. And he is good. In both singing, and dancing.'
River turned to his right, as he walked along the front wall, to the corner table, which was empty. He sat down in a chair, while still facing the stage.
(_)
Meanwhile, on staged, Lee had just noticed River walked into the room.
While not missing a beat, as he sang, and danced, Lee thought, 'Good. River, is here. And from the look on the faces of Revy, and her group that is here, they have not figured out what I am doing. Which is mildly disappointing. I have put a lot of effort into this confession. Still, River might have some solutions to my problem. I will just go over and talk to her, after I finish this song.'
As Lee continued to sing and dance, Lee watched as River walked over, and sat down at the front, right corner table, that both of them usual sat at, during the evenings karaoke entertainment at the restaurant.
A few seconds later, Lee wrapped up his song.
Right after he finished the song, everyone applauded his performance. Including Revy, Rock, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, River, Melvin, and the rest of the audience, and staff, whom were present.
Lee bowed in responded, as he happily thought, 'I still got it. And now to talk to River.'
As he leaned back up. He turned to his right and he walked over to the karaoke machine. He placed the wireless microphone he had been using, back on to of the machine.
Lee then turned around, and casually walked off stage, on the left side of the stage. Then he made his way around the restaurant, and towards River, who was sitting at a corner table, across the room from him.
Meanwhile, another customer walked on stage, to being singing a song with the karaoke machine.
As Lee did so, he noticed that Rock, Revy, Ranma, Natsuru, nor Akira, had approached him, while he walked by.
Lee thought, 'At least I have a few more minutes to work with. And I will take every minute I can get.'
Less than a minute, Lee reached River's corner table.
River sat a chair, with his back to the corner of the wall. Lee walked around, to River's right side. And Lee sat in the chair next to River, to River's right side, by the corner of the room.
This allowed both River and Lee, to see the rest of the room. Including, the five badass women, by the stage,
After Lee got comfortable in his seat, River turned to Lee, as he questioned, “I know, I am not one to ask, but are you crazy to sing that song in front of them?”
Lee turned to River, as he calmly answered, “Let us just say that I thinking asian would be more merciful than latin american.”
River conceded, “You might be right.”
Lee inquired, “So, any ideas out of this mess?”
River said, “Nope. But, I can bring you back to the casino. That would buy you a little time.”
Lee countered, “That would be a bad idea. Because I would be bringing trouble to their doorstep.”
River complained, “Damn it, Lee. How can you be so damn good at pointing out the negatives, while still making sense?”
Lee sadly answered, “A lifetime of experience.”
River suggested, “Well, we do have a few minutes. Before you have to go. We might just sit and think. We might come up with a plan, in the meantime.”
Lee complimented, “Good idea.”
The two then sat there for a few minutes, as they thought.
It was then that Lee watched as Rock and River got up from their seats, and walked over to the bar counter, to pay Melvin for their meals and drinks.
Rock was standing to Revy's left.
Lee then saw Rock pulled out her reality device, from her left side pants pocket. She set the device beside her, as she pulled out the money, from the same pants pocket, to pay their bill with.
And Lee also noticed that Rock's reality device, was to her left side, opposite to where Revy was standing. And the two women's left sides faced the exit to the restaurant, allowing for a clear path of escape, with the reality device, if Lee could figure out how to effectively distract both Rock and Revy at the same time.
Lee mentally realized, 'The multiverse just handed me a golden opportunity. This is likely my last chance to escape. Thankfully, the women I wrote about in my stories don't use purses. So, it makes sense that neither does Rock. Now, how do I create a distraction?... That might work, and Sam... Err, River owes me a favor.'
River turned to Lee, as he softly asked, “Am I reading your mind correctly?”
Lee looked over at River, as he quietly said, “Yes. And if you want to save my life, I need you to do something that is going to hurt, a lot.”
River softly inquired, “What?”
Lee whispered, “I see that Rock has her device out. But, I need to distract them to get it. I need you to quickly walk up between Rock and Revy, and use each of your hands to cop a feel from one of their butt cheeks, at the same time. And I am no talking about just a simple pat. But, a full grab, and squeeze.”
River pointed out, “If I do that, they are going to kill me, afterward.”
Lee stated, “I believe you will likely survive. Considering, at the moment, Revy is unarmed. Anyway, if you got a better idea. You got about ten seconds to come up with one, and ten seconds to implement it. Because we have twenty seconds at best. Due to the fact that is how long, at most, until Rock is likely going to put that device back into her pocket, when she pulls out the money she wants. The clock is ticking, and the window is closing.”
River looked over at Rock and Revy, as he relented. He replied, “Alright.”
Though, before River could get up, Lee turned to River. Lee said, “Hold on.” Lee grabbed something from his left pants pocket, and he hand it to River.
River took the item, and he saw that it was a set of keys on a key ring.
Lee stated, “These are the keys to my pink caddy. The gas tank is full. Either way this goes, I am not going to need the car anymore. So have fun. And live out your sexual fantasies with it.”
River smiled, as he put the keys into one of his pockets. He kept his smile, as he turned to Lee. He responded, “Thanks. Also, with this plan, I can safely say you are crazier than me. And that is a statement in of itself.”
Lee returned River's smile, as he said, “I will take that with a compliment. Though, you are the one that is about to carry out this plan. So, we are both pretty crazy.”
River stated, “Agreed. The fool, and the fool who follows.”
Lee continued to smile, as he replied, “Exactly.” He thought, with amusement, 'One more Star Wars joke for the road.'
River said, “Of course. You need the humor. And goodbye.”
Lee responded, “I appreciate that. And see you, later.”
River then got up, and walked around the table, to his left. Away from Lee. He then briskly walked to the bar counter, between Rock and Revy.
A second later, Lee got up from the table, and slowly approached Rock and Revy, as well.
As River approached Rock and Revy, he used his assassin training, to do so quickly. With him not making a sound with his steps.
River then came to a stop, to stake between Rock and Revy. She looked at Rock, then Revy, and back to Rock. River said, in an excited tone of voice, “Ladies.” He then used each of his hands to grasp and squeeze a butt cheek from both of them. His left hand went on Rock's right clothed butt cheek, and his right hand went on Revy's left clothed butt cheek.
River then let go of Rock and Revy.
A second after both of them felt River's rough groping, Rock and Revy immediately turned to looked at River, with fury in their eyes, as they started beating him to a pulp.
Meanwhile, Lee quickly walked by the three, and palmed the device, from the bar counter, and into his left side pants pocket.
No one had noticed what Lee had done, given they were all looking at the three other adults by him.
Lee thought, knowing River was reading his mind, 'Sorry about this River. I hope you make a full recovery, and get to feeling better. I truly consider you a good friend.'
On his way out of the bar, he walked over to Melvin, over the bill.
As Lee came to a stop, across the counter from Melvin, he saw Melvin looking at him.
Melvin quietly said, “I saw what you stole. So, you are the one they are after?”
Lee lightly nodded once. He said, “Live free. Die free.”
Melvin smiled, as he replied, “Good luck.”
Lee dropped a fifty dollar bill, on the bar counter, by the bartender. He said, “Keep the change. And see you around, russian.”
Melvin immediately realized, as he thought, 'Lee, figured out who I was, and he still knowingly helped me. Now, that is man who does not deserve what it coming for him.'
Melvin said, “Stay safe.”
Lee grinned, as he replied, “I should be, soon enough.”
Lee then turned to his left, and exited the bar.
Lee immediately headed for the front lobby, and the check in desk, to retrieve his gym bag, so he could finally escape, before the hammer came completely down upon him.
(_)
A few minutes before Lee left the hotel restaurant, with Rock's reality device, a few floors up, the eight teenager women that were part of the group after the writer, were in one of their four hotel suites.
At their request, and to keep things simple, their parents put them near each other. They slept in four, two bed suites. The rooms were beside, and across from each other.
Though, their parents were not ignorant of their relationships. And the bedding order was that in one suite, the redheads, Rebecca and Yukio shared a room. The sisters, Nodoka and Mikoto shared a room. Molly and Yurika shared a room. And Sarah and Kristina shared a room.
This did little to discourage them.
The suite the eight teenagers were currently occupying together, as they killed time, was Rebecca and Yukio's room, which had an out door balcony, along with Nodoka and Mikoto's room, which was beside their room. The other two rooms were interior suites.
The eight teenage women were dressed in their casual clothing.
The ceiling lights were on in the suite.
At the table, in the room, by the sliding glass door to the balcony, Molly looked up from her cards, so she could look around at her friends.
She, Sarah, Mikoto, and Yurika, were play five card draw poker, while sitting at the table. They were only betting with low amounts of U.S. dollars, from one to ten U.S. dollars, per bet. Which was pocket change, compared to the wealth their families had access to.
On the bed, nearest to Molly, were Yukio and Rebecca. The two redheaded sisters were looking at their laptop, while playing various pieces of music from its speakers. Since the music was good, no one said anything about it.
On the other bed was Nodoka and Kristina. They had been kissing, and were now talking about where they wanted to go tomorrow.
Molly thought, 'Fire and ice. It makes a lot of sense. Kristina is a slight pyromaniac, while Nodoka has ice, and water powers. But, Kristina informed me, a while back, that while Nodoka has ice powers, she is passionately hot in bed, as both, female, and male.'
Molly giggled to herself, 'When Dutch, Ranma, and Natsuru, learned their kids were dating, that caused quite an uproar. All five of them met, and Dutch warned Nodoka if she got her daughter pregnant, she would kill her. Ranma countered by pulling a packet of instant of spring of drown man from Kristina's back pocket, and she showed it to Dutch. Dutch was not happy. With Natsuru working to keep the peace between everyone. Afterward, those five had a very long talk about responsibility, and avoiding teenage pregnancy.'
'But, none of us are ones to talk. Those three sisters, or brothers, depending on their moods, have had a few one night stands with each of the five of us.'
'At least, we were careful, and did not get pregnant. Condoms are a wonderful things.'
'And that is only the tip of the iceberg, on how interesting those three are.'
'Due to all three being a parent to Natsuru. With Natsuru being the mother of Mikoto, and the father to Nodoka and Yurika. The three siblings inherited Natsuru's Kampfer abilities. They can change genders at will, and each of them have an elemental ability. Also, they will remain young, much like the longevity, and health, the five of us inherited from our parents.'
'Though, due to Mikoto and Yurika being the children of Akira, those two also change gender with a sneeze. All the genetic testing done on them show they will age very slowly in both their gender forms, and they will not lock in either gender, like two of their parents will do, eventually. With Natsuru and Akira becoming full time women. But, all three their parents have gotten to the point they spend most of their time as women anyway. So, that is no great loss.'
'Yurika and Yukio use to date, but they found that they were not compatible for an intimate relationship. But, they are still good friends. Reflecting on that, is good that all eight of us are good friends.'
'Ah, Yukio. I still find it slightly annoying to call her that name, given that was my name in my previous life. But, considering she was named after me. Which I found touching by Aunt Rock, I let the issue side. And I call her, Yukio, as well.'
'Of course, when it come to wrecks, my love-life is probably one of the worst. I am in love with my sister, and she is in love with me. And it is exactly as it sounds. This is due to us being people that loved each other in a previous life, but died tragically, before we could do anything about it.'
'After seeing the series that showed our lives, we were able to remember, and piece together most of our previous lives. And over time, I realized that Sarah took the situation worse than me. Given in the previous life she was far older that I was, when she was killed, and she was a man at the time. But, except for our relationship, we wisely put our past lives behind us. And Sarah is okay with being a woman.'
'Though, our parents were not happy when the found out about our relationship. Sarah and I could not blame them for being upset.'
'Sarah and I both have talked about this several times. We know it is wrong, on several levels. But, right on a few others. Considering we crossed through death itself to be together.'
'At a conscious level, we both knew it was wrong due to us being sisters, but we cannot stop ourselves, either. And we have tried more than once to break our relationship off. We have even dated other people. But, we just cannot stop what our hearts feel for each other. But, we at least have the decency to show our affection for each other only in private, and away from our parents. Out of sight is out of mind for our parents.'
'And we only do it girl on girl. And we both agree not use any instant spring of drown man, on the off chance one of us got pregnant. So, we do not have to worry about pregnancy. If that happened, it would complete this Greek tragedy.'
'Why the hell did that writer have to make us sisters? Sarah and I hate the fact we are blood related, because we do love each other more than blood ties should. If we were not sisters, we would have married each other by now. That is how much we love each other.'
'If we ever catch the writer, Sarah, and I, are going to have a long talk with him.'
Suddenly, Molly heard a familiar piece of piano music that broke her train of thought.
Molly turned and she saw that the music came from Yukio and Rebecca' laptop computer.
Molly put down her playing cards, as she got up, and walked over to the two redheaded teenage girls.
Molly kindly asked, her two sisters, “Where did you get that piece of music from?”
The two redheads looked up form their laptop. Rebecca answered, “It is the Botcon Ninety-Seven version of the Vince Dicola music track, Training Montage, with the piano lead in. It is a rare track.”
Molly had a seeking suspicious of where the conversation was going to lead to, as she inquired, “How rare?”
Yukio answered, for her sister, “Very rare. You have to even know it exists to look for it. Rebecca and I were just reviewing what we know of the writer. We were playing music he mentioned, or hinted at, in his stories, in the hopes of finding a clue to his identity.”
Molly complimented the two redheaded sisters, in an excited tone of voice, “Good work, you two! I know who the writer is!”
The other seven teenagers immediately stopped what they were doing, and looked over at Molly, as they heard Molly say she knew who the writer was.
Molly looked around, at her family and friends, as she stated, “I heard Lee play that exact piece of music, on a piano, yesterday. Lee is the writer.”
The eight girls looked at each other. They then rushed put the hallway door of the suite they were in. And to the front elevator bay, in the hopes of getting to the front lobby, to both inform their parents, and friends, of what they learned. Along with catching Lee.
When they reached the elevator bay, they pressed the down arrow, on one of the panel, between on of the two sets of elevators.
A few second later, they heard a ding, and they saw one of the elevators with the lighted down arrow above it. The eight women walked to the specific elevator. They faced the elevator doors.
As the eight women walked the doors opened, they saw the doors reveal Aeryn and Violin were inside the elevator. With the two women inside looking back at the eight women.
Violin stated, “Let me guess. You figured out Lee is the writer, and your are heading downstairs, to tell everyone, while catching Lee.”
The eight teenager girls just nodded their heads.
Violin said, “Then, get inside.”
The eight teenagers then entered the elevator, with the two other adults, as all ten women headed down to the lobby floor.
Fortunately, given how slender and small the women were. They were nowhere near exceeding the weight limit of the elevator they were on, as the doors closed, and took them down to the ground floor.
(_)
Two minutes before Lee stole Rock's reality device.
A few floors above where the eight teenage women were staying, Aeryn and Violin were inside the hotel suite they shared.
The only light in the room, was the lamp light, by the single, large bed they slept together on.
The spouses were currently working on getting in the mood, to become intimate with each other. Though, they were still dressed in their usual clothing.
As Violin approached her wife, she noticed something was troubling Aeryn.
Violin asked, “What is it, honey?”
Aeryn answered, “It is just something about poker game between River and Lee. Something about it is bothering me. I just cannot place what it is.”
Violin said, “We will worry about it tomorrow.” She then started to lightly kiss the right side of Aeryn's neck, slowly leading up to her face.
It was then that Aeryn suddenly realized, “The first dealer.”
Violin stopped kissing Aeryn, as she leaned up straight. She looked at Aeryn, in her eyes, with Aeryn looking back at her.
Violin thought, 'From the expression on her face, I believe she just figured out something.' She asked, “What about the first dealer?”
Aeryn stated, “The first dealer was Faye Valentine. She even introduced herself, by her name. That name. She is same Faye Valentine from the Cowboy Bebop series. You remember when we tested Lee with the Bubblegum Crisis episodes. You mentioned the series Cowboy Bebop, and Lee let slip he knew the series, and he even mentioned Faye Valentine by name.”
Violin's eyes widened, as she understood what Aeryn was pointing out. Violin responded, “I see where you are going with this.”
Aeryn went onto say, “Yes. When Lee saw Faye, he didn't react at all. He is not that blind to the obvious. The fact he has survived around us, for months on end, proves that. Instead, he is always caution and one guard. As such, the only reason Lee would not react to seeing Faye in person, is that he already knew to expect the possibility of meeting a fictional character in real life... Lee is the writer.”
Violin suggested, “Then, let us go get him.”
Aeryn smiled, as she said, “Yes. Let's do that.”
Both of them then headed out of their suite, and towards the front elevator bay.
(_)
A minute before Lee stole Rock's reality device, in the hotel restaurant, at their usual table, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru sat next to each other, as they were having some bottles of beers to drink.
They had just enjoyed watching Lee sing, and dance, a wonderfully strange rock song.
Akira commented, “Damn. What a performance. I knew that Lee was a good dancer, but he can sing, as well.”
Natsuru said, “It must have taken him years to master that singing ability.”
Ranma stated, “Speaking from experience. You got that right.”
Akira sipped her beer, as she watched as some idiot decided to cop a feel of both Rock and Revy, at the bar counter.
Akira thought, 'What an idiot.'
It then Akira noticed who is was.
Akira thought, 'I recognize that red hair, and ponytail, anywhere. That is Sam. Lee's good friend. And he shaved his beard. And he looks good without his beard. Actually, he looks great. But, why would he do something that stupid, towards Rock and Revy? Does he have a death wish?”
Suddenly, Akira noticed that Ranma and Natsuru were giggling at something.
Akira turned to her two lovers, as she asked, “What is so funny?”
Ranma said, “After, seeing Sam get get his ass kicked by Revy and Rock, reminded me that about something I was talking with Nodoka about, earlier. And she had an interesting story she heard from Kristina, about the night the Lagoon girls and Revy met Lee and Sam. That Lee told a joke that saved, Sam and his lives, from them.”
Akira questioned, “What exactly was the joke?”
Ranma answered, “That only a fool would wear a suit and tie in a town like this. And doing so would just be asking for trouble.”
Akira suddenly realized the hidden meaning of the joke, as she inquired, “Let me guess, right after Lee told the joke, the girls mentioned Rock, or Rokuro, to Revy, and the girls then laughed hard at that joke.”
Ranma replied, “Yea.”
Akira said, “That bastard. Only a person who as seen the Black Lagoon series, or lived it, could come up with a joke to get that kind of reaction.”
Natsuru immediately understood what her blond lover mean, as she asked, “You don't mean?”
Akira stated, “Yes. Lee is the writer.”
Suddenly, Natsuru realized what the song lyrics, to the song Lee had just sung. And what the lyrics meant. She mentioned, “And Lee just sang us a song that was practically a confession to us.”
Ranma replied, “Oh hell.”
All three turned to look at Rock, Sam, and Revy.
Revy had just kicked Sam in the balls, when Akira noticed look on Rock's face.
Rock and Akira looked at each other, and they both realized what the other was thinking, as they turned at looked at where Lee usual sat, in the corner table, with Sam. During the evening. And they saw that Lee was gone.
Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru all got up from their seats, as all five women immediately left for the restaurant exit.
(_)
Thirty seconds ago, across the restaurant, at the bar counter, Rock and Revy had just felt someone cop a feel on each their butt cheeks.
Rock was rarely a violent person, but this was one of the few times she instinctively became violent, as she and Revy turned to look at the person between them. She and Revy then began beating the man senseless, as Rock thought, 'What kinda idiot would do this? Especially, to us.'
It was then that Rock started to recognize the man they were beating.
The reason why Sam, or more aptly, River, knew if he fought back, it would give himself, and Lee, away.
As River allowed himself beaten, he made sure to slightly move his body out of the way of any possibly debilitating blows, without Rock and Revy realizing it. he thought, 'They longer they are focused on me. The longer, they are no focused on Lee. And I saw him already leave the room, with the reality device, a few seconds ago. Though, I am a bit annoyed that he stopped to talk to Melvin. But, Melvin noticed him. So, he had to. As such, I understand.'
Rock stopped hitting him, as she ordered, “Hold it, Revy. Something isn't right here. That is Sam.”
Revy stopped hitting River. She used her right hand to grab the scruff of River's shirt. She hauled him down by his shirt, to look at her and Rock, more closing in the fast.
Revy demanded, “Sam, you look good without a beard. Now, tell me why you would knowingly do something this stupid, before I really hurt you?”
River thought, 'I might as well be mostly honest.' He casually responded, “Would you believe I did it on a dare?”
Revy did not buy River's explanation. She let go of River's shirt, as she kneed him in the balls, while allowed him to dropped to the floor, in pain.
The blow caught River off guard, as he collapsed to the floor.
River grabbed his groin with both hands, as he stated, in a slightly higher pitch octave, than his normal male voice, “I freely admit that I deserved that.”
Revy looked down at River, as she stated, “Then, consider us even.”
River replied, “Good.” He then muttered, “Damn it. I never knew being hit there hurt this much.”
Meanwhile, Rock looked around the room, as she thought, 'Why would Sam really do this? Wait a minute, that song Lee was singing.” She remember the lyrics, and she suddenly realized what the lyrics meant.
Rock then looked over at Akira, sitting across the room, and their eyes met. Both of them then turned to look at where Lee usually sat, and she saw that he was long gone.
Rock turned to Revy, as she stated, “Lee is the writer.”
Revy looked over at Rock. She then looked down at River, whom was laying on the floor, in a sitting position, between Rock and herself. She looked back over at Rock, as she responded, “Crap.”
Both Rock and Revy started for the door, as they were joined by Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru. All five women rushed out of the room, without realizing what they had overlooked something, in their haste to leave the room.
The five women then left the restaurant, for the front lobby, where Lee usually was, when not in the restaurant, or his suite, during that time of night.
Though, as they walked out of the restaurant, Rock felt like she had forgotten something. But, give the situation, she felt that it was not important, as she went with her friends to finally catch the writer. The man none as Lee.
(_)
At that exact moment, in the lobby, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton were sitting beside each other, one some couches, on the right wall of the lobby. Which was a change of pace, given the three usual sat in the couches on the left side of the lobby.
They women were in casual clothing. Even Lotton. Given, over time, during their stay at the Devil's Hotel, Sawyer and Shenhua agreed that Lotton's maid uniform, was attracting to much attention from the hotel staff, and other guests. Including, a few of their own friends.
The three adults women had finished their diner ten minutes ago, and they came out to hotel restaurant, and to the front lobby, for the quiet and peace. As they relaxed after having a pleasant dinner.
The couch the three sat on allowed them a view both the entrance to the bar, the check in desk, and the lobby entrance doors.
Lotton watched as Lee when to the check in desk, and retrieved his gym bag. She saw that Lee slung the strap of the gym bag over his right shoulder, as he turned around as started walking towards the front doors of the lobby, to the outside parking lot.
And with it being dark outside, the parking lot was lit with yellow lamps, placed throughout the parking lot. Along with the lights place along the walls of the hotel.
It was then that Lotton noticed that Lee's stride had changed. He seemed to walk with more confidence.
Lotton mentally reflected, 'Is Lee leaving the hotel?'
Suddenly, Lotton heard Sawyer say, beside her, “Did you hear? The Rats Nest got blown up? Though, the bartender is fine.”
Shenhua commented, “I heard. I was there when you talked to that guest, that came in a few minutes ago. The one whom had just drove by the Rats Nest. From the outfits he told us about, of those that walked out of the front of the bar, while it was burning, I think it was the maids. I wonder who told them? I thought we were in agreement not to let the Lovelace family learn about the stories?”
While Lotton paid attention to the conversation by her. She continued to watch Lee walk closer to the front door. She stated, “We did agree on that.”
Sawyer admitted, “I told them. During our Hell Saber days, Roberta and I became good friends. And I decided to keep in touch with her. I sent her a copy of the stories. I figured it would not cause any harm.”
As Lotton heard all this, she watched as Lee passed through the front doors, and into the entryway.
As Lee walked through the entryway, Lotton saw Lee throw down his blue baseball cap, to his right, and large glasses, to his left, onto the ground. He then used his right hand to pull out his sunglasses, from the left inside coat pocket. After which, he put his shades on over his eyes.
Lee then unzipped his bag, and pulled out his short rimmed, gray fedora hat, he also wore at Daiyu's Palace Casino. He was careful not to pull out his black fedora hat on his head. He continued walking straight out into the parking lot, as he zipped his bag back up.
By then, Lotton saw Lee exit the exterior doors that took him outside, and into the night.
It was then that Lotton heard Sawyer finish speaking, about why and how she had informed the maids of what was going on.
Lotton stated, “I love you both. But, Sawyer, do you realize what you have unleashed? All three of us have seen how dangerous Roberta is up close and personal. And Fabiola is nearly as dangerous as Robert. Given the writer cursed Garcia to change genders, both maids are going to be out for his blood. If he is lucky...”
Suddenly, everything clicked into place for her, as she thought, 'Why did Lee go to Akira about Chang and River? Because they have the least connection to Chang and River, and therefore they are the most none bias on talking about those two. He knew that beforehand.'
'Lee also knew H.P. Lovecraft would scare the hell out of anyone in my position. And he has always tried to get the troublemakers to steer clear of us... The night we five got drunk at the Rats Nest. The moves Lee did on the man who was clearly interested in us. They were the exact same moves Akira used on those two guys, the first night we three saw him at the Yellowflag.'
'Lee played us! And that is why he is leaving this hotel, with his bag packed. He must have run into the maids at the Rats Nest, or some other part of the city. Maybe he just saw them, as he drove by, in his pink Cadillac. And seeing those two badasses would make anyone want to run... For what good it will do him...'
Lotton did not take her eyes off of Lee. Whom she saw through the outside windows beside her. She calmly admitted, “Girls. I was wrong. Lee is the writer. And I think he saw the maids at the Rats Nest, right before the bar was destroyed. Or, somewhere else. And that is why he is leaving, with his bag packed.”
Sawyer and Shenhua just looked at her. It was then that Lotton look over at both Sawyer, and Shenhua.
A second later, all three of them got up, and they headed for the lobby front doors.
Though, at that moment, the three adults saw the ten adult women, they knew, come towards them from the front elevator bay, across the room from them.
At the same time, they saw Rock, Revy, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru come towards them, from the hotel restaurant.
By then, they had all met up, in the middle of the lobby, between the front doors and the check in desk, on the back wall.
As they all met up, Lotton looked around the group. She said, “I see you all figured out Lee is the writer, as well.”
Molly stated, “We figured it out from the fact that Lee played a rare music piece yesterday, that we found out was mentioned in his stories.”
Aeryn stated, “Really. Well, we figured out it was Lee by the fact he knew about the Cowboy Bebop series, but didn't blink an eye when he met Faye at Chang's casino, as his card dealer.”
Rock commented, “We figured it out after I thought about the lyrics he sang. The song was titled, Twilight Zone.”
Violin asked, “By the band, Golden Earring?”
Natsuru said, “Yes.”
Violin questioned, “He actually sung that song in front of you, and you all did not realize what the song meant, at the time?”
Rock conceded, “I admit that it was not one of our brighter moments.”
Sarah asked, “But, why would he do something that stupid?”
Sawyer stated, “The maids are in the city, and we think Lee saw them.”
Natsuru said, “Well, that does explain a few things. And if he saw the maids. Then, I believe that, given the lyrics of that song, Lee was trying to confess to us, and no one took him up on his offer. So, now he is just trying to outright escape.”
Yurika stated, “Between us and Roberta. I would take us any day of the week.”
Mikoto said, “That completely understandable on Lee's part.”
Aeryn asked, “So, how did the rest of you figure it out?”
Lotton stated, as she turned to look at Akira, “Well, many things came together. But, the one item that stood out was that I remembered that night we went drinking at the Rats Nest, we had forced Lee to be our designated driver. Even though I was drunk at the time, I now recall how he took down a guy that pulled a gun on him. Lee kicked the guy in the balls, forcing the man to drop his gun, and he then slammed his head onto the counter. It was all done in a similar fashion as what you did, Akira, against those two guys, the first night we saw you at the Yellowflag.”
Akira raised an eyebrow, as she stated, “Really. Well, besides the song, we figured it out when we were informed at the joke Lee told you Lagoon girls, the first night you met him and Sam, at the Rats Nest. I cannot believe you did not realize how Lee phrased the context of that joke. Only someone who has seen the Black Lagoon series, or lived it, would get that joke.”
Molly responded, with disbelief evident in her tone of voice, “He blinded up with humor.”
Shenhua sternly commented, “If you all had taken my suggestion, and just taken him out back, and beaten him some, we would have saved us all a lot of time and trouble.”
Violin quipped, “Where is the fun in that?”
In response, all the women, laughed at Violin's joke. Even Shenhua could help, but laugh at Violin's comeback to what she said.
As the calmed down, Shenhua smiled, as she conceded, “Good point.”
Kristina inquired, “So, where is Lee now?”
Lotton used her right hand to point at the lobby entrance, and out the windows of the doors, as she answered, “He just went outside.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Though, the front lobby windows, and door windows, everyone could see Lee walking away down the parking lot, directly away from them.
They saw Lee was about twenty feet from the outside entryway doors, passed the sidewalk, and on the black pavement, as he continued to walk away from them.
Revy smirked, “Well, let us not keep him waiting.”
They all started walking towards Lee, as a group of eighteen women.
As they opened the entryway doors, from the lobby side, Sawyer pointed out, “The only question is, do we start torturing him before, or after we get some sleep?”
Shenhua suggested, “We can rotate shifts.”
Revy complimented, “That is a great idea.”
A few seconds later, as they exited the hotel, to the outside, though the exterior doors to the entryway.
By then, Lee was fifty feet from the entrance to the hotel lobby, with him walking down a two car lane, that lead to the far side of the parking lot, opposite to the Devil's Hotel, itself.
It was then that they noticed Lee pulling out a something, from a jacket pocket, along with him pulling out his lighter.
Revy inquired, “Is he doing what I think he is doing?”
Akira answered, “It appears so. I remember seeing that scene, in that movie. And it was a great movie. And it fits this situation, perfectly.”
Revy grinned, as she commented, “He's got guts to do that. And besides us, I also admire his taste in other fiction. Also girls, let us at least leave him sane enough to answer some questions, before we fully break him. I would like to know where he got some of his ideas from, on what he wrote about us.”
Rock lips curled into a wick grin, as well. She stated, “I second that motion.”
The women then continued to quietly approach Lee, from behind.
(_)
Thirty seconds ago, Lee exited the hotel from the front lobby doors, he saw that it was a night outside, with the outside building lights, along with the parking lot lights, illuminating the area.
The air outside was cooler that earlier that day. Also, there was a nice breeze blowing on him, from the sea.
Lee continued walking with confidence, straight out from the hotel entrance, and into the parking lot.
Lee thought, 'I need put a little distance between me, and those woman, before I use my new reality device. Still, the hard part has now been accomplish. I can now implement the next part of my escape plan, without a moment to lose. And I know the perfect way to celebrate this monumental achievement.'
Lee then used his left hand to pull out a cigarette from an interior jacket pocket, that Revy had given him months earlier.
Next, he put the cigarette in his right hand. And he used his left hand to also pulled out his lighter, from his left pants pocket. The same pocket he had his reality device in.
As Lee pulled out his lighter, he was careful not to accidentally hit the reality device's buttons.
Given the sea breeze, Lee had to use his lips to help himself light his cigarette.
Lee put the filter end of the cigarette, to his lips. He then bought both of his hands up to mouth.
Lee used his right hand to cup his lighter from the wind, while he used his left hand to hold, the lighter, as his left thumb ignited the lighter.
Lee next brought the lit flame to the end of his cigarette, as he sat the smoke from the paper signal to him that it was lit.
Lee dropped his right hand to his side, against his gym bag, as he used his left hand to put his lighter back into his left pants pocket, beside the reality device.
With the lit cigarette between his lips, Lee thought, with a bit a gallows humor, 'It is not like these things are going to kill me. The cancer I already have will kill me long before these will. And to think, I never smoked, nor serious drank, nor did any illegal drugs, before I came to Mexico. And I still got cancer... Talk about the term, clean living, being a load of crap.'
Lee then slowly inhaled the smoke. He was surprised to find out that he able to do so without choking on the smoke.
As Lee continued walking, he heard Rock's voice behind, say, “Nice Keyser Soze attempt. But, it is over, Lee. Or, should I say, Paul?”
Lee immediately stopped walking forward. Though, he did not instantly turn around. Instead, he took a slow drag on the cigarette. He then dropped his cigarette with his right hand, and he used his right foot to put it out, on the pavement floor, beneath him.
Next, Lee calmly turned around, to his right, and he saw the assemblage of the Badasses of the Multiverse, thirty feet from him. With Rock and Revy standing in the front of the group.
The look of sadistic happiness on their faces promised much pain and misery for Lee.
But, as Lee stood in place, facing the assemblage of badass women, Lee remained as calm as ever, while he slowly blew out the smoke from his lungs, and out his mouth. As he did so, he used his left hand to pull out the reality device from his left pocket. He had a firm grip on the device, with him left palm set against the back of the device, so he would not accidentally touch the buttons on the face of the device.
Lee then held up the device, with his left hand, for the women to see.
Suddenly, as everyone recognized what Lee had in his left hand. They immediately dropped their smug grins. Rock quickly checked her pockets, as she realized Lee had stolen her reality device.
Lee continued to look at the women, while his lips curled into a wicked grin, with his shades masking the wild look to his eyes. Then, just as Lee had wrote it, Lee thought of where, when, and what reality, he wanted to go, and he held that thought, as he used his left thumb to press the middle red button in the center of the face of the device, and with his gym bag hanging off himself, he instantly disappeared into the multiverse.
The only sound heard after Lee's disappearance, was half the party of badass women screaming, in unison, “NOOOOOOOOOOO!”
Run.
The end of Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man”: Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
To be continued in Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man”: Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Lee's cover as the writer has finally been revealed to his pursuers.
Though, Lee has finally been able steal reality device, with him escaping into the multiverse.
And none to soon, as the small army of badasses after him were literally feet from capturing him.
And while the cancer Lee has is numbering his days, he is not out for the count.
For Lee has already began his plan to permanently lose those after him, in the multiverse.
Unfortunately, those after Lee realize where he is going, as Lee makes his way to a human colonized Mars, in the multiverse.
And Lee is going need every skill and lesson, he has learned, if he hopes to evade those after him.
With the question becoming. Now, that Lee has gotten his ass to Mars. Can Lee get his ass off of Mars, before those after him, capture him?
And for Lee to accomplish this, Lee is going to have to become a Total Badass.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 01: “A Buffet Of Crow.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Lee's reality. Place, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Devil Hotel's Parking, on the north side of the island. Time, right after dark, two minutes after Lee escaped into the multiverse.
Benny was driving her car, as Dutch sitting on the front passenger’s side, and Janet sat behind Dutch, in the backseat.
They were coming back from the Plata Podrido Police Station, where they found out their lead was correct, and that Lee was the writer, with Police Chief Pedro Del Soto being Lee's willing accomplice, in their con of the women's family and friends.
They were currently heading back to the Devil's Hotel to capture Lee, while informing their family and friends of their discovery.
Both Dutch and Benny could tell that Janet was growing impatient.
Janet muttered, “The worst part about all of this, is the waiting.”
Given all three of them had enhanced hearing, due to a super-soldier serum they were given decades before, Benny and Dutch heard every word Janet said.
Benny kept her eyes on the road, as she stated, “Don't worry. We are coming up to the hotel, right now. Very soon, that bastard is ours.”
As Benny turned into the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel and Resort, from the entrance opposite to the Devil's Hotel building, what they saw in the parking lot was... Unexpected.
From the outside lights of the building, and parking lamp lights, along with their enhanced vision, they could clearly making out their family and friends, on the other side of the parking lot, from them.
They saw that their family and friends were standing together, facing towards the road, with looks of surprised and anger reflecting on their facing.
Benny slowed down her car, as she approached them, directly on the lane she was heading down. As she did so, as she asked, “What happen?”
Janet has moved to set in the middle of the backseat. She was looking between the two front seats, to the front window. Janet guessed, with more concern, than worry in her tone of voice, “From the look on their faces, I think Lee escaped.”
Dutch agreed, “That is possible. And if that is the case, from their expressions, it looks like each of them had a plate from a buffet of crow.”
Benny commented, “That is very likely.”
Janet said, “With Lee serving it.”
Dutch took a closer looked at the scowls of rage on several of the women standing in the parking lot, she asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “While I do not mind making commanding decisions. Taking into account the seriousness of the situation, I would like both of your opinions on the matter. Given how violent some of our friends and family can be, do you think it is wise to approach them?”
Benny suggested, “We will find Rock, and let her do the talking.”
Janet replied, “I agree. That would be the safest approach to take. Considering we want Lee, just as much as they do.”
Dutch stated, “Great idea. I think I even see her up front.”
Janet complimented, “And that is why I married you, Benny.”
Benny smiled, as she responded, “Thank you, dear.”
Benny then quickly found a parking play, near their family and friends.
Benny then put the car in park, turned off the ignition, pulled out the key, and pocket it.
After which, the three women swiftly got out of their car, and they walked briskly to the group of eighteen women, from their front.
A few seconds later, as they reached the group of women, they saw Rock was in front of the others.
With Rock having a calmer expression on her face than many of the women present.
As the three newcomers came to a stop, ten feet from the other women, Dutch turned to Rock, as she inquired, “What is going on here, Rock?”
Rock turned to Dutch, with a look of disbelief, and embarrassment, on her face. She answered, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Lee is the writer, and we had just confronted him. We then watched as he escaped into the multiverse, with my reality device.”
Benny questioned, in a disbelieving tone of voice, “How the hell did he get your reality device, Rock?”
Rock defended, “I only had it out on the bar counter for matter of seconds. And in that time, as a distraction, Lee had convinced Sam to walk up to Revy and I, and cop a feel from both of us. And his plan worked. As we beat on Sam, Lee walked beside me, and took the reality device.”
Dutch stated, “Given Lee's ideas in his stories, and the plans I have seen him pull off first hand, that little stunt has his fingerprints all over it.”
Rock said, “I know. And in the confusion that followed, I didn't realize I had lost my own reality device.”
Rock mentally berated herself, 'Especially, since I made such a big to do, towards everyone else, on keeping up with our reality devices, not to let them out of our sight, and not to lose them... I am such a hypocrite. Though, Lee is going to pay for this. It is just going to take a little more time to find him. But, at least we now know it is him. And that is something. All Lee has done is delay the inevitable.'
Benny guessed, “You figured out Lee was the writer, and you were so anxious to catch him, that you forgot that you left out your reality device.”
Rock admitted, in a bitter tone of voice, “Yes.” She then inquired, in a slightly calmer tone of voice, “And how did you find out Lee is the writer?”
Dutch said, “Our lead at the police station panned out.”
Rock replied, “Good. And we need some good news.”
Janet thought, 'And we may have another lead.' She inquired, “And that it is. So, is Sam still alive?”
Rock answered, “Miraculously. Yes. He is still breathing. We didn't beat him up that badly. Considering, after several seconds of doing so, I realized it was him. And I stopped hitting him. And I got Revy to stop hitting him.”
Dutch asked, “Where is he now?”
Rock said, “He is in the bar, right now. And we left him conscious. Though, he is in not shape to go anywhere.”
Janet responded, “Good. We have someone to question, after the girls calm down.”
Dutch looked over at the large group of women, then back at Rock, as she asked, with concern in her voice, “So, what is the current mental states of the women here?”
Rock stated, “Half of them are shocked that we were outwitted by someone most of us thought was a fool. And the other half are too angry to speak, or think clearly, at being denied their vengeance.”
Dutch question, “Which way is Revy?”
Rock looked over at Revy. She then turned back to Dutch, as she answered, “It is a toss up.”
Benny suggested, “Let's give them a few more minutes to calm down.”
Rock agreed, “That would be a good idea.”
Rock thought, 'It is too bad that Lee stole the our reality device, that had tracking abilities to it. Which is ironic. Though, I doubt Lee realizes that specific device can do that. It probably barely even knows how to work a reality device. So, we have the going for us.'
'Also, while the reality device has a homing device on it. We turned it off, so some of our other more dangerous friends would not accidentally come looking for us, and ruin our hunt.'
'Though, I believe that Dutch brought a tracking device. So, we still might be able to catch him. Yet, it would be best for everyone to calm down, before we do anything else.
The four women silently turned to look at the other women. They patiently waiting as the rest of the group worked out their frustration at the having victory snatched from them.
About a minute later, Mikoto, and the rest of the younger members of the group were the first ones to speak.
Mikoto commented, “Well, that man does know to make an exit.”
Nodoka agreed, “You got that right.”
Rebecca asked, “Lee knew who we were, since before the night we confront him with our weapons, at the Rats Nest. Yet, he was polite, and did not show any fear. How is that possible?”
Sarah commented, “Perhaps, beforehand, he made peace with his mortality.”
Kristina said, “That is possible. And his display of civility, and manners likely helped him, a lot.”
Yurika pointed out, “Well, it looks like we are going to have to go after him.”
Molly commented, “It is going to be so much fun going after him. Want to do the standard bet?”
Yurika replied, “Nah. Let's just find him.”
Molly said, “Agreed.”
Yukio commented, “At least this time, we know what to expect?”
Rebecca asked, “Which is?”
Yukio cracked a grin, as she joked, “The unexpected.”
A number of the other young women, giggled a little from Yukio's joke, which swiftly put them in a better mood.
Meanwhile, Sawyer had been one of the women that was more surprised with Lee getting away. In truth, she was not so much upset at losing Lee, but amazed that Lee was about to pull off such a daring in front of all of them, including herself.
Sawyer thought, 'Now, that I think about my experiences with Lee. I get the feeling that he thinks I am cute. And I won't admit to my friends here, but I am kind of happy that he got away. Given everything I have gained from his writings, I hold not anger towards him. I only came along on this hunt to meet the writer, which I have done, to support my friends, and to make sure my friends don't go overboard on their vengeance... And in all honesty, I am trying not to laugh at this current situation.'
Meanwhile, inside Violin's mind, Violin had calmed down enough, that she start to notice the mental laughter inside her soul. As she continued to hear the mental laughter, she quickly realized who it was, as she thought, 'Harvey, why are you laughing?'
Harvey happily answered, in thought, while still chuckling, 'I will tell you later, Violin. But damn, does Lee know how to leave in style.'
Next to Violin, Aeryn also calmed down. And she noticed her spouse's facial expression. She whisper to Violin, “Harvey?”
Violin turned to Aeryn, as she softly replied, “Yea.”
Nearby, Natsuru commented, “I cannot believe Lee pulled a Keyser Soze escape, right in front of us. And right after Revy called him on it.”
Akira stated, “The man excels at the impossible. Just look at the situation he is in.”
Natsuru replied, “I know.”
Ranma commented, “I cannot believe Lee successfully used that old large glasses and hat gag on us, to prevent us from realizing he was Mister Dance, for so long. I use to pull that stunt. I should have known better. And I should have called him on it, earlier. We might have caught him, if we did.”
Ranma thought, 'Though, to be honest. I am just annoyed that I lost, on principle. I am not that upset at losing Lee. He has always been nice to use.' She turned to look at Natsuru, Akira, and their three daughters, as she continued her thoughts, 'And I owe him a lot, for what he has given to me...' She said her family turn to look at her, as she mentally reflected, 'To us.'
Meanwhile, Shenhua thought, 'I cannot believe Lee got away. Fortunately, I have an ace of my own.' She turned to Lotton, as she asked, “Lotton, you are one of the most savvy women I know. Where would Lee go?”
Lotton turned to Shenhua, as she answered, “Shenhua. Thank you, for the compliment. But, Lee is likely more savvy than I am. All I can say is that wherever he went is likely not his final destination. It is just the next link, in a long chain, that would lead to his complete escape from us.”
Shenhua replied, “I appreciate your answer, Lotton.” She mentally grumbled, 'Damn.'
Revy finally found her voice, as she inquired, “One thing I do not understand is what would set Lee off to check of the hotel so quickly? He was clearly packed, and on his way out, before he stole Rock's of the reality devices.”
Lotton pointed out, “We already had that conversation.”
Revy sheepishly admitted, “I wasn't paying attention.”
Shenhua stated, “One track mind, Revy.”
Revy barked, “You better pray that does not become a nickname!”
Shenhua warned, “Don't tempt me.”
Rock spoke up, with a firm tone of voice, “Ladies. Focus on the matter at hand. Save the violence for Lee.”
Both Revy and Shenhua backed down, as the looked over at Rock.
Dutch agreed, “That would be a good idea. And to answer your question, Revy. We also found out the reason, a few minutes ago. That reason being the Lovelace maids are in town. And I would guess that Lee found out.”
Revy agreed, “That would do it.”
Rock stated, “And as I said before. That would also explain the singing confession he tried to do. Let us be honest. With full knowledge about us and the maids. Whom would you prefer to turn yourself over to? Us? Or, the maids?”
Revy, Benny, Dutch, and Janet replied, in unison, “Us.”
Benny commented, “Though, it would be one hell of a gamble. That while what we would do to him would be survivable. Then, that we would not turn him over to the maids. When we were finished with him. But, being a gambler, I could him see rolling the dice on that bet.”
Suddenly, everyone watched a recognizable food truck pulled up into the parking lot, and soon park near the group.
The group of women watched the trucks two front doors opened. Eda got out of the driver's seat, and Yolanda exited the front passenger seat.
As the two blond women walked up to the group, while still wearing their casual work clothing, they looked at the other women.
Yolanda and Eda came to a stop, a ten feet from the other women. They calmly looked at the women, as Yolanda calmly stated, “I take it. from the looks on your faces. That you know that Lee is the writer. And that Lee has already escaped.”
Revy replied, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Yea. And yes. You literally just missed him. He stole Rock's reality device, and jumped realities, right before we had him.”
Eda cracked smile, as she said, “You got to admit, that man's sense of timing is incredible. I guess being a pre-cog has its perks.”
Rock inquired, “I guess so. Now, what caused you two to run down here in such a hurry? And how did you figure out Lee is the writer?”
Eda explained, “We just talked to Roberta, and Fabiola. We all figured out the writer was Lee, at the same time. We wanted to get here, to prevent, a bloodbath. Lee may have screwed us, but he doesn't deserve whatever the maids have planned for him.”
Dutch snickered, as she stated, “You would know. Still, you may have a point. I wouldn't wish the maids against my worst enemy. Which Lee currently is. I am just embarrassed that the maids figured out that Lee was the writer, only hours after entering the city.”
Rock turned to face Dutch, as she stated, in an even tone of voice, “Embarrassing for you? You weren't here from the beginning. Lee suckered us. And we didn't even see it. We are suppose to be brilliant, cunning, and genre savvy. And Lee was able to trick us for months on end.”
Revy thought for a few seconds. She then commented, “Well, Chang might have figured it out. But, if so, there is no way to prove it.”
Natsuru was listening to the conversation, as she realized, in thought, 'Oh man. That mess Lee was talking to be about, by the hotel pool, the night after the poker game, was us. It figures. I cannot really hate him. He knew he was screwed then. And he knew he could not ask for my help, without tipping me off that he was the writer. And he knew that would put me in a bind. That is why he stopped me from telling him about reality travel.'
'Honestly, I was on the verge of telling Lee about the multiverse, against Rock's orders, and Lee must have guessed that. Also, since Lee is the writer, I am starting to think that the writer is less a scumbag, and more an idiot, like the rest of us.'
'Though, I doubt anyone here will listen to me. But, I will talk to Ranma and Akira about this tonight. When we are alone.'
'Still, I can help in other ways. Such as this discussion.'
Natsuru spoke up, “Don't feel bad about it, guys. Since Lee had to show so many of his secrets. Except that big one. At his poker game with River. And anyone that just came onto the scene would likely start to see that the wheels were already starting to come off of Lee's long con. I spoke to him, a few nights ago. And it sounded like even he realized that.”
Yolanda inquired, “Still, the most important question, concerning the maids, is whom here was fool enough to contact them about Lee, and his stories?”
Sawyer turned to Yolanda, as she confessed, in a solemn, sober tone of voice, “That is my fault.”
Yolanda turned to Sawyer, as she scolded Sawyer, in a very mother superior fashion, “Little one, do you realize that if things had gone differently, the maids might have torn this city apart looking for Lee? That many people would have died, and it would have caused unwanted attention to be draw towards us, by the rest of the world.”
“This planet has a fully functioning internet, and video cellphone, systems. And the maids rampaging across the city, in their uniforms, with their faces, hair colors, and hair styles, would likely be recorded. With those videos being released onto this internet, and going viral, across the world wide web, within hours.”
“From my time spent on this world, I realized that the people of this world are many things, but they are not idiots... Well, most of the are not... And I am sure you have realized this, as well. They will put two and two together, and realize the maids are the same maids from the Black Lagoon series. Then, the real shit hit the fan for all of us. Both us, and the population of this planet.”
“When those on this planet realize that multiverse travel, and world as myth, are both real.”
Rock listened to Yolanda, as she thought, 'Sometimes we forget that when it comes to the alumni of Roanapur, that Yolanda is up there with Balalaika, and Chang, in terms of authority, and being a badass. But, unlike the other two, Yolanda is more discreet about such matters.'
Sawyer looked down in shame, as she answered, in a meek tone of voice, “Yes. I now realize my mistake. I'm sorry. I mentioned, and sent a copy of the stories to Roberta without thinking. It happens. At least, the worst case scenario did not happen.”
Though, Yolanda still had a firm expression on her face, she agreed, in a more calm, and polite manner, “True. And I am glad you learned your lesson.” She then looked at the rest of the group, with a calm expression, on her face, as she requested, “So, is there anything that we can salvage this situation. Or, has Lee disappeared on us for good?”
Yolanda thought, 'While, I hope Lee gets away. It is wise to keep these women focused, and now allow them to vent out their frustrations on innocent people.'
Rock stated, “Well, we do have Lee's friend, Sam. So, we might be able to get some answers. I got a feeling that Sam may have known that Lee was the writer, for a while.”
Yolanda said, “Good. There is at least, that.” She thought, 'And I will make sure that Sam does not suffer to much, for clearly being a loyal friend to Lee.'
Eda requested, “I would like to ask that man some questions, as well.” She thought, 'Though, ask. In a manner that requires no pain be brought to anyone.'
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Who doesn't. And at least we have someone, deserving, to take our anger out on.”
Yolanda remained calm, as she turned to look at Revy.
Rock said, “Well, come on. We better get this started.” She then turned towards the hotel, started walking passed the other women, and back towards the lobby entrance to the Devil's Hotel.
Most of the other women began to follow Rock.
Meanwhile, Dutch thought, 'I can see where the is going. I think it would be wise to get something from the car, and catch up with them.'
Dutch then ran back to the car that she, Benny, and Janet, had just used. She used her personal keys to unlock the trunk of the car, and she pull out a small item in her left hand. She then used her right hand to shut, and lock the back of the car. After which, she used her right hand to pocket her keys.
Afterward, while Dutch carried something in both her hands, to make sure she did not drop it, as she turned and walked briskly, to catch up with the other women. She caught up with the women, right as they all started making their way into the entryway of the front lobby of the Devil Hotel.
As Dutch caught up with the group, she saw that Benny and Janet were bringing up the rear of the group
Benny and Janet turned to see Dutch join them.
They saw what was in Dutch's hands, as Benny complimented, “Good idea, Dutch.”
Dutch replied, “Thanks. Someone had to get one of these things. And the sooner we use this thing, the better.”
Janet agreed, “You are right about that. Now, let us find this bastard.”
The three women then turned, and joined their family, and friends, inside the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around that time, across town, on the south side of the island, inside Daiyu Casino, in Chang's penthouse office, he sat behind his desk, in his nice, personal chair, as he had a meeting with his chief of security, Malcolm Reynolds, whom was sitting in a chair in front of Chang's desk, to Chang's right side. With the chair to Chang's left, across the desk, from himself, being empty.
Both of them were male. Chang was in his usual black suit, coat, and his light shade of black side-gusset dress shoe loafers. Though, given it was nighttime, he did not have on his sunglasses, which were in an interior coat pocket, on his person.
Malcolm was in his black suit, with black dress shoes.
Both men were armed. Malcolm with a semi-automatic pistol, in a should holster, under his left armpit. While Chang had his two semi-automatic pistols, in their belt holsters, beside each other, on his lower back, at his waistline.
Malcolm Reynolds had scheduled this meeting on short notice, and Chang allowed it do to the fact that Mal would not want to meet with him so quickly, on something, unless it was important.
Chang had just met with Mal, at his office, with Mal shutting the office door, to the hallway, behind them, as they had seated themselves.
Chang thought, 'This set up has turned out better than I had hoped. While I have my operation back to the same level it was in Roanapur. I don't have any superiors to deal with. And my organization is filled with competent people. My only concern is that River likes to disappear at random. But, I will figure out what is going on with her, soon enough. Besides, I have more important concerns to worry about.'
Chang focused on Mal, and he saw Mal looking back at him, with Mal having a calm expression on his face.
Chang requested, in english, “So Mal, what is it that you wanted to speak to me about, on such short notice?”
Mal said, in english, “Well, I just learned that half the police force, including Police Chief Del Soto, have left town, an hour ago, for some reason. Though, my team and I have yet to find out why.”
Chang stated, “That is interesting. Pedro knows who we are. From what I understand, he has for some time. Everything I have learned about him states he is a badass in his own right. And he has known for a while what was going on.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'It is best I do not mention to Mal that Lee is the writer. If for any other reason, than the fact I would be admitting that I knew that Lee was the writer, and I had yet to tell him. With him realizing that I likely knew for at least the few days. Since after Lee's poker game with River.'
Chang continued, “Pedro did not run when Revy and her crew showed up. Nor, did he run when we showed up.”
Mal responded, “I know. That is what concerns me. Also, another concern is how many of his officers know about us, as well?”
Chang stated, “I would say the half that left know about us. And whatever, or whomever it was, it must have seriously scared them, to want to leave in a hurry.”
Mal asked, “The questions are, who spooked them? And is this person a threat to us?”
Suddenly, there was a knock at the door.
Mal turned in his chair, to face the door, as Chang looked towards the door, across the room from his desk.
Chang inquired, in english, “Who is it?”
On the other side of the door, a woman's voice said, in english, with a chinese accent, “Mister Chang, I know you wish not to be disturbed, but I believe that this is an exception, considering who is here to see you.”
Chang ordered, “Then, let them in.”
One of Chang's female subordinates, in a black suit, open the door. She then let Roberta and Fabiola into the room. With the women, in black and white maids uniforms, walked into the room. With women coming to a stop, a few feet inside the room, as they faced Chang and Mal.
Mal stated, “At least we now have our answer as to who scared them.”
Chang kept his eyes on the maids, as he agreed, “Yes. These two ladies would do it.”
Chang then looked over at his subordinate, as he complimented, “You did the right thing to bring them to me. I will let you know if we need you.”
The woman simply nodded in response. She then shut the door behind her. Next, she turned, and briskly walked down the hallway, to get away from the two terrors she had to escorted to her employer.
Inside Chang's office, Fabiola remained silent, as Roberta flatly greeted them, in english, “Hello Chang. Hello Mal.”
Chang calmly said, “Hello Roberta. Hello Fabiola.”
Mal casually replied, “Hi girls.”
Roberta said, “Chang, I heard you went back in business, and started a casino again. I did not realize it was here. Once I learned that this casino was named Daiyu, and whom else was here, I realized it had to be you.”
Chang commented, “Yes. It is obvious. And well, the location was good, and the prices were right.”
Roberta replied, “After walking around this town, I would agree that this city is a good fit for you.”
Chang inquired, “Thank you. So, what can I do for you ladies?”
Roberta stated, “We have just come to town, and we believe that we know who the writer is.”
Fabiola spoke up, in english, “He is the man named, Lee.”
Chang thought, with more annoyance, than worry, 'Oh no. Talk about dropping a grenade in a crowded pool. I think Pedro may have had the right idea.'
Chang remained calm, while Mal's jaw dropped.
As Mal composed himself, he stated, “Lee is the writer? I was less than a foot from him, at one point. I even shook his right hand at one point.”
Roberta commented, “Yes. Lee is clearly a slippery one. He lost us at the Rat Nest, before we realized who he was.”
Chang asked, “Is the Rats Nest still in one piece?” He mentally lamented, 'Knowing them and bars, I doubt it.'
Roberta answered, “No. But, the bartender left before the fireworks. So, she would be alive.”
Chang thought, 'Sometimes, I hate being right. But, at least that cute bartender is alive.' He replied, “That is nice.”
Roberta pointed out, “And given your calm expression, Chang, you clearly knew that Lee was the writer, before I said it.”
Chang smirked, as he commented, “Guilty, as charged.” He thought, 'Well, it looks like I am going to have to tell Mal, and the others, likely earlier than I had planned too.'
Mal turned around to face Chang, as he said, “You knew?”
Chang turned to Mal. He shrugged, as he stated, “I was wondering how to tell you, Mal. I did not want you to kill him, just yet.”
Mal relaxed, as he replied, “Okay.”
Chang thought, “Well, he took the news much better than I had hoped he would. I hope the others take the news just as well.'
Chang then looked over as the maids, as he continued his thoughts, 'Though, I still need to deal with these two more immediate problems.'
Chang said, “But, I am not going to cross you two. So, I take you it that you two ladies want to head to the Devil's Hotel?”
Roberta warned, “Yes. And, as you believe, it would be wise not to cross us.”
Chang stated, “I will have a limo escort you over to the hotel.” He thought, 'And my having a car, and not a limo take you two. That will help put you both in a better mood, towards me.'
Fabiola stated, “No tricks. Eda already lied, and gave us directions here.”
Chang commented, “Really? You might find this interesting to know. I do not have all the details, yet. Because I wasn't here at the time. But, from what I understand, Eda and Lee has a one night stand.”
The maids looked at each other for a few seconds, then back at Chang and Mal.
Fabiola said, “That is interesting.”
Chang pulled out his cellphone, and opened it with his hands, as he looked over at the two maids. He calmly offered, “Ladies, make yourself comfortable. I want you both happy, while you are here. I will have a limo ready for you, within a few minutes.”
Roberta responded. “As long as you get us to that hotel, as soon as possible, we will be happy with you.”
Chang replied, “That ladies, is what I intend to do.”
Chang looked down at his cellphone. He dialed the hotel extension phone for his casino's limo service, into his cellphone, as he thought, 'I will cannot handle handle both the maids, and Mal, at the same time, over Lee. I am just going to have to let the maids go after Lee. While I work on a different angle with helping, Lee. Which requires me to figure a way to placate the maids, Revy and her crew, Mal and likely Spike. The last two should not be that much of a problem, since they work for me. The rest, on the other hand, will be a problem. But, a problem I have dealt with before.'
'Also, it is a good guess that once the maids get to the Devil's Hotel, they will inform the others that Lee is the writer. If they do not already know. Given Eda gave the maids wrong directions, she and Yolanda likely already headed to the Devil's Hotel, to help Lee. And they will likely spill the beans to Revy, Rock, and the others, that Lee is the writer.'
'I would not be surprised if both of them have no developed a soft spot for Lee. Yolanda, for what Lee gave back to her. And Eda, for the way Lee has treated her. Even at River's poker game, Lee comments on Eda were polite. And those two supporting Lee will only help me with my long term plan. Because, they have the ears of many of those within Revy's group, and even the maids may listen to them, with time.'
'And I do not have to worry about Lee not knowing about the maids. Given Pedro was warned of the maids. That mean someone warned him. And that could only be Lee. So, Lee knows about the maids, and he has probably already escaped the Devil's Hotel, and this island, before Eda even reached the Devil's Hotel.'
'Roberta did say that Lee gave them the slip once. So, he already know the maids were in town.'
'And given Lee's skills. As long as he is a moving target, he buys me time to help him, in the long run.'
'Still, I wonder why the maids are after Lee? Lee, nor myself, did anything horrible to them. The only questionable things he did was to Garcia... That gender bending curse... Yes. That would send them on the warpath.'
'Though, this may still be a salvageable situation. Given my offer to Lee. I will just have to think on this for a while, as I hope Lee can stay one step ahead of everyone. And given Lee skills, that he has shown so far, he does have a good chance in doing so. He escaped the maids once, and he has a head start, which will buy us both more time.'
'Perhaps, I should ask River for help, on this problem, the next time I see her. She has been a good sounding board, for the last few days, as we have been trying to iron out our plan, to bring Lee into the fold. By saving his life, getting the other off his back, and giving him a job. We just have not exactly figured out how to do that, yet.'
'But, for right now, I just need the maids away from here, so I can further plan what my next moves are going to be on this matter. And I already have a few ideas on what I am going to do next. But, I will think on them, in a little while. Once, the maids are on the other side of the island, and I do not have to worry about them causing me trouble.'
Chang then held his cellphone up to right ear, as he heard the other end of the line picked.
Next, Chang began to make arrangements to get a limo ready, to take Roberta and Fabiola from his casino, across the town, to the Devil's Hotel, and thus getting him, his personnel, his customers, and his casino, out of the line of fire.'
(_)
At that moment, inside the Devil's Hotel restaurant, by the outside of the bar counter, facing the right wall, River was still male, in his disguise, as Sam. With hims still in his male, casual clothing and black cowboy boots. Though, River did not have on his fake beard, which he had in her right side pants pocket.
River was in a sitting position, on the floor, as he leaned his back against the bar counter wall, between to stools, while he collected himself. His groin was still sore from the blow to that region of the body, which Revy had given him, for daring to cope a feel of both Revy and Rock.
And to be honest, River felt herself fortunate that was the only really painful injury he had received, from the beating that Revy and Rock gave her, for her stupid act, which allowed Lee to steal Rock's reality device, and hopefully escape into the multiverse, before anyone else realized what had happened.'
It was then, that River heard foot steps coming into the room, from the restaurant entrance, to his right side.
River looked up, and over to her right, to see the group of badass women walk back into the bar. River did a quick mental scan of them to find that Lee was not there, and that he had indeed escape into the multiverse.
River happily thought, 'At least Lee escaped. And into the multiverse. And in Lee doing so, it made the pounding I got, worth it. Still, except for the soreness in the groin, I am over the pounding. And none of the women coming towards me, know that myself, as River, and my fake identity as Sam, in my male form, are one in the same.'
'And I never really showed these women my male form. The subject just did not come up. The only people that would recognize my male form, are my brother, and my friends from the Serenity, including Chang.'
'I lucked out, that with my fake beard, I was able to fool Chang, as to who I was. On the few times I had to meet Chang, as Sam, in both of Chang's genders.'
'And this is why I avoided the casino, as Sam.'
'Still, they are likely going to want answers from me, in very harsh ways. And if I want to avoid some more pain, injury, and possibly death, I better show them that who really am.'
'Fortunately, I have long since learned to sneeze on command. Though, I need to wait for the proper time to do this.'
River, and everyone else in the bar, heard Revy order, in a direct, flat, no nonsense tone of voice, in english, “Everyone out. Now.”
Melvin, and the other people still in the bar, took one looked the large group of women walking into the bar, whom clearly were in no mood for questions, and they quickly go up, and walked around the women, to exit the restaurant.
(_)
From behind the bar counter, Melvin stood, as he looked at the women whom just came into the bar. He thought, 'It looks like Lee was able to escape. There is no other reason the girls would be this pissed off. Still, that is to be expected. And I am happy Lee escaped. Though, it is best that I discreetly get my gun, and leave.'
'And given the situation, I settle up with the customers later. Paying the bills is not worth our lives.'
'I will check back here, in two to three hours. To see if the girls have left. If they have left, I will clear up, then. If they are still here, I will wait until morning, to come back and clean up.'
Given Melvin wanted to make sure none of the women even saw him with a gun, and risk an unneeded confrontation. Melvin decided that rather than walking over and pulling out his gun, from its holster, under the bar counter. And then tucking it in his shirt. He instead pulled out a small, cardboard wine box, that was on a shelf, under the counter, near a small trash can, which had a plastic bag in it.
The box was for a bottle of wine he had brought to a pair of customers, at a nearby table, a few minutes ago.
Melvin placed the wine box under the bar counter, by where he had his semi-automatic pistol was holstered. He then stealthy pulled out his pistol from under the counter, and he placed the firearm in a wine box. The hammer of his firearm was half-cocked, so it would not fire. After he was sure the pistol was secured, he closed the wine box, and he carried the box, with him, out from around the front exit to the bar counter, passed the women and out of the restaurant.
(_)
Meanwhile, on the other side of the counter, near where Melvin had been, River was about to start to get up, Revy turned, and pointed at River, with her right hand and extended right index finger.
Revy stated, “You stay. Now, get up, walk over there, and sit in that chair.”
Revy pointed at a nearby chair, in the center of the room, which, in the commotion, had been set away from the table it had come from, with the chair facing the front doors, and the women whom were not interested in River, in a bad way.
Revy then dropped her right hand to her side.
River mentally reflected, 'Well, I guess I was right. It looks like I am going to have to pay the piper on this. Though, it could be worse. And this just means I will have to implement my plans. At the proper time.'
River got up, and walked over to the chair Revy ordered him to go sit in, and he sat down in it. As River did so, he faced the door, and the standing women by the double-doors of the entrance.
A minute later, after the room fully cleared out, save for River, and Revy's crew, women then walked around, in a semi-circle around River, in a direction where they were looking River, in his face.
Some of the women pulled out chairs, from nearby tables. Turning the chairs around to face River, as they sat in them. Other women sat in chairs around the tables, as they faced River. A few even walked to the nearby bar counter, on the left side of the room, here they sat on the stools by the bar counter, or stood, and leaned their back against the bar counter, while the faced River.
Among those at the bar, Dutch sat in a stool, a few feet from the rest of the group at the bar counter. While the others had their attention focused on River, Dutch was working on a tablet like device. She had pulled the tablet device from her car. The device scanned for, and tracked, reality traveling.
While, Dutch listened on the conversation next to her, she worked on the tablet device, as she silently thought, 'Someone had to do the work around here, while the rest of the girls play.'
(_)
Back in the center of the room, River outwardly remained calm, as he looked around the room, at the women staring back at him. Though, when he heard Dutch's thoughts, he inwardly laughed.
By then, Revy walked up to River. Revy stood six feet from River, as she looked own at River's face, while she smirked.
In response, River silently looked up at Revy's face.
Revy continued to smirk, as she said, “Now Sam. You are going to tell us everything about Lee, and yourself.”
River thought, 'Now, would be the proper time.' He shrugged, as he replied, “Well, if that is what you want, Revy. I might as well start with the big secrets, first.”
River made himself sneeze, and instantly changed into a much smaller, very recognizable, woman.
Nearly all the women exclaimed, in unison, “River?!”
River looked around the group, as she chirped, “Surprise.” She then used her hands to swiftly tightened her belt a few notches, around her now smaller waistline. She also leaned down, and retied her boot laces tighter. When she was finished, she leaned back up in her cushioned chair.
Benny asked, “Wait a minute. How can you and Sam be the same person? We saw you both at the same time at the talent contest.”
River replied, “Time travel.”
Benny inquired, “Oh. And since you, as Sam was upset, with you as River. I am guessing that Sam was your past version, and you as River was the future version in that situation.”
River confirmed, as she said, “Correct. While I was Sam, as the judge for the contest, I was annoyed that my future self would crash that party, with Chang. Whom did not know what was going on. I was not planning to do that, at the time. I was worried that my future self would blow my cover as Sam. And my future self would not tell me what was going on, telepathically, until after the contest.”
Benny said, “Now, that I think about it. You almost did blow your own cover, then.”
River replied, “I know. I made mistakes during this whom adventure.”
Benny commented, “Okay. I guess that makes sense, in our crazy life.”
River held back a giggle, as she thought, 'You don't know how crazy it is.'
Janet had been paying attention to the conversation. She asked, “River, that is one of the least of your mistakes, during your time here. Still, I want to know, why did you time travel, into your recent past, and crash the talent contest, in the first place?”
River coyly answered, “I had very important reasons in doing so. We will likely cover those reasons, in a few minutes.” She thought, 'It is because, that was when I learned Lee is dying of cancer. And informing you of Lee's cancer, at this point, might earn him some points towards mercy, from some of you.'
Janet replied, “Fine.”
Meanwhile, Revy had to spent several seconds silent, as she fought to keep herself calm enough to speak, after learning that River had tricked them all, and aided Lee in escaping.
By then, Revy was finally able speak in a manner, that was not laden with curse words. She inquired, with barely control angry, more towards herself for being tricked, than towards River, “River. Of all the damn people we know, that could pull a stunt like this. It had to be you. How long have you been at this?”
River calmly said, “Since before you got here. I have been implementing my plans before Lee even crossed the Mexican-U.S. border. And during that time, I got to know, Lee. He really is a nice guy.”
Janet inquired, “Be that as it may. How long has Lee known that you, and Sam, were the same person?”
River commented, “Not until very recently. I revealed who I was, with an intentional sneeze, right after we ditched the maids, late this afternoon.”
Violin spoke up, “That makes sense, considering anyone could tell that Lee was scared to be near you, as a woman, during the poker game.”
River conceded, “Yes. I regret that I could not tell Lee the truth, at that time.”
Benny inquired, “Given how meticulous Lee clearly is, with his planning, and actions. How did he take the news of your real identity?”
River answered, “He honestly took the news a lot better than I expected he would.”
Akira inquired, “Did he laugh? Or cry?”
River admitted, “He laughed, because he did not feel like crying.”
Akira commented, “Well, he took the news better than I would have.”
Aeryn pointed out, “Considering you stated that Chang did not know that you and Sam, were not the same person, during the talent contest. Am I correct in assuming that Chang continues to not know that you and Sam are the same person?”
River answered, “Yes. Chang does not. I did this on my own.”
Kristina stated, “Chang is going to be pissed when he learns that you let Lee win that poker game, and lost him a million dollars.”
River said, “No. Lee won that game, fair and square. With Chang likely making more money, on the back end, with Lee winning, than if I had won.” She thought, 'Actually, I know for a fact, from reading Chang's mind. And talking to him, after the poker game, that Chang did make more money with Lee winning. Not that I am going to tell any of you, and risk putting you into worse moods. Though, I need to remind you.'
River commented, “Besides, neither of us wanted to be in that game in the first place.”
River looked over at Revy, as she continued, “And we are still both annoyed with you, Revy, and Chang, over that. That is one of the reasons I let Lee talk me into copping a feel of yours and Rock's asses, Revy.”
Ranma snorted, as she said, “And we thought you were crazy before.”
Nodoka commented, “After doing something like that, I am surprise you are still alive.”
River said, “Honesty. So, am I.”
River thought, 'Though, I dodged, or leaned out away from most of their more dangerous blows, without you realizing it. Though, there is something you all need to know, on that matter.'
River stated, “And for those whom have not experienced it. Getting hit in the groin, as a man, does hurt as bad as men say. For women, it is not as bad, but close. Women just don't have the lasting soreness afterward that men do from being hit in that place. And don't change back into a woman, after having that happen. The pain, and soreness, just moves, and enlarges, if you do.”
River placed her right hand over her lower stomach, as she grimaced in pain, for a few seconds.
Rock stated, “It still serves you right for doing that to us.”
River responded, “I am not going to argue that point.”
Rebecca asked, “What about your beard? When you were, Sam?”
River commented, “It is completely fake. I have it in my pocket. I saw no point in wearing it, once Lee knew who I was. Besides, it sometimes gets itchy when I wear it. Still, the beard even fooled, Lee. And it is very hard thing to fool Lee. As Benny stated, Lee is meticulous. He was watchful of every little detail. I guess it comes with being a writer.”
“I figured, since he wrote it so that gender bending prevents beard growth, which I am happy about. Almost as much as no longer having to deal with monthly periods.”
Ranma interrupted, “Speak for yourself.”
River said, “Point taken. Anyway, I figured that wearing a full fake beard, the same color as my dyed red hair, would be a blind spot for Lee. And I was correct.”
Molly asked, “Everyone has a blind spot. So, why did you do all this in the first place?”
River responded, “The same reason, as for almost all my actions. Curiosity. I am a super-genius whom is not a villain. Though, I date one. It is very hard for me to find something that keeps my interest for very long. But, doing this, and being with Lee, has kept my interest for the last few months. That is a rarity for someone like me.”
Yolanda inquired, “What was it about Lee that kept you interested?”
River stated, “Well, as I said. Lee is a nice guy. He makes for a great, loyal friend. But, another thing is his precognitive skills. Since his ability is almost completely instinctual, I could not read his mind when he used it, while playing cards.”
“This made for an interesting situation, when playing cards with Lee, while he used is precognitive abilities. Which he was up front about, when he was doing so. And there was no cheating on his part.”
“Though, even with my intelligence and telepathy, when he used his precognition, I was the one with the disadvantage at the card table. And I do love a challenge. Especially, when the person challenging me is so polite when playing me. And when that person is being honest and open about using such abilities.”
River thought, 'I loved helping Lee develop his... Or more actually, her precognition, and bringing out her true potential. Lee and I, are both, deep enough in the hole, as is. I should never mention that Lee is a male to female transsexual to these women. They likely would not understand.'
Yukio joked, “Damn. You two really do need to get a room. Speaking of which, are you going to dump Chang for Lee?”
As meticulous as River was being, as well. Yukio's comment caught River off guard. As such, River swiftly stated, “No. I like Chang too much. He has kept my interest for years.”
Yukio thought, 'But, how much do you like, Lee?' She noticed River staring at her, and obviously reading her mind. She continued her thoughts, 'Don't worry, I will keep your secret. Besides, I admire Lee for what he did for my sisters, and I. For our second chances at life. And good lives at that. We owe him big. And we really don't want to see him hurt.'
River cracked a smile towards Yukio for a few seconds. She then looked away from Yukio, towards the rest of the group.
Benny inquired, “River, it is becoming clear that your plan was to capture Lee, and inform us. So, at what point were you going to tell us that Lee was the writer?”
River said, “When I had Lee where I wanted him. I was real close to getting him to surrender to me. I was planning to both help him, while negotiate some form of redress of grievances for you, against Lee.” She mentally added, 'Though, Chang was working on an even better deal for Lee. And when I learned of this plan, by reading Lee's mind, I made my plan, plan B. So, I was really buying time, and help Chang with his plan. But, I am not going to tell any of you that.'
Revy looked at Rock. Rock noticed the slightly confused look on Revy's face. She explained, “River was working towards having Lee turn himself over to her, and let us have our revenge, but not as much as we likely planned.”
Revy did not reply, as she turned back to face River.
River stated, “Then, the maids came to town, and my plans blew up in my face. Though, Lee still trusts me. And I look forward to seeing him again.”
Revy said, “After this stunt, we are not letting you anywhere near Lee.”
River could sense most of the women agreed with Revy's sentiments.
River thought, 'Oh well. I can help Lee in other ways.'
Janet realized, as she accused, “Wait a minute, River. You can read minds, and you have been with Lee for this entire time.”
River thought, 'There is no point in denying the obvious. Still, they are not going to get what they want from me, that easily.'
River admitted, “Yes. I read Lee's mind. But, do not think for a second that I am going to tell any of you about his deepest, darkest secrets. If I started doing that, you women would have to kill me, out of paranoia, to keep such secrets you have, from getting out.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Who said you had a choice in the matter?”
River returned Revy's smirk, as she responded, in a direct, and straightforward tone of voice, “Revy, I have been tortured by the best. I am one of the few people here that can honestly say that I likely had a more painful time as a teenager, than you did. And you are all amateurs. Even Sawyer here. Compared to the professional torture technicians that worked on me for extended periods of time, as a teenager. You are not going to get me to spill any of my secrets, about anything.”
Akira spoke up, “River is right. You will not break her.”
River mentioned, “Besides, if all of you tried to gang up on me, I can take down around half of you in a fight, before you would finally put me down, for the count.”
Revy slumped her shoulders slightly in defeat, as she conceded, “Fine. But, what will you tell us about, Lee?”
River's smile turned more genuine, as she answered, “Plenty. I guess you could say that I am about to present his defense for him, for his impromptu trial.”
Janet joked, “Well, you are going to have to put on one hell of a defense for this jury of the damned.”
River lips curled into a mischievous grin, as she stated, “I plan to.”
Revy warned, “Speaking of mind reading, you better not be reading our minds.”
River deadpanned, “Revy, there is not much for me to read about your mind, that I would find interesting. Except for some interesting sexual positions you know about. And honestly, I am not that much of an ass fan, myself. As either a woman, nor a man.”
Revy suddenly blushed beat red, as several of the women in the group started laughing, for a few seconds.
Though, River remained silent, as she thought, 'Though, while you mind is boring, Revy. The persona of your previous life, as Jack Sparrow, is a very fascinating mind to read. And while I realize we had to seal you memories of Jack, Revy. I do regret I did not get a chance to spend more time with Jack.'
'Revy and Jack, are like day and night. And I know deep down Revy, that you admire and like Lee, as a person. Because, Jack did. And at the end of the day, you are both the same person. Though, you both look at life in different ways. It is just at your ego and control issues, will not let you admit how you truly feel about Lee.'
'And while it is tempting to tell you all about Jack Sparrow, and how Revy is the incarnation of him. As a way to deflect attention from myself and Lee. It is to risky. And I do not know the ramifications of how the situation will play out, from you all learning such information. Especially, you, Revy.'
As everyone calmed down, River commented, “Now, to the defense. To start with, the most tragic part about all of this is that Lee really is a nice guy. Okay, he lied to all of us. Given his situation, he had to. But, he was always polite to us. Surely, you can take that into account when you finally catch him? But, he does not deserve to suffer like many of you want him too.”
Rock stated, “River, you have gotten too close to Lee. Though, I think you misjudged us.” She mentally added, 'I hope.' She continued, “When we catch him. And we will. We will have Annie scan his mind, and from what we find, we will decide how to deal with him. He will suffer, but not as much as some of us would like.”
River looked at Rock, as she responded, in a kind tone of voice, “I appreciate that, Rock. But, you need to know, I have read Lee's mind for months. He is arguably as messed up in the head as the rest of us. I think one of the reasons he wrote what he wrote, was to try to keep himself sane.” She thought, 'Which is likely true.'
Revy stated, “Even so, there still needs to be a reckoning for his actions.”
River responded, “You are right, Revy. I am not arguing that point. Even Lee mentally admits that some sort of recompense needs to be done. Still, given what I also read in Lee's mind, I do not think Lee was in full control of himself when he wrote those stories. I think someone was pulling his strings, just as he was pulling our strings. Like a muse, or something.”
Akira commented, “That is possible. And if that is the case, we may need to layoff on his revenge. But, we will do something to him.”
River pointed out, “Just try to remember that Lee is a human being who unknowingly put himself, and us, into some very bad situations. The way he thinks, and talks, he clearly realizes how badly he screwed up. And he would like to make it up to you. But, he has no idea how to approach you without you all likely turning him to shreds.”
Shenhua shrugged, as she said, “I will give you that point.”
Janet asked, “What I do not get is why Lee did not just find a hole to crawl into, under a rock, and hide from us?”
River thought, 'Now, to mention Lee's cancer.'
River stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Because Lee is dying of cancer. In this world, the type of cancer he has is terminal. Even with treatment, he has two to five years. And he didn't have the money for the medical treatments. So he had only six months, or less, to live. With around four months already spent. His whole plan was getting a reality device, and finding a cure for his cancer, somewhere in the multiverse. Escaping revenge was a side benefit.”
Benny replied, “That explains a lot.”
Lotton snorted, as she commented, “Good luck to him. Considering the way he wrote book three made finding a cure for cancer, for B, very, very difficult. With the price of being cured, being B's manhood.”
River conceded, “Lee has long since realized how screwed he made himself by writing that about B.”
There was some minor snickering in the room, among some of the women. But, nothing else came of River's concession.
Ranma asked, “So, Lee has only a few months to live?”
River answered, “Yes. A few months. Maybe less.”
Rock commented, “That works for us.”
Shenhua grumbled, as she pointed out, “Only if we can find him.”
Janet stated, “We can track still him down. He is not that smart. Also, with his cancer problem, we can blackmail him into surrendering. It would be ironic if Lee was put through the vat process, himself.”
River could see grins begin to show on the faces of a number of the women.
While not showing it on the outside, River inwardly smiled, as she thought, 'Actually, that was Chang's offer for Lee. And given Lee is a male to female transsexual, Lee was more than willing to take Chang up on his offer. But, if I told you that, that would just mean you will find another way to have your revenge on her. Because, you would realize that Lee would welcome being changed into a fully functioning woman.'
River agreed, “Yes. I know that both Lee, and I, would admit that it would be poetic. Yet, Lee is a lot more intelligent than you all give him credit for. He knowingly faked playing the fool, for the most part. Except for when he played me at the casino. That is when he brought out his A game, to the forefront. He has become an expert at manipulating people.”
Rock said, “I will admit that he is good a manipulating people. But, he doesn't know everything.”
River smiled mischievously, as she responded, “But, Lee can come pretty close to the truth, with his guesses. Or, you would have caught him by now. Want play a little guessing game, Rock?”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
River commented, “Lee believed that hawaiian shirt that Revy bought you, at the beginning of your series, which was never shown, was a blue color t-shirt, with small pink and green leaves on the front of it. And in front of the leaves in a lighter blue, than the shirt background, is a left fist, with the back of the fist facing forward. With the middle finger extending in, giving the bird, fashion. And there are letter on the chest area of the shirt, across the upper part of the hand, and the fingers, that reads. Fuck you. And you kept you shirt, hung on the wall. Which facing the shirt, it was to the right of your chest of drawers, which you kept a small TV on. The shirt was across from your bed, in the corner. With you window to the right side of your bed. And the window was at a ninty degree angle from your window. Am I correct?”
Rock demanded, “How the hell did you both know that?”
River answered, “First. It was not from me reading your mind. It was Lee who figured that out. He pulled that information from other information, from a picture at the beginnings of the of the Boys and Girls omake. There was a similar shirt located in the exact same place, in your female counterpart's bedroom, by your chest of drawers and TV.”
“Only this t-shirt had a more feminine color scheme of have a pink background, blue and green leaves, a light pink left fist, and dark pink lettering. Given gender reversal between her and your realty, Lee guessed the shirt color scheme was reversed in your reality, to have a more masculine looking shirt.”
Dutch said, “Not bad.”
Yolanda commented, “My. Lee does have an eye for the details.”
Violin stated, “If that is the case. I now understand why you never wore that shirt, Rock.”
Revy said, “Rock, I still say that shirt would look good on you, whether you are male or female.”
Rock shrugged, as she replied, “That shirt was just too loud for my tastes.”
There was some light laughter, from the other women, that lasted for a few seconds.
River thought, 'Now, to further my point about Lee. If I can get them to realize how dangerous Lee now is. They might back off on finding her. Giving me time to find her, first.'
River looked around the room, as she focused on one of the women present. River continued her thoughts, 'And to further my plan. I know just the person to talk about.'
As the laughed died down, River pointed out, “Lee skills of deduction go far beyond just shirts.” River looked over at Eda, as she stated, “Take for example you, Eda.”
Eda looked over at River, as she inquired, with confusion evident in her voice, “Me? River?”
River commented, “Yes. You. From what I read in Lee's mind, he had a theory on your past. Let us see how close it is to the truth. He took the name on your cheerleader uniform, Sanditea, from the Viva Youth omake clip, and he looked into that name, on the internet. And what Lee found was interesting.”
Revy spoke up, “Now, that was a funny omake.”
Rock stated, “I lived in it, as a dream, and even I will admit that it was funny.”
Revy stated, “And Eda, you did look cute in that cheerleader uniform.”
Eda replied, “Thank you, Revy.”
Revy commented, “After seeing that, I regret not inviting you to Akira's dual deflowering.”
Meanwhile, Akira began blush.
Eda said, “I am glad you realize that. I have occasionally wondered why Lee did not include me in that little scene.”
River stated, in a firm, even tone of voice, “Because even Lee's imagination has limits. First, he did not find cheerleader outfits, nor school girl uniforms, to be sexy. It is too close to pedophilia for his tastes. Lee loathes pedophilia, and similar concepts.”
River noticed that Rebecca and Yukio smiled at River's comments.
River thought, 'I am not surprised that you two would support Lee on such matters.' She then focused her attention back towards Eda, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, back to the matter at hand.'
River said, “Though, Lee did understand that such uniforms could be used for comedy. Just not sexuality.”
Violin commented, “Perhaps we should be happy about that.”
Lotton said, “I agree.”
River went onto say, “I think we can all agree on that point. Also, keep in mind, Lee never actually wrote the scene for that night, at the Jackpot, in Roanapur. Lee wrote the scene leading up to that pansexual experience for Akira, hosted by Revy, Sawyer, Shenhua.”
Sawyer cracked a smile, as she remember the event. She muttered, “Good times.” She mentally added, 'I thank Lee for that one.'
River heard Shenhua's thoughts, as she mentally lamented, 'I am not touched those thoughts, with a ten foot pole.'
River commented, “And Lee wrote the aftermath scenes.”
Janet recalled what she read of book one of Lee's stories. And she realized that River was right. She stated, “So, basically what the girls did that night, was all their doing? On their own?”
River answered, with a bit of hesitation in her voice, “Yes. Except for a few events, that Lee listed afterward, to answer some minor questions. Which is kinda of scary, though intriguing, considering what I read the thoughts, concerning that night, from the four minds of those involved in the event.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “And I am very proud of what we did that night. I think we would have won gold medals in the sexual Olympics, with some of the things we pulled off doing that night. If such a contest existed in our reality. Which it doesn't. I checked.”
Shenhua and Sawyer giggled for a few seconds.
Janet turned to Akira, as she stated, “I am surprised that you were sane afterward such an experience.”
Akira looked over at Janet, as she admitted, “Actually, soon after those events, I lost a good chuck of my sanity. Remember, Lee turned me into a bad girl, for a while there. Though, that night did work on my sanity some.”
Natsuru pulled her left hand around Akira's right shoulder, as she said, “But, we were able bring you back to your senses, and sanity.”
Ranma stated, “Yes. Sexual therapy is a real thing.”
There were some snickers and giggling in the room, from overhearing Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma.
Akira looked around the group of women, as she conceded, “Though, it was not that bad. It was just a lot to take in at once. Like jumping into the deep in of the sex scene, without first testing the waters, in the shallow end.”
Violin said, “During my second childhood, in japan, when I first learned about the multiverse, and I actually tracked down your series, Akira. I have agree with Lee. You did build up a lot of bad karma in you own series, before Lee got his hands on you.”
Akira deadpanned, “I know. I feel what Lee did to me in book one, had me work off all that karma.”
Violin said, “I would agree with that.”
Benny turned to Dutch, as she commented, “Back to the Viva Youth omake. Dutch, you never did show us what you looked like as a boy.
Dutch looked up from her tablet, and over at Benny, as she smirked. She said, “And I never will.”
Benny shrugged, as she replied, “Have it your way.” Benny turned back to look at the rest of the group.
Dutch turned back to look at the tracking device she was working on, as she thought, 'The reason I don't tell you is because, as a child, I rivaled Boris, in the pretty boy department. Though, even I was floored when I saw what B looked like as a boy, compared to when I knew him in Roanapur.'
'Also, I do not even want to think about what Lee would have done, if he knew that about myself. And I have no intentions of getting any ribbing for being a pretty boy, from the others here, at this point in my life. Several decades after my own childhood ended.'
'Though, I am glad I have been able to keep that secret from everyone... Oh no...' She looked at River, whom was looking back at her, with a smile on her lips. Dutch mentally requested, 'River, I sometimes forget you are a telepath. Even given the circumstances, we find ourselves in. Could you please keep this to yourself.'
River continued to look at Dutch, as she stated, “Don't worry about it.” River thought, 'The others know better than to ask, Dutch, nor I, about what I was just commenting on. And I need to get back to talking about Eda. If I hope for my plan to work.'
River then turned to look at the crowd, as she continued her explanation, “Anyway, back to Lee's theories on Eda's past.”
River turned to Eda, as she went onto say, “Eda, you are a woman who has spun a web of lies. At one point, you even claimed that your hometown was, Langley, Virginia. Though, I agree with Lee in that was you were likely saying that, as a joke, to screw with Russell's head, for being an asshole, right before you bullet through his head.”
Eda stated, “Yea. I enjoyed killing him for being an asshole that could not keep his big mouth shut.”
River responded, “That is neither here, nor there. But, with one genuine clue, the name from your cheerleader shirt. Lee believed he was able to cut through the lies, nail down your place of origin, and find out the truth about your past.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “This should be good.”
Eda commented, “I doubt any single clue could allow Lee to know my past. I don't even think about my past. So, I know you have never learned about my past, from my thoughts.”
River stated, “You are right about that, Eda. Which makes me stating this, all the more juicier for me.”
“The clue Lee figured out your past from, was the, Sanditea, word on cheerleader uniform, from the Viva Youth omake clip.”
“By using the internet, Lee was able to find a similar name to, Sanditea. He tracked the similar name to some high school sports teams, from the same school. Such as baseball, softball, and american football. The name being, Sandite. He figured the “a” at the end of, Sanditea, was just the feminine version of the name. The rest of was logical.”
“Lee built a profile of Eda, using that high school as the starting point, and with Roanapur being the ending point. And he began to fill in the gaps. Which, once he figured out where you were from, became surprisingly easy.”
“Lee theorizes that you were raised, and maybe born, in Sand Springs, Oklahoma. A suburb of city of Tulsa, Oklahoma. Where you were a cheerleader, at the high school, of that town, during your teenage years. With this helping you maintain you physical shape. After you graduated high school, you enrolled at the University of Tulsa, to study law.”
“You likely minored in languages. Spanish, for obvious reasons. Given the changing demographics of the U.S. population. But also, you likely studied chinese. Considering, at the time, China had the largest population pools in the world. Though, you could have studied hindu. Because, during that time period, India had the second largest population pool. Having a background in either of those two languages would have contributed to your later assignment to Thailand. Considering Thailand is between India and China.”
“Still, I will get to your assignment to Roanapur, later.”
“You likely joined the Delta Sigma Theta sorority, given the organization leans towards having its members support, and be a part of, public service.”
“Sometime, either when you were still studying law in college, or you had just graduated, the government noticed your grades, saw you were also studying languages. They did some digging into your background, and they decide to recruit you.”
“This is because you fit the profile they wanted. A young, healthy, athletically fit, polite. Or, at least you knew your manners. Intelligent, U.S. citizen. Whom has never been in trouble with the law. Whom has very good social and leadership skills, from your high school cheerleader days. Whom, due to joining Delta Sigma Theta, was interested in public service. And whom also has a background knowledge of the law.”
“The government agents that recruited you likely considered you to be perfect military officer material.”
“Given the tattoo on your right arm. The blue cross and shield, with green thorns rising from the sides of the cross, and the shield. In the U.S. government structure, blue is most associated with the U.S. Navy.”
“You were likely offered a scholarship to attended the Naval Academy at Annapolis, Maryland. You accepted, and you transferred to Annapolis, where you finished your schooling.”
“Though, you likely had to retake a number of classes, because the course credits were not transferable. Still, you graduated an officer in the U.S. Navy. And during your schooling, when you were still in Tulsa, you realized that the real power is not on the battlefield, but behind the scenes, in the board rooms.”
“Right before, and after graduation, from Annapolis, you did your best to make sure you were transferred to the bureaucratic side of the U.S. Navy, where your legal knowledge would be best put to use.”
“This is probably the time where you learned your bureaucratic and back channel skills. With this knowledge serving you well, later on.”
“Lee also figured this out, that from your weapon of choice, your Glock, that at some point, you were transferred from the U.S. Navy, to NATO. This is because Glock pistols are issued to officers in NATO. You probably refined your diplomatic skills while serving in NATO. And you likely successes caught the interest of the U.S. intelligence branches.”
“So, you were eventually shuffled around again, to one of the U.S. intelligence branches. Given that Langley, Virginia joke, and your dislike for the drug enforcement administration, and national security agency, most of the Black Lagoon fans, including Lee, guessed you were an agent for the central intelligence agency.”
“From a flashback in the Black Lagoon series, dealing with Russell, one of your early assignments for that agency was a diplomatic function in D.C., with senators, of political leaders, and business men. The assignment was located inside a french restaurant, the Fontainebleau. This is where Russell saw you with a Senator Jack Bonham.”
“You did not have your shades on during that meeting. And from Lee's thoughts, I have to agree. That when you want to, Eda. You can dress like a lady.”
“For example, at that meeting, you were wearing a naval blue suit, with blue cloth jacket, formal blue short skirt that went to just above your knee, a long sleeved formal white blouse, and pale violet leg stockings. Also, you had on a golden bracelet on your right wrist, a choker necklace that was strung with large white pearls, and gold earrings, with large red rubies inside the earring loops. Along with this, your long blond hair being tied into a hairdo, at the upper back of your head, with a few strands being allow to drop long the sides of your face.”
All that Eda could muster to say was, “Thank you.”
Eda thought, with slightly relief, 'I am so happy that Lee can keep a secret. Because I believe River when she said that she pulled this information from Lee's mind without his permission. This means that I do not have to kill Lee that next time I see him. The only reason I killed Russell was that he couldn't keep his damn mouth shut, when I told him to do so.'
'If Russell had just shut up, when I warned him to, I would have not killed him. Instead, I would have convinced Revy, Dutch, and the others, to ransom his ass back to the Florida mafia, which he belonged to. And that ransom payout would have just been another layer of icing on the cake of that entire mission.'
'Though, I now realize that even killing Russel, to keep my secret, did not work out in the long run, because that entire event was shown in that series. Still, on more personal matters, I count Lee as friend, even though River here is airing out my dirty laundry.'
Eda then saw River crack a smile. Eda thought, with slight annoyance, 'Yea River. I know you are reading my mind. But, that doesn't mean you should be a smug bitch about this situation. Just be happy I know I cannot take you in a fight. And I blame you. Not Lee. For spilling all the beans about my life, to those here. Also, I know there is nothing I can do about this information getting out, now.'
River responded, “You're welcome. Thank you. And I wouldn't worry about it. You are among friends.”
There was a little confusion among the crowd a River's comments. While Rock thought, 'River must read Eda's thoughts. And she then verbally replied to Eda's thoughts.'
River ignored the confusion, as she went onto say, “To continue. Eda, you were at that meeting to discuss the support of some treaty called NAFTA. And you were concerned about nations that were part of the EAEC, and a few among the OAS, being against NAFTA.”
“Given the EAEC stands for, East Asia Economic Caucus. Even then, you were gaining experience in dealing with U.S. businesses, and Eastern Asia politics.”
“Also, the OAS stood for Organization of American States, which is a group composed of nations in both North and South America.”
“This was likely one of the factors that eventually got you assigned as the liaison between Yolanda and the U.S. government, at the ripoff church.”
“And this type of meeting was more inclined with internal politics, and not NATO. So, you were likely with that agency, then.”
“Also, the discussions of that NAFTA treaty, and the existence of the EAEC, puts the time of when you had that meeting, and also time you joined that agency, to be around the late nineteen eighties.”
“So, not counting what other missions you had, it is clear that you had quite the exciting career, before coming to Roanapur.”
“And the rest is history.”
There was dead silence in the hotel restaurant, as everyone turned to Eda and they saw that Eda had slowly paled more and more as River continued talking. Meaning that everything River has said was true.
Revy broke the silence, by turning to Eda, as she teased, “So, you were a Navy woman, Eda?”
Eda sighed. She then turned to Revy, as she responded, “And you are a pirate, Revy. Or, were. At this point, I am not really sure. Though, even I will admit that is fits the motif of our lives.”
Revy shrugged, as she agreed, “True.”
Natsuru commented, “Oh my. Lee is like a real life Sherlock Holmes. Though, I would not compare him to Professor James Moriarty, because I believe Lee is genuinely nice. And from his writings, and what we personally know of him, he does value the lives of other people.”
River commented, “As I said before, he is a nice guy.”
Ranma stated, “No wonder he showed us those Sherlock Holmes movies. Given what River is telling us, Lee is working at even higher level that we realized.”
River chirped, “The levels that Lee has are like a staircase.”
Rock turned to Ranma, as she asked, “What films?”
Akira answered for her lovers, “We already told you about the films. Along with that screwy Tropic Thunder movie we watched with Lee. We also watched to newer Sherlock Holmes movies, starting Robert Downey Junior, as a badass Sherlock Holmes. And Jude Law playing a nearly equally badass Doctor John Watson.”
Dutch looked up from her tablet, as she asked, “How badass?”
Ranma stated, “Some of the things the characters pulled in that movie impressed even me. And keep in mind who I am. And damn, that version of Sherlock knew how to think on his feet, during a fight.”
Dutch commented, “We will have to schedule a movie night for those movies.”
River requested, “If you don't mind. I would like to join you. Lee loved watching those movies. And I wanted to see what they are all about.”
Dutch turned to River, as she stated, “Sure. I don't mind. We are after Lee. No you.” She then looked back at her computer tablet.
River replied, “Thank you.”
As this went on, Eda thought, 'Lee knew so much about me, from so little information. Dear lord, if this is how his mind works, I am so happy that he prefers to run, instead of stand and fight. This guy could probably present a legitimate danger towards us.'
River turned to Eda, as she said, “You got that right.”
Eda then looked at River, as she thought, 'River, I am starting to see why you admire, Lee. That man can play at so many different levels at once. He would have made a wonderful spy. I am going to have to stick around with this posse, to make sure they don't accidentally kill Lee, when we do finally capture him.'
Eda saw River crack a smile, as she simply nodded once, in agreement.
Eda thought, 'Still, I need to know if Lee knows more about me. And this might be my only chance to find out.' She then forced herself to verbally ask, “I didn't realize Lee knew that much about me. Is there more?”
River answered, “Oh, yes. Given studies publish for the time, and the fact you were a cheerleader, he estimated you lost your virginity, was between the ages of twelve and fourteen. Also, I am sad to say, that at the time, Lee did not like your personality. Though after you slept with him, and he got to know you more as a person, his opinion of you went way up.”
Eda commented, “That is nice. So, dare I ask why he did not like me?”
River stated, “You may not like it. But, you do have some glaring character flaws. Like all of us. And I guess being characters, we would have character flaws.”
There were a few groans from the crowd of women.
River said, “I apologize for the pun. Still, Eda, you likely never grew out of the queen bee high school personality, you likely had as a teenager. Because of this, you possibly had an overinflated ego. This is backed up by your choice of clothing. When you were not dressed as a nun, you wore clothing that made you look like a teenage girl trying to get laid.”
There was some snickering among the crowd of people.
Eda ignored the snickering, as she requested, “Go on.”
River stated, “Given your outgoing personality, and choice of dress, against the more conservative clothing your assignment required you to wear, for you undercover job, it is likely you did not choose your assignment.”
“If Russell's flashback gives any indications, your previous assignments were to spy on people in a formal setting. But, given your outgoing personality, you likely slept with someone you shouldn't have. And you were sent to Roanapur, by your superiors, due to your indiscretions.”
Revy snorted, as she commented, “Lee knows you well, Eda. I guess he nailed you in more than one way.”
Eda pointed out, “Well, my ego has long since deflated. But, I am still hot. We slept together. Why didn't he include more of me in his stories. Not that I am complaining.”
River admitted, “Yes. You are a hot, sexy woman. That is the case. And yes, you both did. But, hotness is not that much of a factor in fiction in text form. Keep in mind, he figured out all that, and he was at the time, not interested in you.” She looked out, among the crowd, as she continued, “Imagine the type of profiles Lee has in his head on those of you he is interested in.”
River voice gained a hint of embarrassment, as she continued, “Still, the profile he has of me is not very flattering, either. He clearly prefers objectivity, over thinking below his waistline. As a writer, that is a good trait to have. But, as a person, it really is not.”
Janet commented, “No wonder our feminine charms did not work on him.”
Shenhua said, “I never thought I would ever meet a man that would not at least think a little below his waist.”
Eda confirmed, “Well, Lee did. He enjoyed the sex with me. But, I get the feeling he enjoy our dinner conversation more than the sex.”
Janet shrugged, as she commented, “Some people are that way.”
Akira spoke up, “Actually, right after we saw the Tron Legacy movie, as we were all leaving the theater, Lee whispered to me that he found sanity attractive in a woman.”
Rock stated, “Lee said something similar to me.”
Revy stated, “No wonder he did not try to come on to us. Beside knowing better. We are not his type.”
River thought, 'I don't think Lee even knows what her type is. I believe that Lee is mistaken. It is not so much insanity that she finds a turn off, but violent people are a turn off for her. Which, I don't blame her for.'
'I realized this half an hour, after I revealed my identity to her. It occurred to me that she still likes me as a person. Even though she knows I used to be really insane. But, she has no problems with being my friend, because I am not really a violent person, by nature. Still, I have to get these women to understand something they missed in my explanation.'
River then held up her right index finger, as she stated, “You are all missing the major point here. One word. One word was all Lee needed to track down all that information. And Lee knows a lot more about everyone here, including myself, than one word.”
“Lee has even learned how to use a single word to shift the situation to his advantage. Such as the whole, Tex-Mex ordeal. And he came up, and implemented, that plan in under thirty seconds. Watching that man work up a plan is like watching Rock or Violin here do the same thing. He comes from the same type of genre savvy.”
River then moved both her hands to her lap.
Rock asked, “If Lee is that savvy, then he was likely pretending to be someone else in front of us. So, the question becomes, who is the real Lee? The fool we lived with, here at the hotel? Or, the gambler that you played at the casino?”
River answered, “Neither. Lee is a natural chameleon. He watches people and imitates their mannerisms, that he thinks best fits the given situation for himself. But, he is untrained. So, he makes mistakes. Still, as I said before. Lee really did beat me at cards, that night, at the casino. I was not expecting him to tell so many jokes. Though, because of all of this. As much as I do not want to say this. Lee may have no real personality of his own.”
Akira spoke up, in a sad tone of voiced, “Actually, Lee does have a personality. A very, very dark personality.”
River looked at Akira, as she sternly asked, “What do you know of Lee?”
Ranma, and Natsuru looked way from River, as Akira looked at her. Akira answered, “After we first came here. After the Rats Nest massacre, and that chase through town, in the GTO. We three decided we wanted to play a prank on Lee. We just thought he was some polite guy, and we wanted to see what made him tick. We noticed that he did not drink much. As such, we can up with as idea that we would invite him to drinks at the hotel bar here, late at night.”
“So, right before the bar closed, with only him, us, and the bartender, when Lee went to the restroom, we spiked his drink with a Mickey Finn. After he consumed some of the drug, it got him real drunk, really quick.”
“We were expecting him to just breakdown, and cry. Instead... He had a psychotic episode.”
“Think on par of one of us, on a bad day situation. And even then, he was emotionally holding himself back. In that state of mind he was in, he clearly wanted to hurt us, but he still able to barely able to keep himself under control. And he wasn't keep himself in control for his own sake, but for our sake.”
River stated, “I do not remember reading Lee's mind about the incident. Nor, from your three minds.” She thought, 'And Melvin likely didn't think about it. Because it must have been really bad. And he knew mentioning it after the fact would only cause trouble for everyone.'
Akira responded, “Lee likely didn't remember the incident. And we didn't like to think about it, let along talk about. We felt very guilty about what we did.”
River replied, “Fine. Now, let me read your mind over the event.”
Akira said, “Okay.” She then started thinking over that night's events.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the Devil's Hotel lobby, the two clerks at the check in desk, saw two women walk into the lobby, from the front entrance.
They also notice that the music in the lobby had suddenly changed.
The two clerk instantly recognized the new music track, from a movie both of them enjoyed watching, years ago. Still, they also realized that musical track would only start playing due to the newcomers being extremely dangerous.
For as the clerks wisely ducked under their desk counter, the lobby speakers continued playing the musical track, Battle Without Honor Or Humanity, from the Kill Bill Volume One soundtrack.
(_)
In the front of the hotel lobby, right in front of the lobby doors, from the entryway, Fabiola stood to Roberta's right side.
Fabiola turned to Roberta, as she inquired, in spanish, “Where do we go from here?”
Roberta turned to Fabiola, as she answered, in spanish, “We will start with the hotel bar. Sawyer stated, in her e-mails, that it is this way.”
Roberta then turned to their left, as they headed for the hotel restaurant and bar.
(_)
Back in the hotel restaurant, several seconds later, River had finished looking into Akira's mind, concerning the night that Lee had a psychotic break.
River looked down at the floor, as she quietly said, “Lee's mental masks are so well made. I had no idea he was that messed up.” She then looked up at the group, as she stated, “More so, than I previously stated, earlier.”
Revy question, “Given how polite Lee is, how messed up could he be?”
River pointed out, “You are forgetting that his manners are another mask to him. If what I am reading from Akira's mind is correct. Underneath Lee's masks, he is sadomasochistic sociopath. Remove his masks. and he is likely as dangerous as you are, Revy, during one of your Whitman Fever incidents.”
River's comment caught everyone's attention.
River went onto say, as she looked around the crowd, “Though, I can also state that, except for the lies, his general day to day actions, and acts of kindness, are genuine.”
River then looked over at Revy, as she continued, “He clearly tries to be something besides what life made him into. Though, I am not one to judge, on such matters.”
Rock spoke up, “Who of us is?”
No one present dared to touch that question.
Yolanda stated, “Still, if someone got a hold Lee, he could be dangerous.”
A new voice, coming from the restaurant entrance, bluntly stated, in english, “Then, we will find him, first.”
Everyone turned to face the newcomers. Whom they saw visibly scared half the group, and set the other half of the group on edge
At the entrance they saw Roberta and Fabiola standing in their maid outfits. With Roberta standing to Fabiola's left side.
While Roberta showed off her slasher smile, she continued her statement, in a cold merciless tone of voice, “We will capture him. We will break him. And finally, when there is nothing left but agony. We will end him.”
River sternly responded, “You will not lay a finger on Lee.”
Roberta focused on River, as she coldly said, “Ah, but little girl, you are going to help me.”
As Roberta and Fabiola began walking towards the group. Specifically River, Revy and Rock, whom stood up from her seat, immediately stepped between them, and River, while facing Roberta.
Roberta and Fabiola then came to a stop, ten feet from the group. Sixteen feet from River.
Revy stated, “Stand down, Roberta. River is off limits. If you harm her, you will have to answer to her lover, Chang, her family, the Serenity crew, and her friends, the Lowe family. And those groups working together could take you in a fight, and make your life a living hell.”
Revy then turned to River, as she stated, “But, Lee is fair game.”
River remained silent towards the rest of those present.
The two maids remained where the stood, as they both thought over Revy's warning.
Natsuru whispered to Akira, “This could be bad.”
Akira quietly responded, “I agree. As much as I would like to see Roberta and River go at it. To see which of them is actual the bigger badass. I would not want to be on the same planet at them when they did so.”
Natsuru softly replied, “You got that right.”
A few seconds later, Fabiola turned to her teacher, as she said, in english, “We do not need help from this tramp to find the master's violator.”
River frowned at the insult. She thought, 'With the maids here. It looks like my plan to get them to back off of Lee is a bust. While I had a chance to convince the others to lay off of Lee. I realize, from what Lee knows, that these to maids will not back off on their hunt. And I do not want just me, and them hunting Lee.'
'Besides, the maids will pressure the others to continue the hunt. And with the others along, they will help reign these two in. And offer some distractions for me to save Lee.'
'Still, there are other ways I can help Lee in this conversation. I just have to wait for the proper time.'
Roberta and Fabiola turned to Eda, as they frowned at her.
Roberta sarcastically stated, “By the way, Eda. Thank you for the bad directions.”
Eda turned to Roberta, as she deadpanned, “Sorry. I thought you meant the casino hotel, not the Devil's Hotel.”
The maids noticed that some of the girls giggled at Eda's comment.
Revy warned, “No fighting girls. Or, you will be thrown out of the room. Besides, Eda probably gave you bad directions to prevent violence from breaking out.”
Rock thought, 'Revy, the peacemaker. Now, that is a scary thought.'
River suppressed a giggle, at Rock's thought.
Eda stated, “Revy, is right. That is why I lied to you, both. I am trying to keep things from exploding.”
Fabiola smirked, as she commented, “Well, when it comes to the Rats Nest, you're a little late on that. Though, the bartender left before the place went up in flames.”
Revy inquired, “You blew up the Rats Nest?”
Roberta answered, “Yes.”
Revy stated, “Damn. That is the only decent bar in town, where I could get drunk in peace.” She let out a deep breath. She then continued, “Still, I expect you two to behave yourselves, here.”
Roberta and Fabiola just glared at Eda, but they decided to do nothing about her, as they turned their attention back to the rest of the group.
Violin spoke up, “Moving on. There is one thing about Lee that is still bothers me. I noticed the first time I saw Lee, when he was introduced to us, he was scared out of his mind, when he was surrounded by all of us. Which makes sense, now. But, somewhere along the line, he got a lot more confident. And that casino game is a total mystery to me. He displayed skills, and knowledge, at the same time, during that game, that would take decades to learn.”
Aeryn supported, “Now, that I think about it, honey. You're right.”
All eyes turned to River.
River giggled uncomfortably.
Revy inquired, in a less than amused tone of voice, “Something you want to share with the rest of us?”
River swallowed hard, as she thought, 'Oh crap. I am going to have to tell them about the time loop. And when they realize what Lee did to them, during the time loop, they will never stop hunting her down. Still, if I tell them, I can at least smooth things over.' She requested, in a weak tone of voice, “Promise me, in exchange for learning this, should you capture Lee, that you will kill him quickly.”
Shenhua warned, “We promise not to kill you quickly, if you answer us, right now.”
River explained, “Alright. I am sure everyone here remembers the Day of the Dead holiday. November second. And I am sure some of you feel as that day was never going to end. Well, it almost never did. We all got stuck in a temporal loop, with that day repeating over and over again.”
“Personally, I did not mind much. From what I can piece together, in most of those time loops I secretly spent time with Chang that day. It was a very romantic day for us. We ended it by swapping genders as we made love on the beach, and then we continued our love making in her hotel room. And I got to repeat that experience over and over again, for years.”
“Anyway, it was like from the movie Groundhogs Day, with Lee in the role of Phil. Though, from reading Lee's mind, he was not the cause of the loop. Just the poor sucker that was caught in the eye of the storm.”
Rock quietly asked, as she feared she already knew the answer deep down, “How long?”
River quietly said, “Around twenty years.”
River's soft comment had the effect of a loud scream, as nearly everyone else yelled, almost in unison, “TWENTY YEARS!!”
Meanwhile, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Fabiola, and even Roberta had begun laughing.
Between the laughs, Janet commented, “So, that is what Lee meant by saying that he felt like he had spent several years here. With such high stakes on the line, only a lunatic would be so open about the truth. Yet, he knew we wouldn't be able to piece to together the truth in front of him.”
River stated, in an amused tone of voice, “Don't laugh too hard, Dutch, Janet, and Benny. The time loop effected the entire planet, including the Bahamas.”
Janet, Benny, and Dutch immediately stopped laughing, as the maids laughed even harder.
Benny recalled that day. She then stated, “Relax guys. I remember that day. We took that day off, and had a great time that night.”
Dutch commented, “Twenty years worth of days off with you two doesn't sound that bad.”
Janet said, “I agree.”
By then, the maids had started to calm down.
Akira stated, “Still, if we hope to catch Lee, we have to know what he learned while in the time loop.”
Ranma mentioned, “I brought something with us, in our hotel room, that should let us remember those years. After having to deal with so many brain altering techniques, earlier in my life, I now travel with some medication that removes almost all such techniques. Just give me a few minutes to go get it.”
Ranma then got up from her chair, and she quickly walked out of the room.
Violin turned to Fabiola, as she asked, “So, Fabiola, barring this hunt, how has life been treating you?”
Fabiola turned to Violin, as she responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Fine. You?”
Violin replied, “Fine.”
Meanwhile, Sawyer turned to Roberta, as she commented, “I hope I did not cause too much of a ruckus at the Lovelace household, by sending you a copy of the stories, and telling you about the writer.”
Roberta turned to Sawyer, as she calmly said, “No. That has not been the case.”
The two maids then caught up with their friends.
(_)
Five minutes later, Ranma returned with a small oil lamp in her right hand, by its handle, while she held a zippo lighter in her left hand.
Ranma lit the lamp. She then closed the lighter's top, extinguishing the flame. After which, she put lighter away, into her left, side pants pocket.
Ranma continued to hold the lamp, by its handle, with her right hand, as she explained, “This is magic. Just breath in the smoke, and effect should happen in a few moments. But, make sure you are sitting when you do it. This will be like a rush, and total recall, of what you want to remember. It can be disorientating.”
Ranma then walked towards the group, as she let each woman inhale a little of the smoke, from the lamp.
River stated, “I decline.”
Ranma turned to River, as she pointed out, “I understand why you decline, River. But, from what I understand, this smoke will not make you remember things you do not want to recall. I made sure the magic this lamp uses has was designed to prevent someone from going crazy. And I will let you borrow it for Chang, later. Having the ability to recall twenty years of love making would be a wonderful favor for him to owe me.”
River conceded, “Fine. You can let me borrow the lamp, tomorrow.” She turned to Revy, whom had just inhaled the smoke.
River read Revy's surface thoughts, for a few seconds. River then mentally reflected, with relief, 'Good. Jack Sparrow is still sealed inside Revy. I guess that the smoke does not transcend to past lives. Which is good for everyone involved. Though, Revy and the others, is going to be really pissed, any second now. Once they realized how Lee tricked them in the time loop. And I have to be ready for their response, with my own reply.'
The group then took turns breathing in the smoke, including Benny, Dutch, Janet, and River. Though, they each sat down in a chair, when they inhale the smoke. Within seconds the instantly recalled things.
Ranma was the last one to do so. She sat down in a chair by Akira, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto. She then inhaled the smoke, capped the lamp, to put the inner light out, and set it on the table by her. A few seconds later, she then remembered her time in the time loop, along with a few other older memories, of life events, that she did not realize she had experienced.
Meanwhile, just after Ranma recalled her memories, Revy blurted out, “How dare Lee make fun of my loving making. Just because I like using the back door, that is no excuse for mocking me over it.”
Rock just blushed at her lover's comment.
Though, everyone else was to wrapped up in their own memories, and thoughts, neither comment, nor laugh, at Revy's statement.
Akira commented, “Those pranks of his were sometimes truly childish. That refried beans prank was embarrassing for us. Especially, me.”
River spoke up, “Well, you girls shouldn't have tricked Lee into getting stoned without his permission. From what I read of his mind, before the beginning of the time loop, he was still upset about the pot brownies. And when the time loop happened soon after, it offered him the opportunity to get some revenge on all of you.”
Rock thought, 'Oh no. That final prank. The story. The implications.' She then noticed River was looking right at her. She then thought, 'River is reading my mind. She knows. Don't worry, River. I am not going to use this cosmic loophole. And I am not going to tell a soul about it.'
River just smiled at Rock.
Rock sighed in relief.
Natsuru admitted, “River, you may have a point about that. I mean, from what I understand, Lee never put any of us in such a position. We might apologize to him, if it wasn't for all the other crap he put us through.”
River looked over at Natsuru, as she rolled her eyes in frustration, as she sighed, as she said, “Sometimes I feel like the only grown up in the room.”
Violin commented, “Been there. Done that. So, I can sympathize. Still, I think I remember Lee kissing me.”
Rock replied, “I think Lee kissed all of us.”
River did not show any outward reaction, as she mentally lamented, 'She didn't kiss me. But, then she did not know it was me, at the time. So, I will let it slide.'
Akira responded, “You got to admit, Lee is a good kisser. And I don't think he tried to sleep with any of us.”
Violin then remembered some more things, as she mentally yelled, 'Harvey! I know you remember the time loop!'
Harvey mentally whimpered, 'In my defense. Like I said years ago in that loop. You were having really good sex with Aeryn. Besides, Lee didn't cause the time loop. And the fact of the matter is, when I later tried to get you to remember day to day, during the time loops. It never stuck. So, I decided to just go along for the ride.'
Violin mentally inquired, 'Fine. But, why didn't you tell me about the time loops, and Lee being the writer, afterward?'
Harvey mentally responded, 'Because knowing about the time loops would not have amounted to much. River is right, Lee is actually a decent guy. After he grew out of his pranking phase, he worked towards self improvement. I respect that. Though, if he had gone the other way, and become an evil hedonist, I would have stepped in.'
Violin mental replied, 'That is nice to know.' Violin then remember another interesting occurrence in the time loop. She thought, 'And this is why you kept suggesting those different sexual positions for Aeryn and I, during the time loops?”
Harvey mentally said, in a casual manner, 'Well, I could not let things to to repetitive and boring. And it was a good day for us and Aeryn. It is just that good day repeated for us, for around twenty years.'
Violin mentally said, 'Okay. Thank you for that. The differences help me separate one day from another.'
Harvey mentally suggested, 'From what I understand, Lee had a similar problem. Now, let us turn out attention back to the group. From the look on Shenhua's face, she is recalling the accidental pranking Lee did to her, with a cherry bomb. Very funny stuff.'
Violin mentally said, 'Really?'
Harvey mentally stated, 'Yes. We were just outside, in the lobby, as the events took place, on that day. Just listen.'
Shenhua cursed, “How dare he get me wet like that!?”
Sawyer turned to Shenhua, as she asked, “Like what?”
River defended Lee, “Oh come on. The cherry bomb in the toilet trick is a classic. And when Lee lit the cherry bomb, dropped it into one that men's lobby toilet, and flushed it down the drain, with it causing the toilets to explode. He honestly did not know you were on the women's side. Besides, you killed him once, during the time loop, over that matter.”
Several of the women laughed for a few seconds at Shenhua and Lee's misfortunes.
As they calmed down, Shenhua grumbled, “I killed him too quickly. I will not make the same mistake, again.”
River then turned to Revy, as she said, “And about that ass joke, Revy. I read Lee's mind about that joke. You have to admit that ass humping joke was a work of genius. The set up. The timing. The delivery. No wonder that man loves to write. Still, you need to know that Lee is truly not that judgmental when it comes to such actions take in the bedroom, between two consenting adults. He just honestly found the joke to be funny on its own merits. He didn't mean for it to be insulting. As far as he was concerned, you two would have never remember it, and he was not going to talk about it.”
Revy stated, “Okay. I can see your point...” Revy then remember something about the time loop, and Lee, as she exclaimed, “What a minute! That bastard owes us money!”
Everyone else suddenly remembered what Revy was talking about.
Akira said, with annoyance in her tone of voice, “That sneaky little con artist. Two thousand dollars, for two hours of our time, for a single day. Reset, rinse, repeat. And we never actually got to keep any of the money.”
Lotton giggled, as she commented, “Well, it was a good con. I might have tried that in his position. So, what did he learn?”
River stated, “I taught him spanish, and hand to hand combat. He got pretty good at both.”
Janet asked, “How good in a fight is Lee now?”
River thought, 'If I tell them, they might back off in the way the approach Lee. At the very least, they will think twice about a direct confrontation with him.'
River answered, “With Lee's precognitive abilities, he could probably hold his own with almost everyone here. He could give me, and the maids, a workout. Though, he might be crazy, he is not insane enough to tangle with any of us. Unless he has too.”
Rock said, “Yes. Lee has always be one to avoid conflict. I always admired him for that. I still do. Though, we need to know what other skills, and combat abilities Lee also knows. Especially, the skills that were taught by us.”
Revy remembered, as she stated, “Akira, Natsuru, and I taught him how to use a gun... Well, mostly Akira and Natsuru.”
Akira commented, “Lee is good with a pistol. But, he never could master dual wielding pistols.”
Natsuru said, “True. But, he is always a crack shoot with a rifle, and machine gun. So, he is dangerous with just about any type of firearm you could name.”
Ranma commented, “Yes. I was there with Akira and Natsuru a few times, when they were teaching Lee how to use firearms. Lee knows how to listen and learn. Later, he even convinced me to teach him a few tricks. Such as locked picking.”
Molly spoke up, “It is a safe bet that he broke into our rooms, and searched them during the time loop.”
Sarah stated, “I doubt he found anything of use. It is clear that reality devices did not work in the time loop, because Lee was still here afterward.”
River said, “That is true.”
Rock then remembered some instant woman packets that went missing a few times, in her suite, during the time loops. She thought, 'Could Lee have?...'
Rock looked over at River, and she saw River crack a grin.
Rock thought, 'Lee did... Which really doesn't surprise me.'
River silently said, with her lips, in english, “Not a word.”
Rock thought, 'Don't worry, River. Even I am not going to mention that to anyone here. Not even Revy. That would be like pouring gasoline on a fire. There is no telling what would happen. I may want revenge, but I am against rape, which is what most of them would consider doing to Lee, if they knew he already personally experimented with gender bending.'
River nodded in agreement, as she silently said, with her lips, in english, “Smart move.”
Violin said, “Lee conned me into teaching him physics, all the way up to the advanced courses. Along with how to take care and work on his car.”
Aeryn stated, “Learning all this means he has the intelligence to better himself.”
Lotton pointed out, “True. Though, that being said. Lee conned us for months, years, if you count the time loops. Either he is a genius, or we are idiots. I prefer to believe the former, over that latter.”
As silent reigned for several seconds, it took all of River's will power to not burst out laughing, as no one dared to touch Lotton's comment.
Rock then spoke up, “Now, that I think about it, I taught Lee some japanese. But, I started catching on that he was learning to easily, and he quit a little over midway, to where he clearly wanted to be on that.”
Natsuru spoke up, “Akira, Ranma, and I did to, for a little while, until we started catching on that he was learning too quickly, as well.”
Sawyer said, “I taught him how to formally dance, and sing.” Everyone looked at her. Sawyer noticed this, as she added, “A girl's got to have hobbies.”
Shenhua said, “I taught him speak and read, chinese, along knife throwing. It looks like he learned that card throwing trick a the casino from me... Oh no... He is deadly with a deck of cards.”
Janet asked, “What do you mean?”
Shenhua answered, “That card trick he did at the casino was only the tip of this iceberg, to his throwing abilities. I think I taught him too well.”
Rock stated, “You are right Shenhua. I remember watching him one day in the time loop, where he was throwing two cards as once, as two different dart boards. He was hitting the bull of both boards at the same time, at thirty feet. He even change it up to where he could swap out both targets and still hit the bull of the boards.”
Benny commented, “So, he can dual wield a deck of cards. What is so dangerous about that?”
Rock stated, “What is dangerous is that with his precognition, he is deadly accurate with the cards in the angles needed to be thrown to cut into his targets, most of the time.”
River giggled, for a few seconds. She then stated, “Yea. Lee is the only person I know of that can lay claim to being a dual wielding death dealer. Though, it does sound more cool than it actually is.”
Janet asked, “So what? How can a cardboard playing card cut deeply into something? I mean, as best, he could give us paper cuts.”
Eda stated, “Janet, you need to visit tornado alley, sometime. I can show you wooden telephone poles, with pine needles sticking through them. All it takes is force, and accuracy.”
Benny thought on Eda's comments, for a few seconds. She then said, “Eda, is right about that. I can see now, how having using a decks of cards, in such a way, could be dangerous.”
Janet realized what they were saying, as she replied, “Okay.”
Revy inquired, “But, why choose playing cards as a weapon? Why not just get a gun? I remember a bet he did with me. He shot a single can into the air, three times, with one of my cutlasses. We clearly taught him well enough to use such weapons.”
Akira and Natsuru replied, almost in unison, “Thank you.”
River pointed out, “Mexico has very strict anti-gun and knife laws. Especially, for foreigners. Lee knows this. So, he decided to find an unusual weapon, that was cheap, easy to replace, and that most people would dismiss as harmless. But, a weapon that he could use to defend himself with. If he had to. And a deck of playing cards fit his needs, and motif, well.”
“That being said. The only reason the police here did not come after you, is someone in their chain of command likely recognized you, and that person did not want to get the police here killed, by sending them after you.”
River thought, 'I will give Pedro some cover. I kind admire the man. He made the best of a bad situation. Chances are, with him getting that warning about the maids being here, he is already out of town, by now.'
Dutch continued to look at her electronic tablet, as she stated, “We think we found out who was the one to keep the police off of us? We will tell you, later.” She thought, 'Nice try covering for Chief Del Soto, River. But, we know that Pedro was the one that helped Lee.'
River mentally cursed, 'Damn it... Well, at least Pedro has a head start. Like Lee has.'
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Well, one thing is for sure, girls. We are going to have fun collecting from Lee, on what he owes us, plus interest.”
River sarcastically remarked, “Good luck.”
Everyone turned back to look at River.
Rock commented, “I do not see a problem with finding, Lee. Now, that we know what he looks like. And we will pull pictures from the security cameras, to give to our friends, here.”
River giggled for a few seconds. She then smirked, as she stated, “You think you had a good look at Lee. None of you, nor any cameras, have ever got a look at his face, without him wearing glasses, and a hat, of some type. That was intentional on his part. Black is not even his natural hair color. He planned his escape before he even baited you to come here.”
“Lee lives to be crazy prepared. And he plans several moves ahead of everyone else. That is why you haven't caught him, yet. He could lose the glasses and hat, and you probably won't recognize him.”
River overheard Revy curse, under her breath, “Damn it. She is right.”
Yurika pointed, “But, what about when he swap out his hat and glasses, as he left, a little while ago?”
Lotton commented, “Lee had his back turned to the lobby cameras, when he swapped out his hat and glasses. So, those cameras will be no help, either.”
Yurika muttered a cursed, “Damn.”
Benny stated, “River may have a point. If I got this straight. Lee is an intelligent, patient, and a skilled planner. He has an eye for detail, and deduction, that would make Sherlock Holmes proud. He is a master of disguise. He can speak multiple languages. He has an encyclopedic knowledge of just about everything. He has a wide variety of skills. Including combat skills. That would allow him to hold his own in a decent fight. And he is dying of cancer. So, he had no fear of death. And he has nothing left to lose.”
Revy commented, “That pretty much sums it up.” She thought, 'Except, Lee told me she wants to live. And I believe her. But, if I told you that, you could use that as a bargaining chip against Lee.'
Benny girlishly whined, “We are never going to find him.”
While Dutch sat in her stool, with her back to the bar counter. She faced the other women, as she spoke up, as she continued to look at her tablet in her hands, “Found him.”
Everyone looked over at Dutch.
Dutch looked up at the group, as she stated, “The signal says he is in the Babylon Five station. But, if I am reading this right, the date is far in the future from when the series happened.”
Benny, Violin, and Akira, got up from their chairs, and walked over to Dutch, to look at the tablet.
Dutch passed the tablet around. First Akira, then Benny, and finally Violin.
As Violin held the tracking device, she looked at the date on the flat screen of the tablet, as she said, “The date is January twenty-sixth, twenty-two eighty-one.”
Violin looked up from the tablet, and handed it back to Dutch. As soon as Dutch had the tracking device in her hands, Violin look out among the crowd. Violin stated, “From the date, I would say Lee was on Babylon Five, a couple of months before it was finally decommissioned, and blown up. Probably between when John Sheridan was having his final supper, on Minbar, and when John visited Babylon Five for a final, quick visit, during the final Babylon Five episode, Sleeping in the Light.”
Benny remembered what happened in that episode. And why Lee would head to Babylon Five, between those dates. Benny look at her family and friends, as she sarcastically commented, “Just wonderful. Lee really knows what he is doing. That would be the perfect time and place for him to go to, for his plans of escape to work. At that point, Babylon Five personnel would be moving everyone off the station, as they get the station ready to be decommissioned and blown up.”
“All quarter million of them, including the homeless lurkers. With Earthforce being so busy moving potentially tens of thousands of homeless people. Including many with no documents. Off the station. Lee could easily slip through, get on one of the shuttles, and be anywhere in the series. And that is a big place to search. As Lee will literally have an entire galaxy to hide in.”
“Lee knows the rules he wrote. The further the distance, the harder it is to track him. The longer time between the jump and scans, the more difficult it is to get a lock on the jump.”
“Lee will just go to another place, elsewhere in that galaxy, and jump to where he really wants to go, and we will likely lose him for good.”
Then, a thought occurred to Benny, as she commented, in a more calmer tone of voice, “Though, I doubt he would be crazy enough to jump in hyperspace. None of us ever tried to do so. And Lee never talked about reality jumping while in hyperspace. So, we do have time.”
Akira mentioned, “Actually, our family has been to that reality.”
Violin turned to Akira, as she asked, “Really?”
Akira looked at Violin, as she answered, “Yes. We spent a few months there. It really is a big place to hide.”
Violin cursed, under her breath, “Damn it.”
Akira stated, with encouragement in her voice, “I said it was a big place. But, I did not say we could not find him... Come on guys, he is not that smart. We just got to figure out where he would want to go.”
Violin said, “I doubt he would go to one of the alien worlds. That is too much of an unknown for him. And this is speaking from experience.”
Lotton stated, “Earth is out, given the plague that hit there. The plague was cured by then. But, given the way Lee wrote those gender bending outbreaks in book three, he would know how dangerous an outbreak could be. And how plagues can go dormant for years. If not decades. And even centuries. So, Lee will not risk going the Earth.”
Then, Janet realized something, as she lightly chuckled.
As the other women turned to look at Janet, while they wondered why she was chuckling, Janet looked around the road, as she stated, “I got it. I know where he is going. Where is the one place he writes about the most, besides Earth?”
Everyone looked at each other for a moment, then they realized, as they stated, almost in unison, “Mars!”
Natsuru commented, “Good. It takes two days, by the hyperspace gate system, to reach Mars from Babylon Five. We actually took a trip in hyperspace, from Babylon Five, to Mars. So, we would know.”
Rock asked, “When exactly did you go to the B Five reality?”
Ranma answered for Natsuru, “We went when our daughters were around eight, or nine. It was around ten years after the main part of the series ended. Though, a number of years before the events of Sleeping in the Light episode happened. And if I remember, at the time, Mars gov was building a hyperspace gate, in orbit, for their planet. So, they wouldn't have to rely on Earth Alliance gates for commerce with Alien nations.”
Lotton stated, “That figures. But, this gives us a timeline to work with. Good job girls.”
Natsuru said, “Thank you.”
Ranma replied, “No problem.”
Revy stated, “Now, we know where Lee is heading, and when. I am not playing games anymore. I am contacting the rest of the crew. The reward is whoever catches Lee can have first dibs on revenge against him.”
Janet said, “Good idea. Also, there is another line of investigation we can look into. Let me tell you what we found out about Lee's friend, Police Chief Pedro Del Soto. The other guy that judged the talent contest, besides Lee, and River here.” She mentally added, 'And I don't even want to think about how River was both a judge and contestant. Nor, why she gave herself, and Chang such a low score.'
River just silently rolled her eyes, at Janet's comment for a few seconds. She then looked back at the women around her.
Revy stated, “You can tell me all about it, after we are finish here. Also, what about Melvin? Was he in on the conspiracy?”
River stated, “No. He was not in on it. He just a guy that wants to live a quiet life here. And given some of the horrible memories I have seen in his mind. He has earned some peace and quiet.” She mentally added, 'Oh Melvin. You are just someone trying to get out of a bad situation that was not of your own making. You do not need to be dragged back into this mess.'
Roberta asked, “Who is this Melvin?”
Natsuru thought, 'River is clearly covering for Melvin. So, she likely knows the score, from reading Melvin's own thoughts. And we promise him that we would help.' She stated, “Just a badass bartender that works in this hotel. Like you, he is just a nice person, unless you piss him off. Which Revy found out the hard way.”
Roberta lightly chuckled. She then said, “Really? Anyone that can take Revy down a notch cannot be all bad.”
Natsuru agreed, “Exactly.”
Rock looked over at River, as she stated, “Now, to deal with River. Revy, Aeryn, Violin, you are coming with us to the Casino.”
River looked over at Rock, as she guessed, “You are going to take me to Chang, and my friends, and tell them what I did. Revy is coming because Revy can smooth things over with Chang. And Aeryn and Violin are coming, because you believe they can take me in a fight, if I try anything.”
Rock cracked a grin, as she happily commented, “Yes. Yes. And most certainly, yes. Though, given you are reading our minds, I thought you would already realize this.”
River stated, “Rock, your mind is so full of plans, plans within plans, and counter-plans, that it is hard to read your thoughts.”
Rock laughed for a few seconds. She then smirked, as she said, “I will take that as a compliment. Now, get up, we have much to do.”
River then did as instructed, as soon she, Rock, Revy, Aeryn, and Violin, left the restaurant, and walked towards the hotel parking lot, and to the Lagoon family's red GTO.
Meanwhile, the other women continued to talk amongst themselves, for a while longer. As they discussed topics, on various possible ways to catch Lee, to more casual conversations, such the maids being informed about some of the places of interest there were on the island city of De La Plata Podrido.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Rock pulled the red GTO under the carport awning, in front of the main entrance to Daiyu Palace Casino.
Rock drove, with Revy in the front, to the right of Rock.
Violin was behind Rock. River was in the middle of the backseat. And Aeryn sat behind Revy.
Rock pulled up to the front entrance, by the curb with the right passenger sat facing the main entrance of the casino.
Rock stopped the car, put in park, and turned off the ignition. The five adults then got out of the car, with Rock and Revy opened the doors, getting out, and pulled up the front seats, and helping the others out.
Rock and Revy then raised their seats and shut their doors. Though, they did not lock there door.
As all of the adults stood around the car. Those on the drivers side, walked around to join their friends, on the passenger side of the car, where the sidewalk was, under the large awning of the building.
Meanwhile, the nearby female valets, on the sidewalk, immediately recognized River. Also, one of the valets exchanged Rock's keys, for a ticket stub, to park her car.
The five adult women then headed for the front doors.
Given the valets knew who the women were. Especially, that River was their bosses lover, the five women approached the front doors, the valets opened the doors for all five women.
As they entered the front lobby of the casino, they continued walking, near each other, in a group.
As they walked, Violin asked, “So, River, how are we going to do this?”
River said, “Well, to prevent confusion, we need get the gang here together, and tell them at once. Unless, Rock, or Revy, has a better plan.”
Revy replied, “Nope.”
Rock inquired, “That plan works for me. So, how do you want to contact everyone?”
River answered, “Just follow me. And no, I am not leading you into a trap. We need to go the gaming floor, find the pit boss on duty. It will likely either be Spike, or Jetta. And the pit boss with then contact Chang, to make arrangements.”
Aeryn questioned, “Don't you have a cellphone, which you can contact him, yourself?”
River turned to Aeryn, whom was to her right, as they continued walking. She commented, “Come on, Aeryn. You have been at this game long enough to know that communicators, cellphones, and the like, will beep, vibrate, or whatever, at the worst possible moment. Also, Lee has the right idea. If I had a cellphone, Chang could track me down, by tracing my cellphone signal.”
Aeryn conceded, “Good point.”
River then turned back in front of them, as they made their way to the gaming floor.
(_)
A minute later, they reached the gaming floor.
Violin recognized the song being played, she thought, 'This song is, The Wicked Symphony, by Avantasia.'
River thought, 'Thanks for the telling me the song's title and band, Violin. And the lyrics really speak to my situation.'
River came to stop, with the other four women stopping around her.
Rock inquired, “So, where is the pit boss?”
River requested, “Give me a couple of seconds.”
River then mentally scanned the room. It was not to difficult for her to find whom she was looking for. She just tuned out players and dealers, focusing on the cards and the money. And instead she focused on the few individuals on the gaming floor that was focus on making sure the gaming floor ran smoothly, and fairly.
And River found the woman she was looking for.
River stated, “Jetta is on the duty. Please, let me do the talking.”
Rock said, “No problem.”
River then started walking in the direction of the restaurant, to the right of the gaming floor entrance, from the front lobby. The other four women followed River.
After they made their way through the gaming floor, to about half way between the restaurant, and the elevator bay, they saw Jetta nearby.
Jetta was wearing a black suit, and black dress shoes, as she performed her duties at the pit boss for the floor.
While they walked over to Jetta, the black haired woman, noticed them, and she turned to face them.
As the five women came to a stop in front of Jetta, the black haired woman smiled. She greeted them, in english, “Hello ladies. What can I do for you?”
River requested, “I need you to call Chang down here?”
Jetta commented, “Let me guess, it involves the strange clothing that you are wearing?”
River said, “Yes.”
Jetta shrugged, as she pulled out her cellphone from her coat pocket. She then dialed a number. Next, she held the phone to her right ear.
As the other end picked up, she said into her phone, “Chang, I need you to come to the gaming floor. It is important.”
On the other end of the line, Chang asked, “How important?”
Jetta answered, “River is here. She is strangely dressed, and she has four strange looking women with her. I believe they are your friends from the islands. And they don't look happy.”
Chang stated, “I will be down in a minute.”
Jetta then closed her cellphone, and put her phone away, back into the interior coat pocket she had it in. She then turned to River, as she inquired, “Dare I ask what is going on?”
River responded, in a defeated tone of voice, “It is more of a question of where should I start?”
Jetta winced, as she questioned, “That bad?”
River replied, “Yea.”
They group then waited for Chang to come meet with them.
(_)
A few minutes later, Chang made it down to the gaming floor, from his penthouse office.
As he approached the six women, the women turned and saw the he was wearing his usual black suit, and black long coat, but he was not wearing his glasses.
When Chang came to a stop in front of them, none of the six women said a word to him.
Instead, Chang looked at the six women, and he then focus on River, whom was wearing ill fitting, men's clothing. He calmly asked, “What is going on, River?”
Though, before River could answer, Revy stated, “Chang, we need to get the others together. The Bebop crew. The Serenity crew. Along with Annie and Arcee. So, we can talk in private.”
Chang looked over at Revy.
Revy looked at Chang, as she smirked. She said, “River got caught doing something very naughty.”
Chang inquired, “How naughty?”
Revy licked her lips, as she maintained her feral grin, while she responded, “Deliciously naughty.”
River quickly stated, “It is not sex.”
Chang look at River, as he commented, “I know. Sex would be too simple an explanation for this situation. So, where do you want everyone to meet?”
River stated, “Just tell them to meet in the garage, in back, so Arcee can join in.” She then turned to Rock.”
Rock said, “That will do.”
Chang looked over at Jetta, as he ordered, “Make it happen.”
Jetta just nodded, as she pulled back out her cellphone, opened it, and dialed a number.
(_)
Ten minutes later, seventeen adults meet in the back garage of the casino. Both the outside and insides door to the garage, were closed, and locked, from the inside, so the adults could talk in private.
Mal, Inara, Zoe, Simon, Kaylee, Jayne, Jetta, Faye, and Spike stood in semi-circle, around Rock, Revy, Violin, Aeryn, and Chang.
River was standing between the fourteen adults, with Annie and Arcee, standing to her right. With Arcee in robot mode.
Those present, were either in their usual casual clothing, or in their work clothing. Except for Arcee, and River. With River wearing her male clothing, she had wore, when she was disguised as Sam.
River looked at the others, as she thought, 'Twice in one night. This is not a good sign.'
Spike was the last to join them, as she walked walked over to stand by Jetta and Faye
As Spike walked up to Jetta and Faye, Jetta asked, “Where is Julia?”
Spike stated, “Don't worry. She is asleep. And one of Chang's women, whom I personally know, and trust, is with her. I will introduce you to her, after the meeting.”
Jetta replied, “Okay.”
Faye said, “Looks like things are about to start.”
All three women turned their attention to Chang, whom was standing by Rock, Revy, Violin, and Aeryn, as he looked at River.
Chang asked, “River, I know this is going to get very complicated. So, let us start with the simple questions. Why are you dress like that?”
Chang then used his right hand to point at the oversized, male, clothing that River was wearing. He then dropped his right hand to his side.
River turned to Chang, as she sheepishly said, “It is a long story.”
Rock ordered, “Tell him. Or, I will.”
River looked over at Rock. Then, she looked directly at Chang, as she inquired, “You know, Lee's friend, Sam?”
Chang replied, “Yes.”
River admitted, “That was me, in my male form, while wearing a fake beard.”
River comment caught the Serenity crew by surprise. The other adults in the room took the disclosure in stride.
Kaylee whispered to Simon, “I didn't know she had it in her. To pretend to live as a guy. That takes guts.”
Simon quietly replied, to his girlfriend, “River is just full of surprises.”
Chang remained calm, as he looked at River. He thought, 'River, I am sure you have a good explanation. So, play along.' He stated, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Really? Why does that not surprise me? Still, we will be talking about this, later.”
River replied, “Most certainly.”
Then, Revy was the one that drop the bombshell, “Now, to the heart of the matter. Believe, or not, Lee is the writer. And he escaped into the multiverse with a reality device he stole from us.”
Rock look over at Revy, as she thought, 'Thank you, Revy. For not stating how that happened.'
Revy continued, “And River here, as Sam, helped him escape.”
Faye inquired, “Lee, that skinny guy, that played the poker game, with River here, is the writer?”
Rock answered, “Yes. And he was right in front of us the whole time.”
Jayne stated, “Talk about hiding in plain sight. And this guy did it for months on end, in front of your group, Rock.”
Jayne, Inara, Kaylee, Simon, Jetta, and Zoe, laughed for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Jayne looked over at Revy, as he commented, “That must have really bruised your egos.”
Revy looked over at Jayne, as she warned, “Watch it, Jayne. I am not in the mood for jokes. But, you are right.”
Mal looked over at River, River looked back at him. He asked, in a calm tone of voice, “Why did you help this man, River?”
River answered, “Mal, I know you are upset about the gender bending, but Lee is a nice guy.”
Mal stated, in an even tone of voice, “I will make that determination on my own.”
River thought, 'It does not take a genius to figure out that Mal is upset with me. And that he is pissed with Lee. Though, I have known Mal long enough, to realize he will get over it, eventually. Plus, Chang is planning to bribe him. So, that will help.'
Spike spoke up, as she flatly inquired, “So, River. The next question becomes. Did you cheat at that card game, with Lee?”
River looked over at Spike, as she answered, “No. I did not. Lee really is a good card player. And he didn't cheat either.” She then looked at Faye, as she continued, “Even though our first dealer cheated against him.”
Faye looked at River, as she thought, with a bit of venom, 'River, I know you are reading our minds. And I am sure you know that I was under orders from your boyfriend, Chang. So, don't deflect this conversation towards me.'
River heard Faye's thoughts, as she said, “Still, Lee caught the cheating, and he was able to continue in a fair manner.”
Faye thought, 'Thank you.'
Chang said, “Be that it may, River, keeping secrets like this does not help anyone.”
Mal coughed.
Chang looked over at Mal.
Mal said, “It is only fair that you tell them what you know.” He thought, 'Chang, while you didn't tell us the details, of who the writer is. It is clear, from the way you reacted, when the conversation came up, about the writer, over the course of the last few days, you knew who the writer is, before this. I was just still trying to figure out how best approach you on the matter.'
River cracked a grin, as she thought, 'I do not know how Mal found out that Chang knew about writer. Though, it is ironic that now with Mal knowing that Lee is the writer. And the shoe to be on the other foot.'
Aeryn inquired, with interest in her tone of voice, “Tell us, what?”
Chang looked back at Aeryn, Rock, Revy, and Violin, as he light chuckled for few seconds.
Chang then stated, “I will come straight to the point. I figured out that Lee was the writer the day after the poker game.” He mentally added, 'I will leave out the kidnapping, and that Annie and Arcee know, as well.'
Chang saw, in the corner of his eye, River's grin get slight wider, with happiness towards him.
Jayne shook his head, as he commented, “Those two are just made for each other.”
Inara spoke up, “Yes. They even keep the same type of secrets.”
There was snickering from a few members of their group.
Though, those snickers all died quick deaths, as everyone saw that from the look on Revy's face that they could tell that Revy was furious.
Revy looked at Chang, with fury in her eyes. She questioned, in a dangerously low tone of voice, “Why didn't you tell us that you figured out Lee was the writer?”
Chang looked at Revy, with a smirk on his lips, as he admitted, “Because, I want him.”
Chang casual response caught Revy offer guard. Causing her to calm down a little, while not immediately replying to him.
On the other hand, Rock inquired, “What do you mean? Why do you want him?”
Chang turned to Rock, as he casually said, “Rock, no pun intended, but you cannot be that dense. Lee pulled a magnificent con on all of us. A con that took months to figure out and plan. And he did this under intense stress, and limited resources...”
“I honestly don't know if I could have pulled off this con, with the limited resources Lee had to rely on.”
“Lee displayed a high level of skill and intelligence, at both using one's knowledge and skills to manipulate people into doing what he wanted, constantly on the fly, with him solving problems that kept coming up, without him getting caught. That is genius level intelligence and planning. There are only a few people in the multiverse that could pull that type of con off on us.”
“Also, he knew who we were beforehand. He knew how dangerous we are. Yet, he still continued the con, while dealing with us, day in and day out. That take guts. That takes courage.”
“Due to all this, plus the fact his knows his manners. And that he can play ball. Means the man is worth more to us alive than dead. Sure, he did some horrible things to us. But, I sincerely believe that he didn't realize what he was doing, when he wrote those stories. Also, he did a few good things for us. That being said. We could use someone like him.”
By then, Revy had thought over what Chang said. Revy asked, in a calm tone of voice, “What could Lee bring to the table?”
Chang turned to Revy, as he answered, “Lee brings an interesting point of view on things. He is the type of person, when you ask a question. He will not only give you the right answer, but he will tell you seven different ways to look at both the question, and the answer, so as to solve other questions and answers.”
Violin guessed, “So, you planned to keep quiet, until you figured out how to make of offer to us, to where you get Lee, in one piece, without worrying about reprisals, over his hide?”
Chang looked at Violin, as he flatly admitted, “Exactly.”
Chang turned to the others, as he asked, in a calm, thought even tone of voice, “Any of you have a problem with that?”
Jayne said, “No.”
Inara commented, “None, whatsoever.”
Zoe stated, “I am willing to let things slide.”
Jetta admitted, “I have no problem with him.”
Faye complimented, “At least he is polite.” She thought, 'Except when someone cheats him at cards. But, that is reasonable.'
Kaylee smiled, as she stated, “Hey. He brought some fun into my life.”
Simon said, “He did give us new opportunities in business and pleasure.”
Arcee said, “A person crazy enough to pull this off should be admired.”
Annie commented, “I have no problems with Lee.”
Spike and Mal chose to remain silent.
Revy commented, “Well, River has a similar plan. And as we told her, we will have our revenge.”
Chang turned to Revy, as he responded, “But Revy, I am willing to sweeten the deal, for all those whom feel wronged by Lee, with gold, and possible favors.”
Revy conceded, “That is tempting. And we will need to discuss you offer amongst ourselves. And we will think on your offer.”
Chang thought, in a positive frame of mind, 'That is not a, no.'
Chang turned to River, as he asked, “So, what was your plan?”
River answered, “About the same as the pitch you are making right now. A controlled level of revenge. But, one that Lee would survive and recover from.”
Chang replied, “That is good to hear.”
In response, River slightly smiled at Chang.
Jayne turned to Mal, as he commented, “Mal, didn't you say Lee was sick, when you shook his hand during the poker game?”
Mal turned to Jayne, as he answered, “Yes.”
River stated, “Lee is dying of cancer. At best, he has a few months to find a cure, before the cancer kills him.”
Spike stated, “Damn. Talk about rotten luck. I may want a measure of revenge against him, but that is not a way a person should go.”
Mal said, “I agree.”
Chang stated, “So, as we can see, we do have a limited amount of time.” He turned to Revy, as he asked, “So, what are you going to do now, Revy?”
Revy turned to Chang, as she answered, “We know when and where he heading. And we are going after him.”
Mal requested, “Care to share that information?”
Revy answered, “Sure.” She thought, 'River would tell them anyway, after I left. So, I might as well.'
Spike asked, “So, where are Lee?”
Revy stated, “The Babylon Five reality.”
Jayne commented, “That is a big place to hide.”
Everyone turned to look at Jayne.
Jayne stated, “Hey. Bob is my drinking buddy. He... Well now, she loaned me a copy of that series one time.” He mentally added, 'Honestly, I would like to thank Lee for giving me such a good friend as Bob. Still, I am annoyed with Lee dealing with gender bending. Just not as much as the captain.'
Rock continued for her lover, as she said, “Fortunately. As Revy said. We know when and where he is. And where he is going.”
Chang requested, “Does someone have a pen and paper?”
Jetta stated, “I do.” She approached Chang and Rock, as she pulled out a pen and notepad from her coat pocket.
Jetta handed the pen and notepad to Rock.
As soon as Rock took the two items, she flipped open the notepad and she began writing on it, in english.
A few seconds later, she finished. As first handed the notepad to Chang. She then handed the pen to Jetta, as she said, “Thank you.”
As Jetta put away her pen, as she replied, “You're welcome.” She then walked back to join Spike and Faye, before she turned back around to look at the rest of the group.
Meanwhile, Chang looked at the notepad, as he stated, “I appreciate this.”
Rock stated, “No problem. If you find him, we will still get a piece of his ass.”
Chang looked over at Rock, as he put away the notepad, into a coat pocket. He said, “As I stated. I am willing to negotiate.”
Rock responded, “I know. That piece of paper has the date and other information, to head to the reality, time, and location we, tracked Lee to. But, we know where he is heading.”
Faye asked, “So, where is he going?”
Revy shrugged, as she said, “Where else? Mars.”
The other adults chuckled a little at Revy's comment.
Rock stated, “It takes two days of travel in hyperspace, from Babylon Five, to reach Mars.”
Chang asked, “How would you know?”
Rock stated, “Akira mentioned that years ago, her family spent a few months in the Babylon Five reality.”
Chang replied, “That helps a lot.”
Jetta turned to River, as she inquired, “Where does Lee's fascination with Mars come from?”
River looked at Jetta, as she answered, “Best I can figure is that Lee saw the original version of the movie, Total Recall, as a child, and the film had an influence on him.”
Chang thought, 'Why am I not surprised? Plus, that movie likely inspired some of his mind screw plots, and personal actions, with us.'
Revy stated, “Now, that we have settled that, let's get down to my offer.” She then looked around the crowd, as she continued, with a wicked grin on her face, “Whomever catches Lee, gets first dips on revenge against him. Though, we want him alive, and conscious, and mostly unharmed, so he is in the shape, where we can have our revenge, as well.”
Spike commented, “I will consider it.”
Mal shrugged, as he inquired, “That sounds fair. Do you have a limit to how many of us can come?”
Rock answered, “No. We will even provide you with some of our encrypted radios.”
Mal replied, “That would be nice.”
Chang turned to Rock, as he stated, “We will finalize our plans tomorrow.”
Rock looked over at Chang, as she said, “That works for me.”
Spike turned to Revy, as she smirked. She asked, “So, besides us, and your group, who else are you bringing to this party, for our little fox hunt?”
Revy answered, “No many. The maids are coming. None of us are crazy enough to try and stop them from doing so. Also, I was going to invite Balalaika and B. I would be tempted to call the Lowe family, but I feel they would likely help, Lee.”
River spoke up, “Oh. I am sure they would. Three of them were created by Lee, and the fourth was given everything she could possibly want in life. I should know, I have read their minds.”
Violin stated, “I hope Balalaika and B do not bring Hotel Moscow with them. There wouldn't be a planet left, with the maids, plus Hotel Moscow, after Lee's ass.”
Aeryn said, “Violin is correct. Blowing up a planet will only bring unneeded, and unwanted, attention. We know, because we have done it before.”
Violin winced, as she commented, “Multiple times.”
Revy shrugged, as she responded, “Relax. When I contact them later tonight, by a reality jump, and a phone call.” She turned to Rock, as she continued, “I will be gone only five minutes.” She turned back to Aeryn and Violin, as she went onto say, “I will request Balalaika and B make this a personal hunt, and keep their army at home. Like the offer we made to those two, to being with.”
Chang pointed out, “Still, Balalaika and B can be as dangerous as the Lovelace maids.”
Revy agreed, “I will give you that one. They are damn close to being equal to the maids.”
Mal look over at River, as he stated, “Though, that being said. River will not be joining us. She has clearly become too close to the target.”
River looked over at Mal. She stated, in a disappointed tone of voice, “I understand. Still, please keep in mind that Lee is a nice guy. I can read your mind, Mal. I know you are upset with both him, and me. But, I am asking you, as friend, go easy on him.”
Mal said, “If he surrenders to me, I promise not to harm him, until we return to the casino. If he fights, all bets are off.”
River sighed, as she thought, 'I guess I will have to take what I can get.'
Chang turned to Revy, Rock, Violin, and Aeryn, as he stated, “Well girls. If that is all you need to tell us. I hope you have a pleasant night. We will talk in the morning. Say around nine AM. And good hunting. Still, I need to speak to my personnel, in private.”
The four women turned to Chang, as Rock said, “No problem.”
Revy replied, “Have fun.”
Violin said, “Night, Chang.” She turned to the rest of the group, as she said, “Night, guys.”
Aeryn stated, “This meeting was adequate.”
Just as the four women were about to leave the rest of the group, Rock turned to River, as she asked, “No hard feelings?”
River looked at Rock, as she stated, “It depends on what condition Lee returns in.”
Rock replied, “Then, we will have to see.”
The four women then turned and walked away from the group, towards the door to the garage, that lead into the casino, and towards the gaming floor, and then the front entrance. With the door being locked from the inside, that was no problems exiting the room.
Several seconds later, the four women had left through a door to a back hallway, as they headed to the front of the casino, where they would retrieve their car.
After those in adults still in the room heard the door shut behind them, the adults looked at each other.
Arcee spoke up, “Well, have fun. I will not be going,”
Faye asked, “You aren't?”
Arcee commented, “I don't feel like going. And someone has to run this place while you are gone.”
Chang turned to Arcee, as he stated, “Thank you, Arcee.” He then looked at the others, as he said, “Now, I have two items to talk about. Speaking of running this casino, I except you to be back within an hour of leaving. This casino does not run itself. Though, I am sure Arcee can use the cameras and run the security and gaming areas from teleconference. But, I do not want to test out that theory.”
Mal cracked a grin, as he said, “We will be back before you know it.”
Spike turned to Mal, as she complimented, “Nice line.”
Mal turned to Spike, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Jetta spoke up, “We will keep them out of trouble.”
Zoe stated, “Yes. We adults will be chaperoning this hunt.”
The adults then laughed at Jetta and Zoe's comments.
As everyone calmed down, Chang offered, “Also, there is a reward for ten large gold bars, for each of you, if you bring Lee back here in a salvage way. You can punch him a few times, but bring him back here in a way he is awake, and he is not crippled, nor dead.”
The other adults looked at Chang, in his eyes, to acknowledge they heard him.
Mal smirked, as he said, “We will try not to hurt him too much.”
Spike commented, “I will make no promises.”
Chang stated, “And I do not want any of you to leave, until tomorrow. I want all of you to be at your best. There is no rush. And I want you to spy on the others in this hunt. Secretly bring recording equipment with you. And be prepared to use it.”
“So, even if we lose Lee. We will be able to work on being one step ahead of everyone else.”
“And I will want copies of any such recordings, by early tomorrow afternoon, my time.”
Mal said, “Works for me.”
Spike conceded, “I can live with that.” She mentally added, 'I will just have one of the women I trust, babysit Julia for an hour, while I am gone. Some of them actually like helping me with Julia. And they all know better than to cross me.'
Jetta commented, “Good. This will give me time to talk to the dealers, about tomorrow. Just in case, we are late.”
Kaylee stated, “I love spy versus spy.”
Inara said, “A good rest is always wise, before a big day.”
Zoe agreed, “Especially, before a big hunt.”
Simon said, “Lee is going to regret giving us such experience with being bounty hunters.”
Faye agreed, “You got that right, Simon.”
Jayne smiled mischievously, as he said, “I finally have an excuse to breakout my big gun.”
Annie chose to remain silent.
Chang ordered, “Okay, guys. I think we are done here. I will give you the location information to you in the morning.” He mentally added, 'I know that a couple you would go to night, if you had that information. But, getting some sleep would be a wiser course of action for everyone.' He continued, “Also, Jayne, Zoe, please escort River to my penthouse living room.”
Both Jayne and Zoe responded to Chang, by silently nodding.
Chang turned to River, as he thought, 'It is not that I don't trust you, River. It is just that you can be spontaneous, and too much is on the line for you to go rogue, and try to find Lee, yourself. I believe I can handle the situation, and save Lee. But, I need to time. And you going off on your own, might throw a monkey wretch in my plans to bring Lee back here, safe and sound.'
River looked at Chang. She nodded, as she said, “Okay.”
Chang then turned to Annie, as he requested, “Annie, I would like to speak to you for a moment.”
Annie turned to Chang, as she said, “As you Earthers say. It is your dime.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “You have been around us way too long.”
Annie return Chang's grin, as she replied, “Perhaps.”
Inara said, “Well, I have to get back to the spa.”
Mal stated, “And we need to get back to the security office.”
Jetta commented, “And the gaming floor is not going to police itself.”
Spike said, “I need to check on my daughter.” She mentally added, 'And do some thinking. As what type of revenge I would like to have on Lee.'
Kaylee turned Simon, as she inquired, “Are we still on for our date tonight?”
Simon looked over at Kaylee. He smiled, as he responded, “Of course. I have been looking forward to it all day.”
Arcee thought, 'Well, Chang needs some private time to speak to Annie. And I cannot go into the normal areas of the casino. But, I can do something else. And invite someone with me.' Arcee offered, “Anyone want to go riding around town with me?”
Faye said, “Sure.” She turned to look at Chang and Jetta, as she continued, “If it is okay with my bosses?”
Chang and Jetta look at each other. They turned to Faye.
Chang shrugged, as he said, “Go ahead.”
Jetta stated, “Sure. Just don't be out too late.”
Faye replied, “Thanks, Jet, and Chang. I will be back in an hour or two,”
Arcee smiled, as she said, “Grab a helmet, and let's go, sister.”
As Faye quickly got a black helmet from a nearby table, Arcee transformed into motorcycle mode, while giving the radio signal a nearby garage door to the outside parking lot, to unlock and roll up.
A few seconds later, Faye sat one Arcee's seat, with her helmet on, as Arcee roar out of the garage, and onto streets of Plata Podrido. With Acree signaling the open garage door to close behind them.
Less than a minute later, the garage clear out, except for Chang, and Annie.
Chang and Annie looked at each other, as Annie commented, “It is real nice of Arcee to give us some privacy.”
Chang agreed, “Yes. It is. And it allows me to speak to you in private. I noticed that you were quiet during the meeting just now.”
Annie responded, “There was no point in speaking, when everyone already had their minds made up.”
Chang questioned, “How was the mood in the room?”
Annie stated, “Barring Mal, and Spike, most of them were mildly amused by the situation. They were on the fence with hunting Lee. They will only do it because Mal and Spike want to, along with it being an excuse to have some fun.”
Chang said, “I can understand that. Most of this crew would ditch this nine to five job, if I did not pull on their reigns occasionally. Along with the great pay, and wonderful employee perks, I provide them. And you.”
Chang mentally noted, 'Still, I cannot treat them too favorably, when compared to my rank and file employees. Or, that could cause moral problems for everyone. Still, I give my rank and file employee some nice perks, and wonderful pay, as well. So, everyone is getting a piece of the pie, from our little operation.'
Annie complimented, “You have better managerial skills than I do. And in my former job, I had a reputation of literally choking people to force them, and their coworkers, to fall in line.”
Chang shook his head, as he said, “I am not even going to dignify that comment with a joke.”
Annie replied, “Thank you.”
Chang thought, 'Well, with a compliment like that. I think I am finally making my way out of the dog house with you, Annie.' He inquired, “So, what about Spike and Mal?”
Annie commented, “Both of them want blood, but they think Lee does not deserve a quick death.”
Chang inquired, “Okay. That is still workable. So, what do you want to do?”
Annie answered, “Let Lee be. I don't want to go after him. That man has been through enough.”
Chang said, “Yes. He has. And I have a good excuse in mind to allow you to stay here. Since River is not going, you can babysit, River. It will give us both an excuse for you to not go.”
Annie responded, “Good idea. And thank you.”
Chang replied, “You are welcome.”
Annie said, “If you don't mind. I am going to go have some dinner at the casino restaurant.”
Chang said, “Go ahead.”
Annie inquired, “By the way, what are you going to do about River?”
Chang admitted, “Nothing really. The main thing I intend to do is keep her from throwing a wretch into my plans. There are too many wheels in motion with the situation, as is. And all three of us agree we want Lee to turn out fine. Lee is polite, intelligent, skilled in a number of areas, and nice to be around. I had some wonderful conversations with him. And that is a great combination to have as an employee. And as a friend.”
Annie commented, “Also, in a lover.”
Chang admitted, “True. And I know you are thinking the same thing I am.”
Annie questioned, “Has River fallen for Lee?”
Chang responded, “Exactly. Still, I would not be angry. Lee has been a perfect gentlemen around River. And as Sam, Lee did not know River was River. Until likely very recently. Still, I have plans for that situation, as well. Plans that would benefit all parties involved.”
Annie replied, “I am sure. Though, I do not want to know.”
Chang said, “I appreciate that. Yet, I am not sure what I am going to say to River, when I talk to her, when I head up to the penthouse. I think, I will walk around the casino for a while, so I can think.”
Annie complimented, “That is a wise course of action.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he agreed, “Yes. It is. Now, go enjoy your supper, Annie.”
Annie replied, “Sure thing. See you later, Chang.”
Annie then walked out of the garage, and into the casino building itself, as she headed for the casino restaurant, by the gaming floor, to get some dinner.
A minute after Annie left, Chang started casually walking back into the interior hallways of the casino building, so he could wonder around, and think, alone.
(_)
At the moment, Aeryn, Violin, Revy, and Rock walked out of the front entrance of the casino.
The four woman came to a stop, as Rock went to the nearby valet, to hand in her stub, to get her car.
As this went one, Violin turned to the other women, as she commented, “You got to admit, that Chang is one classy dude. Even when he is a she.”
Revy turned to Aeryn and Violin. She cracked a grin. She snorted, as she said, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Aeryn said, “Well, he is smooth. But, he reminds me of Scorpius, in that way.”
Revy inquired, “Speaking of Scorpius. I am toying with the idea of inviting her.”
Both Aeryn and Violin turn to her, as they stated, in unison, in a strong tone of voice, “No.”
Aeryn said, “Scorpius is not to be trusted, at all. She would more likely try to frell Lee's brains, than hurt him. Unless she did both at the same time.” She turned to Violin, as she continued, “She has been know to do both, at the same time, before.”
Violin noticed her wife looking at her. And she realized the subtext of Aeryn's comments. Violin stated, “Speaking of which, after we had that poker game at the Rats Nest. I visited her, a few days ago. And when we talked about that game, Scorpy did have a strange grin on her face.”
Aeryn inquired, “You don't think she figured out who Lee was and she didn't tell us?”
Violin conceded, “That is likely. And knowing her. She likely covered for him, and she then frelled him.”
Revy admitted, “I honestly don't want to know.”
Aeryn replied, “Neither do I.”
Violin said, “I agree.”
The three women then watched as the GTO was driven up to the carport in front of them.
The valet parked the car, got out, and she handed Rock the keys.
As soon as Rock had her car keys in her hands she walked back to the three women, as she said, “Okay, girls. Let's get back to the hotel.”
Revy complimented, “Good idea.”
Rock grinned, as she commented, “And by the way. I found Scorpius' new female form to be a bit cute. I could see them frelling each other.” She then turned away, laughing, as the three other women followed behind her, to the car that was parked right in front of them.
As they walked, Aeryn looked over at Revy, as she commented, “Some days, I honestly wonder which of you two is the more deviant one.”
Revy replied, “Me too. Me too.”
The four women then got into the GTO, with Rock driving, as they headed back to the Devil's Hotel to plan and prepare with their group. For their hunt of Lee. And then they planned get some rest, for the hunting would begin tomorrow morning.
(_)
An hour later, Chang finally made it up to the penthouse floor, and to the hallway door, that lead directly to the living room of the apartment he shared with River.
While Chang stood in the hallway, in front of the door to the personal residence that Chang and River shared. Chang pulled out a key and unlocked the door.
As he pocketed the key, he opened the door, which opened directly into the living area of their penthouse apartment.
After he walked inside, he locked and shut the door behind him.
Chang looked around the living room, and he saw River, sitting on the couch, to his left, across from their large, wall mounded, widescreen TV, and entertainment center, to his right.
They were the only two people in the room.
And Chang saw that River was looking back him.
Chang commented, “I can never surprise you? Can I?”
River shrugged, as she replied, “It comes with the territory with being a telepath. Come sit down.”
Chang walked over, between the couch, and coffee table, as he sat down beside River on the couch, to River's right side.
As soon as Chang settled in, he turned to River, at River turned to look at him.
Chang asked, “So, how are you holding up?”
River answered, “Sore, but fine. Given I just had to talk my way through two groups of badasses, that were not happy with my actions, I consider myself lucky.”
Chang agreed, “And you should.”
River inquired, “I can read your mind. But, how do you feel concerning my actions, as Sam?”
Chang admitted, “I am indifferent. I am not surprised you pulled this off. And I am sure you would have told me the truth, soon enough. But, it seems that the maids threw both our time tables out the window.”
River responded, “Yes. They have a gift for doing that. And I was planning on telling you soon. To be honest, probably within the next few days.”
Chang inquired, “I believe you. So, how close was Lee to taking the offer we worked on, before the maids showed up?”
River stated, “Lee was very close. He considered it to be very fair. He main plan was to keep his head down for a few days, to allow you to iron out the details, before he accepted your offer.”
Chang stated, “Good. And what about your original plan? How did that fit in with my plan?
River said, “You had the better plan. Once I learn about it, I made my plan to be a plan B. With you plan being, plan A.”
Chang said, “That is nice. You always were one to change plans, and move in a different direction, if you thought it was best.”
River inquired “Yes. I do. I know that I cannot go on this hunt for Lee. For obvious reasons. But, is there anything in your plans that I can be a part of, in finding, and helping, Lee?”
Chang answered, “Sadly. Not that moment. Revy, Rock, and the others will think I am up to something. Which I am. If you follow after Lee, you will risk wrecking my plans, and getting Lee killed, or worse. So, I ask you for appearance sake, and Lee's personal sake, that you stay around the casino tomorrow.”
River said, “I understand. And I will stay around here tomorrow.”
Chang commented, “Thank you. Also, Annie does not want to go after Lee.”
River stated, “While I can understand Arcee liking Lee. It is surprising that Lee was able to make such a good impression with Annie.”
Chang pointed out, “Yes. And Lee has to be genuine in his actions, concerning Annie, to achieve such a rapport with her. Or, she would have sensed he was lying.”
River replied, “True. And I guess that honestly has saved him from her wrath.”
Chang stated, “Absolutely. Anyway, Annie will be using the excuse of watching you tomorrow, so she does not have to go hunting after Lee. As such, you will have company for tomorrow. And I know that you two are good friends. So, there should not be any problems with this.”
River kindly responded, “Thank you. I have always been comfortable around Annie. Also, we both know if Annie goes, the others will immediately rely on her force abilities to find Lee, quickly. And Lee knows that even with his precognition, he cannot counter Annie's level of power and skill. He is not that good. And if Annie refuses to help in that way, it will cause questions to be asked, concerning her. And how much she knew about Lee, before tonight.”
Chang replied, “Those were my thoughts exactly.”
River grinned, as she said, “And I wasn't even reading your mind, just now.” She dropped her grin, as she inquired, in a sober tone of voice, “So, what happens if Lee is captured?”
Chang answered, “I figured that if we get him, he will get beaten up, but otherwise unharmed. And he will be bought here. We will figure out what to do him, afterward. That gives us both time to come up with a plan. If Revy's group gets him, we still have a shot of getting him. But, if the maids get him, there is nothing really I can do.”
River sadly said, “I understand. And given the situation, that is a good plan. Let us just hope that Lee can avoid the maids.”
Chang mentioned, “While the maids are next to unstoppable in a battle, they are very, very direct. On the other hand, Lee excels at being indirect. As long as they don't corner him, I think that Lee can stay one step ahead of them.”
River responded, “I agree. Actually, after Lee learned the maids were in town, and my real identity, he tried to turn himself over to Revy and the others, by singing a song. It is just he did not count on them being too dense to understand what he was doing.”
Chang inquired, “I can understand him wanting to turn himself over to someone, besides the maids. But, why didn't he just come to me?”
River answered, “Lee believed that with the maids already in town, you would not protect him, because you would not cross the maids.”
Chang stated, “I admit that I told the two of the maids that I would not cross them. When I met with them earlier today.”
River commented, “I heard that Eda sent them your way.”
Chang said, “Yes. Though, I won't hold that against Eda. She was just likely buying time for Lee.”
River replied, “That she was.”
Chang asked, “So, she cares about him?”
River stated, “Yes. But, only as a friend.”
Chang said, “Good. Anyway, while I would not cross the maids, directly, I would have called in Garcia, and have him mediate the situation.”
River complimented, “Given they would listen to him. That would be a wise idea.”
Chang said, “I know. When Lee is captured, by any of our groups. I will call in Garcia.”
River offered, “Good. I will help with that.”
Chang stated, “You're help is more than welcome.” He then inquired, with curiosity in his tone of voice, “So, what was with this whole, Sam act?”
River answered, “At first, I just wanted to learn about the writer, and who he really was, before I captured him.”
Chang guessed, “But then, you got to know him, and you found out he was not that bad a guy.”
River responded, “Yes. That story has already been told a hundred different ways.”
Chang shrugged, as he said, “At least. And I have to ask. You haven't fallen for him? Have you?”
River answered, “I don't think so. And I still care about you, Chang.”
Chang replied, “Good. Though, that would not be the end of the world. You could always share.”
River giggled. She grinned towards Chang, as she complimented, “That is what like about you, Chang. Your pragmatism.”
Chang returned River's grin, as he replied, “Thank you.”
River mentioned, “Also, Ranma has some magic smoke that will make you remember your time in the time loop. Given, we just spent much of that time having fun with each other, it would be worth remembering.”
Chang smiled, as he said, “I will have to ask Ranma for that smoke, then. I will probably to it, tomorrow, when we meet, to plan our hunt for Lee. So, what do you want to do tonight?”
River stated, “I would love to sleep with you, but I am a little sore, right now. Revy kneed me in the groin as a man, and I made the mistake of turning back into a woman. Now, I am sore in both my abdomen, and groin. Though, I am almost over the soreness. But, I am in no mood for sex, in either form.”
Chang calmly questioned, “Okay. Have you had dinner, yet?”
River answered, “Not yet.”
Chang stated, “Then, when we are finished talking, we will order in for you, and I will get you a heating pad.”
River happily replied, “Thanks. That would be nice.”
Chang responded, “No problem. By the way, I know about Melvin, and I have no interest in telling the others. Still, I cannot find any information on the Rats Nest bartender. Who the hell is she?”
River answered, “Think of what bar, the Rats Nest bar reminds you of, and you will have your answer.”
Chang thought about River comment for a few seconds. He then started laughing as he figure out who the bartender was. As he calmed down, he said, “That figures. And Bao is actually a hotter chick than my female side.”
River said, “I know. I am slightly jealous of her figure, myself. The thing is, about Boa's new bar. If Revy, or those with her, ever figured out the bartender is Bao, they would never leave this town.”
Chang stated, “Oh yes. You're right. They would stay. If for any other reason, than Bao is only one of the few bartenders, in the multiverse, that can handle their level of insanity, on a continual basis. So, let's keep this a secret between us.”
River replied, “Agreed. Though, the maids blew up her bar.”
Chang inquired, “Did Bao have that place insured?”
River answered, “From what I read of her mind, yes.”
Chang shrugged, as he responded, “Then, she will have that place rebuilt in no time. She has a lot of experience with rebuilding bars.”
River cautioned, “I guess she would. Though, be aware she completely owns that bar, and she has no interest in taking crap from anyone. She also knows the police chief on a first name basis.”
Chang stated, “Yes. Pedro seems to prefer to be polite and deal with things in a civil manner. So, did they?”
River grinned mischievous, as she answered, “Yes.”
Chang returned River mischievous grin, with his own, as he questioned, “Does he know?”
River responded, “Not yet. But, Pedro is sharp. He will figure it out, eventually.”
Chang said, “Considering, I learned that he thinks my female form is hot, I am not going to make an issue out of it. And once he figures out you are, Sam, I am sure he will warm up to you.”
River replied, “Probably. I have done nothing, but be nice to him. And I did keep his secrets.”
Chang agreed, “True.”
River commented, “Anyway, I need to call Pedro at his home. As Sam, to make sure he got Lee's warning. Revy and the others already know Pedro was in on Lee's con. But, I could not tell from their minds if Pedro just left the police station, or the city itself.”
Chang stated, “If it is about the maids, he already got the warning. He, and half his police force, left town, on short notice, earlier this evening. Right before dark.”
River said, “Good. That man knows when it is time to leave. And it seems those under him, that know what is going on, also realize when it is time to leave.”
Chang agreed, “Yes. Pedro's genre savviness is one of the traits I admire about him. He knows how to push a situation just enough to get what he wants. But, he also knows when it is time run. And so do most of his officers” He then pulled out his cellphone, as he inquired, “So, what do you want to have for dinner?”
River said, “I would like a chicken caeser salad, with a glass of lemonade. Lee seemed to like the salad the cooks here prepared for him. And I trust his judgment on such matters.”
Chang stated, “Okay. Coming right up.” He then dialed the extension number for the casino restaurant, so River could dine in, in their home, for the evening.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 02: “River's Journey.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality: Lee's Reality. Date: The morning after Lee escaped into the multiverse. Place De La Plata Podrido, the living penthouse of Daiyu Palace Casino. Time: Mid-morning.
River Tam was currently sitting on the couch, with the TV off, thinking to herself, about her life, and what she was going to do now.
While, River had already had breakfast, she was still wearing her pink sleeping gown, and she barefoot on the short red carpet of the large living room rug.
Presently, River decided to stretch her legs.
River got up from her couch and looked out from the one of the living room windows, across from the hallway door to the room. With that window facing towards the city scape of the island, passed the outdoor patio of the apartment. The window was a three feet wide, six feet high, tinted window, with curtains on it. Though, the curtains were pulled open, to the sides. Also, the window was sealed shut, and like all the windows in the penthouse, it was not designed to be opened.
River thought, 'Yesterday was a roller coaster ride. Fortunately, it ended well for myself. And Lee, for the moment... Well, whatever counts of a moment, when one deals with time travel, across multiple realities.'
'Still, what about Lee? One of the most badass collections of people how found out that Lee is the writer, and as such they are after Lee's ass. And they do not even have a clue as who the real Lee is.'
'For example, upstairs, Lee is not male. Lee is a closet male to female transsexual. That is why I think of Lee as a her. And I do not her hold gender problems against her.'
'Especially, given she does not hold much against me tricking her into thinking I was someone else. And a man at that. While I also read her mind without her permission. Lee is clearly a better person than most. And she has not control over what she thinks on those issues. Though, she handles her problems own well.'
'Given Lee's overall situation in life, staying in the closet was the wisest coarse of action. And to that end, while she does not wear female clothing, because those dresses would not look good on her. And she loathes wearing men's suits. She only wears a suit when she has to. Lee prefers to wear gender neutral clothing when she can.'
'This is why she was so interested in writing about the gender bending genre. It helps to keep her sane. And her gender problems are also why a small part of her hates and envies those she wrote about. But, on a small part. The rest of her prefer to be polite about the situation.'
'And to think that all this started a few months ago, not counting the time loop. Well, at least a few months for myself, and my family and friends.'
'It all started during a cookout at the Lowe family's residence, in Tharsis City, on Mars, in the Cowboy Bebop reality.'
'This was where my friends and I first found about about the stories, and the writer.;
'Though, during the talent contest, at the Devil's Hotel, Chang and I were not completely honest with Revy and the others, about how we found out about the writer and the stories. In all honesty, it involved two Lowe family cookouts.'
'During the first cookout, Balalaika was the one to tell us about the stories and the writer. The reason why she was at the cookout was that B and the Lowe family members were good friends.'
'It seems that Balalaika and B decided to make it sound like only Balalaika knew, to prevent any problems that B might have with us, and the Lowe family.'
'The next time Chang and I could talk in private, I told him all this. We agreed not to tell the others about B knowing more than she let on, because we respect B's relationship with us and the Lowe family, as well.'
'And I was surprised by the way Balalaika told us. She did so in a matter of fact manner, with a straight face. She gave us the basics. Including the way Revy and their friends flushed out, with Scorpius' broadcasts of the message. We want the writer.'
'When Balalaika was finished with her explanation, she then gave us CD copies of the stories.'
'Though, I did read Balalaika's minds. She thought she could hide her thoughts by thinking in the russian language. But, she did not count on me knowing russian.'
'In the Verse, while a number of older languages are taught. They are rarely used. Much like Latin is treated in the twenty-first century. And many languages that have fallen to the wayside.'
'With the three main languages in the Verse being english, chinese, and a mix of the two, along with a few other languages mixed with the third language.'
'This was not the case for other realities, such as the Cowboy Bebop reality. While english and chinese are the main languages of that reality. Many other languages are still spoke and used, in that reality.'
'Since we came to the Cowboy Bebop reality, I had fun learning a number languages. Such knowledge helps me keep straight what my thoughts are, and what other people's thoughts are.'
'And Ed Lowe was in a good teacher on a number of the languages. Though, since the Lowe family and B, are so close to Balalaika and Hotel Moscow. I found someone else to discreetly teach me russian.'
'I learned that Revy told Balalaika and B about the stories and the writer. With Rock later talking to the two women, to smooth out the situation for Revy said to them. Rock and the two women came to an arrangement, where they, and Hotel Moscow would not become directly involved with hunting down the writer, and instead, Revy, Rock, and their group would personally hunt down the writer.'
'Still, the reason why Balalaika told us was that she wanted to stir the pot a bit. She did not want Revy and her friends to have all the fun. But, by the same token, she did not want to directly involve herself, or Hotel Moscow, just yet. So, she baited us, and had us do the job, while she stood back and watched. All in the hopes that she could come in and benefit from the situation.'
'And we all eventually took the bait, just as she expected us to.'
'Incidentally, I also learned from Balalaika's mind, on how Revy and the others learned of the stories, and the writer, in the first place.'
'It began with the trio sisters, Mikoto, Nodoka, and Yurika.'
'Now, like Lee's stories, the cause and effect of the situation becomes debatable. That the only explanation that could be used, were time stable loops that were tied together.'
'For the sisters, a few months after the events of book four, They were bored one day, and they were playing a reality tracking device, much like Dutch used in the Devil's Hotel bar.'
'They noticed that one reality, out of the way of the other realities that they and their friends usually traveled to, had received a lot of reality traveling traffic over the course of a number of years.'
'Later, I realized that reality traveling traffic was our future selves... Well past selves, now. Or present self, considering the reality travel is still going, with more travel to come in the future.'
'It can get confusing with tense issues, when it comes to time travel. I guess is all comes down to the point of view of the person comment on the issue.'
'Anyway, the trio sisters when to this reality, a few months before the travel picked up. Actually, they went to this very island town.'
'Still, they could not find any reason for that level of traveling.'
'So, they decided to check the internet of that reality, with a computer laptop they had. They checked into a hotel, I do not think the Devil's Hotel, it may have been this hotel, during its previous ownership.'
'They searched the news websites, with no luck. Then, on just a lark, they decided to type in all three of their parents first names. Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. In english. Together To see if the search would bring up something interesting. And web search pulled up Lee's stories.'
'As the three teenage women started reading book one of Lee's stories, they soon realized they were reading about their own family, and themselves. After finishing reading all four books, they left this reality, for their home reality, where they told their parents.'
'Their parents, told their friends, including the Lagoon family, and is snowballed from there. With Revy eventually telling Balalaika, whom told us.'
'I do not know how everyone reacted to learning about the stories, and the writers, because Revy did not tell Balalaika. And they really have not thought much on the subject, while I have been around them, as River, or Sam. But, I have the feeling that they did not react well to this knowledge, especially, the Lagoon family.'
'Balalaika herself, reacted to the stories, and the writer, with a touch of anger, though mostly she felt curiosity about how someone could imagine, and write, such things, about her friends, and herself, that could come true. And that someone could have such control over her, so easily, with her not realizing, for a second time. Next to the Black Lagoon series, itself. Though, given she had her youth restored by the writer, along with having a lover that is loyal to her, she was not that anger.'
'And I fully agree with Melvin and Lee. Balalaika turning the rest of the members of Hotel Moscow was completely on Balalaika's own head.'
'For the rest of us, we mostly took the news with either indifference, or anger.'
'The indifference coming from most of them. With the anger most coming from Mal and Spike.'
'Chang took the news with his usual mix of indifference and humor.'
'The Lowe family members each got a good laugh over the entire situation, and they voiced their opinion that they would like to meet the writer, sometime.'
'And I took the news with curiosity. The type of curiosity I had not felt since I wanted to learn more about Chang, and how I met him, well her at the time.'
'Though, it all took us about a week to read the all four books of Lee's stories. Lee clearly does not do things in half measures. And that was a long read.'
'Though, as I read Lee stories, I was entranced that someone could create such a dynamic story, with multiple points of view, with each story having a different set of main characters, while using the same character pool, and adding new characters, while weaving all these plot lines, which intersected, into a workable storyline that made sense.'
'The mechanics of the story was a work of genius. A work that we experienced first hand, by being part of the stories.'
'And while I wanted to meet this person, and have a measure of vengeance against this person, for using us with such disregard, I still wanted to learn about the person.'
'Though, at the time, I did not realize that the writer did not realize what she had done.'
'Still, a few days after we all finished reading the stories, we had a large meeting, which even Annie and Arcee attended. My friends all agreed to do two things.'
'First, we would let Revy and the others have their shot, given they were already there, on the ground, doing the hunting.'
'The second being that none of us would tell the Lovelace family about the writer, nor the stories. We all realized that due to the writer cursing Garcia with the spring of drowned girl curse, that if the maids learned of the stories, and the writer, they would be on the warpath, with likely a lot of innocent people being killed, as they searched for the writer.'
'Though, unlike the others, I lied about the first, and I secretly took one of the reality devices that Kaylee and I built, using Chang's memories. With those devices working wonderfully. I then did my own investigation of the writer.'
'Though, during this time, when we were on Mars, after our meeting, but before I left on my investigation, Violin and Aeryn showed up. I sensed them coming from a distance, before they saw me. I know they could only be here to ask for my help in find the writer. I did not want to help them, because I was not sure what they would do to the writer, when they caught him.'
'I wanted to find the writer, by myself. And make the judgment on what to do about the writer, by myself. I did not need help to do so. And having others along would only complicate the plans I was already formulating in my mind.'
'And those two were skilled enough, and foolish enough, to try to make me do something I did not want to do.'
'Since I wanted to avoid a confrontation, I hid from them, and everyone else I knew, until they left, a few hours later. I have played the hide and seek game occasionally with my friends, over the years. Without telling them first. Which they are use too.'
'When it comes to hiding, I am nowhere near as bad about, as I use to be, when I was insane. Still, even though, doing so is a bit childish. I still in enjoy playing that game. So, me disappearing for a little while, would not be noticed by my family and friends.'
'After I sensed Aeryn and Violin had finally left, I returned to my brother, Simon, and our friends. They did not ask me why I hid. All they said was that the married couple was looking for me.'
'I guess that meant that Violin and Aeryn did not tell them why they wanted to find me. And they had not figured out why that married couple was looking for me. Or, in the case of Chang and Simon, they were just being polite, and they did not want to add fuel to the fire, by saying why they thought those two wanted to find me, to help them find the writer.'
'And with Aeryn and Violin gone, that meant I could secretly focus on finding the writer, myself.'
'But, that did not mean I was in a rush. Given reality devices also allow for time travel, along with reality and location travel, in an instant, there was no rush. I had time to secretly plan, while waiting for a lead, and an opportunity to begin my search for the writer.'
'Both the lead, the opportunity, came during the next cookout the Lowe family invited us all to.'
'During the second cookout, Balalaika and B were there, and we all talked about the stories and the writer. It was then that Balalaika gave us an update one what the she and B, from a recent conversation with Revy and Rock.'
'This conversation was when I learned a few other interesting items.'
'One was that Balalaika's members had tracked down their wayward Hotel Moscow member, to the same hotel Revy and the others were staying at. But, they lost Yuricks' trail there.'
'Given B had already requested the Lowe family and us to be on the look out for Yurick. This was not a secret to us. And at the time, we did offer to help them, if we saw Yurick. I have sense changed my mind on helping those two russians in their search, because we did not know exactly why they were looking for Yurick.
'We did not know that Balalaika had all her subordinates put through the vat process, save for Yurick, whom did not want that. With that being more an order, then a request. And Yurick then escaped from Balalaika and Hotel Moscow, and into the multiverse, for those reasons.'
'Even I did not know this, until I read Yurick, or should I say, Melvin's mind, on the matter, when I came to the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar. During the first time I had a chance to I talk to him. And as I got to know Melvin, I have come to admire Melvin. And I am more than happy to keep his real identity a secret from everyone.'
'Though, that was when I realized that Balalaika and B had found a way to shield their thoughts from them. Though, I don't mind. I am not interested in their thoughts. And some of their thoughts are unpleasant to read.'
'Then, we learned what Yolanda and Eda had done. Balalaika told us about how Revy's group flush the writer out, and how around a month later, in response, the writer left them a baited message, sent from a Mexican island city, called Plata Podrido, the local reality calendar date of when the bait was sent, and who exactly was going after the writer.'
'And Balalaika then mentioned what Yolanda and Eda's plans were, about dealing with the bait, and trying to capture the writer. That instead of going right after the bait was sent, they went a few months into the past, to lay and trap, and try to find the writer, before the writer was expecting them. Meanwhile, Revy, Rock, and the others, would come for the bait, a few days after the writer sent the message.'
'While, at the time, I did not know exactly what the two blonds' trap was, I found the concept of Yolanda and Eda's idea to be brilliant. To set the counter trap, before the bait was even laid for the original trap.'
'In essence, do an effect before cause. As some of Lee's plots reflected, in her stories.'
'So, I decided do the same thing myself.'
'And that I would be the first one to find Lee.'
'Though, I would not go to the future to find out who the writer was. It would be too easy, and it would risk creating a paradox. I later learned from Revy and her friends, by secretly reading their minds, that they share the same opinion on this matter, as I did, on not wanting to create paradox.'
'Besides, I considered finding the writer to be challenge worthy of my genius, creativity, and skills.'
'After I had my tools ready. The first thing I did was to build a profile of the writer, from her stories. While I later was impressed to find that Lee could create workable profiles of people as well, she was not the only one that could do so.'
'And her stories did show some clues, about herself. But, not many. In the author's notes, I remembered the writer mentioning that Bob was a near polar opposite of the writer. That gave me a lot of clues right there. Were Bob was outgoing, while the writer would be home bound.'
'One major mistake that Lee made, that fortunately none of the others, after her, caught onto, was that Lee admitted to having spent time in Georgia. With Lee mentioning places in Georgia. From Savannah, to Atlanta.'
'Given Lee started her story with Akira being in Atlanta Georgia, at Georgia Technical College. Divulging this information was risky on Lee's part, and it was a major oversight by Rock, Revy, and the others, to overlook this point.'
'Though, when Lee mentioned this knowledge, Lee did have a cover story ready. That she was from Nashville, Tennessee. While that is not exactly true, from the memories I read from her mind, she had spent time, over the years, in Nashville.'
'Still, while having the cover story ready was intelligent on Lee's part, it was still one hell of a gamble for her. But then, this entire adventure has been one long gambling streak for herself.'
'And when I built my profile of the writer, long before I knew it was Lee, I noticed other clues. Such as the writer's content in the story showed at very detailed knowledge of manners, which Bob displayed, and still does. I saw this in Lee's writings, and first hand, by getting to know, Bob.'
'This showed that the writer was clearly a well mannered person.'
'Still, while I was sure that, at the time, I had no way to prove it. But, meeting Lee confirmed my beliefs. A lot of things can be said about Lee, but she is polite.'
'Further research of the stories showed that given the writer was anti-affirmative action, that it likely meant that the writer was at least physically a caucasian male of the U.S.'
'Along with this, the writer's injokes, in the stories, mostly came from the nineteen eighties, and onward, which gave me an idea of the writer's age, and date of birth, in the context of the date I was going to, for that reality.'
'Also, I noticed that the writer never went into detail about winter sports. Such a skying, and snowboarding. But instead, the writer went into detail about activities at the beach. This lead me to believe that the writer, unlike Bob, was not from the midwest states of the United States of America.'
'Instead, the writer was from a warmer climate, that the writer was not use to snow, but the writer was still from continental United States. That meant that he was either from the west coast, east coast, or coast on the Gulf of Mexico, of that nation.'
'Given the writer's firearms knowledge, and the writer's clear pro-gun ownership leanings. Along with some cultural research on the United States of that era, I eliminated the west coast, and the northern part of the east coast, as being possibles origins of the writer. That left the coast line long the southeastern part of the United States.'
'And further research on the people of the southeastern United States helped confirm my suspicions.'
'From my research about the people of that area, I learned of the term, southern hospitality. That there were those in that region that prided themselves on their manners, and civility towards others. And that is a trait that I find attractive in people.'
'I also found out that the people of the southeastern U.S. were also known to be creative, and slightly crazy. Which helped to explain some of writer's skills with her imagination.'
'After meeting Lee, and getting to know her, I got a kick out of it, when I found out I was right on all these points.'
'Though, I did not have an answer to the writer's obsession with gender bending, until later. All I was sure of was that is was not a fetish, because if it was, the writer would have written more detailed sex scenes, instead of the tame and suggestive scenes the writer wrote. With her writing being lead ups, and aftermath scenes, but not much mention concerning the sex events, themselves.'
'I also found Lee was correct, that she and Bob were very different people.'
'The only similarities they shared was that neither of them were cowards, both of them were polite, and they were willing to work to solve their problems instead of procrastinate.'
'The most surprising point about this profile was, as far as I know, I was the only one to take the time to use the writer's own writings to build a psychological and physical profile of the writer. After doing so, and personally meeting Lee, it became obvious that Lee was the writer. The profile fit Lee's personality, physical traits, and place of origin.'
'Still, with a profile, of race, sex, age, and region origin, I had an idea of who to look for.'
'The next part was the search itself, for the writer.'
'When, I first came to this reality, I made sure it was a date before Scorpius' broadcast. So, I would have time to set up my plans.'
'This was when I hit my first obstacle. I took a laptop that Ed had helped me build, and I was intent on hacking into some computer servers to get my information. But, I found this reality's basic computer defensive and offensive software to be insane. And that is not even counting what measures and countermeasures, I found government and corporate computers used.'
'While the encryption systems were respectable, the firewalls and anti-virus programs were some of the strongest I had ever run across. There were solid VPN networks. One of which the writer used, along with a fake e-mail address, to hide the writer's identity. And it worked because it seemed that the governments were spying on virtually all communications. So, anyone that try to snoop too much, beyond basic serve IP address records, would be flagged by those governments.'
'This killed my first plans. But, it just meant that I had to be a little more creative in my hacking. Also, all this surveillance helped me in a number of ways.'
'It explained why the writer went to Mexico in the first place. The writer was on the run from the writer's own government, because the writer knew that when they put two and two together, the writer would be captured, and likely never heard again.'
'Still, with the baited message, I knew the writer would figure a way in leaving her home country.'
'Also, I realized this surveillance would limit the writer's options in leaving her county.'
'Given the writer's intelligence, I was sure she knew better. And she would not take anything that she could be trapped on. That meant no airplanes, boats, trains, nor buses. The writer would likely take the easiest of transportation which the writer probably had access too, and could control. A motorized vehicle.'
' But, given how far parts of the Southeastern U.S. were to the north Mexican border, I realized that I would have to wait a few days for the writer to reach the U.S.-Mexican border.'
'Still, I used that time well. I found that while I could not hack the computers, without risk of discovery to myself, I could monitor the incoming and outgoing communications of the customs officials in both the U.S. and Mexico. This included passport information, which I could use to correlate with my profile of the writer.'
'Also, I realized that the writer would go to the most nearest border crossing from the Southeastern United states.'
'That being one of the crossing from Brownsville, Texas, to Matamoros, Tamaulipas. I also knew that the writer would likely have a passport, and use it. If the writer did not have a passport, than she likely would have not heading for the Mexican border in the first place. And she would have probably done something else.'
'So, I then ran a program on my laptop, that use the profile I built of the writer, against those that traveled back and forth, across the border checkpoints.'
'And I waited, in a small, but nice hotel suite, in Matamoros, Tamaulipas. During that time, I had to eliminate a lot of false positives. But, that was not hard. Until finally, a few days after Scorpius' broadcast, I ran across the passport approval of a person, that flagged the program I had set.'
'This person had never used his passport before. Also, given the distance to this person's home. The person would have had to travel almost day and night to get from there, to get here, right after the broadcast. Also, the person's home was within less than few hours of some nice beaches.'
'In addition, the person age, gender, race, and place of origin, fit my profile of the writer.'
'And the writer's identity was further confirmed, when a few hours later, a message came in that flagged the writer as a material witness for a crime that never happened.'
'It was then, as a woman, I used my reality device to go a few hours into the past, at the border crossing on the Matamoros side, and I looked for the writer. The writer was not hard to find. Given, the message for the writer's capture also including a picture of the writer. Where the communications for the passport request, just listed text information.'
'Though, when I went looking for the writer, I realized, in the distance that Lee had spotted me. But, I also read Lee's mind, from a distance, at she was not sure that it was me. If Lee had realized it was me, that knowledge could have ended my plans there. And it might have created a paradox, in driving Lee away from going to Plata Podrido, and leaving her bait, on the internet, in the first place.'
'So, I quickly disappeared from Lee's sight, before he suspicions were confirmed. Fortunately, given I had my hair dyed red at the time. Lee did not recognize me. And Lee still decided to head to the Devil's Hotel in De La Plata Podrido.'
'Thought, it was then that I realized I had to be more careful. That Lee was a more observant person than I realized. And this only wet my interest in learning more of what made the writer's mind tick.'
'This also meant that I need to create a false identity. My male form would be perfectly suited for that job, because Lee never really described my male form in his stories. Though, my male side, physically, is on the average side, my male form is youthful, handsome, and in good shape. And that was not the only blind spot I was going to exploit against the writer.'
'Though, for that brief time I saw Lee, from a distance, I did learn four names for the writers mind. Her new alias J.D. Lee, the city of De La Plata Podrido, the Devil's Hotel, and the Rats Nest bar.'
'And those four names were all I needed to start the next part of my plans.'
'I knew where Lee was heading. That she was tired. And that she likely need some sleep. Which I was more than happy to give her, before I met her again.'
'But, instead of going there at the same time as Lee, I decided to us my reality device to I head back a week, in the past, check the city of De La Plata Podrido out. Especially, the two places in the city that Lee thought about. The Devil's Hotel, and The Rats Nest.'
'Though, I made sure I kept my dates straight, during this time period. So, I knew when Lee would check into the Devil's Hotel. Sleep for several hours. Then, during the next day, after she woke up, after getting something to eat, and running a few errands, she would eventually make her way to the Rats Nest.'
'Though, before I went back in time, in Lee's reality, I make a few detours in the multiverse, to get a few more tools and items I would need to implement my plan.'
'It was during this time, that I created my secret identity. Though, I worked on the identity, before I actually set foot on the island of Plata Podrido.'
'Given, as a woman, I was hot, and a fair skinned redhead at the time, considering I went back to dying my hair red. Though, even in my hair natural brown, people would noticed me and talk about me. And Lee might hear about a sexy, redheaded women, being seen around the island. Again, this might have scared Lee off, creating a paradox, by leaving the city, before she left her baited message.'
'So, I worked out my identity before I went to this island city.'
'I knew that my identity had to be male. And created the proper papers and identification cards was child's play for me. And being a member of the Serenity crew, I have done this dance a few time.'
'The issue was I also had to have a personality, and look, to go with my new secret identity. And does so kind of made me feel like a super-hero. With I guess Lee being the villain. Though, a nice villain, at that. And I do have weakness for nice villains.'
'Still, when it came to coming up working false personality for myself, as male, I had yet to do it. I just never got around to pretending to be a man, in public, in my male form. A few of the others have already pretend to go in public, in their opposite genders. With them pretending to be that gender, for the night.'
'Bob has done it on a dare, a few times. On one such time, Ed when as a male, by used one of those packets of instant man powder. And they had a great time together, in public, play opposite gender roles. Of course, they have been know to go out in public, as both female. And make out like a lesbian couple. Even thought, I know for a fact that Ed does not swing that way. Though, she is attracted to Bob, no matter Bob's current gender form. And I am happy about that.'
'Given Zoe masculine personality, she can so naturally go as a man, that we teased her a little on the matter. But, not to much.'
'Inara can pulled off the pretty boy routine, so well. That it is scary for the rest of us. Especially, Mal.'
'Kaylee was always a tomboy, and playing a male is not hard for her. And Simon is such a wonderful schemer, that in his female form, he can pull off the innocent girl act very well. When they date in public, in reversed gender roles. Doing so seems to natural to them.'
'Chang reached a point that both either gender is natural for him.'
'And when it came to a Jayne... Well, one time, we all went to a bar, in Tharsis City, and Jayne decided to go in his female form, while dressed like a bad girl biker. And I admit, she looked hot in that outfit. I do not know if I could have pulled off that look so well, in my female form.'
'Also, that night, Jayne decided played the bad girl act to the hilt.'
'By the first hour, we all watched, as Jayne got over a dozen phone numbers of people. Mostly men, but a few women. With the people interested in Jayne, buying her beers, left and right. Though, Jayne careful to know how much alcohol her female form could handle. Being Bob's drinking buddy helped with that. Only few times, those two when drinking in their female forms.'
'By the second hour, we had to leave that bar, because some of the other customers were starting to fight over her. Including, a few of the women.'
'Except for Mal, whom refuses to do anything in his female form. I seem to be the only gender bender in our group, that never got around to pretending to be the opposite gender, than I original am.'
'So, I considered this attempt, in of itself, to be a fun challenge.'
'But, what would my personality be as a man. And then I remember an animated series the Lowe family showed me, years ago. How one of the craziest characters in that series was revealed to be playing one of the main straight men of the series.”
“The series was titled, Gargoyles. And there was crazy character in that series, whom was named Puck, and the straight man Puck pretended to be was Owen. Even I did not see that plot twist coming, and it was pulled off so beautifully.'
'And that character inspired me to attempt something similar.'
'I asked myself the question. Could a crazy chick, or even a former crazy chick whom was now saner, play the straight man? And get away with it? I sure as hell wanted to find out. The attempt alone would be worth it.'
'And I think I did get away with it.'
'And I had so much fun along the way, in doing so. My insanity is well known. And while I spent the last few decades reclaiming much of my sanity. Some people still assume that I am out of my mind most of the time. Which I am not. I am now saner that most people I deal with. Including Chang, and Lee.'
'All one has to do is read Lee's stories to see that Lee is a very mentally unbalanced person. And her insanity is only further confirmed by some of the stunts I have seen her successfully pull in real life.'
'And Chang is crazy because he thinks it is a good idea to set up shop in a world that knows about all of us.'
'That being said, with such an assumption about my mental state, nobody would ever expect me to attempt to literally play the straight man of this situation.'
'The disguise was simple enough. I went with a slight, modern western motif. Among the basic items for, such as socks, and men's underwear, I wore a dark plaid button up, long sleeved shirt. Brown pants, with a brown leather belt. Black cowboy boots.'
'Though, I did buy a few changes of clothing, with different clothed clothing, but all of them were the same styles, just a different color combinations.'
'For the final touches, I pulled my long hair into a ponytail, using a hair band. And I bought a face, full, red beard, that matched my dyed red hair color, to wear on my face.'
'Though, I found the fake beard to be itchy on my face, I realized it was necessary, given the way Lee wrote her rules, gender benders had problems with growing beards. So, having a beard would throw Lee off my scent. And it work like a charm.'
'Also, the itchiness was on the skin, and not my nose, so I did not have to worry to much about sneeze, and changing back into a woman in front of other people. Though, that was still a danger, and I always kept myself aware of that possibility. As such, I was careful not to sneeze.'
'Then, it came time to choose an alias. I want to pick a name that I would naturally be comfortable with. So, after an hour of thinking, I decided to go with, Sam. And Lee later correctly guessed that the reason I went with, Sam, was because Sam rhymed with my family name, Tam.'
'Once I was in my male form, with my new clothing, fake beard, fake ideas, and some small bars of gold I had, I returned to Lee's reality, in Mexico, a week before Lee arrived in Plata Podrido.'
'Though, I did have some minor difficulty in finding Plata Podrido. I did found it interesting that the island city of Plata Podrido was not on any of the global maps of this world. But, once I got directions, reaching Plata Podrido was not difficult.'
'And I found that the history, I uncovered about this island, is very colorful. Still, when I finally came to this city, I found this town to be a pleasant place visit. It was rough around the edges, but nothing compared to some of the places I have been to.'
'When, I got to the island, I decided to buy a car, from someone that did not ask question. A gray, four door car. I did not bring one of my personal cars with me, because one of the other people after Lee, might recognize one of my cars.'
'Still, I found the car I bought easy to drive around in. Though, I choose not reveal to anyone, not even Lee, at the beginning, that as Sam, I had a car, and I knew how to drive.'
'Also, I decided that it would be best to have Lee come to me. And to do that, I needed to be at the right place, at the right time.'
'To that end, I did not go to the Devil's Hotel. That would not be the proper place for introductions. Though, I did decide to get a room there. I do find it interesting, that when I first went into that Devil's Hotel lobby, the music changed, and started playing the theme song, Secret Agent Man, by Johnny Rivers. I feel that place really does have a nice sense of humor.'
'During my first week on this island city, I establish myself as a gambler, at the Rats Nest bar. While making sure to park my car away from the bar, so no one at the bar, especially, the bartender, knew I could drive, and that I had a car.'
'I did the same at the Devil's Hotel. As I parked my car away from the Devil's Hotel parking lot. At a parking lot, a few blocked from the hotel, further into town.'
'And I did enjoy cleaning those people out of their money. Though, I was polite to the bartender there. And given my telepathy, I was able to prevent violence before it happen. Though, I did allow a few fights, to show that I was not to be messed with. But, I did not hurt anyone seriously.'
'And by doing all this those at the Rats Nest would leave me alone, and leave those I was with alone, such as, later on, the writer.'
'Then, there was the matter of whom I learned the bartenders at both the Rats Nest, and Devil's Hotel, were.'
'I found it humorous that two refugees from the same reality, and same city, had ended up in the same city, in other reality, around the same time. And while they had met each other, they had no idea they were from the same reality, and time period.'
'That the Rats Nest owner and bartender was the gender bent Bao. While, the Devil's Hotel bartender was Melvin, whom was really Yurick, the Blade, formerly of Hotel Moscow.'
'Both had their reasons for keeping their identities secret. And given both had been nice to me. After I was nice to them. I would respect those secrets, and not reveal who they to were to anyone.'
'Though, later on, I was not expecting Chang to figure out who Melvin was, on his own. And I was pleasantly surprised that all it took as a single clue from me, for Chang to figure out the Rats Nest bartender was, Bao.'
'And I hinted at about Bao, because Chang would have eventually dug some digging, and found out himself. This just saves us both time. So, we can put our time and efforts in more important areas. Such as figuring out a way to save Lee, from those after her, and that cancer that is slowly killing her.'
'Still, on how I planned to first meet with Lee. I decided to officially meet her at the Rats Nest. But, that did not mean I didn't want see her when she got to the Devil's Hotel. And I had already figured out how long it would take for Lee to reach Plata Podrido.'
'I was sure Lee would make it to the city in one piece, because I knew a month from that point in time, in this reality, the writer would leave her baited message on the internet. All I had to do was wait.'
'And, as male, I watched from a couch, in the left front corner of the hotel lobby, as Lee first walked into the lobby, with the music changing the song, Hotel California. And considering the time loop, that was a good musical selection for Lee's situation.'
'I got a much better look at Lee. As I read Lee's mind, and I realized she was going to check in, go to her room, and sleep until the next morning.'
'The next morning, I watched from a distance, in the hotel bar, as Lee ate her breakfast. I learned from reading her mind that she was going to start making plans that morning to get items, and do things, such as a hair cut, and dying her hair black, to help her. And that she was going to go to the Rats Nest, later that morning, after she finished her errands.'
'I did follow Lee some that morning. And I did so, on foot, from a distance. Because Lee was on foot.'
'But, when Lee returned to the hotel, early that afternoon, I started making my way to the Rats Nest. I walked, because I did not want the writer to know I had a car. I wanted to appear to be person on the lower end of the classes, but still be civil towards people.'
'So, I went to the Rats Nest. I sat at the large, left, far corner table in the room, that Lee and I would eventually make our unofficial table, to play poker at. And just as I finished cleaning out the people that decided to play me that afternoon, I notice Lee walking into the bar.'
'But, unlike what Lee previously looked like, Lee now looked the part of the street gambler, which from reading her mind, was her plan.'
'When Lee looked over at me, I decided it was time for us to formally introduce ourselves, so I got my money. I got up from the table, in the corner, I was sitting at. And I walked over to meet Lee.'
'And it was a wonderful meeting. It could not have gone better for both of us.'
'From reading Lee's mind, she realizes she would need help, even help from those that did not know they were helping, to pull off her con. And I was so intrigued by Lee's manners, and her mind, including her plans, that I decide to see how her actions would panned out.'
'Also, I learned from Lee's mind that my fake beard did fool her. The next part of the situation was simple. Gain Lee's trust, by inviting her to play some cards with me.'
'I let her win a few hands, and I lost a few hands, and by the time Lee was ready to leave, she had more money in her pocket than before.'
'When Lee stated she had to leave, and that she would be walking, to save on money. I offered to walk with her. She accepted. It was then that I steered the conversation and meeting to where I found out where Lee was staying, which I already knew, as the Devil's hotel. After she answered the question, I mentioned I was staying there, as well.'
'We kept each other company, as we walked back to the Devil's hotel. And that is where our friendship began.'
'When we got to the hotel, the music in the lobby change, and I had to hold in a chuckle, as I read Lee's mind about what the song, Deranged, by Coheed and Cambria, what the song was about, and where the song came from.'
'Over the course of the next few weeks, we continued meeting each other, and having fun playing cards, while talking.'
'I made sure to be the dealer of the cards. This allowed me to control how the cards would lay out. Faye wished she had my skills at cheating at cards, as the dealer. Card counting, and my fingernails, allowed me to control what card hand went were. Though, I make sure that the hands were usually incomplete, so Lee would have to work some at the game, to get better. And she did.'
'And as the dealer, I used the opportunity, to let Lee went more than she lost, so she had an income she could rely on to continue to live here.'
'And money was no problem for me. From the few gold bars I kept on me, and being a telepathy, allowed me to find who would give me the best deal on trading the gold for U.S. cash. Soon after I moved into Devil's Hotel, I learned the hotel offered a fair exchange rate for gold in both U.S. and Mexican currencies. I just got up earlier in the morning than Lee. I went down to the lobby, and I traded in a little gold for U.S. cash, as I needed.'
'Though, I made sure Lee never saw me trade in gold for cash, for it would have made her suspicious of me. Also, given the exchange rate, a few points of gold was enough money to keep me happy for several months in this city.'
'During that time, as the weeks passed, I soon realized that Lee had never really had a friend, so I decided to be a friend to her. Lee was likeable and polite, but not clingy. And while, at first, I pretended to be her friend. Due to Lee's polite nature, I slowly, genuinely became her friend.'
'Also, at that time, I read Lee's mind and I realized that Lee is just likeable and polite, but that she really is a decent person, whom unknowingly made one really big mistake. She did not even consciously realize her writings were effecting other people, in other realities, until Scorpius came on TV with that message to flush her out into the open.'
'Up until that moment, she thought of writing as just a harmless hobby that she could do, to work out her personal demons, without anyone to being harmed.'
'And Lee felt really guilt about what she had done. Her actions weighted heavily on her conscience.'
'It was then that I decided I needed to ditch my plans for revenge, and try to find a way to help Lee from suffering at the hands of Revy, Rock, and the others after her.'
'I could have given Lee my reality device then. But, I did read her stories. And running rarely works. Lee did too good a job of making Revy and the others skilled trackers and hunters. If Lee ran at that point, she would likely get caught. So, I decided to help her in other ways.'
'Then, I learned about Lee's gender problems. During our first week together, I noticed that went Lee looked at women, while she was attractive to some of them, her thoughts also reflected an envious nature as an instinctual level. Though, she only thought this, and she did not show any outward signs of being envious. It was then that I realized that Lee was a male to female transsexual. Female mind, male body.'
'And Lee was the first transsexual that I have gotten to know. And I found it an interesting experience to know someone with such a conflicting nature. Though, this nature also hurt Lee in ways even I do not want to know about. Yet, Lee did not show this pain. And at the time, I had no intention of mentioning that I knew this about her.'
'Also, Lee being a transsexual explained her obsession in so thoroughly writing about the gender bending genre.'
'Still, Lee's personal problems did not mean that I could not have fun with her, as I pretended to be slightly a wildman, as Sam.'
'While I liked being the straight man, I did not want to be a stick in the mud. Being a being a caricature of a straight man would likely get me found out. So, being a little wild, would help maintain my cover, from everyone, including Lee.'
'And as I was doing so, I could help Lee in a number of ways.'
'Along with intentionally losing money to Lee, as we played cards, I also helped Lee learn how to properly play poker. Such as how to realize one tails, how to learn other people's tails, betting low, and how to play the long game. Also, I helped her develope her poker face, for I realized she was going to need it when Revy and the others showed up. And Lee did master one hell of a poker face.'
'And by pretending to be a wildman, there were a few times those first few weeks, where Lee had to learn how to talk her way out of both of us getting our asses kicked by others. When I asked women out in on dates, in front of their boyfriends. That skill also came in handy with Lee dealt with Revy, and her more crazier friends.'
'Then, Lee did something that surprised even me. Soon after I met her, Lee asked if I would help her develop her precognitive skills at cards. I did not know that Lee was a pre-cog. But, from what I read of Lee's mind, when she talked about her skills, I realized she really had precognitive abilities.'
'So, I helped Lee, and after a few weeks of, on an off, practicing, Lee got so good that she could beat me at cards, seventy percent of the time, using her precognition, without actually looking at her cards. Which due to her precognition being on an instinctual level, I could not use my telepathy to counter it. And I found this situation to be intriguing. Which made me even more interested in Lee.'
'While I had played Annie before, at cards, with her using the force. This was different, because unlike Annie, Lee abilities were not the force, they were an innate talent that she had. Also, she was learning how to gain a measure of conscious control over her precognition. And not just at cards, but also as a way to sense danger, which I felt Lee needed, if she was to survive whom was coming for her.'
'Also, I enjoyed showing Lee some of my skills, such as when we played pool in the game room, of the Devil's Hotel. Lee considering me a pool shark, would be an understatement. And pool is all about the angles of how one strikes the cue ball, and how the cue ball, the other balls, and the walls of the table, interact with each other, in getting the specific balls into the specific holes, in the proper order. It is child's play for someone of my genius level intellect.'
'And we were both nice about the fact I outclassed her at pool. Actually, she was impress with my abilities at pool. She thought I should go professional. I was flatted by her compliment.'
'Also, I had to develop my own poker face, when Lee thought nice things about me and my abilities. So, I did not accidentally smile, when I read her thoughts. And I was not reacting to the directly actions and statements around me. Including, from Lee, herself.'
'On another matter, Lee eventually learned of a number of good places to eat at, on the island, that were in walking distance. On day, Lee took me to a food truck that served american hamburgers and french fries, along with other foods and drinks.'
'I did not even need my telepathy, as I immediately recognized the two blonds that worked at the food truck as Eda and Yolanda. And I wondered what exactly their plan to entrap the writer. And I admit, using the writer's taste in food was a good concept, and attempt. If Lee was not so polite, and cagy in her actions and statements, it might have worked.'
'Though, there was the minor issue, at the time, Lee had not yet realized whom the blond women were, because she had yet to realize that those after him could go back in time, before she sent the bait, to look for her. Though, she wrote scenes where similar things happened, she was still not fully consciously of how that could be used against her. Yet, she did later learn this, and she adjust her tactics accordingly.'
'On the other side of the coin, we were both fortunate that Eda and Yolanda did not recognized either of us. And Lee was very private about her secret. And outside of the Serenity crew, I never did so anyone we knew, my male form. And even then, only Chang had seen my male form for a prolonged amount of time. So, everything was fine for the moment.'
'And to be fair, those two women both fixed us some wonderful meals. They made some very juice hamburgers. Still, I did not best to avoid the food truck, because both of those women were very intelligent, and sharp, and they might have eventually recognized me.'
'And as I kept refining my plan, I read Lee's mind, on what she planned. I learned the exact details of how she was going to do to bait the others. As well as I learned her countermeasures.'
'To be honest, I was impressed with Lee's intelligent, foresight, planning, and preparation skills and abilities.'
'These plans included living off the grid, to avoid attention by the authorities. I quickly realized that Lee was already trying to work through all the angles she could.'
'Also, such angles included learning where all the security cameras for the hotel were, and where the blind spots were. This allowed her to leave the bait for the internet, without a camera recording catching her doing so.'
'Also, Lee wore a hat, glasses, and dyed her hair black, along with a hair cut, for a few weeks, so the video security recordings of would delete what he looked like before she wore a hat, glasses, and dyed her hair black. Though, this was also planning for the back in, so when she escape, those after her would not be have a clear photo, nor clearly see what she looked like. And that part of her plan worked beautifully.'
'A few days after Lee set the bait, someone finally took it.'
'Unfortunately, while Lee was expecting just one, two, or at most, three of the women after him, Revy and Rock brought a small army of badass women with them.'
'And from the thoughts I read from the women after Lee, most of them were out for blood. But, not all of them. Some of them were just there to support their friends. With them having no hard feeling towards the right. Such as what I learned from reading Yolanda and Sawyer's minds.'
'Speaking of telepathy, my telepathy is passive, for the most part, and because of that Harvey, inside Violin's mind, cannot tell when I am using it on Violin. Still, that being said, I have no interest, what so ever, to risk reading Scorpius' mind.'
'And I do not need line of sight for my telepathy to work. But, I consider myself fortunate that there is a limiting factor on the distance my telepathy can be used to pick up thoughts from other people's minds.'
'And when we watch those eighteen badass women walk into the hotel lobby, I felt proud of Lee, for being able to maintain her poker face. She remained as calm as ever. And she knew better than to stare at them, and risk drawing their attention towards us.'
'Also, Lee immediately began to adjust her plan of escape, which was to steal a reality device from them.'
'Though, Lee realized an interesting problem. How does a middle-aged male adult, which it was Lee physically was, approache a group of violently insane women, without the women taking the approach in all the wrong ways?'
'People say that first impressions are important, and Lee knew this to be true. That is why Lee offered Revy a lighter for Revy's cigarettes. With Lee having the light, if she ever needed to start a fire.
And fortunately, Revy accepted Lee's offer. Revy even gave Lee one of her cigarettes in return. Though, that was not a real introduction, it did get Lee on Revy's radar, in a good way.'
'Meanwhile, as Lee worked on a plan A to the problem of formally approaching the women. Her plan B was simple. Let them come to her.'
'And how Lee handled her plan B was gutsy, to say the least.'
'It was on the third night, since the women came to town. Lee and I were playing poker later, into the evening, at the Rats Nest bar. Which was not a rarity for us. When Revy, and the five Lagoon sisters literally hit the Rats Nest like a storm. And after they killed some idiots that came onto them, and then threatened them. The women turned around and threatened Lee. Beside she stopped them from stealing our money from our poker pot.'
'Lee realized that if she allowed these women to walk all over us, she would never be able to get close enough to them, to steal one of their reality devices. So, she had to at least show some courage. And she did so, in spades.'
'Though, when I saw that Lee had all five of the teenage girls pointing their weapons at her, at point blank range, I was highly tempted to step in, but I also read Lee's plan. And the plan she had created, for this very situation, was a good plan.'
'Though, I did ask Lee if she needed help with them. Lee said, no. And I pretended to be having fun with the situation, so the girls would not be sure of me. Further keeping them off balance.'
'Then, the girls started to wonder if Lee was the writer. I quickly gave Lee a false alibi of being with her for that last several months. And the girls bought. With Lee knowing better than to look a gift horse in the mouth. Also, this alibi would cover me as well, in them not mistakenly suspecting me of being the writer, either, and possibly blowing my cover.'
'And the way Lee convinced those women to stand down was brilliant.'
'Afterward, we soon left.'
'I found it touching that both, Melvin warned Lee of Revy and the others, with tell Lee who he was. Without giving details on who he, and the others were. Though, Lee already figured that out by talking to him.'
'And after we exited the Rats Nest that night, Lee warn me about Revy and the others. Though, he didn't really give any details later. Because, she was worried that she would blow her cover. Which she already did, with her know. And I was okay with the situation.'
'Though, I did find it nice that both of them would risk their cover, for someone else.'
'When we got back to the hotel, I decided to retire to my bedroom, as I thought on how I could help Lee, while figuring out how to convince Revy, Rock, and others to lay off their plans of vengeance.'
'The problem was that was easier said than done.'
'The main problem was that Revy, and few of the others, had hair trigger tempers. And they had no aversion to violence towards those whom they do not care for.'
'While I have been completely insane, before, I have never had a temper like some of these women have.'
'Though, I did find it conforming that not all of them wanted vengeance against Lee. For example, Sawyer. She held no dislike for Lee, she was just along for the ride.'
'Late the next morning, I met back with Lee. I learned from her mind, about the introductions with the women. It took all my self control not to laugh at that event.'
'And the adventures we had for the next few weeks were so much fun.'
'Along with the fun, it is was interesting to watch Lee come more skilled at thinking on on her feet.'
'I do feel sorry about tricking Lee into being designated driver for Revy, Rock, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton. But, better her than me. I have seen this five all drunk before, and I would not want to be anywhere near them in that state.'
'Though, Lee made sure they did not have weapons. And if that had slipped Lee's mind, I would have made sure that was the case. Also, while these women are violent, they prefer to kill with their weapons, and when they are sober, so they can savor the act more thoroughly.'
'Besides, it was a good test, for Lee to deal with these women were completely unpredictable. And Lee passed her test with flying colors.'
'From reading their minds the next day, I was impressed with the way Lee handled herself. And that game of chicken was as brilliant, as it was insane.'
'Then, Lee got in trouble with the local mafia, and their leader. From what I read of Lee's mind, the leader's name was Paciano Del Soto. But, she was able to talk her way out trouble, and get the that mafia dissolve by the next day, including having Paciano join the priesthood.'
'She even got a car out of the deal, the next day.'
'Now, that takes skill and guile.'
'And damn, what a cool, pink convertible Lee got from that deal. That car was in pristine, like new, condition. And from Lee's memory, that car was over sixty years old.'
'I was a little leery on informing Lee I was bi-sexual. Which I am. Being a genius, and a gender bender, has allowed me to broaden my horizons.'
'And I was completely honest that my offer to sleep with her in that car.'
'It is just that given Lee's personal problems, she does not like male on male. And I could I inform her of the truth about my gender bending, without blowing my cover.'
'But, I am sure if I made the offer now, as a woman, Lee would more than likely take me up on my offer.'
'Still, Lee politely back out of it, and I, along with Rock and Revy had some fun in the car, with Lee driving.'
'Then, Lee got into the sights of the local Police Chief, Pedro Del Soto, Paciano's slightly older brother. And Lee was able to convince Pedro to keep her secret, and help her in finding a way out of this reality.'
'Ah Pedro... How do I describe you?...'
'The best way I guess is that Pedro is a badass, with enough common sense not to be a badass in the situation he finds himself in.'
'Pedro is very genre savvy. Probably more so than even Lee, or Chang. From reading Pedro's mind, the man can probably quote the Evil Overlord List by memory.'
'And Pedro is a badass of the first caliber.'
'Drop Pedro into almost any other situation, barring the super-powered badasses, such as with us, and he would likely wind up top dog. And he knows it.'
'It is just that he is outgun in this situation. And he realizes it. That being said. Pedro is intelligent. Hard working. More honest then most people would give him credit for. Fair, in a manner of speaking. He genuinely is concerned about the welfare of his city, which is why he was helping Lee. He cares about his subordinates to the point her ordered them away from the Devil's Hotel, to protect them. And he cares for the people that live in De La Plata Podrido. Which he considers to be his city.
'I was so happy to hear from Chang, that Pedro left down before Revy's group, nor the maids, got a hold of him. Pedro doesn't deserve to suffer for trying to protect his city.'
'Still, some things concerned me about Lee, and Pedro. Both of them thought that the worst case scenario, for their situation, was that their home world could get get turned to ash, by our friends, and their spaceships.'
'I wish I could have told them that those of us with cooler heads would not allow that to happen. And we would have stop things before the situation went that far. But, if I did so, it would have blown my cover.'
'Also, on a strange note, while I knew that Lee and Pedro were meeting every evening, at the Last Resort Diner. A place I had not been before. And a place I was not going to go to.'
'During the first week, after I met Lee, one evening, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee and I talk about going there for lunch the next day. And I said I might comes. But, on the day I was planning to go, I got a message from the hotel staff.'
'The message read. Greetings, R.T. You are not the only one that cares about Lee. But, it is best we carry out our own agendas separately, to increase the chances of helping Lee. Stay away from the Last Resort Diner. And good luck.'
'R.T. could only stand for, River Tam. It was clear that there was a third party in town. One that knew who I was, and was watching all of us in a way I could not sense their presence. Yet. This party wanted to help Lee, as well. Given the delicate situation Lee and I were in, I decided to just let the matter go.'
'I declined going with Lee, for lunch there. Which she did not mind. And I avoided the Last Resort Diner.'
'Then, during one morning, at breakfast, at the Devil's Hotel bar, I read from the girls' minds, that they had exhausted their leads, and they were planning to lead.'
'I had to figure a way to keep them here. And at the same time, I wanted to see how Lee would react. What her plan would be. And I knew how to do it.'
'Later that morning, Lee and I were playing poker, at our usual table, inside the Rats Nest bar.'
'After we had an interesting conversation about pirates. Lee really does know her subject material. And a conversation where I almost, but did not, revealed myself to Lee, by showing I knew chinese, by reading the chinese symbols on a strange ring Lee showed me. I let drop that I overheard the women were thinking about leaving.'
'Fortunately, beforehand, I kept a burner phone on me, in case of emergencies. Or, Lee needed a disposable phone to use. And so, when Lee came up with her plan, I was ready to do my part.'
'And it took all my willpower not to breakdown laughing at the set up for Lee's Tex-Mex message.'
'I wonder how hard Lee would have laughed if she knew that she had paid Bao to deliver the message? And how hard Bao would have laughed, if she had gotten the joke?'
'I knew that Lee was creative. But, to see her wicked sense of humor in action was just so entertaining on a whole different level.'
'And Bao was a good sport, as well. She got fifty dollars for it, she did not ask questions. But, she knew, as Lee put it, they had rolled Revy, and Revy's friends. So, she gave Lee a kiss, and she gave Lee a bottle of beer out of the deal.'
'Over the next few days, I had to avoid focusing on Rock and Revy, due to the risk of breaking out laughing at the mental images of what Rock did with herself, when she first found the images that Tex-Mex had created, on the internet.'
'Then, there was that date Lee went on with Eda. I was impressed that Lee was able to have a one night stand with Eda. Sure, Eda asked Lee on the date. But, Lee went all the way in presentation to make Eda happy. And Lee was able to close that deal. Given that I know Eda, personally, I know pleasing that blond woman is not an easy task to achieve.'
'And Lee was intelligent enough to use a condom.'
'After a few more adventures, I returned back to the Cowboy Bebop reality, to spend a few nights with Chang. With me being gone for about five minutes for those in Lee's home reality. With none of them knowing I was gone. Including Lee, nor the girls.'
'While in our bed, on the Serenity, Chang dropped the bombshell that he wanted to see this town for himself. Due to Revy and her friends being there, he wanted to spend some time in this city. And he wanted to do so with me.'
'The relationship I have with Chang has been good for both of us. And it is stable. So, I did not disagree too much for him coming to the town. I figured, if I was careful, I would be able handle the situation of him being here. And to start with, I was able to do so, with only minor problems. While maintaining my secret identity as Sam, which even Chang did not know about.'
'I considered myself lucky that I was able to convinced Chang to keep his visit secret from everyone, and for him to stay at the hotel across town, from the Devil's Hotel. This is the same hotel that Chang eventually bought, and converted into this very casino.'
'Also, I was able to give the excuse, that I got the gray car, I had been secretly using, as a way for the two of us to travel the city in. That way, if I saw Lee, or one of the girls, I can quickly get away from them. While being on foot would be more difficult. Chang was even nice enough to let me drive him around.'
'Though, given that Revy and the others had reality traveling scanning devices, I could not just use my reality device to be two places once. I could only do that every so often, without them becoming suspicious.'
'And even with my gray car, it would be difficult. Given it takes around twenty minutes to get from his casino, to the Devil's Hotel.'
'So, I had to come up with an excuse for the time I would be spending with, Lee.'
'I told Lee that my friends had a big payday, and my girlfriend had come to visit me. Though, I did wait a few days to tell, Lee. Until I felt that it was a good time to mention it. So, I had to do the little dance of heading back and forth, between Lee and Chang, until I could mention my lie to Lee. With me having to change disguises, and genders, between visiting the two of them.'
'It is fortunate that when I told Lee I would have to spend some time with other people, away from her, that Lee was polite enough to not pry into my private life, and she let me spend time with Chang. And once she realized it dealt with my love life, she was okay with my spending time with my love.'
'This respect for privacy extended to during the time loop. From what I read of Lee's mind, not once during the time loop did Lee try to pry into my personal life.'
'Lee really did want keep her friends. And this was just another example, of a long string of actions she had taken, to earn my respect to the point I want to continue to be Lee's friend.'
'Though, I had to be careful. When I went to visit Chang. I took my car. I then went somewhere private, out of town, by the beach, to change genders and clothing. While remembering to take off, and hide my beard, along with leading my long hair fall loose. Then, I had to reverse all this, before I returned to the Devil's Hotel. And I had to make sure no one caught me.'
'This became a chore, but a chore I deemed necessary.'
'Chang did eventually ask me what I was doing in town, when I was not with him. I lied, by saying that I was having fun spying on Revy. And I had to tell him I was staying at the Devil's Hotel. I even gave him the phone number to my room, so he would not leave a message at the check in desk. With the chance of Revy, someone else, or even Lee, intercepting it, and wondering why Chang was trying to contact me, as Sam.'
'That would have blow my cover, real quick.'
'Chang then asked if I had found the writer, yet. I lied again, and I said I was not looking for the writer. At the time, I was not sure which way Chang would lean when he found out about Lee. So, I kept him in the dark, during that time.'
'And Chang knew better than to push the matter. Especially, given the great sex we were having, during the time we spent together.'
'Then one morning, on the Day of the Little Angels, I got a phone call from Chang, in my suite. And he asked if I would like to go out on that day, and the next day, which was the Dead of the Day. I said, sure. But, that I would only spend a few hours with him today. Though, I would be free all day tomorrow.'
'Chang said that would be in fine with him.'
'Since I was already planning to tell Lee the girlfriend cover story, this was not that much of a problem, to add that I had a couple of dates. I would tell Lee that I was going to meet my girlfriend for a few hours today, and I would be with her for the rest of tomorrow. Though, I would still be able to spend breakfast, and tomorrow, with Lee.'
'Later that morning, as we were walking to the Rats Nest, around the time the bar would open, I spoke to Lee about myself going to see my girlfriend. Lee was very polite and understanding when I broke the news to them. She even said she hoped I would have a good time.'
'Though, from her thoughts, she was a touch disappointed that I would not be spending time with her. But, she understood.'
'Then, we ran across two young girls. A drunk six year old girl, and a teenage girl.'
'The six year old girl immediately attacked Lee, and took her off guard, to the point I had to pull her off of Lee.'
'Fortunately, the teenager quickly came to assist me, and got the six year old to calm down, with both of them soon leaving. And the teenager's excuse was honest, in that the young girl had mistaken an alcoholic beverage for fruit juice.'
'Even though I read their minds, I was still surprised by whom they were. But, given the situation, I dared not stop them from leaving.'
'As they left, I helped Lee up, and consoled her the best I could, about her being beaten up by a drunken six year old girl.'
'I also swore I would never tell a soul about the attack. And I intend to keep that promise.'
'We then headed back to the Devil's Hotel, with me helping Lee walk all the way back.'
'When we got to the front entrance, we were greeted by Violin and Aeryn, whom showed genuine concern for Lee.'
'Violin asked what happened. And Lee was very selective in her answer. Lee stated that a drunk jumped her, and didn't say anything else.'
'The two other women were satisfied with the answer, and we then passed by them, into the lobby.'
'After I got Lee to her suite, and into her bed, I made sure she would be fine, and I then left to visit Chang for a few hours.'
'When I got back to he Devil's Hotel. Lee was nowhere in sight, in the lobby. On the chance she had recovered enough to be down there, to meet me. I think went up to the third floor, and I stood by the door to the suite and did not telepathically sense her inside.'
'Given the physical state Lee was in, when I left her. I felt I needed to find her, and quickly.'
'I went back downstairs, to the lobby, and used my telepathy to find her, and I swiftly sensed she was was hotel restaurant. But, I could sense that something was off about Lee's thoughts. They were no as sharp as they usually were.'
'So, I went to check on her.'
'When I reached the hotel restaurant, I was shocked at what I saw. Lee was sitting at one of the tables, in the back of the room, with the girls sitting by him, at that table he was at, or nearby tables. All of them laughing and having fun a good time.'
'From their thoughts, I could tell they were all stoned on some type of drug. And Lee did not realize it. While, from the thoughts of some of the girls, they had clearly tricked Lee into getting stoned, without her realizing it.'
'And from what I could guess, Lee had never been stoned before, so she did not realize how stone she was. Nor, in how much danger she was in, given temporally impaired thinking and judgment.'
'Then, I started listening to what Lee was saying, and it surprised me in a pleasant way.'
'I did not know Lee could be such a philosopher. Though, now that I think about it, such skills do show up in her writings. But, Lee usually does not think this way, unless I guess she is writing. Yet, I was happy to see that she can truly be deep when she wanted to be. And I enjoyed seeing this side of her.'
'Still, the funniest and scariest part of that situation, as she talked to the girls, was she was practically telling them she was the writer. But, the philosophical examples she was giving, in doing so, went completely over their heads. On the other hand, I knew exactly what Lee was talking about.'
'I then approached the group.'
'When I reached them, I was then offered one of the pot brownies. After a quick nibble of one of the brownies, to make sure it was weed, which I then spit out, I quickly got Lee out of there, before Lee gave herself away at the writer.'
'Also, Lee was still sober enough not to mention that I had a girlfriend to the others. That would have piqued the girls' interest in me. And enticed them towards looking into my personal life, which might have blow my cover.'
'While Lee's cover was not blown there. If she had been exposed, I would have loathed to have to rescue Lee and fight our way out of there in the state Lee was in. But, I would have done so, since the girls put Lee in the position in the first place.'
'I then convinced Lee to head up to her suite, on the third story. And I escorted her suite. When we got to her suite, I stayed with her, to keep her company, for the next several hours, as she sobered up.'
'A few hours later, when Lee began to come to her senses, she was both furious with the girls for what they had done, but she was also thankful that I was there to save her.'
'And to be honest, I was upset with the girls, as well.'
'While, at the time, she realized that she could do nothing to the girls, for what they had done to her.'
'And spoke to her, in a supportive, and comforting manner, to help calm her down, and to know that I supported her.'
'Lee did thanked me for my help. And I found her gratitude to be touching.'
'As a way to help left Lee's spirits, I offered to pay for dinner, for us, as we dined in, inside Lee's hotel suite.'
'After dinner, I kept Lee company for a few hours, watching TV, and talking.
'By then, Lee had calmed down. And she clearly appreciated my company.'
'Eventually, I said good night to Lee, and left her suite, to go get some sleep in my own hotel room.
'Lee said, good night. And we both ended the day on a good note. With me looking forward to spending time with Chang, tomorrow, while I knew that Lee would be okay with me being going for more of the day. Save for the time we would spend at breakfast.'
'Of course, none of us realized that the next day would be the time loop. Which changed the course of everything, in our lives, for all three of us.'
'The next day, on November second, the Day of the Dead, we all ended up in that time loop. And by all, I mean the entire planet. Everyone on that planet was effected. I do not want to think of the type of power that would be require to achieve such a temporal feat.'
“And Lee was at the center of the storm, and she had the interest of whom ever was behind the temporal event. Because the one thing I know about the time loop, was that it was a natural phenomena. And like Chang, did not dig in who cause the time loop, because I would not want to get the attention of, let along risk upsetting someone with that kind of power.'
'And from what I remember of the time loop. Thanks to Ranma's magical lamp, and the smoke inside it. And from what I read from Lee's mind, after the time loop ended. Lee wisely used her time in that time loop.'
'Though, at the beginning of the time loop, the girl's prank of getting Lee stoned was fresh on her mind. And without worry of the consequences, Lee decided to have some fun, with some pranks against the girls were absolutely hilarious, and embarrassing, though harmless.'
'I am glad that Lee tries not to be a vindictive person. And she instead trying to be a nice person. I find that compassionate trait to be attractive in people.'
'And Lee only went after the girls directly involved with getting her stoned. She did not go after Eda, nor Yolanda. Both of whom had nothing to do with that event.'
'Though, to be honest, since the girls got their memories back of those pranks, and the cons Lee pulled later in the time loop, Lee dialed her problems with the girls all the way to eleven.'
'And speaking of those cons. After Lee worked out her pranking issues with the girls, she then started bettering herself. And she tricked the girls into teaching her several skills.'
'Also, even though, at the time, I did not remember the time loop, from day to day. Eventually, Lee decided to ask me a few questions of where she could learn how to do a few things. Such as learn spanish, and learn to fight in hand to hand combat.'
'On those days, Lee approached me, from reading Lee's mind, I realized we were in a time loop, none of us could get out of, and Lee was not the cause of. Since there was nothing we could do, I decided I would use my time productively, and help Lee. I offered to teach Lee what I could, without revealing my secret identity. Which, from reading Lee's mind, I never revealed in the time loop.'
'On the days I taught Lee, I called Chang. I said I could not make it because we are in a time loop, and that I was helping the person in the center loop to become a better person.'
'Given the strangeness in our lives, Chang did not even question the situation.'
'Also, I asked Chang not to come to the Devil's Hotel, because the person I was helping would remember Chang visiting the hotel. Chang understood the situation, and he respected my wishes.'
'And I enjoyed doing my part, in helping Lee. This Included teaching her how to fight, and teaching her to speak, read, and write, spanish.'
'Lee can now speak, read, and write, multiple languages. And she is dangerous in a number of fields of combat. Including, some unexpected ones. Such as card throwing. Shenhua, her teacher in said skill, put it best. Lee is deadly with a deck of cards. And Lee knows this.'
'Though, Lee plans include trying to prevent people from being killed.'
'And when I got my memories back, I realized that Lee made for a good, patient student. I guess when someone is in a time loop, that person will either learn patience, or go crazy, and then learn patients. Lee just became incredibly patient, without going completely crazy, first.'
'And I had a lot of fun both teaching Lee spanish, and teaching her how to kick ass. The best part was, at the time, Lee didn't realize who I really ways. And much later, when I revealed my identity, I am sure it occurred to her that it turns out that she had a top notch hand to hand combat teacher.'
'In addition, on the days that I was not helping Lee, I was with Chang, making sweet, sweet loving, in a combination of ways that only two gender benders could do it.'
'Eventually, Lee learned how to pick locks from Ranma, and she worked up the nerve to start searching the girls rooms for interesting items.'
'Unfortunately, while in the time loop, a reality device would not solve Lee's problems. From an earlier incident in the time loop, where Lee learned that a reality device not get her out of the time loop, but only reset the time loop. Along with the time loop effecting the entire planet. So, she could not just look for a reality device in one of their suites, would solve her problems.'
'Though, Lee also learned that none of them kept their reality devices in their suites.'
'But, Lee did find some interesting things. One was Natsuru's book on gender. When I read that book, I found that book to be very informative.'
'Though, the most interesting items Lee found were in Rock and Revy's suite. Those items being the five packets of instant spring of drowned girl.'
'With the packets, Lee got a taste of what it was like to physically be a woman. And she enjoyed in on so many levels.'
'And though Lee only had fun with her female form, for a week straight, in her suite. Later on, during Lee's off days. Where she just needed a break from everything. She would break and take those packets, to have fun her room, for those days.'
'Lee could not stay a woman, but with those packets, she could visit womanhood. And she only used those packet in her room. And Lee only used those packets in the privacy of her suite. Which is good, considering if the Revy and her friends found out, the situation would be even work for Lee.'
'Still, as the repeating days continued for years, Lee eventually stumbled into a situation of helping with the party in Devil's Hotel that night.'
'And gradually, Lee decided that she was going to have more and more fun during that repeating party. And after much work, Lee literally became the life of the hotel party for a number of times.'
'But, eventually, the party had to end. And Lee found a way to stop the time loops.'
'And after the time loop stopped, I learned about time loop from Lee. But, I could not read Lee's mind how, who caused the time loop, nor how it stop. And I felt that I probably did not want to know.'
'Also, I found it hilarious, after learning about it from third parties, that the last Day of the Dead, when Lee knew it would not repeat, she could not help herself, as she convinced Bao to go on a date with her, and they stole the show at the hotel party. They danced the tango for half an hour, and then left, with no one figuring it out was Lee, until she wore the same gray suit during the casino poker game, when she played me, as River.'
'And while I was not surprised that Lee learned how to dance in the time loop, I had no idea that Bao could dance so well, that people would talk about it, with envy lacing their voices.'
'But, it wasn't all fun and games. After I got my full memories restored, during our time in the time loop, I realized something in bed, last night.'
'That I had royally screwed up in the time loop, when it came to Chang.'
'And it was such an innocent question. I did not mean anything by it. It was just a simple question of curiosity.'
'When I was with him, or her, depending on what we were doing during that day. Given our activities that day, there was some randomness involved. And when we were together, I asked Chang, what he was going to do with the rest of his life? I asked Chang this question, nearly every day, in the time loop, that I was with him. Over and over again. Until the question lodge in his subconscious.'
'This is the reason, after the time loop, that Chang decided to move here, and restart his mafia organization. Because I asked that question, over and over again.'
'I do not think Chang will even realize this is the reason for his recent actions, when he gets his memories back, of the time loop, from the smoke that Ranma has. And I am not going to mention this to Chang. Because, besides that question, we had a great time together in the time loop, and I do not want to spoil the wonderful experiences that we had between us.'
'Still, Lee's adventures did not let up. And because I was with Chang for a good bit of the time, I could not help her. Though, she did manage without me.'
'First, Lee met past Rock, past Bob Lowe, and two past Revys, along with present Revy. Dealing with three Revys at once would have been a difficult situation, even for me. And Lee was about to defuse the situation without anyone being hurt, and with the everyone going their owe separate whiles. With Lee being to hide Rock and Bob from the Revys, and then work up a believable cover story, with her pictures of the three Revys at once, of her claiming she thought Revy had two twin sisters, to Rock, and the girls. And it worked.'
'Second, was where Lee was dragged into watching the Tron Legacy movie, with the women, while they all commented on the movie. Still, Lee had a good time with the girls, and the girls seemed to have like the movie.'
'I have seen that movie, and the original Tron movie. Both are good, and a fun watch. Even the animated series was pretty good.'
'Third, was Lee had a lunch date with V.T., whom was originally from the Cowboy Bebop reality, but then was hired at a reality trucker for the company, Reality Express. Though, if I don't want to know, how, or why, the Devil's Hotel is taking deliveries from Reality Express.'
'But, as time when on, it became clear to both Lee and I, that there was a lot more going on in this town, than both of us thought.'
'Fourth, was when Lee was able to help Melvin hide from the three Hotel Moscow members, whom came to the Devil's Hotel, in search of Yurick.'
'Much like I gave Lee an alibi for Revy, and the girls. Lee gave Melvin an alibi that Yurick had been there, and left. And it threw the russian women of Melvin's scent. Also, Melvin threatened to call the police, on the three women, for harassing the Hotel's staff and customers.'
'The russian women realized they had wore out their welcome, with them soon left the hotel, and this reality.'
'I realized afterward, from reading Lee and Melvin's minds, that this situation also dealt with some minor time travel. That the same members were the same women of Balalaika' organization that she had stated has lost Melvin during second cookout we had, where we discussed the matter of the writer.'
'Not that this minor temporal issue mattered in the long scheme of things. The important part was that Melvin and Lee's covers were both still safe. For the time being.'
'And I think given Melvin is only hiding from Hotel Moscow to keep his manhood, that he should be left alone. Something like that should be a personal choice.'
'Also, I admire that when Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, found out about Melvin's secret origins, that when the confronted him, the understood the reasons for his actions, and they agreed to his identity a secret from everyone.'
'If those three can keep such a secret, and they realize the importance of such matters being a choice, maybe there is hope that Lee might be able to get out of this mess in one piece.'
'Also, they told Melvin about the stories, and Melvin got a kick out reading them. He clearly did not hate the writer for what he wrote. Instead, he found the stories to be very funny. And for the first few days after reading the stories, he had some problems keeping a straight face in front of the girls. Not that I blame him for that. I have had similar problems. But, he was able to keep it together, and not arouse the girls' suspicions.'
'But, that being said, even I could sense that trouble was on the horizon for Lee. In the form of three more women coming to Plata Podrido.'
'Those three women being Dutch, Janet, and Benny. One evening, they came to town, to move into the Devil's Hotel, and join their family, in a more direct way in hunting down the writer.'
'While those three are not the toughest people around. They are some of the savviest and most intelligent people I know, barring Ed, her sons, and myself.'
'Lee knew this. And it came as no surprise to her that she was the three ladies number one suspect for being the writer.'
'From reading Lee's mind, after the event, I learned that during lunch one day, the three of them dressed in casual, yet sexy clothing, and ambushed Lee at the food truck, belonging to Eda and Yolanda, that she went to.'
'Fortunately, by then, Lee had a pretty good cover story as to why she was on the run, in Mexico. It was bland, but believable. And she had an ace up her sleeve. She baited Eda to come out and greet the three women.'
'Lee then used her facial expressions toward Eda, for the other three women to guess that they had slept together, with Eda confirming it.'
'Lee then quickly left. As she did so, she over heard from the four women that her plan had work. That they thought nobody would be crazy enough to knowingly sleep with Eda. Even Eda admitted this. Especially, not the writer.'
'Well, they were wrong.'
'And this kept them off Lee's back for a while.'
'But, that while soon ended with Revy have a crazy idea for a beauty contest. I guess Revy liked that bikini contest that Lee wrote about in book one. And it was a funny storyline. Still, I can say, first hand, that those bikini parties Lee wrote about were fun. And I am sure Revy likes those bikini parties, as well. Considering her family loves hosting them. And they have hosted a lot more of those parties, than even Lee had hinted at their being.'
'Also, the other girls like Revy's idea for a beauty contest. And Janet decided it was a good way to flush the writer out, with Lee still her primary suspect.'
'And so, Lee got roped in being one of the judges.'
'In retrospect, Melvin and I should not have laughed in front of Lee over this. Because, she then dragged us into it, as well. And give we were laughing at her misfortune, I do not blame her for doing so. And I know Melvin felt the same way as I did.'
'Though, Melvin had enough sense, to convince the girls that he would make a better announcer, than judge.'
'Also, Lee was able set some sane ground rules, such as no violence and weapons. Along with it not being a beauty contest, but a talent contest. And the rewards would be some bottles of beer, and bragging rights.'
'And the girls were fine with her rules.'
'Still, we needed a third judge. And I was sure Lee would take care of that.'
'The night after, when the contest was held on the stage of the Hotel Bar, Lee came in with Pedro.'
'The was the first time that Pedro was introduce to the girls. And I admire the way Pedro did it. Instead of walking in like a badass, he did not wear a hat, nor sunglasses. Instead he took a more peaceful, personable approach. As a first impression, I think it worked for him.'
'Then, right before the contest started, we all realized that we had forgotten to figure out how we would score the contest. Lee came up with a good idea. Along with the one to ten scale. Have half the score, itself, would be from the talent itself. Thirty percent from their dress. And the last twenty percent were from looks.'
'That made a lot of the less sexy women very happy. Because, if gave them a shot as winning the contest. And this was not lost on Lee. She really does try to be polite when she can to the girls. That has helped her some in this situation.'
'Still, Lee, Pedro, and I, enjoyed making comments, as we score the contestants.'
'Dutch was the first on stage. She sang a good song. This set a good tone for the rest of the contest.'
'I have to give credit to all the women. They all showed skill in their talents. And their talents ranged from singing, to gymnastics, to poetry, to drawing. The trio sisters, had a coordinated talent, casing three different types of martial arts, in a row. It was quite spectacular. I quickly realized that the victor would win on technical points.'
'Then, near the end of the contest, there were two surprise guests that even caught me flatfooted.'
'Chang, in her female form, as Daiyu, and my future, female self, by a number of hours, showed up, and crashed the contest.'
'To say, I was not happy, was an understatement. And Lee, Pedro, and Melvin, immediately recognized them. And they knew I, or in this case, River, was a telepath. They swiftly cleared their minds to prevent being found out.'
'And to be honest, they were able to achieve that tactic, with moderate success. And that tactic may have worked, if I did not already know what was going on.'
'When I tried to read my counterpart's mind, the only answer I got was that she would explain later.'
'And from Chang's mind, I could tell that she did not realize who I was, as the man known as Sam.'
'Given they wanted to join contest, and to keep the contest moving, we quickly got them to join in the contest. Even though, I did not care for it. I did allow relent in letting them stay.'
'Also, I found it interesting that Eda requested to go last. And we three judges were fine with that, and I was later glad we allowed her to do so.'
'Chang choose her talent by singing a song that displayed her marvelous english speaking skills.'
'When it was my future self's turn, I honestly don't know where my talent came from.'
'Fire dancing, while playing that song.'
'I suspect I may never have the answer to that question. This is because I saw my future self choose that song, and perform the talent. And thus, I had to perform the talent, to prevent a paradox. Another case of a time stable loop, where cause and effect become debatable.'
'Later, after I met my future self, I did not even bother to ask my future self where she came up with the talent, because I already knew that she would not have an answer.'
'I admit, Chang, and my future self did do good jobs on their talents, but I was still upset with them. So, I average scores.'
'Meanwhile, Lee and Pedro wisely gave both Chang and I, as River, high scores.'
'Then, Eda came up on stage, as the last contestant, and she stole the show. She got the highest scores in the contest.'
'Her performance was a great ending to the contest, and a worthy come back from the bikini contest, back in Roanapur.'
'As Eda returned to her friends, Lee wisely suggested to Melvin, Pedro, and myself, as Sam, that it was time for us to leave.'
'We quickly left for the front hotel lobby. When we reached the lobby, Melvin quickly excused him, and he headed for his suite.'
'Pedro asked me to walk away for a minute, as he wanted to talk to Lee in private.'
'I did so. And from what I read of their minds, they were talking about me, as River, and if they think if I was onto them. They thought I was not yet onto them.'
'Oh, if only they knew the truth. That I was on their side. Given their savviness, I think they would have found it funny... Oh well, talk about lost opportunities.'
'Though, I do find it touching that Lee realized I, as River, was likely already saner than most people thought I was.'
'They also talked about why I had dyed my hair red, before I came to their reality.'
'I wish I could have just walked up to them, as Sam, and told them. But, that would have blown my cover. And I had worked to hard to do keep my cover from being discovered.'
'When they were finished, Pedro exited the building, for his car, with the intent of going to his home for the night.'
'Meanwhile, I met with Lee, as we walked towards the elevator bay.'
'We talked a little bit, and I mentioned that I was not going to bed just yet.'
'By then, we head reached the elevators, and Lee had summoned one of them.'
'Soon, the elevator doors open, and Lee walked into it. With Lee turning around to face me.'
'Lee stated that this night was likely on of the best nights of her light.'
'As the elevator doors closed, Lee then dropped the bombshell that she was dying cancer.'
'I was shocked that I had not read that from her mind. Meaning, she did not think about it.'
'It was then that I sensed myself across the room. I turned and saw my future self staring back at me, from across the hotel lobby.'
'We did not even need to speak, as we read each other's minds. We did not risk walking near each other, in case one of the girls came out of the hotel restaurant, and saw us. That would cause too many questions for myself, as both River and Sam.'
'So, we had a silent conversation from across the room.'
'Future River informed me that she was from less than a day in the future. That she went back in time, right after this meeting, to the morning of that day to be with Chang.'
'It turned out that this morning, Chang decided to meet with Revy and the others, but he wanted to talk to us, first. We convinced Chang that the crashing the talent contest was the best way to do so. And that is how my future self met my past self.'
'And the worst part is, or was, depending on my point of view in that conversation, was the fact that I had no choice but to do as she did, and go back in time, to prevent a paradox. Which is why I sometimes disliked temporal mechanics.'
'Though, my future self did tell me where to find the collapsible batons, with ignitable ends, and where I got the nice lighter from. Along with the name of the song she used. She also told me how to hide the batons in my clothing, so no one noticed I had them on me.'
'Before we parted ways, we telepathically talked about Lee dying of cancer. And what we should do about the fact that our timetable had now been greatly shortened.'
'My future self did say that she thought about our plan, and for me to up our timetable.'
'I agreed with her. But, I asked if she was any closer to figuring out how to placate the girls.'
'My future self said, no. She pointed out that she was only less than a day in the future. And that it was going to take more time than that, to come up with the answer. And I sadly had to agree with my future self.'
'So, we were still stuck in a situation of not having enough time to help Lee, before she died. And I am sure that at some level, Lee felt the same way.'
'We then left each other, my future self heading back to the hotel restaurant, to rejoined the others, while keeping Chang out of trouble. And I admit, that it was fun to just be with the girls, as myself, while having Chang with me. That being said, I still worried about Lee's wellbeing.'
'Meanwhile, I summoned one of the elevators, by punching the arrow button on the wall, to head up a few floor. When I reached my hotel suite, I pulled out my reality device, which I kept on me. I removed my fake beard. Undid my hair. I changed genders, and clothing.'
'I made sure I pulled out, and put on the same clothing I saw my future self in. I then used my reality device to head back to the morning of that day, to Chang's hotel, to meet her for breakfast.'
'Everything happened as my future self had informed me of. Chang wanted to meet the girls, I convinced him to go as a her, with us both crashing the talent contest.'
'As my future self, I was careful to keep my past self, from learning I was here, in town, until we crashed the talent contest that night. Also, I went and bought the collapsible batons, a nice lighter, and a few other things, I felt I would need for my performance.'
'That evening, as we walked enter the Devil's Hotel lobby, the music suddenly stared playing the song, Don't Let Me Be Misunderstood, played by Santa Esmeralda, from the Kill Bill Volume One movie. I found that to be a good selection for the two of us, in the situation we were in.'
'After we entered the hotel bar, and after the talk with the judges, we met up with the girls, and we talked. I was asked who the writer was. And I teased, by saying, where is the fun in that.'
'Everything then played out as it did when I was my past self. Only this time, I was my future self. At the table that I set out, with Daiyu, Rock, Revy, and a few others, I pulled out my collapsed batons and extended them.'
'Then, when my name was called by Melvin, I held my batons in my right hand, as I got up and walked on stage.'
'When I reached the stage, I even was able to find that song on the karaoke machine, and perform it, just like I had watched my future self do. Or, in this case, myself do. Since I was the one performing it at the time, while remembering watching myself perform it.'
'A few hours later, we said our goodbyes to the girls, and we made it back to the hotel, that Chang was staying at. After we were inside Chang's suite, I convinced her, to make love to me, while we were both women. And I found that rest of the evening to be a good night for both of us.'
'Though, on the matter of Chang's mental gender. Chang still mentally considers himself a man. Though, between the brainwashing of the vat process. Years being locked as a woman. With the associated problems of being a woman. And then spending literally decades being able to switch back and forth between genders. Has left Chang mentally fluid when it comes to his, or her gender at the moment. And Chang is open to sex in about any gender combination, and position I am willing to try.'
'I am not sure if Chang appreciates the situation he finds himself in. But, I sure do. And to be honest, after spending so much time as Sam. My personal mental gender has become a bit fluid. But, not seriously so. I am still a woman upstairs. Though, I am one that can appreciate what it is also like to live as a man.'
'Now, the next day was even more interesting for Lee, and I.'
'It seems that being the judges to the talent contest, from the night before, had only wet the interest of the girls, not only in Lee, but myself, as Sam.'
'The next day, was the seven way poker game, at the Rats Nest bar. When the girls decided to try a different tactic in subtly prying information from us, without it appearing they were doing so.'
'Very spy versus spy stuff.'
'While Lee and I had not problems with Rock. As a man, with some instant man powder. Molly, and Violin, showing up to want to join in our usual poker game. What was surprising was who Violin brought with her, and Chang showing up, as Daiyu.'
'By the end of our game, the entire large, corner table we usually use to play poker, was full.'
'The seven people at the table were Lee, myself, Rock, Molly, Violin, Violin's surprise guest Scorpius, and Chang, as a woman. All of them were trying to figure what made Lee and I tick, while maintaining their secret identities.'
'The irony was that we both knew who they were, but they did not know we knew who they were.'
'Also, when Chang first came in, she came to a stop at her table, and looked down at Lee. Though, she was not looking at Lee. She was looking at me. With me sitting beside Lee. Fortunately, Chang did not recognize me. And she soon turned her attention to finding a seat at the table, which was on the other side of Lee, from myself.'
'Though, at the time, Lee mistakenly believe that Chang may have figured out that she was the writer. Fortunately, Lee soon realized this was not the case.'
'Also, with Scorpius there, I did my best to tune out my telepathy, on the off chance she would figure out who I was.'
'Through the game, Lee and I kept our cool. And in the end, the five other adults eventually left the table, paid their bills, and left the bar itself.'
'But, a few minutes later, Scorpius doubled back, and she used a reality device to ambush Lee in the men's restroom. She figured out that Lee was the writer.'
'And while Scorpius wanted a piece of Lee's ass, it was in a good way. She had no intention in telling the others, and instead, she had her way with Lee.'
'I sensed when Scorpius doubled back, but it was too late for Lee. Though, I was about to barge in the men's restroom, when I sensed what Scorpius was about to do, from Lee's mind.'
'I wisely stayed in the bar room itself, while I gave them their privacy.'
'A few minutes later, Scorpius walked out of the men's restroom, with a smile of satisfaction on her lips. She the walked out the front door.'
'A minute later, Lee stumbled out of the men's restroom. She missing her hat and glasses. Along with her shirt being partly untucked.'
'Both Bao and I chuckled a little at the way Lee looked. But, on a little.'
'Lee immediately walked to the bar counter, and had a drink.'
'Bao talked to her for a minute, and I found out that Lee the sense to use a condom, just as she had. done when she slept with Eda.'
'Also, besides Lee and Scorpius, only Bao and I knew what happen between the two of them, in the men's restroom. And neither of us were going to discuss the incident with others. Because we respect Lee too much to gossip about her.'
'A little while later, we continued our poker game, to take our minds off what had just happened.'
'Later, I learned a few hours after Scorpius' had some fun with Lee, Chang headed to the Devil's Hotel, as a woman. Chang had figured out that Melvin was Yurick, the Blade, and she went to confront Melvin about it, alone. From reading both their minds, after the meeting, it seems that they came to an arrangement, and Chang agreed to keep Melvin's secret from Balalaika.'
'This made me happy on several levels. It meant that if Melvin got into trouble, Chang might help me get him out of it. Or, at the least, Chang could mitigated the situation.'
'That evening, Lee decided he wanted to get some supper at an American steakhouse in town.”
'I didn't feel like going, so Lee left to get something to eat, by herself.'
'I then left the Rats Nest as well, and I headed to visit Chang at the hotel he was staying at.'
'After which, Chang and I went out to dinner together, at an Italian restaurant. We then went back to Chang's hotel suite, to talk in private. Where he mentioned that he had bought a beach home on this island.'
'I had already learned, before the seven way poker game that day, Chang bought Pedro Del Soto's beach home, which previously belonged to Paciano Del Soto, and Pedro was selling it. And, as a man, Chang had met Pedro, and saw Lee, whom was acting at Pedro's chauffeur.'
'I found that a little funny, but I did not outward show my humor. Because, I knew Chang would wonder why I found his comments to be funny.'
'Right after learning that Chang bought the beach him, Chang dropped his bombshell. That with some gold and other treasures he had hidden, in cashes, in other parts of the multiverse, he bought the hotel we are presently in, and he was going to remodel this place into a casino.'
'I asked why he didn't think about this treasure before, in my presence. And Chang admitted that with everything else that had happened in his, or her, life, he had forgotten about it. But, he said he had recently got a hold of an old inventory manifest, of what he use to have at the Tower, and he then recalled the cashes, and where, and when, they were in the multiverse.'
'While learning this did not make me happy. I feigned support, as I asked if that was all Chang was planning to do.
'Chang admitted that he had large plans than just having a casino. That he was going back into the organized crime business. He was going to set up shop, right here. In this reality. On this island. And he was only starting with on this island. Him later expanding no just on this world, but other realities, as well.'
'That he was going to put his old organization back together. He was also going to track down and recruit a number of the people that worked for him. Including, mafia members, researchers, technicians, and scientists.'
'Though, there were exceptions. Such as Chang did not approach Shenhua, Sawyer, nor Lotton, about some jobs in his new organization. Chang could clearly see that they were happy where they were at in their lives, and Chang respected them enough not to disrupt their happiness.'
'Also, there was the silver lining to this. After I asked a few questions, on the matter, from Chang. Chang did mention that he was doing this more out of fun, than anything else. Which was good. Because that approach meant he would likely not become to serious, or violent on the matter.'
'Unfortunately, that was not the worst news. The worse news was that, behind my back, Chang had already talked to Simon, the others of our crew, the Bebop crew, Arcee, and even Annie. And they all accepted his job offers. In positions they would enjoy working at, for very nice pay and benefits. Though, even I am not sure how Chang convinced Annie, considering Annie does not like him.'
'There was nothing I could do to convince him, otherwise. And I soon found out, when I talked to my family and friends, whom had come to this reality, the next day, they told me, to my face that they supported Chang's idea. Because it would be something different, that they all could make a lot of money at doing, while having some fun.'
'While, I at the time, I could not figure out why Chang was doing this. I think he was just doing it, as a way to spice up his life, and our lives, with adventure.'
'Now, I realize that this was all my fault, because I asked Chang, during the time loop, once a day, over and over again, what he was going to do with his life.'
'So, Chang decided to do something with his life, and that something was him going back to his roots. To the job he was good at. Being a casino owner and mafia boss.'
'Chang coming to town, and setting up shop, is on my head. Not Lee's head. Fortunately, Chang do still listen to me. And he answered my questions about what he was planning to do. And he kept me in his information loop.'
'This included the fact he was only doing this for the fun of it. And the top level personal were my friends. So, they were less likely to do anything too horrible.'
'Plus, from what I knew of Pedro intelligence, abilities, and resources, Pedro had the skills and manpower to reign Chang, in a few ways.'
'If what I read from both Chang and Pedro's minds is correct, Pedro at one point, soon after the casino opened, did just that. Though, that was when Chang started to get on Lee's scent, concerning being the writer, because Chang learned from Rowan that Pedro knew the writer.'
'And I really cannot blame Chang for helping Rowan create a gender bending whorehouse. Where customers can have the option to temporally becoming the opposite gender, with out any lasting effects.'
'Even I will admit that is a brilliant idea that could net us a lot of money.'
'Though, what I also learned, from both Pedro and Lee minds, they were able to continually lose the tails sent to follow them, by Chang.'
'During the week after the talent contest, Chang bought the hotel across the island from the Devil's Hotel, and began renovating it. With his resources he could do a few months worth of work within a week.'
'For me, that week was blur, of my time spent between Lee, as Sam, and Chang, as River.
'Though, during that time. I did wonder about one comment Lee made about alcohol.'
'Lee is not a heavy drinker. He sometimes drinks Vodka, but mostly bottles of beer. And even that can be a rarity. So, I wonder where Lee learned that apply juice looks like some types of rum and whiskey. I was tempted to ask her, but I decided not to. Still, I have a feeling that Lee has lead a more colorful life than one would expect of someone with her background.'
'And Lee informing Revy of that, was a good way to get Revy off her back for a day, or so. And I agree with Lee that I hope Eda did not get into to much trouble, over the matter of how she likely pretend to drink rum and whiskey, when it truth it was apple juice. When she played cards with Revy, over money, back in Roanapur. With Revy drinking alcohol during those poker games.'
'Though, that is another matter. Back to the renovation and grand opening of Chang's new casino.'
'When the casino was ready. Which was much soon than even I had guessed it would be. I, along with my family and friends, including Revy and her group, attended the grand opening of Daiyu Palace Casino. It was a nice celebration, and we had a nice party after the opening. And the customer turned out was pretty good.'
'Though, Lee and Pedro wisely stayed away from the casino.'
'During this time, Chang requested that I give him the reality device that I had been using. I did so. I now regret that action, because doing so, prevented me from helping Lee more directly, yesterday afternoon. After we met the maids, and I revealed who I really was to her.'
'After the opening of the casino, I had to move into the casino penthouse, to live with Chang.'
'Chang stated that there was no reason for me to continue staying at the Devil's Hotel. And since I could not tell him the truth, I had no choice but to move in with him at the penthouse.'
'That meant I would spent less time with Lee. Still, I did my best to make it up to Lee. And Lee tried her best to be understanding for a situation she did not fully know about.'
'Though, I did not check out of the Devil's Hotel. Because, Lee could still leave a message with me, as Sam, there. But, I did spend more time sleeping at the casino penthouse, with Chang, than at the Devil's Hotel, as the gambling drifter, Sam.
'Things settled down for a few days, until the day before the big poker game that Lee and I were set up into playing.'
'On that morning, after Chang and I both had breakfast together. About an hour before Revy and Rock dragged Lee to the casino, Chang talked to me. He told me that I would be playing Lee in a poker. And while Chang did not realize that I was regularly playing poker with Lee, as Sam, to help Lee, he clearly meant I would play as River.'
'And I could not back out of it, because Chang said, in a polite manner, that if I did not play Lee, Annie would be the one playing Lee.'
'Having Annie go in my place honestly scared me. Up until this point, only Pedro and I, know Lee was the writer. And there was very good chance that Lee would have her cover blown, in such an open, stressful poker game.'
'And if Lee had played Annie, I knew Lee would not likely be able to keep her identity secret from Annie. My belief was proven true a few days later.'
'Speaking of secrets, the only reason I was able to keep Annie from learning I was Sam, was because she did not know that Sam even existed. If she had, with her use of the force, my cover would have been blow.'
'And I am not sure if Arcee already knew I was Sam. Clothing and fake beards mean nothing against Arcee sensors. She had already seen me as male, on more than one occasion, and she had a record of my bone structures, as both female and male. And that was like her having my fingerprints. They were one of a kind.'
'Also, some of Arcee's sensors can extend for miles around. And from the computer networks, around town, that were hook to the internet, including Chang's own casino computer system, she probably learned about Sam. Given Chang would have likely given the job to do background checks on those he was interested in to Arcee.'
'If Arcee did figure that I was, Sam, she kept that secret to herself. She always has fun keeping secrets, just like Annie and I. I respect her for that. It was part of her more playful, less violent aspect of her personality. The part I like about her. That being said, we are both good friends. We found we had a lot in common. Both of us were experimented on when we were young, and left insane. And both of us had to claw our back to sanity.'
'Anyway, during that morning conversation, Chang mentioned that Rock and Revy were bringing Lee to the casino in around an hour. And I was to wait in a room, by Chang's office, for Chang to tell me to mentally come to his office.'
'I knew when I confronted Lee, as River, it would scare the hell out of Lee. The best I could was not to compound the situation.'
'When Rock and Revy brought Lee up to the penthouse, I stayed a room away from Chang's office.'
'I admit, I did laugh at some of their thoughts during that meeting, especially some of Lee's thoughts. I could not help myself. This was one of the few times I could laugh at Lee's thoughts, without being questioned on the matter. Because, most of the time I was around Lee, I was Sam to her.'
'Then, Chang signaled for me to come into the office and ambush Lee. Instead, I just calmly walked up to Chang's office door, and stood there, looking at them.'
'Chang then gloated that I would be playing, Lee, with the four adults looking my way. Rock and Revy actually laughed at Lee's situation.'
'I just stayed quiet, as a way to not put Lee under any more pressure. And Lee was trying very hard to hide her secrets from me. And I respected her for that.'
'Though, at that point, Lee stated she would do it, she found out the time and place, and then she left the office, for the parking lot.'
'The others then asked what I was thinking. I deflected their question, and I then excused myself from the room.'
'On a side note, a few days later, when I learned about the tiger incident. That happened to Lee, right after she left Chang's office, when she reached the ground floor of the casino. I wasn't surprised that Lee handled herself that well. That tiger is a pussy cat compared to the women Lee had to deal with for months on end, barring the time loop.'
'Though, back to that morning, on the day before the casino poker game. As soon as Rock and Revy left, I started working on a plan on how to help Lee. Still, I had to play honestly, and try to win. But, that did not mean I would have to try very hard to win. Also, even without reading Lee's mind. I already realized that Lee would not use her precognition, because she knew I would be reading her mind. Lee truly does not believe in cheating.'
'And given her precognitive abilities, she is has legitimate concerns to worried she will be accused of cheating. Especially, in a casino. Also, she realize that, as River, I was a telepath, and I know when she would be using her precognition.'
'Unfortunately, Revy and Rock did not understand this fact, until after they placed the bit, and returned to the Devil's Hotel, were Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, informed them of this. After Lee tricked those three into officially spilling the beans that I was both a genius and a telepath.'
'Later that day, in the early afternoon, after much planning on how to help Lee. I realized that I likely needed to find Lee, as Sam, and talk to her. So, I could be there as a friend and help lift her spirits.'
'I wanted to find Lee, as Sam, and help cheer her up.'
'I left the casino, in my own personal car. My gray, four door car. Not one of the black sedans the casino uses, that I know had been tailing Lee and Pedro. Which Lee would likely recognize, and ask questions about, towards me.'
'I then found somewhere private, and where I changed clothing, and genders.'
'I then headed back to the Devil's Hotel to look for Lee. I did not find her there. I then checked the Rats Nest. After that, I checked some restaurants that I knew she liked. Though, I slowly drive by the Last Resort Diner, instead of entering it. Still that was enough to sense that Lee was nowhere inside, nor near that building.'
'For a moment, I thought she might have skipped down. Not that I would blame her for that. But, there I realized that there was nowhere for Lee to run to. And all running would do would be to upset Revy, Chang, and the others. And they would find Lee eventually.'
'And I was sure that Lee realized this, as well.'
'It was then, that I remembered something that I read in Lee's mind. That during the time loops, Lee sometimes went to a secluded place on the beach, on the east side of the island, facing the gulf, to watch the surf and think.'
'And I agreed that the situation we found ourselves in required some thinking.'
'I drove over there, and I found her there, in her convertible, with the hood and side windows down, parked on the beach.'
'I got out of my car and walked over to Lee's car.'
'Lee was happy to see me, and she invited me to sit beside her in her car.'
'I did so, and we then spent most of the time just quietly enjoying each other's company.'
'Though, at the beginning of our meet there, Lee almost caught me right there and there. She asked how I found her so quickly. How I told her I did not know how to drive. And how I had a car.'
'But, I told the truth, that I went looking for her. I lied about not knowing how to drive, because I did not want to chaperon Revy and her friends. And I lied that called in a favor for the car. When it was because, if I admitted to owning the car, her next question would be why she had not seen it, until now. And that would further risk blowing my cover with Lee. Which I could not risk happening. Especially, right then and there, at such a critical moment for both of us.'
'But, what happened next, warmed my heart.'
'After being caught like that, by Lee, and answering her questions, I found it truly touching and heartwarming from Lee, was that she forgave me. And she said she understood my actions.'
'It was tempting, right then and there, to reveal to Lee that I was really River. So, she had nothing to worry about from me. That I was her friend. And I planned to always be her friend.'
'But, at that moment, Lee really needed a friend for some emotional support in this situation, and I was glad to be there for her.'
'And revealing who I was to her then and there, could have been disastrous to both of us. Lee could have reacted badly in a number of whats. With a few of those ways causing the poker game to be called off, which would have upset Chang and Revy with both of us.'
'So, I kept quiet about my identity. And we mostly stayed silent, as we sat next to each other, enjoying each others company.'
'At sunset, we parted ways, after spending a pleasant afternoon with each other.'
'The next morning, I admired how Lee prepared and presents herself, before coming to the poker game. And I admit that Lee had guts entering the casino, like she owned the place.'
'While, I still could not tell Lee that I was Sam. I did drop a view hints. Right before I was able to leave Chang and my penthouse living room, for the poker room set up for us, on the same floor I was one. From my laptop computer, I watched as Lee entered the building, from the video camera feeds. Among other things, my computer also allows me to select music for the gaming floor.'
'I selected Separate Ways, by Journey, as Lee entered the gaming floor, as a subtle hint that she was not alone, during our poker game. I think she took the hint.'
'As Lee made her way up to the front express elevator to the penthouse, I closed my laptop, put it away, and headed to the poker room on the floor. As I enter the poker room, and sat down on the far chair, at the table, to allow me to see the entrance to the door.'
'I also entered the room, just as Revy and Rock were just finishing their discussion, with Revy and Rock then leaving the room, to head back to the gaming floor.'
'I had to admit, looking around the room, Chang had done a good job in decorating the poker room for the event. And there were video cameras and microphones, in the room, for the game, that would send video feeds to the gaming floor.'
'Less than a minute later, Lee showed up, and sat down.'
'From reading Chang's mind, Chang was impressed that Lee showed up at all. Let alone looking like a professional gambler.'
'After a brief discussion between Lee and Chang. And then Lee and myself. Lee sat down in the chair, across the table, where I sat at.'
'Then, our dealer show up. And even I was blindsided by Chang's selection.'
'Faye Valentine. As crooked dealers go, Faye could be the worst, if she was ordered to do so. And I didn't need to read Faye's mind, nor Chang's mind, to know that she was Chang's ace in the hole, for making sure I won the game.'
'That upset me.'
'Still, given the situation, I was happy that Lee was able to maintain her composure.'
'Chang then helped Faye get seated. With Faye sitting down in the chair, at the table, to Lee's right side, and my left side.'
'This also allow Chang and excuse to literally stand over Lee's shoulder. Lee's right shoulder, to be exact.'
'Of course, Chang planned on staying in the poker room, during the game. Much to my embarrassment.'
'But, given Lee's intelligence and savviness, she knew of Chang's arrogance. And she knew that Chang was planning to stay in the poker room, during the game, nearby, just to screw with her head. And Lee had enough problems as it was.'
'But, Lee was not without her resources. And she already had a plan to get Chang out of the poker room.'
'Before coming to the casino, she called Pedro. And Pedro must have decided to help Lee, because a few minutes after Lee came, Pedro and several of his police officers, show up, to watch and gamble on the game.'
'The best part was, Lee knew when Chang answered his cellphone, that Pedro and his officers were already inside the gaming floor.'
'And without being informed, Lee gloated about it, and got away with gloating about it.'
'With everyone realizing that Lee called Pedro here.'
'Also, Lee knew there was too much riding on the game, for Chang to do anything to her.'
'While at the same time, Chang realized that Lee was forcing him to leave the room.'
'In all honestly, I was surprised to find that Chang found the situation to be funny. It has to have been a long time since someone had so brilliantly played him, in such an artful way. And he admired this about Lee.'
'With Chang forced to leave the room, to deal with Pedro as a distraction, that only left Faye, and myself, for Lee to deal with.'
'Faye thought Chang was upset. And Lee pointed out that Chang was not. Which Lee was correct.'
'Lee then told Faye to deal the cards. That she felt they only lady she had chance with that day was lady luck. Which meant, she felt completely alone at the table.'
'If the cameras were not recording live feeds to the rest of the building, and I could get away with it, I would have given Lee a hug at this point. For Lee was wrong. Lady luck was not the only friend she has at that moment, at that table.'
'Still, I could not. And so, the game began.'
'Lee did not waste a time, as the cards were dealt, she implemented her game plan.'
'I honestly did not see the jokes coming. And they were funny.'
'And tell those jokes so openly was just plain insane. Though, par for course for Lee's plans.'
'To my surprise, Lee was able to win the first hand of cards, by humor alone.'
'I was not sore about her winning the first hand. On the contrary, I found the entire situation very entertaining and interesting.'
'And soon after, I enjoyed getting in on the Lee's humorous act, as we had fun embarrassing and making fun of the people who put us into this situation. In front of everyone watching and listening on the gaming floor, casino restaurant, and the suites in the building'
'Then, I had to go and blow it, by asking about Eda.'
'Lee went quiet, and she only complimented, Eda. And to be fair, Eda only showed Lee, her nice side. Though, Lee did know how dangerous Eda was. But, Lee was not going to take for granted the pleasurable night she had with Eda. And I am not just talking about the sex.'
'Like any person, Lee craves company. And Eda gave that to her, for an entire night. And Lee was grateful for that.'
'As the game continued, Lee employed some of the poker game tips I taught her, as Sam. Such, as betting low, and how to play the long game.'
'Soon, we had a telepathic conversation. With me reading her mind, and my replies being yes, or no, with my eyes. Along with a few head and body gestures. We swiftly agreed to play fairly. No precognition. No mind reading... Well reading what cards Lee had. And no card counting. Which would have been boring, if I did so.'
'Still, while we had been playing casual games, every day, when I was with Lee, as Sam, for Lee this was a very serious game. Because, Lee was not sure even if she won, or lost, if she was going to walk out of the casino alive. But, there was not much I could do about that, at the time.'
'Outside of bathroom and meal breaks, we played for a number of hours, until eventually I started to get bored.'
'I decided to spice things up a bit. And to have some more fun, I started talking in spanish, showing that I at least knew that Lee was multilingual.'
'To humor me, Lee played along. I would speak in a different language, and Lee would speak in that same language. As we talked in different languages, while discussing various subjects, including politics, until Lee tired of it, she forced us back to playing our poker game.'
'While we continued playing, we gave and took about the same amounts.'
'Soon after, I decided to try to gamble big, with all my chips. But, Lee not only didn't take the bait, she folded on that hand.'
'And to be honest. Her reaction caught me off guard. Given her crazy plans and gambling motif. I thought she would go for the bet. And I was wrong.'
'Lee then said to me, that this was not a movie, and that I was not going to win, I would have to work at it.'
'And I don't fault her for her reaction, nor comment, on that matter. Though, I did win that hand, because Lee folded. Not that I really cared. I was more concerned about Lee, than the money we were playing with.'
'Then, after supper, Faye started cheating in my favor.'
'Lee was losing a lot of money, but she could not figure out why.'
'I had to figure out a way to stop this cheating. But, if I said something, it could cause problems for all of us. So, I came up with a plan to get Lee to do it. And at the same time, boost her confidence.'
'Then, on the first ten minutes break, after supper, when Lee ducked out to use the restroom, I ducked out to my personal bedroom, that I shared with Chang.'
'Given the voice difference between my female and male forms. I was unable to fake my male voice, when female, and vise versa.'
'And given I was taller and bigger in my male form, than my short, slender female form, I had slipped out of my gown, and undergarments, to change to male. I did so, and I changed my gender with a sneeze. I then opened one of my clothes drawers, and I pulled out a burner phone that I had.'
'And I made phone call to the casino.'
'I spent a minute talking to the casino operator, including using the operator's first name, and telling her that I was both River and Lee's friend.'
'Given I used the operator's real name, she believed me. And she transferred me to one of the guards' cellphones, on the penthouse floor. The guard them took her cellphone to Lee.'
'And finally, I got to speak to Lee as Sam.'
'I talked to Lee, and I boosted her confidence, by explaining to her that there was nothing to fear from me, as River. Though, I did not tell her that I was River. Still, my talk with her worked.'
'Then, I mentioned to look at Faye's hands. That it seems no one had picked up on it. And Lee clearly got the message.'
'After I hung up the phone. I did as Lee one time did. I opened the phone, took the sim card, broke it in have, then tossed the card pieces and phone into the garbage.'
Next, I changed genders, to female, and I quickly got dressed, in the clothing I had on before. After which, I swiftly headed back to the game room, in the opposite way down the hallway, from the men's and women's business restrooms.'
'I entered the poker room a few seconds after Lee did.'
'Faye joined us, and a few minutes later, and we continued our game.'
'Lee soon caught Faye cheating, and she used a good throwing card trick to do so. I then support Lee request for a new deck and a new dealer.'
'As the video feeds were cut, one of the guards came in and told Faye to leave. I knew she would not get in trouble with Chang, considering she did as Chang has instructed her to do.'
'During the private moment, I offered to split my winnings back to even, with Lee.'
'Lee declined, and she stated we had to play the game, as is.'
'Though flexible, Lee always did have a sense of fair play.'
'A few minutes later, we got a new deck and a new deal, Jetta Black.'
'I admired Jet, or now Jetta, since I knew her, as a him, before Jet had to have the vat process, due to a back reaction to the rejuvenation therapy. And Jetta is fair. And I did not have to worry about her cheating.'
'And so, the game went on. With Lee slowly making back her loses.'
'Over the next few hours, Lee not only gain back what she lost, but she slowly took what I had, until finally, later that night, I lost.'
'I was not upset, in the least, at losing. Lee beat me fairly. Even with the deck stacked against her, she won. And given everyone in the building was watching us, I could not show it, but I was proud of her.'
'The sad part was that Lee did not see a dime of that money. And even so, Lee pulled out a dollar of her own, and gave it to me, so I would not leave the table busted.'
'I found Lee small gift to be deeply touching.'
'Lee may be the only person in the multiverse, whom won a million dollars in a poker game, but came away from the gaming table a dollar poorer for the experience.'
'I calmly got up, and walked over to Lee, and whisper into her ear. 'Thank you. And I will be seeing you later, Paul.' To let her know I knew who she really was at the whole time, but I kept her identity a secret.'
'Lee then wisely got up, left the room, and the building, soon after.'
'As I watched Lee leave, Revy soon rush into the room to collect her winning, I thought it was unfair that Lee got nothing for her efforts. And so I decided I would give her something for her victory. And I had just the item in mind for a gift for her.'
'That night, and the next morning was full of fun for both Lee and I.'
'First, I spent the night having makeup sex with Chang, over losing the poker game. Well, to be honest, it was more celebratory form of loving making, dealing with Chang's brilliant planning, in that he profited off of that game, no matter the outcome. He even made more money, overall, due to my loss, from the bets on the game floor.'
'Though, the next morning, when I went over to the Devil's Hotel, as River, I joked about the makeup sex excuse with Lee, as River. And she found my comments funny, in my presence.'
'Anyway, earlier that morning, Chang and I got up, from the large bed we shared, together.'
'I was a woman at the time. And Chang was a man.'
'We got dressed and ready to face the day.'
'We then had breakfast together, in our private, penthouse dining room. With Chang having room service bring up breakfast for us.'
'Being rich does have its perks.'
'After breakfast, Chang went to work, in his office, by first going down stairs and talk to the security and pit boss on duty. He would then soon return back to his office, to do some paper work.'
'Meanwhile, I am when to our liquor cabinet to raid it.'
'I knew I wasn't going to get in trouble for doing this. But, I figured that Lee needed some type of reward for her win last night.'
'The gift I selected was a wooden box, with a sealed bottle of Ardbeg Providence in it. And I was sure that Lee would appreciate the gift.'
'I went down to garage, inside the casino, to get a car.'
'While, I kept the car I used as Sam, in a parking lot near the casino, there was to much of a risk of Lee or the others seeing me as River, in Sam's vehicle. So, I used one of Chang's many, pristine, four door, black sedans, to head to the Devil's Hotel.'
'I even arrange for a casino chauffeur, to make it look official, and to make Lee wonder if I even knew how to drive. So, as to further separate my Sam cover, from my identity as River.'
'Also, early that morning, right after Chang left, after our breakfast, I began arranging the situation, for Lee to use my gift. I changed gender, and call Lee as Sam. And I called the number of the hotel restaurant, with another burner phone I had. I reached Emily, whom gave the phone to Lee. I soon told Lee that I would meet her at the Rats Nest, at eleven AM. That set the stage, for when Lee would use her gift, I was able to give her.'
'Though, I later found out, that Lee was having her own adventure that morning.'
'Around the time I first got up from my bed, Lee was having her own fun, across town, in the Devil's Hotel lobby.'
'Later that day, I read from Lee's mind that, Revy and her friends, together, confronted Lee, with questions about what she did at the poker game the previous day.'
'In response, Lee had finally let control of her temper slip. And she stood up to Revy and her friends, that morning, for them only questioning how she won the game, instead of thanking her for winning that game. And she did such a good job that they did not hurt her, and instead, they left her along for the most part, that day.'
'Later, as River, was had my chauffeur drive me to Devil's Hotel, and wait for me, right outside the front entrance of the hotel. I walked into the lobby, with my gift in hand, and I found Lee there. Though, the girls were on the other side of the lobby.'
'They saw us, but fortunately, they did nothing but watch and listen.'
'I gave Lee her gift. We talked for a minute. Lee asked if Chang was okay with me losing. I said that was what makeup sex was for. The girls got a good laugh out of it, while Lee chuckled lightly at my joke. Also, I was happy that Lee was glad I did not get in trouble with Chang.'
'I so wanted to sit down and just talk to Lee as a person. But, I could not do so as River. So, I quickly left, to allow Lee to do what she planned to do next. I already read Lee's mind as to what she was going to do next, and I needed to hurry. So, I could be a part of what Lee was going to do next, as Sam.'
'Though later, I read Lee's mind and found that she did appreciate that gift. And Revy approach her about the bottle of alcohol. But, Lee was able to get her to shut up quickly, before Lee made a quick exit to the Rats Nest.'
'What took me so long to get to the Rats Nest was that, while Lee had directly for the Rats Nest, I had to have the chauffeur dropped me back at the casino. Because, if I requested to go directly to the Rats Nest, the chauffeur might inform Chang.'
'When we reached the casino, I snuck around to my own car, that was parked in a nearby parking lot, I drove to a private area, change clothing, and genders, put on my fake beard, tied my hair up in a ponytail in a red scrunchy, and I then headed to the Rats Nest.'
'As Sam, I made to the Rats Nest bar, just in time, before Lee was going to unseal the Ardbeg Providence.'
'I was not surprised that Lee had invited Pedro. I think Pedro was the only other person, in this city, from this reality, that would appreciate having a drink of Ardbeg Providence.'
'And given this was Bao's bar, Lee invited Bao to drink, as well. Though, at the time, neither Lee, nor Pedro realized who the bartender really was.'
'A minute later, Lee made a good toast, to life, and we all drank for the glasses that Bao had provided.'
'And while I had Ardbeg Providence before, it has always been a good label, and I was glad to share it with my friends.'
'After the four of us polished off the bottle, Pedro was still sober enough to drive, and he left to go back to work at the police station.'
'Though, before Pedro left, Lee was kind enough to give Pedro the empty bottle, as a gift to him. Which was nice of Lee. And we both knew that Pedro would appreciate such a gift.'
'The rest of the day was pleasant for Lee, and myself, until I returned to the casino, that evening. Where I went to Chang's office, to see if he wanted to have dinner with me.'
'As I opened the door to Chang's office, and I looked at Chang, I realized, from what I could read of Chang's thoughts, that Chang figured out that Lee was the writer. But, at the time, all I could get, that Chang had done, towards Lee, in response for learning she is the writer, was that he was sent a couple of people to tail Lee, starting the next day, in the morning.'
'As both of us went to dinner, down in the casino restaurant, I realized that I could not stop Chang from finding out more about Lee. All I could do was hope that I could mitigate that situation, when it happened.'
'The next day was a bad day for all of us. That was the day that the U.S. government finally caught up to Lee.'
'And I suspect what finally drew their attention to Lee was the poker game. The worst part was that Lee realized this before the poker game, and she could do nothing about it.'
'On that day, Lee was kidnapped by a U.S. snatch and grab team. This happened while she was coming back from lunch. Right after she parked her convertible by the Rats Nest bar, the team of men attempt to approach Lee. She ran way from them, and into the alleyway, behind the Rats Nest.'
'I was already in the bar, waiting for Lee, as she parked her car. By the time I sensed the danger, and I figured out what was going on, it was already too late. Lee had already run off.'
'When I got to my car, I could sense Lee was captured, and leaving the outer edge of my telepathic senses.'
'Still, since there was only one exit out of the city, I quickly drove my car towards the bridge. A few minutes later, when I got to the road leading to the bridge, I saw that Annie, and Arcee, in robot mode, had already stopped the van that Lee was kidnapped in, on its left side, and they had killed the team that had taken Lee.'
'They, were currently in the process of pulling Lee out of the van, and untying her.'
'When I saw this, I turned my car onto a nearby street, and I decide to find a place to change my gender and clothing. So, I could head back to the casino, as River, as quickly as possible. Because, I was sure, that given Chang knew Lee was the writer, and those two were sent to keep an eye on Lee, and protect her, by Chang. That those two women were probably going to directly take Lee to meet Chang after this.'
'I found a secluded place to park my car. Then to change my gender to a woman, take my fake beard off, replace my male clothing with my female clothing, and let my hair down. I then headed for the casino, as quickly as possible. Without getting into trouble, with the local police.'
'I soon made it to a nearby parking lot, by the casino. And I the made my way into the casino, from the front entrance. Given I already realized that Arcee and Annie were taking Lee up to see Chang, from the back entrance, of the auxiliary express elevator.'
'I made it to the penthouse floor of the casino, just as Lee was brought to Chang's office. But, I kept my distance, in a separate room. As I listened to their thoughts, as they talked with each other. Along with me avoiding Annie, whom was elsewhere in the penthouse, waiting for Chang to summon her.'
'Soon after the meeting began, Chang pointed out that he knew that Lee was the writer. And Lee came completely clean with Chang about being the writer, what she had done, and the time loop.'
'Though, when Chang threatened Lee with one of his pistols, something snapped inside of Lee, and from what Lee said, she was not only able to get Chang to lower his pistol, but she gave Chang a new found respect for this world.'
'What Lee said, was she pointed out how dangerous, and badass this world really was. And when Chang compared himself, and his friends, including me, to the sheer badassness of this world, he was left wanting.'
'Still, I think it was Lee's honesty towards Chang that saved her from him. That and the fact that Lee telling Chang about what she did to the girls in the time loop, had Chang laughing his ass off, and as some points, he was laughing to the point of tears, as he could barely stand up, while he could barely breath.'
'When I sensed that Lee was finally through with Chang, and she was being escort by Annie, out of the casino, I decided to see how Lee was, in person. And I met with her, in one of the penthouse hallways, as Annie took her to the front express elevator, where Lee would then got to the gaming floor, and the front entrance, where a car was waiting for her, to take her way she needed to go.'
'When I met with them, I read their minds. I could tell Annie knew what was going on, and Lee felt he was fine for the moment.'
'That made me feel good.'
'I spoke to them for a moment. I asked if Lee was okay. And she said, yes.'
'I also read from Lee's mind that she was going to get her car from the Rats Nest, and head back to her suite at the Devil's Hotel.'
'I then walked passed them, to Chang's office.'
'When I reached Chang's office. I talked to him.'
'Chang clearly knew I already knew that Lee was the writer. And he wanted to knew why I kept it a secret. And I told him my reasons. Though, I did not mention that I was Sam.'
'Chang then asked why Lee was doing all this. And why she was not hiding, instead of baiting those hunting her to come after her.'
'I told Chang the truth. That Lee was dying of cancer. Though, I sensed that Chang's mind, that he may have already also figured this out, as well.'
'Chang asked how long Lee had. I said around two months. Though, to be honest, Lee may have little longer.'
'After I informed Chang of all this, I could already tell that the gears were turning in his head, on how to use this to his advantage. Fortunately, that was usually a good thing for those he is interested in. One of the things I find attractive about Chang is that he is rarely wasteful.'
'Soon after, I left Chang, and the building. And I walked to the car I used as Sam.'
'I headed, in my car, to somewhere private.'
'I then changed back into my disguise Sam, and I changed into my male gender.'
'Next, I drove to the Devil's Hotel. After which, I quickly made my way through the lobby, and to the third floor. But, when I reached the hallway door to Lee's suite, I could sense Lee in there, and she was very upset.'
'From what I could sense, it seemed that the events of everything had all finally hit her and she emotionally broke down. First, into a fit of rage. And then to tears.'
'While Lee was having a mini-breakdown, and could really use a friend at the moment, I also realized that it would a bad idea to confront her, right now.'
'I needed to wait for Lee to calm down.'
'After leaving the hotel, and switching back my gender, to being River and I changed my clothing When I was ready, I headed back to the casino, to spent the afternoon in my penthouse home. To think on what I need to say to Lee.'
'Soon after I left, Lee finished crying, and collected herself. She then came out of her suite, she went down to the check in desk, and she paid for the damages to the room.'
'I will say that the staff in the Devil's Hotel was very understanding, and that as long as Lee paid for damages, then there were no problems.'
'About an hour after I left Lee, in the casino penthouse, I pulled out another burner phone I had, and went to my master bathroom, and lock the door.'
'I then stripped down, and changed genders. I called Devil's Hotel check in desk, and the clerk on staff gladly transferred me to Lee's suite.'
'Lee then picked up the phone, and I talked to her. She sounded better.'
'She said she needed some time alone for that day, and the day after.'
'And I agreed that Lee needed time to decompress.'
'Lee then hung up her phone.'
'After turning off my burner phone, I changed genders, back to female. Put on my clothing, and left the bathroom, to enjoy the rest of the day at the casino.'
'I really belief that Lee needed that day off. But, fate had another plans.'
'The next morning, fate decided to have Lee chaperon one of the craziest, most savvy individuals in the multiverse. The infamous, and insanity inducing private, Captain Jack Sparrow. With the only thing more surprising was whose body Jack was inhabiting.'
'It turned out that Revy was the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow. Which in retrospect, was not that surprising. They share a lot of the same personality traits.'
'That morning, the day after Lee and Chang talked, it seemed that Rock and the others decided to go on a tour of the mainland, of Mexico, for that day.'
'Though, Revy had not interest in the tour, and she stayed behind. Her plans were to get drunk early, in the hotel bar. And she had her weapons on her.'
'I don't fault for Melvin for doing what he could to talk Revy out of getting drunk.'
'Though, I am with Lee on this. He should have just suggested she see a movie, in the hotel theater, instead.'
'On the other hand, Melvin suggested that Revy try something that Melvin had learned while in this reality. Hypnosis for past life regression.'
'Revy, being the curious sort, decided to allow Melvin to do so, because she really wanted to get to know what her past lives.'
'Those two gained way more than they bargained for.'
'Half an hour later, Melvin dragged Jack, in Revy's body, up to Lee's hallway door, begging for Lee's help.'
'I will give Lee credit. Even I am not sure I would willingly accept dealing with Jack, to help a friend.'
'And it just got better and better for Lee.'
'Within five minute of Jack meeting Lee, from Revy's memories, he deduced that Lee was the writer.'
'And the reason I use the term, he, in referring to Jack, is because Jack was still pretty much a man in his mind, while inside Revy's female body. Much like Lee is female upstairs, in a male body.'
'Fortunately, when it came to Jack realizing that Lee is the writer, it seems Jack was impressed with Lee, to the point that no only did Jack offer to sleep with Lee, but he wanted to also teach Lee, like a student.'
'Even I would be tempted to take Jack up on such an offer.'
'But, since Lee did not want to wreck Revy and her family's lives, she declined Jack's offer.'
'Though, to help convinced us that Revy was not behind the wheel of that hot, redheaded, asian piece of ass... What Chang calls Revy, behind her back... Lee took Jack to a costume shop that she had used in the time loop.'
'And, at the time, Jack even correctly guessed that Lee was doing this to help convince us that Jack Sparrow was the one in charge of Revy's body.'
'Lee dropped Jack off at the door to the costume shop, and waiting for him out in the parking lot.'
'A little while, Jack came out in a costume similar to his old costume he wore in his previous life as a pirate. Only this outfit was fitted to Revy's body.'
'The best part was that Jack could still pull off that look, while in a woman's body.'
'That takes style and skill, that even I would envy.'
'Jack also holding a small bag with Revy's clothing, as Lee picked him up with her car.'
'Lee then drove Jack to the casino.'
'When they reached the casino, Lee immediately took Jack to the front express elevator bay. When they reached the elevator bay, with the two guards there, Lee stated they needed to see Chang. The guards took one look at Jack, in Revy's body, in a pirates' outfit, and they let the two of them use the express elevator.'
'Lee then escorted Jack to Chang's office.'
'As they confronted Chang, it did not take much to convince Chang that Lee was telling the truth, and this was Jack Sparrow they were dealing with.'
'Chang quickly called Annie, to find me, and for the two of us to come up to his office as soon as possible.'
'When Annie and I reached the office, they were in the middle of a very embarrassing conversation for Lee.'
'It seems that Jack had all of Revy's memories. Including Revy's memories in the time loop. And that Revy and Rock did notice that the five packets of instant spring of drowned girl they had went missing a few times.'
'It did not take a genius to figure out that Lee took them, and what she used them for.'
'But, it did take a genius to truly appreciate, in imagining, what Lee used to packets, to do with herself.'
'I honestly did not know that Lee's face could blush that deep a shade of red.'
'And given the situation, and the fact Annie had asked, I had to tell her what they were talking about. Both that Revy was the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow, and that, in a time loop, Lee raided Revy's magical packets of spring of drowned girl.'
'We all got a good laugh at Lee's embarrassing indiscretions, but we all agreed those actions, that Lee took in the time loop, would remain secret.'
'Though, I would guess that Revy and Rock had those packets for the writer, in the first place. So, the packets were used by their intended victim.'
'We then talked about sealing Jack's memories and restoring Revy's personality.'
'Though, Annie and I made it clear that it was ultimately Jack's choice.'
'Soon after, Chang sent Annie, Jack, and I, out of the room, and to a nearby spare office. So, he and Lee could talk, and come up with a workable plan for the situation. The plan on a believable story to explain why Revy came the casino? Why she was wearing a pirate outfit, that fit her? Why she would wake up in an office on the penthouse floor? And why she could not remember anything of that day's morning and afternoon?'
'Also, during that meeting, Chang made Lee an offer for his help, in exchange for her employment under him. Including the vat process, which would cure her cancer, give her a healthy body, restore some youth back to her body, and turn her physically into a woman.'
'Lee was really tempted to take Chang up on his offer. The one sticking point was not the vat process. Though, Chang did not know it, Lee would not have minded having that process done to her, while knowing beforehand the results, and drawbacks of being a woman would mean for her.'
'No. The sticking point was that Chang had yet to figure out how to placate Revy and anyone else that want revenged on Lee.'
'Should Chang have solved that problem, Lee would have gladly accepted his offer.'
'Meanwhile, as Annie Jack, and myself, walked to a nearby spare office, Jack realized was I going to read his mind, and he was nice enough to give me permission to do so.'
'From reading Jack's mind, I learned a lot about both Jack's personality, and Revy's personality, in a few ways.'
'I always wondered what Revy's potential for intelligence and cleverness was.
After meeting Jack in Revy's body, I had my answer. While Revy is nowhere a genius of my caliber, Revy, at her full potential, could keep up with me. And so, it was more a her mental childhood traumas that held her back. In other words, it was a software problem, not a hardware problem.'
'Though, Jack had Revy's memories, plus his own, he was still able to play at a high savviness level than even Chang and Lee. I can safely say, given Revy's longevity, she might someday fully overcome her childhood traumas, and become a better person, like I did.'
'That all being said, I was in agreement with Lee, that Jack needed to back into his box. Though, we all agreed that it was Jack's choice.'
'While, barring the gender differences, Jack and Revy's personality traits were almost parallel with each other. With Jack having a positive outlook on life, whereas Revy had a negative out look on life.'
'Along with their life experiences in different genders. There was one other trait that differed between Revy and Jack.'
'Revy was very monogamous. While Jack was very promiscuous.'
'We all quickly realized that if Jack, was allowed to stay Jack, he was going to cause a whole lot of problems for all of us. Including, himself.'
'Also, the resulting havoc would likely blow both Lee's cover, and my cover. Though, I doubt that Jack had the chance to realize I was Sam.'
'To add to this, Jack's personality trait to cause havoc was unparalleled. And Revy had a similar trait, though her trait was not as developed.'
'This trait to wreck havoc was made clear, earlier, when Annie and I walked in on the conversation between Lee, Chang, and Jack, dealing with the magical gender bending packets that Lee stole from Revy, and used, during the time loop.'
'Still, when we reached the nearby office. And Jack started to put the moves on Annie, while both of them were on the couch, in the office. I was not going to stop Jack and Annie from having a little fun, and risk upsetting one of the savviess people in the multiverse, and a force master, at the same time.'
'So, I quickly excuse myself, and left for a break room, next to the office we were in.'
'I still wanted to listen to their thoughts, and laugh, as they had some fun with each other.'
'The break room was on the way to the office, from Chang's office. So, I was sure they would stop by when they heard my laughing. A few minutes later, Chang and Lee did as I expect them to do so.'
'Soon, all three of us entered the other office, and we found Annie and Jack in a comprising position. Though, they were still mostly clothed at the time.'
'I have to admit, while she rarely shows it, Annie does have a nice set of breasts.'
'And the way Chang, Lee, and I found Annie and Jack, convinced Jack that he needed to go back to sleep.'
'It seemed that Jack still loved Rock.'
'And Jack knew that he stayed as Jack, then he knew his promiscuity would screw up his relationship with Rock, and the rest of their family.'
'We then learned that Chang and Lee had come up with a workable plan. Well, Lee came up with most of the plan, with Chang refining the plan a bit. All of us, even Jack agreed that it was a believable plan.'
'Chang and Lee then left the room, while Annie and I got to work, on sealing Jack's memories. We also sealed Revy's memories for entire day.'
'It took Annie and I, linking our powers, and minds, with Jack's mind, to seal Jack's memories, and bring back Revy's personality. And Jack helped us do this.'
'Even then, this seal would likely not last forever.'
'On an interesting side note. After reading Jack's mind, when I met him in Revy's body. Revy was following a fortuneteller’s suggestion. A woman that Revy and Rock met at the town festival, during the Day of Little Angel.'
'And that meeting confirmed that Lee was not the only precognitive in this reality. Which made me even more interested in this world.'
'When we finished sealing Jack's memories and persona, we left Revy asleep, on the couch of the spare office, as we returned to Chang's office, to find Chang and Lee talked about TV shows.'
'I gave them the good news.'
'Still, we all agreed that Annie and I needed to stick around the penthouse, in case, when Revy woke up, and the memories were not fully sealed, or if there was something wrong, we would be there to fix it.'
'After a brief discussion on a few things, we got to talking about movies Annie and I could watch, in my living room, while we waited for Revy to wake up.'
'Lee suggested, in thought, a comedy parody of romantic a movie, that I liked. I suggested the movie to Annie, and she liked it, as well.'
'It is so nice to have friends that appreciate a telepath's abilities.'
'And it is refreshing to know that, even though I still have some control issues on my telepathy, it seems that Chang, Lee, and Annie really do not mind me reading their minds. As long as, I keep their secrets, and I don't use those secrets against them.'
'It is a more than generous comprise on their side, towards me.'
'Annie and I then left for the penthouse living room.'
'Soon after, Lee said goodbye to Chang, and she left Chang's office, as well. Given part of the plan meant that Lee needed to be somewhere else than the casino, when Revy woke up.'
'A few hours later, as Annie and I sensed Revy coming to. We also noticed that it was Revy's personality, and not Jack's personal. And Revy was not consciously aware of any of Jack's memories.'
'We went to Chang's office and informed him of this.'
'Chang then got in touch with Rock, whom was at the Devil's Hotel, to come pick up Revy. Chang used the cover story that Lee came up with.'
'The three of us then waked outside of the other office, where Revy had been sleeping. When she fully came away, the three of us walked inside to check on her.'
'She was Revy again. And she believed our cover story. We even convinced her to keep her new pirate outfit, which she like. Which was no surprise, because deep down, she was still also Jack. And Jack had been the one to pick out that outfit, in the first place.'
'We then left her in the office, so she could change her clothing back to her usual outfit. And she then waited for Rock to arrive.'
'Rock soon picked her up, with her items, and she left for the day.'
'What I did not count on about this situation, was that Revy still wanted a drink that day.'
'From reading the various parties mind, I learned that, Revy convinced Rock, and a few of her friends, to go out for drinks that night, at the Rats Nest. Though, instead of them going there to get drink. She just wanted to have a few beers with her friends, and an atmosphere that she felt relaxed in. Which happened to be the Rats Nest, because the bar rightfully reminded her of her time at the Yellowflag, back in Roanapur, Thailand.'
'During that evening, that the Rats Nest, while Revy did not know that the bartender was Bao. She did talk to Bao.'
'While I am not sure what was talked about in their conversation. Whatever was said made Bao realize that Revy, and the others, were after Lee. But, at the time, Bao did not know why.'
'Still, given Lee was a very good customer, with the two of them already experiencing that wonderful date, together, Bao wanted to know what the hell was going on.'
'So, the next day was full of excitement for Lee and I. But, this time, not in a pleasant way.'
'The next morning, before I met Lee at the Rats Nest, Bao had tricked Lee into the back of the storage room of the Rats Nest, and she confronted him, with a pistol.'
'Lee soon told Bao everything, about what was going on. That she was the writer. What the stories she wrote were about. And a summary of everything else that Bao wanted to know.'
'To be fair, Bao took the news a quite well. She put away her gun, and she even laughed at the news that Lee was the one responsible for turning her into a woman.'
'Then, Bao played a little game, of Lee trying to guess who Bao was. And Bao gave Lee a big hint, and Lee immediately realized that the bartender was Bao.'
'Lee did immediately apologize to Bao about turning her into a woman. Bao was okay with the situation, because she also realized that Lee had changed her body into a body that was in perfect health, and far younger than she was back in Roanapur.'
'They then compared notes, on what was going on. And they had some fun in doing so.'
'Soon after, they re-entered the bar room itself. And before long, I showed up, at the bar, as Sam.'
'Lee and I then played our ongoing game of poker.'
'For lunch, Lee treated me to a meal at the local steakhouse restaurant that he took Eda too. And it was a good lunch. Though, we took her pink Cadillac. When we returned, Lee dropped me off at the Rats Nest, and she then to parked away from the Rats Nest, to prevent anyone from ambushing her, again. Or, at least allow her to spot them, before they spotted her.'
'Fortunately, it did not take her long to walk back to the Rats Nest, from where she parked her car.'
'Afterward, we continued our poker game.'
'Still, I was concerned, I could read Lee's mind, and her precognition was giving her growing sense of impending doom all day. Though, even I could could not figure out why.'
'Given Lee's precognition, this was a warning that could not be ignored.'
'Then, late that afternoon, close to sunset, we had the answer to our question, when the two Lovelace Maids, Rosarita 'Roberta' Cisneros and Fabiola Iglesias, showed up at ath Rats Nest, looking for direction to the Devil's Hotel.'
'For those that do not know, Roberta, also nicknamed the Bloodhound, it as dangerous fighter than I am. And her student, Fabiola is almost as dangerous in a fighter at Roberta is.'
'And the only reason that they would be in this town would be them searching for the writer. And the only reason they would be looking for the writer was for revenge over what the writer did to their master, Garcia Lovelace.'
'I am very happy, that Lee and Bao were able to secretly work together, on the fly, for Bao to stall the maids, while Lee figured out an escape plan for both herself, and myself.'
'After we quickly, though quietly, made our way out of the men's restroom window, to the outside, we briskly walked away from the bar, from the right side of the building, where there were no windows, and the maids would not see up leave.'
'A few minutes later, after we were a block away from the Rats Nest, and closer to Lee's pink car, Lee stopped by a payphone, and called the police station, to leave Pedro a message, that the maids were in town.'
'I admire that Lee remembered to warn her friends, as well, towards the impending danger.'
'Pedro did later get the message, and he immediately left town, with around half his police force right behind him. I will say this about Plata Podrido's police force, their intelligence, and common sense is a lot higher than most police forces. Those in the police force that knew what going on, and learned that the Lovelace maids were in town, also realized that it was best for them to get out of town very quickly. And that should not try to confront the maids.'
'And given Roberta is one of those few people I know of that can gloat, about taking a small army, and winning. I don't blame Pedro, nor his officers, from swiftly escaping town in their vehicles.'
'Though, back to Lee and I. A few seconds later, after Lee hung up the pay phone, and we started walking again, away from the Rats Nest, and we literally heard the Rats Nest explode, behind us.'
'I even turned around and saw the smoke rising, while Lee just continued walking.
'I do not know the details of how the Rats Nest blew up, but I was glad that Bao escaped unharmed.'
'Besides, Bao had the place insured. So, she will be fine.'
'Still, with the maids here, the danger level that Lee was now in the extreme. Her precognition was right on the money.'
'I think quickly returned to walking right behind Lee, as I caught up with her.'
'Given the seriousness of the situation, I did not have time to be gentle, as I came clean to her.'
'And I did drop a number of mental bombshells on her. One after another. All and in all, she took them very well.'
'While Lee had her back to me, and she was trying to convince me to runaway from her, for my own safety. With I found to be touching. Instead, I started revealing my secrets, by revealing who I was, with a sneeze, which changed me to my male form to my female form.'
'Lee immediately stopped walking, as she realized by that sneeze I was a gender bender. She then turned around, and she learned who I really was.'
'I feel that Lee laughed, because she really didn't want to cry.'
'Lee mentally realized that the fake beard trick worked on her. And she commented that she should have guess the name. Since, Sam rhymes with Tam.'
'She then requested for me to remove my fake beard, and I did so.'
'After some discussion, Lee asked why the maids would be after her.'
'And I answered her question.'
'I told Lee why the maids were after her, by reminding her what she did to Garcia'
'That news almost made Lee freak out. And this was from a person that could probably remain calm in the middle of a warzone. This is how much the maids scared Lee. And that fear was very justified.'
'I tried my best to calm her down by saying I could handle the maids.'
'Though, to be honest, I was not sure.'
'And the worst part was that I had to admit to Lee that I never really watched the Black Lagoon series. Neither the anime, nor reading the manga. I really need to do that sometime.'
'Lee then explained to me who Roberta was. And she then telepathically pulled up everything she knew about Roberta.'
'My fear immediately paled when compared to the fear that I felt, when I learned about what Roberta was really capable of. Which did not help Lee's confidence at all.'
'Then, Lee reminded me that I would not just be facing Roberta, but Fabiola as well.'
'Even I had to admit that I was outclassed.'
'I then asked if Lee felt we were still friends. And Lee answered, yes. And even given the circumstances, I was delighted with Lee's answer.'
'Lee then tried again to convince me that I should just return to Chang, and leave her to basically suffer a horrible fat.'
'Then, Lee went on about how she had been dealing with crazy chicks all the time. Which is true.'
'But, that was when I called her own her comments about crazy chicks. And I asked if she included herself in her comment.'
'While I did not say it outright, that I knew that Lee was a transsexual. I mentioned I knew about her gender problems.'
'Lee remained silent, until I push the matter, and Lee sadly revealed where her precognition came from.'
'I learned that Lee's precognition came from the fact that she would like to be anyway, but in her male body. In her current life.'
'I knew, from reading Lee's thoughts, that Lee use to have a death wish. And Lee used that death wish, in the form of repeating the term, I will die, in her mind, as a way to help her stay sane in the hell that is her life. Though, the time loop fixed that problem. Still, her dislike for her male body did explain why she had precognitive abilities in the first place.'
'I then suggested that Lee go to Chang for help.'
'Lee pointed out that Chang would not cross the maids. And I had to agree with her on that fact. Though, later I talked to Chang on the matter. And he already came up with an indirect way of dealing with the maids. By simply contacting Garcia. If the situation required us to do so.'
'Lee then mentioned Chang's offer. And we both agreed that it was a good offer for Lee. Because along with curing her cancer, she would become a women, physically.'
'Lee then went off on how hypocritical Revy and the others were. Given, they enjoy watching the suffering of others, in fiction, and how it was just human nature.'
'Though, in the end, Lee calmed down, and we decided that we needed to go our separate ways for a little while, to separately think on the best way to get Lee out of this situation. Though, we planned to meet back at Devil's Hotel, later that evening.'
'Both of us realized that it would take the maids longer to reach the hotel, because the preferred to be on foot.'
'Before we parted ways she said I was a good friend.'
'I replied that she deserved more than one good friend.'
'We then went our separate ways, as we headed back for our cars.'
'Less than an hour later, I returned to the Devil's Hotel. I did not both to put on my fake beard, because now Lee already know who I was. And Revy and her friends won't give a damn. Unless they recognized me. Still, if they did recognize me, they would think twice about approaching me, and Lee, given they knew what I was capable of.'
'At that point, I really didn't have a plan, but I was going to be there to support Lee, in whatever choice she made. And to help make sure she survived her choice.'
'I sensed that Lee was in the hotel bar.'
'As I walked in, what I saw surprised me.'
'I saw that Revy, Rock, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, sitting at their usual tables, near the stage.'
'And on the stage as Lee, singing very well, the song titled, Twilight Zone, by Golden Earring.'
'From the lyrics of the song Lee was singing, I could tell, that Lee was practically confessing to Revy and the others.'
'Lee was too much into the song for me to get a solid reading of her mind, as to why she was confessing, but I did sense that she saw me.'
'So, I walked over to the corner table, against the entrance wall, and wait for either Lee to finish her song, or one of the girls to go on stage and confront Lee. If the latter happened, I would move quickly to deal with the situation.'
'But, instead, the former happened. At the time, no one else in the audience realized that Lee was confessing.'
'Lee soon left the stage, and head to sit beside me.'
'I called her on why she would sing that song in front of them. Though, we did not say any names, because Revy and Rock had really sharp hearing, due to the super-soldier serum, and Natsuru enhanced Kampfer senses.'
'Lee responded that it she thought that turning herself over to the asian, meaning Revy, would be far more merciful than turning herself over that the latin, meaning Roberta.'
'And I had to agree with her on that.'
'We then talked for a minute, as we tried to come up with a solution, before Lee either left, or the maids arrived early. Then, the unexpected happened.'
'Lee saw Rock and Revy approach the bar counter.'
'And Rock pulled out her reality device, and set it by her, on the bar counter, opposite to Revy, as she dig into her pants pocket, to get the money she need for their bill for dinner.'
'It was a gold opportunity that Lee could not pass up.'
'And on the spot, Lee came up with an insane plan to get it. Though, it would require I got through a lot of pain.'
'In all fairness, I let Lee guilt trip me into doing my part, because I did not have a better plan, and the maids would show up soon. And given the fact we both knew that running, in the conventional sense, would not work with the Bloodhound, this was Lee last shot at escaping, before the maids got here.'
'Though, before I got up, we said our goodbyes, and Lee gave me her keys to her pink Cadillac. Because she would no longer need it. And I appreciated her gift.'
'Then, I got up form my chair, and I did my part. I walked up between Rock and Revy, with Lee following several feet behind. When I came to a stop, between the two woman. I said, ladies. After which, I placed a hand one butt cheek, on each woman, and I squeezed both my hands.'
'In response, after I let go of them, I let them beat the crap out of me. So, they would not noticed Lee walking by them, on her way out, with Rock's reality device. But, I was careful to slightly dodge any serious blows towards me, without them realizing it.'
'I then saw, behind Rock, as Lee quickly pocketed the reality device, turned and walked away from us, and towards the exit. Though, Lee stopped to pay for her meal. I am slightly annoyed about that. But, I am not going to hold it against her.'
'And it was Melvin that accepted Lee's payment. Which was fifty dollar bill. Lee told him to keep the change. And I read from Melvin's mind, that he realized that Lee was the writer, and he let her go. With Lee evening calling Melvin, russian, to let him know that she knew about him, all along, and still helped him.'
'Melvin found that touching, and so did I.'
'By the time, Rock and Revy realized that I was Sam, and they stopped beating on me, Lee was gone, with Rock's reality device.'
'As Rock realized what was going on, and that Lee was the writer, Revy hauled me up, and the kneed me in the groin, as a man.'
'That hurt. And the pain caused me to collapse back to the ground. I will never, ever again make fun of a man getting hit the balls.'
'While this went on, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma realized that Lee was the write, as well. And all five women quickly exiting the restaurant, for the front lobby.'
'Still, it was too late for the women, Lee had too much of a head start. And then, after she got her luggage from at the front desk, she walked out the front door, passed a few more of the women after her, and she soon escaped into the multiverse, using Rock's reality device.'
'And if I read the women's minds correctly, Lee escaped in style. Complete with her lighting a cigarette, before she left. A cigarette that I believe Revy gave Lee at the start. Lee even pulled a full on, Usual Suspects, Keyser Soze, disappearing act, right in front of all eighteen women that had original come to the Devil's Hotel, looking for her.'
'I would have loved to have seen the look on their faces at that moment. And given they were all facing in one direction, with a reality device, that might be possible. But, even I am not crazy enough to try to see them like that.'
'Anyway, Dutch, Benny, and Janet soon showed up, and the look on most the women's faces, several seconds after Lee escaped, was still priceless.'
'Anyway, Eda and Yolanda came to the hotel, as well. The girls then returned back to the hotel restaurant, clear the room, except for me. And after we are all situated. And I was sitting in a chair, in the middle of the room, while surrounded by them, I revealed that I was River, with a sneeze. And we all talked.'
'Unfortunately, they learned about the time loop, and what Lee did during the time loop, with the help of Ranma's magical lamp and the smoke it produces. Which allowed us all to fully remember the time loop, without remember anything horrible, in our distance pasts.'
'And I will have to check on Chang getting some of that. Due to the wonder repeating day the two of us had.'
'Anyway, during the conversation, as a way to help Lee, I revealed that Lee was dying of cancer, and they learned about the time loop. Along, with them realizing all the wonderful skills that Lee had tricked them into teaching her. Including some skills I taught her, as well. And a few other skills that will come in handy for Lee, in avoiding capture.'
'Also, the maids showed up. But, nothing came of their arrival. Except they would be part of the continued hunt for Lee. And given those two were on the hunt, it was best Revy and the others went with them, to help reign them in.'
'Still, the women found out where Lee was, and where she was likely heading. Though, with Lee, that doesn't mean they will catch her.'
'Revy and a few of the others took me to the casino, and we had Chang bring all my friends there, together, in the garage, for a private meeting. There, Revy forced me to reveal what I had done, that Lee was the writer, and that Lee had escape into the multiverse.'
'After another discussion, Revy, and her friends left for the night. When they were gone, Chang talked to us, and told us that he offered a reward, of gold bars for each of my friends that went on the hunt, for the capture of Lee in a salvageable, non-cripple, non-dead condition.'
'At least, Chang still wanted Lee back in one piece. And I appreciated that. Still, Chang knew he could not allow me to leave the casino.'
'And at the end of the meeting, Chang had Zoe, and Jayne escort me to the penthouse apartment that I shared with Chang.'
'Over an hour later, Chang returned to our penthouse apartment, and we talked, and we talked in private, in our living room.'
'Chang explained that he had plans to save Lee, but at the moment, I could not be a part of those plans. And that if I got involved, it could screw up his plans, and get Lee killed.'
'I agreed with his logic, and I agreed not to go after Lee. Though, I did ask what would likely happen to Lee if she was capture.'
'Chang answered that if his employees capture Lee, that they would likely beat her up, but otherwise, bring her here unharmed. If Revy and her friends capture Lee, it would be bad, but Chang could probably talk them into turning Lee over to him.'
'If the maids got Lee, all bets were off.'
'But, Chang pointed out, that if the maids got Lee, he would bring in Garcia, to mediate the situation. And I agreed with him, that was a good idea.'
'Chang then asked if I had supper. I had not. And he ordered in some dinner for me.'
'Though, from Revy's blow to my groin, earlier that night, when I was a man. Which I made worse by changing into a woman, which spread the soreness to my lower abdomen. As such, I was in no mood for sex. Chang was understanding, and he got me a heating pad. Though, we still enjoyed each other's company, and we soon went to sleep together, in our bed, for the night.'
'The next morning, we awoke, got cleaned up, had breakfast. Then, Annie came up to the apartment, to keep me company and for Annie to have an alias to avoid the meeting with that Chang then headed downstairs for. A meeting with my friends, Revy's crew, and the maids.'
'After those people left, on their hunt for Lee, Chang then went to continue his duties for the day, of running his casino.'
'And now, I am back to the present, in the morning of the day after Lee escape. I am currently sharing my living room with my good friend, Annie. Along with my friends about to going after Lee. For them, they could be gone for days. For those still in this reality, they will be back in five minutes.'
'Though, they should be back by now. And from what Annie has told me, a few minutes ago. Annie has not sense their return with the force.'
'So, it is possible they decided to stay more parallel between the time they spent, and the time we are spending. At the moment, there is no way for me to know.'
'But, for me, either way, this is going to be a very long day. Because, I have truly enjoyed my friendship with, Lee. With us sharing our joys, hopes, and sorrows.'
'As a teenager, before I was tortured, and experimented on, I did not truly value my friendships. I had a group of friends, but in that group, I was just an overachieving queen bee whom viewed everyone else as a stepping stone for greater things. That eventually came back to bite me in the ass, in a big way.'
'At the time, I didn't even view my friendship with my brother Simon, as nothing important. I am happy that Simon thought differently. I owe him for everything, and more.'
'Speaking of which. My relationship with Chang is... Interesting. When we started, thanks to Lee writing skills, I was the dominate partner. Now, it is more of an equal relationship. And we have been together so long, and we now get alone so well, that we do care deeply for each other. And as such, I, nor Chang, hold what Lee did to us, against her.'
'All that aside, except for Annie, Lee is probably the only genuine, platonic friendship, I have ever had.'
'For those that know me. There has always been a gap. For the crew of the Serenity. And almost everyone else. It was one thing or another, that created roadblocks for my friendship.'
'For Simon, I was his broken sister. For others, it was either my insanity, which I am almost back to being completely sane. It was my genius. I was a telepath without full control of my abilities. So, I read peoples thought, whether I want to, or not. It was the fact that I was tortured, and brainwashed for a while. The fact that I am in someways a trained, walking, killing machine. Or, just that fact that in my natural female form, I am a physically a young, hot babe, that many men would lust after, and many women would be envious of.'
'While the last example doesn't bother me much. The rest does.'
'And though, I have been alternating between leaving my hair its natural brown, or dyeing it red, for several years. When I came to Lee's reality, I decided to dye my hair red, and keep it red, for a number of reasons.'
'Among other reasons, having red hair would make it harder for people to recognize in both my forms. For the public here, in my female form. And towards my friends, in my male form.'
'When it comes to the public here. While the Firefly series and Serenity movie are nowhere near as popular as the Star Wars franchise. It is known in several realities. Including, this reality.'
'And those that know my origins, know my nature color is brown. So, when other people see my red hair, it throws them for a mental loop. And I like that. Because they then do not recognize me as neither myself, nor my actress.'
'Because of this, I can walk in a crowd, in Lee's reality, and not have to worry about being recognized.'
'Still, when it comes to dying my hair red. I think Lee just made a mistake. And she thought my hair was naturally red, and she later learned that it was naturally brown. And she corrected that mistake by stating that I decided to dye my hair red. And I later just alternated between brown and red colors, for my hair.'
'I have seen a few pictures of my actress, in different forms of lighting. One could make the mistake that I have red hair. Though, I do not hold this against Lee.'
'Along with this, the idea of dyeing my hair red, is likely where she originally got the idea to dye her hair own black. And I admit that black hair does look good on her.'
'Also, dyeing my hair red do solve a few of my problems. And it prevents numerous other problems, for myself.'
'Such as, no one thinks twice about seeing a crazy redhead. I do not really understand why. Though, that seems to be the case.'
'Along with that, my gender bending ability also helped with that matter, as well. Though, I still like to present myself as female, in my day to day life.'
'But, I found all this put me in a unique situation, I had never been in before, when I disguised myself as Sam, and met with Lee.
'As Sam. With the gender bending, dyed red hair, and fake red full beard, Lee did not know who I was. And due to this, there were no boundaries between us, on how she view me, and how she treated me. As far as Lee was concerned, I was just someone that wanted a friend. And Lee, whom never had any real friends. Whom was really desperate for a friend, but no knew better than to show that desperation.'
'And even though I presented myself as male, it was a good friendship.'
'And Lee was not clingy about being my friend. She knew to be aloof, and causal about our friendship. But, she was also supportive of me, and my views. Even if she disagreed with me. And most of all, she was not judgmental. She kept giving me the benefit of the doubt. And she was genuinely kind to me. This is one of the reasons I changed my mind about her. I realize that she does not deserve revenge. A small measure of justice. Yes. But, not what Revy, Roberta, and the others wanted to do to her.'
'And this is why, I am going to do everything in my power to help, Lee.'
River attention was brought back to the present, as from across the room, Annie sensed her emotion state.
While not looking up from her book, Annie chastised River, in english, “Don't be so melodically, River. It does not become you.”
River turned from the window she was looking out, to face Annie.
River saw, across the living room, sitting on the couch was Gray Force Master Annie Skywalker. She was wearing a white blouse, gray pants, black belt, and black slippers. She was clearly relaxed, as her legs were crossed. In her right hand, she was in the middle reading a copy of the book, The Three Musketeers, in its original french text. In her left hand, she had just taken a sip from her cup of hot tea. She then set the cup back, on its coaster, on the table in front of her, by her lightsaber, which had set on the table.
River walked to a nearby chair, and sat down. She then looked at Annie, her friend, as she thought, 'After everything Annie has been through, she is neither a Sith, nor a Jedi. She is a true gray.'
Annie continued to read her book, as she said, “River. We have known each other for years. In all honestly, decades. We first truly met and got to know each other at one of the Lagoon bikini parties. I regret we did not have time to get to know each other, before we attacked Chang's tower. And neither of us had the chance to get to know each other, until long after those events. When we finally formally met at one of those parities. And we got to know each.”
River stated, in english, “Yes. I remember that event.”
Annie responded, “I know you do. Soon after that party, I freely began training you to control your telepathy. And with that control, most of your sanity returned. Everyone seems to be very happy about that. We have been good friends ever since then.”
River mentioned, “And you helped me clean out, and remove, any subliminal commands left in my mind.”
Annie stated, “That to. And it was worth the risk in doing, to give you some peace of mind.”
River said, “I know. I don't want someone to come out of the blue, and give one those commands. Which would make me try to wreck everything I have worked so hard to create. And I am eternally grateful for your help on that matter. And I am glad no one was hurt, when we did that.”
Annie responded, “As am I. I enjoy being your friend, River. You have a lot of traits that I admire. Also, we have a lot of common interests. And much to Chang's annoyance, we have shared a bed together, a few times, in both your gender forms. I must say, you truly are a skilled lover, as both a woman and a man. And Chang knows that if she, or I should say now, he, complains about such matter. He will painful regret doing so.”
River asked, “I know. And I still do not understand why do you even work for my lover? It is clear you still hate him for his part in changing you into a woman, among other things.”
Annie answered, with a wicked smile, “I have learned that revenge comes in many forms.”
River casually said, “You have been hanging around Arcee for far too long.”
Annie smile became ever so slightly wider, as she stated, “Perhaps, I have. But, she is great company once you get to know her. Still, I now realize that the Fetts had the right idea. You can get revenge on someone in so many ways. My own revenge against your boyfriend, is that I charge Chang a small fortune for my services. And since I know I am the only force master he knows that will work for him. Because you, and the rest of his friends trust me. And he also knows I won't kill him, because I like his friends, including you. But, to just add salt to the wound, I made it so that I get to pick the missions he assigns to me.”
River commented, “I can understand this. Though, keep in mind that Chang did figure out a way to temporally cancel out force use, and remotely turn off lightsabers, without damaging the items. So, if you do turn on him, he might be able to take you by surprise.”
Annie turned to the next page of her book, as she casually admitted, “Yes. I am aware of what Chang did at the end of book one of Lee's stories. I am aware it. You won't happen to know how he did that?”
River commented, “Chang has guarded those secrets well. Even I am not sure how he pulled them off. But, I do have clues. He somehow found a way to use a chemical mix to boost the force bubble abilities of a single Ysalamiri, to the point that one could cover over a small city. But, the Ysalamiri would die a few hours after it was exposed to the power boosting chemicals.”
Annie said, “I am surprised that no one has tried that in my home reality.”
River replied, “So, am I.”
Annie inquired, “And the lightsabers?”
River answered, “On the lightsabers. Chang used some sort of energy dampening feel to temporally shut down the batteries in the lightsabers. But, the dampening field did not effect firearms, nor combustion engines, like the one in Sawyer's chainsaw.”
“But, Chang found procuring and keeping Ysalamiri alive too costly. Also, he did not want to risk attracting attention in that Star Wars reality.”
Annie stated, “I guess those events would have to be from an alternate reality to my own. Considering I never heard about such an attack.” She thought, 'Though, in my case, I was the one to do such an attack, with an army of clone troopers.' She continued, “And I doubt Chang did it in any other time period than that which is close to my own. Near the end of the old republic.”
River responded, “I agree. Also, that power dampening field was expensive to build and use. In addition, that machine could only be used for a few hours, before it broke. As such, Chang felt that both of these tools were to cost ineffective to use on the long term. Not when he had other resources that could have a reasonable chance at defeating skilled force users, with far less time, effort, and resources, spent in doing so.”
Annie conceded, “I admit there are some non-force using badasses that could take me in a fight. You included.”
River replied, “Thank you. And before you ask. Chang did not share this information with anyone.”
Annie said, “Good. At least he hasn't shared the information with someone. Except for you.”
River casually asked, in a more joking manner, than serious, “You are not going to kill us, for knowing this? Are you?”
Annie joked, “Nah. You all are too entertaining to kill.”
River let out a laugh.
Annie continued, “I am making good money at my job. And you all respect me. Chang included. Besides. Any decent Star Wars fan can figure out how to do that.”
River complimented, “Good point. By the way, why did you let Chang partner you with Arcee?”
Annie smirked, while she continued to read her book. She said, “Someone has to keep an eye on Arcee. At the same time, I am helping her work through her problems She is getting better. Though, she is also another reason I don't kill Chang. Because the two of them good friends. And let us be honest. Neither of us could take down an angry Arcee.”
River admitted, “You got that right. Still, back to the original topic. You hate Chang, but you don't seem to hate Lee. Not that I am complaining. Though, I would like to know why?”
Annie turned the next page of her book, as she casually answered, “Because I realize that Chang, you, I, and the others are still responsible for our actions. That is something the others don't understand, yet you and I understand. The others want to blame Lee for all the bad, yet give him none of the credit for the good he has done in our lives. And I feel, the good he had done outweighs the bad. It is unfortunate that his own demons, in dealing with his internal gender, had corrupted his writings. But, he still clearly has a good heart.”
While River was not surprised by the revelation, she inquired, “How did you know?”
Annie kept reading her book, as shrugged. She stated, “It is kinda obvious when I read those stories. I guess it is a blind spot for the others. My theory was confirmed when we talked about that time she used those packets of instant girl. I felt no emotional shame from Lee about the actual use of packets, but only embarrassment in getting caught.”
“Also, when Lee looked at me, you, and any other woman, in my presence, I got a slight sense of a mix of anger and jealousy from Lee's emotion state. Which can only come from having such a problem. I use to have a similar emotion failings of envy and anger, while in the black suit, when I looked at healthy people. So, I knew to look for.”
River commented, “I am just glad that you are so understanding, and the others haven't figured that out about Lee.”
Annie responded, “I agree. They would get a lot of mileage on their vengeance against Lee, if they knew that about Lee. Speaking of the others. I have sensed the hearts, and emotional states of the others during all those bikini parties we had at the Lagoon island. Some of them may never admit to anyone, not even themselves, that they honestly love how their lives turned out. They love their children. And I honestly do not think any of them would willingly go back the way they were before Lee's stories.”
“I certainly wouldn't.”
River commented, “Neither would I.”
Annie stated, “Exactly. Given I have read the stories myself, I came to realize that Lee did not write everything. There are very large gaps between the written events in those stories. Such as my many love affairs.” She then stopped reading, as she looked at the cover of the book, as she added, “And the many languages I have learned since I was rescued from that vat. Even now, I still giggle when I think of one my better love affairs. My ten year whirlwind love affair with Bumi of the Avatar reality.”
River looked at her more closely, as she asked, “King Bumi, the mad genius. Even as an old guy, I can see the appeal.”
Annie corrected, “No. I am talking about retired Commander Bumi. Aang's non-bender son... Well, until a mystical incident unlocked his air bending abilities... He takes the term, late bloomer, to the extreme.”
River shrugged, as she inquired, “True. And I can see you, and that Bumi, together, as well. So, how did you two meet each other?”
Annie answered, “Well, I was traveling the multiverse, and I found myself in the Avatar reality, in the heart of Republic City. It was real fun introducing the force, and my lightsaber, to some of the more arrogant benders in the city.”
River giggled. She then replied, “I am sure that was fun.”
Annie responded, “Timeline wise, it was a few years, or more, after the Korra series ended. Bumi and I bumped into each other at a bar of all places. Even though he was older, he was so full of energy. And though I may look young, I am far older. So, I could relate to him in a number of ways. One thing lead to another and we started dating. I quickly realized that wildman persona that he puts on for everyone is just an act to help with his hard life… Well mostly. He truly is wild in bed. And you don't get promoted to commander of any military by acting childish. And though he is crazy, it is more of a creative type of crazy that Violin has.”
River commented, “That, I don't doubt.”
Annie turned the page on her book. She continued reading, as she stated, “I soon met his family and given how spiritual many of them are, it soon came out that I was not of their world. They first mistook me for an evil spirit. Given my past, I let that one slide. But, we were able to prevent anything from coming to violence.”
“After that, in private, I told Bumi the truth, that I was not from his reality. I did omit that whole meta issues of all realities being fiction, and most of my past. Still, I invited Bumi to come with me, and he took me up on my offer. But first, we both wanted to test out a few theories on benders and their powers.”
“Girl, I tell you, Bumi's family were upset when we all realized their bending abilities were really tied to their planet, and their planetary bodies, nearby. When benders left their reality, they lost their elemental bending abilities. After learning this, Bumi would not stop laughing for a full week. And given his life, I do not blame him for laughing.”
“Bumi was so use to not bending that he could do without such skills. And we both also realized that given Bumi skills and intelligence, he would have likely overshadowed his family if they had been from anywhere else in the multiverse.”
River pointed out, “I guess that is why Chang never kidnapped any of those benders. They were useless to them. I read his, or at the time, her mind, when we talked on the subject. So, what about the Avatar?”
Annie stated, “I was very careful with her. This spirit world is just a different dimensional plane of their home planet. Though, for the Avatar, physically leaving their world in a spaceship, weakened Korra greater. It seems that leaving her reality may kill an Avatar. That is not surprising, given they are connected to that area, is far deeper than average bender. Still, I like Korra. She as a good head on her shoulders, and a nice heart. If anyone was going to have god like powers there, it should be her.”
“Anyway, Bob, or should I say Lee. Or both. Had the right idea. Just get a badass, or two, that likes you, to travel the multiverse with you, and have a good time together. Bumi and I sure did. We went to some interesting places during those years. Still, as intimate as we were, I was careful not to get pregnant. That would have spoiled our fun.”
“I soon found that Bumi, like virtually all humans of his world, both non-benders and benders, have vast reservoirs of spiritual energy. It is just that most of the non-benders cannot tap into their inner power. Though, I know for a fact that a few have.”
River guessed, “Guru Pathik?”
Annie responded, “Exactly. And Guru Pathik was a non-bender. Yet, he lived for over a hundred and fifty years, and he had vast physic awareness. He was the oldest known human alive towards the end of his life. And of all people, he was the one that taught Aang how to safely enter the Avatar State. A non-bender.”
River commented, “Now, that is interesting.”
Annie agreed, “I know. I eventually told Bumi this, about his people, and he asked if I could teach him to tap into that power. It seems that bending, by itself, barely taps into that pool of personal spiritual energy. So, there was room to work with. And with being in other reality, Bumi did not have access to his airbending. So, we could completely focus on his inner spiritual powers, without risk of being interrupted with accidental bending.”
“And as I taught him, and I found that pool of energy allowed him to manifest abilities that were similar to force abilities. This worked well for both of us, because I could train him, using force techniques as a basis for his lessons. He was even able to construct his own lightsaber. I got a laugh went the color crystal he picked out was pink. That man could sometimes be really crazy.”
“Though, best of all, my training probably extended Bumi's lifespan by at least fifty years.”
River asked, “That is good. And it sounds like you loved each other. So, why didn't you marry him?”
Annie stated, “Two reasons. First, I could not stand his family. He didn't blame me for that. He can barely tolerate most of them. And he occasionally lived with them. On the other hand, Bumi, and my family got along great. My son-in-law Han, and he friend Chewy, hit it off well with Bumi. And they got into all sorts of trouble when they went out drinking.”
Annie looked up from her book and towards River. She continued, in a more sober tone of voice, “The other reason was we were both terrified of what would happen if we had children, with mixing force genes with bending genes.”
Annie smiled, as she went onto say, “Still, he returned to his world. As far as his family knew, he was gone less than a day. Though, his abilities had made him a few years physically younger, and they didn't know that the metal cylinder hooked to the side of his belt, was his pink bladed lightsaber.”
“And I occasionally visit him. He even started secretly training non-benders to use their spiritual powers. To help give non-benders a way to be more equal to benders. And it seems that benders do have a problem training to use such spiritual powers, because a lot of the same mental triggers for both bending and their spiritual powers are the same.”
“The likely reasons Bumi did not have a problem, is I trained him in another reality, to where he did not have access to his bending abilities at the time.”
And on his homeworld, he has no problems using his airbending, or his spiritual powers.
“I look forward to when it comes out that non-benders start show they have gain powers that are equal to bending, but not related to bending.”
“I know that Korra and Bumi's family not going to be happy about that. Especially, when they find out Bumi was behind it.”
“And Bumi hasn't yet shown what he can do now, outside of his bending. But, I can tell when I talk to him, there is glint in his eye that he looking forward to the looks on their faces when he does.”
River requested, “Can I join you, when you go to find out what happened there?”
While Annie was still smiling, she shrugged. She replied, “Sure. The more the merrier.”
River asked, “By the way, how do you know about the Avatar, and the Korra, series?”
Annie turned the page on her book. She continued reading her book, as she answered, “I used to babysit Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika when they were young. Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru trusted me. They knew my force powers allowed me to prevent the kids from pulling anything on me.”
“And the two cartoon series that I could find on hand that all three of them liked were the Avatar and Korra series. Given the girls own elemental abilities, it is kind of obvious why they liked those series. And being girls, they preferred watching the Korra series over the original Avatar series. I admit, both those series are entertaining, even for an adult to watch. Now River, how did you know about those series?”
River smirked, as she said, “Besides B, who do you think babysat Stan and Lewis, when they were younger? And given Bob and Ed's taste in fiction, what do you think I could find for them to watch, that was on hand?”
Both woman just laughed at the poetry of this situations.
As they calmed down, Annie went back to reading her book, as she commented, “Still, back to Lee. Lee is responsible for making me female, and dealing with monthly periods. But, Lee is also responsible for me being out of the black suit and physically restored in a near eternally youthful, and healthy body. With my force powers still enhancing my empowered longevity of my body. Much like that gender bending virus you have, enhanced your natural longevity.”
“So, I feel the good and the bad balances out.”
River complimented, “That is a very good way to look our situation. At first, when I was changed into a man, by Lee, the only reason I was not upset was that, before I even changed, to begin with. What that like most of the crew, except, Mal. That Bob had gone to such lengths of learning how our gender change worked, and the benefits that come with the change. And he informed us of how to control the change. And what benefits the change gave us. That this knowledge left us in a good mood.”
“That was good writing, and plotting, on Lee's part. He would not want to see me angry.”
Annie continued to read her book, as she commented, “I have never seen you angry. And I won't want to, either.”
River complimented, “Wise girl. Considering, through his stories, Lee gender bent the entire populations of the planets Ferenginar, and Oriotera, I hope Ferengi, nor the Federation that Birdy Cephon was a space cop for, ever learn of Lee, nor his stories. If they do, I think we would all be in a whole lot of more trouble than any of us can handle. And that is not even mentioning the Earth of that Marvel reality that Lee messed with in his stories.”
Annie replied, “I fully agree.”
River said, “And Bob really did not know that he was a carrier for a virus that even Star Trek Federation technology couldn't immediately cure. And he thought was purged of. It is good that the rejuvenation treatment made Ed immune to the virus, and their children did not carry the virus. Also, among the benefits of that virus, as long as I change back and forth, within three weeks, I no longer had to worry about having a period. And, as you pointed out, our aging being slowed. Which is icing on the cake.”
Annie commented, “I can see why you are happy with what Lee did to you.”
River smiled, as she said, “Yes. I admit that I am very happy with Lee. And so are the girls from my crew. And I am including Chang, in that list. You know, if you want to be a man again, and not have to use those instant man packets, we could probably get that virus from one of us, or Bob.”
“Though, you would be isolation for about six weeks, to two months, until we were sure you were not contagious. Which would not be a serious problem. And with time dilation, you would not any time here.”
“Also, learning to control one's sneezing, to the point of it being on command, is not that difficult.”
Annie looked up from her book and over at River, as she commented, “No thanks. I have finally found a measure of peace in my life, which I do not want to risk destroying with such foolishness. And I will also admit, if you were not pursuing Lee, I likely would be.”
River quickly replied, “I don't know what you mean.”
Annie deadpanned, “Sure you don't... Still, I have other thoughts on my mind.”
River inquired, “Such as?”
Annie bluntly answered, “Motherhood.”
River commented, “Now, that is a thought provoking subject.”
Annie inquired, “Very true. Do you think I would make a good parent? I know I have two children. But, I did not have a hand in raising either of them. So, it is a fair question.”
River honestly answered, “As you are now, I think you would make a fine parent.”
Annie commented, “I will take that as a compliment. Still, I screwed up once with Padme, and the twins. I do not want to make the same mistakes, again.”
River stated, “As you know, I have seen the movies. Most of what happened, that lead to you being put into that black suit, were not your fault.”
Annie sadly said, “But, some of it was.”
River pointed out, “Yes. Yet, you have clearly learned from your mistakes... Though, moving on. For women, being a parent comes down to a simple question. Do you want to have children, or not?”
Annie admitted, “I do want to have children. But, I do not want to be a single mother. And I really want to find someone to love, and be with. Though, my luck with love has not been good. Bumi was just one of the better relationships I was in. What you like to hear what about happened, when I did finally return to my home reality.”
River inquired, “Sure. Considering, you just mentioned that you had Bumi visit your family. I knew you reunited with them. But, you never did talk about what you did when you returned to you home reality. So, what happened? It is not like I have anything better to do.”
Annie answered, “That is true. And the reason I have not talked about those events were because the tale ends on a sad note, between Padme and I.”
“Long before I even met Bumi, I was fortunate that when finally returned to my reality, I located Padme, and I found that she alive and well. She did use a body double, as both Lee and Rock suspected. I am thankful towards Lee presenting that possibility.”
River flatly asked, “How? You were not pulled out of the timeline until years later. And Episode Three clearly showed Padme dying after giving childbirth and the movie later showed her funeral.”
Annie countered, “Episode Three only showed Padme passing out. And that could have been a fake body-double in the coffin at her funeral.”
River realized, as she accused, “You changed the timeline over you home reality. And with you powers and knowhow it would not be difficult to save Padme. You already come from an alternate timeline. So slightly changing the past would not be that great a challenge.”
Annie pointed out, “I can think of other points I would prefer to change in the timeline which would have prevent much pain for both myself and others.”
River responded, “No. You would have gone through hell for Padme and your children. Palpatine was likely going to rise to power no matter what you did. Or, possibly something worse could have happened. You could have secretly gone to Polis Massa before anyone else arrive. Reprogram the medical droids to slip Padme a drug after she gave birth to put her into a false death. So, she passes out after giving birth the twins, with the Jedi and Bail being fooled by the false death.”
“Then, you arrange it so when the Jedi dropped off Padme, you get to her first. You used a reality device with time dilatation to have her new identity set up with plenty of credits for her to use. You also take care of the fake body double arriving on Naboo for the funeral.”
“Padme wakes up in a fully stocked ship with a note on what has happened. You keep it brief. You state the basics in your note. That her children are fine and safe, but hidden. That it will be years before she can see them. Though, she will see them and to stay safe until then. You even arranged so you would not where she when you looked for her. Likely by her new identification you had created for her.”
“This was the only way you could have slightly changed the future without much worry of a paradox. You could have even later saved Padme's mother life from that Sith inquisitor. You did that? Didn't you?”
Annie looked away from River for a few seconds. Then, Annie turned to River. Annie stated, “An intruging theory. And both Ruwee and Jobal are fine. Anyway. After we were reunited, we soon both found that that we had changed so much that we could not longer have that type of romantic relationship. Though, at least we were able to still be friends. And I was able to achieve being on good terms with my Luke, and my Leia... Now, those were interesting introductions.”
River held back a giggle, as she said, “I bet.”
Annie went onto say, “When I returned to my home reality, I did so further along in my timeline, by around ten years after I was taken. Given I knew, to that point that both my children would be raised to be well adjusted adults, I did not want to risk screwing up their childhood anymore than I already had. By both becoming Vader, and being kidnapped.”
River commented, “I can understanding doing that.”
Annie responded, “I know. And I intentionally returned to the time that is around being parallel to Episode Four of the movies. About two weeks, before what Star Wars fans call the blockade runner scene, at the beginning of episode four. Fortunately, I later found out that both of my children's life were about the same, as if I had not left.”
“The first thing I did was locate Padme. I found it surprisingly easy. It took me less than a week to find her. I guess as Vader, I never did really search for her. Because, as Vader, the only thing I feared more that confirming her death, was confirming she still being alive. Because, then I would have to face her. And I was not sure that I had the courage to do so.”
“Fortunately, that is longer that case. And I wanted to find her. And I did. When I found her, she was healthy. Though, she was in hiding and romantically alone. She was working as a chambermaid, of all things, in a nice hotel, on one of the nice mid-rim worlds. And it took a little while to convince her that I was who I said I was, and I had changed, besides the obvious.”
River asked, “Given the gender change, along with your body and youth being restored, how did convince her that you were you?”
Annie could not help but grin mischievously, as she answered, “I told her how she liked in bed. And only Anakin Skywalker would have known those things.”
River returned Annie's grin, as she commented, “That would do it. And how did you convince her that your personality had changed, for the better, along with your body?”
Annie commented, “Once I convinced her who I was. I allowed her to literally scream and yell at me for the next two hours. About how much I was an idiot for trusting Palpatine, and not her. And how I had wrecked the lives of our entire family.”
“If I was still Vader, even though I loved her, by that point, I would have still force choked her some. Though, I did not.”
“Instead, I did nothing, but remain calm, and agreeable, towards her, throughout the entire conversation and afterward. And this convinced her that I had changed for the better. And I was no longer a rage filled monster.”
“I was still in the dog house, with her, as it were. But, that did help to the point she was going to at least give me the benefit of the doubt, that I had changed, at least some. And not just my gender.”
River replied, “I can see how that could work.”
Annie mentioned, “Also, at my request, she started to call me, Annie. Which she found funny, considering I hated that nickname, when I was younger.”
River questioned, “I can see how she would find that funny. So, what happened next?”
Annie stated, “After I found Padme. And we settled our differences. Which was not that difficult. I mentioned I knew where our children were, and they should be fine.”
“We then headed out to find our children, in a nice starship yacht that I owned. I may no longer be Vader. But, as Lee pointed out, in his stories. I still have vast wealth and resources, stashed away, in various places of my home reality, in the galaxy I am from”
“Though, by the time, Padme and I had worked out our personal situation, to the point we would work together. And that took a lot of apologizes and acts of kindness, to make up to here. Which I think, in doing so, I got off easy. It had been about three weeks after I arrived. And around that time, Padme found out that I was completely a woman.”
River asked, with mirth in her tone of voice, “How badly did she tease you, over your period?”
Annie answered, “Let me put this way. I am happy I now have control of my temper.”
River said, “I see your point.”
Annie replied, “Thank you.”
River inquired, “So, where did you find your children at?”
Annie said, “Well, in truth, I guessed as to where our children were at. And I found that I was partly correct. Since, this was not the original timeline. I was never there to stop Leia from finding Obiwan on Tatooine. She found him, they found Luke. He must have told them they were twins, because they knew so when we met them. And while they were not there, we learned that they had all been there.”
“I must say that Owen and Beru were pleasant to meet. And they have a nice home. Thought, neither I, nor Padme told them who we were. We just said we were travelers in such of Leia. Which was true. And they told us she had been here, along with Obiwan. With them then convincing Luke to leave with them. We then left them live out their lives, in peace. Though, I did later arrange quite a bit of galactic credits to go into a fund for them to use. Which they found to be very helpful.”
River complimented, “That was nice of you.”
Annie firmly said, “They should be rewarded.” Annie continued, with bitterness in her tone of voice, “Obiwan showed up, one day, out of the blue. He dumped Luke onto them, to raise. And they did their best to raise Luke to be a fine young man. They did not ask for anything of this. And still they did was needed to be done.” Annie went onto say, with sadness in her tone of voice, “Lee was right. If I had known that it was them that the droids were sold to. I would not have harmed them. Let alone killed them.”
River commented, “I can appreciate you sentiments on this matter.”
Annie mentioned, “Thank you. Also, during this time, the rebels were able to destroy the first Death Star.”
River asked, “Palaptine was still able to construct that weapon?”
Annie commented, “It was a long term project, that had been begun even before I became Vader. And while, as Lee pointed out, with me gone, Palpatine lost much of his power. He still had a fair hold on the power he had left. Unfortunately, given I was not there, most of the Moffs were not there. And they were still alive.”
River inquired, “Oh well. Now, please continue.”
Annie stated, “With pleasure. While we did not find our children on Tatooine we. We knew they had been there. And we then went to the next logical place they would be. A place they could begin their force training, in private. A place, after seeing my movies, that I knew was where Yoda hiding. The swamp planet in the Dagobah.”
“When we were in orbit of the swamp planet, I could immediately sensed where they were, on the planet. Though, Yoda also sensed me. But, he clearly did not realize who I was at the time. Also, unlike Luke in Empire Strikes Back, I was powerful enough in the force to prevent Yoda from crashing us into the swamp. I wonder how many times he used the force to have spaceships, that try to explore the planet, instead crash into the planet, never to be seen, or heard from, again?”
River commented, “Probably more than he should have.”
Annie said, “I agree. Anyway, when we landed, which was near where they were at. It was clear that Yoda had not warned the others. And when we showed up, we found Obiwan and Yoda were training the twins. As we approached them, they stopped the twins stopped their training. And Yoda and Obiwan immediately sensed who I was. Of course, they were shocked when they saw me.”
“To this day, I do not know which they found more shocking. My gender change. Or, my body and force abilities fully restored. With me more powerful than before I became Vader Also, I made no effort to keep my identities a secret from my children. Though, having Padme there helped keep the peace. And I did intentionally avoid getting into a fight with those two old geezers.”
“The reason I was not violent with those two old fools was that it was so damn fun watching as they got caught in their own lies. As they had to admit. In front of Padme and my adult children. That Anakin was not killed by Vader, but that Anakin Skywalker and Darth Vader were the same person. They even confirmed that I was Anakin.”
“After those truths were settled, I did have some explaining to do about my gender change and being out of that black suit. I gave them an edited version of what happen to me. I left out the reality jumping, and the fiction as reality parts of what our adventures.”
“All I told them was that I was kidnapped, and changed in an effort to breed force users. But, I, and others, escaped before being impregnated. And we eventually defeated our kidnappers.”
“I already told Padme this, on the first day I found her. And she accepted with I said. And she was polite enough not to ask for details.
“Beside, this was close enough to the truth. And they all knew better than to ask any more questions on the subject.”
“Then, I also told them that after some thinking, and reflection, I had decided not to try kill Yoda and Obiwan. And that Palpatine needed to die. Though, I pointed out it not because he was a Sith Lord.”
“I stated that Palpatine's hold on the empire had slipped greatly. Which was true.”
“From what Padme had informed me of, this loss of power was causing much chaos in the galaxy.”
“As I mentioned, it seemed that the Emperor's power over the empire was mostly do to my iron grip, and ability to keep everyone in line, through fear. With my disappearance, Palpatine's power was greatly diminished. He even foolishly decided not to have another Sith Apprentice. Instead, he relied more on his force hands due to the fact that my disappearance proved I held the true governmental power of the empire, not him.”
“Still, I had conditions for my help. After he died, none of my family would be expected be a part of the new government, nor police that galaxy as Jedi. I wanted peace for my family. It was that comment that made Obiwan and Yoda realize that I was no longer Vader. But, neither was I still the clearly immature manchild, Anakin. Though, I let them keep calling me Anakin. And even with the gender change, I enjoyed my children calling me, father.”
“We then had our adventure. With me there, we were able to train my children more quickly in the use of the force, and lightsaber combat.”
“Though, unlike Yoda and Obiwan's mistakes. I made sure that my children passed off three of the trials. While, I was made a Jedi Knight, after only passing two of the trials.”
“I feel that was one of the points in my life that lead to my downfall. And I can understand while Yoda in the original timeline, wanted to stop Luke, from facing my counterpart on Cloud City. Given Luke had not finished his training and Yoda did not want to make the same mistake with him. Though, on the flip side, I understand, and I am proud that Luke went to help his friends, and his sister.”
“When my children were ready. And we had come up with a workable plan. We went out into the galaxy, to take down Palpatine.”
“And after many battles, we did eventually kill Palpatine and restore a measure of order to the situation. And my family came out of it alive, and mostly unharmed.”
“After Palpatine's death, and with no clear line of succession, with Padme's help, we were able to take advantage of the situation, and get the rebels and the imperials to negotiate with each other. I even used my connections to bring convince Grand Admiral Thrawn to return to Coruscant, which was the final piece of the puzzle.”
“And convincing Thrawn to support the negotiations added legitimacy to them, and kept the other Moffs in line.”
“I always did respect Thrawn for both his intellect, and his manners. He is one of the few people that could run the galaxy, without immediately resorting to mass-murder, to solve their problems.”
River spoke up, “I read the Zahn trilogy... Chang said I would likely enjoy those books, and I did. I agree that Thrawn is a good choice.”
Annie responded, “Thank you. Still, the rebels wanted to return to old senate, the imperials wanted an empire. I had to use aggressive negotiations to get them to admit the senate was too corrupt, and the empire was too... Direct. Though, I didn't force choke anyone. I think somewhere along the lines they realized I was Vader, and that made them more amendable to my terms. I knew Thrawn realized this almost immediately who I was. He has always been a very sharp individual.”
“That being said. I knew that if we got either one of those types of governments, my family would either be saddled with keeping it all together. Or, become targets by those in power. So, what we created was much different. A return to how the old republic was originally made. Not what it was, while I was alive.”
“The planets were made almost completely autonomous. With the senate only being there for simple trade negotiations, and the navy being existing for common defense. I made sure Thrawn was placed in charged of the Imperial Navy, in exchange for him leaving my family alone.”
“I wanted someone in charge that I knew would keep galaxy all together, without my family's help. And Thrawn was that individual.”
“And Thrawn also tried his best to keep his word.”
“Thrawn came to like giving the planets near autonomy when he realized that it meant he wouldn't have to deal with the imperial bureaucracy of an empire.”
“It wasn't perfect. But, both the rebels and the imperials didn't complain much after that. And it kept my family out of the line of fire. And I finally had found some peace for my family.”
“Yet, during the final battle with the Emperor, I realized some hard lessons. When Luke actually convinced emperor's hand, Mara Jade, to turn on Palpatine. It was then that I realized that I found that even with my absence from my home reality, everyone still met everyone else, and romance in some cases bloomed.”
“We even teamed up with Han and Chewy on our way to kill the Emperor. And he and Leia hit it off well. I guess some things are fated to happen... Still, why?... Why did Luke have to fall for a redhead? No offense, River.”
River giggled, as she replied, “None taken. I freely admit that I prove the rule that redheads are trouble. Even though my hair is dyed red.”
Annie let out a laugh. She said, in a slightly happy tone of voice, “I guess it doesn't matter if it is dyed, or natural, red hair.” Annie continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Now, the part that surprised me the most, was that after everything settled down, I really didn't mind Han marrying my daughter, Leia. Usually, a father has a problems with the men their daughter's love life. But, as I got to know Han, he didn't seem that bad a person. But, I did have a problem when Luke marrying Mara. But, I kept that to myself.”
“And Padme just wanted out children to be happy.”
Annie went onto say, in a sadder tone of voice, “After everything was sorted out, I realized I had no place in my home reality. Anakin was considered long dead, and the galaxy preferred that Vader stay gone. And I had no place there as Annie Skywalker. So, I felt I had to leave my home reality, to travel the multiverse once more.”
River offered, in a warm, supportive, comforting, tone of voice, “Well, you are always welcome here.”
Annie gave River a weak smile, as she quietly said, “I know.” She continued, in a more normal tone of voice, “Though, before I left, I told Padme that I understood it was over between us and I wanted her to find someone to love. She appreciated my request. I do check on my family, now and then. For them, it is weeks. For me, it is years.”
“And Padme did find another good man to love. And I am happy for her. And though she in her forties, she was able to get pregnant twice. She and her new husband have two young children, a boy and girl, of their own. Though, I made sure her births had no complications. Which they did not. And Padme is now happy to be able to have a children to raise as her own. Padme's new family even get along with the twin, well.”
“And I am happy for her. And them.”
River complimented, in a warm tone of voice, “Thank you for tell me all this. And that is a very mature attitude to take, towards Padme's new husband and family. And I am sure you will eventually find love. And have children of your own, to raise. It will just take time, and you will have to work at it.”
Annie responded, in a calm tone of voice, “I realize that. Thank you. Fortunately, I find both men and women attractive, which doubles my chances of finding someone to love. And even if I ended up with a woman, with the resources at our disposal, we could still both have children.”
River replied, “Yes. You could.” River's lips then curled into a mischievous grin, as she teased, “Though, I thought you were not interested in such foolishness.”
Annie returned River's mischievous grin, as she joked, in a jovial tone of voice, “I heard that it is a woman's prerogative to change her mind.”
River laughed at her friend's joke.
As Annie watched as her friend laugh, she commented, “That is better. So, cheer up, and have some faith about Lee. If Lee is half as resourceful as you believe him to be, he will figure out a way to make it through this mess in one piece. All you have to do is be there on the other side, to help him recover.”
As River calmed down, she stated, “Lee is not the only one I am worried about. The girls and I trained him well. Lee is a pretty formidable fighter. He just knows better than to show off his skills. And my friends are going after him.”
Annie pointed out, “From what I sense of Lee emotional state, he really does not want to hurt anyone, over his own actions. Though, he understands the people after him live by the vendetta. Lee will likely try to avoid seriously harming them. And they want Lee alive. So, this situation is not as bad as it could be. All we have to do is help pick up the pieces, afterward.”
River smiled towards Annie, as she said, “Thank you, for pointing that out.”
Annie returned River's smile, as she happily replied, “You're welcome.” She then went back to reading her book.
Just then, River felt that her bladder was full.
River thought, 'I have to go. Fortunately, it is not immediate. Though, I might as well take care of it.”
While River stood up from her chair, Annie giggled. Annie did not look up from her book, as she stated, “We are good friends, River. I can sense you have to go. But, keep in mind I can sense you anywhere in the building. Please, do not try to do something foolish, and go after Lee. Let Chang handle this.”
River teased, “Closet pervert.”
Annie retorted, “Takes one to know one.”
River giggled, as she admitted, “Guilty as charged. Now, that I think about it, given our powers, when either of us has as a child, we are going to know when it is time to change our babies' diapers before they do.”
Annie laughed for a few seconds at River's comment. She then responded, “Yes. And any kids we have will learn quickly that they cannot fool us. Fortunately, we will also know when they tell the truth. So, they will learn to trust us. And trust, along with love, are the two holy grails that a parent seeks to achieve with their child.”
River complimented, “Those are wise words. Now, if you excuse me, I have some personal business to take care of.”
Annie just giggle a little more, at what River said.
As River turned and started walking to her bedroom she shared with Chang, and then to the master bathroom attached to the room, she thought, 'Hard to believe that Annie used to be one of the scariest, cybernetic, psychic, badass villains in all the multiverse. She is still a badass, but she is a lot nicer, and kinder, now. Having seen her mind, I can say that she is exactly the way she acts like. She is a kind, caring woman. She is proof that even the most horrible of monsters have a chance of becoming better people.'
'And Annie is likely Lee's greatest success story, in so many ways. Annie vindicates Lee for his writings. It proves that she is a good man, or woman, depending on if you judge Lee by her mind, or body. Annie is proof that Lee does not deserves serious punishment. Just a fair punishment.'
'Even Lee admits to that she needs to be punished. Just not to the extreme that the others want to put her through.'
When River made it to her and Chang's bedroom, she turned towards the entrance to the master bathroom. Which was connected to another door in the bedroom. As she thought, 'I need to decide if I am going to pee as a woman, or man. Like most women, I used to think the answer would be obvious. Go as a man. I found out, the hard way, that I was wrong.”
'When we all first changed, we all realized when we first woke up to check our genitalia between our legs. That it was no fun for those originally guys to walk into the restroom, and pee standing up, only to make a mess of themselves, and their underwear, because they were women at the time.'
'We also kept pepper in the restroom, so we could change at will. Until, we all learned to sneeze on command. That took some time.'
'Still, that was not the only lesson we had to learn. Those of us that were originally women had to learn the finer points of peeing, when we were men. When I first changed into a man, I was arrogant, and I wanted to see what it was like.'
'I walked into the stall, unzipped my pants and pulled it out. I didn't even look as I went. And I found out a few moments later that not looking was a big mistake. That men have to aim at the toilet, or they make a big mess.'
'Of all the thoughts I have read of men about them peeing, none of them thought about aiming. I figured this is because they had been aiming for so long, since they were toddlers, that it was second nature, and they didn't think about it.'
'I was extremely embarrassed about making that mess. And I was happy that I had it all cleaned up before anyone entered the restroom.'
'Then, I learned something even worse about the problems that men sometimes have when peeing. That the two small pieces of skin that make the entrance to urethra, at the end of the penis, sometimes sticks together, at random, and when I peed, the urine stream forked in two random, different directions, and neither usual didn't hit the toilet bowl.'
'The worst part was that, like many woman, I never learned to teach myself to stop peeing. I really didn't see the need to learn how. I can hold it fine, but I saw no reason to learn to stop once I started to go. And as the stream forked, I could not stop myself, until my bladder was empty. But, it seems, when I asked Simon, he admitted that he, and likely most men, had to teach themselves how to stop when they were young, because of that one reason. It was just another thing that men didn't talk about, nor really think about.'
'Still, having sex as a guy was fun. Sometimes Chang was a girl, and I was a guy at the time. Then, we reversed, with Chang as the guy, and I was the girl.'
'And we did other gender combinations, as well.'
'Yet, I learned another lesson the hard way. To not to have sex as guy on a full bladder. That the prostate will lock up after sex, making it very uncomfortable for a little while, because a guy cannot normally pee. Though, I later learned listening to running water helps relax the prostate.'
'Though, at the time, I was so desperate for relief, that I changed into a woman. But, I was intelligent enough at the time to be sitting on the toilet when I sneeze and changed into a woman. My bladder was so full, and I was so desperate, that the instant I changed into a woman, I lost control of my bladder, and peed into the toilet.'
'At that point, I realized that us woman had to learn a few intimate things about men.'
'While Jayne and Mal got some lessons on feminine hygiene, us women turned guys, had to get some lessons on to peeing as men. And how to deal with having a hard-on as a man. And mentally controlling said hard-on.'
'As a telepath, I can honestly state that I am not sure which group was more embarrassed by what we had to learn.'
'And that was not all. Kaylee was the first to bring up the subject, and we found out it was all true for all of us that were originally women, when hit with the virus. Every one of us woman that turn into a man, got the complete set of male genitalia. Complete with foreskin on the penis.'
'I asked Chang about it, and he admitted that he was surprised to have his foreskin back. He stated that because he was born in Hong Kong during the time that it was part of the British Commonwealth, he had been circumcised as a baby. Not that he minded having his foreskin back.'
'Simon confirmed that all of those originally men of the crew that had turned into women, that as female, each of them had a fully complete set of female genitalia. Including as women, on their genitalia, the clitoral hood and labia folds of skin. Even though I know that Simon himself had been circumcised as a baby. And Simon stated that when he changed back into a man, he foreskin had not grown back.'
'After having meeting between Simon, Inara, Kaylee, Chang, Zoe, and myself, we came to the conclusion that since some male and female genitalia were counterparts. With the male foreskin being the counterpart of the female clitoral hood, and possibly the top part of the labia. That we should never get circumcised as a man, because doing so would damage outward genitalia as a woman, including our clitoral hood and the top of our labia.'
'It seemed that thought, the disease that change us, if there was damage to our reproductive organs, or genitalia in one gender, before we were infect, the damage would not transfer over to the new gender. The new gender would have all the complete reproductive organs and genitalia of that gender. But, it would not regenerate the damage in the original gender form.'
'Simon was the one to confirm this, in dealing with her female form's hymen. Simon was in her female form, and broke her hymen, when she had sex with Kaylee, while Kaylee was in her male form. Later Simon changed into a man, then back into a woman. And found the hymen was still broken. So, there is no regeneration of genitalia, after the original gender bending.'
'It seem as women, the men turned women, had intact hymens was intact, until they broke it. Fortunately, gender benders to not have to break their hymen every time they turn female. That would have been an annoying, slightly painful chore, that was fortunately not the case.'
'And yes, we did tease Jayne and Mal about being technically virgins as women. Until, the finally did something about it. Which both of them did. There was no point in teasing Simon, because he was open about what he had been doing with Kaylee, in their gender forms.'
And while Jayne does not mind talking about it. Mal refused to say a word on the matter. Though, I did read his mind on the subject. And I mostly kept what I learned to myself.'
'Though, from Simon's personal experiences, Simon was sure that after the first gender change, any injury to the genitalia in one gender, translated to the equivalent body part of the other gender. This was proven when some of us became sore, from sex, in one gender, dealing with one set of genitalia, that the soreness transferred to the equivalent genitalia body parts in the other gender. And that lead to some painful experiences, where it was better to stay in one gender, or the other, until the soreness was completely gone.'
'This was further proven for me last night, when Revy kneed in the groin, as a man. And I made the mistake of changing into a woman, and having that soreness spread to my lower abdomen, as my male sexual organs, changed to large female orders, as they instantly moved up into my lower abdomen. Though, I did recover later that night.'
'On that thought, we found out something interesting. It we change from a man, while having a hard-on, to a woman, we are instantly wet, down there. Also, if we are wet down there as a woman, and changed into a man, we have a hard-on. Still, that made having swapping back and forth during sex easier. Because we didn't have to take time for the current woman to get wet, and the current man to get a hard-on. And we did not have to worry about the risk of dry sex, which is no fun, and can be painful.'
'Along that thought, Kaylee and Simon shared, with the crew, an interesting piece of information they found out while having sex. First, they figured how to time their sneezes. Next, it seemed if they were in a position, as a man and woman, where their legs were slightly intertwined, in a mirror position to their lover, while still allowing for sexual intercourse. When they timed their sneezes, they found that when they instantly changed, they went from having their penis inside the others vagina, to having a penis inside their vagina. With them carrying on having sexual intercourse without stopping.'
'This does not work in the classic position of the woman having her legs fully spread. In which case, when we stopped, we have to change positions. Then, change genders. And finally, resume what we are doing, in opposite roles.'
'And if the sneeze is ill timed, while a woman at the time change, and then into the man. All that happens is the other man is painlessly pushed out of the other man's body, as vaginal cavity is collapsed from the inside out, in an instant. We learned this also works for dildos being pushed out, as well.'
'So, there are clearly tradeoffs in everything. And peeing in either gender is a trade off. Of peeing as a woman, while not having to worry about paying attention, one has to pull down one's lower clothing, sitting, and then wipe oneself dry, afterward. Though, when a woman, I have to make sure the toilet seat is down.'
'Yet. I also finally realized why men sometimes to leave the toilet seat up. While aiming is second nature for men, when they are half asleep, their aim is not that good. They have to pay attention to everything else, while half asleep, including making sure to pee into the toilet bowl. And since they do not want to hit the toilet seat. They lift it. And being half asleep, they sometimes forget to put the toilet seat back down.'
'I had that happened to myself once. One night, when I was by myself, with a slight cold. After we all gained this gender bending ability, when one of us had a cold, or flu bug, we were quarantined, because none of us wanted to lose control of our abilities, in public.'
'So, I was stuck on the Serenity, for a few days, until I got over my cold. Which was not really a problem for me. Though, the cold was more an aggravation, than anything else. Considering, we all wanted to keep our gender changing abilities secret. So, except for our friends. I could not go out in public.'
'But, since changing genders is instant and painless, when I sneezed a few times in my sleep, changing genders back and forth, I did not wake myself. But, in the middle of the night, I was a man while sleeping. I woke up, and I had to pee. I did everything, including raise the toilet seat first, but I honestly forgot to lower toilet seat before I went back to bed.'
'Fortunately, the next more, when I got us again to pee, this time as a woman, before I sat down, I remembered that I had left the toilet seat up, myself. And I stopped myself from falling into the toilet bowl.'
'Also, Lee was right about something else she wrote about in book one. She commented in a joke that it was somewhere unsanitary to pee as a man while sitting down, because male parts sometimes brushed against the bowl of the toilet. And men do not have a choice not to sit down, when they have to go the other way. But, at least we gender benders do.'
While River walked into the bathroom, she stared down at the toilet, as she concluded her thoughts, 'I don't feel like aiming, so I will go as a woman.'
She then turned around, pulled down her lower clothing, and sat on the already lowered toilet seat, to relieve herself of her full bladder.
A few minutes later, she finished her business, washed her hands, and dried her hands on a hand towel, hanging on a bathroom wall. She then came into her bedroom and she noticed her folded laptop computer. The laptop was sitting onto the bureau that she and Chang kept their fold clothes in, under the large mirror, on the wall, that was attached to the top of the bureau.
The bureau on the wall, across from the wall their bed rested against. When facing the bureau, the entrance to the hallway was to the left of the bureau. And one of the entrances to the patio, which in this case, was a sliding glass door, was to the right of the bureau.
With the patio having a hot tub, heated pool, and out door chairs and table. Including a large umbrella on the table, that could be opened, to provide shade for those sitting at the table.
Withing the master bedroom, the sliding glass door being on the wall opposite to the door to the master bathroom.
Also, by the headboard of the large king sized bed, there a door on each side of the bed. Each of the two doors had a separate walk in closet, where they stored their hung clothing in. Among other items.
As River stared at her laptop computer, on the bureau, she remembered something that Lee had found out, and proven true.
And this realization gave River an idea. But, before she could act on her idea, she first needed to do a lot of research. Along with seeing, and reading a number of series. The first series being both the anime and manga versions of the Black Lagoon series.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 03: “To the Ends of the Earth and Beyond.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Lee's Reality. Time, late morning, after the evening when Lee escape into the multiverse. Location, a rural area, somewhere in northern South America.
It was morning, inside a safe-house, in the middle of nowhere, at an undisclosed location, in northern South America.
As Pedro awoke, he got up from his bed, and headed for the kitchen area of his hideaway home. The only clothing he had on was a white t-shirt, and white boxer shorts.
Pedro stumbled from the bedroom, through the living room, and into the kitchen.
The only light coming from the area was the sunlight filtering in from the curtained windows in the various room. Though, that was plenty of light to see with.
While Pedro made himself a cup of instant coffee, in his instant coffee maker, as his first thoughts of the morning were, 'At least I am safe now. That was way too close. Thank god, I plan ahead. There is no way they could find me here. I used only cash, and through third party contacts, to get this place years ago, just in case Paciano's life then caused trouble for me.'
'And this was long before the girls ever showed up in my home town, in my home reality.'
'No records connect me to the very county I am now in. Let alone with this house. And it was a rough day, yesterday, getting here. After the message from Lee, I dropped everything and ran. And I didn't stop for nothing. I changed through five different untraceable cars, and three untraceable boats. While showing how much of a lead foot I have. I smuggled myself across several counties, so no passport records exist of where I am.'
'There is no way they can get to me. It is a two hour walk to the nearest town. And this place has supplies, and equipment, that will last me for at least six months. So, I can stay here until the heat dies down.'
'Still, with two Lovelace maids after you, Lee. God have mercy on your soul. I will be praying for you.'
'And I doubt anyone would stop Roberta, given the supersoldier serum and cybernetic upgrades Lee gave the Bloodhound, through his stories. It is very likely nobody short of God himself could take Roberta in an outright fight. And even the victor of that battle would be debatable.'
By then, the coffee was ready. He filled his mug with the coffee, and he walked into the living room.
Just has he stepped into the living room, he looked in front of him, and he immediately stop in his tracks, in fear.
Whom he saw in his living room caused him to drop his mug on the carpet of the floor, with the coffee spilling out, while the mug stayed in one one piece.
Right in front of him, on the other side of the room, was Revy. She was smiling at him, as she sat on his couch, with her left arm resting on the left arm rest, while her right hand was in her lap. She in her usual clothing and pistols, with her legs propped up on the coffee table in front of the couch. She had a lit cigarette in her mouth.
To Revy's right side, Fabiola was sitting on the other side of the same couch at Revy. Fabiola was in her maids uniform, like Pedro saw the day before. Fabiola had her fingers laced together, with her feet on the floor, between the couch and the coffee table. In addition, Fabiola's lips were curled into a wicked grin across her face.
Revy blew out a puff of smoke from her mouth. The her voice was like ice, as she stated, in english, “Pedro. If you tell us everything you know about Lee, we might let you keep your balls.”
Suddenly, to Pedro's right side, ten feet away from him, the door to his bedroom closed by itself.
Pedro turned his entire body in the direction of the sound, and he saw Roberta approach him.
Roberta looked like what Pedro saw of her, the previous day. And while Roberta was in her maids uniform, her slasher smile was pure Black Lagoon Blood Trail Arc. The slasher smile that Roberta gave to Shenhua right after Roberta snapped one of Shenhua's long knives with her bare teeth!
Roberta came to a stop, mere inches from Pedro. And while Pedro was taller than Roberta. Roberta stood on her tip toes, in her shoes, so their faces were literally next to each other, as she smile insanely at him.
At that moment, Pedro realized that the slasher smile by Roberta was a hundred times scarier in real life. Especially, when said slasher smile was three inches from his face!
Pedro swiftly back up, as he used his right hand to grab his keyring, full of keys, from the nearby counter, to his right side, that bordered the living room and the kitchen.
Pedro came to a stop, as quickly held up a computer memory stick on his key ring, towards Roberta. He hastily stated, in english, “I recorded all the conversations, between Lee and I, on this memory stick. I can even point out which dates, and what parts of our conversations are likely relevant to the information you are looking for. I even have a laptop computer here, with a full charge, that I can use to do this with.”
As Pedro looked at all three women, he heard Revy coldly stated, “Good. You may still walk out of here, under your own power.”
The next several hours of Pedro's life were some of the most stressful, and uncomfortable, of his entire life.
(_)
Reality: Babylon Five Reality. Date: January Twenty-Sixth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Time: Sometime in the early afternoon, local time. Place: Babylon Five Station, Blue Sector, in a deserted hallway, between a large shuttle bay, and the customs sections.
Lee suddenly found himself, in a moderately sized, metal hallway. The hallway was decently lit, with ceiling and wall lighting.
In Lee's right hand, he steadied his gym bag, whose strap over his right shoulder. In his left hand was the reality device, he had just stolen from Rock.
Lee looked around, he saw there was no one around.
As Lee stopped looking around, and he looked down one of the directions of the hallway, he thought, 'That was slightly disorientating, due to the sudden change of scenery. But, that was to be suspected. And it was both instant, and painless. The good news is that while, hell was literally seven steps behind me, I escaped the girls, just in the nick of time. The bad news is that they now know who I am. And they will be coming after me. The worst news is that I have not idea what is going to happen to River, Pedro, and Melvin.'
'Melvin is not currently on their radar, so he should be fine. And with them likely following me into the multiverse, they will leave the Devil's Hotel. And Melvin will be about to continue his life in peace, without being caught by Balalaika and Hotel Moscow.'
'Pedro likely got my message, so he had time to escape. He is likely on another continent, by the next morning.'
'River, I am not sure about. I just have to hope that River will reveal herself to them, and they will let her be, given she is their friend, and if she is harmed, doing so will cause problems with Chang's group.'
It was then that Lee noticed he was still press down on the red button. He quickly released red button, as he thought, 'I guess there is as safety built into these devices. Pressing and holding it down will not cause it to reality jump again. One has to release the button and press it again, to use reality jump again. That was nice thinking on the part of those whom actually built these device. Because, I believe I missed mentioning safety measure.'
'Now, to implement my plan to escape. This time, and place, is the best chance, in the multiverse, that I can think of to lose the girls for good.'
'Still, I hope no one saw me just yet. Though, considering I don't see anyone around, nearby, I believe I am fine.'
Lee pocketed his reality device, into his left side pants pocket, as he noticed there was a window, on the wall, across the hallway where he was standing.
Lee turned and walked over the window. He looked out the window, and he saw that he was standing over what looked the large shuttle bay that was full of several shuttles, with literally thousands of humans, and aliens boarding those shuttles. There were also station personnel, in Earth Force uniforms, directing everyone.
As expected, with the professionalism showed by the Babylon Five staff, there seemed to be no trouble happening down there, on the landing deck.
Lee thought, 'Now, that is a sight to behold. This might even have been the same shuttle bay showed at the beginning of the Babylon Five episode, Gropos. Where thousands of Earth Force soldiers disembarked onto Babylon Five.'
'Still, this is perfect. I just need to get lost in the crowd. But first, I need to make sure I get what I need here. And then get on to the right shuttle. Though, all that will require is a convincing story, that I had already come up with. Along with a change of clothes, which I also have.'
'Given the when, where, and what reality I thought of, as I used this reality device. My exact thoughts were very detailed. I though, sometime between when Sheridan had his last supper with his friends, and the last time he visited the Babylon Five Station. To be specific, I thought of being taken to a hallway, that was safe for me to be in. Which was located in Blue Sector, near the docking area for the people being casually evacuated from Babylon Five, and the customs area of, but, also near a the restrooms. And away from any station staff, crew, or anyone else.
Lee looked around, and saw the sign for the restrooms. One of them was the men's restroom sign, by the door. There was two other doors. One for women. And the last was for methane alien breathers.
Lee thought, 'Good. Now, I just hope no one is inside the men's restroom.'
Lee turned towards the restroom, and he brisking walked into the men's restroom. He soon opened the door and entered the men's restroom.
As Lee shut the door behind him. Though, he found that door had no lock. Given there was nothing he could do about that. He turned around and he looked at the restroom. He found the restroom was a large, standard public restroom, much like from his own time, and reality. And it was very clean.
Lee thought, 'Not that I am complaining. But, the staff on the station are clearly planning keep this place clean, all the way up to the moment they blow this station up... That is inane. And I really mean it. One of the station janitors was show still at work, when Zack met with John, in the episode, Sleeping in the Light... Still, I cannot waste any more time than I have too. I have to keep moving. Just in case they might have tracked me down to where I am.'
'Also, since there is no lock on the door. After I check to make sure there is no one else inside here. I need to do this as quickly as possible, so someone does not walk in. With me in the middle of getting dress. With him starting to ask me questions.'
Lee then quickly checked all the stalls. He found they were empty, and he was the only one in the restroom.
Lee did quickly set down his gym bag.
He unzipped the bag.
Lee then took off his sunglasses, and gray fedora hat, as he pulled out all his items from his pockets, on the clothing he had on. Including his reality device, from his left side pants pocket. He placed the items into the gym bag. This including his reality device, gray hat, and his sunglasses.
Next, he quickly stripped down to his underwear, socks, his digital wrist watch, and his ring necklace. He also pulled out the leather belt, which was looped through his pants.
He then pulled out, from his bag, the clothing that was by the moderately sized suitcase, in the gym bag, but not in the suit case.
The clothing was a white t-shirt, which Lee put on first. Then, there was a white long sleeved button up shirt, which Lee put on, and buttoned up. After that, he put on some black pants, making sure both his shirts were inside his pants. Next, he looped his black leather belt through his pants. He then pulled out his black dress shoes.
Lee then pulled out a red tie, and walked to the large, long mirror, on the wall, over the sinks.
Lee then flipped up the collar of his dress shirt, put the tie under it, and then flip the collar back down. He then tied his red tie, in a formal knot, around his neck.
Lee walked back over to his gym bag, he pulled out a black coat, and put it on.
Afterward, he pulled out a black, short rimmed, fedora hat, and he put it on top of his head. With him making sure he had it on straight, with the proper side of he hat, facing forward, on his head.
Lee then reached into his gym bag, he pulled out the items that he had put into the bag, that were previously on his person.
This included a few decks of cards.
Lee also put the reality device in the interior, left pocket, of his coat, near his chest. He then pulled out, and put his sunglasses into the right interior coat pocket, opposite from where he had placed the reality device.
Lee then walked back over to the mirror over the sinks, and he looked out himself.
The black suit Lee wore was the black version of the gray suit he previously wore.
Lee straighten out his clothing, and make sure he looked alright.
As Lee looked at himself in the mirror, he jokingly thought, 'To quote the actor and sing, Will Smith, in his role as Agent J, in the original Men In Black movie. I make this look good... And I no longer have to wear glasses because I was disguised while with the women. That is a relief... Now, I have get what I need here, and to cover my tracks.'
Lee then walked back over to his pile of clothing, and his gym bag.
Lee pulled out the suitcase hidden in the gym bag. He then set pulled out his gray fedora hat. He set his suitcase on it's side, opened it, and he placed his gray fedora hat into his suitcase, in a manner which would not damage the hat. And he closed, and latched his suitcase, and set it on on it's bottom, onto the tiled floor.
Next, he checked to see that nothing else was in his gym bag. Which was the case. Lee then stuffed the pile of his clothing, that he had took off, into his gym bag. This clothing included his blue cloth jacket, and tennis shoes.
He zipped up his gym bag.
Lee stood up, picked up his suitcase, by its handle, with his right hand, and picked up his gym bag, by its handle, with his left hand.
Lee thought, 'Now, to clean up after myself.'
Lee calmly walked out of the men's restroom. Fortunately, the door the hallway pushed outward, so Lee just push the door open.
As soon as he was back in the hallway, he quickly located a wall mounted garbage chute. He walked up to the chute, he set down his suitcase, as he used his right hand to open the chute.
Next, he stuffed his gym bag down into the garbage chute, and closed the lid.
Finally, he picked up his small suitcase, by the handle, with his right hand, as he thought, 'I hate junking my clothing, but this clothing could be tied back to me. And though I am not crazy about men's suits, the best way to hide in plain sight is to present oneself as older, and more mature. When compared to my previous disguise as a drifter and gambler. And this suit helps with that. Now, all I have to do, is implement my plan.'
Lee then looked at the signs on the hallway walls. After reading the english on the side, he calmly followed the signs, towards the shuttle bay, full of people, at he had seen out the hallway window.
A few minutes later, Lee followed the arrows, through the hallways, along with going down one floor, by way of a set of stairs. He then made it to the shuttle bay area.
As Lee stood where he was, he looked around at the several people about the large area, he saw several aliens standing among the humans.
Lee did his best not to stare, while he tried to remain calm, as if he belonged there. While Lee did this, he maintained his poker face, as he thought, with a bit of childish wonder, 'I really am here, in the Babylon Five Station, surrounded by aliens. And not just human looking ones. This would be cool, if I was not in such a hurry. Now, to find a security official.'
As Lee looked around, he spotted a nearby human middle-aged man, wearing an Earth Force Babylon Five security uniform.
Lee thought, 'The last thing a law enforcement officer ever excepts is to meet someone with the audacity to pull such a naked con directly against them... Still, given the date. There is an off chance he could be a telepath. Given this is after Telepath War, and Psi Corps disbanded, and telepaths were granted more rights. If is he, I will just handle this a different way. Now, to see if I can pull this off, or end up in the brig.'
'If things go bad, I can go for my reality device, and escape. And I got enough moves, and my precognition is so good, that I can, in theory dodge bullets. I just do not want to test that theory. That is why I am running from the girls, instead of standing my ground.'
Lee then calm walked up to security officer.
The officer's back was turned to Lee, as Lee came to a stop, six feet from the office. Lee then stated, in a calm, yet straightforward manner, in english, “Excuse me officer. Could I have a moment of your time?”
The officer turn around, and looked at Lee for a few seconds. He then responded, “Yes. What can I do for you?”
Lee thought, 'He was giving me the once over. That is why I am wearing my best clothing. As they say. Dress for success. And my cover story requires that I appear professional looking. Now, to answer his question.'
Lee calmly said, “Official. I have a minor inconvenience. Some pick pocket stole my identicard, credit chit, and ticket, a minute, or so ago. I fully realize that you don't have time to search the people here, given you are evacuating the station. Though, I believe I do require some help to get off the station.”
The officer inquired, “I am glad you realize that. How much was on the credit chit?”
Lee answered, “Not much. The credit chit only had a few credits on it. Just traveling money.”
The officer asked, “So, what is your name? And where are you headed?”
Lee calmly answered, “My named is, Ello Gray” He mentally added, 'Which is an anagram of the word, allegory. As in, symbolism.' He continued, “I am heading for Mars. With a layoff here. And I am not upset by this situation. I can get another identicard, and someone to wire me money for tickets. The problem is I am sure neither of us has the time for me to get a background check, for a re-issuance of a identicard, and for someone to wire me some money.”
The officer agreed, “You are correct about that, Mister Gray. Our orders are to get everyone off the station. You must be one of the last few to use the station as a transit point in their travel. Let me see what I can do for you.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. One of the last few. With likely John Sheridan being the last.'
Lee watched as the officer used his communications link, stuck on the back of his right hand, to the Babcom system. The officer stated, “This is Officer Lars. I have minor a problem here. A human male here is claiming he has had his idenitcard, credit chit, and ticket stolen. Though, he is not interested in trying to catch the guilty party. He just needs help getting off the station.”
Lee recognized the voice on the other end of the link as Zack Allan, the current Chief of Security for Babylon Five.
Zack said, on the other end, “Bring him to my office.”
Lars turned off his link. He looked over at Lee, as he said, “If you will please follow me.”
Lee replied, “Just lead the way, Officer Lars.' Lee thought, 'I look forward to seeing Zack Allan. He is one of the more reasonable people that have ever been employed in the command staff of Babylon Five.'
Lee then followed Lars from the shuttle bay, and into the hallways. They soon passed the customs area, where the security officer waved Lee, and his suitcase, in his right hand, through. They then walked through the passenger lounge and soon made it to a transport tube, that took them to a nearby mono-rail station.
The mono-rail station was near the center of Babylon Five's spinning axis. As Lee forced himself to remain calm, as he experienced near weightlessness. He thought, 'Fortunately, there is enough gravity to walk. Still, even though this is my first time in low gravity, I have to remain calm, or the officer will notice something is off. And there will be no gravity on the shuttle. But, the passenger transport is a centrifuged gravity system, like Babylon Five, so that won't be a problem there. Though, I doubt I will lose my lunch, given I have expert control over myself'
A minute later, one of them shuttle core trams of the mono-rail stopped in front of them.
As the doors opened, Lee watched a few people, some were in civilian clothing, but most people were part of the station's employment roaster, and they wear various uniforms.
When the people finished exiting the shuttle core tram, the officer and Lee walked into the tram, and sat down.
They each them strapped themselves in, with Lee setting his suitcase on his lap, as he held it with both hands.
The tram then started moving.
A couple of minutes later, the tram came to a stop in Red Sector.
Red Sector was the commercial area of Babylon Five, and also the location of the headquarters for station security.
The doors to the tram opened, with the two men were released, and no longer strapped down. They stood up, and left the shuttle core. Lee held his suitcase, by its handle, with his right hand.
Lee then follow Lars out of the tarm, down a hallway on the mono-rail station.
Soon after, they rode down another transport tube, to the interior floor of Red Sector, where gravity was closer to Earth standard.
Five minutes later, of walking through hallways, they reached the security office.
They then walked though the security headquarters, until they reached the main office of the security chief.
Lee came to a stop in front of the security chief's desk, with the officer that escorted Lee standing to Lee's right.
Lee looked down to see Security Chief, Zack Allan, sitting in a cushioned chair, behind the desk. Lee saw the desk had built in computers, keyboard, and monitors, in it.
Zack was an older fair skinned man, wearing in a security uniform. Though, he was still in great shape for his age.
Lee remained silent, as Zack turned to his subordinate. He asked, “Did this man give you any trouble, Lars?”
Lars looked at his commanding officer, as he answered, “None whatsoever, Chief.”
Zack said, “Good.” Zack then turned to Lee, as he casually inquired, “And you are?”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he looked at Zack. Lee calmly stated, “Ello Gray, sir.”
Zack cracked a grin, as he responded, “Polite... I like that. Well, I am Security Chief Zack Allan. And Mister Gray, you seem to have a problem.”
Lee calmly stated, “I prefer to look for solutions, than seek out problems.” He thought, 'And that is the honest truth to my life.'
Zack complimented, “That is a good outlook to have. You say you had you identicard, credit chit, and ticket stolen?”
Lee flatly lied, “Yes.”
Zack inquired, “So, where are you heading?”
Lee answered, “Mars.”
Zack asked, “And what is your job?”
Lee stated, “I am currently in-between jobs. But, my specialty is mid-level management, specializing in grain procurement, processing, and distribution. Basically, I am one of the people who helps turn grain into flour, and then finds sellers for it. My last job was on three different human colonies on the rim. Helping them set up their food grain production, and flour transport contracts.”
Zack commented, “A boring, but necessary job.”
Lee feigned annoyance, as he replied, “Yes.”
Zack noticed Lee change of demeanor, but he did not say anything. Instead, he questioned, “So, where are you from?”
Lee said, “Originally, Earth, North America. But, my job takes me to a number of colonies, that deal with food production. Fortunately, my family left Earth, for the colonies, before the plague hit.” He thought, 'I will not mention the plague by name. Which it is the Drakh shadow plague. Because, I do not know how much information on the plague that hit Earth, was released to the public. And if I say the wrong thing. The jig is up. So, I will keep these lies a vague as possible.'
Zack asked, “That is fortunate. And your business on Mars?”
Lee responded, “I was heard through a third hand source that I might be able to get a better paying job on Mars. And it will be close enough to visit Earth. And with the plague cured. I do look forward to visiting my homeworld once again.'
Zack said, “I can appreciate that. It will take about at least four hours to get a background check on you. But, that would take too much time. And I am guessing you already know that.”
Lee stated, “Like I said. I am looking for solutions. I came to you subordinate for help. If it is too much trouble, I will find my own way off this station.”
Zack requested, “No. It is not to much trouble. May we search your suitcase?”
Lee turned to look over at Lar, as he held his suitcase towards the security officer. Lee said, “Sure. Go ahead.”
The officer took the suitcase, walked to a nearby table, set the suitcase on the table. He then opened it, and began to search it.
Lee stated in place, and he remain silent, while watched as he belongings were searched.
A minute later, officer Lars closed the suitcase, latched it, and handed it back to Lee.
Lee took the suitcase by the handle, with his right hand. He allowed his right arm, along with the suitcase, to hang down, by his waist
Officer Lars turned to Zack, as he stated, “There is nothing in there.”
Zack continued to look at Lars, as he thought, 'This means he is not a smuggler. Scanners at customs did not show anything of interest on his body. And while this job has taught me to expect the unexpected. I really don't have time for this.'
Zack turned to Lee, to see the younger man had turned to face him With Lee remaining silent, as he looked back at him.
Lee offered, “You are more than willing to pat me down, if you want.”
Zack stated, “That will not be necessary, Mister Gray. How do you want us to help you?”
Lee flatly commented, “I will cut to the point. I need a temporary identicard, a ticket to Mars, and a credit chit with a few credits on it. Just enough credit for a couple of meals, and a night's stay at a decent hotel. To give me time to sort out this mess, when I get to Mars.” Lee thought, 'Chances are meals are covered with the ticket. Otherwise, how would they feed the lurkers, as they were moved off the station, to other locations, in the Earth Alliance.'
Zack said, “Well, you are in luck. As part of the plan to evacuate the station, Earth Alliance instituted a plan to give lurkers a ticket to a human world, a temporary identicard, and a few credits in their pocket. We will use that to help you.” He mentally added, 'The program's budget is a use it, or lose it, offer for the station. And we still have plenty of money from the program.'
Lee replied, “Thank you, Chief Allan.”
Zack commented, “Don't worry about it. Still, there are limitations to the identicard we will give you. They will only work in the Earth Alliance, and Mars. Which is fortunate for you. You will need to get your own identicard replaced, as soon as possible.”
Lee responded, “I plan to do just that, right after I get over the jet-lag.”
Zack agreed, “Yes. That can be a pain.”
Zack turned to his subordinate, as he ordered, “Make sure Mister Gray receives the items he needs, and that he leaves the station, on a shuttle, that will get him to a transport leaving for Mars.
The officer said, “Yes sir. I believe one such transport will be leaving the area within the next hour, or so.”
Zack replied, “Good.” He then turned to Lee, as he said, “Have a safe trip, Lee.”
Lee responded, “Thank you again, Chief Allan.”
Officer Lars turned to Lee, as he said, “Right this way, Mister Gray.”
Lee then followed the man out of Zack's office, and down the hallway.
(_)
While Lee walked through this hallway, with officer Lars, with Lee walking right behind the security officer.
As they walked, Lars looked ahead of himself, as he stated, “It will take a few minutes to get you the items you need, here. Then, I will escort you back to the shuttle bay we left. Where I will see you off.”
Lee complimented, “That is fine. Also, I have found I am a good judge of character, and I belief your security chief is a fine man.”
Lars smiled, as he agreed, “Yes. And I consider it a privilege to have worked for him.”
Lee replied, “Yes. It is a privilege to have met such a man.”
Lars commented, “True. He is a good man to know.”
Lee stated, “By the way, my last name is spell with an, a, and not an, e.”
Lee said, “Not to worry. We will check the spell before we make the identicard and credit chit.”
Lee commented, “Good. I appreciate that.”
The two men then continued walking down the hallway of the security headquarters, till they reached the identification processing room, to create the identicard, credit chit, and ticket that Lee needed.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the security chief's office, Zack continued to sit at his chair, behind his desk, as he watched the man leave, through the door to his office, while being escorted by officer Lars, from one of the monitors on his desk.
Zack then turned his attention to his electronics controls built into his desk. He pulled up a video record of an empty hallway in Blue Sector. It showed Lee suddenly appearing out of nowhere, wearing a gym bag, wearing different clothing, and holding some sort of device in his left hand.
Zack fast forward the video to where Lee pockets the device, and goes into the men's restroom, a few minutes later, he comes out of the restroom dress in his black suit, and suitcase, with him dumping his gym bag and clothing into a garbage.
As Zack stopped the video he thought, 'This Mister Gray clearing has a teleportation device. But, he had no contraband. And passive scans of him, as he came here showed that device was man-made. With standard materials found Earth. That means he is either a time traveler, or a reality traveler. I have personally dealt with both before. And without any immediate contraband, that means he is on the run from someone he cannot escape with a teleportation device.'
'That is a very bad situation for someone to be in. And I do not have time for this mess. My orders, from Earth Force, are to get everyone off the station, as soon as possible. So, we can do the final preparations in blowing this place up. If he is not here, those whom are after him will not come here. And if he wants to go to Mars, that is fine with me.'
'When he gets to Mars, if it he causes problems, I am sure Garibaldi can handle this mess far better than I can.'
'Though, I won't call Garibaldi about Mister Gray. Given Michael's inquisitive nature, if I told him about Mister Gray, he will stick his nose into the matter, and end up in the middle of whatever mess Mister Gray is running from. But, if I don't call Garibaldi, chances are that Mister Gray will just pass through Mars without a problem. And in so doing, saving us all a lot of grieve.'
Suddenly, there was a beat from his desk. He answered the com, by pushing a button on his desk. He said, “Yes.”
The other end answer, from Blue Sector Command and Control, “This is C&C, sir. I thought you might want to know that we have been contacted, personally, by President Sheridan. He will arrive in his personal Bluestar, in six hours. Do you want to use to assign a welcome detail for his arrival?”
Zack thought, 'I loath the fact that I could not come to his last dinner. But, I am happy he is stopping by to see the old station. At least I will get to say goodbye to him.'
Zack answered, “We are not rolling out the red carpet, while we are turning off the lights. We will keep this low-key. I will greet President Sheridan, myself. Just make sure all civilians have left the station by then. Please, inform me when the President's Bluestar has exited hyperspace.”
The communications officer on the other end replied, “Yes, sir.”
The line was then disconnected.
Zack leaned back in his chair, as he happily thought, 'Now, to figure out what I am going to say to John, when he gets here.'
(_)
Twenty-five minutes later, Lee found back in the shuttle bay he had just left.
Lee was walking onto the staircase leading into a shuttle, his ticke in his left hand, and his suitcase in his right hand. His new identicard, and credit chit were in his left side pants pocket. And the credit chit did have a little money on it.
Lee turned back to see Lars nearby, whom was looking back at him, from the floor of the shuttle bay.
Lee said, “Thank you for everything, officer Lars”
Lars replied, “No problem. And have a great trip, Ello.”
Lee replied, “You as well, officer Lars.”
Lee then turned back towards the upper part of the staircase, that let into the shuttle itself.
As he made his way to the entrance to the shuttle, the human stewardess was their, checking tickets.
When Lee reached the inside of the shuttle, he handed his ticket to the stewardess.
As the stewardess looked at Lee's ticket, Lee asked, “How long is the trip to Mars from here?”
The stewardess looked up at Lee, as she handed him back his ticket. She answered, “Two days. Thanks to the new hyperspace gate built near Mars. And this is a direct flight there. Now, if you could secure her luggage, find a seat, and strap yourself in, we will be taking off in a few minutes.
Lee took his ticket, with his left hand, as he pocketed it. He said, “Thank you, ma'am.” He then walked past the stewardess, to find a seat.
Lee then walked into the seating area, which was two rows of two seats each. Much like a small airplane cabin.
Also, Lee note that the shuttle was half full.
As soon as he found a seat. He placed his suitcase in the luggage compartment above him. Next, he sat down in the seat, and he strapped himself into the seat with the seatbelts.
Ten minutes later, the door to the shuttle closed, and the ship was lowered into the docking exiting.
A few minutes later, they were in space, and Lee felt weightlessness of zero gravity.
Lee forced himself to remain calm, as he thought, 'If I lose my lunch, I will be in big trouble.'
Fortunately, Lee was able to control himself, and keep himself calm, as he felt the shuttle move forwards.
Lee then watched from his window, as they approached a large, rotating human, passenger transport ship.
About five minutes later, he felt the shuttle dock.
The pilot voice stated, from the cabin speakers, “Folks, we have docked with the passenger liner transport ship, the Trinity Well. If you will please disembark, and have your tickets in hand.”
Lee watched as the others unbuckled themselves, and floated back to the now open door.
Lee then unstrapped himself, grabbed his suitcase from the luggage compartment. He head the handle of his suitcase with his right hand. He kept his suitcase by his him, while he carefully floated along the aisle in the middle of the shuttle, as he followed the other passengers.
Less than a minute later, Lee followed the passengers through a docking tube.
When they reached the other side, there were three stewardesses their to check their tickets.
As Lee floated to the women, he pulled out his ticket, with his left hand, and headed it to the nearest uniformed lady.
While the women looked at Lee's ticket, she said, “You will be in second class. In seat fifty-one, C. That is on the far right of the cabin, in the middle. The chairs are have numbers of the back of the headrests. Just follow the orange signs, to the cabin. You cannot miss it.” She then handed Lee back his ticket.
Lee took his ticket, and pocketed it. He looked at her, as he calmly said, “Thank you, ma'am.” He then floated by the women, as he saw arrows on the hallway walls in front of him. Each arrow was a different color, that lead in a different direction.
Lee followed the orange arrows, along with a few other people that had gotten off the shuttle, as well.
A minute later, he reached one of the entrances to the rotating section of the ship.
The entrance was a wide open space, with emergency sliding doors separating the weightless section to the rotating section.
As Lee stepped onto the moving section of the floor, he quickly felt weight return, to near normal Earth standard. He thought, 'That is a relief.'
He then continued to follow the orange arrows briskly, as he walked the rest of the way to the section he was assign.
When he reached the entrance to passenger section, he saw a large, C. On the wall.
Lee walked into the room. He saw that he was in a passengers cabin, three main rows of seats. The two side rows had two seats each, running up the length of the cabin. The middle rows had four seats each, running up the length of the cabin.
There were baggage compartments above the rows of seats. With the small doors to the compartments facing the two aisles.
It was very much like a like the passenger cabin on a large airplane.
Lee also saw there were were no windows in the cabin, just flat off-white colored walls, and ceilings. With brown commercial, short carpet on the floor.
Also, from the way the seats were faced away from him, he guessed the entrance he walked in from, put him on the back, right side of the cabin.
There were also a number of people in the cabin, seated at their chairs.
While feeling slight amusement, Lee thought, 'Looks like I am flying coach for the next two days. Also, I this place is not that full. I might not have to sit beside someone.'
Lee then calmly walked down the aisle to his right side, and he soon found his chair, by looking at the numbers on the backs of the headrests.
To his relief, it was the inside chair, beside the aisle. And the seats look spaced enough that he could comfortably fit in them, and still have room for his legs.
Lee then opened the top luggage compartment over his chair, put his suitcase into it. Fortunately, his suitcase fit, and he closed the compartment.
Lee then sat down in his seat, as he waited for the ship to start moving.
A few minutes later, Lee then heard the speaker come on, as the captain of the ship, stated, “Everyone, we are about to get underway. Please, remain in your seats, until we jump to hyperspace.”
Lee then felt the ship start to move.
As the shipped moved, Lee looked over to see the inside seat beside him was empty. He mentally realized, 'Well, I guess I won't have to sit beside anyone. That is good. It means more room for me.'
Given Lee's slightly above average height, while sitting, he could see slightly over the chairs, and head rests, to see the backs of the heads of the passengers in front of him. Though, he could still find some comfort with the headrest on his seat, behind his head.
From their hair styles, Lee saw two human women were sitting in the two seat front of him.
The one to his upper right, had short brown hair, and the one directly behind him, had long blond her.
Given the angle between where Lee was sitting at, to where the brown haired woman was seating at, Lee was able to see the left forehead, and upper cheek, of the brown haired woman to his right. She was a young, fair skinned woman.
A minute later, he saw the blond woman turned her head to the right, to look at her friend. And Lee saw that she was a young, fair skinned woman. But, that was not of what caught Lee's attention.
What caught Lee's attention was the right side of the woman's face was covered in a burn scar. And there was only one blond woman, in the multiverse, with a scar on the right sid of her face, that Lee could think of, that would be with a brown haired woman.
Lee immediately forced himself to remained calm, as he put on his poker face. He thought, with concern and worry, 'Oh no. That is Balalaika, and B is with her. But... How?... The girls must have figured out I was heading to Mars. With Revy, Rock, and the others, called for help.'
'That means they knew my plans, and I at this point, I cannot change destinations, and I don't dare try to use my reality device so close to those two. They might have a tracking device. Also, I won't even try to do a reality jump in hyperspace, because I never wrote about that possibility. I might end up in another hyperspace, in other reality, instead of in normal reality. With that hyperspace being more like a demon dimension, instead of just a empty space. To the honest, Babylon Five version of hyperspace is one of the most tame, safest forms of hyperspace in the multiverse.'
'This means I will have to make the most of the situation.'
'And though, I believe that given the number of transports that have left Babyon Five, during this time period. It is possible, they still covered their bases. With some of them going to each transport. And them then meeting up on Mars, if they had not found me, yet.'
'That means that it is likely only Balalaika and B are the only one after me, that are on this passenger liner. And the reason that they are sitting right in front of me, is that existence is fucking with my life, one more time. Which is not a surprise to me.'
'Though, this also means that I have no idea how many more people I am going to have to face, when I get to Mars, whom that one a piece of my ass, in a bad way. But, I was just have to cross those bridges when I face them.'
'Still, I just hope that they did not bring all of Hotel Moscow to this party, or I could be in some real trouble.'
Balalaika then noticed Lee staring at her. She turned her body to the right, towards Lee, as she sat over the seat, between her seat and B's seat, as she looked at him.
Lee continued to remain calm, as he thought, with concern, 'Oh crap, Balalaika saw me. Still, if I play this cool, I will be fine. Though, both these women are sharp, and intelligence, they have never met me before. And given my facial disguise I used in Plata Podrido, they only have a basic description of what I look like. Also, I am not wearing glasses, nor shades right now. So, I could still be okay.'
'Also, I must remember not use the term, Ms., with Balalaika. Rock used the term Ms. Balalaika in the Black Lagoon series, and in book three, I wrote it so, that Balalaika noticed something off on Bob and Ed, besides the obvious, when Bob called Balalaika, Ms. Balalaika.'
B noticed her lover's body language, and she turned around between her seat and Balalaika’s seat, to look at Lee, as well.
Lee saw B looking also looking at him. He maintained his poker face, as he sacstically thought, 'The more the merrier.'
Lee could see that both women were casual clothing. At least at chest level. Though, Lee did his best to look at their faces, and not at their breasts.
Balalaika lips curled into a wicked grin, as she said, in english, with a russian accent, “Well, who do we have here?”
Lee feigned a relaxed body language, as he casually said, “Hello. My name is, Ello Gray. And you are?”
Balalaika flatly answered, “You can call me Balalaika.”
B said, in english, with a russian accent, “I am, B.”
Lee thought, 'The best way to defuse this situation is to be polite, and honest, as much as I possibly can, without blowing my cover.' He calmly responded, “Ladies, it is nice to meet you both. And I apologize, Balalaika, for staring at your scar. It was rude of me. Though, I could not help myself.”
Balalaika shrugged, as she said, in a casual tone of voice, “It happens. And at least you were man enough to apologize. Also, we are going to be traveling together, for a while. Would you like to talk?”
Lee thought, 'If I say no, it will arouse their suspicious about me. So, I have to play their game.' He answered, “Yes.”
B asked, for Balalaika, “So, where are you heading?”
Lee answered, in a direct, even tone of voice, “Mars. This is a direct flight, there, of course.”
B replied, “Of course.”
Balalaika inquired, “So, why are you going to, Mars?”
Lee thought, 'They clearly are testing me, to see if I am the writer. But, I am use to navigating such tests. At the moment, I will just use the same lie I used on Zack Allan. Also, it is best that I not to ask them questions. Russians tend to get upset about people asking for details concerning them. Also, russians find polite, friendly people to be annoying. So, I will have to walk a balancing act here.'
Lee stated, “I am in the grain business. Basically, I am in charge of production of flour, and finding customers. I am between jobs at the moment. And I am heading there for a possible job.”
Balalaika asked, “Can you tell me more about your job.”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he thought, with inward mild annoyance, 'While russians don't like questions ask about them. They can still be hypocritical about asking other people questions about themselves.'
Lee casually lied, “We mostly deal creating flour, from wheat. Given weight and size limitations on ships. We found that it is easier to have the production flour, in faculties on the farming colonies, and then ship flour for transport. That way, all unnecessary weight, and space, is already removed. Such as the chaff.”
B said, “That makes sense.”
Lee went onto say, “Still shipping flour has issues. For example, wheat flour only had an Earth standard four to six month shelve life, and it must not freeze while in transport.” He mentally added, with amusement, 'Always do research, before creating a lie.'
Balalaika inquired, “How much flour does your companies ship, on a regular basis? If you don't mind.”
Lee thought, 'If I use the english system of weights and measurements, I am busted. I have to use metric. Also, I have no idea, but I can fake the figures.'
Lee answered, “Sure. While, the companies I have worked with are small. We usual ship between one to three billion kilograms, annually. Earth standard time.”
B commented, “That is a lot of flour”
Lee replied, “Not really. The bigger companies can ship upwards of a trillion, or two, kilograms of flour, annually.”
Balalaika said, “I guess humanity still needs its stable foods.”
Lee agreed, “Of course. Everyone likes bread, noodles, pies crusts, pizza crusts, and even cookies.”
Balalaika replied, “Very true.”
Lee thought, 'I think they bought my story.' He said, “I take a lot of pride in helping to feed humanity.”
Balalaika stated, “As you should. Does your company also produce various grain alcohol?”
Lee casually lied, “A few of them do. But, that is not my department. Alcohol transport outside of Earth Alliance space can create problems. The sale and transport of alcohol through Minbari space, with out permit, is very illegal. This is because a Minbari consuming alcohol can cause a Minbari to go into a berserk rage. I heard a rumor that vinegar has a LSD effect on Minbari. But, I am not crazy enough to test that theory.”
“Centauri businesses do not like competition. As such, the Centauri government has placed food and drink tariffs coming into Centauri space. Especially, on alcohol. A person can get their ship seized, if they are caught in Centauri space, without having proof they paid the tariffs, and had their import permits on hand.”
“Narns are a bit odd in this situation. While they share the same religion. Though, that religion has a lot of different denominations. If a person is caught selling a Narn, of a specific religious denomination, food or drink, during one of their several religious events, they can be fined. Though, these fines are not that bad, because even the Narns admit it is hard to keep up with all their religious events.”
Both Balalaika and B let out a laugh.
Lee continued with his lie, “The rest of the alien species, are a mixed bag on this issue. Honestly, I think it is just one large headache that is not worth dealing with.”
Balalaika said, “I can see why.”
Lee watched a Balalaika and B looked at each other.
Balalaika said, in russian, “If that is a cover story. It is a good one.”
B replied, in russian, “Yes. It is. Most of what he says is correct, or possibly correct.”
Balalaika commented, “Still, there are other questions we can ask.”
While Lee did not understand russian, he forced himself to remained calm. He thought, 'Now, why I am not going to ask them questions. I can ask them on some obvious points.' He asked, “So, why are you two heading to Mars?”
Both women then turned to look at him.
B answered, in english, “We are looking for a man, there?”
Lee innocently replied, “Must be a lucky man.”
Balalaika could not help but let out a small laugh at the irony of the situation, in making such a paradoxical statement.
Meanwhile, B calmly said, “Not really.”
Suddenly, the ship felt like it hit a bump in the road.
Balalaika asked, in english, “What as that?”
Lee stated, “We just transition into hyperspace.”
Balalaika thought, 'The writer would likely not be able to answer this next question. Unless he is a lot more cagey than I expect him to be. Revy said not to underestimate him.' She inquired, “Is there anything we should be worried about?”
Lee thought, 'I bet Balalaika is thinking I cannot answer this question. She is underestimating my amount of knowledge on such things.' He casually answered, “As long as this ship keeps its lock on the beacon network, we are fine. Though, given the gravitational eddies in hyperspace, it can be a bit of a bumpy ride. From time to time. But, nothing serious.”
Balalaika thought, 'If he is the writer, he just delivered a wonderful answer, that sounds like he knows what he is talking about. But, there are other questions I can use to test him with.'
Balalaika inquired, “That is nice to know. Why are there no windows on this ship? At least for the passengers?”
Lee thought, 'Fortunately, I know the answer to this question. And it is likely such common knowledge, that I can use this information to derail you questioning.' He calmly responded, “Because staring at hyperspace, for prolonged amounts of time, can cause people to become nauseous. Why do you ask?”
Balalaika thought, with amusement, 'Touche. I guess that would be common enough knowledge to not ask about. Now, for my next question.' She questioned, “No reason. So, do you play card games?”
Lee thought, 'It does not surprise me that these two women would hear about my poker skills. But, I have a lie ready for just an occasion.' He calmly said, “Not usually. I prefer backgammon. Though, I did not bring my board with me, this time.”
Balalaika mentally reflected, 'Nice, answer. While giving the excuse that he cannot play. So, we cannot test his skills.' She responded, in an even tone of voice, “Mores the pity. Well it was nice to meeting you, Mister Gray.”
B commented, “Yes. It was a pleasure.”
Lee replied, “Same here.”
Lee then watched as Balalaika and B turn around, and sit back down in their seats.
Lee did not sigh, nor breath heavily, as he thought, 'With there close proximity to me, and their enhanced senses, they may hear me letting out a deep breath. I just need to relax, and lean back.'
And Lee did just that, as he lead back in his cushioned chair, with the back of his head laying on his headrest, his arms on the armrests to his side. He then let himself relax a bit.
(_)
In the two seat row in front of Lee, Balalaika and B started talking to each other in russian.
B stated, in russian, “I do not think Mister Gray, is Lee?”
Balalaika commented, in russian, “I still have my suspicions. Though, Lee was intelligent to mask his face so well, while in that city. As he was surrounded by Revy, Rock, and the others.”
B pointed out, “Yes. It shows cunning on his part. Even so. This is neither the time, nor the place, to confront him. We are merely here to find him. And if we do find the writer, we will have him picked up on Mars.”
Balalaika conceded, “True. We do not know if reality travel is safe in hyperspace, and we don't want to stir up trouble, with no way of escape.”
B said, “Exactly. Revy mentioned that Lee has precognitive abilities. So, he will sense dangerous coming towards him. In addition, Revy did say that Lee learned a lot from them, in a time loop. Including, River training him in hand to hand combat. I do not want to have to fight a precognitive, with combat skills, in close quarters.”
Balalaika replied, “I agree. Neither of us can take Annie, in fight. When we sparred with her, on occasion. Still, we are not the only ones after Lee. Even the Lovelace maids are after him.”
B shrugged, as she responded, “Yes. And Roberta was able to take Annie in a sparring contest.”
Balalaika smirked, as she said, “I remember that event. During one of the Lagoon's parties. The look on Annie's face, after she was beaten by Roberta, was priceless.”
B cracked a grin, as she agreed, “That is was. Though, I am still unsure if it was wise, or not, to keep our women in the dark about the writer, and his stories.”
Balalaika admitted, “I can see the benefits and draws back, from both perspectives. Though, it has been a year since their change, they are still getting us to their new... Forms. And it would be unwise to given them any unnecessary, life altering, information, right now.”
Balalaika mentally reflected, 'Besides. A hunt can become boring if there are too many hunters after the fox. And we already have several, as is. Including the rest of Hotel Moscow would only cheapen this hunt even further.'
B said, “I understand your point.”
Balalaika inquired, “Do you think our tickets will hold up?”
B stated, “Yes. Janet said these tickets would hold up. She said that her skills in such areas are as sharp as ever. Including, her eyes for the details. And she better hope so, considering the tickets had made for all the transports heading for Mars, from Babylon Five, within the last week. Though, that is why they are for second class, instead of fire class. First class tickets would cause greater scrutiny.”
B thought, 'And Rock had us all split into pairs, and trios, with each of us teleporting to the women's restroom of one of these transports, with our tickets. And riding those ships to Mars, while we search for the writer. We would all meet up at a specific, very nice, hotel in Mars Dome One, that we were first taken to, a week ago, this reality's time.'
'The plan is that if any of us do find the writer, we are not to confront him, but wait for him to disembark on Mars, and catch him there. Still, the security on this transport is almost non-existent. But, the risks are to great for Balalaika and myself, right now, to risk a fight in such an enclosed, confined space.'
Balalaika said, “Flying second class cannot be helped. What about lack of other identification. Should we be concerned?”
B stated, “No. Their lax security is these reason we do not need identicards to be on this this passenger liner. Just the tickets. They check identification when passengers embark, before they get on the shuttles, disembark at customs. They clearly did not plan for people teleporting onto the ship, from a storage area, with tickets in hand.”
B thought, 'It is interesting how universally it seems that no one puts cameras in their storage closest, because they figure it is too expensive, and unnecessary. Though, even with privacy issues, some security organizations do put cameras in theirs restrooms, in the areas they survey. And besides that reason, the other two reasons we did not teleport to the restrooms is we do not know how small they are. And someone could be inside them. The storage closet was a safer bet.'
Balalaika commented, “A lapse of security on their part, that we will make good use of.”
B stated, “Yes. A serious one. Considering there is teleportation technology in this reality.”
Balalaika asked, “Interesting. So, what is your opinion of the writer's escape plan?”
B answered, “Barring us figuring out where he is heading. His plan is brilliant. This would be the proper time and place to lose someone, in an entire galaxy. Still, now that we know where the writer is heading. We will catch the writer. Also, this is one of the last transports to Mars from Babylon Five. We all took a ship that could lead to Mars. If he is not on this one, he is on another one. And if we do not find him here, we will follow him, and find him on Mars.”
Balalaika agreed, “Yes. We will catch this man. And while it does not surprise me that this man was able to fool Revy and her friends. They were always a little less clever than they believed. Fooling Roberta is another matter, entirely.”
B stated, “Yes. Their arrogance came back to bite them.”
Balalaika asked, “True. Did you have a chance to talk your friends in the Serenity crew, after Revy contacted us?”
B responded, “Yes. I did. I teleported to the casino, and talked with Mal, and Zoe, during the early morning, on the day after Lee left. And I found they were also getting ready to leave no this hunt for the writer. Though, when I finished talking to them, I returned back to you, within five minutes of leaving.”
Balalaika inquired, “Interesting. They could prove useful in this hunt. Did Chang know you visited his new casino?”
B answered, “I do not think Chang was aware that I was even there. Given those two are the ones in charge of security, whom are my friends, I doubt he will be informed.”
Balalaika commented, “It is useful to have such friends. And while Revy did not go into detail, she did say that River was involved. How was that telepath involved in this situation?”
B stated, “From what Mal and Zoe tone of me. River was in on this situation from the very beginning. It seems that River was fooling everyone, by using her male form, to pose as a drifter, and poker player, named Sam. And, as Sam, she befriended Lee. And by all accounts, she actually did become a good friend of his.”
Balalaika thought, 'Sam, and Tam. Even I could have seen that one coming. Though, there were probably other factor in how River presented her fake persona as Sam.' She inquired, “Does Lee know that River and Sam are the same person?”
B said, “Yes. River revealed that she who she really was to Lee. From what I was told, River said that Lee took the news very well. Also, from what Mal and Zoe can guess, River and Lee are still friends. And it is clear that River is completely on Lee's side. And she does not want anything horrible happen to him.”
Balalaika stated, “That is the danger of going undercover. Though, with Chang and the others around, I doubt she will be a factor in this hunt. Chang will not want River to get any further involved, and risk ruining what plans he has for Lee. And given they are a romantic couple, River will respect Chang's wishes. But, others might become involved in this chase. Such as the Lovelace maids have done so. I need to know what happened, when the maid showed up?”
B began, “When they arrived on the island city, it started in a bar...”
Balalaika rolled her eyes for a few seconds, as she spoke up, “Why is it always a bar with those two Venezuelans?” She then looked back at over B.
B stifled a giggle, at her lovers reaction. She calmly said, “I do not know. And yes. They blew up the bar, before they left.”
Balalaika grinned, as she replied, “I admit it. That was going to be my next question. Please, continue.”
B stated, “River and Lee was in the bar at the time. From what I understand, the maids walked into a bar, while Lee, and River, as a man, were playing cards. The maids did not know that it was Lee they were after. Though, Lee immediately recognized them, and he and River gave them the slip.”
Balalaika commented, “That was a wise course of action. Though, with him knowing the maids are after him, it will making him run even faster.”
B said, “I would not want to be captured by the maids.”
Balalaika agreed, “Neither would I. Let us hope we capture him first. And given a choice between surrendering to the maids, and us. He will likely to choose us.”
B inquired, “Perhaps. I wonder. When we have him, what sort of revenge do you have in mind?”
Balalaika coyly answered, “A little of this. A little of that. Though, Revy did mention Chang's offer. And I find it intriguing.”
B replied, “Yes. With the skills Lee has displayed so far, he could be made into a valuable asset.”
Balalaika stated, “Exactly. We will find this Lee. We will put him in his place. And we will then put him to work for us.”
B agreed, “Absolutely. Still, given he is dying of cancer. We do have a time limit of a few months.”
Balalaika said, “You of all people should know what options we have in such cases.”
B responded, “Ah, yes. And it would be fitting for this writer. Still, besides the cancer and the gender change, I did enjoy some of the experiences he wrote about myself.”
Balalaika commented, “Yes. He showed you some of the betters parts of the multiverse.”
B turned to Balalaika, as she said, “I am looking at one of the better parts of the multiverse, right now.”
Balalaika looked over at B, as she smiled. She commented, “We will have to do something, later. And I have to admit that some of the things the writer did, which was towards our benefit. Which is why I am not going to outright break him, and then kill him. Now, onto other matters at hand. It is obvious that you have seen the series that this reality is about?”
B answered, “Yes. Bob and Ed showed it to me years ago. It is actually good. Very political. And most of what Ello said about the other alien species correct.”
Balalaika requested, “Good. So, what can you tell me about the Mars we are heading too?”
B said, “This Mars is in the middle of being terraformed. Presently, a person do not need a pressure suit to go outside. Still, it very cold, so you need plenty of clothing, and you will need an oxygen mask to breath the outside air.”
Balalaika shrugged, as she casually asked, “So, Siberia on a bad day?”
B answered, “Pretty much. To be specific. We are heading towards Mars Dome One. It is a city of two million people. Most of them live in city environment under a very, very large dome, and very large adjacent domes. Mars Dome One is the capital of Mars. Which is currently an independent nation, that separated from the greater Earth Alliance. Very long story on that. The culture is western. And they speak Earth. As long as we avoid entanglements with law enforcement, we should do fine.”
Balalaika commented, “Good. Also, given the situation. We both need to know. Are there any health hazards with traveling in hyperspace?”
B stated, “None that we need to worry about. I checked before we left.”
Balalaika replied, “Thank you. This hunt is starting to concern me. First, Yurick goes AWOL, and now this.”
B said, “We will find our wayward soldier.”
Balalaika commented, “I know. Though, I find it interesting that Yurick's trail lead right to where the writer was hiding.”
B responded, “Maybe it really is the Devil's Hotel.”
Balalaika said, “Let us hope not. Still, I have a feeling this it is more than a consequence.”
B suggested, “Perhaps we should head to that hotel, when we are finished here.”
Balalaika complimented, “That is a wonderful idea. Also, I believe Revy also mentioned that Lee slept with Eda?”
B answered, “Yes. Mal and Zoe both confirmed that Eda did so. But, at the time, she did not know that Lee was the writer. And she was the one to ask him on their date.”
Balalaika questioned, “I wonder what was going through both their minds to end up in such a situation.”
B commented, “For Lee. When a hot blond woman wants to ask a man on a date. Who would say, no? For Eda. From what I understand, Lee is very polite. And for her, it was more a lack of selection. She does not care for hispanics.”
Balalaika asked, “And why is that?”
B answered, “Way back in our time, in Roanapur, I heard a rumor that her lack of attraction towards latin Americans has something to do with a previous assignment, before she even came to Roanapur.”
Balalaika inquired, “Where did you hear that rumor from?”
B answered, “From what I heard, it was a business transactions gone wrong. I get the feeling it was a government job turned sour. Anyway, Eda mentioned this to Revy, on one of the few times she had one to many drinks with Two-Hands. Revy mentioned what Eda said to Dutch. And Dutch mentioned this to me, during a business transaction between him and I. Well, him, at the time.”
Balalaika inquired, “Guy talk?”
B admitted, “Yes.”
Balalaika shrugged, as she replied, “Do not worry about it. It is probably tame compared to some of the stuff that Revy, and her friends, talk about it.”
B hesitantly commented, “While I still sometimes talk to Dutch. I try to avoid getting into such conversations concerning Revy and her friends... Given their personalities, and the rumors of some of their sexual activities... There are somethings a person cannot unlearn.”
Balalaika calmly agreed, “I fully understand. One time, I made the mistake of having girl talk with Revy, over such matters. And I regret that conversation to this very day... There are some things that even I do not have a stomach for, that she does.”
B playfully replied, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Both women light laughed, for a few seconds.
The two lovers then soon calmed down and resumed their conversation.
(_)
In the two seat row behind Balalaika and B, Lee had been listing to Balalaika and B speak.
While, Lee did not know russian, he could tell their emotional states, from the tones of their voices.
And from their tones, both women were in a casual, relaxed frame of mind.
As Lee heard the women calm down, from their light laughter, he thought, 'Well, from their relaxed tones of voices. Along with my precognition telling me everything is okay, for the moment. It looks like things are settling down with those two. And all I got to do is keep my cool for the next two days, and I should be fine.'
'Though, Balalaika and B are trained military veterans. Unlike Revy, and most of her group. They are taught to be patient, and reserved. Yet, as long as I do not speak to them, nor do not approach them, and I stay quiet, I should be fine. So...'
Lee leaned further into his chair, while he lead his head on his seat's headrest.
Lee tipped his black for fedora hat, over his face, as he happily thought, 'Someone cue John Williams to start playing some Indiana Jones, traveling music, because I feel a nap coming on.'
Lee then soon fell asleep in his chair.
(_)
Fortunately, the next two days were uneventful for Lee. He stayed quiet, and he did nothing to draw attention to himself. The inflight meals and drinks were tasty and not bland. Also, he remembered not to show his decks of cards to anyone.
Though, along with speaking to a few others of the passengers and crew, that he met in the cabin. Lee did talk to Balalaika and B a few times. Though, they were the ones that started the conversation, with Lee being polite. And he did not use the term, Ms., once towards Balalaika, nor B. And he did not pull out his playing cards.
In addition, Lee was able to keep the two women from figuring out who he really ways.
Soon, they reached the hyperspace gate to Mars.
(_)
A few minutes after the passenger liner that Lee, B, and Balalaika, had already returned to normal space, in orbit of the planet, Mars, the speaker came on, with the captains voice said, “Passengers. This is your captain speaking. We have reached orbit around Mars. Those of you heading to Mars need to head to the back of the ship, as a shuttle will be by, within five minutes, to pick you up.”
Lee the saw Balalaika and B get up and head towards where the nearby restrooms were.
Lee thought, 'They probably do not have any identification on them. And they are going to the restroom, to use one of their reality devices to just teleport to one of Mars' domes.
'Chances are that it is B that will teleport them, given the possibility that Bob and Ed show her the Babylon Five series. I hope she liked the series. It is a good, epic science fiction story.'
'Also, they are likely heading for Mars Dome One, the same dome I am going to go to, since it is likely near the spaceport. There is not much I can do about that. Still, they clearly do not know who I am. If they did, my precognition would be screaming right now. So, I do not have much to currently worry about, on that matter.'
'The reason I do not just use my reality device to directly teleport to the interior of Mars Dome One, is because they, or Revy's group, my track my reality jump, from here, to the interior of Mars Dome One.'
'And the only reason I am not using my reality device, to jump to another reality, is that I really do want to see Mars, first. And I am not going to let the girls being here spoil my fun.'
As soon as two russian women were out of sight, Lee stood up from his seat.
Lee adjusted his hat. Afterward, he checked to make sure he had his ticket, his temporally identicard, and his credit chit.
Lee then looked up at the hatch to the compartment above his seat. He opened the lid to the compartment, and he pulled out his suitcase with both hands.
As he held his suitcase, with his right hand, by the handle, he let the case drop to the side of the way.
Next, Lee used his left hand to shut the let compartment lid.
Lee turned and entered the aisle. He then started to casually make his way the aisle, towards the back of the room, along with other passengers were walking with him, with their luggage in hand. They were all coming the way they had original entered the passenger cabin, to the back of the room. They would then used the orange arrows, to got them for the docking hatch.
Though, Lee soon found himself in the zero gravity section of the ship. Though, he did not have much trouble, as he made his way to the docking area.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee was on the shuttle that would take him to down to the spaceport, on the surface of Mars. Lee found his ability to handle zero gravity had gotten a little better. He placed his suitcase in the passenger compartment above his seat.
Next, Lee seated himself into a seat, on the right side of the passenger cabin, by a window.
After which, Lee strapped himself in.
Soon after, everyone that was going to Mars, was on the shuttle, and the shuttle hatch and transport hatches close.
A minute later, the pilot came on the speakers of the passenger cabin. The pilot, “This is your pilot. We will be heading for Mars momentarily. Please, strap yourself in, and enjoy the ride.”
Lee felt the momentum of the ships engines starting as they headed to the surface of Mars.
Lee then check his wrist watch, to time how long it would take to reach the surface of Mars.
(_)
As they got closer to Mars, Lee could see Mars, from the windows in the cabin.
Lee looked at the Martian surface from space, that was outside his window. He though, 'It truly is a lovely sight. Maybe I will someday see Earth's surface like this.'
(_)
The shuttle ride down to Mars Spaceport was uneventful, though a bit bumpy.
After they exited re-entry, Lee saw that it was daytime, as them pass by Martian mountain ranges and valleys, until they approached the large, domed cities that comprised most of the human settlements on Mars.
Lee was amazed what he saw, though the windows around him, especially, the window he was sitting beside, to his right side. And since he did not recognized anyone around him. He allowed himself this brief moment to openly show job and wonder, on his face, that he truly, emotionally felt, at that time, on the inside.
(_)
As they landed, Lee check his wrist watch. He found that it was close to an hour after boarding the shuttle, when said shuttle had landed at the spaceport, on Mars.
A minute later, the pressurized spaceport gate attached to the hatch of the shuttle.
The pilot said, “We have now docked with Mars spaceport. We hope you enjoyed your trip, and have a nice day.”
Lee then unstrapped himself, and got up, with the rest of the passengers.
As Lee found his footing, he then opened the compartment hatch above him, and pulled out his suitcase.
A few seconds later, Lee had closed the hatch, as he held his small suitcase, by its handle, with his right hand.
Lee then filed in line, down the aisle, with the rest of the passengers, as they slowly made their way off the shuttle and into the spaceport, where they were immediately be heading for the customs area.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee made it pass the hatch, and long, hundred yard hallway, that attached to the other end of the spaceport gate, as he walked into the main area of the spaceport.
Lee saw that there were a few customs booths. Lee got in line with the booth that his precognition told him with be fine in.
Lee then patiently waited, as he slowly made his way in line to the customs booth.
Though, Lee looked around himself.
While from the windows on the shuttle, and the windows looking outside, in the spaceport, showed daylight, from the Sol, Lee was not sure what time it was, until he saw a digital clock on a nearby wall. The digital clock, with the large red, rectangular, LED readout showed that it was ten five AM in the morning.
Lee looked looked at wrist watch. His watch stated that it eight thirty-seven AM.
Lee calmly thought, 'Well, at least it is morning here. And it looks like jet-lag is not going to be that big of an issue for me. A few hours ago, I woke up, and I slept okay in my chair, for a fourth time in a row. And the breakfast they served on the passenger liner, an hour after I got up, was pretty good. And even the bathrooms were clean and well stock with tiolet paper, liquid soap, and paper towels. So, I am fine for the moment.'
'As such, all I have to worry about is getting passed customs, and I am home free.'
'Still, it is best I set my watch to local time.'
Lee then set his suitcase on the carpeted floor, just long enough to set his digital watch. He then quickly picked up his suitcase, with his right hand, by its handle.
A few minutes later, Lee finally made his way up to the front of the line, of the clear plastic booth with the customs official behind it.
When Lee reached the front, he calmly walked up to the booth with customs officer, the handled the officer his identicard, through the small window and counter, in the middle of the booth.
After the custom's officer used his identicard reader to clear Lee's card. As he handed it back to Lee, he said, “I hope you had a safe trip, Mister Gray.”
As Lee took the identicard, and pocketed it, he replied, “It was pleasant.”
He then asked, “That is good to hear. So, are you here for business, or pleasure.”
Lee answered, “Pleasure.”
The officer inquired, “Do you have nothing to declare, Mister Gray?”
Lee stated, “No sir. Just passing through.”
The officer stated, “Scans shows a device in you coat pocket. Could I see it?”
Lee thought, 'I have a lie ready for just this situation.'
Lee set down his suitcase, on the carpeted floor. He then pulled out his reality device, with his right hand, as he lied, “This is just as old TV remote passed own in my family. A good luck charm. Scan it to your heart's content. It is made from common materials, and is completely man-made.”
As Lee set the device on the small counter, he kept his right hand on the device.
Lee thought, 'Given how close we are to each other, if this officer activities it, I will be pulled along for the ride. So, there is little risk.'
The officer pulled out a small scanning device, and scanned it.
A few seconds later, the officer looked up at Lee, as he said, “Thank you, Mister Gray. It seems you are correct. Our scanners sometimes pick up false positives.”
Lee picked up and pocketed his reality device, back into his interior coat pocket. He said, “No problem. You know how it is. A long way from home. You want to keep a memento of where you are from, so you don't get homesick.”
The officer agreed, “Exactly. You may pass now.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Lee picked up his suitcase with his right hand, he then turned and left through the line that let out of the customs, and into the large passenger area of the spaceport.
A minute later, as Lee made it to passengers area. He then found a map on one of the walls of the spaceport.
Lee saw that the was in english.
As Lee read the map, he thought, 'Fortunately, one of Earth Alliances', and by default, Mars' main languages, is english. Which makes things easier for me. Now, where is the tram to Mars Dome One at?... Ah there it is... And here I am... No problem.'
With Lee's suitcase hanging by its handle, with his right hand, Lee then turned and started walking towards the passenger transport tube station.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee reached the section of the spaceport, where the passenger transport tubes, that would take him to Mars Dome One, were located. Lee then had to wait about ten minutes to for the next tram to come. He found that trams between the spaceport and Mars Dome One were free, and part of the spaceport system.
When the chain of shuttles, in the tube, came to a stop in front of Lee, and other people. The doors to the shuttles opened, and those present entered the various shuttles in on the transport tube.
The passenger tube shuttle was like a small subway car, with a few other people inside it.
After Lee sat down in one of cushioned seats, he sit his suitcase on the floor, by him.
Lee also noticed a few other people had entered the shuttle he was on, and they had seated themselves.
Lee noticed that no one was strapping themselves in. So, he did not do so, either.
A few seconds later, the doors to the shuttles closed, and the passenger tube shuttle began moving.
Though, the slow build of speed was not that noticeable, and there were no bumps, as Lee and the other people rode inside the shuttle.
As they exited the spaceport, in the transport tube, the windows allowed for Lee to see the red Martian soil. He just stared at the window, for a few seconds.
Then, someone beside him, to his right side, commented, “First time on Mars?”
Lee looked over to see an older, bearded man, in a suit, beside Lee, with his face turned towards Lee.
Lee said, “Yea. It is my first time here.”
The man asked, “So, what brings you to Mars?”
Lee honestly answered, “Just passing through. Though, I always wanted to come to Mars, since I was a child. And now I have the chance to spend some time here, before I have to leave.”
The man said, “I hope you enjoy your stay.”
Lee replied, “I hope so, too. So, did you live on Mars?”
The man answered, “Yes.”
Lee said, “Well, it is nice to meet you.”
The man replied, “Likewise.”
Lee then turned back to look out the window, to the outside, red plains, and the mountains in the distance.
(_)
A few minutes later, the passenger transport tube Lee was on, entered Mars Dome One, with the transport coming to a stop, with the doors to the tram opening.
Lee got up, picked up his suitcase with his right hand, and then walked out of the passenger shuttle.
Lee then calmly made his way out of the transport tube station, and into the greater outside interior of large dome that comprised most of Mars Dome One. The capital of the human nation of the planet Mars, in the Babylon Five reality.
As Lee looked around, outside, on the sidewalk, by a five lane highway, inside the dome, he noticed that the sunlight was bright enough to warrant wearing shades.
While Lee held his suitcase with his right hand, he used his left hand, to reach into the right interior pocket of his coat. He pulled out his sunglasses, and used just his left hand to put the shade on over his eyes. As the sunglasses went over his eyes, the shades shielded his eyes from the daylight.
He then looked up at the interior upper walls of the dome. He saw was a mix of artificial light, from the dome ceiling lights, and real sunlight, coming in through the transparent panels in the dome.
Lee then took notice of his surroundings of the cityscape, including a few cars passing by him. He thought, 'The artificial weather in Mars Dome One is cool, and comfortable for wearing this suit. But, it was not cold.'
'And Mars Dome One looks like a modern city under glass. I think this dome is way bigger than all the domes within Paradigm City, in the Big O anime series, put together.'
'The entire city is literally under a dome. With skyscraper buildings not even approaching half the maximum height of the dome. Also, there are trees, streets, cars, and other vehicles here.'
'In addition, the dome stretches as far as I can see, in almost every direction, except the transport tube station behind me.'
Lee chuckled to himself, as he continued his thoughts, 'It is going to be fun spending time here. I think I will stick to my plan of spending the night here, and then leave tomorrow. Though, I have to keep an eye out for the girls, as I try to hide from them. That should not be too hard. And given the western style culture and people here, whom speak english. I should blend in well, as long as I don't let my southern accent slip.'
'Also, I guess sense this is a western culture, that the cars and other vehicles, drive on the right side of the road, like in the U.S. and Mexico.'
'That being said. I will not allow the girls to ruin my fun, while I am here. The reason I came here was for fun, and to escape the girls. While, the escape plan is in risk, for the moment. I can still have a little fun, before moving on, to another reality, in search of a cure for my cancer, while I continue to lose the girls, and anyone else they have asked for help from. Such as Balalaika, and B.'
Lee then turned to his left, and walked down the sidewalk, away from the transport tube station.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee had turned to his right, at a crosswalk, with traffic lights, and electronic pedestrian signs. Lee safely passed across the five land highway, to the sidewalk on the other side.
Lee then continued walking up up few blocks, to where he reached another crosswalk. He then turned left, and walked along the sidewalk of a street. Where a two land street was to his left side, as he made his way away from the spaceport.
As Lee walked, he noticed that some cars and other vehicles passed by him on the road.
Lee thought, 'The vehicles here look similar to the cars and trucks of my reality and time. Though, I need to keep in mind their engines do not use gasoline. I am not sure what they use... Maybe some sort of battery gel... Who knows?... It does not matter.'
Lee then faced forwards, as he walked.
A minute later, from the corner of his left eye, across the street, Lee saw Revy and Rock walking along a sidewalk, opposite to his sidewalk.
They were also coming from the direction he was heading. They were dressed in their usual clothing, though River had on a blue denim jacket over her chest and arms, to hide her semi-automatic pistols, which were in their shoulder holsters, under her armpits.
Lee forced himself to continue calmly walking, like everything was normal, as he did not turn his head to face them.
Lee thought, 'They clearly haven't notice me. I just need to keep walking and I will be fine. And given the size of this city, once I lose them, I doubt I will run across any of the girls, again. At least not in this city.'
Half a minute later, Lee was proven correct, as he continued walking, and they did not notice him. He then turned a corner, to his right side, and he was soon gone from their sight.
A few seconds later, after he was sure he was out of their sight, Lee continued walking, as he thought, 'Now, to find a decent hotel. And I need to remember that I am on a budget. At least, from what Officer Lars toll me, I should have enough money on my credit chit for a night at a hotel, and a few meals. And tomorrow, I will head to an isolated spot, on the edge of town, and use my reality device to head for my next planned destination... There is more than one way I can lose the girls. And there are some places that they are not crazy enough to go to, that I am looking forward to going to.'
'Now, back finding a hotel. I am sure if I am polite, the locals will suggest a decently, moderately priced hotel that I can stay at.'
Lee then continued to make his way down the sidewalk, in search of lodgings.
(_)
An hour after entering Mars Dome One, Lee was able to find a cheap, decent hotel, to spend the night at. He found this place, by politely asking locals around the shops, in the area.
He was told that the hotel was located on the outer part of town, a mile and a half from the spaceport.
Lee used the directions he was told, to reach the hotel. When Lee reached the entrance of the hotel, he looked up at the five story, hotel building, and sign on the outside of the hotel.
Lee thought, 'Travelers Inn Hotel. That is a fitting name for one in my situation. Still, this place looks like a modern hotel. As long as the price is right, and the suite is clean, I will be happy.'
Lee then walked to the entrance of the building. A few seconds later, he opened one of the double doors with his left hand, as he made his way into the hotel.
As he closed the door behind him, he found himself inside a small lobby. He stood in place, as he looked around. He saw the check in desk only twenty feet from him. He also noticed a few chairs, and couch. Along with a TV by a wall, with IGN news on it.
Also, on the far end of the lobby, were two elevators, side by side.
Lee glanced at the TV. While the TV was muted, he saw that from the pictures of the Babylon Five station on screen, it look like they were doing a story on the planned destruction of Babylon Five.
Lee thought, 'Personally, I thought they should have just sold that space station to someone. But, waste, always does seem to be the motto of any government.'
Lee then turned back to face the check in deck.
As Lee walked up to the check in desk, he saw that a human man was standing behind the desk. He was dress in a hotel uniform. And Lee guessed he was the clerk.
While Lee silently stood in front check in desk, the man looked at Lee, from across the counter. The clerk politely requested, in english, “May I please see your identicard?”
Lee thought, 'It figures that they would ask for is ID. I doubt, given their T&A, along with their gold, that whatever hotel that Rock and Revy picked for the girls, will not only be nice, but they will not ask for identification, and take gold as payment. Still, this is a small matter for myself.'
Lee said, “Sure. Just a moment.”
Lee set down his suitcase, onto the tiled floor, as he pulled out his identicard.
Lee handed it to the man, whom scanned it into his computer, and then returned the card back to Lee.
Lee pocketed his identicard.
Meanwhile, the clerk looked at his computer monitor, that was beside the front desk, on lower, secondary shelf.
The clerk looked up from his computer monitor, and towards Lee. He said, “Greetings, Mister Gray. I am Jim.”
Lee looked into Jim's eyes, as he responded, “Hello Jim.”
Jim inquired, “So, what can I do for you, today?”
Lee answered, “I am looking for a one bedroom suite, for one night. Nothing special. Just a place to sleep, and get cleaned up. How much would that be?”
Jim stated, “That will be fifty credits.”
Lee thought, 'I believe I still have two hundred credits on my credit chit. So, fifty credits as payment should do be fine. But, I probably need to see if I can find a temporary job for the night. To make a few extra credits. And I know just the job that I would like to do, while here.'
Lee said, “That will be fine. I will be checking into hotel, then. By the way, are there any local bars looking a skilled piano player?”
Jim answered, “Now, that you mention it. Yes. I do know of one. But, you are going to have to prove yourself to him.”
Lee responded, “That will not be a problem. So, how do I get there? And who do I speak to, when I get there.”
Jim explained, “Walk outside the front entrance, here. Take a left. Walked three blocks. Then, take a right. You will see a sign that says, The Deco. Don't let the fact the bar is on the edge of the dome fool you. It is a very upscale bar, with classic american blues, and other forms of relaxing styles of music from the era of the early to mid-twentieth century. And while you have the suit for it, I suggest you get a shave before you head over there.”
Lee didn't bother to check the stubble on his face, as he stated, “I agree. I plan to do so, right after I get to my room.” He mentally added, 'Along with a shower.'
Jim responded, “Good. Anyway, while this early in the day, they are not yet open for customers, the front door should be unlocked. So, you can walk inside and talk to the management and staff about a gig. When you walked inside, ask for the owner and manger, Ryan. And tell Ryan, that Jim sent you.”
Lee said, “Thank you, Jim.”
Jim inquired, “No problem. Now, to handle the paperwork and payment in getting you are suite. Is there any particular floor that you would care for?”
Lee answered, “No.”
Jim smiled, as he said, “Good. It makes my job easier. I think I will put you on the second floor.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee used his credit chit to pay for the night, and he did some moderate paperwork. Which he mostly lied about. He received his key card for his hotel suite, as he check in for the night.
Fortunately, with the identicard and credit chit, Lee only needed to sign his signature to a liability contract for his suite, while he was staying in it.
That was fine with Lee.
A couple of minutes later, after taking a modern looking elevator up to the second floor, Lee soon made it to his suite.
After he used the key card in his left hand to open the door, he stepped into the dark room.
After pocketing his key card, he used the light from the hallway, to find the ceiling lights switch on the inside of the door.
A second later, he found the switch, and turned on the ceiling lights.
He walked further into the bedroom of suite, as he gently shut the door behind him. The door automatically locked as it closed.
While Lee looked around, in both the bedroom, and both room areas, he saw that his suite was much like his hotel suite at the Devil's Hotel. Only the TV and furniture style was just a touch more futuristic.
Though, the furniture was reversed. With the bed, and bathroom entrance, to his right side, and the chest of drawers to his left side. And the door swung to the left instead of the right.
Lee then walked over to his bed, and set his suitcase on top of it. Lee then sat beside his suitcase, on his bed.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Well, I made to Mars... Now what?... Besides checking out that job, at the Deco, and avoiding the girls, I have no plans while I am here. Yet, I always wanted to come to Mars.'
'It is like the old Total Recall joke. I came to Mars as myself. And I don't know what to do with myself.'
'I can now go anywhere, and any time, in the multiverse, and I don't have a clue of where I would really like to go, once I get there.'
'Still, if I stay here long enough, I am going to stir up the wrong kind of trouble.'
'Oh well. If I get the job. I will ask my new coworkers where some of decent places to visit are. I will visit them and move on. Now, that is a plan. All I have to do, is get ready and head to Deco bar, to see if I can get a job for a night, or two.'
Lee used his right hand to rubbed the stubble on his face, as he continued his thought, 'Though, Jim is right. I do need a shave. And I also need a shower. Though, except for the t-shirt, underwear, and socks, my black suit is pretty much clean. I make sure not to get food, nor drink on it, while traveling, and I have not sweated much in the last two days. A shower and some deodorant will take care of the rest.'
'I really do not want to pull out my gray suit, because the girls have seen it. They have not seen my black suit. That is probably why Rock and Revy did not recognize me near the spaceport.'
'Now, to get ready. And I need to keep in mind to remember to put back on my ring necklace, and wrist watch, when I get dressed.'
Lee turned to his side, to face the suitcase.
He turned the suitcase around to face him. Next, he opened the case, to get the items he needed. Such as a razor, and a comb. He then closed and latched his suitcase.
He then got up, and took the items he pulled out to the bathroom.
When he reached the bathroom, he turned on the light in it, and set the items on the sink.
He leaned down, untied his black shoes, and pulled his feet out of his shoes.
Next, Lee gently took off his clothing, and other items, one piece at a time.
He then set each piece of clothing, on the bed, so the clothing would not wrinkle.
When he was in his t-shirt, underwear, and socks, headed his bathroom, and shut the door behind himself.
(_)
Half an hour later, Lee finished shaving, and showering, among other things.
As he combed his hair, he noticed that his roots were not yet showing. And his hair still looked black from the dye job he had paid for.
After he dried off, he went to his suitcase, and pulled out a fresh white t-shirt, underwear, and socks. After he had the items he needed, he closed and latched the suitcase back up.
He put his dirty clothing in a small pile, a corner of the room, by his bed.
He then put back on his ring necklace, which he had set on the bed, by his suitcase and wrist watch. Next, he dressed himself back in his fresh t-shirt, underwear, and socks. With those items on, he put on his black suit, and red tie. When he finished putting on his suit, he leaned down, put his black dress shoes on, tied them up.
After leaning back up, he put on his digital watch. He then check himself in the bedroom mirror. Once he was finished, and he felt he looked alright. He walked over to one of the cushioned armchairs, by his bed.
He sat in the chair, as he just enjoyed the silence, while he let himself relax a little.
About fifteen minutes later, Lee thought, 'I might as well get this ball rolling.'
Lee got up, and he checked his pockets to make sure none of the items that had been in his suit had fallen out onto the floor.
Lee soon accounted for his reality device, decks of cards, lighter, identifcard, and credit chit. Among other items. He also found his ticket, which he threw away in the trash can in the hotel bedroom.
He then went to his bed and put on his sunglasses and black fedora hat.
As he headed for the hallway door to his suite, he left his suitcase closed, and on top of the bed.
He then turned off the lights to both the bathroom, and the bedroom, as he turned the latch on the door, and opened it.
Finally, he entered the hallway, while shutting the door behind him.
Lee headed to elevator.
Once he made it down to the bottom floor, and the lobby, he soon exit the hotel, and headed for the Deco bar.
(_)
About thirty minutes later, Lee made it to the Deco bar.
The sign in front simply said, Deco.
As Lee looked at the outside exterior of the building. The building had a nineteen twenties, art deco motif.
Lee thought, 'Interesting choice of design. I wonder what the place looks like on the inside?'
Lee then walked up to the black glass door, and pulled on it. He found that it was unlocked. He open the door and entered the bar.
As Lee walked into the bar, he gently closed the door behind him.
While he looked around, he found the art deco motif continued inside, along with some blues music and singing, being performed on the stage in back.
The volume of the music on the speakers in the bar was noticeable, but not loud.
The color setting of the room and furniture were black and white. The floor was checker board pattern of large black and white tiles. The walls were white. The high ceiling was black.
There were also black ceiling fans hanging from the ceiling, while still several feet higher than the patrons' heads. The fans had chandelier, blub lights attached to the bottom, below the fans.
The bar room itself was a long rectangular room.
To Lee right side was a long, black bar counter, with black wooden stools placed along the outside side of the counter. There were shelves of alcoholic bottles lining the wall behind the bar counter. The bar counter ran up about six feet from the stage in back. To the left of the front three quarters of the bar counter was tables, of various sizes, in a staggered pattern.
There were chairs set around the tables. The number of chairs around each table, depended on the size of each table.
Behind the tables, was a dance area. Behind the dance area was a black wooden stage, which red curtains currently drawn back to the sides of the stage. The stage floor was a gentle crescent curve shape, with the apex of the curve, coming closest to the audience, was the middle of the stage.
To Lee left side, across from the bar, he saw two doors, with signs that shows that one door lead to the men's restroom, and the other door lead to the women's restroom.
Lee thought, with mild astonishment, 'This is a real stylish place.'
Lee also saw a handful of people in the room. All of them were human.
There was the bartender, behind the bar counter. The bartender was a human man whom appeared to be in his mid-thirties.
And on stage was the band, and singer.
The band were located on side of the stage to Lee's left. They were sitting down, in a group, playing their instruments. The band itself was composed with five men in their twenties. They were sitting with three in one row, and two in front of the three person row.
In the back row, there was a trombone player, saxophone player, and a guitar player. In the front row was a trumpet player, and a clarinet player.
The singer was a woman in her twenties, in the front center of the stage. She had a small ear piece over her right ear, that was likely her microphone. She swayed as she sang the song.
All the band members, and singer were in their casual clothing, of pants and shirts.
Lee thought, 'Their performance was on key and enjoyable to listen to. This is good.'
Lee then noticed, on the right side of the stage, a wooden, black varnished piano and bench, that were facing away from the audience. And there was no one playing at it.
Lee mentally wondered, 'Maybe the last piano player did not like not facing the audience. Well, let's get this over with.'
Lee then walked to the bar counter, where the bartender was standing behind counter.
As Lee approached the bar counter, the bartender noticed him. He said, to Lee, in english, “I am sorry, sir. But, we are close right now.”
Lee came to a stop in front of the counter, across from the bartender. He looked at the man, as he calmly said, “I know. Jim sent me to see Ryan about a possible piano playing job.”
The bartender said, “Really? Well, we do need a piano player, and we have yet to find one that can they style of music that we prefer.”
Lee honestly stated, “I spend years learning to perform music, such as jazz and blues.”
The bartender commented, “Well, the owner does not hire just anyone.”
Lee responded, “All I am asking for is an audition. If you boss don't like my performance, I will just move on, and find another place to perform.”
The bartender inquired, “You sound like you have experience performing for an audience?”
Lee coyly replied, “You could say, that at one point, I was the life of the party, where I came from.”
The bartender shrugged, as he said, “Alright. I will go get the owner. I should only take a minute, or two, to find him, and get him to come out here.”
Lee remained silent, as he watched as the bartender casually walk towards the back of the bar. Lee then noticed the bartender open a white door, beside the stage, at a ninety degree angle from the stage, a few feet from where the bar counter end.
Lee thought, 'That must be the door to the backstage. Now, to just patiently wait for the owner to show up. At least I can enjoy the good music while, I wait.'
(_)
A minute later, Lee watched as a human man in his forties exit the backstage door, and walk towards him, with the bartender right behind him.
The bartender turned to walked behind the bar counter, towards Lee, while owner walked along the outside end of the bar counter.
As both men can to a stop near Lee, the bartender stated, “This is the man who said that Jim sent him here.”
The owner looked at Lee, as he casually asked, in english, “What is you name, sir?”
Lee let his southern accent slip through, as he, calmly answered, “Ello Gray, sir.”
The owner stated, “You can call me, Ryan.”
Lee said, “It is nice to meet you, Ryan.”
Ryan asked, “So. Tell me what you can do?”
Lee answered, “I know a number of classic blues and jazz music pieces. And I can read sheet music.”
Ryan inquired, “That is a start. Now, how long do you want to work here?”
Lee said, “A night, or two. That will give both, you time to find a more permanent replacement, and for me to a little traveling money.”
Ryan replied, “I can tell by your accent that you are not from here.”
Lee said, “You are correct. Just passing through. I am from the Deep South. Dixie. The southeastern part of what was once the United States. Though, I would like to keep that on the down low while on Mars. Not many people her like those from Earth, right now.” He mentally reflected, 'Plus, if the girls hear that a piano player from the Deep South, it will pretty blow my cover.'
Ryan thought, 'That is region where blues and jazz was invented.' He said, “That is understandable. Alright. I will give you a shot. Let's see if you can impress me.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he replied, “With pleasure. So, what is the band's name.”
Ryan answered, “The Martian Blues.”
It took much of Lee's control to maintain a straight face, as he stated, “That is a fine name. Though, let's wait for them to finish their rehearses, before you see what I can do.”
Ryan complimented, “I admire a patient man. They started an hour ago. From the song they are playing, I would say they would be about ready to break in about ten minutes.”
Lee said, “Good. That will give me time to get a feel for the band and singer.”
Ryan thought, 'That is the right attitude to have.'
Both men turned towards the stage, as they listened to the music the band was playing.
Meanwhile, the bartender, turned back to doing his work behind the bar counter.
(_)
Close to ten minutes later later, the band and singer finished their song, until they would take their break.
As the music concluded, Ryan started walking over to the stage, with Lee right behind him.
When they came to a stop, with Lee standing to Ryan's right side, in front of the stage.
Ryan looked up at the Martian Blue band, as he stated, “The man beside me is here is to audition for role of the pianist.”
Lee looked a the band, and singer, as he said, in a polite tone of voice, “I do not mean to intrude on your performance. And all of you did a good job with your performance.”
Lee could see the all the band members cracking a smile, as the young beautiful human woman, whom was singer, kindly said, in english, “No problem. And thank you. Also, I want to see what you can do.”
Lee turned to Ryan. He saw Ryan looked back at him.
Ryan said, “Go ahead.”
Lee looked around the stage, and he saw no steps. He then looked over at Ryan, as he commented, “I take it the way to get on stage, is from the back?”
Ryan answered, “Yes. To into the side door by the bar, immediately take a left, you will see some step. Right after the steps, to your left is the door to the stage.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then walked over to the door, by the bar counter, he turned the knob. He opened it, and walked through, with him gently closing the door behind him.
A few seconds later, the others then watch as Lee entered the stage, from the door on the right wall, on the back of the stage.
Next, Lee walked around the piano, to the piano bench.
A few seconds later, he sat down on the bench, as he faced the piano keys.
While Lee faced the piano keys, his back was to turned to the room, as he faced the wall on the back of the stage.
Lee turned to his left, to look at Ryan, whom was standing on the floor, in front of the stage. He casually stated, “I know a number of pieces of music. And as I said, I can read sheet music. That being said, let me show you some soul.”
Lee looked over to his left, on the stage, where the band was seated, and the singer was standing. He commented, “If you know the song, please join in. Also, keep in mind, I did not come here to be the singer, but you cannot show some soul without some song.”
Lee then turned back to the piano keys, and he began playing a song from heart, without missing a key.
The band members, knowing their craft, and classic music, immediately recognized the song, as they all joined in, with their instruments, without missing a beat.
After a few more beats, Lee started singing, on key, the first lyrics to the song, 'Rockin Pneumonia and the Boogie Woogie Flu', which best known to be song by Johnny Rivers.
Ryan silently watched the performance. He noted the piano player also sung very well, and on key. He then looked around and saw that both his singer, and the bartender were swaying with the song.
Ryan turned to Lee, as he smiled.
Just over three and a half minutes later, Lee reached the end of the song.
Lee then turned back to face Ryan. Lee cracked a grin, as he inquired, “So?... What do you think?”
Ryan thought, 'The look. The accent. The skill. He is like a classic twentieth century jazz and blues musician, who just time traveled, and walked right into my bar. And his performance with the band shows that he has chemistry with them.'
Ryan stated, “You're hired. I just need to see you identicard.”
Lee said, “That will not be a problem. And thank you.”
Ryan replied, “You are welcome. I will meet you in back. Then, you can follow me to my office.”
Lee then walked to the back stage door, as Ryan entered the backstage, by the door, near the bar counter.
Lee then met Ryan in back, and he followed Ryan to Ryan's office.
After they sorted out their paperwork, which including them agreeing that Lee would be paid between a hundred and fifty credits, to two hundred and fifty credits, per nightly performance. Depending on how well his performance was. Lee agreed to that.
Lee then returned to the stage, to rehearse with the band and singer. So, he could learn their set, and what songs they would play.
Which, Lee found he either knew by heart, or the sheet music they provided was easy enough he could play his part of the songs without a problem.
And so, Lee began to prepare for his job, as a blues and jazz pianist, for the coming evening, in the Deco.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 04: “The Rat Maze.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Babylon Five Reality. Date, January Twenty-Eighth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Location, Babylon Five Station, crew quarters in Blue Sector. Time, one hour after Lee accepted the job at the Deco bar on Mars.
Inside, Zack Allen's quarters, Zack Allen had just gotten ready for bed.
As Zack laid down in bed, he thought, 'Well, it was nice to speak to John, one last time. I hope the best for him, wherever he ends up. Now, I have to help plan the decommissioning ceremony... Might as well keep it low key... It is a funeral after all, for the station itself...' He continued his thoughts, with a bit of bitterness lacing his mood, 'A navigation hazard... Yea, right.'
Zack look up at the ceiling, as he continued his thought, 'This old girl deserves better.'
'I am with Garibaldi. They should just sold this old girl. Hell, Garibaldi offered to pay for the station, himself. And I know he had the money. His wife gave him her blessing, and her practically handed him her company checkbook. The station would have been in good hands... But, no...'
'Being in Earth Force may mean I cannot voice my opinion. But, it does not mean I cannot have an opinion.'
Zack then used the light switch, by he bed, to turn off the lights to his quarters, as he went to sleep.
While shrouded in darkness, in the corner of Zack's bedroom room, behind a chair, a slender, black hair asian woman, wearing a white jacket, over a red qipao.
The women quietly stood up. She then silently turned to look at her sleeping prey.
(_)
Location, Earth, Geneva, Switzerland. Time, Two hours after Zack went to bed.
It was the middle of the afternoon, in Geneva, as Earth Force General Susan Ivonava was sitting in her cushions office chair, behind her desk. She had just began to take a five minute break.
Ivonava turned her chair to look out one of her office windows, as she contemplated her future plans for her life.
As Ivonava leaned back in her chair, while looking out the nearby window, at the sky and courtyard by the building she was in, she thought, 'Well, I just got back from the planet Minbar. And I probably should start the paperwork on my resignation. Delenn's offer to be the Anla'Shok Na. Ranger One. Leader of the Rangers. Is too tempting to pass up.'
'I think I will make my last official act as General be as the Earth representative to Babylon Five's decommissioning... Damn. I do not think they should destroy the station. Or, at the very least, come up with a better reason than the station being a navigation hazard. In space, that just doesn't make sense.'
'Still, I am not that long for this life, either. And I am going to end up spending the rest of my days as Ranger One. That is not a bad ending to a good life of service. But, always service to someone else.'
'I just wish my love life was not such a wreck. Getting over Talia was hard. But, losing Marcus was even harder. I do not think I could survive a third hit like that.'
'In that final battle, I really, really should have claimed that God sent me. I was really tempting fate. I was severally injured. And Marcus had to all but sacrifice his life to save me. At least, we got him in to a cryo-tube, before he completely died. And his vitals have been stable, ever since then.'
'Yet, it is like sleeping beauty, only reversed. With the prince sleeping, and not the princess. And no single kiss is going to wake up my prince. Still, I will do everything in my power to bring him back... Even he is finally awoke long after I die...'
'And at least he now is safe on Minbar.'
'I guess I need to go back to work. And in all honesty, I thought being an Earth Force General would be more fun. Who knew that giving orders from the top can be as demanding as taking orders from the top?'
Ivonava then turned her chair back to face the back of her desk, as she went back to work on her electronic paperwork.
(_)
At that moment, outside, Ivonava's office, in the hallway, there were two women, in gray janitorial uniforms, complete with gray baseball hats on their heads. The two women were approaching the double-doors to Ivonava's office.
One of the women was also pushing a cleaning cart.
There was a guard posted at Ivonava's door. And he saw that, the woman pushing the cleaning cart was approaching him.
As the two women got closer, the guard saw that one of the women was a redheaded asian with tanned skin. The other women, who was pushing the cleaning cart, was a petite, black haired pale skinned woman.
(_)
Location, Minbar, homeworld of alien species, Minbari. Time, an hour after the two women approached General Susan Ivonava's office.
Inside a long term cryo-suspension facility, on the tenth floor of the building, Arcee took silent steps towards her intended target.
Luckily, as the Hell Saber member, Arcee walked through the rows of large cryo-stasis tubes, she found that the ceiling was just high enough to let her walk with leaning over.
While continuing her search, Arcee thought, 'The computer security in this place is a joke. It took me less than a minute to hack the computers. Turn off the alarms, and loop the video and audio system. Without anyone else being the wiser.'
'And it is fortunate for Delenn, her son, and the rest of the Minbari. Specifically, the more skilled, and badass members of the Warrior and Religious Castes. That Chang only wants pure humans. Or, we would have gone after them as well. And the only reason we are not going after John Sheridan is that we do not want to upset the First Ones of this reality. Especially, Lorien, whose age makes even me look like a child in comparison.'
'Speaking of which. For a human made series, I found the Babylon Five series, which Chang gave me copies of, to be very good. The pilot episode, the first four seasons, and the finale episode, were very well put together. The rest... Were watchable.'
'Now, to do my job. Which should be easy enough. The target's location is listed in the computer. And each of these cryo-tubes are listed as to have an emergency forty-eight human hour, dual battery system, in case power was cut off. Also, they are designed to be mobile.'
A minute later, Arcee found her target.
Arcee came to a stop facing the cryo-stasis tube listed as having the human man, Marcus Cole, inside it. Whom was barely clinging to life, in a near-death state. But, his vitals, though low, were stable.
Arcee hacked the cryp-stasis tube, to check to make sure the battery systems were functioning, and that the tube was worthy of transport.
As she confirmed both points, she thought, 'Look on the bright side Marcus. You will be with Ivonava, soon.'
Arcee then spent the next few minutes, unhooking the cryo-stasis tube.
As she picked up the tube, she thought, 'I will admit, I am the only one on my team that can do the heavy lifting, and transport on this machine, without risk of damaging it.'
After she had detached and picked up the cryo-stasis tube, she then walked a few steps, and she gently set the cryo-tube down, on its side, on the floor, away from the other cryo-tubes.
Arcee then used her built in reality device to teleport both herself, and the cryo-tube with Marcus Cole, back to Chang's Tower, in the Black Lagoon Reality.
(_)
On Mars Dome One, right before sunset, in the early evening, on the day that Lee arrived on Mars, a lone women, wearing casual clothing, stood inside a room, on the top floor, of the nearest skyscraper she could find that was closest to her target's location. Which was still miles from her target's main headquarters, Edgars Industries.
The room was empty, and the room had clearly not been used for a while. Though, the building itself was not empty.
Still, all Roberta had to do, to avoid being noticed, was to use her reality device to come and go, as she needed too.
Presently, Roberta was sitting in the middle of the room, in a chair, in front of a desk, as she faced the windows overlooking the tall buildings that composed the complex of Edgars Industries headquarters.
She did not stand by the windows, because she was concern she could be spotted.
As the Hell Saber Roberta at in her her chair, on her desk was a telescopic set of binoculars that were placed on the desk with a tripod, to allow Roberta to get a better look with her eyes, at the buildings, where her target was somewhere inside of.
Though, as was looked in the distance, she realized the place she was casing for her team was a the literal fortress.
While, the windows were tinted, to prevent people from seeing into the building, from the outside. Roberta took no chance. And she did not go near the windows, because, someone could use infrared, or other types of optics, to look into the building.
And given how cagey, and cunning, her target was reported to be. She had no doubt that his security team did such periodical sweeps, at least one, or twice, a day.
Though, her binoculars could see just fine, out of the windows, into the distance.
As Roberta looked through her binoculars, as she used her hands to adjust them, she thought, 'There are even limits to my new eyesight. Both natural, and artificial. And our target is a completely profession when it comes to his personal security, and the security of his family.'
'Chang said not to underestimate this Michael Garibaldi. And I am not going too. Though, I am now regretting not taking the time to see the Babylon Five series. Still, Chang did give us all a short summary of Michael's life. In the from of a mission briefing. That also included our other three targets in this reality. Along with what they are all capable of. What their resources are. Who their friends are. And what their friend's resources are.'
'Except for being a recovering alcoholic, Michael is definitely one to be careful around. He spent around four years as the Station Security Chief for Babylon Five. And he helped save the station from nearly every type of danger imaginable, an almost a weekly basis.'
'Then, Michael took over Edgars Industries, after marrying his, on again, off again, love interest, Lise Hampton. Whom was the widow of William Edgars. With her inheriting William Edgar's company. Making her very wealthy.'
'Lise married Michael, after Michael saved her life. She then allowed Michael to take over running the company. And from what I understand, he has done a very good in doing so. And the couple even have a teenage daughter, whom they named, Mary.'
'Still, Chang also ordered us to do this discreetly, and for us to not harm, nor bring to harm, nor capture, the target's wife, nor daughter.'
'And I can agree with the reasoning as to why Chang told us not to harm Michael's family. Even at his current, older age, Michael is a first rate badass. And Edgars Industries is a galaxy spanning company, with vast resources. Chang does not want to risk having those resources targeted against him, and us. Which is the reason for the needed discretion on our part.'
'Fortunately, I have confirmed the locations of both Lise and Mary. And neither are presently in the headquarters. And they will not return there for a few days. Though, this only makes our mission slightly easier.'
'Still, I have been casing this place for three days. And I can say, in a professional opinion, that place is a fortress. And I see so many problems with our mission, that it is not even fun. Plan, and implementing, this mission, is going to take a lot of skill.'
'The place has a completely open field of fire, for over a kilometer, in every direction. And I do not see any gun turrets, so I am not sure where the field of fire would come from. Also, the facility has a small army of armed guards. Though, that is not a problem for us. But, I have no idea what traps lay in wait, inside the building.'
'The sewer system has scanners in them. And there are likely boobytraps there, as well.'
'The computer firewalls of this building are top notch. We cannot hack them without alerting them that something is wrong. Which would likely mean that Michael would ask for help. This would create even more problems for us. Given the friends that Michael can call on. Including, their galactic armadas.
'Also, we dare not just try to teleport inside. It is likely the sensors would detect us at a moment's notice. And we do not know what dangers are inside, that may take us immediately by surprise, before we have time to react.'
'The only thing this place does not have is an emergency shuttle. Though, there is a landing pad. And I watched as a small shuttle landed on it, yesterday. With Michael, himself, being the one to exit the shuttle, and enter the main building. And because it was during the middle of the day, I could not snatch him.'
'Given the outside atmosphere is pressurize, it seems there is a docking hatch located on the dome itself, for VIP and government shuttles to come in and go out of.'
'Also, if Michael is half as skilled as I suspect he is, he likely has multiple escape shuttles, he can pick at random, to come for him. If he needed to evacuate his fortress. That means we cannot just steal one of his shuttles, fly it to the fortress, and trick him into coming aboard.'
'That being said, my team will meet me here tonight. And we will probably try a late night raid, with our hardsuits, and motoslaves. If nothing else, we can flush him out. And even if we fail. Given our technology, and there is no record of us exiting here. I doubt we will have to worry about him tracing us back across the multiverse, to our main headquarters, in Chang's Tower.'
'And even if that happens, Chang has a small fleet of Star Destroyers in orbit. Which are more advanced than the military spaceships that Garibaldi has at his disposal. And Chang's tower has an anti-reality protection field around it. To prevent unwanted reality travels from coming to us, uninvited.'
'So, we have the firepower to make them think twice about coming after us.'
'Now, all I have to do, it just figure out a basic plan of attack, while I wait for the girls to show up. Sawyer even kindly said that she would stop by, and pick me up some supper, from the Tower, before they came here. And that is kind of her.'
'For someone that use to make a career out of chainsawing, both corpses, and living people, into little pieces, and then disposing of those pieces, Sawyer is a surprisingly nice person to get to know. But then, I am not one who should judge others on such matters.'
Roberta then went to looking at the fortress, with her binoculars, as she continued to figure out which side the headquarters would be best to attack from.
(_)
A few hours later, in Mars Dome One, that evening, after dark, on the city outskirts of the dome, the inside of the Deco bar was full of people.
At that moment, outside, of the Deco bar, at a nearby parking lot, on the side of the street, to the right of the Deco building, a car, with the three women in the vehicle, road up to a stop.
From the back passengers seat door, behind the driver's left side door, Ranma stepped out. She wore her usual red chinese clothing. Though, she had on her goldern bracers on her forearms.
From the front passenger side, Natsuru stepped out of the car. She was wearing some casual clothing.
And from the driver's side, Akira stepped out of the car. She was wearing her cowgirl outfit, without her cowgirl hat, nor weapons, gunbelt, nor sheathes. She left her weapons, sunglasses, and hat in their car.
Like the rest of those in their group, they had each been given encrypted, hand-held radios, which they kept hidden on their person. And it was Balalaika and B, whom were nice enough to provide the radios, and they even had them preset. With their entire group, including Chang's friends, being grateful for the communications equipment.
After they locked and shut their car doors, they walked together to the nearby sidewalk, which let directly to the Deco.
Their car was from their home reality, even though it gas powered cars were banned, no one would believe that someone was driving them, because production of gasoline was hard to come by, on Mars. That was why they made sure to have a full tank of gas, before they teleported their car, from Devil's Hotel parking lot, in Plata Podrido, and a private location they knew, on the interior of Mars Dome One. The friends did the same, after each group finished their run, in one of the last few transports heading for Mars from Babylon Five.
As a way to blend in, the three women decided to speak in english, as they figured that speaking japanese in public would cause unwanted attention. And they made sure not to state anything too important, out loud, in public.
Half a minute later, They walked out onto the sidewalk. To their right was the entrance to the Deco bar which was about a hundred feet away, on their side of the side wall. While thirty feet, to their left side, in the opposite direction from the Deco, built into the sidewalk, on their side of the street, was the entrance to the underground subway, transport tube system.
The stairs away from the street.
As they turned to their right, and made their way to the Deco, they noticed there was no line outside.
As they walked together, Ranma asked, “So, what is this bar like?”
Natsuru said, “Well, when I spoke to Rock an hour ago, they said the place was like a nineteen twenties style bar, with live music. Though, it is known to play blues, jazz, and classic rock and roll.”
Ranma inquired, “So, a theme bar.”
Natsuru pointed out, “But, a stylish one, from what Rock told me.”
Akira said, “Those styles of music are fun and relaxing to listen to, so it should be fine. Because, we need a break after striking out on finding Lee.”
Ranma commented, “Given the size of this place, I can understand us not finding him. But, I am surprised none of us found him on the passenger ships.”
Akira shrugged, as she responded, “Well, Lee is good at hiding. But, where could he hide, that he would be able to avoid us?”
Ranma said, “Knowing him. He is probably hiding in plain sight.”
Akira stated, “I have to give him credit. He is good at that. But, we now know he is the writer. He cannot hide from us forever.”
Ranma agreed, “True.”
Natsuru suggested, “When we meet him, let us not mention we know what he did in the time loop.”
Akira said, “That is a very good idea. If he learns we know that. It will just make him run even faster and harder.”
Ranma replied, “I agree. And with his skills and intelligence, let's not give him more incentive to run.”
Natsuru inquired, “My thoughts exactly. Now, are we even sure he is stilled here?”
Akira answered, “Yes. Dutch stated she had a signature lock on Rock's reality device. Lee has not used it. Though, Dutch did mention that there were some other reality traveling elsewhere in city. Besides those of us that came here.”
Ranma inquired, “Anyone we know?”
Akira said, “I hope not. Though, Dutch did not go into detail. And I am not going to get involved.”
Natsuru agreed, “Considering our luck. That is a good policy.”
Ranma conceded, “I agree. Now, let us go inside, and relax.”
Akira pointed out, “At much as I would like to, we cannot stay for long. We need to make sure the girls are not getting into trouble.”
Ranma stated, “You have a point there.”
Natsuru said, “Let's just go in. Touch base with Rock and Revy. Listen to a few songs, and then leave.”
Akira complimented, “Good plan.”
Ranma commented, “I can go along with that.”
Akira stated, “I just hope that the others are not upset we missed our meeting, in the Black Sheep Hotel lobby, an hour and a half ago.”
Ranma shrugged, as she said, “It happens. And besides we were having a good dinner. And we did turned our radios back on when we finished.”
Natsuru commented, “With Rock, I won't worry about it.”
Akira said, “Besides, we will make it up to Rock and the others, by checking on all our children. Even I admit that our three kids with the Lagoon sisters is just asking for trouble.”
Natsuru inquired, “I still wonder why our daughters prefer to stay with such insane women, instead of others, like their cousins?”
Ranma suggested, “Perhaps we should ask, Lee, when we catch him.”
The women all stopped for a second, as they thought about what Ranma has said. Then, they burst out laughing, as the started back to walking towards the bar.
(_)
A minute later, Natsuru, Akira, and Ranma, reached the bar. The side above the front door was lit in pink neon light, which stated, from up to down, in cursive english, 'Deco'.
The front door, and the three women walked into the bar.
As the three women stood just inside the entrance, they looked around, and they liked what they saw.
The room was about half full of people.
The mostly black and white art deco look of the bar was stylish, and pleasing to the eyes. With the stage's red curtains offer a nice contrast to the room.
In addition, the band was playing a pleasant melody, as the pretty, human, twenty something female singer was singing on key, with her beautiful voice.
The soft yellow lighting around the table and bar sections. There were people sitting at both the tables, and the bar counter, whom were listening to the music, as they talked with each other.
Behind the tables, between the tables and the stage, was the dance floor. And there were a few couple slow dancing on the floor.
With the dance floor actually put in the shadows, between the tables section and the stage. With the only can lights looking down on the stage directly on the singer, whom was standing in the front center of the crescent shaped stage.
And those couples that were dancing on the dance floor, were doing a slow dance, with the soft blues style music.
The singer wore a red evening gown, with red flat sole slippers, that fit her slender figure well. She had an earpiece on her right ear. She also was swaying back and forth to the beat of the song.
The band members were sitting in the back left corner of the stage, as they played their instrument, while the faced the audience. The band members were in the shadows of the stages, but the three women could make out what the instrument players looked like.
The five band members were sitting were in two rows. The back row was three seats, and the front row was two seats. All five band members were male, and they wore gray and black plaid suits.
To the right corner of the stage, in the shadows was the piano, and the pianist playing the piano.
The pianist sat on the piano bench, while he was facing away from the audience, and he was wearing a black suit, and black short rimmed fedora hat, which made it more difficult to see him in the shadows.
As the women continued to take in the atmosphere of the clue, Natsuru was impressed, as she commented, “Now, this is how you do a theme bar.”
Akira noticed that more of the men in the room were in nice suits, and most of the women in the room were in nice dress. She said, “I think we are a bit undressed for this place.”
Ranma looked around, as she disagreed, “No. I think we are a lot undressed.”
Natsuru stated, “Rock did not mention a dress code here.”
Ranma and Akira said, in unison, “Good.”
Ranma said, “Now, let's see who is here.”
As the three women look at the audience
Ranma said, “I see some of them. There is a large table in the middle of the bar.”
Akira replied, “I see them too.”
Natsuru commented, “Same here.”
At a large round table, in the middle of the round tables, sat Eda, Benny, Janet, Dutch, Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer.”
Akira stated, “And I see Rock and Revy by the bar counter, near the middle of the counter.”
Ranma replied, “I got you.”
Natsuru said, “I see them.
Akira suggested, “Let's go talk to Rock and Revy. If we talk to the others, we are likely going to be here all night.”
Natsuru said, “Agreed”
Ranma commented, “Yes. Though, they are always good for a laugh.”
The three women then turned and walked over to the bar counter, were Rock and Revy were standing at, as they sipped their drinks.
As they reached the female couple, Revy was the first to noticed them, as she set her drink down, with appear to be some form of cola, on the counter, while she turned to face them. She said, “Hi guys.”
Akira replied, “Hi Revy.”
Rock look over in their directly, as she kept her glass of what appears to be lemonade, in her right hand. She said, “So, how goes the hunt, with you three?”
Natsuru said, “It could be better.”
Ranma commented, “No luck on our end.”
Rock replied, “I was afraid of that.” She mentally added, 'And you would have radioed us, if you found, Lee.'
Natsuru inquired, “So, why did you guys pick this place?”
Rock answered, “Because, we were the mood for a live music performance, that we go listen to on the cheap. And we heard from the locals say that this bar had a good blues and jazz band. And this band seems to now their stuff.”
Revy commented, “I wasn't crazy about coming here myself. But, since everyone else did, I decided to come to. Still, the one thing that sucks is that with IDs, we cannot get any alcohol.”
Rock mentioned, “At least, they take gold at payment.”
Revy replied, “At least there's that.”
Akira thought, 'I am regretting that we lost our fake identicards, at our house, a few years ago.' She said, “Well, at least we can enjoy the music.”
Revy agreed, “That's true.”
Ranma stated, “And it is best we remain sober, until we catch, Lee.”
Revy conceded, “I will give you that one. Then, we get throw our party, and we get shit faced drunk.”
Ranma replied, “I look forward to it.”
Natsuru asked, “What is the band's name?”
Revy answered, “The Martian Blues.”
The trio of lovers giggled for a few seconds. Natsuru then said, “At least they are showing some skill in their performance.”
Akira turned to Natsuru, as she agreed, “Yes.” She then turned back to Rock and Revy, as she inquired, “So, where is everyone? I only see a few of us here. And I do not want to ask over the radio. That would be rude.”
Rock said, “I appreciate your manners. And to answer your question. As you know we did spread out. But, I did checked with everyone an hour ago, back at the hotel, in the lobby, before we split up.” She then continued, with slight annoyance in her tone of voice, “A meeting you three missed.”
Akira commented, “We were having dinner at a nice japanese restaurant. And it was pretty good copy of our native food, for those that live on Mars.”
Rock agreed, “Yes. It is surprising that good food never goes out of style. Anyway, Balalaika and B are in their hotel room right now.”
Revy spoke up, “Yea, sis and B are back at the hotel. They wanted some private time.”
Ranma thought, with amusement, 'That figures.' She replied, “Okay.”
Akira commented, “I am just happy you convinced them not to bring their army with them.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “What would be the fun if they caught Lee, first?”
All the women in their group giggled a little, as Akira agreed, “Good point.”
Rock stated, “Anyway, Balalaika said that the two of them can be ready at a moments notice. And with those two, I have no doubt they can.”
Natsuru said, “No arguments there.”
Rock went onto say, “Violin and Aeryn are taking a break, and enjoying some of the local culture, a couple of kilometers away from here, further into the city.”
Ranma said, “I hope those two have fun.”
Rick agreed, “So, do I. We have no clue where the maids are heading. They showed up for the meeting, don't say a thing, and headed out of the lobby, for parts unknown.”
Akira thought, 'I hope those two don't cause to much trouble. Still, about our kids...' She answered, “We already know the girls are all together. But, where at they?”
Rock answered, “A local club, with a disco theme, a couple of blocks away, called, unoriginally, The Disco.”
Akira said, “That just screams trouble.”
Rock replied, “Yes. It does.”
Natsuru inquired, “Whose idea was it to go there?”
Revy stated, “It was Kristina's idea... Something about she never had the opportunity to enjoy such places in her previous life, with friends. We know better that to ask.”
Ranma thought, with disbelief, 'And I use to think my personal life was strange.' She said, “That is a good idea. Still, that does not surprise me about your kids.”
Revy growled, “What does that supposed to mean?”
Natsuru spoke up, “It is just means that our lives a good distance from the norm of the bell curve.”
Revy responded, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Huh?”
Rock understand what Natsuru was saying, as she said, “It is a complimentary joke.”
Revy replied, “Oh.”
Akira asked, “So, where are Chang's people?”
The five women then heard a female voice, right beside them, say, “Well, us three are just enjoying ourselves, while the Serenity crew are having a late dinner, elsewhere in town.”
The women turned to see Jetta, Faye, and Spike, in their usual clothing, sitting at a small table less than six feet from the bar counter.
Natsuru greeted, “Hi guys. So, what you are doing at this bar?”
Jetta cracked a smile, as she said, “A rhythm and blue bar we wouldn't come visit... Please.”
Ranma stated, “You have a point there. So, what is you opinion of the music?”
Faye commented, “The piano player is good, the singer and rest of this Martian Blues band is decent.”
Ranma listened to the music for a few seconds, with her honed music skills, she learned during the time she was a rock singer in Japan. She then said, “I can go along with that.”
Akira asked, “I have a question. How is this Mars, compared to the Mars you know?”
Spike shrugged, as she replied, “It's different.”
Akira thought, 'A polite way of saying they don't like it.'
Jetta commented, “At least the locals are nice.”
Akira agreed, “True.”
Faye said, “And the food is okay.”
Akira replied, “That too.”
The group of women then continued their conversation.
(_)
Nearby, at their table, Benny, Janet, Dutch, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Eda, enjoyed the performance, as they enjoyed their non-alcoholic drinks. Which ranged from various sodas, to lemonade.
They were dressed in casual clothing. And only Shenhua had her concealed weapons on her person. The rest of the women had left their weapons in their cars.
Janet complained, “I wish we could get some beers, but we don't have any valid ID.”
Dutch looked over at her, as she stated, “Don't worry about it. I have some good bottles of beer back at the hotel. I brought them with us.”
Janet replied, “Thanks. I look forward to some of having them.”
Dutch mentioned, “So, do I. Also, I spoke to the bartender of the Black Sheep Hotel. He said he would serve us any alcohol we want, for a large bar or two of gold.”
Janet grinned, as she stated, “And that would be worth every ounce.”
Dutch returned Janet's smile, as she said, “I agree.”
As the others women at the table listened to the music, Benny commented, “I have heard this song before. But, from where?”
Lotton answered, “The song is titled, The Night Has Thousand Eyes. It is from the Dark City movie soundtrack.”
Benny replied, “Ah, yea. I remember that movie. Good movie.”
Lotton said, “Yes, it was. But, I am never visiting that place.”
Benny stated, “Me neither.”
Shenhua commented, “It is interesting how good music, and other forms of art, can be found in the most unlikely of places.”
Lotton agreed, “That is very true.”
Meanwhile, Sawyer noticed that Eda was looking at the people stage.
Sawyer asked, “What are you looking at, Eda?”
Eda lied, “Nothing. Just enjoying the music, and the atmosphere.”
Sawyer put her right elbow on the table, as she rest the bottom of her chin on her right, open palm. She let herself slightly space out, as she replied, “So am I.”
Eda continued staring at the piano player's back, as she thought, 'I recognized that clothing, and those shoes. That style of clothing is the same as the gray suit Lee occasionally wore back in Plata Podrido. It is just a different color of clothing. But, the darkness against the black clothing makes it hard to see the piano player physical build, even with my heighten sight.'
'And if he is Lee, this is exactly how Lee would hide in plain sight. It is classic Lee.'
'I have to get a better view, from a different angle. If he is Lee, I am not sure I want to turn him over to Revy and the others, just yet. I want to talk to him first. Still, what excuse can I used.'
Eda then saw the doors to the restrooms, on the left wall of the room, across of the bar counter. She thought, 'That would make a good excuse.'
Eda then stood up, and Shenhua asked, “Where are you going?”
Eda looked over at Shenhua, as she answered, “To the restroom, to pee.”
Eda then made her way through the other tables, chairs, and sitting patrons, as she made it to the left wall.
When Eda reached the entrance to the women's restroom, she stood at the door, as she turned to look at the pianist on stage. At the angle she was at, she could see the side of the face of the pianist.
Even though it was dark, Eda was probably the only person that had seen Lee's face in the dark. And she remembered his facial profile well, during that one night, months ago.
Eda did not show it outwardly, but she thought, with surprise, 'My god! It is Lee! He is even wearing those same sunglasses that he wore back in Mexico. Still, does he know we are here?'
Eda then noticed the slight smirk on Lee's lips.
Eda thought, 'Oh yes. He does know we are here. And he doesn't care. He really is crazy... Well, he did knowingly pull cons on us. He slept with me under false pretenses. Thought, to be fair, I did the same to him, while he did it to me. And River likes him. Those are sure signs of mental instability.'
'Still, what am I going to do, now? If I tell the others that the pianist is Lee, in doing so, I will likely get innocent bystanders needlessly killed, and Lee captured in a manner that benefits neither of us. So, I will just stay quiet on this, and bide my time for a chance to talk to him. And I am sure I will get the opportunity, if I am patient.'
'Besides, I really do have to go. And since he is here. One of us is bound to start the chase with him. So, I might as well pee, while I still can.'
Eda then turned back to the women's restroom door, and opened it.
As she walked inside, she found the art deco motif continued into the large women's restroom. And she guess the large men's restroom, as well. She also found the women's restroom to be room very clean.
Eda then headed for one of the open stalls, to relieve herself.
(_)
Back in the bar room, the song changed, to another pleasant, slow dance song.
On stage, with his back turned to the audience, Lee continued playing. He has seen Rock, Revy, and the others come into the bar, around hour ago, when they stopped the band for half a minute. After they had just finished a very skillful jazz song. To let the audience applause them, which the audience did.
The reason the women did not recognized Lee was he was wearing his black suit, hat, and sunglasses, against, a black piano, black bench, black stage, with the main lighting on the stage being on the singer, and not the band, nor pianist.
Even with the women's enhanced senses, they did not recognized Lee in all the black camouflage.
So, Lee continued to focus on the piano keys, as he continued playing, while he ignored the women's presence.
And he had done so, with missing a key.
Currently, they were playing one of the songs the Martian Blues band has selected for their set tonight. A song that Lee knew by heart. With the song being, Sway, from the Dark City soundtrack. He thought, 'This has been fun. I had almost forgotten how much fun it is to perform for an audience. And this band has a lot of interesting tastes in music. The music they select is more of, it if sounds like it fits, use it. Instead of just sticking to the just music pieces created during that time period.'
'They are even playing to sounds from one the more interesting sci-fi movies, whose title is, Dark City. We are currently playing a wonderful rendition of, Sway. And we had early played the song, The Night Has Thousand Eyes. Which is fitting for my situation. And this band picked those songs out. It seems that a few of them enjoyed the Dark City movie, and they thought the songs would fit the motif for the bar, and Ryan, the owner, after listening to the songs, agreed with them.'
'And the singer here can really bring out these types of songs. She has a lot of soul, and skill... But, it will soon be over. This is the last song we are playing for the night. And then it will be back on my journey to cure my cancer, as lose these crazy chicks.'
'At least I do not have to worry about escaping them, from this building. The red curtains will soon close and I will simply walk backstage. I will then meet Ryan in his office, to get paid. Then, I will exit out the back door of this place. And I checked. There is a back door to this place. And it does not trip the fire alarm.'
'After I leave this building, from the back, I just vanish in the night, get a snack from a place these band members told me about, and then back to my hotel room. Where I will get some rest, and then, after checking out in the morning, and having some breakfast, I will be gone.'
Close to a minute and a half later, the singer, the band, and Lee, finished playing the song, Sway. And the audience applauded one more time, as band members stood up, and they, along with the singer, took a bow. While Lee remained in his seat, with his back facing the audience.
As the clapping died down, the singer then addressed the audience. She stated, “I offer the Martian Blues a thank you, for all you for listening to our performance. And we wish to thank our guest pianist, Ello Gray.”
Lee quickly thought, 'I cannot turn around, with the girls seeing me. Fortunately musicians are known to be eccentric.'
Lee kept his back turned to the audience, as he held up his left hand and waved his left hand in the air, couple of seconds. He then dropped his hand back to his side.
The audience clapped, as the red curtains from the sides of the stage, began to slowly close.
As soon as Lee, saw from the corner of his left eye, the curtains completely close, he let out a sigh of relief.
(_)
From table that Jetta, Spike, and Faye were sitting at, they had gone back to talking among themselves, and left Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Rock, and Revy continue their conversation with them.
Faye quietly said, “So, the pianist was not a regular member of the band.”
Spike stated, “That figures.”
Jetta commented, “Let's be happy that we had the chance to enjoy his performance.”
Faye replied, “Agreed.”
Spike said, “I can go along with that.”
The three friends then continued their conversation.
(_)
On stage, a few seconds after the curtains completely closed, Lee got up from the piano bench. He looked over at the singer. He thought, 'Best not to speak until I am sure the microphones are off.'
Lee saw the singer look at him, as she took off her earpiece, and turned a small dial on it, to turn it off. She stated, “You can speak now. The only microphones we have on stage, are on the instruments, on this ear piece. And the red stage cloth is heavy enough to mask our voice. So, we are not good to talk.”
Lee said, “Thank you. I appreciate you giving a special mention for me.”
The singer complimented, “No problem. You did a good job.”
Lee smiled, as he said, “Yes. And you all did a wonderful performance, as well.”
Lee saw the band members smile, while the singer said, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He then mentally added, 'Now to get paid.'
Lee then head for backstage door, on the right side of the back part of the stage.
(_)
Half a minute later, Lee walked up to the open door to Ryan's office. Ryan was the bar owner and manager. And Lee saw that he was sitting in his chair, behind his desk.
Lee knocked on the open door, for a second.
Ryan looked up, from behind his desk, from the chair he was sitting in. He saw Lee looking back at him. He commented, “Come in. I guess you want to get paid.”
Lee walked inside, and up to Ryan's desk, as he pulled out his credit chit from his right pants pocket. As he came to a stop, he said, “Yes.”
Ryan stated, “Well, you did a good job. So, I am going to pay you, two hundred credits. Does that sound fine to you?”
Lee answered, “That sounds reasonable.” He then handed Ryan his credit chit.
As Ryan took Lee's credit chit, he replied, “Glad to hear it. So, any chance I could convince you to do an encore performance tomorrow night?”
Lee responded, “Sorry. But, I got to get on the move.”
Ryan then pulled out his credit chit, and transfer the cash, with both of them pressing their thumbs on the card to officiate the credit transfer.
Ryan replied, “Okay. But, given your skills, it was worth asking.”
Ryan then handed Lee's credit chit back to him.
After Lee took his credit chit back into his hands, he pocketed it, while Ryan did the same with his credit chit.
Lee said, “Pleasure doing business with you, Ryan.”
Ryan replied, “You to, Ello.”
Lee then turned and walked out of the office, as he headed for the back door to the building, and to freedom.
(_)
Meanwhile, at that moment, back in the bar, at the bar counter, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, Rock, and Revy were continuing their conversation.
Akira looked over at the shut curtains, and them back at Rock and Revy, as she commented, “Well, I believe that show is over.”
Revy replied, “Yea. But, it was good.”
Natsuru commented, “I regret only hearing the tail in of their set. But, if we come back around here, we have this place to hang out in. And we could enjoy the show, then.”
Rock complimented, “That is the right attitude to have.”
Natsuru replied, “Thank you.”
Akira stated, “Well, we better go check on both our kids, and your kids, at the Disco.”
Rock stated, “That is a good idea. Even at their age, I feel they sometimes need chaperoning.”
Akira asked, “Yes. They do. I guess that is a failing on our parts. So, how do we get to that club?”
Rock answered, “It believe to get to the club, go outside, and you take a right outside by two blocks, then drive another back, take left, then two blocks, you should see the outdoor sigh.”
Akira replied, “Thanks. And if we cannot find the place, we can ask directions.”
Rock said, “Worse come to worse. Their radios are on, and we can use them to contact the girls.”
Akira complimented, “Good idea.”
Rock said, “Thank you.”
Ranma commented, “Well, see you guys back at the hotel.”
Rock replied, “You too.”
Revy said, “Be careful.”
Natsuru commented, “Now, coming from you, that is a compliment.”
In response, Revy smiled at Natsuru.
Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, turned and head towards the front door to the Deco bar, with the intention of reaching their car, to go check on their children.
(_)
While the trio of women were leaving the Deco bar from the front entrance, Lee had walked out the back side door, which was located on the right side of the building. And he was casually walking towards the sidewalk, with the intent of heading for the underground, transport tube station, to get a late night snack, at a restaurant he heard about, from the band members he had played with. He then planned to head back to his hotel, for some rest.
Lee soon made it to the sidewalk, he then turned to his left to see that the stairs, leading to the underground station, in the sidewalk, several yards away from him.
As Lee walked towards the stairs, he thought, 'That was fun. I now have a little more money in my pocket. And fortunately, I can take the transport tube, which is just a gloried subway, to get a snack, from a restaurant the band members recommended. Then, I will had back to the hotel.'
'Fortunately, I found that the hotel is right by one of these transit points, only one station over. I checked that, this afternoon. When I had a break from rehearsals. And best of all, I lost the girls, one more time.'
A few seconds later, Lee heard multiple footsteps approaching him, from behind. He thought, with annoyance, 'I thought too soon. It has to be them. The multiverse would not be nice enough to give me a break this late in the game. And if I turn around, they will see me. If I pick up the pace, they will suspect something is wrong. Still, from the footfalls, at this pace, I should make it to the station, before they reach me.'
As Lee pass by a parking lot to his left, he heard Ranma's female voice say from behind him, “Hey. Are you, Ello, the pianist?”
Lee thought, 'Crap, it is Ranma, with likely Akira, and Natsuru by her. I cannot take those three in a fight. My only chance is to fake my voice. While coming to stop, with my back turned to them, and hope they stop, without walking around in front of me.'
Lee came to a stop, and he heard the women come to a stop behind him, as well.
Lee thought with relief, 'Okay. That is a small favor.'
Lee fake his voice, by making his voice sound hoarse, as he answered, “Yea. That is me.”
Ranma said, “Well, you did a good job.”
Natsuru complimented, “Yes. That was a fine performance.”
Lee kept his voice hoarse, he replied, “Thank you.”
Akira asked, “How long did it take you to become that skilled at the piano?”
Lee thought, 'Yep. All three of them are here.' He made sure to keep his voice hoarse, as he stated, “A better part of a decade.”
Ranma said, “Maybe sometime, you can play for us.”
Lee responded, in a hoarse voice, “Maybe. Well, I have other engagements. Have a pleasant night.”
Ranma said, “You as well.”
Lee then continued walking, he was less than thirty feet from the entrance to the transit station.
(_)
Meanwhile Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru came to a stop, while Natsuru was looking very hard at Lee's back.
Akira noticed, as she inquired, “What is it?”
Natsuru commented, “There is something familiar about that man's profile, but I cannot place him.”
Ranma said, “It does not matter. We have to go check on the kids.”
Natsuru agreed, “You are right.”
All three women then turned towards the parking lot, where they had their parked their car.
(_)
At that moment, Lee reached the stairs, and he started down the stairs to the transport station, but as he step down the first couple of steps, the wrist he had his digital wrist watch on bumped the safety railing, and the alarm when off.
Lee immediately used his other hand to turn it the alarm, but his precognition screamed that his cover was blown.
He looked behind himself, to his left, to see Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru staring at him, with the women's eyes going wide.
(_)
At that moment, thirty feet away, on the side walked, the three women were caught in the moment, as Natsuru commented, “I need to trust my instincts more.”
Akira said, “I don't believe it.”
Ranma smirked, as she stated, “I told you. Plain sight.”
They then saw Lee turn, and rush down the staircase.
The three women then ran after him, as Akira pulled out her radio. She pressed the talk button, as she stated, “This is, Akira. We found, Lee.”
On the other end, Rock inquired, “Where is he?”
Akira answered, “Believe it or not, he was Ello Gray. The pianist playing on stage, at the bar.”
Revy said, on her radio, “Damn. Lee is good at this.”
Akira said, “I know.”
Revy asked, “How close are you to him?”
Akira answered, “We are about thirty feet from him, and chasing him down into a subway. We will have him in a minute. Maybe less.”
Rock replied, “Good.”
Akira then pocketed her radio, as they made it to the stairs leading down into the subway station.
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee made it down to the bottom floor, he continued running through the station, towards the transport tubes.
Lee found that he was the only one in the station, at that time of the evening.
As Lee ran, he thought, 'I just need to be mindful not to head to the shuttle that leads the my hotel. I will have to head to the tube that goes further into the city. Depending on the situation, I will double back later, or just reality jump. I can live without my luggage. I cannot live without my life.'
Lee then came within sight of the row of electronic toll booths, and the transports tube terminals behind the booths.
The booths were were at waist height.
But, Lee also saw that beyond the booths there were no transport tubes on the station.
Lee thought, 'Damn it. I don't see any transport tubes. But, if I can get passed the booths, I have a chance.'
Just as he pulled out his credit chit, from his pocket, he heard Natsuru yell, behind him, “Surrender Lee! You are only making this harder on yourself!”
Lee thought, 'From Natsuru's voice, I would guess they are about twenty feet, and gaining, but that will not matter in a second.'
Lee then walked into one of the electronic tooth booths, he swiftly put his credit chit into the slit on the booth, pressed his right thumb into his credit chit, a second later, he heard a beat from the booth that meant the transfer cleared. He then immediately rushed to the other to the other side of the booth, as he pocked his credit chit.
Five seconds later, the three women just jumped over the booths, and a row of bars, with a flat bar bottom, ahead of entire booth, but behind Lee, dropped right in front of them, between them and Lee.
Lee heard the clang of the bars drop. He stopped, and turned around.
Lee looked at the girls, as the girls looked at him. He thought, 'Good. What just happened, happened. Now, I have a chance to talk to them.'
Lee said, “First, I would advise that you to not damage those bars. While cops may not look for you for just jumping a toll booth, they will look for you for damaging property.”
Natsuru conceded, “That is sound advice.”
Lee maintained his poker case, he stated, “Now, ladies. Let us keep this civil. You may want to catch me, but it is just not going to be right now. My precognition tells me that it will be a couple of minutes until the police show up. So, we have a moment to talk.”
Lee thought, 'Also, it will be a few seconds for one of the transport tubes to show up. And I don't want you to realize that I am trapped at the moment. Between literally a rock and hard place.'
Ranma replied, “Good idea.”
Akira commented, “Okay, Lee. We will go along with that for a moment.”
Natsuru said, “I have always been one for peaceful resolutions.”
Lee inquired, “Let us start with the first real big question. How angry are you with me?”
Ranma admitted, “Not very.”
Natsuru replied, “I am not that upset.”
Akira admitted, “While, I do have a few issues to discuss with you, in private. That is neither here, nor now. And otherwise, I am not that upset with you.”
While Lee maintained his poker face, he thought, with sadness, and guilt, 'I can guess what you want to talk to me about, Akira. It deals with the death of Johnny. And me writing you killing him. That is just one more crime on my mountain of sins.'
Lee conceded, “Fair enough. So, do you have any questions for me?”
Akira asked, “Yes. When the maids showed up, why didn't you just surrender to us?”
Lee pointed out, “I tried. You didn't take me up on my offer.”
Ranma questioned, “Why were you not more direct?”
Lee explained, “Because if I just handed myself over to you, it would have cheapened the hunt for you. And I did not want to piss of Revy any further than I already had.”
Akira responded, “I can see your point. But, she is not that pissed off at you.”
Lee inquired, “So, she doesn't want to put my balls into a vice?”
Akira joked, “Nah. Her hands are far stronger than any vice that I know of.”
Lee lightly chuckled. He then commented, “I am afraid to even ask how you know that.”
Akira responded, “Trust me. You don't want to know.”
Lee said, “Let's leave it at that.”
Akira replied, “Agreed.”
Natsuru thought, 'Now, is the best time to try to get you to surrender to us, Lee. And I know just how to convince you to do so.' She calmly stated, “Lee. We know you are dying of cancer.”
Lee rubbed his shaved chin with his right hand, as he said, in a casual tone of voice, “Yea. The extreme weight loss. Along with then gaunt face and hands. Makes it pretty apparent at this point.”
Ranma commented, “Actually, River told us.”
Lee said, “That was nice of her. She was probably trying to soften your blow towards your revenge against me?”
Akira admitted, “Pretty much.”
Lee asked, “Did it work?”
Ranma stated, “Not really.”
Lee thought, with concern and worry for his friend, 'I have to know.' He inquired, with him letting his concern for River slip through his poker mask, “Given the way I left River, I take it you all know she and Sam were the same person?”
Natsuru answered, “Yes. She showed us.”
Lee questioned, “Is she okay?”
Natsuru replied, “Yes. After our conversation with her, we turned her over to Chang.”
Lee thought, 'Now is not the time to get into what she told them. I just do not have the time. But, I doubt she told them anything to serious about me. She is my friend, after all.'
Ranma commented, “From what we were told, you only have a few months to live.”
Lee deadpanned, “I am very much aware of my impending death.”
Natsuru offered, “We could save your life. If you just surrendered.”
Lee replied, “Ah yes. The vat process. The price is far too high.”
Akira commented, “Being a girl is not that bad. And don't be a hypocrite.”
Lee calmly stated, “It is not that. It is that I will not be brainwashed and turned into a slave. If you three, of anyone, understood the overall theme of my writings, you would understand that I would rather die, than be a slave.”
Ranma conceded, “You may have a point there. Still, the offer stands. And even if you lose us, you can find us at Lagoon Island. If you change your mind, and want to surrender, so you can live.”
Lee honestly said, “I will keep that mind.”
Suddenly, Lee heard, from behind him, one of the transports tubes arrive, with the doors to the small cabins sliding open. with the cabins.
Lee though, 'I do not have time to be picky. I will just find out where this transport tube is heading, and get on it.'
Lee look behind him, at the number of the terminal the tube was at, and then at the wall map to women's left. He then turned back around to the women, as he smiled at them. Lee said, “Well, that is my ride. Good luck, girls. You going to need it.”
As the three women watched Lee walked into the transport tube, after Lee entered one of the connected cabins, he turned around, and look at him. He wave a little bit with he right hand, while his smile got a little wider.
A few seconds later, he stopped waving, as he turned around, and went to sit down, on a cushioned bench, set around the cabin of the transport tube.
A few moments later, the cabin doors slide close, and the transport started moving, to the next station.
Ranma commented, “And I thought I was hard to get.”
Akira said, “Lee is clearly not going to make this easy for us.”
Natsuru look at the map on the wall to their left. A few seconds later, she turned to her lovers, as she stated, “I know where he is heading. He is going further into the city, and the next station is only a couple of kilometer away. The name is south station forty-seven, B. If we get to the car, and hurry, we might beat him there.”
Akira complimented, “Good thinking. Let's get out of here.”
The three women then turned around, and ran back out of the station, and up the stairs.
As they made it to the sidewalk, heading for the parking lot that their car was parked in it, Akira pulled out her radio.
Akira stated, into the radio, “We lost him. But, we know where he is going. He is taking the subway into town. The next station is a few kilometers from here, further into town. We can make it in our car. The name is the station is south station forty-seven, B.”
On the other end, Rock stated, with her radio, “Okay. I believe that Aeryn and Violin are nearby.”
Aeryn commented, from her radio, “You are correct. We will meet you there, in our vehicle. I even believe we know where the station exit is. I believe we used it early. It comes out near Violin calls a large convention. We have seen people coming and going from it. But, we have not yet checked out what is happening in there. But, if Lee was intent on losing us, he would go into the building, in attempt to lose our trail.”
On her radio, Rock complimented, “That is a good point.”
Aeryn stated, with her radio, “We will me the surface exit of the subway station.”
Akira said, “Good. We will see you there. And if the convention center is in use, Lee could lose us in there.”
Violin pointed out, from her radio, “That depends on the type of convention happening there.”
Akira questioned, “You don't know?”
Violin admitted, “No. I have been meaning to ask about it. But, I look forward to finding out.”
Akira replied, “So, do I. Also, keep in mind, the target is wearing a black suit and black fedora hat, that is in the same style as that gray suit and he wore at the Day of the Dead dance, and the casino poker game.”
Violin said, “Thanks for the tip.”
Akira responded, “You're welcome. And see you there.” She then put away her radio, as they made it to their car.
Akira quickly pulled out her keys, open the driver's side door, unlocked the other doors, so Natsuru and Ranma could get in.
Half a minute later, Akira was on the road, as the three of them headed deeper into the domed city.
A minute later, after the three women drove away, the police finally arrived, to check out what was going on. Only to find that there was nothing to find.
(_)
Three minutes later, Lee was sitting in his seat, in the transport tube, when the cabin came to a halt in the next station, with the doors sliding open. He immediately got up, and walked out of the cabin.
Lee then briskly walked out of the station, and up the stairs. As he made it to the sidewalk on the surface, he looked around him, as he mentally wondered, 'Where am I now?'
The street lights around him provide plenty of illumination, as he looked around him. Instead, of being on a small sidewalk, like he had entered from the previous station, this was a sprawling sidewalk. And it was fifty feet from a parking lot, with the highway on the far side of the parking lot.
There were several cars in the parking lot. And there were people coming and going, all around him.
Lee thought, 'Okay, I am in a crowded place. This could help me. Now, where to hide.'
Lee then turned around, and saw he was fifty feet from the front of a huge building. He saw that the building he stood in front of went up for at least twelve stories height.
The building was at least a mile wide, with Lee in the center.
Lee could not see the other corners, so, he could not see corners, to gauge the depth of the building.
Lee thought, 'Now, that is a big building.'
Lee then saw the four entrance double-doors, side by side, that he saw people coming in and out of. To the left of the doors, on the wall, Lee saw a large bronze plaque state, in english, “W.E. Convention Center.”
Lee thought, “W.E... William Edgars... That makes sense. The guy was rich. And he was known to invest in Mars infrastructure.'
Lee then noticed there was a small plastic sign with detachable letters, placed on the wall, between the bronze plaque and the doors, stated, in english, “Open to the public.”
Also, there were other alien symbols below the english message.
Lee thought, 'So, anyone is welcome. The alien symbols probably mean the same thing. And this would be a perfect place to get lost in.”
Lee swiftly made his way towards the doors. And he soon found himself inside the building.
Half a minute later, as he walked through a large hallway inside the building, he made his way into the main area of the building. He noticed that he passed by some restrooms, and also a bay of elevators.
While Lee continued to walk, he could hear english speaking rock music coming from the speakers, in front of him, in the main area of the building.
While Lee walked into the open space, he came to a stop, just inside the hallway. As Lee look out in front of him, he stood in shock was what he saw.
Lee found himself on the bottom floor of a very large atrium.
And the room was brightly lit from countless lights place along the walls, as very level, and area. Allowing Lee to see around, as if it was daylight.
As Lee looked around, he saw that the atrium was a huge square shaped area. With the square being half mile from corner to corner, from each end.
From the interior square, Lee saw several exposed floors going up, in a straight row, with open balconies, and safety parapets lining the exposed parts of those levels.
Lee could not see how deep the upper levels went. But, he guess they went far into the building, in event direction.
But, the building, itself, was not what surprised, Lee.
It was who and what Lee saw in the building, that caused the man with a master poker face to go slack jaw, and speechless.
Lee saw there were men, women, and children there, of all ages, of many alien species, and humans.
There were especially a lot of teenagers of various species, and genders there.
And some of them were in various costumes. Lee recognized a few of the costumes.
Also, Lee saw there were small venders and dealers, of every description, lining the area, on each level. Especially in the square in front of him.
And they were selling various types of merchandise. From video discs, to data crystals, to boxes of scale models, to toys, to other merchandise. And though, Lee did not recognize most of the logos, and titles of the fictional series the venders were selling, Lee did understand the general vibe of the situation.
From all this, Lee could only come to one insane conclusion.
Lee collected himself, as he thought, 'I am in an alien sci-fi convention... This officially marks the weirdest moment of my life. And that is saying something. And this place is clearly running twenty-four hours a day.'
Lee then watched as a pretty, Minbari, teenager girl, dressed as a klingon warrior, walk by him. He mentally worried, 'I have got to get out of here before I go insane. The good news is I can probably lose the girls in this chaos. The only problem is those that are following me have been far more fan conventions than I have. They probably know this scene better than I do. Still, I got a good head start.'
Lee then looked over at the wall to his right, and he saw a poster stating who was funding the convention.
Lee silently read the poster, as he thought, 'Edgars Industries is funding this. Of course, it is their convention center, so it figures they would be the host it. And it figures that Michael Garibaldi would be paying for all this. He always had good taste in classic fiction. And he has been known to share the wealth before.'
Lee then looked in front of him, towards the atrium, as he thought, 'Now, to take a step into the wide insanity that has become my life. Though, which way should I go... Simple, I will go in the direction they least expect me to go. Straight ahead. With luck, they will split up, and waste time canvasing the entire area, while I am long gone.'
'Though, my greatest danger is when I make it back outside, as I cover the field of cars, to the road, they could spot me from a distance, if they put a look out out. Or, they could also cover the doors. But, I doubt they will, with only three people currently after me. And maybe around half dozen behind them. They do not have enough man power to do all that.'
'Though, either way, there is nothing I can do about that. So, I won't worry about it.'
'Also, Rock knows better than to send a lot of her team here. She will only send a few others for back up. So, I don't have to worry to much about that. And the sooner I exit the other end of the convention center, the better my chances of escape are. So, I might as well make my way through, as soon as possible.'
As Lee began to work his way through the crowd, while trying to avoid brushing anyone, or anything, he noticed the song that was playing had ended, and other song began.
Lee soon recognized the song that had begun playing, as he thought, with amusement, 'The song is, The Growl, from the Star Trek Into Darkness movie. What perfect music piece for both this place, and the situation I am in.'
Lee then walked further into the convention center, as he disappeared into the crowd.
(_)
A few minutes later, outside the W.E. Convention Center, near the subway entrance that Lee had come out of, Akira found a parking place in the parking lot of the convention center.
As Akira parked her car, she thought, 'I am glad that parking is free here. Now, to meet up with Violin, and Aeryn. And those two radioed us, on our way here. With Aeryn finding a map. And the side we came in at here should be the side that the entrances to the subway is at. Where we will be meeting them at.'
After the three women got out, they quickly walked towards the building, heading for the center of the building, where the main doors were located at.
As they continued to walked, they saw how big the building was, as Ranma asked, “Do you think, Lee went in there?”
Natsuru answered, “I would head in there, if I was him.”
Akira agreed, “I would too.”
(_)
A minute later, they made their way to the entrance to the transport tube station.
As the three women did so, they saw Aeryn and Violin standing by the entrance, looking at them.
While approached both women Akira noted that both of them were wearing casual clothing, and neither appeared armed.
Akira thought, 'They probably do not want to attract attention. And so, they kept their pistol weapons in their own car. Still, unarmed, Violin is next to unstoppable. And Aeryn is a train soldier. I doubt they have much to worry about.'
As the trio came to a stop in front of the couple, Natsuru said, “Thanks for coming.”
Violin replied, “No problem. We want to catch Lee, as well.”
Ranma asked, “Did you see him come out?”
Aeryn answered, “No. I believe we missed him. But, it is obvious where he went.” She then used her right hand to gesture towards the building.
Akira looked up at the building as she whistled. She said, “That is both a tall building, and a big building.”
Violin turned around to face the building, as she agreed, “Yea. Needle in a haystack time.”
Aeryn suggested, “Well, let us head inside, to find him.”
As they walked, towards the doors leading inside, Ranma approached Violin. Ranma whispered into Violin ear, “Is she always this straightforward?”
Violin answered, “Most of them time. Unless our asses on the line. Still, it helps with preventing misunderstandings. And it makes it more enjoyable in bed, for both of us.”
Ranma shrugged, as she replied, “I can see the appeal.”
(_)
A few minutes later, after they made it inside, down the hallway, and to the entrance to the atrium, they came to a stop, as they looked out at what they saw in front of them.
They were all surprised by what they saw inside the atrium, and the atrium’s ascending levels.
As they all got a full view of the alien sci-fi convention in front of them, Violin stated, with mild surprise in her tone of voice, “Just when you thought you have seen everything...”
Akira nodded, as she replied, with a slight bit of eagerness in her tone of voice, “I know.”
Natsuru suggested, with a little amount of excitement in her tone of voice, “After we catch Lee, we can always spend a few days here.”
Violin stated, with enthusiasm in their tones of voice, “Nice idea.”
Akira said, with excitement evident in her tone of voice, “I can go along with that.”
Ranma and Aeryn looked on at the three other women. They then rolled their eyes for a few seconds, as they both disagree with the three other women.
Ranma turned to look at Aeryn, as she asked, “Considering we are the two trained trackers here, which way do you think Lee went?”
Aeryn turned to Ranma, as her lips curled into feral smile. She answered, “Lee is a savvy individual. But, I am married to a savvy individual. Lee will expect us to think that he went in one direction, or another, and he will gamble that we will split up. So instead, he would go in the direction we least expect him to go. Directly ahead of us, in a straight line.”
Violin overheard her wife's comment, as she agreed, “That is a good point.”
Natsuru suggested, “When we catch him, I should be the one that confronts him. I am trained to take down people without harming them.”
Violin said, “That would be poetic justice, considering he was the one to give you such skills.”
Natsuru grinned, as she responded, “My thoughts exactly.”
Aeryn commented, “Also, if we had more time, and personnel, I would recommend sending people to the roof, and to all the exits, to watch for Lee, should he attempt to leave the building.”
Violin said, “You can't have everything, honey. But, that is a good plan.”
Aeryn smile became warmer, as she replied, “I know. Now, let us hurry. Because, I am sure our target is on the move. And he likely will not rest until he feels that he is safe.”
The five women then started walking directly in front of them, into the heart of the crowd and vendors, in the atrium, as quickly as they could, without making a scene, nor drawing attention to themselves.
(_)
At that moment, deeper in the crowds and vendors, of the bottom level of the atrium, Lee continued walking. But, as he made his way through the convention, he could not help but look at those around himself.
Lee passed by a teenage Drazi boy, and a teenage Narn girl, whom were together, with both of them dressed in Jedi robes and clothing.
Lee thought, 'I have to admit, those two make it work.'
Then, Lee passed by a sight he wished he never saw.
A pak'ma'ra wearing an original Star Trek series, red female Star Fleet uniform, complete with short skirt.
Lee winced as he looked away. He mentally reflected, 'I did not need to see that. Still, pak'ma'ra are hermaphrodites that require two of them to reproduce. So, the hosts of the convention cannot really stop them from wearing such clothing.'
'Still, I wish I had not seen that.'
Lee forced himself to continue walking. He soon saw a young Centauri couple walk by. As expected, the Centauri woman had her head shaved bald, and the Centauri man had a short style Centauri hair cut what popular for young Centauri generations that worked outside of upper class functions.
Both wear fully covered clothing corresponding to their genders from the Star Trek Deltan species.
Lee thought, 'I would have not even known they were Centauri, except for the man's hair style.'
Lee also saw humans wearing clothing, and costumes, that were clearly not made for human frames.
Lee thought, 'It makes sense there are alien scifi series with human are fans of those series... What a minute... Cosplay is canon in this reality. In the Babylon Five, season two episode. There All The Honor Lies. The gift shop was selling human looking, full face and head, masks to aliens. Along with gloves that look like human, or alien skin.'
'It would make sense that masks of aliens faces and heads would be sold to humans. And this is the place that both human and aliens would mostly wear such masks, gloves, and bodysuits...'
'Oh my... I have entered that trope, now...'
'Though, at the end of the Babylon Five episode, Epiphanies, there were three Elvis impersonators, the embodiment of professional cosplay.'
'That just cranks up the mind screwing even higher, because it could be difficult to tell who the humans are. And who the humanoid aliens are. And not just that. Such as, is the person wearing the klingon mask a human, or a humanoid alien... Speaking of which, I am not surprised there are alien fans of Star Trek and Star Wars. Star Trek was a very alien friendly series. And Star Wars is just plain fun to watch.'
'But, if I see an alien dressed like Indiana Jones, or Han Solo, I am calling it a day.'
'Still, I got to watch myself here. I could get in a lot of trouble with the locals, if I am not careful... Mos Eisley Cantina has nothing on this place...'
'I have to find a way out of here, before I go completely bonkers. And I think going straight might be my best shot. Fortunately, the vendors are lined in a grid pattern, so I don't have much to worry about, in getting lost, as long as I continue going in a straight line.'
As Lee continued to make his way through the crowds of the vendor's section, he saw teenagers of different alien species, including humans, of different genders, grouped together. Some were in costumes, some in casual clothing for their species and gender.
Suddenly, as Lee continued walking, Lee realized, something to his horror, as he thought, 'There is a small army of alien fans of sci-fi and fantasy fiction series here. And these type of fans tend be very intelligent, and technology orientated in their fields of professions. And these humans and aliens probably have accept to technology I can barely even understand. If these convention goers here ever learned that the world as myth theory is real, they will likely invade the rest of existence, and the multiverse will never be same.'
'And I just lead three recognizable anime and manga fictional characters here. While I am sure those three will not kill anyone, unlike Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, back in book three. The fans here might recognize them. Then, things will get real interesting, and really strange, real quickly...'
'Oh no... And in leading Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira here, I have lead matchsticks into a fireworks factory. I have to get out of here soon, before someone realizes what is going on, and all hell breaks loose soon after.'
'And if that happens, I am sure the so-called first ones of this reality would like to have a few words with me.'
'Oh hell... Speaking of powered beings, there are telepaths on this planet. Oh crap. They could be here. If one of them read my mind right now, I just screwed the multiverse a new one.'
Lee came to a stop, as he immediately looked around, but he did not see anyone staring out him. And his precognition did not alert him to anyone staring at him, either.
Lee thought, 'Okay. I may have lucked out just now. But, I cannot take any chances. I have to clear my mind, a make my way through this place, as quickly, but as calmly, as possible.'
'I know for a fact there are telepaths that are science fiction and fantasy fans. River is one. So, there are likely a few telepaths here.'
'Though, I am a precognitive science fiction and fantasy fan. So, I am not one to talk.'
'Still, if anyone is presently reading my mind. Just to let you know. I am not upset. I respect telepaths. Actually, one of my good friends is a telepath. Her name is River. She is a wonderful woman. So, if you have been reading my mind. Please. Please. For the sake of not only your reality, but the multiverse, keep what I thought secret.'
Lee then picked up his pace, as he continued walking though the bottom floor, of the atrium.
Three minutes later, as Lee passed a vendor's booth, to his left side, he saw a large collection of blu-ray boxsets, on a shelf, behind a vendor's table, which caught his eye. He stopped for a few seconds, to he turned to his left to look at the boxsets.
The dealer sitting in a chair, behind the table was a human man, in his early forties, in fairly good physical shape. He noticed Lee looking at the boxsets.
The dealer sat up from his chair, behind his table, as he commented, in english, “Quite a classic. Never a dull moment in this series. A true quality live action series. It ran for twenty seasons. Each season is twenty-six episodes long. Five hundred and twenty episodes long. Each episode running over forty minutes. It has twelve full length, two hour movies. Every episode and movie is full of action, gunplay, and hot women.”
“And this is the complete tv and movie collection. It is in multiple languages, dubbed and subtitles in both English and Japanese. With several episodes and movies having audio tracks with cast and crew interviews, along with several extras, including live actions omakes and the making of specials.”
“I will even throw in a complete, official copy of the complete soundtrack. You should know, over two centuries later, this is still one of the best transfers of a series from anime and manga to live action, from Japan to Hollywood, that has ever been made.”
Lee continued looking at the boxsets, as he stated, “I completely believe you.”
As Lee took a more detailed looked at boxsets containing the live action series version of Black Lagoon, he thought, 'This is likely the live action version of Black Lagoon that Tex-Mex wrote, and drew, about in the R Black Lagoon magazine... Of course. R Black Lagoon, as in Real Black Lagoon, or Reality Black Lagoon. As in Live Action Black Lagoon series... Dammit. Dammit. Dammit. In spite of everything, I still want to see this series. But, I do not have the time, nor the money to do so... But, I know some people who do.'
'And the worst case scenario, if they catch me, I can problem get them to let me watch this, before they kill me.'
The dealer asked, “Would you like me to bag it for you?”
Lee looked over at the dealer, as he stated, “I don't have the money for this. But, I know some people here who do. If you see three hot human women with brightly colored hair. A blond, a blue haired girl, and a redhead. Wave them over here, and them show this series. I can all but guarantee you a sale from them. And they will likely pay you in gold. But, for your own safety, do not ask any of them for their names. And do not ask anything about them. Just accept the sale in gold, enjoy eye candy, and move on.”
The dealer replied, “No problem. Though, I can tell you are interested in this series, as well.”
Lee admitted, “Of course I am. I have seen the anime and manga versions. I loved them. Yet, you could say these series literally haunts me to this very minute. Still, I cannot help be ask, how does that live action version of this series end?”
The dealer lips curled into a smile of glee, as he stated, “It ends in a spectacular fashion. World War Three happens, the island is invaded by several major military forces, whom get their asses kicked hard by the locals. Still, most of the cast dies in the end, with salary man and the redhead coming out on top, and controlling everything.”
Lee chuckled. He then said, “I can see that happening. Anyway, what is the quickest way out of here, from where we are at?”
While the dealer point a direction, that was to the behind the dealer. The dealer answered, “The nearest exit from here is the west end of the building. That way.” He then gave Lee instructions on the alternative exit to the convention center, which he recommended.
Lee thought, 'So, that means I came in from the south end. That makes sense, since I took a transport tube from the south side of town, further north, into the city.'
Lee said, “Thank you. And good luck with your sale.”
Lee then turned, and walked around the dealer's table, as he started heading in the direction the dealer pointed out. With Lee making his way out of the building, as quickly as possible.
(_)
A few minutes later, the dealer whom had spoke to Lee, saw five women walk near his booth. The women were about fifteen feet way from him.
Of the women, four of the women appeared to be in their twenties. They were a blond, a redhead, a blue haired girl, and a woman with dark blue hair. The other woman appeared to be in her late twenties, early thirties, and she had black hair.
The dealer thought, 'I wonder if those are the women that the man mentioned. Only one way to find out.' In the direction of the women, the dealer said, “Hey ladies.”
(_)
Nearby, Akira, Natsuru, Violin, Aeryn, and Ranma were making their way through the crowd, with Aeryn and Ranma having trouble keeping the other three's attention on the job of finding and catching Lee.
Ranma thought, with annoyance, 'It is like being in a candy shop with those three.'
Suddenly, the women heard a male voice say, from their left side, towards them, “Hey ladies.”
The women stopped, as they turned to see a man standing in a booth, behind a table. With a chair to his left side, and a set of shelves, behind the man. With merchandise on the shelves.
Akira asked, “Are you talking to us?”
The dealer answered, “Yes I am addressing you five ladies. All I request, is a moment of your time. Please.”
Akira turned to her friends, and they shrugged in response.
The women turned back to the man, as they walked over to their booth.
When they reached the dealer's booth, Aeryn asked, “So, why did you call us over to you?”
The dealer answered, “I believe you might find some of my merchandise interesting.”
Meanwhile, Akira and Natsuru noticed a set of shelves with boxsets of a single series.
Akira asked, “Is that was I think it is?”
Natsuru answered, “Sure looks like it. But, it cannot be that long a series?”
The dealer overheard the women, as he thought, 'I believe that man was right. Still, that man warned me not to ask their names. So, I won't.'
The dealer looked over at them, as he stated, “That is actually, the live action version of the Black Lagoon series.”
Natsuru looked over at the dealer, as she asked, “There is a live action version here?”
The dealer replied, “Yes.”
Akira turned to the dealer, as she inquired, “How many episodes are we talking about? And how long is an episode?”
The dealer answered, “Not countering the movies, soundtrack, and extras, that are included with the deal. Each episode is over forty minutes long. And the series runs for five hundred and twenty episodes.”
Akira and Natsuru instantly went slack jaw.
Violin responded, with a bit of surprise in her voice, “Whoa. Now, that is some marathon watching.”
While Natsuru and Akira collected themselves, Akira looked over at her friends, as she said, “I am sorry. But, I have to buy this. It is just to good an opportunity to pass up.”
Violin commented, “Don't feel bad. I have had my own fan moments, before, myself.”
Natsuru said, in a supportive tone of voice, “I am with you on this. This is too tempting an offer to pass up.”
Akira pointed out, “But, I do not have the money.”
Ranma rolled her eyes for a few seconds, as she thought, 'Sometimes, my lovers can be so forgetful.'
Ranma turned to look over at Akira, as she stated, “Have you forgotten?...” Ranma pulled out a small bar of gold, from one of her pants pockets, as she continued, “The Lagoon family are not the only ones that are rich.” She turned to the dealer, as she held up the gold bar. She inquired, “Is this good enough as payment for what we want?”
The dealer stated, “If it is pure. Absolutely.”
Ranma said, “It is.”
The dealer thought, 'My god. The man was right. That bar alone would pay for that set a few times over.' He inquired, “Then, the only question left, after you give me that bar of gold is. Do you want them in a bag? And do you want it gift wrapped?”
Ranma handed the gold bar to the man, with her right hand, as she stated, “A few bags will be fine.” She turned to look at Akira and Natsuru. Then, back to the dealer, as she continued, “And there is no need to wrap them. They are going to be opened soon enough.'
The dealer pocketed the small gold bar, as he smiled. He said, in a happy tone of voice, “A pleasure doing business with you.” He thought, 'And I will make sure I give them the whole set with nothing mess. I do not want to upset such generous customers.'
The dealer than turned to his left side, and he pull out, from beside his chair, three large, plastic shopping bags, which he set onto the table. He then opened the bags.
The dealer then turned around, as he carefully divided up the blu-ray boxsets into the three bags. When he finished with the boxsets, he included the cd cases with the soundtracks to the series, on top of the boxsets, in one of the bags.
The man check each item, to make sure everything was there. After which, the man looked up at the women, as he said, “All ready for you. Would you like a receipt?”
Akira stated, “That will not be necessary.” She mentally added, 'Besides, if there is a problem, it is not like we can return it to you. Still, if one of the discs is defected, we can find a replacement somewhere in this reality.'
Akira held one of the bags in her right hand, by the cord handles, while Natsuru grabbed the other two bags, by their cord handles. With a bag in each of Natsuru's hands.
Aeryn inquired, “So, how did you know we would be interested in this items?”
The dealer answered, “Was there was this human man, in a black suit, that came by here, a few minutes ago. He said that a group of women. One with blond hair. One with blue hair. And one with red hair. Might walk by and they would be interested in this set. I guess he was right.”
Ranma stated, “He is talking about, Lee.”
Akira cursed, “Damn it. This was a trap.”
Violin shrugged, as she commented, “If this is what Lee considers a trap, I could use a few traps like this. Because, this is the nicest, most pleasant, most rewarding trap I have ever been in.”
Aeryn lightly elbowed her spouse in disappointment.
Natsuru commented, “He knew this would be too tempting for us to pass up.”
Aeryn thought, 'We still might salvage the situation.' She asked, “So, which was did this man go?”
The dealer thought, 'I can tell these women wish ill for this man. Given this man just gave me my sale of the day, I am going to cut him a break.' With his right hand, he pointed directly in front of him, in the opposite direction of the way he sent Lee. He stated, “He went that way.”
Aeryn replied, “Thank you.”
The women then all turned and started walking in the direction that the dealer pointed in, as the Akira and Natsuru carried their bags of boxsets, with them.
A few seconds later, the dealer lost track of them in the crowd.
(_)
At that moment, on the west end of the convention center, Lee had passed by countless people and vendors, as he finally exited the atrium. And he made his way into a large hallway.
As Lee saw the exit to the building, in the distance, he heard a young female voice say behind him, in english, “Hey you. Stop.”
Lee stopped, as he thought, 'I do not recognize that voice. I might as well see who it is.' He turned around to see a young teenage, human girl, about twenty feet from him.
The girl was fair skin, with a slender physical frame. She had brown hair pulled into two ponytails, on the sides of her head. And she wore a long skirt, a blouse, and feminine boots.
Lee thought, 'I do not know who she is. But, I estimate her age is around thirteen. I will just humor her as quickly as possible, and then get out of here.'
Lee politely said, “Yes ma'am.”
The girl said, “I am pretty good at identifying the costumes people wear at these events. But, I cannot recall your costume.”
Lee thought, 'That is because I am not wearing a costume. Still...' Lee honestly answered, “I am dressed as an early, twenty-first century, southern gentleman.”
The girl pointed out, “I would think that suit would be a bit dated for the twenty-first century.”
Lee thought, 'Actually, it isn't. At least not in my reality. Though, I never did pay much attention to fashion styles. Even back home. Still, such a comments deserves a stylish reply.' Lee cracked a smile, as he said, “A good suit never goes out of style.”
The teenage girl giggled a little.
Lee mentally wondered, 'Now, who are you?' He calmly asked, “Now, might I asked who is inquiring?”
The girl answered, “My name is, Mary.”
While retaining his calm exterior, Lee mentally screamed, 'Oh crap! I recognize her now. She is Mary Garibaldi. The young daughter of Lise and Michael Garibaldi. But, why is she here?...'
'Of course, with her father hosting this event. She would be here to have some fun. She probably inherited her father's taste in fiction. I don't see any bodyguards nearby, but given who her parents are, and how paranoid her father is, I am sure they are close enough to act, if need be. As such, I have to get away from her right now, before I draw her bodyguards interest. Or worse, her father's interest.'
Lee said, “Well, I hope you have a pleasant night, Mary. But, I am in a bit of a hurry, and I have to go.”
Mary asked, “Before you leave, could you tell me who you are?”
Lee slyly replied, “Just a traveler looking for his next destination.” Lee then turned back around, and headed down the hallway, towards the exit.
(_)
Nearby, about fifty feet away, by the south wall of the east hallway, near the entrance to the center atrium, a man in a black suit, wearing an earpiece on his right ear. The man watched as Lee walked away from Mary Garibaldi.
The bodyguard spoke into his earpiece, “This is Jonah reporting in. Ms. Brown spoke to a man just now.”
The other end spoke into Jonah's earpiece, “Trouble?”
Jonah answered, “No. The man appears to be leaving. And he only turned to address Ms. Brown, after she spoke to him.”
The other end of the line inquired, “Did the man show any interest in Ms. Brown?”
Jonah responded, “No. He only spoke to her for a moment, and then left. He is heading for the west exit. Should I follow him?”
The other end of the line stated, “No. Since he shows not interest in Ms. Brown, then he is not our concern. Continue watching Ms. Brown.”
Jonah thought, 'That is fine with me.' He replied, “Yes sir.”
As Jonah continued to watching Mary Garibaldi from a distance he sighed, as he thought, 'When I took this bodyguard job, I thought it would be easy. I thought, Mary would just be the standard, rich girl, going shopping with friends, and going to the normal places normal girls go too.'
'But no. I will never say it out loud, but Mary is a tomboy at heart. And having rich parents takes her strange interests to whole new levels. She is one of the most athletically active and intelligent girls I know of. And fortunately, she is also one of the nicest girls I know of. In that respect, her parents raised her right.'
'Still, she is also a fangirl. She has some of the strangest tastes in fiction this side of the rim. And I know for a fact she gets her taste for her father. The man who runs one of the largest companies in the galaxy. And he is is a fan of children's cartoons... What does that say about the cosmic state of the sanity of the universe?... Or, lack there of?'
'And every time she goes to one of these conventions, those of us doing her bodyguard work for her get heartburn because she chooses to surround herself with lunatics... Hell, she is one of these lunatics.'
'And the worse part is that my boss, her father, made it a point that I could not show my presence to her, as I did my job.'
'Still, Mister Garibaldi pays well, so I am not going to complain too much.'
Jonah then went back to doing his job, watching Mary from a distance, with making sure she stayed safe.
(_)
A minute later, Lee exited the convention center.
When he reached the outside, he saw people continuing to come and go from the building.
While, Lee continued walking towards the parking lot in front of him, to his left side, he passed by a some vidphones on the outside wall of the convention center, with an awning over where the vidphones were located.
Suddenly, one of vidphones in front of him began to ring. Though, a human man near Lee picked up the phone.
Though, few seconds later, the man turned to Lee, as he asked, in english, “Hey. Are you, Quaid?”
Given Lee was the only other person nearby, Lee realized he was the one being addressed. He stopped in his tracks, as he turned to look at the man. He replied, “Huh?”
The man continued to look at Lee, as he said, “Melina is on the phone, for you.”
Lee mentally realized, 'Those are names from the original Total Recall movie. Either this is a trap, and I have already been found. Or, it is an asset, and somebody I don't know wants to help me. Either way, I might as well answer it.'
Lee walked over to the man and the vidphone. He took the phone receiver from the man.
As the man walked away, Lee turned to the video screen, as he placed the receiver to his right ear. He saw that the video screen to the vidphone was blank.
Lee answered, “Hello.”
Even though the voice was modulated, Lee could tell that it was a woman's voice that said, “Please, do not run. We are here to help. Continue walking towards the parking lot, and do not panic.”
Lee said, “Fine. I won't run. I will do as you instruct me to do.”
The voice replied, “Good.” The other end then hung up the line.
Lee replaced the receiver back on the hook by the vidphone screen. He then turned to his right, and he continued walking away from the vidphones and towards the parking lot.
A minute later, two individuals walked up from behind Lee, and they stepped up to him. Each person gently gripped one of his arms, as they walked beside him.
He heard a feminine voice, to his right, say, english, “Please continue walking While facing forward. We will talk when we get to our destination. Which is not far.”
Lee did as requested, as he thought, 'This is not good, but expected. Though, my precognition is not alerting me to any danger, but quite the opposite. So, I might as well go with them. Still, there is something familiar about her voice. I just cannot place it.'
From the angle they were at, Lee could not see there faces. But, he saw they were slender women, whom were shorter than him, but still slightly above average height for adult women.
And Lee recognize their clothing.
One woman to his right was dressed as Revy. The woman to his left was dressed was as Ranma.
Lee thought, 'Well, this is right outside of a sci-fi convention, so pretty women in costumes would likely not get the wrong kind of attention here.'
They soon made it to the parking lot. Lee could see that they were clear, to pass by the traffic lane, as they continued walking.
They then spend the next few minutes passing row after row of cars, as they got further and further way from the convention center building.
A minute later, they walked up in front of black painted, four door, convertible car that looked brand new, which parked facing the aisle of the parking lot, that Lee and the two women were standing on.
Though, the roof and windows of the car were raised on the vehicle. The roof was unmistakably as a collapsible roof, that as raised and lowered by mechanical means, built in the back part of the car.
The two women turned Lee to face ten feet in front of the car, as the driver got out of the car, from the left side driver's seat. The driver then closed the car door and walked around to the front of the car.
The person was a young black haired woman, whom wore a simple white white t-shirt, black pants, back socks, and black tennis
Lee immediately recognized woman, as he asked in a confused stated, “Lori, what are you doing here?”
Lori just grinned mischievously towards Lee.
At the same time, the two women beside Lee, let go of his arms, and they walked around to stand beside Lori.
When Lee got a looked at the two women, he saw that they both had red hair and fair skin. And they looked very familiar. They almost looked like twins, but there were subtle differences in their faces, and bodies, that were only noticed when they were standing side by side, with each other.
Then, a woman got of the front right passenger side of the car, and closed the door being her. She was a young woman as well. She wore the same clothing as Lori, but she had red hair, and tanned skin. She walked around the front of the car to join the other three women.
Lee immediately recognized the fourth woman. The pieces came together, as Lee blurted out, in surprise, “Ed... Oh my. You're the Lowe family.”
The four members of the Lowe family just laughed as Lee reaction.
Lee reminded silent, as the Lowe family laughed. Lee thought, 'So, the Last Resort Diner was another cover operation. This one by the Lowe family. But, I am guessing help me. And Lori is Bob. The two younger redheads are Stan and Lewis. I am not sure which is which. With them taking turns being a waitress and cook. I wonder which one of them is the good cook? And Ed was likely in the back office, doing finances, because I would have immediately recognize her.'
A few seconds later, as the Lowe family calmed down, the one in the Revy costume said, “It took you long enough figure out who we are. By the way, I am Stan Lowe.”
The one in the Ranma costume said, in english, “And I am Lewis Lowe.”
Stan and Lewis looked at each other, then turned back to face Lee.
Lewis asked, “There is one question we would like to ask you, Lee. Between Stan and I, which one of us is hotter?”
Lee slapped himself upside his forehead, with his right hand, as he thought, 'My ass is literally on the line, and these to guys, turned girls, are asking me a question like this. Their rivalry never stops... At least it is a friendly rivalry... Now, they want me to tell them which is hotter. A dangerous answer with only on correct solution.'
Lee said, “You are both physically and mentally equals. It is your personalities that separate you. That is how I wrote you. Lewis, your beauty comes from being an intellectual genius, that is also athletic. Stan, your beauty comes from being an athlete, with a brilliant mind. For a man, comparing beauty between women is like comparing apples and oranges. Both are great for different reasons, and tastes. Why most women do not understand this... Gender benders included... I do not know.”
Ed and Bob giggled.
Stan smiled, as she compliment, “Nice dodge.”
Lewis shrugged, as she replied, “It was worth a shot. It is not every day we meet our creator.”
Lee quickly said, “Kid, don't get religious on me. The very fact I unknowingly played god is the reason I am in this mess.”
Bob pointed out, in english, “The very fact you did is the reason me, and my sons, currently turned daughters, exist in the first place. We thank you for that.”
Ed stated, in a kind, mature, tone of voice, in english, “And I thank you for giving me a lifetime with them. And an even possibly better future. We thank you for that.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Ed said, “Though, it was not smart coming to Mars. You write about Mars a lot more than you likely realize.”
Lee responded, in annoyed tone of voice, “That is how they found me. I am such an idiot.”
Bob said, “No. You are actually doing pretty good, at the moment. Now, that you have gotten your ass to Mars. Let us see if you can get your ass off of Mars.”
Lee thought, 'Another Total Recall joke... Ah hell.' He stated, “The Total Recall injokes. The diner name, The Last Resort. Your aliases there.”
Bob shrugged, “All four of us loved the original movie. It is one of the best mind screw movies out there. Violin even quoted a few injokes from that one. But, that is normal for her in, any incarnation. That movie is almost as much a mind screw as the little story we are all a part of.”
Lee admitted, “You got me on that one. I loved that original Total Recall movie, as well. I saw it as a kid, and I was never the same, again.'”
Bob mentioned, “I can appreciated that. And if you are wondering. Ed picked out my alias, Lori, for my ID, way back, a few days before we were married. During the very end of Book Three of your stories.”
Ed commented, “I did it as Total Recall joke. And we later decided to run with that joke, when we came to Plata Podrido. With using the aliases Mary and George, from that movie, as well.”
Bob said, “And it was a good joke.”
Ed turned to Bob, as she stated, “Thank you, honey.” She then turned back to look at Lee.
Lee commented, “In Book Three, I never actually stated what that alias was for your female form, Bob. That is why your name threw me.”
Ed grinned, as she stated, “Soon after we met you, we realized that. Otherwise, you would have recognized Lori. Which makes the situation even more hilarious.”
Lewis spoke up, “Speaking of which. Stan and I had a bet. We decided to play a game with you, Lee. We would swap roles, and alternate between being the cook that fixed your food and the waitress that took your orders. We wanted to see if you would figure out that we were two different people alternating the use of the same names, Mary and George. Since you didn't figure it out on your own, I lost the bet.”
Lewis reached into a pocket in her red pants and pulled out a five dollar bills.
She handed five dollar bill to Stan.
Stan stuck the five dollars into the front of her black bra, under her black crop top shirt.
Lee thought, with mild amazement, 'I am living my own running gag. Welcome to the crazy.'
Lee said, “I had other things on my mind at the time. By the way, which one of you is the good cook? Though, I have no serious complains about what the other cook prepared. It is just that one of you is a lot better at fixing food, than the other. Though, the other person's food is passable.”
Stan said, “Lewis is the good cook.”
Lee said, “Thank you, for the answer.” He then turned to Ed, as he asked, “Ed, where were you in the diner?”
Ed answered, “I was in back, doing the finances. We knew you would recognize me.”
Lee thought, 'As I expected, And they also probably experienced the time loop.'
Lee stated, “You are right. I would have. You just have a unique, though beautiful face.”
Ed said, “I will take that as a compliment.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. So, how did you figure out I was the writer?”
Bob pulled from her pocket an old faded picture that Lee remembered. She held it towards Lee, for Lee to see.
Lee looked at the picture and realize who was on it.
Lee then pulled a picture from his pocket, and both adults compared the photos.
Though, Lee's was much newer, both photos showed a picture of Bob, as a man, Lee, and Rock, as a man, in the Rats Nest bar. On the other side photo, they had each signed their names.
Lee then remembered, as he stated, “Of course. That morning, at the Rats Nest.”
Bob grinned, as she commented, “Yes. Good times.”
Lee nodded once in agreement, as both of them put their pictures back in their pockets.
Ed explained, “It took some time to piece things together. But, that picture was a major clue. Rock must have forgotten about the picture she had. While Bob showed me the picture a few times. Over the course of our lives. And neither of us forgot about it.”
“When we heard about that bait you posted on your reality's internet, with Revy and the girls heading to the Devil's Hotel, we decided to beat them to this punch. Like we found out Eda and Yolanda did. We went a few months into the past, and set up the diner. Bob, as you can guessed, picked the name.”
Bob playfully said, “My pleasure, man.”
Lee chuckled a little at Bob's Total Recall injoke.
Ed went onto say, “We also went to the Devil's Hotel, and we spent a few early mornings, secretly wiring the restaurant and lobby, microphones. Distracting those clerks on duty, those nights, took only a little effort. We also hacked into the hotel's camera system, including the lobby, and restaurant.”
Ed thought, 'Given that restaurant was already wired for camera and microphone. And high quality at that. At we had to do was tap into the communications lines, undetected. And with my skill, and the skills I taught my children, that was child's play.'
Ed continued, “And our work finally paid off. We did notice how you were acting the morning you were introduced to Revy and the girls. You immediately came to the diner, and you were shaking like a tree in the wind. Only the writer would be that freaked out at such an otherwise calm meeting with beautiful women. That, and the picture of you three, confirmed that you were the writer. After you escaped, the girls had their private meeting about you, in the hotel restaurant. They compared notes, and they figured out where you were heading.”
Ed mischievously, as she stated, “And we watched, and heard it all.”
Lee winced, as he asked, “How were their reactions?”
Ed answered, “Mixed. They are not happy about what you did to them in the time loop. Yes. We all know about that. But, they seemed to be settling on a less than lethal, or personality destructive, revenge against you.”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he thought, with worry, 'Damn. Everyone, even the Lowe family, knows about the time loop. This is very bad. Still, from what these kind women here are telling me. The girls are not planning to go scorched Earth on my ass. Though, I do not want the Lowe family to worry on my account.' Lee stated, “That is comforting.”
Bob mentioned, “Well, all of them, except Roberta. She wants your head on a pike. And we know she, and Fabiola, are in this reality, at this point in time, on this planet, somewhere in Mars Dome One.”
Lee thought, 'I do have a few questions concerning the maids.' He questioned, “I admit that Roberta here is not good for anyone. But, how does Fabiola figure into this situation? Is she as pissed off at Roberta? Or, is she there to reign Roberta in?”
Bob answered, “From what we understand, Fabiola is here, at Roberta's own request, to keep Roberta from harming anyone else that does not deserve it. Though, she wants your ass just as much as Roberta. She is just more polite about it. And you have our sympathies, Lee.”
Lee calmly stated, “Bob, I appreciate that. And I freely admit to making my bed on that one. After I get my cancer cured, the next jump is to the Lovelace home, in the Black Lagoon anime reality I wrote about. A week after Roberta and Fabiola first left to find me. So, I do not cause a paradox.”
“When I get there. I plan to personally go to Garcia, and beg for his forgiveness for what I did to him. I will ask how I can make it up to him. I might end up a servant there, for a while. But, it would be worth it to get off of Roberta's shit list.”
The Lowe family all nodded in agreement, as Bob replied, “No argument there.”
Lewis said, “Speaking of that time loop. I am happy we took the day off to have fun at the festival, as a family.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. Twenty years of having a family day out was fun. Though, I don't think any of us fully remember it. Though, I do recall that Stan and I sometimes went to the festival in different genders combinations.”
Lewis spoke up, “Yes. Sometimes we went as brothers. Sometimes sisters. Sometimes as a brother and sister, whom swapped roles during the loops. Still, I wonder why we kept choosing differently. You would think that with a time loop, that it would be the same choose every time.”
Lee spoke up, “Let me guess, you choose which gender you went as for the day on a lark?”
Stan said, “Yes.”
Lewis commented, “That would be the case.”
Lee explained, “The night before the last time loop, Rock confronted me. She realized we were in a time loop, and she let slip that she was starting to get a sense of deju vu due to all the time looping. At the subconscious level, you both probably realized at some point that you had been a boy, or a girl, in the time loop, during the previous day in the time loop, and you both decided to go out to the festival as the other gender.”
The sisters nodded, as Stan said, “That makes sense.”
Lee stated, “This was one of the reasons I got serious about stopping the time loops. And I was able to do so, though I am not allowed to say how.”
Ed commented, “We can guess. And if it someone that powerful, we do not want to be on their radar.”
Lee coyly replied, “I am neither confirming, nor denying your comment. Though, I would agree, that if that is the case, it would be best to avoid such people.”
Bob inquired, “We agree on that. So, are you really dying of cancer? And that was the reason you allow us all to be the time loop for over twenty years.”
Lee honestly answered, “Yes. I am dying of cancer. And since I didn't start the time loop, I saw not responsibly in stopping it. I saw it as an opportunity to live a little. Enjoy the time I had, as it were. And the moment I realized that people were starting to barely remember enough to mentally suffer from repeating a day over and over again, I worked to stop the loop.”
Ed stated, “We realize that. And given your situation, you did nothing wrong. And I look forward to remembering that day. Family outings for us have always been pleasant. And at a deep level I feel these outings were no different.”
Bob said, “We will get Ranma to give us some of that magic smoke, from her magic lamp, later.” She thought, 'After we figure out how to ask Ranma, without tipping that we listened in and watched their conversation with River, in the hotel restaurant. Though, that should not be difficult, given I have three geniuses to rely on. Still, we might wait a week, back in Plata Podrido, for things to die down. Before we ask Ranma about it, in a discreet manner.'
Lee commented, “So, that is how they remember. Given everything Ranma has been through. Mostly before I wrote about her. I would not be surprised that Ranma would have something, on hand, to restore memories with.”
Bob deadpanned, “No kidding.”
All five adults chuckled, for a few seconds.
As they all calmed down, Ed stated, “Lee, I know you are in a bind. And there is not much we can do for you. But never forget, you have friends among those you wrote about. We exist. It is just that our hands are tied at the moment. Though, we will pray for you.”
Lee said, “Thank you, Ed, Bob, Stan, and Lewis. I will take help any way I can get it. But, I would prefer any direct help you can give me.”
Ed sadly stated, “As I said. Sorry, no can do.”
Lori commented, “I would recommend hiding near a wormhole. Like I did, by living in DS9. But you wrote that, and the girls read about it. So, that idea is a nonstarter.”
Lee stated, “I know. I dismissed that idea as a possible escape tactic, almost immediately. Because the girls would already look for that trick. Besides, B and Balalaika are with them. And B was the one to give you that idea. Well, I gave that idea to B to give to you. But, get the idea.”
Lori let out a little giggle. She smiled, as she said, “Yea. I do.”
Ed commented, “That is the point. As you can guess. We are already skating thin ice as it is, by being here. We do not want to upset B, nor her girlfriend, Balalaika. But, if you survive and resolve your all issues with the girls, you are more the welcome to come over to our home, in any reality.”
Lee thought, with mild happiness, 'That is a kind offer. I never had a standing off of being welcome to someone's home like that.' He said, in a kind tone of voice, “Thank you, again. And I completely understand you not wanting to anger those two. Which, I likely have.”
Bob commented, “Those two are not as bad as you think they are. You have to really piss them off to worry about them. I will be honest, you have come close, but they are no that upset with you. Hell, we met most of the members of Hotel Moscow, on occasion, from time to time. Including a few cookouts. Most of them are decent people, like Melvin.”
Lee thought, 'Since they tapped the hotel restaurant, it makes sense they know about Melvin. And it goes without saying they will keep Melvin's secret. So, I don't have to worry about that.' He responded, “Okay. That is nice to know. Still, I want you to know that I had no intention of gender bending the members of Hotel Moscow, except B.”
Stan stated, “We know. That is all on them.”
Lewis commented, “Though, their reasons are understandable.”
Lee turned to Bob, as he inquired, “Speaking of which, Bob are you?...”
Bob interrupted, “Locked a woman. Yes. I locked a few years ago. But, it is okay. Though, I did not enjoy my first period, but I have gotten use to that monthly visitor.”
Lee winced, as he said, “Sorry about that.”
Bob commented, “Hey you didn't invent human female biology. So, it is not your fault. Also, the same genes that make me a girl also made me immune to jusenkyo magic. And though it is tempting to try to body-swap with Ed. Swapping our souls, and using the instant man powder while in her body, it is just not worth a cheap thrill to risk our very souls.”
Lee said, in a firm tone of voice, “I agree. It is not worth the risk.”
Bob pointed out, “Good. But, you did bend the biology as far as you could without breaking it. I think that is one of the reasons River likes you.”
Lee asked, “You know River?” He thought, 'This could be very good for all of us.'
Stan stated, “Yea. She even babysat us when we were just kids.”
Lee eyes widened, as he thought, 'That is more of an answer than I expected.' He replied, “Really? I did not write that.”
Lewis said, “Yep. And it seems a lot of stuff has happened that you didn't write about. It kind out points out that you are not as responsible for as much of our lives are you may think you are.”
Lee stated, “That is nice to know. And do not take this the wrong way. I respect both River and your guys. And I think River has come a long way with her regaining her sanity. But, at the time Stan and Lewis where children, River was more of the insane part of the scale, than sane.” Lee continued, in a voice of disbelief, and annoyance, So, Ed, Bob, why did you intrust a lunatic with the welfare of your children?”
Lee saw Ed and Bob remain visibly calm.
Ed calmly said, “I admit that you have a point there. Though, you are only partly correct. River is almost completely sane now. Though, back then, when she started getting better. She was much saner most people gave her credit for. Including, her brother and friends. But, Bob and I realized that she was saner than the other believed, and we wanted to give her a chance.”
“Being with Bob, I have seen most of the fiction she likes, so I can understand where you are coming from with your information. Given the Firefly series, I am not going to fault you for what you do not know.”
“The short answer, as you stated, with being around Sam, who is River, is that you realize that River got her sanity back for the most part. It seems after the events of the Serenity movie, having Chang as a steady relationship, and learning to control her telepathy with Annie's help, she had regained her sanity years ago.”
Lee thought, 'So, Annie has a hand in helping River, as well. That is good to know. And if it was that so far ago. That means they are likely good friends. That does explain while they were so friendly with each other, when they worked together, to seal Jack away in Revy's mind.'
Ed continued, “Afterward, River expressed an interest in trying to show everyone that she had her sanity back. Which was not easy, but Annie vouched for her on that matter, and we gave her a chance. She has since proven herself to be responsible. She even seems to like children. And River and I are both among the few people that can talk to each other at a genius level. As such, she is a good friend of mine.”
Bob stated, “We are River's plan B. She just does not realize it. We knew she was Sam and we did our best to avoid River. At one point, we even warned her to avoid the diner. Our plan being to provide you with a quiet place to think. Which worked.”
“And if need be, we would also subtly direct you in a plan of action in escaping. If we had known the maids had come to town, earlier, we would have acted more directly sooner.”
Lee said, “Good. That is good planning on your parts. So, you are planning to help me. Just not directly.”
Bob replied, “Exactly.” She then pulled something from her left side pants pocket, and she tossed Lee the item.
Lee caught it, and he saw that it a set of keys and a clicker on a keyring.
Lee thought, 'These have got to be the keys to the black car the Lowe family are standing in front of. Now, this is a gift.'
Lee quickly looked back over at the Lowe family.
Bob stated, “This car behind us is brand new. Not stolen. It is an automatic. With anti-lock breaks. So, do drive like a maniac, like that time when you took the Lagoon's red GTO for a spin.”
Lee could not help but smile wickedly, as he recalled the time he was in that chase, and played chicken in the GTO, with Rock, Revy, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua, were inside. With four of the five women being so drunk they were laughing like hyenas almost during the entire time.
Bob noticed Lee's smile, as she commented, “Yea. That time.”
Lee continued to smiling, as he retorted, “You are one to talk.”
Bob returned Lee's smile, as she stated, “True. Anyway, this car has a full tank. Or, more accurately, it has a recharged battery. A radio. And a GPS system. That is as much help as we can give you. But, you now have wheels to find a place to hide, and reality jump from. Without them tracking you.”
Lee quickly put the keyring into his left, outside coat pocket, as he said, “Thank you.”
Bob mentioned, “Oh. And one other thing. Here.”
Bob pulled out something from her from right side pants pocket. She walked up to Bob, and she handed the item to him.
As Lee took the item in his hands, he saw that it was device with a wrist band on it.
Lee then realized what it was. He looked a back up the Lowe family, as he inquired, with curiosity and cautious excitement in his tone of voice, “Is this what I think it is?”
Meanwhile, Bob had walked back over to her family, with her turning back around to face Lee.
Bob smirked towards Lee, as she said, “Blue skies over Mars, babe. Blue skies over Mars. The rest is up to you. Good luck.”
Lee grinned, as he said, “I see the jokes never quit. And thanks.”
Bob happily responded, “What is life without a little humor. And you're welcome.”
Lee looked down at his hands, as he swiftly pulled back the sleeve of the arm he had his digital watch on. He then put around that wrist, beside the watch, with the watch between the device and his hand. Next, he rolled his sleeve back down over his wrist, to cover both the device and his watch.
Lee looked up at the Lowe family, as he thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I do have another question for them.' Lee inquired, “By the way, how were you able to handle those eighteen hour shifts every day?”
Bob answered, “Time dilation. We were actually spent nine hours. Our work day began at six AM. When we went to our break, we then teleported to our home Plata Podrido, at the beginning of our shift that day, and rested, then we came back, to work, when we left. At midnight, we went back in time, to our home in Plata Podrido, when we began that shift, and rested until six AM the next day, for our next shift.”
Ed mentioned, “Though, we were careful not to be seen by those outside of our family, in two places at once. And we got our groceries, and other items, from Mars.
Lee replied, “Okay. That makes sense.”
Lee thought, “There is something else I need to also say to Ed.'
Lee turned his attention towards Ed, as he commented, in a sincere tone of voice, “Ed, I have meaning to tell you. If we ever met. That I want to apologize for making you grow up and have a family.”
Ed warmly smiled towards Lee, as she flatly stated, “Lee, I am not Peter Pan. I did want to grow up. I love being an adult, and a parent. What you did, no one else would do for me. You have my eternal gratitude.”
Lee returned Ed's smile, as he replied, with relief evident in his tone of voice, “That is wonderful to hear.” Lee looked over at the brothers, turns sisters, as he said, “Stan, Lewis, sorry about the mood altering issues of you girl forms.”
Both of the younger women smiled at Lee.
Lewis explained, “We found some medication that works. And we can sneeze back and forth for at least the next forty-five years, or so. Likely longer. So, no issues there.”
Stan added, “And it is kinda fun being the crazy redhead, sometimes. Especially, when we can control when and where experience being in such states.”
Both sisters then started giggling.
As the two sisters calmed down, Stan then questioned, “Though, one more question. Revenge of the Nerds?”
Lee shrugged, as he casually replied, “I needed names that fit your character profiles. Please, don't judge me.”
The entire Lowe family just laughed, in response to Lee's comment.
A few seconds later, as the Lowe family calmed down. Ed then used her right hand to pull out a reality device from her right pants pocket. She said, “Come on girls, let's go home, to our Mars.”
The Lowe family then grouped together a bit more closely, and Lee watched as Ed used the device, with the Lowe family returning their home on the Mars of the Cowboy Bebop reality.
Lee grinned, as he thought, 'There goes one of my success stories. Literally.'
Lee let out a small laugh. He then continued his thoughts, 'I wonder if this is what it feels like to be a parent. Still, if I don't get out of here, I will never to have the chance to find out.'
Lee pulled out the keyring, with keys and clicker to the car, from his coat pocket. He used the clicker to check to make sure it worked. Both locking and then unlocking the doors.
Lee then walked over to the left side driver's door. He opened the door, and got into the front seat. And he found that the women had already adjusted the driver's car seat, and the steering wheel, steering column, and rearview windows, to Lee's height and size.
Lee smirked, as he thought, 'The Lowe family really are geniuses. Even Bob, in her own way. Now, lets' get out of here. And I know in which direction I am going. This is the southern part of the city. I am going south, to the outer loop. Then, I will go counterclockwise, around Mar Dome One, to the north end. Where I am going to find a quiet, private place to reality teleport.'
Lee then shut the door behind himself, buckled himself to the seat, and he inserted the key into the ignition to start the engine.
As the car engine started, given it was a dark outside. Even though there were street lights. The sensors on the car caused the running lights to come on, the front lights came on, and interior lights of the dash board to come on.
Lee also noticed the GPS touchscreen that came up on the center of the console. But, he did not worry about that, for the moment.
Lee check to make sure that the fuel gauge was full. Which it was. He made sure the high-beams were not one. Which they were not.
Given the vehicle’s front side was pointed out of the parking space, Lee just checked both ways, then put the car into driver, and drove out of the parking space, and towards down the aisle, away from the convention center.
Lee was soon on the road, by the parking lot, and he was heading towards the nearest highway, at the speed limit. Which was he noted was in kilometers, but so was the odometer in Lee's new car.
Soon, Lee was heading out of the interior of the city, and to freedom.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, back inside the W.E. Convention Center, inside a hallway, on the eastern side of the building, the five women inside the building, whom were after Lee, were walking together, as they finally came to the same conclusion.
Akira stated, “We lost him.”
Akira, Violin, Natsuru, Aeryn, and Ranma, then came to a stop. The five women turned and looked at each other.
Ranma commented, “I don't think we ever had him. Do you think that vendor sent us on a wild goose chase to help, Lee?”
Natsuru answered, “Possible. But, why would he?”
Akira said, “I wouldn't hold it against him, either way. And we got something from that dealer, at a good price. So, I am not complaining.”
Violin commented, “Well, the only thing we can do now, it head back to our cars, and start from square one in our search for Lee.”
Akira held up one of the bags, with their blu-ray boxsets of series, as she stated, “At least we can put these things in our car, now. They are getting kind of heavy.”
Natsuru just shrugged, as she thought, 'Well, not for me. Having superhuman strength and stamina has its advantages...' She cracked a grin, as she continued her thoughts, 'Especially, in bed... Still, I am not going to mention that to Akira. It might hurt her feelings.'
Aeryn pulled out her encrypted radio. She pressed the talk button, as she stated, “We lost the writer.”
On the other end, Rock asked, “How did you lose him?”
Aeryn looked over at the other women, as she stated, “I will let the other explain. After we leave our current location. That way you can yell at them, to your hearts content.”
On the other end, Revy asked, “How bad is it?”
Aeryn coyly answered, “Let us just say that Lee know how to play people.” She then put up her radio, and turned to the four other women. She stated, “Okay. Let's go back to the cars. Then, you can explain to Rock, how we lost Lee.”
Akira and Natsuru deflated, as all five women then turned and headed back to the south entrance to the building, and to their cars, which were parked, in the parking lot, outside of that side of the building.
(_)
Around two hours later, Lee drove northwest, on the northeastern part of outer loop highway of Mars Dome One, in a counterclockwise direct.
The highway was eight lanes wide. four lanes going in each direction, with offer ramps being used to enter and leave the highway. There was a concrete divider between the two oncoming lanes of traffic.
Give the traffic drove on right side of the road, Lee was in the inner most lane of the outer side of the highway loop.
Lee was presently searching for a place to jump realities.
The highway was not very busy, though there were a number of car on the road, both coming and going. And the speed limit was reasonable for the highway they were on.
In the time since leaving the convention center, Lee had learn how to work the global positioning satellite, GPS, navigational system, located on the monitor in the middle of the cars front dash board. It was a touch screen, and the text was in english.
Lee was not worry about someone tracking him, considering the only ones after him were Revy and the others, and not the police.
The GPS system showed that the outer highway itself was a gigantic loop around the city of Mars Dome One.
Though, Lee also kept the radio off, to keep himself from being distracted.
The highway was eight lanes wide, with four lanes for those going one way, and the other lanes went the other direction. With vehicles driving on the right side of the road.
There was a concrete and steel divider that ran along the middle of the road, separating the oncoming lanes of traffic. Though, there was no fence between the outer side of the loop, which Lee was on, and the flat red soil beside the road. Lee just chalked that up to lack of budging to put up a fence on that side. Though, there was a fence on the interior side of the highway loop, facing the city, itself.
Also, the highway was much like an interstate highway, in that there were no traffic lights, nor stop signs on the road. There were only entry onto and exit ramps off the highway.
And at points in the highway, where it split off to other highways, this including ramps going into road tunnels, under the city itself. And there was a minimum speed limit on the highway, though the minimum limit was far below the maximum speed limit on the highway.
There were street lights line both sides of the road, providing plenty if illumination, long with the car lights that were on, from all the cars on the road.
This allowed Lee to drive with his shades on.
As Lee drove, he noticed that while the outer side of the loop highway, around the city, it did not actually run along side dome wall of the city.
The Dome of Mars Dome One was actually bigger than Lee had originally thought it was.
From the street lights, along with light from the city, the light flooding in, though the domes panels and Mars two oval moons, Deimos and Phobos, Lee could see that there was huge stretches of flat, barren red soil.
The red soil stretched from the outer side of the highway loop, to the wall of the dome, itself. The red soil went on for between one to three miles, before the soil hit the outer dome wall.
In some places along the dome wall, there were huge factory complexes built into the dome walls, where natural resources from outside the dome, from other parts of Mars, were brought, and refined. Before the resources were sent off-world, at various spaceports.
Though, since Lee was not planning on getting off the highway, anytime soon, he drove in the lane closest to the highway divider.
As Lee continued to drive, he thought, 'Now, were would I want to hide. I have been on this loop for about an hour and a half. When I got the car, I immediately drove south, until I hit this highway loop, and I immediately started going east, because I was in the southern part of the dome. Now, I am on the northeastern part of the dome, and I am going northwest, towards the northern most part of the dome.'
'At least the signs are in english. And the traffic is light. Also, the speed limit is a hundred and twenty kilometers an hour. That is just under seventy miles and out. And this car has cruise control.'
'If I am right. Presently, the southern part of the city is where Revy and the others will concentrate their search for me. So, I am going to the northern most part of the dome, and reality jump from there. With them look, it will be far enough away there their tracking equipment will not pick me up.'
'From the GPS map, I should reach the northern most point of this highway loop within fifteen to twenty minutes. Once I get there, I will get off at the next exit, and head as far north as possible. I will then ditch the car, and reality jump.'
Just then, Lee noticed a car driving on the inside lane of the oncoming side of the highway, to his left side, on the other side the concrete divider, between his car and the other car.
Lee recognized the car too late, at it was the red GTO car that belonged to the Lagoon family.
Lee thought, with worry, 'You have got to be kidding me.'
A second later, their two cars passed by each other, with the concrete divider being the only thing between then,
Lee saw Rock driving, with Revy beside her. And Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer sitting in the backseat.
Unfortunately, right before they passed by, Revy turned her head towards him. With Lee seeing recognition in her eyes, while Revy saw recognition on Lee's face.
A second later, the two cars fully passed each other.
But, Lee knew he was too late. He had just been spotted.
Lee immediately push the gas peddle down a little further on his car, but he did not floor it, as he thought, 'Damn it! The only thing I hate more than being right, is being wrong. I still have a chance to lose them. It is going to take them at least a minute to get back here, by exiting an off-ramp, and re-entering the highway, on this side. I just have to get off of this highway, at the next exit, and drive deeper into the city, to lose them.'
(_)
A few seconds ago, on the same highway, in the Lagoon family's red GTO car.
As Rock drove the vehicle, Revy sat beside her lover, in the right front passengers side.
In the back of the car, from left to right, stat Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer.
None of the women were in a very good mood, after they heard how Lee had lost Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, Aeryn, and Violin.
Though, Shenhua was feeling a bit of poetry to the situation, as she said, “I find it funny what Aeryn told us by radio. That Lee used Akira and Natsuru's fangirl tastes against them, to stall, and lose, all five of them.”
Lotton commented, “You have to admit that it was brilliant plan, which was thought up on the spot. Par for course for Lee.”
Rock kept in front of her, on the road, as she stated, “And that live action series. To think that there is one version that is so long. Over five hundred episodes, not including the films made of that series.”
Revy commented, “Well, when we have time, Rock, we are going to see it. Just as soon as we deal with Lee.”
Sawyer commented, “But at this point, I doubt we are going to find him.”
Suddenly, they passed by a black car, on the other side of the concrete divider, Revy turned towards the car. She saw the driver's face, with his shades on. From his facial expression, she could tell that she recognized the man, at same time as he recognized her, and the other women in the car. And there was only one man, outside their group, on Mars Dome One, that would recognize them.
Revy yelled, “It's Lee! He just passed by us, in that black car!” She turned to Rock, to her left side, as she stated, “Turn around, Rock! We can still catch him!”
Rock saw the Lee car moving away from them, in her rearview mirrors. She then focused in front of them, as she stated, “We cannot do a u-turn. There are to many cars to drive the wrong way, and the highway divider prevents getting on getting into the coming lanes.
Rock then saw an exit sign, as she smiled. She continued, “But, we could be able to exit the highway, turn around, and enter the other lane, in about thirty seconds.”
Revy said, “Do it.”
Shenhua asked, “How did Lee get a car?”
Sawyer commented, “It doesn't matter. What does matter is that we found him.”
Lotton agreed, “Correct.” She then pulled out and used her encrypted radio. She pressed the talk button, as she stated, “We found Lee. But, we cannot immediately chase him. We are on the northeastern side of doom, on the outer highway loop. Lee is heading to the northwest. To all those in the area, Lee is driving in a black car.”
A female voice, on the other end of the radio, said, “Don't worry. We see him. And we got him.”
(_)
On the other side of the highway, a mile from the GTO, and its occupants, Lee was driving at a slightly faster speed than the speed limit allowed.
Lee mentally berated himself, 'I did not take into account that they would bring their vehicles with them. Stupid. Stupid. Stupid. Now, I have to gamble going slightly over the speed limit is like back in the U.S., were if you are not going too fast over the limit, most of the time the police will ignore you. With people allowed to go faster, as long as they are not going ten over.'
Lee then saw the side for the next exit, as he mentally grumbled, 'And just my luck that the next exit into the city is ten kilometers away. And it is through a tunnel intersection.'
Lee then looked around and he noticed that there were no cars in front, or behind him. He though, 'Well, at least I don't have to worry about hitting anyone. It is just that Revy is going to have a clear field of fire when they turn around.'
'I could got onto the red soil. But, there is almost nothing out that way, but a very solid wall, in an even more open field of fire.'
'Though, either way, I have got to get off this highway, before they come back.'
Suddenly, he precognition scream for him to take off the cruise control, while rolling down the hood of his car.
As Lee did so, he thought, 'Thought too soon.'
When his car roof have completely folded into the back of the car, and the windows were rolled down, he risked a quick look behind him, from his right shoulder. What Lee saw caused his jaw drop in surprise.
In formation, were three very familiar, and very different, zipcraft, of the Bebop crew.
In the lead was the Stingray II, piloted by Spike. Behind, and two her back, and to the left was the Rail Tail, piloted by Faye. And to Spike's back and to the right was Jetta in her Hammerhead.
Lee composed himself, as he turned back to the face the road. He used his car door controls to move the two side mirror to look at the three zipcraft behind him, in the air. Next, he moved his center rearview mirror up to where he could also use that mirror to see the three zipcrafts behind him, in the air.
Lee mentally screamed, 'Great they didn't just bring their cars, Faye, Spike, and Jet... ta... Brought their zipcraft with them. Now, I got to deal with an air force. And I don't even have a gun! Okay. Think. What do I have? I have my wits, my cards, and a GPS system... Which is a map... And then there are the exits up ahead... I can still turned this around.'
Lee held his left hand firmly on the steering wheel. He then used his right hand to quickly punched up the dashboard monitor touchscreen, as the GPS system came on. He divided his attention between the straight road in front of him, and the GPS map, as he started looking at the map of the road in front of him. He soon saw what he was looking for.
Lee thought, 'Yes. You may have the air. But, fortunately, where I am heading, I can use that to my advantage. If I play my cards right, I will only end up having to deal with only one of you. And that I can handle with this car.'
Instantly, Lee precognition again warned him, he looked as his rearview mirrors to see the Stingray beginning a strafing run.
Lee moved his car to his right, onto the nearby lane, just in time to avoid the bullets hitting the road.
With the car mirrors, Lee saw that the Hammerhead was coming in right behind the Stingray.
Lee thought, 'I have to time this just right.”
Using his precognition, Lee moved his vehicle into the lane he had previously been in, just before The Hammerhead fired its harpoon gun, missing Lee's car. The harpoon bounced off the road, with the zipcraft quickly reeling in its empty hook.
Next, was the Red Tail, which Faye fired a few grenades in the distance in front of Lee, as warning shoots.
Lee's precognition told him not to worry, so he just ignored the shots, as he continued driving through the smoke the shots created from the road.
Lee smirked, as he mischievously thought, 'Now, to piss them off, and get them to do what I want them to do.' He gripped his steering wheel with his right hand.
For the next few seconds, Lee held his left arm, and he gave them a left-handed, middle finger salute.
He then lower his hand, as he headed for where he hoped he could lose them.
Lee then saw that about a mile down the road he was one going to divide into two, two lanes roads, on each side. On the side Lee was on, the interior two lands, including the one Lee was on, was going into a tunnel system, the other outer two lanes continued to run the outer loop highway. On the incoming lanes, opposite to the lanes Lee was in, the two lanes coming out of the tunnel, on the interior side, merged with the two outer loop lanes to create a four lane section of highway.
Lee thought, 'Now, I just need to hope they do what I expect them to do, in chasing me.'
(_)
At the moment, up in the air, behind Lee's car, Faye commented in the radio, “The driver just gave us the bird.”
On the radio, Revy said, “Yep. That's Lee.”
Over the radio, Jetta commented, “Arrogant bastard.”
Over the radio, Rock said, “Don't underestimate him. Everything he does is for a reason.”
Faye inquired, “What do you mean? He is literally, just a pasty face otaku. What threat could he be?”
Over the radio, Rock stated, in a serious tone of voice, “That is what he wants you to think. He knows a lot about us. And he will use everything he knows against us. The little details could mean the difference between victory and defeat. Also, he spent twenty years in a time loop learning all sorts of things. And he out played River in that poker game.”
Faye commented, “Considering they are friends, I think she threw that game for him.”
Jetta pointed out, “It does not matter. We still got him.”
From her radio, Revy ordered, “Remember, we want Lee alive, and conscious. And mostly unharmed, so we can harm him.”
Spike said, “We will keep that in mind.”
Faye stated, “He is heading into a tunnel system. I am patching into the local GPS grid. And this gift from Ed for my Red Tail is very nice. Anyway, the map is coming up... Guys, the tunnels down there are a rat maze, with several exits.”
Jetta complimented, “Not bad. He thinks he can lose us. Okay. Who wants to play cat to his mouse, in this maze?”
Spike and Faye said, in unison, “I will.”
Spike pointed out, “I am the better pilot.”
Faye admitted, “Okay.”
Jetta ordered, “Faye, you and I will fly up, and keep a bird's eye view of the situation. I want you to go to the far end, to the north part of the exits. I will go to the far end, to the south of those exits, on this part of the city. If Spike loses him. We can still find him. Just keep you eyes pealed for that black car.”
Faye replied, “On it.” She mentally added, 'And with our enhanced eyesight, this will be easier than you think, Jet.'
Jet and Faye piloted their zipcraft to their assigned locations.
A few moments later, Lee had entered a tunnel section of the highway system.
A few seconds at Lee entered the tunnel system, Spike skillfully piloted the Swordfish into the tunnel, after Lee.
(_)
A few seconds ago, just before Lee entered the tunnel, he saw in his mirrors, he watched as Jetta and Faye broke off their pursuit, while Spike follow him into the tunnel system.
Lee thought, with delight, 'Yes. This is what I wanted. Cowboy, or now, cowgirl, I knew Spike would be the one coming after me in the Stingray. Ironically, I could not pulled off this next trick, if it was the Red Tail, or the Hammerhead. Now, I just have to slow down slightly, so she catches up to me at just the right time.'
Lee slowed down a few miles, from the speed at which he had previously been going.
The Stingray closed in on Lee's car even faster than before.
Just then, Lee a fork in the road where the two lanes split into a, Y, road formation, where two lanes branched to Lee's left, and two lanes branched out to Lee's right.
The Stingray was just about to reach Lee, just as he took the left road.
Suddenly, Lee saw in his rearview mirrors that the Stingray follow him in the forked road. He smiled wickedly, as he thought, 'And this is what I learned from watching, Spaceballs. Bwahahahaha!'
Lee slammed the brakes, with the Stingray overshooting him.
When Lee came to a stop, Lee put the car into reverse, and he floored the gas pedal, as he looked behind himself, to make sure he did not hit anyone. Fortunately, he was clear.
When he backtracked to the fork in the road, he put his car into drive gear, and he drove into the right fork in the road.
Lee then saw that he was in a straight away in the tunnel for about a minute. He turned his attention back to the GPS touchscreen. As he used the device, he thought, 'The Stingray is build for speed, not maneuverability. Especially not tight turning. Like the Red Tail and Hammerhead are designed for.'
'Now, where do I want to go when I get out of this tunnel system, and back to the surface road? I need to make a stand, and lose them in the confusion. The question is where?...'
Lee used the fingers on his right hand to have the touchscreen map show him where he would exit on the road he was in, and he saw where he wanted to go, nearby the exit, on the surface.
Lee thought, 'Ah, that place will do. And it is close by where I will exit out this tunnel'
Lee noticed the exit number he needed to take.
Lee then turned his attention back to the road in front of him, as he made sure to follow the signs to the exit number he wanted to go to.
(_)
Meanwhile, as the Stingray cruised down the left fork in the tunnel, Spike cursed into the radio, “Shit! I overshot him! He slammed the brakes just as I followed him through a fork in the road. He then backed up, and went the other way. And it is too tight in here for me to turn around, and follow him. And the bastard likely knows that!”
On the radio, Revy stated, “Told you.”
On the radio, Jetta asked, “Which way did he go?”
Spike answered, “He took the right side?... North. I should exit this tunnel system in about minute myself.”
Over the radio, Jetta ordered, “Faye. Lee should be coming your way. Keep an eye out. I am going to stick around here. This guy is slippery than an eel. We are not taking any more chances.'
On the radio, Faye replied, “I understand.'
A few seconds later, the Stingray safely exited the tunnel system, with no problems, and Spike was back in the air.
(_)
A few minutes later, as the Red Tail hovered in the air, inside the ship, from her cockpit seat, Faye saw Lee's black car come out of one of the tunnel exits she was looking at.
Faye stated, over her radio, “I found him. He is just took an exit off from the outer loop highway, towards the dome wall.”
Over the radio, Jetta warned, “It is clear he is heading somewhere. Can you stop him?”
Faye answered, “Yes.”
On the radio, Jetta flatly responded, “Then, do it.”
Faye sarcastically replied, “Yes, mommy.”
Spike giggled over the radio.
Jetta retorted, over the radio, “You are one to talk, Spike.”
On the radio, Spike admitted, “Yes, I am.”
(_)
At the moment, as Lee took the off-ramp, on a dirt road heading parallel with the dome wall to the north end of the city, north of the highway loop.
Lee saw from his rearview mirrors, the tail lights of the Red Tail heading right for him.
Lee thought, 'Ah, here comes, Faye. I knew it was likely I was going to face one of them. But, I can handle, Faye. If I am correct, she will swing around in front of me, and hover in my path. With her hoping that I will stop, or she will shoot. I am sure she is not bluffing, and she would shoot me. But, all I got to do is time this right. I don't have to wait for the exit. I am now on a dirt road right beside flat red soil. I can just drive on that, if I need to.'
A few seconds later, Faye brought the Red Tail around in front of Lee, and hovered about fifty feet in front of him.
Lee smirked, as he thought, 'Looks like I am right. Now, to time this.'
Lee used his precognition to time his attack just right.
As Lee came within thirty feet, he slowed down, just as he turned on the high-beams, temporally blind Faye.
Lee immediately turned to his left, onto the red soil, heading north, as he head for his destination.
After Lee straightened his car out, he turned off the high-beams, so those in the direct he heading towards, would not so easily see him coming.
As Lee drove, red dust was kicked up in his wake.
Lee thought, 'Now, if I am right. The windows of the Red Tail are not designed for sudden light bursts. Though, they will transition to handle to shield for light of the sun, in space. Sort of like how nightvision to nor vision works. And given Faye has the super-soldier serum. She should be fine.'
(_)
At that moment, inside the cockpit of the Red Tail, Faye yelled, “That bastard used his high-beams to blind me!”
Over the radio, Jetta asked, “Are you okay?”
Faye said, “I should be. I am hovering over the ground right now. So, now worries about crashing.”
With her radio, Rock inquired, “Did you have the super-soldier serum, Faye?”
Faye answered, “Yes.”
On her radio, Rock stated, “Then, your sight will fully return in about ten minutes. Now, were you able to tell which way Lee went?”
Faye answered, “Yes. When is heading for a large industrial complex located on wall of the dome, to the north.”
Over the radio, Rock ordered, “Okay Faye. Stay where you are. I can see where he is going from here. That is a huge factory complex. I can guess he plans to lose us in there. We need to group up, and find him together. Where exactly are you, Faye?”
As Faye could tell that her sight was returning, she answered, “Before Lee blinded me, the GPS said I am on a dirt road, right off of exit ten, on the northeastern side of the highway loop, just on the other side of the loop, opposite from the city.”
On her radio, Rock stated, “Good. Everyone meet up, with Faye. When we do, we will then head for Lee, together.”
As Faye piloted the Red Tail a little higher off the road, as she hovered there, she said, “I agree. That is a good idea, Rock. And it will give me time to get my sight back. And then, we are going to kick that bastard's ass.”
(_)
In his black, four door car, Lee looked at the huge, sprawling industrial complex, that he was driving towards, as he thought, 'Well, since Faye has not followed me. I guess I was correct.'
'Also, given my normal headlights and the background light, around me, I can see the red soil in front of me, fairly well. And I don't see any large rocks, any other other road hazards. So, I am fine for the moment, on that point.'
'Now, I need to find the main road, that enters into this complex. Then, once inside the complex, I need to head for the main control building. Once there, I will figure out the details for the next parts of my plan. And given that most of the lights are off in that place, that place is in shutdown, with, at most a few guards to attend to security.'
Lee then used his car's GPS system to find the main gate.
A minutes later, Lee found the main two lane road leading into the factory complex. When he reached the main gate, which was open, as he drove through it, and entered the interior road system of the factory complex, which was paved.
The factory complex spread for miles, in all directions, with building towering thirty to forty stories high. With most of the lights off on the buildings.
As Lee drove through towards the main control building, listed on his GPS system, near the center of the factory complex, he realized he was heading for the place of his next battle.
(_)
Around the time Lee drove his car into the factory complex, on the ground floor, inside the atrium of the W.E. convention center, the dealer that had aided Lee, was standing behind his table, to the left of his chair. He was stretching his legs, as noticed two young, human, women in maids outfits, walking toward him.
The vender noticed that the two women were walking side beside with each other.
The man saw that both women had long hair which was draped down their shoulders, and back. One had green hair. The other had purple hair. Both of them had their hair held a single, long ponytail.
Also, the purple haired woman has a gold necklace, around her neck. The necklace has a golden cross that was draped across the middle of the her covered chest, over her black long sleeved shirt.
The green haired woman was to the right side of the purple haired woman.
The dealer noted that the directness of their stride showed that they were not to be messed with. And the crowd realized this, as everyone around the two women literally parted for them, while the two women passed by.
As the two women approached the dealer, the man thought, 'Okay. These two are trouble. Though, as long as I am polite, and patient, I should be find. This is not the first time I have dealt with lunatics at these conventions. Though, I have to say that the lunatics at these conventions rarely spare any expense on their costumes. And these two women are no exception to that rule.'
The dealer continued his thoughts, with amusement, 'These places just bring a high class of lunatic than most places. And that is one of the reasons I like coming here.'
When the two woman came to a stop, in front of the table, across from the dealer, man warmly smiled, as he calmly inquired, “And what can I do for you two lovely ladies tonight? By the way, those are nice costumes.'
Both women look at the men, with any sign of expression on their face, nor eyes.
This set the man on edge. Though, he did his best not to show his nervousness.
Meanwhile, those around the three adults, continued the convention as usual, while they ignored what was happening right beside them.
At the dealer's table, in question, the purple haired woman looked across the table, at the dealer's face, as she asked, with forceful intent in her tone of voice, in english, “Did you speak to a black haired, fair skinned man, in a black suit, hat, and sunglasses, earlier tonight? And with you then later speaking to a set of five women? One with black hair, one with dark blue hair, one with blond hair, one with red hair, and one with blue hair. That you sold a copy of an entire series too?”
The dealer answered, “Yes. On both counts. And that was quite a sell. On another matter, you two might want to enter the cosplay contest. I am sure you both would win first place, together. But, the entries for the contest tonight is about to close...'
The dealer did not get a chance to finish, as the purple haired woman used her right hand to grab him by the front of his shirt, and haul him over his table. After his leg slid off the other end of the table. The woman then reversed her direction, as she dragged the man backwards, to where his back was onto the table.
The purple haired woman then leaned over him, from the man's right side, to be face to face the man.
The green haired woman stood a few feet to the dealer's left side, as she calmly gazed down on what was going on.
The people of around just continued to ignored them, With many of those people thinking what was happening was just an act, or some roleplaying that got out of hand.
The purple haired woman's lips curled into a crazy smile, as she bared her teeth at the man. The woman coldly ordered, “You will tell me everything you discussed with the black haired man, and in exchange, I will let you live.”
The green haired woman lean over by the dealer's left ear. She whispered, in a serious tone of voice, in english, “Be warned. We are not pretending. We know you know the Black Lagoon series, so you know who we are. I suggest you talk quickly and honestly. Roberta is not in a good mood, right now.”
The green haired woman then leaned up, and took a few steps away from the dealer, and her friend.
As the dealers processed what the green haired woman said, he stared at the Bloodhound's vicious grin.
A second later, the man's brain fully engaged, as he mentally screamed, 'Oh god have mercy on me! How is it possible?! I am right next to Roberta and Fabiola. And they are pissed off! That smile can not be faked... I just realized. That man was not joking when he said that he was haunted by the Black Lagoon series... Oh shit! The maid are after him... And the sexy women I sold those boxsets too... Oh lord! No wonder that man did not want me to ask them their names. I think I recognize them from other series. Yet, for some strange reason, this happening here, makes so much sense. I might as well tell them what I know, so I can get out of this alive. And I can later call for help.'
The dealer quickly explained, “The man in a black suit came to my booth. We talked about a series of DVD boxsets I was selling. He said he did not have the money to purchase them. Though, he also said that a group of women, with brightly colored hair, like yours, might walk by. And all I had to was tell them about the boxsets, and explain what the series was about. And they would buy the entire series. He then asked me for directions for the nearest exit, and I give him the directions he wanted. That is the last I saw of him. I do not even know the man's name.”
“Anyway, a few minutes after he left, the women he talked about came by. I waved them over, showed them the series, and they bought it with gold. I got the sale, and he got out.”
The dealer thought, 'I am not suicidal enough to tell the Roberta to her face, that I also sent those five women in the opposite direction from the way I sent the man in.'
Roberta growled, in the dealer's face, “What was the series about?”
The dealer gulped. He then said, “The live action Black Lagoon series.”
Fabiola said, “It is just like what they said over the radio.”
Roberta continued looking at the dealer, as she answered, “Yes.”
Roberta then let go dealer, as she turned to her right, towards Fabiola. She dropped her grin, as she stated, “It is time to leave.”
The dealer immediately crawled under his booth, as the two women turned and walked away from him and his merchandise.
With Roberta being to Fabiola's right side. And, as before, the crowd quickly parted for them, as they walked by.
Though, the dealer watched the two maids walked side by side with each other, away from him, as he overheard some of their conversation.
As the two women continued walking, at a comfortable pace, in the directly they came in, from the south, Fabiola asked, “If what the others said is true. Why did you want us to come here, in the first place?”
Roberta answered, “To see if they left anything out, over their enthusiasm of their new prize.”
Fabiola replied, “Oh...”
Roberta pointed out, in a cold tone of voice, “It is clear that the writer used their own tastes against them. This is something we must wary of, when we face him.”
Fabiola said, “I agree. Should we head to the meeting place, of the others, as they plan the raid of the factory complex, where the target has run off into?”
Roberta flatly stated, “No. I do not wish to interfere with their hunt. It is best for us to just hunt with each other, and leave them be. I have learned the hard way that the more hunters after the fox, the easier it is for the fox to escape.”
Fabiola agreed, “Yes. I know what you mean.” She thought, 'You, of all people, would know.'
Roberta commented, “Instead, we will head to where we expect the writer to go next, and laid in wait, nearby.”
Fabiola inquired, “But, where would that be?”
Roberta asked, “If you could not outrun your pursuers, where would you make your stand?”
Fabiola answered, “I would be in a fortress, surrounded by an army. For as little good that would do against us.”
Roberta questioned, “Exactly. And what fortress, with an army inside it, can a civilian enter with little difficulty? And gain at least some help, from the army inside?”
Fabiola was silent for a few seconds. She then realized the answer, as she stated, “Of course. But, there are several such places in this city.”
Roberta inquired, “Which one would be the most obvious one?”
Fabiola said, “The one closest to the factory, in question.”
Roberta responded, “Yes. You are learning, my student.”
Fabiola pointed out, “But, what if they capture the writer?”
Roberta lips curled into a wicked grin, as she answered, “Do not worry. Should they capture the writer, they know better than to deny us a share of the spoils.”
In response to her friend's comment, Fabiola lips curled into a wicked grin, as well.
The dealer then lost sight of the two women in the crowd.
The man thought, 'I lucked out big time. I will stay here for a couple of minutes. Then, I will find a vidphone, and to call for help.'
(_)
Two minutes later, the dealer got up from under his table. Given the security cameras in the room, and the importance of the situation, the dealer did not even worry about his merchandise, as he rushed, in the opposite direction the maids went. He soon found a vidphone, in the near by north hallway, of the convention center.
The dealer held the receiver to his right ear, as he immediately dialed an emergency number, that only a few people on the planet had access to. With the emergency line not requiring a credit chit to use.
As the other end was being connected, the man thought, 'I am glad my boss got back from Minbar, yesterday. It is sad that his friend is dying, but he got to say his goodbyes. And that is the important part. Now, I need to focus on the matter at hand.'
When he got someone on the other end to pick up, he stated, “This is Gregory Anderson, from accounting... I know I am on vacation, but this is important... Tell the boss that we might have a serious situation brewing that needs his immediate attention.”
Gregory Anderson thought, with worry, 'I hope my boss, Michael Garibaldi, CEO of Edgars Industries, can keep a lid on this insanity, before it could literally blow up Mars Dome One, itself...'
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 05: “The Tower: Part One: The Ascent.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Babylon Five Reality. Date, January Twenty-Eighth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Location, planet Mars. City, Mars Dome One, capital of Mars. A factory complex on the north part of the interior city of dome that surrounds Mars Dome One from the outside atmosphere of Mars. Time, early in the night.
Presently, Lee drove his black convertible, with its roof and windows lowered, down one of the paved roads, between the buildings, that made up the factory complex,
While, most of the outside factory lights were off, and the ambient light from the city and sky were mostly cut off, from the nearby building, there was security lighting by the doors, and sides of the building, for safety reasons.
Given the straightness of the road, Lee was not driving very fast, he took a moment to look at the GPS monitor in the dashboard of his car, for a second.
Lee saw that the building he was heading for was the next building to his left.
Lee turned his attention back at the road, as he let his foot off the gas pedal, while he gently applied his brakes.
As Lee's car came to a stop, in a big clearing, beside one of the corner of the building. Lee looked up at the huge building, that went up for dozens of floors, while stretching for couple of city blocks, in each direction.
Lee thought, 'Now, that is a place I can get lost in. Still, I got to hide my car. But, where do I hide it?'
Lee looked around him, he then spotting a narrow alleyway, between two of the nearby buildings.
Lee thought, 'I better back this in several feet, and come in from behind, so I have a straight shot out of here.'
Lee then drove over to the alleyway. He then turned around, with the rear end of his car facing the alleyway. Lee back his car several feet, while giving himself plenty of space on his side, for him to get out of his car, by using the car door.
As Lee came to a stop, and put the car in park, he thought, 'I better bring up the roof, and rolled up the windows.'
After Lee used the electronic controls of his car, to raise the roof, and roll of the windows, he turned off the car, unbuckled himself from his seat, opened the door, and stepped out of the paved road.
Lee thought, 'At least with the paved roads, it will make it harder to find me, and my car. Now, to lock my car.'
Lee then locked his car, and shut the door.
As he put the keyring with the car keys and clicker, in to his front left pants pocket, he walked out of the alleyway, the way he had come in.
When he exited the alleyway, and he faced the corner of the main control center of the factory complex. He then saw a nearby side entrance.
Lee thought, 'Good. A side entrance is better to come into the building from. I don't have to waste time going through the reception area. And I can make my way to the heart of the building quicker.'
'Given, this is a factory complex, and not a bank. It is probably not that well guarded, nor locked. With many of the doors not wired for security. And with luck, the lights on the inside are on, because it is likely there is a guard on duty. If that is the case, I will do the last thing the guard expects. Explain the situation, to the guard, with given details. Ask the guard for help. And tell the guard to call the police.'
'Still, before I go inside, I need to come up with the other parts of my plan.'
Lee then took off his shades, so he could see better, as he looked around him.
As Lee looked around, he saw a sewer entrance, a crowbar leaning against the wall, and a trash chute hugging up the skyscrapers buildings. With the chute emptying out five feet above the street, directly to the ground. And from all these items, several plans were starting to form in his mind.
Lee smiled, as he put back on his sunglasses. He thought, 'Now, I have some plans. And I know which one to start with. Still, I am going to burn time doing all this. But, I should still have enough time to get ready for the party I am expecting.' He then smirked, as he continued his thought, with feral glee, 'And it is going be the most explosive party in my entire life. And I am the man of the hour... Now, to get the door, and open it.'
Lee briskly walked to the side door. When he reached the door, he pulled out his lock picking tools.
Lee found the door's knob was unlock and the lock above it was a simple deadbolt lock, that could be picked.
In a record thirty seconds, Lee used his precognition to help him pick the door lock, and open the door.
As Lee opened the door, he quickly walked inside, with him locking the door behind him. This time, with both the deadbolt and the knob lock.
Lee noticed that the lighting inside was turned on. With every other ceiling light being on. He thought, 'Good. I can see where I am going. Now, to trust my precognition.'
Lee then used his precognition to guide him to the location in the building that he needed to go to.
(_)
A few minutes later, outside of exit ten of the Mars Dome One outer highway loop, on the dirt road where Faye had her Red Tail landed, that was two miles from the factory complex Lee had escape too.
As Faye's eyesight hare fully returned, from being hit with the high-beams from Lee's car. She had decided to save fuel and land her zipcraft.
Then, she was sitting inside her cockpit, Faye saw as the rest of her group showed up in their cars and zipcraft, had finally arrived.
A few of those that were on the other side of the city, or would take to long to reach the location by driving, just teleported themselves and their vehicles, to the area. Given the flat terrain, and no one else around. There was little risk of them doing so.
They then spent ten minutes talking to each other. With Faye and the others outside their vehicles, as they talked to each other.
During this time, Faye had used the Red Tail's GPS system to provide a map and layout factory complex for Rock and the others present.
Once Rock accounted for everyone and had the information from the GPS system, she then told everyone to get back into their vehicles, and follow her, in the GTO.
Those present got back into their vehicles, with Rock driving her family's red GTO, in front of their convoy. Though, except for getting in line, everyone waiting for Rock to give the signal to go.
To Rock's right side, in the front passenger seat, Revy sat beside her. With a few of their friends in the back seat.
Rock's left hand on the steering wheel, and her right hand on her radio, as she said into her radio, “Now, that everyone is here, except for the maids, I want everyone to follow me. When we get to the main control center, we will park, get out, and I will issue more orders, then.”
Rock set down her radio. She then started her car, as she drove towards the factory complex's main gate, with the other cars following her, and the zipcraft flight above her car.
As Rock drove, her lips curled into wicked grin, as she thought, 'I wonder what Lee has planned to try and count my small army... I will find out soon enough.'
(_)
At the moment, inside the man control building, Lee made his way through the hallways, and staircases of the building, all of which were illuminated, as he continued using his precognition to guide him to where he wanted to go.
Lee walked briskly, but softly through the hallways.
As Lee walked down the hallways, the doors to his sides were closed.
Lee thought, 'I am not sure where I am heading, but I trust my in precognition to see me through.'
Just as Lee turned the corner, he noticed one of the doors in front of him was cracked open, with light coming from inside.
Lee thought, 'Well, my precognition tells me there is no danger. So, I will sneak a peak inside.'
Lee quietly walked up to the door, and he slightly push the door open enough to see inside the room.
In the room, to Lee's right side, he saw a desk set against the right wall. The desk was about twenty feet, in front of him.
The desk had a thin computer monitor screen turned on. To the sides of the monitor were speakers. In front of the monitor was a keyboard and mouse. Wires to all three ran into the wall, with no plug in outlet.
Actually, Lee did not see any plugs in the room, save for a few electrical plugs. There were no communications plugs, or wires, see on the walls of the room.
Lee thought, 'This works for me on so many levels with my plan.'
Lee continued looked around, he saw that the soft yellow light from the room came solely from small lamp on the desk, by the computer equipment.
Behind the desk, while facing the computer monitor, was a man sitting in a swivel chair. The man was a heavy set human man, in his early fifties. The man wore a security uniform, and boots, as he was quietly sleeping.
Lee thought, 'You know. If this immediately situation was not so serious, I would laugh at the cliche nature of this situation. I don't see any gun on him. Now, to wake him gently, and talk to him. He will react badly if I don't immediately explain that I am not a trespassing thief. But, that I really do need his help.'
'Still, chances are, he might be the only other person, besides me, here, in this place. I don't want to him to die on my account. So, I got to help him, as well.'
Lee quietly opened the door fully, and walk inside.
When Lee came within ten feet of the guard, he coughed.
Nothing happen.
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “Hello.”
The guards eyes snapped open, as he turned his chair to face Lee. He demanded, “Who are you?”
Lee quickly said, “Please, remain calm. First, I not here to rob, nor harm anyone. I am being chased. And before this meeting is over, I want you to call the police.”
Lee could tell from the man's face that he heard every word that Lee stated. But, the guard replied, in a confused tone of voice, “Huh?”
Lee ignored his desire to roll his eyes, as he thought, 'Too much, too fast, too soon, for this man. He is not fully wake and his brain has not fully engaged. I am going to have to walk him through this. And not say a word about the reality traveling.'
Lee calmly requested, “From your uniform, I know you are the security guard for this place. As such, I am sure your computer has access to the cameras for this factory complex. Please, keep in mind that time is of the essence. I would like you to punch up the cameras on your computer screen, and select the camera feeds that look at the main gate of the complex. It is a matter of life and death for myself.” He mentally added, 'And maybe you, as well.”
The guard turn to this computer monitor by him, as he used the mouse to bring up the camera system.
As the video feed was pulled up on a window of the screen, the guard looked at it, as he asked, in a surprised tone of voice, “What the hell?!”
Lee leaned over to look at the computer screen to see that the color video on the sub-window shows a convoy of cars, and flying vehicles, heading for the front gate. The Lagoon's red GTO bringing up the front.
Lee thought, 'Revy and Rock literally brought army with them, to come get me... Honestly, I am flattered. And from the speed that are going, and the time it will take it organize, once they come to a stop, I think still got around ten minutes until they get here.'
The guard further inquired, “What are those vehicles? Who are they?”
Lee answered, “Those are they ones after me. And from my guess is that they are heading right for this very building?”
The guard asked, “Why?”
Lee stated, “The GPS system listed this as the main center for the factory. That is why I came directly to this building.”
The guard cursed, “Damn it.”
Lee requested, “I know. It is a lapse in security. It is not your fault. Can I have access to your computer for a moment.”
The guard asked, “There is not much you can do from here?”
Lee agreed, “No. But, I can even the odds a bit.”
The guard stood up from his chair, and stepped away form his desk, as he offered, “Go ahead.”
Lee walk to the back of the desk. He turned to the desk, and leaned over. He used the computer mouse to find which screen icons on the computer that he wanted it to use.
First, he pulled up the three dimensional, grid style, schematics to the building they were in, and the buildings by the building they were inside.
The guard noticed what Lee was looking at, as he questioned, “What are you doing?”
Lee stated, “Most battles are won before the battle even begins. I am not going to be blindly running around this area. I have a plan. And the longer I can stay one step ahead of them, the more time I buy for both of us.”
The guard said, “Good point.”
Lee commented, “And while they are likely going around these building blindly, I will know where I am going. And thus be on step ahead of them.”
The guard complimented, “That is actually a good plan.”
Lee spend the next few minutes looking at the schematics, and figuring out a few routes to take, floor to floor. He then closed that window, and pulled up another program on the computer.
The guard saw what he did, as he commented, “Okay. I did not expect you to do that.”
(_)
The convoy had passed thought the entrance to the factory complex, a few minutes ago.
As the convoy of cars made their way between the factory buildings, on the paved road, Rock was driving the lead car, when everyone saw the factory light up both inside, from the windows of the buildings, and the outside walls of the buildings, like a Christmas tree.
The lights in the night could be seen for miles around.
Beside Rock, Revy stated, “Do you think, Lee did this?”
Rock kept her eyes in front of her, on the road, as she answered, “Yes. And he did this so he can see where he is going. He knows about our enhanced sense. He is just leveling the playing field.”
Revy made a feral grin, as she said, “This is going to be a fun hunt.”
Rock agreed, “You got that right.”
Revy inquired, “With the thickness of these buildings, do you think our infrared binoculars are going to help?”
Rock answered, “I doubt it. These buildings are very heavily lined, and thick with metals, and other materials. Partly because they are right up against the dome wall. And with these narrow alleyways, we do not have a clear line of sight. And Lee will likely try to stay deep in the buildings, as he runs through those buildings.”
Revy questioned, “So, you think he will not just try and hide in one place?”
Rock said, “He knows better than to do that. And because of that fact, we will track him down, inside the buildings, the old fashioned way.”
Revy replied, “Okay. So, do you know where he is?”
Rock stated, “Yes. I have a good idea where he is. The main control building. Also, something just occurred to me.”
Rock kept her left hand on the steering wheel, as she pulled out her radio with her right hand. She stated, into her radio, “Everyone, we are going to park a block from the target building we are heading for. That is because, I do not want to take any chances. I do not want Lee to double back, see one of our vehicles, and hot wire them. While sabotaging a few of the others, to blockage the other vehicles, and prevent us from following him.”
As Rock put down her radio, from the back seat, Lotton complimented, “Good thinking, on your part, Rock.”
Rock kept her eyes in front of her, on the road, as she said, “Thanks.”
(_)
Back in the security room of the main complex building, Lee closed out the folders, on the monitor, showing the video feeds, schematics, and controls to the lights. He next use the mouse to highlight an icon to something else, besides what he was working on. He then leaned back up, and looked at the guard. He saw the guard looking back at him.
The guard inquired, “So, we got the lights on. For the most part. That does what exactly?”
Lee stated, “We can see them coming, and when you call the police, there no mistaking where the call is coming from.”
The guard responded, “Good point. How did you know I would have access to the lights?”
Lee answered, “It is simple logic that to save electricity, and money, most of the lights in this place are turned off. But, given your job, you would have access to turning on the lights, to get a better look through the cameras.”
The guard replied, “You are correct.”
Lee questioned, “I take it that I cannot do much more than that here? Such, as lock all the doors.”
The guard answered, “No. I cannot shut and lock the door from here. I can only turn on and off the lights. The management does not want any one person to have access to where they can shut, and lock all the doors at once. That is just common sense, dealing with safety. This is not a bank, nor government building. There is nothing really of value that a group can steal from here, without heavy equipment.”
Lee inquired, “I can see your point there. Are most doors in this place closed when not in use.”
The guard commented, “Quite the opposite. Per safety regulations, all the hallways and rooms, with more than one exit, have to be kept open, in case of fire. Though, most office rooms and auxiliary rooms are mostly left close, but not locked. Unless I lock them. The only locked doors here are to the outside of the buildings, and even they can be opened from the inside.”
Lee asked, “That figures. When is the next shift for the workers of this factory?”
The guard answered, “In about ten hours, or so.”
Lee commented, “Well, this whole mess should be over by them. Can you call the police from here?”
The guard stated, “Actually, I have a cellphone in my pocket that I can use to call the police with.”
Lee said, “That is good. That way you can find a safe place to hide, and call the police from there.”
The guard commented, “I guess that this place is not safe?”
Lee answered, “No. It isn't Some of them will come to this very room. You don't want to be here when that happens.”
The guard replied, “I agree.”
Lee thought, 'There are still a few things I need to clear up, before I can move to the next part of my plan. Also, I need to think about wildcards. While the lighting knocks out the nightvision, and extra sensory advantages, they may have. They may use other things against me, such as infrared equipment. But, these buildings are made with heavy materials. And infrared is good, but not foolproof. Plus, if they do not use such equipment at the beginning, I doubt they will start using it when I reach the offices, and windowed areas. Because, it will just not occur for them to do so, that late in the game.'
'So, those problems are taken care of, by the simple understanding of the human nature. Such as, if a person doesn't use something at the beginning, they are less likely to use such advantages later on.'
'Still, there are the problems with possible snipers. Though, I will worry about that later.'
'Either way, I need to get the ball rolling on my plans, before they get to this room.'
Lee inquired, “Can they access the computer system to this place from any other terminals?”
The guard stated, “No. The other computers are all shutdown, and password protected. Do you want to log off this computer, so they cannot use it?”
Lee stated, “No. This group has hackers. If we do not provide them with a turned on outlet, they will find another way into the computer system. Speaking of which, does this place have a wireless network?”
The guard answered, “No. This company that runs this place is too cheap to install one.”
Lee cracked a smile, as he responded, “Good. Then, we will leave this one to drive them nuts in trying to get it work.”
The guard questioned, “How?”
Lee inquired, “Do you have a knife?”
The guard stated, “Sure. The company won't even let me have a PPG, but I am not going to work here completely unarmed.”
Lee said, “I understand what you mean. Anyway, for this part of my plan to work, I am going to shut the camera screens off the monitor, and then I am going to cut the cords to the keyboard and mouse. They will think that it will take them less time to splice the keyboard and mouse to work, than to find another computer, and hack their way to the system. It will be a case of so near, yet so far.”
The guard laughed, for a few seconds. He then commented, “You are evil.”
Lee smirked, as he commented, “I know. Still, are there other keyboard and mouses nearby?”
Guard responded, “No. Not in this section of the building. And they are all like this one. They are tied into the wall, with no plugs, because there was a rash of thefts of such items, a few years ago. But, management didn't want to pop for more security, than myself, and anyone else on their one, or two man, shifts. So, they tied it all into the walls, with it going to a main mainframe.”
Lee replied, “That figures. And that works for us.”
The guard pointed out, “Still, this is damaging private property.”
Lee responded, “At most. It is a hundred credits. It is not that big a deal.”
The guard conceded, “That is true.”
Lee said, “And this is opposed to them destroying more expensive property, while trying to get to another location, to take into the computer network.”
The guard commented, “When you put it like that. I can see your logic.”
Lee mentioned, “Good. And I am not just cutting them on the cord. There is a method to my madness. I am cutting these cords at the base of their attachments to the keyboard and mouse. Meaning they will have to take it apart to reach the wires to fix it.”
The guard realized, as he replied, “That will up eat even more of their time.”
Lee requested, “Exactly. Now, please hand me your knife.”
The guard replied, “Fine.” He then pulled out his folded pocket knife, and he handed it to Lee.
Lee took the knife in his hands. He said, “Thank you.”
Lee turned around to face the guard's desk, as he unfolded the knife. He then used the knife blade to cut the cords of both the mouse and keyboard, as where the cords were attached the device.
A few seconds later, when Lee was finished, the holes where the cords attached to were flush with the surface of the devices.
Lee then folded the knife blade back into the handle. As he handed the sheathed pocket knife back to the guard, he said, “Thank you, again.”
The guard took the closed knife, and he put it into his right side pants pocket. The guard suggested, “You're welcome. Now, why not cut the cords at the wall, as well?”
Lee pointed out, “No. That will make it too hard for them. And they will look elsewhere to find another computer. I have to give them something to work with.”
The guard agreed, “I see your point. Still, I may be able to help you.”
Lee looked the guard in his eyes, as he stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Listen. Hell is literally seven steps behind me. Those after me are trained killers. They will not hesitate to kill you if you show your face to them. That is why I came to this factory complex in the first place. To lose them, in a place that almost no one else is around. Now, you need to go find a place to hide. And call the police.”
The guard said, “I understand. I will do what you request. But, what are you going to do?”
Lee lips curled into a wicked grin, as he stated, with a bit of excitement in his tone of voice, “I am then going to give my best interpretation of a mix between Die Hard and Riddick.”
The guard replied, “Huh?”
Lee answered, “As I already stated. I am going to keep them busy, and buy time for the police to get here.”
The guard said, “I got you. And you will be needing this.” From one of his pockets, he pulled out a shiny, chrome, small credit card shaped, metal card. He handed the item to Lee.
Lee took the card and looked at it.
The guard explained, “Almost all the doors here have electronic locks on the panels, by the doors. That key card will unlock, or lock them. The lights on the boxes on both sides of the doors, will tell you which is with. Green light is unlocked. Red light is unlocked. Also, all the doors and wall have at least an inch of steel. They will not be able to break through, easily.”
While Lee pocketed the card, he thought, 'Along with playing the multivere's most extreme form of hide and go seek. It looks like I am about to play the most insane game of red light, green light, in the multiverse. Though, given the door I used to come inside, did not have a key lock. And he said almost all the doors. Not, all the doors. It is possible that some of the doors were either not upgraded, or some of the doors were replaced. So, I need to be mindful this will not work on all doors. Still...'
Lee looked up at the guard, as he said, “Thank you. I can see how this could come in handy.”
The guard said, “No problem. While the company did not allow have a PPG, they did give me something that can be used to trap, or delay intruders. I never thought I would end up giving it to an intruder.”
Lee replied, “Well, it is for a good cause. And I will try to keep them busy, until the police arrive.”
The guard commented, “That could be a while. But, I will do my best to help expedite matters.”
Lee stated, “Thank you. Now, go hide, and call the police, while I start this chase.”
While both men then turned and headed for the door to the hallway, the guard said, “Good luck.”
Lee responded, “You too.”
Lee allowed the guard exited the room first. Lee then exited the hallway.
As they entered the hallway, Lee noticed that now all the lights on the ceiling were turned on, instead of every other light being turned on.
Lee thought, 'This is a good sign that most of the factory complexes lights are on. Though, the guard hinted that may not be the case for everywhere. Well, beggars cannot be choosers. Now, to stop this run.”
The guard then went one way down the hall, to find a place to hide.
Meanwhile, Lee went the other way down the hallway.
Lee went deeper into the complex. He followed the path in his mind, that he had made from looking at the factory complexes schematics, as he began his battle of wits with his foes.
(_)
Five minutes later, Rock and Revy lead their convoy to a parking lot, one city block from the main factory center. So, Lee would not spot the cars, and other vehicles.
As everyone parked their vehicles, and zipcraft, Rock and Revy, got out of their car. Along with the two women letting Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer out of the backseat, before they closed raised their front seats. Along with locking and closing the two doors to their vehicle.
While Rock, Revy, Shenhua, and Lotton, had their weapons, Sawyer headed for the trunk of the GTO, to retrieve her chainsaw. She used a key that the Lagoon family had given her, to open the trunk, safely pull out her chainsaw, closed the trunk, took the key out of the lock, and pocketed her key.
Meanwhile, Revy walked around to where Rock was standing.
Everyone else was also getting out of their vehicles, while retrieving their weapons and equipment.
As Rock and Revy looked around at the people with them, Revy whistled. She commented, “We really brought an army with us.”
Rock calmly agreed, “Yes. But, let us not say anything to jinx the situation.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “I hear that.”
Rock then noticed Benny and Dutch walking up to them.
Dutch had her Smith & Wesson model six twenty-nine, forty-four caliber magnum, six round revolver in a shoulder holster, under her left armpit. Along with that pistol, she had her Remington eight seventy marine magnum, twelve gauge shotgun slung over her right shoulder.
Dutch's shotgun was pump action, and with the ammo tube being able to hold up to seven rounds. With Dutch loading her shotgun with a combination of buck shot and slugs.
Walking beside Dutch was Benny, whom was carrying small, closed cloth cases, with handles on each other them. With her gripping each item by its handle, with one of her hands. One case had her tool kit, the other case had her laptop, data discs, and computer peripherals with it.
As Dutch and Benny reached Rock and Revy, and came to a stop, the four women looked over at each other.
Rock inquired, “Where is Janet?”
Benny answered, “Back at the car, we rode in, with Eda.”
Rock looked over and saw Janet in the distance, beside one of the Lagoon family's other cars. She was beside Eda, whom road with Dutch, Benny, and Janet.
Rock then turned back to Benny and Dutch, as she asked, “So, Janet is not going to be with you, two?”
Benny smirked, as she stated, “No. She is going hunting with the rest of you.”
Revy questioned, “What is weapon is she going to bring with her?”
Benny continued to smirk, as she slyly inquired, “You know that weapon we got you as a gag gift, for the Christmas, after we learned about that Tvtropes website?”
Revy and Rock giggled, as the both remembers the answer to Benny's question. Revy then commented, “Perfect weapon for being crazy.”
Benny responded, “We all agreed. Even Eda stated that it was an appropriate weapon for the occasion. Speaking of which, Lee was an idiot to let us learn about that little website.”
Rock pointed, “Yes. But, let us not forget that he knows all the genres, as well. And that is one of the reasons he has been able to keep one step ahead of us.”
Benny admitted, “True.”
Revy asked, “So, where are you two heading?”
Dutch stated, “Security room.”
Benny said, “With luck, I will be able to help make this hunt go very quickly. I will try to patch into the video feeds in this place, while Dutch plays look out.”
Rock complimented, “Good thinking.”
Dutch said, “I just want to find this bastard, and get on with the revenge part. I don't care if I am the person that actually catches in him, as long as I get a piece of him, at in the end.”
Rock agreed, “I feel the same way.”
Benny inquired, “And what are your plans?”
Revy answered, “We are just going into the main building, and see what happens.”
Rock commented, “With our luck, we will bump into him.”
Dutch replied, “You might just be right about that.”
Rock said, “Let's hope so. Now, let me try to bring some organization to this madness.” She turned to Revy, as she requested, “Revy, would you please do the honors.”
Revy pulled out the semi-automatic pistol holstered in her left armpit, with her right hand.
She then pointed her weapon to the ground, as she used her left hand to pull back the slide of the gun, to load a bull into the chamber of the weapon.
She then aimed her pistol into the air, and fired a round. She then put the safety on her gun, and holstered it back into her left holster.
Everyone immediately looked at her, Rock, Dutch, and Benny. Revy then yelled, “Hey everyone! Listened up!” She continued, in softer tone of voice, “Rock has something to say.” She turned to Rock, as she went onto say, in a calmer tone of voice, “They're all yours.”
Rock replied, “Thank you, Revy.” She then turned to look at the group in front of her, as she stated in a loud, yet even tone of voice, “The main building that we are heading to is one building over, directly north of us! But, I do not want all of us heading for that place. Split up, and use caution. Do not shoot unless you have to. Keep in mind, Lee is unarmed. And he is trying to avoid a fight. So, there is no serious danger, unless we get trigger happy, and accidentally shoot each other.”
“Since we do not have the time, nor manpower, to do a floor by floor search of each building, I want to concentrate on the main building we are heading to, and the buildings by around it. If one of you sees, Lee, or finds evidence of his trail, immediately notify all of us by radio, so we can tighten our search to that area.”
“We can find him, it will just take some time.”
“And remember people. We want Lee alive, conscious, and not crippled. Revenge is useless, if he is not aware of it, nor can feel pain. Also, if you find someone in there, try not to harm, nor kill them. We are after Lee. We do not want to draw the attention of the locals, with broken bodies, dead corpses, and missing people, if we can avoid it.”
“And we are all working together. This is the same rules as on Plata Podrido. If there are problems between any of you, contact Revy and I. And we will sort out the problem. If you cannot play nice with each other, you can go home.”
(_)
At that moment, the back of the crowd, Spike, Faye, and Jetta wear standing together, they had out their weapons, and were reach to search.
They heard every word. In response, Spike said, under her breath, “We will see.”
(_)
Ten feet away from the Bebop crew, the Serenity crew were ready. As they had just finished pulling out their weapons and equipment from the trunks of the two cars they drove in.
Kaylee has a revolver pistol holstered to a gunbelt, on the right side of her waist.
Beside Kaylee was Simon and Inara. Simon has carrying a case, full of medical supplies, by the handle, in his right hand.
Inara also had a pistol holstered in a gunbelt, on the right side of her waist. Though, Inara's pistol was semi-automatic.
Mal, Zoe, and Jayne, has a few weapons strapped to their person. Also, Mal and Zoe each had an automatic rifle slung by the strap, over their right shoulder.
On the other hand, Jayne had brought a much more personal weapon with him, that was slung onto his right shoulder.
After hearing Rock's speak, Mal muttered, “Whatever.”
(_)
Nearby, Balalaika and B were standing back, and to the left sides, of both the Bebop and Serenity crews.
Both women overheard Spike and Mal.
Balalaika commented, in english, “Come on, everyone. Lighten up. This could be a very fun hunt, if you let it be.”
Both the crews of the Bebop and Serenity heard Balalaika. They looking behind them to see that Balalaika and B were dressed in black and dark gray camouflaged, combat fatigues, with fingerless gloves.
They also saw that Balalaika and B had come prepared. Their equipment included their snipe rifles, slung on their shoulders, by straps, Their holstered, side arm, pistols. Their radios clipped to the other side of their belts. And they had some climbing equipment. Such as ropes and rappelling gear, on the opposite shoulders they had their rifles slung to.
Jayne whistled. He then complimented, “Yea. You to are definitely dressing for success in this hunt.”
B smiled, as she inquired, in english, “Thank you, Jayne. So, what are all your plans in this hunt?”
Simon was the first to speak, as he stated, “Kaylee, Inara, and I are going to hang back, in case anyone needs medical attention. Even if it is Lee. If it is him, I promise, if I can get to him in time, when I am done with him, he will be healthy enough to torture.”
The adults nearby chuckled, for a few seconds.
Balalaika complimented, “That is a good idea, Simon. I feel better with a trained medic in the field.”
Simon replied, “Thank you, Balalaika.”
Kaylee commented, “Too bad Annie didn't want to come. This would go a lot quicker with her here.”
Inara look over at Mal, and Spike, as she commented, “It seems that not everyone feels up to hunting, Lee. A few of us have no hard feelings towards him. And it is likely a good thing that Annie is one such person.”
Both Mal and Spike noticed Inara's gaze and comment were directed at them.
Spike stayed silent. While Mal conceded, “You may have point there.”
Jayne stated, “Well, I don't know about the rest of you guys. I am going out on my own.”
Zoe looked over at Jayne, as she said, “Good luck. And don't worry. I will stick with the captain.”
Jayne replied, “Thanks, Zoe.”
Jetta looked at Spike, then Faye. She turned to the Serenity crew, as she mentioned, “Well, the three of us work better as a team.”
Faye looked over at Jetta, as she commented, “It is a lot better than when it was just the two us, Jet.”
Jetta turned to Faye, as she agreed, “You got that right, Faye.”
Spike said, “It is nice working with you two, again.”
Jetta replied, “The feeling is mutual, Spike.” She then turned to B and Balalaika, as she inquired, “B and Balalaika, I take it, from those weapons, and equipment, that you are going to find be the snipers for this crew?”
Balalaika casually answered, “Yes. And don't worry, I promise to only wing, Lee. If we see him... I cannot believe he tricked us during that trip, by using the alias, Ello Gray.”
Faye commented, “Now, you know how we feel.”
B stated, “That being said. Since Lee knows we are here, he will guess we will be the ones taking the sniper positions, in this group. I doubt Lee will be foolish enough to expose himself out in the open, with us here.”
Balalaika replied, “I have to agree.”
Spike turned to B, as she asked, “So, how good are you with a rifle, B?”
B answered, “While not as good as Balalaika with a rifle. Though, I am a skilled marksman.”
Balalaika commented, “Yes. B has pulled a few shots over the years that have impressed even myself.”
Mal asked, “So, where are you covering from?”
B answered, “Balalaika and I have already discussed this, on our way here. Balalaika will will be setting up two vantage points. One covering the southwest corner of the building are heading to, and the other will be the northeast corner of the build. Balalaika will take the southwest. While I will have the northeast.”
Zoe complimented, “Not bad. I am pretty good with a rifle myself. If you want my help.”
B declined, “No need. And we would prefer someone with a level head stay with Mal.”
Kaylee deadpanned, “I second that motion.”
Many of those around them chuckled, while Mal politely remained silent.
As they calmed down, Mal stated, “Okay. Let's head out.”
The adults then separated, as they all began their hunt for the same prey.
(_)
Elsewhere in the group, the eight teenager adults in the group were near Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru.
The three lovers had come in their own car.
The five Lagoon sisters got their weapons, from the two cars they rode in, with the trio sisters riding with them, Yurika, Nodoka and Mikoto
The three martial artist sisters did not bring any weapons, save for their own abilities.
Presently, Yurika, Nodoka, Mikoto were a number of feet from the five Lagoon sisters. They were by standing by their mothers, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, as they were talking to them.
While the sisters and Natsuru did not have on any weapons. Ranma had on her magical golden bracers, on her forearms. And Akira had on her revolvers, and long knives, with her yellow cowgirl outfit. Though, she did not have on her cowgirl hat, nor sunglasses.
Nodoka asked, “So, what are you three planning on doing?”
Natsuru answered, “We are going to be hunting Lee together.”
Akira commented, “Personally, I hope the three of us find Lee, first. We will try to take him down with as little harm to him as possible.”
Ranma shrugged, “Yea. We don't really have anything against him.”
Mikoto stated, “We are with you on this. Honestly, we are just here to keep the others from killing Lee. We honestly like him.”
Natsuru inquired, “What is the general mood with the Lagoon sisters on Lee?”
Mikoto answered, “Mixed, and conflicted, with them leaning towards not wanting to harm Lee. They want to please their parents, but they realize what Lee has done for them. So, their hearts are not really in this hunt.”
Akira stated, “Good. Now, we want you three to keep an eye on the sisters, so they don't accidentally do something we will all regret.”
Yurika agreed, “That is a great idea... Well, good luck.”
Akira replied, “Happy hunting.”
The daughters and their parents then split up.
The three parents started making their way towards a secondary building, near the main building. Meanwhile, the three daughters walked over to the Lagoon sisters.
When the three sisters reached the Lagoon sisters, Molly looked over at them. She adjusted her shoulder holster straps, on her upper chest, with her semi-automatic pistol holstered in them. She kindly said, “Glad you could join us.”
Yurika replied, “We are glad you would let us join.”
Molly responded, “My opinion in this hunt is, the more, the merrier.”
Molly, Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka giggled from Molly's response.
Nearby, Yukio, held up her machine gun, with a modified beta c-mag clip attached the weapon, she looked around and saw that her family and friends were ready. She asked, “Now, that we are ready to kick ass, what are we going to do about getting Lee?”
Kristina finished putting on, and powering up, her power gauntlets, as she turned to her sister. She commented, “Well, I know better than to torch this place.”
Rebecca finished tying on her to scabbard, with a long knife sheathed in each one, in a crisscross fashion, on her back. She suggested, “Given Lee is good at thinking several steps ahead. We should not go to where we think he is. And we should be focusing on where we think he will be next.”
Sarah adjusted the scabbard attached to the left side of her belt, which held her katana. She stated, “Well, in that case...” She turned to Molly, as she questioned, “Molly, where do you think Lee is heading?”
Molly looked over at her sisters. She cracked a smile, as she said, “I have a few ideas.”
(_)
A few minutes later, everyone had locked up their vehicles, and started heading towards the buildings where they thought Lee might be inside of.
As they all walked out of the parking lot, and into a nearby road, Rock walked up to Lotton, whom was only about ten feet from her. She requested, “Hold up, Lotton.”
Lotton did so, as she turned to look at the japanese woman.
As Rock walked over to Lotton, Lotton asked, “What is it?”
When Rock reached Lotton, she leaned over and whispered something in Lotton's left ear.
When Rock leaned back up, she saw the white hair woman nod once towards her. Lotton stated, “I understand.”
Rock commented, “I know I am asking a lot. But, you are one of the few people here that has the patience to do what I ask.”
Lotton said, “No problem. I understand. And it is an idea I would have thought of.”
Rock stated, “I know. And good luck.”
Lotton replied, “You too.” She then turned and headed in a different direction than the rest of the group.
Meanwhile, Rock turned around, and walked back over to Revy.
As Rock reached Revy, Rock noted that, from the look of confusion on Revy's face, her lover had noticed Rock's actions, but she did not overhear what was said.
Rock thought, 'Well, at least our enhanced hearing is not so enhanced that it is troublesome. And what I whispered was only meant for Lotton's ears.'
Revy asked, “What was that all about?”
Rock answered, “Insurance.”
Revy shrugged, as she said, “Okay. Well, let's head inside. I would like to have first crack at, Lee.”
Rock stated, “So would I.” She then noticed items attached to the various walls, on the outer buildings around them. She said, “And you know what I never thought I would say, that I would be happy to see, in a building I am breaking into.”
Revy replied, “What's that.”
Rock cracked a grin, as she said, “Security cameras.”
Revy just lightly giggled at Rock's joke, as she realized what Rock meant with her comment.
The two lovers then walked together, with the rest of their group, towards the buildings that they believed they would find Lee inside of.
Soon after, they started splitting up, and heading into the buildings, at different entrances.
Though, unlike Lee, they were not so discreet in entering the building.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lee had already crossed into another building, with the alleyway between buildings be less than six feet apart, and the entry doors beside across from each other. It took less than ten seconds for Lee to move building, to alleyway, to building, with him using the key card to unlock and open the door. Then, close and lock the doors, behind himself.
Currently, Lee was walked down a hallway, with horizontal piping running up the walls, and sides of the floor. At certain points, the pipping turned into the walls, and lead down to other parts of the building.
While Lee continued walking, Lee thought, 'I am glad I checked that key card, that the guard gave me. To see how it works. And it works better than I had hoped. These is a chip in it that works on short proximity, which is triggered by swiping the card on the door locks, on the walls, by the doors. And no matter what angle swipe the card on the wall panels, by the doors, the lock is triggered to either lock, or unlock. That means the card readers are just pressure sensors, which triggers the signal from the card.'
'And if this is like similar technology in my reality. The card frequency is likely short range. So, even if they had equipment to home in on it. Which they don't even know I have such a key card. It would still take them time to find me.'
'Also, the doors are solid steel. No windows. Nothing to punch through.'
'Along with the key card, this building is bigger than I expected. And like the map showed, this building is clearly part of the factory section of the industrial complex.'
'In addition, I consider myself lucky to have gone from the other building, to this one, without getting caught. But, I don't think my luck will last for much longer.'
As Lee got near the end of the hallway, he hear voices coming from the large room, at the exit of the hallway.
Lee thought, 'Well, it seems a few of them are nearby. Let's see how quiet I can be, while I hide in the last place they expect a tall man, like me, to hide.'
Lee then softly climbed up the piping on the walls until he was literally hanging on the ceiling, by his feet and hands, while facing downward.
Lee thought, 'At least I have a good grip, with both my hands and feet. And this position is not that uncomfortable. I can stay here for a little bit, without a problem. Now, I can listen to them. While, I come up with a plan to deal with them. Without any of us getting hurt.'
Lee then strained his ears to listen to the voices, as they got closer.
As the voice got closer, he recognized the voices as belonging to Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira. And all of them were speaking in japanese, which Lee had long since learned, during the time loop.'
Lee thought, 'They are likely using japanese, because they think I won't understand them. They don't realize that I completed my japanese language lessons from someone they don't know about.'
(_)
In the nearby room, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru came to a stop, in the large room, as they looked around, and saw that the room lead into three other hallways, excluding the hallway they had come in.
Ranma said, in japanese, “Well, this room has four ways to come in from.”
Akira commented, in japanese, “We came from one direction. So, that eliminates that entry point. And we can do this a few different ways. We could do the more foolish idea of split up. With each of us taking a hallway.”
Natsuru said, in japanese, “I do not like that idea.”
Ranma responded, “I am against doing that.”
Akira agreed, “It is a bad idea. So, how about we even the odds in another way? One of us stays here, and two of use go down one of the hallways? Then, we just double back and take our time to check out each hallway?”
Natsuru agreed, “I like that idea.”
Ranma responded, “That works for me. But, who stays?”
Natsuru stated, “I do. Lee knows what we are capable of. Ranma, you are the better fighter. And Akira, you are armed. But, I am physically tougher and stronger. I can handle myself in a fight. And Lee knows about my fire abilities. Chances are, if he confronted me, he would surrender to me.”
In the nearby hallway, hanging from the ceiling, Lee mentally reflected, 'Nice logic. Flawed. But, nice logic.'
Ranma questioned, “Okay. Now, which hallway do you want to go down in?”
Akira answered, “Simple. We are on the building west of the building, whom Rock stated, that Lee probably entered. We can from the south part of the building. The best chance to bump into Lee is to take the east hallway from here.”
Lee thought, 'Good guess, Akira, considering this is that hallway. I guess I better get ready for them, and to confront Natsuru. I have to do this just right, or I am going to get myself killed, or worse. Still, it might be a good idea to see what I am dealing with, before I act. Natsuru mentioned Akira was armed. That makes things more difficult. Still, I want to see the situation with my own eyes.'
'And since my precognition is not screaming at me, it means that in my position, I am not in any immediately danger. So, I still have some time to think.'
Lee stated in his position, clinging to the ceiling, as Akira and Ranma walked under him, with neither realizing he was there.
While Lee watched the two women continued walking passed him, and down the hallway, he thought, 'So, Akira has both her revolvers, and both her long knives. And Ranma had on those golder bracers of hers. That is not surprising. But, it does mean I am going to have be more careful in this situation. Though, Ranma and Natsuru are still the primary dangers of their little trio. But, Akira is someone I should not underestimate. I, of all people, know how useful it is to have someone underestimate him, or in this case, her.'
'And with them like this, it is academic that Natsuru is in her white and black seifuku. Though, she keeps her Kampfer powers and abilities as long as she is in female, not matter the clothing. So, as long as she is female, she is extremely dangerous, no matter what clothing she is wearing. Now, to see how silent I can be.'
Lee slowly, and silently freed his left hand, as he pulled out a deck of cards, from one of his left side coat pocket.
He thumped open the small box of cards, he then put the open box of playing cards back into his left side coat pocket. He then used his left hand to pulled out his key card
He put the key card, from his front, left pants pocket.
Lee thought, 'Now, to time this, using my precognition.'
Lee waiting for the next ten seconds, until his precognition told him that it was safe to move.
As Natsuru turned her attention away form the hallway that Lee, Ranma, and Akira were in, Lee silently stepped down to the floor.
By then, Akira and Ranma were fifty feet down the hallway, from Lee, and the entrance to the other room, where Natsuru was.
Lee then swiftly, stepped into the other room, as he pulled out his key card. One on the other side of the doorway, he turned around, as he swiped the key card in the locking it, as the steel door slid sideways to close.
In a matter of three seconds, as Natsuru turned to see Lee, along with Akira and Ranma looking behind them to see the door to the other room, to where their lover was located, slide shut.
Lee immediately pocketed the key card back into his front left pants pocket, he then pulled out his open box of cards with his left hand, and him pulling the cards out with his right hand. Then, he pocket the empty box, swapped hands, to where the left hand was holding the deck of loose cards, as a card was between Lee's right index and middle finger. Lee's right hand was in a throwing position, aimed a Natsuru.
Lee and Natsuru silently stared at each other, for a few seconds, as they sized one another up, for a possible battle.
Lee mentally noted, 'Just as I thought, Natsuru is in her white and black seifuku. Now, to talk her out of doing something foolish.' Lee calming warned, “Let's not doing any more foolish, than either of us have done.”
Natsuru agreed, “Wise words.”
Lee said, “Glad you agree. Now, shift back to male. I can throw this card between your eyes faster than you can throw a fireball. Do not make me kill you. I respect you, and really do not want to.”
Natsuru pointed out, “But, my fire ball would kill you, leaving us both dead. Though, I agree. It is not worth it.”
Natsuru shifted to her male form, with his male clothing.
Lee said, “Thank you.” He then took a closer look at Natsuru's male form, through Natsuru's shirt, pants, and shoes. Lee complimented, “And your male form is really ripped.”
Natsuru commented, in his male voice, “I would like to thank you for that.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Natsuru commented, “You do know you cannot escape.”
Lee calmly pointed out, “I can try.”
Lee's eyes never left Natsuru, as he started walking sideways, to his left, around the room, until the was on the west end of the room. With Lee making sure to also use his peripheral vision, to avoid any pipes, or other items, that may be on the ground, and cause him to trip. Fortunately, Lee saw not such items on the floor.
While Lee walked, thought, 'I need to keep my eyes on Natsuru, and avoid tripping on anything. Natsuru can change in a split second. So, I am not taking any chances. And I do not want to be near that door I just shut, in case Ranma does something stupid, like trying a ki energy shot against it. I am not sure the door would hold, or blow out. And it is not worth the risk.'
Lee then came to a stop, on the west end of the room, with his back to the open west hallway behind him
Just then, Lee and Natsuru heard banging coming from the shut door.
Lee kept his eyes on Natsuru, though, from the angle he was standing at, he saw the closed door, on the other side of Natsuru, where the banging could be heard.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'Speak of the devil. And I better warn them.'
Lee stated, “I checked the doors. They are each an an inch thick of steel. And after I leave the room, it is going to take you a minute to free Akira and Ranma.”
Natsuru replied, “I appreciate the information. I saw that card you used. I take it that is a key card that unlocks and locks the doors to this place?”
Lee thought, 'Given this is so obvious, there no point in denying that.' He admitted, “Yes.”
Just then, Lee heard a radio, clipped to the right side of belt, around his pants. From the radion, Lee heard Akira's voice state, in japanese “Natsuru, are you all right?”
Natsuru pulled off the radio, with his right hand. He held the radio near his mouth, and pushed the talked button. Though, he never took his eyes off of Lee.
Natsuru said, in his male voice, in japanese, “I am fine. Lee's here, but I am trying to talk him down. As a show of good faith, I changed back to male.”
Over the radio, Akira stated, “I am glad things are going well for you. Though, the door is seems to be locked. Ranma is thinking about blasting it.”
Lee said, in english, “I would advise against that.”
Natsuru replied, in english, “I agree.” He pressed the talk button on his radio, as he said, in japanese, “Ranma. Do not do that. I will get you out in a minute.”
Ranma commented, from her radio, in japanese, “Okay. We will wait for you.”
Natsuru continued to look at Lee, as he said, in english, “I have to congratulate you, Lee. You really got the drop on us.”
Lee smirked, “Quite literally. I was hanging from the ceiling.”
Natsuru could not help but smile, as he responded, “I cannot believe you successfully used that ceiling drop ninja trick on us, of all people.”
Lee continued smile, as he replied, “Yea. The irony is absolutely hilarious.” Lee then spoke in japanese, as he complimented Natsuru, “By the way. Nice try with using your native language. But, I know japanese.”
Lee thought, 'It is best not to get any more detailed than this. I do not want them to know that I know that they know about the time loop.'
Natsuru thought, 'So, he found someone to teach him in the time loop. Though, it is best not to mention the time loop. If he knew that we know about the time loop. That information would likely make him more unpredictable and dangerous.'
Natsuru stated, in english, “I wondered if you understood what River said to you, during your poker game, at the casino. When she spoke in japanese.”
Lee said, in japanese, “I did understand her. But, I did not want let you all to know that I knew japanese. Given how many of series, in my stories, come from Japan. Doing so would raise suspicion against me. But, since my identity is now out in the open. That is presently a small matter.”
Natsuru complimented, “I see your point. You always do surprise us, Lee.”
Lee said, in english, “That is why I am still alive. See you.”
Lee then walked backwards, to the nearby hallway. He then pressed the bottom on the wall, to close the door behind him.
As the door closed, Lee immediately put the single card in his right fingers, back into the top of the deck. Then, he grabbed the deck with his right hand. He quickly pulled out the key card with his left hand and swiped the panel, locking the door. Next, he pocket his key card, back into the pants pocket he had it in.
Lee pulled out his empty card box. Afterward, he put the cards back into their box, and closed it. Finally, he pocketed the deck of cards back into the coat pocket he had them in, as he turned and ran down the hallway, away from Natsuru, Akira, and Ranma.
Though, Lee more or less jogged. Because with his cancer, he did not have much stamina to begin with. And if he ran full out, he would quickly tire himself, in a situation, he knew he needed to stay mobile, as much as possible.
As Lee ran, he thought, 'I am glad I got out of there, with neither of us getting hurt. It is good that Natsuru is a kind person. Still, I cannot afford to take any chances. I will run for a minute, or so. Then, I will go back to walking. I don't want to tire myself out, in this endurance gauntlet. Also, I should make a turn in a minute anyway. And I won't lock the doors behind me. That will just create a trail for the others to follow me. I will only lock the doors, if the others, after me, are in the immediate vicinity, and they spot me.'
(_)
Meanwhile, at the moment, on other side of the locked door, in the room, with Lee gone, Natsuru shifted back to his female form, in her seifuku. She thought, 'That went better than I expected.'
She still had her radio in her right hand. She into her radio, with her female voice, in english, “As you can guess. Lee was here, but I had to let him go. We are in the southeastern part of the west building, beside the main center.”
She then turned to look at the closed door that was between her and her two lovers.
Over the radio, Rock said, in english, “We are all heading your way. But, why did you have to let him go?”
Natsuru answered, “It put me in a situation, where we would have killed each other with his card throwing trick, and my fire. And it just wasn't worth it.”
Rock replied, “I understand.”
Natsuru said, “Thank you.”
Rock inquired, “By the way, I overheard the exchange between you, and Akira, on the radio? What happened, exactly?”
Revy stated, over her radio, “Yea. Even if you let him go, you three should have him in a minute, or so.”
Natsuru commented, into her radio, “We reached a room that branched out into a few different hallways. And we decided I would stay behind, while the two of them went down the hallway they though Lee was be coming from. They were right. But, Lee was able to hide, wait for them to pass by, and he then locked the door behind him. And these doors are an inch of metal, thick. Still, I should be able to get to Akira and Ranma, within a minute of trying to open one of these doors.”
Over the radio, Violin stated, “Be careful doing so. I have done that a few time. Even with your strength and toughness. You can easily hurt yourself, if you are not careful.”
Natsuru responded, into her radio, “I will. Anyway, I saw that Lee has some sort of key card that lets him unlock and lock the doors in here. So, be careful. If he gets by you, he can trap you. And, as I said, these doors are thick. At least, an inch of steel. I think it is steel. I am right now trying to figure how best to open the door between Ranma and Akira, and myself. It will be a few minutes.”
Over the radio, Akira suggested, “We could just go around.”
Natsuru smiled, as she casually stated, into her radio, “Nah. I got this.”
Revy said, over the radio, “Take the time you need. And we will keep that in mind.”
Natsuru replied, into her radio, “Will do.” She then clipped her radio back to the right side of her short skirt.
Natsuru then started approaching the door, as she thought, 'I think the best way to open this, is to slowly warm the metal, to where it pliable with my super-strength, but not to much that it will burn my hands. I have done this a few times before. And it should work here.”
Natsuru soon found she was correct, as she free her two loves, with only minor difficulties and just a little time wasted. They then headed around the other locked door, as they searched for Lee.
(_)
Meanwhile, just as Natsuru was about to free Akira and Ranma, from a hallway, in the same building where Lee, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, were at, only a few floors above them, Revy replied, over her radio, “Take the time you need. And we will keep that in mind.”
On the radio, Natsuru said, “Will do.”
To Revy's right side, Rock said, over her radio, “This is just a reminder that Lee is full tricks. And he is not to be underestimated... Also, Benny, Dutch, have you found the security room yet.”
Benny stated, over the radio, “Yes. And it is a disappointment. The company that runs this place, is clearly too cheap to pop for a real security crew. The security room is just a small room, with one desk, one chair and one computer monitor, with mouse and keyboard. Along with a computer monitor, and equipment. And it is a good guess that Lee was here, first. And with security guard nowhere to be found. I would guess that Lee got that key card from the guard that was here. And he then convinced the guard to find some place to hide.”
Rock stated, “That doesn't matter. We have seen cameras all over this place. If we can use the guard's computer, we can quickly find Lee, and capture him. Still, if any of you find the guard, do not harm him. We all know how persuasive Lee can be. Now, besides the key card, and the guard gone, what other reasons do you think Lee was there, as well?”
Over the radio, Benny stated, “Well, that is the problem. Another reason we think Lee is here is because the computer screen is still on. And this the monitor is logged to the security account, to the computer system in this factory area. But, the video camera system program is turned off. Though, I can see the video camera system icon on the screen. And I could access the cameras with just a simple click of the mouse, or stroke of the keyboard. If I could just get the keyboard, or mouse, working.”
Rock inquired, into her radio, “What is the problem?”
Over the radio, Benny said, “The problem is that Lee cut the cords to both the mouse and the keyboard, where the cords met the devices. Meaning, I have to take them apart to fix them. I am sure it is Lee who did the cutting. No one else is this methodical in creating a dilemma.”
Rock asked, “What do you mean? Can you not just replace the broken items?”
From her radio, Benny responded, “No. The cords for the keyboard, mouse, and monitor got directly into the wall. There are no plugs for the cords. So, I cannot unplug the cut cords, and replace the devices. Also, I don't see a computer tower here. Meaning, the computer system is likely tied to a mainframe, somewhere else in the building.”
Rock inquired, “Can't you just use your laptop to access the system?”
Over the radio, Benny replied, “Nope. No can do. I have already tried. There are no plugs to hook in my laptop, and this place had no wireless service.”
Rock asked, “What about finding another computer, and hacking your way into the system.”
Benny stated, “Finding another computer will take time. Plus, in a mainframe and corporate network systems, different computers, in different locations, have different levels of access to the mainframe, hardwired in them. That is just a normal security measure, for all such systems.”
“I cannot just find a random computer, and hack my way in. We do not have the time. And even if I had the time, I would have to hack into an account, and then hack into the mainframe for the access to the computer system.”
“On the other hand, I might be able to take apart the keyboard and mouse, and split the cords into getting them to work.”
“Fortunately, the connection wires to both of them are different, so I can tell which is which. That will save me time. But, either option will take time. And I am sure that is why Lee set this up this dilemma in this way. Because he knew we could try to use the camera system.”
“And I admit, it is a wonderful stalling tactic to be used against me.”
Rock agreed, “It sounds like it is. Which way do you think will take the shortest amount of time?”
Benny answered, over her radio, “Taking apart and repairing the keyboard and mouse. Then, splicing the cords to the devices to get them back to working order. Because, I am just dealing with hardware, and not trying to hack into software. Also, both devices use Philips head screws, and my tool kit has all the things I need to fix the devices. So, this will not take too long.”
“Still, I am sure that is what Lee hopes I would do. Considering he did not just logoff on this computer. He is baiting me, and we both know it. That man is clearly devious.”
Rock replied, into her radio, “That goes without saying. Do what you can, and let me know when you have access to the camera system.”
Over the radio, Benny replied, “Will do.”
Dutch mentioned, over her radio, “Also, there is another matter. Since the guard and Lee met, it is possible that Lee convinced the guard to call the police.”
Rock commented, “That is very possible. And the call coming from the guard would sound more official.”
On the radio, Dutch agreed, “Exactly.”
Over the radio, Violin inquired, “But, won't Lee get into trouble with the police, if they catch him?”
On the radio, Akira answered, in english, “For what? He had false identification, to show the police. We saw him use a credit chit. And that using the person's own thumb print. And since he does have a credit chit on him. He probably conned his way into getting an identitcard. At worst, for the most obvious of things, he could be charged with trespassing. But, there are extenuating circumstances.”
“And even then, he has a witness. The guard, whom will back him up, in saying that he likely asked the guard to call the police. Along with this, the guard will likely tell the police our cars coming into the factory, with us being after Lee. And given how skilled Lee is at talking himself out of trouble. He would likely be able to talk the police into letting him go by morning. If not sooner.”
With her radio, Rock finished for Akira, “While, on the other hand, we would have to bug out, if the police showed up. Not bad thinking on Lee's part.”
Dutch questioned, over the radio, “So, all this is just a stalling tactic on his part, as he waits for the police?”
Revy spoke into her radio, “I doubt it. Lee is not one to rely on someone else to do the heavy lifting. This might be his plan, B. His plan, A, is to escape us on his own.”
Dutch said, into her radio, “That man just does not know when to quit. And if that is the case, there is not much we can do about it. This just means our time is limited.”
Over the radio, Balalaika stated, “Actually, we should have plenty of time. This place is at the edge of the dome. While Lee probably informed the guard that we were coming. So, if the guard contacted the police, they would know to expect to deal with a large group. I would say it will take them between two to three hours to both prepare to deal with us. And then reach us. If not longer. That is plenty of time to find, Lee.”
Rock stated, in her radio, “Thanks for the information, Balalaika. Now, everyone continue the search.”
(_)
Outside, on the southwestern corner of the section of the factory complex, that Rock team was searching, Balalaika was on a ladder, of a communications tower. She was already midway up, as she stopped to use her radio.
Balalaika held the ladder with her right hand, as she used her left hand to clip her radio back onto her belt.
Balalaika then used both her hands to start back to climbing the ladder a little further up the communications tower. To where she overlooked the roof and area that her friends were searching for Lee. With B doing the same, from a tower on the opposite side of the area, from where she was at.
Both of them would be on the look out for Lee, should their prey head out into the open.
As Balalaika climbed, she thought, 'I miss that Rock no longer calls me, Ms. Balalaika. But, there is not much I can do about that. And at least she is still polite as ever.'
Balalaika looked upwards, as she thought, 'Also, I am getting close to where I want to be.' She then turn her attention back to the ladder rungs, as she made her way to the middle section of the tower.
The middle section of the communications tower was high enough to over look the buildings, but still far lower than the dome ceiling, even this close to the side walls of the dome.
And given they were inside a dome, though a large dome, the wind was not that bad, out in the open, while high in the air.
(_)
Five minutes later, as Lee briskly walked down another hallway, with no pipes, flat metal walls, concrete floor, and plenty of lighting from the ceiling lights. He soon found himself in a packaging room, which was more like a much large version of the hallway he had just exited.
The lighting the room was provided by a handful of ceiling lights, which did not fulling over the room, creating shadowed areas in the room.
Lee saw packages stacked higher than his hand, on the right side of the room, and a large, square table on the left side of the room.
There were open doors all around the room, leading to other hallways, and rooms.
Lee thought, 'There are a lot of places for an ambush in this room. I should walk cautiously, but not slowly. While staying aware of my surroundings.'
Lee then calmly walked through the room.
As he reached the middle of the room, passed the table, to his left, his precognition warned him to turn around.
Lee turned around to see Shenhua. She had both her kukri long knives in her hands. She had her usual red qipao and white jacket. Though, instead of wearing her red high heels, she was wearing red flat soled slippers.
Lee grimly thought, 'Of all the Lagoon women to face, it had to be Shenhua. Honestly, I would rather face, Revy. I know how to push Revy's buttons. On the other hand, Shenhua prefers to keep a cool, level head. She must have snuck up behind me. And the face she is wearing flat soled slippers, instead of high heels, means she is serious.'
'I am not going to be able able to talk my way out of this. And if I run, she will turn me into a pincushion, with those long knives, and her smaller throwing knives, before I even get out of the room...”
Lee continued his thoughts, with worry, 'Oh crap. I am going to have fight her. And I don't have time to pull out a deck of cards.'
Shenhua cursed, in a casual tone of voice, in english, “Oh damn. How did you hear me?”
Lee admitted, “I didn't. Precognition. Remember?”
Shenhua replied, “Ah, yes.”
Lee commented, “Let me guess. You are still pissed off over the cherry bomb.”
Shenhua answered, “That and the toilet seat incident.”
Lee winced, as he replied, “You still remember that?”
Shenhua calmly said, in a dangerously even tone of voice, “It is not an event that one easily forgets. So, who spilled the beans on that we learned about the time loop?”
Lee answered, “The Lowe family.” He thought, with concern, 'At this point. Lying, or not answering. Will only make things worse for myself.'
Shenhua said, “So, you met them. That figures.”
Lee commented, “They seem like a nice family.”
Shenhua agreed, “That they are. Now, are you ready to suffer, and die?”
Lee defended, “Well, to be fair. In the time loop, you did kill me over the cherry bomb incident.”
Shenhua pointed out, “I realize now that I killed you too quickly.”
Lee conceded, “Perhaps. And I honestly did not know that you were in the women's restroom at the time.”
Shenhua commented, “Which is why were are still talking at the moment.”
Lee said, “Also, that toilet scene idea, back in Roanapur, came from Tvtropes.”
Shenhua responded, “That may be the case. But, you were the one who actually wrote the toilet seat scene. Though, before I make you scream, and die, I do have a question.”
Lee though, 'Buying time is my only option.' He replied, “Sure. What is your question?”
Shenhua asked, “Why did you improve my english skills?”
Lee answered, “The honest truth is I suck at writing broken language dialogue.”
Shenhua burst out laughing.
Lee remained silent, as he watched the woman, with long black hair, laugh.
Several seconds later, as Shenhua calmed down, Lee continued, “And with you laid up healing, from your injuries during the Blood Trail arc, in a home you shared with two english speaking people. It only made sense that you would spend that time learning to develop your english skills.”
Shenhua stated, “River is right. You are a genius.”
Lee commented, “Thank you. I hope you are grateful for the language skills.”
Shenhua cracked a grin, as she casually said, “Oh, I am. Though, I still am going to kill you.”
Just before Shenhua was about to rush at Lee, Lee swiftly stated, “Hold it. I have a question for you?”
Shenhua stopped herself from moving forward, as she flatly responded, in an annoyed tone of voice, “What is it?”
Lee honestly asked, “How did a Taiwanese woman, such as yourself, learn to specialized in combat using nepalese long knives, and japanese throwing knives?”
Shenhua flatly answered, “Long story.”
Lee replied, “I bet.”
Shenhua shrugged, as she said, “Too bad you won't live long enough to hear it.” Shenhua then charged at Lee in a full sprint across the room, her long knives at the ready, to slide into Lee.
Lee used his precognition to time it so, at the second to last second, he quickly jumped to his right side, as Shenhua run passed him. With himself just out of reach of her long knives.
Lee turned counterclockwise, as Shenhua did a u-turn, to her left, and ran back towards him.
What happened next was a case of precognition versus enhanced reflexes. Where Lee kept backing away, as he dodged Shenhua swings, while she advanced on him.
And though Lee was able to remain unharmed, Shenhua was able to knock Lee's black fedora hat off, by slicing it in half with her left long knife.
Lee thought, 'Better the hat, than my head. The only thing going for me is she does not know how skilled I am. Now, to show her how good I really am.'
Shenhua then thrust her left blade at Lee.
Lee shift to his left, as he stepped into the attack. Lee then rapped his right arm around Shenhua's left forearm, locking it under his right armpit.
This caught Shenhua by surprise, as she brought down the long knife in her right hand. But, Lee quickly caught Shenhua's right wrist, with his left hand.
Lee's plan was simple. He would be swiftly able to turn her body to his left, in the next three steps backward. As he did so, he would throw Shenhua to the ground. He would then use the time she took to recover and get back up to run for the door nearby, to his left, which he saw lead to another hallway, and lock it behind him.
But, as he took one step back, the back of his waist suddenly hit the flat side of the table in the room.
Lee thought, with worry, 'Oh no.'
Shenhua pressed her advantage, as she forced Lee to lean back against the table.
Their bodies pressed against each other, as Shenhua's white coat partly draped over Lee, and onto the top of the table, on both their sides.
Shenhua swiftly changed her grip on her right long knife, with her blade then pointing down towards Lee's face.
Their faces were inches from each other at Shenhua gave Lee a slasher smile, while Lee kept a neutral expression on his face.
As Lee kept Shenhua's left arm in a lock, he was was using all his strength in his left arm to keep Shenhua from bringing down her right blade onto his face.
Lee thought, 'This is a losing battle for me. And we both know it. She was already naturally stronger than me due to her exercising, and natural fitness. Throw in the strength enhancements of the super-soldier serum, and it is not even a contest. The only reason she had not cut me yet with that blade, in her right hand, is because of the adrenaline rush I am experiencing. And if I stay still too long, that rush is going to wear off. My only chance is to get her talking.'
Given their closeness, the lighting allowed Shenhua to see Lee's eyes, behind his shades.
As their eyes locked, Lee kept a neutral expression, as he demanded, “Drop the slasher smile. You don't hold at candle to Roberta's crazy smiles, and we both know it.”
Shenhua dropped her grin. She continued to try to reach Lee's face with the tip of her right blade, as she asked, “Where did you learn to fight like this?”
As Lee still struggled against the blade coming on his face, as he answered, “Sam, in the time loop. Great teacher, I might add.”
Shenhua replied, “River taught you? Ah, yes. I remember her mentioning that.”
Lee thought, 'I was hope River would not mention she taught me. Still, that cannot be helped, now. Though, I want to confirm something about River.' He firmly inquired, “Is River still alive?”
Shenhua smirked, as she stated, “Of course. But, soon you won't be, hillbilly.”
Lee retorted, while letting his southern accent slip, “If you are going to insult me. Get your insults correct. I'm a redneck. Not a hillbilly.”
By then, the tip of the blade was an inch from the left side of Lee's shades.
Suddenly, a gunshot rang out to Lee's right.
The shot knocked Shenhua' right long knife from her right hand, to her right side, Lee's left side, and sending the weapon to the ground, The cord attached to the knife, and her right armband, was strung out onto the floor.
While Lee kept his left hand on Shenhua's right wrist, and Shenhua left arm in a lock, with his right arm, both Lee and Shenhua swiftly turned to look at who had shot at them.
They saw three adults, which they both instantly recognized.
From Lee left to right.
First was Jetta, in the same outfit she preferred when she was the man, Jet. Which was a pink shirt, under blue overalls, and metal boots. Though, her clothing was fitted to her more slender frame. She was using her right hand to point her Walther P ninety-nine at them.
In the middle, of the three person group, was Spike, in her blue leisure suit, using her right hand to point her Jericho nine forty-one at them, with the end of the barrel of her gun still slightly smoking in the light.
And there was Faye, in her usual clothing, pointed her Heckler & Koch MP5K at them. Her right hand was on the trigger grip and her left hand on the riot grip of the fore-end.
Though, Lee also noticed that none of the women had their fingers on the trigger, and that behind the three ladies, by the door they came in from, was a light switch.
Lee thought, with concern, 'The only good news is none of them have their fingers on the triggers of their weapons. Which is not much good news. It just means they will shot up a second later than if the had their fingers on the trigger. But, that does give me one second to work with.'
'Faye must have replaced her MP5K she lost in the series, with other one. Given I made it so they had plenty of money, that is not surprising. Still, with her using that weapon, and Jetta pulling out her P Ninety-Nine, instead of the net-gun, means they are looking to hurt me as well. Instead of just capture me. And given Spike is here, I can guess what this is about.'
'Though, I doubt they have noticed that light switch behind them. If I play my cards right, I can use that to my advantage.'
Faye lips curled into a grin, as she said, “Well girls, look who we have here.”
Jetta joked, “We could give you two lovebirds some private time, if you want.”
Lee quipped, “No thanks. Company is welcome.”
Faye, Jetta, and Spike, laughed a little as Lee's comment.
Faye then commented, “I have to say, this is the embodiment of why one should not bring a knife to a gunfight.”
Shenhua frowned at Faye's comment.
Lee cautioned, “Shenhua, Faye is just baiting you.”
Spike smirked, as she said, “That she is, Lee. And I have to admit, that trick in the tunnel was smooth.”
Lee responded, “Thank you, Spike. Though, I have to admit, it was more of a gamble. It would not have worked with the Hammerhead, nor Red Tail. It would only work on the Swordfish.”
Spike inquired, “So, you gave us the bird because you were batting me?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Because you have the largest ego of your group. Though, your ego is nothing compared to Revy's ego.”
As Faye and Jetta snickered, Shenhua commented, “You are correct about that.”
While keeping his eyes on the three bounty hunters, Lee asked Shenhua, “Shenhua, have you seen the Cowboy Bebop series? Because, I honestly don't remember if you did.”
Shenhua kept her eyes on the other three women, as she answered, “Yes. It is one of Revy's favorite series.”
Spike commented, “That is not surprising. Even with my feeling towards her. Which are not good. We just rub each other the wrong way. Still, I always found that redhead to have great taste in action.”
Lee responded, “I agree. Also Jet, I had no idea you were turned into a woman. That is not what I planned for you.”
Jetta shrugged, as she calmly said, “I know. I read your stories. You were setting me up for longevity as a healthy man. And something went wrong after your fourth story ended. Things happens. At least I got my left arm back. And the others are right, being a woman isn't that bad.”
Faye commented, “Truth be told. There are only two reasons we are here. The challenge in catching someone that conned, or evaded nearly every badass we know of. And to emotionally support Spike.”
Shenhua asked, “How are they supporting Spike?”
Lee said one word, “Julia.”
Spike stated, “I understand that I was at death's door. We have all seen the series. And though, being turned into a woman is not the worst thing in the world. And I love my young Julia, dearly. The problem is you both are responsible for getting me pregnant in the first place. Without my permission. And I am going to make both of you pay.”
Shenhua inquired, with a confused expression on her face, “Both of us? What is going on?”
Lee answered for the Bebop crew, “It is called being a target of opportunity. They are not just going to kill me. They are going to kill you, as well.”
Jetta commented, “I have to admit. He is sharp.”
Shenhua pointed out, “You cannot do that.”
Spike smirked, as she stated, “Sure we can. And we can made it look like you killed each other.”
Lee felt Shenhua tried to free her left arm and right wrist from his locks. He thought, 'Shenhua is about to do something stupid that will get us both killed. On the other hand, I have a plan. But, I will need her help.'
Lee firmly stated, “Shenhua, do not make any quick moves. They have all had the same super-soldier serum as you. They have guns trained on both of us. And even if you reached them, Spike is a better fighter in melee combat that you are. With Jet being a close second to Spike.”
Lee immediately felt Shenhua stop struggling to get loose. Lee thought, 'Good. She understands the seriousness of the situation. Now, to implement my plan.'
The left side of Shenhua's white jacket draped over Lee in such a way as to block the view of the bounty hunter from seeing the hands of both Lee and Shenhua.
Lee did several things at once, while continuing to look at the bounty hunters, with a neutral expression on his face.
With his right arm, he first let go of Shenhua's left forearm. He then slowly reached down, along Shenhua's upper left thigh, until he felt the garter belt there, which was full of kunai throwing knives. Lee was careful not to injure himself, nor Shenhua, as he pulled out one of the kunai between his right index and middle fingers.
Lee thought, 'I love a woman that comes prepared.'
At the same time, with his left hand, let go of Shenhua' right wrist. He then slowly reached into Shenhua' right arm robe and unhooked her rope to her long knife, from the cloth band around her right forearm.
As Shenhua felt Lee doing all this, she immediately stopped moving, completely, as she realized what was going on. She thought, 'Lee has a plan.'
Faye complimented, “You really are knowledgeable, Lee.”
Lee continued looking at the three standing women, as he stated, “I pride myself on being thorough in my writings... I have a question, Shenhua?”
Shenhua replied, “What?”
Lee inquired, “Would getting you out of this mess completely settle my debts with you?”
Shenhua conceded, “Yes.”
Lee responded, “Good. Now, do you remember that time you fought Annie in Chang's office?
Shenhua said, “Yes.”
Lee questioned, “Do you remember what you did right after Annie deflected your throwing knives?”
Shenhua smiled, as she answered, “Yes. And I am starting to see why River likes you so much.”
Faye asked, “What are you to talk about?”
Lee complimented, “By the way, Shenhua, you are a great teacher.”
Shenhua smile slightly widened, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Lee ordered, “Now, do it!”
Shenhua swiftly leaned up, on her feet. At her feet fully hit the floor, she suddenly did a series of back flips, towards the door behind her. As she did so, she gripped her kukri, in her left hand, at a downward angle, so that when she landed on he left first, the blade would be pointing away from her.
In response, Faye, Jetta, and Spike began to shoot at Shenhua, while ignoring Lee.
All their shoots missed the fast moving woman, until Shenhua made to the hallway entrance, on that side of the room. When she made it to the other side, she quickly landed on her feet, as pressed the panel on the hallway side of the door to close it. She then ran as fast as she could, down the hallway, and away from the bounty hunters.
At that same time this went on, as the bounty hunters were focused on Shenhua, Lee swiftly leaned up, took quick aim, and threw the kunai knife in his right fingers, at the light switch behind the bounty hunters.
The knife hit the dead center of the switch, slicing their the plastic switch, and rubber coatings of the wires underneath the switch. As the metal kunai made contact with the electrical wires in the switch, it caused the lights in the room to short out. Making the room go dark, except for the lights coming from the adjacent rooms and hallways.
With the bounty hunters distracted by the sudden darkness, Lee bolted for the nearby hallway, just a mere few feet to his left.
As he made it through the entrance to the hallway, he pulled out his key card, and slid it on that panel outside the entrance, causing the steel door to shut and lock behind him.
Lee then walked briskly straight down the hallway, to avoid both the bounty hunters, and Shenhua. While he did so, Lee though, 'I don't even want to know the type of hell those three will catch when Shenhua tells the others of what they just tried to pull on the both of us.'
(_)
Meanwhile, in the dark room Lee and Shenhua just escaped from, the three bounty hunting women stood in the darkness, as Jetta joked, “I guess Lee is as smooth as silk.”
In response to Jetta's comment, Spike and Faye just groaned.
(_)
Two minutes later, in another part of the factory complex, Revy and Rock stood by each other, in a large room, as they had their hand held radios out, which they were talking into.
Shenhua had just radioed them, and the others on the radios, about her fight with Lee, and what Spike, Faye, and Jetta had just tried to do to her, and Lee.
The news upset both Rock and Revy.
Spike, Faye, and Jetta also had their radios, and they were part of the conversation, as well.
Revy barked, into her radio, “How dare you three attack Shenhua?!”
Spike did not show any guilt in her tone of voice, as she replied, into her radio, “What can I say? It was just too tempting an opportunity to pass up.”
Revy warned, “You try that again, and I will show you the type of pain I have planned for Lee.”
Spike quipped, “You can try, Revy. And we can use it as a wonderful excuse to find out which of us is better. You might actually present a challenge for me.”
Revy responded, “No. I will arrange your own funeral.”
Rock looked over at Revy, Revy looked back at her. As Rock look in Revy's face, Rock spoke up, into her radio, as she ordered, in her authoritarian tone of voice, “Cut it out. The both of you. Keep in mind, that ultimately, all of this is Lee's fault. Not mine, nor yours, nor Revy's, nor Shenhua's. But, we are willing to make restitution to settle this matter.”
Revy just shrugged in response, as she looked away from her lover.
A few seconds later, Rock look away from Revy, because she did not like to see her lover act like this.
Spike inquired, “What type of payment? And how much?”
Rock offered, “Ten large, pure gold bars sound fair?”
Spike answered, “Make it twenty gold bars. And they better be pure, and large.”
Rock replied, “Fine. Deal.”
Spike responded, “Thanks. That gold will go towards Julia's college fund.”
Rock thought, 'I hope Julia doesn't grow up to be like her mother. Oh hell, who am I to talk? She probably will. Now, to see if Shenhua is okay with this.'
Rock asked, “Shenhua, are you okay with this?”
Shenhua answered, over the radio, “Yes. I will even help pay for those gold bars. I agree. We do not need this mess. Especially, at a time like this.”
Rock replied, “Thank you. Also, is there anything else you would like to add about your fight with Lee?”
Shenhua stated, “Yes. Lee is able to use his precognition in combat. And because of this, and what he learned from River, his dodging skills are impressive. He also caught me in a hold, and he almost threw me to the floor. If he had not backed up into a table, he might have thrown me to the ground, and escaped then. River taught him well.”
Revy spoke up, “We will keep that in mind. So, where are you headed to, Shenhua?”
Shenhua said, “Now that the cat is out of the bag, I am going to go back and retrieve my kukri, and kunai, which I had to leave behind.”
Revy requested, “Let us know if you need anything.”
Shenhua replied, “I will.”
As Revy and Rock put away from their radios, Revy turned to Rock, as she stated, “You shouldn't have jumped in like that.”
Rock turned to her lover, as she explained, “This is what Lee wants. The old tactic of divide and conquer. As Shenhua pointed out. We don't need this right now. And we have plenty of gold. And this way, we don't have to worry about Spike coming back to haunt us, later.”
Revy pointed out, “Yes. But, we cannot afford to do the same to the others. Yes. We still have lots of treasure left from looting Chang's tower and warehouses. But, our supplies are finite. And baring the unforeseen, we are going to live a very long time.”
Rock conceded, “You have a point there. But, I checked. Most of them have moved on with their lives, and are raising their children. And they understand that you were brainwashed. And, as far as I know, none of them know about Lee, and his stories.”
Revy stated, “Let's keep it that way.”
Rock said, “I agree.”
The two loves then turned and walked out of the room they were in, as they started walking down a hallway, in search of Lee.
(_)
Ten minutes later, in another area of the factory complex, Lee had made his up some stairs to the second floor, as he found himself walking along a steel catwalk, with steel railings to Lee's right, and was attached to the wall on Lee left. To Lee's right, over the railing, the catwalk overlooked a first floor, industrial area, with factory equipment placed along the floor, which ran down the large rectangular room.
The first floor was ten feet below him, and the ceiling in the room was around eight feet above him.
The room itself was sixty feet wide, and room was a hundred feet long, from the back wall, Lee came in through a door, to where the catwalk made a corner to Lee's left. With the extending another twenty feet behind the catwalk in front of him.
Lee had already made it around seventy-five feet from the back wall.
The catwalk itself was ten feet wide, and even though the floor was steel bars, below the steel grid of the catwalk floor, showed a lattice work, and support beams that went down to the concrete floor below it. This meant the catwalk was design to handle a lot of weight on it, at once.
Along the catwalk, every ten feet or so, was open door, to an office.
And the catwalk turned to the left, about twenty-feet in front of him.
Lee was doing his best to step softly, so as to not alert anyone nearby, that he was there.
As Lee made his way along the steel catwalk, he looked down to see that the floor, twenty feet below him, on the concrete ground floor, was full of refinery equipment.
Lee mentally reflected, 'I think it was a good idea to go on the catwalks. Because I am sure this is how they would be looking for me. By using the high ground, as it were.'
Lee then looked in front of him, as he continued on the path he had made in his head, of the layouts of the buildings. He thought, 'After this turn to the left, I should then reach some more storage rooms, and catwalks, that are joined together, before I reach the main stairwell, for this side of the building. Which is on the far, southwestern corner of the building. With luck, none of them are hiding in the stairwell. Still, while I need to hurry, stealth is my best defense in this chase.'
Suddenly, Lee heard heavy footfalls coming towards him, from around the corner, in front of him.
Lee quickly ducked into a near by office, with his back against the open swing door, on the interior side, of the office wall that faced the direction the sounds were coming from.
Lee thought, 'I am glad I chose to remain silent. Or, I might have been ambushed. And the person is clearly coming this way.'
'Though, now I can be the one to do the ambushing. There is nowhere to hide in this room. So, there is likely going to be a fight. And this is going to be a close quarters fight. So my cards will not be very useful. But, my hand to hand combat skills will be. Though, given that Shenhua likely warned the others of what I can do. Or, at least what I showed her. They will be on guard for a hand to hand fight. Still, that cannot be helped.'
A few seconds later, Lee heard the footfalls turning the corner.
As the footfalls got closer, Lee could tell they were from boots.
Lee thought, 'From the sound, the person is wearing boots. And from the time between steps, and the strength of the steps. With a longer stride, and harder, heavier steps. The person is likely a man, or originally male. Which means my chances in this fight when way up. Given only the women after me have had that super-soldier serum.'
Lee then saw the person come into view, to his left side.
Lee saw that it was Jayne. Along with the boots, Jayne was wearing a pants, shirt, and a jacket. Also, he was carrying some type of strange rifle in his hand. He also noticed that Jayne right trigger finger was resting against the trigger guard of his rifle.
At the moment, Lee notice that Jayne did not see him, as he thought, 'Jayne is not an idiot. He is going to see me any second. I need to act, now.'
Lee immediately turned to face Jayne, as he used his left foot to swiftly kick the rifle from Jayne's hands.
The rifle flew in the air, bounced against the railing, and landed back on the catwalk.
Lee's attack caught Jayne by surprise, as Jayne flatly stated, “What?”
Meanwhile, Lee stepped in front of Jayne, as he then used both hands to push Jayne back a few feet from him, back the way Jayne had came, and away from Lee. This also put some distance between Jayne and his rifle. With the rifle being beside Lee, on the catwalk, a few feet to his right side.
Lee continued looking at Jayne, while Jayne got his foot.
Lee he thought, 'Jayne still likely had other weapons. So, don't dare go for his rifle. Also, I could probably take him in a fight. But, I don't want to. So, I will try to keep this civil. But, if I have to, I will bait him into the type of fight that I want.'
By then, Jayne was now standing solidly on the catwalk, as he look at Lee, whom was ten feet from him. And before Lee could speak, Jayne complimented, “Nice move, boy.”
Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'That is a good way to start off a conversation.' He said, “Thank you, Jayne. I wish we were meeting over better circumstances.”
Jayne coldly responded, “Well, we are not.”
Lee thought, with concern, 'I guess this is going south faster than I thought it would.'
Jayne commented, “I am going to enjoy kicking your ass for turning me in a chick.”
Lee pointed out, “Well, you got some fun out of your female form. And I did give you a good friend, and drinking buddy, Bob.”
Jayne conceded, “True. Which is why I am going to kick you ass, instead of killing you. Though, I will be nice, and just beat you to a bloody pulp. Then, I will hand you to Mal, whom really wants to kick your ass. For another beating.”
Lee thought, 'Good. He is not going for his other weapons. That means I have a chance. But, I might still be able to salvage this situation.'
Lee inquired, “I would think that Chang would want me alive, and in one piece?”
Jayne answered, “Oh, he does. And we plan to hand you over to him, because he is offering a nice reward to do so. But, we are going to beat you some, first.”
Lee flatly replied, “Fine.” Lee then got into a defensive position, as he asked, “You did hear about that time loop?”
Jayne replied, “Yea. The girls mentioned something about it, when we were organizing everything, together, back at the Casino. Right before we left.”
Lee stated, “Well, River spent years training me in hand to hand combat. Are you sure you want to take me on?”
Jayne replied, “Oh yea. I also heard you were friends.”
Lee commented, “Yes. Good friends.”
Jayne smirked, as he said, “In that case, I won't try to break your bones. Still, I admit I never had the guts to really want to see what River can do in a fight. But, I am more than happy to find out about her fight style, by kicking your ass.”
Jayne then charged Lee. Though, before Jayne knew it, Lee used his right foot to swiftly kicked him in the balls.
As Jayne collapsed onto the floor, Lee stated, “Well, I don't feel like fighting. River taught me to take my opponents down as fast as possible. Besides, that was the fastest way I could think of to stop you, without permanently harming you. Though, I am surprised you are not wearing a cup.”
To Jayne's credit. He was still standing up straight, and he did not lean over and grap his balls in pain. Though, Jayne did mildly groan, as he replied, “It is difficult to pee, while wearing those of things.”
Lee shrugged, as he agreed, “That is true.”
Jayne then started lightly chuckling, as he used his right hand to reach for something in one of his interior jacket pockets.
While slightly groaning, Jayne said, “Give me a minute. And I will be back to kicking your ass.”
Lee saw that it was a small packet of pepper, and he realized what Jayne was about to do.
Lee quickly said, with concern in his tone of voice, “Jayne, in all sincerity, I highly suggest you do not do that. It might backfire badly on you.”
Jayne snorted, “Yea, right.”
Jayne worked through the pain, as he thought, 'Like I am going to believe you, Lee. The master trickster. You are as bad as Saffron. Still, I am in too much pain to sneeze on command. But, I always keep some packets of pepper for emergencies. And this is going to solve my problems, real quick.'
Jayne then opened the packet of pepper, sniffed it, and sneezed, changing into a women.
A second after Jayne turned into a woman, Jayne collapsed to the catwalk, as she let out a bloodcurdling, girlish scream from the surprisingly high amount of pain that she suddenly felt.
It was like all the pain that had been in his nut sack as a guy, had moved, and grown to encompass her entire lower abdomen.
Jayne clutched lower stomach with both hands, as she slowly moaned in pain.
Lee looked down at Jayne, with pity in his eyes. He shook his head a few times, as he said, “Jayne, I was only trying to help you. And this is a good example of what is called equivalent exchange. Sore male parts become much larger, sore female parts. And unlike a man's nuts, you cannot ice down female internal organs... Though, I will say that as a woman, you are hot...” Lee count not help but smile, as he went onto say, “Damn. I do fine work.”
While Jayne continued to groan in pain, as she laid on the catwalk, Lee turned his attention towards the rifle on the ground. He then walked over, reached down, and picked it up. Lee was careful not to touch the trigger, while keeping the barrel pointed away from them, as he lean back up, while he looked at the weapon.
As Lee got a better look at the weapon, he immediately recognized it as one of Jayne's favorite weapons. A weapon Jayne called, Vera.
While continuing to looked at the large bore rifle, in his hands, he turned to Jayne. He stated, with slight excitement in his tone of voice, “Ah, Vera. For you to pull this out for little old me must mean this is a real special occasion for you. I am deeply touched. Just so you know. Between you and me. I wanted to use Vera in my stories, but I just couldn't figure out how to give you an excuse to join in on the fighting, and fit this weapon into the action scenes. Still, this is a cool weapon.”
Jayne warned, in more a moan of pain, than a threatening tone, in her female voice, “Don't you touch her.”
Lee continued to look at Jayne, as he calmly said, “Jayne, I know how much this weapon means to you. Unfortunately, I need some weapons. Which also includes a few grenades. Such as on your belt. I will be nice, and leave you your pistol, after I unload it. Also, I saw a couch in the office I ducked into. Remove your pistol, give me your radio, some grenades, let me keep Vera, and I will help you to the couch. Or, you can continue laying on the floor.”
Jayne thought it over Lee's offer for a few moments. She then conceded, “Alright. I am in no shape to complain.”
Jayne pulled out her pistol from the holsters on the belt looped around the pants of her waist, unclasped her encrypted radio handset, pulled off, and from around her waist over her pants belt, her removed her bandolier. The bandolier held the grenades in the loops of it. A she removed each item she set the items on the floor.
Jayne said, “Since we want you alive, I will tell you that the grenades are on eight second fuses. Just twist the knobs at the top, either way, to prime them.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then helped Jayne up. Lee walked with Jayne, as Jayne hobbled to the couch in the nearby room.
As they walked, Jayne asked, “I don't understand you. I just tried to kick your ass. Why are you helping me?”
By then, they reached the couch, as Lee said, “Because, I am a man of my word. And I am not as bad as you guys think I am.”
Lee helped Jayne laid down the couch, on her back. Jayne replied, “Perhaps not.”
Lee said, “Rest well.”
Lee then ran back and collected Vera, the radio, and the grenade belt.
First, Lee bent down, as he picked up Jayne's pistol. Lee saw was that the firearm was a semi-automatic pistol. He thought, 'Well, I am glad that someone finally talked Jayne to stop using the LeMat, and trade up to a better pistol, than that antique.'
'Still, I would like to take the pistol. But, if I did, they would more likely try to kill me. Because they would account for the pistol. Though, Vera is a special weapon. Most of them may not realize that Jayne brought this weapon with him. Nor, realize that I now have it.'
'So, I will unload, and leave the pistol here. That way, they still might believe I am unarmed. Unless, they see me with Vera. That will give me an edge.'
'And I can take a few other items here, as well.'
Lee pulled out the ammo clip, and he then pulled back the slide to see that the chamber was empty. Lee removed the bullets from the ammo clip, and dropped the bullets down to the concrete floor below him. Lee put the empty ammo clip back into the pistol. He pushed the button to release the slide, with his right hand, while he gripped the slide with his left hand, so he could slowly but the slide back in place on the gun. After which, Lee uncock the hammer of the pistol. And he set down the pistol, on the steel grid of the catwalk floor.
Lee took three grenades from the bandolier, and pocketed those three grenades into his coat. He then pulled out the rest of the grenades from the bandolier. He tossed the grenades, and the bandolier, over the railing, and onto the concrete floor below. Lee did this to make sure that no one would be able to tell exactly how many grenades he had taken from the bandolier.
Next, Lee turned off the radio, and strapped the radio to his belt, on the left side of his waist. With his his black coat, which when half way down his thighs, hide the radio from sight.
Afterward, Lee picked up Vera, and held the weapon with both hands. He checked to make sure there was round in the chamber, and the hammer was cocked back. Lee found both was the case. He also found the safety and he made sure it was offer.
After which, Lee put right hand on the grip, with his right index finger resting on the trigger guard. And he had his left hand gripping the rifle from under itself barrel, right in front of the magazine. With the barrel pointed away and in front of him.
Finally, Lee stood up straight. And he no longer cared to be quiet on the catwalk, as he quickly his way around the corner of the catwalk, towards his next destination.
Half a minute after turning on the catwalk, Lee walked into the first storage room, on the way to his destination. As Lee passed through the doorway, he held the rifle with his right hand, as he used his left hand, to pulled out and use the key card, to shut and lock the steel door behind him.
Lee then pocketed the key, in his left pants pocket. After which, he turned around, away from the closed door, and he continued on his way.
(_)
A few minutes later, as Lee made it to the second storage room, between catwalks. He stopped walking, as he turned on the radio, attached to the right side of his waist, for a few seconds.
Lee kept the volume low, as he thought, 'With so many of the people with enhanced hearing, I have to be careful in using this. But, it can come in handy.”
There was silent for over a minute, on the radio, until Lee recognized the female voice, as Balalaika, as she stated, in english, with a russian accent, “B, are you in place?”
From the radio, B replied, in english, with a russian accented, “Yes, Balalaika. We now have most of the area covered.”
Lee thought, 'Great. Those two are trained military snipers, and they are likely perched outside, somewhere high, in two locations, just looking me. Probably from two opposite locations, over looking this area. And with the lights on, along with this scopes, and enhanced vision, they would see me easily. If I go out in the open, and shoot me. So, I will have to stay inside. But, at least now, I know where those two are at. And now, I can account for them, and plan accordingly.'
'Besides, I was slightly worried about facing those two in person, in a combat situation. I spent a few days with them. Next to the maid, Annie, Arcee, and River. They are the last two people I would want to face in combat...'
Lee the continued thoughts, with concern, 'And I am now stated here too long. I need to get moving.'
Lee turned off the radio. Gripped the fore-end of his rifle, with his left hand, while holding the grip with his right hand, with his trigger finger resting on the trigger guard.
Then, Lee continued moving forward.
(_)
A few minutes later, as Lee walked into the third storage room, between catwalks, to his right, he heard a female voice calmly say, to his right, “Hello Lee.”
Lee looked to his right, see Sawyer, with holding her chainsaw in a defensive position, about fifteen feet from him.
Lees immediately came to a stop, as he mentally noted, 'Sawyer's chainsaw is turned off. Or, I would have heard it. This is a good sign. Still, I am not taking any chances.'
Thought, Lee kept his finger off the trigger, Lee swiftly pointed the rifle in his hands, towards Sawyer, as he calmly replied, “Hello Sawyer. Please, don't take me pointing a weapon as you the wrong way.”
Sawyer changed the way she held her chainsaw, to were the flat of her chainsaw blade in a defensive manner, across her chest and head. She shrugged, as she stated, in casual tone of voice, “Given the situation we are in. I find your action completely understandable.”
Lee walked around the room, from where Sawyer was, while he continued to facing her, with his weapon draw on her. As he did so, he said, in a comforting tone of voice, “I appreciate you being so understanding.”
Sawyer responded, “No problem. Also, I am sure you know I can use my chainsaw to deflect bullets. I know from the series, that you have seen me do it a couple of times.”
Sawyer thought, with concern, 'Though, I am not sure I can deflect bullets from a rifle like that. Lee, I remember in the time loop, as your teacher in singing and dancing. That you were a wonderful student, whom was always concerned about not harming me. Not even by accidentally stepping on my toes, as we danced. I admired that about you. And I know that as long as I do not threaten you, you will not fire on me.'
'Besides, I know you do not want to shot me. Because, you finger is not on the trigger. So, I think I will just talk to you. Instead of pushing the matter.'
By then, Lee was close to the door on the other side of the room, near the catwalk he was heading for.
From the corner of his eye, Lee saw the door was open, but he kept his eyes on Sawyer, while keeping the end of his rifle trained on her. Lee thought, 'I think it is best I continue this conversation. She can outrun me. And likely outfight me. Killing her would be a bad idea for many reasons. Chief among them is she is one of the few after me who likely is happy about what I did for her...'
'Also, my coat is clearly hiding the radio strapped to my belt. That is good. I do not want them to know I have the radio... At least no yet...'
'Still, I need to bring her a bit down to Earth... Or, in this case, Mars.'
Lee stated, “Yes. But, there is a flaw in your defense that you, Revy, Eda, and Tex-Mex missed.”
Sawyer inquired, “Which is?”
Lee answered, “Given you have to hold the chainsaw by the back end of it, you cannot use the flat end of the blade to protect both you upper body and lower body at the same time. If you protect the chest and head, you expose your legs and feet.”
Sawyer casually said, “It figures that you would be the one to realize that.”
Lee commented, “You shouldn't worry. I have no plans on shooting you. And as long as you keep that chainsaw off, and keep your distance from me, I won't shoot you.”
Sawyer mentally reflected, 'As I thought.' She replied, “I know.”
Lee then took a little closer look at the chainsaw teeth, as he said, “I see you upgraded you chainsaw with diamond embedded teeth.”
Sawyer smiled, as she stated, “Yes. And the teeth and chain are made of a titanium alloy. Also, the engine and housing are the top of the line. When one is wealthy, one can afford the best. By the way, thanks for that wealth.”
Lee happily responded, “You're welcome. And you are the first person in your group to thank me for making them wealthy.”
Sawyer giggled for a few seconds. She then said, “Why am I not surprised? Still, this weapon sucks on cutting concrete and steel, because I don't have access to a water sprayer to keep the teeth cool. But, I can afford to replace the teeth, if need be.”
Lee commented, “It is never fun to break one's toys.”
Sawyer thought, 'Now, to ask the question.' She pointed out, “Correct. Now, I have to ask you. Why don't you just make this easier on all of us, and just surrender? Lee, we both know you have never killed anyone before. And as you stated. You are not going to shoot me, unless I force you to.”
Lee admitted, “You're right. But, would you like to know a little secret?”
Sawyer answered, “Sure.”
Lee said, “I have never been in this situation before. So, I am not sure what I am capable of.”
Sawyer stated, “Well, I have. And I really don't want to kill, nor maim you, Lee. Please surrender.”
Lee replied, “I appreciate that.”
Sawyer responded, “Thank you. Just so you know, I am not sore about the lessons you tricked us into teaching you, in the time loop. And you were a good student. Also, unlike the others, I realize what you gave me. And I am thankful. You gave me back my voice, better than ever. You repaired my scars. You gave me youth, health, and longevity. Made me rich. You gave me a great life, with good friends. So, I promise you, if you surrender, I will not let them do too much to you. You will survive their revenge. And let's be honest. You are dying of cancer. Your choices are limited.”
Lee said, “Sawyer, I believe you will try to keep your word. If it was just Revy and the Lagoon group after my hide, I might take you up on your offer, because I think you could keep you word in such a situation. The problem is that the maids are after me. And we both know you cannot take them. That is the reason I didn't go to Chang for help. Even he is not crazy enough to directly cross Roberta.”
Sawyer mentally lamented, in bitterness, 'And it is all my fault. And as stupid as it is to tell you, with you aiming a rifle at me, at the moment. It might help matters between us, if I told you the truth.'
Sawyer shrugged, as she conceded, “You have a point there. Still, it is kind of my fault the maids are after you.”
Lee stated, “Let me guess. You stayed in touch with Roberta, after your Hell Saber days were over. And recently, you accidentally told her about the writer, and you sent her copies of my stories. With you not realizing the shit hurricane you would be stirring up.”
Sawyer winced, as she replied, “Yes.”
Lee honestly replied, “I forgive you.”
Sawyer smiled, as she said, “Thank you.”
Lee responded, “You are welcome. Still, I, of all people, have long since learned not to forget how dangerous those around me can be. Now, please let me pass by you.”
Sawyer said, “Okay. I will let you go for now. I will even give you a five minute head start, before I contact the others.”
Lee lowered his weapon, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Sawyer lowered her chainsaw blade towards the floor, between them, as she commented, “Good. And don't take this the wrong way. I am going to continue to come after you.”
Lee casually responded, “I can live with that. Though, I do have one question, Sawyer. I never understood why you use a chainsaw to torture people. Sure, it is intimidating. But, when you get right down to it, a chainsaw is a very inefficient weapon for inflicting lasting, large amounts of pain on someone.”
“A knife would work so much better for making the victim suffer. With a knife, you could cut around major arteries and veins, preventing the victim from bleeding out too quickly, while still allowing you to expose nerve endings, and sensitive tissues.”
Sawyer's raised her eyebrow, as Lee continued, “For example, most people don't realize that when a person is shot, a flesh wound can be more painful than a deep wound. This, as I am sure you know, is because there are more nerve endings located right under a person's skin, instead of their internal organs and tissues. It would be more painful to skin someone alive, than to repeatedly stab that victim in the area of their body that they would have otherwise been flayed of their skin.”
Sawyer's eyes widened as Lee went onto say, “Meanwhile, a chainsaw just tears into person's flesh indiscriminately, regardless of the arteries and veins of the area of the body you are cutting into. As such, said person would bleed out too swiftly.”
Sawyer's jaw dropped, as Lee said, “Then again, there are other forms of torture that require delicate skill and care, as well, when performed on a victim, or that victim will die to quickly. Take for example, castration of a man's penis and scrotum. If you don't do it right, the victim will bleed out in under twenty minutes. That is a medical fact.”
By then, Sawyer's skin has paled a few more shades, than its standard pale shade, in worry and slight fear, as Lee stated, “And I guess the same couple be applied to a woman's breasts. But, I am not sure on that. And unfortunately, such subjects are not things a white man, such as myself, can ask about to others, barring a few exceptions, like yourself, without winding up arrested, and imprisoned.”
“Anyway, I apologize for being so long winded. But, I just wanted your expert opinion on the subject.”
Sawyer was still in slight shock, as she thought, with concern, 'Lee just commented about torturing people in a such casual manner. I guess this would be a similar feeling as to finding out that the nice guy next door is a sadistic serial killer. Given my former career, I am not one to judge on this topic. But, sometimes you just don't know people. I am glad he prefers to be nice to people. Even those that are after him. Because, I do not want to see his bad side.'
Lee noticed Sawyer's reaction, of being wide eyed, and having her jaw hanging open from her mouth.
Lee responded, in a calm tone of voice, “I guess I was too forward on the subject of talking shop with you. Though, while you are obviously not the only person whom thinks about torturing people. I, along with others, just don't act on those thoughts and desires. Like a bug bite. The more you scratch, the more it itches. So, let us get back to the subject at hand. Why do you use a chainsaw?”
By then, Sawyer was able to collect herself enough to simply say, “Personal preference.”
Lee shrugged, as he casually replied, “Works for me.”
Lee turned to his side, as he quickly exited the room, and onto the steel catwalk, he had been heading for.
Lee continued to keep his weapon lowered, in his right hand, as he used his left hand to pull out his key card, from his left side pants pocket. He then swiped the card the panel, causing the door to slide closed, and locked behind him.
Lee pocketed his key card, in his left side pants pocket. After which, he put his left hand back on the underside of the fore-end of the barrel.
Lee then turned back around, to face the catwalk, as he back walking forwards, from the threshold to the catwalk.
The catwalk itself was six feet wide, with a steel railing to his right side, and the wall to his left side.
But, as Lee got three feet, onto the catwalk, Lee's precognition screamed for him to get back.
Also, there was plenty of lighting around the room, to see with.
Lee took a step back, just he heard a gunshot, and he saw that the bullet bounce off of the wall to his left, in front of him, and away from him.
Lee quickly back up all the way to where his back was to the steel door he had just locked. He crouched down, to lower his profile from the unknown shooter, or shooters, that had ambushed him.
Lee thought, with worry, 'An ambush! Of all the times for this to happen. Though, I doubt Sawyer knew about it. Or, she would have likely told me about it... Still, how far am I from the other side of this catwalk?..'
Lee looked forward to see that the catwalk was only twenty feel long, leading to a hallway, with the door to the hallway was open. Lee thought, 'Good. If I can make it to the hallway, I should be fine. The problem is making it there.'
Suddenly, Lee heard a male voice, to his right, from across the gap in the room, an alcove, at the same level as him, on opposite side of the room from him. The male voice shouted, “Surrender, Lee!”
Lee instantly recognized the voice, as he mentally screamed, 'Ah shit. It is Mal. And he is clearly still pissed about the gender bending. Though, with Jayne here, it is not surprising that he is here, as well. But, is he alone?... I wish I had a mirror, or something to use to look over the edge at them... I would have a compact on me, if it wouldn't cause to many damn questions... Still, that might just work.'
Lee pulled out his key card with his left hand, and he noticed that that it was reflective enough to use the room light, as a mirror.
Lee then used the card to look out, across the room, to see that Mal and Zoe were crouching behind a metal parapet, which was the end of a second hallway, across the large gag between the him, on the catwalk, and them. There pistols were drawn. With Mal crouching to Zoe's right side.
(_)
At that moment, in the storage room, Lee had just left Sawyer in, Sawyer immediately heard gunshots coming from the other room on the other side of the door, and in the room that Lee left for.
Sawyer thought, 'What the hell?'
Sawyer then heard over the radio, clipped to her belt, as Mal's voice said, “We have Lee cornered in the southwestern section of the building Lee was reported in.”
Over the radio, Rock said, “Good, we will be there within ten minutes.”
Sawyer grimly thought, 'Of all the damn things to happen. And the worst part is I didn't know about the ambush... Though, if I did, I would have warned Lee of it. Still, why didn't his precognition pick it up... Probably because it is not a hundred percent foolproof, and he knows it.'
'Maybe I can salvage the situation.'
Sawyer turned to the shut, solid steel, sliding door, as she continued her thought, 'And I am guessing the red light on the panel by the door means that the door is locked. Meaning I am going to have to do this the hard way. Though, it is going to take a number of seconds to get my chainsaw running. And at least a minute to cut through that door.'
'And if I open the door, I will give Lee the option to surrender to me, while trying to keep his ass in one piece from the others... That is, if he doesn't try to shoot me. But, I get the feeling he isn't planning to shooting anyone. So, it is worth the risk.'
While holding the chainsaw blade away from herself, Sawyer used her right hand grip the front bar of her chainsaw, as she used her left hand to pulled out the starter rope, on the left side of the engine, to get the chainsaw engine going.
(_)
A few seconds later, on the other side of the steel door, Lee was still crouched down, with his back to the door.
Lee felt he has seen all that he needed of Mal and Zoe. He Lee pocketed the key card. He then held his rifle with both hands.
Lee thought, 'The good news is that I can see them. The bad news is that it is both Mal and Zoe. Both, are pretty good shots. And Zoe is completely loyal to Mal. Also, given their personalities, that warning shot was probably the only one I am going to get from those two. And my time is limited. The rest of them will soon converge on this point. Still, I might as well say something, go get them to reply. Thus, helping to give me an idea on how best to escape.'
Lee yelled, in a casual tone of voice, “Hi Mal. Hi Zoe.”
Zoe loudly replied, in a flat tone of voice, “Hello Lee.”
Lee thought, 'Let's cut to the chase.' He inquired, “So, what do I get for surrendering?”
Mal loudly stated, “An ass kicking.”
Lee questioned, “And if I don't surrender?”
Mal loudly joked, “An ass kicking, and lead in your ass.”
No one laughed at Mal's joke.
Lee thought, with mild relief, 'Good. Mal still has his sense of humor. That means he is not completely hellbent on killing me. Zoe is as calm as usual. I can work with that.'
Lee stated, “You drive a hard bargain, Mal. But, I am going to have to decline. Still, apologize about the gender bending. Though, I did give you an extended lifespan.”
Mal pointed out, “Well, that is still not a fair trade, compared to what you made me go through.”
Lee retorted, “Oh come on. I didn't make you sleep with anyone, as a woman.”
Mal asked, in a confused tone of voice, “You didn't?”
Lee flatly answered, “No. I even made it so that you could change back immediately. So, you were not stuck. Except for that one time, I didn't even make you piss as a woman. I know how big you male ego is. So, I won't do that to you...” Then, it dawned on Lee, concerning the way Mal had replied to his comment. Lee accused, “Oh. You actually did sleep with someone as a woman.”
Mal responded, in a knee jerk fashion, “I was drunk.”
Lee firmly pointed out, “I didn't get you drunk.”
Mal commented, “No. But, the whole reason I am able to turn into a woman, in the first place, is because of you. I wouldn't have been in that situation, if it as not for you. And you are going to suffer for that.”
Meanwhile, Lee overheard Zoe giggle.
Lee thought, 'I don't think Zoe's heart is in this. Let's find out.'
Lee inquired, “What about you, Zoe? Any hard feelings about the gender bending?”
Zoe yelled, “No. Not dealing with periods, and being able to control when I want to have children, is a wonderful trade off. I am just here because my captain needs a chaperon. We don't want him leveling the building getting to you.”
Lee barely heard Mal say, “You are not helping.”
Lee quietly chuckled. He then loudly replied, “I appreciate that.”
Just then, Lee heard the sound of grinding, a three feet above his head.
Lee looked up just in time to see Sawyer's chainsaw fully cut through the top, of the side of the door, that the door slide from the wall.
As the chainsaw slowing make its way downward, Lee thought, 'Oh no. This just got worse. I would say I have a minute before she cuts all the way down, and removes the door. And I honestly do not know if Sawyer is trying to get through the door to help me, or hurt me. Maybe a little of both. But, either way, my time had run out. And I need to get moving again. So, I guess I am going to have to do this the hard way... Like most of the situations in my life.'
Lee held the butt of the stock of the weapon, tightly against the front part of his right shoulder, as thought, 'I got to be careful, while holding the butt of this weapon good and tight. Considering the size of these rounds, this thing likely has a mean kick. And if I don't hold Vera tight, it could seriously harm my right shoulder, when I fire it. Now, to get across, and show Mal and Zoe what Natsuru and Akira taught me in how to get out of tight situations, by using a firearm.'
'Though, I will wait until my precognition tells me when the best time to act is.'
Lee's precognition then alerted him that it was time to act. He quickly stood up, and within less than a second, he started moving, while he turned to his right, took aim, and fired, at the ceiling, across the room, right above the heads of Mal and Zoe.
The Lee found that the ammo was simple large rounds, but the gunfire forced Mal and Zoe to duck under the parapet.
As Lee fired the first few rounds, he found he was correct about the recoil, but the kick was not as bad as he expected it to be, and he was able to safely move while firing.
While Lee moved swiftly, in a sideways fashion, across the catwalk, he fired a round every second, forcing the browncoats to stay behind cover, as Lee thought, 'I am glad these are not explosive rounds. Or, I would hurt them.'
As Lee got to the other side of the room, he turned straight, while he entered the nearby hallway.
Lee also took his right trigger finger off the trigger of the rifle.
Lee did not even bother to shut and lock the door. Instead, he just ran towards the stairwell, which he guessed required him to make it down the hallway he was in. Then, he needed to take a right into another hallway, with the stairwell being at the southwest corner of the building.
As Lee ran, he thought, 'When I get to the turn at this hallway, I will slow down to the a brisk walk. I should make it to the stairwell in about two minutes. Maybe less. Still, how much ammo do I have left?'
While running, Lee did a quick check of ammo.
Lee thought, 'I still got three rounds in the weapon, and the six in the stock. So, I am good for the moment. Now, I need to get to the stairwell.'
Lee then turned his running into a jog, while holding Vera with both hands, in front of his chest, with the barrel facing at an upward diagonal angle, to his upper left, as he made his way down the hallway.
Half a minute later, Lee took a right into another straight hallway. He saw no doors along the hallway, but he did see a sign for at the end of the hallway, for the stairwell at the end door, that was right beside the sign, to Lee's left.
Lee slowed down to a brisk walk, as he thought, 'Well, I am near the stairwell now. And I think I might want risk checking what they are saying about me, on the radio.'
The radio Lee had stolen from Jayne was strapped to his belt, on the left side of his waist. Lee rotated the knob at the top to turn on the device. He then checked to make sure the volume to the radio was still set to low. With the radio just being loud enough to where he could hear what was being discussed.
On the radio, Lee heard Mal ask, “What did Lee find a rifle at?”
From over the radio, Shenhua stated, “He did not have one when he face me.”
On the radio, Akira commented, “Nor, us.”
From the radio, Sawyer said, “Well he had the weapon when he faced me. He used it to keep me at a distance, and to get around me. I even got a good look at it.”
On the radio, Rock inquired, “What did the weapon look like?
From the radio, Sawyer answered, “It looked like a futuristic full bore rifle, with a magazine at the bottom of the weapon. It had a chrome muzzle, a wooden handle. It had an open stock, where a second set of its large cartridges were stored.”
On the radio, Revy complimented, “Not bad in your description, Sawyer.”
From the radio, Sawyer replied, “I may prefer not to use a gun. But, that does not mean I am not knowledgeable of them.”
Over the radio, Revy said, “I will keep that in mind. Still, I cannot place any rifle that looks like that. To be honest. It sound like that weapon looks so cheesy, I wouldn't be caught dead using it.”
On the radio, Zoe commented, “That sounds like Jayne's weapon, Vera.”
From the radio, Mal ordered, “Jayne. Pick up,”
There was only silence for several seconds.
On the radio, Zoe said, “I knew it was a bad idea to him to go off alone. I know I should have said something.”
From the radio, Revy commented, “Don't worry about it. Lee is too much of a pussy to kill another person. Let me guess, he aimed high, when he shot at you?”
On the radio, Zoe answered, “Correct.”
From the radio, Revy said, “See. I am sure Jayne is probably somewhere in pain, but he will otherwise be alright.”
On the radio, Mal asked, “So, who is going backtrack, to find Jayne?”
From the radio, Kaylee answered, “We will find him.”
On the radio, Rock inquired, “On that thought. Where would Jayne be?”
From the radio, Sawyer stated, “I was in room between catwalks, on the second level, of the south end, of the auxiliary building west of the made building you were taking us to. Lee went west. I would check the east part of this building.”
On the radio, Kaylee said, “Thanks.”
Lee then turned off his radio, as he thought, 'While they now know I am armed. When they find Jayne, they will soon realize I have his radio, along with a few grenades. But, I don't think that will be an issue. I only took a few, and I ditched the rest in a way that will make it difficult for them to account for all of them. If I am lucky, they will not even think about the grenades. Instead, they will focus on Vera, and the radio.'
'Now, to keep moving, and find the stairwell.'
Lee started walking towards in the direction he was planning on heading.
A minute later, Lee came to a stairwell, with the door closed.
After using his precognition to make sure there was no danger in the stairwell, he push the button on the panel to open door. As he walked into the stairwell, he found the lights on the walls illuminated the room well.
Lee then pressed the button on that side of door to close it. Though, he did not lock the door
As Lee started making his way up the stairs, he thought, 'If I lock it, it will tip them off that I have come this way. And now that I am in this stairwell, I know where exactly I am at. Too bad I cannot use the elevators. But, those are too risky for a number of reasons. Such as a button will light up near each door to that elevator, on each floor, as it moves up or down, alerting anyone nearby of its use. And if they someone stops it, while I am in it, I will immediately find myself in a close quarters fight with any number of dangerous people.'
'It is much safer to take the stairs. If something happens, I have more room, and better escape options in here, than in an elevator.'
'Now, if I remember correctly. My path requires me to go to the tenth floor, to reach a bridge between buildings. The only problem is I will have to face Balalaika, B, or both of them, as I literally cross that bridge. But, that cannot be helped.'
Lee then began his trek up the steps. With him be careful with each step he stood, along the stairway.
(_)
Fifteenth minutes later, Lee had not seen, nor heard anyone, in the stairwell, as he reached the tenth floor.
He was the careful, as he exit the stairwell. Though, he found no one around, as he continued down a hallway, to the bridge.
A minute later of walking down a hallway, he soon came to a stop, as he found himself fiftieth feet from bridge between the building he was in, and the building he was heading for.
The bridge was twenty feet long. Also, there was no cover on that stretch of the building. Not even a potted plant by one of the walls.
And while the floor was carpeted over concrete and steel, there were windowed panels, on the roof and walls In addition, was well lit, against the night sky outside, allowing any potentially to clearly see anyone that crossed the bridge.
Lee thought, 'Chances are that Balalaika, or B, will see me when I cross this bridge. And both are good enough to hit me. But, for my plan to work, I have to cross it. There is no other path for me to reach where I need to go in time. I check.'
Lee then used his one hand to hold Vera, while he used his other to slide up the sleeve of the hand, and arm, that was holding up Vera, to first reveal his digital wrist watch, and beside it, further up his wrist, the device that the Lowe family had given him
Lee looked at the device, as he thought, 'Now, let's see if this thing works.'
(_)
Outside, Balalaika watch from her perch, which was located midway to the top of the communications tower she was on, but was still high enough to see over the building.
Even though it was night, with the outside and inside lights of the factory area on, it make seeing the area much easier. And her enhancement vision, and rifle scope, made up the most of the difference in being able to spot what was in the shadows of the lights.
At the moment, Balalaika held her sniper rifle up with both hands. There was already a bullet in the chamber of the weapon, with an ammo magazine attached to it. She was using her rifle scope, which was attached to her sniper rifle, to look into the enclosed windows of the well lit bridge between two buildings just west, and southwest of the main build complex. She thought, 'It is likely Lee will come through here. Benny stated that Lee had been in the main building. Then, Natsuru stated he was in the building west of the main building. Finally, Mal stated he was in the southwest of that building.'
'It is likely Lee is doubling back to where he hid his car. Simple tactics. Get us all into one group. That way there are no unknown factors involving us, and he knows where we are all at.'
'Even though the maids are not here, the rest of us are. And it is easier to avoid two people, instead of a group. I suspect that Roberta and Fabiola realize this. After the whole Grey Fox incident, Roberta knows how difficult it is to track someone with a small army also doing it. Knowing her, she will likely lay in wait near the location she believes Lee will be next. With Fabiola nearby.'
'And I would gamble Lee odds against those two are worse than facing all of us here. Though, if Lee can escape all of us, and the maids, he will have earned his freedom, and my respect.'
'Now, if I am right, Lee's plan is to double back to his car, and escape, with all of us chasing him. Since he likely had the guard call the cops, he will try to lead us to where he believes that cops are, and then escape in the confusion.'
'This is the only move he had left to do. He cannot reality jump. We would immediately track him. And he is not suicidal enough to stand and fight us. So, this is all he can do. And if I was in his place, I would come up with a simpler plan Though, I would have left boobytraps, including tripwires, and claymore mines, behind me.'
'But, I believe Lee really doesn't want to hurt us. If he did, he would like shot someone by now. Revy, Akira, and Natsuru, vouch that he is a good shot. Which is one of the reasons, I am not going for the kill shot. I will go for his lower legs, or feet. That will force him to slow down, and eventually surrender.'
'We want him alive, so I will just wing him.'
'And the ammo I am using is just standard lead rounds. They will hurt him, but they will not take off a limb, cause him to go in shock, bleed out, and die. B is also using the same ammo and equipment I am using. Also, I believe that Revy and the others are also using lead rounds, instead of hollow-points, or armor piercing rounds.'
'This is good, considering someone this skilled, and well manner, is a prize too valuable to be kill over some minor disagreements. We will have his ass for what he has done to us. But, there will be something left we can use afterward.'
'And Rock proved that to be the case, years ago. I am so happy I let Rock live during our time in Tokyo. And Rock has proven an asset from then, for me, and my... women.'
'Along with this, B and I both honestly enjoyed our conversations we had with Lee during our trip from Babylon Five to Mars. And I was impressed he was able to continue to keep his cover story together, while not alerting us that he knew who we were, during those two days, on the passenger liner. That takes skill and experience.'
'Lee is clearly a planner. In a similar vein as Rock. But, unlike Rock, Lee is not afraid to get his hands dirty. He just prefers not to hurt anyone. Though, he knows he has the ability to do so, if he has to.'
'Still, I don't want to alert anyone of where I think Lee is going, because I might be wrong. So, I want them searching other areas. For example, he could try to double back in the north end of the building he is in. In which case, B, will be on the look out for him.'
'Also, if he is coming this way, he will likely take the bridge. I doubt he will cross into the other building from the ground, for three reasons.'
'First, Lee is thinking three dimensionally. While it is likely that some of the others are thinking two dimensionally, with most of us more likely on the ground and lower levels, than on the tenth floor.'
'Second, he has a firearm in case he meets one of us. So, facing one, or two of us, in the hallway, will not be the problem. As we saw with both Sawyer, and Mal and Zoe, right afterward. Lee was able to use a firearm, to escape, without harming anyone. And that was very skillful of him.'
'Third, he likely realizes that, given our skills, B and I are in sniper positions. Going outside will put him at risk of dealing with us. So, he would to minimize his exposure to the outside. And coming through that bridge offers a lot of cover, with only around six meters of exposure, between the two buildings.'
'This is the route I would take. Now, I just need to wait, and see, what Lee does.'
A few seconds later, Balalaika saw Lee start running out, onto the bridge, from the north building, while carrying the rifle, Vera, in both hands. With his left hand on the bottom of the metal fore-end of the rifle, while his right hand was on the grip, with his trigger finger resting on the trigger guard.
Balalaika gleefully thought, 'There he is. I love it when I am right.'
Balalaika then saw Lee's exact double running the opposite way down the bridge, towards the first Lee. With this Lee also in the same clothing, with the same weapon. And his movements mirrored the first Lee.
And the to Lee's passed by each other, from their right sides, without touching one another, as the continue heading in opposite directions, down the bridge.
Balalaika stated, in russian, “What the hell?!”
Before Balalaika could take the shot, both Lee's had made it to the other side of the bridge, and to cover from both buildings.
But, from the windows, Balalaika could still see the reflections of both Lees. She watched as the Lees continued to copy each others movements.
Both Lees did something with one of their wrists. And the Lee in the north building disappeared in a flash of light.
Balalaika thought, 'Is that?... It has got to be. I do not know where he got it from, but he has one. And that just made things more interesting. Still, I would have use it in the same way, in his position. But, that trick won't work on me twice.'
'Now, to let the others know what Lee has... And I have always wants to say this line, since the Lowe family showed me that movie.'
Balalaika held her rifle with her right hand, as she used her left hand to unhook her radio from the left side of her belt. She then held her radio near her mouth, as she yelled into the radio, in english, “Lee has got a hologram!”
Violin asked in the radio, “What type?”
Balalaika answered, “Total Recall style.”
From their radios, Akira and Violin both said, in unison, “I call dibs.”
Rock stated, from her radio, “We will decide who gets it later. Just look for Lee. So, what happened?”
Balalaika commented, “He used the hologram to get by me. I saw to Lee coming towards each other, from opposite directions, and I was caught off guard. And he was out of my sights, before I knew it.”
Rock responded, “That happens to the best of us. So, where is he now, Balalaika?”
Balalaika forced herself to calm down, as she answered, “Lee has gone into the building south of the building he was reported in. He is on the tenth floor, of a twenty-six story building.”
Rock said, “Good. We should start to converge on him, soon enough.”
A few seconds later, over the radio, B stated, in russian, “Lee is clearly more clever than we thought.”
Balalaika questioned, in russian, “Yes. Though, where would he got such technology from? That is the type of technology that would be expensive to get, even here, in this reality. If it even exists here.”
B replied, “True. And we will find out, later. But, I have some thoughts on the matter.”
Balalaika said, “Good. I look forward to having that conversation, later.”
Balalaika then hooked her radio back to the left side of her belt, and she place her left hand on the underside of the fore-arm of her rifle. As she looked more closely at the windows, of the tenth floor, of the building which Lee had entered. In the hopes of seeing Lee, once again.
(_)
A few seconds ago, as Lee made it into the next building, he stopped, and turned off the hologram with his free hand.
Lee thought, 'That went better than I had hoped. Now, to make my way through this building... I think I will listen to the radio as I do so. I do not see any doors along this hallway. So, there is a minimum risk. And I will continue walking, so I can turn down another corner, in a minute, or so. Long before the others catch up to me.'
Lee used his left hand to set the volume of the radio to low, as he continued walking down the well illuminated hallway, while he listen in on the others.
Lee chuckled as he heard Balalaika yelled, over the radio, “Lee has a hologram!”
Lee continued listening to the conversation between those after him, as he thought, with mild amusement, 'I would bet real money she has seen the Total Recall movie. And that is a cool Michael Ironside quote. Some people just don't appreciate villains. That is why I like writing about them. Though, that has now come back to bite me in the ass. And I hope I can use this hologram device a few more times, before they get to wise for it.'
A few seconds later, the conversation ended, with Rock stating they are coming after him, just as Lee turned a corner, into another hallway.
Lee noticed that the hallway he had entered had a number closed doors. The doors had green lights on the panels by them, showing they were unlocked. Though, instead of the panels, like the other parts of the building. These were lock modern hotel lock, which were attached to door knobs.
Lee thought, “These are probably office rooms. Well, I may have to slow down a bit, as I continue down this way, to the nearby stairwell. Which I believe is on the northeast side of this building. Too bad these buildings do not follow the same design. Nor even a flipped design. Still, they are simple enough to not get lost in. So, I should be happy about that.'
Lee then overheard Balalaika and B talk in russian.
Lee thought, 'Too bad they are speaking russian, and I don't understand what they are saying. Though, that is probably the point. They are likely speaking in russian, so most of the others do not know what they are saying... That is not a bad idea, when using an open communication line... At least open for this group. Considering, I am sure these radios are using an encrypted channel, that is preset on them, before they were handed out to everyone in the group after me.
A minute later, as Lee got within sight of the closed door to the building's stairwell, on the radio, he heard Ranma's female voice say, in english, “We are in the northeast stairwell of this side of the building, that Balalaika stated Lee was in. We will be on the tenth floor in about thirty seconds.”
A second later, Mal stated, over his radio, “Good. Zoe, and I, are taking the elevator, from this side of the building, up to that floor. With the elevator letting out into another hallway, that leads to the bridge bridge Balalaika saw Lee cross, in another direction from you guys. We will meet you by that bridge. One of us should flush Lee out, and find him.”
Natsuru commented, over her radio, “Good idea. And I think we will be the ones that meet him. He is too smart to take an elevator.”
Mal agreed, “You are probably correct. But, it does not hurt to check.”
Shenhua stated, over her radio, “Sawyer and I are coming your way from the other building, using that bridge. If Lee somehow makes it back across the bridge, and Balalaika misses him, a second time. We will have him.”
Lee thought, with worry and concern, 'Oh crap! I am to close to the stairwell, to turn, and go down another hallway, that avoids all three groups. And I was so focused on the stairwell location, on this side of the building, I am not sure where the elevators are located on this side of the building.'
'A major oversight, and mistake on my part. So, even if I do turn and run. I will either have the Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, come to this floor, just in time to see me in the hallway. Or, I will make it back around the hallway in time, and still likely run into Mal and Zoe. And even if I backtrack to the bridge, I will run into Balalaika, Sawyer, and Shenhua. Classic tactics for flushing someone out, and ambushing them.'
'My only advantage is that they don't realize I have one of their radios on me. And they are not sure where exactly I am.'
'Still, I can duck into one of the offices and just hide. I need to turn off my radio as well. Fortunately, the room should be facing away from Balalaika. Or, I am screwed.'
Lee quickly turned off the radio, and then open the door to his left, as he quickly slip inside. He then gently closed the door behind him.
The outside lights provided plenty of illumination, for Lee to see with. He saw that he was in a small office, with a desk on the far wall to Lee's right, with the desk set out a six feet from the wall, with it facing the left far wall. The desk's right side facing the windows, ten feet front the desk. And the desk's left side facing wall with the door, which was ten feet from the desk.
Between the wall and the desk, there was an office swivel chair behind the desk. Along, with a computer monitor, keyboard, and mouse set up onto of the desk. The desk was a metal desk, with the metal walls of the desk going all the way to the floor, with no gaps.
Lee thought, 'Good. There are no gaps under the desk. That means I can likely hide under the desk Though, let' see what else is in the room, before I hide.'
Lee around around, and he there was small table with coffee supplies, and maker on the left side of the room. And beside the small table was a filing cabinet. There were a few large pictures on the wall of alien landscapes, and sunsets, or sunrises, on those alien landscapes.
Lee thought, as he was start to grow anxious, 'Okay. Now, to hide.'
Lee quickly made his way to behind the desk, as he flip on the safety to Vera. He pulled back the chair, and duck under the space where the chair, and the sitters legs went.
As he sat, with his right side to the inside of the desk. His legs was crouched up to his chest, he had Vera leaning between the shins of his leg, with butt of the stock against the floor, and his right hand holding the barrel.
Lee then reached out with his left hand, and pulled the swivel chair back up to the desk.
Lee remained as quiet as possible. As he forced himself to relax and breath slowly, in shallow breaths.
A few seconds later, Lee could here Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru opening and closing doors.
Lee thought, 'I just hope they are doing a once over, and not doing a thorough check. This literally would be an embarrassing position to be caught in. Still, given the speed of the doors that are being open, only one of the girls is checking a single room. And they are being quick about it. I just have to remain calm, and I should be able to wait for them to pass by.'
'And I got to be careful with Vera. Even with the safety on. This weapon is dangerous.'
Half a minute later, Lee heard the door to the office was he in open. Lee noticed the light was not turned on.
The door remained opened for about ten seconds. Then, the door closed.
Lee then heard a number of doors opening and closing, every few seconds. With the sounds of doors opening and closing slowly becoming weaker and weaker, as the trio moved away from his hiding place.
Lee thought, 'Good. Now, for my precognition to tell me when it is the right time to leave this hiding place.'
Lee remained in his spot for another two minutes, before his precognition alerted him that it was safe to come out.
As Lee pushed the chair away, and he got out from under the desk, he was careful with Vera. As he picked up Vera by the barrel, with his left hand, he leaned up.
While straightening his back, he sarcastically thought, 'Well, that did wonders for my back, and knees. Though, at least my back is not out. Now, to get to that stairwell, before the others realize I gave them the slip.'
Lee then put Vera into his right hand, with his right hand on the grip, and his right index finger resting on the trigger guard, as he used his left hand to flip back off the safety.
Lee then walked up to the door to the office. He slowly turned the knob and opened the door. The door swung inwardly, with allowed Lee to duck his head out, and see the way he had come from the bridge. He saw that trio were gone. Though, not taking any chances, Lee walked out into the hallway, and then gripped the outside of the door knob.
Lee twisted the knob as he closed the door. He then slowing turned it back to where the latch would rest. All so that the door would not make a sound, as he closed it.
Lee then turned towards the stairwell.
Lee saw the stairwell door was still open.
Lee thought, 'Good. Now, to do this quietly, but quickly.'
A few seconds later, Lee briskly walked into the stairwell.
As Lee walked softly, but quickly, up the stairs, he thought, 'I will leave the door to the stairwell open. If I close it, they may come back and notice that. And realize I am in the stairwell.'
'Now, I need to make it to the twenty-second floor. Fortunately, there are signs on the doors, stating the number of the floor that door leads too.'
'I figure at the pace I am going, I would make to the twenty-second floor in a few minutes. And I will rest when I get there.'
'And once I reach that floor, I will need to make my way through four hallways. I will then make my way through the a large storage section of this building. After which, another stairwell. And finally the roof.'
'And on the matter of going to the roof. I do not dare use this stairwell to go to the roof from this end of the building, because I would come out the wrong side. There would be to much open ground for me to cover, with me being a sitting duck for Balalaika, and B.'
'Though, it might be best to listen in and find out when they realize they lost me. Being forewarned is being forearmed.'
Lee used his left hand to turn on the radio, clipped to the left side of his belt. He made sure its volume setting was low, with it just barely loud enough for him to hear. So, any noise from it, would likely not attract any unwanted attention.
Lee then continue to carefully, though quickly and quietly, make his way up the steps of the stairwell.
(_)
A few minutes later, on the tenth floor, in the building just north of the building Lee was in, Shenhua and Sawyer were in south part of building's hallway entrance to the bridge, that lead to the building that Lee had went into.
The two women stood by each other, with Shenhua to Sawyer's left side, as they two looked towards the bridge.
Sawyer had her chainsaw turned off, and strapped to her back. While Shenhua had her long knives and throwing knives sheathed.
Both women continued looking forward, as Sawyer asked, “So, are you still planning on killing Lee?”
Shenhua calmly answered, “No. He settled his debt with me, when he saved my life from the Bebop crew.”
Sawyer replied, “Good.”
Shenhua inquired, “You sound like you like him?”
Sawyer shrugged, “Not in that way. It is just he did some good things for me, that improved me life... Our lives. And I am grateful to him, for those things.”
Shenhua responded, “Yes. He did do some good things for you.”
Sawyer commented, “He is not really that bad a guy.” She mentally added, 'I think I will leave out the torture conversation he had with me.'
Shenhua conceded, “But, he is an idiot.”
Sawyer joked, “Aren't all men.”
Both women giggled, for a few seconds.
The two women then watched as Akira, Ranma, Natsuru met up with Zoe, and Mal on the other side of the bridge. None of them looked happy, as they walked across the bridge, toward the two women.
Shenhua commented, “I think, they somehow missed, Lee.”
Sawyer suggested, “Let us find out for sure.”
The two women walked towards the five adults, with the seven adults coming to a stop in the center of the bridge, as they looked at each other.
Shenhua asked, “What happened?”
Akira answered, “We missed him?”
Shenhua asked, “How? This is a straightforward trap.”
Zoe spoke up, “We know. And we checked the rooms our way over here.” She turned to the Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, as she inquired, “Did you guys do the same?”
Ranma turned to Zoe, as she answered, “Yes.” She then turned to Shenhua and Sawyer, as she asked, “Did Lee come back your way?”
Shenhua answered, “No.”
Natsuru turned to Akira, as she cursed, “Crap. How did we miss him, again?”
Akira turned to Natsuru, as she shrugged, “Beats me.”
(_)
At that moment, outside, while steadily sitting on a steel beam that was her perch, on the communications tower, Balalaika kept her right trigger finger on the trigger guard, as she used her rifle scope to watched as Natsuru, Akira, Ranma, Mal, Zoe, had walked onto the bridge from the south building. While Shenhua and Sawyer walked onto the bridge, from the north building.
The seven adults met each other in the middle. And they began to talk.
Balalaika noted that Lee was nowhere in sight.
Balalaika thought, 'What is going on here? I better ask them what happened.'
Balalaika let go of the fore-end of her rifle with her left hand. This allowed her to continued holding her rifle with her right hand, and allow her to use her scope to look at the seven adult.
She then used her left hand to pull out her radio, from the left side of her belt. She pressed the talk button, as she asked, in english, “What happened? Where is Lee?”
From her scope, Balalaika saw Sawyer pulled out her radio, as she answered, “Lee some how got passed all of us.”
Balalaika then watched Akira pulled out her radio. Akira stated, into her radio, “I don't know how it happened. We checked all the rooms on our way here. And from what Mal and Zoe are saying, they did the same thing.”
Balalaika thought, 'How is that possible? We had him. We should not have missed him... Something isn't right. Lee is not this good. Unless...'
Just then, on the radio, Balalaika heard Simon's voice say, “Kaylee, Inara, and I, found Jayne. It seems that Lee kicked Jayne in the balls, and she thought it was a bright idea to change into a girl.”
Akira stated, with her radio, “Bad move.”
Over his radio, Simon replied, “Yes. From seeing the way Jayne is right now. That is obvious.”
Over the radio, Rock asked, “Is Jayne going to be alright?”
On the radio, Simon answered, “Jayne is going to be out of it for a while. But, it is safe to say we now know how Lee retrieved his firearm.”
Balalaika inquired, “Does Jayne have his radio with him?”
A few seconds later, Simon answered, “No.”
Balalaika thought, with mild annoyance, 'Sometimes being right can be a curse.' Balalaika ordered, into her radio, “Quick, change your radio frequencies to channel bravo.”
On the radio, Akira asked, “Huh?”
Over the radio, Revy inquired, “What are you asking, sis?”
Balalaika mentally cursed, 'Damn! I knew I forgot to do something when we handed those radios out to the every. Only B and I know how to work the channel codes we we set our radios too... Well, it cannot be helped now. The only thing I can do is explain what is going on. And that we are now on an open channel with Lee.'
Balalaika stated into her radio, “Everyone be mindful of that Lee has Jayne's radio. We can still catch him. It just means we will have to be careful what we say over these radios... And Lee, I know you are listening. So, speak up... Your cast wants to have a word with you.”
(_)
At the moment, Lee had made it to the twenty-second floor of the building he was in. He had exited the stairwell, and he shut the door behind him.
The stairwell entrance forked into two way intersection of hallways.
Lee then stood in place, as he looked down both hallways, to see that they were close.
He then stared down the hallway he needed go down. He saw several doors line both sides of the hallway. And like the doors from the hallway below, they had card reader locks on the doors. Though, from the green lights on the locks, it showed the doors were unlock.
Since Lee did not seen anyone else down either hallways, he stopped to catch a breath.
As Lee had made it up the staircase, he had his radio on, and he had been listening to their conversation.
Balalaika had just asked for his response, Lee thought, 'I might will make my presence known. After all, Balalaika did make such a wonderfully elegant request for my response. As a gentleman... Well, a gentlewoman. I will have to take her up on her offer... Though, I should not sound tired. I do not want them to know that I getting them to talk, so I can catch my second wind.'
With his left hand, Lee unhooked the radio from his waist belt, on the left side of his waist.
As Lee held the radio in his left hand, near his mouth, he leaned his back against the wall to his left, while he lowed his rifle, to where the end of the barrel was leaning against the floor.
Though, Lee was very careful and aware, not to put his right trigger finger on the trigger. And instead, he had his right index finger continue to rest on the trigger guard.
Lee took a deep breath. He then slowly let out that breath. When Lee was done letting out his breath, he pressed the talk button. Lee flatly replied, through his radio, “Of course, I am. Tapping into the communications of an enemy is such a simple, but necessary tactic. If one wants to stay alive, and free. I recognize these radios as yours, Balalaika. It is your fault I got a radio in the first place. Most of the people here are not as well trained as you, and B. And you both handed out these radios without realizing that I may try to get my hands on one of them.”
Balalaika calmly said, with her radio, “I will admit to that oversight.”
Molly then broke into the conversation, with her radio, “This is Molly. Before this turns into an argument, full of threats of violence. I would like to speak with you, Lee.”
Over his radio, Lee responded, “Go ahead Molly. As long as we are talking, chances are that most of you are not looking for me.”
Molly inquired, with her radio, “True. Now, along some more personal questions for another time. The important question I have is, why did you reincarnate the five of us?”
Lee casually answered, with his radio, “Well Molly, Yukio, whatever name you want to go by. I think four of the five of you got a really raw deal. Except for Claude. But, I found Claude, or should I say now, Kristina, was such a polite person, that I wanted to bring that person back to life. Manners do count.”
Kristina spoke up, on her radio, “Thank you.”
Lee said, into his radio, “Kristina, you are welcome. Anyway, take you, Molly. For an example. When you were, Yukio Washimine, your predecessor, Tsugio Bandou, made a critical error in contacting Hotel Moscow. That mistake being that one should never ally their self with a greater power, unless absolutely necessary.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And that is not counting the other mistakes you made, as Yukio, Molly. Like planning to head to Roanapur, as Yukio. But, there is no point in bringing that up. It is in the past for you. And it would gain me nothing by mentioning those mistakes.'
(_)
Outside, on the communications tower, Balalaika immediately realized where Lee knew that lesson from. Over her radio, she accused, “Lee, you have studied Machiavelli?”
Almost all the people present knew who Machiavelli was.
(_)
From the hallway that Rock and Revy were in, elsewhere in the building Lee was inside of, Rock commented, in a manner that summed up everyone feelings on the revelation, “Oh hell.”
Beside her, Revy commented, “This is not good. Even I know who that is.”
(_)
Back in the hallway Lee was in, Lee answered, into his radio, “Ah yes. Niccolo Machiavelli. I found his works, especially, The Prince, to be brilliant. And that he is a very misunderstood individual. With his teachings are far better than most people give him credit for.”
“To that end, I long since realized that Machiavelli invented modern genre savviness. And I have been applying his teachings since minute one of meeting you all. And those teachings, among others, have kept me alive, so far.”
“Also, Machiavelli is one of my two favorite renaissance men. My other favorite man of that time was, Leonardo da Vinci. Whom was almost just as genre savvy as Machiavelli.”
“I think you women would have admired those two men. One defined modern politics and diplomacy The other defined modern technology, and art. They were truly the forefathers of the modern age...”
Over his radio, Lee quietly added, “Which is being torn down...”
Lee then spoke a bit louder, as he continued, into his radio, “Those two men even knew each other. And one time they worked together to steal a river. Yes. An actually river. Though, they did not success, due to lack of technology of that time. That still take guts to attempt, no matter what time period one is talking about.”
“Besides... The reason I prefer to study Machiavelli, is because I find Nietzche is too butch, and Kafka is too dry.”
Balalaika stated, “You are clearly quoting someone. But, I cannot place the quote.”
Akira stated, with her radio, “Actually Lee is paraphrasing Fox Xanatos, from the early nineteen nineties cartoon, Gargoyles.”
Lee said, into his radio, “You are correct, Akira.”
Form her radio, Balalaika took offense at learning this, as she snapped, “You are quoting a cartoon, to me, Lee?”
Lee pointed out, in a jovial manner, “Hey. You are from an anime. So, don't be a hypocrite. Still. To clarify. Fox was making those comments, while reading a work by Jean-Paul Sartre. Though, the paraphrase still fits. And while Fox is from a cartoon, I am sure some of you have noticed that while I mentioned the Gargoyles series a few times, in my stories, I never messed with the people from that series, in my stories. And that was intentional on my part.”
“The people from the Gargoyles series operate on a whole different level than any of us. They are more dangerous, and more ruthless, than any of us. Except for maybe for Roberta, and Aeryn.”
Aeryn spoke up through the radio, “Thank you.”
Lee responded, into his radio, “You're welcome. Now, while you all are probably more violent that those of the Gargoyles series. At least what was shown on scene. Which, was quite a bit, considering it was a cartoon. You are not as creatively deceptive as they are.”
“And before you take this as an insult. You need to listen to me on this. Especially, you, Balalaika. I am only going to warn you once. You need to, in the near future, find the time to watch the Gargoyles series... Well, the first two seasons. No one counts the third season as canon. Not even the creator of that series.”
“But never, ever go to that reality. And should you do, do not cross the Xanatos clan, especially David and Fox Xanatos.”
“Considering, I was able to play all of you, like harps, with only my wits and a deck of cards, the Xanatos clan would annihilate you.”
“Balalaika, even with Hotel Moscow at your side, David and Fox Xanatos would wipe the floor with you in every category. From resources, to political influence, to manpower, to combat, to weaponry, to intelligence, to strategy, to cunning. They can bring more to the table, in every way, than you can.”
“The only people more dangerous than the Xanatos clan, are their in-laws. And that is up from debate. If you go against David and Fox Xanatos, they will outplay you so well, that you won't see your defeat coming, until it is too late.”
“There is a reason why the term, Xanatos Gambit, was named after David Xanatos. David is not a magnificent bastard. He is the magnificent bastard of the multiverse. And his wife, Fox, is just as good at this game as he is.”
“Hell. Let us take Fox Xanatos as an example. She is a brilliant intellectual. A natural leader. She is in great physical shape. She can kick some serious ass in hand to hand combat. She is also an expert in firearms. She has the personality of a predator. But, she also knows her manners. She can be very civil and diplomatic. And the only thing that separates most of you, from her, is that she is sane.”
“And I admire David for marrying her. She is a good catch. And they go well together. They even have a son. Also, respect David's marriage proposal to Fox in that it was elegant in its simplicity and straightforwardness. And it worked.”
“Though, an interesting note, she has a teal tattoo on the upper right side of her face... And her original name is Janine Renard. She actually legally changed her name to, Fox... Why did I not see it before?... Hehehehe...” Lee chuckling turning into full blown laughter, as he continue to hold the to button, for a few seconds, as he laughed.
Over the radio, Balalaika demanded, “What is so funny?”
Lee stopped laughing, as he answered, “Of course. I should have seen it before. Fox Xanatos is an inspiration for you, Balalaika, and likely the other original Lagoon women, as well. Though, the more crazier women in your group probably got some of their inspirations from Hyaena and Demona. Demona even had red hair. While, Fox had orange hair.”
(_)
Elsewhere in the building, Revy looked at her lover, with an unspoken question showing on her face.
Rock looked back over at Revy, as she answered, “Lee might be right.”
(_)
In another part of the same building, as Lee was in, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were standing together.
Akira commented, “The scary thing is that Lee is has a point.”
Natsuru said, “The scarier part is that I can see Lee's logic on this.”
Akira shrugged, while nodding her head. She replied, “I know.”
Ranma inquired, “Is that the series with the intelligent flying monsters, whom awoke from a thousand year sleep, to live in New York City?”
Akira answered, “Yes.”
Ranma commented, “Yep. I can see the parallels with the two series. In the badass ways.”
Natsuru said, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Akira agreed, “Yes. You are.”
(_)
From her outside perch, Balalaika stated, into her radio, “Interesting. I will keep what you said in mind, Lee. Still, you don't have a clue who and what you are dealing with.”
(_)
From his place in the hallway, Lee chuckled lighting into his radio, as he thought, 'I should not be surprised that Balalaika made the same mistake as Chang. Though, I set Chang straight. And I need to set Balalaika straight, right now. And if I get the reaction I am hoping for. By the end of this conversation, I will be throwing off her aim.'
As Lee calmed down, he responded, into the radio, in a humorous tone of voice, “That is where you are wrong. Balalaika, Let us take you for example. You are not using an office room building, as a bird blind, for cover, as a sniper, looking out a window.”
“Instead, right now, I am sure you are perched on the roof of a high towering building nearby. Or, a communications tower, probably mid way up, where the wind, which this dome has a little, but not a lot, will not make the tower sway too much, to throw your aim off. Though, wherever you are, you are in a sniper position.”
“This is an obvious, academic guess. Considering, you are trying to locate a single target over a large area. What is not so academic, is everything else I know about you.”
Over the radio, Balalaika baited, “Oh. I would like to hear this.”
Lee took the bait, as he smirked. He stated, with a bit of excitement in his tone of voice, “With pleasure. The Black Lagoon series did provide a thorough insight into the tactics of Hotel Moscow. Such as your organization preferring the high ground, along with using cars, and other ground based vehicles, as weapons platforms to attack from.”
“But, one thing stood out, above all others. That, wall of these events were well into the nineteen nineties, you of hotel Moscow preferred to use the military weapons and equipment that you were trained to use, a decade and a half earlier.”
“This is not surprising. Why fix it, if it is not broken? I can even admire that approach, in some ways. But, even though you used cellphones to conduct business, you used your encrypted military radios, like the ones we are using now, to talk with each other, for everything else.”
“That is intelligent on your part. And a wise decision. If you intend to go to my home reality. Do not use cellphones at all. They are all tapped, and can be used to record and trace you, even if they are turned off. I am not joking here. That is why I don't use one.”
“But, back to the subject at hand. This observation by you of Hotel Moscow, using older tactics and equipment, does show a weakness. Much like the major weakness which destroyed the Spartans. You refuse to update you tactics and equipment, with the times. Which means you will eventually lose to someone that can compensate for your tactics and equipment.”
“Such, as myself, in that I know enough about you, and the equipment you are likely using. Among another impressive skills, you, Balalaika, are an expert sniper. And my actions, in writing about you, only enhanced your skills, through the super-soldier serum I had given you. But, that only means that the limitations are now from your tactics and equipment.”
“Both of which I am very knowledgeable of.”
“To start with. Knowing you, you are likely using a SVD Dragunov sniper rifle, with a brown finished wooden stock and fore-end. The SVD Dragunov is likely equipped with a PSO-1 scope. And the pistol you likely have holstered, somewhere on your person, is your Stechkin APS. Or, automatic pistol, with selective fire. The Stechkin APS was introduced to the Soviet Union, for military use in nineteen fifty-one.”
“Also, given that I suspect you, and B, wearing fatigues, color coded for this operation, your pistol is located on a side holster, on the right side of your waist, given you are likely right eye dominate, with you using her right eye to aim your rifle. That said, you are likely an expert at using your pistol with both hands.”
“The ammo your Stechkin uses, and you have loaded with, is likely the nine by eighteen millimeter Parabellum. Given that type of ammo is only of the most widely available types of ammo, from the time and place or your reality.”
“The effective range of the pistol is fifty meters. But, the maximum range is two hundred meters.”
“It is a good pistol, which offers some good modification options. The pistol can be equipped with an extended stock, for steadier, more accurate firing. The pistol can use an extended barrel, for a suppressor. It can use an extended clip. And the automatic selector option, offers a close range, spray option. It is pretty much everything a person would one in a pistol. Except you cannot mount a scope on it.”
“And given you nature is not to be wasteful, you likely have your pistols set to single shot selection. Am I correct on all that.”
Over the radio, Balalaika flatly answered, “Yes.”
Lee stated, “I thought so. Now, the Dragunov was developed in nineteen sixty-three. The PSO-1 scope was developed in nineteen sixty-four. The Dragunov semi-automatic rifle, that uses a seven point sixty-two by fifty-four millimeter R cartridge. The rifle normally is equipped with a ten round magazine. So, you have at most, without reloading, eleven rounds in your weapon. One in the chamber, and ten in the magazine. And your skill with the Dragunov weapon is where you got your nickname, Balalaika, from. With, Balalaika, being slang for the Dragunov rifle.”
“By using a scope, the maximum range of the Dragunov is one thousand, three hundred meters. Though, the effective firing range is around eight hundred meters. Around nine hundred yards.”
“And with your skills, I am sure you could hit a silver dollar coin at nine hundred yards. Though, given the slightly lower atmosphere in this dome, than at sea level on Earth, I would guess the effective firing range is a little longer here.”
“So, let us say, you can hit me, without a problem, at an even thousand yards. Though, now that I think about it. Taking into account Mars' lower gravity, the effective firing range of your weapon of choice might be up to sixteen hundred yards. But, given you are a trained sniper, you would not take a risk like that. You would use the stats and figures that you can confirm. That being the formula for shooting your rifle on Earth, with Earth's gravity and atmosphere.”
“Also, given that you like to give yourself an edge in a fight. Wherever you are perched, it is within seven hundred yards of the building I am in. B is likely in a similar location, in the opposite place, in relation to your position, over this area, with her probably using a similar rifle, scope, and equipment.”
“Now, onto the PSO-1 scope.”
“I am sure you are using the PSO-1 scope, instead of the PSO-1M2, because you would want to have the infra-red detector that comes installed in the PSO-1 scope, which was not included in the PSO-1M2 scope.”
“When the PSO-1 scope was invented, in nineteen sixty-four, it was truly groundbreaking, in that its SVD type reticule made it easier for sniper to gauge wind resistance, and bullet drop compensation, to hit targets at a longer range, in more hostile environmental conditions. And even in the time I lived, in my reality, the PSO-1 is a useable scope rifle.”
“Though, one needs very good eyesight, and very steady hands, to get the most of it that scope and rifle. Which you and B having both in spades.
“And even if you are not using the Dragunov, you are still likely using the PSO-1 scope, because that is the scope you were trained with, to use. For a sniper, the rifle type is only secondary in equipment, to the scope that sniper uses.”
Lee smirk slightly widened, as he inquired into his radio, with eagerness evident in his tone of voice, “So, how did I do on my Holmes summation? I think I nailed.”
(_)
Outside, on her perch, midway up a communications tower, Balalaika looked down at her Dragunov sniper rifle, which had a brown finished wooden stock and fore-end. Along with the PSO-1 scope attached to the barrel of the weapon, between the fore-end and stock. She then glance further down, to her Stechkin APS pistol, selected to single fire, which was holstered, on a side holsters, on the right side of her waist.
At the moment, Balalaika was not so much angry, as she was upset that such a stranger could have gotten such an upper hand on her abilities, and equipment.
Though, Balalaika did start reciting a string of russian curses against Lee, as she thought, 'I was right. Lee is like Rock. Lee will use every tiny, little detail to his advantage. That is what makes him so dangerous, and unpredictable.'
'I am glad we are not planning on killing him. Torture him some. Yes. But, kill him. No. Because I hope we may someday make use of his abilities.'
'And I am starting to understand why the others had such a hard time figuring out that the writer was Lee. He literally pushes his own abilities to theirs limits.'
'That is how he fooled B and I on the passenger transport.'
'Also, he obviously trying to intentionally get me angry. Because, he knows that a pissed off sniper is a useless sniper. And his tactic almost worked.'
'When I get my hands on him, I am going to learn everything he knows about us, while showing him the true meaning of pain.'
(_)
In the small security room, in the building, which was main control center, of the factory complex, Dutch stood guard by the door to the hallway, with her shotgun slung on her right shoulder, and her pistol holstered.
Meanwhile, Benny sat in the chair, at the desk, in the room. Currently, Benny had his tool kit open, and he had the broken mouse taken apart, as she used her tool to slice the severed cord to where the wires were exposed. She was now, trying to bridge the wires back to the mouse, in the proper order, to get it working.
Both of them had been listening on their radios, at the discussion the rest of their group had been having with Lee.
Dutch turned to Benny, as she asked, “How is it coming on the computer mouse?”
Benny did not look up from her work, as she answered, “Slowly, but surely. Though, it is still going to be a while.”
Dutch said, in a reassuring tone of voice, “Do what you can. At least we got entertainment to listen to.”
Benny let out a laugh. She then commented, “I honestly don't believe I just heard all that. I know Lee knows stuff about us. But, what he stated is on a completely different level than what I expected Lee to know. It is like when Janet talks about her knowledge on currencies, and counterfeiting.”
Dutch stated, “Don't be surprised. His stories reflect the fact that he did some serious research on us. He didn't just watch our series and start writing. He did some work, beforehand. And one of the oldest tricks in the book is to know one's enemy. Especially, before entering the battlefield. Lee knew that if he was able to go on the run, he would eventually cross both Balalaika and B. And he wanted to be ready for them.”
Benny pointed out, “Still, Lee is intelligent enough not to say what he just said, while in the direct cross-hairs of either woman.”
Dutch agreed, “Very true.”
(_)
In the hallway Lee was standing in, he heard Balalaika state, in a very dangerous tone of voice. “Since you know so much about me, Lee. You know that beyond this factory complex is a completely barren field, several kilometers to the nearest highway.”
“It is a perfect place for B or I to take you out. That is, if you get that far into your escape from us. The ambient light given off from the starry sky, shine through the dome, along with the factory lights, provides us with plenty of light to allow us to see you with our enhanced sight. The darkness will not help you much. So, if you surrender now. I promise, I won't make you scream.”
Lee calmly said, “While I think you would keep your promise, Balalaika. I also know there are simple ways of avoiding sniper fire. Being shot out by a snipes is like being chased by a gator. A person doesn't run in a straight line. The person zigzags. With a car, I think I could probably get out of here alive, even with you and B shooting at me. Though, in doing so, I would probably damage the cars alignment and suspension system.”
Balalaika conceded, in a more calmer tone of voice, “That is correct. If the situation was different, I might have actually hired you as a freelance consultant on a few matters. You clearly use what you know to the maximum of effect. A trait that is rare, and that I admire.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Balalaika's tone of voice took a more dangerous undercurrent to it, as she continued, “But, that doesn't change the fact of what you did to us. I am sure you remember what I did to, Chin? That will be pleasant compared to what I going to do to you for trying to control us... Control me.”
Everyone then heard Lee start laughing more maniacally than ever, over the radio. As he forced himself to calm down, he stated, “Chin?... At the end of episode three?... Let me get this straight. Your idea of revenge for me is to beat me up, tie me to a chair, and blow me up? That is so cliche. That ghost story omake was right. You do lack imagination. BWAHAHAHA!”
(_)
In other part of the same building Lee was in, Rock and Revy heard all of this, though, through their radios.
As they listened to the situation unfolding, both women were shocked by the blunt forwardness that Lee was displaying towards one of the scariest women they knew of. Themselves, included.
Revy and Rock looked at each other in their faces.
Rock hesitantly said, “Now, Lee is berating, Balalaika.”
Revy flatly responded, with a bit of surprise in her tone of voice, “Lee's nuts.”
(_)
From her outside perch, Balalaika cursed in Russian, as she admitted to herself, in thought, 'Okay. Now, I am angry.”
Balalaika coldly said, “When I get my hands on you, I will...”
(_)
In a hallway he was standing in, Lee interrupted her, in an arrogant tone of voice, “What will happen is that you will turn me over to Roberta. Babe. That is what it is going to come down too. Let's be honest. You are all badasses. But, Roberta is the top alpha bitch in your pack. Hell, from what I know of her, she and her student are likely listening in on this little conversation of ours. But, Roberta and Fabiola are both too professional to reply, because they want to make damn sure I don't see the trap they have laid for me. Wherever they are?”
There was silence over the radio, for a few seconds.
Lee thought, 'I see no takers, on my bait for you to fill me in on where the maids are. But, I need to know where the maids are? Or, even if they are with this group, at the moment.' Lee used his radio to inquire, “By the way, are the maids even here?”
Over her radio, Akira answered, “They are on planet. But, as far was we know, not in this factory complex.”
Lee replied, “Thanks. Anyway, Boris, or B, sorry about changing you into a woman. You were one of the nicer, more honorable people in Black Lagoon. I just couldn't help myself.”
(_)
From her outside position, on the roof of a large building, B her hard rifle in her right hand, as she had her radio in her left hand. She used her radio to calmly say, in english, “At least I have a fun time. You gave me the greatest vacation imaginable. Including going to the original Woodstock. And then gave me the woman of my dreams. Who am I to complain? And, B, is fine.”
Lee complimented, “Good attitude.”
B then could not help herself, as she asked, “Thank you. But, why did you make a Balalaika a lesbian?”
(_)
Back in the hallway, Lee stood up from leaning his back on the wall. Lee let the radio off for a few seconds, as he chuckled a little, at B's question.
A few seconds later, as he calmed down, he used the radio, as he stated, “I know you are listening, Balalaika. But, your girlfriend did ask. And I already told Chang... Oh yea, if you guys don't know. Chang figured who I was on his own.”
Over the radio, B commented, “Chang informed Rock and Revy of that. And those two told the rest of us. Now please, get to the point.”
Lee said, into his radio, “Alright. Anyway, it is simple logic. Here we have Balalaika, living with a group of badass men. From you, B, as a guy, on down the ranks, Hotel Moscow's men were physically fit, and handsome. And all of you were completely devote to Balalaika. Yet, her attitude clearly showed that she was not getting laid.”
Several of the other women were laughing, over the radio. While Balalaika, and B, remained silent.
As the women calmed down, B stated, over her radio, “That does answer some questions. Like why she took up that hobby of editing porn. I mean, she likes going up my ass more than Revy does with Rock.”
Lee inwardly winced, as he thought, 'I did not need to know that. Though, it would also mean that the reason Balalaika was bored out of her skull editing porn was that she was tired of watching recordings of other people doing what she wanted to do. And I would bet money they had access to those instant man packets. So, B was not talking about use of dildos. At least not plastic ones.'
Meanwhile, B's comment caused everyone to laugh some, over the radio.
Then suddenly, over the radio, Balalaika warned, in a cold tone of voice, “We will not be discussing my personal tastes on an open channel.”
This caused everyone to laugh even harder.
A few seconds later, as Lee heard the laughter on the radio die down, Lee thought, 'I better change the subject, before Balalaika start to concern shooting her own friends.'
Lee said, into the radio, “By the way, Akira and Natsuru, I hope you like your new video collection.”
Over the radio, Natsuru replied, “We plan on watching it right after we catch you. If you surrender, we promise to let you live long enough to see it all.”
Lee admitted, into his radio, “Tempting. But, I will have to pass. Breathing is more important to me. Though, given my knowledge of you all, my chances of escape are quite high.”
Dutch stated, into her radio, “Perhaps. But, we will have justice for what you did to us?”
Lee laughed into the radio for several seconds. As he calmed down, he then stated, “Oh Dutchy-babe, at least be honest. This has nothing to do with justice, and has all to do about revenge.”
Dutch replied, into her radio, “You don't believe in justice? Do you?”
Lee stated, “Nope. And if you capture me, there will be no trials. No juries. Just me being tortured. You might parade me around Lagoon Island a few times for your friends, but at the end of the day, you are going to torture me until you get tired, and then, if I am lucky, you will kill me in a slow, painful, horrible way.”
Over her radio, Dutch commented, “I am surprised you have such a low opinion of us.”
Lee replied, into his radio, “It is not that. It is just I realize what you are all capable of. Though, I think you, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, and Violin, are the nicest of your group.”
Dutch said, with her radio, “Thank you.”
Over his radio, Lee responded, “You're welcome.”
Rock inquired, into her radio, “Lee, why don't you believe in justice?”
Lee laughed again into the radio. A few seconds later, as he calmed down, Lee stated, over the radio, “You... You of all people in this group after me, have the audacity to ask me that? Though Rock, I will admit that I am envious of your reality. At least Roanapur has some measure of justice. Or, had.”
Rock questioned, with her radio, “What do you mean? Because, I didn't see any type of justice while I was there.”
Over his radio, Lee answered, “Justice existed there. It was just not the type of justice you were taught as a child. Take Balalaika here. And Chang. At their height, during their mafia days in Roanapur. They were the two most powerful people in control of the city. Still, they had, and still have a measure of loyalty to their subordinates. With their subordinates returning their loyalty. To that end, they also have measure of integrity and personal honor.”
“Like the mafias of previous generations, they understood subtlety and discretion. A trait lacking in much of my reality, in the time I left. Balalaika, am I correct in assuming that most of those whom suffered, or died by your organization's hands. Or, those that Chang's group handled. Were dealt with because they either crossed you, or could not behave, within reason, in Roanapur?”
Balalaika calmly said, into her radio, “That is correct.”
Lee responded, “Thank you, Balalaika. Honestly, you all have some redeeming qualities that I can respect. If I wanted to be a fan of a series, where the characters that won were complete elitist, hypocritical, scumbags, that make Chaka look like a saint, I would watch Game of Thrones. And I hate that series because that series reminds me of my own reality. A world where justice does not exist. Where only cruelty and evil thrive.”
Revy stated, into her radio, “Lee, that maybe the case. But, you still think you understand us. Well, you don't.”
Lee casually said, into his radio. “Oh, Revy. Sweet, sweet Revy. You, my dear, were the easiest one to figure out. Savvy.”
“In your series you acted like a pissed off teenager due to the shit that happened to you when you were younger.”
“Centuries ago, a writer known as Samuel Johnson said it best. He who makes a beast of himself, gets rid of the pain of being a man.”
“This quote applies to women, as well. Such as you, Revy. I have known women in my personal life, before I heard of any of you, let alone met you, that took this creed to heart. So, as you can see. I do understand you, Revy. Though, I did do my best to try to help you.”
“And while others would disagree, you do have a lot of positive traits that work for you. As a foundation, that allowed me to help you. You are honest, and straightforward. You are probably the most honest woman I know of, in existence. Though, you are mildly belligerent to everyone. You are loyal to your friends. You are fun at parties, as long as you don't get too drunk, and don't have your weapons. You are very realistic with your wants, goals, and needs. And you know your limitations.”
“You are as intelligent as Rock. You are just not as knowledgeable, and emotionally grounded, as Rock.”
“You know you are sexy. And while you show it, you don't unnecessarily flaunt it. You don't tease others by using your beauty, unless you have to. That makes you more well mannered than most women I have personally known in my home reality.”
“And when it comes to manners, you only lack them, because no one taught you them. Though, I am sure Rock has done much to help you in that department.”
“With those positive traits as a foundation, I helped you cement your friendship with Shenhua and Sawyer. For them to become good friends with you. Friends that you could relate too. Then, I made you leader of the Hell Sabers to teach you responsibility, and leadership skills. I had you deal with what happened to you as a teenager, from a third person point of view, and this helped you move on from had happened to you. I arranged for you have a stable relationship, and love life. A good home. To become wealthy. And for you to have children whom you care about, and whom care about you.”
“I did what I could for you, Revy. But, I guess it wasn't enough. Because you continue to be an ungrateful bitch that is still after my hide!”
Over the radio, Revy responded, with venom lacing her voiced, “I never asked for any of it.”
With his radio, Lee countered, “Nor, did you ask for the shit that happened to you when you were younger.”
(_)
In the security room, both Dutch and Benny were listening to their radios.
Benny was sitting in the chair, in front of the desk, as she continued to work on repairing the computer mouse.
Dutch stood beside Benny, as she asked, “Is Lee actually trying is rev Revy up?
Benny continued with her work, as she casually answered, “It appears so. Either Lee is completely insane, and he has a death wish. Or, he is a better planner, and manipulator, than we thought. After listening to him insult Balalaika, I am leaning towards the death wish angle, myself.”
Dutch admitted, “I don't know. Some of what Lee said about Balalaika makes sense. I can see how she could have been a lesbian all this time. And I am not talking about the prissy type of lesbian. I am talking about the hardass, butch version of lesbianism.”
Benny commented, “Hmm. Possible. I wonder what her and B's nights in bed are like?”
Dutch cautioned, “I don't plan to ask questions that can be a threat to my mental health, and physical wellbeing.”
Benny said, “Good point. Also, Lee has a point about this being all about revenge.”
Dutch admitted, “True.”
Benny commented, “And Lee is right. You are one of the nicest people in this group.”
Dutch replied, “Thank you.”
Benny replied, “You're welcome.”
Dutch inquired, “So, how long on the mouse?”
Benny answered, “It still is going to take a while.”
Just then, over their radios, they heard Aeryn flatly stated, “So, you are a psychopath, Lee”
Lee admitted, over the radio, “Actually, I am a borderline sociopath. A psychopath is a person born without a conscience. He, or she, was not born with the sense of knowing what is right and wrong. Due to this, many psychopaths are narcissists, with a talent for charming people. An example of a psychopath would be Chaka. A selfish person, whom only was interested in himself, with no loyalty to anyone else, while making people suffer for his amusement.”
“On the other hand, a sociopath is a person born with a sense of right and wrong. It is just as they grow up, the abuse they suffer deadens their ability to empathize with others. And the reason I know I am borderline sociopath is that I lack had the ability to empathize with people's positive emotions. That ability was stripped from me. I cannot really feel happiness, nor love. But, I can still feel pain, anger, sadness. And I can empathize with people when they feel those negative emotions.
“In my opinion, none of you are psychopaths. Though, a few of you are sociopaths. It is academic to guess whom I am referring too. And while sociopaths are salvageable. Psychopaths are not. Because, psychopaths have no moral compass to work with. Still, many humans don't know the difference. So Aeryn, it is not surprising an alien, such as yourself, would not know the difference.”
Benny looked over at Dutch.
Dutch noted Benny looking at her. She conceded, “Guy's got a point.”
Benny shrugged. She then turned back to her work, of repairing the computer mouse, at the desk.
Aeryn replied, over her radio, “I must admit, that is an interesting observation.”
Lee stated, over the radio, “The whole point to being a writer it is understand the emotional nature of people, and situations.”
Violin inquired, over the radio, “So, that is why you became a writer?”
Lee admitted, over the radio, “Of course. With no friends, I had to figure out a way to understand how people, and things, ticked. To learn the mechanics of cause and effect in given situations. And I have learned so much from becoming a writer. And I feel privileged to apply the knowledge in dealing with your group.”
On the radio, Akira inquired, “Lee, who do you most identify with in fiction?”
On the radio Lee answered, “Good question, Akira. You could say I am a, Literary Walter White?”
Benny turned to Dutch, and she saw Dutch shrug her shoulders, in not knowing who that was.
On the radio, Akira asked, “Who is that?”
Over the radio, Lee stated, “I guess that series was too new for ya'll. The series is titled, Breaking Bad. And that is exactly what happens. And girl, what a delicious decent into villainy that series was. With Walter's Heisenberg being to my Lee. His chemistry skills to my genre savvy skills. Though, unlike him, I am intelligent enough to know the dangers of using a large machine gun, and I have a proper respect for cover.”
On the radio, Akira said, “I will be sure to check out that series.”
Lee said, with his radio, “You will probably enjoy the series. But, it is not a happy series. Nor does it have happy ending. Like most things in life.”
Akira replied, over the radio, “I will keep in that in mind.”
Then, Revy used her radio, to insultingly state, in a cold tone of voice, “What you are, Lee, is a motherfucker.”
Over their radios, they heard Lee respond, in a casual manner, “Actually, I have never fucked a mother before, Revy. But, if you want to lose your weapons, and spread your legs, I'm game.”
Dutch stated, “Whether is Lee is intentionally baiting Revy and Balalaika, or not, after a comment like that, there is no question that boy is crazy.”
Benny said, “No arguments there.”
Over the radio, Revy yelled, “You bastard!”
On the radio, Lee corrected, “To be honest, my parents were married before I was born. So, I am not a bastard. I am many things. But, bastard isn't one of them.”
(_)
In the building southwest of the building Dutch and Benny were in. Inside the hallway, where Lee stood, Lee thought, 'I know I am dancing on their berserk buttons to get them so angry, they will make mistake. But still, I must be insane in the first place for doing this.'
(_)
In another hallway of the same building Lee was inside of, Rock could literally see Revy start to foam at her mouth in rage.
Rock pulled Revy's radio from Revy's hands, as she sternly ordered, “Revy, you have to calm down. Lee is trying to manipulate you. He wants to get you to get angry as a way to help him escape.”
Revy looked at Rock, though, she quiet for a few moments. Rock then noticed Revy was starting to calm down.
As Revy reigned in her angry, rage disappeared from her face, as she gave an expression of disbelief. Revy said, “Geez, Rock. Lee is like Hannibal Lecter without the cannibalism.”
Rock handed Revy back her radio. Revy took the radio.
Rock responded, “Exactly. And we have to remember that he is clearly not the same man we met before the time loop. The years he spent in Plata Podrido, in that time loop, changed him from a nice guy to a manipulative bastard who will do anything to survive. We are not fighting a novice. You have to look at this as if we are fighting a professional. But, from the way his acts, I can tell that he has a weakness.”
Revy asked, “Which is?”
Rock smirked, “His pride.”
Revy lips curled into a wicked grin, as she giggled.
Rock stated through her radio, “Lee, give up now, and we might be lenient. This is your first personal experience with multiverse travel. On the other hand, we have being doing this for a long time.”
(_)
Inside the hallway, Lee was located in, Lee smirked, as he responded, in an arrogant tone of voice, into his radio, “Well, Rocky-babe. In truth this isn't my first time-warp twist with the multiverse. As you all know, I am a pre-cog. Partly experiencing alternate realities is just part of the package. And, when I start sensing the future and I can change the future. But that is not all. I figured out how to mentally time travel months into my own past, where I changed the future, creating an alternate reality of my very own reality in the multiverse. Though, mentally traveling back in time hurts like hell, because doing so damages my soul. With a level and type of pain that I cannot put into words. Which is saying something, giving my writing talents. And that is why I don't do it. But, I still know how to.”
“I have even on occasion had my soul travel to alternate Earths, where I possessed the bodies of my alternate reality selves. Each time, I usually spent from a few minutes, to hours, to even a day in one of those realities, before I safely returned to my own body, in my home reality. Yes Rock. Just like you with the omakes. And just like you, I suspect not all of the versions of my selves I possessed were male.”
“So, as you can see. I have dealt with multiversal issues long before I ever wrote the stories that involved any of you. That is one of the reasons I wrote my stories about you. Because I wanted to push the envelope of the genre, using my own life experiences as inspiration. I guess I pushed it too far. Though, doing so was still fun.”
Lee then stopped talking for a few seconds. No one replied, and silence reign.
Lee thought, 'I bet everyone else that heard this was shocked by these revelations. I am just a person with many secrets. Now, to tell them what I really think is going on, and what my role in this little play really is.'
Lee chuckled into his radio, as he continued, in a wild tone of voice, “I see no takers. Not that it matter. You all clearly haven't figured it out by now. I am the villain of this madman's ballad. It is Joker versus the Badasses Of the Multiverse. And I am in the role Mr. J, himself.”
(_)
In another part of the building Lee was inside of. In the hallway that Rock and Revy were in, Rock thought, with worry, 'Oh no. He is imitating the Joker of all people. This is bad.'
With her radio, Rock stated, “To everyone, if Lee gets caught in an industrial accident, you are to go after him. We will not allow him to become a psychotic supervillain on our watch.”
(_)
In the hallway Lee was in, over the radio, Lee let out a laugh and he stated, “I appreciate the concern, Rock. Thank you. Still, I am dying of cancer. And I have you lot breathing down my neck. I got nothing to lose. I am the most dangerous person on this planet. And my options for winning are simple. I escape, I win. I die, I win. The only way you win is to catch me alive. Last dance, girls. See you on the dance floor...”
(_)
In the hallway with Rock and Revy, Rock thought, 'He is not leaving this conversation, that easily. Now, to hit his pride.'
Rock smirked, as she stated, into her radio, “You think are so better than the rest us. But, River told us some things about you.”
(_)
In the hallway, were Lee stood, with his radio, Lee inquired, “Such as?” He mentally added, 'Damn. And that last dance comment would be such a cool way to end this conversation. Though, I wonder what Rock is getting at?'
Rock said, into her radio, “That as a sadomasochistic sociopath. In truth, you are no better than the rest of us.”
Over his radio, Lee laughed. As he calmed down, he stated, “That is all she told you about me? That woman is so considerate about the privacy of others. There such worse things about my psyche that she could have mentioned, but clearly she didn't, if that is all you have on me.”
“Though, truth be told, in most ways, I never considered myself better than any of you. But, now that I think about it. Perhaps I should. And River is right. That sadly is my nature. But, the most important part that separates you from me, is one very important choice.”
“For a number of times, life has tried to push me into going on violent rampages. I had the means, motive, and opportunity, but I refused every time. I realized that those that harmed me would eventually screw up their own lives. And in the fullness of time, I have been proven right.”
“Unfortunately, that did not mean that I did not have the same desires of others, such as some of you. Yet, unlike others in my position. Like most of you. I never started down the path to being a full blown sadist. Though, I sometimes felt the desire to start down that path. Such as the temptations to tortured kittens, and puppies. I willfully refused to do so. Because, I knew where that would lead.”
“And here is the kicker. I worked through this all by myself. I never had any friends. And as I worked through such hells, I suffered even more abuses. Yet, in the end, I decided to refuse to play their game. As a far as I am concerned, the world can burn to ashes. And while I am more than happy to watch, I just won't one be of the ones lights the matches. I will continue refuse to become the monster that the world... Nay, God... Wants me to be.”
“I refuse to give in to God efforts of making me a monster. By God having everything and everyone treat me like a monster. And by doing so, I am stronger in willpower than any of you. You all accepted the darkness thrust in all of us, while I refused.”
“I move. I bend. I twist. I walk around. But, I never give up. I will never break in giving into my bloodlust. If I have no more moves in this life, I will move onto death. For me, death is but an opportunity for a better future. Even if I am bound for Hell. For me, death is not an ending to be feared.”
“To quote a great actor. If I am going to be damned. I am going to be damned for who I am.”
Over his radio, Lee continued, in a more sober tone of voice, “But, I still have that taste for blood and violence. That need to see the agony and death of others. For me, it is like being an alcoholic, while never having taken a single drink.”
“Some of you know what I am talking about. Your throat is dry, and you have this need for causing suffering of others. When it gets really bad, the rage for this thirst turns so cold, and so intense, that the cold literally burns one's soul, from the inside, out. At that point, the screams of pain from others are like children's lullabies to one's ears. With the rage becoming like riding a raging bull, with you knowing that if you let go, you lose control, that people will likely suffer and die.”
(_)
Elsewhere, in the building, Rock looked towards Revy's face.
Revy looked at Rock's face, as she just nodded in confirmation that what Lee was saying was true.
(_)
Back in the hallway Lee was in, Lee went onto say, into his radio, “I hate feeling that way. Such rage eats away on one's sanity, and soul. Though, that rage had already hollowed out my humanity, and my ability to feel love. And I do wish to keep what I have left. Which was why I sought to find some outlets for my desires. I figured writing was a harmless hobby, where I could work out my demons. But, after all this, I freely admit I was wrong.”
“Though, even with my noble actions, given what I was made into, I am still going to Hell. Though, not by my choices. But, by the choices of others. Yet, I no longer fear Hell. Why should I fear some place, that in many ways, I have already been too. Still, it does prove that free will in getting into Heaven is a load of bullshit.”
“If God says you are good, and you will go to heaven. Then, you are good, and get to go to heaven. If God says you are evil, and you are going to hell. Then, you are going to be evil, and you will be sent to hell.”
“This free will crap is just God's way to lie to the people. It is God's way of blaming God's victims. And perpetrators blaming their victims is one of the oldest tricks in the book.”
“It even states as such in the Bible. For in the Bible, free will, is a test designed so a person can choose either eternal enslavement to God, in Heaven, or suffer forever in Hell.”
“That is no choice. That is a lie.”
“The God of this reality, whatever it is, just screws, abuses, and messes people up.”
“This all being said. I am not sure when I escape you, what my new outlet will be for my tendencies. But, I do know it will likely lead me to madness and blood. That is what my precognition is telling me.”
“Though, I do not follow Judeo-Christian, nor Hindu-Buddhist, beliefs that everyone is born inherently evil, and guilty of something, even before their birth. I follow Plato's belief that that everyone is born inherently good, and life.”
“I believe that, death due us part, should apply to one's sins, and problems as well. That people do not have a karmic weight from actions done in their previous lives. That is why I brought the vampire twins, and the others back at your children. I think everyone agrees that they, of all people deserved a second chance at life.”
“That was why I was so kind concerning the issues within my stories. Such as death, and reincarnation. I came to view that if I was going to play God. I would be a nice God. Instead, of the sadistic bastard my reality is saddled with.”
“Now, at a personal level, my sanity is really the only thing I have left that I value. And when I wrote, I did so to work through my demons with my writings, to maintain my sanity. Yet, I showed restraint in how I treated the characters I worked on. Such as you all. I always tried to strike a balance. Where the reward would outweigh the pain. Something most of you have yet to grasp. Which honestly...”
Lee then yelled into his radio, with rage in his tone of voice, “Pisses me off!”
(_)
In the security room, Benny continued working on repairing the computer mouse, at the desk she was sitting at, as she and Dutch listened to the conversation of the radio.
Benny did not looked up, as she commented, “Playing God, to be a nice God, when your own God is a sadist. That is messed up.”
Dutch agreed, “That guy's got issues at every level.”
Benny said, “It make you wonder how bad it could have been if Lee was not been trying to be good, when he wrote his stories.”
Dutch replied, “Benny, you are preaching to the choir.”
(_)
In the hallway Lee was standing in, Lee forced himself to calm down, as he thought, 'Being angry is that last thing I can afford to do right now. I need to calm down.'
Lee then heard on the radio, Rock question, in a calm tone of voice “So, you think God is evil?”
Lee answered, into his radio, “Just the God of my reality. I don't know about the rest. Still, where to start? Where to start?!”
“For the God of my reality, prayers are just spam mail. Something to be ignored. All you need to do is just take a look at what is happened to my world to see that I am right.”
“Given the state of affairs in my world. What is happening? Who is in charge? Who is rewarded, and given power? Who is harmed, and punished? It is kind of obvious that in my reality, God is evil. I am just surprised more people don't realize this.”
“But, it is not just the big things. It is the small things. Such as the culture of personal relationships that God has wrecked. Along, with other things. And on this issue, I speak from personal experience.”
“It is one thing to lose someone you care for to the violence of mortals. At least, in theory, you have an opportunity for revenge with a gun, against those that wronged you.”
“Yet, bullets cannot reach God. And when God takes someone from you, in a very horrible manner, if you tried to get revenge against God, you are executed and since to Hell for daring to question God. Such, is the nature of God's tyrannical hypocrisy.”
“Concerning myself. God has made it one of his goals to give me a real shitty life, using those around me, to hurt me in subtle ways. Think of it as a death by a thousand paper-cuts.”
(_)
Inside of hallway, elsewhere in the building, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira all winced, as Lee used the term, death by a thousand paper-cuts.
(_)
From the hallway Lee was inside of, Lee calmly continued, into his radio, “By itself, becoming a writer has allowed me to gain a level genre savvy. You learn how plots, character development, and other story structures work. And once I gained that level of genre savviness, it was so easy to see how the reality I live in is a work of fiction. I could see how the pieces fit, just by looking at all of these things I see and hear, and applying my savviness to the world I lived in. Personally, I think my world is a dark, sadistic comedy.”
“And I was put through hell. Nothing I gain was ever easy. It was bone crushingly hard to begin with. For example, my writing skills, which I learned not due to God's grace, but in spite of God.”
“And even before I became a writer, I realized, where I fit in the grand scheme God's plan. I realized that God wrote a story where I am the monster that goes on a rampage. And I refused to play my role. The role of the insane, rampaging monster, of who the heroes kills. And whose name is cursed. And who suffered in Hell for all eternity, for his rampage.”
“Yet. Since I refused to my demanded role, I will still go to hell for not following God's so called, will. And even if I do go on a rampage, I go to hell for the so-called sins of harming people. Catch twenty-two. That is where free will is bullshit.”
“But, that is not all. God went out of his way to prevent me from having a job, nor friends. Every attempt I had at finding a job failed in the most impossible ways there are. When I toyed with the idea of getting a job at a company, even large, national retails chain stores, before I had the chance, those stores would declare bankruptcy and close up.”
“And the closed up in the order I had occasionally planned to look for a job, at each specific store.”
“After the dozenth, or so times this happened, I got the message.”
“I realized that I was the partly at fault for hundred of thousands of people being without a job, for myself daring to want to improve myself, by getting a job at the companies they worked for. And these were clerks style jobs, to sale merchandise on the floors, that I wanted to get. I was not even seeking high paying jobs.”
“God would rather harm hundreds of thousands of people, than allow me to improve my personal life one bit. I would find that flattering, if it wasn't so damned depressing.”
“After I realized this, I stopped looking for a job. To avoid others from getting other people caught in God's personal torment of me. Though, it did not mean that people were not mean to me for not having a job. And this did not mean there were people still not caught up in my personal hell that God created for me.”
“God's actions towards me in the friendship department was even worse. Those people that showed even the least bit of interest of friendship towards me, had circumstances conspire to prevent them from becoming my friends.”
“Sometimes they had to move away within days to months of meeting me. Depending on how slow our friendships progressed. Their ex-girlfriends, or even ex-spouses show up out of the blue, to draw their interest. They suddenly have personal hardships that grinded their own personal lives into the mud. Or, God just inflicted on them an illness that murdered them in a slow, horrible, and painful manner.”
“On true story I have on the matter. You Lagoon women might find this interesting. One of my cousins from out of town, a good man, came to visit my family, and I, years ago. He showed interest in my anime collection, and together we watched the first two episodes of Black Lagoon, in the english american dub. He enjoyed the series. And he was the only person I knew, that showed interest in my hobbies, for the last several years.”
“He soon left. The next time I heard about him was a few months later, from his mother. It seems that because of kindness and friendship he showed me, God gave him a brain tumor. He suffered a slow, horrible, painful death that lasted for over a year. With surgery, and other treatments, only prolonging his agonizingly slow death.”
“Thinking about it emotionally hurts me to this day.”
“And what happened to my cousin was just the tip of the iceberg. I have seen God reward those whom had harmed me throughout their life. While God also grievously harmed, and murdered, those whom cared for me, and helped me, and the people around those whom aided me.”
“It is a hard thing to live with. To know that those sadists whom harmed me, will go heaven, and know only pleasure and comfort, as a reward for bringing me suffering throughout my life. While no matter what I do, I will still be go to Hell, and I will know only pain and suffering.”
“It hurts to live with that truth.”
“Lesser individuals have broken over such realizations.”
“But, these are not the worst experiences in my personal life. Not even close. The worst has to be myself, watching helplessly, as God played with the events from the background to corrupt my own family members, teachers, and people around me, to become my abusers as a child, and into my adulthood.”
“That these people no longer cared, nor loved me. And instead God manipulated them into treating me with distrust, disrespect, hate, and cruelty, as an outlet for their own rage and bitterness, in their personal lives. And none of them realized that it God pulling their strings, like the skilled puppet master it is.”
“This angers me greatly, for a number of reasons.”
“And while it is hard for me to realize that I am partly responsible for the suffering of countless strangers, it was even worse for myself when I realized I was causing suffering and death of those I cared for, by the simple virtue of existing, with these people meeting me, because I refuse to be God's monster.”
“As with being denied a job, when it came to friendships, I eventually realized what was going on. It is hard to live alone in a crowd. Even more so, when I realized that someone, beyond my reach, was willfully causing me, others I meet, to suffer in so many ways, over the course of decades.”
Lee continued into his radio, with rage and bitterness evident in his tone of voice, “God had constantly been putting me through hell in my life. To this very day. Where I am forced into one no-win situation situation, after another.”
“I have never had any good choices in life. Only progressively painful selections.”
“My choices are a painfully bad option, or a horribly painful worse option. Over and over again. Thousands and thousands of times.”
“And while I try my best to not have hatred for the puppets, for they are puppets. My lack of anger, towards the puppets does not extend to the puppet-master, God.”
“My disgust... My loathing... My cold hatred for God is beyond reproach.”
Lee went onto say, into his radio, with a voice full of rage that had turned to be as cold and hard as winter, “I honestly think that a bullet it too quick a death for God. I would torture that bastard to death, in such a slow and through way that even Sawyer, the Cleaner would envy, and take notes from my actions, on the matter.”
“And when I was finished, I would nuke heaven, on my way out.”
(_)
In another part of the same building Lee was in, Sawyer was with Shenhua, as they both listened on one of their radios.
Sawyer thought, with concern, and pity for Lee, 'Given Lee's imagination, intelligence, and skills, I think he could accomplish his claim.'
(_)
Elsewhere in the building, Revy took the radio from Rock, as she asked, “If that is the case, Lee. Why don't you do the world a favor, and kill yourself?”
(_)
In the hallway, Lee was in, Lee forced himself to calm down. With his radio, Lee answered, in a calmer tone of voice, than before, “Honor, personal integrity, and rage, has kept me going for a while. Along with the curiosity, to see if the world would destroy itself, before God wore down my resolve to the point I decided it was finally time to eat a bullet.”
“And well before you showed up, I learned that I had cancer. And so, I had to deal with the cancer I had. At that point, I figured that since I was already on my way out. There was no reason to kill myself, since I was going to die anyway. I guess God grew impatient of my refusal of being a monster. So, it just inflicted cancer on me, to get me out of the way, by killing me in a horrible death, and then it would send my soul to hell.”
“During that time, my plans were simple. I would enjoy the time I had left. While doing so, I was also planning to figure out what I could offer the Devil, as a way to mitigate my damnation and suffering in the Devil's domain, after I died, and I was sent to Hell.”
Lee thought, 'And given my meeting with the manager of the Devil's Hotel, if the worst had happened, I think might have ended up in a good position in Hell.'
Lee calmly continued, into his radio, “And after dealing with you all. I think I would have turned out alright in Hell.”
“Still then, you women showed up. And I immediately realized what your presence could offer me. But, it was a gamble. Though, I had nothing to lose. So, I decided to roll the dice. And I won big.”
“Now, I have the means of reaching the God that put me, and those I care for, through hell. At the moment, I am only lacking the means to fight him and his forces. I am sure I can achieve such resources, if I wanted to. But right now, besides escaping all of you, and curing my cancer, I just want to have fun, and make up for lost time. I realize my homeworld is its the way out. God is destroying his playground. And it is too foolish to realized how bored it is about to become after it wrecks its own playground.”
“For myself, the better revenge, in such a situation, is to live well, and live happily. With every day of enjoyment being in spite of God's actions towards me. And in doing so, I will be a better person, than God, itself.”
(_)
In the security room, while still working on the computer mouse, Benny and Dutch heard what Lee said over their radios.
From the sitting in the chair, at the desk, Benny looked up at Dutch, as she asked, “Now, I am confused. How does Lee think of himself? Good? Bad? What?”
Dutch was still standing, as she looked over at Benny, as she stated, “I think he looks of good and bad in a different way than we do. At best, he views himself as a good person, in a bad role. Also, in spite of what he did to us, in his personal life, he may embody the concept of being good sucks. But, whether Lee does good for the sake of being good, or he does good just to spite God... Or both... I do not know. And from the sound of it, I do not think Lee does, either.”
Benny said, “That figures.”
Dutch asked, “So, how long on the computer mouse?”
Benny looked back at the computer mouse she had taken apart and she was repairing with her tools, which were in her hands. She stated, “If I can get these spliced wires to bond properly, in the correct order, I can get the mouse working. I would say, at this rate, I have another hour of work to do.”
“The only good news is that, given the time we have been in this room, from looking at the computer screen here, the screen does not appear to have a screen saver program turned on. Meaning the account for this computer will not go to a password protected setting from not being used.”
Dutch commented, in a comforting tone of voice, “Good. And do not worry, Benny. You will get it. And then, we will have our revenge on that bastard.”
(_)
In the hallway Lee was inside of, Lee heard someone coming closer to him, from a nearby hallway.
Lee turned his head in the direct of the sound, which was down the hallway, he was planning on head for. But, he did not see anyone.
Lee thought, 'Looks like one of them found me. And they had yet to turn the corner. Or, they are heading in one of the rooms to the sides of the hallways. Given the doors swing inwardly. And from the lighting, I see the hallway turn in the distance. It likelihood is a possibility.'
'So, I don't see them. Also, I don't have time to hide. I need to get moving. I need to cut this conversation short I will have to use a more directly approach. Though, I do now have my second wind. And I do feel better. So, I have gotten what I wanted from this conversation.'
Lee said, into his radio, “Well, one of you is coming. So, I will talk to you all, later.”
Lee then turned off the radio, and clipped the radio to the left side of his belt.
Lee then started walking through through the hallway, towards the sounds, as as he held Vera pointing straight forward, with both hands, and the butt of the weapon pressed against the front of his right shoulder.
As Lee slowly walked forward, further into the hallway, Lee thought, 'Best I keep the radio off. They might use is now to flush me out. Still, this person is in the direction that I am heading. So, I might as well confront this person, before she, or he, can call for in her, or his, position, and bring in everyone else to the area...'
'And to be honest, after our conversation, I would prefer to keep my distance from both Revy, and Balalaika, after I just intentionally pissed them off.'
Lee slowly made his way through the hallway, he thought, 'I could be ambushed in a number of ways in this hallway. I will just take this slowly.'
Lee then continued walking deeper into the hallway, towards the sounds he heard.
(_)
Elsewhere, on the roof of a building, in factory complex, far away from Rock and Revy's group, and Lee, a group of eight women had cracked the encryption to the radios Revy and Rock's group were using. And they were monitoring their broadcasts, while they hid from Balalaika and B's sights.
One of the women asked, “So, when do we make our move?”
Another women answered, “When they have him.”
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 06: “The Tower: Part Two: The Descent.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Babylon Five Reality. Date, January Twenty-Eighth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Location, planet Mars. City, Mars Dome One, capital of Mars. A factory complex on the north part of the interior city of dome that surrounds Mars Dome One from the outside atmosphere of Mars. Inside a building, on twenty-second floor, in a hallway. Time, night time, around a couple of hours before midnight.
Lee still had on his black suit, red tie, black dress shoes, and sunglasses. Including his equipment, and weapons. Though, Lee lost his black fedora hat, when Shenhua destroyed Lee's hat, with a swipe from one of her long knives, during their confrontation, earlier that evening.
Lee has just finished his radio conversation with those hunting him. Which him abruptly cutting off the conversation, and turning off the radio, when he someone down the hallway from him. In the direction he needed to go, if he wanted to continued with his plans. But, he could not see anyone down the hallway.
Given time was starting to become a factor for Lee, he felt that a direct confrontation was the best approach to the situation.
As Lee slowly walked down the hallway, he held Vera, Jayne's sci-fi large bore rifle, in both hands, with the butt of the rifle pressed against the front of his right shoulder. His right hand was on the grip and his left hand was on the fore-end.
After over half a minute of slowly walking, when Lee slowly passed by a door to his left, and the wall to his right, said door was swiftly pulled open, and away from him, in a clockwise arc into the room.
As Lee turned, and saw this, he thought, 'Shit! My precognition did not warn me. I missed see the door being slightly open, due to the door hinges facing me, with the cracked door being hidden by the door frame on my side. With the lot on the door staying green, even if opened.”
Before Lee could reaction, he saw come out of the room, right in front of him, a large, one sided, battleaxe swing, and cut Vera cleanly in two, at the end of the barrel, before the blade of the axe embedded itself into the wall to Lee's right, a split second later.
Fortunately, Lee still had his hand son his weapon. Though, it was damaged, and as such, he was not about to use it, until checking it. Still, Lee considered the most important priority being to find out who attacked him with a battleaxe.
Lee turn to his see the person was Janet, in casual clothing. Whom still had her hands on the bottle of the handle of the battleaxe.
Though, Lee also noticed that Janet's attention was on her weapon, and not him.
Lee thought, 'This would be funny, it the situation was not so serious. Still, I need to see if my weapon is okay. If so. I use my rifle to force her back into that room, and lock her end.'
Lee held up Vera, and he looked at the weapon, as he grimly thought, 'Jayne is not going to be happy about this. The barrel is pinched. Meaning if I try to use it, it will misfire. It is useless to me now. It is even too light to use as decent club. I guess my precognition did not want me because Janet was going to miss me. But unfortunately, not my rifle. And it is best to unload this weapons, and toss it, since it is now dead weight.'
Lee unloaded Vera. Including the magazine, then the chamber. He left the spare around in the stock. As he did so, he tossed the ammo rounds, then weapon to the ground, by the piece of the barrel that Janet had severed.
After the cartridges, and rifle were on the ground, Lee then turned his attention to Janet. Whom was only a few feet from him. He saw that Janet trying still to pulled her battleaxe out of the wall.
Lee still found it slightly humorous that Janet's sole attention being on the axe, and not Lee, whom was less than four feet from her.
Lee thought, 'Well, I see that Janet is still clearly an amateur at this. The first rule is not to take one's eyes off the enemy, unless the situation requires it. And to always, at least be aware of the enemy, or enemies around, oneself. And I guess Janet literally does not know her own strength. Best not to remind her that she has super-strength from the super-soldier serum. She might just decide to punch me senseless.'
'Now, to convince her to stop acting like this. And instead for her to act like the same woman that I have come to know.'
Lee calmly pleaded, “Just stop it, Janet. This is not like you. Let's talk. I always considered you one of the saner Lagoon women. So, I beg you, please, act like it.”
Janet stopped trying to get her axe out of the wall. She let go of the handle of the axe, as she turned to him. She whined, “But, I want my revenge on you.”
Lee replied, in a confused tone of voice, “Why? I gave you everything you could possibly want. I gave you a near eternally youthful and healthy bodies for you and your loved ones. A loving spouse, and from what I understand, a nice girlfriend on the side. Wealth, and a mansion on a tropical island. Great kids. And a sex life that possibly some deities would envy.”
Janet answered, “You turned Benny into a woman, and you made me a bi-sexual nymphomaniac.”
Lee corrected, “Well, with the instant man packets, Benny is only a woman part of the time. And I did not make you a bi-sexual nymphomaniac. You already were that way, before I wrote about you.”
Janet snapped, as she blushed, “No. I was not.”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'Her words say, no. But, her blush says, yes.'
Lee explained, in a calm, even tone of voice, “Janet, since I don't want to die from a misunderstanding, I am going to explain a few things that you are likely not aware of.”
“Now, while you know that you are from the Black Lagoon anime timeline. What you do not likely realize, is that even thought you saw the Black Lagoon anime and read the manga volumes, there was another official Black Lagoon manga storyline that I didn't use. Because that storyline is incomplete. This storyline featured your counterpart, and it took place after the Blood Trail arc.”
“The reasons I did not use use that story arc in my stories is because it was part of the manga timeline, it has a critical flaw in the plot, and I do not like using incomplete storylines. They have a habit of coming back to bite those that use them.”
“Though, when you get the chance, go on the internet in my reality, look up the title, Wired Red Wild Card. That is the next Black Lagoon story after the Roberta's Blood Trail arc. You might find it surprising, that it is about your counterparts return to Roanapur.”
“That is why I had no problems bringing you back to Roanapur, in my stories, with you being with the Lagoon crew. One of your counterparts already returned to Roanapur on her own, to be with the Benny of that reality.”
“And you might be happy to know that your counterpart pulls off one hell of a gambit on a chinese spy. And having the spy's chinese superiors go after her, instead you, and your counterpart's hacker group.”
“Anyway, the beginning of that storyline reveals some interesting things about both Revy and yourself. By the way, when Revy was in prison, she was the man in her lesbian relationships there. And you... Well you already were that twisted. Though, not in a bad way. You just have some interesting sexual kinks.”
“Still, anyone that openly fantasizes about being gang raped has issues that need to be worked out.”
Janet deflated, as she admitted, “Oh my. I was already that twisted. I thought you caused that.”
Lee said, in a comforting tone of voice, “No. I did not. If you are wondering. After I learned all that. I still consider you sane. Every one has their little sexual fantasies. Look at me. I am not want one to judge. But, outside the bedroom, you act as a polite, civilized woman. I respect you for that.”
Janet responded, “Thank you... Damn it. How can I capture you, now that you have been so helpful? I mean, my sexual kinks was really the main reason I was after you. Since you didn't cause them, I have no hatred for you. Though, Benny can have her revenge on you, for what you did to her. Still, you are right, you gave me everything I ever wanted. I mean...”
Lee spoke up, “It's okay. Just because I am a bad guy, don't mean I have to be a bad, guy. I do believe that manners and civility count.”
Janet said, “Yes. You already pointed that with Kristina. And I agree with you. By the way, Kristina is one of our most well behave and nicest children.”
Lee commented, “I am not surprised about that.”
Janet inquired, “Of course. Though, are you quoting a line from somewhere? Besides which, you are not a bad guy, because you are too polite to be one.”
Lee answered, “The quote is from the animated movie, Wreck It Ralph. I am a fan of Jack McBrayer's works. And yes, I am a bad guy. I am a liar, a cheat, and a thief. And those are my good qualities. I played you and your friends like you were puppets on my strings. Both in the my stories, and at the Devil's Hotel. The former, because I didn't realize what I was doing at the time. And the latter, because I am trying to save my own ass.”
Janet conceded, “You do have a point there. But, that is nothing compared to some of the things my friends have done. And I will have to check out that movie.”
Lee replied, “You will likely enjoy the film. Anyway, I will keep this between us. I don't want to wreck your relationship with the others.”
Janet said. “Good. I do have a few questions though, before you run.”
Lee replied, “Okay. What are they?”
Janet said, “What did you mean by critical flaw in the plot, to Wired Red Wild Card?”
Lee stated, “As a writer, I pride myself on making plot and characterization work within a story. But, that the Wired Red Wild Card storyline has a flaw. That flaw being that the manga counterparts of Rock and Revy, in the story, decided to help the spy, after your counterpart screwed her over. A spy that was originally sent to find out about your counterpart, and your hacker friends around the web.”
Janet inquired, “Don't they realize what would have happened if my counterpart had not turned the tables on the spy?”
Lee said, “I don't think so. Which for Revy, would be okay. But, Rock is suppose to know better. That being, if the spy got she personal information she wanted, her chinese superiors would have hire hit squads against your counterpart, and your hackers friends. And with your counterpart being the girlfriend for Benny, the entire Lagoon company would have been dragged in. With Dutch, Revy, and Rock being unhappy about the situation that Benny would have forced them into.”
Janet commented, “Yea. It would had been bad. But, I got the feeling it gets worse.”
Lee stated, “It does. Rock and Revy's counterparts also neglected to inform the Benny counterpart, and the Dutch counterpart, that they are helping the spy in question. Which, given the way Black Lagoon plots usual end, means that the storyline will end in some combination of you, Benny, and the spy, either being alive or dead. Likely, you and the spy being dead. With the spy killing you, with the unexpected twisted of Benny killing the spy in revenge.”
Janet replied, “I believe that Benny would avenge me. And I would find it touching.”
Lee agreed, “So, would I. Still, I think this storyline is much like the Nazi storyline. Where the Nazi storyline was an excuse to show how much of a cold blooded killer Revy, can be, this Wild Card storyline is intent on showing how stupid Rock can be with his charitable nature.”
Janet said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “The sad part is that I can see that. And I would guess the story would end in tears.”
Lee admitted, “Very likely. And the worst part about this, is that I am not sure myself. This story is being constantly delay. With one delay being three years long. I am not sure if Tex-Mex even knows how he is planning to end this storyline.”
“Also, taking into account that neither Chang's Triad, nor, Hotel Moscow are in this story arc. Along with, given the level of humor, and the fact that Revy's counterpart had a whole chapter with the spy, as Revy got drunk, while was talking to the spy, whom was sober.”
“I mean, when Revy got real drunk, she did not become violent, but instead poured her heart out to the spy. And in fairness, the spy did take Revy back to the apartment, and she got Rock to help her bring Revy inside. Still, the next chapter was about Rock talking on personal matters with the spy.”
Janet commented, “Whoa. That is out of character for both Rock and Revy. Both of them are very private people. It is just that Rock is polite about being private.”
Lee responded, “Yes. I know. And I get the feeling this storyline is suppose to be a breather episode coming off of the manga version of the Blood Trail arc.
Janet agreed, “Yea. That arc really needed a breather episode. But, that Wild Card arc sounds like it is reaching a bit.”
Lee stated, “You are preaching to the choir. And it feels like the Wild Card story arc is in a tug of war between a serious type, downer episode, and a humorous type, breather episode. And unlike the previous storylines, the plot is not falling into place, because Rock and Revy have not realized what would have happened to them, and their friends, if things had worked out differently. That spy is practically a scorpion, and they don't even realize it.”
Janet questioned, “As in the tale of the scorpion and the turtle?”
Lee answered, “Exactly. And in the end, the scorpion stings because it is its nature. And the woman they are helping, will likely betray them, because that is the nature of being a spy. Which is lies, deceit, and betrayal. And in doing so, the spy will likely get herself killed, and she will likely take some of the Lagoon members, and your counterpart, with her.”
Janet said, “Well, I will hope for the best, for my counterpart, and her friends. That is all I can do, considering we have all agreed not to travel to that reality.”
Lee stated, “Interesting. Though, not surprising. That being said, I know that Tex-Mex can do good breather episodes. Calm Down Two Men is a breath episode in Black Lagoon, and it is one of my favorite anime episodes, and manga chapters. It was a comfortable tour of Roanapur, with some humorous scenes. Along with a good character development ending, for both Rock and Revy, that was done well. And no one during that episode was seriously harmed, nor killed.”
Janet commented, “Yea. It was good. Both Rock and Revy commented that was one of their better days together in Roanapur. And I want you to know, that given what you did in Plata Podrido, along with pointing all this out, you have just proven to be more devious that Rock, while still being a nice guy.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. The problem with Rock's blind spot is Rock thinks that whomever, he, or she, meets will be a generally nice person, deep down, because Rock is a nice person. While, though I think people are born good, that does not mean I think that people I meet in person are still good. I am just polite because it is less likely to get me harmed, or killed. And more likely to get me what I want.”
Janet complimented, “That is intelligent thinking.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Janet inquired, “Now, one last question. What is the relationship between Revy's counterpart, and my counterpart at the moment, in that storyline?”
Lee stated, “Rocky. No pun intended. Revy is clearly a possessive and jealous person. And you were getting a bit more attention than her from the Lagoon company members. Especially, Benny. For obvious reasons. And Revy was jealous.”
Janet giggled.
Lee went onto say, “Though, that Revy hasn't harmed your counterpart, yet. Your counterpart did make a pass at Rock, while in Revy's presence.”
Janet winced, as she asked, “I am almost afraid to ask. What was that Revy's reaction to doing that?”
Lee answered, in a calm, serious tone of voice, “In front of the Lagoon company members, that Revy threatened to rape your counterpart. Your counterpart wisely decided to back off. Also, Revy's counterpart had started referring to your counterpart, towards other people, as a cow.”
Janet pointed out, “Actually, that is a good sign. Revy... Any Revy, only gives nicknames to those she at least holds some value, or measure of respect, to, in some way. And that would not be the most insulting nickname she has given someone.”
Lee agreed, “True, on both points. Concerning your place of origin, I doubt that Revy would understand the double meaning of nicknaming your counterpart a cow.”
Janet cracked a grin, as she said, “Yea. I don't think Revy realizes that cows are considered sacred animals in India.”
Lee agreed, “Exactly.” He turned to look at the axe embedded into the wall. He then looked back over at Janet, as he complimented, “Also, that axe really suits you.”
Janet replied, “Thanks.”
Lee commented, “Now, I better get going.”
Janet said, “Good luck.”
In response, Lee just smiled at Janet.
Lee walked passed Janet, as he briskly made his way down the hallway, in the opposite direction from the stairwell, and towards his intended destination.
Janet watched Lee soon turn a corner, and disappear. She calmly thought, 'If what Lee is saying is true. Which is likely. Than all he did for me was help me. And I owe him that. Talk about a screwed up situation, in so many ways. And Lee reminded me that it could be far, far worse for myself, my family, and my friends.'
Janet then turned back to her axe and the firearm pieces on the ground.
Janet thought, 'I will left the firearm and ammo here. But, I need to get the axe and start heading for the ground floor. Considering it is Revy's axe, I cannot leave it behind.'
Janet then went back to freeing the axe from the wall. A few seconds later, she first loosened it, and she finally freed. She then turned and headed for the elevators, as she left Vera and Vera's ammo, behind.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee had briskly walked down a hallway, as he worked out the map in his head, of the huge building he was in. He had turned a couple of corners, down the hallways he was in, as he made his way to his intended distraction.
When he turned the corner, into another hallway junction, he confront by Eda.
Lee immediately stopped within less than five feet from Eda.
Lee simply thought, 'Crap.”
As Lee looked at Eda, he saw that she was holding her second generation Glock seventeen L at him, with her right hand. With the barrel pointed at him.
The Glock had a safety action trigger mechanism. The safety action trigger system consisted of the pistol trigger, and a spring loaded lever set in a hollowed out groove, in the middle of trigger. Both the trigger and the lever had to be pulled together for the Glock to fire.
Lee saw that Eda was wearing blue tennis shoes, blue jeans, brown leather belt, a white blouse, and black leather jacket. And she had let her long blond hair hang loose, as it ran down her back.
Lee then noticed that Eda's right index finger rested against the trigger guard.
While Lee showed not emotion on the outside. He inwardly felt relief, as he thought, 'Good. Her finger off the trigger, that means she is not immediately planning to kill me. And my precognition is not screaming at me. So, she is not planning to turn me in just yet. So, I will also let her speak first, as a way to be polite. And I will work from there.'
Eda greeted, in a calm tone of voice, “Hello Lee.” She thought, 'Finally, we will get to have a conversation I have been meaning to speak to you about.'
Lee smiled, as he said, “Hello Eda.”
Eda thought, 'He seems a bit happy to see me. Not that I am complaining.' She inquired, “And why are you so chipper to see me?”
Lee answered, “Because my precognition would be screaming at me if you were intent on shooing me. And your finger is resting against the trigger guard.”
Eda thought, 'He has me there.' She shrugged with her left shoulder, as she replied, “You got me there.” She then holstered her pistol in a shoulder holster hidden under her jacket, on the left side of her chest.
As soon as Eda was finished putting away her gun, she looked at Lee. She commented, “I heard your conversation on the radio. You got issues.”
Lee replied, “Don't we all.”
Eda agreed, “True.”
Lee asked, “So, how did you find me?”
Eda stated, “This was the building I decided to search first. I checked the layout of each of the room, from the far end of the stairwell, you are heading for, to reach the roof. When I heard on the radio, that you had cross the bridge to get to this building, from another building, I knew you were heading this way. And you would likely climb the staircase a few floors.”
“Then, I reviewed in my head which floor you would likely choose? If you knew where you were heading. Which you clearly do. And this floor. The twenty-second floor. Had a large storage area, by other stairwell I came onto the floor, from.”
“Unlike the other floors, I checked, which have hallways. This floor has the large storage area. It would be to your advantage to take this floor. Given if there is trouble, you might be able to lose people in that storage area, and then flee to the roof, at the stairwell there.”
“After that, while everyone talked, I searched the hallways, to figure out the best route between the stairwell, and the storage area. Which is here. And I just waited here for you, while using my enhanced hearing to listen out for you.”
Lee complimented, “That is very perceptive of you.”
Eda said, “Thank you. I must say. Looking back on on all of it. After everything that happened in Plata Podrido, it is not surprising that you turned out to be the writer.”
Lee responded, “Yea. Towards the end, it would have been obvious to a third party. By looking at what was going on, from an outside point of view. And even though we slept with each other under false pretenses. I hope you are not upset about that.”
Eda responded, “Not really. You treated me nicely, and you do your best to give me a wonderful date, and you let me take lead, later that night. So, I am willing to let that be water under the bridge.”
Lee complimented, “That is what I like about you, Eda. You know when to be a professional.”
Eda smiled, as she said, “Thank you.” She dropped her smile, as she continued, “Though, what was this about the immature profile that River told us about?”
Lee shifted his body in an uncomfortable manner, as he inquired, “She told you about that?”
Eda deadpanned, “Yes. And I want an explanation.”
Lee calmly stated, “Okay. I will just outright state the truth. Eda, you sometimes act in an immature manner. Nowhere near as much as bad as Revy. But, you do have your moments. Especially, when you let your greed get the better of you, and when a plan does not go your way.”
Eda conceded, “Okay. I will give you that. Also, why didn't you included me in your stories more?”
Lee stated, “For two reasons. First, I wrote those stories before I got to know you as a person. Second, I had no way to really fit you into my plotline. By the end of book two of my stories, everybody knows you worked as spy, you were the drug dealing behind the back of the families, and they also knew about the shit you pulled at the end of the Blood Trail arc. With Yolanda helping you every step of the way.”
“Given that, none of the characters I was working with were really going to trust you. At least, for a while.”
“I had to work out a fitting punishment for you and Yolanda, that would not seriously harm either you. Because, let's be honest. After Chang and Balalaika learned about the shit you pulled, they were just as likely to kill you both.”
It was Eda's turn to shift her body uncomfortably, as she commented, “You're right about that. It took a while for me to get back to where the others would trust me enough to even talk to me. And Yolanda had the same problem.”
Lee inquired, “I thought as much. Since I didn't write those events. I would like to know. What happened to you and Yolanda, after Chang's Tower fell, at the end book two?”
Eda let out a deep breath. She then answered, “A lot. After the others found us, and deprogrammed Yolanda, and I, we found ourselves in a tight situation. By then, the others were more than happy to show us the Black Lagoon series. And they got a good laugh at seeing our reactions to learning they know what we did, and that our lives were works of fiction.”
“It was not a pleasant experience for myself. On the other hand, Yolanda laughed her ass off. Later, in private, given her youth was restored, and her lost eye replaced, she told me she believed we were in another person's story. She was the first person I know to guess that.”
Lee responded, “I have long since realized that Yolanda is very sharp. And that she has a lifetime of experience in the spy game.”
Eda agreed, “Exactly. But, we decided to keep that secret to ourselves, for our own reasons. One being that we had no proof. During that week, before we all bugged out, and called in the military to the tower, the two of us realized that our covers were blown. And if our respective governments got a hold of us, we would never again see the light of day.”
“So, we used our skills and connections, to just disappear for a while. At that time, the only person I trusted was Yolanda, and vise versa for her. Because we both realized we are in the same boat.”
Lee said, “I hope the others let you have a few things from the tower.”
Eda shrugged, as she responded, “We all looted that place of quite a few things. Though, the others did not let Yolanda and I have a reality device. But, we did get to keep some gold and other treasures we took. With our enhanced strength and endurance, that made for a fair amount of wealth. Along with some select bottles of alcohol. I got to say. That Romulan ale is pretty good.”
Lee commented, “Well, I found Ardbeg Providence to petty good, as well. If I make it out of this mess alive. I may have to try some Romulan ale, myself.”
Eda inquired, “I am sure you will make it out of here alive. So, I heard that it was River that gave you a bottle of Ardbeg Providence?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Yes. I won a million dollars for Revy and I didn't see a dime of those winnings. So, River gave me a bottle, as a gift.”
Eda commented, “That was nice of her.”
Lee commented, “I agree. And it gets better. At the time, I didn't know Sam and River were the same person. So, I ended up using the bottle as a toast for River, with River, the Rats Nest bartender, and Pedro. And all of us liked the stuff.”
Eda giggled. She then questioned, “Well, it is it good stuff. So, you won't happen to know who the Rats Nest bartender is?”
Lee answered, “Yes. But, it is not my secret to give.”
Eda asked, “Do I know this woman?”
Lee said, “Yes.”
Eda commented, “Funny. I don't remember meeting a woman bartender like that before.”
Lee grinned, as he hinted, “I never said that you knew her as a woman.”
It took a few seconds for Eda to realize what Lee was hinting at. She then burst out laughing, for several seconds.
As Eda calmed down, she stated, “Bao? The female bartender is, Bao?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And as fun as it is to know, please keep that to yourself.”
Eda replied, “No problem. You know I am good at keeping secrets.”
Lee responded, “I know. And thank you. Now, back to the story on what you did after the fall of Chang's Tower.”
Eda stated, “Yes. Now, during that week, while the crew took care of getting everyone involved in the siege squared away. And while Lagoon family planned on leaving on the Lagoon PT boat, I found out that Roberta and Fabiola had gotten a hold of some reality devices. And they were planning to take as much as they could, in gold, jewels, and other valuables, from Chang's Tower. With them teleporting back and forth to their home in Caracas, to enrich their family fortunes.”
“Given Yolanda and I had only a few options at that time, we offered to do some heavy lifting for the maids, in change for a few concessions.”
Lee questioned, “So, what was your fee?”
Eda answered, “Five percent, for each of us, for whatever we helped them collect, teleported back to Lovelace manor in Caracas, and haul the items to some hiding places on their master's estate. And they would let us hide on the Lovelace estate for a while, as we both sorted out what to do next.”
“Let's just say that secretly, the Lovelace household are now one of the richest families in South America. And Fabiola's own family is well taken care of. With Yolanda and I do fine.”
Lee said, in a happy tone of voice, “That is good to hear. So, what else happened?”
Eda stated, “Well, while we were there, we were put to work as maids...”
Eda noticed that Lee was snickering. Eda said, in annoyed tone of voice, “Hey. It is not funny.”
Lee was trying his best not to laugh, as he agreed, “I know... And a maid uniform is a step up from nun habit.”
Eda started, “True...” Then, she started snickering as she as she thought about Lee's comment.
Eda snickering was the finally straw, as Lee burst out laughing, with Eda soon joining him in laughter.
A few seconds later, as they calmed down, Eda continued her story, “Anyway. With Yolanda and I there, that made for seven maids in the manor, Roberta, Fabiola, and the other three maids there. And besides Garcia, the only other person there was Lazlo, Garcia's dog. An ankle biter... Well, not really. The dog was nice to us.”
“Anyway, as soon as we finished with the Tower, Garcia returned from his adventure. Though, he did not talk much about it. I must say that Garcia makes a cute girl, in her cursed for. Well, woman now. Still, she is cute, and sexy.”
Eda smirked, as she did a pose for Lee. She stated, “Still, Garcia's female form doesn't hold a candle to my figure.”
Lee commented, in a polite tone of voice, “Few do.” He continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Still Roberta and Fabiola are probably planning to castrate me over doing that to their master.”
Eda said, “Very likely. By the way, thanks for the youth restoration, and longevity.”
Lee inquired, “You're welcome. So, what happen next?”
Eda commented, “Anyway, we stayed at the Lovelace manor for a little while, until we set up new lives. Along with needed paperwork and falsified records. On our Earth. We went our separate ways from the Lovelace manor. And after the work we put in there, all five of us. Yolanda, Roberta, Garcia, Fabiola, and I. Agreed that our debts were settled with the Lovelace household, over past actions.”
“Yolanda and I said our goodbyes to them and the others at the plantation, and we left together.”
“Though, our friendship has been platonic for the most part, we ended living together for the years. Still, we had great times together. At one point, given our wealth, we ran the global party circuit for a while. But, we were careful not to get pregnant, nor get an STD.”
“Though, the only problem with the two of us continuing to be together, is that with Yolanda back to be young, and sexy. Is that we are now two sexy blond women, living together.”
Lee casually replied, “Oh, the blond jokes must get tiring.”
Eda stated, “Yes. And when the Lagoon family started having those bikini parties at their island. By the way, they are very fun. Revy and Roberta tracked us down, and invited Yolanda and I. I would like to thank you for that. Those are good parties. In the end, when the others learned about the stories, they came to Yolanda and I, to help them find you. We had to go a few months into your past, with the that burger truck. And you know the rest of how you and I ended up here.”
Lee said, “I am glad things worked out for you.”
Eda calmly stated, “Thank you. Now, let us deal with the matter at hand. I have to give you credit, Lee. Not many people would intentionally pissed both Revy, and Balalaika. The only other two people that have intentionally pissed off both of them, and lived, are Chang, and myself.”
Lee commented, “That doesn't surprising me.”
Eda stated, “But, you are first to do it at the same time.”
Lee shrugged, “It is a gift. And if they are pissed, it may throw off their aim.”
Eda agreed, “True. That is what I figured you were doing.”
Lee pointed, “And I did not do it in their presence.”
Eda stated, “Which is why you still have my respect. Still, before either you escape, or they catch you, there are a couple of more points of interest that I want you to answer, about your stories.”
Lee offered, “I am more than happy to answer your questions.”
Eda responded, “Good. Let us start with that bikini contest, years ago in Roanapur. You made me come in dead last. That was embarrassing.”
Lee stated, “Would you like me to list in how many ways you have put in danger, screwed over, pissed off, or flat out wronged the other residents of Roanapur. That was a nice way of payback that did not involved violence, nor any type of harm towards you. Except for your ego. Besides, I made it up to you by helping you win that talent contest.”
Eda conceded, “True on all counts. Though, you did give me a nine.”
Lee pointed out, “Pedro and Sam... I mean River, both gave you each a ten. And I did not want that cast of violent lunatics, also in the room, to accuse me of cheating, due to us previously sleeping together.”
Eda responded, “I can appreciate that. Also, I can be a bitch. And you did make it up to me.”
Lee said, “I am glad we are square on that. And I apologize about the janitorial work.”
Eda shrugged, as she said, “Don't worry about it. I have had worse. You likely don't know this, but when my superiors assigned me to go undercover as a nun, they ordered me to be celibate during that time. For years on end. Even though I disobeyed those orders, it did prevent me from have an open relationship with someone. That did drive me bit nuts. At least as a janitor, when I got off of work, I could have some fun out in the open.”
Lee responded, “That explains the clothing on your time off, during your work at the Ripoff Church.”
Eda replied, “Somewhat.”
Lee inquired, “By the way, is Yolanda with this crew?”
Eda replied, “Nope. You gave her back her right eye, her youth, gifted her with extreme longevity, and she is in perfect health. That woman would likely sleep with you if you nicely asked her.”
Lee grinned, as he said, “You, her, and me. Given my health at the moment, I likely would not survive the experience. But, I would die happy.”
Eda giggled a little. She then said, “Well, you did make us bi-sexual. Though, I still lean towards liking men more. But, from an informed standpoint, Yolanda is great in bed. It is just that we don't... Click in that way.”
Lee chuckled a little. He then inquired, “By the way, something you may get a good laugh out of? Did Revy and Rock mention the Tex-Mex incident?”
Eda stated, “I heard River mention the name in passing when we talked to her, right after your escape. But, I did not get any details. Besides that type of food. Who? Or what is, Tex-Mex?”
Lee answered, “Tex-Mex is the alias for the man that created the Black Lagoon series. He also drew some porn on the side, including some interesting stuff with you girls.”
Eda cautioned, “And why shouldn't I shoot you for mentioning that to me?”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “Because he made a list on the back of the Black Lagoon Swimsuit Models magazine he made. A list of breast sizes of you girls. For your information, Janet came out on top of that list. You are in the middle. But, here is the kicker. You, Eda, are two cup sizes larger than Revy is.”
Eda's eyes narrowed, as her lips formed a wicked grin. She inquired,“Really?”
Lee nodded once, as he replied, “Yes.”
Eda started laughing, for a few seconds.
As Eda calmed down, she said, “I am going to have so much fun with that information. That is what I like about you, Lee. You know how to both, give and take. River was right, you are a sadomasochist. Oh, if I had only known at the time, when we slept together. The real fun we could have had that night.”
Lee thought, 'That is what River thinks of me? What a minute, how much did River tell them about me? This could be very bad for myself.' He asked, “How much did River tell you about me?”
Eda answered, “She said quite a bit. Both about you, and about me. Including some information on my past, from the my cheerleader uniform. And other stuff we talked about earlier. Though, I have the feeling that River held back some stuff.”
Lee responded, “Oh. I am sure River did hold back on some stuff.”
Eda inquired, “How do you know?”
Lee stated, “Because some of the information she held back is so juicy that Revy would have used it in our conversation.”
Eda questioned, “Do I want to know?”
Lee replied, “No. You don't. Though, how much did I get right on that about your past?”
Eda deadpanned, “A lot. Besides the immaturity, I cannot believe you thought I was so shallow.”
Lee swiftly stated, “As I said before. In my defense, I didn't personally know you at the time. And my opinion of you has changed quite a bit, since then.”
Eda concede, “At least you are being honest. And, I would like some information, from that clever brain of yours.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Sure. What do you want to know?”
Eda answered, “I have a few questions about three people. First, River told me what you found about my past. And it was pretty accurate. So, how did you find out that much about me?”
Lee answered, “Mostly, from the internet. But, I do have access to some books on firearms. I always believed that if I was going to write a story, I had to do my homework, first.”
Eda complimented, “Well, it shows. Also, be honest. Do you consider me to be crazy?”
Lee stated, “You are dangerous, though sane. Still, I think your people, in the midwest, are about as crazy as us, southerners.”
Eda asked, “Why is that?”
Lee answered, “Noodling for catfish. Besides the southeastern U.S., the U.S. midwest is the only other place on earth, where people are crazy enough to go fishing, underwater, without scuba gear, and use themselves as live bait.”
Eda laughed, for a few seconds. After she calmed down, she looked at Lee, with a smile on her lips. She agreed, “You got that right. Our people, and culture, really are crazy.”
Lee replied, “I know.”
Eda commented, “No wonder we get along so well with Revy and the others. We are use to dealing with armed, crazy people. We grew up around such people.”
Lee smile, as he said, “Honey, you are preaching to the choir.”
Both of the chuckled for few seconds.
As the calmed down, Eda inquired, “Speaking of Revy, my second question is about her. What is with her hair color? I never got why she had that shade of red.”
Lee said, “It is a really easy question to answer, once you realize that name of the shade of red Revy's hair is. It is a injoke. That shade of red called, burgundy. As in Burgundy wine. To help show that Revy is the hard drinker of the Lagoon group.”
Eda let out a laugh. She then stated, “That makes so much sense.”
Lee offered, “I could go further. If you want?”
Eda smirked, as she replied, “Sure.”
Lee stated, “Considering Revy's red hair, and the fact she is from New York City. Along with us seeing that her father was chinese... Or, at the very least, oriental... I would guess Revy's mother was not only a caucasian, but an Irish redhead. Giving the Irish have a large population in New York City, and there are a lot of redheaded Irish people there.”
Eda scoffed, “Don't tell me that Revy is part Irish Catholic?”
Lee countered, “Well, Revy does have the self-righteous indignation that most Catholics naturally have.”
Eda conceded, “She does.”
Lee mentioned, “And given, you were pretending to be a nun, and she is part Catholic, there is joke somewhere in your relationship.”
Eda inquired, “I will give you that one. Do think I could play that black irish joke with her?”
Lee stated, “Not if you want to continued breathing.”
Eda replied, “Good point.”
Lee said, “Still, I will say her Irish side is not the reason for her lack of manners, and her alcoholism. That is explained by how her father raised her, or lack there of.”
Eda agreed, “True.”
Lee commented, “But, the Irish do have a temper. Though, Irish tend not to get angry, unless seriously wronged. In which case, they stay angry for quite a while.”
Eda responded, “Yea. You are right about that. And let us not tell Revy about this.”
Lee stated, “I agree. If Revy found out, given she likely has no clue about her family history, besides the obvious, she might go to Ireland, in her home reality, to try to get in touch with her Irish heritage. And we are not talking about remake of, The Quiet Man, film. Which I must say is a true unrated romantic comedy by John Wayne. That man was a skilled actor.”
Eda agreed, “You are right about that.”
Lee commented, “Anyway, given the Irish like to drink, and Revy becomes violent when drunk. And she prefers to be armed, most of the time. That would be like setting fire to a fireworks factory.”
Eda giggled. She then said, “You are right about that. Onto my next question. I would like to know more about Yolanda's past. She has hid a lot about her past, from everyone. Even myself. And I think you have figured out some clues about her past.”
Lee commented, “I think I may have uncovered a few things from her past. From her age, and two clues. One clue is from that Viva Youth omake, and another from a statement she made in the series.”
Eda requested, “Then, please tell me what you found out.”
Lee stated, “First, in the manga Viva Youth omake listed the youthful Yolanda to be twenty-nine. That was helpful in a number of ways. Given her attitude in the youth omake, and her dress, I am willing to bet that in Yolanda's youth, she was a Mata Hari type spy. Only Yolanda spied for allied intelligence, in World War II, against the Germans. But, unlike Mata Hari, Yolanda was not caught, and executed. And given the timeline, I would guess that Yolanda was likely in her mid-eighties during the mid nineteen nineties.”
“Also, from the other clue, combined with the personality she has now. Along with her blond hair and blue eyes. I would guess she was an Austrian jew.”
“Tex-Mex seems to have a preference for hot blond and blue eyed people. And not just women. But, men as well. Such as Benny... Originally. Still, it is a trait that you share with Balalaika, and Yolanda.”
Eda spoke up, “I am aware of that. Though, I am not jewish. And I am fairly sure that Balalaika is not, either. But, I am not crazy enough to ask her.”
Lee agreed, “It is wise not to do so.”
Eda requested, “Yes. Now, please continue.”
Lee stated, “Gladly. The reason I think she Austrian, instead of Hungarian, is because she never showed any serious anti-Communist leanings in her actions, nor statements. She was always cool and casual with those around her. Even Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow. If she was from, Hungary, she would likely hate the Soviets for what they did to the nation of Hungary. On the other hand, Austria weathered the cold war far better.”
“Also, she does not have the arrogance of the Germans, nor the snobbishness of the French. She is too damn relaxed to be a British. She lacks the tanned skin one sees in most Spanish, Portuguese, Italians, and Greeks.”
“Given the events of her lifespan, her personality would likely be far more bitter if she was from the Serbian area. And if she was from Switzerland, Norway, Finland, or Sweden, she would likely not have been a spy in the first place. For various reasons.”
Eda giggled. She then complimented, “You definitely have a talent for this.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Now, the other clue to her past makes me think that after War World II ended, Yolanda joined with Israel intelligence, and she probably had a hand in the founding of modern day Israel. At least in your home reality.”
Eda said, “I knew that Yolanda was either with, or previously with Israeli intelligence, when we were at the Ripoff Church. Her gold plated desert eagle, and the fact she always sided with Israel, when we discussed middle eastern politics, was proof enough of that. But, what is this clue you are talking about?”
Lee lips curled into a wicked grin, as he stated, “That is the brilliant part. Everyone else missed it. I would have missed her comment too. If I didn't become so good at seeing the obvious, while most others will miss the point entirely. And here is the clue. Do you remember, when you first met Janet, during the gunfight, when Yolanda mentioned the town of Beit Shemesh?”
Eda inquired, “Yes. What of it?”
Lee explained, “That not a biblical reference. It was likely a reference to her personal past. During October twenty-ninth, and thirtieth, in nineteen forty-eight. Or, whatever date it happened in your reality. Yolanda was either a part of, or aided, the Harel Brigade, in the taking of Beit Shemesh. That might have also been, when and where, she lost her original right eye.”
Lee stayed quiet for the next few seconds, as he let his explanation sink in for Eda.
A few seconds later, Eda said, “That makes a lot of sense. River is right. You are a genius.”
Lee happily thought, 'I love being reminded that River thinks I am a genius...' He then realized what that fully meant, as he continued his thoughts, in a more sober manner, 'I am a sadomasochistic genius sociopath. That is not a good combination. Still...'
Lee replied, “Thank you. By the way, though, you said you stayed away from your governments, after the fall of the Tower. Are either of you two still with your intelligence organizations, in anyway, shape, or form? I kind of left that open.”
Eda flatly stated, “Hell no. Like I said, Yolanda and I broke our ties with them after we found out the full truth of that world as myth situation, and multiversal travel. I may love my county, but even I do not trust my government enough to allow them to know, let alone have reality traveling technology... Of course, we left all the gear and records at the Tower... Your stories... Gomez.”
Lee groaned, as he responded, “Yes. Another massive oversight on my part. The only good news is Gomez is pragmatic enough to leave you, and your friends, alone. And he probably does not have a clue about me, nor my stories.”
Eda calmly replied, “Let us hope so.”
Lee requested, “Yes... And could you keep that to yourself. There is no reason to give your friends more reasons to want to hurt me.”
Eda shrugged, “Yea. You're right. That got plenty of reasons, as is.”
Lee complimented, “Thank you. Anyway, that was a wise decision on both your parts to cut your ties. You need to understand. The U.S. may be top dog in your reality, but they are small fish in the sea of the multiverse. And if they attempted gunboat diplomacy with others in the multiverse, it would have started a multiversal war that would have likely had your planet destroyed.”
Eda agreed, “I realized that, all the way back then. That is why I broke my ties with them.”
Lee said, “Good. That is nice to hear. And that is why I don't think we have much to worry about from Gomez, and his operation. He knows better than to stir up trouble.”
Eda stated, “Well, as I think about it. I believe that you are right. Now, onto my next question. A day after Chang opened his casino, Revy confronted me at the food truck, on a gambling matter. Did you have anything to do about the fact she called me out on all the money I won from her, when we played cards, at the Ripoff Church, with her drinking heavily, while I secretly drank apple juice in my whiskey and rum bottles?”
Lee questioned, in slight disbelief, “You actually did that?”
Eda answered, “Yep. And I take that as a, yes.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. I did. Revy was talking about gambling. And I just didn't want to deal with her. And that thought just popped into my head, and I used that comment to get her to leave me be for a day. I am surprised you pulled that off.”
Eda said, “Do you realize how much money I had to pay back Revy? With interest?”
Lee stated, “I imagine, quite a bit. But, as you said, you now have plenty of gold, and other valuables, that you stole from Chang at the Tower.”
Eda conceded, “True. Still. I found that to be annoying.”
Lee responded, “Don't feel bad. That is nothing compared to the money that I owe the girls.”
Eda inquired, “From the lessons you learned from them in the time loops?”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he thought, 'I don't want the Lowe family to get in trouble. So, I have to continue to play dumb on knowing that I know that they know about the time loop.' He inquired, “You know about that?”
Eda stated, “Oh yea. We all heard about it. And while they were pissed at you before. You just had to turn their anger to full broil. Didn't you? Though, me... Not so much.”
Lee thought, 'While, I know better than to ask Sawyer, and Jayne about the other's reactions to what I did in the time loop. Eda just confirmed my worries, that what the Lowe family said was true. And I thought I was trouble before. Though, Ed did say their reactions were mixed. So, there is hope for me. Yet, it is likely most of Revy's group didn't tell me, because they knew it would cause me to run even harder... They were probably going to spring this on me, after I was captured me. Still, Eda is one of the few people that I can talk to about this, without her seriously hurting me.'
Lee whined, “How was I suppose to know any of you would remember? The whole time loop genre states that only the person, or people, caught in the middle, that remember, to begin with, are the only ones that remember the time loop happening, after the time loop ends.”
Eda pointed out, “We don't exactly follow the rules, on anything.”
Lee conceded, “No. You don't.”
Eda commented, “And that is partly your fault. Due to what you wrote.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. You're right. And I had a hand in that, in the way I wrote all of you. So, I have only myself to blame.”
Eda said, “Perhaps not as much as you believe. Still, since I am not that upset with you. When I recognized you at the Deco, I didn't tell anyone. And fortunately, I was the only one that recognized you, while you were on stage.”
Lee commented, “Thank you for not telling them I was there.”
Eda responded, “No problem. And your performance, on stage, with the piano was very good.”
Lee commented, “Yes. I appreciate your compliment. It took a lot a practice in the time loop to get that good.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she replied, “I bet.”
Lee inquired, “Also, are all of them pissed off about how I conned them in the time loops?”
Eda casually answered, “Not really.”
Lee visibly relaxed his body a little, as he said, “That is a relief. Also, I hope you had a good time during the loops.”
Eda commented, “Yolanda and I did. So, no worries there. It was an interesting experience.”
Lee thought, 'I agree. Now, to get some more details on what River told them about the time loop.'
Lee asked, “That is very true. By the way, how exactly did you all find out about the time loop?”
Eda said, “River told us.”
Lee inquired, with surprise in his voice, “She did. Why inform you of the time loop?”
Eda commented, “I think she was trying to point out how dangerous you were. I guess that backfired on the both of you.”
Lee questioned, “I guess so. Also, how did they, and you, remember?”
Eda said, “Ranma used magic smoke, from a magic lamp she has. That is how we can all remember those events.”
Lee commented, “That figures.” He mentally added, 'And that confirms more of what the Lowe family told me. About how they remember, due the smoke produced by Ranma's magic lamp.'
Eda asked, “So, how much do you owe Revy and the girls?”
Lee answered, “Depending on how you look at it. Around five to seven million U.S. dollars. Not including interest.”
Eda raised her right eyebrow, as she stated, “The very fact you actually ran those figures, says something about your character. I am just not sure if that is a good thing, or a bad thing.”
Lee admitted, “I am not sure myself.”
Eda said, “Well, I am not going to make you pay me back, because I know your ass is not worth that much.”
Lee commented, “I am glad you realize that. I wish the others realized that.”
Eda stated, “Actually, I think most of them do.”
Lee replied, “That is nice.”
Eda commented, “Yes. And through all this. I must say, you really do have a very interesting eye for detail.”
Lee offered, “Thank you. Would you like to have another example?”
Eda cracked a grin, as she inquired, “Sure. I have seen my series. I have notice that dates are not mentioned most of the time. So, let us play game. What date do you think Rock was originally kidnapped by Revy? What date do you think that Revy, Dutch, and Benny first come to Roanapur? And when did Revy and Rock start doing it? And please explain your reasoning for you answers.”
Lee answered, “Those three are easy questions. And for the first question. I just backtracked using the clues the Black Lagoon series provided. The were two dates mentioned in the Black Lagoon anime. The first date was in the return to Tokyo arc, where it was mentioned by Rock that it was close to New Years. The second question ties in with the first one. The third question is easy, but also shows that the anime creators made a dating mistake.”
“They dated the Blood Trail beginning in October, Nineteen Ninety-Five, when Diego Lovelace was murdered in that bombing during the political really. The reason I mention that it was a mistake was that the manga mentions the rally in more detail.”
“The details being that the rally was a found celebration for MVR. A communist party. But, in my reality, MVR was founding in July, Nineteen Ninety-Seven, not October, Ninety-Five. The animators mixed up the dates, due to the a similar abbreviation of the MVR, with the organization the MVR branched from, the MBR Two Hundred. Whom made political gains in the governorship election of the Zulia state of Venezuela, in December, nineteen ninety-five.”
“And the reason I am using October as the month is because that was the date that was mentioned a few times in the anime. Episode twenty-five, in a conversation between Benny and Dutch, Benny mentioned that the bombing happened in October. Though, in the manga, it was stated the bombing happened a month before the conversation in which Benny and Dutch were having at the time. So, that could mean that Roberta and Garcia returned to Roanapur in November.”
Eda commented, “That is correct. And the second example?”
Lee stated, “In episode twenty-eight Garcia mentioned the October date for the bombing to Caxton and the Gray Foxes.”
Lee thought, 'There are some minor, but interesting translation differences between the english version of the manga and the english dub of the manga. Which were done by the same company. And there were a few translation mistakes in both versions. Such as, in episode eighteen, the english dub translation team mistaking Shenhua for being an atheist. Instead, I know for a fact that Shenhua is a Taoist.'
'Also, given all your voices are different, from the english and japanese casts, I am sure that the dialogue in your home reality did not go word by word. Point by point. As what was stated in the Black lagoon anime. Though, I am sure the statements and events did take the same general course.'
Eda replied, “That is interesting.”
Lee said, “Thank you. Anyway, it gets more interesting. There was a scene between Balalaika's and Chang, in the manga, during the Blood Trail arc, where the two were by the pier, concerning years ago, when they fought, with Balalaika ending up in the bay, where the Lagoon were just coming into town, saw her, and rescued her. With the two of them having a discussion on their past, and how they ending their first battle, in a draw.”
Eda commented, “I know about that incident. From a number of accounts.”
Lee responded, “I am sure. But, Chang in the manga stated the date of the fight. The date being November ninety-three. While in the anime, the scene was only briefly shown as a flashback. And Chang did not state any dates in that scene, because there was no dialogue, except for Rock, whom said that Chang got the drop on Balalaika.”
Lee words then became more meticulous, as he continued, “But, we have to remember that Rock got the account, of what happened, from Dutch. And Dutch did not see the fight, first hand. I have a feeling that the fight was much like in the manga. With Chang not ambushing Balalaika. With their fight ending in a draw.”
“This is backed up by the fact that Balalaika, in that manga scene, mentioned she was shot with three twenty-two caliber long rifle rounds. And in the anime, when facing Hansel and Gretel in the series, Chang was shown using a pair of Barrett seventy-six semi-automatic pistols, which use twenty-two caliber long rifle rounds.”
“So, the same fight happened on a different date. Probably, November nineteen ninety-one. Which was when the Lagoon crew came to Roanapur.”
Lee mentally added, 'And Chang pointed one of those pistols in my face once. And I recognized it as the same model. Though, not the same pistol. Considering Chang lost those pistols in book two of my stories, with Fabiola taking those two pistols as her trophies. Not that I am going to mention any of that out loud.'
Eda said, with slight amusement, “I believe you are correct on all points. And you are right on the month and year the Lagoon crew came to town. And do I vaguely remember reading the manga, and noting the date of that event was different. But, at the time, I did not pay it any mind.”
Lee shrugged, as he stated, “The dates of events between manga and anime, of the same series, have been notorious for being different, among various franchise. It is no surprise that is the case for the Black Lagoon franchise.”
“Also, given in the first episode of the anime, and at the beginning of the first volume of the manga, Benny told Rock, in the Yellowflag, that Dutch, Revy, and Benny himself, came to Roanapur two years before they picked up Rock. So, two years, or a little more, after they brought Rock to Roanapur, would put them in late nineteen ninety-three to early ninety-four.”
“The nineteen ninety-five date is given in the anime. At the beginning of episode twenty-five, Collateral Massacre, the first date give was in nineteen sixty-nine. Then, the episode stated that the date of the bombing that murder Diego, was twenty-six years later. That would make the date nineteen ninety-five.”
“Though, given the timeline of the seasons shown in the anime, there is no way the November ninety-three date is valid in the anime timeline. The math just does not work.”
Eda commented, with mild concerned, “You have thought on this for a while? Haven't you?” She thought, 'I would call his level of knowledge on such things, bordering on the fanatical, if not for the fact, the application of that knowledge is allowing him to remain breathing.'
Lee casually admitted, “Of course. It comes with doing research. You of all people should appreciate that.”
Eda responded, “Of course. Though, I always wondered why Chang used such a weak pistol.”
Lee stated, “I don't have a clue. He has show he is a master at dual wielding with other types of pistols. When fighting those terrorists, in episode eleven, in the anime, he showed he had master dual wielding two AMT Hardballer Longslide pistols at once. And they are based on the model nineteen eleven Colt semi-automatic pistol, which uses forty-five ACP rounds.”
“But, I have to admit, even for twenty-two caliber pistols, Chang's guns are still very cool. I love those dragon style pistol grips.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she agreed. “So do I.”
Lee stated, “I guess those Beretta seventy-twos are just his weapons of personal preference. He found those pistols fit him. And when a pistol fits you, you use that weapon. That does not mean you only use that weapon. A person can master other weapons. But, that is the weapon, or weapons, a person comes back too.”
Lee's tone of voice then turned slightly more serious, as he continued, “Also, keep in mind that Chang is tough as the rest of you. In that fight I was talking about. While Balalaika took three twenty-two caliber bullets in that fight. Chang took four nine millimeter rounds, from Balalaika pistol, in that fight. And he not only lived, but fully recovered from his wound. So, he can take as much as he can dish out. He just prefers not to get mixed up on a fight, if he can avoid it. So, don't make fun of his pistols.”
Eda thought, 'That is a good point.' She said, “Though, I already know that. Thanks for the reminder.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Eda mentioned, “Also, if you were wondering. Chang and Balalaika were both laid up for around month afterward, recovering from their wounds from that fight.”
Lee commented, “I am not surprised. Getting shot hurts. So do ricochets. As I learned the hard way, during the time loops. And I believe that the only reasons Chang and Balalaika did not kill each other in that fight, is probably because they were both going for body shots, using lower caliber weapons, and not using more destructive types of ammunition, like hollow-points. I have seen first hand how destructive a hollow-point round is on human flesh. Though, my friend did make a full recovery from that accident.”
Eda thought, 'Lee has clearly seen more than he lets on. Hollow-point wounds are not a pretty sight. Hollow-point bullets can rip out chunks of flesh out of a human body. Or, even a grazing shot with a hollow-points can cleave flesh off like a butcher's knife. And that is usually the ammo that Revy, and a few others here, that are after Lee, use.'
'Though, I know for a fact that no one here is using hollow-points, and other such ammo, right now. Because we... Well, they want capture Lee, here, alive and mostly unharmed. So, they came harm him. Which I am against, but there is not much I can do. But, let him continue on his way.'
Eda agreed, “That is my assessment, as well.”
Lee casually inquired, “Speaking of which. Are you ever going to trade in that government issued Glock, and start using a weapon with some class?”
Eda inquired, in a slightly whiny tone of voice, “What is wrong with my Glock?”
Lee flatly stated, “Like a lot of people, I don't like the safety action trigger system Glocks use. I feel that a trigger should be a single piece of metal, with the finger resting on it, ready to use. A Glock uses a lever in front of the trigger, that the finger rests on, with the level pulling into the trigger itself, before the pistol fires. And the lever is very narrow. As such, it can prevent the trigger finger from getting a proper grip, and alinement with the trigger, and thus effecting the accuracy in one's aim, in shooting.”
Eda shrugged, as she conceded, “Well, you may have a point there. But, I have gotten use to shooting with this weapon, and I prefer to use it.”
Lee complimented, “And your skills do show that, in your area of expertise.”
Eda replied, “Thank you. And by the way, what firearm do you prefer to use?”
Lee coyly said, “I have a few favorites. But, at the moment, that is not important. Still, back to the date differences.”
Eda thought, 'You don't want to let on which firearms you like. So, you change the subject. That is understandable.'
Lee continued, “Those date differences further prove that technology, fiction, and events developed, and happen, sooner in your reality, than mine, and I the Black Lagoon manga.”
“Though, if that is the case, then I guess the Soviet Union would have to have fallen earlier in your reality, than in my reality, or the Black Lagoon manga reality. Because, that is the only explanation for Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow, showing up, in Roanapur, so early.”
Eda stated, “The Soviet Union fell on December Twenty-Sixth, Nineteen Ninety.”
Lee responded, “In my reality, and I guess the Black Lagoon manga reality, the Soviet Union fell on December Twenty-Sixth, Nineteen Ninety-One. So, your reality is at least a year ahead of my reality, in that respect. And this just further backs up my point about your reality being ahead of other realities, that run parallel to your home reality. Including, the Black Lagoon manga timeline. Because if the bombing in Caracas, in the manga, happened in October nineteen ninety-seven. With the maid returning the following month in November, then all the dates would line up for the Lagoon crew coming to Roanapur, in November ninety-three.”
“Also, this means both Lagoon companies has been in Roanapur for around four years, in their respective timelines.”
Eda responded, “Interesting.” She thought, 'That is not bad figuring. And the four year figure was correct.' She requested, “Please, continue.”
Lee stated, “Anyway, given that it is likely that the Blood Trail arc happened within the following year of the Tokyo Arc.”
“And the Blood Trail arc happened in nineteen ninety-five.”
“So, the Tokyo arc happened in late December nineteen ninety-four. Now, it is safe to guess all those adventures you all had, from Rock's kidnapping, to his returning to Tokyo, and then coming back to Roanapur, happened over the course of nearly a single year. Probably, slightly less than that.”
“I hope you don't mind me quoting you, for this next part.”
Eda gave her permission, “Go ahead.” She thought, 'Beside, you're on a roll.'
Lee pointed out, “Thank you. At the beginning of Greenback Jane arc, in the anime, you stated that Rock had been with Lagoon Company for almost a year. Not a year. Not over a year. But, almost a year. Almost can be a little flexible. It such a comment, almost can be as short as three quarters of a year. So, given the Tokyo arc happened around New Years. Which in the anime timeline, at least. In the manga timeline, the Greenback Jane arc was third to last, before the Blood Trail arc. With the Tokyo arc being the second to last.”
“And given the weather in Roanapur, Thailand, was shown to be warm and tropical, all year around. One cannot go by the weather of Roanapur for what the actual seasons around most of the world are.”
“And, for that matter, Caracas, Venezuela is the same way. It is call the city of the eternal spring.”
“So, I would guess that the Greenback Jane, from your anime timeline, happen in late November, early December?”
Eda commented, “Yes. That little scheme of mine happened around that time. And even though there were a few hiccups during that time, the payout at the end, was worth it.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, was he said, “A few hiccups?... I am surprised that right after that gunfight, in the Lagoon, that Dutch didn't try to keelhaul you, for your part in the destruction of Lagoon Company's private dock.”
Eda causally replied, “From the payout, we paid for the repairs to the dock and the building. And we still had a nice profit left over. So, that eased Dutch's sense of loss. Now, please continue.”
Lee said, “No problem. And this means that Rock was kidnapped around January to March. To nail this date down further, I would say that Rock's kidnapping happened in late February. I say this because the first episode showed that it was still snowing in Tokyo. So, it was likely not in March. And most corporate fiscal quarterly reports, during that time, happen in March.”
“Asahi Industries was likely selling nuclear secrets in February, to get some quick cash to help gin up their quarterly earning report.”
Eda complimented, with admiration in her tone of voice, “Very good. And very accurate. With solid logic backing up almost all points. Now, the second question.”
Lee stated, “The second question is simple. Using the information I used to answer first question. In the first episode of Black Lagoon, when they are at the Yellowflag bar, Benny mentioned he had been with Dutch and Revy for two years. They saved Benny in Florida. So, they had yet to come to Roanapur. Revy was probably on the run. Though, I am not sure how Dutch and the Lagoon PT boat ties into the beginning of the situation. But, I would bet that Revy met Dutch, between New York City, where Revy is from, and Florida, where Benny was from, before Dutch and Revy both met Benny.”
“Anyway, since it was early ninety-four when Benny made the two years comment, and you confirmation of the dates. It is a good guess that Benny was rescued around late September, to early October, nineteen ninety-one, with them showing up Roanapur a month, or so, later. After Benny joined them. They were probably fleeing from the U.S. law enforcement, and Thailand would be almost as far as one can go, by sea, to run from the U.S.”
Eda stated, “I'm impressed.”
Lee admitted, “Thank you. Though, I have no idea why they picked Roanapur. Nor, how they even heard about the city.”
Eda commented, “From what Revy told me, it is a long story. And it involves a mexican and a lawyer.”
Lee guessed, “And gunfight in a bar?”
Eda reacted with a bit of surprise, as she inquired, “How did you know?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, in a casual tone of voice, “With Revy, there is always a gunfight in a bar, or an establishment with alcohol, in some way.”
Eda laughed for a few seconds. She then smiled, as she said, “That is true. I may tell you that story someday. If you survive.”
Lee stated, “I will consider it an incentive to continue living. And I look forward to you telling me that tale, someday. Now, onto the third question. If those two were not doing it in the tail of the Tokyo arc, like you guessed. They started doing it soon after. In the eleven months between the Tokyo arc and the Blood Trail arc. And the reason I think this is that Revy is a very, very private person. And by the Blood Trail arc, the only person she let get really, really close to her, is Rock.”
“Also, Rock has his own hang ups, as well.”
“You see this in the second episode of the Blood Trail arc, when Rock was in Revy's bedroom, with Revy. The scene starts with them talking, with Rock sitting on the bed, fully dress, and Revy wearing only white t-shirt and pink sweat pants. She is doing upside down abdominal crunches, while hanging from the back of her knee, on a metal bar.”
“When Revy gets finished with the exercises, she heads to take a shower in her personal bathroom. Now, if you listen closely, you hear her open the door, but you do not hear her close the door, because she does not close it. Instead, she turns on the shower, and the two of them continue talking. And the next scene shows Revy, naked in the shower.”
Eda smirked, as she interrupted, “I bet you got a hard-on from that scene.”
Lee honestly answered, “Nope. Nor, did I get aroused by the shower scene with Roberta.”
Eda asked, “Why not? Even I admit they have hot bodies.”
Lee pointed out, “Yes. They have hot bodies, but they are also crazy chicks. While I have never dated any. I have known crazy chicks in my personal life, long before I had even heard of the Black Lagoon series. And I have seen them emotionally burn some of my friends and family.”
Eda thought, 'So, River was correct. And I believe you mentioned that in your big conversation a little while ago. But, let's confirm that in person.'
Eda inquired, “So, knowing crazy chicks in real life let you move beyond their hotness, and allowed you to write, using their personalities?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Eda thought, 'That makes sense. And that explains why there are only a few sex scenes in your stories. And the only direct sex scenes in your stories which were required for the plot. Though...' She questioned, “What about me?”
Lee answered, “Eda, you are sane. And I find sanity very attractive in women. It is high on my list of wants when I meet a woman.”
Eda questioned, “So, that is why you did not mind going on a date, and sleeping with me?”
Lee brazenly admitted, “Of course. You are intelligent. You are nice. You are sexy. And you are sane. Don't get me wrong. You are as dangerous as your friends. But, you are sane.”
Eda replied, “Thank you.”
Lee stated, “You are welcome.”
Eda commented, “Still, I am sure that is a disappointment for River.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he pointed out, “Actually, after spending time with River, as both Sam, and herself, I think River has gone back to being sane. Or, so close to being sane that it does not matter for me.”
Eda began, “You mean you...” She immediately stopped herself from saying anything more.
Lee asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What?”
Instead of answering Lee, Eda started laughing, as she thought, 'It is so obvious to everyone else. But, the two of them don't realize it. Those two do have some blind spots of their own.'
As Eda slowly stopped laughing, Lee continued, “Anyway, as Rock and Revy continued their conversation, Rock brings up a conversation they had in Tokyo, about how Revy consider herself a gun. Rock points out that then he would be the bullet to her gun.”
“Then, Revy came out of the shower, and walked back into her bedroom, in front of Rock, while wearing only black, bikini panties, and a white towel over her shoulder, which was draped down, around her neck, and cover her chest, to cover her breasts.”
“Now, this is the meat of the reason I think they already did it. And they had done it for some time. It was the ease at which they expressed in their body languages that says it all.”
“Revy, for all her privacy issues, was completely comfortable in having Rock possibly seeing her naked.”
“And Rock... Well, in episode seven, Calm Down Two Men. The episode that introduced you and Yolanda, when Rock was clearly flustered when they went to Rowan's Jackpot, and Rock had to be in the presence of half naked women. Yet, in the shower scene with Revy, he is completely fine, and relaxed, at looking Revy, whom is half naked.”
“Keep in mind, from Rock's point of view, Revy is a woman that has shot at him, with killing intent, more than once, when they first met. This is not a woman one would want to knowingly pissed off. Which makes my situation even worse.”
Eda giggled, as she agreed, “No arguments there.”
Lee said, “Anyway, I digress. Hell, in that scene, Rock even sneaks a look at Revy's ass, as she bent over, to get a bottle of water out of her fridge.”
Eda commented, in a mischievous tone of voice, “That little perv.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he went on to say, “I know. You all thought that Rock was this up tight, straight arrow. He wasn't. And she still isn't. Rock just needed someone lead him down the garden path. To tempted him to taste the forbidden fruit. And Revy was the perfect Eve to do it.”
Eda could not helpd but smile, as she playfully replied, “You are honestly scaring me with logic.”
Lee realized the tone of Eda's voice was playful. He casually said, in a halfhearted tone of voice, “I sometimes scare myself.” He continued, in a slightly more serious tone of voice, “And it gets better. That scene has several layers. And not just in their body language. As they continue their conversation, back in her bedroom, Revy started to ask what type of bullet Rock would be. A full metal jacket? A hollow point? A safety slug? Revy settles with Rock being some type of silver bullet. An expensive type of bullet, that no one knows how it is going to be use. Then, after she finishes her jug of water, she states they are out of water. And she asked him to go get some more downstairs, at a vending machine.”
“In the next scene, Rock is show getting some water for Revy. Showing that he does care for her. Revy walks up, and gives Rock one of her hollow point bullets. And they then leave the building.”
“Now, given Revy's privacy issues, she is not the type that openly show affection. So, that is why they keep their relationship a secret. But, their relationship had obviously been going on a while, because it seems that everyone they know has figured out what they are doing in private. Even in the Blood Trail arc, the morning after Fabiola wrecked the Yellowflag bar, when Rock talked to Bao, without Revy being present. Bao asked Rock why Revy was not with him. And Bao called Rock out on his relationship with Revy. With Rock playing dumb to Bao's comments.”
“Also, there was some sexual undertones during their conversation in Revy's bedroom.”
Eda asked, “What sexual undertones? I can see the undertones of their body language, but not in their conversation.”
Lee grinned mischievously, as he stated, “Think about about they said in their conversation. Revy considers herself the gun, and by giving Rock that bullet, she agreed with Rock that she thinks of him as a bullet. And what do you do with a bullet. You put a bullet into a gun. She was saying she wanted the most expensive bullet put inside her. And she thought that Rock was that bullet. In other words, Revy's form of foreplay is talking about guns and ammo.”
While Eda realized what Lee was saying, she started laughing, for several seconds. Meanwhile, Lee remained silent.
As Eda calmed down, she said, “That makes so much sense.”
Lee said, “And it was foreplay both ways. In the middle of that the gun and bullet conversation, Rock was talking needing a gun to ignite gunpowder, meaning igniting him. And in response, Revy saying, quietly, to herself. Come on babe. Light my fire. When Rock asked what she was saying. She stated she was just quoting a line from a song by, The Doors. Which is likely where she got the line from. But, she clearly was thinking of Rock lighting her own inner fire.”
Eda laughed some more.
As Eda calmed down, again, Lee went onto say, “So, they both reached a point where they know how to do foreplay with each other, without others realizing it. Also, on a side note, the scene right after the shower, where Revy is walking to the refrigerator, to get a bottle of water, her white towel, which is drape over her breast, comes slightly off, showing the inner half of her left nipple being shown on screen. She has dark areolae and nipples.”
Eda laughed some more. As she calmed down for a third time in a row, she commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, “I knew that. I have seen her nude before. A few times. But, I didn't realize the audience knew that, as well.”
Lee continued smiling mischievously, as he stated, “As you said. I have an eye for detail.”
Eda complimented, “That you do. You are practically like Sherlock Holmes. Or, James Moriarty.”
Lee commented, “I am more like Holmes, than Moriarty. Because Moriarty was a more naturally charming person. While, Holmes was socially awkward, like I was. I had to develop my charm from hard work and experience. And I better be like them, considering I spent over two decades in that time loop, learning to read people. To get to know how to make them react the way I want them to react.”
“I learned a lot, then. And not just skills from the girls, and other people. But, also from books in Plata Podrido's library. Which was well stocked with information. And I had access to the internet. Anyway, I try to model some of myself, after the Robert Downey Junior version of Sherlock Holmes, in the movies he made about that character.”
Eda asked, “Are those the Sherlock Holmes movies that Akira talked about you, her, Natsuru, and Ranma watched?”
Lee replied, “Yes. And I think you would enjoy watching them.”
Eda agreed, “I think I would to. And I will have to watch them sometime.”
Lee requested, “If I survive all this, please let me know how you liked them.”
Eda replied, “I will.”
Lee commented, “Anyway, it seems that a lot happened in the gaps in the original series, and even in the stories I wrote.”
Eda casually stated, “Oh. A lot did happen. In both cases.”
Lee inquired, “Such as the time, before Rock came onto the scene. When Chin tricked Lagoon company into delivering, as Dutch put it, junk, to the New People's Army, the armed wing of the communist party of the Philippines? Then, there is that throw away line by Revy, at the end of episode twelve. Where she said her contacts in the chopper were late, again. Meaning that adventure was not the first time Lagoon Company did a job for Uncle Sam.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she stated, “Oh. Those are just the tip of the iceberg. And from what Revy told me, that junk sale was quite and adventure for the Lagoon crew. Though, I would prefer not to talk about the second example you pointed out.”
Lee returned Eda's smile, as he replied, “I bet that junk sale was. And I understand why you do not want to discuss the other incident. But, I would not be surprised if you were involved in that adventure, as well.”
Eda offered, in a casual tone of voice, “Perhaps you are right. And I may well tell you about all that incidents, and adventures, sometime.”
Lee thought, 'The incident she does not want to talk about is not important.' He responded, “I look forward to it. That gives me more reasons to want to survive this incident... Well, I better get going.”
Eda stated, “Good luck.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee then ran passed Eda, and down the hallway.
As Eda watch Lee disappear around the corner. She warmly smiled, as she thought, 'That man is likely one of the most craziest people in the multiverse. And nicest... And I slept with with him... That is something to gloat about... And I think I won't tell the others about my little meeting with him, just now.'
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee found himself in another series of storage rooms, one after another, with freight boxes stacked on top of each other, with tables and chairs, in various positions, and locations, in the various rooms.
As Lee made his way through the room, he thought, with concern, 'I wasted to much time talking to Janet. And then Eda. That is probably going cost me. Though, there is nothing I can do about it. Now, onto the matter at hand. This was listed as a hallway. I see that is not the case. Not that I complaining. It just means that someone got lazy when they drew the schematics for the computer program.'
'The program was likely made after the fact, and used an old set of blueprints. Still, if the rest of the plans are correct, when I reach the hallway, I will go to my right. Then, the hallway dead-ends into a large indoor warehouse room. After that, head through that large room, to the stairwell on the other side, and then to the roof.'
As Lee made it to the last room, before reaching the hallway he was heading for, he suddenly heard footsteps from the hallway in front of him.
Lee immediately spin around, to his left, and put his back around the wall, beside the door. As he quietly stood there, and listened, as he mentally wondered, 'Now, who is here?'
Lee then heard the voices coming closer. He soon recognized the voices as Aeryn and Violin.
In the adjoining hallway, coming from the left side of the hallway, from the way Lee was planning on going, Violin and Aeryn where walking together, with Violin to Aeryn's left side. Both Violin and Aeryn has their pulse pistols holstered, on their gunsbelts.
As the two spouses walked together, Violin said, “I am just saying. Let's not be to hasty on this. Sure, we can kick Lee's ass for a little while. But, I don't want us to be to bloodthirsty on this, like the Lagoon family.”
Aeryn conceded, “I can see your point. I can agree that it depends on how Lee is captured. That we could show leniency if Lee was willing to turn himself in.”
On the other side of the room, the couple were approaching, Lee thought, 'Fat chance that is happening.'
Violin replied, “I can go along with that. The problem is the others will not be so kind.”
Lee thought, 'And that is the problem.'
Aeryn said, “Unfortunately, that is true.”
By then, the two spouses were right on the other side of the entrance to the room Lee was in. Lee than five feet from Lee. With only the wall between them.
Lee thought, 'Now, how am I going to deal with this... I cannot just let them continue walking. They are walking in the direction I need to go. Either down the hallway, or into the room, where I am at. And that there is nothing on the ceiling to grip, to try that ninja ceiling trick, like I did on Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru.... Damn, I am still surprised that I was able to pull that trick on those three, or all people... So, I need to get them to do something else, without getting caught...'
Lee's lips curled into a wicked grin, as he had an idea. He continued thoughts, 'That might work. And I am close enough, that my voice should carry, as if nothing was wrong. And Violin would get the joke... And likely Aeryn, as well.
Lee then rolled up his the sleeve he had his digital wrist watch was on.
(_)
On the other side of the wall, in the hallway, Aeryn and Violin came came to a stop, in front of the open door to the storage room Lee was inside of.
Both woman turned to face the entrance, as Violin inquired, “So, which way should we go. Continue down the hallway? Or, go into these adjoining storage rooms?”
Aeryn commented, “Which ever way we go, we are not splitting up.”
Violin replied, “Agreed.”
Aeryn said, “Well, from the way Lee has been heading, I would guess he is coming from the adjoining storage rooms.”
Just then, Lee turned to face them, with him being five feet from the entrance to the hallway, and ten feet from the two women.
Lee smiled, as he complimented, “And you would be correct, Aeryn.”
As both women saw Lee, across the doorway into another room, they cracked a grin. Violin commented, “Well, speak of the devil.”
Lee lips curled into a smirk, as he inquired, “Truly. So girls. The question is. Do you really think this is the real me?”
Violin responded, “Of course.”
Both women then rushed at Lee, passed the door way. But, when they both reached Lee, they tried to grab him only find they were no touching anything, as they passed through the hologram, and fell to the floor, due to them overcompensating forward, on their balance, in their haste to capture Lee.
While hiding against the wall, to the couple's right side, Lee swiftly move to his left and back into the hallway, without him taking his eyes off the couple.
He stood made a few feet into the hallway the two women had previously come into the room front.
Lee quickly turned off the hologram. He continued smirking, as he looked a the two women on the floor. He said, “It isn't.”
While laying on the floor, Aeryn and Violin turned over, onto their backs, just in time to see Lee pull out his key card. He then swiped all the panel, on the hallway side of the door.
The two women quickly jumped up, and rush for the closing steel door, but the door completely closed before they reached it.
Lee pocketed his key card, as he began to walk away from the door, and towards his next destination. He thought, 'That was too easy.'
Suddenly, Lee heard a clank. He immediately stopped in his tracks, as he turned around and he saw that the thick steel door had a nice bulge in it, into the room, at chest level, facing him. The bulge looked like fist, using super-strength, had literally punched the door from the room, on the other side of the door. Which was exactly what had happened.
As second later, he heard a punch against the thick, steal door, as he saw an outward dent in the door.
Lee thought, 'Yep. Almost forgot. Violin has super-strength. Though, that door won't hold for long. I wrote in book four that Violin was strong enough to rip doors like this, out of the wall. It is best I get out of here before they get through. But, by leaving the other door to the room, open, there is a good chance they will try to double back to here, instead of trying to tear the door apart to get to me. Either way, will take them a few minutes, at most. So, I better get moving.'
Lee then turned, as he ran down the hallway, away from the married couple that was after him, and towards his intended destination.
(_)
On the other side of the door, in the storage room, Violin used her left hand to rub her right fist, after she made the second dent in the door. While her hand was sore, it was not seriously injured.
Violin muttered, “I forgot how hard steel can be And I cannot believe Lee fooled me like that.”
Aeryn looked over at Violin, as she commented, “Don't be hard yourself because you are upset.”
Violin turned to Aeryn, as she stated, “You are right, honey. I just cannot believe Lee used my genre savviness against me.”
Aeryn replied, “Violin, it was bound to happen eventually.” With her right hand, she motioned towards the open door, behind them. She then turned back to Violin, as she commented, “Besides, Lee left the other door open.”
Violin looked over at the open doorway, as she responded, “Yes. He likely did that so, we would try to go around, and waste time. Still, it is better than risking harm to my fingers in opening this closed door.”
Aeryn said, “I agree. And as I was going to say, before Lee interrupted us. I don't care if we personally capture, Lee. As long as we get our measure of revenge, in the end. Besides. Why dirty our hands, when the others will do it for us?”
Violin looked over at her wife. She grinned, as she complimented, “Now, that is the intelligent woman I married.”
Aeryn gave Violin a warm smile, as the two women then walked out the open door, that Lee left for them.
(_)
A few minutes later, as Lee expected, Lee briskly made his way through through the hallway, to where the hallway opened up into a very large warehouse.
As Lee walked into warehouse of the building, he stopped to look at the large, vast room in front of him.
There was plenty of canned ceiling lights, from the top of the room, to see with. And while there were several areas of stacked crates, given the light was shining down from several directions, there were very few darkened areas in the room.
Lee saw that the huge warehouse complex was at least a three hundred yards long, from the wall Lee stood by, to the other end of the room. And the room was around a three hundred yards wide.
There were several types of square crates, in various sizes, were stacked together, in tight rows, going both ways, with gaps of around three or four feet, every twenty feet, or so.
The crates were stacked mostly in eight feet high rows.
Lee thought, 'I wonder how they get this out of here?'
Lee looked up, at the very high ceiling, which was around forty feet high. He saw that the ceiling was a large, metal doors, the left up, opening the room to the open sky. There were even loading chains hanging from the ceiling and a steel catwalk running around the room, at about thirty feet off the ground.
Lee thought, “So, they transport this cargo from the roof. That figures.'
Lee then looked back in front of him, as he cautiously thought, 'Now, if I remember the floor plans right, and if Eda is right, the doors to the stairwell I am looking for are on the other sides of the room...” He then continued his thoughts, with some concern, 'And this is a lot of room to cover out in the open. I might as well pull out a deck of cards.'
Lee pulled out a deck of playing cards.
As he slid the cards out of its cardboard box with his right hand, he put the empty card back into the pocket he had it in, with his left hand.
Lee thought, 'It is best I not discard anything, as a way to avoid leaving a trail for the other to follow.'
Lee then swapped hands, to where the deck was in his left palm. He then pulled the top card between the right index and middle fingers.
As Lee continued to walk towards the creates, he mentally reflected, 'Also, as tempting as it is to try to just go on top of the creates and just on top. But, then I would be completely exposed, and a sitting duck... No. It is better if I just try my hand at making my way through the maze. And if need be. If I hit a dead end, I can quickly go on top, cross the dead end, and duck back into the maze.'
Next, Lee slowly made his way through the labyrinth of crates, which were stacked next to each other, to be able eight feet high, across the area, for the most part. With gaps in a grid pattern, both ways. Though, some of the gaps were to narrow to walk through, creating a maze for Lee to walk through.
A few minutes later, the path he was on, dead ended to where he had to turn to his left.
As he cautiously walked, he soon found himself in a small, open space, that was forty feet, by forty-feet. With the crate walls being eight feet high, in all direction.
As Lee looked to his right, he saw one of the last people in existence, he wanted to meet at the moment.
Forty feet away, coming from a pathway that was parallel with him, was Revy, whom was walking in the same directly as him.
And Lee also saw that Revy was holding her pistols, and she was looking back at him.
Revy yelled, with fury in her tone of voice, “Lee!” She the brought her weapons to bare, at Lee, as she started firing her cutlasses at him.
At the same time, Lee quickly threw card after card at her.
All the while, both of them were running parallel with each other, as they soon found cover behind the crates.
Neither of them had hit the other.
From behind her cover, which was a three feet narrow gap, Revy screamed, “You know, Lee! As tempting as it is to give you!... As you put it!... Lead fever! I am not going to kill you! First, I am going to torture you. Then, I am going to kill you!”
As Lee found himself behind his own cover, which was a five feet wide gap, he thought, with worry, 'I think I pissed her off, too much. If that is even possible.' He yelled back, “I freely admit, propositioning you like that was a big mistake!”
Revy verbally shot back, “You are not helping yourself!”
Lee looked around, and in front of him, saw some crates leading up to the top of the larger crates, going towards where Revy was.
Lee thought, 'Considering the standard magazine for a semi-automatic Beretta nine-two FS pistol is fifteen rounds. Not factoring in one round in the chamber. Though, outside of combat, Revy prefers to keep her pistol chambers empty. And she has two such pistols in her hand. That means she has thirty rounds between both pistols. That is not counting any spare loaded magazines she has on her person. This means, from the few rounds she shot at me, she is still nowhere near out of ammo, let alone does she need reload her weapons with fresh magazines.'
'As such, my only chance is to get her to monolog. While I pulled a fast on her.'
Lee lips curled into a wicked grin, as he continued his thoughts, 'And she won't even see it coming.'
Lee requested, in a loud, strong tone of voice, “Well Revy, how about you give me a preview of what you have in mind for me!”
(_)
Nearby, behind the crates Revy was taking cover from, the redhead screamed, in rage, “With pleasure! First, I am going to shoot you! Don't worry! It wouldn't kill you! It will just hurt a lot! After you recover, what comes next will be even worse!”
“How did that Pinhead quote go?! Ah yes! We have such delights to show you, Lee! Such as, we will pull out some packets of instant spring of girl, and you are going to find out how much I like to plow someone's ass, first hand! Then, we will do the front! Then, the back again! You will even find out how painful it is to be plowed from the front while dry! What do you say about that, Lee?!... Lee?!”
Revy then heard foot steps coming near her, from above, in the direction Lee was in.
A second later, she looked up just in time to see Lee jumping over her, from crate stack to crate stack, while he looked down at her.
As Lee passed over her, he threw three playing cards in quick succession, towards her.
Revy realized she did not have time to point her weapons as Lee, let along fire.
Instead, Revy was forced to dive for cover, as she yelled, “Damn it!”
(_)
On top of the create, while heading away from Revy, Lee continued running, and jumping, along the flat crates piles, as he thought, 'That bought me exactly ten seconds. It will take Revy the first two seconds to lean up. The next two seconds to check herself, to find she is okay, with her quickly realizing I threw those cards wide. The next two to stand up. The two after that to figure out the best way to quickly get on top of the crates. And the last two for her to use her enhanced strength to jump the eight feet it takes, in one leap, and land on her feet on top. But, by the sixth second, I will have harmlessly dropped back down into the labyrinth of crates, and be nowhere to be seen, by the time she is on top of the crates.'
As Lee ducked near a pile small of crates, with a small cubby hole, in a four foot gap between the large crate. Lee hide in the cubby hole from Revy, as he heard Revy yell, “Lee! Where are you?!”
Lee thought, 'It is so tempting to crack a scooby joke right now.'
Lee then heard Revy running, and jumping, from crate pile to crate pile. She quickly passed over him, without her even noticing him. From the sounds of her footsteps, Lee could tell that she was heading to the left side of the room.
Half a minute later, Lee's precognition told him it was safe to move. He stood back up, and he started between one of the rows the crate piles crated, as he headed in the right side of the room, in the opposite direction to the direction that Revy ran in.
As Lee slowly walked, with his cards in his hand, and at the ready, he thought, with mild relief, 'Fortunately, Revy is heading for the far left side of the warehouse. I will head for the right side, while staying between the crates. And I will just go around her.'
Lee then slowly made his way to the right side of the room.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee had been walking between the crates, from row to row, going at a diagonal direction to the wall he was needed to get too.
Suddenly, his precognition screamed for him to duck.
Lee did so, just in time to avoid a swing from behind.
Lee leaned up, and turned around. He saw Rock holding a baseball bat with both her hand, a few feet away from him.
Lee quickly backed up from Rock, he complimented, “A baseball bat. Easy to use. And piratical. Good choice, Rock.”
Rock flatly replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then held up the playing card between the fingers of his right hand, as he pointed out, “But, I still got range on you.”
Rock let go of her baseball bat, from her right hand, allowing her left hand to hold it. She then held out her right forearm towards Lee, as her sonic shotgun slipped out of its housing, in gambler's jig, under her sleeve and into her right hand. She smirked, as she rhetorically stated, “Are you so sure?”
Lee conceded, “Point taken. But, if you fire that thing at me, at this range. You are going to be cleaning me up from the walls with a sponge. And besides, bloodstains are very hard to get out of clothing.”
Rock frowned, as she deadpanned, “Yea. I am reminded of that fact, a few days, every month.”
Rock's comment caught Lee off guard. Lee replied, in a sheepish tone of voice, “Ahhh... I don't think a simple apology is going to work here?”
Rock flatly stated, “No.”
Rock dropped her baseball bat, as she used her left hand to grab her radio, from her belt. She held the radio up to her mouth. She then said into it, “Revy, are you there?”
On the other end of the radio, Revy replied, “Yea, Rock. What is it?”
Rock answered, “I have Lee. We are on the east side of the warehouse, near the middle of the room.”
Over the radio, Revy cursed, “Damn! I am on the west side of the warehouse. It is going to take me a few minutes to get to you.”
Lee realized he had no time to plan in detail, as he was carefully watched Rock's eyes.
When Lee saw Rock's eyes look away and too the radio, Lee quickly drop all but one of the cards in his left hand. With the last card between his left index and middle fingers, like the card in the fingers of his right hand.
Lee then swiftly threw both cards at Rock's hands.
They brushed against the outside of her hands, the sting of the cuts caused Rock to drop both her sonic shotgun, and her radio. The sonic shotgun did not misfire as it hit the floor.
Lee quickly turned, and ran up, a pile of crates to the top the crate stacks, towards the stairwell he was heading for, in the north section of the warehouse.
As Lee ran as fast as he couple, he jumped over the gaps in the crate stacks, while he thought, 'I hate platforming. And I got twelve seconds until Rock will starting running after me. She will catch me in no time, unless I run full out.'
'The first two seconds she deals with the stings on her hands. The next two seconds she realizes they are just paper cuts. The next four seconds she quickly collects her sonic shotgun and radio. Unlike Revy, Rock is too cautious to just jump onto the crates, even though she can. Instead, she will follow me up the pile, that will eat another four seconds.'
'She is too smart for me to try to pull the hiding between the crates trick on her. And she will be calling for help with the radio in her left hand, while taking aim with her sonic shotgun in her right hand. With her trying to find something in my path to shoot at, that will slow me down, but not seriously harm me. And because of all this, I need to hear what she is saying on the radio.'
As Lee ran, he used his left hand to turned on his radio, that was clipped the left side of his belt.
Lee also turned up the volume, so he could comfortably hear the radio.
Lee heard Rock say, through the radio, “I am chasing, Lee. We are in the twenty-second floor of the building we lost him in. We are in a large warehouse room, heading toward the center stairwell, of the building, inside a very large warehouse.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that confirms she is not right behind me. If I look behind myself, doing so will cause me to slow down. And I need to go as fast as possibility. Unfortunately, I can only do this for another two minutes, before I completely give out. But, I think that is enough time to get to the stairwell, lock the doors behind me, and escape to the roof.'
As Lee ran, he saw that there were various piles of crates he was passing by. And in the corner of his left eye, he saw Revy in the distance, running to him, while firing her pistols at him.
But, Lee was moving to fast, jumping to randomly, and the shots were far to hit him.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'This is just getting better and better.'
Lee then heard Akira say, over the radio, “We are all converging on your location. Natsuru, Ranma, and I are coming up that stairwell. We will be on the north end of the room, waiting for him, in less than a minute.”
Rock replied, “Good. I will flush him to you.”
Lee continued to run, while he thought, with worry, 'Crap! That was my only escape plan.” He then saw another, nearby door on the north wall part of the catwalk, in front of him. He also saw some crated and hung chains in his path. He mentally realized, 'That door likely also leads directly to the stairwell. So, it will have to do. And I think I have a path to get to it.'
Lee did not need to look behind him to realize that Rock was slowly gaining on him.
Just as Lee passed by a pile of crates to his left side, his precognition screamed for him to dodge away from the pile.
He did so, and he jumped to his right side, just in time to avoid the crates, as Rock shot her sonic shotgun at the crates, to indirectly hit him, without killing him.
Fortunately, Lee was able to continue running, without slowing down. As he ran, in front of him, to right side, he saw a large sit smaller crated leading up eighteen feet more in height from the crates he was one. With the steps of the crates facing him.
Lee grimly thought, 'Here is my path. And I hate heights.'
Lee then quickly began stepping up the small crates, to the top, which was a row of crates about fifty feet in length, four feet in width, and about twenty feet from the below row of crate, and about twenty-eight feet from the floor.
Beside him, Lee saw a chain, with a large metal hook on bottom end, and on the top end it was attached to a wheeled track on the ceiling that went all the way to the north end of the wall.
Lee quickly stopped, so he could swiftly test the chain. He quickly realized that it was free floating along the track.
Lee then looked in the distance. About twenty feet from where the crates stopped was the steel catwalk above the floor, and an open door to the stairwell was right in front of him, on the other side of the steel catwalk railing.
Lee quickly gripped the chain firmly with both hands, as he starting running.
As he ran, he was building up inertia with the chain on the track.
Nearby, several yards behind him, on the bottom level of crates, Rock saw what Lee was doing. She fired at the supporting crates beneath Lee.
On top of the high stack of crates, Lee continued running towards the catwalk, as the crates started to give way from underneath him. At the last second, Lee pushed off the last crate in the row. The crates below him gave way, while he gripped the chain with both hands, for his dear life, as the inertia he had built up caused the wheels on the track of the chain to continue rolling.
As Lee passed over the floor far below, he saw Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru standing there, looking up at him. While they, and Rock, were standing far enough way from the collapsing crates, not to be harmed by them.
As Lee neared the railing bars to the catwalk, he thought, 'I am only going to have seconds to do this.'
When he hit the railing bars of the steel catwalk, he quickly planted his feet on the bottom bars, to support himself, while he swiftly moved his left hand, from the chain, to the top bar. Then his right hand to the top bar, with him swiftly pulled himself fulling to the steel bars, and away from the dangling chain.
Lee then used his left foot to step on the middle bar, as he swung his right leg and foot over and onto the floor of the catwalk. The motion carried his left leg over the railing as well.
The moment his feet both hit the floor of the catwalk, he immediately did a running crawl for the stairwell door, as he pulled out his key card.
Just as he made it into the stairwell, he turned around. He saw that both Ranma and Natsuru has used their superhuman strength to jump up to where the bottom of their feet were over the top railing over the catwalk.
They were still in mid jump, as Lee swiftly reached up and swiped the electronic lock on the panel, on the stairwell side of the door. The steel door quickly started to slide closed.
The door closed complete, just when Ranma and Natsuru landed onto the catwalk floor, and they rushed for the door.
Lee didn't dare sigh in relief. He kept the key card in his left hand, as he swiftly stood up, and started running up the staircase, which wound up in a clockwise motion, with the outside of the steps being to his right. While he ran up the staircase, he used right hand to grip the outer railing to his right side, to haul himself faster up the steps.
Lee looked up, and he saw that he was only a few flights to the top of the building.
Lee thought, 'Almost there. I am so thankful that I never had Ranma learn the breaking point technique, or that door would not slow her down. Unlike the hallway I locked them in before. There is enough room on the other side of this door, for the others to get out of the blast range of the breaking point.'
'Though, it is only a matter of several seconds before the two of them pool their abilities to get through the door. But, those are the precious seconds that I need. Still, Akira is probably now in the stairwell chasing after me, a few flights below me. I cannot stop now and rest. Not when I am almost to the top.'
In stairwell, two levels beneath him, Lee heard Akira yell, “Surrender, Lee! You cannot escape!”
Lee continued forward, as he turned his had to his left, down the empty space in the center of the stairwell. He shouted back, with passion in his voice, “I can try!” He then turned back to look in front of himself, as he made his way up the staircase.
Lee could hear Akira gaining on him. But, he finally made it to the roof door.
Fortunately, it was shut, and the red light on the panel showed the door was locked.
Lee thought, 'Good. If the door is locked, that means it is less likely anyone up on this roof. But, now, I just need to put that door between me and Akira.'
Lee quickly used the key card in his right hand to open the electronic lock.
The door slid up.
Lee then quickly made his way out, onto the roof, as he turned around, and slid his key card the electronic lock panel, on the outside of the door.
Lee saw Akira make her up the last flight of stairs, as the door slid closed, and locked itself, behind him.
Lee could hear Akira banging against the other side of the door in frustration.
Lee pocketed the key card, as he took a moment to get a handle of his surrounds, while taking a few much needed breaths of air.
Fortunately, like the other roofs of the factory complex, there were several flood lights, directed at several angles on the roof, that provided plenty of light to see.
Lee looked around, as he thought, 'If I remember the roof design correctly, I just need to go to the southeast side of the roof to escape.'
Lee quickly got his bearings, as turned in a specific direction. He mentally reflected, 'Which should be this way. Also, the way I am going is away from ceiling doors to the warehouse I just escaped from. Finally, I need to be mindful of Balalaika and B. Both of them might see me and shoot me with their sniper rifles. But, from the look of things, I have plenty of cover, to protect me from their sights.'
By then, Lee has gotten his second wind, as he started to briskly walk towards the nearest cover he saw, in the direction he was heading. Most of the cover was ventilation equipment, water systems equipment, and piping for the ventilation and water systems.
Lee was careful to duck against the large air conditioning tubes, ventilation ducks, and a few huge water tanks that littered the roof, while making his way across the roof, as quickly, and quietly, as possible.
But, as Lee did this, a horrible thought occurred to him, 'This is a perfect place for an ambush. Best get out another deck of cards.'
Lee pulled out another deck of cards, taking the cards out of the box, pocketing the empty box, and finally placing the loose cards into his left hand.
Lee then continued to carefully, though quickly, make his way through the area, at a brisk, walking pace.
(_)
At that second, on the other side of the door, at the stop of the stairwell, Akira looked down the flights of stairs, to see that Ranma, Natsuru, Rock, and Revy, were heading up the stairwell, to her.
Akira thought, 'Ranma and Natsuru must of jumped back down to the floor, and taken that entrance into the stairwell, that I used. With Rock and Revy. Now, while I don't want to see Lee harmed. He is making it very difficult not to harm him, as we try to catch him.'
'And I need to see if I can get someone stop, Lee, before he makes it to where ever he is going, on the roof. And I know just the two women to ask.'
Akira pulled out her radio. She said into the radio, “Balalaika. B. Lee is on the roof of the building we tracked him to. Do either of you see him?”
(_)
On her perch, midway up on a communications tower, Balalaika held her radio with her left hand, as she used her right hand to hold the rifle, while keeping Lee in her sights. Balalaika calmly answered, into her radio, in english, “Affirmative.”
Balalaika thought, 'It does not matter if Lee is listening, or not. We have him. Him just listening to us, will heighten the chance of his surrender.'
Over the radio, B said, in english, “I have him in my sights. But, he is ducking in and out of cover too often, for me to get a clean shot.”
Balalaika thought, 'I see that B has the same thoughts as I do.' She stated, “Same here. Though, we want him alive.”
B suggested, “We could try to pin him down. But, with his precognition, and the cover, we could lose track of him on the roof.”
Balalaika conceded, “You may have a point.” She then saw something in her sights, in the distance from Lee. She smirked, as she continued, “And I do not think we will have to. B, do you see what I see?
B answered, “Yes. Let us just watch the fun unfold.”
Over the radio, Akira asked, “What fun?”
Balalaika inquired, with a bit of excitement in her voice, “You'll see, as soon as Natsuru gets that door to the roof open. Speaking of which, how long will it take her get that door open?”
On the radio, Akira answered, “It is solid steel door. I would say a few minutes. Like that last steel door she had to open by force. Natsuru is to not strong enough to just ripped open the door. Instead, she uses her fire abilities to warm the metal, by placing her hands on the metal. That way, she does not risk burning us. When the metal gets pliable, she just uses her super-strength to push the door out of the way.”
Balalaika complimented, “That is wise use of ones abilities. I will see you in a few minutes.”
On the radio, Akira said, “I look forward to it.”
Balalaika, then put away her radio, with her left hand. She then placed her left hand on the fore-end of her Dragunov sniper rifle, to steady it. While she looked through her PSO-1 scope, at the fun that was about to happen to Lee.
(_)
At the moment, inside the building to the northwest of the building where Lee was on the roof of, inside the security room of the main center of the factory complex, Benny was sitting in a chair, at the desk in the room, as she just finished fixing and putting the computer mouse back together.
Dutch was standing near Benny. Dutch noticed this, as she asked, “Got it?”
Benny began using the mouse, and she found it was back in working order. She then not looked up at Dutch, as she smirked. She said, in an excited tone of voice, “Yes. Now, let's find the fucker.”
Dutch agreed, “And we already know where to start. The roof on the building southeast of here.”
Benny replied, “Exactly.”
Benny used the computer mouse to click two icons on the computer screen. The first was the program for the a schematics map, to find the exact name building Lee was on.
The second icon she clicked was for the camera security system. After, Benny had the name for the building, it was a matter of a few seconds, before Benny pulled up a nearby camera, that showed where Lee was at.
Benny flatly stated, “Found him.”
Dutch looked over at the computer monitor, as she said, “Yep. That's him. Good job.”
Benny continued looking at the monitor as well, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Dutch commented, “To bad that we already all know where he is.”
Benny quickly put away her tools, back in their case. She looked up at Dutch, as her smirk turned into a wicked grinned. She responded, “We can still screw with his head.”
Dutch returned Benny's smile, with a smirk of her own, as she replied, “Good idea.”
Benny turned back to the computer monitor, as she picked up her radio, and punched the talk button.
(_)
On the rooftop, of the building southeast from where Benny was inside of, Lee continued making his way through the air conditioning tubes, ventilation ducks, and a few huge water tanks that littered the roof. With him using the items as cover.
As Lee did so, he found the flood lights provided plenty of light to see with.
While Lee did so, he had heard what Balalaika, B, and Akira, had said.
Lee thought, 'Okay. Balalaika and B cannot yet get a clear shot of me. As long as I duck in and out of cover. Also, Akira, and the others will not be on the roof for another few minutes. Meaning I do have a little time. Though, I wonder what Balalaika meant, by a surprised?'
'My precognition is not screaming. So, it cannot be to bad. But, it is possible I was wrong and someone came up to this roof, from another stairwell. There is not much I can do about that not. But, to continue moving forward.'
Just then, over the radio, Lee suddenly heard Benny voice say, in a childish tone of voice, “Lee, I see you.”
Lee continued walking, and staying behind cover, kept her radio clipped to the left side of her belt.
Lee thought, with amusement, 'I guess Benny finally got the computer working. I might as well congratulate her. Given the volume setting, I currently have on it. I will have no problems, leaving the radio on my waist. And I am sure the microphone will still clearly pick up my voice. So, still frees up my hands, to use my cards, at a moment's notice.'
Lee held his deck of cards in his left hand, as he used his left thumb to press the talk button the radio.
Lee lips curled into a mischievous smile, as he said, over his radio,”Congratulations Benny, on getting the security camera system working, this late in the game. But, you still cannot reach me. And it is going to take a minute, or so, for the others to bust through that roof door.”
Over the radio, Benny conceded, with a hint of excitement in her voice, “You're right. I cannot reach you.”
As Lee passed by the huge water tanks on the roof, he heard a familiar voice say, “Hi ya, Lee. I am surprised you made it this far.”
Lee heard Benny state, over the radio, in an evil tone of voice, “My kids, on the other hand, are a completely different matter.”
Suddenly, Lee looked up and saw that it was Molly, with her semi-automatic pistols in hand, with Sarah by her side, with her katana at the ready.
The two armed, blond sisters were less than thirty feet in front of him, on the roof floor.
Lee quickly put himself in as cold and emotionless state as possible, while he swiftly thought, 'Like Holmes, I mustn't let this register on an emotional level. This is the exact type of situation that the Bene Gesserit meant when they warned, fear is the mind killer. My enemies are healthier, stronger, better trained. And more experienced at this, than I am. Here, there will be no room for error. My calculations, precognition, and instincts must have precision of being within less than the exactness of an inch. Or else, I am dead. Or, worse.'
'Now, for my first, and most obvious move, in this shifting game of shadows.'
Lee did not bother to wait for introductions. Nor, to see if any of the other teenager girls would appear behind the two blond teenage women. As he swiftly turned around, and starting running away from them, down another corridor of tanks and ventilation boxes, that would take him to his next destination.
Sarah, Molly, quickly gave chase.
Over the radio, Lee heard Benny state, with wicked glee, “Go get him, girls.” Benny then started laughing manically, though her radio, for several seconds.
As Lee ran, he quickly thought, 'I didn't know Benny could laugh like that. And if those two are here, that means Kristina, Rebecca, Yukio, Mikoto, Nodoka, and Yurika, are nearby, as well. And what do I have to use against them?... Fifty-four playing cards. Fifty-two playing cards and two wild cards.'
'I will likely have to use all of them, if I want to live. And I need to make them last. I don't have time to pull out another deck. This will be a shuffle run in every sense of the term.'
'I will duck around, and flee, towards me goal. And in doing so, I will force the teenage women into a running battle. Also, I must be mindful of my cover, or Balalaika, and B will snipe me. From all the radio chatter, by them, I already know I am ducking in and out of their sights. But, given then like to be amused, they are probably going to let the kids have their fun with me, first.'
'And I must also pay attention to the piping around me. It offer me options. First, I must slow down the two most deadly at range. Molly, with her pistols, and Yukio with her machine gun. Given weight issues, Yukio will be the last, and worst one to face.'
'Now, if I am lucky, they will not all face me at once. That will increase the odds more in my favor. But, not by much. Though first, I need to remind these two, that I am not completely harmless. Six cards should do that.'
Lee continued running, as he turn around just quickly enough to throw six cards within three seconds. Three each towards Yukio and Molly, forcing the teenage adult women to back off. He then turned back to face his front, as he ran between the tanks and ventilation ducks of the roof, with him turning the various corners, while keeping track of the directions he was going.
While Lee did so, over the radio, Lee overheard Molly ordered, “Split up, and circle around him.”
Lee happily thought, 'Good. That is what I expected them to do. My plan is going better than I thought. Molly comment means they are likely all behind me. With them planning to show up behind her and Sarah, form the shows. Me turning around and running, screwed up their plans. And they should have known better. Not that I am complaining. Still they are going to out run me, and come at me, at different locations and times. Still, it will not be all at once.'
As Lee ducked around a tank, and he has just enough time, to see Mikoto was the first to jump in his way.
At the same time, Lee heard a clicking noises behind him, meaning that there was someone else behind Lee. And Lee realized who was, without looking behind himself.
While Lee continued moving towards Mikoto, he thought, 'They are likely using the high ground, to keep me from seeing them. That is why I did not see the others. They were above me. Intelligent. But, I can compensate for that, and other factors.'
'Such as, I know that Mikoto is a fire user, and an expert hand to hand specialist. She wants me an alive, and mostly unharmed. Meaning she will not use her fire. But, given she is smaller than me, she will attempt the quickest, and easiest attack to take me down, that offers the longest reach for her. That being a swift upper kick to my lower, front jaw. If done right, it would knock me down, and the worst case scenario for me would likely be a broken jaw, and a concussion to the back of my skull.'
'Given the way combat training is universally done in almost everything, she will use her right foot to attack me with. Because teachers almost always teach their students to act with their right side first, due to most people being right side dominate.'
'At the same time, the clicking noises mean that Kristina is right behind me, with the clicking being her turning on her flame throwing and freezing gauntlets. She would be more than happy to both toast me, and then she will swiftly freeze me. Leaving me with some first and second degree flash burns. While I would not have anything immediately deadly to me. The burn wounds will just hurt me to the point I will not longer be able to run.'
'But, Kristina will not knowingly harm Mikoto. If I time this right. It will be a case of two birds with one stone.'
Lee ran towards Mikoto, when he reached her, Mikoto did an upper kick with her right foot.
At the last second, Lee ducked to Mikoto's right side, causing her to miss Lee completely. But, Mikoto kick was so swift that she could not stop herself from reaching the apex of her kick over her head. This created balance issues four a second, preventing her from react to Lee, but beside her. And as Lee duck to her side, she saw Kristina in front of her.
Kristina also saw that Mikoto was literally five feet from behind Lee, as she stopped herself from using her gauntlets to fire her flames at Lee, from behind him.
As Mikoto still had one foot point upward in the air, Lee quickly his way around to the back of Mikoto, and he pushed her hard into Kristina.
Mikoto tumbled toward Kristina, falling on the brown hair girl, as both collapses to the floor, into a tangle heap.
Meanwhile, Lee turned back around, continued running away from the two teenage women. He soon turned the corner. As he did so, he thought, 'Given the time it will take for the two of them to apologize to each other, check each other for injuries, and get up, they are out of the game for at least twenty seconds. That is plenty of time for me to get away from them.'
Less than a minute later, while Lee was circling around some pipping connected to the tanks and ventilation, Nodoka had jumped down from a ventilation duck, to stand between Lee and his escape route.
As Lee quickly stopped, he looked at Nodoka and the pipes that ran along the ventilation ducks beside her.
Lee swiftly thought, 'Along with being a martial artist, Nodoka is an ice and water user. She will use her powers against me.' Lee quickly looked around, he then saw what he needed, as he continued his train of thought, ' Though, to get by her, I have to time this just right.'
Just as icy water globes formed around Nodoka's hands, and turned to ice, Lee threw eight cards at the water pipes beside her, to Lee's right side, and Nodoka's left side.
Some of them bounced off the pipes, but two cards hit, each on a different pipe, as water sprayed right in front of Nodoka.
When the unexpected water hit Nodoka's and combined with her ice powers, water suddenly turned to ice, as it hit her hands. With the water pouring more and more onto her, causing the ice to build up, and spread to her arms.
Nodoka was able to stop her ice powers from causing the water to encase her in ice. But, a good portion of her body was already weight her down. Except for her head, lower legs and feet, And she was using the rest of her concentration to keep the water pipes from spraying any more water onto her.
As Lee saw this all happen, he thought, 'I guess this level of concentration prevents her from using her abilities to turn the ice that encase most of her body into water. Still, it is best to be polite. So, as not to give her some so-called heroic resolve to bust through the ice, and capture.'
'Besides, I really want to know if she is okay. I just might have to end up surrendering, to save her life. That would suck for me. But, having her suffer would weight conscience, if I did nothing to help her.'
While Lee walked passed her, to her right side, opposite to the direction the water from the pipes sprayed on her. As he moved by her, he turned to her, as he asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “Are you going to okay?”
Nodoka looked at Lee, as she answered, “Yea. I will be fine. I will get myself out in a minute. Though, I no longer feel like capturing you. But, thanks for asking.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Nodoka commented, “By the way, we are not really that crazy about catching you, Lee. You helped create my sisters, and I. We think of you as an uncle. And you gave the Lagoon sisters a second shot at life. And a good life at that. We are just trying to please our parents.”
Lee calmly responded, “I understand. I am just trying to keep you off me, so I can escape. I will try not to permanently harm you.”
Nodoka replied, “Thanks. We are trying to do the same, in capturing. And good luck.”
Lee said, “You're welcome.”
Lee then turned, as he continued running turned towards his planned escape route.
Ten seconds later, as soon as Lee turned a corner, and was out of sight, Nodoka recognized Mikoto's voice, as she asked, “Need a hand?”
Nodoka turned her head in the direction of her sister's voice. She saw Mikoto and Kristina standing near her, from the direction that Lee had come from, and the opposite direction from which Lee had left her.
Suddenly, the water forming from the pipes that Lee has ruptured sealed themselves with ice. At the same time, the ice that encased her immediately turned to water, as it splashed to the roof floor, leaving Nodoka, and her clothing completely dry.
Kristina guessed, “You didn't want to catch him? Did you?
Nodoka smiled mischievously, as she answered, in a sweet, innocent tone of voice, “No. I didn't. But, like any good girl. I like to have a man work for what he wants to get from me.”
The three teenage girls giggled, for a few seconds, at Nodoka's joke.
(_)
Twenty seconds later, Lee came to the end of the pipes, along with the various gas tanks and water tanks.
Though, there were about a dozen rows of ventilation ducks between the open space between him and his escape.
The perpendicular to Lee's escape, so he would have to climb over each one of them. And the space between each ventilation duck was around six to eight feet wide.
As Lee made his way over the three feet high, cylindrical ventilation ducts, that run along the roof, and that were covered in steel sheathes, he thought, with concern, 'I better hope that Balalaika and B prefer to watch, or I am screwed.'
Just then, as he feet came down to the floor of the roof, he he saw Yurika coming towards him, from his right side, while from the corner of he eye, he saw Sarah, with her katana drawn, coming at him from angle, from his left side.
Lee thought, 'Timing is the key here.'
Lee quickly slipped over another line of ventilation, to angle himself to where he was between Sarah and Yurika, with him facing Yurika.
While his feet hit the ground, again, Lee guessed, from the corner of his eyes, 'Sarah is twenty feet away, behind me, to my left. And Yurika is within fifteen feet in front of me, to my right. Now, I have to do this, just right.'
By then, both women standing along the same row as he was.
Lee precognition warned him of the proper time to dodge Yurika's lightning bolt, by sidestepping to his right.
Sarah's katana acted as a lightning rod, as the lightning knocked her down, on her back, with her sword falling from her hands, and harmlessly away from her.
Yurika realized was she had done. She was completely distracted, as she yelled, “Sarah?!Are you okay?!”
While still on her back, Sarah replied, “Ouch.”
Lee used this distraction to rush at Yurika's left side. When he was at the proper angle to green haired teenage woman's body, he used his right fist to do a swift kidney jab to the left side of her abdomen with his right fist.
Yurika yelped, as she crumbled to the ground in pain.
Lee quickly said, “Sorry about that. I hope you don't piss blood because of that.”
Yurika groaned, “I've had worse.” She thought, 'I really shouldn't have use lightning against you. That is like firing a gun. Of course, you would immediately take me out in a more painful manner than most of those you have dealt with. As such, I will let this blow slide.'
Lee heard Yurika's comment, as he thought, 'Good. That takes these two out of the fight, for about a minute.'
Lee then turned around ran, but as he was about to cross over another row of ventilation ducks, he was stopped by bullet shot in front of him.
Lee quickly determined the angle and type of weapons used, as he swiftly turned around and threw eight cards at the top of water tank closest to him.
The cards forced Molly, with her semi-automatic pistols, to fall back further on top of the water tank, and away from Lee.
Lee then continued running and jumping over the vents, until Rebecca, with her long knives drawn, popped up near him. She was one row over from him, and about twenty-five feet from him, to his right. She jumped onto the gap between ventilation ducks, that Lee was standing in the middle of. And she was grinning wickedly at him.
Lee quickly started throwing cards at Rebecca, as he walked backwards towards the a large, metal, ventilation duck that ran across that section of the roof, and was cylinder in shape, with a diameter of three feet.
Meanwhile, Rebecca slowly advanced on Lee, as she used her knives to slice through all the cards thrown at her.
As Lee threw his cards, one after another, he continued walking backwards, at an angle close to the ventilation duck that was in the direction of where he wanted to go. All the while, he thought, 'Five feet to vent. Card thirty-seven. Card thirty-eight. Four feet to vent. Card thirty-nine. Card forty. Three feet to vent...”
Then, Lee saw Yukio popped up from beside her sister, from the row he had just come from, by about fifty feet further up from him and Rebecca. She had her large machine gun, with its hundred round beta-c mag ammo dual-ammo drums attached to it.
Lee quickly rolled over the ventilation duck to his left. He was under the cover, just Yukio fired over his head, with the machine gun set to full auto, as the bullet were shoot in a horizontal strafing pattern.
Meanwhile, Rebecca was not worried about her sister hitting her. But, to make things easier. She rolled over the large ventilation duct to her right side, to allow Yukio a better field of fire.
Just as the two redheaded sisters had planned it.
Lee waited not time, as he ducked behind the ventilation duck, and ran along it, in a crouching position, at an angle that would run closer to the two redheads, without them realizing it.
As he ran, he thought, 'These two plan this trap to ambush me. Yukio must have hid, and crawled to the position, while I made my way over through that gap. Then, Rebecca pops up nearby, to distract me, while Yukio makes her way to the two of us. Not a bad plan. And Nodoka is right. They want to pen me down, and not kill me. Or, Yukio would have shot through the ventilation duck I am hiding behind. That would be like shooting through tissue paper. And all three of use know that.'
'Fortunately, there are only two more ventilation ducks between me and straight open space. With the way she is shooting, that weapon will run out of ammo in a few seconds. I will make my move then. After that, it is a matter of how fast, and agile I can be, while using my precognition, as I am running.'
A few seconds later, Lee noticed the gun fire had stopped. And then, came the sound of Yukio's empty beta-c mag ammo drums hitting the floor of the roof.
While his precognition alerted him to act, Lee thought, 'Now is my only chance.'
A second later, Lee popped up from beside the ventilation duck, he saw that Rebecca had made his way up to her sister. With her standing near Yukio, as Yukio was pulling out another dual-ammo drum, from a large pouch, attached to a black ammo belt, on the left side of her skirt.
Lee also noticed that he was less than twenty feet from them. Given Yukio had adanced on him, during her cover-fire against him.
The two sisters saw Lee just in time to see him swiftly throw the last twelve playing cards at them.
This forced the sisters to duck for cover.
Lee then quickly turned, and ran, as he jumped over the last two ventilation ducks.
After which, Lee started making his way across open space, as swiftly as his feet could carry him.
Lee saw that his escape route was less than fifty feet away, on the southeast corner of the building. On the outer the east wall.
From the corner of his eye, to his left, he saw Revy, Rock, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru across the roof, running towards him.
Though, Revy was the only one firing her weapons at him. And he also noticed that Rock was talking into her radio. But, given how focused Lee was on not being shot, and running, he completely ignored what was being said over the radio, strapped to the left side of his belt.
While Lee ran, he used his precognition to allow him to move while running, to dodge Revy's bullets.
Then, Lee noticed Rock say, over the radio, “Balalaika, B, do you have him?”
A second later, Lee's precognition warned him to move to avoid a couple of shots from three other directions, just as he overheard Balalaika answer, over the radio, “Yes. Have a tourniquet ready, because we are going for his legs.”
On the radio, Molly stated, “I will help. And I think I can see where he is going. He is heading for a garbage chute.”
Lee saw that he was approaching the garbage chute, as he thought, 'Looks like I will be dodging Revy, Molly, B, and Balalaika's sights. Only thirty feet to go. And while they know where I am heading, that will not stop me from getting there. This is one dance of death, I am walking away from in one, living piece.'
The women on the roof that the all watched as Lee started to use his precognition to move around, ducking, and sidestepping, while still going in the same direction, as he was careful not to step wrong, and sprain one of his ankles.
Lee heard on the radio, Rock say, “I am sure you are listening to this, Lee. So, I will say, nice moves. You really do know how to dance.”
While Lee continued to weave around the bullet trajectories, as his precognition warned him of the bullets, he thought, 'And you are trying distract me, Rock. And it is not going to work. Also, I am only ten feet away from the garbage chute. Time to pull out my fireworks.'
Lee pulled out two of the Firefly sci-fi style grenades from his pocket. One in each hand.
Lee thought, 'I am using two of them. In case one of them is a dud. And I am so happy that I paid attention to that scene in the Serenity movie, when Mal and Jayne. Also, given that are such a sci-fi design, I doubt the local security scanners will pick them up... If I get that far. And Jayne said these things are on eight second fuses. And all I have to do is twist the knobs at the top to prime them. Now, to test these theories.'
Just as Lee reached the three feet wide, circular entrance to the garbage chute, that went all the way down to the ground, he was able to prime them by rotating the tops of the grenades with his thumbs. He heard the click from both grenades, that signaled they are now primed to detonate.
Lee immediately dropped the grenades right in front of the entrance to the chute.
Lee then continued his momentum, as he ducked inside the chute. Just then, from behind him, Lee heard several of the women yell, “Grenades!”
The women on the roof, were still far away from Lee, as they all dove for cover.
Meanwhile, as Lee slid down the garbage chute, which he found just fit him, Lee used the soles of his shoes, along with his covered knees and cover elbows, to slow his decent down the chute.
As Lee made his controlled decent down the chute, he thought, 'I am glad those things were easier to twist than it looked like on the Serenity movie. But, then again, they are military weapons. They would be designed to be twisted by the thumbs, to allow someone's thumb to prime then, so their other hand can be be utilized for other things, like firing a weapon at the enemy... Still, those grenades are going to go off any second. I just hope I am not knocked by the explosions, to where I go into free fall.'
Eight seconds after priming the grenades, three seconds after Lee concluded his present thoughts, Lee was a quarter of the way down the chute, when he felt the dual explosions go off at the same time.
The explosions all but destroyed the top of the garbage chute.
Inside the chute, Lee found that he was able to continue to slide down, at a safe speed, as he thought, 'Good. It only rocked the chute slightest at this point, and I should be down at the bottom in a few seconds.
Less than a minute later, Lee made it safely to the bottom of the chute, dropping onto the ground, with him landing on his feet. He found that his landing did not harm his feet, nor knees.
Lee did not waste time looking up, instead he ducked against the walls of the building he had just escape from, to avoid gunfire from the women at the top of the roof, along with Balalaika and B.
Lee stayed against the wall of the building he had just escape from the roof of.
Lee quickly got his bearings, as he thought, 'Now, if I remember correctly, I just need to go east of here. I want avoid the main center building of the factory complex. I will take the road directly in front of me, to my left. That will keep a building between me and the main center, where I am sure someone of those after me are. When I reach the other side of that building, I run along, I will turn left, down another road. With the alleyway where my car is, being the next road down, to my right side.'
'And with most of the fools trapped on the roof. Or, several stories up. Or, deep inside one of the buildings. I got plenty of time to get to my car, and escape. But, I am not going to give them the chance to get to me. I am out of his place... Time... Reality... As soon as possible. I just need to remember, when I get to my car, to zigzag, to keep from being shot by Balalaika and B.'
'Until then, I will stick to the outside walls of the buildings. Everyone else is so high up to get a good shot at me. That is even if they can get me in their sights, this is still a difficult angle to hit me, from the roof, or other high areas.'
'Still, I wonder what they will saying?...'
Lee the focused on the radio. He heard over the radio, as B stated, “I cannot see him from where I am.”
On the radio, Balalaika commented, “I have the same problem. As expected, this was as well planned escape by Lee. And I know you are hearing this Lee. And we are still going to come after you.”
Rock said, over the radio, “Yea. Lee played us. He used himself as live bait, to get us up here, so he could trap us up here. Well played, Lee...”
Lee smirked, as he thought, 'Rock. Balalaika. You both are expecting me to stop, and gloat. That is not happening. Time is short, and I have places to be...'
Lee then turned off his radio, which was still clipped to the left side of this belt.
Next, Lee quickly made his way along the walls of the buildings, in the direction he plotted, towards where his car was.
(_)
One minute ago, at the top of the roof, that Lee has escaped from, just after the grenades went off, Revy and everyone got up from where then had hit the ground.
Rock looked around her, at the others women present, as she asked, “Everyone okay?”
A few of the women said, “Yea.”, “Sure”, “Whatever.”
Rock saw that not one was harmed, nor, laying on the ground. She thought, 'I guess everyone is fine. Now, to see if we can follow, Lee.'
The women, including Rock, looked over at the garbage chute, on the east side, of the southeast corner of the building. They saw that the chute at the top was destroyed and push outward.
Nearby Rock, Revy stated, with anger lacing her voice, “This was all a trap by Lee. He wanted to lure us up here. So, he could get back down to the ground, double back to his car, and escape. With no quick way for us to follow him down.”
Rock commented, “That is not bad thinking on his part. But, I believe Lee miscounted the people. Though, we will worry about that later. Let's first keep anyone else from doing something stupid, likely trying to follow Lee down, the quick way.”
Revy said, “I agree.”
Revy thought, 'I don't have to look down to the ground, to know how high we are. It is just simple math, given we are twenty-two stories up. Actually, probably closer to twenty-five. Counting how high that ceiling is, in that warehouse, and that we are on roof.'
Revy looked around her, as she said to everyone present, in a strong tone of voice, “I don't want anyone to even think of trying to jump. It is at least two hundred feet straight drop to the ground. It is too high a fall for even one of us to land safely.”
Natsuru looked over at Revy, as she commented, “I don't think even I could safely land at this height.” She turned to Ranma, as she asked, “What about you, Ranma?”
Ranma said, “I might. But, it is not worth the risk. Besides, I am sure we will get another shot at him.”
On the radio, Balalaika heard all of this, as she asked, “We saw what happened. Do any of you have any rappelling gear? We still might be able to catch him.”
Revy look at the others. They either shrugged, or shook their heads.
Rock answered, into her radio, “No.”
(_)
On her perch, on a nearby communications tower, Balalaika cursed under her breath, in english, “Amateurs...”
Since Balalaika could no long see Lee on the ground, she set her sniper rifle to the side, with her right hand. And she held her radio in her left hand, as she she pressed the talk button on her radio. She asked, into the radio, in english, “B, can you still see him on the ground?”
Over the radio, B answered, in english, “I cannot see him from where I am.”
On the radio, Balalaika commented, “I have the same problem. As expected, this was as well planned escape by Lee. And I know you are hearing this Lee. And we are still going to come after you.”
Rock said, over the radio, “Yea. Lee played us. He used himself as live bait, to get us up here, so he could trap us up here. Well played, Lee...”
After a few seconds of silence, Balalaika thought, 'Lee is not taking the bait.' She said into her radio, “B, Lee knows how to counter our shots. So, there is no point to staying up here. So, start making your way down. I will meet you, and the others, where we parked our vehicles.”
B replied, over her radio, “Yes, Balalaika. Though, the chase is not over yet.”
Balalaika responded, “I know. Lee can only keep up this chase for so long. And I am sure even he knows that.”
Balalaika then put away her radio, collected her weapons and equipment. She then used a nearby ladder to start slowly making her way down the communications tower, to the ground.
(_)
A few minute later, as Lee ran along the sides of the walls of the buildings, Lee finally came within sight of the alleyway had hid his car in.
While, Lee could not see his car in the narrow alleyway, from angle he was looking at the alleyway entrance. Though, Lee was sure the car was still in there.
Suddenly, he precognition immediately screamed to stop. As Lee stopped walking, he thought, 'If my precognition is telling me something is wrong, then there is a problem. I wonder what it is. If it is an ambush at the car, or the car enough, I need to know before I get there.'
Lee then pulled out the key chain to his car. As he held his right thumb over the lock button of the clicker. He thought, 'I left my door locked. So, if I have to click it more than twice to beep, someone is likely in it.
As Lee clicked the bottom the first time, he heard an explosion, near him, as he saw flames erupt from the alleyway.
Lee's eyes went wide. As he rushed over to the alleyway, he said, out loud, “No. No. No. No!”
A few seconds later, when he reached the alleyway, he saw his car.
The car's front was facing Lee. And Lee could see the damage from where he stood.
The front engine of the vehicle was in flames, but not the rest of the car.
The sunglasses over Lee's eyes, protected his eyes from the brightness of the flames, allowing him to see passed the flames to the rest of the car. He saw that cab was still in one piece, and not in flames.
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he though, 'Damn. Looks like they found my car. And whomever set that bomb was an expert. The way that bomb was planted, and set, was meant to only destroy the engine and not the cab. It was not set to kill me, but scary the hell out of me, in the hopes I would slow down... They still haven't realized that I always plan ahead.'
Lee turned, and he saw that the crowbar, by the building near him was still there. He then quickly located the sewer main entrance, nearby, on the road.
Lee briskly walked over and picked up the crowbar. Next, Lee turned, and walked over to the nearby manhole cover.
As Lee walked towards the manhole cover, he though, “Looks like it is time I go Shawshank on them. Honestly, the only good thing about that movie was the ending. One could just watch the first fifteen minutes of the film, and then fast-forward the last fifteen minutes of the film, before the credits, and the person would see almost all the important scenes of that movie. With the middle part of the movie being just padding to give the actors an excuse to act in a dramatic fashion.'
'Still, it was a good, well planned escape at the end of the movie. With the man in questions leaving the warden holding the bag. Not many prisoners in the multiverse can claim to not only escape prison, with a clean get away, new identity, and a small fortune, but also leave the warden holding the bag. And giving their best friend in the prison, just enough hints to follow him, when his friend got out of prison on parole. While keeping the authorities in the dark. A true moment of awesome for that escape prisoner.'
'Now, let's see if I can pull the same thing off on those after me. Not that the authorities have the firepower, and manpower to capture and hold those after me. But, the cops delaying them should buy me enough time to permanently escape them.'
When he reached the manhole over, he quickly used both his hands, to have the curved end of the crow bar to open the metal manhole cover. He then used the curved end of the crowbar as a fulcrum against the pavement ground, to pivot the manhole cover away from the sewer entrance.
After Lee finished moving the metal cover, he leaned back up, and turned back to the sewer entrance.
When he turned towards he hole, he saw Lotton had partly climbed out of the sewer main ladder. Along with this, Lee saw that she was looking at him. And Lee saw that in Lotton's right hand, Lotton was holding one of her two Mauser M seven-twelve Schnellfeuer automatic pistol, with select fire.
The pistol was set to single shot, with there being an extended twenty round ammo magazine in the weapon.
Lee noted that Lotton had her right index finger on the trigger, and his precognition was warning him that pistol was ready to fire.
Lee immediately dropped his crowbar to the ground. He thought, 'Damn! And I was so close to escaping. I can understand them finding the car. But, how did they guess my second escape plan?'
Lotton ordered, “Intelligent thinking with dropping the crowbar, Lee. Now, back away. And do not try anything, while I climb out of here.”
Lee walked back six feet, away from Lotton. When he came to a stop, he said, “Lotton, you have my word, that I won't do anything until you are out of that sewer.”
Lotton replied, “I believe you.”
As Lee watched the seemingly young white haired woman climbed out of the sewer main, he thought, 'Damn! It looks like am I am not going to be able to pull off my second escape plan. Fortunately, Lotton is one of the saner people after me. And while my current escape plans are a bust. All I got to do as Lotton tells me to do. Within reason. Until I see an opportunity to act. Or, wait for my other plans to happen on their own.'
As made it to the ground, she did not taken her eyes, nor gun off of Lee.
When Lotton stood up on the pavement, Lee got a good look at her. And he saw that she was wearing a female styled version of her same outfit she wore as a man, back in Roanapur. Complete with a black long coat, that fit her shorter physically frame, and sunglasses.
As Lotton continued to point her pistol at Lee, she used her left hand reach into her coat, and pull out her radio. She said into her radio, “This is Lotton. I have Lee. I will meet everyone at open area, by our vehicles, in fifteen minutes.”
Revy complimented, over the radio, “Good work, Lotton. You just made our day.”
On the radio, Rock stated, “We will see you there. Though, be careful.”
Lotton looked at Lee in the face, as she replied, over the radio, “Not to worry. I destroyed his car, and he knows that if he runs, I will shoot him.”
In response, Lee looked down at Lotton's face, as he just shrugged his shoulders, in indifference to his situation.
Rock responded, over the radio, “That is fine. We will all head down to where we parked our cars. See you then.”
Lotton then put away her radio, back into her coat. She lips curled into a smirk, as she continued to look towards Lee. She said, in an eager tone of voice, “Lee, you forgot, you magnificent bastard, that we read your stories.”
Lee replied, “Paraphrasing General George Smith Patton?”
Lotton responded, “Yes.”
Lee shrugged, as he commented, “I guess that would make me, Field Marshal Erwin Johannes Eugen Rommel, of the German military.”
Lotton said, “Do not feel bad about the comparison. If you read history, you would know that Rommel was one of the few decent German high ranking commanders of World War Two.”
Lee agreed, “That is true. By the way, good bomb placement, with the shaped charge, on the car. It blew up the front engine, while leaving the cabin itself untouched. If I had been inside the car, that might have startled me. But, I would have otherwise been unharmed. Though instead, I used my car clicker at a distance.”
Lotton happily stated, “Thank you. And I added the clicker sensor to my explosive, because I preferred you not be near the car when it exploded. Just in case my bomb accidentally blew up the entire car. I wanted to scare you. Not kill you. And I do appreciate it when someone admires my skills.”
Lee commented, “Then, you're welcome. Though, I never wrote you as having skills in explosives?”
Lotton responded, “I know. Neither did Tex-Mex. But, both of you realize that I like to be prepared. I have have known how to use explosives even before I first came to Roanapur. I just rarely get a chance to use such skills.”
Lee commented, “It is hard to plan against the unknown.”
Lotton said, “Exactly. And my explosive skills were part of the reason I was sitting at a table with Claude at the table, when we were both first introduced in the Black Lagoon series. We met each other in the bus that came to Roanapur, from the mainland airports.”
“And given we were both foreigner. We sat together. And we began talking. It turned out we were both heading to Roanapur for the same reasons. Jobs of a less than reputable nature.”
Lee let himself smile, as he chuckled at Lotton comment.
Lotton returned Lee's smile, as she responded, “I thought you would get a laugh out of that. Anyway, we also learned from each other, that we were both heading for the Yellowflag, which was well known around the world, as one of the saner places for those working for criminal work in the city. We with both got to the bar, we found out we were the only two people in the bar that were not drinking an alcoholic beverage.”
Lee pointed out, “It was a bar, after all.”
Lotton agreed, “True. With Bao only had milk for those whom did not want an alcoholic drink, or a canned soda. Strangely, he did not have bottle water, on hand, his customers, at the time. But, he did eventually offer that, as well”
Lee commented, “After Roberta first came to that town. I would not be surprised if Bao personally milked the cow for the milk he served.”
Lotton let out a laugh. She then said, “After seeing the series myself. I have to agree. I would not be surprised if that was the case. Anyway, Claude and I found an empty table, and we started talking.”
“Besides preferring not drinking alcohol, we both we agreed that staying sober would help us get a job. And while he was a pyromaniac, I was an explosives expert. Which made for an interesting conversation.”
Lee mentioned, “I would agree. And you know. I do not recall watching, or reading, about such a casual, pleasant conversation, between a pyromaniac and an explosives expert.
Lotton stated, “Yes. Such conversations tend to be surprisingly rare in fiction. We were in the middle of talking about structure demolition of a building. With Claude talking about his flame thrower, and I was talking about my explosives skills. When Sawyer pointed us out, as new guys, to the rest of the crowd.”
“And well, you know the rest... Still, the reason I did not use explosives, and I preferred pistols, was that I knew that, if used in a fight, that fire and explosives both have a way of blowing back on the person using them. As Claude sadly found out the hard way.”
“Though, before that, we both were clearly becoming fast friends. And I am happy you brought Claude back to life. And while Kristina and I are no longer close friends. We are still friends.”
Lee inquired, “I am happy to hear that. And speaking of my stories. By the way. I was wondering. Which part of my stories are you referring to, that gave my plan away?
Lotton smirked, as she stated, “Book three. When Bob rescues Ed. You had Bob's plan C for his group being running from the car, losing Rock, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, and then doubling back to their car, and escaping.”
Lee frowned, as he responded, “Of course. I remember now. And it was a good plan.”
Lotton agreed, “Yes. It was. And it worked that time against, Rock. Yet. You should have known better than try the same trick twice with Rock. That is why she had me find your car, deal with your car, and stay down here, in case you did double backed. Which you did.”
Lee defended, “I had too. I had no other options left.”
Lotton said, “I can understand that.”
Lee commented, “Okay. I can see how you would guess my first escape plan. But, how did you guess my secondary escape plan?”
Lotton stated, “Simple. In your position, this would be the same plan B that I would use. And even if I was wrong. It was a good hiding place. I could just listen for the car to explode. If I had not also heard you walking towards me, with my enhanced hearing, I was about to let myself out of here to go and capture you. Thanks to the enhanced strength you gave me, that metal covering is not that heavy. And I just closed the manhole cover behind me.”
“Still, these were intelligent plans on your part. It is just that you were outsmarted.”
Lee replied, “Apparently so.” Lee then sniffed his nose towards Lotton, as he questioned, “You know. For you being in a sewer for a while, you, and that sewer you came out of, don't smell that bad?”
Lotton answered, “I know. As I just pointed out. Enhanced senses. Including enhanced sense of smell. Which is not as bad as you may think. Still, I found out that is not a sewer main. It is an electrical maintenance tunnel, with cables and pipes running down it. It is fairly large, rectangular tunnel down there. At least seven feet high, and nine feet wide. Also, it is fairly clean, and well lit.”
Lee replied, “That is nice to know.”
Lotton said, “Yes. It is.” She then dropped her grin, as she ordered, “Now, down to business. Please, give me your deck of cards.”
Lee slowly pulled out a deck and handed it to her, in her left hand. She did not take her eyes off of Lee, as she pocket the item into one of her coat pockets.
She demanded, “And your other deck.”
Lee did so. And Lotton continued to look at Lee, as she pocketed that item, into her coat.
She asked for, “And your third deck.”
Lee complied. Lotton put that item in her coat pocket.
She said, “Now, the key card.”
Lee pulled out his key card and handed it to her. She put that item into an interior coat pocket.
She requested, “Jayne's radio.”
Lee removed it from the left side of his belt, and handed it to Lotton.
Lotton put the small radio into a coat pocket. She then stated, “And your reality jumping device. Along, with any grenades you have.”
Lee lied, “I left it at my reality device at hotel room. And I only had those two grenades. I don't like having any other explosives on me.”
Lotton admitted, “That is possible.”
Lee warned, “But, if you want to try to search me, even with your enhancements, and that pistol pointed at me, I might be able to take you in a fight, and escape.”
Lotton admitted, “That is possible. Shenhua, Akira, Natsuru, and River, did train you in combat, for years in that time loop. And Sawyer trained you in dancing. Still, if you do use Rock's reality device, we can just track you to your location within minutes.”
Lee thought, 'Thanks for the reminder. Also, this might be a good chance to learn some more about how they track reality travel.' He baited, “Well, why didn't you do that before?”
Lotton cracked a grin, as she responded, “Trying to get information out of me about reality travel?”
Lee pointed out, “I wrote the stories. Among anyone, I deserve to know the details.”
Lotton conceded, “True. And well, the only reason we didn't do this sooner is that with each passing minute after a jump usually takes a few minutes more to get a lock. But, we didn't immediately have tracking scanner with us, right after you jumped. So, it took us a few minutes to find you. By then, we realized that you were heading to Mars. And it we decided that it would be easier to either confirm you were on a transport to Mars. And then catch you on Mars, than to risk creating a mess in Babylon Five, in the middle of an organized evacuation. Or, to risk confronting you, in a spaceship, in hyperspace.”
Lee responded, “Good calls all around. And it is nice to know the basics of how reality tracking works. I never really got into the details of it. I found leaving some things to the readers' imaginations was for the best.”
Lotton raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “Like the sex scenes.”
Lee stated, “Especially the sex scenes. Do you really want some stranger to tell you how to have sex with someone.”
Lotton said, “Good point. By the way, why did you make me so short as a woman? While I am not as short as Sawyer, I am close to her height.”
Lee admitted, “I believe beauty comes in many forms. And I did not want to give all the gender benders the same physical build. It would be poor writing to do so. So, I change it up a little bit between you various gender benders.”
Lotton replied, “Okay. I can see your point. And my body is still kind of sexy, in a cute way.”
Lee agreed, “Absolutely. And while I did not write it directly. If you followed the same rules as the others. You should still turn into a healthy male version, in your twenties, of your old male form, when you use a packet of spring of drown man?”
Lotton commented, “Yes. I do.”
Lee responded, “That is good to know. Besides, your physical build, as a woman, is similar to Benny's body type as a woman. While you still have a slight better build, and slightly bigger breasts. And you can blame Benny's female body type on Tex-Mex.” He mentally reflected, 'Though, I used Benny's pregnancy to up Benny's breast size by a cup.'
Lotton commented, “Yes. We both know I laughed ass off the first time I saw the Boys and Girls omake.”
Lee said, “While I did not write the scene of you and Chang original seeing the Black Lagoon series and omakes, I always did wonder how that played out.”
Lotton giggled at little. She then stated, “Well, since you would appreciate the answer, I will tell you. After I joined Chang's group, he realized my savviness was of the same vein as his. I was the one he sent to look for the Black Lagoon anime and manga series, in the multiverse. I brought back multiple copies of both the anime and manga, along with english dub versions of the Black Lagoon omake.”
“By the way, the english dub of those omakes I have copies of are of the same dub cast that did the north american version of the Black Lagoon english dub.”
Lee commented, “While I hinted at that. That is nice to have confirmed. That cast did not do the omakes in my reality.”
Lotton agreed, “Yes. It is. Should you survive, you may get the chance to watch them.”
Lee replied, “I will look forward to it.”
Lotton stated, “Good. Anyway, we took our time with watching the anime. And we read the manga, right after we finished the anime. After watching anime version of the Roberta's Blood Trail. Then, we watched the omakes. Then, we read the manga volumes. We compared what happened in our reality, to both the anime and manga endings, and we realized that we were in the anime time line.”
Lee said, “I know. And as idiotic as it sounds, even with her after my ass, I still do not regret giving Roberta the super-soldier serum, and upgrades that make her a cyborg.”
Lotton commented, “I fully understand. You found a way to make that walking badass killing machine even more awesome. And from a purely entertainment standpoint, which was what you were doing at the time, I would have done that myself.”
Lee replied, “I am glad you see my point of view.”
Lotton responded, “No problem. Anyway, Chang and I watched the anime in a manner, in which we would watch a few episodes of the Black Lagoon series, with just the two of us, in his private study, as we had some beers. On the night we finished the Blood Trail, we decided we did not want to end the night on such a sour note. So, we decided to start watching the omakes. Which we planed to watch after the series proper, in case we needed a good laugh after watching something depressing. And we did need a good laugh after watching the ending of the Blood Trail.”
“By then, we were both buzzed from drinking beers. But, not really drunk. Just relaxed.”
Lee inquired, “How far into the omakes, before you were laughing to the point of tears?”
Lotton genuinely smile, as she answered, in a jovial tone of voice, “We were both crying from laughter by the end of the second omake, with Magical Girl Revy. By the time we got to the Boys and Girls omake, we had problems seeing straight, from the laughter, and tears. By the time we finished watching all the omakes. The combination of alcohol, and laughter left us without the ability to even stand up straight for about an hour.”
Even thought Lee still had a gun pointed at his chest, Lee remained calm, as he replied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Yea. It is fun when you get to the point of laughter, you are laughing so hard, you can barely stand, breath, and with tears running down you face. I have head that happen a few time while watching other series. Such as the Megas XLR series.”
Lotton agreed, “Yea. I have seen the series, as well. At some points, I was not only crying from the laughter, but, that that series was so funny, that I had some mild problems with just breathing.”
Lotton then dropped her smile, again, as she used her left, free hand to point in a direction away from the buildings they were by, and towards the road that lead to the main center building. She ordered, in sober tone of voice, “Though, as fun as this discussion has been. We now have to meet the others. I want you to have your hands up, parallel with you head, and for you to start slowly walking in that direction.” She then dropped her left hand back to her side.
Lee calmly replied, “Yes ma'am.” He then did as she instructed.
With Lee's hands raised, to where his hands were level with his head, Lotton stated, “Now, start moving, at a conformable. Though, keep in mine, you have a longer stride them me.”
Lee said, “I will do so.” He then turned in the direction Lotton had pointed, and he stated calmly walking as a pace that he was sure Lotton would be comfortable with.
They then began walking at a calm pace, for both of them, with Lee in front of Lotton. And Lotton with one of her pistols trained on Lee's back. With Lotton remained no less than six feet from Lee. So, Lee could not try something against Lotton.
As they walked, Lee calmly requested, “Since we still have a little while, until we reach you friends, and my torture sessions begin. I have a few questions for you. But, given you are pointing a gun at me. I do not want you to misinterpret my questions as insulting.”
Lotton thought, 'He has a point.' She removed her right index finger off the trigger, and place it on the trigger guard. Though, she did keep her pistol trained on the middle of Lee's back.
While they continued walking, she questioned, “What do you want to ask? I promise, I will not find it insulting.”
Lee pointed out, “Alright... While I try not to look at such things, back at the Devil's Hotel. I notice that you're breasts look bigger than they usually do?”
Lotton let out a laugh. She responded, “Thank you. And the reason my breasts look bigger is that I am wearing a titanium breast plate fitted for my chest, in place of my bra. A solid punch in the breast can take a woman out of a fight. Though, the inside of the plate has cushions, so my skin, including my breasts, are not touching hard metal.”
Lee commented, “I bet that cost a pretty penny.”
Lotton admitted, “It did. It is fortunate that I had some gold, and other treasures, hidden away, that Shenhua and Sawyer finally let me use. And it was worth the price. But, that was nothing compared to the price of the titanium chain mail I had made for myself.”
“I wear a t-shirt over the breast plate, then the chain-mail, then my outer shirt. It works quite well, and it is fair more comfortable, and flexible, than a bulletproof vest. Though, it is a little heavy. But, with the super-soldier serum, the weight of my clothing is not that big an issue for myself.”
Lee guessed, “Given your level of crazy preparedness. I take it that you are still wearing steel athletic cup? Only, this time, it is a female athletic cup.”
Lotton answered, “Yes. I am wearing a titanium female athletic cup. Given Roberta dented my old steel cup, as a man, I decided when I had the money, I would trade up in quality on that little piece of equipment. Though, I had to have the metal formed to fit to myself. You might find this surprising, but female crotches differ in sizes.”
Lee said, “Not really. No one has the same body measurements. And for such a sensitive area, a person would want full coverage of the area. Though, given how violent some of the women in your group are, I am surprised they they don't wear athletic cups, and breast protection, as well.”
Lotton stated, “Yes. I agree. Getting hit in the breasts hurts as a woman. And getting hit in the crouch as a woman still hurts. The only difference is the soreness doesn't last nearly as long as it does as a man. In your writings, you pointed out that a woman can get hurt down there with a single blow. I admire that level of detail.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lotton inquired, “You're welcome. By the way, about your alias, Ello Gray. Where did that come from?”
Lee answered, “Well, that is Gray, with an, a. It is an anagram of the word, allegory. As in, symbolism.”
Lotton replied, “Ah. Not bad. I believe you did something similar with Scorpius' name at the end of book three? And the beginning of book four?”
Lee stated, “Yes. I did. Professor Cosupsir, with Cosupsir being anagram for Scorpius. I think I did pretty good with my alias, and Scorpius' alias.”
Lee then smirked, as he thought, 'Oh hell. I might as well tell her. She would appreciate it. And she would likely get a laugh out of me telling her.'
Lee continued, “I know Scorpius was happy with what I did for her.”
Lotton deadpanned, “And how would you know that?”
Lee said, “As you know, Scorpius as a woman, has a very sexy body.”
Lotton shrugged, as she responded, “Yes. You do good work... For the most part. And as you said, you had your reasons for giving me a smaller female body, when compared to my male form.”
Lee responded, “Yes. Anyway, to answer your question. Did you hear about that day Violin brought Scorpius to the Rats Nest, with River, Chang, Molly, Rock, and I? With all of us playing poker?”
Lotton hesitantly said, “Yes... Please, don't tell me this is going, where I think this is going?”
Lee complimented, “You always were sharper than most people gave you credit for... Well, I gave you credit for your savviness. Anyway, after the game, and the others, besides River, and the bartender, left, I went to the men's restroom. Scorpius ambushed me in there. And well... It was going to happen whether I wanted it to happen, or not. So, I just went with it. She then left.”
Lotton asked, “How good was it?”
Lee admitted, “The sex was wonderful. And I did use a condom.”
Lotton complimented, “That was smart thinking on your part.”
Lee requested, “I know. And could you please keep this to yourself.”
Lotton shrugged, as said, “Of course. I am not a gossip. Besides, you are in too deep as is. Mentioning that, at this point of the game, would just be plain mean, and unsportsmanlike.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lotton responded, “No problem. So, are you really an H.P. Lovecraft fan?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And I am very happy that I did not use any of his material, in my stories. And I think it is best we don't talk about this author and his works, ever again.”
Lotton said, “Given our general situation. I agree with you on all points.”
Lee replied, “Glad to hear it.”
Lotton commented, “Now, as you realize, I have an eye for the details, as well. And while I have no told the others, I have noticed that you have become a real life lethal weapon. You are as dangerous as the rest of us. And I believe you already know that.”
Lee flatly said, “No comment.”
Lotton smirked, as she went onto say, “Sure... You gave a real strong showing, just now, in this chase, and in these factory buildings. I mean it is clear that even with you at a disadvantage, you have the abilities to seriously harm, or even kill us. Yet, you refuse to do so. Why?”
As they continued walking, Lotton could see, from Lee's back at Lee shrugged his right shoulder.
Lee then admitted, in a straightforward tone of voice, “I like you, guys. Girls. Whatever. And I admit I do deserve an ass kicking for what I have done to all of you. Still, I would like to have an ass, afterward. And none of you are known for showing restraint.”
Lotton said, “I can appreciate where you are coming from. And I am starting to see why River likes you so much.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Though, I doubt you are going to let me go.”
Lotton answered, “No. And the reason why, is that I am sure that if I did, they would hurt me. Though, they would not hurt me much. They would likely rough me up a little, if I did so.”
Lee casually said, “Oh well. It was worth a try... Speaking of those movies. Except for movie four, Lethal Weapon was pretty good movie series.”
Lotton replied, “No argument there.”
Lee explained, “I mean, even movie three was pretty good. Not as good as one and two, but still good. It had the humor, the action, and a decent villain. It was even had humorous bookends, with the building explosions. The problem was that the romantic subplot just did not click like it should have. Still, that guy did deserve a break. And the girl wasn't that bad of a character. And I do admire women that come prepared, as long as they are sane. Double vest, anyone?”
Lotton giggled. She then replied, “Yes. I like women that are prepared. And now, I am one of them. Still, sanity is overrated. Crazy women are very fun, and very unpredictable in bed. And I have two of them that I enjoy a bed with. Still, movie four did suck.”
Lee responded, “I know. You don't include a heavily pregnant woman in the main cast of an action series, or movie, while pregnant, unless she is a badass, and she demonstrates that she still a badass while pregnant. And I have only seen one pregnant badass work like that, once in such a format. That was Aeryn, in the last half of the Farscape, Peacekeeper Wars, mini-series. And no one should ever give a pregnant woman, particularly one who is going through labor, a firearm. Especially, a firearm with an automatic selector function, and hundreds of ammo before needing to be reloaded.”
Lotton giggled again. She then stated, “I fully agree. And after spending some time with Aeryn, I can confirm that shooting really does make her feel better.”
Both of them laughed, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lotton asked, “So, why did you not include Aeryn as part of the main cast in your stories?”
Lee answered, “Well, besides raising Aeryn and John's son, Little D. Both parents should not leave a young child alone. One parent leaving for a time, is fine. Story-wise. But, not both. And the only other reason I did not include Aeryn as part of the main cast for the heroes is that she is so much of a badass, that the story would have ended too quickly. With the heroes winning.”
Lotton offered, “I will be sure to tell Aeryn you said that about her. For that compliment, you might get out of her revenge against you.”
Lee said, “Thanks, Lotton.” He thought, 'I sure hope so.'
A few seconds later, they came to a four way intersession in the road.
Lotton, whom walked behind Lee, said, “I want you to take a left turn here. The next building, we will take a right turn. Then, a left turn. After which, it is a straight line to the clearing we are heading for.”
Lee replied, “Okay. I just hope they don't shoot me on sight.”
As the turned to the right, Lotton stated, “Don't worry. Revy stated whoever captures you, will have first crack at you. And I don't intend to shoot you.”
Lee conceded, “That puts me a little at ease. But, what do you intent to do to me?”
Lotton admitted, “I am not sure, myself. Though, it won't be too bad. Sawyer likes you, and I respect you. But, by taking my time to think, it will likely keep the others from doing something rash towards you.”
Lee complimented, “Intelligent thinking, Lotton.” He mentally reflected, 'Good. Then, this situation will offer me options.'
Lotton commented, “Thank you, Lee. And I have to hand it to you. You had not only come up with a plan A of escape, but a plan B as well. That makes me wonder if those are your only plans?”
Lee could not help himself. As he responded, “Actually, Lotton, I have plans within plans, within plans. If you are wondering. I am on plan G. Plans D through F required one, or both of the maids being here. D required Roberta just being here. E required both maids being here. F required just Fabiola being here. I think plan H is going to be interesting. But, I am not sure how.”
“Still, I hope you are not too sore about me turning you into woman, brainwashing you, and making you a maid servant to Shenhua and Sawyer.”
Lotton thought, 'Nice way of being vague, and then deflecting, by changing the subject. You give me all the information I already likely knew, without tipping your hand to your future plans. And that is exactly what I have come to expect from you, Lee. But, given you are being polite. I will bite.'
Lotton stated, “It is not that bad. The sex has been good, and they treat me better than when I was a man. We have even talked about having kids.”
Lee said, in a sincere tone of voice, “Good luck with that.”
Lotton replied, “Thank you.”
Lee said, “I am glad you are not sore about. Besides, Annie also seems to not be that sore about what I did to her.”
Lotton asked, with curiosity, “Really? She knew who you were?”
Lee answered, “Yes. She figured it out on her own.”
Lotton said, “I am not surprised. Though, I know better than calling her out on not telling the rest of us. Especially, me being up there with Chang, on her shit list.”
Lee stated, “Considering she is now working for Chang, I think you are okay, as long as you don't annoy her.”
Lotton commented, “You are probably right.”
Lee said, “Anyway, I guess being out of that suit and restoring her body back to health made her much happier with her situation. She seems to be the one of the few people, including you, that realizes I was not being completely evil in my writings.”
“She even told me she realized that there was a bit of give and take on her situation. And I am really happy about acknowledging that fact. And I am also happy that she turned out with such a nice personality. Still, Annie is second on the list of people of the multiverse I would never intentionally piss off, next to the Bloodhound.”
Lotton replied, “I completely agree. And do you want to know a secret?”
Lee stated, “Sure.”
Lotton commented, “I broke my programing several years ago, on my own. I help designed the process, in the first place. Being a maid just gives me an excuse to be around Sawyer and Shenhua. I have fallen in love with both of them, and I would be more than happy to continue aiding them in anyway I can.”
Lee suggested, “Well since you plan to keep my secrets. I will keep yours. Though, you really should tell them the truth.”
Lotton said, “I plan too. After all three of us are pregnant with our first batch of kids. That instant spring of drowned man packets made our love life much more fun. I will explain to them that my programing degraded, and I just want to be with them.”
Lee admitted, “That will likely work. And good luck. So, what now? After you lead me to the others.”
Lotton replied, “While I get first crack at you. And what I plan to do to you won't be to bad. I am not sure what will happen after that. Still, you have been a good sport about this. You are not been begging. Nor, pleading for mercy. I respect that. So, good luck to you.”
Lee stated, “Thank you. And I have no intention of running. Since everyone is heading to the ground level, I don't know where everyone is, and if I ran. If you were not able to shoot me. I would likely get shot by someone else. This way, at least when we reach the group, I will know where everyone is at, and I can plan accordingly.”
As Lee said the next part of his comment, Lotton guessed what Lee was going to say. With both of them saying, in unison, “Proper planning and preparation.”
Both of them laughed at their comment.
Lee then asked, “Do you mind if I whistle a tune?”
Lotton replied, “Go ahead.
Lee then started whistling a tone, on key, that Lotton recognized. And given the situation, she found the tone to be amusing.
(_)
Ten minutes later, they reached an open space, with buildings on all sides. The area was completely pave, with roads leading between the buildings, from the open area.
Lee still had his hands up, to his sides, at the same level of his head. With Lotton behind him, while she pointed one of her pistols on him.
And Lee was still whistling his tone.
As Lee did so, he look around. He saw the people gathered on that side of the open space, about a hundred feet from Lotton and himself. With Lotton and himself, approaching them. He also saw, in the distance, on the other side of the open space, was where the women and men had parked their vehicles.
Lee could also tell that the saw him and Lotton.
Lee saw that the group was in a semi-circle, with the peoples backs to the open field, and their vehicles, in the distance.
Lotton order, “Head to just in front of the center of the semi-circle.”
Lee remained silent, but her heard the white haired woman.
As they continued walking, Lee looked at the buildings, he saw there were ground level concrete decks, and warehouse doors by a few of the buildings. He thought, 'Some items this factory makes are likely shipped by trucks, here. Also, there is not a lot of cover in this area. Which means, I cannot just bolt, and try to run for it.'
'And their vehicles are too far away, and between these people, and me, for me to try to use them for cover. Or, even steal one of them. If I even could. Hot-wiring a car takes time, and I don't have a key to any of them.'
'Also, given the number of them at are armed, if I reach for my reality device in my coat, a few of them will likely shoot me. Possibly fatally.'
'Still, I believe they are all here. And I can not account for all of them. Meaning, that if I am able to pull something. There are not wildcards, waiting in the wings.'
(_)
Meanwhile, along the group of people, what watched Lee and Lotton approach them. Violin recognized the tone, as she stated, “I cannot believe Lee is literally whistling Dixie. I got to hand it to him. He has guts.”
(_)
When Lee overheard Violin, in distance. He thought, 'Time for my game face. And I think it is best to remain silent, and not do anything else to provoke them. I am now playing a delicate waiting game.'
Lee stopped whistling, put on his poker face, and remained silent.
Lee soon approached the large group after him, whom were standing a semi-circle, which Lotton was leading him towards the center of, and the adults stood about twenty feet from him, with Lee being in the center of the semi-circle.
Lee remained silent, as he reached the center of the semi-circle. It was then that Lotton ordered, “Stop.”
Lee did so, as he turned to face the group of people.
Meanwhile, Lotton then walked around, to stand beside Sawyer and Shenhua. As she did so, she pointed her pistol away from everyone. She then used her hands to removed the ammo magazine, remove the bullet from the chamber, dry fire the pistol, into the ground, do decock it. She placed the spare bullet into the extender magazine, giving the magazine twenty rounds. She placed the magizine back into her semi-automatic pistol. And she then holstered her pistol, back in right side holster, on her belt, under her coat.
Lee silently watched all this, as he face the group, with a calm, neutral expression on his face.
Lee also look around at the people in front of him. Though, he did not move his head. Instead, he used his eyes, with his shades hiding his eye movements, to look around, as he visually read the people in front of him.
As far as the others were concerned, Lee was just staring directly in front of them.
In front of himself, Lee has accounted for everyone that had chased him into the factory complex was there, with most of them still having their weapons in hand. But, none of them were pointing their weapons at him, nor each other.”
Lee thought, 'Let's see who is here. Besides Lotton. All ten members of the Lagoon family. The Bebop Crew, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Eda. Six members of the Serenity crew are here. Including Jayne, whom is now back to being a man. Aeryn, Violin, Balalaika, and B are here. I also see Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, and their three daughters. Now, what is their general mood?'
Though his sunglasses, Lee looked, in more detail, at the faces of those staring back at him.
Given the light from the outside building lights, Lee could still see clearly with his sunglasses on.
Lee could see the look of excitement on the faces of most of the adults facing him. He saw that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru has expressions of indifference towards Lee. With Lee seeing looks of pity from the eyes of Eda and Sawyer.
The three trio sisters, and the Lagoon sisters had mixed reactions on their faces, from pity, to sadness.
Lee thought, with concern, 'Well, I am now neck deep in it. And it clear from the looks on their faces, that talking will not get any of the people here to help me. I think the best I can expect from Eda, Sawyer, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, and the eight teenage adults, is that they won't participate in my torture.'
'And while I have a grenade. It would be useless to bluff my way out of here with just one grenade. Some of them, like Mal, and Spike, would gladly shoot and kill me at the smallest hint of a threat to them, and their friends.'
'Besides which. I cannot out run them. And with Lotton here, that makes thirty-three badasses right in front of me. Most of whom want to torture me. My only hope is to remain quiet, and try escape in the confusion. While they likely try to fight over me like a piece of meat, to a pack of starving wolves. While Lotton said that she had first dibs. These people are not know for restraint. This could turn into a fight real easily.'
'Though, if I try to start a fight. Given how sharp the people are here, it will likely backfire on me.'
'And I feel this is truly my best chance. Because my plan H is looking dimmer by the second.'
'Still, I can use my reality device, if things get too tricky. But, I will have to create a distraction to do so. My grenade can do it, but not in such an open environment. I did not want to seriously harm, nor kill them. But, I am sure, if I am patient, the opportunity will arise for me to use my grenade.'
'Also, I know that there are a few places in the multiverse they will not immediately follow me to, because they are not as crazy and desperate as I am.'
'Now, to listen to some of them gloat, while I figure out my next move. Their gloating will buy me a few minutes. And I need every second I can get.'
Near the center of the group, in front of him, Lee saw Revy and Rock standing in front. Revy to Lee's left, and Rock to his right.
Revy smirked, as she stated, in a smug, arrogant tone of voice, “Well. Well. Well. We finally got you, Lee.”
Lee faced Revy. Though, he chose to remain silent, as he stood in place, with his hands up.
Revy turned to Lotton, as she congratulated her, “Good work, Lotton. As promised, you will have first dibs on Lee.”
Lotton turned to Revy, as she responded, “Thank you.” She then looked at Lee, Lee could see from her facial expression that her heart was no in her words, as she continued, “And I assure you. I don't have much planned for Lee. I will leave plenty for the rest of you.”
Revy turned to Lee, as her smirk turned into feral grin. She stated, “I am sure you will.”
Jayne spoke up, “Where is, Vera, Lee?”
Lee flatly answered, “Twenty-second story of the building I just came out of. In the hallway leading to the northeast stairwell. You can probably see it when you are standing at the stairwell entrance. It is in the hallway facing the door to the stairwell. Though, the weapon had an unfortunate accident.”
Janet shift uncomfortably.
Jayne questioned, “What accident?”
Lee answered, “Let's just say the barrel needs replacing.”
Jayne warned, “That better be all.”
Lee answered, “It is.”
Mal stated, “Jayne, you can go get, Vera, after this conversation is over.”
Jayne continued looking at Lee, as he commented, “Alright, captain.”
Revy ordered, “Lee, I don't want you to get any ideas of escape. I want you on your knees, with you hands staying up, where they are at.”
Lee remained calm, and silent, as he did was instructed to do. He bend down, to where he was sitting on the group, with his legs tucked under him, while he kept his hands up, and level with his head.
Revy walked towards him, until she was less than three feet in front of him.
Lee calmly looked up at her face, through his sunglasses, as she looked down at him, with a scowl on her face.
Revy hissed, “What? No insults? No witty comebacks?”
Lee remained silent.
As Revy used her right foot to kick Lee in his lower stomach, she demanded, in a barking tone of voice, “Say something, Lee.”
As the blow to his stomach made him grunt, he expelled air from his lungs, but he forced himself not to falter. And so, he remained in his position, while showing no other sides of distress, as he continued to calmly look up at Revy.
Revy immediately used her right hand to pulled out her semi-automatic pistol, under her left armpit.
She then pointed the end of her barrel between Lee's eyes, with less than an inch from Lee's forehead.
Lee could see Revy had her right trigger finger on the trigger of her pistol.
Revy ordered, in a loud, angry tone of voice, “Talk, Lee! Or, else!”
Lee showed not hints of worry on his face, as he looked up at Revy's face. He calmly said, “If you put a bullet between my eyes, I will die quick, and happy. And you will have to deal with your very upset friends, whom are right behind you.”
Revy immediately raised her gun into the air, with her firing a few rounds of ammo upward, from the barrel of her pistol, as she yelled, “Damn! Damn! Damn! Why do you have to make so much sense, Lee?!”
Lee could see a few snickers in the crowd behind in front of him, and behind Revy, as Revy had her tantrum.
Revy then suddenly stopped firing. She turned to Lee, as she smirked. She said, “Still, that does not mean we cannot maim you.”
Lee showed no outward expression, as he grimly thought, 'Given the placement of my hands, if she does bring her weapon around to shoot me, I can pull her weapon from her with my left hand, while grabbing her right wrist, yanking her down on top of me. Then, it becomes a wrestling match, that I am not sure I can win.'
'And while we do that, the others won't shoot at me, because of the chance of hitting Revy.'
'Though, no matter which one of us wins, afterward, things are going to get very ugly for me. Still, I will not let her shoot me for her own amusement, without a fight.'
Then, just as Revy was bringing her pistol back towards Lee, and Lee was getting ready to fight Revy, while Revy pistols was pointed away from everyone, Lee saw a glint of metal pass between the two of them, from Lee's upper right, that knocked Revy's pistol away from them, to Lee's left.
Fortunately, the gun did not misfire, as it was jerked from Revy's fingers, and landed onto the paved ground.
Everyone immediately looked at the pistol laying on the ground.
They saw a six inch long, chrome, metal needle sticking through the barrel of Revy's pistol.
Lee immediately recognized was that needled was. He remained outwardly calm, as he thought, with concern, 'I know that ammo... Let's see judging from the angle, they fired from my upper right side.'
Lee and the others then look to Lee's upper right, the crowd's back left, to see, standing on a nearby third story, steel reinforced, concrete, balcony, behind a steel railings, on the side of a twenty-six story building, eight colored hardsuits, standing in a row.
All the hardsuits had feminine figures, with their helmets on and their visors down. Meaning, there were women wearing the powersuits.
In order, from left to right, was a gray hardsuit, a white hardsuit, a green hardsuit, a blue
hardsuit, a light cyan hardsuit, red and pink hardsuit, a yellow hardsuit, and an orange hardsuit.
All the hardsuited women were facing down, towards the people on the ground.
The faceplates on their helmets were down, preventing those on the ground from seeing their faces. Also, Linna did not have ribbons attached to the sides of her head. And while their hardsuits did not look that different than they originally were, their boot heels were less high than previous versions of hardsuits.
Lee thought, with worry, 'Yep. It is the Knight Sabers. And the only reasons they would be here, is obviously for my ass, as well... This night is just getting more interesting by the minute. On the bright side. It looks like they will be tearing into each other, for me. The problem is, that people are going to get hurt and likely killed. And no matter what I do, someone is going to start a fight. Unless, I can make them see reason.'
'The multiverse does have a twisted sense of humor. Most of the people here want to torture and kill me. But, I am going to try to kill them from harming and killing each other.'
'Though, first I need to know who shot that round. And I can work form there.'
Lee then noticed that the blue hardsuit was pointing her right gauntlet at them, with the slots for her wrist mounted rail-guns open. She was also using her left gauntlet holding her armored right forearm, to steady her aim.
Lee thought, 'The blue one is obviously, Priss. Same style hardsuit, and weapons, She clearly used one of her wrist mounted rail-guns to damage one of Revy's pistol. And that was clearly a warning shot. Though, Revy was already angry with me. And damaging one of Revy's cutlasses is going to piss Revy off even further. Still, Revy anger is not directed towards someone else. So, that is better for me. For the moment.'
'And though their faceplates are down, for anyone familiar with the Bubblegum Crisis OVA series, and my stories, it does not take a genius to figure out who is who.'
'Let's see, if I can figure out who is who. Blue is Priss. White is Sylia. Green is Linna. Red and pink is Nene. The other four are Leon, Daley, Mackie, and Kate. With Leon Daley, and Mackie having their gender bent into women in book two of my stories... Among other things, with the other five members...'
'Among the other colors, yellow is the easy one. Mackie used a yellow mech in Bubblgum Crisis OVA, episode eight, Scoop Chase.'
'Since the color cyan is a similar the color blue. And both colors can be associated with the police, and Priss already has a blue hardsuit, I am guessing the cyan one is Leon. And Daley is flamboyant enough in personality to pull off orange. And the gray one is likely Kate. Because the color gray is considered a professional color in business suits and dresses.'
'And I noticed the heels on their armored boots are a bit shorted. I guess the others had a long talk with Sylia, about hardsuit design, in the following years since the fall of the tower. And if they stayed in the Black Lagoon reality, and they are running on the same time as the Lagoon members here, that would be around two decades. That is a lot of time to do a lot of things. Not just revenge against me. And those hardsuits probably have gone through a number of upgrades through the years.'
'Among those upgrades are likely the retractable mono-molecular ribbons on the sides of Linna's helmet. While, it was an upgrade only shown in Bubblegum Crash, which did not happen for these eight people. It is logical that Sylia and Mackie would make that upgrade for Linna's hardsuit.'
'And this is also likely why Sylia did not say, Knight Sabers. It is show time. Or, Knight Saber Sanjo. Because the other members of the group finally convinced her how corny it was.'
'Though, I will worry about that later. Survival comes first.'
'And while their voices will be different from the english dub, and japanese dub, I will try to note who is who, by which voice comes from which hardsuit.'
Though, it was Janet whom spoke first, as she asked, “The Knight Sabers. Plus four. What are they doing here?”
Lee continued looking at the Knight Sabers, as he calmly answered, “Book Two. Chapter Four. The Fall of Megatokyo.”
It took a moment for the others to recall what happened in that chapter. As Janet did so, she said, “Oh... Well Lee, you are screwed.”
Lee deadpanned, “Line forms to the left.”
Rock continued to look at the Knight Sabers, as she thought, 'This is big trouble. And I doubt Lee is the one who invited these women to the party. He would know better... But, then who did?... That is a problem for another time. Right now, I need to keep everyone calm, before someone starts a fight that gets everyone kill.' She ordered, in a stern tone of voice, “Everyone, keep your weapons down. Do not provoke them.”
Natsuru said, “Akira, Ranma, and I, know these people. They know us. They won't fight us, unless we provoke them.”
Given two of the most sane members of their group had told them not to provoke the Knight Sabers, the others in Rock and Revy's group followed Rock's orders.
Even Revy heard Rock's order and understood. Though, Revy still looked over, and up at Priss, in her blue hardsuit, as she yelled., “Bitch! You are going to pay for damaging my cutlass!”
Rock inwardly winced, as she thought, 'It figures that Revy would complain about her pistol. Though, as long as she is complaining at them, she is less likely to shoot at them.'
Priss, using her speakers, to give an electronic style of voice, said, in an arrogant tone of voice, in english, “I would like to see you try,”
Lee thought, with concern, 'While I did plan for them to fight over me, like a piece of meat, without the tearing parts. I did not plan for another group to show up, and create such a lopsided situation. And as much as I would like this to devolve into a fight, I need to keep this civil for a few more minutes. To do that, I first need to know how damaged Revy's pistol is.'
Lee turned his attention to Revy's pistol, on the ground. He noticed that the end of barrel was damaged, with the metal needle sticking through through the barrel, right passed the slide. With no other part of the pistol damaged. He thought, 'Good. Priss is such an excellent shot with her rail-gun, and hardsuit heads up display, that I can salvage the situation. Now, to de-rev, Revy... He, he, he...'
Lee turned to look Revy at in her face. He calmly requested, “Revy, look at your pistol. Your pistol will be fine. All it needs is the barrel replaced. I know you can do that one your own. Though, if you weapon needs any serious repairs, I know for a fact there is a master gunsmith in Plata Podrido that Pedro can get you in touch with.”
Revy turned to gaze at her pistol, as she leaned over and picked up her damaged cutlass. As she did so, she then used the safety level on the pistol, to carefully decocked the hammer of her pistol, and at the same time, setting the safety on the firearm.
A few seconds later, she leaned back up, and looked over to Lee. She commented, in a cool tone of voice, “Well then, I am now glad I did not kill Police Chief Del Soto.”
Lee replied, “So am I.”
Revy shrugged, “I have a spare barrel in my hotel room, back in town. It is an easy fix. Though, don't think them showing up is going to help you escape.”
Lee honestly responded, “I am more concern with surviving the here and now, than escaping.”
Both of them joined the rest of the people on the ground, as they looked back up at the Knight Sabers, whom were still standing on the third story balcony.
Natsuru looked up at the Knight Sabers, as she said, in english, “Hi guys. Been a while.”
Natsuru recognized Daley female voice, as Daley in the orange hardsuit, said, in english, “Yes, it has Natsuru. I see that your daughters are looking good.”
Lee overheard the conversation, as he thought, 'While I didn't write it, it is not surprising that the Knight Sabers and Natsuru's family did visit each other over the years. Even after Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto were born.'
Natsuru answered, “Yes. How are your children?”
Daley answered, “All of them are fine.”
Natsuru heard Leon's female voice come from the light cyan hardsuit speaker, as Leon calmly stated, in english, “It is good to see you, girls. Sorry, it is not under better circumstances.”
Akira spoke up, as she conceded, “It could be better. But, I think we could work something out. I will let Rock, one of our leaders, handle the talking.”
Rock requested, in a loud, though even, tone of voice, in english, “Hello. I wish to speak with the leader of your group.”
On the balcony, while wearing her white hardsuit, Sylia spoke, in a calm tone of voice, in english, “Then, you wish to address, myself. And we have no interest in harming any of you, save for Lee. To that end, we would like you to hand Lee over to us.”
Dutch stated, “We were here first.”
Benny commented, “We do not need any Johnny come latelys.”
Spike asked, “What happened to first come, first serve?”
Sylia answered, “You are the foxes that caught the chicken. And we are the dogs that are taking the chicken from you.”
Aeryn suggested, “Before this turns into a firefight. How about we let it be Lee's choice?”
Violin complimented, “Good idea”
Dutch grinned wickedly, as she said, “Now, that is what I call a sadist choice... I like it.”
Sylia conceded, “Such an answer could be amusing to hear.”
Everyone turned to looked at Lee.
Lee looked over at the group on the ground, as he stated, in a straightforward manner, “Given what I did to both your groups. And also, taking into account some good will I have given to your group, Aeryn. I rather go with your group. With you guys, there is better chance for a quick death, for myself...” He turned back to look at the Knight Sabers, as he continued, “With them not by much.”
Balalaika inquired, in a cold tone of voice, “But, I thought you were worried we would hand you over to the maids?”
Lee turned to look at Balalaika, as he casually stated, “Bel, if this goes badly, the maids will be the least of my worries. The Knight Sabers have the advantage here. We are in open area, with no immediate cover. They are in power armor, with weapons, aiming at a downward angle. They literally have the high ground. Most of your weapons will not piece their armor.”
“And even if you were able to reach them, for hand to hand combat. Between their skills, power armor, and melee weapons, they would easily kill you.”
“Also, given they are here, I would guess their hardsuits have build in reality devices, for quick escape. Like the Hell Saber hardsuits. Which I am sure Sylia is royally pissed with me over using her technology for such actions.”
From the balcony, Sylia calmly commented, “Among other things.”
On the balcony, near Sylia, inside her yellow hardsuit, Mackie flatly stated, in english, “It is a long list.”
Lee heard the comments of both Stingray siblings. He thought, 'The sound sensors, and speakers, in those suits can probably allow them to hear every word we make down here.'
Lee did not turned to face the Knight Sabers, as he continued looking at Balalaika. He said, “The only good news is I do not see their motoslaves. And they seem to be on friendly terms with Natsuru's family. Whom are here. So, the Knight Sabers are less likely to attack you.”
“But, that also means that if you start a fight with the Knight Sabers, Natsuru and her family here would be less inclined to defend you. And without Natsuru and her family's abilities to aid you all, in a long range fight, your group's odds of just surviving, let along achieving victory, in a battle with the Knight Sabers, in this situation, are very slim.”
Balalaika responded, in a chilly tone of voice, “Point taken. And don't call me, Bel, again.”
Lee replied, in an even tone of voice, “Yes, ma'am.”
Balalaika smiled towards Lee, in response to his comment towards her.
Aeryn inquired, “What about Violin, and I?”
Violin said, “Good question.”
Lee turned to Aeryn and Violin, whom were standing beside each other, to Lee's left of the group. Lee answered, “I know what you are thinking Aeryn. And even if your pulse pistols can penetrate their armor. Which is questionable. It would still be a hard fight for you.”
“Also, Violin don't even think about going hand to hand with them. I am sure you have seen all eight BGC OVAs. Not just the three we watched together. Though, you are super-fast and super-strong. You are not that well trained a fighter. And while you are physically tough, their range weapon can penetrate your hide. Along with those weapons, their melee weaponry is even more dangerous.”
“I don't even know what surprises the four new members have, but of the original four, three of them are skills fighters. Those being, Sylia, Priss, and Linna. White, Blue, and Green suits, respectively. Each of them use differing weapons and tactics in their fighting styles. And each of them have the skills and resources to kill you.”
“Sylia has her hand cannons and wrist blades. Priss has her fist weapons, rail-guns, and explosives. And Linna is the most dangerous of those three in hand to hand combat. She has weapons on her fists and feet. Also, her head mono-molecular ribbons, which pop out of the sides of her head, can literally cut you to pieces in the blind of an eye.”
“And that is not even counting the four new members, and whatever weapons Nene's suit now has. Which I can only guess at. Among other things. I am sure the other five are now well trained hardsuit fighters, as well.”
“And that is not even counting how their physical enhancements, from the super-soldier serum, which allows them to push the limits of their hardsuits.”
“And because of all these factors, even I am not that sure what all of their capabilities are.”
“Keep in mind that these women were trained for, and their hardsuits were designed, to fight toe to toe with humanoid killing machines. And their results speak for themselves.”
From the balcony, Sylia said, “Thank you.”
Lee looked up at Sylia, as he said, “You're welcome.” He then turned back to Violin and Aeryn, as he concluded his explanation, “So, as you can understand, and as I already said. Any battle between you and them, would be a long range battle. And, from what I am seeing, your biggest guns in that department, right now, are the elemental and energy abilities of Natsuru, and her family.”
Violin said, “Okay. I appreciate the warning.”
Aeryn replied, “As do I.”
Lee replied, “No problem.” He thought, 'As strange as it is. I really don't want anyone to get hurt, or killed, over me. Of course if I said that. It would ruin the mood.'
Natsuru commented, “The gears of your mind are truly something to behold, Lee.”
Lee turned to Natsuru, as he inquired, “Thank you. So, was I correct?”
Natsuru answered, “Let us just put it this way. My family, and I, would prefer not to find out.”
Lee saw Akira, Ranma, Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika, nod in agreement with Natsuru's comment.
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Rock turned to look at her group, as she said, “Yes. Lee is right this.” She then turned back to look up at the Knight Sabers, as she sincerely offered, “Perhaps we can work out something.”
Sylia honestly responded, “Perhaps.”
Spike looked over at Lee. She smirked, as she commented, “Looks like your ass is now up for auction, Lee.”
Shenhua pulled out her kukri long knives, with her right hand. She held the flat of blade, of her knife, against her chest. She smiled innocently, as she said, in sweet tone of voice, “Be happy we don't quarter you, and sell you in pieces.”
Lee turned to Shenhua. He raised an eyebrow, as he calming inquired, “Shenhua, I thought we settled your issues with me?”
Shenhua innocent smile, turned into a smirked, as she responded, “We did. But, that does not mean that I cannot joke about it.” She then put away her long knife.
Lee chose to remain silent, while keeping a neutral expression, as the everyone else, laughed at Shenhua's joke.
Shenhua soon joined in on the laughter.
As everyone else laughed at Lee, and his situation, Lee calmly thought, 'I need to ignore them. As long as they are negotiating, there is still an opening for me to escape. I just have to wait for the proper time to act.'
As the two groups started to calm down, everyone started to hear a buzzing noise, coming from the sky above the. A buzzing noise that was getting closer.
Lee thought, 'Screw negotiation. I think my salvation just arrived.'
Lotton asked, “What is that sound?”
As the sound became ear piecing, Lee stood up using only his legs and feet. While he stood up, he lowered his hands to his sides. He smirked, as he said, “I believe that is my ride.”
Suddenly, a flying drone plane dropped from the sky, like a hawk, as it extended a net below itself, and scooped up Lee, from Lee's right to left, as it quickly rose back up, into the sky, away from the other people, with the writer in tow.
As this happen, Lee immediately made his body into a ball, to protect himself from anyone that shot at him.
Though, right before the net captured Lee, Revy was forced to jump back, to avoid behind his by the net. But, she quickly recovered her footing, as, while she held her damaged pistols, by its barrel, in her right hand. She pulled out her already loaded pistol, under her right armpit, with her left hand, as she shoot at the escaping drone.
More than a few other women and men in the various groups took shots at the drone, as well. But, the flying drone was to fast, with the shots missing both it and Lee.
Meanwhile Rock noticed, that as soon as Lee was in the air, the buzzing disappeared.
Rock though, 'That sound must have been an auditory weapon, to distract us. But, who would sent that... Oh no. We waited too long.' She then looked at the others on the ground, as she mentally noted, 'They are rightfully pissed. And I would guess that the Knight Sabers are angry, as well. I might give them minute to calm down, before I tell them that the police will be here soon. Though, I have no doubt we can handle them, if we have too.'
At the moment, after Revy realized her shots missed, she yelled, “Damn you, Lee!” She then muttered, “I cannot believe Lee escaped, right in front of us, again.”
Eda overheard Revy, along with a few others. Eda complimented, “The man understands the value of timing.”
Lotton and Violin started laughing at Eda's comment, and the sheer absurdity of Lee's escape.
Between laughs, Lotton said, “He did say that he had plan H. I just didn't see how it was going to happen. Of course. He said he was not sure. So, that is why I didn't bring it up with everyone.”
Nodoka said, “That doesn't matter. Though, I guess plan H stands for, help, or hostage rescue?”
Lotton turned to Nodoka. She was still giggling, as she she stated, “That would be a good guess.”
As Lotton and Violin calmed down, Violin commented, “That boy has become one hell of an escape artist.”
Aeryn turned to Violin, as she said, “I think this escape ranks up there with some of yours.”
Violin turned to Aeryn, as she replied, “Yea. And it was surprising, to boot.”
Eda commented, “I wish he was this surprising in bed.”
Violin and Lotton then doubled over laughing at Eda's comment.
Meanwhile, Mal looked up at the Knight Saber, as he asked, “Why didn't your sensors pick up that thing.”
Sylia looked down at Mal, as she answered, “Unfortunately, due to is being so low, and between the sides these buildings, our sensors were masked.”
Spike inquired, “And let me guess. You lost track of it.”
Sylia answered, “Correct. And unfortunately, the remote flying machine is taking signals from an antenna on part of the dome. So, we cannot trace those remotely flying it back to their headquarters.”
Jetta had been overhearing the conversation between Mal and Sylia. She commented, “That figures.”
Dutch said, “So, all this was a delaying action on Lee's part.”
Benny commented, “That man seems to have become a master of delays, bluffs, and counter moves.”
Dutch stated, “And that is exactly what one would expect from a master gambler.”
B asked, “Still, who sent that flying machine?”
Dutch pointed out, “Who else? The cops.”
A second later they began to heard sirens in the distance.
Dutch deadpanned, “Speak of the devil.”
Rock ordered, “Everyone get to your vehicles, and teleport to the agreed upon emergency rendezvous location, in the doom location. Also, you make sure you remain in their point of time, when you arrive at the rendezvous location.” Rock turned to the Knight Sabers, as she stated, “And Knight Sabers, just teleport to somewhere safe in the dome. As soon as we find out where Lee is being held, we will get in touch with you.”
Sylia said, into their radios, “Rock, when you are ready to resume your chance, we will be listening by radio. Let us know. And we will aid you.”
Rock pulled out her radio, as she said, “Okay. We will work out the details to our deal later.” She mentally reflected, 'They broke our encryption, and that is how they monitored us. Though, I don't have a clue how they found out about Lee, and his stories. Let alone got here. And I doubt Lee knows as well... Still, that is a mystery for another time.'
Sylia replied, “That will be fine.”
A second later, the Knight Sabers instantly disappeared, as they used the reality devices built into this hardsuits, to teleport somewhere else.
Meanwhile, everyone on the ground turned and ran across the open field, to their vehicles, and zipcraft. They then used the reality devices built in their vehicles to teleport away, to another part of the domed city they were inside of.
Two minutes after everyone was gone, the police finally arrived, to found they had missed the party. And now the police had to piece together what happened.
(_)
At that moment, Lee was carried in the net, in the air, by the drone, towards the city.
Fortunately, there was no buzzing sound, and it was a fairly pleasant ride.
Also, the drone has slowed down a little, making the ride less unpleasant.
As Lee rode in the net, he looked up at underbelly of the drone. Even with his sunglasses on, from the lights of the city, that were getting ever closer, he could see that it was shaped like a giant hawk profile, with two jets where the wings met the body. With the netting located where the talons were suppose to be.
While the wind blew through the net, and onto him, and his hair, he thought, 'I guess that guard got through to the police. As I had hoped he would. And this netting is holding me in a way that is not to uncomfortable. With the drone slowing down to the point the breeze is not that bad. This is good. Now, I have to figure out what I am going to say to the police. And in doing so, how I can convince the police to let me go, before the those after me, track me down, again.'
'Though, for right now. I will just enjoy the ride.'
Lee then leaned back in the netting, as he watching from his aerial view, as he approached the cityscape of illuminated buildings, in the darkness, under the very large, very high dome, of Mars Dome One.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 07: “The Ghost and The Darkness.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Babylon Five Reality. Date, January Twenty-Eighth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Location, planet Mars. City, Mars Dome One, capital of Mars. The third story of a five story police station, on the north part of the interior city of dome that surrounds Mars Dome One from the outside atmosphere of Mars. Time, close to midnight.
Twenty minutes after being rescued by the flying hawk shaped drone, Lee had been dropped off, and out of the net, that was carrying him, and onto the top of the five story building, that Lee guessed was a local police station, given he was greet and escorted inside, by the police.
As the police lead Lee to a nearby elevator bay, with them escorting him to the third floor, by one of the elevators, Lee noticed the signs to doors, by the elevators, that were located in the same locations, on both floors. With the signs stating, in english, that the doors lead to the stairwell.
Lee also paid close attention, to the path on which he was being escorted through the building.
This allowed Lee to know where both the elevators and the stairwell were located in the building, in relation to where he was situated in the building, at any give time.
Fortunately, given Lee was told he was not under arrest, the police did not pat him down, and instead they just had him walk through the security scanner, which stated he was clean, and he had no weapons on him.
Though, they did request which identicard. Which Lee gave them. And after they recorded the ID, they handed the card back to Lee. And Lee pocketed his identicard card, where he had kept it on his person.
Also, the police officers allowed him to keep his sunglasses on, as they lead him down to the third floor.
And they soon took him to a well illuminated, interrogation room, where the had him sitting down in a chair, at a table. There were two chairs at the table, facing each other, from across the table. And the chair that the police had Lee sit in was the chair facing the door to the room.
The chairs were black painted, metal, armless chairs. The table was a black painted, metal, square, four legged chair, that was four feet by four feet wide, and was just high enough for Lee's legs to go under the table itself.
The room itself was twenty feet long, from the door, to the opposite wall from the door. Ten feet wide, from mirror to the other wall across from the mirror. And the ceiling was eight feet from the floor.
The table and chairs were placed in the center of the room.
And the door outwards, from the room, in a counterclockwise direction.
The walls were painted white. The door was painted black. The ceiling was a white dropped down ceiling. The only lighting in the room was from the a white florescent set of lights in the center of the ceiling. And the floor was tiled by one foot by one foot wide, light brown, spectacle linoleum tiles.
The chair Lee was in, was beside a simple four legged table, with another chair across from him. The walls were bare, save for the large, rectangular mirror, on the middle of the wall to Lee's left side. The mirror was longer from side to side, than in height.
One Lee had been seated, the police left him, alone, in the room, as they shut the door behind them. Lee did not bother to test to see if the door was locked, or not.
Lee looked around the room, as he thought, 'To my left is a mirror, which was obviously a one-way mirrored window that is bordered with another room. And besides the table, chairs, door, and mirror, there was nothing else in this white painted room. With a white walls, door, ceiling, and tiles.'
'The lighting is provided by a dual, soft white, fluorescent lighting duct. And while I do not see a camera, nor microphone in the room. I am sure there are a few hidden in this room. That is why I am not moving from this chair. Nor, am I going to see if the door to this room is locked, or unlocked. There is not point in doing so, this early in this round of my game. Still, I have a moment to catch my breath, which is good.'
Lee then looked directly ahead, towards the black paint door, with a neutral expression on his face, as he took off his sunglasses. He folded, and put away his sunglasses an interior coat pocket.
Lee mentally noted, 'Also, it is good that they have not arrested me. Nor, did they search me. I guess my one grenade, hologram device next to my watch, and my reality device in my pants pocket, did not trigger their sensors. I guess those devices are so different, from the norm, when it comes to technology, that both these devices did not trip the security scanners. And I will count myself lucky on that matter. If they catch me with those device, it would cause some bad problems for me. But, it was worth the risk to keep those items on me.'
'Still, I have got to convince them to let me go. Which is easier said than done.'
'But, not at the moment. While my time is limited. It is best that give them the opportunity to make the first move. Having them make the first move is a good negotiation tactic on my part. And letting the other party begin discussions has served me well in the past.'
Lee then quietly waited a few minutes. Though, no one came.
It was then that Lee mentally realized, 'They want me to sweat a little. While they try to piece together what happened in the factory complex, with the video records, and the guard's police statement, before they talk to me. The problem is, I do not have time for this. It looks like I am going to have to speak first, and step up the next part of my plan.'
Lee looked at the door in front of him, as he said, out loud, “I want to talk. I know you can hear me. I will freely answer any questions you have. But, time is limited, for all of us. So, please come, and speak to me.”
(_)
A full minute later, two detectives walked into the room, they shut the door behind them.
Lee saw that both men had fair skinned, and in good shape. The men wearing nice gray suits, with blue ties, and black dress shoes. Both men were both in their early to mid thirties.
Lee watched as one of them walked over to the chair across the table from Lee, and sat down. While the other man stood to Lee's left side, next to his partner. With both men looking at Lee.
The one whom sat down across from Lee, introduced himself, and his partner, “I am detective Maxwell. This is detective Barton.”
Detective Barton said, in a stern tone of voice, “Your ID says that you are Ello Gray. But, we think that is fake.”
Detective Maxwell offered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “If you help us, we can help you.”
Lee sighed, as he said, “I don't believe this. I am personally experiencing the good cop, bad cop routine. It has been done to death. I freely admit that it is an alias. I am not that worried about going to prison over it. Because if you don't let me go soon, those that are after me will come here, for me.”
Detective Maxwell asked, “Who are these people? And why are they after?”
Lee calmly stated, “The who and why are not the most important points of this matter, right now. What is important is that the people that are after me will go through you to get to me. And you cannot stop them. As such, none of us have time for this. So, you need to let me go.”
“Now, I am sure you don't believe what I have already said. And that is nothing compared to what I have to say.”
“So, let us cut to the chase. Go get the telepath you have on staff. I am sure you have one. Bring him, or her, here, to scan my mind. Because anything, from here on, that I tell you, in complete honesty, you will not believe a word of. But, you will trust one of your own. I hope. If there are any papers I need to sign first, I will. But, for legal reasons, I am using the Ello Gray alias, because there are no records of me here. Except for the alias. As far as your computers are concerned. I do not exist here. So, please hurry.”
Both detectives looked each other, they then turned to look back at Lee.
Detective Maxwell warned, “You better not be joking here, or we will have your ass.”
Lee flatly replied, “My ass is the least of my concerns.”
Detective Barton turned to Maxwell, as he stated, “I will go get, Mister Dresden.”
Barton then turned, walked to the door, opened it, walked out of the interrogation room, and closed the door being himself, while Maxwell stayed with Lee.
(_)
Three minutes later, outside, two women were standing in an alleyway, across the street, caddy corner, from front of the police station, when looking out from the front of police station. The police station was to this forward right.
The street that passed by the front of the police station, ran parallel with the alleyway, with that street being between the police station and the alleyway to the women were standing in. Though, the alleyway deadened into a street in a perpendicular direction, with that street connecting
The other side of the street the alleyway deadened to was fenced in parking lot.
From their vantage point, the two women watched as four white cars approach the police station, by passing them, on the street that lead passed the front of the police station.
The front car came to a stop by the nearly empty parking lot across the street from the front of the police station. The other three cars, behind the lead car, turned into the parking lot.
The women watched the car that has stopped on the street. The back doors of the car opened, with three humans, two men, and a woman, exited the backseat. And they shut the doors behind them. All of three adults wore black and gray shirts, pants, and shoes. One of their walked up to the left side driver's door. The driver's side window was rolled down, and they saw the man talking to another man, whom was driving.
Meanwhile, the other man, and the woman walked towards the parking lot, where the other three cars had parked.
A few seconds later, the two women watched as the man outside the car, turn and walk over to join his friends, as the driver's door window rolled up, and the car heading for the multilevel garage that was set beside the police station. With the entrance being by the front left side of the police station, when facing it.
As the second man in black and gray reached the three cars in the parking lot, the women watched as the others got out of the three cars, with them shutting the doors behind them.
In all, there were twelve adults that had exited the vehicles, and stood next to each other, on the parking lot. Six humans and six minbari. Five human men, one human woman, four minbari men, and two minbari women.
All of them were clearly minbari trained rangers.
As the two women continued to look on, the older woman said, in spanish, “Let us go greet them.”
The younger woman commented, in spanish, “That is a wonderful idea.”
As both women walked out of the alleyway, across the empty street, and towards the parking lot.
A minute later, they reached the parking lot entrance, they walked towards the twelve rangers.
They saw the twelve ranges had remained grouped together, though they had moved away from the three cars.
As the two women got closer they overheard one of the human men say, in english, “Alright, we need to form into groups, and patrol the area. We are looking for anyone suspicious...” The man noticed the two women coming towards them, as he continued, “Nevermind. It looks like trouble found us.”
The twelve rangers then turned to look at the two women, whom were approaching them.
A few seconds later, the two women came to a stop, twenty feet away from the rangers.
There was silence for several seconds, between the two groups, as they stared at each other.
The rangers saw that the two women were in their mid to late thirties. Both had long hair, that went down below their waist lines, and was tied at multiple pointed along their back. Both wear black and white maids uniforms, with black dress shoes. Though, there was nothing on their face, nor heads. No bonnets. No glasses.
Both women approached to be in very good physical shape.
One of the women had fair skin and purple hair. She appeared to be in her mid-twenties.
The other women had tanned skin and green hair. She appeared to be in her late twenties.
Also, the purple haired woman had a necklace with a golden cross set against the front of her chest.
The two women stood next to each other, with the purple haired woman standing to the green haired woman's left side.
A few seconds later, the lead human man broke the silence, as he said, in a neutral tone of voice, “This is none of your concern. Walk away.”
The elder, purple haired woman's lips curled into a wicked smile, as she said, in a silently humorous tone of voice, in english, “Funny. That is what we were going to say to you.”
The rangers could tell the two women were trouble, and they were not going to back down.
All the rangers pulled out their collapsed fighting pikes, and extended them. They all held their fighting pikes in offense stances, with both hands, as the lead human man sternly stated, “You do not want to fight us. Be warned. This is your last chance. We live for the one. We die for the one.”
The elder woman calmly said, “So, do we. It is just we live and die for a different one.” She turned to the younger women beside her, as she commented, “Would you agree that the type of group these people belong to would cause us great trouble, if we killed them.”
The younger, green haired woman looked over at the elder woman, as she agreed, in english, “From what I remember of them. Yes. Also, they would take it personally if we even physically crippled one of them.”
The elder woman stated, in a calm tone of voice, “Then, we will only cripple their pride. And as an added challenge, we will do so unarmed.”
The younger woman casually responded, “Yes. No weapons is fine. But, the situation seems so unfair. There are only twelve of them”
The elder woman shrugged, as she said, in a casual tone of voice, “Ah yes. But, beggars cannot be choosers.”
The two women looked at the twelve Rangers. A second later, the two women charged at the rangers, whom were armed with staff.
(_)
At that moment, inside a third story, interrogation room, that Lee and Detective Maxwell were in, Detective Barton returned to the interrogation room with a skinny, dark skinned man in his early twenties.
As the dark skinned man walked into the room, behind Detective Barton, Lee saw that the man was wearing gloves and a black suit. Though, his suit did not have a tie, and it was of a much different style than the black suit Lee wore.
Barton closed the door behind them.
Lee noted that the dark skinned man did not have a Psi Corps badge on his shirt.
Lee thought, 'Oh yea. Psi Corps was abolished by this point in time.'
Barton walked up stand beside Maxwell, to Maxwell's right side. Barton looked down, towards his sitting partner, as he asked, “Has he said anything else?”
Maxwell turned to his looked up at his partner, as he flatly answered, “Not a word.”
Barton commented, “Then, let us see what is rattling inside his head.”
Maxwell agreed, “Good idea.” He then got up from his chair. And stood out of the way, so the dark skinned man could sit down in the chair.
Both detectives move to stand beside each other, with their backs to the mirror, by the table. Barton stood to Maxwell's right side, as the two men watched what was happening at the table, in front of them.
As the black man has seated himself, he looked across the table, at Lee, with Lee looking back at the man, with a calm expression on his face.
The dark skinned man calmly said, “Hello, I am Emilio Dresden. In my official capacity, please address me as Mister Dresden. I am a the telepath hired by Mars Dome PD to handle confessions. I hear that you wish to confess. Be aware that though telepathic scans are no admissible in court, genuine confessions such as this tend to sway prosecutors in plea bargaining cases. Due to a telepath, such as myself, vouching, that you are honest in your remorse of the crimes you have committed.”
Given Lee was directly in front of a telepath, he did not even bother to hide his next thoughts, as he stated, “I can see how that would be a good form of use for your abilities, in a judicial manner. And I can appreciate that. Though, I am not confessing. So much as warning. Unlike others, I have the up most respect for telepaths. One of my friends is a telepath. I take it that you work directly for the police here, considering Psi Corps was disbanded?”
Mister Dresden answered, “Yes. Fortunately, the telepath war caused the Psi Corps to be disbanded, and telepaths are no longer forced to work for the government. Nor, take sleepers. Though, I am not a cop, I do work with law enforcement in cases, such as yours.”
Lee replied, “Good. I have one other question before we began. Given your line of work, you see things in minds you wish to forget. I take it you have medication that will blank your short term memory? And do you have some on you?”
Dresden answered, “Yes. On both counts. I do have pills for such occasions. It is an unfortunate necessity in my line of work.”
Lee stated, “That is comforting to know. Because my mind is not a pleasant place, even for myself. Let alone, visitors. I highly suggest you get ready to take some of those pills. For after you scan my mind and verify to your coworkers I am telling the truth, you are going to need them to help you keep your sanity.”
Dresden calmly requested, “I will take that under advisement. Shall we get started?”
Lee replied, “Yes. And I believe this will require what you call a deep scan?”
Dresden responded, “I was afraid of that. This will not be pleasant. Try to keep your mind clear of thoughts, as best you can. This will take a few minutes. I ask that you bear with me.”
Lee said, “I trust you.”
Dresden smiled, as he began to scan Lee's mind.
Lee felt the scan of his mind begin. Lee, by necessity, had become a very secretive person. But, given the situation, he knew that being complete open was the only hope for both himself, and those in the building, had of surviving the night.
Lee found that the deep mind scan was unpleasant not in the sense of being directly painful, but in the sense of the mental feeling associated to being nauseous.
Close to two minutes later, Dresden’s eyes went wide, as he jumped out of his chair in fear, while backing himself up against the wall.
As Emilio Dresden's back hit the wall, his right of the door, the telepath screamed, “He is not of this reality! They are after him! And they are not of this reality! Oh god! We are not real!”
The detectives were not sure what to make of Dresden's reactions.
Meanwhile, Lee continued to looked at Dresden with a calm expression on his face. Lee said, in a relaxing and comforting tone of voice, “Mister Dresden. We are all real. I need you to focus back on my mind. I am thinking of the world as myth fact. Anchor your sanity to that fact.” He mentally added, 'And please don't mention my reality device, nor the grenade, which I have on me. Because, that will only make things far worse for all of us.'
As Dresden forced himself to visibly calm down, as he stood up straight, with his back to the wall. He said, in a much calmer tone of voice, “Do not worry. I fully understand.” He then slid down the wall, to where he was crouching, with he knees by his chest.
As this went one, both Barton and Maxwell watched all this.
Both men turned to Lee, as Maxwell demanded, “What the hell did he see in your head?!”
Lee turned to looked at the detectives, as he answered, “He saw the truth that you would not believe. Now, the ball is in his court to convince you to let me go.” He turned back to look at Dresden.
Dresden was still in mild emotional shock, as he continued to look at Lee. He inquired, “What do I call you? Ello? Paul? Lee?”
Lee replied, “Lee is fine. And please do not forget your medication. I know what you saw was not pleasant. I do not wish for my mistakes to haunt you.”
Dresden said, in a slightly calmer, and kinder, tone of voice, “I appreciate that, Lee. Once I am done here, I will take one of them, and lay down. I want to forget this entire meeting. But, before I do, I must try my best to help you.”
Dresden looked up as Maxwell and Barton. Dresden stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Detectives. We must let man go, right now. Seconds are important here. The longer he stays he, the more danger he puts us in. We cannot handle what is coming for him.”
“The rangers, the pinnacle of badasses that they are, could not handle what is coming for him. What is coming for him is an army of the women, and men that sometimes change into women, that are from other realities of the multiverse. It is all real. They are beyond dangerous. Beyond scary. And he has invoked their wrath against him.”
Lee shrugged, as he spoke up, “I call them the Badasses Of the Multiverse. But, you can call them whatever you want. Whatever works for you.”
Dresden turned to Lee, as he replied, “Lee, I would say go with God. But at this point, I don't even think God can help you out of this mess you have put yourself in.”
Lee casually said, “I am on god's shit list, anyway. Though, that is my god. I don't know about your god.” He turned to Maxwell, as he inquired, in a relaxed tone of voice, “So, can I leave?”
Maxwell sternly said, “You are not going anywhere. The only reason I don't throw you into lock up is that I still have some questions for you. You clearly are hiding something, and I will find out what.”
Lee rolled his eyes for a few seconds. He then look at Maxwell, as he stated, “I just let a telepath do a deep scan of my mind, and you still think I am hiding something.”
Lee turned to look at Mister Dresden huddled on the floor. Lee turned back to Maxwell and Barton, as he said, “Look at Mister Dresden. That is not the reaction one gives to another person, when said person is faking about being in danger. I am trying to save your lives here. What else can I do to make you trust me?”
Suddenly, the door to the room swung open, towards the outside, and a fair skinned man, with brown hair, in a slick haircut, wearing a cheap blue suit, with yellow tie, and brown dress shoes. He appeared to be in his late twenties. He was in good physical shape. And he carried a briefcase in his left hand, as he walked into the room.
The man looked over at Lee, as he firmly stated, “Do not say another word, Mister Gray.”
Lee looked over at Dresden, as he thought, 'Lawyer?'
Dresden looked at Lee and nodded twice. Dresden then looked back over at the newcomer, as he slightly signed. He thought, 'It figures that it would be him whom would be sent to help, Lee.' Next, Dresden look back towards Lee.
Barton and Maxwell turned to the lawyer, as Barton demanded, “What are you doing here?”
The man smirked at the two detectives, as he answered, “Doing my job.” The man then used his right hand to shut the door behind him. With him standing with his back to the door, with Dresden sitting to his left side.
Lee turned to the man, as asked, “And you are?”
The man looked back at Lee, as he answered, with a grin that would make a used car salesman envious, “Mister Gray. I am your new best friend. I am your lawyer, Mister Matthew McCormick.”
Lee replied, “Well, Mister McCormick, who paid you to be my lawyer? Because, from their reactions, I doubt these gentlemen called you in here.”
Matthew let out a laugh. While Barton raised his right hand, and lowered his face into his the palm of his right hand, as he shook his head a few times.
A few seconds later, Barton looked back up at Matthew, while he dropped his right hand back to his side.
As this happened, Matthew answered, “I am employed by Edgars Industries. My boss would do just about anything to meet with you. As soon as possible.”
Lee turned to the detectives, and he saw look on the detectives' faces. Lee saw that they realized who McCormick's boss was. And Lee also knew who Matthew's boss was.
Lee turned back to look at Matthew, as he thought, 'So, Mister Michael Garibaldi has caught wind of me. This could be good. Or, bad. Good, in that he is a decent guy. Bad, in that he will eventually decide throw me to Revy, Roberta, Sylia, and the others, just to save his planet. Not that I blame him. Still, he will want answers, first. So, I have some wiggle room, and time, to talk my way out of trouble with him.' He turned to look at Maxwell and Barton, as he thought, 'But first, I need to talk myself out of trouble with the two idiot detectives.'
Lee then heard Dresden snort in response to his thoughts.
Lee did not reply to Dresden. Instead, he turned to Matthew, and his lips curled into a smirk, as he said, “Mister McCormick, you were right. You are my new best friend. Now, get me out of here so I can meet you boss. Though, I already did confess to having a fake ID. So, that might slow down the process some.”
Matthew causally replied, “Nah. When I am through, at best you are looking at is a fine. Though, it should take me about an hour or two, to get you out of here. Just sit tight, and don't say anything else.”
Suddenly, the lawyer's cellphone started ringing from his left, interior, coat pocket.
Matthew used his right hand to pull out his cellphone. He hit the talk button, and held it to his right hear. He answered it, “Hello... How did you get this number?...”
(_)
In the parking lot, outside, across the street from the front of the police precinct building that Lee was current inside of, a purple haired woman, with a crazy, toothy smile, said into the outside, public vidphone, with the receiver to her right ear, in english, “It is not important how I got this number. What is important is that you let me speak with the black haired, fair skinned man you are representing. Whom you should be near, by now.”
(_)
Inside the police station, on the third story, in the interrogation room, Matthew looked over at Lee, as he said, with disbelief in his voice, “It's for you.”
Matthew walked over to the table, across from Lee, and he handed Lee the cellphone.
Lee took the cellphone with in his hand, and he put it to his right ear.
Lee heard a woman's voice, that he did not recognize, say, in a fridge tone of voice, that showed no emotional warmth, what so ever, “Hello Mister Lee.”
Lee thought, with worry, 'It does not take a genius to figure out who this is. Worst case scenario just happened. I pray that diplomacy works. Since I'm trapped. Diplomacy is the last card I have left to play. Though, given all this is being recorded by the microphones and cameras, in the room, I need to keep this as vague as possible.'
'Talk about walking a proverbial tightrope. But, counting the time loop, I have been doing this for decades.'
Lee said into the cellphone, in a calm, and rational, tone of voice, “Hello Ms. Cisneros. I wish our discussion was under more pleasant circumstances. When I was reminded of my actions against your employer, I deeply regretted my actions. I sincerely apologize for my actions towards him. I was not thinking. And I am more than willing to make amends.”
Over the phone, Roberta coldly countered, “If you had wished to make amends, why did you run from Revy, the others, and us?”
Lee defended, “I ran because they are corrupt. On the other hand, your employer is an innocent person.”
Roberta flatly stated, “That we agree on.”
Lee questioned, “For the sake of the people getting caught up in this, I have to ask. Are you still sleeping at night?”
Roberta conceded, “Given my reputation, that is a fair question. To answer your inquiry, I am sleeping quite well at night. Since I am in no way at fault for any of this. I feel not guilt about it. And I sleep well. Also, since learning of you, I occasionally dream of some of the ways I will torture you. I find such dreams to be enjoyable.”
Lee thought, 'Well, at least she is sleeping, and not going due crazy from lack of sleep, like what happened to in her Blood Trail arc. That means she is thinking more clearly. Worse for me. But, better for everyone else.'
Roberta mentioned, “My student and I did listened to the conversation you had with the others. Lee, you really are an arrogant ass.”
Lee admitted, “Arrogant? Absolutely. Ass? Not so much. And I try to keep the name calling to a minimum. With my intention of calling you an, the alpha bitch of your group, being meant as compliment.”
On the other end of the line, Roberta coldly replied, over the phone, “I know.”
Suddenly, Barton was tapping on Lee on his shoulder right shoulder.
Lee said into the phone, “Please excuse me a for moment, Ms. Cisneros. One of the idiots I am trying to save here, wants to speak with me.”
Roberta chuckled evilly from the other end of the line.
Lee lowered the cellphone from his mouth, and he put his left hand over the microphone of the cellphone, as he looked over at Barton. He stated, in a direct tone of voice, “Detective Barton, please give me a minute here. I am trying to negotiated for your lives. The woman on the other end is nothing short than death incarnate.”
While still sitting on the floor, by the door, Dresden spoke, with desperation in his tone of voice, “He is not joking. Let him speak to her. It is our only chance.”
Barton heard what both men had said. He was silent for a few seconds. He then replied, “Alright.” After which, backed off from Lee, and moved to stand next to Matthew, by the window.
Lee removed his left hand and from the microphone of the cellphone. He held the cellphone up to his right ear. He pleaded, “Ms. Cisneros. Please, don't go Terminator One on them. They are just doing their jobs. If you are inclined to wait a few hours for me to get out of here. I am more than willing to turn myself over to you. In exchange for their lives.”
Roberta responded, “I experienced first hand how slippery you are, Lee. Still, your concern for the lives of others will lessen your pain by a day.”
Lee sarcastically replied, “Thank you for showing such a small measure of mercy.”
Roberta coldly stated, “Feel privileged that I am displaying even this small portion of mercy. You have no idea the suffering you have caused the master. You not only cursed the master to become a woman, but by doing so, she is now forced to suffer the monthly indignities that all women must go through. It is fortunate that my student and I were there to help her when she went through those indignities, the first few times.”
Lee immediately realized what Roberta was talking about, as he thought, with utter shock at his oversight, 'Damn! I honestly forgot how I wrote the rules for that little problem for those cursed with the spring of girl. No wonder she and Fabiola, are upset with me. I forced Garcia, as a girl, to go through monthly, menstrual periods. Or, more honestly, given changing back and forth slows her cycle down, irregular, menstrual periods. Still, I got to know how upset she is?'
Lee honestly admitted, “You have a point there. Though, I must know. How upset are you with me?”
Roberta's voice was like ice, as she stated, “I am more angry with you than I was with those that murdered my master's father.”
Lee around Lee saw his poker face begin to crack, as he showed worry on his face. Lee thought, with worry, mixed with a little fear, no only for himself, but others, 'I am number one with a bullet. If she is that furious, there is no way I can talk her down. I could offer her everything, and she would still want my hide. I have made the Bloodhound the most angriest she has been in her entire life. She would literally burn worlds to get to me. Yet. I have one more question that I need to ask her.'
Lee continued his thoughts, with a bit of gallows humor, 'If I am going to dig my own grave. I am going to need to know how deep the hole has to be?'
Lee inquired, “And your student?”
Roberta answered, “She feels the same way as I do towards you. Only, she displays better self-control, than I.”
Lee said, “I will find no fault with the feelings either of you have for me. I truly deserve much pain and suffering for the cruelties I had unknowingly inflicted on your family.”
Roberta giggled, with venom lacing her voice, as she replied, “We will talk when we meet face to face. I will be there soon. And by the way, it is that time of the month for me.”
Roberta then hung up her end of the phone connection.
Lee rolled his eyes, as he thought, with annoyance and disbelief, 'I cannot believe she went there.'
Lee folded the cellphone closed, as he looked over at at Matthew.
Matthew was still standing across the table, from Lee.
Lee looked up at Matthew. As Lee handed the cellphone back to Matthew, he stated, in a depressingly tone of voice, “We're screwed.”
Matthew took his phone, and pocketed it back into his left interior coat pocket. After which, he turned to look at Lee, he casually responded, “Relax. I doubt it is that bad.”
Lee flatly retorted, “Oh. It is worse than that. But, I am trying to keep from scaring everyone here.”
Dresden agreed, with worry evident in his tone of voice, “He is not joking.”
Barton asked, “Who was the person the other end of the line?”
Lee looked Barton in his eyes, as Lee calmly answered, “She is known as the Bloodhound of Florencia. She is a trained killer, with the convictions of a zealot. She and her student are here for my head.”
Maxwell smirked, as he questioned, “You actually think a woman, and her student, can take us all on?”
Lee flatly explained, “Yes. And you clearly do not understand the danger we are in. The Bloodhound called Mister McCormick's cellphone because you could not immediately trace back the call. But, given the Bloodhound's personality, and the previous tactics she has used, she only called when she and her student were already fully prepared to attack us. She likely called from across the street. We have no time left.”
Matthew calmly stated, “I wouldn't worry too much. I was sent here with a squad of twelve rangers. Half of them Minbari. Those guys are toughest, and the best. They are outside, checking around. If that woman and her student are out there, the rangers are probably on their trail, and they will likely catch them within minutes.”
Lee turned to Matthew, as he pointed out, “That is doubtful. In all likelihood, those twelve rangers have already been defeated. Because, where do you think she got the number for your cellphone from?”
Matthew began to realize the seriousness of their situation, as he softly replied, “Oh...”
Lee quietly said, “Besides, that would not be enough against them.”
Barton commented, “Even if that is not enough. We have a station full of armed police officers.”
Lee responded, “That will not be enough, either. Unless you let me go. Or, Mister McCormick is packing a nuke in that briefcase he is holding. We are all likely not going to survive the hour.”
(_)
A minute and a half ago, outside, in a parking lot, across the street from the police station, Roberta hung receiver of the vidphone, to its base, and screen, with enough force, to destroyed the vidphone, and the receiver in her white gloved right hand. Though, in doing so, she did not damage her glove, nor injure her hand.
Beside her, to her right, was a human ranger, lying unconscious, on the pavement. With her student, Fabiola, nearby.
Neither Roberta, nor Fabiola, showed any signs of injury. Nor, were their maids uniforms torn, nor scuffed.
Roberta turned to her student, Fabiola, whom was standing in the middle of the other eleven unconscious rangers, while holding an extended denn'bok fighting pike in her hands.
Roberta forced herself to calm down, as she asked her student, in spanish, “Did they tell you anything else?”
Fabiola turned to Roberta, as she answered, in spanish, “Yes.” With the end of her staff that was positioned towards the ground, to Fabiola's right side, she pointed to one of the of the humans on the ground. She continued, “This one says Lee is likely being held on the third floor, of the nearby police station. He said this is likely where they bring in witnesses, to make statements, and answer questions.”
Suddenly, one of the Minbari men started to stir. Fabiola quickly hit him on the head with the end of the pike, forcing the man back down.
Fabiola complained, “The only problem with these guys is that the boneheads don't know when to stay down.” She then held up the pike for her teacher to see, as she requested, “Still, I hope you let me keep this for my collection. It is a very nice weapon.”
Roberta replied, with a genuine smiles on her lips, “You may.”
Fabiola grinned, as she pressed the button in the center of the staff, to collapse the pike back into a small cylinder. She then put the cylinder it in a hidden pocket on her maid's uniform.
As Fabiola looked back at Roberta, she inquired, “So, what is the plan?”
Roberta stated, “Fabiola, I will take the front. I want you to go around back, to the third story parking garage attached to the building. For security reasons, there likely only be one door connecting to the building to the garage, per floor. I want you to lay am ambush, for the third story door to the building, from the garage.”
“As soon as I take out the nearby electrical substation, and then their emergency generators, around back of the building, I will begin my attack from the bottom floor, from the front entrance. I will make my way up the stairwell, to the third floor.”
“Lee will know better than to try the elevators, or risk facing me in the stairwell. So, he will attempt to either hide in the third story, or more likely exit onto the third story garage. In the hopes of finding a vehicle to escape in.”
“Though, I will try to leave the back up generators, so the lighting in the garage is still on.”
“When I reach the third floor, I will either capture Lee, or more likely, I will flush him out to you, in the third story garage. Where you will capture him. Do you understand?”
Fabiola nodded, as she replied, “Yes ma'am.' She then thought, 'I am glad we spent an hour just studying the weak points of this police station, without going near it. Now, we can use that knowledge to our advantage.'
Fabiola then headed for the parking garage, across the street, that was attached to the police station. As Roberta heading for the a nearby power substation, before heading into the building itself.
While Fabiola approached the garage, she saw the five story garage placed directly against one of the sides of the police station. When she snuck inside the bottom floor, and made her way up the floors, she noticed there was only one door leading out into the garage.
And each door had a panel by it, that took a key card.
Which Fabiola reached the third floor, she walked over and hid between some cars, while facing the door to that floor, as she thought, 'Roberta was right. And there is only one door per floor is probably for security concerns. And the doors are likely locked, which on officials having the key cards to open them... I suspect the all doors here use key cards. Considering that is what the others were complaining about Lee using against them, at the factory complex. To lock the doors behind himself. As they chased Lee.'
'Though, this is an emergency door, and it can likely be opened from the inside, without a key card.”
'From what I have listened to on the radio, Lee is always playing an angle. Actually, he tries to play several angles at once. And he will use any advantage he can get to escape. So, I will have to be careful around him.'
'And I will be the one to face him. Not Roberta. Because, the power outage will disable the elevators. I doubt Lee is not crazy enough to risk stairs, and run into Roberta. That means he will come out of the door right in front of me. And into my hands.'
'To paraphrase a good friend of mine. This will be all too easy.'
(_)
A minute later, in the interrogation room, on the floor, Dresden rocked back and forth, with his knees to his chest, with his arms rapped around his knees. He kept repeating over and over, “We are going to die. We are going to die. We are going to die.”
Lee turned to Dresden, as he firmly stated, “Not if the detectives here let me go. The maids don't give a damn about any of you.” He turned to the detectives, whom looked back at him, as he continued, “Just me.”
Though, from the expressions on Maxwell, and Barton's faces, Lee could see that he was getting nowhere with the detectives.
Matthew cautioned, “As your lawyer, I must tell you that it is unwise to badger police officers.”
Lee looked over at Matthew, as he replied, “I understand that. And I wish I knew of another way for them to see reason. But, I do not have any real evidence to prove my point.” He thought, 'Though, I have my reality device. I am not handing that technology to these two idiots.”
On the floor Dresden commented, “That would be unwise.”
Lee looked over at Dresden, as he thought, 'Thank you for agreeing with me.'
Lee then turned back to the detective, as he mentally wondered, 'Though, not that I think about it. Maybe there is another way? Let's try a different tactic.'
Lee calmly asked the two detectives, “I know this is a two century old movie to you. But, have either of you two seen the original Terminator movie?”
While Matthew knew the question was not directed towards him, Matthew still shook his head, in response to his client's question.
Barton replied, “Yes.”
Maxwell asked, “We have have seen that movie, and the other movies in that franchise. What about it?”
Lee commented, in a very serious tone of voice, without even the hint of sarcasm, “Well, because if you don't let me go, you're about to live it.”
Maxwell inquired, “Are you saying that an unstopped killing machine is about to attack building?”
Lee corrected him, in a sober tone of voice, “Actually, most like a bionic badass of an unstoppable killing machine, and her nearly equally badass adult student. And unlike Arnold, these bitches are not going to be nice enough to first stop and ask politely. They are not going to go, I'll be back. They are going to come in guns blazing.”
“Take for example, the lead woman that is coming here. The one with the purple hair. Yes, purple. And from what I can figure, that is her natural hair. The other woman's nature hair color. The student's hair color. Is green.”
“Anyway, the lead one once got into a fight with another woman, for four straight hours, right after she engaged in a massive, literal running battle, across a city, beforehand. Where she was chasing after the other woman, and her friends. And this was not a catfight in any way, shape, or form. This was a four hour long, knock down, drag out, bare knuckled brawl. With these two women being unnaturally strong for their size, with inside levels of endurance, while being able to take several hits from the other woman, and keep going.”
“This is the type of fight that would have likely send Rocky Balboa to a hospital after the first hour. And it went on for four straight hours.”
“And these women do not quit. Their mental and physical endurance borders on the fanatically insane. Before that fistfight, the other woman and this woman in question had just previously finished a gunfight, between the city spanning fight, and the four hour brawl.”
“Also, most people would say the fight ended in a draw, because both of them knocked the other down at the same time, and they stayed down. But, I say the woman coming for me, very soon, won that fight. Because in the end, she was still conscious, while the other woman was unconscious.”
“And this woman later topped herself when it came to being a badass. And she is likely one of the top badasses in existence itself.”
“Your Minbari Rangers wished they had her fortitude and toughness.”
“You ever heard of the term, beating a man to a pulp? She literally did that with her gloved hands, once. She killed that man, by pounding him in the face until everything above his lower jaw was a bloody stain on the floor. I am not joking here. There nothing left of his head.”
“That is not even close to the worst things she has ever done before.”
“She even one time decimated a small army, whom were equipped with late twentieth century firearms, while she was only using a flintlock, and a pair of muskets. Though, at the time, she with using SABOT rounds, along with being literally insane, due to lack of sleep, and being strung out on ritalin. Trust me. I was forced to take that shit as a child. That stuff will mess you up.”
“Still, that was before she became a cyborg, and she was given a physical enhancement serum that increased the abilities of the normal parts of her body.”
“And while the others after me are not as badass as her. They are either as equally badass as a ranger, or more badass than a ranger.”
Lee went onto say, in a completely serious, pleading tone of voice, “So officers, you have got to listen to me. I am being deadly serious here. You have to respect what these women, and men, are capable of. If you do not, they are going to kill you in horrible ways.”
The detectives just looked at Lee for a few seconds. They then started laughing at him.
Lee pleaded, “Please, don't tempt fate like that. It is a very bad idea... Still, after tonight, should you survived, you will remember these horrors, as just, the maids, for the rest of your lives.”
“Though, at the very least, you need to put this station on alert right now. They prefer to dress as maids. Their clothing is black and white, with white aprons. You cannot miss them. That is why they are nicknamed the maids. Also, they carry enough firepower in their clothing to start a small war. So, don't try to ask them to be searched, they will just pull their weapons, starting killing you all.”
“So, I am begging you. Please, let me go. All I need is a working car, with a full tank of fuel, recharged battery, whatever. Along with remote access to your station's speaker systems. With those two things, I can get get them to follow me, and get them away from all of you, that are inside this building.”
By then, the two detectives had stopped laughing. Barton looked over at Lee, as he grinned wickedly. He disagreed, “I think not. I think what we have here is a crazy that caused a telepath to have a freak out. Not the first time I have seen that happen, in person. Instead, we will put you in lock up, until we can call the local asylum on come take you away.”
Lee's jaw dropped, as his eyes widened.
Matthew countered, “But, what about the phone call?”
Maxwell pointed out, “We never actually heard what was said on the other end. It could be just this guy's crazy ex-girlfriend playing head games with him.”
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he thought, with disbelief, 'Those two are just too damn dumb to live.'
Dresden verbally agreed, “You got that right.”
Lee looked over at Dresden, as he thought, 'Dresden, I know you are reading my mind. I want to thank you for your help. If nothing else, it is the thought that counts. No pun intended.'
'While there is still time. You need to get up, go get a cup of water, to take you memory blanking pills with. Then, go find a closet to hide in. Stay in that closet until help arrives. It is very likely that if you stay there, you will be fine. If one of maids does find you, beg for your life, and tell her everything she wants to know. You might get out of this alive. And good luck.'
Dresden nodded towards Lee. He quickly got up, opened the door, and left the room, while closing the door behind him.
Lee looked over at the detectives, as he calmly requested, “Detective Barton and Detective Maxwell. I know you think I am crazy. It is tragic that I cannot convince you otherwise. Still, if you do not mind, I would like to stay here, and talk with my lawyer, while I wait for the guys from laughing academy to come pick me up.”
The detectives looked at each other. Barton shrugged towards Maxwell.
Both detectives turned back to looked at Lee. Maxwell stated, “Well, even though you are crazy, you have been fully cooperative. You clearly believe what you have been saying is true. And you have displayed no violent tendencies. So, it is alright with us. Though, we request that you stay here, in this room.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Barton and Maxwell then left the room.
After the door closed, Lee noted that they did not lock it behind them.
While showing now outward expression, Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'They don't expect me to just walk right out of here. That would be an act of a crazy man. Bwahahaha!'
Matthew turned to Lee, as he asked “So, what do you want to talk about?”
Lee looked up at his legal council, as he answered, “Nothing. Any minute now, the power is going to be cut. And soon, the power to the emergency generator will, as well. Then, I will talk to you.”
Matthew accused, “You are paranoid.”
Lee defended, “No. I just applying proper planning and preparation. I suggest you try to relax for the moment, and put your mind at ease. Because very soon we are both going to be put into a very stressful situation.”
Matthew did as Lee has instructed.
A minute later, the power was cut off, for a seconds, before the emergency generators kicked on. And power was restored.
Lee thought, 'There goes the main power. Likely Roberta took out a nearby electrical substation. Now, she will likely take out the back up generators that are near the building, and connected to it.'
A minute after the first brown out, the power went out permanently, and the battery powered floor lights, located throughout the rooms building, on the top of the walls, automatically came on. Including, the emergency lights that came on in the interrogation room, that Lee and Matthew were presently inside of.
Lee turned to Matthew, as he thought, 'There goes secondary power. Roberta likely just took out the generators to this building, which are probably located around back of the building. Though, that also means the security cameras and microphones are down as well. So, I am talk freely with Matthew. Without worry of our conversation being recorded.'
'Though, any minute now, Roberta is going to rush through the front doors. Which even if they are shut and lock, due to the power outage she created. She can break through with her enhanced, cybernetic strength. And then the real battle begins.'
'The only question is if Roberta and Fabiola are attacking together? Or, if Roberta is attacking alone, with her trying to flush me out to Fabiola? Either way is possible. I might be able to find that out in a minute.'
'But, that is the bad news. The good news is I still have a window of a few minutes, to escape, before she gets here, by way of the stairs. Given the power is out. The elevators are out of the question, for both of us.'
'And I know where the stairwell is, in relation to myself. So, that also gives me an advantage over her and her student. Though, that is only a small advantage, compared to what they are capable of. Because the stairwell is by the elevators, and she is likely going to come up the stairwell. So, heading there is out of the question. But, I will take any advantage I can, at this moment.'
'Now, I to talk to my lawyer in peace, without someone overhearing my escape plans.'
Lee inquired, “Looks like the ball finally dropped, Mister McCormick. Do you have a car?”
Matthew answered, “Yes, Mister Gray. It is located inside the third story parking garage, near the exit to this floor of building.”
Lee got up from his chair. He walked to his left, around the table, to stand beside Matthew. Lee complimented, “Good. Now, here is the plan. In a few seconds, police officers are going to rush passed this room, towards the elevators, and stairwell. When that happens, we will calmly exit this room, and you will lead me to the garage. As we walk, if we should meet a police officer, I will subtly ask the officer what is going on.”
“And in such a case. Let me do the talking.”
“And do not worry. We are not technically breaking the law. I was never actually arrested. Given what is about to happen, later you can say we were leaving the building for our own safety.”
Matthew conceded, “That might work. But, I think the police might try to stop us.”
Lee responded, “I highly doubt it. The police will have far more to be concerned about, than two men, whom are not under arrest, and whom are trying to leave the building for their own safety.”
“Still, when we get to the garage, you will lead me to your car. Also, remember that the key here is to remain calm, and think things through. That is what had kept my ass in one piece, so far. But, first give me your keys, I have experience with high speed driving. I doubt you do.”
Matthew pointed out, “Actually, I have a little experience. But, you seem to know what you are doing. So, here.”
Matthew then used his right hand to pull out his keys, from his right side pants pocket. He handed the keyring, with keys and clicker to his car on it, to Lee.
While Lee pocketed the items, he said, “Thank you. Now, do you know any place we can run too?”
Matthew stated, “Yes. Edgars Industries complex. It is a fortress originally built during the Earth-Minbari war. It was designed to repel both a ground assault, and orbital bombardment. That is where I was suppose to take you to meet my boss, in the first place.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, “Perfect. We both get what we want. Though, I will need you lead me to the fortress, and get me inside it. So, you are going to have to ride shotgun with me.” His smile curled into a smirk, as he continued, “You will be like Van Halen. Running with the devil.”
Matthew thought, 'He is comparing himself to the devil. Though, he is likely joking. So, we are fine on that matter. And that is a nice song.' He complimented, “That is fine with me. And you have good taste in classic rock music.”
Lee inquired, “Thank you. So, how far is to Edgars HQ?”
Matthew answered, “From here, the driving distance is around thirty-two kilometers.”
Lee commented, “So around twenty miles. It is doable. But risky. By the way, you can call me, Lee.”
Matthew said, “That is good. You can call me, Matthew. And since the power has gone out, I am guessing, you are at least partly correct. So please, get us out of this mess.”
Lee responded, “I am working on it, Matthew. And pay attention to my hand signals. Silence in our friend in this situation. As sounds tend to attract unwanted attention.”
Matthew said, “I understand.”
Lee then walked over to the door. Next, he cracked open the door, just wide enough to see outside.
Lee watched through the lighting, and shadows, of the room, as several police offices passed by, with their ppg, phased plasma guns, in their hands.
Lee opened the door, and motioned McCormick to take point, to lead him out of the building, and to the garage.
Matthew continued to hold briefcase in his left hand, as he exited the room with Lee. He then started leading Lee to the garage.
As they walked, with Lee right behind Matthew, Lee saw a police officer, passed by. Lee stopped the officer, by asking the man, “Officer, what is going on?”
Matthew noticed this, as he stopped and turned around to face both men.
Lee noticed Matthew turned in his direction. In response, he looked between Matthew and the officer he was speaking too.
The officer, whom Lee was sure had no idea who Lee was, answered, in a calm tone of voice, “From what I heard on the radio, a woman in a maid's outfit has attacked the those on the ground floor, and she is making her way up the stairwell. Those shooting her in the stairwell are barely slowing her down. And she is heading up this way. On each floor, everything there is setting up ambush for her. So, whichever floor she enters, some of us will be waiting for her. And she will be killed.”
Matthew paled, as he realized, in thought, 'Lee, was not joking. He was telling the complete truth. And if that is the case. We are in big trouble.'
Lee noticed Matthew's facial expression of fear, as he thought, 'Just great. I don't need my lawyer to go to pieces on me, just yet. Still, It might be best to hedge my bets a little.'
Lee responded, “Good luck. Also, could you please point us to which way the garage is?” He mentally thought, 'I might as well ask. There is no harm in doing so.”
The officer replied, “Sure. Just down the hallway.” The officer used his left hand to point in the opposite direction of where everyone was running too. The officer then dropped his left hand down to his side.
Lee responded, “Thank you, officer. We are getting out of here.” He thought, 'Good. I don't have to follow, Matthew.'
The officer commented, “That is a wise idea. I wish I could join you, but duty calls.”
The officer then turned, and he ran to join his brethren.
Lee frowned, as he thought, 'I regret there is nothing I can do to save that man. But, at least I can save myself, and Matthew, my lawyer. Still, I was worried that only one of them was going to attack the front. And I can guess which one.'
Matthew noticed that Lee was frowning. He asked, “What is it?”
Lee fully turned to face Matthew. Lee said, “I was hoping that both of them would be attacking from the bottom floor, and work their way up. But, it is likely the Bloodhound is making the frontal assault, meaning her student is likely in the garage, waiting for us. The Bloodhound is flushing me out to her student, and I don't have a choice in the matter. Because, she knows I would rather face her student, than her.”
Matthew questioned, “If it is a trap, what can we do?”
Lee answered, “Just be ready to duck for cover behind a car, when I tell you to, or motion you to do so. And do not freak out. If you do. We both die.”
Matthew nodded once, as he replied, “Okay.”
Lee requested, “Now, that I know where the garage is. Let me take point.”
Matthew quipped, “Sure. You are the one they are after. If the shooting starts, I will use you as bait, while I run for cover, and eventually get away.”
Lee lightly chuckled. He then smirked, as he stated, “I knew there was a reason I liked you. We think the same way.” He then walked passed Matthew towards the garage door on their floor.
Matthew responded, in a confused tone of voice, “Huh?...” A few seconds later, he understood what Lee meant, as he commented, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Hey...” he then quickly caught back up with Lee.
(_)
A minute later, when Lee and Matthew reached the metal door to the garage. Which was not hard to miss, considering there was a sign beside it that stated, in english, third story garage.
Lee and Matthew stood beside each other, as they faced the door.
Before opening the door, Lee turned to Matthew, as he asked, “What direction is your car in?”
McCormick looked over at Lee, as he answered, “Straight ahead. One the second row to our right. Three cars down, It is the white one. You cannot miss it.”
Lee stated, “Okay. Stay silent. And do not run. Walk at the same pace as me, while trying to be quiet. If we are ambushed, do not duck for cover, or make any sudden movements. The people after me are crack shots, and they know how to use their weapons.”
Matthew replied, “Okay.”
Lee then turned back to the door. He carefully opened the door, which had a latch knob. As he slowly opened the door, he saw that the normal lights were on the garage were on as well.
Lee thought, 'Intelligent thinking, Roberta. You probably hit the cables from the emergency electrical system to where the cables going to the building were knocked out, but not those going to the garage. Thus, allowing Fabiola the light she needs to more easily spot me. Well, I might as well trigger this trap, while I still have time to get out of it. Also, the ceiling seems to be ten feet high. At least there is plenty of head room, if I had to run across the top of the cars.'
Lee motioned with his left hand for Matthew to follow him. After they both walked into the garage. Lee then slid the door closed.
Lee then took front, as they walked across the two land road, between the door, and the first rows of cars.
When the reached midway between the door and the cars, Fabiola popped up between the cars two rows down from his left, about twenty feet from the two of them.
She had both her black painted, short-barreled, modified MAG Seven auto-shotguns pointed at them.
Lee also noticed that Fabiola's index fingers were on the triggers of her shotguns. With her reading to use her weapons at a moments notice.
Lee and Matthew immediately stopped walking, as both saw her, and her weapons. The two men then turned to face Fabiola.
As the two men turned to face Fabiola, they stood beside each other, with Matthew standing to Lee's left side.
Fabiola ordered, in english, “Lee, surrender now, so that your suffering may begin.”
Lee smirked, as he complimented, “I got to give you points for originality. That line is a keeper.”
Fabiola motion towards Matthew, with the shotgun, in her left hand, as she asked, “Who is this man with you?”
Lee casually replied, “My lawyer. But, please don't shoot him on that account.”
Fabiola let out a small laugh, that did not reach her lips, at the absurdity of Lee's comment.
Matthew turned to Lee, as he inquired, “Is she the student?”
Lee looked over at Matthew, as he said, “Yes.”
Matthew questioned, “How screwed are we?”
Lee shrugged, “It depends. She is one of the more saner ones after me.”
Fabiola reminded both them, in an annoyed tone of voice, “You both know I am right here. And I can hear every word you are saying.”
The two men turned to look at Fabiola. Lee calmly replied, “We know. But, the question needed to be asked.”
Matthew commented, “No offense was intended.”
Fabiola sighed, as she replied, “Fine.”
Lee thought, 'I got maybe two, or three minutes. Five or six minutes, on the outside. Before Roberta makes it here, and it is all over. Presently, I am at a severe disadvantage. I only have one grenade, which is useless in this situation. She has those auto-shotguns, loaded with buckshot. And her fingers are on the triggers.'
'And this is a close quarters style weapon, the effective range of hitting the target with the mini sixty millimeter long twelve gauge cartridge, of either buckshot, or slugs, is around forty-five yards. But, the lethality range, is up to ninety yards. And we are around twenty feet from her.'
'Also, I am guessing those weapons are automatics, because they are clearly modified versions of the MAG Seven. The reason being was that the original MAG Seven was a pump action shotgun. Also, the anime showed she had a gambler's rig on the inner side of each of her forearms. The gambler's rigs lets her pull out, and holster her weapons, from her sleeves.'
'But, in the Blood Trail arc, Fabiola was shown firing them, one in each hand, at the same time, without having having to manual reload each shot. And if Roberta was going to have those weapons that modified that extensively, then she likely added full automatic functions to them, as well. Complete with a selector switch, between automatic and single shot. Though, she likely kept the safety function on the weapons.'
'It would fit Roberta's personality of never doing things in half measures. Which is something I admire about her.'
'Also, modifying those weapons to be automatics would not be that hard. The MAG Seven was based the template of a sub-machine gun. With a pump action shotgun function for reloading. The ammo uses a five cartridge ammo clips, which is located in pistol grip of the weapon. So, replacing the guts of the weapon to make it an automatic is completely feasible. Which is likely why both Tex-Mex, and Roberta selected MAG Seven auto-shotguns for Fabiola's main weapons.'
'While I just had Fabiola using semi-automatic pistols, and the assault rifle, in book two of my stories, because I wanted to do something different, and show offer he other firearm skills.'
'Still, with buckshot, she doesn't really need to aim. She just needs to point in the general direction to hit us... Also, I hope she does not have the China Lake forty by forty-six millimeter grenade pump action launcher... Though, with my luck, she does. But, either type of weapon could easily kill me...'
Lee then happily realized, in thought, 'What a minute. she needs me alive. That gives me options that I can play into motion.'
Lee requested, “I know you are pissed with me for very good reasons. Your teacher explained the situation to me. But, how about you let my lawyer go? He has done nothing to you.”
Fabiola smirked, as she stated, “I think not, Lee. I learned at the Devil's Hotel, from Rock and the others, about how slick you can be. Also, we both listened to the others, over the radio, while you were at the factory. And we both, my teacher and I, know you are playing an angle. Actually, several angles at once. Though, I am just not sure how. You are like Rock, before she became such a much better woman.”
Lee commented, “No arguments there. I believe when it came to Rock, it was a matter of outside influences.”
Fabiola flatly said, “That we agree on.”
Lee offered, “Would you like me to tell you things about yourself, that I know about, that others have probably overlooked?”
Fabiola snorted, as she stated, “Like you would know anything about me? Besides the obvious?”
Lee stated, “You are left-handed, and right eye dominant.”
Fabiola eye's slightly widened, as she demanded, in a slightly elevated tone of voice, “How do you know that?”
Lee calmly responded, “When people watch entertaining action, and drama. They tend to miss, small important details that explain a person's personality. I do not. During the Blood Trail arc, when you attacked the Yellowflag, at the beginning of the fight, it showed, at one point, that you closed your left eye, while leaving your right eye open, as you shot your shotguns. I believe those are same models, that you used then, that you are pointing at myself, and my lawyer, right now. Actually, are those the same shotguns from then?”
Fabiola answered, “Yes. They are the same weapons. Please, continue.”
Lee explained, “Closing one of your eyes like that, while the other is open for aiming, shows which eye is dominate. In your case, it is your right eye. When one learns to use a gun, and aim a gun, they have to learn which of their eyes is dominate. Now, the matter of your left-handedness is so obvious, that most people missed it, due to the fact you dual wield you weapons most of the time. But, the one time you did only use one weapon, you only pulled out the shotgun in your left hand. And when you first used your shotguns, in the Yellowflag, you lead off with your left shotgun, then right shotgun.
“Also, right after Revy killed that heavily injured FARC member, in front of you, and the others. You pulled out your shotgun in your left hand, and pointed it at Revy. You did not used your right hand. Also, in the Yellowflag, you pulled the China Lake out with your left hand. This sort of quick, instinctual reaction shows which hand a person is dominate with. Some the same principles can be applied in throwing a ball at someone. Whichever hand the person uses to catch the ball is the hand they are dominate in. Or, which hand they write with.”
“Still, eye dominance trumps hand dominance, when using firearms, due to aiming with your dominate eye. And that is why you used your China Lake with your right hand. So, you can have a better aim with your dominate right eye.”
“Also, I think you were justified in that situation, when you chewed Revy out for killing that FARC member. Killing someone after lying about promising to help that person is wrong.”
Fabiola replied, “Thank you. And I feel you have more to say on this?”
Lee answered, “Yes. I do. Those people, with that combination of eye and hand dominance combination, are on average, more creative, more intelligent, and can handle vastly higher levels of stress, and pain, for longer periods of time, than right-handed people. This explains a lot about your abilities, and personality. This explains why, even with the less than pleasant life you lead, as a child, you still did not crack and go berserk. Like your right-handed contemporaries. Also, this explains how you were able to pick up capoeira, by watching someone else practice those moves. You should be happy about this fact. It means you have an edge on many people. Including, your friends.”
Fabiola inquired, “And how would you know that?”
Lee cracked a grin, as he slowly held up his right arm forearm in front of his chest, in a parallel manner with his chest. He then used his left hand to pulled back the sleeve just enough to show the wrist watch on his right wrist, but not enough to reveal the hologram device. At the same time, he winked at Fabiola, by closing his left eye.
Fabiola responded, “Hmm... I see. You really do use every advantage you have.”
Lee opened his left eye, as he dropped his hands back to his sides. He said, “That is why I am still alive.”
Meanwhile, as Matthew watched, and listened, to all this, he thought, 'What the hell is my client talking about? He talks like he has seen this woman on TV? Or something? And I would remember seeing someone like her on TV. While she is still pointing a gun at me. She is a god damn ten on the babe scale.'
Fabiola commented, “I see from your demeanor, that you still think you can escape?”
Lee smile curled smirk, as he stated, in a sing-song fashion, “Of course. I am a joker.” He nodded towards Matthew, as he continued, “And he is a thief. This is the watchtower. And we are on our way out of here. Because the hour is getting late.”
Fabiola cracked a grin, as she inquired, with mild amusement in her voice, “You are channeling, Jimi Hendrix, at a time like this?”
Lee shrugged, as his smile got wider. He said, “Hey. His version of, All Along The Watchtower, was a cool rendition of that song. I also like the Bear McCreary and Steve Bartek version of the song, as well. Those two gave the song a funky Persian flair to it. And either way, that song fits, because though my precognition and imagination, I am starting to realize I am channeling the multiverse itself.”
Lee thought, 'Though, I did not care for the Bob Dylan version.'
Lee then took a step forward towards her.
In reaction, Fabiola pointed both her shotguns at Lee. She warned, “Not another step.”
Lee continued smiling, as he calmly pointed out, as he took another step, “If you kill me, you cannot have your revenge against me.”
Fabiola lips curled into a smirk, as she responded, “All we need is your brain intact. We even have the equipment to keep your soul in place. We just dump you in a vat, and it will completely restore you, and change you in so many ways.”
Lee did not take another step closer to Fabiola. He showed not emotional reaction to her comment, as he mentally berated himself, 'Crap. I forgot I added that at the tail end of book two.'
Lee inquired, “So, what are you plans? After torturing me? Are you going to make me like Lotton, the white haired maid, on the yacht?”
Fabiola smile turned absolutely feral, as she explained, in a sadistic tone of voice, “You wish. Lotton, got off lucky. You will not. As we change you, we will brainwash you. And then, every few months, we will brainwash you again, with a different personality. You will have a different flavor personality, for each season. And all the while, you will be complete obedient to us.”
Matthew thought, with slight worry, 'Whomever this Lotton person is. I do not envy him, or her. And this woman clearly plans a worse fate for, Lee. Though, given my experience in the court room, it does appear that Lee has more control of the situation than this green haired woman does. Let's see if he can still get us out of this mess, before this woman's teacher reaches us.'
Lee shrugged, as he commented, “I have to admit. That is some pretty creative revenge.”
Suddenly, Lee heard to his left, near the door to the police station, a man shout, “Put down you weapon! Right now! And lay on the ground! Now!”
Lee did not have to look to his left side to know what was about to happen. He maintained a mask of calmness, as he thought, with inward amusement, 'I know where that statement is going to lead. Now is my chance. And I need to bring Matthew with me. Right after Fabiola turns her attention to the new man.'
Fabiola immediately turned to face the newcomer.
Lee saw this, and he quickly used his left hand to grabbed Matthew's right wrist, as he dragged his lawyer down, behind a row of cars. The row of cars the two men were taking cover in was one row over, away from Fabiola and the newcomer, and closer to Matthew's own car.
As second later, police officer fired his ppg at Fabiola, forcing the tan skinned, green haired woman to take cover behind a row of cars.
(_)
At that moment, as Lee and Matthew sat between some cars, beside each other, on the concrete floor, Lee looked over at his lawyer, as he ordered, “Which one is your car? And which side is the driver's seat on.”
Matthew has set his briefcase beside himself, as he used his left hand to rub his sore right wrist.
Matthew has heard Lee, as he thought, 'Given the situation, I think it is best not to complain about my wrist. It is just sore. And it will be fine. Besides, he clearly has the skill to get us out of here, and to safety. So, I might as well go with the situation, and follow his lead.'
As Matthew grabbed the handle of his briefcase with his left hand, as he used his right index finger pointed at a white painted, four door, mid-level car, that right in front of him, on row over, and further away from Fabiola. Matthew dropped his right hand, he turned to look at Lee, as he commented, with slight sheepishness in his voice, “It's a company car. But, the battery has a full charge. It has an automatic transmission. The driver's seat is on its left side.”
Lee thought, 'Good. It is best to confirm which side the steering with is on. A mistake in getting that wrong, could cause us or lives, or worse. Though, this car is not what I was hoping for. But, still...' Lee replied, “Beggars cannot be choosers.”
Matthew realized the subtext of Lee's comment. He shrugged, as he flatly stated, “Hey. It runs. And it will get us away from that lunatic.”
Lee chuckled, for a few seconds. He then said, “You're right. Still, that woman right here is likely one of the least violent, nicest, and sanest members her group. She is just really pissed off at me... And admittedly... Justifiably so.”
Matthew asked, in a worried tone of voice, “Okay... From what you said, how dangerous is her teacher?”
Lee answered, “Let's just put it this way. Her teacher would not bother talking, after she found me. You would already be dead, by her hand. And I would be screaming, in pain, by now.”
Matthew inquired, “And what did you do to these women, to piss them off so much? You have to work at it, to get women this angry.”
Lee stated, “Well, for these two, I accidentally stripped their master of part of his manhood. And he is a person whom they both deeply love and care for.”
Matthew questioned, “How does one accidentally cost someone part of their manhood?”
Lee coyly answered, “A keyboard, some beers, and an all night anime marathon.”
Matthew asked, “What are the odds of me losing my own sanity, if I requested you to explain your comment to me?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Hmm... Probably around fifty-fifty.”
Matthew groaned, as he stated, “I don't want to know. Just get us out of here.”
Lee said, “I am working on it.”
Lee then noticed from the noise that the number of ppg shots were increasing. He thought, 'Looks like that officer has gotten some help. And not all the officers went to face Roberta. Though, very soon, Fabiola will likely pull out of big gun. Then, things are going to get real interesting.'
'Though, we make have to wait a minute, or two, for a window to open, for use to get to Matthew's car.'
Lee stated, “We may be a minute here, until we have a window to run for your car. Don't worry, I know what I am doing.”
Matthew sarcastically retorted, “Those are famous last words.
Lee snorted, as he comment, “You are still breathing. Aren't you?”
Matthew conceded, “Fair enough. I will do what you say.”
Lee replied, “Good.”
The two men then sat in place, on the concrete floor, between some cars, as Lee patiently waited for his precognition, and his ears, to inform him of when the time was right to go for Matthew's white company car.
(_)
Over the course of the next minute, Fabiola occasionally popped up from her hiding place to fire a few shots from her MAG Sevens. With the weapons set to single fire, per trigger pull.
Meanwhile, a few more police officers has shown up to support their fellow officer. They shot from the hallway.
When the officers were not firing, they pulled back the metal door, to shield themselves from the buckshot of Fabiola's auto-shotguns.
Fortunately, none of the ppg shots had hit Fabiola, but the situation was starting to deeply frustrate the green haired woman.
From her cover, behind some cars, Fabiola was extremely upset, as she swapped out the five round ammo magazines, with full ammo magazines, loaded with buckshot. Which she pulled from hidden pockets in her dress.
After she placed the fresh ammo magazines into their housing, in the but of the shotgun, the internal slides of the shotguns automatically loaded a shell into the chamber of each weapon. Next, she placed the empty ammo magazines into one of the hidden pockets in her dress, to be reloaded later.
At that point, Fabiola connected the back of her shotguns to her gambler's rigs, under her sleeves.
With all that done, Fabiola held up her two shotguns, by their pistols grips. One in each hand, as she placed her trigger fingers against the trigger guards of the weapons. She thought, with annoyance, 'I had him, and these fools screwed it up. I would almost believe that Lee was counting on the police showing up, for this very situation. But, Lee could not be that good?... Could he?...'
'Still, I cannot get a clear shot with my shotguns. When I popped up to fire, the shut the door, and the buckshot keeps hitting the doors. I have But, I have something that can get through the door.'
She used the gambler's rigs on the undersides of her forearms to pull her MAG Seven shotguns back up into her sleeves. Then, with her left hand, she reached behind her back, from the top, back, of her shirt, behind her head, as she pulled out her big gun.
When she had pulled her big gun out, used both hands to unfold the stock, from the left side of the main part of the gun.
After the stock snapped in place, behind the rest of the weapon, she held the grip with her right hand, while steadying the weapon, by placing the palm of her left hand to hold the underside of the fore-end.
While she brought the butt of the weapon to front part of her right shoulder, she grin wickedly, as she thought, 'This is going to be fun.'
She the popped up out of her cover, quickly took aim at the metal door, the cops quickly pulled back for cover, and fired.
(_)
Nearby, Lee and Matthew heard a large explosion near the metal door to the police station.
Lee cursed under his breathed, “Shit. She has the China Lake.”
Matthew thought, 'Lee mentioned the China Lake before. I think it is a weapon. And from the sound of the explosion, a powerful weapon. I need to know more.' He quietly inquired, “What is the China Lake?”
Lee thought, 'Time to leave.' He pulled out his sunglasses from a pocket in his coat. He then put on his shades, as he softly said, “I will explain in the car. Just crouch down, and slowly follow me the car. You take shotgun, I got the driver's side.”
Matthew made sure his left hand had a firm grip on the hand of his briefcase. He nodded, as he replied, “Okay.”
Lee cracked a smile, as he thought, 'Now, for some fun.' He then pulled up his right sleeve.
(_)
With the officers gone from the explosion, blowing the door, and everything near it to pieces, Fabiola stood up, while she held her China Lake forty by forty-six millimeter grenade launcher in both her hands.
Fabiola cocked back the pump action fore-end, with her left hand, to eject the spent shell, and reload a new shell, into the chamber, from the ammo tube of the weapon. She did not bother to pick up the spent shell. As she had nowhere to put it, and back home, Roberta had access to more of the grenade shells that her weapon used.
Fabiola thought, 'I am tempted to pick up my shells. But, I am just thinking of how the police are going to try to make heads or tails of the old style ammo, to them, that I am using. And where the hell I got the ammo from. Let alone who I am... That thought makes me want to giggle, just thinking about it...'
'Now, where are those two men. They would not have been crazy enough to try to make a run for it. And get shot. So, they got to be here, somewhere.'
Fabiola turned around, with her back to the door, as she then saw, to her left, Lee crouching down, as he headed away from her, towards a row of cars to her left, from the row she was in.
Fabiola thought, 'The other guy probably ditched, Lee. That doesn't matter. I now have him. And Roberta will be proud.' She looked over at Lee, as she ordered, “Stop right there, Lee.”
Lee stopped.
Fabiola immediately walked out from between the cars, as she rushed over to him.
As Fabiola walked towards Lee, Fabiola kept her China Lake grenade, with the end of the barrel pointed at him, while the butt of the gun was firmly pressed against the front of her right shoulder.
Fabiola thought, 'Now I got him.' She warned, “Don't trying anything, or you will be in pieces.”
When Fabiola reached Lee, she noticed that he seemed be doing something with his hands.
Fabiola ordered, “Stop whatever you are doing.”
But, Lee ignored her.
When Lee seemed to swing out with his left arm, towards her, she took it as an insult, and she decide to kick him in the head with her left foot.
But, then she saw her left foot passed through him. Though, with her acrobat skills, she did not lose her balance as she planted her left foot on the ground, by her right foot.
Fabiola was confused, as she watched Lee stand up and disappear in a flash of light.
Fabiola then realized she had been tricked, as she loudly cursed, “Damn hologram!” She thought, 'I forget that Balalaika mentioned Lee had one of those things!'
Fabiola then heard a car started behind her, to her right, across the room.
She quickly turned around, to see the lights of a four door, white pained car, come to life.
The car immediately burst into motion, as he backed out, and then quickly moved forwards, down the lane it was in, away very Fabiola.
Meanwhile, Fabiola aimed her China Lake at the car, and she fired a grenade at it. But she missed, with the explosion destroying several cars, but the white car, due to the white car quickly made it to the ramps leading towards ground level.
(_)
Inside the moving white car, Lee drove the white car as quickly as possible down the ramp.
Matthew was riding in the front passenger see of his company car. He had placed his briefcase between his legs, on the floor in front of him.
Both of them had already buckled themselves into their seats.
As Lee kept his eyes on the path in front of him, he explained, “The student has a China Lake forty by forty-six millimeter grenade launcher. The good news is that it only holds four rounds. Three in the tube. One in the chamber. Of which she has already used, two. The bad news is we have to survive the next two shots.”
Matthew thought, 'Like we have to worry about that, now. We just on the way to the second floor. She was across the room. It is not like she can catch us, now.' He begged, “Slow down. But, we already lost her. So no worries.”
Lee pointed out, “No. We didn't lose her. She is going to climb down from the outside to the second level, and try to ambush us with the grenade launcher. If she misses, she will try the same thing on the bottom level.”
Matthew commented, “I know I called her a lunatic. But surely, she is not that crazy.”
Lee commented, in an even, though slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Since you are new at this. I am going to let that comment slide... Still, it is not that she is that crazy. It is just that she is that damn good.”
Lee then continued driving.
(_)
At that moment, on the third floor garage, Fabiola didn't have time to fold the grenade launcher stock, onto the weapon itself, as she quickly stuffed it down the back of her shirt.
Fabiola used the fore-end to reload another shell into the chamber of the weapon, as she swiftly headed for the outside guard railing of the floor.
She climb over it, and hung there with both hands. A second later, she let go. A split second later, ten feet down, she used her hands to grabbed hold of the guard railing on the second floor.
Fabiola hauled herself up and over the railing.
She had just enough time to stand up, and pull out her China Lake, as the white car passed by.
She fired, but she was a second to late, as the car ducked down the ramp, and the explosion did not stop, nor damage the vehicle.
Fabiola quickly reloaded the last grenade round her into the chamber of weapon. She then stuffed the launcher down the back of her her shirt, again.
She swiftly went to the outside guard railing, and she repeated the process to get to the ground floor.
(_)
Inside the car, Lee said, in a casual tone of voice, “Told you.”
Matthew thought, 'Okay. This guy knows way too much about the situation.' He demanded, “How the hell do you know this stuff? How do you predict what is about to happen.”
Lee smiled, as he casually answered, “I just come to except the craziest things possible that these women can do, and I plan for the women to do those actions. I have yet to be disappointed.”
Matthew commented, “That is insane.”
Lee countered, “No. This is reality.” He then began lightly chuckling at his private joke, for a few seconds.
(_)
As the car exited the ramp to the ground floor, Fabiola was there to meet them. She took aim, and fired the Chain Lake again, but she missed again. With her destroying some parked cars, but nothing else.
Fabiola mentally cursed, 'Damn. I regret never learning how to hit a moving target with this thing. Though, is there a way I can stop them.'
Fabiola then looked around, and she swiftly she realized, in thought, 'I am near the exit to this parking garage. They have to come through this exit, to leave the building. I still might able to stop them. But, how?'
A second later, she smiled, as she came up with a quick idea. She thought, 'I don't have time to reload. But, the bluff worked before, for my counterpart in the manga. And reading that manga was almost as strange as watching the anime about myself, and my friends. Doing the things we did. Still, I might as well try this bluff.'
As the white car turned, and entered the straightaway to the exit, she immediately stood between them, and the exit, as she held her China Lake with both hands, while she pointed the barrel end of her China Lake at oncoming car.
Fabiola noticed that instead of the car slowing down, the car was speeding up. She then saw through the front windshield, that Lee was driving with a huge smirk on his face. He was also using his left hand to hold up four fingers.
Fabiola suddenly realized, in thought, 'He knows I am out of ammo!'
Fabiola jumped out of the way, to her left, as she both discard the China Lake and had her MAG Seven shotguns come out of her sleeves. When she landed, she did a roll, that allow her to be back on her feet, facing the white car that was now driving away form her.
Fabiola then gave chase.
At that moment, the car immediately burst into the outside night air, with Fabiola running right behind them. Given they were using the exit, there was no automated tollbooth, with a lowered mechanical arm, and intercom, to talk to someone in the building, to let them in. Instead, there was a curved row of of metal teeth on the concrete exit. With the curved row of blades turned outward, so any vehicle that tried to enter that way would blow their tires. While those exiting the building had no such problems.
While Fabiola ran after the car, she began firing her MAG Seven shotguns at the back tires of the white car. The car turned to her left, driving passed the front of the police station, as Fabiola continued firing. But, neither tire blew out, as the car sped away.
As Fabiola ran out of rounds for her shotguns, she came to a stop, in the middle of the street. Though, at that time of night, there were no cars driving by.
Fabiola breathed heavily, as she watched the car drive away, down the street. She thought, with disappointment, 'Being the writer, he would know all about my China Lake, and how many rounds it can hold. Also, he likely knows about that manga scene. And being a master poker player, he knows when to call a bluff. Still, it was worth a try.'
Just then, Fabiola heard Roberta say, in spanish, on her encrypted radio, in a pocket, in her maids dress, “Report.”
Fabiola used her gambler's rigs to make her shotguns slide back up her sleeves. She then used her left hand quickly grabbed her radio from a pocket in her black long skirt.
She looked at the radio, in her left hand looked at her radio. She thought, 'I might as well give Roberta the bad news. Though, she is using the encrypted channel that she set up for the both of us. From the radios we are given by Balalaika. And she showed me how to switch, back and forth, from this channel, to the encrypted channel the others are using. And the reason for the secondary channel was that Roberta does not want our hunt to be disturbed by the others.'
'Still, I am going to have to give her the bad news, as I will retrieve my China Lake and get out of here, before more cops show up. Or, those cops inside, that Roberta did not run across, decide to check out what is going on, outside of the headquarters. Either way, I need to get out of here, as soon as possible. Now, to talk to Roberta and get the ball rolling.
Given Fabiola had already switched her radio to the encrypted secondary channel, she just pressed the talk button on her radio, as she answered her teacher, and good friend. As she did so, she turned and heading back into the exit of the parking garage to retrieve her China Lake.
(_)
In the white car, as Lee had it speed down the road, Matthew was confused, as he asked, “Why are we still alive? She had us dead to rights with those pistols.”
Lee kept his eyes on the road, as he calmly answered, “We are alive because those are not pistols. They are modified MAG Seven auto-shotguns, with gambler's rigs allowed her to pull them from her sleeves. Though, the shotguns are modified, in that the shotguns are self reloading. And with a possible automatic selector switch. Though, she was clearly using single shot mode.”
“Anyway, she loaded her weapons with buckshot that likely wouldn't penetrate the metal and plastic of this car. Also, she was likely was firing at the back tires...”
“Though, I do not understand why we don't have a flat, yet. But, I am not complaining.”
Matthew stated, “The tires are flat resistant. They can run fifty kilometers with holes in them, before giving out.”
Lee replied, “You better hope so, because we don't have time to change a flat. Nor, find another car.”
Matthew commented, “I will hope as much as I can.”
Lee let out a small laugh. He smiled, as he said, “Good answered. Now, which way to Edgars towards.”
Matthew stated, “Keep going straight. I will tell you when turn.”
Lee replied, “Okay. That is fine with me.”
Lee then kept driving the car at high speed, down the street.
(_)
Three minutes ago, on the third floor of the police stations, Barton, Maxwell, along with several other police officers held their ppg pistols, as they stood in a row, behind some desks, as they waited for the intruder to show up.
The attacked stuck with out warning, as she kept to the shadows of the wall mounted flood lights, while she fired her semi-automatic pistols.
Her enhance sight allowed her to see clearly in the shadows, without the flood lights bothering her.
Each shot was a kill shot, as she slaughtered her way through the police personnel.
Maxwell had just enough time to see Barton be shot between his eyes, before the maid was on top of him, and he was killed himself.
After everyone in the room was dead. She stand silent for a few seconds, as she used her enhanced hearing to listen. There was absolute silence in the room, and she did not even hear anyone in the room breathing, besides herself. She also, did not hear anyone coming from the hallways, or offices.
But, she did her noise coming from nearby.
She smiled in a feral, wicked manner, as she holstered her to Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt, based on the M nineteen eleven semi-automatic pistols, each of them had a forty round, modified Promag COL-A8 ammo drum clip attached to the bottom of her pistol grips. She then pulled out her combat knife, from its hidden sheath.
(_)
In a nearby, dark closet, on the third floor, Dresden was huddled in the back wall of the room, as he cried his eyes out at the death screams he was sensing with his telepathy.
Suddenly, the door opened to the closet opened inwardly, those Dresden was far enough from the door for him to not be hit by the door swing into the small room.
Dresden looked up, to see who it was. Though, with his telepathy, he already knew who it was.
There was enough illumination from the emergency lighting outside to allow him to see who it was.
It was Roberta, the Bloodhound. A living, breathing, killing machine.
Though, the woman's face was cast in shadows, as she faced him.
Dresden knew, from Lee's thoughts, not to scan this woman's mind.
Dresden continued to looked up at her, as he cried tears from his eyes, which ran down his cheeks. He pleaded, “I don't want to die.”
Roberta walked over to Dresden, and she knelt down to his level. It was then that Dresden saw she had that crazy, insane smile that promised death to all who saw it.
Roberta held up her bloodied combat knife in her right hand. She then up held, with her left hand, by the deadman's hair, the severed head of Maxwell in her left hand.
Roberta coldly demanded, in an even tone of voice, in english, “Where? Is? Lee?”
Dresden begged, “I know don't where Lee is. Please. I don't want to die.”
Roberta looked at the younger man, as she muttered under her breath, “Pathetic.”
She stood up, as she dropped the severed head by Dresden, while she still held onto her combat knife with her right hand.
Roberta turned around and walked out of the closet.
She closed the door behind her. Leaving Dresden unharmed.
Dresden leaned by down on the floor, by Maxwell's severed head.
Dresden had stopped crying, for the most part. He was very happy to be alive. And he was overjoyed by the fact he had already taken him short term memory wiping medication. In about fifteen minutes, he would mercifully forget the last, and worst, three hours of his entire life.
(_)
Right outside of the closet Dresden was inside of, Roberta stood in place, as she cleaned her combat knife off, onto her dress. When she was done wiping off the blood off the blade of the weapon, and onto the bottom part of her white apron, she away her knife its scabbard, somewhere on her person.
Roberta then pulled out her encrypted radio with her right hand. She turned the radio on, and she set it to the encrypted channel she has made for herself and Fabiola to use in private.
Roberta pressed the talk button with her right thumb, as she said into it, in spanish, “Report.”
A few seconds later, on the other end of the line, Fabiola answered, in spanish, “I had Lee, but he got away in a white, four door car, less than twenty seconds ago. He exited the front side of the building, with them turning left, and driving past the entrance of the front of the police station entrance. They have yet to turn down another street.”
Roberta quickly rushed over to the window of the room she was in. She noted that the room face the way front of the building.
She then looked out the window, and to her left, down the road. As she looked for Lee's white car, she saw the adjacent alleyway, to the right side of the main road, that passed by the front of the police station.
There were buildings between the roads, which were two or three stories tall. But, the police station overlooked those buildings, in that area of the city. And given the street lights, and height at which Roberta was looking, Roberta could still see the roads clearing enough.
A few seconds later, Roberta saw the white car driving away. The vehicle was only two blocks from the building. And the white car was heading for one of the local, main highways.
Roberta's continued smiling, as she thought, 'I am glad, that yesterday, I had Fabiola, and myself, memorize all the main roads in this city. And this time, Lee will not lose me so easily.'
Roberta stated, into the radio, in spanish, “I see him. You head back to the inn, and stay with the others. I will handle this myself.”
There was no reply, as Roberta thought, 'Fabiola, knows better than to waste time with needless chatter. And she will do as I tell her. Though, it is going to take her a few minutes, considering we left our reality devices back at the hotel, because we did not want to lose them, or have them stolen.'
'Besides, Revy, Rock, and the others would not leave us stranded here, because we are all friends.'
'Now, to do something I am not really looking for too. For, I have done this before, a few times, even before my... Enhancements. And I know I will not harm myself in doing so.'
Roberta then put away her radio, as she mentally prepared herself for the next action she was about to take.
(_)
At that moment, in the white car, that Lee was driving down the road. By then, both men had put on their seatbelts.
Then, something occurred to Lee, as he kept his eyes in front of him. He requested, “Keep an eye out behind us. We are not anywhere near the being clear of danger, just yet.”
Lee thought, 'Given the lateness of the hour at night, there is likely little traffic on the road. All the police will probably be converging on the police station in a matter of a few minutes. But, the maids will be long gone by then. On the bright side, I doubt there will be any cops between us and the Edgars Industries Complex, to try and stop us, in our high speed burn to safety.'
Meanwhile, Matthew did as Lee instructed. With his seatbelt still on, he looked to his left, between front the seats, and back at the police building. He then saw something strange. He stated, “I think I just saw someone burst through a third story window, and fall to the ground below.”
Lee stated, “Given we were just on the third story floor. Whom you saw was likely the Bloodhound. The purple haired maid. The green haired woman's teacher.”
Matthew commented, “I wouldn't worry. No one could survive a landing at that height.”
Lee countered, “She could. And she has. Even before she became a cyborg. She likely already spotted us. And she will be coming for us in something, real soon.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'We problem should have immediately turned onto another street, before she spotted up. Though, there is nothing we can do about it now.'
'Though, I feel we have just entered the big bad boss level of this game. And all we got to do to survive this is to make it to the finish line, before the boss reaches us. Personally, I always hated such timed chase levels in video game. Though, now that I facing facing such a situation in person. From a personal standpoint, I would rather run, than fight a walking horror like Roberta.'
Lee stated, “We need to put as much distance as we can, before she finds some wheels of her own. Too buy us some more time.” He then saw he was coming up to a four way intersection of the road, with traffic lights on all sides. He asked, “I am coming up to a light. Is there where we turn? Or, do you need me to go straight? Which way do I need to go?”
Matthew turned back around to look in front of them. He saw where they were, as he answered, “Take a right at the next light. Then, it is straight to the highway on ramp. From there we just keep going straight. Later on, the highway literally divides, with the far left lane ending at the Edgars Industries Complex.” He then turned back to look behind him.
Lee replied, “That is good to know.”
Unfortunately, as they came to the traffice light, the light had turned red for them. Though, Lee was not going to stop, just for a traffic light, with Bloodhound of Florencia on his trail.
Though, Lee was careful he ran the red light, while turning right. As he did so, he thought, 'The only good thing about this situation, is they while they use metric measurements, the roads are like in the U.S., where everyone drives on the right side of the road.'
Lee then noticed something, as he tried to apply the brakes. The car did slow down a bit, but not as quickly as it should.
As Lee sped the car back up, he commented, in a calm, and rational manner, “Matthew. Not to scare you. But, one of the student's shots hit brake line. I believe some buck shot bounce on the asphalt, and nicked the brake line under the car. I can feel that brake line is bleeding, and we are losing brake pressure as I work the brake pedal. Soon we are not going to have any brakes at all.”
While continuing to look behind them, Matthew stated, “So, we are going to have a high speed chase without working brakes?”
Lee joked, “Yea. Though, going at high speed sort of defeats the purpose having brakes during such a chase.”
Both men lightly laughed at Lee's gallows humor.
As they calmed down, Matthew deadpanned, “If this killer Bloodhound maid doesn't kill us, we are going to die at the sudden stop at my boss' headquarters.”
Lee countered, “Not really. I have experience with high speed chases. And I have learned how to drive, and safely stop, without having brakes.” He mentally added, 'Those were some fun chases at night, down the roads of Plata Podrido, during the time loop. Though, to be far, I should have been nicer to the brakes on my car, those nights. Still, I had those problems fixed after the time loop ended.'
Matthew inquired, “So, what are you going to do to avoid the sudden stop?”
Lee stated, “When we get close to the gate, I plan to let my foot off the pedal and coast into the complex. We will still likely have to hit something to stop, but it will be a slow speed collision. It will total the car, but as long as we have our seatbelts on, we will be fine.”
Matthew replied, “Okay. I will just have to trust you on this.”
Lee said, “Don't worry. You are in good hands.”
Lee then continued to drive then quickly down the road, to the highway on ramp.
(_)
While the Lee drove passed the red traffic light, outside the front of the police station, Roberta stood up from the ground unharmed, after landing on the street, with both her legs, and her right arm, being used as shock springs to slow her landing.
Roberta stood straight up, as she did mental check on her body to find that she has no injuries from the fall.
She then noticed that she was standing in the right lane of the street. The lane that Lee has been driving down, to get away from her student, and herself.
Suddenly, she saw headlights behind her, and heard a car horn honk.
Roberta turned around and saw a two door, two seat, cherry red, convertible sports car, with its top, and windows down, stopped right behind her.
The human man who was its driver's seat, on the left side of the car, was not wearing a seatbelt. The man loudly stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, in english, “Hey lady! Move out of the way!”
The man then saw, in his headlights, Roberta's lips curl into a toothy, slasher grin. The man immediately when silent with fear.
While the man was still too afraid to asked, Roberta calmly walked over to the driver's side of the car. She then used her right arm to literally grab the driver by the front of his shirt, and throw the driver out of the car. With the man landing onto the sidewalk, with only a few bruises. And the man did not even have time to turn off his car, and remove his keys from the ignition.
With the motor already still running, Roberta hopped over the driver's side door, and into the driver's seat. She found that car had an automatic transmission, located in the center console, between the seats. And the car was set to park.
Roberta set the car to drive, and she floored the gas pedal, as she sped away.
As Roberta felt the wind play with her hair, she continued smiling to herself. She thought, with eagerness and anticipation, 'Now, the true hunt begins.'
(_)
At that moment, in the white car, Lee had nearly floored the gas pedal, as they came up on the ramp, that allowed enter a six lane highway, on the right lane, going towards Edgars Headquarters.
Lee found he had no problems merging with traffic, as the ramp lane merged with the far right lane of the highway.
Lee saw that like the outer loop, there were street lights every fifty feet, or so, on each side of the highway, providing plenty of illumination for the drivers, from street lights set in rows, along the sides of the highway, and along the interior, concrete barrier median of the highway.
The highway had three lanes for coming, and three lanes going. Lee found that the road was modernly busy on both sides of traffic, with him staying in the right lane, except when he needed to pass.
Lee thought, 'Good. The semi-trucks are staying in the left and center lanes, like they should. And most of the vehicles in the right lane are going as fast as I want to go. We are going around eighty miles an hour. And I would guess, converting from kilometers, on the speedometer, to miles, in my head, that this cars top speed is between eighty-five to ninety miles an hour.'
'Though, that is fast enough. And since everyone is going this speed, I am going with the traffic, meaning I will likely not get pulled over, even if there is a cop nearby.'
'Also, this is nowhere near as bad as going through downtown Atlanta, Georgia, during rush out. Bumper to bumper, doing eighty-five miles an hour. Now, that is insane.'
'And I regret I cannot use their names. But, I do not know Matthew enough to mention Roberta, Fabiola, and the others by name, in front of him. Still, I need to remind Matthew to keep a lookout for Roberta.'
Lee kept his eyes forward, as he stated, “Look behind us, at those driving cars very fast, towards us. Look for a young, fair skinned woman, with long purple hair. That is the other maid. Or, more aptly, the Bloodhound.”
Matthew continued looking behind them, as replied, “Gotcha.”
Lee thought, 'Though now, that I think about it. This would be a good excuse to get to know a little more about you, Matthew. And it would help take your mind off of how dire our situation really is.'
Lee kept his eyes in front of him, and to his sides, as he requested, “Given you are now my lawyer, Matthew. I would like to know a little about you.”
While still looking behind them, Matthew stated, “There is not much to tell. I had a normal childhood. I became a lawyer to help my younger brother. For a few years, I got caught up in the drug culture. During that time, me, and a good friend I had, a mexican reporter, did a wicked burn at Babylon Five, while bombed out of our gourds. And we got away from the station right before the hammer was about to drop on us, and back to Mars.”
Matthew's lips curled into a wicked grin, as he continued, “Keep in mind, Mars is an independent, sovereign nation. And we don't have an extradition treaty with the Earth Alliance, yet... Hehehe... Last I heard from my reporter friend was that he was going on a Martian dust run. He disappeared after that... But, I miss him.”
“Anyway, I got clean, won a few major cases for my brother, and those like him. Then, I got hired personally, as a lawyer to Edgars Industries, by Mister Garibaldi, himself. I think the main reason he hired me was that I had the balls to freely admit to his face what I did in Babylon Five. He laughed during my story, and for a few minutes after I finished my story, about what my friend and I did there.”
“Finally, after some time there, I was assigned to your case, and we find ourselves here, being chased by unstoppable killing machine.”
Lee could not help be laugh a little, as he happily thought, 'Fear and Loathing in Babylon Five. I am going to have to keep him around just hear the backstory to that one.'
As Lee calmed down, he stated, “Well Matthew, you are the exact type of lawyer I want. I want someone that can appreciate the concept of taking refuge in audacity.”
Without turning to look at Lee, Matthew said, “Thank you, Lee.”
Lee commented, “You're welcome. Now, keep an eyes out, while I do our best to get us to your boss, as quickly, as possible, and in one piece.”
Matthew replied, “No problem.” Matthew then continued looking behind them, Lee drove them down the highway.
Two minutes later, Matthew saw the purple hair woman in the distance, as she drove a cherry red convertible sports car towards them. With the roof and side windows down on the vehicle.
Matthew thought, 'With her long purple hair waving in the wind, she is not hard to spot.' He commented, “Lee, you were right. She's here. I see her coming up fast in a red sports.”
Lee looked in the rearview mirrors. He saw that she was weaving through the lanes, as she passed by cars and trucks. She was about a fifty yards from them, and closing. He stated, “I see her.”
Matthew continued to look at the red sports car that was coming on them. He said, “As your lawyer, I highly suggest we go faster.”
Lee stated, “I have the gas pedal almost to the floor.”
Matthew continued looking behind the Bloudhound, as he asked, in a deadpan tone of voice, “Then, how can she be gaining on us so fast?”
Lee flatly answered, “Simple. She is in a high-end sports car. We are in a medium level piece of crap. Here. Turn around, and take the wheel. I think I can solve our problem. If I don't, then in about twenty seconds, she is going to be on top of us. And then it is over. So, just don't disturb me. I only got one shot this.”
Matthew quickly turned around to look at the road in front of them. As he grabbed the steering wheel, with his left hand, Lee let go of the wheel.
Matthew steered the car, while Lee kept his foot on the gas pedal.
Lee pulled the level on the left, bottom side of his chair, and he set his chair to lean all the way back. He then was facing the closed sunroof of the car. He quickly opened the car's sunroof. Next, he pulled out the last grenade that he stole from Jayne.
Without taking his eyes off the road in front of them, from the corner of his right eye, Matthew saw the strange looking grenade. He asked, “You had that the entire time? And the police security sensors, nor the telepath, did not pick it up?”
Lee kept his visual focus on the open sunroof, as he stated, “Mister Dresden did know about it. But, he realized the seriousness of the situation. And this grenade is so different from the standard weapons the sensors are designed to pick up, that they did not realize what it is.' He thought, 'Along with my reality device and hologram device. Though, I was counting on that.'
Matthew thought, 'The mysteries just continue to pile up on of this man. But, this is not the time for such questions.' He commented, “Okay. Though, I still don't know what are you doing?”
Lee requested, in a sarcasitc tone of voice, “Stay quiet. I am using the force.” He thought, 'Or more like my precognition. Though, I have never done this before with a grenade. And if I am not careful, I could get us killed.”
Lee closed his eyes, as he held the grenade in his right hand.
He internally felt for the right time to prime and throw his explosive weapon.
Suddenly, he sense the moment was at hand. The right exact moment. He quickly used his left hand to turn knob on the top of the grenade, priming its eight second fuse. Right after priming the weapon, he tossed the grenade in an underhanded throw, out of the sunroof.
(_)
A few seconds ago, twenty-five yards behind Lee and Matthew. In the same far right hand lane, Roberta was driving her red sports car, towards Lee and Matthew's white car.
There were no vehicles between the two men, and Roberta.
Roberta thought, 'I can see that Lee is the one driving. And I could shoot them both right now. But, what would be the fun in that? I think I will drive them off the road, then I will handle them both.'
Then, Roberta further pressed down the gas pedal, to more quickly gain on the two men.
Suddenly, she saw something small come out of the top of the white car in front of her. With the small object landing on the front, right side of the windshield, between the hood and the window wipers. Right in front of Roberta.
Roberta immediately realized it was a small grenade, as she quickly ripped off the driver's side door, and jumped out. She came rolling to a stop onto center lane of the highway. She then laid there, on her back, as she wait for the explosion to happen.
Fortunately, the streets lights allowed other drivers to see her in the middle lane, and the red car, in the far right lane, that was slowing down.
The vehicles drove around into the far left lane, to avoid hitting her in the middle lane, and the burning car in the far right lane. Though, none of the vehicles stopped to check on Roberta.
A second later, the grenade went off, and caused the car to explode. Fortunately, there was no one, nor any vehicles near the red sports car, when it exploded.
While laying face down on the road, Roberta smile wickedly, as she thought, while feeling slightly impressed with her prey, 'Not bad, Lee. Not bad at all. There is nothing more invigorating than a challenging hunt, lead to success. And you are proving to be a worthy challenge.'
(_)
At that moment, up the highway, in the white car, Lee closed the sunroof. He then set his chair back up, as he took the steering wheel. With Matthew letting, and leaning back in his seat, as Lee took the steering wheel with both his hands. Matthew then looking in the right side, door mirror, at the vehicle that Lee had just destroyed.
Lee saw there was not vehicles in front of him, for about a hundred feet. So, Lee took the opportunity to look his rearview mirrors to see that the smoke remains of red sports car had come to a stop, as it was on fire, in the same far right lane they were in. Though, Lee did not see Roberta. And that greatly worried him, he also felt relief that Roberta no longer had transportation to catch them with.
Lee put his attention back in front of him, as he thought, 'Well, that is that. Now, to get to Edgars Industries headquarters, before Roberta finds another set of wheels. I hope Roberta did not seriously harm, or kill, the person she stood that red sports car from. Though, I will still have Matthew play lookout.'
Matthew looked over to his left side, at Lee, as he said, “I am still surprised you had a grenade all this time.”
Lee continued looking down the road, as he smirked. He stated, “It worked, didn't it? It's over.”
Then, Lee saw a tiny glint of white, from the corner of his right eye, in the center rearview, of the car.
Lee looked over at the mirror to see Roberta standing in the middle of the road, to their left. She was tiny in the mirror, but the vehicles were driving around her, to avoid hitting her. And in the street lights, Lee could see the white apron around her waist as clear as day.
Lee then saw that Roberta had start running towards them. He stated, with a mild sense of dread in his tone of voice, “Or, maybe not... Take a look behind us, and let me know where the maid is heading near.”
Matthew looked behind him, and between the front seat. He saw that by then, Roberta was running as fast as the cars were driving on the road, which were doing around eighty miles an hour. Matthew exclaimed, in a mix of fear, disbelief, and surprise, “She is not human!”
Lee quipped, “You just figured that out, Matthew? So, do you have any weapons on you?”
Matthew turned around to face Lee, as he replied, “What do you mean?”
Lee stated, “That grenade was my last weapon. We need something, or we are screwed.”
Matthew leaned down, and grabbed his briefcase from the floor, between his leg. He then leaned back up, set the briefcase on his lap, with two the numerical combination locks facing him. He set the proper three digit numbers of the two locks. He then undid the locks, and opened the briefcase.
Matthew then pulled out something, from his case, that he carefully set on his lap, in front of his briefcast. He closed the case, shut the locks, and place as brief case back between his legs.
With his left hand, Matthew carefully picked up the item in his lap, as he stated, “One of the rangers lent me this, right before I went to the police station, to meet with you.”
Lee risked a look to his right side, to look at what the item was. He saw that it a ranger fighting pike, that was collapsed to its four inch long cylinder mode.
Lee looked back at the road, as he stated, “Not what I had in mind. But, it will have to do. Hand it here.” He kept his left hand on the steering wheel. He held out his right hand, as he looked back at Matthew and the item in Matthew's left hand.
Matthew carefully set the weapon into Lee's right hand, with the center button facing up, in Lee's right open palm. As Matthew let got of the compressed staff weapon, he cautioned, “Careful not to hit the center button. Which I turned to face up.”
Lee closed his hand around the weapon, while paying special attention to not press the center button. He looked back at the highway in front of them, as he said, “Thanks for the reminder.”
Lee continued to pay attention to the highway in front of them, and Roberta closing in behind them, by glancing at the rearview mirrors, as he thought, 'Now, I have a weapon. The question is how I am going to use it? At least, I have a few minutes to think of a plan, before Roberta reached us. But, none of the plans I am coming up would work in the manner that Matthew and I would survive, and get away. And I cannot sacrifice Matthew, because he is the key meeting Garibaldi. And getting Garibaldi's help would buy me more time for my larger plans of escape.'
Lee took a risk to take a closer look at the collapsed pike, in his right hand. He used his right fingers to careful adjust his hold of it in his right hand, to where it the cylinder was held long ways in the palm of his hand, with the red button in the middle facing up, to where he could press it with his thumb. Lee then looked up at the road in front of him.
Matthew then looked back just in time to see the running maid jump onto the roof of a nearby car. He stated, with worry evident in his tone of voice, “She just jumped onto the roof of a car. She really isn't human! We are screwed!”
Lee turned to Matthew, as he snapped at his lawyer, “Either nut up, or shut up. I need you keep an eye on where she is at. And where she is going.”
Matthew thought, 'I don't know the term, but I know the meaning. I have got to get a hold of myself, and do my part of this job. Or, we are dead. Or, worse, at least first for Lee. From what the green haired woman said.' Matthew then kept track of Roberta, as he calmly stated, “She has now jumped onto the bed of a pickup truck.”
“Now, she is on the roof of another car.”
“She just made it onto a taxi.”
“And now she is on the trailer container of a semi.”
“She is not on the hood a mini-van. I am surprised that roof could support her landing. They were not made to handle that type of strain... Now, she has jumped onto a full sized van.'
Matthew kept updating Lee, as Lee continued to keep the car in the far right lane.
Their car soon came up to being parallel to green semi-tractor-trailer truck, to their left side. The truck was hauling a standard steel trailer container box, with the truck being in the middle lane, next to the right lane Lee and Matthew's white car were in.
(_)
Roberta jumped from vehicle roof top, to vehicle roof top. With some of her jumps being measured over a hundred feet. Even with wind resistance, Roberta had no problems perfectly landing each time.
While Roberta continued to jump, she saw that she was getting closer to Lee's white car. She smiled, as she thought, with mild amusement, 'This is kind of fun. And the wind resistance is not that bad.'
'Now, I know why Revy finds jumping from high speed boat, to high speed boat, so much fun. Still, this is a lot more dangerous, than doing that. Because unlike jumping boats, which if one misses, the person hits the water, and gets wet. I miss, and I will eat asphalt. Still, I will just have to be more careful. And I would gloat about this to her. But, she is not one to take gloating well.'
Her smile turned feral again, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, to capture my prey.'
Roberta than jumped on top the trailer container that was beside the white car, to her right, that Lee was driving. She walked up the top of the container, to line up her next jump.
(_)
At that moment, inside the white car below, Matthew yelled, “She just jumped onto the top of the cargo contained right beside us!”
Lee cursed under his breath, “Damn. We're out of time.” As he partly looked to his left, at the container, and he suddenly realized that he was driving beside trailer part of the green semi.
Lee then started to formulate another plan.
A few seconds later, Lee finished his plan, as he thought, 'That could work.'
Lee quickly used the controls on the door by him, to his left, to lowered all four of the electronic side windows of the car.
As the open window began to blow air into their car, Matthew asked, “What are you doing?”
Lee kept his left hand on the steering wheel, as he used his right hand to undo his seatbelt, and remove it. While he did so, he flatly stated, “Minimizing debris.”
Matthew replied, “Huh?”
A second later, both of them heard the noise, and felt, as Roberta landed on top of their car hood roof.
Lee gripped the collapsed pike in his right hand, more rightly, as he gripped the steering wheel with his left hand. He also steered the car exactly where he wanted to go, as he ordered, “Undo your seatbelt, and duck under the dashboard, right now.”
Matthew did so.
At that moment, outside, on the roof of their car, Roberta pulled her two Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt semi-automatic pistols from her person. Each of her pistols had a forty round, modified, Promag COL-A8 ammo clip, attached at the bottom of her pistol grips.
Roberta then immediate started firing at the engine, in the front of the car.
Lee saw the shots being made into the hood in front of him. He swiftly check to see that Matthew had removed his seatbelt, and ducked under the dashboard, in front of him. Which, Matthew had done so.
Lee then quickly ducked to his side, over the center console, as he steered the car, to his left, between the front landing gear of the trailer itself, and the back tandem axles, and wheels, of the trailer.
Lee knew the car was to tall to clear the trailer, and that was what he was counting on.
(_)
Outside Roberta realized what was happening, as she immediately jumped up, to her left, and over the top of the trailer, while the white car's hood was sheered off.
The front and back windshields detached with the roof, in single pieces. And with the side windows lowered, there were no glass shards created, to rain down on on Lee and Matthew on the inside of the car, due to the maneuver Lee presently did.
As Roberta was in the apex of her arc, over the trailer, she saw just was she expected. Below her, Lee's white car exited into the far left lane, she smiled as she held her guns ready.
Roberta's grin turned more feral, as she thought, ''Just what I expect you to do, Lee. Nice attempt to try to lose me. But, it will not work. Now, I have you.'
Roberta's timing and aim was excellent, as she planned to land right into the backseat of the Lee's white car.
While falling, she kept her trigger fingers on the trigger guards of her weapons.
But, as she fell closer to the car, she noticed Lee was holding something with his right hand above the center console of the car. With the thumb side of his first facing to Lee's side. Also, the item's top and bottom was uncovered, as Lee gripped the item by the sides, with his right fingers and hand. With the bottom of the item placed flat against the top of the console.
(_)
At that moment, in the car, Lee was leaned back up, and he looked up at Roberta's slasher smile, with a smirk on his face.
For one brief moment, their eyes met, as Roberta was close enough to see passed Lee's shades, and into his eyes.
And a second later, at the last possible moment, Lee used his right thumb to trigger the fighting pike, in his right hand, to expand.
The weapon, popped up like a spring, hitting Roberta in her stomach, and knocking the wind out of her, while wiping smile off her face, as the blow ejected her away from, and behind, Lee's white car.
At the same time, the staff also ejected itself from the car, and fell onto the road, behind them.
While going back up into the air, the blow also caused Roberta to let go of her pistols, as she land onto the highway with a thud.
The graceless fall caused her to roll a few times, on her side.
As Roberta sat up, Roberta turned and watched the now topless white car, speed away. As she got her breath back, she placed her right hand where the weapon had hit her on the stomach.
She admitted to herself, “I actually felt that.” She then quickly mentally checked herself, as she thought, 'Though, I don't think the blow, nor the landing did any serious damage to me. I will have a nice bruise for a couple of days, where that thing hit me in the stomach. But otherwise, I should be fine. Now, I just need to figured out how to catch up with Lee, again, without run. Because that running and jumping, while fun, was starting to tire me.'
Roberta then realized something, as she mentally wondered, 'Why are not any cars driving around me.' She turned to her left and behind her to see. And what she saw to her left, caused me to smile.
Roberta continued to smile, as she thought, 'Yes. That will do just nicely. But first, I need to quickly collect my weapons. Considering time is of the essence, I will not need them for this next part. So, I will check on their later.
Roberta then got up, and swiftly located and collected her two pistols off the road.
(_)
Meanwhile, the human, male, driver of the green semi-tractor trailer truck saw the whole event play out, from his rearview mirrors, as he immediately turned the trail to his right, and he began to stop, as the white car cleared under his trailer. As a way to get the white car away from his truck and trailer, to minimize any more risk of someone getting hurt in an accident.
A few seconds later, as the truck driving had his semi come to a stop, he noticed the white, roofless car, with to men in it, drive away.
The truck driver thought, “Damn idiots. They are going to get themselves, or someone else killed.'
The trucker then noticed the news helicopter, in the air, to his upper left, that fly away, as it followed the damaged white car.
The truck driver cracked a grin, as he thought, with amusement, 'But, idiots that are likely going to get caught.'
Though, given the way the truck driver stopped, blocked the middle and right lanes.
And due to Roberta landing in the left lane, the vehicles in the left lane stopped to avoid hitting Roberta. This block all three lanes of traffic on that side of the road, creating grid lock.
It was then that the truck driver noticed Roberta laying on the road.
The trucker thought, with worry, 'Oh hell. She was likely thrown from the car. I need to see how hurt she is.'
The truck driver immediately put his semi into park, undid his seatbelt, and began to get out of his large semi-tractor-trailer truck. The trucker was in such a hurry, he did not remove the key, and he left the driver's seat door open, as he got out.
It took about a minute for the driver to make his way out of his vehicle, and onto the highway, to see if he could help that women that had landed on the road.
By the time, the trucker had gotten out, with him on the road, approaching the women in a black and white dress, he saw the woman just leaned up from the road, as she had items in her hands. Though, the woman's back was turned from the trucker. And due the shadows of the street lights, the trucker could not see what the woman was doing.
The woman then started putting her items away.
(_)
Roberta had quickly collected her pistols off the road. She found that the cars behind her had continued to stay where they were. Considering, with their headlights, they saw that she had been collecting her pistols off the road.
As Roberta faced the concrete divider, on the left lane of the road, she holstered her two semi-automatic pistols.
Roberta then heard a male voice, behind her, inquire, with concern, in english, “Lady, are you alright?”
Roberta thought, 'I am glad someone was nice enough to check on me. I see this place does have a few kind people in it.
With her hands empty, Roberta turned around and she saw the truck driver approached her, to see if she was alright.
Roberta grinned wickedly at the man, and she saw that it was the semi-tractor-trailer trucker that had come to help her. With the man leaving the left driver's seat door open, and the truck idle.
Roberta happily thought, 'This is even better. At least, I won't have to yank him from his truck. And he likely left the key in it. So, I will just leave him on the road, unharmed.'
Roberta continued to grin wickedly, as she looked at the truck driver. She answered, in english, “Thank you for you concern. I soon will be.”
(_)
Less than a minute later, Roberta closed the door to her new vehicle. And she back on the road, in the green semi-tractor-trailer truck that she had taken from the driver. She quickly used her knowledge of vehicles, to put the transmission in gear, and drive the truck on the road, towards Lee and Matthew. With her quickly building speed in her large vehicle.
Though, Roberta left unharmed driver stranded on the side of the road. And the cars behind the truck, ignored the truck driver, as traffic started back up.
Roberta just gave the trucker driver one of her slasher smiles. The trucker took one look at Roberta's smile. He said, 'Keeps in the ignition. She's all yours.' He then turned and walked to the far right side of the highway, to the emergency lane, as Roberta ran for the open driver's side of the truck.
As Roberta drover down the highway, she moved to the center lane. And she also found that the truck had a near a full tank of whatever it ran on. That mean she could floor the pedal and not worry about fuel, as she made up for lost time, in her hunt.
While Roberta drove, she smiled, as she thought, 'This hunt is not over, yet. Not by a long shot.'
(_)
Meanwhile, a few minutes ago, in the white car, after Lee had just ejected Roberta from the car, and passed by the left side of the truck.
Lee continued to drive down the left lane of the highway, as he turned back to look at the road ahead of him.
Lee did not bother to buckle himself up.
Also, from the corner of his left eye, Lee noticed something, but he intentionally paid it no mind.
Lee calmly put both hands the steering wheel, as he said, in a relaxed tone of voice, to Matthew, “You can sit up now. And don't bother with the seatbelts. They were likely damaged in that little stuck of mine.”
Matthew leaned up, and he did as suggested. He did not buckled himself back into his seat. Though, he turned to Lee, and he saw that Lee was making great use of wearing his sunglasses at night. To break the wind off his eyes.
Meanwhile, Matthew did not have that luxury, as he had no glasses on himself to wear. But, given the clarity of the air, he could still see ahead of them, without it stinging to much.
Matthew thought, 'Lee is like Corey Hart. I wear my sunglasses at night. I guess there is a reason to do that. I wish I thought of bringing my sunglasses. Oh well. Now, where is the Bloodhound? And why are we not dead? For that matter, where the roof of the car?'
As Matthew looked around, he saw the Bloodhound was nowhere in sight. He then noticed Lee was snickering, as Lee kept looking down the road.
Matthew asked, “What are you snickering about?”
Lee continued looking down the road, he thought, 'Because, from the corner of my eye, I saw you looking around. No doubt, you are wondering where the Bloodhound is. And why we are still alive. Thought, I better coming up with another reason, for my snickering. Because, telling you that would be rude. And I know just what I want to say. With you, my captive audience.'
'Also, I noticed our little stunt stopped traffic behind us. So, that is good as well. With the Bloodhound likely quickly recovering from that. It will still take her a few minutes to find some more wheels. And with luck. That will give us more than enough time to reach fortress, Edgar's Industries, the literally army inside, and Garibaldi, himself, before she can get to us.'
'But, I better answer you now. Before you ask me other questions, which are harder to answer, for both of us.'
Lee kept his eyes on the road, as he stated, “I was just thinking about the weapons and equipment our pursuer is using. I got a good look at her weapons, as she was trying to literally get the drop on top of us. Most people focus on her slasher smile. But, I was taught to focus on the firearms. And I am surprised that she still is using those Promag ammo drum clips.”
“The Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt semi-automatic pistols is based off of the model M nineteen eleven semi-automatic pistol is a good quality weapon. And it uses quality ammo. The point forty-five ACP bullet. I have actually have the privilege of firing that exact model pistol when I was younger.”
“The pistol itself was original used by the Argentinian military and police during much of the middle part of the twenty century. And I am sure that to this day, it is considered one of the finest semi-automatic pistols ever made. And it fires very smoothly. It does not have much of a kick to it.”
“Also, the pistols use single-action action trigger system. Meaning the hammer has to be cocked for the trigger to fire it. But, knowing the Bloodhound's preference to have her weapons modified, she might have had her weapon customized to have double-action trigger systems. Meaning the trigger can pull back the hammer, and fire the round in the chamber.”
“What I like about that model pistol, and I am sure the person who is after us likes as well, is the way the safety systems work. It has a grip safety. Meaning that on the upper back part of the grip, there is a release for the hammer. If you don't fully grip the pistol, you cannot fire it. And it has a slide safety, for when the hammer is cocked back. With the slide safety located on the left upper side of the grip, for use of the right thumb, to toggle on and off.”
“Still, the slide safety is of a much older design. And it shows its age this way. In that it does not have a decocking function. And the slide safety will only lock when the hammer is already cocked. There is a really good reason for this. The hammer of the pistol is so small, and without a decocking function, if someone tries to manual cock the hammer, it can slip out of the persons fingers, and misfire. With the slide sliding back, and shredding the fingers and hand of that person.”
“So, the slide safety was designed to lock the hammer when the hammer was cocked back. And someone would not have to uncock the hammer, to use the safety. This was a smart design feature for the people at Colt, whom designed and made the weapon, to fix the minor design defect with the hammer.”
“Thought, I realized this a while ago, without having that type of misfire. That one should never try to manually cock hammer of that Sistema, by the hammer. Always, use the slide to cock the hammer.”
“Also, even though, like the original nineteen twenty-seven Colt, the Sistema had fixed front and back, open sights. Since this woman has a preference for modifying her weapons. Her colts likely have adjustable back sights.”
“Now, on the other hand. As good as the colt and ammo is. The forty round Promag COL-A8 ammo drum clip, on the other hand, had problems, both with not fully feeding the ammo, and it was knowing to cause the pistol ammo to jam in the chamber.”
“Still, her Promag ammo drums clip are different than the standard COL-A8 ammo drums. The standard COL A eight is a completely black plastic ammo drum, and clip. While, her ammo drums had a clear plastic, back casing, allowing her to see how much ammo she has left. Don't ask how I saw that. It is a long story. Anyway, it is very likely that her ammo drums are modified. And when she had those ammo drum modified, she had those flaws and defects fixed as well...”
“And that would take a master gunsmith to do... She likely used her former master's family resources to get the equipment, and help, to make the modifications to her weapons. That would explain where she got her other more interesting pieces of hardware. Such as the China Lake, for her student. I checked. Those things are rare, and hard to come by, even when they are produced by a third party.”
“Though, given the size of those ammo drum clips, with her being able pull out her pistol so quickly, with the pistols being ready to shoot, I do not want to know where she hides those weapons on her person.”
“That being said, I think she should have stayed with using the original seven bullet ammo clips, because she could really pulled off that dual, Desperado, Banderas, dual pistols popped out of both sleeves, into the hands, at the same time, trick. Very cool.”
“But, she always preferred more firepower over style and finesse. Which is definitely an interesting contrast to her student, whom prefer finesse over firepower. Not that I am going to argument those points with her. Even if she was not trying to kill us. Because, she has results with her methods.”
Matthew looked at Lee, as he listened to his client's comments. Matthew responded, in a confused tone of voice, “Huh?... What the hell are you talking about?... How do you know what you know?... Who the hell are you really?”
While still looking forward, toward the road in front of them, Lee smirked, as he thought, 'All wonderful questions to answer.'
He continued to smirk, as he happily commented, “I'm a user. Though, you can call me, Frankenstein... And you're my navigator... Bwahahahahaha!...” Lee's voice become more causal in its tone, as he continued, “Still, I really wanted to keep that staff. It is not as cool as a lightsaber, but it is worth having. Too bad I had to lose it to the Bloodhound. But, it was a good trade off. We are still both breathing.”
Matthew agreed, “You got that right.”
Lee commented, “Besides. We are being watched. With the roof off, there is a helicopter behind us, to our upper left. But, don't look directly at the camera. The viewers don't like that. And it is best not to allow them to get a direct look at our faces.”
McCormick simply replied, “Okay.” He then sarcastically thought, 'Just great. Even if I don't look at the helicopter. Which I don't plan to. Eventually, I will be identified, and everyone will connect me to this mess. Though, I will deal with that later. Right now, I want to get this job done, demand a much deserved, immediate vacation, and go home.'
While they drove down the highway, even with the top and windshields gone, Lee found the wind resistance was not that bad at the high speed they were traveling at.
Lee thought, 'At least I have my sunglasses on. And even with them on, I can still see fine. Due to the street lights and headlights of my car. Though, I still have the brake issues. Slowing down it going to become a real issue soon. I will just have to pop this think into neutral and coast our way down.'
(_)
A minute later, Matthew saw something in front of them, as he stated, “I see the lights of gates, concrete walls, buildings in the distance.”
Lee then noticed the lights coming from a few miles out from the Edgars Industries Complex, as well.
Lee also saw the lights outline Edgar's complex in the distance. Soon, they came into view, where they saw the buildings were lit up like Christmas tree of orange lights. There was the main, very large, very tall, building in the center of the headquarters. With small buildings surrounding it.
Lee could also see the orange lights that ringed the fence of the complex.
Even the orange lights around the gates, on that side of the complex, peeked out of the distance.
Lee thought, 'We are getting close. Now, to make better use of my lawyer.' Lee ordered, “Get on your cellphone, and tell Edgars security that we are coming in hot. And we are going to need armed guards ready at the gate. Along with any other firepower they can bring to the table.”
Matthew he pulled out his cellphone. He then dialed the direct number to Edgars security, that he knew of.
While Matthew put the phone to his right ear, to wait for the other end to pick up, he inquired, “Do you think she is not going to give up?”
Lee kept his eyes on the room, as he flatly replied, “That bitch does not know how to give up.”
Matthew said, “I was afraid you were going to say this.”
A second later, Lee heard Matthew say over the phone, “This is McCormick. I have the client. And we are coming in hot.”
Lee thought, 'The ball is in my lawyer's court, now. I just hope he can convince them to do as we request.'
As Matthew had his conversation on his phone, Lee was not fully passing attention to what Matthew was saying, as he drove the down the road.
As their car cruised down the highway on the left most lane their side, Lee noticed that the two lanes to his right separated from his lane, and veered to the right, around the large complex.
At the same time, Lee noted the far two left lanes of the oncoming traffic veered to the right around the complex.
As this happened, the lane they were on, the far left lane, and the nearest lane of oncoming traffic to his left merged into a two lane road. Though, the street lights continued every fifty feet or so, on the sides of the road.
Lee yelled, “Homestretch, babe!”
Suddenly, they heard a large horn blow behind them.
Lee mentally cursed, 'Oh no. I just jinx myself.'
Matthew heard the horn, as well.
With the cellphone still to Matthew right ear, and Lee keeping a first hand on the steering wheel, both of them turned around, the two men look between the two front seats, and behind them, to see a green semi-tractor-trailer truck, hauling a trailer container behind it, going a high speed towards them, and gaining on their car.
Through the left driver's windshield window, they both saw that Roberta, with her slasher smile, was at the steering wheel of the truck.
As both of them turned back to face the road in front of him, Matthew kept his right ear to the phone, as he put his right thumb over the microphone of his cellphone. He turned to Lee, as he listened to the other end of the line. He flatly stated, towards Lee. “Damn! You were right! She does not know when to quit!”
Lee then noticed a red light on the dash board instruments behind his steering wheel.
Lee said, “I got worse news. The heat gauge is red lining. She shot the radiator, or whatever keeps the engine cool from the friction of its gears. The engine is going to seize any second.”
By then, they were literally a mile from the gates of the complex, as both men saw the gates begin roll open for them.
Matthew then heard something from the other end of the line, that made him frown. He kept his thumb on the microphone of the cellphone, as he commented, in a strong tone of disappointment, and slight anger in his voice, “Damn it! I got more terrible news. They say they are opening the gate. But, they will not do anything else.”
Lee turned his head to his right, as he looked Matthew in his eyes. He stated, in a deadly serious tone of voice,“If they don't bring out their big guns right now, we are all dead!... Give me the phone.”
Matthew quickly handed Lee the phone.
Lee kept his left hand on the steering wheel, as he took the phone with his right hand.
Lee looked back in front of him, as he held the phone to his right ear. He yelled into the microphone of the cellphone, “Ah hell! Ah hell! Ah hell!”
Lee then hung up the cellphone, by flipping it close. Next, he tossed it back to Matthew, whom caught it, and put it away, in one of his pockets.
Lee thought, 'Ah hell, in Minbari means, continuous fire. Given that was Sinclair's catch phase, I am sure he added it to the Minbari language when he became Valen, when he time traveled back a thousand years ago, in this reality. Still, I am gambling the security officials will mistake me for a ranger talking to them. And my comment will trick them into pulling out their big guns. By shutting off the cellphone, I heighten their concern for our wellbeing.'
Then, Lee saw something else happen in the distance.
'Looks like it worked.' Lee thought, as he began laughing.
Matthew saw the same things that Lee did, as he asked, “Are those what I think they are?”
Lee smirked, as he replied, “Oh yea, babe. Get ready for some fun. Bwahahahahahaha!”
Suddenly, the back left driver's side tire exploded, causing the car to spin forward in a counterclockwise rotation, due to the right back tire still gripping the road.
Lee quickly turned his steering wheel partly turned to his left, into the turn, while he applied the gas, as he gaining control of the car's spin, to make it continue to going towards the gate. With the blown out left back wheel partly acting as a pivot for the spinning.
While doing so, Lee continued laughing like a madman, Matthew started to scream like a little girl.
Lee thought, 'I am so happy I spent some time in that time loop learning how to control spinning cars. Now, to increase me fun.'
On the second turn around to face Roberta, Lee decide to do something, while he gloated.
(_)
Ten seconds ago, in the driver's seat of the semi, Roberta was smiling. She watched at the began to car spin out, and her truck was getting closer and closer to her target.
Roberta thought, 'All I need is his brain intact.'
Roberta focused on the car, as she was sixty meters from the car. Then, forty meters from the car.
But, when she reached twenty-five meters, she noticed that Lee was laughing.
And then on second turn, when Lee faced her, he smirked, as he was looking right at her, while using his left hand to give her the middle finger.
Through the windshield, Roberta also heard Lee yell, “Roberta! You're fucked! Bwahahahaha!”
Roberta was more confused, than angry, by her targets insult against her.
Roberta then looked above the car, and towards the gate, and tall concrete fence.
On the columns on the large outside wall concrete walls that line the complex in front of them, she saw gun turrets popped up and aim at her.
She immediately dropped her grin, as her eyes widen, and her pupils contracted in fear.
She swiftly opened the driver's side door, as she jumped to the dirt ground, on the left side of the road, just in time to avoiding thousands of rounds of fire from the gun turrets.
The rounds were not PPG plasma rounds, but armor piecing rail-cannon spikes that fired over the white car, and shredded the semi, and quickly caused the vehicle to explode.
Right after the truck exploded, the container behind it rolled onto it side and skidded to a stop, it blocked both lands of traffic. As it Roberta, and came to a stop, nearer to the gate. Though, it the container was more on the right of the road, than the left side. With the container knocking done a one of the street lights, set every fifty feet, on the right side of the road.
And given the way the contain set, with the left lane not being completely blocked, this allowed Roberta a field of view, of her target, and the open gate.
A second later, the firing stopped, and Roberta got to her knees, as she watched as her prey escape her grasp, by his car spinning passed the gate.
A few seconds later, as the gate closed behind her target, Roberta howled in fury, “LEEEEEEEEE!”
Roberta then started to take deep breaths, as she started to force herself to calm down. She thought, with annoyance, and rage, 'Being angry right now will not help me, for the moment. And I partly regret finally seeing this series, that this reality is about. Because I now know who Michael Garibaldi, what the fortress in front of me is, and that Garibaldi controls it. And what I do not know about this location, is worse. I do not know what traps and resources Garibaldi has waiting for intruders...'
'As such, I cannot follow Lee inside. And it will take some well thought out planning to make it inside and reach Lee. So, I will have to escape, and find Rock. I will let her come up with a plan to capture Lee. She is good at planning. She already caught Lee once, at the factory. She can do so again.'
Roberta then looked around, as she continued her thoughts, 'But, first, I need transportation.'
Roberta then saw something in the distance, to her left, opposite to the road beside her. She smiled, as she thought, 'They will do. And I vaguely recall this situation.'
She then quickly escaped, be crawling, to avoid being shot by turrets, as she headed for those she saw in the distance. So, she could get a ride, the meet up with the rest of the Rock and Revy's group. And they could then figure out how to get Lee out of the fortress he had made it into.
(_)
At that exact moment, Lee and Matthew spun forward into the inside courtyard of the Edgars Industries Complex.
They came to a stop, as their car slammed into a large water fountain, in the center of the clearing.
The side that was slammed was Matthew's side. But, their car has lost so much momentum that neither of the two men were harmed, even without their seatbelts on.
Lee noticed that the gates had closed behind them, and the Bloodhound was nowhere in sight.
Lee's laugh had become a light chuckle, as he happily thought, 'I beat Roberta. I beat the Bloodhound. I beat the most dangerous badass I know of in the entire multiverse. I rock!... Boss level completed. My reward. I get to live free for another day. And that is all I want, for right now.'
'Still, I wonder if Matthew is alright.'
Lee then turned to Matthew, as he noticed that Matthew was still screaming.
Lee casually thought, 'If he is screaming that loudly, and clearly, he will be fine.'
Lee used his right hand to tap Matthew lightly on Matthew's left shoulder.
This got Matthew's attention, as he stopped screaming, and he looked over at his client from hell.
Lee smiled, as he calmly said, “Relax. It is over. We are safe now. For the time being.”
Suddenly, several dozen Edgars security guards, in their uniforms, ran out into the courtyard and surround the white car Lee and Matthew were in.
They all had their ppg pistols drawn, and pointed at Lee, as the two men in the car look at the guards.
Lee and Matthew turned to the security force, as Lee casually said to them, “Hi guys. Nice to meet you. I want to let you know that Mister McCormick, here, has been a wonderful legal representative. Whom has offered good, sound advice, in my time of need.” Lee turned to look at Matthew, as he continued, “And I hope retain his legal services in the future.”
Matthew turned back, to look at Lee, as he flatly stated, “Dream on! I am getting out of here before they come back. I hear that Centauri Prime is nice this time of year.”
Lee then noticed he was starting to come off his several hours long adrenal high. He felt that he was fading fast into unconsciousness.
Lee commented, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Anyway, it was good to meet you, Matthew...” He turned to the security forces, as he continued, in the same disappointed tone of voice, “And you all, as well. But, unfortunately the cancer is really kicking my ass right now, so I am going to take a nap.”
Lee then passed out.
Matthew looked at the guards, as he demanded, “Somebody help me out of this deathtrap, and away from this lunatic. I am going to the boss right now, or I am going to scream again.”
A few seconds later, one of the guards checked to see that Lee was actually asleep. The guard that did so gave the others the all clear signal. And they put away their pistols. Next, they began to help both Matthew, and an unconscious Lee, out of the totaled white car.
(_)
A few minutes later, on a nearby hilltop, outside the gate, that Lee and Matthew had just come in, and that had closed behind them. And away from the Edgars Industries Complex. Four women of the past, dressed in casual clothing, had just finished watching the last part of the chase that had play out, with their binoculars.
The Hell Sabers of the past then lowered their binoculars, as they looked at each other.
Past Revy was dressed in a red leather outfit, with black boots. Past Shenhua has her usual clothing of white coat and red qipao. Past Sawyer was in a purple a black goth dress outfit. And Part Roberta was wearing blue jeans, and a white t-shirt.
By them were three motoslaves in motorcycle vehicle mode, and Past Arcee in her motorcycle alt mode.
Past Revy turned to Past Roberta, as she commented, “Your future self looked pissed. And you look, or will look nicer, and more human again, when your upgrade your cybernetics.”
Past Roberta said, “Thank you. I wonder why I am so angry?”
Past Sawyer spoke up, with her electrolarynx choker around her neck, “You are only that angry when you are seeking revenge. Therefore, it is best not to find out. You risk creating a paradox, while denying your future self her rightful vengeance.”
Past Shenhua agreed, “Sawyer is right. Have patience. You will clearly learn all the whys and hows in the fullness of time.”
Past Arcee, in motorcycle alt mod, said, “Listen to them, Roberta. Besides, we have a job to do. Three down. One to go.”
Past Roberta replied, “Alright.”
Past Sawyer then realized the numbers did not add up. She inquired, “Three?”
Past Revy explained, “Arcee had to find and get Marcus Cole from cryo. That is why we are late getting mister money bags here. And with a fortress like that, we are going to have to plan on how to get him.”
Past Sawyer then remembered their report. She shrugged, as she replied, “Sorry. Slipped my mind.”
Past Shenhua said, “Don't worry. It happens.” She then noticed that Past Revy had spaced out a little bit. She teased her redheaded friend, “I bet, I know what you are thinking about?”
Past Revy looked over at black haired friend, as she admitted, “Yea. I am thinking about Rock. We gave Rock and the others that vat a week ago. I am happy that Chang is giving us this mission to take my mind off of my problems. I wonder what Rock is going to look like when she comes out as a woman? Will she look like she did in the Boys and Girls omake? Like Dutch and Benny. Will her breasts be as large as her counterpart?”
Past Sawyer commented, “I won't worry so much about that. It is any personality changes that occur for her, that you should be concern with. Which from what I understand, are minor?”
Past Revy responded, “Yep. The only changes are making her comfortable in her new gender, and becoming bi-sexual. Both are pluses in my book. It lets us continue our relationship after we capture her, and do so more minor loyalty brainwashing. And girls, I will be honest with you, I was bi long before I met Rock. I have been openly looking at nude magazines of women around Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Janet for years. They would have to be blind not to figure out that I was already bi.”
Past Sawyer giggled. She then said, “Speaking of the Boys and Girl omake. That short animation showed more than just what the guys would look like as girls. It showed what some of us girls would look like as guys. And I finally worked up the nerve to ask. Girls, which do you find to be hotter as a guy. Balalaika? Or, Roberta here?”
Past Roberta when slack jawed, in response to Past Sawyer's comment.
The others laughed as Past Roberta's expression, as Past Roberta quickly composed herself.
Past Revy giggled a little more, as she commented, “Now, that is a dangerous question.”
Past Shenhua said, “Roberta. Now, don't take this to mean there is anything between us. But, I don't care for rough features that the male Balalaika had.” She turned to Past Roberta, as she stated, “And so I found your male form to be hotter.”
Past Roberta turned to Past Shenhua, as she replied, “Don't worry about it. Personally, I find Balalaika’s male counterpart to have a charm to him.”
Past Sawyer admitted, “I have never been very picky on that sort of issue.”
Past Roberta inquired, “What about Eda? Her male counterpart was not that bad looking.”
Past Revy reminded Roberta, “Her male counterpart looks too much like that Russell, whom organized that whole freakshow circus attack on me, Rock, Janet, and ironically Eda, during the time Janet first came to town. Eda even ironically ended up being the one that killed Russell.”
Past Sawyer agreed, “Yea. Russell was a real jackass. And we never actually got fully paid for that job afterward. And those medical bills were expensive.”
Past Shenhua shrugged, as she commented, “At least, Lotton helped with our medical expenses, and he got us to some doctors, in the first place.”
Past Revy commented, “While I have seen our anime, and read our manga, I didn't know that. So, he saved your lives, and he helped with medical bills. No wonder you kept him around.”
Past Shenhua smiled, as she replied, “Yes.”
Past Sawyer smiled, as she said, “Of course.”
Past Shenhua stated, “He has his uses. Just not as a fighter. So Revy, how about you? Our fearless leader? Which do you find hotter?”
The Past Sawyer and Past Roberta also turned to face Past Revy, as they waited for her answer.
Past Revy leered towards her friends, as she joked, “Get me drunk enough, and I might answer that question.”
Past Sawyer, Past Shenhua, and Past Roberta just laughed at Past Revy's joke.
Past Arcee listened to all this, as she thought, 'I don't know whether to be happy that I don't have to deal such intimate relationship. Or, envious that I cannot... Then again, maybe I can, with my shutdown extra parts in my lower abdomen. I will look into that, when things finally settle down. I have no reason to be in a rush.'
Past Sawyer then noticed that Future Roberta has been crawling towards them.
Future Roberta soon reached the base of the hill. She then stood up, dusted the dirt off her clothing, and she started walking the rest of the way to the Hell Sabers.
Past Sawyer continued to look at Future Roberta, as she stated, “Heads up girls. Past Roberta from the future it coming towards us.”
The women present, turned their attention to Future Roberta, as well.
A few seconds later, Future Roberta reached them.
For a few seconds, there was silence, as Future Roberta looked extremely angry, and the Hell Sabers remained silent, so as to not risk her fury. She then suddenly deflated, as she greeted them, in a casual tone of voice, in english, “Hi girls.”
Past Revy said, “Hi Roberta. Nice to see you looking as healthy as ever in the future.”
Future Roberta replied, “Thank you.”
Past Roberta walked up to her future counterpart.
Next, the Roberta of the future and Roberta from the past looked at each other for a few seconds.
They both then said, in unison, “This is weird.”
Future Roberta added, “This is my second time doing this. And it is even weirder for me.”
Past Roberta commented, “I see that we upgraded our cybernetics to look more human.”
Future Roberta took her left, white glove off. And she used her human looking artificial looking left hand, to rub the skin around her human looking artificial right eye, or her face.
Future Roberta stated, “These are pure aesthetic changes. A combination of BGC and Star Wars medical technology. We can still do all the all the same things we did with the old cybernetics. Actually, these are better, now that I have a sense of touch with our artificial parts. It is nice being able to feel all the my fingers and toes, now. Both original and artificial. And there is no pain involved in normal sensations, except when I injury myself. Still, the reason for the change is that after I returned to the master, I found my robotic looking parts did not fit the motif of the Lovelace house.”
Future Roberta then put her left, white glove back on her left hand. And she dropped her hands to her sides.
Past Roberta shrugged, as she agreed, “No argument there.”
Arcee said, “I have a question for you, Future Roberta.”
Future Roberta turned to Arcee, as she said, “Go ahead.”
Past Arcee questioned, “Considering we, including our Roberta, just watched those turrets kick your ass, why didn't you remember those turrets were there?”
Future Roberta sheepishly admitted, “Because I got caught in the heat of the moment, and I forgot.”
Past Arcee replied, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “It happens.”
Past Sawyer commented, in a comforting tone of voice, “Sorry you didn't catch you prey.”
Future Roberta turned and look at the fortress, in the distance. She coldly said, “There will be other opportunities.” She then turned back to her friends of the past.
Past Roberta commented, “Though, I did not hear what you screamed, after you escaped the truck. I have never seen myself as furious as you were a few moments ago... Except when the young master is harmed in some way. Or, when the old master was murdered.”
Future Roberta turned to her past counterpart, as she cryptically answered, “My target has harmed the young master in a way we could not have foreseen, nor prevent. But, do not let it trouble you. The young master is still happy and healthy.”
Past Roberta inquired, “So, you do not want to give me the name of those loathsome scum that has harmed our household?”
Future Robert coyly responded, “As much as I would prefer to answer you. I cannot.”
Past Arcee spoke up, in a concerned tone of voice, “Roberta... Our Roberta... Listen to your older, wiser self. She clearly has the situation handled. We do not want to create a paradox.”
Past Roberta looked around and saw her future self, along with Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer nodding in agreement with Arcee.
Past Roberta muttered, “All things in the fullness of time.”
Past Revy asked, “So, what brings you here, Roberta?”
Future Roberta had an embarrassing expression on her face, as she sheepishly admitted, “I left my reality device at my hotel room, and I need a lift.”
In response, all five of the Hell Sabers giggled, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Past Roberta then said, “I will take you to your hotel.”
Future Roberta commented, “I remember that too. But, none the less, thank you. Still, you are going to have to just drop me off. You cannot stay.”
Past Roberta casually responded, “No problem. If I cannot trust myself, who can I trust?”
Both Robertas giggled at little.
Past Roberta then turned, and walked over to her motoslave, in motorcycle mode. She got onto her motoslave. She put on her helmet, which was laying on the seat of her motorcycle. She let her long purple hair running down the back of her helmet. When she was ready, she started the engine.
Just as Future Roberta was able to walk over to Past Roberta's motorcycle, Past Revy requested, “Wait Roberta.”
Future Roberta stopped, and turned to Past Revy.
Past Revy walked over to Past Arcee. She picked up her helmet, off the seat. She turned to Future Roberta, as she stated, “Here. You will need this.” She then tossed Future Roberta, her helmet.
Future Roberta caught the helmet. As she looked over at Past Revy, she responded, in a kind tone of voice, “Thank you. And I remember my past self, here, returning it to you, after I dropped myself off.”
Past Revy replied, “No problem.”
Future Robert than turned, and walked to the motoslave that Past Roberta was on.
As Future Roberta sat behind Past Roberta, she turned to Sawyer. Future Roberta answered, “To answer your question, Sawyer. Which I overheard, as I came here. In such a situation, I found Revy as a guy, in real life, to be the most attractive of us girls.”
Past Revy heard future Future Roberta's comment. Revy inquired, with surprise in her tone of voice, “I get turned into a guy in the future?”
Future Roberta smirked towards Revy, as she coyly stated, “Only for a little while. And only because you wanted too. In the future, you made no secret to your close friends, that when is comes to the ass, you prefer to be the pitcher, than the receiver.” She then put on Past Revy's helmet, with her long purple hair running down her back.
Past Arcee, Past Roberta, Past Shenhua, and Past Sawyer giggled, as Past Revy was left speechless.
Future Roberta then turned the front of the motorcycle, as she let a genuinely non-crazy laugh, while Past Roberta drove her away, and down the highway, on her motoslave.
While riding behind her counter, down the hill, she placed her arms around the front of Past Roberta waist, while keeping Past Roberta's long hair between their bodies, to keep it from waving in Future Roberta's face.
As Future Roberta's arms brushed up against the bottom of Past Roberta's large breasts, Past Roberta said, in a joking manner, into the encrypted intercom system that links all the Hell Sabers' helmets, in spanish, “Careful. Those are still real.”
Future Roberta replied, in a humor tone of voice, into her helmet's microphone, in spanish, “I know. And they still are, when I have them. Also, from this point of view, I am starting to appreciate how big they are. And I even remember myself tell you this, when I was in your position.”
As they made it down the hill, and road through the open field, towards the highways, Past Roberta smiled under her helmet, as she commented, “Oh, this is going to be a fun ride for the two of us.”
Future Roberta agreed, “Yes. I remember that it was.”
Past Roberta inquired, “Good. So, where are we heading to?”
Future Roberta answered, “We are heading for the Black Sheep Inn. It is about twenty minutes away. And I will give you directions. Though, we might want to try to avoid the police, considering I just killed a whole lot of them.”
Past Roberta commented, “I will do my best to avoid the police. And though, I am sure you had a good reason in doing so, our long purple hair, and your maids uniform, are going to stand out. So, I have to ask, are we going to get stopped by the police.”
Future Roberta said “No. I don't remember that happening. We will just stick to the back roads and alleys, and we should be fine.”
Past Roberta agreed, “Good idea.”
Future Roberta then directed her past self towards the hotel, the Black Sheep Hotel. Where she was staying at, with the rest of her friends, from her point in time.
(_)
From the hilltop, in the open field, the other Hell Sabers watched, as the Robertas left in the distance, and down the field, until the reached the highway, and soon disappeared.
Past Sawyer commented, “With Future Roberta here, it is likely our counterpart, and our friends counterparts are here, as well. And after whomever this Roberta is after. And with her prey in that fortress, where our target is... This could cause problems. We could easily create a paradox.”
Past Arcee stated, “The chances of that being the case are very high.”
Past Shenhua agreed, “Sawyer and Arcee both have a point, Revy.”
Past Revy stated, “Don't worry. I have a few ideas. I will tell state them when our Roberta gets back. Though, the situation just means we will not be going after our target, personally.”
Past Sawyer inquired, “How much damage are we talking about?”
Past Arcee said, “That is a good question.”
Past Revy answered, “Just the main building of that fortress. Or, which ever building the target is in. At least we are sure that the target has not left that area, yet.”
Past Arcee commented, “My sensors would have detected the target, if he left the area. Instead, he is high up, on the main tower of the building.”
Past Revy calmly stated, “Good. Anyway, I don't want to wreck these domes and hurt the people here... Except for those whom foolishly get in our way. And I have a feeling that my future self would not lose much sleep over myself accidentally killing whomever that Roberta is after. As long as she and I knew we were responsible for said death.”
Past Shenhua complimented, “That is a very mature attitude to take, Revy.”
Past Revy smiled, as she replied, “Thank you. And this way we can still capture our target, alive, and breathing. A win-win for us.”
Past Sawyer cracked a smile, as she commented, “I agree. This sounds like a lot of fun.”
Past Revy said, “Girls, I am sure you agree.” Her lips curled into a wicked grin, as she continued, “Caught when we are through. We will have rocked the foundations off that fortress our target is hiding in.
The Hell Sabers then patiently waiting for their friend's return. Fifty minutes later, their friend, Past Roberta, to return. After Past Roberta had returned, they teleport away, to their hideout, in the dome, where Past Revy would give them her plan. A plan the others found that they liked.
(_)
Around forty-five minutes before Lee made it into Edgars Industries Complex, inside the Black Sheep Inn, another group women were having a friendly meeting, over some drinks.
Black Sheep Inn was located in a downtown area of Mars Dome One. The establishment was hotel and bar restaurant, with a medieval motif.
The hotel was huge, in depth and width, with the building being twenty-six stories high.
This was the meeting spot the Rock and Revy decided on for their friends. And the place for all of them were staying at, while they were on the Mars of the Babylon Five reality.
And it was one of the few nicer hotels in Mars Dome One that took gold as payment, without need of IDs. And the hotel staff knew better than to ask questions about their clients.
When the women and men of Rock and Revy's group returned to the inn. By teleporting their vehicles, from the factory complex, on the northern edge of town, to a nearby, empty, multilevel garage, whom security system they had hacked, and the camera system they had loops. Once their vehicles were properly parked, they went to the hotel, and then their hotel suites. Where they got cleaned up, showered, dressed, along with a few other things. Such, as Revy replacing the barrel on her damaged pistol, and fixing it to where it worked like new.
Since they did not want to stand out, they wore casual clothing, such as shirts and pants, and tennis shoes. Except for a few of the women in the group that wore skirts, and slippers. Even Balalaika, B, and Shenhua dressed casually.
After they were finished getting cleaned up, the eight teenage adult women had gone to their rooms to get some sleep. Or, at least that is what they told their parents. Though, there parents knew their children would not do anything to foolish.
The Bebop and Serenity crews headed elsewhere, together, after they told Rock and Revy they would be trying figure how to capture Lee on their own. But, they would keep Rock and Revy in the loop.
Rock and Revy commented that was fine.
The rest of Rock and Revy's group met at a large rectangular table, in the hotel bar.
Since they wanted to relax, and talk to each other, half of them didn't even have their radios on them. And the other half, has their radios turned off.
And while no one knew where the Knight Sabers were, Rock was sure she could peacefully contact the Knight Sabers, with their radios, concerning when they had found Lee. To include the Knight Sabers in their hunt, so they would not have any more problems, again, with the eight armor suited women.
Though, Rock wanted to wait until she had some leads on where Lee currently was at, before contacting them. Along, with Rock trying figuring out a peaceful ofter to the Knight Sabers, to prevent the mercenaries from betraying them, when they did all capture, Lee.
Given the lateness of the hour, besides Rock and Revy's group, the restaurant was empty. And the bartender was about to close the restaurant, but the women were able to convince him to stay open.
And so, only the Lagoon women, and their friends were having some drinks, as they talked with each other, in english, at a single, long, rectangular table, in the main room of the restaurant.
At the long rectangular table, as they talked, most of them were drinking bottles of beer, with a few exceptions. Such as Revy having some rum in a glass. Though, for the other women, such as Balalaika and B, they were having bottles of beer, with low alcohol content, though high quality in taste.
Also, as soon as the bartender brought them their orders, he immediately left the room. He instincts told him that should have nothing to do with the obviously strange, crazy, deranged looking women.
Though, the bartender did occasionally come back into the room, to act as their server, to refill their drinks, in the hopes of getting a decent tip, in gold, and their bar tab paid for, to warrant extending the hours to his establishment.
At one end of the table, Rock sat at the end of the table. Revy sat to left side. To her right side, Dutch sat, then Janet, then Benny.
Akira sat by Revy, followed by Natsuru, then Ranma.
To Benny's right was Eda and then Aeryn.
Across from Aeryn was Violin.
Balalaika sat at the other end of the table. B was to her left side. Beside B was Lotton. To Balalaika's right side was Sawyer. Beside Sawyer was Shenhua.
Beside Lotton was Violin. And beside Shenhua as Aeryn.
Currently, the women were trying to decide what to do next.
Rock sipped her bottle of high quality beer, as she mentally reflected, 'At least the Knight Sabers' leader, Sylia Stingray, was open to negotiation. Meaning, I could probably work out a deal with her group. And I am more than happy to have them help capture, Lee... Now, we just need to find him.'
As Rock set her bottle down in front of her, at the table, her attention was brought back to the conversation, when she heard Balalaika complain, “I cannot believe that fool would insult me like that. How could you live with him for so long without realizing that he is the writer?”
Lotton turned to Balalaika, as she answered for her group, “Lee is very good at hiding in plain sight. For Lee, it is all about reactions. He knew we were looking for him. He baited us. But, he also realized we would be looking for someone stressed out and terrified. I mean think about it. He knows who we are and what we are capable of. A sane man should have been completely scared out of his mind...”
“And were we wrong about the state of his sanity. The guy is as crazy as Roberta on a bad day. He is just polite about it. We should have realize that when Lee was insane, when he willing to played chicken with the car he was driving in, with us in it, while he had the headlights off, driving at high speed, down a dark road, at night.”
Balalaika turned to Rock, on the other side of the table. Rock noticed this, as she commented, “In our defense. We were drunk at the time, and he was our designated driver.”
Balalaika raised an eyebrow, as she calmly said, “You will have to tell us about that story some time.”
Lotton stated, “We will. And, by the way, he won that game of chicken. Still, instead of doing what we expected the writer to do in our presence, Lee did the opposite. He played dumb, while being easy going, and polite. But, he did not let us walk all over him. The poker player angle should have been a major tip off. He liked to have poker scenes in his stories. But, by learning poker, he taught himself how to literally display grace under fire, even in the most insane of situations.”
Revy stated, from across the table, “If River had not lied to us at the beginning, by giving us a false alibi for Lee, then we would have likely figured out it was him, very quickly. Still, why did River do that, in the first place?”
B stated, “Why does River do anything? Sometimes, she can be crazier than you, Revy. I know her. Trying to understand her, or him, is not possible.”
Revy looked over at B. She shrugged, as she conceded, “Perhaps.”
Lotton agreed, “No argument there. River was the one that forced Chang into dating her. And she knew what Chang had done beforehand, and those were clearly the reasons she was interested in him. Those are not the actions of a rational mind. Still, back to Lee. Lee also knew us well enough to know which buttons to push to get us to dance to his tone. He can even do this with a single word, or a simile.”
Janet pointed out, “The man used a simple smile to throw us off his trail when we cornered him, by Eda and Yolanda's food truck.”
Balalaika asked, “And how did he do that?”
Eda stated, “That will take some explaining by me. Yolanda and I set up a burger van to try to trap the writer. We did not know Lee was the writer. And well, the weeks dragged on, and Lee was always so polite...”
Dutch spoke up, “She slept with him.”
Balalaika shook her head, as she deadpanned, “Why am I not surprised?”
Eda defended, “It was only a one night stand.”
Janet spoke up, “Still, weeks later, when Benny, Janet, and I, came to town, Lee used that one night stand to throw us off. At the time, we figured that anyone that knew Eda's history would not be crazy enough to sleep with her.” Her voice turned flat, as she continued, “We were wrong.”
Lotton stated, “That was not the only time he pulled something like that on us. I asked Lee about who his favorite author was. He answered with the author, H.P. Lovecraft. And yes, I asked him some questions, he is a fan of that man's works.”
Balalaika noticed that Dutch, Benny, Janet, Rock, Violin, Akira, and Natsuru, all paled a little, at Lotton's comment.
Benny slowly said, “Lee is a fan of H. P. Lovecraft. The man that created cosmic horror fiction. The type of monsters that if a person even sees the very sight drives the witness insane. And he played with our lives. I hope none of his inspirations for what he did to us came from Lovecraft, or we could have ended up a whole lot worse than we are.”
Lotton quickly reassured them, “I triple checked Lee's stories. There is only one mention of such a monster in his stories. The mention is in passing. And that monster is, Unicron. And there is only one of him in the entire multiverse. And he sticks to the Transformers realities. So, we are fine there. Also, after I captured Lee, at the factory, he confirmed that he did not use Lovecraft's material in his stories. So, relax.”
Balalaika noticed the members of their group that had panicked were starting to calm down.
Balalaika thought, 'I wonder what else they talked about.' She asked, “So, you talked to Lee, while you lead him to the rest of us?”
Lotton looked over at Balalaika, as she casually answered, “Yes. We talked about a few things.” Lotton then shrugged, as she continued, “And we agreed on a number of them.”
Balalaika inquired, “Such as?”
Lotton commented, “Well, for starters. Lee stated that his alias was Ello Gray, with Gray using an, a. The alias is an anagram of the word, allegory. And allegory can mean, symbolism.”
Violin questioned, “Like what Lee did with Scorpius' name at the beginning of book four of his stories?”
Lotton responded, “Exactly. He even referenced that. His own work.”
Janet commented, “That was arrogant of him.”
Lotton said, “Perhaps.”
Benny asked, “Symbolism for what?”
Eda answered, “The name, and the play on the letters of the name, is the symbolism. First, and foremost, Lee is a writer. He would love to create a useable alias, and let that name, itself, be the symbolism for his actions.”
Janet stated, “Now, that is a mind screw.”
Eda shrugged, as she commented, “Yes. He seems to love mind screwing more than actually screwing.”
Janet casually said, “Everyone has their little kinks.” She mentally reflected, 'I am not going to judge him on this, considering he let my little kinks slide.'
The other member of the Lagoon family giggled a little at Janet's comment, and the private joke that went with it.
Dutch then stated, “Quiet true.” She turned to Lotton, as she inquired, “So Lotton, what else did you two talk about?”
Lotton answered, “Well, we also agreed that a pregnant woman should never been given a weapon, while in labor. Especially, a fully automatic weapon, while said woman is enduring labor.”
Aeryn turned to Lotton, as she flatly accused, “You are talking about me? Aren't you?”
There was some light giggling from the other women at the table.
Lotton looked over at Aeryn, as she admitted, “Yes. Though, we both agreed that you pulled off that awkward situation, very well.”
Aeryn conceded, “It is nice that both of your saw reason, concerning that matter.”
Lotton replied, “I assure you. We did.”
Dutch questioned, “What else did you to talk about?”
Lotton looked over at Dutch, as she stated, “Well Dutch, Lee admitted that he does deserve an ass-kicking for what he did to us. But, given how some of us don't know the meaning the word, restraint, he does not intend surrender to us. Because, he would like to still have his ass afterward.”
There was a some mild laughter from a few of the women at the table.
Rock commented, “I guess that is progress. And I will keep that in mind, the next time we chat with him.”
Janet looked over at Revy. She smirked, as she asked, “I wonder which one of us he was talking about?”
Revy looked over at Janet, as she lightly growled at the blond woman.
Janet quickly looked over at the women on the far side of the table, from Revy.
Aeryn commented, “Well, at least he agrees he needs to be punished for his crimes. And it is fortunate that very little Lee has done had been fear inducing. I see from the, Lovecraft, reactions, that Lee also has a talent for causing fear. And I will say that I have read Lovecraft's works, and your fear is well warranted.”
Violin looked over at her spouse. She then looked around the room, as she said, “I will admit. Showing my wife those stories was not one of my more intelligent decisions. What worries me is that she enjoyed those stories.” She then looked back at Aeryn.
Aeryn looked over at Violin, as she stated, “I was just impressed with Lovecraft's works. Given the level of technology humanity had at that time, I was surprised how imaginative his stories were, when it came to aliens, and other beings from beyond Earth. That man was truly someone ahead of his time.”
Lotton commented, “That being said, it is good that Lee also has a sense of humor.”
Aeryn calmly agreed, “True. It is good that Lee also has a talent for humor. Such as the time he sent a one word message to keep us, at the Devil's Hotel. That was hilarious.”
B asked, “What was the word?”
Rock blushed, as she answered, “Tex-Mex.”
Balalaika asked, “Who, or what is, Tex-Mex?”
Shenhua answered, “I am not sure you want to know. But, we will tell you. Tex-Mex is an alias of the person that created the Black Lagoon series. And that is the alias he uses to draw porn. And yes, he drew some of us in that way, as well.”
Akira spoke up, “Good porn. I might add.”
B started laughing.
Balalaika thought, with a mild sense of melancholy, 'My life gets more insane with each passing moment.'
Shenhua mentioned, “Tex-Mex even listed our breast sizes, for those of us that were originally women. If it makes you feel better Balalaika, you have the third largest pair of breasts here. Janet is number one. And Roberta is number two on the list.”
Balalaika casually stated, “That is nice to know.”
Eda looked over at Revy, as she said, “Lee mentioned something to me, Revy. He said that I am two cup sizes bigger than you. Is that true?”
Revy turned to Eda, as she growled, “Yea. Though, I don't feel like testing that theory. But, it also means, for him telling you about such things, that I am going to make Lee scream louder in pain, than I had already planned.”
Eda teased, “Come on, Revy. You are not that bad looking. I just happen to have it more in the chest department.”
Revy warned, “Don't push it, Eda.”
Eda thought, 'Lee is probably right. A black Irish joke concerning Revy might getting me killed by her. I think I will stay quiet for the moment.'
A thought occurred to Benny, as she commented, “Wait a minute. When we were pregnant, I know we all went up a cup size, except for Janet. I know. We measured ourselves, a few months after we had the kids. When we found our normal bras did not fit. That includes you, Revy. So, you are only one cup size smaller than Eda.”
Benny's comment made Revy feel slightly better. Revy shrugged, as she conceded, “I guess you are right. And that does make me feel a little better.”
Janet heard their comments, as she though, 'I am glad Revy feels better, and that my husband mentioned that. Also, I believe it is best that I do not gloat on this matter... Wait a minute... Is that what Akira meant?' She turned to Akira, as she said, “So Akira. All those years ago. When I first returned to Roanapur. Right before that Roanapur bikini contest. When you said I had the largest rack on the island. This is where you got your information from?”
Akira turned Janet. She gave her a leering smile, as she stated, “Yes. Though, I did not mention the rest because it would be to awkward a conversation.”
Janet, replied, “Perhaps, it is for the best.” She thought, 'Still, why didn't Revy and Rock tell us about this?' She looked over at Dutch and Benny, as she mentally wondered, 'And from the looks on their faces, they are wondering about that same question.'
Janet then joined Dutch and Benny, as they turned towards Revy and Rock, as they confronted their two friends on the matter.
Dutch asked, “Why didn't you tell us?”
Revy casually answered, “We didn't want you to do something stupid, like we caught Rock doing.”
Revy instantly realized she had just spilled the beans on that secret, as her eyes widened and she place a her both her hands over her mouth.
Benny, Dutch, and Janet looked over at Rock, as everyone at the table knew that it did not take a genius to figure out what Rock had done, considering Rock was already blushing. And Rock's face had suddenly turned a deeper shade of red.
While Benny, Dutch, and Janet started laughing, Janet said, between laughs, “And you had the gall to make fun of my tastes, when you caught me doing the same thing on the internet, back at the island.”
Rock sheepishly defended, “They were really good, and tasteful pictures.”
This caused her friends to laugh even harder.
Everyone else had also heard both Revy and Rock's comments, as they joined in on the laughter.
As the laughter went on, Violin teased, “Rock, you dirty, dirty girl.”
A few minutes later, everyone calmed down and the conversation continued.
Dutch realized something that Eda has said. She turned to Eda, as she asked, “You actually talked to, Lee? At the factory?”
Eda looked over at Dutch, as she admitted, “Yes. I did speak to Lee, as well.”
Dutch inquired, “And you didn't capture him?”
Eda shrugged, as she responded, “I did not feel like fighting someone that can dodge bullets, and play us for chumps. And I got some answers from him, on some interesting questions I had.”
Janet asked, “Anything useful.”
Eda answered, “Not for this situation. But, I did let slip that we know about the time loop.”
Shenhua thought, 'So, did I. But, I am not going to say anything about it.'
Sawyer overheard Eda as well, as she mentally reflected, 'At least, I don't have to bring that issue up.'
Ranma stated, “Well, that is just going to make him run even harder.”
Revy commented, “That is kind of obvious.”
Eda said, “Let's be honest. I don't think he can run harder than he already has.”
Janet shrugged, as she conceded, “You may have a point there. So, how did he take the news that we knew what he did during the time loop?”
Eda said, “He didn't panic. And he took the news well.”
Janet replied, “That is nice.”
Eda mentioned, “I think someone told him, beforehand. And I don't think it was at factory. Because, from his reaction towards me, he clearly had time to digest the information.”
Benny commented, “Interesting.”
Revy said, “It really doesn't matter. All that means is he now knows how much deeper in shit he is in with us.”
Eda said, “It is not that deep.”
Revy countered, “Deep enough.”
Balalaika spoke up, as she stated, “While both Rock and Lee's indiscretions are interesting. B and I have more important matters to inform you of.”
Balalaika and B then looked at each other, as B used her right hand, and Balalaika used her left hand, to hold hands together.
Balalaika stated, “B and I have an announcement to make. We are both two and a half months pregnant.”
Both of them let go of their hands, and used their pairs of hands to pulled up the front of their own shirts, to show, everyone, that they both had a small, but noticeable bump on their otherwise flat stomachs.
There was dead silence for three solid seconds, as every looked at the two lovers.
Then, those originally of the Lagoon reality, happily said together, almost in unison, “Congratulations!”
As B and Balalaika tucked their shirts back and sat back down, they said, almost in unison, “Thank you.”
Aeryn turned to Violin, as she said, “You know, we have been talking about having another child.”
Violin turned to Aeryn. She smiled at her wife, as she offered, in a casual manner, “Honey, you had the first child. Anytime you want to get some instant man packets, I would be more than happy to spread my legs, and let you put a baby in me. Though, I do hope I stay pregnant long enough to enjoy it. To feel the baby move around within me. Sebacean pregnancies are so quick.”
Aeryn grinned, as she agreed, “You are correct on that.”
Meanwhile, Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer looked at each other.
Lotton silently mouthed the words, “Yes, or no?”
Shenhua and Sawyer grinned as they both nodded. Lotton returned their grins.
Janet looked at Balalaika and B, as she asked, “So, did you use the same trick we did to get pregnant?”
Balalaika smirked, as she casually responded, “Please... Do you also think I lack imagination? Like Lee mistakenly believes... No. What we did was simpler, much more neater, and organized... Much more... Russian. We used some of those man packets, and we went a few weeks into the future, and impregnated each others future self.”
Janet complimented, “Simple and inventive. Talk about doubling you pleasure, and doubling your fun.”
B leered towards Balalaika, as she commented, “Yes. The best part was that we were both able to enjoy that event from two different points of view, and genders. And as man, Balalaika can be a very gentle lover.”
Balalaika turned to B, as she blushed, in response to her lover's comment.
Natsuru turned to Balalaika and B, as she said, “I think you will find the experience of being pregnant together, to be enjoyable. We did. Except for the births.”
Balalaika let the scar on the right side of her face shine in the ceiling lights above then, as she commented, “I am no stranger to pain. And neither is B.”
B smiled towards her friends.
Natsuru said, “I am sure you will both be fine...” She then looked over at the other side of the table, towards the Lagoon family, as she commented, “Still, as fun as that is to learn, such joyous news, I have a question about one of Lee's accomplices. Whatever happened to Police Chief Del Soto? I mean, I heard you mention to Lee that you did not kill him. So, what happened to him?”
Revy answered, “When we finally confronted Pedro, he was very forthcoming. Pedro told us everything he knew about, Lee. While he also provided us with some useful material, concerning Lee. So, we let him go. By now, he is likely back at his job in Plata Podrido.”
Akira said, “I am glad you were feeling merciful.”
Revy stated, “Well to be honest, the way Chang talked about Pedro made it sound like the guy was barely keeping the city in one piece, with his police force. And the fact Pedro did not go to pieces when he was inches from Roberta, in slasher smile mode, earned him points in my respect book. Speaking of which...”
Revy turned towards Balalaika, as she said, “Sis, you should stop by and visit Plata Podrido sometime. Chang is doing a good job of making it into another Roanapur. I think I might start vacationing there after we are finally done with, Lee. And I am sure I am not alone in my plans.”
Rock shrugged, as she commented, “Well, I don't have anything better to do.”
Dutch stated, “Neither do I.”
Eda said, “You two are not alone on this.”
Ranma teased, “I don't think that world could handle us, Revy.”
Revy countered, in a happy tone of voice, “Ah, come on now. Wouldn't that be wild? A Roanapur in a reality that has the Black Lagoon as a fictional series.”
Natsuru said, “You know. That is both scary, and interesting, all at once.”
Aeryn asked, “But, what happens when those in that town figure out who we really are?”
Revy smirked, as she commented, “That is when the real fun begins.”
Janet inquired, “Speaking of Chang. Lee confirmed what Chang told us. That Chang figured out Lee was the writer, on his own. And we know River knew. And so did the Police Chief. Do you know of anyone else in that Plata Podrido that might have already figured out who Lee was? And who we were?”
Rock asked, “The Rats Nest bartender might have known. In both case. By the way, did anyone of you catch her name?”
Revy said, “No.”
Most of those at the table shook of their heads, or shrugged their shoulders.
Rock commented, “That is odd. It is like she didn't want anyone to know her name.”
Violin stated, “River likely knows. She spent half her time there, as Sam. But, I doubt she would tell us.”
Revy commented, “Still, that place was almost as fun as the Yellowflag. Even the bartender wasn't even afraid me. And I am sure she realized I was dangerous.”
Ranma suggested, “Revy, I suggest you drop this line on inquiry. There is no more Yellowflag. Still, the Rats Nest is a nice bar. Though, if you did dig into that bartender's past, you risk getting thrown out in one of the few bars that lets you be their customer.”
Revy admitted, “You're right, Ranma. I will drop the subject.”
Rock thought about the Rats Nest bartender, 'Let's see. She doesn't take crap from, Revy. Hell, sometimes she looks like she hates Revy, when Revy is not looking at her. She is armed with a firearm, under her bar counter. A semi-automatic pistol. No one messes with her, even thought she is very sexy, slender woman of average height. There are some vague similarities between the Rats Nest and the Yellowflag. But, it is more of just a general feeling both establishments gave off. A friendly place that could be dangerous, if you let it.'
'And her looks. She is asian, but she speaks english with skill that comes from years of experience. She has black hair. She is twenty-something, and physical fit... Actually, I have never seen her sick... Just like us... And that black and white Ao Dai she wore at the dance... An Ao Dai is a Vietnamese dress... She's Bao!'
Rock then started laughing.
B leaned over towards Lotton, as she asked, “What is Rock laughing about?”
As Lotton looked at Rock, from across the table, she answered, “I think Rock just figured out who the bartender is.”
As Rock's laughing turned into small fits of giggling, Revy asked her, “Alright, spill. Who is the bartender?”
Rock forced down her giggles, while she still smirked. She turned to Revy, as she answered, “No. It is too juicy to spill.”
Dutch asked, “How juicy?”
Rock answered, “Think as juicy as when I figured out years, beforehand, when I saw Bob in his female form, whom had come back to the past, from years in the future, to see her past male self, and myself talk. And you all agreed, after the fact, that it was a good idea for me to keep that secret, because when I told you, everyone got such a huge laugh.”
Revy agreed, “Yea. That was worth waiting for. Keep your secret, Rock. I look forward to finding out, later.”
Rock smirked turned into a warm smile towards Revy, as she said, “Thank you. And let us just say that when everyone here find out, I believe many of us will become regulars there.”
Revy returned Rock's warm grin, as she responded, “Then, it's a date.”
Balalaika asked, “Speaking of which. Where would be a good place to get a drink in that city? When I dropped my kid out of me, I plan to get drunk in celebration of our children's births.”
B commented, “She won't be alone in getting drunk, during that celebration.”
Dutch teased, “Well, have fun. And I am sure you will have plenty of trusted babysitters, on hand, for you kids, when you do have that party.”
Balalaika and B chuckled a little at Dutch's comment.
B commented, “Fair enough.”
Revy stated, “There are two decent bars in that town. There is Rats Nest. Which really is similar to the Yellowflag bar. As I said, I don't know the bartender's name there, though. But, she is definitely tough, since she runs it by herself.”
“Then, there is the bar and restaurant in the Devil Hotel. They have karaoke singing almost every night. And an old man, named Melvin, is the main bartender there. But, that place is a little more upscale, and I found out the hard way that violence is not tolerated there. Not even for us.”
B requested, “Please explain.”
Revy said, “The first night we can to that town, and check into the hotel. We all went to the restaurant to get some dinner and we started for some drinks. Though, no one got hurt. I got so drunk I tried to shoot up the place.”
“Then, I was by the bar counter. And I turned by cutlass Melvin, from across the counter, from him. But, from across the counter, Melvin swiftly took my cutlasses. For doing that, I just over the bar counter, and I tried to attack him. And he handed me my ass, forcing me against the counter, while putting a night to my left eye. And finally, he threatened to have us thrown out of the hotel if what I did happened again. Though, he did return my cutlasses to me the next morning, after I sobered up. I honestly think the man just doesn't want violence in his bar.”
Sawyer smirked, as she commented, “Yes. He literally put Revy in her place.”
B complimented, “That is not bad.”
Balalaika said, with intrigue in her tone of voice, “Interesting. Not many people could take you, Revy. Even when you are drunk. Let alone survive the experience. I would like to know more about this Melvin.”
In response to Balalaika’s request, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, became visibly uncomfortable.
Balalaika noticed them change of body language, from across the table. She turned to the three lovers, as she inquired, “Is there something you three would like to add about Melvin?”
Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira noticed that Balalaika's question was directed towards them.
Akira mentally cursed her current luck, 'I got to come up with a passable lie to save Melvin's manhood... Lee must have felt like this every second, of every day, back at the Devil's Hotel... Wait a minute. Lee likely knew about Melvin, and he still helped him. That was nice of him. I will just take a page from Lee's playbook. The simplest lie works the best. And a little truth at the end will help.'
Akira lied, in a casual manner, “We had a fling with him, one night. As far as he was concerned, we were three beautiful women. Why would he would object? He was nice in bed. And he was nice to us, afterward. So, we are just concern about his wellbeing. And the unwanted, potentially negative attention, which he does not deserve.”
Balalaika questioned, with skepticism in her tone of voice, “And why would you three do that? From what I understand, you three rarely invite others to join in on your nightly fun.”
Both Ranma and Natsuru has been paying attention to what Akira was trying to do, by providing cover for Melvin.
Ranma thought, 'I see where Akira is heading on this. Smart thinking. Now, to help with the lie.' Ranma added to the lie, “The fact the man is not afraid of anything. I find fearlessness like that to be very attractive.”
Akira thought, 'Good. Ranma picked up where I was heading.'
Revy stated, “He is brave. I will give him that.”
Natsuru thought, 'Now, to help these two conclude our lie.' Natsuru finished for her two loves, “And Melvin is really packing a lot, down south. If you know what I mean.”
There were a few giggles around the table.
Balalaika was not one of the women that giggled. She commented, with interest, and a hint of eagerness, in her tone of voice, “Oh, that just means I will have to meet with this, Melvin.”
Akira depressingly thought, 'Damn. I will try to warn Melvin, the next time I see him. We will figure something out for him, then. Of course, if Balalaika gets to him first, it will not be the end of the world for him. The three of us have been there... And being a woman is not that bad.'
Balalaika commented, “By the way, some of my... subordinates already visited Plata Podrido. While very brief. They said they enjoyed their stay there. And that, like Revy said, the city reminded them of Roanapur.”
Violin asked, “Why were they there?”
Balalaika casually said, “One of my members went AWOL.”
Revy cracked a grin, as she said, “Someone finally jumped ship from Hotel Moscow?... It was bound to have happened, eventually.”
Akira thought, 'I still might be about to help Melvin in another way.' She commented, “I didn't remember seeing any of your men at the hotel?”
Rock stated, “I do remember meeting some russian woman...” She then realized who russian women were, as she looked over at Balalaika. She inquired, in a stern tone of voice, “You didn't?”
B answered for her lover, “She did.”
Balalaika calmly said, “Old age can push people to do many things they would otherwise not consider. In exchange for a second chance at life.”
Eda stated, “So, you changed your men into women? Chang already did that years ago. Still, I would not have wanted to be at your base when that time of the month rolled around for your subordinates, for the first time, for all of them, at once.”
Balalaika had to decency to look away from Eda.
B responded, in a weak tone of voice, “It was not a pleasant event. Balalaika and I had the foresight to have them be disarmed a few days beforehand, when the first symptoms appeared. But, we all made it through. Still, after the changes were made to them, I finally revealed who I was to them. They took the news quiet well.”
Eda raised an eyebrow, as she looked over at B. She asked, “How well?”
B said, “Some of them laughed, on and off, for a week. The worst part was some of them still joke about my relationship with Balalaika, for a while. Which we allowed. But, nothing else came of it.”
Eda casually suggested, “You should have just told them up front.”
B firmly replied, “That we agree on.”
Rock said, “Well, I am happy to hear that everything worked out for your group.”
Benny inquired, “While I am sure everyone is find with your people, Balalaika. Let me guess, the guy your after refused your offer, and he ran?”
Balalaika said, “It was more like an order.”
Rock sadly commented, “I sometimes wonder if you know the difference.”
Balalaika sighed. She conceded, “You may have a point, Rock.”
Janet said, “I would hate to be that guy.”
Ranma thought, 'The best way to help Melvin is to figure out what her plans for him are? Though, that is kind of obvious. But, it is best to check. Given we have the opportunity, right now to so do.' She asked, “So, what are you planning to do when you catch this wayward member of yours?”
Balalaika smirked, as she stated, “Convince him to change his mind.”
Ranma questioned, “And what if he still says, no?”
Balalaika commented, “I doubt at that point, he will.”
In response, Ranma sighed, as she shook her head a few times.
Revy inquired, “So, was what you did to your men connected to why did you got pregnant, Balalaika? I don't know about B here, but you never struck me as the motherly type.”
Balalaika turned to Revy. She raised an eyebrow, as she retorted, “Look whose talking.”
Everyone else at the table erupted into roars of laughter.
As the laughter died down, Revy conceded, “Okay. You got me there, sis.”
Balalaika explained, “To answer your question. Yes. It is all due to my comrades. I came to realize as the years passed, that I just been going through the motions. This has been going on all the way back to before we even came to Roanapur. And I had unknowingly did a disservice to my subordinates, by dragging them with me.”
“They may have called me to join them, back in Russia. But, after I took back my position of authority, they became my responsibility. And I was the one that chose what would happen to us.”
“So, after the whole situation with Chang, and the fall of Chang's Tower, we continued our operations. We just became more mobile. The years passed, and I watched as my men grew older, while I stayed young.”
Balalaika turned to B, as she continued, “All them, except for B here, continued to follow me down the path I walked, without them really having much of a life for themselves. So, one day, I finally put my foot down and offered, or really, ordered them, to have a second chance at life. To have their youth restored, even as women, using those vats... Even though the Tower fell, I still had access to the technology and resources the Tower once provided.”
“And recreating those vats, chemicals, and technology, was not difficult, considering I had backups, software, chemical formulas, and plenty of wealth.”
Balalaika looked around the room, as she stated, “While, I was under Chang's control. Chang still paid us of Hotel Moscow, very well, in various treasures, for our services. That is why we did not hunt him, or her, at the time, after the Tower fell, and my mind was freed.”
Benny asked, “That is a good point. So, what brainwashing did you use our your men turned women?”
Balalaika answered, “I used the same basic programming that was used on Rock, B, and Chang. Just make they comfortable with their new gender, and allow them to keep their sexual tastes... Open.”
Lotton commented, “It is not that bad being a girl. Actually is it pretty good, barring monthly problems.”
Several of the women at the table, whom use to be men, and some of those that were originally women, shrugged, or nodded, in agreement.
Rock stated, “Balalaika, that was wise for you to only do that to their minds, and nothing else?”
Balalaika replied, “I trust my subordinates.”
Rock responded, “Good enough for me.” She turned to B, as she inquired, “And what about you, B? Why did you let yourself become pregnant? Were you pressured into it, like myself?”
B turned to Rock, as she calmly answered, “No. I did it for two reasons One, I helped Bob and Ed through their pregnancies, and it made me think about what it would be like to be pregnant. I am still surprised that Bob was mentally able to go back to living as a man a month after she gave birth. And he is now completely a she. With her only waiting that long to gender genders, to make sure her body at the time was going to be okay.”
“The other reason as to show the men... err women... Well, Balalaika is correct, subordinates, is a good term for this situation, and so is, comrades... Anyway, I wanted to show them that it was okay to be a mother. That they could still have families, and move on with their lives. As they say, lead by example.”
Shenhua complimented, “That is a good approach to take.”
B turned to Shenhua, as she replied, “Thank you, Shenhua.” She then looked around at her friends, as she responded, “And do not worry about the alcohol and smoking. I got her to quit smoking for good. And when it comes to drinking, except for the occasional beer for both of us. Like right now. We are not going to consume any serious amounts of alcohol, until after we give birth.”
Revy turned to Balalaika, as she teased, “What did B have to promise in bed, for you to do that?”
Balalaika turned to Revy. She gave Revy a mischievous grin, with a sense of wildness in her eyes, as she playfully stated, “Wouldn't you like to know.”
In response, Revy smiled, as she let out a laugh.
Shenhua joked, “Still, maybe the guy you are looking for is, Melvin. When he faced Revy, he used his combat knife with almost as much skill as I can with my knifes.”
Revy mentioned, “He also said that he was a veteran of an Afghanistan war.”
Akira thought, 'Oh crap. This is going off the rails.' She pointed out, “But, he said he was a veteran of the U.S.-Afghanistan war.”
B and Balalaika just looked at each other, as they smiled. They then turned to face the group, as Balalaika stated, with a hint of excitement in her voice, “We will most certainly be paying this man a visit.”
Akira thought, with worry, concern, and a sense of defeat, 'Oh no. They suspect that Melvin is the one they are looking for. And there is nothing we can do about it. And we cannot warn Melvin, because we will not cross Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow. Melvin is on his own.'
Dutch commented, “Well this has been a wonderful tour of our lives, but we still have the matter at hand. Finding Lee, and having our revenge against him.”
Janet stated, “The first step in doing so is trying to understand, Lee. That is how we caught up with him, here on Mars. And we almost had him.”
Sawyer countered, “Easier said than done. From what he said to us, during our group conversation in the factory, he clearly has a very different outlook on life than anyone at this table. River all but stated that.”
Aeryn commented, “Perhaps, Lee was faking his comments then. As a way to play with our heads?”
Revy looked around the table, as she commented, in a much calmer tone of voice, than she usually spoke with, “I doubt it.”
Everyone went quiet, as they turned to listen to Revy. Given she realize spoke in such a calm, well spoken manner.
Revy looked down, at the table, as she continued, in a sober tone of voice, “As someone that has been screwed over in life, one to many times. What Lee said in the factory had a ring of truth in it.”
Natsuru looked around the table, as she stated, “Revy may have a point. Given what Lee said, when he had his psychotic break, with Ranma, Akira, and I. What Lee said in the factory has the same vibe as what he said then, in the Devil's Hotel restaurant.”
Benny quietly said, “So, Lee really is insane. And not in a good way.”
Violin commented, “Yes. The guy is really screwed up in the head.”
Dutch stated, “After we are threw with him. We will find him some shrinks to help him. I am sure we can find a few good ones, to get his head straightened out. While I want revenge. When we are threw with Lee, I don't want him leave in a state of mind, where he will want to figuratively, or literally, haunt us.”
Revy looked up from the table, and towards her friends, as she said, in a more casual tone of voice, “That is a good point, Dutch. And he can join the club, on being crazy. We are still going to catch him, and have his ass for what he did to us.”
Janet stated, “Either way. It is clear. Given he likes to think several steps ahead. And he has the skills to implement those steps. To beat Lee, we have to out think him. We need to figure out how to out think him.”
Balalaika inquired, “I agree that the best way to beat Lee, is to figure out what makes him tick. So, did River read his mind? You did mention that River knew about Lee, and even helped him.”
Revy stated, “More than that. As you know, like Akira here, the crew of Serenity got a strange virus from Bob that allowed them the ability to switch genders with a sneeze. Along with extending their already long lifespans. This obviously included Chang.”
“Anyway, it seems that River was the first one to successfully track down Lee, before Lee baited us there.”
“I guess she used time travel to her advantage on that. Similar to what Eda here did, with Yolanda.”
Eda agreed, “That would be my guess, as well.”
Revy said, “Still, River clearly had her own plans. As a guy, River posed as a man named, Sam. And he befriended Lee. And I guess something went wrong, because as time passed, River grew more fond of Lee. Even to the point of aiding him against us. She flat out refused to help us, when we caught her.”
B commented, “When River does not want to do something, it is best to not try to force her.”
Revy responded, “Oh, I agree. River is almost as dangerous as Roberta. Still, Roberta and River almost fought each other, over Lee, until we all talked them out of it.”
“And here is the kicker. We also don't think Lee knew Sam was River, for a while. At least until sometime after the casino poker game between him, and River, as River. The way Lee acted before and during that game clearly showed, that at the time, Lee did not know that River and Sam were one in the same.”
Balalaika snickered, as she commented, “I guess even the deceiver can be deceived.”
Revy mentioned, “And River used a fake beard, as a man, to pulled off the deception.”
Balalaika snickering became giggling, as B joined her. A few seconds later, as the couple calmed down, Balalaika said, “Now, that is amusing. Still, even guile and subterfuge will only go so far. How does Lee get what he wants, when he wants it?
Violin commented, “That boy knows how to use manners and tact to get what he wants. It is not surprising that River came to like him. It is a matter of a thing called, Southern Hospitality. It is a culture thing. It would take some time to explain in detail.”
Janet looked over at Benny. Benny noticed this, and just shrugged an affirmative to what Violin was saying.
Balalaika replied, “No need. I have heard of the term, before.”
Aeryn questioned, “But, as a telepath, won't River know that Lee was faking his politeness?”
Violin looked over at Aeryn, as she responded, “Honey, who said Lee was faking his good manners? He may have been manipulative, but he was always polite, and even sometimes helpful when he didn't have to be.”
Eda heard Aeryn and Violins' comments, as she thought, with annoyance, 'We are just talking in circles. With some of us not willing to admit the ugly, or in this case, nice truth about Lee.'
Eda looked around the table, at her friends, as she stated, with a strong willed, though even tone of voice, “You all just don't get it. Lee is actually a genuinely nice guy, who made one incredibly stupid mistake. Screwing with our lives. And I am with River on this. Lee did not even realize what he was doing would actually effect anyone, until Scorpius came on TV, in his home reality, asking for the writer. Him.”
Eda sighed. She then continued, “Though... Okay... Even River and I both agree that Lee needs to be punished for his actions. Even Lee agrees with that. But, it does not need to be a severe form of revenge.”
“Counting the time loop, we have known him for over twenty years. And barring keeping his ass in one piece. He never took advantage of us, at a personal level, even when the opportunities presented themselves.”
“And barring a few pranks. Which, from what I understand, you deserved, for tricking him into eating those pot brownies. He did not trick us into doing anything that would harm us.”
“Outside of self-preservation, he did not violate our trust.”
“We need to take all this into account when we do finally catch him, and we punish him.”
Shenhua commented, “You slept with him. Of course, you would be bias towards him.”
Eda looked at Shenhua, as she counter, in annoyed tone of voice, “He wasn't that good. I just came to realize he is a decent human being. And as I just said. Lee clearly realizes his mistakes. And I think we should lay off much of the revenge we have planned for him.”
Rock conceded, “You raise some good point, Eda. We will talk about it.”
Eda turned Rock, as she calmly replied, in a grateful tone of voice, “Thank you.”
Eda saw Rock nodded once towards her. To confirm that she accepted Eda's gratitude.
Janet thought, 'Eda makes several good points. I might as well tell them I spoke to Lee.' She mentioned, “Well, after what Eda has said, just now. I have to admit that I did confront Lee. And Lee did talk me out of killing him at the factory complex. To the point of letting him go.”
Benny turned to her wife, as she asked, “You had him, and you let him go? How could you?”
Janet shifted uncomfortably in her seat, as she realized all eyes, at the table, were on her. She turned to Benny, as she answered, “I made a mistake in that I thought he was the cause of some of my personal problems. When he was clearly not.”
Balalaika inquired, “What do you mean?”
Janet turned to the rest of those at the table, as she asked, “How do I put this without sounding insane?”
Sawyer said, “Just say it straight out girl. At this point, what part of our lives are not insane.”
Benny stated, “Sawyer has a point, honey.”
Janet sighed. She then stated, “Okay. As you know, some of us are from the Black Lagoon anime timeline. And except for some minor difference between a few individuals, the manga timeline ran almost exactly parallel with our timeline. All the way to the Roberta's Blood Trail arc. The only major differences being. Their Revy kills a few more people, that probably didn't deserve it.”
Revy shifted uncomfortably in her chair.
Janet continued, “The final confrontation with Yukio and Ginji was different.”
Revy commented, “Yea. Our version of our fight was a lot more awesome. And that is from both living it, and seeing the anime version of it. When compared to reading the manga. Though, their version was likely most esthetically pleasing in that those two came dressed for their own funeral.”
Rock coughed.
Revy looked at Rock and saw that Rock was frowning at her. Revy quickly said, “Anyway, I get a kick out of the fact I helped teach Sarah how to slice bullets with her katana again. Though, Annie was a big help on that.”
Benny and Janet both turned to Revy, as they frowned at her. Both, neither said a word on the subject.
Revy just groaned, as she thought, “There is just no pleasing some people.'
B inquired, “Speaking of which. Is Sarah, or Molly ever planning on trying to have their revenge on us?”
Revy turned to B and Balalaika. She shrugged, as she replied, “Nah. They are both happy with their new lives.”
Balalaika looked over at Revy, as she casually said, “Good. I would hate to have to kill them again, and make you an enemy.”
Revy did not show a hint of anger, as she calmly said, “Yes. That would be a bad thing.” She mentally added, 'For you.'
Revy calm reaction startled both Balalaika and B.
Balalaika thought, 'I have never seen Revy act so calm, in the face of such an open threat. That scares me.'
And the rest of the group noticed Revy's reaction, as they went silent.
Violin thought, 'I have to do something. Or, one of us could ruin the wonderful mood we have going.' She said, “Moving on. You were saying, Janet. About the differences between the two timelines? Parallel universes? Unrealized realities?”
Janet looked back at the others at the table, as she went onto say, “Anyway, the other major difference is that their Roberta, unlike our Roberta, did not go the Monty Python Black Knight route.”
There was some mild chuckling from others at the table.
Sawyer commented, “Didn't Lee state in his author's notes that he picked the anime timeline because it gave him an excuse to turn Roberta, our Roberta, into a cyborg?”
Shenhua grinned, as she stated, “Yes. And I bet he is regretting that right now.”
Benny smiled wickedly as well, as she agreed, “Yea. He ego got the better of him, on that one.”
Eda shrugged, as she commented, “Actually. As in most cases. It is more like his imagination got the better of him. But, that goes without saying. And that is why I came on this hunt. But, I want us to capture Lee, before the maids get him.” She turned to Rock, as she inquired, “Though, would you have turned Lee over to the maids, if we had caught him?”
Rock looked over to Eda, as she answered, in a calm tone of voice, “Not until concessions were made on the matter of revenge.” She looked over at Janet, as she questioned, “Now, Janet, you were saying?”
Janet stated, “Yea... Well, given the similarities, it is logical that something mentioned in one timeline is true for the other timeline. Unless otherwise stated. What none of us realized, but Lee did, like the many Black Lagoon fans of his reality, is that the Black Lagoon manga series never ended. It is still being continued. And Lee told me that he used some of the information from a future storyline in his stories. Such, as my...” She shift uncomfortably, as she continued, “Nymphomania.”
There were a few giggles from the others that did not know that part of Janet's life.
Revy smiled wickedly, as she inquired, “And your gangbang rape fantasy?”
Janet looked downward, as she commented, “That too. Lee even mentioned that, almost word for word on how I describe it. It should be noted that Lee said that though I had some issues in the bedroom, he does not judge me, nor any of us for our little hang ups. It is actions outside the bedroom that he judges people for. He actually considers me quite sane, which is one of the reasons I let him go.”
Shenhua heard all this, and she felt like stirring the pot. She turned to Revy, as she questioned, “Revy, didn't you tell me that you, Rock, Dutch, and Benny, played out that fantasy with Janet.”
Janet, Benny, Dutch, Rock, and Revy all simultaneously blushed beat red.
Janet looked over at Shenhua, and back at Revy, as she accused, “You told her.”
Eda looked over at Revy. She smiled like the cat whom ate the canary, as she demurely stated, “Well Revy, we are all waiting for the details.”
The Lagoon family leaned up from their seats, and huddled over the table.
Dutch inquired, “In this situation, which do you think is worse? We tell them? Or, we let their imaginations do the work for us?”
Rock answered, “Given the imaginations of this crowd. It is best to tell them.”
Revy said, “I agree.”
Janet snapped, “I don't think you get a vote in this situation.”
Benny said, to Janet, “Janet, the cat is out of the bag. There is not much we can do about it now, honey.”
Janet looked Revy, with an evil glint her eye, as she commented, “There is one thing. For my next birthday, I have another fantasy in mind. It involves a women's prison, lesbian inmates theme. Where you play the woman lesbian, and I play the lesbian in the role of the man.”
Revy grinned, as she stated, “Hey sister. I have been in that situation. I can give you pointers. Though, during that time, I was the man in those roles. After I was through, the fingers of those women were never enough to satisfy them.”
Janet returned Revy smirk, as she said, “I know. Lee mentioned that too. Thanks for confirming that. It seems a lot more of our private lives have been made public than we thought.”
Revy immediately dropped her smirk, as she muttered, “Damn you, Lee.”
Janet giggled a little at Revy's response.
Rock requested, “Revy, just tell them the basics. That is the best damage control that we can do.”
Revy looked over at Benny, Dutch, and Janet, whom all nodded in agreement.
Revy said, “Alright.”
The Lagoon family sat back down.
Revy turned to those at the rest of the table, as she calmly explained, “Well, a few years ago, for Janet's birthday, we played out that fantasy for her in our S&M dungeon. She was in the role of the woman, and the four of us used instant man packet to turn male, and we acted out having our way with her. With her permission, beforehand.”
Rock mentioned, “Actually, several precautions were taken. Including the use of safe words. And safe signals, with hands and feet.”
Revy and Rock's comments only make the rest of the group more curious.
Violin noticed that from the looked on her wife's face, Aeryn was more interested in Revy's story, than Violin was personally conformable with. She thought, with mild worry and mild emotional discomfort, 'Sometimes, some of my wife's more... Interesting tastes worry me.'
Lotton looked over at the Lagoon parents. She raised an eyebrow, as she softly asked, “You have an S&M dungeon?”
Revy casually said, “Everybody needs an S&M dungeon. It is the perfect workout room for one's personal kinks.”
Rock placed her right palm onto her face, in embarrassment. She thought, 'Sometimes Revy's mouth goes faster than her head. And then her straightforwardness becomes an embarrassment for herself, and her family... Not that I would ever tell that to her face.' Rock then lowed her right hand, as she looked around the table.
Lotton deadpanned, “I bet.” She mentally added, 'I think it is best that I not mention that Shenhua, Sawyer, and I, also have an S&M dungeon, back at our home, on their yacht”
Benny swiftly mentioned, “Though, we are gentle. And it was more roleplay, than sadomasochism. But, I am glad my wife got that fantasy out of her system.”
Dutch deadpanned, “We hope.”
That caused everyone at the table, but the Lagoon family, to burst out giggling, for several seconds.
Janet whispered into Benny's ear, “You make both the best husband and wife that a woman could ask for.”
Benny turned to her wife. She warmly smiled at Janet, as she said, “Thank you, dear.”
As the others calmed down, Revy said, “Speaking of the manga timeline, I have always considered visiting my manga counterpart. If for any other reason than to freak her out.”
Rock firmly stated, “No. We agreed to leave that timeline alone. If for any other reason than to find out how our lives would have played out if Akira had never entered our reality.”
Dutch stated, “Rock is right. I don't think the sanity of our counterparts could handle learning about us. I barely could myself, and I was conditioned to mentally handle the change.”
Benny pointed out, “Besides Revy, if we did that, it would make us just as bad at Lee. As what he did to us. Maybe even worse than Lee.”
Revy shrugged, as she conceded, “You have a point there, Benny.”
B commented, “It seems that Lee understanding of multiversal mechanics is very thorough.”
Lotton stated, “That is not surprising. Considering the mechanics he stated in his stories. At the factory, he claimed he wrote from his own personal events and experiences with the multiverse. And I don't think those claims were baseless. We know he already displayed precognition. Both with his card tricks, and that bullet dodging on the roof. But, he claimed to also be able to mentally time travel, and temporally possess his counterparts in alternate realities.”
Eda stated, “I agree. I am not sure he was lying. Besides covering his ass, Lee never struck me as the type to just make stuff like that up like that. It is just to bold a claim to be believed. Even by us. So, it is likely true.”
Violin said, “Considering, I have had similar experiences. I think Lee might not be joking about that. It is possible, for him, writing those stories, was just a way for him to work out the theoretical concepts of what he was personally dealing with.”
“And not just the emotional baggage of his life in his own reality. There is not much material on the subject. I know. I have looked, in a few different realities. With most of the materiel being just shallow science fiction and fantasy.”
“Unfortunately, it is just to unbelievable for more people to grasp the concept of people visiting other realities in their dreams, and to actually physically mentally time travel. That might be why he wanted to learn physics from me during the time loop.”
B commented, “If it is true. Then, the likely reason he did not mentally time travel, to an earlier point in his life. To get out of his messes. Of not just us. But, his cancer. Was because he said it hurt a lot. To the point it damaged his soul.”
Violin stated, “Yes. That is a good reason not to do so. Along with avoiding a paradox.” She thought, 'Though, I am not sure how that works. Given Lee already claimed to have mentally time traveled into his past, and created a branch reality. And I am to tired to think about it, right now.'
Rock thought, 'If that is true. Then, he suffering similar situations as my experiences with the omake dreams. And so we have more in common than I realized. And that is likely one of the reasons that drew Lee's attention to us in the first place.'
Benny asked, “So, how does the gender bending fit in Lee's stories, fit into how his mind works?”
Lotton theorized, as she stated, “One of two ways. He liked that type of genre. Or, he has some really deep personality issues to work through. Or both. We now know from Lee that his personal life is as much a wreck as some of our lives.”
Revy commented, “That is an understatement. I didn't believe in God. Now, after all what we have been through, I am on the fence. But, Lee believes God is Evil. Or, at the least the God of his reality. I honestly his has a more negative outlook on live, that I use to have.”
Benny stated, “And that is saying something, Revy. When I think about it, considering we were his playthings, I am not sure which of those two options would be worse for us.”
Janet said, “I fully agree, dear.”
Lotton agreed, “You have a point there.”
Akira inquired, “On to more... comfortable matters. Where did he get that hologram projector, and that black car from?”
B answered, “I think I know. I remember a few months ago, when we all found out about Lee's stories. I was talking with the Lowe family. They had recently come back from the Total Recall reality with a few hologram devices like the one Lee used. Bob and Ed even mentioned that they planned to catch the writer as well, but not to harm him. Actually, they said they wanted to save him from us.”
B turned to Balalaika, as she said, “I hope you understand. It is just that I did not want to betray their trust.”
Balalaika turned to B, as she calmly replied, “I understand.”
B warmly smiled towards Balalaika.
Revy stated, “Considering how good of friends you are to the Lowe family, I am not going to fault you for that.”
B turned to look around the table, and she saw several of her friends nodding in agreement.
B stated, “Thank you. And this is not surprising, by the Lowe family, considering three of them were created by Lee, and Ed loved the life Lee gave her.”
Sawyer asked, “So, what exactly were their plans?”
B answered, “They were going the same route at Eda and Yolanda. To find the writer with his stomach. As such, they were going to start a diner. They even had a name picked out. I found the name humorous And from what they said, so did they. They seem to be on a Total Recall binge, right now.
Violin guessed, “The Last Resort Diner?”
B stated, “Yes.”
A few of the women at the table groaned at the their obvious oversight.
Violin commented, “Figures. I went there a few times, for breakfast. Good breakfast, and service. I might add. The prices were decent, too. Anyway, I thought they looked familiar. Though, they had the sense to pretend they didn't know me. And I now understand where they go their aliases from. And they were good aliases. Still, it was the only decent place in town that fixed decent scrambled eggs, grits, and sweet tea.”
Aeryn rolled her eyes, for a few seconds, as she thought, 'I sometimes do not understand my husband's tastes in strange food... At least by my Sebastian standards. And I still don't understand how a grit can be edible. Though, she does put up with some of my odder tastes, as well. So, I let things be.'
Shenhua commented, “I cannot believe they did that under our noses.”
Dutch flatly stated, “Clearly our noses need to be checked.”
A few of the women at the table groaned at Dutch's less lowbrow joke.
Revy said, “After becoming rich, I consider eating at such diners beneath me. And I bet that is what the Lowe family were counting on.”
Janet agreed, “You are probably right. And Lee likely realized that, as well. Now, that I think about it. I believe he spent some time there, on occasion. Though, I did pay not him much attention attention, when we drove by a few times for lunch, and we saw him, through the windows, eating lunch. I though he just liked the food there. Now, I believe he went there, because he believed we would not go there. So, he could have a safe place to think.”
Dutch commented, “Yea. I guess that would make sense.”
Benny asked, “So, what are we going to do about the Lowe family?”
Rock answered, “Nothing. They are our friends. And this is merely is a difference of opinion. They did not give Lee any weapons. Just a couple of toys to play with. They did not want him to harm us, just keep us away from him.”
Violin said, “I can go along with this. Just one point.” She looked over at Akira, “Hey Akira, would you like to visit the Lowe family, so we can find out where they shop for such nice toys?”
Akira turned to Violin, as her lips curled into a smile. She happily answered, “Sure. But, only if I can bring my two lovers with me.”
Violin joyfully responded, in a playful tone of voice, “I will bring Aeryn. We will make a double date out of it.”
Akira happily replied, “Sure. It's a date.”
Ranma, Natsuru and Aeryn just laughed at the two of them, for a few seconds.
As Ranma, Natsuru, and Aeryn calmed down, Revy said, “Getting back on topic. Where would Lee be? We still have to find out where the police took, Lee.”
Violin pointed out, “It is possible, that Lee could escape the police before we find out where he is. Remember, as far as they are concerned, he is just a rescued hostage that they wish to question.”
Eda commented, “Knowing him, he will probably talk his way out of there, and leave through the front doors.”
Lotton said, “There is a minor problem. The police likely have access to telepaths. Though, if Lee is desperate enough, and in a rush, he might decide not to lie to them. Instead, he would request a telepath to do a deep scan of his mind. That means that telepath, and the police will know nearly everything he knows.”
Benny countered, “If that happens, it is likely only the telepath will believe him. Cops are notoriously suspicious of those not part of law enforcement. And let's be honest, gender benders from fictional realities, after a man from another reality, is kind of hard to swallow.”
There was some giggling among those at the table.
Janet said, “Dear, you got that right.”
Dutch joked, “I know of horse pills that are likely easier to swallow.”
The giggling turned into mild chuckling from a few of the women at the table.
Eda commented, “With Lee's luck, if they hear even part of his story, they might try to have him committed. And the telepath, whom scanned his mind, being sent to the funny farm with him.”
The chuckling turned into laughter, from some of the women at the table.
A few seconds later, as the laughter died down, Akira suggested, “Well, if we are going to start looking. Let us take the simplest path. Let's see if there is any news about us on the TV.”
Akira stood up, and she walked over to the TV that was mounted on the upper corner of the wall, near their table.
Akira turned on the TV, from the button panel on the right side of the thin, widescreen TV. And the first thing they saw on TV was a tampon commercial. Akira quickly changed the channel to a local news station, that she knew of, after spending the night there.
Natsuru whisper to Ranma, “Half across the space, time, and the multiverse, and the first thing we see on TV is that. Sometimes I think the multiverse is just jerking us around.”
Ranma softly replied back, “You might be right.”
As Akira turned up the volume on the TV, every turned to listen, and watch.
As the new logo appeared on the bottom left of the screen. The logo being, 'MDNN'. As an off-screen masculine voice said, “The Mars Dome News Network.”
Then, the picture panned to a young, human, woman, with long blond hair, wearing a nice blue dress, with a mix of asian and caucasian features, as the off-screen masculine voice said, “With our anchor, Becky Haring.”
Becky said, “Good evening. Our top story are the two disappearance of Earthforce General Susan Ivanova, of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and Babylon Five Security Chief Zack Allan. INS news report reports...”
As the story unfolded, Violin said out loud, “I wonder what happened to them?”
Nearby, Shenhua and Sawyer shifted uncomfortably in their seats. Meanwhile, Revy did not show any signs of discomfort from the news.
As the news played out in the background, concerning the disappearances, which those at the table were not interested in, Balalaika turned to her friends, as she mentioned, “On another matter. That series Lee, Akira, mentioned. The Gargoyles series? What is that series about?”
Those at the table, looked over at Balalaika.
Akira answered, “It is a kitchen sink fantasy, make in the early to mid nineteen nineties. At least for our reality. Think everything, as in all genres, thrown into one series. Yet. While it was a cartoon. The characters, and plots, were very well thought out. Lee was not joking when he said the Xanatos clan was not to be crossed. And that the Xanatos' in-laws were maybe even more dangerous that the Xanatos themselves. This because many of them are literally physical gods.”
Lotton stated, “Akira is correct. As a woman, when Chang was in charge of her Tower, and her organization, through her male boomer double. She had her boomer double forbid anyone in her organization from going to the Gargoyles reality. I think the people of that reality scared her. And with good reason. They even scare me, as well.”
Balalaika stated, “Then, I will have to check out this series.”
Akira said, “I suggest we all do. It is a sixty-five episode series. Well, seventy-eight. But, at Lee pointed out, no one counts the third season as canon. There is even an alternate timeline, the form of a comics series, that branches at the end of the second season. So, the first two seasons are what you need to watch.”
Balalaika responded, “I understand.”
Meanwhile, a few of those at the table were also halfway paying attention to the TV.
On the TV screen, Becky reported the next item, “In other news. There is high speed chase this evening that lead to a shooting out in an industrial complex, on the northern, outer edge of the main dome.”
Eda turned to the TV, as she commented, “Hold. I think we got something here, on TV. I believe they are reporting about us.”
In response, everyone turned their attention to the TV, showing the news station.
On screen, Becky continued her report, “At this time, not much is known of the event. Except unknown aircraft were spotted during the chase. No suspects have been arrested, but a hostage was rescued, as well as guard that was hiding during the event. With the guard being the one whom originally contacted the police.”
Benny commented, “So, Lee did have the guard call the police.”
Dutch replied, “Yep.”
On screen Becky stated, “The hostage is known as Ello Gray. While the guard was released, the hostage was taken to a nearby police station, for questioning...”
The mention of Lee's alias, Ello Gray, caught everyone's attention, as they paid even closer attention to the news broadcast.
Janet smiled wickedly, as she stated, “We have him.”
Aeryn commented, “And all we need know is a city map, to figure out which police station is closest to the factory complex.”
Revy said, “Exactly.”
Violin commented, “Also, Lee probably got that key card from that guard.”
Aeryn nodded, as she replied, “That makes sense.”
Lotton commented, “I took Lee's key card from him. I looked at it later. And it said 'security' on it, in english. So Violin, you are likely correct about that.”
Violin looked over at Lotton, as she said, “Good work.”
Lotton replied, “You're welcome.”
On TV Becky used her right fingers, to touch her right ear, where her hidden earpiece was, cover by her long hair. She did this for a few seconds, while she stayed silent. She then lower her right hand back to her side, as she turned to look at the camera in front of her.
Becky then stated, in a firm tone of voice, “We are just getting reports in, that the police station in question has just been attacked. Reports state that a purple haired woman, in a maids outfit has attacked the station. We will keep you updated as events unfold.”
The news broadcast then switched to a commercial.
Benny cursed, “Oh crap. Roberta and Fabiola beat us to him.”
Revy said, “Knowing those two, there will not be much left of him, for the rest of us.”
Eda stated, “Don't count Lee out just yet.”
Sawyer suggested, “Do you think we should contact Roberta and Fabiola by radio?”
Shenhua stated, “No. Let's keep our radios off. They are not going to use them in their chase, unless they have to. Us contacting them might distract them. Also, if they catch Lee, we are not going to see them and Lee, again. At least a while for them. And we will likely never see Lee, again.”
“If Lee escape them. I do not want to risk their wrath, in them contacting us, by having the radio on. Or, us trying to contact them, at a very bad moment.”
“Instead, we will continue to leave our the radios turned off, or in our suites, as we have been. The excuse being we did not want to be disturbed. Which is true.”
Lotton complimented, “Intelligent thinking, Shenhua.”
Shenhua turned to Lotton. She smiled at Lotton, as she said, “Thank you.”
Balalaika agreed, “You have a point there.” She mentally added, 'This is why I only confronted Roberta, when I had an army at my side.'
Shenhua turned to Balalaika, as she commented, “I am glad you agree.”
Suddenly, a food commercial was broken in the middle of it, with Mar Dome News program coming back on.
Akira noticed this, as she stated, “The news program is back on.”
Everyone turned to the TV, to watch and listen to the news program.
On TV, Becky stated, “This is Becky Haring, reporting live. There has been a development in the police station attack. A white car is reportedly being driven at high speed down William Edgars memorial highway. The driver has been identified as Ello Gray. The man connected to both the early industrial complex incident and the police station attack. There is a male passenger with him, whom we have yet to identify.”
Janet said, “I don't believe it. The maids are after him, and he is still alive.”
Dutch commented, “Let us just be happy that the Lee is still breathing.”
Eda smirked, as she spoke up, “Told you, not to count Lee out, yet.”
On TV, Becky said, “And we do not know at this time as to why Mister Gray is driving at such high speed.”
Benny commented, “If you knew Roberta, the answer would be academic.”
There was some mild giggling from the some of the women at the table.
Eda commented, “It looks like the magnificent bastard Lee, versus the absolute badass Roberta.
Natsuru said, “I completely agree.”
Akira stated, “I would put it that way, too.”
On TV, Becky went onto say, “We are going to our eye in the sky, Tom Concord, who is on the scene, in our news helicopter.”
Revy stated, “At least, we will see what Lee is doing, right now.”
The TV program switched to a camera in the air, which was looking down, at a diagonal angle, with the car being to the cameraman's lower, forward right side. The camera eye zoned on on the six lane highway, to show a white, four door car, on the left driver's side, in the far right lane.
The white car was clear on the far right lane, as Lee drove pass the other vehicles on the road, in the other two lanes on his side.
On TV, an off-screen, male voice said, “This is Tom Concord, in our news helicopter, reporting live, on the scene.”
Off-screen, Becky asked, “What can you tell us, Tom?”
Tom answered, “Well Becky, we can report that with Mister Gray is an unidentified man.”
Becky inquired, “Do you think Mister Gray is involved with the police attack? Or, he was just using the situation to his advantage to escape, without questioning?”
Rock commented, “Likely both.”
On TV, off screen, Tom said, “That is unknown at this time. But... Hold on, I see another vehicle coming at high speed down the highway. I will turn the camera to get close up shot.”
The camera panned to behind the white car, and showed a red convertible sports car, with its top and side windows down, driving down the highway. As the camera focused, and zoomed in on the drivers seat, everyone in the room could see that it was Roberta, in her maids outfit, as her long hair, in a ponytail, whipped in the wind, behind her head.
On TV, off screen, Becky asked, “Is this the woman that is suspected of the attack of that police station.
On TV, off-screen, Tom stated, “I believe so, Becky. Given this woman, behind the wheel, matches the description of a purple haired woman in a maids outfit. I would say that Mister Gray is involved with the attack. In that he may likely be her intended target, with the police merely being in her way.”
Violin joked, “And who says there is nothing intelligent on the news.”
Several of the women burst out laughing, for a few seconds.
As the women calmed down, Revy got up from her seat, she walked to the TV and muted the volume. She turned and face the group of women, as she stated, “Okay, let's start placing bets here on if Lee can escape the Bloodhound, or not, in this chase? Since I doubt have a set of scales on me, U.S. cash only.”
Revy then pulled out a pen and notepad, from the pockets of her shorts, to write down everyone's bets.
Janet asked, “I know we discussed this outcome, a while back. For the betting pool. What odds were we going using, in this situation?”
Dutch stated, “Hundred to one odds in favor of the maid. Speaking from experience. No one escapes the Bloodhound.”
Rock countered, “Let us make is one sided. Twenty to one against Lee. But, for betting sake, two to one against, Lee. He did escape us tonight, and he then somehow got out of police station, with a car. I wonder if he can go three for three, in one night.”
Benny said, “Well, either way this goes. It is going to be entertaining for us.”
Revy stated, “Benny, you are preaching to the choir.”
Eda said, “Put a thousand dollars on Lee, for me. I am so looking forward to having that maid taken down a notch.”
Janet commented, “The super-human death machine, versus the nobody. It's suckers bet.”
Eda turned to Janet, as she commented, “Janet, you have spend time with Lee. And I would think that after the last few hours we had with him, everyone here would realize that when Lee's ass is on the line, he is full of surprises.”
Janet conceded, “You may have a point, Eda. But, I am still betting on the maid. Five hundred dollars for the maid, also.”
Benny said, “I agree with my wife. Fifteen hundred dollars for the maid.”
Janet looked over at Benny, and Janet smiled at her spouse.
Dutch commented, “Put two thousand on the maid, for me.”
Rock stated, “One hundred dollars for, Lee. I want to see if he can this pull off. So, we can catch him, later.”
As Revy wrote down everyone's bets, she compliment, “That is a good point, honey.”
Rock said, “Thanks, Revy. I am just thinking of the possible silver lining if Lee does escape tonight.”
Benny asked, “Do you think the Knight Sabers might try something?”
Lotton pointed out, “Not in a high speed chase like this, on TV. The Knight Sabers like to work in the shadows. And this event is very public.”
Benny inquired, “Yes. And given the Black Lagoon series exists here, in a few formats. I wonder if any one watching TV will recognize Roberta?”
Lotton said, “Given the series is a few centuries old. Except for a few diehard fans. I doubt it. And just a picture on the screen is not enough to remove reasonable doubt.”
Benny stated, “I guess we can hope for the best on this.”
Violin said, “Anyway. Back to the bets. I am with Rock on this. Five hundred on Lee.”
Aeryn turned to Violin, as she said, “I am going to have to disagree with you, honey.” She looked over at Revy, as she stated, “Three hundred on the maid.”
Violin turned to her wife, as she commented, “That is alright, dear.”
In response, Aeryn smiled towards Violin. The spouses then turned back to watch the muted TV.
Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma looked at each other. They nodded towards each other. After which, they turned to Revy.
Ranma stated, “We feel like being adventurous tonight. Two thousand five hundred dollars, each, on Lee.”
Balalaika said, “Two thousand on Lee. And that fool better not disappoint me.”
B said, “Same bet as Balalaika.”
Lotton commented, “Five hundred on Lee escaping the maid.”
Shenhua said, “Ten dollars for the maid. I will be the cheap one, tonight.”
Sawyer said, “Fifteen dollars for the maid. So will I.”
Revy finished writing down the bets, as she stated, “And three grand from me, on the maid.” She then put away her pen and notepad. She looked at her friends, as she commented, “I will leave the TV muted, so we can talk. Even no objects.”
No one said, anything for the next few seconds.
Revy then said, “Okay.
Revy left the TV mute. After which, she returned to her seat, and sat down in her chair. As she got comfortable, she turned to the TV, with the rest of her friends watching the news program, as well.
On TV, the camera showed that Roberta's car was quickly gaining on Lee's vehicle. They could clearly see the look on Roberta's face, which promised a painful fate for her prey.
Akira asked, “Is it me, or does Roberta clearly look more pissed off, then when she and Fabiola showed up at the Devil's Hotel, right after Lee escape?”
Dutch said, “It is not your imagination, Akira. She clearly is angrier.”
Akira commented, “Still, I do not know why she is so angry.” She mentally added, 'And I was not stupid enough ask her. It is no small wonder why Lee freaked when she and Fabiola came to town. I mean, if the maids were personally after me, I would be running as soon as possible, as well.'
Ranma commented, “I don't know why, either. And yes. She is angry... Very angry.”
Benny stated, “Roberta really has a hard-on to get Lee. More than we do.”
Natsuru agreed, “Akira, Ranma, and Benny have a point here. The question is. Why?”
Lotton inquired, “I wonder why, as well? Lee had me fix Roberta's body, and her mind. Of all of us, she clearly got the most from Lee's writings. I would think she would be thanking him for all he did for her.”
Sawyer commented, “I am not sure myself. Roberta did not tell me the details. When I spoke to her, this morning. But, she and Fabiola hinted it had something to do with Garcia.”
Ranma said, in an embarrassing tone of voice, “Of course... Lee gave Garcia the spring of drowned girl curse, like I have.”
Dutch commented, “I can see that upsetting them. Finding out Lee was the one that changed our gender upset us. But, that does not explain why their dialed their rage to full on, hell on earth mode?”
Revy's eyes went wide, as she exclaimed, “Oh, that it!” She then began laughing.
Rock turned to Revy, as she asked, “What is it, Revy?”
A few seconds later, Revy stopped laughing. Though, she still had a wicked grin on her lips, as she turned to Rock. She answered, “Roberta has always been a little touchy about matters dealing with menstrual periods. It is no surprised she and Fabiola would be pissed off at Lee, over making Garcia go through that every month.”
There were several groans across the table, as everyone realized what Revy was talking about.
Dutch look over at Rock, as she said, “Rock, you might as well cancel you plans on asking Roberta to hand over Lee. Because if this is over that, then she is far too angry to negotiated with, once she has her prize in hand.”
Rock turned to Dutch, as she responded, “I am starting to realize that.”
Ranma then corrected Revy, “Actually, every few months. Being a guy occasionally, and then a girl again, slows that cycle down, and makes its timing irregular.”
There were a few giggles from Ranma's comment.
Lotton recalled what Garcia was cursed in the stories. She commented, “That sad part is I honestly don't think Lee realized what was going to happen to Garcia when he wrote that line in book three.”
Eda stated, “I agree. Because no one, not even Lee, would intentionally hurt a nice boy like Garcia. And he certainly would never intentionally piss off Roberta and Fabiola. He not only knows how dangerous they are, he made them even more dangerous.”
Sawyer commented, “When is came to us, it was like he was always walking a mine field.”
Akira lips curled into a mischievous grin, as she joked, “More like a PMS mine field.”
Natsuru and Lotton giggle at Akira's private joke, with Lotton remembering having read that line in book one of Lee's stories. And Natsuru remembered Akira personally telling her that comment, in person, several years ago.
Shenhua turned to Lotton, as she inquired, “Do I even want to know?”
Whiled Lotton stopped giggling, she turned to Shenhua, as she answered, “Not really. It would take too long to explain the joke.”
Janet turned to Benny. She then looked around the table, as she said, “Like Benny pointed out earlier. Now, Lee has to face the super-badass he upgraded. Talk about poetic justice.”
Sawyer suggested, “Well, let's watch, and see what happens next.”
The group then turned their attention back to the TV, which was still muted.
Roberta, in the red two door sports car, was presently in the far left lane, right behind Lee, in the white four door car, and she was gaining on him.
After a few seconds of watching, they saw something thrown from the sunroof of Lee's vehicle, and the item hit Roberta's windshield.
A second later, Roberta bailed out of the car, into the middle lane, with the car still moving forwards.
A few seconds later, the car exploded.
Those present, at the table, realized what Lee had used to cause the explosion.
Sawyer said, in disbelief, “Lee had another grenade all this time?”
Eda smiled, in astonishment towards Lee, as she commented, “That man always has a card up his sleeve.”
Rock stated, “He likely didn't use it on us because it is not the type of weapon that is useful when surrounded.”
Benny questioned, “Speaking of which. As fun as this chase is. Lee never does something without a plan. He always knows where he is heading. So, where is he planning on going?”
Dutch commented, “Maybe we will find out.”
Violin inquired, “I wonder how she will catch up with him, now?”
Dutch calmly stated, “Even before the upgrades, she was fast... Just watched.”
Suddenly, the camera showed Roberta standing up, as cars moved out of her, and the burning ruins of the red sports car she had been driving, as they drove passed by, in the far left lane.
Those at the table, then watched as Roberta started to run down the street. Within seconds her running speed picked up to where she was keeping pace with the cars driving down the road.
Dutch grinned.
Violin admitted, “Not bad.”
Without warning, Roberta jumped off the road, and she soon landed on the roof of nearby, moving vehicle. She then began hopping from vehicle roof, to vehicle roof. With her sometimes landing on the tops of the trailer containers behind hauled by the semi-tractor-trailer trucks.
Revy muttered, “I wonder if I can do that? I know I can do it with boats.”
Rock overheard Revy. She turned to Revy, as she sternly stated, “Revy, at least in boats, if you, miss you hit the water. You miss with a car, you are hitting road at high speed. We are tough, but not invulnerable. You do not want to break your neck, and shatter your skeleton.”
Revy turned to Rock. She conceded, in an agreeable, serious tone of voice, “Good point.”
Rock replied, in a calm, supportive tone of voice, “I am glad you agree.”
Revy and Rock then turned back to look at the TV.
Lotton commented, “Benny, you know what I said earlier, about reasonable doubt, on Roberta's identity being made public here?”
Benny said, “Yea.”
Lotton responded, in a serious tone of voice, “Forget it. Because only the Bloodhound could do this, and make it believable.”
Benny stated, “Lotton, you are preaching to the choir. And it looks like Roberta is getting close to Lee.”
Roberta then jumped on top of the trailer container roof, right beside Lee's white car.
Seconds later, Roberta dropped onto the roof of Lee's car itself.
Right after she landed on top of the hood of Lee's car, Roberta pulled out her pistols, and she began shooting the car engine.
Benny stated, “It's over.”
Dutch said, “And she
Lotton commented, “I wonder how she hides those pistols, with her drum clips, on her outfit?”
Nearby, Sawyer said, “It has to be some holsters in her skirt. There is no other place she could put those pistols, and clips, on that dress.”
Meanwhile, Eda watched the TV, as she faintly said, under her breath, “Come on, Lee.” She then noticed something about Lee's car, on the screen, as she thought, 'Wait a minute, Lee rolled down his side windows? Why?'
They then watched as Lee drove the car, to his left, until the truck trailer, destroying the car's hood, while forcing Roberta to jump over the moving cargo container.
Just as Roberta was about to land onto the back seats of Lee's car, they watched her be suddenly ejected from the car with such force that she let go of her pistols.
As Roberta flew back in the air, they saw a metal staff fly away from the vehicle as well.
On TV, they also watched as Lee continued driving down the road, in his white car.
Violin said, with mild shock, “I don't believe I just saw that.”
Shenhua and Sawyer's jaws dropped at what they just saw.
Eda just lightly laughed, as she thought, 'Smart move, Lee. And by rolling down your windows, beforehand, you minimized any glass shards from hitting you, and your passenger.'
Balalaika stated, “I believe I may have to revise my opinion of this man. As him being more resourceful than I thought. Which was quite a bit to begin with.”
B nodded in agreement with her lover.
Dutch demanded, “What was that? And what did Lee just do?”
Violin commented, “I believe we will need instant replay in slow-mo to see what really happened there.”
Akira answered, “I believe that is metal staff that flew out of the car was a denn'bok. An alien ranger fighting pike that can collapse to a few inches wide. I don't know where he got it from, but Lee used it as a spring loaded weapon to knock Roberta away from his car.”
Lotton stated, “Now, that was brilliant. And he likely only had less than a few minutes to come up, and implement that plan.”
Janet turned to Revy, as she asked, “Do you think it is over?”
Revy replied, “Not by a long shot. Roberta does not know how to quit.”
Meanwhile, on the TV, the camera immediately panned out to show the green semi-tractor-trailer truck that Lee has been driving beside, stopped, on the road, as it blocked the middle and right lanes. While Roberta had landed on the far left lane, with her sitting up. With traffic stopping on all the lanes.
Janet commented, in jest, “Leave it to Roberta to stop traffic.”
No one laughed at Janet's joke.
Revy joked, “Well, those knockers on her chest. It is not very hard.”
No one laughed at Revy's joke.
As they watched Roberta get up and collect her pistols, they saw that the camera had passed over, as it followed Lee's car. But, the camera was continue to look at Roberta, as it was zooming in, while flying away. Also, it showed the trucker of the green truck involved with the accident, get out, to go check on Roberta.
Rock thought, 'The driver likely stopped due having seen Lee's stunt, and Roberta fall beside his truck. Still, what exactly did Lee just pull to get Roberta out of his car, so quickly?'
Benny commented, “At least, Roberta looks like she is going to be okay.”
Shenhua stated, “Yes. Though, some fool is getting out of his truck to help her. Though, commendable. It is still foolish.”
Benny replied, “True.”
Aeryn said, “He is going to lose that truck.”
Ranma stated, “He will be luck if all he loses is his truck.”
As the helicopter flew further away, the camera continued zooming out, to show Roberta. The screen also showed the trucker approach Roberta from behind, as Roberta holstered her pistols.
When the trucker reached Roberta. Roberta turned around and gave him her slasher smile. The trucker immediately turned around and briskly walked to the far right emergency lane, while Roberta stated walking for the open door to the green semi-tractor-trailer truck.
Then, the camera turned around, as it zoomed in to focus on Lee's while car.
Akira commented, “One look a that smile, and the sane immediately know when to walk away.”
Violin said, “I hear that.”
Dutch stated, “Well, it is academic that Roberta now has a set of new wheels. And big wheels at that.”
Rock thought, 'At least that innocent bystander is going to be okay.'
Natsuru commented, “She is really channeling her inner terminator, right now.”
Benny stated, “That goes without saying. But, I agree with you, Natsuru.”
Janet asked, “Does Roberta know how to drive a truck like that?”
Revy commented, “Yea. I have seen her do so, a few times. She just does not really get the chance to do so.”
Ranma stated, “Let's count ourselves lucky on that.”
Revy mentioned, “Actually. When she is not pissed off. She is a very safe driver.”
Dutch commented, “Interesting. I guess she likely chauffeurs Garcia around, when she needs to.”
Revy stated, “I would not be surprised, if that was the case.”
Everyone then turned back to look at the TV.
By then, the helicopter camera crew had zoomed in and properly focused on Lee's car. And those at the table got a good look at the damage to the car. The car no longer had a roof on it. And the front hood was riddled with bullet holes.
And the women could clearly see who was inside of the vehicle. And where in the car, they were setting. Lee had on his sunglasses, as he sat in the driver's seat, while he drove the car at high speed. And a brown haired, fair skinned man in the front passenger seat, to Lee's right side.
B asked, “I wonder who the man with Lee is?”
Balalaika commented, “So, do I.”
Rock said, “I would like to know, as well. And I feel sorry for whomever it is. Though, Lee's car looks like hell. Roberta shot up the engine, and it is now missing the roof. I would not be surprised if it did not give out, before whatever location Lee is heading to.”
Violin commented, “That is very likely.”
Aeryn looked at the man in the passenger side, as she questioned, “I also wonder who that guy is?”
Natsuru sympathized, “Whoever he is, that poor guy with Lee must be scared out of his mind.”
Akira said, “I would not be surprised if that was the case.”
Janet stated, “That is likely the most unluckiest guy on the planet. He is between Bloodhound and her prey. Given he has been with Lee through out the chase, by now he has to have idea of what he is facing, and he knows he's fucked.”
Benny agreed, “That is very likely, dear. Very likely.”
Ranma then noticed something about Lee, as she asked, “Is Lee still wearing his shades a night?”
Eda responded, “Yep. And given wind resistance at that speed. It is a smart idea. And the street lights still allow for Lee to see find on the road.”
The camera showed the passenger pulling out a cellphone, and calling someone.
Lotton asked, “I wonder who he is calling?”
Violin said, “Likely, he is calling for help from where Lee is planning to go to.”
On the TV screen, they saw as the road soon diverged to where Lee was on a standard two lane road.
Sawyer said, “Roberta better hurry up. I think Lee is closing in on his destination.”
Balalaika agreed, “Yes. We are likely going to find out where they are heading, in a minute.”
A few seconds later, the camera showed both Lee and the passenger, looking behind the car.
The two men then quickly turned back to face the road in front of them.
Janet commented, “They must have seen something really back, coming up from behind them.
Revy's lips curled into a smirk, as she stated, “And we can guess who it is.”
The camera panned to show the same green semi-tractor trailer truck, with trailer, that had been beside, earlier, gaining on them.
The camera closed in on the truck's cab, to show that Roberta's at the wheel, with a slasher smile on her lips.
Revy continued to smirk, as she said, “She's back in the game.”
Benny commented, “Damn. Natsuru, you were right. The maid is going full on Terminator mode on Lee.”
Natsuru said, “Told you.”
Dutch smirked, as she commented, “I just hope she doesn't kill him outright. That would just be to quick.”
The camera then panned back out, to view both vehicles. It showed Lee's passenger handing his cellphone to Lee, with Lee yelling something into the phone before hanging up and giving it back to the passenger.
Rock said, “I think Lee just pulled a card from his sleeve. But, I am not sure what.”
Eda commented, “The question is. What?”
Suddenly, Lee started laughing.
Shenhua asked, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Why is Lee laughing?”
Dutch stated, “Facing imminent death can make a person act strangely.”
Sawyer countered, “No. That is not the laughter of a condemned man. I have seen plenty of them. That is the laughter of someone who just pulled something, on someone else. And I think in Lee's case, it is Roberta.”
Rock replied, “I agree. And we are about to find out what card Lee just pulled out against Roberta.”
Without warning, the driver's side, back tire exploded, causing the car to being spin in a counterclockwise motion down the road.
It was that moment that the passenger started screaming.
Violin said, “I don't know why Lee is laughing, but that passenger is clearly screaming.”
Lotton stated, “Yea. He is freaking out. And he has every right to be doing so.”
Benny commented, “While I didn't scream. When I was in his place, years ago. I did freak out, a bit.”
Dutch turned to Benny, as she said, in a comforting tone of voice, “And that was natural human reaction to such a situation.”
Benny turned to Dutch, as she smiled. She replied, “Thanks, Dutch.”
In response to Benny's comment, Dutch returned Benny's smile. The two women they turned back to watch the TV, with their friends.
Natsuru commented, “I got to admire that Lee's driving skills. It is not easy to maintain a controlled spin on the road, while going forward.”
Akira stated, “I didn't even know that it was possible?”
Rock said, “I have done it a few times. It is not fun to do.”
Dutch commented, “It just takes practice.”
Natsuru continued watched the TV, with everyone else, as she stated, “Oh. It is do able. The AD Police academy taught us how to do it. But, it is very hard to master.” She mentally added, 'Lee is likely using his precognition to help him, with that controlled spin.'
Then, everyone noticed that on the second turn of Lee's car, in the spin, when Lee faced Roberta, he shouted something to her, while he made a middle finger hand gesture with his left hand toward her.
None of them could believe what they were seeing.
Benny asked, in disbelief, “Did Lee just give Roberta the finger?”
Dutch said, in a calm tone of voice, “Yep. He isn't long for this world.”
Suddenly, they saw in the cab, that Roberta had dropped her smile, as she quickly threw open the left driver's side door, and she jumped out of the truck.
Seconds later, they saw shots coming coming over the car, and hitting the front of the truck.
The camera panned out to show Lee car, panning further to show the large gun turrets on the concrete walls, by the gate Lee was heading for.
Within a matter of moments, the turret gunfight destroyed the truck, causing it to explode. The trailer behind the truck tipped forward, as it fell onto its side, blocking both lanes of the road, while it skidded to a halt.
Lee's car was then shown spinning passed the gates of the concrete wall.
The gates on the road immediately closed, just before the news station feed suddenly cut to black.
With the TV news program switching back to the anchor woman, Becky Haring, and the sound still muted, the women at the table then turned to look at each other.
While feeling amazement at what she had just watched, Dutch stated, “Damn that chase was almost as crazy the torpedo against helicopter stunt we pulled. Almost.”
Janet said, “I don't believe Lee just beat Roberta.”
Eda smirked, as she stated, in an excited tone of voice, “Believe it, sister.”
Natsuru commented, “I know we are intelligent. So, I don't mean this to be insulting. But, I believe that Lotton was correct, in what she said last night. That we have drastically underestimated Lee's intelligence, and ability to outwit us.”
Lotton turned to Natsuru. She smiled, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Natsuru turned to Lotton, as she said, “You're welcome.” She then looked around the table, at her friends, as she stated, “And all night this man has been pulling escape artist level stunts with style. Yet. We know he wasn't trained to do all this, in the time loop. We accounted for the badass skills he learned them.” She mentally added, 'We hope.'
Lotton commented, “Actually, I am not so sure. Think about it. He wrote the stories. A lot of those stories dealt with how to quickly escape people. He is simply applying what he learned, to write those scenes, into his own life.”
Violin pointed out, “That man can think several steps ahead. You heard the news. He likely had that guard call the police. He planned his own police rescue, before trying to lose us in the industrial complex. And if we don't get him here, we might lose him for good.”
Rock stated, “You maybe right. He has only two major concerns. Us, and his cancer. He has to deal with the cancer soon. The problem is how does he plans to cure himself.”
Benny said, “We do not have a clue how he plans to do that. But knowing him, the cure will likely also aid him in his escape of us.”
Eda grinned, as she agreed, “Probably. But, you got to admit, that he has gotten so good at this, he can do it with the same level of style that we can.” She looked over at Revy, as she said, “Two-hands, you better have my money ready soon.”
Revy turned to Eda, as she said, “Fine.”
Revy thought, 'Even with the money I get from the losers, it is not enough to cover my loses. I have to pay out of pocket. And I was so sure the Roberta would catch him.'
Revy grumbled, “Damn you, Lee.”
Revy looked around the table, as she went onto say, in a normal tone of voice, “Okay losers, fork over your money.”
As the losers of the bet pulled out their money and handed it to Revy, the redhead pulled out some hundred dollar bills from a money clip in her shorts. Along with her pen, and the notepad she wrote down the bet on.
A few minutes later, Revy had received the money from the losers, and paid the winners what they were owed. And fortunately, she still has some cash left over, from her own pocket. She also put her pen and notepad back into her pockets, as well.
Revy thought, with mild relief, 'At least I don't have to go back to the island for some more funds. And that didn't hurt me to much in my wallet.'
As everyone sat back down, in their chairs around the table, Aeryn asked, “That place Lee entered. We did not see a lot that place. But, with defensive weapons like that, I would think it would be a fortress.”
Akira stated, “You are likely correct, Aeryn. Since the news report stated they were traveling on William Edgars memorial highway, I would guess Lee, and his friend, just entered the main headquarters for Edgars Industries.”
Akira looked around the table, as she continued, “For those that done know, Edgars Industries is an intergalactic corporation with a lot of power, and a lot of political pull. They are also one of the largest drug companies in the human areas of this galaxy. They are likely the ones that had the news broadcast stopped.”
Natsuru asked, with slight concern in her tone of voice, “At this point in time, isn't Garibaldi currently running that company?”
Lotton answered, “Yes. And that is probably why Lee went there. Garibaldi, in his fortress, is one of the few people on this planet with the power and resources to make even us stop and think for a few seconds. We won't be rushing into there until we are ready.”
Aeryn asked, “Who is this Garibaldi fellow?”
Violin answered, “She is talking about Michael Garibaldi. He is a major human badass in this reality. Though, he is retired military, he is not a hardcore fighter. He is more of the detective style badass. Though, he is fairly skilled at flying a starfighter. Or, I should say, starfury? He has been running the Edgars Industries corporation for around two decades. By now, he likely knows the company, and what he can do with it, inside and out.”
Ranma stated, “I have seen the B Five series. If we are going to take that place, to get to Lee, we are going to need to organize, and get some serious hardware.”
Rock said, “I think I can come up with something by tomorrow. But, I think we need to get a few hours sleep, before we make our next move.”
Aeryn replied, “Agreed.”
Balalaika commented, “It has been a long day.”
B turned to Balalaika, as she said, “We will get some sleep in a little while.”
Rock stated, “Okay. We will meet back in a little over four hours.”
Most of the women nodded, or shrugged, in agreement. The others just did not feel like nodding.
Just then, Fabiola rushed into the restaurant. She saw the women at the table. She ran to where she stopped ten feet from the table. She breathed heavily, as sweat covered her forehead, and under her clothing.
Between breaths, she asked the women seated at the table, “Did we get him? You were not answering the radio, nor Roberta. So, did we?”
The women looked over at her. Akira stated, “Nope. Roberta just missed him. She probably will be heading back here, in a little while.”
Fabiola deflated, as she her breathing started to ease. She said, “Okay. If you see her, tell her that I have gone to our room to get cleaned up. And I will be down here to meet her, as soon as possible.”
Akira replied, “Will do.”
Fabiola turned and left the restaurant, for the lobby elevators, so she head to her suite, get a much needed shower, and change her clothes.
After Fabiola left, the women turned back to look at each other, as Rock though, 'Now, is a good as time as any to contact the Knights Sabers.' She politely requested, “Well guys, I need a moment of quiet, as I contact the Knight Sabers. Before they decide to try to get to Lee on their own.”
Aeryn commented, “From what was just stated, that would be a very unwise idea.”
Violin agreed, “Yes. There is no telling what Garibaldi has in his fortress. And with his skills and guile, he might be able to defeat the Knight Sabers, even if they attack him with their full forces.”
Rock stated, “Exactly.” She then used her right hand pulled our, from her clothing, her encrypted, hand held radio. She turned it on, and pressed the talk button. She said, into it, in english, “Knight Sabers. Please, pick up.” She mentally added, 'I might as well state this in english. So, everyone here can understand what is being said.'
A few seconds later, on the other end of the line, Sylia replied, in english, “Yes, Rock.”
Rock said, “We know where Lee is.”
On the other end of the line, Sylia commented, in a dry tone of voice, “We saw the new broadcast of the chase, as well.”
Rock responded, “Yes. But, you may not be aware of identity of the man that controls the fortress that Lee just made it into. As such, please give me five hours to come up with a plan. Given the night Lee has had, he is not going to be in the shape to travel, for at least the rest of the night. I will contact you then, with a plan.”
A few second later, over the radio, Sylia replied, “Understood.”
Rock replied, “Thank you.”
Rock then turned off the radio, put it away, from where she had kept on her clothing.
Revy quietly said, “Well, that went well.”
Benny stated, “Okay. Now, that is done. We can talk about something a little more fun. You know, Lee is as crazy as Roberta. And he is about as crazy as the Mexican and the Lawyer.”
Rock asked, “Who?”
Dutch said, “Two guys we ran into, a while back. We just never told you about them, because we had our reasons.” She mentally reflected, 'Like some of the clues they dropped in their conversation with us.'
Dutch continued, “And while they are crazy. They are not crazy in the ultra violent way Roberta is. More like Lee's verity of crazy. In how creative and risk taking they were. We met them was soon after Revy and I rescued Benny, here, in Florida. We found ourselves in Caracas, Venezuela for a day. That night we went to a bar to get some drinks, and we got into a massive gunfight.”
Revy quickly commented, “That was not our fault, at all.”
There was some mild giggling from a few of the women at the table.
Benny stated, “Yes. Revy is right about that. It was the first gunfight, in a bar, that I was ever in. And yet, the Mexican and the Lawyer acted so calm. Like they had been through gunfights in bars, so many times, that it didn't bother them. The scary thing is that after so many gunfights in the Yellowflag, I can relate to them on that point.”
Akira asked, “Isn't Caracas where Fabiola, Roberta, and Garcia, are from?”
Eda mentioned, “And Rico.”
Eda did not show it on the outside, but she felt concern, as mentally reflected, 'Revy one time mentioned this bar fight. And what happened. Including, the Mexican and the Lawyer. And she even mentioned when. Though, Revy never gave me the details on where this the bar fight happened. And now that I know. If this is the bar fight I think it is. And it does fit the time line. Then, I may have had a hand in unknowingly starting that bar fight... Not that I am going to tell anyone here about my role in this mess.'
Dutch mentioned, “Yes. I guess so on, both counts. And it is an interesting tale. Even for us. About an hour after we got into the bar, and got some drinks at the counter, these two men enter the building, and they walk up to the counter, as well. And they start talking to each other. Then, Revy made a crack about them. And that is how our conversation started. They did not give us their names. They just called themselves, the Mexican and the Lawyer.”
Revy cursed herself, “Oh crap, I owe the lawyer two grand on a bet I made with him.”
Rock asked, “What was the bet?”
Revy stated, “That I would end up with a tightass Japanese man that preferred a suit and tie, instead
Natsuru guessed, “They were from the future?”
Dutch agreed, “Given some of the other stuff they said. Which Revy here likely do not remember. That is what Benny and I thought, as well. The morning after.” She turned to Rock and Janet, as she stated, “That is why we never told you two, nor anyone else about that night.”
Eda thought, 'Oh... This is getting interesting. I am going to love telling Yolanda about this.'
Benny stated, “Dutch and I felt it was best not to talk about it. And given the craziness in our lives, we didn't want to add even more craziness the mix.”
Rock said, “I fully understand.”
Janet commented, “It is best that you did not. So, I am sure there were other clues about them being time travelers.”
Dutch stated, “Yes. There were. the Mexican was the person that originally told me about Roanapur, and gave me directions to it. He even called it a gangsters’ paradise. And we all know for a fact that Chang occasionally called Roanapur that.”
Balalaika commented, “That is correct.”
Revy looked over at Dutch and Benny, as she stated, “I didn't know that those two were from the future. Not that I am upset about you two keeping that from me. But, that means they knew the effect that alcohol has on me. And the Lawyer still introduced me to rum. If I see that lawyer again, I am going to have words with that lawyer, over that.”
Ranma whispered to Akira and Natsuru, “Talk about a subtle form of corruption.”
Akira and Natsuru just lightly giggled at their lover's comment.
Benny stated, “That was not all. Some of the statements they made. Including a few quotes, raised some questions. Such as a quote, that the Lawyer said, that both of them claimed was a movie quote. But, at the time, it was just a book quote. Later, they did make a good movie out of that book in question.”
Violin asked, “What movie did he quote?”
Benny answered, “Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas.”
Violin commented, “That would fit their situation, so well.”
Shenhua asked, “Okay. They were crazy. But, how savvy were they?”
Dutch stated, “While those two men were crazy. We should all know. We have met a few. Those two were not as crazy as Lee. Though, they were just as smart, and savvy.”
Benny responded, “Dutch is right. For example, though we didn't know who she was at the time. During out conversation with them. Roberta walked in through the front door in combat fatigues, and military cap.”
Revy exclaimed, “Roberta was there?!”
Benny turned to Revy, as she answered, “Yea. You don't remember, because you have problems remembering people that you don't deal with everyday, or don't impress you in a fight. And at the time Roberta didn't do either.”
Revy sheepishly admitted, “You're right about that.”
Eda thought, 'So, Revy never gave me all the details of that event, because she doesn't clearly remember what happened. That figures.'
Benny turned to the rest of the women a the table, as she calmly stated, “Anyway, Roberta came to the bar counter. She was one side of those two at the counter. We three were on the other side. Soon after the Mexican and Lawyer saw her, the Mexican bought her a drink. And from what I could make out from the spanish they were saying to each other, it was her favorite drink.”
Lotton inquired, “Let me get this straight. This time traveler, whom likely knew who she was. At least good enough to get her a drink she liked? Meaning he also knew of her past, and he was still coming on to her?”
Benny answered, “Yes.”
Lotton flatly stated, “He is crazy.”
Ranma pointed out, “Garcia also has a relationship with Roberta, and he is not crazy.”
Lotton countered, “Oh, Garcia is likely crazier than most of us. He is just polite about it.”
Ranma conceded, “You may have a point there.” She then looked over at Benny, as she requested, “Please continue.”
Benny heard Ranma's request. She commented, “I would be more than happy too... So, looking back on it. This is one of the reasons we think those two are crazy. And the Mexican even doubled down, as he knowingly started putting the moves on Roberta. All the while knowing who she was, what she would become, and that the Colombian cartel was after her. And it was working. Honestly, I think if they had been given some more time together, she would have slept with him.”
Sawyer stated, in disbelief, “That man has a death wish.”
Shenhua turned to Sawyer, as she countered, “I won't be so sure. The audacity of knowingly trying to do so would likely be worth the attempt. Half of the dates I went on, in Roanapur, before I got to know you, and met Lotton, started that way. With the guy knowing who I was, and what I did, beforehand. I honestly admired those men for still having the guts to ask me out on a date. I did not take all of the ones that asked me, up on a date. But, I did admire them for asking. I even let them live, even if I turned them down. And most of those dates ended well. After a night of decent, to good, sex.”
Sawyer looked over at Shenhua, as she inquired, “And the others?”
Shenhua coyly replied, “Well, we will not talk about them.”
Sawyer inquired, in a strong, concerned tone of voice, “You didn't trick me into carving up a few of your living ex-boyfriends? With me thinking that Chang wanted them dead? Did you?”
Shenhua shrugged, as she casually said, “Hmm... Maybe one, or two...”
Sawyer accused, “Those are the ones you personally paid me in cash, for? Instead, of using the usual third party drop offs for the cash.”
Shenhua nodded, as she pointed out, “Though, given that was your previous job. At the time, I didn't see a problem.”
Sawyer explained, “The problem is, I don't like being lied to as to why someone is being killed. And who wants them dead... Though, I will have still done the job, since you paid me. I just like to know who I am killing for, before I do the killing, and disposal.”
Shenhua replied, “Good.”
Sawyer deadpanned, “Though, we are going to talk about this, when we get to our room, tonight.”
Shenhua sighed.
Sawyer turned to Benny, as she requested, “Now, go ahead, Benny.”
Lotton leaned over to whisper into Violin's right ear, “Could I bunk with you guys tonight?”
Violin softly replied back, “Sure. We even got an extra bed, in our suite, you can use.”
Lotton said, “Thanks.”
Benny went onto say “And then there was that stunt the Mexican pulled, soon after. When the local cartel members finally showed up, and came into the bar with their their automatic rifles. They were pointed their rifles at Roberta. They even called her Bloodhound at the time. And the Mexican, whom was right beside her, pulled his semi-automatic pistol on them, while saying some badass line. It went, something, armed bastards.”
With a smile on her lips, Balalaika calmly said, in an amused tone of voice, “He said. Don't move. You're surrounded by armed bastards... I have to admit that is a cool line.”
Akira said, “I have heard that line from somewhere, before. But, I cannot place it.”
Natsuru commented, “Same here. It is just been so long ago.”
Benny turned to Balalaika, as she inquired, with interest in her voice, “You were there?”
B answered for Balalaika, “Yes. We were on one side of the room, Chang and his group was on the other side.”
Balalaika commented, “To be exact, Those that attacked were members of the Manisarera Cartel. It their attack, on us, that night, which set me on the course to eventually destroy that cartel.”
Akira stated, “So, that's why you were so hostile towards that cartel, in the series?”
Balalaika grin became a little wider, as she answered, “Yes. And unlike others, I do still, clearly remember what was said that night. Though, I don't remember what the Mexican and the Lawyer look like. But, when the Bloodhound did show up Roanapur, I just had to lend a hand. I was already going to destroyed that cartel. So, helping the Bloodhound, that one time, was just icing on the cake.”
Revy inquired, “So sis, the whole reason you brought out the Vozdushno-Desantnye Vojska, that time, was?...”
Balalaika’s smile turned into a smirk, as she answered, “Yes. I did it just to stick to the Manisarera cartel. And to keep you two from killing each other. Also, though at the time, I had him beat up. I left Abrego alive, because killing him would have ruined the mood I had set for that day.”
Balalaika mentally reflected, 'Plus, with him left alive, and his cartel crippled back in South America, he would likely have remained in charge of the Roanapur branch. Which is what happened. Afterward, he knew never to cross me. Which he never did, after that.'
'And I allowed him a few impotent insults towards me, during the meetings of the families, because I knew, that he knew, that I know, that he would never try anything against me. And I got such a kick out of thinking about that fact.'
Benny commented, “I sometimes forget how vindictive you can be. But, you are practical, in your actions.”
Balalaika's lips curled into positively wicked smirk, as she turned to Benny. She replied, with a touch of warmth in her voice, “Thank you.”
Benny slowly inquired, with concern, “On which point?”
While still grinning, Balalaika said, “Both.”
Rock stated, “That being said. After all we know now. It would take an army to keep those two from killing other.”
Balalaika deadpanned, “That is why I brought an army, when I came to meet the Bloodhound.”
There was some mild laughter from some of the women at the table. Including, Revy, and Balalaika.
As those that laughed, calmed down, Revy looked over Rock, as she warmly smile. She said, “I will take your statement as a compliment.”
Rock turned to looked at Revy, as she returned her lover's smile. She replied, “Good. Because, it was intended as such.”
Balalaika turned to looked at the other end of the table, and the Lagoon parents, as she inquired, “Still, why did you not recognize the maid as the Bloodhound, when she came to the Roanapur, for the first time? That is not like you, Dutch. You are usually as sharp as I am, on such matters.”
Dutch answered, “Well, thank you for the compliment, Balalaika. But, at the time, we were more concerned with trying to survive her rampage. And the previous time we saw here, she was in green fatigues, a green military cap, with no glasses. And her hair was in a ponytail. The maids uniform, bonnet, glasses, and pigtails threw us.”
Benny agreed, “Yea. And when you are on the business end of one of her rampages. You are not thinking about the distant past. You are thinking about the immediate future. Or, lack there of. And she was a little bit more rational, back in Caracas.”
Dutch commented, “But, we did piece that part of the puzzle together, after she finished her second return to the city. After she was crippled, and when back, with Garcia and Fabiola, to South America. But, before Akira showed up.”
Benny mentioned, “Dutch and I talked about it in private. And we decided not to talk about it with anyone else, because it would have only complicated all our lives.”
Balalaika stated, “You would have been correct.”
Dutch and Benny then let out a sigh of relief, as they realized that no one would hold the secrets, they had just admitted to, against them.
Janet questioned, “So, you recognized Roberta, then, Balalaika?”
Balalaika causally answered, “Yes. After that night in Caracas, I kept tabs on her, from time to time.”
Akira inquired, “That is why, in the series, you so quickly realized Roberta was a soldier, and you called her, a rabid dog, then? You knew who she was, at the time?”
Balalaika said, “Exactly. And that was why I was so careful.”
Natsuru complimented, “Those were intelligent moves on your part.”
Balalaika casually replied, “Thank you.”
Nearby, Eda showed no outward expression, as she thought, with inward surprise, and concern, 'Oh no... It is the bar fight I was thinking about. I did accidentally have a hand in that bar fight. But, I was clearly not alone in lighting the match to that firestorm. I am just glad that I was only involved in a third party manner. And my friends here have no clue of my role in that night. And I hope they never do.'
'Still, it might be best not to think about such events. Especially at the casino, so River, nor someone, picks up my thoughts on such matters. And if River does already know, and she confronts me about it. I will just bribe her to keep her mouth shut, because she is nice to me.'
'Besides, it was years ago. Long before any of us knew each other. I was not intentionally trying to start that bar fight. And I was under orders... I should be fine. Especially, given they are just now letting Dutch and Benny offer the hook. Immediately after coming clean about their part in this mess.'
Dutch stated, “Damn. I guess nearly everyone was there. It must have been like a god damn convention for those two. And it explains, at the time, how the Mexican already knew nearly everyone in the room was armed.”
Sawyer said, “Which only shows how much crazier those two are.”
Janet turned to Revy, as she asked, “Do you remember any of that event?”
Revy turned to Janet, as she commented, “At this point, I only remember bits and pieces.”
Janet questioned, “Were you drunk, then? You did mention that you were introduced to rum there.”
Revy answered, “Actually, I was mostly sober.”
Janet asked, “Then, what do you remember?”
Revy responded, “Well, that was were I first saw Chang...” She turned to looked at Balalaika's, as she continued, “And sis here. And that is where I saw Chang use that dual wielding trick with his pistols. I loved that trick so much, it drove me to learn how to fight with two pistols at once. I even got the chance to learn a thing, or two, from Chang, himself.”
Nearby, Rock overheard Revy. She giggled. She then commented, “Talk about a closed loop.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she asked, “What do you mean?”
Rock looked over at Revy, as she inquired, “You didn't read all the stories? Did you?”
Revy admitted, “I read books one and two. But, I got tired. So, I just skimmed books three and four.”
Rock thought, with annoyance, 'That figures. I am impressed she had the attention span to read what she did.'
Rock calmly stated, “You remember that time I was with you three, when you were chasing Bob in Hong Kong, and you shanghaied that young police rookie to come with us, during that chase?”
Revy smiled, as she recalled those events of her life. She said, “Yes. Vaguely. I don't remember much of it, now. But, for some reason, I got a kick out of meeting the rookie. Though, during the chase, while he was sitting in back, between Sawyer and Shenhua.”
“And he completely freaked out. Though, we were nice enough to let him go, afterward. And except for frayed nerves, he was fine when we left him.”
Rock thought, 'I am not surprised she forgot. Now, to remind her.' She said, “Well afterward, I called the police station he was with. And I got in touch with him. I found out who he was. He was Chang.”
Revy questioned, “No shit?”
Rock confirmed, “Yes. You inspired him to learn how to shoot with two pistols at once. And he eventually did the same for you. With neither of you, at the time, realizing it was the other who inspired you. In a closed temporal loop.” She mentally added, 'Though, I am sure that Chang likely realizes it now, after reading those stories.”
Revy thought about what Rock said for a few seconds.
Akira, whom overheard Janet, Revy, and Rock's conversation. She turned Revy, as she commented, “Don't feel bad, Revy. There is so much material in those stories, that it is had to keep track of everything.”
Sawyer commented, “True. I read the stories, as well. And I remember meeting Chang in that chase. But, how would Lee know that Revy here would be inspired by Chang?”
Lotton stated, “He clearly didn't. But, given the way his mind likely works. He likely came from the angle that since it is a fact that Revy and Chang knew each other long enough, that Revy respected Chang. And the series hinted that Chang taught Revy. Lee probably found that it would humorous if Revy had accidentally inspired Chang in the first place, to learn to shoot to pistols at once. So, that is what he wrote.”
Sawyer agreed, “That makes sense, in a very twisted way.”
Just then, Revy then began laughing for a few seconds. As she calmed down, she stated, “Well, the irony of the situation is not lost on me.”
Akira teased, “The great Revy strikes again. Still, you both inspired me as well, so I am not one to talk.”
By then, the other women at the table had begun to pay attention to what was being said by Janet, Revy, Rock, and Akira.
Aeryn questioned, “In such a situation, who do we call teacher and student?”
Natsuru commented, “I think inspirations would be a better term for them.”
Aeryn responded, “I can see your point.”
Ranma commented, “Well the term, role models, would definitely not work for these two.”
Everyone at the table got a good chuckle out of Ranma's comment. Even Revy.
Revy was the first to calm down, as she said, without a hint of malice in her voice, “Okay, ladies. Laugh it up. And get it out of your systems.”
As everyone else calmed down, Dutch turned to Revy. She smiled, as she commented, “There is something poetic about you two inspiring each other to be badasses. Speaking of which, that night, the Mexican also kicked some ass. And he seemed to have acted like a teacher to us.”
“Especially, to Revy, here. And Roberta. He lead us to the back door, where a group of cartel members were waiting behind some cars, to kill anyone whom tried to escape that way.”
“After Roberta unloaded the rest of her gun, there were around twelve of them left breathing. That was when things got interesting. He literally demonstrated how to be a badass to us. Such as running towards armed men, and showing us how to effective use of a melee weapons in a close combat situation.”
Benny commented, “The Mexican was like a surgeon with his baseball bat.”
Dutch looked over at Benny. She agreed, Yea.” She then looked back at the rest of the them, as she continued, “Even Roberta, at the time agreed, with Revy that the Mexican was nuts to run into a possible line of fire. But, when it was over, he was unharmed, and the cartel members were dead. And after he did all this. He walked back to us with this insanely feral grin, that even scared Revy and Roberta.”
Several of the women lightly giggled at the thought of Revy and Roberta both being scared of someone.
Revy snapped, in a slightly elevated tone of voice, “I wasn't scared of him.”
The giggling got a little louder, for the next few seconds.
While the giggling faded, Benny smirked, as she said, “Yea right. I saw the look on both of your faces. That is the only time in my life that I have ever seen Roberta genuinely afraid of anyone. And you were just as scared as her.”
Revy admitted, in a normal tone of voice, “Okay. I was scared of him. With that crazy grin of his.”
Benny pointed out, “Where do you think he got that grin from?”
Revy thought over her friend's comment for a few seconds. Then, her jaw dropped. As she collected herself, she questioned, “You're kidding?”
Benny shook her head, as she responded, “Nope. They made a few jokes that allowed Dutch and I to have a few clues to figured out some things. They even mentioned the terms, two-hands, and the maid. The next morning, at sea, with you going on and on about learning to shoot with a pistol in both hands, at once.”
“Dutch and I figured you would become, two-hands. Figuring the purple haired girl would become the maid was academic. But, while we did realize that Roberta was dangerous, given the cartel did call her Bloodhound, in front of us. And they sent a small army after her. We did not see her do so much that night. As such, we didn't learn what the maid could really was until years later, when she first came to Roanapur.”
“And during that conversation on that boat, as we left Caracas the next morning, we both knew that if you two ever met again, it would end in a fight between the two of you.”
Revy asked, “Really?”
Dutch spoke for her friend, “Yes. Given your personality. You always look for a challenge. And having another badass come to town would be a perfect test for your skills. Unfortunately, as we were saying, when that happened, and you to finally met, we had other things on our minds. Such, as saving our own skins.”
Revy said, “That is understandable.”
Ranma questioned, “So, let me get this straight. These two guys from the future, that know you, show you how to be badasses? And they inspire you to become the badasses you are today?”
Revy looked over at Rock, as she admitted, “Pretty much.”
Benny said, “And from the way they talked to us, it was like they knew us for a while. But, I don't remember meeting either other them. Even to this day.”
Janet suggested, “Could they have met us from our futures? It would not be the first time that has happened.”
Benny said, “That is possible. Or, they are from a parallel reality of the Black Lagoon series.”
Dutch stated, “Well, right before the Mexican killed the last cartel member, he said something. I just cannot remember what.”
Revy stated, “The Mexican called himself the creature from the Laguna Negra... Hey, I did remember that part. And it was kind of a cool statement.”
Rock's jaw dropped at what her lover said.
Revy looked over at Rock, as she asked, with concern in her voice, “What is it?”
Rock collected herself, as she inquired, “Revy, Laguna Negra is spanish. Do you know what the english translation of it is?”
Revy replied, “No.”
Rock stated, “Black Lagoon.”
Suddenly, the realization of Rock's comment hit Revy, as her eyes went wide.
Natsuru stated, “The two of them are not a pair of time travelers. They are reality travelers.”
Benny stated, “Oh god. They are. While the Mexican was tearing hell out of those cartel members, the Lawyer kept going on and on how his friend was nothing compared to the crazy women from their home town.”
“Given the level of badass the Mexican was displaying, I asked if they were from hell. Because, I genuinely wondered if they were.”
“The Lawyer answered, no. But, that the devil likely owns a hotel there. The Devils Hotel. They are from Plata Podrido. He was talking about us. They are from our future. Not a parallel version of us. But, from our own future.”
Balalaika stated, “To add to your statements, Dutch, and Benny, I also suspect the Lawyer was the one, that set the spark to our standoff with the cartel, into a gunfight. And I believe he did so, intentionally.”
“Before the cartel arrived, for Roberta. I saw that that he had left the bar counter, with his bottle in hand. He went to sit at a table, near the entrance to the room.”
“While at the table, the Lawyer was met by three women that had entered the bar. I do not remember what the three women look like. But, I did remember they were women. And I am fairly sure that none of us were them. Even though, I don't recall their faces.”
“The cartel arrive, and the Mexican spoke to cartel leader. As he was protecting Roberta.”
“Anyway, the Lawyer looked like he was having a good time with the three women, whom sat down at his table. Even after the cartel had arrived.”
And after his friend made was protecting Roberta. The Lawyer was slowly pushing the bottle he had to the edge of the table. Until it eventually went over the edge and dropped to the floor. With the crash of the bottle on the floor, causing one of the cartel members to shoot, in response. And thus starting the fight. But, the odd thing was he started ducking under the table right before the bottle hit the ground. Like he knew what he was doing would cause the gunfight.”
“Which was kind of obvious. But still, it makes me wonder if he fully realized the storm he was about to create.”
Benny commented, “All evidence we have would point to the answer being an emphatic, yes.”
Balalaika nodded once, as she replied, “Well then. These two men are as crazy as we suspect.”
Revy asked, “When the Lawyer broke the bottle, did he use his forearm to push the bottle off the table.”
Balalaika answered, “Yes.”
Revy cursed, “Damn it. That is basically what I did to start the fight between the cartel members and Fabiola at the Yellowflag. When she first came to town. The two of them have no only met us, they have seen our series.”
Janet asked, “As strange, and juicy, as this information is. There is am important question we have not yet asked. Are we going to tell the Garcia, and maids about this?”
Lotton suggested, “We should wait on telling them. Garcia is too close to the maids. And right now, it is clear that the maids are not in a talkative mood. Especially after losing Lee. Fabiola here was just to tired to be vicious for, right now. And this information would only make them more... Unpredictable.”
Dutch stated, “I fully agree.”
Lotton looked over at Dutch, as she smiled. She went on to say, “Since this deals with people will we meet in the future. We will just way until the Mexican and the Lawyer reveal themselves to us. Then, we will tell the members of the Lovelace house hold what is going on. At the very least, by that time, we will have likely long ago sorted out this current mess, dealing with Lee. And, by then, the maids will have had time to calm down.”
Janet agreed, “We can hope.”
Benny said, “I like that your idea, Lotton.”
Balalaika commented, “I can go along with this.”
B said, “Yes. It is simple, and workable.”
Akira complimented, “I do admire a person that understands the better part of temporal mechanics.”
Lotton looked over at Akira. She smiled, as she replied, “Thank you, Akira.”
Akira returned Lotton's smile.
Violin stated, “I agree, as well. Though, it doesn't really matter at the moment. As Lotton pointed out. We will see them, eventually. We just have to wait. And we sure as hell are not tell the maids, right now. With them being so pissed off and focused on Lee. Also, since we all have the longevity to do so, we can wait. As such, for right now, we should focus on capturing Lee.”
Revy responded, “You're right, Violin. Now, before we head to our rooms, to get some sleep. There is one other matter we need to talk about, first.” Revy then looked over, across the table, at Balalaika and B. Her lips curled into a mischievous grin, as she said, “Sis, B, let us talk about when, where, and how, you two would like us to throw your babyshower.”
Both russian lovers became visibly uncomfortable at Revy's comment, as they watched the rest of their group turn to face them, with the other women wearing equally mischievous grins on their faces.
Balalaika quickly said, in a nervous tone of voice, “No need to do that on our account.”
B swiftly added, in an equally nervous tone of voice, “Yes. We are just fine.”
Revy mischievous grin curled into a smirk, as she said, “Oh. But, we insist.”
The two russian lovers tried to talk their way out of their embarrassing situation, with it becoming an increasingly losing battle for them, until they relented and allowed their friends to two a babyshower for the two of them.
With them all soon planning on heading up to their room, to get some sleep.
Though, through the entire conversation, no one had so far noticed the electronic bugs placed in the room.
(_)
At that moment, elsewhere in the Black Sheep Inn, a few stories up, inside Malcolm Reynolds hotel suite, Mal, his crew, and the Bebop crew, were listening in on the Lagoon group's conversation, as they recorded the event in its entirety. Both audio and video.
Mal had made sure to get a suite in the inn away from everyone, so prevent any prying, enhanced hearing, ears, from overhearing what they were doing.
The bugs in the restaurant has been places earlier that day. And the bugs were sending encrypted, wireless signals to an open laptop computer, that was set at the head of one of the two beds, in the room.
Currently, Mal, Zoe, and Simon were sitting on the bed, with the laptop computer, as they listening from the speakers on laptop, and white the video feed from the screen, to the conversation in the bar.
On the another bed, further away from the door, than the first bed, Kaylee and Jetta were on the bed working with some other electronics, that they had brought into the room, with them.
At the table and chairs, on the far sit of the room, from the door, sat Inara, Spike, Faye, and Jayne were sitting in chairs, around the table.
Jayne had almost fully recovered the blow that Lee made to his crotch.
The four adults were playing some poker, with money.
By Jayne's chair, near a nightstand on the wall, was his unloaded Vera weapon, ammo, and its severed barrel.
Surprisingly, Jayne was currently winning the poker game. With Spike having slightly less money than Jayne, on the table. Inara had a respectable about of money, as well. While Faye was about to go bust.
Inara shuffled the deck, and as she dealt the cards.
Spike picked up her cards, as she turned to Jayne. She flatly asked, “So, how are your balls doing, Jayne?”
Given spike one that last hand, she was the first one to bet for the current hand. She placed the bet into the poker pot, in the center of the table.
Jayne was next. Jayne looked at his cards, as he placed his bet. He then turned to Spike, as he answered, “I am still a bit sore. But, I will be fine. And it was my fault for not wearing a cup. Desperate people do desperate things, when cornered.”
Spike complimented, “It take a man to admit that.”
Jayne replied, “Thank you.”
Inara played her bet, as she looked over at Faye. She casually suggested, “Faye, you probably walk away when you still have a little money left.”
Instead of placing a bet. Faye took Inara's suggestion.
Faye folded her cards, and picked up what little money she had left on the table. As she pocket her money, on the right pocket of her yellow denim shorts. She looked up at Inara, as she agreed, “You are right, Inara. I should walk away while I still can. Though, I think I will just sit and watch.”
Inara calmly said, “That will be fine.”
Spike, Jayne, and Inara discards a few cards. And Inara replaced them with cards from the deck.
Spike looked at her cards, and saw that she now had a good hand. She raised the bet. She then turned towards Faye, as she commented, “I am surprised you are showing such restraint, Faye.”
Faye warmly smiled towards Spike, as she answered, “Don't be. While Lee may have screwed you. He helped me. He arranged for me to get help for my gambling addiction, and my debt problems. Both are now long since taken care of... I would not be able to hold a job at the casino if I still had a gambling problem.”
“Though, I am still unlucky with the ponies and the cards. But, that is another matter of skill, and luck, or lack there of. Also, Lee gave me a great lifetime, a nice fortune, and he arranged for my youth to be restored. And with that super-soldier serum, I, along with you, Jet, and Julia, are going to be young and healthy for a very long time.”
Inara looked up from her cards, as she asked, “So, why did you still try to kill, Lee?”
Faye pointed out, “I said he helped me. I did not say he was my friend. While Spike is. And what he did to Spike deserves a measure of retribution.”
Inara conceded, “Perhaps. But, a bullet is likely not the proper punishment.”
Spike admitted, “Well, thoughts of revenge do cloud one's judgment.”
Inara said, “I am glad you realize that.”
Jayne continued looking at his cards, as he placed his bet. He sternly interrupted, in annoyed tone of voice, “Are we going to play this hand of cards? Or not?”
Faye turned to Jayne, as she commented, “Just be happy we are not playing strip poker, with girls only. And with bikini tops and bottoms, under the clothing, for the players.”
In response, Jayne looked around the table, at the three women he was playing. He lecherously smiled, as he commented, “Personally, I get a kick out of those games. Even when I was one of the female players.
The others at the table laughed a little at Jayne's comment.
As they did so, Jayne thought, 'Unfortunately, there are ways to tell that a woman is sexually aroused. Before I could change genders back and forth, I thought that was not the case. With the only way to tell if someone was aroused was for men, with an erection... Boy, was I wrong. After we all started changing back and forth, I learned quick that one could tell a woman was aroused by their face blushing, her being wet down there, and breasts temporally becoming... More... Perky...'
'And the knowledge I got from changing genders helped my sex life a lot.'
'Of course, it did make those games at striped poker more interesting, because hiding one's sexual attraction at that game was very difficult.'
'But, those thoughts are for later. Right now, I need to focus on this game. Considering, I am currently winning it.'
Inara played her bet, as she said, in a joyous tone of voice, “Jayne, you always were one to know when to just relax, and have fun.'
Jayne smile turned more casual, as he rhetorically asked, “What is life without a little fun?”
Faye turned to Spike, as she commented, “Speaking of bikinis. After Jet was forced have the vat process, I am surprised she was so willing to go shopping for bikinis with us. You, on the other hand, I was not surprised, because you spent years as a woman. Jet, on the other hand, has not.”
Spike looked over at Faye, as she said, “Well, we were invited to those Lagoon bikini parties for the first time. And Jet could never turn down an invite to a good party.”
While sitting onto top of a nearby bed, Jetta continued working on some electronic with Kaylee. She did not look up from her work, as she stated, “You are right about that.”
Faye let out a laugh. She then agree, “True. And I had a great time.”
Spike said, “So did Julia and I. And speaking of those parties...” She turned to Jayne, as she commented, “Jayne, I heard that when you, and the rest of the Serenity crew, here, were first invited to the Lagoon bikini parties. That the girls here had to drag you, Simon, and Mal into the bikini shops, as women, to get you some clothing for those girls only parties.”
Jayne looked at his cards, as he showed no real emotion to Spike's claim. He casually said, “Well, you heard wrong. Yes. We were all women at the time. With Simon going willingly into that shop. I don't want to know what Kaylee did to get Simon to willingly go.”
“On the other hand, I was bribed. For a respectable amount. I might add. But, Mal had to be dragged in their by Zoe and River. The only two women in existence that the captain would never dare pick a fight with, at the same time.”
Nearby, Mal was doing his best to ignore their conversation.
Faye said, “I bet that was an interesting experience for all of you.”
Inara looked over at Faye, as she said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Oh it was.” She turned to Jayne, as she complimented, “I was surprised to find, during that shopping trip, that Jayne has such good taste in styles and colors of bikinis. She picked out a few nice ones for herself. And couple for Kaylee, and I.”
Jayne stated, in a casual tone of voice, “Thank you. And well, all I did was think what I would like a woman to wear, but she was afraid to do so. And that is what I picked out for you, Kaylee, and myself.”
Faye and Spike burst out laughing at Jayne's bluntness. While Inara commented, in a dry tone of voice, “I retraced my previous statement.” She thought, 'Though, I still think the bikinis were nice.'
Inara's comment made Faye and Spike laugh even laugh louder.
As the two women calmed down, Faye said, “Not to sound insulting. But sometimes, I wonder which of you two were more the whore... Well, before you quit that profession, Inara.”
Inara thought, 'Well, I didn't exactly quit. More as, I presently manage the spa at the casino, and I don't do the sex part of my job. Though, a companion has a lot more skills than just sex. But, that is another matter. Now, for some payback.'
Inara smiled, as she responded, “None taken. And well there are a few things that I would never do for money, that Jayne here would still likely do for a payment, or two..”
Jayne looked at his cards, as he calmly retorted, “True. But, none of them involved me spreading my legs, for someone.”
Both Spike and Faye giggled at Jayne's comment, for a few seconds.
Inara actually found Jayne's retort to be funny. And she was trying hard not to show her response, as she thought, with amusement, 'I admit it. That was a good come back. And arguing will get us nowhere. There is something I would like to ask Spike about.'
Inara changed the subject, as she turned to Spike, as she commented, “I was wondering. Is there anything Lee could do, to make up for what he did, without dying, or suffering.”
Spike looked over at Inara. She shrugged, as she said, “I don't know. I will have to think about question. Still, I wonder why some of you admire, Lee? But, at least let us get this hand finished.” She played some money on the table, for the amount of the current bet, as she stated, “I called.”
Spike, Jayne, and Inara laid out their hands of cards.
Jayne has three of kind. Spike has a flush. And Inara had a full house, thus Inara won the hands.
Faye looked at the cards and she saw that she would have still lost the hand. She thought, 'I still would have lost that hand of cards. But, at least my life is better at the moment.'
After Inara collected the cards, and the pot, she looked back up at Spike. She calmly said, “Spike, that is a fair response. I am not sure about the others. But, I admire Lee for him being able to understanding the value of a calm facade... As skill that is rarely appreciated. And only mastered by a few people.”
Inara then became shuffling the cards for the next hand.
As Spike heard Inara's comment, Spike thought, with mild concern, 'Inara's statement could have been taken as a veiled threat. I am starting to understand how Inara can run with a rough crowd like the Serenity crew. She is as dangerous as the rest of them, in her own way. And she is a woman that I do want to intentionally upset. As such, I will give what she says some consideration.'
Spike commented, “I can see your point.”
Inara continued looked at her hands, as she shuffled the cards. She said, “I am pleased to hear that.”
A few seconds later, Inara had finished shuffling the cards, and she started dealing the cards again, for Spike, Jayne, and herself.
(_)
On the bed, furthest from the poker players, in the room, Zoe, Simon, and Mal were listening to the laptop speakers, and watching the video on the screen, of the conversation going on at the restaurant downstairs.
Zoe lightly giggled as she watched and listen to Balalaika and B fight a clearly losing battle, with Revy and their friends roping them into having a babyshower thrown for them.
Meanwhile, Simon chose not to respond to what he was view, coming from the hotel restaurant.
And Mal commented on what he heard and saw, “Well, up until the babyshower, that was an interesting conversation.”
Zoe looked over at Mal, as she said, “Yes sir. And we will have to send gifts to their babyshower... When we find out when it is. Now, we just need to get the security recordings of the places that Lee has been to.”
Both of them looked over at Simon.
Simon stated, “It won't be too hard. I have seen the Babylon Five series of the reality. We need to find out where the recordings are stored. Then, we teleport in, pull the data storage crystals they use in this reality, and teleport out. The problem will be the input for the crystals. Once we have them. The computer equipment that Chang uses at the casino does not use crystal inputs.”
On the bed, by then, Kaylee overheard them. She continued to work on the device in her hands, as she stated, “I looked into that. Jet and I found there was an electronics store that sold handshake technology between new and old computer systems. This equipment we are working on. We bought this equipment, with gold. And we have been working on it here, since we got back, after the chase.”
Jet held up a small electronic box, with wires coming out of it, with her human hands. She looked over at Mal, Zoe, and Simon, as she commented, “Not the first time I had to get old gear to work with new gear.”
Mal, Zoe, and Simon turned to Kaylee and Jetta.
Mal said, “Good. As soon as we have collect the information. Including, the audio and videos recording. We will head back to the casino, and I will report to Chang with it. While the rest of you either get some rest, or go back to your jobs there. Which ever you feel like doing.”
Mal thought, 'Though, since I am the one that will be teleporting us back to the casino. I will teleport us in the early afternoon. A little after lunch. Instead of right after we left, in the morning. Sometimes it is good just to yank Chang's chain a little. That even though we now work for him. We are not his blindly loyal servants, whom come to him at his beckoned call.'
'And Chang won't mind. As long as we return with what he wants, within a day of us leaving.'
Jetta turned to Kaylee, as she commented, “That is what I like about this new job. The flexible hours.”
Kaylee looked at Jetta, as she agreed, “That is why I enjoy working for Mal, and Daiyu, as well.”
The two women then went back to working on their electronic equipment.
Mal turned to the adults at the table, as he stated, “Irana, Jayne, Faye, Spike. I will give you twenty minutes to finish you game. And then we are heading out.”
The four adults turned to look over at Mal.
Inara said, “That will be plenty of time.”
Jayne stated, “That works for me, captain.”
Spike responded, “I am okay with it.”
Faye commented, “Since I am already done. I think I will freshen up, before we leave.”
Faye then got up from her seat at the table, as she calmly walked towards the door to the suite, that lead to the hallway. So, she could head to her own room. As the other three players turned back to their game their game.
(_)
Lee's Home Reality. Location, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Time, eight PM, local time, of the day after Lee has escape his reality. Place, Chang's private theater, inside Daiyu Palace Casino.
It has been had been less than a day since Lee escaped into another reality and it was currently evening at Daiyu Palace Casino.
Mal, the Serenity Crew, and the Bebop Crew, had returned to the casino, in the early afternoon, just after Chang, River, and Annie, as their guest, had finished their lunch in the penthouse dining room.
With them, they brought all the data crystals, video-audio records, and other information. Then, they spent the afternoon collating the data into a presentable form for Chang.
Chang had ordered River not get involved with her friends work. And Chang had other day to day business to deal with.
Meanwhile, Annie did not care to review such records. So, Annie helped Arcee with security, to allow Mal, Zoe, and Jayne to help Kaylee, Inara, Simon, Jetta, and Faye look over the records they had taken.
The only one of the group that had come back from Mars, that was not working on the data, was Spike. And she was acting as the pit boss for the afternoon. Until, they finished, and Jetta could relieve her, so she could spent some time with her young daughter, Julia.
It was the late afternoon by the time they had finished their work.
Mal personally brought their wealth of information. Which included transcripts, along with audio and video recordings of the night's events in the Babylon Five reality. To Chang, for him to review.
Currently, later that evening, at eight PM, Mal was having a private meeting with Chang, River, and Annie, Chang's private theater in the casino. Also, Arcee was summoning to the meeting.
When Arcee had to travel through the casino, in the view of the patrons there, she did so in motorcycle alt mode. Those that did not know better, thought she was a motorcycle controlled by remote. That she was a toy to show off, to the customers, by the casino management.
Arcee did not mind. They even staged some stunt jumping, and other motorcycle tricks with Arcee in motorcycle mode. Alone, without a rider. Surprisingly, Chang made a nice profit from the shows, and Arcee got to keep half of the ticket sales, for herself.
Meanwhile, as Mal was busy with Chang, others were going back to their usual jobs, or getting some rest, until they were sent back to Mars, to continue their hunt for Lee.
Zoe and Jayne were back at their security jobs. And as the two of them sat at their desks, in their large camera room they usually worked in, during the day. With a few of their subordinates. Jayne used the quiet time to repair his weapon, Vera, back to working order, by replacing the barrel with a spare barrel he had for his weapon.
Jetta was currently acting pit boss from the casino for the evening shift, after relieving Spike of that job, for the day.
Spike was spending time with her daughter, Julia.
Kaylee and Simon were having some private time, with each other.
And Inara, and Faye were getting some rest.
At the moment, in Chang's private theater, Chang and those he had invited to the meeting, had spend the last few hours reviewing the information that Mal, and he group had brought back, and put together.
The lights of the theater room has been dimmed for the viewing of the video on the large screen on the wall, in the front of the room. With the chairs facing the screen. And the room was fairly large, for its type. Also, the theater had nice, flat, red, carpeted floors.
The chairs in the theater were covered in black leather, and were heavily cushion armchairs. The chairs were not attached to each other, nor to the floor. The chairs could recline, and given enough space between rows to do so. And all the chairs were positioned to face the theater screen.
Chang was sitting in his chair, in the front row. There was a swivel dining tray table over his waist, connecting to a metal arm that went over his right armchair. On top of the dining tray table, was a laptop computer, and computer mouse, with the cord of the mouse attached to a USB plug on the laptop. His laptop was wirelessly hooked to the video and audio controls of his theater. Though, like all the wireless equipment in the casino, this signals from Chang's computers in the room were encrypted, as well.
Arcee was sitting on the floor, in robot mode, in an empty space made for her, by the left side of Chang's chair. To Chang's right sat River, then Annie. And behind Chang, to his right, Mal sat in a chair in the second row.
The human in the group were in their usual clothing. Chang was in his usual black suit. Though, he did not have on his long coat, nor sunglasses. Mal was his security uniform, which was his black suit and black dress shoes. Annie was in her shirt, pants, socks, shoes, robe, with her lightsaber clipped the right side of her belt. River was in a short-sleeved blouse, pants, socks, and tennis shoes.
They had already watched the videos and listened to the audio records, once, in silence, without comment.
And before even doing reviewing the video and audio records, Chang used the transcripts to figure out what to review first, and what parts were most important to warrant his attention. It saved Chang time, and made things easier to go through.
Chang began their first review for of the information with Black Sheep bar conversation. Chang then watched the video camera recordings they collected. Starting with the alien sci-fi convention, which Chang found as insane a concept as he thought it would be. Next, was the convention parking lot, where the Lowe family helped Lee. Some video cameras of the first car chase, which didn't offer any real information. After that, was the industrial complex videos and audio recordings, which were useful. Soon after, there was the police interrogation room recordings, and the police garage recordings. And finally, the second chase recordings, which was mostly from the news broadcast of the chase by the news helicopter crew.
Now, they were reviewing records again. And this time, Chang was doing it in a different order, to try to make further sense of the events of that night.
Currently, Chang had the four most interesting videos playing on the corners of the widescreen of the theater, at once. Two videos on top of each other, on both left and right sides of the screen. The large center square of the screen was left blank.
The screen on the theater wall was set to be a mirror image or the computer screen on his laptop. Right down to the mouse pointer.
For the moment, Chang had the audio muted.
The group had already watched each of the videos a couple of times for the last few hours. And Chang was now studying each video more closely for details on the inner workings of Lee's mind.
Meanwhile, River and Annie was having a telepathic conversation, as they sat beside each other. Given Annie was an empath, and River was a telepathic, this allowed each of them the rare opportunity to find someone to communicate their thoughts and emotions directly with, to each other, at a purely mental and emotional levels.
And even though they found that their personalities made them incompatible as lovers, they were still very good friends.
Annie telepathically said to River, 'See, I told you to have some faith.'
River smiled. Through their mentally connected, she replied, 'Thanks. Lee really shined that night.'
Annie telepathically responded, 'I know. Lee seems make new breakthroughs in creating and implementing crazy escapes plans, on the fly.'
Chang said out loud, “Girls. If you are finished with your conversation, I wish to included you on my summation of Lee's mind. Given I know you both like him, I figure you might want to be part of this conversation.”
Annie quickly asked, through their mental connection, 'Can he hear our conversation?”
River mentally answered, 'No. But, after being intimate with him for so many years, I have have a slight telepathic connection to him. He cannot hear our conversation, but he can sense we are having one.'
Annie telepathically complained, 'I still do not get whatever you see in him, or her, depending on the situation.'
River mentally answered, 'The same reason I find Lee interesting. Chang constantly surprises me. As a genius, being regularly surprised on a regular basis is a rare privilege. Still, are you ever going to forgive him for what he did to you?'
Annie shrugged, as she mentally responded, 'Maybe... Someday... Like I said this morning. I am already getting my sweet, golden revenge on him for he did to me. Without asking. And what he tried to do to me. But, the real part that grates on my nerves is that as an empath, I can sense people act against their nature. And that annoys me. While I admire those that do act in their nature.'
'For example, Lee sincerely tries to be a nice person, both in actions and emotions. While, on the other hand, when it come to Chang, most of the time, I sense Chang is just a jackass trying to act like a nice guy. Though, I will admit that Chang's nice guy act is sometimes genuine.'
River telepathically conceded, 'I will give you that one. Still, considering I literally use to be a crazy bitch much of the time... Of which, I am eternally grateful for you helping me back to being mostly sane... I tend to overlook what people think, and I judge them by their actual, intentional actions they take.'
'This is why I do not just read Chang's mind, for what he has to say, for a given moment. I want to see what parts of this thoughts he verbalize, and respond from there. Though, I will respond to his thoughts, if I deem them important enough.'
Annie complimented River through their mental connection, 'Interest. And given your telepathic nature, that is a wise course to take. Well, we better quit talking. So, we can get on with conversation with Chang. So, we can get this over with it. I have a date later tonight, at ten PM. And I don't want to be late.'
River telepathically inquired, 'With who?'
Annie mentally stated, in a casual manner, 'Yolanda.'
River mentally replied, 'Her?...'
Annie telepathically responded, 'She is one of the few people, who knows what is going on, whom still wants to be my friend, whom I have found to be old enough, emotionally mature enough, and still sane enough, that I can relate to. We have both lost things, and then regained them. She lost her right eye and her youth to a lifetime of service. I lost a lot more. We both have been given a second chance by Lee. And neither of us are going to waste this opportunity.'
'Still, this isn't a case of two lovers getting together. We are just two good friends that are lonely, horny, and we both need someone to screw for the night.'
River mentally giggled, 'Good luck. Though, aren't you suppose to be guarding me?'
While River felt emotional warmth from Annie, Annie mentally stated, 'We both know you are not going after Lee. Right now, he is safe in Garibaldi's base. And if you go, it will only make the situation more volatile, and likely distract Lee from his clearly well planned, long term escape.'
River mentally admitted, 'Good point. You are right. I won't go. Now, let us see what Chang has to say about Lee. And if I do not like what I hear, I will make Chang pay for it in bed with some very interesting role playing, that we occasionally do.'
Annie started mentally laughing, as she requested, 'Care to give me a few details?'
River telepathically responded, with a hint of mischief in her emotion state, that Annie sensed through their mentally connection, 'Sure. Keep in mind, my pet name for Chang in bed, depending on Chang's gender, is either Black Jade Bitch, or Black Jade Bastard. Either sounds fine for the needed occasion. And I find the acronym, BJB, for either way, to be funny.'
Annie mentally laughed even harder, to the point she giggled a little outwardly, which drew the attention of the others in the room. Though, the others people were polite enough not to response.
Annie caught herself just in time to present herself from bursting out laughing, out loud. She mentally said, 'We better stop, before we embarrass ourselves.'
River mentally replied, 'Agreed.'
Chang sensed their conversation had ended. He stated, “Good. Now, let us review.” He then thought, 'I hope Balalaika and B do not mind me secretly recording them and the others. It is just I am not sure that those two would have allowed such recordings of their personal lives. And I don't want them to make such a choice of conflicting loyalties, so I made the choice for them. I just hope they are not upset about it.'
River commented, “I think it will be alright. As long as we keep quiet about what we have learned.”
Chang thought, 'I hope you are right.'
Chang then used his mouse and keyboard built into his his laptop, on the dining tray, to bring the industrial complex video to the middle of the screen, which had been previously blank. Next, he set it to the place he wanted and turned on the audio.
It was a scene in the W.E. Convention conversation, during the sci-fi convention, in the atrium, where Lee talked to the dealer.
Chang commented, “This was a brilliant stalling tactic by Lee. And I want a copy of that live action Black Lagoon series for us. Also, the Lowe family can find the most interesting toys. I also think it would be wise to get a few of those hologram devices.”
Arcee stated, “I will look into getting both items. Though, from what I understand, that hologram device is rare.”
Chang looked over at Arcee, as he said, “Well, don't trouble yourself, if you cannot find the hologram device. And I am sure you can find that live action Black lagoon series.”
Arcee said, “Worse comes to worse, we can just borrow Akira, Natsuru and Ranma's copies of those videos, to make copies of our own. Since those three, along with Violin and Aeryn, made it no secret that they have that copy of that series.”
Chang agreed. “True. It would be obvious that Mal here, and the others, would tell me about that series.”
Mal commented, “That version of your series just proves there are levels of the multiverse that even we do not fully grasp. Fiction created, within fiction.”
Chang did not turn around to face Mal, as he said, “Yes. And this concept could be endless. Still, that it what I like about you, Mal. You are willing to take what you find out in stride.”
Mal replied, “Thank you.”
Chang then turned back to theater screen. He stated, “Another point is that we may have not realized just how far Lee's precognitive abilities can go. He states, as such, right here.”
Chang used his computer mouse, which showed up both on his laptop screen, and his theater screen, to select another video. He turned back on the audio with a simple keystroke. The video was the industrial complex on foot chase on the very north end part of the interior of the dome of Mars Dome One.
The video then started in the middle part of the screen, replacing the previous video that had been in the middle of the screen.
Everyone then turned the attention to the theater screen, as video began playing.
(_)
On the screen, Lee replied, ““Well, Rocky-babe. In truth, this isn't my first time-warp twist with the multiverse. As you all know, I am a pre-cog. Partly experiencing alternate realities is just part of the package. And, when I start sensing the future and I can change it. But, that is not all. I figured out how to mentally time travel months into my own past and changed the future, creating an alternate reality, of my very own reality, in the multiverse. Though, mentally traveling back in time hurts like hell, because doing so damages my soul. With a level and type of pain that I cannot put into words. Which is saying something, giving my writing talents. And that is why I don't do it. But, I still know how to.”
“I have even, on occasion, had my soul travel to alternate Earths, where I possessed the bodies of my alternate reality selves. Each time, I usually spent from a few minutes, to hours, to even a day in one of those realities, before I safely returned to my own body, in my home reality. Yes, Rock, just like you with the omakes. And just like you, I suspect not all of the versions of my selves I possessed were male.”
“So, as you can see. I have dealt with multiversal issues long before I ever wrote the stories that involved any of you. That is one of the reasons I wrote my stories about you. Because I wanted to push the envelope of the genre, using my own life experiences as inspiration. I guess I pushed it too far. Though, doing so was still fun.”
(_)
In the theater, Chang stated, “We need to check this out. It if is true, then Lee has dealt with types of reality travel I dare not even imagine. I know from the stories that Rock experience something similar. And this is why Rock was sober for that month, back in Roanapur. With Lee likely basing that part of his stories from his own personal experience. Including, those reality dream traveling comments, dealing with Rock. Still, for Lee to experience the same thing is incredible.”
“Maybe Violin was right at the Black Sheep restaurant conversation. Lee wrote these stories to work out theoretical concepts of what he was personally dealing with. I doubt the irony was not lost on him.”
“That is likely why Lee was so obsessed with writing about us. With the action, the babes, and the characterizations in the Black Lagoon series, it was the omakes, in the sense of the Rock from our reality having to visit other realities, that ultimately draw his interest towards us.”
Mal questioned, “I don't remember the connection being made between our Rock, and the Rock in the omake being one in the same?”
Chang stated, “True. But, the omakes hinted that the Rock in them was our same Rock. The Rock in the omake acted like this had already happened a few times to him. And the omake Rock was always portrayed at the outsider in those omakes.”
“Rock doing the gender flip, Boys and Girls omake, made it very clear that Rock was found our reality, and she was freaked at her sudden gender change. Dreams can start from getting out of bed, which is what happened in that omake. And the story ended with Rock completely freaked out, and running, as the screen faded to white. Meaning Rock woke up.”
“The only way that could work is through dreams. And Lee made that connection.”
Annie thought, 'I am so happy I have seen and read these Black Lagoon series. So, I can be a part of the conversation. Though, I think Chang invited me, because I have a unique way of looking at things.'
Over their telepathic connection, River agreed, 'That is likely.'
Annie did not response in thought, as she verbally commented, “But, the question is. Given those dreams of Rock's were shown as stories in fiction in another realities. Are those dreams other realities, as well? And if so, does that mean most, if not all of our dreams?... Everyone's dreams, are realities onto themselves, that we can travel to? And create when we sleep?”
Chang complimented, “That is a very insightful statement, Annie. I think Lee had a point. He and Rock were visiting other realities. So, in at least some cases. People do not just imagine realities, when they dream. Their soul literally visits other realities. Though, this requires a level of philosophical thought that we don't have time for.”
“So, I will answer your questions the best I can. I know for a fact, that besides the Black Lagoon anime reality, the Black Lagoon omake realities exist. Even the manga, and Black Lagoon R, exist.”
“With the Black Lagoon R reality being a reality not where Black Lagoon existed, in of itself. But, where the cast of the Black Lagoon reality, live action TV series was filmed. The live action series that Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma bought at the sci-fi convention on Mars.”
“It might even be the case that Black Lagoon R reality, I visited, is part of the Babylon Five reality Mal just visited. With the two of us separately visiting the same reality, at two different points in that reality's timeline, and location.”
Mal stated, “That is an interesting possibility.”
Chang responded, “I know.”
Arcee asked, “So, you visited those realities?”
Chang stated, “Yes. I visited those realities, soon after River, Kaylee, and I finish built, and successfully testing out our reality devices.”
Annie inquired, “So, you did not visit those realities while you were running your Tower?”
Chang answered, “No. At that time, I did not want to risk another Chang, from another reality, trying to replace me, and take everything I had works so hard to build, away from me. But, after the fall of the Tower, and the gender change, and eventual gender bending ability. Along with River's telepathy. There was very little chance that any of my counterparts could try to replace me. And there was no reason in doing so. Since, I did not have any real material to have stolen from me.”
“I even had my reality device set to be password protected, with the numbers pad on it. So, there was very little risk for myself, in going to those realities.”
“And I let River know where I was going. If I did not come back in a reasonable amount of time. She could cover looking for me.”
River commented, “True. And I let him go, because I believed he needed a break from me.”
Chang went onto say, “And I appreciate that, River. And so, I visited them just to confirm those realities existed. I only only stayed for a few minutes in most them. But, I did spent some time in the Black Lagoon Boys and Girls omake reality. I even spent some time with that female Chang. And I showed her both my genders. And we had a great time that day.”
Mal flatly questioned, “You didn't sleep with your counterpart?”
Chang grinned, as he said, “Like you haven't considered doing that yourself. Though, we did use protection.”
Mal turned to River, as he asked, “And you are okay with this, River?”
River calmly commented, “Chang and I have an understanding. We just let the other know we are going to do it, with someone else, beforehand. That way, it might turn into a threesome, instead of a twosome.”
Chang continued smiling, as he said, “And we have had some interesting threesomes come about that way.”
Mal flatly said, “I don't want to know.” He then turned to face the large wallscreen in front of him.
The other four people in the room laughed, for a few seconds, over what was said.
As the adults calmed down, Arcee casually asked, “So, what was your counterpart like, Chang?”
Chang answered, “Much like myself. And that male version of Balalaika still called us, babe.”
Arcee let out a light laugh. She then commented, “Some things are a constant in the multiverse.”
Chang shrugged, as he replied, “Yes. And it could have been far worse for us.”
Annie stated, “Still, concerning that reality. I am surprised that instead of a straight gender flip, like the rest of the cast, that Revy was a male to female transsexual in that reality? And not just a man. That Revy looks close to our Revy, with a few obvious differences. I do not understand why the creator of that series went that way for the humor of that omake? Though, it was a good twist for the ending.”
Chang casually joked, “Well, Roanapur is in Thailand.”
Annie then got the joke, as she giggled for a few seconds.
Mal overheard their comments, as he said, “I don't get the joke.”
River casually commented, “Mal, you don't want to know.”
Annie turned around, to face Mal, and she lipped the words, in english, “Sex workers.”
It took Mal a few seconds to realize what Annie mention. When Mal did, he hesitantly replied, “Oh... Do I really want to know how you know that?”
Annie smirked, as she lipped the word, “No.” She then turned back around to face the front of the theater.
Chang commented, “Still, Lee's predicament does remind me of some of the teachings, of ancient chinese philosopher, Zhuang. One of the two principle philosophers, whose teachers were the foundation of Dao. Specifically, his teachings of transformation, in the forms of questions being. Is the butterfly dreaming it is a man? Or, is the man dreaming he is a butterfly? Or both?”
River strongly stated, in an even tone of voice, “Lee knows of that philosopher. When I was in disguised as Sam, I heard him mention, Zhuang, by name, while the two of us were are the hotel.”
Chang grinned, as he said, “I am not surprise. That man does live to do his research. Using what he knows about us, against us, is the only reason he is still free. And for Lee, in his reality, other realities, fiction, and otherwise, Rock was the only person he found with repeated experiences that Lee could personally relate to.”
“It all makes sense now.”
“Still, by writing the stories, he opened a door, that was already cracked for him, even wider. And the door swung both ways. He is like a mad writer, put into a mad scientist situation. Where his experiment got out of his control, and literally took on a life of its own. It is even possible that someone may have cracked this door open for him, a long time ago. And he just finally was able to push the door all the way open.”
“All of this warrants checking and researching, at a level even I am not conformable with.”
Annie stated, “Yes. There are some things that are best to be left alone.” Annie then groaned, in mild annoyance with herself, as she realized, in thought, 'I am starting to sound like Yoda. And except for my mother and Obiwan. Yoda was one of the closest people I had to a responsible parental figure... By the force, it is true. One does grow up to act like their parents.'
Annie then saw River giggle a little, as her thoughts. She thought, in a slowly deflated emotional stated, 'Yea, River. I admit that it is a little funny.'
From the corner of his right eye, Chang saw River giggled. But, when he saw River noticed him. River just shrugged, and Chang realized the shrug was a response to his and Annie's comments.
Chang did not both to think about his lover's response, because she would read his mind. So instead, Chang responded, “You are right, Annie. Still, back to the matter at hand.”
“From the records we have. Of even the small security room itself, of the factory. Before Lee even began his foot chase in the factory, he convinced that guard to give him that key card, to go hide, and to call the police. Lee even turned on all the lights. In the factory, to allow him to see his way around. And he disable the security system in a way that stalled, Benny, from using the video cameras around the factory.”
“Not bad. And it is clear that Lee planned his second factory escape plan, before he implemented his first factory escape plan.”
“Or maybe, Lee planned to use the police in a couple of different ways. He is definitely intelligent enough to do that. Depending on the situation. Such as he could use the police to confront Revy and the others, if they continued to chase him. With the second plan, having the police rescue him, like what happened. Or, in a different way. Such as him reaching the police by car, or by an underground tunnel.”
River commented, “That is very possible. Lee likes to keep his options open. He would not bring new players into the game, unless he could use them in multiple ways.”
Annie asked, “So, Lee considers all this one big game, to him?”
River said, “Yes.”
Annie thought, through her telepathic connection to River, 'If Lee considers this all a game, then he has lost some of my respect.'
River mentally responded, 'Don't be that way. Think about it. How else can Lee view all of this, without completely cracking up. A game has rules. And Lee just played to the rules he thought would keep him alive. And that is how he managing to stay relatively sane, in this insane, and extremely dangerous, situation, which he finds himself in.'
Annie conceded, in thought, through their mental connection, 'You are right. I will reconsider my thoughts on Lee considering this all a game. Because, Lee clearly realizes the seriousness of the situation he in.'
River mentally replied, 'Exactly.'
Chang stated, “River is correct. Lee told me to my face that he considers all of this one large poker game.”
Mal commented, “Then, this is one hell of a poker game. With the other players are pointing guns and knives at him.”
Arcee said, in a casual tone of voice, “I don't know. I have played more serious games.”
Mal turned to Arcee, as he groaned, while he said, “I don't want to know.”
Chang thought, 'We need to keep this conversation moving forward.' He commented, “Be that as it may. One of the reasons Lee convinced me not to turn him in was that he guessed correctly, when he told me I wanted to see the climax to his poker game. And he was right. But, I think his escape from this reality was only the first climax he is planning.”
River said, “You would likely be correct.”
Chang nodded once. He then stated, “Yes. And this means that Lee just considers this a continuation of his poker game. Lee has clearly mastered the ability to think several steps ahead of nearly everyone else. Though, Lee is making some serious mistakes. Such as wrongly accusing Balalaika of lacking an imagination. And pissing off Revy. Both of those insults are going to come back and bite him someday.”
River commented, “Well, I believe Lee did that to upset them to the point of affecting their aim.”
Chang conceded, “Possibly so, but those were still an unwise moves.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'And I need to look up the series, Breaking Bad, sometime. So, I can watch it, and find out who this Walter White is. To break bad, means to become a criminal. And it seems that Lee identifies with the character, Walter White, from that series. And I have a feeling this is not a good thing. Still, I need to keep this conversation moving on.'
Chang stated, “Moving on. I will be open, and admit that I find this next video terrifying, because Lee knows exactly who and what is after him.”
Chang then selected another video. The video was the interrogation room in the police station.
(_)
On the theater screen, the new video in the large middle section of the screen showed, the police station on Mars, inside interrogation room, as Detective Maxwell inquired, “Are you saying that an unstopped killing machine is about to attack building?”
Lee corrected him, in a sober tone of voice, “Actually, most like a bionic badass of an unstoppable killing machine, and her nearly equally badass adult student. And unlike Arnold, these bitches are not going to be nice enough to first stop and ask politely. They are not going to go, I'll be back. They are going to come in guns blazing.”
“Take for example, the lead woman that is coming here. The one with the purple hair. Yes, purple. And from what I can figure, that is her natural hair. The other woman's nature hair color. The student's hair color. Is green.”
“Anyway, the lead one once got into a fight with another woman, for four straight hours, right after she engaged in a massive, literal running battle, across a city, beforehand. Where she was chasing after the other woman, and her friends. And this was not a catfight in any way, shape, or form. This was a four hour long, knock down, drag out, bare knuckled brawl. With these two women being unnaturally strong for their size, with inside levels of endurance, while being able to take several hits from the other woman, and keep going.”
“This is the type of fight that would have likely send Rocky Balboa to a hospital after the first hour. And it went on for four straight hours.”
“And these women do not quit. Their mental and physical endurance borders on the fanatically insane. Before that fistfight, the other woman and this woman in question had just previously finished a gunfight, between the city spanning fight, and the four hour brawl.”
“Also, most people would say the fight ended in a draw, because both of them knocked the other down at the same time, and they stayed down. But, I say the woman coming for me, very soon, won that fight. Because in the end, she was still conscious, while the other woman was unconscious.”
“And this woman later topped herself when it came to being a badass. And she is likely one of the top badasses in existence itself.”
“Your Minbari Rangers wished they had her fortitude and toughness.”
“You ever heard of the term, beating a man to a pulp? She literally did that with her gloved hands, once. She killed that man, by pounding him in the face until everything above his lower jaw was a bloody stain on the floor. I am not joking here. There nothing left of his head.”
“That is not even close to the worst things she has ever done before.”
“She even one time decimated a small army, whom were equipped with late twentieth century firearms, while she was only using a flintlock, and a pair of muskets. Though, at the time, she with using SABOT rounds, along with being literally insane, due to lack of sleep, and being strung out on ritalin. Trust me. I was forced to take that shit as a child. That stuff will mess you up.”
“Still, that was before she became a cyborg, and she was given a physical enhancement serum that increased the abilities of the normal parts of her body.”
“And while the others after me are not as badass as her. They are either as equally badass as a ranger, or more badass than a ranger.”
Lee went onto say, in a completely serious, pleading tone of voice, “So officers, you have got to listen to me. I am being deadly serious here. You have to respect what these women, and men, are capable of. If you do not, they are going to kill you in horrible ways.”
The detectives just looked at Lee for a few seconds. They then started laughing at him.
Lee pleaded, “Please, don't tempt fate like that. It is a very bad idea... Still, after tonight, should you survived, you will remember these horrors, as just, the maids, for the rest of your lives.”
“Though, at the very least, you need to put this station on alert right now. They prefer to dress as maids. Their clothing is black and white, with white aprons. You cannot miss them. That is why they are nicknamed the maids. Also, they carry enough firepower in their clothing to start a small war. So, don't try to ask them to be searched, they will just pull their weapons, starting killing you all.”
“So, I am begging you. Please, let me go. All I need is a working car, with a full tank of fuel, recharged battery, whatever. Along with remote access to your station's speaker systems. With those two things, I can get get them to follow me, and get them away from all of you, that are in this building.”
By then, the two detectives had stopped laughing. Barton looked over at Lee, as he grinned wickedly. He disagreed, “I think not. I think what we have here is a crazy that caused a telepath to have a freak out. Not the first time I have seen that happen, in person. Instead, we will put you in lock up, until we can call the local asylum on come take you away.”
Lee's jaw dropped, as his eyes widened.
(_)
Inside the theater, Chang paused the video. He said, “Those two detectives are too dumb to live. And from Lee's expression, I would guess he realizes that. The only thing a person cannot account for is someone in a position of authority showing unexpected incompetence, and stupidity. And stupidity at that level means those two are not going to live very long.”
Mal pointed out, “Actually, from one of the logged police transmissions we got from the data crystals. An hour after the maids left the police station. One of the on the scene police radio broadcasts of the massacre, by a police officer, reported that those two men were among those killed by the a purple haired assailant. Whom, I am guessing, was Roberta.”
Chang responded, “My point exactly. Lee told them, outright, how dangerous the two maids were, and they ignore him. I will give Lee credit, he tried to save the folks in that station. They just won't listen. He even tried to stall Roberta. To give him time to get out. And to spare those men. I don't think there was anything else Lee could have done to stop that massacre. His plan was simple, and it should have worked. Get a telepath to deep scan his mind to confirm he had to leave for their own safety. He just did not count on the stupidity of law enforcement. As a former cop, I can tell you that stupidity can reach insane levels, at times, in such a profession.”
Arcee inquired, “What about the psychic? He clearly knows what is in Lee's mind. And he knows about us. What do you want done about him?”
Chang stated, “Nothing. The psychic was clearly deeply disturbed by what he saw in Lee's mind. And who could blame him. He is going to likely use that short term memory erasing drug, which he mentioned earlier in the recording. Soon after he left the room. So, he will forget everything he learned from Lee's mind and the horrible events afterward. He likely heard several death screams during Roberta's rampage of that building.”
River commented, “That is very possible.”
Chang said, “And I admire Lee on this point. Right before his telepathic scan, Lee guessed correctly that these telepaths had such drugs on hand. Lee did not want that man to suffer. And by the way the telepath immediately left, Lee likely allow him to read his mind, and Lee informed him to leave, go hide, and take one of those pills. By the way, did the telepath, Dresden, live through Roberta's rampage?
Mal answered, “Reports stated yes. But, as you guessed. He doesn't remember a thing.”
Chang replied, “Good. And this just further proves that Lee plans ahead. Another example is what we do not see, or hear. Lee knew he was being recorded in his room. He clearly waited until the maids cut the power to tell his lawyer, his plan. He needed a vehicle, and a place to run to. And he knew the lawyer would provide both.”
“And the way he obviously escaped was so simple. He was not under arrest, so when Roberta attacked, he and his lawyer just calming walked out the back door. If someone stopped them, Lee could give them the honest excuse that they were trying to get away from the person attacking the station. And his plan worked. Now, let us see what happens in the garage.”
Chang then used his laptop, and computer mouse, to select the garage video. And he then selected a part of the video he wanted to see.
He turned the audio off.
Chang turned to Arcee, as he requested, “Arcee, since the audio here is not very good, I would like you to read their lips.”
Arcee looked over at Chang, as she replied, “No problem.”
Chang then requested, “Also Arcee, please remind me that went Balalaika and B's stomachs start to more prominently display their pregnancies, for me to send them a congratulations card to them, with an offer for free dinner, and a free night in one of our nice honeymoon suites, for the two of them here, at my casino.”
Chang thought, 'That way. I can use their enlarged stomachs as an obvious indicator that they are pregnant. And I will not tip my hand that I had their conversation, in that restaurant, secretly recorded, without their permission.'
Arcee replied, “I will, sir.”
Chang said “I will also need you to deliver the card. I will even included hazard pay in doing so.”
Arcee smirked, as she found the situation humorous. She continued to smirk, as commented, in amused tone of voice, “I enjoy a challenge.”
Both of them then turned back to the theater screen.
The new video enlarged to the center of the theater screen, as the video showed the police garage.
The video showed the front sides of both Lee and McCormick crouching down, while they talked to each other.
Arcee lip read, in a calm tone of voice, “Lee says. Shit. She has the China Lake. The other asks what a China Lake is?”
Chang smirked, “I will give Lee credit. He does his homework.”
Mal asked, “What is a China Lake?”
Chang answered, “The China Lake is a forty by forty-six millimeter grenade launcher that can hold up to four rounds. Three in the tube. One in the chamber. It is a rare weapon that was made in the nation of the United States, for their military special forces. Fabiola is known to use same model grenade launcher. She used that weapon in the Yellowflag bar, in the Blood Trail arc of my reality.”
Mal then realized what Chang was talking about, as he replied, “Ah. Her hand cannon.”
Chang responded, “Yes. Her hand cannon. And when Lee heard the explosion, he didn't even have to look. He just knew what Fabiola had in her hands. That is what you call skill and know-how.”
Next, Chang fast forward to where Lee was speeding towards Fabiola while she pointed the China Lake at him, on the bottom floor of the police garage.
The video was angled to where it could see Fabiola back right side, with the car in coming from the background, while allow the viewers see Lee and Matthew though the front windshield of the white car.
Chang paused the video of Lee in the drivers seat. Lee was grinning wildly, while hold up four fingers with his left hand.”
Chang commented, “See. He is holding up four fingers to let her know that he knows she is bluffing. Not many people could pull that off. And the situation gets even better.”
Chang punched up the second car chase video, with no audio, as Lee threw his grenade at Roberta's sports car. He paused the video while the grenade as in midair.
Chang stated, “I would bet real money that Lee used his precognition to pull that off. There was also statements, from the radio recordings, by those present. That during the factory, on the roof, as Lee escaped Revy and others. While he ran, he was consciously dodging bullets. With him not even being hit once.”
River inquired, “So, you believe that Lee has reached Agent Smith level dangerous?” She mentally added, 'Lee might have.'
Chang looked over at River, as he answered, “Yes. He probably did something similar, when he fought Shenhua, earlier that night. And from Shenhua's accounts, by the radio records. Shenhua admitted that Lee almost beat her in a fight. With her armed with her long knives, and him unarmed.”
“As such, this means, that from practicing that poker trick, he has reached a point where he can consciously use his precognitive abilities. And that puts him at the same level of dangerousness as they rest of us. This only makes me even more interested in him.”
Chang thought, 'I already have a telepath, along with someone with empathic, telekinesis, and some precognitive abilities. I would love to add someone with pure precognitive abilities join my organization, as well. Especially, one who is polite, knowledgeable, very genre savvy, and has a well round, practical skill set.'
River turned to Chang, as she calmly commented, “Aren't you the greedy one.”
Chang turned to River. He smiled, as he mentally quipped, 'Ah River. You know that is one of my best personality traits.'
River let out a laugh, as she smiled.
Chang thought, 'But, it is also Lee's attitude that I like. Given what he has said, at that factory, of his personal life, and I feel there is even more to his past than that. Though, even through all that sea of shit, his idea of revenge against God is to live well. That takes willpower and stubbornness that I admire. No wonder he sometimes has a low opinion of how Revy turned out, when compared to her past. In his own way, he has been through just as much as she had. Still, Lee hinted that there was much more.”
“And that, you River, are keeping even bigger secrets about him from everyone. So, River, what secrets you are keeping from me?”
River commented, “Those are not my secrets to give.”
Chang thought, 'Okay.'
While Annie could not read Chang's thought. Her mental connection with River, she did sense what Chang and River were thinking. She turned to River, as she mentally replied, to River, 'That is a good answer, River.'
River turned to Annie, as she mentally replied, 'Thank you, Annie. And while I think Chang would understand, I doubt Mal would. And I am no sure about Arcee.'
Annie mentally stated, 'I agree with you, on all three points. I also suggest we find out what Chang is going to show us next.'
River telepathically said, 'Good idea.'
Annie mentally commented, 'Thanks. And Chang really does have a talent for narrating.'
River telepathically replied, “Yes. He does. It is one of his many talents.'
Chang turned to the theater screen, as he stated, “Now, let us continue.”
Everyone then turned back to the theater screen, as Chang fast forward the video, and restarted it, to where Roberta jumped on Lee car, with Lee having rolled down the windows of his car.
Next, Lee and Matthew had ducked inside the car, as Lee drove his car under the truck, cutting off the top of the roof of the car. This forced Roberta jumped over the truck, to reach her prey.
Then, as Roberta was about to land on the back seat of the car, Lee used the collapsed staff as a spring weapons to eject Roberta from his car.
Chang paused the video of the moment when Roberta was being thrown out of the white car, while letting go of her pistols, along with the staff being shown springing out of the car as well.
Chang commented, “I don't think this is so much a case of Lee using his precognition, as him just having really good timing on his part. By rolling down his windows first, it showed that he was planning to do this a few seconds ahead of when he did it. And it shows how much of a quick thinker he is, and how he can use the tools on hand to fight back against even a super-human badass like Roberta.”
Chang restarted the video, he noticed that after the other man leaned up, he asked Lee something. Lee answered, and he then started laughing.
Chang paused the video, as he inquired, “Arcee, what did they just say to each other?”
Arcee answered, “First, the other man asked why Lee was snickering. Lee talked about the weapons and ammo drums that Roberta used. Going into detail on a few points. Then, the other man asked who Lee really is. Lee answered, I'm a user. Though, you can call me, Frankenstein... And you're my navigator... Lee then started laughing.”
Chang thought over Lee's comment. He then stated, “The, user, comment is likely a Tron movie reference. The Frankenstein, and the navigator, comments have double meanings. Frankenstein can mean the fact that Lee was the one ultimately responsible for into a cyborg, super-soldier... Well, more than she already was... And Frankenstein can mean the main crazy, killer race car driver, from the film, Death Race 2000. Which is partly justified, considering the guy with Lee was clearly leading him to Garibaldi. With Edgars HQ being the finish line. Like the navigator's job in Death Race 2000. As such, all these references Lee made, fitting his situation.”
“Also, Lee's knowledge of our weapons, and abilities is truly impressive.”
Annie agreed, “I believe that it is a trait that should be admired.”
Chang grinned, as he replied, “I agree.”
Arcee stated, “Also, with one exception, it should be noted that Lee does not use any of our names, when he talks to the police, or his lawyer. While he does call Roberta and Fabiola, by their nicknames, as the maids, and the Bloodhound. And he does go into detail of their actions, he always keeps the names, and events vague. The exception being when he was on the phone with Roberta, where he used her real name when addressing her.”
Chang stated, “That is a good point. With that one exception being excused by the fact that Lee was trying to be polite, when talking to one of the scariest women in the multiverse. A woman whom is pissed off at him, and wants his hide. Still, Lee is smart. He won't use any of our names in front of others. Unless absolutely necessary. For two very important reasons. It might upset us. And it would only create more questions for himself, by those around him.”
Arcee agreed, “That was my line of thinking, as well.”
Chang said, “Yes.”
River then realized, as she questioned, “But, what about what was said at the factory? Could the security systems there have recording everyone's names being used. Especially, during that conversation Lee had with everyone.”
Chang commented, “I wouldn't worry about that. Everyone was talking then. And that will not immediately be a part of the police records. As it would be for the recordings of the police station. Also, Mal and the others, found that the audio for the security recording that the factory, was turned off. Likely to save on computer file size on their memory storage. We pulled the audio for that for those recording, from the radios. So, we are fine, on that matter.”
River replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'That is a relief.'
Chang said, “Now, let's move things along.”
Chang then moved the video forward to where Lee was on the cellphone, while Roberta was gaining on him and his lawyer, in their car.
Lee said something in the cellphone. He then folded it closed, and tossed it back to the passenger, whom caught it.
Chang paused the video.
Chang request, “What is Lee saying?”
Arcee stated, “He repeated the phrase, ah hell, three times.”
Chang stated, “If I remember my Babylon Five correctly. Ah hell, means continuous fire in, Minbari. He was likely talking to those at the Edgars Industries complex that dealt with the base's security. He then turned off the cellphone as a way to heighten the tension with the people on the other end of the line. To push them into doing want he wants. This is was a work of genius.”
River smiled, as she thought, 'I agree.'
Chang restarted the video.
Suddenly, Lee's car blew a tire and started spinning forward.
As thee car spinning in their car, they could see Lee using his left hand to give the bird to Roberta, as he said something.
Arcee giggled a little, as she calmly said, “Lee is yelling. Roberta. You're fucked.”
Chang, River, Annie, and Mal, could not help but giggle a little, with Arcee, concerning Lee's comment.
A few seconds later, as they calmed down, they watched as Roberta immediately opened the driver's side door, and jump out of the semi. A few seconds later, gunfire destroyed the large truck. The picture panned to the gun turrets on the wall that Lee and the other guy soon passed through the gate of.
The gate closed, and the video ended.
Chang commented, “I think everyone here agrees that it takes style, skill, and timing, to say, you're fucked, to Roberta, mean it, and live to tell about it. I am amending my order. I want Lee back alive and in one piece. Preferably, completely unharmed.”
Mal looked over at Chang, as he flatly asked, “Why?”
Chang turned around, to his right side, to face Mal, as he strongly stated, “Because, with only his wits, and a little help, Lee beat all of you at the same time. Then, he tricked the police into rescuing him. After that, he conned his way out of the police station, which ended with him simply walking out the back door. While getting a car and help in finding a place to run to, where we will not follow. And finally, he defeated both of the maids, and escaped everyone after him. With Lee ending up in a literal fortress, whom none of you will immediately follow Lee into. Due to all of you knowing better. Because that fortress likely has loads of unknown traps, its own army, and a very savvy, badass leader.”
Chang punctuated each word, with increasing strength, as he went onto said, “And. Lee. Did. This. All. In. One. NIGHT!”
Chang continued, with eagerness evident in his tone of voice, “Lee has just become one of the most dangerous badasses in the multiverse, without even throwing a punch. Lee has unknowingly achieved what I thought Rock might someday become. And given the change was so gradual, from hack writer to badass, over the course of decades. Remember the time loop. That Lee probably does not even realize how dangerous he has become.”
“If someone ever got their hands on Lee, and taught him how to stand and fight, he would make for either a powerful ally, or an extremely dangerous enemy, on par with the maids. I want him as an ally. I do not want him as an enemy.”
Mal pointed out, “But, he is dying of cancer.”
River turned to face Mal, as she stated, “The whole point of Lee going to the Babylon Five reality. From the Babylon Five Station to Mars. Was to disappear. It is very likely he already has a plan to cure himself of his cancer. I actually think I know what he has planned. Though, I would prefer to not state it until I am sure.”
Chang turned to River, as he said, “I don't need to know at the moment. And I am sure I will enjoy his solution, when I do eventually find out.”
River turned to Chang. She smiled, as she coyly commented, “Oh. I think you will.”
Mal asked, “Okay. Say we do catch him, alive, and mostly in one piece. How do you plan to keep him alive? He is dying of cancer.”
Chang looked over at Mal, as he commented, “Worst case scenario. We dump Lee into a vat, to cure Lee's cancer. And she will just have to learn to live with being a chick.” He turned to River, as he inquired, “River, do you think he will mind that?” He mentally added, 'I already talked to Lee about an offer like this. He was open to the idea. But, your support would be nice, to smooth the offer over for everyone else here.'
River looked at Chang, as she casually replied, “I think Lee would opened minded on such an offer.” She thought, 'Actually, she would welcome take a dip in one of those vats. And becoming a healthy, younger, woman. And that is a good idea, on your part Chang. To help me smooth things over with everyone here, on this issue.'
Chang said, “That is good to know.” He mentally added, 'Thank you, River.'
River smiled, in response to Chang's mental thanks.
Mal stated, “Even if you turned Lee into a woman. And you want Lee in one piece. Lee still deserves to suffer a measure of revenge for what he has done to all of us.”
Chang turned to Mal, as he sighed in disbelief. He responded, “I cannot believe you are still upset about the virus that gave us gender bending abilities with a sneeze.”
Mal admitted, “Changing into a woman grates on my male ego.”
Chang countered, “Well, among us, you are the only one with this ability, whom is bothers so greatly by it. And the tradeoffs are amazing. Besides being able to play both fields, we also are now virtually immortal. Due to aging very slowly in both our forms.”
“Also, soon after we learned of the stories and the writer, River here informed me that the girls loved what Lee did for them. Inara, Zoe, Kaylee, River, and even myself, had to deal with monthly periods. Be happy you don't have to deal with that either. Speaking from experience. I was stuck as a girl for a few years. Monthly periods are no fun.”
“I have even caught Jayne sometimes enjoying her female form. And not just in that way. Also, Kaylee and Simon, have more than once, come to River and I, for advise on love making.”
“But, I know what is at the heart of your problem with this ability. That one time, at that new year's party. You and Inara got drunk, while you were a man, and she was a woman. The next morning, you sobered up as you awoke in bed, nude, as a woman, beside Inara, as a man. And from the smell it did not take a genius to realize what you two did.”
Chang lips then curled into a wicked grin, as he continued, “But, it gets better. River looked into your mind. We know you remember all of what happened that night. And you enjoyed it greatly. Given Inara is a former companion, I admit, I am bit envious of your relationship with her. Still, you are presently too macho to admit that some times you like getting in touch with your feminine side.”
“This is also the reason why the only way you came to those Lagoon bikini parties was we had to drag you there. But, once you were at those parties. We could all tell that you were having a great time there.”
Mal deflated, as he looked away from Chang, and down towards his lap. He quietly replied, “Yes. I did.”
Chang dropped his grin, as he stated, “So, here is my offer. Would you like me to drag up, and inform everyone here, among your friends, in the entire casino, exactly how you like it as a woman, during sex? What gets you to scream like a banshee, when you are a woman. Because River told me that, as well? Or, will you be amendable to some compensation instead? And you will let the matter over Lee go?”
Mal looked up at Chang, as he became visibly uncomfortable. He remained silent for a few seconds, as he thought over Chang's veiled threat, and his offer. He then calmly stated, “I believe gold would go a long way to solving much of my hurt feelings.”
Chang said, “Good. We will talk about the amount, later.”
Mal pointed out, “Still, there are others we have to deal with. Such as the Knight Sabers. I do not know how they appeared there. And I don't know where they left, either. But, they are after Lee, as well. And there claim to vengeance is far greater than most of those currently after him.”
Chang stated, “We have a vast selection of resources to choose from, when it comes to those powersuited mercenaries. And I am sure they are still sore with me, as well. But, I am sure we can work something out with them.”
Mal responded, “Good luck with that. I am not going to let myself, nor my crew, get between you, Lee, and them. You can find someone else to negotiation with them.”
Chang casually said, “Do not worry. I have a few ideas.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'Given Natsuru, Akira, Ranma, Mikoto, Yurika, and Nodoka, know the Knight Sabers. And Natsuru having a history of employment with Lean and Daley. I may ask those six to help me deal with this matter. Or, if I am lucky, Rock, or Lotton, will work out a deal, that will lead the Knight Sabers to visit me, in a peacefully manner. To negotiate this situation, in a civil way.'
Mal commented, “Well, however you work it out with them, it is going to cost you some your wealth.
Chang said, “I know. But, to get them off my back, it would be worth it.”
Mal inquired, “I agree. Still, what about the maids? Given the personalities of those two, I have a feeling they would take your offer of gold as an insult.”
Chang agreed, “You are likely right.” He then smirked, as he continued, “Still, the key to convincing either of the maids to do anything has always been Garcia. I realized that after the events of the first time Roberta came to Roanapur, to save Garcia.”
“And this is the reason why, when Roberta returned to Roanapur, I immediately visited Garcia, when he and Fabiola first came to town. And when Fabiola brought the Lagoon members to us, I steered Rock into helping Garcia. This was very simple to do. Considering Rock and Garcia knew each other. When they first met, they seemed to have hit it off as friends. Even though, at the time, Rock was one of the hostage takers, and Garcia was the hostage.”
“And while Garcia may not like me. He still owes me over helping Roberta recover from her grievous injuries caused by the Grey Foxes, in the jungle, of the Golden Triangle.”
“I never called that marker in. Because someday, I knew I would need it. And Garcia knew who I was, when we made that deal to help Roberta. Roberta willing accepted my offer. With Fabiola going along with our deal. So, none of those three people can me, being me, against me.”
“As such, if Lee cannot solve his problems with the maids, on his own. Or, if we capture Lee. With the maids eventually confront us, we will bring Garcia here, with him coming here willingly, and unharmed. And then we will all talk. From there, we figure out the exact reasons why the maids are so dead set on getting Lee. And we will work out an arrangement with them that will placate their thirst for vengeance.”
River thought, 'I am tempted to tell Chang the reason the maids after after Lee. But, doing so would ruin the mood.'
Mal agreed, “That might work. Also, I won't worry about the Bebop crew, none of them really care about revenge against Lee. Except for Spike. And I have a feeling that Spike won't try something again, without your approval.”
Chang said, “I agree. Though, inform her if she is willing to let her issues with Lee go. I can offer her compensation, in gold, and other forms. Though, if the opportunity of a moderate type of revenge against Lee is offered. I may consider her and the others in the casino, that are interest in doing so, to take part in it. On top of what I am willing to give her. And this offer extends to you, as well.”
Mal responded, “Thank you. That sounds acceptable. I will inform Spike of this. And I think she will go for it. Considering that she already accepted a similar offer from Rock. Plus, unlike Rock, you are still allowing a measure or revenge, within reason.”
Chang said, “It is good policy to make sure the grievances of ones employees are settled.”
Chang thought, 'Some such matters need to be solved as soon as possible. And I have been meaning to do that for a while. But, I was waiting until this whole writer mess was settled, before approaching Spike with my offer of compensation for the trouble both I, and Lee, have caused her.'
'Though, now that it looks like I might end up having the writer here. I will adjust my plans accordingly.'
Mal stated, “I agree. And I can understand why Spike would be pissed. Due to being force to have a kid. Though, Julia is a nice kid.”
Chang inquired, “Yes. Julia is a wonderful child. And Lee did give Spike her lost eye back. But, that being said. While the other two are not after Lee's head. What are their feelings in general, on the matter?”
Mal answered, “Fairly positive. Faye likes having her youth restored. And we all know the events around Jet's gender change. Which was not Lee's fault. Though, she did get back her youth, and her original left arm and hand. And Jet is happy about that.”
Chang thought, 'I guess Jet finally let go of her past.'
Mal went onto say, “But, the most trouble you are going to have in protecting Lee, from those that know about him, and his stories, are still the Lagoon crew, and their friends.”
Chang scoffed, as he stated, “The Lagoon members are already good friends with Lee. They just don't realize it. You do not live around someone for twenty years without becoming friends of some type. If they were not friends, they would have kneecapped him when they had him captured at the factory. And I am sure that the others that were not there, at the hotel, during the time loop. Such as Dutch, Benny, Janet, Balalaika, and B. Will go along with what the rest of them will do with, Lee.”
“And from all of those after, Lee. I feel they will likely be the easiest to placate.”
Mal conceded, “I see your point. So, how do you plan for us to rescue Lee? Do you want us to go behind the Lagoon crew's backs, and get Lee, before they have a chance to mobilize, and capture Lee, themselves?
Chang answered, “No. I want you to be part of their crew, when they storm that fortress. That way, when they, or you, find Lee, you can rescue him. Be aware, the person in charge in that complex is a human man named, Michael Garibaldi. He is an older, bald, fair skin man, in good shape. He is also a genre savvy badass, whom is on par with any of us. And he believes in being prepared. I want you to impart this wisdom to the others, so you can all tread lightly, when you attempt to retrieve Lee. And to remind you. I want Lee to be brought here, unharmed.”
Mal asked, “Fine. What about those we meet in the building?”
Chang stated, “Make sure that you, and the others, let the people you run across, live. And do not harm them, unless it is in self-defense. If you have problems joining the group that will be storming the building. Tell Rock, I asked for this, with you offering your services to her, for me. She will go for it.”
Mel responded, “Rock might. To prevent blow back. Does this Garibaldi have access to reality traveling technology?”
Chang answered, “Not really. Outside of their hyperspace tech, they cannot cross realities. That is just crossing planes of their own reality. It is similar to the hyperspace gates in the Cowboy Bebop reality. Also, none of the current space fairing species, in that galaxy, have fully figured out how hyperspace tech works. Considering they all discovered it, or were given it by other species. Including, the humans. So, there is little risk of blow back from having living witnesses.”
“Though, there is one exception that I know of. An ancient race, known as the Vorlons, did create a gate into another reality, and they almost allowed a more powerful species than them, into their reality. A species that believed in eradicating all life that was not their own. But, the Vorlons did stop them, and they close the gate, in time. At great cost to their own species. And that gate was later destroyed.”
Mal said, “A lesson in the dangers of reality travel.”
Chang agreed, “Exactly.”
Mal inquired, “So, is there anything else you have to say about Garibaldi?”
Chang answered, “Yes. If you run across Michael Garibaldi. And you are able to talk to him in private, give him an invitation to meet me. And impart to him that my forces are only there to keep the girls from going too far. And should Garibaldi wife and daughter, Lisa and Mary Garibaldi, be there. Do not. I repeat. Do not let Garibaldi's wife, nor daughter, come to harm. Arcee will give you details on the Garibaldi family. Such as, what they looked like. After this meeting is over.”
Arcee said, “I would be more than happy to do so.”
Mal turned to Arcee. He then looked back at Chang, as he questioned, “Okay. I will do as you ask. But, is Garibaldi really that dangerous?”
Chang flatly stated, “Yes. He is. Keep in mind. On top of what I have already told you. You need to understand that Garibaldi is one of the few people in that reality with the means, intelligence, and savviness to reach us, and become a threat to us. If we give him reason to do so. That is something I want to avoid at all cost.”
Mal replied, “I understand. And I will make sure everyone else in our group understands that, as well.”
Mal thought, 'I will give Daiyu, or I mean, Chang, credit. He may sometimes yank our chains. And we occasionally yank his. Still, he has never asked me, nor none of my crew, to do anything that violates our personal codes and ethics. I believe that makes him an even more dangerous person. Though, he pays well, and the perks he provides at our jobs here are good for all of us.'
Chang responded, “Good. Now Mal, I want you, and the others, to get some rest here, at the casino. Tomorrow morning, you can return to the Black Sheep hotel, on B Five Mars, fully rested. And use the time dilation trick to where the others there think you were only gone for a few minutes. Also, rely my orders to the others.”
Mal replied, “No problem.”
Chang thought, 'While, you all showed up right after lunch. Instead of in the morning. It has been a pleasant morning at that casino. Also, things happen. So, I hold it against any of you.'
'Also, I think. To allow Jet and Spike to get some rest. And for shits and giggles. I might offer Annie to fill for the pit boss, on the gaming floor, for a few hours, tonight. Darth Vader as a pit boss for a casino. I would pay money to see that. Actually, I am more than willing to pay money to see that.'
River giggled a little, as she commented, “That might be tempting to see.”
Mal overheard River's comment, as he asked, “What would be tempting to see?”
Before River could answered, Chang inquired, “Annie would you like to play pit boss at the gaming floor, for a few hours, tonight? Standard fee I usually pay you for an assignment.” He thought, with amusement, 'It would be worth the money, just to see her do it. And get a video copy of the event.'
Annie pointed out, “Actually, I have day tonight, that started in a few hours.”
Chang responded, “Okay. I will just get someone else to fill in there. But, I would still like to see you play pit boss for a few hours, on the gaming floor, some time in the next few days.”
Annie thought over Chang's offer, for a few seconds. She then said, “Okay. We will talk about it.”
Chang pointed out, “Fine. Though, you will have to wear a dress suit, and dress shoes.”
Annie thought over Chang's comment, for a few more seconds. She then commented, “I will still do it. And I do have a that black dress suit and dresses, you had fitted for me, when you first hired me.”
Chang stated, “Good. Now, back to the matter at hand. Mal, before you leave, make sure you and Zoe pick up those special weapons I got for the both of you. You are likely going to need them.”
Mal complimented, “That is a good idea.” He mentally added, 'The only reason Chang didn't get one of those weapons for Jayne were that they are both hard to come by, and the energy packs for the are even harder to get. Besides, Jayne prefers projectile weaponry, and explosives. It seems that if it doesn't boom in some big way, he doesn't like it.'
'Speaking of which, Jayne should be finished repairing Vera by now. So, I don't have to worry about his griping, anymore, about that.'
Chang said, “Also, considering I had you both be checked out on those weapons, I am not that worry about you using them. Just don't lose them.”
Mal stated, “That will not be a problem.”
Chang responded, “I know it will not. Also, good luck. And if you don't mind, I need to speak to the others in private.”
Mal replied, “Sure.” He thought, 'There is no point in arguing about this. I will get with Arcee in a little while. On the details of the Garibaldi family.' He then got up from his chair, walked to the door to the wall, left side of the room, near the screen.
There were other doors placed around the room. But, that was the closest to him.
Mal then opened the door, walked through it, and closed the door behind him.
After Mal left the room, Arcee turned to Chang, as she asked, “What about Lee's lawyer, Matthew McCormick? He likely has a vague idea of what is going on.”
Chang turned to face Arcee, as he said, “I know I want him. I want you and Annie to jump realities and pick him up. At your earliest convenience.” He turned to Annie, as he continued, “If that is okay with you.”
Annie turned to Chang, as she commented, “Sure. By the time this is over, he might even welcome to come here. Given, he will be the only person left around, tied to most of the attacks that centers around Lee, on Mars Dome One. And I am sure he will realized that the local will be looking for a scapegoat to pin all this on.”
Chang stated, “Exactly.” He then looked in front of him, as he continued, “And do not harm him. He may have freaked out at the end, but as a new guy to the scene, he held it together better than Rock, nor I, ever did when we first got throw into such intense situations. And I cannot think of a more intense situation than facing the maids.”
Arcee said, “No problem.” Arcee turned Annie, as she inquired, “I know you have your big date tonight. And such nights for you tend to be very long, and very pleasurable, for both you and your partner. So, are you up for doing this tomorrow?”
Annie answered, “I should be. But, just in case, let's plan to make it an early afternoon mission.”
Arcee replied, “Works for me.”
River then telepathically said to Annie, 'Good luck with your date, tonight. And tomorrow's mission.'
As Annie talked to Arcee, she mentally replied, 'Thanks. So, were you happy with what Chang said?'
River telepathically answered, 'Yes. In a few hours, him and I are going to have a lot of fun upstairs.'
Annie mentally giggled, as she thought, 'We will compare notes out one separate sexual adventures for tonight, sometime, tomorrow afternoon. After I get back.'
River mentally teased, 'It is a date.'
Both women then telepathically giggled to each other for a few seconds.
Annie then went back to discussing with Arcee on their plans for their mission tomorrow. From how to find the lawyer, to how they are going to capture him.
Meanwhile, Chang leaned back in his cushioned chair. He thought, 'Though, I don't feel like talking about it, out loud. That conversation that Revy and Rock's group had at the inn, jogged my memory, a little. The Mexican and the Lawyer... Lord, I have not thought about that night in Caracas, in years. And I thank you, River, for not asking me about that.”
River quietly said, “No problem. You will tell when you are ready.”
Chang mentally replied, 'Good. I will see you in the little while.'
River said, “Have fun.”
Chang then used his laptop computer to turn off the theater screen, turned on the theater lights. Next, he logged off of his laptop, closed his laptop, pushed away his tray, and got up from his seat. After which, he walked out of the same left side door, that Mal exited from.
After Chang exited the room. With him shutting the door behind him. He was inside one of the main large casino hallways, on the ground floor.
Chang then turned too to his right, and started walking down the hallway. There was no one else around. Even Mal had left for somewhere else in the casino, as Chang mentally reminisced, 'As much as I care for River, I don't care to go into deep thought around her.'
'Now, where have I heard that, armed bastards, quote from?... Ah, it will come to me eventually. Still, I barely remember that night. I do vaguely remember seeing Revy pop her head up from the bar, and looking at me. She probably did get the idea to becoming two-hands, from seeing me using both my pistols at once. That makes sense, considering the next time we met, in Roanapur, she was able to convince me to teach her how to use two pistols at once.'
'Also, I do remember that night changed the course of several of our lives. To think that two guys, from another reality. This reality we are in. From our personal futures, had a hand in all of this. And they likely knew what they are getting into at the time. Since the two of them are from our futures, I am sure I will find out who they are, in time. And I look forward to having a chat with them. I might even offer them both a job. A person has to be knowingly crazy and skilled to pull off stunts like that.'
Chang smirked, as he continued his thoughts, 'And two of them, together, only doubles the fun.'
Chang then dropped his smirk, as he calmly reflected, in thought, 'It seems there is more overlapping with our past selves than any of us realize. Such as, what happened when I was a rookie cop in Hong Kong. I still remember that event very clearly.'
'I remember meeting Shenhua, Sawyer, Revy, and Rock, as a woman. I remember them kidnapping me. Putting me through a wild chase. My freaking out. Revy giving me that badass speech. Rock, whom early introduced herself, introducing me to Revy, Sawyer, and Shenhua. While stating that she was lovers with Revy. Them letting me go, at the end of the chase. And finally, them setting me on the course to become the badass I am today.'
'And from that day, I learned a lot. But, much of it I had to wait on, until I could start finding the pieces, to help put together, and understand what happened on that crazy day.'
'The first pieces came when meeting Shenhua, in the Triad, soon after I changed sides, from cop to crook, in Hong Kong. The two of us hit it off well as friends. But, nothing more.'
'Meeting Shenhua was one of the first points that I began to suspect that my life was starting to take a turn for the strange and adventurous. Not that I was going to complain. That was one of the reasons I became a crook.'
'And as the adventures began to happen. With both Shenhua, and I. One after another. I also began to suspect that I was in a fictional reality. The situations were both so dangerous, and in some cases, so damn funny, someone had a hand in their creations. And they were not just random events.
'As I climbed the ranks of the Triad we both belonged too, I eventually rose to the point that I was trusted with the control of our organization's holdings in Roanapur. When that happened, I made sure Shenhua came with me to Roanapur.'
'A week after we got to Roanapur, I started to go to those town those meetings, with the heads of the mafia families. Those were interesting meets. And from them, I learned a few things my superiors did not tell me about my predecessor. Whom previously control our holdings in Roanapur.'
'While I knew my predecessor retied, due to old age. What I was not told was that he was one of the first mafia heads to come to Roanapur, during the early seventies. And that he also set up the first modern smuggling routes for that city. He was sixty years old, when he came here.' And he only came here, as a favor to the head of the Triad I belong to. But, he could still kick ass.'
'Though, he prefered diplomacy, over violence. And he was one of the ones that had set up these meetings, when other mafias started showing up. Most of the other mafia head, at the time, were just like him. They could still kick ass, but due to their age, they were ready to be put out to pasture, by their organizations. Yet, for one reason or another, they came to Roanapur.'
'As others came to the city, my predecessor realized there was plenty of heroin coming out Golden Triangle for all of the families. And that a mafia war in Roanapur would not benefit the mafias in question. And such warfare would attract unwanted attention from both local and foreign governments.'
'For the most part, the other mafia heads agreed with him. And they became wealthy, as well. Unfortunately, the mafia heads were eventually replaced, one way, or another. And their replacements were less patient. But, my predecessor was still able to make the situation work.'
'And the other families heads like him, because they had good dealings with them. Due to that, the others gave me a chance. I did not now disappoint. I remained civil, but when one of the families tried to make a move on my organization, I taught them that doing so was a mistake.'
'And even though I was trying not to do so, because I found absolute peace to be boring, this was when I was ironically started to be known as the peacemaker in Roanapur.'
'Less than a year after arriving in Roanapur, and spending much of my take overseeing our operations in the city. With Shenhua, and my other subordinates help, I was well on my way to controlling the city. It was around this time I met Sawyer, as the cleaner. For the most part, Sawyer looked the same as she did then, in my past. From this, I quickly realized that I had met their future selves. And that it was a case of time travel.'
'While meeting Shenhua, and having our adventures caused me to suspected we were living in a fictional reality. When I met Sawyer, and recognized her. Combined with knowing Shenhua. This was when I first started to realized more firmly that I was in a fictional reality. Instead of these just being idol, baseless suspicions.'
'That being said. I made sure to keep in the good graces of both those women. Not just because they scared me. Even though, I employed both of them. Shenhua directly, as one of my chief assassins. And Sawyer as an independent, for body disposal. But, because I knew eventually, they would go back in time, and meet the younger self. And they would recognize my past self. And I did not want to give them any excuse for them to harm my past self.'
'I even met that junkie, Leigharch. And even those he partook the drugs too much. He was an artist behind the wheel. He was the perfect getaway driver. He was skilled, he had not fear of death, and if he was caught, he was so crazy, that no one would believe a word he says.'
'I hated the fact he finally overcooked his brain with his drug habit. But, by then, he and Shenhua were good friends. Though, I am not sure how good. And to keep Shenhua happy. And for such loyal service, from both of them. I did help Shenhua find a nice asylum in Thailand, to take care of Leigharch. Though, soon after the Lovelace members left Roanapur for a second time, he disappeared, as well... I wonder, he might be somewhere else in the multiverse, by now.'
'If so, I am sure I will see him again, someday.'
'Still, the years past. And few years later, after arriving in Roanapur, and around a month after that shootout in Caracas the Lagoon crew, in their PT Boat, the Lagoon, finally showed up Roanapur.
'And the Lagoon crew were not alone in the new members to the city, around that time.
'Now, that I think about it, Eda showed up around that time, as Yolanda's assistant, at the Ripoff Church, only days after I returned from Caracas. Yolanda even introduced me to Eda, a few days Eda first came to that island. And I am sure this is not consequence. But, I am going to leave the matter alone. Because, even after everything, I am still on friendly terms with Yolanda.'
'And I am probably one of the few people that realize how dangerous Yolanda is. I did some digging into her past. And I uncovered some things about her. In her youth, she was as dangerous as the Bloodhound. And while time and age slowed her down a bit physically, she only became more craftier. While in her youth, she could take down a small army alone. In her advanced years she learned how to get others to do the job for her, while appearing completely detached from the incidents in question.'
'And Yolanda has been in Roanapur far longer than me.'
'I remember, a month after Shenhua, and I, first came to Roanapur. Just a few days after meeting Yolanda, and getting acquainted with her. One of the other heads of the local mafias tried to extort and steal from the Ripoff Church. They personally threatened Yolanda.'
'The next morning, all the members of that mafia family, were found day, in their headquarters, in Roanapur. With all of them having suffered Colombian neckties.'
'And I know the Colombians did not do it, because I was meeting them the night before. And my alibi, along with the alibis of my group, were the only thing that kept the other mafia families from attacking the Colombians.'
'Abrego owed me big for that alibi. And I used that alibi, and the favor from that alibi, on occasion, to keep in him in line.'
'Also, there was no evidence found of who did it. The Colombians would not be that neat. Still, there was nothing of the incident that could be tied to Yolanda, nor the Ripoff Church.'
'It was that morning that I learned not to cross her. And I did everything in my power to make her my friend. Or, at least an ally.'
'I also realized that morning, that even in old age, Yolanda could still play the game, like the master she is. The Black Lagoon series only hinted at how dangerous she could be. I have seen her, on more than one occasion, use a single bullet, to make a car explode. She is really good at that trick. And one time, I watched her collapse an entire building, by emptying the magazine from her Golden Desert Eagle.'
'And now with her youth and lost eye restored. Along with the super-soldier serum giving her peak physical condition, combined her wisdom, experience, and skills, she could beat me at every level, if she wanted to. And we both know it.'
'I am just happy she liked her current life. And she does not feel like taking over. Because if she did. Even with my resources, I am not sure I could stop her.'
'And because Yolanda came to Roanapur before me. I do not know the details surrounding how and when Yolanda first came to Roanapur. And the reasons behind the Ripoff Church, nor how she started that business. But, I do know she was the one that started the Ripoff Church.'
'Though, I have a feeling that, even given her advanced age, at the time, she was not one of those that were put out to pasture. She likely came to Roanapur of her own free will, because she saw opportunities here, at a time when others did not. Not only through the drug trade, but also sales weapons to those of us criminals, smugglers, mercenaries, pirates, that were based in, and around, Roanapur.'
'Yolanda also did try to her best to stay out of the politics of Roanapur. She instead preferred to just sell her weapons to us, and help us smuggle our drugs through the area, for a small percentage of the profits from our sales.'
'And with her lifetime's worth various government connections Yolanda had build up, she likely had no problems getting the arms shipments, and drugs, she needed, to stay in business. While making a tidy profit, for herself, on the side.'
'I sometimes wonder, if Eda remembered Yolanda of herself, in her youth. And if Yolanda was not clandestinely groomed Eda, as her student and successor. Even if Eda did not even realize it. That would not surprise me one bit.'
'To that end, Yolanda is the only person in know of, that can do this game we play with more style and skill, than I. She just doesn't want to. She prefers now, to just relax and enjoy life. And I am very, very happy about that fact.'
'Still, a few weeks before The Lagoon crew came to Roanapur, Balalaika, and her Hotel Moscow showed up, beforehand. I do regret killing Balalaika and Hotel Moscow's Russian predecessors, in Roanapur, on the cargo hauler, Maria Zeleska. But, I had to. Considering they sent a hit out to personally kill me.'
'I knew the moment I heard Balalaika and Hotel Moscow came to town, they were trouble. People like this always are. Less than twenty-four hours, after showing up, they were already making their presence known. They were strong-arming a number of local businesses. They also killed a number of our lower ranking subordinates. And anyone that try to tail them.'
'And I do not know what they did to Chief Watsup, that day, but it scared him to the point that he ordered his police to leave them alone.'
'After a few day of this, the heads of the families, including Abrego, Chin, Verrocchio, and myself, collectively put our foot down, and we demanded that Balalaika come to our meetings.'
'Instead, she attempted to have us all assassinated. But, she did not take into account, we realized this was a possibility.'
'The building we met, I had designed and built for this situation. The building we met in appeared to be just a small coffee shop. Instead, it was a front, for those times when we had to invite a new mafia head to the party.'
'Here we were. The heads of the mafia, sitting around the table, having coffee, in full view of the street, through the windows. At the proper time Balalaika was suppose to come. We expected Balalaika to show up any minute.'
'Then, two unmarked cars drive up, and stop in front of the coffee shop.'
'It Hotel Moscow. They rolled down the windows facing up, and fired their PM sixty-three RAK sub-machine guns, which used nine by eighteen millimeter Makarov ammunition.'
'After the attack, I did some researched and I found this was a Polish a special forces weapon. Hotel Moscow was probably use those weapons as a form of cover for their actions.'
'Balalaika clearly was trying to make this appear to be a hit by a rival group that was not hers.'
'I believe later on Hotel Moscow gave one of those weapons to Lagoon Company, as part of a payment for a job. And that was one of the weapons Revy used to destroy Luak's ships in the Black Lagoon series.'
'Still, even if Balalaika had Hotel Moscow use their AK seventy-fours, with their five point forty-five by thirty-nine ammunition, it would have done them no good.'
'The walls and windows were fortified against such attacks. Under the veneer of the walls, the walls had steel plates. Each plate was rated to handle up to a fifty caliber. We placed lined the inside of the outer walls of the shop, with three layers of these plates'
'These were the same types of armor plating as the type that Bao used on his bar counter, at the Yellowflag. Actually, we sold him our scraps from this little venture, to make his armored bar counter. Though, we did give Bao a good deal on our offer. And he took our deal. And he paid us the full amount, up front.'
'Even at that point, a number of the subordinates of the various mafias, including Sawyer and Sawyer, like to go to the Yellowflag for a drink, on occasional.'
'So, keeping that man alive would only bring more harmony to my friendships with Shenhua and Sawyer.'
'Though, at the time, I arranged for neither of them to meet each other. And I kept them separate, for the most part. Because, I was not sure how they would react to each other. They might try to kill each other. They might become friends. They might even band together, to try to take me down.'
'And I admired both of them too much to want to see anything bad happen to them.'
'And with Sawyer where they full body medical scrubs, at work helped. So, when I eventually started sending Shenhua to drop bodies off for the Cleaner to dispose of, Shenhua did not recognize Sawyer. This was confirmed, years later, when I had the chance to review both the Black Lagoon anime and manga.'
'I am so happy, when they finally got together, they began friends, with Lotton helping to keep their friendship grounds and civil. Fighting may not be Lotton's forte, but Lotton does know how to play peacemaker when he, or now, she has too.'
'Now, back to the back to our first attempted meeting with Balalaika, and the ambush she sent as a response to our invitation.'
'Concerning the building we met, along with our armored walls, the windows were made of two layers of ballistic glass. Just over twelve centimeters thick.'
'So, the attackers watched as their bullets get caught in the ballistic glass, and not make it into the cafe shop.'
'Then, the russians had the audacity of not driving off., but instead they got out of their cars, with their ski masks covering their faces. While dressed in fatigues. As they approached the door.'
'When they approached the front door, they found the door was near solid steel, with wooden veneer. And with the door having three deadbolts, there were locked, at three different points of the door. The top, middle, and bottom.'
'Also, any flanking teams, trying to come in to the shop, from the back. They quickly found that the back doors, along with all the windows, walls, floors, and ceiling, of the shop, were equally armored.'
'And the Hotel Moscow members stood, looking at us, through the windows, while they were trying to figure out what to do next.'
'I just looked back at them, and smiled. Verrocchio raised an eyebrow at the absurdity of the situation. While Abrego and Chin just laughed.'
'At that moment, my men, along with the men of a few of the other mafia families,
popped up from behind the bar counter, behind us, with their weapons pointed at the attacker.'
'This showed the Hotel Moscow members that even if they got inside, they would only wind up dead.'
'A few seconds later, they realized they were not going to win this fight, and the attackers got back to their cars, and left.'
'We knew it was Hotel Moscow who did this. But, the way we countered their attack gave us all a good laugh.'
'And I think we were the only ones to ever beat Hotel Moscow, in a battle, without firing a shot. Though, we hurt them where it counts. Their pride. Their egos. We emasculated them. And I do not want to know how pissed off we made them. But, I am sure that most of them were upset. Especially, Balalaika.'
'Still, it was then, I decided it was time to take a more proactive approach in dealing with Balalaika. I would be the one to ambush her. But, I already realized this type of attack had to wait a few weeks, for me to set up.'
'Though, after that embarrassing event, Balalaika back off on us, because she was not sure how we would counter her next. And I used my time wisely, to lay my trap.'
'The night, about fifteen minutes before the Lagoon crew showed up, Balalaika and Hotel Moscow were at the docks. They were there under the false impression they were going to meet their contact from the Golden Triangle, to start work on creating their heroin smuggling routes.'
'My men and I then sprang our trap, in that moonlit night. Shenhua was there. I heard she and Boris had one hell of a fight between them, where they were ultimately forced to back off, to help their comrades. And while both sides lost men, in all honesty, it ended in a draw.'
'While the anime did not even show our fight. And the manga only showed a few vague pictures. The personal duel between Balalaika and I was epic.'
And this battle was one of the few times that I saw Balalaika dual wield against me. And she was good. I think she did so, as a way to mock me over my own dual wielding.'
'At the end of our battle, she was so good at dual wielding, she used her right pistol, to shoot the semi-automatic pistol from my left hand, while I used the pistol in my right hand, to hit her in her lower right side of her abdomen.'
'If I had been using a forty-fives, instead of my twenty-twos, that would have likely been eventually a fatal wound... But, oh well. Hindsight is twenty-twenty. And all that... Still, if she has not been using target ammo for her nine-millimeter pistols, the shots she hit me with, would have killed me, before I could get medical attention. So, when it comes to fate, I consider that a wash.'
'Though, I will give Balalaika credit. She had the foresight to use drum magazines, for her semi-automatic pistols, while I had my standard ten round magazines for my semi-automatic pistols.'
'The battle between Balalaika and I both, to us to the end of the pier, were we shot each other a few times. With Balalaika going over the edge, into the bay, while I was barely able to stand. With Shenhua helping me, as some of my men provided us cover, while the rest, including myself, escape. And I was able to get to some doctors in time for me to survive. And fortunately, I did fully recover.'
'Unfortunately, so did Balalaika.'
'The Lagoon crew pulled into port, right after Balalaika and I had concluded our fight, on the docks of the city. They saw Balalaika go into the bay. they saved Balalaika's life. With Dutch and Benny knowing basic first aid. And Revy was a quick learner, on the spot.'
'This is where Balalaika got the nickname, sis, from Revy. Lagoon company got Balalaika treated and to a doctor as quickly as possible. But, by then, Balalaika had lost a lot of her blood, and she needed an immediate blood transfusion. Fortunately, Revy was a compatible blood donor. And in a rare show of charity, Revy donated her blood, willing to Balalaika, without given compensation. After that, Revy consider Balalaika, her blood sister. And that is where the nickname, sis, came from. Balalaika allowed Revy to call her that, because she found it amusing, and she was grateful towards Revy, for Revy's part in saving her life.'
'I am happy that Revy's insanity has nothing to do with her blood. Because, an insane Balalaika would scare even me.'
'Also, I did not hold it against Lagoon company, for saving Balalaika's life. I action found it to be a good sign about their character, and personalities. The first thing they do, when they come to town, is safe a life of a stranger. That might have been a first in Roanapur mafia history. And I realized they did not know who Balalaika was, at the time. And I found that type of action showed they were worth keeping around, and giving a chance for independent jobs.'
'Also, I know for a fact that Balalaika felt a similar way, towards the Lagoon crew, over the situation. That she felt she owed Dutch, and the rest of Lagoon company, for saving her life. If nothing else, Balalaika has a sense of honor. It was why our two organizations rarely came to blows after that first fight... That and the fact that neither of us were sure we could take the other, in a fight, without being killed.'
'Though, it was then, after Balalaika and I, were laid up from our wounds, that I realized Balalaika's own weakness.'
'If Balalaika does sense weakness. She will try to exploit that weakness as quickly as possible. Such as the ambush at the cafe shop. But, if she is taken by surprise, and loses, due inventiveness she could not take into account of, she will back off.'
'Balalaika's weakness is she does not like dealing with the unknown. And I have used that weakness against her, on occasion.'
'Anyway, one act of charity, in saving Balalaika life, bought the three Lagoon members more good will than they would have likely gotten, any other way, when coming to Roanapur.'
'I do not believe in coincidence. To that end, that incident was one of the events, in my life, that helped prove to me that we were all living in a fiction reality. With Roberta coming to Roanapur for the first time, cementing my beliefs, on the matter. And that the members of that PT boat were going to be main characters in the work of fiction were were in. Though, I just did not realize by how much. Though, I did realize, that do to this, they had great potential. Potential I could use.'
'Also, I realized that Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow would have their roles as well. Along with myself, and my organization.'
'As soon as I was healed, after I had made a truce with Balalaika. Given, we were not in the condition to fight. I arrange for the Lagoon crew to come meet me.'
'Also, I know that Balalaika had a similar meeting, once she healed. When Balalaika met the Lagoon crew, I am sure she realized their potential, as well.'
'When the three Lagoon members were brought to me. They came willingly, and politely. Though, Revy still had that mouth of hers. Though, given my interest in them, since I realized they were going to be part of whatever fictional series we were in. And I recognized Revy as one of those that had kidnapped me, years ago, in Hong Kong. I let Revy's statements towards my organization, and myself slide.'
'Though, I bet Dutch and Benny thought I did so, because Revy had a hot body. While that was not the case, I let them continue thinking that.'
'And as Revy's teacher, I fully earned Revy's respect, and she did not insult me, nor my organization, afterward.'
'I found Dutch had the laid-back personality, that made for a good captain. Whom would do jobs for both of us. But, he would avoid the politics of our uneasy situation.'
'Dutch told me that he considered himself, and his team, to be just a delivery service that took their jobs to the extreme. Got a mild chuckle from his comment about his job.'
'I admit that Benny didn't seem like much then. But, even at the time, I could sense there was intelligence behind his eyes.'
'And when Revy and I met, we both recognized each other. I remembered her future self, from my youth. And she recognized me from that bar, during that night in Caracas.'
'While Revy was uncouth, from my meeting of her, in my youth, I knew she had talent. But, I already realize that no one had yet to teach her. Next, she asked me to teach her how to fire with two pistols as once. Like I can do. It was then that I realized that I was destined to her teacher. And we were in a temporal loop.'
'And while Lee's stories, are part of the loop. His stories do not account for everything. Such as that night in Caracas. But, those are mysteries for another day.'
'Do have to admit, Revy can really smile when she wants to. Like when I told her I would teacher her how to dual wield to pistols at once.'
'So, during this time, I would hire Lagoon company to do a few jobs, and they did well with all of them. And Balalaika would hire them for jobs and they did well. And other third parties would hire for jobs and they did well. Thus, allowing them to build their reputation in Roanapur as skills smugglers. They did not become pirates, until after I fully trained Revy.'
'And when the Lagoon was not take jobs, I taught Revy how to use two guns at once. Including giving her some pointers shooting while running. But, first I taught her proper gun safety. How to safely remove jammed bullets from firearms.'
'How to take apart various firearms, clean them, and put back together said firearms. I even got her a nice firearm cleaning kit, to do this with.'
'And those lessons show in how she using firearms. Such as when she is not using her pistols, while holding them, she keeps her trigger fingers set against the trigger guards, and not the triggers, themselves.'
'Along with this, I instructed her on the proper physical exercises she would need to get the most out of her shooting style.'
'And she followed those exercises to the letter, almost every day, she could do them. With those exercises really helping Revy keep her figure.'
'Also, I found that Revy was naturally extremely agile. And this played will for the style of gunfighting I taught her.'
'I even helped Revy acquire those customized Beretta ninety-two FS Inox nine millimeter semi-automatic pistols she uses. Which used a double-action trigger system, that allowed the trigger to pulled back the hammer to fire the weapon. And the safety lever on the back of the slide allowed for a decocking function for the hammer. Along with plenty of ammo clips, and ammo for her weapons.'
'I had those pistols custom made for her. And the reason I picked the ninety-two FS was that that pistol model was a step up from the Beretta M nine she was using, when I met. And since she was already comfortable using the M nine, I just got a couple of custom pistol that were a step up from the M nine, but still used the same basic design as the M nine.'
'Since, when I met Revy, when she first came to Roanpaur, she was using a Beretta M nine, with some skill. So, I decided to get her a customize weapon, of a similar model, that used the same caliber of ammo. Actually, the ninety-two FS was just the next update to the M nine series of semi-automatic pistols. With the hammer pin being enlarged, to keep the slide from ejecting backwards, if the slide cracked on the end, as it hits the back, while it ejects a cartridge shell.'
'I also made sure her new weapons had extended barrels. So, she could attach a suppressor to each of them, for quiet assassinations.'
'I even offered to get her some suppressors for her pistols. But, Revy has always preferred to do things loud and boisterous. To this day, the woman just does not appreciate the value of being subtle and quiet.'
'And unless she had too, she also preferred to fight alone. With the exceptions being some of Eda's schemes. The greed from those two have gotten them in trouble over the years, while they were in Roanapur. With someone having to get them out of trouble. Either with Dutch pulling rank as captain of Lagoon company. Or, when Balalaika, Yolanda, or I, were there with those two. To show them how it really is done.'
'Though, I am happy that Revy eventually realized that sometimes she needed help. I believe she first, finally learned this, when Roberta returned to Roanapur, on the hunt for the Gray Foxes. She realized that Roberta was to much to handle alone. So, she hired Shenhua and Sawyer to come help her.'
'I am very proud of Revy, that she finally learned this lesson.'
'And in that mission, Lotton ended up coming, as well. And I am glad he did. His actions saved Shenhua and Sawyer's lives. I may be one of the first few people, in my reality, to realize that Lotton is not to be underestimated.'
'Though, I was not happy how Revy got herself, and Shenhua injured, at the end. But, that was Shenhua's fault for coming along with Revy, in the first place. And both of them did eventually make a full recovery.'
'Speaking of Shenhua, the reason I kept her and Revy in the dark from each other, since Revy came to Roanapur, was much like why I kept Shenhua and Sawyer away from each other.
But, unlike Shenhua and Sawyer. I found that Shenhua and Revy were two much alike. I knew that if they ever met, their personalities would clash. Which possibility could end in a fight where one, or both of them would be killed, or permanently cripple.'
'Along with Sawyer, both those women were too valuable to me for me to waste like that. So, I schedule Shenhua's jobs, and Revy's training, to where they would never meet, and my plan worked like a charm.
'Though, due to that whole middle-eastern mess in my reality, my hand was forced on the matter. And I had to arrange it so that on Basilan island, Revy would meet Shenhua. Because, I needed my best people working on that mission. And Shenhua and Revy were two of my top people. Even though, Revy was with Lagoon company.'
'And from what Leigharch told me afterward. After he sobered up. And from what I saw later in my series, my fears were partly confirmed. Their personalities did clash. But, I was happy that is clash turned into a friendly rivalry between the two of them.'
'Also, I am glad that Shenhua fully recovered from her wounds, from both that whole Greenback Jane mess, and the Bloodhound mess. She has had a couple of close calls over the years. But, those were the worst.'
'And after the Bloodhound mess, Revy was out of action for a few weeks, as well.'
'While I thought their friendship has soured after the who Greenback Jane incident. After the Bloodhound mess, I realized there was still the possibility of friendship between the two of them. Along with Sawyer and Lotton become friends with Revy. Because all three of them came to Revy's aid to face the Bloodhound.'
'And I knew that the three of them knew the Bloodhound's reputation, beforehand. I gave After my first meeting with Garcia ended. Later that night, I arranged for Shenhua a copy of everything I knew the Bloodhound. And I told her to share this information with Sawyer and Lotton. Because they all lived in Shenhua's appartment.'
'I knew there was a chance they would run into the Bloodhound. And I wanted to make sure they knew what they were facing. Personally, in the hopes they would run. Which didn't happen.'
'Still, I am happy they got out of that mess alive.'
'So, while they were paid by Garcia, to take the job. They still knowingly knew what they were walking into, beforehand.'
'Though, back to Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton's possible friendship with Revy.'
I knew it was possible for Shenhua and Sawyer to become friends with Revy. With Lotton ending up a friendly acquaintances of Revy, and by extension the rest of the Lagoon members. And I found this to be true.'
'Lotton even ended up occasionally going out for drinks with Dutch, Benny, and Rock, along with Akira, in his male form, for various guys nights out. And they occasionally still go out drinking together, to this day.'
'And on Shenhua, Revy, and Sawyer becoming good friends. I realized all they needed was a proper experience to solidify their friendship. Though, I was not crazy enough to arrange such an event. Which could have badly backfired on me.'
'And I am happy I did not arrange that event. And it was Lee that arrange the event for me. That scene shopping between Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Akira, in book one of Lee's stories did the job of solidifying their friendship better than anything I could come up with. And that was a funny read.'
'I am surprised that Lee later did that again. This time a male version, with past Bob, future Bob, and B, at the beginning of book three of his stories. But, Lee did a good job there, as well.'
'And unlike what some people think. I fully supported Shenhua when she decided to let Sawyer and Lotton move in with her, in her home.'
'Sawyer has always been a good freelance ally. And she could relate to Shenhua. And it is nice that Shenhua would have someone to talk too, on such matters. And as I hoped, they became good friends.'
'Also, I had no problems with Lotton being with those two, as well. While Lotton was a bit of a poser, he saved both their lives, and got them to a hospital. After Shenhua recovered, she asked me about him and Sawyer moving in with her. She also mentioned that she and Sawyer liked him. So, I said I didn't have any problem with them moving in with her.
'And all those things Lotton did for those two women earned him points with me. And Lotton even saved them again, against Roberta. That earned him even more points with me. When Shenhua told me what happened. And how Lotton saved her and Sawyer.'
'Anyone that is will to take one in the balls, from the Bloodhound no less, to save those two women, has earned my respect. But, I am glad that Lotton wore a steel cup. Though, Roberta still dented it. But, Lotton did recover a few weeks, later.'
'Also, I later learned that Lotton was the only person during the Jane chase that wore a bulletproof vest, on that job, and due to that, he was one of the few people to walk away from that battle under his own power.'
'It was clear that Lotton liked to be prepared.'
'And from what Shenhua later told me, and from watching the Robert's Blood Trail anime arc, and reading the manga, on how Lotton saved her and Sawyer's lives. And the fact Lotton survived both those battles in one piece, earned him several more points with me.'
'And considering all this, after Lotton showed me the dent Roberta's boot made in that steel athletic cup, I helped Lotton replace his steel athletic cup with a titanium athletic cup. Ouch. That kick also explained why Lotton wasn't able to was not able to walk straight for a week afterward.'
'And over time, I came to realize that Lotton was not the idiot he pretended to be. That there was brains in that head of his. Those were some of the reasons I signed off to letting Shenhua join the Raven Unit team he was forming, in exchange for a percentage of what they made.'
'And when Lotton finally dropped the mask of idiocy. Off screen, as it wore, at the end book one of Lee's stories. And he told me, in private, that he figured out my reality traveling research, along with the fact we had visitors from other realities. And he had videos of the event in question. I decided it was best to let him in my operation. And he did so well, that I eventually made him my second in command, for a while... That was a fun time for both of us... Though, I am not going to say that out loud, in case one of our victims overhears us.'
'Still, back to Revy. When I was training Revy, when I gave her those two ninety-two FS pistols, that I had custom made for her, she said she liked them. And since she considered herself a modern day pirate. In contrast to Dutch and Benny whom considered Lagoon company to be a delivery service. This was when Revy started suggestion to Dutch and Benny, they should branch out in to piracy. And from what I understand, neither of them were immediately opposed to the idea.'
'Revy even stated she wanted to call her new pistols, cutlasses. Like the sword cutlass that pirates used it use.'
'I went a step further, and suggested that she name her new pistols the, Praiyachat Sword Cutlass Specials.'
'Revy requested that I explain the name to her. And I had problem with doing so. Special, was for that they were custom made weapons. And Praiyachat, was a play on words for the name of the of the Chao Phraya river. With the Chao Phraya river being a major river in north Thailand, that went through Bangkok, the capital of Thailand, and emptied out into the Gulf of Thailand.'
'I also told her that the translation of Chao Phraya was, grand duke. And the river is also referred to as, the river of kings.'
'Though, I did not mentions to Revy, that since I considered myself king of Roanapur, I found it a fitting name for the pair of guns I helped my student acquired.'
'Revy still got a few good laughs out of my answer to her questions.'
'Revy then asked me why I named her weapons after a river. I told her that if she was going to play with the pirate theme, that she should go a step further. In that one of the strengths of a PT boat was that it was small, to the larger ships that it was designed to target. And that one of the tactics PT boats used was to hide in rivers, and lay in wait, to strike out at their large prey, at high speed, as they passed by, in a larger body of water.'
'And by using a PT boat, the Lagoon company were not just pirate of the sea, but river pirates, as well.'
'Revy got another good laugh out my comment. And when she finally calmed down she said she liked name of her pistols, which made me smile, in response. And she wanted to do a few more things to her pistols. What she told me she wanted to do, only make me smile even more.'
'We took the pistols back to the creator of it, to have some engravings made on Revy's weapons. First, silver Calico Jack, skull and crossbones, pirate symbols, inlaid in the middle of the white, pearl grips, of her pistols.'
'Revy also had both slides of her pistols engraved. On the left side of each of her slides, was engraved '9mm Sword Cutlass'.
'In the right side of the slides was engraved, on the left side, the model of the pistol. Mod 92F. As in modification. Then, a small Calico Jack symbol, in the middle of that side of the slide. And to the left of the Calico Jack symbol was the Thai inscription of the creator of the pistols.'
'I guess, like all artists, including sword makers. That gunsmith was so proud of his work, that he signed his name to Revy's weapons. With Revy and I both agreeing that it only made her weapons even cooler.'
'Once, I was sure that Revy was good another to use two pistols, at once, while moving, I then taught her how to use a rifle, grenade launcher. Along with other projectile weapons.'
'And after I was finished teaching her, I believe that Revy became one of the best sharpshooters I know of. And her skills with grenade launcher are impressive, as well.'
'While, in just basic long distance target shooting, Balalaika, and Roberta have her beat. It is not by much. But, when it comes to shooting moving targets at long distance, I think Revy has those two beat. She can use a rifle, while on a boat. Hitting someone, or something, on another boat. On the seas. With both boats bobbing in the water. While moving force. With a crosswind between both boats. And she hits her mark almost every time.'
'As her teacher, she made me very proud at the level of skill she showed in the use of the weapons I to wielded.'
'But, I did not just stop teaching her, there. As we finished her firearm training, I then helped her a bit with her hand to hand skills. But, she was clearly a brawler. And as long as I knew she could beat someone in a hand to hand fight, while she was able to take a punch, or two, herself, I was happy.'
'This was because I did not want to make her a master at hand to hand combat as well. Given her endurance at the time bordered on the fanatical. That four fight with Roberta proved that to be a fact. And with the super-soldier serum. She has gone beyond even previous physical limitations. If she became a master at hand to hand combat, she would be unstoppable.'
'And Revy is way to unpredictable to give that much power to.'
'So, I wanted her to not be as skilled as I am in hand to hand combat, in case she ever turned on me. Or, she went completely berserk. So if need be, I could still take her out. Quickly and as painlessly, as possible. Though, I am glad we were never put in that situation.'
'And when Revy has finished her training. With me confirming to Dutch, that was the case. The Lagoon members when on their first pirate run. A job I hired them for. And they accomplished their job with flying color.'
'After that, Lagoon company embraced their piracy. And they became known in the criminal underworld of Roanapur, as skilled pirates and smugglers.'
Though, they were always careful to not try to cross the families, when the took jobs. With Balalaika and I both being Dutch's confidants, when it came to background checks. Dutch had both our personal phone numbers. And when it came to such information, we both realized how valuable Lagoon company was as a third party in our game between each other. So, there were no problems for either of proving information to them, as long as doing did not conflict with our organizations, nor operations.'
'This information sharing, eventually lead to a few times that Balalaika and myself, shared information with each other, in private. Such as during the whole Vampire Twin mess. I am happy those two ended up being reincarnated as Rebecca and Yukio. They deserves a second chance. And I am happy that Lee gave them one. Along with Lee giving a few others a second chance, as well.'
'And even with her flaws, I found Revy, though a bit crude, to be a very good student. She was also nice to me, when I was teacher her, because she wanted to learn from me. And I found she soaked up knowledge and skills, of what she is interested in, very quickly. I will never say this to Revy's face. But, I agree with Lee. Revy is as intelligent as Rock. She is just not as knowledgeable, nor emotionally mature.'
'And while I did teach Revy. I never tried to come on, nor did a sleep with her.'
'At the time, though I am sexually attracted to women, I was not sexually attracted to crazy women. I guess I shared that trait with Lee.'
'Though, since getting involved with River, I amended my opinion, on the matter. But, still, I am wary of crazy women. Which is likely why I am still alive.'
'Not counting the kidnapping and chase, from future Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Rock. While in the Hong Kong Police force, I saw plenty of examples of crazy, beautiful women destroying the lives of men. Some of them were even my friends. And the whole situation left a sour taste in my mouth.
'And while I liked Revy as a student, and a friend. I did not want to be her lover.'
'I was also was there, when Revy decided to finally come out of her shell, for a few months. And sexually experiment some. And with her doing this in Roanapur, it allowed her to jump in the deep end of sexual discovery.'
'The less I think about those events, the saner I feel.'
'Everyone who knows about what Revy did during that time. From Dutch, Benny, Balalaika, Boris, Bao, Rowan, and myself. We all agreed never to speak of those events, ever again.'
'And after a few months of Revy discovering that side of herself, she decided to go back to being celibate. As far as I know. At least until she met Rock.'
'I didn't know all the details. And I still don't want to know all the details. But, I do know that whatever Revy was doing was starting to become self-destructive. And, at the time, Dutch hinted that he staged an intervention, for Revy, and it worked. If that is the case, I am surprised that Dutch and Benny are still breathing. But, I am happy they are. And that Revy listened to them.'
'When I finished training Revy, I was tempted to invite her into the Triad. But, I did not do so for three very important reasons.'
'First, was that she was psychologically damaged. Even I could tell that some trauma in her past left her almost permanently pissed off and angry. The Triad would not tolerate the disrespect she would eventually show her superiors. And one of us would kill her, or try to kill her. Creating a mess for all of us, that would be involved.'
'Since Revy already took jobs from me, through Lagoon Company. And she respected me. If I wanted her to do something, I could already hire her as an independent mercenary. Which I did, on occasion.'
'And Revy was nowhere near the first person, I used as an independent, because while they were very skilled at what they did. These types of people just do not fit well in my organization, as a regular member.'
'With Shenhua being a rare exception.'
'One such example was Sawyer. Anyone could tell, from the scars and the voice box she used to use, that Sawyer had a mess of history. Though, she had her physical problems repair. Still, she was always polite and professional to her customers. And she is one of the best body disposal experts I have ever met.'
'Though, from what I understand, Sawyer never ate meat from the swine processing plant she used as a front organization. I didn't either. Too much long pork in their products.'
'Second, Dutch, and his Lagoon crew, did their jobs very well. And I did not want to wreck such a skilled team.'
'And third, I was not sure if I could control both Shenhua and Revy at the same time. Without brainwashing technology, that I did not have at the time. With Revy working for Lagoon Company, Dutch was the one that kept Revy in line. And I was grateful towards Dutch, for that. And I was able to keep Shenhua in line, without to much difficulty.'
'With Revy trained, things were still wild, but events moved along.'
'With all the players I knew about, in Roanapur. And a few I didn't. I just had to wait for the last player I knew about to show up. Rock. Though, I would have liked a previous warning on the Bloodhound. But, that was an oversight on my part, when I forgot, during the bar fight in Caracas, when the cartel leader called Roberta, the Bloodhound.'
'An oversight that I missed, but Balalaika did not. I am happy that Balalaika was not able to use my mistake there, against me.'
'Still, with everything else set. All I had to do was wait for Rock to show up. In the meantime, I decided that I would play peacemaker, to kill time. And the fact that I realized that the fates would conspire against me, if I try take to take out Balalaika and Hotel Moscow. So, instead of vying to be the godfather of this city, I solidified by credibility as peacemaker of this city.'
'And with Balalaika as my foil, it was never boring, in our own little cold war between our two organizations.'
'That was when I began to realize that Balalaika's and my luck was nothing short, than screwy. Neither of our two groups were able to get the upper hand, until I got reality travel, and by then, I had no interest in killing any of them. When I could simply use them for my own means.'
'Though, at the time, I had not intention of tipping my hand to anyone, as to why I did was I did. Nor, did I ever share with anyone, what my true agenda was, until after I discovered reality travel. With Lotton being my first confident. And Lotton never betrayed my trust.'
'While we were still vying for power in Roanapur, the other family head did not mind this, because, except for Balalaika, the others were afraid of me. Even though they would not openly admit it. And they knew, that I knew, that they knew, they were afraid of me.'
'Though, I did not fully create peace in the city, because much like Balalaika, I realized that peace would be boring, and it would lead to laziness, and making mistakes. And we had so much fun keeping each other on our toes, and stay sharp.'
'Then, around two years after the Lagoon company showed up. That crew finally brought Rock into town. I found out the details of Rock being in town, a few days after they played chicken with that military helicopter, with their PT Boat, and they won.'
'At the time, I didn't fully believe that story. Until, I saw the Black Lagoon series. And I still think that stunt was insane. But, it was cool.'
'But, I was troubled that reports stated that Rock was a man.'
'And while the Black Lagoon series did not show it, the series did omit to the fact that I had met Rock, long before the whole Basilan incident. Though, anyone with a brain, who watched the beginning of the eleventh episode, Lock'n Load Revolution, could tell, that because of how casual Rock was towards me. And that I did not introduce myself to Rock, in that episode. That we had met before. And we knew each other.'
'This is because, I had hired Lagoon company, a week after Chin was finally killed by Balalaika. But, before the Nazi arc. During that time, I had hired Lagoon Company for a few minor jobs, as an excuse to meet with Rock.'
'On the day I met Rock for the first time, I had invited over Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Revy, to my headquarters. And when we met, I introduced myself to Rock.'
'Yet, when I met Rock, though I did not outwardly show it, I was throw for a loop. When it was confirmed with my own eyes, that Rock was a man.'
'But, the male Rock and the female Rock, looked to closely alike each other, that I knew there was a connection between the two of them. And that while my memory of that kidnapping and chase in Hong Kong had dimmed slightly, I could tell that the two Rocks looked liked brother and sister.'
'During our first meeting, when I looked at Rock, I briefly wondered, in thought, if Rock did not have a twin sister. But, I realized that would not be the case, because Dutch told me, at that first meeting, between us, that he gave Rock his nickname. So, Rock was not his real, given name. And Dutch is not the type of person to give two people the same nickname.'
'And I could not ask Rock that question, of did he have a twin sister, without having questions raised by Revy, Dutch, Benny, and Rock, himself, as to why I would ask such a question.'
'And that question would have created a bad first impression between Rock and myself. Which was something I wanted to avoid.'
'I later had my organization do a background check on Rock, and I found that he was not related to anyone that would looked like his female counterpart.'
'And, at the time, I believed the male Rock could not have been the female Rock, because the female Rock was much smaller in body mass, and she has a much smaller bone structures to her physical frame. Those are things that could not be changed with the medical technology of my world, at that time.'
'So, I decided that since I would not going to be able to get any answers to the mystery of the two Rocks, I would just privately table any questions I had for a later date. Because, I knew that my answers would come in the fullness of time.'
'And over time, I found that I came to admire Rock, as a person, and for his mind. I saw much potential in Rock. Much of which Rock has already realized. And to this day, I still see more potential that Rock has yet to tap into.'
'We all then had some more adventures. And after Roberta and Garcia left Roanapur, for a second time, with Fabiola, Akira showed up.'
'When Shenhua mentioned Akira. She did not go into detail about Akira. She only said she had found a promising gunfighter that she, Sawyer, Revy were teaching.'
'And Shenhua stated that Lotton's plan, for Raven Unit, now had merit. That was why, I allowed Lotton to have his little time. And they proof almost as useful as Lagoon Company.'
'I respected Shenhua's privacy, to trust her judgment, and her privacy. And I did not ask her question about Akira. I did not look into Akira's background. And I allowed Lotton's Raven Unit to move forward, in exchange for thirty percent of the profits. And I knew that Lotton would not try to cheat me on the matter.'
'Also, the thought of Shenhua, Revy, and Sawyer, teaching anyone, together, scared me a little. And I did not want to risk digging for information, into the situation, only to upset those three women.'
'And I am glad I trusted Shenhua on these matters. My decisions, at that time, came back to reward me, ten fold.'
'Still, I did not fully understand what was going on, until after the bad girl bikini contest, when, I first laid eyes on Akira, as a woman.'
'After seeing the hot, blond caucasian woman, on the open stage, at that contest, and learning that she was the Akira that Shenhua knew. I wondered about her, out loud. I said that I though Akira look familiar. I did not realize until later, that this Akira was the same Akira from the Gacha Gacha Secret manga.'
'Dutch was beside me, and he heard what I said In response, he warned me that Shenhua was keeping secrets about Akira, for the sake of myself.'
'That only piqued my interest about, Akira.'
'So, I put out some feelers, to find out more about Akira. And I learned that there was also a black hair japanese man, named, Akira, that was with Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, and Revy.'
'And ironically, a few weeks after the bikini contest ended, it was Eda that was the most help on this. She sold me information on Akira. That information being that Akira could change genders with a sneeze. Back a forth. From a black hair japanese man, to a caucasian blond bombshell of a woman, and back again to a black haired japanese man. And in selling me this information, which I did pay her for. Given, her information usually pans out. Eda's greed finally caught up with her, later on.'
'That was when I realized I need Eda's claim confirmed, with someone I personally trusted.'
'I finally decided to talk to the one person I could trust, that knew what was really going on, and whom would not lie to me.'
'I privately talked to Shenhua about Akira. While I did not say where I got the information from. Because having Shenhua and Sawyer kill Eda would ruin my professional relationship with Yolanda. Though, I did say that I heard that Akira could change genders with a sneeze. And I wanted Shenhua to confirm, or deny that claim.'
'Though, she had hidden a few things from me. Even with our problems in the past. To this date, Shenhua has not once lied to me, about anything. I respect her for that. And she confirmed that both Akiras were the same person. That Akira did change genders with a sneeze.'
'I remained silent to her claim. I did not really believe her, nor Eda's claims, at the time. I mean unless someone saw that, first hand. Who would believe such a claim? But, I also did not believe that she was lying to me, either. So, I sent her back home, for the day, as I thought about what she said.'
'A few days later, Shenhua and I both met the future versions of Annie and John. After they left my casino, I realized who they were. They were from fictional realities. And they clearly knew us. The way Annie fought Shenhua, showed that Annie had fought her before. Or, in this case, she fought Shenhua, in our future. Meaning, they were from our future.'
'Meeting them confirmed that that my home reality was a work of fiction. And that ours were about to become a lot more interesting. And I was correct on that assessment.'
'Also, this revelation allowed me to suddenly realize where I remembered seeing Akira from. This was when I realized who Akira was. And I realized that it was time to have a personal, private meeting with Akira.'
'Later that night, I had my subordinates bring Akira to meet me later that night. I had some fun with the natto joke, and showing Akira my fictional collection. This allowed me to show Akira that I knew who he was. Then, I got to business. And from our meeting, I had many of my immediate questions answered by Akira. Including, that I learned from Akira, that the title of what my reality fictional series was called, Black Lagoon. And that we were from the anime timeline.'
'And I knew this opened up new possibilities for me. All I had to do was figure how to travel beyond my reality, and into other realities. I knew it was possible. I had just met two reality travelers earlier that evening. And at the time, I was speaking a third one.'
'Though, I knew better than to try to have Akira tell me how he did it. I knew from my genre savviness, that fate would not allow me to take a shortcut, and that if I tried, it would backfire on me.'
'I knew the only way for me to achieve reality travel would be to do it the proper way, and figure it out on my own. Or, in my case, hire some people who could do that job for me. And make sure they were well paid for the job, and not betrayed...'
'Well, not at first. Until, I went off the deep end, on my power trip, and I had them put through the vat process. Turned into women, and brainwashed to be loyal to me. But, that is another story. And I have since regretted my actions, and I have tried to make amends to those I had employed. Including, a number of them that I rehired, when I opened this casino.'
'Though, before I did started research on reality travel. I needed to confirm what Shenhua had claimed about Akira was real. So, so during our meeting, I requested that Akira change genders in front of me. And Akira agreed to do so.'
'While Akira was still clothed, I watched as Akira sneezed in front of me, and changed from a man to a woman. She stayed a woman for around a minute, before sneezing again, and changed into back into a man.'
'I remained silent as Akira did all so. And I looked Akira, in her female form, up and down, as I could hardly believe what I was seeing.'
'And after Akira changed back into a guy, and I let him go.'
'It was after he left that I realized that both Rocks were likely one in the same. That Rock would have his gender bent, sometime in his future. At the time, I did not realize, when, and how. But, those questions were eventually answered, as well.'
'As were the questions about our series, and why the events that happened after our series, occurred. And these questions were answered when we learned about Lee and his stories.'
'And when I learned of the writer, and his series, I knew I would eventually meet him. I knew that I did not need to seek him out. That he would come to me. Because, that is how these things occur. I just had to be patient.'
'And Lee was eventually brought to me, by Rock and River, over that poker game with River, at the casino. And I did eventually figure out that Lee was the writer, and meeting Lee only piqued my interest in him.'
'My only regret, concerning Lee, was I could not help Lee, before he was forced to escape into the multiverse, to flee the maids.'
By then, Chang has found himself standing, to his left side, by the clear, plastic wall, that made up the front part of the large enclosure, where he had his female tiger kept. With the enclosure across from the rear elevator bay of the casino.
Chang turned, and looked at the tiger, in the distance, passed the clear plastic wall, and further into the very green, lush enclosure.
At the moment, Chang saw that the tiger had not yet noticed him. Though, his pet appeared to be healthy as ever, as it was playing with some large plastic toys that were provided for her.
As Chang continued to stare at the tiger. He grinned, as he thought, with slight anticipation, in his emotional state, 'But, now that I have the maestro of this insanity in my sights. And I will not lose him. If the multiverse is a concert theater. I intend to have the best maestro around, for my full orchestra.'
'Now, I just need to see if my subordinates are able to find and capture Lee, before the others get to him. Though, I am not worried. I have hired the best. And Lee arranged for my friends to spend decades at bounty hunters. And we long since learned to excel at that profession.'
The tiger then noticed Chang, as she stopped playing with her toy. She turned towards him, as she looked over at him. And for a brief moment, their eyes met. Then, the tiger looked away from Chang, in a submissive fashion.
Chang continued to look at the tiger, as he went on with his silent reflections, in thought, while feeling amusement, as he wondered, 'So, what did your tiger's eyes see in me, that made you turned away? When you looked in my eyes, and into my soul, what did you glimpse? Did you see the conquering man? The superior woman? The savvy badass? Or, perhaps all three?...'
Chang then turned around, and headed for the back elevator bay, across from the enclosure.
When Chang reached the elevator bay, he used his key on the panel lock to summon the express elevator. Soon, he made it to the penthouse. And from there, his apartment living room.
Chang then sat down on his couch, as he did some more thinking on his life, and the situation he, and his friends, had found themselves in.
(_)
Babylon Five Reality. Location, Mars, Mars Dome One, Edgars Industries Headquarters, Main Tower Building. Time, hours after the highway chase between Lee, Matthew, and Roberta, on William Edgars memorial highway.
The sounds of piano music awoke Lee from his exhaustion, and ill health, induced slumber.
Lee slowly opened his eyes, as he looked around. He realized his sunglasses were off of his face. He also saw that he was lying on his back, on a long couch that allow him to stretch his legs fully. With his left side set by the back of the couch, and his head on a pillow, in front of the armrest.
Lee found himself in a moderately small office break room, with the door to the room, that lead to a hallway, left open. The door was across the room front him. And the only light came though the windows, from the sun, on the windows on the wall, next to him.
Given the reddish-orange color and brightness of the sunlight, Lee thought, 'I guess is it just after dawn.'
Lee leaned up, and he saw that he still had his clothing on. His hearing allowed him to tell that the piano, music, or more precisely, two pianos played together from well beyond the door to a hallway. Lee thought, 'That is an odd musical melody. Yes, it is vaguely familiar. Still, I need to check if I have everything on me.'
Lee quickly checked his person. He checked his pockets and his right wrist, which had had his digital watch, along with his hologram device, strapped on to. Also, he check to make sure his ring necklace was still on him.
Lee found that he had his lighter, and a few other things in his pockets. His watch on his right wrist, which he looked at for the time. And his ring necklace under his shirts, against his chest.
But, Lee realized he was missing items, as he thought, 'I am missing my reality device, my hologram device, and my sunglasses. The last two I can live without. It is the reality device that I need to find, as soon as possible.'
'Also, I need to remember that I am in unfamiliar territory. I may not be in a security cell, nor a medical bed. Which I am happy about. But, that does not mean I am out of danger. So, I need to remain calm, and take this slowly.'
'Besides, I am still a little tired from that chase last night. But, this nap helped.'
'Fortunately, I still got my watch. So, I know what time it is. My watch says that it is ten till eight AM. And though, given Mars' daily rotation is twenty-four hours, thirty-nine minutes, and thirty-five seconds. That is only a few minutes difference, per hour. Now much, if spread out over the course of a single day.'
'But, either way, Rock and Revy's group are still likely asleep. If I am lucky. I likely have little time. Also, this is a better situation than I expected to be in when I woke up. Now, let's see where the noise is coming from?'
Lee got up from the couch. He then walked out of the room. As he entered the hallway, he left the door to the office break room open.
Lee found the music was coming from his left side. He turned and walked down the hallway to his left.
Lee then cautiously walked, as he he followed the music down the hallway.
While he walked the hallways, he heard a man's laughter over the music.
Lee also noticed that all the doors to the rooms in the hallway were closed.
Lee could barely make out the voices over the music and the laughter.
As Lee got closer to the music, he heard a man yell, “Scotch on the rocks. And I mean ice!”
Lee kept walking, as he mentally realized, 'Wait a minute... I know movie quote... I recognize that voice... It is the actor, Bob Hoskins, in one of his best, and funniest, roles, ever... I got to see this...'
Lee quicken his pace in following the music down the hallway. He turned a corner, and he soon came to an open door.
Lee stop just outside the threshold of the open doorway. The door swung inward, to Lee's left side.
When Lee looked passed the doorway, he saw a to a very nice office, with the human man, Michael Garibaldi, sitting behind his nice desk, in his office chair.
Across the room from Lee, Michael Garibaldi had his head turned to his right, as he watched something on the wallscreen monitor to his right, with speakers playing at a slightly louder volume than Lee was comfortable with. And Garibaldi continued laughing at what he was watching.
Lee noticed that Garibaldi was a number of years older than during his time at Babylon Five. And he was bald. Yet, the years had been very kind to him.
Garibaldi wore a brown business suit. Though, he did not have tie in on his suit, and the coat of his suit was buttoned up.
In front of the Garibaldi's desk were two chairs, with cushioning on the seats of the chairs.
The lighting was from soft while, fluorescent lights mounted in ten feet high ceiling in the room.
Behind the desk was a black window, that took up most of the wall, in a rectangular shape, at waist level, going up, all the way to the ceiling.
Lee thought, 'That is likely a privacy window, that can be turned from translucent to black, by running electrical current through it. They have the same type of technology in my reality.'
'Also, Garibaldi looks great for his age. And being bald seems to work for him. Also, he is still in great shape, and he looks like he could live another fifty years, at least. That is good for him. Now, what about me?'
'I need to know where exactly I am in this complex? And where my devices are? So, I can escape. If I am polite, I can probably get what I need from Garibaldi and get out of here, before Rock and the others show up. I am sure they know where I am.'
'That news helicopter followed up all the way to the gate. And I am sure the news story has been repeated a few times. To the point Rock and the other saw it, and put the pieces together. But, they are still trying to figure out how to get to me.'
'Though, now to the matter at hand. I have a seeking suspicious as to why Garibaldi laughing. And at what.'
Lee then turned to his left, to see the wallscreen monitor was playing the movie, Who Framed Roger Rabbit. The scene it was playing was early in the film, about a minute before the duck versus duck piano scene was going to conclude.
Seeing Garibaldi watch that film, in the situation that Lee was personally in, hit Lee like a mental ton of bricks.
Lee thought, with disbelief, 'I knew what movie was playing, before I walk into the room. But, being in this entire situation is too much for me. I have finally gone totally bonkers. I do not see how this situation could get any crazier. And with an imagination like mine, that is saying something. Here we have Michael Garibaldi watching the live action, cartoon hybrid movie, Who Framed Roger Rabbit. Given he is a Looney Tunes fan, this is completely in character for him to do.'
'For me, this scene is beyond surreal. I am in a fictional reality, being chased by people from other fictional realities, watching a fictional man, from this reality, viewing a fictional movie about another man dealing with fictional cartoon characters in his reality.'
'The mind screwing is strong with this one.'
'It is official. I have passed the other side of the Twilight Zone. I have gone way beyond the Outer Limits. I have arrived where madness reigns, and sanity does not exist. This is impossibly insane. In this situation, if I completely cracked up, no one would hold it against me... Hell, most of those around me would likely not even notice... Still, I am stronger than that. I will just have to push forward, and pray there is sanity on the other side of this mess. Or, at least a pleasant type of crazy I can live with.'
A few seconds later, Lee and Garibaldi watched the wallscreen as one of the ducks on screen literally blew the other duck's piano away with a cannon.
Lee thought, 'Now is good time to get his attention.' He then used his left hand to lightly knocked on the open door. He then dropped his left hand back to his side.
Garibaldi stopped laughing, as he looked up at Lee, with a smile still on his lips.
Garibaldi continued grinning, as he calmly said, “Well, if it is not the man of the hour. Good morning, Mister Gray.”
Lee calmly requested, “Good morning, Mister Garibaldi. Do you mind if I come in, and sit down.”
Garibaldi replied, “Sure.”
Just as Garibaldi reached for his remote on his desk, Lee said, as he walked toward the man's desk, “Don't stop the movie on my account.”
Instead of stopping the movie, Garibaldi picked up his remote, and just muted the sound. Though, he let it continue playing on the wallscreen. He then set his remote back on his desk.
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as he asked, “So, you have seen the movie, as well?”
Lee sat down in the office chair to his right, with the view from the chair allowing him to directly see Garibaldi, and from the corner of his left eye, the movie playing the screen.
Lee focused on Garibaldi, as he calmly answered, “Of course. It is a very funny movie. With a good plot, interesting characters, and wonderful action scenes. I remember going to see it in the theater, as a child, when the film first came out.”
Garibaldi casually inquired, “So, you are a time traveler?”
Lee coyly admitted, “Yes. In a roundabout way.”
Garibaldi asked, “And you know about me?”
Lee plainly stated, “Of course, I know about you. And so do those that are after me. That is why that that woman that was after me, just outside, did not chase me into this compound. Even she knows how dangerous you are. Because, you are not just the most powerful man on this planet. Even given your advanced years, you are likely the greatest badass on the planet.”
Garibaldi grinned, as he replied, “Well, thank you for the vote of confidence. Might I ask why you think I deserve it?”
Lee answered, “Well, I admire and respect you for a number of reasons. Such as, when most people become as powerful as you are, they try to hide their vices. On the other hand, you are complete open about your vices. And yours are wonderful vices to have. By the way, I loved my time at that convention last night. I wished I could have stayed longer.”
He mentally reflected, 'I think it is best that I do not mention to you that I had a brief run in with your daughter.'
Garibaldi said, “Thank you. And I will try to be as honest as I can. I expect you to do the same.”
Lee complimented, “That is a good policy to have. Normally, I try to do the same. But, the situation I have been in has prevented me from doing so. And since you helped me, I will be completely honest with you. First, this is not how I planned to meet with you, Mister Garibaldi.”
Garibaldi's curled into a mischievous grin, as he responded, “Oh, but it is such fun to have the introduction done this way. Having the visitor wake up, where he does not expect to be, is a classic.”
Lee thought, 'While I don't think he is senile. I see that old age has made him more mischievous. But, in a good natured sort of way. So, I should be fine, on that matter. Though, he set this meeting up from that start. With him planning for me to wake up, and follow the sounds to his office. That is why the volume was slightly high than normal. Not bad. And at least he still has his sense of humor. I can work with him.'
Lee conceded, “That is true.”
Garibaldi inquired, “So, how should I address you? I doubt that Ello Gray is your real name. Matthew mentioned it was an alias. But, he was in too much of a hurry to give me any details.”
Lee casually answered, “Lee, is fine, Mister Garibaldi. By the way, how is Mister McCormick?”
Garibaldi continued smiling, as he commented, “You made quite the impression on him. I have never seen a man want to get off planet so quickly. And I known quite a few whom have felt that way. He said. And I quote. Either give me vacation time right now, or I immediately resign. But, either way, I am getting off of this red rock, right now.”
Lee lightly chuckled at Garibaldi's comment, for a few seconds.
As Lee calmed down, he questioned, “So, what did you do?”
Garibaldi answered, “Since I did not want to lose him, I gave him vacation time. Also, you saved his life, so that counts for something.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. I am glad he is okay, and he getting out of here. Also, when I woke up, I did expected to be either in a medical bed, with IV tubes hooked to me. Or, in a security cell.”
Garibaldi pointed out, “And why would I do that? The docs here say there is nothing they can do to save your life. Your cancer it too far advanced. You only have a month, or so, to live. And from what I can found, you did everything in your power to save the lives of those people at the police station. By the way, Mister Dresden survived, and he is going to be okay. But, he does not remember anything of what happened.”
Lee replied, “That is good to hear. I didn't want my problems to haunt him for the rest of his life.”
Garibaldi smile turned a bit more warm, as he responded, “I am glad you feel that way. And I have to say, your original escape plan from the police station was nothing sort of pure genius. I have never seen an escape attempt that started with a confession, by deep telepathic scan, as a way to get out of a police station. And it would have likely worked if those officers were not so dense.”
Lee inquired, “You have a recording of that conversation?”
Garibaldi grinned, as he answered, “Of course. Who do you think they signed the contract to Mars Gov, when they wanted to update their security system? Having the former security chief of Babylon Five, and the current CEO over one of the largest companies on the planet, oversee the job was just good PR for all of us. And I gave them a fair price, for the contract, at that. And I make sure that the job was done right the first time.'
Lee complimented, “Those are all good points. And that is how one should conduct business.”
Garibaldi replied, “Thank you. After I got finished with Matthew, I spent half an hour watching the security footage of you interrogation, the videos of the garage, and the outside cameras, as well. Which we will get to in a minute. But, back to your conversation with the police, and the cellphone call during that time.”
“You offered that woman on the phone everything, including your own head, to buy time, to get out of there. So, you could keep those in the building out of the line of fire.”
“You're, escape plan by confession, might have worked with me. Or, at the very least, I would have raised the alarm, for those at the station.”
Lee commented, in a halfhearted manner, “There is no accounting for stupidity.”
Garibaldi nodded, as he agreed, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Lee thought, 'I need to know where I am in this headquarters. And what he knows about my situation. Though, with this being the CEO's office, I doubt we are on the ground floor of a side building.'
Lee asked, “Two questions first. I guess this is your office. And we are high up on the main building, in the center of this headquarters?”
Garibaldi flatly answered, “Yes. You are safe for the moment.”
Lee countered, “After last night, I have come to realize that there is nowhere safe for me.”
Garibaldi said, in sympathetic tone of voice, “I know the feeling. I have had those moments, myself.”
Lee calmly inquired, “I have no doubt about that... Before we get to more questions. I need to know. Where are my devices?”
Garibaldi answered, “That remote thing is being studied in a lab near us. A few floors down. By a technician I trust. And the hologram device...”
Garibaldi held up his left wrist. He used his right hand to pulled down his left sleeve, to showed both his digital watch, and the hologram device beside each other, with his watch closer to his hand. After which, he lowered his left hand, as he used his right hand to pull his sleeve back down his arm.
Garibaldi continued, “Well, I am keeping this hologram device.”
Lee shrugged, as he casually said, “If having it helps convince you to help me, you can have it.”
Garibaldi smiled, as he replied, “Thanks. This is it like something from the original Total Recall movie. We have hologram devices here, but I have never seen one that functions like this.”
Lee commented, “That is because that device is from the original Total Recall reality.”
Garibaldi commented, “So, he was right.”
Lee requested, “Could you please back up to who you are talking about? And start from the beginning... Like, who is this, he, in question?”
Garibaldi said, “I might as well too you. You seem to appreciate the situation you are in.”
Lee complimented, “I know. And you are one of the few people on this planet that could appreciate the finer point of the situation I am in.”
Garibaldi chuckled, for a few seconds. He then said, “Thank you. And another person that would appreciate your situation would be the one that contacted me, last night.”
“One of my accountants, whom I personally know, last night, called me on my emergency line. He was using his vacation time to go to the sci-fi convention my company was sponsoring. He was the dealer you met. By the way, he want me to thank you for helping him get that big sell from those girls.”
Lee replied, “If you have the chance to see him again. Tell him, you're welcome, for me.”
Garibaldi responded, “I will. Anyway, he said, no joke, that the maids from the Black Lagoon reality were after you. Yes. I have seen a lot of old anime, and read a lot of old manga, as well. That is one of the better, classic series. Even though the series is a bit dated, it is petty good. Even the TV series is pretty good.”
“Yet, when I was talking to my friend, I realized he was serious. Because he has never been humorous with me. He has only been a professional. For as long as I have known him. To that end, he stated that he had personally met the maids two hours after you talked to him.”
Lee asked, with concern in his voice, “Is he alright?”
Garibaldi thought, 'Good. He is concerned about the welfare of others. Which confirms that his actions at the police station were likely genuine. That means he might be a decent person.'
Garibaldi answered, “Yes. They didn't do anything to him. And I honestly thought he had gone over the edge until reports started coming in, concerning that first car chase. I regret not looking at the convention security video feeds sooner. Still, I didn't get any video from the first chase. So, I have a question. Was it true that you actually were able to lose three hover-vehicles.”
Lee stated, “Actually, they are space-fighters. And I didn't lose them, so much as lucked out, that once they realized where I was going, they regrouped with the other people after me.”
Garibaldi thought, 'And I bet your plan on that chase was to count on that.' He responded, “Interesting. And that leads me to the battle at that industrial complex. You are aware that is my factory you lead that army into.”
Lee did not show it on the outside, but he thought, with worry, 'Ah oh. That also means he has the camera footage from the factory, as well. I best to fess up on the situation, so I don't dig myself into a deeper hole. Of course, I am in so deep that is might be quicker to get out by digging, than trying to climb out of the hole I have dug myself into.'
Lee quickly said, “Okay. I probably did fifty credits worth of damage to a computer mouse and keyboard. Another five hundred credits to repair a garbage chute at the roof. About four hundred in pipe repairs. And with another thousand in minor patch work, and door replacements in the building. So, round up to two thousand credits in all. Not counting the electricity bill.” Lee continued, in as slightly worried tone of voice, “I hope you are not going to bill me for all use of electicity. Because, I don't have the money for all that. I can come up with the rest, in likely a week. If left alone. But, that one, you are on your own.”
Garibaldi was quiet for a few seconds, as he thought with, amusement, 'Not many people keep a running tally of the damages they do. It does show he has a sense of responsibility.'
Garibaldi then grinned, as he responded, “Don't worry about it. Given the people that seem to be after you, I am surprised you kept the damages down to being so minor.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Garibaldi said, “You're welcome. Still, neither I, nor my security officers, and technicians, can make heads or tails out of what happened, given, after your rescue, those hunting you literally disappeared before the police arrived on the scene.”
Lee stated, “This is because that is exactly they did.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Alien teleportation technology? I know there is some out there. In my lifetime, I have seen some examples of such technology. But, such technology is rare, expensive, very risky, and very dangerous to use. This includes both the use of such devices, and the politics surrounding such devices. Which why my company has nothing to with it.”
Lee stated, “No. This is not alien technology. But, good guess. Given your limited knowledge the situation.”
Garibaldi thought, with amusement, 'Which is quickly being solved.' He said, “Anyway, by the time you were rescued by the police, you had caught my full interest. And with you being at that police station, I saw an opportunity to bring you to me. I sent Matthew, with twelve rangers to come get you out of that police station and to escort you to see me. I am proud that Matthew succeeded. Still, I had no idea these maids were that tough.”
Lee commented, “No one usually does, until they meet them in person. Then, it is usually too late.”
Garibaldi continued his story, as he stated, “I guess that would be the case. I saw the video of their fight with the rangers, in the parking lot, across the street from the police station. With their gloved hands, they took down my rangers with ease. The rangers are lucky to be alive.”
Lee asked, “Well they recover?”
Garibaldi answered, “Physically, yes. There pride is another matter. And it was very clear those two women were on the warpath. Along with those at the factory. Given the massacre found in the aftermath of the attack at the police station. I do not need a video to confirm that purple haired woman cut through the police personal like a hot knife through butter, in an attempt to get to you. And the video from the garage. How did you know to buy time until for the police to arrive?”
Lee honestly admitted, “I didn't. I was working a different angle.”
Garibaldi asked, “And that would be?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell him.' He said, “I was going to distract her, to the point I drop my grenade. She runs one way for cover, we head the other way, for cover, while making a break for Matthew's car.”
Garibaldi responded, “Oh. That might have worked. Still, where did you get that grenade? And how did you get that grenade passed the security sensors at the police station?”
Lee thought, 'He clearly has not seen all the videos. He missed a few things. This is good for me.'
Lee stated, “I got the grenade off of one of those after me. The grenade is not of this reality. That is why it did not trip the sensors at the police station. And the telepath that scanned my mind, quickly realized I was going to need that grenade. That is why he did not say a word about it.”
Garibaldi conceded, “That makes sense. And you did need that grenade.”
Lee responded, “I know. And if Matthew did not have that Ranger staff on him. Along with his cellphone. With him leading us here. I would already been captured by them.”
Garibaldi thought, 'He is willing to give credit, where credit is due. Good.'
Garibaldi agreed, “Very true. And that is why. Along with to video showing maids that fit the general description of Roberta and Fabiola. I am going to give you the benefit of the doubt. By the way, that chase with the Bloodhound was one of the most insane things I have ever seen.”
Lee thought, 'It is nice you are giving me that benefit of the doubt. That makes you better than most people I have known in my life.' He said, “Yes. I guess it was. And I would please like a copy of that chase, to watch sometime.”
Garibaldi stated, “I may arrange that. But first, you are going to tell me how you know about the phrase, ah hell, means, continuous fire, in Minbari?”
Lee said, in a reassuring tone of voice, “Do not worry. I will tell you everything. And we will get to that.”
Garibaldi smiled, as he responded, “Good. Because Lee, I am starting to believe the maids from Black Lagoon are really here, inside the dome. And they are after you. Among others. And they seem stronger than ever.”
Lee commented, “That is because they are stronger. All of them are stronger than they were, before.”
Garibaldi stated, in tone of voice, far to calm for the situation at hand, “Well then... They would be the least of your worries, if you were not lucky enough that I pulled several strings to keep the police and press off your back... For now...”
Lee thought, 'That was a veiled threat. To let me know the power he currently has over me. Still...' He sincerely replied, “Thank you for doing so.”
Garibaldi calmly responded, “You're welcome. Now, can you sum up in one word, who, where, and how your problems started, in the first place?”
Lee was silent for a few seconds, while he in thought, as he looked at Garibaldi. He then looked over at the muted movie playing on the wallscreen monitor.
A second later, an idea instantly occurred to Lee, as he calmly turned back to face Garibaldi. Lee smirked, as he calmly said, “Yea... I actually can...” Lee then flatly deadpanned, “Toons.”
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 08: “The Siege Shuffle.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Babylon Five Reality. Date, January Twenty-Ninth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Location, planet Mars. City, Mars Dome One, capital of Mars. Edgars Industries Headquarters. Main tower building. On one of the higher floors. Inside the office of E.I. CEO Michael Garibaldi. Time, after sunrise, nine ten PM, local time.
Michael Garibaldi sat in his cushioned chair, behind his desk, as he talked to his guest. The mysterious, reality traveler, Lee.
Garibaldi was in his brown suit. Lee was in his black suit.
Lee was sitting in the chair in front of Garibaldi’s desk, to Garibaldi’s left, with the other chair beside Lee's chair, to Garibaldi’s right, being left empty.
Barring one restroom break. The two men had been talking to each other, for a while. And while Lee did not give all the details of the situation. He have Garibaldi the basics. Including, the names of the individuals that after after him.
During the conversation, Garibaldi used his remote to stop the movie, on the wallscreen monitor to his right, so he could pay for closer attention what Lee was telling him.
As Garibaldi set his remote back on his desk, the screen had defaulted to screensaver setting, showing the 'EI' logo of Edgars Industries.
This action did not go unnoticed by Lee. And Lee continued with his explanations, while carefully answering Garibaldi's questions. Though, Lee subtly avoided answering a few questions.
Lee was presently answering the most recent of Garibaldi questions, “Yes. I believe that Fabiola was using her forty by forty-six millimeter China Lake grenade launcher. And it packed a punch.”
Garibaldi inquired, “What about the weapons the others were using? While the videos were detailed. Due to lighting, angles, and distance from the cameras, I could not get a good look at most of the weapons those after you, were using.”
Lee said, “The best I can figure most of them are usual their who hardware, and equipment. Except for those from alternate futures, to my own time.”
Lee then check his watch, he thought, 'My watch said it is eight fifty-eight. Though, I know my watch is slow, when compared to Mars local time. Still, I have been speaking to Garibaldi for over an hour. And while I said I would answer his questions. I only did so to a degree. I left out why they are after me. Specifically, my stories. Though, I have told Garibaldi other things about my situation, in detail. But, time is starting to run short. The women, and their friends, will eventually get here. I need to get the reality device and get out of here.'
Garibaldi commented, “It is no surprise that some of them would be using older hardware.”
Lee pointed out, “But, that hardware is still deadly to this day. Some guns, that are a century old in design, are still effectively used on the battlefield, in my time.”
Garibaldi replied, “True.” He thought, 'And I think I have all the questions I need from Lee, for right now. While he is clearly being cagey about some matters. He is being straightforward with the questions I have concerning for the here and not. But, I do not want him to believe that I fully believe him explanations, just yet.'
Then, Garibaldi change of tone, in his voice caught Lee's attention, as the older gentleman stated, with slight disbelief in his tone of voice, “So, let me get this straight. You are being chased by badass fictional characters from other realities. You, yourself, are from other reality. A reality where I, and this reality, are from a fictional series known as Babylon Five. And watching that series is where you learned the, 'ah hell', Minbari phrase from?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Now, to ask some questions, dealing with myself, and those I care for.'
Garibaldi commented, “I will give you leeway on the fictional characters being here. The video, and audio, recordings back you up on that. But, I find it hard to believe this is a fictional reality. Can you prove your claim?”
Garibaldi mentally lamented, 'I have to ask this question, for my very sanity.'
Lee responded, “Yes. With a simple question. Did your wife let you keep your large Daffy Duck picture, of him screaming in frustration, above the headboard of your bed, like you had it in your quarters on B Five?”
Garibaldi thought, with a mix of concern, worry, and wonder, 'Oh boy. It is all true. Only a very, very close friend would know that. Or, someone from another reality. And I trust my friends completely. As such, I feel the reality angle is possible.'
Garibaldi cracked a grin, as he said, “Now, I believe you. And yes. She is a fan of the classics, as well. That is part of how we first met.”
Lee returned Garibaldi smile, as he guessed, in a playful tone of voice, “So, you shared your second more favorite thing to do in the universe with her, that allowed you to move on to doing you favorite thing in the universe with her?”
Garibaldi thought, with mild concern and amusement, 'Oh... This guy knows a thing, or two, about me. He also likely knows a lot about those after him, as well. No wonder he is able to stay one step ahead of those after him.' He said, “You do know me well.”
Lee joked, “Well, you are not the only one that doesn't like to deal with their personal life, due to it being too much trouble.”
Garibaldi chuckled for a few seconds. He then said, “I will also give you that one... I will have to see my series sometime.”
Lee thought, 'So, he is already planning figuring out, and then doing some, reality traveling of his own. I cannot fault him for wanting to do so. Though, I can warn him, on a few things about watching one's own series.' He cautioned, “While I understand, that can be an interesting experience. Be careful. A lot of the bad stuff that happened to you, and those you care for, are shown in that series.”
Garibaldi thought, 'I bet.' He responded, “I will keep in mind. By the way, did some of the episodes, on the data crystals, have a secondary audio channel on them. With the creators and cast commentaries?”
Lee said, “Yes. Some of the episodes do. But, some of the episodes. Not all of them. But, you will get a good chuckle from the commentaries. Though, we do not have data crystals were we are from. We have them on various video discs.”
“Also, buy a few extra copies, and do so right after the initial disc releases. The manufacturers whom made the discs did not do that great a job on the discs, and they start to degrade over time.”
Garibaldi grinned, as he stated, “Thanks for letting me know. And I hope the commentaries are enjoyable to listen too...”
“Now, moving forward. From what you told me, most of those after you are characters from the Black Lagoon reality. Along with the Cowboy Bebop and Firefly realities. Along with the Knight Sabers, of the Bubblegum Crisis OVA reality, plus for others with them, in hardsuits of their own, you have no been so forthcoming in talking about.”
“And not going into the gender bending aspect of the lunacy. These badasses have also had biological, and in one case, cybernetic upgrades. What lunatic would give them such enhancements? Even I know they are violent, borderline sociopathic manics!...”
Lee placed the open palm of his right hand on the front of his forehead, as he admitted, in an embarrassed tone of voice, “It seemed like a good idea at the time.”
Garibaldi flatly accused, “Well then, you're an idiot.”
Lee dropped his right hand to his side, as he looked over at Garibaldi. He casually commented, “That goes without saying. Hey, you wanted answers, and an invitation to this party. You got it. I freely admit that this is all on my head. I am just trying to stay one step ahead up them, in the hopes of losing them.”
Garibaldi pointed out, “While you might lose the others. Even I know you will never lose the Bloodhound. From the way she sounded on the phone. Which I have a recording of, as well. It is a company phone, after all. She will likely track you for eternity for what you did to her master. And I don't blame her for that. That is if your cancer doesn't kill you first.”
Lee said, “Don't worry. I have plans on appeasing the maids. But first, I have to cure my cancer. Which I think I know how to do.”
Garibaldi responded, “Good luck with that.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Garibaldi said, “I am sure you have noticed that I have not asked you how you got into this mess. And why those women are dead set on capturing you.” Garibaldi thought, 'And when I subtly tried to ask you about those matters, you sidestepped and avoided those issues.' He verbally continued, “That is because my gut tells me that learning such things might risk my very sanity.” He mentally reflected, 'Though, it would not be the first time my sanity has taken a hit.' He went onto say, “And I also have a feeling that is why you left out that part of your story, as well.”
Lee thought, 'Actually, you have been subtly inquiring on those issues a few times. And I have been carefully steering our conversations away from those matters, when you did.' He complimented, “Your gut is very wise. So, let us table those questions as a, maybe later.”
Garibaldi agreed, “Okay.” He thought, 'You are not going anywhere, without my say so. As such, I can always find out this questions, later.'
Lee thought, 'Now, for me to ask the more important question of the hour.' He calmly asked, “So, are you going to turn me over to them?”
Garibaldi though, 'I admit that it is tempting. But, no.'
Garibaldi flatly said, “No. While I don't blame them for being pissed off at you. You have not lied to me once, since you got here. All are your actions reflect someone trying to safe his own ass, while minimizing harm to others. At your core, you clearly have a sense of responsibility and honesty. And those are the only reasons you are still here, and not with them, right now.”
Garibaldi thought, 'I have concerns of where you should end up, Lee. Because, I am fairly sure, if something happens to you on my watch, those after you, will come after me. And if you stay in this reality, with what I suspect you know about me. That could be a very bad situation for everyone involved.'
Lee began, “You are correct...”
Garibaldi interrupted, in a firm tone of voice, “I am not finished... Likely, the only reason you don't turn yourself over to them, is that you don't want to dying screaming, from a long painful death. Which, I don't think you deserve...”
“And oh... Don't get me wrong. I think those after you should have their pound of flesh from your hide. They just do not need your entire hide. Also, I know better than to try to contact them. They are not the type of people to negotiate.”
Lee just nodded in a confirmation, as he conceded in thought, 'Well, a few of them. But, the majority likely are not up to negotiating for my surrender. Especially, after some of the stunts I pulled, in my escapes from them, last night.'
Garibaldi continued, “That is what I thought. And while I do not know how you did it. I am not sure I want to know how you did it. We both agree that it might harm my sanity if I did. And given what you clearly know about them. Likely before you ever met them. I would guess that the actions you did to piss off those after you, big time, were done so, unknowingly, by you. And you are trying to make the best of this epically, bad situation, you find yourself in.”
Lee agreed, in a kind tone of voice, “Exactly. And thank you.”
Garibaldi cracked a smile, as he flatly responded, “Oh, don't thank me, just yet. I have other questions for you. I have some friends missing, and I was wondering if you know anything about their disappearances.”
Lee has a sneaking suspicion he knew what Garibaldi was talking about.
Garibaldi punched a few keyboard buttons on his desk computer and the wallscreen, to Lee's right, that had been showing the movie. The viewscreen suddenly showed pictures of Susan Ivanova, Zack Allan, and Marcus Cole.
Lee turned to his left. He looked at their pictures. And he both immediately recognized, and he was surprised at whom he saw. He turned to Garibaldi, as he asked, “They're gone?”
Garibaldi calmly said, “So, you know of them.”
Lee had the decency to turn his head, and looked away from Garibaldi, as he quietly cursed, “Damn...” He then looked back over at Garibaldi.
Garibaldi stated, “Well, I guess that helps lend credence to you claim of the Babylon Five series. While most everyone knows who Zack and Ivanova are, I am guessing you know who Marcus Cole is.”
Lee answered, “Yes. Marcus Cole was a badass Ranger, whom fell in love with Ivanova. Unfortunately, Ivanova was seriously injured, in battle, and Marcus used his alien device, on Babylon Five. The alien device was originally used as corporal punishment, by draining the lifeforce of one person to another. Marcus used his own lifeforce to safe Ivanova. But, it put Marcus into a death like state. Fortunately, Marcus was put on ice before he could actually die.”
“The alien device itself was found by an older, human woman, a Doctor Laura Rosen, whom brought the alien device to Babylon Five, to help people. Eventually, it wound up in the hands of the Doctor Franklin's medical staff. Whom did not use it. Barring one exception. When it was used once to safe your own life. And that is where Marcus stole it from, so he could use it on Ivanova.”
Garibaldi complimented, “Not bad.” He thought, 'He knows his stuff. But, all that information can be found in this reality. If one has enough credits. Now, to find out what else he really knows.' He requested, “Okay. Now, what else can tell that likely most people would not know?”
Lee calmly said, “Marcus Cole was a virgin, when he made his sacrifice to save Ivanova. Which likely makes him one of the oldest, male virgin, self-sacrifices, in the known multiverse.”
Garibaldi could not help but chuckle a little at Lee's commented. He then smiled, as he said, “You are correct. Ivanova once mentioned that to me. What else do you know?”
Lee deadpanned, “Enough to embarrass half this galaxy, and blackmail the other half.”
Garibaldi continued smiling, as he replied, “I bet.” He thought, 'His answers do confirm my concerns. I need to make sure, that what ever happens, Lee, here, leaves this reality. If the wrong person, of this reality, gets their hands on him. The knowledge they could gain from him could cause an interstellar war. Though, I still need to find out what happened to my friends.'
Garibaldi dropped his smile, while he tone of voice became serious, as he said, “Still, back to my friends that have disappeared. They disappeared a few days ago. I have kept their disappearances out of the news for as long as I could. To give my own personnel time to searched for them. Though, they turned up nothing.”
“But, the story finally broke several hours ago, about Ivanova and Zack's disappearances. Though, given what happened tonight with you, I think you might have a clue about what happened to them?”
Lee looked at Garibaldi, as he calmly inquired, “I am more than willing to help. But, I need more detailed information?”
Garibaldi answered, “No problem. We do have some basic descriptions on the suspects. After reviewing video recording. There was an unidentified woman, on Babylon Five, near where Zack's quarters were hours before he disappeared. The suspect is a slender, young, human, asian woman, with long, black hair.
“Also, a redheaded asian woman with her hair in a ponytail, and a petite, caucasian woman with short black hair. Both human. Where shown on video, to have had one hell of a fist fight with Ivanova, in Ivanova's office, at Earth Gov, on Earth.”
“My friend did not go down easily. But, they eventually beat her, and the three of them literally disappeared with her, before security could show up. That is why I am helping them handle this case. I have experience with the weird things.”
Lee thought, 'That is an understatement. I have enough details to draw a picture, and know where this is heading.'
Lee inquired, “And there were reports of a pink robot where Marcus was being store, on ice, in that cyro-tube?” He mentally added, 'Chang would not risk sending Roberta on such a delicate mission. On the other hand, Arcee can be surprisingly delicate and stealthy.'
Garibaldi accused, in a tone of voice that was to calm for the situation, “Yes, a large, pink robot was spotted in that cryo facility, on Minbar. So, you are connected to this robot?”
Lee thought, with a mix of anger and sadness, more towards himself, than anyone else, 'That is a yes. Damn it! The Hell Sabers are here. And this reality has become an alternate universe, because they were some of the ones that were part of the Babylon Five decommissioning ceremony.'
Lee mentally reflected, with a little bit of hope, 'Though, with them gone. That might be a sign that in this reality, the Babylon Five station will not be destroyed. But, that is a matter for another time.'
Lee then realized something that Garibaldi did not mentioned, as he thought, with concern, and worry, 'Garibaldi did not account for Roberta. Where is she? Though, I will have to work in that question, into our conversation. For right now, I might as well admit my involvement. While keeping my part, and what is going to happen to your friend, vague. Very vague. So, you don't kill me on the spot for what I have inadvertently done to your friends.'
Lee admitted, “Yes. I am. But, in a way you might find hard to believe.”
Garibaldi thought, 'After what we have discussed, so far. That is saying something.' He questioned, “I am not going to like answer? Am I?”
Lee responded, “No. Still, I have an important question for you. Did your security team, here, at any time, in the last few days, see a woman, with long purple hair, that wore sunglasses? Or, she showed she had a right cybernetic eye, left cybernetic arm, or right cybernetic leg? With her hair style being in a similar style as the way Roberta has her hair?” He thought, 'Because they are the person, from to different points in their timeline.'
Garibaldi stated, “Now that you mention it. Yes. Our security noted seeing a woman like that a day ago. She was on a blue and black motorcycle, and she drove the entire bypass around this headquarters. She then disappeared. She had on a helmet, but her long purple hair was in a ponytail, coming out from under the back of her helmet.”
Lee thought, 'Blue and black motorcycle. That is her motoslave. Oh crap. There are two Robertas on this planet at the moment. And one is after me. And the other is after you, Garibaldi. That is bad. And if they already captured those three, it makes since that they would be after you. You are one of the biggest badasses in this galaxy. And this is just after the end of the Babylon Five series... Well, right before they blew up the Babylon Five Station... But close enough... And Chang also did like to wait, when he could. Barring a few exceptions... Like Annie.'
'Though, Doctor Franklin would likely be fine. He is more a pacific than a badass. And Chang didn't go after aliens, for obvious reasons. Except for a couple of exceptions. Like Vash. Whom is a humanoid plant. But, a wonderful person. With Chang likely wanting to capture Vash, to study Vash's destructive angel arm weapons.'
'And Chang would not dare go after John. Because, the would risk alerting the first ones, beyond the rim, to Chang's existence. So, that means that Garibaldi here is likely the last target.' He sarcastically added, in thought, 'Luckily him... I better keep this simple and just tell him the basics.'
Lee stated, “Long story short. A group of humans from another reality are kidnapping the most badass humans in the multiverse, and I believe that you are their next target.”
Garibaldi thought, 'At least my family is not here. Now, for damage control.' He said, “Okay. Should I be worried for my family?”
Lee commented, “As long as they are not in this headquarters, they should be fine.” He thought, 'I hope you daughter is still at that convention, where she is safe. And I hope your wife is not here, either.'
Garibaldi responded, “Good. Neither of them are here.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'That is good to hear.'
Garibaldi tone of voice became more serious, as he continued, “And after confirming your connection to my friends disappearing. I changed my mind. I will get that back story from you, later.”
Lee commented, “And I will be more than willing to tell you. Though, we should agree. With both our asses currently on the line. This is not a good time to do so.”
Garibaldi stated, “Yes. I agree. But, I need to know what I am facing? Like you told me, what you are facing. You have only vaguely hinted at what I am also facing. But, I need to know. Worst case scenario? What can both our enemies bring to bear against us?”
Lee thought, 'While I best not give you too many details right now. I can still give you an idea of what was are facing.'
Lee answered, “First, we are facing two groups. One group after me. Another group, after you. They are connected in a temporal manner. And not to sound like a Vorlon. But, given the resources of who is after me, and the resources of who is after you, it is a shorter list of what we are not facing.”
Garibaldi questioned, “That bad?”
Lee said, in a straightforward manner, “Yes. The situation is about as bad as the Vorlons and the Shadows knocking on your door, at the same time.”
Garibaldi replied, with worry in his tone of voice, “That is bad.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That bad. The good news is that I have a way of escaping this mess. And since you are caught in it, you need to come with me.”
Garibaldi questioned, in a serious tone of voice, “Before I decide to go with you. I need to know. Do you have the means to return me here, from wherever you are planning to take me too?”
Lee answered, “Yes. In an instant. With luck, those here will never even know you are gone.”
Garibaldi said, “Okay. I guess I will be coming with you, then. At least, until this mess blows over...” He then realized something, as he inquired, “Will it blow over?”
Lee stated, “For you, yes. Those after you are from the past, compared to those after me.”
Garibaldi asked, “Good. And after we are safe, you will tell me?”
Lee pointed out, “We may never be safe. Or, more aptly, I may never be safe, again. But, I will tell you what is going on, after I get our asses out of this specific fire.”
Garibaldi shrugged, as he casually replied, “Story of my life.”
Lee thought, 'And what a story that is.'
Garibaldi commented, “Though, I am starting to wonder if you are embellishing some. I am a very well connected, and powerful man.”
Garibaldi thought, 'The only reasons that I am considering coming with you. Is I am not sure how I can counter their their tactics. They kidnapped Ivonava, in the heart of Earthdome, and got away clean. That is no easy feat. I am not sure I could pull that stunt off.'
'Marcus was kidnapped from a secure cyro-facility on Minibar. Pull something over on a Minibari is almost as hard as tricking a Volrlon.'
'Zack was kidnapped in Babylon Five. I taught Zack everything he knew about security. And I personally designed the security systems and protocols currently used on Babylon Five.'
'This all leads me to believe that security measures I have here, are not adequate to protect myself from whomever is coming after me.'
Garibaldi then focused on Lee, as he thought, 'But, before I go anywhere with you, Lee. I also want to see if you truly realize the resources I can bring to bear here. There is nothing wrong with checking to make sure that the person one is trusting one's life to, is doing so with an informed decision.'
Lee said, “That I have no doubt about. That is why we are talking, instead of me running. Still, I do have an idea of how powerful a person you are.”
Garibaldi grinned, as he said, in a confident tone of voice, “You cannot imagine how powerful a person I am.”
Lee retorted, “Actually, I can imagine a lot. Which is literally why I am in this situation, in the first place.”
Garibaldi asked, “What could you have come up with to get you into this mess?”
Lee stated, “It is involves metaphysics. And as you have already guessed. The short answer is I messed with the lives of the wrong kind of people. Those after me. And they want vengeance against me.”
Garibaldi questioned, “That is how you pissed them off?”
Lee tone of voice became more serious, as he stated, “Yes. From a very indirect manner for me. And a very direct manner for them. It is a bit complicated. Still, you need to understand what you are facing. And what I believe you can bring to bear against them. Which would not be enough.”
“At the upper limit, those after me have friends that can call in Farscape Peacekeeper Commander Carriers. And those after you, can call in Star Wars Star Destroyers. Both of those types of ships are big, well armored, have powerful energy shields, and are loaded with weapons, that can turned the surface of a planet to char.”
“Your friends, with White Star Fleet, would have their hands full just taking down one of those types of ships. And that is not counting the types of starfighters, infantry armies, support ships, and other resources, our enemies could bring to bear, against us.”
“And the people that lead these armies are not idiots. They can not only outgun you, but they can out-think you.”
“It is even more serious at the individual level. None of those personally after me are idiots. They know what they are doing. And they are very good at what they do.”
“Your Rangers, as badass as they are, could not hand two of those after us. In a six on one battle. And from what is sounds like, both maids were just playing with the Rangers. Because they did not use their weapons, and they let the Rangers live.”
“On that matter, the attack on the police station was only an appetizer to the type of hell on earth that just one of these women could bring to the battlefield. And that is just one of them. When they are working together, full out, no holding back, I am not sure God itself could stop them.”
Garibaldi slightly grinned, as he suggested, “How about a nuke?”
Lee honestly answered, “It depends on how fast they could teleport out. Still, nukes have worked for you in the past. Your friend John Sheridan made great use of them. And some of the fans from my reality, nicknamed your friend, John Nukem Sheridan, for his liberal use of such powerful weaponry.”
Garibaldi could not help but let out a laugh. He continued to grin, as he said, “I will have to remember that nickname.”
Lee responded, “Go ahead. It is a good nickname to remember. But, we both know a nuke would be out of the question in this battle. And I will give myself up, before I risk harm to this domed city, and the people inside it.”
Garibaldi grin grew a little wider, as he complimented, “That is the answer I wanted to hear from you.”
Lee thought, with mild delight, 'Good. I passed his personal test. Now, to get down to business.' He inquired, “Good. Now, what type of defenses does this place have?”
Garibaldi answered, “This place has all sort of automatic defenses, such as projectile, lasers, and plasma, weapons, of several sizes, stationed and hidden throughout this facility. With all of them ready to pop out of their hidden housing, at a moments notice. Should I give the command. Which I can do so in several ways. What you saw at the gate, coming in, was only a taste of what I have to dish out.”
Lee grinned, as he replied, “Nice.”
Garibaldi said, “Still, considering who we are dealing with. And the massacre at police station. I ordered the complete evacuation of this place. Save for one technician I trust, whom is working on something for me. I don't mind losing the buildings. And items. They are insured. But, I do not want to lose any lives over this, if I can avoid it.”
Lee complimented, “You are a better man, than most people.”
Garibaldi grinned, as he responded, “Thank you. Also...”
Suddenly there was a ring from Garibaldi cellphone, in his chest, coat pocket.
Garibaldi used his right hand to pulled out his cellphone, unfolded it, and place it to his right ear.
As the same time, without looking, Garibaldi used his left hand to punch some keys on his desk, then changed the walkscreen, to his right, from pictures of his friends, to security video feeds.
Garibaldi looked over at the feeds. He did not immediately see anything. He then turned back to Lee, as he calmly said, into the phone, “Hello.”
A female voice, calmly said on the other end of the line, in english, “Hello Mister Garibaldi. First, we have no interest in harming you, nor those you care for. My name is Rock. I am the leader of the group after Lee. We know he is in your office, next to you. We would like to speak to him.”
While Rock had said this, both Garibaldi and Lee had been looked at each other. Lee noticed that Garibaldi had dropped his grin.
Garibaldi thought, 'They must be using themo-scans to see us. There is not much I can do about the fact that the human body puts out heat based radation. And if I had fully insulated the buildings of this complex, to where they could not be done. The annual electrical bill, for air conditioning for this place, would be equal to the the annual GDP of the entire planet of Mars. And even I could not afford that.'
'Now, to let Lee know what is going on. Though, since Roberta pulled a similar stunt with Matthew's phone. Lee probably already has an idea of what is going on.'
Garibaldi held then out his cellphone, and placed his left palm over the microphone of the cellphone.
Lee saw this, and Garibaldi watched at the younger man rolled his eyes slightly, for a few seconds. As Lee eyes returned to looking back at Garibaldi, he stated, “Let me guess. They found me?”
Garibaldi deadpanned, “Yea. They found you.”
Lee pointed out, “As I said, they are not idiots. I take it they want to speak to me?”
Garibaldi replied, “Yes. It is Rock, on the other end of the line. Though, I thought Rock was a man?”
Lee commented, in a sober tone of voice, “She was... Also, she is their leader... Well, one of their leaders. And she is one of the saner ones of their group.”
Garibaldi guessed, “And Revy is the other leader?”
Lee replied, “Yep.”
Garibaldi thought, with concern, 'Rock and Revy. Talk about a pair.' He inquired, with a hint of humor in his tone of voice, “So, you going to do the standard, stall them until you can think of a workable plan?”
Lee cracked a grin, as he shrugged. He causally said, “Hey. It worked for Captain Kirk, all the time. And it worked for you guys, plenty of times, back on Babylon Five.”
Garibaldi returned Lee's grin, as he agreed, with a bit of joy in his tone of voice, “You are right about that. On both points.”
Both men chuckled, for a few seconds.
A few seconds later, as they calmed down, Garibaldi said, “Well, here she is?” He then handed Lee his cellphone. He reached across the desk, to hand Lee the cellphone.
Lee took the phone in his right hand. He then placed his right thumb on the microphone of the cellphone, as he thought, 'At least Garibaldi did not set the cellphone to speaker option. He is respecting my privacy on this matter. That is good. Still, we need to know who we are currently facing?'
Lee requested, “I noticed that you turned the wallscreen to security video feeds. So, you are thinking along the same lines as me. While, I am on the phone, could you please quietly turned the viewscreen back on, and flip through outside the security cameras to find them. They would not call, unless the were already grouped right outside the headquarters, and ready for war.”
Garibaldi thought, 'If these people are as good at this game as Lee states, then he is likely correct. That is why I switched to the security video feeds on the first place'
He replied, “Yes. It is a good idea. And that is what I am planning to do that, anyway.”
Lee watched as Garibaldi used the keyboard on his desk to work on the video feed on the wallscreen by them. Along with the video feed, Garibaldi selected the GUI on the monitor screen, to the building security system, which was hard-lined to that monitor.
Garibaldi used the touch-pad on his desk, below his keyboard, to select the log in selection for the security video feeds. After which, he used his desk keyboard to punch in his personal password. To allow him full access to the security feeds. Where he only had a lower level access hardwired to his office. In case he was cut out from the main computers of the building, from his office.
Lee turned his head towards the viewscreen monitor, to his left, as he watched Garibaldi quickly flipped through the outside cameras, until he came to the one that showed Rock, Revy, and their teams, on in a field, outside the concrete walls of the Edgars Industries Headquarters.
Garibaldi punch up a closer camera, and used the zoom in feature to so those the people there.
Lee and Garibaldi saw the group that were after Lee, outside, in the grassy field, near a hill, about a hundred yards from the concrete wall that encircled the Edgars Industries complex. Near the one of the two lane entrances to the headquarters. But, they were over a two miles from the outer highway loop, that went around the headquarters.
The group was composed of Rock and Revy's group. Which was Rock, Revy, Dutch, Janet, Benny, and their five teenage, adult children. Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, and their three adult children. Roberta, Fabiola, Balalaika, B, Aeryn, and Violin.
From the grainy video of the members of Rock and Revy's group, Lee could make out that Balalaika and B had their sniper rifles with them. And Aeryn had what looked to be a large peacekeeper pulse burster cannon, in her two hands.
Also, six members of Serenity crew were there from the previous night, were present. The three members of the Bebop Crew. Lee could barely see their weapons on the video screen.
And the eight members of Knight Sabers. All in their hardsuits. And with there were eight, blue and black Typhoon II motoslaves. All of the motoslaves were in eight feet tall, robot mode, each of whom were holding large weapons.
Given their size, both Lee and Garibaldi could clearly make out the types of weapons the large robots were holding in their hands. Two of the Typhoon II robots carried long range, anti-material rifles. Four of the Typhoon II robots carried large gatling guns, with beta c-mag style magazines. And the last two Typhoon II robots each carried one large, ammo drum style, grenade launcher.
They entire group were spread out by about fifty yards in circumference. With a few of the members together. Most of whom seemed to be talking to each other.
Lee then noticed, on the bottom right part of the screen, the camera, which stated, 'east outer wing.'
Lee thought, 'Good. We now know where they are. And they all appear to be in one spot.
And most of them look ready for battle. Especially, the Knight Sabers. And while, I am still not sure on the weapons the Knight Sabers are all using. Specifically, the new members. Their motoslaves are definitely locked and loaded for war. And I would not be surprised if what I believe is true about those Typhoon IIs That they AIs have been upgraded, along with the hardsuits the Knight Sabers are wearing.'
'And those Typhoon are not the only ones that are packing some heavy weapons. Aeryn has a pulse burster energy cannon in her two hands.'
'The pulse burster weapon is one of the biggest, most powerful, badass, mass-produced, two-handed weapons the Peacekeeper's ranks have on hand. The weapon is as long as Aeryn is tall. And she knows how to use it, effectively.'
'The pulse burster weapon is composed of eight barrels. Each shot fires a power energy shot, that explodes on contact.'
'The weapon used an ammo cartridge clip that has fifteen energy rounds in it. Each round has enough energy for eight shots to be fired. One from each of it's barrels. Either, in one single combined blast, or in secession, as a large energy machine gun. This allows for up to a hundred and twenty shots per ammo cartridge.'
'And I am sure that Aeryn brought extra cartridges.'
'The pulse burster weapon was designed as an anti-infantry weapon, to penetrate choke points, and military pillboxes. And each shot it powerful enough to penetrate the armor plating of a modern tank, from my reality. As such, it can tear holes into these buildings. This makes pulse burster a great weapon for breaking this siege... Which is what we have, right now.'
'Given they are ready for war, and I do not see the Hell Sabers anywhere... Though, the Hell Saber members all know better than to create a paradox. It is best to handle the situation with care.'
Then, Lee noticed something else, as he thought, 'And except for the motoslaves, none of them brought their vehicles, nor zipcraft. Intelligent thinking Rock. That will keep things low key. And anyone that looks at you from the road might mistake you for some protestors, or something else. With the distance from the road far enough, not to make out the weapons you have you... Hell, they might even think you are having a picnic.'
Lee continued to look at the wallscreen monitor, while keeping his right thumb on the microphone of the cellphone. He plainly stated, “Well, they came in locked and loaded.”
Garibaldi also continued to look at the viewscreen monitor, as he responded, “I recognize many of them. And any doubt I had about you exaggerating, is pretty much dead. I fully believe you now.
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as he said, “Thank you. And do not use your rail-gun cannons on them, just yet. Let us hold them in reserve. We need to keep this civil, unless they start shooting. Agreed?”
Garibaldi looked over at Lee. Garibaldi said, “Agreed. And I am increasingly starting to understand situation you are in, and what you are facing. I do not want to make things worse. Maybe you can reach a peacefully solution.” He mentally added, 'Though, I doubt it.'
Lee honestly replied, “That would be doubtful.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Even he realizes that he probably cannot do that, as well.'
Lee then removed his right thumb from the microphone of the cellphone, as he thought, 'Rock is probably a local burner phone she bought to use just for this call. Benny, Janet, and Nene, are all good enough hackers to get Garibaldi cellphone number.'
'And they have scanners to see us with. And given, except for one, person, everyone else here is gone. It is a simply process of elimination as to where I am at, and Garibaldi is at. And give we are likely high up, they probably guess that we are in Garibaldi's office.'
'Still, it is best to be polite in this situation.'
Lee held the cellphone up to his right ear, as he greeted, in a polite, kind tone of voice, “Good morning, Rock. I hope you slept well?”
Rock said, on the other end of the line, “Good morning, Lee. And I did. So, how about yourself?”
Lee answered, “I am fine for the moment.”
Rock stated, in a kind tone of voice, “That is good to hear... Well, I am willing to admit that the last sixteen hours, or so, has been interesting. And after we lost you at the factory. We regrouped. We talked it over. And how about you just surrender. We promise not to kill you. And I promise, you will still have an ass, and your life, after we are done with you.”
Lee casually inquired, “So, Lotton talked to you about that?”
Rock answered, in a polite tone of voice, “Yes. And I am happy that you will at least admit to yourself, and others, that you deserve to be punished.”
Lee pointed out, “That problem is, I do not think you can keep that promise.”
Rock was silent for a few seconds. She then said, “Well, at least you do not say, no. So, that is progress. And to be fair. We are not that crazy about storming this fortress, because we have no interest in making Garibaldi, and his allies, our enemies.”
Lee responded, “I can see our point of view on this matter. But, the fact you don't want to attack this place, for very good reasons, does put me in a position to negotiate.”
Rock conceded, in annoyed tone of voice, “Yes. It does. So, what are your demands?”
Lee answered, in an arrogant tone of voice, “You all go home, and let me escape.”
Rock flatly replied, “That is not happening.”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, in a more casual tone of voice, “That was worth a try. Still, let us talk for a little bit. While we both finalizing our plans on how to deal with each other. There is no point in rushing.”
Rock responded, “I agree. More time works for both of us. And it is so pleasant for us to have our cards laid out on the table, while we talk.”
Lee commented, “Yea. Using the gambling motif can be fun.”
Rock agreed, in an amused tone of voice, “Yes. It is. I take it you are watching us on the security cameras?”
Lee turned to the wallscreen monitor, to his left. Though the camera feed, he saw Rock waving at him, with her left hand, towards the complex, while she used her right hand to hold her cellphone to her right ear. Though, the angle more of a sideways angle to the camera, to Rock's right side, due to Rock not knowing which hidden camera was taking pictures of her group.
A few seconds later, Rock dropped his left hand back to her side.
Lee looked back over at Garibaldi. He saw that Garibaldi had raised an eyebrow to the conversation Lee was having. But, he said nothing to Lee.
Meanwhile, Lee happily admitted, into the cellphone, “Of course. And I must say you have a strong showing. The firepower the Knight Sabers brought for the round of this game is truly impressive. And I find it flattering, concerning the fact that Aeryn would bring that Peacekeeper Pulse Burster, she has, for little old me. Yet, I am surprised that Roberta does not have her M eighty-two A one light fifty anti-material rifle, with fifty caliber BMG ammo, and underside, six tube grenade launcher.”
Lee saw Garibaldi give him a look of disbelief.
Lee lipped the words, “Blood Trail arc.”
Garibaldi lipped the words, in reply, “Oh. Got ya.”
Rock complimented, “Detailed as ever, Lee. And to answer your question. Early this morning, when got together, Revy asked that same question. And Roberta mutter something about not heading home, just yet.”
Lee inquired, with a hint of sarcasm in his tone of voice, “So, Roberta and Fabiola have not let their sweet, wonderful master know what they are doing, and what is going on, right now?”
Rock agreed, “That is my guess, as well. Also, since I shared a little. It is your turn to do so.”
Lee conceded, “Well, to to be fair, Garibaldi is keeping most everyone out of this fight. So, it is pretty much just those involved, plus Garibaldi. And maybe one, or two others in the various buildings. I am honestly not sure.”
Rock stated, “That is nice to hear. And just so you both know, we have no interest in harming anyone... Except you... And I forgot to mention, that earlier, we did make sure to have a long talk with the maids over the attack at the police station. And the subsequent chase... And they agreed to show a little more... Restraint towards our goal of capturing you... I think we have things handled at the moment.”
Lee turned to the wallscreen monitor to see that Rock turn to look at Roberta, and Fabiola. Both maids turned to Rock, with mild scowls on their faces. Though, there was no reaction from Rock, to their scowls.
Lee thought, 'I don't think Rock's talk had much effect on them. But, it is clear that Rock is not backing down either. This is good for both of us. Though, I don't dare try to use the knowledge that Garcia does not know what Roberta and Fabiola are doing, as blackmail material towards them. That has, backfire, written all over it. Besides, I detest blackmail... And it is best to be polite. Being polite is the only reason Garibaldi is even talking to me. Instead of already handing my ass over to them.'
Lee turned back to looking at Garibaldi, as he calming replied, to Rock, over the phone, “I hope you're right.”
Rock commented, “Still, it is best for you to surrender. You chances of a clean getaway are very slim.”
Lee freely admitted, in a casually tone of voice, “You're right about that. Though, it is just not in my nature to surrender, and give in. Still, I know better than to hope to rely on the conservation of ninjutsu. Because all of you are just too damn good at what you do.”
Rock agreed, with a hint of happiness in her tone of voice, from Lee's compliment, “You would be correct.”
Lee asked, “So, on a side issue. And I know I am stroking my ego a bit by asking and finding out. But, did I make the news, last night? Garibaldi hinted at it. But, I would like a confirmation.”
Rock answered, “Yes. And I must say, you are one crazy, though skilled driver, to get Roberta off your tail. And I have known a few.”
Lee smiled, as he stated, in a confident tone of voice, “After last night. I feel that I can safely say that I can now outrun the devil.”
Rock responded, in an arrogant tone of voice, “Perhaps. But, can you outrun us?”
Lee pointed out, “While I already admitted that you are holding a pretty strong hand in this situation. My hand is respectable, as well.” Lee looked up at Garibaldi, with the older man looking back down at him, as Lee continued, “As we both agree. I am in a fortress, controlled by one of the most genre savvy, badass individuals this galaxy has ever produced.”
Garibaldi smiled, as he lipped the words, “Thank you.”
Lee returned Garibaldi's smile, as he nodded once, towards Garibaldi's' direction.
Lee then bluffed, as he continued, “And I am sure you are worried that some of your friends may die in the attack. Such as from the gun turrets you likely saw shred that semi, Roberta stole, last night. Though, after everything, I am happy to see she made it out alive. By the way, it she okay. The resolution with these cameras is not that great.”
Rock stated, “Actually, Roberta is fine for the moment. And no. I am not worried. We already knew from infrared heat signatures in the building, that were is no army of guards in there. There are only a few of people in there, including yourself. Thank you for confirming that.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'That confirms that they have scanners and they can see us. And this is a reminder that Rock can think several moves ahead, herself. Also, I already have an idea on how she plans to reach me.'
Rock continued, in a smug tone of voice, “Though, as I said, I did order everyone not to attack the civilians unless they are attacked first. Also, even if you turn out the lights, we have infrared-night-vision goggles, on hand. And, along with those goggles, with our enhanced sight, which you gave us, we well still be able snipe all your turrets. Both outside and inside. From a distance. As we slowly close in on you.”
“And we both know, that after last night, that you are not going to call the police, again. Because, after the massacre at that police station, the police would more than happy to hold you responsible for that attack, and crucify your ass.”
Lee forced himself not to get angry, and to remain calm. He though, 'I forget how arrogant Rock can be, as well. Our pride is a falling that we both have. And I am sure we both realize for each other. And I will do the last thing she expects me to do.'
Lee complimented, in a casual tone of voice, “That is not a bad plan. That is something I might have thought up.”
Rock replied, “Thank you.”
Lee though, 'Now, to remind you of some of the dangers of the weapons in this fortress.'
Lee stated, “Also, if you do attack, it is likely that some of your group will get shot. PPG plasma rounds can do massive damage to internal organs and bones, while the surface wounds appear superficial.”
Rock calmly responded, “I will make sure my people get checked out, if that happens. But, it won't happen if you surrender. I will ask you again. Will you surrender?”
Lee answered, “No. Though, this situation does remind me of some of your life. Such, as that siege by the freakshow circus.”
Rock said, “Yes. I remember incident. And now I am the show-woman of this freakshow circus.”
Lee questioned, “True. Still, I wonder... How did I inherit your old life, Rock? I mean, I am even in a friendship with a crazy redheaded babe.” He thought, 'Though, she dyes her hair red.'
Rock flatly replied, “Karma.”
Lee said, “I guess... And for what it is worth, I did try to be your friend.”
Rock stated, “I know. That is the tragic part about all this. And if you hadn't done what you had done, we would be friends.”
Lee countered, “If I had not done what I did, we would have never met. And given your lifestyle as a crook, beforehand, your life would likely be over by now, along the rest of your friends.”
Rock conceded, “You are probably right. Still, that does not excuse what you did.”
Lee said, “I know. And I not asking forgiveness, just understanding.”
Rock responded, “I think I can give you that.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. And you know what, we are more alike in other ways.”
Rock inquired, “Such, as?”
Lee commented, “First, I do not say the following as a way to insult you. Nor, to belittle you. I still have the utmost respect for you.”
“That being said. I never mentioned this in my stories. Because I found it to damn depressing. And I am sure you realize this. That just like me, you can never go home again. Though, I am also sure you have not mentioned this to anyone else.”
“That like me, if you go home, you homeland's government will arrest you. But, for you. If you go home again. You will be arrested in connection to the murders over that mafia war that happened, during you last trip to Japan.”
“No matter what gender you are, your finger prints are the same. And your fingerprints are on that belly gun... The Accu-Tek pistol, which Balalaika used to kill the japanese gangster, Kousa, and the others in that building. Specifically, the pistol was shown, in the water, in full view, with the fingerprint from your right pinky finger is shown on the left side on the pistol, on the back of the slide.”
“On a side note, I must compliment you use of gun safety, by keeping you index finger on the trigger guard, and not the trigger of that pistol. While you prefer not to use guns. It is clear that Revy and Dutch taught you the basics of how to use a gun, and proper gun safety.”
“And I must agree with Balalaika that gun is an atrocious pistol. Like most belly guns, such pistols are not designed for long distance accuracy. And they have a shorter grip, which effects accuracy, even more so, when firing. And the lighter weight of the pistol, compared to heavier pistols, makes the recoil worse when firing the weapon.”
“Now, back to the topic at hand. I am sure that Interpol, and the local Tokyo police have identified your fingerprints as one of the three sets on that pistol. The other two being Balalaika's, and Morozumi, Kousa's bodyguard, whom owned the pistol.
“Of course, up until a minute after that murder, you had no idea, beforehand, that Balalaika was under orders to first destroy the Yakuza group threatening the Washimine group, and then destroy the Washimine group, as well. To be exact. Her orders, in her own words, were to make war, and burn it all to ashes.”
“And though, out of tact, I did not tell Molly this. I also did not mentioned this last night, by radio, because it was an open line, with Balalaika listening. But when Molly was Yukio, she did not help herself by planning to head to Roanapur, as her family's representative. And the situation was worse, due to Balalaika having wiretaps allowing her to learn of this plan ahead of time.”
“But, after all is said and done. You should know. That you should feel no guilt in asking Balalaika to destroy the Washimine group. Because she was going to do anyway. The only real mistake you made was trying to save a girl that clearly did not want to be saved.”
“And you cannot truly save those that do not want to be saved.”
“By the point of time, as which you tried to do so, she and Ginji were going to die violently. One way, or another. They had already set their path. And all you could have done was say a prayer for them, and leave them to their fates.”
“Also, it was them that kidnapped you, and dragged you and Revy into that final confrontation. As such, there was no way that their deaths were your fault.”
“So, you need to accept that, let go, and move on.”
Rock replied, “I already have.”
Lee stated, “Good. But, that is not all.”
Rock took the bait, as she questioned, “Really, what else do you have to say?”
Lee stated, “Something many people miss. But, I don't. On a subconscious level, you are always on guard.”
Rock asked, “And how would you know that?”
Lee answered, “That messed up dream you had about the whole Tokyo garage standoff, between you, Revy, Balalaika, and Boris. Where Balalaika had you pinned against the hood of a hood of a car, while she pointed her pistol right between your eyes. Meanwhile Revy drew down on Balalaika and Boris. And Boris was pointing his pistol at Revy.”
Rock commented, “That was a very tense situation for Revy and I. And it was a situation that was very hard for me to forget.”
Lee stated, “I realize that. But, in your dream, it was Chang that was pinning you to the hood of the car, and holding one of his custom Beretta seventy-six pistols to your head.”
“That dream was your subconscious reminding you of what Balalaika did in Tokyo. That Chang was just as capable of Balalaika, in pulling off a massacre, like what she and Hotel Moscow did in Tokyo.”
“Along with this, at the time, I am sure your subconscious reminded you that Revy was still somewhat of a danger towards you. Though, since then, she had gotten much better, when it comes her relationship towards you. And I am not just talking about how you to are lovers. But, you are also friends that completely trust each other.”
“Though, at the time, those were three of the five most influential people in your life. With Dutch and Benny being four and five.”
“So, at some level you were aware of how dangerous your life had become. I am not saying you did not already realize you were in a dangerous situation. But, you may not have realized how severe the danger was around you. Until Fabiola shot you, in the chest, with that blank round, after that whole jungle run.”
“And getting shot does put things in perspective for a person.”
Lee thought, 'And unlike you, Rock. At the very beginning of this chase against me. Before I even came to Mexico. I never had any illusions about the dangers I am in. Nor, did I have any illusions about how dangerous all of you badasses are, towards others, outside your group, including myself.'
Lee noticed that line was quite for several seconds.
Lee thought, 'Rock, I will give you your chance to mull over what I just said to you.' Lee then remained silent, as he allow Rock to say the next word.
Several more seconds later, Rock then said, in a calm tone of voice, “I admit you have made several points there. Thank you.”
Lee thought, 'Good. We are making progress in the right direction.' He kindly replied, “You're welcome, Rock.”
Suddenly, an explosion that lightly rocked the building that Lee and Garibaldi were in.
A few seconds later, there was another explosion, that lightly rocked the building.
Lee thought, 'What the hell?'
Lee looked over at Garibaldi. He saw surprise show on Garibaldi's face.
Lee continued his thoughts, 'From Garibaldi's facial expression. I can tell that he is thinking alone the same lines and I am. Now, to find out, who, or what caused the explosives. First, I need to check with Rock. And I hope it was from her group. Or, the problems Garibaldi and I have, had just multiplied by a factor of ten.'
Lee complained into the cellphone, “Not to ruin the mood. But Rock, I thought you had enough style to wait on attacking me, until after you finished gloating.”
Rock replied, in a confused tone of voice, “It wasn't us.”
Lee said, “Then please, hold on one minute.”
Lee continued to hold the cellphone to his ear, he placed his right thumb on the device's microphone.
Lee looked over at the man behind his desk, as he requested, “Garibaldi, please find out where those explosions came from.”
Lee saw that Garibaldi was already working his keyboard, as Garibaldi replied, “I am already on it.”
Garibaldi thought, 'I still want to keep an eye on Rock's group, so I will use split screen mode.'
The screens in his office suddenly showed several cameras in the complex, dividing the screen between them. The name of the location on the bottom right of the boxes on the screen.
There were fours, sectioned in quarters. In the upped left box, the camera continued to show the, 'east outer wing', with a close up to where Rock and her group were.
The upper right box show a camera of a tunnel system, with the label, 'west end waste tunnel B'.
The two lower boxes showed two camera angels that listed, 'west outer wing'. The lower left box showed a wide angle of the area. While the lower right box showed a close up of the area.
Both men saw what was coming from the west side of the complex, from the large outside walls of the concrete fence, and tunnel shown on the video feeds.
They recognized what the new attackers were, and from the looks of it, the attackers on the west end of the headquarters had already destroyed the rail-cannons turrets, on that side of the complex, before they could fully came online, take aim, and fire. Both the large ones that had popped up from the cylindrical parts of the concrete fence. And small large guns that popped in the tunnel system.
There attackers were also taking out the other automate weapons systems, as they were slowing coming towards the main, center building that Garibaldi and Lee were inside of.
Fortunately, the main building that Garibaldi and Lee was in was still a fair distance from the outer ring walls of the large concrete fence.
Garibaldi continued to look at the security video feeds, as he demanded, “How the hell did they get here unnoticed?”
Lee turned back to Garibaldi, as stated, “Each one has a reality device built into them. They can appear at once, at a seconds notice. And that is likely what they literally did.”
Garibaldi looked at Lee, as he sarcastically responded, “Lee, you really know how to create a rogues gallery.”
Lee sarcastically replied, “It's a gift. But, I think we can make this work for us.”
Garibaldi requested, “I would like to see how you plan to do that?”
Lee grinned, as he replied, “Just watch the master at work.”
Lee removed his right thumb from the microphone, with the phone still to his right ear. He said, into the cellphone, “Well Rocky-babe, the past versions of your lover, and her Hell Saber friends, just screwed the pooch. Sometime in their lives, they send a small army of boomers to attack this place, right now. I got combat and battle boomers attacking the west gate. And what looks to be boomer dogs coming up from the sewer system.”
“By the way, your girls are on the east gate.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Damn. Chang is thorough, those boomer dogs are only from the BGC concept art. I vaguely remember that art showed a boomer dog having laser guns attached to their backs, like extra arms. Yet, those boomer dogs are only using their teeth and claws to take out those laser defenses. So, I think Chang probably was using a very early prototype design, when he had them made. Which makes sense.'
'Also, I can tell that the defenses are destroying a number of boomers inside and outside, and slowing them down. But, not enough to stop them.'
Lee verbally continued, “Anyway Rock, you might want to ask them what exactly they have done. So, we can salvage this situation.”
The line was silent for around minute. Rock then stated, “From what Shenhua and Sawyer tell me, that during the one month truce, when I was in the vat, the girls were sent here for Garibaldi, and a few others. And they saw present Roberta. After they did so, they all decided to use an army of boomers to get Garibaldi, and thus prevent the risk of a paradox by meeting us... And the worst part is that it has been so long that none of them, they don't clearly remember if they caught Garibaldi, or not.”
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Talk about a fun mystery.' He mentally reflected, with more seriousness, 'Still, I did wonder how they spent that month, or whatever. Given time dilation angles. And it figures Rock would get her information from those Shenhua and Sawyer.'
'Revy's memory is not the best about such little details. Even concerning ground assaults, if she is not directly involved. Though, Revy is likely nearby, listening to the conversation. So, she can stay up to date with the situation.'
'And from the look on Roberta's face, from the video camera feed, I saw a few minutes ago, is any indication, she is to pissed off to safely approach.'
'And now that I know who sent those boomers. Which was no great mystery. I think I know exactly how to make this work for Garibaldi and myself.'
Suddenly, over the cellphone, Rock sternly stated, “I know what you are thinking.”
Lee smirked, as he commented, “I already knew the Hell Sabers were after Garibaldi. Arcee, as a pink robot, is very noticeable.” He mentally added, 'Among other things. I think I will not tell Rock that they had been spotted in their other kidnappings.' He requested, “But still, thrill me with your brilliance.”
Rock stated, “You plan to force us into a situation where we have to fight the boomers, while you two escape.”
Lee complimented, “That is what I love about you, Rock. You can cut through the bullshit, and figure out what is really going on. And you have the guts to tell the other guy about it to their face. Anyway, the boomers are after us. If they get us, I'm dead, and we both know it. So, good luck, as all of you dance in the palm of my hand.”
Lee dropped his smirk, as he hung up the cellphone, by folding it up. He then handed the cellphone, across the desk, to Garibaldi.
As Garibaldi pocketed his cellphone, he commented, “You know, towards the end, that was quite an arrogant statement to make to her.”
Lee calmly admitted, “Of course. And it is doubly arrogant in that I was quoting what she had previously said in the Blood Trail. And while it is rude, and manipulative, it might throw her a bit off her game. Thus, buying us a little more time to make our escape...” Lee smirked, as he continued, “It is all just calculations. You just have to understand all the angles, to make the situation work for you. And I have become a master at that.”
Garibaldi thought, 'So, that is his game. And he freely admits that he uses his words to get the reactions he wants. That is arrogant of him. Also, I am sure he is thinking he can play me the same way. Though, it is best I not let him in on my seeing through his ruse. And he is a fountain of information, and skills, that I can use to get myself out of this mess.'
Garibaldi asked, “I can see your point. So, how deep are we in it?”
Lee deadpanned, “We are literally between a rock and a hard place... Pun intended.”
Garibaldi let out a laugh, as he got Lee's joke.
Lee dropped his grin, as his voice turned serious, as he continued, “But, all joking aside. You have an army of death machines, known as boomers, after your ass. And I have an even more dangerous army of badass babes after my ass. If you can find good news out of that, I would be surprised.”
Garibaldi shrugged, as he casually remarked, “Plenty of actions, and T&A, as they clash over who gets us.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he complimented, “Garibaldi, I love your positive thinking. And you are right. The good news is as long as we don't get caught in the crossfire, we might survive.”
Garibaldi requested, “Since you have more experience in this situation. Bottom line it for me. How screwed are we? And how do we get out of this mess?”
Lee stated, “Garibaldi, if they get their hands on you, they will screw you worse than the Bester and Psi Corps did. The good news is that Rock will likely not try to get to us from the outside of the building. Though, with their infrared equipment, they can see us, through the building.”
Garibaldi commented, “I already figured that was how they knew I was with you. Tough, that cannot be helped. Because I refused to live in a windowless environmental again. After living on Babylon Five, I have had enough of that.”
Lee responded, “I can sympathize with that. Also, Rock will likely send the Knight Sabers, and their motoslaves to deal with the boomers. That will mean their most heavily armed, and armored, members of their group will be busy fighting the boomers. And not your resources.”
“And Rock will likely have the Knight Sabers, along with a few others also covering this building, from all sides, to keep the boomers from trying to scale this building from the outside. Though, I would not worry about that too much, while the boomers can climb. It would take them time to do so. And they would be shot before they reached us. Also, while they are designed to hover along the ground, they are not designed for vertical flight.”
Garibaldi requested, “It has been years since I have scene that series, with those killer machines, and powersuited babes. So, refresh my memory. What are these boomers? What are these they capable of?”
Lee stated, “The seven feet tall, humanoid shaped, blue boomers are combat models. They have build in weaponry. And in battle, they are designed for infantry combat. The larger, brown boomers, with the right lances, are battle boomers. They are basically walking light tanks. Their lance has a machine gun and rocket launcher on it. They are tougher and pack more punch than the combat boomers, but they are not as physically agile, nor as mentally flexible as combat boomers.”
“The two types are mass produced models. And they do have some problems. While I am not sure about the battle boomers, the combat boomers have personalities, and can be talked to. Though, barring a few exceptions, they cannot be reasoned with, nor go against their programming.”
“And I know better than to try that.”
Garibaldi thought, 'So do I. Though, years ago, Jeffery had some luck reasoning with an alien weapon. But, I am not as good as Jeffery was. And he is not here, right now. So, I won't even try doing that.'
Lee continued, “Between the two types, they designed as infantry, and light armored ground assault. And barring a few exceptions, they will just make their way up the building from the inside.'
'I am not sure about the boomer dogs. But, if I was to guess, they look like they don't have much in the way of weapons, except their teeth and claws. They are likely designed for reconnaissances, and dealing with targets of opportunity.”
“Also, even though the boomers have larger numbers, given possible upgrades to the Knight Sabers had done to their hardsuites and motoslaves. Along with them being heavily armed, and there being eight members, and eight motoslaves. Twice the numbers and firepower than the originally had. And factoring in the human members have been given a super-soldier serum I would guess that the Knight Sabers can handle the boomers, and compensate for your defenses, without being seriously injured, nor killed.”
Garibaldi sarcastically thought, 'And these are the killer robots, and super badasses that are after us...' He mentally continued in a calmer emotional state, 'Still, I am starting to see the good news in all this.'
Garibaldi inquired, with a slightly happier tone of voice, “Okay. I am starting to see how you view the situation getting better. But, I am sure you also have a plan of escape?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And it is really simple. You need to take me to my reality device. We both use it, and we immediately escape to one of the few places none of them will immediately follow. And don't worry. The place is perfectly safe. As long as we land on dry land. And I am fairly sure I can accomplish that for both of us.”
Garibaldi thought, 'You comment does not fill me with confidence. Though, you are offering me a quick way out of her. So, I will my mouth shut on the matter.'
'And since I don't dare risk call in a shuttle. It will likely get shot down by one side of the other, after us, outside. So, you way is our only way. And it has something to do with that device you had. And you called it a reality device. As such, it is not hard to figure out what it does. Even though I have no clue how it does what it does.'
'Now, to take him to his device, so we can get out of here.'
Garibaldi got up from his chair, behind his desk. He stated, “The device is in a lab, seven floors below us. Still, how do you know I won't use the device myself, and leave you here to your fate?”
Lee thought, 'He likely said few floors below us, last time, to throw me. Should I try to escape and get to my reality device on my own. Not bad. Now, tell him why I am not worried about his possibly betraying me.' He smirked, as he stated, “Because I never told you have to work it.”
Garibaldi conceded, “Good point.” He mentally added, 'And him not mentioning that was clearly intentional on his part. This man is as sharp as he lets on, or sharper.'
Lee then realized something. He asked, “Are the defenses on this floor, are on the floor we are going turned on?”
Garibaldi stated, “No. There are no hidden gun turrets on the top ten floors, including this one and the one we are going to. I do not want risk assassinating my, and my family, with a similar keystroke.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. That is a good point. Also, given you stated the place was evacuated. And that your family is gone. Do you expect them back any time soon. We do not want to them to return here, in the middle of this mess. It is oversights like this, that can get people killed.”
Garibaldi thought, 'That is a good point. Fortunately, the answer is, no.' He answered, “No. My daughter is at a convention center, and my wife is also busy with some charity work.”
Lee replied, “Good. Just checking. And before we leave, we need to see that technician. I don't want him killed on my account.”
Garibaldi thought, 'I see he is still concerned with the welfare of others.' He said, “Don't worry, we will see him along the way.”
Lee thought, 'Good. And except for that one other guy. I don't have to worry about anyone else getting hurt, while I am here, on my account. And I am sure I can figure something out to save him. Still, I don't want to take someone I don't know about, with me, into the multiverse. That could have dire consequences for everyone involved.'
'Also, I wonder why he is here? My precognition is warning me that it is very bad for me. But, I don't see how?'
'Though, I will worry about that, later. Right now, there is one other matter concerning Garibaldi’s family, that need needs to take care of.'
Lee said, “Okay. And before we leave, I suggest you call your wife and child, and say goodbye to them. Chances are you will not see them again. For a while. Though, for them probably hours, to a day. But, for you, it might be months to years. Though, just in case it is longer for them. It is good to say goodbye.”
Garibaldi replied, “You are correct about that.”
Lee then turned to cameras on the wallscreen, as a thought occurred to him.
Lee thought, 'Oh no.' Lee commented, “Before we leave. Something just occurred to me. While I know Rock has hackers. Rock might have hackers get into the computer systems. And while we see the defenses work against the boomers, it is possible that Rock may have had the defenses on the eastern side, of this headquarters, turned off. And Rock is devious to have that done.”
Lee thought, 'That was a major oversight on my part. But, I cannot think of everything. Especially, at this high level of the game we are playing. I just hope that Garibaldi can fix it, before that oversight comes back to bite me in the ass.'
Garibaldi agreed, “You might be right. I will check right now.” He leaned down and typed on his desk keyboard.
Lee watched as the video camera feeds disappeared from the wallscreen monitor, and replaced by two dimensional map, of the complex, looking down. There were several red dots, on the yellow outline of the map, that showed the buildings, fences and other locations where the defensive were were at. The doors on the very western part of the wall were hollow circles, while the rest of the west side, up to half way into the building they were in, was solid red. But, the completely eastern half of the map, including the eastern half of the building we in, was blinking red dots.
Garibaldi leaned up and looked at the wallscreen. He stated, “Crap. You are right. The hollow circles show the defenses that the boomers have destroyed. The solid dots show the defenses that are still online. And as you have probably already guessed. The blinking dots show the defense weapons that have been taken offline.”
Lee thought, 'So, sniping the defenses was plan B, for Rock. And she allowed me to think it was plan A for her. Which would have them arriving here sooner than I expected. That is very clever of her.' He asked, “Can they be turned back on?”
Garibaldi said, “Not without my security team being here. And even if they were here, I don't think we would have the time to turn them back on, before either side got to us.”
Lee requested, “Perhaps it is for the best. And is just means we need to hurry. So, lead the way.” He mentally added, 'Besides, I don't want to kill Rock, nor any members of her team. And I still have a few ideas on how to slow them down.”
Garibaldi politely requested, “One moment, please.” He used the keyboard on his desk to off the wallscreen. After which, Garibaldi leaned further down on his desk.
Lee then watched as Garibaldi reached into the top side left drawer, to Garibaldi’s left, of Garibaldi’s desk.
Lee then saw the telltale yellow glint of gold in Garibaldi’s hand, before Garibaldi quickly pocketed the items in his left front pants pocket. While Lee only saw a corner of one of the small items, Lee could tell was it it.
Lee thought, 'Those are likely small gold bars. I guess somethings are universal.'
Garibaldi looked up at see that Lee noticed what he was doing.
Garibaldi cracked a grin, as he commented, “I don't like leaving, empty handed.”
Lee complimented, “That is a good policy.”
Garibaldi replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “And gold is valuable in a number of human realities.”
Garibaldi remarked, “Of course. Gold and greed have a long history, together.”
Lee agreed, “Absolutely.”
Garibaldi then closed the drawer, and leaned up. He then walked around his desk, to his right side.
As he head towards the door, he walked pass Lee. He said, “This way.”
Lee silently got up, and he followed Garibaldi, as the older man lead Lee to the nearest elevator.
When the ended the hallway, Garibaldi turned left, and down the hallway, in the opposite direction from which Lee came toward Garibaldi’s office.
As they walked down the hallway, Lee followed behind Garibaldi, and to the older man's left.
As they continued walking down the hallway, at a conformable pace, Lee saw Garibaldi pull out his cellphone, unfold it, and dial a number.
Garibaldi then held his cellphone to his right ear. A second later, he said, “Hello Lise. We need to talk.”
Lee thought, 'Lise is Michael Garibaldi's wife. And I think it is best I stay silent until he is finished on the phone. I am in enough trouble with him, as is.'
Lee remained silent, as he listened to Garibaldi’s side of the conversation
Garibaldi said, “Yes. I am glad you are having a good time on at the botanical gardens show...”
Lee thought, 'So, that is where Garibaldi’s wife is. And that is likely in another part of Mars Dome One.'
Garibaldi continued, “Anyway honey. I have gotten into a bit of a rough spot. Don't worry. I am fine. Though, I am going to have to disappear for a while. But, I will try to return soon. And no matter what it looks like, I am alright...”
Garibaldi went onto say, in a loving tone of voice, “Thank you. And I love you, too.”
Garibaldi then hung up his phone.
By then, they had reached the two elevators, for that side of the floor, that were set side by side, with each other. As the two men came to a stop in front of the two elevators, Garibaldi press the down arrow on the wall, between two of the elevators.
Next, Garibaldi dialed another number. Afterward, he held the phone up to his ear.
A few seconds later, he said, “Hello Mary.”
Lee thought, 'That must be Garibaldi’s daughter, Mary, whom I briefly met at the sci-fi convention.'
The elevator doors, to their left, then opened up.
Both men walked into the elevator, and turned around to face the doors to the elevator, with Lee standing to Garibaldi’s left side.
While using his right hand to hold his cellphone to his right ear, Garibaldi used his left hand to pulled out a key from his pocket. He slid the key into the button he wanted to go to. Turned the key a quarter turn to the right, and pushed it in. That button lit up. Garibaldi then turned the key back a quarter turn, pulled it out. Afterward, he pocketed the key.
Lee saw where they were, from the fact the buttons on the rectangular panel all had numbers on them. And that the button corresponding to the floor they were on was lit up. Along, with the button of the floors they were on, the button of the floor that Garibaldi selected was lit up as well.
Lee thought, 'We are on the sixty-eighth floor. And we are heading for the sixty-first floor. There are seventy floors in all, on the panel. Not counting the basement levels.'
'And I would guess the top two floors are probably the penthouse area for the Garibaldi family to live in. Also, the top ten floors, including the penthouse levels, require a key to use. And I would guess that key is a universal key for the elevators. With other keys given to people, per the floor they are assigned to. And though that key is low tech and simple. It a wonderful security measure. Because, instead of hacking the elevator to get it to work. You have to have a physical key to get it to work.'
'And if the elevators are this low tech. Than I doubt the hackers can hack them, to shut the down. Which is good. Though, I am sure that Garibaldi has a way to remote control them.'
'Also, I do hope lock picking is not a lost art here... But, that won't stop those after us. The boomers can still rip their way through the elevator shaft. And while Rock will not send in full assault to get me, due to the boomer army outside. Instead, Rock will likely send small team, because defenses are down on their side of this headquarters. And given how high up we are, that team will likely take the stairs. I highly doubt Rock's team will try to scale the outside of this building.'
'In addition, the elevation we were currently at furthers validates my theory that Rock's group might be to worried about getting hit by boomers at a distance, while out in the open. And they will also be watch the outside building, to prevent the boomers from trying to scale the outside, to reach us.'
'On that note, I would not be surprised if Rock did not put Balalaika and B on sniper detail on this side, to guard the outside of the building, while asking the Knight Sabers to cover the west side, while they stall the boomers on that side of the complex.'
'Still, given their raw numbers, some boomers will get past the Knights Saber. And it is a far distance, it is possible, the boomers will reach us from both inside and outside. And the boomers use infrared as well. So, they know were we are. And with us being the only two of three people in the entire building, to start with, it is academic that we are the targets.'
As the elevators closed, Lee heard Garibaldi say, in a kind, calm, tone of voice, “I am glad you are having a great time...
Lee thought, 'Mary must been giving Garibaldi an earfull of how much of a great time she is having at the convention. Like any teenage daughter would towards the father she loves.'
Garibaldi stated, “Still, I have something to tell you. And I think you are going to need to sit down to hear it...”
“Well, it is not that bad... But, it is bad...”
Garibaldi continued, in a reassuring tone of voice, “I am going away for a while. Though, I promise, I will return. And everything will be fine...”
“Yes. I love you will all my heart, as well. Now, have some fun, honey. That is what life is all about.”
Garibaldi then hung up the connection, and dial another number.
A few moments after setting the cellphone to his ear, Garibaldi said, in a calm tone of voice, “This is Garibaldi. I need you to put my contracts on hold. I will be disappearing on my own. I will contact you when I need to you resume those contracts... Thank you.”
Garibaldi then hung up his cellphone, folded it back up, and pocketed the device, back where he kept it in his coat.
While the elevator continued moving down, Lee and Garibaldi both remained silent, as Lee thought, 'I believe that Garibaldi was just talking to a his contractor, that handles the hits he wants to taken out on people. Which, from what I understand, he rarely ever does.'
'And most of these hits are from not immediately hits. Instead, the people, in question, are on a list. The list composed some of Garibaldi's few living enemies. With the hits on the list only taking effect, if something should ever happen to Garibaldi, or his family. Should something happen to any of the members of the Garibaldi family, hitmen would kill his enemies on that list.'
'Unless Michael Garibaldi stopped the hits in advance. Such as now. And it makes sense for him to contact the hitmen, to put the hits on hold, so as he does not needlessly stir the pot, and make the situation worse for everyone, by accidentally having those hits go forward, due to his planned disappearance.'
Just then, Lee felt the elevator stop. A second later, the doors opened.
As they exited the elevator, Lee let Garibaldi take lead.
A few seconds later, the elevator doors closed behind them.
Lee walked at Garibaldi walked out of the elevator section, then turn to the left, in an adjoining hallway. Lee then follow Garibaldi.
As they walked down the hallway, Lee saw that all the doors to his sides were close. Also, Lee noticed some strange vertical, six inch lines, on the walls, every so often. Both on the floor they were on, and on the floor they had come from. The lines were a slightly different shade of color, than the wall colors. And the lines ran in parallel, down both sides of the hallway.
Lee thought, 'Hmm... I will have to ask Garibaldi about those lines, later. Still, there is something I need to say to Garibaldi right now. And I need to mean it.'
And as they walked, Lee sincerely apologized, “I am sorry I screwed up your life, Garibaldi.”
Garibaldi continued looked ahead of Lee, as he commented, “To be honest, I am surprised something like this has not happened sooner... And we should be reaching our destination, any second now.” He thought, 'At least, you are willing to apology over you part in this mess. Though, you have no exactly told me what you are part in this mess is about.'
Lee thought, 'Well, at least he was polite about my apology.'
A few seconds later, Lee saw them approach an open door, down the hallway to his, and Garibaldi’s left.
Garibaldi then walked into the room, with Lee right behind him.
Lee also decided to leave the door open, to the hallway.
As they ended the room, Lee saw that it was a lab, with white fluorescent lighting, from the ceiling lights, turned on.
To Lee's right was a long, wooden, rectangular island, that went down to the floor, with several drawers on all sides. The island ran along the room, to the far wall, with a six foot gap between the far wall and that side of the island.
Beside the island was with a human, male technician, in a white lab coat. Lee could see the man was working on something, on the table. With him using his tools, while having his back to the wall bordering the hallway.
In wall in front of the three men were two large paned windows to the outside. And from the morning sunlight, Lee could see cityscape outside, with the dome walls in distance.
On the far wall, to Lee's right, was a sealed, pear of metal doors. And to Lee's left, along the wall, were sets of shelves, with electronic equipment, tools, and books.
The floor was white linoleum tile.
Lee asked, “Which way does the window face?” He thought, 'Because, given I woke up in a room in this building, and we have been turning down corners a few time. I am not exactly sure.'
Garibaldi answered, “The south side. Like my office.”
Lee replied, “Good. Also, are those windows bulletproof?”
Garibaldi answered, “Unfortunately, no. Only the top three floors have bulletproof windows. All the windows below those floor are just rate for wind resistance.” He thought, 'Though, I have been slowly updating the security on this building for the last several years. I was scheduling the window replacements later this year. I guess I am a day late, and a dollar short.'
Lee mentally cursed, 'Damn.' He calmly replied, “Okay.”
Garibaldi said, “Now, let me introduce the both of you to each other.”
Garibaldi turned to the male technician, whom overhead Garibaldi.
Lee saw the technician lean up from the island table he was working at, and looked at the other Garibaldi, and himself.
Lee saw the human man was a moderately tall, but lean, fair skinned man, with black hair, in a short ponytail, tied back in a black scrunchy. The man wore a long, white lab coat, and he appeared to be in his mid-thirties.
Garibaldi gestured to the man, with his right hand, as he stated, “This is Bernard Maximilian. He is my chief technology researcher. And he agreed to stay and work on something, while I had the rest of my headquarters evacuated.”
Bernard turned to Garibaldi, as he kindly said, “It is alright Mister Garibaldi. I do not mind.”
Garibaldi mentioned, “And he is very polite...” Garibaldi then gestured to Lee, with his right hand, as he continued, “Bernard, this is Lee. Our guest.”
Bernard turned to Lee, as he said, “It is a pleasure to meet you.”
Lee looked over at Bernard, as he replied, “Likewise. And we need to discuss a few things, before you get back to work. But, I believe you employer would be better fit to explain the situation.”
Garibaldi overheard Lee's comment, as he thought, 'Yes. And my employee would take the situation more seriously if I told him, instead of Lee. That is a nice move on your part Lee.' He turned to Bernard, as he calmly said, “The headquarters is are under attack.”
Bernard raised an eyebrow, as he questioned, “Again... So, that is what rocked the building a few minutes ago?”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'So, this is not the first time this headquarters has been under attack. And the personnel has some experience with that. That really do not surpise me. But, it is a matter for another time.
Lee turned to Bernard, as he stated, “Yes. And we are on our what to escaping. But first, we need to know you plans of escape?”
Bernard answered, “There is a trapdoor right where I am standing. The button is at the bottom of the island, by my feet. The trapdoor leads directly down to a closet on the next level below us. And in the back of the closet is access the saferoom. This secret saferoom is one of the most heavily armored locations in the building. I should be fine there, until this blows over.”
Lee said, “Okay. If that is what you want to do.” He mentally added, 'If the boomers sense myself, and Garibaldi leave, they will likely teleport. And Rock's group has not interest in this man. So, as long as we are gone, he should be fine. Plus, I cannot take an unknown person with us, for several reasons. Also, he states he has experience in this headquarters being attacked, so I will trust his judgment, concerning this attack itself. And he clearly has a plan, and knows what to do during this attack. Still...' He turned to Garibaldi, as he commented, “He is your employee. It is your call.”
Garibaldi flatly stated, “I am taking a huge gamble going with you. And I not risking someone else.”
Lee inquired, “Good answer. And let's not waste time. So, where is my reality device? Also, what is Bernard working on here, that is so important?” He thought, 'I have been wondering that.'
Garibaldi looked Lee, with a slightly embarrassed look on his face, as he began, “Ah.. Well...”
Lee realized the subtext of Garibaldi comment. He flatly interrupted, “Oh no, you didn't?”
Lee quickly marched over to stand beside Bernard, as he to looked at what Bernard was working on.
On the island table, with tools set aside, Lee saw that Bernard had almost completely taken his reality device apart.
The device was outside its housing. With its parts and electronic tools sitting on the island beside it. Also, Bernard was holding a couple of electronic tools as well.
As Lee completely took look at the dissembled reality device, with mild shock, Garibaldi continued his explanation, in a calm tone of voice, “We wanted to know how it worked, and what it did. And scanners would not tell us, heads, nor tails, about it. So, I had it taken apart. Though, my friend here should be able to put back together, long before those after us, get here.”
Lee looked at up at Garibaldi, with a look of disbelief on his face. Lee flatly accused, as whine, “Oh, come on, Garibaldi. You have been in this game long enough to know that Murphy Law's will screw you when you least expect it.”
Garibaldi conceded, “Yes. This is my fault.”
Lee request, “Next time. Just ask, first.”
Garibaldi replied, “Okay. I will” He mentally added, 'He took that bit of bad news better than I expected.'
Lee looked back at the dissembled reality device, as he grimly thought, 'I really am in my freakshow circus situation. Like Rock, Revy, Eda, and Janet. Eda was lucky that during her siege, of that Greenback Jane arc, that the only problem she had was the getaway boat was late. But, that was her fault for not calling Dutch in advance. Where in this situation, not having access to my immediate getaway is not my fault.'
'And this is far more complicated than that. I may have imagined these reality devices, but I intentionally kept how they worked vague, because I am not a quantum physicist... Well, technically, after the math and science courses that Violin taught me in the time loop, I could be... If I wanted to... Still, I don't know how these things work. And I am way over my head, if I try too...'
'Why, oh why, am I constantly forced to do things the hard way?'
Lee muttered, in a quiet, though whiny tone of voice, “No matter the life. No matter the reality. It is never the easy way. Why is that? Can't I just get a break for once in my life? Or, is every single event in my life going to be like pulling teeth?”
Garibaldi overheard him. He chuckled. He then replied, “I know the feeling.”
Bernard commented, “So, this is a reality device? As in traveling the multiverse? And you two are planning to use it to escape from those attacking the base?”
Lee turned to Bernard, as he thought, 'This dude is sharp. I will give him that.' He answered, “Yes. But, I don't think is a wise idea for you to come with us.”
Bernard looked at Lee, as he agreed, “Neither do I. You are not the only ones that studied such subjects. Besides, I have a family here that depends on me. Also, I get the feeling that whomever is attacking this place is after both you, and Mister Garibaldi, because his statements reflect he is coming with you. And they are not after, myself.”
Garibaldi stated, “Exactly.” The other two men looked at Garibaldi, as he continued, “That is why I hired Bernard here. He is smart. He is a quick learner. And he knows better than to jump feet first into a problem, without looking prior to doing so.”
Lee turned to Bernard, as he guessed, “And you likely already memorized how this device works?” He mentally reflection, 'Why jump in the deep end of the multiverse, when you can just take your time, and wade in the shallow end? This moment this mess is over, you will likely begin work on your own device. And you will take your sweet time in doing so. And you will be care each step of the way.'
Bernard turned to Lee, as he admitted, “Of course.” He turned to Garibaldi, as he commented, “And I can replicate the technology?”
Garibaldi responded, “Good. But, keep that to yourself, until I get back.”
Bernard replied, “Yes sir.”
Lee thought, while feeling concern, 'There is not much I can do about Bernard knowing how this technology works. Though, if he can figure out how the technology works to fast, I can probably, eventually figure it out, as well. I just don't have the time right now to do so. And I need to get him to work for us. So, we can get out of here.'
Lee politely requested, “Still, I need you to put this thing back together, as quickly as possible. And have it in working order.”
Bernard looked at Lee, as he calmly stated, “It is going to take time.”
Lee calmly said, “Then, set a speed record. Because we do not have long, before those after us, reach us.”
Lee mentally lamented, 'I have to calm down. This guy is my only ticket out of here. Upsetting him would be counterproductive. And it is no wonder my precognition was screaming. And with our luck. Chances are, Bernard, here, won't be finished until the very last moment... I am going to have to squeeze every second I can, to stall the assault on this building, from both sides. Luckily, I have some ideas on how to do that.'
Bernard replied, “Okay. It should take me only little while to put it back together.”
Lee said, calm tone of voice, “That will be fine And I know you cannot test this device. But please, let it be in working order.”
Bernard stated, “When I get finished, the electronics will be functioning to the point the device should work.”
Lee commented, “That is all I can ask. And look at it this way. You get this fixed on time. I am sure when you boss gets back, he will want you to continue research on this. And that means funding for more toys for your labs.”
Garibaldi overheard this, as he thought, 'I see that Lee is going with the carrot. And I agree with his strategy. So, I will help. Besides, he is right about that.' He stated, “That is a promise, Bernard.”
Bernard looked Garibaldi, as he commented, “I know. Our lives and my reputation is on the line and I won't disappoint you, Mister Garibaldi.” He then leaned back over, as he started using the tools in front of him, on the island, to put the disassembled reality device back together again, as quickly as possible. While still making sure the device would function.
Lee said “Good.” He then turned back to Garibaldi, as he inquired, in a casual tone of voice, “First, how long until they get here?”
Garibaldi stated, “If they use the windows, about twenty minutes. But, I don't think either group will. So, say thirty minutes, with change.”
Lee looked at his watch. It was ten five AM. He thought, 'Factoring five minutes to get here, and the time for the discussion, I would say we have twenty-five minutes.'
Lee then looked back at Garibaldi, as he questioned, “Okay. While they can see our body heat. Can they see and hear us with your camera system?”
Garibaldi answered, “No. One of the first things I did was CEO was separate the cameras and microphones for security from everything else. The surveillance system of this headquarters is hardwired to only be viewed from monitors on the top ten levels of this building, and the security office. That is why they have not shut it down, like the weapon defenses, on half the complex. Also, there are no microphones in the camera security system.”
Lee thought, 'You probably got tire of people bringing down your camera system. Or, wiretapping your conversations.' He complimented, “Good job.”
Garibaldi replied, “Thank you.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to see what other options we have. He requested, “Now Garibaldi, if you can give me access to the security system here, I might be able to buy us five to ten more minutes. I have a few ideas that we might be able to use to slow down those coming after us.”
Garibaldi thought, 'It is clear that Lee is always planning. Not a bad thing, I just have to be watchful of him. Still, we could use those minutes.' He said, “Yes. Over here.” Garibaldi then walked over to the open door to the hallway.
It was then that Lee noticed a wall mounted wallscreen monitor, like the one that was in Garibaldi’s office, right beside the door, on the inside of the room they were in.
Lee thought, 'I must have missed that, when I walked inside the room. Just a lesson that even I can miss one or two things. Every now and then. And in the game we are in, that can prove fatal.' He then walked over to join Garibaldi by the wallscreen.
As Lee joined Garibaldi by the monitor, Garibaldi said, towards the monitor, “Garibaldi. Alpha-three-nine-six clearance.”
Lee thought, 'Garibaldi likely prefers a to use a keyboard, because his voice can be recorded. But, this situation is too dire to look for a spare keyboard here. Also, these wallscreens do have microphones, and cameras. Not counting other such surveillance hidden in this room, and through the headquarters. But, just like Garibaldi, the situation is too dire to worry about being recording by hide security cameras, and microphones. I will just play it by ear.'
'Also, I find it ironic that Babylon Five series showed that even with gun control, and a complete surveillance police state, on the station, did not mean that someone was watching the cameras, and listening to the microphones all the time. But, such things did record all the time. But, that is something to ponder later, when our asses are not on the line.'
Lee saw that the monitor then displayed a GUI interface that provided a series of selections to choose from.
Garibaldi tapped the screen to high light a list that was labels, 'building defense'.
Garibaldi continued to look at the monitor, as he asked, “So, what do you have in mind?”
Lee also looked at the monitor, as he answered, “It depends. I am sure that this place has other defenses that are not automatic, to prevent civilians from being trapped, and allowing them to escape.”
Garibaldi responded, “Yes. Though, usually my security team is given discretion on such matters.”
Lee said, “I am sure. Though, with them gone, we will have to do the jobs, ourselves. Let's run down the possibilities. So, let's start the ball rolling. Does this place use a halon, or carbon dioxide fire suppression system?” He thought, 'If so, that will not slow down the boomers. But, it will slow down Rock's group. Because they will have to wait to air each room out, one by one. Because such systems remove the oxygen in the rooms.'
Garibaldi answered, “No. We use water. A sprinkler system. We even have hoses tied to water towers higher up in the building. It is low tech, but the water tank is located near the top floor, and also partly acts as a ballast to the building.
Lee thought, 'Oh well. Still, the water system might be even more useful.' He stated. “Good. That is even better. Can you get me some electrical extension cords, as well?”
Garibaldi stated, “Yes. They are in a nearby storage closet, in the hallway. You must really have something in mind.”
Lee cracked a smile, as he coyly responded, “All in good time. Now, does your building have security barricade doors that can slide out of the walls. I think I noticed a few lined vertical line sections on the walls, as we made our way down here. But, I was just not sure if that wasn't the where the sections of the buildings, on each floor were bridged together?”
Garibaldi thought, 'So, he knows a little about construction. I will just file that for possible later use. I just been going up with those upgrades, floor by floor. I just having reached my office and apartment levels yet, on the top floors.'
Garibaldi said, “Actually, those places are where security barricade doors slide open. They are two doors that slide from each side, and lock together in the center. They are stationed about every fifty feet along the hallways. And the only reason they are not defaulted on, are as you stated. We prefer to arr on the side of caution, to allow civilians a chance to escape. With security using them to trap the attacks, while given time for the civilians to escape.”
Lee guessed, “And with security not here, the barricade doors all still open?”
Garibaldi replied, “Yes.”
Lee asked, “No problem. How much can these doors take?”
Garibaldi admitted, “Not a lot. They were designed to withstand plasma hits, not raw physical attacks.”
Lee countered, “Still, let's just shut them all, anyway. And we should be able to do so from here. That will at least slow them down for a few more minutes.”
Garibaldi said, “Okay. Let uss see if we can do that.” Garibaldi then used his right fingers to punch a few buttons on the wallscreen. He stated, “We do have a problem. I don't have access to the east half of them.”
Lee thought, 'Look's like Rock's hackers stuck again. Still, I am not going to complain.' Lee requested, “Then, just drop the doors on the west half. What other defenses you have on the west wing?”
As Garibaldi set the barricade doors to close, he answered, “Basically what you already saw on the camera. Outside automated projectile and energy weapons. Inside, automated lasers guns and PPG guns, every twenty feet, hidden in false ceiling tiles, until used. Also, there is laser grid in the stairwell and elevators. And they are already one. At least for the west wing... And the doors are shutting on the west wing of the building, as we speak.
Lee inquired, “Okay. Also, can we manually close the barricade doors on this floor?”
Garibaldi stated, “Yes. There is a numerical pad, in hidden panels, by each side of the barricade doors.”
Lee responded, “Good. On this floor, how many barricade doors between us and them?”
Garibaldi answered, “Three on each side.”
Lee said, “We can work with that. Remember, all we got to do is delay them. Also, can you control the elevators from that monitor?”
Garibaldi responded, “Yes. I can control where they go. But, those hackers can override my controls.”
Lee thought, with a mix of worry and relief, 'I guess I was wrong. And we got lucky on that. Still, let's see if my idea for the elevators can pan out.'
Lee pointed out, “That depends. Do you have to manually reset the elevators emergency drop locks, that protect it from falling if the cables are cut?
Garibaldi thought, 'He has a point there.' He replied, “Yes... And I can I set them off from here.”
Lee requested, “Then, send all the elevators to go three floors below us, and lock them there. They will had to tear into both the bottom and the ceiling to get to us. Also, they may mistake the floor, or two above the elevator, as the floor we are on. Which will buy us some more time.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Now, that is down right devious. Lee, I am starting to realize why those after you, are having such a hard time catching you.' He complimented, “Good thinking. And what about the stairwell?”
Lee turned to looked at Garibaldi, as he said, “We will get to that in a minute. But, before we handle that. I need to know if you have anything on hand, here, that we can use to slow them down?”
Garibaldi turned to Lee. He smiled, as he answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Don't worry. I have plenty of toys for this party, already on hand.” He then started walking towards the large metal doors, on the far right side of the room.
Lee walked with Garibaldi stand by the doors, beside him, to Garibaldi’s left.
Lee saw there was a key pad by the metal double doors, to his left.
Garibaldi quickly reached over and tapped a number code on it.
Then, Garibaldi and Lee quickly stood back, as the doors automatically unlocked and opened towards them.
Then, the lights inside, from the ceiling. Lee saw that it was the size of a wide closet, that was not very deep.
To Lee's left, Lee saw PPG pistols mounted in place on twos, that were a foot wide. There was eight PPG pistols in all. And Lee saw that unlike other PPG pistols, these had trigger guards on them. Also, on the third row, below the first two were several energy caps for the PPG pistols. And on the fourth row, as the bottom was clip on holsters for the PPG pistols. The hostlers were leather, and were designed to be used for either left, or right, side without a problem.
To Lee's right, Lee on the foot long right row, there was PPG rifles, which trigger guards as well. Three in all, in the one foot long row. The rifles had straps on them. On a second row below the PPG rifles were more energy caps. And on a row below that were a set of sheathed combat knives.
In front of Lee, on the eight foot wide row, Lee were three large PPG machine guns, with folded tripods. They were mounted one on to of the other, in three rows. The machine guns were four feet long. And there four large PPG caps for it, on a bottom, fourth row.
Lee though, 'Not bad. We can use these weapons. I think I will go for the pistols. Also, while I am not great with dual wielding two pistols at once. I am fair at that skill. And pistols are better in close quarters combat. But, I want to have more than one, so I can pack more punch.'
Garibaldi stated, “As I am sure you overheard. This is not the first time this headquarters has been attacked. And I keep a weapons locker like this, on every level. Just in case. I just wish we had time to get to the large weapons arsenal. Where I keep various types of grenades and explosives.”
Lee commented, “I would guess, given these are the places you are studying unknown technology, you would want to keep in potential types of explosives out of the area.”
Garibaldi responded, “Exactly. And I guess this weapons locker will have to do... By the way, that reminds me...”
Garibaldi turned to his right, as he asked loudly, “Hey Bernard. Do you want a weapon? I know you are checked out for one. Considering, I was the one that taught that class, that day.”
Bernard did not look up from the island table, as he continued working. He replied, “No. I will leave the fighting to the professionals”
Garibaldi let out a laugh. He then turned back to look at Lee.
Lee looked back at Garibaldi, as he inquired, “If this is a weapons locker to you. What is an arsenal?”
Garibaldi looked at Lee, as he replied, “Something I can outfit a platoon with.”
Lee commented, “So, for you, pretty much was every other home, in the deep south of Dixie would have what you concern a weapon arsenal?”
Garibaldi inquired, “Huh? Where are you from? And when?”
Lee answered, “Southeastern United States, during the early twenty-first century.”
Garibaldi commented, “And I thought that gun-nut culture was a historical cliche.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “Not in my reality. BWHAHAHAHA!”
A few seconds later, as Lee calmed down, Garibaldi inquired, “Now, lets get you equipped. First, given you previous comment, I take it you have experience with firearms?
Lee answered, “Yes. Actually, a lot. Though, mostly for target practice. But, I have no experience with PPG weapons. The experience I have is with older firearms. Mostly from the twentieth century.”
Garibaldi cracked a smile, as he said, “Then, this will not be hard for you. In loading and unloading the PPG pistol energy cap is much like loading and unloading a semi-automatic pistol magazine.”
“Instead of loading the energy cap at the bottom of the grip, you load it in the back, where the hammer would be, if it was a firearm pistol. You insert and twist it a quarter turn to the right, and when you here the charge up hum for a second, it is read to go. Though, there is a safety catch on the left side, up top of the grip. Just like the pistols of your time, the red dot means it is ready to fire. Right beside the safety is the select fire dial. S for signal shot per trigger pull. B for three round burst. And A for automatic. After you take off the safety, just aim, and pull the trigger.”
“Also, if the hum after putting in a PPG energy cap lasts for more than a few seconds, pulled the cap out immediately, or pistol will likely explode. Because, it is a bad energy cap.”
Lee replied, “Okay. And does a PPG have a kick?”
Garibaldi answered, “A little. But, nothing like the pistols of your time.”
Lee joked, “The future can spoil people.”
Both men chuckled a little at Lee joke.
As they calmed down, Garibaldi stated, “Also, I need to explain the power dial to you. The button on the right side of the pistol, above the grip is where the power dial is located.”
“The dial goes from low to high. The most powerful the shot, the less ammo you will get from each energy cap. For a normal energy cap, Low is twelve shots. Medium is seven shots. High is four shots.”
“Though, these energy caps are top of the line, and have double the energy capacity. So, they have double the amount of ammo. Also, these PPG pistols and rifles are some of the best quality PPG weapons made. They have five settings, instead of three. The other two setting, is medium-low and medium-high. They are between low and medium settings, and medium and high settings, respectively.”
“Also, do not try to switch the dial while firing, that is a chance it will cause the PPG to explode in your hand.
Lee responded, “No problem. Now, what are those large cannons in front of us? Are those PPG weapons?”
Garibaldi answered, “Yes. They are PPG machine guns. And they already have energy caps in this. Those are the bottom are just spares.”
Lee asked, “Okay. So, are those large machine guns, with the tripods, automated?”
Garibaldi responded, “Absolutely. You just set them up at a choke point and it will fire at anything that moves in.”
Lee said, “Good. We can use them for that. But, where do you think it would be best to put them?”
Garibaldi answered, “We have three, so two of them in the lab, pointed at the window. It is the only way to cover that window safely. And one is not going to handle the job, if those death machines come through there.”
Lee replied, “I agree And we will have the third one in the hallway, right outside, pointed towards the west end of the building, to give those boomers trouble.”
Garibaldi complimented, “Good idea. They are the greater danger.”
Lee said, “Yes. Those killing machines are playing for keeps. But, keep in mind that the Rock's group are trying to use non-lethal means. And if we kill them, all bets are off.”
Garibaldi thought, with annoyance, 'Why do things have to be so complicated? Though, Lee does have a point there. And Rock and her friends are only after Lee. I do not want to get on their bad sides.'
Garibaldi responded, “I will keep that mind. Also, I suggest you set your PPG pistol to medium-low. A head shot from that setting with kill. But, a body shot will not. And that will give you twenty shots at that setting. And I will set my rifle to low, given it has more powerful shots.”
Lee replied, “Okay.” He mentally added, 'That is good to know. And he is getting a PPG rifle. He likely wants to have the option of having a strong punch to his shots, if he needs it. And he might, against those boomers.'
Garibaldi inquired, “Still, are you sure PPG rounds will hurt these boomers?”
Lee answered, “They should. These killer machines are designed to take projectile and laser hits. They are not designed to take plasma hits, like from our PPGs. And their nervous systems are similar to humans. So, they should go down after a few shots. But, aim for the head. We cannot take chances.”
Garibaldi replied, “I can follow that logic.”
Lee stated, “Good. Now, here is my plan. We get two electrical extension cords, first. Then please, lead me to the eastern stairwell. When we are finished there, we will come back for the automated machine guns. Two for the room. And finally the third tripod in the hallway. I will get the third one, myself, while you manually close the barricade doors leading to the lab.”
“We will use one PPG machine gun being the last line of defense for that on the west side of the hallway, against the machines. And we will handle the humans ourselves. If they reach us, before we are gone.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Not bad.' He replied, “Good plan. Now, let's get our weapons.”
Lee said, “Fine with me.”
Lee reached over, on the left side, and he picked up two clip on holsters. He clipped one holster, on each side of his belt.
Lee then picked up one PPG pistol, and energy cap. He found the PPG pistol did not weight much, compared to the semi-automatic pistols he was use to. He set the crescent dial, on the right side, to medium-low. He then put the energy cap into the back of the pistol, and turned it a quarter turn to the right. He heard the hmm that lasted a second. Next, he looked on the left side set the rate of fire to single shot. Afterward, right side the fire selector, he turned off the safety. Finally, he carefully holstered the weapon in his right waist holster.
Lee did the same thing to another PPG pistol, and when that pistol was ready, he holstered it in his left waist holster.
Meanwhile, Garibaldi, picked up a PPG rifle. He set the weapon to medium-low, and the fire selector to single shot. He then picked up an energy cap, that had been on the row, below the row of rifles, and loaded the cap into the weapon. After he heard the hum for a second, of the weapon being primed, he turned the weapon to the right side, and turned off the safety. Finally, he slung the strap of the weapon, over his right shoulder.
Lee noticed that Garibaldi was ready, as he thought, 'Now, that I think about it, I better hedge my bets for later.' Lee then reached in front of Garibaldi, to the right side of the weapons locker, and he grabbed a combat knife, which was sheathed in a black leather scabbard. He tucked the scabbard end of his new knife in the back of his pants, under his coat, as he thought, 'Now, I am ready.'
Garibaldi noticed Lee do this, but he said nothing.
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as he requested, “Now, before we get the cords, and head to the eastern stairwell. I need to know where is the fire-hose near the eastern stairwell?”
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as he answered, “The hose on that side of the floor is by the stairwell. The other hose on this floor is located by the western stairwell.”
Lee replied, “Good. That is perfect.”
Garibaldi said, “I think I know where you are going with this. And I think it is brilliant. Also, the closet with the electrical cords are this way. Also, there are plug outlets nearby the stairwell. Just follow me.”
Garibaldi quickly turned, and walked out of the room, and into the hallway, with Lee following him.
(_)
Two minutes later, Garibaldi had briskly lead Lee to the eastern stairwell.
They had already stopped by the hallway storage closet, and now, each man carried an orange, wrapped, hundred foot long, pronged, power-cord, on their left shoulder.
As they reached the shut door to the entrance to the eastern stairwell, on that floor, Lee drop coil of cords, onto the group. Garibaldi saw this, and he did that same.
Lee thought, 'Now, where is the fire-hose.' he quickly looked around, and he saw wall mounted box, with a windowed door, that had the fire hose, which was folder back and forth, on itself.
Lee thought, 'Good. There it is. And not a second to lose.' Lee turned to Garibaldi, as he requested, “Please, go unwrapped that fire hose, and bring it here.”
Garibaldi silently did as requested. He walked over, opened the glass and metal case, and unwrapped it.
Meanwhile, Lee walked over to the metal door to the stairwell, which was clearly marks as the eastern stairwell entrance.
Unlike this factory doors, the doors in the building, including the stairwell, had door knobs and hedges.
Lee opened the door, and looked in the stairwell.
He found the stairwell to be fairly well illuminated by the lights running along the walls.
As Lee looked around he thought, 'Good. Given the boomers on the west end of the complex. Rock's group will not likely risk going to the western stairwell, and risk facing both the boomers and the active defenses on that side of this place. Also, this trick will likely not work on the boomers. So, there is not point in trying it on the western stairwell. Besides, there are plenty of defenses on that side of the building.'
'And while I am fairly sure that Knight Sabers will be outside, fighting. One or two might accompany Rock's group, into the building, and up these very stairs.'
'Since, it is likely that most of the Knight Sabers will be busy dealing with the boomers outside, with their motoslaves. That does not mean all of them will be. And I can guess which Knight Saber will be coming in Rock's group. That being Nene, the combat hacker.'
'Rock will ask Nene to come along for the very fact she realizes she might need a hacker in the group. And by asking Nene, Rock can keep Benny and Janet out of the line of fire.'
'So, I need to plan accordingly.'
' Fortunately, this staircase is what I was hoping for. Stairs leading up in a square, clockwise, corkscrew, fashion. The steps have not holes in them, and are made of concrete. Also, the open space, in the middle is three feet, by three feet, square. Plenty of room to slide down a rope. But, it is too tight for a hardsuit to use their jumpjets. Or, someone to just attempt to jump up, with super-strength. So, they will have to take the stairs. Which will be very slippy, real soon.'
'Also, metal railings, that are connected, and running down the stairs, from around the center, are just what I need.'
'Since hardsuits are insulated, they are the only ones that will be able to come up here, first. With the rest of the group waiting for Nene, and maybe one other, reaching my trap, and disabling it. Then, the others will soon follow still. Doing it that way will take time from them, and buy us more time.'
'Now, to get back to work.'
Lee turned, and walked back further into the hallway. He saw that Garibaldi had brought the fire-hose over to him. With Garibaldi setting the end of fire-hose near the electrical cord, as he continued to unwind it.
Lee looked at the other man, as he said, “Good job. Now, just hold tight a moment. I will soon have a task for you. But, first I need to make sure I can do this.”
Garibaldi leaned back up straight. He looked at Lee, as he replied, “Okay.” He then walked over to a nearby wall, and leaned back on it, as his PPG rifle was slung on his right shoulder.
Lee quickly walked over to the cord he had dropped. He then sat down, and pulled out his new combat knife, from the back of his pants, with his left hand. Next he picked up the female plug end of his cord, with his right hand.
Lee was careful, as he first cut off the female end of the plug. He then stripped that end of the plug of its the orange, rubber, sheath down by around twenty feet.
When Lee finished, he saw three wires, in three separate rubber sheaths.
One blue wire. One red wire. And one green wire.
Lee thought, 'Well, green is universally ground. And since red is never used for common return, it has to be the hot wire. And blue is the common return. Also, that reminds me, I need to ask Garibaldi some things.'
Lee inquired, “Does this stairwell go to the ground floor? Or, to the basement?”
Garibaldi continued unwinding the hose, as he answered, “Ground floor. We have a separate set of stairs for the lower levels.”
Lee thought, 'That is better news than I had hoped. At least, the boomer dogs will not have a directly path here, on the western staircase.' He asked, “Okay. And what voltage is the AC electricity in this place?”
Garibaldi said, “Two twenty, with low amperage.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.” He thought, 'Okay. Two twenty is better than one twenty. And with the low amps. This trap will shock them. But, it will not likely kill them. Now, I will not need the ground, as I finish stripping the other two wires.'
Lee then cut the green wire to where the three colored wires went back into the sheath. He then stripped the red and blue wires, starting at the end of the exposed wires, by two feet.
When Lee finished, he looked up at Garibaldi, as he said, “Take the male end of your cord, and find a nearby plug, and plug it in. But, do not plug it into my power-cord.”
Garibaldi replied, “Okay. I will.” He turned and went to his power-cord, as he thought, 'Lee clearly has a plan. I might as well got along with it. But, we are burning time doing this. Also, I need to be careful to get my cord, and not Lee's, so I don't accidentally electrocute him.'
When Garibaldi reached the cord, he leaned down, and picked up the male end of his cord. He made sure it was his cord, and Lee's cord, so he wouldn't accidentally electrocute Lee.
Next, Garibaldi leaned back up, and walked to the nearest hallway wall socket he could find, as his cord unwrapped itself, behind him.
Meanwhile, Lee sheathed his knife, got up, and pulled the stripped part of his cord with himself, as he walked down to the stairwell. As he walked, his cord continued to unwind.
He carefully walked down a flight of stairs, he then bent down, and tied the red wire at the top of the corner railing, while making sure the wire touch the concrete. Lee got up, and walked down another flight of stairs, with the blue wire.
He then bent down, and tied the blue wide at the bottom of that corner railing, while making sure the wire was touching the concrete floor as well.
Lee stood up. As he made his way back up, he thought, 'At worst, I trip the breaker to just this small section. But, if my plan works, I will delay Rock's team for a little while.'
When Lee reached the hallway, he saw Garibaldi was standing there, by the doorway. With Garibaldi already plug in his cord.
Lee stepped to the side, to allow Garibaldi to see into the stairwell.
Garibaldi looked into the door, leading into the stairwell, and the wires there were inside he. He then turned to Lee. He commented, “Okay. I see you are building an electrical trap.”
Lee turned towards Garibaldi, as he stated, “Yes. I am. And this trap should work. Or, trip the breaker for this small part of the building. If it works, it will slow them down.”
Garibaldi asked, “I agree. It is worth the risk. How long until you are done?
Lee replied, “A minute. Maybe less. All we need to do now, deals with the fire-hose, and the electrical cord.”
Garibaldi pointed out, in a calm tone of voice, “Well hurry. We have a lot to do.”
Lee then walked over to the end of the fire-hose that was connected to the wall.
He then let the hose slide through his hands, to his right side, with the hose both sliding in his hands, while being guided in the direction he was taking it. Lee continued doing this until he ended the stairwell. He then set the hose continued to slide in his hand, as he took it down a flight of stairs.
When Lee reached bottom corner, of that flight of stairs, where it turned, Lee pulled out his knife, and cut the hose, completely part, at that point. He then sheathed his knife. Next, he then leaned over, as the position, the part of the hose, that was still connected to the wall, to where the opening was hose was set right behind the exposed red wire, and pointed down the next flight of stair, where blue wires, several steps down.
After which, he picked up the loose peace of hose, leaned up, and pulled the loss hose back up with him, to the hallway he had just come from.
Lee walked by Garibaldi, as he dropped the loose hose. He went over to the box the fire-hose had been in, with that end of the hose still connected to the shutoff valve, in the box.
Lee then turned the small wheel, a full turn. He heard the water moving through the hose, as he though, 'All I want is just need a steady flow. I don't need, nor want to turn it all the way on.'
Next, Lee walked back over to the stairwell. He saw the water was just gushing out of the host, and down the stairs, with enough water to wet the entirety of each step, and corner, as it went down to the ground floor.
When Lee reached the hallway, Garibaldi was waiting for Lee, in the same place he had been before. By the door to the stairwell.
But, Lee saw that during his absence, Garibaldi had retrieved the female end of the uncut power-cord.
Garibaldi held the female end of the electrical cord he had just plugged in, in his right hand.
Garibaldi commented, “I take it you are going to need this.”
Lee came to a stop a stop by Garibaldi. He looked at Garibaldi. Gave Garibaldi a warm smile, as he complimented, “I enjoy working with competent people that can see when a plan is coming together. And whom know what I am going to need next in my plans, before I have to make a request.”
Garibaldi turned Lee's smile, as he replied, “Same here.”
Lee gently took the female end of Garibaldi’s cord with his right hand.
Lee then bend over, and picked up the male end of his cord, with his left hand.
Lee leaned back up straight. He looked over Garibaldi, whom was looking back at him.
Lee said, “Now, the moment of truth.”
Lee plugged both cords together. After a few seconds of nothing happened to the lighting, Lee commented, “I guess it work.”
Garibaldi stated, “Either way, we have other work to do. Let's do the tripods next.”
Lee agreed, “You're right.”
Garibaldi then turned and started heading back towards the lab.
Meanwhile, Lee dropped the plugged in cords to the floor, and he followed Garibaldi to the lab.
As they walked back to the lab, Lee looked at his watch, and he saw they has spent ten minutes doing all that.
While they walked, Lee thought, 'To much time was spent doing this. We have to hurry.'
(_)
A minute later, they reach the lab, and the weapons locker.
Lee silently watched as Garibaldi pulled out one of the PPG automated machine guns.
Lee pulled out one of the weapons the same way Garibaldi did so.
Lee held the PPG machine gun in his hands, while keeping the barrel of the weapon facing away from Garibaldi and Bernard. He thought, 'These things are not that heavy. Just big. Though, I will have to be careful, when handling them.'
Lee then noticed Bernard, at the island, in the back of the room, has he was still putting the reality device back together.
Lee thought, 'Please, finished before they get here.'
Lee turned to Garibaldi.
Lee watched as Garibaldi to his PPG machine gun and brought it to the center of the room, between the island and the large windows.
Garibaldi then set the tripod and machine gun, with the barrel of the weapon facing the window.
Lee even noticed Garibaldi lean down and push buttons on a panel on the left side of the stock of the weapon. While making sure he stay behind the weapon.
Lee did the same thing. As he set the tripod mounted weapon down, beside the other weapon, to Lee's left, while facing the window. Lee pointed the barrel towards the windows. Next, he leaned down, pressed the same buttons on the left side of the stock, of the weapon he was setting up.
As Lee leaned up, he saw both weapons were fifteen feet away from the window, five feet from the island, behind them, and side by side. The two automated weapons also had a clear field of fire to the large windows.
Lee then noticed Garibaldi standing next to him, as the older man silently watched Lee set up his PPG machine gun.
Garibaldi asked, “Any problems?”
Lee answered, “No. But, I am concerned these weapons might harm anyone that came in, after we escape.”
Garibaldi explained, “Not to worry. Given you do not want to shoot the humans after us. The settings on those buttons I set are so the weapons will not shoot humans. Though, there is a setting for not shooting humans and aliens. But, I am not taking any chances the sensors might accidentally decide to not fire on the boomers coming after us.”
Lee said, “That is a good call.”
Garibaldi responded, “Thanks for the vote of confidence. Now, they way the system works is that the weapons have three forms of sensors. A standard camera with pattern recognition for shapes and colors. Like human shapes, and normal human skin tones. A motion sensor. And a heat sensor with pattern recognition for shapes, and heat signatures.”
“Any two of the heat signatures, shapes, or colors, that does not line up with human, will be fired upon. Otherwise, it should not fire. My company makes these weapons. And this safety system is a wonderful selling point. Also, the local police and military does not use thermo-camoflage gear, as a standard practice, so these weapons should not fire on them.”
“There is also two other safety features. Unless otherwise set, if it sees a human in the line of fire, it stops firing. It has pressure points on the bottom of the tripod. If the tripod is moved, or the weapon is picked up. The weapon locks, and cannot be manual used, unless its systems are reset. So, if the weapon is knocked on its side, it will not automatically fire.”
“Still, these weapons are great for holding a choke point. They are able to turn, and pivot on all points, from their base. Thus being able to lock on the target, and fire within less than two seconds. With a rate of accurate, sustained fire that is almost unmatched for any weapon of its type and size.”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'I swear. I think he is giving me the sales pitch, in the hopes I buy one, later. Still, I love working with a man who comes prepared. And I think it is best I don't mention that boomers' fusion system. With them fusing other electronics and weapons, to their bodies and using them. Including, firearms. We are already in a stressful enough situation, as is. I don't want to add to that.'
Lee stated, “Good. Now, please start closing the barricade doors. While, I will get the third PPG machine gun ready. I will wait to turn it on, until you get back... Just in case.”
Garibaldi replied, “Okay.” He then turned, and rushed out of the room.
Meanwhile, Lee went back to the weapons locker.
As soon as Garibaldi left the room, at the island table, Bernard did not looked up from his work, as he casually asked, “Lee, who are you really?”
Lee did not turn to the other man, as he cracked a grin. He thought, 'I guess it makes sense that you want to ask that question, when your boss is out of earshot.' He coyly answered, “A man out of time and space, in so many ways... Now, please get back to work.”
Bernard chuckled, as he continued working on putting back together Lee's reality device.
(_)
A minute later, as Lee carried the third, and final PPG machine gun with him, into the hallway, he saw Garibaldi walked passed him, and towards the west end of the floor.
Lee turned towards the west end of the hallway, as he saw the last set of double barricade doors had closed behind Garibaldi.
Lee did not let this distract him, as he walked over and set the tripod mounted weapon up, about ten feet from the western barricade door.
Lee thought, 'That was quick. But then, with our asses on the line. We have to be quick. Also, those doors shut quietly.'
Nearly a minute later, just as Lee finished setting the weapon up, on its tripod, with the end of its barrel facing twenty feet from the western barricade door, he heard footsteps approaching him, from behind.
Lee turned around to see Garibaldi walking up to him.
Behind Garibaldi, Lee saw the nearest eastern barricade doors were shut tight.
Lee mentally noted, 'That last eastern set of doors is less than ten feet from entrance to the lab. This is literally spitting distance from where I plan to take cover from behind that island. That is way too close to have a firefight with those expert gunslingers.'
'And I will not have to lean out the door, to keep them at bay. But, I better hope either, Bernard gets my reality device fixed, beforehand. Or, they arrive just as the boomers do, from the west side of the building. Or, we are screwed. Because, I am pretty sure we will not be able to hold off the boomers for long, either.'
'Still, I better finish with this weapon, so I can talk with Garibaldi.'
Lee quickly bent down behind the weapon, and he punched the buttons on the stock.
As Lee leaned back up, Garibaldi reached him.
Garibaldi stated, “That is the last set barricade doors. I cannot think of any thing else we can do.”
Lee said, “I agree.”
Garibaldi mentioned, “You know. This situation reminds me of an old sci-fi horror movie, from your time period. It was simply titled, Aliens. The sequel to the movie, Alien.”
Lee thought, with concerned, 'Why did he have to mention that movie, by name?!... Considering those horrors exist in the multiverse, I don't even want to think about them. Just like the works of Lovecraft. I just don't want to think about those creatures, either. But, that movie does point out some problems we might have.'
Lee deadpanned, “Yea. The director's cut. Where the automatic defenses hold off the monsters for a while.”
Garibaldi responded, “Yes. I like movies where it is soldiers versus monsters. Been there. Done that myself. Usually, the soldiers win, as long as they have the firepower, manpower, and they know what they are dealing with, beforehand.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. The only monster movies I respect are the ones were the people set against the monster are armed with gun, or some other time of firearm, they know to properly use.”
Garibaldi said, “I agree.”
Lee suggested, “Well, if you like those types of movies, I suggest you track down the movie, Dog Soldiers. British Soldiers versus werewolves.”
Garibaldi replied, with mild amusement in his tone of voice, “Seen it. And it is a good movie. Though, it is a bit dated.”
Lee shrugged, as he said, “Well, for you, it would be. Me, on the other hand. No. I found soldiers versus werewolves to be cooler than werewolves versus vampires, and soldiers versus alien monsters.”
Garibaldi commented, “I can see your point. And I have personally face things far worse than any of those types of monsters.”
Lee calmly stated, “You are one of the few people that can honestly make that claim. Still, the movie you first mentioned does raise a few questions with our situation. Such as, the characters in that movie did not take into account the ventilation in both above and below them, in their siege. Do we have to worry about our ventilation ducks?”
Garibaldi answered, “No. The ventilation ducks are to small to get into.”
Lee responded, “Good. Still, should we be concerned if the killing machines might break through ceiling? Or floor?”
Garibaldi stated, “The floors and ceilings of this building are made of concrete that is reinforced with titanium bars, in a lattice work. If they try to come through the floor, or ceiling, we will hear them them long before they even start to make it onto our floor.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. Do these walls have any metal in them, to prevent people form just busting through the walls?”
Garibaldi answered, “Yes. Two centimeter thick, vertical, titanium bars, set every twenty centimeters in the walls. As rich as he was. William Edgars could not afford solid metal reinforced concrete walls, for a fortress this size.” He thought, 'And I have been updating it, ever sense I became CEO of this place.'
Lee said, “Okay. We can still work with that. And it is unfortunate that PPG rounds don't go through walls.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Why is that?”
Lee commented, “Because those that are after me use guns which use bullets that will go through walls.”
Garibaldi calmly replied, “I will keep that in mind.” He thought, 'That is a very good point. I have to keep in mind that those coming for us use a wider, and more dangerous, variety of weapons than I have experience defending against, in a close quarters gunfight.'
Lee responded, “Good. Now, let's head back to the lab and wait for the storm, while hoping you employee can finish the job, before this shit storm fully hits up.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Yes. Let's hope so. By the way, I noticed something about you, Lee, that I need to ask you about. For a guy who is dying, and facing an army of pissed off, badass women, you seem pretty happy?”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I am probably the happiest dead man walking person you will ever meet. Given I am in the late stages of cancer and I have a badass army breathing down my neck. I know that more than likely I am going to die one way or another.”
“But, I have broken through the realities. I have defeated my enemies time and again. I had proven to myself that anything is possible. And so what if my body is about to die? I still have my soul. I know reincarnation is real. The possibilities for myself are still wide open. I honestly look forward to what role I will have in my next human incarnation. So, there is no reason for me to worry about the long term. I just have to make it through the short term.”
Garibaldi complimented, “That is a good way to look at your situation.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.” Lee then turned and started walking towards the lab door, with Garibaldi following right behind him.
(_)
A few seconds later, as they walked into the lab, Lee turned to Bernard, as he asked, “How is it coming?”
Bernard did not look up, as he responded, “Slowly be surely.”
Lee sarcastically thought, 'That response does not fill me with confidence. But, I need to know how much time was have left?'
Lee looked at his wrist watch. It stated ten twenty-nine AM.
Garibaldi noticed this, as he inquired, “How much time do we have left?”
Lee looked up and towards Garibaldi, as he answered, “By your estimation, about ten to twenty minutes.”
Garibaldi said, “Okay. So we do have a few minutes.” He turned towards the interior wallscreen monitor, by the open hallway door.
Lee noticed this, and he turned in the same direction as Garibaldi.
Garibaldi stated, “I suggest we see what the others after us are doing.”
Both men then walked over to the wallscreen. Garibaldi quickly changed the monitor to show a four was split screen, with four different camera feeds.
Garibaldi then used his fingers to page through all four feeds, very quickly, until he found what he wanted to watch, on what was going outside of their floor.
Lee and Garibaldi then saw something happen on one of the feeds, that made Garibaldi said, “Well, that is interesting.”
Lee commented, “I guess we don't have to worry about those boomer dogs anymore.”
Garibaldi agreed, “Yes. Let us count our blessings.”
Nearby, Bernard continued working, as he said, in a humorous tone of voice, “Amen to that.”
Lee looked over at Garibaldi, as he complimented, “That is what one more thing I like about you Garibaldi. You hire people with a sense of humor.”
Nearby, as he continued working, Bernard cracked a smile over Lee's comment.
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as he responded, “Yea. Having those around me with a sense of humor, helps keep me sane.”
Lee replied, “I agree. That can help.”
Garibaldi offered, “Since we got a few minutes to kill, anything you would like to talk about?”
Lee cracked a grin, as he answered, “Matthew... Babylon Five Station... Wicked burn...”
Garibaldi smiled, as he questioned, “He mentioned that to you?”
Lee answered, “You would be surprised what people would say when they are running for their life, for the very first time.”
Garibaldi shrugged, as he casually said, “Actually, I would not be suprised. I have seen it first hand. And, given how wild that story is, I don't think you would believe me... On second though, given the screwy situation we are in, you likely would. But, it is not something I would talk about while sober.”
Lee guessed, “And since you are a recovering alcoholic, I am never going to find out what happened, during that event, from you?”
Garibaldi responded, “Exactly. Though, from what Matthew told me, it was very funny, and very strange. But, you will not get me to gossip about my own personnel.”
Lee thought, 'I have to admit, that is a good policy for Garibaldi to take.' He conceded, “Fair enough.”
Garibaldi mentioned, “Still, you might someday get the story from Matthew. But, I suggest you don't ask him about it. He was a good friends with that journalist of his. And talking about brings of a lot of mixed feelings for him. Concerning he has not seen his journalist friend in years.”
Lee said, “You have a point there. And I will respect his privacy.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Good. So, have you been in any battles before.”
Lee admitted, “Only a few gunfights.” He thought, 'Of which, happened last night.'
Garibaldi commented, “Well then, you are about to get a real taste of war. So, don't lose your nerve.”
Lee flatly said, “Don't worry. I won't. Also, believe it, or not. I try to avoid violence.”
Garibaldi responded, “After last night's chase though Mars Dome One, I believe you. And since you kept calm throughout that entire situation, I am not afraid of you going to pieces in the coming firefight.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Garibaldi said, “Your welcome.”
The two men then turned back to look at the video feeds from the wallscreen monitor.
A few seconds later, Garibaldi noticed something on one of the camera feeds, as he commented, “Well, it looks like your electrical trap is working.”
Lee said, “Yes. Now, let's see how long it takes them to get through it.”
Garibaldi suggested, “Want to bet on it?”
Lee replied, “Nah. That would be a bad way to jinx the situation.”
Garibaldi said, “Agreed.”
Both men then went back to watching the camera feeds, as nearby, Bernard continued working on rebuilding Lee's reality device.
(_)
Roughly twenty minutes ago, a few hundred yards outside the east gate of the Edgars Industries Headquarters.
The others saw Rock quite fold up her cellphone, and pocket it. Though, they could see from the look on her face that she was not happy.
Rock mentally cursed, 'Damn! I can not believe Lee would put us into this situation. And that arrogant bastard also had the audacity to thrown my own words in my face.'
Rock then forced herself to calm down, as she continued her thoughts, 'Still, Lee was right about what he said, concerning my homeland. I can never go back to my homeland. Also, he was correct that I never told anyone about that. And though his words on that subject bought me no real comfort, he did make a few good points.'
'In addition, he stated the exact fingerprint and placement of the fingerprint. And that he correctly guessed that Dutch and Revy taught me how to use a gun, and proper gun safety. Which is kind of obvious that they would have done so, given the line of work we use to be in. With those two giving me some interesting gun lessons.'
'And these are also reminders of how Lee's mind works, when it comes to the details.'
Rock then cracked a grin, as she thought, in a more happy manner, 'I wish we could play this type of game, between I and Lee, under less serious stakes. Because it is clearly so much fun for both of us to do this. Due to us both enjoying such challenges.'
Meanwhile, among those near Rock were Aeryn and Violin.
To pass the time, the retired veteran, Sebacean soldier was doing the final checks on her pulse burster, when she noticed that Rock had finished her conversation on her cellphone. Aeryn looked up at Rock, and saw that her current leader went from being unhappy, to cracking a smile.
Aeryn inquired, in a firm tone of voice, “Rock, what is going on?”
Nearby, Violin over heard her wife, as she looked over at Rock, she thought, 'I think I will keep quiet and, for once, listen. Because, I am not real sure what the best way to handle this situation either... Besides, given my super-strength, speed, and durability, if I speak up, I might end up of getting volunteered into fighting those boomers with my bare hands. And I have no interest in doing so.'
Inside Violin head, Harvey commented, 'That is what I like about you, John. You still know when it is good time to back away.'
Violin mentally responded, 'But, with our luck, we are going to get sucked into this battle, one way, or another.'
Harvey mentally suggested, 'Then, we need to volunteer for something that does not put us on the front lines. Before we are assigned to the front line.'
Violin mentally complimented, 'Good idea.'
At that moment, Rock looked over at Aeryn, as she asked, in a calm tone of voice, “You heard the question, I asked Shenhua and Sawyer about, concerning the boomers?”
Aeryn answered, “Yes. Though, I admit I was not fully paying attention to the conversation.” She mentally added, 'I figured you would brief us before we moved out.'
Rock said, “Well, in the past, Revy and her team members, that worked for Chang, during their time in the Tower, sent an entire army of combat and battle boomers after Garibaldi. And they are attacking the other side of the this complex, right now. If we want to capture Lee, alive and relatively unharmed, we are going to have to slow down that army of boomers, on the other side of this place. While another group goes in and gets him.”
Aeryn shrugged, as she responded, “With this group, that should not be a problem. But, I wonder why Lee has not escaped, yet?”
Rock said, “I am not sure.” She mentally added, 'Even Lee is not arrogant to stick around just to inflate his ego. He knows how dangerous boomers are. He is not going to intentionally get himself into a situation, with him caught in the crossfire, between us and the boomers. Also, he has tried not to kill us, and instead, he resorted to running and using nonlethal means when he confronted us.'
'That means that the reality device he stole from me, might not be working. Or, he doesn't have it. And there is a quick way to check.'
Rock then reached down, and she grabbed the infrared binoculars that were hanging by a cord, around the her neck, with the binoculars resting on her chest, right below her breasts.
Rock then held the binoculars up to her eyes, with both hands. And she looked the binoculars towards the top of the center tower of Edgars Industries Headquarters.
She saw, on the sixty-eighth floor, two heat signatures, which Rock could tell were men. With both men heading towards the some elevators.
Rock that, 'So, Lee and Garibaldi are heading somewhere...'
She then looked eight floors down, to the sixty-first floor, where the group had previously spotted the only other personal in the building. And Rock could make out the person was a man as well.
Rock thought, 'And the two of them are probably heading to this other guy we saw earlier. I admit that none of us paid much attention to him. I now believe that was a mistake.'
Rock used her binoculars to zoom in on the man, and she saw that the man was in what looked like a researcher lab. The man was leaning down, over an island table, working on something.
Rock mentally guessed, 'From the look of the way the man is moving his arms, and hands. And he clearly using tools that infrared is not picking up. I would guess he has likely taken something apart, and he is studying it. And what is the item that Garibaldi would keep someone here to study, while sending everyone else away?... My stolen reality device...'
Rock's lips curled into a wicked grin, as she continued her thoughts, 'Meaning Lee does not have the reality device on him, and he was stalling, until he can get to it. But, I would bet money, that he does not know the device has been taken apart. And that is going to be a fun surprise for him to learn.'
'I wish I had realized this, when we first looked at that building with our equipment. And before Lee hung up on me.'
'I should have known that other guy would not be here, unless Garibaldi had him doing something important. Such, as study the reality device. I could have used this as leverage against Lee. Lee might have surrendered to us, if we called his bluff, and informed him the reality device was taken apart. And he would have believed me. Because I would tell the truth on such an important situation.'
'Lee knows that I prefer honesty in my negotiating tactics... Oh well, that is in the past. Now, we just need to get to him, and the others, before the boomers do.'
Aeryn noted that Rock had been looking through her binoculars for several seconds. She inquired, “What do you see?
Rock heard Aeryn's question, and she thought, 'I think it is best I not tell the others that the reality device Lee has is not working. That will just make them rush in faster. And we need level heads in this situation, or someone is going to get seriously hurt, or kills.'
Rock removed her binoculars from her eyes, and allowed them to drop back down, to her chest. She turned to Aeryn, as she answered, “Lee and Garibaldi are on the move. They are heading for the heading for the sixty-first floor, where the other heat signature showed a person being in the building.”
Nearby, Revy overheard this, as she turned to Rock and Aeryn. She commented, “Well, it figures that Lee would want to try to help everyone he can, get clear, before he escapes.”
Rock mentally conceded, 'That is a good excuse. But, I am still sticking to the reality device not working theory.' She turned to Revy, as she said, “Perhaps. But, either way, it is now a race to get to Lee.”
Revy smirked, “I have always loved races.”
Rock quipped, “Except in bed.”
Aeryn giggled at Rock's joke, for a few seconds.
Revy took Rock's joke in stride, as she commented, “What can I say? In enjoy foreplay.”
Rock shrugged, as she said, “I know. So do I. Still, I need a minute to think of a plan.”
Revy complimented, “Go ahead. You have a flair for thinking outside the box.”
Rock replied, “Thank you.”
Rock looked back at the tall, center tower of the headquarters in front of her, as she thought, 'Now, to come up with plan. While taking into account Lee's point of view, and possible plans that Lee may come up with to slow us down, and buy time. Because, once he learns the reality device is not working, he is going to use ever stalling tactic he can, short of using lethal towards us. And except for the maids, and the Bebop crew, last night. We have been playing softball with getting him. And he has returned the favor.'
'Still, he will do all this to buy time for that man working on repairing the device. I know Lee was intentionally vague on how reality devices work. Because even he does not know how they work. While we do. And we are going to keep that a secret. So, he will employ the next best thing, and have the guy that took apart the device, put it back together again. All in the hopes that it will still work.'
'And if the device still is not working, when the researcher is finish. In all likelihood, Lee will surrender himself, and the others to us, before he allows the boomers to get him, and the others.'
'But, I am not going to gamble that the device will not work. I am going to go from the point of view that it will work. And that we are working under that time limit, along with the race to get to him, Garibaldi, and the researcher, before the boomers do.'
'And if Lee escapes into the multiverse again. I have no idea where he will go. Though, I am sure, given he is crazier than we are... Never thought, in my entire life that I would say that about someone, considering the crew I run with... Though, taking his insanity into account, he will likely go to a location that we will not immediately follow him to. Because we will consider that location too dangerous to go to.”
'In addition, given the boomers are after Garibaldi, Lee will convince Garibaldi will be going with him. Which would likely not be that hard. And this means that Lee will have a savvy badass with him, to assist and aid him. That will only makes the situation more difficult in catching Lee.'
'So, we must catch Lee here, or we may never get another chance at catching Lee, again.'
'Though, I have gotten to the point, I have no serious hard feeling towards Lee. He has played this game well. And while what he did to us, in his writings was wrong. Eda and River are right. He didn't realize what he was doing at the time would effect real people. Plus, he has always been polite to us. And given Annie likes him, that means his manners towards all of us are genuine.'
'Yes. I want to punish him for what he has done to us. But, like I told him. I intend for his punishment to be something he will survive and recover from. And I would do my best to keep my promise. And I think I could get Chang, River, and Annie, to help me keep that promise. Given Chang and River agree that Lee needs to be punished. And while Annie just thinks Lee needs to be left alone. She will go along with the other two, if it helps Lee in the long term.'
'And I don't I blame Lee for using the situation of having two groups coming for him and Garibaldi, at the same time, to his advantage. And we both know that the presence of a small army of boomers, scrubs our full on assault plans. But, that does not mean we are going to just cut Lee loose, just yet.'
'I will just send in a smaller team. But, they will have to go in from the inside, from the bottom. If I try to have the girls teleport to the top, and scale that building from the outside, the boomers might see them, and snipe them at a distance. I just cannot take that risk.'
'Also, we know for a fact, from the infrared equipment, and our research this morning of the Edgars headquarters, that the top to floors of that main building is the Garibaldi private home. And I don't want to know what traps Michael might have in those two floors. So, they are going to have to go in from the bottom, and work their way up. Using the stairs. Because the elevators are too risky.'
'The only reason we did not hack the elevators was the it might make Lee and Garibaldi both even more unpredictable and dangerous. But, I am sure Lee will soon do something to elevators, to stop us, and the boomers, from using them. While using the elevators to his advantage.'
'Along with this, Lee likely already has plans to deal with us, and the boomers separately. And he has already probably guessed we will take the stairs closest to us, and he will do something to slow us down that way. And what he has in mind for the boomers will likely be very destructive towards the boomers that come after them.'
'Fortunately, we know where they are heading. And those I have in mind for the team going after Lee, Garibaldi, and that other person, will not get easily winds by climbing those started. Still, that is going to eat time. And time is the only thing that Lee needs right now. Not that I can do much about it at the moment. Because my primary consider is to not get anyone I care about, killed. Lee is actually a secondary objective.
where the are going.'
'But first, before we go after into that building, we are going to need another team to slow those boomers down. Otherwise, this mission would be suicide mission.'
By then, all of those presents had been informed by each other, that Rock was finally going to come up with a plan to capture Lee. And they had already turned their attention towards Rock.
Revy asked, “Had enough time for a plan?”
Rock looked over at Revy, as she replied, “Yea.”
Revy casually questioned, “Good. Given this is my screw up, what are we going to do, Rock? I know we are going in. But, I want to know how you want to play this. Even I admit those boomers are too dangerous, not play this carefully.”
Rock thought, 'What a minute, since this is the Hell Sabers fault, I wonder?' Rock asked, “Revy, since you and your other team members are the ones that sent the boomers. It is possible those boomers will not attack you, or the other members?”
Revy stated, “No. They will attack me and anyone else, with deadly force, in the target area. Which I believe is the complex itself. In the field, we used IFF devices to make sure the boomers would not attack us, and list us as friendly. There were two located in our hardsuits, and one on our person. Chang liked to be prepared. And before you ask, I doubt any of us have ours. My is back home, in a drawer, somewhere in our bedroom.”
Rock thought, 'IFF. Identification, friend or foe system. It is a simple system to use, and makes sense for Chang to have used it. Unfortunately, the combinations to the codes are too complex to break right now, in time, to help. So, back to my original plan.'
Rock responded, “Okay. In that case, before we go in, we need another team to slow those boomers down.” She turned to Sylia, whom was nearby, as she requested, “Sylia, I know how much the Knight Sabers want to capture Lee. But, your group is best equipped to stop those boomers. Or, at least slow them down.”
In her white hardsuit, with her helmet on, and face plate down, Sylia had been silently listening to the conversation between Rock, Revy, and Aeryn. Sylia turned to directly face Rock, Revy, and Aeryn, as she calmly agreed, “You are correct. What do you have in mind?”
Rock stated, “A classic flanking move. Go around to the other side of the building, and attack their flank.”
Sylia said, “That will not be a problem.”
Aeryn held up her pulse burster as she requested, “I would like to go, as well. I did not bring this thing around just to stand back and watch. Still, the pulse burster is not a close quarters weapon. It is better when used out in the open.”
Violin mentally grumbled, 'I hate being right.'
Harvey mentally replied, 'Ah, don't worry. If we time this right, we can still make this work for us.'
Rock thought, 'If Aeryn was a guy, I would think she was bringing that weapon along because she was trying to compensate for something. Maybe, she is actually doing that, right now. But, I am not crazy enough to say that out loud. And I have a feeling that weapon is probably more destructive then it appears. Though, Sylia will have to have the find word.'
Rock said, “Since Sylia will be the one leading this mission, it is ultimately her call.”
Rock, Aeryn, and Violin then turned to Sylia.
Sylia asked two seemingly innocent questions, “It depends. What combat skills do you have? And how much battlefield experience have you had?
Violin spoke up, “Don't ask. It would take her literally all day to answer those questions.”
Sylia looked over at Aeryn, and Aeryn just simply shrugged, in response.
Sylia turned to Violin, as she questioned, “And you are?”
Violin answered, “Violin Cephon Shinmyou Crichton, the reincarnation of John Crichton. This is my wife, Aeryn Sun Crichton.”
Sylia responded, “Ah, you are that reincarnation from Lee's stories. And you are both originally from the Farscape reality. Good series.”
Violin and Aeryn replied, in unison, “Thank you.”
Sylia thought, 'It took me a moment to recognize them. While John, or should I say, Violin is the most dangerous of the two. As John, Violin was responsible for some very, very destructive actions. And as Violin, and part alien super-soldier biology, she also now has the physical abilities to back up her intelligence and creativity.'
'Though, now that I recall. Last night, Lee warned Violin not to fight us. That was very wise of him.'
'And Violin has clearly not spoken up, until now, because she realizes how dangerous this mission is. And she does not want to end of fighting the boomers, herself. I cannot blame her for that.'
'As for Aeryn. She is a good foot solider. And with that weapon, we could make use of her. But, she will have to be careful.'
Sylia stated, “In which case, you may come. But, I am not sure how we can transport you. I am planning to fly and hit them hard at point blank range. But, without powerarmor, I don't feel it would be safe for you to come with us, in that manner. Both the boomers and the complex's defenses would be too dangerous for you to be that close to the battle. I would prefer for you to cover us from a distance.”
Aeryn calmly said, “I agree with your assessment.”
Sylia thought, with relief, 'It is so enjoyable to deal with such reasonable people. Still, we do have a problem with getting her there.'
Violin thought, 'Now, is my chance.' She stated, “We can use one of our reality devices to teleport to the west side, on the outside of the complex, beyond the gate. Away from the boomers. The boomers have already likely broke through the concrete walls surrounding this place. And made it into the courtyard of the complex.”
“We will use that opening to fire into the complex, towards the boomers flank, as Rock suggested. And because we will be outside the perimeter of the complex, it is very likely the defenses will not target us. Or, at least the defenses that are still standing on that side of the headquarters.”
“And as my wife here, kicks ass and takes names, I will stand guard, by her, in case a boomer does show up, unexpectedly. With that boomer being too close to us, for her weapon to use her weapon safely.”
Sylia asked, “Do you think you can handle fighting a boomer?”
Violin honestly admitted, “I doubt Winona, my pulse pistol, is not going to do much against those things. But, I can take one or two of this boomers down, at once, with my bare hands. Though, I really do not want to test that theory.”
Sylia thought, 'Neither Aeryn, nor Violin are idiots. They clearly taking this situation very seriously.' She complimented, “Wise thinking. Aeryn, you will provide artillery support, while Violin guards you. But, I want you to both to wait until three minutes until after we start our attack, before you join in. So, we are the first to draw their attention.”
Sylia mentally added, 'This way, I will not have to worry about Aeryn. And it will be one less problem for me to deal with, in the coming battle.'
Violin said, “Sure.”
Aeryn's lips curled into wicked grin, as she replied, “No problem.”
Inside Violin's mind, Harvey complimented, 'You volunteered for the task that keeps you off the front lines, but allows you to protect Aeryn. Without your wife taking offense to you doing so. Good job.'
Violin mentally said, 'Thank you.'
Revy commented, “Speaking of defenses. How many hits do you think you hardsuits can take from the lasers and other weapons in that base, before you go down?”
Sylia looked at Revy, as she thought, 'As loath as I am to admit. She has hardsuit experience. And it is a good question.” She responded, “That is a good point. And our hardsuits can probably take a few laser blasts. Though, I doubt that will be a problem. The boomers have likely already destroyed most of the outside defense grid on that side of the building.”
Aeryn agreed, “True. But, it is nice to think ahead.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Sylia thought, 'I like the way this woman thinks. I think my team, and her, will work together well. And I might as well tell them...' She commented, “Also, my team and I are trained to avoid being hit. We like to stay mobile as much as possible.”
Revy responded, “I can appreciate that.” She mentally added, 'Considering, that is how I like to fight, as well.'
Rock had been listening to the conversation. She thought, 'Good. That is settled. Now, to handle the next part of my plan.' She turned to Balalaika and B, as he stated, “Balalaika, B. Please. I need you to keep your sniper rifles at the ready, so you can cover the main tower, and keep those boomers from scaling that building. I know you can only cover this side, along with the north and south side. And that the building is a fair distance from here. But, do you think you can take out those boomers with your weapons?”
Balalaika and B both heard Rock, as they turned to face her.
The two russian women unslung their sniper rifles. Balalaika state, “While I know we can hit them from her. I am not sure we can penetrate their armor from this distance.”
Rock thought, 'I think it is best that I ask no more from these two. Also, I am tempted to ask those two to go with the team I am going to put together, to enter the building. But, with both of them pregnant, that is not an option.'
Rock said, “That will be fine.” She then turned back to Sylia, as she request, “Sylia, if we have problems with boomers on this side of the complex, we may have to contact you for assistance.”
Sylia stated, “That should not be a problem. And I shall also keep a watchful eye on the west side of the main building.”
Rock replied, “Good.”
Meanwhile, Balalaika and B walked closer a little closer to the headquarters. Until, the rest of the group were at least ten feet behind both of them. Then, as they stood side by side, with Balalaika being to B's right side, they both got into kneeling positions, beside each other, as they uncovered the caps covering the front of back optics of their PSO-1 scopes, on their SVD Dragunov sniper rifles.
Then, they brought their rifles to their right shoulders, as they looked threw their scopes, at the main tower building of the complex.
Due to the fact they were being asked to cover a distance that was further than their sniper rifles were designed for, meant they had to be as steady as possible. The most steadiest position for using a rifle was in the laying down, on the stomach, in a prone position. With the standing position being the most unsteady.
But, because they pregnant to the point their stomachs started to show. And they did not want to lay on their stomachs. Along with them having to look at an upwards angle, the prone position would not work for them. So, they took the kneeling position. With one knee on the ground, and the other leg being crouched, with the foot flatly on the ground. And because they were using their right shoulders to place the butt of their weapons against, it was their left knees they placed on the ground, near their right foot, that was also placed squarely on the ground.
The two lovers then began their vigil, to watch for any boomers that may try to scale the outside building, from the three sides the couple could cover from their vantage point.
Revy looked over at Rock, as she smirked. She stated, “Babe, it doesn't take a genius to figure out who you are going to appoint to lead the team going inside.”
Rock turned back to Revy, as she said, “You're right, Revy. You are the one that is going to lead the team going inside.”
Meanwhile, everyone had been attention to conversation being held between Rock, and those she was talking with, on dealing with the current situations. And there were a few groans among those in the crowd that had heard of Revy's appointment as leader of the team going in.
Revy looked around her friends, and allies, as she barked, “Hey!”
The groans quickly silenced.
Revy then turned back to Rock, as she said, “Thank you, Rock. Though, who do you have in mind to come with me?”
Rock answered, “Well, let us make this a volunteer mission.”
Revy agreed, “Works for me.”
Rock looked around the group, as she casually said, “Okay. Who wants to come on this questionably insane, highly dangerous mission?”
About twenty feet from Rock and Revy, Mal and Zoe had been one of the many people present that had heard Rock's request for volunteers. The two war buddies looked at each other, then they looked back towards the two leaders of the current operation they were a part of.
Mal thought, 'Now is our chance.' He stated, “I would like to join in on this hunt.”
Zoe said, “So would I.”
Rock turned towards them, as she questioned, “So, you two want to go?”
Zoe answered for Mal and herself, “Yes. And we will even be willing to take orders from Revy.”
Rock grinned as she thought, 'Now, let's see how much they want this.' She responded, “It would be worth it, just to see you two do that. So, you are in?”
Zoe calmly said, “Yes. And thank you, Rock.” She mentally reminded herself, 'Mission before personal snarkiness. No matter how tasty the bait is.'
Mal replied, “Yes.”
Rock thought, 'Those two much really want to go. Neither of them took the bait, and back talked me on my comment.'
Rock stated, “Good. You are both in.”
(_)
Nearby, Jayne had watched Mal and Zoe volunteer. He thought, 'I am glad the captain did not volunteer me, as well. I draw the line as fighting killing machines. Unless I am forced too. You cannot have revenge, if you are dead.'
Lotton was standing by Jayne. She whispered, to Jayne, “Jayne, why are those two volunteering for this mission? I though you guys had more sense than that?”
Lotton mentally reflected, 'Even I am not going to volunteer. Personally, I like Lee, and I do not think it is worth running into a boomer, to capture him. Especially, an army of boomers that I had a hand in the production of. I have not interest being trapped in a, destroyed by her own creation, situation.'
Jayne turned toward Lotton. He looked down at the much shorter woman, as he softly said, “Well, from experience. The best I can tell. The captain sometimes gets a wild hair to do something dangerous. And Zoe, being the good little soldier, goes with the captain, to make sure the captain does not get himself killed.”
Lotton shrugged, as she replied, “That figures.”
Jayne said, “Yea. And I don't mind.”
Lotton asked, “Why is that?”
Jayne answered, “It is moments like this that allow me to realize the fact that I have the more sense than anyone else in my crew.”
Lotton nodded a few times, as she agreed, “I can go along with that.”
Jayne said, “This is not the first time something like this has happened. Where the captain does something foolish.” He mentally added, 'But, at least he didn't try to drag us all in, this time.' He verbally continued, “And I highly to doubt it will be the last time.”
Lotton suggested, “Okay. Now, let's see who else is going to be a part of that team, next.”
Jayne replied, “Agreed.”
Both Lotton and Jayne turned back to looked at Rock, and those around the black haired, japanese woman.
(_)
At the moment, Roberta and Fabiola, in their black and white maids outfits, were standing midway be between Rock and Jayne.
Currently, the two maids looking over at Rock.
Roberta stated, “I will go, as well.” She turned to Fabiola, as she commented, “But, you will stay here, in case any boomers show up, and attack this group.”
Fabiola looked over at her teacher, as she said, with a disappointed in her tone of voice, “Fine.”
Both of the maids then looked back at Rock.
Rock looked over at the maids, as she thought, 'No point in arguing with her. I could not stop her, even if I wanted to. Plus, she is right, that is why I am holding Akira's family back. In case the boomers do show up here.'
'Also, while I am sure the we, and our kids, along with Balalaika and B, can handle a boomer, or two. I don't want to take any unnecessary chances. Besides, none of us want to send our kids into the battlefield. Instead, I will only send those with the experience, know-how, and the equipment to do so.'
'Though, it is best to remind her of a few things, first.'
Rock stated, “Okay. You're in. But, you will behave and not kill, or torture any people. Not even Lee. Until after we bring him to Lagoon island.”
In response, Roberta smiled towards Rock, as she replied, “That will be fine.”
Though, Roberta's response did little to ease Rock's concern with her going along with the team that would capture Lee.
By then, Sawyer and Shenhua approached Rock and Revy.
Rock and Revy turned towards Sawyer and Shenhua, as they came to a stop a few feet away from them.
Both were dressed in their usual clothing, with Sawyer having her chainsaw carried on her back, by a strap. While, Shenhua has here various knives hidden within her clothing.
Sawyer commented, in a calm tone of voice, “As much as firepower is a good thing. You may need someone to cut through things.”
Shenhua requested, “I would like to come on this hunt, as well.”
Rock said, “True. You are both in. And I want to come, Shenhua, in case you have to get into a melee, close quarters fight.”
Shenhua said, “Thanks.”
Nearby, Lotton noticed this. She turned to her two lovers, as she said, “Good luck.” She mentally added, 'And I hope you both come back safely.'
Shenhua and Sawyer turned to Lotton and they warmly smiled at her. Lotton saw this, and returned their warm smiles. The two women then turned back towards Rock.
Meanwhile, Revy thought, 'I guess the old Hell Saber team is back together again. Except for Arcee. But, I guess a girl cannot have everything.'
'Though, I am not going to mention the Hell Saber name out loud, with the Knight Sabers in earshot. Even I realize that it is best not to remind them that for a while, thanks to Lee and Chang, we were their hardsuited, bad girl counterparts.'
Rock then realized something, as she thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. I forgot. I asked our resident hackers to turn off the buildings defenses. The boomers already have a head start, with nothing to stop them. I need to correct this as quickly as possible.'
Rock then turned to the three hackers, Benny, Janet, and Nene, whom were about twenty-five feet from her, to her right. She requested, “Benny, Janet, Nene, I know I asked you to turn off the headquarters defenses, but I need you to set it so that the western defenses are turned back on, and active, while the defenses on the eastern left turned off. We need to buy ourselves time to reach Lee and the others, before the boomers do.”
At that moment, Nene has been standing, in her red and pink hardsuit, by Benny and Janet.
Benny and Janet has been sitting on the ground, with two laptops, linked to Nene's hardsuit, as the hacked into the Edgars' computer system. Nene has been using her hardsuit as a wireless router for Benny and Janet's computers.
And the three of them had found that they did their jobs well, when they worked together.
Benny and Nene has been doing most of the work, with Janet paid attention for any signal triangulation for them, and possible computer viruses.
At that moment, all threw hackers turned to Rock. Benny smiles, as she stated, “We are way ahead of you. And already done.”
Janet explained, “We were about to turn the defense system completely off. But, the moment we heard you state that boomers were here. With senors showing them on the western end of the complex. We starting doing just what you requested.”
Rock smiled, as she felt relief. Rock compliment, “Good job.” She thought, 'This is why I like working with competent people that know me. They can anticipate my requests, before I make them... Within reason. Now, to see if we can find out what is going on, while blinding Lee and Garibaldi.'
Rock inquired, “While I want the defenses to remains on. Can you turn off the camera system? I don't want to let them see us coming?”
Benny answered, “No. We found that the surveillance system is separate computer network, from the defense system. And we cannot access it. They can see us, but we cannot seen them.”
Rock responded, “Can't be helped. We have to remember that Garibaldi has years of experience of successfully dealing with off the wall security problems, such as the problems we, and the boomers, are presenting him.”
Benny agreed, “Yes. And he is likely the only person in the multiverse that can make that claim.”
Rock replied, “You are probably right about that.” She thought, 'Still, we need to move on to what we can do. And there is one other matter I need to ask from them...' She requested, “Also Nene, I will need you to go with Revy's group, as well.”
As Benny, Janet, and Nene, heard Rock's request, Nene disconnected the wires, running to the USB ports on their laptops, to the right gauntlet of her hardsuit. With the wires recoiling into her gauntlet.
Nene turned to Rock, as she questioned, in a curious, though firm tone of voice, that lacked no fear what so ever, “And while do you want me to go?”
Rock answered, “For a few reasons. One, while you have combat skills, your role, and your suit's role are not front line. You will not be missed in the coming fight outside, with the boomers. Also, you have hacking skills that Revy's group are going to likely need.”
“I need a hacker on her team. Also, you have a combat suit, while Benny and Janet do not. Plus, you suit offers a few advantages that can help Revy's group, if they run into environmental hazards.”
Nene conceded, “I see your point. But, Sylia will have to make the final decision.”
Rock and Nene turned to Sylia. Sylia answered, “Go with them, Nene. They will need you more than I do.”
Rock stated, “Good.”
Nearby, Benny and Janet folded their laptops closed, and stood up. Benny smiled, as she whispered into Janet's left ear, “I do not mind not going into a battlefield.”
Janet smiled, as she softly replied back, “Same here. Better her than us.” She mentally added, 'I am so happy I could help Benny and Nene with their hacking. Benny taught me well. Also, I seem to have hit it off well with Nene, as a friend. I think it is because I have a striking resemblance to her friend, Lisa Vanette, from the Bubblegum Crisis series. I have seen the series. And I wonder if my looks where inspired by Lisa's character?... Ah well. Just one of those mysteries in life I may never get an answer too.'
Rock looked around, at her group, as she stated, “Okay. Just to double check. Here is the overview of the plan. Sylia's team, with their motoslaves. Along, with Aeryn and Violin, will head out to flank the boomers, on the west end of the complex.”
Rock turned to Sylia, as she said, “We will give you fifteen minutes to get their attention, and draw any of their forces, that may have come close to the east end of the build. At the end of the f Revy and her team will enter from the east end of the building.”
Sylia responded, “That will be fine.”
Rock looked over at Revy, as she stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Also, Revy, I want you and your team to be careful. Just because the security system is turned off, does not mean that it cannot be turned back on. I know Lee does not want to kill us. But, that do not mean that Garibaldi, and the other guy with them, might not try to do so, if Lee cannot convince them to do otherwise.”
Revy replied, “Understood.”
Rock turned to Nene, as she questioned, “Did you hear all that, Nene?” She mentally added, 'I can tell from the system that those three had going, that Nene was the one that was providing access to the security system of that building, for her, Benny, and Janet. Without her here, there is nothing really Benny and Janet can do to monitor the situation with their computers. So, I am going to have to rely on her skills. But, I am not worried. I am fairly positive that Nene is that good.'
Nene answered, “Yes. I will keep an eye on the computer system, as we make it through the building. It should not be a problem.”
Rock replied, “Thank you.” She turned back to Revy, as she stated, “Also, along with capturing Lee, if you find Garibaldi, and the other person in there, you are to rescue them, and anyone else you find that is not a boomer. I do not want any people killed in this battle. If we can help it.”
Revy shrugged, as she casually said, “I wasn't planning on playing hero today. But, since I cleaning up my own mess, I am not going to complain.”
Rock said, “Good.” She then turned to Sylia, as she inquired, “Does my plan sound good to you, Sylia?”
Sylia calmly answered, “Yes. It is a good plan.” She thought, 'I am starting to realize why Rock commands so much respect from those around her, even though she is clearly nowhere the fighter, that most of them are. That being said, she is an intelligent planner, whom pays respect where respect is due.'
Violin suggested, “Since this is going to be a rescue operation. Why don't we just contact Garibaldi again, and offer to rescue him, and anyone else there, in exchange for, Lee?”
Rock looked over at Violin, as she stated, “After all our actions last night, I don't think Garibaldi will go for it. Plus, Lee has likely already convinced him that he is worth saving.”
Molly, whom was standing near the maids, had been listening to the conversation, she spoke up, “Lee is like a small devil, whispering sweet lies, into someone's ear.”
Roberta and Fabiola slightly smiled at Molly's commented.
Rock turned to Molly, as she responded, “Exactly. Lee has been in there for hours. And Garibaldi is the type whom might take our offer as an insult. We go in, rescue him, anyone else, and capture, Lee. He can thank us, afterward, for saving his ass.”
Violin shrugged, “Well, it was worth asking.”
Rock looked back towards Violin, as she replied, “I agree.”
Violin gave Rock a warm smile, as she said, “I am glad you think so.”
Eda was standing across from the maids, with Rock in-between them. She commented, “Speaking of which. While you have mentioned this, Rock. It should be repeated for the more stubborn members of those here.”
Eda looked at Mal, Roberta, the Knight Sabers and Revy. She went onto say, “You should go easy on Lee, and Garibaldi. Given, all night, Lee has tried to use non-lethal means to slow us down, or stop us. Lee knows we want him alive. And he has returned the favor. He also realizes that killing us will only make things worse for him. The only exception to this was when he was dealing with Roberta, here.”
Eda turned her head towards Roberta. With Roberta frowning at her. Eda ignored Roberta's reaction, as she looked back at Rock. She casually continued, “And that is completely understandable.”
Everyone turned to Roberta, as they slightly tense up, as they saw Roberta frown. Roberta noticed their body language. Her frown turned into a grin, as she happily thought, 'At least they all remember who they are dealing with.'
Roberta looked at Eda, as she responded, “I will give you that one.”
Everyone then relaxed a bit.
Eda turned to Roberta, as she replied, “Okay.” She turned to Rock, as she stated, “As such. Lee has probably already convinced Garibaldi to use non-lethal means to slow us down. We should continue to do the same.”
Rock looked over at Eda, as she responded, “Agreed. And I already realized that. Still, it is best to be cautious in this situation. Though, we will try to take them down through non-lethal means.” She looked around, as she questioned, in a firm tone of voice, “Everyone, hear that?”
Revy halfheartedly responded, “Yea... Alright, you don't need to tell us a third time. We will do our best to play with kid gloves, when reach them.”
Rock looked at Revy, as she thought, 'I may love you, Revy. But, I am not taking any chances with you get pissed off and trigger happy. We will only have our fun with Lee, after we capture him. Not before.'
Meanwhile, Revy turned to Priss, whom was twenty feet from her, in her blue hardsuit, and helmet
Priss noticed, as she turned to face Revy, while asking, in a flat, annoyed tone of voice, “What?”
Revy flatly requested, “Don't get killed. I still want to settle the score with you for damaging my cutlass.”
Priss responded, in an annoyed tone of voice, “I won't think of it. Because, I am so looking forward to kicking your ass.”
Revy snapped back, “Dream on.”
(_)
Nearby, Linna, in her green hardsuit, was standing by Dutch.
Both women were watching Priss and Revy snap at each other.
Linna turned her head towards Dutch, as she calmly asked, “Is Revy always like this?”
Dutch casually responded, “Yes. Is your blue suited friend always like that as well?”
Linna answered, in a deflated tone of voice, “Uh huh. Priss has always been like this. Let's just be happy they are not being grouped together.”
Dutch deadpanned, “Amen to that.”
Several feet away, Sylia turned to her group, that had scattered among the crowd, and whom were talking to the others in the crowd.
Sylia said in both her radio, and through her speakers, “Knight Sabers. We are heading out.”
Linna looked over at Dutch, as she said, “Showtime.”
Dutch replied, “Good luck.” She mentally added, 'I am happy I am not going into that war zone.'
Linna said, “Thanks.”
Linna then turned towards seven of the other Knight Saber, besides Nene, as they all walked towards their motoslaves.
The other people present then watched as the seven of the motoslaves in robot mode open, to show they were exo-suits, for the hardsuite women.
Sylia, got into motoslaves that had large rifle in its hands. Priss, Leon, Linna, and Mackie got into the four motoslaves that used large machine guns. Kate and Daley got into the motoslaves that carried hand held grenade launchers.
With the eighth motoslave being another motoslave that was holding a rifle.
As the seven Knight Sabers got in their motoslaves, Violin step closed to Aeryn, as Violin pulled out her reality device.
Aeryn silently looked over at her spouse, as she smiled. Violin then press the red button on her reality device, which instantly teleported them to the opposite side of the complex, outside the gates and concrete walls. Along with being away from the boomers. There, the two lovers would wait for the Knight Sabers attacked, before they would offer fire support.
A few seconds later, everyone else, that was still present, watched seven of the eight motoslaves closed again, around the hardsuited women. Then, the eight motoslaves took into the air, by the horizontal ducted fan rotors, that were attached to the motoslaves, by the back of the shoulders, by pylons. With to ducted fan rotors per motoslave.
Rock viewed the Knight Sabers use their motoslave to fly into the air, towards battler. She then looked at analog wrist watch, on her left wrist.
She then looked back at the Knight Sabers, flying away, as she thought, 'Fifteen minutes until I send Revy and the others, inside the building. I hope no one is killed... Other than the boomers.'
(_)
Within less than a minute, the Knight Sabers had reached the boomers, and engaged them in battle, at near point blank range. With the seven Knight Sabers dropping out of their motoslaves, as they, and motoslaves, attacked the boomers. The motoslaves mostly used their weapons at a distance, at the boomers that were not directly fighting the Knight Sabers.
Though, the motoslaves were programed to take out the boomers in hand to hand. And they were mo than capable of fighting the larger, brown battle boomers to a stand still. But, their primary programing was to defend the Knight Sabers, even to the point of sacrificing themselves for their masters.
And given there was literally a hundred, or so boomers, it was likely the motoslaves would not be around for long.
Still, the boomers were very spread out, and not all of them were engaging the Knight Sabers and their motoslaves. Also, this number of boomers was still within the ability for the seven Knight Sabers that were present, along with their upgrade hardsuits and motoslaves, to handle. Especially, given the Knight Sabers had all be exposed to Chang's super-soldier serum, which enhanced their already formidable fighting abilities even further.
So, at the moment, the Knight Saber were focused on surviving, destroying, and containing the boomers. In that order.
Meanwhile, Aeryn and Violin teleported on field, on the west end of the complex, far away from the boomers and the concrete fense.
The two lovers then started making their way closer to the battlefield. And three minutes later, Aeryn joined in, on the battle, from a distance, with her pulse burster. While Violin stood behind Aeryn, to guard her wife.
(_)
Ten minutes later, as the battle continued, Violin stood behind and to Aeryn's right side, as she followed her wife closer to the battlefield.
Currently, they were still outside the perimeter of the Edgars complex, with Aeryn providing very skilled, long range support to the Knight Sabers, and the motoslaves.
While they were at a far distance from the fighting, due to their alien heritages, their eyesight was more than good enough to clearly see the fighting for the distance they were at.
Though, Aeryn did use a peacekeeper eye enhancing device, called an oculars. Which was an advanced alien type of binoculars. The oculars was a single metal shaped band device, that wrapped around the person's head, like a hair band, that was place around the back of the head. With the opening open part of the device resting right over the user's eyes, on their forehead.
The oculars improved Aeryn's aim a bit more. Thus, allowing her to make more precise shots with her pulse burster.
As Violin watched her wife use her pulse burster, at a distance of two hundred yards from the nearest groups of boomers, she was impressed with her wife's marksmanship abilities.
Violin thought, 'Damn, I love it when I get the chance to watch my girl at work. Especially, when she had an open field to fire her weapon from.'
Harvey mentally commented, in a happy manner, 'Yes. This is perfect popcorn material. Mores the pity, we don't have any popcorn.'
Violin giggled. She mentally pointed out, as she physically shrugged, 'At least we can enjoy the show.'
Harvey mentally agreed, in a joyous manner, 'Hear. Hear.'
Meanwhile, to avoid being an easy target, Aeryn walked to right, at an upward diagonal path. When she reached about twenty-five feet began walking to her left, at an upward diagonal path, until she reached around twenty-five feet. She then walked back to the right, in an upward diagonal direction.
Aeryn continued this zigzag direction, towards the battle, with Violin kept up with her, from behind.
As Aeryn did this, she provide a combination of artillery, and sniper support fire for the Knight Sabers and their motoslaves. Depending on the selector setting on her weapon. Sometimes, she fired a single shot, which killed a single boomer, for those boomers that were close to her allies. Or, she switched settings on the fly, to fire a grouped burst of shots, at once, destroyed several boomers at once, in explosions of energy. When those boomers were grouped together, thought away from her allies.
The accuracy Aeryn was displaying, each time she pulled the trigger was incredibly precise. In all the shots she had fired, She had yet to miss a target, while harming her allies, in the middle of the fighting. And she has been pulling the trigger of her weapon as often as it could cycle through her weapons recharge rate.
This gave Aeryn a kill ratio that was higher than any single Knight Saber, or motoslave, in the current battle.
At the moment, Aeryn was destroying a number of boomers that had tried to circle around, and out flank the Knight Sabers, behind them.
Aeryn easily dispatched the robotic killing machines.
Though, there was one minor thing about Aeryn, which slightly troubled Violin. Violin saw that Aeryn had a slash style smile on her lips, as she did her job.
As Violin looked back at the boomers in the distance, she thought, with mild concern, 'Damn. The only time I have seen Aeryn smile like that was after some really good sex. She is really getting into this battle.'
Harvey suggested, in thought, 'Let your wife have her fun.'
Violin mentally agreed, 'Of course. And I agree that it is best not to talk to her, right now. I don't want to ruin the good mood she is in.'
Harvey mentally replied, 'That would be a wise decision.'
Violin mentally commented, 'Also, I know that pulse burster is one of the most cumbersome peacekeeper weapons there is, to use. And Aeryn is wielding her weapon with the skill a surgeon using her scalpel.'
Harvey mentally pointed out, 'She has had a lot of practice.'
Violin mentally responded, 'Yes. She has. Still, I need to go back to checking to make sure no boomer tries to attack us, directly.'
Harvey mentally said, 'Good idea. Though, at the rate your wife, and those combat suited mistresses are destroying the machines, very soon, there will not be many of them left.'
Violin mentally responded, 'Let us hope so.'
Violin then continued to stand guard for Aeryn, behind her wife, as she kept up with the Sebastian badass.
(_)
In the distance, in the heart of the outside battle, in the west courtyard of the Edgars Industries Headquarters, Aeryn's combat skills did not go unnoticed.
Sylia did not let her thoughts distract her from her fight, as she used her left wrist blade to slice through one of the brown battle boomers, only to follow up her attack, with an attack with her energy cannon, in the underside palm of her right hand, that destroyed the head of a blue combat boomer.
The battle continued, with Sylia fighting more boomers, as she mentally reflected, 'I am pleasantly surprised by Aeryn's skills in this battle. When I first read Lee's stories, and researched the other people Lee mentioned in his stories, I thought Lee was embellishing on Aeryn's combat skills.'
'I see I am mistaken. And I will have to revise my opinion, and threat assessment, of Aeryn, to be equal to her lover, Violin.'
After destroying two more boomers, Sylia then risked a look around, at her subordinates, as she saw they were all holding their own, but a few of the motoslaves had already been trashed.
The robots had been destroyed due to their programing to protect the Knight Sabers, before themselves.
Both of the motoslaves that used rifles were destroyed. One of the motoslaves that use galting gun was seriously damaged, but still functioning.
Another two were mildly damaged, but were still able to fight. Those two being one with a grenade launcher, and one with a gatling gun. While three were undamaged. Those three being, two that used gatling guns, and one that used a grenade launcher.
Meanwhile, the Knight Sabers were in good shape.
Sylia checked the heads up display on the interior her visor, which showed that Linna had a crack on the right shoulder of her armor.
The mechanical finger manipulators in the right gauntlet of Leon's hardsuit was damaged. But, not her right hand.
Sylia guessed was likely due to Leon punching a boomer, even thought her right gauntlet was not designed to do so.
But, the rest of Leon's hardsuit, and built in weapons were fine.
Sylia mentally reflected, 'I may had to add a knuckle boomer to Leon's right gauntlet, if she keeps using that gauntlet for punching. But, better the hardsuit be damaged, than her.'
Meanwhile, Priss had a crack in the left front side of her upper leg armor. But, the crack did not damage the internal hardware, and Priss' right leg was fine.
And Mackie's stomach armor took a blow that cracked the armor there. But, her hardsuit still functioned and she was uninjured.
Kate's, Daley's, Nene and Sylia's own hardsuit were fine.
As Sylia continued fighting, she thought, 'I am glad all my girls are fine. I could careless about the motoslaves. I can always build more motoslaves. I am just happy that none of my team members have been harmed.'
'And I am glad that the others convinced me to included Kate, Mackie, Leon, and Daley, into my new eight member team.'
'While, I was sure Leon would make a good fighter. I was pleasantly surprised with the potential that Mackie, Kate, and Daley, showed in hardsuit combat training. Though, I am sure the super-soldier serum was a factor in those results. Still, they are fast learners, and they will take orders from me.'
'And though Mackie is now a woman, she still sometimes peeps on the Linna, Priss, Nene, and myself, when we are naked. Though, I thinks she does it mostly as a way to tease us, in a jovial manner. I guess some things don't change. While other things can change people drastically... Such as motherhood... And I am sure our eight teenage, adult children are doing fine, back home...'
'But, those matters are meant to be thought about, at another time.'
'Right now, I wonder how Nene is doing with Revy's group? At least our suits communications still work well at this distance. So, I will know if there is a problem with Nene, as second after it happens. Still, I am sure Nene will be fine. Though, I am concerned with the crazies she is currently having to work with.'
'But, revenge is never easy...'
Sylia then went back to destroying boomers with her team.
(_)
A few minutes later, on the opposite side of the complex, Rock looked at her analog wrist watch, as she thought, 'It is time.' She looked over at Revy, whom was looking back at her. Rock said, “Happy hunting.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “Thanks.” She then looked at her group, whom were nearby, and composed of Roberta, Shenhua, Sawyer, Zoe, Nene, Mal, and Revy, herself.
Revy shouted, in a confident tone of voice, “Alright ladies! We are moving out!”
Revy and the others then turned and started jogging towards the main building, in the center of the
As they jogged towards the closest gate into the complex, Mal thought, 'I would say something about being a guy, but then Revy and the others might make me sneeze, and actually be one of the ladies in this fight.'
When they came to one of the eastern gates, Sawyer make short work of it.
The group then continued on their way towards the main, center building, of the Edgars Industries headquarters.
(_)
Seven minutes later, outside the eastern walls of the complex, Balalaika and B were covering the building, as the others talk around them talked amongst themselves.
Meanwhile, Rock held her infrared binoculars with her right hand, as she used them. She noticed something happening on the sixty-first floor, specifically the eastern stairwell. She saw what she guessed, from the heat signature, that water was now running down the stairs.
Rock thought, 'Lee, is doing something there. I'm just not know what. And I think he is setting a trap for the stairwell my team is going into. I will radio them the warning. But, there is not much more I can do.'
'I wish I could have sent more people inside. But, four of those fighters are experts in range weapons and combat. Shenhua for close quarters fighting. With Sawyer being there to deal with obstructions, and assisting Shenhua, in fighting up close. And Nene for computer support, and there to aid in environmental hazards.'
'It is unfortunate, that there is too many obstructions of me to see the battle on the other side of the complex. I have not heard anything on the radio. But, that just means that the Knight Sabers have their own encrypted channel they use to talk amongst themselves.'
'And speaking of which. I almost feel sorry for the boomers, for siccing Aeryn on them... Almost... But, shooting at things really does make Aeryn feel better. And Violin will be with her, to make sure she is fine. Besides which, given Aeryn weaponry at the moment, can literally bring down a building, and Violin's own abilities, are even more dangerous, I did not feel that it was safe having them go with Revy and the others. Putting those two in the situation of possible close quarters combat is asking for trouble.'
'And I realized a head of time, when I saw the large weapon, that Aeryn teleport to Moya, to get it. And be back five minutes later. At least for us. I knew she was going make herself an active part of this siege, one way, or another. I am just lucky that she volunteered to help the Knight Sabers destroy the boomers on the other side of the complex.'
'Also, Aeryn and Violin have been known to destroy buildings, cities, planets, before. For the sole reason of having been cornered. I am not going to give them the excuse to inadvertently cause a disaster here. Instead, I am going to channel their destructive tendencies to where they will be most useful to us...'
'Well... I guess I might as well warn my team. And at least Benny, Janet, and Nene hacked into the computers, and turned off the automated defenses on this side of the fortress. So, Revy and the others don't have to worry about that problem.'
Rock pulled up her radio with her left hand, and press the talk button.
(_)
Three minutes ago, Sawyer had just used her chainsaw to break through east entrance doors of the main town building of the complex.
As Revy's group entered the building, they found themselves walking into one of the lobbies of the building. They saw that the most lights in the lobby were on. And the room stretched for a hundred feet in each direction, going inside the building, before it hit the walls, and started connecting to hallways and rooms.
The lobby was a standard business building lobby, with a few pillars around the lobby, that acted as support beams for the floor.
The group then continued walking for about ten seconds, Mal and Zoe noticed the others had suddenly stopped in their tracks.
As the two browncoats watched as the others pulled out their weapons. The two veterans pulled out their usual pistols, as well.
Zoe turned to Revy, as she asked, “What is it?”
As Revy and the others turned to looked deeper into the lobby, and they pointed their weapons in that direction, Revy answered, “We hear foot steps, approaching us fast. And they are no human footsteps.”
Nene checked the heads up display on the inside of her visor, as she stated, “Sensors state they are boomers, but and they are not humanoid.”
Suddenly, they saw six boomer dogs emerge from a hallway in front of them, across the lobby. With the boomer dogs immediately charging towards them.
The boomer dogs were each around the size of a hundred pound dog.
The boomer dogs did not appear to have any weapons, but they bared their teeth as they charge at seven armed adults.
At that moment, the dogs were about eighty feet from them.
As Revy looked at the cyberdriod animals, she smiled a feral grin. She sadistically thought, 'Finally, some action that Rock won't complain about.' She ordered, in a casual, relaxed tone of voice, “Girls, put these dogs down.”
Roberta, Revy, Mal, and Zoe, used their pistols, along with Nene using her the lasers in her gauntlets, to make short work of the boomer dogs. And the boomers were completely destroyed before any got within thirty feet of them.
Far out melee range of Shenhua and Sawyer weapons.
As the boomer dogs laid on their sides, destroyed, Nene confirmed, “They have been deactivated.”
Revy replied, “Good.” She lamented in thought, 'I do miss all the perks of having a hardsuit. The armor, enhanced strength, weapons, and sensors were so much fun to play with... Why did Lee has to get us such wonderful toys, and then take them away. That is one of the many reasons I want to kick Lee's ass.'
Shenhua turned to Revy, as she complained, “Revy, why didn't you save some for us?”
Revy turned to Shenhua, as she said, “When it comes killer robots, we cannot take chances. We will play, who can kill the most, later.”
Shenhua thought, 'She's right.' She shrugged, as she replied, “Agreed.”
Sawyer calmly inquired, “Personally, I don't mind you killing those machines before they reached us. And they must have come in front the west end. But, how did they know we are here?”
Nene answered, “They use infrared sensors to find us. A while back, while my friends and I were fighting Genom, in Megatokyo, I hack from Genom computers, and I got a look at their designs. These boomer dogs are prototypes reconnaissances boomers. They have a good sensor package. But, the only weapons they have are their claws and teeth. And they are lightly armor. So, from what I see, with my hardsuit sensors, it looks like Chang did not change the design, much.”
Roberta thought, 'As someone that is sometimes haunted by the past, I believe it is best not to remind Nene of her past, given our direct hands in wrecking her previous life.'
Roberta changed the subject, as she calmly asked, “How is the fight with your friends going?”
Nene used her heads-up display on the interior side of her visor, to pull of a status report on her friends hardsuits and health. She stated, “From the data I am getting, everyone is fine... Even your friends... And they are all really kicking some serious ass.”
Roberta responded, “That is comforting to hear.” She menially added, 'Good. I got her to think about something else. And it is always nice to meet other strong women. Especially, polite ones. Such as Nene here. I might like to get to know her, and a few of the others, later. If we can bridge the gap over what Chang and Lee made us do.'
Nene commented, “And we are lucky that we did not run into the other types of boomers out there.”
Mal turned to Nene, as he asked, “So, that is why they went down so quickly. Still, how dangerous are the other types of boomers out there?” Mal though, 'While Bob showed us the Bubblegum Crisis OVA series, years ago. A first hand report goes a long way, in situations like this.'
Nene turned towards Mal, as she commented, “Very dangerous. If you see them. Get to cover, and aim for their eyes. And if they suddenly open their jaws wide, duck, because they have a powerful energy cannon in pops out from the roof of their mouths. Also, if you seen panels open up on their chest, find the best cover you can get, because that is a heat weapon that will literally cook you in seconds. And that is just only two of the main weapons those monsters have. And those are the combat boomers. The battle boomers are even more dangerous and destructive.”
Mal replied, “Got you.” He mentally added, 'I am glad I asked. Chang was right, we are going to need those special weapons, he got for us.'
Revy inquired, “Now, where are the stairs?”
Nene turned, as she used her mechanical right index finger manipulator, in her right gauntlet, to point towards a metal door that was fifty feet to the group's left. She stated, “Sensors show that the closest set of stairs are right here.”
Revy commented, “Good.”
Nene mentioned, “But, I am registering water on the other side of the door. And the stairwell stop here, on this floor, with the water collecting right behind the door.”
Roberta turned to Nene, as she asked, “Water?”
Nene looked at Roberta, as she said, “Yes. Water.”
Just then, Rock said over the radio, “Revy, girls, I think Lee has set a trap for you in the stairwell.”
Nene said, “I believe Rock is correct. I am also detecting electricity as well.”
Revy used the discocker on her pistols to uncocked her pistols. She then holstered them. Next, she unhooked her radio, from her belt, as she pressed the talk button. She then calmly said, “Don't worry, Rock. We got this.” She then clipped her radio back onto her belt, were it had been.”
Revy asked, “Can we just shutdown the electrical grid? Or, water system?”
Nene answered, “No, on both counts. Even if I was able to turn off the water system, which is likely part of a none computer fire-system, the steps are still wet and electrified. And I don't dare try to cut off the electricity, because, along with my friends, and your friends, the automated systems on the west side of the complex, are the only things holding the boomers back.”
Revy muttered, “Damn.”
Zoe suggested, “Could we head for another set of stairwell?”
Mal calmly said, “I really don't want to get that close to the battle outside.”
Zoe replied, “Point taken.”
Nene stated, “Actually, my sensors state that the barricade doors throughout the west end of the building have been closed. It would take too long to get to another stairwell. Plus, the automated defenses are turned on for that side of the building.”
Sawyer inquired, “It makes sense for Garibaldi and Lee to do that. But, then how did these boomers get here?”
Nene commented, “They must have come into this building, before the barricade doors closed. The barricade doors are not automatic. And they were not turned on when we hacked into the system. Though, we made sure to turn them off on this side of the building. But, we will probably run into them on the sixty-first floor, given they can probably be manual turned on, one at a time.”
Nene stated, in a colder tone of voice, “Also, these reason the boomer dogs attacked was that they were probably ordered to look for witnesses and kill them.”
Nene turned to Revy.
Revy noticed Nene looking at her. She conceded, “Well, in our former line of work, what did you expect?”
Roberta thought, with annoyance, 'Leave it to Revy to drop a verbal grenade in the situation. Though, we are better fighters than Nene. She has a hardsuit, and this could go bad very quickly, if we are not careful.'
Nene said, with her voice like ice, “I am just happy you are no longer in that line of work.”
Revy shrugged, as she inquired, “Yea. I am happy about being more than being a hired gun. Besides, you Knight Sabers are mercenaries. So, where do you get off judging us, for the same line of work?”
Nene said, in an unexpectedly casual tone of voice, “Oh, I am not judging you. I was just wondering how you would react to me just silently turning my head towards you, after I made such a comment.”
Revy realized she had been had. She let out a laugh. She thn thought, 'Yep. Nene, here, is a genius.' She complimented, “Not bad.”
Nene replied, “Thank you.”
Roberta thought, with relief, 'That went better than I expected... Not that I am complaining.'
Sawyer pointed out, “Still, someone has to disarm Lee's trap.”
Mal joked, “I don't feel likely getting electrocuted.”
Revy turned to Mal, as she stated, “Not to worry. Nene's hardsuit is insulated.” She turned to Nene, as she said, “Nene, I need you to climb those stairs, as quickly as possible, and disable that trap.”
Nene looked at Revy, as she responded, “It will take me a several minutes. But, I should be able to do it.”
Revy replied, “Good.”
Nene then walked a few feet towards the stairs, with the group behind her. She then held out her right gauntlet, towards the door, which was still several feet from them. She order, “Everyone, stand back. And be ready to run, if the water starts coming this way.”
Nene gave the rest of her group few seconds later, to take a more few steps, further back, from her position. She used the lasers in her right gauntlet to quickly slice through the door to the stairwell.
Fortunately, the door quickly collapsed into several metal pieces, and fell apart in a mater of a couple of seconds. And luckily there was only a few inches of water that had built up behind the door. Also, due to the slight sloping, of the marble tiled, steel reinforced concretely floor, all the water moved towards the exit, With none of the water coming anywhere close to reaching the group.
Nene turned towards her group, as she said, “I will try to be as quick as I can. And I will radio you when I have the disarmed the trap.”
Revy said, “Okay. But, remember we are on the clock. It is a literally race to the top. So, hurry. As fast as you can.”
Nene replied, “Of course.”
Sawyer kindly said, “And be careful not to slip.”
Nene replied, “Don't worry. I will be careful.”
Nene then turned back towards the stairwell, as she briskly walked toward entrance to the stairwell.
A few seconds later, Nene made it to the stairwell, and she turned, and started walking up the stairs, as water flowed down them.
Nene looked up the stairwell, as she thought, 'Sixty-one floors up. Along the wet stairs. In a hardsuit, with heels. I am just glad the super-soldier serum gives me the stamina to climb this stairwell, without exhausting myself. And the serum has also helped with my balance and agility.'
'Still, I cannot just used my jump-jets to make my way up the center. The center open space is too tight. But, I can use my suit's enhanced straight, to jump from corner, to corner, up the stairs. So, this will not take to long.'
Nene started jumping for corner, to corner, up the square path, of the staircase.
As she did so, she thought, 'At this rate, I should be up their in ten to fifteen minutes. I could do this in five, if I was not having to be careful with my landings, due to the concrete steps being wet, and possibly slippery. Still, I am making good time.'
Nene then quickly made her way up the stairs.
(_)
Twenty minute later, she made it to the sixtieth floor of the stairwell.
Nene was not even winded, she saw the sign for the sixtieth floor. She thought, 'Well, the one thing this super-soldier serum did, that I like, was given me a great bod, with extreme endurance, that allowed me to retain my youth for decades to come... And I am so happy I am not even tired... Still, I am going to torture Lee for the rest of what he did to us... Now, where is the power cable and water coming from?'
'I am one floor below the floor where Lee is. The cable for the electricity has to be nearby. I know I did not miss it. Now, where is it?'
Nene's heads up display immediately used her hardsuit sensors to point out some a cable that was split, and connect at two different points, on the low part of a nearby railing, to her left, only two flights of stairs of stairs.
Nene looked across, and slightly up, from where she was standing, and she saw the cable, with her own eyes.
Nene thought, 'This will only take a moment.' She then used her right wrist laser to cut the cable when he was still completely sheathed together in orange rubber.
She then quickly made her way up the stairs. As she ended the sixty-first floor, she swift found the fire hose box. She briskly walked over to the fire box, where she used the valve to turn off the water.
Nene stated, into the radio that built into her suit, “The water is turned off, and the power cable to the trap is cut. You can come on up, now. But, watch your step.”
Nene then looked at the barricade doors in front of her, as she continued, “Also, it looks like I was right about those barricade doors, on this floor. Sawyer, we are going to need your chainsaw.”
Sawyer replied, over the radio, “Okay. We will be there in a few minutes.”
As Nene waited, she thought, 'I don't see a plug by the panel, and I don't have time to try to rewire. We are just going to have to force our way through. But, I am going to wait for the others, before we do anything. Just in case my sensors are missing any other traps that Lee and Garibaldi may have laid.'
(_)
Two minutes later, outside the east side of the complex, as those present continue to talk to themselves. Save for Rock, whom silently looked at the complex, with just her eyes. Along with Balalaika, and B, whom were sitting in kneeling position, while using their sniper rifles to help cover the main building of the complex.
Rock then overheard, Spike, Faye, and Jetta, talking, nearby.
Spike said, “I still say, we should have brought our zipcrafts, and gone to get Lee ourselves. I mean, Jet, Faye, we know exactly where the bastard is. We can just fly up there and get him.”
Rock thought, 'I need to defuse this situation, now.' She turned to them, as she calmly requested, “Spike. Faye. Jetta. Could I have a moment of your time?”
The three women turned to Rock, as Jetta said, “Sure Rock. What do you need?”
Rock calmly asked, “Are we all in agreed that we want to take Lee alive, without harming anyone else?”
Faye answered, “Yes.”
Jetta conceded, “Of course. Though, it is a fair question, after the stunt we pulled at the factory.”
Spike halfheartedly replied, “Yea...”
Rock said, “Then, here me out. The reason I did not want us to bring our vehicles was I wanted this to be low-key. I did not want to attract any unwanted attention. Your zipcraft, especially, would attract unwanted attention. If you flew up there, the local authorities would pick you up on radar. We are just lucky that last night, we were in a location the local police really didn't care about. But, here in the headquarters of likely one of their largest tax revenue producers, on the planet, they will come running, if they think something is up.”
“Likely, the only reason they haven't is that Garibaldi has kept them away, due to him have an idea of how dangerous we are.”
“And I am sure that this place has anti-air defenses. And even with the defenses down, your zipcraft are not designed to do the type of assault you are planning.”
“In addition, the only weapons one your vehicles, that can take out that window, without risk of harming those inside, is the Hammerhead's harpoon gun.”
“And your vehicles are single person vehicles. Meaning, only one of you could go up there. And your zipcraft are not designed to hover by a building, and allow you jump onto the building. Though, I am sure you have probably done that before. Still, that would bring up other problems.”
“Those problems being that neither Lee, nor Garibaldi, are idiots. From what I saw on my infrared binoculars, they set a trap for the boomers, and anyone else, trying to get at them, from that large windows in room they had decided to make their stand in.”
“If you tried to get to that room, that way you are thinking about, you would be sitting ducks for Lee and Garibaldi to take you out. Or, as the very least, damage the Hammerhead.”
“Along with this. Do not even think of landing your vehicles onto the roof. The top to floors of that building are Garibaldi's personal residence. There is no telling what personal traps Garibaldi might have set up there. We already know that Garibaldi knows better than to tie his electronics to one system. That is why we cannot shutdown, nor hack into the video system.”
“So, going in from the ground floor is the only realistic option. Besides, do you really want to face those boomers? Because, I don't.”
Rock mentally reflected, 'That is why I didn't go with them. Because if they do face those boomers, I would be more a hindrance, than an asset.'
Faye shrugged, as she replied, “Not really.”
Jetta pointed out, “Bob showed all three of us the Bubblegum Crisis OVA series. I have absolutely not interest in facing those monsters.”
Spike shrugged, as she commented, “I don't want to fight those killing machines, either.”
Rock thought, 'Good. At least, they know the seriousness of facing those killing machines.'
Rock casually responded, “Good. I am glad we are on the same page.” She then turned back to look at the main tower of the Edgars Industries headquarters, in the distance.
As the three women turned back to each other. Jetta commented, “And that folks, is why she is in charge of this operation.” She mentally reflected, 'Until Mal and Zoe take off with Lee, to Chang. While we disappear back to the casino, as well.'
Just then, everyone's attention was brought to the forefront, as they heard gunfire. All of them turned to see Balalaika and B firing this sniper rifles. But, after a few more shots, both of the loved stopped firing.
Balalaika cursed, “Damn it!”
Rock turned to them, as she asked, “What is it?”
Balalaika and B turned behind them, to look at Rock. B answered, “There are a dozen combat boomers climbing up the south side of the main building.”
Balalaika mentioned, “And while we are getting good hits on them. We can even see the dents on left on their heads. Our cartridges are not penetrating the boomers armored heads, at this distance.”
B said, “And the boomers are just ignoring our hits, and continuing up the building, at a steady pace.”
Rock calmly stated, “We knew that was a possibility, and we planned for it. But first, I need to check with what is going on, before I contact the others.”
While Rock turned towards the building, Balalaika and B stood up. The two russian lovers slung the slings on their rifles over their shoulders, as they stretched their legs.
Meanwhile, Rock pulled up her infrared binoculars, which were slung below her chest, and she held the binoculars to her eyes. As she zoomed in, she could see the heat signatures of the dozen combat boomers climbing up building.
Rock thought, 'I would guess the boomers were around the twentieth floor. And they even got the right side of the building, to come into the room, that Lee and the others are in. Meaning they see them, as well. And they are likely planning to crash into the large windows, of the room that Lee Garibaldi, and that other man are in.'
'Now, let's see what else is going on inside the building?'
Rock looked into the building, with her infrared binoculars.
She could see Revy's group making their way up the eastern stairway, with Nene on the sixty-first floor.
Rock also saw the heat signatures of a mix of combat and battle boomers slowly making their way up the west side elevator shafts, and west side staircase.
Rock mentally reflected, 'Revy and her group is already making their way up. And Nene is wisely waiting for the rest of her group to arrive, before she continue further down that floor.'
'But, the boomers, both inside and outside, are making their way up the building.'
'I would guess that the boomers are at about the fortieth floor level. But, the boomers seemed to be going slowly. And I guessed that the streaks of heat that surrounded the boomers in stairwell, and elevator shafts, were lases from the defense systems, in those location.'
'And due to this, the boomers were more slowly making their way up the stairs, as they take out the defenses, one at a time, before advancing further up.'
'Though, how the boomers are doing concerns me for several reasons.'
'One thing about boomers that separates boomers from other killing machine, is that they were programmed with a measure of common sense, in a lot of ways. Even to the point that their personalities, and sensors, allow them to enjoy some foods and drinks. Such as beer. They won't get drunk, but they can enjoy the taste of such drinks.'
'As such, they have been fighting the complex's defenses all the way. And because of this, they are taking things slowly. As far as they are concerned, there is no rush. They want to get Garibaldi in one piece. And rushing in will likely get Garibaldi killed.'
'Though, while these boomers on the inside of the building have slowed down, the ones on the outside have no such problems. But, at the rate they are climbing, the boomers on the inside are going to get to Lee and the others, before the boomers on the outside do.'
'And I noticed the defenses are not attacking the boomers scaling the building.'
'I would guess that it seems that the building defenses were not designed to fire up at the outsides of buildings. Nor, were they designed to fire at those scaling the buildings.'
'This is probably an intentional security design on Garibaldi's part. So no one could just hack into the defenses, and try to destroy the buildings themselves, with their own defenses. And that if the building's defenses were highjacked, Garibaldi could still have a means of escape, by getting outside the building, and hanging off the wall, until help arrived.'
'Now, I need to see if Sylia can stop those boomers on the outside. But, either way, Revy, and her group, is going to need to hurry.'
'Fortunately, it looks like that are going to beat both groups of boomers. But, it is going to be close.'
Rock lowed her binoculars back onto her chest. With her left hand, she unhooked her radio, off her belt, and pressed the talk button. She stated into her radio, “This is Rock. Sylia, we have a dozen combat boomers climbing the main building, on the south side. If they are not stopped, they will reach Lee, and the others with him, within half an hour.”
Over the radio, Sylia stated, in a slightly rushed tone of voice, “I apologize, Rock. But, we have our hands full at the moment. You are on your own.”
Rock thought, 'Yea. A few boomer stragglers that got past them, are nothing, compared to the army of boomers they are fighting.' She calmly responded, into her radio, “Understood. Revy will will have to deal with the situation. Revy, did you get all that?”
Revy replied, from her own radio, “Yes. Where are they?”
Rock answered, “They are just above the twentieth floor, and slowly climbing. Also, there are boomers in the western elevator shifts and staircase, but the building's defenses are slowing them down. I can see you, as well. At the moment, your group's speed, and the boomers speed, is almost neck and neck, with both groups of boomers. Though, you have a slight lead.”
Revy responded, “Okay. We will just have to hurry and get to Lee and the others, before the boomers. Though, we may have to teleport out.”
Rock stated, “If you do so, just head to Lagoon Island, at the proper time, with the three men. And we will then sort out everything there.”
Revy said, “No problem.”
Rock then clipped her radio back to her belt. Next, she pulled back up her infrared binoculars, so she could see what was happening in the main building.
(_)
At that moment, inside the eastern staircase, Revy's group, barring Nene, had been walking up the wet stairs at a hurried, but cautious pace.
Though, they had stopped, when Revy got the call on the radio.
As Revy clipped her radio back onto her belt, she looked back at her group. She stated, “You heard, Rock. Double time, people. And don't slip, or you will have to answer to me.”
Zoe mentally reflected, with concern, 'And I thought the captain was reckless. Revy puts the captain to shame in wanting to get to the target. Still, at least this concrete is rough, even when wet, that it still retains most of its traction.'
'And personally, I could care less about revenge on Lee. I am just trying to keep the captain from getting himself killed, while trying to claim that reward Chang posted on Lee. As far as I am concern, Chang has the right idea about hiring Lee. Anyone that can play this intelligent, savvy group, for chumps, while remaining polite, and mostly non-violent, it truly worth keeping around.'
The group then started making their way up the wet stairs, at a faster pace, they they were before. While they were mindful of trying to prevent themselves from slipping and falling on the wet concrete stairs. With them gripping and using the inside and outside railings, to speed up their accent.
(_)
At that moment, in the technology research lab, on the sixty-first floor, Garibaldi and Lee were looked at the wallscreen monitor, by the entrance to the hallway.
To their right, the door to the hallway was left open, and to their left, Bernard was at the island, working on rebuilding the reality device.
The monitor was split into four quartered sub-pictures, which showed four different video feeds in and around the building.
The upper left video showed a camera in the eastern stairwell, from an angle that showed the open door to the sixty-first level
The two men watched as Nene, in her red and pink hardsuit, stood in the hallway. After she had disabled Lee's trap, she walked into hallway, and just stood by the door to the stairwell, as she waited for the rest of her team to reach her.
And a few seconds ago, Garibaldi had switched to a camera in the eastern stairwell, at a lower level, and the two men had the other six members of Revy's group, including Revy herself, making their way up the eastern stairwell, to meet Nene. Garibaldi, then switched back to watching Nene, given she was on the floor they were presently on, and thus she was greater threat. Given she was the first to reach their floor.
As Lee looked a the wallscreen, he thought, 'Okay. That is not a bad group to send after me. And I am happy that I guessed correctly. With Nene being the only Knight Saber sent with Revy's group. And from this group, I think we can delay them a little longer, in a firefight, if we have to. Unfortunately, they are only a third of our problem.'
Garibaldi continued looking at the viewscreen, as he commented, “It looks like you friends got through your trap, and they are going to be here in a few minutes.”
Lee watched the viewsceen, as he responded, “And they are not alone.” He then used his right index finger to point at the other three video feeds on the wallscreen monitor.
At the moment, the two bottom screens showed the interiors of the two western elevators.
The two men watched as a large, brown lance from a battle boomer, ripped open the bottom of one of the elevator, while two pairs, of two blue claws, ripped into the bottom of the floor of the other elevator.
Soon, both video feeds showed boomers straying to rip through the ceilings of the elevators, until the feeds were both cut off, within seconds of each other, from the damage done to the elevators.
Garibaldi commented, in a slightly disappointed tone of voice, “Guess they are not taking the bait, and checking the lower levels, first.”
Lee pointed out, “With their infrared sensors, it was a long shot, anyway. But, I am surprised your laser grid did not stop them?”
Garibaldi stated, “Well, to be honest. It was a weak laser grid. Government regulations would not allow me install any laser grid that could cut the cables. They will harm human, or alien, flesh, but not the armor of these things. And with the more powerful defenses around the building, I did not argue the case, because I did not think I would ever need them.”
Lee calmly replied, “Just chalk it up as a learning experience, and move on.”
Garibaldi responded, “Yea. I will. And what about those boomers on the outside?”
Lee deadpanned, “I know.”
And on the upper right screen, Lee and Garibaldi could see another camera feed. This camera feed showed the south side of the building they were in, from an outside camera station on a nearby building, in the complex. They could even see the window of room they were in, from the camera.
They also saw that there were a dozen blue combat boomers scaling that side of the building, up, towards their location.
Currently, the boomers were currently around the fiftieth floor of the building.
Though, Lee could make out that some of the boomers had dents on the left sides of their heads.
Lee thought, with disappointment, 'I guess the Knight Sabers are too busy to stop a few loose boomers. And from those dents on the left sides of the boomers' head, the dents were likely made from bullet coming from the eastern side of the complex. I would bet money those dents were made by Balalaika and B's sniper rifles. Unfortunately, while the two of them can clearly hit the boomers' heads at this range, their ammo cannot penetrate the boomers' thick, armored skulls, from this distance.'
'And those boomers scaling the building worry me the most, because the only thing between us and them, are two large windows, two automated machine guns, and this crummy island table... Oh well, we will have to make do. Fortunately, even though combat boomers are walking weapons platforms, they prefer to do things with their hands, and melee weapons. And they want their target alive.'
'So, they are likely going to try to just make their way through the machine gun fire, to reach Garibaldi. Because, they are programmed to know that this room is too close quarters for them to use their energy weapons, without risk of seriously harming, or killing Garibaldi.'
'Though, combat boomers have the option of being equipped with lasers on their forearms. But, those weapons are easy to spot, and I don't see any of those weapons on the combat boomers that coming after us.'
'Even though I didn't write it, I guess Chang figured that combat boomers did not need such weapons, given all the weapons that were already build into those killing machines.'
'Still, those boomers will kill Bernard, and myself, if they get passed the automated machine guns. Fortunately, that is why Garibaldi and I are armed... But, I really don't want to find out how many boomers we can take out before, they reach us. I would much prefer just to escape into the multiverse.'
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as he commented, “I thought you said they would not be scaling the walls?”
Lee turned Garibaldi, as he responded, “I freely admit that I overestimated the Knight Sabers abilities to contain them all at the ground level.” He thought, 'There is a first time for everything.'
Garibaldi requested, “Okay. And I am sure you see good news in this situation?”
Lee calmly stated, “Actually, I do. The good news is that the boomers in the elevator and stairwell, along with group after me, will probably get to this outside hallway, at the same time. They will stall each other, and that machine gun will help even the odds, by aiding those after me.'
“Also, we will use the island for cover against those that come in from the window. Still, we best get ready, right now.”
Garibaldi countered, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Nice plan. The problem is that island would suck as cover. It would be like taking cover behind a cardboard box... Actually, it this thing is made of particle board. And those things will tear through it like it was nothing.”
Lee pointed out, “The boomers want you alive. And their weapons are too destructive, in this enclosed environment, for the boomers to use them. We can use that to our advantage. And I would prefer some cover, than nothing at all.”
Garibaldi conceded, “Point taken.” He then looked over at Bernard, as he commented, “Bernard, the party is about to get started soon. Get your items, and put them, and yourself, on the floor, between the island and the interior wall.”
Bernard did not looked up, as he responded, “Yes sir.”
Lee turned to looked at the technician, and his work.
Lee could see that Bernard was almost finished, as he inquired, “By the way, how long is it going to take to finish device?”
While Bernard was transferring the mostly assembled reality device, and his tools, to the floor, by his feet, he did not looked towards Lee. As he was much more focus on making sure he did not drop the items he was working with.
As Bernard did this, he calmly answered, “We are down to a matter of minutes. Fifteen minutes at most.”
Lee mentally grumbled, 'That is still not fast enough. And the only reason I don't threaten him is that I know that all it will do is make him go slower, and it will push him to betray me.' He calmly requested, “Please, do what you can, as quickly as you can.”
Bernard casually replied, “I will.”
Lee turned back to Garibaldi, as he commented, “You get by Bernard, and guard him. I will be beside you, nearer to the door. I will cover the door, you listen out for the window. But, we need to stay down, before they show up, because I don't want stray shots harm either of you.” He mentally added, 'Nor me.'
Garibaldi looked over at Lee. He said, “No problem. We should know when the boomers outside when we heard the windows shatter, and the machine guns open up.”
Lee thought, 'Given the dire situation we are in, I might as well tell them.' Lee mentioned, “One other item. I am precognitive.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Interesting... How good are you at your ability?” He thought, 'Lee would not mention that unless it was important to the situation.'
Lee calmly said, “I say that, in all seriousness, I can dodge bullets. Actually, that is what I literally did at the factory.”
Garibaldi thought, 'And I though I had a handle on this guy. He clearly likes to hide a lot about his skills from me. Also, that is a skill one would not boost about, in this situation, unless he was telling the truth...'
'Still, as I guessed. Lee likes to hide what he can do. He would only mention this, if me knowing about his ability would be useful to him.' He questioned, “And what bearing does this have for our current situation?”
Lee stated, “When the boomers get here, pay attention to me. If I am not having to cover the door, I may pop up, to fire towards the window. When I do, you do the same. And when I go back down, you do the same. My precognitive abilities will inform me of the right time to do this. That way, we can buy some more time, by firing, while minimizing the risk of us being shot.”
Garibaldi responded, “I understand.” He mentally added, 'Even Lee can truly dodge bullets. Which, given the last twelve hours. I am willing to believe Lee on his claims. Still, we need to focus on the matter at hand.'
Garibaldi stated, “Okay. Let's get ready.” He then turned, and headed over to Bernard, as he unslung his PPG, with him holding the rifle grip with his right hand, and the fore-end held with his left hand.
Lee quietly followed behind Garibaldi, as he pulled out his PPG pistols, from their holsters.
Both of them left the viewsceen on, as they took their positions. With all three men crouched down, between the island and the interior wall of the room.
Bernard was on the far end of the group. With Garibaldi in the middle. And Lee on the other end, that was closest to the door to the hallway.
(_)
Eleven minutes later, the rest of Revy's group walked into the sixty-first floor hallway, from the eastern stairway. Fortunately, none of them had slipped on the wet concrete.
Both Zoe and Mal were breathing heavily, while Revy, Sawyer, Shenhua, Roberta, and Nene, were not.
Zoe commented, “Sir, I am honestly thinking of taking Chang's offer for the same serum he gave these girls. Because they are not tired.”
Mal replied, “I won't blame you, if you did.”
The other women present just giggled a little, as they looked at Zoe and Mal.
Revy then inquired, in a casual tone of voice, “You guys still up to this?”
Mal looked over at Revy, as he answered, “Yes. We just need few moments to catch our breath.”
Mal then turned to gaze at the barricade doors, as he continued, “And I think we will be fine, by the time you get through those doors.”
Roberta looked at the doors, the back at the group, as she commented, “If we can get through them?”
Sawyer held up her chainsaw, as she said, “It should not be a problem. The barricade doors slide from both walls. And I doubt they go all the way into the wall. I will just cut on one of the corners, and Nene should be able to push them through, with her hardsuits's strength.”
A wrist blade popped from Nene left armored wrist, as she said, “I can do more than that. You take the left side, I got the right side.” She mentally added, 'I would prefer to destroyed the right door, that way, when the door comes down, I will be facing further into the hallway, to my side, instead of with my front. That way, if there are other traps, I will be a smaller target, and my side armor will take much of the glancing force, which is safer for me on several levels. Than taking a direct blow to the chest, or stomach.'
Sawyer replied, “That works for me.”
Mal turned to Nene, as he inquired, “Why don't you just use your laser, like last time?”
Nene gazed as Mal, as she commented, “They burn a lot of energy. And I would prefer we go in carefully.”
Sawyer looked at Mal, as she mentioned, “From my own hardsuit experiences, I already knew that. That is why I didn't ask.” She turned Nene, as she inquired, “Still, how many of these doors do we need to take out?”
Nene looked at Sawyer, as she answered, “My sensors say we have three sets of barricade doors, until we to get the room they are inside of. Also, the boomers have to get through three barricade doors, as well. And there is some sort automated machine gun, on a tripod, after the third door. Though, it is pointed towards the west end. It is likely meant to take down the boomers, and not us.”
Shenhua commented, “Lee will likely want to even the odds, so that we ended up fighting the boomers that are coming the other way. To buy himself some more time.”
Nene stated, “My thoughts, exactly. On the last door, we will just take down the right side door, which is opposite to the door to their room. With their room being to our left. Because, from what I saw, the last barricade door to their is around three meters from the open entrance to their room. They likely left the door open intentionally. From their heat profiles, I can see are armed. And it is clear they were watching us from a camera system, before they moved for cover. So, they know we are here, and who to expect.”
“Also, there are to other ground mounted automated machine guns in the room Lee is in. Like the one in the hallway. With them pointed at the windows. Behind the machine guns is an island table, with the three men between the back of the island and the inner wall.”
Revy commented, “Lee is likely trying to find the best cover, for all of them, from all sides.
Nene replied, “I agree.”
Zoe said, “It sounds like Lee has all his bases cover.”
Sawyer commented, “Well, Lee clearly does live by the rule, knowing is half the battle.”
The others just looked at her. Sawyer thought, 'They don't get the joke. And I hate explaining a joke to someone. But, I guess I am going to have to, in this case. At least vaguely.'
Sawyer stated, “It's a nineteen eighty's pop-culture joke. And I don't feel like explaining it to you.”
Zoe moved the conversation forward, as she questioned, “Moving on. Can we turned off the video system?” She mentally reflected, 'The first rule of combat is to cut off the enemies' eyes and ears. Though, I wonder why Rock and the others have no done so, yet?'
Nene thought, 'She must have missed that part of the conversation.' She answered, “I can not. They are defaulted to be left on. And I am sure they already know we are here. So, there is no point destroying them.”
Zoe shrugged, as she thought, 'I guess that makes sense.'
Revy cracked a wicked grin, as she commented, “So, they know we are coming, that just makes the hunt even more fun.
Roberta smirked, as she agreed, “I am with you on this, two-hands.”
Shenhua asked, “Nene, you said that Lee and the others had moved for cover. What are Lee, and the others doing right now? Also, do you see any other traps? And have the boomers made it to his floor yet?”
Nene answered, “Right now, the three men are crouched down, behind an island table, and the interior wall, in a room, further down the hallways. Lee is covering the door to the hallway. Garibaldi is the man in the middle, and he is likely going to cover the windows. And the third man, is on the other side of Garibaldi. That man is doing something on the floor. But, I don't know what it is.”
Mal asked, “If you had to guess, what does the third man look like he is doing?”
Nene answered, “Using tools to put something together on the floor... The reality device! That guy took apart, and he is trying to put it back together, while Lee and Garibaldi buy him time.”
Revy smile became slightly wider, as she said, with glee in her tone of voice, “So, that is why he hasn't reality jumped yet. He can't. Lee is trapped here, and he knows it. And now we do to.” She mentally added, 'I wonder if Rock already figured this out... If so, I guess she didn't tell us, because she didn't want to us to rush in here. Which is a smart move.'
Mal grinned wildly, as he said, “That is so nice to hear.”
Sawyer mentioned, “Garibaldi has always been an inquisitive man.”
Sawyer then noticed everyone just staring at her.
Sawyer commented, “What?... When I saw the series, I liked it. Even though we kidnapped a few of the people here. It didn't mean I didn't respect them.”
Nene deadpanned, “What do you do with those you don't respect?”
Shenhua said, “Don't ask.”
Roberta turned to Sawyer, as she said, “Don't feel bad at about that, Sawyer. It is a good series. After we left the tower, I showed it to Fabiola and the master, both of whom liked the series, as well. All three of us found it to be very well put together.”
Sawyer turned to Roberta, as she replied, “Thank you.” She then turned to the rest of the group, as she commented, “It is likely at some point that Lee was asleep. A night, like the night he had last night would wear anyone out. And Garibaldi had his reality device taken from him. With Lee not knowing the device was disassembled, while he was talked to Rock. If that was not case, Lee might have tried to be more negotiable with Rock, as they talked on the phone.”
Shenhua agreed, “Very likely.”
Revy said, “Now, let's get the bastard before he slips through our hands, once again. When it comes to Lee, he won't shot to kill, and he knows that we know that. And because of that, it is going to be a very quick fight.”
Sawyer pointed out, “Hold it, Nene still had not answered all of Shenhua's questions?” She saw Shenhua smile, as she continued, “We need to know about other traps that we might be facing?”
Revy agreed, “Good point.”
Nene answered, “There are none for us. And automated machine guns, are the only traps I see for the boomers. Likely, they are a last ditch effort to delay the boomers.”
Zoe pointed out, “We still need to be wary of such weapons.”
Nene agreed, “Yes.”
Zoe inquired, “Are the automated weapons capable of turning around to shoot us?”
Nene answered, “No. I don't think it has a full three hundred and sixty degree's, in turning. And as Revy pointed out, Lee doesn't want to kill us. And he likely convinced Garibaldi to do the same thing.”
Roberta stated, “Though, they are corners, they might change their minds. But, either way, we also need to know where the boomers are?”
Nene answered, “The boomers scaling the wall outside, are about ten floors down. But, the ones coming up from the inside the building, on the western side, are about to make it to this floor, from the elevator shafts, and stairwell.”
“The good news is. As I said. Like us. There are three sets of barricade doors, between them, and those men. But, that, and the automated machine gun, will not hold them for long.”
Revy stated, “Then, we don't have much time, and we need to hurry.”
Sawyer said, “Yes. Let's get this party started.”
She then turning on her chainsaw, and started walking towards the barricade doors, as Nene followed behind her.
The two women made short work of the barricade doors. With Sawyer chainsawing the left door, as where it met the wall. While, Nene used her wrist blade it cut through the right door, at where it met the wall.
Given they were cutting both sides, where the two doors met the walls, they did not both to cut the center, where the doors met, and locked together.
Nene then used her hardsuit raw strength to push the doors forward, and down to the floor.
After the first two double-doors fell, the two women moved onto the next set of barricade doors.
Meanwhile, the rest of Revy's group were behind them. And they pulled out their weapons, and readied themselves for battle.
(_)
A couple of minutes later, Garibaldi, Lee and Bernard crouched down beside each other, with their backs to the island. Lee and Garibaldi had their weapons ready, while Bernard continued to work on the reality device.
They had left the door to the hallway open, so they could cover the hallway, see who was coming. Lee was closest to the door, which Garibaldi being between Lee and Bernard.
Lee thought, 'At much as I would like to use that viewscreen by the door, to see what it happening. It will be to close for the action. And I would be completely wide open. It is best to stay down, and fire from here. At this angle, I can hit into the northern side of the hallway, near the barricade doors And all I want to do is stall them. Besides, their bullets would pass between the titanium bars in the wall, and though the walls. So, shooting from the door, would be unwise, unhealthy, and would likely get me killed.'
Lee then heard Sawyer's chainsaw starting to cut through the last eastern barricade door.
Lee looked at the open door to the hallway, as he tightened his grip on his PPG pistols. He said, “Looks like we are facing the girls first.”
Garibaldi stated, “Okay. You handle them. I will cover the window, when those monsters crash the party.” He mentally reflected, 'I would be tempted to give Lee up to these girls, at this point. But, I doubt they would go for it.'
Lee continued looking at the door, as he said, “Okay... And Bernard, how is the device coming along?”
Bernard answered, “We are down to a few minutes, until it is ready.”
Lee replied, “Good.” He mentally added, 'We still might escape... Even thought we are cutting this really damn close, in so many ways.'
Lee stayed down, as he made it to the end of the island, near the open doorway that lead to the hallway.
Next, from his vantage point, he watched as end of Sawyer's chainsaw came out of the northern most barricade door, from the top, where the door met the wall, and made it all the way down, to the floor.
After that, Lee watched as the chainsaw then came down between the doors, where the two doors that composed that set of barricade doors, met, and locked together.
When Sawyer finished, Lee watched the door tip forward, that finished. He then saw Sawyer for a second, before she backed away behind the other door, that was still standing.
Lee thought, 'They are leaving the other door up, as cover. That is very smart of them. Well, I might as well say, hi, and try to stall them. And hope they don't kill me, as they return fire.'
Lee held out his PPG pistols in front of him, as he took aim. He then yelled, “Hi girls! Sorry about this! But, I want to live!” He then fired both his PPG pistols at the north hallway wall, beside the open, where the destroyed barricaded door had been standing.
Beside Lee, Garibaldi could not help but chuckle a little at what Lee said and did. He thought, 'In my entire previous career as a security professional. Never have I once met a suspect that greeted me, apologizes in advance of shooting at me, and then fired at me. I guess that is a first time for everything. And I just hope his plan works, and he doesn't get us killed, or worse.'
Meanwhile, beside Garibaldi, opposite to Lee, Bernard was nearing completion to repairing the reality device, as he had heard what Lee had said, and then he heard Garibaldi chuckle. He thought, 'I am beginning to believe that that my boss, and this other man, are crazy. And if I was to guess, so are those after them. When I joined this company, it was to have a nice, stable, steady paycheck for my family, and I. Not to get into adventures. That is why I am taking the trapdoor, instead of going with them, somewhere in the multiverse...'
'Let someone else do the adventuring. My adventuring ends at watching a vid. Which I can turn it off any time I want.'
Bernard then continued to work on repairing the reality device, as quickly as possible. Though, slow enough that he knew he would not make a mistake, which could likely get them all killed. If he could not get the device to work right.
(_)
Thirty seconds ago, in the eastern side of the hallway, outside the lab, on the sixty-first floor, Sawyer had just finished remove the door to her right. As she watched the flat down, she quickly backed away, to where the rest of the group was standing.
Sawyer turned around to see that her group had their weapons out, and ready. Though, those in her group that were using firearms, were pointing their weapons towards the ground, and they had their trigger fingers resting on the trigger guards and not the triggers of the weapons.
As Sawyer came to a stop, by the left side of the hallway, behind the standing door, she turned off her chainsaw. Sawyer then thought, 'I think I just saw Lee. And he is armed.'
A few seconds later, the group heard Lee yelled, “Hi girls! Sorry about this, but I want to live!”
From the viewing angle they were at, the group saw Lee fire a few warning shots into the wall, on the other side of the hole they had made in the hallway.
Sawyer mentally reflected, “Yep. He is armed. And only he would be polite enough to apologize to us in advance, before firing a weapon as us. I don't think he wants to piss us off. He just want to keep his away from him.'
Shenhua commented, “I don't believe Lee shot first.”
Roberta shrugged, as she said, “I guess Lee prefers death, over capture.' She mentally lamented, 'And I had such lovely torture plans for him.'
Revy pointed out, “Nah. He is just buying time. Those shots hit the wall. He don't want to hit us.”
Mal commented, “So, who is going to disarm him?”
Everyone turned to Nene. Nene quickly pointed out, “This armor is designed for physical blows, along with energy and projectile hits. Years ago, Sylia, Mackie, and I studied the plasma weapons this reality uses. Even at low levels, my suit will not completely protect me from the blasts.”
Roberta said, “Don't worry, Nene. You have done enough alright.” She mentally reflected, 'Besides, you have been a nice person, and I really don't want to see you hurt. The only person I want to see hurt here is Lee.'
Revy stated, “I will handle him. Besides, I want another crack at him.”
Roberta deadpanned, “Who doesn't?”
Zoe seconded Revy, as she agreed, “I like that idea.” She thought, 'If Ms. dodge bullets wants to get him. I say more power to her.'
Revy then turned towards the barricade door that was still standing. She walked over to it. She came to a stop, right behind the door that was still standing. She faced the north wall, as she yelled, “Hi Lee! Glad you finally decided to stand your ground!”
(_)
Meanwhile, in the lab room, Lee had just heard Revy, as he remain crouched between the island and the interior wall.
Lee thought, 'It figures that Revy would be the one doing the talking for her group. And this just confirms that Rock made her leader of this group, instead of one of the others. But, better her, than one of the other ones, like Roberta. Well, I might as well reply before I piss her off enough to shoot at me.'
Lee yelled back, “Not much choice in this situation! And before we get into it, I freely admit that I know I cannot beat you in a gunfight!”
Revy happily responded, in a loud tone of voice, “Good! Then surrender, before the boomers get here!
Lee loudly conceded, “As tempting at it is! Not happening!”
Revy yelled, “How about you, Garibaldi?! We promise to get you, and your friend, out of this mess, unharmed?!”
Garibaldi loudly replied, “Unfortunately, I have to say no! My honor would never allow it! Besides, I always wanted to see what was on the other side of the looking glass!” He thought, 'Like the Alice in Wonderland stories.'
On the other side of Garibaldi, from Lee, Bernard heard all this. Bernard thought, with worry, 'Oh lord. These two are nuts. And I don't dare try to surrender. Because these people don't know me. And I know this, Lee, will likely kill me.'
While still covering the entrance to the hallway, Lee said, “Thanks, Mister Garibaldi.”
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as he replied, “No problem, Lee.”
Revy pointed out, “Be careful what you wish for, because you may not like what you find!”
Garibaldi strongly replied, “I'm willing to take that risk!”
Lee then saw Revy start to put her head around the barricade door, to see them. Lee quickly fired a few shots with the PPG pistols, at the north wall, towards the floor, on the other side of the barricade door that standing. The shots were far enough not to hit Revy,'s head, but close enough to force Revy back behind the standing barricade door.
(_)
At that moment, in the hallway, Revy ducked back to the left side of the hallway.
Behind Revy, the rest of her group watched what happened.
Mal smirked, as he said, “Careful now. You don't want to get your head shot off.”
Revy giggled. She then said, “Those shots were way to far to hit me. As I said, Lee doesn't want to kill us.” She then mentally admitted, to herself, 'Though, he is starting to annoy me... Well, more so than usual.'
Revy then noticed that Lee was firing two shots at once. She realized, as she asked, “Are you dual wielding two pistols?!”
Lee sarcastically replied, “Yea! What?! Redneck can't dual wield?!”
Revy inquired, “Akira said you were not that good at dual wielding pistol?!”
Lee answered, “I am okay at doing it! I am just not at your level! Though, at this range, I don't have to be!”
Revy agreed, “Good point! Now, let me show you how to properly use a pair of pistols at once!”
She then popped her head around the opening, and fired both her pistols, are right above Lee's head.
Though, Revy aimed above Lee's head, inside the lab, Lee precognition warned him to duck. Lee instantly did so, as the bullets pass far over his head, and the island table he was standing beside.
As Lee leaned back up, he saw that Revy had duck back behind the barricade door.
Lee then heard Revy yelled, “Those were my warning shots! We know that your reality device is currently busted! Surrender, now!”
Lee thought, 'Shit! They figured it out! How?... Of course, Nene's hardsuit had infrared sensors. And it wouldn't take a genius to figure out what Bernard is working on... And that was likely the only warning I am going to get from Revy... What am I going to do?... I need to be honest. They got me dead to rights. I might as well surrender while I have time.'
But, just before Lee was about to open his mouth, everyone heard the sound of banging coming from western end of the hallway.
Lee grimly thought, 'It figures the boomers would show up, right now. Well, it looks like it is too late to surrender now.'
Lee turned to Garibaldi and Benard, as he stated, “Get ready guys. The monster killer robots have arrived.”
Garibaldi replied, 'Thanks for the heads up.”
Bernard kept working on the reality device, as he joked, “It is too late to get off this ride?” He thought, 'If I am going to die. I can at least say I cracked a few jokes, as well.”
Lee's lips curled into a wicked grin, as he stated, “Way too late.”
Bernard replied, “I was afraid you would say that.”
Lee then kept his wicked grin, as he likely chuckled at Bernard's response, for a few seconds.
And so the three men then began to mentally preparing themselves with facing the imminent attack of the boomers against them.
(_)
On the eastern side of the wall, Revy looked around the door, and towards the far end of the hallway. She saw brown lance tear through the barricade doors, from other end of the doors.
Revy immediately recognized the lance, as she thought, 'Crap! The boomers are here.'
Revy then watched, as the front battle boomer ripped off the barricade doors fulling. That was went the automated, PPG machine gun, on the tripod, twenty feet in front of the doors, start fire precise body shots at the boomers heads and chest.
Revy saw that the power level from each plasma blast was so strong that, while the boomers did not explode. Nor, show any serious outward injury, save for minor scorch marks. After one or two shots, the internal injuries to the electronic and organic components were so great that the boomers instantly stop moving, as the fell over, and were deactivated by the hits.
But, Revy did see other battle boomers and combat boomers behind boomers that fell.
These boomers just climbed over, or pushed out of the way, their fallen brethren, and continued forward, as the machine gun kept firing away at the killing machines.
Revy then ducked back behind the door, as she turned to looked at her group.
Mal guessed, “The boomers are here?
Revy answered, “Yes. But, the good news is that that energy machine gun is taking out the boomers where they stand.”
Nene stated, “Unfortunately, there are more coming. Too many for that machine gun.”
Roberta asked, “Can we take them?”
Nene answered, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Not really. It is too confined in here me to fight boomer. Trust me, close quarters with even one boomer is very dangerous. Even with a hardsuit. And my lasers will damage it. But, I have only enough energy to take down only one or two boomers. And my sensors states that machine gun will only slow them down for about another minute.”
“Though, from what my sensor shows, the energy weapons that Zoe and Mal's have, that are currently holster, under their coats, have the best chance of likely taken down most, if not all the boomers that are heading our way.”
Roberta thought, 'And we can probably handle the rest. So, we are not defeated, yet. Still, I wonder what weapons, Nene is referring too?'
Zoe cracked a grin, as she said, “I was wondering when one of you would notice we had these beauties.”
Zoe and Mal holstered the weapons in their hand. Next, they both of them each pulled out a firearm from two other holsters from their clothing. The held their new weapons in their right hands.
Revy was the first to recognize the weapons in the veterans' hands. She questioned, “Star Trek Federation phaser pistols? You brought phaser pistols with you? And I didn't even notice.”
Mal commented, in a humorous tone of voice, “And our shoulder holsters were a good place to hide them in.”
Shenhua asked, “Where did you get those weapons from?”
Zoe answered, “Chang got them for us,”
Shenhua deadpanned, “Why am I not surprised?”
Sawyer said, “Be happy for this turn of events. We should be able to take down several boomers with just those two weapons, with ease.”
Mal smiled, as he said, “Now ladies. Please, step out of the way, and let the professionals do their jobs.”
Roberta thought, 'It is so tempting to wipe that smile off his face. But, Sawyer is right. His and Zoe's weapons are our best bet to take down the boomers, and capture Lee. Still, there are a few things those two need to know about those killing machines...'
Roberta looked at Zoe and Mal, as she calmly stated, “The large brown boomers take precedence, in most cases, in being destroyed first. The lances on those large brown boomers' right arms have a machine guns and a rocket launchers built into them.”
“Also, as Nene said, early. If one of the blue boomers suddenly opens it's mouth, to fire its energy cannon, or popped up the heat panel on its chest, fire on those boomers first. Those four weapons will take us out in a few shots, even with the barricade here for cover. And head shots are your best bet here.”
Zoe said, “We will keep that in mind.” She mentally added, 'I am glad we are using the phaser pistols Chang got from us, instead of our usual weapons, like we had last night.'
Mal mentioned, “Just remember to set your weapons for medium setting. We want to take down as many as possible, while not running out of ammo for these things.”
Zoe looked at Mal, as she answered, “Already done, sir.”
Mal and Zoe then walked over to the barricade door. They then leaned around the door, with Mal standing, and Zoe kneeling, as they started shooting at the boomers. With each of them taking down a boomer with each shot they made.
(_)
At that moment, in the lab, between the island and the interior wall, Lee continued to watch the hallway.
Lee had already heard the PPG machine gun in the hallway come to life, a few seconds ago. He then then saw Mal and Zoe popped around the barricade door in the hallway, as they started to fire their weapons at boomers, across the hallway.
Lee immediately recognized the weapons, due to the streaks of red energy, long with the sound, and the way the weapons were shaped.
Lee quickly moved back closer to Garibaldi and Bernard, as he thought, 'Crap, Mal and Zoe have phasers. Fortunately, they are going after the boomers, and aiding that machine gun in the hallway. But, if they see me, one of them will likely switch their weapon to stun, and knock me out. And I cannot afford to be unconscious at this point in the game.'
Just as Lee came to a stop right beside Garibaldi, Garibaldi turned to Lee, as he ordered, “Status report.”
Lee continued to watch the doorway, as he answered, “Well, the boomers broke through the last barricade doors on the western side. The PPG automated machine gun is holding them off, with the help of energy fire from the humans after me. We have a minute, to a minute and a half.” Lee then turned to Bernard and Garibaldi, as he turned to the technician, as he inquired, “Bernard, how long on the device?”
Bernard continued working, as he answered, “Between thirty seconds, to two minutes.”
Lee stayed silent, as Garibaldi said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Just get the job done. I have faith in you.”
Bernard did not looked up, as he commented, “Thank you, Mister Garibaldi.”
Garibaldi smiled, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Suddenly, the three men heard the two large windows, across from them, in the lab, being shattered. A second later, the two automated PPG machine guns stationed between them and the window, roared to life, signaling that the combat boomers that had been scaling the outside wall, had finally their room.
Garibaldi commented, “I guess the final members of this party just got here.”
Lee joked, “Yes. Coming through the window is so stylish these days.”
Garibaldi and Lee chuckled a little at Lee's joke.
Nearby, Bernard remained silent, as he re-doubled his efforts to get the reality device finished. He thought, 'If I am right. Once I finish this device, I just need to use the trapdoor under me, and disappear into the saferoom, a floor below. While both these armies follow Mister Garibaldi and Lee into the multiverse.'
Meanwhile, Garibaldi then saw Lee has turn around, with his front of the island. Garibaldi did the same, as he guessed, “So, when do we play the galaxy's most extreme version of the game of whack a mole? With us being the moles?”
Lee used his precognition, as he commented, “Any second now. Just follow me lead. You aim for the head of the boomer in front of you. I will do the same.”
A few seconds later, Lee's precognition alerted him it was the proper moment, and he then immediately popped up from the island, with Garibaldi down the same. Both men stood their ground, as they quickly took aim with their weapons, and fired at the heads of the two closest boomers were at.
The two boomers were just climbing inside, from the window ledges, and onto the floor, three feet below them. The boomers had not even gotten back to their feet, yet.
There were two other boomers lying on the floor, ten feet from the automated machine guns.
Lee and Garibaldi hit their marks, with Lee seeing the two boomer fall to the floor, dead, as he ducked down behind the island, for cover.
Garibaldi saw Lee duck down, and he did the same.
Garibaldi stated, “At least we now know our hand-held PPG weapons work on them.”
Lee agreed, “Yea. Unfortunately, not counting the four that are already down. There are eight other combat boomers trying to get in from the outside. And eventually, one side, or the other, in the hallway is going to win, and we are going to be overwhelmed.” Lee mentally added, 'At least the machine guns took two of them out. And we took another two of them out. That is eight to go, from the window. But, I don't know how long we can handle this.'
Bernard overheard this, and he realized where the conversation was heading. He said, “I am almost done. About thirty seconds.”
Garibaldi and Lee responded, in unison, “Good.”
Lee turned to his right to see though the hallway, as Mal and Zoe continued to fire at the boomers coming from the western end of the hallway.
Lee also realized something, as he thought, 'I am not hearing the machine gun from the hallway any more. Meaning the boomers have gotten past it, and the only thing holding them back is Revy's group. We have got to get out of here as soon as possible. But, I have to focus on keeping that window covered...'
Lee faced in front of him, at the island, as he said, “We are coming down to the wire. Ready for another round?”
Garibaldi replied, “Sure.”
Lee then used his precognition, and when he felt it was the proper time, he popped up from behind the island, with Garibaldi right beside him. Lee fired his PPG pistols at the head of a boomer climbing into the building, while Garibaldi used his PPG rifle to fire at the head of a boomer, that had just stepped onto the floor.
Both were kill shots, and Lee noted there there were another two boomers on the floor, making eight dead boomers in all.
Lee then ducked down, with Garibaldi doing the same.
Lee thought, 'Eight down. Four to go.'
Suddenly, on the other side of Garibaldi, Bernard yelled, “Done!” He then head out the reality device for Lee and Garibaldi.
Lee immediately dropped his pistols, as he turned to Garibaldi and Bernard.
Lee then reached passed Garibaldi, as Bernard handed him the reality device.
Lee said, “Thank you, Bernard. Now, get out of here.” He then looked at the device, as he thought, 'It looks intact, and Bernard strikes me as the type of person whom would be honest about finishing something. So, this should work, or Garibaldi and I are about to be dead, or worse.'
Bernard cracked a grin, as he responded, “No problem. Good luck. See, you later, Mister Garibaldi.”
Garibaldi turned to Bernard, as he replied, “You to, Bernard.”
Bernard then pushed his tools away from him, opposite to where Garibaldi was next to him. After that, Bernard turned toward the island in front of him. He used the front of his right foot to pressed a button on the bottom of the island, by him.
A second later, the floor opened up under him, as he immediately slid down to the closet in floor below. With the trapdoor closing a few seconds later, behind him.
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as he said, “Garibaldi, we need to discard our weapons. Where we are going, we won't be able to get ammo for them. And we don't want to contaminate the past of an alternate Earth.”
Garibaldi turned to look at Lee, as he inquired, “And then when and where would that be?... Though, we really don't really have time for this.”
Lee hastily stated, “I agree. And to answer you question. The late Earth during the twentieth century. Still, to many eyes and ears to get more detail.”
Garibaldi said, “Understood.” He mentally added, 'Lee is right. I am going to have to lose the PPG weapon. Besides, mine is almost out of ammo. Also, the weapon would be out of place, and to hard to hide on me. Still, Lee has that combat knife, and we have our wits. And, Lee is also right that we don't want the others to overhear where we are going. And we need to get their, right now!'
Garibaldi then set his PPG rifle down, beside him, opposite to where Lee was.
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as he asked, “Do I need to get any closer?”
Given Lee and Garibaldi were less than a foot from each other, Lee continued to look at Garibaldi, as he answered, “No. We are close enough, as it.”
Garibaldi replied, “Good.”
Lee then held the reality device, as he began to think of when, where, and what reality he wanted to go too.
(_)
At that moment, almost twenty-five feet from them, two more, of the last four, blue combat, climbing the outside of the wall, made it up to the window. Given the boomers had been monitoring their brethren being destroyed by the automated machine guns, the two boomers had come up with a plan.
One would sacrifice itself, so the other could capture the target.
As both boomer made it over the ledge of the window, the combat boomer to Lee and Garibaldi’s right had it's back thruster vents open up. The thrusters were located in the boomer shoulder blades. They were horizontal, rectangular slits, that ran down three rows, on each side.
As the thrusters opened up, the boomer burst forward, through the air, towards the automated PPG machine guns.
The boomer took several plasma hits. A second later, its lifeless form crashed into the two machine guns, knocking them off their tripods, and shutting them down.
The dead deactivated. boomer then skidded to a stop, at the front wall of the island table, that Lee and Garibaldi were behind.
This cleared the way for the other boomer in the room, along with the two boomers behind it, to rush forward, over the island, and capture their target. While, eliminating the single witness, left in the room, by the target, that the killer machines saw with their infrared sensors.”
(_)
At that exact moment, Lee precognition screamed at him that it was time to leave that very second.
Lee mentally realized, 'That crash was the machine guns being taken out. We need to go now.' As he held the reality device, he had finished thinking of the time, place, and reality he wanted to to go. And he was very specific on where they would land, in the location he mentally thought of.
Lee then looked up, just as he pushed the red button on the reality device. He saw combat boomer heading over island, towards them.
But fortunately, Lee and Garibaldi disappeared into the multiverse, right before the boomer was about reached them. With the boomer still mercifully far enough away, to not travel with them, to their next destination.
(_)
At that moment, in the hallway, outside the lab, Mal and Zoe suddenly watched all boomers they saw disappear.
The two war veterans stopped firing, as Mal asked, “What is going on?”
Behind them, and the standing barricade door, Sawyer asked, “What do you mean?”
Mal and Zoe turned to face the rest of their group, as they holstered their phasers.
Zoe stated, “The boomers suddenly disappeared. Not that I am complaining.”
Roberta guessed, “Damn. Lee and Garibaldi are gone.” She then holstered her pistols.
Mal and Zoe then noticed that Revy follow suit, by holstering her pistols. Shenhua sheathed her knives. And Sawyer turned off her chainsaw, and slung it across her back, by its strap.
Nene stated, “Roberta is are right. Sensors show that Lee and Garibaldi are gone.” She thought, 'It is so tempting to throw a fit about losing Lee. But, I must remember that I am a better women than these girls. And I am sure, that later, Sylia will come up with a plan to catch Lee. This is only a delay, not a defeat.'
Meanwhile, Zoe thought, 'That figures. So close, and we almost had Lee. The irony being that the captain and I would have immediately teleport Lee, and anyone else with him, away, before the others realize it... I guess, there goes our reward... Oh well... At least Chang can be understanding about these sorts of things.'
Shenhua asked, “And the third guy with them?”
Nene said, “I tracked him to the floor below. There is a trapdoor in the lab. I cannot get a heat reading from him. I would guess he is in some sort of saferoom.”
Sawyer turned to Revy, as she asked, “Do you want to go after the third guy?”
Revy looked over at Sawyer. She shrugged, as she replied, “No. He is not important. If he was, the boomers would still be here. And I have no interest dragging an innocent bystander with us.” She thought, 'I would never hear the end of it, from Rock, if I did.'
Roberta pointed out, “He did help repair the reality device.”
Revy said, “That doesn't matter. He was just doing his job. And he clearly had enough common sense not to want to go with those two. That earns him points in my book.”
Roberta shrugged, as she replied, “You have a point there.”
Zoe inquired, “As fun as those questions are. I would still like to know where the army of killing machine went?”
Roberta turned to Zoe, as she coyly answered, “Back to our past?”
Zoe looked over at Roberta, as she politely requested, “Could you please elaborate?” She thought, 'I hate it when I am the one kept in the dark.'
Revy answered, “Garibaldi was the boomers' target. With Garibaldi gone, the boomers immediately teleported back to Chang's tower. At least those that were still functioning.”
Sawyer commented, “Chang did not want these boomers to just go rampaging through the multiverse for their targets. If their target escaped into the multiverse, they were to go back to the tower, report on what happened, and then await further orders.”
Revy said, “Yes. Even we are not foolish enough to let boomers loose on the multiverse, without some control over them.”
Zoe deadpanned, “That's... nice.” She thought, 'It is so tempting to start in on that subject with them, but we just don't have the time.'
Meanwhile, Revy ignored Zoe sarcastic remark, as she thought, 'I need to know if everyone else is alright?' She stated, “I need to talk to Rock and the others.”
Everyone else in the hallway became quiet, as Revy pulled out her radio. She then spoke into it, “Is everyone okay?”
Over the radio, Revy and the others heard Aeryn's voice say, in a calm, professional tone of voice, “There are no causalities on our end. Violin, myself, and the Knight Sabers will be fine. Though, they wrecked their motoslaves. Still, we are wondering why boomers disappeared, all of a sudden?”
Revy responded, with her radio, “We will get to that in a moment. Rock, how is your end?”
Over the radio, Rock answered, “We are fine? How about you?”
Revy thought, 'Good.' She answered, into her radio, “We're alive. But, Lee and Garibaldi got away. That is why the boomers disappeared. They were pre-programed to return to the tower, if their target, such as Garibaldi, jumps to another reality. Even we didn't want boomers chasing after people, across realities.”
On the radio, Sylia complimented, “That is wise programing.”
Revy inquired, over her radio, “Thank you. Would about the third person?”
Over her radio, Revy commented, “From what we understand. The third person dropped into a saferoom on the floor below us.”
Over the radio, Rock stated, “Leave him be.”
Revy thought, 'That is just what I was thinking of doing.' She replied, into her radio, “Of course.”
Over the radio, Aeryn asked, “Why would Lee take Garibaldi with him?”
On the radio, Rock stated, “That is probably how Lee got Garibaldi to go along with his plan. Lee likely didn't tell Garibaldi too much, But, he would have told him enough that Garibaldi would not want to take his chances staying here, nor turning to us, for help.”
Violin broke into the conversation, with her radio, “Also, Lee would not want to see anyone else hurt for his negligence. Besides, Garibaldi is a diehard otaku. That convention we went to last night. Which Garibaldi was the one funding. Proves that. Also, the B Five series out right showed he is a Looney Tunes fan. The thought of traveling the multiverse would appeal to his fanboy side. And I am sure Lee realized that. Lee also might have played that angle up, to entice Garibaldi into helping him.”
Over her radio, Revy agreed, “True. And even I will give Lee credit, that when given the opportunity, he was willing to at least save one of his unintended victims.” Revy looked over Nene, whom looked at her, and shrugged. Revy then looked over at Roberta, whom was looking back at her. Revy continued, into her radio, “We need to take that into account. And while we will torture Lee for what he did to us. What we do to him may not be too horrible.”
In responded, Roberta just snorted.
Nene thought, 'I will give Lee credit. He did save at least one of his would be victims. While trying his best not to harm us. Though, he did slow us down. That will not stop of from finding him, and punishing. Still, like Revy. We will take what he has done here, into account, when we do punish him.'
Nearby, Sawyer had been quietly listening to the conversation, as was everyone else, that was by Revy. After hearing Revy's last comment, Sawyer thought, 'Revy openly acknowledging Lee saving Garibaldi, and her considering leniency for Lee, is a good sign for Lee. Considering she has been one of the more vocal members of our group, demanding to make Lee pay. And I admire what Lee did, by saving Garibaldi. While not harming us. Lee truly is not that bad a person. He has just been very foolishness.'
'Now, to find out where he went.'
Sawyer then pulled out a small tracking table that she had stuffed under the back of her pants, under her shirt. She was careful not to harm herself, from the teeth of her chainsaw, which was slung by its strap on her back, while she reached for the tracking device.
Meanwhile, over the radio, Sylia stated, “Onto more pressing matters. We likely need to leave as soon as possible. The authorities will likely soon come. And we do not want to be here, when they arrive.”
On the radio, Rock agreed, “You are right. We have overstayed our welcome.”
Over the radio, Sylia commented, in a disappointed tone of voice, “It is unfortunate, we cannot stay long enough to remove these boomers bodies, the pieces of our motoslaves, and technology they hold, before the local authorities arrive.”
Revy replied, on her radio, “It cannot be helped.”
On the radio, Rock pointed out, “This reality is already very advanced technology. And boomer, and motoslave technologies will no give those that study it here that much of a technological edge in this reality.”
Over the radio, Sylia responded, “Then, I can live with this situation. Still, we must find Lee, and I guess, Garibaldi, as well.”
On the radio, Rock requested, “I agree. Revy, could you please find out where they are heading?”
Revy looked over at her group, to see that Sawyer had pulled out a tracking tablet.
Revy cracked a grin, as she said, into her radio, “Already on it.”
A second later, Sawyer saw, on the screen of her tablet, the read out stating, what reality, where and when the two men had gone too. She thought, with disbelief, 'You have got to be kidding me. Lee really is insane.'
Sawyer looked up at Revy, as she said, “We have a problem.”
Revy did not use her radio, as she asked, “What is it?”
Sawyer told Revy and those around her, when, where, and what reality, Lee and Garibaldi had gone to.
Revy agreed, “That is a problem.” Revy stated, into her radio, “Rock we have a problem on where, when, and what they are at.”
Over the radio, Rock inquired, “Lee and Garibaldi did not disappear? Did they?”
With her radio, Revy answered, “No. Lee took Garibaldi to Akira's home reality. And from what Sawyer is telling me, they are in the middle of Jusenkyo. And from the date, it is in the past. Likely even before Ranma became cursed, there.”
(_)
At that moment, on the eastern side of the headquarters, in the field, outside the complex, Rock stood looking at the main building, as she heard what her lover had just told here.
Rock turned to look, across her group, where was at Ranma. Ranma was standing around, talking with her family, Akira, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto.
Rock mentally cursed, 'Damn. I sometimes hate being right.'
Rock then turned back to face the tower, as she forced herself to calm down, as she said, her the radio, “That is unfortunate. Lee knows we are definitely not going to immediately follow him there. It is too dangerous a place for anyone to go. And Lee knows this. But, I doubt we are lucky enough for Lee to curse himself. And he would make sure Garibaldi did not accidentally curse himself.”
Revy over the radio, continued her lover's commented, “And since we know the reality, the when, and the where, they are. We don't have to immediately follow them. We have plenty of time. So, instead, we can just use our reality devices to teleport back to the inn. To our rooms. Where we will get our stuff. Check out. Go get our vehicles. And then we all meet back home, at the island, a day after we first left for De La Plata Podrido. Once there. We will figure out a plan to catch up with Lee.”
Rock complimented, into her radio, “Good plan.”
(_)
At that second, in a hallway, on the sixty-first floor of the main tower of the Edgars complex, Revy stood there, with her group, as she replied, into her radio, “Thanks.”
Revy happily thought, 'I love it when we are in sync, like this.'
Revy then noticed Roberta continuing to look at her, with an unreadable expression on the Bloodhound's face.
Revy mentally reflected, 'I better find out if Roberta is going to go along with this.' She asked, “Is this okay with you?”
Roberta answered, in an even tone tone of voice, “It is fine.”
Revy thought, 'She is not happy about this. But, she will go along with it. For now.' She replied, “Good.”
Revy used her radio, as she stated, “I will see you girls back at the inn. Also, for time line wise, just keep in mind, a day after my group left Lagoon island, in my family's home reality, to originally go after Lee, in De La Plata Podrido. At noon, local time. Don't worry. It will work. I have done similar jumps in the past.” She then clipped her radio back onto her belt.
Next, she turned to the rest of the group, as she said, “Okay, ladies. The mission is officially over. As I am sure you just heard. We are going to head to the Blacksheep Inn. Then, we go get our vehicles, and head for my home island. Where we can figured out what to do next, to catch Lee... Any problems with that?...”
She noticed a few of the people with her shook their heads, but none of them verbally replied.
Revy said, “Good. Now, let's get out of here.”
Within the next few minutes, or so, everyone that was part of Rock and Revy's group, or a member of the Knight Sabers, used their reality devices.
Those that were staying at the Blacksheep Inn, teleported to their rooms, at the Blacksheep inn, where they collected their belongings, check out, retrieve their vehicles, and then head to Lagoon island, themselves.
Though, for those leaving the inn, most of them teleported to their homes, in the various realities, to drop off their luggage, and vehicles, before heading to Lagoon Island, a day after the Lagoon family had first left to find Lee, in De La Plata Podrido.
This include Mal, whom headed for Chang's casino, in Lee's reality.
For those in Lee's reality, it was only a few minutes after Mal had previously left. Two mornings after Lee original left his home reality. Mal then dropped off his few belongings that he had taken with him, along with his vehicle. He then updated Chang and River on what was going on. And finally, Mal headed to Lagoon Island.
Fortunately, Mal found that Chang was understanding, as Chang found the entire situation humorous.
And so, everyone soon made it to Lagoon Island, where they would come up with their next plan to capture Lee.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
Chapter 09: “Lee's Folly.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Akira's reality. Time, last twentieth century. Location, in the middle of Jusenkyo, China. Time, mid-morning.
It was mid-morning, as a light foggy mist surrounded them. Though, the fog was clear enough to allow them to see their surroundings. And the weather was slightly cool, but slowly warming, as the day went on.
The first thing Lee did, was to check to see that both he and Garibaldi were sitting, next to each other, on a large strip of land, in the middle of the curse pools, with bamboo stalks rising from the water, that surrounded them.
Garibaldi was to Lee's left side. Lee still had his reality device in his hands. Also, Lee was in his black suit, with red tie, and black dress suits. While Garibaldi was in his brown suit and brown dress suits, without a tie.
Lee pocked his reality device, into his left pants pocket, as he thought, with relief, “Good. We are both on dry ground. Just as I had planned. Still, that was way too close. But, I better get my bearings. And warn Garibaldi about this place. Before we head out. Also, we have been so busy, I did not have time to find out what shoes Garibaldi wears. And those brown dress shoes look got on him, with his brown suit. He pulled off his CEO look, very well.'
Lee then looked around, he saw the cursed pools around them, and saw the mountains, in the distance, around the valley they were in. And closer to them, he saw bamboo stalks that were coming up from the water of the cursed pools.
Lee then looked up, at the sky.
While it was foggy, Lee could see make out the sun in the sky.
Lee thought, 'Given the weather. I know it is morning. Because fog like this only happens in the morning. And this fog is light enough that I can see the sun through the fog, along with where the pools are. So, I can use the sun as a compass. And taking into account of that. To my left is the west and to my right is the east. Now, to figure out the best way out of here.'
Lee then looked around himself, again. Only this time, he looked as far was he could through the mist.
Fortunately, the mist was not that thick, at ground leave. Though, the sky was cloudy. And Lee could see in the distance.
To Lee's left, in the western distance, he saw mountain walls, and cliffs over looking the cursed springs.
Though, to Lee right, in the eastern direction, Lee saw hills and forests meeting the cursed pools of water.
Behind Lee, to the south, were some mountains that went up in slopes, as they bordered the cursed springs. And in front of him, to his north, Lee saw that the springs bordering a large clearing.
And while the location was dangerous. Taking into the whole view, as a while, with the springs, with the forests, the cliffs, and the mountains in the distance. With the area shrouded in mist. The area was quite a sight to behold.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'If it wasn't for these pools being dangerously cursed with magic, I would actually find the sight before me to be very relaxing, peaceful, and beautiful.'
'Now, how to get out of here?... If I remember the Ranma half manga correctly. Especially, the later half. We go to the northeast.'
'When, Ranma and Genma first came here, they came from a forest. Which is to the east. Though, given the Jusenkyo Guide's house, and the path entrance to Jusenkyo, are located in an open space, away from the cliffs. And that open space appears to be in the north. And the forest is to the east. We should head to the northeast, to exit this place.
'Also, from looking around, I would guess Jusenkyo is not that big a place. Likely, a few miles across, in all directions. So, even if we go very slowly, as we carefully navigate around the springs, on dry land. We can still get out of here, within an hour, or so. We just have to be very careful.'
'Now, to check on Garibaldi.'
Lee looked over at Garibaldi, as he asked, “You okay?”
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as he stood up. He then faced Lee, as he looked down a the other man, whom was sitting next to him. He answered, “Yea. Where are we?”
Garibaldi thought, while feeling mild wonder, 'I did not feel a thing, as we jumped through realities. It happened in an instant, and we appear to be fine. That is both interesting, and comforting. Though, my gut tells me that Lee bought us to somewhere very dangerous, so I need to be on my toes... Still, I am sure Lee will eventually warn me of any dangers here. If I am patient... And Lee would not bring us here, unless we could handle this place.'
Lee stood up, as well. When Lee was completely standing, turned to Garibaldi.
Both men looked at each other. Lee used both his hands to reach out, to his sides, as he gestured around them. He smiled, as he stated, with a bit of excitement and wonder in his tone of voice, “Welcome to the cursed springs of Jusenkyo.”
Lee then dropped his hands to his sides, as he continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “And do not let this scenic view full. Do not. I repeat. Do not fall into any of the springs. The springs are cursed. Magic is very real here. And these springs are under a magical curse. Part of the name of each spring, tells which spring has which curse, among the springs of this place.”
Garibaldi thought, 'That name rings a bell. But from where? And I still don't exactly believe in magic.' He requested, “Even after our escape by teleporting. I am not really keen on believing magic. But, after the morning I have spend with you, I am willing to give you the benefit of the doubt. Also, refresh my memory, of where we are?”
Lee looked Garibaldi in the eyes, as he answered, in a direct, and serious tone of voice, “Okay. I know this is hard to swallow. But, you need to take my word at face value. Because I am not going to test this. And you have to be very, very careful. The reason being that anyone that falls into one of the springs, takes the body of the whomever, or whatever first drowned, or at least were immersed, in that specific pool of water.”
“Such as, if you fall into spring of drowned dog. You take the body of a dog. If you fall into spring of drowned girl. You take take the body of a girl. There are also personality curses. If you call into spring of drowned monk, you take the body and personality of a monk. Though, I doubt you take their memories, as well.”
'Also, those cursed with animal forms retained their human mind, and personality.”
“The way to reverse the curse is to be splashed with hot water. And cold water activates that curse.”
Garibaldi then remember where he heard of the cursed springs before, as he commented, “Ah... Ranma Half series?”
Lee replied, “Yes.” He happily thought, 'I am so happy that Garibaldi is so genre savvy that I don't have to explain every little detail to him.'
Garibaldi looked around himself, as he saw he was on dry land, surrounded by pools. He turned back to Lee, as he stated, “I will be sure, to be careful.”
Lee said, “Good.”
Garibaldi looked around, again, for a few seconds. He then turned to Lee, as he commented, “So, this is Jusenkyo. The area looks nice. If the springs were not cursed, this would be a nice place to visit.”
Lee agreed, “My thoughts exactly. Though, this is not just a Ranma Half reality.”
Garibaldi asked, “What do you mean?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell him this much, due to us being in this reality.' Lee answered, “This is more crossover reality, of a Ranma Half composite series. A blending of the manga and anime. Birdy Decode anime. Gacha Gacha manga, Kampfer anime She-zow cartoon. The Street Fighter franchise. Futaba Change manga. Though, the ending of the Futaba Change manga does not exist here, due to not being able to fit with the rest of the series for this reality.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Now that is a strange combination of series, to be in one reality. And most of those series dealt with gender bending. One way, or another... Which given the insane mess we are in, and how some of those that are after us have had their genders bent, I am not surprised about... Though, I would like to know how he know this?...'
Garibaldi questioned, “And how would you know all this?”
Lee coyly said, “It is literally a long story.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Okay. We will get to that in a minute. Still, I am sure you didn't plan to just jump to another reality, right away? You planned to come here, for at least a little while. No one just comes here on a lark. Unless, they are an idiot, like Genma. And I retract what I said about you, before. You are clearly no idiot.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Actually, given some of the stunts you pulled. Including, the some of the ones I was present for. I would say quite the contrary. You are a genius. And I believe you already know that. Though, you are smart enough to downplay you intelligence, when you are dealing with others. So, we all underestimate you. Which I am no longer going to do.'
Lee thought, 'Yea. I may have to come clean with Garibaldi. And given where we are, he will not think me insane. And I doubt he will try to dunk me into a spring. He is the type of guy that would kill a person outright. Besides, he will not risk dunking himself in a spring. Plus, during my entire time with him. I have been polite and helpful toward him. Meaning he won't likely harm me, even after I tell him everything. Still, I need to answer his question, before he suspects something is up.'
Lee calmly stated, “Yes. I did plan to head here, a while back. For a few different reasons. Including avoiding my enemies.
Garibaldi said, “Okay. I can see that. While I do not think you are an idiot. You are insane to bring us here. Because only a lunatic would follow us.”
Lee replied, “I admit that was the line of thinking I was using.”
Garibaldi thought, 'And I actually admit that line of thinking. Now, how do you plan to get us out of here?' He calmly inquired, “Fine. And given how much trouble we went through to get here. I have a feeling that the way you plan to get us out of here, is not with you little toy, that brought us here.”
Lee responded, “You are correct. I do have plan to get out of here. That plan being that we will walk out of here. I already know where I plan to jump realities from. And it is not here. This is due to them being able to track us. But, the longer the time, between when we jump, and when they start tracking us, the long it takes for them to find us. And this lag applies to distance in location of reality jumping, as well.”
“And they cannot jump exacting where we arrived. Though, they can come within a few miles of us. Unless, they have a specific place in mind, and they have been to that location before.”
Garibaldi guessed, “So, that is why you went from Babylon Five to Mars. You tried to lose them.” He thought, 'That was not a bad plan. I wonder what went wrong?”
Lee responded, “Yes. It was a good plan. But, they knew me too well. And they correctly guessed where I was going.”
Garibaldi complimented, “Well, I give you an, A, for effort.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Garibaldi inquired, “You're welcome. So, which direction are we going?
Lee stated, “Northeast.” He used his right hand to point towards the northeast, as he continued, “This way.” He dropped his right hand back to his side, as he went onto say, “Until we reach dry land. It should take us an hour, or so, to make it out of here of these cursed springs. Though, we must be careful. And as such, we will do this slowly.”
“Also, keep in mind the dirt near the spring might be lose. So, keep to the middle of these strips of land. And be mindful of any boggy mud, on the land, that we need to avoid. I am not sure if the mud will transfer the curse. So, don't take any chances.”
Garibaldi replied, “Gotcha. I will keep that in mind.”
Lee turned to northeast, as he began to walk, as a slow, but steady pace. Due to him being mindful of staying on dry land, and avoiding the pools around them. As they navigated the cursed springs.
Garibaldi followed behind Lee. With him being just as mindful as Lee. As he followed Lee, he thought, 'I might as well find out where he is leading me, too.' He asked, “So, where are we heading?”
Lee kept his focus on carefully following the dry land in front of him, while avoiding the springs, as he kept in the same general direction. Because the strips of land did not go in a straight direction. Still, the sun and the distant surroundings provided Lee with the general bearings on which direction he needed to take, to keep going northeast.
As Lee did this, he coyly said, “I would prefer to keep our destination secret, for the time being. Though, as long as we obey the rules there, we should be fine. Still, once we are out of this place, I need to find someone, and ask him some questions. Then, we head for the departure location, and find a nice place, time, and reality, in the multiverse, to relax for a day, or so.”
Garibaldi thought, 'I still need to know if you plan to deal with you cancer. Or, if you are going to arrange for me to bury you.' questioned,' Garibaldi inquired, “Fine. But, what about you cancer? Or, do you plan for me to organize your funeral arrangements?”
Lee answered, “Don't worry. I already have that problem worked out.”
Garibaldi kept his eyes on where he was going, and where he stepped on dry land, as he followed Lee. He replied, “Good.” He mentally added, 'At least I don't have to worry about that. Still, I need to know more about about you, Lee. When faced with two sieges at once, with no quick escape. I just watched you use one siege against the other siege, to buy us time to successfully escape. And I will get some answers, for my questions, right now'
Garibaldi requested, “Lee. Since, I am this deep in this mess, with you. And we have the time. You might as well tell me the why and how you originally got into this mess?”
Lee kept his back turned to Garibaldi, as he continued on his way, while he though, 'He is going to keep asking me, until I tell him. But, I need to make it clear, that he is not going to like what I have to say to him.' He commented, “You are not going to like what I have to say.”
Garibaldi responded, calm, yet direct tone of voice, “At this point, it doesn't matter if I like what I am about to hear from you, or not. I still need to know.”
As they continued walking, Lee signed, as thought, 'I might as well tell him. At the very least it will kill some time.'
While Lee had his back turned to Garibaldi, the older man did notice Lee sighing.
Garibaldi thought, 'Oh. Given my experience in dealing with suspects, when they tell me something I am not going to be happy about hearing. I can just tell from Lee's sighing, that this explanation is going to be a big one. And I already know I am not going to like it. I can just tell. Still, I need to know. And I need to remember. That no matter what. Until I figure out how his reality device works.'
'And I cannot dunk him for anything that he says to me, that either makes me angry, or frustrates me, due to his idiocy. And I have learn since learn that geniuses have been known to do some galactic level acts of idiocy.'
Lee calmly began, “Well, if you want to know, I will tell you. How it began was so... Mundane... Yet, like most epic, life altering mistakes, it began with a simple idea...”
And so, as Lee and Garibaldi carefully, and slowly, made their way out of Jusenkyo, Lee then told Garibaldi about his stories, how he came up with his stories, what his stories were about, where he posted them, how his stories effected those after him, how some of those he had wronged came looking for him, what he did in response, and how he ended up with Garibaldi as a traveling companion.
To be honest, as they careful made their way out of the area of the cursed springs, Lee was mild surprised that Garibaldi did not try to dunk him on the spot.
(_)
Reality, Black Lagoon anime reality. Date, A day after the Lagoon family left to originally go after Lee, in Plata Podrido. Location, Lagoon Mansion, on Lagoon Island. Time, one ten PM, local time.
It was a sunny, warm day, on Lagoon Island, with a light breeze coming off the sea.
It had been an hour since Revy's group, and the Knight Sabers had reunited, after all of them had left the Babylon Five Reality, and come to Lagoon Island in the Black Lagoon anime reality.
Given the number of people in attendance, the Lagoon family decided to have their meeting in a clear area, in their large gym, inside the Lagoon mansion.
While most of the visitors came in their usual clothing. The eight members of the Knight Sabers came in their hardsuits, with their helmets on, and visors down, over their faces.
Everyone else did not make it an issue of the Knight Sabers coming into the Lagoon home, while being overdress. Though, they noticed the hardsuits were slightly damaged, from their battle at the Edgars Industries headquarters. But, the hardsuits were clearly otherwise still functioning.
Currently, everyone was gathered around Rock, in a forum style conversation, which was being stated in english. The people were all standing, in a group, as they listened to Rock, whom was standing a few feet away from the group.
At the moment, Rock was reviewing what they knew about Lee, and Garibaldi, and how best to approach the situation in capturing Lee, and retrieving Garibaldi, without harming the older man.
While most of those there, were mixed together, the eight Knight Saber members stood separated from the others, as a group.
Inside her hardsuit, Linna looked around the place with her sensors, as her helmet remained facing Rock. As she scanned the place, she said, over their internal, encrypted radio system, in japanese, “These people sure do have a nice place here.”
Priss commented, on their private channel, in japanese, “No kidding.” She mentally grumbled, with bitterness, 'And Lee is responsible for most of this. While he gave us the shaft. Though, we have achieved our wealth on are own. Still, this is one of the many reason Lee deserves an ass kicking!'
Linna complained, “Though, I don't see why we had to come to meet them like this?”
Kate said, over their private channel, in japanese, “I agree. Coming in a business dress would better in this situation. We need to look as professional as possible. These people are use to dealing with brutes. Not professional business women.”
Linna agreed, “You have a point there.”
Mackie said, on their encrypted channel, in japanese, “As long as it is not a skirt. I could care less.”
Leon mildly complained, on their radio channel, in japanese, “I just want a shower.”
Priss agreed, “That makes two of us.”
Nene commented, on their encrypted channel, in japanese, “Be happy that these upgraded hardsuits are not like the old ones. These have environmental controls, such as AC, and heating. So, we are not sweating a river in these things. Soaked, smelly hair is no fun in these helmets.”
Daley said, on their radio channel, in japanese, “No kidding. Personally, I am not complaining. Though, I am be taking a bath when we get home.”
Mackie agreed, “Same here. And at least the worst we had in that battle were a few bruises.”
Daley replied, “Yea. That is a good thing.”
Mackie questioned, “So, sis. Linna and Kate have a good point. Why are we still in our hardsuits?”
Sylia stated, over their private channel, in japanese, “I don't fully trust the people... Besides, we are still on a mission.”
Kate conceded, “Good point.”
Leon inquired, “I take it that is why you immediately dragged us all from the battlefield, to here?”
Sylia answered, “Yes.”
Nene asked, “So, are we going to bug this place?”
Sylia said, “No. We already know all we can from them. And they clearly could care less about keeping secrets. And being caught planting bugs here would only cause problems for us.”
Daley agreed, “Yes. We are fine for the moment. So, let us not rock the boat.”
Sylia replied, “Exactly.”
Meanwhile, Rock was finishing her summation, in english, “While Lee was able to use the two sieges against each other to escape. We still know where, when, and what reality, he is at. We just need to figure out a safety way to approach that area. Which will not be a problem, with those here.”
Rock turned to the Knight Saber, group. She inquired, in english, “So, Ms. Stingray, do you have anything to add to what I was discussing?”
Sylia had been paying attention to Rock, as she had talked to her subordinates. She thought, 'I am glad I was paying attention to the outside conversation.' She stated, through her suit's speakers, in english, “Yes. I do, Ms. Okajima.”
Rock thought, 'Sylia is one of the few people to call me, Ms. Okajima. Also, it is not surprise she knows my real name. And it is nice to talk with someone who understands how to be formal, and well mannered.'
'Though, she, and her friends, did come... Overdressed for this meeting. Not that I am going to fault them for doing so. They still don't fully trust us. And I don't fully trust them. But, this discussion is a good start to our building trust between each other. And I have dealt with rockier situations than this, and come out on top.'
Sylia continued, “While knowing all this is good. The primary matter is catching Lee. With finding Garibaldi being a secondary matter. Given he is Lee's accomplice. Though, I do not hold Garibaldi's actions against him. And I think we all agree that if we all continue going after these two men, in such a large group, that it would become counterproductive. As such, we need only sent a smaller group after him.”
Janet turned to Sylia, as she inquired, with a hint of sarcasm in her tone of voice, “Are you nominating yourself, and your team?” She thought, 'I would not be surprised if she tried to do so. But, if that is the case. She is not going to get away with it.'
Sylia turned to Janet, as she tactfully replied, “As flattered as I would be for my team to go after Lee. I believe we may need to pair the group down to only a handful of people. Two or three, at the most.”
Janet thought, 'Touche.'
Sylia went onto say, “We need people who are expert trackers, can travel light, that can throw Lee off his game, and won't kill him on sight.”
Benny turned to Sylia, as she commented, “Well, I can say that the maids would fit three out of those four of those qualifications. The problem is, they would likely kill Lee, in a very painful manner, as to capture him.” She then turned to the Roberta, and Fabiola, whom were standing together, as they paid attention to the conversation.
Roberta calmly said, “Perhaps not. I am starting to agree that we all have a right to vengeance against Lee. And I will concede that it would be rude to deprived you of your vengeance, just so I can have my own personal vengeance against Lee.” She thought, 'At the very least, the Knight Sabers deserve as much a chance at revenge, as our master, Garcia.'
There were a few light giggles from Roberta's comments, for a few seconds.
Roberta continued, “As such, there is enough of Lee's ass to go around. So, if you want us to go after him, we promise not to immediately kill him, and instead we will being him back here. So, we can all decide how to deal with him.”
Rock turned to Fabiola, as she inquired, “And what is your opinion in this matter?”
Fabiola looked at Rock, as she answered, in a calm, though slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Like Roberta. I realize that we deserve a shot at that bastard. And if you agree not to cut us out on our revenge, we will deliver him in mostly one piece.”
Revy turned to Fabiola, as she questioned, “Define mostly?”
Roberta turned to Fabiola, as she answered for her student, “Lee will be conscious, when we bring him here. Though, by then, he might be missing a limb, or two.”
Revy looked at Roberta, as she said, “As long as it is not his head, I could care less. And if Lee is missing such body parts, the vat process will regrow, and repair such injuries.”
Roberta pointed out, “Plus, it would make Lee not only a woman, but more durable to the punishment we will in inflict on her.”
Revy commented, “Exactly. I see you are understanding my thoughts on this manner.”
Revy and Roberta then shared wicked grins with each other. Though, most of those that saw the two women grin at each other, were slightly unnerved by the sight.
Benny thought, 'Whenever those two agree, it tends to be an unnerving situation for everyone else, that is present.'
Rock thought, 'This is probably the best promise I am going to get from the maids. Still..' She stated, “Try to bring Lee back in one piece. And don't harm Garibaldi, unless you have too. And if they do surrender to you. Don't harm them. We can punish Lee, when he gets here.”
Roberta replied, “Fine. I will do my best not to harm Garibaldi. And if Lee surrenders, without a fight. I will not harm him, until after we have bought him back here, for all of us to decide his punish.” She turned to look at Fabiola.
Fabiola turned to Roberta, and she understood Roberta's unspoken question. Fabiola stated, “I can live with that.”
Both maids turned back to look at Rock.
Rock replied, “Good.” She thought, 'That is much. better.'
Dutch asked, “So, who will take the two of them to that dangerous location?” She thought, 'When I went there, to buy those instant man packets. I stayed far away from the pools. I would go near those pools even in a hazmat suit.'
Ranma looked over at the maids, as she said, “I will take with them. We will use my reality device to teleport them both to entrance of Jusenkyo, a few hours after Lee and Garibaldi arrive. But, I am will then leave. Not just because I don't want to alter my past. Creating a paradox. But, I am not going anywhere near those springs.” She turned to the maids, as she suggested, “And you should avoid them, as well.”
Nearby, Spike was quietly listening to the conversation, as she thought, 'I am so happy that Chang already told us about Jusenkyo, when he offered those instant man packets to Jet, Faye, and I. And those are packages offer such fun for us three. Though, we do try to keep are friendship platonic. We all agreed we work too well together to risk wrecking that by screwing each other.'
'Still, even Mal, and his crew, know about that place. And I am sure we all would agree that is too dangerously a place for us to go. I may want Lee's hide for what he did to me, but I am not following him there.'
Roberta and Fabiola turned to Ranma. Roberta stated, “We will. We already know how dangerous they are, from learning about your life. If Lee is still in the middle of those springs. We will wait for him, and Garibaldi, outside of the area. And if he and the older man has left. We will follow them. Worst case scenario, we know he will eventually use his reality device. And we will just track him to the next reality he plans to go to.”
Ranma calmly warned, with a touch of seriousness in her tone of voice, “That is all well and good. But, I highly suggest you be careful while there. Do not pick a fight with anyone there.”
Fabiola casually responded, “Yes. We know about the Chinese Amazon, kiss of marriage and kiss of death rules. We saw and read both versions of your series, Ranma. When we first met, I did not realize you had lead that crazy a life. Even before Lee got his hands on you.”
Ranma shrugged, as she said, “Yea. I have lead an interesting life.” She mentally added, 'That gets more interesting by the day. Still, I would like to know. Given she did not know about me, when we met, during our chase front Chang, and those of her Tower.' She asked, “So, when did you see my series?”
Roberta commented, “Soon after we returned home, from Chang's Tower, Garcia brought us copies your anime and manga series. He did so to help explain his curse to us. And that is where we learned those amazon rules from. Among other things.” She mentally asked herself, “Though, I wonder where, and how, the master learned about Ranma's series?'
Ranma thought, 'Interesting... Still, it is good. I wish I had known those laws beforehand I first went there. It would have saved me a lot of trouble. Still, that is not enough. My series is fairly long. And I need to make sure they know of the other dangers, as well.'
Ranma stated, “The amazons are not just the dangerous people there. There are some very powerful people there, than can hurt even you, if you start trouble there.”
Roberta looked at Ranma, as she said, “Don't worry. When we learned of your series. We learned of all of it. Including, the Musk, the bird people, along with various other people in the area. We know what we are walking into. And we will be sure to be on our best behavior, while there.”
Fabiola just nodded once, as she agreed, “Yes. We will.”
Ranma replied, “Okay.”
Rock stated, “Fine. You three can go after Lee and Garibaldi. While we wait for you to bring them back. Though, try to be only gone a few hours for us.” She thought, 'Considering the Bloodhound is legendary in always tracking down her prey. Even Lee. I have no problem with them going after him. As long as they keep their agreement not to kill Lee. And I just hope Lee and Garibaldi have enough sense to surrender to them, and avoid being hurt.'
Fabiola said, “We will keep that in mind.” She then looked back at her teacher, as she inquired, “So, when do we leave?”
Roberta looked Ranma, and then at Fabiola, as she questioned, “Does leaving in a hour, or two, sound good for you?”
Fabiola answered, “Yes.”
Ranma said, “Yes. I good with that.”
Revy said, “Then, that is settled.” Everyone looked over at Revy, as she continued, “Now, we can deal with other matters.” She then turned to Priss, as she went onto say, “Such as kicking your ass.”
Priss noticed Revy was talking to her. Priss turned her helmet towards Revy, as she held up the right gauntlet of her blue hardsuit, in a fist. She challenged, in english, “Bring it on.”
Nearby, Linna thought, with mild annoyance, 'Leave to Priss to ruin a wonderful meeting. Still, this Revy seems to be just as bad at lack of having manners,'
Dutch looked between the two women, as she quickly stated, in a flat, calm tone of voice, “Ladies. Heel.”
Everyone looked at Dutch, including Revy and Priss. With Revy scowling at Dutch.
Dutch mentally noted, 'Oh hell. Revy is giving me a dangerous look. And I bet, under her helmet, Priss is doing the same. I need to make this quick, before someone gets hurt here, and our home is wrecked.'
Dutch calmly pointed out, in a strong, though even tone of voice, “If you kill each other, you will not be able to have your revenge on, Lee. Besides, there are far more civilized way to handle this. Such, as just a simple sparing match, without weapons, on the mats nearby.”
Dutch then used her left hand to point to some blue mats that were put together, in another clear area of the gym. The blues mats were large, three feet by three feet square. Each mat was an inch thick of cushioned padding. And the mats were laid in grid pattern of thirty feet by thirty feet. There was also another set of mats a little further away from the group. With the closed set of mats being around fifty feet away, across the room.
Everyone turned to look at the mats, including Revy and Priss, while Dutch dropped her left hand to her side.
Dutch thought, 'Good. They seem to like the idea.'
Nearby, Balalaika was standing by B, as they looked at the mats.
Balalaika then turned back to look at Dutch, as she thought, 'That is what I have always liked about Dutch. He, and now she, knows how to handle crazy people, whom are prone to violence. And if Priss is as good as I suspect she is, this should be as good as fight, as the four hour fight that Revy had with Roberta. Though, I hope this fight does not last that long.'
Meanwhile, Rock was watching the whole situation, as she thought, 'Dutch has the right idea. Experience had taught us that there is no point in trying to convince those two not to fight. So, we can at least minimize the danger. And a simple sparring match will not get either of them seriously harmed. Though, I will make sure there are some rules before they fight. Still, we got to convince them this is a good idea... Because, it is either that, or we hold back Revy, while the Knight Saber drag Priss away.'
Rock commented, “Dutch is right.” Everyone turned back to look at Rock, as Rock continued, “If you want to fight. Let's keep it civil. Take it to the mats.”
Rock saw Revy's facial expression relax.
Rock thought, 'Good. She is listening to reason. I hope Priss is doing the same.'
Revy shrugged. She casually said, “Works for me.”
Priss replied, “Same here.” She looked over at Revy, as she stated, “Besides, I have been looking forwards to this, long before you have. I am so going to kick you ass for wrecking our city, kidnapping us, and having us impregnated.”
Revy looked at Priss, as she thought, 'I may want this fight. But, she is taking this way too personally.' She defended herself, “We were brainwashed. Besides. When you get down to it. That is all Lee's fault.”
Priss begrudgingly thought, 'She's right. Though...' She stated, “Well, I still want to kick your ass for you part in this mess.'
Revy said, “If that is the way you feel.” She cracked a grin, as she continued, “It's your funeral.”
Rock flatly stated, “Hold it. In this coming sparring match. There will no killing. Nor crippling of each other. Such as no headlocks.”
Revy and Priss then looked back at Rock.
Revy inquired, in a curious tone of voice, “And if we don't?”
Rock looked Revy in her eyes, as she said, in a straightforward manner, “We will hold you down, and tie you up.” She then looked over towards Sylia, and the rest of the Knight Sabers, as she continued, “And Ms Stingray will drag you away from here, Ms. Asagiri, to avoid violence between our groups.”
Sylia warned, in a calm, though warm tone of voice, over their private channel, in japanese, “As much as I sympathize with your feelings, Priss. Rock is correct. We will drag you out of here. The mission is more important than personal vendettas. Even against Lee, Revy, or anyone else.
Everyone saw Priss silently lower her helmet down, in a sign of defeat.
Rock thought, 'Good. What ever Sylia said in on their private communications systems. It is clear that Sylia agrees with me.'
Revy said, “Okay. I will go with you, on this Rock.” She turned to Priss, as she thought, 'Because I really want to see which one of us is better.”
Priss conceded, in an even, though unhappy tone of voice, “Fine. I can live with those rules.”
Akira looked over at Rock, as she asked, “So, are we going to bet on this?”
Rock turned to Akira, as she answered, “No. Because we all use different currencies. And let us not risk any further harder feelings between us.” She mentally added, 'Besides, if there are bets on this, the pride from Revy and Priss will make them drag this battle out. And I don't want to see Revy in another brutal fight, like that four hour match she had with Roberta, that one time. Which ended in a draw. And nobody one their bets.'
Rock saw from the group, some of the people shrug in indifference to her comment.
Akira replied, “Okay.”
Nearby, Balalaika thought, 'I am not going to fault Rock's reasons. She is right. And I realize she is trying to smooth things over with the Knight Sabers. That is a wise decision on her part.'
Revy said, “Let us get this started.” She then started walking towards the mats, about fifty feet way from them, with Priss walking right behind her.
The rest of the group followed behind them.
As they walked Leon said, through her speakers, in english, “This should be good.”
Nearby, Dutch overheard Leon, as she said, “I agree.”
Revy and Priss soon came to a stop in front of the blue mats, with the rest of the group walking around the mats, to get better views of the coming match.
As Revy and Priss stood in front of the mats, Priss removed her helmet, allowing her long brown hair to fall out of her helmet. She then turned to Nene, whom was right beside her, and she handed Nene her helmet.
Nene quietly took Priss' helmet.
Priss then opened up her hardsuit, which evenly split open from the upper chest, back, and shoulders, all the way down to the waist.
Next, Priss climbed out of her blue hardsuit,, with the hardsuit joints locked, in a standing position.
As Priss completely got out of her hardsuit, and stood on the floor, everyone saw she was only dress in her full body pink, softsuit. Which only exposed the head and hands.
Priss then turned to Nene. She picked up her helmet, and set it on her hardsuit.
Finally, Priss turned to face Revy, as she waited for her opponent to get ready for their fight, as well.
Meanwhile, Revy took off her shoulder holsters, with her pistols in them. She set her holstered weapons gently on the floor, besides the mats. She then took off her black fingerless gloves, and set them by the holsters. She thought, 'I don't want to be accused of having my gloves be weapons.'
She then leaned up, as she looked over at Priss. She then noticed the blue haidsuit. She mentally reflected, 'That is a nice hardsuit. And the blue color works for her.'
Revy commented, “I have to admit. Hardsuits are very stylish. But, the only thing I never understood was why the softsuits were pink? I would have preferred red, or black.”
Nearby, Sylia said, in a matter of fact, tone of voice, “Next to white, pink is one of my favorite colors.”
Mackie commented, through her speakers, in english, “At one point, she ran a lingerie shop, as a cover. That says it all.”
There was some laughter among those present, which lasted for a few seconds.
Revy thought, 'Well, that answered my question.'
As everyone calmed down, Sylia said, with her hardsuit's speakers, in english, for the benefit of everyone there, “I will conceded that point to you, Mackie.”
Priss looked at Sylia, then at Revy, as she agreed, “I am with you on that one. Also, you have nice hair.”
Revy responded, “Thank you. You have nice hair, as well.”
Priss ran her right hand ran hand down her hair, as she inquired, “I appreciate that. And I only shampoo, and occasionally use conditioner. How about you?”
Revy answered, “About the same.”
Priss questioned, “I have been thinking about putting my hair into a ponytail, like yours. What are your thoughts?”
Revy commented, “I think it would work for you. But, you are not going to steal my hair style.”
Priss said, “I won't dream of it.” Her lips then curled into a wicked grin, as she stated, “Now, I am going to kick your ass.”
Revy smirked, as she responded, “We'll see.”
Both women then walked onto the blue mats, until they were on opposite corners from each other. With everyone else standing around the mats, and staying at least three feet from the mats. So, they did not risk being hurt by the two women.
As Rock watched both women get into position, she asked, “Are you both ready?”
Revy and Priss continued to looked at each other, as both of them said, in unison, “Ready.”
Rock stated, “Then, begin.”
Revy and Priss then charged at each other, with their friends cheering them on.
As Revy and Priss started fighting, in a bare knuckled brawl, Dutch briskly walked around to Rock. She the gently tapped Rock on her right shoulder.
Rock looked over at Dutch, and she saw the taller, brown haired woman, motion with her shoulders, and head, to follow her.
Rock and Dutch then calmly walked through the crowd, and away from the fight.
But, their actions did not go unnoticed, by someone else in the crowd.
When Rock and Dutch got within twenty feet from the crowd, they came to a stop, Dutch was a few feet from Rock, as both of them looked at each other.
Both their enhanced hearing allowed them to clearly hear such soft spoken words.
Dutch whispered, “You know, we need to to settle things with these women, as soon as possible. Or, this situation could become more explosive, very quickly.”
Rock softly inquired, “I fully agree you, Dutch. Do you have any ideas?”
Dutch quietly said, “From what I saw of Benny and Janet's video collection. They are mercenaries. We might be able to buy them off. At the very least, doing so will help the situation between us.”
Rock softly replied, “That is not a bad idea. But, it will likely cost us.”
Dutch quietly inquired, “I can live it costing us a little. As long as we are fine afterward. So, do you want to take point? Or, do you want me to?”
Rock whispered, “I think I might do a better job. But, you can assist.”
Dutch softly complimented, “I am fine with that.”
As the two women turned around, towards the group, they saw Sylia, in her white hardsuit, and helmet on, standing between them and the crowd around the fight.
Sylia was facing them, with her visor up. This allowed Rock and Dutch to see her brown eyes, and the front tuft of her blue hair, under the faceplate of her helmet.
Dutch and Rock also noted that Sylia's eyes had a cold, though not icy, strength to them.
Sylia calmly requested, “Make your offer.”
Rock thought, 'How did she figure we were talking about her?... Oh right. Enhanced hearing, further enhanced by electronics. I know she heard every word we just said. And she is very sharp.'
'Also, I know I am not going to get the drop on her. She is a genius and a shrewd business woman. And as a mercenary leader, electronics engineer, and legit business woman. I know I am not going to be able to lie to her... She will catch any lie I say to her... And I am not going be able to trick her. So, I might as well be straightforward, and honest with her.'
Rock said, in a normal tone of voice, “For the trouble we have caused you, in our part of this mess. We offer you five, four hundred troy ounce, good delivery, gold bars for each of the eight of you. Forty bars in all.”
Sylia flatly stated, “Sixteen. Not eight. Do not forget our daughters. Also, we could use some reimbursement for our destroyed motoslaves, and repairs to our hardsuits.”
Rock thought, 'She has a point there. And I was stupid to forget her children.' She responded, “I apologize for overlooking your children. And you are right about the motoslaves, and repairs. How about five gold bars for each of your sixteen family members? Plus, another four for repairs and replacements. Eighty-four bars in all. If that is alright with, Dutch, here?”
Sylia said, “That will be a good start. And apology accepted, for the oversight.”
Rock thought, 'Translation. She is forgives me oversight, but not what Revy and the others did to her, and her friends. And she will still want more. But, it will likely be reasonable. Though, before we do anything else on this matter, I need to run this part by Dutch.' She turned to Dutch, as she inquired, “Is this fine with you?”
Dutch looked at Rock. She then turned to Sylia, as she said, in a normal tone of voice, “I can live with that.” She mentally added, 'That is only a minor dent in our wealth in gold and other treasures. Also, I could probably talk to Lotton, to help convince Shenhua and Sawyer to pitch in. Though, I am not going to approach Roberta on this matter. And if it gets these powersuited, mercenary women off our backs on this. It would be well worth the price in gold.”
Rock offered, “Okay. You said that was a start. I will sweeten the deal. I know a few of your members use to be men, like us. We use instant spring of drowned packets to temporally change back to men, with cold water. Hot water reverses it. We are willing to give you a hundred of the packets. And put you in contact for our supplier. If you want more. So, you and your friends can play both ends of the field, if you want.”
Sylia grinned wickedly, as she questioned, “What makes you think we don't already use those packets. And I must say, those are fun to use. Though, one still had to use a condom. So, as to not get pregnant, or make someone pregnant. Among other things.”
Dutch cracked a grin, as she said, “Great minds think alike.”
Sylia happily replied, “Exactly.”
Meanwhile, Rock thought, 'That figures.' She inquired, “Okay. So, what else do you want from us?”
Sylia dropped her smile, as she flatly stated, “We want a measure of revenge on Lee. When he is eventually found. Though, we will make the concessions that we will not leave him killed, nor crippled, when we are finished with him. So, others may have their revenge on him, as well.”
Rock thought, 'Of course. She does not want her members to accidentally kill, or cripple Lee, and risk those seeking revenge on him, to come after her, and her friends, and their families. Still, there is room to negotiation.' Rock said, “Done. On the condition you agree to the same type of revenge that we do to Lee.”
Sylia responded, “Given your imaginations, that will be fine. Also, we heard that Chang opened a casino. Among other things, as compensation for Chang's part. We would all like spend up to a month, free there, once a year, in some quality suites. Along with this, we wish for a measure of monetary compensation from him, as well. Since, next to Lee, he was the mastermind of all this.”
Rock stated, “You will have to take that up with Chang. But, I will come with you, to help you with your meeting with him.”
Sylia replied, “Thank you.” She mentally reflected, 'Rock and Dutch are clearly trying to smooth things over with us. And that is good. It gives me an excuse to convince the others to put the past behind them. We may be on a mission, but that does not mean we cannot do multiple things at once. Besides, I do not want this to cause problems between us, Natsuru, and her family.'
'On that thought. When I go with Rock, to see Chang. I will take Kate's suggestion, and come in a business dress. Chang will not try any tricks with me, due to him knowing better than to cross me, a second time. So, I have little to worry about, from him, and his friends. Also, I would be tempted to take Kate with me, to see Chang. But, everything I have learned about Chang states he prefers a more relaxed environment for a negotiations. While Kate prefers a more ridged business environment, when it comes to negotiations. And their two personalities might clash and cause problems, which I want to avoid.'
Dutch look over at crowd, as she saw the backside of Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer, whom stood together. Dutch thought, 'I might as well ask the question.' She then turned back to Sylia, as she inquired, “And what of Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer? Especially, Lotton. She was Chang's second in command.”
Sylia flatly stated, “Nothing. While Priss may feel differently. I am willing to acknowledge that the women that kidnapped us were brainwashed.” She turned to looked at Roberta, as she commented, “And we are not going to confront Roberta, concerning this matter.”
Sylia thought, 'Given how dangerous Roberta is. I do not want to confront her, and her student. Doing so, would make me enemies of them, the Garcia Lovelace, and by extension the other people here. It would be a no win situation.'
Dutch complimented, “That would be a wise course to take.”
Sylia turned back to look at Dutch and Rock, as she went onto say, “And as for Lotton... From what we understand, she has served as the assassin and cleaner's maid, for several years. That is punishment enough.”
Dutch and Rock chuckled a little at Sylia's comment, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Dutch thought, 'No arguments that. And from that I am sure I will be able to confidence them to help with our payments. Still, I wonder...' Dutch raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “So, you have seen the Black Lagoon series?”
Sylia returned Dutch's eyebrow raise, as she casually answered, “Of course. Natsuru and her friends brought it to us the day they came to visit us, after we were freed from the tower. That was even stated in those insane stories, which Lee wrote. I believe these matters were discussed at the end of Book Two.”
Rock thought, 'She has read the stories. Given how she and her friends are after Lee. I am not surprised by this.'
Dutch thought, 'So, she has read those stories. Given her intelligence, it would make sense that she would read those stories. And she would make sure her friends read those stories. Before they would confront Lee. And I do vaguely recall the scene she was a part of, at the end of Book Two.'
Dutch conceded, “Yes. It is a long story. And not easy one for us to read. Let alone think about.”
Sylia calmly said, “I fully understand.”
Dutch thought, 'Of course. You, of all people, would understand. Though, I need to know if you, or any of the others are after as much revenge, as Priss.'
Dutch use her right hand to point over at the fight, as she asked, “So, are all of you so hot to trot on revenge, as you brown haired friend over there?” She then turned back to Sylia, as she dropped her right hand, back to her side.
Sylia turned to Priss. She then turned back to look at Dutch and Rock, as she plainly answered, “No. Priss has always been a bit of a hot head. But, motherhood has done much to temper her rage. As I am sure motherhood has had a similar effect your, Revy.”
Rock admitted, “You're right about that.” She thought, 'Dutch seems to have taken over. And she is handling Sylia, better than I have. I think I will let them talk, as I listen for any useful information that came be used to smooth this situation over, even more so.'
Sylia pointed out, “But, we all still want a measure of revenge. The eight of us agreed that we would have our pound of flesh, and then move on. And that is the way I would prefer it to be.”
Dutch politely complimented, “That is a good approach to take. I share such feelings on the matter.”
Sylia replied, “Thank you. And it is a pleasure to know that you agree with me on this.”
Dutch inquired, “Likewise... Though, what of your daughters? Do they want revenge as well?”
Sylia answered, “They could care less about Lee.”
Dutch replied, “Good.” She mentally added, 'That is one less problem for us to worry about.'
Sylia raised an eyebrow, as she asked, “And what of your family? And friends?”
Dutch thought, 'Well, fair is fair.' She honestly answered, “We have mixed feelings on the issue. But, like you, we also want to move on from our revenge, and go back to living our lives.”
Dutch mentally realized, 'This would be a good opportunity to get some information, that I am sure both Rock wants to know, as well.' She questioned, “So, how did you learn about Lee, and his stories?”
Sylia calmly said, “I apologize. But, I am not at liberty to answer that question.”
Dutch thought, 'Meaning she is working for someone that knows about us. Though, there is not much we can do about it, right now. All we can do is let the situation play out for later, and hope the mystery does not burn us, until then. Still, there is another question, I have. ' She commented, “And let me guess. Along with this, you are not at liberty to tell us how many people know about Lee, and his stories?”
Sylia answered, “No. I am not. But, I will say it is a select few.”
Dutch responded, “Alright. I will take what I can get.” She mentally added, 'Well, at least it is a few. And I have a feeling that Sylia's definition of, a few, is likely less than a ten, outside her own personal group. But, that does not mean her boss did not tell others. With her not being informed on such matters. Though, as I said. I will take what I can get.'
Sylia calmly suggested, “Now, let us go return to watching the fight.” She thought, 'I still want to see how Priss handles herself against Revy. It may have a bearing on her future training regiments.'
Rock look at Sylia, agreed, “That is a good idea.” She thought, 'I would like to see how Revy handles Priss. She always likes challenge.'
Dutch thought, 'I agree. Let's head back to the fight, before one of us accidentally says something that ruins this peaceful arrangement.'
Dutch replied, “Yes. Let's do that.”
The three women then turned, and walked back over to rejoin the crowd.
A few seconds later, as Dutch, Rock, and Sylia reached the crowd. They noticed that only a few of the people in the crowd turned their heads towards them, as they approached. And even then, those people quickly turned back to watch the fight, without commented on their presence.
(_)
From the crowd, Lotton had turned her head to see Rock, Dutch, and Sylia rejoin the crowd. As she turned her head back to the fight, to avoid any of the three of them noticed her.
Lotton thought, 'I wonder what those three were talking about?... Thought They were probably trying to smooth things over between our group and the Knights Saber. Which would be good for all of us. I will to Dutch about it, later. She always one to talk to me, about such matters, while we have a few beers. She really is a good person to drink with. Calm, pleasant, easy going. I can see why Benny and Janet like to be with her.'
Lotton turned to Sawyer and Shenhua, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I have my own lovers, as well. And we really don't want to mess up what either of us have. So, we keep things platonic Unless, all six of us agree to do something, together.'
Lotton turned her attention back to the fight, as she mentally reflect, 'On another matter. Revy and Priss are really going at it... Though, I could care less. But, the fight is making Shenhua and Sawyer happy, and that is what matters to me.'
'And even with the Bloodhound after Lee. It looks like we won't be seeing Lee, anytime soon. And I am not going to put my life on hold until we catch them. I think tonight, when the three of us are in private, it would be a good time for us to talk about moving forward with our future plans.'
(_)
Meanwhile, Rock, Dutch, and Sylia soon made their way to where they could see the fight taking place on the blue mats.
The three women then saw that Revy and Priss were each giving as good as they could take. They had been mostly punching each other. With a few kicks, knees, elbows thrown in, between the two of them.
And many of the members of the crowd continued to cheer either on Revy, or Priss.
Still, many of the people there noticed that the fight, on the mats, was reminiscent of the fistfight Revy once had with Roberta.
As Dutch watched the fight, she commented, “Damn. If this is like last time. This could last for a few hours.”
Sylia viewed the fight, as she stated, in an dry tone of voice, “I doubt it. I trained Priss not to allow a fight to drag out for too long.”
Dutch inquired, “Then, I wonder how she plans to stop this?”
Sylia lips curled into a slight grin, as she replied, with a bit of mirth in her tone of voice, “Just watch.”
(_)
Nearby, the maids were standing together, as they watched the fight. Roberta whispered into Fabiola's right ear, in spanish, “I will be honest. This is more fun to watch than to participate in.”
Fabiola softly replied, in spanish, “I agree.” She thought, 'Good. This means that Roberta is finally calming down from the previous night's events. And going back to the way she usually is. When she is not the warpath. And while I enjoy our time together, on this hunt. She can be hard to talk to, when she is like that.'
(_)
At that moment, on the mats, Priss and Revy backed away from each other, as both women wanted to get a good look, to size the other up, for a few seconds.
Each noticed the other was not breathing heavily. Also, except for a few mild bruises, they both were uninjured. With most of the mild bruises being to their faces.
Revy thought, 'At this rate. We will be fighting each other until dawn tomorrow.'
Priss thought, 'Damn. We are both too tough to take out in a single blow. And she is giving as good as she is getting. And with the super-soldier serum, we will likely be in this fight for a while.' While continuing to look directly at Revy, from the corner of her right eye, she saw the two maids. She continued her thoughts, 'And from I recall, of the Black Lagoon series. That was before this bitch got the super-soldier serum, she fought the Bloodhound over there, to a standstill, for around four hours straight.'
Priss then turned his fulled attention back towards Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'I do not even want to think about the type of endurance this redheaded demoness now has. We both may be able to take it, but I really do not want to go through an endurance fight with her.'
'I may want revenge on her, and some of the others. But, I don't want to become a punching bag to do it. And I doubt she wants to take a pounding over her pistol, that I damaged...'
'Besides, Sylia will not allow me to have a fight like this drag on for much longer. Also, it will win me points with Sylia, if I offer her to surrender. Though, I doubt Revy will take my offer. As much as I am loath to admit it, this bitch is too much like me to just roll over and quit... Still, it is worth a try...'
Priss looked at Revy. She smirked, as she asked, “Had enough, yet?”
Revy met Priss' gaze, as she returned the brown haired woman's smirk, while she stated, “I haven't even broken a sweat, yet. Don't tell me you're a lightweight at this?”
Priss held onto her grin, as she responded, “Not at all. I just wanted to spare you a lot of embarrassment.”
Revy kept her smile, as she spat out, “Yea. Right. Let's get this on.”
The two women then charge back at each other.
As they continued to trade blows, Priss thought, with annoyance, 'Looks like I will have to end this the hard way.'
When Revy threw her next punch with her right hand, as her right arm extended, Priss sidestepped to Revy's right. As Priss did so, she gripped Revy's right forearm, with both hands, as she quickly step around Revy, while forcing Revy's to twist her arm, to where it was behind her back, in a lock.
When Priss was completely behind Revy, she continued to grip Revy's right forearm, with her own right hand. While doing so, Priss then quickly, and firmly gripped the top of Revy's left shoulder, as she pressed Revy in a downward motion by her left shoulder.
Between the pain of her right arm being put in a armlock, and the force on her left shoulder, Revy was force down into a kneeling position, with her left knee and right foot, on the mat.
Priss the pressed her advantage, as she forced Revy to lean forced in that position.
While in pain, due to the position her body was in, Revy thought, 'Not, again. This is like that time I fought Bob. And there is no way out of this hold that will not mess up my right arm.'
Priss leaned forward, on top of Revy, as maintained her body lock over Revy. She demanded, “Give up. I have had a broken arm before. It is not worth it.”
Priss then twisted Revy's right forearm arm very slightly, to increase the pain slightly, as a way to physically punctuate what she said.
Revy grunted in pain, as she mentally berated herself, 'She is right. My ego is not worth a broken arm...'
Priss then felt Revy relax her right arm, as Revy said, “I yield.”
Priss let of Revy, as she leaned up, and took a few steps away from her. Priss replied, “Good.”
Revy quickly brought her right arm around to her chest, as she used her left hand to rub her right arm. She thought, with relief, 'I will kick her ass, later. Right now, I am happy to not have a broken arm.'
Revy then stood up, and turned around to face Priss.
As both women stood, looking at each other, everyone could see that both women had minor facial bruises from their fight.
At that moment, Rock was on the side of the mat, with Revy to her right, and Priss to her left. She thought, 'Now, to make sure this is over.'
Rock then walked up to the mats, as she turned to the crowd around her, as she stated, “Okay. The fight is over.” She then turned back to Revy and Priss, as she inquired, “Are we going to have any more problems from you two?”
Priss and Revy looked at Rock, with mild indifference in this expressions.
Priss said, “I will not cause any problems.”
Revy answered, “I can live with the situation, for now.”
Benny looked at Revy and Priss, as she thought, 'That went better than I expected.'
While both women turned, and headed off the blue mats, towards their belongings, Revy looked over at Priss. She smirked, as she said, “Still, this isn't over.”
While they continued to walk towards the edge of the blue mats, Priss looked over at Revy. She returned Revy's smirk, as she responded “Not by along shot.”
Benny thought, 'Spoke too soon. And nothing good can come from this rivalry.'
Meanwhile, Balalaika thought, 'I guess it is a case of, be careful what I wish for. Still, they were not harmed. And there can always be a rematch. And watching those two get into it, now again, should break the monotony, at little...' She then place her right hand over her slight extended, pregnant stomach, as she continued her thoughts, 'At least until I have to deal with more personal matters.'
Nearby, Yurika was standing by her two sisters, as she asked, “So, what now?”
Nodoka looked over at Yurika, as she suggested, “Well, if anyone is hungry, we can have some lunch.”
Nearby, Nene turned the three sisters, as she said, with her hardsuit's speakers, in english, “I was waiting for someone to mention lunch.”
By Nene, Linna thought, 'Nene and her stomach. Some things never change.'
Mikoto turned to her two sisters, as she said, “That is one.” She looked out, around the crowd, as she casually answered, “Anyone else hungry?”
Linna thought, 'To be honest. I could use something to eat, as well. And I don't care what Sylia says. We are going to eat with them. They won't try something this way. It is clearly not their style.' She took off her helmet, as she turn to face the sisters. She said, in english, “I could use a bite to eat.”
Sawyer agreed, “Same here.” She then turned to Rock and Dutch, as she said, “As long as it is okay with our hosts?”
(_)
Nearby, Mackie turned to Sylia, as she asked, in their hardsuits internal communications system, 'Can we, sis?”
Leon commented, in communications system, “I don't think it is going to hurt us to have lunch with them.”
Daley commented, with their hardsuits internal radios, “I think this could be a good experience for everyone.”
Kate stated, with their hardsuit radios, “Daley makes a good point. And I am with them on this.”
In japanese, “Fine. And you can take off you helmet. But, leave you hardsuits on.” She thought, 'Besides. I was wondering what we were going to do for lunch, as well.'
(_)
Meanwhile, Dutch and Rock notice the rest of her family, and the others in crowd looking at them.
Dutch cracked a grin, as she stated, “Hey. I learned a long time ago. That if done properly, food can solve a lot of problems.” She mentally added, 'And it will at least smooth over the situation a little bit more.'
Dutch went onto say, “So, let's get some lunch. Fortunately, we have everyone.” She then saw a number of people smiled at her, as she thought, 'After we haven enough food to feed everyone here, for a month. And I am happy that everyone else is happy, at the moment. And those Lagoon parties are good experience in dealing with feeding a large group of people. And considering most of the people here, barring the Knight Sabers, and have been to those parties, this should not be a problem.'
Yurika turn to Dutch, as she gave the older woman a warm smile, which she saw Dutch notice. She said, “There we have it. Our host says it is okay for us to have some lunch here.”
Nearby, Roberta whispered Fabiola's right ear, in spanish, “We will restart our hunt for Lee, after lunch.”
Fabiola turn to her teacher, as she softly replied, in spanish, “Thanks. I am kind of hungry.” She mentally added, 'Besides. Experience has taught me that Ranma does not travel well when she has an empty stomach.'
Right before Revy and Priss exited the mat, where their shoulder holster, black gloves, hardsuit and helmet, were located, both women turned to those talking about lunch.
At that moment, Revy and Priss reached the end of the mat, as they stood and looked down at their belongings. Though, both of them had been paying attention to the conversation, over lunch.
Revy turned to the group, as she said, “Yea. Let's get some lunch.” She thought, 'We should have enough food and drink in the pantry for everyone.'
Priss looked at the group, as she agreed, “Works for me.”
Revy turned to Priss, as she thought, 'I wonder.' She asked, “Care for a drinking contest?”
Priss turned to Revy. She shrugged, as she commented, “Honestly. I prefer not to get drunk. So no. If you want a rematch. It is not going to be at a bar table.” She thought, 'At least our drinking habits are different. And I would guess so are our sexual tastes.'
Revy returned Priss' shrug, as she replied “It was worth a shot.”
Nearby, Eda heard that exchange, as she thought, 'I am so happy that Priss did not take up on Revy's challenge. Revy was literally asking for trouble.. I am also happy that Yolanda and I wonder researched a number of the very series that are connected to our situation. So, we know who is who... Still, after lunch, I better head back the Plata Podrido, to let Yolanda know what is going on... I think she will be happy that Lee has so far, escape capture by us.'
Meanwhile, Sarah look at sisters, as she inquired, “Do we have enough food for everyone?”
Dutch over heard Sara, as she turned to the tanned skinner, blond woman. Dutch answered, “We should have enough for everyone.”
Kristina held out her reality device, as she said, “That doesn't matter. We can always go for take out, anywhere in the multiverse, we want.”
Everyone who heard Kristina's comment, chuckled at what she said.
As Dutch chuckled a little, she happily thought, 'That's my girl.'
By then, everyone nearby had calmed down. Dutch said, “Come on everyone. The kitchen and dining rooms are this way.”
Dutch then let the others towards the dining room, or kitchen, as Revy collected her holsters, pistols, and gloves. While Priss got back into her blue hardsuit.
Though, Priss did not put on her hardsuit. Fortunately, she could still activate it to where she would move and walk unhindered. She then carried her helmet, as she followed the others to another part of the mansion, to get such lunch.
(_)
Later that day, Dutch was able to talk to Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer, privately. And the three lovers agreed with Dutch to help the Lagoon family, in their compensation, With the three lovers paying forty bars of gold, half of the amount of gold, at the agreed upon weight and quality. Considering it helped them get out of trouble with the Knight Sabers, as well.
Though, this was only a drop in the bucket for Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton's wealth, as well.
And later that night, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua, privately discussed even more important matters, concerning their future. And they all decided to move forward with their plans.
(_)
Reality, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru's home reality. Place, Jusenkyo, China. Date, the late twentieth century. Time, the middle of the morning. An hour after Lee and Garibaldi had first arrived in that reality.
For the last hour, the two men had carefully navigated the springs, while Lee continued his story, as he took front in leading Garibaldi out of the springs.
Fortunately, both men displayed their genre savvy to their fullest, as they were very careful, and neither had any trips, nor close calls that would have sent them into a curse spring.
And both men had noticed the fog had mostly clearing, to become a sunny day. With the temperature slowly warming up a bit, into a warm day, with a light breeze coming off from the mountains, and into the valley they were in.
And through all this, Lee had yet to finish his telling Garibaldi, the hows and whys, they both ended up in Jusenkyo, from when Lee began writing his stories, to their present circumstances. Though, to be fair, it was a very long story. Or, several stories. Depending on how one looked at the situation. Or, situations.
Meanwhile, Garibaldi silently paid attention, as Lee was given him the unvarnished truth of Lee's past, while he paid attention to he stepped, while he followed Lee.
And while Garibaldi had problems with handling some of what Lee stated. He stayed quiet.
The reason Garibaldi stayed quiet, was that he figured it was best to let Lee talk. And he could respond, after they were out of immediate danger.
At the moment, the two uncursed men finally reached the edge of the cursed springs, and safely walked out onto fully dry land.
As they exited the spring, they continued walking about twenty feet, forward, further onto dry land, when Lee came to a stop.
Garibaldi stopped six feet from Lee.
Lee turned to face Garibaldi. And he saw the springs behind Garibaldi. He thought, 'This should be far enough from the springs for us to safely stop, and for me to figure out the next part of my plan. But, first I need to finish my story. Lee then finished his story, “And so we jumped to this reality, navigated the cursed spring, and here we are.”
Garibaldi looked at Lee, as he said, in a slightly disbelieving tone of voice, “So, let me get this straight. You wrote a story that effected, and harmed, a number of people across the multiverse, include myself, and my friends? And now some of them found about you, and your stories, and they came after you? And the only reason they did not capture you in the first place was that they did not know your identity? Nor, what you look like? And you were able steal one of their reality devices, out from under them, and skip town a few minutes after they realized who you were? And mere seconds after they confronted you? With you then leading them on a chase from Babylon Five, to Mars Dome One, to my factory, to the police station, to my headquarters, and finally here?”
Lee shrugged, as he casually responded, “That pretty much sums it up.”
Garibaldi ranted, with more annoyance, than anger, in his tone of voice, “Well, I have heard of stupid mistakes, before. But, this takes the cake. How dare you play god with multiverse? And the people living in it?”
Lee took offense, as he thought, 'Well, Garibaldi took the news better than I expect he would. Still, I find his tone of voice annoying. Given, everything I have done to help him.'
Lee sternly stated, “Hey. I honestly thought that I was just playing with characters that didn't really exist. At the time, I did not know I was harming people. And my mistakes have been far less malicious and intentional than some of the actions your close friends have committed?” He thought, with a mix of annoyance, and slight anger, 'If he wants to place this game. So can I.'
Garibaldi growled, “Such as who?”
Lee flatly said, “Delenn.”
Garibaldi demanded, with anger in his tone of voice, “What did she do? And this better be good.”
Lee let out an evil laugh for a few seconds.
Garibaldi's anger quickly turned to worry, due to Lee's sudden laughter. He thought, with concern, 'That type of laugh is never good. And it is also a sign of underlying mental instability. Of course, I have to admit that being crazy is kind of a sane reaction to the situation we find ourselves in.'
Lee then looked into Garibaldi's eyes, as he stated, in a calm tone of voice, that was far too serene for the situation at hand, “She never did tell any of you? Did she? I mean, she told Lennier. But, that man would rather die than reveal such a secret about her.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Whoa. This has to be one juicy secret.'
Lee continued, “Still, I have always found redemption to be meaningless unless one openly admits their mistakes. But, I see that Delenn has not told any human of her secret. That is understandable. And at least she told G'Kar, to his face about her secrets partly causing the Centauri bombing of the Narn homeworld. So, I know she has the courage to reveal this secret, as well. Though, back on track. As you know, she was on the Grey Council?”
Garibaldi thought, 'If he is comparing this secret to the bombing of Narn. Then, it is bad. Still, I have to know.' He calmly replied, “Yes.”
Lee said, “What you do not know was that Delenn was Dukhut's second. Dukhut was the teacher, Delenn was his student, and successor on the Grey Council. When he died, she became a member of the Grey Council. And her first act, as a member of the Grey Council, was to be the deciding vote to go to war with humanity, that started off the Earth-Minbari war. Along with this, she was the one who ordered the Minbari to show no mercy, and order the Minbari to kill every last human.”
There was silence between the two of them, for a few seconds, as Lee allowed Garibaldi to digest the news.
Garibaldi thought, 'Lee would not lie about something like this. It is just to bold to do so. As such, it has to be true. Which means so many bad things that I do not want to contemplate them, right now.'
Garibaldi sadly stated, “Ah no... I always figured there was some dark skeletons in her closet. But, not that dark.”
Lee thought, 'Since you changed your attitude to me, I will soften the blow a little.' He commented, “Well, to be fair. At the time she was grief stricken. And she made that decision right after Dukhut died in her lap. And she soon regretted her vote, and on ordering no mercy towards humanity. To that end, she was instrumental in stopping the war, and having the Minbari surrender at the Battle of the Line.”
Garibaldi agreed, “That does soften the blow... A bit.”
Lee said, “It gets better. After some memory regression, she learned that while Dukhut was laying on her lap, dying, he was trying to tell her that she was one of Valen's descendants. Whom we both know was really, your good friend, Jeffrey Sinclair.”
Garibaldi sarcastically said, “That is just peachy...” He cracked a grin, as he continued, “Still, after I learned what happened to Jeff, from Ivanova. To this day I get a small chuckled whenever I heard a Minbari praise Valen. And the Minbari like to praise Valen, a lot.”
Lee rolled his eyes for a second, before looking back at Garibaldi. He stated, “You probably got miles of laughter from that ironic twist of fate.”
Garibaldi grin widened slightly, as he commented, “Oh, I have. I always knew Jeff would do something great in his life. And while being Commander of Babylon Five was a nice feather in his cap. I always thought he would eventually become president of the Earth Alliance... Though, literally becoming Christ of an alien species is still up there.”
Lee responded, “I agree. Though, back to Delenn. I should state that she soon realized her mistake, and she was instrumental in stopping the war. And she has tried to make amends, since then.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Okay. That was not as bad as I thought it would be. Now, back to a few important questions that I need answered, before I decided what to do with you, Lee.'
Garibaldi inquired, “Okay. Now, I have danced around the important question. So, I need to know more about my series. What is the Babylon Five series about? Is it anything I should be embarrassed about?”
Lee thought, 'Good. He finally directly asked questions about the B Five series, itself.'
Lee answered, “Well, first of all, you have nothing to feel bad about. The Babylon Five series was a very good series. Very political. It was about the first six years of Babylon Five's history. Though, in honestly, the series mostly dealt with years two through six. And there were movies made, and books written, as well.”
Garibaldi stated, “Along with planning to read your stories, Badasses Of the Multiverse. I will have to see that series some time?”
Lee said, “You will probably get the chance to do so. Though. As I said before. Be aware that watching one's own series can depress people, and reopen emotional wounds.”
Garibaldi replied, “Thank you for the reminder.”
Lee asked, “So, when you make it back. And I am sure you will. What are you going to do about Delenn?”
Garibaldi flatly answered, “Nothing. I know there is life after death. And I have a feeling that Delenn will have to face her victims in the next life. Though, I sincerely hope that her actions since then help to balance the scales. Because I do agree that she does have much to answer for.”
Lee thought, 'Yea. During the B Five episode, Day of the Dead, Dodger returned from the dead for a night, in your quarters. Given that, I admire your position on Delenn.' Lee complimented, “That is a very mature way to handle the situation.”
Garibaldi responded, “Thank you. Still, do I have to worry about these women coming after any more of my friends?”
Lee answered, “I doubt it. They don't go after aliens, and they only want badasses. And while your friend, Stephen Franklin is courageous, he is a pacifist.”
Garibaldi said, “That is good to know, Now, onto the matter of this reality traveling. In theory, I could visit the Looney Tunes reality?”
Lee stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Yes. But, don't even think about it. Do you really want to unleash that madness on the multiverse?”
Garibaldi was quiet for a few seconds. He then stated, “No. I guess not. And those realities are too dangerous for humans to visit.”
Lee agreed, “Exactly.”
Garibaldi inquired, “So, did you hear about the planned destruction of Babylon Five?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Sad to see it go.” He thought, 'I even remember seeing it in the series, itself. But, I don't want you to know that. Given the changes that have happened, might mean that B Five might not be destroyed. Though, given those changes are your friends being kidnapped. Which is partly my fault. I do not want to talk about this, and remind you of what happened to your friends.'
Garibaldi mentioned, “You know. I tried to buy Babylon. And I almost did. I had the money for it. I had the reasons. With some minor structure changes, it could be hyperspace worthy. And it would make a great terraformation supply base, for long range missions.”
“The interior green zones of the ship could have been outfitted for agricultural needs. We could have created two different biospheres, with ease, on B Five. Red and Green sectors had enough open area to keep a hundred thousand people fed all year round. The larger Red Sector could have been staple crops. While the smaller Green Sector would converted for growing tropical fruits. We could have even allowed gazing for cattle and other livestock. And the lower levels could have been converted to factories and refineries.”
“And Blue Sector's docking sections were already in place. So, all of this could have been done with little start up capital, in comparison to the scope of the project. Actually, with them decommissioning the station. It would have made it cheaper for us, because they would have gutted everything we don't need. We would have been able to move in, and start renovating the place on our first day there.”
“I even had my company crunch the numbers. Refitting the station for hyperspace and remodeling for our needs would actually been less than the purchase itself.”
Lee complimented, “That would have been a great idea. So, what stopped you?”
Garibaldi answered, “I had most of the alien governments lined up. And even John was on board. But it seems that, barring a few exceptions, the Minbari believe that once a tool has finished its use, it should be destroyed.”
Lee replied, “That figures. And John had to keep his wife happy.”
Garibaldi said, with disappointment in his tone of voice, “Exactly.”
Lee commented, “Still, I find that so hypocritical. I mean they used Babylon Four for their great war. And after your friends stole it for the Earth Alliance.”
Garibaldi replied, “Yea. I know... Hey, what a minute. How did you know about that?... Oh right, you saw that, in the series.”
Lee said, “Yea. And it was a great two part episode.”
Garibaldi asked, “And that was when Jeff went back in time... So, you likely saw Jeff as Valen. What does Jeff looked like as a Minbari?”
Lee answered, “He wears the bone crest quite well.”
Garibaldi shrugged, as he replied, “Okay.”
Lee mentioned, “If it makes you feel better, in the supplemental, book material to the series, it is hinted, through a temporal fluke, that Ms Sakia was reunited with Mister Sinclair... Well, Valen, in the past. And they lived a good life together.”
Garibaldi gave Lee a warm smile, as he kindly responded, “Yea. That does make me feel better. And that explains that note that Marcus mentioned he found, on one adventure.”
Lee thought, 'Oh second thought. I might as well tell him.' He stated, “Yea. That is the one I am talking about. Also, at the very end of your series, which did not happen in your reality, the Babylon Five station was shown being blown up.”
“But, given the history of your reality has been changed, with a number of you missing, for that scene, in watching it get blow up, at the decommissioning ceremony, It is possible, that in your reality, at least, the Babylon Five station might not get destroyed.”
Garibaldi replied, “Let's hope so.”
Lee casually questioned, “Besides, considering your friends did steal Babylon Four, why didn't you think about stealing Babylon Five?”
Michael responded, “Well, to be honest. I did think about it. But, I could never figure out a way to make a clean getaway.”
“Sure, Babylon Five is just a speck of dust, when compared to the size of the galaxy. But, the logistics of evacuating, and moving a five mile long space station. Without anyone else noticing. Is kind of tricky. Especially, when you have the space station, in question, is parked in orbit around one of the most technological advanced spy planets in the known galaxy.”
Lee said, “Yea. Epsilon III. And Draal is a good friend of Delenn's. And he is not going to allow you to steal that station out from under him, and risk politically embarrassing Delenn.”
Garibaldi said, “My point exactly.” His voice then turned serious, as he questioned, “Now, about my friends that were kidnapped?... Were they?”
Lee looked away from Garibaldi, as he quietly said, “More than likely, yes. But, Gomez and that planet's government did help take care of them.”
Garibaldi stated, in a firm tone of voice, “The only reason I am allowing you to continue breathing, is because my friends will likely be relatively fine. But, you still have a lot to answer for.”
Lee then looked at Garibaldi in his eyes, with such intensity, that Garibaldi then realized he had a nerve.
Lee stated, with increasing loudness, with each word, “I didn't know. I didn't know! I DIDN'T KNOW!” He then went into say, in a more normal tone of voice, with sadness and regret in his tone of voice, “Unknowingly, or not. What I have done weights heavily one me, every moment of every single day. And I know that even if I escaped those after me. I can never escape what I have done, and move on with my life. My existence. Because at every turn. EVERY TURN! The multiverse likes to remind me of how horrible, how evil, how sadistic, a person I am, WITHOUT EVER REALIZING IT!”
“I am not even a human being. I realize that now. That I never was a human being. I never was a person. I am just a thing. A thing to be abused by those around me. To know only suffering and pain. Always and forever, a thing to be hurt by everyone else! For eternity. From everyone and everything. From the top, down. From gods to viruses! With no rights of redress.”
Lee went quite for a few seconds, as he then ran his hands from the front to back of his head of hair, while he looked down. While he also shook a little, back and forth with his body.
After which, Lee dropped his hands, and he went still, as he looked back up at Garibaldi's face.
Garibaldi could see from the expression on Lee's face that he was become more upset by the moment, but Garibaldi realized that Lee was not become more upset towards Garibaldi, but towards himself.
Lee said, in a voice that was beginning to break, with him being so upset that his voice was chocking up, “I have thoughts and emotions. I have feelings. Contrary to what everyone else believes. I have a sense of right and wrong. I always have. I have a soul that can be hurt. And continues to be hurt by everyone and everything around me. So, how many times must I say that, I'm sorry, for what I have done? For existing? For being born? How many times must I apologize? I just wanted to write a story to maintain my sanity. Like nearly every other tortured soul that has ever EXISTED!”
Lee give Garibaldi of look of sadness and disgust, as his eyes watered slightly, on the verge of tears. As he continued, in a shaky tone of voice, “It just so happens, that on top of the cancer God afflicted me with, that God hates me enough to have those I wronged come after me. I mean what about the people that create the really sick shit? The twisted lemons. The dark subjects of porn. I could go on, day after day, listing all the horrible things other people have created, that are far, far worse than anything I have ever wrote, imagined, or even dreamed of.”
Lee voice become more upset, as he began to shed tears, while he stated, “At least, as screwed up as my stories are, I tried to create some happy endings. Compared to the downer endings I could list. But, I am the only one called on my actions. I am the only one singled out for what I have done. And nobody else. NEVER ANYBODY ELSE! Such literal god damned hypocrisy. Always me that is judged. Always me. Never thee. Never thee! Why is that?” He brought up his hands, with his palms facing upward. He then lower his face into his hands. After which, he quietly said, “Why is that?”
Garibaldi thought, while feeling pity for Lee, 'I have completely misjudged Lee. I thought he didn't care, about anyone else. Nor, what he had done. Clearly, the case is quite the opposite. Lee can really hide his emotional state from those around. But, he still has them. And they are right under the surface.”
“And he is a real mess on the inside. He is really hurting a whole lot on the inside. This whole situation has been slowly gnawing away at him, from the inside. Internally eating away at him, since he likely first learned that what he did effected real people across the multiverse.'
'And I don't need him to go to pieces on me just yet. After hearing him confess what he had done, to me. I was planning to dump him, and steal his reality devices. But, given his cancer, and he clearly is effected by what he has done. I will dump him where he can get some help. Like one of the better places and times in a Star Trek reality. Though, for right now, I just need to get him to calm down some.'
Garibaldi carefully said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Okay. You have a point there. And my friends are likely alive. Healthy. With a few kids. And they are all strong individuals. They will recover from what happened to them. And they will likely work together, to do so. Like the others you have mentioned. And they will be fine. Also, I am sure I will see them, again. Along with any kids they have. So, I apologize for threatening you like that. It is clear that you feel guilty about what you did. And you likely would have done things differently, if you realize you were playing with real people's lives, before you began your story.”
Lee looked up from his hands, while he used his hands to wipe away his tears. And he blew his nose on the front right side of his coat, as he forced himself to calm down. Garibaldi saw Lee's expression was calmer, as Lee quietly said, “Thank you. And you are right. If I had known that the multiverse was real, before I began my stories. And that real people would be effected. I would have done things differently. I may have even tried to create paradise for everyone. Though, that would have likely been a very boring story.”
Lee then dropped his hands back to his sides.
Garibaldi thought, 'Good. He has calmed down.” He responded, “Even so. It is sometimes the thought that counts... Well... Moving forward. Since you know all this, you wouldn't happen to know what happened to John?”
By then, Lee had mostly calmed down, as he looked at Garibaldi's face, with Garibaldi look back at Lee's face. Lee stated, in a normal tone of voice, “Yes. But, it is kind of complicated. Short answer is, he is elsewhere by now.”
Garibaldi requested, “Try me.”
Lee explained, “Think of what happened to David at the end of the film, Two Thousand One, A Space Odyssey.”
Garibaldi replied, “Oh...”
Lee said, “Yea...”
Garibaldi then looked around them. First at the cursed pools, then at the mountain ranges around them. He said, “But, you know what. I am now pretty far out there, as well.”
Lee joked, “Well, I assure you. My reality device is not full of stars. But, it will get you to the stars.”
Both men laughed at Lee's joke, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Garibaldi turned to Lee. He said, “Thanks. I needed that laugh.”
Lee responded, in a reassuring tone of voice, “You're welcome. By the way, you might it interesting, the creators of reality were inspired by the russian ship in the sequel movie, two thousand ten. That is where the design for your Omega class destroyers came from.”
Garibaldi said, “Honestly, I am not surprised by that revelation. I am starting to see how the gears seem to fit. In that, I am beginning to realize which fictional series I have seen, or read, have inspired my own reality.”
Lee stated, “Yea. It can get real screwy when one starts seeing how all the pieces fit together. Just don't let that knowledge drive you crazy. It has nearly done that to me, a couple of times.'
Garibaldi flatly replied, “I won't let that happen to me.”
Lee said, “Good. And as I said before. I am sure you will make it back home, and to your family.”
There was silent for a few seconds, between the two men. Then, Garibaldi commented, “You know. This would be the place where one us would say something foolish, and jinxes our situation.”
Lee calmly replied, “I know. Instead we are just going to continued walking out of this place. Find the person I am looking for, head to the departure destination I have in mind, and then leave this reality.” He mentally reflected, 'Though, the person I am looking for, is here. The person being the Jusenkyo guide. I need to find the Jusenkyo guide here, and ask him a few questions, before I leave this place.'
Garibaldi complimented, “Good idea.” He then thought, 'I wonder who he is looking for?' He then walked a few steps closer to Lee.
Both men turn around, with their backs to the cursed spring. With Garibaldi being to Lee's left side. But, they were about to each take a step, away from the cursed pools, when they heard a splash behind them.
Both men turned and looked at each other. Then, Garibaldi dispassionately commented, “Don't you just hate when you know universe is screwing with you? And there is nothing you can do about it?”
Lee calmly agreed, “Uh huh. And it is the multiverse, now. Not the universe. You have walked into new levels of being screwed over.”
Garibaldi said, “Yes. We both know we cannot live with ourselves, if we don't find out what is happening behind us. So, let us get this over with, and see what is happening behind us.”
Lee replied, “Agreed.”
Both of them turned around and saw a human floating face down in one of the cursed pools that made up the outer ring of the cursed springs, with the person's head facing the two men. With the person being only thirty feet from them, to their left side.
Lee immediately realize who it was, and what spring that was, as he thought, 'Of all the times for this to happen, it would be now. Still, we can save that person. But, we just have to be careful. And I got to come up with a quick plan to do it. Before this person actually drowns.'
'Fortunately, the spring is on the edge of the other springs. So, we have that going for us. And I believe using the bamboo stalks to reel the person to us, to the shore, would be our best bet. It should only take us a couple of minutes, to do this. Far below the six minute barrier for brain death. And we will use our coats to dry her off, to keep the cursed water off of us, as we resuscitate this person.'
Lee then noticed the look of destination forming on Garibaldi face, as he continued his thoughts, 'Oh no. I know about that looked means.'
Lee immediately jumped in front of Garibaldi, as he looked at his friend in the face. Lee quickly grabbed Garibaldi by his upper arms, as he stated, in a strong tone of voice, “Hold it! I know what you are planning to do! Wait! Stop! And give me a couple of seconds! We can just need to think this through! We still have time to rescue this person, while staying dry, and maintaining our safety.”
But, Garibaldi ignored Lee, as he began to struggle with Lee. Garibaldi loudly responded, “Get out of my way, Lee! There is no time!”
Even though Garibaldi was several years older than Lee, he was still in great physical shape. While Lee was severely weakened by the cancer ravaging his body, with Lee being little more than a flesh covered, breathing skeleton.
Within a matter of seconds, Garibaldi was able to overpower Lee, and pushed Lee to the ground.
Though, Lee's quickly recovered and got back to his feet. But, he knew he was too late to stop Garibaldi.
Lee watched as Garibaldi rushed over, towards the spring, with the unconscious person was in.
While Lee scowled from being upset, he thought, with a bit of anger and frustration, 'Damn it! Garibaldi had to just react, without thinking. And decide to rush in, without thinking. So, he could be the hero. And if I am right about a theory I have, he is going to need help pulling that person to shore. Still, I am not taking any chances with my belongings.'
Lee immediately sat up, as he made a pile on the ground beside him, by first kicking his shoes, and socks. Taking off his coat, with his reality device in it. He took off his wrist watch. Undoing his belt and pants. Taking off his pants, and sheathed combat knife. He undid and removed his tie. Quickly unbuttoning, and removing his white dress shirt. And finally, he reached under his t-shirt, and pulled out his ring necklace, with him placing the necklace on top of his clothing.
Lee then jumped back to his feet.
Lee did all this in under ten seconds. With Lee presently only wearing his white t-shirt and underwear.
And at that moment, Lee turned, and he saw Garibaldi reach the spring, then immediately dive into the cursed water, after the person.
As soon as Garibaldi jumped into the cursed water, Lee rush over towards the magical spring in question, with the two people already in it, as he thought, 'Well, I was planning to do this anyway. So, there is no time like the present.'
(_)
Nearby, as Garibaldi dove into the spring, with him hitting the water, and becoming wet, Garibaldi noticed, from looking at the drowning person, whom was floating on their stomach, that the person in trouble had suddenly gotten a lot bigger, along with Garibaldi owe clothing becoming larger, as well.
Just after Garibaldi came back up to the water's surface, Garibaldi starting swimming over to the person. But, while Garibaldi did leg paddles, Garibaldi found the shoes and pants that Garibaldi wore slid off the body, and quickly sunk to the bottom of the spring.
Garibaldi mentally cursed, 'Damn it!... But, I will worry about that, later. My first concern is helping this person. And this person is to big for me to just turn over, and tread water backwards, with one hand keeping the person's head above water, and the other hand being used, with my legs, to paddle us to shore. I will just have to hope I can turn this person over, and drag this person to shore, before brain death sets in.'
'At least, the person's head is facing the direction of the short I came from.'
As Garibaldi got a grip on the person's body, on the person's right shoulder and upper right arm, Garibaldi heard a splash from behind. From the corner of Garibaldi's left eye, Garibaldi saw a person swimming towards them.
But, Garibaldi was so focus on the person whole was drowning, to look at the other person, while thinking, 'That must be Lee. And he is here to help.'
Garibaldi noticed that Lee soon made it to the person, as well, on the person's opposite side, with Lee grabbing the person's left shoulder and upper arm. Lee then pushed the person over, onto the person's back. Garibaldi help.
As soon as the person was floating on their back, Garibaldi grabbed the person's left upper arm and shoulder, with Lee quickly grabbing the person's right upper arm and shoulder.
A second later, both of them paddled the person back to shore.
Less than twenty seconds later, they made it to shore that faced away from the strings. They would dragged the person, head first, onto the dry ground, until the person's feet, which had socks and black boots, was about two yards from the spring they had just come from.
Garibaldi then looked own at the large much bigger person, as Garibaldi swiftly turned the person over, to the person's right, onto their back.
Garibaldi saw that the person lying on their back, was a slender, blond, girl, in her late teens, moderately sized breasts. She wore a yellow turtleneck shirt, under an open, blue denim jacket. She also had on blue jeans, a brown leather belt, and black socks, over black boots.
Garibaldi did not even bother to think much on the matter, are Garibaldi quickly started doing CPR over the girl's shirt, due to Garibaldi not having a knife to cut the shirt, with it taking to long to try to remove the shirt, or rip open the shirt.
From the corning of Garibaldi's eyes, on the other side of the teenage girl Garibaldi was helping, Garibaldi noticed the other person, who Garibaldi guessed was Lee, back off, a few feet, as Garibaldi continued to do a series of chest compressions, and then mouth to mouth, then back to chest compressions. Back and forth, to work the girl's lungs and heart back to starting on their own, while providing oxygen for the brain and other organs.
As Garibaldi did this, Garibaldi noticed the girl was not wearing a bra, but Garibaldi could care less on the matter.
Less than a minute later, the girl coughed, and starting breathing. Though, the girl was clearly out of it, though not unconscious. Garibaldi then girl rolled her to the girl's left, on her belly, so she would not risk drowning on the fluids still in her lungs.
Garibaldi thought, 'I think she was only under for maybe two minutes, at most. Likely less. And I do not see any bruises on her head, so I think she will be fine. Also, after the girl wakes up, we will find out who she is, and get her some help, before we leave this reality. And given the time travel aspects that reality travel clearly has. And those after us are not going to follow us here, any time soon, for us. There should be plenty of time to do so.'
'Unfortunately, it appears that none of us have any spare changes of clothing. Nor, anything to dry ourselves off with. And I lost my shoes and pants. So, it looks we are stuck in these wet clothes. But, at least I have my shirt, coat, underwear, and shock.. Also, it is turning into a warm and sunny day. So, Lee, this girl, and I should be fine, and not catch a cold.'
'Now, to thank Lee for helping to save this girl.'
Though, when Garibaldi looked up and at the person across the teenage girl, Garibaldi did not see Lee. Instead, Garibaldi was looking at a small, young, fair skinned girl, with black hair that went down just below her neckline, whom was wearing an oversize, white t-shirt, that went down to her knees.
As Garibaldi continued to look over the small, young girl. Garibaldi noticed that the girl appeared to be around the same height as Garibaldi was.
Garibaldi asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Who are you?”
The girl calmly said, in a young, female voice, “Keep in mind, Mister Garibaldi. I did warn you about the springs, beforehand. And I tried to stop you from diving in for the kid. If you had given me about thirty seconds, I would have completely figured a much better way to save her, that did not involve us diving in after her.”
Garibaldi replied, in a confused tone of voice, “Huh?”
The girl rolled her eyes for a few seconds. She then looked back at Garibaldi, as she casually suggested, “Look down at yourself.”
Garibaldi did so.
A few seconds later, the resulting girlish scream, with echoed off the mountain sides, in the distance, was loud enough to wake the dead.
(_)
Lee remained standing as she wiped some cursed water from the front of her brow, with the back of her right hand. While she did so, she calmly watched as Garibaldi freaked out.
Garibaldi was pacing back and fourth, away from Lee, and the teenage girl, while Garibaldi said over and over, in a hurried, young, female voice, “I'm a girl! I'm a girl! I'm a girl!”
Lee thought, with slight amusement, 'Of all the gender bending scenes have I ever created. I never wrote lines as cheesy as this...'
Lee then looked down at down the teenage girl, whom had short blond hair, that went almost to the back of her shoulders. She was average height, with a slender build.
Before they had rolled the girl onto her stomach, Lee has seen her face and chest. The blond girl was quite pretty, with respectably sizes breasts, for a teenage girl her age.
The moment Lee had seen the girl's face and hair, Lee immediately had recognized the girl.
Lee continued to look at the teenage girl, lying on her back, as she thought, 'Yep. That is Garcia Lovelace. She looks like her own sister. And she appears only a few years older, than she was in the series, which is not surprising. If my math is correct. From the timeline, she is probably around seventeen, or eighteen, years old.'
'And now that I think about it, this is the exact moment when Garcia got cursed in my stories. Which puts me in my own stories. Which is a mind screwed I really do not want to think about, right now. Because Garcia is going to formally meet me in a few minutes. And this means that Garcia knew about me, for all these years. And she clearly kept it a secret, given the maids clearly did not know I was the person they were looking for, back in Plata Podrido.'
'Then again, Garcia likely won't have the chance to see my male body. So, she would not know what my nature birth form looks like.'
'Though, now that I think about. Garcia would have to keep the secret. And I will still have to use the Lee alias, because that is what Garibaldi refers to me as. So, Garcia kept the secret...'
'Ah hell... I will worry about this, later. I have enough problems, as is.'
'Still, at least her hair is not very long, and in curls, like it was in Black Lagoon Boys and Girls omake.'
'Now, to check something else out, about myself. Or, should I say, new self?...' She smiled, as she happily continued her thoughts, 'I like that term. New self. It just rolls of the tongue. Though, I be check myself, while there are not other immediate problems. Just to make sure my theories were correct.'
Next, Lee held out her arms and hands. As she looked at them, she saw they had a normal flesh tone, and they were sickly, nor boney, like the cancer had made her male body, including her arms and hands. They were also smooth, hairless, young, small harms and arms.
Lee mentally reflected, in a happy state of mind, 'And it appears that I am healthy again. With smooth skin, that has no body hair. The only hair I have, for right now, is on my head. Just as I thought my new body would be. And I don't have to worry about shaving anymore. Neither my face, as a man. Nor, my legs and armpits, later on, like some naturally born women do. And, now that I sure about that, I might as well get the next part done, while I still have the opportunity to do so.'
Lee turned and briskly walked over to her pile of clothing. And from the top of it, she picked up her ring necklace. She quickly undid the knot of the string. As soon as she removed the string from the ring, she held the ring in her left index and thumb.
After that, she held out her right hand, and she used her left fingers to slid the ring down her right fourth finger.
As soon as the ring slid all the way to middle of proximal phalange of her fourth finger, where the ring stop.
As Lee let go of the ring, with her left fingers, she held out her right hand. As she looked at the ring jewel on her finger. The golden ring was encircled with small jewels on the outside, but it felt smooth on the inside. And the ring fit her forth finger like a glove.
Lee continued to look at her right hand, as she thought, 'Just as I expected. My ring fits like a glove. And if I am right, along with a few physical bonus perks, I am now locked in this cursed female form, no matter how much hot water I am exposed to. But, I will test that, later. For now, I still need to check to make sure it will stay where it at. I don't want this to come off accident years later, with me losing it, and being exposed to a splash of hot water splash, with me then likely experience a painful death, within minutes.'
Lee then used her left fingers to try to gently remove the ring. But, it would not move one bit.
Lee thought, while mild exhilaration, 'It is not budging one bit. It is stuck on there. Good. I am now going to live. Even though I am much younger than I planned after being, when I cursed myself. Though, even at this age, as long as I am careful, I will now have a full life ahead of me. In so many ways. And with this form, I can simply disappear, with no one coming after me, and ever finding me, again.'
'Also, the ring is conformable on my finger. It is snug, but not tight. And given this thing is magical, it will likely grow, as my finger goes, so it will never become tight.'
'Along with this, should worse come to worse. And I do need to remove this ring. I can do the Frodo method, with a knife. I can live with losing a finger. But, if I did that, I need to make sure I have a back up plan ready to lock my cursed form, beforehand. So, I would not be splashed with hot water, and die from the cancer I have has been slowly killing.'
'Also, I wonder if my cancer will stop in my other form, now. Though, my aging does not stop in either form. That is unlikely. And I am not going to test that theory to find out. I am healthy, and I am not going to risk going back to dying.'
'Besides, I am going to focus on the good things of this situation. And best of all those things is that I still retain my mind and skills. So, I will be fine.'
She then looked over at Garibaldi, and the sleeping teenage girl, as she frowned slightly. She thought, 'Still... I have to help Garibaldi, and Garcia. But, after that. I am gone to live the life I have only ever previously dreamed of doing.'
Lee then saw Michael stop shouting, as she ran towards to the spring they had pulled the teenager from.
Lee thought, 'I better follow her, before she does something even more foolish.' Lee then quickly followed Garibaldi.
A few seconds later, reached the spring, and came to a stop, near the edge. Garibaldi then leaned down and looked at her reflection, as she said, “I am not just a girl, but a young girl. And I have my hair back.” Michael ran her right hand through her full head of brown hair, that went to her neck line.
Just then, Lee came to a stop, to stand beside the brown haired girl, to Garibaldi's right side.
Lee turned to the other young girl, as she stated, “And if you are lucky, the curse might allow you to keep your hair in your male form.”
Lee thought, 'Though, I am not really sure. But, if the lack of beard, as a man. And the lack of body hair on the female form, save for the pubic area, during puberty and afterward. Due to gender changing back and forth. Is any indication. The answer is, yes. It is clear the magic of these types of gender changes prefer the person effected having hair on their head. So, Garibaldi baldness, as a man, may have just been cured. It might even stay brown, in both forms, and not turn white in his much older, male form.'
'Though, if Garibaldi wants to be bald. Then, Garibaldi will just have to shave his, or her, head. With both forms then being bald. Though, I doubt that Garibaldi will want to do this.'
Garibaldi dropped her right hand back to her side, as she continued to looked at her reflection. She replied, “I hope so. It would be nice to get something out of all this mess.”
Lee leaned down, and looked at both her and Garibaldi's reflections, as she commented, “I agree. And I was afraid this would happen. It looks like we are both around six years old. This is the spring of drowned girl. Not the spring of drown human female. Since we are no longer young in our male forms, not only did our genders change, but our ages got severely reset to where there is no question of being a girl. It is magic, after all. And these springs do have a sense of humor.”
“This is why I wanted to speak to the guide before I took a dip in this spring. But, it appears that at least I am now healthy. And on the bright side, we look to be slender, and in good shape for our age bracket.”
Lee mentally added, 'Also, I still have black hair. Just like before, with the instant girl packets. And just as I thought. The instant packages are a lot weaker than the full curse. So, with the packets, the age difference was less extreme.'
Garibaldi leaned up, as she turned to Lee. She asked, with surprise in her tone of voice, “You were planning to turn yourself into a girl?”
Lee leaned up, as well. She then looked over at Garibaldi. Next, Lee held up her open right hand, with her fingers pointing up. After that, she used her left index finger to point to the ring on her right forth finger.
Lee warmly smiled, as she said, “Yes. And I believe I have also just locked myself in this female form, as well.” She then dropped her hands back to her sides.
Garibaldi questioned, in disbelief, “And you locked yourself in this female form, too?”
Lee pointed out, “Yes. Remember, I have cancer. Or, had cancer. You said it, yourself. I had only a month, or so, to live. This is my hail Mary play. And even with the drawbacks. Due to the extreme youth reset. I am not complaining, because my plan seems to have worked. The good news that you know this series. Along with me reminding you of the rules of these curses. For you, hot water will return you to your natural body. But, cold water will change you back to being a girl. Due to this, the curse is manageable.”
Garibaldi stated, “I realize that. And I admit that there are not many places back on Mars where I can be splashed with water. But, I am sure there are a few that I have not taken into account of.”
Lee commented, “Yes. You are likely going to become a water magnet, in both forms.”
Garibaldi responded, “I know. And I can take precautions. But, that still does not change that fact that I did not want to be a girl, in the first place. Especially, a girl this young. I cannot even have fun in a body that is this age.”
Lee reminded Garibaldi, as Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “I am in the same boat as you. And I know it sucks that you have a choice of either being an old man, or a very young girl. Still, our female forms will age naturally. And eventually, you will be able to have some real fun in your female form.” She the continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Though, all in all seriousness. When your female form gets older, be careful not get pregnant.”
Garibaldi conceded, “I will. You make a good point there. Remember, I have a teenage daughter. And I constantly worry about her getting pregnant at her age.”
Lee replied, “Of course.”
Lee thought, 'And I be you do background checks on everyone your daughter meets. Both male and female. Especially, those her age. Because, you are not going to take any chances, when she begins someone home to meet with you. Though, I need to explain to you, that this situation is not that bad. Compared to other possibilities would could have been facing.'
Lee commented, in a comforting tone of voice, “Besides, this situation not that bad for us. It could be a lot worse. At least we are not cursed to have the bodies of animals.”
Garibaldi agreed, “True. But still, this strangest day of my life. And given the life I have lead, that is saying something.”
Lee said, “I know. At one point, you were the chief of security at one of the strangest crossroads in known existence.”
Garibaldi replied, “Exactly.”
Lee suggested, “Still, don't say that too loudly. The day is young. We don't want to jinx ourselves, further.”
Garibaldi shrugged, as she replied, “Good idea. Though, we are still screwed. My pants and shoes went down into the spring. And my gold bars were in my pants”
Lee responded, in a supportive tone of voice, “Don't worry. I am sure we will figure something out.”
Garibaldi asked, “Okay. But, first. What about a cure for these curses? Such as the spring of drowned man.”
Lee said, “Trust me. Do not try to find a cure here. What passes for fate and luck will not let you. Nor I. Nor, our nearby friend. Get cured any time soon. All you might end up mixing curses with another curse. As I stated before, being a cute girl, it not that bad.”
Lee then gave Garibaldi a girlish smile, as she teased, “And right now, we are both clearly cute.”
Garibaldi conceded, “Fine. But, girl or not. If you pout, I will deck you.”
In response, Lee playfully stuck her tongue out at Garibaldi, for a second.
Garibaldi took the gesture in its intended jest, as she happily replied, “If I only had a camera.”
In response, both of them chuckled, instead of giggled, which was an eerie sight, given they were both currently in the bodies of young girls.
As they gradually stopped chuckling, Garibaldi asked, “So, do you know who the girl is?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And you are not going to like the answer.”
Garibaldi guessed, “You caused this, didn't you?”
Lee gave an embarrass express on her face, which made her unintentionally look even more cute, as she sheepishly admitted, “Yes. That is Garcia Lovelace.”
Garibaldi questioned, in a concerned tone of voice, “Of the Black Lagoon reality?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And he is a few years older than he was at the series, because of how events played out in my stories.”
Garibaldi inquired, “Events played out?... How is Garcia tied to this?...” Garibaldi then realized, as she accused, “You wrote this very scene? Didn't you?” She mentally added, 'And I don't even want to think about the implications of what I just said.'
Lee winced, as she said, “Yes. In the stories I created, I vaguely wrote, as in I mentioned the event in passing, in a dialogue scene, at the end of book three of my stories. With the event happening during the events of book two. Years after the event. Where Garcia Lovelace tried to help his friends, and his first reality jump accidentally ended up falling into the spring of drown girl, in Jusenkyo.”
Garibaldi raised an eyebrow, as she flatly commented, “No wonder Roberta and Fabiola are after your ass. Roberta only hinted at that in her phone call to you, at the police station.”
Lee responded, in an exasperated tone of voice, “I know. And I never gave any real details. And I certainly did not intent to endanger Garcia's life, by nearly having him drown.”
Garibaldi sighed, which looked cute on her face. She then calmly replied, “I believe you.”
Lee said, “Thank you. And just so you know. I respect that kid. Garcia has been through a lot. For both himself, and his friends.”
Garibaldi demanded, in an even, though forceful tone of voice, “Then, why did you curse him?” She thought, 'Still, Lee is right that Garcia has been through a lot.'
Lee admitted, in a sad tone of voice, “Because I wanted to Garcia to attend a nice, tropical island, girls only bikini party, with the other members of the cast. Including, Roberta, and Fabiola. And I admit now that was a stupid thing for me to have done.”
Garibaldi thought, with surprise, 'There seems to be no end to Lee's stupidity. She proves Albert Einstein's statement that stupidity is infinite.' She stated, in disbelief, “You bet it was. And you have the most twisted imagination that I know of.”
Lee flatly responded, “I am willing to admit to that.” Her voice then became more relaxed, as she continued, “Still, on the bright, given we saved Garcia's life, I think with her help, I should be able to smooth things over with the maids. Or, at the very least, just work off what I owe them, over this, in trade.”
Lee grimly thought, 'Though, now that I think about it. I could have just had Garcia use some instant girl powder at those Lagoon bikini parties. And if Garcia, or the maids figure that out. I am likely back to square one with them... Still, they like to do things directly. So, if I don't mention it, I should be fine.'
Garibaldi flatly stated, “You better hope so. And you are right. Garcia has been through a lot. You better also hope that she can handle being a girl.”
Lee answered, “Garcia is a strong willed person. I am sure she will be able to handle it. And I wrote it so she does get home. As long as she does not take any unnecessary risks, she will be fine. Also, I wrote that when Garcia makes it home, Roberta and Fabiola will be there to help her.”
Garibaldi responded, “Good... But still, if this is Garcia of the past. Why were you not already captured by now? Even if you look different now, won't the maids know who are you were ahead of time, from what Garcia will likely learn about you, from us, in the next little while?”
Lee complimented, “Those are good questions. I asked them, myself. And the answer to both questions is not necessarily complicated. It is possible that Garcia will keep this all a secret. Or, Garcia will give some other explanation. It depends on how these next few hours play out.”
Garibaldi asked, “Okay. But, are we taking him... Her with us?” She mentally added, 'If the answer is no. You will regret it.'
Lee answered, “Yes. I am not ditching my ticket off of the maids' shit list.”
Garibaldi cracked a smile, as she thought, 'Good. You at least see the logic of the situation.' She agreed, “Yea. I can see the logic in that.”
Lee replied, “I am glad you agree.”
Suddenly, from behind them, both girls then heard the teenage girl scream, in spanish, “Ack! I am a girl!”
Lee though, 'Good. Sleeping beauty is awake. And like I said. Since we saved the blond's life, when the maids find out, they will lay off their revenge against me. I may get the crap beat out of me by them, but I will likely otherwise be fine when it comes to them... The others, I don't know... Still, it is best we deal with the matter at hand.'
Lee said, “Let us go check on, Garcia. And help her calm down.”
Garibaldi nodded a few times, as she agreed, “Good idea.”
The two girls then turned around, Lee to her left, and Garibaldi to her right.
They saw Garcia had rolled onto to her back, and that she was sitting up. The two girls took several steps forward, to where they were standing in front of the blond teenager, looking at Garcia's face.
At the moment, Garcia was looking down at her wet self. With her wet clothing leaving very little to the imagination, as the clothing hugged her figure, including her respectively sized breasts, for a girl her age.
And given how short Lee and Garibaldi had become, they were only around a foot taller, than the teenage girl, at head level, as the blond girl was sitting on the ground. The two younger girls stood side by side, with Garibaldi standing to Lee's right side.
Lee thought, 'I need to calm her down. And the truth, in small measures, will help with that.' She calmly said, in spanish, “Relax Garcia. We will explain everything. And the good news is that your condition is temporary, and easily fixed.”
Lee saw Garcia looked up at here, as Garcia started to visibly calm down.
Lee thought, 'Good. My words got through to her. Now, to find out if she is okay?...' Lee asked, in spanish, “Besides being a girl, are you okay? Are you injured?”
Garcia did a mental check of her body for any injuries, and found she had none. Though, she thought, 'Except for being a girl, I am fine. ' She looked at both young girls, in their oversized, wet, male clothing, as she continued her thoughts, 'I need to find out who these girls are, and help them? Afterward, I will then move on to my mission of helping Roberta and Fabiola. But, first I need to know where I am? Who these girls are? And what has happened to me? And from their clothing. Perhaps us?'
Garcia answered, in spanish, “I am fine.”
Lee thought, 'Good. We won't have to carry Garcia out of here. Now, to make a small request.'
Lee changed to her native tongue of english, as she requested, “Okay. And could you please speak in english. It would be easier for my friend and I.”
Garcia replied, in english, “No problem.”
Garcia then looked around herself, as she immediately realized in thought, 'I am in Jusenkyo.” She then looked down at her chest, as she mentally reflected, 'I have been cursed with spring of drowns girl. That is what this little girl meant. Hot water will temporally change me back to male. Then, cold water will change me to female. Back and forth... What a minutes.'
Garcia looked back at up the two younger girls, in much bigger male clothing. She continued her thoughts, 'These are actually to much older men. And they are cursed with spring of drowns girls... Oh. Now, I remember, I hit the water and blackout. And these to fished me out. I need to thank them for saving my life. Still, I need to figure out how did I wound up here, of all places? And falling into the spring of down girl, pools of water?'
Garcia said, in a humble tone of voice, “Thank you for saving my life.”
Garibaldi replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee commented, “More than happy too.”
Garcia asked, “Now, how did I end up in Jusenkyo?”
Lee thought, 'She knows about Jusenkyo. So, she likely knows about the Ranma Half series, and how the curses works. That saves us a lot of time for explanations. And I now have the opportunity to get some answers to some questions I have for her. I always wondered why Garcia started his journey and how? Considering I was vague and never wrote those parts. This would be a good time to ask. But, I will do so in a minute, or two. First, we need to introduce ourselves, and work from there. Though, I might as well check.'
Lee inquired, “We are not sure. But, just to check. Do you know how the curses work, Garcia?”
Garcia casually answered, “Yes. Hot water, and cold water. I just need some hot water to turn back into a boy. Though, not boiling. And cold water will turned me back into a girl.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That clears up our first problem.' She said, “Good. And at least it is warm enough, that we are not freezing ourselves in wet clothing.”
Garcia shrugged, as she halfheartedly replied, “Yes. At least, there is that.”
Meanwhile, Garibaldi silently stood by, while she listened. She thought, 'I think I will let Lee handle this. Though, I feel I may have to pick up the pieces, later. I am just not sure which of them will go to pieces first. Given some of these things Garcia has been thought. This could push him. Well her, right now. Over the edge. And I almost pushed Lee over the edge, earlier, for calling her on some of her stupidity, which harmed some of my close friends.'
Garcia then realized, as she thought, 'Wait a minute. The black haired girl just called me by my name. How did she know my name? And she talking to me is not acting like a usual young child. Which confirms they are probably older than they look. And from what clothing they have one, they were likely male, before they took a dip in that pool. Just like me. Though, I best ask the more obvious question, first.'
Garcia asked, “How did you know my name?”
Lee answered, “It is literally a long story.” Lee noted Garibaldi mildly groan beside, to her right side, as she continued, “But, long story short. I know who are you. You are Garcia Lovelace. You are here because you were trying to help your friends fight Chang.”
“The good news is that we are from your future. And we know that things will work out on their own, without your involvement. You just need to focus on getting back home. Fabiola and Roberta will both return to you, soon after you get home. With both of them being fine.”
Garcia felt relief, as she responded, “That is nice to know.” She mentally admitted to herself, 'That is one less problem to deal with. And I really didn't have of a plan at this point. It was sort of jump feet first, without looking. And now, due to that, I am a girl. Though, I doubt I have much to worry about, concerning this. Still, there is one thing I need to know.'
Garcia stated, “Okay. So, in the end, who solves this mess, and stops Chang?”
Lee flatly answered, “Rock.”
Garcia stated, “Well, as scummy as his tactics can be, if anyone could stop Chang, it would be Rock.' She thought, 'I just hope this time, that no one ends up shot, like me. Or, maimed like Roberta. Due to Rock's plans. And not to confirm my suspicions about these two people in front of me.'
Garcia inquired, “So, who are you two, little girls? And what are you doing out here?”
Garibaldi calmly answered, “Like you, we are cursed. As you can guess. Since we saved your life. We got cursed dragging you out of the spring of drowned girl. We are actually much older men.”
Garcia thought, 'That confirms that. And I might as well apologize about that.' She said, in a sincere tone of voice, “Oh... Sorry about that. I did not plan on landing here?”
Garibaldi thought, 'I don't want her to blame herself for this. It is not her fault. It is Lee's fault.' She replied, “It is okay. And I don't hold this against you.”
Lee paid attention to Garibaldi. She thought, 'Garibaldi is right. We need to make it clear that we believe her and this is not her fault. It is mine.'
Lee stated, “We believe you. And this is not your fault.” She mentally lamented, 'It is my fault. Not that I am going to tell you that, just yet. But, saving your ass should get me either part way, or all of the way out of the doghouse, with your maids. Though, I will have to still work at getting out of the doghouse with you. Though, I am sure I can, with time and effort. Now, to explain the situation to you, Garcia. Without me actually confessing to anything.'
Lee continued, “We both were forewarned of the dangers, and we still jump into the cursed spring to save your life. And it seems that curse has a rubber band effect. In that older men, and I guess women, are turned into younger girls. While teenagers, such as yourself, are about the same age in both gender forms.”
Garcia agreed, “From looking at you two, right now. That is what I would guess, as well. So, who are you?”
Garibaldi introduced herself, “I am Michael Garibaldi.”
Garcia responded, “The only Michael Garibaldi I know of is Michael Garibaldi of the Babylon Five series.”
Garibaldi shrugged, as she casually commented, “That would me. Michael Garibaldi, CEO of Edgars Industries.”
Garcia thought, 'She must be from right after the series ended.' She said, in a slightly excited tone of voice, “Oh... Wow. I am a big fan of yours, Mister Garibaldi. I am Garcia Lovelace.”
Garibaldi calmly replied, “Nice to meet you, Garcia.” She mentally added, 'And I think we will deal with the whole fictional series issues, in a minute.'
Lee casually stated, “Yes. Garibaldi is from the distant future, of that reality, from when you are thinking of. And I am, Lee. You would not have never heard of me. Yet.” She mentally added, 'Which is a good thing for everyone involved.'
Garibaldi mentally noted, 'So, Lee is now calling me, Garibaldi, instead of Mister Garibaldi. I wonder how much of the manners he displayed back on Mars, was just a front to save his own hide. Still, he did save us, so I guess that is the important part that counts.'
Garcia said, “Nice to meet you, Lee.” She thought, 'I have a feeling that she is tied up in this mess. Somehow. Someway. Still, I can get the full story from Garibaldi, later. I trust Garibaldi. He, or currently, she, is not a liar. And she prefers to do things on the level.'
Lee thought, 'Now, to find out how Garcia got here?' She inquired, “Though, we are from your future, I hope you do mind telling us how you ended up here? Because, we don't know that part.”
Garcia shrugged, as she said, “It's a long story.”
Garibaldi chuckled a little, from Garcia's comment, as she thought, 'More than you know.'
Lee cracked a smile, as she suggested, “Same here. But, we are not going anywhere, anytime soon. So, let us compare notes.”
Garcia responded, “Okay. Fair enough. A few weeks after I sent Fabiola to bring back Roberta, from Roanapur, I had not heard word from Fabiola since she left. And I began to go worried...”
Lee thought, 'If I remember correctly, that would be a few weeks after Rock, Fabiola, Megatron, and Annie, escaped from Chang's Tower.'
Garcia continued, “And considering my two bodyguards, and close friends, had failed, I decided that directly contacting Chang would be a bad idea.”
Lee agreed, “And it would have been.”
Garcia sarcastically thought, 'Thanks for the vote of confidence.' She said, “So, I started doing some research on what had happened, and what as currently going on, in Roanapur. And what I found startled me. It seemed that whatever was happening there, was causing people to flee the city, like rats leaving a sinking ship. And that Chang was in the middle of that mess.”
Lee thought, 'That would be correct.'
Garcia went onto say, “Fortunately, due to so many fleeing people, this allow me all me to some information, piecemeal, from those people. Though, third party contacts. Unfortunately, I was unable to confirm any of this information, because I was unable to reach my contacts in Roanapur.”
Lee inquired, “Lagoon company?”
Garcia answered, “Yes. I found that the phone number to Lagoon Company was disconnected.”
Lee said, “They got captured. But, Rock soon escaped. And in the end, things turned out okay for them.”
Nearby, Lee and Garcia noticed Garibaldi snorting at Lee's comment.
Garibaldi thought, 'That would be a twisted concept of using the term, okay. Given Rock, Dutch, and Benny, ended up being turned into women. But, they along with Revy, and Janet, did ended up rich and they started a family. With no real problems afterward. Except for not catching you, Lee. So, I guess they would be, okay. To quote Obiwan, from the Star Wars movies. From a curtain point of voice.'
Garcia thought, 'Given Garibaldi's reaction to Lee's previous comment, I feel that Lee is not telling the whole truth. But, that will be another thing I ask Garibaldi about it, later.'
Garcia responded, “I guess that makes sense. Chang did show an interest in them. Now, back to my story. When it came to my own adventure. My first big breaks came in a small package, and a name.”
“It seems that before things started take a turn for the weird in that city of sin, someone in Roanapur was selling a special type of weapon, by the dozens, on the streets of that city. I soon got my hands one of those weapons. I believe it was Chang whom was behind the selling of these devices. I have no prove. But, it would be Chang's style. And he would be one of the few people there that could do so, and pull it off, without getting caught.”
“And I acquired the weapon from a person who sold it to me. That person had come from Roanapur, all the way to my home, three weeks after Fabiola left.”
“The man had heard of me, and how my maids liked to use unusual and powerful weaponry. And he believed he could me a quick buck. He told me the reason he was able to get it pass customs, was that the customs officials did not look for such types of weapons. Then, he showed me what it was. It was a metal cylinder. It did not seem like much, until he ignited.”
Lee calmly guessed, “A lightsaber?”
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as she asked, in a serious tone of voice, “Chang had access to lightsabers?”
Lee looked Garibaldi, as she smirked, as she commented, “And Star Destroyers... Let's just say that Chang took piracy to a whole new level.”
Garibaldi thought, with concern, 'If Chang has access to all that. That means that Lee did not tell me everything. And I have got to read Lee stories, as soon as possible. If for any other reason, than for the safety of my own home reality.'
Meanwhile, Garcia thought, 'Star Destroyers, also?... Okay. It is clear that Lee is connected to this mess. And if I play my cards right, I can find out more about her, and how she fits into this mess. Also, she confirms that Chang was the one behind the selling of these lightsabers.'
Lee and Garibaldi then turned to Garcia. Garcia noticed this, as she stated, “Yes. It was a lightsaber. And its blue blade was quite a sight to behold, in person. The man in question even showed me that it was real. By him using it to cut through large stone, behind my home. The man then showed me how to turn it off and on. Finally, he offered to sell it to me, at a hefty price. I gladly paid the price for it. In gold. And the man then left.”
Lee asked, “What did you do with your lightsaber?”
Garcia answered, “It is in a hidden safe, inside my home.”
Lee complimented, “It is intelligent that you did not take the lightsaber with you. Those weapons are vastly more dangerous than guns. Especially, for those not trained to use them. They can just as easily slice through the wielder, as the intended target of the wielder.”
Garcia said, “I realized that when I saw it cut through stone.”
Lee thought, 'I wonder.' She questioned, “Did Roberta ever teach you how to use a gun?”
Garcia answered, “Yes. She also taught me proper gun safety, and maintenance on weapons. She even taught me how to use a knife in combat, along with some hand to hand techniques. I just prefer not to use a weapon. And I do not care for violence.”
Lee thought, 'That makes sense. I mean, sure. Having Fabiola as a secondary bodyguard is nice. But, also knowing that, if need be, Garcia could defend himself, would likely put Roberta's mind at ease. And while I am not planning on fighting her. For several good reasons.'
'This also means I should not get into a fight with her. Especially, given her physical advantages in size and strength. Also, I am not use to this much small, physically weaker body. Putting me at a disadvantage. The only advantage I still have in a fight, is that I can sense my precognition still working. And that is not one hundred percent fool proof.'
'Still, I need to keep this conversation moving. While I compliment Garcia's prefer approach in her tactics.'
Lee complimented, “There is nothing wrong with that. Guile can get you are far as a gun. If not further. If you know what you are doing.”
Garibaldi chuckled a little, as she commented, “Yea. Lee here would know that.” She thought, 'And that would be an understatement for you, Lee.'
Lee turned to Garibaldi and frowned. She thought, with a bit of sarcasm, 'Thanks for blowing one of my few remaining advantages in this situation.'
Garibaldi noticed that, as she turned and smirked towards Lee. She thought, 'I am not going to let you play your girls with a nice person, like Garcia.'
The two younger girls then turned back to look at Garcia.
Garcia watched all this, as she thought, 'Interesting. So, this girl understands the art of guile, as Rock and I do. Garibaldi even confirms that. And from Lee's reaction to Garibaldi. It is clear that Lee did not want me to know this about herself. This means Lee might try to use me for her own ends. I will have to be wary of her. But, I need to continue with my story, before she grows suspicious of me.'
Garcia stated, “Thank you. And continuing my story. I must say. It is something else to hold such a weapon in my hands, that I suspect came from a fictional reality. But, there was no other explanation. From Roberta, I had contacts with weapons experts. And all of them stated that they knew of no such weapons existing on my world. And even if it was a top secret weapon, why would someone, of all places, be selling them in Roanapur, to people off the street. It did not make sense, unless that person was just doing that as a very twisted joke.”
“And we all know how twisted Chang's humor can be.”
Lee commented, “I know.” She thought, 'First hand.'
Garibaldi said, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Garcia thought, 'So, both of them know about Chang's personality, as well. Interesting.'
Garcia cracked a smile, as she went onto say, “And with that impossibility in my hands, I started to put the pieces together. But, that was only one piece of the puzzle, that I had gotten my hands on.”
Garibaldi guessed, “The name you spoke of?”
Garcia cracked a grin, as she said, “Yes. It seems that that a month after my friends and I left Roanapur, for a second time, a person showed up in Roanapur. The person's name was Akira Hatsushiba. The interesting rumor I heard was that the person changed genders with a sneeze. From a black haired japanese man, to a blond haired caucasian woman. And that was not all. She had somehow got mixed with with Lagoon company, and the mercenaries that Revy hired to help me, during the second time I can to Roanapur.”
Lee confirmed, “That is pretty much all true.”
Garcia thought, 'Lee, you clearly know a lot about this. Though, I do not know if you are unknowingly tipping your hand. Or, if you have an ulterior motive. Either way, I will find out the truth, from Garibaldi, later. In private.'
Garcia said, “Interesting. And with my new lightsaber, on a hunch, I did a search online, for the name, Akira Hatsushiba. And I found a fiction manga titled, Gacha Gacha Secret. The manga is about a japanese teenager, with black hair, that changed from a boy, to a slightly younger girl, caucasian with long hair, due to a technological accident. Though, the manga was in black and white. So, I was not sure the girl has blond hair, or not. But, it was close enough to lead me to believe the Akiras were one in the same.”
Lee thought, 'You have always been an intelligent person, Garcia.' She stated, “They are the same, Akira. Only, Akira was an adult when he came to Roanapur. Long after Akira's series ended.”
Garcia thought, 'Interesting. And I wonder if my theory is correct, on who opened Chang's eyes to the great realities around us? And if you are being so open about this, Lee. I might as well just directly ask you my questions.'
Garcia inquired, “I am correct in assuming that Akira's presence tipped off Chang as to the existence of multiverse?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Garcia stated, “That explains a lot. That this is what set Chang on his course to figuring out how to travel between realities in the multiverse.”
Lee replied, “Correct.”
Garcia said, “And I came to that conclusion, as well. While I was still doing my research on Chang. And with that piece of the puzzle in place. I did some research on the gender bending genre, and various fictional series. To see if there were anymore clues to the situation. I learned about the Ranma Half series. Both the anime, and manga. Along with a few other series. But, given where we are, I believe that I delved a little too deeply in my research.”
Lee casually replied, “That happens to the best of us.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Isn't that an understatement, for all three of us.'
Garcia said, “Well, since the rumors are true. I guess it is true that when Akira first came to town, he lived mostly as a man, only to later start living as a woman.”
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as she asked, “Is that going to happen to us?”
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as she answered, “Not unless you want it to.”
Lee then looked between Garibaldi and Garcia, as she continued, “Don't worry about it. You both are very well grounded, sane individuals. You are not going to start to want to live as girls. So relax. Besides, Akira was never that sane to being with. And when Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, got their hands on him. They took Akira to places, and had Akira experience things that are best left unsaid.”
Lee thought, 'Even I did not write some of those scenes. I wrote before and after. But, not the scenes themselves.'
Garibaldi commented, “I will take your work for that.” She thought, 'Lee, truly does have a twist imagination. And I will find and read her stories, as soon as possible.'
Garcia thought, 'It sounds like Lee has a hand in these matters. I need to find out how she is tied up in all this.' She replied, “Okay.”
Lee went on to say, “Anyway, beforehand, Akira had experience living as a girl, part time. So, living as a girl most of the time was not that big a stretch, for her. You two, on the other hand, like being male. And I doubt either of you will start living as girls just because you turn female with splashed with cold water.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Lee has a point. And I might as well be polite to her on the matter.' She said, in a warm tone of voice, “Thanks. I really needed to hear that.”
Garcia replied, “Same here.”
Garcia thought, 'That is actually comforting to know. And from what I read of the Gotcha Gotcha manga. Lee is correct about Akira. Finding a spanish translation of that manga was difficult. Though, I am glad I found copies of those manga volumes, translated into english, online.'
Lee responded, “No problem. Besides, Akira lived in Roanapur for a while. That place will play with a person's head.” She thought, 'Even with those that just write about that city.'
Garcia agreed, “Yea. That place could corrupt a saint.”
Lee requested, “No arguments there. Now Garcia. Please continue your story.”
Garibaldi and Lee then turned to Garcia, as the blond teenage girl continued her story, as she said, “Now, as Lee confirmed. From what I learned, Akira was stuck in Roanapur for a few years. And she lived there, until one day, a few years after she first arrived there, she disappeared.”
Lee said, “She went back home.”
Garcia replied, “I thought as much. With that piece of information, I decided I need to see what was happening to Roanapur. While, I did not dare go there, I hired a captain of a Thai fishing boat, sailing in the Gulf of Thailand. On the east coast of that nation. To take some pictures of Roanapur, from a distance. A few days later, he made port, and he sent me the negative of those pictures, via two-day mail service.”
“When, I got the negatives, in the mail, back home. I had them developed by someone I trusted. When I saw the enlarged photos I had made, of those negatives, I quickly noticed why nearly everyone fled that city. Chang had built a blue circular pyramid, with a base that was the size of a small city. It was nearly the size of Roanapur, itself. And the structure was high enough to break through the clouds. It was known only, by the locals, as, the Tower. Or, Chang's Tower.”
Garibaldi realized what Chang's Tower was, as she questioned, in slight shock, “Chang build his own Genom Tower? Where did he find the funds for that kind of operation?”
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as she stated, “I told you that Chang to piracy to a whole different level. He and his allies plundered the multiverse for riches. From there, all it takes is time, effort, and know how.” She then turned to look at Garcia, as she said, in a slightly calmer tone of voice, “Now, please let Garcia continued.”
Garibaldi thought, 'I am really going to have to read Lee's stories. A lot clearly happens in them. Also, that explains why the Knight Sabers are after Lee.'
Garcia thought, 'Given everything else Lee knows. I am not surprised that Lee know this, as well.'
Garcia stated, “You are correct. It took me a while to backtrack to what the tower was. And original origin of the tower. But, given the size and shape, it was the same as Genom Tower, from the Bubblegum Crisis OVA. It was then, I realized that Chang likely had tech from not only the Star Wars reality, but the Bubblegum Crisis OVA reality. And after reviewing the Bubblegum Crisis OVA series, I realized how dangerous Chang had become, due to having access to such technology. Such as boomers, hardsuits, and motoslaves.”
Garcia thought, 'And if we are lucky, that is all what Chang had access to in that reality.'
Garcia continued, “As such. This confirmed my earlier belief that I should not confront Chang directly. Though, I am not really sure how Chang kept that his headquarters off the news for so long. Nor, how he kept the various governments at bay.”
Lee stated, “At that time, Chang gained a lot of wealth, combined with some blackmail, with the right connections, can go a long way in keeping things off the news, and keeping the various governments from knocking on Chang's own door.”
Garcia thought, with concern, 'More and more information from you, Lee. Either Lee worked with Chang. Or, she is somehow deeply connected to Chang's operation, in another way. Either way, she is dangerous, and not to be trusted. Though, I am getting a lot of information from her. While, she clearly already knows most of the information I am giving her.'
Garcia said, “I will take your word on that. Still, that left me with a problem. I could not confront Chang directly. Yet, I could not go around him. Then, a few days, after I received the negatives in the mail. Nearly, four weeks after Fabiola left. I had some unexpected guests show up at my home.”
“I was sitting at a table, having lunch on the patio, when three men, in white lab coats suddenly appeared in front of me.”
“I was alarmed by their presence, until they quickly stated, in english, that they were not there to harm me. They said that we could help each other.”
“I gave them the benefit of the doubt. And I am glad that I did so. They told me that they were part of the large group of researchers and technicians that were hired by Chang, to do research and development on multiverse travel. That Chang has started to institute a policy that would have enslaved them to him. And they use their skills to fake their deaths in a lab explosion, with their prototype reality jumping machine they were working on.”
“One that did not use a portal, and instantly sent someone to another reality.”
Lee thought, 'That is probably one of the prototypes that is a technological bridge between the large portal systems, and the remote sized reality devices. Similar to Megatron and the Hell Saber's teleport devices.'
Garcia continued, “And instead, their machine teleported them to me. Right before they set their lab to explode.”
“I asked them, that even with the explosion, how they planned to fool Chang, into thinking they were death?”
“They answered that they expected that the report on the lab explosion would determine that the reason for lack of body parts after the event, was while being kill in the explosion, they were teleported to another part of the multiverse.”
“And Chang would not have expected them of just teleporting to the other side of the planet.”
“And given the length of the time they were with me, I believe their ruse worked. Because Chang did not sent anyone to come look for them, nor attacking my home.”
Lee thought, 'That is good. And it sounds like those technicians faked their deaths, and escaped, before Chang had all his technicians brainwashed and changed into women, so they would be loyal to him. Well, her, at the time. I believe that fits the timeline of book two of my stories.'
Garcia went onto say, “Then, they told me what was going on in that horror show of a tower. They confirmed my worries to their fullest... And beyond... They told me about the kidnappings. The vats. The brainwashing. The super-soldier serum, which I am guessing that Roberta has been given?”
Lee thought, “So, you know all this. Since that is the case. There is no point in denying, nor sugar coating was Chang had done. And by extension, what I have done. Though, I am not going to confess my crimes to you, yet.' She stated, “Yes. She is going to be young and healthy for a very long time.”
Garcia said, “I will consider that a silver lining in this whole nightmare. Still, worst of all, was when the technicians mentioned the breeding projects.”
Garcia and Lee then noticed Garibaldi flinch at the mention of the breeding project.
Garcia thought, 'I would bet that is why you came here, in the first place. You were running from Chang's forces. And this would be one of the few places I can think of that someone would have to be insane to follow you too. Still, on the matter of Chang...'
Garcia inquired, in a concerned, slightly bewildered tone of voice, “How could Chang be so evil? I met the man once. He didn't seem that evil. Evil. Yes. But, not that evil.”
Lee answered, “It was more of a case that Chang was on evil fanboy powertrip.”
Garcia responded, in a depressed tone of voice, “Oh... Sadly, I can see that when it comes to Chang.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Sadly, so can I. It is canon that Chang was an evil fanboy, in the Black Lagoon series. He just did it with style. And giving him access to the multiverse, as his personal playground, would be like sending a dust fiend on a permanent high. It would be bad trip for everyone involved.'
'And while it is clear that Lee know regrets her actions. I wonder if Lee was on a powertrip of her own, when she wrote those parts of her stories?... I think that is very likely. Considering, while she hides it well. She can be very arrogant. Such as, when we were on Mars. When she talked to Rock on the phone. The way she talked to Rock on the phone, in my office. Before we are attacked by the boomers, that were after me. She acted like she was in complete control of the situation. Which she later learned she was not.'
'I believe she still thinks she is in control of this situation. With her given out information, in small portions, in an attempt to control Garcia's actions. But, I can tell, by Garcia's responses, and reactions, that Garcia is not falling for it. I will talk to Garcia later, in private, over the matter. And we will decide what to do with Lee, then.'
Garcia went onto say, “Also, these three men were very forthcoming with me, on other matters that I wished to learn. And in doing so, they showed a lot of trust towards me.”
“Included in what they told me, they informed me as to what happened to my friends. To my relief, they stated that neither of my maids were part of the breeding projects. And that while Roberta worked for Chang, Fabiola was on the run from them, somewhere in the multiverse.”
“Then, they said they believed I would help them. And they were correct. And though, they did not tell me how they knew about me, to the point of them trusting me as much as they did. To a point that was far beyond just would they should have done from reading reports, and hearing rumors about me, that likely circulated around Roanapur. And I have a feeling that you both have this answer to this question.”
Garibaldi said, “Yes. And we will get to that information in a minute.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. We will.”
Garcia responded, “Thank you. Anyway, they made me an offer. I would hide them, in exchange for their help. This included what they told me. And them building me a reality traveling device. I agreed to their deal, due to the fact I wanted to help save Fabiola, and free Roberta.”
“But, now that I know it all worked out on its own, I now realize my actions were all in folly. And I was on a fool's errand.”
Lee kindly said, “It is the thought that counts.”
Garibaldi smiled at Lee using what she has said to Lee, earlier, to help Garica.
Garcia responded, “I hope so. And so, I gave them funding to building a multiverse device. I set them up in a house, near my home. Due to limited funds, and lack of resources, they could not create a portal system. Though, they were able to build me a teleporter device, like the one they used to escape the tower from.”
“And what surprised me was that it only took them only a week to build. They stated they had been building such technological devices for so long that it was second nature to them.”
Lee thought, 'When skills reach that level, people can do amazing things, very quickly. And when Garcia here gets back, those three will likely be working for him in some other capacity One does not get rid of such helpful people.'
Garcia continued, “But, there was a catch. They warned me that it was a one way trip. They could send me anywhere I wanted to go. But, they could not bring me back. So, I had to wisely chose, beforehand, where I wanted to go. Still, I was sure I would be able to make it through.”
Lee thought, 'So, the device really was similar to Megatron, and Hell Saber's teleport devices. Only, the traveler could not take the device with him, or her.'
Garibaldi mentioned, “Don't worry. We have a reality device that can take us any place, time, and reality, we want to go.”
Lee rolled her eyes, as she thought, 'I will let that one slide. Because I was going to tell her, anyway.' She looked back at Garcia and Garibaldi, as she thought, 'Still, Garibaldi did not tell Garcia where our reality device is. So, there is that.'
Garcia said, “Thank you, again. That is reassuring. And as I thought, I would not be stuck here. Speaking of which, the technicians informed me of the way reality worked. Just think of the reality, time, and place, you want to go, and the use the device.”
Garibaldi smiled as she thought, 'So, that is how to use Lee's reality device.'
Lee saw Garibaldi smile. She did not show any reaction to her friend's smile, as she thought, 'I guess the cat is out of the bag on that one. There is not much I can do about it now. Considering I am not planning on ditched either of these two people. Because, that would only make things worse for me, in the long run.'
Garcia stated, “Also, there was another problem. Due to this being a prototype, while the technicians promised me it would get me to when and where. I wanted to go. The technicians said that they could not guarantee that I would teleport at ground level. That I might appear several feet above my intended location, and fall to the ground. So, they suggested that wherever I think of, that I should focus being over a pool of water. But, not a large body of water, because I might wind up in middle of an ocean. So, that is what I did. I thought of a pool of water to be teleported over.”
“And that is why I traveled light. So, when I hit water, I would not be weighted down. So, I would not immediately sink. I just didn't guess landing in water, at a height that be so painful, and knock me out. Though, I am happy I missed those bamboo stalks.”
Lee commented, “Yes. Count yourself lucky. And anything above ten feet, if you land wrong, you are going to feel it. And, considering you landed, while facing down, it seems you likely did a partial belly flop, which knocking yourself out on landing. But, you appear otherwise unharmed.”
Garcia said, “And I am happy about that. So, when I used the teleporter device, I stepped to the teleporter pad, thought of where, when, and what reality I wanted to go to, and activated the device.”
“Next thing I know. I am over four meters above a pool of water, looking down at the water coming out me. And when I hit, I blacked out. When I woke up, here, on the ground, I found I had been changed into a girl. Then, I sat up, and saw you two had approached me. Then, we are here.”
“But, what I don't understand, is how did I ended up here? I was focusing on my one major lead in the multiverse. Akira. Whom, from what I gathered from his manga. Which I read a complete, english translated version of, was a nice, understanding person. Along with him being reported to be friends with Lagoon company. And I believed she would likely help me. And with Akira's aid, given his access to reality travel. I would not be stuck in his home reality, for long.”
Lee stated, “You would be correct. She and her friends, from her home reality, helped Rock take down Chang, and his organization.”
Garcia thought, 'Lee, you keep referring to Akira, as female. Though, in both the manga, and in Roanapur, Akira lived as both male and female. And Akira was born male. It sounds like you personally know Akira. But, I will deal with that matter, later. Besides, I have other questions, for you.'
Garcia responded, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Okay. That being said. These is still the matter of that fact that I was thinking of going to Akira's home reality. Not the Ranma Half reality. So, how did Akira wind up in the Ranma Half reality?”
Lee explained, “The Akira you were thinking of existed in a composite reality of a number of other series. Including, the Ranma Half series.”
Garcia responded, “Oh... That explains how I ended up in this reality. But, not how I ended up in Jusenkyo, itself? Over the spring of drowned girl?” She thought, 'Though, I think it best I not ask her how she knows that this reality is a composite reality?... Just another question for Garibaldi.'
Lee stated, “When you visualized where you wanted to go, you thought of a pool of water, and you must have accidentally also been thinking about gender bending aspects of Akira character. And so, when you entered this reality where Jusenkyo existed, you ended up landing in the spring of drowned girl. Also, you are in the past, because in some part of your subconscious, you were thinking about going into past, as some point in time, of your personal future.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And I had something similar happen to me, as well. Right now. When I used my reality device, to take Garibaldi and I here, in Jusenkyo of the recent past. I must have subconsciously thinking of you, Garcia. And how I cursed you. Also, that is not surprising, give that had happened to a few of the characters in my stories. Though, I make sure to think of landing on dry land, less than an inch off the ground.'
Garcia commented, “I guess that makes sense. And you are right. I was also thinking that maybe later, I would go into the past, to save both my parents. Among fixing a few other things.”
Lee thought, with a bit of sadness, 'I better just tell Garcia the bad news now. Before she learns the truth, the hard way.'
Lee stated, in a sober tone of voice, “As much as I like to say that would be okay. You cannot do that without risk of creating a reality destroying paradox. Though, take heart that there is life after death. And your parents are together. And reincarnation exists in your reality. So, either way, you will likely be re-united with your parents, eventually.”
Garcia thought, 'I doubt Lee would lie about this. It is too depressing for her to lie about this.' She choked back some tears, as she said, in a sad tone of voice, “I will do as you request. And I guess I can live with the fact I will someday see them, again. One way, or another.”
Meanwhile, Garibaldi thought, 'Well, that is a sad thing to say. But, I believe that Lee was only being honest. Considering, I am guessing she wrote the rules, from her stories, on those matters. And I have a feeling that she used that reincarnation rule already. With her likely creating that as an escape clause for anyone that was killed. So, she could to bring them back to life with little effort. I wonder if I have seen any such people? Still, I think we need to tell Garcia about the Black Lagoon series.'
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as she said, “As much as I would prefer not to mention this. We have to tell, Garcia, about her series.”
Lee looked at Garibaldi. She sighed. She then stated, in a slightly depressed tone of voice, “You're right. Do you want to handle giving her the news?”
Garibaldi said, “Yes.” She thought, 'I might as well. You have told her almost everything else.'
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Garcia asked, “What do you two want to tell me, that is so important?”
The two younger girls looked at Garcia.
Garibaldi said, in a calm, sober tone of voice, “I don't know how to put this. But, you know how you know me from that Babylon Five series?”
Garcia calmly replied, “Yes.” She mentally added, with worry, 'I don't like where there is going.'
Garibaldi said, “Well, you are from a reality that is a work of fiction to us. It is titled, Black Lagoon.”
Garcia thought, 'I can just guess what that series is about. Considering, I know of a boat called, Lagoon.' She requested, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “Please, explain.”
Garibaldi then found herself at a loss for words, as she thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I am honestly not sure how to explain this to Garcia, without doing some emotional damage to her. Which I don't want to do, under any circumstances. I best turn to Lee for help. Though, I don't trust her. She clearly has a handle on such matters.'
Garibaldi turned to Lee.
Lee noticed Garibaldi looking at her. She turned to look at Garibaldi, as she offered, “I will take over from here.”
Garibaldi replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'On second thought. I might as well. Considering Lee has done such a good job, so far.'
The two little girls looked back at towards Garcia.
Lee calmly stated, “Well, Garcia. As you probably have guessed. The series centers around Lagoon company and Roanapur, Thailand. There is both a manga and a anime series. Both series begin the same way. Rock is kidnapped by Lagoon company. And it goes all the way to where you and Fabiola bring Roberta back to your home, for a second time, in Venezuela. After your run through the jungle, with Major Caxton, and his men.” She mentally added, 'I will just omit that the manga continued from there, with the Wired Red Wild Card. Considering that storyline does not happen in Garcia's home reality. And has not direct bearing on her life.'
Garcia looked down at Lee and Garibaldi's faces, as she let out a deep breath, while sighing. She then said, “Given what I have already learned. I am not really that surprised. Still, I need to know, what is the difference between the manga and anime? And which one am I from? Or, is it a compose of both series, like this reality?”
Lee complimented, “Good questions. And to answer you, you are from the anime reality. The main difference between the manga and anime is that way Roberta was left at the end. In the manga, she was not that severely injured physically, while in the anime... Well, you already know how badly she was injured. And in both versions, Roberta had mental scarring from her ordeal.”
Garcia sadly admitted, “Yes. I know. That is why I made my deal with Chang, in the first place. He promised to help Roberta.”
Lee said, “I know. And it is a good choice that will reward you and your family, ten fold. And the good news is that Chang kept his promise. Among other things, in his brainwashing, he mentally repaired some of Roberta's mental scarring. And her missing body parts have been replaced. Though, they are now robotic looking. But, I know for a fact she later replaces those parts with more human looking components.”
Lee thought, with pride, and a bit of righteous indignation, 'While the maids are after me. My comments here are for Garcia's benefit. Not my own.'
Garcia retorted, “I could care less what she looks like on the outside.” She mentally added, 'I am more worried about how her mind is. And I know the other servants of the manor will just be happy to have Roberta and Fabiola return home.'
Lee calmly complimented, “I know. And that is what makes you are a good person.”
Garcia responded, “Thank you. And I need to know. When Fabiola and Roberta return, will they be like they were before they left? Do I have to worry about Roberta being brainwashed.”
Lee answered, “Roberta will be deprogrammed by the time you see her again. And her personality will be back to the way she was before your father was murdered. And Fabiola will be a bit more mature. And I know for a fact they feel the same way about you. In that they don't care how you look on the outside. They care about what is on the inside. They will still care about you.”
Garcia said, “Thank you. I find that news, comforting.” She thought, 'Curse, or no curse. At least I know we will continue on with our lives. And as much as I want to cure this curse, right now. I know better than to stay around this place. It is just too dangerous.'
'I fear mixing curses, or getting an animal curse, or personality curse, than being a girl. At least, I am in control of myself in this form. And I am human. That is a plus in anyone's book.'
'Besides, if Roberta and Fabiola can deal with being a girl. So can I. And at least my breasts are still small enough that they are not being pinched by my shirt. Though, they are still a noticeable in size.'
'Though, I do need to know how much they know about us. Which, from what Lee has hinted, is a lot.'
Lee sincerely replied, “You're welcome.”
Garcia inquired, in a concerned tone of voice, “So... I also need to know. How much do you know about me, at a personal level?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well honestly answer her question. Besides, I am coming to enjoy summations.' She answered, in a kind, thought slightly arrogant tone of voice, “I know a lot about you, Garcia. And you probably won't like what I have to say.”
Garibaldi stated, “That would be an understatement.” She mentally reflected, 'Considering Lee, that you have been able to be one step ahead of everyone, throughout your entire ordeal. Though, eventually you will make a mistake, and miscalculate. And in this game, you can win a thousand victories. But still, all it takes is one defeat for you to permanently lose. And I just think you made that mistake and miscalculation with Garcia and I.'
Garcia thought, 'If Garibaldi is agreeing with Lee, then Lee must be telling the truth. And I am starting to see that Lee is wearing a mask with us. But, I can tell there is much arrogance slipping out from underneath that mask. And it is clear that Lee likes to keep her secrets. But, her arrogance causes her to giveaway more than she would like for others to know. I can use that to my advantage. Now, to bait Lee, through his arrogance.' She skeptically questioned, “Okay. Like what?”
Lee casually said, “Well, such as in the past, when you returned to Roanapur. During your hunt for Roberta. When you finally found Major Shane Caxton, and his men, in that alley. You had a mind for murder and revenge then. And that is where you found that corpse in the trash can, whom was holding that pistol you took, and pulled on those men. I believe that deceased person was likely a Malaysian police officer.”
Garcia inquired, “While, I am sure you likely saw that event, from watching that series, I would like to know how you are so sure of the person's origins?”
Lee stated, “That is easy to answer. The pistols you used was a five round, Smith & Wesson, model thirty-six, thirty-eight caliber, Chief's Special, revolver.”
“These pistols were issued to plain clothed detectives belonging Royal Malaysian Police special branch, as intelligence, and the criminal investigation division. From the nineteen seventies, all the way to the turn of the millennium. When Malaysian government replaced the Chief's Special, with a Glock Seventeen. And the events that happened to you are dated in the middle of nineteen ninety-five, AD.”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. The long version of the Glock Seventeen is the model pistol that Eda used. Which is the Glock Seventeen L. Also, there were others side characters in Roanapur that used standard Glock Seventeen pistols. It is possible there were several other undercover agents in Roanapur, than the usual upper level suspects. That place may have actually be a having a small cold war with the various government powers. But, those are thoughts for another. I need to focus on the matter at hand.'
Garibaldi thought, 'So, this Garcia Lovelace is from the turn of the last millennium. Interesting. I know the Black Lagoon series was set in the nineteen nineties. But, I forgot exactly what year.'
Lee continued, “While a few other nations, such as Japan, Norway, and the U.S., used that pistol in the their police department. The Malaysians also issued those pistols to their intelligence officers. And Malaysia is not that far from Thailand.”
“The plain clothed Malaysian officer, whom was likely from the intelligence branch. Considering this happened outside his native country. Likely went Roanapur to investigate a case, there. Or, it could have been a drug, or other smuggling, deal gone bad. You never know, considering the people that go to the city.”
Garcia nodded in agreement, as she commented, “Yes. A city of fools. Most are brought to the city by greed. And whom are more than likely to be soon parted from both their own money, and their lives.”
Lee complimented, “You are quite the poet, Garcia.”
Garcia replied, “Thank you. I do enjoy writing poetry as a hobby.”
Lee replied, with intrigue in her tone of voice, “Interesting.” She thought, 'Oh the irony, considering I am a writer.'
Lee calmly said, “To continue. The officer literally wound up dead in a trash can, after likely fleeing a gunfight. We know this because if he body was dumped, they would have taken his gun. Instead his gun was still handing from his fingers. So, he likely fled those that shoot him, lost those people, before he succumbed to his wounds, and collapsed face forward into the trash case.”
“And it must have been only a couple of people, because there was ammo still in that gun, for you to use... On the other hand, the person have have reloaded, before he died. Which is just as likely...”
“Still, either way, with the trail of logic we have, we know the people after the officer did not find him because the model thirty-six is a nice pistol to have. And to some people, the pistol is a collector's item.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Yea. It would be a nice slugthrower to have.'
Lee went on to say, “And we know the man collapsed face forward, because the gun was hanging from the man's right fingers, with the interior or the right arm facing the inward, against the trash can. If the man had collapse backwards into the trash can, the arms would be outward if the victim had fallen backward.”
“And that is where you found him holding his pistol between his cold, dead fingers.'
Garibaldi thought, while she felt slightly impressed with Lee's deduction skills, 'That is some pretty good detective work by Lee. Not bad. Not bad at all.'
Lee continued, “Which is kind of ironic, considering you pointed that weapon at someone that was in intelligence work.”
Lee thought, 'Though, there were two other people in the Black Lagoon series that did use the Chief's specials. But, one was, Elroy, whom retired, and operated outside of Roanapur.'
'And the another person, whom was a citizen of Roanapur, that did have a Chief's Special revolver, was Torchy. Not Claude, but a drug junkie. And his mind was so wasted from the drugs he took that I highly doubt Garcia got his pistol from him. Because Torchy would have never made it out of a gunfight alive. Let alone escape to the point he still had his pistol in his fingers, before he died from his wounds.'
Garcia pointed out, “It could have been one of the punks that Revy and the others killed. Though, I do not really clearly remember them, myself.”
Lee though, 'Not a bad possibility. But, it is incorrect.' She explained, “Actually, it wasn't one of their weapons. First, the series showed some detailed scenes of those foolish punks. They were using shotguns, automatic rifles, semi-automatic pistols, and a few grenades. They would consider it beneath themselves to use a five round revolver... Which shows they did not have any taste in firearms...”
“And I call them foolish, because after the Lagoon siege debacle, they should have known better than to take freelance work, as a large assault force, in attacking a location.”
“Speaking of which, did Revy, Rock, or the others, ever mention that siege?”
Garcia answered, “Actually, I believe they did. But, it was a comment in passing. And I did not ask for details.”
Lee stated, “That siege is shown in your series as well. Several months before your return to Roanapur, an out of towner, from Florida, tried to pull...”
Then, something occurred to Lee. She looked down at her feet and the ground, as she muttered, “He to be a snow bird. Or, a son of snow birds. Or, an undercover fed. Considering he recognized Eda from a previous formal government function. A redneck, good old boy would know better than to try the crap he attempted to pull.”
Garcia questioned, “What are you saying? You're mumbling.”
Garibaldi thought, with interest, 'She really is. I think Lee hit her own emotional nerve. She is from the southeastern United States of that time period. And Florida is a state of that area. So, she found it annoying that someone from that area, did something foolish, even if that person, and those events happened in another reality.'
Lee caught herself. She looked up at the two other girls, as she answered, “Oh... Nothing...” She mentally berated, with concern, 'How could I be so foolish, and lose myself in my thoughts... Could this young form be effecting my mind. If so, I am in real trouble. Still. Though, I am in trouble, there is nothing I can do about it... I think it is best I ignore my previous actions, and just move forward. While not worrying about what I just did.'
Lee continued, “Anyway, this guy hired a bunch of freelancers to catch a woman. And Lagoon company got mixed up in the mess, and it turned into a seize against Revy, Rock, and a few others... Long story short, the three people that Revy hired were among the handful of known surviving members of the attacking team.” She mentally added, 'Though, I am sure a few of those that went into the water. Or, just missed the boat, beforehand. Likely survived, and they made it back to the shore, in Roanapur.'
Garcia commented, “No wonder she hired them. If they could survive her, they stood a good chance of surviving Roberta.”
Lee responded, with slight excitement in her voice, “Exactly. Second. That alleyway was littered with bodies. The alleyway you confronted that special forces team in, only had you, that team, and the corpse in the trashcan. Besides, the fight you are talking about, is the one where Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, were tearing into the punks, and FARC members. Where you and Fabiola ran from, and into another alleyway, where you two were ambushed by another FARC team. You then fled into the building, opposite from where you came, in that alleyway.”
“A few seconds later, Roberta made her way down a hallway, right beside the room you where hiding in. Roberta then walked up some stairs, and looked out the window, with her compact mirror, on the other side of the building, into an alleyway, where she saw the special forces team. That alleyway was opposite from where you came from. Because, no dead bodies were shown in those scenes.”
“You likely got turned around in the building that you fled into. And after what you experienced in that building, you were not thinking clearly for a little while after that. But, you and those cared for made it out alive. And that is the important part.”
Garcia admitted, “You are right. And I was a little spaced out there, for a while. But, I recovered fairly quickly. Though, with your explanation, I am wondering.” Garcia looked over at Garibaldi, as she asked, “Who is this girl? Sherlock Holmes' little sister?”
Lee lightly giggled, as she thought, “I will take that as a compliment.'
Garcia looked at both Garibaldi and Lee, as she thought, 'Clearly this girl, Lee, did not just watch the series I was in. She studied it. And her detective skills are on par with Sherlock Holmes. No wonder Michael Garibaldi is with her. She is likely the one that helped Garibaldi escape, from wherever they had come from. I need to know more about her, and I need to see my own series. Though, I am sure it will be emotionally painful for me to watch.'
Garibaldi looked up at Garcia's face. She shrugged her right shoulder, as she casually answered, “I am starting to wonder that, myself.”
Lee commented, “I just have a good eye for the details.”
Lee saw the two other girls look towards her, more intensely. Lee quickly realized that they were looking passed her. She inquired, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Let me guess. Right behind me, there is a heavy set, middle-aged, chinese man, whom is wearing an olive drab Mao suit and pants, along with shoes, and a black newsboy cap, on his head, that has an upright yellow five pointed star on the front of it?”
Garibaldi complimented, “Damn. You're good.”
Meanwhile, Garcia stood up, in response to the presence of the stranger.
Lee cracked a smile, with her lips, as she responded, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Relax. It is just the Jusenkyo guide to these cursed springs. And please let me do the talking.” She thought, 'He likely heard Garibaldi's scream reverberate throughout the valley. And he has probably heard that type of scream enough times to know what it means.'
Garcia said, “Go ahead.”
Garibaldi stated, “Yes. Go ahead. Because I wouldn't know where to begin.”
Lee smile widened a bit, in response to the other two girls' statements. She thought, 'All too easy.'
Lee turned around. She saw the chinese man was six feet from her. She continued smiling, in a warm manner, as she said, in chinese, “Hello. First, we know of the springs, and how they work. The reason two of us are cursed is because we had to jump into the spring of drowned girl, to save the third.”
The guide responded, in chinese, “Let me guess. The blond?”
Lee inquired, “Yes. I am correct in assuming you have already guessed that I, and the younger girl with me are older men? And that older men and women that are cursed from the spring of drowned girl, physically become very young girls?”
The guide said, “Yes. Around six years old, to be exact.”
Lee thought, 'So, I was right. While the instant girl powder made me a girl in her late teens, this springs made me, and Garibaldi, around six years old.'
Lee then turned to looked at the Garibaldi, and Garcia, as she thought, 'Also, now that I get a better little look at Garcia, it appears that Garcia is around sixteen, or seventeen... Seventeen and a half... Maybe.'
'That makes sense timeline way. Garcia was between twelve to thirteen during the Black Lagoon series. So, a few years for book one to happen. And few years for book two to get started and going to the point that Roberta and Fabiola went on their adventure, and Garcia went on his adventure. Garcia is not eighteen yet, considering I mentioned his eightieth birthday, after he was cursed. And that is going to be a fun time for all three of them. That being Garcia, Roberta, and Fabiola.'
'And since she, as a he, was around that age, just like Ranma, the age in both her gender forms are parallel. That is both good and bad, depending on how one looks at it. Still, we are going to need this man's help, for the next part of my plan to work.'
Meanwhile, the guide noticed Lee's ring on her right forth finger, though he did not say anything on the matter.
Lee looked back over at the guide, as the guide looked back down at Lee's face. Lee stated, “We are going to need some help, and a guide. But, I do not believe we have much to trade.”
The guide said, “Not to worry. Half the fun of this job is meeting interesting people. Such as yourselves.”
Lee replied, “Thank you?” She mentally added, 'That makes since, considering the guide helped, or more aptly, will help Ranma and Genma. And Genma is the type of person that is just as likely to steal from someone, as pay them for a service.'
The guide stated, “Happy to assist.”
Lee inquired, “By the way, do you know english? Or, spanish?” She thought, 'I am sure he knows japanese, considering Genma and Ranma don't know a word of chinese. Which got them into their mess in the first place.'
The guide answered, “I know enough english to understand what is being told to me. And I can speak some of it. But, I do not know spanish.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee took a few steps to her right. She then turned to the others, to allow herself to see the three other individuals, at once. She answered, in english, “The guide will help us. Also, he knows enough english to understand you. But, he does not know spanish.”
Garcia said, “That will be fine.” She mentally added, 'And I do know chinese. And a few other languages. Besides spanish, and english. Not that I am going to let you know this, Lee. Though, I will let Garibaldi know, later.'
'And Lee, it is interesting that you have no way to pay the guide. Which is not surprising. Given you have been acting, it is likely you were planning to rely on Garibaldi, and his wealth... Well, her wealth, to see you through. Though, that seems not to be the case, right now.'
Garcia had her right hand, by her right side, across the right side pocket of his blue denim jacket, as she felt the items in that pocket, which she was checking for. She continued her thoughts, 'And at least I still have my gold coins. And my small pistol. Not that I am going to say anything about my coins, nor weapon, until I get to know you and Garibaldi a little better.'
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as she commented, “And Garibaldi, these forms are around six years old.”
Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as she responded, “I figured that out already.” She thought, 'Though, it is not to have that confirmed by an expert.'
The guide said, in slightly broken english, “Please, come to home. For help.”
The three girls turned back to look at the Jusenkyo guide.
Garibaldi said, “Okay.”
Garcia commented, “Just lead the way.”
Lee stated, in chinese, “I need a minute to gather my belongings.”
The Guide replied, in chinese, “No problem.”
Lee turned around. She then briskly walked away from the group, and over to her pile of clothing.
When Lee reached her piled of clothing, she kept her back facing the other three people there, to block their view of what she was doing.
Lee then took of her wet t-shirt and underwear. The three others were polite enough to overt their eyes.
Next, Lee put on the white, button up shirt. After she rolled up the long sleeves. She buttoned up the shirt, which when down to her knees.
After she finished with her shirt, she put on her pants She rolls up the leggings of the pants, to where they were right above her ankles.
Afterward, she buttoned the waist button, and zipped up her pants. But, she did not tuck in her shirt.
Lee's belt was still through the belt loops of the pants, around the pants waistline. She then pulled the belt tight around her waist, to measure her new, much smaller waist size. She then kept track of that place on her belt.
She reached down, and pulled out her knife, and notch a new hole at that place on her belt. She then sheathed her knife.
Lee then slid the belt through the belt buckle and pants loops, until she reached the other end, where the new notch was and buckled the belt there. Afterward, she looped the slack of the belt though the pants looked.
Next, Lee put on her socks, to protect her feet. But, she found that her shoes were way to big for her now much smaller feet. So, for the moment, she let her shoes be.
After that, She even checked and found that the wrist strap on her watch now to big for her hand. Though, Lee considered that a minor inconvenience.
Lee then gathered her items, including her wrist watch, reality device, and lighter. She put the items into the front pockets of her pants. She then tucked the sheath of her combat knife into the back of her pant, under her shirt. Which not go unnoticed by the others.
She then went over and picked up her wet t-shirt, and stuffed her shoes, and underwear into it.
She arranged the holes of her shirt, to where she gripped it by all four openings at once, with her right hand. The waist, neck, and both arm holes.
She then picked up her coat with he left hand.
She turned and briskly walked back to where Garcia, Garibaldi, and the guide were standing.
As she approached the three other individuals, Lee saw the other three people were looking at her.
When Lee reached them, she held out her coat, toward Garibaldi, as she calming stated, in english, “Here, Garibaldi. You need to get out your wet clothing. And this coat should be a good substitute.”
“Now, please take off your clothing, and put this on. It will go down to your knees. And I know without underwear, it will be a bit drafty. Especially, while dealing with different parts down there. But, it will go to down to your knees, and keep you very warm. So, that is a small matter.”
“And don't worry about modesty. The guide raised a daughter. Garcia is going to need to get use to seeing those body parts on her. And I could care less.”
“Also, hand me your clothes. I will put all of our wet clothing into my shirt. I will carry them. Because I don't want to left a trail behind us.”
The guide thought, 'So, this person knows I have a daughter. That is not surprising, given that is not a secret, for those that take the time to learn about these springs, and those that watch over the springs.'
Garcia thought, 'So, they are still worried about someone finding them. I wonder if it is my friends are after her. My friends could even be from the future, like them. With them more likely after Lee, for her connection to Chang and his Tower. With Garibaldi's somehow getting mixed up in this, by accident. That that would make sense. And not leaving anything behind, would be a proper precaution, from being tracked.'
'Though, if it is Roberta, then Lee is doomed. And given what she already admitted to know, she liked already realizes that.'
Lee turned to Garcia, as she said, “I apologize. But, I don't have any dry clothing left that could help you.”
Garcia turned to Lee, as she thought, 'I will give you credit, Lee. At least, you are being nice. And what you are doing for Garibaldi. And what you said to me. Is earning you a few points with me.
Garcia responded, in a kind tone of voice, “It is okay. It is the thought that counts.” She thought, 'And at least Lee is thoughtful enough to help Garibaldi.'
Garibaldi thought, 'She is right. And she is using Lee's words. Like Lee used my words. I need to get out of these wet clothes. And this was one of my favorite suits. Well, at least the upper half of my suit. Which no know longer fits, at the moment. But, neither does this coat. Though, at least the coat is dry.' She took the coat from Lee's left hand, and gently set it on the ground.
Lee, Garcia, and the guide, then politely overted their eyes, away from Garibaldi, as she quickly changed out of her wet clothing, and put on the coat. Though, she left her socks on to protect her feet from the ground.
She then picked up the coat, and put it on. Next, she rolled up the sleeves of the coat.
Garibaldi also took the hologram device that was loosely on the wrist she had on it, and she stuck into her pocket. She thought, 'I will keep this. I think might need it, later'
Next, Garibaldi buttoned up the coat, from the buttons on the bottom of the coat, that were in front of her her upper legs. Fortunately, the buttons allow the entire coat to enclose her body, from her chest, down to her knees.
Garibaldi was finished dressing, as much as she could, with her limited selection. She turned to the three other individuals. She calmly said, “You can look now.”
As the other three people turned to look at her, she bent down and picked up her wet clothing.
Lee realized what Garibaldi was doing, as she opened up the bottom of her wet shirt, to stuff those clothes into it, next her own belongings that were inside the shirt.
As soon as the two young girls were finished, Lee held her wet t-shirt closed completely close, again. Lee then turned to the guide, as she stated, in english, “I believe we are ready to go.”
The guide turned to Garcia and Garibaldi, whom both nodded in agreement, towards him.
The guide looked at all three girls, as he calmly stated, in english, “This way to my home.”
The guide then started calmly walking in a direction that was to the north of the cursed springs.
As Lee, Garibaldi, and Garcia, followed the guide, they soon noticed that the guide was walking on a path, that ran parallel with the magical pools of water, though the path was soon over a hundred feet from the pools. With them slowing going further from the pools, as they continued on their current path.
The three girls did not say anything, as they casually followed behind the Jusenkyo guide. They walked beside each other, while they kept a distance of about ten feet behind the guide.
Garcia was in the middle, with Garibaldi was to her left, and Lee to her right.
They then made the short journey to the Jusenkyo guide's home.
(_)
Ten minutes later, they reached the guide's home.
The three girls followed the guide to the front door to the guide's home.
While the home was not large, it was not too small, either.
The guide used a key and unlocked the door. The guide then opened the door, and walked in, the three girls followed inside, with Lee being last.
After Lee walked inside, she gently shut the door behind her.
Lee looked around, at the moderate sized room, with tables, chairs, shelves with books, and a couch. She thought, 'This must be his living room. While simple, it is clean, and well kept. Now, to deal with the immediate problems. Such, as this shirt filled with clothing, and shoes that no longer fit us.'
She then walked over to a corner, and set the full shirt down.
As she leaned back up, she saw Garcia turn to looked at the guide.
Garcia said, in english, “Thank you very much, for your hospitality.”
The guide turned around to face them, as he cracked a grin. He replied, in english, “It is my job. But, you're welcome. And would you care for some hot water?”
Lee thought, 'I best take over from here.' She politely requested, in english, “Not at the moment. Though, if you could provide some clothing. That will be nice. We are not picky.”
The guide turned to Lee. He said, in chinese, “Fortunately, I kept some of my daughter's older, smaller clothing. But, your blond friend it to big for her current clothing. I will see what I can find some of my own older clothing for her. When I was young, and much slimmer. And I believe I can get you, and your brown haired friend, something for your feet.”
Lee replied, in chinese, “Whatever you can provide, will we would be most grateful for.”
The guide just smiled, as he thought, 'I thought as much.' He then turned, and walked deeper into his home.
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as she asked, “Where is he going?”
Lee turned to Garibaldi, as she answered, in english, “He has gone to see if he find some clothing, and shoes, for us.”
Garcia flatly commented, “I really don't want to wear some hand me downs.”
Garibaldi looked up at Garcia, as she stated, “Beggars cannot be choosers.”
Garcia looked at Garibaldi, as she commented, “Actually, my clothing is over halfway dry. And my clothing still somewhat fits me. As such, I think I will keep my clothing on.” Garcia thought, 'It is at least my clothing.'
Garibaldi said, “Okay. I wish I could do the same.”
Garcia shrugged, as she replied, “I know. Still...” She turned to Lee, as she asked, “Lee, why did you not want the guide to bring us hot water, yet? I would think you would at least want us to change back into guys.”
Lee turned to Garcia, as she calmly stated, “Bad idea. First of all. We have no readily available supply of hot water. And you will likely get hit with cold water by the end of the day. So, you might as well stay as girls.”
Garibaldi looked at Lee, as Garibaldi begrudgingly agreed, “Lee, has a point.”
Garcia said, in a slightly embarrassed tone of voice, “Still... I need to pee.”
Lee picked up on this emotional discomfort in Garcia's voice, as she plainly stated, “There is nothing to be embarrassed about. You need to know how to do this. And the best way want to know, is to ask. And I will tell you how.”
Garibaldi thought, 'And how would you know. Though, I am kind of afraid to ask. And I honestly, don't want to know.'
Lee went onto say, “After you get some fresh clothes, and are dry. Get a paper tissue. Walk outside. Find a private place, that is not windy. Drop your pants, and underwear, to your knees. Do a squat, with nothing between the bottom of your crotch and butt, and the ground. Then, relax the same muscles you do as a guy to pee. When you are finished peeing. Use the tissue to either dap, or wipe front to back, at the wet part of your crotch. Do not wipe back to front, because a habit like that, in the long run, can lead to an infection down there. You don't want that. And I am not sure how such an infection will translate when you change back into a guy.”
Lee thought, 'Even Natsuru's book was kind of vague on the subject. I think because, wisely, none of them wanted to find out.'
Lee continued, “Still, when you are dry down there. Stand up, and pull back up your pants. Discard the tissue, and you are done.”
Lee continued, “Keep in mind that pee is sterile. So, you really don't need to worry about washing your hands.”
“And note, that for a girl, when peeing outside. There is not such thing as down wind. If there is a wind, you will get more wet, if you don't find somewhere to squat that breaks the wind for you.”
Garcia said to Lee, in a suspicious tone of voice, “You clearly know a lot about this subject?”
Lee smirked, as she commented, “I know a lot about everything.”
Garibaldi said, “Well, it sounds about right. I do vaguely remember my wife saying something like that to our daughter, when she was a toddler and we were potty training her.” She thought, 'And Lee is right. That is the kind of information we both now need to know.'
Lee admitted, “Also, I admit that I need to test some hot water on myself. So, I can check to see if I have locked myself in this female.”
Garcia asked, with slight disbelief in her tone of voice, “You locked yourself? Why would you do something like that?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. I liked myself, with my ring, on my right ring finger. Long story short, I was dying of cancer, but this female form is healthy. So, as long as I am locked, I get to live.”
Garcia conceded, “I guess that is understandable.”
Lee said, “Thank you for being considerate, and understanding.”
Garcia smiled in response. She then questioned, “Since, you are so knowledgeable. Do you think I need to wear a bra?”
Lee answered, “Unless the jiggling of your breasts causes your chest, or breasts, to hurt when you run, or move around. Or, there is soreness in that location afterward. Then, the answer is, no. You don't. And it will be a long while before you need to worry about sagging issues.”
“Besides, I doubt you are going to be able to get a bra from the guide. At this point in time, the man's daughter is still fairly young. To the point that you are to big for her daughter’s clothing. He is seeing if anything of his own older clothing may fit you.”
“Also, there would be no point in trying on another woman's bra. Because your breast size, and the guide's daughter’s breast size would be different. A woman's bra size is unique. No two breast sizes are the same size. And the adjustments and fittings for a bra have to be specific for each woman, for said woman to be conformable in wearing her bra. That is one of the reasons why bras tend to be expensive.”
Garcia replied, “Oh...” She thought, 'I guess I won't have to worry about that, right now.
And I really don't know why Lee would learn such information far in advance of being cursed. Unless, her reasons for being cursed were more than just saving me, and curing herself of her cancer. Which is very likely.'
Lee stated, “My best suggestion is to wait on getting a bra until you get back home. Then, have Roberta and Fabiola go shopping with you. They can help pick out some bras for you.”
“And let us be honest. Roberta has a fairly large set of breasts of her own. And I even got a good look at Fabiola, when I met her recently. As an adult. She is not that far behind Roberta, in that department. They would know a thing, or two, about bras.”
Garcia could not help be crack a lecherous smile, which looked cut on her female face, as she agreed, “You would be correct about that.” She thought, 'And so, my friends really are after you. At this point, I am surprised you are not more worried about your situation... Unless by saving me, you plan for me to help you out of your mess. I just might. Depending what I learn about you. Though, I doubt you realized I was hear at the time. Still, I don't want you know that I realize any of this.'
Lee returned Garcia's smile, as she thought, 'Garcia is many things. But, even as a she. She is still a teenage... And now to sweeten her mood some...' Lee commented, “And given how kind those two can be to their friends, when they are not on the warpath, I am sure you will have a great time.”
Garibaldi chucked a little at Lee's comment, as she thought, 'Those two taking Garcia shopping for bras, and other unmentionables. Even if they didn't tease Garcia, that would make for a hilarious scene to read...' Her chuckling died in her throat, as she continued her thought, 'Oh... So, that is how easy it is to think of ways of playing with people's lives. No wonder Lee was able to dig herself into such a deep hole, and not even realize it... And I must become more respectful towards the characters in fiction that I am entertained by. Because, I am beginning to realize I am in the same boat as they are.'
Garibaldi then suddenly when quiet. Though, neither of the other two girl present, noticed this.
Meanwhile, Garcia was silent as well, for a few seconds. Her smile then turned warm, towards Lee, as she stated, “That is a pretty good idea. We three would probably have fun doing that.”
Garibaldi reacted casually towards Garcia's reaction. While, Lee did not react at all.
Garcia happily thought, 'Roberta and Fabiola have always been nice. They would not make fun of me, while we shopped for such items. And that one night with Fabiola was... very pleasant. Not that we are ever going to breath a word of the night to anyone. And we did use condoms... So, no chances of any lasting problems...'
Garcia thoughts became more concerned, as she mentally realized, 'Wait a minute... The way Lee stated that... When she said. When they are not on the warpath... Meaning that they currently are on the warpath... So, I was right. Roberta and Fabiola are after her... She even stated that she recently met Fabiola... And I guess she was able to escape them... For now...'
'But, why are those two wonderful women after her?... Even with Chang's connection. Those two would not be so crazy about coming after her. To be honest, it sounds like Chang didn't do anything to Fabiola. He left me along. And he helped Roberta... Hold on... She said she was from the future... But, still why?... The only reason they would come after someone would be if Lee harmed anyone in my household... Such as myself... Such as me being cursed...'
'Somehow, Lee had a hand in me being cursed... Yet. She saved me. Maybe Lee did plan to be here, to save me. And that was not coincidence. She might have saved me, to help get Fabiola and Roberta back off on their revenge against her. Lee clearly is arrogant enough to try something like that.'
'Though, if they from the future, after Chang is defeated, how would Chang be able to come after Garibaldi?... Of course, time travel, across realities. Chang from my present is after Garibaldi. While Lee, from my future, was fleeing my friends, from the future, when Lee bumped into Garibaldi. And Lee decided to help Garibaldi, due to her own actions being partly responsible for why Chang is after Garibaldi in the first place.'
'But, if Roberta and Fabiola are after Lee, why hasn't she been captured, yet. I would likely tell them of what happen here. And that would surely tip them off as to who Lee is, and they would have already captured Lee?... Unless, I decided not to tell them anything... But, I would have to have a very good reason for not telling them... Of course... To prevent a paradox.'
'I am coming to dislike time travel. Especially, when it is time travel that is applied to the multiverse, itself.'
'Still, I need to confirm all this with Garibaldi, before I decide what to do concerning Lee. And I cannot let Lee realize I know this about her.'
Garcia remained calm, as she patiently waited for the guide to return.
And from the looked Garcia saw in Lee's face, she could tell that Lee was none the wiser.
The three girls then remained silent for about a minute, until the guide returned to them.
As the guide walked into the living room, they saw he was carrying some folded clothing, and other items in his arms.
The guide moved to the couch, where he set the clothing down, and divided them up to three groups.
The guide then picked up one group of clothing, with a pair of small black slippers on top, and handed them to Garibaldi. The clothing comprised of a simple yellow short sleeved t-shirt, and black cloth pants, with a drawstring at the waistline. There was no underwear in the clothes.
Garibaldi took the clothing, as she said, “Thank you.” Then, not even caring, as she got of the Lee's coat, set it on a nearby chair. And she then took off her socks, and she quickly began putting on her new clothing.
Meanwhile, the guide intentionally ignored Garibaldi, as he turn back to the couch, picked up another set of clothing, with a small pair of black slippers, and handed the items to Lee. The clothing was like the clothing Garibaldi was handed, only different colors. The clothes comprised of a simple short sleeved red t-shirt, and a blue set of pants, with a drawstring at the waist.
Lee gently took the clothing, as she said, in chinese, “Thank you. And nice color selection.”
The guide replied, in chinese, “You're welcome.”
The guide then picked up the last set of clothing. Which was a large set of folded clothing, which he held out for Garcia to look at.
Garcia saw that the clothing was a purple shirt, black cloth pants, with a drawstring at the waist. Though, this was made for a man, whom was slimmer than the guide currently was.
Garcia thought, 'I guess the guide was slimmer in his youth. And of course he does not have a bra for me. Just as Lee had predicted. Still, I am going to keep my current clothing on. As it is mostly dry. Though, I might as well be polite about this.'
Garcia said, in a kind tone of voice, “Thank you for the offer. But, I think I will keep what I have on.”
The guide smiled at Garcia, as he stated, in english, “No worries, sir. We all prefer to wear our own clothing, and not the clothing of others.”
Garcia let out a soft laughed. She returned the guide's smile, as she replied, “I know what you mean.”
The guide the put that clothing back on his couch.
Nearby, Lee thought, 'I might as well do as Garibaldi did, and just change out of this clothing. Still, while I can do with out the underwear, the lack of socks concern me. Also, how are my socks holding up?'
Lee looked down at the soles of her socks. After checking the bottoms of both her feet, she saw there were more holes than socks on the soles of her feet.
With both feet planted on the floor, Lee thought, 'The dirt and rocks along the path tore into my socks. But, better the socks, than my feet. Though, I might as well lose them.'
Lee began by taking off her socks. As she did so, from corner of her eye, she saw that Garibaldi had just finished putting on her yellow t-shirt, with her just finish putting on her pants, trying the drawstring on them, and tucking in her shirt. She then saw Garibaldi has already taken off her socks, which were on the floor, by her. And she about to put on her pair of slippers.
Lee mentally reflected, 'I guess Garibaldi has the same problem. Still, I just hope the clothing fits. Especially the shoes. There is nothing worse than ill fitting shoes.'
Lee quickly undressed, and she set her discarded clothing on a nearby chair. While Lee did so, the other three in the room, noticed Lee set her combat knife onto the top of her clothing pile. Though, no one said anything about her knife.
Lee then slipped on her new red t-shirt, and blue pants. She adjusted the drawstring, and tied it, to where her pants would not slip off. She also kept her shirt untucked. Next, she slipped her feet into the black slippers, and took a few steps with them on.
Lee thought, 'Okay. The clothing, and shoes are a little loose. But, not to loose. And the interior lining of the slippers seem to be made for a someone use without socks, nor stockings.'
As this went on, Garibaldi soon finished putting on her new slippers. She found that her new clothing and new slipper fit okay. When Garibaldi was finished getting dressed, she dug out her hologram device, from a pocket in Lee's coat, and she put it in a pocket in her new pants.
Lee noticed that Garibaldi had turned to her coat, and she had pulled her hologram device, from a coat pocket. Garibaldi's then stuff the device into the front right pants pocket, of the black pants that Garibaldi wore.
Lee thought, “So, she did not loose the hologram device. Good. Still, I need to do the same as her.”
Lee then turned to her pile of clothing, and pulled put her belongings, such as her lighter, wrist watch, and reality device. She put them in the side pockets of her pants. She then stuffed the sheath in the back of her pants, under her shirt. As she had done before.
When Lee was finished, she turned to Garibaldi as she asked, in english, “How do the not clothes fit?”
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as she answered, “The clothing and shoes are a little loose, but I can live with it. How about yourself?”
Lee stated, “About the same.”
Garibaldi looked down at herself, as she commented, “At least this clothing is very utilitarian. I can live with wearing it.”
Lee smiled, as she replied, “I am glad to hear it.” She thought, 'I kind of like this style, myself.'
Lee looked over at the guide, whom was looking back at her. She continued smiling, as she mentally reflected, 'Now, to thank our host.'
Lee continued to smile, as she stated, in chinese, “Thank you for the clothing, and shoes. They fit fine, and we are happy that you could provide these items for us.”
The guide replied, in chinese, “You're welcome.”
Lee thought, 'I need to ask if his daughter, Plum, is here? Though, I have to be mindful to continue to not mention, Plum, by name. And Plum's mother is never mentioned. So, I will not even bring up the subject of Plum's mother.'
Lee asked, in chinese, “Please, pardon me for asking. You said you got you clothing from your daughter. Is you daughter here?”
The guide calmly answered, “No. She is with some of her friends, at their home.”
Lee said, “That is nice.”
The guide agreed, “Yes. It is.”
Garcia thought, 'Even though I did not take the guide up on his offer of clothing. We still need to repay this man, for all he had done for us. And I believe I am the only one with anything of value, to give him.' She then used her right to reach into her right side jacket pocket.
After which, Garcia walked up to the guide, as she said, “For your help.”
As the guide look over at Garcia, the teenage girl used her left hand to gently grip, the guides left open hand, and bring it up. She turned the guide's left hand face the palm upward.
Garcia used her right hand hand to palmed a gold coin she had, into the guide's left hand.
As Garcia let go of the guide's left hand, the guide looked down at the gold coin in his left hand. The guide smiled, as he quickly pocket it.
The man turned to look at all three of the girls.
The guide happily said, in broken english, “Thank you very much, honor customers.” He thought, 'Now, this is a payment worth taking.'
Lee noticed what Garcia did for the guide. She thought, 'So, Garcia has some gold coins. That is nice. And now that payment is no longer an issue, we can move forward. Still, I would be surprised if most of the guides pay comes from the government. With him acting as a park ranger of sorts for the Jusenkyo area.'
'Speaking of which. I guess now is the best time to request this. I did need to do this, before I leave this place. And there is no time like this present.'
Lee turned to guide, as she requested, in chinese “I could use some hot water, and some cold water, now. I need to test out something. And do not worry, I will disrobe, before I do so. Though, could you please show me to your bathroom. I will like to do my test there.”
The guide thought, 'If what I suspect is true, then I need to speak with the others. But, I first need to make sure.' He said, “That will be fine. This way.”
Lee turned to Garcia and Garibaldi, as she said, in english, “I will be back in five to ten minutes.”
Garibaldi deadpanned, “Don't worry. We will be waiting here.” She mentally added, 'Considering you have the reality device. It is not like we are going anywhere without you.'
Lee ignored Garibaldi's sarcasm. She looked over at the guide, as the guide then lead Lee though a hallway, and to the interior bathroom of the home.
As Lee walked inside the bathroom, the guide turned to her, while stating, in chinese, “The hot water heater is currently turned off. You can get cold water from the faucet. And it will only take a few minutes for me to warm your water, in the kitchen. And bring it to you. I will be back soon.”
Lee simply nodded once in acknowledgment in what the guide had said.
The guide turned, and left Lee in the bathroom, with the door open.
Lee looked around and saw that it was a simple bathroom, with the floor level, eastern style toilet. With a roll of toilet paper attached to a toilet paper holder, on the wall, beside the toilet. There was a sink, with a faucet, and bar of soap on it. Along with a mirror on top of the sink. Nearby was a tub, with a faucet. And there was a closet, in the room, with the small door open to it, to reveal stacks towels, and other bathroom supplies.
Lee thought, 'This is not a bad set up. Considering this place is so far out in the boonies. Now, to wait for a my water.'
(_)
Five minutes later, the guide walked back to the bathroom, with a kettle full of water.
The guide held the kettle of water by the handle, and he set it beside Lee, on the floor.
The guide then looked over at Lee, as he said, in chinese, “Not to worry. It is not boiling. It is just warm enough to reverse the curse.”
Lee replied, in chinese, “Thank you.”
The guide inquired, “Why do you want to change back, considering you have no clothing for your male form?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell him.' Lee held up her right hand, for the guide to see, as she calmly said, “Actually, I believe the ring on my right forth finger is magical. And the ring on my finger has locked my curse. But, do not worry. I intentionally put this ring on, knowing what the ring might do. I just wanted to test to see if that was the case. Or not.” She then dropped her hand back to her side.
The guide asked, in a confused tone of voice, “But sir. Why did you do such a thing?” He thought, 'It might actually be one of those rings.'
Lee flatly answered, “It is a very long, and personal story. I will let you know, if I am locked, in a minute.”
The guide just nodded, and shut the door, to the bathroom, with him waiting outside, behind the door.
Lee quickly disrobed, and set the pile of her clothing to the side. She then went to get one of the towels, and set it by her clothing pile. Afterward, she picked up the kettle by the handle, with her right hand, and she walked over to the tub.
Lee poured a bit of water onto her left hand, and found she that while it was very warm, it was not scalding hot.
Next, she leaned her head over the bathtub, and poured the hot water over her head, with the water draining out of the tub.
Lee immediately noticed that she had not changed in size.
As she set the kettle down, on the floor, beside her, she looked down at her body, to see that she was still had the body of a young girl.
Lee thought, 'Guess I am stuck like this... Oh well. I was planning this from the start. So, no worries there. Now, to dry off, and get dressed.'
Lee walked over and grabbed herself a towel. With only her head wet, it took her less than a minute to dry off. She then set her towel on the lip of the tub.
Next, she grabbed her clothing, and she quickly got dressed. When she finished getting dressed, she slipped her feet into the black slippers.
Given how short she was, her head did not clear the sink, so she could not look in the mirror. Nor, did she have her comb with her. So instead, Lee did her best to part her hair, and set it, with her hands.
After that, she walked to the door, turned the knob, and found the guide there, waiting for her.
The guide looked down at her, as he asked, “So, are you locked in that form.”
Lee looked up at the guide's face, as she answered, “Yes. Now, let's go check on the others.”
The guide did not respond, as he turned and let her back to his living room.
While walking, the guide thought, 'So, it is one of those rings. I am going to have to tell them about this girl, and that ring.'
A few seconds later, they reached the living room. As they came to a stop, Garcia, and Garibaldi turned to them.
Garibaldi asked, “So, are you now locked in that form?”
Lee turned to the two other girls, as she answered, in a casual tone of voice, in english, “Yes. I'm locked. Now, let's get out of here.” She turned to the guide, as she requested, in english, “Will you please take us to the amazon village.”
Garibaldi asked, “Why would we want to head there?”
Garcia agreed, “Yea. Given that whole kiss of death, and kiss of marriage thing for outsiders, I would think we would want to avoid that place.”
The guide listened to them. He thought, 'So, they know about those rules. Good. That will save them a whole lot of trouble.'
Lee looked over at the two girls. She smirked, as she stated, “Those after us would be crazy to follow us.”
Garibaldi conceded, “Good point.
Meanwhile, Garcia did not show it on the outside, as she thought, in anger, 'So, you are planning on trying to get Roberta and Fabiola in trouble with the amazons. Through use of the amazon laws for outsiders. That pisses me off.'
'And I will admit that given some of the abilities and powers of the strong amazon women there, they would be a threat to my friends. Still, two can play at that game. I may not tell Roberta and Fabiola about what happened here. So as to prevent a paradox. But, I can subtly warn them in other ways. Such as when I get back home, I will use my curse an excuse to show Robert and Fabiola the Ranma Half series. Both the anime and manga.'
'That will be a good way to subtly warn them. And being forewarned is being forearmed.'
'And in all honesty. They might actually enjoy that series. It is lighthearted series, for the most part. Along with being absolutely hilarious.'
'Then, when they come here, looking for Lee. They will be forewarned of the knowledge and dangers here. And not just of the amazons, but Jusenkyo, and other possible threats, in this area, to avoid.'
The guide said, in english, “Honored sirs. I would be more than happy to take you there.” He thought, 'It save me a trip there, by myself. And they will be able to see this girl, and that ring, for themselves.”
Garcia asked, “How long will it take?”
The guide answered, “A little over an hour.”
Garcia halfheartedly said, “Fine. Lead the way.” She thought, 'Now that I think about it. I believe it is best that we get moving. There is a risk, that if I meet this Roberta and Fabiola, of my future, it might cause a paradox. Or, at the very least, the meeting will raise questions from them that I am not ready to answer, just yet. Plus, I don't want to risk us imposing anymore on the hospitality of this kind man.'
'Still, I got to pee. But, I will just pee, sometime, while we are making our way to the amazon village.'
As they headed for the door, Garcia saw an open box of paper tissues. Garcia slowed down, so she would be last to the door. Then, with the backs of the others turned to her, she grabbed a couple of the paper tissues, and she pocketed them.
A few seconds later, Garcia rejoined the others at the front door of the guide's home.
Lee was in front. As she reached the door, she gently opened to door, and walked outside, first. Garibaldi followed right behind Lee. Then, the guide. And finally Garcia.
Once outside, the three girls moved away from the door. They stood beside each other, as the guide then turned and shut the door behind him.
After the guide used a key to lock it. After he pocketed his key, he turned around to face the three girls. He said, in english, “This way.”
He then turned, and started walking in a direction that went further away from the cursed springs.
The three girls soon followed behind him.
(_)
A little over an hour later, Lee, Garcia and Garibaldi, has been following the guide. As the guide lead them through arch of a gate, they saw they had now entered a small village. The walls that the gate was attached to were made of stones that were painted white. With the stone walls being around ten feet high.
The three girls walked beside each other, as the followed behind the guide, into the small village.
Lee took note of her surroundings, as they came up to, and pass through one of the gates, into the amazon village.
Lee saw that the arch of the gate itself was a basic wood roof, with a pitch of an equilateral triangle. With the roof line ran parallel with the white stone wall. The sides of the arch was wood that was panted red, with the roof of the archway painted brown. And the ridge and eaves the roof of the arch painted green.
Lee thought, “The size of the gate entry under the arch is not that large. I would estimate that the interior of the rectangular archway is around ten feet high, six feet in depth, and sixteen feet wide. Which would allow someone to easily drive a care through. But, no where near the size to allow a large, semi-tractor-trailer truck to pass through.'
Lee also noticed that there were two, open doors to the interior sides of gate. The hinges of the door were located in the center of the interior sides of the arch. The doors were made of a lattice work of iron bars, with a large latches at the ends that attached together went closed. And the doors swung inward, towards the village, so the hinges of the doors would not be damaged from the outside, when closed and locked.
As they continued walking, further into the village, Lee looked around, while she thought, “So, this is the amazon village. It looks nice.'
Lee saw that the buildings in the village were made of wood, and paint white white on the sides, and brown on the roofs. The homes were also moderately large. With some of the buildings being two, or three, stories high.
Lee also saw that around her, and in the far distance, that the village was enclosed on all sides. Either by the painted white stone walls, or, natural rock walls, that acted as barriers to the outside world.
With the outer stone wall fence of chinese amazon village to to run up, flush, against the natural rock walls.
Throughout the village, Lee also saw women, men, and children, in casual clothing for the time, and area, going about their daily business.
A few of the villagers had turned to look at her, the guide, Garcia, and Garibaldi, for a few seconds, before going back to what they were doing.
Lee happily thought, 'Good. We are not attracting too much attention. And soon, I will get Garcia and Garibaldi, to walk with me, and duck behind a building, out of sight. Then, we will leave this reality, for another reality. Though, I still trying to decide where. Perhaps, I will let Garibaldi and Garcia make some suggestions. They are both intelligent, savvy people.'
Lee then saw, in the distance, a group of four large, vertical log poles, planted in the ground. The four vertical logs were attached by ropes, to a large, long horizontally placed log, which was suspended in the air.
Lee continued her thoughts, 'So, that is where the amazon's hold their annual martial arts contest. With the winner getting to eat a feast, prepared for them, in advance of their victory. And this is where Ranma got himself. Well at the time, herself. Into trouble with Shampoo. Ranma's stomach got him, or her, into a whole lot of trouble, during the run of her series. And when it wasn't Ranma's stomach that got him, or her, into trouble, it was Genma's stomach. And Genma did lead a hand in eating some of that feast, without permission.'
'That being said. Though, since this is the past. I need to make sure to avoid the elders. Especially, Cologne. That old, wise woman is way too sharp for us to risk meeting. She will pick up on something being off about us, almost immediately.'
Then, Garibaldi broke Lee's train of thought, as she stating, “Remember. No fighting.”
Lee halfheartedly said, “Amen to that.”
Garcia replied, “I was never one for fighting, if I can avoid it.” She mentally added, 'I have always preferred guile over violence. That is probably why Roberta and Fabiola put up with me.'
Lee thought, 'I might as well ask them where they want to go. But first, I need to know if they are ready to go.' Lee asked, “So, are you to still up for traveling? Or, are you too tired, after that walk?”
Garcia stated, “I am not tired.”
Garibaldi said, “As much as I hate to admit it. I have more energy now, than I have had in years.”
Lee replied, “Good.” She mentally reflect, 'Then, we won't have to stop here, for either of you two to rest, for a little while.'
Garcia asked, “Do you think it would be a good idea to resupply here?”
Lee answered, “No. For obvious reasons. We can resupply after the jump.” She thought, 'The longer we stay here, the more trouble we will have with the locals here.'
Garibaldi said, “I am with Lee on this.”
Garcia responded, “I have to agree with you. Though, I wanted to check with you first.” She thought, 'While I may not like you, Lee. You are clearly knowledgeable on such matters. And getting a second opinion never hurts.'
Lee replied, “No problem.”
A second later, the guide came to a stop, in the middle of a clearing, in the village. With the three girls immediately stopping behind the guide.
The guide had stopped due to him seeing a couple of middle-aged amazon women, in great shape, standing nearby, as they faced each other, while talking to one another. One woman had brown hair, the other woman had dark blue hair.
As the guide looked at the women, he thought, 'Now is my chance to inform them about this black haired young girl, and her ring.'
The guide then turned around to face the three girls, as he said, in english, “Good luck to you, sirs. I hope you have pleasant journeys. But, business to conduct with locals. And I must then return home.”
Lee kindly said, “Thank you for your help.”
Garibaldi looked at the guide. She used her right hand to lightly pull at the top of her shirt, as she commented, “Yea. The clothes are not that bad. And have a save trip home.” She then dropped her right hand to her waist.
Garcia said, “It was nice to meet you. And have nice day, and a safe trip home.”
The guide said, “Thank you. To you three, as well.” He then turned, and calmly walked away from the three girls, and towards two amazon women. The older amazon had dark blue hair, and the other amazon had brown hair. Both of them wore similar amazon clothing styles, in different color combinations. With the local amazon clothing style being shirt, pants, and slippers.
The guide quickly looked behind him for a second, before looking back in front of himself. He saw the three girls he had just left did not seem to mind what he was currently heading towards the amazon women.
The guide thought, 'Good. They are no alarmed by my actions. And I plan to be gone from here, before any problems can occur.'
When the guide reached the two women, the two women turned to him, as the older woman, the one with dark blue hair, asked, in a kind tone of voice, in chinese, “What do you need guide?”
The guide answered, in chinese, “I have just brought a few people that have been cursed by the springs. They are under the girl curse. Two older men, and one teenage boy. They all speak english. And I believe the black haired girl has one of your rings. And that she knowingly used it to lock herself in her new, young, female form.”
Both women each raised an eyebrow, as the dark blue haired amazon replied, “Really? Please, tell us more.”
The guide then did as requested, and he told the two women his tale of meeting the three girls, just outside of Jusenkyo.
(_)
Meanwhile, among the group of three girls, Garibaldi then commented, “You know what. We forget to ask his name.”
Lee commented, “If he had wanted us to know his name, he would of told us.” She thought, 'And to my knowledge, that man was not given a formal name. Though, give how crazy his life likely is. He probably does not share his name with strangers. And the only reasons we know his daughter's name is Plum. Because, when the guide was kidnapped. She went to Ranma for help, and she introduced herself to Ranma and Ranma's friends.'
Garcia said,“Yes. Let us not look a gift horse in the mouth.”
Garibaldi stated, “When you put it like that, I see your point.”
Lee felt pressure building in her bladder. She turned to Garcia and Garibaldi, as she said, “I apologize for this. But, I now have pee.” She looked around, and she saw a set of outhouses, several feet away, to her left. She used her left hand to point at them, as she continued, “And I will be heading there. I will be back a minute. Then, we will find a place in private to leave.” She then dropped her hand back to her side.
Garcia replied, “Take your time.'
Garcia thought, 'I am glad I went on our way over here. It was different. But, not to much trouble. And I did need those tissues. But, I did as you told me to, and everything was fine. And since you and the others were nice enough to wait for me, so I will wait for you.'
Garibaldi said, “No problem. We will be waiting for you, right here.” She thought, 'I guess is makes sense she would want to leave, as soon as possible. But, bodily functions take priority to traveling... I made sure I didn't need to go. At least for a while. Before I logged some flight time hours in a Star Fury, during my days with Earthforce. And going before one leaves is the best, and least embarrassing option there is.'
Lee turned, and she walked away from the two other girls, at a hurried pace, towards the outhouses.
Garibaldi, and Garcia watched Lee get of earshot, and enter an outhouse, with the door shutting behind the black haired girl.
Garcia thought, 'So, Lee is planning on us leaving as soon as she gets back. Now, is my chance, to speak with Garibaldi. I don't know when we might get another chance to talk, without Lee, nearby.' She turned to Garibaldi, and she looked down at Garibaldi head. She asked, in a gentle tone of voice, “Garibaldi, I have a few questions for you?”
Garibaldi turned to Garcia, and looked up at the blond girl's face. She shrugged her right shoulder, as she casually said, “Sure. Go ahead.”
Garcia inquired, in a direct, even tone of voice, “How is Lee responsible in connection to me being cursed? Along with this, what are her connections to Chang, and his organization? Whom have harmed my friends, and is after you. And who exactly is after her? And do they people after her, include my friends, Roberta and Fabiola?”
Garibaldi grinned wickedly, as she stated, “Oh. You figured that out on your own? I'm impressed.”
Garcia responded, “Yes. And thank you. That is why I waited until Lee was away to ask you for any details you can provide, on the matter.”
Garibaldi stated, “Hey. It is completely reasonable that you don't trust, Lee. Neither do I. The only reason I have gone along with her schemes this far is that she has been helpful to me. Still, to answer your questions. You know how Lee said that her explanation for your questions would literally be a long story?”
Garcia replied, “Yes.”
Garibaldi calmly said, “Lee meant that literally. As in our problems with Chang are part of a long story, that Lee personally wrote.”
Garcia raised an eyebrow, as she calmly requested, with interest in her tone of voice, “Do tell.”
Over the next minute, Garibaldi explained the situation to Garcia, in a brief summary. As she did so, she watched as Garcia's face turned more grim by the second.
As Garibaldi finished, she offered, “I will tell you more, when we have more time. And more privacy.”
Garibaldi could tell that Garcia was holding back her rage, as she commented, in an even tone of voice, “I understand. And I will patiently await you full explanation.”
Garibaldi replied, “And I am more than happy to give it.'
Garibaldi mentally lamented, 'Damn. Lee told me something similar, when I started asking him, well now her, some question. I am starting to sound like Lee. That is not a good thing. Though, it does show that Lee is not so different than us. And that if things had been different. We might have ended up on a path similar to her own. That is why I changed my mind, and decided to go easy on her. That and the fact, she bailed my ass out, and she has tried to save lives, while trying to flee for her own life. So, while she is clearly manipulative, she does value the lives of other people.'
Garibaldi then took a closer looked at Garcia's face and body language, as she continued her thoughts, with concern, 'Though, we do not have time for me to tell her everything. It looks like Garcia wants to kill Lee over what Lee has done to her, and her friends. Not that I hold it against her for wanting to do that. But, this is not the time, nor place for such violent revenge. And I will have to remind Garcia of that... Still, later on, we can steal that reality device Lee has, and ditch Lee in someplace that is nice. But, not too nice. And then we will head off on our own adventures, while we search for a cure for our curses.'
Just then, from the corner of her left eye, Garibaldi saw one of the amazons that the guide was talking to, had turned towards them, and starting walking in their direction. The amazon was a middle-aged women, in great shape, whom had dark blue hair.
Garibaldi did not turn to look the amazon, as she thought, 'It looks like one of the women here wants to talk to us. It is best not to alert her that I have already noticed her coming towards us. And I think as long as we don't have a misunderstanding, and avoid any combat, we should be fine talking to them. Though, we may need a translator. Unless they know english.'
When the amazon reached the two girls, the amazon's said, in very good english, “Excuse me. My sisters and I would like to discuss with you about the other girl you are accompanying. The young raven haired girl with the gold and jeweled ring on her right ring finger.”
Garcia and Garibaldi turned to look at the amazon woman that was calmly standing beside them.
The two girls saw that the amazon was a pretty middle-aged woman, with an athletic build. She dark blue hair. And she wore a bright purple shirt, blue pants, and simple brown slippers.
Garibaldi thought, 'She is not a bad looking woman. And the fact she speaks english solves a lot of our problems in talking with her, and her friends. So, I think I will let Garcia do the talking, because when she looks at us. She likely sees just a six year old girl, and an older teenage girl. And in cultures such as this, with Garcia appearing to be the older person between us, she should be the one that speaks for us.'
Meanwhile, Garcia dropped her facial expression of anger, to a calm, neutral expression. She thought, with concern, 'I need to calm down. This is not the time, nor place for anger. And Roberta taught me how to channel my anger, when I needed too. And even though I want to make Lee suffer. Vengeance can wait until we are alone. For right now, I need to see what this woman wants to know about Lee. And I might be able to use that to my advantage against Lee.'
Garcia took a more calm facial expression, as she inquired, in a polite tone of voice, in english, “What would you like to know?”
The amazon kindly asked, “Do you know where she got her gold ring from?”
Garibaldi shook her head, as Garcia answered, “No.”
The amazon calmly said, “Then, we need to talk about your friend, and that ring she is wearing.”
Garibaldi said, “We are open minded to what you to say on the matter.”
The amazon gave the two girls a warm smile, as she replied, “Good.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Hmm... I have a feeling they are planning to do something to Lee. If that is the case, we might not have to dirty our hands. But, if that is the case, there is one thing they need to know, first.'
Garibaldi commented, “Though, if you plan to do anything to her. Be aware that she is a master escape artist.” She mentally reflected, 'And that is an understatement.'
Garcia looked over at Garibaldi, as she thought, 'Intelligent thinking, Garibaldi. And I believe you are helping to set Lee up, to get her out of our hair. And I am more than happy to aid you.'
Garcia looked over at the amazon woman, as she mentioned, “Yes. From what little time I have spent with her, she clearly likes to think several steps ahead of everyone else. But, I have know people that that. And once one knows what to look for, a person can use those skills against such people.”
The amazon did a simple nod towards Garibaldi and Garcia, as she calmly said, “I believe so, as well. And thank you for informing us.”
Garibaldi thought, 'Also, we need to tell them about Lee's knife.'
Garibaldi stated, “Also, she has a sheathed combat knife hidden in the back of her pants, under his shirt.”
I appreciate that warning. Now, here is what I would like to do with your young friend.”
The amazon then explained the situation to them, about Lee.
When the amazon was finished, Garcia and Garibaldi formed wicked grins on their lips, as they informed the amazon woman of what what they knew of Lee. Though, both wisely did not mention reality travel, nor any details that was connected to reality travel. And they did mention their names, nor Lee's name, to the amazon woman.
(_)
A little over a minute later, Lee exited the outhouse. After gently shutting the outhouse door behind her, she started walking back towards her two friends.
As Lee walked at a casual pace, she thought, 'The one thing about being a girl is that it take a few minutes to pee. Especially, when I had to take a minute just to find a comfortable position to sit down, to pee from. Still, at least they had toilet paper, so I could dry myself down there. And it was a western style outhouse. And not a hole in the ground, where I would have had to squat down at, to pee.'
As Lee continued walking, her precognition warned her of danger, just as she saw two shadows form over, her head, from behind her.
Lee tried to run, but the two amazon women behind her, were too quick. They swiftly grabbed her. And in a matter of a few seconds, they had already tied her up, with one of their ropes binding around her arms and chest together, with her arms being at the her sides of her chest. While they also tied her ankles together.
Lee then found herself, laying on her stomach, on the grass and dirt, with two amazon women gently holding her down, by her back, as they knelt to the ground, to each of Lee's sides.
Though, Lee was not in any paid, she found the position slightly uncomfortable. And it was slightly uncomfortable to look up from that position. Though, Lee was able to look up, and to her right side. And she found that her head was pointed towards Garcia and Garibaldi, whom were looking back at her, from several feet away.
And in the distance, Lee saw the Jusenkyo guide calmly walking away, and toward the gate where they had come into the village from.
Lee thought, with worry, and slight confusion, though with no fear, 'What the hell is going on? I don't think I broke any of their laws. And I am not about to scream, and make a scene. That will only make things worse for myself. Though, I still have to know what is going on?... But, I think the guide has the right idea, in leaving before something happens.'
'And at least, as they jumped me, I saw that it was two amazon women that were capturing me. So, I did not resist. Because, I do not need a pair of amazons after me, over the kiss of death matter... Now, let's see how well they tied me up.'
Lee slightly struggled against the ropes, to check to see how loose they were. Though, Lee did so in a matter that would appear as if she was involuntarily trying to stretch her limbs. So as to not alert her captors, whom were sitting right above her, to her sides. And whose hands she felt on her back.
Lee thought, 'Nope. I am not going to be able to wiggle out of the rope. Though, fortunately these ropes are are not too tight, but tight enough that I won't be able to free myself, any time soon. This means they have likely done this before. With is no surprise.'
'Fortunately, I what the two women looked like, as they were turning me around, to tie me up. One of them is a middle-aged amazon woman with dark blue hair. With the other woman being a slightly younger amazon woman with brown hair. They are not teenagers, so they are likely to act more rational. And because of this, I might still be able to talk my way out of this mess... And if not, at least I have my knife for later.'
Lee then felt as one of the women pulled out her sheathed knife, from where it was hidden, in the back of her pants, along her waist line, under her untucked shirt.
The women then threw the knife away from Lee, to her right side, away from Garibaldi and Garcia.
Lee thought, with even more worried, that bordered on fear, 'Oh no. I did not feel them touch me on my lower back, where I hide the knife. So, the only reason they would know that knife would be there, would be if Garibaldi and Garcia had told them about it. Meaning Garibaldi and Garcia betrayed me...'
Lee felt a mix of slight anger and bitterness, as she continued her thoughts, 'And after saving both their lives... Ungrateful bastards...'
Lee focused on Garibaldi and Garcia, whom were still in their cursed forms. And realized her grammatical mistake, as mentally reflected, 'Well, for right now. They are ungrateful bitches... And they would not be the first such ungrateful bitches that are after me.'
'But, they are the first people to so thoroughly capture me, so quickly, in a way that I do not have an escape plan ready for. So, I need to find out why they betrayed me so quickly? So, I can at least learn where I made my mistakes at, and not repeat them.'
Lee continued her thoughts, while beginning to feel genuine fear, 'If I have the chance not too. With amazons, one never knows.'
Lee looked directly towards the faces of Garibaldi and Garcia, whom were looking back at Lee's face. Garibaldi and Garcia has neutral expressions on their faces. Even though the two girls were several feet away from Lee, given there was no wind, Lee was sure they would hear her voice, as she calm asked, in a disappointed tone of voice, in english, “Why?”
Lee saw both Garcia and Garibaldi smirk towards her, as Garibaldi commented, “Well, if you have to ask that question, that means in all your planning, you didn't see this angle coming.”
Lee forced herself to calm down, and remain calm, as she thought, 'She's right. I should have never gloated to her about my calculations and angles, in manipulating people and situations to my benefit. And I should not have been so detailed in my explanation to her about my stories, and why those people that are after me, want revenge against me... Still, it is best that I remain calm, and for me to try to make the best of this situation.'
Lee calmly requested, with disappoint in her voice, in english, “Could you please explain your actions? And why you are doing this? Starting with when you decided to betray me?”
Garcia answered, in a slight arrogant tone of voice, “Certainly. While you were using the restroom, I got to talking with her?...” She looked over at Garibaldi, as she inquired, “I hope you don't mind me using female pronoun?”
Garibaldi looked over at Garcia, as she casually responded, “None taken. And it is best we don't use our names, anyway. So, we will just use the proper gender pronouns, depending on our gender forms.”
Garcia said, “That will be fine.”
(_)
Meanwhile, the dark blue haired amazon woman was kneeling by Lee's left side, across from her brown haired friend, as they held gently held Lee down. The two women silently listened to the conversation, as the blue haired woman thought, with mild joy, 'I am glad I and my friend here, took foreign language lessons when I was younger. Because, the conversation between these three individuals is becoming very interesting.'
'And I am glad I already sent a runner to go get our leader, before we even tied up this girl. So, she can handle this mess. Because, I am not sure that I can. Due to this, I think it is best I just let this play. Given we are only interested in the black haired girl, and not the other two.'
(_)
Both Garibaldi and Garcia looked back at Lee, as Garcia went onto say, “And Garibaldi mentioned that you are responsible for much of the problems that my friends, and I, are in. Including this curse.” She then used her hands to gesture towards the front of her chest, and down to her stomach, and waist. After which, she left her hands remain relaxed, to her sides.
Lee thought, with mild annoyance, more towards herself, than those that just betrayed her, 'So, Garibaldi told her, behind my back. I should have seen that coming. Well, I might as well be straightforward about this.'
Lee admitted, in a direct tone of voice, “Everything after you, and your two maid friends return from Asia, to South America, with your older friend crippled and maimed, is my fault. Though, I did repair your older friend's mind and body. Along with restoring her youth.”
Garcia complimented, in an insincere tone of voice, “That is nice. But, that nowhere near makes up the rest of what you have done to us.”
Even though Lee realized she was in a really bad situations. Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'It is poetic. And somewhat ironic. That of all the people I have faced. It turns out that the two people that have finally taken me down, is the nonviolent teenage badass, and the much older retired badass.'
'And Roberta and Fabiola that are after me are from the future, when Garcia is an adult. And those two women still feel that Garcia is not mature enough to handle his own affairs. Because they came after me, behind Garcia's back. Without informing Garcia. After this, it is very clear that Garcia can handle his, or her, own problems. Even at the younger age that Garcia is currently at.'
'And it is tempting to mention that I am not responsible for cursing Garibaldi, but I pointing that out, at this time, will only make myself look worse in their eyes. Still...' Lee grumbled, at a normal tone of voice, “I admit that I did not see this coming. Though, I should have seen this coming. I just have one question for both of you. Why didn't you two just wait until I was asleep, and steal my device, and ditch me, then?”
Garcia answered, “Well, the amazons here came over to talk to us, about you.”
Garibaldi commented, “The dark blue haired woman that is holding you can speak very good english.”
To Lee's left, she heard a woman's voice plainly say, in english, “Yes. I know your language. And thank you for the compliment.”
Lee saw Garibaldi look up, and to Lee's left, as Garibaldi responded, “You're welcome.” She then looked back down at Lee's face.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'That is just great. It means that I am going to have to be even more careful about what I say, while I am here... Though, that could work in my favor, later on. If plan A, in getting everyone around me to let me go, does not work.'
Garcia commented, “And the nice lady here stated that they have an interest in you. Something about the ring on your right forth finger, that locked you in your current female form.”
A mixture worry and mild fear broke through Lee's poker face, as she thought, 'Oh no...'
Garibaldi finished for her friend, as she stated, “And well. Since we both realized that you are nothing but trouble. And the fact you now the body of a little girl, with no way to change back. Not that I blame you. It was this, or the cancer killing you. We decided to leave you in the care of some people that are interested in you.”
Lee's voice dripped with sarcasm, as she said, “I am deeply touched.”
Garibaldi and Garcia responded to Lee's sarcastic remark, by lightly laughing, for a few seconds.
As they did so, Lee took a good hard look at them, together, in their cursed forms, as she mentally realized, 'It is them...'
As the two girls stopped laughing, Garibaldi noticed the look on Lee's face. She questioned, “What it is?”
Lee remained silent for a few more seconds.
Garcia inquired, in a slightly arrogant tone of voice, “Nothing to say?”
Lee casually said, “Actually, I was just reflecting on a minor temporal event that happened to me a while back. For me, the event has already happened. For you, it has yet to happen. Basically, as a girl, you beat me up my male past self. With a friend of mine, along with our blond friend here stopping you from your continued attack on me.”
Garibaldi could not help be giggle at the mental image Lee's comments caused her to form in her mind. She then said, “I looked forward to it.”
Lee conceded, “Yea. And I consider that one of the low points of my life.” She then looked over at Garcia, as she stated, “And after this and that, I consider us even.”
Garcia coldly stated, “We are not even close to even.” She then conceded, in her normal tone of voice, “But, this is a start.”
Lee casually responded, “Glad to hear it.”
Garibaldi said, “Now, we must go. But, we need something from you, first?”
Lee thought, 'I already know what it is. And for now, it is best just to let them have it.' She calmly stated, “The item is in my left front pants pocket.”
Garibaldi said, “Thank you.”
Lee coldly stated, “I just don't want you to pat me down, while I am like this.”
Garibaldi replied, with just a hint of warmth in her voice, “I understand.”
Garibaldi then walked over, and in front of Lee's head. Garibaldi turned to her right, as she looked at the dark blue haired woman face, whom was kneeling beside Lee, while keeping her hands on Lee's back.
Garibaldi saw the dark blue haired woman looked at her, as Garibaldi asked permission, in a kind tone of voice, “May I please get the item I need from the girl you are holding down?”
The amazon woman casually replied, in english, “Go ahead.” She thought, 'I have a feeling that it is best we just let these two get what they need, and leave. And it is clear that this girl's manners, she must older than her physical body shows. That is not surprising. The guide did said that this girl, and the one we are holding down, are two older men that have been cursed. Along with the blond teenage girl being a cursed boy as well.'
'And their curses are a reminder as to why, barring special circumstances, we are told not to go to the Jusenkyo. Because it is a dangerous place to go.'
'Though, I do wish the teachers would teach the younger generations about Jusenkyo in more detail. Instead of just saying that it is dangerous place to go too. And that it should be avoided.'
Garibaldi leaned over Lee's head, as she used her right hand to reach into Lee's front left side pants pocket. A second later, she felt the reality device, and she gently pulled the device out of Lee pocket.
Afterward, Lee silently watched as Garibaldi leaned up, turned around, and walked back over to stand with Garcia. Next, Lee saw Garibaldi turn around, to face her, as Garibaldi held the reality device in her hands.
Lee thought, 'I am screwed. And I know it. But, I need to check on how much Garibaldi and Garcia know, on to use that device. Or, they could have a similar situation as I wrote the Lowe siblings to have in book four. It is better they know how to work it, and go where they want. Than to randomly bounce around the multiverse. That is just asking for trouble.'
Lee inquired, “I take it you put two and two together, from Garcia’s story, on how to reality travel?”
Garibaldi turned to Lee, as she plainly answered, “Yes. Think of a time, place, and reality, hold that thought, and press the red button on the device.”
Lee thought, 'Good. Garibaldi understands exactly how to use the reality device. That means they will likely not get lost.' She complimented, “You always did have an eye for details.”
Garibaldi replied, “Yes. I do. And so do you. See you later. And good luck.”
Garcia looked over at Lee, as she said, “I would say this was fun. But, I just want this trip to be over.”
Lee commented, “Don't worry. I already wrote the ending. As I said. You will see your friends again. With all three of you being in good health. And I kept what I wrote vague enough that you should be able to choose how it plays out. By the way, your eighteenth birthday is going to be real fun. Very adult fun. And I was vague with that event, as well.”
Garcia realized the subtext of what Lee was saying. She smirked, as she stated, “I look forward it, then.” She thought, while being happy, 'That means this trip is not going to be very long. Considering my eighteenth birthday is not that far off.'
While Lee did not show it on the outside, inwardly she thought, with a bit of evil, 'Yea. Be happy for the moment, Garcia. For while I am okay with facing this. For betraying me, I am going to let you to find out the hard way that you will now face monthly periods, like natural women... On the other hand, it is going to be a while for Garibaldi, and my, female forms to reach that point...'
'I knew that before I went into the spring of drowned girl, and then locked myself in this form. And given Garibaldi is married, and has a daughter, those matters on rattling in the back of her head, as well. Though, she probably does not want to mentally acknowledge those issues, yet. Let alone mention them out loud...'
'Still, there is one thing I have to ask of them. Especially, Garcia. And I have to keep this vague, for all our sakes.'
Lee calmly stated, “Though. There is one other matter, I need to discuss with you, before you abandon me here. To prevent a paradox from occurring. I need you both to keep all that you know about me, a secret from everyone. Especially, the maids. Until after they return from their hunt for me. You will know when the time is right, with the time periods reaching parallel when you, when they mention my name, and a city called De La Plata Podrido. With them admitting to losing me at Jusenkyo.”
Lee thought, 'Because, after whatever the amazons do to me. There is not way the maids are going to find me. Plus, they will be tracking my reality device, not me, as I am, now.'
Garcia thought, 'A city called, Of The Rotten Silver. I guess it would make sense that Lee would be from such a city. From the name of the city, it sounds like it would be almost as corrupt as Roanapur. Still, I can understand Lee's reasoning for her request. And it seems that from writing her stories, that Lee has gained a firm understanding of temporal mechanics across multiple realities. Which worries me a little. Considering she is trying to manipulate Garibaldi and I. With all three of us knowing that we have to do what Lee wants. Or, it could cause even problems for all of us.'
Garcia coldly stated, “I will do as you ask. But, not for your sake. But, for the sake of my friends. Considering it sound likes everything turns out okay, for them, in the end. I can live with keeping your secrets.”
Lee thought, 'You would be correct... For the most part...'
Garcia questioned, “Though, you still think you can lose them?”
Lee stated, “They are tracking reality jumps. And they would never guess that I would be betrayed and stranded. Especially, by you, of their past. Instead, they will just guess my plan, as you have. And they will just follow you, without knowing you ditched me here.”
Garcia conceded, “I guess that makes sense. And if they find us, we will talk. And they might even call off the hunt for you. Should they learn what happened to you. Though, I believe I will at least tell them that you are taken care of. And leave it at that.”
Garcia thought, 'And because Roberta and Fabiola clearly went behind my back to hunt for you, I believe it would be best not to ask Roberta and Fabiola any uncomfortable questions.'
Lee complimented, “That would likely be best. You truly are better person than most people.”
Garcia remarked, in an even tone of voice, “I know. That is why I am not going to kill you, myself. But instead, I will leave you here, and let the locals deal with you.” She looked above Lee, and to the amazons holder Lee, as she continued, “However they want.”
Lee hear the two amazon women both her, slightly giggling. As the amazons noticed Garcia was talking about them, as Garcia looked at them.
Lee gave Garcia a weak smile, as she said, “Given how all our luck runs. I might be getting the better end of the stick, here.”
Garcia turned back to Lee, as she responded, “Perhaps. Either way. Goodbye.”
Garibaldi looked at Lee, as she said, in a sincere tone of voice, “Nice meeting you. And I do we wish did not have to part this way. But, I believe it is for the best... For all of us. Also, thank you for opening my eyes to much greater realities. No pun intended. I thought that my life had already peaked, but thanks to you, I realize that my life has only just begun.”
Lee responded, “You are welcome. And have a safe trip.” She thought, 'Okay. At least Garibaldi is grateful for what I have done for her.'
Garcia turned to Garibaldi, as she requested, “Please, get us out of here.”
Garibaldi looked over at Garcia, as she said, “With pleasure. Do you have any time, place, and reality, in mind?”
Garcia was quiet for a few seconds. She then suggested, “Star Trek Federation Earth, during the Next Generation period. That that place, time and reality, sounds like a good start to this trek.”
Both of them giggled a little at Garcia's joke, for a few seconds.
Lee held back a giggle of her own, as she thought, 'They look like a couple of giggling school girls, from different grades. That is wrong on so many levels.'
As they calmed down, Garibaldi agreed, “Yes it does. I always wondered why they called the Earth of that reality, paradise?”
Garcia said, “Then, let us find out for ourselves.”
Garibaldi complimented, “Good idea.”
Garcia commented, “I suggest we head to New Orleans, Louisiana, of that reality.”
Garibaldi guessed, “Sisko's Creole Kitchen restaurant?”
Garcia grinned, as she answered, “Exactly.”
Garibaldi returned Garcia's grin. She shrugged, she suggested, “Well, if we are going to New Orleans. We might as well go during Mardi Gras.”
Garcia happily stated, “I like that idea.”
Garibaldi said, “I am glad you do. Besides, I am in the mood for some gumbo, for lunch.”
Garcia commented, “I never had that type of food before.”
Garibaldi explained, “It is a slightly spicy, tomato based soup. You will probably enjoy it.”
Garcia gave Garibaldi a warm smile, as she agreed, “I think I will. Though, we don't have any real money for that reality. I just have some gold coins. And we both know from DS9, that gold is worthless there.”
Garibaldi returned Garcia smile, as she pointed out, “That is a good point. I am sure we will figure something out. Besides, they don't use money on that Earth, at that time.”
Garibaldi thought, 'And while Gold maybe worthless in that reality, at that point in time. I am sure those gold coins will come in handy in other realities. Now, let's get this show on the road.'
Garibaldi requested, “Now, get close to me. So, we can do this together.”
Garcia took a step closer to Garibaldi, to where they were standing side by side. She said, “Okay. And if we do need to barter. I am more than happy to use some of my gold coins to help us. For their historical value.”
Garibaldi complimented, “Now, that is a good point.” She mentally added, 'And Garcia. I don't mind that you were secretly holding on to some gold, just in case. That is not a bad move on your part. Now, to head out of here, and to where, when, and what reality, we want to go to. I need to focus, to do this right.
Garibaldi then thought of the time, place, and reality. She held that thought, as she pressed the red button on the reality device.
A split second later, Lee watched both girls disappear.
Lee looked back down, to her right side, as she place her head in a more comfortable position. She thought, with a bit of sadness, 'Well they're going. With my ticket out of this reality.'
Lee tried to look on the bright side of her situation, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, at least, I don't have a crick in my neck, from straining my neck in the position I needed to see them with.'
Lee thoughts then turned more grim, 'Still, Garibaldi and Garcia are about to go have a nice gumbo lunch, while I am left to proverbially stew in my own problems here... The party left without me. The story of my life.'
Lee forced herself to calm down, as she continued her thoughts, with more seriousness, 'Okay. Let's review my current situation. I was just betrayed by two people I had risked life and limb to help. I have been captured, and tied up by chinese amazons. For reasons I don't really understand, at the moment. And I just lost my only ride out of this reality.'
'The good news is that it could be worse. I did plan for this happening. I just did not expect it to happen so soon. That when I came to this reality, I made sure this was the composite reality that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru are from. And this place has the resources to build reality devices. And reality travelers live on this planet. Or, will soon live on this planet. Considering this is the past, before the events of book one. So, I got time to grow up a little. At least physically. And I know where to find these reality traveler's at. Or, at least their friends and relatives. Whom will eventually put me in touch with them.'
'Now, for my more immediate problems.'
'I just have to make it through this capture, to where I will wait for the opportunity to escape, without actually defeating any of these women. So, I avoid the kiss of death. This should not be so hard for someone with my skills, and patience. From there, well...'
Lee then realized a few problems she was going to have, after she escaped. As she mentally reflected, with worry, 'I might have a little trouble. A child in a foreign land. Especially, a girl. With no money, is not a good position to be in. But, as an outsider, my other options, in staying in this village, with these amazons, are likely worse.'
'Still, I need to see how the next few hours are going to play out for me. And from there, I will make my long terms plans.'
'Though, first thing is first. Let's get this ball rolling.'
Lee said, in chinese, “I may look like a child. But, I am a much older person. And I realize you have captured me, with no way to quickly escape. I will not run, but could you please, at least, sit me up. Lying face down in the dirt is no fun, for anyone.”
A moment later, Lee heard a much more mature, female voice, that was not the voice of the dark blue haired woman, state, in a casual, though curious tone of voice, in chinese, “My. My. My. What do we have here? This is no way to treat a guest. Especially, one whom has show such remarkable restraint. No pun intended. So, do as she requests. Sit her up. And turn her around to face me.'
The two amazons women whom had been holding Lee down, picked her up, turned her around, and sat her down on her butt.
Lee then saw whom had ordered the two women to do so.
Lee saw that the woman in front of her was only a few feet tall, and skinny, from the look of her hands. And she appeared to be very, very old in age. She had blue-green eyes, and flowing white hair, that went down her back, and with the hair being long than she was tail.
The woman wore a green shirt that was several times to big inside for her small frame. With the shirt acting as a robe that went below her feet. Her shirt had red trimming, and a yellow encircled cross on the front center of it. She also wore a red headband across her brow, and down the sides of her face, in front of her ears, that pushed her hair away from her face.
The woman was currently holding tightly to a six foot long, brown, wooden cane, with the top foot of the can having gnarled, curled end.
The women tightly held her cane from the upper half of the staff, with her hands and legs, with the can resting along the right, front side of her chest, as the bottom part of the staff was planted in the ground, the woman balancing
While the women did this, she showed remarked balance, as the feet her body was a feet feet above the ground, as she balanced and steadied herself with the bottom, flat end of the cane.
Also, given she showed little effort in have the bottom of the staff on the ground, as she stayed up right, with her feet almost yard above the ground.
This balancing act showed the that the woman's experience was profound, and her strength belied her age.
Lee immediately recognized the woman, as she sarcastically thought, 'Just great. This woman is Cologne. The leader of this amazon village. She is at least three hundred years old, and still a powerful fighter. With immense spiritual power, and wisdom. Which she has gained over the centuries. And even at her advanced age, she is still likely one of the sharpest, and most intelligent people that I know of in the multiverse... Well, at least I am in the hands of someone that not actually evil. She is just very, very crafty. And she has a wicked sense of humor.'
Cologne said, “I am Cologne, the leader of these Amazons.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to see if I can get myself out of this mess.' She responded, in a pleasant tone of voice, in chinese, “Hello Cologne. I already know who you are. If I have done something to unknowingly offend your people. I sincerely apologize. And I am willing to make reasonable amends.”
Cologne said, “You done nothing to offend any of us. It is just that my sisters over did it, a little, when the two other girls mentioned you were an expert escape artist.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'Good. This could be actually turn out to be a misunderstanding. Where I might be able to convince Cologne to let me go. Still, I best be honest with her. She can likely spot a lie, a mile away. I would not be surprised if she is psychic. She can likely read auras. She might even have telepathic and empathic abilities. If she does, I am already screwed. So, I am not going to worry about that possibility.'
'Though, either way, I am not going to tell her everything. I am going to make her work for it. Like any girl would do.'
Lee conceded, “I admit that I have some experience in such endeavors.”
Cologne raised eyebrow, as she smiled. She replied, “Really?”
Lee thought, 'She knows I am older than I look. Though, anyone that would have listened to the recent conversation I had with Garibaldi and Garcia, would realize that. But, I am not going to state that out loud, and confirm that fact in public.'
Lee just shrugged, as she said, “Yes. You could say I have lead an interesting life. Though, I doubt my life has been no where near as interesting as yours.”
Cologne commented, “Perhaps... But, I will learn more from you, soon enough. In private.”
Lee thought, 'I have feeling that a private talk with her will not bode well for me. And my precognition confirms that. Still, there is nothing I can do about that, for right now.'
Cologne turned her attention to the two amazon women to Lee's sides, as she calmly order, “Bring her to my home. But, keep her tied up.”
Lee thought, 'There goes my plan for convincing her to untie me. Though, perhaps I should feel flattered. She does consider me to be an escape artist.'
Lee heard the blue haired amazon woman say, in chinese, “I will take care of it.”
Lee forced herself to remain calm, as she continued her thoughts, in a more logical manner, 'It is best I not fight them on this. Struggling would ruin the wonderful first impression I am having with their leader, Cologne. And I can use that first impression to my advantage.'
Lee felt two hand picks her up, and carried her and carried the woman's over shoulder. From the look of the hair on the woman that carried her, she saw that it was the dark blue haired woman, that was carrying her.
Lee looked behind her, to see the brown haired amazon woman walking away from them, as they made their through the village, while other women and man, they passed by, looked on.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee heard a door open, behind her. She then watched as the woman carrying her walked into a building.
Soon, the dark blue haired woman stopped, and gently set Lee down, on the floor, in a sitting position.
Lee looked up to see Cologne using her cane, to stand there, in front of her. Lee looked around to see she was in a very nicely furnished living room. And she also saw that the only other person in the room, besides Cologne and herself, was the blue hair amazon woman, to Lee's left side.
Lee then looked back at Cologne.
Cologne turned younger, middle-aged amazon woman, as she calmly ordered, “Leave us.”
The blue haired woman then turned around, left the room, for the outside. With her gently closing outside door behind them.
With only the Cologne and Lee in the room. Cologne looked down at Lee, as she hopped down from her staff, and onto the wood flooring of the home. With Cologne holding the bottom of her staff, with her right hand, while leaning it against her right shoulder.
Lee saw that there were only a few feet between Cologne and herself.
Even while sitting, Lee had to slightly look down at Cologne's smaller form.
Cologne inquired, in a slightly amused tone of voice, “Now, who do I have here?”
Lee plainly answered, “A cursed individual, whom knows she is in a whole lot of trouble.”
Cologne chuckled for, a few seconds. As she calmed down, she smiled, while she said, “I will give you this. You are a lot brighter than most of the guests I meet here.”
Lee calmly replied, “Thank you.”
Cologne responded, “You're welcome. Also, I noticed when you are speaking my native tongue. Though, you have a slight taiwanese accent. Where did you learn chinese from?”
Lee thought, 'There is no point in lying about my language skills.' She answered, “As you have guessed. A taiwanese lady taught me.”
Cologne said, “Well... That island does produce some interesting people.”
Lee thought, 'You don't know the half of it... Or, maybe you do. I don't know how much traveling you have done in your long life. Though, it was likely a lot. Considering you had no problems getting to Japan, in the future. Even at your advanced age.'
Cologne asked, “Besides your speaking skills. How good are you with reading and writing my native language?”
Lee answered, “Cantonese and Mandarin are decent.” She thought, 'Shenhua really knows chinese, and not just her native version.' Lee said, “But, while I can write chinese characters very slowly, my penmanship was never my strong suit. In any language.” She mentally added, 'Which is ironic, considering I am a writer.' Lee verbally continued, “I prefer to type, than to write long hand. I find it much easier. Though, I have little experience in typing chinese. I have mostly typed in english. Which is my native language.”
Cologne questioned, in a calm tone of voice, “We will work on that. Also, I listened to your conversation, from a distance. After I was informed about you. I showed up around the time you were tied up. From what was said, it sounds like none of the three of you are from this place. Also, it seems that your two friends took something from you, and they used that item to suddenly disappear. Please, explain yourself? And where you are from?”
Lee thought, 'I am willing to bet she can tell if I lie. I might as well be honest. I still might be able to talk my way out of this. Since, I am not crazy enough to fight them. Though, I need to keep this as simple an explanation as possible.'
Lee coyly answered, “We used an item, that the other two took off with, to get here. My item is similar to the magical Nanban mirror, only with a wider selection of locations to go to.”
Cologne asked, “And how do you know about that lost relic?... Oh. Time travel.”
Lee said, “Something like that.” Lee sarcastically thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I don't believe it was a good idea mentioning that magical mirror. Still, I may be able to barter my way out of this mess.'
Lee offered, “As you can guess. I am from the future. And I can offer you knowledge of the future, in exchange for my freedom”
Cologne casually responded, “My dear. I prefer not knowing the future. Such surprises, as what the future brings, are one of the few joys I left in my life.”
Lee thought, with disappointment, 'Well, that offer was a bust. Though, it does explain, why most of the time, she just stood back and watch the chaos from a front row seat. Though, I might as well be polite about this. So, I can at least stay in her good graces.'
Lee said, “Then, you have much joy to look forward to in the future.”
Cologne commented, in an amused, and curious tone of voice, “What an interesting response.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. It is. And sense we are talking about time travel. There is a question I need to ask, so I can find out exacting where I am in the timeline.'
Lee inquired, “I have a question for you. While I am from the future. I do not know the exact dates on the events that happen to you, in the future. So, to gauge when in time I am located, at this moment, I was wondering is you could kindly tell me how old is you great-grand daughter, Shampoo?”
Cologne scowled slightly. Her voice took as suspicious tone, as she questioned, “To answer your question. She is fifteen years old. Still, what does my great-grand daughter have to do with the future?”
Lee thought, with worried, 'I hope I didn't get on her bad side, with that question. Though, I got my answer. And I can still smooth things over.' Lee plainly stated, “In several months, to a years time, her life, and your life, are going to become much more interesting.”
Cologne dropped scowl, as she smiled. She said, in a casual tone of voice, “I look forward to it.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'Good. She calmed down some.'
Cologne asked, “So, why did you curse yourself?”
Lee honestly answered, “I was dying of cancer. And this was the only way left for me to cure my cancer.” She mentally added, 'Among other issues that are now solved with the gender change.'
Lee saw look of pity show Cologne's eyes, as the older woman calmly stated, “That is understandable. Also, in addition to locking you in your cursed form. As long as you keep that ring on, you will not change back. Also, that ring will keep you healthy. Along with boasting your physical abilities, and longevity, a bit.”
Lee thought, 'Given how deep I am in, it is best I don't ask Cologne how she knows about my ring. And she just confirmed my hopes of locking my cursed from. Still, I need to know what her plans are for me.'
Lee calmly inquired, “So, what do you have planned for me?”
Cologne calmly said, “Nothing horrible. Though, there are likely a few things about your cursed body that you may not be aware of.”
Lee deadpanned, “I know about monthly periods, sexual intercourse, where babies come from, bras, and having to sit to pee. Though, all but that last one I don't have to worry about for a number of years.”
Cologne chuckled for a few seconds. She conceded, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, at least you know a few things. But, none of those were the subjects I was talking about. While gender change from the cursed springs will not change you mental gender, unless you want it too, the extreme youth your body change has been given you will cause personality changes.”
Lee thought, 'I don't like where this is going. But, I need to remain honest.' She admitted, “That possibility occurred to me. So, could you please explain?”
Cologne stated, “Well, even though the curses, barring the personality curses, do not directly effect the personality of those that are cursed. The body itself can, due to factors of change in hormone levels, and the maturity of one's brain. For those with animals, and those made very young, when a person changes back into their original form, it reset the equilibrium of their personality, back to the way they were.”
“While you have very good reasons in doing so. Because you locked yourself into that six year old, female form, there is no way to reset the equilibrium of your personality. You now have the physical brain, body, and hormone levels, of a six your old girl. And due to these biological changes, which you have undergone, you will soon slowly start to think like a six year girl. Both in lack of judgment and hyperness. But, you will still retain your memories.”
“This will cause problems for you, as you grow up again. The combination of having the memories of an adult, and the personality of a child, will likely lead to extreme social isolation, and possible, eventual insanity.”
Lee mentally grumbled, 'Forget escaping. This is bad. Very bad. This could be the reason I have been off my game since I was cursed. My younger, child brain could already be effecting my mind. I am clearly no longer as sharp as I once was. And looking back, I noticed that Garibaldi was acting a bit more childish than usual, with her sniping remarks. So, we are both effecting. But, Garibaldi will changed back soon, into an old man, for a little while. As such, his mind will eventually find a balance, and be fine. While I am forced to be locked in this form...'
'Though, to be honest. This is the way I planned it. And I have no regrets on cursing myself and locking myself in this from. Barring the very young age, I finally feel comfortable in my own skin and that is such a wonderful feeling.'
'Also, this kind of reminds me of female gender forms of Stan and Lewis Lowe. If they stay female for four days or more. They start acting crazy, like their mother use to be. Until, they changed back.'
'And I realize that as time passes, I am going to become more childish with each passing day. Which does not really scare me, but it does concerning me for several reasons.'
'Also, I see now that I have been to open, and making to many assumptions with Garibaldi and Garcia. And doing so cost me. And being childish, in the situation I am in, will either get me killed, or worse. And I have unwilling gone the isolation route, as I grew up the first time. I do not want to go through with that again.'
'Perhaps Cologne has a solution to my problems. I will just listen, to see if she presents an option, so I do not have to request one.'
Cologne mentioned, “Also, that ring will slow down your age by half. So, you are going to spend twice as long as a child, and teenager, before you reach adulthood.”
Lee stated, the obvious, in a sad tone of voice, “This is not good.” She thought, 'On top of everything else, I did not plan to be a child for that long. I guess, a bit, is a lot longer for a woman that is over three centuries old.'
Cologne said, in a soothing, motherly tone of voice, “Yes. But, not to worry. This is not the first time this has happened. We have experience in dealing with people in your situation. We have even development a method to help people like you.”
Lee thought, 'I don't like the way she is approaching her solution.' She inquired, with worry evident in her voice, and on her face, “Help in what way?”
Cologne calmly explained, “My people have a special type of shampoo, used in conjunction with pressure points located on the scalp, which allows us to sealed the memories of those we use it on. Depending on what pressure points are applied on the scalp, while using the shampoo, we can select what memories are sealed. Sometimes just the memories of specific person, or event, that the user knows, all the way to sealing a person's entire memory.”
Lee thought, 'I remember this from the Ranma Half series. And she clearly plans to do this to me.' She stated, “Formula one one four.” She calmly though, 'And formula one one nine reverses it. Or, extreme stress can reverse the effects. Though, I am not going to say that. Given, you might not like the idea that I know the cure. Even though I won't remember it, after you brainwash me.'
Cologne questioned, with slight interest in her voice, “Ah, you have heard of this technique?”
Lee calmly answered, “Yes. And I can see how that shampoo could also be useful in helping a person deal with, and move on from a traumatic event.”
Lee could tell that Cologne was impressed by her comment. Cologne responded “Yes. It has been used in that way before. And since you know that much. You likely also know the process is painless?”
Lee casually replied, “And the technique will leave my hair feeling silky smooth, for a little while.”
Cologne warmly giggled, for a few seconds. She then mentioned, in a relaxed tone of voice, “That is one of benefits of the technique. And what I will do is seal your memories. Which will leave you as a child, whom has no memory of her past.”
Lee grimly thought, 'And I bet with no memories, for such children, this also allows you to mold their personalities, as they grow older. Though, there are limits to even that. In many cases, a person's likes, dislikes, and reactions to stimuli are inborn. Though, I wonder how I will turn out in this situation?...'
Lee then remembered an event that happened to her in her recent past. She thought, with annoyance, 'Damn it! Due to being on the run from Rock, Revy, the maids, and everyone else, I completely forget, until now, about the chinese amazons, I met, that were from the future... So, this is how that happened. And I am trapped in my on temporal loop. I do not want to create a paradox. And I cannot really disagree with Cologne's logic in doing this. Though, I am not happy about it.'
Lee conceded, “I will admit that I see your logic. But, I am not happy about this.”
Cologne stated, in a kind tone of voice, “Look on the bright side. You will get to experience being a child, again. This is not such a horrible fate.”
Lee countered, “As a female outsider. I know the laws of this village. One stupid fight later, and I get the kiss of death.”
Cologne stated, “No. Because you will have no memories of your past, you will be adopted in to the tribe. As I said, we have done this a few times. Both girls, and boys. And we have figured out how to make it work. Sometimes the person doesn't even originally know our language, and we have to teach it to them. While you do know our language. And not to worry, even with your memories sealed, you will retain all your skills. You will just have no the knowledge on how you gained your skills.”
Lee inquired, “I will admit that does not sound too bad. And what happens when I ask about my birth family, and old memories?”
Cologne answered, “We will say you have been with us since birth, you hit your head, and you no longer remember your past from before the accident.”
Lee stated, “That should work. And I understand what you are saying. I will not fight the process. But, I ask for a minute to remember.”
Cologne asked, “Of what?”
Lee sadly answered, “I want the last memories I know of, as myself, to be about my family, and my friends.”
Cologne replied, “That will be fine.”
In response to Cologne, Lee began recalling everything she knew, and remembered, of her family, and friends. Including her friends in De La Plata Podrido, Pedro, Melvin, Bao, and especially, River.'
As Lee did so, she watched a Cologne hold her staff with her right hand, as she used her left hand to pull out, from her clothing, a small bottle of shampoo, labeled one one four.
Lee thought, 'She likely knows the hidden weapons techniques that Mousse excels out.' She then went back to recalling some of the better times she spent with her family and friends.
Cologne complimented, “Those are very wise thoughts, young one. And you are certainly young, no matter what age you really are. Still, take comfort with the knowledge that this technique is not permanent. It can be easily reversed. And we will usually make the offer to do so when the person affected reaches a level of mental maturity to handle the truth. Usually, when the body is around twenty years old.”
Lee dispassionately said, “That is comforting. Also, I have another question.”
Cologne casually requested, “Please, state it?”
Lee said, “I used one of the village's outhouses before I was captured. I was wondering, do you have indoor plumbing?”
Cologne let out a laugh. She then stated, with joy in her voice, “Given you were once a man, and you are now a girl, I can see how and why you would ask that question. To answer your question. Yes, we have indoor plumbing. Everything for hot and cold running water. To sinks, tubs, showers, and toilets. From towels to toilet paper. Including all the items associated to staying clean. And the toilets we use are western style toilets.”
“Along with those items, we even have access to modern feminine hygiene products. Of which, you will need to use such items, in a few years.”
Lee responded, “Thank you, for being so understanding. I really needed to ask that question.” She mentally added, 'And thank you for answering a few more questions that I didn't feel like asking.'
Cologne requested “That is not a problem. Now, what name do you go by?”
Lee answered, in english, “Lee.”
Cologne walked over behind Lee, as she responded, “Then, you will be named, Dongmei.”
It took Lee a moment to realize what the name meant. She inquired, “Winter plum?”
Cologne said, “Yes. We already have someone nearby named, Plum. Which is what the name, Lee, means in my native language. So, I picked something more fitting. Winter, for your real age. And Plum, for your name.”
Lee though, 'Now, I know where the name came from.' She agreed, in chinese, “It is a fitting name for someone in my situation. And I know of the girl you are talking about, whom is named, Plum. She is a kind girl whom loves her father very dearly, and whom I wish only the best for.” Lee then sadly concluded, “Still, for myself, it is going to be a very long journey here.”
Cologne kindly responded, “Take heart. We will help you make friends. And you will learn much. Including how to become a great fighter. You seem like that type whom does not give up. Even now.”
Cologne's comment caught Lee off guard, as Lee hesitantly inquired, “How did you guess?”
Cologne stated, “You have not done anything to provoke us. I am sure you are were thinking along the lines of being polite, until you saw an opportunity to escape, in a manner that would not appear as a defeat towards my people. Now, that you fully realize the situation you are in, with you new girl form. You also realize that what I am about to do to you will only benefit you.”
Lee halfheartedly admitted, “You are right.”
Cologne was already behind Lee. She had her staff in her right hand and the bottle of formula one one four in her left hand. She set down her staff, against a nearby chair.
Cologne plainly asked, “Now, are you ready, Lee?”
Lee took a deep breath and slowly let it out. A few seconds later, she answered, “Yes. I am ready, Cologne.”
Cologne opened the bottle of shampoo. She then began to apple the formula one one four to Lee's black hair, and scalp. Thus, beginning the memory sealing process, on Lee.
Lee last thoughts were, 'I have to admit, this feels pretty good. River might like this.'
A minute later, Dongmei felt her hair was silky smooth. Dongmei looked over at Cologne, whom was now standing in front of the younger girl.
Cologne could see innocence showing in the young girl's eyes, that were not there before.
Dongmei childishly asked, in english, “Who are you?”
Cologne mentally lamented, 'Now, here comes the hard part.'
The older woman then started untying the younger girl's ropes, as she checked to make sure the Dongmei still knew chinese, which Dongmei did. Cologne then began spinning her tale for the Dongmei. All the while, Cologne was mentally formulating the best ways to integrate Dongmei into her village, as seamlessly as possible.
(_)
Babylon Five Reality. Date, January Twenty-Ninth, Twenty-Two Eighty-One. Location, an upscale residential district in Mars Dome One. Time, around noon.
Inside the bedroom of Matthew McCormick's upscale, highrise condo, Matthew was presently finishing his preparations in getting ready to leave.
Matthew had returned to his home a few hours ago, after his boss, Michael Garibaldi, CEO of Edgars Industries, had given him the vacation time, away from his job, that Matthew had strongly requested.
And while Matthew had not slept in the past thirty hours, or so, he was still wired from what had happened to him the previous night.
Also, even though Matthew was had not slept, when he did get home, he immediately headed for his bathroom to shave, shower, and change his clothing. After which, using a computer in his home, he electronically paid for some first class tickets offworld, to Centauri Prime.
Then, Matthew had gotten ready, by packing to large suitcases, on his bed, in his bedroom. As he packed, he had the TV turned on, in his bedroom. The TV was a viewscreen on a wall, located across from the foot of his bed. He had the TV turned to a local news station.
At first the news was talking about the police station attack, last night, which Matthew almost became a casualty of.
In addition, the news only briefly mentioned incidents dealing with two highway chases, and an attack on a factory on the north end, of the interior of Mars Dome One.
Matthew knew that he was a part of the second chase mentioned. that Matthew was a part of. Though, barring the original live broadcast of the second chase. The news did not go into details of these three incidents. Nor, were any names mentioned in the review news story, and further re-airing of the footage of the chase Matthew was in. And Matthew found out that the only name mentioned by live broadcast of the second chase, was Lee's alias, Ello Gray.
Matthew chalked this up to his boss telling the news stations not to cover those incidents. Of which, Matthew was grateful toward Mister Garibaldi for.
Both, Matthew realized that all these events must have been connected to his most recent, client, and the client he had dumped the quickest, Lee.
But, at the moment, Matthew could care less about Lee, at the moment. Presently, his mental state was in survival mode. And he was leaving as quickly as he could.
Though, a few hours after Matthew had left Edgars Industries Complex, the news then reported that Edgars Industries main headquarters had been attacked, and CEO Garibaldi has gone missing. The police officially stated that they had no leads, and no suspects at the moment. Though, it was reported that Lise and Mary Edgars had been accounted for, elsewhere on Mars Dome One, and they were both completely fine. Though, no details were given of where those two women were currently located.
Also, there was a brief mention of a technician that was found in a safe room, in the main, center building of the Edgars Industries Headquarters. But, the police soon had the journalists keep quiet on that, as well. With the police stated that was an unofficial lead.
And, except for those facts, since the first reports of the attack on Edgars Industries, the news had been doing nothing but repeating what had already been reported. With the news anchors talking mostly about how this would effects of E.I. CEO Michael Garibaldi being missing could have on the planetary economy, galactic politics in Mar gov's dealings with the Interstellar Alliance, and who could possibility had done it.
The irony was that the police had no suspects because it was publicly known that CEO Garibaldi had very powerful, and he had even more powerful friends that went all the way to the top of the Interstellar Alliance on Minbar. Also, it was an open secret Garibaldi had done a thorough job of making sure everyone knew not to mess with him, nor his family, and friends. And for others after him to only challenge his company in the legal, civil ways of capitalism.
As such, everyone knew that to attack him was for that person to practically pick a fight with the galaxy itself.
Though, after the night that Matthew had, Matthew had a vague idea of who was responsible for the Edgars Industries attack. And in Matthew's opinion, anyone insane enough to pick such a fight was to be avoided at all cost.
After Matthew finished packing. Matthew used a remote to turned off his TV. He then toss his TV remote onto his made bed. And he turned his attention back to the two suitcases on his bed.
As he checked both suitcases for what he needed, he thought, with concern, 'It is good that the old man gave me time off. But, in reality, this is my resignation. It is just that no one is going to realize it, including the boss, until I am literally halfway across the galaxy.'
'I am escaping while I still can. And I am not planning leaving a forwarding address. If the chairman cannot handle these people. No one can. So, I have got to get out of here, before whomever is after Lee comes for me, as well. Or, the law catches up to me.'
'Though, I regret I cannot call my family, to let them know what happened. Especially, my younger brother, Ian. Because, I am not going to drag them into this mess.'
'Well, I believe my suitcases are ready. I have my passport and other identifications ready. I have the printed receipts for my first class tickets to Centauri Prime ready. I think when I get to Centauri Prime, I will spend a week, or two on that planet. Relax and decompress some, before I move on.'
'It really is a nice time of the year to visit there. And I have a few friends there that will help me convert my credits to Centauri ducats, for a ten percent fee off the top. And give me false identicard, and other records. So, the law cannot track me with my credit chit record, nor identicard. Fortunately, Centauri ducats are considered currency in many locations, including a number of human colonies on the rim. Because those colonies need alien commerce to survive.'
'After all that is done, I will head for the rim. For a human colony on the edge of known space. That is as far as I can go, with the resources I have. I just hope it is far enough.'
'And even if I don't get a job as a lawyer. I am still young, intelligent, and healthy. If need be, I can get a job doing something else.'
'Fortunately, I have the credits to pull this plan off. And I stuffed these two suitcases with clothing, and everything else I hold dear, because I am not coming back here. All because I want to make sure that who is after Lee does not get to me. And if they don't, the police may try to charge me as a scapegoat for what happened last night.'
'Still, I am so happy, the news and the authorities have yet to identify me from the chopper video, during that chase. I am glad I took Lee's advice, and I did no look directly at the chopper, and its vid-camera. Still, I think my boss had a hand in that. But, with him gone, that is going to change very soon.'
'I know when it is time to leave. And it is an hour passed my time to leave.'
'And if the law doesn't catch me, I am afraid those violent and crazy girls might. As a way to tie up loose ends. Which I am to them.'
'Though, if the law does catch up to me, I can try the same thing that Lee tried. Get a telepath to read my mind about what happened. Because, no one is going to believe me, if I just tell them the truth.'
Matthew looked at a digital clock on his night stand, by his bed, to the right side of the bed. It was twelve ten PM.
Matthew then turned back to look at his suitcases, as he thought, 'It is twelve ten PM. My shuttle flight is not scheduled to leave for close to another two hours. But, it is going to take me an hour to get from here, to the transport tube station. And then take the transport tube to the spaceport. And I want to be in my first class shuttle seat with time to spare.'
'And I do look forward to my first class cabin and amenities, on the luxury liner I booked. It was not cheap, but if I am going to spend a week traveling in hyperspace. I figure I might as well do it in style.'
'It is tempting to charge it all to my company credit card. But, I feel that Garibaldi will come back someday. And he is one of the few people I feel could track me down, no matter where I went. So, I am just paying for all this myself, to prevent a reason for him to come looking for me.'
'Now, to get out of here.'
Matthew closed both he suitcases. He made sure the combination latches were firmly holding on both suitcases.
Then, he used each of his hands to picked up each suitcase by the handle.
Matthew thought, 'Damn. These things are heavier than I expected. But, I am not going to complain.'
Next, Matthew made his way out of his condo, bedroom. With him stopping, and sitting down his right suitcase, so he could turn off the light to his bedroom. Before before picking that suitcase back up, and continuing through his living room.
The sunlight from large windows in his living room provide enough light that there were no interior lights on in that room, for him to turn off.
When Matthew made it to the door to the hallway, he set down the suitcase in his right hand, used his right hand to open the door, walked to into the hallway, picked up, and moved his right suitcase into the hallway, gently closed the door behind him, pulled out a key, used the key to lock the door, put away his key back into the pocket he had it in, picked up his right suitcase with his right hand, turned around, and headed for the nearest bay of elevators on that floor.
As Matthew walked down the hallway, with a heavy suitcase in each hand, he thought, 'Now, to get to my new company car, in the nearby garage, and get out of here.'
(_)
Five minutes later, Matthew made it to the third floor of a multi-level parking garage, that was attached to the back end of the high class apartment and condominium complex he had been living in.
Matthew held both his heavy suitcases, to his sides, by their handles, as he walked towards the company car he drove home in, which he had replaced the company car with, that Lee wrecked, and totaled.
As Matthew made his way towards he new car, which was several car down the row, straight in from of him, nearly to the other side of the garage floor, he thought, 'I am so happy that Garibaldi decided not to charge me for the cost of that car Lee wrecked. That man can be so understanding. And he has a wonderful sense of humor. I just regret that the events beyond both our control have forced me to no longer be able to work with him. And I have to leave under such questionable circumstances. But, a man has to do, what a man has to do.'
While Matthew continued walking, to his left, he passed by a pink motorcycle, with a woman, sitting on the seat of the two wheeled vehicle. The woman wore a brown leather pants, brown leather zipped up jacket, with brown leather boots, brown leather belt, brown motorcycle helmet with the visor down, and the end of a metal chrome cylinder was hooked to the right side of her belt.
Matthew looked at the woman, and the motorcycle for a moment, as he walked by them. He then turned back to his car, which was further down the right row of the parking lane her walking down.
While Matthew walked, he thought, 'You don't see motorcycles like that every day. And that rider cuts a nice figure.'
Just then, Matthew heard a giant footstep hit the ground, right behind him.
Matthew turned around to see a giant, pink robot, whom was barely able to stand up straight, without hitting the ceiling of the parking garage, whose head was looking down at him, and the robot was less than six feet from him.
The women in brown leather, kept her helmet on, as she stood behind, and to the right, of the robot.
Matthew dropped his suitcases, as his mouth went slack jaw at what he saw.
Matthew thought, 'And I thought after last night, that nothing could surprise me any more. Boy was I wrong... I guess I waited too long to escape, and those psychos from last night, sent their friends after me.'
Due to the looked on Matthew's face, the robot started laughing for several seconds. While Matthew could hear the woman slightly giggle under her helmet.
As the robot calmed down, she commented, in english, “You should see the look on your face. Your expression is hilarious. You humans always crack me up.”
Matthew collected himself enough to reply, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Huh?”
The robot introduced herself, in a pleasant, electronic, tone of voice, “I am, Arcee. I am here to take you someplace else. And I see you are even packed for the occasion. I love with it when someone we are sent after is ready to go, when we meet them.”
Matthew was still slightly in shock from the surreal situation he found himself in, as he flatly questioned, “Are you here to kill me? Like that crazy women tried to kill us, last night?””
Arcee scoffed, “Oh please. I try not to kill those that make me laugh. And I will say, given the events of last night, and this morning, that I agree that you probably needed to ask those questions. And the answer is quite the opposite. I am not here to kill, nor you harm in any way.”
Arcee noticed Matthew relax a bit, as he inquired, “Is this about Lee?”
Arcee answered, “Partly. But, it is mostly about you. We saw the recordings of you during that chase. And for the most part, you held yourself together well. Considering it was likely your first outing in an intense, life or death, situation, you did a good job.”
Matthew cracked a smile, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Arcee happily thought, 'Good. He is now in a pleasant mood. And this is a perfect opportunity to make him the offer Annie and I were sent to give him.' Arcee stated, “I am here to offer you a job, to begin the greatest adventure of your life.”
Matthew responded, with a bit of sarcasm in his tone of voic,e “Let me guess. It is an offer I cannot refuse?”
Arcee smirked, as she said, “It is nice you humans still appreciate the classics of your culture. Now, pick up your suitcases. We have places to go, and people for you to meet.”
Matthew asked, “Before we leave, I have a few questions. First, might I ask where you are taking me?”
Arcee casually responded, “I don't mind answering any of your questions. The trip will only take less than a moment to reach. We are going to another reality, on an alternate Earth. In the early twentieth-first century. On an eastern city island in Mexico, on the Gulf of Mexico, near the U.S. state of Texas.”
“The place we are going to is a casino called, Daiyu Palace Casino. We are going there, you will be assigned a suite, at the casino, to drop off your belongings. Then, you will be lead to meet the owner, and my part time boss, Chang. When we get there, he will figure out what job we can use you for. And you will be paid well for your services.”
Matthew flatly stated, “If this job involves committing violence, I am not interesting.”
Arcee responded, “Fair enough. And not to worry, it will not be a violent job. That is my department...”
The woman with the helmet on, coughed.
Arcee turned her head in the direction of the woman. She turned back to look at Matthew. She stated, “And my partner's department, as well. After which, you can get some sleep in your assigned suite. My sensors tell me you have no slept for a while.”
Matthew stated, “After last night, I am still a bit wired.”
Arcee commented, “That is completely understandable.”
Matthew honestly said, “Yes. And thank you for answering my questions. That is all I wanted to know.”
Arcee happily replied, “Glad I could be of help. Now, pick up your belongings, and take a few steps closer to me, and we will be on our way to your new life.”
Matthew mentally reflected, 'I always thought that wicked burn on B Five was going to be the highlight of my life. I guess I was wrong.'
Behind Arcee, Annie had just stood back and watched. As a master of the force, she did her best not to laugh at some of the events she just saw in front of her. She thought, in a relaxed frame of mind, 'Arcee has just now shown she can pull off a good plan, that she created. With me just here to help, if need be. Though, she wanted to see if she could pull this off on her own.'
'And she has done so. She is really impressing me with the level social skills she is displaying in getting Matthew to willing come with us.'
'She also already shut down the security system to this garage, so there are not records of us being here. And considering I sense no one else here, there are no witnesses, as well. Which is good for everyone.'
'Along with this, Arcee bet me that she could doing this kidnapping with a sense of humor, and style, while still pulling it off. With me just staying back, and watching. I guess I lost this bet. I now owe her five U.S. dollars. Though, to see this, it was well worth it.'
'Now, to head back to the casino.'
Matthew picked up his suitcases, and he walked closer to Arcee and Annie. At the same time, Annie took a few steps closer to Arcee, as well.
Arcee then used her internal reality device to transport all three of them back to Lee's Reality, in back garage of Daiyu Palace Casino. At one PM local time, in Del La Plata Podrido, three days after Lee had originally escaped Lee's home reality.
(_)
Lee's Reality. Location, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Time, Three days after Lee left his reality. Place, inside the beach resort of the Devil's Hotel, inside hotel restaurant and bar.
It was the middle of the afternoon, during an off hour for business in the Devil's hotel restaurant and bar. With no one else usually inside in the restaurant of the Devil's Hotel, except for the bartender, Melvin, during this time of day.
Melvin used this time to do some basic cleaning, and other chores around the room.
At that moment, Melvin had his back turned to the bar counter. Melvin was in the section of the bar counter that faced the left wall, with him being near the center of the length of the counter.
Melvin had a rag in his left hand, as he used his right hand to grab a bottle off the wine shelves set against the wall that was designed to hold bottles on their side. He then wiped the dust off the bottle with the rag, and then gently placed bottle back where it was sitting on it's side, on the shelve, before he picked it up.
Melvin then repeated this with other bottles on the shelves in front of him.
While Melvin continued to do this, one bottle at a time, he thought, 'I haven't seen Revy, and the others, since the morning after Lee left. Likely, I will never see them again. And that is fine with me. I have found those crazy women, and I, do not mix.'
Just then, he head a someone move the bar stool to sit down, across the bar counter, right behind him.
With Melvin's back turned, he set the bottle her had in one hand, back on the shelf. He placed the rag on an empty hole on the shelves.
Melvin continued to have his back turned to the new customer, as he calmly stated, in spanish, “I will be with you, in a minute.”
There was no response few seconds, Melvin thought, 'The person must be an english speaker.' He calmly said, “I will be with you, in a minute.”
A second later, from behind him, Melvin heard in a familiar female voice calmly say, in russian, “I did not come here for a drink.”
To Melvin's credit, he did not tense up, as he immediately recognized the voice. He casually lied, in english, “I apologize. I do not speak russian.” He thought, with worry, 'Shit! She found me!... She finally found me... How?... It doesn't matter at the moment. All that matters is getting out of here in one piece...'
The woman complimented, in english, “Not bad. We have been watching you from a distance, since yesterday. You hide your accent well. And dying your hair blond, and growing the goatee were nice touches. You even fooled some of my subordinates. You own friends. That is hard to do. Though, the knife training on the roof was what finally convinced us. Anyone could recognize those moves, if they know what to look for. It is good to see you, Private Yurick.”
Melvin quick turned around, to his left, as he swiftly used his right hand to reach for his loaded, Tokarev, semi-automatic pistol, which was located in a holster, under the bar counter, near him. There was already a bullet in the chamber, with the weapon ready to be fired at a moments notice.
But, when Melvin turned around, he saw a dozen russian women, in causal clothing, including B, standing behind Balalaika. With Balalaika sitting at the counter. Balalaika wore her red dress, and olive color, military greatcoat.
Melvin had immediate stopped reaching for his pistol, when he saw that, except for Balalaika, the women whom were pointing their AK Seventy-four automatic rifles at him, and around Balalaika.
Melvin slowly stood up straight, while he slowly moved his hand to his sides.
Melvin mentally cursed, 'I forgot how damn quiet we can be... And there is a Blues Brothers joke somewhere in this situation. Though, I don't feel like telling it... I have been friends with Pedro for far too long... Will, I might as well say, hello.'
Melvin said, in russian, 'Hello guys. Or, should I say, girls?” He then looked directly at Balalaika's face, as he added, “And hello to you as well, Balalaika.”
Balalaika inquired, with slight amusement, in russian, “Not captain.”
Melvin responded, “Not for five years.”
Balalaika said, in amused tone of voice, “Fair enough, Yurick. Still, I have some questions for you. The first being. When did you know that Lee was the writer?”
Melvin honestly answered, “Not until about five minutes before he left.”
Balalaika questioned, “Why didn't you tell anyone?”
Melvin replied, “I owed Lee. He helped hide me from you, when, as you pointed out, some of our friends here, came looking for me. Also, he helped me with a bit of trouble, in dealing with Revy.”
Balalaika asked, “What kind of trouble?”
Melvin thought, 'I best tell them. Though, I need some assurances, first.' He requested, “You have to keep Revy, and those close to her, from learning this. It could cause all of us, all sorts of problems, if Revy learns about this.”
Balalaika inquired, “How so?”
Melvin explained, “Long story short. The rest of the women took a day long trip to tour some ruins, on the mainland. It was only Revy and I in this bar. I did not want her to get drunk, so early in the day. So, I suggested that I try, on Revy, some past life regression techniques that I had learned, while here.”
“And I found out that in a past life, Revy was Jack Sparrow. Yes. The pirate captain. Jack Sparrow. And when the Jack personality emerged, Jack would not go back into the box.”
Everyone remained silent towards Melvin's pun.
Melvin went onto say, “So, I went to Lee. Lee can be a real miracle worker. I don't know how. I don't want to know how. But, Lee got that genie back into her bottle, and Revy went back to normal, before the others returned. And I owed Lee a big favor for that.”
Balalaika giggled, while her women remained stoic.
Melvin thought, 'Another thing I like about being on my own. I can actually show some emotion in situations like this, within reason, without getting into trouble.'
Balalaika said, “Interesting... I believe I will have to keep that piece of information from them. And yes. That would be a marker worth paying.”
B lowered her AK Seventy-Four, and slung it on her rifle. The others women did the same.
Melvin did not show it on the outside, but inward, he happily thought, 'Good. They stopped pointing their weapons as me. This is a good sign. Not that I am even going to try anything right now. They still out number me. And they are a faster and stronger than I am.'
B inquired, “So, Revy was Jack Sparrow in a previous life?”
Melvin answered, “Yes, B. Or, should I say, Boris?”
B replied, “Either name is fine with me. Besides being a woman is not that bad.”
Melvin noticed some of other women behind Balalaika nodding in agreement.
Melvin replied, “I will take your word for that. I like the way I am. That is why I ran.”
B smirked, as she stated, “You sound like a friend of mine, whom was named, Bob. Of course, once he gained the ability to change back and forth, Bob found that he liked what being a woman has to offer.”
Melvin thought, 'Of course, Bob Lowe. I wonder what happened to him, and his family? Though, it is best that I don't mention that I read those stories, nor seen the Black Lagoon series.'
Melvin responded, “I may have to meet this Bob sometime. Anyway, I considered my silence during Lee's escaped, as my clearing my debt with Lee. I hope you don't mind.”
Balalaika complimented, “We do not. From what we have found out. You have conducted yourself honorably during your stay here.”
Melvin replied, “Thank you.” He mentally added, 'Now, to find out how they found out about myself being here?' He asked, “So, how did you find out about me?”
Balalaika responded, “When it comes to Revy, and her friends, few things escape my attention. And we put the pieces together.”
Melvin agreed, “Yes, those women don't know how to keep their mouths shut.”
Balalaika said, “True.” She thought, 'At this point, I am surprised that this entire world do not publicly know about them.'
Melvin thought, 'Now, to conduct business, over some drinks.' He asked, “So, will you be having your usual, Balalaika?”
Balalaika answered, “None of us will be having anything to drink. Besides, I am pregnant.”
Melvin replied, in an even tone of voice, “Congratulations.” He thought, 'I don't need to know the details. And I don't want to know the details... Still, I need to make myself clear about where I stand with them.'
Melvin calmly stated, “That being said. I am not coming back. I have made a good life, for myself, here. And I have no intention of leaving this wonderful town. I like it here. This town is like Roanapur, only the local police have a bit more backbone. And they are able to keep the violence to a minimum, while allowing the vice. I know this personally, because I am good friends with the chief of police here. By the way, he loathes bribery, and he will take offense to being offered a bribe. Also, the general attitude for the people of this town is more... Practical... Than the more violent portions of the population of Roanapur.”
Balalaika said, with interest in her tone of voice, “That is intriguing. I may have to check this city out, in further detail, at a later date. That being said. I never said that you had to come back to organization. Still, I do have an offer for you.”
Melvin raised an eyebrow, as he calmly responded, “I am listening.”
(_)
At that moment, further into the island town of De La Plata Podrido, inside the police station, Chief of Police Pedro Del Soto sat in his cushioned chair, behind his desk, in his private office. His office door, and blinds to his window, looking out into the main room of the police station, were both closed.
Pedro was looking at his computer screen, on the left side of his desk, as he reviewed the police reports, on his computer, that had been put into station's computer network, during the last few days, in which he had been gone.
Pedro was currently wearing his usual clothing, and he was armed, with his usual holstered pistols. Though, his coat, and hat were on his office coat rack, and shades were folded, and placed on a clear area of his desk, of the right side of his desk.
Though, reviewing the police files did not bring him much comfort. And not because of the report themselves. Not much had happened during his absence, which only seriously harmed, nor killed on his island.
What was bringing down his mood was him mentally reflecting on the events of that last few days of his life. And the actions he had to take during those few days.
While Pedro was unharmed from his ordeal with Roberta, Revy, and Fabiola. He was still a bit stress out over the what happened. But, he quickly recovering. And he would likely be back to himself, by the end of the present day. Though, he was not fully recovered, yet.
As Pedro reviewed the police reports, he sadly thought, 'Well, I am glad my boys that stayed here, during my absence, were able to keep this city in one piece. And the fact that no one was reported killed, nor seriously hurt, during that time, makes me feel better.'
'On that matter, I feel bad that I, and half the force, that were in the know, had to drop everything, and leave like that. But, those that stayed are professional enough not to ask me questions about why we did so.'
'And the reason I came back here, to my job, was that Revy, Roberta, and Fabiola caught me, literally with my pants off, the morning after I ran from town.'
'I should have known better than to think there was anywhere on this planet that I could successfully hide from them. Still, my running did give them time to think on how they would handle me. And they didn't kill me. Nor, maim me. Nor, even harm me. Because I fully cooperated with them. And they were not interested in me. They were solely interested in Lee.'
'Though, I did not like doing so. They wanted information on Lee, and I willingly gave it to them. Because I knew if I did not, they would torture the information out of me. Without me being about to do anything to stop them.'
'I also didn't like secretly recordings my conversations from Lee, without his knowledge, nor permission. But, I knew that if it all went to hell. Like it did. Those recordings on those memory cards would save my ass. And those recordings did.'
'Always have backups. Just in case.'
'I gave them one of my memory cards, while telling them which files on that memory card, that they would most likely be interested in. Doing so kept my ass out of the fire. Still, they also questioned me. And I answered every question they had, with complete honesty.'
'That was the longest four hours of my life. And given my job, and the lift I had lead, that is saying something.'
'After they were through with me, I watched as Revy pulled out a small remote device, I guess her reality device. With the maids standing by her, as she teleport them to somewhere else. With them being gone in the blink of an eye.'
'Then, I spend the next half an hour decompressing from the situation. Next, I got cleaned up, dressed, and left my safe-house, in the car I had, for the nearest town. After that, I made my way back here, to my home town. And that journey took a while.'
'The reason I returned to this town was that since they found me, there was not point in hiding.'
'Even they wanted me, they could find me, no matter where I went on this planet. And we all knew that.'
'So, I felt that it was best that I return to my job.'
'Though, with them looking for information on Lee, lead me to believe that Lee escaped them. Which made my confrontation worth it. Given how creative, savvy, and outright insane, Lee is. Once Lee had a reality device in his hands, the girls are never going to catch him. So, Lee and I still had the last laugh.'
'When I finally got home, early, yesterday afternoon. I took a nap at my home, for a few hours. Afterward, I woke up around three, and I returned to my job here.'
'Just over an hour into my return to the police station, I got a phone call from my superiors on the mainland, and I caught hell on the phone, from them. For leaving on such short notice.'
'The excuse I gave was that I caught wind that there was a hit out on me. With half my force volunteering to be decoys, as I escape town to deal with the matter personally. I then told them that I took care of the problem, and that is why I returned. They bought my lie. Though, there was more truth to my lie than I am comfortable with.'
'And there is probably the fact they have yet to find someone who wants to replace me at my job.'
'After that phone call was over, I talked with my local contacts, to check things out around town, as I started taking stock of the situation I was in. An hour later, I learned everything seem to be okay with the population of the town. Except, that I am now down to half my work force, so my resources are stretched a little thin.'
'Though, that is my fault. And a few of my men that ran with me have finally started trickled back into town, and to their jobs.'
'In a few days, I will start trying to contact the others, to get them to come back to town.'
'But, I feel those that did return are still very scared of the situation. And they would likely bolt at the first sign of trouble from anyone from outside this reality.'
'And I cannot blame them, if they ran again, because I ran in the first place. They say lead by example, and I have tried to do that. But, we had to escape. We were justified in running. If we did not run, the maids might have attacked the station, looking for me. And most, if not all of us, would have been in body bags by now.'
'I am glad that did not happen.'
'And later that afternoon, I started getting some information in. First, I learned that all the women after Lee, at the Devil's Hotel, had checked out of that hotel, and they disappeared the morning after Lee and I left town.'
'I then had some of my men conduct a few interviews with the employees there. And I learned a few things, from the witnesses statements that further proved that Lee escaped.'
'The clerks on duty, that evening, said that Lee checked out stated they saw he left, and the women soon exited after him, into the parking lot. A few minutes later, the women came back, without Lee, and the clerks stated their expressions ranged from angry, to upset, to disappointed, as they headed for the hotel restaurant.'
'So, I think Lee must have finally stolen one of their reality devices, and escaped from them, right after they found out who he was.'
'Given Lee literary talents, that is a poetic way for him to escape.'
'This is further backed up, by reports that two women dressed in maids outfits came into the hotel several minutes after the other women returned. And they immediately headed for the bar. Which means they not only struck out. But, someone told them where the bar was, ahead of time.'
'Which means, that likely one of the women of Revy and Rock's women accidentally spilled the beans on the writer and his stories, that set the maids off after the writer. And when they came to the city, they were heading for the Devil's Hotel, to meet up with the others, to get some answers, as they were looking for the writer.'
'The maids clearly did not count on Lee recognizing them, before they learned who he was. And that one mistake was all Lee needed to be one step ahead of them.'
'And if the maids already knew, ahead of time, they would have showed up with Revy, Rock, and the others. Instead, they showed up later. Meaning, no one told them about the stories, to begin with.'
'I wonder if Rock and Revy's group caught in flack from the maids, over keeping those two in the dark... I doubt it. The maids are close friends with the rest of them. And Rock and Revy's group could have used the very good reason that the two of them would have likely torn this city apart looking for the writer.'
'These are all good signs. It means that both Lee got away. And it confirms that the Rock and Revy's group, that came to the Devil's Hotel, did not tell the maids, because they knew the information would send the maids on the war path. Which it did. Rock and Revy's group did not want unnecessary bloodshed. Further meaning that they wanted to avoid violence.'
' Also, I fully believe that Chang and his group did not tell Roberta and Fabiola either. Nor, did they likely tell Garcia, because he is too close to the maids. As such, Garcia would likely not keep secretes from his close friends.'
'Though, I didn't ask for the hotel video recordings, from the Devil's Hotel, because is Chang and his subordinates are still around. As such, I don't want to dig too deep on this. He might catch wind of my investigation, and I cannot handle him, right now. It is too soon for a confrontation between us. Way, way too soon for me to even come close to handling him, and his organization. And we both know it.'
'It is just that Chang is polite enough not to push the matter, as along as I don't push first.'
'But, all this is enough circumstantial evidence to point that Lee is now escaped somewhere into the multiverse.'
'And I wish him luck. If there is anyone that can escape those women, it is that scoundrel.'
'Yet, there are other questions that concern me.'
'This morning, my officers told me that someone has been spotted driving Lee's pink Cadillac. I ordered my boys to leave the driver of that vehicle alone. But, the details of who that driver is, both worries me, and confuses me.'
'It was reported that a red headed woman was driving that car. And from the pictures my boys took, the person was clearly River. And she was using the keys to the car, instead of hot wiring it.'
“How the hell did she get the keys to the Cadillac? The only one with keys to that car was Lee. And Lee is as scared of approaching River as I am.'
'There is a big, key piece to the puzzle missing in this mess.'
'Speaking of which, Sam is missing. But, if Lee is gone. There is no telling where the redheaded drifter has gone too... Redhead... Nah... It couldn't be... But, she can change genders with a sneeze.'
'And once Chang came to town, Sam had disappeared from time to time. Lee even occasionally complained about that, during our nightly meetings at the Last Resort Diner.'
'Still, Sam had a beard?... Of course. It would be a fake beard. River is that brilliant. A genius. And she had access to a reality device, which included time travel. Meaning she could have shown up in our recent past, to set up set up shop, to wait for Lee. In a similar fashion, to what Lee told me that Yolanda and Eda did.'
'Also, that would explain how Sam and River were in the same place, at once, at the talent contest. And given the way Sam and River were acting. In that situation, Sam was the past self, and River was the future self. With River caught in a minor temporal loop.'
'At least it was not a major temporal loop, like what Lee, and the rest of us, on the planet, got caught in, for several years.'
'But, that would mean that telepathic, genius, redheaded babe was playing Lee and I from minute one... Yes. She is crazy enough to try a stunt like that. And she is clever and intelligent enough to pull it off.'
'And as Sam, River was polite to me and Lee. So, I am going to let her con slide. Besides, this means River likely had everyone else fooled, as well. And I was the only one to figure it out on my own... Damn. I love being genre savvy.'
'Still, I am tempted to speak to Melvin about all this. Since I am sure he could fill in same of the blanks I have. But then, I would have to admit that I knew he was a former member of Hotel Moscow. Give who we are both connected too, that could cause problems for both of us.'
'And given I am not going to ask Chang, River, and their people, all my leads, on Lee, are now exhausted. So, I guess I will just have to hope for the best, for Lee.'
'But, even though my list of leads have run dry, that doesn't mean I should give up. I did put one of my officers on a stake out, in an unmarked car, with heavily tinted windows, in the front parking lot of the Devil's Hotel, near the road, on the other side of the parking lot, from the main hotel entrance. While Revy and Rock's group have left, I figure it might be best to keep an eye on the place.'
'And even with Revy and Rock's group gone, I am going to have to deal with Chang and his crew. And with the casino they started, they are clearly planning on staying here. And with my force is cut in half, I will have to handle them in a wise, and cunning manner. Which I am more than capable of doing.'
'Also, I will have my boys avoid the casino, whenever possible. I ordered them. That if there were problems at the casino. I was to be contacted, and I would handle situation, personally.'
'Still, most of the men and women left here, except for those that have returned, don't have a clue who Chang, River, Revy, Rock, and the others are. And if I try to tell them. They will think I am insane. Then, they lose all respect for me. Next, I will likely lose my job. After which, I would soon be committed to a lunatic asylum. And finally, my replacement would likely do something stupid, to cross Chang, or one of the others, and everyone still working at this station will wind up dead.'
'So, in this case, I will have to handle the situations that arise with delicate care.'
'Though, that old saying really is true. In the land of the blind. The one eyed man is king.'
'But, that is an issue for tomorrow. For now, I just want to get back into my daily routine.'
Just then, there was a knock at Pedro's door to his office.
Pedro said, in spanish, “Come in.”
The door opened, and one of his police officers walked inside. The office stopped three feet in front of Pedro desk. The officer stood there, as he looked at Pedro's face, while he waited to be acknowledged.
Pedro calmly asked, “What is it?”
The officer answered, in spanish, “We have a report that just came in, from our man at the Devil's Hotel.”
Pedro quickly requested, “Give me all the details.” He thought, 'There are too many things that could happen at that hotel, for me to just guess at what this man is talking about.'
The officer stated, “Two minutes ago, a group of women were seen exiting the front of the hotel, and into two unmarked vans, parked beside the front entrance. The bartender, Melvin, was seen leaving with the women.”
“The women were all fair skinned, and appeared to be in their mid-twenties.”
“Most of the women were wearing casual clothing, and carried automatic weapons.”
“We believe the woman with long blond hair, pulled back in a ponytail, was their leader, due to her not visibly carrying a weapon. And the fact she wore a red dress, and olive colored greatcoat, while they others were wearing more casual clothing. And Melvin was seen talking to her, as they got into second van.”
Pedro thought, 'I can already guess who those women where. And who there leader is. But, I need to confirm it.' He asked, “Any distinguishing marks on any of the blond woman?”
The officer said, “Yes, sir. The blond woman had a large scar running down the right side of her face.'
Pedro forced himself to remained calm, as he thought, 'Damn it! Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow have finally come to town. And they found, Melvin. Though, with luck, they will now be leaving town, as well. Still, this confirms what Lee and I suspected, from what Melvin hinted at, towards Lee. That members of Hotel Moscow have undergone the vat process. Turning Balalaika badass army, into a empowered badass army.'
'Now, that is a truly scary thought...'
'And, even though I feel sorry for Melvin, I am so happy I am not on that woman's radar. Though, I need to check on one another thing, dealing with this matter.'
Pedro question, “I take it that we got this report because our man in the field followed my orders?”
The officer responded, “Yes. He did not interfere. No matter what.”
Pedro stated, “Good. Inform him that he is likely alive because he followed my orders.”
The officer inquired, “Yes sir. And are we going to do anything about helping, Melvin?”
Pedro answered, “No. Nothing will be done on our end. He is beyond our help. But, if you feel like praying for him. Go ahead. Either way, thank you for informing me. Tell, the officer currently assigned to that stake out duty, there, that he did a good job. And, barring needed breaks, I want him to remain at his post, until he is relived, at the end of his shift.”
The officer replied, “Yes sir.”
Pedro stated, “You are dismissed. And please shut the door behind you.”
The officer turned around, and exited the room, with the officer gently shutting the office door behind him.
Pedro leaned back in his chair, as he mentally reflected, with a bit of sadness, 'I am going to miss you, Melvin. You were a good friend.'
'But, I have a good idea what is going to happen to you. Still, better you, than me. Though, I would toast you at a bar, with a drink, after my shift is over The problem is that the only two places I like to go for a drink, are from you, and the Rat's Nest.'
'And with you gone. That leaves the Rats Nests. Unfortunately, there is currently no Rats Nest to have a drink at, because the bar was blown up. With witnesses stating the people that exited through the front of that inferno were the two women, in maids uniforms. One had purple hair. The other had green hair.'
'It seems that when those two women come to a new town, they end up destroying at least one bar.'
'Still, why did it have to be one of my favorite bars?.. Though, given the time of day that the Rats Nest bar was destroyed, and when I got that message from Lee, about the maids being in town, that bar was likely where Lee spotted the maids, with those two badasses being none the wiser.'
'Yet. Either way, I am still out of a bar to go to for a drink.'
'But, I am glad I learned yesterday, that the bartender there got out, alright. And from what I understand, she is already working on getting her bar repaired. Knowing her, that will not take long.'
'So instead, tonight I will head home, and open a nice bottle of whiskey, and quietly toast you there, Melvin. My dear friend.'
'Though, I wonder how the Rat's Nest bartender is doing right now?'
(_)
Meanwhile, across town, Bao, the owner of the Rats Nest bar, was in the living room of her home, in one of her cushioned recliner chairs. The chair was not in a reclined position.
At the moment, Bao was wearing a red t-shirt, black pants, and tennis shoes, along with underwear, bra, and socks.
Currently, she on the phone, as she finished up her plans to rebuild her bar.
Bao spoke the wireless phone, in fluent spanish, “Yes. I just got off the phone. My insurance will pay out immediately. The good news the firefighters got their in time to stop the fire from spreading from the main storefront area of the store. And the inspection, after the fire, showed that explosion only took out the main room itself. The structure, and most of the adjacent rooms, and roof itself, are still mostly undamaged.”
“Yes. That is why the building is still standing. Because I had the floor, and walls poured with steel reinforced concrete. The walls were basically concrete blocks with a wooden paneling veneer. Along with this, I included fireproofing materials on the top and sides of the concrete walls.”
“Yes. I like to plan ahead. So, when can I expect you to start work?”
“Yes. We are using the same design the building had before. And I have a spare copy of the engineer approved prints that I can give you.”
“Good. I will see you this Monday.”
Bao then hung up her wireless phone, and set it back on its base, on a small table next to her.
While Bao leaned back in her chair, she thought, 'Well, that is one problem I don't have to worry about. And from what I understand Revy, her friends, and the maids, have left town. Likely for good... I say good riddance. That only leaves Chang, and his organization. I figure I will be fine, as long as I keep my head down.'
Suddenly, there was a knock at the front door.
Bao thought, 'I wonder who is at the door?'
Bao got up from her chair, and walked to the door.
She looked in the peephole.
Bao saw that it was Chang, dressed in his usual black suit, black long coat, and sunglasses, standing on the concrete walkway, in front of the main entrance to her home.
Bao thought, with mild annoyance, 'Speak of the devil. And if I don't open the door, he might break down my door down.'
Bao calmly unlocked and opened the door, to see that Chang was the only standing outside her doorstep. Bao also noticed a nice black, four door sedan car parked in front of her front yard, on the street, by the curb, near her driveway, where she had own her car parked.
Bao thought, with mild amusement, 'At least he came here alone. Maybe he wants a date... Hahahah...'
Bao said, in english, “Hello.”
Chang smiled, as he casually said, in english, “Hi Bao. Long time, no see.”
There was silence between the two adults, for several seconds, as they looked at each other, while deciding what to say next. As they thought over what their reaction should be.
Chang thought, 'This meeting will be good stress relief, after the morning I had at the casino. First, with meeting Sylia Stingray, and Rock. And then the meeting I just concluded with Matthew.'
'For the first meeting, I was given a ten minute warning, ahead of time, by phone, for the meeting, before they would show up. Though, at least when they arrived, Sylia was civil. And she came her a dark blue business suit and skirt. Which matched her hair. And not a hardsuit. And they came through the casino, to my office. Instead of teleporting directly to my office.'
'Those were both good signs.'
'Though, she did request that River and Annie not attend our meeting. Which means she clearly knows who works for me, and what their abilities are. And I would expect nothing less from a genius, such as Ms. Stingray.'
'But, I gave into that request.'
'When I met with them, Rock informed me of their deal. Which amounted to Sylia requesting some compensation over my part in what I did to her, and her friends.'
'Given the amount and terms Sylia requested, I was more than willing to agree to her deal, since was not that much, in that long run.'
'The terms of the deal were a free month at the casino, once a year, including services, for them. For all sixteen of them. In some nice suites. They pick when they will take this vacation, during each year. And they can break that month into small increments over the course of a year.'
'Along with this, I gave them two hundred, four hundred troy ounce, pure gold bars. Which is only a dent in what I now have. And I found this to all be a small price to pay, considering the payment took their bull's eye mark off my back.'
'Though, I did state the casino staff and I would not be responsible for any money they lost when they gambled in my casino. And that they would have to behave themselves, while staying at this casino.'
'Sylia agreed to this, on the concession that Annie and River leave her, her family, and her friend, alone. I said I was okay with that. Because, I was fairly sure that Sylia, and the others in her group, are not planning on taking me up on vacationing at my casino. They just wanted the gold, and other concessions, as a minor form of of revenge against me.'
'With the revenge over the month's stay, once a year, at my casino, as something to hold over me. With Sylia thinking I would worry that she and her friends might show up at any time... Well, I refuse to worry about such matters. And instead, I will focus on the fun I am about to have with my dear old friend, Bao.'
'It is unfortunate, that Sylia and Rock refuse my added monetary offer, for them to stop their revenge on Lee. But, it was worth a try. And they did not take my offer as an insult. They were both very polite concerning their decline of my offer.'
'And right after we reached an agreement, Sylia requested that I pay her. I did so. I called Mal up to my office, and had him escort Sylia to one of my casino vaults. Which, after the two of them left my office, I contact some people guarding one of my treasury vaults, under the casino. And I started them setting out the two hundred gold bars for Sylia, for when she got there.'
'Meanwhile, Rock used her reality device to return to Lagoon Island, to be with her family and friends.'
'Half an hour later, Mal informed me that after Sylia checked the gold over, with a hand held device. Which, from the way Mal described it, I suspect was a tricorder. She then used her reality device to teleport herself, and the gold bars, to wherever in the multiverse she headed for.'
'I suspect Sylia went to a secondary location, with her gold, then she teleported to her primary location, where her headquarters was likely located. So, I could not track her with my equipment.'
'And I am not going to try to track her down. It is not worth it. I have other matters to deal with. And I am not going to risk starting a fight with someone I just paid a fortune towards, to leave me, and mine, alone... Damn. I am starting to sound like, Mal... But, not in a bad way.'
'Though, I was already previously informed on what happened to Lee. Mal and the others, informed me how he escaped those after him, and where he went. And I found Mal and the others took losing them, and my reward for Lee's capture, very well.'
'Also, from what I was told, during Lee and Garibaldi's escape, Lee displayed his skills again. When he faced with two sieges. He used the sieges against each other, to buy time himself to escape. Not bad. Not bad at all. And he even took Garibaldi with him.'
'Still, I don't ever remember sending the orders for Revy and the others to capture human the Babylon Five. It is possible that my boomer double at the time glitched and did that behind my back. Though, if that is the case, I worry what other glitches my boomer doubles have done, during my time at my Tower. As I periodically replaced and disposed of my doubles, when they start to ask squirrelly.'
'But, that is a matter to worry about, for another time.'
'And before Rock left, she let me know the reality where they last tracked Lee to... Jusenkyo, of the same reality Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru are from. In the past, a few months before Ranma was originally cursed to turn into a girl.'
'This merely confirmed what Mal and his friends told me. And it confirmed my suspicions, on how Lee would cure himself. And since I do not want Lee to get caught, I didn't tell any of them that they are now searching for a person of the wrong gender... With Lee likely cursed to turn into, and likely locked into the form of a woman...'
'Though, I will keep this theory to myself. I do not want River to accidentally read my theory, from my mind, and go after Lee, on her own. Because, I already have a plan to send her to help find Lee.'
'I plan to send her to Lagoon Island, to help find Lee.'
'And I have no doubt that River will support my plan. She does enjoy a good plan, as much as Lee and I do. Especially, one that benefits her and those she cares for. Which is the case, here. And I don't mind that she cares for Lee. As long as she continued to care for me, as well.'
'I find jealousy is be such a poor trait for a person to have.'
'And with Lee now a woman. The others will lose track of Lee. And in a month, or so, their time, of them having not luck in finding Lee. I believe Rock and the others will welcome River's help, after losing Lee completely. That way, when they do eventually find Lee. Which I have no doubt they will... That is the way these things happen... River will be there to help protect Lee, and mitigated the situation for Lee.'
'And I have full faith River can handle such a situation on her own. I will request we stay in touch with each other, to help formulate a plan, for when she finds Lee. To help get Lee out trouble with Rock, and the others.'
'And this was only my adventure for this morning.'
'I had another adventure this afternoon. Just after one PM, Arcee and Annie had returned from the B Five Mars. Even though they were planning to do this yesterday, something came up, and they decided to do the mission today. They let me know, about this, yesterday afternoon, and I was okay to put the mission off for a day.'
'Besides, this mission only took a matter of minutes, for me, and those in this reality. Though, they were likely on that Mars for a few hours, to find and capture Matthew. From what I understand, and later saw of him, Matthew was both unharmed, and with his luggage in hand. I don't know how they got him to pack for the occasion... Or, more likely, they caught him on his way out of town.'
'And I am so looking forward to see Annie in a black suit, as the gaming floor pit boss for a shift, in a few days. It will be worth the money. And if it works out, and she likes it. I may hire her on a part time basis as pit boss. Though, I will pay her an saner hourly rate, than her usual fee. And I am doing this as a way to subtly show her, that if she gets tired of her current job with me. There are other jobs she can have at my casino.'
'But, those are plans in the future. Not now.'
Chang became happier, as he continued his thoughts, 'I find that one of the great joys in my life is to have competent, skills, individuals working for me. It makes all the difference in the type of organization I run.'
'With Matthew in hand, when Arcee, and Annie, reported by our internal casino phone system, that Matthew was here, in the back garage. I had Zoe come to the garage, to take him off Arcee and Annie's hands. Zoe then escorted Matthew to a nice suite, that I assigned for him. Where he could drop off his luggage.'
'I picked Zoe to escort Matthew because she is better at handling people, whom are in high stress situations, than Mal, Jayne, or my other subordinates.'
'After Matthew left his luggage in his new suite. Zoe gave him his key card to his suite. Zoe then escorted him up to my personal office.'
'When they got there. I was waiting for them.'
'I sat behind my desk, as Matthew and Zoe stood in front of me. I politely ordered Zoe leave, and head back to her usual duties. After Zoe left, I explained the basics of the situation to Matthew. That he was now in another time, place, and reality, in the multiverse. I told him the basics of who I was. And what my organization was. I even showed him my gender bending abilities. Sneezing on command to change me to a woman, and then back into a man.'
'His reaction was one of mild surprise, which only impressed me further. For him to show such a mild reaction proved that he was the type of person I wanted to work for me.'
'Matthew did ask me why I wanted him? I told him that after the nerves of steel he displayed the night before, that I wanted to hire him on the spot.'
'Then, I told him what I wanted from him. That being I wanted his skills as a lawyer, to draw up contract, and advise me on legal matters.'
'While he was polite during the conversation, I could tell did not like the situation I had forced him into. But, when I quote his monthly salary, in gold. And the benefits and health plan. He quickly came around to liking the idea of working for me.'
'After some small talk, I used my cellphone to contact Zoe, to return to my office, and escort him to the hotel restaurant, to get some lunch. After they left, I left for the garage, got a black sedan, and came here.'
'Also, I am so happy that Ranma came by, during our meeting the morning after Lee left. When we all gathered, as they got ready to go after Lee. She brought that magic lamp with her. And the smoke allowed me to remember all the wonderful things that River and I did while in the time loop.'
'Being a gender bender, with a gender bender lover, is a wonderful thought. Especially, given how creative and imaginative we both are.'
'I think, as a way to return the favor to Ranma, I will give her family a free week, in a few nice suites, in my casino. Along with free use of the spa her family's stay at my casino.'
'And it was wise of me to make sure that River and Annie were not at that meeting. For obvious reasons. They did not trust River. And the others would have all but demanded Annie go, so she could use the force to find Lee more quickly. Which Annie did not want to do.'
'Still, Lee got a way. Though, I will find him. It will just be a while. And this just means that others will likely not find him first. I think after the heat dies down a little, I will allow River to leave and search for Lee. Though, we need to do some talking on our planning on the matter, before she leaves.'
'Now, back to Bao. I bet, she is now worried about me knowing who she really is. But, she is definitely doing a good job of hiding her emotions. I admit that. It always took quite a bit of effort to upset Bao. It was just that Revy had a talent for doing so. I only the other hand, just want to have a little fun with Bao.'
Meanwhile, Bao show not outward emotion, as she thought, with concern, 'Damn. Chang knows it is me. Nothing I can do about it now, but work through the situation. Though, I am glad I did start reading Lee's stories, Black Lagoon manga, and watch the Black Lagoon anime, online.'
'Modern computers, torrents, and high speed internet access, are wonderful inventions.'
'And while it took most of the passed two and half a days, I did finish watching the Black Lagoon anime, and reading the Black Lagoon manga, up to the latest manga issue releases.'
'I must say, the english dub, and the english translation are pretty good. And I found myself, in the anime timeline, and my manga counterpart, were portrayed fairly.'
'Though, I must say in the latest manga storyline that Rock and Revy's counterparts are being their usual foolish selves in helping that chinese spy. But, I am not going to say that out loud. I wonder how that storyline is going to end. But, that is a matter to ponder, later.'
'Still, I have only just finished book two of Lee's stories. And while I am now starting understand why Revy and the others are after his hide. And that the imagination he used to create his stories, only confirms his insanity. Though, Lee had inspiration. Those omakes prove Tex-mex is not a complete pillar of sanity, either.'
'At least now, I have an idea of what Chang, and his new organization are capable of. And with luck, I will be finished reading that book series in the next few days, before I start the remodeling of my bar.'
'Still, I need to deal with Chang, before he starts to cause me problems, like he and the other mafias did in Roanapur.'
Bao calmly inquired, “Hello Chang. How did you figure out it was me?”
Chang answered, “I have my resources, and some people mentioned that the way you ran the Rats Nest bar reminded them of the Yellowflag.”
Bao responded, “Damn. I was worried about that. And you are one of the sharpest people I know. So, it is not surprising you would figure it out.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Bao thought, 'I have already had my bar wrecked this week. I don't want to have my home destroyed, as well. So, I need to take this outside. Just in case there is a fight. Still, I wish I had gotten my gun before answering the door.'
'Though, I am not going to turn my back on this snake. And at this distance I can probably take him, before he and pull his weapons. Not that I am going to gloat about it. I know better than to let my opponents know my skills and abilities. Unless them knowing benefits myself.'
Bao politely requested, “Let's talk outside.”
Chang shrugged, as maintained his slight grin. He casually replied, “Fine with me.”
Bao then shut her front door behind her, as she and Chang walked out onto Bao's front yard.
As they continued walking side by side, as a casual pace, with Chang to Bao's right side.
Bao looked around, as she thought, 'I don't see anyone outside, right now. And doubt I will, at this time of day. Considering, it is a weekday. With children having school, and adults having work. And given the private conversation I am having with Chang, right now, that suits me just fine.'
Chang looked over at Bao, as he complimented, “By the way, you look hot as a woman.”
Bao cracked a grin, as she looked at Chang's face. She said, “And so do you, when you are a woman?”
Chang snorted, as he commented, “I guess my gender forms do look like brother and sister.” Chang thought, 'It is possible that Lee told Bao about his stories. Along, with the Black Lagoon series and omakes. And that I am a gender bender. With Bao already meeting me in my female form, as well. So, she is probably more knowledgeable about the situation than she lets on. Not that it really matters. Though, Bao always was one to know when it was best to keep a secret.'
Bao then came to a stop, and turned to Chang.
With his enhanced hearing, Chang heard Bao's steps stop. He came to a stop, as well, as he turned to look at Bao.
Bao stated, “Yes. Once you know it is possible to completely change gender. It is easy to tell.” She mentally added, 'And I have known since Akira showed me back in Roanapur. Also, that is not all. And fortunately, I have a good excuse for knowing you can change into a woman, that does not involve knowing about the Black Lagoon series, nor Lee's stories.'
Bao continued, “And even I saw you a few times at the Tower, as a woman. I learned from those I served drinks to, that boomers were in many cases designed to look like humans. After that, it didn't take a genius to figure out that, as a security measure, you were pretending to be one of your own female bodyguards, with a boomer double in your place. In your place, I might have done something similar to what you did. At least, on that single issue.”
Bao thought, 'But, I would have likely not changed myself into a woman. Not that I mind presently being a woman, now.”
Chang complimented, “You always were sharp, Bao.” He thought, 'And this does not disprove that you know the truth about Lee, his stories, and the Black Lagoon series. But, it is a good excuse, that might throw someone else off your scene.'
Bao thought, 'Now, to find out why you came to my home?' Bao questioned, “Thank you. So, why you here? I doubt that this is just a social visit.”
Chang answered, “When I learned that it was you that was the one that ran the Rats Nests. I just had to come see you. And I heard the maids blew up your bar... Again.”
Bao flatly responded, “I seems to have become a running gag with them.”
Chang said, “I know.” He mentally added, 'And that, running gag, comment, confirms that you likely know most of what is going on. Now, to make my offer.'
Chang's voice took on a sharp edge, as he continued, “And I just wanted you to know that, if you want, I could help you rebuild your place.”
Bao grimly thought, 'This is how it starts with the mafia. As a way to control someone. Offer the victim the rope to hang herself with. The only reason I didn't do anything in Roanapur, was that there were more of them than me. And that I had nowhere else to go. On the other hand, here I have options, in ways Chang likely does not realize.'
Bao thought, with more aggressiveness, 'And now would be a perfect time and opportunity to teach this man a lesson he won't soon forget.'
Bao smirked, as she commented, “You think you actually scare me.”
Chang returned Bao's smirk, as he casually responded, “Of course.”
Bao offered, “Okay... How about a little sparing match. Just for the hell of it. It will allow us clear the air between each other.”
Chang smile widened slight, as he responded, “Sure. I could use a good workout. And after everything you survived in Roanapur. I knew you were a badass. And I always wondered what you were capable of.”
Bao stated, “Thank you. Now first, a few, reasonable ground rules. This is not to the death. We walk away with no hard feelings. And, before we fight, you lose your coat, glasses, and your two pistols.
Chang said, “I can agree to those terms. And I am going to kick your ass.”
Bao commented, “Let us see what happens.”
Chang then walked over to the hood of his black sedan car. He took off his long coat, and laid his coat, on it's back, onto the top of the hood.
Chang then set his sunglasses onto his coat.
Next, from this holsters, behind his lower back, in double-holsters, on his belt, he pulled out his two Beretta seventy-six semi-automatic pistols. With the pistols' custom golden chinese dragon symbols, and chinese etchings, inlaid into ivory grips of his pistols. He set the pistols on top of his coat.
Finally, he took the left end of his coat, and folded it over the pistols and glasses. So no one would see his items.
Chang turned around to face Bao. He then calmly walked back to Bao.
A few seconds later, Chang came to a stop, about six feet from Bao, whom was facing him, with both adults standing in the middle of the cut grass of Bao's friend lawn.
Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “Are you sure you want to do this?”
Bao returned Chang's smile, as she answered, “Absolutely. I have been wanting to do this, since the mafia families first set up shop in Roanapur, and gave me, and my customers nothing but trouble.”
Chang guessed, “I take it that you didn't like us coming Roanapur?”
Bao flatly answered, “No. I originally came to Roanapur because, at the time, it was just a small, out of the way, fishing village, that no one would notice I was in. I planned to live the quiet life. Instead, you criminals turned that town into a madhouse.”
Chang grin turned into a smirk, as he casually joke, “What is life, without a little insanity?”
Bao flatly stated, “This.” She then charged at Chang.
Chang's smile grew wider, as he had planned for Bao to rush at him. He thought, 'Ladies first. Then, I knock on your ass, and we call it a day.'
When Bao reached Chang, with her right fist, she threw a punch at his face.
Chang block it, while returning in kind.
But, to Chang's surprised, Bao block his blow, and went for his stomach, with her left knee.
Chang sidestep, to his left, while going for a shoulder blow to Bao's right shoulder.
Bao duck under the strike, as she circle around to face Chang. While, throwing another punch, and she finally landed the first blow of the fight. Which was a glancing punch to Chang's lower jaw.
Fortunately, at the last second, Chang was able to lean back, to he avoided the worst of the blow.
Chang immediately took several steps back from Bao, as Bao firmly stood her ground, and she did not follow Chang.
Chang thought, 'Bao, clearly knows how to fight... This might actually be fun.' He complimented, “Not bad, Bao. I didn't realize you were this good.”
Bao calmly said, “Only hotheads show off. Now, let me show you what I can really do.”
Bao then rushed at Chang.
As Boa reached Chang, both of them started trading blows, blocks, and dodges, with Bao constantly pressing her attack, forcing Chang to take step, after step, backwards.
Given their enhanced reflexes, their speed, their movements were hard to see with the naked eye.
Both of them mostly using their fists, but neither were afraid to mix some elbow, knee and foot work into their attacks.
Chang hit Bao in the upper side of her left jaw, only to have Bao immediately return with a blow to Chang's stomach.
As both of them started making contact hits with each other, neither show any sign of wearing down.
This went on for a solid minute, before Chang was about to get a quick knee to Bao stomach, which knocked her onto her back.
Instead of landing, on the ground, flat on her back, Bao quickly did a backwards somersault, that allowed her to land on her hands. Bao continued the backwards roll, until she landed on both feet, and jump back up, to stand at her full height.
Chang did not press his advantage, as he watched Bao swiftly get up into a defensive stance.
And for the moment, there was a lull in the fighting, as both adults noted that neither of them were even breathing heavily.
Chang thought, with mild surprise, “She's good. Bao is very good at this. She is much better at this than I expected her to be. But, the good new is the fact she got into the defensive stance. Meaning she not that crazy about continuing the fight. Unfortunately, with the super-soldier serum, both of us have been exposed to. Neither of us are doing any seriously harmed to the other, nor are we close to tiring. Though, there is one question I need to ask her, before we continued fighting.'
Chang inquired, with slight annoyance in his voice, “Is this going to turn into a four hour fight, like Revy and Roberta once did?”
Bao cracked a grin. She shrugged, as she casually said, “Well, you could always give up.” She charged at Chang.
Chang started laughing, as he stated, “Then, take your best shot.” He then rushed at Bao.
As the two of them met again in combat, both of them fought even harder than before.
After another two straight minutes of intense fighting, Bao caught Chang in a blow to his stomach, which temporally knocked the wind out of him. She immediately circled around Chang. As she did so, she did a sweeping kick to the front of Chang's lower legged, forcing him onto his knee, on the soft dirt.
Bao then swiftly moved behind Chang, and put him in a headlock, with her left forearm around the front of Chang's neck, her right hand gripping her left wrist, and her head resting against the back right side of Chang's head. Though, Bao allowed the headlock to be just loose enough to not make Chang pass out.
As Chang got his second wind back, he realize in thought, 'It's over. I am on the ground, Bao has me in a headlock. But, considering she still has me in a headlock, I don't think she is finished, just yet.'
Bao leaned her head, to beside Chang's right ear, as she casually stated, “You know, Chang. As I am sure you guessed, by now, about me. That I have always liked keeping secrets. Because those secrets kept me alive. Such as none of you in Roanapur ever knew the truth about my past. Not you. Not Balalaika. Not Dutch. Not the blonds at the Ripoff Church. And certainly not that redheaded bitch, Revy. And there was a good reason for that.”
“Given Revy, and most of the others crazies, that for some reason decided to be my customers. And you mafia heads forced me to keep on as customers. Almost all of them had competitive natures. If they had learned of my past, one of those lunatics might have challenged me to a fight. A type of fight, where it didn't matter if I won or lost. It would still cause me problems, either way. But, given you are one of the saner people I know of, I am going to level with you.”
“As I am sure you know, I was a veteran of the Vietnam War. I was a member of the ARVN. As in the Army of the Republic of Vietnam. I made not secret about that.”
Bao voice took on a measure of pride, as she continued, “But, what you, and everyone else do not know, was that I wasn't just some nobody private. I am a graduate of the steel refinery. A member of the Biet Dong Quan. A ARVN ranger.”
Chang's eyes went wide, as he thought, with worry, 'Wow. That is a surprise. I admit that I have completely underestimated, Bao. She might actually be a tougher badass than me... And I am not talking about her physical abilities. The ARVN rangers were on par with those of Hotel Moscow. She could probably give the bloodhound a workout.'
'I had no idea that Bao was such a badass. No wonder she kept this secret from everyone. If Revy found out about this, she would have wanted to challenge Bao, just on sheer principle. And those of us in the various mafias might have actually tried to forcibly recruit him.'
As Chang composed himself, he said, “So, that is how you survived so many bar fighters in Yellowflag.”
Bao did not relax her arm lock on Chang's throat, as she stated, “Yes. And at the end of the war, I was slightly crippled from some chest wounds, to my sides. So, I was not actually at a hundred percent, when I lived in Roanapur.”
“But, I was still able to survive in that shithole your mafias turned Roanapur into. Also, just so you know, my training and combat experience is on pair with the members of Hotel Moscow. And I would guess the Bloodhound as well. I just preferred to keep that part of my life to myself.”
Chang thought, 'That confirms that. Though, I wonder...' Chang asked, “So Boa, how did you end up in Roanapur? At the end of that war, I read that most of your friends in the vietnamese rangers were either executed, or worked to death in so-called re-education camps, by the communists that overran your nation, after the U.S. tucked its tail between its legs and ran.”
Bao coldly answered, “Most of my friends did die those ways, at the hands of those butchers. After the U.S. abandoned us. But, I did not. I was in Saigon at the time of my country's fall. The only reason I was there was because I had just finished recovering from the very chest wounds that cause me problems later in life. Those wounds required a few surgeries to fully repair, to the point I could report back to duty. But, I recovered. And just in time, too.”
Bao's voice turned sad, as she continued, “As the hammer dropped a day after I checked out of the hospital. Those days were a very hectic time. And while most of my friends wanted to stay and fight, I knew a losing battle when I saw one.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'That is another survival trait that has served you week in both Roanapur, all the way to here, in De La Plara Podrido.'
Bao went onto say, in the same sad tone of voice, “There was no point in dying needlessly. Instead, I planned to escape, and continue with my future plans, of finding a good job, finding a good wife, and starting a family. But, you mafia organizations wrecked my plans... For a while... Still, I might start a family here. Though, I wasn't planning on being the one that got pregnant. But then, you do what you have got to do. Though, have children is still far off in my future plans.”
Chang said, in a supportive tone of voice, “There is nothing to feel bad about that, on that matter.”
Bao casually responded, “I know... Fortunately, as I was looking for a way to escape my collapsing nation, I ran into Caxton, and he bailed my ass out. If he hadn't, I would have likely been killed in that losing battle. Or, imprisoned and worked to death, by those communist bastards... Like so many of my friends in the corps, that did not escape the country.”
Chang thought, 'Lee did mention that Caxton and Bao had a past. I even vaguely recall he rewrote a few comments in his, well now her story. And it would make since, in an insane sort of way. Considering they were both fought on the same side, during that war.'
Bao continued, “And even though I was slightly crippled, which I didn't fully realize, until years later. I made it though, and to my destination. Roanapur Thailand. When I reached there, I was able to deal with my wounds, and I lived a peaceful life. I was even able to start up a business. The Yellowflag bar. Everything was fine, until you mafia members showed up.”
“Then, there were all those crazy adventures. Then, you starting playing with the multiverse. Around that time, I saw the proverbial writing on the wall. So, I escaped into the multiverse, only to be captured, by your forces, and I was dropped into one of those vats of green goo.”
“Though, later on, soon after I ended up here. After I got use to being a woman. I realized that I should be thanking you for that process, that turned me into a woman.”
Chang thought, 'Okay. That was not the reaction I was expecting.' He asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Why? I thought you would hate me for turning you into a woman?”
Bao answered, with amusement in her tone of voice, “No. I don't hate you for doing that to me. You see, that vat process not only turned me into a woman. You also fix all my health problems. You even restored my youth. And even though I am now a woman, I have never felt physically better. And I am back to my old badass self. And I have you to thank for that.”
Chang sarcastically thought, 'I think I did a great job in fixing, Bao. The good news is that she is happy about the situation. And given the way she acts, I have no doubt, that over the years, she has gradually overcome any loyalty brainwashing to me that the vat process provided her. Not that I was planning to test that theory.'
Bao stated, in a happy, and eager tone of voice, “I will tell you another little secret. Thanks to you. Right now, I could take Revy, and most of her bitches, in one on one, combat. Though, I just prefer Revy, and the, others not know that.”
Bao tone of voice turned to ice, as she went onto say, “So, I am going to tell you this, just once, Chang. Play your games. Have your fun. But, this is not Roanapur. And I am no longer old and crippled. If you try to get me under your thumb, I will kill you. And if I do come after you, I doubt you, nor any of your friends could stop me.”
Chang thought, 'Just when you think you know someone. Talk about secrets. And the strangest part is that all fits. I have completely misjudged the situation. Still, Bao is a good bartender, and runs a bar that Revy, and her friends enjoy going too. So, I won't push the matter.'
'I guess she was the one to put me in my place. And not the other way around.'
'Though, I need to defuse this situation.'
Chang calmly said, “Fine. I understand. Your secrets are safe with me.”
Bao cracked a warm smile, as she happily responded, “Good.” She then let go of her headlock on Chang's neck.
Bao took a few steps away, as Chang stood up, and turned around to face her.
Chang cracked a smile, as he stated, “I will admit that if I had known you were this much of a badass, I would have done more with you.”
Bao said, “I know. That is why I kept my past a secret. Besides, I like being a bartender. And I am pretty good at it.”
Chang responded, “Very true. And I can appreciate your choice of jobs. Still, I have to know. You stated you were fine with me turning you into a woman. You are not upset at all, about that?”
Bao shrugged, as she responded, in a casual tone of voice, “No. The trades offs make up for it. Though, Lee did mention that you had magical packets that could temporally turn a woman into a man. It would be nice to have some fun, the other way, for a change.”
Chang inquired, “So, I take it that you figured out Lee was the writer? And Lee didn't just tell you?”
Bao coyly answered, “Something like that. Lee and I had a wonderful chat.” She thought, 'And I see that Lee was correct in what he told me.'
Chang questioned, “So, you are not upset with Lee, either?”
Bao commented, “No. It was clear that Lee did not realize what he was doing, at the time. And he answered all my questions. And I am not upset with him, because he is a good, polite customer, and a wonderful tipper.”
Chang agreed, “That he is. And in a few days, I will sent over someone, to deliver you a box of a few dozen of those packets, to play with. The way the powder works is to mix the powder with cold water and splash yourself for the gender effect. A large cup of water is enough to do the trick. Hot water reverses it. One packet equals one shot.”
“Also, you can get a woman pregnant using that. And in theory, yourself. If you are not careful. Because the packet does not reset your monthly cycle.”
Bao responded, “Thank you. And I appreciate the warning. Also, you are welcome to come by the Rats Nest when it is rebuilt.”
Chang said, in a slightly happy, relaxed tone of voice, “I look forward to it.”
Chang thought, 'If she is willing to put this all under the bridge. Then, so am I. Besides, it was a fun fight. And I rarely get to have a workout like that. Given River and I care too much to go full force. Spike is busy with her daughter, Julia. And the others, at the casino, are not skilled enough to match me like that, at full force.'
'I may have to ask Bao to do this some other time. And I will send Bao some of those instant man packets in a couple of days.'
Chang then turned around, and he walked back to his car.
When he reached the hood of his black car, he unfolded the left side of his coat. He then picked up and holstered his pistols. Next, put on his glasses, and his long coat.
Afterward, Chang walked over to the left driver side door of his car, he pulled out his keys, used his clicker to unlock the door, opened the door, got into his car, and closed the door. He soon started the car, and he drove away, down the street, in the right hand lane.
As Bao watched Chang drive away, in his black sedan, she thought, 'Well, that fight was not that bad. Also, it was fun putting Chang in his place.'
'I will be sore for a little while. But, so will Chang. Though, we will both recover. And it seems he kept with the rules I laid down, before the fight. And he is not upset. So, all in all, I am doing better than I thought I would, than I expected I would, after our meeting, just now.'
Boa grinned, as she continued her thoughts, 'And my love life is going to get more interesting. And I do miss being able to pee while standing up. Now, I am going back inside, and work the arrangements and plans I will need to rebuild my bar.'
Bao turned around, and she headed for her front door. As soon as she made it to the threshold of her front door, to her home. She opened the unlocked door, and walked inside, with her closing and locking the door behind her.
(_)
The end of Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man”: Volume 2: “Total Badass.”
To be continued in Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man”: Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
In Lee's chase to be free. Lee has outwitted, outsmarted., out conned, out maneuvered everyone Lee has faced, but the old man and the teenager boy. And that was Lee's downfall.
The writer has been changed into a girl, and she has literally lost her mind. With those after her, having lost her.
Now, the question becomes, do any of them wish to regain what they have lost?
And who will come out on top of the Madman's Ballot?
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 01: “Dongmei's Bloom.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru's Reality, over twenty-four years after Lee first came to that reality. Location, somewhere within the Byankala Mountain range, in China. Time, late morning. Place, a small forest.
It was a warm, partly cloudy day, with the sun behind the clouds, as the young woman had been slowing, and silently, stalking her prey through the forest, for nearly two hours.
The woman was a healthy, pretty woman that was physically, eighteen years old. She had fair skin, and long, black hair that was left loose, to drape down her back, and nearly to her waistline. She had a slender, athletic build. And she was slightly above average height for her ethnicity and gender.
She wore a green short sleeved shirt. The woman wore a black sports bra underneath her shirt. Also, her tucked into light purple colored pants, with the pants having a drawstring at the waist. And she wore red leather slippers, which were conformable for her feet, but were made to handle walking on rugged terrain.
She also wore a brown leather bandolier one across her chest. From her left shoulder, to her lower right side. On the front of her bandolier was a small holes, with sheathed throwing knives. On the back of her bandolier was a sheath for her collapsed, retractable staff. Which she could quickly pulled out and extend at a moments notice. With her being trained to use both weapons to their fullest.
She has been using her years of experience and training, in tracking and hunting, to stalk the elk for almost one kilometer.
For the woman this has been a slow, tedious, venture, of her silently and slowly making her way through the forest, closer to the elk, while the elk slowly wondered the forest, as the animal ate berries from nearby bushes.
She was careful to stay downwind of the animal, as she quietly stalked her prey.
And after two mind numbingly slow hours of reaching within throwing knife distance of the elk. Where she used her skills in stealth to crawl, in a crouching position, to hide behind the bushes. While she saw, in a nearby clearing, the elk, whom was twenty feet away.
The elk was facing to his right side, from the woman, as it bent its head downward to calmly eat some berries from a bush in front of it.
She then slowing pull out one of her throwing knives from her bandolier, with her right index and middle fingers. With the hilt of the knife between those two fingers.
Next, the woman took some slow, quiet deep breaths, as she took aim for the Elk's head, right below the elk's right ear.
She thought, 'If I get this shot right, this elk will be dead instantly. If not, it will be dead in under a minute, and I will just track its blood trail to where it dies. Though, I will have to use my staff to check that it is dead. I know a dying animal is very dangerous. And it might try to kill me in its death throws. Now, to feel for the right time.'
She reached back with her right hand. She had the aim, and all she was waiting for her instincts to till her it was the right time to throw her weapons.
As she waited, she thought, 'I am so happy I decided to go hunting today. Doing this takes my mind off of other, more immediate, personal problems.'
Suddenly, from several feet behind her, she heard a loud snap.
She grimly thought, 'No... No... No... No!'
The woman saw the elk immediately turn in her directly. The elk then swiftly looked away from her direction, as the animal immediately bolted away from her, in the opposite direction from where the sound had come from.
The raven haired woman thought with anger, 'Who would dare spoil my hunt? And I was so close, too.'
As the woman held her throwing knife between her fingers, she jumped up and turned around.
The raven haired woman immediately recognized the two women looking back at her, from about twenty feet away from her.
The two women were standing beside each other, near a large tree that shaded them from the daylight, which was defused from the clouds in the sky.
To the raven haired womans right was a chinese redheaded woman, in her late teens. The redhead had her long red hair, that reached her shoulder blades. She has her red hair pulled back in a simple ponytail, with a red ribbon, tied in a bow. She had a moderate-heavy physical build, with her height being a few inches taller than the black haired woman. Though the redhead was still very pretty.
In the redhead's right hand, she held a moderately large chui, a chinese mace. She held the weapon in a casual manner, with the ball of the weapon pointed at an angle, downward, in front of her, in a non-threatening manner.
The redhead wore a dark blue long sleeved shirt. Over the front of her shirt was a red metal breastplate that was fitted to her chest and breasts. The breastplate had blue painted symbol that curled around the breast region of the plate from the outside, in. The blue lines then dipped down to the bottom of the plate, right above the stomach area, where the two blue lines connected. The straps to the breastplate were black, and wrapped around the underside of her chest, and over her shoulder, where the met, and were strapped together.
The breastplate also doubled as a bodice for the redheaded woman.
The woman's shirt was left loose over her red colored pants. Her pants were button up, with a brown leather belt looped around the waistline of her pants.
The redheaded woman also wore brown leather slippers.
The woman to the black haired woman's left was a pink haired chinese woman in her late teens.
The pink haired girl had a slightly lean, petite figure, with long pink hair. Her height was a few inches short than the black haired woman, Given her a willowy physical build, that only added to her beauty.
The woman's hair was made up in two pink odango dumpling shaped hair buns, on the sides of her head. With her long hair out the button of the buns going down her back.
The pink haired woman wore a sleeveless light yellow coat, with black trimming, that went to down midway to her thighs. The coat was completely closed, and held closed at the waist, by dark yellow sash that was tied into a simple knot. Under the coat was a sleeveless white shirt, which did not show under the coat. And under the shirt was a white sports bra.
Her shirt was tucked into her violet colored pants, that had a drawstring on them. With her coat and sash being over her pants. She also wore dark purple leather slippers.
The pink haired woman had a one-handed chinese doa sword, with the sword sheathed inside a scabbard that was vertically strapped across her back, with the hilt of the weapons sticking out behind her left shoulder.
The black haired woman sheathed her knife back into an empty slot, in the front of her bandolier, as she thought, with disappointment, 'It figures that it is these two. And I guess I left my own trail for them to track. That will teach me for not telling them where I am going, before I leave. Still, I wonder which one of the was stupid enough to step on a fallen branch?...'
The raven haired girl then saw a small fallen branch on the ground, under the sole of the right slipper of the pink haired girl.
The black haired girl thought., 'Yep. It has to be her. And she should no better. Considering she is a better hunter than I.'
The black haired woman used her right index finger to point at the pink haired woman's feet. She then dropped her right hand back to the right side of her body.
The pink haired looked down at her feet. She saw that she was at fault, due to her accidentally stepping on a fallen branch, and snapping it.
The picked haired girl then look back up at the black haired woman. She had a sheepish look on her face, as she said, in chinese, “Oops.”
The redhead just rolled her eyes for a few seconds. She then looked over at the black haired good, as she stated, in chinese, “Sorry about that, Dongmei. Violet sometimes needs to be more mindful of her surroundings.”
Dongmei stated, in chinese, “I agree, Rose. And be happy that you both are my friends, or there would be trouble.”
Violet said, in a slightly concerned tone of voice, which sounded kind of cute, coming for her, “We just wanted to check on you. And see where you went. Considering, that this morning, you didn't tell anyone where you were going.”
Dongmei answered, in slightly deflated tone of voice, “I just needed some time alone. To hunt, and take my mind off of things.”
Rose commented, “But, the only time you do that is when... Oh, that is why you are doing this.”
Dongmei shrugged, as she casually replied, “Yea?” She turned to Violet, as she said, “Also Violet, I am surprised you would make such an amateur mistake. You should know better.”
Violet protested, in a slightly childish manner, “I was more concerned about you.”
Dongmei warmly smiled, as she replied, “I appreciate that.”
Rose asked, “Any chance we can still catch that elk?”
Dongmei shook her head a couple of times. She then said, “No. It is long gone.”
Rose inquired, “Oh well. So, is there anyway we can make this up to you? And improve your mood? I realize you spent a lot of time hunting that animal. And we didn't mean ruin your hunt, like that.
Dongmei responded, in a calm tone of voice, “I know you didn't. And to answer your question. Not at the moment. But, the day is young... On second thought, I think there is. Let's head back to the village. By the time we get back, it will be lunch time. And we can drown our sorrows in a good meal, at a local restaurant. That should make me feel better.”
Violet perked up, as she complimented, “Good idea.”
Rose calmly stated, “I could go for some lunch. And the walk to the village will us a few hours. Giving us enough time to work up a good appetite.”
Dongmei commented, “Good. Because, for making me lose that elk, you are both buying my meal.”
Rose said, “Okay.”
Violet replied, “I don't mind.”
Rose commented, “Besides. I am sure the elders will have something else for us to do, when we get back.”
Dongmei said, “Perhaps. Okay then. Let's go home.”
Dongmei then walked up to the two other girls. And then, together, through the forest, the three women heading back to their home village, at a casual pace.
(_)
A few hours later, a redheaded japanese women, with her long hair in a ponytail, approached one of the gates that village of the chinese amazons.
At that time of day, the gate was open.
The woman looked to be in her late twenties, and she was in magnificent physical shape.
She wore a red chinese shirt, with a red sports bra underneath. She also wore red pants, black leather slippers, and golden bracers on her forearms.
The woman was Ranma Saotome.
While Ranma walked through the gate, she mentally reflected, 'I never thought I would even enter this place again, in my lifetime. And the last time a came was with Akira and Natsuru. Though, that was a good visit. And Cologne laughed her ass off when she found out I had shacked up with two other gender benders. Both of which had been born men...'
'Though, I have focus on what brought me here. That being that we having finally lost Lee's trail.'
'While, I don't know how long it has been for Lee. For us, it has been around four days since we let the maids continue their journey, here, in my home reality.'
'As planned, I used my reality device to teleport them from Lagoon Island, in the Black Lagoon reality, to just outside Jusenkyo, China, of my home reality, in my past, before I was even curse. And when we got there, from the information on our tracking equipment, we knew we were only a three hours behind them.'
'But, Lee has jumped, with Garibaldi, to the middle of Jusenkyo. And while I was sure they were able to avoid getting cursed. Given they are both savvy and careful enough not to. We still had a problem.'
'To my surprise, it seemed that Fabiola and Roberta had seen and read my series. They knew how dangerous Jusenkyo was, And we all agreed not to head their directly. That is why we went to just outside the area. But, the problem was that Lee and Garibaldi could have walked out of those springs in any direction. And giving the mountainous and forest covered terrain around the cursed springs, tying to find their tracks would be next to impossible.'
'When I realized that. I also realized that while I did not want to risk meeting anyone from my past. And I was planning on immediately leaving. I changed my mind. Because I felt it might be best for me to stick around a while longer. And watch the Lovelace maids. At least, until they had tracked Lee and Garibaldi, as they made their next reality jump.'
'So, we just had to sit down a wait for them to reality jump, again.'
'And soon after we had gotten a signal of Lee reality jumping, with the reality device he stole from Rock.'
'Though, it was away from Jusenkyo. And the maids had not clue where they jumped from. And so, as their guide for here, Fabiola showed me the tracking tablet, so I could see where they reality jumped from.'
'A few minutes later, figured out where Lee, and likely Garibaldi, had jumped from, I realized that Lee was more a lunatic, and genius than I first thought. They had teleport from inside the chinese amazon village that Cologne and Shampoo were from.'
'I knew I could not go with the maids to the village. And while we had a signal. We the closer to the location of the reality jump, the better the lock on the signal was. And when dealing with traveling across the multiverse. One needed to get the best coordinates they could, before following their quarry.'
'Also, I wasn't planning to stay in the past of my home reality. Because I could cause a paradox. And the maids understood this. So, I gave Fabiola and Roberta directions to the amazon village, made sure they had their reality device. Which they did. And I reminded them not to pick a fight with the locals. Which they promised they would not do.'
'And from what they later told us. After they returned to Lagoon Island. I believe they kept their promise.'
'I then use my reality device to return back to Lagoon Island, five minutes later for those on the island. And this was just after we had ate lunch. All of us were there, my family, the Lagoon family, the Knight Sabers, Violin, Aeryn, Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, Eda, Balalaika, and B.'
'And so we waited, for the inevitable return of Robert and Fabiola, bring Lee, in tow, so we could bring our revenge on him... Or, should I say, their revenge? I like what Lee did for my family and I. And my family all agreed, that the reason we were helping them find Lee, was to help Lee. That we are only going on this hunt to keep the rest of them from going to far on their revenge on, Lee.'
'And so, we waited, and waited, and waited.'
'Several hours later, near sunset, just after supper, the maids returned. And to our surprise, they returned empty handed.'
'To make matter worse, along with them not returning with Lee. They refused to give us any real details of what happened to them. And what caused them to turn back on their hunt.'
'Though, Fabiola and Roberta did let slip a few things, in what they told us.
'They did say they followed Lee's reality signature to where he made his next jump in the chinese amazon village. They got in touch with, and met with Cologne. And they spoke with Cologne in spanish... And I am not surprised that Cologne knows spanish. That old ghoul just shows one surprise after another... And Cologne stated that Lee and his two friends had left. With them leaving in manner in which they had just disappeared in the blink of an eye. Meaning, they reality traveled.'
'Also, Fabiola and Roberta did mention that Cologne was her usual, polite self. And there were no problems at the amazon village. Which brought the rest of us no end of relief in learning.'
'Though, on a side note, we do not know who the third person was that went with Lee. At this time, we do not think it was important. It could be any number of possibilities. And with not evidence to the identity of the person. Since the maids stated that Cologne did not give them any details on who it could have been. We just placed that little mystery to the side, so we could focus on the more important mystery to solve, which was finding Lee.'
'And so, in the amazon village, the maids used their tracking table to track the reality device that Lee had used to leave my reality. And they soon used their reality device to jumped realities, with them hot on Lee's trial.'
'After that, the maids got real vague. Though, they also stated that they tracked down the trail to the people that had gotten the reality device. But, Lee was no among them.'
'Fortunately, they were not in a bad mood over the situation of losing Lee. We could all tell that something had changed with them, during their hunt. We could tell that much by their demeanor. But, we could not pin down what it was. Except that they were calmer, and slightly... happy...'
'Also, since Fabiola and Roberta were some of the toughest members of our group, none of us pushed the issue.'
'It was then, that Aeryn stated that she would not sit and wait for someone to catch Lee. That she and Violin would not put their lives on hold. And I could not blame them for that. And several others agreed with them.'
'Of course, the Knight Sabers, whom were not really our allies. But, not our enemies, at the moment. Decided to leave, as well.'
'Though, Sylia mentioned that she and Rock had on errand to do together, the next morning, before they would left. Also, Sylia did give us a phone number, with a voice message machine, in Rock's own reality, and present time, for them to be contacted by. When we had finally caught Lee.'
'Most of the others felt the same way. That they wanted to leave, and be contacted when Lee was caught.'
'Though, while the Knight Sabers left Lagoon Island that night. Though, I, and the others, saw Sylia stop by the next morning, in a dress, to meet with Rock. For the two of them to go somewhere else, for a few minutes. With Rock soon returning, on her own.'
'As for the rest of us. We decided to stay at Lagoon Island for a few more days.'
'Though, the main reason we stayed was because, two days after we returned to the island, we decided to throw a babyshower for Balalaika and B. Given they were two and a half months pregnant.'
'And we did invite a number of our friends. But, some of them did not come. Such as Chang, and the male members of Chang's group. Given a babyshower is a very feminine orientated party, this was completely understandable for those with male personalities, to decide to not attend.'
'Along with Spike, Jetta, Faye, and Annie did not coming to the party, either. Though, River, Kaylee, Inara, Zoe, and Arcee did.
'And Eda went and got Yolanda for the party. Also, from what I understand, Yolanda laughed her ass off when she found out those two were pregnant by each other.'
'And even the Lowe family came to the party, as well.'
'Though, Balalaika and B did not invite the rest of Hotel Moscow, because such a party for them, might undermine their authority with their subordinates. Still, it was a wonderful party.'
'In addition, none of us had any problems with those that had supported Lee. Such as River and the Lowe family. We all decided that it was a minor different of opinion. And to table those issues, for later, after the party.'
'And so, the two russians received gifts from those that came to the party and a few that did not. Such as Arcee giving a babyshower gift to the two russians that was from Chang. The gift being a free dinner, and a free night in one of the honeymoon suites at his casino. And Balalaika and B found the gift to be nice. Along with a bunch of other gifts that the two found to be pleasantly happy with.'
'After the party, most of the others left for their homes. Both in that Black Lagoon reality, and other parts of the multiverse.'
'This included Balalaika and B, whom said they had to pay someone a visit... I could guess who. But, I pray I am wrong.'
'Though, either way, only my family, the Lagoon family, and River stayed behind on the tropical island.'
'While River, as Sam, had helped Lee escape, we all realized that allowing River to stay behind might help us find Lee. Because she was one of the few people that knows how Lee's mind works. And while she wants to protect Lee, like my family and I, she did want to be here, just in case Lee was caught. So, she can help mitigate that situation, with her having Lee afterward, alive and in a recoverable stay.'
'And while none of us have said it to her aloud. With her telepath abilities, she knows we realize she has fallen in love with Lee. It doesn't genius to figure that out. Though, that is not to say she stopped loving Chang. If I can love two people at once, why not River.'
'And I was happy to learn that both River and Chang took the news of us losing Lee in stride. They were polite about it. And this was one of the reasons we allowed River to stay on Lagoon Island.'
'And River did state some ideas about where she though Lee might be. After some discussion, we agreed those were some good places to check out. And Revy and myself, followed up on those leads. Unfortunately, the locations did not pan out.'
'So, there we were, four days after losing Lee. No leads on him. Right after lunch. We were having a meeting, in the Lagoon manor gym. Including our kids. With some of us sittings, and others standing. As we were spit balling ideas on how to find Lee.'
'Then, Dutch casually suggested that we hire some expert tracker to find Lee. In response, I mentioned the chinese amazon women were very good trackers. And after a few minutes of discussion, everyone seem to like the idea of me going to get a few chinese amazons to help us.'
'We came all agreed that a marvelous idea, because it would put Lee in a no win situation. I know from personal experience, that once a chinese amazon is on the trail of someone, there is no way to lose them.'
'They are probably one of the few groups that could put Roberta's tracking skills to shame.'
'And we know that once Lee realizes who is after him, he will also be screwed. He won't dare fight them, in fear of accidentally defeating them, and ending up engaged to one or more of them.'
'In addition, even though chinese amazon women are fairly nice to men, that don't annoy them. In some ways, being engaged to a few of them at once might be worse fate than anything we could come up with.'
'Also, Lee would know he cannot lose them.'
And on top of dealing with his cancer that is weakening him. That is, if he has not cured it. Which some of us, including myself, believe to be the case.'
'But, either way, eventually the chinese amazon will find Lee and capture him. With us paying them for their services, at such an amount, they would gladly turn Lee over to us.'
'Though, we would have to provide reality devices to them. But, that would not be a problem, as long as we were careful, and accounted for them, later.'
'Also, even though I one time took Akira and Natsuru to see Cologne, which was a wonderful time for all of us. That to avoid any possible problems. I should go lone to request Cologne to help us.'
'And everyone one of us agreed, it was a good plan, with very few possible flaws to it.'
'Even River signed off on the plan.'
'So, here I am, returning to the chinese amazon village, one more time.'
'On another side note, this is not my present. I did come a few years into the past, because I did not want Cologne to wonder why I have no aged much over the last few decades. That could lead to some interesting questions. And I don't want to have to tell her the truth, about us being works for fiction. I respect her to much to hurt her like that. It might give her a heartattack, by breaking her heart.'
'That all of her three thousand years of chinese amazon history was the fantasy of a woman from Japan.'
'And that would be such a lame way to die, for someone of her skills and life experiences.'
At that moment, Ranma exited the other side of the gate, and into the village. As she looked around, she thought, 'Now, to find someone to help me contact Cologne.'
Ranma continued to look around, and she soon saw someone nearby, to her left. She thought, 'I believe she would help me.'
The woman Ranma saw was a middle-aged chinese amazon woman, whom was in good physical shape. She was wearing casual clothing, for her culture. The woman was about thirty feet from her, to Ranma's left.
Ranma turned to her left, and approached her. As Ranma did so, she thought, 'I am so happy that I took the time to learn chinese before my children were born.'
When Ranma came within twenty feet of the woman, the woman noticed Ranma. She turned to face Ranma.
As Ranma saw the woman looking back at her, she continued walking at a causal pace. She calmly said in chinese, “Excuse me, ma'am. But, could you help me contact a specific person in your village. I have come a long way, and I need to talk to this person.”
Ranma then came to a stop ten feet from the woman. Ranma remained in a relax pose, so as not to give the wrong impression on the woman looking at her.
Ranma then saw how the woman spent the next few seconds sizing her up. The woman then looked back towards Ranma's face, as she calmly said, in chinese, “Who is the person you are looking for?”
Ranma stated, “I am looked for your leader, Cologne. If she is not here, then I would need to speak with Shampoo. I am willing to wait here, or be escort to either of them, at their earliest convenience.” She mentally added, 'I am so happy that Akira and Natsuru helped me with my manners, long before we gave birth to our kids. Such abilities do help in diplomatic situations.'
The woman answered, “Shampoo is on a training trip, with her young daughter...”
Ranma thought, with mild surprised, 'Daughter?!'
The woman continued, “But, I will go inform Elder Cologne. If you could wait right here. Though, might I ask who you are, first?”
Ranma thought, 'It is best I not give my name, considering it is well known that Ranma Saotome was the one who go engaged to Shampoo. Even to the point it was in their local newspaper. Fortunately, I don't have to...'
Ranma cracked a smile, as she requested, “Just inform Cologne that her stubborn redheaded student is hear to see her. She will know who I am.”
The woman said, “I will do so. Please stay here.” She then turned around, and walked, at a brisk pace, further into the amazon village.
As Ranma watched the middle-aged amazon women walk away from her, she mentally reflected, 'I am surprised to hear that Shampoo has a daughter. Given Shampoo never really showed any interest in men, except for myself, when I was guy. Still, I chalk that up to her being in an honor bound situation.'
'Though, I will admit to myself that I can still charm members of either gender, just with her looks and personality. But, given that I now have a family. With two wonderful lovers, that understand me at an emotional level, that few will ever do. I have no interest in romantic relationships, outside of my relationship with Natsuru, and Akira.'
'Still, how could Shampoo have a daughter?... And why does that question trouble me so?...'
'Unless, she did not have a choice. She may have been another victim of Lee and Chang's, like the Knight Sabers, and others... Such as Ryoga, Ryu, and I guess Ken. Where she was kidnapped, given the vat process, including the super-soldier serum, brainwashed, impregnated, and after we defeated Chang, she some how made it back home.'
'Speaking of Ryoga, it was a while after my friends and I had defeated Chang, at his tower, before I saw him... Or, in this case, her. After we defeated Chang, Natsuru, Akira, and I headed for China. Exactly, that was the previous time I visit Cologne. At the time, I did wonder where Shampoo and Mousse was at. But, at the time, I didn't ask, because it might have caused problems for Shampoo especially, to meet my current lovers. And it would have likely spoiled the good mood we were all having...'
'And speaking of Mousse, he could have ended up a victim, as well.'
'I now regret not asking more about Shampoo and Mousse's whereabouts then... But, that is something I will deal with, later.'
'Still, that visit to China was also the time we visited Herb, and her daughter. Among others. Herb found it refreshing to meet a few other people that could change gender. And meeting was good for everyone present.'
'All in all, it was great trip. Sort of like the honeymoon for us, without the wedding.'
'Then, soon came the incident with Bob. It was soon after we returned to Tokyo, from China, that Rico called us, to contact Rock. And Rock them suckered us into ruining a good boy's first date. Given our love-lives, even I will admit that was a bit hypocritical.'
'And after we ended our part of that chase, the fallout opened up a whole new can of worms for us. When we learned that Bob was latent gender bender, and we told Rock we would not continue our chase with Bob'
'Afterward, we did some checking, with Birdy's help. It seems that there are a lot of latent gender benders, like Akira and Bob, on this Earth. And most of them don't know about their latent conditions. And there was no point in informing them, considering it would just cause a whole lot of problems that we didn't want to be a part of.'
''Also, it was during that crazy car chase with Bob, through Tokyo, that Bob and I spotted Ryoga and Ryu, as women. And I promised myself that I would look into it. Which I did. A few days after we told Rock to take a hike, Akira, Natsuru, and I tracked down Ryoga and Ryu. Which was not as hard as I thought it would be. We didn't even need to use one of our reality devices.'
'When we found those two, I confirmed my worst fears.'
'They were women. And pretty women at that.'
'They soon told us that they had been kidnapped, put into vats of goo, changed into women, brainwashed, impregnated. And they had already given birth to this children. Though, the were very vague on how they returned home. And given the situation, we did not ask for details on that issue.'
'Akira then asked where their children were.'
'Ryo stated that their kids were being taken care of by people they trusted, while they were on their training trip. And we knew better than to ask further on the subject.'
'Still, there were a few problems during the meeting.'
'Though, the meeting did start to turn a bet tense, considering I was a girl, with Ryoga referring me as Ranma. While Ryo only knew me as Ranko. And Ryu did not know that Ranma and Ranko were not brother and sister. And instead I was the same person.'
'But, we quickly explained the situation, and my curse to her, and she took the information in stride.'
'In addition, Ryoga stated that she slightly annoyed she was stuck as a girl, while I could still change back and forth.'
'But, I had the perfect way to brighten her mood.'
'First, I told her that instant spring of drown man packets could temporarily turn them back into men.'
'That made both Ryoga and Ryo very happy to hear. And Ryoga stated that she knew how to get some of those packets of magical powder.'
'Then, I introduced my lovers, in more detail. That Akira and Natsuru allowing me to tell Ryoga and Ryu that they were gender benders like me. That they had been born men, and gained the ability to change genders, back and forth, when they were teenagers, as well.'
'Ryoga got a good laugh out of my situation. That given how some many women and men were after me, that I ended up with two gender benders as lovers.'
'Next, I informed them that even though all three of use were born male, and while we could physically change back and further, we had started living as women.'
'But, what clinched the deal with Ryoga being okay with the situation, was when I told her that I still had to deal with monthly periods. Though, mine are less regular. And that I had been dealing with them sense a few months after I was cursed, when I was a teenager.'
'I find it hilarious that Ryoga stated that if she had known that, back then. When we were teenagers. That I had to deal with monthly periods. That she would have called off her vendetta against me, for being cursed to turn into a pig, Which she later cured herself of. Before she was kidnapped by Chang, and turned into a woman. And she would have walked away a very happy teenage boy.'
'Still, that was water under the bridge. And we then talked for a number of hours.'
'After we had finished our conversation, Ryoga and I did some sparring for a little while. And even with the super-soldier serum Ryoga had in her, we were about even. This confirmed that the level we fought at, it came down to pure skill.'
'After we finished, we said our goodbyes, and went our separate ways. And I do keep in contact, every so often, with Ryoga and Ryo. And while they are not lovers. They are good friends. With them doing fine, and their kids doing fine, as well.'
'But, that meeting did have negative impacted me, in other ways.'
'I decided not to contact any of the my other friends, in my past, when I was a teenager. Because, I was afraid they may have been victims as well. At the time, I did not want to know, because in a way, I was partly responsible for what happened to them. Given, I was part of the group that dragged Akira along with us, into space. And we were then all scattered across the multiverse. With it being then, before we are all rescued and returned to our home reality, that Akira told Chang about the multiverse, and Chang's reality being a work of fiction. And that started the whole ball rolling.'
'I just could not face my friends over that matter. Though, I did check to find that my parents, especially my father, and even Soun, were fine. I guess even Chang had standards when it came to his breeding projects.'
'Then, I learned about Lee and his stories.'
'And while I will not admit it to anyone. When I learned that someone else had created this entire situation. Where we were puppets on strings, dancing on someone else's tune, again, after our own series ended, it was like a great emotional weight had been lifted off my chest.'
'I actually broke down and cried, in private, when I came to that revelation.'
'And that best part was that I also realized that with my reality device, I had all the time to make up for my mistake. Because I never got in touch with my friends, I would not risk a paradox going back in time, to visit them. And I could use the time travel aspects of my reality device to go back in time, and visit my friends, around the time we first returned to our home reality, after we defeated Chang and his organization. And with us in China, I would not have to worry about bumping into my past self.'
'And if they had been taken. I could help them through their pregnancies, births, and raising their children. Like we did Natsuru's friends, the Knight Sabers. Plus, with me being a parent, I have some experience on the subjects. And my kids turned out alright.'
'And if nothing has happened to them. I would buy them a beer, and catch up on old times.'
'Either way, they would not know that I was me from the future. And it is a win, win siutation for me. And I may even talk to Natsuru and Akira about this. I am sure they would like to come along with me. I would think that Natsuru and Akira would like to meet. Ukyou and Akane. And I am sure that Ukyou and Akane would get a good kick out of finding out who I ended up with. Though, I am so happy that during our band touring years, that Akane grew out of calling me a pervert for being a gender bender.'
'Though, we could not bring our kids. Because that would raise to many questions. Like how our kids could be almost as old as we were, during that time period. But, I am sure it would still be find for us.'
'And for those that did get kidnapped, they have had the super-soldier serum, so it would soften the blow for them to learn that they will remain young and healthy for several years to come. And for those that don't, we have the rejuvenation therapy that worked so well for Ed and I. So, we will all have several years to come, to catch up on lost time.'
'Along those lines, even though the present here, is a few years in the past for me. If Shampoo and Mousse had been kidnapped, it would be easy to tell. Shampoo would look younger than she should. And Mouse would be a young woman, as well. Instead of a middle-aged man.'
'And if that is the case. Given the longevity that some amazons have. Like the centuries old Cologne. Combined with the super-soldier serum, Shampoo and her child, and any other future children, could outlive all of us.'
'Though, I think it is best I not ask Cologne about Shampoo and Shampoo's daughter. Whom would be Cologne's great-great-granddaughter. Because, it would cause problems for all of us involved.'
'As such, I will check on Shampoo and Mousse, along with all the other old friends, later.'
'But, that is a concern for another day. Now, I need to focus on waiting here, for Cologne to either come to me, or for me to be escorted to her. So, I can ask for her help, in getting a few amazons to aid us in finding Lee.'
'And while it would be tempting to walking into the village to find Cologne. I am not going to take any chances I don't have to. So, I am just going to stand here, and watch for Cologne, or someone else, to come back to me.'
(_)
Around ten minutes later, Ranma saw Cologne, alone, in her usual oversized green shirt, using her staff to hopped over to her, by the interior side of the outer wall, where Ranma was standing by.
Ranma thought, 'Good. She is alone. That means we can talk in private.'
When Cologne came within ten feet of Ranma, while continuing to hope on her staff, she said, in japanese, “Ah Ranma. It has been far too long. How are you and those two interesting people whom accompanied you on your last visit here?”
Ranma thought, 'You don't know the half of it. And I am glad that after our last visit, I noticed that you stopped calling me son in law. It is nice that you accepted that Shampoo and I were never getting together... With you being gracious in accepting defeat in that matter.'
'Though, I am sure that Shampoo returning to the village, a rich woman, partly through my own efforts, probably helped smooth things over between us.'
'Still, I will have to check on her, at a later date, to see if she was a victim of Chang and Lee's, or not.'
'For now, I get to give you a pleasant surprise that will help both of us in this conversation.'
Ranma spoke, in fluent chinese. “Yes. It has. And we are all doing fine.”
By the Cologne came to a stop, six feet in front of Ranma. While still balancing on her staff, she smiled. She switched to chinese, as she complimented, “I see that you finally decided to train in more than fighting techniques. That is good.”
Ranma returned Cologne's smile, as she commented, “Yes. Among other things.”
Cologne raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “Such as motherhood?”
Ranma calmly inquired, “So, you can tell?” She thought, 'My abs are as tight as ever. So, she had to be able to tell in another way.'
Cologne stated, “Of course. It shows in your aura. And it seems that motherhood agrees with you.
Ranma agreed, “Yes. As surprising as it sounds. It does.”
Cologne commented, “Yes. It is a bit surprising. But, as much as you protested about wanting to be all male. Back in Tokyo. You did like to live on both sides of the fence. And living as a woman nearly full time clearly suits you.”
Ranma shrugged, as she asked, “You noticed that, as well?” She thought, 'I wonder what else she can read from my aura?... Likely a lot. I best not directly lie to her. She will likely immediately know. Besides, I respect her to much to lie to her.'
Cologne answered, “Yes. Also, pardon my curiosity. But, given your life. I have to ask. Given that man among men contract situation, that your mother eventually dropped. Does your mother mind that your are now living almost fully as a woman, and your are also now a mother, yourself?”
Ranma's smile got slightly wider, as she stated, “Actually, no worries there. Now, that she has grandchildren to help raise, she is not complaining.”
Cologne asked, “And your father?”
Ranma's smile widened a little further, as she said, “He knows better than to complain. Especially, in front of my mother.”
Cologne giggled a little. She then inquired, “So, which one of those two interesting people, that came with you, is the father?”
Ranma answered, “Natsuru.”
Cologne commented, “I find it intriguing that you would choose to be the mother of the relationship, rather than the father.”
Ranma explained, “Actually, we decided to get pregnant together. All three of us conceived at the same time. We used medical equipment to have each others child. Each of us gave birth to one child. And not to worry. Pregnancy locked all three of us in our female forms for the duration of our pregnancies. Until we gave birth... Actually, for us, the gender lock lasted for about a week after we gave birth to our children...”
“And I must say, we all found our pregnancies to be very enjoyable experiences. And we emotionally bonded even further by going through our pregnancies together.”
Cologne commented, “Yes. That is not unheard of here, as well. And you would be correct that is does create an even more intimate relationship between lovers.”
Ranma casually said, “I know. And we even ended up giving birth at the same time, while all three of us were sharing the same king sized bed.”
Cologne let out a laugh. She then responded, in a slightly curious tone of voice, “All three of you going into labor at once must have been a real surprise.”
Ranma said, “Actually, it was. Even with close due dates, all the medical information we had stated that it would have been very rare to go into labor at the same time. Let alone give birth at the same time. Within the span of less than half an hour. Of course, it could have been a number of things that made us all three of us go into labor at once. A full moon around that time. Pheromones. Something we all ate. The strange luck all three of us have...”
Ranma mentally added, 'Or, Lee... Though, given our luck, it would have probably happened that way, no matter what...'
Ranma verbally continued, “Still, that was nothing compare the poor guy who showed up at the last minute... Or, should I say that last half hour? And he ended up playing midwife to all three of us, at once. Also, to be fair, he is a nice guy. And though the labor and natural deliveries were painful, all three of us tried our best to be polite and nice to him. Because a good person like that did not deserve to be put into a position like that, at the last moment.”
Ranma thought, 'And what happened to Bob afterward. When he went to try to drown his sorrows in a bottle of alcohol, was even worse. Though, I will admit that when I read about what happened in Lee's book three, it was very funny. A planet of sexist aliens, whom gained a variation of my curse, on a world that literally rains water almost all the time.'
Cologne replied, “That was very nice of you, three.”
Ranma stated, “Yes. And he was helpful in several ways for us. Including helping us get, back and forth, from the bed, to the toilet, and back again to our bed.” She thought, 'I am so happy that was a western style toilet. If any of the three of us had squatted, we would have likely popped our kid out, right then and there.'
Cologne said, “You will have to tell me this tale some time.”
Ranma replied, “I likely will. But, that is for another visit.”
Cologne agreed, “Yes. It is. So, are you a father of any of your three children?”
Ranma answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “No. Natsuru and Akira carried each others child. The reason we did our parentage this way was that we knew ahead of time that Natsuru's abilities can be inherited, and we wanted strong children. She is the mother to one of our children, and the father to our other two children. And our children did inherit variations of her powers.”
Cologne responded, “Interesting... So, what can they do?”
Ranma thought, 'I might as well tell her some of what she is asking.' She answered, “I do not want to get too detailed. But, they inherited Natsuru's physical abilities. Including enhanced strengthen, speed, and reflexes. And my training them only enhanced their potential.”
“Also, like Natsuru, one of our children has fire abilities. Another child has lightning abilities.” Ranma grinned, as she felt a sense of pride for her daughter, Nodoka. She continued, “And mine has control over water, ice, and steam. She can even pull water from the air itself. Which I find ironic.”
Cologne stated, “I do, as well. And I can see how using Natsuru as the parent to all three of your children could work to your children's advantage. I might have done something similar in your place. Though, I never thought you would let yourself be second to anyone?”
Ranma dropped her smile, as she said, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “Well, I will admit, that though we love each other, Akira and Natsuru do have a slightly deeper bond with each other...” Her tone of voice turned a bit more happier, as she continued, but not by much. “And we all get along great. Both inside the bedroom and outside the bedroom.”
Cologne giggled a little. She then admitted, “I must admit that I am slightly envious of your relationship with those two.”
Ranma cracked a smile, as she said, “Yes. It is great. And we have talking about going through pregnancy, together, again. But, that will likely not happen for a while.”
Cologne halfheartedly commented, “I am sure. So, what genders are your children?”
Ranma happily answered, “All girls. And we consider all three of them to equally be all our daughters. And the three of them love each of us, and consider us their parents. And they get along with each other.”
Cologne said, “That is nice. So, no sons?”
For a few seconds, Ranma lightly laughed, as she used her right hand to reach over her head, and she scratched the back of her head. She then dropped her right hand back to her side, as she began. Well...”
Cologne casually asked, “Which one of them changes genders?...” Ranma remain silent for a couple of seconds. Cologne raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, with slight interest in her tone of voice, “Do they all of the change?”
Ranma flatly answered, “Yes. And they can change at will. Well, for the most part. And yes, they are all girls. They were born girls, and pretty much live in their female forms. Most of the time.” She mentally added, 'And unlike Akira and Natsuru, they will not lock in one gender form, or another, when they grow older. Which, given their inherited longevity, is going to be a very, very long time, for them.'
Cologne smirked, as she commented, “Ranma. Your life is an endless wellspring of wealth, interest, intrigue, and entertainment. You make life worth living.”
Ranma let out a laugh. She then returned Cologne's smirk, as she stated, “I know.”
Cologne asked, “So, when did they start change genders?”
Ranma dispassionately said, “They started changing when they were babies?”
Cologne responded, “That much have been an interesting time in your lives?
Ranma shrugged, as she answered, “Yea. Potty training them was a learning experience for everyone involved... Considering that no one wrote books on potty training children that can change gender bending, at will.”
Ranma thought, 'That is one of the reasons that Natsuru wrote a book for those that can change genders at will. Along with that, the three of us realized early on that getting our children to stay in one gender, or the other, for very long, was next to impossible... Still, I am just happy that boys and girls don't really start looking different until they are older. So, we could still go out in public with little worry.'
Ranma verbally continued, “And raising them was an adventure in of itself. But, they grew to be nice adults.”
Cologne inquired, “That is good. So, what brings you here?”
Ranma thought, 'Good old Cologne. She gets all the answers she wants about my personal life. Then, we get down to business. Still, I might as well move on, and deal with the matters at hand.'
Ranma answered, “Well, my friends and I are hunting a guy, who wronged us. And wronged our friend. Though, we cannot find him. So, we finally decided to ask for help. And considering I know first hand that you amazons have amazing tracking skills. You were at the top of our list. And we are also willing to pay well, in gold, for the services of some of you more younger amazons. Those that would welcome some adventure in their lives.”
Cologne warmly chuckled for a few seconds. She then said, in a gentle tone of voice, “Ranma. My dear. When it comes to you. The adventure is payment in of itself.”
Ranma replied, “I am glad you feel that way.” She thought, 'It saves us from paying you. Though, Rock and her family would have paid you the loin's share of what we would have given you.'
Cologne kindly stated, “And I am flattered that you would come to us, first. Also, you have come to the right place. But first, as leader of my village, I have to think of the welfare of my village. So, where are you planning on taking my younger sisters?”
Ranma coyly answered, “We are taking them into the beyond. I am sorry, but I cannot get more detailed than that. But, I promise that I, and my friends, will watch out for them.”
Cologne responded, “No problem. I trust you, Ranma. So, who is this man you are after How dangerous is he? And what does this man look like?”
Ramna stated, “First, we want him back alive, and mostly unharmed.”
Cologne commented, “That will not be a problem. Now, please continued.”
Ranma said, “The man we are after is a very shifty, black haired, caucasian american man, in his mid thirties. He goes by the name, Lee. Though, that is an alias. And he is dying of cancer. But, do not let his illness fool you. He is very dangerously.”
Ranma noticed Cologne raised an eyebrow in interest.
Ranma thought, 'I guess anyone that can get the better of me and my friends would peak her interest. Still, I need to inform her that Lee is not going to be tricked into an engagement with an amazon. Also, I will not mention that Lee passed by here, years ago, for you, on his way through the multiverse, to escape us.'
Ranma commented, “Also, Lee prefers to use guile over combat. And he knows about your amazon kissing rules. He will likely do everything in his power to avoid fighting one of your people. Also, we are pretty sure he would has probably cured his cancer by now. So, the time table in finding him is more than we would otherwise suspect.”
Cologne smirked, “Yes. This sounds like a person that would be a worthy challenge for my younger sisters... As a training exercise.”
Ranma replied, “That will do. And thank you. Any help you can provide will be welcome.”
Cologne said, “I assure you. With the amazons I have in mind. That by the end of this hunt, you will have found this, Lee, and likely captured this person. One way... Or, another. Though, I agree with you. Considering the man has not posed a threat to my village, and he would prefer not to fight my people, I preferred to capture Lee alive.”
Ranma missed the hidden meaning of the end of Cologne's comment, as she said, “I am glad to hear that.”
Ranma then watched Cologne smirk, as she turned her entire body, around her cane, towards the nearby gate.
Ranma turned in that direction, as well. She saw three amazon girls, in their late teens, about fifty feet away from them, walk into the village. The three girls were walking in a perpendicular direction, in relation to Ranma and Cologne, as they casually walked towards the interior of the village.
One of the girls had red hair. Another girl had pink hair. And the third girl had black hair.
The three women were all dressed in casual amazon clothing. The redhead had her long hair in a ponytail. The pink haired girl had her hair an odango style. And the black haired girl just let her long hair loosely fall down her back, with her hair almost reaching her waistline.
The redhead carried a mace in right hand, with it leaned on the front of her right shoulder. The pink haired woman had sword in a scabbard, strapped to her back. And the third had a bandolier across her chest and back. The front of the bandolier had sheathed thrown knives. And the back some weapon that was sheathed, that Ranma could not make out.
Cologne commented, in a pleasantly delightful tone of voice, “It looks like the three sisters I had in mind, just arrived.”
Ranma looked at the three amazons, as she stated, “They don't look like much. But, I trust you. So, I am sure they will do.”
Cologne continued to look at the three younger teenage amazons, as she calmly said, “I am glad they meet with your approval.”
Ranma then noticed something about the black haired woman.
Ranma turned to look at Cologne, as she questioned, “Hey. The black haired girl is a caucasian?”
Cologne continued to look at the three girls, as she responded, “She was adopted into the village, when she was young. And since then, she has been a good member for the village. And I ask that you not to hold my sister's ethnicity against her.”
Ranma turned back to the three women, as she replied, “I won't dream of it.”
Cologne said, “Good. Besides, she is also good with translating. She knows a number of languages. Including, Mandarin, and Cantonese... Though, we had to help refine her skills on those languages. She also knows japanese, english, and spanish. The other two only know mandarin, along with some cantonese, and a little english. So, I am sure you would prefer to have another translator, especially one that I can vouch for. And that the other two trust. Considering they are all friends. To accompany you. Unless you want to chaperon them.”
Ranma thought, 'No thank you.' She agreed, “Another translator would be good.”
Cologne said, “I thought so. Now, let me introduce to them.”
Cologne then casually hopped on her staff towards the three women, as Ranma calmly walked behind her, to Cologne's right side.
(_)
As Ranma and Cologne approached the three women, nearby the three women were walking, as they were talking.
While the three women walked further into the village, Violet asked, “So, what are we getting for lunch?”
Dongmei shrugged, as she replied, “The usual place is fine with me.”
Violet halfheartedly said, “I guess so.”
Rose commented, “Honestly, I could eat something different.”
Dongmei grumbled, “Well if you had not disrupted my hunt, we would be having elk for dinner, tonight.”
Rose held the hilt of her chui with her right hand, with the top of the mace set against the ground. She held up her left hand, in a stopping gesture, as she said, “Okay. Okay. We get what we did. We are sorry.” She then dropped her left hand back to her side.
Violet replied, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “Yea. We are sorry.”
Dongmei said, “Good.”
Violet turned her head to her left to see two women approaching. One of whom was their leader, Cologne, and the other was a redheaded woman, in red chinese clothing.
Violet stopped walking, as she said, “Hey, Granny Cologne is walking towards us, with a redheaded outsider.”
The other two stopped in their tracks, as they turned to see the two women approach them.
Rose questioned, in a slightly curious tone of voice, “What is this about?”
Dongmei commented, “I don't know. But, that redhead doesn't look like much.”
Violet wondered out loud, “Could it be the same redhead that beat Shampoo all those years ago, at that tournament.”
The three looked at each other, as they said, in unison, “Nah.”
The three amazon women then looked back to face the two other women, as Cologne and the redhead came to a stopped, around eight feet in front the three amazon women.
The three women nodded their heads slightly, in unison, as respect towards their leader, Cologne. They then looked up at the two women, as Rose stated, “Honored elder, how may we be of service?”
Cologne looked at the three women, as she calmly said, “Children, this woman here is an old friend of mine... Well not that old. She is a former student, whom I taught years ago. And she is likely one of the best martial artists you will ever meet outside the village. Her name is Ranma Saotome.”
Ranma said, “It is a pleasure.” She mentally added, 'I am happy that she did not mention my curse. Nor, my past with Shampoo. Also, with these magic bracers on, I can temporarily lock myself into my female form. So, no accidental spills of hot water will change me into a man, and cause me problems. Along with raising some interesting situations, and problems.'
Cologne turned to Ranma, as she stated, “Ranma, in this village these three are some of the best trackers, hunters, and fighters, of their generation. First is Rose. She is a good fighter. And a decent hunter and tracker.”
Rose silently nodded towards Ranma.
Cologne continued, “Next is Violet. She is good fighter. One of the best in the village. And she is a skilled tracker and hunter.”
Violet nodded towards Ranma, as she said, “It is a pleasure to meet you.”
Ranma casually replied, “Same here.”
Cologne commented, “Violet fighting skills have already reached a point where she can give Shampoo a run for her money. And in a few years, she might be skilled enough for me to take her on as a personal student. That is, if Rose doesn't, beforehand, become skilled enough for me to take her as my student, first.”
Rose and Violet both giggled, for a few seconds.
Ranma said, “I don't see a problem, with you teaching them both, at the same time. You have taken on multiple students before, at the same time.”
Cologne responded, “True. And the last one of this group is Dongmei. She is an expert tracker. One of the best trackers and hunters I know of. Though, her fighting skills need a little work. But, she can hold her own in a fight.”
Dongmei shrugged. She then nodded towards Ranma.
Rose asked, “So, what is this about?”
Cologne turned to the three women, as she answered, “Ranma needs some help, and I was thinking you three would be more than happy to assist her.”
Violet stated, in a delighted tone of voice, “Whatever you want, we will do it, elder.”
Dongmei stated, in a cautious tone of voice, “Hold on. Let's find out what help she needs, before we jump feet first into this situation.”
Rose said, “I am with Dongmei on this one. I want to know the details first, as well.”
Ranma thought, 'At least two of them, including the caucasian one, has some common sense.'
Cologne commented, “Fair enough. Ranma needs some help finding someone that wrong her, and her friends. Though, this is a capture only mission. And the person will not be seriously harmed, nor killed.”
Rose said, “That is doable.”
Violet replied, “I may like to fight. But, harming people outside of sparring, and self-defense, does not sit well with me.”
Dongmei commented, “As long as this person does not threaten our lives, and the person surrenders peacefully, we should not have a problem complying with those orders.”
Ranma noticed Cologne suppressed a chuckle.
Ranma thought, 'What is that about?'
Cologne stated, “Ranma here states the person we are after is a man named, Lee. But, the catch is that Ranma here will have to take you elsewhere to start your hunt.”
Dongmei commented, “I have always wanted to travel.”
Rose shrugged, as she replied, “I got nothing better to do.”
Violet stated, “I might as well go with you two, as well. To keep you out of trouble.”
Dongmei turned to Violet, as she said, “The more the merrier.” She turned to Cologne and Ranma, as she asked, “So, when do we leave? Though, we need a few hours for us to go pack.”
Ranma stated, “No need. We can leave, right now. And we can get you back here, within the hour, at any time you want.”
Rose said, in a confused tone of voice, “I don't understand?”
Ranma also noticed confused looked on Violet and Dongmei's faces, as well.
Ranma stated, “Don't worry. I will explain my travel methods, in a little bit.”
Rose shrugged, as she said, “Okay.”
Ranma turned to Cologne, as she stated, “It was good to see you again, Cologne.”
Cologne looked over at Ranma, as she said, “Yes. It was good to reminisce.” She turned back towards the three girls, as she cautioned, “Now, be careful girls... And remember, that no matter what happens, you are always welcome back here.”
Violet smiled, as she replied for the group, “We will. And thank you.”
Rose inquired, “One thing. We will need to get something to eat in a little while.”
Ranma turned back to the girls, as she stated, “That will not be a problem. Now, this way.”
Ranma then started calming walking towards the gate, to the village, with Rose, Violet, and Dongmei, following right behind her.
While Cologne watched them enter the gate, and leave her sight, she giggled. She then quietly said, 'See you later, Lee...'
As soon as Ranma and the three amazons were out of sight, Cologne turned around on her staff, and hoped back, deeper into the village, to resume her normal duties as leader of the village.
(_)
Ranma and the three amazon girls, soon exited the gate, and walked outside the of walls that surrounded the amazon village.
As they continued walking, with the three girls following Ranma from behind, Dongmei asked, “So, where are we heading?”
Ranma did not look behind her, as she answered, “Not to worry. I am just looking for a place with some privacy. Then, we will be heading to our first location. Which is a tropical island.”
Violet commented, “I may not be the most knowledge person here, when it comes to geography, but I do know that the nearest tropical islands are located several hundred kilometers south of us.”
Ranma giggled. She continued to face in front of herself, as she then coyly said, “Don't worry. You will soon understand.”
Ranma then continued walking, with the three amazons silently following.
A few minutes later, Ranma lead the three girls into a narrow gully, created by two large, rocky hills. The gully was about six feet wide, twenty feet long, ten feet high, with the walls of the gully going nearly straight up.
When Ranma reached the middle of the gully, she came to a stop.
The girls then stopped a few feet from behind Ranma
Ranma turned around to looked at the girls, as she calmly said, “This should do. It offers plenty of privacy... I just don't want others to see us.” She then pulled out her reality device, from her right side pants pocket, with her right hand. She held the device in her right hand, by her waist, as she continued, “Now, girls I need you to stand close to me. But first I have a question. Have any of you heard of the magical Nanban mirror?”
Ranma thought, 'I glad that before Cologne finally left Tokyo, as a parting gift, I rounded up all the magical items that Happosai had in his room, and gave them, in a small bag, to Cologne. Including the pieces of the Nanban mirrior. While I believe Cologne mentioned she could fix the mirror.'
'Boy was the lech pissed when he found out. But, it was worth it.'
'And while I am not so worried about Cologne and some amazons finding out about multiverse travel. I still shutter at the thought of Happosai ever getting his hands on one of these devices. Though, I haven't heard from him in years.'
'Still, Chang would not be insane enough to restore Happosai's youth. No one would want to take a dip into that gene pool.'
Rose answered, “Yes. It is rumored to be one of the lost treasures of our tribe. There is a local folktale about mirror, that the magic of the Nanban mirror lets the holder go anywhere, or any time, just by shedding a tear onto the mirror.”
Ranma countered, “Oh, that magical mirror is very real. Or, was. You would have to ask Cologne if she ever had it repaired.”
Violet asked, “Why would we have to ask the elder about that item?”
Ranma answered, “Because it was her mirror. It was stolen from her, centuries ago.”
Dongmei casually asked, “And how would you know?”
Ranma stated, “Because Cologne, myself, and a few others got mixed up with that mirror once. And we ended up going back in time to when Cologne was a young woman. Though, we all returned home with no serious problems.”
Dongmei commented, “That is interesting to find out.”
Ranma said, “Yes. It was.” She thought, 'And that was my first brush with traveling outside of my own time and space. I wonder if that it one of the reasons Lee involved me in his stories about the multiverse?'
Violet quietly asked, as she looked away from Ranma, “I have a question. But, I am not sure if I should ask it.”
Ranma casually responded, “Go ahead.”
Violet look back at Ranma's face, as she inquired, “Was the Elder always that short?”
Ranma smiled warming, as she answered, “No. In her youth, Cologne was normal height. She had a slender physical build. And she was very beautiful. Her hair was just as long as it is now, though it was a lovely shade of blue. When it came to beauty. I would say, in her youth, Cologne was on par her great-granddaughter, Shampoo.”
Dongmei asked, in a suspicious tone of voice, “You know Shampoo, as well?”
Ranma slyly replied, “We have a past.” She mentally added, 'Now, that is an understatement.'
Rose inquired, “You wouldn't happened to have been the redheaded outsider that defeated her, and she gave the kiss of death to?”
Ranma thought, 'I might as well admit to it. With my luck, the truth would likely come out at the wrong time, anyway.'
Ranma shrugged, as she casually said, “Yes. But, before you decide to do something stupid, I remind you that it was Cologne that trusted me with your well being. So, you can guess that matter has long since been revolved.”
Rose stated, “If the elder is happy with the situation, so are we.”
Ranma saw Dongmei and Violet both nod in agreement.
Ranma thought, 'I am glad that these three are more level headed than Shampoo. Or, we would have had problems.' She responded, “Good. Actually, the last time I saw Shampoo, we are on good terms. I was even one of the people responsible for making her so wealthy.”
Dongmei stated, “That is nice. I do remember when Shampoo returned to the village, she had the village updated in a number of ways. She brought a lot of wealth to the village.”
Ranma thought, 'Nabiki was right. Money can solve a lot of problems.' She said, “That is good to hear.”
With her right hand, Ranma then held up her TV remote sized reality device, as she continued, “Now, I know this is a stretch. But, where we are going is not actually of this reality. Actually, we are about to travel through the multiverse. This device will take us to our destination, in an instant. You will not feel a thing. One second we are here, the next, we are in another time, place, and reality.”
“All you have to do to use this device, is think of a time, place, and reality, hold that thought, and press the red button on the device, and you are there in an instant. You can even think of a person, and other points of reference, and use the device to go there.”
“I know that is kind of sci-fiy for you, considering you probably don't know much about science fiction.”
Rose calmly spoke up, “We have seen the Star Wars movies. And we do get satellite TV out here. Along with internet for our computers. We know what the concept of the multiverse is.”
Violet said, “Such movies are the reason we are good friends with Dongmei. She can translate the dialogue for us, when the subtitles don't make sense.”
Ranma saw Dongmei shrug towards her, in response to her friends comments.
Ranma though, 'I guess civilization marches forward, in all corners of the world.'
Ranma said, “Okay... That will make things easier for all of us. But please. When we travel through the multiverse. No Star Wars jokes. We have heard them all.”
Ranma mentally added, 'And told most of them, as well. Any Star Wars jokes that Akira and Natsuru missed, Violin and Bob likely told. I am sometimes surprised, at some points, that Annie didn't force choke them all.'
Rose responded, “No problem. Still, if that device will take you to the person you want to go, why do you need us?”
Ranma thought, 'I hate to admit it, but that is a good question.' She commented, “Because it is not foolproof. Also, the landing destination is not always exact. We can miss the person by a few hours, and a few kilometers way. Though, we also arrive at the proper reality. But, we always land close to the target, and in a safe location. Within reason. And the person we are after is very, very savvy, and cunning.”
Rose said, “Well, we do enjoy a challenge. And this might win us some some attention from our elders.”
Ranma saw that Violet and Dongmei smile in agreement.
Ranma complimented, “Now, gather around girls, and let's get going.”
The three teenage amazon women walked closer to Ranma. When the three girls came to a stop, two feet from Rama, Ranma thought of the field in Lagoon Island, of the Black Lagoon reality, five minutes after she left. She then held that thought, as she pushed the red button on her reality device, and in an instant, all four women disappear.
The next thing they knew, they were standing in a grassy field, on a warm, partly cloudy day.
The light breeze carried sea water in the air.
From the height of the sun, they could tell that it was the middle of the day.
The three amazons looked around to see they were in the middle of a field that was bordered on two opposing sides, with brush and trees.
In front of them was small watery bay, with a pier, that had a metal boat dock to it. From the lack of rust, the women could tell that the boat was well cared for.
The girls also saw that the beach of the island they were suddenly on, Also, at the shore of the bay, all from the bay, to where the island directly met the sea. With the water of the sea stretching, in that direction, as far as they could see.
They then looked behind themselves, to see a mansion, nearby.
Dongmei stated, “Okay. This is cool.”
Ranma stated, “Welcome to Lagoon Island. The mansion is our destinations. And try to be polite. We are meeting with some of Lee's other victims. And some of them can be real jerks.
The three girls turned to Ranma, as Rose said, “Do not worry. We will be polite. As long as they don't attack us.”
Ranma replied, “Good. Also, we speak english here. I understand that might be a problem.”
Dongmei stated, “Don't worry. I can translate.”
Ranma replied, “Okay. Now, follow me.”
Ranma then started walking towards the front doors to Lagoon mansion, with the three chinese amazon teenage girls following right behind her. All four women walked at a relaxed pace.
(_)
A couple of minutes later, Ranma reached the front double doors of the mansion. Ranma stopped, with the three amazons stopping right behind her.
Ranma then reached over, and found the doors were unlocked. As she expected them to be. Next, she pushed open the right front door, as she walked passed the door, and into the entryway.
The three girls followed her into the entryway.
Dongmei was the last to walk through the door, and she gently closed the door behind her.
Ranma then turned to her right, and into a room, right by the entryway.
The girls followed behind. After the entering the room, the stopped at the entrance. The three of them standing side by side, facing the interior of the room, with Dongmei standing between Rose and Violet.
Rose was to Dongmei's left, and Violet was to Dongmei's right.
They then silently looked around. And to their left, they saw some wide of electronic, theater set up, with a turned off, large widescreen TV mounted to the wall on that side of the room.
To their right, set against the interior side, of outside wall, to their right, were windows with light weight curtains, to allow sunlight through, while maintaining privacy within the room, from the outside.
Below the windows, were a few couches lining the walls. The couches sat side by side, with each other. And the only light coming from the room, were from the windows. But, the sunlight from outside provided plenty of illumination for everyone.
Also, to their right, they saw several young women. Whose ages ranged from late teens to mid-twenties. All of whom were looking at them.
And the amazons noticed that none of the women had weapons on their persons.
Along with this, the older women, and some of the younger women, sat in the couches. While the other younger women casually sat on the floor. With all of them facing the amazons.
Meanwhile, Ranma continued walking, until she was standing beside two women sitting, on a couch, on the far side of the room. One of the women had blue hair that went to her neckline. The other woman had long blond hair, that was loose, and went below her shoulder blades.
Ranma turned toward her english speaking friends.
Though, as Ranma was about to speak, Revy deadpanned, in english, “Well, you certainly took your sweet time, Ramna.”
Meanwhile, Dongmei began quietly translating for Rose and Violet, what was being said in english, into chinese.
Janet spoke up, “Don't worry. You have only been gone for around five minutes.”
Ranma replied, in english, “That's good.” She dispassionately thought, 'Leave it to Revy to ruin the mood.'
Akira asked, “Any problems?”
Ranma shrugged, as she casually answered in english, “Surprisingly. Everything went fine.”
Akira replied, “That is good.”
Natsuru inquired, “So, given I see three young women with you. I take it your mission was successful?
Ranma turned towards the three amazons, as she stated, in a happy tone of voice, “Yes. And let me introduce everyone to everyone. Though first, the red and pink haired women do not know much english. But, black haired woman with them will translated them.”
Dongmei then quietly whispered to Rose and Violet, in chinese, what Ranma was stating.
Ranma continued “These are the chinese amazons that Cologne said would be best suited for the job of finding Lee. The redhead is named Rose. But, don't let the red hair fool you. She seems to have a good head on her shoulders.”
River, Rebecca, and Yukio just giggled at Ranma's joke, while Revy just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, before Ranma turned back to look at Ranma.
A second later, after Dongmei finished translated for her friend, Rose smiled at the compliment.
From the corner of her right eye, Ranma noticed this, as she went onto say, “The pink haired woman is Violet. And the black haired woman is Dongmei. I am told she can speak chinese, english, japanese, and even spanish.”
After Dongmei finished translating, she and Violet slightly nodded their head towards the others.
Ranma said, “Now, onto my family. The blue haired woman beside me is Natsuru. The blond woman beside her is Akira.”
Akira and Natsuru just smiled towards the three amazons.
Ranma continued, “On the floor beside them, with the purple hair, is my daughter, Nodoka. Beside her, with the blue hair and black highlights, is Mikoto, Natsuru's daughter.”
Nodoka and Mikoto smiled at the three amazons.
Dongmei continued translating, as she, Rose, and Violet, smiled back.
Ranma went on to say, “And the green haired woman on the couch, beside Akira, opposite to Natsuru, is Akira's daughter, Yurika.”
Yurika said, in english, “Nice to meet you.”
Dongmei translated, and the three amazons nodded towards her.
Ranma stated, “Now, onto the Lagoon family. On couch that is beside my family, the black haired woman is Rock. Beside her, the redhead with the ponytail is Revy. And the brown haired woman with the dreadlocks is Dutch.”
Revy snorted, with Rock and Dutch looking between them, at her. Dutch just slightly shook her head. Then, all three turned towards the amazons, as Rock said, in english, “It is a pleasure to meet you.”
Dongmei replied, in english, “Same here.” She then translated for her two friends.
Ranma said, “The two blonds on the next couch over, are Benny and Janet. On the other side of Janet, with the brown hair is, Kristina.”
All three women just lightly waved at the three amazons, with their right hands. Before dropping their hands back to their sides.
Ranma thought, 'I think I will keep the parentage question out. And not mention who is the mother to which daughter. Nor, who is the father. Because that could raise some interesting questions that I am sure that Rock and the others would like to keep quiet about.'
Ranma continued, “The two redheads sitting on the floor, in front of Benny and Janet, are Rebecca and Yukio.”
The two redheads just smiled, towards the amazons.
Ranma when on to say, “On the far couch, near you three, the two blonds are Sarah, and Molly. The redhead is River, a friend of our families.”
As Sarah and Molly sat beside River, with River nearest to the amazons, while Sarah was furthest, and Molly sat between them, the two blond women nodded towards the amazons. on the fair end of the couch
Meanwhile, River said, in chinese, “It is a pleasure to meet you.”
Dongmei happily replied, in chinese, “Likewise.”
River then the outside sunlight hit against Dongmei's right hand, which was to Dongmei's side. River noticed that Dongmei was wearing a golden ring, with embedded jewel, on her right forth finger.
River thought, 'Where have I seen that ring before?... And there is something vaguely familiar about Dongmei?... But, I cannot place her face, nor that ring on her finger... Though, that is a mystery for another time.'
There was silent for a few seconds, until Violet asked, in chinese “I see the family resemblance to some of the children. But, where are the fathers at? And if a few of you are parents, to some of the younger women here, why do you look so young?”
Ranma, Dutch, and River started giggling, as Dongmei translated Violet's question in english.
Then suddenly, everyone, except the amazons, suddenly burst out laughing for several seconds. As they found humor in their private joke.
Rose deadpanned, in chinese, “I got a feeling we don't want to know.”
Violet and Dongmei nodded on agreement.
As the others calmed down, Rock stated, in english, “Don't worry. Everything, and everyone is fine. But, that is a conversation for another time.”
Dongmei translated for Violet.
Violet replied, in simple english, “Okay.”
Revy asked, “So, how good at hunting and tracking are you three?”
Dongmei translated what Revy said.
Rose cracked a grin, as she said, in chinese, “The earth speaks to us.” She thought, 'Paraphrasing Lord Bowler. I found that old american western series, Brisco County Junior, to be very funny and very good. And the subtitled version made sense. For the most part. But, that was likely due to the series making sense, only for the most part. Still, a good series.'
Dongmei translated for Rose, so Revy understood what Rose said.
Revy snorted, as she stated, “I'd actually like to see that. Still, it figures, even if these three are good trackers, except for the black haired one, we don't speak the same language.”
River turned towards Revy, as she questioned, in english, “You are half chinese, and you don't know your native language?”
Revy looked over at River, as she smirked. She commented, “I am originally a New York City girl.”
River thought, with sarcasm, 'And you show your upbringing, or lack there of, every day. And I am tempted to tell that to you face, but I don't want to ruin the mood. Nor, start a fight in your home.'
Dongmei looked over at Revy, as she calmly replied, in english, “We will manage.” She thought, 'We have only been here a few minutes, and I already don't like this, Revy. Just something rubs me the wrong way about this woman.'
Revy and River then turned back towards the amazons.
River stated, “One of us needs to go them. And I am the best choice. I know chinese. I can make sure they stay out of trouble. Also, I know how Lee's mind works.”
Janet pointed out, “But, can we trust you to bring Lee back?”
River turned to Janet, as she said, “Should I disappear, it would be obvious I found Lee. But, I won't do so. Because, I am sure you would find us. Plus, it would hurt my relationship with my friends and family. And strain the situation between you, and those at the casino. Especially, Chang.” She thought, 'Whom I do love.'
River continued, “I don't want put them in a bind, on my account.” She mentally added, 'I have already done enough of that.'
River commented, “If I find Lee, I will bring him here. And we will decide his punishment, together.”
Janet replied, “Fair enough.”
Benny commented, “Still, your leads didn't pan out.”
River said, “I suggested those places I thought Lee was at. Not every place. Since only Ranma and Revy followed up on those leads, I did not mention all the places, because Ranma is a trouble magnet.” She turned to Ranma, as she continued, “No, offense intended, Ranma.”
Ranma looked over at River. She warmly smiled, as she replied, “None taken.”
River returned Ranma's warm smile, as she said, “Thank you.” She dropped her smile, as she turned to Revy, as she went onto say, “And I did not want to Revy to tear up half the multiverse looking for Lee.”
River noticed Revy frown towards her. Though, Revy did not verbally response to River.
Rock looked over at River, as she stated, “I agree. River should go. She is the best person for the job. And after everything that has happened, she won't cross us. She is too intelligent to do so.”
River turned to Rock, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Rock flatly said, “Just bring Lee back in one piece. So, we can have our revenge on him.”
River replied, “I will will do so.” She turned to Ranma, as she asked, “Is that okay with you?”
Ranma was still looking over at River, stated, in chinese, “Hey. If you want to spend of quality time with these girls. Go ahead. I have found that when chinese amazons are not trying to kill, or marry, someone, they tend to be pretty good company. And it lets me stay with my family.”
The three amazons smiled towards Ranma, for her compliment.
Also, River smiled towards Ranma, as she said, in chinese, “That is good to hear.”
Revy then noticed something about the three amazons. She stood up, from her place on the couch she was sitting at, between Rock and Dutch. She then walked over to stand six feet in front of the three new teenage girls.
Everyone turned towards Revy, as Revy look more closely at the amazons, up and down, with a critical eye for detail.
Next, Revy said, in an insulting tone of voice, “Honestly... I don't know if sending some backwoods, chinese hicks after Lee, is such a wise idea.”
While Dongmei has been trying to be polite to their hosts, she had been having a rotten day, that had left her very edgy, with her nerves exposed. She was annoyed that she had lost her prey, earlier that day. And she was not feeling very well, physically, due to her having her monthly period.
And Revy has just stepped on her last nerve, by insult her friends, and herself.
Dongmei thought, 'Oh, that tears it! No one insults us and gets away from it! Still, I cannot use my staff, nor knives, because I might hit one of the others. Still, it will be fun just beating her down with me fists.'
Dongmei then charge at Revy, as she threw with her right fist. Her punch hit Revy squarely on Revy's left cheek.
What happened next took Dongmei by surprise.
Revy head did not move an inch, as Revy just looked at back at her, while Dongmei had her right fist still planted in Revy's left cheek.
Dongmei thought, with worry, 'I don't believe that just happen. She should at least have been knocked back a couple of feet.'
Dongmei then watched, as Revy swiftly used her left hand to grip Dongmie's right wrist. Revy pulled Dongmei's right fist away from her face, as Revy's yellow eyes ignited with fury.
Revy lips curled into a slasher smile, as she stated, in sadistic glee, in english, “Your ass is MINE!”
Revy then let go of Dongmei's right hand, as Revy used her own right fist to swiftly punch Dongmei's own left cheek. The force of Revy's blow forced Dongmei to step back a few feet.
Revy then took a few steps closer to Dongmei, as she followed up her attack with several punches to Dongmei's stomach, and breasts. Along, with a few punches to her face, and one to swift right kick to her groin.
(_)
Nearby, River saw that Rose and Violet were about to step in to help their friend.
River thought, 'They will only make this bad situation, worse.' She stated, in chinese, “Violet, Rose, don't try to help your friend. Revy won't kill, nor cripple any of you, as long as you don't interfere. She is just burning off some of her anger, due to Dongmei's punch. I promise you that Dongmei will probably be fine. Though, she will be a little sore afterward.”
Rose and Violet looked over at River, as Rose flatly said, in chinese, “I will hold you to your word.”
River nodded once, as she replied, “I understand.”
Then, River, Rose, and Violet turn back to look at the one sided fight.
(_)
A few yards, on a couch, Dutch commented, “It has been a long time since someone was stupid enough to pick a fight with Revy.”
Beside Dutch, Rock said, “I hope Revy doesn't kill her.”
Benny commented, “Revy won't. She hates Lee too much to cripple, nor seriously injure, one of the trackers brought here to help find that bastard.”
Janet said, “Yea. Dongmei is just going to get her ass kicked.”
(_)
By then, Dongmei had been beaten to the point she was laying on the carpeted floor, in front of Revy, Revy continued to kick Dongmei in her stomach, and chest.
While still sitting on a couch, Rock stated, in a strong tone of voice, “That is enough Revy. You have made your point.”
Suddenly, Revy stopped kicking Dongmei in her stomach. Though, Revy continued to look down at Dongmei's prone form, as she stated, in a low growl, “Be happy I need you alive, and in one piece, to find Lee. Or, you would be dead right now, for your stupidity.” She turn to towards the other two amazons, as she stated, “And if any of you three try this again, I will kill all three of you.”
River quickly translated for Revy.
A second later, Rose flatly stated, in english, “Understood.”
Revy smirked, as she replied, “Good.” She thought, 'So, they do know a little english.'
Revy then took a few steps back away from Dongmei, and towards her family, as
Dongmei laid on the floor for a few seconds.
Dongmei then stood up, and look over at Revy.
Revy turned back to look at Dongmei. She noticed that Dongmei had an unreadable expression on her face.
Dongmei then calmly walked over towards Revy.
Revy inquired, in an arrogant tone of voice, “Still, not enough for you.”
Dongmei then stopped with less than two feet between Revy, and herself. She then used both her hands to slowing move up to Revy's face, and cup both sides of her cheeks.
Dongmei then started to lean her face towards Revy's face.
Revy cracked a lecherous grin, as she said, “Kinky. I like it.”
Ranma immediately saw what Dongmei was about to do. She instantly rush over to the two standing women.
Ranma quickly pulled Dongmei away from Revy, by the back of Dongmei's shirt, as she thought, 'Oh no! This is not happening!'
Ranma then let go of Dongmei's shirt, as she saw Dongmei turn to look at her, with a scowl on the black haired girl's face.
Ranma returned the scowl, as she strongly stated, in chinese, in an even tone of voice, “You are not giving Revy the kiss of death.” She mentally added, 'As much as she likely deserves it.' She continued, out loud, “Doing so will only get you killed. And likely your friends, with you.”
Dongmei looked at Ranma, as she loudly responded, in chinese, “She insulted us!”
Ranma flatly requested, “And I am asking you to be the better person. I know first hand that such kisses only cause problems for everyone involved. I am trying to keep you out of trouble. For your sake. Not hers.”
Revy spoke up, in english, “I don't know what you two are saying. But, she needed to be put in her place.”
Ranma turned to Revy, as she snapped, in english, “Shut up, Revy! I am trying to keep someone from being killed here!”
Revy instinctively took a step back, due to the fact that Ranma rarely ever showed anger towards someone. And given how dangerous Ranma could be, Revy decided that staying quiet would be far better for her own continued health, and wellbeing.
Everyone else, just stayed quiet, as they realized that Ranma was in no mood for snickering.
Ranma turned back to Dongmei, as she said, in chinese, “See what I mean? That woman was never taught manners. In spite of that, once you get to know her, she is not that bad of a person. She is a killer. Yes. But, I know for a fact there is a human being under her bitchy personality. You just have to dig to find it.”
Dongmei visibly relaxed, as she stated, in chinese, “Fine. I will stand down.”
Ranma forced herself to calm down, as she replied, “Good.”
Rose asked, in chinese, “Are you going to be okay, Dongmei?”
Dongmei looked over at her two friends, as she answered, in chinese, “Yea. I have been worse after some of the more vigorous sparring sessions I have had with you two. Though, I am going to be sore for a little while. But, I can walk it off. Also, how do I look?”
Violet stated, in chinese, “You are going to have a few bruises on you face that should go away by the end of the week. Other than that, I don't see any serious damage.”
Dongmei replied, “Good. I don't feet any serious damage to my stomach, groin, nor chest areas.” She thought, 'Thankfully, she miss hitting my genitalia, with her foot. And she instead hit the left side of my inner thigh instead. I will be sore. But, at least I can walk.'
Rose said, “That is reassuring. So, are you going to just accept you defeat, and move on?”
Dongmei answered, “Yea. Elder Cologne gave us a job. That job take precedence over minor defeats.”
Rose complimented, “That is a good way to think about it. I approve.”
Violet agreed, “Yes. I do, as well. Even we can tell that bitch is an immature woman-child. She is not worth killing.”
Dongmei smiled, as she replied, “I am glad you both agree with me.”
Ranma overheard the amazons. She happily thought, 'I am really starting to like these three women. Even after being insulted, they understand when it is wise to stand down.'
Revy then took a closer look at Dongmei's face, and skin tone, as she realized something. She stated, with slight annoyance, “Hey. What a minute. You're not chinese?”
Dongmei turned to Revy, as she flatly responded, in english, “I never claimed to be. I was adopted, into the village, when I was very young.” She then cracked a grin, as she continued, “Though, it did nothing to stop the boys from asking me out on dates. And even a few of the girls.”
A few of the people there giggled at Dongmei's comment.
River turned to the amazons, as she translated for Rose and Violet. A second later, Rose and Violet giggled a little at their friend's comment, as well.
Meanwhile, Revy rolled her eyes for a few seconds. She then looked back at Dongmei, as she replied, “Of course.” She thought, 'I admit. She does have the figure for being asked from both sides of the fence.'
Nearby, River walk looked at the three amazons, as she overheard Revy's thoughts. She mentally reflected, 'I don't want to know what Revy meant by her thoughts.' She looked at the amazons more closely, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I think I will keep a closer eye on these three women.'
Rock stated, “It doesn't matter, as long as they can find, Lee.”
Dongmei translated what was said, for Rose and Violet.
Rose stated, in chinese, “And we will.”
Though, before Dongmei could speak, to nearly everyone's surprised, Dutch spoke up, as she translated, in english, “She stated, that they will do so.”
Dongmei turned to Dutch, as she said, “Thank you.” She thought, 'If this woman wants to translate. And she does a good job. I don't mind if she continues to do so.'
Dutch looked over at Dongmei, as she replied, “No problem.”
Benny turned to Dutch, as she thought, 'I always wondered why Dutch learned chinese? And when she learned? But, I respect her privacy. Plus, she likely learned the language after we moved to the island. Being rich and bored can lead to a lot of interesting... And odd hobbies, to pass the time.' She then look back at the amazons.
Dongmei looked over at their hosts, as she asked, in english, “So, who is the man you are after? And what can you tell us about him, that will speed up our hunt in finding, and capturing him?”
There was silence for a few seconds, and Revy took the opportunity to walk over and sat back down between Rock and Dutch.
As soon as she got conformable, she turned back to look at the amazons. Revy then deadpanned, “Where to start? Where to start?”
Dongmei didn't both to translate Revy's comment.
Rock then leaned over, and whisper into Revy's right ear, “Remember, what we agreed on not telling them.'
Revy softly replied back, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Don't worry. I remember.”
Across the room, Dongmei read their lips, as she thought, 'Okay. I can understand them wanting to keep secrets. And it is possible this Lee caused them all types of embarrassments. Still, I hope the give us enough information to find him. If not. And we fail to find Lee, without a reasonable amount of time. We can always use the excuse they didn't tell use everything we needed, in order to find him... Beside, I don't want them to know that I can read lips.'
Nearby, River read Dongmei's mind, as she thought, with mild astonishment, 'So, Dongmei can read lips, and she is intelligent enough not to reveal that to the others. Not bad.'
Rock turned to the amazons, as she stated, “The man's name is, Lee. He is a caucasian, with short black hair. Though, we have it on good authority that is not his natural hair color.” She looked over at River, for a second. She then turned back to look at the amazons, as she continued, “Also, he is in his mid-thirties. He is dying of cancer, but I have a feeling he already took care of that. And he likely found a cure for his illness. Though, his illness has left him with a lean physical build. The main two traits about Lee is that is he very devious and very manipulative. But, at the same time, he is polite. And that he prefers to avoid violence.”
Rock thought, 'Unfortunately, we cannot say much about Lee's other odd skills, such as his precognition. Nor, can we state his much of origins, without us tipped our hand on his stories.'
Dutch translated in chinese for Rock, so Rose and Violet could understand.
Rose commented, in chinese, “It sounds like when we find him. He won't put up much of a fight.”
Dongmei translated Rose's comments to english.
Dutch countered, in chinese, “Don't be so sure. Lee is a master escape artist. And he likes to think several steps ahead of everyone else. And he is good at planning. He doesn't have one escape plan for any given situation. He has several plans that can be set in motion at once, without anyone else realizing it. Also, he is very good at creating distractions. Also, he will bolt the second you take your eyes off of him.”
Dongmei commented, in chinese, “Sounds like a worthy challenge.”
Dutch translated in english, Dongmei's words, for her family and friends.
River stated, in chinese, “Yes. Lee is a worthy challenge. But, he will not be easy to capture.”
Rose stated, in chinese, “That is why we need more details on Lee. Such as where you first saw him? And where you lost him?”
Dongmei translated for River and Rose.
Rock answered, in english, “We first met Lee on an island, on the northeast coast of Mexico, in North America. The city island is named, De La Plata Podrido. We lost lead in another reality, on a domed colony on Mars.” She mentally added, 'That is still vague enough not to worry.'
Dongmei translated for Rose and Violet.
Rose stated, “That is a good start.”
Violet asked, “How is Lee able to reality travel? And could he do so, before you met him?”
Dongmei translated Violet's question to english.
Rock calmly responded, “Lee could not reality travel before we met him. And the way he can reality travel is by using a reality device he stole from me. The device is the same updated model as the one Ranma used to bring you here.” Rock thought, 'I am glad I was able that Chang gave me a few of his spare reality devices, with tracking abilities, free of charge. And this will allow my friends and I have the best such devices available.'
Dongmei translated Rock's answered.
Rose commented, in chinese, “So, that is why you call him devious, and manipulative?”
Dongmei translated for Rose.
Rock nodded in response to Rose's question, as she replied, “Yes.” Both Rose and Violet understood her.
Rose stated, “That is understandable. So, what are Lee's like and dislikes?”
Dongmei translated what Rose said.
Rock answered, “Along with playing with people lives, like they are puppets on his strings. Lee loves card games. And he is a big fantasy and science fiction fan.” Rock thought, 'That is as far as details are going to go. Any more and I risk giving us all away. So, I hope they don't ask any more detailed questions.'
Meanwhile, Dongmei translate for Rock.
River overheard Rock's thoughts, as she mentally reflected, 'Don't worry, Rock. I will pick up the slack from here.'
River looked at the three standing amazons. She stated, in chinese, “And, as Rock pointed out, Lee prefers not to be violent. He does not like to get into fights. And he prefers not to be around fighters and marital artists. But, he does know how to defend himself.”
Rock thought, 'Leave to River to come to the rescue. I wonder if she is reading my thought.' Rock then noticed River cracked a smile. Rock continued her thoughts, 'Yep. She is reading my mind. And don't worry, River. We have no plans to let them know that you are a telepath. That is your secret to keep, or tell others.'
'And River. Since you are being nice. If you want to help, River. Go ahead.'
River looked over at Rock, and she smiled, at Rock's thoughts. She then turned back to look at the amazons.
Rose inquired, in chinese, “So, we will not be going to any realities that specialize in martial arts?”
River said, in chinese, “Likely not. But, that does not mean the places we will go will not be dangerous.”
Rose turned to River, as she commented, in chinese, “Well, either way. Do not worry. We prefer to err on the side of caution.”
River responded, in chinese, “That is good to hear. So few warriors do so at your age.”
Rose replied, in chinese, “We had very good teachers.”
River said, in chinese, “That I have no doubt of.”
Dutch translated Rose and River's statements into english.
Rose stated, in chinese, “Given you are coming with us, River. We will trust your judgment. You will take us to the places you think Lee might be. And we will take it from there.”
River replied, in chinese, “That will work.”
Dutch translated what Rose and River had said to english.
Benny asked, “So, when will you be leaving on your hunt for Lee?”
Dutch translated Benny's question into chinese.
Rose answered, in chinese, “As soon as we have some lunch.” She then looked over at River, as she inquired, “If that is okay with you?”
River said, in chinese, “That will be fine.”
Both Rose and River turned back to look at the rest of the group around them.
Dongmei translated for both Rose and River.
Dutch stated, in english, “I will take them to the kitchen. And get them something to eat.” She thought, 'It is best to get them away from Revy, before we have another incident. Dutch then got up from her seat on left side of the couch, by Revy, across from Rock, on the same couch.
Dongmei translated Dutch's comment, and Rose and Violet smiled in response.
River stated, in chinese, “I will go with you. Also, we will give you a spare reality device, over your own. Just in case there is trouble with mine.” She then got up from the couch she was sharing with Molly and Sarah. She walked over to the amazons, and stood beside the three teenage women.
Dutch then walked over to the amazon. She continued walking passed them, as she said, in chinese, “This way to the kitchen.”
Rose, Violet, Dongmei follow behind Dutch, with River bringing up the rear.
Just after the five women left the room, those still in the entertainment room, looked around, towards each other.
Janet commented, “That went better than I expected.”
Ranma agreed, in english, “True.” She turned to Revy, as she continued, in a stern tone of voice, “But Revy, you really need to get control over your mouth.”
Revy looked over at Ranma, as she casually responded, “I will think about it.”
Ranma thought, 'There is no point in arguing with Revy on her mouth. Still, the fact she acknowledged my statement, without insulting me is a good sign that she is improving on her people skills.'
Yurika turned to Ranma, as she inquired, “So, Dongmei was trying to give Revy the kiss of death?”
Ranma looked over at Yurika, as she answered, “Yes.”
Mikoto stated, “How back would that had been if Dongmei would have done so?”
Ranma said, “Very bad. Chinese amazons really don't like losing. Fortunately, it seems that these three at least have some common sense. And I was able to talk Dongmei out issuing that vendetta.”
Yukio looked over at Ranma, as she questioned, “So, the other two agreed with not going through with that kiss?”
Ranma turned to Yukio, as she answered, “Yes. While I am not completely sure about Violet. I think Rose has all the makings of a natural leader.”
Rock turned to Ranma, as she stated, “I agree. I could tell this Rose was calm, and logical through the conversation.”
Ranma looked over at Rock, as she commented, “From the moment we met, I got that impression from Rose, as well.”
Benny deadpanned, “Still. Either way. I am honestly surprised that is the first time someone openly tried to declared a vendetta against Revy, that did not involve money, nor our old jobs.”
Revy leaned over, towards Benny, as her used left hand to lightly backhand the front of Benny's right shoulder.
While the tap did not harm Benny, she looked over at Revy, as she said, “Point taken.”
Revy leaned back up in her seat, as she casually replied, “Good.”
Rebecca turned to Revy, as she asked, “Mom, would you have killed someone over that?”
Revy looked at her daughter. She cracked a smile, as she answered, “Let's just be happy that we don't have to find out.”
Benny decided to change the subject, as she commented, “So, who wants to take bets on if those three capture Lee?”
Rock stated, “With River helping, I would state, two to one against them. Lee is still very crafty. And he clearly does not want to be found.”
Akira offered, “I will get a note pad, and we will draw up the bets.”
Natsuru turned towards Akira, as she said, “I well help.”
Revy stated, “I am not covering bets, like last time.”
Janet said, “Don't worry. I am good with figures. And I will help cover this bet.”
Benny offered, “So will I.”
Revy turned to Benny and Janet, as she smiled towards them. She said, “Thanks, guys.”
Nodoka inquired, “Still, I honestly do wonder if those three can catch Lee?”
Molly said, “I get the feeling, with those three here, we will have a better chance of finding Lee, than before.”
Sarah agreed, “So do I.” She mentally added, with concern, 'And why does that trouble me?...'
(_)
An hour later, after the three amazons ate, they began their adventure through the multiverse, with River accompanying them.
After lunch, Dutch had given Rose a spare reality device, which was clipped to the left side of redheaded woman's brown leather belt.
River then lead Rose, Violet, and Dongmei, outside, to back of the mansion.
The four women stood close together. And while River was unarmed, she held her reality device in her right hand.
Meanwhile, Rose was holding her chui both both her hands.
Violet had her dao sword unsheathed, as she held her weapon both her hands.
Dongmei had pulled out her collapsible staff, and extended it to its full length. She held her staff with both hands.
With all three women holding their weapons away from the others in their group.
River looked at the three younger girls, as she thought, 'While I can sense they are relaxed, they are clearly preparing for the worst. That is a commendable trait. Now, to see if they are ready to start this journey?' She asked, in chinese, “Everyone ready?”
The three amazons looked back at River, as they replied, in unison, in chinese, “Yes.”
River smiled, as she stated, “Then, let us go find Lee.”
River thought, 'Lee, we are coming for you. And once I find you, I can help you get out of this mess.'
River then though of the first time, place, and reality, that she had not informed
Ranma and Revy about. As she held that thought, pushed the red button on her reality device, and all four women instantly disappeared, as they jumped to another reality in the multiverse, in pursuit of a target, whom was closer than any of them realized.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 02: “Getting To Know Yourself.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, unknown. Place unknown, though in forest, on Earth. Time, unknown, though earlier at night.
For the two preceding weeks, River, Rose, Violet, and Dongmei sailed across the high seas of reality, in search of the elusive Lee.
They crossed realities that ran the spectrum. From roman style empires, to castles in fantasy medieval kingdoms, to mystical valleys that were full of wonders and mysteries, to alien science fiction city planets, with vast cityscapes that took their breath away in the awe at what they were seeing.
In each reality, they looked for clues, as they spoke to the locals, as best they could.
And except a few minor altercations, that were quickly settled without anyone seriously hurt, they were all fine.
Day after day, they continued to look for Lee. But, no leads presented themselves.
Around two weeks later, since they started their journey, it was night time, over the warm, starry night sky, as the four women had set up camp, in a clearing, in a forest River brought them too.
They had safely set up a small campfire near them. With Rose and Violet already sleeping, on the soft ground, beside each other.
Across the camp fire, from Rose and Violet, sat Dongmei and River, beside each other, as the quietly chatted amongst themselves. With Dongmei being to River's right side.
Dongmei asked, in chinese, “Do you want to take first watch? Or, should I?”
River stated, in chinese, “I wouldn't worry. We are far enough from anywhere to be concerned about that. That is why I picked out this time and location. I know this forest. There are no dangers here. Just plants, and small animals that will leave of alone. There are not even any ants, flies, nor other types of pests nearby, to bother us.” She thought, 'Plus, I don't sense any beasts, nor people anywhere, nearby.'
Dongmei inquired, “Good. So... I have to ask. Why are you after Lee? What did he do to you? We haven't ask any real questions for two weeks. But, while Rose and Violet plan to continue to do so, I want to know why I am traveling across existence itself for one single man?”
Dongmei's question took River off guard, as the redhead thought, 'I have been reading Dongmei's thoughts and she asked that off the top of her heard... Just a reminder that being a telepath does not mean I know everything about someone, whose mind I am reading...'
'And since we have asked a lot from them. It is only fair I at least give them a few answers... Even if I, myself, don't feel conformable with those answers...'
River answered, “Well... Lee did not do anything to me.”
Dongmei asked, “Then, why are you after him?”
River gave Dongmei a look on her face, as she answered, in a sober tone of voice, “Because I want to help him.”
Dongmei recognized that look, as she guessed, “You love him? Don't you?...”
River's face turned slightly red, as she protested, “I do not. Besides, I already have a boyfriend.” She mentally added, 'That can turn into my girlfriend. And I can turn into his boyfriend. And the sex is great.'
Dongmei shrugged, as she replied, “It is not the first time I have known people to share.”
River sighed. She then flatly admitted, “Okay. You're right. I got to know him, and I found I liked him... Actually, I do love him. And while he accidentally screwed almost everyone else that is after him, he helped me.”
Dongmei calmly asked, “Then, why are you after him?”
River answered, “Because, if I catch him, I can mitigate the situation of what to do with him, when it comes to the others.”
Dongmei pointed out, “That is one hell of a gamble on both your parts.”
River conceded, “I know. But, it is all I got.”
Dongmei asked, “So, I get the feeling that you are older than you look?”
River complimented, “Good guess.”
Dongmei inquired, “So, any family?... Children?...”
River answered, “Besides the person we are after. I have an older brother, a great lover, and some wonderful friends. But, no children.”
Dongmei questioned, “Plan on having any?”
River shrugged, as she said, “Sometime. You?”
Dongmei replied, “Of course. I plan to have children.”
River said, “I hope you find a good person to have those children with.”
Dongmei responded, “So, do I.”
There was a few seconds of silence between to the two women, as Dongmei place her hands in her lap.
It was then, that River noticed the ring on Dongmei's right forth finger, as the gold and small jewels on the ring reflecting of the light from the campfire.
River thought, 'I might as well ask her about her ring.' She questioned, “What can you tell me about your ring?”
Dongmei looked at her ring for a second. She then looked back at River, as she casually commented, “Oh this. I have had it since I can remember. I think it is magic, because it won't come off. And the ring grows with my finger. It is not tight, but merely comfortably snug on my finger.'
River thought, 'I need to know more about her.' She asked, “You said you were adopted into the amazon village. Why was that? And do you remember before you were adopted?”
Dongmei answered, “I was adopted when I was six years old. And I don't really remember anything before then. It has something about me being accidentally being hit on the head with a falling rock. Though, I do occasionally get flashes of playing cards.”
River thought, with concern, 'Cards?... I do not like where this is going. Still, I wonder if she has any special abilities that she does not think about.' She asked, “Pardon me for asking, but do you have any special abilities?”
Dongmei stated, “Well, yes. And though I keep this a secret, for the most part. Since, we have been hunting together for the last few weeks, I trust you enough to tell you. Besides my language skills, and hunting skills. I am precognitive. I can sense the future. Though, this makes playing cards boring. Though, I still find playing mahjong and ziangqi to be a challenge. And my precognition does wonders for my throwing skills.”
“But, due to the randomness of chance in real life. I have found that my precognition does not help that much in a drawn out fight. Nor, in hunting. Except when I use it for throwing. And that is why I do not rely that heavily on my precognition.”
River said, while slightly in shock, “That is a good approach to take.” She then thought, 'Oh no... It is not possible...'
Dongmei was oblivious to River's reaction. Dongmei calmly replied, “Thank you.”
River then to good hard look at Dongmei's face for second seconds, the light cast by the nearby fire.
Dongmei noticed this, as she calmly asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “What is it?”
Meanwhile, River did not response, as she continued to stare. And while she did not show any outward expression. She thought, with surprised, and trepidation, 'Oh, Dongmei is, Lee!... How?... Why couldn't I tell?... Of course, Lee doesn't know that Lee is Lee. And now she is completely a she. I have shared few hot baths with her and the her two friends, and she was completely comfortable with the company. So, I am guessing that the ring is magical. And from the chinese word lock means to be locked into her curse female form.'
'And from the original size of the ring, and what she said of her past. I am guessing she was turned into a very young girl. And she has spent that last several years being raised as a chinese amazon. And that ring just grew, as her finger grew, to keep from hurting her.'
'The other symbols also state the other physical benefits she gets from wearing that ring. But, that is not important now. The important part is that Lee is here. I found her. And know one knows I have found Lee. Not even Lee. She has no idea that she is Lee... But, how?... Cologne. It has to be her. I vaguely remember Ranma one time mentioning a type of magical shampoo that the chinese amazons had, that could seal memories.'
'But, if Cologne knew that Lee was Lee. Ranma and Lee both mentioned that Cologne had sent her, Rose, and Violet, to be on this hunt. Chances are she intentionally sent Lee after herself, as away for us to handle cleaning up the mess she created by brainwashing Lee.'
'And from reading Ranma's mind, I know Cologne is too dangerous for me to confront about this. So, all I can do now is focus on damage control.'
'Still, what am I going to do about this?'
'I am a genius... And I am at a loss as to what to do about this situation.'
'I cannot tell Dongmei the truth, because I have no proof. And doing so might ruin the trust and friendship between us...'
'Though, the good news is that she clearly looks up to me. And at at some level, deep in her mind, she still knows to trust me.'
River then realized something, as she continued her thoughts, 'Hold on... I just admitted I loved Lee, to herself. When she remembers who she was, she will likely still recall this moment. And our conversation. With what I said... Though, I will deal with that then... Also, she did say she hoped to someday have children... And once Lee's memory is restored, that would be interesting conversation for all parties involved...'
River then mentally lamented, with a bit of sadness in her thoughts, 'Though, should I do so. Dongmei seems happy to be Dongmei.'
'It is tempting to try to restore Lee's memory. After the whole Revy, Jack Sparrow incident, I know between Annie and I, we could do it. But, should we. I do want Lee back. But, because I love Lee. Though, that would be selfish of me.'
'Dongmei's thoughts on her life and herself are peaceful and pleasant. Instead of the tortured soul that Lee was. And even if I restored Lee's memory. She would still be a she. Still, that is a lot of emotional baggage to deal with.'
'And if I forced her to remember, it would likely wreck any chance I could have with her.'
'If the others discovered that Dongmei was Lee. They would make her remember she was Lee, before they started torturing her. Likely with smoke from Ranma's magic lamp. That would be the easiest, quickest, and safest way to do it. Any other way, might cause a split personality to occur. Though, in that case, Lee would likely let Dongmei be in control, because of the two of them, Dongmei has the Lee that Lee has only dreamed up.'
'And that is another reason why I should not risk wrecking Dongmei's current life, just to restore Lee's memories.'
'I could always just leave Dongmei the way she is. I like her as a person. Personally wise, Lee and Dongmei are pretty much the same person. With the same wants and tastes. Only their memories and genders are different. Well, their physical genders. Lee always had a female mind. And at some level Dongmei cares for me, as well. I could build a relationship with her, from scratch, using that as a foundation.'
'But, that approach has its drawbacks. What if, years later, she remembered her life as Lee? She will soon realize that I already knew for a long time. She could easily hold that against me, and it would wreck any relationship I had with her.'
'Though, that is if the others didn't realize that Lee was Lee, by then. Because if they found out I was seeing someone else, besides Chang. They would realize that person was Lee. With Lee and I worse off. For hiding Lee from them, for a second time. That would blow any good will I have had with them, since I revealed to them that I was Sam, and I hid the identity of the writer, Lee, from everyone else after Lee. With me helping Lee escape into the multiverse, in the first place.'
'And that good will, is the only leverage I have in helping Lee, when it comes to the others desire for revenge against Lee.
'Talk about a catch twenty-two. A real no win situation. I wonder if Lee is how Lee felt for most of his life, as a man. Before she became a female, and took on the Dongmei personality.'
'I need some time to think about this. A lot of time. Because I am honestly not sure how I should handle this.'
Something then occurred to River, about her current situation, that she found humorous. She thought, with mild amusement, 'Wait a minute... Given that Lee is now the female amazon in this relationship, this would make me the amazon chaser in this situation...'
River held back a giggle, as she continued her thoughts, 'The irony is not lost on me...'
River went onto think, in a more serious manner, 'Along with all this, Rock was right. If I just take her away, questions will be asked. And if I do not come back, they will know I have found Lee. Which would only create more problems for all of us, in the long run. To that end, I cannot take Dongmei back to the casino, because Chang cannot protect Lee from the others.'
'And I admire that Chang did try to buy the others off, in leaving Lee alone. It was worth a shot. And I supported him, making the attempt. But, they turned us down. Though, some of them took gold and other payment to not come after us. But, they still want to have their revenge on Lee.'
'Though, I need to tell Dongmei something, right now. Before she wonders why I am still silently staring at her face, without replying to her comment... Yes. That will do nicely...'
River complimented, in a kind tone of voice, “You have a very pretty face.”
Dongmei smiled, as she said, “Thank you. And so do you.”
River thought, 'Even brainwashed, Lee is polite as ever. And she has been polite to me, and her friends, during this entire hunt. So, that is a good sign that I can probably get her memories restored, either fully, or mostly. If we chose to do so. Now, that I think about it. I will not do that without Dongmei permission. That is if I want to tell her that she is Lee, in the first place.'
'Though, before I do anything. I need to figure out a way to ask Ranma about that magical shampoo, and how to break programing that shampoo caused. Though, after I think about it. I am not sure that Ranma's smoke, from her lamp, might be the best way fix Lee's memory.'
'A gradual process might be better. With Dongmei slowly remembering, and thus retaining the Dongmei personality. But, I would likely lose the Lee personality. Still, Dongmei would still remember, while still retaining her own personality, and being her happy self.'
'Though, besides the lamp and doing the gradual process. The only other way to fix Dongmei's memory is to get Annie's help. And we both connect to Dongmei's mind to restore Lee. If Lee wants that.'
'But, I don't want to involve Annie, because she is a friend to both of us. So, I need to do more thinking, before I decide how to handle the situation.'
River returned Dongmei's smile, as she responded, “I appreciate the compliment. Anyway, we need to turn in for the night. So, we are ready to travel tomorrow morning.”
Dongmei agreed, “Good idea.”
The two of them then laid down by the fire.
As River laid on the ground, she thought, 'Okay. The best plan I can come up with is to get Dongmei back to Lagoon Island, and figure out what to do then. I cannot take Lee back to the casino, because that would put Chang, Annie, Simon, and the others, in the line of fire.'
'So, we go back to Lagoon island.'
'We will play this hunt for a few more days. Then, I will say we need to head back to the island for some rest. That should work. I will figure out what to do, from there.'
'And no one would expect me to return to Lagoon Island, with Lee, to hide her, from those on the island, looking for. It is so audacious a plan, it has to work. If Lee was in her right mind, she would be proud of me for pulling off something like this.'
'And sleeping on this might be best. A plan might come to me in my sleep, on how to hand this situation.'
'Still, I will look on the bright side. I have found Lee. And she is now healthy, and happy. Though, I hope I can maintain her friendship, through the days and weeks to come...'
River then closed her eyes. As did Dongmei. And they soon went to sleep, beside each other, on the soft ground.
(_)
The next morning came earlier for the four women. Though, as the coolness of the dark night sky gave way to the warm sunny day, Rose, Violet, and Dongmei were already up for the day.
They had just finished cleaning up after themselves. Such as, smothering in dirt over their previous night's camp fire.
River was still getting ready to face the day. And unfortunately, a plan for her situation did not come to her, in her sleep.'
Dongmei put on her bandolier, with its throwing knives, and collapsed staff, already in it. As she adjusted the bandolier slightly, she looked over at her friends. She asked, in a deflated tone of voice, in chinese, “This hunt is going nowhere. So, what now?”
Violet slung the scabbard of her sheathed dao sword, with the strap going across her clothed chest. She turned to her friends as she responded, in chinese, “Good question. Even I can tell that hunt is going nowhere?”
Rose held her chui her right hand, as she looked over at Violet and Dongmei. She stated, with disgust in her tone of voice, in chinese, “This isn't a hunt. A hunt has clues, and a trail. In the last two weeks, we have had neither. And given the literally infinite distance, eternal time, and endless possibilities, that this Lee could hide in, we may never find him. I hate to say this. But, I don't see the point of continuing this hunt.”
Violet inquired, “Still, don't you have any pride?”
Rose flatly answered, “Yes. But, I realize this is becoming a waste of our time. And there is no way I can see how we can find Lee, now. There is no trail. No clues. No nothing.”
Violet suggested, “Well, sometimes it is best to start a hunt, where the trail first began.”
Dongmei asked, “The past?”
Rose smirked, “Yes. I like that idea. They never said what version of Lee they wanted.”
Violet suggested, “It is best we leave before River gets finished.” They looked at some nearby bushes, as she continued, “Because she always seems to know what we are thinking.”
Rose agreed, “Good point.”
Dongmei inquired, “So, do you remember the name of that city they last saw Lee in?”
Rose stated, “Yes. And we will just capture the Lee of the time, before he started running. Now, get closer, so we can do this.”
Violet and Dongmei walked closer to Rose. As they did so, Rose used her left hand to pulled out her reality device from left side of her belt, She then thought of when, where and what reality she wanted to take herself, and her friends too. She held that thought, as she used she used her reality device. In an instant, all three amazons disappeared.
(_)
Nearby, a minute later, River had finally been able to finish what she was doing. She was standing up, as she pulled up her pants. Then, zipped and buttoned up her pants.
And she had read the minds of the amazon woman. Unfortunately, she literally in a position, where she could have not stopped them.
River soon walked passed the bushes and into the clearing, where they had camped the previous night. And her worst fears were confirmed, as she saw the amazons were gone.
River thought, in annoyance, and a bit of anger, mostly towards herself, 'Damn my modesty. Damn those girls for being so devious, in coming up with plans on the fly. Damn me for not coming up with a plan, to help Lee, while I was asleep. And damn us for not having the foresight to explain what a paradox is. And the dangers of causing a paradox...'
River emotionally caught herself, as she forced herself to calm down. She continued her thoughts, 'At least I read what they were planning, and I can use the same thoughts that Rose has went the disappeared... I just hope that I get their before they start to cause a paradox.'
River then pulled our her own reality device from a pocket, with her right hand, and she thought the same exact thing Rose has been thinking, as she pressed the red button on her reality device, to teleport across the multiverse in the blink of an eye.
(_)
Reality, Lee's Reality. Location, the island De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Date, several days before Lee first left the city to escape into the multiverse. Place, inside the city of De La Plata Podrio, in darkened, dimly lit alleyway. Time, just after nightfall.
As the three women look around, their eyes adjusted to he dim light, and they soon saw each other more clearly.
Rose hooked her her reality device to the left side of her belt, as she held her chui mace in both her hands. She stated, “Okay, girls. We don't know what we to expect here, so pull out your weapons, and be ready for anything.”
Violet and Dongmei did not reply, as they did as instructive to do.
They pulled out their weapons
Violet unsheathed her dao sword, from behind her left shoulder. And she held the hilt of the weapon her her right hand.
Dongmei pulled out collapse staff, and extended it. As she held her weapon, with both hands, she asked, “Now, where would we find him at?”
Rose calmly suggested, “Let's duck our heads out of the alleyway, and look down the sides of the street.”
The three women then walked to one of the exits of the alleyway, they leaned out and look down both ways of the street. While their alleyway was dark, there were street lights every so often, and they saw some people walking down the street both ways, but none of them fit Lee physical description.
Violet suggested, “Let's try the other street.”
The three women then walks back over to the other end of the alleyway. The leaned out both ways. They saw a few people walking down the alleyway. But, one specific man, whom has just walked under a street light, toward them, on the sidewalk they were on, caught their eye.
The man was dressed in pants, shoes, a shirt, over a cloth jacket, along with a baseball cap, and glasses.
The three of them walked a few feet back into the alleyway, as they looked at each other.
Violet stated, “There he is. That is Lee.”
Dongmei asked, “Are you sure it is him?”
Violet answered, “Yes. A caucasian man, with short black hair. You can tell his hair color from around his baseball cap. He even has a gaunt face, from the cancer. And he is in his mid-thirties.”
Rose replied, “I agree. It is him.”
Dongmei said, “You two agreeing on this, it good enough for me.”
Violet asked, “So, how do we catch him?”
Dongmei commented, “He is coming our way. It is your call, Rose?
Rose held her chui in her right hand, as she said, “We just grab him off the street, and bring him here. Remember, Rock stated Lee prefers to avoid violence. We can use that to our advantages.”
Dongmei asked, “What is the plan?”
Rose stated, “We do not want to harm him. We will just pulled him into the alleyway, and place him with his back against the wall. We have weapons, and we will use them in an intimidating manner, if we have to. But, if he is as intelligent as the other state he is, he will surrender.”
“Violet, you and I will snatch him with our free hands. We will be quick. Dongmei, you stand behind us. And be ready to assist us, if need be. And remember, we are not to seriously harm, nor kill him.”
Dongmei shrugged, “Good plan.”
Violet agreed, “Yes. That is doable.”
Several seconds later, the three amazons watched as Lee passed by their alleyway.
Dongmei stood back, as Rose and Violet then stuck out, towards Lee, whom was only six feet way from them. The redhead and pink haired women both quickly rushed from the shadows of the alleyway, and they used their free hands to pull Lee into the alleyway.
A couple of seconds later, Lee found himself standing, with his back to the wall, while he looked at the three chinese amazon women, whom were holding their weapons towards him.
Rose and Violet also let go of Lee, as they took a took a couple of steps back, in case Lee did try something.
What happened next caught them off-guard.
They saw Lee smirk, as he stated, in chinese, “From the look of your clothing and weapons. I am guessing that you are chinese amazons. First, I have no interest in fighting you what so ever. That would be a no win situation for me, from either being engaged to one of you, or being killed. Though, it might not be a good idea to take me away, right now.”
(_)
Meanwhile, a few feet behind the chinese amazons, River arrived in the reality, in the shadows of the alleyway.
As River took stock of the situation, she thought, 'Good, I am still in time to stop this mess. And none of them has seen me yet. Now, what I am going to do to avert this time wreck?...”
'First, it good, from reading past Lee's mind after this, that she did not remember any of this. Or, she just didn't think about it. Either way, past Lee does not realize that Dongmei is her future self.'
'It is tempting to tell Lee of the past, and Dongmei of the present, what is going on. But, that would ruin the situation. Still, it is also nice that I know that Lee will be fine, and happy. Though, brainwashed. But, we can always work on that.'
'Still, either way, I still need to explain how dangerous paradoxes are. Along with the fact that I need to get these girls back to Lagoon Island, before they can cause any more problems. And when we get back, I need to get their reality device from them, so they cannot do this again.'
'Now, I need to walk out of the shadows and settle this, before things do get worse...'
River then walked out of the shadows. And she saw Lee immediately see, and recognize her. River thought, 'Good. And he seems to be calm about this.' She then said in chinese, “He is right. I told you girls this would not be easy. And you cannot take him from his past.”
Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Hi River. I believe this is the first time have formally met, outside of that talent contest.”
River thought, 'Oh, he is happen to see me. That is a very good sign. Though, he is right about another thing.' She shrugged, “Given this is time travel. It depends on your point of view.”
Lee agreed, “Very true, River. And I want you to know. I am a big fan of yours. And it is not just because of your body. It is your intelligence and skills. I am so happy you were able get your head mostly back on straight by the end of that movie.”
River thought, in delight, 'Those are very sweet things to say to me. And the compliments are sincere. No wonder I fell in love with her.' River smiled, as she commented, “Sanity does have its advantages. And you helped me out some more in that department. Thank you.”
Lee stated, “You're welcome. Too bad about Wash and Book, though. But, I am sure they are in a better place.”
River thought, 'I am so happy you mentioned them. Because, I have my own agenda concerning them.' River replied, “I plan on looking into their situations, after this whole mess with you is resolved.”
Lee said, “Well, good luck. I am guessing this is Ranma's bright idea. And I admit, it is a good one. Given the tracking skills Shampoo displayed at the beginning of the Ranma Half series, it would be logical to send them after me. Care to introduce me to these women?”
River thought, 'Oh, why not. Given how sharp Lee is. She might wonder why I would refuse such a request.' She responded, “Sure. The redhead is named Rose. The pink haired girl is Violet. The raven haired girl is named Dongmei.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “Better than being named after haircare products.”
River grin got slightly wider, as she replied, “I fully agree.”
Lee casually joked, “River, and her pretty flowers.”
River giggled, as she thought, 'Now, that is a cute joke. Now, to tease her a little bit, so she can relax some.' She then asked, “Are you flirting with me?”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “River, you are one of the most badass individuals in existence. I would rather make you happy, than sad, or angry.”
River thought, 'Now, that an intelligent statement to make.' She complimented, “Then, this is a good approach.”
Dongmei spoke up, “Why is this fool not worried about us?”
River remained calm on the outside, as she thought, 'It is so hard not to laugh, for Lee's future counterpart, unknowingly calling her past self a fool. Still, I need to remain calm for everyone's sake.'
Rose stated, “Dongmei is right. You don't look so surprised to see us.”
Lee explained, “Well, I already had a groundhogs time loop in the present. Along with visitors from the past. So, I am due for a visit from the future. You all being here means I escaped, and they had to use other alternative means to catch me. Besides, take a look upwards.”
All five of them looked up, and it looked like small energy fractures were forming in the night sky.
Rose thought, 'I don't know what that is. And I don't like it.'
Dongmei thought, 'My precognition is screaming at me to stop what we are doing.'
River thought, 'Just great. A paradox is forming. The good news is there is still time.'
Violet thought, 'This is bad.' She said, “Oh my.”
Lee said, “River, I would thought you would have explained the rules to them, by now. I guess I will explain them to you. Girls, that is a paradox forming. If you take me from this timeline right now, or blow my cover, reality itself may collapse. Even I didn't dare fully imagine how bad that would be for reality, itself.”
Everyone looked back at each other.
Rose asked, “How do you know the rules?” She thought, 'No matter the answer. It will likely not be good.'
Lee replied, “Honey, I literally wrote these rules.”
Rose thought, 'I know better than to ask for details on such a statement.'
River overheard Rose's thoughts, as she mentally reflected, 'Rose has the right idea. This is the type of conversation, we all need to avoid.' She said, “Girls, we have to leave him here.”
Lee said, “It is okay. Given how skilled you are, I am sure you will meet me again. Anyway, have a nice day.”
Lee then walked back to the street, leaving the girls to their own devices, as he headed for his car.
As Lee left their sight, Dongmei commented, “I think it is pretty obvious that none of us are going to go after him.”
River thought, 'And it is a good thing that we do so.”
Violet look up at the sky, as she said, “The sky is clearing.”
The other looked up at the sky to see that it was now clear.
River said, Good.”
As all four of them then looked back at each other, Rose turned to River, as she said, “Why didn't you warn us about this?”
Dongmei and Violet look over at River as well.
River looked over at Rose, as she sorrowfully admitted, “Because, there are some secrets we are trying to keep from getting out. And we over looked warning you about paradoxes.” She thought, 'Oh, that is an understatement. And I need to make amends.' She verbally continued, “As are as I am concerned, you did nothing wrong.”
Rose calmly commented, “Okay. But, next time. Warn us beforehand of such dangers.”
River said, “I will try to do so.”
Rose replied, “Fair enough.”
River thought, 'No matter how I look at it. This hunt is over. This was too close a call.' She turned to look at Dongmei, as she continued her thoughts, 'Also, I have found Lee. Though, the others think we have hit a dead end. And that is what I want everyone to think until I figure out how to both fix Lee's memory, and save her.'
'So, I think it is best we head back to Lagoon Island. I think, in this case, I will also put some distance in both time and space.'
'Also, I need to come up with a reason why we are going back?... An excuse that will be both believable, and will not tip my hand... That will work... And we get their, I can keep an eye both both Lee, and everyone else, as I come up with a plan to save Lee. Along with restoring her memories. Then, the real fun with being for us, and Chang.'
'Now, to get this ball rolling...'
River stated, in a calm tone of voice, “I blame myself for your actions. It is clear the trail has gone cold, and that your actions were in desperation. Now, put away your weapons, and gather around me, girls. We need to go, before we cause any more problems with the space-time continuum.”
The three chinese amazons did not reply, as Dongmei collapsed her staff, and put it back in her sheath, on the back of her bandolier.
Meanwhile, Violet sheathed her dao.
And Rose held her chui in her right hand, as she leaned the nearly smooth, metal ball of her weapon over her right shoulder.
All three women then took a few steps closed to River.
River then thought of where, when, and what reality she wanted to the her, and her three charges to, as she press the red button on her reality device, in her right hand, with her right thumb.
A split second later, they saw they were back in a familiar grassy, during a want sunny day. From the way the sun show down on them, from on high, they could tell that the time was around noon.
Violet turned to River, as she said, “You took us back to Lagoon Island?”
River look at Violet, as put away her reality device. She answered, “Yes. No matter how you look at it. The hunt for Lee is over. Until we come up with more leads. And until then, I am sure the Lagoon family will not mind us staying here, as we rest. We have been on the road for around two weeks. I figure we could all use a much well deserved break.”
River thought, 'And I don't sense anyone nearby. But, I am sure they are somewhere else on the island.'
Rose shrugged, as she replied, “I could enjoy some sleep on a conformable bed, on a schedule that will allow me to sleep in, until the late morning.”
Violet smile, as she said, “And I could use a nice bath, where I can soak for a few hours in peace.”
Dongmei commented, “Still, before we head in. Given the temporal event we just experienced. We need to ask. When are we?
River did not outward show any response to Dongmei's comment, as she inward thought, with happiness, 'Lee, you are still sharp when you are knowledgeable of the situation.'
River looked over at Dongmei, as she answered, “For them. It has been two weeks, as well. I figure they might as well be in line with us.” She mentally added, 'Also, it will give them a little more time to calm down about you, Lee... Still, there is another matter to deal with.'
River turned to Rose, as she requested, “Rose. I need your reality device. Do not worry. This is not a punishment. It is just that the others and I agreed, before we even contacted you, that we would account for all reality devices, when we return to the island.'
Rose thought, 'Fair enough.' She replied, “Okay.”
Rose then used her left hand to unhooked the her reality device, from the left side of her of her brown leather belt. She then handed the device over to River.
River took the reality device into her left hand, as she politely said, “Thank you.”
In response, Rose warmly smiled towards River.
River noticed the smile, as she thought, 'Good. She is taking this well. Without the reality device, and considering only the Lagoon parents, and I, know where the keys to the Lagoon PT boat are, they have no way off this island. And I don't have to worry about another misadventure, like we just had.'
'And I do not have to worry about them escaping without me. Which will help us all, in the long run.'
River then turned to look at the front of Lagoon mansion. Next, she turned back to look at the amazon girls, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, I just have to convince the Lagoon family to let us stay... That shouldn't be too much of a problem. Barring my actions concerning Lee, I have always tried to maintain good relations with everyone on the island. Which is why they let me return here, even after my part in what happened.'
'Now, to make this sound good.'
River suggested, in a slightly sad, and disappointed, tone of voice, “We need to go inside and tell them we bad news that we lost Lee.” She mentally added, 'Also, I think it is best I ask a small favor from them...'
River said, in a more casual tone of voice, “Thought, I am more than willing to omit that we went into Lee's past?”
Rose said, “Good idea.”
Dongmei replied, “Works for me.”
Violet stated, “I would just as soon pretend that entire event never happened.”
River cracked a grin, as she responded, “Good.” She thought, 'I will say this. Lee, in any form, has good taste in friends. Not just Lee, but Rose and Violet catch on quickly. Now, we need to check in. And I will use this time off for the girls, to come up with a way to save Lee.'
'It is a good thing that I am the only telepath on the island, or I would have to take more drastic actions in saving Lee. Because, there would be more risk of both our covers being blown. But, as it stands now, I can take my time, and do this carefully. And careful is the way I would prefer to do this. And I admired Lee for being the same way.'
River said, “This way, girls.”
River then turned and walked towards the front doors to Lagoon mansion, with the three teenage girls following behind her.
(_)
A few minutes later, they all entered the entryway, with Violet gently closing the door behind them.
As they stood, looking at the staircases in front of them, River used her telepathic senses, as she thought, 'Now, where is everyone?... Oh, most of them are outside, in back, or on the beach. Still, is there anyone one here that I can talk too?... Yes. She is just the woman I wanted to see. And one of the more level head members of the family.'
River then turned right, as she entered the entertainment room, with Rose, Violet, and Dongmei right behind her.
River and the other stopped at the threshold of the room, they saw one person, sitting in one of the back couches, on the fair right wall, to the four standing women, as she watched a movie on the large, widescreen TV, across the room from her.
It was Dutch, in her usual clothing. They saw the dark skinned woman was looking back at them.
Dutch quickly picked up her remote, that had been sitting by her, on the couch she sat at. She then paused the movie. She set the remote back down on the couch.
Next, as a courtesy to the amazons, Dutch turned to the four women, as she stated, with joy in her voice, in chinese, “Girls. It is so good to see you. Please, come on in.”
The four women then walked up to where Dutch was sitting.
As they came within a few feet of the couch Dutch was sitting in, they stopped.
Dutch looked up four standing women, as her voice took a more serious tone, “Since I don't see Lee. So, I take it that you never found him?”
River thought, 'That is what I want you to think” She lied, “You would be correct. But, we did eliminated several possibilities.”
Dutch commented, “That's good. Though, I wonder why it took you two weeks to return to us?”
River admitted, “I figured you all needed a little more time to cool off. And that is how longer we were gone, for us.”
Dutch was quite for a few seconds. She then said, “Fair enough.”
River stated, “By the way, here is the reality device we borrowed from you. Thank you.”
River then handed the reality device in her left hand, over to Dutch.
Dutch took the device and set it on the couch she was on, away from the remote she had been using. She then turned back to look at the four women, as she said, “You're welcome. So, what are you going to do now?”
River answered, “It has been a long hunt for us. And I would like to ask permission for the four of us to spend a few days here, as R&R.”
Dutch cracked a grin, as she stated, “Okay. Hotel Lagoon is always open to her friends. Still, you will have to leave your weapons in your assigned guest bedrooms.”
Rose stated, “That will not be a problem.” She then said, in a more warm tone of voice, towards her hostess, “And thank you for allowing us to stay here for few days.”
Dutch responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Think nothing of it. It will be fun to have you over for a few days. It can sometimes get boring here.”
River said, “I know the feeling. Why do you think my friends and I were so open to the idea of Chang's little venture.”
Dutch grin became a little wider, as she responded, “That explains a lot.”
River thought, 'Yes. It does. I might as well ask.' She inquired, “So, where is everyone? And is it just your family on the island?”
Dutch answered, “Actually, Akira's family decided to stay here for the last few weeks, as well. They had nowhere special to go. And they are good company. Also, barring a few unwise decisions, I think their kids are a good influence on our kids.”
“Kristina, Sarah, and Nodoka are in the gym sparring. Molly, Yukio, Akira, Natsuru, and Mikoto are at the shooting range. Rebecca, Yurika, and Ranma are out back, in the pool, swimming.”
“Benny and Janet left the island to go on a lunch date, on another part of the world... For some latin american food. I just didn't have a taste for it. But, they will likely be back within the hour. Rock and Revy are walking the beach, around the island, doing god knows what.”
River thought, with amusement, 'I bet.' She commented, “You never know with those two.”
Dutch looked River in the eyes, as she thought, 'Yea. Given how many of those instant male packets those two use, I am surprised we don't have any more kids running around on the island.'
River burst out laughing, as she nodded her head, in agreement, for a few seconds.
As River calmed down, Dutch thought, 'Now that you enjoyed my joke. We need to talk private.'
River turned to the amazons, as she requested, “Could we have a few minutes, alone?”
Dongmei and Violet silently nodded, as Rose said, “We will be in the kitchen, getting something to eat, for breakfast. If that is alright with you?”
Dutch casually responded, “Of course. Make yourselves at home.”
The three chinese amazons, turned and left the room, for the entryway, and then to a hallway, which lead to the kitchen on first floor, in back left part of the mansion.
A few seconds after the chinese amazons left, Dutch look back up at River, as she stated, in a very stern tone of voice, in english, “Okay. Let's cut the bullshit. While I do believe you looked for Lee, and did not find him. And the reason came back was because the amazons were getting restless, without any leads. We need to get to the heart of the matter. Everyone can see it. You love Lee.”
River thought, 'That is very true. Even Lee, without her memory, can tell that I am in love with her. Though, she doesn't realize it is her that I am in love with. But, that is because she doesn't know who she really is.” River looked down at Dutch. She shrugged, as she admitted, in english, “You are right about that. I fell in love with, Lee. Still, what is it to you?”
Dutch answered, “It is my business because this can cause problems, and come back to bite all of us in the ass. And I have been patiently waiting for the opportunity for you and I to talk about this, in private... So, how did it happen?”
River stated, “You already know. Of all of us, I have likely spent the most time with Lee. And Lee didn't even know who I was, until the day he escaped. When I revealed the truth with a sneeze.” She mentally added, 'And she took the news very well.'
Dutch conceded, “True. And I got to admit that Sam gag was pretty good. You had us all fooled.”
River said, in a depressed tone of voice, “Yea. I even fooled myself... Meeting Lee was the first time I actually got to know someone, when I was pretending to be someone else, as a man. Lee, along with no one else, recognized me. I wasn't River the genius. I wasn't River the telepath. I wasn't River, the broken, brainwashed, crazy, super-weapon...”
Dutch spoke up, in a kind tone of voice, “We don't think about you that way.”
River pointed out, in a sad tone of voice, “No. You try not too. And I appreciate that. But, that is in the back of all your minds. I know. I am a telepath. I can since all of you occasionally thinking that. Though, all of you try not too. But, not Lee. He didn't think that. Because I was not that to Lee. And as a man, I wasn't even eye candy to Lee. I was just a person was that being kind to he... Him. And he treated me with kindness and friendship...”
“He was the first person, in my entire life to treat me like just a normal human being. And not someone special. Not someone dangerous. Just a person.”
Dutch quietly replied, “Oh... I can see how those things could cause problems for you...”
River said in a sad tone of voice, “Correct... And I love Lee for that... And as time went by, I read his mind, without him knowing, and I learned how Lee's mind works. For all Lee's flaws. And Le has several. I will not lie about that. Deep down, Lee has a nice personality. And that Lee unknowingly made one really big mistake. That Lee is sorry for that mistake. Lee really is.” River's voice turned into a whiny plea, as she continued, “And I don't understand why none of you can see that.”
There was silent for a few seconds. Dutch then said, in a calm tone of voice, “First, we do realize that. But, that man is an arrogant jackass. You should have heard some of the things he said to us, at both the factory and Edgars HQ.” She continued in an annoyed, slight angry tone of voice, “That bastard considered us his puppets.”
River deflated, as she stated, “That was just for show. He wants to escape. So, he intentionally played with your emotions. He wanted you to be angry, so you would make mistakes, and he would be able to escape. And his plan worked.”
Dutch voice took on a dangerous tone of voice, as she said, “While you may have a point. You of all people know how dangerous it is for someone to play with another people's emotions. Especially, when is comes to women.”
River thought, 'On more levels than you realize. I lucked out with Lee.' She said, “You are correct about that. But, what other tools, besides his wits, did Lee have to escape you?”
Dutch calmly responded, “I will give you that one. So, how is this play out with Chang? Because, I don't want this blowing up in our faces. Trust me. Though, you are a badass. You don't want to cheat behind Chang's back.”
River smiled, as she said, “And who says I am doing this behind my boyfriend's back? I talked to Chang about Lee the night you caught me and turn me over to him.”
Dutch questioned, “So, Chang knows?”
River causally responded, “Of course, he knows I care about Lee. And he is okay with it.” She thought, 'Actually, Chang wanted Lee back, unharmed, almost as much as I do. But, for different reasons... I think. I will have to talk to him about Lee current state, sometime. But first, I need a few days to think on this situation.'
Dutch calming said, “As long as that is the case, I will not trouble you any more over your love triangle. And I am glad we had this talk.”
River agreed, “So am I.”
Dutch leaned over and used the remote to turn off the TV and other electronic equipment. She then set the remote down, where it had been, as she picked up the reality device that was by her.
Next, Dutch stood up, with River taking a few steps back, to give the brown haired woman some room.
With the reality device in her hands, Dutch turned to River, as she offered, “Now, let's go check on the girls, and get you something to eat.”
River looked at Dutch, as she happily said, “That sounds great. Then, we can do some sunbathing by the pool, as we visit with yours, and Akira's, families. And maybe later, an hour after we eat, we can cool off in the pool.”
Dutch commented, “That is a wonderful idea. And since it is a saltwater pool, so there should be no problem with chemicals.”
River mentioned, “The casino pools are saltwater, as well.”
Dutch raised an eyebrow, as she questioned, “Pools? As in plural?”
River shrugged, as her smile slightly widened. She casually said, “What? You don't think Chang doesn't have one pool for his customers, one for the staff, and one for his private functions, that he and I use?”
Dutch returned River's smile, as she stated, “When it comes to Chang. I am not surprised. He can be such a hedonist.”
Rivers smile curled into a lecherous grin, as she said, “Oh yes, Chang can. Especially in bed. That is one of the reasons I am still with him.”
Dutch asked, “So, who are you going to decide to be with, in the end? Chang? Or, Lee?... That is if Lee survives us.”
River thought, 'I am sure, either way. Though, Lee will survive. And I will make sure she will be fine. Still, I can have some fun with Dutch's comment...'
River teased, “You of all people should realize that I can have both.”
Dutch shrugged, as she continued to smil at River. She said, “Fair enough. Now, let's get something to eat. And afterward, we will ask the girls to place their weapons in the gym, until we assign rooms for them.”
River complimented, “Good idea.”
The two women then walked out of the room, and towards the kitchen of the mansion. So, they could rejoin the three amazons, and get something to eat for themselves, as well.
(_)
Later that evening, during sunset, everyone was having some supper on the patio, that was located on the back side of the mansion. The patio was organized to handle a large cookout. Included on top of the red brick floor of the patio, was a barbeque cook area, and several circular metal tables, with four to six metal chairs.
Each of the tables had large umbrellas over them, to protect those sitting at the table, from the glaring sun. The umbrellas could be folded up, by releasing the draw string in the center, and brought in, during major storms.
This made meals during their lagoon parties, and other social functions, much easier to handle.
At the moment, Dutch and Benny had just finished cooking everyone some hamburgers. And they were hamburgers on buns, and other trimmings. Along with chips and bottles of beer, soda, or water.
The teenagers of the two families were sitting between two tables, a few tables away from the older adults, and the teenage amazons.
The adults also sat between to table, that were close by each other. One table sat, River, Rose, Violet, Dongmei, Natsuru, and Ranma. On the table by them, sat Akira, Revy, Ruck, Dutch, Benny, and Janet.
With all of them have their plates of food, and bottles of various refreshments to drink.
For the benefit of the hosts, the conversation was in english, with either Dongmei, River, or Dutch translating english to chinese, and back, for Rose and Violet. So, the chinese red haired and pink haired teenage girls could be a part of the conversation.
The conversation, during their meals, had so far been pleasant, and the collective mood of the gathering had been calm.
Rock looked over at River, whom sat in the nearby table, as she asked, “So, River. Dutch said that you intentionally jumped couple of weeks, to now, our time, so we would be in a better frame of mind about Lee?”
River looked at Rock, as she teased, “I figured you guys would need a few weeks to cool off. And it was the same amount of time, as we spent, while gone from here.”
Dongmei translated what Rock and River had said.
The others turned to look at River, as Dutch let out a laugh. Dutch commented, “Now, that I have thought about it. That is not a bad idea.”
Rock conceded, “It was a nice try.”
Benny commented, “With the cooler heads prevail trick.”
Janet said, “But, it is not going to work.”
Revy finished for them, “Not, by a long shot.”
Dongmei translated for her two friends.
River just shrugged in response. She also suppressed a giggle, as as she thought, 'To finish sentences like that, those five have been together way too long.'
Revy asked, “So Riv, what are you going to do now?”
River looked over at Revy, as she thought, 'Two can play at that game.' She playfully commented, “Well Rev, we have been on the road for two weeks, and I figured the girls needed some down time.'
River noticed that just as Dongmei had finished translated for her, Rose, Dongmei, and Violet smiled towards River..
River grinned, as she continued, “And this place is as good as most vacation resorts I can think of. Chang's casino included. Only, this place is a lot cheaper, and a lot more private.”
Revy snorted, as she agreed, “You got that right.”
Benny said, “Yes. This is one of the nicer places I have lived in.”
Natsuru looked over at Benny as she stated, “Huh uh. Everything, including a nice hot tub. Though, you cannot get a decent back rub here.”
Janet turned Natsuru, as she teased, “That is because you never asked.”
The others laughed, with the amazons joining in, just after Dongmei finished translating Natsuru's comment, and Janet's joke, for Rose and Violet.
As everyone calmed down, Dutch inquired, “So, I take it you will be needing bedrooms?”
River said, “Yes. We do need some guestrooms.”
Janet volunteered, “I will take care of assigning them rooms. I suggest the bedrooms on the western side of the home. On the first floor.”
River said, “That should be fine.”
Janet, “I thought as much.”
Dongmei translated for Rose and Violet.
Dongmei then questioned, in english, “So, where is everyone else at?”
Janet turned to Dongmei, as she answered, “Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru are on the first floor. Us, ours kids, and Akira's kids are in the bedrooms on the second floor.”
Ranma commented, “Though, where you are staying is completely on the opposite side of the house, to where you put Akira, Natsuru, and I.”
Dutch turned to Ranma, as she playfully stated, “And with good reason”
Dongmie translated what was said.
Violet could not help but ask, in chinese, “What reasons?”
River translated for Violet.
The Lagoon parents giggled.
As they calmed down, Dutch said, “Well, I hope Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma don't mind. But, the three are lovers. And they prefer to share a large bed together. And to this day, they have a very active love life between each other. And a very loud love life, at that.”
Dongmei translated, as she held back a giggle. When she finished, she, along with Rose and Violet, started giggling for several seconds.
Benny stated, “To be honest. I am surprised, that back at the Devil's Hotel, Lee got any sleep at all. Considering you room was right beside his.” She mentally added, with a bit of malice in her thoughts, 'Still, since this is Lee we are talking about, that bastard probably deserves more than a few restless nights of sleep.'
River was saddened by Benny's thoughts, but she did not give any outward expression towards the blond haired woman's mental reflections.
Ranma stated, “Well, that one night, we returned late, after a men... Women's night out, Lee was in the lobby, and he mentioned that issue to us. Though, he pretended to be drunk at the time. And he also pretended not to know us.” She thought, in more ways than one.' She continued, “And to be fair, we did starting cutting our fun early at night, for him. But, that was before we knew who he was.”
Ranma thought, 'Of course. At the time, we were men. And he knew who we were. And he said, the trio of lesbian lovebirds, that was keeping him up at night. And to be honest. The way he pulled that off was real smooth. Unfortunately, I cannot tell these three amazons exactly what happened, because it would lead to some very unconformable questions for us.'
River giggled a little bit, at Ranma's statement, as Dongmei translated what Ranma said, for her two friends.
Rose inquired, in confusion, in chinese, “So, you were staying at an inn with Lee?” Her voice took on a hard tone of disbelief, as she continued, “And you three were in a room right beside his room?”
Dongmei translated what Rose said.
Akira cracked a grin, as she answered, in a happy tone of voice, “Yep. And given how he asked us, I realize now he was not as drunk at the time, as he pretended to be.”
Rock deadpanned, “That is an understatement.”
Natsuru agreed, “True. That man just loves playing the angles.”
River translated what Rock, Natsuru, and Akira said.
Rose asked, in chinese, “What do you mean by angles?”
River translated Rose question for the others.
Rock answered, “As we said. Lee is manipulative. By angles, we mean both plans he makes, and weaknesses in others, that he uses against those around him, to get what he wants done.”
River translated Rock's answer.
Rose replied, in english, “Oh...” She then said, in chinese, “I can see what you mean by Lee being a problem.”
Dongmei translated for Rose.”
Rock replied, “Exactly.”
Benny inquired, “So, what do you plan to do tomorrow?”
Before Dongmei could translated the question for her two chinese friends, Revy spoke up, in excitement, “I know. Tomorrow morning, I will take them to the range, for some shooting. And I will show them what real weapons are like to use.”
River tried her best not to roll her eyes. She then turned to Revy, as she questioned, “Guns? You want to teach them to use guns?”
Revy turned to River, as she smirked. She said, “Of course. I want to teach them how to use real weapons. Semi-automatic pistols, to be exact. We might not have time to do everything, but we can cover the basics.”
River stated, “Make sure you teach them some gun safety, first.”
Revy promised, “I will.”
Dongmei translated what was said.
Rose said, in chinese, “We have very little skill in such weapons. But, we welcome any such lessons.”
Dongmei translated what Rose said.
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Since Dongmei know what Rose and Violet knew what, thank you, meant, in chinese, she did not translate for them.
Benny stated, “I think it might be best that we not be present when Revy is giving her lessons.”
Dutch said, “Agreed.”
Ranma commented, “I can go along with that.”
Benny looked around the table, to see her other friends, agreeing, by nodding, or shrugging, while Revy just shrugged, in response, to Benny's slight teasing.
Rock turn to River, as she said, “While they do that, tomorrow morning. I would like to talk to you more about the hunt you four just had.”
River heard Rock, as she thought, 'I cannot back out of this. Though, I doubt they will figure out that Dongmei is Lee. I will just have to play this by ear.' She turned to Rock, as she said, “Of course. But, there is not much to tell.”
Rock said, “At the very least we will eliminate some possibilities. Also, I think we should all take turns tomorrow, to teach the amazons what we know. It might be fun if the amazons had a chance to learn other skills that we can show them how to do.”
Benny complimented, “That is a great idea. I know electronic and computers.”
Dutch commented, “I wouldn't mind giving them, a stroll around the island, a few times, in the Lagoon.”
Rock mentioned, “The mansion library has some interesting books for them.”
Ranma said, “I give them a couple of pointers on their combat skills.”
Akira requested, “I would like to spare with them, using their weapons against my long knives.”
Dutch casually asked, “So, what will our kids be doing tomorrow?”
Janet looked over at the tables, with their teenage adult children, and the teenage adult children of Akira's family, for a few seconds. She then turned back to those at her table, as she stated, “I think I can come up with a few things to kill time, to keep own kids busy for tomorrow.”
Benny turned to her wife, as she asked, “Such as?”
Janet looked after at her spouse, as she answered, “A shopping trip. While you guys entertain our guests, I was planning to take our kids on a shipping trip to India tomorrow.”
Natsuru complimented, “Good idea. Along with myself, I think our kids would like to join you. And I can help chaperon.”
Janet turned to Natsuru, as she said, “The more the merrier.” She then looked around the table, as she offered, “I would love to have you all come.”
Dutch flatly stated, “No thank you. Thanks to the shopping trips you brought me on, I am have enough skirts and dresses to last a lifetime.”
Benny calmly said, “Honey, I have to agree with Dutch on this.”
Revy flatly stated, “The only times I am wearing a dress are at a wedding, or a funeral.” She mentally added, 'I almost feel sorry for them. Janet and Natsuru has some of the most feminine taste in clothing among all our groups. Especially, the tomboys, in the group, that will be going. Still, it will be a good shopping trip for the kids. And we have plenty of wealth for them to have a great time.'
Rock apologized, “I am sorry, Janet. I am with the rest of them on this.”
Ranma shook her head a few times, as she said, “Clothes are not my thing.”
Akira shrugged, as she softly said, “Another time, Janet.”
Janet playfully pouted at their responses. But, the others could tell she was faking, and they took Janet's playful actions in stride.
Meanwhile, River suppressed a giggle at their responses, to Janet's comments, and Janet's pouting, afterward.
Dongmei turned to her friends, as she translated for them. She then asked in chinese, “Does this sound good for you?”
Rose smiled, as she said, “Yes.”
Violet smiled, as well. She replied, “Of course.”
Dongmei smiled, as turned to the other nearby women. She stated, in english, “Then, it is decided, Tomorrow we will see what you have to offer.”
Rock turned their smiles, as she said, “Good.”
The group then continued their conversation, as the ate their meals.
(_)
A few hours later, that night, it was time for bed, for most of the household.
Rose, River, Violet, and Dongmei, followed Janet, as they all walked down a hallway, on the west end of the first floor of the mansion.
While they walked, River requested, in chinese “If you all don't mind, I would like to share a room with Dongmei.”
As they made continued down the hallway, Dongmei translated River's comment into english, for Janet.
Dongmei then asked, in chinese, “Mighty I ask, why?”
River answered, in chinese, “Well, most of the guestrooms, have two beds per room. With a few having one larger bed. It will be easier for the four of us to take two rooms, with two beds.” She thought, 'And that will allow me to keep a closer eye on you, Lee.'
Dongmei said, “I understand.”
Violet teased, in chinese, “Rose and I won't mind sharing a single bed.”
Rose calmly said, in chinese, “I intend to sleep tonight. We will play later. So, two beds will do us fine.”
Dongmei then translated what she and River had said, for Janet. Though, Dongmei did not state what Rose and Violet had just said.
Janet said, “That is alright with us. It means less rooms to clean, later.” She thought, 'Which is usually a job we assign for our kids... And occasionally we help. Since, we long since stopped having a staff here. And the upkeep of this house builds good work ethics for our kids.'
River cracked grin over Janet's thoughts, as she translated what Janet said, for Rose and Violet.
Janet then came to a stop, between two doors in the hallway, with the other four women stopping a few feet behind her.
Janet turned around, to face the another four women. She then leaned to her right, way to open the door on that side of her. She then leaned to her left, to open the other door, on the opposite side of the hallway.
She stood back up straight, as faced the women four other women, in front of her. She said, “These will be your two guess bedrooms. Each room has two beds. There are ceiling light switches are right beside the doors. We also have some spare clothing that should fit you, if you want.”
Dongmei translated for Rose and Violet.
Rose said, in chinese, “That will be nice.”
River translated for Janet.
Janet said, “Good. Also, there is a bathroom, with a full bath, and western style toilet, down the hallway. It is also fully stocked with neared towels, soap, a few spare brushes, toothpaste, some plastic cups, spare toilet paper, and need hygiene products.”
Dongmei translated what Janet said.
Rose calmly replied, in chinese, “Thank you.”
Violet stated, in chinese, “I call first dips on first bath.”
Dongmei countered, in chinese, “No. If you want to soak for an hour. You are going last.”
Violet deflated, as she replied, “Fine...”
River translated their comments for Janet.
Janet said, “Well, not to worry on showers, or baths. The hot water is on demand system. You will not run out of hot water. And the water pressure is good enough to have multple people having a shower at once, in this building. If you need anything else. Let us know.” She mentally added, 'I am now going to have some fun with Benny and Dutch.'
River cracked a grin, as she replied, “We will.”
Janet then walked passed them, as Dongmei translated what was said, for Rose and Violet.
River turned to the three amazons, as she stated, in chinese, “Rose, and Violet, the bedroom to your left is yours. The one on the right, is mine and Dongmei's.”
Rose and Dongmei remained silent, as Violet said, in chinese, “Okay.”
River said, “Now, let's check out our rooms.”
River then turned and headed into her guest bedroom, with Dongmei following. While Rose and Violet gook a right, into their guest bedroom.
River flipped on the ceiling light switch, as she continued walking into the room. While she walked, she requested, “Dongmei, please shut the door behind you.”
Dongmei followed River, into the room, she gently shut the door behind her. She the walked further into the room, as he looked around the bedroom. She found the guestroom bedroom to be a decent sized room, with to twin sized beds, set against the same side of the wall. Between the beds was a small nightstand, with an electric lamp on top of it.
There was a chest of drawers set against the opposite wall from the beds.
Above the chest of drawers was a widescreen, flat TV mounted on the wall. There was also a disc player, that was connected to the flatscreen TV, and a remote to operate both devices, set on top the chest of drawers.
And there was a mirror nearby.
River soon came to a stop, with Dongmei stopping a few feet from her.
River turned around, as she took a few steps closer to Dongmei, until she less than a few from Dongmei. With both women looked at each other.
River then gently hug the black haired girl, around Dongmei's chest, and under Dongmei's arms, with both her own arms.
Dongmei was confused by River's sudden action, and she did not return River's hug.
A few seconds later, River let go, as she took a few steps back from Dongmei.
Dongmei calmly asked, in chinese, “Not that I am complaining. But, I would like to know what was that for?”
River stopped herself, from showing sadness. And instead, she warmly smiled at Dongmei. She said, in a kind tone of voice, “It is a show of affection for our friendship.” River thought, with relief, 'Lee, it is so good to finally just hug you in private. It is unfortunate that you do not yet realize why I did so.'
Dongmei replied, “Okay.”
River asked, “So, what do you think of our room?”
Dongmei calmly answered, “I think we will be fine, sleeping here.”
River smiled, as she replied, “I agree.” She though, 'And I will be able to keep a closer eye on you. Unfortunately, your memories are so sealed that you do not even dream as Lee. But, at least I can sleep beside you, while I figure out how to save you from this mess we all find ourselves in.'
While it was still a few hours earlier for River, and the three amazons. The four women then got cleaned up, and got ready for bed.
Rose and Violet retired to their bedroom, while River and Dongmei retired to their bedroom.
When Dongmei and River got into their beds, River turned off the lamp light, between their bed, which, by then, was the only light on when the got into bed. And they then soon went to sleep.
(_)
The next day, it was a sunny, warm morning on the Lagoon Island.
Everyone one on the island had already gotten dressed, ready to face day, and had some breakfast.
After breakfast, half an hour ago, Janet, Natsuru, and the eight teenage adult women, said their goodbyes for the day. They then used a reality device to head to one of Janet's favorite parts of India, her homeland, to do some shopping.
Meanwhile, Benny and Dutch decided to do some maintenance on the Lagoon, in preparation of the amazons taking a ride on the PT boat, later that day.
Akira and Ranma were in the gym, exercising and getting a little hand to hand sparring done. Akira was nowhere near Ranma's level. Though, Ranma's years of teaching Akira, along with the rest of her family, and brought their level up they could spar with Ranma, one on one, to the point Ranma would break a sweat.
River was in Rock's personal study, for their meeting.
And finally, Revy had brought Dongmei, Violet, and Rose, to the Lagoon Island firing range, to learn the basics in using a firearm.
The shooting range was located in the behind the mansion, to the western side of the island. The shooting range was clearing in the bush and trees that a twelve hundred yards long, and was twenty feet across.
The shooting range was intentionally made by the Lagoon family to be to narrow for an airplane to land, to help prevent unwanted guests.
At the end of the firing range was a large dirt berm that was twenty feet high, ten feet deep, and forty feet wide. With ten feet of the berm going each way into the bush.
Behind the dirt berm was some more trees and brush, which soon ended at the sea.
One of the main reasons for the Lagoon family picking that area for the shooting range was that behind the berm, there was not much beach, where the sea met the island.
Earlier that day, twenty-five yards from the firing stations of the range, Revy had set up a three feet by three feet square bull's eye target, with wood jigs being the backing for the target to stand upright. The target was thirty feet from the firing line.
Revy and the amazons stood behind the firing stations, at the firing range. A couple of the stations were just grass in front of the red strip on the ground, that signified not to cross, when people were firing on the range.
Other fire stations were four feet high, three feet wide, four legged, square, brown stained, wooden tables place at the red firing line.
At the moment, the three chinese amazons and Revy were standing in behind one of stations with a wooden table.
The amazons did not have their weapons, as they had moved their weapons, from the gym, earlier that morning, to their guestrooms.
Also, the three amazons had fresh clothing, which fit them, that was provided to them, by their hosts. The clothing was casual pants, shirts, and undergarments. Though, they had on their shoes, that they came with.
Revy had her semi-automatic custom Beretta ninety-two FS Inox pistols, in her shoulder holsters.
In Revy's right hand was a blued black Beretta M Nine nine millimeter semi-automatic pistol. The M Nine pistols had a fully loaded, fifteen round magazine in it. Though, the chamber was empty. Also, the hammer of the weapon was not cocked back.
And given Revy was also going to teach the three amazon women gun safety lessons, Revy kept her weapon pointing away from herself, and the three amazon, by pointing at the barrel of the gun, at the ground, by her right let.
There were also two other loaded magazines for the weapon, on top of the wooden table, along with several boxes of nine millimeter ammo beside the magazines. And there was a small spray can of gun oil, and a firearm cleaning kit box.
All the women had on acoustic earmuffs, over their ears, to protect them from the sounds of gunfire they would soon be hearing. And they were yellow, protective sunglasses over their eyes.
Fortunately, even though the earmuffs dampened the sound around them, they could hear normal talking from those nearby.
Revy had her back to the range, as she looked at the three amazons facing her, four feet away.
Revy held up her weapon, by the grip, with her right hand, while she continued to be mindful to keep the end of the barrel pointed away from herself, and the other women there.
Revy stated, “This is my Beretta M nine semi-automatic pistol. This is the pistol I used, until I upgraded to my cutlasses.”
“It is unfortunate that we do not have time for me to show you how to use other weapons. Such as rifle. But, for today. We will just deal with me teaching you how to use this pistol.”
“This weapon fires a nine millimeter bullet. It is semi-automatic. Meaning it self-reloads, but you have to pull the trigger each time you want to fire a round. The ammo magazine this weapon uses has fifteen rounds. The effective range this weapon has is around sixty yards. Though, I can cleanly hit something at over eighty yards, without a problem. But, since you are all new at this. I set up a big target at twenty-five yards from here.”
Dongmei translated for Revy, so Rose and Violet understood what Revy was saying. Dongmei also converted the yards to roughly the equivalent meters, for her two friends. With twenty-five yards being just under twenty-three meters.
Revy's tone of voice became more serious, as she continued, “The first thing to be mindful of a firearm, is to always treat the weapons, as if it is loaded. Always make sure the weapon is first unloaded.”
“Never point the end of the barrel, which is the end of the weapon with the round hole, at someone. Unless you plan to kill them. Not hurt them. Not warn them. Kill them... And do not point the end of the barrel at yourself. If you have to, keep the end of the barrel pointed at the ground. But, not your feet.”
“Next, when first picking up check to see if it is loaded. You do that by first removing the magazine, with the magazine release button. Which is here...”
Revy held the pistol by the slide, with her left hand, as she used her left index finger to pointed out the pistol's magazine release button.
Revy stated, “Then, pull back the slide. When you are not firing a weapon, always place your trigger finger... Your index finger, against the trigger here.”
She pointed out the trigger guard.
Revy warned, “Do not place your finger on the trigger, when you are not aiming. That is a good way to shoot yourself. Place you finger on the trigger guard, the ring around the trigger. When you have finished firing the ammo, the weapon will automatically leave the chamber open. Just drop the magazine, put a fresh magazine in, and then used the slide release level here, to reload load a round into the chamber.”
She pointed out where the slide lever was.
Revy said, “And you are good to go. Now, as you can see the hammer.”
She pointed out the hammer of the weapon, which was not cocked, as she commented, “At the moment, the hammer is not cocked. When the hammer is cocked, realizing it allow it to hit firing pin, which in turns hits the primer on the back of the bullet, with makes the bullet fire.”
“Now, the next part is the safety lever, which is here on the back left part of the slide.”
She pointed to the safety lever.
Revy stated, “The safety is currently off. You flip it back and forth to use it. When the safety is on, the gun cannot fire. And the red dot shows when the safety is off. Also, the safety works as a decocking lever. This puts the hammer in a position to not immediately fire. Though, due to this being a double action-single action pistol. If you pull back on the trigger, it will fire.”
Revy said, in a more serious tone of voice, “This is the only safe way to decock the hammer of weapon, when it is loaded. Any other way, you will cause the gun to fire, and you seriously hurt yourself, and maybe others.”
“Next, is the trigger. As I said, the trigger on this pistol is a double action-single action. The double action means that you can pull the trigger, when the weapon hammer is not cocked. And the trigger will pull back the hammer and release it. The single action beings that it will fire went the hammer is already cocked back.”
“After we finished here, I will show you how to take apart this gun, clean it, and put it back together. And never try to clean a loaded weapon. As I said before. Always check to make sure the weapon is unloaded, before you work with it.”
“Also, while we make our own quality ammo, here, on the island. Because this weapon does not have a sound suppressor attached to it, the weapon will be loud. That is why we have these things covering our ears. Also, while the weapons are designed to eject up and to the right. They can pop back and hit you in the eyes. So, that is why were are wearing these fancy yellow sunglasses.”
Revy thought, 'Though, I prefer not to use and eye and ear protection. I would never hear the end of it, if I accidentally damaged the sight, or hearing of these girls. So, this is a case of practice what I preach. At least, until they are gone from the island.'
Revy continued, in the same serious tone of voice, as before “There can be jams. When we have a jam... If we do. I will show you how to clear a jam.”
“But, if you have a jam. Immediately take you finger off the trigger. Remove the magazine from the pistol. And set the pistol down.”
“Then, tell me. I will clear the jam.”
“Clearing a jam is very dangerous. If not done in a specific way, can cause a misfire that can hurt you. And not just with the bullet exiting the gun, can hurt you.
“But, the slide going back and forth, on you hand, can rip into you flesh. This is why I wear the fingerless gloves. Along with allowing me to have a better grips on my cutlasses, while allowing me to have exposed fingers, for better control of the triggers, My gloves also allow me to clear a jam, with less chance of hurting my hands.”
“Now, when you hold a gun, you hold it by the grip. I will show you what I mean in a little while. I will show how to fire with both one hand, and to handed positions. I will also show you prone, kneeling, and standing positions.”
“We will be firing off hand. One handed. And when firing, use the hand on the same side as you dominate eye. If you don't know which of your eyes is dominate, I will show you how to test to see which of your eyes it is.”
Revy strongly stated, “Along with not being in front of the barrel. Do not place any part of your body directly against the back of the slide. When it fires, it will hurt you badly enough to go the hospital.”
“Speaking of which. I do have a reality device in a pocket, for emergency teleports. But, I will be very upset with you, if you make me use it.”
“We will be using standard target ammunition for this pistol. The bullets have a slight kick. But, you should quickly get use to it.”
“The way you aim is to line up your back sights with you front single sight in the middle of the groove of the back sight. With both sights making an even, horizontal line against the center of what you are aiming for..”
“When we are finished, we will be picking up the brass shells we use. Because we can use them for reloading.”
Revy then smirked, as she casually said, “Now, pay attention girls. And let me show you have to use this weapon.”
Revy then gripped the pistol in her right hand, more tightly by it's grip. She kept her weapon pointed at the ground, as she used her left hand to pull back the slide, loading a bullet into the chamber.
Next, Revy turned, with her front facing the left side of the firing range. During this turn, Revy kept her gun pointed at the ground.
Revy raised her right arm, as she took aim of the target down the range, one handed. And she waited for Dongmei to finish translating.
When Dongmei was done. Revy stated, “Now. Heads up.”
Revy fired all fifteen rounds, dead center, into the bull's eye.
The bullet grouping was so accurate, on the red dot in the center of the bull's eye, that one would think only three, or four, bullets had been fired.
The slide of the pistol was locked in the open, back position, waiting for a fresh ammo magazine to be inserted into it.
Revy removed the ammo magazine, and pulled some ammo out of an ammo box, to reload the magazine. But, she left the magazine out, by the two other full magazines. She then set both the ammo magazine, and the pistol, with the slide still open, onto the top of the wooden table, by the rest of the items she had brought out to the range that morning.
Revy then turned around to see, from the looks on their faces, the girls were impressed with her marksmanship.
Revy smiled, as she happily thought, 'I still got it.' She said, “Keep in mind. I have had decades of experience in using firearms. So, this is nothing for me. For you three, I want you to take your time.”
“Because you are new at this, I want you to carefully take aim, and slowly pull the trigger, as you fire each round. When you pull the trigger, try not to jerk the gun upwards. You will find this to be an involuntary reaction. And it take time for someone to work this out of their system. Even for me. And it will take time to find your proper finger placement on the trigger.”
“So, who is first?”
After Dongmei finished translating what Revy stated, Rose said, in chinese, “I will go, first.”
Violet requested, with eagerness in her voice, in chinese, “Me next.”
Dongmei shrugged, as she said, in chinese “I guess I will be last.”
Dongmei said, in english, “Revy. Rose would like to go first. Violet second. And myself, third.”
Revy responded, “Okay. Now, does everyone know what the dominate eye is?”
Dongmei translated, and Rose and Violet replied.
Dongmei answered, “Yes. All three of us know that answer.”
Revy stated, “We will rotate after two magazines. That is thirty rounds. When we run out of fresh magazines. When you are finish firing. Remove the ammo magazine. And set the ammo magazine, and the pistol, with the slide open, onto the wooden table, by the empty magazine, and the full magazine. With the end of the barrel pointing down range.”
Dongmei translated what Revy said.
Rose went first. Rose walked to the table, with Revy standing to Rose's left side. Revy walked Rose through picking up the pistol, loading the firearm, aiming the sights, and firing the weapon.
On Rose's first magazine, she barely hit the target at all. But, on her second magazine, she did start hitting the target more often than not.
After Rose was finished, Revy showed them how to reload ammo form one of the ammo boxes, to the two magazines that Rose used.
Then, it was Violet's turned. And the pink haired teenage woman was just as bad as Rose.
Though, both of them were mindful on the instructions Revy gave for safety, including resting their trigger finger on the trigger guard. And there were no problems, as they fired the semi-automatic pistol.
As they fired Revy was standing a few feet behind them, and to their left side. And she was always mindful of the situation. With her being ready to step in at a moment's notice.
As Violet set the empty pistol, with the open slide, down, by the empty. Revy then had her reload her two magazines. After which, Violet turned, and she rejoined her two friends, whom stood six feet behind her, as they watched her shoot.
Revy looked at the target. She then looked over at the three amazon women. She thought, 'Best not to berate them. This might be the first time they even ever held a gun. And I will give them pointers, as we go along.'
Revy said, “Not to worry. Rose and Violet. Considering you are new at this. You did fine for beginners. Now, Dongmei, you are up.”
Dongmei translated what Revy said.
Dongmei and Revy both noticed Rose and Violet smiling in response to Revy's comment.
Dongmei then walked up to the wooden table. She picked up pistol with her right hand, by the grip, while being mindful to keep her trigger finger resting against the trigger guard.
Dongmei used her left hand to grab and load a few ammo magazine into the semi-automatic weapon.
Next, she turned her body, so her front side was facing the left side of the range, in front of Revy.
While Dongmei raised the M Nine pistol up, with her right arm, and took aim, a thought occurred to her, 'Why does this feel so familiar?... Not that it matters. Though, I will just do my best.'
Over the next minute and a half, Dongmei carefully aimed, as she took her time with firing each round, of the first magazine she had. Most of the rounds when into the black bull of the target, around the red bull's eye. While, more than a few of rounds hit the bull's eye, itself.
One Revy saw the pistol slide lock open, meaning the gun was empty, she whistled for a few seconds. She then joked, “Nice shooting, Tex.” Her voice became slightly more serious as she asked, “So, who taught you how to shoot a gun?”
Dongmei removed the empty ammo magazine, setting it onto the top of the wooden table. She then turned around to face her friends, and Revy. She kept the slide open, as she had end of the barrel of the weapon in her right hand pointed at the ground, while she kept her finger on the trigger guard. She casually replied, “No one. I guess I am just a natural.”
Revy remained silent.
Rose calmly stated, in chinese, “You clearly have natural skill.”
Violet said, in chinese, “And it shows.”
Dongmei turned to her friends, as she happily replied, in chinese, “Thanks.” She did not bother to translate what they said for Revy, as she turned back to the firing line, and loaded a fresh magazine into her pistol, and slide the slide back in place, with her right thumb.
Revy noticed this, as well. But, she did not say anything.
Dongmei turned to have her right side facing the target, as she held out her right arm and hand, with the weapon. She took a proper grip with her right hand. Next, she fired her weapon, again and again.
And just like last time, Dongmei's bullets either hit the bull, or the bull's eye.
As quietly Revy watched this, she though, 'No one is naturally that good at shooting... There is something else going one here, and I will find out what?... But... For now, we are just going to have some fun.'
Revy continued her lessons for the next hour. And all the girls had fun. Including, Revy.
Still, Revy was always mindful, as she made sure the girls did not do something dangerous with the M Nine, that could hurt themselves, or one of the other three women present, including herself.
The three amazon women continued taking turns, until they ran out of ammo.
By then, at twenty-five yards, Rose and Violet were at least hitting the bull of the target with most of their shots. While Dongmei was mostly hitting the bull's eye.
Revy then used the gun oil spray can, and cleaning kit, to show the three other women, how to properly take apart, clean, and put back together the pistol they had been using. Revy even cleaned the magazines. Revy then left the pistol empty, without a magazine in It she closed the slide, and put it in a plastic box she had for it. She also put the loaded magazines, into loose ammo pouch she had for the specifically for those magazines.
When they were finished with those lessons, Revy and the girls spend a few minutes collecting brass shell casings, into a small bag that Revy brought. They then all picked up the items that Revy brought out, including the target they had fired on. As a memento of the experience. And the three chinese amazons followed Revy back towards the Lagoon mansion.
After they dropped off the items, in one of the common areas of the Lagoon mansion, they were lead by Revy, over to the harbor, on the island's small bay, to see Dutch and Benny, at the Lagoon PT Boat. With the amazon women getting a chance to ride, in the PT boat, around Lagoon island a few times.
(_)
Meanwhile, as the chinese amazons were learning to use a semi-automatic pistol, in the Lagoon mansion, in Rock's private study, Rock and River were holding a discussion on River, and the amazons' hunt for Lee.
Rock's private study was located on the second floor, near the large bedroom that she shared with Revy. The study was a small, simple room, compared to many of the room in the home.
The room had simple, brown colored carpeting.
And in the room, on the wall across from the door was a window on the upper, middle part of the wall. The window allow Rock to see outside. Below the window was a small brown, four legged wooden table, that stretched the width of the window.
To the right of the room, from the entrance, was Rock's desk. The desk was placed with its back to that wall.
It was a nice, but simple brown wooden desk, with drawers in it.
Rock's desk chair was a simple, four legged metal chair, that was painted brown. With cushions armchairs, seat and backing, which was wrapped in brown leather.
On top of the desk was a wireless laptop computer, other equipment, and office supplies.
In the wall across from the desk, were shelves full and fireproof filing cabinets, which were full paper documents and back up data discs, from computers located through out her home.
Due to Rock's education and corporate background, she was the accounting and financial person in the household. She made sure everything was bureaucratically straight, with everything else, when it pertained to her family, and the island they lived on.
For the last hour, River and Rock had been talking about the two week hunt that River and the amazons were on.
River was standing between the open door to the hallway, and where Rock was sitting, in her chair, by her desk.
Rock sitting in her chair, with her chair facing River, whom was six feet away from her.
River look down at Rock's face, as Rock look up at River's face.
And at Rock's request, they carried the conversation on in japanese.
River guessed, given the situation they were in, that speaking in japanese, was intentional by Rock, as a form of submission on her part, in speaking Rock's native language. And by having River stand and look down at her. In a manner a servant would be towards their lord... Or lady...
With the door lead open, to further remove any sense of privacy that River had.
But, River did not verbally raise these points with Rock.
And even if that was the case, Revy found it to be good discussion so far. Rock asked most of the questions, and River was master at avoiding any answers that may tip Rock off that Dongmei was Lee, without Rock even realizing that it.
But, time wears away on defenses. And Rock was beginning to realize something.
And given River was a telepath, Rock did not bother to think on the matter, as she accused, in japanese, “You are hiding something?”
River casually deflected, in japanese, “Of course I am. We all have things we like to hide.” She mentally added, 'You have no idea that I brought Lee back with me. And I intend to keep it that way.'
Rock questioned, “Such as the fact you are in love with Lee?”
River said, “So, Dutch told you about that?”
Rock answered, “Yes. My family does not hide secrets from each other.”
River thought, 'You're is right about that. You even left the door to this office, open.' She asked, “So, what of it?”
Rock said, “By loving Lee, it makes it difficult to trust your actions on this matter.”
River retorted. “And wanting revenge gives you clarity on the matter?”
Rock conceded, “Point taken.”
River thought, 'Now, to deflect Rock's suspicions.' She said, “Besides. I have been a good girl.”
Rock flatly responded, “I know. That you have. Which is why we are having this conversation. Instead of you not being on this island.”
River replied, “Fair enough.” She thought, 'She is right. This is their island. This is their home. And I am a guest here. And I need to remember that at all times.'
Rock stated, “So, we have talked about the events of your hunt. And I must say, you went places. But, what is your opinion of those chinese amazonian girls?”
River thought, 'I can be honest, without giving away too much information.' She answered, “All of them are intelligent, and practical, in the way they approach problems. Rose is clearly their leader. And she has a good head on her shoulders. She has a reserved personality. Violet seems to be a little bit of a ditz. But, she is very sharp, and knowledgeable about what she knows. I have to be careful about what I say around her.”
Rock spoke up, “I will keep that in mind. And Dongmei?”
River calmly answered, “Dongmei's personality seems be that she is just doing this, because she has nothing better to do. She is loyal and honest. But, her sense of honor is a bit on the uptight side.” She mentally added, 'The ironic thing is that Lee's personality was that it is bit of the opposite when I knew Lee in Plata Podrido.'
Rock casually responded, “Ah. Honor before reason. That would explain why she jumped Revy.”
River thought, 'Yea. And you can thank Lee for learning that term.' She said, “To a degree. Revy caught Dongmei on a bad day.”
Rock raised her eyebrow, as she questioned, “She was having her period?”
River berated, “Rock, I would think, after having to deal with monthly periods, for decades, yourself, that you would know better than for that to be your, go to, question, when why a woman is having a bad day.” She thought, 'I am glad I don't have to deal with that now. Thanks to Lee. Though, I am sad that Lee now has to go through them. But, that is part of being a woman. And at least I can use Rock's question to have some minor fun with this situation.”
Rock backed down, as she replied, “Okay. You have a point, River.”
River shrugged, as she admitted, “Though, to be honest, you are partly correct. At the time, she was having her monthly period.” River suppressed a giggle, as she saw Rock deflate a little. She continued, “But mainly, from what I read in her mind, she was hunting an elk, for a few hours, that morning, and she lost the animal right before she could kill it.”
Rock agreed, “I can see how that would put anyone in a bad mood, as well.”
River stated, “Yes. And Revy has a gift for upsetting people.”
Rock defended, “She has gotten better.”
River agreed, “True. Being a mother has been good for her... Still, she has her moments.”
Rock rhetorically pointed out, “Don't we all?...”
River thought, 'This is getting ridiculous. And I can think of better things I can do with my time, than to carry this conversation, in this direction.' She flatly asked, “Yes. So, are we done?”
Rock stated, “Yes. Except, what are you planning on doing for the rest of the day?”
River thought, with slight bitterness, 'This is her island. So, she has the right to ask that question. So, I might as well answer her question. And, for once, I will be honest.'
River answered, “Well, I am going to take a break for the morning, and go find Ranma and Akira. Then, when the girls get back, from their trip in the Lagoon. They are going to spar with those two. And I will attend their matches, as well. And maybe spar a few times, with the girls.”
River thought, 'I need to give Lee, Rose, and Violet, some space. Or, they might suspect something. And along with Revy being good with guns, she is sharp in a number of other ways. But, she does overlook things, when her guard is down. And after everything that has happened, she will lower her guard further, if I am not around her.'
Rock smiled, as she said, “Then, have a good time, River.”
River returned Rock's smile, as she said, “Thank you.” She then turned around, and walked out of the room, and down the hallway, at a casual pace. She left the door to Rock's study open, as she went in search for Ranma and Akira.
A minute later, Rock let her mind relax, without worry of River overhearing her thoughts.
Rock sat up, and turned her chair back to face her desk.
As Rock faced the papers on her desk, she thought, with mild wariness, 'Why do I feel like this is going to be a long day?...'
(_)
Meanwhile, after Revy and the amazon wrapped up their shooting lesson, they first headed to the kitchen of the mansion to drop off the weapon, casings, empty boxes, and equipment, on the kitchen table. While everything was clean and neat, on the table. They left the items there, to be taken down to the basement vault, later that day.
Revy then lead the three teenage amazon girls to the Lagoon island bay.
When they reached the bay, which was across the grassy field from the front of the mansion, they walked onto the dock on the bay.
Revy was in front, with the three girls right behind her.
Soon, they reached where the Lagoon PT Boat moored, by its left side, to the right side of the dock.
Revy came to stop by the Lagoon. With the three amazon women stopping behind her. The four women then turned to their right, and to the Lagoon. They looked up, Dutch and Benny on top of the deck.
Benny was mopping the back of the deck, and Dutch was cleaning the outside windows of the boat.
As the four women on the dock look up at them, Revy smiled, at seeing her two friends. She playfully yelled, “Ahoy captain!”
Both Dutch and Benny stopped what they were doing, as they turned towards the four girls standing below them, on the dock.
Benny said, in english, “Well, hello there, girls. How as Revy lessons in firearms?”
Dongmei translated for Rose and Violet. Rose and Violet responded, with Dongmei answering for all three them, in english, “It was wonderful.”
Benny thought, 'I am so glad that Revy turned out to be such a good teacher. She seems to enjoy it.' She smiled, as she said, “I am glad to hear that.”
Dongmei translated.
Rose said, in chinese, “So what type of boat is this?”
Dutch answered, in chinese, “It is a torpedo boat. A PT boat to be exact. As in patrol torpedo boat. This boat is designed to sink larger boats. I call her the Lagoon. And those torpedoes on it are live, and can be used at a moments notice.” She mentally added, 'Considering I keep this ship tuned up, and the gas tank full.'
Violet asked, in chinese, “How fast can it go?”
Dutch thought, with mild amusement and joy, 'Ah, the curiosity of youth.' She answered, “Let's just say that this ship was designed for speed, and maneuverability.”
Dongmei translated for Benny and Revy.
Revy said, “So, can we come aboard, and have some fun?”
Dutch answered, in english, “You're more than welcome.” She smiled, as she inquired in chinese “So, would you girls want to take a ride around the island, a few times?”
All three amazons responded, in unison, “Sure.”
Dutch stated, with joy in her tone of voice, “Then, come aboard.”
The four women on the dock then boarded the Lagoon. And a few minutes later, the mooring ropes were untied off the dock, and on the Lagoon's deck. After which, the Lagoon was castoff from the dock, and roaring out of the bay.
Dutch was sitting at the pilot's chair, in the pilot's cabin, as she used the the controls to the Lagoon, to do some simple counterclockwise loops around the island, at a fairly fast speed, with Benny sitting at the co-pilot's chair, by her.
Meanwhile, Revy, Dongmei, Rose, and Violet, were sitting outside, on the forward part of the deck, as they enjoyed the ride.
(_)
As Dutch made the Lagoon PT boat do loops around the island, inside the mansion, River was walking through the first floor of the mansion, looking for Ranma and Akira.
As River walking down one of the back, eastern side hallways of the mansion.
While River continued forward, she thought, 'Those two would not have left, without saying something to the rest of us. So, that only means they have got to be watching a movie. It is the only way I cannot pick up their thoughts. While I will not say this out loud. Unless someone is actively thinking, I cannot really sense them, except for their being in the general location. And when most people watch TV, they just tune out, and their minds don't think much, as they enjoy the show.'
'And I have already checked all the other places they could be watching TV. So, their bedroom is last on the list. And I know which room it is. The Lagoon girls always assign the same bedroom to those three, every time we have a Lagoon bikini party.'
'Speaking of which. After this entire mess is sorted out. I hope I can convince everyone to allow Lee to join them in their next bikini party. Considering Lee wrote about it, she should have more than the right to enjoy those parties.'
'Though, I think convincing Lee to attend those parties will be the hardest part of all...'
River then cracked a grin, as she continued her thought, 'But, I do so enjoy challenges.'
A few seconds later, River came to the door in the hallway, that lead to the bedroom of Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma.
As River approached the door, she mentally noted, 'The door is open, and I do here music and noise from inside.'
When River reached the door, she turned, and looked inside the bedroom.
To River's left side, she saw both Akira and Ranma sitting beside each other, at the foot of the large bed they shared with Natsuru.
Akira sat to Ranma's left side.
The blond and the redhead were watching a movie, on the wall mounted flatscreen TV, that was across from their bed.
River thought, 'Looks like I was right.... Now, to get their attention...'
River coughed.
A second later, Akira and Ranma looked over at her.
Both women sitting on the bed smiled towards River.
Akira asked, in japanese, “Oh, hi River. How are you doing?”
River returned their smile, as she said, in japanese, “Fine, Akira. Say. I was just hoping I could chill out with you two, here, until the amazon girls are finished with Revy, Dutch, and Benny.”
Akira replied, “Sure. We would more than love to have you.”
Ranma agreed, in japanese, “We would enjoy the company.”
River said, “Thanks girls.”
River then walked over to them, and Ranma moved closer to Akira, to allow for River to set on the end of the bed, on Ranma, right side.
As the three turned back towards look at the TV, River saw they were watching a comedy movie that River, herself, sometimes enjoyed to watch.
The three then continued to relax, as they spent the rest of the morning watching movies.
(_)
A little while later, the Lagoon PT boat docked back by pier, in the island bay.
The group of six adults had a great time riding around the island, in the Lagoon.
When the Lagoon reached port, as Dutch turned the boat around, to point her ship, facing outward, on the left side of the boat being beside right side of the dock. Just as it was before. Dutch then turned off the engines.
A few minutes later, Revy and Benny jumped down to the dock, and they used ropes on the deck of the Lagoon, to moor to the dock.
After that was done, all six women had gathered on the back deck of the Lagoon.
While the six women stood look at each other, Dutch said, in chinese, “Well, girls. I hope you enjoyed your trip.”
Violet smiled, as she said, in chinese, “It was fun.”
Dongmei stated, in chinese, “We will have to do this again, sometime.”
Rose commented, in chinese, “I agree with my friends. You have a very powerful boat.”
Dutch replied, in chinese, “Thank you.” She happily thought, 'It is always nice to be appreciated.'
Dongmei looked around the group, at Dutch, Benny, and Revy, as she asked, in english, “So, what next?”
Revy turned to the amazons, as she shrugged with both her shoulders. She commented, “Well, sorry girls, I am out ideas. I plan to do nude sunbathing on one of the more private parts of our beach, until lunch.”
Dongmei translated what Revy said.
Violet commented, in chinese, “But, you already have such a lovely brown skin tone?”
Dongmei translated what Violet said.
Revy said, “Well, I just enjoy the feel of the sun beating against my skin.”
Dongmei translated what Revy said,
Violet replied, in chinese, “Oh. I guess there is that.”
Dongmei translated what Violet said.
Revy giggled, at little, in response.
As Revy calmed down, she look at the three amazon girls, as she stated, “Well, see you later, girls.”
Dongmei translated.
Violet said, in english, “Goodbye.”
Rose stated, in english, “See you later.”
Dongmei commented, in english, “Have fun.”
Revy replied, “I will.”
Revy then turned and walked, across the deck, towards the pier. When she reached the edge of the Lagoon, she jumped down to the dock. She landed on her feet without a problem. She then continued walking until she reached the beach.
Revy turned to her right, and continued walking down the beach, away from the bay, and the Lagoon.
The others women on the Lagoon watched her for a few more seconds.
Dutch then turned to the group, in by her, as she said, in chinese, “Sorry girls...” The other women turned back towards Dutch, as she continued, “But, I plan to do a little more routine maintenance on the Lagoon's engines, for today. It purrs like a kitten, but I still want to check a few things.”
Dongmei said, in chinese, “That is fine. We thank you for the ride.”
Dutch just smiled, as she stated, “You're welcome.”
Benny spoke up, in english, “If you don't mind. I would like to show you three a few things.”
Dongmei translated what Benny said.
Rose questioned, in chinese, “Such as?”
Dongmei translated what Rose said.
Benny answered, “I want to show you the electronic workshop that Janet and I have.”
Dongmei translated was Benny said.
Dutch commented, in chinese, “You girls might have fun looking at that place.”
The three girls looked at each other, for a few seconds.
Dongmei shrugged, as she said, in chinese, “Why not? We have nothing better to do?”
Rose commented, in chinese, “I am always interested in learning new things.”
Violet stated, in chinese, “Fine with me.”
They then looked at Benny, as Violet said, in chinese, “Okay. Please, lead the way.”
Dutch turned to Benny, as she said, in english, “She said. Please, lead the way.”
Benny looked over at Dutch, “Thanks, Dutch.”
Dutch looked at Benny, as she replied, in english, “No problem. See you at lunch.”
Benny teased, “It's a date.”
Dutch let out a laugh.
Benny turned to the three amazons, whom were looking back at her. She said, “Okay girls. This way.”
Dongmei translated what Benny said.
Benny then lead the three amazons off the Lagoon, onto the dock, and towards the mansion.
Dutch watched Benny and the amazons headed for the mansion, at a casual pace, for a few seconds. She then turned around, as she headed for the engine room, from the hatch on the back deck. So, she could work on the Lagoon engines for the next hour, or so.
(_)
Five minutes later, Benny lead Rose, Dongmei, and Violet, into the mansion. Up the western staircase, in the entryway. Through a hallway, in the second floor, on the western side of the mansion.
As they approached Benny and Janet's workshop, Benny was leading the way. She said, “While, with you not coming from a very technical society, I can say that electronics can be very important.”
Dongmei translated for Benny.
Rose joked, “Yea. Electronics can be important. And so does having fresh batteries for one's vibrator.”
Dongmei did not translate what Rose said, as three amazon girls giggled for a few seconds.
Benny thought, 'Ten dollars says that was a sex joke.'
A few seconds later, they reached a closed door.
The amazons ways as Benny turned the knob, and opened the door, signifying that it was not locked.
Benny then walked inside, as she casually flipped open the light switch to the ceiling lights in the room.
Rose, Dongmei, and Violet, followed right behind her, and into the well lit room.
Benny then came to a stop, on the other side of the room, with the three amazons stopped about ten feet from her, inside the room.
Benny turned around to face the three young amazon women, as she asked, “So... What do you think?”
Dongmei translated what Benny said, as the three amazons looked around the room.
Violet said, in chinese, “Wow.”
As the girls look around, they notice that the room was completely enclosed, with no windows. They saw computers, and other forms, on tables surrounding all four walls of the room. Where there were no tables, there were also shelves that line the walls. There were stools, and basic seats in the room, by the stables. Also, on the tables, and shelves were also pieces of electronic equipment, various electronic tools, and other items needed to work on and get electronics to work.
There was were fire extinguishers near the door, on the opposite side, from the direction the door swung open. And there were smoke alarms on the ceiling, and what looked like a couple of fire sprinkler on the ceiling, near the ventilation ducks and away from the ceiling lights.
Benny stated, “First, the walls, floor, ceiling, and interior side of the door, are lined with firerock paneling, and the sprinklers are wired to the smoke alarms and the electronic system going into this room. If the sprinklers are tripped, the electricity going into room is cut. So, not accidental electrocutions.”
“Also, the room is well ventilated, so any ambient smoke, created, while working, is moved out of the room. So, the fire alarms will not easily trip.”
“Now, this is the place that Janet and I work on our electronics. Even Dutch, Molly and Kristina sometimes join us. This is all top of the line equipment. Hell, some of it is not of this reality. And I must admit, it is fun getting electronics from different realities to work together.”
“This is where I first worked on the generators that power all the electrical equipment. We first bought though generators from another reality. And the worked great for power and back up power. They are real cheap to operate and maintain.”
Dongmei asked, in english, “Where are the generators, now?”
Benny answered, “They are now located in auxiliary buildings, on opposite sides of the mansion.”
Dongmei complimented, “That was intelligent thinking on your part. There is less chance of a storm, or a wave, knocking out generators on both sides of your main building.”
Benny smiled, as she replied, “I know.”
Dongmei translated then what Benny, and herself, had said, for Violet and Rose.
Violet asked, in a curious tone of voice, in chinese, “So, are you girls rich?”
Dongmei translated Violet's question, for Benny.
Benny looked over at Violet, as she smirked. She rhetorically asked, “We own an island, and a mansion. What do you think?” She then girlishly giggled for a few seconds.
Dongmei translated Benny's answer.
Violet replied, in chinese, “Oh I see...” She then shrugged, as she continued, “Of course, you're rich.”
Rose thought, 'It is best we keep this conversation moving forward.' She smiled towards Benny, as she calmly asked, in chinese, “What would you like to show us first?”
Dongmei translated what her two friends had said.
Benny's smile widened ever so slightly, as she answered, “Whatever catches your eye, my dear... Whatever catches your eye...”
(_)
Those on Lagoon island continued what they are doing, for the rest of the morning, until everyone gathered, together, to have some lunch, around one PM, local time, in the kitchen of the mansion.
After lunch, Ranma, Akira, River, Dongmei, Rose, and Violet, headed to the gym of the mansion, to get in some friendly sparring sessions with each other, on the blue mats of the room.
The group had been sparring for the last twenty minutes, one of the large, square sets of blue cushioned mats. With their shoes off.
Each blue mat had over an inch of cushioning, and was three feet by three feet square. The blue mats were laid out in a thirty feet by thirty feet grid square.
Those in the group that were not sparring, stood around one of the blue sets of cushions mats, watching their friends fight.
When needed, either Dongmei, Ranma, or River, translated for Rose and Violet.
They were preforming hand to hand techniques, with no weapons. And it was just to see what everyone was capable of. None of them were going all out. Especially, Ranma, nor River.
They had been there for twenty minutes. As they took turns sparring against each other.
First, was Rose versus Ranma. While Ranma won, Rose was a gracious loser. And Ranma admitted that she had potential.
Then, it was Akira versus Dongmei. Akira won, but not after a long fight with the black haired girl.
After that, was River versus Violet. To Violet’s credit, she took River by surprise a few time. But, ultimately, River won the sparring match. Though, River gave Violet pointers, afterward, which Violet more than welcomed.
Presently, River was standing beside Akira, as she was watching the match between Violet and Ranma. She thought, 'I have to admit, Rose and Violet are respectable fighters. They are giving a good showing against a master, such as Ranma. And even myself. With everyone is being polite, over these sparring matches.'
'Also, during the match between Akira and Dongmei, Akira showed her skills are continuing to improve, as well.'
'On the matter of Dongmei... Well, I am not going to say anything, but even as Dongmei... Lee is holding back. But, then again, Lee never gave a hundred percent, unless her ass was on the line. I am sure, when Dongmei spared with Ranma, with Ranma easily beating her. Ranma can tell that Lee is holding back, but she is polite enough about the matter, not to say anything.... What a minute. I sense someone coming into the room, and that person is thinking about me.'
Revy turned to see Revy entering the gym room, from the other side of the room. Revy was presently walking passed the exercise equipment, as she was approached the group, while looking back at River.
River noticed Revy returning her gaze, as River thought, 'It is Revy. And from her thoughts, she wants to talk to me. I best find out what this is about.'
River than walked over to Revy.
They met where the exercise equipment ending, around thirty feet from the sparring mats.
As they came to a stop six feet in front of each other, they calmly looked at each other.
Revy was the first to speak, as she stated, “I see you sensed that I was looking for you.”
River shrugged, as she replied, in english, “Yea. What can I do for you?”
Revy answered, “Plenty. You heard about Priss beating me?”
River replied, “Yes.” She thought, 'While, we did not laugh over the matter. Chang and I found it humorous that someone finally beat you, that was even closer in personality to you, than Roberta and Fabiola.'
Revy responded, “Well, after Priss beat me, I have been thinking that I need to refine my hand to hand skills some. And baring Roberta, and a few others, you are one of the best hand to hand experts I know. And even with what is going on with Lee. I trust you enough to give me some pointers.”
River kindly said, “Well, thank you, Revy. I would be more than happy to give you some help.” She mentally added, 'And this way, I can keep you away from Lee. While also scoring some minor favors from you.'
Revy replied, “I appreciate it.”
River offered, “We can start right now. If you want?”
Revy stated, “Good. We will use the spar mats. I will drop my holster, weapons, and boots when we get there.”
The two women then turned to face the mats, and headed for a nearby square set of blue mats, to their right side, that was not in use.
(_)
Meanwhile, Ranma had just finished wrapping up her sparring session with Violet, which ended with Violet yielding.
As the two opponents stood facing each other, Ranma said, in a supportive tone of voice, in chinese, “Don't feel bad. You put up a good fight. Just like Rose, I see a lot of potential in your fighting skills.”
Violet replied, in chinese, “Thank you.”
Dongmei translated what was said, into english, for Akira.
While Violet walked off the mat, and towards her friends, Ranma turned to Akira, and she noticed that River was gone.
Ranma asked, in japanese, “Where is River? She is up next.”
Akira looked around, she then saw River sparring with Revy, on a nearby set of mats. She turned back to Ranma to see that Ranma had her head turned, looking at River and Revy, as well.
Ranma turned to Akira, as Akira said, in japanese, “I guess Revy needed to spar a little, herself.”
Ranma commented, “Yes. And River is a good choice. You do not mind if I spar with Dongmei next.”
Akira shrugged, as she replied, “Go ahead.”
Ranma turned to Dongmei, as she said, in chinese, “Dongmei. You're next.” She then walked back onto the mat.
Dongmei smiled towards Ranma. She walked onto the mat, towards Ranma, as she casually said, in chinese, “My pleasure.”
When the two combatants were ten feet apart, as they took on offensive fighting stances
A second later, Ranma said, in chinese, “Begin.”
Dongmei than waited where she stood, for Ranma to come at her.
Ranma though, 'So, she is smart enough not to come at me. Just like her two friends. And she wants me to come to her... Fine with me.'
Ranma then quickly charged at Dongmei.
Then, then friendly practice battle the began, with neither opponent taking the time to think, they only reacted, as they fought, as they were trained to do so.
Ranma displayed the aerial skills of her martial arts style, by doing a flying kick towards Dongmei.
Dongmei ducked below the flying kick, as she did a somersault under the Ranma. Ranma landed at the exact time Dongmei finished her somersault. With Dongmei quickly on her feet, facing Ranma, as Ranma turned to face Dongmei.
A second after the two turned to face one another, they charged at each other.
When they came within reach of one another, Ranma through a punch with her right hand. Dongmei block the blow with her left forearm.
Dongmei followed her attack by using her already upright left arm, to form a forked hand, as she did a chopping motion towards the right side of Ranma's neck.
Ranma stepped back to avoid the blow. She then did a spinning kick, with her right leg, toward the lower, left side of Dongmei's stomach.
Dongmei quickly used her left arm to catch Ranma's leg, by Ranma's ankle, between her arm, and her chest.
Dongmei than attempted to do a palm strike, with her right hand, towards the left side of Ranma's forehead.
Ranma tilted her head to her right, to avoid the strike.
Ranma then lifted her left leg, which was keep her up, to limp.
As Ranma began to fall back, she immediately used both her hands to grab the top of Dongmei's shirt, by Dongmei's shoulders.
Dongmei immediately realized what Ranma doing, was going to throw her over her. And if Dongmei did not let go of Ranma's right leg, they could both be hurt by the fall.
So, Dongmei let go of Ranma's right leg, as she prepared for the throw.
Right before Ranma's back hit the blue mats, she used the strength in her hand and arms, her wight, and the momentum of her fall, to throw Dongmei, face first, over herself.
When Ranma landed on her back, she quickly rolled to her left side, and got up, onto her feet.
At the same time, instead of falling on her chest, Dongmei used her momentum, to curled up into a ball, and landed in a rolling stop, onto her feet.
Dongmei jump back up, and turned around to see Ranma looked back at her, from the other side of the blue mats.
Both of them charged again.
As they approached each other, Ranma threw a punch with her right fist.
Dongmei caught Ranma's right wrist with both hands, as she turned to her left, while lifting Ranma's right wrist upward.
Ranma realized what was happening, as Dongmei threw Ranma over her shoulders. Dongmei let go of Ranma, at the apex of her throw.
But, instead of falling on her back, Ranma quickly shifted her weight forward faster than Dongmei expected. And Ranma landed on her feet.
This took Dongmei off guard, and Ranma knew it.
Dongmei was still leaning back up, in one fluid motion, an Ranma turned around clockwise, to face Dongmei. Ranma continued turning, as she swiftly brought up her left knee, to hit Dongmei square in her stomach.
This quickly knocked the wind out Dongmei.
As Ranma set her left foot back down, on the floor, beside her right foot, she watched her well placed strike take effect.
Dongmei quickly collapsed to the blue matted ground, on all fours. She swiftly found enough of her breath to say, in chinese, “I yield.”
Ranma immediately stopped in her tracks.
Ranma remained silent for several seconds, as Dongmei got back her breath, and she stood up to face Ranma.
Dongmei asked, in a calm tone of voice, in chinese, “So, how did I do?”
Ranma said, in chinese, “Not bad, Dongmei. You got some skill. I thought you were holding back, quite a bit. And now I know you were. You nearly caught me by surprise with that last throwing technique.”
Ranma thought, with a mix of slight confusion, and concern, 'Something is wrong here. I know that throwing technique, that Dongmei just tried on me, from somewhere. And it is not the Chinese Amazons. Cologne, Shampoo, Rose, nor Violet, used that technique.'
'Amazon techniques prefer direct approaches, with fists and kicks. While mixing it up with weapons, and aerial attacks. Amazons do not place much emphasis on throwing techniques.'
'But, Dongmei clearly has been taught quite a bit about throwing techniques, to show this kind of skill. Though, it could be that she learned that technique from an outside source. It is very possible. The amazons are also open to learn from others.'
'And I could almost fill an entire small phone book, with the number of teachers I have had over the years.'
'Still, either way, I need a few minutes to think on this.'
Ranma politely requested, in chinese, “Could you give me a minute to collect my thoughts, before we have the next match?”
Dongmei replied, in chinese, “Sure.”
Ranma said, in chines, “And thank you for the match. It was as invigorating as the matches against Rose and Violet.”
Dongmei smiled, as she responded, “You're welcome, Ranma. I appreciate you saying that.”
As Ranma watched Dongmei turned around, and walk off the mat, towards her friends, she thought, 'Now, where did I see those fighting technique before?... I know those technique from somewhere.'
Ranma then looked over at the sparring match across the room, going on between Revy and River.
And Ranma saw River pull the same move on Revy. Only this time, Revy ended up flat on her back, though unharmed.
Ranma's eyes widened ever so slightly, as she looked back at Dongmei. She thought, with curiosity, and mild surprise, 'River did the same thing. But, could River have taught her that trick during their hunt?... No. River stated they were only gone for two weeks. That is why she jumped two weeks into our future... Well, present, now... And she would have not reason to lie about that.'
'Though, that throwing techniques Dongmei used was too fluid. As if that technique had been practiced over the course of years, to where they were second nature. But, how?... When did they have the time?... It would required years, and those kids don't look any older...'
'The only way they could have that much time, and not be older, is by being in a time loop... Oh crap...It couldn't be?... Could it?...'
Ranma took a harder look at Dongmei's face, as the teenage woman had exited the mats, and she was standing by her friends, as she talked to them.
Ranma especially focused on Dongmei's face.
Ranma thought, with increasing surprise, which she did not let show on the outside, 'Wait a minute... Black hair. Caucasian. She is a decent fighter. She is very polite. And her chinese has a slight Taiwanese accent...'
'Oh my... Dongmei is Lee!'
'But, she doesn't act like Lee? She clearly doesn't know us. Still, Lee was tracked from Jusenkyo to the amazon village... And the girl curse would be a good way to cure himself of his cancer. All he had to do was lock herself as a girl. That would not be a problem for someone as clever as Lee is, at the top of his game... Or now, her game.'
'And we never guessed Lee would do that... Though, given her writings, we should have....'
'Still, why doesn't she remember us?... Of course. She was brainwashed with that amazon shampoo. Though, who would do that?... Of course. Cologne...'
'It is clear that something went wrong during Lee's plan of escape. And Lee got captured, brainwashed, and inducted into chinese amazon society... Maybe, Garibaldi betrayed Lee. That is possible. And with everything else on Lee's plate. Pre-cog, or not. Lee would likely not see that coming.'
'But, that doesn't explain why Roberta and Fabiola refused to talk about why they came back empty handed... Or does it?...'
'There are key pieces to this puzzle that are still missing. Though, that is not important, right now. What is important is that we now have Lee here. And no one here realizes it, but myself. And she is a woman... Oh, this is so juicy...'
'And it won't surprise me in the least that Cologne had a direct hand in such matters. Wait a minuted... Cologne said. I preferred to capture Lee alive. Past tense. Not, I would prefer to capture Lee alive. Which would be present tense...'
'And later in that conversation, Cologne suppressed a laugh, in sending those three after Lee... She knew that Lee was Dongmei all this time... Oh, I am probably right. She was likely the one that brainwashed Lee. She might have even named Lee, Dongmei...'
'Of course, Dongmei means winter plum. And Plum in Chinese is, Lee... And knowing Cologne, she not only had a direct hand in this, she likely named Lee, Dongmei, herself...'
'Well, Cologne always did like teaching those with skill. I guess that includes even skills that are outside of combat. For her, Lee would be like a ball of clay, ready to be skillfully molded. And she did mold Lee into someone else. If I didn't know better, I would have never guessed Dongmei and Lee were the same person.'
'And I have to admire the guts of that sneaky, conniving, ghoulish bitch. With her knowingly sending Lee right into our arms, without any of us realizing it.'
'But, the math on her current age does not add up... She looks to be in her late teens. She should be older... Of course. It could be any number of things messing with her age. From the cursed springs to magical mushrooms. I have had experience with both of those. And I am sure there are other age altering magics in my home reality.'
Ranma then quickly looked Dongmei up and down. She paid special attention to Dongmei's breasts and butt, as she continued her thoughts, 'And she's such a cute woman at that… That spring does bring out the sexy in someone. I should know... And being a woman will help greatly mitigate the revenge the others will have on her. It worked for Chang. I am sure this will make River very happy... Oh hell! River!...'
Ranma looked over at River, whom still continuing to sparring with Revy. With Revy already up off the mats, and sparring with River, again.
Ranma mentally realized, with mild relief, 'It is fortunate that River is focused on her sparring with Revy. But, that will not last. And even with my training in blocking my thoughts from telepaths, I might slip up, and mentally inform River that Dongmei is Lee.'
'That would create quite a mess... Unless, River already knew Dongmei was Lee. But, then why would she bring Lee here?... That is walking the lamb into the lions den...'
'I need to get out of here, and talk to someone about this. But, who?... I cannot tell anyone here. Natsuru is with Janet... Whoa, how about, Rock? Yes. She would be the perfect one to discuss this matter with. She will have a plan on how to deal with this. Also, I will make sure to talk to her, alone. Dutch may have a level head, but Benny, and Revy, might let the cat out of the bag before we are ready...'
'But first, I need to hand this sparing off to Akira. So, that no one is the wiser of the situation...'
Ranma turned towards Akira, whom was standing right off the mats, beside the three amazons. She saw the blond woman looking back at her.
As Ranma walked towards her blond lover, from the expression on her face, Akira could tell that something was wrong.
When Ranma reached Akira, Akira quietly asked, in japanese, “What is wrong?”
Ranma glanced of at the three amazons, as she thought, 'Even though Lee somehow learned japanese. I can tell she is to caught up in talking to her friends to notice us. And there is less chance of someone else overhearing us, if we talk in our native language.'
Ranma looked back towards Akira, and into the blond woman's eyes, as she quietly responded, in japanese, “I cannot tell you, right now. But, I will do so, later... I know you want to get some weapons sparring in. But, for right now, just focus on doing some hand to hand sparring with them. And keep an eye on them.'
Akira said, in japanese, “Okay. But, I am nowhere near your skill level.”
Ranma shrugged, as she replied, “Almost nobody is. But, you are at their skill level. You handled them fine, so far. So, you should do fine. Anyway, I need to talk to Rock, about something.”
Akira said, “Okay.”
Next, Ranma slipped on her black slippers, which were by her, set right beside the mats, next to Akira's cowgirl boots.
Akira then watched Ranma calmly turn, and walk away from them, pass the exercise equipment, and towards indoor exit of the room.
After Ranma was out of Akira's sight, Akira turned back to the three amazons, as she coughed. This got their attention.
As the three younger girls turned to look at the blond haired woman, Akira kindly said, in english, “Okay ladies. Ranma has to attend to an errand. And with River busy with Revy, I will be sparring with you, alone. So, who is first?...
Dongmei translated with Akira.
Akira then saw all three girls smiling towards her.
Rose and Violet each said something in chinese.
Dongmei continued to smile at Akira, as she replied, for herself, and her two friends, in english, “You pick. We are fine with whatever order you choose.”
Akira returned their smiles, as she thought, 'I think I am going to enjoy this. I think I will go with Violet. Rose is the best, and Dongmei just fought. But, Violet could use a little work, as well.' She stated, “I pick Violet.”
Dongmei translated. A few seconds later, Akira and Violet ended the mats, to begin sparring.
A minute later, there was a surprising victor, in the match. That being Violet.
Violet walked off the mat, while Akira then had Rose spar with her. While Akira be Rose, she was a little winded. And to give herself time to catch her breath, she then had Dongmei and Violet spar. With Violet winning.
And so their sparring matches continued.
(_)
For the next ten minutes, Ranma searched for Rock. Ranma then checked the next place she thought Rock might be, Rock's study.
From a second story hallway, Ranma walked up to the open door to Rock study. She ducked her head in, and she saw that Rock was quietly sitting in her deck chair, facing her desk, writing something long hand, in japanese. With Rock's right side facing Ranma.
Ranma leaned up, and she walked into the room.
As Ranma came to a stop five feet from Rock, Rock calmly said, in japanese, “Hello Ranma.”
Ranma stated, in japanese, “I sometimes forget how enhanced your hearing is.”
Rock turned to Ranma, as she said, “Yes. And I can tell it was you by the specific sound your shoes make.” Her voice took a more casual tone, as she asked, “So, what do you need, Ranma?”
Ranma said, “Rock, I am not sure how to tell you this. So, I am just going to say. I think Dongmei is Lee. And she has been brainwashed to not remember she is Lee.”
Rock slightly shook her head for a second. She then looked at Ranma, as she deadpanned, “Why doesn't that surprise me?”
Ranma calmly pointed out, “It takes a lot to surprise us.”
Rock agreed, “That is very true. So, what tipped you off?”
Ranma stated, “Well, the first clue was Dongmei used a throwing technique that River uses. And she did it with such skill that it was second nature to her. Then, I took a good hard look at her. Even with the long hair, youth, gender change, you can see the similarities. Especially in her face. Like the similarities one would notice in my face, in both my gender forms.”
Rock responded, “Yes. Now that I think about it, they do like brother and sister... A few decades removed.” She mentally added, 'And this might be what River was hiding from me. But, we will deal with that, later. Along, with avoiding her, so she does not read our minds about this. Still, I need to know more proof.'
Rock asked, “What other proof do you have?”
Ranma admitted, “I don't have much. But, if Dongmei is Lee. She has clearly been brainwashed to forget us, and even who she was. But, she still retains some of her skills.”
Rock thought, 'This is getting more interesting by the minute.' She said, “That could be both good and bad. Depending on how you look at it. Do you have that magic lamp of yours, that has the smoke to restore memories?”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. It is in my bedroom. Also, if she has her precognitive abilities, she has not mentioned such skills.”
Rock pointed out, “Lee is always one to keep secrets. Especially, when concerning her more special abilities. I see no reason why Dongmei would be any different.”
Ranma commented, “That is going to make capturing her more difficult.”
Rock responded, “Maybe. Maybe not. Outside of poker, and Lee's fighting skills. Lee never did heavily rely on those abilities. It is very possible they were not really that reliable as an early warning system. And it is possible that Dongmei's precognition is the same way.”
Ranma replied, “I see your point.” Ranma voice took a more concerned tone of voice, as she continued, “Now, I know you don't like Lee, because he is the writer of this mess. But, like River has said. Lee was a nice guy. And she is still a nice girl.”
“And I will be honest. I, and none of my family, have any interest in revenge against her.”
Rock stated, “I realize that. And none of you have really pushed the matter. I respect you, and your family, for that.”
Ranma responded, “Thank you. And I would think, that with her now being a woman. It should help matters, in lessening the severity of your revenge against her.”
Rock calmly responded, “Yes. The gender change will help the situation, concerning her, a lot. But, we need to talk to the others, before we decide what to do.”
Ranma replied, “Agreed.”
Rock said, “Janet, Natsuru, and the girls should be back in a few hours. We can talk to the others, then. Though, we need a plan to a to distract River, so we can talk in peace. And we need to avoid, River. It does not matter if she knows Dongmei is Lee, or not. She bought her back here. What does matter is making sure River does not learn that we know that Dongmei is Lee. Or, she might do something stupid that gets her into trouble. And Lee into worst trouble.”
Ranma stated, “I agree with you. And I have an idea. But, it will require our kids being left out of the loop for a little while longer.”
Rock responded, “I don't mind. As long as your plan gets results. With no one getting hurt.”
Ranma explained, “With luck, no one will get hurt with my plan. Now, here is my plan. As you said we need to wait for Natsuru and the others to return. We will just have to be careful to avoid River. Which should not be a problem. When they get back, I will ask my kids to invite the amazons, and River, for some sparring, with mild elemental abilities mixed in...”
Rock spoke up, as she inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Are you sure that is safe, and no one will get hurt with your plan? I may want revenge on Lee, but I don't want the others harmed. Even River. And that might harm someone. Beside, I want Lee to be in good shape, so we don't have to wait for her to get well before we have our revenge on her.”
Ranma answered, “I appreciate that. And not to worry... We have done such sparring before. My children will not hurt the others. And the offer to spar with people that use elemental abilities will be to tempting an offer for them to pass up. And the elemental abilities will be a good excuse to get them out of house, and away from us.”
“Meanwhile, we will gather the older adults together in the gym, where we will tell them what is going on, and we can all talk about it. There, we will come up with a further plan to deal with the situation.”
Rock complimented, “And they call me devious”
Both women giggled, for a few seconds.
As the calmed down, Rock inquired, “Still, what about my kids? Do you want them to join the meeting?”
Ranma said, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “I will be honest with you. From the way I hear my kids talk about Lee. And when they mention your kids feelings with Lee. They might try to help Lee. And I do not want to put them in position where they will have to choose between helping someone they like, and their loyalty to their family.”
Rock stated, “Thank you, for your concern. And I hate to admit. But, you have a point. They might help, Lee. Not that I hold it against them. They owe Lee big for their new lives.”
Ranma thought, 'At least she will admit that.' She agreed, “True. And Lee did do a lot of good, along with a lot of bad.”
Rock responded, “I realize that. Which is why I am not going to kill him... Or, I guess her. But, we will do something else.”
Ranma kindly requested, “Just, please only do something that will leave Lee in one piece. I did come to you as a way to mitigate the situation. So, please bear that in mind.”
Rock said, “I will see what I can do. And I will my children do some daily chores. They may not like that. But, it will get them out of the line of fire for everything else.”
Ranma questioned, “I agree. Still, if River know. Why would she bring Lee back here.”
Rock answered, “The answer is simple. This is the safest place to bring Lee. Because we would never guess that River would hide Lee in plain sight. Which we should have, by now.”
Ranma replied, “True.”
Rock commented, “And with Lee now Dongmei, in all likelihood we would not have recognized her as Lee. It was a fluke that you did.”
Ranma stated, “That is true. I see what you are saying here. It is truly a plan worthy of Lee creative insanity.”
Rock said, “I know. And River did keep her promise to bring Lee back here?”
Ranma point out, 'But, if River knew. She did not tell us.”
Rock commented, “River did ask to spend a few days here, with the amazons. She is just trying to figure out how to tell us, while mitigating the situation with Lee being captured by us.”
Ranma said, “I guess that makes sense.”
Rock stated, “It is the best I can come up with. Now, let's work on the details of their plan of yours.”
Ranma said, “I am all ears.”
Ranma and Rock then formulated their plans on how to hand the situation. With them coming up with the details on how to avoid River, how to arrange the meeting, while getting River and the amazons out of the mansion, and away from the meeting.
(_)
Later that afternoon, after Janet, Natsuru, and the eight teenage girls returned to the island, but before supper time, Ranma and Rock hatched their plan, while they were careful to avoid River.
Ranma and Rock got to the Natsuru, Janet, and the teenagers. While they did not mention the meeting. Ranma convinced her daughters to go offer to spar with the amazons and River, outside, in the field, in front of the mansion. And Rock convinced her five daughters to go do their usual daily chores.
Once the teenagers were out of the room, the two women informed Natsuru and Janet of their plan.
After everything was in play, with River and the amazon distracted by Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto. By them being convinces to do some sparring, with some minor elemental abilities, out in the open field, between the mansion, and the bay.
Once Ranma and Rock had confirmed that River was outside of the mansion, they began rounding up their friends, for their meeting.
They even contacted Dutch, by radio, on the Lagoon to come to the mansion. But, not to ask questions. With Dutch passing by the teenagers, and River, as she headed for the mansion, with no one being the wiser.
Dutch met Janet in the entryway of the mansion, and Janet took Dutch to the gym for the meeting.
By the time Dutch and Janet had entered the gym, the other older adults on the island, had gathered in the gym, as well.
Rock and Ranma only saying they had something important to talk about, with them.
Those present were Rock, Revy, Dutch, Janet, Benny, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira.
They were all wearing their casual clothing. In addition, Revy was the only one present that was armed. On her person, she had her pistols in her shoulder holsters.
The adults were around the area of the gym, with the exercise equipment.
Most of the adults stood around, as they faced each other. While a few of them sat on some of the benches on the exercise equipment.
Akira looked over at Natsuru, as she asked, in english, “So, how was the shopping trip?”
Natsuru turned to Akira, as she answered, in english, “It was good. We all had a fun time. I will show you what the girls and I bought, later.”
Akira replied, “Good. I looked forward to it.”
The two lovers then turned their attention back to the group.
Meanwhile, as everyone finally got conformable, Rock looked around her. She turned to Ranma, whom was looking back at her, as she stated, in english, “I am glad you convinced your kids to put on that sparring match with River and the amazons, in the field outside.”
Ranma said, in english, “They like to show off. When they can. And friendly sparring with those that have element abilities was to tempting for the amazons, and River, to pass up.”
Benny spoke up, “I am not sure what going on. But, I am sure you are trying to keep River out of your minds. And with luck, River will be too busy with watching the girls, to not notice what we are up to.”
Rock and Ranma turned to the group, as Rock replied, “Exactly, Benny.”
Akira inquired, “So, where are your children at?”
Rock answered, “Doing some chores, that will keep them out of trouble.”
Akira replied, “Okay.”
Ranma stated, “Now, down to the business at hand. I think Dongmei is Lee. Dongmei just doesn't know who she really is.”
Given the oddities everyone present had experienced throughout their lives, they all took the news in stride.
Revy took on a feral smile, as she stated, “Hmmm... Wouldn't that be deliciously sweet and poetic. The lamb walked into the slaughter house on her own. And I can see the resemblance between Dongmei and that bastard, Lee. Well, bitch, now. If she is Lee.”
Janet calmly agreed, “Now, that I think about it. So can I, as well. They do have a striking resemblance between each other. Especially, their faces.”
Akira said, “I think we all can see the resemblance.”
Revy stated, “She is definitely ain't chinese. She admitted that, herself.”
Benny asked, “What I can't believe is why we did not recognize Dongmei, beforehand?”
Natsuru pointed out, “That is because personality has a lot do with how people recognize each other. Voice also. And facial features. If someone has a different personality, a different tone of voice, different gender, and much longer hair, it can thrown anyone.”
Rock asked, “Did you learn that from your police training?”
Natsuru answered, “Yes. And from experience.”
Akira commented, “It is safe to say that if Dongmei is Lee, then it clear that she does not know who she really is.”
Rock said, “Yes. That seems to be the case.”
Revy commented, with a bit of excitement in her tone of voice, “Oh, it is so delicious that after being so paranoid with us, across literally three realities. That because of her recent memory problems, when we finally confront Lee, she won't see us coming. And the best part is, since she is already female, we won't have to waste any magical girl powder packets on her. So, when do we capture this bitch?”
Dutch turned to Revy, as she said, “Hold your horses, Revy. As much as I would like revenge on Lee, as well, I don't want to go off half cocked.” She turned to Ranma, as she continued, “Exactly what makes you think Dongmei is Lee?”
Ranma answered, “As Akira, Janet, and Revy, pointed out, Dongmei's looks. Age and gender differences can be explained with magic. Maybe even the girl curse, like I have. It just made her younger. Also, she has the same basic personality as Lee, in that she is polite, knowledgeable about what she knows. Though, she doesn't remember any of us. And she likes to hold back in a fight.”
Dutch responded, “Yes. Lee always does like to keep his secrets. I don't know how. But, Lee clearly went too far in his secrets, and became a her with no memory of being Lee.”
Janet stated, “Yes. It is poetic justice. And it is likely that Lee locked herself as a girl, because this morning, when I came to tell them that breakfast was ready, I saw her walk out of the nearby bathroom. And I saw steam coming up from the room, meaning that was not a cold shower. But, hot water.”
Benny asked, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “The question is why would Lee turned herself into a woman in the first place?”
Janet turned to Benny, as she casually answered, “To cure her cancer, silly. She now looks young and healthy. Given we tracked Lee to Jusenkyo, it is an academic guess that she used the spring of drowned girl curse, and she locked herself in her girl form, to remain healthy.”
Benny turned to Janet, as she shrugged. She said, “I didn't know that Lee had it in him... Or now, her. To do that.”
Dutch pointed out, “Desperate times call for desperate measures.”
Ranma commented, “There is a sense of irony in that given how many people have hunted and tracked Lee, that Cologne stated that Dongmei is an expert hunter and trackers. And I believe Cologne was honest with her claims.”
Revy commented, “I don't doubt that, one bit. The best escape artists are those that know how to hunt, track, and understand how the game is played. And Lee knows all three, very well.”
Ranma agreed, “That is true.”
Janet looked around the room, as she asked, “Still, how can Lee not know that she is Lee?”
Rock mentioned, “Well, the amazons do have a type of memory altering shampoo.”
Ranma said, “True. And I am starting to realize that Cologne likely knew we were after Lee, and she was the one that brainwashed Lee. Because she handed picked those amazons to help us. She even stated they were always welcome in her village, no matter what.”
Natsuru commented, “I get you. She was clandestinely saying that to Lee. So, that Lee would know, that when her memory was restored, she was still welcome in the village.”
Ranma said, “Exactly. And I think that was nice of Cologne.”
Natsuru replied, “I agree.”
Janet questioned, “But, why would she send Lee back to us?”
Revy snorted, as she stated, “Simple. It gets Lee out of her village. And her village out of our cross-hairs. While having us do the dirty work of getting Lee to remember. This way, they don't have to do anything. And at the same time, by sending Lee to us, it forces Lee to finally deal with her own problems.”
Ranma shrugged, as she conceded, “Yes. That is Cologne in a nutshell. She is that crafty. And she knows we won't immediately kill Lee, upon discovering who she really is.”
Revy begrudgingly admitted, “True. And it sounds like this Cologne lady is not one to be crossed.”
Ranma said, “Exactly. You do not want to cross that woman. In her three centuries, or more, of living, she has likely forgotten more about combat, than all of us know, put together. Myself included.”
Revy replied, “Got ya.”
Natsuru commented, “Still, while this all supports the chain of logic that Dongmei is Lee. As Dutch pointed out. We need to make sure, before we pull the trigger on this.” She turned to Revy, as she added, “Both, figuratively, and literally...”
Revy notice Natsuru looking at her. She shrugged, as she commented, “Don't worry. I am not going to shoot the bitch... Just yet... It would be too quick a death for her.”
Natsuru responded, “Good. Because we need to make sure Dongmei is Lee.” She turned to Rock, as she inquired, “What are you thoughts on this, Rock?”
Rock looked over at Natsuru, as she answered, “I would say, yes. Dongmei is Lee. It all fits together. For the most part. The timeline tracks together. The reasons for the gender and ages changes are explainable. Or, at least workable, with magic involved. And so does the lack of memory on Dongmei's part. The one flaw is that Dongmei knows japanese. Lee never learned japanese.”
Akira countered, “No. Lee just didn't learn much japanese from us. Though, we did give Lee a basic foundation on learning our language. All he had to do was find someone to teach him. And Plata Podrido is full of foreigners, from around the world. I am sure, with all that time in the time loop, Lee likely found someone that knew japanese, to teach him the rest of what he needed to learn.”
Akira thought, 'I believe that Natsuru even mentioned, in passing, while in Mars Dome One, that Lee learned japanese. Though, I will have to ask her about that.'
Rock replied, “That is very possible.”
Akira said, “Exactly. Still, how do we handle this? This could go bad very easily. And I do not want to make an enemy out of Cologne. I have met the woman. While she was polite to us. We could tell she is cagey. And she is very dangerous.”
Revy said, “Simple. We jump the amazons. Tie them up. Make Lee remember, and then get our revenge.”
Akira countered, “We need to handle this a little more delicately than that.”
Benny said, “True. I have no hatred for the other amazons. We can just send them home.”
Rock commented, “That would be best.”
Benny asked, “Still, how do we get Dongmei to remember?”
Rock stated, “Ranma and I already discussed that, as well. We can use Ranma's magic lamp to make her remember.”
Ranma said, “It should work. With only minor possible problems.”
Benny turned to Ranma, as she asked, “Do you have that lamp of yours?”
Ranma looked over at Benny, as she answered, “Yea. It is in my room.”
Ranma and Benny then turned back to look towards the group.
Dutch stated, “Just to play devil's advocate here. But, what if we are wrong. And Dongmei is not Lee?”
Rock said, “If she doesn't remember. We apologize to her, and let her go.”
Revy commented, “If she is Lee, that would explain her shooting skills. Which she claims she has no idea of having.”
Akira turned to Revy, as she asked, “How good was she?”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Respectable.”
Natsuru commented, “Coming from you. That is saying a lot.”
Natsuru noticed Revy crack a smile at her comment.
Akira pointed out, “Not to add to the problem at hand. But, it won't just be the amazons we would be facing. River is still on the island. And currently, she is with them, and our children.”
“And River will fight for Lee. Plus, she will likely read one of our minds, the next time we see her. And she will probably react badly to our plan. I don't know about you. But, she is next to the maids, and Annie, on my list of people to never want to piss off.”
Revy said, “So, we just won't see her until after this is over. And we have Lee... Well, I mean, Dongmei. I will give the girl the benefit of the doubt, for now.”
Akira shrugged, as she conceded, “That is not a bad idea.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Rock commented, “Ranma already factored that into our plan. That is why River and the amazons, are with your daughters, out in the field.”
Akira turned to Ranma as she complimented, “Nice plan.”
Ranma looked over at Akira, as she responded, “Thank you. And that is why I could not tell you what was going on earlier.”
Akira replied, “Oh... With River there. Got you. By the way, we had a good time after you left. Even River joined in, again, when she was finished with Revy here.” She thought, 'Even with our training on blocking telepath from reading our thoughts. There is always the chance we might slip. I am sure you realized that Ranma. That is why you make that hasty exit from the gym. So, River would not accidentally read your mind.'
Ranma said, “Glad to hear it.”
Revy overheard this, as she thought, 'At least River did give me a few pointers today. And she was not too rough with me. Which is why I am going to try to go easy on her when we capture Lee. Unless, someone else wants to volunteer to deal with her. Akira is right. She is as dangerous as the maids, and Annie. And we all know it.'
Ranma and Akira turned back to the group, as Ranma inquired, “Speaking of which. Rock and I talked about it. But, even we are not sure. Given River has spent a lot of time with them, do you think River knows that Dongmei is Lee?”
Benny said, “It is likely.”
Janet commented, “That would explain last night. As to why River requested sharing a room with Dongmei.”
Dutch questioned, in a matter of fact matter, “Okay. She knows. But, why would she bring Lee back here?”
Rock answered, “That it is simple. As I told Ranma. This would be the safest place for Lee. We would likely not guess that Dongmei would be Lee. And this works for us. If River uses her reality device, we will immediately track her and Dongmei. And Dutch is in control of the keys to the Lagoon. And if River tries to escape with Dongmei, she blows all the good will she has with us, on us going easier on Lee.”
“As such, there would be no way off the island for them, that will not make things worse for them. And even if Lee remembered on her own, and she tried to run, there would be no way for her to escape the island, by herself. Because she does not have a reality device of her own.”
Dutch commented, “Yes. River gave back the reality device I lent to her, for the amazons. And she has only her reality device. Which we can track with ease. And she knows that we can do that.”
Rock replied, “Good.”
Akira said, “Well, I guess that makes sense.”
Rock replied, “Yes. Though, I will give River credit. If Dongmei is Lee, River still kept her promise to bring Lee back here.”
Janet questioned, “But, why did she not inform us of this revelation?”
Rock pointed out, “Ranma asked the same question. Because she never promised to do that. And she likely has no idea how to handle the situation, in a manner that does not cause Lee to suffer greatly. And she did ask to spent a few days here, with the amazons. That is likely to buy herself time to come up with a plan.”
Dutch commented, “That is true. She did ask for some R&R on the island, for herself, and the amazons. And I gave it to her.”
Janet said, “I got to give her credit. She is sneaky.”
Benny turned to Janet, as she asked, “Which one?”
Janet turned to Benny, as she flatly replied, “All three of them.”
Both women then turned back to face the group.
Natsuru inquired, “There is one question, that is bugging me about all this. I was wondering how Lee ended up being a chinese amazon, in the first place?”
Ranma turned to Natsuru, as she said, “Cologne has an eye for the skilled individuals. And we have to admit that Lee is a skilled individual.”
Natsuru shrugged towards Ranma, as she agreed, “True. And with Lee brainwashed, younger, healthy, and a girl. She would be the perfect moldable follower for Cologne's matriarch society.”
Ranma said, “Exactly. Though, to be far. Barring a few exceptions, the chinese amazons are very nice towards men in general.”
Natsuru commented, “True. They don't even have a problem with gender benders. As long as we obey their rules we are fine.”
Ranma said, “And that is why I don't mind visiting them.” She thought, 'And I am not even going to call Cologne on her little trick. Her plan was too well crafted for me to complain about.'
Akira turned Rock, as she asked, “Along those lines of inquiry, did Fabiola and Roberta say anything else about their hunt? They were kind of tight lipped when they returned. I was wondering if you got anything from them, in private.”
Rock stated, “They were quiet about it. But, Ranma and I got a few answers, in private, from Fabiola. Fabiola stated they did follow Lee signature to the amazon village. And they said they spoke to Cologne, whom told them that Lee left with two others. But, even they could tell that Cologne was being very vague.”
Dutch questioned, “Well, on top of the lie that Lee not leaving that way. There is another matter that I believe everyone is missing. Who is third person, Cologne was referring too? It would not be an amazon. I am sure Lee and Garibaldi, would be very selective concerning who they let know about reality travel. So, this third person had to have come into that village with them.”
Rock said, “That is a good question, Dutch. But, I don't know. Though, when Fabiola and Roberta finally caught up with, whomever had my reality device... Whatever happened caused them not to speak a word to us, about the matter.”
Akira guessed, “Maybe it would cause a temporal paradox situation if they spoke about this third person?”
Dutch agreed, “That would be one of the few reasons that maids would not comment about a matter.”
Rock commented, “That is plausible. And I am sure we will find out, eventually. But still, either way, Cologne lied to them?”
Benny turned to Ranma, as she asked, “Would that old woman be crazy enough to lie to the maids?”
Ranma noticed that everyone turned to look at her. Ranma, herself, turned to Benny, as she answered, “Yes. But, more importantly, Cologne knows she can take them.”
Janet said, “Ranma, if I remember your series, correctly. Cologne does have the skills and abilities to do so. And the series never did show her fighting at her full ability.”
Ranma turned to Janet, as she stated, “And I hope never to find out what she can really do in a fight. She is one of the most skilled fighters I know of. She taught me a lot. And I always had a feeling that what she taught me was but the tip of the iceberg to what she knew.”
“And while we all know I have fought her before. At the time, we both knew she wanted me alive. So, I could married Shampoo. She only wanted to beat me. That is why she held back. And that is why I am still breathing.”
“And I am glad I am old enough, and mature enough, to openly admit that.”
Dutch commented, “That is good to know, if things go south for us. Still, if that is the case, could she have taught Dongmei anything? I don't want to have to deal with any surprises. Such has hidden techniques. Like a tornado that could damage the mansion... Yes. Janet and Benny showed me that series.”
Benny commented, “And Dutch enjoyed the series.”
Ranma casually responded, “I am glad you enjoyed it. And the answer is, no. The way Cologne spoke, she was thinking of maybe someday taking the other two as students for her advanced courses. But, none of them strike me as have any serious surprises.”
Dutch said, “Which means we only have to worry about Lee precognition.”
Revy commented, “Lee precognition has never a major factor, except when it dealt with his use of cards, knife throwing, and dodging attacks. And even then, Lee had to be in the proper frame of mind to use his precognition in those ways. Which is not the case, here.”
“And though precognition can be used as an early warning sense. Even while in Plata Podrido, he knew better than to totally rely on it.”
“Instead, the major factor in Lee's skills was his extensive knowledge of us, and his extended experience in the time loop, on learning how to manipulate us.”
“I am guessing, from the way Dongmei acts, she does not have access to that information, right now. Because, Lee, in his... Or, her right mind, would never physically attack me, nor verbal insult me.”
“Plus, as Rock pointed out, we are on an island. She doesn't have a reality device on her. And we have the only keys to the Lagoon. She cannot escape. The only wildcards in the situation is River and the other two amazons. And if we act fast enough, we can take River, and those amazons, out of the equation before any of them realize it.”
Rock complimented, “That is an astute observation, Revy.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she smile. She responded, “Thank you, Rock. Though, when we do capture her, I want to do it outside. I don't want to damage our home. So, our best bet, is capturing all four of them. Right now. While they are distracted, on the field outside.”
Rock replied, “I agree.”
Akira warned, “Do not harm our children.”
Revy looked over at Akira, as she shrugged, while she cracked a smile. She casually said, “I won't dream of it, lover-girl.”
Akira did not laugh at Revy's joke. Though, she did not frown, either.
Benny said, “I don't want to really bring up the subject. But, someone has too. What about our kids? I mean all of ours. Though, they try to hide it. They clearly support Lee on this matter.”
Rock commented, “Yes. It is kind of obvious. If you look for the signs.”
Dutch stated, “I hate to admit, but they owe, Lee. A lot.”
Akira agreed, “Yes. They do.”
Revy suggested, “Considering they know how we feel on the subject. That is why they have no brought the matter up with us. We will just tell them we are okay with it. Though, we will keep them out of the loop, for the most part.”
Rock agreed, “Good idea.”
Rock looked around to see the others nodding in agreement.
Janet pointed out, “Okay. Now, the remaining question is, who feels like capturing an amazon, while fighting off two other to amazons, and River?”
Ranma volunteered, “I will. I brought them here. They are my responsibility. Still, they are unarmed, so it should not be that hard to capture them by surprise. I will use a trick I know to knock out Dongmei before she realizes it. Also, I have training that prevents River from reading my mind, and so does my family. We just don't use it often, because we know that even River can overlook something.”
Janet complimented, “Smart thinking.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Revy stated, “I will go, as well.”
Ranma turned to Revy, as she said, in a serious tone of voice, “It cannot be to the death, Revy. Nor, can we cripple them. Or, we will be making Cologne our enemy. You do not want that. Because among other things. I have no doubt, if given reason to, she has the means to reach us, from across the multiverse.”
Revy shrugged, as she casually replied, “Okay. We will go easy on them.”
Ranma said, “Also, just keep your head clear, and try not think about anything. River will not pick up your thoughts, if you don't have any.”
As Ranma made her comment, several other members of the group resisted the urge to crack a joke at Revy's expense.
Revy commented, “I remember Annie's teachings.”
Ranma replied, “Good. That should help.”
Dutch said, “Now, the only question is when are going to pull the trigger on this? Are we going to do it, now? Or, in a little while?... Either way, we need to do it soon, before they get finished sparring in the field.”
Rock commented, “I think we should do this, now. Because the longer we wait, the larger the chance something might go wrong.”
Ranma replied, “Agreed.”
Revy said, “Hey. If I get to kick ass, now. Or, kick ass, later. I still get to kick some ass. So, I am happy either way.”
The others nodded in agreement.
Rock said, “Okay. You guys head out, and deal with them. Meanwhile, we find some rope, and a reality device, to take Rose and Violet home.”
Revy smiled, as she stated, “Fine with me. Though, I don't want to use the good leather, downstairs.”
Rock replied, “Neither do I.”
Ranma replied, “Sounds fine to me.”
Revy stated, “Okay then. Let's go.”
Revy walked towards the interior of the mansion, towards the front doors, with Ranma walking right behind her.
As they walked, Revy used her right hand to pulled out her pistol, from the holster under her left arm pit. She used her left hand to pull back the slide of the weapon, to chambered a round in the breech of her pistol. She placed the weapon back into her holster. Next, she did the same thing to the pistol under her right armpit.
A few seconds later, the rest of the group watched the two redheads casually leave through the exit, to the hallway, that would lead them to the front doors of the mansion.
As the rest of the adults looked back at each other, Janet suggested, “Want to go watch them take down River and Lee? Then, we will find the rope.”
Dutch replied, “Sure. I have nothing better to do.”
Benny said, “I'm game.”
Akira responded, “Works for me.”
Natsuru sighed, “I have nothing better to do.”
Rock said, “Revy always did appreciate having an audience... When she doesn't lose.”
Dutch suggested, “We will watch from the front entrance. If she loses. We will be back inside before she notices us.”
Rock looked over at Dutch, as she cracked a grin. She complimented, “Good idea.”
The rest of the adults them calmly walked towards the inside exit of the gym, and to the front doors of the mansion, as well.
(_)
A few minutes later, on the open field between the mansion and the bay, near the middle of the two locations, River, Dongmei, Yurika, Nodoka were standing, near each other, as they watched Rose and Mikoto spar, nearby.
To the left sides of the women was the bay, and to their right sides was the mansion.
While Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto knew some chinese, River and Dongmei translated between the three sisters, and Rose and Violet.
River was watching the latest sparring match, which was between Rose, and the fire wielding Mikoto.
River, Dongmei, Violet, Yurika, and Nodoka, watched as Rose dodged a swipe of fire by Mikoto, before charging back towards the woman with blue hair, with black highlights.
Even though it was clear that Mikoto was more skilled than Rose, and she had fire elemental abilities, Rose was giving a good showing in the sparring match.
River watched the contest continue, as she thought, 'I got to admit this was a brilliant idea by Ranma. Rose, Violet, and Lee, might not get another chance to spar with elemental user. Especially, with ones as nice as these three sisters. And these three are very careful with their abilities. At worst, Rose will have some minor singe marks, which won't even scar.'
'Also, the sparring contest between Violet and Nodoka was fun. And afterward, Nodoka was nice enough to use her water powers to remove the wetness from Violet's body and clothing. And the match between Lee and Yurika was energetic, as it was electrical. I am surprised that Lee's long black hair was not frizzed by the match. But, I believe Yurika had a hand in preventing that.'
'Though, the other two sisters won their matches. And it looks like Mikoto is going to win her match with Rose. From the thoughts I am reading, it seems everyone is having a good time.'
'Still, I wonder why Ranma told her daughters to suggest this to me. Instead of her doing so, personally... Not that I care... Also, I need to remind myself to call Lee, Dongmei. At least, until I restore her memory. That type of verbal slip could mess up everything I am working towards.'
River then sensed two people approaching them, from the mansion.
River turned her head to see Ranma and Revy walking towards them.
River thought, 'Hmm... I wonder if they want to join us.'
Then, when the two women reached the four member group, which was not fighting, the two women remained quiet.
Dongmei, Violet, Mikoto, and Nodoka looked over at them for a second. Then, they turned back to look at the match going on.
Meanwhile, the two combatants did not pay the newcomers any attention, because they were so wrapped up in their practice fight.
On the other hand, River watched Ranma and Revy, as they walked up behind the group.
River thought, with concern, 'What is going on? And why can I not read their thoughts?'
Ranma soon walked right behind Dongmei. She then turned to face the back of the black haired girl.
Meanwhile, Revy was about ten feet behind Ranma, in the opposite direction from where Rose and Mikoto were sparring.
Then, without warning Ranma quickly used her right fingers to jab Dongmei on a place, on the back of Dongmei's neck, at a pressure point.
River then watched, with surprise, as Dongmei immediately fell unconscious, as Ranma caught her. Ranma then quickly, though gently set Dongmei to the ground, on her back.
The spectators could not believe what they just saw, as they turned to look at the now unconscious Dongmei, laying on the group, with Ranma crouching behind her.
River thought, in surprise, 'What the hell?!'
But, before River could reaction, she saw Ranma look up at her, and spring towards her.
In response, River quickly jump back, and away from both the group, and the nearby combatants.
Ranma reached River, just as River landed on her feet.
As the redheaded women traded blows, strikes, blocks, and dodges, River thought, 'They must have found out that Dongmei is Lee. But, how did I not sense their thoughts?... Oh... Lee wrote it so Ranma and her family had been trained to block their thoughts from my telepathic abilities. And Revy sometimes just doesn't think at all...'
'Along with that, this whole sparring session was to get me away from them, so they could plan their next move, without me realizing what was going on, until it was too late.'
'No wonder Ranma had her daughters suggest we do this. Instead of herself. It was all so Ranma would not risk having me read her mind, until they were ready. This is a pretty good plan. It was very devious, and cunning, on their part. And Ranma, and the others, thought of it, on the spot. I'm impressed.'
'Still, if I am going to save Lee, I have to handle Ranma. And find a way to take down Revy, while she has two guns, and I am unarmed....'
Then, as they fought, another thought occurred to River, as she mentally reflected, 'Or, it might be better to just surrender...'
'I think I will see how this battle goes, before I make my decision on what to do next...'
And the two redheads continued their fight.
(_)
Meanwhile Yurika, Violet, and Nodoka turned to looked at Revy, as Yurika demanded, “Hey! What are you doing, Revy?!'
The green haired girl's outburst caused Rose and Mikoto to stop sparring, as the two combatants turned to look at what was going on.
Revy noticed this, as she swiftly pulled out her two semi-automatic pistols.
Revy aimed one pistol towards Violet, and she aimed the other pistol at Rose.
Revy stated, “Don't worry. Everything will become clear in a few minutes.”
While Rose and Violet did not fully understand what Revy had said. They, and the three sisters, did understated how dangerous a gun was, and how skilled Revy was with it. So, neither amazon, nor the three sisters tried anything on Revy.
(_)
Nearby, Ranma and River continued trading strikes and punches, with River on the losing end of the battle, and River realized this.
River bitterly thought, 'I already knew Ranma was better than me. And I can tell she is still holding back. And it is obvious, that all this is about, is she thinks I might try to take Lee away from them.... Which, I might try, if I could get away with it... But, I know better...'
'And this misunderstanding is easily fixed.'
River jumped back a few feet from Ranma.
As River landed, she held out her hands, in front of her, while she quickly stated, in japanese, “Hold it, Ranma. I don't want to fight. I already know Dongmei is Lee.”
Ranma stopped in her tracks, as she accused, in japanese, “So, you know who she was?”
River admitted, “Yes. I have not intention of trying to take Lee from here. Keep in mind, I brought her back here, after I found out who she was.” She thought, 'To hide her. But, this is nice plan B. And it is a good enough excuse to believe. Still, I guess my plan A was not as audacious enough as I thought it was.'
Ranma said, “Fair enough.”
Both redheads turned to those nearby, as River suggested, “We need to quickly defuse this situation.”
Ranma said, “I agree. Though, let me handle this.”
River responded, “Go ahead. I trust you to handle matters.”
Ranma replied, “Thanks.”
Both of them then rushed back over to the rest of the group.
(_)
A few seconds later, they two redheads reached the group.
As the two redheads came to a stop, near the group, everyone saw them from the corners of their eyes.
Though, the group did not take their eyes off of Revy's guns, and Revy did not take her eyes off of the group.
Ranma turned to Revy, as she ordered, in english, “Stand down, Revy. Everything is taken care of. We can resolve this peacefully. So, please put away you guns.”
Revy then visibly relaxed, as she holstered her weapons. She turned to Ranma, as she said, “Ranma, if you got things handled. That is fine with me.”
Meanwhile, everyone else let out a sigh of relief, at seeing the armed redhead stop pointed her weapons at them, with her putting her weapons away.
Rose turned to River, and Ranma, as she demanded, in chinese, “River, what is going on?!”
River then turned to Rose, as she stated, in chinese, “Rose, Violet. Everything will be explained in a minute. Please, trust me. And just stay calm.”
Rose replied, in chinese, “Okay.”
Violet turned to River, as she said, chinese, “Fine.” She turned to look at Revy, then back at River, as she continued, “But, it better be a good explanation.”
River replied, in chinese, “It is.”
Ranma then looked around the group, first at Revy, her daughters, the amazons, and River. She then turned back to her daughters, as she calmly said, in english, “Okay. Girls, we think, Dongmei is Lee.”
Nodoka replied, “Huh. Mom, what makes you think that?”
River translated for Rose and Violet.
Rose and Violet said, in unison, in chinese, “What?!”
River translated. She then stated, in chinese, “Ranma is right. Dongmei is Lee.”
Violet inquired, in chinese, “Why did you keep this a secret from us?”
River admitted, with concern and worry evident in her tone of voice, in chinese, “Because I did not know what to do next. So, I brought you all here, on the gamble that no one would know Lee and Dongmei were the same person, until I had a plan, on how to peacefully solve this matter. Unfortunately, I ran out of time, much sooner than I expected.”
Rose said, in chinese, “That happens. But, it is clear you intentions were good. And that is what matters.”
Violet replied, in chinese, “I agree.”
River said, in chinese, “Thank you.”
Ranma translated what was said, between River, Rose, and Violet, for the rest of those present. Ranma then turned back to her daughters, as she stated, in english, “I know it is hard to swallow, but we have evidence that Dongmei is Lee. Such as, take a good look at Dongmei's face. You can see the resemblance, if you look closely enough.”
Everyone looked down at Dongmei, whom her back, with her long hair unfurled, around her.
A few seconds later, Yurika said, “Oh my. She is Lee.”
Nodoka agreed, “It looks like that is the case.”
Mikoto commented, “And I was so hoping that Lee would escape. Still, as a woman, Lee is a very kind lady.”
Nodoka pointed out, “Lee was a sweet man. It is no surprise that Lee would make a sweet woman. But, why is Lee a girl in the first place?”
Everyone turned back to Ranma.
Ranma noticed the others looking at her, as she said, “We only have theories at this point. But, Lee likely used the spring of drown girl, to gain a healthy body, and cure her cancer. She then somehow locked herself in her new female form. Though, we won't know for sure, until we unseal her memories.”
Meanwhile, River had been paying attention to what Ranma said, and she translated what had been said into chinese.
Rose and Violet looked at each other. Rose said, in chinese, “Well, we never met Lee. And we had no reason too. Still, it looks like this hunt is over.”
Violet asked, with concern in her tone of voice, in chinese, “But, did Elder Cologne know that Dongmei was Lee?”
Ranma turned to the amazons, as she said, in chinese, “From what Cologne said, I think she knew that Dongmei was Lee, beforehand.”
The two amazons looked at Ranma, as Rose stated, in a flat tone of voice, in chinese, “That would not be surprising, coming from our elder.”
Ranma snorted, as she agreed, in chinese, “Ain't that the truth.”
River then translated what was said, into english.
Revy and the elemental sisters, had been silently listening to all of this.
Revy thought, 'At least, they are being civil about this. I believe Ranma, when she said that we do not want Cologne as an enemy.'
Rose stated, in chinese, “Still, even if Dongmei is Lee. You are not allowed to take her. She is our friend. Our sister.”
River, nor Ranma, translated what Rose said, for fear it would provoke a response from Revy.
Ranma and River turned to the amazons, as Ranma said, in a sad, sober tone of voice, in chinese, “I am sorry, Rose, Violet. But, Dongmei has to stay here to answer for her crimes against us.”
Violet demanded, in chinese, “What are her crimes? All through out this. As we hunted for you. Including, Dongmei. We never heard what the supposed Lee did to upset all of you. Now, you claim our friend is this Lee. And that she has to now suffer for actions, she clearly doesn't even know about it. What did Lee do?!”
Ranma thought, 'Now, how do I explain this to them, without spilling the beans?'
River heard Ranma's thoughts, and she answered for Ranma, in chinese, “Lee played with their lives. And now they want payback.”
Ranma thought, 'Good old River, to the rescue.'
River teased, in english, “I am not that old.”
Ranma held back a giggle, because it would ruin the mood.
Ranma turned to River, as she thought, 'Okay, River. I retract my previous thought.”
River replied, in english, “Thank you.”
Revy and the three elemental sisters, continued to silently watch the conversation, between the River, Ranma, and the teenage amazon women.
Revy, thought, 'I don't know what is being said. But, I get the feeling that Ranma is doing her job. So, I will find out from Ranma, later, what was said... Also, I think I will have Ranma's daughters take care of carrying Lee inside. That should not be a problem. As long as I get Ranma to ask them, to do so, nicely.'
Nearby, the three sisters share similar sentiments, as Revy, on letting Ranma handle the matter peacefully.
Ranma and River turned back to the two amazon women.
Ranma said, in a sympathetic tone of voice, in chinese, “Look. I understand your situation. But, we cannot let you have her. At the very least, we need to return her memories.”
Rose inquired, “So, you think she has been brainwashed?”
River said, in chinese, “I suspect so. And we know how to fix her memories. Ranma has a some magic lamp that will do it. The smoke form the lamp will instantly make a person recall non-painful memories. And I have used it myself. The process is completely painless.”
Violet commented, in chinese, “That is nice to hear. But, if you use it, will she be the same Dongmei? I mean Lee was a man. And Dongmei is a woman.”
River turned to Violet, as she answered, in chinese, “No. She will not be the same. But, by the same token, her basic personality is the same in both identities. So, she will still be your friend.”
Rose said, in chinese, “That is good to hear. And if Dongmei turns out to be Lee. Let her know that, no matter what. She is still our friend. Our sister. And she is always welcome in our village, and our homes.”
Violet responded, in chinese, “We will consider her family, no matter if she was once a man, or not.”
River said, in chinese, “I promise to give Dongmei, or Lee. Or, whatever she decides to go by, after this. Your message. And I am sure she will be glad to hear you still support her, no matter what.”
Rose commented, in chinese, “Thank you. And that is what friends do.”
Violet turned to Rose. She then looked at River, as she agreed, in chinese, “Yes. It is.”
River happily replied, in chinese, “That is correct.”
Ranma stated, in chinese, “Also, I promise that Dongmei will not be harmed, until we confirm she is Lee. If the my lamp does not work, then it means we were wrong. And we will return her to your village, unharmed.”
Rose inquired, with a hint of a threat in her tone of voice, in chinese, “And if she is, Lee?”
Ranma said, in a dispassionate tone of voice, in chinese, “Then, the others will have their revenge. But, I promise that Dongmei will survive it. And she will recover.”
Rose looked Ranma in her eyes, as she stated, in a strong, even tone of voice, in chinese, “I will hold you to your promises.”
Ranma kindly said, in chinese, “And I would expect nothing less from you. Now, we need to take you both home. We are going to invite others here, that want Lee's hide. And I don't want to risk harm to either of you. And for those in your reality, it should be only an hour or two, since you left.”
Rose commented, in chinese, “Fine. I can see the logic in what you are saying.”
Violet replied, in chinese, “So do I.”
Rose pointed out, in chinese, “Still, we need to get our weapons, clothing, and belongings, before we returned to our village. Though, we will leave Dongmei clothing, weapons, and items, here.”
River looked over at Ranma, as she said, in english, “Don't worry. In a little while, I will go get her weapons out of our bedroom.”
Ranma turned to River, as she replied, in english, “Thank you.”
Both redheads turned back to the amazons, as River said, in chinese, “I am glad you feel this way. Ranma is right. It is likely that the others will be sending for people, to come here. And it will not be safe for you.”
Rose firmly stated, in chinese, “We only do this, because we see that we have no other way to deal with the situation.” Her voice took on a more serious tone, as she continued, “But, be warned. We will give you one month, for you to contact us, about Dongmei. If we have not heard from you, or Dongmei, since then. We will find a way to reach you. And you will not like our response.”
Ranma said, in chinese, “I fully believe you. And do not worry. You will have your answer within that time frame.” She mentally added, 'And with time dilation, and time travel, between realities, we will have plenty of time to response to you.'
River then looked down at Lee, as she thought, 'It looks like I am going to have to go with the plan B. That Chang and I already worked out. I think after we get Lee inside. And Ranma leaves with Rose and Violet. I will excuse myself to a nearby restroom.'
'After I enter the restroom, I will lock the door. Next, I will use my reality device to go to the casino, and talk to Chang about, our plan B. When I am finished there. I will return to the island, in the same restroom, only a few minutes later. And none of them will be the wise.'
Ranma turned to her daughters and Revy, as she stated, in english, “Alright. Let's get Lee inside, and tied up. And get these two on their way back home.”
(_)
In the distance, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Rock, Akira, and Natsuru, all watched what had unfolded, right outside the front doors of the mansion.
Benny said, “That went better than I expected.”
Dutch replied, “Yea. It did.”
Rock commented, “Well. No one was serious hurt. So, let's go back inside, and find some rope, before they get here.”
Akira agreed, “Good idea.”
The six women then went back inside, as they looked for some rope to tie Dongmei up with.
(_)
Later that evening, after dark, Dongmei felt a pain in her stomach, which quickly awoke her.
As her eyes snapped open, she looked up to see Revy standing over her, as Revy held a wireless microphone in her right hand.
Revy noticed that Dongmei was awake. She gave Dongmei a smirk, as she stated, “Good. You're awake. It is showtime.” She then walked away from Dongmei's sight.
The next sensation that Dongmei felt was the rope binding her wrists, behind her back, as she laid on her right side, on a hard wooden surface.
Dongmei thought, 'What is going on? How did I get here? And why is my precognition screaming danger?'
Dongmei then sat up, as she looked around.
Dongmei found herself in the center of the small, wooden red podium, in the backyard of the Lagoon mansion.
She saw that it was nighttime outside, and that, in front of her, the can lights on the eaves of the Lagoon mansion were turned on. With the lights brightly illuminating the area.
And between the podium and the back of the mansion, several people were looking back at her.
Most of them were women, with a few men mixed in. Also, she recognizes several members of the family that lived on the island, along with Ranma's family.
And most of them did not look happy with her. Including, Dutch, Benny, and Janet.
Though, Natsuru, Akira, the three elemental sisters, and the five teenager sisters on the island, had looks of pity on their faces.
Dongmei thought, with worry, 'So, that is what my precognition is warning me about. I don't know why. But, something tells me, I'm screwed.'
Dongmei then looked to her sides. And to her left, she saw three women that she recognized, standing at the end of the podium. The nearest woman was Revy, with the microphone in her hand. Next, was Ranma, whom had a small lamp in her hands, with smoke coming out of it. And finally, there was River.
Revy was still grinning. Ranma's face was unreadable. And River looked sad.
Dongmei thought, 'I need to figure out what is going on.' She looked over at River, whom was looking back at her She demanded, in chinese, “What is going on, River?”
River said, in a sad tone of voice, in english, “For your sake, you need to speak english, Dongmei. And I am so sorry. This is not how I wanted to tell you. And if you fight those here, you will only makes things worse for yourself.”
Revy looked over at River, as she verbally jabbed, “How quaint?”
River turned to Revy, as she snapped, “I bought her back. What are you complaining about?”
Revy just shrugged, in response.
River and Revy then turned back to look at Dongmei.
Meanwhile, Dongmei looked around, again, and she realized there were two very important people, to her, that she did not see. She turned to River, as she strongly inquired, in english, “Where are Rose and Violet?”
River continued to look at Dongmei, as she answered, “They are fine. Ranma took them back home.”
Dongmei responded, “I don't understand?”
Ranma had been listening to the conversation. She turned to Dongmei, as she spoke up, “It will all become clear in a minute. And your two friends agreed with me, that they should not be here for this. Because we don't want to risk their safety over this mess.”
Revy turned to Ranma and River, as she stated, “Let's get this party started.” She then walked back to the center of the podium.
Revy walked passed the front of Dongmei, to stand beside Dongmei, with Dongmei to her left side, as she faced the crowd. She stated, into the microphone, which were connected to nearby speakers, on the sides of the podium, “Welcome everyone. Your revenge is at hand. For we have finally found Lee. And it turns out that Lee is now this brainwashed woman, sitting before you, right here.”
Dongmei look up at Revy, as she flatly replied, with confusion evident in her tone of voice, “What?... I am not Lee?...”
Revy placed her left hand over the receiver of her microphone, while she look down at Lee. She said, “That's the fun of brainwashing. You don't now who you are, until you are told who you are.” She turned to Ranma, as she ordered, “Get over here.”
Ranma just nodded at she walked over to Revy and Dongmei, with her lamp in her hands. While River stated behind.
When Ranma reached Revy and Dongmei, she came to a stop on Dongmei's left side. She knelt down by Dongmei.
Revy turned to Dongmei, as she stated, “Now, just breath in the smoke.”
Ranma held the lamp by Dongmei's face, with smoke coming out of the nozzle of it. And Dongmei could do nothing to stop from breathing the smoke into her body.
Ranma then stood up and walked back away, over to River, as she capped the end of the lamp, with her hand, to put out the fire in her lamp. Ranma and River then watched for the magic smoke to take effect.
A few seconds later, the magical smoke started to take effect on Dongmei, allowing her remember everything that had been sealed in her mind. She quietly commented, “Oh hell.”
Revy's smirk turned an absolutely feral, as she overheard Dongmei say those words. Revy thought, with excitement, 'It worked! She is Lee.'
A few seconds, later, Dongmei stood up beside Revy, while still having her hands bound.
Revy removed her left hand off the head of her microphone, as she held the device by Dongmei's mouth.
Dongmei looked out among the crowd, as she confessed, in a sincere tone of voice, into the microphone “I am Lee. And I deserve this. You deserve your vengeance on me... I am sorry. And I am ready for this...”
Someone among the group screamed, “Kill her!”
And others were starting to make similar to sentiments, which ranged from torture to murder, to both.
From the crowd, Akira thought, 'They are about to lynch her. I need to do something... That might work.' She yelled, “Wait!” Everyone turned to look at her, as she loudly continued, “We should have revenge! But, let's do it in a way that those of us who want it can get a piece her, without killing her! And thus leaving something for the rest of us!”
Several people in the crowd nodded in agreement.
From the podium, River did not show any outward reaction to what Akira said. But, after Akira spoke, Revy thought, 'Intelligent thinking, Akira. You bought us the time we need.'
Among the crowd, Rock stood near Akira. As she looked at the blond woman, Rock thought, 'Oh... Nice move Akira. We want revenge, but not like this. Now, let me handle this situation.'
Rock turned to the rest of the crowd, as she stated, “We will decide what to do with Lee, later. We now have Lee, and that is the important part. And when it comes to revenge, we plan to include all here, whom wish to participate.”
Rock then looked over at Revy, whom was looking back her. Rock continued, “But, for now, Lee will stay in our mansion, until we come up with a workable form of payback that everyone can participate in.”
On the podium, Revy flatly said into her microphone, “You heard the lady. This meeting is over. Head back home. We will contact you when we are ready for you. And not to worry. Lee's ass will not be touched until we all agree on what to do with her.”
Revy then placed her left hand on the top of her wireless microphone, with her left hand, as she turned to her left, to look at River and Ranma.
Revy saw River and Ranma looking back at her. Revy ordered, “Take Lee to the kitchen. We will decide what to do with her, there. But, keep her hands tied up. I don't want her trying anything stupid.”
Revy then walked to the front of the podium, and walked down the front steps of the elevated rise, to the ground. She then made her
Meanwhile, River and Ranma did not reply, as they walked over to Lee.
Ranma held her lamp in her right hand, as she and River approached Lee.
As the River and Ranma came to a stop five feet from Lee, Lee turned to face them. Though, Lee remained silent.
Ranma was the first to speak, as she asked, “So... Are you back with us, Lee?”
Lee shrugged, as she casually answered, “Yes. It feels like I just woke up from a twenty-four year long dream. And a good dream at that.”
River commented, “There is more truth to that than you realize.”
Lee said, “You know. I never realized that being brainwashed could be such a positive and wonderful experience.”
River and Ranma giggled, in response, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Ranma commented, “Yea. Cologne can do a nice mind screw, with lather and rinse.”
Lee giggled herself, for a few seconds. She then responded. “Ain't that the truth.”
Ranma complimented, “Oh, the stories I could tell you. But, you likely already know most of them. Or, you wrote them. Though, on the matter at hand, you make a nice woman, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.” She then looked around the crowd, and back to the two women, as she pointed out, “I know better than to try anything, right now. And I know you are suppose to escort me to the kitchen of the mansion. But, do you think it is wise to walk me through that crowd? Because, I don't. They quite literally want my hide.”
Ranma said, “We are not going through the crowd. We will walk around from the left side of the crowd. And they all know better than to mess with River and I.”
River stated, “Ranma is right. And I will know if they try something, before they to it.... Trust me.”
Lee looked over at River, as she gave River a weak smile.
River returned Lee smile, with a warm a smile of her own.
Lee quietly replied, “Alight.”
Ranma and River then escorted Lee off the left side of the podium.
With her hands bound behind her, Ranma and River helped walk Lee down the steps on the left side of the podium. With Ranma to Lee's right side, using her left free hand, and River using both her hands, on Lee's left side.
As Lee walked down the steps, she thought, 'I see there are steps down the middle of each side of the podium. I didn't include that point. But, it does make sense. Now, to hope I make it to the kitchen in one piece. Then, I will figure out what to do next... Damn... Only a few minutes ago, did I get my memory back, and I am back to scheming like before I was brainwash...'
'At least, I am reviewing my memory, and feeling out my personality. The Dongmei and Lee's personalities and memories seem to have merged seamlessly, and quickly. I think I am pretty much one personality, and not two personalities, due to have two childhoods...'
'I should count myself lucky on that, and make do with my situation, until I have more time to think about the predicament I am in...'
Beside her, River cracked a smile, as she and Ranma finished helping Lee down the steps.
Ranma and River then walked to Lee's left and right, while they continued forward. River on her right side, and Ranma on her left side.
As they walked around the left edge of the crowd, Lee noticed some of those in the crowd, looking at her, had they pulled out their reality devices, and disappeared to wherever they had come from, through the multiverse.
While they continued forward, Lee turned slightly to to her right, as she looked at River beside her. She thought, 'So, how screwed am I?”
River continued looking at the crowd to their right, as she said, “Just keep quiet, and I will do what I will can.”
Ranma looked in front of her, as she mentioned, “So, will I, and my family.”
Lee turned back to look in front of her, as she replied, “Thanks. I appreciate the help.”
River said, “Anytime.”
Ranma replied, “No problem.”
The three women then continued towards the back door to the kitchen, as those invited to the island for gathering, disappeared, as they went inside the Lagoon home.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 03: “A Measure of Revenge.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Black Lagoon Reality. Location, Lagoon Island. Date, the evening that Lee was capture, just after dark. Place, the kitchen, on the first floor, in the back of the Lagoon mansion.
It had been a few minutes since Ranma and River had escorted Lee into the kitchen of the Lagoon mansion.
Lee wrists were still tied behind her back, with rope.
During this time, River had pulled out a stool, from under a counter, at the island in the middle of the food preparation area of the kitchen, across the room from the kitchen table. She had requested that Lee sit down in. Which Lee did as she was instructed to do.
Over the course of those few minutes, the rest of the Lagoon family, barring Benny, had come into the kitchen. With Benny be the one assigned to make sure all the guests that needed to leave, had left.
Those inside the room, included, Dutch, Janet, Revy, Rock, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Yukio, and Rebecca.
Also, Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto were there as well.
Fortunately, the kitchen was a large room, and big enough to accommodate everyone.
With the group standing between the island by the food preparation area of the kitchen, and the informal dining area of the kitchen. And Lee sat on the stool, with her back facing a foot from the counter part of the island, while she faced the informal dining area.
All of these adults stood facing Lee, with the lone exception was River, whom stood beside Lee, to Lee's right side, as both she and Lee faced the others.
Everyone got comfortable, with a few of the adults moving to the kitchen table to sat down in some chairs, as they looked across the room towards Lee.
Just then, those present saw Benny walked into the room, from the double doors to the outside, with her closing the door behind her. The short, blond haired woman then turned around and walked to the group. As she came to a stop, she looked around the group, as she said, “That is the last one of them. They have all left.”
Revy had placed her microphone on a kitchen table beside her, while she stood up. She turned to face Benny, as she stated, “Good. Now, we can get down to business.” She then look at Lee, as her lips curled into a feral grin.
Rock turned to Revy, as she stated, “Hold it Revy. First, I don't want the kids to be a part of this conversation.”
All eight teenager adults present turned to Rock, as Molly demanded, “Why not?”
Rock turned to Molly, as she explained, “First, because we know you are siding with Lee.”
Some of the teenagers tensed up, at being caught.
Revy noticed this, as she spoke up, in a casual tone of voice, “It was kind of obvious. But, relax girls, we discussed it earlier, and we are okay with it. We realize that Lee did a lot of good for you.”
Everyone noticed that the teenagers present began to relax.
Lee quietly said, “You're welcome.”
Revy turned to Lee, as she responded, “Oh, this won't cut you any slack, from us, Lee. But, we will acknowledge it.”
Rock stated, “Second, we are going to be talking about details on revenge that a parent should not have to say in front of their children.”
Yukio questioned, “If we said we were big girls now, would that make a difference?”
Dutch turned to Yukio, as she flatly said, “No.”
Rebecca complained, “That is not fair”
Yurika stated, “I agree.”
Sarah calmly said, “Someone should speak for Lee.”
Ranma commented, “Girls. It's okay. Lee has more advocates for her, than just River. Such, as myself.”
Revy turned to Ranma, as she questioned, “Really? After everything she did to you, Akira, and Natsuru?”
Ranma commented, “Yes. Let us look at what Lee did for me. From dealing with both a very crazy family, and very possessive women. I became rich and famous, in a number of avenues. I have good, loyal, trusting friends. I gain two great lovers. And three caring, well adjusted children. And some wonderful adventures.”
Natsuru and Akira giggled Ranma's comment. Meanwhile Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto warmly smiled at Ranma.
Revy rolled her eyes for a few seconds, before looking back at Ranma, and then to Lee.
Ranma continued, “Personally, I would prefer that Lee be let go. But, since that is not going to happen, we will just negotiate on her behalf.”
Nodoka turned to Ranma, as she said, “Okay. We will leave you to this, mom.”
Sarah commented, “I am fine, as long as there is more than one person present to speak for Lee.”
Kristina said, “I agree. This is for the best.”
Benny looked around, at the teenage women, as she stated, “Don't worry. We will let you know what is going on, after we finish our conversation.”
Molly said, “Okay.” She turned to her sisters, and her friends, as she stated, “Girls. Let's go watch a movie.”
Mikoto said, “I am in the mood for a comedy.”
Sarah stated, “So am I.”
Molly said, “Works for me.”
The eight teenage girls then filed out of the kitchen, and towards the electronics entertainment room, on the first floor, near the front of the mansion, to the right of the front doors.
After the teenagers left, Janet stretched her arms, as she said, “For what we are about to talk about, it is much better to have them gone.” She then dropped her arms back to her sides.
Benny agreed, “You are right about that, honey.”
Revy looked over at Lee, as she stated, “Now, to deal with the matter at hand.”
Everyone turned their attention to Lee.
As Lee look at the group in front of her, she sheepishly said, “If I stated that ending up an amazon woman was part of my plan of escape, would you believe me?”
Rock stated, “No.”
Dutch commented, “Not likely.”
Benny said, “That is doubtful, to say the least.”
Lee looked up at River, as she asked, “River?”
River looked at Lee, as she stated, “Sorry, Lee. That is one bluff to far.”
Lee replied, in a deflated tone of voice, “Okay.”
Lee and River then turned back to the rest of the group in front of them.
Janet asked, “So Lee, how did you end up a female chinese amazon?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell them most of what happened.' She answered, “I got cursed, to cure my cancer. I locked myself in this form. Garibaldi and I went to the amazons village, where Garibaldi betrayed me. I admit, the main flaw of my plan was that the girl curse. I had a theory on that, and it was confirmed. That for older adults, makes the victims turn into a six year old girls. Though, given it was being a little girl, or the cancer killing me, I just choose to be a child, again.”
Revy joked, “And I bet you were cute as a button.”
Lee looked over at Revy, as she casually responded, “Actually, yes. I was.”
Revy laughed for a few seconds, at Lee's response.
Benny stated, “Given the time frame between your arrival, and when Ranma came looking for help, in China. That explains why you are not older... At least for the most part... You seem to still be a few years younger than you should be.”
Lee looked over at Benny. She sidestepped Benny's question, as she replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'And that ring had seem to have given me longevity, as well. Not that I am going to mention my ring, or my longevity. I am not going to risk you trying to remove my ring, as a form of revenge.'
River placed her left hand on Lee right shoulder.
This caused Lee to look at River.
River look at Lee, as she kept her left hand on Lee's right shoulder. River firmly said, “I won't let that happened.”
Lee smiled, as she thought, 'Thank you, River.'
River responded, by returning Lee's smile.
Though, their actions and River's verbal comments did not go unnoticed by the group in front of them.
Rock asked, “What is not going to happen, River?”
Lee and River dropped their smiles, as they turned to Rock, while River also removed her left hand off of Lee
River stated, “Lee is concerned that part of your revenge against her, might be trying to remove the curse, and kill her by having her cancer do her in.”
Rock firmly stated, “I have no plans to do so.”
Dutch commented, “None of us do.”
Benny commented, “I won't wish that death on my worst enemy. Which you currently are, Lee.”
Janet said, “Neither would I.”
Akira firm stated, “We would have words if someone did that to one of our friends, Lee. Including, you.”
Natsuru commented, “And it would not be pleasant for them.”
Ranma used her left hand to cup her right fist, across her chest, as she looked at Lee. She stated, “And they would regret their action. Painfully.”
Lee looked over at Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, as she replied, “Thanks, guys.”
Akira replied, “You're welcome.”
Natsuru said, “No problem.”
Ranma commented, “More than happy to.”
Though, everyone realized that Revy had not replied to River's comment.
As they turned to look at Revy, Revy noticed this attention. She looked around then group, then at Lee. She stated, “If I kill you, Lee. You are going to see if coming, and it will be with one of my cutlasses.”
Lee continued to look at Revy, as she replied, “Okay.”
Natsuru inquired, “So, Garibaldi betrayed you?”
Lee turned to Natsuru, as she answered, “Yes. Garibaldi is not as heroic as you would guess. And I was already a little girl, when I got captured, Cologne used that magic shampoo on me, to seal my memories. Then, I became a little girl with no memory of her past, whom had silky smooth hair.”
Lee thought, 'I will leave out that Garibaldi got cursed to turn into a little girl. With hot water reversing it for Garibaldi. And who was with us.'
River held back a giggle, as she thought of one of the most powerful men in the Babylon Five reality, becoming a little girl, with cold water.
Janet said, “Given what you did to us. That sounds like poetic justice.”
Lee looked over at Janet, as she replied, “I agree.”
Janet found that she felt indifferent about Lee agreeing that Lee deserved what happened to her.
Dutch questioned, “We heard there was another person involved, besides Garibaldi? Care to tell us who that was?”
Lee was silent for a few seconds. She then stated, “Sorry girls. But, there are some people that I am more afraid of than you.”
Rock thought, 'The only people that Lee is more of afraid of them us, are the maids... But, why won't Lee answer our question?... Who else could have been there that neither the maids, nor Lee, will talk about. Someone that was at the chinese amazons village, or Jusenkyo?... Oh... It was Garcia... Garcia that was the third person. Garcia from years ago. When he fell directly into the spring of drown girl.'
'I can see how the entire situation unfolded. Chances are that Garibaldi, being the hero, dived into the spring of drowned girl, and Lee drove right after him, to help Garibaldi save Garcia. Either to help get the maids off of his back. Or, Lee was just being a nice guy... Err girl. Or, maybe both.'
'That means Garibaldi is also cursed to turn into a little girl, with cold water. And past Garcia is with her. And maids from our time caught up with Garcia and Garibaldi...'
'No wonder none of them wanted to talk about what happened.... This has, paradox, written all over it.'
'Also, this means that Garcia knew about Lee the entire time. Over the years. And he did not say anything, to anyone. Not even to the maids. He kept what he knew a secret for all these years... It is possible that Garcia was the first of us to learn about Lee and her stories, only he could not say a word about it, because he would risk wrecking reality itself if he did so.'
'This also explains why Garica avoided River and Annie... When he learned who they were... Especially, during our bikini parties... And I think it is best that I do not mention my theory, to anyone. For right now...'
Rock stated, “The third person theory is not important. Either way, we will likely find out, later.”
Revy looked at Rock, as she smirked, as she said, “You're right. What is important is we finally have Lee where we want her.” She turned to Lee, as she continued smirking. She stated, “And she is all ours.”
Nearby, River suppressed a giggle, as she thought, 'Rock, you are so brilliant. From what little I read from Lee, as she had answered you all. You are very close to the truth. Not that I am going to say a word about it, and risk getting Lee into further trouble. Though, I am glad that you are not going to say anything, either. Because, in the long run, that will help both of us, and Lee.'
Benny turned to Lee, as she said, “Since I learned you were now a girl, Lee. I was wondering, are you all woman now?”
Lee looked over at Benny, as she sarcastically remarked, “I was until you made me remember my life as Lee.”
In response, Benny chuckled a little.
Janet asked, “Do you have a split personality now, Lee?”
Lee turned to Janet, as she flatly stated, “No. Not as far as I can tell. There is only one voice in my head. And if I did have a split personality, I would let the Dongmei personality be in control. I liked being her. I never liked being me, the Lee personality.”
Revy smirked, as she said, with a bit of amusement in her tone of voice, “Then, it is fitting that you are stuck with the Lee personality.”
River turned to Revy, then to Lee, as she stated, “It is more like two personae overlapped, and merged together.”
River looked over at Revy, as she thought, 'Unlike you, Revy. And your Jack persona. Your two personae did not merge. While Lee's did.' She turned to look at Lee, as she continued her thoughts, with a bit of sadness, 'And I do feel for you, Lee. I liked the Dongmei personality, as well. But, I love your Lee personality more.'
'And I believe the Dongmei personality is still in there, as part of you, Lee. You just not aware of those changes. And given how bright and cheerful Dongmei was. Any such changes will be for the better in your outlook on life, how you relate to people, and your social skills.'
Ranma mentioned, “There should be no split personalities created by the smoke from my lamp. I made sure that would not happen, when using it, when I talked to the seller of it.”
Lee turned to Ranma, as she said, “Good. That is one less problem to deal with.”
River thought, 'You are right about that, Lee.'
Lee then shifted in her seat, as the ropes were chaffing her wrists. She thought, 'I really don't see the need for these ropes. I am not getting out of here. And we all know that.'
River overheard Lee's thoughts. She watched what Lee was doing. She thought, 'Lee's right. There is no point to having her tied up, now. Someone needs to do something about this. And I guess I am the girl to do it.' She leaned over, and behind Lee, as she pulled out a knife from one of her pockets. She then unfolded the knife, and she quickly cut the rope that was binding Lee's arms.
Janet asked, in an annoyed tone of voice, “What are you doing?”
With the rope pieces on the floor, Lee brought her hands around to her lap, as she rubbed her wrists. She said, “Thank you.”
River walked back to Lee's right side, as she folded her knife and pocketed it. She turned to Lee, with Lee looked at her. She replied, “You're welcome, Lee.” She looked over at Janet. She stated, “Lee is not going to escape us. And we all know it.”
Rock stated, “River is right.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. I have no way to escape off this island.”
Dutch looked at Lee, as she casually asked, “You are right about that, Lee... So, what are we going to do with you, now? I mean, we want revenge. But, barring turning you into a woman. I didn't really think about exactly what type of revenge we were going to do to you. And with you now already being a woman, that does discount that part of our vengeance.”
Revy stated, “I have some ideas. But, they are not meant for polite company.”
Benny, Janet, and Dutch chuckled at Revy comment, for a few seconds. While everyone else remained silent.
Ranma stated, “Whatever your revenge is, I suggest you have it be kept tame. And uniform. In that all of you do the same revenge to Lee. That way Lee will survive it. And all of you will have revenge, while no one will be able to complain that someone else had more revenge than them.”
Ranma turned to Rock, as she reminded, “That is what you promised those outside, just now.”
Rock turned to Ranma, as she agreed, “I realize that Ranma. And I intend to keep my word.”
Lee looked over at Ranma, as she politely said, “Thank you, Ranma.”
Ranma turned to Lee. She snorted, as she responded, “Don't thank me just yet, Lee. I may be an advocate for you. To a degree. But, I do want to make sure that, given what you have done, that everyone gets a chance at you. Because there should be some measure of revenge for you actions.” Her voice took a kinder tone, as she continued, “But, I am not planning to have revenge on you, myself.”
Natsuru said, “Nor I.”
Akira commented, “Me neither.”
Lee thought, 'That is three less to worry about, from those three. And I can understand the tightrope these three, and River are walking.' She replied, “I understand.”
Ranma said, “Good.”
Revy sarcastically remarked, “Oh, what a heart to heart. It is so sickeningly sweet that it makes me want to puke.”
Rock commented, “That being said. Ranma does have a point. We cannot do anything that will deprive the others of their revenge. Remember, we promised the Knight Sabers we will let them have their revenge. Along with others outside, a few minutes ago, as well.”
Benny pointed out, “You promised the Knight Sabers, and those outside. Not us.” Then, from the corner of her eye, she saw Janet frowning at her. She continued, “Though, I see your point. And our friends deserve some revenge, as well.”
Rock noticed the sudden change of heart, as she stated, in a dry tone of voice, “I am glad you have come around, Benny.”
Janet said, “So, the question is. What type of revenge allows for repeat business?”
There was silence for a few seconds, until Revy started laughing.
Everyone turned to look at Revy.
Rock asked, “What is it, Revy?”
As Revy calmed down, she turned to Rock. She said, “I have the solution. It is so simple. Sex.” She looked over at Lee, as she stated, “Lee, we just make you the bitch of the island.”
Lee remained calm, displaying her well known poker face.
River glanced over at Lee, before she turned back to look at Revy. She thought, 'Looks like the old Lee is back. She knows she cannot reply without causing trouble. But, at the same time, she is not going to give Revy the benefit of seeing her scared. So, I will help her out, as best as I can.'
River strongly stated, in an even tone of voice, “Hey now. Considering your past, you know how traumatic being raped is.”
Revy scoffed, “Like Lee here is not responsible for worse? On a far grander scale.”
River commented, “She just wrote it. She was not personally there.”
Revy stated, “That makes it even worse.”
River defended, “At the time she didn't even know she was hurting real people. Being gang raped is uncalled for.”
Lee quietly said, “I will do it.”
Everyone heard Lee.
River turned to Lee, as she flatly questioned, “What?!”
Lee turned to River, as she calmly said, “I said I will do it.” She turned back to Revy, as she continued, “Within reason. This is the best deal I am going to get. And if I don't resist, which I won't, it will not be rape.”
River thought, 'As much as I hate to admit it. Lee is probably right. And while being made to have sex can be traumatic, it could be far worse. And as long as I am here, I can keep it from being to bad. And it looks like I am going to have to move up my timetable for plan B.'
Janet stated, “Then, it is settled. Sex is how will be our revenge. And we can do it in our S&M dungeon.”
Everyone present, except for River, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, and Lee, started laughing, as Lee's eyes lit up, at she began to realize what she had just agreed to.
Akira looked at Lee, with pity in her eyes. Akira thought, 'Oh, poor, poor Lee. She didn't know what she is was getting into.'
Lee look around the room, as she quickly stated, “S&M dungeon?! You have an S&M dungeon?! I never wrote about you all having an S&M dungeon!”
As the other women began to calm down, everyone turned to look at Lee.
Janet smirked, as she said, “Interesting. And yes. We do have one. It is right under this building. In the basement, by our vault, with we keep our armory inside of.”
Lee questioned, in a slightly whiny tone of voice, “But, how can you have an S&M dungeon?”
Janet continued smirking, as she stated, “Well, you put it best in your stories. We are X rated characters, in a PG-13 series.”
The Lagoon parents all then laughed even harder, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Benny shared her wife's smirk, as she said, “And that Lee, is an understatement.”
Revy gave Lee a slasher smile, as she stated, in a sadistic tone of voice, “Yes. As Janet pointed out. We have an S&M dungeon. I believe that everyone should have access to an S&D dungeon. It is a great stress reliever. Surprisingly, I find my time there to be more relaxing them shooting people. And ours comes with whips. And chains. And leather. And everything else.”
River placed her left hand, gently onto Lee's right shoulder.
Lee looked up at River, with pleading eyes.
River looked down at Lee, with a comforting expression on her face. She said, in a pleasant tone of voice, “Don't worry, Lee. I have personally dabbled in the pain-pleasure games. They are not that bad. And we both know you have some latent sadomasochistic tendencies. You will do fine... You might even enjoy it. And either way, I will be there with you.”
Lee gave River a weak smile, and River returned Lee's smile.
River and Lee looked over at the group, as River continued, “As I said. I will be present, as you do this. To prevent things from getting out of hand.”
Rock looked at River and Lee, as she stated, “Fair enough.” She thought, 'River, I agree with you, that you need to be there. Lee will suffer, but not suffer too much.'
River looked Rock in her eyes, with Rock looking back, as River just slightly nodded her head, in acknowledgment of hearing Rock's thoughts.
River then thought, 'I am glad you agree with me, Rock. And I can make this work for plan B.' She stated, “And you will all have to be female, as you do this. And you will not try to turn Lee, male.”
Dutch said, “I can live with that.”
Revy commented, “It just means we get to enjoy more climaxes. And with dildos, it is not much different for the receiver.”
River thought, with concern, 'Revy is way too much into this. Not that there is much I can do on that front. Still, there are other ways to mitigate this situation.'
River stated, “Also, since I will be present for all this. I will stop any action that goes too far. Though, you can continued with something else for that night's session.”
Revy coldly requested, “Define too far?”
River answered, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “You avoid the face and head. You can use whips, but not to the point of causing bleeding. Only bruising. But, no damage to the bones, nor organs. You can penetrate, but not to the point there is tearing. And no choking, puncturing, piercing, nor blood letting, at all.”
Revy raised an eyebrow, as she commented, “You have done this before.”
River admitted, “Yes. I will be Lee's trust person. And we will use safe word rules.”
Rock said, “I can see where you are coming from.”
River commented, “This will be one session per night. And it will be done in groups. With one group per night. And each group will only one shot at Lee. No repeat nights. And no single, individual sessions. We will not spread this out any more than we have too.”
Dutch said, “Okay. That will prevent people from claiming they got more revenge on Lee, than the others.”
River responded, “Exactly. And each nightly session is two hours long, at most.”
Dutch stated, “Three hours. And not a second less.”
River flatly replied, “Fine. But, with ten minute breaks, every hour. And the ten minutes count as part of the session.”
Dutch commented, “Okay. But, there is a bathroom in the dungeon. Lee can use that.”
Lee said, “I can live with that.”
Dutch replied, “Good.”
Janet complimented, “That is not a bad set of rules, that you are coming up with, River.”
River turned to Janet, as she replied, “Thank you, Janet.”
Janet's voice then dripped sarcasm, as she said, “Though, there is no point in doing marathon sessions. Back to back. With Lee here is too tired to enjoy it.”
River bitterly thought, 'I guess I spoke to soon.'
Revy nodded a couple of times, as she stated, “I agree. I can see this working.”
Rock agreed, “So can I.”
Benny commented, “I believe everyone will go for it.”
Dutch said, “And it looks like Lee might survive this, after all.”
River slightly tightened her grip on Lee's left shoulder, as she acknowledge, “That is the idea.”
Benny asked, “So, when do we start?”
Revy suggested, “Ten PM tomorrow, sounds good. I want to be properly rested and in the right frame of mind. And that way, after it is over, we will be ready to get some sleep.”
Rock said, “I agree. We all need rest, after the day we have had. And this is type of action that should be taken in the evening. And not during the day.”
Lee could see the other Lagoon parents smiling in agreement. While, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru just shrugged their shoulders, in response.
Revy noticed all this. She then turned back to Lee, as she stated, “Then, it is settled. Tomorrow, at ten PM, your ass is literally ours. And I have just the right outfits for the occasion.”
Janet asked, “Our costumes from our last Halloween party?”
Revy turned to Janet, as she happily responded, “Yep. And I'm getting wet just thinking about it.”
Benny smirked, as she said, “Oh girls, this is going to be so much fun.”
Meanwhile, Dutch and Rock just lightly laughed at Revy's suggestion.
River thought, 'Oh no. They are going to wear those things. This is not good. But, it is too late for any of us to back out, now. Still, I need to get Lee and myself out of here.'
River requested, “I think it might be best if Lee and I retire to our bedroom for the night.”
Revy teased, “So, you want a piece of her ass, first?”
River stated, in an even tone of voice, “No. I just want to get her our of here, before you work yourself up into doing something, right now.”
Lee shrugged, as she said, “Besides, I am not in the mood.”
Lee comment caused everyone, save for River, and herself, to giggle a little, for a few seconds.
As the women calmed down, Rock stated, “Fine. You can take Lee to get some sleep. But, give us your reality device, first. We don't want you tempted to leave us. And Janet will escort you to your bedroom.”
River said, “Okay.” She let go of Lee, as she then pulled out her reality device, and handed it to Rock.
As Rock took the device, she said, “Thank you. You will get this back when you are ready to leave the island.” She then pocket the device, in her left front pants pocket, opposite to the reality device in her right front pants pocket.
Rock turned to Lee, as she stated, “And we also removed your weapons from your guestroom.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as she said, “As long as I get them back, when this is over. I am okay with that.”
Rock commented, “You behave, and you will.”
Lee replied, “Okay. I will try too.”
Revy inquired, “So Lee, do you have anything else to say, about this?”
Lee turned to Revy, as she calmly said, “Tomorrow, you will have my ass. But, for tonight, I will have my rest.”
In response, Revy laughed for several seconds, as Dutch commented, “A writer to the last.”
Janet turned to Lee as she asked, “Do you remember that way to your room?”
Lee said, “I remember everything, now.” She thought, 'The smoke from Ranma's lamp seemed to have jogged my memory. Even my old memories. Though, I only want you, River, to know that. But, River, you have a point. You and I best best get out of here, while we can.' She then slowly stood up from her stool.
Janet replied, “Okay. Follow me.”
Janet then walked of the kitchen, with Lee and River following behind her.
As soon as the three women were out of sight, the other women in the room looked at each other.
Dutch stated, “Well, I plan on heading to bed. But first, who wants to take care of the kids. And explain things to them? And who wants to contact those that just left, that we now have a plan?”
Rock pointed out, “Also, we will need to work out the scheduling.”
Benny said, “That shouldn't be a problem. By my math, we should wrap this up in two to three weeks. Maybe a month, as most. Depending on how large each of the groups are? And if some of them mind doing it, when Lee is having her period.”
Revy stated, “That is another point we will ask Lee about. When exactly is her cycle.”
Rock commented, “I spoke to River, about that, this morning. Don't ask how it came up in our conversation. Anyway, that matter should not be an issue for another few weeks.”
Revy said, “Okay. At least, we won't have to worry about her using that as an excuse to get out of this, for a few weeks. If ever. Lee always struck me as someone that just wanted to get his, well not her, problems over with. And for her to move on with her life. Given that approach, she will probably do it, even it if is that time of the month for her.”
Rock agreed, “True.”
Dutch commented, “Well, we will get the details, from Lee, later. Doing so now, would ruin the mood. And speaking of group. Are all five of us going to do the first session, together, tomorrow night?”
Revy stated, “We should. We always worked better as a team. Plus, Lee screwed us, together, we should screw her, together”
There was a few snickers from Revy's comment.
Dutch said, “I can go along with that.”
Benny replied, “Same here. I'm with you.”
Rock said, “I don't mind.”
Benny asked, “Though, the question become. Who goes first?”
Rock said, “We will figure that tomorrow.”
Dutch replied, “Okay. So, who is going to contact the others on our plan?”
Revy answered, “I will. I got a kick out of telling them we found Lee, the first time. I will even help set up the schedule.”
Benny turned to Revy, as she replied, “Thanks.”
Ranma said, “I will go see the kids. And tell them what is going.”
Natsuru stated, “Akira and I will go with you?”
Akira said, “Yes. It needs to be a team effort in explaining things to them.”
Benny commented, “So, will I. And I doubt they will want to take part in this revenge.”
Akira said, “I agree. They won't.”
Rock commented, “I think I will get a shower.”
Dutch thought, 'I guess I will get to immediately go to sleep, anyway.' She said, “Well, since you all are going to take care of everything, I will see you guys in the morning.”
The adults broke up, and left the room, as they headed for where they stated they would be going next.
(_)
A few minutes later, in one of the western hallways, on the first floor of the building, Janet, River, and Lee finally came to the door that lead to the guest bedroom that Lee and River shared.
As they came to a stop, by the closed door to River and Lee's bedroom, Janet turned around to face River and Lee, as she stated, “I wanted to ask, Lee. Now, that you have lived as a girl. Complete with the problems that come with it. Has it change your opinion of what you did to us.”
Lee answered, “Not really. Except for dealing with sensitive breasts, monthly periods, and peeing sitting down. Day to day. I don't see much difference between being a woman, or a man.” Lee thought, 'Besides feeling calmer, and not having to deal with morning hard-ons. But, I am not going to say that out loud, River. Considering I know you are reading my thoughts.'
River suppressed a giggle, as she thought, 'At least Lee has her sense of humor. If it is still slightly twisted.'
Janet conceded, “You have a point there.”
Lee inquired, “Now, do you remember our conversation at the factory, on Mars?”
Janet looked over at River, and back to Lee.
Lee realized what was going on, as she casually scoffed, “Don't worry, Janet. I keep no secrets from, River. And we both know that River here can keep a secret.” She thought, 'Which is an understatement.'
River thought, 'You are right about that, Lee.' She said, “Lee is correct. She keeps no secrets from me. And I keep her secrets. So, I will keep any secrets you have, in dealing with her.”
Janet said, “That is nice. And yes. I do remember our conversation. I looked up that series, in your reality. You are right. I am naturally a nympho. And Rock and Revy can be real idiots.”
River deadpanned, “No kidding.” She thought, 'I looked up that storyline, as well. Way back when I first learned about it, from reading Lee's mind. While I was still pretending to be, Sam, in Plata Podrido.'
Lee said, “I am glad you realize the truth, Janet.”
Janet commented, “Well, tomorrow you are going to find out how much of a nympho I can be. And I will do my best for you to enjoy what I do to you. You will experience pain. But, you will also experience pleasure.”
Lee calmly responded, “I find that comforting to know.”
Janet said, “Well, good night River, and Lee. You are both going to need your rest, for tomorrow nights' activities.”
Lee replied, “I hope you sleep well tonight, Janet.”
River said, “See you in the morning, Janet.”
Janet smiled at the two other women. She then walked around them, to her right, as she made her way down the hallway, away from them.
River then walked over to the door to their bedroom, and she opened it. As she passed through the doorway, and into the room, she turned on the ceiling light, from the wall switch by the door, on the interior side of the wall
Lee walked in the room, behind River, with Lee gently shutting the door behind her. Lee then stopped a few feet inside the guest bedroom.
As River continued walking into their bedroom, with her back turned to Lee, she casually offered, “Are you hungry? I know you missed supper. And in a little while, I could sneak a snack out for you, from the kitchen?”
River then turned around, and what she saw caused her heart sink a bit.
River saw that Lee was looking down at her feet, as she said, in a defeated tone of voice, “No River. I am not hungry... I just have a lot on my mind, and I am not sure where to start.”
River thought, 'I have to cheer her up. And this might do it...' She mentioned, “By the way, Rose and Violet stated that they still consider you their friend. Their sister. No matter what. And after this is over, you are welcome to return to them, and their village.”
Lee did not face River, as she calmly replied, in an emotionally tired tone of voice, “That is good. They have always been good friends to me. Cologne said something similar, right before we left the village... I guess their village...” She quietly said, “I guess, not my village... Not anymore...” She continued, in a normal tone of voice, “So, at least I have options... After I get through this mess.”
River thought, ' To look at her like this is breaking my heart. I have to do something.' She asked, “Would you like a hug?”
Lee looked back up at River, as she said, “Sure. I could use a hug.”
River calmly walked over to Lee, as she hugged gently the black haired woman.
Lee did not return the hug, as she just leaned her head on River's right shoulder.
They silently stayed that way for several minutes, until changed their clothes, and they went to their own separate beds, to get some sleep.
They did not even bother to brush their teeth. They just turned out the lights, laid in their beds, and soon fell asleep.
(_)
The next morning, Lee was comfortably sleeping in her bed, on her back. She only had on her white panties, and a t-shirt.
In Lee's sleep, she had kicked the covers of her bed to her feet.
As Lee woke up, in the darkness of her room, she recalled both her sets of memories. And in her half-awake state, she could not tell what was real, and what was a dream.
She immediately used her hands to check her body. She felt her breasts, under her shirt, and her slit under her panties.
Lee relaxed, as she thought, 'I am a girl. A woman.' She then started to giggle a little, as she continued her thoughts, 'I am now a girl for good.'
Then, as she became more awake, she recalled the events of last night, as she mentally reflected, 'Well, I am fucked... Or, more aptly, I am going to be fucked tonight, at ten PM. For three hours. Then, the next foreseeable nights, in the future. Though, I do wonder what time it is, and if River is still asleep.
Given there was no window in the room, to the outside, which Lee liked, she had to lean up, and turned on the lamp light, between her bed and River's bed.
After she did so, she saw that River was gone, and that her bed was made up. She then saw that the digital clock on the nightstand by the lamp, between their beds, stated it was ten forty AM.
Lee then turned the lamp light back off. And she then fell back onto her bed, with her head hitting her pillow, as she enjoyed the darkness surrounding her.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, and happiness, “I haven't slept late like this in a long time. Even as Dongmei. But, it sure is nice to do this every once in a while. Also, River can sure be quite when she wants to be. And it was thoughtful of her not to wake me up... Okay. I have over eleven hours before Revy, and her gang, are going to literally fuck me... Well, it could be worse... And speaking of being fucked... Why not?...'
Lee then used her left hand to reach under her shirt, and start to slowly massage her right breast, as she used her right hand to reach under panties, as she gently rubbed her genitalia.
As Lee enjoyed the pleasure she was making herself feel, she delightfully thought, 'It really is nice being a girl, in a healthy, young body… Oh yea... Real nice, indeed... Still, I think I will shave down there, for tonight... But, at least I can have some fun, right now...'
(_)
At the moment, right outside the bedroom, in the hallway, River was walking down the hallway, towards the bedroom she shared with Lee.
As River did so, she thought, 'That breakfast we had was good. But, it is getting kind of late, and I need to check on Lee. To see if she is still asleep.'
When River reached the door to their bedroom, she immediately stopped in her tracks, as she sensed what Lee was doing on the other side of the door.
River began to quietly giggle, as she thought, 'Okay. She's up. And from what I sense from her, she about to be in the clouds, for a few minutes... I will let her have her fun, right now. She deserves this. And I will talk to her, later.'
River turned around, and softly walked away from the door to Lee and hers bedroom, as she went to do something else to kill time in the moment.
(_)
Half an hour later, when Lee was finished, she got out of her bed, and made her bed.
Next, she got cleaned up, dressed, and ready to face the day. She brushed her teeth, and used the western style toilet. While in the shower, she used a razor to carefully shave the hair off her crotch, and genitalia. As Dongmei, this was not the first time she had done this. And Lee still retained the memories and skills she had as Dongmei, so she had no problems in doing so.
After Lee cleaned and dried herself off, she got dressed in clothing the Lagoon family had provided her. Along, with wearing her red slippers, without socks. But, when she returned to her bedroom, she found her weapons missing.
Then, Lee remember that Rock mentioned they took her weapons from her room. But, they would later be returned to her. So, Lee did not worry about her weapons.
Next, she used her amazon training to good use, by sneaking into the kitchen, to raid the fridge, without getting caught.
Lee then got something to eat and drink. Though, just as she put her glass and plate in the sink, she found she had to use the restroom, again. And she used the restroom in a hallway, near the kitchen.
A few minutes later, after Lee peed, she dried herself, pulled up her panties and pants, washed her hands, and drying her hands on a hand towel by the sink. Though, when she exited the restroom, she found herself standing face to face with the dark blue haired woman, whom she recognized.
It was Violin, and she had a warm smile on her face.
Violin took a few steps back from Lee, in the hallway. She then came to a stop, as she said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Hi yea Lee. You look good as a girl.”
Lee thought, 'Violin. I guess she and Aeryn are here for their revenge. I should be surprised. And well, at least Violin is being polite. I wonder what she wants to talk to me about?'
Lee responded, “Hey Violin. And thanks. You look good, yourself.”
Violin happily replied, “Thank you.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to confirm my worries.' She inquired, “So, what are you doing here?”
Violin answered, “Aeryn and I came here last night to see you. You must have missed us in the crowd.”
Lee admitted, “I did. I had other things on my mind.” She thought, 'Like remember decades worth of memories, and being presents like a piece of meat for my victims.'
Violin cracked a grin, as she stated, “I bet. Though, when it was time to leave. Instead of going directly back home, last night, we just teleported to this morning. When we got here, the girls told us what was going on.”
Lee thought, 'Not bad. And that is exactly what I would expect from you and Aeryn.'
Violin then mentioned, “And we are in line for our night with you.”
Lee responded, “I understand. So, where is Aeryn?”
Violin stated, “Aeryn is with Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru. But, I figured I might want to chat with you, in private.”
Lee said, “I hope you are not upset with me being the writer.”
Violin replied, “Nah. Aeryn is still pissed, but not me.”
Lee commented, “That is good to hear.”
Violin complimented, “And that hologram trick, back in that factory was pretty good.”
Lee joked, “Yea. You both walked into that one.”
Violin laughed for a few seconds. She then smiled, as she stated, “Yes. We did. I am glad you have your sense of humor back.”
Lee replied, “I never lost it.”
Violin said, “That is comforting to know.”
Lee then looked down at Violin. And Lee saw that the other woman was wearing a loose, untucked t-shirt, over a bra. Below that was pants, with a belt outline showing on the sides of her waistline, and then her shoes.
But, what caught Lee's eyes was the slight bulge on the front of Violin's otherwise flat stomach.
Lee looked back up at Violin's face, as she stated, “You're pregnant?”
Violin grin grew a bit, as she casually said, “Yea. Aeryn and I discussed it. And we decided we wanted another child. But, Aeryn didn't care to go through with the pregnancy, and birth, a second time around. So, I volunteered to give it a go. Aeryn used some of that magic man powder to knocked me up... And she is a hot as a man, as she is a woman.”
Lee mildly giggled at the thought of Aeryn temporarily turning herself into a man.
Violin then placed her right hand gently on her stomach, as she continued, “And it has been fun, so far. By the way, my mom and dad, well, Violin’s mom and dad, are thrilled they are going to be grandparents. And my son, brother, and friends, are too.”
As Lee returned Violin's grin, she stated, in a happy tone of voice, “Well, congratulations. And it is nice that everyone is happy.”
Violin calmly replied, “Thank you. That is part of what I want to talk to you about.”
As thought then occurred to Lee, as she inquired, “Well, before we get into that. I was wondering. Given how fast Sebacean pregnancies can be. Is this a fast pregnancy? Or, a this a slow pregnancy?
Violin answered, “Given various factors and reasons. In dealing with the health of my baby. I am taking medication to have a slow pregnancy. Down to nine months. To make sure if there are any complications, that they can be corrected in time. My womb, and my unborn child inside it, is literally scanned every week. So, we can stay on top of this. Also, I am going on two and a half months, right now. By the way, this child is a girl.”
Lee thought, 'Given that you, Violin, are half human, half Ixioran Altairian hybrid, and Aeryn is a Sebacean peacekeeper, it is a very wise idea to slow down the pregnancy of your baby daughter. To make sure any problems, that can arise, are dealt with before it is too late to fix them.'
Lee responded, “Okay. That is nice. Now, you stated you are in line for what is going to happen to me. And, as you said, Aeryn is still upset with me. So, are you here for revenge, along with Aeryn?”
Violin stated, “The answer is. Yes. We are both here for revenge against you. And that is quite the revenge they came up for you. I have been in similar situations.”
Lee commented, “Yes. I know. At least I got a choice. Unlike you.”
Violin responded, “True. But, concerning us. This is more or less, for Aeryn.”
Lee questioned, “She is still pissed I wrote that scene with you to sleeping with Scorpius?
Violin answered, “Yea. Still, I had fun during that incident?”
Lee replied, “I bet. And you're welcome.”
Violin let out a laugh. She then said, “Also, one other will be joining us, along with River. Though, not to worry. It won't be that bad.”
Lee stated, “You, I am not so worried about. Man, or woman. You have very simple wants in bed. It is Aeryn that scares me.”
Violin admitted, “Yea. She is a real tiger in bed.”
Lee asked, “I don't doubt that. So, how is Harvey?”
Inside Violin's head, Harvey thought, 'I glad Lee remembers me. And I must say she is quite cute, as a woman.'
Violin mentally replied, 'No arguments there.'
Violin verbally answered, “Fine. And he likes you the way you are now.”
Lee commented, “I am not surprised. Harvey always had good tastes.”
Inside Violin's head, Harvey smiled at Lee's compliment.
Lee went onto say, “And Harvey. I know you are seeing and hearing this. So, thank you.”
Harvey mentally said, “Please, tell Lee, you're welcome, from me.”
Violin stated, “Harvey says, you're welcome. By the way, I learned about that deal you cut with Harvey, during the time loop. I must say. That is something else.”
Lee said, “It was the only option I had at the time.”
Violin replied, “I know.”
Lee teased, “So, how is Harvey handling the pregnancy.”
Violin answered, “He supported our decision. And he is fine with it... And yes, Harvey still considers himself to be a, he.”
Harvey thought, 'You are correct about all of that, Violin. It is your body. And this experience might help your relationship with Aeryn.'
Violin mentally conceded, 'That might be a possible added benefit to the situation.'
Lee thought, 'When is comes to gender and personality. I have no right to judge... Besides, there are other matters to attend too.' She asked, “Now, what do you want to talk about with me, Violin?”
Violin calmly said, “I have a few things I need to talk to you about. But, I guess the first thing we need to discuss, concerns book four of your stories.”
Lee guessed, “Is this about me reincarnating you as your biggest female fan? Or, your one night stand with Scorpius? Which you admit was fun.”
Violin giggled a little. She then said, “Neither. This is about my child.”
Lee quickly realized with child Violin was talking about. She stated, “Of the three... That I know of... Not counting the one currently growing in your stomach. I am guessing you are talking about Grayza's daughter?”
Lee mentally reflected, 'The other two are Aeryn's son, Little D. And Katralla's daughter. Violin, as John, is likely the only human man in the multiverse that can claim to have three different children, from three different alien women, while technically responsible for conceiving one of them, the old fashioned way. Aeryn became pregnant from John's clone. Grayza raped him. And Katralla was impregnated by a DNA sample from John.'
'Now, that I think about it, Violin's past relationship problems rank up there with Ranma's past experiences... And the way my life is looking, my relationship problems are not that far behind those two...'
Violin said, “Yes. That is why I want to talk to you about this in private. Mentioning this in front of Aeryn would risk reopening a lot of old wounds for the both of us. The type of wounds that should stay in the past.”
Lee thought, 'Yea. And ironically, Grayza's pregnancy was due to the actress that played her was pregnant at the time of the shooting of the Peacekeeper miniseries. Which I am sure, during your childhood as Violin. And how big a Farscape fan you are as Violin. That you already know.'
Lee calmly stated, “That is completely understandable.”
Violin responded, “I am glad you agree. It is nice that the years have not dulled your sharp mind.”
Lee thought, 'Clearly, she realizes I am still as cunning as ever. Not that it matters at the moment...” She questioned, “No. The years have not... So, you were saying?”
Violin commented, “Well, about my daughter with Grayza. I would like to thank you in how you handled that situation. Even though you killed Grayza, you arranged for our daughter to have a good life, with a good family. And you kept it vague. Not even giving her name. That even those that read your stories could not find her. With the only person who knows where she is is Scorpius, whom has a vested interested in making sure that she has a good life.”
Lee stated, “I enjoyed writing broad strokes in that scene. And I made it hard for her to be found. Are you planning to track her down?”
Violin sadly answered, “No. I am sure that Scorpius made sure she has had a good life. And even if I was still, John. I would not visit her, for fear of causing her trouble.”
Lee thought, 'As tragic as it is. You have a point, Violin. Not that I am going to tell you so. Because it would make you feel worse.' She said, “Yes. It is a bittersweet situation.”
Violin agreed, “Exactly. I also know from the Farscape comics I read, during my second childhood, as Violin, that Grayza, in the comic timeline, would have eventually been deposed, anyway. Only, in that timeline, our daughter was exiled with her. And my counterpart allowed it. That upset me. Not that I am going to visit that parallel reality. Doing so would cause too many problems for everyone involved. But, it does annoy me.”
“Still, in the timeline that you created, our daughter was not dragged down by her mother, and she has a good life. And for that, I thank you.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that is touching. I think that is the sweetest thank you I have ever received from any of the people I wrote about... Ever...” Lee sincerely replied, in a supportive tone of voice, “Well, you're welcome, Violin.”
Violin gave Lee a warm smile, as she responded, “Good. By the way, since you still have your wits about you. After you got your memory back. Why haven't you tried to escape?”
Lee looked away from Violin's face a few seconds, as she thought, 'I might as well be honest with her about this.'
Lee turned back to looked into Violin's eyes, as she calmly answered, “At this time, I don't see how I could. And I realize that there is no point in doing so. Since I am not dead, nor being tortured to death, right now. I consider this situation to be a plus. And I should survive what they do have planned. So, I am not going to risk screwing up my situation even worse. No pun intended.”
Violin nodded once, as she stated, “Well, I can see your point on this. Also... And if this gets out, I will never admit to the others that I said this... But, in book four, you and Scorpius made a good point on my mortality, as John. I would not outlive them. And I did check. Unlike the magazine timeline. Translator microbes of my home reality, as John, do not extend the lifespan of people.”
“You both were right. My family and friends would have outlived me by centuries. That would have been cruel to everyone involved. And since I have cheated death before, what you both arranged, though out there, even for my life, before that, was not that horrible a fate. And what you both did solved a lot of my problems...”
“I mean, besides giving me that monthly problem...” She cracked a grin, as she added, “That you now share.”
Lee deadpanned, “Yea.”
Violin giggled for a few seconds. She then went onto say, “I have no real complaints with my new body, and my life. Which you allowed me to returned to, without missing a beat.”
Lee commented, “I hope, the gender change, and slight personality changes. did not cause to any serious problems with your family and friends.”
Violin shrugged, as she commented, “I will admit that there was a short adjustment period. But, soon after, things worked out for the better. Even my son accepted me as his father, with only minor difficulties. And that is why, when it is Aeryn's turned to have revenge on you, I will be there to help steer things towards more... Pleasant activities.”
Lee smiled, as she replied, “I appreciate that, Violin.”
Violin inquired, “Anyway, I do have another question. While I understand where my mother... Birdy, gave me my current name... Violin. What I don't understand, is why did you have me reincarnated as Birdy's daughter in the first place? Where you on drugs?”
Lee said, in a plain, matter of fact, tone of voice, “No. I was not on drugs. And what scares me is that I honestly don't know why I had you reincarnated as Birdy's daughter, Violin, in the first place. I was just writing book one, and towards the end of book one, that idea just popped in my head... Around the same time as the beginning plotlines for books two, three, and four.”
Violin said, “Well, you are not alone, concerning that matter. Your answer scares me, as well... Also, I better go meet Aeryn, before she gets worried about me. My pregnancy has only made her more concerned for my welfare.”
Lee said, “I fully understand.”
Lee thought, 'Though, if Aeryn thought about it, she should not be so worried about Violin. Trying to fight Violin would be like trying to fight Thor, without his hammer... Which would be a very difficult fight for even the best fighters of those people she knows. Such as Annie, Arcee, Roberta, River...'
'Speaking of which? I am so happy I wrote Violin so that she is still nice, and she prefers to use her head, instead of her fists, when confronting a problem. Or, I would have had real problems with her... Still, I better reply to her.'
Lee said, “And good luck with the pregnancy and birth.”
Violin smiled, as she replied, “Thanks. And see you later.” Violin then turned, and walked passed Lee, and as she headed for another part of the mansion.
Meanwhile, Lee also turned in a direction, towards the gym, in search of River.
(_)
A few minutes later, as Lee made her way to the gym, she walked through the door, and into the equipment part of the gym. As Lee did so, she almost ran into Sarah and Molly, whom were about to exit the room.
Fortunately, all three women stopped in time, to prevent hitting each other.
Lee looked at the two blond sisters, and she saw that each of them were wearing a t-shirt, over a sports bra, gym shorts, and slippers.
Lee also noticed, in thought, 'I don't see any sweat on their clothing, nor brow. But, given they inherited some of their parents super-soldier serum abilities. Including it taking a lot of effort to work up a sweat. So, they could have been working out for an hour, and still smell like a rose... I am sure they appreciate that part of that I gave them.'
Molly was the first to break the silence, as she greeted Lee, “Hi Lee.”
Sarah calmly said, “Hello Lee.”
Lee replied, “Hi girls. So, what have you two been up to?”
Molly coyly said, “Some light morning sparring.”
A thought occurred to Lee, as she inquired, “By the way. Sarah, are you okay after you were electrocuted by Yurika at the factory roof.”
Sarah commented, “Oh, I am fine. I have had worse during our sparring matches.”
Lee thought, 'I will ask Yurika later after her kidneys. Now, to find River.' She asked, “Good. You wouldn't happen to know where River is?”
Sarah answered, “No. But, we were just talking about you.”
Lee replied, “Yea. I know I am the talk of the island.”
Molly stated, “Not just about that... Listen, we would prefer to talk about this, somewhere private. This is not the type of conversation for someone to overhear.”
Lee thought, 'Considering what I did to these two, I can guess what this about.' Lee requested, “Okay. Where do you want to talk about this?”
Molly answered, “My bedroom... Besides, Sarah and I need to get dressed.
And Sarah can pick up some of her clothing, in her bedroom, and she can change, when we get to my bedroom.”
Lee back out of the gym doorway, and into the hallway, as she responded, “Just lead the way.”
Molly and Sarah then walked into the hallway, and towards the front staircases, as Lee followed right behind them.
(_)
A few minutes later, they made it to Molly's bedroom. After a minor detour to Sarah's bedroom, for her to get some fresh clothing.
Molly opened the door to her bedroom, and held it open for the other two women with her.
Sarah walked in, first. Then, Lee. And Molly gently closed the door behind her.
Lee heard Molly lock the knob of the door with her hands.
As Lee and Sarah turned around to face Molly, Lee thought, 'I guess these two are serious about their privacy. Not that I blame them.'
As Molly let go of the knob, she turned around and looked over at the other two women. She said, “Lee, go sit on my bed, as we get changed.”
Lee turned around to see Molly's bed in front of her. It was a nice bed, with the sheets already made.
Lee calmly walked over to the bed, and she gently sat on the end of Molly's bed.
Lee then watched as both blond sisters walks over to Molly's dresser, with Sarah setting her fresh set of clothing on top of the dresser.
Sarah looked over at Lee, then to Molly. She asked, “Are you sure it is okay for her to be here, as we change clothing?”
Lee stated, “I have been a girl for a long time. I have all the same parts, and problems that come from said parts, that you do.”
As Molly pulled out a few set of clothes for herself, from the shelves of her dresser, she let a laugh out. She then turned to her sister, as she commented, “She has a point.”
Sarah conceded, “You are right.”
As Sarah and Molly got change into some of their more casual, day to day, clothing, Lee looked around Molly bedroom.
Lee thought, 'Molly's bedroom is much more mature that before. What I wrote in my stories, concerning this room, was about a school girl bedroom. This is an adult woman's bedroom, converted from a school girl's bedroom... Though, I think it is best I just stay quiet about this. And that I not look at these two women, as they get dress... Though, I am a girl now, myself, it is still rude to stare.'
A couple of minutes later, both blond sisters were dressed in ordinary white bras, under their t-shirts. They wore panties, under pants, and slippers on their feet.
Both sisters then discarded their workout clothing in a hamper, by the closet in the room.
When they were finished getting dress, both women walked up to Lee, and sat down to her sides, on the end of Molly's bed. Molly was to Lee's right, and Sarah was to Lee's left.
Lee thought, 'They clearly planned this. And even though I am no longer helpless, by any means. Given what these two are capable. And what I have done to them. I do not want to cause them any more trouble.”
Lee stared in front of her, as she calmly inquired, “So, what do you want talk to me about?”
Molly said, “You see Lee. The problem is, we don't just love each other. We are still in love with each other. And it is your fault.”
Sarah stated, “Given we are now sisters, we know it is wrong, but we cannot help it. Fortunately, we have an understanding with each the rest of our family. But, why did you do it?”
Lee quietly said, “I don't how to say this without sounding cold and unfeeling.”
Molly requested, “Say it anyway.”
Lee was quiet for a few seconds at she turned to look Molly in her face, then Sarah in her face, and finally she looked in front of her, as she stated, “When I first saw the Black Lagoon anime, I was touched by your sad story. Along those lines, I think the anime did a better job with you, than the manga.”
Sarah spoke up, “We agree. Please continue.”
Lee responded, “Yea. The anime seemed to show that you had not given up the fight. Where your manga counterparts seemed to have resigned themselves to their fates. And they had dressed for their own funerals... And I know that it is a real mind screw to see your own life and death... I probably should not have had you all see that, at the end of book three.”
Molly calmly commented, “What is done, is done. And knowing that we are together in this life helped us get over what happened, and what we saw happen.”
Sarah said, “Yes. We are much better, now.”
Lee stated, in a sad tone of voice, “But, the dynamic relationship between you two, when you are Yukio and Ginji. It was a classic tragic love story. At the time, Molly, as Yukio you were too young, and Sarah, as Ginji, your were too old. And you both clearly knew it, and you respected the boundaries you faced.”
Molly inquired, with sadness in her tone of voice, “Then, since you knew we were in love. And you wanted us to continuing being in love with each other, why did you create these boundaries we now face? Why did you make us sisters?”
Lee answered, with emotion guilt in her tone of voice, “Because I am a sucker for tragic stories. Not just love stories. And your story had so much potential to be taken further, through reincarnation.”
Sarah questioned, “Then, why didn't you have us reborn in different families?”
Lee responded, “Partly because I did research on the subject of reincarnation. There are cases of good friends in one life being born as siblings. Even as different genders than they were in their previous life. Such as a case of good friends that were pirate men, whom hanged, and ended up sisters in their next life.”
“And if you were born in different families, you would have likely never been reunited. And the other part was that I have found that life is never perfect... Life is always flawed... Usually very flawed... So, I combined the two concepts of reincarnation and tragic love. And in doing so, I changed the tragedy from a case of age, to blood relation...”
Molly and Sarah noticed Lee's voice trembled a little, as she continued, “And I am so sorry for the pain I have caused you. If I had known this was all real, in another part of the multiverse, I would have done things differently... So, very differently...”
Molly use her left hand to reach around to hug Lee's left shoulder, as she leaned her head against Lee's right shoulder. Sarah then used her right hand to reach around to hug Lee's right shoulder, as she leaned on Lee's left shoulder.
Molly quietly said, “We realize this.”
Sarah calmly replied, “Yes. We do.”
Lee did not return the hugs, in fear of spoiling the mood. Though, she thought, with bittersweet emotion, 'This is another thing I like being a girl. People show me affection, instead of only seeing me as a threat...'
They silently stated like that for several seconds, until, within seconds of each other, Molly and Sarah both leaned up, and let go Lee.
Lee looked over at Sarah, then Molly, and then back to her front. She quietly said, in a sober tone of voice, “Thank you, for being understanding.”
Molly replied, in a sober tone of voice, “Okay. We just wanted to understand, why. Now, we do.”
Sarah quietly said, with just enough force to be heard by the other two women, “Yes. So few do understand such matters in this day an age. But, you do. And we do.”
Molly inquired, with a bit of curiosity in her tone of voice, “So, do you remember the conversation we had on the radio, at that factory on Mars?”
Lee answered, “Vaguely... How long ago was it for you?” She thought, 'I may remember events and people. But, I not remember things, word for word. I do not have a photographic memory. And I am thankful for that.'
Molly stated, “A few weeks.”
Lee said, “Well, for me it was decades ago.”
Sarah playfully commented, “Ouch... You have a good memory, under the circumstances.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Molly said, “Well, I was thinking about what you said during that conversation. And not what you said just to me. But, what you said to all of us. And you made some very good points. You did do a lot of good for all of us. And most of us refuse to acknowledge that.”
Lee calmly admitted, “Thank you, again. For realizing the good I have done. And the bad is pretty much due to me dealing with my personal demons.”
Sarah softly commented, “I would not want to meet such demons.”
Lee quietly said, “Yea... They are not pleasant. Even to this day. I am just glad I had enough sense not to complain to your parents about reintroducing me to my demons.”
Molly agreed, “Yes. That is a bit of a rotten deal for you. Making you remember like that.”
Lee said, “Yes. It is... Well, if there is nothing else you want to talk to me about, I will be going.”
Sarah answered, “I have nothing else to really talk to you about.”
Molly replied, “I'm good.”
Sarah stated, “We just really needed to sort that out with you.”
Lee said, “If it is any conciliation. You both are alive, healthy, and sane. So, I am sure you to will figure out how to work through this problem.”
Molly agreed, “I think we will.”
Sarah commented, “Yes. We have nothing better to do.”
Lee said, “Then, I look forward to talking with you both, later.”
Sarah replied, “So do we.”
Molly offered, “Yes. If you need to get something off you chest, to just us know. We are will to listen.”
Lee said, “Thanks, girls. I will keep that in mind.”
Lee then got up from Molly's bed. She walked to the door, unlocked the knob, turned the knob, and opened the door.
Next, Lee turned around to see Molly and Sarah looking back at her.
Lee gave them a smile, before she turned back around, and exited the room, into the hallway, with her gently closing the door to Molly's bedroom, behind her.
As the two blond sisters turned back to look at each other, Sarah calmly asked, “Molly, why could I not get angry at Lee?”
Molly moved over on the end of her bed, to where she was sitting beside Sarah, to Sarah's right side. She looked at her sister, as she answered, “Because, she is as screwed up as we are. And all three of us are mature enough to handle our problems as adults.”
Sarah agreed, “Yes. We are.”
Molly inquired, “So, what do you want to do for the rest of the morning?”
Sarah stated, “I was thinking we could swim in the pool, until lunch.”
Molly said, “Good idea. We will get our swimsuits and head out there.”
Sarah commented, “Yes. It will be fun.”
The two sisters then went to retrieve their swimsuit, put them on, and head to their sea water pool, in the backyard of the mansion.
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee had just left Molly's bedroom. As Lee walked down the hallway, from Molly's bedroom, towards the staircases, in the front of the mansion, she came soon within ten feet of the entryway stair case, on that side of the second story hallway she was walking down, when she saw Kristina turn from the stairs, and towards her.
Kristina then made her way down hallway towards Lee.
Lee stopped walking, as Kristina casually approached her.
Both women continued to look at each other, as Kristina soon came to a stop a few feet in front of Lee.
As both women continued to look at each other, Kristina said, in a kind tone of voice, “Hello Lee. You are just the woman I wanted to see.”
Lee thought, 'Let's see what she wants?' She warmly requested, “Hello Kristina. What do you need?”
Kristina calmly asked, “I have a question for you. An important one to me. And I figure you might be the only one that can answer my question. Also, it is personal, so I wanted to ask you, alone. That question being. Who is my father? My mother sadly claims that she does not remember. And I believe her.”
Lee thought, 'Kristina was never one to beat around the bush.' She said, in a calm, though sad tone of voice, “I am sorry, Kristina. But, I have done you a great disservice. I don't know who your father is. I only wrote Dutch having sex to get pregnant, in a third person comment. I did not give any real details on the matter.”
Kristina responded, in a disappointed tone of voice, “That is what I thought.”
Lee spoke up, in a slightly more positive tone of voice, “But hey. I gave you five loving parents. So, you were not wanting for caring parents.”
Kristina begrudgingly agreed, “True.”
Lee mentioned, “Also, you can use a reality device to find out who your father is. Just make sure to be careful not to change the past, and you don't end up becoming you own father.”
Kristina reacted, in slight disgust, as she responded, “First... Ewww... Second, I am a girl now. At least for the rest of this life.”
Lee pointed out, “That didn't stop Revy, nor Janet, from being fathers to Yukio, and Sarah.”
Kristina conceded, “Okay. You have a point there. I will take what you said under advisement.”
Lee kindly replied, “Good.”
Kristina questioned, “By the way. Expect for Yukio and Rebecca. Both of which are obvious. Where did you come up with our current names from?”
Lee honestly answered, “If I knew why I named you, Kristina, along with giving Sarah and Molly their names, I would tell you. But, it is kind of a mystery to myself.”
Kristina mildly giggled. She then replied, “That figures.”
Lee said, “I know. Also, if you see River, tell her I am looking for her.”
Kristina responded, “She is downstairs, in the entertainment room, by the front door, with Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika.”
Lee smiled, as she replied, “Thanks, Kristina.”
Kristina returned Lee smile, as she said, “No problem. And have a good day. Also, good luck tonight. You are going to need it.”
Lee thought, 'It is no surprise that the others told their children what is going on. They are all adults, after all. But, I am not going to make an issue out of it, for Kristina, nor any of the younger members of this household.' She replied, “I know. And thanks, again.”
The two women then walked passed each other, as they continued on their way.
(_)
A minute and a half later, Lee had descended the staircase, closet to her, and she made her way down to the first floor. She then took a left into the entertainment room.
When Lee made it to the open doorway to the room, she came to a stop, as she looked into the room. She saw that River was watching a movie with Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka. The four women were sitting in the couches, on the far wall, to Lee's right, as Lee saw an action movie was playing on the large, wall mounted, widescreen TV to her left.
Lee turned to look at River. As she focused her attention on River, as she thought, 'There she is. Like Kristina said.'
River was the first to notice Lee. She turned Lee, while she calmly stated, in a happy tone of voice, “Lee... It is good to see you up.”
The three sisters then looked up at Lee, as Nodoka used the remote she had to mute the sound from the TV.
Nodoka said, “Good to see you, Lee.”
Yurika commented, “Nice that you are here with us, Lee”
Mikoto said, “It is good to see you up and about, Lee.”
Lee said, “Good morning to you too, girls.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Since I have met with most the other kids this morning, I might as well see if these three want to talk about anything.'
Lee noticed River cracking a grin. Lee causally continued her thoughts, 'Yes River. It has been an interesting morning.'
River teased, “It got interesting even before you got out of bed.”
Lee immediately realized what River meant, as her face blushed in embarrassment.
In response, River giggle, as seeing her good friend blush from obvious embarrassment.
Mikoto look at Lee, then River, and back to Lee. She deadpanned, “Do we really want to know what you two are hinting at?”
Lee and River said, in unison, “No.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to ask Yurika.” She turned her attention three sisters, as she inquired, “Yurika. I was wondering. I hope that kidney strike didn't do any serious damage to your body.”
Yurika stated, “I am okay. And thank you for asking. I shouldn't have thrown that lightning at you. That was like firing a gun at you. And you were trying to be as none violent as possible.”
Lee conceded, “Yea. It was an intensely stress experience for me. And you forced my hand. No pun intended. By the way, I already spot to Sarah about that incident. She is okay, as well.”
Yurika replied, “I already know. But, that is nice for you to ask her about that.”
Lee inquired, “So, how long did it take you to recover.”
Yurika answered, “I was sore for a few days. But, I recovered. And Simon, I mean Doctor Tam, checked me out. And I am okay.”
Lee replied, “Good.”
Nodoka mentioned, “By the way. If you are wondering. About that little freezing trick...”
Lee guessed, “And you were faking being stuck, to allow me to escape?”
Nodoka replied, “Exactly.”
Lee commented, “Thank you. Because I had no way to counter your abilities.”
Nodoka responded, “I know. And it is no problem.”
Lee said, “And Mikoto, I hope your were alright after I pushed you into Kristina.”
Mikoto inquired, “We were both fine. Though, how did you guess what attack I was going to use on you? and from which side?”
Lee answered, “None of you wanted to seriously hurt me. And with your fire abilities out. And the fact I was much bigger than use than you then. You would got with a kick that would taking me out quickly, but not harm me. A kick the jaw would do the job with minimum risk to both of us. At worst, I would have a broken jaw.”
“And all fighting instructors almost universally to attack and defend with the right side first.”
Mikoto complimented, “That is some good detective work.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Mikoto turned to River, as she commented, “I see why you like him.”
Nodoka turned to River, as she said, “So do I.”
Yurika turned to River, as she commented, “Me too.”
River turned to the three sisters, with a smile on her lips. She giggled at their responses. River then playfully teased, “I saw her first, girls.”
All the four women on the couch giggle a little at River's playful comment.”
As they calmed down, Lee thought, 'Now, to check if they want to ask any other questions.'
Lee said, “So girls, is there anything that you want to talk to me about? Seriously. Any questions on what a I wrote? And why wrote it that way?”
The four women on the couches turned to look at Lee.
Mikoto answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Not really. We understand why you named us, what you named us. Why you had us be related the way we are. Our hair colors. And why each of us has elemental abilities. And why we have that specific elemental ability.”
Lee responded, “Good. I am glad you understand. And unlike some people. Even though I gave you fire abilities Mikoto, I also gave you a strong sense of personal responsibility with them.”
Mikoto replied, “Yes. I am happy you did not make me into a pyromaniac.”
Lee stated, “I know. But, I admit I had some fun with you not using your powers, when the reader would expect you to do so.”
Mikoto said, “I know. We read your stories.”
Nodoka commented, “Unlike my sister, I do have a question. My one question is how are you holding up? Our parents explained what was going on, and how you will be punish. And we think it kind of sucks.”
Lee could see all three sisters nodding in agreement. She replied, “I know. But, it could be worse. Far, far worse.”
Nodoka bitterly agreed, “True.”
Yurika kindly said, “By the way, thanks for having us be loving sisters. Instead of making up all rivals to each other.”
Lee replied, “No problem. I see no point sibling rivalry.”
In response, the three sisters warmly smiled towards Lee.
Lee thought, 'Now, to get down to business.' She said, “Girls... Not to be rude. I know you are watching a movie with River. But, I need to talk to River in private. If it is okay with both you three, and River, if River were to leave me?
Nodoka said, “It is okay with us.”
Lee saw Yurika shrug, while Mikoto nodded once in agreement.
River happily commented, “I love to talk to you, Lee.” She mentally added, 'And do other things to you, as well.'
Lee requested, “Thanks, girls... Okay, River. I would like to talk to you outside?”
River responded, “That would be great... I happen to like the fresh air here.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It is refreshing.”
River turned to the sisters, as she said, “It was fun girls. We will have to do this again, sometime.”
Nodoka said, “Bye, River.”
Yurika said, “Talk to you, later.”
Mikoto said, “Yea. It is fun spending time with you.”
In response, River just smiled at them. She then turned back to Lee, as she stood up from the couch she was sitting in. As second after she was on her feet, she casually walked over to Lee.
When River reached Lee, both woman then turned, and exited the room, towards the front doors, in the entryway.
Meanwhile, as the sisters turned their attention back to the TV, Nodoka used her remote to turn back on the volume, as they continued watching the action movie they had on the TV.
(_)
A few seconds later, as River and Lee were about to reach the front doors to the mansion, they saw someone open the left door of the entrance.
The two women stopped, as they watched Yukio and Rebecca walking inside. With Rebecca closing the door behind her. The redheaded sisters were wearing a white t-shirts, white short skirts, white socks, and white tennis shoes. And each of the sisters was carrying a tennis racket in their hands.
It did not take a genius to figure out what the two sisters had been previously doing.
Lee thought, 'Where is the tennis court at?'
River verbally answered, “The tennis court is in the back of the mansion. On east end of the island. On the opposite side of the island to the shooting range. It is behind some brush, but there is a path leading to it. They probably just walked around front, so they could avoid the others, as they head to upstairs to get clean, and change their clothes.
Lee thought, 'Okay. Thanks for the answer, River. And they also likely walked around to the front to get some extra exercise.'
River replied, out loud, “Those are my thoughts, as well.”
River's comments caught the attention of Yukio and Rebecca. The two sisters stopped walking, as they turned their attention towards River and Lee.
Yukio said, “Good morning, girls.”
Rebecca commented, “Yea. We hope you both slept well.”
River said, “We did.”
Lee stated, “Yes. We did. And good morning to you two, as well.”
Yukio said, “We heard what happened last night. And we don't like what our parents are planning for you... Not that we can stop it from happening.”
Rebecca commented, “Yea. We both think is sucks.”
Lee responded, “Well, you are not the only ones that think that way. But, it could be worse.”
Yukio replied, “True.”
Rebecca quietly said, “Yea. It could be far, far worse.”
River thought, 'Those two would know. But, I better keep this conversation moving in the right direction.' River stated, “Either way, we do appreciate your concerns.”
Rebecca said, “Thank you, River. Also Lee, we haven't had the chance to yet. And we both wanted to thank you for the wonderful lives you have created for us.”
Yukio happily commented, “Yes. The years have been good to us, here on the island.”
Lee smiled towards the two redheaded sisters, as she happily said, “I am glad that some good has come from my actions.”
Rebecca commented, “More like a lot of good.”
Yukio stated, “Also, we want you to know that all of us. My sisters, and Akira's entire family, are on your side. It is just that our hands are figuratively tired on the matter. We cannot stop them. But, we are still here for you.”
Lee said, “I understand.”
Rebecca inquired, “Anyway, we have a question for you... Even with our weapons, and our memories... Which we try not to remember... Don't worry. We are okay... We could never figure out, in our previous lives, which one of us was Hansel, and who was Gretel.”
Yukio said, “We honestly don't know.”
Lee answered, “Considering in your previous lives that you two swap your identities, between each other, like clothing, I don't think any of us are going to figure out the answer to that question. Let's just be happy that part of your existence is over.”
Rebecca said, “Fair enough. I can go along with that.”
Yukio replied, “I agree.”
Lee commented, “Speaking of which... I do have a personal question for both of you.”
Yukio said, “Go ahead.”
Rebecca questioned, “Sure. What would you like to say?”
Lee asked, “Given your previous lives, is your personal romantic relationships, in your current lives, okay?”
Both sisters turned to each other, as they giggled.
Lee thought, with concern, 'That is not a good sign.'
River let out a laugh at Lee's thought.
Yukio and Rebecca then turned back to look at River, and Lee. Yukio answered, “Yes. We are fine in that department.”
Lee sighed in relief.
Rebecca said, “And the two of us are not into each other, in this life...” Her voice became more playful, as she joked, “Sarah and Molly are the only ones that do that, on this island.”
No one laughed at Rebecca's joke.
Rebecca thought, 'Tough crowd.'
River deadpanned, “Apparently.”
Rebecca went onto say, “Though, we don't have sex with our sisters. The five of us have had sex before. And we use condoms. Though, what we do is pretty tame, when compared to other people we know. It is nothing anything to kinky. And it is nothing compared to what you are about to go through tonight.”
Lee stated, “It is good that you used protection. And I hope you are able to stay friends with those you slept with.”
Rebecca said, “Of course.”
Yukio asked, in a girlish tone of voice, “Can you keep a secret?”
River replied, “Sure.”
Lee said, “Absolutely.”
Yukio stated, “Well, pretty much my sisters and I have individually slept with Yukio, Mikoto, and Nodoka, over the course of the last few years. And that sleeping with a gender bender is fun.”
River commented, “That is an understatement. But, it is more fun to be the gender bender in that situation.”
Lee remained silent, as Rebecca and Yukio looked at each other, while they giggled. They then turned back to River and Lee. Rebecca admitted, “Well, to be honest, we have all use the magical man packets on occasion. And as we said. We used condoms.”
River said, “As long as you are careful in bed, I don't see a problem.”
Yukio and Rebecca smiled at River, as Rebecca replied, “Thank you.”
Lee rhetorically thought, 'Why does none of this surprise me?'
River said, “Because you know them too well.”
Lee casually commented, “And you say you don't do anything too kinky.”
Rebecca playfully retorted, “I guess, kinky, is a subjective word.”
Everyone giggled a little at Rebecca's comment.
As they all calmed down, Rebecca happily thought, 'That is was a good comeback.'
River agreed, “Yes. It was.”
Yukio asked, “Lee. Since it is just us girls. I wonder. Do you have monthly periods, like us?”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as she calmly answered, “Yes. For several years, now. And it is likely one of the reasons your parents, and their friends are not just going to torture me all day and night, until finally killing me.”
Yukio cautiously replied, “Good point.”
Lee mentioned, “But, I still don't find that dealing with such problems is a valid excuse to being a bitch.”
Yukio said, “I agree.”
Rebecca commented, “I am with you on this.”
River stated, “So am I.”
Rebecca commented, “You know. When this is all over. I hope we have a chance to sleep with you, Lee.”
Yukio agreed, “Yes. We would like to do that with you. And we promise. Nothing painful.”
Lee thought, 'They are adults. They are clearly more mature than most of their parents. So, I will think about it.'
River had to hold back a giggle, at Lee's thought. She mentally reflected, 'I have to agree that these two are very mature adults. And Lee, you did a good job of bringing them back and giving them much better lives than they had in their previous lives.'
Lee smiled, as she politely offered, “Ladies. You both have been so kind, that I probably wouldn't mind spreading my legs for either of you, anytime. But, we will have to see how the coming days play out.”
Yukio and Rebecca smiled, as Yukio said, “Thanks.”
Rebecca said, “We look forward to it.”
River just let out a laugh. She then turned to Lee, as she said, “I won't mind if you did do that.”
Lee turned to River, as she said, “Thanks.”
Lee and River then turned back to look at Yukio and Rebecca. Lee said, “Now girls, if you don't mind. I have some personal matters to talk with River, in private.”
Yukio said, “No problem.”
Rebecca replied, “Have a nice day.”
Rebecca and Yukio then walked away from them, and further into their home, towards the left staircase, to head up stairs, to their bedrooms, and bathrooms, to get some showers, and some fresh clothing on.
Meanwhile, both River and Lee turned towards the doors to the outside. River was first to reach the threshold, and she opened the left door for Lee.
As Lee approached the door, she thought, 'It isn't customary for the man... Or, I guess someone who was once a man, to hold the door for the lady.'
River stated, “Actually. We are both women at the moment. And you have been so kind, that I will be the man in this situation.”
Lee stopped beside River. She turned to River, as she complimented, “Yes. And you make one hell of a man. And not just your male form. But, also the way you acted as your alias, Sam.”
River turned to Lee, as she smiled. She said, “Thank you, Lee. That is the most mannish compliment I have ever received.” She mentally added, 'And to think. She has no clue how big I am, do there, when I am a man.'
Lee returned River's smile, as she replied, “You're welcome.” She then walked passed River.
When Lee reached the outside, she stopped, so she would wait for River to catch up up with her.
While waiting for River, Lee saw that is was another sunny, warm day on the tropical island they were on, located among the archipelago between the Pacific Ocean and the Indian Ocean.
Lee thought, 'Another perfect day in paradise.'
River followed behind Lee, with her gently closing the door behind her.
When River reached Lee, she was to Lee's left side. River turned to Lee, as she said, “Too true. Now, let's take a walk.”
Lee turned to River, as she playfully replied, “I thought you would never ask.”
River giggled a little, while they looked in front of themselves, and they began walking again.
As they continued walking, the two women occasionally looked at each other.
Lee commented, “Given their past lives, I am happy to see that Rebecca and Yukio are so well mannered, and mature.”
River said, “What can I say? You are very good at what you do.”
Lee mentioned, “Thank you. And they clearly got their manners from Rock”
River responded, “I agree. Though, keep in mind that Dutch, Janet, and Benny, are also well manner people.”
Lee agreed, “That is true.”
River used her left hand to point in a direction to their left, towards the treeline. She commented, “Now, come with me, this way. I know a private part of the beach that no one rarely goes to, that is very nice to visit. The quickest way to get there is a path, through the treeline.” She then dropped her left hand back down to her side.
While they faced the Lagoon bay, River then took a left, towards the treeline.
Lee replied, “Okay.” She then turned with River.
Lee walked beside River, as they continued at a casual pace. And Lee paid attention to where River was going, as they made their way towards a path, near the treeline of the grassy field they were walking on.
(_)
Ten minutes later, they reached a secluded part of the beach of the island.
As they walked down the beach, River was to Lee's left side, with the water to Lee's right side, several feet away from them.
Lee found the scenery around them to very picturesque. With yellow sand, on the beach. And palm trees giving them ample shade from the sun in the sky. While the waves did not come up to where the shadows of the trees cast upon the sand, on the part the shore they were on. Allowing for the sand to be drier, and not cling to their shoes.
The two women continued to look around them, as they made their was, casually down the shore, while they talked, in english.
River calmly commented, “I found at times like this. When it is low tide, it is quite beautiful here. Very peaceful.”
Lee replied, “I agree. It is very lovely... A perfect place, setting, and mood, to talk about things, in private.”
River agreed, “Quite true...”
Lee quietly said, “You know it is not that bad?”
River asked, “What is not that bad?... You mind is wondering all of the place. I am not sure what you are referring to.”
Lee giggled. She then said, “Fair enough. I was commenting on the fact that the punishment they decided for me is not really that bad. It is not really rape. Because I am going to go along with it...”
“It is just going to be really rough sex... I was honestly expecting it to be a lot worse. I expect, that if I was caught, that right now, I would be experiencing levels of pain and torture that I thought was not possible... Instead, I going to become the island bicycle.”
River bitter thought, 'Yea. Almost everyone will have a ride on you...' She then said, “Well, they consider that you are now you a girl. With all the problems accompanying being female. That being a girl is part of your punishment. Sort of like in your stories, when they found out that Chang was female.”
Lee shrugged, as she replied, “That is what I figured, as well.” She thought, 'And thanks for not telling them the truth on how I love being female. Even with the associated problems.'
River said, “Yes.” She mentally reflected, 'Nice hidden meaning, Lee. By thinking that after saying what you did. If someone was listening in. They would think I was commenting on what you just said. Instead of what you just thought...'
'It looks, more and more, like your scheming mind is back. And that is one of the best parts of you, that I find attractive about you, Lee. Speaking of which, I am going to have to talk to you about our talk we that had at the campfire, several nights ago.'
But, before River could inquire about that night, Lee stated, “And you know what. Even though they are annoying, unconformable, and messy. After years of going through with them every month. I found periods to not be that bad. They can make me edgy, slightly moody, and cause me some pain, in the form of cramps. But, they don't make me a bitch.”
River thought, 'It might be best to deal with the subject at hand, first.' She commented, “Sometimes, that is all it takes to make some women into bitches... For a time.”
Lee shrugged, as she said, “I guess so.”
River complimented, “It just means you have better self control than some women.”
Lee stated, “I believe in trying not be mean on account of my personal problems.”
River kindly commented, “Yes. And that positive trait shows.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
River responded, “You're welcome. And, by the way, thanks for making it so I don't have to go through having periods anymore.”
Lee cracked a grin, as she replied, “You're welcome, as well. And at least, for myself, the tradeoff is no more facial hair, which I don't have to shave off, daily. And given the way I wrote the rules of gender bending, I don't even have to worry about body hair, on my female form, except for the hair on my head, and the hair on my crotch and my genitalia. No shaving legs, and armpits. Girl, did that make my female friends at the village, jealous.”
River giggled, for a few seconds. She then said, “I bet. And I can see the tradeoffs, considering I wore that fake beard for a while. And it got itchy sometimes.”
Lee commented, “I will tell you a little secret. If a man stops shaving. After three or four days, the hairs on their face get so long, they start to turn inward, and their entire face becomes very itchy.”
River replied, “I don't doubt that.”
Lee said, “Though, after a few weeks, the hair becomes long enough that the hair stops turning inward, and you got a mustache, sideburns, goatee, or just a full beard. That is why you don't see any men with facial hair between a five o'clock shadow, and styled facial hair.”
River commented, “Yes. That makes sense.” She thought, 'I might as well ask you one of the big questions. Then, I will get to the that night.' She asked, “So, how did you end up cursed?”
Lee answered, “It is a long story. And a funny one at that.”
River said, “I bet. It seems it is always a long story with you. Both figuratively and literally.”
Lee replied, “Yes. That seems to be the case with me.” She thought, 'Well, long story short. I don't really want to get into it. But, Garibaldi and I had to dive into the spring and drowned girl to save Garcia Lovelace. Yea. We landed in Jusenkyo a little while before Garcia. And we just exited the springs, when we heard him, or now her, fall in. And float with her stomach down.'
'I realized it was Garcia. But, I could not stop Garibaldi from jumping in. And we both took the plunge save Garcia. And I warned Garibaldi about the springs, beforehand. He even knew about the Ranma Half series. Still, Garibaldi went in anyway.'
'And we were about to rescue Garcia. And she is fine. Still, I could have come up with a plan in time, to save Garcia, that would not have gotten us cursed... Well, Garibaldi won't have been cursed. I first wanted to talk to the guide, before I took the plunge.'
'But, because Garibaldi jumped in, I had to, as well. Because I figured what was going to happen, happened. And a person in a six year old body would need help pool out someone twice their size, in time to save that person. And I was right. Also, in helping to save Garcia, I might have helped my issues with the Lovelace maids after my blood, over this whole matter.'
'That being said. Well, thought. While Garcia was a cursed to turn into a teenage girl, that looks like her sister, at her natural age. Both Garibaldi and I ended up in the being cursed with the bodies of six your old girls.'
River has to suppress a giggle, at the mental images she was getting, from both Lee's memories, and her own imagination.
Lee went onto think, 'I then used the magic ring I had, which fit my smaller finger, to lock myself in my current form. Later on, we went to the amazon village. Then, those two betrayed me, and had me capture by the amazons. With them taking the reality device that I had stolen from Rock. Though, I am not sore with them about that. For reasons I will inform you about, in a minute.'
'Anyway, a little while later, I talked to Cologne in private. And she informed me what being locked in a six year old girl would mean for me, long term. I after that, I agreed with her, that she was good reasons for brainwashing me. Then, with my permission, she used some magical shampoo to seal my memories... That is until Ranma unlocked them. And I am okay with what happened. It was a good second childhood. And I am better person for the experience.'
'Also, one point of good news is with the magic ring on my finger, I am now locked as a girl, and I am cured of my cancer. And even with the monthly periods, I have never felt better in my life.'
'And another example of good news is by saving Garcia, whom has clearly kept our meeting a secret from the maids. When Roberta and Fabiola learn the truth about my help in saving Garcia, I should be fine with them.'
River cracked a grin, as she commented, “Of course...” She thought, 'Hidden meaning again, Lee... Nice... Still, I think it is time to ask Lee the big question on my mind...'
River stated, “There is something I need to talk to you about, Lee...”
Lee calmly said, “Yes... At this point. There is no reason for us to keep secrets. We know each other too well.”
River calmly agreed, “Yes. We do. It was about our talk during that night, by the campfire...”
Lee stopped walking, as she turned her body towards River. She calmly questioned, “When you said that you loved me?”
River stopped walking, with her turning her body towards Lee, as well. They were only a few feet from each other.
There was silence between the two for a few seconds. River then replied, “Yes.”
Lee questioned, in a confused tone of voice, “Did you mean what you said?... I mean how, did that happen?...”
River look Lee in the black haired woman's eyes, as she gave Lee a warm smile. She casually answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Lee, I got to know you, silly... I got to know you. Both in your mind, and your actions. And I liked what I saw.”
River then took a few steps closer, until their two noses were less than an inch apart, with Lee only being a few inches higher than River. River calmly inquired, “The question is, do you love me?”
Lee returned River's warm smile, as she teased, “All you have to do is read my mind.”
River did. And her own smile widened, as she hugged Lee around her shoulders, while she deeply kissed Lee on the black haired woman's lips.
In response, Lee hugged River, as well. And she returned River's affections, in their kissing.
They remained like this for several seconds, as they stood on in sand of the beach, with the wind lightly wetting them with saltwater, from the nearby sea.
Everything was fine, until Lee realized something important. She quickly broke their kiss. But, they stayed embraced, in each others arms,
Lee said, in a worried tone of voice, “Oh no... I really am going to sleep with you... The casino owner's girlfriend... Chang's girlfriend... What about Chang?”
River responded, in a soothing tone of voice, “Chang and I have an understanding.” She smiled, as she continued, “We will just share you. Besides. As you said. This is not the first time you have known someone to share. So, relax. Because this is going to be fun for both of us.”
Lee replied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Okay.”
They kiss again for several seconds.
Then, a thought occurred to River. As the broke their kiss, while they continued to embrace.
River asked, “So, before we start. I have to ask. Are you a virgin?”
Lee coyly answered, “It depends on how you look at it. But, to answer your question, my hymen is still intact.”
River's smiled, as she said, “So, I get to pop your cherry?”
Lee returned River's smile, as she respond, “Yes. And I have complete trust that you will be gentle.”
River replied, “Don't worry. I will. And I consider it an honor to take your virginity.” She then leaned back down, and slightly tighten their embrace, as River rested her head on Lee's right shoulder.
River's face was facing Lee's neck. And River sniffed Lee. She then thought, 'She is ready.' River then leaded back up, as she relax her embrace, with Lee following her lead.
River look Lee in her face. She smirked, as she said, “But, let's have some fun first.”
Lee inquired, “What combination are you thinking of?”
River answered, with a bit of excitement in her voice, “Girl on girl. Boy on girl. And finally girl on girl. again.”
Lee face took a lecherous expression, as she responded, with a bit of excitement in her tone of voice, “That works for me.”
The two women began to disrobe, and they put their clothing into a single pile, by the bushes.
They then laid down beside each other, on the sand that was shaded by the trees. Allowing then to enjoy the sea breeze on their naked skin, without the sand being too hot for them enjoy what they were doing.
On the sand, the two women laid parallel with the tree line. With Lee to River's right. And the tree line was to Lee's right side.
River gently placed her right hand on top of Lee's crotch. She immediately noticed something. She giggled, as she said, “I see you shaved.” She mentally added, 'Because, I know you are not crazy enough to give yourself a waxing there.'
Lee joked, “Yea. The bush look was just not doing anything for me. And I see you are kind of smooth down there.”
River let out a laugh. She said, “Yea. I know the feeling. You cannot have bush in a bikini.”
Lee agreed, “True. During one of our bathhouse cleanings, on that hunt for myself, I saw that you shave down there, as well.”
River stated, “I just don't believe in putting anything hot on such sensitive areas.”
Lee responded, in a supportive and comforting tone of voice, “I fully agree. And not to sound insulting. But, you have more experience at doing this. So, I will leave you to get things started.”
River continued to keep her right hand resting on top of Lee's crotch, with Lee not moving at all. She replied, “It is okay. Here is what I thought we might do. I am not planning on putting anything into you just yet. But, it is best we pop your cherry, and get that out of the way, because doing so stings, you will be sore down there for a little while. Also, there will be a little blood.”
Lee said, “Like you, I am not stranger to blood down there. And I see what you are getting at. You don't want problems to arise, later.”
River stated, “Exactly, So, when I get to the point where I will be putting something... Big... Into you. You will no longer be sore. And you will be ready.”
Lee playfully questioned, “Does your genius know no bounds?”
River giggled. She the answered, “Apparently not... Now, when you say you are ready, I am going to stick a finger in, and pulled again the hymen, tearing it. I will make it quick as possible. I want you to say you are ready, instead of just think it.”
Lee replied, “Fair enough.”
River said, “Afterward, we will wait a minute, and then we still start having some fun. And when I change, you will already wet and ready for me. Now, let me know when you are ready...”
Lee was silent for several seconds. She then said, “I am ready.”
River moved her right hand slightly down on Lee's closed crotch. Lee slightly opened her legs, to give River more room, as River slowly, and gently stuck her middle finger into Lee. River then jerked upwards with her finger.
Lee immediately felt the sting, as she quietly said, “Ouch.”
As River slid her middle finger out of Lee, she stated, in a comforting manner, “Don't worry. The pain is minor, and the soreness and blood will be gone in a little while.”
Lee instinctively used laid both her hands on top of her crotch, and over River's right hand.
In response, River just smiled.
While still feeling the sting sensation slowing decrease, Lee replied, “No problem. I have had worse. And so have you. Just give me a minute.”
River said, “No problem.”
Lee commented, “You know, when I wrote that scene between Rock and River, in book two of my stories, I didn't realize it would sting this much. But truly, I have had worse insect bites from yellow flies and horse flies, than what I just felt.”
River calmly replied, “I know. Still, take the time you need.”
Lee softly said, “Thanks.”
About a minute later, Lee felt the pain mostly subside, with the sore still lingering, though, at such a minimum level, that she could ignore it.
Lee did not care to check to see if the bleeding had stopped, because she knew that friction of activities they had planned would likely reopen the tear a few times.
Lee removed her hands from her crotch, and River's right hand, as she said, “I am ready for us to continue.”
River purred, “Good.” River then used her right hand to gently massage the outer genitalia of Lee's crotch.
A several seconds of doing so, Lee moaned, “You missed your calling as a masseuse.”
River said, “Thank Inara. She is the master that this. I am just the student.”
Lee giggled, as she moaned a little more. Between giggles, Lee asked, “Did you ask for pointers? Or, did you just read her mind?”
River replied, “Both.”
River could sense Lee was ready for the next step.
River requested, “Spread you legs slightly.”
Lee quietly moaned, as she did so.
River then sat up, and she moved up, to where she was sitting on her knees, on the sand, while facing Lee.
With her right knee a few inched from Lee's crotch, between Lee's legs, and her left knee on the other side of Lee's right.
River also leaned over Lee's chest.
River changed her right hand's position, to where her palm was facing up, as she used her right fingers to continue to rub around Lee's slit, and clitoris.
Meanwhile, she used her left hand to help balance herself, against Lee's breasts.
She alternated in gently massaging each of Lee's breasts.
These additional pleasurable sensations made Lee moan even slightly louder.
Lee had her eyes closed, as she enjoyed the sensations being done to her, while the sea breeze blew onto both women.
Lee smiled, as she teased, “I thought you did plan on sticking anything in me... Just yet.”
River smiled, as she said, “This is not entering you. Just rubbing around the entrance, while teasing you to let me inside.”
Lee complimented, “You are good at this foreplay stuff.”
River said, “Well, foreplay is a big thing for women.”
Lee moaned, as she pointed out, “I can see why... And done right, foreplay can be fun for everyone involved”
River agreed, “Very true.” She mentally added, 'Now, for some fun for both of us.'
River then leaned down on to of Lee. As their chests hugged each other, River hugged Lee.
Lee knew what to do next, as she returned the hug, while their legs intertwined.
The two women then began to roll in the sand, while using each other's upper legs to rub into the other's crotch, in gentle rhythmic motions.
After a few minutes of this, the two women stopped kissing, as they began to slowly moan, louder and louder. The moans soon turned into screams of ecstasy, as they
both climaxed within a minute of each other.
As they came to their senses, River found that she was laying on top of Lee.
And as the excitement of the moment faded, Lee commented, “Something just occurred to me. We are getting sand up in the most interesting of places.”
River said, “Not to worry. A hand held shower nozzle will wash it all out. Like the one in our shower, near our bedroom.”
Lee smiled, as she teased, “You already played with that? Didn't you?”
River grinned, as she playfully replied, “Maybe.”
Lee commented, “Still, that is good to know.”
River said, “Yes. Now, for the next part... Untangle you legs, and spread them.
Lee responsible, “Okay.”
A few second later, they had untangled their legs, with Lee on her back, with her legs spread.
Between Lee's legs was River, sitting on her knees.
Lee leaned up to look at River, as River looked back at her.
River smiled, as she said, “Lee, I am about to prove Revy wrong on something.”
Lee questioned, “That being?”
River answered, “That the missionary position can be pleasurable for the woman. And you are about to find out how much fun that it can be for the woman.”
Lee playfully teased, “I look forward to finding out.”
Lee watched as River sneeze, and instantly changed into a nude man.
Lee complimented, “Damn. You are ripped as a man.”
River said, in his masculine voice, “Thank you... Now, are you ready for me to enter you. Because, I am ready to go.”
Lee leaned up a little further to see that River was right.
Lee leaned back down a little, but not to the sane, as she said, “I am more than ready... Come on in.”
River leaned over Lee, as he entered her love canal.
As this happened, Lee exhaled, and enjoyed the new sensation.
While this happen, River place both his hand, in the sand, to the sides of Lee's shoulders.
River did not move, as he allowed Lee to get use to the feeling of someone inside her.
Lee slowly said, in a soft tone of voice, “This is a... new experience for me.”
River inquired, “I thought you may have done something like this during the time loop, when you used those girl packets that Revy and Rock had?... Oh, that is right... You only had your hands.”
Lee sheepishly said, “Yes. But, that is the past...” She voice turned more seductive, as she continued, “And I am so enjoying the present.”
River agreed, “Same here.”
Lee leaned back. As her head hit the sand, Lee then brought her legs up and wrapped them around River's back. Though, Lee was careful not to bring River down on top of her.
River then began to slowly move in an out of her.
As this went on, Lee casually asked, “I was wonderingly. I know it is tiring to climax as a guy. So, will this cause you problems, for your third act?”
River didn't stop, as he answered, “No. It is not so much tiring, as the equipment doesn't want to work afterward, unlike female parts. But, I found that even after doing it immediately as a guy, when I change into a woman, I am instantly ready to go back at it as a woman. And by the time I am finished as a woman, when I change to a man, my male parts are reading to go.”
Lee said, “That is nice.”
River cracked a grin, as he said, “I know... Now, just relax and go with the pace I am setting. We both know the gender form I have, at the moment, wants to speed up. But, this is about your enjoyment, more than it is mine.”
Lee began to relax, as she said, “I disagree. You should be having as much fun as me. And you are doing fine.”
River thought, 'Oh Lee... You are so considerate of others... Manipulative... Yes... But, still genuinely concerned for others... That is why I fell in love with you...”
These two remained silent for the next few minutes, as Lee enjoyed the new experiences she was feeling.
Soon, Lee climaxed, with River forcing himself not to climax, until Lee did so first. And when Lee did climax, River does so also, while inside Lee.
As this happened, River lowered himself onto Lee.
Lee smiled, as she hugged River with her arms, while keeping her legs around River's lower back.
This went on for a minute, while Lee continued to feel River inside her, as she thought, 'A woman could get use to this.'
While resting his head against Lee's, River said, “I know.”
Lee thought, 'We will have to do this more often.'
River said, “Any time you want. Now, please let me go. So, I get up. And we can continue this.”
Lee poured into River's right ear, “Sure...”
Lee then let go up River with both her arms and legs.
River leaned up, onto his knees, between Lee's legs, and by doing so, he exited out of Lee. River then sneezed, and changed back into a woman.
Lee was still mildly delirious, as she said, “You were right. The missionary position can be fun for a woman.”
River agreed, in her feminine voice, “Yes. And let's go back to the way we were doing it, as two woman.
Lee replied, in a very relaxed tone of voice, “Sure. It would be a good way to taper off this wonderful mood.”
River responded, “I know. And then we will use the saltwater to clean ourselves. Afterward, we will watch some movies with the Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto. Then, we will have some lunch, by me sneaking in and getting something for the both of us. We will eat in our bedroom.”
Lee said, “That sounds like a good plan. But, what about the others' enhanced sense of smell. It is not going to take a genius to figure out who I was with. And I get the feeling that Revy is not in the mood to have sloppy seconds.”
River giggled. She then answered, “Not to worry. The saltwater will get most of the smell off of us. And the rest is not worth being troubled about.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
River leaned down, and the two women took their time, as they made love once again.
Over the next twenty-two minutes, they were intertwined with each other, as they brought the each other to climax, a few times.
When they were through, they stood up, and took a few steps into the water.
They walked into the water, until they were about a foot deep in the water. Both of them then used the saltwater to splash between their legs and inner thighs, to clean themselves off.
A minute later, they were finished, and they walked back into the shade, near where they had made love, where left their clothes in a single pile, by some bushes.
Next, they spent a few minutes standing in the sand, as they allowed the breeze to air dry their private parts.
When they were dry, they put back on their clothing, and casually headed back to the mansion, while each of them was gently holding the other woman's hand. With both of them enjoying the afterglow of what they had just experienced together.
(_)
After Lee and River returned to the mansion, they spent the rest of the morning watching movies in the entertainment room, with Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika.
Not wanting to cause any possible problems, at lunch time, Lee headed for the guest bedroom that she and River shared, together.
Meanwhile, River when to the kitchen, and she brought food and drinks, for Lee and herself, to the guest bedroom they shared.
After lunch, River and Lee spent most of the afternoon playing five card poker, like they use too. With them using some playing cards and some poker chips, which were kindly provided by the Lagoon sisters, when River discreetly asked for those items.
As the two women played poker, they found that in playing card, they found their situation eerily reminiscent, of when Lee was playing cards, with River, at the Rats Nest and Devil's Hotel, while River was, at the time, pretending to be Sam.
Also, they watched some TV, from the island's satellite system, on their bedroom TV.
Later that evening, around eight PM, during sunset, River went for a walk, alone, to clear her head. So, she could be more watchful at ten PM, when Lee's first punishment would happen.
Though, River did inform Lee of this beforehand. And Lee supported River in doing so. And River said that she would meet Lee back at their bedroom, within an hour.
While River had already ate supper, Lee had waiting until eight, for the kitchen to clear, so she could get something to eat, as well.
The night light in the kitchen was one, near the refrigerator, and that was plenty of light for Lee to see with. To get what she wanted from the frige.
Given that River already secretly provided Lee with lunch. Lee did not want to impose on River's good grace. And River found Lee intentions to be cute, for her to be so considerate of River's feelings.
As Lee walked up to the kitchen refrigerator, she heard a female voice, behind her, say, “I suggest you eat something light. Eating heavy foods, a few hours before sex can cause problems.”
Lee turned around to see Akira standing six feet front of her.
Lee said, “Hello Akira.”
Akira casually walked up to Lee, as she said, “Hello Lee. Except for spending time with my daughters, and River, I noticed you pretty much avoided most of us today.” She then came to a stop two feet from Lee
Lee admitted, “Yes. I did.”
Akira responded, “That is understandable... Revy was starting to wonder if you were going to ditch your punishment. Not that I would not hold it against you. Still, if River had not come to supper, with her telling us that you were in your bedroom, we might have gone looking for you. If that had happened, it would have been far worse for you.”
Lee said, “I can see what you are saying. I would like to thank you for not wanting to be a part of that punishment.
Akira stated, “I consider such actions beneath me... Though...”
Without warning, with even Lee's precognition not alerting her in time, Akira swiftly used her right fist to punch Lee squarely in the left side of Lee's jaw.
Akira's blow knocked Lee against the front of the refrigerator, with Lee then slowing down the floor. Though, the punch did not knock Lee out.
As Lee sat on the floor, and rubbing her jaw, Akira looked own at her. As Lee looked up at Akira's face.
Akira flatly said, in cold tone of voice, “Let us be honest. You deserved that, as payback from me, for what you did to me, and whom you made me kill, back in Roanapur. By making me kill that mentally challenged man, Johnny, and then driving me temporarily insane.”
Lee stopped rubbing her jaw. She got up, as she thought, 'Well, there goes my appetite. Though, I think I will be fine. My jaw is not broken, and it will likely just be mildly bruised for a few days. Also, I can understand why you did that, Akira. And given your reasons for hitting me in the first place, I cannot really justify hitting you back.'
Lee stood up straight, as she looked Akira in her eyes. She said, in a sincere tone of voice, “I deserve worse for what I did to you and that man. And the others.”
Akira stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Yes You're right. You do. But, I realize that many people here deserve horrible things to happen to them, for what they did. But, nothing has happened to them. And truth be told, except for that, you gave me a great life, so I wish you luck.”
Lee said, “Thank you. And you are not upset about that night I wrote where Revy, Sawyer, and Shenhua took your virginities, as both a man and a woman?”
Akira replied, in a more relaxed tone of voice, “No. I learned a lot that night. Lessons that you are likely to learn in the coming nights. So, I am not that upset with you on that. And you're welcome.”
Lee inquired, “I have a question for you, Natsuru, and Ranma?”
Akira shrugged, “Sure. What is it?”
Lee said, “Over the years... Both during the time loop, and when I was Dongmei. I have occasionally had a dream where I am with you three, and I have a psychotic break, where I cut myself, and almost attack you, personally, Akira. I would not have asked, but I vaguely remember having shallow cuts on my arm while I was in hiding. A little while before the time loop. With those cuts being fully healed before the time loop happened to us.”
“But I don't remember much about the experience. Nor, how I got those cuts. Though, given the cuts healed, without scaring, I did not pay much attention to the mystery...”
“Especially, since I had other, more important things on my mind.”
“Still, do you have any answers to this mystery of mine?”
Akira grimly thought, 'I have to tell her...'
Akira said, in a sad tone of voice, “That is because it was not a dream. The three of us drugged you. And we learned how messed up you were. You did have a psychotic break. You did cut your own arm. And you did threaten me. But, the three of us, Ranma, Natsuru, and myself, we were able to talk you down. And you left for your room to sleep off the drug.” She thought, 'I will leave out that Melvin was there. Because he nothing to do with this. And he is in no way responsible for what happened.'
Lee shrugged, as she replied, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, that figures.”
Akira inquired, in a confused tone of voice, “You're not angry?”
Lee answered, in an emotionally tired tone of voice, “No... I am not... I am just to emotionally burnt out right now to muster the anger... Besides, as everyone pointed out... I have done worse.”
Akira responded, “Yes. You have... By the way, we did check out that series, Breaking Bad. It is a good series... Tragic, but good.”
Lee took a few steps closer to Akira. As Lee came to a stop, she leaned her face closer to Akira's face, to where there were on a few inches between the two women's nose.
Though, Akira was still far enough away, to see Lee smile a slasher smile, with a crazed look developing her eyes.
Lee held her crazed expression, as she stated, in a sadistically sweet tone of voice, “And to think... Somewhere in the multiverse, that actually happened. I hope, at some level, you realize that are you just as bad as me for enjoying someone else's misfortune.”
Lee and Akira remained silent for a few seconds, as Lee saw confusion in Akira's eyes.
Lee maintained her crazy look, as she continued, with her voice becoming more broken with each passing word, “So you, of all people have not yet figured it out... Everybody is a nature sadist... We just want to see people hurt, and bring pain to them. Take for example of what is about to happen to me. You think this is about justice. This is about pleasure, and revenge, at my expense... Plain and simple... Story of my entire life... Bwahahahahaha!”
Akira's eyes widened as she looked at the maniacally laughing Lee. She thought, 'Lee has a point there, but his... No, her sanity is starting to break. I experience this first hand, and there is only one way to stop her from going over the edge.
Akira took a stop closer to Lee, and she hugged the maniacally laughing Lee.
Lee slowly stopped laughing, as she began sobbing.
Akira let Lee lean on her head, on Akira's right shoulder, for the next minute, while they stood in silence.
As Lee collected herself, she lean leaned back up, from Akira, with Akira letting go of the black haired woman.
The two women looked at each other.
Akira asked, “Feeling better?”
Lee quietly said, “Yea.”
Akira commented, “Don't worry. We have all been there.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Akira commented, “By the way, we also watched copy of the very long Live Action Black Lagoon series you tricked us into buying.”
Lee asked, “How was it?”
Akira calmly replied, “Very good.” She thought, 'I guess we are all sadists. Because, I did enjoy that series, as well. But, if we admitted this to ourselves, we would all likely got insane, like Lee almost just did.'
Lee commented, “I will have to watch it sometime.”
Akira stated, “Well, River told us. The next time we met, after returning from Mars Dome One. That she and Chang has a copy of their own. I guess Mal and the other told them about that series. And Chang just had to have a copy. Not that I blame him. Actually, I respect him for that. Though, if you don't have time on the island for it, you can watch their copies.”
Lee said, “Either way, I look forward series.”
Akira politely offered, “So, would you like me to help you fix some supper?”
Lee replied, “Sure.”
Akira said, “Okay. Also, as I suggested. Given what you are doing in a few hours. You need to eat light. I think a salad would best. With some lemonade.”
Lee said, “That sounds good.”
Akira commented, “Also, along with not eating heavy foods. You don't want eat spicy food, nor consume carbonated drinks, before sex.”
Lee deadpanned, “Dare I ask why?”
Akira explained, “Because, as a woman, when you have something thrust into you, back and forth. Even if it is in your vagina. Doing so applies pressure to the rest of your abdomen. And if you have a digestive system filled with gas, while having sex, you are going to belch and fart like no tomorrow.”
In response to Akira's comments, Lee could not help but giggle a little, for a few seconds.
Akira thought, 'Good. She is in a better mood. Now, to help fix her something to eat.'
As Lee calmed down, she said, “Let me guess. You learned this from experience?”
Akira responded, “Yea. It involved a mexican buffet bar, and some beer, when we were first got together. And then we attempted to have a pleasurable night at a hotel... The attempt and aftermath was not pretty.”
Lee cracked a grin, as she said, “I bet.”
Akira offered, “Now, let me help you get some supper.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Akira then helped Lee fix a salad and some lemonade for supper. And the two of them talked for the next half hour, as Lee ate her meal. When Lee finished her dinner, she cleaned up after herself, and the two of them left for different parts of the mansion.
With Akira heading to see her family, and friends, while Lee headed towards the bedroom she shared with River.
(_)
Around an hour and a half later, it was five minutes before ten PM, and time for Lee's first session, for her punishment.
River had finished leading Lee downstairs into the basement of the mansion. River was wearing the same clothing she had on earlier that day.
On the other hand, Lee just wore slippers and a bathrobe.
When they reached the floor of the basement, River said, “This way.”
River then turned, and started walking, with Lee walking behind her.
Fortunately, there was plenty of lighting to see with, as they made their way down into, and through the basement of the Lagoon mansion.
As they walked, River stated, “Do not show fear. It will only make them more hungry for you. And a few bites are better than a frenzy.”
Lee thought, 'I understand.'
River replied, “Good.”
Lee thought, 'This place is pretty deep into the ground. Though, I never did write exactly how deep the basement was to this mansion.'
River said, “I know. It is interesting. But, we will have to discuss that, later.”
Lee thought, 'I look forward to it.'
They soon approached a large wooden cellar door, with a crescent top, that lead into the Lagoon S&M dungeon.
The door was open, towards the inside, to their left, and the two women walked into the room.
Once they cleared the door, into the other room, the two women came to a stop, as they stood side by side. With River to Lee's left side.
Lee looked around, and she saw that the walls were of gray colored stone. The room itself was circular, with diameter of six feet. The ceiling was a brown wooden and domed shape, with the very top of the ceiling behind twenty-five feet high.
The room was lit by yellow light bulbs, set around the room, every six feet, where the stone met wooden ceiling. And the light sockets were made to look like wall mounted gas lamps.
There were electrical wall sockets around the room, as well.
Lee then noticed that there were pairs of chains dangling from the ceiling, after various pointed in the room.
Lee also saw a few cushions benches around the room, and even a queen sized bed in the back of the room. Above the bed was an analog clock face mounted on the wall, that was a foot in diameter, with the time showing that it was nine fifty-six on the dot.
There was a small stereo system, on the nightstand, by the bed, on the bed's right side.
On the left side of the bed, there was a bathroom sink with hot and cold running water. There was a slowed cabinet under the sink. To the right of the sink, mounted to the wall, was a small towel rack, with a hand towel draped on it. And there western style toilet to the left of the sink, with a toilet paper dispenser mounted to the wall, between the toilet and sink, with a full roll of toilet paper on dispenser.
To the left of the small rack with the hand towel, was a small shower stall, that was three feet in diameter, which was open. The stall was enclosed by a plastic curtain that went around on a brass ring, mounted to the wall. With faucet mounted to the wall, when to a hand held shower sprayer that was hooked on the wall of the shower. And there was a drain below the shower, with a raised lip around the shower, to keep the water from spreading out of the shower.
On the right side of the shower were a three horizontal large towel racks, with another three large towel racked below, with large towels hanging off all six racks.
Lee guessed that toiletries were inside the small cabinet below the sink.
And there was a grated drain in the middle of the floor. When Lee saw the floor, she noted that the floor sloped down to the center of the room, where the drain was.
To the wall to Lee's right was lined shelves and hooks that were filled with S&M and sex toys. From whips, to chains, to bondage straps, to chains, to dildos, to vibrators, to various other accessories.
There were even a box of condoms, packets of magical instant man powder, and towels of various sizes, on a couple of the shelves.
Then, Lee saw that the five Lagoon parents were already there. And they had noticed River and Lee walked into the room, as well.
Dutch jokingly said, “Ah, the lady of the hour has finally arrive... And from the clock on the wall. Not a minute too soon.”
The other Lagoon parents just laughed in response response to Dutch's comment, for a few seconds.
Meanwhile, what caught Lee's eyes was what the five other women, besides River and herself, were wearing.
The five Lagoon parents were all wearing dominatrix outfits. The chest and stomach parts of their outfits was a black leather Gothic style over-bust corset, with red trimmings, fish netting around the breasts. With the laces of the corset running down the front, center of their chests. They wore black leather g-string lingerie panties, with loops on the sides, attaching the top of the crotch piece to the straps on the sides of the panties. With the panties going under the lower parts of the corset. A black leather choker around their necks. Black and red leather evening gloves, with laced running up the gloves. And black and leather thigh-high boots, with high-heels, and laces running up the boots. And there were shirt stays straps attached from the bottom of the corset, to the top of the thigh-high boots.
Lee thought, with concern, 'What they are all wearing what looks like dominatrix outfits from the Queen Revy picture shown in the Black Lagoon R magazine. And the fact all five of them are wearing that exact outfit is enough to drive someone insane... Good thing everyone already considers me crazy... Or, I would have to go crazy... At least they are all women, right now, with those outfits doing their figures justice. I don't think I could handle seeing a man wearing that, right now.'
River giggled a little at Lee's thoughts.
Lee noticed River's giggle, but she did not turn to look at River. Instead, she continued her thoughts, 'Laugh it up River. We need all the laughs we can get.. And you might find it interesting that I do vaguely recall Bao mentioning that this Revy did have a period where she was into S&M. So, it is not that surprising that, after becoming rich, she would go back to some of those kinks, and bring her friends into that world with her.'
'And while I do recall writing a little about S&M angle in my stories. Now, that I think about it, I am not very surprised that the Lagoon family has this S&M dungeon. S&M exists in a number of series I wrote about. Not just Black Lagoon. But, Kampfer for example. And some people consider the Farscape series to be one American's decent into the Australian S&M scene.'
'I should have seen this coming, but I just honestly did not expect to be on the receiving in of this...'
River giggled a little more, before she made herself go quiet.
Janet noticed Lee was staring at her, and her friends. She teased, “Like our outfits?”
Lee looked over at Janet, as she tactfully said, “They are very appropriate for the situation.”
The Lagoon parents then laughed again for a few seconds.
Rock politely requested, “River. Please, be a dear, and shut the door.”
River walked behind Lee, and gently shut the door. She then walked back to stand beside Lee, to Lee's left side.
Something occurred to Lee, as she thought, 'I might as well ask this, while I have the chance to do so.'
Lee asked, “So, before you start screwing me, I have to know. What did you do to Pedro? I vaguely recall we talked about him, at the factory. But, I believe you did not get very detailed about his fate, at the time.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then stated, “I guess I am not the only one who memory is not so sharp, sometimes. Well, we found him. He fully cooperated with us. So, we did not harm him, and we let him go. He is likely back at his old job in Plata Podrido.”
Lee replied, “Good.” She mentally added, 'At least I do not have to worry about Pedro... I wonder about Melvin as well, but I don't dare mention him, and tip my hand that he is a former member of Hotel Moscow.'
Janet inquired, “Speaking of which. Did you know that the Rats Nest bartender was Bao?”
Lee admitted, “It has been a while since it learned that. But, Bao told me the truth, the day the maids showed up. She told me in the morning. The maids shows up in the afternoon.”
Rock asked, “So, she figured out something was up with you?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. And I admitted that I was the writer. And I explained what was going on. She took well.” She thought, “And Bao said I am still welcome at her bar. Though, she will likely get a good chuckle at seeing me like this.”
River softly agreed, “That is very likely.”
Rock said, “Well, that is good.”
Dutch agreed, “That is good.”
Lee inquired, “So, how did you all figure out Bao's identity? You have to admit that Bao was very careful about not revealing who she is.”
Benny stated, “True. Rock put the clues together, and told us in private. We got a good laugh out of it, when Rock told us that the Rats Nest bartender was Bao.”
Revy stated, “And because she is Bao, it makes sense that we liked the Rats Nest so much. And why the place reminds us of the Yellowflag. We will have to frequent that place more often.”
River mentioned, “As someone who likes drinking there, I don't think Bao could afford you as a regular customers, again.”
Revy looked over at River, as she said, “I am sure we will come to an arrangement.” She then turned back to Lee, as she said, “But first, we can have some fun with you.”
Lee inquired, “So, how did you decide who goes first?”
Benny answered, “Simple. We drew lots. I go first. Then, Revy, Dutch, Janet, and finally Rock. And we rotate from there. That is also how we made the schedule those groups you are going to meet over the course of the next many nights. Except for us. We get first dips on you, because we are organizing, and hosting, these events.”
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Just great... Though, at least Revy isn't first... But, her being second is still kind of scary...'
Rock joked, “I don't mind being last. That just means you will be loosened up, beforehand.”
Lee deadpanned, “You mean that literally? Don't you?”
Rock smirked, as she admitted, “Yes.”
The Lagoon adults laughed. From the corner of her left eye, Lee could see that River was trying to stifle a laugh, and doing a good job of it.
Lee thought, 'Thank you, River. For being considerate of my feelings.'
River just looked at Lee, as she smiled. She said, “Don't worry. You will get through this.”
Janet smirked, “Of course she will. The others want a piece of her ass, when we are done with her.”
Lee questioned, “Speaking of which, who should I expect to be coming to these sessions? I know that Akira and her family are not coming. But, what about your other friends?”
Revy answered, “You are correct about Akira and her family. Which even I can understand. And well, there is us. B and sis. The Lovelace family. Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton. Violin, and Aeryn.... Among others... Such as the Knight Sabers...”
Lee admitted, “That is all perfectly understandable... But, while I am sure that Chang is not going to get involved, what about his crew?”
Revy answered, “I believe that Mal and Spike one a piece of you. But, I am not sure they are going to come.”
Lee asked, “What about Eda and Yolanda?”
Revy shrugged, “Well, that is a fair question. Since you did fuck Eda under false pretenses. And Yolanda is our friend. But, the answer is no. Both of them like their new lives, and they declined my invitation to come have a piece of your ass.”
Lee replied, “That is good.” She mentally reflected, 'And if they want a piece of my ass, I am more than happy to give it to them. They have both been nice to me, so I don't mind.'
Lee then overheard River giggled, for a few seconds.
Lee happily thought, 'I am glad my opinion on the matter meets with your approval.'
River softly said, “It's fine. I am not a hypocrite on such matters.'
Lee thought, “That is good to know.”
River soft replied, “Yes. It is.”
River thought, 'This might be a good time to start tying some loose ends, and head off future problems.'
River suggested, “On that matter, given you don't know where Lee has been. And Lee doesn't know where you have been. How about you all refrain sticking into Lee, anything that you stuck into yourselves, first. Or, plan to stick into yourself, or each other.”
Revy agreed, “That is a fair enough request.”
Benny agreed, “Good idea. That is a good hygiene practice.”
Dutch agreed, “Yes. It is.”
Rock said, “We are always careful.”
Janet commented, “Though, I won't worry too much. We are all healthy. And we clean our toys in here, with bleach and water. Nothing is alive on our toys and other... Items. But, we will put condoms on our toys, before we used them. To be on the safe side. It would not be the first time we have done so.”
River thought, 'Good. This problems are taken care of.'
Lee said, “That is comforting.”
Revy casually replied, “Yes. It is.” She asked, in a stern tone of voice, “Now, are you ready to pay for all that you have done?”
Lee pointed out, “Come on, Revy, I did do some good things for you.”
Revy stated, “Lee, name one good thing you have done for me personally, besides the kids, the serum, and the wealth?”
Lee shrugged, “I got you to finally start wearing a bra, and tying your shoes.”
The other just started giggling, as Janet commented, “She's got you there, Revy.”
Revy concede, “I will give you that one.”
Lee looked around, as she asked, “By the way, how did you react to Revy starting to wear a bra, and tying her shoes.”
Benny answered, “We reacted casually. We didn't make an issue of it.”
Lee admitted, “That makes sense.”
Rock requested, “Now Lee, disrobe. I am sure you have nothing under that robe.”
Lee complimented, “You know me so well, Rock.”
Rock warmly smiled towards Lee.
Lee then took off her robe and slippers. She kicked the slippers to a nearby wall. Next, she handed her robe to River.
River took the robe, and she walked to a nearby wall. She set the robe down by her feet. She then stood straight, move to her left of the robe on the floor. Next, she turned around and leaned her back against the wall, while looking at Lee, and the Lagoon members.
All the while, River was mindful of what was happening, so she could protect Lee from the others going to far.
As the five other women got a good look at Lee's nude, female body, Revy joked, “Well, I am glad you shaved for the occasions.”
Lee retorted, “At least you cannot hold me by my short hairs.”
Revy flatly said, “Ha. Ha.”
Benny looked Lee up and down, as she complimented, “Damn, Lee. You have a pretty good body.”
Lee flatly stated, “Living in a village of amazons, allowed me to exercise a lot.”
The other six women present, including River, giggled a little bit, at Lee's comment.
As the other women calmed down, Lee asked, “So, how is this going to work. I know Benny is first. But, we are we going to do first this... Like I said, I will do this willing. But, this is all new to me, so I need to know what you want me to do.”
Dutch honestly admitted, “I am not sure myself.” She then turned to look at the clock, and then back at Lee, as she continued, “But, seeing as how it is right after Ten, we need to do something.”
Revy suggested, “We can always start rough and dry?”
River reminded Revy, “No tearing.”
Revy growled, “Fine.”
Janet turned to River, as she stated, “River is right. We should start are gentle and work up to the rough stuff.” She then turned to Lee with a feral smile, as she continued, “And by the time we get to the really rough stuff, you will be begging for more.”
Dutch commented, “Sounds like a wonderful plan.”
Lee turned to Benny, as she said, “I see why you dated her.”
Benny responded, “Yea. She can be real fun. And I didn't mind marrying her. By the way, thanks for that.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Benny stated, “She has always been creative. But, when you gave us access to those magic packets... Which we won't be using tonight... She stepped up her game... If the sexual olympics existed, she would get gold metals for what we do every few nights... And the things we done would make ancient roman emperors envious.”
Lee responded, “I don't doubt that. So, what do you want me to do?
Benny pointed on the bench to her left, as she said, “I want you to go sit on that bench. Janet is right. We will start simple and work our way up to the more advanced stated.”
Lee did as instructed, with the five Lagoon members following behind her
After Lee sat down, with her feet on the ground, she face the five Lagoon members, whom were standing around, in front of her.
Revy asked, “So, the big question I have left is... Are you still a virgin?
Lee looked at Revy. She smirked, as she stated, “Not anymore.”
Revy leaned over and sniffed Lee for a few seconds. Her eyes widened slightly, as she looked over at River. She flatly stated, “River?”
River looked at Revy. She made a leering smile, as she commented, “Let us just say that her bloom was too tempting to pass up. And I enjoyed deflowering her. But, don't worry. I left you plenty, for you to corrupt.”
Lee forced herself not to giggle at River's comment. But, she could not help, but blush a little, as River's openness, about their shared sex life.
The Lagoon women then turned back to Lee.
Benny said, “What is done, is done. That just means we won't have to worry about causing problems with popping her cherry.”
Dutch said, “Benny's right. This just makes things easier for us.”
Revy begrudgingly agreed, “Damn it. You're both right.” She turned to Lee, as she said, “And I can still have you ass.”
Lee looked at Revy, as she cracked a grin. She retorted, “Only after Benny.”
Benny said, “Well, let's get this started, then.”
Benny walked behind Lee, as Lee sat on the bench, with both her feet on the floor.
The other four Lagoon members just stayed in front of Lee, as they watched.
Benny then began to rub Lee's shoulders.
Of the course of several seconds, Lee got into the massage. She complimented, “You really know how to do a good shoulder rub.”
Benny warmly replied, “I know.”
Janet commented, “Yea. She really give some good shoulder and back rubs. On the nights we do not feel like fooling around. I usually have her give me a good, thorough back and shoulder rub. And in return. Right after she is finished. I do something she likes, with my tongue, between the front of her legs.”
Everyone giggled at Janet's comment, even Lee, for a few seconds.
As everyone calmed own, Lee teased, “Are you planning to do that to me.”
Janet playfully replied, “Maybe. I am thinking about it.”
Then, Benny slowly moved her hands further down Lee's front, and she cupped, while they began to softly rub Lee's breasts.
Lee could not help, as a slight moan of pleasure escaped her lips.
Everyone else was silent, so as to not ruin the mood that Benny was creating.
As Benny continued to gently massage Lee's breasts, while she said, “For right now, Lee I just want you to start to relax. The other stuff will come later.”
Lee said, in a slight moan, “Continue to do this, and I will soon be nothing but putty in your hands.”
Benny leaned down by Lee's right ear, as she seductively said, “I know. That is why I am doing this first. Now, let the artist do her work.”
Lee could only help but moan, as she did as instructed, and she began to relax, as she felt the tension release from her body.
Soon after, the Lagoon members began their game to introduce Lee to lessons of the world of S&M.
This went on for the three hour allotted time, that was agreed upon for the nightly session. With ten minute breaks, every hour. That counted for the time of the entire session.
Over the course of the last two and a half hours of the session, Lee learned that the Lagoon members liked things rough and kinky. But, Lee did not resist. Now, did she scream much. Except in pleasure.
And there were only a few problems. With River only having to stop Revy a few times, to keep the Revy from going too far. On the other hand, the other four women tried their best to walk the line on what they were doing, and River respected them for that.
Ironically, as River called the night, at exactly one AM, Revy realized that the Lagoon members spent so much time with on Lee's chest, back, buttocks, and love canal, that Revy did not get a change to enter Lee's from back end, before time was up.
And Revy did commented about that.
Though, no one, not even River replied to Revy's comment. And by then, Lee was to tired to care, nor reply.
But, while that annoyed Revy, she and the other women felt they had gotten their revenge on Lee.
After they were through, the Lagoon members cleaned up after themselves, while River helped Lee into her robe, and slippers. River then opened the door to the S&M dungeon, and aided Lee, as she walked the black, longer haired woman out of the basement, up the stairs, and to their bedroom.
Given the slow pace they went at, it took them around five minutes to reach their guest bedroom.
Though, neither woman said much on their way to their bedroom. And no one bothered them, as they made their way to their guestroom.
When they reached their bedroom, River opened the door, turned on the ceiling light, and walked Lee to her bed.
When Lee reached her bed, Lee just fell down, on her stomach, on top of the covers of her bed, with her head hitting her pillow.
As River took off Lee's red slippers, she asked, “How are you doing, Lee?”
With her face planted in her pillow, Lee groaned, “Sore, and embarrassed.”
River finished with Lee's slippers, setting the slippers in front of the foot of Lee's bed.
River then walked over to the left side of Lee's bed, and she gently sat down, near the middle, left edge of the bed, with her feet on the floor.
River inquired, “I can under the soreness. But, why are you embarrassed?”
Lee continued to be face down in her pillow, as she answered, “Because I liked it. I refuse to admit it to them. But, I liked what they did to me, tonight. And that worries me.”
River said, in a kind, comforting tone of voice, “You have nothing to be embarrassed about. I have come to realize that life is about learning new experiences. About ourselves, and others. And you just learned that there is a side of you that you did not know about... That is not a bad thing... It just means that there are facets of your personality that you did not realize where present... As time goes on, you may to turn learn and enjoy those parts of your personality...”
“And look on the bright side. Since you enjoyed it, you are going to get through this revenge without any serious problems...”
River's voice turned more playful, as she continued, “And I will keep this a secret from the others, if you do...”
Lee was silent for a few seconds.
River then turned to look at the back of Lee's head. And through her telepathy, she sensed that Lee had fallen asleep.
River quietly said, in a joyous tone of voice, “Sleep well, Lee. You earned your rest.”
River stood up from Lee's bed. She then walked away from Lee, so she could get ready to go to bed, herself.
River turned off the ceiling light, as she left the room, for the nearby bathroom. She could brush her teeth, among other things.
Five minutes later, River re-entered the her bedroom. The only light in the room was from the hallway lights. Which were set to dim at that time of night.
River then shut the door, leaving her in total darkness. Though, she knew her way to her bed. She soon reached her bed with not problems. After which, she got into her own bed, and soon went to sleep, herself.
(_)
The next day, Lee woke up a little after nine AM. The day was uneventful for Lee. Mostly because, except for using the bathroom, for various reasons, she remained in the guest bedroom, with River.
Though, at the proper times, River did retrieve and bring both herself and Lee, their breakfast, lunch, and dinner, along with a few snacks, in between meals.
That morning, when River came back to the bedroom, to bring Lee some breakfast, River told Lee that she overheard Revy talking about last night with her friends. Though, River mentioned that the other Lagoon parents had the decency not to talk about the events in front of their guests. And none of the parents, not even Revy, talked about the events in front of their children.
During that day, Lee was to tired and sore to want to do anything physical with River, which River understood.
And while River was present for the previous night's activities, she was polite enough to not talk to Lee about what happened. Except for comfort Lee, and tell her that she would be okay.
So, Lee spent the day just resting, watching TV, and playing a few until it was close to ten PM, that night, when they headed back to the basement dungeon. With Lee only wearing a bathrobe and slippers, while River was in wearing some her casual clothing, that she brought with herself, to the island. Before she had gone the hunt with the three amazon women.
(_)
As River and Lee reached the door to the S&M dungeon, they found the door was open.
When they walked inside, River closed the door behind them.
River and Lee stood side by side, with River to Lee's right side, as they were both shocked and pleasantly surprised, at whom they saw.
Standing across the room were Aeryn, Violin, and, to their surprise, Scorpius, all three of the women, across from River and Lee, were nude. With Lee seeing their clothing nearly folded on the floor, by the bed in the back of the room.
Lee noticed the three women were looking at River and herself.
Lee though, with mild happiness, 'Okay. This might not be so bad. Violin and I have an understanding. Scorpius likes me. And Aeryn is the only one I had to worry about. And Violin will reign her in. If River cannot...'
River snorted at Lee's thoughts.
Lee continued her thoughts, 'Don't take that personally, River. It is just that Aeryn is one of the few people that could take you in a fight... But, there is one important matter I obviously need to speak with Scorpius about. And let me handle with. Though, first we have to have introductions.'
Lee casually said, “Hi guys.”
Violin playfully retorted, “Hi girls.”
Scorpius calmly said, “It is good to see you again, Lee. You are looking well.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Scorpius.”
Aeryn looked at Lee, as she licked her lips. She then said, “Oh this is going to be so much fun.
River warned, “Watched it, Aeryn. I will not let this go too far.”
Aeryn turned to River, as she flatly stated, “All I need is three hours we gave us.”
Lee looked at Aeryn, as she responded, “And you shall have your three hours... Baring the ten minute breaks, every hour...” She turned to Scorpius, as she inquired, curious tone of voice, “I can understand why Aeryn and Violin are here, but what are you doing here Scorpius?”
Scorpius turned towards Lee, as she casual said, “When I heard you were now a woman, Lee. I had to see this change for myself”
Lee had a sneaking suspicion, as she asked, “How many people know I am now a woman?”
Aeryn answered, “Pretty much everyone that knows about you and your stories, and are friends with the Lagoon family.”
Lee thought, 'That is a lot of people... But, there is not much I can do about it.'
River softly complimented, “That is a good point of view to take.”
Lee then took note of the subject that took River and Lee by surprise, when they walked into the room.
For, not only was Violin pregnant, with her stomach barely showing her two and half month pregnancies. But, Scorpius, as a beautiful, young woman, was clearly pregnant as well. The white haired, pale skinned woman, had a clearly round shaped protruding belly.
Lee thought, “Scorpius looks to be around six months pregnant. But, given how fast Sebacean pregnancies can be. How long she has been pregnant is anyone's guess. But, I have to ask for details, from a very important... And very personal reasons...'
Lee said, “Violin, I already learned you were pregnant. And congratulations to both you, and Aeryn here.”
Violin placed her right hand gently on her stomach, as she and Aeryn said, in unison, “Thank you.”
Lee turned to Scorpius, as she went onto say, “But, I didn't know you were pregnant, Scorpius?”
Scorpius responded, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Yes, I am. And it has been a very pleasant and interesting experience.”
Lee thought, 'That is good. Though, I am still very concerned as to why you are pregnant?'
Lee inquired, “Scorpius, who is the father?”
Scorpius replied, “Do not worry, Lee. You are not the father.”
Aeryn and Violin looked at each other, with confused expressions on their faces. They then turned to Lee, as they asked, in unison, “When?”
River mildly chuckled, for a few seconds, as she she thought, 'I already knew this. But, the look on Aeryn and Violin's face, at this moment, is priceless.'
Lee answered, “After that poker game at the Rats Nest, where Violin, Rock, Scorpius, Molly, Chang, River, and myself, were present. After the game was over, and you all left, Scorpius, here, ambushed me in the men's restroom. It was very cliché. But, I did have the sense to use a condom at that time...”
Something occurred to Lee, but she could not quite grasp her thought, as she mentally reflected, 'I am forgetting something, in dealing with a condom. But, what?... I will figure it out, later...'
Lee verbally continued, “And though it was quick, it was fun.”
Scorpius responded, “It was fun for both of us. And thank you. But, you may ask your next logical question.”
Lee asked, “I know know why Violin is still pregnant. Sebacean pregnancies can be very quick. So, why are you still pregnant, Scorpius?”
Violin commented, “Where do you think I got the medication to slow down my pregnancy from?”
Lee replied, “Oh...” She thought, 'I should have known.'
River giggled a little, at Lee's thoughts.
Scorpius turned to Violin, as she said, “Thank you, Violin.” She looked back over at Lee, as she explained, “Given the child within me is a clone of my current pure Sebacean genetic structure. I also take the same medicine that I provided for Violin, for the same reasons. Fortunately, those those involved, there has been no side effects from the medication, as the medication slows the gestation rate for both of us.”
“This is so we can check for, and prevent any complications that may arise. And if you are wondering, due to this being a clone, I am having a daughter. And with this precaution, my daughter should be born healthy, in around to three Earth months.”
Lee commented, “Glad to hear it. And congratulations.”
Scorpius replied, in a slightly joyous tone of voice, “Thank you.”
River spoke up, as she inquired, “So, what is this medication? And how do it work?” She mentally wondered, 'I wondered about that, after I read about that medication, from Violin's mind. But, I don't dare read Scorpius' mind. So, I will just directly ask her... And given how Scorpius has become a much calmer person, I think she will make a good mother.'
Scorpius turned to River, as she calmly said, “Good questions, River. Sebaceans were originally human. And the medication activates the throw back parts of the Sebacean DNA that are human, but dormant. The medicine is very specific, and it only deals with the DNA chains that govern the rate of growth for our children within us. And it sets the growth rate to the standard human gestation rate of around nine Earth months.”
River thought, 'That makes sense.'
Scorpius continued, “To that end, it was John, or should I say Violin, that came to me, before she became pregnant. And I provided the medication for her. Along with other medical checkups and services. By doing so, this also allows me to make amends for previous mistakes I have made with the crew of Moya.”
Aeryn turned to Scorpius, as she conceded, in a slightly accepting tone of voice, “It is a start.” She turned to her spouse, as she continued, “Though, I don't see how you can stand being pregnant for so long.”
Violin turned to her wife, as she stated, “To each their own... I don't mind a slow pregnancy, and the feeling a new life growing with me...” She cracked a grin, as she continued, “And it gives my mother and our friends time to throw a few babyshowers.”
Aeryn commented, “True. I wonder if it will be as good as Balalaika and B's babyshower?”
Violin giggled, while Scorpius, River, and Lee remained silent.
Lee thought, 'At least I know who got invited to that. And who didn't... Wait a minute... B and Balalaika?' She asked, “Those two are pregnant?”
Violin stopped giggling, as she, Aeryn, and Scorpius, turned towards Lee.
Violin shrugged, as she casually said, “Given, they have been wearing baggy clothing. I guess you wouldn't have noticed. And yes. They got each other pregnant.”
Lees slowly replied, “Okay...” She then thought, 'I guess after several decades of life, even those to would finally decide to have some kids... And I know better than to ask about the babyshower these women likely threw for them...'
River quietly complimented, “Good observations.”
Violin commented, “I am surprised that River did not tell you about those two, and the babyshower we all went to.”
Lee looked over at River, with River looking back at her.
River saw an unspoken question. River answered, “You had more than enough on your mind, than having to worry what is happening to other people.”
Lee shrugged, as she replied, “Fair enough.”
River and Lee then turned back to look at the three other women in the room.
Aeryn commented, “Well, speaking of pregnancies. And those whom chose to get pregnant.” She looked over at Scorpius, then back to River and Lee, as she continued, “I am surprised that Scorpius did not have a surrogate for her child?”
Scorpius looked over at Aeryn. She then turned to Lee, as she inquired, “I would like to see if you can answer that question.”
Lee looked over at Scorpius, as she said, “I think I can handle it.” She turned to Aeryn, as she answered, “If you think about it. This makes sense. Scorpius has always had a take charge, do it yourself, personality. And she would not risk someone else screwing up the pregnancy of her own child. Since she is now a woman, it would be in character for her to do this. She is no stranger to pain. It is actually possible that the labor and childbirth might be less painful than some of the experiences she has had to endure in her life.”
Scorpius turned to Aeryn. She smiled, as she calmly confirmed, “Lee is correct.”
Aeryn conceded, “I guess that makes sense.”
Scorpius turned to Lee, as she complimented, “Good job, Lee. Now, let us show you what true pleasure can be like.”
Aeryn turned to Lee, as she stated, “Lotton told me how much of a badass you think I am. I appreciate that. So when I learned from Violin, that Scorpius wanted to join... And I don't have a clue how she found out...
Scorpius spoke up, “I have my ways.”
Aeryn did not respond to Scorpius' comment, as she went onto say, “So, I posed a challenged for her, Violin, and myself. I want her to make you scream so much in pleasure and pain tonight, that your voice will be hoarse by tomorrow morning.”
Scorpius smirked toward Lee, as she casually said, “I consider it a worthy challenge.”
Violin just laughed at Aeryn and Scorpius' comments, while River and Lee remained silent.
Scorpius joked, “And besides... We have such delights to show you, Lee.”
Lee immediately recognize what quote Scorpius was paraphrasing, as she practically jump closer River. Lee shrieked, “When the hell did you see the Hellraiser movies?!”
Scorpius calmly answered, “Quite a while ago. Thanks to your writings. I found those movies to be amateurish. Entertaining. But, amateurish... Though, not to worry, Lee. I promise you will enjoy everything I do to you tonight.”
“When it comes males, or females. As a male, or a female. No lover has ever complained about my skills with him, or her, in bed.”
Violin agreed, “She's right.”
Lee noticed Aeryn frown for a second. But, a second later, she relaxed her expression.
Lee thought, 'I need to deflect attention from my actions, before Aeryn jumps the gun.'
Lee then overheard River quietly say, “Good idea.”
Lee looked at Aeryn, as she calmly inquired, “By the way, Aeryn. I was wondering. After you found out that Chiana took John's virginity, what did you do to her?”
Aeryn cracked an evil grin, as she answered, “First, I have to thank you for informing us about that. Even Violin here did not know about that event, until her made her remember it. This is one of the few reasons we are playing this ridiculous game... But, to answer your question.”
Aeryn then turned, and walked over to the right side of the room, where the sex toys, and other items, were either stacked on shelves, or hooked on a wall.
Lee did not reply, in fear of spoiling the mood.
Aeryn picked up a black leather cat o' nine tails whip. She held the weapon, with her right hand, by its handle.
Aeryn looked back over at Lee, as she continued, in a slightly more sadist tone of voice, “Well... Let's just say you are not the first person whose ass I had to whip back into shape.”
Aeryn then cracked her whip away from everyone.
Everyone present noticed Lee visibly flinch, as the whip was cracked.
Violin spoke up, as she said, “And while my wife was handling Chiana, I was sampling Dargo's tongue, at the same time...” She turned to Aeryn, with Aeryn looking back at her spouse.
They shared a smile, as Violin continued, “With Aeryn's permission... After she was finished with him. And this was before we helped them get married. So, everyone involved turned out fine. I am much say that what Dargo can do with his tongue is truly interesting and pleasurable... Though, Pip was sore for a few days after Aeryn was done.”
Lee thought, while mild surprise, 'You just don't know some people.'
River softly replied, in a rhetorical manner, 'Isn't that the truth?”
While retaining their smiles, the married couple then looked back at Lee.
Lee then began to think about what those two might have in mine for her. And she started to show a little more fear on her face, as she thought, 'I have severely underestimate the perversions of those characters I wrote about.'
River could not help but break out laughing, at Lee's thoughts, for a few seconds.
Lee thought. 'Laugh it up River. Now, I got to see if I can savage the situation.'
Lee requested, “Aeryn... We have three hours together. Let us talk about this?”
Aeryn questioned, in a cold tone of voice, “You say. Let us talk about this?... I came here to take action!”
Lee responded, in a weak tone of voice, “Surely, we can discuss this first, Aeryn?”
Aeryn demanded, in an even tone of voice, “Do not call me Aeryn, tonight. Call me, Queen Sun!”
Aeryn cracked her whip, again.
Lee visibly paled, as she said, “Yes, Queen Sun!”
Violin, Scorpius, and River, could not help but laugh for several seconds, at Lee reaction to Aeryn's order.
As everyone calmed down, Aeryn smirked, “Good. Now, the fun begins.”
Over the course of the next three hours, Aeryn, Violin and Scorpius showed Lee new heights of both pleasure and pain, on what being a woman could bring.
And what Lee and River found most surprising was that Aeryn was more creative in the situation than even Violin and Scorpius.
Even River and Lee had to admit that both Scorpius and Aeryn were sexual artists at what they were doing, with Violin assisting, as Lee enjoyed the fun from everyone. And River only had to stop Aeryn once, for the entire three hour session.
Also, Scorpius' advanced stage of pregnancy did not slow her down in the least.
Afterward, everyone got dressed, cleaned up, and River helped Lee back to bed. With Lee being so tired, she fell asleep seconds after her head hit her pillow.
The next morning, Lee was again sore, along with the fact she could barely speak, and it took much of the day for her voice to return. Though, River was happy to see that Lee was able to smile from the experience she had the previous night.
(_)
On the third night of Lee's punishment sessions, around ten PM, Lee's voice had long since returned, hours beforehand, as she and River returned for a third night in the S&M dungeon.
This time, they were met by Balalaika and B.
As they walked into the room, with the door already open, Lee was the one to shut the door, and then walk beside River. To River's right side.
Lee had on her bathrobe and slippers, while River was wearing her usual attire.
They saw that Balalaika and B had already undressed, and nude, exposing the two russians' slightly rounded stomachs.
Lee also saw that Balalaika held the ends of a riding crop firmly in her hands.
Lee thought, with worry 'I can just imagine what she has in mind for me.'
River choose to remain silent.
As the two russians looked back at Lee and River, Balalaika greeted them, in a
calm, though dangerous tone of voice, “Ah... Hello, Lee... River... It is so nice to see you both again”
B calmly said, “Hello Lee.”
Lee responded, “Hello, and congratulations. I heard on the grapevine that both you were pregnant. And I see the rumors were correct.” She mentally added, 'Also, I heard about the babyshower, but I know better than to mention it in front of you two.'
B and Balalaika responded, in unison, “Thank you.”
River casually said, “Hi guys.” She thought. 'Lee needs some help to keep things on track. And I know how to help.'
River calmly inquired, “How far along are you?”
B answered, “Three months, for both of us.”
River asked, in an honestly curious tone of voice, “How is it?... What is it like?”
B shrugged, as she stated, “It could be better. It could be worse. But, I figure if Bob and Ed could handle it, so could we...” She raised an eyebrow, as she continued, “Speaking of which, the Lowe family admitted to us that they aided you, Lee, in your chase on Mars.”
Lee calmly confessed, “Yes. They did. I hope that did not cause problems with you friendship of you.”
B said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “No. It has not. Also, Bob, Ed, Stan, and Lewis, requested of me, to inform you, that they hope you make it through this in one piece.”
Lee requested, “I appreciate that. From both them. And you taking the time to deliver their message. Thank you. And the next time you see them, tell them I said, thank you.”
B replied, “I will. And you're welcome.”
Balalaika casually said, “Yes... B is correct. The Lowe family have been very kind to us. And a minor difference of opinion will not change that. Also, we took into account that they only gave you non-violent tools, to help you delay us, and avoid being caught. They did not give you weapons. So, I see no problems with their actions.”
Lee stated, “I am glad to hear that. And I hope you are no to sore about what I said to you, Balalaika, during discussion at the factory?”
Balalaika gave Lee a look in her eyes that promised much pain for Lee, very soon, as she continued to say, in a calm tone of voice, “Not at all. One can gain much when someone points out their flaws... Though, very soon you will find out how imaginative I am.”
Lee gulped.
B giggled a little at Lee's response to Balalaika’s comment, as River remained silent.
Balalaika thought, 'This is the response I expect from Lee. And I know you are reading my thoughts River...'
Balalaika noticed River giving her stoic facial expression.
Balalaika continued her thoughts, 'Nice try. But, I have seen better attempts at not responding. And I plan to have some fun, before we decide to play with Lee.'
Balalaika inquired, in curious and seductive tone of voice, “Well Lee, if you heard about our pregnancies, from those hosting this wonderful evening, surely you heard about the babyshower our friends here threw for us?… Yet, I wonder why you did not mention that. Why is that?”
River thought, 'I am not going to let you bait Lee, Balalaika. And you know better to try anything with me.' She spoke up, as she commented, “Because, Lee knows better than to step on land mines.”
Lee forced herself not to show any response to River's comment. Though, she thought, 'Thanks, River.'
Balalaika chuckled in a slightly evil manner, for a few seconds, as she thought, 'Well, done River. And who says I was just baiting Lee.”
River's body straightened up a bit, as she realized that Balalaika was also bait her.
Balalaika said, “I can go along with that.”
River forced herself to relax, as she thought, 'I have to remember that Balalaika is an extremely sharp woman. She came play at our level, without a problem.'
B said, “Yes. We can see how mentioning such an event could lead to an unpredictable response from us. Though, not to worry. We are okay with what happened. And Lee, you missed a surprisingly wonderful babyshower.”
River commented, “Yes. It was pretty good.”
Balalaika commented, “And very funny.”
Lee stated, “I believe all three of you. But, I don't want to know the details. I fear at this point, if I learned what happened at that party, I might lose would little shreds of of my sanity that I have left.”
The three other women giggled a little at Lee's response.
As they calmed down, B responded, “I can appreciate that.”
Lee inquired, “So, do the women of Hotel Moscow know about the special occasions for you two.”
B stated, “Yes. And I see you learned about their gender bending, as well.”
Balalaika casually said, in an underlying tone of voice that was anything but casual, “Yes. We had a long discussion with the bartender of the Devil's Hotel.” She mentally added, 'I wonder why someone would name there hotel that?... I have a feeling I do not want to know.”
Lee thought, 'Damn it. They found Melvin. And there is nothing I can do about it right now.”
Lee said, “Please, do not hold that information against, Melvin. He is a friend of mine. And he only hinted at it. And I put the pieces together from there.”
B commented, “We have already settled our differences with private Yurick. Or, in this case, Melvin. And Melvin is still alive, and in good health.”
Lee slowly replied, “Okay.” Lee thought, 'That is good... But worrisome... Still, I will find out the details, later.'
B responded, “Also, I want you to know, that if our subordinates learn about your stories. I will make sure they realize that their gender change was not your fault.”
Lee said, “Thank you.” She thought, 'So, their rank and file don't know about my stories. Nor, likely myself. Not, that I am going to ask these two about it. Though, that does explain a few things about the three russian woman that visited the Devil's Hotel, looking for Melvin. But, either way, that is a major load off my mind.'
From the corner of her left eye, Lee saw River crack a grin, while River nodded a few times in agreement.
B stated, “No problem. And I have a question for you. Besides Fox Xanatos, where do you think the inspiration for Balalaika came from?”
As Balalaika looked at Lee, she let a laugh. She then requested, “I would like to know that myself. And I would guess you are the person to ask.”
Lee calmly answered, “Don't take this the wrong way. But Balalaika, I always thought of you as basically a much meaner version Susan Ivonava from Babylon Five.” She grimly thought, 'And given Ivonava was also kidnapped by Chang, I might see her someday as well. Though, I doubt she knows about me and the stories. Given that, while on this island, no one has mentioned her to me. And she is the type of person people talk about... Still, I have more immediate worries to be concerned about.'
B replied, “I can see that.”
Balalaika calmly said, “I will take that as a compliment.”
River remained silent.
Lee asked, “Given you visited the B Five reality, in your chase after myself, I am not surprised the you have seen the Babylon Five series. Though, when did you see it?”
B pointed out, “Remember, I have been good friends with Ed and Bob for several decades. I saw the series, from the copies they have. And it is a good series. Also, Bob loaned to me her copies of that series. And I showed Balalaika the pilot, the series, and the movies, after we lost you.”
Balalaika commented, “I must say that is it a very interesting series to watch. The line that no one is who he or she appears to be, is very true in that series, and in life in general.”
Lee complimented, “Quoting G'kar. Nice choice.”
Balalaika kindly responded, “Thank you. I found the interplay and development of the relationship of G'kar and Londo, through the series, to be fascinating.”
Lee commented, “Yes. That is an understatement. There is still debate, to this day, on which of those two characters was the villain, and which one was the hero. Rumor has it that the actors who played those two characters flipped a coin on the matter. Though, they never told anyone else the results of the coin toss.”
Balalaika belly laughed, for a few seconds. She then rhetorically stated, “Why am I not surprised?”
B commented, “By the way, Lee, thank you for my friendships with the Lowe family. They have been great friends.”
Lee softly replied, “That is nice. And you are welcome. Still, Susan is now probably after my ass, as well. Considering she was captured by the Hell Sabers. And she likely has a kid now, along with Marcus and Zack.”
B kindly offered, “I will look into finding her, and the other two, later. She and Balalaika might have a few things in common. And the other two might enjoy a beer with me.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
B went onto say, “Also, it would be nice for Balalaika to know someone she can relate to. And maybe even schedule a play date with our future kids.”
Lee thought, 'I am not touching that comment with a ten foot pole.'
River giggled a little at Lee's thoughts.
Balalaika adjusted her hold on her riding crop, as she stated, “Now ladies, if you are finished. I wish to show Lee how imaginative I can be.”
B and Lee went quiet, as River lightly giggled a little.
Balalaika commented, in a straightforward mannered, “I was including you, as well, River.”
River swiftly went silent.
Balalaika happily thought, 'I still got it. And I know you are still reading my mind, River.'
River did not replied, as she thought, 'I think it is best that I don't take Balalaika's mental bait.'
Lee thought, 'Balalaika and B are about to start their games with me. And given their personalities, I think I might want to lay all my cards out, beforehand.'
Lee said, “Before we start. I want you to know, Balalaika, that I have only had the up most respect for you. Even when I thought you were just a fiction character. That is why I only had Chang make you loyal, with his brainwashing, and nothing else. And you did get your youth restored out of the deal. Also, when book two ended, you were back in control of Hotel Moscow. And I only said that you lacked of imagination because I was caught up in the heat of the moment.”
Balalaika looked at Lee, while he lips curled into a feral grin, as she gained a dangerous look to her eyes. She bent the horsewhip slightly, as she casually said, “Oh. I know that Lee. And I am not angry with what you did to me. Nor, what you said to me. That is why I am not going to permanently harm you tonight. But, you are still clearly lacking one important thing, which I guess I need to teach you.”
Lee winced, as she guessed, “Disciple?”
Balalaika let her horsewhip snap back straight. She smirked, while she stated, with a voice like steel, “Exactly... Now, let us begin...”
That night, Lee learned many lessons. One important lesson being that pregnant badasses are the most dangerous and meanest badasses to exist in the multiverse.
Along with that, River had to stop Balalaika from going too far, several times that night. While B mainly assisted Balalaika. Though, she did do a few interesting things to Lee, as well.
Though, over the course of the following three hours, River also learned of some interesting sexual ideas, by scanning the two Russians' minds, along with watching what they did to Lee. And she took mental notes of what she learned.
When River called the session for the night, she had to all but carry Lee back to their bedroom, and dump her on her bed.
With Lee to sore to move much, nor immediately fall asleep. But, River was there to comfort her.
And when Lee finally when to sleep, River soon when to bed, as well. To get some sleep, herself.
Lee did not get out of her bed, until noon the next day. And she was still sore from the previous night's events.
(_)
Fortunately, by ten PM the following night, Lee was recovered enough, that she could handle other session in the Lagoon sadomasochistic dungeon.
This time, they found that they would be spending time with Sawyer, Shenhua and Lotton.
All three women were undressed, while Lee and River were still clothed
After River closed the door to the dungeon, behind them, the two women stood side by side to each other.
River and Lee stood beside each other, as they looked at the three other nude women.
Lee mentally admitted, 'River. I honesty don't mean to make you jealous. But, I find those three to be sexy. And not just because of their bodies. I mean Sawyer and Lotton are on the small side, but they have been nice to me. And Shenhua has a hot body, though her personality can be less than pleasant... So, I hope you don't mind me looking at them in that way...'
River softly teased, “You are not the only one doing that.”
Lee giggled, for a few seconds.
The three women looked over at them, as Lotton said, “Hi girls.”
Sawyer happily said, “Hello Lee and River.”
Shenhua just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, before looking back at the two newcomers.
River chirped, “Hi ya.”
Lee thought, 'You have been with me way too long.'
It was River's turn to giggle, for a few seconds.
Lee calmly said, “Hi guys.
Sawyer commented, “It is so nice to see you both in good health.”
Lee said, “Same here.”
River replied, “Likewise.”
Lee stated, “Interesting meeting you here. And please don't take this the wrong way. But, while I was told you would be joining us for one of these nights. I am honestly surprised that you three want you revenge on me. I thought the four of us were squared away on the vengeance angle against me.”
Sawyer responded, in a happy tone of voice, “Actually, this is more of just an excuse to sleep with you. And have some fun.”
Shenhua begrudgingly agreed, “Yes. We already settled our matters between each other.”
Lotton stated, “And I have no problems with you, Lee.”
Lee gave them a warm smile, as she said, “Then, I think I will enjoy tonight.' She mentally added, 'For a change.'
Sawyer commented, “We hope so. Besides, given Shenhua and my reputations, we don't usually get to share a bed with others that know who we are. And Lotton is polite enough to ask others, without our permission.”
Lotton cracked a grin, as she responded, “Yes. And our arrangement works out well for all of us.”
Shenhua complained, in a slightly whiny tone of voice, “I find it annoying that Annie. Of all people. Have more people, who know who she is, openly to sleep with her, than those that know about us. Concerning that matter, I sometimes think she uses her jedi mind tricks.”
River casually stated, “Nah. She won't do that. She has too much self-respect. It is just that she is as hot as us, and straightforward about her intentions. Her approach is more like. I am here. I am interested. Let's do it. And I promise you that you'll enjoy it.”
The other four women could not help but giggle at River's comment.
As the women calmed down, Lotton casually said, “Besides. we have other things to think about.”
Lee then noticed that Lotton had instinctively placed her right hand against her flat stomach.
Lee asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “What is it, Lotton?”
Lotton realized what she was doing, as she dropped her right hand back to her side. She looked over at Lee, as she stated, “Well, given you will figure it out soon enough. This morning, we found out that all three of us are pregnant.”
Lee and River happily said, in unison, “Congratulations.”
The three lovers replied, in unison, “Thank you.”
Lee asked, “Who are the fathers?”
The three woman giggled for a few seconds. Lotton then said, “Each other. By using those instant man packets, and some medical tools.”
Lee plainly replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'I guess they went through with it, after all. As I vaguely recall Lotton saying they were talking about doing.”
Nearby, River mildly giggled, for a few seconds. She then stated, “I hope things work out for you three. Motherhood is a big role.”
Sawyer looked over at River, as she said, “If Revy can handle it, so can we.”
River agreed, “Good point.”
Lotton asked, “Now, before we do this. I need to know. How are you holding up Lee?”
Lee answered, “Except for the seeing the adult members of the Lagoon family in dominatrix outfits the first night. And the russian last night. It hasn't been that bad. But, never ever get on Balalaika’s bad side. I was wrong. She is quite imaginative.”
The other four women giggled, for a few seconds.
Lee inquired, “So, what is with this baby fever? Violin and Scorpius are pregnant. Balalaika and B are pregnant. You three are pregnant.”
As Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua calmed down, River softly giggled, some more, for a few seconds, at Lee comment.
Lotton stated, “While I mentioned we were talking about getting pregnant, when I capture you at the factory. I guess is really started while Roberta was chasing you on the highway. At the time, we were inside a bar talking.”
“The we being, Shenhua, Sawyer, myself, Dutch, Benny, Rock, Janet, Revy, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, Aeryn, Violin, B, Balalaika, and Eda.”
“That was when Balalaika and B announced they were pregnant. And I guess that it was the right push to get us three to have some kids, along with Aeryn and Violin having another kid. By the way, Eda and I won money on a bet, due to you escaping Roberta. We watched that chase on TV, and that awesome car chase.”
Lee smirked, as she questioned, “Interesting. So, did you finally tell them about your brainwashing programming has fully broken down?”
Sawyer spoke up, as she said, “Yes. She told us. And we are okay with it.”
Shenhua commented, “It is nice to know that she now continues to stay with us of her own volition.”
Lotton responded, “As you can see, they took the news well. These two said they had realized it for years, but they like having me around, as I like being around them. I guess that is as close to love as people like us will ever get.”
Lee commented, “I think you three have better hearts than you give yourselves credit for.”
Lotton said, “Thank you.”
Sawyer commented, “I appreciate your opinion.”
Shenhua said, “I will agree with sentiment.”
Lee inquired, “So, what can I expect tonight?”
Lotton responded, “It will not be painful. Just embarrassing.”
Lee replied, “Let me guess. Waterworks, and dominance positions?”
Sawyer complimented, “She's good.”
Shenhua agreed, “Yes. She is.”
Lotton said, “Yes. And be happy I talked them out of doing anything else. By the way, how did you know?”
Lee said, “You three may not realize this, but in my reality, the Black Lagoon manga continued after the Blood Trail arc. The title of the storyline is called the Wired Red Wild Card.”
Shenhua raised an eyebrow, as she replied, “Really?”
Sawyer said, “Interesting. We will have to check manga that out sometime.”
Lotton commented, “I looked forward to doing so. I wonder if we are in that storyline?”
Lee said, “Maybe. Maybe not. Though, that is where it is stated that Janet is a nymphomaniac.”
The other four women giggled, for a few seconds.
As the other four women calmed down, Lee continued, “Anyway, it is not hard to figured out that Sawyer here, is into waterworks and worse. Given Sawyer's manga counterpart's bed and butter joke in the Wired Red Wild Card. And trust me Lotton, you do not want to know the details behind that joke. Also, given Shenhua jokes about how men know much about stabbing, but very little about being stabbed, she is all about dominance.”
Shenhua and Sawyer overheard what Lee said, as they looked at each other.
Sawyer then said, loud enough for Lotton and Lee to hear, “Lee knows us too well, Shenhua.”
Shenhua agreed, “Very true. Now, let us teach Lee what we know in detail.”
Both women laughed, as they then, turned their attention back at Lee and River.
Lotton and Lee looked over at the two women for a moment, then back at each other.
Sawyer said, “Don't worry, Lee. At worst, tonight, you are going to get a little wet, in more ways than one.”
Lee slowly replied, “Okay...” She looked over at Lotton, as she admitted, “Though Lotton, I still haven't fully figured you out.”
Lotton smirked, as she joke, “I am here to make sure it is pleasurable for everyone.”
Lee giggled a little. She then playfully commented, “Shenhua was right. You would make a good host for a bordello.”
Lee's comment made all the adults in the room start to giggle.
As everyone calmed down, Sawyer turned to River, as she offered, “River, we would like to have you join us...”
Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton then smiled toward River, as Sawyer continued, “As we said. And from reading our minds. You know we are not planning do anything painful towards Lee. We just want to introduce her to new and interesting experiences that one's body can create.”
Lee looked over at River, as she said, “I don't mind.” She mentally added, 'And I honestly think this is an olive branch towards us. And we should take it.'
River remained silent for a few seconds. She then thought, 'You are likely right, Lee...'
River shrugged towards Sawyer, as she casually said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Oh... What the hell. Why not?... I'll join in.”
Lee, Lotton and Sawyer smiled towards River, as Sawyer stated, “Good.”
Lee said, “Thank you, River. I think we will enjoy this, together.”
Lotton happily commented, “The more, the merrier.”
Shenhua cracked a grin, as she agreed, “Yes. More fun for all of us.”
River then calmly started to take her clothing off, in front of the other women.
Lee also took off her robe and slippers.
When River and Lee had finished getting undressed, they put their clothing in a neat pile by the wall, on the right side of the room, near the entrance.
And though that night was strange, it was enjoyable for all parties involved.
The group soon lost track of time, from the fun they were having. And instead of River calling it at one AM, she called it at one thirty AM, because she had not looked at the clock on the wall of the room, since they had started.
Soon after, River and Lee made collected this clothing, without putting their clothing on, as they opened the dungeon door, and walked together, back up the stairs, to the bathroom, near bedroom.
At that point, the two were in such a good mood, that they did not care if someone saw them nude. Though, fortunately, everyone else, but those that had been in the S&M dungeon, had gone to bed.
When they reached their bathroom, they shared a shower together. As they did their best to help the other get completely cleaned off with soap and water.
They then dried off, got ready for bed, and went to sleep. But, this time, they shared the same bed. Fortunately, they were small enough to do so, on one of the twin sized beds in their room, without a problem.
And even though they had a good time that night, when they woke up the following morning, they felt physically dirty.
But, they were both feeling better by the next evening, around ten PM, when they met a group that set both Lee and River on edge.
As River closed the door to the dungeon behind them, Lee and River saw Roberta, Fabiola, and an adult, female Garcia Lovelace.
River and Lee were standing next to each other, as they saw the three other women were nude. And all three of the women were very young, sexy, and beautiful. For Roberta, it was due to the super-soldier serum she was exposed to. For Fabiola and Garcia, it was due to the rejuvenation therapy they had undergone.
And River and Lee noticed that the three women were turned towards each other, as they were quietly talking in spanish.
As Lee looked at the three women across the room in front of her, and River, she grimly thought, 'Revy mentioned they would show up eventually. At least River is here to keep them from going to far.'
And then Lee noticed a few minor scars on Roberta, such slash marks on Roberta left side. Three on the underside of the left part of her chest, right behind and below her left breast, and two slash marks on the outside, lower part, of her left upper arm. Also, near the shoulder, there was a larger scar over the two slash marks on her left upper arm.
Lee continued thoughts, 'She may have gotten more human looking cybernetic parts, but she likely left some of her older scars alone... Maybe as reminders of her past. Though, I am not sure she keeps those scars as a good reminder? Or, a bad reminder?...'
Beside her, River quietly said, “Either way is likely. And I am not really sure myself.” She mentally added, 'Though, I am not going to ask her. And neither are you. Because, we are not that crazy, as to risk annoying any of them. Considering what they might have planned for you, Lee.'
Lee thought, 'Thank you, River. And what are they talking about? I cannot hear them from here.'
River softly replied, “Believe it, or not. They are talking about what groceries they are going to purchase, tomorrow. When they get back home.”
Lee let out a quiet laugh.
It was the that three other women turned toward Lee and River. And there was an unease silence between the two groups of women.
River thought, 'Someone needs to get this ball rolling. And I think I will ask in english. I don't want remind them, that Lee and I know spanish. In case they try time to plan something, while thinking and speaking in spanish.'
'I regret not bringing a gun with me, tonight, when we met these three women. I am not sure I can take Roberta in a fight. And I don't want to find out.'
'But, the others were very cagey, in their thoughts, on what the schedule for these visiting groups were. So, I am not sure until we get to the dungeon, each night. And I don't dare bring a gun to all these visits, and risk being thrown off the island, with Lee trapped her. So, I will just have to make the best of the situation, and I will try to keep things peaceful.'
River asked, in english, “So, hi. How have things been with you?”
Fabiola said, in english, “Better than expected?”
Garcia shrugged, as she calmly said, in english, “Okay. I guess.”
Roberta cracked a grin, as she stated, in english, “Pretty good. And only looking better, considering what we are going to do.”
Lee responded, in english, “I hope you are not planning anything to wild?”
Roberta raised an eyebrow, as she casually commented, “It depends on what you define as wild.”
Fabiola and Garcia giggled at Roberta's comment, for a few seconds. River did not.
Roberta cryptically commented, “Either way, I am also glad you kept your promise.”
Lee inquired, “What promise?”
Roberta smile mischievously, as she coyly said, “You will find out, someday.”
Lee thought, 'I think it is best that I don't inquire further. Because, I am in a deep enough hole, as is, wit them.'
Nearby, River overheard them. She thought, 'I would be tempted to read Roberta's mind. But, I know better. And I have a feeling I will find out that answer, to that question, someday, myself.'
Then, a thought occurred to Lee, that made her worry, as the mentally reflected, 'Even with River here, I think I am in a very bad situation, because Roberta's definition of, wild, might be far broader than mine. And given my imagination, and my recently learning of my apparent latent sexual tastes. That is saying something.'
'I vaguely recall that the english translation of Black Lagoon swimsuit magazine, has Tex-Mex state with the picture of Roberta in that leopard skin bikini, he stated that Roberta gives the impression that she is an immoral woman. And she looks like the kind of person who can be unimaginably scary in sex.'
'Given the situation I am in, at the moment. Such word of god comments are absolutely terrifying to me.'
'And I am sure, that taking into account, Garcia and Fabiola have been with Roberta for at least a decade. They are probably not that far behind her, when it comes to sex... I mean, when I think about it, a couple of pages before that Black Lagoon swimsuit magazine talked about Roberta, it mentioned that Garcia was definitely a masochist.'
'And given the hell Garcia went through to save Roberta... That wouldn't be to far from the truth.'
River said, “Lee, don't worry. I won't let them go too far.”
Lovelace women overheard River, and started laughing.
Robert responded, in a sarcastic manner, “Just be happy we are not including you in this evening activities, my redheaded collaborator.”
River scowled, as she growled at Roberta.
This did little to make the three women, in front of her and Lee, back down.
Fabiola joked, “So, the kitty has claws.”
The three members of the Lovelace home laughed, for a few seconds, again.
As the three women calmed down, Roberta looked at River, as she warned, in a chilly tone of voice, “Don't forget, so do we.”
River forced herself to drop her scowl, and calm down, as she thought, 'I will not let them sucker me into a fight.'
Garcia was first to notice River's calmer demeanor, as she happily said, “It is good that you see reason in this situation.”
From the corner of her eye, Lee had watched as River scowled, and she heard her growl. She then noticed River force herself to calm down.
Lee complimented in thought, 'It is good that you calm down River. I have never personally seen you like that before.'
'And I realize I need to move the situation forward before something bad happens to the both of us. Roberta and Fabiola probably have the abilities to beat up both of us, strip us, bend us over, and have their way with us, in manners far worse than what they already have planned...'
'Do you understand, River?'
River quietly said, “Yes.” She thought, 'It is good that we are watching out for each other. And we are both are trying to keep this other from getting into trouble.'
Lee thought, 'Good. Now, let's see if I can change the subject away from this madness...'
Lee looked over at Garcia, as she asked, “So Garcia. Did you tell them what happened, at Jusenkyo?”
Garcia cracked a grin, as she answered, “Yes. And it appears that much has happened, for all of us, since then.”
Fabiola giggled a little. She then commented, “I found it absolutely hilarious that after evading all of us, it was Garcia here, who took you down.”
Roberta stated, “Yes. It seems the young master here did not need us to take revenge for him... Her. And she was able to handle her own vengence, on her own.” She turned to Garcia, as she smiled, while she went onto said, “I am quite proud of her.”
Garcia looked over at Roberta and returned Roberta's smile.
Garcia and Roberta then turned back to look at River and Lee.
Roberta lips curled into an evil grin. Her voice became as cold as ice, as she continued
“And given you now suffer the same monthly indignities as the rest of us. Along, with saving the master's life. We are not going to torture you to death.”
Fabiola smirked, as she said, “And instead, we are going to have our fun with you tonight, and leave our revenge against you at that.”
In response, Garcia smile, towards Lee and River, turned into a grin that was like the cat that ate the carney.
River thought, 'The scary thing is from what I am reading of Garcia's mind. She is as twisted as the other two. She likely would approve of just about anything Roberta and Fabiola would like to do to Lee. And I am guessing that is a lot. I will have to be mindful of the situation, tonight.'
Lee thought, 'Okay. The good news is that if I can survive the night with them, I will be fine, when it comes to them. That is very good indeed. And I think I will survive this.'
'Still, I guess I better explain myself, on the matter at hand.'
Lee stated, “I honestly didn't expect you, and Garibaldi, to try something, so soon. Speaking of Garibaldi, what happened to him?”
Garcia answered, “Oh, he is back home. Safe and sound.”
Lee deadpanned, “So, what are you no telling me?”
Garcia smirked, “A lot. But, to be fair. Since, you got all of us into this mess, I will tell you some of what happened. First, Garibaldi is not angry with you about being cursed, because he found a great way to use his curse. Besides the obvious. And though we did invite him. He politely declined to take part in this revenge.”
Lee thought, 'So, Garibaldi knows I was captured, by Garcia and her friends. That figures.'
Garcia continued, “That being, that someone gave Garibaldi a great idea, that instead of trying to find a cure for his curse, he should find a way for him to use that curse to give him more life. And he did just that.”
“I was there with him, and we found a magical user that could cast spells that would balance out the ages of his two forms.”
“This work by making his older male form younger, while aging her younger female form.”
“I was present when the spell was preformed. And it took about a day to accomplish. Though, it was not painful for Garibaldi. He slept through most of spell. When the spell finished its course, his male form was around thirty-five years old. And her female form is around twenty years old.”
“And as either a he, or she, Garibaldi can now have fun in both forms.”
"Also, due to this, he will not have more time to spend with his family. His wife loves that Garibaldi will not be around with her for many years to come. And he will likely live to be a great-granddaughter. Along with this, from what I understand, his family is okay with his curse. Though, his curse is being kept quiet from those outside his family."
"And Garibaldi is even letting his friend, Doctor Stephen Franklin study our curse. From what Garibaldi told me, during my last visit to Mars Dome One, Stephen has never been happier about studying a mysterious medical condition.”
Lee commented, “Given Doctor Franklin's medical background, and experience, he might actually figure out how Jusenkyo curses work.”
Garcia said, “I agree.”
Lee thought, 'Though, I do wonder.' Lee asked, “Did the gender change also cure Garibaldi's baldness as a man?”
Garcia stated, “Actually, yes. He is very happy about that. He said, it almost made the gender change worth it. And it seems that his hair is the same length in both gender forms. Though, with his female form smaller than his male form. His hair goes down his neck a few inches more in his female form, than his male form. And Garibaldi’s hair stays the same shade of brown in both forms. So, he does thank you for that.”
Lee stated, “Good. Well at least, there is that. Anyway, I am glad to hear that things worked out for Garibaldi. And if the opportunity presents itself, I will try to make it up to Garibaldi.”
Garcia coyly replied, “Don't worry. You will.”
Lee thought, 'I have a feeling that I don't want to know what Garcia meant by her comment.'
River thought, 'I agree. I have a feeling that I don't want to know either. Because, it might distract me from the matters at hand.'
Lee inquired, “So, are you still living as a guy? Or, do you live as a girl? Personally, I found it more fun to life as a girl.” She joked, “I found it is true. That girls really do just want to have fun.”
River giggled as Lee's comment, for a few seconds. While the three other women remained silent.
Lee thought, 'Tough crowd.'
Garcia tactfully responded, “I guess that is a matter of opinion. But, to answer your question. For various reasons, including the fact I prefer to be a man. And I will have you know. I am as handsome as a man, as I am beautiful as a woman.”
Lee stated, “I fully believe you. Your father was a handsome man. And I am sure your male form is handsome, as well.”
Garcia replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'I can see why our friends consider Lee to be polite. The problem is that she is also a manipulative bitch. Which means she will get no slack from us, tonight.'
Lee requested, “Please continued.”
Garcia said, “In the nation we live in, the culture is still very male orientated. Also, I am too well known as the patriarch of the Thirteenth family, for me to live as a woman.” She then gave Lee a lecherous smirked, as she continued, “Though, I have enjoyed the perks that my female form brings.”
Garcia then frowned, as she went onto say, “While also suffering the hardships of being a woman.” She then dropped her frown, to have a neutral expression on her face.
Lee pointed out, in a calm tone of voice, “Hey. I deal with those problems, as well, now.”
Garcia flatly replied, “I realize that.”
Lee asked, “So, did you create a paper trial for your female form? Such as, have you be your own sister?”
Garcia answered, “As I stated, I am too well known. And so were my parents. So, instead, I took a page from Ranma, and I create an identity were my female side is my cousin. And should I one day have to fake my death as a man, my will states that everything goes to my cousin, which is myself, as a woman.”
Lee complimented, “Nice idea. So, what name did you use as the alias for your girl form?”
Garcia said, “Maria Flores.”
Lee cracked a smile, as she responded, “In spanish, that name could mean, rebel flower. Not bad.”
Garcia returned Lee's smile, as she said, “I know.”
River mental reflected, 'Where have I heard the name, Maria Flores, from?... I know I have heard it in passing. Either spoken. Or, in thought. But, I cannot recall from where, right now. And the only, Maria, I can think of, at the moment, in connection to all this, is the Maria Zeleska. The cargo ship that Hotel Moscow uses as a base of operations. First as a secondary base, until Roanapur was destroyed. Now, they use the cargo ship as their main base of operations.'
'Though, I have a feeling that cargo ship has nothing to do with this question... And I do not have time to wonder about that question, right now... I believe I will think about this, later.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Well, that last thing I have to ask you three. Before we get started. Is like I asked the Lagoon members. How are we going to do this? Knowing you three, it could be anything.'
River thought, 'I admire that you are finally biting the bullet on this, Lee. And I hope for the best, that tonight works out for the both of us.'
Garcia answered, “Well, we debated whether we wanted to do everything in alphabetical, numerical, or chronological order. But, given we are under a three hour time limit, we decided to do only the highlights.”
Roberta stated, “We figured, if we did things none stop, we could cover the highlights in allotted three hour timespan. Even with the ten minute breaks. Which you will need.”
Garcia said, “And believe me, she can do it too. She is a real tiger in bed. And we are no pussies, either.”
Fabiola looked over at Garcia, as she politely said, “Language, please, Garcia. It is not fitting for a person of your station to speak in such a manner.” She then turned towards Lee. She grinned evilly, as she commented, “Instead, it is our place to state how we will put this cunt in her place.”
Lee thought, 'I never thought I would see the day when Fabiola would use such language. She must still really hate me, for what I did to Garcia. Not that I blame her for her hatred.'
River quietly replied, “Me neither.” She mentally added, 'And I think language is the least of our worries tonight.'
And River was proven correct, in her assessment of the situation.
While during the previous nights Lee learned more about sex than most people would know in a lifetime. The night she spent with the Lovelace women could be summed up in one word. Endurance.
None of the three women let up on Lee, for the solid three hours. As each of them took turned, taking lead, but the other two, at the time, assisted the one that was doing the activities on Lee. With Lee needing those ten minute breaks, every hour, to catch her breath.
And Roberta, Fabiola, and Garcia, lived up to the observations that Lee had of them.
Calling Roberta, unimaginably scary in sex, was an understatement. With Fabiola and Garcia not that far behind Roberta, in that department.
The time Lee spent with them was mostly painful for her, while pleasurable towards each other.
River had to stop all three of them, at various times, to prevent them from going to far. But, River was able too.
At the end of the three hour session, when River called session for the night, the three Lovelace women stated they that they were still not tired, and that they would be continuing having sex in the room, with each other, for a while longer.
River did not reply, for concern they might involuntarily volunteer her and Lee into their activities.
Instead, due to Lee being so tired, and exhausted, from their activities, River had to help Lee back to their bedroom, and to Lee's bed, where she soon fell fast asleep, from exhaustion.
Lee did not get out of her bed, until one PM the next afternoon.
(_)
This nightly revenge, on Lee, continued for around the next three weeks. With a different group of women every night.
And while some of Lee's victims, that were invite, decline the offer for revenge.
Some that considered going, decided not to. Such as Mal and Spike. Both of whom finally decided not to go, with each them stating, to the effect, that they were better people, than those that would take such actions towards another human being. Even one that so richly deserved it, such as Lee.
The Lagoon family, and their friends, that heard about Mal and Spike's comments on the matter, did not take their comments at insult. And they respected Mal and Spike's opinions on the matter.
Others choose to to take the Lagoon family up on their offer.
Though, not all the sessions were about the victims gaining satisfaction over Lee. Some where just about the victims having Lee understand what she had done.
Such people had their way with Lee then, afterward, broke down crying next to Lee. With Lee and River consoling them, after everything they had done that night.
Such as Leon, whom Lee held as they both cried, while Leon asked how Lee could do this to all of them. Lee did her best to apologize, while comforting her, as she cried with Leon. With River and the other Knight Saber present, quietly watching on.
Also, concerning the Knight Sabers. They did their sessions in pairs of two. For four consecutive nights.
And for some reason River could not figure out, she could not read their thought. But, because most of them were playing nice with Lee, she did not say anything about the matter.
And over the course of the few weeks, during the day, Lee started coming to the meals the Lagoon family hosted, with River by her side. And those present did not give Lee much trouble.
Unfortunately, Lee troubles were growing, in more ways than one. Ways in which even Lee, herself, was not yet aware of.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 04: “Back In Town.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Black Lagoon Reality. Location, Lagoon Island, inside the Lagoon mansion.
Around three weeks after Lee's nightly revenge started, during one morning, Lee had been around forty-five minutes since she woke up.
She had already gotten up, showers, clothed, and ready to face the day.
Currently, she was heading down a hallway that lead from the bedroom she shared with River, to the kitchen. There, she would get her breakfast, go to the patio with it, and sit at the table, under an umbrella, that River was at.
As Lee approached the kitchen, she thought, 'River already went ahead of me. Still, I am kind of concerned that my vagina is sore, after last night. But, I am okay with the situation.'
'I wonder if this is how Akira felt when she lost her virginities, to Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, back in Roanapur?... Not that it matters. While the others are tight lipped, River told me that she read their minds. And we are about done with revenge against me. With luck, this revenge will be over in a week, or so, and they will let me go with River. To I guess, back at the casino...'
'Where I am going to have to face Chang about sleeping with his girlfriend. And damn, she is fun in bed. Though, except for that first day, when she took my virginity, she has only done it with me as a girl. Still, it is fun, and when we do it during the day, it reminds me that there is a difference between having sex and making love.'
'And what we do is clearly making love... Mainly, because we care about each other, and we want to make sure the other is having fun, as well, during our loving making.'
As Lee came within ten feet of the hallway door to the kitchen, she smelled the wonderful of scramble eggs, bacon, and toast, already made, and waiting to be eaten. Unfortunately, Lee suddenly felt the urge to vomit.
Lee thought, with urgency, 'I can barely hold this in. I need to get to a bathroom, right now!'
Lee turned around, and quickly rushed to a nearby bathroom, in the hallway.
Fortunately, as Lee approached the bathroom, she saw that the door was open, and the light inside was off, meaning no one was inside.
Lee rush in, and on the way to the toilet, she flipped the light switch, and shut the door behind her.
A second later, when she reached the toilet, she drop to her knees, over the toilet, raised the seat, and vomited into the toilet both.
She vomited twice more, with the last time being a dry heave.
Lee kept her face over the toilet, as she thought, 'Keep it together, Lee. You will be fine. But first, we have to get through this nausea, that seems to be slowly going away.'
Lee then felt the nausea slowly subside, over the course of the next few minutes.
With the nausea mostly got, and Lee felt herself returned back to normal. She lifted her head up from the toilet bowl.
She wipe her mouth off with the back of her hand, as she thought, with relief, 'Much better. Now, to get cleaned up, and head to the patio. I may have lost my appetite, but I still want to keep River company.'
Lee then flushed the toilet and went to the sink to wash her hands. After cleaning her hands, she then kept water running, and cupped some water in her right hand, which she brought to her mouth.
She use the water to wash out her mouth, before spitting it out into the sink.
Lee cupped some more clean well water. And she swallowed water, so she could keep the small amount of bile in still her throat from making her esophagus sore, by clearing her throat some swallows of water.
Afterward, she turned off the water, and dried her hands, on a nearby hand towel, that was hanging by the sink.
As Lee did so, she thought, 'I am not getting sick? Am I?... I mean I have never been sick since changing into a girl, and putting on this magic ring... Except for food poisoning. And I haven't eaten anything that could get me sick like that... Besides, I would have diarrhea, if that was the case. And that end is doing fine, right now... So, what could it be?...'
Then, her eyes caught sight of a nearby shelf, where a box of tampons was placed. And a thought occurred to her, 'When was my last period?... It was suppose to be over week ago... I missed my period...'
Suddenly, Lee thought, with a mix of concern, and happiness, 'No way... I couldn't be... But, who?... I only have slept with women... Except that one time... With River!... I need to talk to her... And I need to tell her I am not upset with her...'
Lee opened the door to the bathroom. She then left the door open, as she turned off the light, and rushed out of the bathroom, into the hallway, towards the kitchen and patio.
Less then thirty seconds later, Lee made it to the kitchen. She saw that no one inside the room. And from the windows, out into the patio, Lee saw that everyone else on the island were already eating their breakfast on the tables outside.
Those women being, the Lagoon family, River, and Akira's family.
The Lagoon parents were sitting at one table. Nearby was Akira and her family. Then the Lagoon sisters. And finally River, was sitting at a table, by herself.
As Lee approached the door the patio, she stopped walking.
Lee sternly thought, 'I have to calm down. Even if I just found out I am pregnant, I still need to remain calm. If just burst out into the patio, people are going to notice, and demand what is going on... For the sake of any child I might be carrying within me, I do not want any of them, save for River, to know that I might be pregnant.'
'Also, there is a chance my morning sickness might hit me, again. And dry heaving on the concrete outside, in front of everyone, would be very embarrassing for me. Even after everything I have been through in the last few weeks.'
'Now, it is good that I see River, by herself. That works for me. If I play this right, none of the others will realize what is going on, as I get River to come with me, to talk to her, in private.'
'As such, I will just calmly walk over to River, and ask her to talk to me in private. Still, I need to speak, or the others will realize something is off about me.'
'Now, to do this...'
Lee then casually opened the door the patio, and she gently shut the door behind her.
Lee saw that it was a warm, sunny day, as she calmly walked over to, as her eyes quickly adjusted to the light.
Though, Lee notice that her presence did not go unnoticed. And that others saw that she did not have a plate and glass. And do the absence of those two items, she was drawn attention from the other women.
Lee thought, 'I knew I forgot something... Though, there is nothing I can do about it now.'
Lee then calmly walked towards where River was sitting.
When Lee reached River, River was sitting at a table, looking at her breakfast, as she took a swallow from her glass of orange juice.
Lee stood across the table from River, as she looked at the redhead. She calmly said, “River, we need to talk about something in private.”
At a nearby table, where the Lagoon parents were sitting, Revy turned to Lee, as she joked, “Forget something, Lee?”
Rock on the other hand was look at Lee more closely. And from the way Lee carried herself, she could tell something was wrong with Lee.
Rock continued to look at Lee, as she requested, “Hold it, Revy. Something is wrong here.”
Rock's comment put all of the Lagoon parents on edge, as the turned to River and Lee, as they paid attention to what was happening nearby.
River set her glass of orange juice down on her table. She looked up at Lee, as she gave the black hair woman a warm smile. She casually said, “I know, Lee. To answer your question. Yes. You're pregnant. And I sense that you are carrying twins.”
River thought, 'And I got you pregnant. When we made love, I noticed that you were in heat. So, I decided to mark my territory, by getting you pregnant. So, everyone knows you belong to me... Or, at least they will realize that you are already taken.'
Everyone else, whom was paying attention, went silent at River's directness towards Lee. Though, Lee could not help but blurt out, “Twins?!” She then looked down at the front of her body, as she placed both her hands on her lower stomach.
Nearby, at the table where the Lagoon parents were sitting, Janet had not been fully paying attention to what was going on between River and Lee. With her getting a drink from, her glass of orange juice, as River made her statement to Lee, about Lee being pregnant with twins. So, Janet missed the comment.
Though, Janet did realize she missing something important being said, as she looked at those at her table She set down her glass on the table, while she asked, “What is going on?”
The other Lagoon parents continued to look at Lee and River.
Rock answered, “I think Lee is pregnant, with twins.”
Rock's caused Janet to look back at River and Lee. Her lips curled into a wicked grin, as she said, “Oh, that is interesting to find out.”
Revy inquired, “Very. Though, if Lee is pregnant, who is the father?”
Rock stated, “I think, River is the father. Though, I am not sure when this could have happened.”
Benny realized something, as she commented, “Oh hell... Remember that River deflowered Lee the afternoon before we had our way with Lee in the S&M dungeon. She likely also did it with Lee, as a guy.”
Dutch deadpanned, “Now, that is an interesting mental picture.”
Janet chirped, “But, not a bad one.”
In response, Dutch shrugged her shoulders, as she replied, “True. I have heard worse.”
Revy looked over at River, as she loudly whined, “River?!”
Nearby, Revy's loud comment broke Lee out of her stupor. She dropped her hands to her side, and as she looked up over at Revy.
River looked over at Revy. She smirked, as she stated, “What can I say, Lee was too much of a woman for me to be with, in just one gender.”
Lee turned to River, as she thought, 'Nice compliment.' She said, “Thank you.”
River turned her head up to Lee, as she kindly replied, “You're welcome.”
Janet looked around her table, as she pointed out, “Hey guys. Look on the bright side. Lee got herself knocked up, with River. This is a total, guilt free revenge trip, here.”
Everyone thought about what Janet said, for a few seconds. They then began laughing a Lee's situation.
Between laughs, Benny asked, “Now, that I think about it. What is Chang going to say about this?”
Dutch commented, “Knowing those two, they will likely share Lee.”
Janet said, “I agree.”
Benny stated, “I would not to be in the middle of those two.”
Rock agreed, “Me neither.”
Revy joked, “Oh, Lee will be in the middle of those two, in more ways than one. Considering Lee is stuck as a girl, with River and Chang being able to change into men. Lee is going to be one in the middle of their human sandwich.”
Revy comment made the others at her table laugh even harder.
Lee noticed this reaction by the Lagoon parents, to her current state of being. She turned to look at the Lagoon parents. Lee whined, “Stop it! I never wrote any scenes where people laughed at you, when you all got pregnant.” She turned to River, as she noticed River was laughing as well. She asked, “River? You too?”
River forced herself to stop laughing, as she stated, “Sorry, Lee. I cannot help it. And I remind you that you did tell me you were planning on having kids.”
Lee replied, in a flabbergasted tone of voice, “Eventually. Not now.”
This caused everyone else, whom heard Lee, to laugh even harder.
As Revy caught her breath, she said, “I cannot believe that you, Lee, whom wrote diligently about everyone wearing a rubber. And reminded many of us to do so. Forgot to wear one, yourself.”
Lee heard what Revy said. She turn to Revy. She had the sense to look embarrassed, as she sheepishly replied, “I admit that oversight was more out of forgetfulness, than hypocrisy.”
By then, many of those laughing were on the verge of tears.
It took a few minutes for everyone to calm down. While they did so, Lee turned to River, as she said, “We still need to talk about this, in private.”
River looked Lee, in her eyes, as she inquired, “I agree. We will do so, after lunch. Still, how is your morning sickness?”
Lee answered, “Not bad. I can feel my appetite coming back.”
River said, “Okay. We will talk after lunch. But, eat what you can. And try to keep in mind that you are now eating for three.”
Lee replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
By then, the Lagoon sisters, and Akira's family, had overheard what was going on. And the nine women kept their attention on the two lovers, River and Lee.
Natsuru commented, “All joking aside, Lee. We have been through that. You need to eat lightly. With small meals throughout the day. Just because it is call morning sickness does not mean that you cannot experience throughout the day.”
Benny agreed, “Yea. Morning sickness can be a pain. But, it should go away completely in a few months. Then, you will have about a month's worth of peace. After which, the baby. Or, in your case, babies. Will start moving, and later start kicking you, from the inside. This will be keep you up at all hours of the night and day. You will no longer be on your own schedule, but you kids' schedule. And even after you have the kids, they will still keep you up for years to come. With the added problem of you changing their diapers.”
There was some mild giggling from among those sitting at the tables, as Lee groaned.
Lee thought, 'They are right. As such, I might as well be polite.” Lee turned to Benny and Natsuru, as she said, “Thank you for your words of advice.”
Benny chirped, “Hey. The thought of you going through twice as many births, as any of us, is satisfaction enough for us.”
Revy stated, “I hear that.”
Lee saw the Lagoon parents nodded in agreement.
Natsuru smiled towards Lee, as she kindly commented, “You are welcome, Lee. And keep in mind that being pregnant can also be a pleasant experience in a number of ways. Feeling a life slowing grow inside you can also be a blessing.'
Akira commented, “We enjoyed our pregnancy, and you should, too.”
Ranma said, “Yea. They were fun.”
Lee thought, 'I hope so, Natsuru, Akira, Ranma. I would love to say that I am happy and overjoyed at being pregnant. That it doesn't bother me in the least. But, that would backfire on me in this crowd.'
Natsuru offered, “And if you need advice, on this matter. Let us know.”
Lee replied, “I will.”
River giggled.
Lee noticed River giggling, as she mentally reflected, 'Yea River. I am happy about being pregnant. And I don't mind that you got me pregnant. Still, I would like know why you got me pregnant? And how you pulled it off? And that is why we need to talk in private.'
River said, “Don't worry. We will get to that, later, in our bedroom. And instead, we will do it this morning, instead of after lunch.”
Lee thought, 'Thank you. That is fine with me. The soon we talk about this, the better for all of us.'
Molly spoke up, as she said, “Hey Lee.”
Lee turned to Molly, and as she politely inquired, “Yes?”
Molly said, “We want to say congratulations to you.”
Kristina stated, “Yea. We think you will make a wonderful mother.”
Ranma said, “The same goes for us.”
Yurika commented, “Yes. Your had a hand in in my and my sisters creations, and we turned out fine. So, I am sure you will do a good job with those two growing inside you.”
Akira said, “And I am sure River will help you in any way you need.”
River stated, “I will.”
Lee looked around her, as she saw that the Lagoon sisters, Ranma's family, smile towards her. Their kindness warmed Lee's heart, a little. Making her feel better, and more alive, about her current situation of being pregnant with twins.
Lee smiled towards them, as she said, “Thanks, girls.”
Lee then turned around, and headed back into the kitchen, to get some breakfast.
Soon, Lee returned back outside. In her hands, a plate of eggs, toast, and bacon. Along with utensils, napkins, and a glass of orange juice.
Lee then sat down beside River, at the table her redhead lover was at.
The others were polite enough to leave the two of them alone, as they ate their breakfast, while they talked about various casual subject. With the two of them tabling the discussion on Lee's pregnancy, until later.
Fortunately, Lee able to eat some breakfast, drink her orange juice, and keep it down.
(_)
An hour later, right after Lee and River finished breakfast, the two lovers turned to the guest bedroom they share, so they could talk in private. The only light in the room was the lamp, on the nightstand, between their beds.
River had already walked inside of the bedroom, and Lee was behind her.
Lee gently closed and locked the door behind her, using the lock on the knob.
Lee then walked up to River, as River stopped and turned around to face Lee.
Lee came to a stop, a few feet in front of River, with both women looking at each other, in their faces.
River asked, “So, how do you want to start this conversation?”
Lee said, “First. Can you sense anyone coming near the hallway outside? I don't want any eavesdroppers.”
River answered, “Yes. And we are fine. No one is around. There are not even any bugs in the room.”
Lee replied, “Good.”
River complimented, “I am see you are still as cagy as ever.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, a she commented, “It is a defining character trait.”
River responded, “And one that I admire.”
Lee stated, in a calm tone of voice, “Thank you. Now, I am sure you already know, I am not upset with you for knocking me up. But, I need to say that to you, out loud. For both our benefits.”
River said, “Thank you.”
Lee soberly questioned, “You're welcome. Now, I need to know. Why did you get me pregnant?”
River gave Lee a weak smile, as she calmly stated, “It was like you said. That time at the Rats Nest. Which, given how long it was for you, was decades ago.”
Lee sadly admitted, “Sadly, it was decades ago. And I do not remember all our conversations during that time.”
River said, “Don't worry. I will help you jog you memory, later.”
Lee replied, “I looked forward to it. And I was wondering, how long ago, for you, was the conversation you are talking about, between us?”
River responded, “A few months ago. And we were talking about pirates. During the discussion, you mentioned an interest fact about pirates. That pirate women usually escaped their execution by become pregnant.”
Lee pointed out, “At least until the women gave birth.”
River's smile began warmer, as she raised an eyebrow. She said, “I see you have regained the knowledge you have learned.”
Lee stated, “Yes. For the most part.”
River replied, “Good.”
Lee said, “But, even with my pregnancy, that might not stop the others from hurting me.”
River stated, “I wouldn't worry so much, about our current situation. These women are not going to touch you, until you give birth. Mainly because they likely want you to experience the pregnancy, and the pain of giving birth. And don't deny it. I know you are looking forward to both.”
Lee commented, “I admit that I am looking forward to my pregnancy. But, when it comes to labor and birth, I am just curious. Still, I know it is going to hurt like hell.”
River complimented, “I admire you about that. Most women, when they get pregnant, think, at some level, that their birth is going to be a magic time for them. You are grounded enough to admitted that giving birth will be a painful nightmare.”
Lee shrugged, as she replied, “Yes. But, let's focus on the here and now. And worry about that, later. Such, as why you think I don't have to worry about the women here, coming after me, once I give birth.”
River casually responded, “Simple. By the time you give birth, they should have cooled off over their revenge against you. Which, they have already had, in a number of ways.”
Lee conceded, “I can see what you are saying. Most of them are not that merciful. They just likely consider changing diapers to be a worse punishment than hanging.”
The two lovers silently looked at each other for a few seconds.
Then, they both of them could not help, but burst out giggling, for several more seconds, at Lee's comment.
As they calmed down, Lee said, “Okay. I can admit that was funny.”
River stated, “Yes. It was. Anyway, pleading the belly is what I did for you. We both agree, they want you to have our kids. And they are not going to keep a pregnant woman around, that is not part of their family.”
“They will likely soon let us leave. Probably around a week, at most. Once we can leave, we will head back the casino. Chang wants to talk to you.”
Lee slightly stiffened for a couple of seconds. She then forced herself to relax, as she commented, “I hope it is nothing to bad. Having his lover getting someone else pregnant could be embarrassing for him.”
River smiled, as she casually responded, “I won't worry about that. I think you will enjoy what he has to say to you.”
River dropped her smile, as she continued, with her tone of voice becoming slightly more serious, “Also, once this news hits the rumor mills, most of those that are after you. Including those that are going to go punish you tonight, and subsequent nights. Will consider your spending a lifetime as a girl, becoming pregnant, and giving birth, to be punishment enough.”
“And with them knowing you are now pregnant, I can use it as an excuse to get them to stop passing you around at night. So, as I said, I do not worry too much about it.”
Lee thought about what River has said.
Lee calmly questioned, “So, your plan has been to intentionally impregnate me, to get me out of revenge by those after me?”
River flatly replied, “Yes.”
Without warning, Lee took a few steps forward, leaned over, and kiss River deeply, on her lips.
River returned Lee's kiss.
A few seconds later, right after their lips finally broke, Lee complimented, “You're brilliant. You really are a genius. And if you had told me your plan, beforehand. I would have likely let you impregnate me.” She then continued in a more serious tone of voice, “But, you better not abandon me, nor our children, or I will hunt you to the ends of existence. And you know I am trained to do so.”
River giggled, for a few seconds. She then said, “Don't worry. I won't.”
Lee responded, “I believe you. Now, could you give me some details on how you tricked me, to get me pregnant. As I pointed out. I am not upset. I would just like some details. First being, when you took my virginity, how did you not get me to think about using a condom, before, and during, when we were making love on the beach?”
River smiled, as she happily stated, “Simple. Remember, I am a telepathic genius. And I have spent months reading your thoughts, and learning how your mind works.”
“And dear, you have a beautiful mind that is good at scheming, and being aware of the situations around her. I am just better at it, and I have a few advantages, than you do not. While, you had a few advantages of your own. Also, you were still slightly in shock from everything that happened to you, the previous night. You had a lot on your mind.”
Lee commented, “Ain't that an understatement?”
River agreed, “Isn't it? You were dealing with getting over half a century of memories back, all at once. And also having to deal with not only being captured by those after you, but facing their revenge on you that night.”
“Taking all the into account, steering your mind away from thinking about using a condom was not that hard. And if you did think of using a condom... Well...”
Lee guessed, “You had a condom in one of your pockets, that had pinholes in it, which would have made it burst, when you inserted it into me. Thus, I would still end up pregnant, with me thinking that I would not.”
River smiled, as she complimented, “As I said, a beautiful mind for scheming. And you are correct.”
Lee commented, “I would not have been mad at you, either way.”
River kindly said, “I know. And besides, after all that had happened to you, you really needed to get laid, by someone you know, whom cared about you. And, as I told the others, I would not let them take your virginity. That is a special event. As such, it should be done, in a relaxing environment, and done by someone that cares about you. So, it is both pleasant, as can be. And memorable, in a good way.”
Lee smiled, as she complimented, “I fully agree. Whatever you were before we met. You are now a perfect balance between genius and insanity. With neither overshadowing the other. Please, don't change, one bit.”
River's smile grew a bit wider, as she happily responded, “I promise I will try not too.”
Lee took a step back from River. She looked down at herself. She then looked back up at River, in her face, as she commented, “On the other hand, I am going to be changing a lot.”
River stated, “Listen. Yes, you will put on some weight, due to the pregnacy. But, I will help you maintain your physique, during a diet and exercise regiment I know of, that is both conformable to you, and will not risk our children. So, you will keep your figure after you give birth.”
Lee stated, “That is not really what I am talking about. But, thank you. What I am talking about is having these children is going to emotionally change me.”
River said, “Dear, I doubt you will change that much.”
Lee stated, “I am not sad about this. But, I have known a number of woman that have gotten pregnant and had children. Having and raising a child changes a person. Sometimes for the better. Sometimes for the worst. I don't know which way I will go. But, I know I will not be the same person I am now.”
River thought, 'Such maturity, on such an important matter. That is why I love you so much.' She kindly said, “Then, I will have to just make sure you turned out for the better.”
Lee responded, in a joyous tone of voice, “I love you.”
River calmly, though happily said, “I love you too.”
River then took a step closer to Lee. To where they were less than a foot apart. And as both of them continued to look the other in the face, River slid her arms over Lee's shoulders, with her cupping her hands a few inches behind Lee's head.
Lee gave River a smile, as she pointed out, “You know... It is the woman in the relationship, that hugs someone like that. The man hugs from around the chest, and waist.”
River just continued to smile as Lee, as she broke apart her hands, ad she slowly slid her arms down Lee's sides.
Lee looked at River's face, as she raised her arms, over River's arms, to allow River to lightly place the palms of her hands on the lower sides of Lee's abdomen.
River playfully questioned, “Like this?”
In response, Lee brought arms over hand River's shoulder. She then gently slid her arms along the tops of River's shoulders, until she could loosely held her hands behind River's head.
Lee happily replied, “Yes. Like that.”
River happily thought, 'If you want to play the woman in this dance of, right now. I am more than happy to take lead, as the man. You are pregnant, after all. So, it is your right to play the woman.'
River then leaned closer to Lee, and kissed Lee on her lips.
They slightly tightened their embrace, as Lee returned River's kissed.
They went onto deeply kiss each other for several seconds, until they broke their kiss.
Though, they continued to embrace one another, as the looked each other in the eyes.
They both saw, in the eyes of the other, that they were happy, and at peace, with what was happening to them, at the moment.
Lee smiled, as she said, “You know? The funny part is, that we really beat them. Didn't we?”
River returned Lee's smile, as she replied, “Yes. We did.”
Lee commented, in a casual manner, “And if I had known that all it would take to get them to call off their revenge, was being cursed to turn into a girl. Have a nice second childhood, to grow up to be a wonderful woman. Spending a few weeks worth of nights experiencing interesting, and unique forms of sex. And getting knocked up. I would have just done that in the first place. And not have gone through all that hardship. Including, that entire chase with those after me.”
River teased, “But, don't you realize, silly. Foreplay is the best part of the game.” She then leaned back over and kissed Lee again.
Lee returned River's kiss, as they continued to deeply kiss, while staying embraced, for another several seconds.
As they broke their kiss, the maintained their embrace, as they look at each others face, again.
Lee commented, “Since, I am the mother, and full woman, in this relationship. I guess it is up to me to when we have sex.”
River said, in a supportive tone of voice, “Yes. I guess that would be the case.”
Lee gave River a lopsided grin, as she offered, “So, let's just strip down and have some sex here, to celebrate my pregnancy, and us getting the last laugh?”
River gave Lee a leering grin, as she happily replied, “Sure.”
They then gently broke their embrace, took a few steps back from each other, and began to disrobe. As they put their clothing in piles on the floor, by the wall, near the TV and dresser were.
As they each took off their shirts, Lee commented, “There is one point I don't think some women get, about being pregnant?”
By then, both had taken off their shoes, and were working on removing their belts, and pants, as River asked, “What is that?”
Lee stated, “As women advances in their pregnancy, their stomachs start to get larger, and some of them began to see themselves as fat. But, they don't realize that being fat is not just the stomach, it is the rest of the body, as well. Though, as you pointed out. If the woman watches their weight a bit, and doesn't overeat. While still doing moderate exercise. Once the woman gives birth to their child, or children. In my case. The woman will retain her figure. Except for maybe a little baby fat around their tummy.”
Both women were then working on unhooking their bras, as River agreed, “That is a good point. So, as you get bigger around you stomach, are you going to ask me if you look fat?”
By then, they had begun to remove their panties.
Lee was wearing some black boyshorts, while River was wearing some red silk panties, that matched the color of her dyed red hair.
As they removed their underwear, Lee answered, “No. I have been overweight before, and it is no joking matter.”
River replied, “Fair enough.” She thought, 'Yea. You have probably been through the hole wringer on that issue.'
After they tossed their panties into the piles they had made for their clothing, they stood completely nude, facing towards each other.
Lee politely requested, “By the way, if you don't mind, could we first do it, with you as a guy? Then, you could alternate between being a girl, or guy.”
River replied, “That is fine with me. Though, might as I ask why?”
Lee said, “Sure. I would like to experience you inside my again, as a man, as you did on the beach. I honestly enjoyed it.” She then continued, in a slight joking manner, “And since I am already pregnant, it is not like you can impregnate me again.”
River giggled. She then said, “Fine with me. I like it either way. And, now that I think about it. After all these weeks, I don't think anyone has done anything anal to you.”
Lee conceded, “I know. It is kind of surprising. Though, I guess it is a case of. Why going through the back door, when the front door is left wide open?”
River agreed, “That is a very good point. Would you like me to enter your back door. I don't mind. But, I would have to get a condom first, for sanitary reasons.”
Lee replied, “Maybe later. I am not real crazy about doing that.”
River playfully pointed out, “You were open to everything else.”
Lee admitted, “Good point. But, let's save that for later.”
River thought, 'That might be a good idea. It is always good to save something new for later.' She said, “Alright. Now, let's get this party started.'
River then sneezed, and changed into a man.
Lee reach down with her right hand, and began rub, and finger her genitalia, as she looked at River. She commented, “I am going to need a minute to get wet enough to do this.”
River reached down and work on his genitalia, with both his hands. He looked at Lee, as he stated, in his masculine voice, “Don't worry, it is going to take a minute to for me to rise to occasion.”
Both lovers laughed at their situations, for a few seconds
A minute later, Lee felt that she was wet enough, down there. She looked over at River, and she could see that River was clearly ready. Though, out of properness. She asked, “Are you ready?”
River was looking over at Lee, as he answered, “Yes. I am ready.”
Lee said, “Okay. And if it is okay, we will do it on your bed.”
River replied, “Fine with me. Both our beds are already made. So, that will not be a problem.”
Lee and River then causally walked up to each other.
As they did reached other, they slowly move around, while turning clockwise, to where River facing his bed, and Lee facing the TV, with her back to the foot of River's bed.
Lee then took a few small steps back, and River take a few small steps forward.
As Lee stopped with the back of her legs hit the end of River's bed. River stopped on inches away from Lee's breasts.
Lee had to look up, to see River's face. As he male body, River was almost a head higher than Lee. Where, when River was a woman, Lee was a few inches taller than her.
Lee saw River was looking down at her, with an amused smirk on his face.
Lee commented, “I not use to being the shrimp in this situation.”
River said, “I know. But then, being the smaller one in this situation is not a bad thing.”
Lee responded, “I agree. I would like to start with the missionary position. But, later this morning, I would like to do it again, with you as a man. With me on top, cowgirl style.”
River casually stated, “I don't mind you doing all the work.”
Lee said, “I thought you won't. Now, let's have some fun.”
River agreed, “Yes. Let's...” River then used his hands to grip, in a firm, but not tight, on the sides of Lee's torso. He stated, “I got you. Just lean back on the bed. And then, I will accompany you.”
Lee teased, “Anything you say, lover boy.”
River chuckled, as Lee started to lean back towards the bed, without falling.
River used his hands to slowly glide Lee onto the bed, as he leaned down, with Lee.
After Lee came to a rest, with her back on River's bed. River let go of her. And she used her hands to push her body to where her head was resting on River's pillow.
With her head raised slightly by the pillow, Lee was able to look over at River. River was looking back at her.
Lee warmly smiled at River, as she parted her legs, by twenty degrees in each direction. As an invitation to River, to come inside her.
River then crawled onto the bed, and he was soon on top of Lee, and inside her. With both of them having a pleasant time with each other.
(_)
A little over two hours later, Lee and River left the their bedroom, and into the empty hallway. They were both women, and clothed only in their panties, as they headed for the nearby bathroom. So, they could shower, and get cleaned up together.
When they were done getting cleaned, and drying off, they headed back to their bedroom, in the nude. They were not caught. And when they reached their bedroom, they stepped inside the room, and put on some fresh clothing.
(_)
Later that day, Lee and River learned that, due to Lee's pregnancy the Lagoon parents had agreed to call off their revenge. Though, the Lagoon parents did hold Lee for another week, before they finally decided to let her go with River.
Still, after that week was over. They said they would let Lee go with River.
Though, they did not return River's reality device, because they stated they wanted to have more dinner together. But, not before they had dinner together, one last time. Dinner was steak and potato salad, with either lemonade, beer, or soda.
It was sunset, by the time dinner was over.
Everyone stood around, between the tables, on the back concrete patio of the mansion.
Those present were the entire Lagoon family, Akira's entire family, River, and Lee.
The others were looking at Lee and River, as the two women stood beside each other, while facing the others, and having their backs to outside kitchen wall. River stood to Lee's left side.
The only things that Lee and River had with them, were clean clothing, that they had on when they first came to the island, and Lee's items.
Those items being her weapons and bandolier. Which were returned to her, earlier that afternoon. With Rock stating that she admired Lee's behavior during this time. And Lee thanked Rock for her compliment.
Lee had on her bandolier across her chest. With her throwing knives in the front, and her collapsed staff in a sheath on the back of the bandolier.
They had no luggage because the clothing they had on when the had left the island with their clothing and personal items.
The other clothing Lee had was borrowed clothing, from the Lagoon family.
River left her spare clothing on the island, as well. Though, her clothing was washed, with the clothing the Lagoon family had provided for Lee.
The clothing had been separated and folded. With River's clothing being put away. And the borrowed clothing being returned to the Lagoon family. While River kept he spare clothing there, for the next time she came to visit the Lagoon family.
As the others on the patio looked at River and Lee, Rock said, “I guess you are all set to leave.”
River calmly pointed out, “Except for a means to leave, we are ready to depart.”
Rock replied, “Yes. And here is your reality device back.” Rock then walked over to River and Lee, as she pulled out the reality device, from one of her pants pockets, that she had been given by River, a month ago.
Rock came to a stop in front of River, as she held out the reality device for the redhead.
River gently took the device from the black haired japanese woman's hands. Rock turned around, and walks back to her family. With her circling back around, to look at Lee and River, as she came to a stop, while standing next to her family.
River looked at the reality device, in her hands, for a few seconds. She then looked back up at the group around her, as she kindly said, “Thank you.”
Rock replied, “You're welcome. And River, thank you for polite about all this.”
River said, “Given the situation. It was the wisest choice to take.”
Rock agreed, “Yes. It was.” She turned to Lee, as she continued, “And Lee.. I never thought we would reach this point. But, it looks like you are free to go.”
Lee pointed out, “Well, as free as motherhood will let one be.”
The others giggled, including River, for a few seconds.
As everyone calmed down, Rock said, “You have a point there.”
Benny commented, “Well Lee, you are lucky the others in line were satisfied with learning that you are pregnant, or the revenge would have continued.”
Lee thought, 'Just as you thought, River.'
From the corner of her left eye, she saw River crack a smile. Lee turned to Benny, as she casually lied, “I do not know about that. Still, I think I may have gotten the shorter end of the stick on this.”
Benny replied, “Perhaps.”
Janet looked at the bottom front part of Lee's tucked in shirt. She then looked back at Lee's face, as she commented, “I see you are not showing, yet, Lee.”
Lee stated. “I am only a month pregnant. Even on a trim body like this, it takes about six weeks to two months to start to show. You should know this.”
Dutch commented, “She's right.”
Janet shrugged, as she responded, “Well, I did have other things on my mind, during those earlier months of our pregnancies... Still, where are you heading, Lee?”
Lee answered, “The casino, to be with River... And I guess Chang... Though, I am not sure how that is going to work out.” She mentally added, “River, you did state that when we got there, we were going to talk to Chang.'
From the corner of her eye, Lee saw River nodded her head once, ever so slightly.
Dutch stated, “Knowing Chang. I am sure he will make use of you in some way.” She looked at River, as she inquired, “So, when will it be, when you go back?”
River answered, “Exactly two weeks after Lee first left her reality.”
Dutch said, “We will keep that in mind.”
Janet offered, “Lee, if you ever get bored with River, come back to see us. There was so much we can still show you, that we did not have time for.”
There was some giggling among the crowd, but not everyone responsed to Janet's comment, with humor.
Lee calmly responded, “Thanks, but no thanks. And I guess this will be the last we will be seeing each other.”
Revy snorted, as she stated, “I doubt it. We plan on spending some time on that little Island city, as well. If, for any other reason, to got to the Rats Nest. And when we are in the neighborhood, we do plan to look you up.”
Lee commented, “Well, for the sake of your friends at the casino. I am sure you will behave during those visits.”
Revy replied, “We'll see.”
Lee commented, “And as River pointed out. I don't think Bao can handle you.”
Dutch said, “Don't worry. We have that covered.”
Molly stated, “Yea. Besides, we have nothing better to do.”
There was some giggling from the Lagoon sisters, along with Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto.
Though, Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, River, and Lee, remained silent.
Lee turned to Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, as she inquired, “So, where is your family heading off for?”
Ranma answered, “I guess we are likely going back to your Plata Podrido, as well. Around the same date as you are heading too.”
Lee thought, with concern, 'And here I thought I would not have to worry about not having to deal with any of with them, again. I should have known better.'
River softly said, “You're correct. That clearly isn't going to happen.”
Lee turned to River. She then looked out among the crowd, as she said, in a lighthearted tone of voice, “I don't know is my reality can handle all of you.”
There was much laughter from everyone present, including River and Lee.
As everyone calmed down, Yurika stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Have a little faith, Lee. We are not that bad.”
Nodoka commented, “As my sister pointed out, and as you know personally, we are okay people. And as long as we don't raise too much hell, we all have little to worry about.”
Lee admitted, “You two are right about that. And to be honest, I am not worried about most of you. Just one or two of you.”
Everyone silently looked over at Revy.
Revy noticed this, as she flatly said, in annoyed tone of voice, “What?... Alright. I will try to behave.”
Lee suggested, “Just don't get drunk while you are armed, and you should be fine.”
Revy turned to Lee, as she sarcastically replied, “I'll try.”
Lee asked, “By the way, where is Eda and Yolanda?
The everyone, but River, looked over at Lee, as Akira answered, “Last we heard, Eda headed back to that island, to talk to Yolanda, after we first lost you. And when Revy here contacted them, they were still at the island. Though, I think that Eda and Yolanda will be closing the burger van.”
Lee said, “Damn. And they cooked such good burgers and fries, too.”
Akira agreed, “I know. Though, I doubt they would just leave the island. They have no reason to. I think they kind of like it there.”
Natsuru commented, “Also, they have an apartment there. And really not place better to be.”
Lee said, “I know the feeling.”
Akira replied, “Of course.”
Mikoto turned to Natsuru, as she commented, “Just like us, mom.”
Natsuru looked over at her daughter, with blue haired, with black highlights, as she said, “Yes. Dear.” Mother and daughter then turned back to looked at Lee, and River.
Lee requested, “And the Lowe family?”
Benny answered, “Last we heard, they are back at the island, as well. And they are going to continue to run their diner. Speaking of which, I still can't believe we never noticed them there.”
Lee pointed out, “Pedro and I met there, regularly. We never once saw any of you. Given your wealth, we figured you considered going there beneath you. And now that I think about it, I believe that is what the Lowe family figured, as well.” She mentally added, 'Given that three of them are savvy geniuses, and the other is very savvy, I am not surprised they came up with that plan, to help me.'
In response to Lee's thoughts, Lee heard River let out a small laugh.
Janet conceded, “There is some truth to that. But, I think we may go there, when we return to the island.”
Dutch casually said, “I could go for some fried eggs, and hashbrowns cooked the way I want. That I don't have to cook, myself.”
Kristina agreed, “So can I.”
Dutch and Kristina looked at each other, as they chuckled a little. They then turned their attention back to Lee, and River.
Lee stated, “Go ahead. They cook good food there. And their sweet iced tea is the best on the island.”
Revy flatly commented, “I don't see how you could like that piss.”
Lee said, in jest, “Well, sweet iced tea is a good liquid to drink on a hot, humid day, when you want to remain sober.”
A few people let out a few laughs towards Lee's comment.
As everyone calmed down, Lee casually said, “Sorry Revy. I couldn't help myself.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Yea. That was a good one.”
River commented, “It is going to be a full place, at the island.”
Lee casually agreed, “You got that right.”
Janet responded, “And it will be fun.”
River said, “We can only hope so... Well, we better get going. I would love to say it was fun. But, given the circumstances that lead us here, and what happened on the island, at night. I am just glad it is over.”
Janet conceded, “Fair enough.”
Lee calmly said, “I considered this an educational experience, thatt I get to walk away from... See you all on the other side of the looking glass, girls.”
Most of the others said, almost in unison, either, “Goodbye,” “Bye,” or “See you later.”
River took a step closer to Lee, where they were standing less than an inch next to each other, side by side.
Then, with her reality device still in her hands, River thought of a specific place in Daiyu Palace Casino, in Lee's reality, two weeks later, after Lee left, as a specific time of day. She then pressed the red button on the device.
Less than a second later, the next thing Lee and River knew, they were both in one of the hallways, in the Daiyu Palace Casino.
Lee quickly recognized where they were, given the elevator bay to her right, and the clear, translucent wall enclosure to her left that on the other side had a small garden, with a female tiger in it.
Lee turned to River, as she calmly asked, “Why are we are in the back part of the first floor, and not Chang's penthouse office? I thought, we were going to meet Chang.”
River turned to Lee, as she answered, “We are. But first, we have a more open meeting in the garage.”
Lee questioned, “A meet and greet?”
River replied, “Yes. Chang has already gathered those invited to the meeting. We just need to be there. Then, we will talk to Chang, in private.”
Lee inquired, “Clearing, at some point, you went back here, to talk to Chang about this, in advance. When did you plan all this.”
River said, “We scheduled this before I turned in my reality device, on the island, a month ago, our time. Two weeks here.”
Lee commented, “So, can pick up my life, where I left off.”
River stated, “Something like that. And given you know where we are in the casino, I am glad your memory has fully returned.”
Lee responded, “Not really. My long term memory is still a bit of a vague, and jumbled.” Lee turned to look at the tiger, on the other side of the clear enclosure wall. She then looked back at River, as she continued, “But, dealing with a tiger is a very memorable experience.”
River giggled a little, as she replied, “True.”
Lee inquired, “So, why did you pick two weeks later, for those here, for us returning to my home reality?”
River answered, “I want to wait a few weeks, for things to settle down, and for Chang to make sure everything was alright for our return... Also, this is the date Chang and I set for our return.”
Lee complimented, “That was intelligent thinking on both your parts.”
River smiled towards Lee, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Lee returned River's smile, as she asked, “So, what is the local time?”
River answered, “Seven PM, on the dot. As such, we should have no jet lag. And everyone we are about to meet has usually already eaten by now.”
Lee responded, “Okay. So, the plan is for the meet and greet, then talk to Chang, alone?”
River stated, “Yes. We are going to a meeting in the garage. And afterward, we are going to talk with Chang, in our penthouse, in private.”
Lee guessed, “I am not just going to live somewhere in the hotel. You are going to have me live with you, and Chang, in the penthouse?”
River smiled, as she complimented, “It is so much fun to talk with someone who knows what is going on, after only a moderate amount of questions.”
Lee returned River's smile, as she happily said, “Hey. I am pregnant. And I prefer to live with you, even if I have to also live with Chang. That is much better than to be a single mother to be, in a foreign land.”
River agreed, “Exactly. And besides, we love each other. Also, I love Chang, and he loves me. And I believe you and Chang can stand each other, for my sake, and the sake of our children.”
Lee responded, “I hope so. Now, please lead me to the garage, because I don't exactly remember how to get there.”
River said, “It is this way.”
River then walked further into the back side of the casino building, with Lee following right behind her.
(_)
A few minutes later, they reached the large, indoor garage, in the back part, of the first floor, of the casino. River opened the closest door to the garage, from the hallway. She then let Lee in, and gently shut the door behind them.
As they walked further into the garage, Lee noticed the most of the ceiling lights were on, with the large, outside garage doors close. And River was leading them near to the repair pits of the garage.
Along with this, Lee saw that River was leading her towards an open area of the garage, where group of familiar faces standing near each other.
Lee saw that the group was Chang, Zoe, Mal, Inara, Faye, Spike, Jetta, Jayne, Kaylee, Simon, Annie, and Arcee, whom was standing in her robot mode.
Lee also noticed Chang stood away from the others, with the other standing in a semicircle, that was facing Chang.
As River and Lee approached the group, they saw that all eyes had turned to look at them.
As River and Lee came to a stop, on the other side of the Chang, from the group. They stood side by side, as they faced the others. With Lee standing to River's left side.
Chang looked at Lee and River, as he said, in a cavalier way, “And the ladies of the hour have arrived.”
River commented, “I hope we are not late?”
Chang answered, “No. You are right on time.”
Jayne spoke up, “Damn, Lee. You look hot.”
Lee turned to Jayne, as she teased, “Jayne, I have seen you female form, and you are female from is hotter than me.”
Jayne chuckled a little, at Lee's compliment.
Spike turned to Chang, as she asked, “So, why did you bring us here? I remind you that I was planning on spending some time with Julia tonight.”
Chang turned to the group, as he answered, “Don't worry. This will only take a few minutes. Then, you can return to your daughter. Because, Lee is going to be living here, with us.”
Spike flat asked, “What?”
Chang calmly stated, “As I said, Lee will now be staying here, with us.”
Faye inquired, “Not to sound sarcastic. But, why do you want to have keep someone here that has manipulated and played with our lives, both directly, and indirectly?”
Chang looked over at Faye, as he answered, “A fair question. And the answers are many. Some will become apparent very soon. But, we all agree that Lee is very good at what he, or now she does. She can see things in ways we do not. And the simplistic ways she deals with complex problems are not to be underestimated. As such, she is more an asset for us, than a hindrance. And I don't want that asset winding up in someone else's hands.”
Mal said, “While I am not crazy about her being here. I can see your point, Chang.”
Chang replied, “Good.”
Spike commented, “Well, I don't like it.”
Chang said, “As long as you don't harm her, I could care less if you have anything to do with her.”
Spike replied, “Agreed.”
Chang looked around the group, as he requested, “What about the rest of you? I prefer to keep this an open forum. All of your opinions are welcome.”
Annie said, “Personally, I like having Lee stay here with us. She's polite and pleasant to be around.”
Arcee stated, “I agree. And it is fun trying to get inside the head of someone who was inside our heads.”
Inara turned to Arcee, as she calmly complimented, “That is an interest observation.”
Arcee turned her head towards Inara, as she said, “Thank you.” She then looked back over at Lee.
Inara replied, “You're welcome.” She then looked over at Lee, as she commented, “Lee, I am fine with you being here. But, don't expect any free back rubs.”
Lee calmly replied,, “That is the least of my concerns.”
Zoe calmly said, “Chang, I am fine with whatever you decide.”
Jetta commented, “Whatever works is fine with me.”
Faye said, “As long as she is not a jerk, I have no problems with her being here.” She mentally added, 'Rock and Chang, both, already paid Spike, in gold, to get off of Lee's back. So, I am not going to make an issue out of the matter.'
Jayne casually stated, “I don't mind the situation, either. Your casino, your rules, Chang.”
Chang happily thought, 'Mental note. Give Jayne a small bonus, in gold, in his next monthly work payment. He clearly knows who is in charge here.'
Kaylee commented, “I am all for Lee staying here.” She looked at Lee, as she continued, “I am all for having someone else around that has a good sense of humor.”
Lee looked at Kaylee, as she responded, “Thank you. I take it that you watched the poker game I had with River?”
Kaylee smiled at Lee, as she said, “Of course.”
Simon spoke up, “We all did. And along with Chang, most of us admire you for your skills, and manners.”
Spike and Mal both snorted, but did not otherwise respond to Simon's comment.
Simon ignored Mal and Spike, as he continued, “And you clearly understand the concept of tact. As such, I have no problems with the friendship you have with my sister.'
River giggled, as she thought, 'I cannot wait to tell him what is really going on. Though, his comment is touching.'
Lee noticed River's reaction, as she thought, 'Yea. I wonder how he will take the news, River.' She looked at Simon, as she calmly said, “You should have no worries, when it comes to your sister.”
Simon replied, “I am sure.”
Chang looked around the crowd, as he stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Also, I remind you all that the rank and file here do not know about Lee and her stories. I would prefer to keep it that way.”
Mal commented, “Don't worry. We have kept our mouths shut, so far.”
Chang responded, “And I appreciate that. Still, if they discover the truth on their own, that is fine. We will deal with that, then.” Chang turned to Lee, as he inquired, “By the way, can you take down those stories.”
Lee looked over at Chang, as she answered, “I doubt it. Messing with where the stories are would raise to many red flags. Besides, I don't remember the password to get on that website. And even if I did, anyone who is already interested, probably has a copy on their hard drive by now.”
Chang replied, “Okay.” He mentally added, 'It was worth a shot, in asking her about that. Still, there is one other matter I need to talk mention to Lee, before she finds out on her own.'
Chang stated, “Also Lee, you might want to know that Matthew McCormick, your lawyer on Mars is now here, and he works for me.”
Lee responded, in a halfhearted way, “Why did you bring him here?”
Chang plainly answered, “Anyone that could survive that chase you had with the maids is worthy of my attention.”
Lee commented, “Yea... I hope he is not upset with me dragging him into this mess.”
Chang pointed out, “It is not your fault. If it is anybody's fault, it is those that he worked for on Mars, whom assigned him to your case, to that police station. I just took advantage of the situation. And when we caught him, he was already planning on disappearing. So, I see no reason why he cannot just disappear by coming to work for me.”
Lee conceded, “Okay. You made some good points there. So, where is he? If he is working for you, I would expect him to be in the loop as to what is going on.”
Chang thought, 'Matthew is not really in the loop. Still...' he stated, “Unfortunately, he had a very busy day today, and he is currently resting in his suite. Also, he does not know about your gender change.”
Lee replied, “I will say, hi, to him, tomorrow, or the day after... When he is not busy.”
River turned to Lee as she stated, “That is a good idea, Lee. Now, can I tell them our big news.”
Lee turned to River, as she replied, “Sure.” She mentally added, 'But, leave out I am pregnant with twins. Just state I am pregnant, and you are the father... If you want to add that.' She saw River smile, as she continued her thoughts, 'I will take that as a, yes. And their reaction might be priceless.'
Kaylee asked, “What is it, River?”
River and Lee turned to look at the crowd, as River answered, “Well, the big news, we have, is that Lee is not just staying here out of the goodness of our hearts.”
There was some mild chuckling from the crowd, for a couple of seconds.
As the chuckles died down, River calmly continued, “Lee is also pregnant, and I am the father.”
Spike, Faye, Mal, Zoe, and Jayne laughed at hearing River's news. The rest of those in the group did not.
The laughter continued, as Kaylee commented, “Well, that is something you don't hear about every day. A woman knocking up another woman.”
As those laughing started to calm down, Zoe turned to Kaylee, as she pointed out, “We knew from Simon's medical tests, that as men, we are not shooting blanks. And I always figured one of us would do it.”
Inara turned to Zoe, as she flatly commented, “And of all people, it was the writer that River impregnated.”
Everyone but River, and Lee started laughing a little. Mal turned to River, as he thought, 'That's my girl.'
As River read Mal's thoughts, she could not help but giggle a little.
Though, Lee did not mind.
A few seconds later, as the laughter died down again, Zoe turned to Inara, as she stated, “Yea. I say the situation Lee is in is poetic.”
Inara turned to Zoe, as she replied, “I agree.”
Zoe and Inara turned to Lee, Lee noticed them, as she admitted, “You will get no arguments from me on your comments, on this matter.”
Zoe and Inara giggled a little. Zoe then turned to River, as she continued, “Though, I am surprised that you would be the first, River. Considering you already have a boyfriend.”
River looked at Zoe, as she calmly said, “The matter is being handle.”
Zoe shrugged, as she replied, “You're life.” She looked at Chang, as she said, “I just hope it doesn't effect our jobs.”
Chang turned to Zoe, as he said, “It shouldn't. And River, Lee, and I, will be discussing the matter, later tonight, in private.”
Zoe said, “I hope it is a productive discussion.”
Chang replied, “So do I.”
Spike turned to Lee, as she stated, “Given the situation, I consider you being pregnant punishment enough. And I hope the birth of your child is as painful for you, as it was for me, when I had my child.”
Lee looked over at Spike, as she plainly admitted, “It likely will be.” She mentally added, 'And doubly so. Considering, I am having twins.'
Jayne commented, “Chang, it figures that you would want Lee, as well.”
Chang looked over at Jayne, as he responded, “I will take that as a compliment.”
Chang looked back at River and Lee.
Annie and Arcee looked towards Lee. Annie said, “Well, congratulations, Lee.”
Arcee commented, “Yes. Congratulations.”
Lee looked over at Annie and Arcee, both were standing a few yards apart in the group. She responded, “Thank you. But, given your abilities, I would think you two would already know?”
Annie replied, “We already did.”
Arcee said, “Yes. But, it is proper to wait until you, and River, were ready to announce the big news.”
Lee responded, “I appreciate your discretion on this matter.”
Annie replied, “You're welcome.”
Arcee said, “No problem.”
Inara turned to Lee, as she said, in a diplomatic manner, “Barring the events of the past. I do hope you turn out to be a good mother to your children.”
Lee turned to Inara, as she replied, “I hope so, as well, Inara.”
Inara gave Lee a warm smile.
Lee returned Inara's smile.
Jetta asked, “So, what is it like being pregnant?”
Lee turned to Jetta, as she answered, “Well, I am only a month pregnant. And there is not much difference, right now. Except for some mild morning sickness, every few days. But, I am handling it okay. Though, I will let you know as time goes on.”
Jetta responded, “Thank you. I looked forward to hearing what you have to say on the issue.”
Mal looked over at Lee and River. Then, he looked at Chang. Next, he looked back at Lee and River, as he thought, 'I would be bet money that River, and likely Chang, planned to get Lee pregnant, as a way to get her out of revenge by the others.'
Mal saw River looked toward him, as she cracked a smile.
Mal continued his thoughts, 'Yep. I know you planned all this, River. You are genius enough to come up with this plan. And you are skilled enough to pull it off. Not that I am going to say anything about it. As you know. Chang paid me well, in gold, to walk away from my vendetta against Lee. And I consider the payment to be few trade.'
Mal then saw River maintain her slight smile, as she just nodded once towards him.
Mal went onto think, 'Good.'
Nearby, Simon commented, “I look forward to being an uncle.”
Lee turned to Simon, as he joked, “Yes. As an uncle, you get to spoil the kids, without worrying about taking care of them.”
Simon let out a laugh. He then look at Lee, as he said, “My thoughts exactly. And I more than willing to offer my medical services to you.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. I will come see you in a couple of days.”
Simon said, “That will be fine. I will be looking for you. If you want. I am more than willing to set up an appointment for you, in advance.”
Lee stated, “I appreciate that.”
River noticed Lee and Simon's comments. She happily thought, 'I think Lee and Simon will get along fine.'
Kaylee commented, “And this will give us a chance see what it takes to raise some kids. Such as a little babysitting.” She turned to Spike, as she continued, “Besides, Julia. And she is a sweet kid.”
Spike noticed Kaylee was talking to her. She turned to Kaylee, as she replied, in a kind tone of voice, “Thank you.”
Lee looked over at Kaylee, as she stated, “I make no promises. But, we will see what happens.”
Kaylee turned to Lee. She shrugged, as she replied, “Works for me.”
Chang looked around the room, as he stated, “Now, I hope all the issues are resolved with Lee being here. If not, please speak up.”
Everyone in the room remained silent for the next several seconds.
After around ten seconds of silence had elapsed, Chang said, “Good. Now, if you will excuse me, I have to talk to River and Lee, alone.”
Chang then walked over to Lee and River.
When he reached then, he came to a stop, as he looked at the two of them, with River and Lee looked back at him.
Chang then walked around, to River's right side, with River and Lee quietly turning and following behind him.
As the crowd watched the three adults leave, towards a door, to an interior hallway, in the back of the building, Jetta commented, “I guess I better head back to work.”
Faye turned to Arcee, as she asked, “You don't think that Chang is going to also get involved Lee, as well?”
Arcee looked down at Faye, as she shrugged. She answered, “That is possible. Chang knows that a love triangle might be best to try to salvage his relationship with River.”
Annie commented, “Yea. That any other way screams trouble, no matter how you look at it. Especially given River is a telepath, and Lee is pregnant with River's kids.”
Annie thought, 'I guess you decided to start a family, after all, River. And I am not surprised you did it with Lee, with Lee being the mother. Considering, I knew your feelings for Lee. Lee's gender identity. Chang not having time to be a parent. And you probably don't feel like getting pregnant, yourself.'
Jayne said, “So, Chang ends up with two girlfriends, instead of just one. I would complain, except I know those two, and I think Chang bit off more than he can chew.”
Zoe agreed, “No arguments there.”
Kaylee moved over, towards, Simon, and she whispered into Simon's right ear, “So, are you going to give Lee a fully exam?”
Simon looked over at Kaylee, as he softly said, in a playful manner, “Yes. But, I plan to be gentle.”
Kaylee giggled a little from Simon's comment.
Spike quietly chuckled at all the comments she head from the others, as she thought, 'I better get back to Julia. Still, this was an entertaining meeting. And because I found that Lee will be suffering the same fate as I did, I should sleep better tonight. I love my daughter. But, pushing her out of me was not pleasant.'
Mal turned to Inara, as he asked, “So, what do you think they are going to talk about?”
Inara looked at Mal, as she rhetorically pointed out, in a kind tone of voice, “What aren't they going to talk about?...”
Mal turned back to look at the door Chang, Lee, and River, had just exited, and gently closed behind them. He replied, “Point taken.”
(_)
Five minutes later, Chang, River, and Lee, had made it up the golden express elevator, in the back elevator bay, across from the tiger enclosure, up the elevator, to the penthouse. Once on the penthouse level, they walked down a few hallways, to where they reached the door to the living quarters of the penthouse, that lead directly to the living room of the penthouse.
Chang has used his keys to both earlier open the elevator lock, and presently, to unlock the door leading to the living room.
After Chang unlocked the door, he opened it, and walked in to the room, first.
Lee walked in next. And River followed behind, with her gently shutting and locking the door behind her.
Chang came to a stop, and Lee walked passed her, as she continued looked around the room. She first noticed, that due to them being so high up, and that it was still sunset, there was enough lightning from the windows across the room, to see conformable, without any indoor lighting.
Though, River flipped a switch, on the interior side of the door they had just come, to turn on some ceiling lights, which were soft yellow incandescent bulbs, with coverings over the bulbs.
Lee saw that the living room has had a standard set up of a couch, a few chair beside the couch, a low coffee table in front of the couch. Across from the couch was the wall mounted large, widescreen TV. Along with other entertainment systems, and items, on top of a small set of drawers, that were below the TV.
There was was also several sets of shelves on one of the walls, with books, movies, and other items lining the shelves.
Lee came to a stop between the TV and the couch. She turned around to see River and Chang standing side by side. With Chang standing to River's right side. Both of whom were looking back at Lee.
Chang asked, “So, what do you think of our home?”
Lee complimented, “While, I have not been to the rest of your home. I will say this is a very well furnished room.”
Chang requested, “Thank you. If you like this room, you will probably like the rest of our home. And hopefully, you new home, too.”
Lee calmly asked, “I hope so. Though Chang, should I be worried, right now? I did have sex and get knocked up by your lover.”
Chang casually stated, “No. I am not going to hurt you. Though, given recent events, you might have suspected I would. But, I won't. Though first, could you please take remove your weapons. You won't need them.”
River kindly said, “Don't worry, Lee. Everything will be fine.”
Lee thought, 'I might, as well. I am in too deep to back out now. Besides, I trust River with not only my life, but the lives of our children.'
Lee saw River smile in response to her thoughts.
Lee reached down, with both her hands, on her bandolier, where the sash was on the right side, of her stomach, as she undid the buckle on it.
After the bandolier was free of its buckling, Lee careful removed the bandolier, with the throwing knifes and collapsed staff sheath in it. She then gently tossed the bandolier onto the couch, to her right side.
Chang said, “Good. Now, is there anything you would like to say, or ask me, personally?”
Lee stated, “Well first, it was not my intention, nor plan to fall in love with River, here, and get pregnant by her. And I don't know how she fell in love with me?”
River said, “You are just a kind, intelligent, savvy person, Lee. And I love you for that.” She turned to Chang, “But, I still love, Chang, as well.”
Chang turned to River, as he replied, “I know.”
Both Chang and River turned back to Lee, as River said, “And, as I told you, right before we made love on the beach, Chang and I have understanding.”
Chang turned to River, “Yes. We do.” He turned to Lee, as he continued, “And you, Lee, are a very skilled person, in so many ways. Thus, you are the type of person I want, in so many ways. Even if you were not in a relationship with River, and pregnant with yours and River's child...”
River and Lee spoke up, in near unison, “Twins.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he looked at River and then at Lee. He said, “Oh. Even better. Anyway, if you were not involved with River, I would still want you for your skills, and mind. As an employee. But, as it stands now, I want more from you. If River is willing to share?”
River commented, in a casual manner, “I don't mind. But, it is up to her.”
Lee questioned, in a confused tone of voice, “You want to sleep with me?”
Chang stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, “I don't want to just sleep with you, Lee. I want to have a relationship with you. We are all mature adults here. And I am just thinking from a practical standpoint. I won't deny that River and you are in love. But, River and I are also in love.”
“And this can only create friction between us, that will drive River away from both of us. On the other hand, if one of us leaves, it will likely poison the relationship the other has with River. That leaves us with one option. We should try to make a three way relationship work.”
“And we have seen relationships with multiple partners work in other cases. Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton. Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Janet. Though, I am not sure how the last one works for them?”
Lee answered, “I kind of left that ambiguous in my stories. But, from personal experience, I can confirm all five of them occasional do it together.”
Chang responded, “I am not surprised. Though, back to on topic. It is only logical to propose this idea. And I know that it will take time. And while we may never love each other, I do believe we can learn to like each other...”
“After all. This can be possible, if we work at it. You are intelligent, polite, savvy, and nice to be around. As a woman, your figure is as nice as our female forms. And I will admit that your male form had potential. But, from what River told me, your manhood is now likely in the past.”
Lee said, “I have more important concerns. Such as the welfare of my future children.”
Chang complimented, “As you should. That being said, I think you could come to like me, as well. I prefer to be nice. I am intelligent, and savvy, as well. And I am good looking as both a man, and as a woman. Depending on what you prefer, I can provide it. And while I know you have slept with River in her male form. I do not know if that was is you experimenting, and you still mostly prefer women. Or, if you prefer men. Or both... Still, just let me know.”
Lee commented, “Well, I went through lot of sexual experimentation on the island. And honestly. I think I am bi-sexual.”
River said, “Yes... She has occasionally requested for me to be a man during sex. So, she likes it both ways.”
Chang stated, “That will only help all of us.”
Lee pointed out, “Also, I am a little embarrassed to say this. But, as woman, during sex, I like things put inside my love canal.”
Chang commented, in a casual manner, “As someone that is a woman part time, I can say that is completely natural.”
Lee said, “Then, I think this can work. And I am open to trying to make this work.”
Chang replied, “Good.”
Lee stated, “Still, I hope you are okay with me being pregnant. Children can cause problems in a relationship. Though, I promise to do my best not to allow my pregnancy to make me act like a bitch.”
Chang shrugged, as he responded, “I believe you. Besides. That was our plan to begin with.”
Lee responded, in a confused manner, “Huh? You had us fall in love with each other?”
Chang calmly stated, “No. No. No. We did not plan for you two to fall in love with each other. You both did that on your own. The plan was to get you knocked up.”
Silence reigned for the next few seconds.
Lee then flatly said, “I should be upset right, right now. But, I am not. River already told me that she planned impregnating me in advance. And I am not surprised that you both came up with this plan, together.”
Chang complimented, “I am glad you are being mature about this matter.”
River took a few steps away from Chang, and closer to Lee, so she could look at both of them. She thought, 'And this is why I love you both. And I think Chang is right. This could work. And I will do my best to smooth things over with both of you. And you know better than to try to harm the other. Because, I may love you, but I will kick either of your ass for doing so. And there are ways to kick your ass, Lee, without harming our children, inside you.'
Lee inquired, “Still, I have the feeling that the reason for getting me pregnant was more than getting me out of revenge from the others. So, why would you both do this?
Chang answered, “Simple, my dear. I am still interested in my breeding projects.”
Lee deadpanned, “I thought you learned your lesson, after the fall of your Tower. I know I did.”
Chang admitted, “Apparently, I did not. But, I realize that I needed to drastically tone down my approach to the situation. And from what River had told me, you likely wouldn't mind being pregnant.”
Lee shrugged, as she conceded, “I am okay with having children. But, why are you okay with River and I having kids?”
Chang answered, “Simple, my dear. You are both intelligent, and creative. With River very much so. You both have healthy bodies. I know for the fact that spring cleaned you body of any potential chances of having cancer again. With the magic ring on your right fourth finger now being used to not only being used to lock you in that form, but also as a secondary guard against such problems in the future.”
“River is a telepath. You are a precognitive. Your children should inherit one, or more, of the abilities you two have. So, I see it as a win-win, for everyone around.”
Lee asked, “Okay... So, besides raising the kids I am going to have, what job do you have in mind for me?”
Chang coyly answered, “I wouldn't worry to much about your kids. While you will still raise them. You will have plenty of help. I have that handled. But, that is for later. As for your job. I would like you to work for me in an advisory role. As I told the others. You clearly see things in ways others do not. And I think I can use you skills to aid us... Now, do you accept by offer?”
Lee said, “Fine. I will agree to all of this.”
Chang asked, “Are you sure? You seemed to reply very quickly.”
Lee placed both her hands on her stomach, as she looked over at River. She then looked back at Chang, as she stated, “Yes. I love River, and I am having our children. I have too much riding on this, not to accept you offer. In addition, it is a very good and generous offer. And at the very least, we are going to have a lot of fun.” She then dropped her hands back to her sides.
Chang said, “I see your point.”
Chang looked at both River and Lee, as he asked, “So, what do you two want to do now? I have already eaten, but I can send up for something, for the both of you. Anything you want. And I mean it. Though, nothing that could harm your children.”
Lee replied, “Of course. Though, that remind me. I need to get a list from Simon on what food and drinks I can have, and cannot have, while pregnant.”
Chang offered, “I will have Simon compile you a list, tomorrow.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
River had been paying attention to Chang and Lee, as she thought, 'Now, to move onto to the fun of this meeting.'
River turned to Chang, as she stated, “Well, we have both eaten. And since that is the case, I was thinking we should move on to desert, in the bedroom.”
Lee looked at the other two adults in the room, as she shrugged. She casually said, “I am game, if you both are.”
Chang turned to River, then to Lee. He stated, “Of course. River and I do like to share.”
River replied, “Yes. We do.”
Lee said, “I don't mind, either. As long as I am afforded the same luxury.”
Chang stated, “That is fine. As long as you keep us in the loop.”
Lee responded, “Okay. I was thinking of visiting Eda and Yolanda, in a day or so. I am not sure what will happened when I meet them. But, from what Eda told me, Yolanda would very much like to have some private time with me.”
Chang plainly said, “That completely understandable. And I am okay with it.”
River stated, “Go ahead. I have slept with both of them. And both are good in bed. As you know by sleeping with Eda.”
Lee replied, “Yes. I remember doing that with Eda. And thanks.”
River said, “You're welcome. And our bedroom is this way.”
Lee then followed River and Chang, as her through the apartment session of the penthouse.
Several seconds later, when they reached the bedroom, Lee saw the door was open to River and Chang's bedroom.
River and Chang were first to enter the room. River flipped on a ceiling light switch, as they did came into the room.
The two adults then walked to Lee's right, to allow Lee to get a good look at the bedroom itself. Before they came to a stop, and turned to look at Lee.
After Lee walked in, she left the door open. She thought, with mild amusement, 'No point in closing the door. If anyone is crazy enough to break into the apartment, they are not going to live very long. Considering who lives here.'
River complimented, “A wise observation.”
Lee just shrugged in River's direction, as she came to a stop in front of the king sized bed, in the room.
Lee then looked around the room.
Lee first noticed that there was a closed, tinted sliding glass door to the patio outside part of the penthouse. And due to the curtains not being closed, there was enough sunlight to allow for her to clearly see the room.
And Lee also saw a pool on the other side of the sliding glass door.
River answered Lee unspoken question, “It is a heated, saltwater pool. There are no dangerous chemicals in it. And you can use it any time you want.”
Chang teased, “It is especially fun for skinny dipping.”
Lee replied, “Nice.”
Lee then looked around the bedroom, itself. The room was very nicely furnished, with top quality items. There was a chest of drawers, closets, door to a master bathroom.
River said, “You can share my closet. And please leave the toilet seat down.”
Lee continued looking around, as she responded, “Thanks, River. Though, I am a woman now, why would I leave the toilet seat up?”
River turned to Chang, as she said, “Actually, I was just subtly reminding, Chang. Though, he had ever rarely has forgotten to do so.”
Everyone mildly giggled at River's comment, including Chang, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Chang looked over at River, as he stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Well, in my defense. You have occasionally done it, when you woke up as a guy, half asleep, and you forget to leave the seat down.”
River casually replied, “Guilty as charged.”
There was some more mild chuckling.
River and Chang then turned their attention back to Lee.
Lee thought, 'Just the dangers of living with gender benders. One does not know which forgot to leave the toilet seat down. I should be fine, as long as I am mindful when I need to go to the bathroom.'
Lee then finally turned her attention to the center piece of the room. The bed.
The bed was a large, king sized bed, with silk sheets, and blankets. With the blankets folded down to show the silk seats. Along, with three large, fluffy pillows lined along the headboard, that were in silk sheets, as well. And the size of the bed would fit all three of them.
Lee turned to face River and Chang, as she complimented, “Nice bedroom.”
Chang and River replied, in unison, “Thank you.”
River said, “And the bed is very conformable.”
Lee replied, “Glad to hear it.”
Chang then requested, “Now, if you will take off your clothing, and put it in a neat pile, we will get started.”
Lee did not response, as she got undressed in front of Chang and River. And she put her clothing, and slippers in a small pile by the bed.
As Lee undressed, she saw River pull Chang down a bit, as River whispered something into Chang's ear.
Chang straighten back up, as he looked over at River. Lee overhead Chang softly compliment, “Good idea.”
Lee then saw River started get undressed, as well. With the redhead putting her clothing in a small pile, as well. Lee also noticed River pull out her reality device, from a pocket, and she put it on a nearby nightstand in the bedroom.
Less than a minute later, both women were undressed, and look at each other, and at Chang.
Meanwhile, Chang looked at the front of both the naked women in front of him,
as he happily complimented, “My dears, you both look so hot that you are getting a good rise out of me.”
The women giggled in response.
Chang then looked at Lee. He smirked, as he said, “Now, for my part.”
Chang then dropped his pants and boxers, and Lee looked down at Chang's lower body parts.
Lee's jaw dropped, in surprise. As she collected herself, she looked up at Chang's face. She flatly stated, “Oh my. You are hung like an elephant.”
River burst out laughing.
Chang continued smirking, as he said, “And now you know why I didn't kill you for making that comment, during your casino poker game with River.”
Lee said, “I will just count myself lucky.” She then playfully commented, “And I am not sure I can even fit that inside me.”
Chang let out a laugh. He then admitted, “I am not that big.”
River casually said, “Lee, don't be a tease.” She looked over at Chang, as she stated, “We fisted a few times, already. So, you shouldn't have a problem.”
Chang replied, in a humorous tone of voice, “Really?” He then chuckled for a few seconds.
Lee turned to River, as she stated, “Okay, River. Also, I don't want you to be jealous. When you are a guy. You have a nice package down there, as well.”
River looked back over at Lee, as she said, in a calm, kind tone of voice, “I know. And speaking of which...”
River sneezed on command, and instantly changed into a man.
River continued, in his masculine voice, “In a few minutes, I am looking forward to you experience both end at once. Besides, you did want to save trying it anally for a special occasion. I figure this would be a good special occasion. And speaking from my past, I can say that experiencing both vaginally and anally, at the same time, it very pleasurable.”
River looked over at Chang, as he went on to say, “And Chang, I have already had her in the front. So, you can have the front. I will do the back.”
Chang said, “Thank you, River.”
Chang and River then turned to Lee.
Lee smiled at them, as she thought, 'So, that is what River whispered to Chang about, and why she got undressed before Chang. And she, err he is right.'
Lee said, “I believe you. Also, you are right. I did say that. And this would be a wonderful opportunity. As such, I am open to anything, either of you have in mind.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
River thought, 'That is my girl.' He said, “I will get some condoms. We keep a box in the nightstand draw, by the bed. After I get a couple, for Chang and I, we can get started.” He then walked over to a nearby nightstand, by the bed.
Chang then started taking off the rest of his clothing, as he said, “While River is doing that. Give me a few seconds to get undressed. And then we will show you pleasures you have yet to experience. Even after what was done to you, at the Lagoon family's island.”
Lee happily replied, “I look forward to it.” She mentally added, 'And with having a lover as a telepath, River will know what I want, and need, without Chang, nor I, having to make a verbal request.'
As River pulled out some condoms, from a nearby drawer, he complimented, “That is the spirit.”
In response, Lee just giggled for a few seconds.
Soon after, Lee experienced what it is like to get it up both ends a the same time. As well as just about every pleasurable sexual position that a woman making love with two gender benders, could experience.
(_)
Later that night, in their bedroom, the room was dark, with both Chang and River being asleep, in their female forms, while Lee was laying awake, between them.
Lee was feeling completely sexually satisfied, as she thought, 'Well, I am a month pregnant. I had sex with two men at once. And I found that to be fun. And more fun once they started various gender combinations. Damn. I was right about how fun it is to have a gender bender as lover. And two gender benders is even better. If this is the way Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, do it nearly every night. I am envious...'
'Along with that, the next time I see Revy and Rock, I will have to apologize to them for making fun of taking it up the ass. That was actually very pleasurable. Not as fun as getting it vaginally. But, still fun.'
'Now, to get some rest. For I am sure tomorrow is going to be very eventful for me. But, unlike that last month. My precognitive abilities tell me that tomorrow will be eventful in a very good way for me.'
Lee then decided drifted off to sleep with her two lovers.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 05: “Getting Back Into The Groove.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Lee's Reality. Date, the middle of November. Two weeks, and half a day, since Lee first left her home reality. Location, the island city of De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. In the master bedroom of the penthouse apartment, at the top of Daiyu Palace Casino. Time of day was middle of the morning.
The next morning Lee woke up, on her back, with her head on the pillow she went to sleep on.
The first thing she noticed was that she was nude, over the bedsheets. But, then she remembered the previous night, and she smiled at her memories of her previous night.
She then looked and noticed that River and Chang were gone. Also, while the curtains to the sliding glass door were open, the doors tint allowed only enough sunlight into the room, for Lee see around her, while still being comfortable to her eyes.
She then leaned up, and looked at the clock, on a nightstand, by the bed, to her right. The clock read nine thirty-three AM.
Lee leaned back down on her pillow, as she thought, 'It was nice of them to let me sleep in.'
Lee then looked over at the dresser, across from her, to her right, on the opposite side of the room of the headboard, to the right of the door to the hallway, and to the left of the sliding glass door.
To the wall to Lee's left was the open door to the master bathroom, which was across from the sliding glass door.
The two doors to the closet rooms were on the opposite sides of the bed, on the same wall which the headboard of the bed rested against.
On the top of the dresser, Lee noticed a set of folded clothing. On top of the clothing was a piece of part, with writing on it.
Lee's curiosity was aroused, as she got out of bed. The moment she stood up straight, she felt a slight bit of morning sickness, that was just enough to be noticeable. But, her mental discipline allowed her to ignore the problem, and prevent her slight nausea from bothering her.
As Lee stretched her body a little, she thought, 'I am so happy that I figured out how to sense my morning sickness, and control it. And as long as I eat small, light meals, I don't have much of a problem... Still, this means I have to eat more often... But, that is a worry for later... Right now, I want to find out what that note, and the clothes are about?'
She then walked around the bed, and over to the dresser.
As she came to a stop in front of dresser, and she looked down at what was on top of the large piece of furniture.
When she lowered her head, she also noticed her red leather slippers on the floor, and the clothing from last night was missing. Along with this, her slippers seemed to have been polished, and were now shiny black.
Beneath the note was a stack of clothing. On top was a red, casual bra. Beneath that were folded, red silk panties. Under that was a folded red short sleeved shirt. Below that was a folded brown amber long skirt, with life sized red and yellow leafs covering it. Beneath that was a cloth, button up jacket, that was the same color of amber brown as the skirt.
Lee thought, 'Someone clearly polished my shoes, and placed the clothes here for me. It was likely River. Also, when I went to the bathroom, last night. I noticed, from the calendar in the bathroom, that it is the middle of November. So, I am going to likely need that jacket. From the look outside the sliding glass door, I think it is going to be a sunny, through windy, and cool day.'
'And I love the look of that skirt. It looks perfect for Autumn motif. And I am pretty enough to wear it... Now, let's see what the note says.'
She picked up the note and read it.
The note was in english, with cursive penmanship, that was both skilled, and yet still readable.
Dear Lee,
First, good morning the first day of the rest of your life.
Chang and I both have things to do to day. But, I will get back with you later today. If not, then I will see you tonight for dinner. Chang and I have dinner between six and eight. Depending on our schedules. And we request that you join us.
Since you did not have any spare clothing, we got bought some to you. We will get you some more, later. But, for right now, what is here should be fine for you today. And not to worry, I know your measures.
As such, since you are a woman now, and you enjoy being one. I consider that you would like to wear a skirt that would suit your figure.
The clothing is clean and should fit. Taking into account that I know your size. And I polished your slippers for you.
Once you are ready to face the day, just use the phone by the bed, and call for some breakfast.
Afterward, if you want to see the town, take one of sedans in the garage. We don't mind. The keys for them are in a box, near the back of the garage, to your left. The keys are universal, for all the black sedans. Though, the lock clickers are not.
Also, in the right pocket of your jacket there is some money, a key to the penthouse elevator, a key to our apartment locks, and an encrypted cellphone, which is turned off. If you need to use these items, do so.
And most importantly, have fun... We will talk, later.
River
P.S. I hung your bandolier, with your weapons in it, in my closet. Though, I do not think you will need them today.
Lee set the note back down onto top of the clothing, as she happily thought, 'I love being right. Along with that, she is right about my weapons... And River is so kind...' She then looked down at herself, as she placed her hands on her lower stomach. She continued her thoughts, 'In so many ways... Now, to get ready to face the day.”
She then dropped her hands back to her sides, as she turned towards the master bathroom.
She walked over to the master bathroom, and she flipped on the light switch, as she shut the door behind her.
After she used the toilet. She took a shower, and shaved her crotch with a new disposable razor she found in a drawer. Along with shaving gel that was by the shower. She then dried off her body and hair.
Afterward, she opened the bathroom door, and walked into the bedroom nude.
When she reached the dresser, she dressed herself in the clothing that River has given her.
The only problem Lee had in dressing was that she had to adjust the bra straps a few times to get her bra could comfortably fit her breasts. While River got the right overall size for Lee, River did have adjust the bra straps. Except for her bra, Lee found that all her clothing fit her.
Lee left her button up jacket open.
When she finished getting dressed, she checked her jacket pockets. She found the pocket with her items in it. She had a thousand U.S. cash, in fifty dollar bills. She also had two separate keys, that she guessed when to the casino express elevators, and the penthouse apartment locks. And she had an encrypted cell phone, which she made sure was turned off.
With that done, Lee turned around to face her bed, to see that the clock by the bed read ten nine AM.
Lee then turned back around to look at herself, in the mirror above the dresser.
Lee slightly adjusted her open jacket, as she thought, 'Damn, River has good taste in clothing. Even with casual wear... Now, to make the bed, and get something to eat... And afterward, I will head to the garage, get a car, and do some running around, myself.'
Lee walked over to her bed, and made the sheets.
Afterward, she used the nearby wireless phone on a nightstand, by the bed, to call the hotel staff to place her small order of breakfast.
When she finished her phone call, she placed the wireless phone back on its base, and headed to the living room, to watch some TV, and while she waited for her food.
Twenty minutes later, Lee's breakfast was delivered, by a very beautiful, young chinese woman. It was a small meal, with a glass of orange juice. It took her other fifteen minutes to to slowly eat and finish her meal. She ate only a little meal, and slowly, to keep from aggravating her morning sickness.
Afterward, Lee called for the hotel staff to come get their meal. A few minutes later, they came.
Once the cart, and staff member was gone, Lee went back to the master bathroom to pee.
She then turned off the TV, left the apartment, and headed to the first floor of the hotel.
She made sure to lock the hallway door to the apartment, behind her.
She used the back elevator, because it was let her out closer to the garage. With her likely avoiding any of the hotel customers.
(_)
It was around ten fifty AM, when Lee exited the back penthouse elevator, and into the back elevator bay.
As she walked out of the elevator, passed the elevator bay, and towards the hallway, she heard the penthouse elevator doors close behind her.
While she walked, she saw the slightly hilly, tiger garden enclosure in front of her.
Lee also saw that the female tiger was near the strong, translucent plastic wall, with the animal looking back at her.
Lee continued walking, as she thought, 'It is nice that I remember you, and how I got you into that cage. And I am sure that you likely remember me. Well, we both seem to be prisoners in gilded cages. And I cannot run from the responsibly of being pregnant. I have always been pro-life and I always will be.'
'So, I might as well just enjoy my situation, and make the most of the opportunities I now have. And my opportunities at the moment look to have pretty good prospects for my future. And the future of my children.'
The tiger then turn away from Lee.
Lee happily thought, 'I am glad you agree.'
As Lee reached the hallway, she turned to her right, towards the back of the casino, and to the garage.
While Lee did so, she saw a fair skinned man, with brown hair in a slick hairstyle. The man wore a business suit, as he casually approach her. The man was carrying briefcase, by its handle, in his left hand, by his side.
Lee also noticed there was no one else around, but the two of them, and the tiger, nearby.
Though, the man paid her no mind, as he got closer, Lee recognized him.
Lee playfully thought, 'Oh my... Is that who I think it is?...' She took a closer look at the man's face, as she continued her thoughts, 'It is... It is Matthew McCormick. Chang mentioned that he now worked for him... I have to say hi to him... If for any other reason, than to try to learn a vague comment Matthew made about doing a wicked burn on Babylon Five...' She smiled mischievously, as she mentally added, 'And given I don't see anyone else around. I can have some fun in doing so...'
Lee then happy strolled towards Matthew.
As Lee walked directly in front of Matthew's path. She then came to a stop, as she faced the man. She said, in a chipper tone of voice, “Matthew. I heard you were here. It is good to see you. I hope you are doing fine in this situation.”
Matthew came to a stop five feet in front of Lee, as he looked at the fair skin woman, with long black hair.
Matthew kindly stated, “I apologize. I do not know who you are, ma'am?”
Lee thought, 'Oh, I guess no one told him about my gender change... Nor pregnancy.' She said, “It is me. Lee.”
Matthew commented, “The only Lee I know is a taller, and much older man.”
Lee questioned, “That was me. I am the same, Lee. Didn't Chang explain the whole gender bending, that some of us in the casino have gone through?”
Matthew raised an eyebrow, as he looked at Lee. He said, “So, it is you, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Yes. And if you want to mentally undress me. Go ahead.”
Matthew shrugged, as he casually said, “Not in the mood.”
Matthew then looked around him.
Lee thought, 'He must be checking to see if there is anyone around. Which there is not. That is a smart move.'
When Matthew realized they were alone, he turned back to Lee. He stated, “And yes. Chang personally showed me his gender bending abilities. Which was one of a long row shocks in my life, since meeting you.”
Lee could not help but giggle a little. She then inquired, “Okay. And how much detail did he go into on the situation?”
Matthew answered, “Not much. I have later learned rumors various types of gender bending. Something called, the vat process. Strange viruses. And magical curses.”
Lee replied, “Hmm...” She thought, 'I cannot fault for Chang not getting into details about such matters, with a person he just met. Though, we will need to correct this oversight, later.' She commented, “We will have to give you some more details on the situation, later.”
Matthew responded, “I look forward to it. So, which way did you end up a woman? And a much younger woman, at that?”
Lee answered, “Well, I was cursed. Willingly. And I locked myself into my girl form to cure myself of the cancer that was ravaging my body. The curse also made me much younger.”
Matthew commented, “I can see that. So, what happened to Mister Garibaldi?”
Lee said, “He got the same curse. But, his is not locked in that form. And he can back into a man, with hot water. And changed into his female form with cold water.”
Matthew stated, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “I am sure that his wife and daughter are going to be real happy to hear about that. So, what finally happened to my former employer?”
Lee cryptically said, “Last I heard. Things worked out. And that he, or she, made it back home.”
Matthew flatly pointed out, “Well, I am glad for him. But, things have clearly not worked out for me. I am stuck here. Instead of being on the fast track, of the corporate ladder, at Edgars Industries.”
Lee countered, “It is not that bad. Before I returned here, I spoke to River on the matter of how well Chang treats his employees. You included. I know Chang pays well. The benefits package for those working for him are pretty good. I know the casino spa is world class, and free to employees, within reason. You just need to make an appointment, in advance. The free medical care provided here, in the casino, by Doctor Tam, is probably the best on the planet. And the vacation options are literally beyond this reality.”
Lee thought, 'That reminds me. I need to check on the food and drink list, from Simon, later today. And I need to schedule an appointment with him, for later this week.'
Matthew explained, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Even so. I did not get into this line of work to be the lawyer of a casino manager. And from what I have heard, he was a former interdimensional mafia boss. I did it to help people, and get prestige, in the court room. I mean, here, my law license is not even valid.”
Lee sincerely responded, “Sorry, I screwed things up for you.”
Matthew requested, “Yea. Well, you can make it up to me by getting me back home?”
Lee shook her head once, as she answered, “Sorry, again. That is not my call. Still, what were your plans, in your career track? Maybe we can work something out”
Matthew said, “Either ending up a partner at a high priced law firm, or high level judge.”
Lee complimented, “Not bad. You are smart enough to keep your options open.”
Matthew inquired, “So, can you get me something comparable?”
Lee admitted, “No yet. But, I will look into it. If nothing else, you have time. Thanks to time dilation mechanics, when dealing with multiverse travel, you can spend years here, and be back five minutes later on Mars. I know this first hand.”
“And there are options to restoring one's youth, that will not cost you your manhood. Though, being a woman is not that bad... So, if you take care of yourself, and you don't piss off anyone, while you are here, you have all the time you need. And you will likely return to Mars a very wealthy man.”
Matthew conceded, “Okay. That makes me feel better.”
Lee asked, “Also, do you know those that work here? Did Chang introduce you to anyone?”
Matthew answered, “No. Not really. I am still getting to know all the people here. This is a very secretive group that Chang has here.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That goes without saying.”
Matthew stated, in a sad tone of voice, “Because of that, along with the odd looks I get from them, I suspect many of my coworkers had a violence tendencies, with pasts that are better left in the past. I am currently doing the jobs I am assigned to do. Which are mostly drawing up contacts, and reviewing legal forms for Chang. Much like a paralegal does.”
“Fortunately, such jobs seem to be universal, across the multiverse. And when I am doing my job, I just keep to myself.”
Lee let out a breath, as she sadly thought, 'Matthew is like Rock, when he was just kidnapped, and placed inside the Lagoon. The only difference is that here, I know most of the people that work for Chang may give him dangerous looks, but they will not hurt him. Unless he threatens them. Which I doubt he will do. And most of the people here are nice. Once the person gets to know them. Still, I can help him.'
Lee said, “Listen. I will see what I can do for you. Also, has anyone explained the, world as myth, theory to you?”
Matthew deadpanned, “I am a fan of Heinlein. Also, my former boss occasionally shared some of his video collection with the staff members he liked. Including me. And after the giant pink transformer kidnapped me, and brought me here, it would kind of obvious.”
Lee questioned, “So, it was Arcee that came and got you?”
Matthew answered, “Yes. Along with a human woman with her. The human was wearing a brown leather suit. She also wore a brown helmet, with the visor down. So, I did not see her face.”
Lee thought, 'That is likely, Annie.' She inquired, “I hope they were gentle?”
Matthew conceded, “To be fair. Yes. They were.”
Lee responded, “That is good to hear. And Matthew, just look at it this way. Opportunities have just opened up, for you, in many ways. And while you are currently working for Chang, these opportunities will let you do many things that you had not even thought possible, before you met us.”
“And I can vouch that most of your coworkers are either decent people, or at the very least, they will not harm you unless you threatened them.”
Matthew sighed, as he said, “Thanks. That is a relief.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad you believe me. Because, I am telling the truth.'
Lee calmly responded, with warmth in her tone of voice, “So, try to make friends with a few of them. And if you do have any problems, let me know. I will help you.” She mentally added, 'I think my material instincts are kicking in. Because, I think I just sounded like my mother, when I was young. But, in a good way.'
Matthew said, “I will. And I will try to look on the brighter side of things.”
Lee smile towards Matthew, as she responded, “That is a good idea.”
Just then, coming from the back of the hotel, a woman with brown hair was walking by them. Though, except for the women, Lee, Matthew, and the tiger, there was no one else around.
Matthew complimented, “While I have no interest in a relationship with you. As a girl, you do have a cute smile.”
Lee continued to smile, as she happily replied, “Thank you.”
Matthew smiled, as he commented, “Yea. And is it not like any of my coworkers are Darth Vader. And yes. I have see that movie series. It is an old movie series. But, classics, none the less.”
Lee began, in a slightly nervous voice, “Well...”
Suddenly, to Lee's right, and Matthew's left, opposite from the tiger pen, someone coughed, beside them.
Both Lee and Matthew turned to see Annie, in her usual white clothing, under a brown robe, standing right beside them. With her only a few feet away from them.
Lee thought, 'Well, speak of the devil. I might might as well smooth things over here. Still, while Matthew does not know it. They do know each other, at least in passing? I might as well officially introduce them to each other.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Have you two met, yet?”
Matthew shook his head twice, as he said, “No.”
Annie answered, “Yes.” She then looked over at Matthew, as she commented, “I was the one with Arcee, whom helped bring you here.”
Matthew turned to Annie, as he calmly said, with hint of dry wit in his tone of voice, “Oh. Then, we have met. But, we have not been formally introduced. I don't even know your name?”
Lee calmly said, “Okay. Let me formally introduce you two, to each other.” Lee used her right hand to gesture towards Annie, as she said, “This is Annie. One of Chang's... Go to people.” She then used her right hand to gesture towards Matthew, as she stated, “This is Matthew McCormick. Chang's new lawyer.” After which, Lee dropped her right hand back to her side.
Annie commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Sorry for the kidnapping. But, we had our orders. And we were gentle. Though, I do regret I haven't had the opportunity to get to know you.”
Matthew responded, “Likewise, Annie. I never got your name. And I have only heard your name mention in passing. It is nice to put a name with a face. Also, since you did not harm me, I don't hold anything of this against either of you... Your employer on the other hand, is another matter.”
Annie cracked a grin, as she replied, “Trust me. I know the feeling. And you will get over it.”
Lee thought, 'So, Annie is starting to get over what Chang did to her. Good.'
Matthew responded, “I hope you are right. So, what caused you to stop by, and talked to us? You strike me as a person who does not care for small talk.”
Annie then looked between them, as she said, “In most situations, you would be correct. But, I could not help myself, when I overheard you mention the name, Vader.”
Matthew admitted, “Yes. I mentioned that name, in jest.”
Annie looked over at Lee with a sympathetic look, as she inquired, “Do you want to me tell him? Or, should I?”
Lee soberly said, “I honestly think it is best that if you told him.”
Annie conceded, “You're right, Lee. By the way, you look great, today.”
Lee mentioned, “Thanks. River picked out my clothing.”
Annie commented, “She has always had a good eye for clothing.”
Lee complimented, “I agree. You are looking good, yourself, this morning.”
Annie replied, “Thank you.” She turned to Matthew, as she calmly said, “First, I do not want you to freak out. I want you to know that no one is going to hurt you. Not Lee. Not me. Not anyone. But, what I am about to tell you may come as am emotional shock to you... It has for several other people.”
Matthew commented, with concern in his voice, “Why do I have the feeling I am not going to like what you have to say?”
Annie shrugged, as she casually said, “Because you aren't.” She continued, in a calmer, more straightforward tone of voice, The truth is, even though I am known as Annie, now. I was once know as Darth Vader. As in Darth Vader, Sith Lord, Lord of the Sith, formally Anakin Skywalker, of a Star Wars reality.”
There was silence for a couple of seconds. Matthew then started laughing, for several seconds.
Lee leaned over to whisper into Annie's left ear, as she quietly begged, “Please. Don't force choke him over this. This is the best reaction we could have hoped for.”
As Lee straightened back up, she saw Annie looking at her.
Annie give Lee a warm smile, as she calmly replied, “I wasn't planning to.”
The two women then turned back to look at Matthew.
As Matthew calmed down, he smiled. He smiled towards the two women, as he stated, in a joyous tone of voice, “Now, that is a stretch. Even for this situation. But, it was a good joke. I feel much better now. While the gender is wrong. I will grant you that you have brown hair and blue eyes. But, even I know that when Anakin fell to the dark side, and became Vader, his eyes turned yellow.”
Annie commented, “Actually, when one turns back from the dark side, the yellow slowly fades from their eyes, and their eyes eventually return to the color they originally were.”
Matthew dropped his grin, as he replied, in a confused tone of voice, “Huh?”
Both women looked at each other, as Annie commented, “Don't worry. I can restart his heart, if I accidentally stop it.”
Lee said, “Let us hope so. Because, not only would you never live it down. Chang would be upset with you, for killing his lawyer. Even temporarily.”
Annie conceded, “You're right. If that happened, I might have to take a severe reduction in pay for a while.”
The comments from Annie and Lee made Matthew even more confused.
Both women then looked back at Matthew.
Annie looked both ways down the hallway, before looking back at the two adults beside her. She saw that there no one else was there, besides the three of them, and the tiger on the other side of the translucent wall to the enclosure.
As Annie turned back to look at the other two adults, standing in front of her, she reached around her right side, under her robe, with her right hand, for her lightsaber. The weapon was hidden underneath her brown robe. Annie unhooked her lightsaber, and bought the chrome, metal cylinder shaped weapon out from under her robe.
Matthew then watched Annie hold out her the lightsaber, away from them, to Annie's right side, with her right hand, as she ignited the weapon. As the red energy blade extended from the chrome hilt of the lightsaber, the weapon made a, snap-hiss, sound.
Annie held her weapon like that for a few seconds. She then collapsed the blade, and hooked the weapon back to her belt, where it had been, beforehand.
Both women noticed that Matthew did not make a move, nor sound, as Annie had used her lightsaber.
Annie could also sense, through the force, that Matthew was not responding at all, on an emotional level.
Annie then used the force to gently lift all three of them, six inches off the floor for a few seconds.
Matthew did quietly react, by looking down to see that all three pairs of feet, including his own, were no longer touching the ground.
Matthew then looked back at Annie, as Annie used the force to gently set all three of them back onto the ground.
Silence reigned for a few two seconds, as the truth of Annie's claim sunk into Matthew's mind.
Matthew then screamed, as he back away to the clearly plastic wall behind them, as he held the handle of his briefcase, by his left hand, in a death grip.
Matthew continued to have his back to the translucent wall, as he screamed for another few seconds.
As Matthew quieted down, Lee casually suggested, “We have all been there. Just get it out of your system. You will feel better in a few minutes.”
Annie commented, in a slightly worrisome tone of voice, “I wouldn't be so sure. Matthew, not to worry you further. Nor, to sound cliche. But, don't look behind you.”
Unfortunately, Matthew did look behind him, and he saw the tiger, in her pen, standing on a rise, on the other side of the glass, to where Matthew and the female tiger's heads were right next to each other. With only a few inches of translucent plastic between them, as they looked each other in their eyes.
The tiger then yawned, showing off her nice sharp, long, fangs.
For a second time, in less than a minute, Matthew freaked out, again.
Matthew bolted back to where he had been previous standing. He turned to face both women, as he came to a stop, a few feet from the women. He still held his briefcase, by the handle, with his left hand.
Before Matthew could make another move, Annie used her right hand to quickly grab Matthew's left forearm. Her grip was firm, but not tight.
Matthew looked down at Annie's grip of his left forearm. He then looked up at Annie's face. The only work Matthew could muster was, “How?”
Annie calmly answered, “If you have not been told. Some of us have undergone what is called, the vat process. It also changes men to women. But, we cannot change from female to male, and back. And while Chang is among those that were changed, with that process. Chang later gained the ability to change genders with a sneeze. Also, including is a type of super-soldier serum that allows us to retain our youth, and enhanced his physical abilities.”
Matthew was still slightly bewildered by both what had just happened, and Annie's response to his question. As such, all Matthew could do was simply reply, “Oh.”
Annie turned to Lee, in a casual tone of voice, “Don't worry. I will take care of this. We will talk, later.”
Lee smiled at Annie, as she said, “I look forward to it.”
Annie returned Lee's smile. She then turned to Matthew, as she calmly said, “Now, you need to calm down. I am not going to hurt you. Actually, I am one of the nicer people here.”
Matthew looked at Annie, as he flatly commented, “That is not very reassuring.”
Annie realized how Matthew took her wording, as she let out a laugh. She thought, 'Of course, he would take what I said the wrong way. To where he thinks I meant that everyone here is worse than what I was, as Vader.' Annie calmly said, “I mean that I am now a much nicer person than the events of what you know of. Which I only did literally half of what you think I did.”
Matthew replied, “Huh?”
Annie calmly suggested, while using a bit of her mind trick abilities, “Let us go some place, where we can talk in private. And you can calm down some more.”
While still in a slight daze from the emotion shocked he had just been through, Matthew simply said, “Okay.”
Lee then watched as Annie escorted Matthew away from the back area, and towards the front, where some of the meeting offices, and employee break rooms, were located. With Annie walking to Matthew's left side, to allow her to continue hold Matthew left upper arm, with her right hand.
Though, Annie held Matthew's arm in a firm, but gentle hold Matthew, as she used the force to help keep Matthew calm, for everyone's sake, including Matthew's own sake.
As Lee watched the two adults walk away from her, she thought, 'Those jedi mind tricks do come in handy. And I am sure Annie just used those force mind trick on Matthew. And Though, I have faith that Annie will be able to reason with Matthew, and explain the situation to him. I am also glad that Annie did not mention my pregnancy in front of Matthew. He doesn't need to know, because it is none of his business. And it would have made the situation more confusing, and worse, for everyone involved...'
'Now, to go get a car, and run some errands... And have some fun, while I do so.'
Lee then turned and started walking towards the back of the hotel, where the garage was located at.
Unfortunately, after five minute of walking, with her making a few turns down some hallways, Lee unfortunately found herself turned around, and mildly lost.
As Lee came to a stop, she thought, 'Okay. I admit it. I was not really paying attention when River lead me to the garage, last night. And it has been decades since I last came here. As such, I am a little lost. But, if I am going to live here, I am going to have to learn the layout of this place, sometime. And there no time like the present.'
Lee then noticed a set of double-doors to her left, as she continued her thoughts, 'I think I will see what is in there.'
Lee then walked up to the double-doors, turned the knob to one. She found it unlocked, as she walked inside.
Lee gently shut the door behind. She then stood just inside the large room, as she looked around herself. And she was amazed at what she saw.
In front of her was a very large indoor pool. The pool was around an Olympic sized, rectangular swimming pool. And far bigger than the one on the penthouse level. With the room itself even larger than the pool, by several yards in all directions.
There were no windows on the sides of the walls. Though, there were doors. And Lee saw the doors mark for the showers, and for male, female, and single stall restrooms.
The lightning for the room came from large skylights in the vaulted ceiling. With sunlight bathing the room, from the ceiling windows.
Along with this, Lee also saw turned off lights across the ceiling.
From the numerical depth markers, in meters, Lee could tell that the closest part of the pool to her was the shallow end, with the deep end on the far side of the pool.
And from the slightly steam in the air, coming from the pool, Lee could tell the water was heated, but not to hot. And from the smell of the air, the pool used saltwater, and not chemicals, to keep things from growing in it.
Lee thought, 'Given the location of the pool, in relation to the building itself, I could guess this is the employees' pool. And I will admit that Chang does not skimp on treating his employees well.'
Lee then noticed the people by, and in the shallow end, of the pool, to her left side.
The two people in the pool were Kaylee, and a girl with long green untied hair.
Kaylee was wearing trimmed down, purple, one piece bathing suit.
The little girl was wearing a much more modest, one piece bathing suit, that matched her long green hair. Also, the girl wore green, inflated, water wings on her upper arms.
Kaylee was gently playing with the young girl, in the shallow end of the pool.
Lee could see that the girl was barely tall enough to stand up, with her head sticking out of the water, where she was standing in the shallow end of the water.
Lee thought, 'That has to be Julia. Still, I will be formal, and ask Kaylee for her identity. Also, I am not surprised that Kaylee babysitting Julia. She has always been the kind one of her group. And since Spike is obviously working the morning shift, as pit boss, in the casino gaming floor, she would need someone to babysit her daughter. Along with this, I don't doubt that Julia is being home schooled, by Spike, and the others... Also, Julia is very cute girl... Though, I am surprised by who is with them...'
Lee turned her attention to the person on the left side of the pool, at the shallow end, near facing Lee. It was Arcee in robot mode. She was sitting on the edge of the pool, with her hanging off the edge, and into the water.
Along with this, Lee saw that Arcee was looking at Lee, with a smile on her lips.
Arcee calmly said, “Hello Lee.”
Arcee comment caught Kaylee and Julia's attention, as both of them stopped playing in the water. They looked up, and over at Lee.
Kaylee said, in her usually happy tone of voice, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee looked over at the Kaylee and Julia, then to Arcee, as she kindly responded, “Good morning to all three of you, as well.”
Arcee's smile turned slightly mischievous, as she asked, “So, how was last night with River and Chang?”
Lee smiled lecherously, as she said, in a seductive tone of voice, “It is not for the ears of the very young.”
Arcee let out a laugh at Lee's comment.
Meanwhile, Kaylee, whom was more concerned with being a mature adult, role model, for Julia, in this situation, chose to remain stoic.
Lee looked over at Kaylee and Julia, as she inquired, in a mockingly sweet, innocent tone of voice, “So, who is this young girl with you two?”
Arcee flatly said, “Like you don't know already.”
Kaylee ignored Arcee's sarcasm, as she calmly answered, “This is Julia. Spike's daughter.” She turned to Julia, as she said, “Julia, this is Lee. Say hi to, Lee.”
Kaylee and Julia then turned back to looked at Lee, as Julia said, in a very cute and innocent tone of voice, “Hi Lee.”
Lee responded, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Hi Julia.” She looked at Kaylee, as she asked, “So, how old is she?”
Kaylee said, “She is around ten years old. I am not exactly sure how old she is, given time travel, and time dilation, can make it hard to keep track of one's age.”
Lee agreed, in a casual tone of voice, “That is true.”
Lee thought, 'I should know. Physically, I am over eighteen. If I don't count the time in the time loop, I am in my mid-fifties. Counting the time loop, I am in the mid-seventies. But, in this body, I still feel like an older teenager. Though, not in a bad way. Still, I have other questions...'
Lee plainly asked, “By the way, how many pools do this place have? River mentioned there were three.”
Arcee stated, “That is correct. Just the three. Not counting the hot tubs, and therapy baths. Chang's personal pool. The employees pool. Which is this one. And the customers pool, which is located near the front of the building, that is nearly as big as this one. All heated, while using saltwater to remain clean.”
Lee turned to Arcee said, “It is nice that Chang treats his employees so well.”
Arcee agreed, “Yes. That is why so many skilled people continue to work for him.”
Lee inquired, “I agree. Though, I am surprised to see you here?”
Arcee snorted. She then responded, in a relaxed tone of voice, “As you may know. Water on my homeworld is acidic, and dangerous, even for my kind. While your water...”
She leaned forward, towards the water, as she reached down with her right hand, and ran her right hand through the water, by her legs. She then leaned up, as she lifted her right hand above the water. She watched as water droplets formed, and gently felt from her right hand.
She continued to watch the drops falling back into the pool, as she continued, “Is clean... And I find clean water to be interesting. I have even swam in your water, a few times. And I see the appeal in doing so. It is like being weightless, without the drawbacks of being in space.”
Lee questioned, “So, buoyancy is not an issue with your species?” She thought, 'I always wondered that.'
Arcee gently kicked her legs a little against the water. A second later, she stopped kicking, as looked over at Lee. She answered, “No. We cybertronians do not sink to the bottom, unless we want to.”
Lee replied, “Nice.”
Arcee smile got slightly wider, as she agreed, “Quite so.”
Kaylee spoke up, as she commented, “By the way, you might want to know. The employee gym is next door, across the hallway, on the door, just to the right from us. And the customer gym is by the customer pool.”
Lee looked over at Kaylee and Julia, as she said, “Thanks. I need to keep in shape. Especially, since I am now pregnant.”
Kaylee and Arcee giggled.
Julia calmly questioned, in an innocent tone of voice, “You're pregnant?...”
Lee looked at Julia, as she mischievously thought, 'Oh, this is going to be so much fun.' Lee placed her hands on her stomach, as she answered, in a sickeningly sweet tone of voice, “Yes, dear. I have two little babies growing inside my tummy.”
Arcee and Kaylee continued giggling, as they immediately looked at each other. Their giggling quickly turned into full blown laughter, that lasted for several seconds. As they could not be believe what they had just heard Lee say, and the way the woman with long black hair had stated what she said.
As they calmed down, they turned their attention back towards Lee.
Kaylee requested, “Speaking of which, there are some questions I wanted to ask you in private. That I did not want to ask in front of the others. Especially, River and Chang.”
Lee replied, “Go ahead.” She mentally reflected, 'Give I am the writer, it is nice that some of the people here are being so nice to me.'
Kaylee inquired, “It is about the revenge you went through, and your pregnancy. While we all declined Revy and Benny's invitation to take part in their revenge against you. We did hear about some of what happened. And then, on top of that, you got pregnant by River... So, I am sincerely asking you... Are you okay with everything? I mean you have been through a lot.”
Lee calmly said, “I assure you, Kaylee, that I am fine. Honestly, I have never been better, in my entire life.”
Arcee stated, “I can verify that physically. She is perfectly healthy. Actually more so than most women I have seen. On the matter of her mental health... I am not one to judge.”
Lee turned to Arcee, as she said, “Thank you, Arcee.”
Arcee questioned, in a curious tone of voice, “You're welcome, Lee. So, what brings you here, this morning? You are clearly not dressed for swimming.”
Lee sheepishly admitted, “I was just trying to find my way to the garage, and I got turned around.”
Arcee suppressed a giggle, as she said, “You are new here. So, that is not surprising. To get to the garage, turn around, take a left, down the hallway, for about a minute. Then, the doors nearby, to your right, should lead directly to the garage.”
Lee thought, 'Yea. Now, that I think about it. I noticed there was more than one door. Not just the garage doors, but multiple regular doors, to both the outside, and interior of the hotel. And that is a great safety measure, for a quick escape, if there is a fire in the garage, or somewhere else.
Lee said, “Thank you, girls. And have a great day.”
Julia waved her right hand at Lee, as she said, “Bye, Lee.”
Kaylee commented, “See you, Lee.”
Arcee teased, “Have fun, Lee”
Lee turned around, as she thought, 'Well, at least they were nice. And Julia strikes me as a good kid. So, I guess Spike turned out to be a good mother. And if she can do it, so can I.'
Lee then walked over to the double-doors, opened the left door. As she exited into the hallway, her gently shut the door behind her.
Lee then turned to her left, as she walked down the hallway, towards one of the entrances to the back garage of the casino.
(_)
A few minutes later, when Lee reached the garage, she walked inside. She took a left, and followed River's directions. She soon found the open key box for the cars. She took one of the keyring, with a key and lock clicker, along with one of the slightly larger clickers to the nearby garage doors.
After following the beeping sound, from using her clicker, she found the modern style, black, four door sedan that her keys went to.
Lee used the clicked to unlock the doors, and she got into the driver's seat. She shut the car door, put on her seat belt. She then used the electronics to adjust her driver's chair to fit herself. Next, she the adjust the middle rearview mirror.
After which, she inserted the key into the ignition, and she started the car. As the car engine turned over, she saw the panel light up, with the gasoline dial showing that the gas tank to the car was three quarters full.
Lee thought, 'Good. That means I don't have to refuel. Also, I need to find out if these cars use diesel, or regular gasoline, or something else. But, that is for, later. Now, to run some errands of my own. And am happy that I spent so much time in the time loop, around this town, that I still know where everything is. Even decades after I last came here... At least decades for me... For everyone else here, it was around two weeks. And girl am I going to have fun meeting some of my old friends. The looks on their faces, when they see the new me, will be priceless. And if that look isn't priceless. The look they will have, when I inform some of them that I am pregnant, will be.'
'And I doubt I will have any problems with not having a license. I am driving one of the casino cars, and I know for a fact that Pedro ordered all his officers, or as he calls them, boys. Even the girls on his force.' Lee giggled a little, as she continued her thoughts, 'To leave anyone driving these vehicles, alone.'
'Speaking of Pedro. I think I will look him up first.'
Lee backed up of the car into the pathway, leading to a nearby car exit. She then put the car's automatic shift into drive, and she very slowly drove up to the nearby garage door.
As she came to a stop in front of the garage, she used the clicker remote to open the door.
After the garage door rolled up into the ceiling, she drove through the opening, and into the sunny, outside air.
When her car completely cleared the door, she stopped her car. She the used her middle rearview mirror to look behind her, as she used her remote to close the garage door. Also, noted which garage door she had come out of the back of the building.
When she saw the door began to roll down, she turned her attention to her front, as she drove out of the parking lot, onto a nearby street, and towards her first destination.
Though, Lee took her time, and she was extra careful on the road. Because she was now pregnant, and she was responsible for three lives, instead of just her own life.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Lee reach first destination of the day, the Plata Podrido Police Station.
Lee soon parked her black sedan in the parking lot across the street from the front of the police station.
Lee then got of her car, locked the door, and shut the door.
She walked up to the edge of the street, looked both ways, and when saw the road was clear, she walked across it.
While Lee casually walked towards the main entrance of police station, she noticed that a few people, passing by on the sidewalk, in front of her, were looking her up and down.
Lee cracked a grin, as she thought, with amusement, 'Most women would be unnerved by such looks. But, I have had far worse looks, of a more threatening manner. So, I find such looks to be flattering.'
As Lee approached the doors to the police station, Lee saw the man take one looked at her, and he smiled, as he held the right door open for her, from the inside.
(_)
While Lee passed by the man, and into the build, she turned to him, as she thanked the man, in spanish, “Gracias.”
The man continued to smile, though he did not reply.
Lee turned her head in front of her, as she continued to walk inside. With the man then walking outside, with him shutting the door behind himself.
Meanwhile, Lee looked in front of herself, as she saw that she was approaching a male police officer, in uniform, manning the front desk of the station. She also saw that the police station was not busy that morning.
A few seconds later, Lee came to a stop in a few feet from the front desk.
The police officer at the desk in front looked up, from his paperwork, and towards her. He kindly asked, in spanish, “What can I do for you, ma'am?”
Lee happily thought, 'I just love it when people call me, ma'am. Now, to get down to business.' She politely requested, in spanish, “Good morning. I would like to talk to Chief Del Soto at his earliest convenience.”
The police officer inquired, “May I ask what this is about?”
Lee answered, “It is about, Lee. The police chief will understand.”
Lee noticed police officer stiffened a little.
While not showing it on the outside, Lee thought, with amusement, 'I guess he knows something about me, and the situation around me... Interesting... Though, I highly doubt he knows it is me he is presently talking too.'
The police officer quickly reigned in his composure, as he calmly said, “I let him know that you are here. Please, take a seat at a nearby bench.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee saw the police officer reached for his phone.
Lee then turned around and walked over to an empty bench, that sat on the same wall as the front doors to the outside, to the right side of the front entrance.
When Lee reached the bench, she turned around, and seated herself, with her legs closed.
Lee turned back to look at the police officer at the front, and she saw him set his phone back down.
Lee thought, 'With luck, this will not take long. And I hope not. I have a very fun, though busy day, planned for myself.'
Lee then patiently waited for someone to come get her.
Five minutes later, a female police office had come in from the back of the room, and approach her.
As the police woman stopped in front of Lee, Lee looked up at her.
The police woman said, in spanish, “The police chief will see you now. Please, follow me.”
Lee silently got up and followed the woman, through long a pathway, to the left side of the room, beside groups of desks. Some of the desk were occupied, with officers writing reports, or review documents.
Lee also noticed there were fewer officers than normal.
Lee thought, 'I will have to ask Pedro about that why there are not as many police officers, as I remember.'
Half a minute later, they reached Police Chief Pedro Del Soto's office.
As they approached Pedro's office, Lee saw the door to the office was closed, with the blinds facing the outer room being closed, as well.
Lee thought, 'I guess, after everything that has happened. That Pedro would naturally become cagier.'
When they reached the door, the police officer knocked on the door.
They heard Pedro say from inside, in spanish, “Come in.”
The police officer then opened the door, and she held it open for Lee.
Lee silently walked through the doorway, and into the office. With the officer gently closing the door behind Lee, from the outside.
Lee then looked around the room, as she slowing approached Pedro's desk, with its two chairs in front, and Pedro, himself, sitting in his desk chair, behind his moderate sized, brown, wooden desk.
Pedro had on his usual clothing on, of a short-sleeved button up shirt, and pants. Though, his long coat and hat were hanging on the coat rack, in the corner, by the door.
Pedro also had on his semi-automatic pistol, which was holstered in its shoulder holster, under Pedro's left arm pit.
And Lee saw Pedro looking back at her, with a stern look on his face.
Both adults looked at each other, as Lee continued to walk towards Pedro desk. She thought, 'I see the computer, furniture, phone, and everything else is the same. This place has no changed much. But, considering it has only been two weeks for Pedro, and everyone else in this reality, I am not that surprised... Now, to break the news on who I am. I hope I don't give him too much of a shock.'
As Lee came to a stop in front of the desk, Pedro had a gruff expression on his face. He requested, in a voice of authority, in spanish, “Who are you? And how do you know about Lee?”
Lee cracked a grin, as she thought, 'This is going to be so much fun.'
Lee coyly replied, “Just take a good look at my face, Pedro.”
Pedro stared at Lee's face for a few seconds. Lee then watched as Pedro's eyes when wide for a second, before he forced himself to relax both his eyes, and his face.
Pedro stated, with slight surprise in his tone of voice, “My god, Lee! What happened?”
Lee flatly replied, “A lot.”
Pedro grinned, as he thought, 'So, Lee is now a woman. And given she is here, I take it she has resolved her issues with those after her. Now, to find out what happened, and what is going on with her.'
Pedro happily requested, “Well then. Sit down, and tell me all about it.”
Lee sat down in the chair to her left, so the computer monitor on the other side of the desk would not block her view of Pedro.
After Lee sat down, she thought, 'I remember River mentioning that she learned that Pedro bugged this place. Not that I care. This is his office and commenting on it, would ruin the mood. Though, I will watch what I say. As always. But, I will tell him some stuff. After all the help you have given me, Pedro. You deserve, at least, that.'
Lee inquired, “Well, where would you like me to start?”
Pedro thought, 'I know she is only going to give me the cliff-notes version. But, it is best to find out what I can.' He plainly said, “The beginning. After you left this reality.”
Lee explained, “Well, I went to Babylon Five station, a week, or so, before they were planning to blow it up.”
Pedro guessed, “You jumped right into the station during the evacuation? With the intentional of getting mixed into the crowd? And jump transport, to another location, so you could lose the others in that galaxy spanning reality?”
Lee thought, 'I am just like River, in that I love talking to savvy people, whom quickly realize what I am talking about.' She responded, “That was the plan. And I was able to get off the station off without a hitch.”
Pedro inquired, “Well, since I see you here, now. I guess you plan did not go so smoothly, afterward. So, what went wrong?”
Lee answered, “They realized from my writings where I was heading too.”
Pedro replied, “Mars?”
Lee admitted, “Yes.”
Pedro questioned, “Why didn't you go somewhere else?”
Lee stated, “Too many unknown factors. Mars Dome One was covered very thoroughly in that series. And I at least had an idea of what to expect when I got there. And I faired very well, until they found me.” She thought, 'I will leave out the parts with Garibaldi and Garcia. He doesn't need to know about those details.'
Pedro requested, “So, what happened when they found you?”
Lee answered, “One massive chase across Mars Dome One. And I got to say, Mars Dome One is huge.”
Pedro inquired, “How big?”
Lee answered, “Likely around as the size of the massive sky dome over everything in the Big O anime.”
Pedro whistled in astonishment. He then said, “That is big.”
Lee replied, “Yes. It is.”
Pedro asked, “So, what happened next?”
Lee said, “They were closing in, and I got desperate over. And so I jumped to Jusenkyo.”
Pedro guessed, “So, you cursed yourself?”
Lee conceded, “In not so many words, yes. I also locked myself in my girl form... For a few different reasons.”
Pedro thought, 'I wonder... Could Lee be a transsexual?... Though, it would not change my opinion of her. Also, I not that I am going to ask. And I do not need to. It would explain her writing, and the way she never seemed to be relaxed as a man. But here, as a woman, her body language is completely different. She seems so relaxed and happy... But, I am sure there are another reasons she locked herself in her girl form. And I can guess what they are.'
Pedro asked, “To cure yourself of your cancer?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Pedro guessed, “But, something happened that you did not account for?”
Lee admitted, “Partly. The curse acts different on adults, than teenagers. I got turned into healthy female, six year old version of myself.”
Pedro chuckled, for a few seconds. As Pedro calmed down, he teased, “And I bet you were cute as a button.”
Lee giggled, a little. She then said, “Revy said the same thing. Yes. I was. And then, when I headed to the amazon village, to jump from there...”
Pedro thought, 'Well, Revy has always been sharp. And she does have a bit of a wit, if she does not let her emotions cloud her judgment so much.'
Pedro spoke up, “Not bad. They would think twice following you there. Even the maids. If they knew the Ranma Half series.”
Lee stated, “I know. But, the amazons captured me. They used that magic shampoo, with pressure points on my scalp, to brainwash me, and seal my memories. Though, I retained my skills. I just had no knowledge of who I was, nor how I had those skills. And I spent the next several years being raised in their tribe, as a Chinese Amazon warrior.”
Pedro started laughing for several seconds. As he calmed down, he requested, “So, what happened next?”
Lee answered, “Years later, Ranma shows up, looked for hunters to track me down. And Cologne picked my two friends and I. And I was their translator, because I was fluent in chinese, japanese, english... And, of course the spanish we are currently speaking...”
Pedro questioned. “Time loop?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Pedro asked, “So, you were sent to hunt down and capture yourself?”
Lee answered, “Pretty much.”
Pedro inquired, “Do you think Cologne knew who you were, when she sent you on this wild goose chase, after yourself?”
Lee stated, “She was the one that brainwashed me. So, yea.”
Pedro commented, “That woman is all kinds of crafty.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. She is. Though, before I left, she made it clear that I was welcome back in her village. And even my friends, whom went with me, made it clear, after they found out who I was, that they still considered me their friend.' She thought, 'That is a reminder, I need to go visit the village some time, to speak to Rose and Violet. To let them know I am fine. And then have a talk with Cologne.'
Pedro replied, “That is nice.”
Lee stated, “I agree. And after a brief visit to Lagoon island. We hunted across the multiverse, with River as our guide.”
Pedro said, “I bet that was fun.”
Lee responded, “It was. River was good company. And over the years, as an amazon, I have found that I enjoy hunting. Especially, during that time of the month.”
Pedro complimented, “That is one of the more productive ways I have ever heard of for a woman to work out their issues in dealing with their period.”
Lee snorted, “I know. And makes it more challenging, as well. Because the animals can smell my blood.”
Pedro wasn't sure how to reply, as he said, “Uh huh.” He thought, 'Too much information. Even for me.”
Lee thought, 'I will leave out me trying to capture my past self. That is just to embarrassing to admit too. Even for me. Though, I think I went too far with my explanation. I have had to deal with periods for so long. And I am around women so often. That I sometimes forget how men don't want to think about such matters. Let alone, have a woman talk about her own time of the month. And the embarrassing part is that I use to be male. Oh well.'
Lee said, “I know. Too much information. As you know, I use to be in your position, so I can appreciate your response.”
Pedro requested, “It is okay. Now, please continue.'
Lee responded, “Thank you. Anyway, our hunt obviously turned up nothing. And after two weeks, we returned to Lagoon island. The others figured out who I was, from my various skills, without any explanation on how I got those skills. And they captured me. Unsealed my memories. They had their revenge on me. Which was in a sexual manner. But, it was not rape.”
Pedro calmly stated, “I don't want to know.” He thought, 'What that crew. It could be very, very bad, and very, very twisted, even if it was not rape. And I don't want to know what your sexual tastes presently are, Lee.'
Lee said, in a reassuring tone of voice, “Don't worry. It wasn't that bad.” She mentally added, 'And I found out a lot about myself during that time... That even I did not know about...'
Lee verbally continued, “And as I mentioned, those that captured me were nice enough to inform me that my two amazon friends, whom I came with, still consider me their friend... And those that captured me were nice enough to convince my friends to leave while I was captured, for to their own safety.”
Pedro commented, “Yea. I can see why the others would not want harm to come to them, and risk upsetting Cologne.”
Lee thought, with a bit of humor, 'Pedro, it is nice that you realize how dangerous Cologne came be, as well. Now, for my big news.' She responded, “I fully agree. Also, during that time, River and I got to know each other better. And we were intimate. In both her forms... And we don't use protection. So, River got me pregnant with twins.”
Pedro calmly questioned, “You're pregnant?”
Lee nodded once, as she happily replied, “Yes. And before you ask. Chang is fine with our situation.”
Pedro stated, “I am not surprised. I figured out that River was Sam, soon after you left. And everyone could see that both of you cared deeply for each other. And Chang always did seem open to new ideas, and experiences.”
Lee complimented, “All true. And you always were clever.”
Pedro responded, “Yes. I am. But, it was clear that River was more clever than the both of us.”
Lee commented, “River is a telepathic, badass, genius. The fact we both could play at her level is a statement in of itself.”
Pedro let out a laugh. He then admitted, “True. So, where are you staying now? I don't see River just abandoning you, and the children you are going to have.”
Lee said, “Let's just say that River, Chang, and I, are now a threesome.”
Pedro chuckled a little. He then commented, “Who could have seen that coming?”
Lee replied, “Not I.”
Pedro complimented, “Nor, I. And, by the way, you make a hot woman.”
Lee gave Pedro a mischievous grin, as she said, “I know. And I look great in this dress.”
Pedro agreed, “That you do.”
Lee mentioned, “By the way, River picked out my dress.”
Pedro commented, “She always did have good taste in both female and male clothing.”
Lee replied, “I am with you on that. And she even read my mind, to find my measurement for these clothes.”
Pedro inquired, with a hint of concern and worry in his tone of voice, “So, you don't mind her reading my mind?”
Lee calmly said, “I love her. She loves me. Why would I mind?”
Pedro replied, “Whatever you both happy.” He then asked, with in concern in his tone of voice, “Now, due to our friendship. I have to ask. Are you okay with being a woman? And with being pregnant?”
Lee answered, “Yes, on the first question. Not sure, on the second question. I am only a month pregnant. But, I am okay with having River and my children.”
Pedro said, “Well, good luck.”
A thought occurred to Lee. She mentally reflected, 'I might as well ask him, while I am here.' Lee inquired, “Thank you. And I heard you had a run in with the maids?”
Pedro soberly answered, “And Revy. I got your message, and I immediately left town. But, they found me the next day...” Pedro let out a breath. He then continued, “I had to tell them everything.” He thought, 'I will leave out the recordings, because I don't want to destroy what little friendship we have left between each other. There is already enough problems between us, as is.'
Lee commented, “It is good that you did. If not, they would have tortured and killed you. And I faced them, myself, a few times. So, I know what you were dealing with.”
Pedro responded, with a bit of relief in his tone of voice, “Thank you for being so understanding.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome. On another matter. I also noticed your station seems to be short handed?”
Pedro admitted, “Yes. A number of my officers partly figured out what was going on. When we get your message that the maids were in town. Half my force fled with me out of town... And most have not yet returned...”
Lee soberly said, “Well, good luck with that.”
Pedro stated, “Thanks. I am going to need it.”
Lee inquired, “Anything else happen, while I was gone?”
Pedro thought, 'It would be tempting to tell Lee what is going on at the Devil's Hotel, and Melvin. But, I will keep that to myself. Lee is now to close to Chang, and River. And I do not want either of those two people to know that I have my men staked out at several places in town, including Chang's Casino.'
Pedro lied, “Not really.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
There was an uneasy silence for several seconds.
Pedro thought, 'I might as well ask her the important question between us.'
Pedro quietly asked, “So?... How is this going to work now?... Between us?”
Lee responded, “What do you mean?”
Pedro pointed out, “Well, since you came to my town, you turned my life upside down. And while I won't hold the gender change, and pregnancy against you. You are now shacked up with... As you put it... My arch-nemesis...”
Lee sadly said, “I really shouldn't have joked about that.”
Pedro stated, in a firm tone of voice, “No. You shouldn't have.”
Lee commented, in a calm tone of voice, “Listen. I have no interest to see harm come to you. Chang just wants to play with you, to keep his edge. And when it comes to River, she likes you, as a friend. And as Sam, she was your friend.”
Pedro said, “Let River know I still consider her a friend. The same, as you.”
Lee replied, in a grateful tone of voice, “Thank you. She will be happy to learn that from you. And as for the others at the casino, they could care less about you and your men.”
Pedro responded, “I realize that. But, where does that leave us? We are so far from each other, over the line, that neither of us can just be friends.”
Lee suggested, “Okay. I see your point... How about, friendly enemies?...”
Pedro shrugged, as he replied, “That works for me. And I think we are done for today.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. We are.”
Pedro commented, “And let Chang know. No Bond to Bond villain dinners. I find them completely cliche.”
Lee giggled a little. She then said, “I fully agree. And I will let him know.” She thought, with amusement, 'And I still remember writing that Bond villain dinner Chang had with Annie and John, in my stories.'
Pedro inquired, “Good. Now, are you still going to go by Lee?”
Lee answered, “Yes. I know it will raise questions. But, I don't care.”
Pedro replied, “Okay.”
Pedro then stood up from his seat. He leaned over his desk, as he extended his right hand to Lee.
Lee got up, and shook Pedro's extended hand with her own right hand, for a few seconds.
As they broke this handshake, Pedro sat back down in his desk, as Lee remained standing.
Pedro asked, “So, where are you heading next?”
Lee answered, “To the Last Resort Diner.” She mentally added, 'I am now eating for three, and I could use another small snack.'
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he casually inquired, “The Lowe family?”
Lee questioned, in a curious tone of voice, “How did you know?”
Pedro answered, “A few days ago, Ed stopped hiding in back, and started helping her family out in the front After that, it wasn't hard to figure out. Though, I would prefer you not mention that I know it is them.”
Lee responded, “No problem. And given you have resources, and you are extreme genre savvy. You still have a decent chance of winning the battle ahead of you.”
Pedro replied, “I know. That is why I haven't thrown in the towel, just yet.”
Lee said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Well... Just to let you know... I have faith in you. So, don't give up.”
Pedro joked, “I won't. And just so you know. If you try to kiss me, make a playful pass at me, or romantically tease me, in some way, I am going to shoot you. I have no interest in having to deal with a femme fatale. Especially, one that use to be a guy.”
Lee let out a laugh. She then said, “I wouldn't dare. Anyway, have a good day, Pedro.”
Pedro replied, “You too, Lee.”
Lee turned around, and headed for the door. When she reached the door, she opened the door, she walked through it, and she gently shut the door it. She then left for the parking lot outside the building, and across street.
Pedro watched Lee shut the door behind her. He thought, 'This town is getting stranger by the minute... And I am not going to crack a joke about the fate of this town. Because I know it can get worse... Far, far worse...'
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lee drove her sedan into the parking lot of the Last Resort Diner. The diner was a U.S. style greasy spoon style restaurant.
Lee soon parked her car, in a parking space, near the front of the restaurant.
After Lee got out, and locked her car, she walked up to the dine. She then entered the restaurant from the front, windowed doors.
As she stepped inside, her sense of smell alerted her to very enjoyable aroma.
Lee walked closer to the counter, to get out of the pathway of other people, as she happily thought, 'The food here smells so good. But first, I need to find the one of the Lowe family members, to talk to them... And then give them give them my order...'
Lee then looked around, and she saw that it was not very busy. The diner only had a few customers at the time of day.
Lee thought, 'Good. I got here before lunch rush.' She then saw Lori Lowe approach her.
Lori had just set down a mug of coffee, and a glass of ice water for a customer, in a booth by a window, to Lee's right, and Lori was now walking to another part of the diner.
Lee thought, 'Perfect. She is coming towards me. Now, to figure a way to introduce myself to her. So, she can recognize me.'
As Lori approached Lee, the other black haired woman look at Lee, and she came to at stop a few feet from Lee, as Lee turned her body towards Lee.
Lori looked Lee up and down. Lee could see Lori cracked a grin, as she noticed Lee's amber brown long skirt, with leaf patterns on it.
Lori then looked up at Lee's face, as she casually said, in english, “Hi Lee.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that problem was solved by itself. And I do look like a younger, female version of myself. So, it would not be that hard to tell who I am. And Aeryn did state that everyone in the loop knows about my gender change. Still, I might as well ask.' She inquired, in english, “So, you heard?”
Lori grinned mischievously, as she said, “Yea. We heard from the grapevine that you became a girl. They had their revenge. You are now pregnant with twins. River's twins. And you are staying with her and Chang, at the penthouse.”
Lee thought, 'Lori probably got half of that from the grapevine, and she got the other half from her family figuring it out. There are perks to have a wife and kids that are geniuses. And I will likely eventually enjoy such perks, in the future. And there is no point in denying the truth to someone that has been so helpful towards me.'
Lee said, “That about sums is up. By the way, thank you for your help. The car and items came in handy. And it is nice to know that there were people that cared about me.”
Lori smile turned warm, as she responded, “You're welcome. And don't worry. I have been pregnant before, myself. It was a wonderful experience. Except for the birth. But, that is another matter.”
Lee returned Lori's smile, as she requested, “I am grateful for your support. Now, I know you can get busy in this line of work. But, if it is okay, if I order something to eat, while I talk to all four of you all?”
Lori said, “Sure. Ed and the boys are all here. And we enjoy talking to you. So what do you want?”
Lee answered, “Two scrambled eggs, and two pieces of dry toast. Along with a sweet tea.”
Lori inquired, “Light meals because of morning sickness?”
Lee replied, “Yea. But, I am on top of it.”
Lori pointed out, “Okay. You know caffeine is not good for the kids?”
Lee countered, “That is why I am not having a cola. Caffeine is not great, but corn syrup is worse.”
Lori agreed, “True.”
Lee commented, “And I already had orange juice, earlier. And I don't feel like milk, lemonade, nor water.”
Lori replied, “Fine.”
Lee looked over, across the counter. She saw one tanned skinned black haired man at the grill, and she saw another tanned skinned black haired man washing dishes.
Lee thought, 'One of them is Stan. The other is Lewis. And from my faded memories, I am not sure which is which. But, I seem to recall the Lowe family mentioned that Lewis was the good cook of the two of them. Though, the other could fix passable food. Just not great food... Now, where is Ed?...'
Lee then looked around, and then over her left shoulder, behind her, on the left side of the restaurant, and she saw Ed taking an order.
Lee thought, 'Ah. There she is.'
Lee turned back to face Lori, whom she could tell noticed her looked around. She thought, 'Lori, or as she was known as a guy, Bob, always had an eye for detail.'
Lee said, “I see the entire family is here, working, at the moment.”
Lori replied, “Yes. Even with Ed helping up front, it is not enough. And we are thinking of hiring more staff. This place seems to be getting more popular.”
Lee complimented, “Good idea. And I am sure you have some good ideas on the matter?”
Lori said, “Yes.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to get some clarification from Lori, which directly asking which of her adult children is which.' She asked, “So, who is cooking today?”
Lori replied, “Lewis.”
Lee responded, “Good. I vaguely remember that you guys stated he was the good cook among your two children.”
Lori suggested, “Yea. Lewis is a good cook. And before we get you something to eat, let me reintroduce you to the rest of my family.”
Lee replied, “Sure.”
The two black haired woman then turned, and walked up to the counter.
When they reached the counter, Lee sat in a stool, while facing the across the counter, towards the grill, as Lori stood, and looked over at her children.
From the corner of her left eye, Lee saw Ed walk up to be behind the counter, on the far left end.
Lori calmly requested, “Sons. Could I have your attention for a moment?”
Lori then noticed Ed approaching them. She turned to her wife, as she said, “And you as well, Ed.” She looked over at her entire family, as she continued, “That is someone I want you to meet.”
Ed walked up to Lee, from across the counter. She took one looked at Lee, and Lee could tell that Ed was trying very hard to hide a mischievous grin.
Meanwhile, Lewis finished what he was cooking, and put it on a plate. He then turned to look at his parents, and Lee
Nearby, Stan finished cleaning, put away the plate he was working on, and he dried his hands. He then turned to face his parents, and Lee.
Stan asked, “What is it, dad?”
Lori turned to Lee. She then looked back at her family, as she calmly said, “Let me reintroduced you to our dear friend, Lee.”
Ed could not hold in her mirth any longer, as she started giggling.
Lee also saw the two brothers smiling at her.
Lewis said, “Hi Lee.”
Stan complimented, “Damn, you are hot as a girl, Lee.”
Lee turned their smile, as she replied, “Thank you. And hi to all of you.”
Lewis hesitantly inquired, “So... Are the rumors true? That you are also pregnant?”
Lee said, “Relax. It is okay to ask me that question. And yes. I am pregnant with twins.”
By then, Ed has stopped giggling, as she asked, “How far along are you?”
Lee answered, “Around a month. And yes, I do have a little morning sickness. But, only a little.”
Ed replied, “Okay.”
Lee asked, “So, I have a question for you guys. Why are you still running this diner? For that matter. Besides finding me. Why are you still in this reality?” She thought, 'And while I use to care if others learned the truth. I no longer do. But, I won't advertise the facts, either.'
Stan answered, “We have nothing better to do. And since all the crazies we knew moved here. We figured we would come here, as well.”
Lee questioned, “Okay. I can understand that. But, why have the diner? Don't get me wrong. I love the food and drink selections here? But, why continue running it. From what I understand, Eda and Yolanda quit their burger van business.”
Ed casually answered, “Yea. We heard. Anyway, this provides ample cover for us. It gives us a good excuse to stay near the excitement, without being a part of the excitement.”
Lee questioned, “So, you are basically just watching from the stands, with popcorn, and soda, in hand?”
Ed smiled mischievously, as she responded, “Exactly. Though, we are going to have to hire some help. Even with me sometimes cooking, this is a full time job, and we would all like to have a life.” She thought, “Even with the time dilation tricks we are doing, this job is getting old, to do, all the time. And held would allow us to take a break.'
Stan commented, “Yea. That would be nice.”
Lewis replied, “I agree.”
Lori turned to her wife, as agreed, “You got that right, honey.” She turned to Lee, as she continued, “And don't worry. I already am working on that. And I have someone in mind.”
Lee commented, “I trust you will have no problems settling this issue.”
Lori replied, “Thank you.”
Lewis asked, “By the way, how long have you been a girl?”
Lee answered, “A little over twenty years. Long story short. As you knew, I was dying of cancer. I used the spring of drowned girl to cure myself, and the ring on my finger locks the curse. The ring grows around my finger, as I do. And it will not come off. Considering, I will likely die of cancer if it does, I am very careful to keep my ring finger out of harms way. Still, the main problem was that the curse gave me the body of a six year old girl. But, I you can see, my body still ages.”
Stan pointed out, in a slightly amused tone of voice, “I guess that is why they call it spring of drowned girl, and not spring of drowned woman.”
Lee replied, “I know, Stan. And I suspected that was the case, beforehand. But, I did not have much choice in that matter.”
Stan pointed out, “That still doesn't account for you age. You should look ten years older, in your mid to late twenties. Instead, you look like a woman that is their late teens.”
Lee commented, “That ring also gives me other benefits. Such a slowing my aging by half.”
Stan replied, “Nice.”
Lee grin, as she said, “I know.”
Lewis stated, “I get the feeling that you did not just jump in to save yourself. Unless you inquired first. Which from the sound of it, you did not.”
Lee complimented, “That is very astute of you, Lewis. I had jumped into to save two others. One that fell in. And the other that dived in after the first person.”
Ed asked, “Who are these fools?”
Lee stated, “I would love to tell you. But, I don't want to make any more enemies.”
Ed conceded, “Good point.”
Lewis questioned, “So, what happened next?”
Lee said, “I got captured by the Chinese Amazons. Cologne talked to me, then she brainwashed me, with some shampoo, which sealed my memories.”
Stan said, “That is sad.”
Lee countered, “Not really. We talked it over, before she did it. There was no way I could have stopped her. But, she did point out that given I did not change back and forth, I would eventually have the emotional state of a child, with the memories of an adult.”
Ed commented, “That would be bad.”
Lee agreed, “I know. And since I knew from watching the Ranma Half series that the shampoo brainwashing was completely reversible, I decided not to fight it. Due to this, I got to have another childhood. And I spent the next twenty years being raised by them, as a member of their village.”
Ed commented, “That is nice.”
Lori asked, “So, you are now part of the Amazon tribe?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And when I left the village, Cologne made it clear would still be welcome, no matter what. Though, she did not me that what, was the fact of who I use to be. I learn that, later.”
Eda inquired, “That sound like her. I was wondering. How does those kissing rules really work?”
Lee halfheartedly commented, “The whole kiss of marriage and kiss of death is more a set of guidelines, than rules.”
The others laughed at the Lee's Pirates of the Caribbean joke.
As they calmed down, Lee continued, in a more sober tone of voice, “But, if you do it, you have to follow through on it.” She thought, 'And I am so happy that Ranma stopped me from giving Revy the kiss of death. That would have been bad for everyone involved. I will have to thank her for preventing me from doing that, sometime.'
Lori inquired, “Got you... So, how do you end up getting caught by those after you?”
Lee thought, 'I think I will tell you a few details I do not care to share with the others.'
Lee stated, “That is the funny part. Over twenty years later, from my point of view. Though, that was a few months ago, for me. Ranma, whom I had just escaped from, a few days, beforehand, from her point of view. Came to visit Cologne, and ask her for some help, from the Amazons, to help track me down. So, Cologne sent me, as one of the trackers, and the translators, along two of my best friends, to go hunt me down. And I did find myself. That is, me of the past.”
The Lowe family started lightly laughing, as Lee thought, 'I knew you would find that funny.'
Lee continued, “And it gets better. Fortunately, River, of our time, showed up and stopped up before we did something stupid. That was when River called off our hunt, and we returned back to Lagoon Island, around two weeks after we began our hunt. And those on the island eventually figured out it was me, and I got caught, and I had my memories restored. Then, they got their retribution.”
Lori realized something, as she thought, 'Knowing that group, and given some of the things that Revy said she wanted to do to me, during my run from her. We probably don't want the details. I need to move this conversation forward, before it gets to dark on this subject.' She said, “It looks like things worked out for you.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. They did.” She thought, 'Thank you, Lori. For moving the conversation forward, without any details on the matter of my punishment.'
Ed inquired, “Given it was decades after Cologne brainwashed you. Do you think Cologne still remembers that it was you that Ranma was after?”
Lee shrugged, as she flatly said, “Oh hell, yes. But, I don't hold it against her.”
Lori said, “That is a wise decision.”
Lee replied, “I agree. She was the one to even give me my chinese name. Dongmei. Which means, winter plum. And plum, in chinese, is Lee.”
Lori complimented, “Interesting. And that is a nice name. I like it.”
Lee agreed, “So, do I. But, I like, Lee, better.”
Ed then got a mischievous smile, as she inquired, “So, given you have been a girl for several years. Have you had your period, yet?”
Stan and Lewis looked away from Lee and their mother, while Lori just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, before she looked back at her wife, and Lee.
Lee said, in an even tone of voice, “Of course. For years.” Lee then looked over at Stan and Lewis, as she continued, “Though, I prefer to not talk about such matters in the company of those not conformable discussing the subject.”
The two brothers turned back to look at Lee and their mother, as Lewis kindly stated, “Thank you.”
Stan said, “We appreciate your concern for our feelings.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Ed shrugged. She turned to her sons, as she said, “Don't be that way children. You already turn into girls. And it is something you will have to learn to deal with, someday.”
Stan commented, “But, not today.”
Lewis said, “Nor, anytime soon.”
Lori and Lee giggled at the brothers' response, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lori looked over at Lee, as she asked, “So, what are you going to do now?”
Lee answered, “Live with River and Chang, in the penthouse, have the kids, and raise them.”
Lori said, “Sounds okay. And while I can get you being with River. For obvious reasons. What is the dynamic of you and Chang?”
Lee answered, “We have an understanding. We both love River, and we respect each other for our abilities. And yes, this is a threesome situation, where it is debatable whom is sharing whom, with whom.”
Ed smiled, as she teased, “Sounds like fun...” She dropped her smile, as she continued, in a straightforward manner, “But, not for us.”
Lee commented, “Yea. It is fun. Also, I have been thinking about my stories. And some of the stuff that has not happened yet. Which mostly deals with you two. Ed, Lori, I hope you are not sore about having another set of kids. This time, them being girls.”
Lori said, “It is okay.”
Ed agreed, “Yea. It is no problem. Actually, all four of use talked about that last night, in the home we bought here, on the island, for us to live in...”
Lori stated, “It is a nice home. With an in ground pool. And it is heated, with saltwater, like a the casino.”
Lee thought, “Nice.” She thought, 'So, they have been to Chang's casino. That is interesting. But, a conversation for another time.'
Ed stated, “Anyway... We both agreed that it is a ways off, in our plans. But, we do look forward to it.”
Lori smiled towards Ed, as she said, “Yes. We do.”
Ed returned her spouse's smile.
Lewis commented, “Yea. And having some sisters might be fun.”
Stan looked at his brother, as he said, “When we are not the sisters.”
Lewis looked over at his brother, as he agreed, “Exactly.”
Both brothers then turned back to their parents, and Lee.
Lee replied, “I am glad you feel that way. Also, I have a question for you two, that I can only ask you two. Because the others, I know, whom know the answer, will likely just laugh in my face.” She thought, 'Or, at the very least, get a good chuckle, before they answer my question.'
Lori kindly responded, “Go ahead. Ask away.”
Lee looked over at Lori, as she sighed. She inquired, “Is labor and childbirth really that painful?”
Ed shrugged, while Lori calmly answered, “It is not pleasant. And Ed and I both talked to each other about it. We agreed that while the birth itself was the most painful part. It was the hours of labor cramping leading up to the birth that was the worst part. But, given everything you have been through, I am sure you will be fine.”
Lee said, “Thank you. Because, I am likely going to have to naturally deliver both my children.”
Ed commented, “Honestly. I would have preferred to go through labor and childbirth again, than deal with the next three years worth of diaper changing.”
Lewis and Stan groaned, while Lee and Lori burst out laughing.
As Lee and Lori calmed down, they looked over at Ed.
Ed stated, “By the way, Violin, Aeryn, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, came to visit us a week ago, looking for some of those hologram watches.”
Lee defended, in a calm tone of voice, “I did not tell them a word about your helping me. I only stated something, after B and Balalaika stated they all figured out that you helped me.”
Lori said, “We know. We are pretty sure they figured it out on their own. Or, more likely, B told them about our trip, when we got those hologram devices. And they put the pieces together. Either way is okay with us. B is a friend that was caught in the middle of this, by our own actions. Not hers. So we do not want to cause her any problems. And those five women were polite about their inquires.”
Lee responded, “I am glad to hear that. So, did you given them some of those devices?”
Ed answered, “Unfortunately, not. They are rare to get in private hands. And we only were able to get three. And we gave one of the items to you.”
Lee sheepishly said, “Sorry about losing that watch.” She mentally added, 'I am not even sure if Garibaldi still has the one he took from me.'
Ed causally said, “We don't mind. It was for a good cause.”
Lee smiled, as she replied, “Thank you for being understanding.”
Ed returned Lee's smile, as she said, “No problem.”
A thought occurred to Lee, as she asked, “By the way. I am sure you heard that B and Balalaika are pregnant?”
Lori said, “Of course. We were even invited, and went to their babyshower.”
Stan and Lewis looked away, from their parents.
Ed turned to her two sons. She then turned back to Lee, as stated, “And we had fun at that party. And don't let Stan and Lewis' expressions fool you. They had fun, as well.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that is interesting.' She said, “I am glad to hear that.”
Lori commented, “Well, as much as I love to continued this conversation, we have to get back to work.”
Ed agreed, “You're right.”
Stan and Lewis turned back to Lee.
Lewis halfheartedly said, “Sad, but true.”
Stan sighed, as he stated, “And this was just getting good... At least, there is always, later.”
Lee said, “True.” She mentally added, 'I need to check something real quick.'
Lee took a quickly, and she noticed that few customers sitting in the diner were not looking at them.
Lee thought, 'Good, we did not attract any unwanted attention. Now, to finish this.'
Lee looked back at the Lowe family, as she commented, “Well, it was fun talking to you. And we will have to do this again, sometime.”
Ed stated, “Of course.”
Lee said, “I plan to be a regular customer.”
Ed happily replied, “All the better.”
Lori said, “Yes. We look forward to it. Now, let's get you lunch ready, and get back to work.”
The Lowe family then when back to their jobs. And Lee was soon brought her drink and small lunch.
After Lee finished her lunch, she paid for her meal with one of the fifty dollar bills River had given here. And Lee used some of the change from that fifty dollar bill, to leave Lori a generous tip. Next, Lee took a quick visit to the women's restroom, which she found was a very clean restroom. After which, she left the diner, and she was soon in her black sedan, driving towards her next destination.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee found a close parking place, for her car, in the parking lot.
Lee then parking her car, turning off the engine, getting, and out, and locking the door behind her.
After which, Lee walked to the front entrance of her next destination, the Devil's Hotel.
Less than a minute later, she made her way inside, as she passed the two sets of doors, and into the lobby, she stopped and looked around.
Lee thought, 'It doesn't look any different. And it is sad that returning here feels like coming home, instead of where I am from. But, spending so much time in the time loop, it still does. Now, to visit Melvin, and give him the big news.'
Lee then took left, as she headed for the double-door entrance to hotel's bar and restaurant.
A minute later, Lee walked into the restaurant, and she found she was the only person in the room.
As she walked up to her usual place at the bar counter, she thought, 'Where is Melvin?...'
When Lee reached the bar, in her usual place, she decided to stand, as she looked across the empty bar counter.
From the corner of her left eye, Lee noticed a woman walking into the room, from the kitchen door, to Lee's left, along the left wall, near the back part of the room.
Lee saw that the woman had a healthy, fair skin, slender, athletic physical build. She had a brown hair, which was cut in short, boyish hair style. She wore a yellow button up long sleeved shirt, black cloth pants, that did not have a belt, but was button from the front, above the zipper, and black tennis shoes. Lee could not tell what type of bra, panties, nor socks, the woman wore underneath her clothing.
Lee also noticed that the woman appear to be in her mid-twenties, and she had a very recognizable face to Lee.
Lee saw the woman looking back at her, with a neutral, but relaxed expression on her face.
As Lee watched the woman walk behind the bar counter, from a small entrance on that side of the counter. She then walked up to Lee, as Lee thought, with mild surprise, 'You have got to be kidding me... And it got to be who I think it is... It has got to be Melvin...'
When the woman made it to where she was standing across the counter from Lee, she stopped and turned to the woman with loose long black hair.
The woman kindly asked, in english, “Hi. I am Melanie. What can I get for you?”
Lee thought, 'Well, so this is what B mention by settling their differences with Melvin. And she was right, Melvin is in good health. But, Melvin is no longer a man... Though, neither am I... And I see no point in beating around the bush.'
Lee calmly stated, in english, “Melvin. I know it is you.”
Melanie looked more closely at Lee, as she inquired, “Lee? They got you too?”
Lee replied, “No. I did this to myself. Long story. I even ended up pregnant. By the way, Melanie is a nice female name.”
Melanie commented, “Thanks. I picked it out, myself.”
Lee thought, 'I thought as much. Also...' She stated, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “I am sorry that they caught you.”
Melanie said, “Being a woman is not as bad as I thought it would be. Though, I have only been a woman for about a week. Still, the good news is that I did cut a deal with the Balalaika and B. By the way, I didn't have a clue that the Balalaika's new girlfriend, B, use to be the Boris, until I read your stories.”
Lee thought, 'I wonder where Melvin learned about my stories?... Let alone when she read them?... Pedro, or someone else, could have told her. Not that it matters. And I will find out, later. Speaking of Pedro, I would bet that he already knows that Melvin was now a she, and he chose not tell me. Though, I am sure he had his reasons. But, I wonder why Melvin did not realize that B was Boris?'
Lee inquired, “I know you saw the series. So, you didn't see the omakes?”
Melanie was quite for a few seconds. She then realized what Lee was getting at, as she commented, “Oh yea. The Viva Youth omake... Yes. I did. It is just that I could not picture Boris that way. But, now that I think about it, B does have a striking resemblance to the pretty boy that Boris was as a teenager.”
Lee asked, “So, when did you see the omakes?”
Melanie answered, “Pedro showed me, and others, the fansubs of the Black Lagoon omakes during one of his movie night... Among other things in his collection...”
Lee commented, “Yea. I have an idea of what type of collection he has.”
Melanie flatly stated, “That is an understatement. As far as I know, he has no porn in his collection. But, his fictional collection is still very twisted.”
Lee agreed, “I bet. So, what was your opinion of the omakes?”
Melanie admitted, “Very funny. But, I am not going to mention them in front of Balalaika, nor B.”
Lee complimented, “That is very wise of you.”
Melanie responded, “Thank you. Now, onto another matter. You said you are pregnant?”
Lee smiled slightly widened, as she happily replied, “Yep. With twins. Though, I am only one month along.” She then lessened her smile to a normal sized grin.
Melanie questioned, “Who is the father?”
Lee casually answered, “River.”
Melanie let out a laugh. She then said, with mirth in her tone of voice, “Only you, Lee. Only you. So, where are you staying?”
Lee calmly stated, “I am even now staying with River and Chang, in their penthouse, at the casino.”
Melanie commented, “Considering you are pregnant with River and your kids. I am not surprised. So, what does River look like as a guy?”
Lee cracked a grin, as she said, “You know her... Or, more aptly, him. River was playing a much longer game than even I was. Because, River was using her male form to fool us all, as Sam.”
Then, the meaning of Sam's name dawned on Melanie, as the brown haired woman said, “Sam, Tam.”
Lee replied, “Yep. And she even wore that fake beard.”
Melanie guested, “That is how she fooled you?”
Lee said, “Yes. I wrote it so that gender benders cannot grow beards, so her using a fake beard threw me.”
Melanie commented, “I can appreciate that. And she kept my secrets from the others. That was so sweet of her.”
Lee kindly said, “Yes. River is a very nice, and much saner person than we gave her credit for.”
Melanie asked, “Now, that I know she was pretending to be Sam, I agree. And what about others after you?”
Lee flatly said, “The matter is settled.” Lee then quickly changed the subject back to Melvin, as she continued, “So, what exactly happened with you and Hotel Moscow?”
Melvin thought, 'I am not surprised that you would want to change the subject on this matter. And I will go along with you doing so.' She answered, “Balalaika made me a good offer. I could officially quit Hotel Moscow, in good standing, if I went through the vat process. I think I got the better end of the stick.”
Lee replied, “I would agree. And you look pretty good as a woman.”
Melanie said, “And so do you. And I am also happy that Balalaika believed me, when I said I was serious about not going back. And she cut me loose. Best of all, I was even able keep my old job here. Though, most of those here, except the manager, do not know that I was Melvin. I think it is best that I just present myself as the new girl, Melanie. Though, reintroductions, and reforging friendships can be a pain.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It can be annoying to reintroduce yourself as a different identities, and have to rebuild your friendships from the ground of. That is why I am glad I am not hiding from anyone, anymore. Also, I am glad that you employer was so reasonable.”
Melanie cracked a grin, as she said, “So, am I.”
Lee suggested, “Though, I suggest you be honest with your friends.”
Melanie commented, “I am planning to tell a select few in the coming weeks. And it is likely others will figure it out, on their own.”
Lee said, “I don't doubt that.”
Lee then noticed a flier on the bar, near them. She asked, “What is that?”
Lee picked up the flier and read it. She saw that it was for the reopening of the Rats Nest.
Lee thought, 'What a minute, I know this flier... Or, a copy of it... Could it be?... It would make sense, and fit the motif of my life and art... It looks like my day is going to be even more interesting than I thought.'
Lee then set the flier down, as Melanie said, “Yes. That is one of the fliers for the reopening of the Rats Nest. Though, I am surprised the bartender was able to get that bar repaired, and reopened, in less than a week.”
Lee commented, “Well, she does have experience in repairing bars.” She thought, 'At lot of experience.'
Melanie agreed, “Given the crazies that woman has to deal with, I am not surprised.”
A thought then occurred to Lee, 'I wonder... Yea. It is not a bad idea. They are both nice people, and they deserve someone in their lives. So, I think I will try to get them together. And I won't be sneaky. I will be up front with both of them. That way, there is less chance of this suggestion backfiring on any of us.'
Lee commented, “You know what? Could you say that I know you well, Melvin?”
Melanie answered, “Yes. And you can call me Melvin, or Melanie. I don't mind, either way.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. Well, I have a suggestion for you. That you might like. You might even consider what I have to say.”
Melanie inquired, “And that would be?”
Lee mischievously smiled, as she casually admittedly, “I want to set you up on a date, with someone else I know.”
Melanie cracked a grin, as she shrugged. She casually said, “Okay. I'll bite. And who are you planning to set me up with?”
Lee coyly said, “A pretty woman that I personally know.”
Melanie pointed out, “All the women you know are crazy... Present company excluded... And I am not so sure about you...”
Lee giggled. She then said, “Fair enough. And not all of the women I know are crazy... Most are... But, not all. And there is one sane woman that is currently single, that I know of.”
Melanie flatly asked, “Who?”
Lee answered, “The bartender of the Rats Nest.” She mentally added, 'It is so tempting to tell her that the woman is Bao, but that is Bao's secret to tell.'
Melanie said, in a confused tone of voice, “But, I don't know her name... I don't think anyone does.”
Lee responded, “It is pretty clear that she wants it that way. Though, after spending so much time as a customer, I know she is a nice woman. And she could use a nice... Person like you. And if you get to talk to her, she might tell you her name.”
Melanie guessed, “She told you her name? Didn't she?”
Lee directly answered, “Yes. But, like you, I respect her enough to keep her secrets.”
Melanie calmly replied, “I understand.”
Lee stated, “Though, if you want to know her name, just ask her nicely. She might tell you her name.”
Melanie commented, “I just might do that. And I will admit she is one hell of a dancer, with that guy, during the that Day of the Dead party at the hotel. Whoever he was?”
Lee stated, “That was me.”
Melanie questioned, “I didn't know you were such a good dancer.”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell her.' She stated, “While I was in hiding, on the Day of the Dead, we all got stuck in a time loop. And I was the one that remembered what was happening during the time loop. And I had a lot of time on my hands.”
Melanie raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “Sort of like from the movie, Groundhog's Day?”
Lee said, “Yea.”
Melanie stated, “So, that is why the hotel lobby played Hotel California song for you.”
Lee agreed, “That is what I figure, as well. Anyway, I will vouch for her. You two have a lot in common. And I know she swings both ways. Though, do you now swing both ways?”
Melanie said, “I haven't had enough time to find out. But, from what I am told of the process that changed my gender, and restored my youth. That the answer is, yes. And I also feel open with being a woman. Which is part of the process.”
Lee commented, “Yes. It is. And since that is the case, I believe you both should do fine. Because she is a flexible as you.”
Melanie stated, “Okay. You have convinced me. I will give it a shot, and ask her on a date.”
Lee responded, “Thanks. And don't be afraid to answer questions from her, as well. She is honest enough to trust.”
Melanie said, “I will keep that in mind. You know, if you were not pregnant, I would offer you a free drink.”
Lee replied, “It is the thought that counts.”
Lee thought, 'If what I think is going on, is going on. I need to get a business card from Melanie. I kind of forgot the phone number. Which is honest. I don't remember the phone number to this hotel. Still, along with the card, I will also need and envelope, and a few other things. But, I will get them, elsewhere.”
Lee requested, “Say, I am going to head out of here. But first, do you have one of the Devil's Hotel business cards?”
Melanie replied, “Sure.”
Reached under the bar counter, and them pulled out a business card. She then handed it to Lee.
Lee looked at the card in her right fingers. She thought, 'This looks exactly like the other one, because it is.'
As Lee took the card, and put it into her left interior jacket pocket, she said, “Thank you.”
Melanie questioned, “You're welcome. By the way, where are you heading?”
Lee let out a quite giggle. She then said, “To the Rats Nests. So, I can set the other half of this date up.”
Melanie smiled, as she stated, “Okay. I will give you a little while. And then, I will call the place.”
Lee replied, “I appreciate that. And goodbye, Melanie.”
Melanie responded, “Goodbye, Lee.”
Lee said, “I will see you, later.”
Melanie replied, “Same here.”
Lee then turned, and walked out of the restaurant. Soon after, she made it to the parking lot, and she got inside of her car. After which, she started the engine, backing out of the parking place, and drove out towards the street.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee parked in the lot, on the left side of the Rats Nest.
As Lee got out, she saw that the bar's exterior was completely repaired.
While Lee shut the door, she thought, 'I got to give Bao credit. She really knows how to get bar repairs done. And done quickly. Now, to talk to her.'
Lee then walked towards the front entrance.
As Lee walked towards the front door, she saw the rest of the bar outside, was repaired, on the front end. Including the windows, and even the paint was the same.
A few seconds later, Lee walked into the bar, and saw that the interior was the same as before the maids had blown it up.
Lee saw that the only other person in the room was Bao, Whom was standing behind the bar counter.
Lee saw Bao was dressed in one of her usual shirt. And from the mirror behind Bao, Lee could see that Bao was also wearing one of her usual pair of pants.
Lee saw that Bao was looking back at her.
Bao kindly said, “Can I help you?”
Lee smiled warmly at Bao, as she walked up to the bar counter, across from where Bao was standing.
When Lee came stop in front of Bao, she turned to look at the pretty, slender, asian woman, with short black hair, that went down to her neckline. With the asian woman appearing to be in her mid-twenties.
Lee coyly said, “Actually, I am here to talk to you?”
Bao looked at Lee more closely, as she inquired, “Who are you?”
Lee's smile grew ever to slightly wider, as she said, in a calm, yet slightly happy tone of voice, “Bao. It is me, Lee.”
Bao sighed. She commented, “I see they finally got you, too.”
Lee held back a laugh, as she thought, 'Melvin said almost the exact same thing. Yes. I think they will hit it off well, if I set this up just right.'
Lee shrugged, as she replied, “Not really. But, I am happy. And the matters between me and them are settled.”
Bao happily replied, “Good. It is always nice to be happy. And I will admit that you look good.”
Lee stated, “Thank you. So, do you.”
Bao offered, “I appreciate that. Would you like a beer on the house, for old times sake?”
Lee refused, “Sorry. I can't. I'm pregnant. With twins.”
Bao laughed for a few seconds. She then inquired, “How far along are you? Because, you don't look pregnant.”
Lee replied, “Only one month along.”
Bao casually said, “Okay. Well, let me know how that works out. I have some questions on the matter, before I even think about becoming a parent myself.”
Lee smile, as she offered, “As soon as I have the twins I am carrying, I will answer all the questions you have on the subject.”
Bao asked, “Thanks. So... I have to ask... Who is the father?”
Lee answered, “River.”
Bao flatly questioned, “Her?...”
Lee thought, with mild amusement, ' And it is going to be so much fun telling you that Sam is River. But, that will come, later.'
Just then, from the corner of Lee's eye, on the back end of the bar counter, Lee noticed a stack of papers. Though, Lee continued to look at Bao, as she thought, 'I am sure those are a stack of fliers for the reopening of this place. And I am going to need one of them, before I leave. But first, I want to have some fun. Including, trying to set you and Melvin... Err, Melanie, up.'
Lee coyly said, “Though, River is a lot better person than what most people give her credit for.”
Bao replied, “I will take you word for that.”
Lee looked around the room. A few seconds later, she turned back to back at Bao, in the asian woman's face. She commented, “I see the remodeling went well.”
Bao shrugged, as she said, “Well, after having my bar wrecked more times than I care to admit. I have learned how to get repairs done very quickly.”
Lee complimented, “And with quality, as well.”
Bao responded, “Thank you, Lee. By the way, I finally got around to reading your stories. I even tracked down Firefly series, and the Serenity movie. So, I know who River is.”
Lee conceded, “Well, at least you know what you are talking about. And I am glad you read my stories.”
Bao commented, “Those stories confirm that you are as crazy as I think you are.”
Lee said, “I will take that as compliment.”
Bao stated, “I guess for someone in your situation. You would.”
Lee responded, “I guess, we will agree on that. So, what did you think of my stories?”
Bao flatly said, “I wasn't joking about you being crazy. You need therapy. Serious therapy. A lot of therapy.”
Lee halfheartedly joked, “Those writings were my therapy.”
Neither woman laughed.
Bao said, “I guess that makes sense.”
A thought occurred to Lee. She mentally reflected, 'I might as well ask her.' She inquired, “Speaking of which. After reading my stories, I hope you are not sore about what I did to you?”
Bao replied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Not really.”
Lee hesitantly questioned, “Not even having you wet your pants?”
Bao pointed out, “I only slightly did that. And most people in that situation would have reacted far worse.”
Lee agreed, “True.” She thought, 'Now, is a good time as any. And I want to talk to Bao about this, before Melanie calls.'
Lee commented, “By the way, I was at the Devil's Hotel, earlier. And I met someone I think you might like.”
Bao slyly questioned, “You didn't tell them my name?”
Lee calmly answered, “No. I respect you to much to give away your secrets.”
Bao responded, “Thank you. So, who is person? I hope it is a woman. While I swing both ways, I still prefer women.”
Lee stated, “Yes. She is a woman. Her name is Melanie. She is cute. She ha a very good personality. And she is now the bartender at the Devil's Hotel.”
Bao casually said, “I think I met her. Though, I wish I knew where Melvin went? I liked him.”
Lee suppressed a giggle, as she thought, 'I am glad to hear you say that. Because it merely validates my attempt here.'
Lee coyly said, “I am sure everything will be revealed in the fullness of time.”
Bao asked, “So, you think I might like to be with this girl?”
Lee replied, “Yea. You have a lot common. And you are both good people.”
Bao shrugged, as she said, “I won't go that far.”
Lee pointed out, “Anyone that could put up with Revy's bitchiness, for years, has got to have the will power of a saint.”
Bao burst out laughing for several seconds. As she calmed down, she said, “I will give you that one.”
Suddenly, the phone started ringing, from the far end of the bar counter, by the back wall, near the door to the storage room.
Lee thought, 'Right on time.'
As the phone rang again, Bao said, “One moment.” She then walked across the room, and she used her right hand to picked up the wireless phone, from its base. She then turned around and started walking back towards Lee, as she looked at the woman with long black hair.
While Bao continued walking, she pressed the talk button, and held it to her right ear. She calmly said into the phone, in spanish, “Hello. You have reached the Rats Nest.”
On the other end of the phone, a feminine voice said, in english, “Hello. This is Melanie, of the Devil's Hotel. It is nice to formally talk to you.”
By then, Bao has came to a stop, across the counter from Lee.
Bao looked at Lee, as she said, in english, “Somehow, I had a feeling this phone call was coming.”
Over the phone, Melanie giggled for a few seconds. She then agreed, in a slightly happy tone of voice, “Yes. I guess you would. So, is Lee still there?”
Bao casually replied, “Yes. Lee is standing right in front of me. So, where do you know Lee from?”
Melanie coyly answer, “I know her from the Devil's Hotel. Now, has she been talking to you, about us maybe getting together?”
Bao replied, “Yes.”
Lee smiled at Bao.
Bao mentioned, “And she is smiling at me, right now. I bet she knows I am specifically talking too you.”
Bao noticed Lee grin widened ever so slightly.
Melanie complimented, “She is a sharp one.”
Bao responded, “That is an understatement.”
Melanie agreed, “You are preaching to the choir. So, I am willing to give this a shot, if you are?”
Bao pointed out, “Not to sound embarrassed. But, before I agree to anything, I would like to put a name with a face. Lee said that you are now the bartender at the Devil's Hotel. Though, I am not sure what you look like.”
Melanie calmly stated, “Fair enough. I am the fair skinned woman, with short brown hair. I was at the official reopening of your bar. A few days ago. Though, we did not talk to each other that night. You were too busy.”
Bao responded, “Yea, I was... Ah. I remember you, now. You came in for a few drinks.”
Melanie said, in a pleasant tone of voice, “Yes. I had a great time there.”
Bao happily stated, “I am glad you had fun. By the way, though I didn't get the chance to say anything then. You are quite pretty.”
Melanie responded, “Thank you. And so are you. Now, are you still open to the idea?”
Bao casually replied, “Well, I will give this a try. I got nothing better to do.”
Melanie inquired, “So, when do you want to set our date?”
Bao plainly stated, “No time like the present. I am not fully stocked yet. So, I was going to close at nine. Do you want to get a late dinner?”
Melanie replied, “Sounds good. Tonight is usually a slow night anyway. So, I can close early. Right after dinner, the dinner crowd usually leaves.”
Bao mentally wondered, 'Considering she is new there, as the bartender, how would she know that it was usually a slow night for her bar? I will find out later, tonight.' She said, “I will drive by the Devil's Hotel to pick you up then, at the front entrance.”
Melanie requested, “That works for me. Is it okay if we dress casually? I am not crazy wearing about dresses.”
Bao responded, “Neither am I. So, we will do that. And we need to keep this simple. I suggest the Last Resort Diner.”
Melanie said, “Okay. I could go for some eggs.”
Bao replied, “Good.”
Melanie commented, “See you then.”
Bao said, “Same here. Bye.”
Bao lowed the phone from her right ear, as she pressed the end button on the wireless telephone.
Boa set the phone down, on the bar counter, between her and Lee, as she looked at Lee. She flatly asked, “What aren't you tell me about Melanie? And this date you set up between us?”
Lee grinned mischievously, as she casually admitted, “A lot.”
Bao questioned, “So you, really think the two of us could be good together?”
Lee answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Yes. Besides what I already said. You and Melanie swing both ways. And you are both nice to people that are nice to you, and don't shoot up your respective bars.”
Bao could not helped but giggled, a little. She then said, “You're right about that.”
Lee commented, “Also, don't be afraid to answer questions for her. I will vouch that she will not be judgmental. And she is trustworthy with your secrets.”
Bao realized what Lee was hinting at, as she sighed. She calmly inquired, with a hint of disappointment in her tone of voice, “My cover been blown? Hasn't it?”
Lee admitted, “Pretty much. Though, Melanie doesn't know who you are. Other do.” She mentally added, 'And you don't know who Melanie really is. So, this will be an interesting meeting between the two of you. Once you get to talking to each other.'
Bao thought, 'Given I run this bar the same way I ran the Yellowflag. Along with wearing that Ao Dai to that dance. It is not surprising that some of those in Revy's group probably figured out who I am. My money is on Rock figuring who I am. Though, I still have to confirm this.' She questioned, “Do Revy, and the others know?”
Lee replied, “Yes. They know.”
Bao groaned. She then asked, “Who else?”
Lee answered, “Those at Chang's casino.”
Bao commented, “Yea. Chang already visited me.”
Lee said, “From the way you mention that, I guess it was a productive meeting.” She thought, 'I will ask Chang about that meeting, later. In a few days, to a week. After I have had time to settle in, with both of us getting to know each other, at a more emotional level. One does have to work on their relationships. They don't just happen. We both know that with our relationships with River.'
Bao responded, “It was. And I am guessing that those at the casino included the Bebop crew, and the Firefly crew?”
Lee stated, “Except for Ed. Also, Arcee is there. And as, I believe I told you, Annie is there, as well.”
Bao replied, “Of course. I wonder where Ed and her family are at?”
Lee responded, “While it may not surprise you to know. But, they currently own, and run the Last Resort Diner.”
Bao giggled a little. She then said, “And I just invited Melanie for a date there... That makes so much sense... In so many ways... And given that family are mostly geniuses, with even Bob, having flashes of brilliance. That if they don't know who I am, they will figure it out, eventually. Though, at least they know how to keep quite on secrets they know.”
Lee agreed, “That is true on all points. Though don't worry, they are polite enough not to say anything to you, unless you want to talk to them.”
Bao responded, “Thanks.”
Lee mentioned, “Also, Bob finally aged to the point that she locked in her female form.”
Bao casually said, “Let me guess. Lori?”
Lee happily replied, “You got it. Also, the reason I am telling you this is because their cover is blown, as well.”
Bao thought, 'Well, that is nice to know about the Lowe family. Though Lee, I wonder if you can confirm what I believe is the case, with Revy and her friends figuring out who I really am.'
Bao responded, “Okay. So, who told Rock and the others, who I was? Or, did they figure it out on their own?”
Lee answered, “From what I understand. They figured it out on their own. Also, this is not that bad a situation. Some of them were your best customers.”
Bao pointed out, “And very destructive customers.”
Lee commented, “They are rich, now. So, they are good for the repair bills.”
Bao conceded, “Well, there is that. At least, I have not seen some of the more scarier members of those groups, whom interested in you. Such, as River.”
Lee growled, “Remember. I am carrying her children.”
Bao quickly replied, in a sincere tone of voice, “I apologize. That was uncalled for, by me.”
Lee sighed. She said, “It is okay. Also, River was one of your best, and most polite customers. Next, to myself. You liked her. Or, should I say, him?”
It took a few seconds for Bao to realize what Lee was hinting at. But, one she did so, she bluntly inquired, “River was Sam?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And the beard River wore, as Sam, was fake.”
Bao commented, “Okay. That explains why you are pregnant with her kids. You two clearly cared deeply for each other.”
Lee said, “Yes. We do love each other.” She questioned, with mild annoyance, “So, everyone saw it, but us?”
Bao said, “Yes. And that is not the first time that I have seen that happen in my life. But, at least you two realized your feelings.”
Lee replied, “Yes. And we are both happy about that.”
Bao asked, “So, how does Chang fit into this relationship between you and River? Neither of you are crazy enough to try something like this behind his back.”
Lee casually said, “Oh... He knew ahead of time. Well, after I left this reality. And before River and I got serious with our relationship. He even gave River his blessing to sleep with me. Right now, it is a workable threesome. Chang and I care for River. And instead of trying to fight over her, and ruin our relationships with her. We are trying to see if we are compatible with each other. So, the two of us can stay together with River.”
Bao questioned, “So, are you?”
Lee coyly answered, “Let's just say that I had no problems in bed, with both of them, last night.”
Bao giggled a little, as she thought, 'And Chang and I also have our own little understanding.' She said, “In all honesty, I hope this works out for all three of you.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Bao asked, “So, I take it that none of us knew that Sam was River? Not even you?”
Lee let out a laugh. She then complimented, “You really are good at this.”
Bao said, in a happy tone of voice, “Thank you. And I take back what I said about River. Because, you're right. She, as Sam, was a very good customer. She was polite and kind to me. Along with being a good tipper. Let her know she is welcome in my bar, any time. And any gender she wants to present herself as.”
Lee smiled, as she responded, “I will.” She thought, 'Now, to take care of a few items. Including the flier.'
Lee looked to her left, over at the stack of papers. She then looked back at Bao, as she requested, “Say. Melanie had one of your reopening fliers at the Devil's Hotel. I was wondering if those papers over there were also fliers? Because, I would like to have one.”
Bao turned to look at the fliers, as she answered, “Yes. They are. And you are more than happy to take as many as you like.”
Lee said, “I only need one. And I could use an envelope large enough to fit one of them in. Along with a borrowing a pen.
Bao responded, “Sure. I will be right back.” She then turned and left for the back of the bar.
Lee then watched as Bao entered the storage room of the bar.
A few seconds later, Lee watched the bartender returned back into the room, with a pen and envelope in her left hand.
As Boa passed by the stack of papers, she casually used her right hand to pick one of the fliers, while she continued moving. Her actions were so fluid, that she did not disturb the papers underneath the flier she picked up.
Lee thought, 'Not bad. It is clear that Bao has moves and abilities she likes to hide from others. And given what she has survived in her life, I am not surprised in the least, by that fact.'
When Bao reached Lee, she stop and turned to face Lee, from across the counter. Bao then gently set the items onto the bar counter, between them, by the phone.
Bao looked at Lee, as she said, “Here you go.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then leaned forwards, as she gripped the pen, and clicked the back of it, for the point to open. And with her right hand, she gently moved the flier away. She then adjusted the envelope, to where the front was on top.
As Lee adjusted her grip on her pen, she thought, 'I remember that the envelope had my name on it. In print. In english. My given, male name. Which, even after all these decades, I still know by heart. So, this should not be too hard. And I can always ask for another envelope, if I mess up.'
Lee then began writing.
Bao looked down at Lee, as she thought, 'So, she is a lefty. That is not surprising. But, what is she writing. It looks like a name.' She asked, “What are you writing?”
Lee did not look up at Bao, as she continued carefully righting her given name, in print. Though, she answered, “This is a gift for someone, from which I hope to bring you business from.”
Bao commented, “I wish you luck. I could always use the type of business you bring.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. And don't worry. It does bring luck.” She then finished writing down her old, male name, and she set the pen on the counter.
Bao realized the error in Lee's use of tenses. She pointed out, “Don't you mean, it will?”
Lee and Bao, both remained silent for the next few seconds, as Lee finished what she was doing.
Bao watched as Lee slid the flier into the envelope. Next, she pulled out the Devil's Hotel business card, from her left interior jacket pocket, and she dropped the card into the envelope. She then closed the envelope, without sealing. Afters, she rolled the envelop, while being careful not to crease it. And finally, she gently placed the envelope into her left interior jacket pocket.
When Lee finished, she looked up at Bao, with Bao looking back at her. Lee answered, in a plain tone of voice, “No. I mean, it does.”
Bao thought, with curiosity, 'Wait a minute. Lee, if anything else, is a writer. She clearly loves to write. And she knows the deference between tenses. So, that means she is talking in the past tense. Such, as time travel...'
'And I never did put a date on my flier, because then, someone whom just read it would think that I just reopened, and I could keep circulating the fliers a little longer. So, someone of the past would also not know the flier was from the future. And that person would likely come to my bar as a customer.'
'But, who of the past could Lee be sure would come to this bar in the past... Herself... Or, more aptly, himself... Oh hell, could this be a temporal loop?!...'
'And that is her given name. I will have to remember this name. I will write it down, after Lee leaves. But first, I need to confirm this...'
Bao inquired, with curiosity, and mild surprise in her tone of voice, “This is not a temporal loop? Where you are going to go back in time, and clandestinely give this to yourself, to set this all up, for you to come here in the first place?”
Lee just smiled wickedly towards Bao.
Bao complimented, with a bit of amusement in her tone of voice, “And I thought you were devious before.”
Bao saw Lee's smile widened, ever so slightly.
Bao pointed out, “You do realize, by doing this, you are literally screwing yourself over. At the very least, you are arranging for yourself to not only become a girl, but get knocked up.”
Lee smile turned more warm, as she responded, in an introspective tone of voice, “And I have never been happier.”
Bao shrugged, as she said, “You're life.”
Lee calmly replied, “Yes... My life...” She the continued, in a more casual tone of voice, “Well, I better get going. I have places to be. Realities to go too.”
Bao giggled a little at Lee's comment.
Lee requested, “And please let me know how your date turns out.”
Bao replied, “Don't worry. I will. And take care. I hope you to have two very healthy children.”
Lee said, “Thank you. I hope so, as well. And I can be reached by calling Chang's casino. Just ask for, Lee.”
Bao responded, “That will not be a problem. And drop by anytime. Just because you cannot drink alcohol, doesn't mean I don't have selections for you. And you can always bring River and Chang, with you being the designated driver.”
Lee complimented, “That is a good idea.”
Bao playfully requested, “Just don't get into any bar fights, and cars chases, like last time.”
Lee giggled a little bit, as she warmly smiled, again. She said, “I will take that request to heart. See you.”
Bao returned Lee's smile, as she replied, “Have a good day. And by the way, that skirt, and jacket go well on you.”
Lee said, “I know. River was the one to pick out this outfit for me. She is a genius in so many ways.”
Bao agreed, “And that is why I think you two, or three... Counting Chang... Will do fine.”
Lee happily replied, “We can only hope.”
Lee then turned around, and left out of the bar. Soon after, she was in her car, heading back to the garage, at the Daiyu Palace Casino.
(_)
Twenty-five minutes later, Lee has returned to the casino. She used the garage remote to open the door. She then drove the car into the garage, closed the garage door behind her, packed the car, where she had found originally found the car. Along with this, she returned the car keys, clicker, and the garage remote, back to the key box, where she had found those at, in the first place.
Presently, Lee had reached the enclosure to the tiger cage, to her right. And with the entrance to the back elevate bay, to her left, several feet away.
Lee saw that were was no one else in the hallway, save for the adult tigress, on the other side of the clear, strong plastic wall of the enclosure.
As she came closer to the elevator bay, she started making a gentle turned to her left, towards the elevator alcove.
Lee thought, 'Now, where do I get my ring from... Of course, the amazon village. I will just return there a week after I left. I am sure I can get a ring from Cologne. Considering, from what I remember, she knew about my ring. That is likely why they captured, and brought me into their tribe. So, she should be able to help me.'
'Besides, it will be fun seeing her, along with Rose and Violet. I need to make sure they are okay. And, given the message they had for me, I am sure those two feel the same way about me.'
When Lee was about to enter the elevator bay, she saw Annie walk out of the alcove, from one of the side elevators.
Both women stopped six feet in front of each other, as the look upon the others face.
Lee said, “Hi Annie.”
Annie casually replied, “Hi Lee.”
Lee asked, “So, how did your meeting with Matthew go?”
Annie answered, “It went great. I was able to get Matthew to calm down. I then told him most of what was going on. I explained, to him, the basics of who was who. And who did what, here. And over the next few days, I plan to introduce him to everyone I know in the casino. I think he will be fine.”
Lee replied, “That's good to hear.”
Annie grinned mischievously, as she commented, “Now, let's talk about you. I was hoping to catch you in private, so we could talk, one on one.”
Lee said, “Sure. Whatever you say, I am more than willing to discuss with you.” She thought, 'Though, I can already guess what you are talking about.'
Annie responded, “Good. Last night, I enjoyed learning you were pregnant. And that River was the father. And my force powers confirms that you are pregnant with twins. Would you like to know their genders? I can tell you, right now.”
Lee returned Annie's smile, as she casually responded, “Nah. I will find out later. In a few months. With a sonogram... Actually, I am kind of enjoying not knowing, right now.”
Annie replied, “Suit yourself.”
Lee commented, “Also, if they inherit River's gender bending abilities. Their birth gender will be a mote point.”
Annie agreed, “Good point.”
Through her empathic abilities, Annie noticed how happy Lee was about being pregnant.
Annie stated, “I guess, considering your gender issues, that being pregnant would make you happy. And yes. I know about those issue, as well.”
Lee thought, 'I guess after everything she has learned about me, that Annie would know about that, as well. And given our friendship, I am not going to lie to her.' Lee calmly admitted, “Yes. I got issues. And I freely admit that I am happy about both my current situation, and condition. Though, could you keep that to yourself.”
Annie requested, “I will, on the minor condition that I can talk to River about such matters, dealing with you.”
Lee admitted to herself, in thought, 'I am not going to win this argument.' She commented, “Given you are an empath, and she is a telepath, and it is very hard to keep secrets from either of you. And that you are both my friends. Well, River is more than a friend.”
“Anyway, you talk to each other, about myself, is fine with me. I figure that if you two talk about subjects, it will be easier to for you to not talk about these secrets with anyone else. Though, I suggest checking the any rooms you decide to talk in, for bugs, before you have your discussions.”
Annie thought, 'Good idea. And we have already been talking your gender issue, with a camera looking at us. Fortunately, I know these cameras on this floor, don't have microphones. And I sense no one nearby. So, we are good here. But, we do need to be careful.' She stated, “Of course. And my force abilities help prevent such eavesdropping.”
Lee shrugged, as she place her right hand on her lower stomach. She said, “Besides, River is the father of our children. And I don't keep secrets from her.”
Annie suppressed a giggle, as she thought, 'I am not going to ruin the moment for her.' She said, “I am glad we see eye to eye on this. You said you were one month along?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Annie said, “That is nice. Also, I have another, more intimate question about River. If you don't mind me asking.”
Lee replied, “Sure.”
Annie inquired, “During sex, does she sometimes slightly suck on your right bottom earlobe, as she, or in some cases, he nibbles it?”
Lee dropped her right hand back to her side, as she raised an eyebrow. She casually questioned, “So, you two have slept together?” She thought, 'River does not do that often, during sex. But, River does do both those things, occasionally, during our lovemaking.'
Annie thought, 'I am not sensing any jealousy from her comment. Unlike Chang, whom was wise enough to let his jealousy go, when he learned we had slept together. And these are good personality traits from both of River's lovers.' She answered, “Yes. A while back. And Chang knows better than to say a word about.”
Lee commented, “I can see why. By the way, since you talk with River, on such intimate matters, when River is making love, do you know what is with River's order of gender bending? With her changing, after she climaxes. I mean, if she has the time, she has the same order, almost every time. Which is woman, man, woman, woman, man, and she then finishes off as a woman.”
Annie raised an eyebrow, as she asked, “She still does that?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Annie inquired, “Why don't you asked her?”
Lee sarcastically responded, “And risk ruining the best relationship and sex I have had in my entire life?”
Both of them laughed at Lee's comment.
As they calmed down. Lee commented, “Still, given that combination River uses for sex, it makes me wonder what combination gender order Chang does in response, as one of her partners?”
Annie giggled. She then agreed, “Good question. Do you have the answer?”
Lee smiled mischievously, as she teased, “I might. But, if I told you, I would have to immediately kill you.”
Annie giggled again. She thought, with humor, 'Isn't that my line.' As she calmed down, she stated, “I will find out later on from River.”
Lee asked, “Okay. So, where are you going now?”
Annie answered, “I am going to the gym. All I got to do is take off my robe and lightsaber, and I am in my workout clothing.”
Lee inquired, “I thought the super-soldier serum took care of you physique?”
Annie answered, “It does... To a degree. But, I can always tone up a little bit more.”
Lee commented, “Always pushing your limits?”
Annie said, “It is my nature. I have come to accept that...” She mischievously grinned, as though, 'Now, to let her realize what we have been doing.' She continued, with a bit of humor in her tone of voice, “By the way, Lee. I consider it a privilege to be the one to have your first, girl talk, with.”
Lee was left speechless. Annie kept her mischievous grin, as she started softly giggling, while she walked passed Lee, to Lee's left side, as she headed towards back casino, and to the employee gym.
A few seconds later, Lee starting giggling to herself, as she thought, 'I guess this was my first girl talk moment... And it was fun. Now, up to the penthouse apartment, where I will retrieve the means to run a very important errand.'
Lee walked into elevator bay. She pulled out and used her her penthouse key to stick into the slot, by the express elevator doors, to summon the back express elevator to the penthouse.
Soon after putting away her key, the doors to the express elevator opened, and she headed for the penthouse, and to the apartment she now shared with River, and Chang.
(_)
Three minutes later, Lee made it up to the penthouse level, and to the hallway door to her apartment. She used a key, which River has given her, to unlock the hallway door to the apartment, that lead into the living room.
After she opened the door, she closed, and locked the door behind her.
Fortunately, Lee found that the sunlight from the windows in the apartment provided plenty of light, as she walked through the living room, and to the master bedroom.
When she reached the bedroom she had slept in, she looked around the room, as she thought, 'Well, it looks like I am alone...' She placed her left hand on her stomach, as she continued her thoughts, 'In a relative sense. But, all the better, for what I need to do... Now, where did River put her reality device.' She then dropped her left hand back to her side.
Lee mentally reflected, 'And speaking of finding things. Now that I am back, I am going to have to get a second set of keys made, to my pink Cadillac, so River and I both have a set. Because, if I am going to drive around town, I want to do it in style.'
'But, I will get that done, later. Now, to find River's reality device. I know she had it on her when we walked in here, last night. So, it is likely still here. And I don't think she will mind me using it, as long as I put it back where I found it, when I am finished.'
'Though, as I search for the reality device, I need to be gentle, and leave things where I found them. Given River and Chang are letting me live here, it would be disrespectful for me to make a mess.'
Lee then gently searched the dresser drawers, and then the nightstands on the sides of the bed.
A few minutes later, she found the reality device in a drawer, from one of the nightstands.
She also looked at the time on the clock, on top of the nightstand she had found the reality device inside of. The clock said twelve fifty PM.
As Lee held the device in her hands, she thought, with a bit of humor, 'Finding this reality device was a lot easier than the last time I sought to gain a reality device. I am glad I did not have to search the closets, and bathroom. Now, to head a week after I left the amazon village. I think I will appear near the main gate, in the middle of the day. And though I have much to do, I have plenty of time to do it in. Also, I do not think I will need my weapons, since I am a member of that village. And I still consider myself to be. And Cologne made it clear that I was still one of the village sisters.'
Lee then thought of the time, place, and reality, she wanted to go to. She then press the red button on the device, and she was instantly teleported there.
The next thing Lee knew, she was in the reality that Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were from, a week after she left that reality, to hunt for herself.'
It was the middle of the partly cloudy day. With a conformable, cool temperature, and slight breeze, which were fine for the clothing she wore.
As she put her reality device into her right side, outside, pocket of her open jacket, she looked right in front of her. In front of her was the outside of the main entrance, of the Chinese Amazon village, that she had exited only a week ago, for those in that reality.
Given the time of day, the gates to the roofed entrance were open.
As Lee casually walked through the gate, she thought, with mild relief, 'It is good to be home... Or, one of my homes.'
When she reached the other side she saw one of the nearby amazons, guarding the gate.
The amazon was in her usual clothing. Her sword was sheathed in its scabbard, which was she had strapped to her back, at a diagonal angle, with the hilt stick out, behind the left side of her neck, and her left shoulder.
Lee thought, 'Ah, that is Biyu. We know each other, so we I might as well say, hi. And ask her for directions to where Cologne like is, right now. As one of those on guard duty today, she might know. Given how often the guards are asked where the important people in the village are. Almost every morning, the leaders of the village given the guards a general idea of where they will be that day. And the system works quite well for everyone involved.'
Lee walked over to Biyu.
While Lee approached Biyu, the amazon noticed her. She turned to face Lee. She recognized Lee, as she said, in chinese, “Hi Dongmei. We heard you were lost?”
As Lee came to a stop, a few feet in front of Biyu, she responded, in chinese, “Hello Biyu. Well, I was clearly found. You would not happen to know where Elder Cologne currently is?”
Biyu answered, “I believe she is in her home, right now.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. And have a good day.” She thought, 'Fortunately, I know exactly where Cologne's home is located.'
Biyu said, “I hope. But, guard duty is never fun.”
Lee kindly responded, “No kidding. But, you at least have my sympathies.”
Biyu replied, “Thanks.”
Lee then turned and continued walking further into the amazon village, as Biyu turned her attention back towards the nearby gate.
(_)
Ten minutes later, of walking, Lee reached the front door to Cologne's home.
Lee gently knocked on the door, a few times, as she thought, 'It is good that, as far as I know, Cologne still has good hearing.'
A few seconds after Lee stopped knock, Lee heard, from inside the home, a familiar voice say, in chinese, “Coming.”
Lee stood silently for a several seconds, until she heard the door unlock from the inside.
A few seconds later, Lee heard the voice say, “Come in.”
Lee gently opened the door, and walked inside.
As Lee entered the living room of the building, she saw Cologne, balancing in the air, on her staff, further inside her home. In addition, Lee saw no one else in the room.
Lee saw Cologne was looking at her, with a mischievously smile on her lips.
Lee thought, 'With a grin like that. Any doubts that I may have had that the Elder set me up, have not been put to rest. Not that I am upset about the situation.'
After Lee passed the threshold of the door, and cleared the doorway, she gently shut the door behind her.
Lee then walked a few feet more into the room, until she was about eight feet from Cologne.
Lee faced the much older woman, as she waited for Cologne to say the first word.
Cologne calmly stated, “You may speak, young sister.”
Lee smiled as the complimented. She thought, 'Good. She still considering me a member of the village.' She politely said, in chinese, “Hello Elder Cologne.”
Cologne calmly responded, “Hello Dongmei. I see you have returned. Or, should I now call you, Lee?”
Lee answered, “Either name is fine. And yes. My memories have been returned to me. Also, you should know that I am not upset with you. I already remember, that beforehand, I had agreed to having my memories seal.”
Cologne replied, “That is good.”
Lee commented, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Though, I am slightly annoyed that you set me up to be captured, by sending me on a hunt to find myself.”
Cologne plainly responded, “That is completely understandable. But, it was necessary. It was clear that those after you were powerful, and this way the matter would have been resolved without harm coming to the village. And given Ranma was involved, I was sure his... Her honor would not have allowed serious harm to come to you.”
Lee was silent for a couple of seconds, as she thought, 'She is right.' Lee complimented, in a calm tone of voice, “Well played.”
Cologne replied, “Thank you. Now, what do I owe the honor of your return?”
Lee answered, “A few things. First, you said I would always be welcome here.”
Cologne said, “That I did. And I meant was I told you.”
Lee stated, “I am relieved to hear that. Also, I need to speak to my friends. To assure them that I am alright.”
Cologne replied, “Of course.”
Lee mentioned, “And I am looking for something from you.”
Cologne said, with curiosity evident in her voice, “I looked forward to finding out what you need. Though, I am sure you have questions, before we come to the matters you have already brought up.”
Lee responded, “Yes. Did Rose and Violet inform you of what happened when I was captured?”
Cologne commented, “Rose and Violet told me what happened. And due to what I heard, I was genuinely concerned for you.”
Lee answered, “I appreciate your concern. And the situation turned out alright.”
Cologne calmly said, “I can see that. I can also see that not only has your memory has returned, and you are with child.”
Lee thought, 'Fans always wondered if she was psychic. I guess she is.'
Lee grinned, as she stated, “Yes. I am actually carrying twins.”
Cologne inquired, “I hope your children are sired by a strong warrior?”
Lee smirked, as she responded, “One of the strongest. And I would like to thank you for the second childhood you all gave me. It was great having so many friends, and learning so much. And I am happy with the results.”
Cologne replied, “You are welcome.”
Lee questioned, “Though, while you and my friends still accept me. Should I worry about the others? Should they find out who I really am?”
Cologne answered, “No. Given how nice you are, most of us really do not care about your origins. Only who you presently are. As such, you are still welcome here, by almost everyone.”
Lee replied, “That is nice to know. Anyway, I best get to the matter at hand. I want talk to you about my ring.”
Lee held up the magic ring on her her right fourth finger.
Cologne smiled, as she said, “Ah yes. Well, to answer your next question. Yes, I know what about your ring. It was made here, by us, for those cursed by the pools, dealing with genders.”
Lee dropped her right hand back to her side, as she commented, “Why am I not surprised? It makes sense. If someone was cursed to be a young girl. Or young boy. You lock them, along with adding a few extra benefits. So, of course, you would make the rings small. So, only a child can use them. But, the rings will grow over time on the wearer's finger, so only those that need them can use them to lock themselves in their curse form.”
“It is a lot safer to use than a ladle and kettle, like the Musk. And after you brainwash them into the tribe. And the physical gifts and benefits of these ring helps them keep up with their combat training, as they grow older. ”
Cologne replied, “Exactly.”
Lee complimented, “Well, I am living prove that your plans work to make such people, as myself, into better, stronger people.”
Cologne responded, “Thank you. That was the response I was hoping you would have, towards all this.”
Lee politely requested, “Good. Elder, I was wondering. Do you have a second ring like mine, that I can have?”
Cologne said, “Let me check in back.”
Cologne hopped across the room, and through an open door, into a nearby room.
When she was out of sight of Lee, Cologne soon reached the counter in the room, by a wall. With a box on the counter.
After Cologne hopped over to the counter, she freed her right hand, to reach into a large box full of magic rings, that were exactly like Lee's ring.
At the same time, she was careful not to let one of the ringer slip onto one of her small fingers.
Once Cologne was finished, she hopped back into the living room. And she came to a stop, in front of Lee.
Cologne held out her right hand. And Lee held her left hand open, with her palm upwards, under Cologne's right hand.
As Cologne dropped the ring into Lee's left hand, she stated, with a bit of humor in her tone of voice, “Fortunately, I have one to spare.”
Lee took the ring in her left hand, as she said, “Thank you.”
Lee then used her right hand to each inside her open jacket, and into her left interior pocket, to gently pulled out her envelope.
Cologne then watched at Lee opened the envelope, dropped the ring in.
Next, Lee licked the top of the envelope, and sealed it.
Afterward, Lee then careful folded the envelope, with creasing it, and she put the envelope back into her interior left jacket pocket.
Lee looked over at Cologne, as she stated, “By the way, Elder. You have been so nice to me. I was wondering. I have access to means that could give you back youth back. That is, if you want to be young again. And I mean as a young adult. Not a child.”
Cologne laughed for several seconds. As Cologne calmed down, she then answered, “Girlie, Ranma already made the same offer, years ago. And I declined his offer. Or, should I say, her offer. I guess consensual pregnancy, and motherhood, can make a woman out of just about anyone.”
Lee used her right hand to gentle pat her lower stomach. She smiled, as she agreed, “You are correct about that.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Cologne smirked, as she stated, “Though, I won't argue with her choice of lovers. And yes. I have met them. Both of them are strong warriors. And all three fit so well together. Both in personalities, gender changing abilities, and hair colors. Heheheh...”
Lee shrugged, as she thought, 'I think it is best if I don't tell you that I can take credit for those three of them being together.'
Cologne continued, “Considering, I am over three hundred years old. I have seen and done many things. I have seen reincarnation first hand. To the point I have seen other people, I know, reincarnated three, or four times over. With me knowing each one of their incarnations during their time alive.”
“Along with this, I am currently saddled with many responsibilities that only end in my death. Still, my time with Ranma and the others in Tokyo made me feel young, again. I look forward to genuinely feeling that again. Not just my body, but my soul, as well. To have that innocence, again. And I intend to have that after I die, and I am reborn again as another human being. Because there is no point in continuing to breath if you cannot feel alive.”
Lee complimented, “You are one of the wisest people I know. Of all realities. If you are looking for craziness and excitement. If you want. After you die and are you are reborn. I, and I am sure Ranma, would love to track you down in your next life, and provide you with as much adventure as you could possibly want.”
Cologne laughed with anticipation. She then said, “Now, that is a challenge worthy of you two. You have my permission to do so. And why don't you go after Happi, as well?”
Lee commented, “That is tempting. And I believe that Ranma would do that, just on the sheer principle of finding out who Happosai will be, in his next life.”
Cologne responded, “Good point. And I have tried to be just towards both genders. So, I have a fifty-fifty shot of being born a girl, again. But, given how Happi has treated women, karma is clearly going to dictate that he is going to be reincarnated as a girl in his next life. Likely a bimbo.”
Cologne then crackled in laughter.
Lee joined in on her laughter.
As both of them calmed down, Lee said, “Oh, now that is an interesting thought. I look forward to the challenge. If nothing else, the journey itself would be worth it.”
Cologne smirked, as she agreed, “Exactly. But, make sure you both do it as a hobby. Not an obsession. If you don't find me within a few years. And you get tired of looking. Just walk away from the hunt for me, and do not worry about it. I am sure we will meet, again. Someday. In someway.”
Lee commented, “I will take your advise, Elder. And I believe we will meet again, as well. Anyway, thanks for the ring. And if I do not see you again in this life, I will see you in your next life.”
Cologne smile turned warm, as she said, “Either way, I looked forward to our next meeting.”
Lee returned Cologne's smile, as she asked, “Same here. By the way, are Rose and Violet in the village?”
Cologne answered, “Yes. They returned a week ago. A few hours after you left. I believe, that right now, they are having lunch, at that small restaurant, which you three like to go to, that across the village.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Cologne said, “You're welcome.”
Lee then turned around, walked the door, opened it.
As she walked outside, she gently shut the door behind her.
While Cologne watched Lee leave, and shut the door behind her, the ancient woman thought, 'I guess the old saying is true. All things in the fullness of time... Now, to get some lunch for myself.'
Cologne then used her staff to hop towards the kitchen of her home. So, she could fix herself some lunch.
(_)
Outside, Lee stood in place, as she took a look around, while she breathed the cool, clean air. She thought, 'That went much better than I expected. And I have a feeling that I will see Cologne someday. If not in this life, then in her next life. But, that is later. For now, I have to focus on my life, and those lives growing me...'
'But, even so. I need to see my friends before I leave. And that restaurant is only about ten minutes walks from here. And even though I am not hungry, I can still talk to Rose and Violet, when I get there.'
Lee then turned, and started walking down the streets of the amazon village, and towards the restaurant that she and her friends enjoyed going to.
(_)
Around ten minutes later, Lee turned the corner of a street, and she came within sight of the restaurant she was looking for.
It was a small restaurant, with most of the tables being placed outside of the building.
Presently, Lee noticed there were not that many customers sitting at the benches, at the tables, outside.
Though, as Lee approached the tables, she saw that Rose and Violet, were sitting in benches, at a table, across from each other, while they ate bowls of soup, with each of them have a can of soda beside the their bowls of soup.
Lee also saw they were wearing their usual clothing, and they had their weapons with them.
Violet had her sword, in its scabbard, strapped to her back. While, Rose had the head of her chui set on the ground, by her, with the long hilt of the weapon leaning against the end of table, opposite to the side of the table which Lee was facing.
Lee approached them, from an angle, to their sides. With Violet to Lee's left and Rose to Lee's right.
As Lee walked closer to them, Violet was the first to noticed her.
Violet was the first to noticed Lee. She set her spoon in her bowl, as she turned to look at Lee.
Violet smiled, while facing Lee. She happily said, in chinese, “Well, look in who showed up. Hi Dongmei.”
Rose set her spoon in her bowl, while she looked over Lee, as well.
Rose happily thought, 'It looks like I won't have to go hunting for Ranma, after all. And it only took a week for our sister to return.'
By then, Lee was less than ten feet away from them.
Lee continued walking towards them, as she responded, “Hi girls. I hope my absence has not been to abrupt for you?” Lee then came to a stop, three feet from the table that Violet and Rose were sitting at.
Rose put on a false front, as she flatly said, in chinese, “No.” She then smiled, as she continued, in a joyous tone of voice, “Ah, who am I kidding? It is good to see you, Dongmei. Have a seat, and tell use what happened, after left.”
Lee said, “Actually, I would prefer to stand.”
Violet responded, “Go ahead. It is good to see you.”
Lee replied, “Same here. Also, the name I prefer to go by is, Lee. But, you can call me Dongmei, if you want.”
Rose said, “I prefer to call you, Dongmei.”
Violet replied, “Same here. It just doesn't feel right to call you, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Rose inquired, “Now, what happened after we left?
Lee sighed, as she answered, “Well, they had their revenge. I won't get into the details. But, I will say it was unconformable, for the most part. But, I made it through without any permanent harm to me. And I am now free, In a manner of speaking.”
Rose replied, “That is good”
Violet stated, in a sad tone of voice, “Sorry we had to leave, when we did.”
Rose said, in a neutral tone of voice, “We weren't give much choice on the matter.”
Lee responded, in a relaxed tone of voice, “It's okay. And I got your message. I am glad we are still friends.”
Rose commented, in a warm, comforting tone of voice, “We will always be friends.”
Violet excitedly stated, “Yes. We will. We are not only friends. We are sisters.”
Rose agreed, “Correct. We are sisters.”
Lee replied, “I feel the same way, sisters.”
Rose questioned, “Good. So, what are you up to now?”
Violet asked, “Are you here to stay?”
Lee said, in a slightly sober tone of voice, “No. I just came to visit.”
Violet responded, in a disappointed tone of voice, “So, why you are not coming back to stay?”
Lee replied, in a sad tone of voice, “I have other commitments.”
Violet could tell something was off about Lee. She asked, in a concerned tone of voice, “What commitments? Are you fine? Is there a problem?”
Lee giggled a little. She then smirked, as she said, in a calm tone of voice, “Relax Violet. Everything is more than fine. I am in a relationship now. And I am going to be living with my lover.” She mentally added, 'And her other lover.'
Rose knew her friend long enough to know that Dongmei, or more aptly, Lee, was hiding some important from them. She thought, 'Dongmei is hiding something.' She questioned, “Okay then. What are you hiding from us, Dongmei?”
Lee complimented, “Rose, you always had an eye for detail. And I might as well tell you both. I am with child. Actually, I am pregnant with twins.”
Violet squealed, “Oh, that is so nice!”
Rose calmly said, “Congratulations.”
Lee continued smiling, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Rose then mentally realized, 'Wait a minute. Dongmei has only been gone a week.' She inquired, “Hold on, Dongmei. You have only been gone a week. How can you be pregnant? Let alone know you are pregnant?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell them.' She answered, “For you two, it was a week. For me, I have been gone for over a month.”
Rose responded, “Ah yes. Now, I realize what you are saying. Like when we spent two weeks looking for what turned out to be you? But, when we returned to this reality, and our home, it was only a few hours for those here.”
Lee replied, “Exactly.”
Rose stated, “Okay. That makes sense.”
Violet inquired, “So, who is the father.”
Lee thought, 'I best not get details on this.' She stated, “A strong warrior. I wish I could give you more details, but there my lover has his own secrets that he prefers to not share with others.”
Rose replied, “I can understand.”
Violet said, “So can I.”
Lee thought, 'Good.'
Violet then said, in an annoyed tone of voice, “That was a mean trick that Elder Cologne pulled on us.”
Lee defended Cologne, in a calm tone of voice, “Do not worry about it. The Elder had her reasons. Very good reasons, which I agree with her on.”
Violet replied, “Fine. If you are okay with it, so am I.” Violet then requested, in a curious tone of voice, “Can we touch your stomach?”
Lee pulled up the front of her shirt a little, as she answered, “Sure. But, it is way too early for my babies to start moving. Right now, it takes me a few seconds, with my hands, for me to feel out the small growing lump in my stomach.”
Violet moved over closer to Lee, on her bench, as Lee took a few steps closer, to stand right in front of the side of the table.
When Violet came to the edge of the bench, with Lee less than two feet from her. She came to a stop. She then placed her right hand on Lee's stomach for a few seconds. Violet then removed her hand.
By then, Rose had also moved down on her bench, to be closer to Lee. She then placed her left hand on Lee's stomach for a few seconds, before removing her hand. Afterward, Lee tucked back in her shirt.
Violet asked, “So, what is it like?”
Lee said, “Except for some mild morning sickness, which I have a handle on. There is not much difference. But, I am looking forward in a few months, when I can feel my babies move.” She thought, 'Though, it is possible, I might not sleep much after that. Even after babies are born.'
Rose said, “That will be nice.”
Violet stated, “It is more than nice. It is cool.”
Rose commented, “Some of us prefer to be warriors, over mothers.”
Violet countered, “And some of us prefer to appreciate the perks of being both a warrior and a mother.”
Lee quietly listened to her two friends turned towards each other, as they talked.
Lee thought, 'Speaking of which... Both of their comments remind me of something I read about, several years ago, which I found very interesting. What I found interesting, was that the ancient earthmother religions portrayed the mother goddess as a leader, mother, warrior, and destroyer. Sometimes all at once. Even to the point that some ancient statues of such deities showed the earthmother sitting on an ornate royal throne, with her holding her weapons in her hands, while she had her legs spread, as she is giving birth to a child...'
'And since I am now in a position of being both a warrior, and a mother to be, I can appreciate to portrayals of warrior mothers.'
'But, that is an interest to think about another time.'
'Anyway, I have places to be. And I probably need to say my goodbyes. And move on...'
Lee said, “Ladies...”
Rose and Violet stopped talking, as they turned towards Lee.
Lee calmly stated, “As much as I would love to stay and talk. I need to get going.”
Violet responded, “Promise you will visit us?”
Lee promised, “Of course, I will.”
Rose requested, “And we look forward to meeting your children.”
Lee joked, “So do I.”
All three friends lightly giggled a Lee's joke for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Rose said, “Have a safe journey, Dongmei.”
Lee replied, “I will.”
Violet stated, “See you later, Dongmei.”
Lee replied, “Same here. And Violet. Rose. Try to stay out of trouble... Or, at least only get into trouble that you can get yourselves out of.”
Rose and Violet started giggling, as Lee turned around, and walked away.
As the two women calmed down, they watched their friend walk down the street, and turn a corner.
With Lee out of sight, Rose and Violet they went back to eating their lunch, and talking amongst themselves. Though, there topics of discussion had changed to their friend, Dongmei, her unborn children, and who her mysterious lover was. Whom had sired her children.
(_)
Lee spent the next five minutes walking around, as she searched for a private place, such an an alleyway, to reality jump, unnoticed.
When Lee turned the corner of one street, and onto another street, she saw four people playing the distance.
Two women, and two little girls.
And seeing the four individuals caused Lee to remember of the dark actions she had take much earlier in her life. A previous mental disconnect, on Lee's part, that had reached its logical conclusion.
It was Shampoo and Mousse. Only both them appeared to be in their mid-twenties Mousse was a now beautiful woman, while Shampoo has only becoming more beautiful, as she matured into adulthood...
And when looked at all four of them, it was clear that both Shampoo and Mousse had given birth to a strong, healthy daughter. Lee could tell that one was Mousse’s child, and the other was Shampoo's child, from the similar skin tone, hair, and facial characteristics that each other mother shard with their child.
Also, this confirmed that they were victims of Chang's actions. And has somehow made it back home.
Though, there were some positives to their situations, the effects of the vat process had also slowed their ages and made them even physically better than what they already were. Which was nothing short of amazing. Such as, Mousse no longer needed glasses, as she could see well with just her eyes.
They were both playing together with their daughters.
Lee thought, in deep sadness, 'I regret that I wrote book two so open ended that Shampoo and Mousse were kidnapped and impregnated by Chang's forces.'
'And I did not make the mental connection until now, because my memories were sealed when I met Shampoo and Mousse.'
'I remember remember meeting Shampoo, and knowing her for years. I only met Mousse a few times. Because, at the time, he was not part of the village...'
'Then, one day, several years ago, Shampoo disappeared. We all searched for her for several days. But, to no avail...'
'Cologne even sent some of her best amazon tracks to hunt for Shampoo, in other parts of China. Yet, all of them returned few week, later. As they stated the trail went cold...'
'And while Cologne did not give up hope, but even the Elder had to admit that life when on...'
'Then, a few months later, Shampoo returned to the village, with a young chinese woman, with long white hair. The other woman turned out to be Mousse. And both women were a few months pregnant.'
'Even though Mousse was not a member of the tribe. And taking into account their past experiences. Cologne and Shampoo would not turn away a pregnant women in need. And so, they made Mousse, and her future daughter, members of our tribe.'
'I need to apologize to them for my part in their suffering. Even if they try to kill me for what I have done towards them. Though, they probably won't try to kill me if I tell first them that I am pregnant.'
Lee then noticed that as Shampoo and Mousse played with their children, all four of them seemed very happy and content.
Lee reconsidered her plan of action, as she continued her thoughts, 'Perhaps it is best if I do not reopen old wounds. In the years I have known them, since they returned to the village, they have always seemed happy. They have even become good friends. I know for a fact that though they are not really lovers, they have shared a bed more than a few times, together. Still, I will see if I can find a way to make it up to them in the future.'
'But, my personal life still needs to be my first priority.'
Lee then turned around, and walked back down the street she had turned from. Next, she walked in the opposite direction, down that street, from which she had come from, without looking back.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee found an empty small, tight alleyway that would suit her needs. The alleyway was had a dead end and sat between three buildings, with the third building being the backstop to the dead end.
Lee came to a stop she pulled, and she turned around, to see that no one was behind her.
She then pulled out her reality device, from her right side, outside jacket pocket, with her right hand.
As she held her reality device, as she thought, 'Now, to close this chapter on my past.'
Lee thought of her own home reality, a few months before she original left her reality, with the location being in a specific place, outside her family home.
Lee then press the red button on her reality device.
The next thing Lee knew, she was in another familiar, but much different setting, than she had been in.
Lee was in a U.S. american style neighborhood, with the lawns dotted with trees. Mostly pine trees.
And from the angle of the sun, Lee saw that it was the middle of the say.
At the moment, Lee was standing on the grassy lawn, a few feet from the curb on the two lane street near her.
Lee was facing opposite from the street, as she stared at her family home, in front of her.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, and slight longing, 'Home again. Home again...'
'It is so tempting to just walk inside... Or, teleport inside... Considering I no longer have a key to the locks... But, I wouldn't... I need to do what I came here to do, and leave...'
'If I am right, my past self, and the rest of my family are gone, running errands, or at work. Now, all I have to do is put my envelope in the mailbox, and I am done...'
'And speaking of mailboxes. I might sometime leave a letter by the door, to let my family. To let them know I am still alive. Without giving any details on what has happened to me... Though, I will do that, later. In my present. Right now, I just need to do this, and leave, before I am seen.'
Lee then turned to her right to see her family mailbox, which was a few feet from her.
As she walked towards the mailbox, she pocketed her reality device back into her right side, outside jacket pocket. She then used her right hand to gently pulled out the envelope that was in her interior, left jacket pocket.
As she reached the mailbox, she looked at the envelope, and she saw that it was neither creased, nor permanently bent.
Lee thought, 'Good.'
She then walked in around, onto the road, in front of the mailbox.
She used her left hand to open the mailbox. Next, she gently placed her envelope in the mailbox, and closed it.
With that done, Lee used her right hand to pulled out her reality device. She then thought, of the same reality she was in, as she thought of being in the master bedroom, of the Daiyu Palace Casino, penthouse apartment, a few minutes after she left.
Lee pushed the red button on her reality device, and she instantly disappeared.
Meanwhile, an hour later, after receiving some very bad news from a doctor, a much younger, and physically male, Lee drove home, and he retrieved his family's mail, from their mailbox.
Then, past Lee entered his home, opened the envelop, looked at the contents within, turned on the TV, to see a broadcast, by an alien woman, with a message he knew was for himself, that changed his life forever.
(_)
In the present, in Lee's home reality, the next thing Lee knew, she was back inside the master bedroom, Chang and River's penthouse apartment.
As she looked around, she saw that she was standing in the exact same place she stood, when she left.
Lee then looked over at the clock, on the nightstand.
The clock said twelve fifty-five PM.
Lee mentally reflected, 'I have only been gone for five minutes... Nice. Now, to put this reality device back where I found it, and get a snack, downstairs, in the hotel restaurant.'
Lee then walked over to the nightstand, where she had found the reality device in. She then opened the drawer on the nightstand, gently set her reality device into it, and closed the drawer.
Next, Lee turned around, and walked out the master bedroom. She soon made her way to the front door, that connected the living room, to the hallway, outside.
As Lee opened the door, she saw River, in her usual clothing, standing in front of her. And River has a warm smile on her face.
Lee immediately took a few steps back, to allow River to walk inside.
After Lee came to a stop, about six feet into the room, River casually walked into the room, in front of her.
As Lee watched her lover walked into the living room, she asked, “I did not expect to see you, at the door, like that. You didn't even knock.”
River came to a stop, a few feet in front of Lee, as she cracked a grin. She commented, “I didn't need to. Telepathy has its perks. I sensed you were coming to the door, as I approached the room, from the hallway.”
Lee plainly asked, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “What do you mean?”
River answered, “A few minutes ago, my time. I saw you, when you were exiting the garage, in back, after coming back from your errands. And while you did not see me, I had the chance to read your mind, on what you were planning. And from what I am reading right now, things went fine for you.”
Lee calmly responded, “Of course, you would know is going on. So, what do you think of what I just did?”
River said, in a joyous tone of voice, “I am proud of you. Once you realized you were in a time loop, you didn't angst over it. You just did was you needed to do, while saying hi to your friends, along the way. And you did a fine job of it.”
Lee smiled, as she teased, “Thank you. And could I get a reward?”
River thought, 'I don't need to be a mind reader to know what you are thinking, right now.' Her grinning slightly widened, as she answered, “Sure. And I have to compliment Annie on her girl talk skills.”
Lee smiled, as she jokingly said, “If what I heard from her is correct, I would guess she learned those skills from you.”
River casually admitted, “There is some truth to your comment.”
Lee questioned, “So, will Chang be here soon, as well.”
River stated, “No. He is busy today.”
Lee replied, “Okay.” She then looked down at her clothing, as she used her hands to pull at the bottom, front, open ends of her jacket. Next, she let go of her jacket, as she allowed her hands to drop to her side. After which, she looked up at River, as she continued smile. Lee said, “By the way, I love the clothing you picked out for me. It look greats on me.”
River turned Lee's smile, as she responded, “I thought it would. And I am glad you like it.”
Lee commented, “You even got my bra size right.”
River said, “Yea. But, adjusting the straps can be tricky to pick out. Even for oneself.”
Lee stated, “You are right about that. And I know straps done have measure figures on them.”
River replied, “Exactly. And due to that, I could not read your mind on how to get them to fit you.”
Lee said, “It is okay.”
River offered, “That is nice to hear. And I have a few more sets of clothing for you. To make do, for right now. I will get them for you, later.”
Lee said, “Good. And I am going to need some more new clothing as I progress through my pregnancy.”
River smile turned mischievously grin, as she stated, “Of course. But, that is later. For now, I already have a wonderful shopping trip planned for us, in a few days.”
Lee's smile turned warm, as she said, “I look forward to shopping with you. And on another matter, could I get an another set of keys made for our cadillac?”
River answered, “No problem. Our car is in the garage. So, we can get to it, anytime we want. Speaking of which. My offer to sleep with you in the back of the cadillac is still open.”
Lee suggested, “It is a nice day outside. So, let's say a secluded spot by the beach, with the hood and windows down?”
River happily responded, “Sounds good to me. And when we get there, we will do it a couple of different ways...” Her grin grew slightly wider, as she continued, “And genders.'
Lee replied, “Sure. But, my one regret is I cannot do you as a man.”
River casually said, “Dear, that is what dildos are made for.”
Both women laughed, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, River stated, “Besides, I have a gift for you downstairs, in the car.”
Lee replied, “I look forward to it.”
They then turned, and walked into the hallway, with River first, and Lee second, through the door.
As Lee passed the door, she reached around, and locked the knob. Next, she gently shut the door behind them.
After which, they headed for the back elevator, to take them downstairs, as they headed for the hotel garage.
(_)
A few minutes later, they walked into the back garage of the casino.
Lee saw no one else was there, in the well lit room.
Lee the follow River, down through the rows, and rows of cars. Most of the rows were various colored sedans. Though, most of the sedans were panted black, with tinted windows. Also, there were a few were trucks. A handful of them were limos, and other types of vehicles.
As they through another row of cars, Lee saw the pink Cadillac parked on the other side of he next row and cars.
The pink car had its hood and windows down. And the vehicle looked to be in great condition.
As they approached the pink car, Lee walked up beside River's left, so they were walking side by side with each other.
While as they continued walking, Lee asked, “So, where is everyone? I would think Kaylee would be back at work by now, after watching Julia.
River answered, “Actually, Kaylee is watching Julia for the day. And even before I knew about your little trip today, I arranged for Kaylee to take the day off with my brother. And I made sure Annie and Arcee are out riding around town, having some fun of their own...”
As they continued to walk, River turned to look at Lee, as she smiled. She continued, “What can I say?... I like my privacy.”
Lee turned to River, as they continued walking. She returned River's smile, as she replied, “I bet. And I wonder what your gift for me is?”
River teased, “Well, I am not the only psyche here. If you want to know so bad, just use you precognition to find out.”
Lee stated, “My abilities don't work like that. It is more like the sense of touch, mixed with a literal sense of direction. Visions and experiences of the future only happen when I am asleep, and I have little control of what I see then”
River responded, “That is intriguing. Our kids are going to likely have some interesting abilities.”
Lee used her right hand to pat her stomach as she said, “That is possible. And if they don't, we will still love them.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
River agreed, “Exactly.”
A few seconds later, they reached the back of the pink car. As both of them stood in front of the truck, Lee was still to River's left, with both women looking at each other.
River pulled out her keys to the car, and she handed the keyring to Lee.
Lee took the keyring, and used the truck key to unlock the car trunk. She then pulled the key out, pocketed the keys, and pulled up the trunk lid.
What Lee saw brightened her day, in so many ways.
When River saw Lee smile, she smiled, as well.
In front of them, inside the trunk. With a sheet between everything in the trunk, and the bed of the trunk. On top of the sheet were neatly stacked gold bars, set beside stacks of U.S. cash, and mexican cash.
Also, there was a small pile of jewels, on the other side of the gold bars, from the cash.
Lee also noticed that on top of the gold bars were some papers, leaflets, and a double-dildo.
Also, in the back of the trunk, there were a few large beach towels and some bottles of water.
As Lee put her keys in her left outside jacket pocket, she thought, 'I see you plan for everything. Including towels for us to make love on the beach, itself. And I see you really weren't joking about the dildo comment.'
River stated, “Of course not. And I find that size to be comfortable. And I think you will, too.”
Lee said, “I trust your judgment.”
River continued smiling in response to Lee's comment.
Lee then picked the papers, and she looked through them. She saw that they were records, documents, and other forms of ID.
Included were a fake birth certificate, a fake driver's license, fake passport. There were also immigration documents, and various permits that she planned to look though later. Also, the driver's license, passport, and a few other documents had a picture of her female face. And it was fairly recent. Though, it was a good picture of her face.
River stated, “Let it never be said that I am not a giving person. Also, the security cameras here, are in color, and they can take pretty good pictures. The rest just took a little time, and money. Both of which, I have plenty of. All that was required was the right connections, a little time travel into the past, by a couple of months, and the wealth to pay for everything. And speaking of wealth. All of this wealth is yours to do with as you please.”
Lee set the papers back into the trunk, except for her new driver's license, which she held in her left hand. Next, she turned to River, as she said, “I am now a rich woman. But, I already have everything I could ever want.” She then used her right hand to hold on to River's left hand.
River looked over at Lee, as she slightly tightened her grip on Lee's right hand. She stated, “Then, how about you invest your new wealth?”
Lee commented, “Most investment opportunities, right now, in this reality are too corrupt. And I do not know enough about other realities to risk putting my wealth there. So, for now, we will put what you have given me in Chang's casino vaults later.”
River said, “I can agree with your reasoning.”
Lee stated, “Considering you got me out of that mess on Lagoon Island. At this point, you are the only one I trust. Though, I hope someday reach the point where I can trust Chang. Since we all share a bed together.”
River responded, “I know. And if you haven't noticed. The name on the documents is, Lee Tam.”
Lee turned back in front of her, as she looked a little more closely at the driver's license. She saw the name Lee Tam on it. She giggled a little bit. She then complimented, “I like it. I guess I am the one that is going to have to give up my maiden name. Not that I mind. And it shows you have a nice sense of humor.”
River said, “I thought so, as well. Also, the documents state you are from Costa Rica. Not the U.S. Costa Rica is a nearby nation. And it has a respectably sized fair skinned population, with citizens of that country known to live in mexico.”
Lee complimented, “Yes. That was good thinking on your part. That is a good pick for a fake country of origin for me. Considering a number of americans have immigrated there over the years. While, I have studied Costa Rica, that has been a while. I will read up on Costa Rica, to refresh my memory, and make this cover identity more secure. And these documents will help if I want to take a trip outside of this country. Though, I have no plans to go back to the U.S. Save for a few quick trips, in dealing with my family. By using a reality device.”
River stated, “I fully understand. And, if you are wondering, my papers say I am from Costa Rica, as well. Chang's papers state that he is from Hong Kong, and the others state they are various nations.”
“And as you can see, all your papers are in order. Just like ours. You even have permits to have a shotgun while in this country. So, if someone stops you, you will have the IDs to help keep you out of trouble. Also, it took some doing, but I got that vanity license plate on the car legalized. Though, it required getting a waive in writing. And that actually was the most expensive, and troublesome part of this whole venture... Not that I mind.”
Lee looked down at the license plate that stated, BCKLAGN. She then looked back over at River's face. She saw River looking back at her.
Lee inquired, “Well, this is very nice of you. I take it that the weapons in the casino are covered under corporate laws, and permits?”
River replied, “Yes. Those that actually have counterparts in this reality, and are allowed to be privately owned by companies.”
Lee said, “Good.” She then noticed the birth date on her driver's license. She did a little math in her head, compared to the current date, to find out what the driver's license stated her current age was. She mentioned, under her breath, “Twenty-two years old...” She then continued, at a normal tone of voice, “A year older than need to drink in many nations. Not bad.”
River commented, “I know. Though, I admit that given your youthful looks, it is stretching it to claim that you are twenty-two. But, your more mature personality makes up the difference. Though, I am not one to talk. Considering, I still look barely twenty, myself. Not that I mind.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.” She then gently let go of River's left hand, as she set pocket her fake driver's license, in her interior left jacket pocket.
Lee then turned her body towards River, as looked into River's eyes. She seductively commented, “And you know one of the things I love most about you?”
River turned her body to face Lee, as she took a step closer to the black haired woman. She asked, in an equally seductive voice, “And that would be?”
Lee said, “Well, my dear, River. I admire how you think ahead.”
They then took a step closer and kissed for several seconds.
When they were finished kissing, Lee continued to face River, as she used her left hand to shut the trunk, with the interior latch automatically catching, and locking on its own.
Lee then dropped her left hand to her side, as she said, “Now, let's go have some fun.”
Lee pulled out the keys, and handed them to River, as she stated, “I hope you don't mind. But, it has been years since I have traveled around the island. While I remember most of the locations. I do not remember where that secluded beach is, that we liked. So, could you drive us to that secluded beach?”
River took the keys, as she said, “Sure.”
River then headed for the driver's side door to the car, as Lee heading for the front passenger side.
After River unlocked both their doors, they got into the car, and buckled up.
Next, River started the car, and back out into an open lane in the garage.
Given the angle they were at, the front of their car was pointed directly at a garage door, to the outside. The door was only twenty feet from the front bumper of their car.
River then use a remote she left in the car to open up the near garage door to the outside.
After the garage door rolled up, she drove her, and Lee, out into the back parking lot of the casino. As soon as she cleared the garage door, she used her remote to close the door.
Finally, she drove to a nearby road, and soon the two lovers were on their way to a secluded beach, where they planned to make love for the next few hours, in and around, their pink Cadillac.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 06: “Pink, Blue, and Everything In Between.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Lee's Reality. Place, the Devil's Hotel of De La Plata Podrido. Time, the night after Lee returned to her reality, from her long journey in the multiverse.
It was nine PM sharp, roughly eight hours after River took Lee to the beach, to have some intimate fun.
The sun had finally going completely down the horizon, giving way to the night.
At the moment, Melanie stood in front of the entrance, on the sidewalk, under the awning of the Devils' Hotel, as she patiently waited for her date to arrive.
Melanie was wearing the same clothing, including pants, a shirt, and shoes, that she had worn that day.
As Melanie still in the cool night air, she thought, 'One of the good things about this change, is that due to the super-soldier serum, mild cool air doesn't really both me. Actually, I am enjoying not wearing a jacket... Now, where is my date... Not that I am complaining. I only walked out here a few seconds ago.'
Melanie than saw a car, with its headlights on, come into the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel, from the road.
As the car got closer, from the lights on the outer hotel walls, and lamp lights in the parking lot, Melanie could make out the vehicle coming towards her.
The car was a nice, two door, blue, nineteen sixty eight, Chevrolet Camaro SS convertible.
Melanie saw that the hood and windows were up on the car.
As the car came to a stop, in front of her, with the passenger door on her side, she recognized who the car belonged to.
Melanie thought, with mild amusement, 'Ah... There she is... She must have decided to close up early, so she could be here at nine. And I only had to wait less than a minute. Punctuality is a good way to start a date... Still, I do not even know her name. But, I trust Lee. And while that woman has a wicked, but nice sense of humor. I am sure this date should turn out alright.
Melanie then tried the door latch and found it unlocked.
As she opened the door, and got in, she thought, 'Have the door already unlocked for me was a nice touch.'
Melanie got into her seat, and shut the door.
Next, Melanie buckled herself, as she turned to see that Bao was wearing some casual clothing as well. Including, a shirt, pants, and shoes. Also, she had on her seat belt.
Melanie thought, 'She looks nice. And this is just a simple date. We are not doing anything extravagant. Besides, this is my first time dating as woman. I am happy with this type of date. I would prefer it to be a woman I am with. And for the date to be casual. I am not yet conformable wearing dresses. But, from some talking to some of my friends in Hotel Moscow that have been women longer. They say that uneasiness should go away away a time.'
'Now, to confirm where we are going.'
But, for Melanie could inquire, Bao turned to her, as she asked, in english, “I trust you did not wait too long?”
Melanie looked at Bao's face, as she calmly responded, in english, “No, I did not wait long. So, we are heading to the Last Resort?”
Bao answered, “Yes. And let us keep this casual.”
Melanie replied, “My thoughts exactly.”
Bao said, “We should be there a few minutes.”
Both of them then turned to face the front of Bao's car, as Bao then used the clutch and stick to shift the manual transmission of car from park, and into gear.
Bao then drove them out of the parking lot, and onto the road, towards the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Over the course of the next ten minutes, the drive was a quiet affair for Bao and Melanie.
As neither knew what to say.
For Bao, she was not sure if she should tell Melanie who she was.
And Melanie was trying her best not to ruin the mood, by saying something.
As they reached the parking lot to the Last Resort Diner, Bao broke the silence by asking, “So, what are you planning on getting?” As she made her way into the parking lot, Bao slowed down, as she search for an open space, that was close to the diner's front entrance.
Melanie continued to look forward, as she casually answered, “I was thinking some two scrambled eggs, toast, and grits, with orange juice. How about you?”
By then, Bao had found a parking space near the found that they could use. She turned into the parking space, and shifted the car into park, as she stated, “I was thinking having a ham and cheese omelet, hash-browns, toast, and milk, for myself.” She then turned off the car.
Both women then unbuckled themselves, got out of the car, with them locking their doors, before they shut them.
Bao was not worry about leaving the top down. There was not a cloud in the sky, and given the windows of the dinner, one of them would be in sight of the car at all times.
They then casually walked together, to the front entrance.
When the reach the windowed double-doors of the diner, Melanie stepped ahead of Bao, and held the right door open for Bao.
Melanie said, “You bought the car, it is only fair that I open the door.”
Bao giggled a little. She then replied, “Okay.” She mentally added, 'It is clear that Melanie is not going to completely let me be the man in this date... Not that I am complaining.'
Bao walked inside, with Melanie follow behind her, and allowing the door to springs to automatically close the door behind them.
As they walked inside, Bao turned to her right, and sat down at a front booth. With her facing the entrance, and the front window to her right side.
Melanie slid into the seat across the table from Boa. With her back to the entrance, and her left side by the front window.
Bao then took a looked around. She saw the redhead woman, in her late twenties, Ed manning the tables on their side. With the slightly younger black haired woman, Lori helping one of the tanned skinned, black haired man, in his early twenties, wash dishes and utensils, behind the main counter.
The other tanned skinned, black haired man, in his early twenties, was cooking at the on the grill, against the back wall, behind the counter.
Bao noticed that the two black haired men look very similar to each other, but she could also tell they did look a little, different from one another.
Bao thought, 'Lee said that the Lowe family was working here. And now that I take a closer look at them, I can recognize them for who they are. And it is clear that Lewis and Stan were taking turned being George and Mary. Not that I am complaining. That was a funny trick on their part. Also, I will have to ask which one of them is which. But, that is for later. Now, I need to focus on spending time with my date.'
Bao turned to look at Melanie, with Melanie looked back at her.
(_)
Nearby, Ed had just finished ringing up an order, as she saw Bao and Melanie at down from each other, at a booth, by the window.
With the window being to Bao's right side, and the window being to Melanie's let side.
Ed thought, with curiosity, 'What are those two doing together? I recognized Bao. And from the what the other woman looks like, I would guess that is Melvin. My family and I heard, from B, that Hotel Moscow finally caught Yurick, whom turned out to be Melvin. And that the new bartender at the Devil's Hotel was a brown haired woman named, Melanie.'
'After putting two and two together, I get that Melanie use to be Melvin. Sure, the hair color is different, but anyone could tell he dyed his hair blond. And he age is just right for coming out of the vat process. And the names are similar.'
'But, what is she, and Bao doing here, on what appears to be a date?... I have a feeling that Lee is responsible for this, in someway But, not in a bad way.'
'I wonder if they know about my family and I? Knowing Lee. That is very likely. I will have to watch these two, to see what happens. Because, I highly doubt they know who the other really is.'
'And I also need to take their orders.'
Ed then walked up to their table, as she pulled out her pen and note pad, to take down their orders.
Melanie and Bao looked up at Ed, as Ed kindly said, in english, “Hello. What can I get for both of you to drink?
Bao said, “Whole milk.”
Melanie answered, “Orange juice. But, I believe we are ready to order.”
Ed replied, “Okay.”
Melanie stated, “I will have two scrambled eggs, grits, and some wheat toast.”
Bao commented, “I will have a ham and cheese omelet, hash-browns, and raisin toast. No butter on my toast.”
Melanie said, “Same here. No butter on my toast. But, I want butter on the grits.”
Ed quickly wrote down their order. She then looked up at them, as she stated, “Okay. I will have your drinks out for you, in a minute.”
As Ed walked away to give Lewis their order, the two women then turned back to look at each other.
Melanie casually asked, “So, how are we going to deal with the check? I am more than willing to pay for the whole bill.”
Bao offered, “So am I. How about we just split the bill?”
Melanie agreed, “That works for me. I find it interesting that Lee thought the two of us should go out on this date.”
Bao commented, “Well, Lee does have a good eye for details. And I trust her.”
Melanie replied, “Isn't that the truth. Though, she has the worst luck with women.”
Bao agreed, “You are right about that. So, how do you know, Lee?”
Melanie causally said, “Well, as I am sure you know, when you are someone's bartender for months, you get to know them...” Melanie's eyes went wide as she realized what she had said.
Bao thought, 'Wait a minute. Melanie only just started her job at the Devil's Hotel, as bartender. And the only two bartenders in town that spent months with Lee are myself, and Melvin.'
Bao then took a good hard looked at Melanie's face. Bao continued her thoughts, 'No way. It couldn't be. Could it? But, why?...' Bao questioned, “Melvin?”
Melanie looked away from Bao, as she quietly said, “Yea.” She bitterly thought, 'There goes our date. I blew it before I even got something to drink.'
Bao noticed this, she thought, 'I believe you think that me figuring out who you are blew our date. You could not be more wrong.' She stated in a comforting tone of voice, “Hold on. I am okay with you being this way. You haven't ruined our date. We are fine.”
Melvin turned back to look at Bao's face, as she gave Bao a weak smile. She replied, “Thank you.”
Bao asked, in a confused tone of voice, “No problem. And while I like your new name. Why would someone change you into a woman? And was it the vat process?”
Melanie stated, “It is kind of hard to explained... Hold it... How do you know about the vat process?...” Melanie looked more closely at Bao, as she realized, while she stated, “You have had it done to yourself?”
Bao sheepishly admitted, “Yes.”
Melanie questioned, “Who are you really?”
Bao softly said, “My name is, Bao.”
Melanie raised an eyebrow, as she responded, “Bao?... Yellowflag, Bao?...”
Bao questioned, “Yes... How did you know?”
Melanie said, with mild surprised, though in a soft tone of voice, “Oh my... No wonder Lee thought we have some much in common. I use to be with Hotel Moscow. I went to your bar there, a few times.”
Bao let out a small laugh. She then smiled towards Melvin, as she responded, “You don't say?”
Melanie returned Bao's smile, as she replied, “Yea.”
Bao said, “Well, this was unexpected... But, on par with Lee's machinations.”
Melanie halfheartedly commented, “I know. And the weirdness only gets stranger with Lee. Since Lee clearly knew all this ahead of time. Before she set us up on this date. Did she tell you about her stories?”
Bao answered, “Yes. I read them. I take it that you have, as well?”
Melanie replied, “Oh yes. And they were a long read.”
Bao responded, “Yes. They were. And to a degree, I can blame Lee for all this mess. Including, being a woman. But, I don't hate her for it. Honestly, I got my youth back. So, I am okay.”
Melanie agreed, “Same here. And I realized that given the road we are all on, before Lee's stories. That if our lives had not been altered, we would all probably be dead long ago. And likely in tragic ways.”
Bao stated, “I fully agree. For that, I am grateful to Lee.”
Melanie replied, “Yes. So am I.” She then continued in a slightly sad tone of voice, as she asked, “So, are we going to do this? Considering we now know who the other really is.”
Bao stated, in a plain, straightforward manner, “I don't see why not. Lee is quite right about us. We do have a lot in common. You are a decent person. I am a decent person. We both run bars. We both are from the same town, with similar backgrounds. Meaning we don't have to keep secrets from one another... Actually, we just likely told our biggest secrets to each other...”
Melanie giggled a little.
Bao cracked a grin, as she waiting for Melanie to stop giggling. Once Melanie did so, Bao continued, “Also, we both are bi.... Relationship wise, we should be compatible. So, I am more than willing to give it a go. If you are?”
Melanie agreed, in a happy tone of voice, “You're right. And I am more than willing to see where this leads us, as well. It might be good for both of us. If nothing else, we will have someone to talk to, that we can trust.”
Bao asked, “I am glad you agree. And speaking of, Lee. Did she tell you that she was pregnant?”
Melanie stated, “Yes. She was very open about it too. Like she was happy to be pregnant.”
Bao said, “From her comments, and mannerisms, I can see what you mean. I get the sense that she has a spent a lot of time as a girl.”
Melanie replied, “I agree. I would guess that Lee might like being a girl. You don't think that Lee might have always been like that upstairs?”
Bao said, “It would explain a lot about Lee's personality, and the stories she wrote.”
Melanie stated, “Even so. Lee is a nice person, and I wish her all the best.”
Bao replied, “I agree.”
Melanie commented, “Also, Lee stated that River was the father of the twins she is having.”
Bao said, “That doesn't surprise me. What surprises me was that Lee told me that River was Sam. I don't know how River pulled that off.”
Melanie pointed out, “I don't doubt that. And River is a genius, and she is very skilled at whatever she, or he, puts her mind too.”
Bao commented, “You got that right. And from what Lee told me, she and Chang have an understanding when it comes to their relationships with River.”
Melanie stated, “Let us be honest. Neither of them are going to cross River, and try to make her upset. Those two will do what they have to do, to keep River happy.”
Bao said, “That is what I figured, as well. Fortunately, from what I understand, River is easy to get along with, as long as the person is genuinely nice to her.”
Melanie replied, “Yes. The telepathy.”
Bao stated, “Exactly. And River was nice to us, as well. I wish all my customers were nice as those two.”
Melanie replied, “I know. Unfortunately, some of them can be real bitches.”
There was silence between the two of them. They looked at each other, as smiles slowing formed on their faces. The two of them said, in unison, “Revy.”
Both of them lightly laughed, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Bao complimented, “I heard what you did, on taking Revy's pistols... I am sorry... Cutlasses, away from her. That takes balls. Even though you lost yours.”
Melanie teased, “You are one to talk.”
Bao shrugged, as she agreed, “Yea. Though, I am envious that I was not gutsy enough to do that, myself. And over the years, I had plenty of reasons to do so.”
Melanie said, “I am sure. Though, that is okay. It was a gamble that her friends would not kill me for doing that.”
Bao replied, “Good point.”
Melanie inquired, “Now, that I know who you are, I have a few questions for you. Since being their bartender, as well. I have been wondering. With Revy and the others as you usual customers, how did you keep yourself from going insane from their craziness?”
Bao shrugged, as she answered, “I realized that staying sane, and calm, was the only way I was going to stay alive in those situations.”
Melanie complimented, “Good answer.”
Bao responded, “I know. But, it didn't mean I did not bitch at Revy now and again, for being a bitch and wrecking my bar.”
Melanie replied, “I completely understand.”
Bao commented, “You are probably the only person alive, who could understand my previous situations.”
Melanie replied, “Yea.”
Bao looked over at the counter, where the Lowe family were doing their jobs. She then looked back at Melanie, as she commented, “So, did Lee tell you who the family that run this place is?”
Melanie took a closer look around for a few seconds. Then, the realization dawned on her, as she answered, “The Lowe family.”
Bao complimented, “Got it in one. And Bob is now locked as a woman, and she goes by the name, Lori.”
Melanie commented, “Well, from the stories, that was bound to happen. Though, we are not ones to talk.”
Bao replied, “True.”
Just then Ed walked up to their table, with their drinks.
She set a glass of orange juice by Melanie, and a glass of whole milk in by Bao.
Ed continued to look down a the two women, as she leaned back up straight. She calmly said, “While we don't mind you to talking about us. Could you please do so a little more quietly.”
Ed's comment took them by surprise, as they looked up at her.
Ed smirked towards the two women, as she commented, “What? You don't think we were not paying attention to you two, when you first came into the diner?” She looked over at Bao, as she continued, “This only the third time I have seen Bao here on a date. Yes. We know it is you, Bao.” She turned to Melanie, as she went on to say, “And I am guessing you are really, Melvin?””
Melanie softly stated, “It is Melanie, now.”
Ed turned back to look at both of the sitting women, as she responded, “Okay. And I am guessing Lee had a hand in this little get together?”
Bao replied, “Good guess.”
Melanie inquired, “How did you know?”
Ed casually answered, “Lee came to visit us, earlier today.”
Melanie commented, “That girl really gets around.”
Ed's smile turned mischievous, as she said, “In more ways than one.”
Melanie hesitantly questioned, “Do we really want to know?”
Ed flatly replied, “No.”
Bao calmly said, “Listen, Mrs. Lowe...”
Ed interrupted, “Ed, is find.”
Bao stated, “Ed... We are sorry about speaking so openly about your family, in public.”
Melanie said, “We will try to do better.”
Ed kindly said, “Good. That is all we ask from you.”
Bao inquired, “Okay. So, is there anything you would like to add?”
Ed smiled mischievously, as she stated, with a bit of excitement in her voice, “Sure... I think Lee has the right idea. That you two would be good together. In this type of life, it is so hard to find someone to share you life with... I know. Secrets make relationships hard to hold on too. But, you two don't have to keep any real secrets from each other. And you two do have a lot in common.”
Bao commented, “Lee said the same thing.”
Ed said, “That woman has a good head on her shoulders. And so do you, two.”
Bao replied, “Thanks.”
Melanie said, “Thank you.”
Ed stated, “You're welcome.”
Melanie questioned, “Still, I didn't know that Lee knew who you were?”
Ed stated, “We helped Lee out a bit. And as we did so, we informed Lee of who we were.”
Melanie complimented, “That was nice of you.”
Ed smiled warmly toward Melanie, as she said, “Thank you.”
Bao inquired, “While we know Lori is Bob. I would like to know which one of your sons is the cook? And which one is the dishwasher?”
Ed looked back at both sitting women, as she answered, “Right now, Lewis is the one doing the cooking, and Stan is on dish duty. But, we alternate jobs for the diner, between the four of us.”
Bao replied, “Okay.”
Ed asked, “Given you knew they were my sons, I take it you read Lee's stories?”
Bao said, “Yes.” She looked over at Melanie, as she continued, “And so has Melanie.” She looked back up to Ed.
Melanie looked at Ed, as she commented, “I found Lee's stories to be interesting.”
Ed agreed, “So do I. And that is quite a feat.”
Melanie commented, in a sincere tone of voice, “For a genius, such as yourself, it would be.”
Ed offered, “Thank you. Now, my family and I would be more than happy to talk about all this, in detail, in private, later. But, we are busy, right now.”
Melanie responded, “We appreciate the offer. And we will take it up with you at a later date.”
Bao replied, “Yes. We will.”
Ed requested, in a slightly impatient tone of voice, “Please do so. There is so much my family and I would like to talk to you both about.”
Bao replied, “Same here.”
Melanie said, “We looked forward to it.”
Ed calmly stated, in a slightly disappointed tone of voice, “Well, I have other customers. So, I am going to have to cut this short. But, I hope you both have a pleasant night...” She looked at Bao, as she said, “Bao...” She looked at Melanie, as she continued, “Melanie.” And she then looked again, between the two sitting women.
Bao said, “Thank you, Ed.”
Mel replied, “Have a good night, yourself, Ed.”
Ed silently smiled warmly towards both sitting women. She then turned around, and walked away, to tend to her other customers.
(_)
Ten minute later,, dinner was served to the both of Bao and Melanie, at the same time. Both of them found their meals to be tasty, and properly cooked.
The two women continued talking, as the ate their dinner. Their discussion covered many topic. They talked about everything from their pasts, to their plans for the future. As they talked, the became better friends.
When they were finished their dinner, they split the check, and they both left Ed a nice tip.
They then left the dinner, and returned to Bao's car.
As Bao got driver's side, and Melanie the passenger side.
After their had shut their doors, and buckled up, Bao turned to Melanie, as she said, “I know this is a little forward, but would you like to come back to my place.”
Melanie turned to Bao, as she replied, “Sure. What do you have in mind?”
Bao admitted, “Well, I am not good about these things. So, I will just say it straight out. I am horny, and I would like to sleep with you tonight.”
Melanie questioned, “Sex this early in the relationship?”
Bao admitted, “Yes. For very good reasons. Among other things, I enjoyed our conversation.”
Melanie replied, “So did I.”
Bao commented, “And my instincts tell me that you are alright.”
Melanie said, “Same here.”
Bao pointed out, “But, I don't know how busy I will be I tomorrow. I am suppose to get my beer and other alcohol shipments tomorrow afternoon. And if business picks up tomorrow evening, I might keep my normal hours, to late at night. Also, my period starts in around two days. I don't like doing it, messy. Though, I do not want to have to wait around a week before we have sex. So, it has got to be tonight.”
Melanie thought on what Bao stated for a few seconds. She then said, “Okay. Though, just so you know, as a woman, I am a virgin.”
Bao gave Melanie a leering smile, as she stated, “We will fix that problem, soon enough.”
Melanie happily replied, “I look forward to it.”
Bao asked, “Also, I know this is an uncomfortable subject. It still is for me. But, have you had your period, yet?”
Melanie answered, “Not yet. How long until I should expect it?”
Bao inquired, “When did you get pulled out of the vat?
Melanie answered, “About a week ago.”
Bao stated, “Well, you got about two months before you have to worry about it. And don't worry. It is not that bad. And I will help you through it. Also, I have some of those instant man packets. Chang gave me a few.”
Melon replied, “Cool. But, we will have to be careful not to get pregnant.”
Bao answered, “Of course. That is why I got condoms at the house. Though, I suggest we just do it girl on girl tonight.”
Melanie said, “That is fine with me.”
Bao smirked, “Good. Because multiple orgasms are a wonderful thing.”
For the next few seconds, both women laughed, as they turned to face forward, towards the front of the car.
Bao then started her car, pulled out of the parking space. And she soon drove them towards her home. Where they were going to have a wonderful night of passion, together.
(_)
The next morning, in the penthouse apartment, of the Daiyu Palace Casino, was a pleasant affair for Lee, River, and Chang.
Lee woke up with River and Chang.
After all three were cleaned, dressed, and ready to face the said, they had breakfast together.
River and Chang dressed in their usual clothing. With Chang in one of his black business suits. Including his coat. And River wore a casual shirt and pants, that went well with her hair.
Lee was dressed in another set of clothing that River had got her. But, unlike yesterday, it was not a skirt, shirt, and jacket. It was red long sleeved shirt, blue jeans, brown leather belt, red bra, and red panties, with her red leather slippers.
The three adults then had breakfast brought up to them. And the ate in the apartment dining room.
Fortunately, Lee had little problems with morning sickness so far that morning.
After breakfast, River and Chang had left. Chang had daily business, that dealt with the casino. And River said she had a few errands to run, herself.
While, the apartment had a kitchen, with a dishwasher, and other amenities. The bellhop had taken away the dirty dishes, downstairs, to the casino kitchen, to be cleaned.
With everyone gone, Lee walked into the living room. The sunlight streaming in from the windows provided plenty of illumination for her to see with.
Lee sat down at on the couch in the living room, with the TV remote in her hands. She saw a digital clock, of the Blu-ray player, on top the small chest of drawers, below the wall mounted thin, large, widescreen TV.
The clock said, Nine Thirty-five AM.
Lee though, with mild amusement, 'Wow. It is only that earlier. Boy or girl, I tend to like to sleep in. And given what happened yesterday, I am surprised all of three of us were able to get up around seven thirty, with no problems.'
'I usually do not get up early. But, I was able to get up, without feeling tired, nor bad. Actually, my morning sickness really isn't bothering me. And I am even able to keep down my meal, with little problems.'
'And what a day, yesterday. I got a lot done that day.'
'That morning, I visited old friends. I reality traveled to visit other friends. I closed a time loop.'
'And then, that afternoon River and I made love n the beach for a few hours... That was fun...'
'When we returned to the casino, we had got some help to move my new fortune into a few of Chang's vaults, in the casino... I don't want to put all my eggs in one basket.'
'And after I made a few copies of my IDs and documents, I put all my papers, but my Driver's license and immigration card, into a fire proof safe, which River provided for me, in the penthouse.'
'By then, it was time for dinner for River, Chang, and I. We had dinner in Chang private room, in the restaurant, on the gaming floor. And we shared our meal with Simon and Kaylee. Julia was back with Spike, by then. Allowing for a more adult conversation. And we all had a great time.'
'And later that night, long after dinner, the three of us had some more fun, in our bedroom.'
'I wonder what I am going to do today... While I figure that out, I think I will watch some TV. River mentioned that the casino uses a satellite TV system, and a fiber optic line for internet. Though, I think I will get a computer, for myself, later. I am already have plenty of fun, right now, without one.'
As Lee sat on the couch, she use a remote the coffee table, to turn on the TV. She soon found an english TV repeat of an episode, from comedy sitcom, she liked.
Lee watched TV for about fifteen minutes, before a nearby phone rang.
Lee used her remote to mute the TV. She then set down the remote, and used her right hand to reach over to pick up the wireless TV on the small table, beside the couch, to her right side.
Lee held the phone to her right ear. She casually said, into the phone, in english, “Hello.”
Melanie said, in an excited tone of voice, in english, “Lee. It is good to hear from you.”
Lee responded, “Good morning, Melanie. So, how was your date, last night?”
Suddenly, on other end, Lee heard Bao's voice say, in english, “It went great.”
Lee replied, “Good morning, Bao. I take it that you two are not calling from the hotel?”
Melanie stated, “No. We are calling from Bao's place.”
Lee said, “Nice. So, how was last night?”
(_)
At that moment, inside Bao home, in her bedroom, in her bed, Melanie and Bao sat up, while nude. Bao was on the right side of her bed, while Melanie was on the left side.
Both women had a wireless house phone to their ears, as they looked at each other.
Melanie answered, “Pleasurable. We had a great time at the Last Resort. Then, we came back to Bao place for dessert.”
Melanie watched as Bao stifled a giggle.
Over the phone, Lee asked, “So, I was right about your two?”
Bao spoke up, in a happy tone of voice, “You were right, Lee. And we called to thank you for setting us up on date. We enjoyed it.”
Lee replied, “Glad to hear it.”
Melanie stated, “Well, Lee. We got to get ready for work.”
Bao said, “We will tell you all about it, later.”
Lee responded, “I looked forward to hearing all the juice details. Have a good day, ladies.”
Melanie replied, “You too, Lee.”
Bao said, “Talk to you later, Lee.”
Both women hung up and set their phones between each other.
They then gently leaned towards one another, as they kissed each other on the lips for a few seconds.
As they broke their kiss, they looked at each other's face.
Melanie suggested, “Want to share a shower together? I normally come in at ten thirty. But, I can push that to eleven thirty.”
Bao casually said, “Sure. I own my place, so I keep my own hours. And after we shower, and get dressed, we will fix something to eat.”
Melanie smiled at Boa, as she commented, “I think we are going to get along just fine.”
Bao returned Melanie's smile, as she agreed, “So do I.”
Both women then got of bed to face the day, and have some fun, together, in Bao's large shower, in her master bathroom.
(_)
At the moment, in the living room, of the casino penthouse, Lee sat on the couch, as she pulled her phone away from her right ear. She pressed the disconnect button. She then leaned back over to her right, and hung the phone back on its base.
As she leaned back up, on the couch, she picked up her remote, as she propped her legs onto the table, in front of the couch. She then crossed her right left over her left leg, tightly. In a manner that would have been unconformable as a man, but was fine as a women.
She turned the volume back on the TV.
She set her remote down, on the couch, beside her, as she happily thought, 'I did not expect them to sleep together so quickly. Still, I am glad those two found someone to love. Each other. And that is one less problem for me to worry about.'
A few minutes later, the phone rang, again.
Lee thought, with mild annoyance, 'When it rains, it pours.'
Lee muted the TV. She then answered the phone, again. She calmly said, into the phone, “Hello.”
A woman's voice said, in english, “Lee, is that you?”
Lee recognized the woman's voice, as she said, “Yea, Eda. It's me.”
Eda responded, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Good. I have been trying to reach you since yesterday. Why didn't you tell me, and Yolanda, you were back in town?”
Lee pointed out, “Since I heard you shut down the food truck. And I didn't have your phone number, for where you live. And I wasn't going to push my luck with those here. So, I had no way to contact either of you.”
Eda replied, “Fair enough. Also, we heard that you were pregnant?”
Lee said, “Yep. With River's twins.”
Eda stated, in an excited tone of voice, “You are going to have to tell me all about it.”
Lee replied, “I would love to.”
Eda inquired, “Are you free, right now?”
Lee said, “Yes.”
Eda requested, “Then, come see us. Yolanda is here, with me. I am looking at her, right now.”
Lee sheepishly admitted, “Well, I don't know where you are staying. So, as soon as you give me the directions, I will be over there. Are you at the Devil's Hotel?”
Eda flatly responded, “Oh, hell no. I am not going to stay in the same building as those lunatics.”
Lee could hear laughing in the background. She thought, 'That must be, Yolanda.'
As Lee heard the laughter die down, she questioned, “Then, where are you staying, after you came back?”
Eda answered, “Yolanda never left. And I was not gone long, myself. We still have the same apartment house we have been living in, since we first got here. To be honest. We have plenty of money. So, we do not need to have a job. And while we no longer work in that food truck, we can have a few cookouts. Now and then.”
Lee said, “Okay. I look forward to those cookouts, later on. But, for right now, as soon as you give me directions, and your phone number. I will head over there.”
Eda replied, “Glad to hear it.”
Lee requested, “Now, let me get a pen and paper.”
Lee then got up, and quickly walked over to a nearby table, she saw a pen and note pad on the top of the table. She held the phone, to her right ear, with her right hand, while she gently gripped the pen with her left hand, while she leaned over the notepad.
Lee said, “Okay. I got what I need.”
Eda stated, “First, the phone number is...” She then gave Lee the phone number to her home. She then gave Lee directions to her home.
As Lee received the directions, she wrote them down. Eda then gave Lee her phone number, with Lee wrote down on the notepad, as well.
Once Eda was finished, Lee replied, “Okay. I will see you there, in a few minutes.” She then set her pen down, and she hung up her phone. She walked over to where the phone base was, and she placed the wireless phone back in its base. Next, she returned to the table that had the note paper, and tore off the top piece of paper that had the directions she had written down.
As Lee folded and stuffed the piece of paper into her right front pants pocket, she walked over to the TV, and turned it off.
Lee thought, 'I need to get a few items, such as my IDs, encrypted cellphone, and some cash. Then, I will head out. I am glad that yesterday evening River gave me an extra set of keys to the pink Cadillac... I just hope she is not using it, right now... Knowing her, she isn't...'
Lee then walked back down the hallway, to the master bedroom.
After retrieving her IDs, keys, some money, and her casino cellphone, in her pant pockets, she left the apartment, locking the door behind her.
As she walked down the hallway, she came to a stop.
Lee thought, 'I better inform them of where I am going. I did promise them that I would do so. And while I do not know where River is, I do have an idea of where Chang is. I will check his office. If I cannot find him there, I will inform them both, later.'
She then walked down the hallway, towards Chang's office. After a couple of turned down the hallway, she soon came up to the door to Chang's office.
Lee saw that the door was open.
She walked up to the threshold of the door. As she looked into the office, she saw Chang sitting in his desk, as he leaned down, doing paperwork.
Before Lee could even knock, Chang did not look up, as he calmly inquired, “What can I do for you, Lee?”
Lee complimented, “Good ears.”
Chang continued working on his paperwork, as he said, “Thanks to you, I can recognize footsteps. And your slippers make a distinctive sounds.”
Lee casually replied, “I will keep that in mind, Sherlock.”
Chang chuckled a little, but he did no look up at Lee.
Lee continued, “I can see that you are busy, so I will make this brief. A few minutes ago, I got a call from Eda and Yolanda. And I am heading over to their home, right now.”
Chang did not look up, as he stated, “Have fun. And thank you for keeping your promise.”
Lee requested, “You're welcome. And please let River know, as well. I am not sure where she is.”
Chang continued to look at his worked, as he commented, “You are not alone. And she seems to prefer it that way.”
Lee said, “Okay. Also, please let me know when you have something for me to do for you.”
By then, Chang finished what he was working on. He looked up at Lee, as he sincerely stated, “I will. But, your primary job right now is to protect the two children growing inside you. River would be upset with you if something were to happen to them.”
Lee place both her hands over lower stomach, as she looked back at Chang. She softly said, “I fully agree. And I will be careful.”
Chang replied, “Good. When I see River, I will let her know where you are heading. And have a nice day.”
Lee dropped her hands to her sides, as she smiled. She said, “You too, Chang.”
Lee then turned around, and headed for the back express elevator, and the casino garage.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee reached the garage. She found that her pink Cadillac was there. And the car had its windows and hood up.
She soon go into her pink Cadillac, buckled up, started the car's engine. As soon as she back up, and made it to the nearest garage door, which were all closed. She used the garage remote that River kept in the car, to open the garage door in front of her.
After Lee drove the car outside, she used the garage remote to shut the garage door behind her.
Finally, she drove out onto the street, and she carefully headed for Eda and Yolanda's home, using the directions that Eda had given her.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee reached the home that Eda and Yolanda had rented.
Lee drove up, to park on the side of the street, beside the blond women's home. Lee's driver's side door facing the front lawn
Lee turned to looked at the home, to her left side, as she thought, 'This seems like a nice neighborhood. But, I would expert nothing less, from those two. And I am so looking forward to talking to them.'
Lee put her car in park. Turned off the engine. Pocketed the keys. Unbuckled herself. And as she got out of the car, she locked the car door. Which she stood up straight on the lawn, she shut her door, behind herself.
As Lee stood on the front yard, by her car, she looked around herself.
She saw the nice, well cared for green lawn, with a few trees on it. There as a concrete sidewalk that lead to the front door. And the driveway, leading to the garage.
The home itself was a modestly sized, one story, brick home, painted white, with a tin roof, and several windows around the home.
Lee could see the garage door was rolled up, and in the garage, she saw the back in of a very nice, two door, blue, nineteen sixty-three corvette stingray convertible. The hood and windows of the car were up.
Lee thought, with slight amusement, 'Damn. Nearly everyone I know has good taste in cars... Now, to see the girls.'
Lee turned to face the front of the home, as she calmly walked up the walkway, to the awing over the front door.
Lee then gently knocked on the door.
A second later, the door was opened.
Lee saw that the young blond woman, which short hair, in front of her, whom was not Eda. It took a second, but Lee soon recognized her as Yolanda. And the blond was wearing a blue, silk, short sleeve shirtdress, with a silk blue sash gently tied around her waist.
Lee did not look further down, to see what shoes Eda was wearing, because it would have been considered rude.
Yolanda said, in a peaceful tone of voice, that showed her maturity, and true age, in english, “Hello You must be Lee.”
Lee calmly relied, “Yes. I am. And it is nice to meet you again, Yolanda.”
Yolanda responded, “Yes. It is so nice to formally meet you, while each of us can pleasantly acknowledge who the other really is.”
Lee said, “I fully agree.”
Yolanda kindly offered, “Please come in. Eda is waiting in the living room for us.”
Lee walked inside, with Yolanda closing the door behind her.
Lee also heard the clicking sound of the lock on the door knob being set in place.
But, since Lee did not hear the top deadbolt lock of the door being used, she paid little mind to it. And Lee continued into the living room, with Yolanda walking behind her.
As Lee entered the living room, she saw it was a modern living room, with the all the expected amenities.
On one side of the room, there was a large, wall mounted, thin, widescreen TV, with an entertainment system setup below the TV. And on the other side of the room was a couch, with two chairs beside it. Between each chair and couch was a small table, with a lamp on it. And in front of the couch was a low coffee table.
On the coffee table was women's magazines, and a TV remote. Though, Lee noticed that the TV was turned off. And the lights in the room were also off, do to plenty of light coming, through the large windows, and semi-translucent, white curtains, that were in front of the windows, on the inside, to provide privacy for home's residents.
The sitting area was to Lee's right, and the TV was to Lee's left.
Lee continued walking, as she saw Eda sitting on the couch, on the far end.
And even thought, Eda was sitting down, Lee could see that Eda was wearing a pink tank top, over a white bra, with skintight blue jeans. Where in comparison, Lee's pants were a slightly loose on Lee, which was the way the black haired woman liked it.
Also, while Eda wore tacky clothing, Lee was not about to say a word about Eda's clothing tastes. And like Yolanda, Lee avoided looking to far down, to see what shoes she wore, as it might has been misinterpreted as staring at her breasts.
Eda looked up at Lee, as she said, “Hi Lee.”
Lee continued looking at Eda, as she walk further into the room. She said, “Hello Eda.” She then sat down on the chair, across the room, near Eda, and to the blond woman's right side.
Meanwhile, as Lee seated herself, Yolanda walked around the coffee table, to Eda's left, to set down beside her, on the couch.
Eda and Yolanda calmly looked at Lee, as Lee casually looked back at them.
Eda asked, with a hint of curiosity, and self importance, “I trust my directions were fine?”
Lee calmly stated, “The directions you gave were fine.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she said, “That is what I thought.”
Yolanda looked over at Eda, as she spoke up, in a nonchalant manner, “As much as Eda hear wishes to pat herself on the back.” She looked over at Lee, as she gave the black haired woman a warm smile. She continued, “I wanted to congratulate on your pregnancy.”
Lee returned Yolanda's smile. She looked down at her self. She looked back up at Yolanda, and Eda. She replied, “Thank you.”
Eda commented, “I never got the whole, congratulations, part of getting knocked up. I mean it is just doing what naturally comes with being a woman.”
Lee shrugged, as she commented, “Yes. Being pregnant is the only time a person is congratulated, before the real work begins.”
Yolanda smiled at Lee's joke, while Eda let out of laugh. Eda then complimented, “Good one.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Eda asked, “So, how are you doing? Everything that has happened must a lot to take in for you.”
Lee responded, “I am doing fine. Though, I hope are you are okay with a guy you slept with becoming a woman that is now pregnant with twins, by a gender bender, that was born, and prefers to live, as a woman.”
Eda joked, “Hey. I can make the appointments for the daytime talk show circuit. If you want?”
All three of the women lightly laughed, for a few seconds, as Eda's joke.
Lee then calmly said, “No thanks. We all have enough problems, as is.”
Eda agreed, “Very true.”
Yolanda inquired, “And how are the children?
Lee honestly answered, “It is too early to tell. I am only a month pregnant.”
Eda stated, “After we found out River was Sam, we were not surprised you end up with River. But, I cannot see you and Chang sharing.”
Lee giggled for a few seconds. She then answered, “I will deny this, if you repeat it. But, I don't think you understand the dynamics of the situation. While River prefers to be a woman. And Chang prefers to be a man. With me being a mother to be. It is clear that River is the one wearing the proverbial pants in this relationship.”
Eda and Yolanda burst out laughing, for several seconds.
Lee did not join in. And instead she silently waited for them to calm down.
As the other two quieted down, Lee continued, “And since Chang and I wish to keep River happy. We have come to an understanding. With the situation being more of a threesome.”
Eda replied, with a bit of intrigue in her voice, “Interesting.”
Yolanda calmly inquired, “So, what do you prefer to be?”
Lee thought, 'Yolanda is hiding her curiosity well. But, I really have nothing to hide on this situation.' She answered, “I have been locked as woman for several years. And I am okay with it.”
Yolanda shrugged, as she casually replied, “To each his... Or, her own... By the way, I talked to Eda about the conversation you two had in that factory, dealing with Revy and I.”
Lee was quiet for a few seconds, as she tried to recall what Yolanda was talking about. She then admitted, in a sad tone of voice, “Yolanda, Eda, I want to sincerely apologize, but for myself, is has literally be decades since that night. I vaguely even remember that conversation.”
Yolanda calmly responded, in a motherly tone of voice, “That is understandable. And I will jog your memory. Such as during that conversation, you were correct in figuring out how I lost my original right eye. You have quite the investigative talent.”
Lee vaguely recalled what Yolanda was talking about, as she asked, “Ah. That town in the middle east?”
Yolanda answered, Yes... And I do enjoy my artificial right eye. And I love having my youth being restored.”
Lee responded, “I am glad to hear you say this. Still, what about Revy?”
Yolanda let out a small giggle. She then stated, “Well, I find it completely unsurprising that Revy might be half Irish. It would explain so much about her.”
Lee said, “Oh... Well, I have to disagree. I know a number of Irish people... Actually, I am part Irish. The angry drunk is more of a cliché.”
Yolanda shrugged, as she calmly responded, “Perhaps. And I will concede that our dear Revy has had to deal with other demons in her past.”
Lee agreed, “Very true.”
Eda calmly said, “And I would find it deeply ironic if Revy was Catholic on her mothers Irish side. Considering we were the ones were nuns habits.”
Yolanda said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “I would agree.”
Lee calmly suggested, “So, would I. But, let us talk about something more pleasant.”
Yolanda agreed, in a casual tone of voice, “A thoughtful suggestion. That leads me to my other point on the matter. My offer to sleep with you still stands.”
Eda looked over at Yolanda, for a second. She then looked back at Lee, as she teased, “We could make it a threesome. Thought, that depends on if River and Chang are okay with it?”
Lee answered, “River talked to me about you two and her... Among others. And I have a similar agreement with those two. So, I see no reason not to.”
Yolanda calmly said, “That is good.”
Eda lecherously grinned, as she commented, “This is going to be fun.”
Lee inquired, in a relaxed tone of voice, “So, when and where do you want to do this?”
Yolanda stated, “In a few minutes, would be fine. Though, the where, is a good question?”
Yolanda and Eda looked at each other for a few seconds.
Eda then suggested, “My bedroom might be better. You're is much nicer, and I don't want to mess is up.”
Yolanda kindly replied, “Well, thank you, Eda. And I am fine with that.”
The two of them turned to looked at Lee, as Yolanda asked, “Is that alright with you, Lee?”
Lee commented, “I am fine with that. I have found that in the matters of sex, I am more of a follower, than a leader.”
Yolanda mentioned, “In the matters of love and sex. It is a circular path, where one finds they can easily be the leader, or the follower, at any given time.”
Lee complimented, “Wise words. I am surprised you two are not together... Are you?
Eda stated, “No. We just do not click, that way, together. But, we are good friends.”
Lee commented, “I can see the friendship, from the way you two act around each other.”
Eda replied, “Thanks.”
Yolanda playfully commented, “I appreciate you comment. Though, there is the occasional lonely night.”
Lee noticed Eda mildly blush at Yolanda comment.
Lee calmly stated, “That is perfectly understandable. Though, it will take a few minutes to get into the mood.”
Eda mischievously smiled, as she stated, “Don't worry. Both of us are very experienced in solving such minor problems.”
Yolanda grin a more calmer smile, as she said, “That we have.”
Lee thought, 'I am so happy that my precognition is telling me that these two are safe to be around. And I can trust them in bed. Or, I would be worried by such their comments, and reactions.'
Lee said, “Okay.”
Yolanda commented, “Before we get into this, Revy and Rock invited us to go to the Rats Nest tonight. Want to come?”
Eda stated, “We are going. And I am sure it will be fun.”
Lee thought, 'So, tonight is when they are confronting, Bao. At least I warned her that they knew. And with Melanie as her new girlfriend, she is there to give Bao comfort and emotional support. So, Bao will be fine... Still, I don't want to be a part of any possible fireworks. Especially since I am pregnant.”
Lee requested, “That is okay. But, I will have to decline. For a number of reasons. Though, I do hope you go easy on Bao.”
Yolanda inquired, “So, what those two said is true?”
Lee answered, “Yes. And please take into account she went to a lot of trouble to prevent this very situation.”
Eda stated, “We realize that. And we will be nice.”
Yolanda commented, “It is so rare to find a bartender than can handle Revy and Rock's group.”
Lee responded, “Yes. And this city has at least two such bartenders. Now, as soon as you are ready, I will be more than willing to follow you both into Eda's bedroom.”
Eda happily said, “Well, there is no time like the present. I have always found nooners to be fun.”
Eda got up from the couch. With Lee and Yolanda standing up a second after Eda.
Lee then followed Eda down a hallway, with Yolanda calmly walking a few steps behind Lee.
A few seconds later, they reach a closed door in the hallway.
Eda opened the door, and walked into the room.
Lee and Yolanda followed behind her.
Eda then took several steps to Lee's side, as she turned around to face the two women with her.
By then, Lee and Yolanda were standing, side by side, with Lee to Yolanda's left.
Eda happily said, “As they say. Welcome to my humble abode.”
Lee then looked around Eda's bedroom.
The windows, with light curtains, provided plenty of light in the room for the three women to see with.
Eda's bedroom was a moderately large room, with white painted walls. There was was a few chairs, a table, and a dresser in the room. In one of the corners of the room was a large vanity mirror.
The bed rested against the side wall to Lee's left. The bed was a queen sized bed, with two large pillows by the headboard.
Lee mentally guessed, 'Eda has a nice bedroom. And this bed is barely large enough for three moderately sized people. Such as the three of us.'
Lee continued to look around the room.
Across from the bed there was a closet, which was open, with different hung dresses on a metal rod in the small alcove.
And the floor was brown carpet.
Also, while the room was slightly messy, with clothing hanging on the chairs, the white sheets on the bed were made in military fashion. And the carpet was fairly clean, as well.
Lee looked over at Eda, as she complimented, “You have a nice bedroom, Eda.”
Eda smile at Lee, as she replied, “Thank you, Lee.”
Lee said, “Also, you have a nice sized bed.”
Eda stated, “Thank you. I like to spread out when I sleep. Now, let us have some fun.”
Lee walked up to the foot of the bed. She turned around to face both of the other two women. She inquired, “First. I need to know what are we be doing? Are we going to use any toys?”
Yolanda answered, “No. Both of us prefer not to be as... Creative as Revy and the others.”
Eda shrugged, as she said, “She's right.” She cracked a grin, as she continued, “Though, we may pull them out later.”
Lee asked, “And what about positions.”
Eda stated, “We will start simple.” She looked over at Yolanda, with Yolanda turned to look at her. Eda continued, “I suggest the masseuse and the badger. You can be the badger.”
Yolanda replied, “You are too kind.”
Lee questioned, “Huh?”
The two blond women turned to look at Lee. Eda explained, “It is a simple, and fun threesome position. Basically, after all three of us strip down, we starts with the person playing the masseuse sits up, with their back on the pillows, headboard, and their legs spread.”
“Then, the second person, whom gets the most fun out of it, sit on the bed, and lays back, against the first person, while have their legs spread. The first person then reached around and started to massage the second person's breasts.”
“While, as the same time, the third person plays badger, by crawling from the end of the bed, to be between the second person's legs, while rutting around the second person's privates.”
Lee responded, “Sounds like fun. And thanks for letting me be the second person in this position.”
Yolanda stated, “No problem. After all, you happen to be our invited guest. Also later, we can show you the three-way lotus position.”
Eda looked over at Yolanda, as she commented, “That requires a lot of use of the legs, and footwork. And it take a bit of practice to get it right.”
Yolanda turned to Eda, as she said, “Well, someone has to teach her.”
Lee commented, “After everything I have been through. I am open to just about anything.”
The two blond women turned to Lee, as Yolanda said, “Thank you, Lee.”
Eda inquired, “Speaking of positions. Given you are pregnant. Is it safe for you to do this?”
Lee stated, “I am only a month pregnant. So, I figure, as long as I don't receive any blows to my stomach, I will be fine.”
Eda replied, “Fair enough.”
Yolanda calmly said, “Well girls. Let us start this party.”
Eda agreed, “Yes. Let's do this.”
Lee halfheartedly commented, “You don't have to say that twice.”
The three women then took off their clothing, with each of them making a neat pile of their own clothes, on the floor. Next, they headed for the bed.
(_)
A few hours, several positions, and lots of pleasure, later, they had finished having sex. All three of them took turns taking quick showers, before getting dressed in the clothing they previously had on.
Then, the three women went into the kitchen of the home. And all three women worked together to prepare a home cooked meal.
An hour afterward, they ate a late lunch. Though, Lee only ate a small portion of what they cooked, due to her morning sickness. And Lee only had a lemonade, while Eda and Yolanda each had a bottle of beer.
When they had finished lunch, the three women went back into the living room and talked about various topics for about an hour.
Soon after, Lee thanked them for a good time. And she said her goodbyes, while promising to keep in touch. Eda and Yolanda share similar sentiments with Lee.
After which, Lee left their home, got into her pink Cadillac and drove back to the casino.
(_)
Thirteen minutes after Lee left Yolanda and Eda's home, she returned her car back to its place the casino garage, Lee walked out of the garage, and into one of the back casino hallways, on the first floor of the large casino building.
Lee gently shut the door to the garage, behind her. She then turned around, as she stood in the hallway.
Lee looked around the hallway, as she calmly thought, while feeling very happy, 'Damn those two are good a second, to what I do with River and Chang, when we have sex. And they know how to do it, without being rough. I can see why River was okay with me having sex with those two. Skill and care like that should be shared... So, what will I did first, now that I am back at the casino?... I mean, just watching TV would be a waste of time. And I am sure there is plenty of stuff to do here, beside gambling.'
'River just gave me a small fortune of my own, yesterday. And I am not going to gamble away. Especially, since I am pregnant with our children.'
Just then, Lee felt her stomach rumble.
Lee mentally reflected, with slight annoyance, 'I am already hungry, again. Well, that is the drawback to eating small meals. But, it is either eat small meals regularly, or throw up in the toilet, due to morning sickness. I will just get something from the casino restaurant, up front. And I will pay for it, myself. Given the situation I am in. I am not going to push my luck.'
She turned to her right, and started walking down the hallway.
Five minutes later, after a few turns down some hallways, Lee made it to the gaming floor. With its many customers, that were gambling at the tables and slot machines.
As Lee walked through the floor, to the restaurant on the other side of the room, she saw the acting pit boss, Jetta, in the distance, doing her job.
Lee thought, 'I hope Jetta is doing okay, today.'
A minute later, Lee walked into the restaurant, she headed for the bar counter, and she sat in one of the stools, away from everyone else.
A few seconds later As the asian, female bartender came walked up to her from behind the bar counter, Lee said, “Lemonade.”
The bartender went to fill her order.
Lee thought, 'Now, what am I going to get to eat. It will have to be light and small, due to my morning sickness. Which is mostly under control. Perhaps just a club sandwich, or something else that is light.'
'Speaking of foods, in a few months, after the morning sickness stops, I should start getting weird food craving. That will be interesting. And that is one thing I have never understood about pregnancy. First, through morning sickness, a woman's body is made to throw up almost everything that she eats. Then, later on, her body gives her some of the weirdest food cravings imaginable...'
'Probably just one of the paradoxes to being a woman...'
'Now, I wonder what time is it?...'
Lee looked over at the at the clock set above the bar wall behind the counter. The clock was placed out of view for those on the gaming floor, looking into the windos of restaurant.
Lee saw that it was four thirteen PM.
Lee thought, 'Well, I have long since learned that it is true. That time flies when one is having fun.'
By then, the bartender set out a coaster, on the counter, in front of Lee. She then placed Lee's glass of iced lemonade down on the coaster.
Lee looked over at the bartender, as she thought, 'I still haven't decided what I want to eat.' She stated, “I would like to order something in a little while. I will let you know when.”
The bartender stated, in english, “Alright. I will check on you in a few minutes.” She then turned and walked away from Lee, to serve her other customers.
Lee then picked up her glass of lemonade, and she took a sip of it. She then set the glass back down on its coaster, on top of the bar counter.
A second later, Lee heard a familiar male voice, to her left, say, in english, “Is this seat taken?”
Lee turned to see that the man whom asked her the question was Jayne. He was wearing the business suit he wore while on duty as part of the casino security.
Lee thought, 'Well, I was planning on talking to him eventually. And he is at clearly in a good mood. To say that least.' She said, “Sure. Have a seat. I could use someone to talk too.”
Jayne replied, “Thanks.” He then sat down in the stool beside her, to Lee's left.
Lee said, “There are a few things I would like to talk to you about.”
Jayne continued to face Lee, as he responded, “Same here.”
Lee commented, “By the way, that suit really looks good on you.”
Jayne said, “I prefer to wear something casual, but Chang pays enough to make it worth wearing this.”
Lee stated, “Yes. He is very generous.”
Jayne joked, “I guess you would know.”
Lee carefully said, “Yea. I do. But, it is not something to discussed in public.”
Jayne flatly replied, “I agree.”
Lee asked, “So, I take it you are on break?”
Jayne said, “Yea... Earlier we caught a someone card counting.”
Lee inquired, in a hesitant tone of voice, “I hope you didn't hurt him?”
Jayne shrugged, as he answered, “Nah. We only do that to repeat offenders. We just confiscated her winning. And we threw her out of the casino.”
Lee questioned, “So, it was a woman? I am surprised were so forward with a woman.”
Jayne commented, “Well, after the abilities you gave us, I have become more gender neutral, when dealing with men and women.”
Lee replied, “I can see what you mean. And I am sorry about that.”
Jayne responded, “Well, the more I think about it, the more I am starting to agree with River, and Chang. What you did for us was a good thing. And not just the obvious, but also the longevity. Which is nice.”
Lee casually said, “I am glad you feel that way.”
Jayne stated, “And you gave me a great drinking buddy. Bob. Man or woman, Bob, or now Lori, is still a good friend. And you got the others to ease up on me.”
Lee said, “I was wondering if you, or the others would realize that.”
Jayne commented, “Well, I eventually did. And between you and me. After you gave us those abilities. The female crew didn't have to deal with monthly problems. And trust me. It make living in close quarters with them much easier to deal with.”
Lee stated, “I can see how that would be a positive outcome. So, that begs the question. Who was the worst?”
Jayne leaned over, towards Lee. He whispered into Lee's left ear, “Inara.”
Lee softly replied, “Ah. I guess she would be. And it was more of a case of a steel gauntlet under a velvet glove. Such as the blow was never direct, and you didn't see it coming.”
Jayne leaned up, as he replied, in a normal tone of voice, “Exactly. I during the factory hunt. I guess I got caught up in the moment. And I was a little too gung ho, during the factory hunt.”
Lee honestly stated, “I barely remember what happened. It was several years ago for me. But, I do vaguely recall that you brought you favorite weapon with you. And I took it, and damaged it.”
Jayne responded, “Yes. You did. But, after everything you have been through, I will cut you some slack on that. After you escaped from us, at the factory. By the way, nice escape. Nobody saw that one coming. Still, I think found Vera... My weapon... Where you told me it was. And I repaired her. She works fine, and is good as new.”
Lee inquired, “That is good. I was wondering, Jayne. Have you ever seen a firefly insect before, in real life?”
Jayne answered, “Not really. Though, I do wonder what they look like?”
Lee stated, “Well, think if you attached a tiny, lit light bulb to the ass of a flying insect.”
Jayne laughed at Lee's comment for a few seconds.
As Jayne calmed down, Lee continued, “At night, when they swarm, they are quite beautiful to look at. And they are harmless. They don't bite people. I have fond memories of playing with them as a child.”
Jayne requested, “Interesting. Could you tell me more about them?”
Lee answered, “Sure.”
Lee and Jayne then continued their conversation, as Lee ordered a small snack for herself. After they finished their pleasant conversation, a half hour later, they parted ways, on more friendly term than they were, before their conversation began. With Lee paying for her bill, and tipping to the bartender. She then left to find Chang in his penthouse office.
(_)
When Lee was walking through the gaming floor, to the front elevator bay, she pulled out the key to use the express elevator.
But, when she turned to see the two guards standing to the sides of the elevator doors, in the back of the bay, that lead to the penthouse.
The guards were two young asian women wearing business suits.
Lee came to a halt, as she thought, 'Damn it. I forget that Chang had the front entrance guards. And I do not know if Chang informed the rest of my personal that I now live here. I need to handle this very carefully... Also, I wonder if anyone else is around...'
Lee looked around to see that there was no one in the elevator bay, but the three of them.
Lee continued her thoughts, 'And if there is a problem I walk around to the back elevator, that is not guarded... Speaking of which, I just think these two are here to remain the visitors that this place is guarded.'
Lee calmly walked up to the two women. As she came to a stop, a few feet from them, she calmly said, in english, “Hello. I am heading for the penthouse.” She then held up the key between between her right index finger and thumb, as she continued, “And I have a key to do so.” She dropped her right hand back to her side, as she went on to requested, “So, please let me by.”
The guard to Lee's right casually responded, in english, “Relax. Chang informed all of us that a caucasian woman with long black hair was allowed to come and go from the penthouse, as she pleases.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
The guard to Lee's left asked, in english, “By the way, what is your name?”
Lee thought, 'Why not?...' She replied, “Lee.”
The guard to Lee' right said, in english, “Interesting...” As she took a closer look at Lee.
The guard to Lee's left mentioned, “There was a man named Lee, that use to come here a few weeks ago.”
Lee said, “That was me.”
The guard to Lee's right asked, “Vat process?”
Lee thought, 'That confirms what I suspected. These are two of Chang's personnel that went through the vat process. Still, I need to answer the question, or it could cause problems later on. Though, I will be vague about it.' She answered, “No. It was another way. And due to time dilation, it has been several years for me.”
The guard to Lee's right said, “Curious... So, how long?”
Lee answered, “Almost two and a half decades.”
The guard to Lee's right replied, “That is fairly long.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It is.”
The guard to Lee's left questioned, “Anything else you want to add?”
Lee coyly replied, “Isn't that enough?” She mentally add, with mild annoyance, 'I sure as hell am not going to tell them about my pregnancy and relationships.'
The guard to Lee's left said, “Okay.”
Lee thought, 'Now, there is a question I would like to ask them, that would not be prying too much.' She asked, “I take it that you, and your coworkers, are rotated in and out of this guard post?”
The guard to Lee's left answered, “Yes.”
The guard to Lee's right stated, “Many of us take turns at the jobs we do. Such as the gaming tables. Security. And other jobs in the hotels. It breaks the monotony.”
The guard to Lee's left said, “Chang, likes for his personnel to be able to know how perform several jobs.”
Lee commented, “I can see how having the approach can be beneficial to all parties.”
The guard to Lee's right stated, “So do we. Anyway, you can pass. And have a good day, Lee.”
The guard to Lee's left commented, “Yes. Have a nice day.”
Lee kindly replied, “I hope you both do, as well.”
Lee walked between them, and used the key in the lock by the express elevator, behind the guards.
A few seconds later, the elevator doors open, Lee walked inside, and she on her way up to the penthouse
Meanwhile, in the elevator bay, after the express elevator doors closed, behind them, the two guards looked in front of them, toward the gaming floor.
There was no one else around, as the guard on the right of the other guard, stated, in chinese, “You just know that Chang had a hand in her transformation, in some way.”
The guard to the left of the guard that commented, replied, in chinese, “I agree.”
The guard on the right inquired, “I wonder if Chang is trying to create his own personal harem? You got to admit that Lee, as a woman, is pretty.”
The guard on the left responded, “True. But, let us just be happy that we are not part of that group.”
The guard on the right replied, “You're preaching to the choir.”
The two guards them went back to their duty.
(_)
A minute later, Lee reached the penthouse level of the building.
After Lee walked down the hallways of the penthouse, for a few minutes, while making a few turns, she soon reached Chang's office. She saw that the door to Chang's office was open.
As Lee approached the open door, she thought, 'I am glad that Chang has decided to leave his door open, like this morning. And with his hearing, he will hear me coming. And I won't have to knock.'
As she walked up to the threshold of the door, she turned and looked into the office.
Lee came to a stop, as she saw that not only was Chang looking up at her, while sitting in his chair, behind his desk. But, standing to Chang's left was River. And the redhead was looking at Lee, as well.
River smiled towards Lee, as she casually said, “Hi Lee. So, how was you visit with Eda and Yolanda?”
Chang grinned towards Lee, as he commented, “Fortunately, it not difficult to explain things to a telepath.”
Given River was a telepath, Lee did bother to think, and instead she said what was on her mind, because it would have been rude to cut Chang out of the conversation.
Lee stated, “That is an understatement.”
River let out a single laugh.
Lee continued, “Given our arrangement. Are you sure that you two want the details?”
River replied, “Of course.”
Chang stated, “River is going to find out anyway. While, I may not be interested in those two. And the feeling is mutual. I am more than happy to learn about any pointers you picked up from those two.”
Lee said, “I can appreciate what you are saying.”
Chang responded, “Good. Now, don't keep us waiting. What happened?”
Lee stated, “Well, most of the sexual positions were tame in comparison to what I experienced on Lagoon Island. Though, most of them were very fun. Such as the simple, yet pleasant, masseuse and badger, three-way.”
Chang commented, “I would take it that such a three-way involved someone behind person, rubbing their breasts, while the third person giving attention to the person in question's genitalia?”
Lee thought, 'He is good.'
From reading Lee's thoughts, River giggled a few seconds.
Lee complimented, “Good guess We added some sex toys into the mix, towards the second hour of our time together. And while most of the positions were simple. They are all very fun. But, special mention has to go to the somewhat complex, three-way lotus position.”
River giggled a little more at readying the mental image of the three-way lotus position.
Chang looked over at River, then back to Lee. He stated, “Don't worry. She always gets this way when we talk about sex in such a blunt fashion.”
Lee said, “Well, at least River here is happy.”
Chang replied, “That's true.”
As River calmed down, she turned to Chang, as she said, “I admit, pleasant sexual images make me giddy.” She turned back to Lee, as she commented, “From what I am reading of your mind, Lee. I am surprised you actually tried that. And that you were able accomplish that position.”
Lee stated, “It wasn't that hard. Though, it did take almost half an hour to get it right. But, once we did, it was very fun.”
Chang inquired, “What is this position?”
Lee explained, “It is a three-way between women. All three women are laying on their back, as they are facing away from each other, in a triangular fashion. The position involves use of intertwined legs. Along with rubbing and placing in feet and toes of the other two, in the unmentionable places of the third. With all three of the women doing so at once, in concert.”
Chang raised an eyebrow, as he commented, “That sounds interesting, and fun.”
Lee grinned, as she replied, “It is.”
Chang calmly said, “We will have to try that sometime.”
River grinned mischievously, as she commented, “Oh yes. We will have to do that.”
Lee halfheartedly said, “I am fine with that. But, not tonight. I am a little sore down there.”
Chang commented, “Everybody needs a break, now and then.”
River agreed, “True.”
Lee inquired, “Also, did you hear about Revy and Rock's get together with the Rats Nest tonight?”
Chang stated, “Yes. Revy invited us. But, we declined on going.” He grinned, as he continued, “I respect Bao enough not to put any more pressure on her, than what is about to happen to her.”
River plainly said, “I like Bao, as well. I wish her all the best. So, I want to know. How did Bao and Melanie's date go last night? I guess they would have called you by now?
Chang replied, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Huh?”
Lee responded, “I take you know about Melvin being caught by Hotel Moscow, and the resulting gender change?”
Chang replied, “Yes. I believe she got her old job back at the Devil's Hotel.”
Lee said, “That she did. Melvin now goes by Melanie. And after talking to her yesterday... By the way, she knows who I am. And so does Bao. And I am fine with it. I decided to set her and Bao up on a date last night. I then when to Bao and handled that end, as well.”
Chang warned, “You have to be careful about doing such things.”
Lee replied, “I agree. And I was straightforward about my intentions, with both of them. And they both stated they saw the logic in what I was trying to do. So, they decided to give it a shot.”
Chang complimented, “That is a good way to handle the situation. But, did Melanie know that the Rats Nest bartender was Bao?”
Lee said, “No. But, Bao later told Melanie herself. And from what I understand, Melanie took the news well.” Lee then looked over at River, as she continued, “Also, it is clear that River hear read my thoughts from this morning, at breakfast, on the matter.”
River casually responded, “And last night. I was just wondering why you didn't tell us about it?”
Lee answered, “Well, I wanted to see how it turned out. Before, I discussed it with you.”
River replied, “I realize that. So, how did it go?”
Lee stated, “I got a call from both of them this morning. After you two left. At the same time. From Bao's home. And they stated their date, and what happened afterward, went great. They are pretty much an item, now. Though, I would prefer we keep this to ourselves.”
Chang said, “Of course. I don't believe in needless gossip.”
River stated, “And I respect them both enough not to say a word about it.”
Lee smiled, as she said, “Good.”
Chang commented, “Then, that is settled. Now, onto other matters. Since Lee, you are not in the mood tonight... For very good reasons... And it is rude for River and I to do it, and leave you out. I guess sex is off the menu tonight... So, what do you want to do, after dinner?”
Lee shrugged, as she replied, “I guess it is up to you to. I am open to just about any activities that don't require any actions below the waist.”
River and Chang laughed for a few seconds, at Lee's comment.
As they calmed down, River suggested, “What about we watch something in the private theater, downstairs?”
Chang complimented, “Good idea. How about you, Lee?”
Lee answered, “I am open to that. Besides which, I would like to see that room. Though, what type of movies do you have in mind? Or, it is a series that you wish to watch?
River shrugged, as she responded, “Watching a series would be nice. But, tonight I was thinking we could watch some lighthearted comedy movies. I suggest we start with the Princess Bride, and go from there.”
Lee commented, “I agree.” She looked over at Chang, as she continued, “I take it you have a large selection to choose from?”
Chang answered, “Very large. And when I find the time, I add to my collection. We will decided what to watch next, when we get there.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
River said, “I am fine with that.”
Chang stated, “Now, how about you two ladies close the door, and sit down, as we talk about the rest of our plans for today, and tonight.”
River and Lee were silent, as River walked over to sit in the chair to Lee's left, that faced Chang's desk.
Meanwhile, Lee gently shut the door behind her, and she walked towards the chair to her right, that face Chang's desk.
After Lee sat down beside River, with both women sitting across the desk from Chang, the three adults continued their discussion on what they planned to do for the rest of the day, and evening.
(_)
Later that evening, during the last bits sunset, before night, it has been a slow day for the Rats Nest.
Bao was wearing her usual casual clothing, of a shirt, pants, and shoes, among other clothing.
While Bao had gotten the shipments she needed to restock her bar, the customers are not just coming that day.
Bao had just cashed out her last customer. As that customer left through the front door, Bao walked to stay behind the bar counter, while cleaned up after the person, whom had been sitting at the counter, beforehand.
When Bao finished, she looked over at the clock on the back wall.
The clock said, eight thirty PM.
Bao turned back to look out the windows, across the bar from her, on the left side of the room.
Bao thought, with mild disappointment, 'Well, this has been a slow day. And I think it is only going to get slower, tonight. I might as well close up. Because years of experience has taught me that nights like this, it is better to leave early, than try to squeeze a dime, where there is none to be had...'
'Maybe Melanie would like some company at her bar, tonight. As we were getting dressed this morning, we talked quite a bit. It seems that we have different slow and busy nights. And we worked out how we could help each other out, when the other person was busy.'
Just then, to Bao's left side, she heard the front door open of her bar open.
Bao turned to see who came any, and she was floored at whom she saw.
Bao thought, in disbelief, 'You got to be kidding me?...'
Bao then silently watched at several familiar people started to walk into the room.
Up front was Rock, and Revy. With Revy having her pistols holstered in her shoulder holsters.
Behind them that was Benny, Dutch, Janet, Kristina, Yukio, Rebecca, Sarah, and Molly.
Then, Bao saw Yolanda, Eda, Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer walked into the bar.
Next, were Roberta and Fabiola.
After that was Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto.
And finally, Aeryn and Violin brought up the rear.
All of them were wearing casual clothing. Mostly of the women were wearing shirts and pants. Though, a few had on long skirts, short skirts, shorts, or even some casual dresses.
Bao watched as they headed over to the tables. With them dividing their groups amongst the tables, as they sat down.
Bao thought, with surprised, “Except for those at the casino, and Hotel Moscow, the whole gang is here. Plus some others... And I do not know if Lee is right, or not, about them knowing who I am. But, either way, I still have to do my job. And I can always throw them out, if they wreck my bar again. Especially, the maids.'
Bao pulled out her pen and notepad, from her pockets, as she said to them, in english, “So, what does everyone want to have this evening?”
The other women in the room turned to Bao.
Bao them noticed their face, and she was slightly unnerved by the fact that many of them were smiling mischievously at her.
Dutch stated, “A Jack and cola.”
Benny said, “I will have a beer.”
Janet commented, “Same here.”
Sarah, “Brandy.”
Molly, “A cold beer.”
Kristina, “Whiskey. Wild Turkey. If you have it. If not, use your best judgment on the the brand.”
Rebecca, “A cold beer.”
Yukio, “Cola. Whatever you got that is cold.”
Yolanda, “Cognac.”
Eda, “Just some good red wine.”
Ranma, “Sake.”
Nodoka, “Liquor.”
Yurika, “A cold beer.”
Akira, “Orange daiquiri.”
Natsuru stated, “A brass monkey. With equal parts vodka, dark vodka, and orange juice.”
Mikoto, “A cold bottle of water.”
Lotton, “Cold coke cola. Can, or bottle. I don't care.”
Sawyer, “Iced lemonade.”
Shenhua, “Bottle of water.”
Aeryn, “A decent, cold beer.”
Violin, “Some lemonade.”
Roberta, “Tequila.”
Fabiola, “A cold beer.”
Rock, “Rum.”
Bao quickly wrote down on her notepad, all the orders, with the name of each order, she was given. After she finished, she noticed that one person had not stated what she wanted
Bao looked up from her notepad, and over at the woman in question. She asked, “And Revy. What will you be having to drink, tonight?”
Revy looked over at Bao. She smirked, as she said, “Oh. Come on. We have known each other long enough for you to know what spirits I prefer to drink, Bao.”
Bao's eyes slightly widened.
Revy, and everyone else present, but Bao, laughed at Bao's subtle, but noticeable reaction to her name being openly announced.
As the other women calmed down, Bao thought, 'I guess Lee was right. Not much I can do about it, now. But, I can still find out how they learned my real identity?...' She demanded, “Damn. How did you figure it out?”
Revy answered, “Rock figured it out.”
Rock commented, “It was not hard, when you think about it. This bar is like the Yellowflag. And your personality is not that different from back then. And all of us that were changed look like our younger sisters. Also, that dress you wore to the dance. I just happened to recognize your dress as a vietnamese Ao dai. By the way, you are a skilled dancer.”
Bao said, “Thank you, Rock. And I am not surprised that you, of all people, would figure it out.” She mentally added, 'Not even Lee figured it out on his... Err... Her own.”
Rock happily replied, “You're welcome.”
Dutch asked, “Also Bao, where did you come up with the name, Rats Nest?”
Bao use her pen to point at Fabiola, as she stated, “Back in Roanapur, right after Fabiola here trashed my bar, she call it a, Rats Nest. I got to thinking about it. And I liked the name. So, I decided if I was going to have another bar that I owned myself, I would name it, the Rats Nest.”
Dutch shrugged, as she said, “That makes sense.”
Benny commented, “Still, we are kind of annoyed you didn't tell us that Lee was the writer.”
Bao complained, “Come on... I found out Lee was the writer, in the morning. And the maids showed up that afternoon, and blew up my bar. Again. And after losing my bar, I was not in the mood to talk to anyone for the rest of the day.”
Benny conceded, “Okay. You have a point there.”
Revy said, “Still, payback is fun.”
Bao said, in a cautious tone of voice, “Careful Revy. I now have a girlfriend that can kick your ass.” She mentally reflected, 'Since I am not longer worried about you finding out who I am, I can now take you also, in a fight. But, I don't want any of your to know that.'
Revy asked, in disbelief, “Oh really. And who could stand up to the great Revy?”
Bao stated, “You have been Devil's Hotel bar, and met the bartender there?”
Revy commented, “Yea. Melanie is nice, for being new to the job. But, she is not as good a bartender as Melvin.”
Bao cracked a grin, as she said, “She is not new.”
Revy asked, “What do you mean?”
Bao remained silent, her smile got a bit wider.
The others thought about it for a few seconds. Sawyer was to realized what Bao was hinting at. She said, “Oh no. Melanie is Melvin.”
Benny asked, “But, why would anyone want to change Melvin into a woman?”
Janet inquired, “Besides that. Who could change someone into a girl, that we know?”
Shenhua commented, “The only two people with the resources who could. Those are Chang, or Balalaika.”
Benny questioned, again, “But, why?”
Dutch realized, as she stated, “Melvin, or Melanie, was Yurick... Oh crap. Melvin was a member of Hotel Moscow.” She turned to Revy, as she stated, “No wonder Melvin kicked your ass, Revy.”
Bao noticed that at one of the tables, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira giggled a little. Bao thought, 'Melanie told me this morning that you three kept her secret. And I am happy about that. I think I will give you three a free beer, each, sometime... Besides, after reading Lee's stories. I know your three. Along with your kids. Are some of the most decent people in this group, in front of me.'
Revy looked over at Dutch, as she conceded, “Yea. That does explain a lot.”
Bao mentioned, “And that was before she received the super-soldier serum. So, we both know she has got your number.”
Revy turned back to Bao, as she stated, “Okay. You have a point there. But, does she know who you are?”
Bao smirked, as she said, “Yep. And my love life has never been better.”
Revy replied, “Glad to hear it. Because we are planning on staying.”
Bao dropped her smirk, as she inquired, “What do you mean?”
It was Revy's turned to smirk, as she answered, “Now, that we know our favorite bartender is here, in this town. Along with a number of our friends setting up shop here, we decided to spend some more time in this town.”
Lotton stated, “We got our suites back at the Devil's Hotel. Or, in some cases, larger suites.”
Revy said, “Yes. And when we are not back at our homes, we are going to be here. And with the luxury of time dilation, for you, and everyone else in this reality, we will only be gone for a few minutes.” Revy continued, in an evil tone of voice, “We are planning on coming here almost every night.”
Bao flatly stated, “Hold it, Revy. I can't afford you, and the maids here, wrecking the bar regularly. I didn't tell anyone who I was, specifically to avoid this situation. Because I cannot afford your mayhem.”
Dutch stood up. She then walked up to the bartender, to where the two of them were across the counter from each other.
Dutch then pulled out from her green flack jacket, a large gold bar, and she set it on the counter, across from Bao. She casually stated, “I believe a few of these, every so often, will cover the bar tab, and any damages we may create while here.”
Bao looked down at the large gold bar on the bar counter in front of her. She quickly calmed down, as she looked back up at Dutch, as she cracked a grin. She calmly said, “With a regular payments like that. You can wreck by bar once a week. But, no more than once a week.”
Dutch returned Bao's smile, as she casually responded, “Glad to hear it.” She then turned, and walked back over to her seat. With her looking back at Bao, as she sat down.
With Dutch settled back in her seat, Bao requested, “Still, just don't hurt any of my other customers, nor myself.”
Revy stated, “Deal.”
Bao said, “Then, I think this is the start of a good relationship between all of us. Now, give me a few minutes to get your drinks ready.'
Bao saw the other women smile towards her, which held her relax some, as she did her job.
Bao turned around and began preparing everyone's drinks, as she reluctantly thought, 'Well, there goes my quiet life... It was nice while it lasted. Melanie is going to love hearing this. And I know what I am getting Pedro for Christmas. Antacid tablets. A years supply. At least. Because he is going to need them, with some many Roanapur badasses deciding to stay here.'
Bao soon filled her current customers' orders. With those in the room, including Bao, having a pleasant time, as they talked and drank.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 07: “The Beats and Skips of Time, Space, and Realities.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Lee's Reality. Date, around month and a half after Lee returned to her reality. Location, the penthouse apartment of Daiyu Palace Casino. Time, mid-morning.
In the last month and a week, things had settled down in the island city of De La Plata Podrido, while winter was in full swing.
It was eight forty-six AM, in the middle of the morning, on a sunny day.
At the moment, the three residents of the penthouse apartment were having breakfast, in the apartment dining room.
The breakfast they had ordered, from the kitchen on the first floor, had been brought and delivered to them, ten minutes, beforehand.
The table they were sitting at was a rectangular table. With River sitting at one far end, and Chang at the other. Lee sat in the middle, with River to her right, and Chang to her left.
Chang was dressed in his usual business attire. While River and Lee were dress casually.
River was wearing a red, short sleeved blouse, that matched her hair. And a brown long skirt.
Lee was wearing some new clothing that River had tailored for her, that was based on her Chinese amazon clothing. The clothing was of brightly colored shirt and pants. Though, due to her slightly enlarged stomach. Which, which given she was presently two months and a week pregnant, with twins, had increased by a few inches. She had to let her belt out a few notches. Still, her stomach was barely noticeable under her clothing.
This was due to Lee performing a daily exercise regiment in the employee gym downstairs, along with being careful on the amount of foods, and what type of foods, she ate.
The exercise schedule, and dietary lists, were designed by Simon, River's brother, and casino doctor, So, except for her stomach, Lee was able to maintain her figure.
Currently, the three adult lovers were having a discussion on various cultures.
After taking a sip from his glass of orange juice, and setting it back down. Chang commented, “Honestly Lee. From a cultural standpoint, we have very little in common.”
Lee responded, “Actually, that is not exactly true. While you are chinese, and I am a caucasian american. Thus, not blood related. Our native cultures are cousins.”
Chang requested, with a bit of interest in his voice, “This, I would like you to explain?”
Lee stated, “You are from Hong Kong, at a time when it was a British colony. While my culture was originally a set of British colonies that successfully broke away. The British influence still shows in both our cultures, and how we both look at the world.”
There was silence for a few seconds. Chang then responded, “You're right. I can see what you are talking about.”
Lee said, “Yes. We both admire success and wealth. And though not necessarily civility, we both attempt to keep a measure of integrity in what we do.”
Chang replied, “Yes. I guess we do have a few things in common.”
River just smiled, while she watched, and listened, as her two lovers realized they had more in common than they previously realized.
Lee commented, “And speaking of cultures, the Christmas and the New Years parties, a few days ago, were great.”
Chang replied, “Yes. It was fun inviting everyone to both those parties.”
River stated, “I am honestly surprised the two individuals that were the most fun at those two parties, while drunk, were Bao and Melanie.”
Lee pointed out, “Yes. When you have to take into account they are bartenders. They rarely get the chance to drink, and cut loose.”
River agreed, “Very true.”
Chang casually remarked, “I am just surprised you both stopped those two before they stripped themselves nude.”
Lee teased, “You always have to save something for the next party.”
Chang chuckled a little at Lee's comment.
Lee commented, “Speaking of cutting loose. I was wondering. I never wrote this answer. But, I wanted to know. Does fermented soybeans effect you both and the Serenity crew?”
Chang answered, “Yes. And it effects us in both forms. We found that out the hard way when. During a vacation. In the Cowboy Bebop Reality. When River and I decided to just have a quite holiday, for just the two of us, on Ganymede. The hotel staff brought us a Korean dish, with fermented soybean paste mixed in the dip for the appetizers... Let us just say it turned into an all night affair.”
Lee was polite enough to refrain from responding in a humorous fashion towards Chang's comments.
Meanwhile, River smiled, as she snicker. She mentioned, “At the time, I was the guy and Chang was the girl.”
Chang stated, “Though, we did have the sense to realize what was happening. And we were able to swap genders, only to find that it didn't turn off the effects, and we just continued like animals for several hours. While occasionally swapping genders. We were attracted to each other, no matter which gender we, were at the time.”
“This is one of the reasons I had fermented soybeans banned from the casino menus and food. We also warned the others that soybeans work in both forms. And while, I think the crew would find it funny. I believe Mal might kill me if that happened to him. And if the girls at the Devil's Hotel were involved, none of us would survive the aftermath.”
Lee calmly replied, “I fully agree.”
River said, “Still, it was fun. And no harm was done.”
Chang sheepishly admitted, “Though, neither of us were about to sit properly, nor stand straight, the day after.”
Lee found she could not help but giggle a little at Chang's comment.
River commented, “I still say it was worth it. And onto another matter. I would like to know, Lee. Speaking of gifts and fun, did you sent that gift, you were talking to me about, to your family?”
Lee forced herself to calm down, as she said, “Yes. I did.”
Chang questioned, “What gift?”
Lee answered, “I used a reality device to teleport in the earlier evening, on Christmas Eve, to the front doorstep of my family's home. I left a small package, at the doorstep. I knocked on the door, and teleported to a hiding place nearby. I then watch them pick up the package.”
“In the package was a letter from me, in english, stating I was fine. It is in my hand writing, so they know it is from me. Though, I didn't tell them what was going on. They don't have a clue I am now a woman now. Nor, pregnant with twins.”
“But, to help them, and allay their fears about me, I included two of the gold bars you two gave me. If they are intelligent, and follow my instructions, concerning how they use that gold, all their debts are now paid off. With some extra gold left for a rainy day.”
Chang complimented, “Those were nice gifts.”
Lee mentioned, “Thank you. I even gave some gifts to my amazon friends. Even though it was nowhere near Christmas for them, at the time I came to visit them.”
Chang asked, “And those gifts were?”
Lee stated, “I bought them some tasty, though not very expensive, bottles of wine.”
Chang complimented, “That is an intelligent choice. Sometimes the cheaper stuff. Like a Jack and cola. Are better than the expensive drinks.”
Lee replied, “I agree.”
River inquired, “So, are you ever going to formally visit your family?”
Lee stated, “Someday. After the heat dies down. Maybe two or three years from now. Local time. But, I do keep tabs on them, to make sure they are all doing okay. And they are. And I will give them updates and gifts, to let them know I am alive, and in good health. And before either of you ask, even as a younger woman, proving who I am to them will not be difficult, when compared to some of the stuff I pulled off on this island.”
Chang commented, “That is an understatement.”
River responded, “Those are nice plans. But, what if something happens to them in the meantime?”
Lee answered, “I use the reality device to time travel back, so I can either be able to save them, or at least see them and settle things before they die.”
River questioned, “But, what about a paradox?”
Lee answered, “I have learned there are two thinks about time travel. What actually happens. And what is perceived to have happened.”
Chang guessed, “Like the time travel movie, Millennium?”
Lee said, “Exactly.”
River commented, “I apologize. But, I have not seen that movie.”
Chang explained, “It is a good movie. We will show it to you, later. But, the jest of the movie is that time travelers from the future, go into the past, on airplanes that are about to crash. They then swap those that are suppose to die with fake bodies. And bring those people to the future. It seems to work well for the most part, until the time travelers accidentally leave their technology behind.”
River inquired, “Okay. But, what about the paradoxes we almost had?”
Lee stated, “Simple. We are trying to change the perception of time, and what happened. If we had just change what happened, while making it appear as if nothing happened, then the paradox would not happen.”
River complimented, “That is a brilliant, and insightful temporal loophole you have pointed out.”
Lee replied, “Coming from you. That is a compliment.”
River warmly smiled toward Lee, as she said, “Thank you, Lee.”
Chang commented, “By the way, I did watch that series that you mentioned to the others. The title was, Breaking Bad.”
Lee questioned, “Now, that is an interesting series. What did you think of it?”
Chang said, “I found it interesting.”
River commented, “I saw that series, as well. When it comes to evil, that series does it well.”
Chang rhetorically asked, “Who knew that you could take a chemistry teacher and turn him into such a terror?”
Lee countered, “Or, a take a salary man into a force respected by all?”
River spoke up, “Or, a writer that can play everyone like a harp?”
Lee let out a laugh.
Chang grinned, as he playfully complimented, “Touche, to both of you.”
River and Lee said, in unison, “Thank you.”
River stated, “On the matter of series, I must say. That climax and ending of the final episode of the Live Action Black Lagoon series was awesome.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It was.”
Chang commented, “I am glad I got a copy of that series, after I first heard about it.”
Lee said, “Yea. It was one of the good things from my little chase across Mars.
River replied, “Yes. It is.”
Lee commented, “But, that was a long series.”
River agreed, “I know. Twenty, twenty-six episode, seasons. With each episode being forty minutes long. Along with twelve full length movies. We had to do marathon sessions, at night. In either this living room here, or in the private theater, to watch it all. But, it was worth it.”
Lee said, “I am glad we decided to watch it in english.”
Chang stated, “I was fine with that. And considering that series was a counterpart to my own home reality, I found it an entertaining, and insightful viewing experience.”
River said, “Yes. Also, I am glad I watched the anime, and manga of your series, first. Before we watched the live action series. And I must say, you were cool in the anime, Chang.”
Chang smiled, as he responded, “Yes. I was. But, that was because I realized I was in a fiction world. And I was playing to the audience. Lee was right about that.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Chang mentioned, “I even knew about the Black Lagoon bikini and R magazines, along with Tex-Mex. Long before any of the others did. Except for River, whom read about those items, from my mind.”
River said, “I know better than to mention it to the others. It would lead to nothing but trouble.”
Chang stated, “Exactly. And like Akira and her family, there was no point in telling the others, because no good would come of it. Still, that was a good joke you pulled on the others, by mentioning Tex-Mex.”
Lee casually said, “It's a gift.”
Chang stated, “I know... Now, let us move onto some business dealing with the casino, itself. While the casino is doing fine. I have been thinking of what performances I can bring to this casino. Gambling provides a lot of the income, but performances can pad the revenue stream we receive. So, I would like opinions, on this, from both of you.”
Lee inquired, “Are we talking like stunt performances, outside? Like Arcee occasionally does, in her motorcycle mode? Or, story and singing performances, for the stage theater you built inside the casino?”
Chang answered, “I was talking about stage performances. The parking lot acts have been no problem. Actually, they have been easier, right now. During the winter. Which performances are drawn to the slightly warmer climate, than the cities up north. Like Vegas, and Reno. But, getting a stage performance for a play, or even just a singer to come, is difficult...” He voice took on a more sarcastic tone, as he continued, “No one seems to trust me.”
Lee replied, “Don't worry about it. They will come eventually.”
Chang agreed, “You are probably right. But, what will we do in the meantime?”
River suggested, “How about we put on a production ourselves?”
Lee complimented, “Good idea, River.”
Chang inquired, “What are you thinking of, River?”
River said, “Well, we need to do something that will be an attention getter. So, let us produce a stage performance that using songs and dancing.”
Everyone was quiet for a few seconds. Chang then said, “Yes... That could work... That could work well for us. Do you mind if I pick the play?”
River replied, “Go ahead.”
Lee had a bad feeling, as she questioned, “Dare I ask what play you have in mind?”
Chang's lips curled into a wicked grin, as he teased, “Oh dare. Dare. I say to you, dare.”
Lee pushed down her bad feelings, as she playfully responded, “Okay. I'll bite. What play?”
Chang maintained his smirk, as he casually answered, “The Rocky Horror Picture Show.”
Lee's jaw dropped. And her reactions made River and Chang lightly laugh for a few seconds.
As Lee collected herself, she asked, “Not to sound hypocritical. But, what about copyright licensing?”
Chang and River laughed, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Chang said, “We're criminals. So, what does it matter? Besides, what I am suggesting would be fun. Especially, if we get the girls at the Devil's Hotel, along with those here, at the casino. And even Eda, and Yolanda, on board.”
Lee hesitantly stated, “Chang, while admittedly, your sense of fun, no matter how twisted and sexual, is very enjoyable. But, for us, of all people to do this, to put on a stage version of the Rocky Horror Picture Show, is wrong on so many levels.”
Chang questioned, “So, I take it you do not like the movie?”
Lee casually admitted, “No. I didn't like movie for a couple of reasons. Including improper use of terminology. Do you really want to dress up, in drag, like Tim Curry did in that movie?”
Chang let out a laugh. He then responded, “Of course. I was a ham long before you wrote about my hamminess. Some of the stuff I could tell you about my youth would shock you to the core.”
Lee stated, “I am sure. I am a Tim Curry fan, as well. But, I never wanted to dress in that outfit, because I knew I would look bad in it... Well, I would look good in that outfit, now. At least for the next few months, before my pregnancy really starts to show.”
Lee put her right hand under the table, and against the slight bump on her stomach.
Chang inquired, “Why don't you like that movie? It is just really funny, campy movie.”
Lee turned to River, as she asked the other woman, “River, have you seen that movie?”
River cheeks blushed, as she answered, “Yes.”
Lee turned to Chang, as she answered, “Chang, to answer your question. There are two important reasons I don't like that movie. First, is for technical reasons. Tim Curry was brilliant as the villain. Some of the songs had a catchy tune. Time Warp Twist is a classic.”
“It is always fun to watch Meatloaf sing on screen. I know for a fact that song, Hot Patootie, Meatloaf sang in the movie, is hard to sing in sync, with the music, while successfully saying all the words...”
“While I have been a Meatloaf fan for a year. During the timeloop, when I was learning to sing, I became a big Meatloaf fan. A lot of his later songs touch my soul. Also, his songs are some of the few old school style rock songs that a man without a great melody style voice can sing without it sounding off. He singing chops comes from pure willpower and skill.'
'Still, some of the other casting just was not up to par. As in casting Susan Sarandon as the young, pure, virgin, did not work. And that made the movie difficult to watch on a few levels.”
Chang conceded, “You have a point there. And the other reasons you don't like the movie?”
Lee stated, in a serious tone of voice, “I will level with you, Chang. Since you let me into your home, and we have been sharing a bed together, for a few months. I should have told you this sure. The subject just didn't come up, until now. And I apologize for not telling you sooner. Though, keep this to yourself. I find the movie somewhat offensive because I am a male to female transsexual.”
Lee's bluntness caught Chang flatfooted, as he asked, “You are?... Okay, that explains a lot.”
Lee turned to River, as she thanked her, “Thank you River for keeping my secret.”
River smiled, as she replied, “No problem. We all have our secrets. And I try to keep the secrets of those I learn about from others.”
Chang looked over at River, as he asked, “You knew.”
Lee answered for River, “Yea. She knew. Remember, she's a telepath. And as a guy, she spent several months with me. She probably read all sorts of things from my mind.”
River commented, “By the way, Lee, thanks for not writing down some of your more... Interesting sexual fantasies.”
Lee responded, “There are some doors that should remain closed.”
Chang stated, “Lee, you must love being a fully functional woman, and a pregnant mother to be.”
Lee smiled, as she said, “More so than I probably should.” She dropped her smile, as she continued, “Listen, Chang and River, since we are all sleeping together, I will let you in on some of my berserk buttons dealing with such issues for me. Do not make fun of transsexuals, the transgendered, nor the intersex in front of me. Given my admitted insanity and creativity, and the time I spent training in both the timeloop and the Chinese Amazons, I am likely more dangerous and crazier than Revy. The only reason I backed down from Revy at their island was that she was tougher than I expected, and she had guns. While I did not.”
River commented, “Well, you are almost as crazy as I can be. And while, I could still beat you, I admit that you might have done better against Revy, if you were not upset, and then surprised that Revy took the full force of your punch, without moving.”
Lee replied, “Correct.”
Chang thought, 'Now, coming from River, that is a compliment. Best not to piss either of these girls off.'
River stated, “Thank you, Chang. You can be a pretty crazy chick yourself, when you want too. Hehehehe... Please continue, Lee.”
Lee went onto say, “Alright. While talking about the Rocky Horror Show is fine with me, do not mention to me about any other drag, nor transgendered based series, or movies, unless outright physical, or mental gender bending is addressed within the plot. Do not mention the movie, Priscilla Queen of the Desert, to me. Barring documentaries, should someone talk to me about any TV shows featuring drag queens, I may feel the desire to strangle that person. The question on if I actually do so depends on how much I like that person. And the only things I have to say about the worst of the TV and radio shock jock talk shows could be used against me in a court of law.”
Chang calmly commented, “That is all perfectly understandable.” He mentally reflected, 'We all have our little problems. And it is good than I now know what mental buttons to avoid with you, Lee.'
River stated, “Well Lee. There is one thing. You are not a transsexual anymore. Now, you are fully a woman. Not only that, you are pregnant, and you actually lived an entire childhood again, as a girl. And from what you told me, and what I read from your mind, it was a good childhood.”
Lee turned to River, as she stated, “River, I am a transsexual. And I will be one for the rest of my life. But, I got everything I wanted. So, I am not complaining.” Lee turned to Chang, “Now, you want my help with this production. I will help. But, I get a role in this play. Don't worry, it is not a lead. There is a bit part the only I, and one other I know, in the city, that can pull the part I am talking about.”
Chang requested, with interest evident in his voice, “Okay, Lee. What do you have in mind?”
Lee began, “First, we pay those that work on this, very well. Ourselves included.”
Chang replied, “Of course.”
Lee said, “And we need to work on the production side. Most people don't realize that what happens behind the scene is more important than the performance itself. I learned a lot about putting performances together in the time loop. That is how I got to become the life of the party.”
Chang stated, “Yes. Such experience might come in handy. Please continue.”
Lee commented, “Okay. The three of us are the producers.”
Chang said, “Of course.”
River rhetorically replied, “Why not?”
Lee continued, “And for behind the scenes, I would guess the Bebop and Serenity crews. They would likely enjoy working in that setting. I suggest Inara handled the clothing, makeup, and set design. And Faye has a talent for such things, as well. So, if she wants, Faye can assist. Or, if Inara declines, Faye is a good back up, on those matters.”
“Kaylee is a skilled engineer. With a little experience and know how, she can handle the backstage rigging. Jayne, Zoe, and Mal can take directions on backstage work.”
“Scheduling can be worked around for those four. I know Kaylee is not that busy as the casino mechanic. This won't be a problem for her And security can handle normal issue, as long as those three are kept up to date, every few hours.”
“Also, we can have others in the casino workforce help, on a voluntary basis. Jetta and Spike have other commitments. Such as being Pit Boss. And for Spike, taking care of Julia. But, they can assist if they want. Unfortunately, Simon is still our doctor, in the casino. So, he will not have that much time to get involved.”
River inquired, “It is okay. My brother will understand. So, who do you have in mind to direct?”
Lee answered, “I am thinking of calling Lori, Ed, Stan, and Lewis to handle the directing. I believe they will all say, yes.”
River giggled, She then said, “With Ed and Bob... I mean Lori, directing, this should be a fun train wreck to watch.”
Lee winked at River, as she commented, “Actually, trains wrecks. We have enough people for two full casts and crew. So, we can show these back to back plays. Twice a day. And make some money, without wearing everyone out. If we are going to cross this line, then let us do it twice.”
Chang complimented, “Nice thinking. Keep going. You know all of us, so I want to know who you would pick for the roles?”
Lee admitted, “With me being pregnant I would be a hypocrite if I didn't offer the other girls we know that are pregnant roles, as well. Still, B and Balalaika are too far along to make it workable right now. And I get the feeling that both of them are not the type to want a role in a play such as this. Though, pregnant, or not, I would pay money to see both of them in the Doctor Furter outfit. The sheer audacity of them in such a getup would be worth the price of admission, alone.”
Chang and River both laughed, for several seconds, from Lee's comment.
As they calmed down, Chang stated, “No arguments there.”
River begged, “Lee, continue with your insanity.” She licked her lips, as she said, “It's turning me on.”
Lee turned to River, as she commented, “We will do that later, River.” Lee turned to Chang, while she said, “I suggest we sent free ticket passes, with free accommodations and food to Balalaika, B, the other members of Hotel Moscow, Roberta, Fabiola, Garcia. Along, with opening tickets for Melanie and Bao. Except for the last two, none of them have lodgings here. And I think they would hate to not be invited to these epic train wrecks of comedy.”
Chang nodded twice, as he agreed, “Good idea. And giving them all a good a laugh is a wise idea.”
Lee said, “In all honesty, Aeryn would likely not want to be part of the play itself. But, we can offer her a role, or some backstage job, if she wants. Otherwise, we will just give her a free ticket pass, as well. Now, onto the main casts.”
“The only two people I know of with the personalities, and general all around niceness that could play Janet Weiss, the heroine, are respectively Rock and Benny.”
Chang asked, “But, who would play Brad Majors against them? I would think we would be casting the men as men, and the women as women in these plays? And either Rock and Benny playing Brad with some instant spring of drowned man.”
Lee commented, “Revy and Janet will be play Brad, towards their respective lovers.”
Chang pointed, “Though, I don't think Revy would mind playing as a man, I think Janet would decline.”
Lee smirked towards Chang in a manner he had seen Rock do when he was being devious. Lee stated, “That is the thing. If we are going to make this work. We are going to have to come from the, crazy enough to work, angle. To that end, we do an all female cast, even the male roles. Even thought some of the women, such as myself, you, and the others, were originally men.”
Chang rugged his chin, with his right hand, as he wondered out loud, “A drag queen stage performance, from an all female cast, with some of the cast use to be men. With some of those previous men, and a few of those originally women, also pregnant. You are right. That is crazy enough to work. So, who will be playing Doctor Furter?”
Lee stated, “In the first cast, you of course, as a woman. You already stated you want the role.”
Chang agreed, “Yes. I do. That love scene between me and Revy in the play would be interesting. Especially as girls.”
River openly chirped at Chang's thoughts, “Nice fantasizing, Chang. Please continue.”
Chang replied, “Thanks, River. So, who would you cast as Doctor Furter, in the second cast?”
Lee answered, “Dutch. She would do it for just shits and giggles.”
Chang replied, “You got that right. And it is no secret that Dutch and Janet have been intimate with each other, and Benny, in a threesome. So, the love scene would not be a problem. Who is next?”
Lee said, “For the narrators. I have some ideas. I suggest for the first cast, we ask Annie for the role as narrator. For the second cast, we invite Arcee as the narrator. She can do it off stage, and it will allow her to be a part of this without revealing herself to the public.”
River complimented, “That is nice of you.”
Lee commented, “I know. Also, if Arcee wants to do so. She can play the motorbike that Eddie roles in on. If she gets tired of doing so, we can substitute other motorbikes.”
Chang said, “That is a good idea, as well. On that point, who is going to play Eddie? It is not that big a role. Though, it requires some really good singing skills.”
Lee answered, “I am. I want to be part of the first cast as Eddie. In the time loop, I spent around two years, on and off again learning how to sing. Including learning to sing the song, Hot Patootie, in sync, in tune, and on key. Along with my knowledge, language, and combat abilities, I still retain my musical and art skills. I can play the instruments I learned fairly well. And read sheet music. As I said, I am the only one of two people I know, in the city that can pull off that talent.”
Chang commented, “You have a point there. The role is yours. I guess Sawyer is being cast as the second Eddie?”
Lee pointed out, “No. Sawyer will not get that role. Sawyer can sing. She can sing very well. She is the one who taught me the most about singing, and dancing. But, this song requires real understanding of classic rock tempo that she does not likely have good experience with. I had to teach myself how to sing that song. Don't worry, I have a role for Sawyer, that she will like.”
“The person I have in mind for Eddie, in the second cast, is Ranma. Ranma was a rock and roll singer in the band Koko, in my stories. She still has those skills. And Ranma is still arrogant enough to want to show off at anything she can do well. Singing is one of those skills. And she really gets to show her singing skills off. The role as Eddie, singing, Hot Patootie, would be just too much a challenge for her not to accept.”
Chang responded, “Okay. But, I don't understand where you originally came up with her singer from? And a female rock singer, at that?”
Lee said, “Oh, that was simple. I just treated those Ranma OVA opening and ending songs with Ranma and her for female friends singing together, in a band, as canon for right after their series end. Once I did that, the logical conclusions to the plot and resolutions for those characters tied up well.”
Chang commented, “Oh yea. I remember that in your stories.”
Lee replied, “Yes. From what I recall, that is how and why I set up that plot line that way.”
River stated, “This is why I like you, Lee. You are so creative in your insanity.”
Lee said, “Thank you. And I am just getting started. The next role will be the Criminologist. In the first cast, I think we should offer the role to Sawyer. In the second cast, I suggest Shenhua. They would likely get a kick out of playing cops for once. For Doctor Scott, in the first cast I suggest Lotton. In the second cast, the role of Doctor Scott would be Violin.”
“Lotton, I know will go for the role. Given Violin has been a fan of ham, in literally two lifetimes, she will want to be a part of this. And given Doctor Scott is not one of the main characters, there is not much work for them. And most of Doctor Scott's lines very hammy, the role would be right up Lotton and Violin sense of tastes.”
Chang stated, “I agree. Lotton playing against me would be fun. And seeing Dutch and Violin trade hammy lines with each other would be worth watching. Sawyer and Shenhua would probably get a kick out of playing the police for once. What about Riff Raff and Magenta?”
Lee answered, “For the first cast, we offer the roles of Riff Raff and Magenta to Eda and Yolanda. They can decide which role plays they want to play. Hell, as far as I am concerned, they can swap roles every other performance.”
Chang pointed out, “Okay. But, why would they want the roles in the first place?”
Lee playfully answered, “Because, you will be playing Doctor Furter in the first cast, and those two get to pretend to kill you on stage. Night after night.”
River let out a laugh.
Chang could not help but smile, as he got Lee's joke. He stated, “Good point. We will just make sure they are no really armed at the time. And the second cast?”
Lee responded, “Akira and Natsuru. Same deal. They can pick which one they want to play. And even take turns. They are both fans of hamminess. Also, Lotton, Shenhua, Akira, Natsuru, Eda, Yolanda, Sawyer, and Violin will train as stand ins for the other roles, in case one of the others cannot fill their role. We will also have the teenagers work a stand in, in case they want to preform as well. As long as they can do a good job, they can all take turns and switch different roles.”
River commented, “That will actually keep things fresh.”
Lee said, “That is true. We will work out which one will practice which role as a stand in. So, there is no serious overlapping.”
Chang inquired, “And what about the teenage girls. When they are not standing in, as a substitute?”
Lee answered, “We are going to need some extras, either way. For this place. So, the teenage girls can be divided up and become the dancing extras for the performances for both casts. Eight teenagers means four dancers per cast. Though, the teenagers can decide which of them wants to play Columbia. Or, they can take turns, like all the other roles.”
“Now, barring financial matters. Including, advertisements. Along, with obtaining stage props and costumes. Which I know a good costume store in town. That should do it for the production side. Now, all that is needed is for the roles and staff to be filled. With rehearsals and work on the backstage being schedules and started.”
River said, “Sounds like a solid plan.”
Chang stated, “I agree. The question is who is going to ask who, to convince them to help?”
Lee inquired, “Well, I am sure a good pay check will help.”
Chang agreed, “True.”
Lee commented, “As long as they are paid well, and the idea is pitched, by the right person, in the right way, in the right setting, they will likely agree to the jobs.”
River asked, “So, who is going to ask who?”
Lee answered, “I will handle the Lowe family. They like me. Also, I will ask Ranma. Akira, Natsuru, Violin, Aeryn, Bao, and Melanie. River, you can handle the Serenity crew. Chang, you can handle the Bebop crew, Balalaika, B, Hotel Moscow, the Lovelace household, and the Lagoon parents. Once we get them all on board, we will ask their kids. At that point, it should almost all fall into place.”
“Also Chang, you are good with handling the money and promotion. So, no problem there.”
Chang complimented, “Nice planning. Now, we just have to organize.”
River suggested, “I like it. We need to take the rest of the day to plan this. Then, once we have it all worked out, tomorrow, or the day after, we will start inviting people.”
Chang agreed, “Good idea, River.”
Lee responded, “I am with you on that, River.”
The three of them then spent the rest of their breakfast making plans for throwing these crazy stage performances. And over the coarse of the day, during Chang's breaks. The three lovers work on the details of their planning. By the time evening rolled around, they had finished their plan. And they were ready to implement their plan, the next morning.
(_)
The next day, Chang, River, and Lee implemented their plan. They invited, both for the cast, crew, and select viewers, for the state play
And Lee has been correct, everyone that was offered a job, took it. Even Aeryn agreed to help back stage. Save for Jetta and Spike, due to other commitments. But, they did later watch the shows.
To everyone's surprised Inara and Faye were really able to help with make up and costumes, with the actors enjoying their roles. Arcee was especially pleased to be cast as one of the narrators, and as the motorcycle in the to showings.
The eight teenage adults were able to divide themselves up to which of them were the dancers during the first showing, and which were dancers for the second showing. They decided to take turns, per showing, on who would play, Columbia.
For the first showing, Sarah, Molly, Yukio, Rebecca would play the dancers.
For the second showing, Kristina, Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto would play the dancers.
The Lowe family were good directors, along with the Lowe siblings helping Kaylee, Male, Zoe, and Jayne with the backstage rigging and set designs.
Materials for the play were not head to come by, and the agreed salary for the cast and crew was more than generous.
And after five days of rehearsals, everyone was ready.
Opening night was exactly one week, to the day, that Chang, River, and Lee sent out the invites.
Those invited, attended. And everyone had a good time.
The first showing was six PM, and the second showing nine PM. Both showings were standing room only.
Both showings went off without a hitch, and each performance received standing ovations, after the end of each show.
Due to advertising, and positive word of mouth, along with the initial showings, the subsequent showings were big sellers for the casino.
And after the few days, the cast start swapping the roles, with those they practices as stand in substitutes. Including, the teenage adults getting to play the leads a few times.
And due to their diligence in practicing, being not problems with the cast pulling this off.
With these swaps enticing those that came for the play, to come again, to see how the cast to do it, when they changed up roles. And the customers are impressed with the performances they saw, on their second viewing in the stage theater in the casino.
All in all, Chang's project was a success.
The shows ran twice a day, for around two weeks, before the last curtain call. And given the performances netted the casino a nice profit, along with the generous payments for the actors and crew, Chang included bonuses for those involved.
And everyone that participated agreed they would have to do this again, some time in the future.
(_)
The day after the final curtain call of the last show, it was noon in the dining room of the casino penthouse apartment. Chang, River, and Lee, were finishing lunch.
The three were dressed in their usual clothing, and they had been having a wonderful conversation, ranging a wide variety of topics.
Finally, River said, in a calm, sober tone of voice, “Lee, there is something we need to talk to you about.”
Lee realized by River's tone of voice meant that what she had to say was important.
Lee turned to River, as she asked, “What is it, River?
River carefully said, “First, the only reason we did not tell you sooner, and we waited to almost the last moment, was that it might have disrupted your performances on stage.”
Lee replied, “Okay. So, what is so important?”
River stated, “Well, our regular Lagoon bikini party is coming up. And Revy and her family stated that your invitation is mandatory. And, like the rest of us, you have to wear a two piece bikini when you attend.”
Lee could not believe what she heard, as she flatly responded, “Huh?”
Chang stated, “Don't play dumb, Lee. You must have known that the next time the Lagoon members had a such a party, that you would be made to attend.”
Lee turned to Chang, as she questioned, “And why didn't they tell me personally?”
River answered, “The others decided that it would be best if we were the ones that told you. And we were able to convince Revy not to parade you around everyone, when we get there.”
Lee turned to River, as she thought over what River said for a few seconds. She then replied, “Thank you. That would have made things worse.”
River said, “No problem. And the parties they hold after this will be voluntary for you to come. And I hope you do. We have fun at them. And the activities and games are quite entertaining. You were quite imaginative when you came up with the ideas for those parties.”
Chang commented, “That is the truth.”
Lee said, “Perhaps I will return.” She then looked down at herself, at her three month pregnant stomach, which was presently big enough to show under her tucked in shirt. She looked back up, as she continued, “But, with this stomach. I look to fat to wear a bikini.”
Chang pointed out, “Good one. But, we both know others can pulled it of. Such as Birdy.”
Lee groaned, as she remembers what she wrote. She conceded, “I am starting to regret writing those scenes, among the long list of other scenes.”
River mentioned, “Don't be regretful about including Birdy in those parties, when she was pregnant. And I can think of six others that will be there, whom are further along than you. So, you can do it, too.”
Lee said, in a defeated tone of voice, “Fine. Speaking of which, how many of those attending know who I am? For example, does Birdy know about me?”
River shrugged, as she answered, “Only those that are already informed. I doubt Birdy knows. And even if she did, she likely would not care.”
Lee replied, “I hope your right.”
River pointed out, “I have been right, so far. And when it comes to those at the party that don't know about you. You will be introduced as my and Chang's lover. And those in the loop know better than to talk about the matter.”
Lee asked, “Okay. Now, when are we going? You said it was short notice. So, I am guessing it is in a day, or two.”
River stated, “For us. We leave tomorrow. We will buy your clothing today. And we will leave in the morning. Around the time the rest of those at the hotel, that are invited, will be leaving. For everyone else, we will only be gone five minutes. For us, it will be around a week.”
“Ranma told me that those at the Devil's Hotel will leave around that time, as well. Though, they are going to arrive a day before us, so they can help set up for the party.”
“And for the reality we are going to. It will be a week after we left.”
Lee replied, “Nice. Now, where will I be staying?”
Chang spoke up, “In the room River and I stay in. We have a large king sized bed. Like the guestroom that Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma use.”
Lee commented, “That is big enough for the three of us. I wonder. Should we invite Bao and Melanie?”
River answered, “I already asked them. They declined. They don't want everyone to know who they are, nor where they are living.”
Lee stated, “That is wise of them.”
River said, “I agree. Those two prefer their privacy. And they seem to have turned out to be a cute couple.”
Lee commented, “I know. The last time I talked to them, they told me that Melanie moved in with Bao, at Bao's home.”
River replied, “That's nice.”
Lee asked, “I agree. So, when are we going shopping for my bikinis?”
River responded, “After lunch. Along with the bikinis for you. We will also buy some one piece swimsuits. I think reddish brown looks good on you.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That skirt and jacket you picked out, is one of the best outfits I have, that looks good on me.”
River gave Lee a warm smile, as she stated, in a happy tone of voice, “Thank you. And look on the bright side. With the heated pools. Including in the one nearby, and downstairs, in back. You can you use your swimwear all year round.”
Lee cracked a grin, as she agreed, “You are right about that.”
River commented, “Thanks. And when you grown out of them, in a few months. And we will get you some more, when we shop for you next set of clothes. And when you drop our kids, we will replace those, as well.”
Lee said, “I look forward to it.”
River commented, “Of course. By then, we will have to get baby clothing for the children.”
Lee agreed, “Absolutely.”
Chang stated, “I hope you both have a good time shopping trip.”
Lee teased, “Why don't you come with us, as a woman?”
Chang casually answered, “I don't have the time. And I already have my clothing on hand. Also, before you ask. I find using reality devices in such a way, to be in two places at once, for just a simple shopping trip, to be undignified.”
Lee responded, “I agree. We will just show you my new outfits, later.”
Chang gave both River and Lee a lecherous grin, as he said, “We will have an entire week for you to do so.”
The three of them then finished their lunch.
Right after lunch, Chang went back to work, as River took Lee shopping for some bikinis, and other types of women's swimsuits. Which as an interesting experience for the two lovers, given the employees at the clothing stores, on the island, looked at them funny, when they ask for swimsuits in the middle of winter.
Though, they did find what they wanted, in Lee's sizes. And after they paid for the items, they returned to the casino penthouse with them, with no trouble at all.
(_)
The next morning, the three of them packed their luggage. The morning, when the three of them woke up, Chang was already a woman, from the activities the three women that evening. And Chang decided, that since they were heading to the bikini party that morning. She would not change back to male before they left.
With the three lovers getting cleaned up and ready to face the day, while all female.
The three of them were dressed normally, which was slightly humorous, given Chang was wearing her male clothing in her smaller female form. Though, River and Lee refrained from saying anything about it.
Each of them had a suitcase in one of their hands, as they stood close together.
With a suitcase handle in her left hand, in River's right hand, she used her reality device to take all three of them there. Though, Chang and Lee had spare reality devices, in case they needed them.
When they arrived, Lee saw from the angle of the sun in the sky, that is was around noon on Lagoon Island. And even though it was a sunny day, the temperature was just warm enough to offset the sea breeze, to make it comfortable for those barely wearing anything at all.
The three had teleported with in front of Lagoon Mansion, in the field.
Lee looked around and she saw several guests, wearing their usual clothing, had just arrived as well.
Lee then looked behind her, and in the grassy field, she saw further in the field, tables with food, drinks, plates, glasses, utensils, and napkins, on them. Along with tabled, with chairs for those that wish to see.
Lee looked back in front of the building, as she thought, 'This is just like what I wrote in my stories..”
River turned to Lee, as she stated, “Yes. It is. And it is going to be so much fun.”
Lee thought, 'I hope so.'
River said, “Good. Now, let's get inside, unpack, and get changed.”
Chang agreed, “Good idea.”
The three of them headed inside the home, through the open, front double-doors, along with several other guests, as they all went inside, to their assigned rooms.
(_)
A few hours later, the Lagoon bikini party was in full swing, on the grassy field, as Lee, River and Chang walked through the crowds of women and girls, that were in swimsuits.
The young children wore mostly one pieces, while the adult women wore bikini. A few of the adult women either had their tops off, or were completely nude. Some of the women were literally only wearing sunglasses and suntan lotion.
Lee, River, and a female Chang, were no exceptions.
Lee wore a modest bikini that River had picked out for her the previous day. The bikini was a reddish-brown two piece, with dark and red small leaf patterns on both pieces.
Though, due to wearing so little, the small pouch on Lee's stomach showed, much to her displeasure, for all to see.
River's bikini was a checkered, square pattern of royal blue and sky blue.
And Chang wore a skimpy golden yellow bikini, with black stripes. She also had on her sunglasses.
As they continued through the crowd, Lee saw groups of women both close to her, and in the distance. Also, she heard soft rock music playing from some speakers that were stationed under some nearby food tables. The volume was just loud enough to hear.
Still, wide through waded through the groups of women, River and Chang could tell that Lee was uncomfortable, as they walked to Lee's sides, to help her calm her nerves.
River was to Lee's right, Chang to her left.
River could sense how nervous Lee was. She stated, “Relax Lee. You will be fine.”
Lee admitted, “I will be honest. I have never being around so many people, while having so little clothing on.”
Chang commented, “You get use to it.”
Lee pointed out, “Let's be honest, Chang. You have always been a bit of exhibitionist.”
Chang shrugged, as she admitted, “True. And you have to be, to remain sane in situations like this.”
Lee rolled her eyes for a seconds. She then looked back in front of her, as she conceded, “You may have a point there.”
Just then, Lee noticed the three of them were walking towards two people.
While one of the two women was hard to see through the gaps in the crowd, the other towered over everyone else.
As they passed by the last two groups between the two individuals, and the three of them, River, Lee, and Chang, came to a stop, about six feet from Annie and Arcee, whom was in robot mode.
Annie wear a simple white bikini that cover her private areas, very well.
Annie and Arcee had been talking to each other
As the two woman turn to face the three newcomers, Arcee said, “Hello.”
Annie stated, “Nice to see you three.”
River replied, “Hi guys.”
Chang commented, “It is nice to see you too.”
Lee said, “It is good to see you both, as well.”
Annie stated, “I am surprised that you actually came, Lee.”
Lee calmly said, “I was not give much choice on the matter.”
River and Chang both gave mischievous grins.
Annie responded, “Well, don't worry. Anyone that gives you trouble will have to answer to us.”
Arcee calmly said, “Yes. They will.”
Lee kindly said, “Thank you, ladies.”
Arcee commented, “Also, it is good to see that both you and your children are doing fine.”
Annie said, “Yes. I sense everything is fine.”
Lee complimented, “Between you two, and Simon, I have nothing to worry about, when is comes to the my health, and the health of my children.”
Annie and Arcee giggled a little from Lee's comment, for a few seconds.
Lee asked, “By the way, where is Simon, and the others from the casino?”
Chang answered, “Mal stated they were first going to the pool and tennis court, in the back of the mansion.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as she questioned, with slight disbelief in her voice, “The pool I can understand. But, tennis in this attire?”
River joked, “Well, they do wear shoes on the court. And you got to admit, it would definitely be an eye full.”
The other giggled a little at River's joke.
Arcee then said, “Thanks again for including us in that play. It was fun.”
Annie smiled towards River, Lee, and Chang.”
Chang said, “No problem, girls.”
River mentioned, “We talked about doing something similar, sometime in the future.”
Annie requested, in a happy tone of voice, “Let us know if you decide to do something like that again.”
River said, “We will.”
Lee then heard to her side, a woman's voice say, in a humorous tone, “We heard you were pregnant, Lee.”
Lee, and the others, turned to see Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua, standing about six feet from them.
The others could see they were in bikini, and that by the sizes of their stomachs, they were at least a month further along in pregnancies than Lee was.
Lotton had a smile on her lips, as she continued, “Welcome to the club.”
Lee casually replied, “Thank you.”
Shenhua asked, “So how far along are you?”
Lee answered, “Three months. And I was about to ask you three the same question.”
Sawyer said, “We are all four and a half months along...” She looked down at her own stomach. She then looked back up at the others, as her voice turned more chirped, “And loving every minute of it.”
Shenhua stated, “I wouldn't go that far.”
Lotton shrugged, as she said, “I am just okay with the situation.”
Lee happily inquired, “I am happy you are enjoying the experience. So, any problems with your pregnancies?”
Lotton and Sawyer shook their heads a couple of times, while Shenhua answered, “Barring the obvious. No.”
Lee commented, “Well, I am not looking forward to any back pains, as my pregnancy progresses.” She mentally added, 'Though, my magic ring will likely protect me from that.'
River quietly said, “You are likely right, Lee.”
Lee shrugged in River's direction.
Sawyer mentioned, “We talked to Revy and the others about that. They had no such problems. So, I guess that super-soldier serum has it perks.”
Chang agreed, “Yes. It clearly does.”
Sawyer said, “Well, we are going to get something to eat. Eating now for two now, times three.”
Everyone giggled a little at Sawyer's comment.
As they calmed down, Lotton mentioned, “And at least the morning sickness is gone and we can enjoy food. How about you, Lee?”
Lee answered, “Pretty much gone. Any weird food craving, for you guys, yet?”
Lotton joked, “Given what some of these two eat, it can be hard to tell.”
Lee let out a laugh. She then replied, “I understand.”
Lotton said, “Anyway, have a great day.”
Lee commented, “You too.”
Chang said, “Have a pleasant day.”
River stated, “We will talk later.”
Annie mentioned, “I am going to head over, and get something to eat, as well.”
Arcee shrugged, as she said, “I might as well join you.”
Sawyer offered, “We could use the company.”
Arcee warmly smiled in the direction of Sawyer, Lotton, and Shenhua.
Annie replied, “Thank you.”
Lotton, Sawyer, Shenhua, Annie, and Arcee turned, and walked over to a nearby food table.
Meanwhile, just as the Lee, River, and Chang, were about to continue on their way. From behind them, Lee heard a very familiar russian voice said, “Well, look who decided to join us.”
Lee, River, and Chang, turned around to see Balalaika and B standing a mere six feet from them. And their very pregnant stomachs showing.
B had a calm expression to her face, while Balalaika had an amused expression on her face.
Balalaika stated, “I am glad to see that you had the courage to show up, Lee.”
Lee sarcastically said, “I had too. I rarely get invited too parties.”
River and Chang stifled their giggles.
Balalaika cracked a grin at Lee's comment.
Lee asked, “So, how are you both doing?
B answered for her love, “Fine. You?”
Lee replied, “I'm doing okay.”
Balalaika stated, in a slightly amused tone of voice, “Now, to the obvious matter at hand. Or, should I say stomach? When I heard you were pregnant, Lee. I did find it somewhat poetic, and humorous. I mean, at least we planned our pregnancies.”
Lee casually stated, “This one was planned. Just not by me.”
River and Chang looked away from the two russians.
Balalaika noticed this. She turned back to Lee, as she said, in an even tone of voice, “That I had already surmised. The fact you are with these two can either mean you are very forgiving. Or, you know better than to jeopardize your good fortune.”
Lee admitted, “A bit of both, actually.”
Lee then looked over at B, with a stern look.
B sighed, as she thought, 'I see Lee has caught onto some of the more subtle tactics that women use to get their way.' B then noticed River looking at her, with a small grin on her lips. B continued her thoughts, 'And of course, you're reading my mind. Well, I might as well the truth, to ease everyone's mood, a bit.'
B stated, “Just be happy she is in a good mood.”
Lee flatly asked, “Any mood swing problems?”
B answered, “Fortunately, none, for either of us. But, we have to piss every few hours. Though, that is to be expected.”
Lee replied, “Of course.”
Balalaika said, “You know, Lee. If you were not in the same position as us. I might take offense to your question.”
Lee looked over at Balalaika, as she said, “I am just gauging what I need to expect, when I reach that point you are at.”
Balalaika replied, “Fair enough.”
Chang casually asked, “By the way, how far along are you two. Time dilation, between realities can make it difficult to tell.”
B answered, “Around seven months.”
Balalaika teased, “You really show try this, Chang. It is an... Interesting experience.”
Chang was caught speechless by Balalaika suggestion, as River commented, “We have talked about it. But, we decided to wait and see how out my and Lee's twins turn out.”
Balalaika agreed, “That would likely be a good idea. Now, as much as I would like to tease poor Lee for hours on end...”
Lee visibly relaxed.
Balalaika continued, “Though, we will have plenty of time for that in the coming days.”
Lee stiffened, much to the amusement of Balalaika.
Balalaika noticed Lee's demeanor, as she went onto say, “But, B and I would like to talk to Chang, in private, on a few matters.”
Chang looked over at River, than to Lee. She then turned back to look at the two russians, as she stated, “As long as it is fine with River and Lee.”
River said, “Go ahead. We will be fine.”
Lee commented, “We will meet back up with each other, later.”
Chang said, “Okay. Let's go talk.”
Lee and River watched as Chang, B, and Balalaika walked away from them, and the crowd, as they headed for the shore to the bay of the island.
The three others passed through the crowd, and they were soon out of sight from River and Lee's gazes.
River turned to Lee, as she suggested, “Let's walk this way.”
Lee looked over at River, as she replied, “Okay. Lead the way.”
River turned to her right, in another direction, as she lead Lee through the crowd of women.
Less than a minute later worth of walking, Lee and River walked through the crowd, until they saw Aeryn and Violin standing right in front of them.
Lee also noticed Violin's rounded stomach, due to her pregnancy.
Violin smiled at River and Lee, as she welcomed them, in a slightly excited tone of voice, “Hi River. Hi Lee.”
River said, “Hi Guys.”
Lee replied, “Hello Violin. Hello Aeryn.”
Lee noticed Aeryn look down at Lee's slightly enlarged stomach.
Aeryn then looked back up at Lee's face, with a mischievous smile on her lips.
She said, “Well Lee, isn't this a surprise.”
Violin commented, “Why I have seen you at the stage rehearsals and performances, I really have had a chance to talk to you, in a while. And it seems that pregnancy agrees with you, Lee.”
Lee teased, “You are one to talk. And you are right, we have had a chance to talk. So, how far along are you?”
Violin answered, “Five and a half months. And you?”
Lee happily replied, “Three months.”
Violin questioned, “Can you feel you babies moved, yet.”
Lee replied, “No. How is it with you?”
Violin flatly commented, “Feeling kicks from the inside can get old real fast.”
Lee giggled at little at Violin's comment.
Aeryn calmly stated, “This is something I do not understand about human women.” She mentally added, 'And even those women that use to be men.'
Aeryn noticed River snort. She ignored River, as she verbally continued, “How you can be happy about being incapacitated for such an extended period of time?”
Lee responded, “I would believe saying we are incapacitated is going a bit far. I mean, look at how many people you killed, while you went through labor and birth.”
Aeryn rolled her eyes, as Violin and River giggled a little.
Aeryn then looked back at Lee, while Violin and River calmed down.
Violin turned to Aeryn as she commented, “She's right, dear.” She then turned back to look at Lee and River.
Lee stated, “It is more of a culture issue, than anything else. And if you don't count the stasis, I believe you spent most of your active pregnancy, while you carried Little D, in labor. You really didn't have the time to enjoy your pregnancy.”
Aeryn silently shrugged, in response to Lee's comment.
Lee continued, “And there are some benefits to being pregnant. The time a mother is pregnant with her child, is also a time she can emotionally bond with her child. Even before the child is born. I am sure River will confirm this.”
River looked over at Lee. She looked back over at Aeryn, and Violin, she as commented, “From the thoughts I have read from other mothers, she is right.”
Aeryn carefully said, “I will consider what you have to say.”
Violin then spotted two people in the crowd, about twenty feet away, to her and Aeryn's left, and Lee and River's right. She continued to look in that direction, as she said, “Hey, is that Eda and Yolanda over there?”
Aeryn, Lee, and River turned to look in the direction that Violin was looking.
Lee calmly said, “Yes. That is them.”
Violin suggested, “Let's go say, hi, to them.”
River agreed, “Good idea.”
Aeryn dispassionately said, “We might as well.”
Lee requested, “Say hi to them, for me.”
River turned to Lee, as she asked, “You are not coming with us?”
Lee looked over at River, as she answered, “No. I am going to see who else is here.”
River asked, concern in her tone of voice, “Are you sure you will be okay, while alone?”
Lee thought, 'I just need to do some thinking. But, I hope you have fun.' She stated, “I am a big girl, now. I can take care of myself.”
Lee saw River smile at her comment. She said, “Have fun.”
Lee replied, “You too.”
As the River, Aeryn, and Violin headed towards Eda and Yolanda, Lee turned in a different direction, as she slowly made her way through the crowd of women.
A minute later, of making her way through the crowds, she felt a light slap hit her right butt cheek.
While the touch was not painful, it did surprise, Lee.
Lee immediately came stop, as she thought, 'Someone just copped a feel from me. I do not know whether to be annoyed? Or flattered? Maybe both? Now, to find out who did it?'
Lee turned around, to her right, to to see Lowe family, along tanned skin woman, with short green hair, looking at her.
Given the nature of the party, along with Lori, Ed, and the green haired woman, Lewis and Stan were women, as well.
Lee looked at the Lowe family's, and their friend, on how beautiful they were in their bikinis. She thought, with admiration, 'Damn. I do good work.'
Lee casually asked, “So, which one of you did it?”
Stan smirked, as she admitted, “Guilty as charged.”
Lee calmly said, “I am not upset. But, don't do it again.”
Stan replied, “Fine.”
Ed commented, “Be happy, Stan. That is likely the most positive response you will ever get from doing something like that to another person.”
Stan quietly replied, “Yes, mother.”
Lee said, “I am surprised you haven't had that happen to you.”
Stan replied, “Well, there was a couple of times as a waitress.”
Lewis cracked a grin, as she stated, “And then, the cook stepped in and told the person in question, how much of a mistake it was, in doing so.”
Stan said, “It happened to both of us. And we took turns in both roles.”
Lee teased, “So, which of one of you has the big brother instinct, when the other one is a girl?”
Lewis and Stan said, in unison, “I do.”
Lori, Ed, Lee, and a woman with short green hair, laughed a little at the siblings' comments.
As they calmed down, Lori happily said, “It is good to see you, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Same here, Lori.”
Ed looked down at Lee's slightly enlarged stomach. She then looked back at Lee's face, as she said, “Welcome to the other side of motherhood.”
Lee responded, “Thanks. It is fun being here.”
Ed calmly replied, “That's nice to hear.”
Lori stated, “While we know you are locked as a girl, don't worry about being pregnant. It won't mess with your personality too much. You can still have a tomboyish personality afterward.”
Lee replied, “Thanks for the advice, but after being a girl for over twenty-four years, I am okay with the situation.”
Lori commented, “Well then, you have nothing to worry about. And you can just embrace your femininity.”
Lee stated, “I think I will just be me.”
Ed and Lori caught Lee's reference, as they said, in unison, “Good answer.”
Lee, Ed, and Lori then giggled a little at their private joke.
A few seconds later, as the three women calmed down, the green haired woman asked, “What is the joke?”
Lewis stated, “It is something similar to what Violin told our parents, a long time ago.”
The green haired woman replied, “Okay.”
Lee inquired, “Speaking of which. Who is this?”
Lewis introduced the two women to each other, “Rico, this is Lee. Lee, this is Rico.”
Rico turned to Ed and Lori, as she questioned, “And this would be?”
Lori look around them. And Lee could tell that Lori had a slight, concerned look on her face.
Lee thought, “Lori is worried about what she is going to say next, in front of everyone... Oh no... She is going to tell Rico about me...'
Lori turned to Rico, as she carefully said, “She is the person we told you about?”
Rico turned to Lee, as she deadpanned, “Really?”
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Just great. They told someone about me. I might as well admit it.' She stated, “Yea. Really.”
Rico was silent for a few seconds. She then took a couple of steps forwards, to stand two feet in front of Lee. Next, without warning, she slapped Lee across the right side of Lee's face, with her left hand.
The slap stunned Lee, but the blow did not harm Lee.
Rico then took a few steps back, to where she was standing beside the Lowe family.
As Lee used her right hand to rub her cheek, Lee could see conflicted expressions on the Lowe family's faces, as they looked back and forth, from her and Rico.
Lee thought, 'Even as geniuses, they are not sure how to react to this. On one hand, given what I did to Rico, and so many others. I deserve this, and more. On the other, the Lowe family prefers to avoid violence, when they can. I might as well be diplomatic about this.'
Lee dropped her right hand back to her side, as she said, “I deserved that.”
Rico flatly stated, “You deserve worse. But, I am not going to risk harming your unborn children.”
Ed stated, “Hold on, girls. There is no point in continuing this. It will only lead to trouble for the both of you.”
Lewis said, “Mom is right.”
Lee responded, “I agree with, Rico. I likely deserve worse. But, I already got worse, on this island.”
Rico stated, “I heard. But, I refused to lower myself to do such things. Even for revenge.”
Lee kindly said, “Yes. I appreciate that you have such firm standards. And to that end, is there anything I can do to help make up what I did up to you?”
Rico honestly answered, “I am not sure. But, I will think about your offer. And I will let you know, later. Back on the De La Plata Podrido.”
Lee asked, “What do you mean?”
Lori stated, “Rico has decided to come work for us, at the Last Resort Diner.”
Rico shrugged, as she said, “I miss all the fun. And my friends here figured that being with them, at the diner, was a good way to see the action, without being a part of it. And I happen to agree with them.”
Lee responded, “That is nice. Plata Podrido is a good place to be at. And the police chief is a nice guy. Actually, most of the people I know on that island are nice. I even know two nice bartenders there, whom are good at what they do.”
Rico commented, “I heard about Bao and Melanie. And I am glad that Bao found someone to be with.”
Lee asked, “So am I. Now, where are you staying? I ask, because the only two decent hotels on the island are the Devil's Hotel. On the north side of the island. Where Rock and Revy's crew are staying. And on the south side of the island is Chang's casino.”
Stan stated, “She is moving in with us.”
Lee commented, “That will solve a lot of problems. By the way, I would like to by your home the next time you have a cookout. I appreciate you inviting me on the last few cookouts you had.”
Stan said, “Yea. We like having you over. And the next time we have a cookout, we will let you know.”
Lee happily responded, “That you. I look forward to it. Also, besides that play we invited you to direct for, why haven't I seen you at the casino?”
Lewis answered for her sister, “Mom and dad have a strict, no gambling, rule for us. But, it was fun being directors.”
Ed commented, “Yes. It was.”
Lori stated, “Still, adults, or children. I don't want our two kids gambling.”
Lee saw Stan and Lewis sigh.
Lee thought, 'I need to help cheer them up. And it will win me points with Rico.” She commented, in a compassionate tone of voice, “Don't feel bad about that. Given my precognitive abilities, I don't gamble either. But, I am sure I can ask Chang for permission to let you five use the employee pool, gym, and maybe even the spa.”
Lee watched at the Lowe family and Rico smiled at her.
Rico conceded, “Lee, on your offer to make up for what you have done to me. Well, that is a start.”
Lee returned Rico's smile, as she replied, “Good.”
Lori stated, with a bit of forcefulness in her voice, “Like we have been telling you, Rico. Lee is not that bad a person. She just did something stupid.”
Rico mentioned, “Well, I just wish that if she were going to screw with our lives, that she would have patched up my relationship with one of my younger sisters. I am still having trouble getting her to talk to me.”
Lee asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Your sister?”
Rico smiled wickedly, as she coyly stated, “Oh yea. The series never outright stated that. But, I am sure you will eventually find out.”
Lee questioned, “I look forward to it. And let me guess, you guys know?”
The Lowe family members were all smiling mischievously, as Lori said, “Oh yea. But, it is not our secret to tell.”
Lee said, “I will find out on my own.”
Ed suggested, “We may not tell you, but why don't you ask Pedro to find out? He is a good investigator.”
Lee grinned as she replied, “I just might.” She mentally added, 'Ed is right. Pedro is good at investigating. And he might figure out who Rico's sister. But, that is for later. Due to my actions, the man has enough on his plate, as is.'
Rico asked, “Who is Pedro?”
Lee answered, “Pedro Del Soto is the Police Chief for De La Plata Podrido. The city island we all now live at. And yes. I know it translates to, of the rotten silver.”
Rico commented, “Yes. That is an interesting name. But, I have heard worse. Now, get on with your explanation.”
Lee stated, “Anyway, Pedro is also very friendly, and he hates bribes. But, he also is not afraid to get his hands dirty. And he is extremely genre savvy. Probably more so than myself. I would say that in his own way, he is almost as intelligent as Ed, Stan, and Lewis, here.”
Ed offhandedly said, “I wouldn't go that far.”
Lee stated, “During the time loop, right before the reset, I called him at home, and asked him a few questions. And from what I said to him, he correctly that we were in a time loop.”
Ed conceded, “Okay. You might have a point.”
Stan questioned, “Are you sure he didn't remember that time loop.”
Lee flatly said, “Positive. That man would have done a lot more fun things if he did.”
Stan let out a laugh. She then agreed, “I bet he would.”
Rico commented, “While I heard about the time loop, I did not know about that.”
Lee asked, “No one did. Except for myself.” She mentally added, 'And maybe one other.' She verbally continued, in a sober tone of voice, “But, since I cannot make this up to you. I hope you don't have anything planned for me, after I have my children.”
Rico stated, “I don't plan to do anything to you. I am not going to hurt you, after you give birth to your children.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Rico commented, “But, we will work out something, for you to make up for what you did to me. As I said, I need to think about it.”
Lee responded, “Okay. But, keep in mind, not everything I did to you was bad.”
Rico admitted, “I know. You did give me a lot of new friends.” She looked around her, at the Lowe family, whom smiled at her.
The five women then turned back to Lee, as Rico continued, “So, there is that. And I plan to be far more reasonable about what I will request, than some of the others.”
Lee complimented, “Well, you are one of the most civil.”
Rico said, “Thank you.”
Lee stated, “As such, I am sure we will work something out that we can both live with. And in the meantime, there are some things I can do for you, to make your stay on that island city even better.”
Rico conceded, “That will help a lot.”
Suddenly Lee felt her intestines rumble, over the lump in her stomach that was her pregnant womb.
Lee thought, 'I need to get something to eat.' She said, “Well, I would like to thank you for you kindness, ladies. And for your understanding, Rico.”
In response, Rico nodded once towards Lee.
Lee continued, “But, I need to get something to eat.”
Lori responded, “Given you are eating for three, that is understandable.”
Lee let out a laugh. She then said, “Yes. I am.”
Rice commented, “It has been interesting.”
Lee agreed, “Truly. It has.”
Lewis said, “Have a good day, Lee.”
Lee responded, “You too.”
Stan commented, “We will have to get together later day, or tomorrow.”
Lee replied, “I look forward to it.”
Ed said, “We will talk to you later, Lee”
Lee teased, “It's a date.”
The other five women laughed, as Lee turned, and started walking through the crowd of women, towards the nearest food table.
When Lee reached the nearest food table, she noticed that she was alone at the table. She then head for where the plastic plates were located on the table.
As Lee came to a stop at the table, and she reached for a plastic plate, she heard, to her right, a feminine female voice say, in a playful manner, “Hey there, lover girl.”
Lee turned to see Rock standing right beside her.
Rock was wearing a revealing leopard skin pattern bikini top and bottom.
Lee joked, “You have been hanging around Benny and Janet for too long.”
Rock giggled a little. She then admitted, “Maybe I have. So, how are you enjoying the party?”
Lee responded, “While, I have only been talking to people, so far. It has been fun, meeting those I know, again. Along with meeting some new people, as well.”
Rock asked, “Who did you meet?”
Lee answered, “The Lowe family introduced me to Rico.”
Rock grinned, as she questioned, “Does she know about you?”
Lee casually stated, “Yes. But, I believe we have reached an understanding between the two of us.”
Rock commented, “Good. And that is why we continue these parties. Most of us don't see each other regularly, so this is just a good excuse for everyone to get together and say, hi.”
Lee said, “I see your point.” She thought, 'While I wrote different reasons for having these parties. I guess you would view these parties this way. And it is a good excuse to have a party.'
Rock mentioned, “And just so you know, the real fun starts tomorrow.”
Lee deadpanned, “You are not going to have an orgy? Are you?” She thought, 'I didn't write one. But, one never knows with this crowd.'
Rock flatly replied, “Of course not.”
Lee continued staring at Rock. A few seconds later, Rock sighed, as she continued, “Okay. There was that one time, when none of the kids came to the island, for the party. And our children were not on the island, either... But, that is in the past. And we know you are not responsible for the incident.”
Lee said, “Good.”
Rock teased, “Still, that doesn't mean we don't have some secluded spots, places, and rooms, picked out for lovers to go to, for some private time.”
Lee let out a laugh. She then said, “I might take you up on that offer, later.”
Rock replied, “Just let me, or Benny know. We will tell you where to go with River and Chang.”
Lee said, “Okay. And, all joking aside, I am sure this will be a good party, which you all put on.”
Rock sarcastically stated, “And here I thought you would take credit.”
Lee casually replied, “Nah. You girls did all the work.”
Rock said, “Thank you.” She looked down at slight rounded pouch on Lee's stomach. She then looked up at Lee's, as she asked, “So, how is the pregnancy progressing?”
Lee honestly answered, “Actually, I am feeling pretty good. The morning sickness is almost all gone.”
Rock happily said, “Glad to hear it. And it is fun see you go through what you made us go through.”
Lee pointed out, “Times two.”
Rock giggled a little. She then stated, “True. And you better not wuss out and get a c-section. I want you to give birth to both your children, the natural way. Revy, Dutch, Benny, Janet, and I, would be upset if you did not go through what we went through.”
Lee replied, “Don't worry. I plan to do so.” She thought, 'Even though it will almost certainly hurt like hell. Two times over.'
Rock commented, “Good. Speaking of which, Revy wants to be there for the births.”
Lee flatly stated, “That woman just does not quit.”
Rock smiled, as she stated, “That is why she is nicknamed, Revy. She doesn't quit anything. And I mean anything... That is why I am still with her.”
Both women giggled a little at Rock's comment.
As they calmed down, Lee said, “Listen, Rock. We will talk about it. But, if she comes, I want you there, to keep her from doing anything stupid. Nor, allow her to ruin the moment with a smart ass remark.”
Rock shrugged, as she said, “I can go along with that.”
Lee flatly stated, “And no recording devices.”
Rock said, with slight disappointed in her tone of voice, “She was hoping for a record of the births.”
Lee stated, “Well, she is not getting getting a recoding of me going through that...” Then a thought accorded to Lee, as she continued, “You guys didn't video tape the births of your children? Did you?” She thought, 'While I did not write that. With this crew, I won't put it passed them.'
There was a quiet silence, as the light sea breeze blew between them, for a couple of second, with only soft rock music playing in the background.
Rock then quietly said, “No comment.”
Lee realized, as she thought, with humor, 'They did!' Lee began laughed from a few seconds.
Rock remained silent, at Lee continued to laugh.
As Lee calmed down, she said, “Don't worry. I don't want to see those videos. Besides, I am going to find out about such matters, in detail, in around six and a half months.”
Rock complimented, “That is a good way to look at it. By the way, you may not know this, but in a few months those hormones raging in you are going to make you really horny. Which was quite a treat for us. Especially for Benny and Janet. Along with Revy and I. Revy and myself hit that point around the same time. At which point, we didn't spend much time outside of our bedroom, for about a month. It was quite a fun time for the two of us.”
Lee admitted, in a matter of fact manner, “Oh. I already knew that from the research I did. I just didn't include it because I was already pushing the envelop on the content. And I didn't want those scenes to turn into a farce.”
Rock commented, “That is a good point.”
Lee smiled, as she said, in a plain manner, “And it will be hard to tell when I reach that point, given the activities I am regularly doing with the two people I am with.”
Rock giggled a little. She then said, “With those two, I am not surprised. Also, Annie mentioned you enjoy girl talk with her.”
Lee shrugged, she then stated, “Well, she is trustworthy on such matter. And unlike guys, Where it is just a question of if you did it, or not. With little, or no details given. With girls, they talk about every little detail, for hours on end. And I find that a lot of fun to be able to participate in such discussions.”
Rock happily responded, “So do I. It is like everyone comparing notes for the next time they do it.”
Lee agreed, “Exactly.”
As each of them picked up a plastic plate and started to serve themselves some food, Rock said, “As fun as it would be to continued talking here. There is something I would like to talk to you about, in private.”
Lee stated, “Sure. Let's get our food and drinks. Then, we head over to one of the tables to talk.”
Rock replied, “My thoughts exactly.”
Lee complimented, “By the way, you pull off that leopard skin bikini quite well.”
Rock smiled, as she replied, “Thanks. Revy got it from me.”
Lee thought, 'Revy was probably inspired by the leopard skin bikini that Roberta was shown wearing in the Black lagoon Swimsuit magazine. Though, I wonder when she learned of the magazine. A discussion for another time. Now, to tell Rock where I got my bikini from.'
Lee said, “I can guess. And River got this one for me.”
Rock complimented, “It suits you.”
Lee responded, “Thanks. Now, let us get our meals, sit down, and talk.”
The two women then finished making their plates. Next, they pulled their plastic utensils on top of their food, and a napkin under their plates, between the plate and the hand they were holding their plates on.
With their free hands, each picked up a pre-made glass of iced lemon, on the far end of the food table.
The two women then walked away from the crowds of women, and to the tables, with chairs, set by the food tables.
Rock and Lee then headed for the table on the far corner, away from everyone.
The tables they picked did not have an umbrella over it. But, neither woman minded.
After they set their plate drinks down on the table, they sat in chairs across from each other.
While Lee sat down, she thought, 'Given the distance from the others. Along with the slightly breeze blowing towards the crowd. And the music playing the background. Even with enhanced hearing of some of those in the crowd, at this distance, the other women will not hear what we say. Now, to find out what Rock want to know from me.'
As soon as Lee was comfortable in her seat, and she saw Rock was the same, she asked “So, what you want to talk to me about?”
Rock answered, “It is about our conversation at the factory on Mars?”
Lee admitted, in a sober tone of voice, “I am sorry, Rock. But, as you may have realized. For me, that was several years ago. I barely remember what we discussed then.”
Rock commented, “Well, you were quite arrogant in those conversations.”
Lee responded, “Okay. While I don't remember all that was said. I did remember my state of mind at the time. And I was not so much as arrogant, as I was desperate. And pushing all the buttons you girls have was one of my few options, in that situation.”
Rock shrugged, as she conceded, “Okay. I might have done the same thing in your position.”
Lee replied, “I am glad you understand... So, what is this about?”
Rock said, “It is about what you said during that conversation. You said you had similar experiences as what I did in my series. That while I dreamed, my soul went to other alternate versions of myself. In this case, the omakes of my series. You had similar experiences of visiting the bodies of your counterparts in other realities, while you body slept. Do you remember what you said about that?”
Both of them were quite for a few seconds, as Rock could tell from the expression on Lee's face, that Lee was trying to remember what Rock was talking about.
Lee then placed her elbows onto the table, to the sides of her plate, as she cupped her face with her hands, for a few seconds.
She then lifted up her head, as she moved her arms to where the were on the table. For her left arm, she laid it between herself, and her plate, with her left hand hanging off the table. With her right arm, she laid it across the table, in front of her, beside her plate.
Lee then looked Rock in her eyes, as she soberly said, “I do remember... And you know what. It is frustrating to have no one to talk to about this. Because it is so far beyond the norm that I don't know of anyone that has experienced this, but you.”
Rock looked Lee in Lee's eyes, as she thought, 'Lee's serious about this. And it is clear that this matter is just as important to her, as it is to me.”
Rock continued to look Lee in Lee's eyes, as she leaned over the table, as she used her left hand to reach across the table, to gently clasp Lee' open right hand.
Rock gave Lee a comforting smile, as she said, “Well it is good to have someone to talk to about this... Someone that has been through this.”
Lee returned Rock's smile, as she replied, “You're right. It is.”
Rock then let go of Lee's hand, as she lean up and placed her hands in her lap.
Lee also place her hands in her own lap.
Lee continued to smile at Rock, as she calmly said, “You have to admire the situation I am in. I am talking, face to face, to someone I thought. Several years ago. Was just fictional character. I have lived decades as a guy. I then lived decades as a girl. I have experienced a childhood in each gender. I am pregnant. With twins. I have two gender bending lovers that I enjoy have sex with in almost any type of gender combination that you can imagine. And I still think possessing my alternate counterpart selves is likely the weirdest experiences of my life. And it drives me nuts to have no one to talk to about it.”
“Even River cannot really talk to me about it, because it is more am emotional experience, with little thought in involved.”
Rock stated, “I completely agree. And I completely understand. Personally, I found the disorientation after transferring back to my body as I wake up to be the worst.”
Lee responded, “No kidding. It is a juggled mess. It is like reading a book, and then forgetting the words on most of the pages. You generally know what happened in the book. But, you only remember bits and pieces of the scenes.”
Rock replied, “Exactly. The best comparison is the, memory swiss-cheese, effect from the show Quantum Leap. Though, unlike Sam Beckett, we fortunately didn't just keep leaping from body to body. And instead, we returned to our own bodies, in our own times, in our own realities, when we woke up.”
Lee agreed, “That would be a good comparison. I think this a limitation to the human mind. We cannot think non-linearly. If a memory does not fit our memory timeline, our mind tries to forget it. That is also why I find sensing the future is so difficult. I have nothing to anchor the memory too, until the events start to play out.”
Rock realized, as she responded, “I can see what you are getting at. That is why you made sure that Birdy and Tsutomu's personal memories did not get merged together. It would have been a jumbled mess for them, and the person they became.”
Lee stated “Yes. That is exactly when I did that for Birdy, Tsutomu, and the person they became. And on that matter. Have you told Birdy about me? Even River is not sure.”
Rock answered, “We did. She is on the fence about you. On one hand she always faced the fear of losing one of her selves to the other. But, the way you did it, she did not completely lose either identity. But, she did mourn no longer being with her true love, as two separate lovers.”
Lee pointed out, “I did leave the literal escape clause, that while their mind is one, their souls are still two. And when they die, their souls would be separate, and they would be together again, as lovers.”
Rock stated, “We know. Even before we learned about you, and your stories. That revelation came out. So, when Birdy learned from Violin that there was life after death, she inquired further, by talking to Annie. And when Annie confirmed she did have two souls, it made her day.”
“To that end, she, Nataru, her husband, are planning, in a few centuries, after they both die, to have a threesome between each other. By the way, while Nataru is nice guy. Much like the maids. You do not want to hurt those he cares for.”
Lee asked, “Should I be worried about him, or any other the others in the Shinmyou family?”
Rock answered, “No. You shouldn't need to worry. While they all know about you and the stories. Nataru is happy with the life he has. And Yuuichi is having to much fun with Little D, and their business, to care. And as you know, Violin is okay with her situation.”
Lee commented, “Good. Also, V.T. hinted at what happen to those two, when you caught them, for their actions, no secretly crashing these parties, when they were younger.”
Rock sighed, as she admitted, “Yea. At the time, we just learned about you and your stories. And we were not in the best frame of mind. We needed someone to vent our rage on, and when we learned that Yuuichi and Little D were playing peeping toms at parties like this. Without us knowing. They became our scapegoats...”
Rock took a deep breath. She slowly let it out. She continued, “Though, not to upset the Shinmyou and Crichton families, we only captured them. Brought them to this island. Used instant package of spring of drowned girl on them. And make them dress up in bikinis for a day. As they followed us around, inside our home, and outside, on the island.”
Lee conceded, “Okay. That was not to bad a punishment. And that would be light, compared to what could have happened.” She thought, “And nothing compared to what you all did to me.'
Rock responded, “You're right. But, why did you have that no boys rule.”
Lee stated, “Well, I did admit it was hypocritical. Have that rule is the only way to work such parties as this. And I did allow for men to be temporarily change into women to attend these parties. But, to change the gender of child, without good reason. Is very, very wrong.”
“Though, I did address this hypocrisy, by having those two explain how they crashed you parties. In an interesting use of Yuuichi's temporal abilities. And by having them mention the parties at the beginning of Book Three. With the readers, at the time, not knowing what these parties were. Because they were stated at the end of Book Three. Made for a good mind screw, and pleasurable re-reading experience.”
Rock let out a laugh. She then agreed, “You are right about that.”
Lee questioned, in a sober tone of voice, “Still, concerning your revenge on them. I hope they don't blame me for what happened to them?”
Rock responded, “No. They don't. Still, why did you do that to Birdy? Why did you merge her two personalities?”
Lee quietly said, “I know this sounds cold, but I wanted to do the tragic lovers angle with them. Their series talked about mental fusion of one mind overwriting the other. I wanted to show the alternative, and of true mind fusion. Where there is not an overwrite, but a true merger of two minds and personalities. That is why I made sure Birdy received a happy ending with a loving husband, Nataru. With both her and him having good jobs they like. And two caring children. Violin, and Yuuichi. That she and Nataru could love. Whom ended up being successful at what they do.”
Lee voice turned more energetic, as she continued, “By the way, that lunch with V.T., back at the Devil's Hotel was fun.”
Rock commented, “It looked like it was. And I will admit that what you did for the Shinmyou family was a good example of the happy endings you gave us.”
Lee honestly responded, “I had to do it. These happy endings were a reward for all the pain and misery I put you all through. And though I changed you, I made sure that I left you with a better lives than the ones you had. All of you got something for your troubles. I just wish you all realized that... Well, in your case, sooner than you have, now...”
Rock admitted, “I think River and Annie had the right idea about you. They tried to tell us, but we won't listen. But, now I understand.”
Lee looked at Rock, in her eyes.
From behind Lee's eyes, Rock could see that Lee was emotionally tired.
Lee softly stated, in a tired tone of voice, “It is good that you finally understand... Because Rock, we have literally hurt each other. Lied to each other. Screwed each other... We have done everything short of killing each other... Let us just be friends... It would be so much simpler... So much easier... And much nicer for both of us...”
Rock immediately held out her right hand, across the table, as she calmly replied, “I agree. Friends?”
Lee reach out with her right hand, across the table.
Then both gently, through firmly, shook hands, as Lee responded, “Friends.”
A few seconds later, they released their handshake.
They then focused on their lunches.
And as the two women slowly ate their lunches, they continued carrying on their conversation for the next few hours.
By the time they had both finished their lunches, and their conversation, Rock and Lee found they had become good friends, whom were able to put their shared past behind them.
(_)
Lee and everyone else on the island, found the rest of the week long party to be fun, engaging, and entertaining.
Throughout the week, the food was good. The weather remained pleasant. And the company was relaxing.
The Lagoon family also held their various games, and contest. With the only prizes being bragging rights.
The list of contests including firearm contests. Lee entered the firearm contest and she did not even score in the top ten. But, she still had fun.
Though, when it came to knife throwing, she was ranked third. With Shenhua being first. And Ranma was a close second.
Still, Lee did not even come close in the sparring and racing match. But, she did find the tug of rope contests, between teams, to be entertaining.
And Lee was surprised that the Lagoon family held bikini mud wrestling contests. She was even more surprised when Revy made her compete against Revy, herself. They they were both careful not to harm the small children inside Lee. And after a very messy bout, Revy won. Fortunately, the mud came off easy, in the shower. And Lee changed into another bikini, afterward.
Also, though Lee did not know how to surf. She found the surfing contest to be fun to watch. But, River, Chang, and Ranma, were kind enough to teach her the basics.
And Lee decided she would look into learning surfing, a month, or two, after her children were born.
In addition, there were even nightly karaoke contests. Which were interesting for Lee, on several levels.
And Lee found it hilarious to watch Violin sing, the Vapors song, I am turning Japanese. First in english. Then, she sang the song in japanese.
All the while, as Violin sang that song, Lee only thoughts were of mild amusement. With Lee thinking, 'I literally did that to Violin.'
Not surprising, Lee won one of the nightly karaoke contests. With Ranma, Sawyer, and Eda, winning during one of those nightly contests.
And even though Lee was forced to be a part of the bikini contest, at the end of the party. Where each of the women would got onto the podium in the backyard of the mansion, with the others present giving them scores for their appearance. Even Lee was allowed to vote. And she voted fairly. Even for those who had punished her.
To everyone's surprise, when it was Lee's turned to walk on the podium, only a handful of women gave Lee low scores. Most of the women gave Lee a medium to high score. Putting Lee in the upper middle of the rankings for the bikini contest. Along with this, it was a pleasant surprise when it was revealed that Revy was the winner of the bikini contest.
And there was no cheating, considering those whom counted the votes were Rock, Roberta, River, and Annie.
The next morning, after the bikini party's officially end, everyone whom did not live on the island. Including Lee, Chang, and River. Woke up. Got cleaned up, and dressed normally. And they then packed their belongings in their luggage, in preparation of leaving the island, soon after.
Though, before everyone left, most of them stayed, to have breakfast on the island.
During breakfast, Rock mentioned, to those present, that her family would be right behind the others, in returning to Plata Podrido.
After breakfast, everyone said their goodbyes, and Lee, Chang, and River used River's reality device to teleport back to living room of the Daiyu Palace Casino, penthouse apartment.
Lee looked over at the clock, and she noticed that they had only been gone for five minutes, local reality time.
The three lovers then unpacked, and spend the rest of the day getting back into the groove of their daily lives.
(_)
The morning after Lee, River, Chang, and the others, returned to the De La Plata Podrido, was a day that Lee was looking forward to.
It was Lee's bi-monthly doctor's checkup. And it was the day that Lee was going to learn the sexes of the two children she was carrying inside her body.
River was with Lee, as Simon did the checkup. And the sonogram showed that Lee was carrying a pair of boys. Also, from the placement of the placentas, and that there were two separate amniotic sacs. With each individual sac surrounding one of unborn children. The children were fraternal twins. Not identical twins.
Lee also had a pinprick finger blood test performed on her, from one of Simon's more advance medical machines.
The test was similar diabetic blood test. Which took a drop of blood from the side of Lee's left forth finger, and onto a test strip, to be read by a small machine. The blood test did not even require a small bandage, afterward. The blood test showed that that Lee's blood has slightly higher levels of testosterone, than a woman her age usual had. This confirmed that Lee was at least having one son. And given the duration of the pregnancy, this merely, compared to how accurate a sonogram was at this time period of a pregnancy, all but confirmed that Lee was having two sons.
After the checkup was over, Lee got up off the exam table, and pulled her shirt down.
Fortunately, since she was just have basic blood pressure, pulse, and sonogram, she did not have to take off her clothing. Though, she did have to lay down and left up her shirt, for the sonogram machine.
After Lee was finished with Simon. And she, and her children, were given a clean bill of health. Given Lee medical needs were complimentary, within Chang's casino, Lee did not have to pay after her exam was finished.
Lee and River left Simon's doctor's office, through the reception area, and finally exiting out of the door, into on of side hallways of the casino. On the first floor, near the gaming floor.
They walked down an empty hallway, for about a minute, as they headed for the back elevator bay, to take them to their penthouse apartment. It was then, that Lee noticed River suddenly coming to a stop in the middle of the hallway.
There was no one else around them, as Lee stopped, as well. She turned around to face River, as she asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “What is it?”
River turned to Lee, as she said, in a calm tone of voice, “Lee, there is something I need to ask you. And it is a very big favor.”
While Lee realized that River had something important to say. To keep the mood between them from becoming to serious, Lee questioned, in a matter of fact manner, “Okay. What?”
River calmly responded, “Not here. We need to talk in private.”
Lee suggested, “Okay, tell me when we get upstairs.”
River said, “That will be fine.”
Lee then turned and started walking down the hallway, with River catching up to her.
When River reached Lee, Lee started walking beside her, with River being to Lee's left side.
As they continued on their way to the elevator bay, Lee asked, “So, what do you think of having sons?”
River said, “I would be happy, either way. And chances are they could be both. Why didn't you want to do those DNA tests? Simon could easily tell if they inherited my gender bending abilities.”
Lee carefully responded, with slight stress in her tone of voice, “There are risks to using a needle to puncture the amniotic sac, to get the fluid for the tests. And I would have to have it done twice. I just don't feel safe about doing so.”
River said, “I will respect your choice.”
Lee commented, “Good. Besides. All I wanted to do was know the gender of our children. And a sonogram at this point in my pregnancy will tell me that. And such devices, in the hands of professions, such as Simon, are safe to use.”
River agreed, “You are right about that. So, given everything about you, what is your opinion on the matter of their gender?”
Lee said, in a matter of fact manner, “Like you. I could care less. I love them either way.”
River teased, “Well, look on the bright side. If they were girls, you would have to eventually talk to them about their periods.”
Lee questioned, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “And why is that?”
River pointed out, “Because you are the only one of us that still goes through that.”
Lee rolled her eyes for a few seconds, before looked back in front of herself. Lee joked, “River, you are such a tease.”
River giggled a little.
As River calmed down, Lee commented, “And if we did have girl, or two, after this. I figured the two of us would give her, or them, the talk.”
River agreed, “Fair enough... And I find it interesting that you are even thinking about having more children?”
Lee answered, “While with me locked in this form, I am not able to father a child. I figure that eventually, you and Chang might conceive our child. Though, given Chang's masculine personality, you would likely be the one carrying the next child to term.”
River admitted, in an amused tone of voice, “You may have a point there. And I have thought about it. You seem to be enjoying the experience of being pregnant.”
Lee replied, “Yes. I am.”
River stated, “Well, since you are wondering. I might do it. And given the way you arranged for our abilities. There are no real chance of accidental pregnancy, when it comes to one of us becoming pregnant... And that smooths things over in the bedroom.”
Lee happily responded, “You got that right. And I would likely go through being pregnant, again... Still, that would depend on many factors I don't know, yet. Such as how difficult it is to raise children. And how painful the labor and births are.”
River commented, “It is nice to keep an open mind. Maybe next time, we will both go through with it, together.”
Lee shrugged, as she stated, “I won't mind. That seems to work with the others. But, there is one thing for sure. As much as I respect, Chang. He is not giving the birds and the bees speech to our kids.”
River smiled, as she said, “Agreed.”
Both women reached an intersession, they turned, and continued walking down another hallway.
Lee commented, “Still... I hope our kids don't get into too much trouble, as they grow up.”
River stated, “If our sons are anything like Simon, we have nothing to worry about.”
Lee grinned mischievously, as she asked, “Let me guess. You were the troublemaker in your family?”
River happily answered, “You know me far, to well.”
Lee inquired, “So, what are the odds on the casino betting pool of the genders of our children?”
River said, “I am not sure myself. But, how did you know about that bet?”
Lee commented, “With this crew. If they did not have such a bet going on, about this, I would be sorely disappointed.”
River burst out laughing, for a few seconds, as they continued on their way to the back elevator bay.
(_)
A few minutes later, they made it to the elevator bay, where River used her elevator key to open the express elevator.
After they made it to the penthouse, they headed for the hallway door that lead into their living room.
When they reach the hallway door, that lead to the living room, River used another key to unlocked the door. She then opened it, and walked through. Lee walked right behind her, and Lee gently shut the door behind herself.
Lee soon came to a stop, as she watched River walk across the room, towards a book case, which was a series of shelves, on the far side of the couch, to their left.
Lee noted the time, on the clock in the room. It was eleven ten AM.
As River continued to walk, Lee asked, “Okay. What is this about?”
While River continued walking over to the book case, with her back to Lee, she answered, “One minute. I need to get something first.”
When River reached the book case, Lee watched as she quickly pulled out what appeared to be an old, thick book, bound in brown leather, from a shelf that was at River's chest level.
Lee thought, 'At least you know what you are looking for, and where to find it.'
River turned back around to face Lee, as she cracked a grin She replied, “You are correct about that.'
River then walked back over to Lee, with the book in her hands.
River soon came to a stop, a few feet in front of Lee, with both lovers looking at each other in the face.
Lee plainly stated, “So, you are holding an old book. That means that book is more than it appears.”
River admitted, “Yes. It is.”
Lee asked, “So, what is this favor you want of me?”
River sighed. She then said, “It is about our children, and some of my future plans. Before you took off into the multiverse, do you remember our conversation, where I said I had plans concerning Wash and Book.”
Lee honestly admitted, “Vaguely. Very vaguely...”
River commented, “Well, at the time, I didn't realize I would be arranging for you to get pregnant.”
Lee said, with suspicion her tone of voice, “I think I know where this is going.”
River replied, “I guess you would. My plans were after your mess was settled, I would get pregnant, and have them reincarnated as my children.” She held up the book in her hands, as she continued, “And this book will let me do it. It has magic spells. And I have learned a few of them. Including, the two spells we need to use.” She then lower her book, to where it was in front of her waist.
Lee pointed out, “I don't need to remind you how dangerous magic can be.”
River admitted, “Yes. But, like everything else. If we are careful, we should be fine. We are going to do this carefully. And we are not doing anything horrible to achieve our goals.”
Lee stated, “But, I can guess what you want to do. You want to find Wash and Book's souls and then place them in the children I am carrying.”
River replied, “Yes.”
Lee flatly inquired, “And what about the souls that are already in my children?”
River stated, “I did do some research on that very question. The two souls should merge in the one body, and the child should grow up fine.”
Lee asked, “Are you sure?”
River said, “All the experts I have talked to, on the matter, say the children will be fine. And I even made sure to confirm that Wash and Book won't accidentally wind up in the same body. That cannot happen. They will each enter the bodies of one of your children. Not the same child.”
Lee more forcibly questioned, “I ask again. Are you sure, because I don't want to cause insanity, or worse, for our children?”
River said, as her voice took a hard tone, “I am sure. You know that I would do nothing that would risk our children out all.”
Lee calmly stated, “That is all I wanted to know.”
There was an uneasy silence between the two lovers, for a few seconds.
River calmly asked, “So, will you do it?
River and Lee went silent, again, for several seconds, as Lee carefully thought over the decision.
And while River could read Lee's thought, she did not reply to them.
River thought, 'She is thinking very hard on this matter. Weighting the pros and cons on this matter. And if she says, no. I will not hold it against her... And when we decide to have more kids. I will make sure I am the mother, and I will do what I plan, then. Though, I may have to get pregnant twice, considering twins are a little rare.'
Lee calmly said, “I will do it. I owe you too much as it is. And this will help everyone involved.”
River calmly replied, “Thank you.”
Lee stated, “Besides. I know that if I declined. You would intentionally get your pregnant to do this.”
Lee watched a River's eyes widened ever so slightly, before quickly returning to normal.
River then noticed Lee giving her a knowing smile.
River thought, 'She realized what I was thinking. And just now. Not a few moments ago, when I was reading her mind... It is so nice, that given everything that has happened, she is still on the ball... And her stomach will soon be a ball... Hehehe...' River returned smile.
Lee dropped her smile, as she went onto say, in a firm tone of voice, “You already stated you originally planned to get pregnant to do this. Maybe twice. So, it is no surprise you would try to do this behind my back. And that would mean two more children we would have to raise. When raising, one child. Let alone two children, can be a handful.”
River carefully said, “I won't deny what you are saying is true.”
Lee smile turned warm towards River, as she responded, “I know. And I am not upset about this. Still, I would like to know why did you wait this long?”
River answered, in a matter of fact way, “Things just kept coming up.”
Lee shrugged, as she agreed, “Yea. That tends to happen... So, considering this will require magic. I have to ask. When did you learn magic?”
River happily said, “Everyone needs a hobby. And I found that, like everything else I learn, I have a talent for learning, and using magic.”
Lee stated, “Yes. Your creators really left you wide open, when it comes to your, imagination, intelligence, learning curve, and skills.”
River said, “That would be correct. Still, I am a bit of a beginner. But, in some cases, all you need is a firm grasp of the basics.”
Lee questioned, “Are you quoting the Avatar series?”
River answered, “I am paraphrasing, Iroh, to be exact.”
Lee said, “You are going to have to tell me someday, when you found the time to watch that series.”
River replied, “I will. But, that is for later.”
Lee asked, “True. So, who has been teaching you?”
River stated, “I am mostly self taught. But, I am very careful. And I have visited various realities to talk to magic users on proper safety precautions.”
Lee said, in a cautious tone of voice, “Okay. Just don't do any accident demonic possessions.”
River carefully stated, “Don't worry. First, we summon to confirm who it is, then we do the transfer. And the way the spells are done, it will have to be willing by all parties.”
Lee replied, “Good. Still, either way, this will be a possession. As such, will this possession also effect control over my body?”
River answered, “Only if you want it to. They will eventually go dormant in a month or so. With their memories naturally sealing until they are older. Which we can unseal later. But now, for a month or so, they will be very aware of the situation.”
Lee responded, “That is fine. They are both good people. And I don't mind them taking control of my body, as long as I can re-take control, as needed. Besides, they will likely want to talk to a few of those here, that they know.”
River teased, “Or, maybe even more.”
Lee sighed. She then said, “I can imagine. And if they want to do that. I don't have a problem with it.”
River replied, “Neither, do I.”
Lee questioned, “So, does Chang know what we are about to do?”
River answered, “Of course. He was the one who gave me this book. We worked out variations to this plans long before we learned the truth about Violin, and read your stories, on how you did it. But, with Violin, we know it is possible, and can be successfully done.”
Lee inquired, “So, after we do this. When are we going to tell the others?”
River said, “This afternoon, when we get back. Might as well get it out in the open.”
Lee replied, “I agree. I just hope Zoe and the others are not upset about this.”
River commented, “I doubt it. Now, let me go get my reality device, so we can get this done. I have plans for tonight, with you. To celebrate.”
Lee grinned, as she said, “That sounds good.”
(_)
A few minutes later, an a reality away, Lee and River teleport to another world, in another time.
Lee stood beside, River, as River held her reality device in her right hand, and she had her book of magical spells tucked under her left arm.
Lee took a few steps away from River, as she took a look around.
The first thing Lee noticed was that it was a very cloudy day. With dark clouds. Though, there was still enough light coming through the holes in the clouds, to tell that it was day time.
The next thing Lee noticed was that is was still sprinkling rain. Though, the weather was slightly warm. Also, from the wetness on the concrete, buildings, and hills, surrounding her, she could tell that worst of the rain has long since passed, and that it would soon stop raining all together.
And while the concrete ground beneath them was wet, it was not soaked, with most of the water already drained away.
Lee then turned to look at the large building, with a closed hangers doors, she and River were standing beside.
River stated, “This is my home reality. And I made sure it is not an alternate reality.”
Lee turned around to face River, as she inquired, “Where in the Verse, are we?”
River said, “Welcome to one of the most famous communications relays in the Verse.”
Lee stated, “Let me guess. This is moon where Mister Universe used to live?”
River replied, “Yes.”
Lee calmly asked, “So, we are retrieving, Wash, first?”
River said, “Yes.”
Lee inquired, “So, when is it?”
River answered, “It is late afternoon. A few hours after my friends and I left this moon, during that film?”
Lee said, in a comforting tone of voice, “I hope this isn't bringing back any bad memories.”
River calmly answered, “Only the ones that we are about to solve.”
Lee asked, “So, what do you need me to do?”
River pocketed her reality device. She then pulled out her book, from under her left arm, and opened it with both hands. She looked down at the book, as she page through it, while she said, “I know it is wet. But, for this to work. I need to to laid down on you back, and spread you legs.”
Lee replied, “Okay. I trust you.”
Lee looked down at the concrete floor under them. She then laid down on her back, on a spot on the wet concrete, where there was no puddles. River was to her left side.
Fortunately, Lee found the concrete was barely wet, with the water, during the previous rain storm, had clearly sheeted off, and drained away, on the concrete, as it hit the hard ground. With the concrete not retaining much water, and instead the concrete only had a light dampness to it.
Lee then spread her legs slightly open.
Lee looked up at River, as said, “Ready.”
Lee saw River had stopped paging through the spell book.
River continued look in book, as she said, “Found the first spell.”
River then chanted some words in a language that Lee did not recognize.
A second later, Lee saw Wash's ghost, in the clothing he usually wore, appear standing between, and away from the two women, by a few feet.
River kept her book open, in both hands, as she looked up at the translucent ghost of Wash. She smiled, as she said, “Hi Wash.”
Wash looked down at himself, then at River, to Lee, then back to River, as he said, in a confused, ghostly, tone of voice, in english, “What is going, River?”
River answered, in a calm tone of voice, “Wash, I hate to tell you this. But, you died. And you are now nothing but a soul.”
Wash joked, “And you are remarkably lucid.”
River giggled a little. She then coyly said, “A lot has happen. But, thanks for noticing.”
Wash said, “You're welcome. By the way, I like the red hair. I knew it would look good on you. Considering, how sometimes, the light would reflect off your hair to make it appear red.”
River replied, “Thank you.”
Wash inquired, “Now, back to the matter at hand. What do you mean at lot has happen? You look barely any older than the last time I saw you.”
River answered, “I may look young. But, it has been a very long time for me. We are from the future.”
Wash questioned, “Time travel?”
River replied, “To say the least.”
Wash pointed out, “But, it feels like I just left you guys. I mean, I remember leaving a white light. But, it felt like the white light wanted me to leave, because it wanted me back here, for my own good.”
River stated, “That is nice to know. For you, it has only been a few days since your death. For us, and the others, it has been some time.”
Wash asked, with concern in his ghostly voice, “Does that include Zoe?”
River said, “Yes. Though, she is still young. And she never stopped loving you. She hasn't really dated anyone since your death.”
There was an uneasy silence for a few seconds. Wash then said, in a sober tone of voice, “That is very sad to hear. I was hoping, if god forbid, something happened to me... Which clearly it did... That she would move on and find someone else to love.”
River responded, “We both know that Zoe rarely ever openly showed affection to anyone. Save for you. For her, you were the one in the million. Her true love.”
There was another pause of silence for a few seconds. Wash then quietly asked, “I take this is not just a social call to break my ghostly heart?”
River gave Wash a weak smile, as she calmly answered, “No. We have a plan to bring you back.”
Wash responded, “That is nice. But, first...” He looked over at Lee, then back at River, as he asked, “Who is this woman with you?”
Lee flatly stated, “The mother in this situation.”
River could not help but giggle a little.
Wash replied, “Huh?”
River answered, “As I said. We have a way to bring you back. And it is through reincarnation. This woman here is a very good friend of mine, and she is pregnant. She has agreed to allow you to be reincarnated through one of her children.”
Wash stated, with slight disbelief in his ghostly voice, “You want me to literally be reborn into another human being? That is a lot of time and effort. Can't you just bring me back in my body? You clearly summoned my soul here. I mean, I would think this alone would be impossible. But, coming from you, I think this is just one of you many hidden talents.”
River responded, “Thank you. And I did look into that possibility. And it would lead to even more problems. Least of which is how you died. You died messy. The lance that impaled you could not have been better aimed.”
“It tore through several organs, severed a number of vital arteries, and sliced your spine in half. Even if you had been immediately put on the operating table, I doubt even Simon could have saved you. And even if he did, you would not only have been completely paralyzed from the waist down, you would have probably needed to use a colostomy bag, and catheter, for the rest of your life.”
Wash sighed. He admitted, “I see you point. So, is she carrying a boy? Or, a girl?... Just wondering how creative I am going to have to be to get back with Zoe... In a decade, or two.”
River replied, in a comforting tone of voice, “Not to worry. She is carrying sons. My sons.”
Wash pointed out, “But, you both girls.”
River coyly replied, “A lot has happened.”
Wash flatly questioned, “Do I really want to know?”
River promised, “No. But, we will tell you when you grow up.”
Wash deadpanned, “I look forward to it.” He voice became more sincere, as he continued, “And since I know your insanity is not inherited. That will not a problem. Simon is a pillar of sanity.
River said, “I will be sure to let him know you said that.”
Wash asked, “Are we still on the run from the Alliance. I mean raising a child, on the run, is never a good idea.”
River answered, “Nope. The Alliance is no longer an issue for us. Actually, we are currently working at a casino, on Earth.”
Wash flatly inquired, with surprise in his tone of voice, “Earth?!”
River answered, “Yes. Earth. And it is not what you would think. And I am dating the casino owner.”
Wash pointed Lee, with his left hand, as he continued to look at River. He questioned, “But, you said you were with her?”
Lee commented, “It is a threesome. And before you ask. These are really River and my children. Not the other lover we are involved with.”
Wash shook his head a few times. He then thought, 'I better not ask any more questions.'
River agreed, “That would be a good idea.”
Wash asked, “So, you can read the thoughts of souls?”
River answered, “Apparently so.”
Wash carefully inquired, “So... If I agree to this. What happens? Having Zoe around, seeing me grow up is only going to emotion hurt her more, and make any relationship with her, more difficult. Also, by the time I am an adult, I will be a young man, and she will be an old woman.”
River responded, “Don't worry. I have that covered.”
Lee stated, “River is a genius. She is a doctorate in, cover your ass.”
The others laughed at Lee's comment, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, River said. “Yes. Among other things...”
Wash looked over at Lee, as he questioned, “Still, who is this woman whom would be my new mother?”
Lee looked up at Wash, as she calmly answered, “My name is, Lee. And I am laying down, on this wet cement, due to River's instructions.”
Wash responded, “I figured the latter part. But, Lee is a Chinese name. You don't look Chinese.”
River and Lee giggled a little.
Lee muttered, “Where to start?... Where to start?”
River commented, “Lee is a good person. She will make a good mother.”
Wash shrugged, as he said, “Okay. At least I am getting rich parents.”
River replied, “In several ways.”
Wash asked, “So, you said she is pregnant with your children. Not just one?”
River said, “Yes. Fraternal twin sons. Book is next. I wanted to do you first.”
Wash replied, “Why?”
River causally answered, “I like you more.”
Wash smiled, as he asked, “I thought as much. And if I do this, am I going to be aware of what is going on, inside Lee body?”
River answered, “For about a month. Then, your memories will slowly seal over a couple of weeks. After which, you will just be like any child you age. But, during that time, Lee can temporarily let you take over her body.”
Wash asked, “Will I ever my memories of this life back, someday?”
River stated, “We know someone personally that went through something similar. We can do restore your memories. Though, we plan to do so in gradual process, over the course of a few years. When you reach you middle to late teens. That way you current personality will not being fully submerged, nor risk of a split personality. Instead, you will just be one personality.”
Wash agreed, “Good idea. That way, I will not have to worry about such matters, until I am old enough to do something about it.”
River replied, “Exactly.”
Wash asked, “Now, how much control are you talking about, while I am still me, while I am inside Lee, here?”
Lee answered, “I can let you temporarily take control of my body. And anything you want to do with Zoe, is fine by me. As long as it is not harmful to any party involved.”
Wash questioned, “So, I can properly say goodbye to, Zoe?”
River stated, “More like, I will see you soon...” She grinned mischievously, as she continued, “Along with more pleasant activities...”
Wash took the hint, as he responded, 'Oh... I always thought you might be a pervert. Now, I know for sure.”
River said, in an amused tone of voice, “Actually, you and Zoe were tame compared to some of the stuff the others of the crew did.”
Wash asked, “Like Jayne.”
River flatly commented, “Oh, hell no. Jayne is just straightforward. I am talking about Inara and Kaylee. They both run the batteries down in their toys on a frighteningly regular basis.” She mentally added, 'And I don't dare mention what those two have done since that whole gender bending virus incident.'
Wash burst out laughing, for a few seconds.
As Wash calmed down, he said, “Okay. Let's do this. What do you need from me?”
River looked down at the book, and thumbed to another page in the book. She then looked up, as she commented, “Actually, it is real simple. Wash, do you consent to being reincarnated into one of Lee's children?”
Wash answered, “Yes.”
River turned to Lee, as she asked, “Lee, do you consent to be allow this soul to enter your body, and into one of your children?”
Lee looked over at River, as she said, “Yes.”
River replied, “Good.” She then looked back down in her book, as she read the spell she needed.
River then started chanting the same language that Lee did not know, again. Only this time, Lee could tell the spell was different.
Lee then watched as River stopped chanting, as she looked up at Wash.
Lee looked over was Wash as well, just in time to see Wash's spirit turn into a translucent cloud.
River and Lee then watched as the cloud came around closer to Lee's feet, until it turn and headed inside side her, through between her legs.
Lee closed her eyes, as she suddenly felt intense pleasure radiating from her stomach, towards the rest of her body. She instinctively closed her legs, as a slightly moan escape her lips.
River remained quite, as she watch Lee from about a minute.
Lee then suddenly stopped moaning, as she eyes snapped open. She looked over at River.
River asked, “So, how was it?”
Lee began to get up, as she answered, “Orgasmic.” As she stood straight up, and turned to River, she continued, “Very pleasurable. Like one of the better nights we have had together. And I glad I agreed to do this.”
River teased, “So am I. And I am tempted to try it out myself.”
Lee commented, “We don't got the time to get you pregnant.”
River agreed, “True.”
Suddenly, Lee heard a voice in her head, that was not her own, say, 'Hello.'
Lee thought, 'Wash?'
Wash mentally replied, 'Yes.'
Lee asked, in thought, 'Good. This is to be expect. Are you okay?
Wash mentally answered, 'Yes. I can see out of your eyes, hear, and feel what you are doing. I can even sense your emotions.'
Lee thought, 'I will try not to do anything too embarrassing.'
River giggled a little. She then sarcastically said, “Good luck.”
Wash thought, 'Figures she can read our thoughts.'
Lee mentally quipped, 'It does help in the bedroom.'
Wash sarcastically thought, 'Great...'
River giggled a little more.
Lee thought, 'But, there is one question I have. River, can you tell which are my thoughts? And which are Wash's thoughts?'
River forced herself to stop giggling, as she answered, “Yes. I can clearly tell who is think what. Though Wash, there are some things that Lee has to do, regularly, that you might find embarrassing.”
Lee thought, 'She is right about that. I am a woman. I am going to need use the bathroom, and shower. And sex is on the menu.'
Wash playfully in thought, 'Already corrupting you children...'
Lee mentally responded, 'Since you are now technically a baby, you get to whine. But, is there anything else I need to know?'
Wash answered, 'Well, I can read your memories... You use to be a guy?!...'
River burst out laughing, as she read their thoughts.
Lee sheepishly thought, 'Well physically. But, not anymore. And I was never really a guy, mentally.'
Wash mentally replied, 'One of those...'
Lee mentally interrupted, in a flat manner, 'Yes.'
Wash thought, 'And what about the others?... What weren't you telling me?... Hold it. A gender bending virus?... Zoe can turn into a guy?!... And so can River, and the others too?!...'
Lee mentally replied, “Yes.”
Wash mentally stated, with amusement, 'Okay. I admit it. I would pay money to see Mal's female form. And I don't want to know what Jayne did when he first got those abilities. Of course, Simon would still be Simon. Then, there is Kaylee. As River pointed out, she is must be very interesting, now that she has those abilities.'
Lee mentally said, 'Simon and Kaylee are now together. And they have been, for a long time.'
Wash mentally replied, “That is nice. And given Inara's training, her as a man would scare me. As a guys, she is could be a real Casanova, if she wanted too. And Mal must be careful around her.'
Lee mentally said, 'Those two seem to have an arrangement. And Inara is no longer in that... Profession. She is the head directors, and lead masseuse at the spa, at the casino we all live at.'
Wash requested, in thought, 'I would love to get a full body rub from her.'
Lee mentally agreed, 'So, would I. But, Inara and I are not exactly on the best of terms. Though, I will see what I can do.'
Wash mentally responded, 'It is okay, if it doesn't happen. Still, what about River? And this other guy you two hinted out?'
Lee warned in thought, 'Careful with your thoughts. She is listening in on us.'
Wash mentally agreed, 'True.'
River's laughs turned into light chuckles, as she further enjoyed the conversation between Wash and Lee.
As River calmed down, she said, 'Come on, guys. I am a forgiving sort.'
Lee stated, out loud, “Yes. You are.' She mentally thought, 'And she is great either way. And you now know how River got me knocked up. And that virus also greatly slowed their aging. So, either way, Zoe will not be an old woman by the time you reach adulthood, again. Also, you might inherit those abilities from River.'
Wash mentally said, 'I don't mind. But, I am concerned that I might grow old while Zoe remained young. I don't want Zoe to lose me, again. Never wanted to hurt her like that.'
Lee mentally responded, 'I know. And if you don't inherit River's abilities. We have other ways to maintain ones youth. So, you would be fine.'
Wash mentally stated, 'That is fine. Even if I am just a guy, and she can turn into a guy. I don't mind. I love Zoe, no matter what her outer body looks like.'
Lee mentally said, 'That is why we are doing this. And we have temporary ways of changing one's gender. If you are interested.'
Wash mentally replied, in a coy manner, 'It is nice to have options.'
Lee mentally agreed, 'Yes. It is. And either way. Right now, you are in an adult female body, carrying you male unborn body. Any intimacy in my body is going to be from the female point of view.'
Wash calmly thought, 'I can live with that, for now... Besides, I would love to solve Zoe's needs, if for only one night. But, with Book coming, I am not sure if he would be okay with me doing so. You said you are fine with it. I am sure Zoe would. Once I talk her into it. But, I am not sure about Book.'
Lee mentally stated, in a reassuring manner, 'It is my body. I am in the driver's seat. And I get the final say as to what happens. But, we will be polite about it. Book can sleep through it, if he wants.'
Wash mentally responded, 'Okay... Hold on... I just looked at some other memories you have.. What is this about Firefly series and Serenity movie?...'
Lee thought, 'Well, there a lot of things we need to tell you. In good time.'
Wash mentally deadpanned, 'That is an understatement.'
River said, “While you to sort that out, let's head over to Haven, and get Book.” She then closed book, and tucked in under her left arm. Next, she used her right hand to pulled out her reality device, from one of her pockets.
Lee and Wash thought, in unison, 'Good idea.' Lee then walked over to River.
As Lee stood by River, River began to about where, when, of the reality they were in, that River wanted to go too.
A few seconds later, Lee noticed it was the sky instantly went from day time, to night time, where they were at.
Lee saw the clear, starry sky above them. But, she also so smoldering ruins, of what appeared to be a town, in the distance.
Wash mental thought, 'So, that small device allows you to travel through time and space, in an instant?'
Lee mentally replied, 'And through realities.'
Wash thought, 'This gets more interesting by the minute.'
Lee mentally agreed, 'Yes. It is.'
Wash thought, 'I am guessing this is right outside Haven, near where Book died. But, when are we?”
Lee looked over at River, as she mentally replied, 'You will have to ask, River.'
River looked at Lee, as she answered, “We are technically in the past, from the point in time that we left. Right now, it is a few days ago. Several hours after Serenity left for Miranda.'
Wash mentally asked, 'So, I am still technically alive right now, at this point in the timeline?'
River stated, “Yes. But, we cannot save you. It would create a major paradox. As in potentially reality collapsing paradox.”
Wash mentally said, 'Okay. I guess that would be bad.'
River commented, “Almost as bad as facing Reavers.”
Wash mentally replied, 'Got you.'
River said, “Now, lets talk to, Book.” She pocked her reality device, and pulled out her magical book. She then quickly pages to the point in the book with the summoning spell.
River quickly chanted the summoning spell. Though, she took great care to get the syllables right.
As River looked up from her book, both she, and Lee, saw the translucent spirit of Book, appear in front of them.
Book look at River, as he said, in a ghostly, confused, tone of voice, in english, “River?”
River replied, “Hello Book?”
Book asked, “What is going on? I saw a white light, then I came back from the white light to here.”
River plainly said, “You're dead.”
Book questioned, in a matter of fact manner, “Besides that?”
River answered, “Book, I have a way for you to come back to the living.”
Book pointed out, “But, would it be right? Would God want this?”
River answered, “It is reincarnation. No one is getting hurt. It is voluntary for all parties.”
Book conceded, “That eases the decision, somewhat.”
River stated, “Yes. And given all the hell we have been through, I would think God would owe us a favor, or two. Wash has already agreed to do so. And my friend here is carrying twin sons.”
Book soberly asked, “Wash is dead?”
River answered, “Yes. Reavers killed him. The rest of us survived.”
Book commented, “Still, that is sad.
River pointed out, “Not for much longer. And from what Wash told me. And from what you just told me. I believe that God wants you to come back. Because, Wash stated when he was pushed out of the white light, it felt like it was for his own good.”
Book conceded, “When I was pushed from the white light, it felt the same way with me... Perhaps... But, where would I be, if I did so?”
River kindly replied, “Among friends.”
Book conceded, “You have a point there. Also, you seem to be much more lucid than before.”
River stated, “Yes. I am much better. And I apologize over the freak out with your hair.”
Book said, in a kind, though ghostly tone of voice, “My dear, at the time, you had other issues to deal with. Though, I feel my story has already been completed. Should I not move on?
River stated, “The story never ends. And think of this as an opportunity, to give you more time to make up for past mistakes.”
Book commented, “I always figured I could never hide my past from you. But, you were polite enough not to mention my closet full of skeletons to the others.”
River said, in a comforting tone of voice, “You were always a better man than most people would have believed. You were just misguided, and thrown into a situation that was beyond your abilities to manage.”
Book shrugged, as he replied, “Story of our lives, ay.”
River agreed, “Yes. And I know that was due to lack of training. If you accept my offer, I will make sure that oversight does not happen to you again.”
Book questioned, “Sounds tempting. You said that Wash is already in the womb of this pregnant woman?” He turned to Lee, as he kindly asked, “And who is this mother to be, for me?”
Lee said, in a polite tone of voice, “My name is, Lee. I consider it an honor to both meet you. And to help both you and Wash.”
Book responded, “Thank you. I am guessing the from you skin tone, that you are from the, Lees, of the southeastern U.S., of Old Earth?
Lee complimented, “Yes. You are far more informed than most people.”
Book smiled at Lee, as he said, “It comes with the job.” He looked at River, as he continued, “I guess, I might as well do this. It will be so nice to see everyone, again.”
River quietly replied, “Thank you.”
River quickly page though her spell book, to where the reincarnation spell was, as Lee laid down on the ground.
While Lee spread her legs, she thought, 'At least the ground is not wet, this time.'
River looked up at Book, as she inquired, “Book, do you consent to be reincarnated into one of Lee's children?”
Book answered, “Yes.”
River looked down at Lee, as she asked, “Lee, do you consent to let Book be reincarnated as one of your children?”
Lee said, “Yes. Though, in the unborn child that Wash is not in.”
River said, “Good point. And that should not be a problem.” She then looked down at her book, and she chanted the spell for the reincarnation.
River looked up, just in time, for her and Lee to see Book turn into translucent cloud, and entering Lee's body between her legs.
This time, Lee was ready for the pleasure to effect her. And while she wanted to take the time to enjoy what she was feeling, she realized she had to get going. So, she forced her body to cut the pleasurable experience short, as she began to stand back up.
River noticed this, as she asked, “Is everything alright?”
As Lee stood up straight, she looked over at River. She answered, “Yes. It is just that I realize that it is rude to enjoy something without sharing it with someone.”
River smiled, as she said, “I appreciate that.”
Lee walked closer to River, and came to a stop in front of River, less than two feet from River.
But, just as Lee was about to request that River take them home, she heard Wash say, in her mind, “Hello Book. Are you here?'
Book answered, 'Yes. Hello to you, as well, Wash. And hello Lee...' Book mentally teased, 'Or, should I call you, mother.'
Lee thought, 'Lee, is fine, for right now.'
Book mentally asked, with curiosity, 'So, what has been happening since I was killed?'
Wash answered in thought, with mild amusement, 'Judging from the memories of our new mom, that I have looked through, a whole lot.'
Book mentally inquired, 'Such as?'
Wash mentally said, 'These are River and Lee's kids. River and the others can now instantly change genders with a sneeze.'
Book mentally burst out laughing.
Lee just calmed her thoughts, so she could listen.
As Book calmed down, he thought, 'Gaining that ability must have wounded Mal's male ego quite a bit.'
Lee mentally deadpanned, 'That would be an understatement.'
Book let out another mental laugh. He then mentally inquired, 'So, are we just going to be like this until we are born?'
Lee thought, 'No. Your memories and personalities should gradually seal in around month. Until then, you will be like this. And don't worry, we plan to unseal your memories when you are in your middle to late teens.'
Book mentally replied, 'That is comforting to know.'
Lee admitted in thought, 'Also, there is some information I have that Wash has found out, that you may not react well, too.'
Book mentally responded, 'At this point, nothing could surprise me.'
Lee then thought up the Firefly series, and Serenity series.
Meanwhile, River was silent, as she could tell that Wash and Lee were letting Book absorb the information.
Book then thought, 'I take that back. And though, it only reaffirms my faith in a higher power.'
Lee carefully responded in thought, 'Good for you. I have a different of opinion on such matter. And I am sure Wash has his own beliefs. So, no sermons in my head. In exchange, I will let you have some control over my body.'
Book mentally stated, 'Deal. Also, there is someone I would like to talk too, when I get the chance. Along with a number of other people I would like to talk to, in the next few days.'
Lee mentally said, 'I will give you that chance. You will have plenty of opportunities to do so.'
Book mentally replied, 'Thank you.'
River listened to the conversation in Lee's mind, as she thought, 'Good. Both Book and Wash are taking the news that Lee is informing them about, very well.'
Wash mentioned, in thought, 'Just a reminder, Book. River can read our thoughts, and tell which one of us is thinking what.'
Book mentally inquired, 'That is good... River can you hear me?'
River stated, “Yes. And I am glad this process worked.” She mentally added, 'I believe it is best not to mention that I am using magic. Though, they will find out from Lee, soon enough. That magic exists. Also, I think I will not inform anyone else that I can use magic. And as long as I don't try things like creating fireballs, and other wonders. No one else, save those those here, Chang, will be the wiser.'
Lee mentally said, 'By the way, this was all River's idea.'
Book casually responded, in thought, 'Of course. If nothing else, she is unpredictable.'
River said, “Thank you.”
Lee stated out loud, to impress on the importance of her request, “As much as I would love to continued this conversation. We need to head back to the home. To the casino.”
Book asked in thought, 'You live in a casino?'
Lee just verbally answered, “Yes. And River and I are in a threesome relationship with the owner of the casino. We live in the penthouse apartment.”
Book mentally responded, 'I will honestly try not to be judgmental.'
Lee complimented, “That is a rare trait for one in you former profession.”
Book mentally replied, “Thank you.”
River closed her book of spells, and tucked it under her left arm, as she stated, “While Lee explains some more things to the two of you, I will get us home.” She then used her right hand to pull out her reality device, from one of her pockets.
As River thought of the place, time, and reality, to return home too, she listened to their thoughts, as Wash and Book continued to talk in Lee's mind.
In response, Lee mentally thought, 'This must be what Deadpool feels like, with his yellow and white boxes.'
Wash and Book mentally asked, in unison, 'Who is Deadpool?'
River let out a laugh, as she pushed the red button on her reality device, with she and Lee instantly transported back to living room of the Daiyu Palace Casino.
When they arrived, Lee looked over at the clock, and she it was eleven fifteen AM.
Lee said, “Good. We have only been gone for five minutes.”
Book mentally asked, 'Is this traveling across time and space in an instant, with that little device River has?'
Wash mentally said, 'From Lee's memories, we also travel across realities.'
Book reviewed some of Lee's surface thoughts, as he mentally inquired, 'Interesting. So, this is old Earth? Or, is it another Earth, like the Earth that was?'
Lee mentally said, 'Actually, it is an alternate Earth. Today's date would be the date of the distant past of the Earth you both are descended from. But, it is still Earth.'
Book mentally stated, 'So, this is old Earth. After a fashion.'
Lee mentally replied, 'Yes.'
Wash mentioned in thought, 'And from what I am reading of Lee's mind, this is Lee's home reality.'
Book mentally replied, 'Fascinating.'
Wash mentally asked, 'I am curious as to what wonders there are here, on this world?'
Lee thought, in a romantic manner, 'More than are dreamt of in your philosophy.'
River looked over at Lee, as she spoke up, “Ever the poet, Lee.”
Lee turned to River, as she thought, 'It is a good Shakespearean quote.'
Book mentally guessed, 'Hamlet, scene five?'
Lee mentally answered, “Correct.'
River said, “Guys. Just give me a minute to put these items up. And we will go see Chang, in his office. Down the hallway. Then, we will get some lunch.”
Lee turned to River, as she said, “Take your time.”
Lee, Book, and Wash, watched through Lee's eyes, as River cracked a grin, while she turned around and for the book case, across the room, from Lee.
As they continued to watch River, Book mentally asked, 'Who is Chang?'
Wash mentally deadpanned, 'The other lover.'
Lee mentally pointed out, 'And the owner of this casino. So, treat him with respect.'
Book mentally said, 'I will be honest. Given River's intelligence. I always figured, if she ever regained her sanity, that one person would not be enough for her.'
Lee mentally complimented, 'That is a very astute observation. And very true one, at that.'
With her back turned, River's grin widened, as her friends comments, about her.
Lee, Wash, and Book, then watched River set her reality device on a nearby table. She then turned and put her book back where had been on the book shelf it has been.
As they watched and waited, River turn around and head back to them.
Wash mentally asked, 'Hey. I have a question. Since we are hear and aware, Lee. Why don't you feel us move within you?'
Book mentally questioned, 'I would like to know that, as well.'
Given Lee saw River was looking at her, she answered, out loud, “That is simple. You are both still too small. Most women don't feel their unborn children move until their forth month of pregnancy. You both are just over thirteenth week mark.”
“Though, I am sure, if I was quiet, and focused on my stomach, I could feel you move. But, it would be like feeling one's heartbeat. I would have to think about, and it would not yet just be something I feel without focusing on it.”
As River came to a stop in front of Lee, she stated, “She is correct. This is already weird enough, without you feeling your own unborn bodies move, from you new mother's point of view.”
Book mentally said, 'Agreed.'
Wash mentally commented, 'And here I thought things would slow down for me, after I died.'
Book mentally chuckled, as River and Lee giggled a little.
As they calmed down, River said, “Now, let's go see Chang, and then get something to eat.”
River then walked pass Lee, opened the door to the hallway, and exited the room. Lee followed behind. She locked the knob, before she gently closed the door behind herself.
(_)
A few minute laters, as River and Lee walked side by side, as they approached the open door to Chang's office. With Lee to River's left side.
As they walked, Wash mentally asked, 'So, who is this, Chang?'
Lee mentally answered, 'Chang is a former mafia boss, and later, for a time, a dimensional warlord. Though, he is back to running a mafia, but only as a hobby. And he owns and runs this casino.'
'Long story short. Except for him original becoming a mafia boss. Concerning him, pretty much everything else is all my fault. I will share my memories of what I am talking about, after lunch. When you two can have a proper freak out in the privacy of our apartment up here. And no one is going to hold it against you if you go a little crazy at learning what I tell you.'
Wash mentally said, 'We will likely be fine.'
Book mentally commented, 'I agree. Though, I not sure I am going to like this man.'
Lee mentally responded, 'Relax. He is easy going. But, he has some abilities of his own. Such as having very good hearing. But, he cannot read minds. Though, he is a very mentally sharp man... Well, most of the time. He also has gender bending, and longevity abilities, like River and your other friends.'
Wash mentally said, 'That must fun for all three of you.'
Lee thought, 'Yes. By the way, I have precognitive abilities.'
Wash mentally teased, 'You must be fun at the gaming tables.'
Lee mentally pointed out, 'Outside of playing poker with my friends, Whom know about my abilities, I don't gamble.'
Book mentally said, 'That is a wise course to take.”
Lee thought, 'Thank you.'
Wash mentally inquired, 'So, do you play any poker with River?”
River answered, “Yes. And she wins about as often as I do.”
Wash thought, 'That figures. And you know, River, I am not going to call you, dad.'
River said, “You can call me that, after you forget who you are.”
Book mentally said, 'I can live with that.'
Wash mentally replied, 'Okay. So can I.'
By then, they reached the open doors of Chang's office.
As they came to the doors, River quickened her pace slightly, so she could walking in front Lee, with Lee walking into the office, right behind the redhead.
As they approached the desk, they saw Chang sitting behind it.
Chang looked up at the two women, as he stated, “Come in. And from the conversation outside. I take it that you accomplished your plans?”
Wash mentally commented, 'He is sharp.'
Book mentally said, 'As a razor.'
Lee thought, 'Yes. Now, please try to stay quiet. We have to talk to, Chang.'
Though, Book remained silent. Wash mentally teased, 'Okay. Mommy.'
By then, River and Lee reached the two seats in front of the desk. River saw in the seat Chang's right, and Lee sat in the seat to Chang's left.
As they go conformable, River answered, “Yes. And things went off without a hitch. I can even tell which one of them is thinking what.”
Chang responded, “Good. By the way, given your appointment was this morning, what are the genders of your children, Lee?”
Lee answered, “Fraternal twins. Both are sons”
Chang asked, “Are you sure? Given River's abilities. It is a valid question.”
Lee began, “I understand that, but...”
River interrupted, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Lee doesn't want to do the amniotic fluid tests, that will check their DNA.”
Chang pointed out, “That is her right.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Chang responded, “You're welcome. Besides, we will find out, eventually. I am okay, either way... So, are they wake, and aware of what is going on?”
Lee answered, “More than that. They can see, hear, and feel, what I do.”
Chang inquired, “What is it like?”
Lee stated, “It is liked having a full house in my head. But, it is not painful, nor uncomfortable. Also, they have access to my memories.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “Well then. I will leave you to explains things to them.”
Lee deadpanned, “Gee, thanks.”
In Lee's mind, Lee and River heard Wash and Book chuckled a little.
Chang said, in a calm tone of voice, “Hello Book. Hello Wash. I am sure you both realize that this is a new, and wondrous opportunity for the both of you. I am Bai Ji-Shin Chang. Chang to my friends. Mister Chang to everyone else. This is my casino. The Daiyu Palace Casino. And while I run things here, I am an easy going person that cares for River and Lee. I do not believe we will have any problems.”
Lee then heard Wash and Book's thoughts on Chang's introduction.
Wash mentally commented, 'After years of working on the Serenity. I have met a lot of people with questionable morals. And this guy styles me as being slick as they come.'
Book mentally agreed, 'I feel the same way towards him. But, given the circumstances, it is best we avoid any potential problems.'
Lee mentally stated, 'Well, to be fair. I have been known to be slick and manipulative. The point is, if the person in question is manipulating you in a direction that will benefit you? And I believe that is the case with Chang. Beside, this is also a case of glass houses.'
Book mentally conceded, 'I see your point.'
Wash mentally replied, 'Okay.'
Lee said, “They agree with you. And they look forward to getting to know you better.”
Chang's smile widen ever so slightly, as he replied, “Good.”
Lee asked, “River mentioned a meeting today, with the others, about this? So, when and where is it?”
Chang answered, “Three PM sharp, in our private theater.”
Lee agreed, “That is a good place to have a private meeting. So, who is coming?
Chang replied, “Our friends. Same as those in the garage meeting, when you first returned here.”
Lee looked over at River. She then back to Chang, as she asked, “Okay. So, how do you want this handled.”
River looked over at Lee, as she answered, “We will just tell them directly what is going on.”
Book mentally commented, 'That could be a problem. I feel they may not take the news, of our return, in this manner, very well.'
Wash mentally stated, 'And some of them have a hair trigger tempers. To say the least.'
Lee mentally replied, 'I realize this.'
Lee pointed out, “If not handled carefully. This news could upset a number of them. Even Wash and Book realize this.”
Chang responded, “Don't worry, River and I will do the talking. And after they have time to think about it, they will realize that the long term gains outweigh the awkwardness of the momentary situation.”
Lee conceded, “Okay. That is a good point. Anything else you want to talk about?”
Chang inquired, with a bit of interest in his voice, “Are we three still on for tonight?”
Lee shrugged, as she responded, “It depends. Both Wash and Book want to make plans, for a few things tonight. And I agreed to let them do so.”
River looked at both Chang and Lee, as she said, “We will just do things later tonight.” She turned to Lee, as she asked, If that is alright with Wash and Book?”
Book mentally said, 'That works for me.'
Wash mentally commented, 'I can go along with that. Though, let's not jump in the deep end, tonight.'
Book mentally requested, 'Yes. Let us just take our time on such manners.'
Lee mentally commented, 'That is fine with me. Though, you can sleep through it.'
Book mentally said, 'That sounds like a better plan. If we can do so.'
Wash mentally stated, 'I agree.'
Lee answered, “As long as we keep it tame, they will not have a problem. Actually, they plan to sleep through it.”
Chang said, “Works for me.”
River replied, “And me.”
Wash mentally requested, 'Please, ask them to show us their other gender forms.'
Book thought, 'I would like to know what they look like, as well.'
Lee looked over at River.
River look back at Lee, as she said, in a comforting tone of voice, “It is okay. We were going to show them, eventually.”
Chang asked, “Show them what?”
River and Lee looked over Chang, as River answered,, “Wash and Book would like to see our other gender forms.”
Chang let out a small chuckle. He then said, “That is fine with me. I will go first. You go second. And we better stand, to get the whole effect.” Next, he stood up from his seat.
River replied, “I agree.” She stood up, while she turned to face Lee. She then used her feet to remove her shoes.
Chang walked around, to his left, towards Lee. She came to a stop in front of Lee, to Lee's right side. With River to Lee's left side.
Lee turned to River, as she asked, “Are you sure? I mean, I do not want you to tear you clothing.”
River answered, “Actually, I expected I would have to this today. I know my clothing sizes in both my forms. And I am wearing loose clothing, and I don't have on a bra and panties.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
When he came to a stop in beside Lee, the black haired woman turned to look at Chang.
Chang calmly said, “Now, pay attention, Wash and Book.”
Chang then sneezed, and changed into her female form, with her clothing loosening.
Wash thought, 'That is interesting.”
Book mentally commented, 'That is the most inventive use of sneezing I have ever seen.'
Lee mentally agreed, 'Very true.'
River smiled towards Lee, as she commented, “I fully agree.”
Meanwhile, Chang remained in her female form, as she turned around, and walked back to her chair, behind her desk. When she reached the chair, she said back down in it, as she look at River and Lee. She said, “You're turned, River.”
Lee turned to look at River.
River sneezed. And she became a he, and his clothing tightened around his bigger frame, but since River had worn loose clothing, they did not stretch, nor tear.'
River remained this way for a few seconds, before he sneezed, and turned back into a woman. She used her just her feet to put on her shoes. She sat down, as she turned to face Lee.
Book mentally commented, 'Both of them look nice in both forms.'
Wash mentally said, 'I can see the attraction from both of them, in both their forms.'
Lee thought, 'I agree.'
Lee commented, “Both Book and Wash say that both your gender forms look great.'
Chang stated, “Thank you.”
River said, “I appreciate that.”
Book mentally pointed out, 'I said, nice. Not great. Not that I am disagreeing with you.'
Lee mentally replied, 'I know. But, I like scoring points with them.'
Wash mentally giggled. He then thought, 'Don't worry. We all do that with people we care for.'
Lee sarcastically thought, 'I know. And wait until you found out how we met.'
Book mentally asked, 'What happen?'
Lee thought, 'I was on the run from them, and River approached me in her male form, as a man named, Sam. I didn't know he was River at the time.'
Book mentally guessed, 'And you two became good friends?... And later on, something more?'
Lee mentally answered, 'Yes.'
Wash mentally inquired, 'And how does Chang fit in?'
Lee mentally stated, 'River and Chang were a romantic item beforehand. Chang and I have an understanding when it comes to River, and we are trying to have a relationship with each other, so we can both keep River, whom loves us both.'
Wash asked, 'Is it working?'
Lee thought, 'Yes.'
River stated, “She is right. Our threesome relationship is working. I will verify that.”
Chang realized what the others were talking about she stated, in her female voice, “Yes. This relationship is working well. And also, in this form, my alias is Daiyu. As in Black Jade. Though, I think I will change back now.” She then sneezed, and change back into a man. With Chang's clothing filling out to his now larger male form.
Wash mentally asked, in slight disbelief, 'Chang named the casino after himself?'
Lee mentally corrected, 'Herself. And yes.'
Wash mentally inquired, 'So, it is good that Chang back now. I mean Chang does run this casino. I would think if Chang's subordinates found out about this, it would cause trouble.'
Lee mentally answered, 'Not to worry. Chang upper management staff already know about Chang and River's abilities. Actually, most of those on Chang's staff, at this level, are you friends, whom had the same gender bending and longevity abilities. The rest either don't care, or they are paid enough not to care.'
Book mentally commented, 'That is nice to know.'
Lee mentally agreed, 'Yes. It is.'
Wash mentally questioned, 'I agree. And I have to ask. Was Chang originally a guy? Or, a girl?
Lee thought, 'A guy. But, Chang met River as a woman. It is all part of a very long story, I will tell you after lunch.'
Wash mentally responded, 'I look forward to it.'
Book mentally replied, 'So do I.'
River suggested, “As fun as this has been. Let's get some lunch.”
Chang look over at a clock on the wall, and he saw that it was eleven thirty-one AM. He turned back to the two women in the room, as he said, in his male voice, “I know it is a little early, but I think I wall join you. Does the private room at the restaurant downstairs, sound okay?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
River commented, “Well, that is what I was planning in the first place.”
Chang said, “Good. By the way, how is the morning sickness, Lee?”
Lee cracked a grin, as she answered, “Pretty much gone. And I am looking forward to a big meal.”
River turned to Lee as she teased, “Okay. But, I am going to make sure you work it off tomorrow morning. Though pregnant, I want you to keep your figure.”
Inside Lee's head, she heard Wash and Book laughing.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Laugh it up.' She turned to River, as she calmly said, out loud, “No problem. I like my figure.”
Lee thought, 'So, what would you two like to eat?”
Wash mentally answered, 'A club sandwich would be nice.'
Book mentally replied, 'I am fine with that.'
Lee kindly thought, 'I can an arrange that. I will have some french fries with that. Also, after we get back to that apartment, and explain things, we will practice letting you to take control of my body. For later tonight. Though, I want to be in control for the afternoon meeting, just in case.'
Book mentally agreed, 'Good point.'
Wash mentally stated, 'I agree.'
Chang said, “Okay. Let's get some lunch.”
Chang, Lee and River, all got up from their seats. They headed out of the office, and into out into the hallway, towards the front elevator that would take them to the casino restaurant, on the ground floor.
(_)
Three hours and twenty-eight minutes later, it was three PM on the dot.
Lee, River, and Chang were in Chang's private movie theater, and ready to have their meeting with the others. Lee was in the center, with River to her right, and Chang to her left.
The lights in the theater were left on.
Those in invited were mostly sitting in the seats of the front rows. While some were standing in the aisles
Those present were Mal, Zoe, Spike, Jetta, Jayne, Kaylee, Simon, Inara, Faye, Annie, Arcee.
Though, Arcee was in motorcycle mode, in the far left aisle of the room, when facing the movie screen.
Matthew was not there, because Lee, River, and Chang, had all agreed that man was stressed out enough, as is, from the weirdness that he has been thrust into. They did not need to add more weirdness to Matthew’s life.
Wash thought, 'It is nice to see everyone, again. And they don't look much older than we left them.'
Book mentally said, 'I agree. Do any any of them know what is going on with us.'
Lee thought, 'Not yet. None of the invitees has been informed what this was about. That is why we are holding this meeting... Still, I wonder...' She looked over at Annie, whom was sitting in the third row, near where Arcee was.
Lee saw Annie looking back at her, with an amused look at on her face. Lee thought, 'Oh yea. She knows.'
Book thought, 'Who know what?'
Lee mentally answered, 'Annie knows. She is the brown haired, fair skinned woman I am looking at. Among her abilities, she is an empath.'
Book mentally inquired, 'She can read emotions like River can read thoughts?'
Lee mentally replied, 'Yes.'
Wash mentally asked, 'So, who is Annie? You have showed us a lot, this afternoon. And a few bits of information got lost in the shuffle.'
Lee mentally inquired, 'That is understandable. First, I have to ask, did you ever see the old Star Wars movies. The original trilogy, and prequels?'
Book and Wash mentally answered, in unison, 'Yes.'
Wash mentally said, 'It is a classic.'
Lee agreed, in thought, 'That it is. Do you remember who Darth Vader is?'
Book and Wash mentally responded, in unison, 'Yes.'
Book mentioned in thought, 'That is not a character one would ever forget... Even in death.'
Lee thought, 'Very true. Anyway, I know this might be hard to belief... Well, in comparison to everything else I have informed you about... Which you both took very well, in me telling you, earlier this afternoon.'
Wash commented, in thought, 'We were dead. We are now being reincarnated. And there is no point in going insane over information that we will likely forget within a month, or so.'
Book mentally said, 'True... Now, what it you wish to say?'
Lee thought, in a calm, neutral manner, 'Annie is Darth Vader. She, or more aptly, he was kidnapped between the end of the prequel trilogy and the beginning of original trilogy. Vader then had his limbs and body fully regenerated. And his youth restored. But, the process also changed him into a woman. While, at the time, she hated the nickname, Annie. From her youth. She decided to use that nickname after the gender change.'
Book remained silent, as Wash slowly thought, 'That is Darth Vader?....'
Lee could feel the terror welling up from Wash and Book.
Lee forced her mental state to be one of calm and comfort, as she thought, 'Relax guys. Annie is now one of the nicest people I know. She and I talk about just about anything. She is also good friends with River. In all honesty, you could consider her your surrogate aunt.'
Lee could since Book and Wash start to relax.
Though, Wash mentally asked, 'How can Vader be nice?'
Lee mentally stated, 'The short answer is that she saw her own movie series, including the original trilogy. Of what would have happened to her and her family, if she had not been kidnapped, and changed. And she realized how much of a jerk she was, and she decided to be a better person.'
Book mentally deadpanned, 'That would do it.'
Wash mentally said, 'Yea. Her watching those movies would be a good way for her to see who she previously really was in her life... But, how does she take being a woman?'
Lee thought, 'She is just glad to be out of the black suit, and have her limbs, skin, and lungs back. Among other things.'
Wash mentally conceded, 'I guess there is that.'
Lee mentioned in thought, 'Also, over time, Annie's force powers were fully restored, and she is actually more powerful in the force than she ever has been before... Though, she, and Arcee, are the hit-women for Chang. But, I know for a fact that Chang rarely uses them.'
Wash mentally commented, 'I know too many thieves, soldiers, and killers, to judge. Hell, my wife, Zoe, is the first two... Or, was... And on her bad days, she could be number three with bullet.'
Book thought, 'I have similar feelings on the subject.'
Lee mentally responded, 'I agree. And all of your friends here now working honest jobs. Zoe, Mal, and Jayne are the heads of the security here. Irana is the head masseuse. Kaylee loves her job as the auto mechanic. And Simon is the casino's doctor.'
Book mentally stated, 'I am glad to hear that. So, who is this Arcee?'
Lee answered, 'Right now, Arcee is the pink motorcycle near Annie. Arcee is a cybertronian. An alien robot. Her species can literally transform from their hidden alt modes, which they select, such as her motorcycle mode her, to their humanoid robot mode.'
Book mentally inquire, with concern, 'How dangerous is she?'
Lee mentally answered, 'In combat, she could hold her own against Annie. The good news is we are friends. And she is good friends with Chang Also, she is literally millions of Earth years old. But, between you and me. She still sometimes ask like a pissed off teenager.'
From the corner of her eye, Lee saw River crack a grin.
Lee thought, 'Don't tell Arcee I said that, River.'
From the corner of her eye, Lee saw River shrug an affirmative.
Book carefully said, in thought, 'Quite an eccentric group you have here... And that is including our friends...'
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Hell, this is only half the cast. And this is the sane half.'
Wash thought, 'I have a feeling that our next incarnations are going to be very interesting.'
Book mentally replied, 'I fully agree.'
Lee mentally inquired, 'You are both probably right. So, is there anything you would like tell them? Or, request from them?'
Book said, in thought, 'Just tell them we are fine.'
Wash mentally responded, 'I do have a small request...'
Lee heard Wash's request, and it took all Lee's efforts to not burst out laughing. Which Wash, Book, and River, found amusing.
The only hint of any discern to Lee was a small grin forming on her lips.
Lee thought, 'Now, that is a request. And I will do it.'
Wash mentally replied, 'Thank you.'
Faye quietly asked those around her, “Anyone know what this is about?”
While still in motorcycle mode, Arcee quietly said, “With this group, it could literally be anything.”
Faye softly replied, “You are right about that.”
At that moment, Mal was standing in the right aisle, opposite to Arcee's location. He turned to the front of the theater, as he inquired, “So Chang, why have you called us here?”
Spike sat near Mal, as she commented, a casual tone of voice, “Yes. We would like to know. We still have a casino to run for you.”
Chang turned to Spike and Mall, as he calmly said, “I am sure the casino can handle everyone here being gone for a few minutes. But, just in case, Arcee is still remotely monitoring the security cameras. For cheating and other problems.”
Arcee said, “Everything is fine, right now.”
Jetta joked, “Why don't you just give her our jobs, Chang?”
Chang responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Who do you think helps the other pit bosses manage the gaming floor at night, when you and Spike are not there?”
Jetta laughed a little, at Chang's comment.
Chang stated, “Don't worry. I like you enough to keep you. Besides, you both are honest and professional.”
Spike just shrugged at the acknowledgment, while Jetta said, “Thank you, Chang.”
Faye commented, “Still, we do need to know. Why are we here, Chang?... Did you get River pregnant?”
There was some laughter among everyone, including Lee, Chang, and River.
As they calmed down, River said, “I am not pregnant. But, it does deal with similar matter. As you know, Lee is carrying twins. Today we found out she is having fraternal twin sons.”
Inara, and Kaylee said, in unison, “Congratulations.”
River replied, “Thank you. But, there is more.”
Jayne interrupted, “Nothing to say, Lee?”
Lee carefully said, “I feel that you are more likely to believe River, over what is about to be said. Than, myself.”
Kaylee commented, “Now, that is a statement, coming from you.”
Lee hesitantly replied, “Yea. Just don't get upset when you hear about is going on.”
River said, “After we found out the genders of our children, I convinced Lee to take a trip, with me, back to the Verse.”
Kaylee deadpanned, “And this is where is goes downhill.”
Jetta asked, “What is the Verse?”
Mal stated, “Our home reality. Basically, it is the star systems our people colonized after we left Earth.”
Jetta replied, “Oh. Now, I remember.”
River spoke up, “Good. We went back in time to after we left Mister Universe's moon. And then we went a day further back in time, to Haven, right after we left for Miranda.”
“After receiving Lee's permission, beforehand, I summoned and then convinced the souls of Wash and Book to enter Lee's body, and be reincarnated in her children unborn bodies.”
The silence was suddenly so deafening that a normal people could hear a pin drop in the room.
Mal was the first to speak. He flatly stated, with anger evident in his voice, “You three have crossed a line you shouldn't have.”
Chang casually pointed out, “We have been doing that for years. Besides, the deaths of your two friends has left a hole in you, and the others' hearts, for far too long. And River found a way to fill those holes.”
Those that saw Mal's face at the moment, could tell that he expression alternated between rage, and resignation. A few seconds later, resignation won, as Mal remained silent.
Jayne commented, “Never a dull moment with this crew.”
Kaylee muttered, “This place keeps getting crazier by the minute.”
Inara was sitting by Kaylee, to Kaylee's left side. Inara overheard Kaylee. Inara agreed, “I know.”
Arcee asked, “Annie, are they telling the truth?”
Annie flatly answered, “Yes. I can sense consciousness of three separate people inside Lee. Two of them are in Lee's lower stomach. The other one is Lee.”
Lee said, “Both of them want you to know that they are doing fine at the moment.”
Simon turned to Lee, as he calmly stated, with a hint of seriousness in his tone of voice, “That is nice, Lee... And I want to have a completely checkup on you, tomorrow. I want to make sure your brain and body can literally handle the load of three active minds, in there, at once.”
Lee questioned, “Is ten thirty, tomorrow morning, okay to see you?”
Simon answered, “Yes. I expect you to be there.” He turned to River, as he continued, “And River, I want you there, to help me talk to Wash and Book. I would like a third party that can help verify various tests, that would be difficult for Lee to do.”
River turned to Simon, as she said, “I will be there. And I will make sure she makes that appointment in the morning.”
Simon replied, “Good.” He voice took a firmer tone, a she continued, “Also River, I know you are the one to come up with this plan.”
River admitted, “Of course.”
Simon questioned, “So, how did you accomplish this?”
River thought, 'Oh well. I might as well tell them.' She said one word, “Magic.”
Mal stated, “There was a time I would have considered that answer to be grounds for insanity. But, after everything we have seen, and been through, I don't doubt you. And given it is you, I am not surprised you accomplished this.”
Jayne deadpanned, “While I am happy that Wash and Book are back... After a fashion... I hope this did not require any sacrifices to do so?”
River flatly answered, “It didn't. And if spells had required such measures, I would have used other, more humanitarian means.”
Inara questioned, with slight disbelief in his tone of voice, “I am sure you would, River.” She mentally added, 'You have always been kind in your own way, River.'
Inara saw River smile towards her.
Inara continued, “And I find it interesting that you can use magic, now.”
River commented, “My skills seem to be more broader than previously I come to believe.”
Inara said, “That is a scary thought.”
River replied, “I agree.”
Spike looked over at Lee, as she asked, “Lee, did you cause this?... I mean, do you write this, so that River would gain magical powers? I don't remember you mentioning that in your stories.”
Lee flatly stated, “No. Why would I given more power to someone who is already a telepathic badass genius, that is skilled at any ability she applies herself to learn? And it was River's original creator that made her that way. All I did was help her regain her sanity...” She turned to River, as she continued, “No offense, River.”
River turned to Lee, as she casually said, “None taken.” Both lovers then turned to look back at the crowd in front of them.
Faye commented, “Lee has a point there.”
Jetta stated, “This just means that not every screwy thing that happens to us, from now on, is Lee's fault.”
Spike conceded, “I hate to say it. But, you're right, Jet.”
Kaylee questioned, in a kind tone of voice, “So, how did you learn magic, River?”
River answered, “The usual ways. I read books and talked to people on the subject.”
Kaylee rolled her eyes from slight self-embarrassment, as she thought, 'Ask a stupid question. Get a stupid answer.' She looked over at River, as she verbally replied, “Of course.”
Kaylee saw River give her an amused smile.
Kaylee sighed, in response.
While not one had pointed the matter out, during this time, everyone noticed that Zoe had become real quite, since River had dropped the bombshell about Book, and her deceased husband, Wash, were now living as Lee's unborn children.
Inara turned to Zoe, whom was sitting right beside her, to her left side. Inara asked, “Zoe. You are the one most effected by this news. What do you have to say about this?”
Zoe turned to Inara, as she calmly answered, “It hasn't fully hit me, yet.”
Zoe then turned to look at River, Chang, and Lee, in front of the theater. She said, in an authoritative tone of voice, “But, I want to know if it's really true. Are they really inside, Lee. Is my husband in there?””
Lee answered, “Yes. And they can see, hear, and feel, everything I do. And they want me to tell you that they are doing fine.”
Zoe demanded, in an even tone of voice, “Then, prove it.”
Lee calmly said, “No joke intended. But, Wash does have one request. He would like his toy dinosaurs back. So, he can play with them... As a baby... Well, toddler... We do not want him to choke on them...”
Silence reigned for a couple of seconds. Then, nearly everyone present burst out laughing. Including, Zoe, River, Chang, and Lee. With Wash and Book mentally laughing.
As everyone laughing began to calm down, Zoe gave Lee a believing smile, as she said, “I will get them for you, later.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Kaylee inquired, “Someone needs to ask this. And I guess I will do so. Are they going to have their same minds, when they are born? This is already awkward, bordering on the insane... Even for us... And none of us want it to become nightmarish.”
River answered, “No. Their minds and personalities should seal in about a month. And we will unseal their memories and personalities, slowly, when they reach their middle to late teens.”
Zoe said, in a tone of voice that promise pain to anyone that make a smart-ass remark afterward, “Either way, I am not changing my husband's diapers.”
River carefully said, “Relax. We have a plan that will handle all your issues, Zoe. When we are ready to do enact that plan, we will tell you about our plan, in private, beforehand. We figure, given Wash was your husband, that you have a right to know.”
Zoe flatly responded, “Good. And it had better be a good plan.”
River smiled towards Zoe, as she commented, “It is.”
Kaylee asked, “Now, onto some more entertaining aspects of the situation. River, will they inherit your gender abilities? Or, other abilities, which you and Lee have?”
Lee spoke up, as she stated, “We will not know until after they are born. But, they are healthy. Also, we have no clue if they inherited River's longevity, and gender bending abilities. Or, my precognition skills. Or, our skills in creativity and intelligence.”
Kaylee responded, “That is to be expected. What are you feelings on this, Lee?”
Lee answered, “My feelings are conflicted on this. But, I hope this helps make up for some of the things I have done to all of you.”
Kaylee casually responded, “Oh. You are winning brownie points on this one.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Arcee inquired, “So, how much do they know?”
Lee said, “I wasn't sure if I wanted to tell you all this, or not. But, they also have access to my memories. And before we came here, we spent the last few hours going over everything I could think of on the matter. And after taking a little time for information to sink in, they told me they are okay with this situation.”
River commented, “Yes. They are fine with the matter. I can read their minds. And I can tell which of them is which. Everything is good at the moment.”
Arcee stated, “Good. That does solve a few problems.”
Annie offhandedly said, “At least we don't have to explain things to them.”
Arcee agreed, “True.”
Jayne commented, “I don't know about you guys. But, I am looking forward to seeing how this plays out.”
Faye stated, “Yea. This does open up a lot of doors. And a lot more options for everyone.”
Inara agreed, “You're right, Faye. And this solves the problem with accidental deaths, which may arise over time.”
Spike pointed out, “Still, the catch is you, or someone else, has to get knocked up, to bring someone back, and then you have to raise them the old fashioned way.”
Faye looked over at Spike, as she halfheartedly stated, “Hey, if you can handled it. I don't see why I couldn't. Though, there is no one, currently dead, that I would care that much about to bring back at the moment.” She then looked towards Lee, River, and Chang.
Simon commented, “Inara, Faye, you are both right. This does allow for a number of options for us.”
Chang complimented, “Simon is correct. Inara, Faye, you foresight is spot on.” He mentally added, 'And that is why I helped River with her plan. Because it did prove there were other options for us. Should the worst happen.'
In response, Faye let out a small laugh towards Chang, while, Inara gave Chang as smile.
Spike stated, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “If that is it. We have other things we need to get back to.”
Spike thought, 'Like being with Julia in a few hours. Though, been before I got back to work, I will check on her, and her tutor, in my private office. Which I had converted to a school room for Julia. Chang said he didn't mind. And I am glad Julia is doing good in her schooling. Considering, I the amount I pay for such tutors. I would expect nothing less from her.'
Chang looked over at River and Lee.
River said, “I have nothing else to say.”
Lee replied, “Same here.” She mentally reflected, 'I really do not want to risk saying something that will ruin the peaceful mood we have going.'
Wash mentally agreed, 'That is a good point.'
Book mentally said, with comfort, 'Not to worry. It seems they took the news well.'
Lee thought, 'I agree. But, it is good to still be wary of the situation.'
Book mentally responded, 'That is true.'
Chang, Lee, and River then turned back to face the crowd.
Chang said, “Okay. You can go. Thank you for coming. And thank you for being understanding with this situation.”
People began to get up, as they exited the hallway.
Near Arcee, Annie got up and exited into the aisle by Arcee. With Annie being in front of everyone on that side of the room, as they headed the closest, of four different double doors in the room.
Two double-doors were the side walls, across from each other, in the front of the theater, near the wall with the screen. The other two double-doors were on the opposite corners of the back wall.
The reason for so many doors was that Chang was a big fan of having multiple exits plans to choose from at once.
Also, the doors had been set to automatically lock from the outside, and required a key to unlock and enter. The doors would open, from the interior, with a key. The front doors swung outwardly, while the back doors swung inwardly.
The exit that Annie and Arcee were heading for was one of the exits in back.
Annie then walked in front of Arcee, as the cybertronian slowly rolled behind her.
When they reached the exit they were headed for, Annie open both double-doors and Arcee rolled into the hallway, right behind her.
As the others filed out of the theater, in the front of the room, River asked, “So, what do you two want to do for the rest of the afternoon?”
Chang and Lee looked over at River.
Chang replied, “Honey, I have to head back to work. But, we will do supper around five thirty, or six.”
River replied, “Okay. And you, Lee?”
Lee answered, “Well, I was hoping you would accompany me to the penthouse living room, where we could both talk with Book and Wash.” She though, 'While practicing giving them some control over my body. They have both have plans tonight. And I have agreed to help them.'
River stated, “I would be more than happy to do so.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Chang, River, and Lee then headed for one of the exits of the theater, as well.
Once everyone had left the room, Arcee used her connection to the building's computer system to turn off the lights after them.
(_)
Later that evening, around seven PM, and Zoe had come off her shift an hour ago.
Given everything that had happened that day, she felt like taking off early.
Mal, whom was staying until ten PM at his job, understood, and he allowed her to leave early.
Otherwise, Zoe would have gotten off her shift at eight PM.
Zoe had already eaten dinner, and she was now heading to her suite, in one of the higher floors of the casino, to get some rest.
Zoe has used the front elevator bay to head to the level her apartment was on. Which was on one of the floors reserved for the staff that lived and worked there.
After Zoe made it to the level her suite was one, she exit the elevator and walked down the hallway. She soon turned a corner in the hallway, that lead to her suite, Zoe saw Lee leaning the right side of her body against the wall, next to, and right behind the door to her suite. With the door to Zoe's suite being to her left.
Zoe saw that Lee was still wearing her casual clothing from earlier that day. Along with this, Zoe noticed that Lee was looking at her, with a childish grin on her face.
Zoe also noticed that no one else in the hallway.
As Zoe approached Lee, she deadpanned, in a low growl, “What do you want?”
Lee maintained her grin, as she playfully commented, “Lee figured we needed to talk.”
As Zoe came to a stop, two feet in front of Lee, Lee was forced to slightly look up to see the taller woman's face.
Zoe looked slightly down at Lee, as she stated, with a hint of force, “You, of all people, should know better than to want to mess with me. I don't like people that mess with my life. And you have turned my life upside down. Twice. And if I didn't want to risk harming Wash and Book, I would be kicking your ass down the hallway, right now. Especially, because of what you and River have done, I am going to have to grieve for my husband. Twice!”
Lee said, “We were afraid you would think about it, that way. But, it is more of a case of visiting, and be back someday, on a more permanent basis.”
Zoe responded, “Even so. No matter your intentions. Or, River and Chang's intentions. The captain is right. What you, River, and Chang did, crossed a line, you shouldn't have.”
Lee stated, “Listen, Zoe. There is one thing, about this situation, that Lee didn't tell the others. Including you.”
Zoe remarked, “And that would be?”
Lee said, “That Lee can allow the other two to take temporary control of her body.”
Zoe sarcastically commented, “That is interesting. By the way, talking in the third person, Lee, shows that you are insane.”
Lee giggled a little, as she stopped leaning on the wall, and stood straight up. She then responded, “I never said I was, Lee.”
For a few seconds, there was silence between the two women, as Lee watched Zoe's eye dawn with realization.
Zoe quietly said, “Wash?...”
Suddenly, without warning, Lee took a step forward, leaned up, on her toes, and she kissed Zoe on her lips.
Zoe immediately recognized who was kissing her, by the way she was kissing. And she shared her kiss with Wash.
The kiss lasted a few more seconds, before Wash then broke the kiss, as she stood back on her feet.
Zoe silently looked into the eyes of the other woman for a few seconds. She then leaned down, and embraced the other woman, as she kissed her deeply on the lips.
Wash returned both the embrace, and, the kiss, for another several seconds.
As they broke their kiss, and embrace, they looked at each other.
Zoe said, in relief, “I really needed that.”
Wash replied, “Honey, I know that it has been a long time for you. Now, let's go inside and talk. Where it is private.”
Zoe leaned up straight, as she agreed, “Good idea.”
Zoe turned to her door, as she pulled out the card key to her door.
Zoe then unlocked the electronic door lock, and walked inside in her suite.
When Zoe entered the room, she move to the side opposite to where the door swung inwards. As she came to a stop, she flipped on a wall switch, by the door, that turned a pair of yellow ceiling lights on in the room.
Wash walked in to the room, right after Zoe. As she continued further into the room, she looked around, she saw that it was a small living room.
Behind Wash, Zoe pocketed her key card and gently shut the door. With the knob automatically locking, on the outside, when it was closed, but could be opened from the inside, with ease.
Zoe then turned to Wash, as she commented, “I know it is not much. But, it is a lot better than just a bunk on Serenity.”
Wash turned around to face Zoe, as she complimented, “It is nice.”
Zoe stated, “When Chang renovated this place, he dedicated a few of the floors as living quarters for the staff. While it is not very big. It is still a nice place to live. Living room, kitchen, bathroom, and bedroom, Along with a fenced in balcony, that is big enough to place small table, and a couple of chairs outside. Some of these suites, like Spike and Julia's, even have two bedrooms.”
Wash understood what Zoe was hinting at, as she stated, “It is always nice to plan for the future.”
Zoe walked up to Wash, as she said, “I agree.”
A second later, Zoe came to a stop three feet in front of Wash. She then asked, in a more serious tone of voice, “I have to ask. Am I still a widow?”
Wash answered, with a bit of comfort in her tone of voice, “For the moment. But, I hope someday to change that.”
Zoe responded, “As do I. Now, how are Book and Lee doing, right now?”
Wash answered, “Book is asleep. Because he respects our privacy, and he doesn't want to be a part of what is coming next. And Lee has to be awake to allow me be in the mental pilot's seat of her body. And I can not add possessing another body on the list of things I have piloted.”
Zoe happily smiled, as she said, “True. And I am not surprised by both of their reactions to this situation.” Her voice turned more warm, as she continued, “I want you to know that I realize that, with your new body, you are not going to look you did before, and that I don't care. I just want to back, as an adult.”
Wash gave Zoe a smile, as she kindly said, “I know. And even if I forget this conversation, I am sure Lee will someday remind me of this night.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. I will.'
Wash thought, 'Thank you.' She said, out loud, “Lee just confirmed she will... Listen, we don't have a lot of time. So, I figured we might as well just have some fun.”
Zoe began, “Are you suggesting?...”
Wash stated, “Yes. We don't have time to do anything else. So, can you think of a better way we can spend our time?”
Zoe sighed. She commented, “Well, I would love to have a long conversation with you. But, the way you are talking, this visit will be brief. So, I guess I am okay with doing that.”
Wash said, “Good. And besides the time constraints. The reason I am being so forward about this is that River mentioned that you have not really been with someone since me. If that is the case, it is best we do this while we still can.”
Zoe stated, “It figures that minx would tell you that.”
Wash replied, “Yes. I find that touching, on your part.”
Zoe responded, “Thank you. What else has Lee and River informed you about?”
Wash answered, “I know about about that screwy gender virus. Honestly, given your cute, tomboy personality, I did occasionally wonder what you would have been like as a guy.”
Zoe laughed a little. As she calmed down, she conceded, “Of course you would, dear. And I do not mind showing you that side of me. Though, my male form is actually a little taller, more muscular, and... Beefier... And I cannot change in the clothing I am wearing, without tearing it.”
Wash replied, “I look forward to seeing that side of you in a minute.”
Zoe responded, “Yes. It will be fun.” She then frowned, as she continued, in a sad tone of voice, “I just wish you could stay.”
Wash stated, in a calm tone of voice, “Patience my love. We will be back together, sooner than you think. And with your longevity, you won't age much in the meantime.”
Zoe commented, “But, I am worried, if you will still be you.”
Wash said, “Lee mentioned someone you know, that is in a similar situation. Her name is, Violin.”
Zoe replied, “Yes. And thinking about how things turned out for her gives me hope.”
Wash responded, “Same here. Also, there is another issue that from Lee's memories that both you, and she, have been avoiding. Something Lee changed about you, and your future. I wish to address this.”
Zoe questioned, “Let me guess. The fact that Lee arranged for me to not be pregnant, with our daughter?”
Wash stated, “Yes. And from Lee's memories, since finding out what she wrote, actually happened, she is not going to touch the issue with a ten foot pole. Especially, around you. Because she feels that you would likely kill her for just reminding you of it.”
Zoe let out a hollow laugh. She then said, “I know. Though, I am not going to kill her over her.”
Wash sensed Lee relax some. Wash then asked, “When did you learn about her?”
Zoe answered, “I learned about my alternate self's pregnancy from reading Lee's stories. And Lee only mentioned her in passing.”
Wash spoke up, “And those stories are a can of worms, in of itself.”
Zoe sighed. She then said, “I know. Anyway, it was only recently that I tracked down the comics that took place after our series and movie... Wash, this is so damn strange...”
Wash halfheartedly commented, “I know, Zoe. But, at least let us make the strangeness work for us.”
Zoe responded, in a sober tone of voice, “Agreed. When I first learned that Lee changed it so I was not pregnant with our child, our daughter, I was furious with Lee. Then, I got to thinking about it. And I realized the situation my counterpart was in. Even with the crews help. She was a single mother, on the run from a galactic armada. That is not a good way to raise a child. And the birth had mild complications for my counterpart.”
Wash deadpanned, “That would just be our luck.”
Zoe stated, “To say that least... And after a while, I came understand that. Along with realizing the pros and cons. And as Lee pointed out, the trade off is that Inara is not dying.”
Wash smiled, as she said, “Listen. When we get back together. We will solve that little problem.”
Zoe returned Wash's smile, as she responded, “Yes. We will...” She then continued, in a more joyous tone of voice, 'Now, to talk about something more positive. Just so you know. Besides the obvious, between men and women, there are some differences when making love.”
Wash stated, “I have Lee's memories on the subject. And to say there are differences, is an understatement.”
Zoe pointed out, “Still, either way is pleasurable... Yet, with Lee being pregnant with... Well, you and Book... That could cause problems.”
Wash said, “I agree. That does limit our options in bed. But, Lee informed me that we are not limited not by a lot. And besides, I am willing to do it anyway you want.”
Zoe inquired, “I know. And how about girl on girl? Then, guy on girl? And finally, girl on girl?”
Wash said, in a supportive tone of voice, “That sounds wonderful to me.”
Zoe replied, in a grateful tone of voice, “Thank you...” She then asked, with a bit of curiosity in her tone of voice, “By the way, what is it like being pregnant?”
Wash responded, “Well, I am technically pregnant with myself... I never thought I would ever hear myself say that. But, Lee's stomach just feels like a large lump right now. No movement.”
Zoe said, “More's the pity... Well, let me show you to my bedroom. And my queen sized bed should be big enough for the two of us to have some fun in.”
Wash happily responded, “Just lead the way, my love.”
Zoe giggled a little, as she walked passed Wash, and further into her suite, with Wash following right behind her.
(_)
A few hours later, in the darkened room of Zoe's bedroom, both Wash and Zoe were asleep, beside each other, on Zoe's bed.
Both were nude, laying over on their backs, over the bed sheets, with Zoe in her female form.
When facing from the foot of the bed, Zoe was on the right side of the queen sized bed, and Wash was on the left side of the bed.
While the two lovers were sleep, while Lee was still awake.
As Lee laid in Zoe's bed, she thought, 'When it comes to sex, they may be tame, but their endurance is insane. It was like one tidal wave of passion, right after another... I am going to need a few hours to rest, before I have some fun with River and Chang. But, that will not be a problem. I even have something in mind, though, I am going to need to know what time it is, right now...'
Lee then looked at the clock on a nightstand, to her right side. The green LED clock stated that it was nine twenty-two PM.
Lee thought, 'Good. I got plenty of time for what I need to do.'
Lee then felt the stickiness and slight soreness between her legs, as she continued her thoughts, 'And I am going to need that time for a nice hot show to relax everything, and to get cleaned up. Though, we did use condoms, Zoe, as a guy, really knows how to fill a woman... In so many ways... And those two, no matter the gender, worked like clockwork, with each other... Each one anticipated the others movements. That requires a level of intimacy, between two people, that is rare now a days...'
'Whatever the rest of River's plan is for those two is, I am sure they will be fine, in the end.'
'After I get cleaned up, I will change clothes, and mentally wake up Book, without disturbing Wash. Fortunately, I am able to sense the two of them. And I should be able to do this without a problem. And then, I will help Book with his request.'
'Now, to get out of this bed, get dressed, and leave for the penthouse apartment. Without waking Zoe... Fortunately, I convinced Wash to put all my clothing in a pile, over my shoes. Along with leaving the bedroom door open... So, this should not be too hard...'
'Then again, it is tempting to make my way back upstairs in the nude. Who would believe a pregnant, naked woman, stripping down the hallways of the hotel?... But, I think I won't. I have to go downstairs, to the an express elevator, to get back upstairs. And doing so in the nude would cause too many problems... Now, to get out of here...'
Lee then carefully got up from the bed. She then silently made her way in the darkened room, over to her clothing. She used her sense of touch to figure out which pieces of her clothing were which, as she slowly put on her clothes. After she was dressed, she slowly, and quietly, made her way out of the bedroom. Soon, Lee has exited Zoe suite, and into the hallway, without waking Zoe.
Lee had soon made it to the door to the hotel hallway. Lee gently turned the knob, and opened the door.
As Lee slowly pulled the door open, she swapped hands, to hold the knob open from the outside.
She then slowly shut the door, as she made her way outside. When the door was fully closed, with her in the hallway, she slowly allowed the knob to return in the locked position. When it reached the position, the only sound it made was a soft clicking sound, as the outside of the knob locked.
As soon as the door was closed, Lee turned to her right, headed for the back elevator bay, which was the closest to her. Which was the opposite direction from which Zoe had earlier come to her apartment.
When Lee reached the elevator bay on that floor, she took an elevator to the first floor. Where she then to the back express elevator to the penthouse.
Once on the penthouse floor, she headed to the apartment where she, River, and Chang lived. As soon as she got there, she cleaned up, and put on some fresh clothing. So, she could get ready to help Book with his request.
(_)
It was ten ten PM, by the clock, hanging in the wall, in the casino restaurant.
Mal had finally got off his shift a few minutes ago. And after buying a bottle of good Bourbon whiskey from the bartender on duty, behind the bar counter, along with a small glass to pour the whiskey in. Mal retired to one of the private rooms in the restaurant, which was either reserved for employees, and high rollers that visited the casino. Though, not at the same time.
As the moment, Mal was the only one in the room. He was sitting in a cushion chair, at a table, alone, in one Bourbon whiskey, and a glass that was half full. He was facing the door to his private room.
The room itself was like all the private rooms of the restaurant. A double-doors, with paneled windows on the doors, and walls facing the restaurant, and the walls that faced out into the casino gaming floor.
This allow the occupants of the room to look out at the restaurant, and through the restaurant windows, into the gaming floor itself.
Though, the windows that faced the gaming floor directly were one way, while the windows facing the restaurant were translucent.
Most of the private rooms has tables that could sit six to eight, in a round table. But, there was one private dining room nearby that was formal room, with a rectangular table that could six sixteen people in all.
As Mal picked up his glass and he took a sip of his whiskey, he thought, 'This life just gets stranger and stranger... And I don't mind letting Zoe take off early, after the stunt River, Chang, and Lee pulled, this afternoon. I don't blame her. She needs some down time after that... Yet. While I don't agree with what they did, I do understand why they did it. And it will be nice to see Wash and Book, again...'
Just as Mal sat his glass back down on the table, he saw, across the table, the door to his left open in front of himself.
Through the window of the door, Mal saw who it was. He thought, 'Speak of the devil...'
The person was, Lee. From the slightly wet sheen on her long black hair, and that she wore a different change of clothing, than the clothing Mal saw her wearing, earlier that day, Mal mentally theorized, 'I guess she had a shower a very short time ago. As to why, I do not know. And I do not want to know what she has been up to, nor do I care.'
As Lee walked fully into the room, with her right hand holding the door open, Mal saw that she had a bottle of water in her left hand.
Lee calmly requested, “Can I please speak to you, in private? There are some matters I wish to discuss with you.”
Mal thought, 'For obvious reasons. Since moving into the casino, Lee, has gone out of her way to avoid me. If she has something to say to me, in private me, it must be important.'
Mal calmly stated, “Sure. Go ahead. Have a seat.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee gently let the door close behind her, as she moved to the table Mal was sitting at.
Lee pulled out a chair, across the table from Mal.
While Lee sat down in her chair, Mal joked, “I would offer you a glass of this bourbon, but given your condition, I doubt would accept my offer.”
Lee responded, “You would be correct. And that is why I brought this cold bottle of water.”
Lee set her bottle of water in front of her, on the table.
Lee then spent a few second getting comfortable in her seat.
Once she was comfortable in her seat, she looked over at Mal, as she plainly asked, “So, tell me. Did you ever finally come to believe in something? Or, do you need another good sermon?”
Mal eyes went wide for a second, before they quickly returned to normal. He happily grinned, as he said, in a humorous tone of voice, “Didn't I tell you, that you were welcome on my ship, but God was not?”
Lee pointed out, “Yes. But, we are not on you're ship anymore. And given where I left you, you seem to be doing better than I thought you would be.”
Mal teased, “Thought we would be having this conversation in Heaven?”
Lee deadpanned, “If we were lucky.”
Mal responded, “It is good to see you again, old man.”
Lee looked down at herself. She then look back up at Mal, as she stated, “I am clearly no longer a man, nor old.” She continued, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “And my complexion is certainly a few shades lighter.”
Mal let out a small laugh. He said, “That is true. It is good to see you, Book.”
Book replied, “Same here, Mal.”
Mal asked, “So, how are you doing, while being in a woman's body?”
Book retorted, “You tell me. You have more experience on the matter than myself.”
Mal inquired, “How did you learn about that so fast?... Even River wouldn't have told you about that. She knows that it is a sore point for me.”
Book pointed out, “River told Lee, and I have access to Lee's memories. Lee mentioned this, at the meeting, this afternoon.”
Mal commented, “Oh... Well, to be honest. I try not to pay much attention to Lee.”
Book suggested, in a calm tone of voice, “You really should get over what Lee did to you.”
Mal responded, “I have... For the most part... So, is Lee still conscious?”
Book cryptically said, “Lee is letting me be in the pilot's seat. But, she is right beside me, telling me all sorts of interesting things.”
Mal deadpanned, “I am sure. So, is Wash awake in there, as well?”
Book answered, “No. He... Err she already had her fun tonight. And she is asleep.”
Mal guessed, “So, you went to see Zoe?” He mentally added, 'That explains the shower and change of clothing. Still, I cannot blame Wash and Zoe for doing that, when they had the chance.'
Book stated, “Yes. From what Lee has told me. But, I wasn't awake at the time. I believe that those two deserved their privacy.”
Mal replied, “I fully agree. By the way, sorry for using your corpse as a hood ordainment.”
Book joked, “Well, I always did want to be cremated after I died.”
Both adults chuckled a little.
As they calmed down, Book continued, “And from what Lee has told me. It was for a good cause.”
Mal stated, “Your body did help us get pass that hellish strip of space.”
Book said, “I am sure. And I have to ask. Is what Lee telling me, true?”
Mal asked, “What parts?”
Book commented, “I am not sure where to begin.”
Mal stated, “Then, I will make it simple. It is all true. Especially, the most unbelievable parts.”
Book said, “I was worried that would be your answer.”
Mal teased, “Don't have a crisis of faith on my account.”
Book let out a laugh. She then opened her bottle of water, setting the lid on the table, near her. She then took a swallow of water. She sat her bottle of water back down. She commented, “You may find this interesting, but Lee's lack of faith in God is almost as strong as yours.”
Mal replied, “Yes. Lee stated as such. So, how about yourself?”
Book calmly answered, “I still have my faith. I can sense there is a guiding hand to all this. One that clearly is working towards our better interests.”
Mal conceded, “Well, we are talking to each other again. So, that is an improvement.”
Book agreed, “That it is. So, what is going on with you an Inara? Even the blind could tell you two cared about each other, even though you did everything you could to stay apart.”
Mal picked up his glass and took another sip of whiskey. As he set his glass back down, he sighed. He then began, “Our relationship has never been... Stable...”
Book deadpanned, “That is an understatement.”
Mal said, “Yes. And while we live in two different apartments in the casino, our relationship has improved a lot. We talk. We go on dates. We share a bed together, on occasion. And with Inara no longer a whore, that we sleep together more often then you would expect. All in all, things are looking up for us in that department”
Book commented, “That is good to hear. Though, it sounds like wedding bells are not going to chime for you two, anytime soon.”
Mal said, in a slight sad tone of voice, “I have come to realize that I don't think either of us are the marrying type.”
Book stated, “As the good book says. You find happiness where you can.”
Mal called Book's bluff, by asking, “Where does it say that at?”
Book chuckled a little, in response. She then requested, “Point taken. Also, I hope I am not being too forward. But, even with Lee's memories, I would like to see your female form.”
Mal flatly said, “I am not going to sleep with you.”
Book reacted with surprise, as she stated, “Oh no. I would never live that down... Lee would never live that down... We would never live that down...”
Mal burst out laughing for several seconds, at Book's reaction to his comment.
Book remained silent, to give her old friend time to calm down.
As Mal calmed down, he said, “Alright. I give.”
A few seconds later, Mal was able to make himself sneeze, and Book watched as Mal instantly changed into his smaller female form.
Book looked over at Mal, across the table, as she stated, with a bit of wonderment in her voice, “Fascinating.”
Mal joked, in her female voice, “You should see it from my end.”
Book asked, “Does the change hurt?”
Mal answered, “No. Not at all. I do not even feel the change. And that goes for everyone I talked too, whom can do this. It just happens in an instant. And it takes the brain a few seconds to register the obvious changes.”
Book began, “Oh... So, when you slept with Inara?...”
Mal cut Book off, as she said, “When we sleep together, Inara is a woman, and I am a man. Unless it is a special occasion.”
Book teased, “Macho to the end. Even while a woman.”
Mal smirked, as she happily responded, “And proud of it. Still, over time she has convinced me to do it in almost every way imaginable.”
Book commented, “Given Irana's previous occupation, that would be quite a long list.”
Mal smile grew a little wider, as she replied, “I know.”
Book decided to change the subject, as she complimented, “You know. Even though your clothing is not very flattering for you current form. You look very pretty.”
Mal's smile turned a bit warmer, as she responded, “I admit, I cut a good figure in this form. Though, not as good as Inara.”
Book halfheartedly replied, “Of course. But, few do.”
Mal agreed, “That is true.”
Mal then sneezed, and Book watched as Mal instantly changed back into her male form.
Book asked, “So, how long did it take for you to learn to sneeze on command.”
Mal answered, in his male voice, “It took us all a few years. But, given the control we now have, it was worth it.”
Book commented, with a bit of mischievousness in her voice, “I bet. And you know, Mal, with this ability, you could become a mother?”
Mal flatly stated, “Not going to happen.”
Book teased, “From what Lee is telling me, quite a few people in your position eventually changed their minds on the subject.”
Mal retorted, “And more power to them. But, I am not going that route. And the way Lee wrote the rules to these changes, there are no accidental pregnancies, when it comes to those that change this way, whom do it in their female forms.”
Book conceded, “I see your point. So, where did you leave the Serenity at?”
Mal answered, “Since spaceships are not exactly common on this Earth, at this point in time, we had to leave it behind. Still, my ship is currently parked in an enclosed, private hanger, on Mars, in the Cowboy Bebop reality. Everything around my ship is set for automatic billing to a very large bank account, with automatic transfers to a few large secondary bank accounts, if there is a problem with the first bank account. So, it is not going anywhere, any time soon.”
Book said, “That is nice to know.”
Mal asked, “So, why did you really leave us, in the first place?”
Book said, “I felt that the lives that, you and your crew lead, would be the death of me. I guess I was right. And that I did not leave soon enough.”
Mal pointed point, with a mix of sadness and anger in his tone of voice, “Ah hell. The bastards killed almost everyone we knew. Even if you had left us months, beforehand, they would have come after you.”
Book said, with disgust in her tone of voice, “Such blind arrogance, and excessiveness.”
Mal forced himself to calm down, as he said, in a more relaxed, even tone of voice, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Book responded, in a reserved tone of voice, “I believe you are correct. So, that is why you finally decided to leave our home reality?”
Mal answered, in a sober tone of voice, “Even without Chang and Lee actions, we had run out of sky. We are literally on the ragged edge of known space. It was either take Rock's deal, or we would have likely died. And I am glad we took her deal.”
Book responded, “Yes. And I am glad things worked out for all of you.”
Mal happily said, “Same here, buddy.”
Book grinned. She the held up her bottle of water in a toast, as she stated, in a cheerful tone of voice, “To buddies.”
Mal held up his glass of bourbon, as he replied, in a happy tone of voice, “To buddies.”
Both of them took a sip of their drinks. They then set down their glass and bottle, as they continued talking to each other.
Their conversation covered a wide range of topic. And it was a fun time for both of them.
An hour an a half later, they called it a night, and left the restaurant, while heading in two different directions.
By the time Book had reached the front elevator bay, Lee was back in control of her body. With Book making himself go back to sleep. Due to Book not wanting to be a part of what Lee had planned next.
Lee soon use her elevator key to take the express elevator back up to the penthouse, where she, River and Chang, were planning to have some late night festivities, that would be beginning in a few minutes, at twelve midnight.
(_)
Around a month later, it was a crisp February morning. The sun way shining, with all the signs pointing to a pleasant day.
Inside Chang's penthouse office, at the table of the Daiyu Palace Casino, Chang, River and Lee were have a conversation.
Presently into her fourth month of pregnant, except for some minor annoyances, such as morning sickness, Lee had so far no medical problems for herself, nor her unborn children.
That morning three lovers had already gotten up, cleaned, and dressed for the day. They dressed casually. Even Chang. And they had just has finished a breakfast that was brought by the hotel staff.
As the bellhop has just left with the empty dishes, Chang, River and Lee had moved to Chang's personal office, to talk over some important matters concerning their future.
The door the office was open, and inside, at the two chairs in front of Chang's desk, River sat in the left chair, while Lee sat in the right chair.
Chang sat in his chair, behind his desk, as he looked at River and Lee.
Chang asked, “So, how are Book and Wash doing, within you, Lee?”
Chang noticed that River frowned a little, after he asked his question.
Lee answered, in a sad tone of voice, “Both their memories and personalities finally sealed completely a few days ago.”
Chang inquired, with slight concern in his tone of voice, “Why did you wait to tell me?”
Lee said, “I saw no point in doing so. It would not have changed what happened. And I figured you would be ready to know for sure, when you asked.”
Chang conceded, “Fair enough.”
Lee slightly smile, as she mentioned, in a slightly happier tone of voice, “But, while we can no longer communicate with them, we know they are alive. Especially me. Considering, I have now begin to be able to feel them move within me for the last few days. And my babies like to be active. Also, we plan to unseal their memories, and slowly integrate their personalities, with their the ones they will develop, when they are older.”
Chang thought, 'At least, Lee is happy about the situation, instead of sad about no longer being able to communicate with Wash and Book.' He then noticed a slight smile curl on the lips of River. Chang continued his thoughts, 'Yea, River. I am glad you agree. And it was a fun month, to say the least.'
River gave Chang a slight nod. She then turned to Lee, as she said, “And I enjoy laying my hands on your stomach, to feel our children move.”
Lee looked over at River, as she smiled. She laid her hands, gently, over her shirt, on her enlarged, rounded stomach. She stated, “I love to do the same thing, myself.”
Chang questioned, “Before I ask a few more questions on the topic. I was wondering if you had already picked out names?”
River and Lee looked back at Chang, as River said, “Yes. Lee and I talked about it. Though, I think it should be Lee that tells you.”
Lee stated, “We believed we should just keep is simple. We are using nicknames they used based off of their last name, or alias, in their previous lives. As such, we are just calling them Wash and Book.”
Chang pointed out, “Nice idea in its simplicity, but can you tell them apart? It would be very awkward for everyone, after they unsealed their memories, if you gave them the wrong names.”
River answered, “Yes. I can still tell them apart. Even now. So, that will not be a problem.”
Chang replied, “Good.” He then looked over at Lee, as he inquired, “Now, I would like to know. What is it like, feeling them move within you?
Lee answered, “Do you remember what I wrote at the end of book two, when the same thing happened to Rock?”
Chang said, “Yes.”
Lee commented, “I did not do that scene justice. And even with my writing skills I cannot tell you how emotionally happy and fulfilling this makes me feel... My parental instincts... Well, let us just call it maternal instincts, have been switched on. And I cannot wait to have my children, and raise them.”
Chang replied, “That is good.” He mentally reflected, 'At least this will increase the chances that there will not be any serious emotional problems from Lee, as she raises hers and River's children.”
River let out a small laugh. She commented, “Given how happy she is, it is tempting to go through with it, myself.”
Chang stated, “Let's see how we can handle these two first.”
River agreed, “Good idea.”
Lee inquired, “So River, you have occasionally hinted that I will likely not be giving birth in the casino?”
Chang stated, “Actually, we plan for you to leave in a few hours, and we will use time dilation, for both the rest of your pregnancy, and raising yours and River's children. While, when we return, only a few minutes will have passed here. And no one in either reality will be the wiser that we have spent a lot of time in another reality.
River mentioned, “Yes. That way, Zoe will not have to wait around two decades to be reunited with an adult Wash, whom remembers and lovers her.”
Lee asked, “I know we will have to come back occasionally. If for any other reason, for us not to fall of our habit, with what is going on here. So, we will be spending some time here. As such, how long as we talking for those here, by the time our children are grown up?”
Chang answered, “Given the full plan. With time here and there. By our math, it will be around two years.”
Lee inquired, “And what is the time ratio between our time our time here, and our time there?”
River stated, “A month here. And a year there. With us be gone only a few minutes in either reality.”
Lee questioned, “Okay. I am liking this plan. But, where, when, and what reality is, there?”
Chang responded, “That is a fair question. Lee, do you remember that line in book two, about my toying with the idea of becoming a feudal warlord?”
Lee answered, “Though vaguely. Yes.”
Chang stated, “Well, I like the idea so much, that I went to an alternate Earth reality, during the feudal period, in a part of Asia. And I took control, as a leader, in a village and a castle, in a nice valley, with a lake, in the middle of nowhere. I did this after I establish this organization, and those here only thought I was gone for five minutes, at best, on one of my private errands.”
Lee replied, “Not bad.”
Chang admitted, “Well, in honesty. Though, I fought a few battles, for what I not rule. I did not conquer that area, so much as took control. And I did so as a lady, and not a man, as a way that what I did would not be traced back to me. And River was with me, as a woman.”
River commented, in a casual manner, “It was fun.”
Lee said, “Nice thinking.”
Chang stated, “Also, the locals know River and my male forms, as siblings to our female forms.”
Lee inquired, “That is a nice cover story, using a tried and true true. Now, how do these locals view you, and River? And do you rule with an iron fist?”
Chang responded, “I was a warrior queen there. Let's be honest. If you could choose. Would you rather be Conan? Or, Red Sonya?”
Lee admitted, “I admit that is a hard call. Both character archetypes have their perks.”
Chang replied, “True.”
Lee said, “I would guess I would go with Sonya.”
Chang responded, “My thoughts exactly. And Sonya had enough sense to where armor, instead of just a battle bikini... Most of the time.”
River commented, “When it comes to strong, powerful, well thought out women character, Sonya was way ahead of her time. Which is ironic, considering she was created for a fantasy setting. She was the original badass, redhead babe. I admit, I would likely partly inspired by her.”
Lee casually stated, “Given the way you killed those reavers with that sword and axe, at the end of the Serenity film. I would have to say, yes. Most definitely.”
River giggled a little. She then happily responded, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “Yes. River's carnage can truly something to behold.”
Lee returned the smile, as she inquired, “I see the appeal. So, how does River fit into your royal court? Given the time setting, I could understand you both being in the closet. So to speak.”
Chang answered, “No. We are open about our relationship. And they know River is my lover. Though, they don't know about the gender bending.”
Lee pointed out, “You know that is going to come up, eventually.”
Chang replied, “When it does, we will just hand wave it as magic. And I checked. The locals don't really care for magic, one way, or the other, as long as it does not negatively effect them.”
Lee conceded, “Then, that could work.”
Chang stated, “I know. Now, in my court, River is a lady. She has political power in my kingdom, as well. And when we get there, I will formally introduce you, and appoint you as one of my ladies, and lovers, in my court.”
River mentioned, “We have already placed another cushion chair, beside ours, in our throne room. Chang is in the middle. I am to Chang's right, and you will be on Chang's left.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
River replied, “It was no problem.”
Chang responded, “You're welcome. Also, you will not need to attend all the time. Just a few times, occasionally. And like in this casino. As ruler of that kingdom, I keep the hours of what I do, and when I do it.”
“Also, those in that kingdom know better than to question me, due to how powerful River and I are in battle. And with River's telepathy, we will know if there are any serious plots to my rule, before those plots can fully take shape.”
River commented, “Though, such plots rarely happen. And my telepathy lets me know if there are any other serious problems, such as legitimate issues within our kingdom.”
Chang said, “Yes. We have had no peasant revolts. And they serve us well. And they are quite content. Though, not necessarily happy, with their lot in life.”
River commented, “Along with this, while our kingdom is isolated enough not to worry about any large scale armies coming after us. We do get the occasion bandit raids. Though, they rarely get passed the outer walls of the village, let alone the inner walls of the castle, itself. Which we live in.”
Chang responded, “True. They are a minor nuisance. But, other than that, they not something to worry about. And while I do rule in a firm manner, it is just, and within reason.”
Lee asked, “Like back in Roanapur. Where you give individuals a warning, before you bring the hammer down on them?”
Chang happily said, “You know me so well.”
Lee commented, “I thought as much. So, what language do they speak?
Chang answered, “A variation of my native language, which you and River know very well. So, none of us have any problems speaking it. Nor, reading and writing it.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. But, before we leave, be aware that I have always been fond of indoor plumbing, hot and cold running water, soap, toilet paper, hot showers, and other amenities. To say the least.”
Chang stated, “I know. And my personal quarters have all the modern amenities. Though, the locals think of our modern weapons and technology as magic. But, that only adds to the mystique of my rule.”
River said, “The castle walls, including the interior walls, are either brick, or stone. Chang and I also had them redo the roofing, to a modern wooden roofs that can handle stronger winds, from stronger storm.”
Lee complimented, “That is good foresight on your part.”
River responded, “Thank you. And while those outside the castle not have access to much technology we have. Our personal quarters do. Our personal quarter consist of a large bedroom with a large bed, couch, chairs, tables, and some fun toys. A private dining room with a western style table, and chairs. A private kitchen. A medium sized work out room, with exercise equipment. A library, closets, courtyard, and full bathroom.”
Chang commented, “We also have enough gold in a secret safe in our bedroom, to comfortably buy our kingdom, twice over.”
River said, “That is true... Also, the bathroom has running hot and cold water, a large full bath that can fit all three of us, separate large shower that we can all fit in, his and hers adjoining sinks, a full mirror above the sinks, western style flush toilet, with piping that leads into a septic field, away from the castle, and the village surrounding it. Along with all this, we make sure to regularly stock plenty of toilet paper, soap, different types of towels, and other toiletries.”
“The bedroom, itself, is quite large, and is modernly furnished. Modern, comfortable, king sized bed, like we have here. Along with modern pillow, modern silk sheets, and modern style blankets. Should we need them.”
Lee smiled at River's comment on the bedroom of her and Chang's other home. Lee said, “Sounds nice.”
River returned Lee's smile, as she went onto say, “I know. Along with the bed, the room has modern furniture, including a cushion couch, coffee table, a few different types of chairs, and various entertainment systems.”
“Also, the water is pulled from a clean deep underground spring, with a nice, electrical, real time water heater. It is hot water for as long as you want. And the court yard has a nice hot tub.”
“We have a private generator that powers all our items, that is placed in a closet. The generator is alien technology that will not cause hear, let along a fire. And the generator does not need outside fuel. It will last a thousand years, if we want it too.”
Lee replied, “Cool.”
River stated, “We have a small gym, with modern gym equipment. And the kitchen has a stove, oven, microwave, refrigerator with freeze, hot and cold running water sink. We occasionally stock food from other realities, including this one.”
Lee said, “Nice.”
River said, “Yes. It is... And the technology in our private quarters includes all indoor parts having air conditioning and heating, and lighting. A few different entertainment systems, with remotes, and a thin, wide screen TV in our bedroom, that is mount to a brick wall. We also have two state of the art computers... We will have to get one for you... Plenty of video games. Along, with DVDs and Blu-Rays of movies, TV series, animations. Also, our library has some of our personal favorite books and comics.
“Included, are tools to repair minor problems with our items. The rest we can just go to another reality, and retrieve what we need, and come back, within a few minutes of leaving, for those whom stay.”
“And all this is just for starters. We also have nice clothing, and the servants are polite, loyal, and competent, whom know better than to mess with our belongings.”
Lee commented, “Of course. And it sounds like you have thought of everything, for your home away from home.”
River happily replied, “Exactly.”
Lee stated, “I think I will like living there.”
River smiled, as she said, “Good.”
Lee complimented, in a casual tone of voice, “And as expected, from you two, this is how those with in style.”
Chang said, “Thank you.”
Lee mentioned, “Still, there are a couple of minor problems. Though, I haven't really felt like talking about it. As I previously informed you both. Rock told me that Revy wants to be there for the births. And I also, invited Rock to the births, as well.”
River said, “I was waiting until you felt fully ready to address that issue.”
Lee grinned, as she replied, “Touche.”
River turned Lee's smile.
Chang said, “This will not be a problem. Those two know to keep my secrets.”
Lee asked, “Good. Now, besides those two, how many people will we have to let know. about kingdom of yours?”
Chang stated, “I guess Simon, for obvious reasons.”
River said, “I already talked to Simon about this. And he is okay with keeping our secrets, given we will still be coming back for medical checkup, by Simon. And my brother knows better than to ask questions. Given that later today, he you will be seeing him periodically teleport into his office, in the infirmary. With your growing stomach, every time you visit. I even have the appointment already made.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. Now, the most obvious question. Besides the time dilation. Why do you want me to come in the first place? This could be done in a number of nice locations in the multiverse.”
Chang stated, “Well, in the later part of your part of your pregnancy, you might want to some privacy, that you won't have here.”
Lee commented, “Good point. And I am sure that you have plenty of reality devices there, if there are complications.”
River said, “Absolutely. We have several hidden in places throughout the castle. And you can keep one with you, if you want. We will show you were all the devices are, when we get there. And we will not be to far away at any time, from you. Should problems arise.”
Lee stated, “Good. And with my precognition, we should be able to head off any problems, before they arise. Also, if someone suspects something, in this reality, just say we are taking a vacation, to where I could have the babies, and raise them safely.”
Chang said, “Exactly.”
Lee commented, “That will be enough of an explanation.”
River replied, “I agree.”
Chang stated, “Then, it is settled. We will pack up, and head over their, in a little while.” Chang focused on Lee, as he continued, “Still, if you want. You can take your time. We have all the time in the world.”
Lee commented, “While that is all good and well. There is only minor problem left with this plan. Given your extreme longevity, you two physically age very slowly. I still age at a much faster rate. Granted it is slowed by half. But, I do age. And I will eventually grow old with this plan.”
Chang stated, “Should you start to look your age, the vat process is still an option for you.”
Lee conceded, “That is a good point. And you know, if this works out, I, and I guess River, will be two places at once... Which is not a first for this crew... In that, after I have my kids, we returned five minutes later. But, my past self will be coming to see Simon throughout today, every hour, or so.”
River said, “Yes. And, when we get to that point, it is best we do not visit Simon, nor our past selves.”
Lee replied, “I agree.”
River suggested, “But, before we go, we need to talk to Zoe about this. She deserves to know what is going on, given it does effect her, and Wash.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. We do need to talk to her, before we leave.”
Chang offered, “I will call her up here, right now.”
Chang then pulled out his cellphone, and dialed the security section of his casino. So, he could some summon Zoe to his office.
(_)
A few minutes later, in Chang's office, River said, “She is coming.”
River and Lee turned in their seats, towards each other, as they looked behind their chairs to see Zoe walk into the room.
Zoe came to a stop at the threshold of the door, as she calmly look at the three sitting adults. She stated, in a neutral tone of voice, “You wanted to see me, sir.”
From behind his desk, Chang looked over at Zoe. He kindly said, “I appreciate the professionalism, Zoe. But, Chang, is always fine for my friends.”
Zoe replied, “Thank you... Chang. So, what did you want?”
Chang said, “We needed to speak to you for a few minutes, on some personal matters.”
River then turned back around, stood up, and turned to face Zoe, as she offered, “If you want, you can have my chair.”
Zoe gave River a warm smile, as she said, “That won't me necessary, River. I prefer to stand.”
River turned the smile, as she turned back around, and sat in her seat, to face Chang.
As Lee watched Zoe approach them, Lee turned back around to face Chang, as well.
When Zoe came to a stop, between the two chairs, that River and Lee sat in, in front of Chang's desk, she looked down at Chang, as she commented, “I am guessing this is about Wash?”
Chang complimented, “Good guess.”
Zoe turned to her right, as she looked down at Lee. She questioned, “Have their memories and personalities have already sealed?” She then turned back to looked at Chang.
Chang replied, “Correct.”
Zoe said, “At least I got to spent time with Wash, over the last month. And it was nice having a chat with Book. So, I am not complaining.”
Chang commented, “Thank you for being so understanding.”
Zoe inquired, “You are welcome. Now, what is this about, that you could not tell the others?”
Chang thought, 'Sharp as ever, Zoe. I can understand why Mal has you as his second in command. And I might as well answer you question.' He stated, “As you likely realize, River hinted that we had a plan on raising Wash and Book. In that you would not have fret over seeing them grow up. But, first I want to make this clear that this is none of the others concern. So, I will ask you to keep this to yourself.”
Zoe flatly replied, “Of course.”
Chang said, “Later today, River, Lee, and I are planning to head to another reality, where Lee will be giving birth.”
Zoe asked, “Where are you heading?”
Chang coyly replied., “Someplace safe.”
River looked up at Zoe, as she stated, “I can vouch for Chang. The place we are going is safe. Likely safer than here, for a number of reasons.”
Zoe looked down at River, as she said, “I trust you, River.”
Zoe and River then looked back at Chang
Chang stated, “For those here, in this reality, including you, we will be back, in a few minutes. After returning, you and the others will notice that Lee will no longer be pregnant. The children will be raised over in that reality. But, for them, and you, we will only be gone for a few minutes. And if the worst happens, they will be in good hands. Also, if anyone asks, that is what we will tell them.”
Zoe commented, “But, for you five it will be much longer.”
Chang said, “Yes.”
Zoe questioned, “And how long is it going to be for us, when compare to you, until Wash and Book are adults?”
Chang answered, “The plan for us, is to spent one month here, as a break. And for me to conduct business here. For every year we spend there. So, you will be seeing Wash again, as an adult. In around two years.”
Zoe conceded, “That is not a bad plan. And I have waited this long. I can wait a little longer... Can I come with you?”
Chang stated, “I know you feel obligated to ask that question. But, we all know this is both a painful and awkward situation for you. We do not want to put you through any more emotion turmoil, by seeing you soul mate a baby, and later a child. So, the answer is, no.”
Zoe responded, “I understand, sir... Chang... So, have you picked out their new names?”
Chang said, “I will let Lee, and River, handle this question.”
Lee and River looked up at Zoe, as Lee answered, “We are going to keep it simple. We are just calling them Wash and Book.”
Zoe looked down at Lee, as she said, “While I admire simplicity in life. With their memories and personalities sealed. Are you still able to tell them apart?” She then looked over to River, for her answer.
River stated, “Yes. I still can. A spiritual signature is unique. And I learned how to use my telepathy to tell which souls is which. And that such signatures do not change. Even with their memories and personalities sealed.”
Zoe responded, “That is good. Because, It would be bad if you accidentally gave them the wrong names.”
While Zoe looked around her, she noticed Lee and Chang both nodding a few times, in agreement, as River said, ““We feel the same way. And those same questions were addressed in the conversation we just had. Before we call you here.”
Zoe stated, “I am glad we understand each other.” Her voice turned more jovial, as she joked, “Still, if everything works out. I am okay with it. Though, I am not looking forward to being an in-law to Lee.”
Lee deadpanned, “We all make sacrifices.”
Zoe looked down at Lee, as she flatly said, “Isn't that the truth.”
Zoe then turned her attention back to Chang.
Chang stated, “We are already taking precautions to insure things go smoothly.”
Zoe replied, “I realize that. That is why I am allowing this.”
Lee looked up at Zoe, as she stated, “We will try our best to raise these children.”
Zoe looked down at Lee, as she calmly said, “Oh. I know all three of you will do a good job.” She looked over at River, whom was look at her. Zoe continued, “Even with River's mental issues, she is a good woman.” She looked over at Chang, as she went on to say, “And Chang here knows not to screw this up, and cross me.”
Zoe looked back down at Lee, as she said, “And you are trying... And if you get this right, I might consider us friends...” She then sighed, as she continued, “Lord knows, all we can do in life is try...”
Lee smiled up at Zoe, as she commented, “There is always hope.”
Zoe continued to look at Lee, as she agreed, “True.” She then looked back at Chang, as she asked, “Is there anything else?... Chang?
Chang simply replied, “No.”
Zoe looked around her, then, back to Chang. She calmly said, “Then, I guess I will see you... When I see you...”
Zoe then turned around, and walked out of the room, with the three other adults watching her leave.
A few seconds after they saw Zoe exit the room, and turn towards the direction of the hallway, that lead to the front express elevator, the three adults looked back at each other.
Lee was the first one to speak, as she asked, with curiosity in her tone of voice, “So, what type of foods do they have, where we are going?”
River turned to Lee, as she answered, with a bit of joy in her tone of voice, “Several orientate types of food. A few western dishes we taught the cooks to prepare, which did not require any spices or ingredients that were rare in the area. Then, there is what we have in our own private kitchen. And our pantry and refrigerator, has plenty of fresh fruits, vegetables, and other items, that we use a reality device, to retrieve. And on special occasions, we can use our reality devices to get take out, from anywhere, and when, we would like, in the multiverse.
Lee leaned towards River, as she said, “That works for me.”
River and Lee then looked back at Chang.
Chang stated, “With us, Lee, you no longer have to worry about any wants.”
Lee said, “I thought as much. And I look forward to the servants helping us with the kids. Especially, when the children need their diapers changed.”
River commented, with seriousness evident in her tone of voice, “And those that help us will be only those that we trust. Also, I am sure they won't mind us using disposable diapers, we will buy, and bring in elsewhere, from the multiverse.”
Lee stated, “Given they won't have to clean them, I doubt they will ask any serious questions.”
River replied, “I agree. And if they do, I am sure I can handle those problems.”
Lee looked over at Chang, as she asked, “That I have no doubt of. And I take it that we will be wearing types of robes and flowing dresses, when we head over? And we will change into something you have here, before we get there?”
Chang answered, “Yes. I will have to change genders. And we will pack some clothing for type of styles during that period, for ladies of the court. Though, we will bring some clothing for our male genders, and bras for our female forms. I don't like using chest wrappings, and modern underwear, for either gender, is a must. Also, we will pack some casual wear, for when we are in our private quarters, or when we make quick trips to other parts of the multiverse.”
Lee replied, “That all sounds good.”
River commented, “We already bought some of the clothing you will need that are in your size. And there are skilled tailors, and cloth makers, in the kingdom that will make you clothing, as you need it.”
Lee said, “That sounds nice. And if we forget anything, we can just come back for it.”
Chang replied, “Exactly.”
Lee inquired, “So, what type of fabric will our clothing be using?”
Chang answered, “Mostly silk. Of course.”
Lee grinned, as she said, “I am liking this plan, more and more.”
Chang returned Lee's smile, as he calmly responded, “We thought you would.”
Chang, River and Lee continued to talk about their plans for a little while longer. When they finished, they headed to their apartment. When they reached the apartment, Chang sneezed into his female form. They changed clothing, and they then packed.
When they were ready, and after they had previously doubled checked what they had, against what they thought they would need, they pulled out three reality devices. One for each of them. Chang then used her reality device to teleport all three of them, and their luggage, to Chang and River's kingdom... Lee's new second home, in another reality...
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 3: “Dynasty.”
Chapter 08: “Birth into a monster.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, an alternate Earth, during a feudal period, in Asia. Date, later winter, around four months after Lee, Chang, and River, arrived there, together. Location, an isolate, valley in China, with forests and grassy plains. Time, in the middle of the night.
Presently, the village and castle, of the kingdom, were dealing with a massive raid by an army of bandits.
The raid was swift, and some of the bandits had even made passed the several walls, through the village, and over a few more walls, and into the castle itself.
As the battle raged nearby, a nude, heavily pregnant woman laid on her back, on a mat, in hidden, auxiliary room, on a mat, with her midwife. The only light in the room was from lit oil lanterns on the walls.
The pregnant woman had previously been wearing robes. Though, given the confines of the small room, the heat from the lamps, along with her exertion, she had become too hot for such clothing to be comfortable, in the unconformable situation she found herself in. So, she removed her robes, to help herself with the situation she was currently dealing with.
The woman knew of the attack that began a few hours ago. And her lovers and friends, including the doctor that was suppose to be with her, for the birth, were helping the guards that were fighting the bandits.
And, at that point, it was to risky to move her, unless it was absolutely necessary.
It was her time to give birth, and she was doing so.
Yet, she was sure, and she could sense, that they would be fine.
And her lovers did provide her with a trusted, trained, and experienced midwife. So, she could not be doing this during this painful time. Also, she knew from previous doctor checkups, that both her, and her children were healthy. All she, and her children had to to now was make it through the birthing process.
Though, she also realized that she could not join them, and there was nothing she could do while she was in the pregnant and in labor.
Due to the raid, she was not giving birth in her bedroom, but instead, in a small room, on a mat, near the back of the castle, away from the fighting.
Though, except for this attack, the woman's stay that had been wonderful, sense she had arrived their, four months ago. The living conditions were pleasant. The local people were nice. And even though it was during winter, a nearby lake, in a grassy field, outside of the outer walls of the village, was a great place to hold picnic. Which she, her lovers, her friends, along with the guards and servants accompanying them did, a few times.
At the moment, she was in labor with the first fraternal twin coming out of her body.
She grunted as she midwife caught her first child, and the afterbirth for that child came soon after.
The child cried, signally it was alive, which brought a smile to her mother's lips, as the midwife let her hold her son, after gently wrapping the child in a small blanket. The midwife then went to work helping the mother pass the afterbirth of the first child.
A few minutes later, the mother felt the contractions that signaled the near arrival of her second child.
It was then they heard running footsteps, on the wooden flooring, coming from the hallway nearby, coming towards the outside door to their room. She did not recognize the footsteps.
Though, the mother could tell that it was only a single set of footsteps.
The mother knew that the guards were elsewhere in the castle. And that they would not be approaching them. Meaning that a bandit was approaching.
To make matters work, the mother knew that even in labor, she was the only one in the room trained to fight.
She had the midwife take her first born son and hide in a nearby closet.
She then forced herself to stand up, as another a wave of pain, from a contraction, hit her.
She was tired from giving birth to her first child, now she not only had to find the strength to give birth to her second child, but also survive a fight for both herself, her children, and the midwife.
As the door to the outside hallway slid open, she saw a man enter the room. The man was dressed in strange clothing, and he carried a spear.
He immediately saw her, and he quickly lunged the tip of his spear at her.
The mother attempted to dodge the blade, but an abdominal contraction suddenly hit her, creating a distraction that prevented her from completely dodging the attack.
Instead, the weapon had embedded itself in her upper right shoulder, by the shoulder joint, in right collar bone.
But, to the woman's surprise, she found the pain of the injury only made her feel more alive.
She suddenly felt... better. Like she had more energy.
And she began to smile a slasher smile, as her amazon training finally kicked. Training that taught her how to use the pain of being a woman to give her strength in a fight.
Then, another contraction hit her. The pain of this one did not stop, as she felt her second child start to exit her womb, and into the birth canal, so he could enter the world.
She swiftly used her right hand to reach for, and grip the wooden shaft of the spear of the attacker.
The attacker watch with surprise, as the pregnant woman broke the shaft one-handed, while follow the action with a direct punch with her left fist to the attacker's face, that was so powerful that it send the attacker back a few feet into the air, landing on his back, in a daze.
The woman then quickly used her left hand to grip the broken, wooden shaft, just in front of the blade, to pull the blade out of her right shoulder, without even showing the least bit of pain.
She then spun the blade end, by its upper wooden shift, in her left hand, to where the blade tip was pointed downward, as she leaped on top of the man.
As she jumped on top of the man, she landed on her bare feet, with the attacker's left thigh between her feet. As she leaned down, she place her right hand on his left shoulder to both force keep him down, and to steady herself.
The sudden and massive shift movements on her large, unbound breasts had caused her nipples to start to leak out milk.
The woman then began stabbing the man in the neck repeatedly, causing blood to spurted in all directions.
As the man's blood covered her from head to toe, her smile got wider. And she felt a tightness building in her lower stomach, on top of the pain over contraction.
It only took the man a few seconds to dry from his wounds, but the woman kept stabbing over and over, until the tightness in her belly, released into pleasure.
She let go of her weapon, with the blade falling to the wooden floor, while she let out a loud howl, that was a mix with both pain and ecstasy, as she lost control of her bladder, and she became like a wild animal using her urine to mark her territory.
She felt like she had just lost something in that moment. A second virginity. What was left of her innocence. Part of her sanity. She didn't know. All she knew was that the pain she now experienced felt good.
For now, both pleasure and pain had become the same thing to her. A sensation to be enjoyed.
It was then that she felt her body protested to be noticed, as she realize she had to take care of one more errand before she could fully enjoy the beast she had become.
She dropped to her knees, as she began to push her second child into the world.
Her face became a mask of pleasure. She moaned slightly, as she enjoyed the slow birth process.
She soon used her own hands to catch her second child, as he entered the world, from between her legs.
Her second child then began to cry, signaling that he was alive.
She then held her child with her right arm, across her breasts, while she used her left arm to reach down between her legs, and grip the umbilical cord.
She slowed pulled against the cord, while pushing with her uterine muscles, to work the afterbirth free.
After her second child's afterbirth had been expelled from her body, she let go of the cord and hug her son with both arm. While doing so, she leaned her head down towards he child to listen to him breath.
Nearby, the midwife had previous cracked the door to the closest, and she had seen all this. Her lady now more resembled a predator than a human woman.
Suddenly, the woman heard another set of more familiar footsteps approaching her room.
She heard a female voice say, with concern in the woman's voice, in chinese, “Lee are you alright?”
Lee turned her head, and with a wicked grin on her lips, she answered, in chinese, “Never better. Has the bandit raid been put down?”
River looked as her, shock on apparent on her face, as she quickly answered, “Yes.”
Lee smirked, as she stated, “Good. Now, come meet your sons.”
Lee then held up her second born child in her arms, while the midwife came out of the closet with their first born child.
Lee then handed River their second child. And River retrieve a small, nearby blanket to wrapped her second child up. After Lee and River held each other, in gently wrapping their second son in the blanket, Lee handed River their second child. Next, River positioned their second child in her arms.
Lee then looked down at herself, as she commented, “I think I need a bath.”
The midwife also noticed the wounds on her shoulder, as she stated, in chinese, “Lady Lee, we must also treat your wound.”
Lee said, “I have had worse. We will deal with it when we reach our private bathroom. Simon can check on me then.”
River agreed, “Good idea. Simon is a bit busy at the moment, tending to the more seriously wound. But, he will look at you, then.”
Lee replied, “Good.”
Lee then stood up from her couching position. She then started walking towards the open door to the hallway, while completely nude.
The midwife quickly said, “You cannot go like that. It is not decent. Let me retrieve robe your to wear.” With the first born child in her arms, midwife then turned to look at the silk robe, which was set in a corner of the room, across from them. She then turned back to look at Lee and River.
Lee turned to midwife, as she smiled wickedly. She countered, “And ruin such fine silk. I think not. But, now that I think about it, we do need to tie off and cut the umbilical cords.”
River said, “I have the tools in my pockets to do just that.”
Lee said, “Good. Then, lets do that. Afterward, we will head for the bathroom, and the cribs in our bedroom.”
(_)
A few minutes later, after the umbilical cords to both newborn children had cut and a tied, the three women walked out into the hallway, towards their private bathing area.
Lee was in front, with River and the midwife flanking her, while carrying their children. River was to Lee's right, and the midwife was to Lee's left.
Lee was enjoying the sensation of walking nude down the hallway, for everyone to see her.
And she was filthy in several ways. And she was enjoying the experience.
Her long black hair was mess, like that of a wild woman. The blood of her enemy caked her entire body. Blood still slowly dripped from both her right shoulder wound, and from between her legs. And the smells of sweat, urine, blood, and other bodily fluids surrounded her.
And through all this, she was smiling a feral grin.
Lee wanted everyone to see her like this.
Lee was proud to look like this.
Lee wanted everyone to know that even during the painful throws of giving birth, she was still stronger than any of them. That no matter how many men and women would take her in bed, no matter how many children she would carry in her womb, no matter how many births she would give, she would never be tamed.
Lee wanted the rumors of her wildness to become the gossip of not only the castle, but the entire kingdom they were in.
As Lee and the others turned a corner, Lee noticed Revy and Rock were in front of them. They looked no worse for wear. Though, they did look slightly annoyed, given they had wanted to be present for the birth of Lee and River's twins, and they had missed the blessed event.
Still, both of Revy and Rock stared at the wild woman.
Revy asked, in english, with a bit of shock in her voice, due to the way Lee appeared, “Lee?”
Rock inquired, with concerning in her tone of voice, in english, “What happened?”
Lee walked up to them, as she slightly cocked her head to her left, while she continued to grin her wild smile.
Lee looked directly into Revy's eyes, and Lee saw that Revy could see a wildness in Lee's eyes, reflected back from Revy's own eyes. The type of insanity in Lee's eyes that was not there before.
Lee delightfully said to Revy, in english, “Revy, I have found that I love wallowing in the gutter mud.”
Lee then straighten her head, and pushed both of them to her sides, as she passed by them, with River and the midwife silently following behind Lee, with Lee and River's children wrapped in clothes, in their arms.
Revy and Rock turned their heads, as they watching the three women walk away, specifically, Lee.
Rock commented, with concern in her tone of voice, “We were not careful about what we wished for. It is said that one of the worst forms of revenge that exists is to make an enemy into your own likeness.”
Revy said, with worry in her tone of voice, “I think we have created a monster.”
Nearby, as she walked away from them, Lee overheard their comments about her, she began to manically laugh, while she walked down the hallway.
Soon after, within the populace of the Chang and River's kingdom, Lee became known as Beast Lady Lee.
A few days later, after mother and children were confirmed to be alright, Simon, Revy, and Rock left Chang's kingdom reality.
(_)
A month later, it was late evening, as Chang, River, Lee, Wash, and Book, had retired to their large, private bedroom, in the castle.
Lee had almost fully recover from the events of the birth of her children.
They had given the handmaidens, the three women had appointed to help them, a break for a few hours. With the next shifts handmaidens coming on, in a few hours.
Though, when the three women rulers wished to summon one of their handmaidens, during their servants shifts, they used a simple wood handle, attached to a string line, though the wall, that lead to a bell, in room, in another part of the castle, where the handmaidens on their shift were. When the bell alerted the handmaidens, it was a summonses to come to their rulers' bedroom, at a moments notice.
The handle to the string was located on a wall, near the headboard of king sized bed in the room. There was also strings on walls, in the other rooms, in their private quarters, for summoning the staff. Which each bell being a different tone and marked differently, so the handmaidens knew where to go, when they were summoned.
At the moment, River was in her female form. She and Lee were sitting beside each other, in rocking chairs, with a baby bundled up in their arms. They slowly rocked the children back and forth.
Lee was to River's right side.
River was holding Book in her arms, and Lee was holding Wash in her arms.
Both of them were wearing slippers and fine silk robes, of different colors. River wore a red robe, with yellow patterned dragons, on the sides of her robe. Lee wore a white robe, with red flowers, and flower petals on the pattern of her robe.
The chairs the two women were sitting in were facing the wall mounted TV, which was playing a comedy movie, they had previous selected. Though, the volume was turned down low, so as to not to disturb the children.
The lighting in the room, were from two electric yellow lamp lights, which were placed on nightstands, on the opposite sides of the bed, against the wall, next to the headboard of the bed.
Nearby, Chang, whom was male at the time, was sitting on a well cushioned couch, by a wall, to the left of River and Lee. There was a small coffee table in front of the couch Chang was sitting on. Chang was wearing casual clothing, while they all watched the movie, and he was the one with the remote to the TV and Blu-Ray player.
River turned Lee, as she quietly said, “You know, Lee. I thought raising children would be a lot more stressful.”
Lee looked over at River, as she softly commented, “We are only through the first month. We have at least another eighteen years of this to go.”
River quietly responded, “Good point. So, how is the soreness down there?”
Lee softly stated, “I know you have been slightly annoyed that, while the servants are watching the kids, I have not participated with you and Chang. But, giving birth left me sore down there. Simon said that because of the way I gave birth to our second child, it slightly tore my labia on the way out. Though, nothing that required surgery, just a few stitches, which have since been removed. Simon said as long as I took it easy for the last month, which I have, I should be fine.”
River quietly inquired, “So, you can do it now?”
Lee softly answered, “If I want to. The soreness down there is almost all gone. And my shoulder wound has healed well. And with your help in my exercising, all this baby fat around my tummy should be gone in a few months. And I will have my wonderful figure back.”
River quietly questioned, “Good. And how is your emotional state of you mind?”
Lee softly stated, “Better. But, you were right about my subconscious is a bit of a sadomasochist. Even after the events on Lagoon Island, I was not really a hundred percent sure. Though, now I am, due to what happened during that night. Those events were the final push to the point that I now associate pain in a pleasurable way. But, I can still tell the difference between pleasure and pain. It is just I no longer mind being in pain that much.”
River quietly replied, “You don't want to get those two mixed up.”
Lee softly responded, “I know... Still, now I know I can handle childbirth. Though, next time, I would prefer you, or Chang go through with it.”
River quietly said, “I fully understand. And at least we have help with the kids, so we can get some sleep.”
Lee softly replied, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Just then, the baby in River's arm's sneezed.
River checked Book, and she saw that Book was fine. River then realized something. She then looked up, and turned towards Lee, as she mentioned, in a normal tone of voice, “You know this is the first time I have seen Book sneeze, in this incarnation.”
Lee inquired, in a normal tone of voice, “True. And now that that you mention it. I have not seen Wash sneeze any. Have you?”
River answered, “No.”
Lee questioned, “You know, if Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka are any indications. If these two have your ability, it would be active right now... Do you think it is worth checking?”
River said, “Well, I did not feel his body mass change with the sneeze, so I doubt there was no change. But, it is worth confirming, either way.”
River changed the position the baby was in her arms, so she could lightly lift up the front of her child's diaper. She then let go of the diaper, as she looked over at Lee. She plainly said, “Yep. Book is now a girl.”
Meanwhile, Chang had been quietly paying attention to River and Lee's conversation, as he watched TV. When he heard River's comment, he used the remote to set the TV on mute. Next, he turned his head to look at his two lovers, as he sat his remote the coffee table in front of the couch he was sitting on.
Just then, the child in Lee's arms sneezed. While Lee did not feel Wash change. Lee decided to carefully checked her child's diaper. When Lee confirmed her suspicions, she looked over at River, as she commented, “Wash changed into a girl, too.”
River suggested, “It is best we try not to make them sneeze, to change back. They will just have to get use to changing back and forth, as they grow up.”
Lee inquired, “I agree. Also, did you ever read Natsuru's book on gender bending?”
River answered, “Yes. I even brought an english copy here. Just in case. And I believe it might be best to use the instructions as guidelines on raising gender bending children.”
Lee agreed, “You're right. We are going to need to use what we learned in those chapters.”
River asked, “So, when did you find the opportunity to read it?”
Lee answered, “During the time loop.”
River replied, “Oh.”
Chang spoke up, as he inquired, “Can you tell if either of them have any precognition, or telepathic abilities?”
River looked over at Chang, as she stated, “Not unless they are actively using those abilities. And given their age, I doubt we will see any such abilities manifest, if at all. But, if that should happen, we need to make sure to have only happy thoughts around the children.”
Lee said, “Good idea.”
Chang inquired, “I concur. And what about aging?”
River answered, “Due to it taking the normal nine months to gestate, I believe they will continue to age at a normal rate. And that their longevity will not kick in until they reach full adulthood. But, we will have Simon check that, later. When he comes to do a checkup on them.”
Chang replied, “That is a good idea.”
Lee commented, “Still, having a slower childhood is not that bad.”
River shrugged, as she conceded, “You may have a point there.”
Lee looked down at Wash, and she noticed her child had gone to sleep. She looked over at River, as she asked, “Has Book gone to sleep?”
River looked over at Lee, as she calmly said, “Yes. I take it Wash is asleep, as well?”
Lee suggested, “Yea. We will put them in their cribs, in a minute.”
River replied, “Agreed.” A thought then occurred to River, as she teased, “You know Lee. I haven't seen you sneeze either since you gave birth.”
Lee realized what River was hinting at. She shrugged, as she replied, “Well, it is a virus. So, it is possible. And I didn't cold, during, or after the pregnancy. And it clear no one else has started changing, outside of this room. So, even if I change, neither I, nor our children are contagious.”
Chang understood what they were talking about, as he thought, 'Oh, that is a relief. And since that is the case. This is going to be good.'
Lee said, “Give me a couple of minutes. I don't know how to sneeze on command.”
River responded, “Take the time you need.”
Lee responded, “Okay. But, we will take care of the children first.”
Lee got up, from her chair, and she walked over to one of the cribs, by wall, next to the couch Chang was on, to Chang's right side.
Lee laid her sleeping baby down in one of the cribs.
Lee then looked over at Chang and River. Both of whom were looking back at her.
Lee walked away from the cribs, to the middle of the room, where Chang and River could see her.
Lee came to a stop, and she turned to face her two loved. She undid her robe. As she came to a stop, she let her robe drop to the floor. She then removed her slippers with her feet. Next, she undid and removed both her bra and panties. She let both items drop down onto the floor, on top of her robe.
Lee finally worked up a quiet sneeze, and she instantly turned into a man. She also noticed that the magic ring on her right forth finger expanded with the finger it was on. Though, it was still firmly in place.
Lee looked into a nearby mirror, to see that his male form was as youthful, healthy, physically fit, as his female form.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'I look like I retain my youth and health in the change. That is likely because this is the male equivalent of my female form. I am not returning to my much old, and sicker, male form. And this also means, goodbye to monthly periods. And hello extreme longevity. And the fun we are about to have.'
Nearby, Lee noticed River giggle a little. Lee turned to River, and he saw River looking back at him.
River commented. “Well, I guess this makes things more interesting for us.”
Chang stated, “I agree. And while Lee can control her change. The children cannot. Tomorrow, I will change back into a woman, and I will then have to explain, something, to our personal servants about our children.”
River said, in a supportive manner, “I am sure we will come up with something.”
Lee suggested, in his male voice, “If not. Gold will go a long way in gaining ones cooperation, and discretion.”
Chang agreed, “Very true. Especially, when it deals with people that you entrust with the welfare of those you care for. It is better to bribe them, than threaten them.”
River commented, “I agree.”
A few seconds later, Lee was able to work up a second soft sneeze, and he instantly turned back into a woman.
Lee said, in her female voice, “Though, I still plan on living as a woman.”
River replied, “I am okay with that.”
Chang said, “I am not one to judge on such matters.”
Lee politely requested, “Also, let us keep this between us. I do not want the Revy, Rock, and the others to find out I know have this ability. Such information will likely upset them.”
River said, “Sure. No problem.”
Chang pointed out, “I will keep my mouth shut. But, when we return back to the casino, I believe you will not be able to keep this secret from Annie, and Arcee.”
Lee responded, “I agree. When we get back, I will talk to them in private. They like me, and they know how to keep a secret. So, that will not be a problem. But... Although, I still plan to live as a woman...”
Lee then made herself softly sneeze, and she change into a man.
Lee continued, in his male voice, “That doesn't me we cannot have fun with my male form.”
Chang softly congratulated, in a normal tone of voice, “That is the spirit.”
River quietly got up from her chair, and she walked over by Lee, and the cribs. She then put her baby in the crib, next by crib that contained Book's twin.
As this happened, Chang stood up, and walked around the coffee table, to look at River and Lee.
River looked at Chang, and then Lee. River said, “It doesn't take a telepath to guess what you to are thinking. And I am okay with being the woman in a human sandwich. Lee seemed to enjoy it, so I think I might like it, as well.”
Chang stated, “Glad to hear it.”
Lee pointed out, “Still, we will have to be quiet, so as to not disturb the children.”
River said, “That will not be a problem.”
Chang grinned mischievously, as he said, “Hey Lee. How about you take the front, and I will take back.”
Lee replied, “Thanks Chang.”
All three lovers then headed for their bed, for a night of quiet passion.
Later that night, River tricked Chang into sneezing and changing into a girl, with River changing into a male, and informing Chang that it was now, Chang's turn to be the woman in a human sandwich.
(_)
A month later, after bringing Simon to Chang's kingdom reality, to confirm the children were doing fine, the three lovers then decided to take a break from raising their children, and they headed back to their casino apartment, in Lee's reality. With population of either reality only thinking that the three lovers were gone for only a few minutes.
Though, River, Lee, and Chang, had a plan in place, which made sure their children would be fine, if something were to happen to them. But, it was a plan that was unnecessary, and only in place to ease all three of their minds.
And while there were a few questions about Lee no longer being pregnant. As soon as everyone was assured that the children were safe and healthy, those whom questioned Lee relaxed and went back to work.
Though, Zoe already knew the answer, and she kept her mouth such.
Also, Lee privately talked to Annie and Arcee, about her gender bending abilities. Since the to of the would likely discover this secret on their own. Lee just told them, and they agree to keep quite on the matter. Though, for their silence, Lee did have to change into a male, in front of them, to see what Lee's male form now looked like. But, that was a small problem. And Lee did so, in the private location, away from prying eyes.
(_)
A week later, after Lee, Chang, and River returned to Lee's home reality, it was the middle of a sunny day.
At the sea side harbor, of Plata Podrido, located in the middle of the shore, along the gulf of Mexico, Police Chief Pedro Del Soto was on stakeout, with a few of his officers in the second story of an office building. He was using binoculars, as he looked out through the tinted windows, towards the harbor, at the cargo ship.
At the same time, from behind other nearby tinted windows, a few of his officers were using both video cameras digital records, photography cameras using real film, with telescopic lens, to take pictures of those getting off the cargo ship.
The cargo ship itself had a teal colored out hull above the water line, with it being red colored below the water like. The pilot station, and above deck crew areas, were painted white. There was not a sign of rust on any part of the ship.
Pedro read the name off on the side, toward the front of the ship. The letters of the name were in large white letters, against the teal colored hull, on the side. The two word name was russian. But, Pedro know the translation, as he thought, 'The Maria Zeleska... And from the look of it, they have given the old girl a fresh paint job, with the same colors...'
'And given, after the fall of Roanapur, the Maria Zeleska is Hotel Moscow's main headquarters, I have a feeling that Hotel Moscow is coming here to stay. And they are coming with their full force.'
'This bodes ill for myself, my boys, and others in this city. Though, Balalaika is known to be discrete in a number of ways. I can still handle the situation. Much like Chang, Balalaika values those that respect her, and whom are polite. Unlike Chang, she does not tolerate foolishness, nor violence in a manner that is moronic, or a threat to her, or her organization.'
'As long as I am polite, show no fear, with a passive form of strength, she should not try anything to violent towards me, or my boys... At least for a while.'
'I am glad that when they teleported that ship into the harbor, the harbor master did notice something, and he called me.'
'I know the ship was teleported into the harbor, because the surrounding waters are not deep enough for ship like that to sail in. But, I would bet money that if they are attacked, they can just teleport the ship, at a moments notice, to somewhere else in the multiverse. Or, somewhere else, or when, on this very planet.'
'Anyway, after the harbor master described the ship, I realized whose ship it belonged to, and I told him to keep his month shut, and leave them alone. That I would handle the situation. And so, I quietly brought a few of my boys here, around some back alleys, to a building I had renovated for stakeouts of smugglers coming into the harbor.'
'Hotel Moscow, and Chang's organization are too new here to know about all the secret hideouts that I have around town. And I will use that to my advantage, for as long as possible. Information is power, and I still have the edge over them, in that area of this deadly game.'
'For example, I know about Rowan's new whorehouse, which is clearly being supplied by Chang. I must say that is an inventive use of those magic powders. Given that it does bring money into the island, and that is consensual by all parties, I will let that business stay open. And Rowan can stay on the island, as long as she behaves. Also, Chang has enough sense to have that whorehouse be located in another part of town, away from his casino, the Devil's Hotel, my police station, and away from the beach, near the middle of the city.
'And the whorehouse does not look like much on the outside. The whorehouse just looks like a large, six story office building. And we do have a few of those in Plata Podrido. But, not many.'
'Still, I know that Balalaika always does like to cover all her bases. I wouldn't be surprised if she intentionally arranged for Chang to come here first, to let someone else test the waters, to see if it was safe for her to move her operations here.'
'Speaking of which. I am sure that Chang and Balalaika are now working together. But, who is in charge of whom? Or, is this a partnership?”
'Even Lee said she doesn't know. From the meeting we had a few days ago, she told me she didn't know, because she didn't ask. And I don't blame her for keeping her nose out of Chang's more questionable business interests. She is finally in a good position in her life, and asking such questions could wreck that. Besides. I am the detective, it is my job to figure it out. And in time, I will.'
'And while Lee did not give me the details, I think it was wise of her and River to raise their children in another reality. The their home at the casino is too dangerous to raise a child, let alone two children, around a casino, and mafia types.'
'Though, from what I here, Spike is doing a good job of that with her daughter, Julia. I will have to make a note for my boys to keep an eye on Julia. Because, I do not want trouble from Chang, nor Spike, over her welfare. And if something did happen, Spike is enough of a maverick to come after me on her own. Even without Chang's permission. And I have not doubt that she probably can take my boys and I in a fight. Especially, if she catches us off guard.'
Pedro then moved the view his binoculars over to the staircase that connected the ship to the dock, as he watched people disembarking into black painted, sports utility vehicles, which were also being raised out off of the cargo ship, and placed on the concrete dock that ship was moored too, by cranes attached to the deck of the cargo ship.
Pedro noticed that there were no license plates on the vehicles. Still, Pedro was more focused on the women coming off the ship.
Pedro grimly thought, “So far, all young women, in their mid-twenties... This just confirms my worst fears, from when Melvin was kidnapped. And Lee was right. They have also undergone the vat process, and likely have the super-soldier serum coursing in their veins. And given their training, they are now super-soldiers in every possible way.'
'Also, I would likely bet money those SUVs are not standard. They are likely armored metal, with bulletproof windows. I would not be surprised if the roof, in back, did not open up to allow someone inside to use weapons from the roof vehicle.'
'Though, I am not going to just stand here and take it. And while I may not be able fight them in an open battle, there are more subtle tactics that I know how to imply that Hotel Moscow will likely not expect a cop from a small town to do. Tactics that I have seen them use... They will underestimate me, and my boys. And I will use that mistake, on their part, against them.'
'To that end, I will at least be able to have pictures of all of them. Just as they did the same thing to the Washimine Group and Kousa Council, in the Tokyo arc. Also, I am already working on getting ham radios, and encryption breaking equipment, so I can try to tap into their radio systems. As I expect them to try tap my phones, station, home, and computer systems.'
'It is going to come down to spy versus spy tactics, and I am not going to make it easy for them.'
'Also, I will be religious in my backups of my information. Even if they destroy my police station, and home, they will not destroy all the copies the information I have one them. I know Hotel Moscow understands that part of information warfare it to make sure to destroy the information, and recordings, the enemy has. But, I will be one step head of them on this matter.'
'I will even have some copies, with regular updates, in the hands of those I trust, that are off the island. With those copies being used in the event of both me disappearing, and the station being destroyed. I might try to skip town again, and I want to make sure that trigger is not accidentally pulled if I do run. That would only upset them further. So, it must be both my disappearance, and the police station being destroyed, including the copies of my information I store there, being destroyed, before that trigger is pulled.'
'I will also be on the look out for unmarked vehicles. And not just they ones I am seeing here. Hotel Moscow already use some vans before. So, they do very the types of vehicles they travel in. And I will make sure to have my boys, and I, keep an eye out, near the police station, to see if some of the Hotel Moscow members do a stake out, to build profiles and records of me and my boys.'
'If that is the case. I will politely ask them to leave. And when the police chief says something like that. They will not they are caught. And that leaving is their only option besides arrest. And by having them leave, instead of arresting them, I decrease the chance of having to face Balalaika’s wrath.'
'As such, I must stay one step ahead of everyone, if I am to come out on top...'
Pedro them saw a blond woman in a red dress and olive colored greatcoat, along with a woman with short brown hair, in casual clothing, consisting of an open jacket, shirt, pants, and boots, disembark down the stairs, to the dock below.
Each of the two women were carrying a baby, wrapped in their arms. There were other members of Hotel Moscow by them, as they made their way down the steps, to make sure there were no problems.
Pedro thought, 'That has to be Balalaika and B. Balalaika almost always wears that same red dress and olive colored greatcoat in public. Also, B is almost always at Balalaika’s side. And Lee did mention that Balalaika and B had been pregnant. And that Balalaika had a son, and B a daughter. With both children being healthy. Lee also told me that Balalaika's son is named, Dmitri. And B's daughter is named, Alexandra. Both of which are fitting names, given who their parents are.'
'This situation works very well for me, because parenthood means they will be less likely to do something drastic. As long as I do not give them an excuse to do so... Of course, threatening their children is the quickest way to pissed off the parents of said children.'
After Pedro watched both Balalaika and B made it to the concrete dock below, he saw them quickly walked to one of the black SUV vehicles, and get into the back of it, as two other Hotel Moscow members go into the front of the vehicle. The one that was riding on the front passenger side was carrying an AK seventy-four automatic rifle.
At the same time, other Hotel Moscow members got into to other black SUVs. The three SUVS then pulled out of the docks, and started driving in a convoy, with the SUV that Balalaika, B, and their children were in, being in the middle.
Though, Pedro did see a number of Hotel Moscow members on the deck of the ship, and on the nearby dock. Most of them were armed with AK seventy-four automatic rifles, while having pistols holstered on the right side of their hips.
Pedro thought, 'They are likely heading for Chang's casino, to meet with Chang. That is the direction of the casino, and it would logical place Balalaika and B would go right after disembarking... Still, there is something I need to check with the boys...'
Pedro looked up from his binoculars, and over to his police officers, as he asked, in spanish, “Did you get clear pictures, and video, of those two women carrying those young children?'
One of the men with the photography camera looked up at Pedro, as he answered, in spanish, “Yes.” He then went back to taking photographs.
A second later, one of the officers with a video camera looked up at Pedro, as he said, in spanish, “Yes.” He then went back to taking video.
Pedro stated, “Good. I want you to pay special care to keep pictures of those two faces. Also, I noticed those black SUV do not have license plates. Order the boys to leave the those vehicles alone. I likely already know where they are heading. So, there is no point in stopping them. And it is best we leave them along, for right now.'
Pedro mentally reflected, “While we collect information on them.'
Pedro then noticed one of his men pull out their radio and relay his orders.
Pedro the pulled up his binoculars, as he turned his attention back their the tinted window by him, and towards the Maria Zeleska, and the Hotel Moscow members around it.
Pedro continued to look through his binoculars, as he thought, 'Given how thorough Balalaika and Hotel Moscow is, they will likely have license plates for their vehicles by the end of the week. Though, I will have to continued to keep reminding my boys not to do anything stupid towards Hotel Moscow. Still, that won't be a problem. My boys know how to follow orders. And how not to upset the wrong people...'
'And so, I am still in this game. And if I play my cards right, I can still win. It is just that the stakes have become higher than I would have thought possible. But then, for a person with my job, that is life.'
Pedro then continued to watch the members of Hotel Moscow, as he and his police officers took photos, and videos, of their prey.
(_)
A few hours later, it was noon.
At the Devil Hotel Bar and Restaurant, Revy, along with her family and friends were having lunch at their usual tables in the room.
And except for the waitresses and Melanie, the bartender, they were the only ones in the restaurant, at the time.
Given the reputation that Revy, Rock, and their group had develop, the other customers deciding it might be best to either get something to eat elsewhere, or to wait an hour, to see how things develop, and if they leave, or if they are full enough not to want to cause any trouble. Like they were after dinner.
In one table, near the stage sat Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, Janet, and Molly. At a nearby table sat Rebecca, Yukio, Sarah, Kristina, Nodoka, and Mikoto. Kristina and Nodoka sat beside each other.
At a table a few feet away sat Ranma, Akira, Yurika, Natsuru, Yolanda, and Eda. And at the table, near the other three, sat Lotton, Sawyer, Shenhua, Violin Aeryn, along with Violin and Aeryn's two month old daughter, Gilina. Their baby was currently peacefully asleep in a carrycot, set in an armless chair, between Violin and Aeryn.
Also, Lotton, Shenhua, and Shenhua were wearing loose clothing, due to each of them being five and a half months pregnant. Still, save for their round bellies, all three of them maintained their figure.
The group had already given their lunch orders ten minutes ago. With their drinks already been served to them, and they were waiting for their meals to come.
Just then, Melanie, and three waitresses came out of the kitchen. Each of them held a tray with a few plates, full of food. in their hands.
As Melanie heading for Revy and Rock's table, each of the three waitress headed for on of the three other occupied table.
As Melanie finished serving the plates for Janet, and Benny, Rock looked up at her, as she asked, “So, how are you doing today, Melanie?”
Melanie held the empty tray in her left hand, to her side, as she looked over at Rock. She answered, “I am doing fine.”
Meanwhile, the three waitresses had already served their plates, and they left for the kitchen, to retrieve the rest of the group's orders.
Janet inquired, “Did you hear about Balalaika and Hotel Moscow setting up shop in town?”
Melanie said, “Yes. I heard about it a week ago.” She mentally added, 'From some of my friends that are still with Hotel Moscow. It is nice being able to get back in touch with them, years later. After everything that has happened. And we are on friendly terms. Which is good.'
Dutch questioned, “So, are you planning on joining them?”
Melanie stated, “No. I am happy with my life. And as long as they leave my girlfriend and I alone. I am fine with the situation.”
Benny asked, “Speaking of your girlfriend. How are you settling in with Bao, at her home?”
Melanie grinned, as she answered, “Actually. We are doing great. We are getting along well.” She thought, 'And given you guys decided to move back into the hotel, I am glad I moved out of here. Still you guys are great tippers. And it seems the other customers are okay with working around you. Though, as long as you do not cause trouble here, nor at Bao's bar. I am okay with the situation.'
Benny said, “Well, good luck.”
Melanie responded, “Thanks. Now, let me get back to the kitchen to get the rest of you order.”
Revy casually said, “Go ahead. I'm starving.”
Melanie replied, in a happy tone of voice, “Sure thing.” She then turned around, and headed back into the kitchen.
At a nearby table, Violin turned to her wife, as she asked, “I find it interesting Balalaika and Hotel Moscow setting up shop in town?”
Aeryn looked over this month old daughter, as she commented, “I am more interesting that Balalaika and B finally had their children.”
Violin looked at their daughter, as she playfully asked, “Thinking of having a playdate with Gilina?”
Aeryn mused, “Hmm... Perhaps... I am just surprised you didn't complain that much during the birth of our daughter.”
Violin stated, in a casual tone of voice, “It was painful, but it was not as bad as you made it out to be... Honestly, given everything surrounding the birth of Little D, I don't think you body was ready yet to give birth, when you went into labor. I mean you had only been pregnant for a very short among of time. And you went from no baby to near full term baby, in a matter of seconds. That would be a shock to anyone's body.”
Aeryn conceded, “Perhaps you are correct.”
Across the table, Shenhua overheard them, as she complained, “I cannot wait until I give birth.”
Sawyer agreed, “Me too.”
Lotton commented, “Count me in as well. Feeling the baby with in yourself is interesting. But, after the baby kicked you bladder for a fifth time, it gets old.”
Aeryn and Violin looked over at them. Violin just shrugged, as she said, “Yea. I can see where you are coming from.”
Sawyer stated, “Well, with you giving birth, Violin. As well as, Balalaika and B. Along with us hearing that Lee gave birth to her twins, elsewhere in the multiverse. We are the only ones left in this group, that are pregnant... For now...”
Lotton said, “Yea. River, Lee, and Chang pulled a fast one on us.” She then looked over at Revy, and the others sitting at the table Revy was at. She requested, “Revy, you made such a big to do about going to see Lee's birth. But, since you got back, you and Rock haven't told us what happened.”
Revy, and the others at her table, looked over at Lotton, as Revy stated, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Not much to say. We missed it, due to a bandit raid. And Lee was in no mood to talk about the... Blessed event, afterward.” She mentally added, 'And the fact I think she was finally pushed over the edge worries even me.'
Rock commented, “I am sure we will get the story, sometime.” She thought, 'And I am not telling it. Because, I don't want to risk upsetting Chang, River, and a now slightly unhinged Lee.'
Dutch mentioned, “Well, alcohol has a way of loosening lips.”
Those at the table look among each other, as Janet suggested, “True. We will just invite them back to one of our parties, and get them to tell us them.”
Benny complimented, “Good idea.”
Meanwhile, at the table Lotton was sitting at, those at her table, were looking among each other, as Sawyer said, “I am surprised that you decided to use time dilation, to go back to Moya, in you home reality. And you then came back with a your two month old daughter. Whom I admit is cute.”
Violin and Aeryn smiled at Sawyer, as Violin suggested, “Thank you. And how about you guys do that yourselves?”
The adults at their table were quite for a few seconds. Sawyer then said, “That is not a bad idea.”
Shenhua replied, “I agree.”
Lotton suggested, “No time like the present. We could do this after lunch. Head to our rooms, and make the jump there.”
Shenhua mused, “That sounds like a good plan.”
Sawyer commented, “For everyone here, we would only be gone for ten minutes. Half of that time would be getting up to our room and back down. For us it would be around five and a half months. To make sure our children are fine, before we taken them with us, to come back here. And our children are two months old, like Gilina.”
Lotton said, “I like that plan.”
Shenhua looked at Lotton and Sawyer, as she stated, “So do I. And we will head back to our yacht, in our home reality, after lunch.” She saw Lotton and Sawyer nod once in agreement.
Aeryn said, in a joking manner, “Good luck. You're going to need it.”
Lotton teased, in a halfhearted manner, “Aeryn doing the Star Wars movie quotes. We are in trouble.”
Those at their table lightly laughed for a few seconds, at Lotton's comment.
Nearby, at Revy table, Molly turned towards the table at Eda and Yolanda were at, as she asked the two women, as she commented, “You know, Eda, Yolanda. While I know you two are just friends, I wonder if you two might someday find someone and have some children of your own.”
Yolanda and Eda looked over at Molly, as Yolanda commented, in a calm tone of voice, “I long since realized that I am not the motherly type.”
Yolanda then noticed that beside Molly, Rock was given her a stern look.
Yolanda continued, “But, I learned to fake it very well. Though, I might change my mind someday.”
Eda plainly said, “I am having too much fun, right now, to be tied down with a kid.”
Revy commented, “Come on, Eda. If I can be a mother and raise well adjusted, sane children. So, can you.”
Eda replied, in a calm manner, “I will take that as a compliment.”
Revy giggled a little from Eda's response.
A few seconds later, Melanie and the waitresses with her, came out of the kitchens, and delivered the rest of the group's food.
(_)
About an hour later, after everyone had all finished their lunch, Shenhua, Lotton and Sawyer excused themselves.
The others in their group wished them luck.
Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer then left a nice tip of money on the table. Next, they got up, went over the cash register to pay for their meal. With Melanie being the one to cash them out. Once they were done, they left the restaurant, for the large suite they shared together.
Ten minutes later, Revy, Rock, and the others watched as Sawyer, Shenhua and Lotton walk back into the room.
They saw the three lovers wearing their usual clothing, with their stomachs back to being flat as boards. And each of them carrying a carrycot, with one of their three, healthy, two month old children.
When the reached the others in the group, the three women allowed the others to look at the their children.
As this happened, Sawyer informed them that she and Shenhua each had a daughter. While Lotton had a son. And she told them that all three of their children were healthy. And Sawyer also told them the names of their children.
Sawyer's daughter was named, Ivy. Shenhua's daughter was named, Wenqian. And Lotton's son was named, Thomas.
The group of women then stayed in the restaurant for another hour and half, before they left their tips, paid for their meals, and left the restaurant, to go about their usual daily routines.
Soon after, other customers of the hotel started entering the restaurant, to have their own lunches.
(_)
A week later, Lee, River, and Chang were in the living room. It was evening, right after dinner.
At the moment, Chang was male, with River and Lee being female.
Lee and River sat on the couch, as they watched TV. Lee sat on the left end of the couch, with River sitting on the right in of the couch.
There was a coffee table in front of them.
To River's right sat Chang, in a chair, with was position at a diagonal angle that allowed him to look at the TV, or those on the couch. Though, currently, he was watching TV as well. And he had the TV remote.
Lee was becoming bored with the english comedy rerun they were watching on TV, so she decided to bring up a subject that she was sure was on all three of their mind.
Lee looked over at River, as she casually asked, “So, we are heading back in two weeks?”
River turned to Lee, as she replied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “That is the plan.”
Lee said, “I look forward to see our children again.”
River agreed, “So, do I. But, having a break is nice. And to them, we will only be gone for a few minutes.”
Lee stated, “Yes. They will not miss us. And this is a wonderful use of time dilation mechanics.”
River said, “Yes. It is. And I am also happy the servants did not make to much of a fuss about Wash and Book's gender bending abilities.”
Lee replied, “You and me both. A little gold goes a long way to insuring loyalty, without asking to many questions. And in having people remain quiet.”
River said, “I agree. And telepathy helps also, to check that their loyalty is genuine.”
Lee agreed, “True.”
Chang had been paying attention to their conversation. He thought, 'Now, would be a perfect time to bring up the subject.'
Chang used his remote to turn off the TV. He then set his remote down, on a nearby table, to his left, as he turned to the two women. He said, “There is something important we need to talk to you about, Lee.”
Lee and River turned then attention towards Chang, as Lee asked, “What is it, Chang?”
Chang stated, “River and I have been talking about something between us for a while. Actually, we have been discussing this, on an off, for several years.” And given the circumstances, we would like to include you in our plan.”
Lee questioned, “What plan?”
Chang coyly inquired, “You know how I was interesting in breeding badasses?”
Lee calmly answered, “Yes. I wrote it. And it both go us in a whole lot of trouble.”
Chang stated, “True. But, as I told you before. I never stopped thinking about it. And it seems that River here has an interest in our idea, as well.”
River admitted, “Yes. I do.”
Lee responded, “As you pointed out. Considering are the reasons you told me, in your plan to get me pregnant, I am not surprised. So, how do I factor into your plan that you want to tell me?”
Chang calmly said, “I was getting to that. I have the super-soldier serum in me. Which we know that abilities can be inherited. You are a precognitive. And River is a telepath, and a genius. While we are quite intelligent ours. The plan is, among the three of us, we create an entire generators of badasses, with combinations of our three sets of abilities.”
“Much like Balalaika and B did. In their case, they use magical powder to temporarily change into men, and they went into their near future, to went they changed back into women, to impregnate each other.”
“We could do the same. We will alternate who will impregnate whom. But, we will not impregnate ourselves. And with my feudal kingdom, abusing the hell out of time dilation. Like we are already planning to do. We can do it without attracting unwanted attention.”
Lee looked over at River, then back to Chang. She responded, “Okay. You two have clearly thought things through.”
River stated, “The reason we waiting was we wanted to see how you handled being pregnant, the birth, and being around babies. And I do love our children, and I would like to have more. And increase the size of our family.”
Lee said, “I love our children and family, as well. And I would not be opposed to having more.”
Chang commented, “And it seems as long as we have help, we can handle dealing with our children as babies. So, this afternoon, River and I talked in private. And we decided to take the plunge.”
Lee inquired, “Are you planning to keep the same schedule, we set for the children we already have?”
River answered, “Yes. One month here. One year there. We get pregnant, and use the time after the births to recover, while raising all the children.”
Lee questioned, “Can we afford this?”
River stated, “Yes. We can afford it. We can expand the castle, as needed, without affecting the village below it. Also, if we need to hire more staff, I can read their minds and find out which ones we can trust, and hire.”
Lee responded, “Okay... That is good. So, I take it you want to keep this a secret from those here?”
Chang said, in a slightly strong tone of voice, “Absolutely... I don't believe they would understand.”
River stated, “I agree. They would not understand.”
Lee pointed out, “I can see how that could be the case. Still, Revy and Rock know where we live there. They might decide to pop up and say hi. We will be pregnant, have have lots of children around. This is not something that we can keep secret from them. If they show up. Plus, we are going to need Simon to check on us, to make sure everyone is healthy.”
River stated, “I can guarantee Simon's silence. As for the other two. They know better than to cross us.”
Chang calmly asked, “River is correct. So, are you in?”
Lee shrugged, as she answered, “Sure. That is why I wrote the concept in the first place, in my stories. I was interested in it. And I am not a hypocrite on the matter. Still, how many children are you planning for each of us to have?”
River pointed out, “Well, we are going to do this. We will do it together. And if you two can handle it, we can get pregnant together, perhaps... Ten times. And counting the twins Lee already had, and not counting any other twins, we should have thirty-two children in all.”
Lee said, “While the birth was painful, and the pregnancy was unconformable, at some points. All in all, I enjoyed my pregnancy. And I enjoy raising our children.”
Chang stated, “Since it was my idea. I think I can be able handle this, as well.”
Lee said, “Still, River and I, baring our stomachs, will have to be careful to maintain our figures. With your super-soldier serum, that will not be a problem with you Chang.”
Chang commented, “I think if we are careful, we will be fine. We will even help keep each other fit. Plus, that diet and exercising that River and Simon showed you allowed you to keep you figure.”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Chang said, “The three of us will talk to Simon. We will get the information on exercise and proper diet. Then, we will convince him to both help us in our long term plans, and keep our secrets from the others. Especially, after the amount of gold we are going to pay him. Along with this, we will do regular check ups. And we have the reality devices in case a birth starts to go badly.”
River commented, “Those are all good points.”
Lee inquired, “I agree. Still, why are we talking about this now. Instead of when we get to your kingdom?”
River said, “Because we have to stay we stay in our female form, constantly, for around two weeks to ovulate. Also, we wanted to give you a few weeks to think about it, before we all changed back to women for the most part, back at our kingdom.”
Lee responded, “Okay. I can see how you do not want to be so abrupt about this.”
River stated, “Exactly. While Chang and I are ready. We want to take our time. So, we can start this went you are ready.”
Lee said, “I understand that. And I am good with going forward, right now.”
River happily replied, “Good.”
Lee inquired, “So, I am guessing we change male, go forward in time a two weeks, I guess to your kingdom, just after we arrived there? And we have sex with the future counterparts of each other. Then, come back here, change female and stay female, until we before those women in two weeks in the future?”
Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “I love it when someone is on the uptake of a plan.”
Lee inquired,, “Thanks. But, what if one of us sneezes. Won't that create a paradox?”
River answered, “No. That person will just have to take a quick vacation, to another time period, and possible reality. With them coming back when they in sync with the other two's monthly reproductive cycle. That should prevent a paradox.”
Lee politely requested, “No bad. I like that idea. So, let's review the plan one more time.”
River stated, “Okay. Every time we take a break. One year there. When we get come back here, we spend a month here. and while we are here, we go into our future, when we are in heat, get each other pregnant, then come back to the past. Rinse and repeat.”
Lee jokingly said, “That works for me. And there are so many jokes I could make from your comment. But, all of them are tacky.”
River and Chang giggled a little.
River commented, “Still, we are not sure... How should I put this?... Who is going to screw whom?”
Lee stated, “I think I know the order we should go in.”
Chang said, “I am listening.”
River requested, “Go ahead.”
Lee said, “River, since you already screwed me, and gave me two children, I should return the favor. You impregnate Chang, and Chang impregnates me. Then, we swap again. That is the only way I see it working, since I really don't want one of us to double up, nor have a case of incest. Both of which could cause a lot problems. Especially, since we are going to do this multiple times.”
River said, “I agree... How about you, Chang?”
Chang stated, “Given you did impregnate Lee already, she does have a point. And I am okay with having your children.”
River responded, “Good. So, shall we head over there?”
Chang replied, “Sure.”
Lee stated, “I have nothing better to do.”
The three of them stood up from their seats.
River pointed out, “Still, let Lee and I change of our clothing, to some male clothing. And then our genders. I will also get a reality device.”
Chang replied, “Good idea.”
As they stated walking towards their bedroom, River asked, “I wonder what we will find our future selves doing?”
Chang commented, “Knowing us. Probably something very complex, and twisted, but pleasurable.”
Lee said, “I doubt it.”
Chang asked, “Why is that?”
Lee stated, “While all three of us love foreplay. This is not a case of foreplay. We just want to get the deed done, and move on. As such, it will be simple. Actually, it might just be a case of our future selves being over for us.”
Chang conceded, “As much as I dislike being in submissive positions. I can see your point. That would be a good way to just get it over with, and then move on.”
River responded, “I agree.”
Lee asked, “So, when and where are you going to take us?”
River answered, “And as such, I will take us to a point in the evening, right after dinner, a day after we arrive. We will arrive in our bedroom, in the castle.”
The three lovers soon made it to their bedroom.
A few minutes later, Lee and River had changed both their clothing, to male clothing. Including, shirts and pants. And they changed their gender to male, with their clothing then comfortable fitting them.
After which, River retrieved one of their reality devices. The three lovers group together, as River used his reality device.
A split second later, the three men were inside the bedroom of their castle, in the feudal era reality.
They saw that the only lights in the room were electric lamp lights by the bed, on the nightstands. With the lights being set to dim. Also, they noticed the doors were closed.
In front of them, they saw their three female, future counterpart, standing side by side with each other, as all three women looked back at them.
Future River in the center. Future Chang to her right. And Future Lee to her left.
All three of the women wore fine silk robes, and black slippers.
To break the ice, in the conversation, Future Lee was the first to speak, as she joked, “Just so you know. The only thing we are wearing are these robes, and slippers.”
Everyone chuckled a little at her comment.
Past Lee then asked, “So, where are the children?”
Future River answered, “The kids are with the handmaidens, on duty, in a nearby room. They have been ordered not to be disturbed us, unless it is an emergency, over the children, or the castle is being attacked.”
Past Chang complimented, “Good idea.”
Future Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Past River pocketed his reality device, as he inquired, “So, are we ready to do this?”
Future River replied, “Yes. All of us are in heat. We checked.”
Past River said, “Good. And I take it you are all wet.”
Future River answered, “Of course. How about you? You are three ready?”
Past River replied, “All three of us are working on it, as we speak.”
Past Chang asked, “So, did you decide how you want to do this?”
Future Chang answered, “Well, it wasn't so much as deciding, as we are just doing the same thing we did, when we are in your place. And we did, and are, keeping it simple.”
Past Lee smirked, as she quietly said, “Told you.”
Future River said, explained, “We go to the bed. We hike up our robes, and bed down on top of the blanket. With each of you coming up behind us, in the pairings we all decided on.”
Past Chang commented, “That is simple enough. I hope we do a good job. I prefer both parties enjoy these activities.”
Future Chang cracked a grin, as she stated, “Not to worry. It was fun for everyone, when I was in your position.”
Past Chang replied, “Good.”
Past River said, “Let's do this.”
Future River agreed, “Yes. Let's.”
The three women then walked over to the bed. Future River stopped by the foot of the bed. Future Lee walked up to the middle of the side of the bed, to Future River's left. And Future Chang walked up to the middle of the side of the bed, to Future River's right.
All three women women pulled up their robes over their waists, as the bend down, to lay their stomachs on the bed, as the expose their naked butts to the air.
The three men then walked over behind the women. Past Lee walked up behind Future River. Past Chang walked up behind Future Lee. And Past River walked up behind Future Chang.
The men then undid, and dropped their pants, and underwear, to their ankles.
All three women looked laid with their heads turned to the side, as all three men looked at each others.
Past River asked, “Everyone hard, or wet?”
The other five adults answered, almost in unison, “Yes.”
Past River inquired, “Everyone ready?”
The other five adults responded, almost in unison, “Yes.”
Past River said, “Okay, lean in, and have a good time.
The three men then leaned in, as they slowly entered their lovers. A couple of seconds later, the men started to slowly push and pull, in and out, in rhythmic motions, with all parties involved enjoying the sensations they were feeling.
Twelve minutes later, all six adults had climaxed, and it was over.
The men pulled up their pants and underwear. They then zipped and buttoned their pants. After which, the men back way from the women.
The women leaned up, and allowed their robes to fall back down to their ankles, as each of them turned to the man that had just impregnated them.
Future Chang commented, “Actually, that was pretty good, both times.”
Past River replied, “I am glad you liked it.”
Future River commented, “Strangely, we all climaxed in the same order as last time, for us. When we were the men.”
Past Lee said, “Well, at least we all enjoyed it.”
Future Lee looked over at Past Lee, as she teased commented, “We both know you are looking forward to my point of view.”
Past Lee looked over at Future Lee, as he casually admitted, “Absolutely.”
Future Lee said, “Well, you will be here in two weeks.”
Past Lee responded, “I looked forward to it.” A thought then accorded to Past Lee, as he turned to Past Chang. He asked, “By the way, Chang... My Chang... How do you intent to explain to the others at the casino, you decision to start being a girl all the time, starting when we get back?”
Past Chang looked at Past Lee, as he answered, “I will just say I decided to do something different, to break the monotony.”
Future Chang looked over at Past Chang, as she commented, “And that excuse worked.”
Past Chang looked over at Future Chang, as he replied, “Good.”
Past River said, “Well, we better head out of here, before we cause a paradox.”
Future River turned to Past River, as she commented, “Yes. The sooner you leave, the sooner you get here... Isn't time travel fun?...”
Past River looked over at Future River, as he replied, “Absolutely.” He then pulled out his reality device, from a pocket, as he walked to the middle of the room.
Past Lee and Past Chang saw what was happening. They walked up to stand beside Past River.
The three women then watched as Past River used his reality device to instantly teleport the three men away, and back into their past, in another reality.
A second after the three men disappeared, the three women then looked at each other, as Future Chang commented, “You know, it is eerie, how that played out. It is exactly what happened to us, when we were the men. Word for word.”
Future Lee shrugged, as she said, “Who cares? It was fun for everyone. A double dip, as it were... Pun intended.”
Future Chang let out a laugh. She then said, “You're right. Well, let's head to the bathroom, clean up a bit.”
Future River stated, “I agree.”
Future Lee replied, “Yes. It would be best to get cleaned up. Then, we can check on the children.”
Future Chang commented, “Good idea. But, first I think we need to take a minute for an alcoholic toast. Before we are truly pregnant. I will break out one of the bottles of Romulan Ale I bought here, that is in our private kitchen. And we will to toast are future plans, and our children. Both present and future.”
Future River said, “I can go for that.”
Future Lee replied, “So can I.”
Future Chang stated, “Then, let's hurry up, and get clean. Then, we can have that toast.”
The three women then walked together, towards their private bathroom, as they thought about their impending motherhood, and the joys and struggles their pregnancies, and children would bring.
A little over a month later, River, Lee, and Chang all found out they were pregnant. And while there were some minor issues, such as mild bouts of morning sickness, the three women remained healthy. They had Simon come visit them, in their reality, every two weeks.
And for Simon, it was every few hours.
(_)
A little over six months later, it was the middle of the night, in the castle bedroom of Chang, River, and Lee.
Lee woke up from her sleep, on her back. She laid in her usual place, in her nightgown, on the left side of the bed.
While she still sleepy, her first sensations was her unborn child within her belly. All three of the women were seven months pregnant, and it was hard for them to not to notice their rounded bellies.
Though, she could also sense that something was off in the room.
Lee checked to her right to see that River was beside her, in her nightgown, in the middle of the bed. The Red had was sleeping on her left side, as she face Lee. Lee could tell River was asleep by her slow breathing pattern.
Lee leaned up, to sit in the bed. She turned to the digital red LED clock, on her nightstand. It said one twenty-five AM.
Lee then looked around the room.
The only light in the room was moonlight coming for a window, that face their private courtyard, on the far wall from their bed.
And though the light did not reach their bed, Lee did see someone looking out the window which was providing illumination to the room.
Given the silhouette profile was of a woman, with a pregnant lady, wearing a nightgown, she could guess who it was.
She turned to look at the empty spot, on the right side of the bed, then back to the woman, as she mentally wondered, 'What is Chang do up so late?... I may be a bit of a nightowl myself, but we all share the same bed, and we try to keep the same schedule... Though, all three of us being pregnant has not helped matters... But, each of us tries to accommodate the needs of the other two... Now, to find out why she is up, in the first place...'
Lee slowly got off the bed, so as to not disturb River. As her bare feet hit the wood flooring, Lee turned, and she slowly started quietly walking over towards Chang.
As Lee continued making her way towards Chang, Lee saw Chang turn her head to see her. Chang then turned her head to look back out the window.
Lee thought, 'With the super-soldier serum, her nightvision is probably far better than mine. Which is good, considering I don't want her to accidentally hurt me, because she doesn't recognize me.'
As Lee came to a stop beside Chang, she looked at the other woman, as she quietly asked, “What is the matter, Chang?”
Chang turned to Lee, as she softly answered, “Just thinking... I believe I may have bitten off more than I can chew.”
Lee questioned, with concern in her tone of voice, “How so?”
Chang placed her hands on her rounded stomach, as she looked down at it. She then looked back up at Lee, as she quietly said, in a sober tone of voice, “You were right, Lee. Words cannot describe the feeling of what it is like for a mother to feel her child move within her.”
Lee inquired, “Yes. It is a wonderful feeling. So, why are you so worried out it?”
Chang said, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “Because, I feel that I am losing myself. That I am becoming more female, than male. That when this is over, I probably will not want to go back to being male.”
Lee responded, “First, I was always female, upstairs. Rock and the others are in a different situation than you. And besides, I thought you didn't mind being a woman some of the time.”
Chang conceded, with concern in her tone of voice, “You may have a point there. And thanks to you, I don't mind being a woman. And I like being a guy. But, this pregnancy makes me feel like my sense of self is slowly slipping away.”
Lee stated, “Your personality is not slipping away. You are just getting to know a different side of yourself. River and I talked about this, a few months ago. She stated that you still prefer to be a guy, but you are learning to enjoy how the other half lives, when it comes to motherhood. But, when this is over, you can go back to being a guy without much of a problem.”
Chang replied, with hope in her voice, “Really?”
Lee said, in a supportive tone of voice, “Yes. If you don't believe me. Ask Bob... Well, I mean, Lori. She spent decades living as a man, after getting pregnant and giving birth to Stan. And the only reason Lori is now a woman full time, instead of being a man, is her abilities finally locked into her body in her much younger female body.”
Chang agreed, in a happy, though quiet, tone of voice, “You are right. Thanks.”
Lee suggested, “You're welcome. Now, let's go back to bed. While we have much to worry about, now that all three of us are pregnant. Experiencing joy of the simple pleasures of being pregnant should not be one of those worries.”
Chang complimented, “I sometimes forget how philosophical you can be.”
Lee responded, “Yes. Wisdom has its place. But, this is a conversation for another time. We need to go back to sleep. You are still the ruler of this place, and being sleepy on the job is never wise for a leader.”
Chang giggled a little. She then said, “You're right. Let's get some rest.”
Nearby, in their bed, River was laying on her side, with her back turned to them. Though, Lee and Chang did their best to not disturb River, they did accidentally awaken her. Though, River read their thoughts, and she realized that Lee was handling the situation well, without her. With them learning she was away, not helping matters. So, River pretended to be asleep.
River smiled, as she moved her hands to lay against her own rounded belly, and the child that grew within her.
Chang and Lee then walked together, back to their bed. And they soon laid on the sides of the bed they usually did. And a few minutes later, all three women were back to being asleep.
(_)
Three months later, Chang, River, and Lee, each gave birth to a healthy child with only the usual pain and discomfort associated with labor and childbirth.
The three of them then because to enact their breeding plan cycle. A few months later, after the all gave birth, they returned to Chang's casino, in Lee's reality, for a month long break from raising their children, and ruling a kingdom.
For those in Lee's reality, the three people had only been gone a few minutes.
During these months in Lee's reality, Chang mostly stay male, while Lee and River mostly remain female. Chang found that Lee had been correct, and that even after Chang's first pregnancy and birth, that she, or he, did not have any problem living in either gender.
At the end of their month in Lee's reality, the three changed to male, and went two week into the future of their kingdom in the feudal reality, during the night, in their bedroom, where their three female future counterparts were waiting for them.
After they had impregnated their future selves, they changed to female themselves, went back two weeks into the past, to a few minutes after they left to head to Lee's reality. With no one in the feudal reality being the wiser, about the amount of time they were gone.
The three lovers then stayed women for the next two weeks, to the point they reached the point of being in heat, while waiting for their past male selves to show up.
After being impregnate by their past selves, they spent the next nine months pregnant, while ruling a kingdom, and raising their children that were already born. Though, they made sure to have regular doctor checkups, from a doctor they pay very well, for his services, and silence on the matter.
When their unborn children reach full term, they each gave birth to a healthy baby.
The three lovers then spend the next few month recovering. And when they were ready, they headed back to Lee's reality to repeat the process
Barring a few minor problems, Chang, River, and Lee's stay in the feudal reality remained peaceful in Chang and River's kingdom. And over the next ten years, they gave birth to several children.
In all, they had in all, counting Lee's first set of twins, a few more cases of the three of them having twins, and one case of Lee having triples, they gave birth to fifty, healthy children in all.
None of the infants they had were miscarried, stillborn, nor aborted.
Also, there were no cases of incest among the three parents.
The parents also found out that all their children had gain their parents gender ability at birth. There problems, save for their trusted staff of servants getting use to people with that ability.
And while Chang's own abilities allowed her to maintain her physique with ease, River and Lee were able to maintain their physiques through diet and exercise.
Also, their extreme longevity abilities allowed them to only age a few days over the course of years.
Living in a feudal era did not stop the three parents from giving their children a first rate education. They just used their reality devices to retrieved the book material, and other materials they needed to teach their children.
Among various areas of interest, as the children grew, the three parents did a wonderful job of educating all their children in several written and spoken languages. Along with math, the sciences, the arts, and even a little magic from River.
Over the years, as they raised their children, they eventually found out that all their children had inherited the abilities that both their parents possessed, no matter if the parent was the mother, or the father.
For those that were Chang's children, they gain above average physical abilities, health, strength, reflex, agility, and endurance. Along with slightly increased healing abilities, and sensory abilities.
And while all the children had were above average in intelligence and memory skills, all of River's children were geniuses in all intellectual abilities. From artistic abilities, to the math and sciences. Along with this, River's children had River's form of passive telepathy. Only her children had the ability to mentally handle their telepathy abilities than River did, from a sanity standpoint.
Lee children gain Lee's natural precognitive abilities, along with artistic skills that almost matched River's own artistic skills.
Fortunately, both the parents and the children were about to manage these situation, while keeping their sanity.
And the parents were able to convince the all the children to treat each other as friends, for the most part. Also, three parents were able to keep their children from experiencing any serious injuries, nor deaths, among them. While at the same time, the parents were able to keep their kingdom together, in a mostly peaceful manner.
Several years later, when their children became to reach adulthood, the parents found that their children's dormant extreme longevity abilities fully kicked in
When the children started to reach adulthood, the parents told them most of the truth of where they were from, and how they met. Though, they left out Lee's stories, and any other forms of fictional metaphysics.
And it was then, when the first twins reached adulthood, that the parents finally decided to began to slowly, and carefully unlock the memories and personalities of their first set of twins. With only minor problems in doing so.
(_)
Lee's home reality.
It was a sunny day, in the early afternoon, just over two years, and a few months, after Lee original left her home reality.
Inside Daiyu Palace Casino, in the personal office of the assistant head of security, Zoe Alleyne Washburne, in her casual wear, as she sat in her cushioned chair, behind her desk, in her windowless office.
The only door to her room was located right across from her desk. Which was a brown wooden door.
Zoe's desk was a simple metal office desk. On top of her desk she had a computer monitor, with peripherals, only with a pen, paper, hardline phone. The tower to her computer was located in her desk. The only other items on top of, or inside her desk, where what she needed to do her job as part of the security force for Chang's casino.
The one exception to these items was a hidden, loaded six round revolver, in a holster, that was under the top of the desk, right above her legs, when she sat down.
The lighting in the room were from soft white florescent ceiling lights.
Zoe's office was plain and simple. When Zoe was assigned this room, her preference was to have it be austere as possible. There were no pictures, nor mirrors in her office. The white walls were bare. The ceiling was white, and the flooring was short, gray, office carpeting.
Besides the cushioned, swivel armchair Zoe was sitting in, and her desk, only other furniture in the room were two cushioned chairs in front of her desk, for visitors, and a file cabinet, in the corner of the room, to her left, by her desk.
Also, the room was well ventilated, and Zoe found the temperature in the room to comfortable.
At the moment, Zoe was reading an english internet news article on current politics, at the national level, in Mexico, as she patiently waited for a scheduled appointment, to meet with someone, in a few minutes.
Thought, Zoe did not know who the appointment was for, and what the appointment was about. But, her boss, Chang, requested, the meeting, and she agreed to do so.
Zoe continued to read the article on her computer monitor, as she mentally wondered, 'I wonder who wanted to have an appointment me?... If it is over security, they would be meeting with the captain. And if it was over another matter in the casino, they would be meeting that head of the department they needed to see.'
'To be honest, I have this office so I that can do any needed paperwork, in peace... Or, just have a quite place at work, to think... Yet. For me to be still be close enough, that I can go back to my job at a moments notice... Which I cannot do in my apartment, several floors up.'
'And the only reason I am accepting an anonymous appointment is that Chang called me, yesterday, and told me that someone wanted to talk to me, and that I should take this meeting... Chang has never made such a mysterious request of me, and that is why I am doing this... Still, whoever it is will be here any minute...'
Less than a minute later, there was a gently knock at her door.
Zoe looked up from her computer monitor, and towards the door, in front of her, as she calmly said, in english, “Come in.”
As the door opened inward, Zoe watched a fair skin man of average height, walked inside, and gently closed the door behind him.
While the man turned back to look at Zoe, Zoe noted the man was on the slender side, though he was in good physical shape. He had fair skin, with short blond well groom hair, and a clean shaven face. Also, in age, he appeared to be in his late teens, to early twenties. The man wore a blue chinese shirt, a black pair of cloth pants, and some simple black slippers.
Zoe thought, 'There is something about his face. But, I cannot place his face, right now.'
The man then calmly asked, in clean spoken english, “May I please sit down?”
Zoe replied, “You may.”
Zoe then watched as the man calmly walked up to her desk, and sit down in the chair to her right.
A few seconds after Zoe saw the man get comfortable, she asked, “What is this about?”
The man answered, “I wanted to meet you, Ms Washburne.”
Zoe corrected, in a tactful manner, “That is Mrs Washburne.”
The man calmly said, “Yes. I heard you were a widow.”
Zoe warned the man, in a slightly low tone of voice, “I do not like the direction this conversation is heading. Especially from someone that I do not know taking such an interest in my personal life.”
The man said, in a calm tone of voice, “Not to worry, Chang... Lee, and River, will vouch for me.”
Zoe demanded, in an even tone of voice, “Even so. First, I need to know who you are?”
The man commented, in a coy tone of voice, “You know what my favorite season is?”
Zoe flatly asked, “What?”
The man stated, “Autumn. When the leafs on the trees turn from green to gorgeous shades of yellow, orange and red. And when the breeze blows against the trees, the leafs detach and dance in the wind.”
Zoe remained silent, something in the back of her mind recognized the pattern in which the man was speaking.
The man noticed that Zoe had change her posture, and facial expression to one of interest.
The man continued, “But, some people forget that even when a leaf hits the ground, a wind can still pick it up and carry again into the air.”
Zoe eyes widened, as realization began to dawn on her.
The man went onto say, “This is also the season that is most associated with celebrations during the night, that use bonfires. And bonfires at night are great to dance round. I find such events, both during and after, to be very enjoyable.”
Zoe body stiffened, as she remained silent.
The man noted the such change of in body language, as he got up, and casually walked around Zoe's desk, to her right.
When the man reached Zoe, Zoe turned in her swivel chair, to face the man, while she looked up at him.
The man then leaned down to where his and Zoe's face were only inches apart.
Zoe softly asked, “Wash?”
Wash smiled, as he happily said, “Hi dear. It is good to see you to.”
Wash then leaned a little further, as he deeply kiss Zoe.
Zoe recognized the kiss. And she immediately returned the kiss, and they remained kissing for several seconds.
As they broke their kiss, Wash leaned back up, and took a few steps back, away from Zoe.
Zoe looked at Wash, as she smiled. She complimented, “Wow. You are still a good kisser.”
Wash casually said, “Thanks. So, want to get married?... I don't have a ring on me. But, I am sure we will come up with one soon enough.'
Zoe let out a laugh, as she thought, 'Typical, Wash. Fly by the seat of his pants, in so many ways. Still...' She happily responded, “Yes. Like you couldn't ask quick enough.”
Wash admitted, “I was still trying to figure out how I was going to work my way to the question when I knocked on the door.”
Zoe placed the palm of her right hand in her face, as she giggled, and shook her head, for a few seconds. She then lowed her right hand to her lap, as she looked up at Wash. She smiled, as she said, with a bit of humor in her voice, “That figures. So, this is what you look like now. And I can see the family resemblance to River and Lee”
Wash said questioned, “Yes. So, what do you think?”
Zoe stated, “You look nice. The hair is nicely dyed, as well.”
Wash commented, “Yes. It is dyed. I like blond. Though, I now have to it dye that color.”
Zoe said, “While I could careless what color you have your hair as. I do wonder, what is your natural color, now?”
Wash answered, “Black. The same as Book's hair color, now.”
Zoe said, “Okay. And I can get use to it the new look. I am just happy that you are back, and you remember me.”
Wash responded, “I agree. And to be fair. You need to know that I also inherited River and Lee's abilities.”
Zoe questioned, “Such as?”
Wash replied, “I hope you don't mind being around someone that can read thoughts and sense the future.”
Zoe teased, “Nope. It just means that I expect you to be better in anticipating my needs in bed.”
Wash chuckled a little. He then said, “That is fine with me. And...”
Zoe asked, in a careful manner, “What?”
Wash sneezed and instantly changed into a pretty woman that was the same age as her male form, whom looked like Wash's sister. She sneezed again, and changed back into man.
Wash then said, “I also got the same gender bending abilities as you. And I can sneeze on command, like you. Also, Uncle Simon. Well, uncle to me, now. Said my longevity abilities kicked in a few month ago.”
Zoe casually responded, “Sounds great. And it figures Simon would know what is going on.”
Wash coyly replied, “He knows how to keep a secret.”
Zoe said, “Don't we all... Care to tell me what you have been up to.”
Wash teased, “Later. When we need a good laugh. By the way, Book says, hi. And we are all doing fine.”
Zoe replied, “That is nice...” She then gave Wash a lecherous smile, as she continued, “And we are going to have so much fun on our honeymoon.”
Wash returned the smile, as he offered, “That we are. And I already have all my documents in order, for this world. Also, I know you are a bit of a tomboy. If you want, I will wear the wedding dress for the ceremony.”
Zoe responded, “Nah. You are still so sweet. But, I am still going to be the bride.”
Wash replied, “Fine. But, I am paying for the wedding.”
Zoe inquired, “Not to sound like a gold digger... Honestly, I am already pretty rich... But, how much are you worth?”
Wash answered, “Parents gave me enough to be set us up for life. But, I was thinking of having a job to kill time. Do you got a spot on your security team?”
Zoe replied, in a casual tone of voice, “I am sure I can convince Mal to make a spot for you. But, what training background do you have?”
Wash said, “Well, I know how to drive a car and truck. I still remember how to fly a starship. But, I need some experience before I really get back into the cockpit on my own. Though, when it comes to fighting skills. Between mom, dad, and Chang, I have been trained from everything to hand to hand combat, to melee weapons, to firearms. I especially found I like training with swords, and semi-automatic pistols.”
Zoe stated, “Works for me. You're hired. And the Mal will just have to live with you working for us.”
Wash happily replied, “Thanks.”
Zoe asked, “So, does Book have the same abilities as you?”
Wash said, “Yes. It seems anyone that a child of someone with our abilities inherits those abilities. From precognition, to telepathy, gender bending, and other fun abilities. And our forms only lock, when female, when that person is pregnant. Such, as my mother, when she was pregnant with us. Though, I believe gain that ability by being pregnant with us.”
Zoe stated, “I suspected that was the case with Lee, after I have heard your parents, and Chang talk a few times...” She then smiled at Wash as she continued, “Not that I care about it. Now, that you are here.”
Wash returned Zoe's smile, as he commented, “That is a good way to look at it. And I am here to stay.”
Zoe maintained her smile, as she questioned, “That is what I was hoping you would say. So, how much do you remember of us being together?”
Wash answered, “Most of it. There are a few gaps. Including, mercifully, my death. But, I am sure you can fill in the gaps.”
Zoe said, “I am more than happy to try. And the others will be happy you are here, as well.”
Wash replied, “I thought as much. And we will visit Book, sometime.”
Zoe responded, “Sure. But, why didn't he come visit us, with you?”
Wash answered, “Well, he is acting crown prince of a kingdom. He is quite busy. He enjoys his job. And he is quite good at it. Our parents taught us well. He remembers everything. And he considers it fairly easy to rule a country, and for his rule to be an extension of his old shepherd job. But, he doesn't get to preachy about his job. And he is very fair with everyone.”
Zoe smile widened slightly, as she realized something about what Wash said. She commented, “Cool. That means I am marrying a prince.”
Wash stated, “Yes. I am now a prince. Though, I have no intention of ruling that kingdom. While Book does. Also, I have never cared for the royal traditions, and manners, one has to perform in a royal court.”
Zoe commented, “Of course. You have always had a laid back personality. That is one of the things I like about you. And that trait suits you well.”
Wash teased, “Thank you. So, do you want to go by the title of lady, duchess, baroness, or princess?”
Zoe replied, “I will have to think on that one.”
Wash said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Take your time. There is no rush.”
Zoe inquired, “Hmm... So, what do you want to do tonight?”
Wash joked, “Besides the obvious.”
Both of them chuckled, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Zoe commented, “It is going to be fun having you around. When you died, it was not only like ripping out my heart, but the hearts of the whole crew.”
Wash responded, “I know, sweetheart. But, I am back now. And I realize we will have to have a party, over my return.”
Zoe said, “Of course. Likely Inara and Kaylee will be the ones putting that together.”
Wash deadpanned, “I hope the law enforcement are not called in, like the last party I attended, that those two put together.”
Zoe let out a laugh. She then said, “Relax. The local law enforcement has an understanding with Chang. As long as we don't do anything too crazy, and out in the open, we are fine.”
Wash replied, “I heard as much. And that is good.”
Zoe got up from her seat. As she stood, facing Wash, she said, “I might as well take you to see the captain, and the others. They will be happy to see you.”
Wash commented, “I know. I just wish I had a camera, to capture the looks on their faces. Both when we meet them, along with when you introduce me, and they realize who I am.”
Zoe stated, “I can do better, honey. We will just get recordings from the security videos.”
Wash grinned at Zoe, as he complimented, “I love the way you think, Zoe.”
Zoe returned Wash's grin, as she said, “Thanks... Now, come on, Wash. I will show you around. This is a very interesting city, on a very interesting world.”
Zoe then walked around Wash, and towards the door to her office.
Wash turned to face Zoe, as he replied, “I look forward to it.” He then follow right behind her.
When Zoe reached the door, Zoe opened it, and walked through the doorway, and into the hallway.
Wash followed right behind her, as he gently closed the door behind himself.
Zoe and Wash then made their way down a hallway, to meet Mal, Jayne, and the their other friends, whom were located in various parts of the casino.
(_)
Wash's reunion with his friends went well. Along with this, Chang, Mal, and his parents were all fine with his new job, as part of the Daiyu Palace Casino security staff. With Wash working right along side with Zoe.
As they made their wedding planed, Zoe and Wash had discussion, to decide on what last name they would use. They decided to go with the last name, Washbourne. As a sign of respect for the relationship they had together, before Wash had died, and been reincarnated in his current life.
Though, even Zoe and Wash admitted was kind of humorous, given that Wash's birth name was now, Wash Tam. Making him, Wash Tam Washbourne.
But, since the name was funny in a good way, no one said anything about it.
Less than a week after their reunion, Zoe and Wash got remarried.
Zoe and Wash barely had time to wait to have their respective bachelorette and bachelor parties, before their wedding. Though, given a number of their guest would be gender benders. They were not sure who would be invited to which part. And who would attend both parties.
Though, both parties were fun.
And Wash was able to come up with a some normal gold rings, for both him, and Zoe, for the wedding.
The wedding itself was a simple, wonderful event, that was held at a local church that Pedro had recommended to Lee, when she had talked to the police chief, over the event. Pedro even sent a letter congratulating Zoe and Wash on their wedding, along with his providing security for the event.
It was a private, invitation only event. Though, those the casino, including Chang and Wash' parents, along with Revy's group, Lowe's family, and friends, were invited.
Also, except for Book, whom was Wash's best man, Wash decided not to invite any of his other siblings to the wedding. Given that if he did invite them, it would raise way too many questions for both his family members, that lived in the feudal reality, and for his friends that lived in Lee's home reality.
Along with this, Book showed up a day before the wedding, and his reunion with his friends, at the casino, went well.
In addition, Wash and Zoe had the foresight to make video-audio recordings, and have photos taken of their wedding, for posterity, and to personally watch, and look at, later.
After the wedding, and reception was over, Zoe and Wash left on their honeymoon.
A few hours later, Book said his goodbyes to his friends, and he returned to the feudal reality. Book brought with him one of the copies of Zoe and Wash's wedding, that had just been copied, to show the event to his and Wash's family, in the feudal reality.
(_)
Reality, Akira's home reality. Date, just over thirty years after Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, began their adventure through the multiverse. And for those that attended, a week after Lee's punishment ended. With the women in question having learned that Lee was pregnant with twins. And they left Lagoon Island. Location, in a government building, somewhere in the United States. Time, mid-morning, on a sunny day.
It was the middle of the morning, inside a multistory building.
Inside the building, two young, fit, beautiful women had just exited an elevator, and they walk into the fifth floor of the building they were inside of. Both of the women were wearing professional business dresses. One woman had dark blue hair. The other woman had purple hair.
The blue haired woman was to the right of the purple haired woman.
The women then walked down the hallway. When the reached an intersection in the hallway, turned turned to their left, and walked down another hallway. They continued down the hallway, until the hallway dead ended to a closed office door.
In front of the closed door was a reception desk, was secretary, sitting in a chair, behind the desk.
The secretary took one look at them. She then turned to an intercom. She pressed a button. She then said, in english, “Sir. Your ten o'clock appointment is here.”
A second later, a male voice, of the intercom, calmly spoke, in english, “Let them in.”
The secretary then press a button under her desk, that unlocked the office door. She then turned to the women, as she said, “You may go in now.”
The two women walked passed her. As they reached the door, the purple haired woman turned the knob, and pushed opened the door for the blue haired woman. As soon as the blue haired woman walked through the threshold of the door, the purple haired woman followed behind.
As second later, the purple haired woman gently pushed the door closed, behind her.
As the two women walked further into the office, they saw a blond haired, fair skin man, with a mustache, in a green suit, sitting in a comfortable, cushioned chair, behind a dark oak wood desk.
While, room itself had no windows, the room was large, and well furnished. Giving the room, both a lived in, and professional feel to it. Among the pictures on the walls, along with the furniture, shelves, and filing cabinets, place by the walls, there were two cushion office chairs in front of the desk.
The man looked up at the two women, as he greeted them, with a smile, “Ah, good morning Ms Stingray and Ms Madigan. And you are both right on time. As expected from professionals of your caliber. Please, have a seat. I trust that your trip here was uneventful?”
Sylia Stingray and Kate Madigan each took a seat in front of the man.
Sylia sat in the chair to the man's right, and Kate sat in the chair to the man's left.
The two women turned their attention to the man, Sylia calmly said, in english, “It was uneventful, Gomez.”
Gomez replied, “Good. I hear your children will so be graduating high school.”
Sylia said, “Yes. It is fortunate that Nene, Linna, and Mackie were able to take the reigns of raising all our children. Though, the rest of us have done our parts, as well.”
Gomez responded, “Glad to hear it. So, how was your mission?”
Kate commented, in english, “Interesting. Unfortunately, we were not able to capture the writer. There were too many people involved for us to do so. They would have followed us, if we tried. But, we did gain much insight from the information you paid us to retrieve.”
Sylia pulled out a small data disc from a hidden pocket in her shirt. The disc was enclosed in a small clear plastic case. Sylia then leaned forward, and placed the data disc on desk.
Sylia leaned back in her chair, as she stated, “This is a basic update on the information we have on those of Lagoon island, and their allies. Along with Chang, and his allies. A basic map of Lagoon island, the island of Plata Podrido, Chang's casino, and the Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Kate asked, “I still wonder who would name their hotel, the Devil's Hotel and Resort?”
Gomez commented, in a casual tone of voice, “The multiverse is full of fun little mysteries that we may never find the answers too.”
Sylia said, “Quite true. Also, included are updated threat assessments on all individuals of interest. And a few we feel you may need to take an interest. Of those you may have overlooked.”
Gomez looked down at the disc. He then looked back up at the women, as complimented, “Good job. So, do you think we can use them for our plan?”
Sylia answered, “I believe so. But, it was have to be done delicately. And it will take time.”
Gomez inquired, “Of course. Besides the usual, is there anything you wish to mention about your mission?”
Sylia sighed. She then said, “We found the writer to be a disappointment. In all honesty, Lee, the alias, the writer goes by, genuinely did not realize what he, or now she, was doing, at the time when she wrote about us. And we all feel much better, given the Lagoon family did provide a measure of revenge for us. I think Leon got the most from our collective revenge on, Lee.”
Gomez commented, “So, Lee is now a woman? I heard a few rumors, from other sources. But, I was not sure.”
Sylia stated, “Yes. At the moment, Lee is now a woman, and a pregnant woman, at that. She is having twins. She is now in the same boat as us. And as such, I see no reason to further go after her.”
Gomez responded, “In the long run, Lee is of no importance to us. He... Err she was merely the catalyst to all this. Nothing more. How did the other important parts of your mission go? How did the equipment fair in the field testing?”
Sylia said, “The telepathic blockers work wonderfully. It was clear that River could not read our minds. The upgraded reality jumping and tracking equipment also worked well. We now even have more fluid short range teleportation with our equipment. The only reason we did not use it to directly capture Lee was that we did not want to allow the others to know what we have access too. The hardsuit and motoslave upgrades are also working with no problems. All in all, I would say that it was a successful mission.”
Gomez commented, “Wonderful. I will be paying your group the usual fee, in the usual manner. As mercenaries, you eight have always conducted yourselves professionally. And I am glad to see that even when faced with dealing with deeply personal issues, during this mission, that you were able to come through, without any serious problems.”
Kate mentioned, “There still is the matter of revenge on the others for what they have done to us. We have not forgotten what Chang, Revy, and the others did to us.” She turned to Sylia. Sylia looked over at Kate, as Kate continued, “The deals Chang and Rock struck with us feel like hollow victories.”
Sylia calmly pointed out, with a hint of sadness and disappointment in her tone of voice, from agreeing with Kate, “Hollow victories are still victories.”
Sylia and Kate turned back to look at Gomez.
Gomez could tell from Sylia's tone, that even given her normally calm personality, there was a deep undertone of anger that slightly broke though in her voice, as she continued, “Still, Kate is correct. They destroyed our home city. They kidnapped us. Brainwashed us. Changed my young brother into a woman, along with Daley, Leon, and countless others. They impregnated us for breeding projects. And they twisted my own works for their own evil ends. I use to believe that Genom could not be overshadowed in corrupting my father's works. I was wrong.”
Sylia's voice became slightly harder, as she went onto say, “And the only reason I don't go back on the deals I agreed to, is that doing so would in jeopardize the other projects we have been working on.”
Gomez said in a calm, though strong manner, “It is good that you realize this, Sylia... And sometimes ladies, you have to let go, and move on... Also, if you wish to remain in my employment, you will not make a move against them. I do not want risk them learning what part they have in my own plans.”
Gomez continued, in a more amused tone of voice, “As a great man once said. Revenge, as they say, is a sucker's game... Later today, I will be having lunch with that man, and his equally savvy wife. The funding, technology, and intellectual insights he and his wife offer my organization have been incalculable.”
In response, Sylia shrugged her shoulders in resignation.
Kate conceded, “You may have a point. David and Fox Xanatos are truly unique. If I wasn't enjoying my job with Sylia and the Knight Sabers, I would take up David's offer to work for him at Xanatos Enterprises.”
Sylia said, “Yes. And David's technology in robots and powerarmor are almost on par with my own. Though, we should have never introduced Jhiaxus to Anton Sevarius.”
Gomez admitted, “Yes. That was a colossal mistake. But fortunately, we reigned both of them in before their experiments got out of hand. And I thought it was a bit of genius, that when I first decided to meet the Xanatos family, to show my good faith, I used a purification artifact I have to break the power limiting spell, that was placed on Puck, by Oberon. Thus, allowing Puck to have full use of his powers, at his discretion.”
“And the grin David made when he found out that the, world as myth, theory was real, was priceless. Most people, in his position, when faced with such revelations will take a few moments to reflect on the importance of their situation. David just dove right in. Fox and Owen. Or should I say, Puck? Followed soon after. Also their son, Alex, has had fun as well.”
“Though, it has been a challenge in keeping the other players of that reality in the dark about reality travel, and what the Xanatos family has really been doing, when they disappear, from time to time.”
Sylia stated, “Still, as you pointed out. Given the rewards. So far. It is a challenge worth undertaking.”
Gomez responded, “Yes. Now, it is time we step up our plans. Except for Professor Durban and his crew, we have not had any real setbacks. And in truth, he and his crew have only been a mere a thorn in our sides. As David pointed out, Durban and his crew keep up on our toes. Which is a good thing.”
Kate stated, “Very true. An organization that has become a bloated bureaucracy is an organization living on borrowed time. I have come to realize this was the case with Genom.”
Gomez pointed out, “Ah, but we learn from our mistakes.”
Kate happily replied, “Exactly.”
Gomez kindly invited, “So, would you both care to join us for lunch, this afternoon? You both seem to get along well with Fox and David.”
Kate shrugged, as she responded, “I have no plans this afternoon.”
Sylia answered, “Neither do I. And those two are such good company.”
Gomez happily said, “Excellent. Now, down to business, on our plans...”
The three adults then continued their discussion on their plans for the next hour, until Gomez had another appointment with someone else.
The three of them them met up an hour later, at noon, to have a pleasant lunch with David and Fox Xanatos.
(_)
Reality, Lee's home reality. Time, a week after Zoe and Wash's wedding. A few days after the newlyweds returned to Daiyu Palace Casino, and resumed their jobs as part of the casino security. Location, the first floor of Daiyu Place Casino. Time, the middle of the afternoon
It was the middle of the afternoon, and Simon was having his much deserved break, with his girlfriend, Kaylee. Both of them were enjoying a nice massage, next to each other, in a room, in the spa section of the casino.
Unfortunately, given the rules of the resort, when it came to having a massage, to prevent fraternization, as the massage is talking place, only those customers of the same gender room could share the same room.
So, currently Simon was in his female form. And Simon didn't mind, as long as she could still spent time with Kaylee.
Both Kaylee and Simon laid on the stomachs, on top of matted massage tables, that were side by side. With Simon to Kaylee's left side. They each had a towel, they were laying on, between their bodies and the mats of the table.
And they were both nude.
Still, Inara had sent her two best female masseuses to give them their full body rubdowns. The two women appeared to be two chinese women, in their mid-twenties. They were both beautiful, and fit. Though, they were also wearing loose, green cloth, pants and shirts. And the two women stood on the green tiled floor, with their bare feet.
The two masseuses were personally trained by Inara in their chosen craft.
In addition, the room was draped in green cloth, with a small, artificial waterfall located a back left corner of the room, from the front. The trickling of the small, mechanical pimp waterfall was a very relaxing, though low tone, noise. With the water being recycled back into the top of the waterfall.
The only light in the room was from a small lamp, on a small table, in the right corner of the room, from the front, opposite to the artificial waterfall. The lamp produces cover, defused yellow light, from a single light blub. This gave the masseuses plenty of light to work with
On a table, on the back wall, between the lamp and the waterfall, were bottle of rubbing oil that the messieurs used to lather their hands, and the bodies of the customers those they massaged
Simon and Kaylee were laying at parallel angle, that allow them to turn their heads to see each other.
While, the romantic couple had a pleasant on and off again conversation, for the most part, they remained silent during their hour long massage.
The couple enjoy their women rubbing their bodies, along with the sound of the water trickling from the small artificial waterfall.
Then, they, and the two female masseuses with them, heard the door in front of them, that lead into another part of the resort section of the casino, open.
The two women rubbing Kaylee and Simon's bodies, immediately stopped, as they looked over at the door.
Simon and Kaylee also, leaned up, and turned their head to see to see whom it was.
All four women saw that it was River, in one of her usual articles of clothing.
River smiled at the women, as she casually walked over to them.
A few seconds later, River came to a stop a few feet in front of Simon and Kaylee. With River being in a diagonal direction to Simon and Kaylee. To the two women's right, front direction. So, the two women, would not have to continue to lean up, and they laying down, while during their heads, towards River, in a comfortable direction.
Simon and Kaylee continued look at River, as they laid their heads back down on their mats.
They saw River turn to the two women standing over them, as she requested, in polite manner, “Ladies. If you don't mind. I need to speak to these two women in private.”
The two masseuses silently walked passed River. As they left the room, they gently closed the door behind them.
River as soon as the door was closed, looked down at Kaylee and Simon.
Simon stated, in her female voice, “You did not need to disturb us. This could have waited until we were finished.”
Kaylee dispassionately commented, “Yea. We were having so such fun.”
River said, “I just wanted to talk to you, real quick. While, Lee is busy. Besides, I read their thoughts. They were about to finish, anyway.”
Simon calmly inquired, with a bit of disappointment in her tone of voice, “Fine. What did you need to speak to us about?”
Kaylee said, “That is interesting. Considering, you, Lee, and Chang, are pretty much inseparable.”
River retorted, in a casual tone of voice, “You are one to talk.”
Kaylee shrugged in response.
Simon questioned, “So, where is Lee right now? Is she with Chang?”
River answered, “No. Actually, she playing at a piano, in the lounge section of the gaming area.”
Simon asked, “So, you and Chang finally found an official job for her at the casino?”
River replied, “Yes. She is the entertainment coordinator for the casino. And she is really good at it.”
Kaylee commented, “Yes. I have been to some of the parties she arranged. All of them were entertaining.”
Simon said, “That they were.”
River stated, “Yes. She can throw some of the best parties. And she likes to also perform her many musical and singing talents, as much as she likes to manage from behind the scenes. Plus, it looks good on paper. And she looks good in a black dress.”
Kaylee agreed, “You are right about that. And she has always been polite enough to not point that out.”
River commented, “Yes. Man, or woman. Lee has always been polite.”
Kaylee casually replied, “That is why we put up with her.”
Simon thought, 'So, how is the rest of our family, in the other reality, doing? It has been a while since I have had to make any doctors visits.”
River stated, “By the way. If you are wondering. Everyone in the other reality is doing fine.”
Simon thought, in a happy manner, 'Glad to hear it.'
Kaylee playfully commented, “So, when are we going to meet the rest of the family that Book hinted at?”
River hesitantly replied, “Later... When we can arrange it...”
River thought, 'I am not surprised that Book mentioned the rest of our family, to his friends here. We will just have to deal with the matter, when we figure out what to tell them. Fortunately, none those here have really asked about the matter. So, we still have time to figure out what to say. And between Chang, Lee, and I, I am sure we will come up with a good explanation, that will not sound to awkward.'
Kaylee giggled a little. She then said, “You being caught flatfooted, on anything, is something to behold... Now, what is the reason for you coming here?”
River answered, “As I am sure you know, it will be Simon's birthday next week.”
River thought, 'We at least the time we picked to celebrate it. Given time travel, and realities, using different calender dates, it is hard to keep track of such matters. So, we all just let the others know when we want to celebrate their birthdays. And it seems to have worked so far.'
River continued, “And I need to know what type of birthday party my brother here..” River grinned mischievously, as she went onto say, in a humorous tone of voice, “Or, at the moment, my sister...”
Simon and Kaylee giggled a little.
As Simon and Kaylee calmed down, River commented “Kaylee. If Simon has yet to inform you. Simon wants me to put the party for her. And I just need to know what type of party Simon here wants?”
Simon calmly answered, “Something fun. Something simple. A party that we can all enjoy.”
River said, “I believe I can arrange that.”
Simon commented, “Sister, I have complete faith in your abilities”
River replied, “Thank you.”
Kaylee mentioned, “You know we have been talking about maybe sometime having kids of our own. Also, I talked to Zoe on the matter. She told me that she and Wash are also seriously talking about having children. And with their abilities, they cannot decide which one of them is going to carry their first child.”
Simon commented, “Though, neither Wash and Zoe, nor Kaylee and I, want to have both have kids at once.”
River inquired, “That is understandable.” She thought, 'That is not for everyone.' She continued, “So, which one of you is planning to have your first kid?”
Kaylee answered, for the both of them, “Simon agreed, that I should be the one to have our first child.”
Simon said, “Yes...” She then turned her head to look at Kaylee, as Kaylee looked back at her. She continued, “I get to have the next one.”
River let out a small giggle, as Simon and Kaylee turned their attention back to her.
River complimented, “Well, I think all four of you will make good parents.”
Simon and Kaylee replied, in unison, “Thanks.”
River though, 'I might as well convince them to think about their options.' She teased, “Still, you could change you minds on having two kids at once.”
Simon flatly stated, “No thank you. Too many diaper changes for just two people to handle... I don't know how the others handle it.”
River slyly commented, “Well, having help in such matters is always good.”
Simon agreed, “Of course.” She mentally added, 'You would know.'
River let out a small giggle. She then said, in a mischievous tone of voice, “Well, I better head out of here. I am sure you both want to have some fun, in private, while you are in such relaxed states.”
Kaylee casually responded, “Nah. Inara warned us if we tried that again in here, she would bar us from using her wonderful services.”
Simon commented, “We will just grab our towels, and head over to the women's locker room, nearby, to get changed into our clothing. Then, we will head upstairs, to our apartment, and have some fun, there.”
River said, “Sounds nice.”
Kaylee and Simon each gave River a smile, as Kaylee commented, “It will be.”
River returned their grins, as she stated, “Well then, I will talk to you both later.”
Kaylee and Simon said, in unison, “Bye.”
River then turned around, and walked to the door. She opened it, walked through it, and gently closed the door behind her.
Next, River quickly ducked into another, empty room.
After which, she pulled out her reality device, from her front, right pants pocket.
River thought of the time, place, and reality, she wanted to go to, while she press the red button on the device.
She instantly being transported across the multiverse.
As she stood, she looked around her destination, at interior of the modern apartment, living room, in another reality.
The only light came through the draped windows. Showing that it was daylight outside. With their being plenty of light to see with.
Also, if River chose to strain her ears, she could hear the vehicle traffic from the nearby highway, outside, in technological modern city she was currently located at.
River then walked over to a desk in the room.
She sat in the cushioned, four legged armchair, in front of the desk.
As she adjusted the chair to face in front of the desk, she looked in front of her, at the computer monitor, tower, ergonomic keyboard, mouse, and speakers, on top desk.
River pressed the power buttons on the computer, monitor, and speakers.
Half a minute later, the computer booted up, and she was logged onto her account.
In front of the tower of the computer, River had USB memory sticks, and burned data CDs, that were in clear plastic jewel cases. River used these items to make backups of her data files. The USB memory sticks were done with hourly backups, while the data CDs were done from weekly, to monthly backups. Depending on how much work she had done.
And those were not the only back-ups she had. She also kept backups of her data files hidden in both her homes, in the kingdom she and Chang ruled, along backups in the penthouse apartment of the casino she lived in, with Chang, and Lee.
On the opposite side of the desk from the computer tower were a pair of pens, in a cup holds, a stack blank sheet of paper, and another stack of papers with handwritten notes on them.
On one of pieces of paper with handwritten notes was the title, “Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book Five: The Gambling Man.”
River used her mouse to pull up the word document program she used to type her stories on.
River began to type, on the ergonomic keyboard. Saved the file by the same english name as the title she just typed on the top line of the first page of the electronic word document. The file was saved in rich text format, with the english title being, “Simon's Birthday party.”
River continued typing out her story, on the first page of the electronic document, as she she thought, 'With time dilation, and my extreme longevity, I have all the time I need to write these stories, and live me life, with my family, and friends. With none of them realizing what I am doing here.'
'I am glad I read Lee's mind on that prank Lee pulled on Rock. Where during the time loops, Lee actually wrote a story where the Lowe siblings turned the Lagoon into a giant robot. I remember that happening first hand. And Rock later confirmed what happened. I even vaguely remember the incident on Lagoon island, first hand.'
'And Lee gave me the idea for doing this. Writing my family and friends. Including Lee and Chang, our children, and myself, a better present, and future... Still, I have to be careful not to turn myself into a, Mary Sue. Especially considering I was already bordering that with my original creator. But, I have learned and grown so much, since then.'
River suddenly stop typing, as she mentally realized something, 'Still, I wonder... Lee wrote books one through four. I wrote book five. But, the idea came from book five. I guess Lee and myself are in a, chicken and the egg, situation. Or, did someone else have a hand in this?...'
After a few seconds of mentally reflection, River happily went back to typing. She smiled, as she thought, in a wonderful emotional state, 'Oh well. It does not matter. My family and friends are in good hands now. My hands. And I believe everyone should have a happy ending. And an ending that does not end any time soon.'
River continued to typing for a while. She listened to some music she liked, from the computer speakers, as she types her stories. Along with have the occasionally nonalcoholic drinks, snacks and bathroom breaks.
When River finished typing her stories for the day, she saved her text document, and backed it up. After which, she used her reality device to return to the reality, time, and place, she had previously come from, to happily live out what she had typed, with her family and friends.
The End To A Happy Ending That Does Not End Any Time Soon.